/ 

A 



GREEK AND ENGLISH 
LEXICON '^^^'^ 



NEW TESTAMENT: 

ESPECIALLY 

ADAPTED TO THE USE OF COLLEGES AND SCHOOLS; 

BUT ALSO INTENDED AS A CONVENIENT 

MANUAL FOR STUDENTS IN DIVINITY AND THEOLOGICAL 
READERS IN GENERAL. 



BY THE REV. 



S. T. BLOOMFIELD, D.D. F.S.A. 

OF SIDNEY COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE; 
EDITOR OF THE GREEK TESTAMENT WITH ENGLISH NOTES, 




LONDON: 

PRINTED FOR 

□NGMAN, ORME, BROWN, GREEN, & LONGMANS, 

PATERNOSTER ROW. 

1840. 



L O K D O N : 
GILliERT AND RIVINGTON, PRINTERS, 

£T. John's square. 



TO THE RIGHT REVEREND 

JOHN 

LORD BISHOP OF LINCOLN, 

&C. &C. &C. 

My Lord, 

In inscribing to your Lordship a Work, I trust of 
no inconsiderable importance in Theology, I offer it both as a 
suitable tribute of respect to one of the most distinguished 
Theologians of our Church, and as a memorial of my grateful 
sense of those various acts of personal courtesy and kindness 
with which I have been favoured by your Lordship, formerly 
my most respected Diocesan ; and which, added to the friendly 
interest you have been pleased to take in my welfare, have 
impressed with sentiments of the sincerest attachment, 

My Lord, your Lordship's most obliged 

and faithful humble servant, 

S. T. BLOOMFIELD. 



'29, Claremont Square, Pentonville ; 
Jan. 220(1, 1840. 



PREFACE. 



Not less extensive than weighty is the apophthegm of the ancient 
philosopher, jjeya (iifiXwp, jjlya izaKov, And to no department 
of literature is it more applicable, than to that of Commentaries on 
ancient writers, — and, as formed thereon, the collections of Lex- 
icographers. After having, by the labours of a long series of 
years, I trust, succeeded in materially lessening the evil in ques- 
tion, as it respects the interpretation of the Greek Testament, 
I thought I could not better employ myself, than in endeavour- 
ing to extend the same service to the Lexicography thereof, by 
performing that vrhich still remained to be effected for it, in 
the construction of a work^ which, while it contained all that 
could justly be regarded as essentially requisite to the Biblical 
Student, should avoid the inconvenience arising from an em- 
barrassing superfluity of explanation or illustration. 

In tracing the progression of this branch of sacred literature 
from slender beginnings, the leading defects that present them- 
selves in the earlier Lexicons of the New Testament are, first, a 
paucity of senses ; secondly, a want of due discrimination between 
the various significations of any word ; and, thirdly, a poverty of 
illustration by examples, whether Scriptural or Classical ; — defects 
which continued to prevail until the middle of the last century, 
when improvements were first introduced by Stock, and sub- 
sequently carried forward by Schoettgen, Krebs, Spohn, and 
Parkhurst. 

To the learned and laborious Schleusner, however, was re- 
served the honour of completely accomplishing that reformation, 
which had been but partially effected by his able prede- 
cessors. Yet, as an entire departure from one extreme too 

a 3 



vi 



PREFACE. 



naturally carries with it a tendency to the opposite extreme, so 
Schleusner, while avoiding the error of confounding together the 
various senses of the same word, too often, most unwarrantably, 
multiplies those senses, not distinguishing between such as are 
inherent in the words themselves, and those which are derived 
from adjuncts, or from the context. And what is worse, his 
versions of the passages of the N. T. adduced are too often mere 
loose paraphrases^ in which the plain sense of the original is in 
a great measure diluted and explained away, not to say some- 
times perverted : a serious defect this, which neither Wahl nor 
Bretschneider attempted to remove. Moreover, though indefati- 
gable in collecting materials, he was deficient in the art of work- 
ing them up ; he wanted, too, that nice discrimination of Greek 
idiom, and those enlarged views of the language, which so emi- 
nently distinguished the great Grecians from the time of Bentley 
and Hemsterhuis downward. 

Aware of these defects, a subsequent labourer in the same field, 
Wahl, applied himself to the construction of a new Lexicon, 
which, avoiding the prolixity of his predecessor's, should supply 
what the advanced state of Greek Philology demanded. Accord- 
ingly, his Clavis Philologica presents, especially in its second 
edition, a greatly improved classification of the various senses of 
words, and a far more enlightened mode of treating on the Pre- 
positions and Particles ; besides a marked improvement in hand- 
ling all matters of syntax or construction, and discussing the 
minuter idioms and nicer proprieties of the Greek language. 
Not unfrequently, however, he carries this scientific nicety and 
exactness to the extreme of those refinements on Grecism, which 
are by no means suited to the simple and popular diction of the 
New Testament. Moreover, though professing greater concise- 
ness than Schleusner, he has himself heaped together a mass of 
matter (chiefly consisting of minute Philological and Grammatical 
details) little less bulky, more fitted to a Thesaurus of the Greek 
language, than a Clavis to a single book in it : and by thus 
occupying so much room with discussions comparatively im- 
material, he has been often obliged to exclude highly important 
features in any Lexicon ; very rarely giving more than references 
to passages of Scripture, and almost never to those of the Clas- 



PREFACE. 



Vll 



sical writers, — instead of adducing, as he ought on all occasions of 
importance, the words themselves. 

These defects were seen, and in some measure avoided, by a later 
Lexicographer, Bretschneider ; who, especially in his second 
edition, has often improved on Wahl, by still further lessening 
the number of significations, and by introducing greater exact- 
ness in the classification of senses, and more of precision and per- 
spicuity in the disposition of his matter \ He has also the great 
merit of having fully supplied that which was most wanting in 
the Lexicons of Schleusner and Wahl, by bringing forward a 
great body of valuable illustrations of the phraseology of the 
New Testament from the Septuagint and the Apocrypha, Jose- 
phus and Philo ; also from the Apocryphal and Pseudepigraphic 
writings of the Old and New Testament, and, likewise, from 
the most ancient Ecclesiastical Writers, who formed their lan- 
guage upon the model of the New Testament writers. Yet not- 
withstanding all these advantages, the Neologlan spirit, which 
pervades his work in a far greater degree than the Clavis of 
Wahl, presents a great and insuperable bar to its use, and ren- 
ders it as unfit for younger students, as it is unacceptable to 
more advanced scholars ^. 

In another and later performance, viz. the Lexicon of Dr. 
Robinson of the United States of America, a laudable endeavour 
was made to unite the advantages of the three works just men- 
tioned, and to avoid the defects respectively attaching to each. 
Having, however, already fully discussed its merits and defects 
in my preface to a London reprint of it^ with revisions, &c. 
I need only refer the reader to that publication. 

Having thus glanced at the several deficiencies in preceding 
Lexicons, which appeared to render a new one desirable, at least 
to a large class of readers, I will now proceed to state the 'plan 

^ Yet, in attempting to show liow those senses arise one out of the other, he 
often (as the late learned Editor of Parkhurst observes) ' vainly endeavours to 
reduce the fleeting and delicate senses of words to an arrangement too strictly logi- 
cal and thus sacrifices utility to the appearance of philosophical accuracy.' 

2 It cannot be denied that the Lexicons of Schleusner, Wahl, and Bret- 
schneider, are all_ as far inferior to that of Parkhurst in sound principle and 
seriousness of spirit, as theirs are superior to his in learning and talent. I trust it 
will be found that the present work does not fall short of Mr. Parkhurst's in the 
qualities which form its chief excellence. 

3 Longman & Co. 1837. 



Vlll 



PREFACE. 



on which I have acted in its formation. And here I must pre- 
mise, that, inasmuch as it appeared to me neither necessary nor 
desirable, in the present state of the Lexicography of the New 
Testament, to aim at constructing an absolutely new, and entirely 
original Lexicon, I thought it best to form my work on the basis 
of those of my learned and highly meritorious predecessors, more 
particularly Dr. Robinson's ^ ; at the same time intermixing 
and superadding a considerable proportion of original, and, I 
trust not unimportant, matter, supplied by my own extensive 
researches, and in various other respects (which will be appa- 
rent on comparison with the foregoing works) communicating to 
it that which may entitle it to be considered as at least an inde-- 
pendent^ though not entirely original, performance. My great aim 
has been to render the work, though brief '"^^ yet perspicuous, and 
sufficiently comprehensive to form a Manual of New Testament 
Lexicography. Accordingly, I have wholly abstained both from 
attempting to make it serve the purpose of a Concordance^, and 
from entering at large into the interpretation of difficult and dis- 
puted passages. For the former purpose the reader will, of 
course, consult the Concordance of Schmidt, and for the latter 
I may be permitted to refer him to the ample details to be found 
in my larger Greek Testament, to which the present work is 
especially intended to serve as a Companion, supplying that 
minute verbal explanation and illustration, which would have been 
out of place in a Commentary. 

* I have indeed been materially aided by his labours, (especially on the pre- 
positions and particles,) though not, perhaps, in a greater degree than he himself was 
by those of his predecessors, Schleusner, Wahl, and Bretschneider. 

2 In order to save space for more important purposes, I have thought it expedient' 
to follow the example of the earlier rather than the later Lexicographers, by 
excluding all proper names. As to those of places, my younger readers will find 
them treated of in my smaller edition of the Greek Testament. Those more 
advanced in their studies will find, in the third volume of Mr. Har-twell 
Houne's most valuable Introduction, a very neat compendium of whatever is 
certainly known on that subject, as well as on all matters of Biblical Antiquities, 
which I have abstained from treating on, otherwise than briefly and cursorily. 

3 In a Lexicon of the N. T., the object to be aimed at is to present, not a 
Commentary, but that which may serve as 'an instrument in the hands of the student, 
whereby he may ascertain the sense' of words and phrases in a manner partly similar 
to, but partly differing from, that by which it is sought by the aid of a Concordance ; 
so that he may be enabled to, in some measure, practically form out of the matter a 
sort of verbal Commentary for himself, without that bias which is often found in 
Expositors. As to the Lexicographer himself, though he has some means of dis- 
covering the truth, which may escape the Commentator, yet as his business is with 
words and phrases only, not sentences, much less paragraphs, he ought never arbitra- 
rily to determine the sense of a passage against the general v^jce of Expositors. 



PREFACE. 



ix 



The plan which I have pursued in forming the present work is 
as follows. The Etymology of each word is first given, where 
thoroughly ascertained, as far as respects the Greek and Latin, 
and occasionally the Hebrew, and even the Northern languages \ 
The 'primary signification is then carefully laid down, whether 
found in the New Testament or in the Classical writers (in the lat- 
ter case usually accompanied by some passage in proof, adduced 
either verbatim or by reference) ; and from thence are deduced, 
in regular order, all the other significations which have place in the 
Nerv Testament writers, but not in others, except so far as they 
may be necessary to establish the senses there found. In doing 
this, great care has been taken to discriminate betw^een the in- 
trinsic SIGNIFICATIONS of words, and those particular senses 
which they may bear through the force of adjuncts. Again, the 
various constructions of verbs, verbals, and adjectives, have been 
carefully noticed ; and the usage of the New Testament writers 
has been illustrated by a reference to the Septuagint and the 
Apocryphal writings connected with it and the New Testament ; 
as also to Josephus and Philo, and, lastly, the Greek Classical 
writers, especially those of the later Greek dialect, from the time 
of Polybius downward. 

In carrying into execution the foregoing plan, (nearly the 
same as that of Wahl and Robinson,) I have carefully avoided 
those opposite defects of prolixity and of obscure brevity, which 
have so much diminished the value of their labours ; also the 
scarcely less serious fault of introducing the words of Scripture 
and the Classical writers either too frequently, as does Schleusner, 
I or almost excluding them, as does Wahl. My great aim has 
\ been to make the words of Scripture every where duly promi- 
I nent ; and next to that, to adduce the rvords of the Septuagint, 
Apocrypha, or Classical writers, wherever necessary for proof or 
illustration ; where not, I have contented myself with references, 

1 In tracing the etymology, laying down the primary import of a word, pointing out 
the leading senses, and indicating the mode in which those various senses arose out 
of each other, very great pains have been bestowed, and much original matter will 
be found ; insomuch that in those and other respects, it is hoped the work will prove 
i| eminently serviceable even in the study of the Classical writers, as far as regards 
;i such words as occur in the N. T. ; which, indeed, comprise a large proportion of 
the most important words in the language. In such a case the Classical student 
• will rarely miss of finding something which may assist in removing his difficulties 
and facilitating his progress. 



X 



PREFACE. 



But, in a multitude of cases, where nothing more than the simple 
fact of the use of a New Testament word (perhaps a common one 
in the Greek language) by the Septuagint or Classical writers had 
to be attested, I thought a long list of references would be use- 
less, and that the words Sept., or Sept. and Class., would be 
amply sufficient. In short, in all cases utility and the con- 
venience of the reader (by bringing before him all the materials 
essential for the exercise of judgment) have been solely kept in 
view, to the utter disregard of that parade of erudition in which 
the Continental scholars so much delight themselves, who, it 
would seem, have yet to learn that, in the words of a great 
ancient writer, Nisi utile est quod facimus, vana est gloria. 

Having thus stated the nature and plan of the work which I 
now send forth to the Public, — and to the formation of which I have 
devoted the best powers of the best period of my life, — 1 have 
only to express my fervent wish and prayer, that it may, 
under the blessing of Almighty God, prove instrumental to 
furthering the great object for which I have so long laboured, 
and for which alone I desire to live, — the spread of that accurate 
knowledge of the true sense^ of the Sacred Scriptures, which is so 
essential to the promotion of sound doctrine. May the Father 
of Lights be pleased to prosper it to the diffusion of that genuine 
Christian knowledge, which, avoiding all specious but dangerous 
deviations into untrodden paths, pursues the straight and only 
safe course of simple Gospel truths even " the truth as it is in 
Jesus." 

^ ' Inspired writings are an inestimable treasure to mankind ; for so many sen- 
tences^ so many trutlis. But then the true sense of them must be known ; other- 
wise, so many sentences^ so many authorized falselioods.'' — Preface to Dr. LiyJdfoofs 
Works. ~H.encQ we may see the importance of Verbal Criticism applied to the 
Scriptures ; for, as Bishop Middleton has observed, ' it is tlie only barrier that can 
success/ idly he opposed to heresy and schism.'' 



LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS. 



absol absolute, absolutely. 

abstr abstract. 

ace, accus. . . accusative. 

act active, activeh'. 

adj. . . . . . adjective. 

adv adverb. 

al alibi. 

antitb. . . . antithesis. ^ 

aor aorist. 

Apocr. . . . Apocrypha. 

apod apodosis. 

Chald. ... Chaldee. 

Class Classics, Classical. 

cogn cognate. 

collect. . . . collectively. 

comp compare. 

comp composition. 

compar. . . . comparative. 

concr. . . . « concrete. 

conseq. . . . consequently. 

constr. . . . construction, construed. 

contr contracted. 

dat dative. 

defect defective. 

demonstr. , . demonstrative. 

dep deponent. 

dimin diminutive. 

e. g., ex. gr. . . exempli gratia. 

edd editions. 

elsewh. . , . elsewhere, 
emphat. . . . emphatically, 
equiv. to, — . equivalent to. 
esp., espec. . . especially. 

etym etymology. 

expr expressed. 

f. , fut future. 

fig figuratively. 

foil following, followed. 

fr from. 

freq. .... frequent, frequently. 

gen genitive. 

gener generally. 

gov governed, governing. 



Gr Greek. 

i. e id est. 

i. q idem quod. 

ib., ibid. . . . ibidem. 

id idem. 

imperat. . . . imperative, 
imperf. . . . imperfect, 
impers. . . . impersonal. 

impl implied. 

implic. . . . implication. 

in loc in loco. 

in v in voce. 

indec indeclinable. 

indie indicative. 

inf., infin. . . infinite, 
intens. . . . intensive, 
intrans. . . . intransitive. 

Jos Joseph us. 

fc.T.X. .... Koi TO. XoLird. 

kindr kindred. 

Lat Latin. 

lat later. 

Lexx Lexicographers. 

lit literally. 

loc. (in) ... in loco, 
met., metaph. . metaphorically, 
metath. . . . metathesis, 
meton. . . . metonymy. 

mid middle. 

N. T. . ; . . New Testament, 
neg., negat. . . negatively. 

neut neuter. 

O. T Old Testament. 

obs., obsol. . . obsolete. 

occ occurs, occurring. 

oft often. 

onomat. . . . onomatopoeia. 

opp opposed. 

opt optative. 

ordin ordinal. 

part., partic. . . participle. 

pass passive. 

perf. .... perfect. 



ABBREVIATIONS. 



periphrasis. Script Scriptural. 

person. Sept Septuagint. 

phrase, phrases. seqq sequentibns. 

physically. signif. .... signifies, signification. 

plural. simpl simply. 

pleonastically. sing singular. 

poetically. spec specially. 

possessive. sq sequente. 

preposition. subj subjunctive. 

present. subst substantive. 

preterite. superl superlative. 

primarily. symb., symbol. . symbolically. 

probably. sync syncope. 

pronoun. synecd. . . . synecdoche. 

properly. trans transitive. 

quasi dicas. text. rec. . . . textus receptus. 

reference. rmderst. . . . understood, 

reflexive. v. (in) . . . . in voce. 

saepe. ver verse. 

saepissime. wh which. 

scilicet. wr. ..... writers. 



GREEK AND ENGLISH LEXICON 

OF THE 

NEW TESTAMENT. 



ABA 

'A^apr/s, £os, o, 77, adj. (a, jSapos,) 
prop, not heavy. So Aristot. de Coelo i. 
TO u^. acofxa^ and Luc. Dial. Mort. x. 5, 
dfuLELvov a^aprj iJi/ai, ' light of body, not 
lying heavy on any one.' In N. T. met. 
Tiot burdensome, or chargeable, 2 Cor. xi. 9. 

'A/3)3a, indecl. (Chaldee,) father. Mk. 
xiv. 36. 

" A (3 V a (TO 9, ou, ?7, (a, (3u(Taro^, or 
^u0o5,) prop, an adj., bottomless; but in 
N. T. used substantively with the article 
rj, to denote ' the receptacle of the dead,' 
eiiher generalhj, as Rom. x. 7 ; (so also 
Ps. Ixxi. 20.cvii. 26.) or specially, namely 
that part of Hades (the under- world) in 
which the souls of the wicked are held in 
eternal punishment; (corresponding to the 
Classical Tartarus, alluded to in 2 Pet. 

ii. 4.) Lu. viii. 31. Rev. ix. 1. So Acta 
Thomse § 32, ri a^v(T(To<s tov Taprapov. 

'AyadoEpyEO), f. rjaay, (ayaGos & 
^pyov,) in Class, to do well, or good, act 
the part of a good man ; but in the N. T. 
to do good to others, perform beneficent 
actions, 1 Tim. vl. 18. Comp. Gal. vi. 10. 

'Ay aQoTTOLiu), f. r/o-w, (ayaOos & 
TToiEw,) I. to do good to others, either 
absol., as Mk. iii. 4. Lu. vi. 9, 35. Acts 
XIV. 17, or with acc. of person, Acts vi. 
33, and sometimes in Sept.—II. to do 
well, act virtuously, absol. 1 Pet. ii. 15, 20. 

iii. ^6, 17. 3 John 11. Class, dyadduirouu). 
Aya0o7rotta,a9,77, well-doing, act- 

mg virtuously, 1 Pet. iv. 9. 

'AyadoTroio^, ou, 6, rj, adj. in Class. 
beneficent, apt to do good; in N. T. upriqht, 
acting rightly, 1 Pet. ii. 14. 

'AyaQ6<s, 77, 6v, adj. prop, good, either 
as regards things, 'fitted for use;' or as 
regards /?er6ms, 'excelling in any quality,' 



ATA 

r or ' expert in any art.' In N. T. I. excel- 
lent, distinguished, 1) of persons. Matt, 
xix. 16. Mk. X. 17, 18. Lu. xviii. 18. 2) 
of things, Lu. x, 42. John i. 47. 2 Th. ii. 
16. — 11. good absolutely, eitherin character 
and disposition, or in quality, 1) of per- 
sons, upright, virtuous. Matt, v. 45. xii. 
35, & oft. 2) of things, either in a physical 
sense, as Matt. vii. 17, 18. Lu. viii. 8, or 
a moral, (virtuous,) Lu. viii. 15. Rom. vii. 
12. 2 Th. ii. 17. Rom. xii. 2, & oft. In 
Acts xxiii. 1, GTvuEidrjaL^ dyadrj means 
'consciousness of rectitude,' as in Wisd. 
viii,19, i^/^uX^y «y. — III. in neuter, to aya- 
dou, used substantively for dyaQoTt}^, 
Matt. xii. 34, & oft. — IV. good in refer- 
ence to its influence on others, i. e. 'bene- 
ficial,' 1) of persons, 'beneficent,' Matt. 
XX. 15. Rom. v. 7. 1 Th. iii. 6. Tit. ii. 5. 
1 Pet. ii. 18. Sept. & Class. 2) oi things 
'beneficial,' as Matt. vii. 11. Ja. i. 17, & 
oft. Here too, the neuter to dyadov is 
often used substantively in the sense bene- 
fit or blessing, — V. good, in respect to its 
exhilarating eflfect on the mind, 1 Pet. iii. 
10, riiuLepa<5 ay. Ps. xxxiv. 12. iopTct^ 
ay. Zech. viii. 19. And so Rom. x. 15, 
et al., Ta dyaOa, in the sense prosperous, 
fortunate, 

'Ay ad a)crvvr},r)9, rj, (for dyadoa-ui/j], 
in Class. dyaOoTijs, or rather xP^o"^o- 
T»]§,) I. intrinsic goodness of disposition 
and character, probity, virtue, Rom. xv. 
14. Eph. V. 9. 2 Th. i. 11.— II. considered 
in its cff*ects on others, benefi^ejice. Gal. v. 
22, and Sept. 

'Aya\\tacri§, eo3<5, v, not found in 
Class., but often occ. in Sept., for exulta- 
tion, exulting delight, felicity ; in N. T. 
gladness, Lu.i. 14,44. Acts ii. 46. Jude24. 
In Heb. i. 9, eXaiov dyaWiaVecos is a 
B 



ATA 



2 



Arr 



phrase emblematical of the highest lionoiir, 
Avith allusion to the costly oil ^vith which 
favoured guests were anointed at feasts. 

'AyaWiao), Lu. 1. 47. elsewhere 
ayaWido/iiaL, itself not found in Class,, 
but frequent in Sept., and used of joy as 
expressed in dancing and singing. In N. T. 

1) simply and absol., to e-.mlt^ rejoice 
greatly^ Lu. x. 21. Acts ii. 26, -/jyaWia- 
craTO 77 yXuia-cra iulov, i. e. ' I rejoiced in 
\vords, sang aloud.' So xaipaiv kul ay., 
emphat. to rejoice eorceeclinyhi^ Matt. v. 12. 

2) with a noun of the same signif. in 
adverbial sense, 1 Pet. i. 8, ay. x^P<? 
az/EKX., ' ye feel unutterable joy.' 3) fol- 
lowed by lua with subj., John viii. 56, 
ijyaX. %va ISy^ 'rejoiced that he should 
see,' rejoiced to, see. 4) foil, by ettl with 
dat., as Lu. i. 47 ; or eu with dat., John y. 
35, where a simple dat. might stand. 

"Ay a ^09, ou, 6, ?7, adj. coslehs^ single^ 
whether unmarried, 1 Cor. vii. 32, 34, or 
widowed, ib. ver. 8, 11. Class, only in 
former sense. 

'A y ay a /CT £ 60, f. ricria^ {dyau & 
ax^os,) prop, to feel pain^ w'h ether 
in body or mind, to he pained^ or indig- 
7iant^ L o-ener. and absol.. Matt. xxi. 15. 
xxvi. 8. Mh. X. 14. Lu. xiii. 14, & Class, 
often. — II. byimpl., io complain of foil, by 
iTEOL with gen., Matt. xx. 24. Mk. x. 41, 
and Class. 

'Ay ai/a/CTtjo-t?, €60?, J7, lit. pain ^ and 
met. indignation^ 2 Cor. vii. 11, dyavuK- 
^r]crLV icaTELpydcraTo, So Thucyd. ii. 
41. 3, dyavdKT->](nv £X-^" 

'Aya7ra6t), f. 7;cr6o, (absol. & trans.) 
to love^ regard, ivith love^ affection, or 
respect ; the kind or degree varying with 
the context, object, or circumstances. I. 
as said of persons, to regard icitlt, strong 
affection^ Lu. vii. 42. John iii. 35. Eph. 
ii. 4. Hence perf part. pass. ^jyaTDjusi/os, 
beloved^ Col. iii. 12, et al. In Eph. i. 6, 6 
77y. is a title of our Lord, like b 7]\el/ul- 
ju Eva's , put by Aquila for 6 Xpl(tt6<3. 
Sometimes (as in Matt. vi. 24. xxii. 37, & 
often) implying, as referred to superiors^ 
both dutifulness and fidelity of service, 
where any is due ; (hence ol dya-rrwui-E's 
Tov Kupioy, ' the faithful followers of the 
Lord,' Eph. vi. 24. Ja. i. 12. ii. 5. Sept. 
Ex. XX, 6. Deut. v. 10.) as referred to 
inferiors^ favour and good-will, Mk. x. 
21. Lu. vii. 5. John x. 17; or, as regards 
QWT fellow-creatures m gener., both benevo- 
lence and beneficence, ex. gr, dyairav 
TOV '7r\i](jLov^ TOU9 £)(6pou§, &c. Matt. V. 
43, seqq. xix. 19. Lu. vi. 32. al. In those 
passages (and also in 2 Cor. xii. 15, eI kul 
'TTEO. vjud? ayaTTwy, rjrTOv dyairwixaL) 
the effects of benevolence in heneftting the 
object of love are expressed. — II. as said of 
THINGS, to like^ take delight in^ Lu. xi. 43, 



ay. T^v TrpuyTOKadEopLav. John iii. 19. 
Heb. i. 9. 1 John ii. 15. Jos. Ant. viii. 1,6. 
and Class. Also, by anticipation, as 2 Tim. 
iv. 8, dyuTT. Tijv EirL^dvEiav avTov. 
Hence the phrase ovk ay., not to like or 
he content ivith any thing, as Hom. Od. <\), 
289, and often in Lucian ; and, by impl., 
to slight^ set cd nougld^ contemn. Rev. xii. 

11, OVK ay. TJjf \\/vyj]v avTivv. So Artem. 

ii. 20, lULEydXoDV ECpLi/HSVOL^ KUL TO TTpocr- 

TV)(6v OVK dyairwvTE^. — III. to love het- 
ter^ to prefer^ Matt. vi. 24. John xiii. 
23. Rom. ix. 13. 

'AyaTT??, ^7, love^ i. e. affectionate 
regard, 1. gener., as said of men ; varying, 
of course, in nature and degree with the 
object, reference, &c., and sometimes foil, 
by ELQ and an ace, or kv and a dat. of per- 
son, to mark the reference. — II. as said 
of God, or Christ, 1) sidjjectively^ or 
actively^ as denoting the love of God or 
Christ" towards Christians ; 2) ohjectively^ 
or passively^ denoting that love of which 
God, or Christ, is the ohject in the hearts 
of true Christians. — HI. by meton., (as in 
the case of the Class. spavo<s^ a pic-nic, 
fr. £po§i=£paj§,) lit. a friendly feast^ the 
effect or proof of love, in the benefit con- 
ferred on the object, Eph. i. 15. iii. 19, al. 
Hence in the plural it denotes, at Jude 

12, and 2 Pet. ii. 13, in MSS., those public 
heneficent meals^ (alluded to Acts ii.42, 46. 
vi. 2. 1 Cor. xi. 17 — 34,) provided chiefly 
by the richer members of a congregation, 
but common to all; and of which portions 
(especially the residue) ^vere sent to the 
sick or absent members. 

' Ay a7r?}'Tos, 7/, oi/, adj. dearly heloved^ 
dear. In N. T. said (when applied to 
man) only of Christians, as united with 
God, or each other, in the bonds of holy 
affection, or faith and love, Acts xv. 25, 
al. When applied to Christ, it signifies 
0/?7?/, He being called ' the only Son of 
God,' as the object of His peculiar love, 
Matt. iii. 17, et al. 

' A y y a p £ u to, f. £ ucrco, prop, to send off 
an ayyapos, or public courier ; who had 
authority to press into the service of the 
state men, horses, ships, or whatever else 
might serve to expedite his journey. Hence 
the word came to mean ' press into service, 
for a journey,' in the manner of an dyya- 
po<s. In this sense the verb is also found in 
Joseph. A. xiii. 2. 3, keXeuio /jli) dyya- 
pEv&adai Ta tcov 'lovdaitov vTroX^vyLct. 
In N. T. it simply means, fig., to compel 
any person to accompany one on a jour- 
ney, Matt. V. 41, or to compel generally, 
Matt, xx^di. 32. Mk. xv. 21. 

AyyEtoi/, oif, TO, (dimin. from ay- 
yo?,) a vessel, idensil^ Matt. xiii. 48. xxv. 
4. Sept. and Class. 
1 ' A y y £ X i a, as, 77, prop, a message, i. e. 



Arr 



3 



ATN 



neivs, brought to any one, — or, ^vhen sent 
from a superior to an inferior, the ch'/rc/iou 
or ofch'r that may be in)})lic(l tlierciii. 
In N. T. a precept^ or doctrine^ promul- 
gated in the name of any one, 1 John iii. 
11. i.5. (in kt. Edd.) Sept. Prov. xii. 25. 

"AyyfXo?, ou, o, (from ayyeWo), to 
send,) I. ahuman messenger, lit. 'one sent' 
from man to man in order to announce or 
transact any thing, Matt. xi. 10. Lu. vii. 24. 
ix. 52, et al. : sometimes to explore any 
thing, as 1 Cor. xi. 10. — II. a celestial 
messenger {angel) from God to man, and 
in Scripture a created intelligent being, 
superior to man, whether good^ as Matt, 
xxiv. 36. et ssepiss., or evil^ as Matt. xxv. 
41. Rom. viii. 38, et al. 

'Ay £, prop, imperat. of ayw, but, in use, 
a particle of exhortation or incitement. 
Ja. iv. 13. V. 1. 

AygA.1], 77, a Z^erc? of beasts, used 
in N. T. only of swine, Matt. viii. 30, et al. 

'Ay£i;£a\oyT]Tos, ou, o, 37, adj. (a, 
y£i/£a\oyfc6o) ivithotit genealogy^ wJiose de- 
scent is u7iknoiim^ Heb. vii. 3, said of Melchi- 
sedec, as being a priest not by right of sacer- 
dotal descent, but by the grace of God. 

' Ay Euri 9, £09, 6, 77, adj. (a, ysyo?,) prop. 
without ancestors^ (at least traceable ones,) 
and, by implication, ignoble^ as opposed to 
£uy£i/77§, 1 Cor. i. 28. Plut. Pericl. 24. 

'Ayta^oj, f. a<T6t), (ayto?, wh. see,) 
a term peculiar to Sept. and N. T., and 
meaning gener. to render dyiov^ I. to 
MAKE CLEAN, 1) prop, to cleausc^ Heb. 
ix. 13. 2) metaph., to render clean, in a 
moral sense, to sanctify, Rom. xv. 16. 

1 Cor. vi. 11. Eph. v. 26, et al. Hence 
vyLaa-meuoL, as denoting 'those that are 
sanctified,' true Christians, Acts xx. 32. 
xxvi. 18. In 1 Cor. vii. 14, rjyiacrTai 
means, ' is made clean, or sanctified,' is 
regarded as one of the Christian commu- 
nity. — II. to CONSECRATE, sct apart from 
a common to a sacred use ; such being, in 
the Jewish ritual, one great object of the 

. purifications; used, 1) of things, to sanc- 
tify. Matt, xxiii. 17, 19. 2 Tim. ii. 21. 2) 
of persons who are set apart by God, and 
sent by him to perform his will,*John x. 36. 
xvii. 17, et al. — III. ' to regard as holy,' to 
HALLOW, Matt. vi. 9. Lu. xi. 2. 1 Pet. ii'i. 15. 

'Ay ta(r,aos, ov, o, prop, consecration, or 
the being set apart from a common to a 
sacred use ; but in N. T. met. sanctifica- 
tion, purity of heart and life, holiness, 
Rom. yi. 19, 22. 1 Th. iv. 3, 4, 7. At 

2 Th. ii. 13, kv ayiacrfiM IivEviJiaTo<s, the 
sense is, ' sanctification produced by the 
Spirit,' 1 Pet. i. 2. 1 Cor. i. 30, meton. 

' ^ cause or author of this sanctification.' 

*Ay to s, ia, lov, adj. pure, or clean, 
' whether morally or ceremonially, I. prop. 



said of persons, perfect, without blemish, 
Rom. xii. 1. 1) mat. morally pure, blame- 
less, holy, Mk.vi.20. Rom. vii. 12. 1 Cor. 
vii. 34. esp. as said of those wlio are puri- 
fied and sanctified by the influences of the 
Holy S])irit; and as this is assumed of 
Christian professors, hence by oi ayioi are 
denoted Christians, Acts ix. 13, & oft. — II. 
CONSECRATED, as said of places set apart 
from a common to a sacred use, used both 
of things, (as temples and cities,) and of 
persons, as priests or prophets, angels, 
apostles, &c. Actsvi. 13, & oft. Hence to 
ay LOV of the Temple of Jerusalem. Some- 
times, however, it denotes only the Sanc- 
tuary of the Temple, whether terrestrial, or 
spiritual and mystical. — III. hallowed, 
holy, as said either of God, John xvii. 11. 
Rev. iv. 8. vi. 10, or the Holy Spirit, as 
Matt. i. 18, & oft. 

AytoTtjs, f]To<5, 77, prop, corporeal 
purity. In N. T. met. purity of heart 
and life, holiness, Heb. xii. 10. 

'Ay t WO-UI/7J, 7^9, 77, (for common 
ayiorrvvri,) prop, same as dyioT7j9, but in 
N. T. used metaph., denoting, I. sanctity, 
virtue, 2 Cor. vii. 1. 1 Th. iii. 13.— II. 
majesty, Rom. i. 4. 

Ay /c a\77, 7]9, 77, (from the old word 
ayKo<s, whence ay/cuA.09, bent or curved,) 
the arm, as bent in the act of receiving 
and embracing any thing, Lu. ii. 28. 

" Ay K LOT n-p 01/, ov, ^6, a fish-hook. Matt, 
xvii. 27. Sept. and Class. 

" Ay KV pa, as, 77, an anchor. Acts xxvii. 
29. In Heb. vi. 19 said met. of that evan- 
gelical hope, which, ' amid all the waves 
and storms of this troublesome world,' pre- 
serves believers steady and conducts them 
safely. Met. in Eurip. Hec. 80. Hel. 284. 

"Ay va<po<5, ov, 6, 77, adj. (a, yvacpsvs, 
a fuUev,) u?icarded, nndrest by a /'idler, and 
hence, by impl.?2m, Matt. ix. 16. Mk.ii.21. 

' Ay v£ La, a9, 77, prop, pureness of body, 
but mostly, met. jownVy of heart, ( so Phocyl. 
215, dyvsLt] i//ux7^9,) and life and con- 
versation. Soph. (Ed. T. 863, svo-eTrTov 
ayv&iav Xoywv Kai 'ipyiov, esp. used of 
chastity, 1 Tim. iv. 12. v. 2. Jos. and Class. 

Ayi/t^w, f. iVw, I. prop, to purify or 
lustrate, externally and ceremonialh ,*John 
xi. 55, where see my Note. — II. mid. 
dyviX^ofxai, perf. pass. rtyvLo-fxai, aor. 1. 
vyviadnv, agere castimoniam, 'to live like 
one under a vow of Nazariteship,' Acts 
xxi. 24, 26. xxiv. 18. — III. met. to render 
pure, in a moral sense, to reform, Ja. 
iv. 8. 1 Pet. i. 22. 1 John iii. 3. 

A yi/ 1 0-^0 9, ov, 6, («yy/^a),) in 
Class. lustratio7i ; in N. T. religious absti- 
nence, proceeding from a vow, Acts xxi. 26. 

^ Ay voiu), f. 770-to, (a, void), to conceive,) 
absol. and trans., I. not to know ^ and 1) 
B2 



A FN 



4 



ATP 



io he ignorant of\ unacquainted witli, Acts 
xvii. 23. said of voluntary ignorance, Rom. 

1. 13, oh ^t\(x} u/^a? dyvoslv. 2 Cor. ii. 
11, ouK dyv.^ to be well assured. 2) not 
io understand or comprehend, Mk. ix. 32. 
Lu. ix. 45. Rom. ii. 4, al. 3) not to ac- 
knoidedge^ i. e. to reject^ Acts xiii. 27. xvii. 
23. 2 Cor. vi. 9. — II. to commit sin^ to do 
wrong^ originally with the idea of its being 
done ignorantly and involuntarily; though 
in N. T. this idea is not found. So Heb. 
V. 2, ToT§ ayvoovcTL. 2 Pet. ii. 12, kv oI§ 
dyvoovdL. 

'Ay V 611 jUL a, aros, to, prop, involuntary 
error ; but in N. T. sin or error gener., 
Heb. ix. 7, and sometimes in the Apo- 
cr^-pha and the later Class, writers. 

" Ay vo I a<5^ 77, prop, ignorance gene- 
rally ; but in N. T. ignorance of God and 
our duty to Him, Acts iii. 17. Eph. iv. 
18. 1 Pet. i. 14, and Class. 

A 7 5, ??, 6i/, adj. prop, joz/re, i. e. clean 
in body. Eurip. Or. 1604, et al. ; but in 
N. T. met. morally, I. pure^ i. e. holy, 
and perfect, as said of God, or Christ, Ja. 

iii. 3; or of his wisdom, Ja. iii. 17. So 
Horn. Od. X. 385, morally good, — II. sce- 
Jeris puriis^ blameless,, 2 Cor. vii. 11. Phil. 

iv. 8. I Tim. v. 22._III. chaste, 2 Cor. xi. 

2. Tit. ii. 5. I Pet. iii. 2. 
'Ayi/oxtjs, 7JT09, 77, prop, purity of 

body. In N. T. pureness of life and heart, 
sanctity, 2 Cor. vi. 6. In Class, chastity. 

A 7 1/ o) §, adv. luith pure intentions, Phil, 
i. 16. Hes. Opp, 334, ipbs.Lv lip' ddavaTOLai 
^EolaLv d, 

' Ay V CO or L a, a<3, 77. In Class, simply ig- 
norance, i, e. want of knowledge ; but in N . 
T. wilful ignorance, 1 Cor. xv. 34, dyvM- 
aiav Qeov 'iyovcn. AYisd. xiii. 1, ols TrapTju 
dyv. Oeou. 1 Pet. ii. 15. 

"Ay y too- TO 9, ou, o, 77, adj. zinhimcn. 
Acts xvii. 23, dyvwaTw Ogw, ' the Great 
Unknown Deity, for whom' all nations 
long but ineffectually seek.' Wisd. xv. 19. 
2 Mace. i. 9. ii. 7. 

A7op«, G9, 77, (a7£ipa>, to collect, con- 
voke,) Ruy public place 0/ resort for the 
people of a city, whetner a broad street, 
or a market-place, where articles were ex- 
posed for sale, and public assemblies and 
trials held, Acts xvi. 19. xvii. 17. 

A70P a ^00, f, a<Ta>, prop, to frecpcent the 
7nark€t, Herodot. ii. 35. Thucyd. vi. 51, 
where see my note ; in N. T. to 'buy in the 
market, and occurs both absol. or trans., 
sometimes followed by a genit. of price, 
or by €/c with a gen. of price, ox kv with a 
dat. of price. I. prop, to purchase, Matt, 
xiii. 44, 46. xiv. 15. Mk. vi. 37. Rev. v. 
9. — II. met. to redeem, or acquire for one- 
self by a price or ransom paid. Said in N. 
T. of those whom Christ has redeemed by 



his blood from sin and death, I Cor. vi. 
20. vii. 23. 2 Pet. ii. 1, et al. 

A 70/) at 09, ov, o, 77, adj. I. belong- 
ing to the dyopd, or Forum, Acts xix. 38, 
dyopaloL dyovrai, ' court-days are held 
[for trying causes].' So Joseph. Ant. xiv, 
10, 21, juoi kv TpaWs-CTiv dyovTL tov 
dyopalov, where I conjecture T772/ dy» 
The abbreviations for n-dv and r^v are 
. often confounded. The ellips. is supplied 
in Strabo xiii. p. 932, oian-d^ai Td<s Slol- 
Kt}(TEL^, kv al5 Td? dyopaiov^ TroLOvvTai, 
— II. dyopaToL, as said of persons who 
frequent the markets, idlers or loungers, 
Acts xvii. 5, and Xen. Hist. vi. 2, 12. 

"Ay pa, a§, 77, I. a catchi?ig of wild 
animals, by hunting or fishing; as Xen. 
Ven. i. 1, and Lu. v. 4. — II. by meton., 
' the prey, or thing caught,' Lu. v. 9, and 
Xen. Cyr. ii. 4, 19. 

A7pd/u/(xaT0 9, ou, 6, 77, adj. [a, ypdp.- 
fxa,) unlearned generally, Acts iv. 13, with 
reference to Jewish learning, that of the 
Scribes and Pharisees. Comp. John vii. 
15. Diod. S. xii. 13. 

' Ay p av\i 03, f. 770-60, (from dypav\o<s,, 
and that from dypo^ & avXi],) to abide 
(lit. tent) in the fields, both by day and 
night, Lu. ii. 8, iroLfxivE's it]crav — dypav- 
XovvTE^. Hes. Theog. v. 26, TroLimivE^ 
dypavXoi. Parthen. Erot. c. 29,- (3ovko- 

XtoS KUTa TCOV AlTVTIV, X^L/ULUTO^ T£ Kal 

^£|0ou§ TjypavXsT. 

'AypEvoo, f. Eucro), {dypa,) I. prop. 
to take prey by hunting, Xen. Anab. v. 3, 
8, Job X. 16. — II. met. to ensnare men by 
insidious questions, Mk. xii. 13. So cap- 
tare in Martial ix. 90. 

'AypikXa LO^,ov,ri->{dypios & eXaia). 
a icild olive-tree. Eq. to k6'klvo<5, and occ. 
Rom. xi. 17, 24, where it is opposed to 
KaXXiiXaio^, the cultivated and fruit- 
bearing olive, whereas the dyp. bears none. 

"Ay pio^, ta, ioy, adj. ( fr. a7|00§,) prop. 
peiiainiiig to the field,, or country, used 1. 
in Matt. 'iii. 4. Mk. i.6, of honey {\\i.iLild 
honey), or honey-dew found in hollow 
trees, the clefts of rocks, or on the leaves 
of certain kinds of trees. — II. of animals, 
ii'ild, as opposed to tame, or fierce,, as op- 
posed to mild. Hence, in Jude 13, it is 
%• applied (in the sense ' raging') to the 
waves of the sea. And so Wisd. xiv. 1, 
dypLa Kv/xara, So a great English poet 
speaks of ' the ivild leaves'' roar.' 

'A 7p6§, ov, 6, I. a field, especially of 
cultivated ground, Matt. xiii. 24, et al. 
Xen. Mem. i. 1, 8. — II. by synecd. of part 
for the whole, the cou7itry\s distinguished 
from the citv or town, Matt. vi. 28, 30. 
Mk, XV. 21.— III. in the plural, /«m.s 
villas, or hamlets, as opposed to towns,Ml"^- 
vi. 36, 56, et al. Xen. Mem. iii. 9, 11. 



ATP ; 

'Ay /o u7ri/£ CD, f. 77(ra), (aypu7ri/o?,) I. 
prop, to he sleepless, JE\. V. H. vii. 7. — II. 
to be icatchfid, Xeii.Mcin.i.1,8. — III. from 
tlie Tidjuiict, to be vigila?it. Absol. Mk. 
xiii. 33. Lu. xxi. 3G; or foil, by Eph. 
vi. 18; by uTrep, with' gen. of pers., Heb. 

xiii. 17. Luc., ciyp. Tots Kaipol^. 

pvTTv ia^ a?, prop, icakefulness, 
or watclifuliicss ; and tlience cuuvioas care, 
'2 Cor. vi. 5. xi. 27, and Class. 

"Aytu, f. a^o), or more usually a^o- 
aai, trans, or absol. , I. to lead, conduct, 
or bring; 1) prop, to lead out, bring forth, 
John xix. 4, 13; and foil, by various ad- 
juncts notnig the end of action, as ecos 
with a gen. of place, Lu. iv. 29 ; ettl with 
acc. of person or place ; uj^e absol. ; Trpos 
witli acc. of person; with acc. of place 
or thing. The verb alone is also used in 
the same sense, of adducere. Matt. xxi. 7. 
Mk. xi. 2, 7. Lu. xix. 30. John vii. 45. 
Acts V. 21, 26, 27. xix. 37, &c. ; to lead 
out, or away, deducere, either simply, Lu. 
xxiii. 32, or foil, by sis with acc. of place ; 
to lead aivay, to conduct to, Lu. iv. 1, 9. 
Acts xvii. 5, £i§ Tov orjixov. Heb. ii. 10, 
eU So^av ; from the Hebr., to bring forth, 
cause to come or arise, Acts xiii. 23, ^yaye 
Tto 'la-p. 1.toTf]pa. And so Sept. 2) 
met. to lead, induce, guide, Rom. ii. 4, sis 
p-ETavoLav ; also to incite or draiv, 1 Cor. 
xii. 2, cos dv rijEcrQE, 'just as ye happened 
to be led,' viz. to idolatry. Rom. viii. 14, 
ayEcQai livEvpiaTL 0£ou. Gal. v. 18. 2 
Tim. iii. 6, d. iTridu/uLLaL^. 2 Sam. iii. 13. — 
II. tra?is. as said of time, 1 ) to pass or spend, 
Lu. xxiv. 21, TpLTtiv vpipav ay el, ' the 
third day is now passing.' And so Class. 2) 
to celebrate, as said of certain days kept apart 
for some particular purpose. Matt. xiv. 6, 
jEVEcriiov dyop,iv(jov. Acts xix. 38, ayo- 
puLOL dy. So Esth. ix. 17, -^you iipipav 
avairava-EOi)^, 1 Mace. vii. 48. 2 Mace. i. 
9, and Class., as Plut. Symp. viii. 1, nrov 
2a)/cpdTous dyaydi/T£s yEviQXiov, — III. 
intram, or reflex., with euvtou underst., 
to go away or depart. Matt. xxvi. 46. Mk. 

xiv. 42. John xi. 16. Sometimes foil, by 
prepositions or adverbs noting the end of 
action, or the beginning of motion. So 
d'y. ei/tevOev, John xiv. 31. d'y« ft?? Mk. 
i. 38. John xi. 7; -Trpos, John xi. 15. 

'Ay coy?;, 7/s, 77, prop, the act of lead- 
ing, bringing, or guiding; hence, met., that 
of training up or educating children ; also, 
as conducive to an end or method, or the 
vieans of effecting any thing. Whence, by 
me ton. of effect for cause, a mode or man- 
ner of life, 2 Tim. iii. 10, and Jos. Ant. 
xiv, 10, 2, Trept TT/s ^lovbaiujv dywy^s. 
Also in Apocr., Phil., and Diod. Sic. 

'Aywi/, toi/os, b, prop, a place of assem- 
bly, where games were celebrated ; and 
hence the course^ or place of contest. So 



A AH 

in N. T. used metaph. to denote a course 
of life full of toil and conflict, (with allu- 
sion to the evangelical contest against the 
enen)ies of man's salvation. Comp. 1 Cor. 
ix. 24, sq.) Heb. xii. 1 : esp. in promoting 
the cause of the Gospel, 1 Tim. vi. 12, and 
sometimes with the accessary idea of afflic- 
tion and peril, Phil. i. 30. Col. ii. 1. 1 Th. 
ii. 2. Polyb. iv. 56, 4. Arrian, Ex. Al. iii. 
15, 1. Epict. Enchir. c. 48, kdv ETrr/rovou 
(irksome) Ti, r) vou, rj evSo^ov v ddo^ou, 
Trpoordy^Tai (present itself), pepvi^ao 
OTL vuif 6 dycdu, Kal I'ldi] irdpeo'Ti tci 
'OXupTTLa, 

'Aycoi/ta, as, 77, prop, contest, esp. for 
a prize. In N. T. met., anxiety, or pertur- 
bation of mind, produced by imminent 
peril, Lu. xxii. 44, ku dyuivia yEvopEvo^. 
And so the Class, writers, esp. in the phrase 
Ev dyuivia eIvul, Thucyd. vii. 71, has 
dyihvcL T?7S yvuipi]^, 

' Ay u)v lX^o pa L, f. icropai, dep. mid, 
I. and prop, to be a combatant for the prize 
in the public games, 1 Cor. ix. 25. — II, to 
contend with an adversary, 1) prop. 6c 
absol. John xviii. 36. 2) met. with the 
adjunct idea of labour and exertion in the 
cause of Christ, 1 Tim. vi. 12. — III. to 
exert oneself, strive earnestly, absol. Lu. 
xiii. 24, Col, i. 29 ; foil, by virkp with gen. 
Col. iv. 12. 

^ A^dir avo^, ov, 6, 77, adj. ivithout ex- 
pense, 1 Cor. ix. 18. Diod. Sic. i. 80. 

' AS eX(pr], tj^, 77, (d^£\(^os,) a sister, 
I. prop. Lu. x. 39. Matt. xii. 50, et al., 
or a near female relative. Matt. xiii. 56. 
Mk.vi.3. — II. fig. a sister in the Christian 
faith, a female fellow-Christian, 1 Cor. 
vii. 15. ix. 5. Ja. ii. 15, al. 

'A ^ £ \ OS, ou, o, (a for apa. & dE\(f)v?, 
womb,) I. prop, a brother, whether from 
the same father or the same mother, Lu. 

vi. 14; but sometimes a near relation, as 
Matt. xii. 46. John vii. 3. Acts i. 14. Gal. 
i. 19. — II. met. one who is closely con- 
nected with another in any kind of inti- 
macy or friendship ; as, ] ) a fellow-coun- 
tryman. Matt. v. 47. Acts iii. 22. Heb. 

vii. 5. 2) as said of disciples, Matt, xxviii. 
10. Heb. ii. 11,12. 3) a fellow-Christian, 
Acts ix. 30. xi. 29. 4) a colleague in office, 
ICor. i. 1. 2Cor. i. 1. ii. 13. 

'Ao£\^dT7]s, r]TO<s, J7, prop. brotherly 
affection. In N. T. a fraternity, as the 
Christian brotherhood, 1 Pet. ii. 17. v. 9. 

"Ao7)Xos, ov, 6, T), adj. (a, ^^Xos,) not 
manifest, I. to the sight, hidden, obscure, 
Lu. xi. 44, and Class, — II. to the ear, as 
said of sounds, indistinct, 1 Cor. xiv. 8, 
dSi]\ov (pcou^v. So a Class, writer says, 
ddijXo^ viro Tcov TrX^yujv dvdpcoTro^, 
' not to be recognized.' 

' B3 



A A H 



6 



A AY 



'A^ijXoTtj?, ijTos, 17, indistinctness^ 
uncertainty^ 1 Tim. vi, 17, and lat. Class. 

*A(57y\a)5, adv. prop. ?2o^ openly^ secret- 
ly. Thuc. i. 92. vi. 58 ; in N. t. uncer- 
tainly^ (i. e. as if to an uncertain goal,) or 
' with uncertainty of mind,' and conse- 
quently irresolutely, I Cor. ix. 26. 

'A^jj jU0i/£a), f, jjcrw, (a^»7yuaji/, wea- 
ried out, fr. a^os, satiety,) to be utterly 
depressed ivith sorrotv or anxiety, Matt, 
xxvi. 37. Mk. xiv. 33. Phil. ii. 26, and 
Sept. 

"Ai^tjs, ou, o, (a, toetj/,) prop, tchat is 
in darkness^ esp. ' the invisible abode of 
the dead,' the infernal regions. Hence 
also (particularly in the N. T. ) the under 
world^ or abode of the dead, orcus ; a vast 
subterranean rece])tacle, where the souls 
of the dead are represented as existing in 
a separate state of happiness or misery, 
until the resurrection of their bodies ; I. 
gener.. Acts ii. 27, 31. «^9u, sc. Soo/na^ 
Rev. i. 18, and personified at 1 Cor. xv. 55. 
Rev. vi. 8. XX. 13, sq. — II. spec. & met. 
to denote the lowest place^ Matt. xi. 23. 
Lu. x. 15, sojs aouu KctTa^L^aadijuaL. — 
III. by meton. of whole for part, for the 
ohyss of Hades ^ the place of future punish- 
ment, Lu. X. 15. xvi. 23. 

'A^ia/cptTos, ou, 6, 77, adj. («, ^la- 
Kpiuo}^) prop. 7iot to l)e distimjuisJied^^ Pol. 
XV. 12, 9, a. (pwvi'i ; but in N. T. either not 
open to distinction^ or doubt, unambiguous^ 
sincere^ or ' making no distinction, impar- 
tial^ Ja. iii. 17, h auood&u arocpia a. 

'AotaA.£f7rT0 5, ou, 6, 77, adj. (a, dia- 
XgiTTco), imceasing^ continual^ Rom. ix. 2, 
d. ohbvy]. 2 Tim. i. 3, d. /jLvsiai/, Marc. 
Ant. vi. 13. 

* A ^ i a X € I TT T w s, adv. prop, unceasing- 
ly. In N. T. assiduously^ Rom. i. 9. 1 Th. i. 
3. ii. 13. V. 17. 2 Mace. xv. 7. Pol. ix. 3, 8. 

'A^ia^>0opia, a§, 77, (a, ^la^Os/paj,) 
prop, uncorruptibleness. In N. T. met. 
uncorruptness., purity^ Tit. ii. 7. Dem. 323, 
d. T7';§ i/auX'Is. 

'Ao i /c £ CO, f. 7?a-a>, (a5i/co9,) I. ifo ac^ un- 
justly^ viz. 1 ) in respect to society at large., 
and the laiL\ by breaking it ; absol. Acts 
XXV. 10. 2 Cor. vii. 12. Col. lii. 25. Rev. 
xxii. 11. 2) in respect to individuals., by 
wronging or injuring them, Matt. xx. 13. 
Acts vii. 26. 1 Cor. vi. 8. 2 Cor. vii. 2, 
with two acc. Gal. iv, 12. Philem. 18. 
Pass, to be ivronged., to siiffer ivrong., Acts 
vii. 24. 2 Cor. vii. 12. Mid. to suffer one- 
self to he ivronged., 1 Cor. vi. 7. — II. by 
meton., to hurt or injure generally, Lu. x. 
19. Rev. ii. 11, et al. Sept. and Class. 

'A^i'/C77 aro^., to, (doi/cf to,) a trans- 
gression., wrong, iniquity. Acts xviii. 14. 
xxiv. 20. Rev. xviii, 5. * Sept., Jos., and 
Class. 



'A3i/ci'a, a?, 77, I. ivro7ig^ injustice., 1) 
gener. (lit. unrighteousness^) by offence 
against the laws, injustice., Lu. xviii. 6. 
Rom . ix. 14. Sept. & Class. 2 ) spec, wrong 
or injury to in divi duals, /ra7/(Z, 2 Cor. xii. 
13. Sept. Thuc. iii. 66. — 1\. fraud., deceit., 
as opposed to fair dealing or truth, Lu. 
xvi. 8, ciKOvoixo's adiKLu^, for oIk. aoiKos., 
& 9, (xafxoijva^ tT]9 doi/cms, ' riches frau- 
dulently acquired.' Ezek. xxviii. 18, Oid 
TO 7rXrido£ Toov uSlklvou (the frauds) tt/v 
innropiu's (rou, and often in tbe Sept. In 
John vii. 18, we have adiKia., as opposed to 
truth, and consequently denoting falsehood. 
— III. By Hebraism, similar to that found 
in ^i/caioo-ui/jj, as used of life and conduct, 
a^LKia takes the sense of iniquity., wicked- 
7iess., or sin in general, Lu. xiii. 27. Acts 

i. 18. Rom. i. 29. iii. 5. vi. 13. 2 Tim. 

ii. 19. 2 Pet. ii. 13. Heb. viii. 12. 1 John 
V. 17, especially such as involves neglect 
of the true God and his laws, either by 
idolatry or by worldliness, Rom. i. 18, 
where T7;i/ d\770£iai; iv aoLKia Kwriyov- 
Tts are ' those who impede God's worship 
by idolatry or worldliness ;' ii. 8. 2 Th. ii. 

10, 12. 2 Pet. ii. 15. 

"A^t Kos, ou, 6, rf, adj. (a, Oi/c)/,) I. 
unjust towards man, Lu. xviii. 11. Rom. 

iii. 5. Heb. vi. 10. — II. by Hebraism, un- 
just or disobedient to God, either by wick- 
edness. Matt. V. 45. Acts xxiv. 15. 1 Cor. 
vi. 9. 1 Pet. iii: 18. 2 Pet. ii. 9, or by un- 
belief and idolatry, 1 Cor. vi. 1. — IW. frauz 
dulent^ deceitful.^ Lu. xvi. 10, II. Sept. 
and Class. 

'A^i/cto9, adv. unjustly., undeservedly., 

1 Pet. ii. 19. Sept. and Class. 

'A^ 0.-CI/X09, ou, o, 77, adj. (a, ^oKijxo^^) 
I. unapproved., prop, as said of metals., 
rejected on trial. Sept. — II. met. of per- 
sons., reprobate or worthy of rejection, 
Rom. i. 28. 1 Cor. ix. 27. ' 2 Cor. xiii. 5. 

2 Tim. iii. 8. — III. by implic, ivorthless. 
Tit. i. 16, d^o/c£/xo9; Heb. vi. 8., good for 
nothing., yi) d^o/c. 

''A^oXos, ou, 6, 77, adj. (a, ^o'Xo?,) 
quileless; gener. & prop., said of persons, 
■pind. 01. vii. 99. Thuc. v. 18, but some- 
times of things, unadulterated; as Pollux 
On. iii. 86, dpyupiGi/ do., and so 1 Pet. 

11. 2, ya.\a d^., met. for pure doctrine. 

'A^poT7]s, 7]Tos, 77, (d^po9, matuFc, 
fully grown,) prop, fulness., as of stature, 
Hom. II. xvi. 857. In N. T. geu.fuhiess^ 
abundance, 2 Cor. viii. 20. Zosim. and 
Suid. 

'A^iffttT £*6u, f. 77(70), prop, to be unabU^ 
as said of persons : but in N. T. to be im- 
possible., as said of things which cannot 
take place. Matt. xvii. 20, oholv aovya- 
WiasL v/li'lv. Sept. in Job xiii. 2. Wisd. 
xiii. 16, With Trapd, Lu. i. 37, ouk udv- 



A AY 



7 



AIM 



vaT}'](TSL Trapn tic Oew irau prifxcL. So 
Sept. in Gen. xviii. 14. 

'A^ui'aTGS, ou, 6, adj. (a, ouvaTo?,) 
prop, unable or powerless^ I. act., cither 
in body, as Acts xiv. 8, or fig., in mind, 
as Rom. xv. 1. — II. pass, or nent., impos- 
sihle^ as said of things, advvaTOv kanrt^ 
Matt. xix. -26. Mlc. x. 27. Ln. xviii. 27, 
ct al. TO dSuv. Tov vo/uLov^ Rom. viii. 3. 
AA^ith 'fo-Tt implied, foil, by infin., Heb. 
vi. 4. 18, aSviHiTou xj/evaaadai Qeov, x. 
4. xi. 6, and Class. 

'At^to, (contr. for as'iSco^) f. acro), to 
sing, trans, a. wdiji/. Rev. v. 9. xiv. 3. 
xv^ 3, and Sept. ; with dat. of person to 
Avhose lionoiir the action is done, to cele- 
i/-afc,Eph.v.l9. Col.iii. 16. Sept. and Class. 

'A£t, adv. 1. alicays^at all times^evei\ 
continually, 2 Cor. vi'. 10.' Tit< i. 12. 1 Pet. 
iii. 15. Sept. Is. li. 13. — II. at every time, 
i. e. as circumstances require, 2 Cor. iv. 

11. Actsvii. 51, Heb. iii. 10. 2 Pet. i. 

12. Mk. XV. 8, Kad(jo<i a£i LttoUl, ''as he 
had akcays done,^ i. e. customarily. So 
Sept. Judg. xvi. 20, Alex, iroiiiaiti /caOws 
dsi, sc. £7roi)jcra. 

'Aetos, ou, 6, an eagle. Rev. iv. 7. viii. 

13. xii. 14. As to Matt. xxiv. 28, & Lu. 
xvii. 37, where the dtros is represented 
as preying on dead bodies, — since the eagle 
feeds only on fresh or living prey, some 
species of the vulture is supposed to be 
meant, as at Job xxxix. 27, namely, the 
7u7ra£T6s, vultur percnopterus, 

"A^u/xos, ou, 6, 77, adj. (a, ^u/x?j,) lui- 
leavened, I. prop, used of bread, as in the 
expressions to. uX^ufxa, (sc. Xdyava,) and 
ol aX^vfxoL, sc. dp-roL, meaning the unlea- 
vened cakes eaten at the Passover. Hence 
kopTi], or ai hfxipaL, todv dX^vfxoiv, and 
also TO. oQufxa, are put for the festival 
day or days on which the Jews were to 
eat unleavened cakes, in commemoration 
of their departure from Egypt, i, e. the 
Passover, Matt.xxvi. 17. Mk. xiv. 12. Lu. 
xxii. 1. Acts xii. 3. xx. 6. — II. met. un- 
mixed, i. e. free from fermenting matter, 
uncorrupted, 1 Cor. v. 7, 8, to a^u/xoi/, 
uncorruptedness, genuineness. 

'Aijp, dipo£, 6, prop, the air or atmo- 
sphere around the globe, or earth, as op- 
posed to the aidiip, or the pure unclouded 
upper regions. Acts xxii. 23. 1 Th. iv. 17. 
Rev. ix. 2. xvi. 17. In Eph. ii. 2, some 
explain di)p in this sense ; while others 
take it to mean darkness ; a sense found 
indeed in Homer and Hesiod, but not 
likely to be known to St. Paul. The 
phrases £ts dipa XaX^Ti/, 1 Cor. xiv. 9, 
and dipa dipeiv, 1 Cor. ix. 26, are (like 
the Latin ventis verba profundere, and ver- 
berare ictibus auras,) adagial modes of ex- 
pressing the sense to speak or act in vain. 



'Adavaaria, a?, 77, {d6dvaT09,) im- 
morlality, 1 Cor. xv. 53, sq. 1 Tim. vi. 16, 
and Class. 

'AOfc/xiTOS, ov, 6, rji adj. (a, 3'£/xitos, 
from 3-t/xi9,) I. unlaivful. Acts x. 28. 
Hdot. vii. 33. — II. nefarious, abominable, 

1 Pet. iv. 3. Apocr., Jos., and later Class. 
"A 6 €09, ov, 6, V, adj. prop, godless, 

whether by denying the existence and at- 
tributes of God, or living as if there were 
no God. In the N. T. it means estranged, 
from the knoivledge and icorship of the 
true God, Eph. ii. 12. See Spanh. on 
Julian 312, 483. 

"A Ge (7 o s, ou, o, 77, adj. (a, ^s.crfj.O'S, 
law,) latvless, and, by impL, icicked, 2 Pet. 
ii. 7. iii. 17. Apocr. and Class. 

'A 6£T£ct), f. 770-0), (a0£Tos, from a, tL- 
0?/yUi,) prop, to displace, get rid ofhj putting 
aside, as Polyb. xxxi. 18, but in use, in 
the Class, writers and the N. T., it means 
I. to make void OTvain, and thereby amizd, 
abrogate, as said of a command or direc- 
tion, Mk. vii. 9. Lu. vii. 30. 1 Cor. i. 19. 
Gal. iii. 15. — II. to set light by, despise, 
reject, Gal. ii. 21. Jude 8. Mk. vi. 26. vii. 
9. Lu. X. 16. John xii. 48. 1 Th. iv. 8. 
As to Heb. x. 28, dd. v6/j.ov Mw'va-ico^, 
and 1 Tim. v. 12, dd. Ti]v 'klcttiv, the 
sense in the former passage seems to be to 
violcde ; in the latter, to cast off,forscdie, 

'AGsTijci?, £609, 77, abrogation, annul- 
ling, Heb. vii. 18. ix. 26. Diog. Laert., 
Suid. 

'AOXew, f. 770-0), (a0/\.o9,) to contend, 
esp. be a champion in the G^'ecian games^ 

2 Tim. ii. 5. Ml. V. H. x. 1. 
"A0A.7)o-i9, £0)9, 77, prop. I. contest in 

the games ; — II. met. struggle, conflict with 
afflictions, Heb. x. 32. 

'A0L'/x£O), f. 770- o), to despond, to be 
discouraged. Col. iii. 21. Sept. and Class. 

'A6o)0 9, ou, 6,77, adj. (a, 3-0)^/, penalty,) 
I. prop, not punished ; — II. fig. innocent. 
Matt, xxvii. 4; in ver. 24, foil, by aVo 
and gen. 

A'i7£t09, ou, o, 77, adj. of or belonging 
to a goat, Heb. xi. 37, kv a. dep/maat. 

Aiy iaXd'5, ov, 6, {dyu}, to break, and 
a\9, the shore or coast of a sea, lake, &c.) 
sea-shore. Matt. xiii. 2, 48. John xxi. 4. 
Acts xxi. 5. Sept., Jos., and Class. 

'At^i09, ou, 6, adj. {dd,) always 
existing, everlasting, Rom. i. 20. Ju. 6. 

Ai6o)9, 009, 0U9, 77, I. modesty, 1 Tim, 
ii. 9. — II. veneration, Heb. xii. 28. 

ATfxa, aT09, to, blood, I. prop, and 
l)gener. Mk. v. 25, 29. Lu. viii.43,sq. xiii. 
1 ; 2) met., by which any thing is said to 
be or become blood, or as blood, from its 
dark colour. Acts ii. 19. (comp. Joel iii. 
B4 



AIM 



8 



A I 2 



3, sq.) Rev. viii. 7, sq. xi. 6. xvi. 3, sq. 

In Acts ii. 20, we have el's al/uLa^ for 6o§ 
alfxa in Rev. vi. 12. 3) as said of blood 
that has been shed, whether of victims, 
(slaughtered animals,) Heb. ix. 7. x. 4. 

xi. 28. Acts XV. 20, 29. xxi. 25, or of me?i, 
Lu. xiii. 1. John xix. 34. Rev. xiv. 20. 
xvii. 6. So of the blood of Christ shed 
on the cross, in reference to his Last Sup- 
per, Matt. xxvi. 28, et al. Also in various 
mystical senses, with reference to the spiri- 
tual union of Christians with Christ their 
Head, by imbibing his spirit, and appropri- 
ating the benefits of his death and sacri- 
fice, John vi. 53 — 58. And vice I'ersa of 
Christ with his Church, Acts xx. 28. Col. i. 
20. Eph. ii. 13; esp. b}^ his atoning blood, 
Rom. iii. 25. v. 9. Eph. i. 7. Col. i. 14. 
Heb. ix. 12, 14. x. 19. 1 Pet. i. 2. 1 John 
i. 7. Rev. i. 5. v. 9 ; and by the benefits of 
the New Covenant generally, Heb. x. 29. 

xii. 24. xiii. 20. We may here notice the 
phrase crap^ kuI alfxa, the animal human 
body, MAN, with the idea of infirmity and 
mortalitv. Matt. xvi. 17. 1 Cor. xv. 50. 
Gal. i. *16. Eph. vi. 12. Heb. ii. 14. 
Comp. Ecclus. xiv. 18 ; also alfxa ek^v- 
VEiv, 'to shed blood, to kill,' Lu. xi. 50, et 
al. and Sept. — II. spec, bloodshed, murder. 
Matt, xxiii. 30. xxvii. 6, 8,24. Acts i. 19. 
Heb. xii. 4. Rev. vi. 10, and Sept.— III. 
from Hebr., blood-guiltiness, the guilt and 
punishment of bloodshedding, Matt, xxiii. 
30. xxvii. 25. Acts v. 28. xviii. 6. xx. 26. 
Sept. Hdot. ii. 39. — IV. relationship by 
blood. Acts xvii. 26. eg kv6<s ai/xaxos, ' of 
one kindred.' And so in the Sept. and 
Jos. Ant. ii. 6, 3, kdfxku dSEX<poL kuI kol- 
vbv aiixa. In John i. 13, dl ouk alfxu- 
TUiv, 'not born of blood,' (i. e. not sons of 
God, as descended from Abraham,) the 
plur. is put for the sing., as in Eurip. Ion 
693. 

Kl }x oiT E K\v a L a, as, 77, bloodsfiedding , 
Heb. ix. 22. 

Aifxo p poioD, f. ricruo, {aXfia, poo^s,) to 
have an issue of blood. Matt. ix. 20, & Plut. 

A"lve(tl<s, £6os, 77, {aiuEU},) praise, Heb. 

xiii. 15, ^vcria aividEio^. Sept. often. Ec- 
clus. xxxii. 2, ^ucr. atftcretos. 

AtyEct), f. ri(roi or iaruj, to praise, said 
both of men and God ; in N. T. only of*the 
latter, Lu. ii. 13,20, etal., and so Sept. oft. 

Aii/t 7/xa, aTos, TO, {aLvi<T<yofxaL, to 
hint at obscurely,) prop, an cenigma, rid- 
dle. In N. T. met. an obscure intimation, 
1 Cor. xiii. 12. 

All/ OS, ov, 6, 1. prop, a narrative or tale 
told ; — IT. a speech or harangue generally, 
especially laudatory ; — III. in N. T. met. 
praise. Matt, xxi. 16. Lu. xviii. 43. And 
so in Horn. Od. xxi. 110. Herod, vii. 107, 
and Sept. 

Ai'p£(ris, £0)9, Tj, (alptto,) I. a taking 



or laying hold of any thing ; — II. a taking 
of one thing in preference to another ; also 
the choice made, whether physical, or 
moral, i. e. of opinion or doctrine, or of 
life. Hence it denotes a sect, or school, in 
philosophy or religion ; and also the persons 
who form the party professing certain 
opinions. In N. T. it signifies sect, as 
said of the Pharisees, (Acts v. 17. xv. 5. 
xxvi. 5. xxviii.22,) or by them applied to 
the Christians, Acts xxiv. 5, 14. Hence 
it came to denote a party or faction among 
Christians, (as resembling the heathen or 
Jewish sects,) and also the dissension to 
which party-spirit gives birth, 1 Cor. xi. 
19. Gal. V. 20. 2 Pet. ii. 1. 

AIpETt^oj, f LCTUi. A word of Alex- 
andrine Greek, used in Sept. for alpioixaL, 
to choose any thing or person. In N. T. 
to prefer one person to others, to love, 
Matt. xii. 18. 

AlpsTtKos, ov, 6, (aloET/^o),) oue 
wdio maintams certain erroneous notions 
in religion, in a party-spirit, and thereby 
sows dissensions, and introduces errors, 
Tit. iii. 10, where see my Note. 

Alptto, f. 770-60, prop, to take. In N. T. 
it occurs only in mid. aipiofxaL, f. iTaofxai, 
to take for oneself] to choose, jjrefer, 2 Th. 
ii. 13. Heb. xi. 25. Phil. i. 22. And so 
in Sept. and later Class. 

Klpui, (for asi'po),) f ctoco, to take up\ 
lift, I. prop. John viii. 59. Mk. xvi. 18. 
iiev. X. 5. In Acts xxvii. 13, apavrs^ 
(scil. ay/cu^as) simply means sailing aivay, 
departing, as often in Class. Fig., as 
as said of the voice, to cry out, Lu. xvii. 
13. Acts iv. 24, and sometimes in Sept. ; 
also in the phrase alpEiv xl/vx^^ tlvcs, to. 
hold any one's mind in suspense or doubt. — 
11. to take up and place on oneself, to bear 
or carry, prop. Matt. iv. 6, John y. 8, et 
al. With the idea of laying up for use. 
Matt. xiv. 20. xv. 37, et al. Fig. alpEiv 
Ti]u d/jLooTLau TWO'S, to take away any one's 
sin, (i. e. the imputation or the punish- 
ment of it,) by taking it on oneself, John. 

i. 29. 1 John lii. 5. — III. to bear ojF, take 
away, remove, 1) prop, both of things, as 
Lu. vi. 29, sq. xi. 22. Matt. ix. 16. John 
XV. 2, of branches pruned ; and oi persons, 
whether removed from a society by excom- 
munication, 1 Cor. V. 2 (in some Edd.) or 
out of the world by death, John xvii. 15. 
Matt. xxiv. 39. Acts viii. 33. Lu. xxiii. 18. 
John xix. 15, et al. 2) fig., John xi. 48. 
1 Cor. vi. 15. 3) in the sense to deprive of, 
as of God's word, Mk. iv. 15. Lu. 12 ; or 
of his gifts, Mk. iv. 25 ; or salvation. Matt, 
xxi. 43. 4) said of a law, to abrogate. Col. 

ii. 14; of vices, to put aicay, Eph. iv. 31. 
XlctQ dvopiai, f. alodiKrop-aL, {aLia & 

aUdixi,) mid. dep., to perceive, prop, with 
the external senses, and met. with the 



AIE 



9 



A 1 cj) 



menUil perceptions, to understand, Lu. ix. 
45, and Class. 

Ato-6jj<ri9, £to9, 17, {al<jQdvojjiai,) prop, 
* perception by the external senses;' met. 
by the internal and mental, understanding^ 
Phil. i. 9, and also in Sept. and Class. 

AicrQ t]Tr) p Lov, ou, to, i^aicQavoiJiai,^ 
prop, the orpan or faculty of sensation ; 
fig. the facidti/ of perception by the inter- 
nal senses, Heb. v. 14, and Sept. 

Aio-xpo/c£p^7/s, £0s, o, adj. (aicr- 
Xpos & K-ep6o5,) eager even for dishonour- 
able or sordid gain, 1 Tim. iii. 8. Tit. i. 7, 
and Class. 

AicrxpoK s pdco£, adv. /or ^7^e sake of 
base gain, 1 Pet. v. 2. 

AicrxpoXoy ia, as, 77, (atcr)/pos & 
Xoyos), obscene language. Col. iii. 8. Xen., 
Pol., Diod. Sic. 

Aio-xpos, a, ov, adj. (alo-xo?,) prop, 
or deformed, as opp. to Ka\6<s, as 
often in Class, and Gen. xli. 3, 4. In N. 
T. fig. indecorous, as said of Avhat is either 
offensive to modesty and Christian purity, 
Eph. V. 12. a. EaTL Kai XeysLv, (so Dem. 
Olynth. ii. p. 23, iroL^Tal aicrxp^v acTfxa- 
Tcou, and elsewhere, uiaxpa. XaXtlv, on 
which phrase see Bast. Lettre 58,) or 
to the feelings ; of what is right or wrong, 
engendered by the manners and customs 
of a community, improper, 1 Cor. xi. 6, 
aijTXPOv yvvaiKL to KfApacrQai, & xiv. 
35. In one or other of these senses (which 
are closely connected together) the word 
is often used (like the Latin iurpis) of 
actions and morals, words and deeds, by 
Plato, Xenoph., &c. Hence to alaxpov, 
moral turpitude, as opp. to to koKov, in 
the Greek Philosophers, corresponding to 
the turjoe and the honestum of the Latin 
writers. In Tit. i. II, ai^xxpov Kepdov^ 
X^pi-^^ the use differs from that above 
mentioned ; and hence it is rightly kept 
apart by Schleusner, who, however, has 
not done well in assigning the sense imjust. 
The word has, I apprehend, an active sense, 
i. e. ' causing disgrace,' as in Horn. II. iii. 
38, Tov 0£ VELKacTEv alcTXpol'S kiriiacnv, 
& vi. 325. xiii. 76'8. xxxiv. 238. And so 
Xen. Mem. i. 5, 6, dovXEiav alaxpav. 
' AiaxpoTi-jg, 7JTOS, 77, (ato-Xpo?,)prop. 
ugliness or deformity. In N. T. fig. inde- 
corum, improprietv in v,'ords or actions, 
Eph. v. 4, a, Kui /xiopoXoyia, 

Aia-xvuv, ^s, 77, {alcrxo^,) gener. 
shame, I. subjectively, tlie passion or feel- 
ing of shame, fear of disgrace, Lu. xiv. 9. 
Ecclus. iv. 21. XX. 23, et Class.— II. ob- 
jectively, disgrace, ignominy, Heb. xii. 2. 
Sept. Thucyd. ii. 37, a. (pipovcxL. Xen. 
An.ii. 6,6. — III. a cause of shame, s^a??ie- 
ful action, or conduct, 2 Cor. iv. 2, to. 
KpvTTTu Trj<5 atcrxui/Ji?, i. c. 'such clan- 



destine proceedings as the disciples of 
Christ should be ashamed of,' Phil. iii. 19. 
Ju. 13. And so sometimes in the Class., 
esp. the Orators. In Rev. iii. 18, 77 a.T^s 
yvfxv6Ti]To^ is, by Heb., for yvfxvoTi)^ 
aiaxP"-' Comp. 1 Sam. xx. 30, aicr- 
X»^i^»jf dTroKukvxf/ ECU'S /uLiiTpos aov, for 
diroKa.Xvxl/iv alcrx'^i^'il^- 

A i (T X i^^*', f. ui/o), (aTorxos,) act. to put 
to shame, Horn, often, and Prov. xxix. 
15. Pass, to be put to shame, be made 
ashamed, 2 Cor. x. 8. Phil. i. 20. I John 
ii. 28, fjii) al(TXW^o^ipEv cctt' uvtov. Mid. 
to shame oneself, put oneself to shame, 
Lu. xvi. 3. I Pet. iv. 16. Sept. and Class. 

AiTfeo), f ri(x(i), to ask; usually foil, 
by accus. of pers. or thing, or both ; 
also with accus. of thing, and 'rrapa with 
gen. of pers. 1. gener., whether as said of 
men. Matt. v. 42. vii. 9, 11. Mk. vi. 22. 
Lu. xi. 9, al. Sept. and lat. Class.; or of 
God, to ask or p7xiy for. Matt. vi. 8. vii. 
11. Ja. i. 5, 6. Matt. vii. 7, 8, the case of 
9£05 being omitted. — II. spec, to ask or 
call for, reciuire, demand, Lu. i. 63. xii. 
48. Acts iii. 14. 1 Pet. iii. 15, al. Sept. 
and Class. — III. by Hebr,, to desire, Acts 
vii. 46, and Sept. 

ALTif]fxa, aTos, TO, (aiT£aj,) I. a 
thijig asked for, or object sought, request, 
Lu. xxiii. 24. 1 John v. 15, and Sept. in 
1 Sam.i. 17,27. — II. by Hebr., a desire cf 
the mind, Phil. iv. 6, and Sept. ; ex. gr. 
Ps. xxxvii. 4, TO. aiTrjixaTa tT]<s Kapd'ia^. 
Epist. Pseudo Socr. 24. 

AiTta, as, i), [alTECo,) a cause, I. the 
efficient cause, reason, or motive, Matt. xix. 
3. Lu. vih. 47. Acts xxii. 24. 2 Tim. i. 
6. Tit. i. 13. Heb. ii. 11.— IL like the 
Latin ratio or causa, affair, matter, case. 
Acts X. 21. xxiii.. 28. Matt. xix. 10, eI 
ouTcos ECTTLv T] aWia, and so Sept. and 
Class. — III. in a forensic sense, cause, i. e. 
1) an accusation ov charge. Acts xxv. 18, 
27. Matt, xxvii. 37. Mk. xv. 26. Jos. 
Ant. iv. 8, 23. Xen. Cyr. vi. 3, 16. 2) 
fault, or crime, John xviii. 38. xix. 4» 
Acts xiii. 28. xxviii. 18. Sept. and Class. 

AIt iafxa, aTo§, to, a charge, Acts 
xxv. 7. Thuc. V. 72. 

A iTt OS, ia,toi', prop, an adj. causative^ 
but in N. T. used subst. I. in the masc. o 
aiTios, the causer or author of any thing, 
Heb. V. 9, aiT. o-wTrjpi'as, and often ia 
the Class., esp. Thuc. — II. in neut. to 
alTLov, a cause, — i. e. a reason, motive. Acts 
xix. 40 ; but as atTtos may mean causative 
of evil as well as good, as often in Plato, 
Xen., and Thuc, so to atTioi; sometimes 
signifies fault or crime, Lu. xxiii. 4, 22. 

AicpvLSio^, iov, 6, v, adj. (a^i/jjs eq. 
to d<pavii^,) 2inforesee?i, suddeji, Lu. xxi> 
34. 1 Th. V. 3. 

B5 



AIX 



10 



A K A 



(T/co),) I. prop. captivitj/^Rev. xiii. 10, eh 
cdxi^- ^Tid Sept. — II. hv meton. the pe7'so?is 
so captured^ ' a captive multitude,' Eph. 
iv. 8. Rev. xiii. 10, aix- crvvdyst^ as oft, 
in Sept. and Apocr. Diod. Sic. xvii. 70, 

A I }(,u a X COT ? u oj, f. svcrco^ [aix/ULaXw- 
To§,) I. prop, to take prisoner^ lead cap- 
tive^ as in Eph. iv. 8, and often in Sept. 
and later writers. — II. met. to captivate^ 
2 Tim. iii. 6, in text, recept. 

Ai)(/xa\ooTi^a), f. /(Toj, (at)(,ua/\<jo- 
To?,) later word for alxfxuXoiTov iroiio)^ 
prop, to lead captive^ Lu. xxi. 24. Sept. 

1 K. viii. 46. Diod. Sic. xiii, 59. Met. to 
captivate, 2 Tim. iii. 6, in later Edd. So 
Judith xvi. 9, TO Ka.Wo<s avT7j<s yxfJ-cc- 
XwTLas xl/vxv^ avTov. Also, hj impl., 
to bring into subjectio?i, Rom. vii. 23, 2 Cor. 
x. 5. 

Ai)(/xa\to'ro§, ou, 6, 77, a captive or 
prisoner oficar, Lu. iv. 18. The word is 
prop, an adj. eq. to aixim-y aA-toros, and 
is often in the earlier writers used with 
subst. as a. crco/iaTa, or vt^es, or TroXsis, 
X,o^7/uaTa, &c., but is gener., in use, a 
subst., aubpcoTTo^ being understood. 

At toi/, toi^os, o,& poet. 77, from al, mean- 
ing duration to an end, and the part, wv of 
Ei/iXL. It is in Horn., Hes., Find., Hdot., 
and other early writers, chiefly used of the 
duration of human existence, li/e^ or the 
age of man, a?i age ; but in the Class, 
writers after them it is chiefly employed to 
denote the duration of time to the end of 
time, i. e. eternity. The earliest instance 
of this sense is in Plato, who often so uses 
the word. See p. 37. D. 38. C. 97. D. Ed. 
Steph. In N.T. it is used, I. of time future.^ 
as in the foil, phrases, 1) sis TOi/ aluova, 
for ever., said of Christ, Heb. vi. 20. vii. 
17, 24, 28 ; and of the happiness of the 
righteous, John vi. 51, 58. 2 Cor. ix. 9, et 
al. ; also of the punishment of the wicked, 

2 Pet. ii. 17. Ju. 13 ; ^\ith a negative, 
never. Matt. xxi. 19. Mk. iii. 29, et al. 
So £is nfxepav alu)V0<5 for sh tov dsi XP^~ 
z/oi/, 2 Pet. iii. 18, 2) £i§ tov^ aicoua?, 
(plur. for sing.) for eve7\ to all eternity, 
said of God, Rom. i. 25. ix. 5. xi. 36. 
2 Cor. xi. 31 ; of Christ, Lu. i. 33. 3) ah 
T0V9 aiu)ua9 twv alwviou, (an intensive 
form derived from Hebr.,)/or ever and 
ever; said of God, Gal. i. 5. Ph. iv. 20. 
1 Tim. i, 17. 1 Pet. v. 11 ; of Christ, 2 Pet, 
iii. 18. Rev. i. 18. v. 13; of tlie happiness 
of the just, Rev. xxii. 5 ; of the punisli- 
ment of the wicked. Rev. xiv. 11. xix. 3. 
XX. 10. — 11. of time past, as dir' aia)vo<s, 
* from everlasting,' Lu. i. 70. Acts iii. 21. 
XV. 18, d-rro toov aioovwv, Eph. iii. 9. Col. 
i. 26, irpo Tcou aiwixjov, ' before time iras,'' 
i. e. from all eternity, 1 Cor. ii. 7. — III. 
by Hebr. seculum^ tJie world^ either pre- 



sent or future, i. of this world and the 
next, 1) as implying duration, Matt. xii. 
32. Mk. X. 30. Lu. xviii. 30. 2) the pre- 
sent icorld, with its cares and desires, the 
idea of evil, moral and physical, being 
either expressed or implied, Matt, xiii, 22, 
Lu. xvi. 8. XX. 34. Rom. xii. 2, et al. 
3) by met., the men of this ivorld, by impl. 
wicked, Eph. ii. 2. Lu. xvi. 8. 4) by me- 
ton., the icorld itself as an object of cre- 
ation and existence, Heb. i. 2. xi, 3. Matt, 
xiii. 40. xxiv. 3. 1 Tim. i. 17. 11. as said 
in reference to the advent of the Messiah, 
seculum, age, namely, 1) the age or world 
BEFORE the Messiah, i. e. 'the Jewish 
dispensation,' 1 Cor. x. 11. 2) the age or 
icoiid AFTER the Messiah, ' the Gospel dis- 
pensation,' the kingdom of the Messiah, 
Eph. ii, 7. Heb. vi. 5. 

A i 60 y t o 5, ov, 6, r], adj . peipetual, eter- 
nal. I. as said chiefly of time future, and 1) 
of God, Rom. xvi! 26. 1 Tim. vi. 16, et 
al. 2) of the happiness of the righteous. 
Matt, xix, 29. xxv. 46, et al. In John iii. 
15, and some other passages, X^io^i aiwvLO^ 
is eq. to Eicre\dsLi> sis Tiiv (SacnX. tou 
Qsov. 3) of the punishment of the wicked. 
Matt, xviii. 8, xxv. 41, et al. 4) gener, 
2 Cor. iv, 18. Phil. 15, aicouLov, adv. for 
ever, always. — II. of time^«s^, Rom. xvi, 
25, xpoVois aicovLOL^, 'of old.' 2 Tim. i. 
9. Tit. i. 2, irpd XjOoVcoi/ «., equivalent to 
irpd aiuoviov. 

' Ak ad a p (T ia, as, 77, (a/caOapTO?,) im- 
purity, filth ; I. prop, in a physical sense, 
unclean'liness, Matt.xxiii.27, and so often in 
Sept., also Plato, p. 72. C. Ed. Steph.— II, 
in a moral sense, iincleanness of life, and the 
sinfulness thereby contracted, as opposed 
to puritv and chastitv, and virtue in gener. 
Rom. i.'24. vi. 19. 2 Cor. xii. 21. Gal. v. 
19. Eph. iv. 19. V. 3. Col. iii. 5. ] Th. iv. 7, 
and Sept. in Ezek. xxxvi. 25, 29. Rare in 
Class., though an example occurs in De- 
mostli. p. 553, for summa improbitas, tovto 
' ovK E-Xov koTTLV VTT 8 p (SoXij 1/ aKadaocTLa^, 
And such a person was called by the Greeks 
Kudapua, by the B.omn.ns, purgccme??tu7n. 
In 1 Th. ii. 3, it is used of the moral im- 
purity of corrupt motives, avarice, ambi- 
tion, &c. See my Note. So Arrian, Epict. 
iv. 11. xf/uxv^s dKaOapaia. 

'A/ca0ajOT7]s, 7/T05, t], (a syncopated 
form for dKadap6r7i<5,) uncleanness, i. e, 
prop, lewdness, but fig. said of idolatry. 
Rev. xvii. 4, lect. recept. ; while other 
copies have -ra dKadapra tt/s. 

'AkuO apT09, ov, 6, V, adj. (a, KaOai- 
pio,) unclean, impure, I. in tlie Leviiical 
sense, i. e. by legal or ceremonial unclean- 
ness, Lev. V. 2; said either of things, as 
food. Acts X. 14. xi. 8; (also of animals, 
as birds, Rev. xviii. 2.) or of persons not 
Jews, or not Christians, Acts x. 28. 1 Cor. 



A K A 



1 



1 



AKO 



vii. 14. 2 Cor. vi. 17. — IT. in a moi-al sense, i 
unclean^ \\\\Qi\\ev bvtlie pollution of lewd- 
ness, Epli. V, 5, or of idolatry, Rev. xvii. 
4, in the best F>dd. 8o tlic demons, Alatt. 
X. 1. xii. 43. Mk. i. 123. Lu. iv. 33. Acts 
V. 16, are called Trvivfxa'ra cik., partly 
from their natural ini])ioty and wickedness 
of every kind, (hence they are called 
TTovijpa^ Tob. iii. 8. vi. 14,) and partly 
from their being both instigators to and 
objects of idolatry. 

' Ak a I p t o fx a ovjuctL^ (a, /<-aipo§,) a 
later Greek term, signifying to ivant oppor- 
tujiity, Phil. iv. 10. 

' Ak aip (jo's^ adv. {uKaipo^^^ unseason- 
ably^ 2 Tim. iv. 2. See my note in loc. 

" A KaK o^s^ ov^ 6, 7}, adj. (a, /ca/cos,) 
I. harmless^ blameless^ Heb. vii. 26. Sept. 
and Class. — II. cjuildess^ void of evil de- 
sign, Rom. xvi. 18. Sept. and Dam. 1153. 
Pol. iii. 98, et al. 

"A /cay 0a, 7JS, 77, (aKT?;, at/Oo?,) a thorn 
or hriei\ Matt. vii. 16. xxvii. 29. Lii. vi. 
44. John xix. 2. Heb. vi. 8. 

'A/ca;^6 ii/os, ou, 6, 77, adj. made of 
tliorns^ Mk. xv. 17. John xix. 5. 

"A/capTTo?, ou, 6, 77, ivithout fruity har- 
ren^ opp. to Kap-rrocfyopo^^ I. prop, of trees, 
Theophr. PI. iii. 153. Jnde 12, also of land, 
Jer. ii.26; likewise of a country, Athen. ap. 
Steph. Thes. — II. met., yielding no fruity 
i. e. of knowledoe, virtue, &c., useless^ 
Matt. xiii. 22. Mk. iv. 19. 1 Cor. xiv. 
14. Tit. iii. 14. 2 Pet. i. 8. So some- 
times in Class., and Lat. infructuosits. So 
Phit. Philop. 4, a. XaXia. Plat. 277. A. 
\6yoL ohyl aKapiroi. So Plut. vi. 138, 
4, aKapiro^ dtapiivEL irpo^ dpsTiiv. vi. 
377, 4, ^o^7j§ dicdpTTOvs. vi. 602, 9, ttjv 
dpsTi]v aKapira 'TVLVtiv Xiyovcn^ et al. — 
III. as negative adjectives are sometimes 
strongly affirmative of the opposite quali- 
ties, so in Eph. v. 11, l3y to. Epya Ta 
oLKapira tov (tkotovs are meant bad and 
noxious fruits ; and so Wisd. xv. 4, ttoVos 
a., improbus. 

'A/caxay z/a)o-T09, ou, o, 77, adj. (a, 
KaTayivuicrKU}^) I. prop, not ivorthy of 
judicial condemnation^ 2 Mace. iv. 47. —II. 
in N. T. met., unblameable^ Tit. ii. 8. 
* 'A/caTaK:a\i;'7r'ros, ou, 6, 77, adj. (a, 
/cttXuTrxo),) unveiled^ 1 Cor. xi. 5. KscpaXfj 
a/c. 13, yvvoLKa olk, Pol. xv. 25, t7;i/ 

'Akut aKp LTo^^ Of, o, 77, adj. (a, 
KaTaKpLuco,) prop. condemned^ but in 
Acts xvi. 37. xxii. 25, one who is con- 
demned unheard^ like the Class. aKpiTo<s. 

^ A/ca Ta \ uTo?, ou, 6, 7?, adj. (a, Ka^ra- 
Xuw,) 1. prop, indissoluble ; — II. met. 
ever-during, everlasting^ Heb. vii. 16, ^wj/, 
and Class. 

A/caTaTrauo-Tos, ou, o, 77, adj. (a, 



K-araTTauo),) not to be restrained, from any 
thing, unable to desist^ 2 Pet. ii. 14, dcp- 
QaXpol uKaTdTTducTToi dixapTLu^ \ and 
so the later Class., but with a gen. foil. 

'A/ca Ta cTTa (T t a, as, 77, (a/caTacrTa- 
Tos,) prop, unscttledness^ namely, by con- 
tinual change of place, 2 Cor. vi. 5. Hence 
commotion^ tumidly sedition^ Lu. xxi. 9. 
1 Cor. xiv. 33. 2 Cor. xii. 20. Ja. iii. 16. 

'A /car a <rT a Tos, ou, 6, 77, adj. (a, Ka6- 
LCTTauai,) unstable^ inconstant^ Ja. i. 8. 

'A/cara a-)/ € Tos, ou, 6, 77, adj. (a,/caT£- 
to restrain,) not to be i-estrained^ irre- 
pressible^ Ja. iii. 8, yXo)aora aK. icaKov. 
So Job xxxi. 11, 3'u/>i3s opyi}^ aKai-d- 
o-xf T-os. Jos. and later Class., as Plut. viii. 
73, 7, aKaTaarx^'^o? Tras kcrTLU 6 ttj? 
iroXv'Trpay/uLoa-vurj'S yapyaXLcrpo^. 

'AKsXdaiuid, indecl. from the Syro- 
Chaldaic H'Ql bpn, field of bloody i. e. pur- 
chased with the money obtained by blood, 
Acts i. 19. 

'A/iTtpatos, ou, o, 77, adj. (a, /cspaw, to 
mix,) prop, unmixed ^unadulterated^ as said 
of wine, Dios. v. 129. vii. 77, dpiyh^ dl- 
vo'5 Kal a/c., but also used in various meta- 
phorical senses, esp. for a7r/\oL/§, simple, 
artless, guileless So Matt. x. 16, di<ipaLOi 
(h<s al TT&pLCTTspal, where there seems a 
blending of the conjoint ideas of simplicity 
or guilelessness, and harmlessness, (so we 
have the i)hrase harmless simplicity,) as in 
Philostr. ap. Steph. Thes., to uKipaiov 
Kal aKUKOv Kal dvETTL^ovXiVTov. In Rom. 
xvi. 19, aKspaLov^ £i§ to KaKov, the ideas 
of artlessness and sim])licity (or absence 
of subtlety) seem conjoined, as in Eurip. 
Or. 912. Pors., where the country gentle- 
man is described as aKepaLo^, dviiriX^Tr- 
Tou '}](TKi]K<h<3 ^iov. And so Shakspeare, 
' I am a simple woman, much too weak 
T' oppose your cunning.' In Phil. ii. 15, 
iVa ytviiads apepTTTOL Kal aK., of the 
ideas of artlessness and harmlessness, the 
latter seems, by the context, to prevail ; 
on the contrary, in Jos. Ant. i. 2, 2, aKe- 
paLov ^Lov the former. 

^AkXivt]^, io's, o, 77, adj. (a, kXIvcd,) 
ivithout wavering, stable, Heb. x. 23, rj 
bpoXoyia t^s iXiriCo^ dKXivri<s. So Poll. 
On. viii. 10, «'. ^i/cacT?;?, and Lucian, 
Encom. Dem. d. xl/vxv. 

' Ak p.d'i^w, f. daw, {uKpri,) lit. to he in 
the aKpi], ov prijne, of any thing which, as 
said of fruits, is that of maturity. So Rev. 
xiv. 18, to be ripe, and Class., as Thuc.ii. 19. 

'A/c /X 7/1;, adj. prop, accus. of aKpr], 
which means a point, either prop, of a 
weapon, or fig. of time. Hence in the 
N. T. and the later Avriters, aKpijv, for 
Kair' dKpi)]v X90VOV, even now, yet. Matt. 
XV. 16. 

'A /cor;, 7]<S, rj, (a/couo),) I. HEARING, 



ARO 



1 



2 



A KP 



1. e. 1) the setise, or faculty, af hearing, 
1 Cor. xii. 17. Xen. Mem. i. 4, b'. 2) the 
organ of hearing, the ears^ Mk, vii. 35. 
Lk. vii. 1, eh tocs cIkoo.^ tov Xaov. Acts 
xyii. 20. Heb. v. 11. 2 Tim. iv. 3, Kun- 
do/jLsvo^ Ti)u dKoi]v. and so in later CLass. 
AKorj aKov&Lv, Matt. xiii. 14, is a Hebra- 
ism, found also in Sept. for to hear atten- 
tively,— 11. THAT WHICH IS HEARD ; and 
1) anything promulgated in the hearing 
of others for the purpose of announcement 
or instruction, John xii. 38. Rom. x. 16, 

17. So uKoi] TTLaTsco^ in the sense ' doc- 
trine taught and received with faith,' Gal. 
iii. 2, 5, and Xoyo^ ccaco?}?, equiv. to \6- 
yos a/couo-^fii?,' the word taught and heard,' 
1 Th. ii. 13. Heb. iv. 2. 2) from Heb., 
Tuinoiu\ repoH^ Matt. iv. 24. xiv. 1. xxiv. 
6. Mk. i. 28. xiii. 7. And so Sept. and 
Class. 

'A/v-oXou0 £ 60, f. ?jcrw, {^(xKoXovdo^., 
from a, for aua, and k:£/\.£u6o§, way,) to 
go icith.^ accompany.^ folloiv ; constr. \Yith 
dat., or fjiETu and gen., Lu. ix. 49, al. or 
Avith oTTto-w Tii/os, Matt. X. 38, al. I. 
gener. to /b^/o?t', Matt. iv. 25. viii.l. ix. 19. 
Mk. V. 24, et al. — II. spec, to follow a 
teacher.^ hecome any one's disciple, 1) to 
accompany liini personally, as was usual 
with the followers of the Jewish doctors 
and Greek philosophers. Matt. iv. 20, 22. 
ix. 9. xix. 27, sq. Mk. i. 18. John i. 41. 

2, to he any Oiie's disciple as to faith and 
})ractice, io follow his teachi?ig^ Matt. x. 
38. xvi. 24. Mk. ™. 34. Lu. ix. 23. 
John YiiL 12. xii. 26. — III. to folloia any 
one in succession.^ as to any action. Rev. 
xiv. 8, sq. — lY. as said of things., actions, 
&c., to accompany., Rev. xiv. 13, to. ok 
ipya ai'Tojv dicoXovdiL fleT avToov, ' ac- 
company them' to the judgment-seat of 
God, and, by im])lic., ' they bear them with 
them, and procure them a reward.' Also, 
vice versa, in Rev. xviii. 5, text, rec, 7]ko- 
\ov6i](Tav avT7]9 ai afxapriaL dy^pi tov 
ovpavov., ' have followed one another till 
they reach even to heaven.' This, how- 
ever, may better be referred to sense III. 

Akou w, f. aK'ouaa;, (fut. mid. aKOvcro- 
^UL^, which latter is preferable,) perf. mid. 
aK/jKoa, perf. pass. iiKovcr/jLaL, aor. 1. pass. 
?jKoucrdi]u. 1. to hear, I) intrans. to 
have the sense ofliearing, Matt. xi. 5. I\Ik. 
vii. 37. al. and Class. ''Matt. xiii. 15, (3a- 
piw<s aKovELu, 'to be dull of hearing.' 2) 
trans, and either absol. or with accus. or 
gen., (with or without prepos.) of the thing 
heard, and with gen. (with or without pre- 
pos.) of the person from whom ; to hear, 
■perceive ?cilh the ear, (1) gener., Matt, ii.9, 

18. Lx. 12. X. 27. Mk. vii. 25, et al. oft., 
and Class. (2) spec, in the sense to give 
ear to, hear attentively, Mk, iv. 3. vii.' 14. 
xii. 29. iVctsii. 22. Hence, 3)byimpL, 



to give heed to., obey. Matt. x. 14. xvii. 5. 
xviii. 15. Mk. vi. 11. Lu. x 16, et al. 
and Class. So also in the phrase 6 f'xwi/ 
ooTa ctKouEiv, dKovi-TU}, ]\latt. xi. 15. xiii. 
9, et al. In St. John's writings the term is 
used of God in the sense to heed, regard, 
i. e. to hear and unsiver prayer, John ix. 
31. xi. 41, sq. 1 John v. 15. — II. to hear, 
i.e. to learn hy hearing, to Ije informed, to 
know ; 1 ) gener., Matt. ii. 3, 22. iv. 12. 
V. 21, 27. xi. 2. Mk. v. 27. vi. 14. Acts 
xiv. 14. XV. 24, al. Pass., to be heard of, 
i. e. repeated or noised abroad, Matt, 
xxviii. 14. Mk. ii. 1. Lu. xii. 3. Acts xi.. 
22. 1 Cor. V. 1, and Class. 2) spec, to 
understand or comprehend, Mk. iv. 33. 
John vi. 60. 1 Cor. xiv. 2. Gal. iv. 21. 
Sept. and later Class. In a forensic sense, 
to hear as a judge, to try. Acts xxv. 22. 
John vii, 51. 

'AKpaaia, as, v,{dKpaT7i<3,) equiv. to 
the more Class. dKpaTSLa ; gen. zvc(7it of 
self-command or government, whether of 
the appetites of the body or the passions of 
the mind, (so Jos. Bell. i. 1, 2, a. ira- 
^u}v,) as opp. to h/KpuTELa. Thus it is 
applied not only to intemperance in eating 
or drinking, but to all the other appetites 
of the body. So Jos. Ant, viii, 7, 5, twz/ 
dcppodicjoi/ dK. Hence it is equiv. to ct/co- 
Xaa-ia. In N. T. it only occurs in 
1 Cor. vii. 5, cid ti)v dKpaaiau, 'by.reason 
of, or on occasion of, your inability to 
govern your passions.' 

'A/vpaTj/9, £os, 6,77, adj. mcontinent, 
i. e. ' unable to controul the passions and 
apFpetites,' as opp. to syKpari]^, 2 Tim., 
iii, 3, and often in Class. 

"Akp aTO's, 6, 77, a.(\j. {a, KEpuvvvp-L.) 
unmixed ; prop, said of wine undiluted 
with water, and hence, by impl.. strojig, 
intoxicating. Rev. xiv. 10. 

^AKpi^Eia, a?, 77, {dKpLj3}}9y) exact- 
ness, precision ; prop, said of exactness of 
weight or dime?ision, as Ecclus. xiii. 4, 
(i/v/3t/3£i'a X^vyov kul aTad/xtou: and hence 
met.,^of eodreme accuracy or precisio?i ; so 
Wisd. xii. 1, in a forensic sense, Dan. vii. 
16, exactness of exjjlication, and often in 
Class, In Acts xxii. 3, TTETraLOEUfxivo^ 

KUTa OLKpL^ELaV TOV TTaTpCOOV p6/X0V, 

means, *'the precise discipline of the law;' 
as Ecclus. xvi. 25, sKCpuLvco ku aTad/xcS 
TraiG&tau, Kal kv aKpi^ELa dirayyiXXu} 
E7rL(yTj]p.i]v. So Joseph. Yit. c. 38, it is 
said of the Pharisees, irepi to. ttutplu 
v6p.Lfj.a coKovaL tojv uXXvov aKpL^ELar 
ciacpioELu. 

'AKpifSi]^, £ov, 6, 77, adj. (aK-pos, from 
aiaj. n. point,) exact, accurate. ' AKpL^Bka-rE- 
pov, as adverb, ' more accurately or per- 
fectly,' Acts xviii. 26. xxiii. 15, 20. xxiv. 
22. In Acts xxvi. 5, Ka-rd tt/i/ uKpi- 
(3t<jTUTr]v aioEdLv^ ' the most exact sect,' 



A K P 



13 



AAA 



i.e. exact in tlie exposition and observance 
Taif tdu)v Kcil X^j]Ti] /muTiou^ v. 3. See the 
passage of Joseph, cited in v. aKpifStia, 

'A/C/Ol/3o6t', f. 0)0-60, {uKpL^})^,) pi'Op. 

to knou\ and in Class, to know how to 
do, or to do any tliins: accurately^ JElian. 
Is. xlix. 16, Aq. Hdian. i. 15, 4. In N. T. 
to i?iquire uccurateh/^ search assiduously 
into. Matt. ii. 7, 16. Xen. (Ec. xx. 10. 

'A/vpi/3ujs, adv. accurately, eocactly, 
perfectly. Matt. ii. 8. Lu. i. 3. Acts xviii. 
•25. 1 Th. V. 2. Xen. GEc. ii. carefully, 
circumspectly, Eph. v. 15. 

'A/cyOi?, i3o§, 77, a locust. Matt. iii. 4. 
Mk. i. 6. Rev. ix. 3, 7. Sept. and Class. 

' A K poaTTl p LOV, LOV, TO, [cCKpodo fXCtL, 

to hear,) a place of hearing, i. e. trial, Lat. 
auditoriMin, Acts xxv. 23. 

'A/cpoaxr/9, ov, 6, {aKpodo/xai,) a 
hearer, a.s in Jos. Ant. iii. 5, 3, uk. (pcoi/Tj^, 
and absol. fZAcp. Thuc.ii. 35, InN.T. ccKp. 
Tov vojULov or Xoyou, (as Rom. ii. 13. Ja. 

i. 22, 23, 25,) is said of 'one who merely 
hears, but does not fulfil or perform it, is 
not a doer,'* 

'A/cpojSuo-Tia, as, 77, {aicpov 6l [36(o, 
to cover,) I. jo?-e/)z^ce, or foreskin, cover- 
ing the extremity of the glans. Acts xi. 3, 
cLKp. £Xoi/T£§, i.e. uncircumcised Gentiles. 
— II. tlie state of uncircumcisio7i, or Gen til- 
ism :- see Acts xi.3. 1) prop. Rom.ii. 25. 
1 Cor. vii. 18, 19. Gal. v. 6. vi. 15. Col. 

ii. 13, with reference, however, to the ex- 
ternal rite, not to the circumcision of the 
heart : comp. Eph. ii. 11. 2) by meton. 
the uncircumcised, the Gentiles, as opposed 
to the Circumcision, the Jews, Rom. ii. 
26, sq. iii. 30. Not found in Class. 

' XKpoy (juv laXa, a, ov, adj. {uKpov 
& ycovia.) When said of a stone, it de- 
notes a corner or foundation stone, Eph. 
ii. 20. 1 Pet. ii. 6. Our Lord is compared 
in N.T. to a foundation-stone, both from the 
fundamental nature of the doctrine of a 
Saviour, and also from the distinguished 
dignity of the person and office of Christ. 

'AKpodiVLOV, LOV, TO, (^CLKpOV & 

or 6iv, a heap,) chiefly used in plur. to 
denote the first fruits, i. e. of the earth, 
presented as an offering to the Deity; so 
called, as taken from the aicpov, or top of 
the first heap collected, or the first chosen, 
i. e. ' the choicest of the spoils taken in war,' 
and off'ered to the god who was supposed 
to have occasioned the victory, Herod, viii. 
121, So in Heb. vii. 4, it is used of the 
tenth of the spoils of the vanquished foe 
offered to Jehovah by Abraham, 

"A/c^oos, a, ov, adj. [aKy],) hence nent. 
TO oLKpov, used subst. for angular top, also 
tlie extremity of any thing, Matt. xxiv. 31. 
Mk. xiii. 27. Lu. xvi. 24. Heb. xi. 21. 
' \kv p 6 (x>, f. (a, /cuf>09,) to de- 



prive of authority, annul, abrogate, trans., 
Matt. XV. 6, die. kvToXi'w. Mk.vii. 13, a/c, 
TOV \6yov. Gal. lii. 17, a'/c. 6La^nK)\v. 
Sept. and Class. 

^AKiiiXvTix)^, adv. (aVtoXuTos, unhin- 
dered,) icithout hindrance, freely. Acta 
xxviii. 31, OLodo-Koov d/c. Hdian. viii. 2, I, 
OLt^i)<jav dKooXuTU)^. 

"Akmv, aKovaa, clkov, adj. (a, £k:wi/,) 
umcilling, 1 Cor. ix. 17. Sept. and Class. 

' A\d(iu(rT pov, ov, TO, prop, alabas- 
ter, (a variety of differing from, 
though similar to, the modern alabaster,) 
and also a vase of alabaster, to hold per- 
fumes or perfumed ointment ; though the 
name was at length applied to such vases 
of other materials, as gold, glass, stone, &c. 
Matt. xxvi. 7. Mk.xiv. 3. Lu. vii. 37, and 
often in Class. These vases had a long 
narrow neck sealed : so that by the break- 
ing of the d\d(3aaTpov at Mk. xiv. 3, we 
are only to understand the breaking of the 
top of the vase thus closed. Poll. On. x. lU 
'AXaX^ovELU, as, 77, (dXaX^chv,) prop. 
tJie character of a boaster, boasting, and by 
impL, pride and arrogance, Ja. iv. lb". 
1 John ii. 16. Sept., Apocr., and Class. 
Ml. V. H. ii. 15. 

'AXaX,(X)V, 6vo<s, 6, {dXdofxaL, to rove,) 
prop, a vagabond ; also, from the adjunct, 
a mountebank or quack. Hence in N. T. 
a boaster, Rom. i. 30. 2 Tim. iii. 2, also in 
Sept. and Class., as ^l.V. H. iv. 16. vii. 20. 

' AXaXdX^(jo, f. do-o) or agw, {dXaXd, 
the war-cry,) prop, to raise tJw icar-cry, or 
shout of battle. Josh. vi. 20. Judg. xv. 14. 
Xen. Cyr. iii. 2, 9. Hence, to utter a loud 
cry of any kind, whether for joy or grief, 
Sept. In N. T. used of the latter, to 
lament aloud, wail, Mark v. 38; also the 
sound of cymbals, to give a clanging sounds 
from its acute clangour, 1 Cor. xiii. 1. 

'AXdXTiTOs, ov, 6, 77, adj. (a, XaXiw,) 
umctterable in ivords, Rom. viii. 26, & lat. 
Class. 

"AXaXos, ov, 6, 77, adj. (a, XdXos, fr. 
XaXiu),) I. not speakhig, speechless, d.umb, 
Mk.vii. 37. — II. making dumb,^]^. ix. 17, 
25,7ry£UMa dXaXov. So Plut. de Defect. 
Orac. 51, dXdXov kul kukov TrvEVfiaTo^ 
TrXript]^, (of the Pythian priestess,) thougii 
most recent Commentators explain it, ' a 
malignant spirit, silent through obsti- 
nacy,' contrary however to their usual 
character. 

"AX as, aTos, TO, (a term of common 
life, for aXs, ctXos, 6,) scdt. I. prop. Matt, 
v. 13. Mk. ix. 50. Lu. xiv. 34.— II. (with 
allusion to the cleansing and purifying na- 
ture of salt,) metaph. spiritual icisdom,, 
even that of religious faith and hope, in the 
heirs of salvation, Mk. ix. 50. Col. iv. 6. 
Matt. v. 13. And so Diog. Laert.viii. 1,19. 



A AE 1 

*A\EL(pu)^ f. i/zco, prop, to besmear^ Horn . 
Od. xii. 47. In N. T. to mioint, trans. 
Matt. vi. 17. Mk. vi. 13. xvi. 1. Lu.vii; 38, 
46'. John xi. 2. xii. 3. Ja. v. 14, & Class. 

' AXekito pocf) wvLa^ a<s^ J7, {dXiKTcop 
& (pcoi/}),) prop. cock-C7^oiDing ; but in N.T. 
the tliird watch of the night, about equi- 
distant between midnight and dawn, when 
cocks first begin to crow, Mk. xiii. 35. 

'AXg/cTcop, opo9, b^acock^ Matt. xxvi. 
34, & oft. and Class. 

"AXsvpov^ ou^ TO, (a\£w, to grind,) 
^]Hst^ jioui\ Matt. xiii. 33. Lu. xiii. 21. 
Sept. and Class. 

'AX7;0e ta, ?7, {dX-nd}]^^) I. TRUTH, 

i. e. verity^ reality^ 1 ) conformity to the 
true nature and reality of things^ Mk. v. 
33, ELTTtLu irdcrav Ti]v dXtjdeLau, John 
V. 33. 2 Cor. vi. 7, h Xoycp dXi}6ELa<5. 
So XiyELv TTju ccA.., John xvi. 7, et al., 
and £7r' a/\i]0£ia§, " of a truth,' Lu. iv. 
25, et al. 2) as said of what is true in 
itself, purity from falsehood or error ^ Mk. 
xii. 32. Acts xxvi. 25. Rom. ii. 20, et al. 
So 77 a\7?0£ta TO? fi/ayyfXiou, ' the 
verity of the Gospel,' Gal. ii. 5, 14, and 6 
\6yo<s n-rj'3 a\j]0., said of true doctrine, 
Eph. i. 13. Col. i. 5. 2 Tim. ii. 15. Ja. i. 
18. — II. TRUTH, i. e. the love of truth, 
both in words and deeds, sincei^ity^ veracity. 
Matt. xxii. 16. Mk. xii. 14. Lu. xx. 21. 
.John iv. 23, sq. kv dXi]6ELa, viii. 44, ouk 
EOTTLv dX. Ev avTw. 2 Cor. xi. 10. Eph. 

iv.24, EV OCTLOTI^TL T7]^ dXj]dELa<5. 1 Jolin 

3. 6, ou iTOLovixEV Tijv dX., cquivalcnt to 
xlfEVOofXEda. ver. 8. 1 John v. 6, to YIveu- 
fxd iaTLv v dX. i. e. dXi]QLv6v. — III. in 
N. T. esp. Divine truth, as evinced in the 
fjiith and profession of true religion, Gospel 
truth, as opposed to Jewivh or Heathen 
fables, John i. 14, 17. viii. 32, & oft. 
Hence, John xiv. 6, Jesus is called tlie 
Truth, i.e. ' the teacher of Divine truth,' as 
at ] Esd. iv. 33—41, h dX. is said of God. 
— IV. conduct cLgreeable to the truth, probity 
and virtue, a life conformed to the precepts 
of true religion, John iii. 21, 6 ttolcou n-r}v 
aA., as opposed to 6 cpavXa Trpdacrcoi/. 
John viii. 44, eu tt] dX. oux EaTt]KEv. 
Rom. ii. 8. 1 Cor. xiii. 6, opp. to doiKia. 
Eph. iv. 21. 1 Tim. vi. 5. Ja. v. 19. Sept. 

and Apocr. 

^ AXrid EX) oj, f. Evcroi, {dXii6i]'5,) 1) to 

speak the tridh; 2) to teach the truth, i.e. 

true religion, the Gospel, Gal. iv. 16. 

3) to be veracious, both in words and deeds, 

he sincere, Eph.iv. 15. Philo ii. p. 86. Xen. 

Cyr. i. 6, 33. 

*A\'i)di]'s, E0<3, 6, ?7, adj. (a, Xrido),) 

prop, unconcecded, open. Comp. John iii. 

21, with 1 Tim. v. 25. Hence, 1) true, 

real, as conformed to the nature and reality 

of things, John viii. 16. xix. 35. Acts xii. 

9 ; true^ as shown by the event, John [ 



4 AAA 

X. 41. Tit. i. 13. 2 Pet. ii. 22; credible, 
as apyjlied to a testimony, John v. 31, sq. 
viii. 13, sq. et al., and also to a teacher, 
2 Cor. vi. 8. 2) truth-loving, veracious^ 
sincere. Matt. xxii. 16. Mk. xii. 14. John 
iii. 33. viii. 26. Rom. iii. 4. 3) true in con- 
duct, i.e. upright, integer, probus, honestus^ 
Joh nvii. 18. Phil. iv. 8. Hom. II, xii. 433, 
AX-iid Lvo's, i), 6i/, adj. I. true, as con- 
formed to tridh, John iv. 37. xix. 35 ; real, 
unfeigned, John xvii. 3, 6 /uoVos dX. Geos : 
opp. to gods falsely so called, 1 Th. i. 9. 
1 John V. 20. Rev.* iii. 7. Said of what is 
true in li^oi^, genuine, reed, opj). to false and 
pretended, John i. 9. iv. 23. 1 John ii. 8. 
Lu. xvi. 11, & Class. So v dX. dpiTrEXo^, 
John XV. 1. 6 dX. upT09 ektov ovpauov, 
of which the manna was a type, John vi. 
32. 1] criajut} 77 dX., Heb. viii. 2, meaning, 
' the heavenly tabernacle.' SoTa dX. dyia, 
' true sanctuary,' in heave?i, as opp. to the 
earthly co2^y, Heb. ix. 24.— II. truth-loving, 
veracious, John vii. 28. Rev. iii. 14. xix. 

9, 11. xxi. 5. xxii. 6. — III. sincere, up- 
right, said of the heart, Heb. x. 22 ; of a 
judge, or judgment, upright, just. Rev. vi. 

1 0. XV. 3. xvi. 7. xix. 2, et Sept. 
'AXii%ui, f. 770-60, (a later form for 

dXico,) to pound in a hand-mill, to grind. 
Matt. xxiv. 41. Lu. xvii. 35. 

'AA.7)6a)§, adv. {dX7]6})^,) truly, really, 
certainly. Matt. xiv. 33, & oft. ''AA.7jew9 
XiyEiv, ' to speak assuredly,' Lu. ix. 27. 
xii. 44. xxi. 3, and Class. 

'AX I £ us, £a)§, o, (aXs, sea,) a -fisher- 
man. Matt. iv. 18, 19. Mk. i. 16, sq. and 
Class. 

*AXi£ua), f. Ev<T(X), {dXiEv^,) to fish, 
John xxi. 3, and Class. 

'AXt^co, f. /o-o), {dX<s, salt,) to sprinkle 
ivith salt, to preserve byscdting. Matt. v. 13. 
Mk. IX. 49, where see my notes. 

'AX i (Ty 77 ^la, aTO§, to, {dXicryEos, to 
pollute,) pollution, abomination, said of 
meat sacrificed to idols. Acts xv. 20. 

'AXXa. An adversative particle, de- 
rived from dXXo's, and originally a neut. 
plur., indicating opposition to something 
else. Hence it serves to note both oppo- 
sition and transition. In N. T. it signifies 
BUT, in various modifications. I. but, as 
denoting antithesis, or transition; 1) in 
direct antith. after neg., ou or fx^^, Matt. 
iv.4. V. 17. So 01/ jjiovov — dXXd Koi, 'not 
only, but also,' John v. 18. xi. 52, & oft. 
2) in em})hatic antith. after a full nega- 
tion, bid, hut rather, or on the contrary, 
Lu.i.60, ou)(i, dXXd KXi]d7](TETaL 'I. xiii. 
3. Rom, iii. 31. Lu, xiii. 5. xviii. 13, & 
elsewh. So in the beginning of a clause 
which asserts the contrary of what precedes, 
Lu. xiv. 10, 13. Acts ii.^'l6. 1 Cor. xii. 22. 
1 Pet. ii. 20. So aX.X' ou or oux^ ; «^ 



AAA 



1 



5 



A AY 



pofiiis ? 3) often, and chiefly, used \vlicre 
the discoiuse or train of thought is broken 
off, or partially interrupted, whether by an 
objection^ as Roni. x. 18, sq. 1 Cor. xv. 
35 ; or by a correction or limitation of what 
precedes, Mk. xiv. 3(). John xi. 11, "22. 
Rom. xi. 4. 1 Cor. viii. 7, & elsewhere ; 
or by some phrase modifi/imi or explaining 
what preceded, especially after ^ttf, ycio, 
or 0£ ; or by an inter ro(/c(tio//^ as Matt. xi. 
8, sq. Lu. vii. 25 ; or by a phrase of in- 
citement^ when it is followed by a partic, 
Acts x. 20, & oft. 4) it marks transition^ 
without a direct antithesis, as Mk. xiv. 28, 
dWa fx&Tcc TO kyspdrji/ai "Trpod^co 
Vjud? ei? -riju VaXiXaLav. John xvi. 7. 
Acts XX. 24, & oft. So after an interrog. 
implying a negative, John vii. 49, etal. — II. 
but^ in a continuative sense, tmt noic^ but 
indeed^ but farther^ moreover. 1) gener. 
as making a transition in the progress of 
discourse, Mk. xiii. 24. Lu. vi. 27. xi. 42, 
& elsewh. 2) emphatically, where there is 
a gradation in the sense, bid still more., yea 
even., Lu. xxiii. 15. John xvi. 2. Lu. xii. 
7. xvi. 21. 2 Cor. vii. 11. Phil. iii. 8. 
— III. yet., nevertlieless., or assuredly., in an 
apodosis after the conditional particles £i, 
&c. Rom. vi. 5. 1 Cor. iv. 15. ix. 2. 
Mk. xiv. 29. 2 Cor. v. 16. xi. 6. Col. ii. 5. 
— IV. ctW 77, after a negation, otlier than., 
except, unless, Mk. ix. 8. 1 Cor. iii. 5. Lu. 
xii. 51. 2 Cor. i. 13. 

'AXX a cr crco, f. a^w, (aA.Xo§,) to change^ 
trans. 1) prop, to change., as the form or 
nature of a thing, to transform., as the 
voice or tone. Gal. iv. 20 ; to change., whe- 
ther for the better, I Cor. xv. 51, sq., or 
for the worse, Heb. i. 12 ; also fig. d\\, to. 
£0?7, ' to change the customs, by doing them 
away,' Acts vi. 14. 2) to change., i. e. one 
thing for another, to ejcchange., Rom. i. 23, 
aW. Ti]v oo^av tov Qeov kv bfxoLMfxaTL., 
' for an image set up in the place of the 
true God.' 

' XWaxoQ ^v., Sidv.fro?n another -place'., 
John x. 1. Sept. and Class. 

'AA-Xi] y o,o £ o), f. rjcro), (aA.\os&ayo- 
p£uw,) to allegorize., speak in allegory, 
Gal. iv. 24, ILtivcl so-tl dXXriyopov/iXEva^ 
^ are said allegorically,' in a mystical sense. 

' A \ X 77 /V o u t a, Heb. for ' Praise ye Jab 
(i. e. Jehovah,) Rev. xix. 1, 3, 4, 6. 

'AXX?7Xto!/, Gen. plur. of reciproc. 
pron. each other, one another, Matt. xxiv. 
10. John XV. 12, & oft. 

' A X X o y £ y rj ?, £0§, o, 77, ad j . ( aXXo? & 
y£i/os,) 0/ another race or nation, i. e. not 
a Jew, Lu. xvii. 18, and Sept. 

"AX \ o fxai, f. akoxiixai, aor. 1. rfKufx^v. 
I. to leap., jump, spring, as a m.an, intrans., 
Acts iii. 8. xiv. 10. Sept. and Class. — II. to 
bubble up, ?is water from a spring, Jo. iv. 14. 



"A XX OS, 7;, o, adj. other, not the same. 
I. ivithout tlie article, other, another, some 
other. 1) simply. Matt. ii. 12. xiii. 33, 
& oft. ; another besides. Matt. xxv. 16. 
]\Ik. xii. 32, & oft., as marking succes- 
sion, i. e. in the second or third place, 
Mk. xii. 4. Rev. xii. 3. xiii. 11, et al. 
2) distribntively, when repeated, or joined 
with other pronoims, as outos, aXX«§» 
Matt. viii. 9 ; oi /uku — aWoL Sk, 'some — 
others.' Matt. xiii. 5 — 8, et al. — II. with 
the article, the other. Matt. v. 39. x. 23, & 
elsewh. Rev. xvii. 10, 6 aXXo5, the re- 
maining one,' and oi aXXot, *" the rest,' 
1 Cor. xiv. 29, & oft. 

' AW OTP LosTTL a ICO Ira's, ov, 6, 77, adj. 
(rtXXo-r/)io9 & gTrtcTKOTTos,) onetvho busies 
himself in ivhat does not concern him, equiv. 
to dWoTpLOTrpayv'S, 

'AXXoTf)tos, ia, Lov, adj. (aXXo5,) 
alienus, not one''s oiun. I. prop, anotlier's, 
i. e. belonging to another, Lu. xvi. 12. 
John x. 5. Rom. xiv. 4. xv. 20. 2 Cor. x. 
15, sq. 1 Tim. v. 22. Heb. ix. 25.— II. 
strange, foreign, not one' sown; whether of 
things, as a country, Acts vii. 6. Heb. xi. 
9 ; or of persons who do not belong to any 
family, strangers. Matt. xvii. 25, sq. — III. 
by impl. hostile, Heb. xi. 34, of heathen 
enemies, i. e. Gentiles. 

AXXo' ^uXos, ou, 6, 77, adj. (aXXos & 
<puXi],) of another race or nation, not a 
Jew, Acts X. 28. Sept. and Class. 

'A XX 60 9, adv. otheridse, 1 Tim. v. 25. 
Sept. and Class. 

AXoa to, f. 77(Tw, to beat, thrash, Lat. 
trituro, namely, with oxen, 1 Cor. ix. 9,sq. 
1 Tim. V. 18. Sept. and Class. 

"AXoyos, ov, 6, 77, adj. (a, Xoyo?,) 
devoid of reason, 1) said of persons, irra- 
tional, brute, 2 Pet. ii. 12. Ju. 10, dXoya 
^toa. 2) of things, unreasonable, absuj'd. 
Acts xxv. 27, and Class. 

AX 077, 779, ?7, the name of a tree which 
grows in India, of which the wood is highly 
aromatic, and was used by the Orientals 
generally as a perfume, but by the Egyp- 
tians and others for embalming, John xix. 
39. 

"AX 9, aX69, TO, salt, Mk. ix. 49. Sept. 
and Class. 

'AX i;/<:o9, 77, 6v, adj. (from aX9,) salt^ 
bitter, Ja. iii. 12, and Sept. Plato, p. 86. 

'AXiJ7ro9, OV, 6, 77, adj. (a, Xu7r77,) 
free from sorrow, Phil. ii. 28, and Class, 
esp. Plato. 

'AXuo-is, £009, 77, a chain, bond., 

1) prop. Rev. xx. 1. Acts xxi. 33, et al. 

2) nietaph. bonds, imprisonment, Eph. vi. 
20. 2 Tim. i. 16. Acts xxviii. 20. 

AX U<T£T£X77 9, £09, 6, 7/, adj. (ff, 

XvarLTtXii's,) pi'op. gainless, unprrq/itable ; 



A A ^2 



1 



6 



A M E 



hence, by implic, liurtful, Heb. xiii. ]7, 
and Class, esp. Polyb. 

"A A. coy, (jovo9^ o, 77, ^xoT^. a tJii^esJiing- 
Jloor. In N. T. by meton. the produce 
thereof, corn^ Matt. iii. 12. Lu. iii. 17. 

'AXcoTT?)^, £K'09, ?7, a fox^ prop. Matt, 
viii. 20. Lu. ix. 58; metaph. a cunning 
person^ Lu. xiii. 32, and Class. 

"AXwcrt?, £0)9, t), (aXto-K'w,) ^Ae ac^ 
o/* catcliing^ prop, said of animals. So 
2 Pet. ii. 12, yEy^wiifxlva £i§ aXcoorLv kul 
(pOopdv. And so captura in Pliny. Else- 
where only used of the taking of a city, 
or of the being caught in the commission, 
or convicted, of a crime. 

'A/ia, adv. and prep., togetlier, together 
ifith. I. as adv. 1) said of tldngs^ 'at 
the same time,' Acts xxiv. 26. xxvii. 40. 
Col. iv. 3. 1 Tim. v. 13. 2) of persons, 
together, in company, 1 Th. iv. 17. v. 10. 
Rom. iii. 12, and Sept. — II. as prep., 
rvith ^ together icith, foil, by dat.. Matt. xiii. 
29, dfj.a avTo1<i\ xx. 1, cifxa irpto'c. And 
so in Class., dixa k'co, and a/ot' i]jULepa. 

'A fiaQi)?, £09, o, fj, adj. {a^ /uLavdavo),) 
untaught, unlearned, 2 Pet. iii. 10, and 
often in Class. 

* Xfxa p avT Lvo^, ou, d, tj, adj. (a, 
pLapaivofxaL,) prop, unfading; metaph. 
long-enduring, 1 Pet. v. 4, and lat. Class. 

' A pio. p avTO'5, ov, o, t], adj. equiv. to 
the preceding, 1 Pet. i. 4. 

^ApLapTOLVCt), f. Tt'iarfJO, prop, 771255, 

in aiming at a mark, or going a road ; but 
gener. metaph. I. to err i?i opinion, to swerve 
from the truth, absol. 1 Cor. xv. 3, kul 
fii] dpLapTavs^E, ' swerve not from the 
true faith,' Tit. iii. 11. — II. to err in ac- 
tion, as to a prescribed law, to do ivrong, 
to sin. 1 ) gener. and absol. oiany sin. Matt, 
xxvii. 4. John v. 14, & oft. So d/nap- 
n-dviLv djULapTLav, 1 John v. 16, and Sept. 
2) foil, by £t9 with ace, to sin against 
any one, to tf rong him. Matt, xviii. 15,21. 
Lu. XV. 18, 21. xvii. 3, sq. Acts xxv. 8. 
1 Cor. vi. 18. viii. 12. — III. dfiapirdvEiv 
kvuoTTLov TLvo?, froui the Heb., to do evil 
in the sicjJit of any one, to aggrieve him, Lu. 
XV. 21, and Sept. 

' A/iid pi-ri pLU, aT09, to, {dp.apTdva),) 
prop, a miss in one\ aim, failure ; metaph. 
a mistake, error. In N.T. a transgression, 
or sin, Mk. iii. 28. iv. 12. Rom. iii. 25. 
I Cor. vi. 18. Sept. and Jos. 

^ Ap. a p^ la, a9, [d^xapTdvoo,) prop. 
a miss in one'' s aim, and metaph. a failure. 
In N. T., I. deviation from the truth, error, 
John viii. 46. Ti9 kXiyx^'- P-^ nrspi d/xap- 
Tia's ; opp. to dX-ndiia. xvi. 8, sq. Thuc. 
i. 32 — II. sin, i. e. deviation from any 
prescribed law, or rule of duty, whether 
gener. or spec. 1) gener. I\Tatt. iii. 6. ix. 2. 
Mk. i. 4. John ix. 34. 1 Cor. xv. 3. Heb. 



iv. 15, & oft. 2) spec, of particular sins, 
the nature of which is to be gathered from 
the context, John viii. 21. 2 Pet. ii. 14. 
Heb. xi. 25. xii. 1, et al. 3) by meton., 
abstr. for concr., dp.apTLa for d/xapTco- 
Xo9, sinfid, either as causing sin, Rom. vii. 
7, 6 v6p.o<s dpcapTLa ; or as committing it, 
2 Cor. V. 21. Heb. xii. 4. 4) by meton. 
the practice, or habit, of siiining, Rom. iii. 
9. V. 12, et al. 5) by meiow . proneness to 
sin, sivfd desire, John viii. 34. Rom, vi. 
1,2, et al. — III. from the Heb., the impu- 
tation or consequences of sin, its guilt and 
punishment ; as in the phrases, a'lpsiv Ti}u 
dpLupTLuu, John i. 29. 1 John iii. 5. dOi- 
Tiicri^ dp.apTLa<s, Heb. ix. 26. 'TrepLsXeTu 
dp.apTLa<5, Heb. x. 11. dcpiivai dp.ap- 
TLa<s, and dcpaai^ dpiupTLwv, 'remis- 
sion of sin,' i. e. its punishment. Matt. ix. 
2, 5, 6. xxvi. 28. Lu. vii. 48. 'ix^^-v dpi., 
' to lie under sin,' i, e. its guilt and punish- 
ment, John ix. 41. xv. 22, 24. I John i. 8. 

1 Cor. XV. 17. Heb. ix. 28, x^P^^ 
'without sin,' i.e. 'he shall appear the 
second time not eh dQiTY\crLv dfxapTLa's^ 
as said in ver. 26. 

'A/x a p Tu .0 09, ov,6,t], adj. (a, pcapTv- 
pioo,) without ivitness. Acts xiv. 17, and 
Class. 

'A/xapTa)Xo9, ov, 6, 1;, adj. (from 
a/xa'pTci), as <ptLcuiK6*s from (psidco,) 
prop, erring from a mark, or wa7i- 
dering from a road. In N. T. both as 
adj. and subst, I. as adj. erring from 
the divine law, sinful; 1) gener. Mk. viii. 
38, yevEa dp.apTwXw. Lu. xiii. 2. Rom. 

iii. 7. V. 8. Gal. ii. 17. Ja. iv. 8. And so 
dvi]p or dvdpcoTTo^ dp.., Lu. v. 8. xxiv. 7. 
John ix. 16, 24. yuvi] dp.., Lu. vii. 37,39. 
2) ohiioocious to the consequences of sin, 
Rom. V. 19, dpLapTuciXoL KaTeaTadiiaav. 
vii. 13. Gal.ii. 15. Ju.l5. — II. as a subst. 
a sinner, impious person ; 1) gener. Matt, 
ix. 10. Mk. ii. 15, & oft. 2) spec, in the 
language of the Jews, by whom the term 
d.fxapTui\oL, ' impious persons,' was applied 
to foreigners. Gentiles or Pagans, and con- 
sequently is equiv. to Ta Idvy], Matt. xxvi. 
45. Mk. xiv. 41, and sometimes in Sept. 

"Ap.axo^^ ov, 6, ri, adj. (a, p^d^o- 
fxai, as <p&Lo6's fr. (pELdop.aL,) who doestiot 
fight, prop, not disposed to fight, Xen. Cyr. 

iv. 1,8. In N. T. not quarrelsome.^ I Tim. 
iii. 3. Tit. iii. 2. 

'A /I act), f. 770-0), {dpia,) to collect toge- 
ther, Hom. IJ. xxiv. 451. In N. T. to 
7'eap, to harvest, Ja. v. 4, and Class. 

'A £ 0 u cr TO 9, ov, 6, (a, pcedvu),) ame- 
th/st, a precious stone of a deep purple or 
violet colour, Rev. xxi. 20. 

'AfxEXlco, f. ?7(ro), (a, fxiXsi,) to be 
careless of, to neglect; absol. Matt. xxii. 5, 

2 Pet. i. 12; with genit. I Tim. iv. 14. 
Heb. ii. 3. viii. 9. Sept. and Class. 



A M i: 



17 



A M (J) 



0Ojuai,) ill Class, ijener. act. fuiding 
fault; in N. T. pass, blameless^ Lii. i. (). 
Phil. ii. 15. iii. 6. 1 Th. iii. 13. Heb. viii. 7. 
Xen. Cyr. iii. 10, 2. 

'A/iE/x-TrTco?, adv. blamelessly^ 1 Th. 

11. 10. V. '23. Apocr. and Class. 

' AfJL i p I fxvo£^ ou, d, ?), adj. («, /zepi- 
/ii/a,) devoid o/aiLvious care^ INlatt. xxviii. 
14. 1 Cor. vii! 32. Apocr. and lat. Class. 

'A./U£Td6£Tos, ou, d, ?j, adj. (a, yusra- 
Tt'yij^i,) prop, immoveable^ as Pollux On. 
iv. 156, aa-rpa afj.sTU.d&'ra^ aKLV)]Tu ; 
and hence, by inipl., stable^ immutable; 
both of persons^ Plut. viii. 686, 4 ; and of 
thinfis^ Heb. vi. 17, to dasT. t7;§ /3ou/\?/?. 
So Pol. ii. 32, 5, ecu. kTril^oXv, 3 Mace. v. 

12, ot/x. XoyKTfXOU. 
'AjUETttKii'i'jj'TO?, OU, d, 7j, adj. (a, 

fjiETaKLvtu),) prop, as said of things, im- 
moveable ; metaph. as said of persons, im- 
midable^ stable^ 1 Cor. xv. 58, eopaToi yi- 
i/£O-0f , an. So Dion. Hal. viii. 74, (ii^aiov 

T£ /cat djX. kv T0t5 KpL^tT<JL. 

'A|U£Ta,u£\?jT09, Of, d, adj. (a, 
IxiTafxiXojxai^ pcenitetme,) prop.?20z; to be 
repented of^ not needing repentance, Pol. 
xxi. 9, 11, dfx. irpoaipt(TL<5. 2 Cor. vii, 10. 
Hence, unchangeable^ sure and certain^ 
Rom. xi. 29, dix.Tay^apLo-fxaTaTov Qeov. 

'AfXETavoiiTO^, oi;, d, adj. (a, 
fxETavoeu)^) iiijieocibly impenitent^ obdurate^ 
Rom. ii. 5, Kupoia da. Apocr. and Class. 

^A/i.£T/oo?, ou, d, 1], adj. (a, jutTpov.,) 
ivithout measure., immoderate., 2 Cor. x. 13, 
sq. ; £i5 -ra dfxeTpa., adv. for d/x£Tpcu9, zwz- 
moderately., beyond due bounds. Jos. and 
lat. Class. 

'A/xj/y, from Heb. pi<<, which is pro- 
perly an adj. true, certain; but often used 
as an adv. ceHainly., usually at the end of 
a sentence, serving to confirm what pre- 
cedes, and invoking the fulfilment of what 
is spoken, in the sense fiat I yivoLTol 
' So be it.' In N. T. occ. I. as an ac/;.. Rev. 
i. 18. iii. 14, d'A^u?;//, the true." — II. as 
an adv. ]) at the end of a sentence., after 
ascriptions of praise, &c. in the sense so be 
it! Matt. vi. 13. Rom, i. 25. ix. 5. Rev. 
i. 6. v. 14, et al. oft. ; also after benedic- 
tions^ or invocations, Rom. xv. 33. 1 Cor. 
XYi. 24. Heb. xiii. 25. 2) at the beginning 
of a sentence., by way of asseveration, tndy., 
assuredly., verily., Matt. v. 18. xvi.28. Lu. 
iv. 24, often repeated, as John iii. 3. v. 19. 
Sept. 

'A/XTj-r wp, opo9, d, 1/, adj. (a, /x7jTf]p,) 
prop, ivithout mother., as said of the gods, 
not born of a mother, or deprived of a 
mother ; in N. T. used, at Heb. vii. 3, 
of Melchizeder, in the sense ' whose mother 
is not mentioned in the genealogies.' 
'A/u t ai/TOS, d, T],adj. (a, /xtatyco,) prop. 



unstained., unsoiled., and met. U7idefiled by 
sin ; so Heb. vii. 26. Wisd. viii. 20 ; as said 
of marriage, chaste., Heb. xiii. 4. Wisd. iii. 

13; of the worship of God, sincere., 
Ja. i. 27 ; of the heavenly inheritance, in- 
violate., 1 Pet. i. 4, and Apocr. 

"A/x^os, ov, d, (a later form for xbdjx- 
/xo§,) sand., Matt. vii. 26. Rom, ix. 27. 
Heb. xi. 12. Rev. xii. 18. xx. 8, & Class. 

'Am 1^0 9, ou, d, a lamb ; used in N. T. 
of Christ delivered over to death, as a 
lamb to sacrifice : not only in reference to 
the patience with which he endured a cruel 
death, but the spotless sacrifice oflrered up 
in himself for the sins of men, 1 Pet. i, 19. 
Hence in John i, 29, 36, he is called d 
dp.vo's Tov Qsov. 

'A^oij8>j, 1 j, (d,u£ tySoj, commuto,) 
1) prop, an interchange., or exchange., 
Horn. Od. xiv. 521. 2) a retrihution. 
whether for e\dl, in the sense of indem- 
nity., as in Horn. Od. xii. 382; or for 
good, requital., as of kind offices, 1 Tim. 
V. 4, diuiOL(3a<i dirooLOovaL. Joseph. Ant. 
i. 16, 2. Plato, p. 202. 

'A/x7r£Xo9, ou, ?), a vine-tree., Matt, 
xxvi, 29. Mk. xiv. 25. Lu, xxii. 18. Ja. 
iii. 12. In John xv. 1, 4, 5, and Rev. xiv. 
18, it is an emblem of prosperity. 

'A/xTTfiXoupy 05, ou, d, 7], (d/X7r£\09 

& £pyor/,) a vine-dresser., Lu. xiii, 7. 

'A/UTTfiXwi/, cuz^os, d, a vineyard^ Matt. 
XX. 1, & oft. Sept. and lat. Class. 

'Afxv'vuj, f. ufto, prop, to avert., repeU 
Horn. 11. i. 456 ; thence to aid., Thuc. iii. 67. 
In the Mid. form, which alone occurs in 
N. T., it means prop, to avert from oneself 
resist ; but in Acts vii. 24, ijixiwaro, it has 
simply the force of the active, to aid., de- 
fend. 

'A/x(^i/3d\X(o, f, /3aXt7), prop, to cast 
or throw around., as a garment, Plom. Od, 
xiv, 342. In N, T. said of a net, to cast 
around (for the purpose of inclosing fish,) 
Mk. i. 16, in later edd. Hah, i, 17. Comp. 
Lu. V. 6. 

' A fx (p L jSX 1) a T p ov. ou, TO, (fr. d,u(pL- 
jSdXXci),) lit. ti'hat is throicn round any 
person or thino-, as a garment., Eur. Hel. v. 
1085 ; or a fish-net, (M^^tt. iv. 18. Mk. i. 
16. See Hab. i. 15 — 17,) a sort of drag- 
net, enclosing any fish within its compass. 

^ A fxcp LEVvv jJiL, i. iaco, 1. in'O]). to pid 
on, to clothe ; Pass. foil, by au with dat. 
Matt. xi. 8. Lu. vii. 25. aToXiju, or some 
other acc. of dress, being either expressed, 
as in Class, and Joseph. Ant. iii. 8, 7. viii. 
7, 3, or imderstood. — II. metaph. to de- 
corate, or adorn. Matt. vi. 30. Lu. xii. 28, 
diJiCp. Tov xop'TOL'. So Job xl. 5, d/utp. 
do^au Kal TL}xt]v. 

"Aficpodov, ou, TO, {dficpuj, d^d?,) 
prop, a place ichere two ways meet ; but in 



18 



ANA 



N. T. an oj^en 'place^ or imde street^ Mk. 
xi. 4. Sept. 

'AfxcpOTspo?^ ipa, £pou, tidj. each of 
two. Plur. d/jicporEpoi., ai^ a, both^ (said 
only of two,) Matt. ix. 17. Lii. i. 6, 7. v. 
7, & oft. Tous dfxcp.^ ' both of them,' 
Acts xxiii. 8. to. d/ix<p.^ ' both of these 
(things,)' i. e. the resurrection, and the 
existence of angels and spirits. 

'AyUCO U 7JT0 9, Of, O, tj, adj. (oT, /ULCO- 

^iofj.ai^) blameless ii. 15. 2 Fet.iii. 14. 

" A fj.a} fxov^ ou, TO, amomum^ an odori- 
ferous plant, used in compounding precious 
ointment. Rev. xviii. 13. 

"Xfjius fxo<5^ ou, o, tj, adj. {a, jULU}juio<5^) 
spotless^ tvithout blemish. 1. prop, as said 
of victims., Lev. i. 10. xxii. 19 — 22'; in N. T. 
used fig. of Christ, d/uLVuu dfxch/jiou^ 1 Pet. 
i. 19. Heb. ix. 14, o§ kavTov irpoa-nv^yKEu 
d/nco/uLou TM Bsco. — II. mctaph. blameless., 
Eph. i. 4. V. 27.' Col. i. 22. Ju. 24. Kev. 
xiv. 5. 

"A I/, I. a PARTICLE, used with the Opt., 
Subj., and Indie, moods ; sometimes to be 
rendered by perhaps, hut more usually not 
to be expressed in English, and only im- 
parting to a proposition a stamp of ziu- 
certainty., and mere possibility^ and indi- 
cating dependence on circumstances. Thus 
it serves to modify or strengthen the force 
of the Opt. and Subj., wliile it can also 
affect the signif. of tlie Indic. (the Pres. 
and Perf. excepted) and other verbal forms. 
This particle stands after one or more 
words in a clause, and is thus distinguished 
from du for kdv^ as a conj. (See next arti- 
cle.) In N. T. the use of dv is generally 
conformed to Classical usage ; but some- 
times recedes from it. i. as conformed 
to Classical usage., 1) with the Opt., in a 
clause not dependent, it indicates tliat the 
supposition or possibility expressed by the 
simple Opt. will, under the circumstances 
implied by ax/, be realized. Hence it is 
found partly in fozr^, tuishes, &c., as Acts * 
xxvi. 29, zv^aLfx)]v dv tw 0£w, 'I could 
pray to God,' (and, under the circumstances, 
I do pray to Him,) and partly in interro- 
gations., direct or indirect, where the thing 
inquired about is possible, or certain, but 
the inquirer is uncertain when or how it is 
to take place, Lu. i. 62, t'i dv ^eXoi Ka- 
XslcrQaL avTov, 'how he might wish him 
to be called.' Lu. ix. 46. Acts ii. 12. v. 24, 
et al. 2) with the Subj,, in 7rJative claiises., 
and connected with relative words, which 
are thus rendered more general., and indi- 
cate mere possibility; and that partly with 
relative pronouns., or particles., where dv 
implies some uncertainty whetlier or not, 
or where, the thing will take jdace, and 
may be expressed by tlie Latin cuncfie, and 
our ever., soever. Thus o§ dv., ' whoever, 
whosoever ;' b-nov dv^ ' wheresoever ;' ois 



ai/, ' in whatever manner :' and also, partly, 
with p)articles of time., as k'ojs a//, until., the 
time when being indefinite ; r]vLKa dv., 
whenever., as soon as^ indefinite ; dv, 
^ when, as soon as,' indefinite ; oadKi? a//, 
' as often as, how often soever :' or, lastly, 
with the illative panicle ottw?, that., m 
order that. 3) with the Indic. in the his- 
torical tenses (but not the primary ones) 
dv is used in the apodosis of a conditional 
sentence in Mhich el precedes, and indi- 
cates that ' the thing in question would 
have taken place, if that which is the sub- 
ject of the protasis had also taken place ; 
but that, in fact, neither the one nor the 
other has taken place,' Matt. xi. 21, el ev 
Tupo) kyivovTO al SwdjUEL'S — TrdXai dv 
kv cruKKu^ Kai (nrodcp /ixet Evo^aav^ ' if 
these miracles had been done in Tyre, they 
would have repented ;' but the miracles 
were not done, and they did not repent. 
.John viii. 42, eI 6 Gaos Trariip vfxtov 
i]v, 7/ya7raT£ dv kfxk, ' if God were 
your father, ye would love me;' but 
neither is true. — ii. to advert to devi- 
ations from Classical usage., 1) when, in 
relative clauses, a relative pronoun with 
dv is followed by the Indic. instead of the 
Subj. or Opt., which occurs in N. T. when 
a thing is spoken of as actually taking 
place, not at a definite time, nor in a de- 
finite manner, but as often as opportunity 
presents itself. It is thus found only with 
apreter. Mk. vi. 56, kuI ouol dv TjirTovTo 
avTov., 'and as many as, however many, 
touched him,' &c. So also Acts ii. 45. iv. 
35. 1 Cor. xii. 2, and Sept. 2) when 
used as an adverb, or rather in a false 
construction, jr>e?7z(rj3s, 2 Cor. x. 9. 1 Cor. 
vii. 5. — II. a CONJUNXTION, put for idi/, 
and consequently placed at the beginning 
of a clause, John xx. 23, & Class. 

'Az/a, (with primary sense, «/>,) prep, 
governing, in the poets, the dative, 
on or upon; but in prose writers, the 
acc. 072, in. In N. T. with acc. only 
in two significations, I. when forming, 
with its acc, a periphrasis for an adv., as 
dvd ixipo<s, by turns., alterncdely ., 1 Cor. 
xiv. 27. dvd fxkaov. foil, by gen. ' in 
the midst of,' between ; said both of 
place., Matt. xiii. 25. Mk. vii. 31. Rev. vii. 
17 ; and person., 1 Cor. vi. 5. — II. with 
numeral words it umrks distribidion., Matt. 
XX. 9, 10, dvd di]vdpLov. Mk.vi.4. Lu.ix. 
14. ver. 3, dvd Sua. John ii. 6. Rev. iv. 8. 
In composition it denotes, I) up., upward., 
as dva(3uLvu) ; 2) back, again, (Lat. re-,) 
implying repetition, increase, &c. as dva- 
kulvlX^u}, dva^coptOi), dvuyLvcoarKU). 

'AvajSad /jid?, ou, 6, {dva(3aLva),) 

1) the act of ascending, Pausan. x. 5, 9. 

2) by meton. the means of ascent, as 
steps, or stairs, Acts xxi. 35, 40, and some- 



ANA 



19 



A N A 



times in tlie later writers, as Joseph., Pliilo, 
Sept., Dio Cass., and -i^lian. 

'AvafSaLvco^ f. (3vaoiuLai^ prop, to 
cause to asce?id^ to moiud., Ildot. i. 80 ; but 
gener. as in N. T. to go up^ ascend., eonstr. 
with diro or ii<. foil, by gen. of place 
U'hence., and with ti?, tTri, or Trpor, foil, 
by ace. of place whither ; 1) as said botli 
of persons and of things animate, or ani- 
mals ; and expressing ascent of any kind, 
as ascending a monntain, li()nse-top,heaven, 
or climbing into a tree, scaling a wall, and 
embarking on board a vessel ; also, of tishes. 
Matt. xvii. 27, Tou duufSrtuTa irpuiToif 
iX^vu^ *■ coming up, mounling to the hook,' 
said grapldce. 2) as used of things inani- 
mate, which are said to ascend^ as smoke. 
Rev. viii.4 ; or plants, to spring up^ Matt, 
xiii. 7 ; of a report, to arise^ Acts xxi. 31, 
dvifii) cpd(TL<s T(jo x^XLap^u) : as used of a 
thought, to come iqo^ojise in the mind, Lu. 
xxiv. 38. Acts vii. 23; or to occur to the 
memory^ Acts x. 4. 

'A va^d \ \ CO, f. /3a\co, gener. to raise 
or cast npicard, {dud for uuco,) but some- 
times, to cast back^ as when a horse throws 
his rider; also met. to put ojf^ defer ^ Horn. 
Od. xix. 384, aya/3. di^\ov ; also in the 
Mid. dua(3dX\o/uLaL. Acts xxiv. 22, du. 
auTou?, 'put them oif in their cause.' 

'A'i/a|3i/3a'^tt), f. acrto, to cause to as- 
cend^ or mounts as on ship-board, or horse- 
back, or in a chariot ; also to haul to land^ 
as said of ships, Xen. Hist. i. 1,2; or to 
draic up^ as out of a pit. Gen. xxxvii. 28. 
In N. T. to draw on shore ^ as said of a 
drag-net. Matt. xiii. 48. 

'Aua^XtTTo)^ f. vl/fo, I. to look up, at, 
or upo?i ; absol. to raise the eyes from the 
ground, Mk. viii. 24. Lu. xxi. 1 ; or with 
Matt. xiv. 19, dvajB. si's t6v ovpauov. 
Acts xxii. 13, di>a(3. eig ah-rov. — II. to 
look or see again, to recover sight. Matt. xi. 
5, & oft. Said improprie, John ix. 11, 15, 
18, of one born blind, to receive sight. — ■ 
III. to look again and again, and, by impl., 
attentively, to examine closely, Mk. xvi.4. 

' Av d^\i\l/ L<S, £609, 77, {ciua^XiTTU},) 

recovery of sight, Lu. iv, 18, and Class. 

' Avaj^odui, f. 7?cra), to lift up the voice, 
cry aloud; absol. Matt, xxvii. 46. Mk. 
XV. 8. Lu. ix. 38. Sept. and Class. 

' Ai/a ^oXi], 7)^, 1], {duafSdXXu),) prop. 
a throwing up, or ojf; also a putting-off, 
or delay, Acts xxv. 17, and Class. 

^Avdyaiov, ou, to, (ai/a, up, above, 
and yala, for yy,) same as dvcoysou, or 
ducoyaLou, a room above ground, an upper 
room, such as was used by the Jews for a 
private apartment, whether for meals, or 
for m.editation and prayer, Mk. xiv. 15. 
Lu. xxii. 12. 

'AvayyiXXoo, f. yeXoo, aor. 2. pass. 



du->]yyiXi]v, to announce, make known, tell^ 
trans. & absol. L of things or events 
past, to relate, or tell, Mk. v. 14, 19. Acts 
xiv. 27. XV. 4. xvi. 38. 2 Cor. vii. 7; to 
inform, John v. 15, and Class. — II. of 
things future, to foretell, Joim xvi. 13, 
and Sept. — 111. in respect o{' l\vi\Q present ^ 
and gener. to show forth or teach, John iv. 
25. xvi. 25. Acts XX. 20, 27. Rom. xv. 

2L 1 Pet. i. 12. 1 John i. 5, & Sept 

lY. as said of evil deeds, to show forth, re- 
veal, confess. Acts xix. 18, & Sept. 

' Av ay svv du3, f. yaoo, to beget again, 
regenerate , by a change of carnal nature 
to sjjiritual, even that of a Christian life, 
1 Pet. i. 3, 23; eq. to 'making any one a 
son of God,' Gal. iii, 26. John i. 12, sq. 

1 John iii. 9. dvcudtu y&vui]6T'jvaL, John 
iii. 3. 

'AuayLvwa-Kw, (f. yvw<JOfxaL, aor. 2. 
dviyvcov, perf. pass, duiyucoaiixai, aor. 1. 
pass. dusyuu)adi]u,) gener., to knoiv accu- 
rately what is done, Hom.Il xiii. 734; spec. 
to knoiv by perusal what is written, z'o read, 
1) for oneself, to learn by reading. Matt, 
xii. 3, 5. xix. 4, and often in N.T.; metaph. 

2 Cor. iii. 2, of an epistle, dvayLvcoaKo- 
/ueifi] vTTo 'irdvTwv, i. e. by implic. mani- 
fest and public. 2) for others, to recite aloud, 
Lu. iv. 16. Col. iv. 16, et al. and Sept. 

' Avay KaX^ix), f. dcroo, {dudynrj,) to 
comjjel any one to do any thing, 1) by 
force, threats, &c. Acts xxvi. 11. 2 Cor. 
xii. 11. Gal. ii. 3, 14. Sept., Apocr., and 
Class. 2) to constrain, by moral motives, 
viz. entreaties, or inducements, to per- 
suade. Matt. xiv. 22. ]\Ik. vi. 45. Lu. xiv. 

23. Gal. vi. 12, and Class. 

' Avay Kalo^, a, ou, adj. (aVay/c?;,) 
prop, compulsory, as in Homer, but some- 
times, as in N. T., necessary ; I. as said 
of things required by nature, 1 Cor. xii. 22, 
or for the support of life, Tit. iii. 14, duay- 
KalaL XP^^^'-' Sept. and Class. — II. of 
things or persons necessary from custom, 
&c. Acts X. 24, dvayKalovs (piXovs, 
near friends. Sept. and Class. — III. the 
neut. dvayKoiov Avith kcTTi, impers., ne- 
cessary, right, proper, as a matter of duty, 
Acts xiii. 46, viJiiv r}u dvayKalou. Phil. i. 

24. Heb. viii. 3. So du. vyjicraardaL, ' to 
think necessary or proper,' 2 Cor. ix. 5. 

'A 2/ a y/c a o"r 60 9, adv. {duayKaa-To^,) 
compidsorily, unicillingly, 1 Pet. v. 2. 

' A i; a y /c ?j, 77, I. gener. necessity, used 
1) as arising from the influence of others, 
constraint, 1 Cor. vii. 37. 2 Cor. ix. 7. 
Philem. 14, and Class. 2) from the dispo- 
sition of the persons themselves, or from 
the circumstances of the case. Matt, xviii. 
7. Heb. vii. 12, 27. ix. 16, 23, and Class. 
3) from the obligation of duty, dvdyKi\y 
'ix^'-^i ' right or proper,' Lu. xiv. 18. 
xxiii. 17. Jude 3. Rom. xiii. 5. 1 Cor. ix. 



ANA 



20 



ANA 



16, and Class. — II. spec, unavoidable cala- 
mity or distress^ Lu. xxi. 23. 1 Cor. vii. 26. 
2 Cor. vi. 4. xii. 10. 1 Th. iii. 7. Sept. 
and later Class. 

'Aj/ay vwpi'^o), f. icrw, in Class, to 
recognize ; in N. T. used only in aor. 1. 
pass. duEyvcopiadriv, in a reflex, sense, to 
make oneself known^ Acts vii. 1 3. 

' A 1/ a y 1/ CO cr i §, €a)§, 77, reading^ whether 
pnhlic or private, Acts xiii. 15. 2 Cor. iii. 
14. 1 Tim. iv. 13, 

'Ai/ayo), f. ^6t>, aor. 2. dvnyayov^ aor. 
1. pass. dvYiX^^V-^-) sense ; to lead^ 

or bring up^ trans, with dat. of pers. or 
£i5 and acc. of place whither, &c. 1) gener. 
from a lower to a higher place, Matt. iv. 1, 
ai/»7)(0?7 EL<s n-i]v Eptyxov^ the hilly desert 
region. Lu. iv. 5, gts opo's vxj/rjXou. ii. 22, 
£t§ 'Ispoa. xxii. 66. Acts ix. 39. xvi. 34. 
As a sacrifice, to bring tip and lay upon 
the altar, as a victim. Acts vii. 41. Sept. 
and Class. ; to bring up ^ f rom "prison^ before 
the judge, Acts xii. 4 ; to bring up from 
tJie dead^ Rom. x. 7. Heb. xiii. 20, and 
Sept. 2) spec, as a nautical term, dud- 
yaiv vavv^ to lead a ship up or out to sea, 
since the sea, as seen from the shore, seems 
to rise. So Class. — Hence, in Class, and 
N. T. mid., dudyEaQai^ scil. ttT vyfc or iu 
TrXoLto^ to put to sea^ Acts xxviii. 11, and 
foil, by aTTo, Acts xiii. 13, and oft. in 
Class. 

'AvadsLKVv/ULL, f. ^o), aor. 1. duidsL^a^ 
I. prop, to show up^ by raising aloft, as a 
torch, Pol. viii. 30, 10'.— II. by impl., to 
show up or forth^ make clear^ Acts i. 24. 
Sept. and Class. — III. to shoiv forth ^ pro- 
claim^ and lience to appoint^ as said of a 
ruler or magistrate, Lu. x. 1. 1 Esd. i. 34. 
2 Mace. xiv. 12, and Class. 

'Al/a^£l^t9, £0)9, 17, [dvaOilKVVIULL^) 

prop, a sho'wing forth^ and hence a bring- 
ing forivard or manifestation, as conse- 
quent on appointment to office, Lu. i. 80, 
€609 ij/mipa^ dvadEL^£.(jo<s avTov^ 'his mani- 
festation as a prophet,' Ecclus. xliii. 6. 
Plut. Mar. c. 8. 

^ Avaoi^o p.aL^ f. -oi^oiiaL^ aor. 1. 
af EOE^a/i?/!/, prop, to talvC upon oneself or 
to oneself. Hence, to receive to one's con- 
fidence^ to confide in^ as promises, Heb. xi. 
17 ; or to one's hospitality.^ equiv. to hiro- 
ciyoikai.^ to entertain.^ Acts xxviii. 7. 

'A 1/ a 5 i (5 o) /X I, f. dd)(T(x), to give up^ or 
hand any thing to any one, Pind. Isth. vi. 
57, and often in the Class. Hence, to 
hand., or deliver., a letter., Acts xxiii. 33. 
Pol. xxix. 10, 7. 

'Ai/a^aw, f. tJo'w, aor. 1. dviX^na-a., 
neut. prop, to live again., Rom. xiv. 9. 
Rev. XX. 5 ; fiof. to live again., to revive., 
recover strength., Rom. vii. 9; metaph. to 
live a new and better life., Lu. xv. 24, 32. 



' A i/ a ^ ij T £ o), f . 770-60, to seek again and 
again., i. e. diligently inquire after., look 
for., Lu. ii. 44. Acts xi. 25. Sept. and 
"Class. 

'A 1/ a ^ 60 1/ 1/ y /X I, f. (jorrct)., to gird up ivith 
a belt or girdle ; mid. to gird up oneself 
trans. Metaph. 1 Pet. i. 13, duaX,. Td<s 
oacpua^ TTj's ^mi/oias, 'who hold their 
minds in constant preparation.' 

A 1/ a ^ 60 TT u |0 £ 60, f. j7(T6o, prop. to kin- 
dle up., rouse., as a fire, Sept. and Class. ; 
met. to rouse up for action, to cidtivate., 
said of spiritual gifts, 2 Tim. i. 6. 1 Mace, 
xiii. 7, dvaX^. to Truev/na. 

'AuaddWco, f. a\6o, 1. prop, to grotv 
green again and flourish, as trees, &c. Ec- 
clus. xlvi. 12. Horn. II. i. 236. II. metaph. 
to flourish again.,to be again prosperous.. Ph. 
iv. 10, or to be reviewed and augmented, 

' Ai/ u6 £ /ma., UTO^., TO, (ai/ocTtOij/xi, to 
lay up,) later form for at'atJjj/ua, prop, any 
thing laid up as an off'ering in the temple 
of any god ; also, any thing consecrated 
to the god, whether inanimate or animate, 
of which the latter could not be redeemed, 
but was to be put to death. Hence dvd- 
dEfxa came to denote a7iy thing irrevocably 
devoted to death., also any thing 07i ivhick 
a curse is laid., as cities and the inhabitants, 
(Josh. vi. 17,18. vii. 1, etal.,) and gener. 
any thing abominable., Deut. vii. 26.. Hence 
its sense in N. T. an accursed thing., or a 
persoji accursed., i.e. ' excluded from the 
favour of God, and devoted to destruction,' 
1 Cor. xii. 3, Xiyziv dvudejua 'I?](roui/. 
xvi. 22. Gal. i. 8, 9. Acts xxiii. 14, di/a- 
difjiaTL dutdefxaTLora/txEV ; intens. ' we 
have bound ourselves under a heavy curse, 
Rom. ix. 3, '>-\bx6p.y]u duddsjuia iivai diro 
Tov XpiCTTou, constr. prsegn. for Y]vy6fx)]v 
dudde/ma Eivai Kai )^60/)/^o/tx£fO9 cctto tou 
Xp., i.e. 'excluded from God's favour, 
separated from Christ and the benefits of 
his death, and devoted to eternal destruc- 
tion, as an expiatory victim in behalf of 
my countrymen.' See my note. 

A « 0 £ a T i 5 60, f. i(r6o, to declare any 
07ie to be an dudBaima., (accursed,) to bind 
by a cu?^se, Mk. xiv. 71, vp^aTo dvadepL. 
scil. eavrou. Acts xxiii. 12, 14,21, & Sept. 

A2/a0£6op£6o, f. 77(r6o, proD. to survey 
attentively^ traus. Acts xvii. 23; metaph. 
to consider., Heb. xiii. 7, and Class. 

'AvaQiiina., aT09, to, (ai/aTi0i7/>it,) 
cmy thing laid zip, (by suspension, deposi- 
tion, or otherwise,) in the Temple, and 
thereby consecrated to God, as an offering 
or sacred gift, Lu. xxi. 5. So often in 
Joseph., Sept., and Class. 

' Avaid s La, a9, 77, [dvaidii^' a, ai0609,) 
tvant of 7nodesty, by importunity which 
knovvs no regard to time, place, or person, 
Lu. xi. 8. Ecclus. xxv. 22. 



ANA 



21 



ANA 



Ai/a tp£ (Tis, £0)9, 7?, (fij/atptw,) I. a 
takiini up^ oJf\ or mvai/^ ;is dead bodies for 
burial, Time. iii. 113. — II. a taking off from 
life, by death, a piUtiiuj to deaths Acts viii. 
1. xxii. 20. — Sei)t. Jos. Ant. ii. 3, 1. viii. 
12, 2. Ildian ii. 13, 1. 

'Ai/atptw, f. ijcro), aor. 2. avuXov^ 
(aya, alpiii),) gener. and in Class, to take 
up^ e. g. from the ground, or to take up or 
o/f^ as dead bodies for burial, Dem. p, 1069. 
In N. T. occ. only in mid. I. to take up, as 
said of children take?i up, i. e. adopted ; 
with allusion to their having been before 
left,asit were, exposed and abandoned. Acts 
vii. 21, dvaiX&To uvtou : and so in Class. 
— II. to take off, or out of the ivay, gener. 
as said 1) of nersons, to put to death, Matt, 
ii.l6. Lu.xxn.2. Actsv. 33, etal. oft. Sept. 
& Class. 2) of things, to do aicay, abolish, 
gener. used of a law, Heb. x. 9, & Class. 

'Ai/aiTio?, iou, 6, adj. (a, aWia,^ 
guiltless, innocent. Matt. xii. 5, 7, and Class. 

' XvaKad iX^dj, f. iaui, {avct, /caOi^oj,) 
intrans., or with kauTov nnderst., to sit up, 
Lu. vii. 15. Acts ix. 40, avEKadicre, ' sat up.' 
So Pint. Philop. 20, poXi's kavrov avsKo.- 
dcas. The term is often used by the Greek 
medical writers of sick persons, who sit up 
in bed. 

'AvuKuiv L'^a),f. i(ju), to renew,!, e. re- 
store any thing to its former state, trans. 
] ) prdp. Sept. Ps. civ. 30, avuK. to irpocr- 
wTTov tT]<s yT]^, et al. Joseph. Ant. ix. 8,4, 
of the repair and restoration of the Temple. 
2) metaph. Heb. \\.Q,'7rakiv auaK. els fis- 
Tavoiav, as said of apostates from the true 
faith, to bring back to repentance,' and 
restore to their former faith. So Barnab. 
Epist., ctvaKaivLcras fj/uLci? iu Trj acpicrsL 
TU)if dfiaoTicov. 

'AvaKaiuoo}, f. cocrw, 1) prop, to re- 
new^ re-fashion. 2) metaph. to renovate or 
reform, by a change from a carnal to a 
spiritual life, 2 Cor. iv. 16, 6 eo-coOey dv- 
dpcoTTos dvaKaivovTai, i. e. by increase in 
faith, hope, and charity, and virtue gene- 
rally. Col. iii. 10, TOi/ dvaKaLvoviuL&vov ah 
iTTLyvcouLv, ' increased and renewed in 
» Christian knowledge.' 

'AvaKatvo}crL9, £w?, 77, [dvaKatvooo,) 

1) -pro^. renewal ; 2) metaph. renovation, 
or reformation in the heart and life, by 
change from a carnal to a Christian life, 
and produced by the renovating influences 
of the Holy Spirit, Rom. xii. 2. Tit. iii. 5, 
did duaKaivu)(T£vos llvsviixaTos dyiov. 

^AvaKaXviTTO), f. xf/oo, 1) prop, to 
unveil, i. e. to remove any thing which 
veils or covers an object, Sept. and Class. 

2) metaj)h. to remove any veil from the 
mi?id, which obstructs the comprehension 
of any thing, as ignorance or prejudice, 
and thereby to cause the person to imder- 



stand, 2 Cor. iii. 14, to KaXvppa pivn 
pil dvaKaXviTTOfxevov, * remains nnwitfi- 
drawn, so that they cannot understand ;' 
and ver. 18, dvaKtKuXvfiixivw TrpoaonTrui, 
namely, by the removal of all impediments 
to knowledge. So also Sept. and Pol. iv. 
85, 6. 

' Av aicd fiTTT u),^. xf/u), I. prop, trans. 
to bend or turn any thing back ; and intrans. 
to bend back one's course, to turn back, 
return. Matt. ii. 12. Acts xviii. 21. Heb. 
xi. 15. Sept. & Class. — II. metaph. of good 
wishes, which become void by being un- 
fulfilled. I ^U. X. 6, 77 £l(177f)J XJfXUiy l(p' 

Vjuu<i ai/a/cti/^iv/Aet, ' shall return to you ;^ 
i. e. not be fulfilled in them. Comp. Is. 
xlv. 23. Iv. 11. 

'AvuKti fxai, i. -KSLoroiuLaL, l)prop. 
lie exposed to vieiv. 2) to be laid out, as a 
corpse, Mk. v. 40. 3) in the later writers 
and N. T., to lay oneself along, i. e. to re- 
cline at table, according to ancient custom 
at meals, Matt. xxvi. 7, 20. Mk. xiv. 18. 
xvi. 14. John xiii. 23, dvuK. kv nrcp k6\- 
TTo) T. 'I., i. e. ' sitting next to him on the 
triclinium.' Hence, to sit down to dinner 
or supper, to dine or sup. Matt. ix. 30. Lu. 
vii. 37, and o duaKeLjmB.vos, ' one who sits 
at table,' a guest, Matt. xxii. 10. John vi. 11. 

'AvaKecftaXaLooj, f. oxrw, {di/d Sc ks~ 
cpdXaiov, a sum or summary,) I) to sum 
up into one, Rom, xiii. 9, ' all the com- 
mandments dvaKscbaXaiovTaL, are sum- 
med up, in this one precept of love.' 2) 
to bring several things i7ito one head, Eph. 
i. 10, dvaK. nrd irdvTa kv X^jictw, where 
see my Note, and comp. Eph. ii. 14, sq. 

^ Av a. kX'i V (a , f. ivth, trans, to cause to 
recline upon, I. prop, to lay any thing or 
person doivn, whether on the ground or on 
a bed, Horn. II. iv. 113. Lu. ii. 7.— II. in 
later usage, to cause to recline at table, &c. 
Mk. vi. 39. Lu. ix. 15. xii. 37 ; Mid. dva- 
KXivoixai^to recline, 'seat oneself at table, 
Matt. xiv. 19, et al. oft. 

' Av aKOTTT OD, f. i/ao), 1) prop. to beat 
or drive back; 2) fig. to impede, hinder. 
Gal. V. 7, Tis u/xas di/iKoxj/s ; in some 
Edd. 

' AvaK p dX^w, f. ^o), to cry aloud, in- 
trans. Mk. i. 23. vi. 49. Lu. iv. 33. viii. 
28. Sept. and later Class. 

' Ava K pT V u), f. Lvu), {dvd intens. & 
KpLvio,) trans. & ahsol. I. prop, to sift 
thoroughly any thing, as flour from bran ; 
— II. metaph. to examine fully or try any 
thing, 1) gener. Acts xvii. 11, dvaK. Tot? 
ypacpd's. 1 Cor. x. 25, fxt^dev dvaKp., 'not 
anxiously inquiring,' i. e. whether the meat 
had been offered to idols or not ; Sept. and 
Class. 2) in a forensic sense, of a judge, 
to decide after examination, Lu. xxiii. 14. 
Acts iv. 9. xii. 19, and Class. — III. in a 



ANA 



22 



ANA 



popular sense, to judge of^ estimate any 
thing, 1 Cor. ii. 14, sq. Also, by impl., 
to judge favourably of \ to appy^ove^ 1 Cor. 
iv. 3, 4, or unfiivourably, to condemn, 1 
Cor. iv. 3. xiv. 24. 

' Av UK p I (T £6Ds, 77, {oLvaKpivco^^ ecca- 
mination before a judge, Acts xxv. 26. 
Pol. xii. 27, 3. 

'Ai/a/cuTTTCt), f. i^ava & /cutttw,) 

to hend hack^ I. prop., and by ellip. of 
kavTov^ Ti)u K&(pa\iiu^ or such like, to 
raise oneself^ i. e. from a stooping to an 
erect posture, Lu. xiii. 11. John viii. 7, 10. 
.Jobx. 15, ou dovafxai ctvaKuxf/aL. Joseph, 
and Class. — II. metaph. to be elated in 
mind, as opposed to previous depression, 
to take courage^ Lu. xxi. 28, and Class. 

' Av a\a fi^dv (f. -Xrid/ofxaL^ aor. 2. 
rii/tXajSoy, aor. 1. pass. ai;£\ij^j0?]7>',) I. Act. 
to take up any thing, as from the ground, 
to remove from a lower place to a higher; 
or gener. to take up^ as said of arras ; and 
Pass.fo be taken Zip,with £i§ oupai/oi/, either 
expressed, Mk. xvi. 19. Acts i. 11. x. 16, or 
implied, Acts i. 2, 22. 1 Tim. iii. 16, with 
kv oo^rj. Sept. and Philo. — IL by impl., 
and with the accessary idea of beari?ig, 
(as the images of the heathen gods were 
borne about in processions, enclosed in a 
case,) Acts vii. 43, ava\, t?ji/ arKr)vi^u tou 
WoXox-) of taking up and bearing arms, 
Eph. vi. 13, 16. Sept. and Class.— III. to 
take up and carry along tvith one^ as a fel- 
low traveller, whether on board ship. Acts 
XX. 13, 14, or by land. Acts xxiii. 31. 
2 Tim. iv. 11. Sept. and Class. 

'Avd\i]\l/ £6r)9, 77, {avaXajuifSdva}^) 
a taking up, as into heaven, Lu. ix. 51, 
Apocr. and Fathers. 

'AvaXLCTKU), f. Xwcrw, aor. I. avij- 
Xwo-a, in Class, to expend; in- N. T. to 
€ons?ime, destroy, trans. Lu. ix. 54. Gal. 
V. 15. 2 Thess. ii. 8. Sept., Jos., and 
Class. 

' Ai/a\o y ta, as, 77, {auaXoyo^, from 
ai/a, distrib. & \oyo9, account,) propoi'- 
tion, or measure. Rom. xii. 6, Kanra t^v 
GLvaXoyiav tt]^ TriaT^co's, i, e. *■ of the gifts 
of our faith.' Dem. de Cor. c. 30, kut ov- 
c-ta^ avaXoyiav. 

'AvaXoyLX^ofjiai,i.i(TOfxaL, 1) prop. 
to reckon up. 2) met. to consider atten- 
tively, reflect upon, Heb. xii. 3. Sept., 
Joseph., and Class. 

"AvaXo^, ou, o, 77, adj. (a, aX?,) not 
salt, ivithout taste, insipid, Mk. ix. 50. 
Plut. Symp. iv. 10, 2, apTov dvaXov. 

'A fa Xu CIS, £ws, 77, [avaXvco,) prop. 
a loosing, or dissolving ; and fig., by a nau- 
tical metaphor, depai^ture, whether from 
a banquet, (Jos. Ant. xix. 4, 1. Philo, p. 
.981,) or from life, by death, 2 Tim. iv. 6. 
So Philo, p. 99, avaXvcTL's ek tov (3lov, 



'AvaXvco, f. v<7(jo, prop, to unloose the 
cables of a ship, and thus prepare for de- 
parture, Horn. Od. XV. 548 ; met. to depart 
from life, Phil. i. 23, with the accessary 
idea of going back, or home ; hence to 
return, Lu. xii. 36, av, i/c twv ydfxu)i/. 
Sept., Jos., and Class. 

' Avap.dpTr)rro^, ov, 6, 77, adj. [a, 
diuLaprduu),) si7iless, faidtless, John viii. 7. 
Sept. and Class. 

' Av a fjiiv (X), f. jULEVvo, 1) to wait out, 
remain, Judith vii. 12. Hdot. vii. 42. 2) to 
icait for, await, eocpect, and, by impl., with 
patience and trust, 1 Th. i. 10. Sept. and 
Class. 

'AvajULLjULVIJCTKM, f. -jULV7}(T(jl), HOV, 1. 

pass. dveiuLV}iard}]v with mid. signif., to 
call to mind, remind, 1) gener. & constr. 
with double ace, 1 Cor. iv. 17, o§ u^a? 
dua/uv}](TeL Ta§ 6dov<s /ulov, Sept. and Philo. 
In the sense to admonish, eochort, 2 Tim. 

i. 6. 2) mid. dva{XLfjivr\(rKoiJLaL, to call 
to one''s mind, remember, absol. Mk. xi. 
21. With gen. of thing, Mk. xiv. 72. 
Sept. and Jos. ; acc. 2 Cor. vii. 15. Heb. 
X. 32. & Class. 

'Ai/a^f 7] cr 19, £to9, 77, ^dvaix.Lp.v\](rKia,^ 
remembrance, Lu. xxii. 19. 1 Cor. xi. 24. 
Heb. X. 3. Sept. and Class. 

' AvavzoM, f. oxrw, to renew; mid. 
dvaviofxai, to reneiii for oneself, used in 
Class, as dep. & trans, with acc. of thing, as 
(piXiav, bpKov,&cc. In N. T, to renew one- 
self to be reneived, i. e. in spirit, by a 
change from a carnal to a spiiitual life. 
Eph. iv. 23. Marc. Ant. iv. 3, dvaviov 

(TEaVTOV. 

'Avav7](p o), f. 1) prop, to become 
sober again from inebriety; 2) metaph. to 
recover sober-mindedness, horn the intoxica- 
tion of vice, as intemperance, or of avarice, 
and other evil dispositions : also to recover 
oneself intrans. 2 Tim. ii. 26, dvav. ek 
T.^s TOV Aia(36Xov TTayioos, Philo, 1098. 

''Av avT ip pi]TO's, ov, 6, 77, nd] . ivithout 
contradiction, indisputable. 

'AvavTLpptTTO)^, adv. prop, ivithoid 
contradiction ; and hence ivithout hesitation, 
immediately. Acts x. 29. Pol. xxii. 8, 11. 

'A2/a£to9, ov, 6, 77, adj. (a, aji09,) 
1) prop, without weight oy iiui\\Q>\Aiy, and 
hence unworthy. 2) by implic. unfit, 
1 Cor. vi. 2. Sept., Jos. Ant. vi.1,4. Hdian 

ii. 7, 6. 

'Ai'a Jicos, adv. unworthily, i. e. in an 
improper manner, irreverently, 1 Cor. xi. 
27, 29. 2 Mace. xiv. 42. Hdian ii. 7, 6. 

'Ai/d7rau(Tt9, £W9, 77, (at'aTrauct), 
1 ) rest or quiet, as from labour or occupa- 
tion. Rev. iv. 8, dud-rravcnv ovk t-xovariv, 
' have no intermission.' Matt, xi.29. Rev. 
xiv. 11. Sept. and Class. 2) place of rest, 



ANA 



23 



ANA 



fixed habitation^ Matt. xii. 43. Lii. xi. 24, 
and Sept, 

'Ai/a-TTrtuw, f. auo-o), prop, to cause to 
rest^ or desist, from any tiling, Horn. II. 
xvii. 550 ; also, to (jive rest to any person, 
Jos. and Class. In N. T. 1) metaph. to 
(jive rest of mind, by freeing from sor- 
row and anxiety, and tlius to revive, re- 
fresh^ trans. Matt. xi. 28. 1 Cor. xvi. 18. 
2 Cor. vii. 13. Philem. 7, 20, and Sept. 
2) mid. avairavofjiuL, to recreate, or rest 
oneself, to take one's rest, to enjoy repose 
after previons exertion or care. Said 
either prop, of rest after motion or fatigue, 
Mk. vi. 31 ; of rest in sleep. Matt. xxvi. 45. 
Mk. xiv. 41 ; or metaph. of rest from care 
OT solicitztde, Lii.xii. 19 ; of the rest consist- 
ing in the quietly \vaiting for any thing. 
Rev. vi. 11 ; of the rest from the troubles 
of life by death. Rev. xiv. 13, av. eK tcou 
KOTTcov auToou. 3) by Heb., avaTravojuai 
sign. ' to have a place of rest,' to abide, rest, 
ov dwell, 1 Pet. iv. 14, where see my Note ; 
and comp. Rom. viii. 11. Sept. 

^AvaTTE td u), f. zLcrco, to gain over by 
persuasion, gener. in a bad sense, to induce 
to do evil, seduce. Acts xviii. 13. Sept. and 
Class. 

' Xvairi air 03, i. xl/w, trans. 1) to send 
hack any one to any place or person, Phil. 
II. Pint. Pomp. c. 36. 2) to send any 
one to a judge or tribunal, and thereby 
refer him thither, Lu. xxiii. 7, 11, 15. Jos. 
Ant. iv. 8, 14, Tijv diKitv £t§ Ispau ttoXlv, 
and Class. 

^AvdTrrjpo?, ov,o,ri-) adj. {ava, ttt]- 
po5,) maimed, either by the loss of some 
limb, or of the use thereof, crippled, Lu. 
xiv. 13,21. 2 Mace. viii. 24. Plat. Crit. 
§ 14. Herod. Vit. Hom. § 23. 

'Ai/a-TrtTrTO), f. irEaov/naL, aor. 2. 
aviTTsaou, prop, to fall back, as rowers 
do in plying the oar, whether by lying 
down, or by reclining at table during meals, 
after the manner of the ancients, Matt, xv, 
35. Mk.vi. 40. viii. 6. Johnvi. 10. xiii.l2. 
xxi. 20. Sept. and Class. By impl., to 
take a place at table^ to eat, Lu. xi. 37. 
xxiv. 19. 

^ AvairXr] pouj, f. wcw, to fill up, whe- 
ther phys. as of a chasm, Jos. Ant. vii. 
10, 2; or fig. as of time, to occupy, or 
complete, as of a number. In N. T. 1) 
to fill up, as said of measure, 1 Th. ii. 16, 
avair, avTU)V Tasr dfxapTLa<;, i. e. to 
fxtTpov TU)V djuapTLtau, as expressed in 
Matt, xxiii. 32. 2) as said of prophecy, 
&c., to fulfil. Matt. xiii. 14. 3) as said of 
a tvork or d^ity enjoined by law, to per- 
form. Gal. vi. 2, dvair. tov vofxov tou 
Xp. Barnab. Ep. § 21, Trdcrau iuToXi)u 
dvair. 4) to fill up, or supply a deficiency, 
Phil. ii. 30. Jos. and Class. Hence, as 



said of persons, dvair. tov tottov tlvo's, 
to fill or supp/// ((inj oiic^s place, ' sustain his 
situation, clianiclci-,' 1 Cor. xiv. 16. Jos. 
Bell. V. 2, 5, <jTpaTiu>Tov nrd'^LV dv. 

'AfaTToXo'y 1JXOS, ov, 6, v, adj. («, 
dTroXoylofxai,) iiie.reusable, Rom. i. 20. 
ii. 1, and in later Class. 

' Av air Tver (TO), f. ^o), to re-(or un-) 
fold, as clothes that have been folded up ; 
or, as said of the roll or volume of a book, 
to unroll, Lu. iv. 17, dvuLit. to (BlIBXlov, 
and Sept. 

'AvdiTTU), f. to light up, kindle.^ 

Lu. xii. 49. Acts xxviii. 2. Ja. iii.5. Sept. 

and Class. 

'Avap id /JLTjTO^, ov, 6, 71, adj. (a, 
dpid/md^,) innumerable, Heb. xi. 12. Sept. 
and Class. 

' AvacTzioi, f. e/o-o), prop, to shake on 
high, as the hands in the act of threatening 
force, or in that of exciting others thereto. 
Hence, metaph. to excite commotion, and 
simply, to stir up, instigate, tov oyXov, Mk. 
XV. 11. Lu. xxiii. 5, and Class. 

' A a (T /c £ u a ^ w, f. aato, prop, to pack upt 
any ckeDos for removal, Thuc. i. 18. Xen. 
Cyr. viii. 5, 4 ; also actually to remove it, 
Xen. An. vi. 2, 5. Now, as packing up 
and removal implies much unsettledness, 
so dvacTK. comes to mean, to unsettle, as in 
Acts XV. 24, dvaoK. Tris xj/vxd^ vfxdiv, 'un- 
settling, and removing, your minds from 
the truth the contrary to ^sixEXidxraL in 
1 Pet. V. 10. The sense assigned by the 
recent Lexicographers, 'perverting and de- 
stroying,' is, as regard sperso?2S, unsupported 
by the authorities they allege. 

' Avaornr d w, f. dcru), to draw up, p)ull 
up and out, as a spear from a wound, Horn. 
II. xiii. 574, or a person who has fallen 
into a pit, Lu. xiv, 5 ; also, in the pass., 
to be draivn up, Xen. Mem. iii. 10, 7; or 
upivards, as Acts xi. 10, duac^Tr. i.h tov 
oupavov. 

^ Av dcTT acr L^, EW?, rj, {dvL<TT1]/JLL,) 

prop, the act of rising from a seat, or from 
ambush, or in order to do any thing. 
Also, a rising up from a falling, or fallen, 
to an erect posture. Hence, metaph. a 
recovery from a state of tceakness, &c. In 
N. T. 1. a rising up, as opposed to r; 
TrTU)cn<5, ' fall,' or rather by meton. the 
aidhor or cause thereof, i. e. metaph. 'the 
author of a better and more prosperous 
state,' Lu. ii. 34. — II. a rising of the body 
from death by return to life, resurrection ; 
1) as said of individuals who have returned 
to life, Heb. xi. 35, dvao-TdaEco?, ' by 
being raised again to life.' Comp. 1 Kin. 
xvii. 17. 2 Kin. iv. 20, sq. So of Jesus' 
resurrection. Acts i. 22. ii. 31. iv. 33. 
Rom. i. 4. vi. 5. Phil. iii. 10, et al. 2) as 
said of the general resurrection, at the last 



ANA 2 

day, bo til of the just and unjust, Matt, 
xxii. 23, & oft. 8) of the just only. Matt, 
xxii. 30 ; called also the first resurrection, 
Rev. XX. 5, 6. 4) by meton. the author 
of resurrection. John xi. 25. 

'Ai;a (TTaToa), f. cocrw, (dyacTTacri?, 
fr. dyi'cm^ui,) occ. only in later Greek, 
and is equiv, to dvda-TaTov ttole'lv in the 
earlier writers : prop, of things, as cities or 
countries, to devastate and destroy ; also, of 
persons, to drive out, e.vpel. Hence, as com- 
motion and disturbance are thereby implied, 
so dvacrraTOM came to mean to disturb, 
throw into commotion ; trans, as said both 
of cities, Aces xvii. 6. xxi. 38, and persons, 
(i. e. their minds.) Gal. v. 12. 

' Kv acTT av p 6 ui, f. wcro), 1) prop, fo 
raise up and fix upon a cross, to cruci/u, 
trans. Xen. An. iii. 1, 17. Diod. Sic. ii. 1, 
and Joseph, often. 2) metaph. Heb. vi. 6, 
dvacTTavpovvTa^ kavTol^ tov "Xlov tov 
Obou, where see my note. 

'Avaa-TsvdX^u), f. ^oo, to fetch up a 
deep-draicn sigh or groan, Mk. viii. 12. 
Sept. and Xen. 

'Avacrrpicpw, f. \p-a}. I. to turn zip- 
side dozen, oveiiurn, trans. John ii. 15, 
TpaTTg^a?, and Class. — II. to turn lach 
again, and mid. to turn onesef back again, 
to return, Acts v. 22. Sept. and Class. In 
Acts XV. lt>, dvacTTpi\l/u) Kal dvoiKoco- 
fxvcra} 'ri]v (rKt]viiv AafSlo, ' will raise up 
again, restore,' as sometimes in Sept, — III. 
mid. duacTTpicpo/uLaL, and aor. 2. pass. 
dvE(TTpa<pi]v. to turn onesef round, or be 
turned round, in any pLace or thing, Lat. 
versari. 1 ) said of place, prop, to move 
uboid in a place. Hence, to sojourn, in 
Matt, x^-ii. 22. 2 Cor. i. 12. Sept. and 
Joseph. oi state or occujxdion, to be occu- 
pied icith, to live in, 2 Pet. ii. 18, dvaa-Tp. 
kv TrXdvy. Sept., Joseph., and Class. 
2) of persons, to move about among, live 
with : and hence, to conduct onesef among, _ 
Eph. ii. 3, iv oI§ dvsa-Tpd(pi]u.ku ttote kv 
Tats kTridufxiaL?. Heb. x. 33. xiii. 18. 
1 Tim. iii. 15. 1 Pet. i. 17. Sept. and 
Cla=^s. 

'Av a a T p o (pi], ?/, {dva(TTpk(pco,) 
prop, a tmming about, and metaph. a mode 
of life or conduct. Gal. i. 13. Eph. iv. 22. 
1 Tim. iv. 12. Ja. iii. 13. 2 Pet. ii. 7. iii. 
11. Sept. & Class. ; or gener. life itself 
Heb. xiii. 7. 1 Pet. i. 15. 

^ Av aT d G (y 0 p.a I, f. Td^ouaL, to set in 
order, arrange, in regular series, things of 
any kind, Lu. i. 1, dvaT. oi/r/?jcrii/, where 
it is used of the composition of any his- 
torical narration, out of previously pre- 
pared materials. 

'AyocTgWto, f. TsXao. 1. trans, to 
cause to rise up, as tov vXlov, Matt. v. 45. 
Sept., Philo, and Class. — II. intrans. to 



i ANA 

rise up, 1 ) prop, as said of light, Matt. iv. 
16; a cloud, Lu. xii. 54 ; of the inorning- 
star, 2 Pet. i. 19. Sept. ; of tlte sun. Matt, 
xiii. 6. Mk. iv. 6. xvi. 2. Ja. i. II, and 
Sept. often. 2) fig. of Christ's descent 
from the tribe of Judah, to spring^ Heb. 
\ii. 14. 

' Av UT iQ ■>] fXL, f. dricrui or Q-ncrofiaL, 
prop, to lay or put any thing on one, as a 
burden, and metaph. to refer or ascribe a 
tiling to any one ; also, to put any business 
upon any one, ( Arist. Nub. 1436.) Hence, 
to lay a business before any one, for con- 
sideration, &c. Acts XXV. 14, o ^iiaTo^ tco 
j3aaL\&l dvidtTO to. Kwrd tov n.av\ov. 
Gal.ii. 2, dvsdijULijv avToT^ to EvayyiXiov, 
to declare, make known, -2^% a matter for 
their serious consideration. And so in 
Sept. and Class. 

' AvaToXi], rj<s, (az/aTeWw,) 1. a 
rising, as of the sun, moon, or stars. 
Hence in N. T. by meton. the dawn of 
day, or the rising sun, Lu. i. 78, dvuToXi) 
k^ vxlrov?, 'the rising of the Sun of right- 
eousness (Mai. iv. 2.) from on high,' the 
Messiah, so described. Is. ix. 2. Ix. I, 3, et 
al. — II. put in sing, and plur. for the JSasty 
said both of the heavens and the earth, 
Matt. ii. 1, 2, 9. viii. 11, and often in N. T. 
and Sept. 

'AvaT p iTTu), f. xl/to, trans.- I. prop. 
(Class. &Sept.) to turn upside dozen, over- 
throw. — II. metaph. to subvert, 2 Tim. ii. 
18, dvaTp. Ti)v TTLcrTLV. So Diod. Sic. i. 
77, Ti]v Trap' dvdpu)iruL<5 ttlcttiv dvaTp. 
Also, to destroy, bring to ruin. Tit. i. 11, 
OLKovs dvaTp. 

' Av aT p i cf) (i), f. dpkibu). I. prop, to 

720urish up, bring up, as a child, Acts vii. 
20. — II. metaph, as said of mental or moral 
culture, to educate ; both senses occur in 
Class. 

' Av a(p aiv (xi, f. cpavco, prop, to light up, 
as lamps, Hom. Od. xviii. 310 ; also, to 
make appear, to shozv. In N. T. mid. 
duacpaivofJiaL, to slwzv oneself, to appear, 
Lu. xix. II. Sept. Job xi. 18, dvacpa- 
veLTUi aroL siniivt) : pass, to be shoicn to 
oneself or another, Acts xxi. 3, dvacpa- 
vivTt<s Ti]v Kvirpov, ' being brought into 
view of Cyprus.' 

' Av a (p E p 0), f. oicrto, aor. I. dvi]VEyKa. 
I. to bear or bring zipzcards ; trans., foil, 
by eU ^^^th acc. of place Avhither, Matt, 
xvii. 1. Mk. ix. 2. Sept. & Class. Also 
said of sacrifices, to offer up. (placed upon 
the raised altar,) Ja. ii. 21. Sept. Heb. vii. 

27. 1 Pet. ii. 5. — II. to take up, and bear 
upon oneself, in the place of another, and 
thereby to remove from him. In N. T. 
said metaph. of sin expiated by its guilr 
and punishment being atoned for. Heb, ix. 

28. 1 Pet. ii. 24. 



ANA 



25 



ANE 



' Av a<p u)v ioj^ f. 7;cra), to lift vp the 
voice^ to cry out^ Lii. i. 4*2. Sept. & Class. 

' Av d^v (T sco's^ (ai/axt'w, to pour 
out or forth,) 1) prop, an out-pouring ; 
2) metaph. ^'.r(*t'^\9, ov sink., of dissoluteness 
and vice, I Pet. iv. 4. 

' Avaxtjo p iu}., f. tJo-o), prop, 5ac^*- 
zcard, recede^ as in retreating before an 
enemy. In N. T., and sometimes in Class., 
simply to depart from one place to another., 
1) geiier. Matt. ii. 12, 13, 14, 22. iv. 12. xii. 
15. XV. 21, et al. 2) spec, to ivithdraiv^ 
retire for privacy., Acts xxiii. 19. xxvi. 31. 
In Matt. ix. 24, dvaxfJ^p&lrE., withdraiv^ 
i. e. give place. 

'Ai'ai//^w^ts, £0)9, 77, (ai/ai/Au)(6o,) prop. 
a breathing time., (so the more Classical 
duayf/uxv in Atlien, p. 24,) and metaph. a 
relief from severe labour or trouble., Eurip. 
Suppl. 325. Acts iii. 19, Kaipol dva- 
i/Au^£aj§. Sept. in Ex. viii. 15. Philo, p. 
371. Strabo, p. 1137. 

' A 1/ a i//- u'x f- ^w, prop, to draw breath 
again., to recover breath., intrans. Meleag. 
Epigr. 58. Hence metaph. to rest from 
toil., Oppian v. 623. Sept. Also trans. 1 ) 
prop, to refresh any one., by fanning and 
cooling, Hom. Od. iv, 568. 2) to refresh., 
recreate., 2 Tim. i. 16, ju£ dv&xj/v^e. Hom. 
and Herodot. 

'Ave p air od LCTTt] ou, o, {dv8pa- 
TTo^i^co,) a man-stealer, kidnapper, 1 Tim. 
i. 10. Sept. and Class. 

'Ai/^ptjco, f. iarco, [durjp,) to render 
manly or brave ; in N. T. mid. dvdpt- 
X,oiuLai, to acquit otieself as a man., behave 
courageously., 1 Cor. xvi. 13. Sept., Jos., 
and Class. 

' Avopocpovo's., ou, 6, (al/7//0, ^02/0§,) 

a man-slayer., murderer., 1 Tim. i. 9, and 
Plato. 

'Ai/ty k:\7]to§, ou, 6, 77, adj. (a, 
ty/caXeo), to accuse,) blameless., irreproach- 
able, 1 Cor. i. 8. Col. i. 22. 1 Tim. iii. 10. 
Joseph, and Class. 

'Ai/g /c5t77'y 7JT0S, ou, 6, v, adj. (a, l/c- 
dLt]yiofxaL,) inejcpressible, unutterable, 
2 Cor. ix. 15, and lat. Class, 

'Al/ £ K:\aA. 7j TO §, ou, o, 77, adj. (a, e/c- 
XaXto),) unutterable, ineoepressible, 1 Pet. 
i. 8, 

'Al/£/c\£ ITT T09, OV, 6, 7], adj. («, £/C- 

\£t7raj,) never-failing, eochaustless, Lu. xii. 
33, and later Class. 

'AfEKTo?, 77, 01/, adj. (ai/£Xo/>cat,) sxfjo- 
portable, tolerable. Matt. x. 15. xi. 22, 24, 
et al. Class. 

'Ai/£\£77/Aa)i/, OI/09, o, 77, adj. (a, 
kXETiixuiv,) uncompassionate, pitiless, Rom. 
i. 31, and Sept. 

'Ayg^ t^o), f. iVo), (ai/£/xo9,) to agitate 



by the wind ; pass, (of waves,) tossed 
about, Ja, i. 6. 

"Ai/£/xo9, OV, o, (a'aco, to breathe, or 
blow,) 2cind, I. prop. Matt. xi. 7, & oft. 
So oL Ttaaaps's uve(xoL, 'the four cardinal 
winds,' Rev. vii. 1, and Jos. Ant. viii. 3,5. 
— II. by meton. oi Ticra-. ave/moL, ' the four 
quarters of the earth,"" whence these car- 
dinal winds blow, Matt. xxiv. 31. Mk. xiii. 
27. Sept. 1 Chron. ix. 24. Dan. xi. 4. — 
III. metaph. as an emblem of instability, 
Tras a/;£/xo9 T7/9 SiBaaKaXia?, light unstcL- 
ble motion, Eph. iv. 14. Ecclus. v. 9, fx^} 
XiKfxa iv iravTL dvi/mu). 

'AvivBs KT09, OV, 6, 77, adj. (a, iv- 
SEXOfxaL,) impossible, Lu. xvii. L 

'Ay£^£p£Uy7JT0 9, OV, 6, t], adj. («, 

e.^epsvvdco, to search out,) inscrutable, 
Rom. xi. 33. 

'Ai;£^tK:aK:o9, ou, 6, rj, adj. {dvixofJiOLL 
& KUKO's,) patient and forbearing under 
injuries, 2 Tim. ii. 24, and later Class, 

' Avs^iXvi acT TO?, OV, 6, 77, adj. («, 
e^LXi^'-a^^t to explore,) inscrutable, incom- 
prehensible, Rom, xi. 33. Eph, iii. 8, & Sept. 

'AvETraLcrxvvTO?, ov, 6, 7j, adj. 
{a, kiraicTX^vofxai,) that needeth not to be 
ashamed, 2 Tim, ii, 15. 

'AffiTTt A.7)7rT09, OU, 6, 77, adj. (a, ettl- 
Xap-fBduu),) 1) prop, not to be laid hold of, 
as said of a wrestler ; 2) metaph. not to be 
laid hold of for blame, unblameable, 1 Tim. 
iii. 2, and Class. 

'AvipxoiJLaL, f. dvEXEvcropLaL, aor, 2. 
dvTjXdov, to come or go 2ip,cLS Eh to opo9, 
John vi. 3. £i9 'lEpoar. Gal. i. 17, sq. 
Sept. and Class, 

"AuECrL<5, EW<S, 7), (ctJ/HJ/Xt, tO loOSC,) ^ 

letting loose, I, from bonds or imprison- 
ment. Acts xxiv, 23, E-x^f-v dv. to be freed 
from bands. Sept. dvEcriv dovvai, ' to give 
liberty.' — II. from labour, &c. 2 Cor. viii. 
13, ou)( i'ya aA.A.oi§ y dvEcn?. Jos. Ant, 
iii. 10, 6, dv. dovuaL, and Class. — III, 
metaph. rest, quiet, either externa], 2 Cor, 
vii, 5. 2 Th. i. 7, or internal, 2 Cor. ii. 12. 

'Av£TdX,(D, f. dauj, gener. to eccamine 
thoroughly, scrutinize closely, Judg. vi. 29, 
Alex. ; spec, in N. T. to examine by tor- 
ture, eq. to jSaaay/^o), Acts xxii. 24, 29. 

"KvEv, adv. or rather prep, governing 
the gen. without. I. as said of things, 
ivithout the help of, 1 Pet. iii. 1, uvev 
Xoyov. Sept. and Class. ; also of manner, 
1 Pet. iv. 9, dvEv yoyyvcrixuyv. Sept, and 
Class. — II. said of persons, ivithout the 
knoivledge or ivill of Matt. x. 29, dvEv 
Tov TlaTpo's. Sept. and Class. 

'Ay£uG£T09, ou, 6, 77, adj. (a, £U08- 

T09,) incommodious. Acts xxvii. 12. 

' AvEv pLcr Kixi,^. pvaw, {dva, EvpicrKO),) 
to find out by search, Lu. ii, 16. 



AN E 



26 



A N e 



'Ai^tvco, f, £^aj, to hold 2ip^ as the 
hands alofc, or as any "person or thing 
from falling. In N. T. only in ]Mid. 
a.vixo!^(ii-> prop, to hold oneself up. Hence, 
to hear up., endure. I. as said of things, 
t^ endure^ hear patiently., M-ith gen. un- 
derstood, as afBictions, 2 Th. i. 4. Sept. 
) and Class. ; also ahsol. 1 Cor. iv. 12. 2 Cor. 
xi. 20. — II. as said of persons, to hear 
with., Matt. xYii. 17. Mk. ix. 19. Lu. ix. 
41. 2 Cor. xi. 1, 19. Eph. iv. 2. Col. iii. 
IS. Sept. and Class. — III. by implic, to 
admit or receive.^ vAih. gen., i. e. listen 
to, as said both of persoiis., as Acts xviii. 
14. 2 Cor. xi. 4, and things., as doctrine, 
&c. 2 Tim. iv. 3. Heb. xlii. 22. Sept. & 
Class. 

Aygilrto?, ou, 6, a nephew.^ Col. iv. 
10. Sept. and Class. 

"Ay?] 00 1/, ou, TO, anethum^ dill, an aro- 
matic plant. Matt, xxiii. 23. 

'AvvKco, defect. (aVd, 77/cw,) to come 
up to any thing, to reach to. In N. T. 
naetaph. to p)ertain to any thing., i. e. to he 
pertinent or becoming. Col. iii. 18, dvijKEV. 
Eph. T. 4, TO, dvr}K0VTa. Philem. 8, to 
dvrjKov, and so in Class. 

'A^n/xspo?, ou, o, ?7, adj. (a, 7;jU£po?,) 
ungentle, fierce, 2 Tim. iii. 3, and Class. 

'Xvi]p, dvSpd?, 6, I. a man, i.e. an 
adult male person. 1) prop. Matt. xiv. 
21, & oft, as said of men in various rela- 
tions and circumstances, where the context 
must determine the exact import. 2) 
joined T^ith adj. or subst., it forms a peri- 
phrasis for a subst., Lu. v. 8, dvi)p dfxap- 
T6o\o5. Matt. vii. 24. Acts iii. 14, & Class. 
And so with a Gentile adj., as dvi]p 'Ioi»- 
^alos. Acts X. 28, et al. So in a direct 
address, ci/ooes ' Xdt]vaToL, Acts xvii. 22 ; 
dvdpa^ '^(piaLOL, xix. 35 ; dvSps^ 'Icrpa- 
i/XlTtti, ii. 22, et al. ; duop&9 TaXiXaloi, 
i. 11. Joseph, and Class. So dvdpE9 ddsX- 
(pol, Acts i. 16. — Xen. An. i. 6, 6, dvdpe^ 
cpiXoL. 3) metaph. a man of ripe under- 
standing, 1 Cor. xiii. 11. Comp. Eph. iv. 
13. So in Pope's Epitaph on Gay, ' In wit, 
a man ; simplicity, a child.' — II. indef. a 
man, i. e. o?ie of the human race ; also a 
person, Lu. xi. 31, et al. Sept. and Class. 

' XvdL(TTrifXL, {LavTLorTvcru), perf. ayO- 
i(jTi]Ka, aor. 2. dvT&<TTi]v, imp. mid. dv6- 
L(rTdfj.-i]v,) to icithstand, resist, whether in 
deeds or in words, or both, constr. with 
dat. or absol. Matt. v. 39. Lu. xxi. 15, 
and often in Sept. and Class. 

' Av6 o fjioXoy i CO., f. vera}, mid. dvdo- 
liLoXoyiofxaL, prop, to say mutually tlie 
same things. Hence, as said of two parties, 
to confess mutually, and sometimes simply 
to confess, especially in confession of sin 
to God in prayer. So Joseph. Ant. viii. 
10,3, dvQ. n-d^ d;jLapTLa<5. 1 Esdr. viii. 91, 
'7rpo(Ttv\6p.s.vo<s dudwfioXoyELTO KXaLwu. 



Ecclus. XX. 1 ; but in N. T. and some- 
times in later Class, writers, (as Diod. Sic. 

i. 70, dvd. Tccs dpETa's tlvo^,) it is used 
in the sense to profess publicly, esp. in the 
celebration of prayer and praise to God, in 
return for [dvd. ) his mercies and blessings, 
Lu. ii. 38, uvdco/uLoXoysl'To too Ku/oioj, 
' returned praises and thanks to God.' Ps. 
Ixxviii. 13, Sept. dvdofxoXoyija-op&dd ctol 
sh Tou aicova. 

"AvB 0 9, fco§, TO, a fotver, Ja. i. 10, sq. 
1 Pet. i. 24. Sept. and Class. 

'Avd paKid, a5, 77, [dvOpa^,) a mass 
of live coal, such as was put in a chafing- 
dish, Jo. xviii. 18. xxi. 9, and Class. 

"A vdpa^, aKo<s, 6, a live coal, Rom. xii. 
20. Sept. in Prov. xxv. 22. 

'Avdpo}7rdpE(TK09, ov, 6, 77, adj. 
{dvdpooTTo^ & dpicTKw,) desirous of pleas- 
ing men, i. e. without due regard to the 
approbation of God, Eph. vi. 6. Col. iii. 
22. Sept. Ps. liii. 6. Apocr. and later 
Greek writers. 

' Avd puiTT Lvcs, vi], vov, adj. human, 
belonging to man, his manners and customs, 
nature, or condition. I. in nature or hind, 
Ja. iii. 7, 77 cpvcn? 1) dud.,i. e. man ; 1 Cor. 

ii. 13, <TO(pLa dvd., 'such wisdom as man, 
by his own natural powers, and without 
di\dne aid, can attain to,' as opposed to 
heavenly. — II. in respect to origin or adap- 
tation, 1 Cor. iv. 3, dvd. ijfxipa, human 
day of trial, \. G. 'one fixed for trial.' 
1 Pet. ii. 13, dvd. KTL(TL<s. 1 Cor. x. 13, d. 
TTELpacrfjib^, ' common to men.' Rom. vi. 
19, dvdpcoTTLvov Xiyco, i. e. 'in a manner 
adapted to human weakness.' 

'AvdoCOTTOKTOVOS, OV, 6, 77, [dvdpCO- 

TTos & KTELVco,) prop. adj. slaying men; 
but in the N. T. as subst. man-slayer, 
said metaph. of Satan, as the author of 
sin and death, (see Wisd. ii. 24. Ecclus. 
xxv. 24.) John viii. 44. Rom. v. 12. In 
1 John iii. 15, said of murder, as regards 
purpose and design. 

" Avd pwTTo^, ov, 6, 77, subst. I. a man, 
an individual oftlie human race, of which- 
ever sex, A PERSON. 1) gener. and uni- 
vers.. Matt. iv. 19. xii. 12, et al. oft. 
2) said in reference to his human nature, 
a man, i. e. a human being, prop, in 
reference to the external man, (Phil. ii. 
7. Ja. v. 17, & elsewh.) including the idea 
of infirmity and imperfection, as opp. to 
God, or divine things, 1 Cor. i. 25. iii. 21. 
Gal. i. 11, sq. /caT dvdpcoTrov, ' of human 
origin.' So XiyEiv, or XuXeTv k. dvd.., 
' to speak in accordance with human views,' 
&c. ' to illustrate by human examples or 
institutions,' ' to use as a popular mode of 
speaking,' &c. Rom. iii. 5. 1 Cor. ix. 8. 
Also the genit. dvdpwTrov instead of the 
adj. dvdpcoTTLvo^, 2Pet. ii. 16. Rev.xiii.l8, 



AN0 



27 



ANO 



xxi. 17. Also metapli. of the t??fen?«Z man, 
the mind or so^^l^ the rational man, Rom. 
vii, '22. Eph. iii. 16 ; called in 1 Pot. iii. 4, 
6 K-puTTxos T/'ys KapSLu's uudpcoTro<s^ to 
which is opposed, at 2 Cor. iv. IG, o e^co 
aiSpcoTTO^. So 6 iraXciLO^ and 6 kulvo^ 
dvQpwiro^^ as said of the old unrenewed, 
and the new, i.e. renewed, nature and dis- 
position of man, wrought in man hy the rege- 
nerating influences of the Holy Spirit, and 
cherished by the moral motives of the Gos- 
pel. 3) as said with reference to the charac- 
ter and co7idition of any one, and used in 
various senses, according to the context, 
a male person of ripe age. Matt. viii. 9, & 
oft. ; a husband as opp. to a wife. Matt, 
xix. 10 ; a son as opp. to a flither, Matt. x. 
35; a master as opp. to a servant, &c. 
Matt. X. 36. — II. INDEFIN. as equiv. to 
Ti§, owe, some one^ any one. 1) gener. 
• Tts dvdpooTTo^, a ceHaiii man^ Lu. x. 30. 

xii. 16. xiv. 2. John v. 5 ; or without Tts, 
Matt. ix. 9, al. oft. So in a general 
proposition, a man^ i. e. any one out of 
a number, Rom. iii, 28 ; and with a 
neg. no man., no one., Matt. xix. 6. 2) 
joined with an adj. or subst., it forms a 
periphrasis for a subst.. Matt. xi. 19, dv- 
OptoTTos <pdyo9. xiii. 45, dvd. efxTropo?. 

xiii. 52, dvd. oiKodsa'TroTi'ig. xviii. 23. 
3) by implic. 6 dvdpu)7ro? with the article, 
every man, every person ivhosoever., Matt, 
iv. A^ovK k'TT dpToo X^r\aETaL 6 dvd.^et al. — 

III. 6 dvd p. with the art. equiv. to auTos 
or EK&Xvo's, this.^ that., he., &c. Matt. xii. 
13, 45. xxvi. 72, ovk oJoa tov dvdpco'Trov: 
Mk. iii. 3, 5. xiv. 21. Lu. vi. 10, et al.— 

IV. uIo§ dvOpcoTTov., a son of man., from the 
Heb. 1) equiv. to aVG/OcoTros, a man.^ Mk. 
iii. 28. Heb. ii. 6, & Sept. 2) with the 
article, as a proper name for the Messiah, 
6 YIos Tou ai/6f)ot)7rou, (derived from Dan. 
vii. 13.) Matt. xvi. 13. John xii. 34. 

'Ai/GuTraTEUco, f, Eucraj, (ayGuTraTO?,) 
to he proconsul.^ Acts xviii. 12, & Class. 

'Ai/OuTTaTOS, ou, 6, (di/Ti, uTraTos,) a 
proconsul.. Acts xiii. 7,12. xix. 38, & Class. 

'Avii]iuLL, f. aVr]'o-w, aor. 2. dvt}u,a.OT. 1. 
pass, dvidrjv, to let go, trans. 1) prop, to 
ioose^ as opp. to tightening. Acts xxvii. 40, 
Tas ^evKTYipia^. Acts xvi. 26, -rd dscrixd. 
2) metaph. to leave off., abandon., Eph. vi. 9, 
a. TrjV dTTEiXi^v, to abandon., not care for. 
Heb. xiii. 5, oh fxtj ere duco. Sept. & Class. 

'Ai/tXfO)?, w, 6, 77, adj. (a, tXeoos,) 
pitiless, Ja. ii. 13. 

"Ar/iTTTo?, ou, 6, 77, adj. (a, vltttoo^) 
unwashed. Matt. xv. 20. Mk. vii. 2, 5. 
Horn. II. vi. 26d. 

'AvL<rTf]ij.i, f. cM/ao-Ttjo-o), aor. 1. 
dviaTT]<ra, aor. 2. dvicrTr]v, imper. dvd- 
aTr}6i. Of this verb th e significations may 
be divided into two classes, trans, and 



intra7is. I. trans, in the pres., imperf. 
fut., and aor. 1. of the act., to cause to rise 
up, or stand, to raise up. 1) prop, as said 
of those lying down. Acts ix. 41. Sept., 
Joseph., and Class. ; or fig. as said of the 
dead, to recal to life, John vi. 39, 40, 44, 
54. Acts ii. 32, et al. also in Class. 2) 
metaph. to raise up, i. e. cause to exist or 
appear, e. g. cnripfxa tivl. Matt. xxii. 24. 
TOV Hpicrnrov, Acts ii. 24, 32. '7rpo(pr\Tt]v 
Acts iii. 22, 26. vii. 37. Heb. vii. 11, 15. 
Sept. — II. INTRANS. in the perf., plup,, 
and aor. 2. act., and in the mid., to rise 
up, to arise. 1) prop, as said of those 
sitting or lying down. Matt. xxvi. 62, and 
oft. Sept. and Class. So dvaarTTjvai Ik 
vsKpu)v, to rise from the dead, return to 
life, Matt. xvii. 9. Mk. ix. 9, sq. or with- 
out vEKpcov, Matt. XX. 19, et al. & Class. 
Fig. in Eph. v. 14, dvdcrnra ek tcov vaKpa)V, 
' rise from the death of sin to the life of 
righteousness.' 2) metaph. to rise up into 
existence, to he. Acts vii. 18, uvi<jTi] (3a- 
ctlXev? ETEpo?. XX. 30, and Sept. 3) to 
rise up, come forivard, appear, Mk. xiv. 
57. Lu. X. 25. xi. 32, et al. So dvaarTtjvaL 
ETTL TLva, to rise up against any one, in 
the way of attack, Mk. iii. 26. Sept. 
4) as a sort of Oriental pleonasm, prefixed 
(esp. in the part.) to verbs of going about, 
undertaking, or doing any thing. Matt. ix. 
9, dvacrTCt^ r]Ko\ovd-i]crEV. Mk. i. 35. ii. 
14, and oft. Sept. freq. 

'Ai'OTjTOS, ov, 6, 77, adj. (a, voeu},) 
prop, in pass, not thought of, or not to be 
thought of or understood, Horn. Hymn, in 
Merc. 80. but gener. act. unwise, foolish, as 
said of those who want reason to govern 
their appetites or passions ; and in N. T. 
of those who are slotv to comprehend, or at 
least admit and act upon, moral or reli- 
gious truth, Lu. xxiv. 25. Rom. i. 14. 
Gal. iii. 1, 3. Tit. iii. 3, also Sept. & Class. 
In 1 Tim. vi. 9, £7ri0u/xms dvor\Tov^, 
foolish, i. e. irrational and brutish, lusts. 

"Avoia, a5, 77, (d'yous, fr. a, you?,) prop. 
want of understanding, folly, Sept. and 
Class., but in N. T. from Hebr. madness, 
i. e. desperate wickedness, Lu. vi. 11, or 
foolish temerity, with the mixed notion of 
impiety, 2 Tim. iii. 9. 2 Mace. xiv. 5. Jos. 
Ant. viii. 13,1, dvoia koI irovTipta. Thuc. 
iii. 42 & 48. 

'Avoiyu}, (f. dvoL^ui, aor. 1. dvico^a & 
VVOL^a, perf. 2. dvicoya, perf. pass, dvi- 
ivy/xaL & rjvivdyfxaL, aor. 1. pass. dvEcpx- 
di]v, rivoLxdriV, and rjVEcox^riv, Rev. xx. 
12,) to open what was shut, traas. and in 
later usage, perf. 2. dviv^ya, intrans. to 
he open, to stand open. I. as said of what 
is closed by a lid or door, &c. Matt. ii. 11, 
^r]c>avpo\)<5. So also Eurip. Ion ^ 923. 
Matt, xxvii. 52, dv. fivn/uLEia, as closed 
hy stones for doors. Fig. with ^vpa. 



ANO 



28 



ANT 



Acts V. 19, or other similar terms ; some- 
times in a metaph. sense, to open the 
door of the heart, as Rev. iii. 20. Acts 
xiv. 27. Rev. iii. 7, 8.— II. said of the 
heavens^ to so open them as that celestial 
things may become manifest and revealed 
to man on earth, Matt. iii. 16. Ln. iii. 21. 
John i. 52. Acts vii. 56. x. 11. Rev. xix. 
11, & Sept. — TIL said of a booh rolled up 
and sealed, Rev. v. 2 — 5. x. 2, 8. xx. 12 ; 
also of the seals^ Rev. v. 9. vi. 1, et al. — 
IV. said of the mouth, whether as opened 
for the purpose of discourse and address, 
Matt. V. 2. xiii. 35, et al. or of opening 
one's mind, 2 Cor. vi. 11 ; said of the 
dumb, to have the mouth opened, for re- 
covering speech. Fig. said of the earth, 
to open her mouth, for 'open out into a 
chasm,' Rev. xii. 16, and Sept. — V. said 
of the eyes, both prop, to cause to see, to 
restore to sight. Matt. ix. 30. xx. 33, et al. 
and Sept. and metaph. to cause to under- 
stand. Acts xxvi. 18. 

"'AvoLKooofxio), f. j'lcrco, to rebuild. 
Acts XV. 16. Sept. and Class. 

"AyoL^L'3, £0)9, 77, {duoLyo},) the act of 
opening, Eph. vi. 19, and Class. 

'AvofXLa, a^s, 7), {duofxo9,) prop, laiu- 
lessness, a violation or transgression of law, 
whether human or divine ; in N. T. chiefly 
the latter. 1) prop. 1 John iii. 4, and 
Class. 2) by implic. and from the Heb. 
sin, iniquity. Matt, xxiii. 28. xxiv. 12. 
Rom. iv. 7, plur. vi. 19, sasp. al. ; said 
of apostasy from the Christian faith, 2 Th. 
ii. 7. 

"Avofxcs^ ov, 6, ?7, adj. (a, v6ixo<5,) 
lawless, i. e. not having, or at least know- 
ing, or acknowledging a law, meaning in 
N. T. a divine or revealed law. I. ivith- 
out laiD, i. e= not subject to the law, 
namely, of Moses, 1 Cor. ix. 21 ; hence, 
gentile, pagan. Acts ii. 23, and Apocr. — II. 
by implic. and from the Heb. a violator 
of the divine law, an impious wicked person, 
I Tim. i. 9. 2 Pet.ii. 8. a malefactor, Mk. " 
XV. 28. Lu. xxii. 37. 2 Th. ii. 8, 6 avofxo?, 
equiv. to 6 di/Opwiro^ djULapTLa<s, with 
reference to the impiety of idolatry. 

' A 1/ o /X o) s, adv. without a divine law, i. e. 
not being subject to it, Rom. ii. 12. 

Avo pd 6 (o, f. CO (TO), to set upright or 
erect, trans. I. prop. aor. 1. pass, avuipdo^- 
Qy]y, with mid. force, to stand erect, Lu. 
xili. 13; also metaph. to confirm, establish, 
Heb. xii. 12. Sept. and Class. — II. to re- 
erect, rebuild. Acts xv. 16, and Class. 

Avocr L09, ov, 6, ■>), adj. (a, o(tlo<s,) un- 
holy, impious, regardless of duty to God 
or man, 1 Tim. i. 9. 2 Tim. iii. 2, and Class. 

''A vox^h V^-) V-> ("^^'x^O W^V- ^ hold- 
ing back, delay. In N. T. metaph. self- 
restraint, forbear ame, Rom. ii. 4. iii. 26. 



'' AvT ay (jdviX^o fxai, f. La-OjULai, to con- 
tend ivith, strive against any person or 
thing ; the latter, in Heb. xii. 4. 

AvT uWay /xa, a-rcs, to, i^avTL, d\- 
\da-crw,) any thing given in exchange for 
another, jNIatt. xvi. 26. Mk. viii. 37, dv-r. 
T?]9 xl/vxv^' A phrase derived from the 
redemption of a slave,-.Sept. and Class. 

AvTav a'TrXrj p 6 CO, f. cocrco, prop, to 
fill up instead of, or in turn or return, Col. 
i. 24, ayTa2/a7rA.Tjpctj tcl vorn-eprjixaTa tcov 
^XixlreoDU tov XpiCTToD Ty crapKi fxov, 
and lat. Class. 

AvT air id ixi jXL, f. ccocrco, to give 
bach any thing instead of something else 
received, to repay, ^'egz^zYe, whether 1) for 
good, to reimburse, reivard, Lu. xiv. 14. 
Rom. xi. 35. 1 Th. iii. 9, and Sept. ; or 
2) for evil, to avenge, Rom. xii. 19. 2 Th. 
i. 6. Heb. x. 30, and Sept. 

'' AvT aTT 6^0 }x a, aT09, to, {avraTro- 
dLdo)/uiL,) retribution, whether for good, Lu-. 
xiv. 12, or evil, Rom. xi. 9, and Sept. 

'Az/Ta7ro^O(ris, sco?, rj, {avraTrodL- 
Sw/uLi,) recompense, reward. Col. iii. 24, and 
Sept. 

AvTairoKpivo fjiai, aor. 1. pass. dvT- 
a7rEKpLdi]v with mid. signif to answer 
again, to reply against, constr. with dat. ov 
acc, Lu. xiv. 6. Rom. ix. 20, and Sept. 

'Az/Tg LTTor/, aor. 2. used as aor. of 
dvTfXkyw, to gainsay, contradict, with dat. 
Lu. xxi. 15. absol. in Acts iv. 14. Sept. 
and Class. 

'Az;t£Xw, (aVri, £va),) trans, to hold 
any thing against some resisting force, and 
intrans. to resist, Jos. Ant. v. 8, 6. Mid. 
avTEXo/uLai, i. dvdt^ofxaL, \) to hold one- 
self fast by any thing or person, to cleave 
to it, be ivarmly attached to it, ^ith gen. 
Matt. vi. 24. Lu. xvi. 13. Tit. i. 9. 
Hence, from the adjunct, 2) to studi- 
ously take care of any one, 1 Th. v. 14, 
dvT. Tu)v da-dsvuyv. So Job xxxiii. 24, 
dudi^ETai, Tov /xi] ireaELV eh ^dvaTov. 
Comp. Acts XX. 35. 

'Ai/Tt, prep, with gen.; prop, simply, in 
a LOCAL sense, over against, in presence of 
as Hom. II. xxi. 481, uvt'l tlvo9 crT?jvai. 
Hence used metaph. either in a hostile 
sense, against, or by way of comparison, 
where it implies something of equivalent 
value, and denotes sid)stitution, exchange, 
requital, ,&c. So in N. T. it is used, I. 
by way of substitution, in place of, instead, 
of Lu. xi. 11, dvTi ix^vo9 ocpLV. Ja.iv. 15. 
di/TL Tou \iyELV vfxd^. 1 Cor. xi. 15, as 
implying succession. Matt. ii. 22, ^acri- 
\svEL dvTL 'Hpcooou. Scpt. & Class. John 
i. 16,)/«ptj/ dvTL xdp ires, grace upongrace, 
most abundant grace. — II. by way of ex- 
change, requital, or equivalent, in consider- 
ation of on account of as said 1) of price. 



ANT 



29 



ANT 



foi\ Heb. xii. 16, dv-ri /S/otoo-sti)? /xia?. 
Sept. and Jos. 2) of persons for whom, 
or for the sake of whom, any thing is 
done, in behalf of\ ^latt. xvii. 27. xx. 28. 
Mk. X. 45. Soph. (Ed. Col. 1326'. 3) of 
retribution, fo)\ INIatt. v. 38, ucl^QaXfxo's 
dvTL 6(pdaXiuL0u. Rom. xii. 17, kukov cIvtI 
KUKov. 1 Pet. iii. 9, and Class. 4) of 
cause, motive, or occasion, on account of\ 
because of^ Heb. xii. 2, dvTL x^P^^- 
Eph. V. 31, dvTL TovTov. Lu. xii. 3, dvd' 
toi/, ''wherefore.' Though dvQ' cou is gene- 
rally a causative formula, for dvTL toutou, 
otl\ '■ on this account, namely that,' be- 
cause that, or simply, because, Lu. i. 20. 
xix. 44. Acts xii. 23. 2 Th. ii, 10. Sept. 
and Class. In comp. duTL signifies, 1) 
over against, as dvTLTdcrcri.Lv. 2) con- 
trary to, as dvTL\iy£.Lv. 3) reciprocity, 
as duTaTTodLdcjo/uL. 4) substitution, as du- 
TijSao-iXeus, dvduTraTo^. 5) similarity, 

as dvTLdE09, duTd^LO<S. 

W.VTL(3dXX<jo, f. (SaXu), prop, to cast, 
or throiu (as a ball) in one''s turn, or from 
one to another ; metaph. of words, to cast 
backwards and forwards, as doubts or 
arguments, in conversation or discussion, 
Lu. xxiv. 17, Ttfs? ol XoyoL outol, oi}§ du- 
TL(3dXXs.TE Trpos dXXriXou^', So 2 Mace. 

xi. 13, Trpos eavTOv duTL(3. to y&yovo's. 

'Al/T tOtaT/ 0T]/Xt, f. CTTIja-U), {duTi, 

SLaTLdiiiuLL,) prop, in Acts to set tip any 
one against another, and mid. aVri^mr/- 
Qs/jLUL, to set oneself against another, to 
he opposed to him, either in action or in 
opinion, as 2 Tim. ii. 25, where see Note. 

'Ay-Tt^tKrO §, OU, 6, 17, (^dvTL, ^LKT], ^ 

suit,) an adversary in a law-suit ; chiefly, 
however, the plaintiff, Matt. v. 25. Lu. 

xii. 58, and Class. Hence it denotes gener. 
any adversary or enemy, Lu. xviii. 3, and 
in 1 Pet. V. 8, is applied to the Devil, the 
great adversary of man. 

'AiyTt0£O-t§, £60?, rj, {dvTLTLdt^jULL,) 

opposition, 1 Tim. vi. 20, duTLdiorsL^ (op- 
posite opinions, contrary positions,) t^s 

xj/S-VOOOUU/ilOV yvoocTEto^. 

AvT LKad LCTTi] fXL, f. (TTTicroi, prop. 
to set one against another, or to oppose 
him. In N. T. in aor. 2. intrans. to tvitli- 
stand, resist, Heb. xii. 4. And so dvTL- 
KadL(TTaar6aL in 2 Sam. xxi. 5. Compl. 

^ AvT LfcaX its, icru), to invite in re- 
turn to an entertainment, Lu. xiv. 12. Xen. 
Conv. i. 13. 

'' AvTLKELfxaL, f. KEiao/JLaL, prop, to 
be placed op2:>osite to, metaph. to be op- 
posed to, to be adverse to, foil, by dat. 
Gal. V. 17. 1 Tim. i. 10. So 6 dvTLKzi- 
/jLEvo<s, ' an adversary,' either absol. or with 
dat. Lu. xiii. 17. xxi. 15. 1 Cor. xvi. 9. 
Phil. i. 28. 2 Th. ii. 4. 1 Tim. v. 14. Sept. 
and Class. 



\S.vT LKpxj, adv. opposite to, over against, 
with gen. Acts xx. 15, and Class. 

^Ai/TLXa/mf^duw, f. /\.77v//o/xa(, act. to 
receive in return. In Mid. to take to one- 
self, or lay hold of, either to save from 
falling, or to appropriate and possess, foil, 
by gen. In N. T. it is used 1 ) of things, 
to take to one's possession, 1 Tim. vi. 2, oi 
Tri<i EVEpyecTLa^ dvTiXaiix^avofjiEVOL,'' those 
who are in possession of the benefit [of 
their service].' 2) of persons, to take into 
one''s p7'otection, protect. 

'Ai/TiXty w, f. E^co, to speak against, 
either foil, by dat. or absol. 1) to gain- 
say, contradict. Acts xiii. 45. xxviii. 19, 
22. In Lu. XX. 27, foil, by /x?/ with infin. 
to deny, Sept. and Class. 2) to oppose, 
disobey, contemn, Lu. ii. 34. John xix. 12. 
Rom. X. 21. Tit. i. 9. ii. 9. 

'Az/TiX?7\|/-ts, £ws, 77, {duTLXafj.l3dvo- 
fiai,) prop, and in Class, help, aid; but iu 
N. T. (and also sometimes in the Sept.) 
by meton. of abstract for concrete, a 
help)er, reliever, 1 Cor. xii. 28, supposed 
by some to be equiv. to the didKouo^. But 
see my note there. 

''AvT iXoy ia, a9, 77, [dvTLXiyco,) con- 
tradiction, gener. 1 ) as said of strife, Heb. 
vii. 7, or of controversy at law, Heb. vi. 16. 
Exod. xviii. 16. 2) oi opposition, either in 
words, by reproach, Heb. xii. 3. Matt. xxvi. 
60. xxvii. 22, et al. ; or in deeds, by 
rebellion, Ju. 11, and Protevang. Jac. v. 9. 

'' KvT iXoi^opioi, f. 77(70), to revile in 
turn, 1 Pet. ii. 23. Lucian. Conv. § 40. 

AvTiXvTpOV, OV, TO, {dvTL, XvTpOV,) 

a ransom, price of redemption, 1 Tnn. ii. 
6, dvT. virkp TvdvToov, where it is well 
explained by Hesych. dvTldoTov, imply- 
ing the substitution, in suffering, of ano- 
ther person instead of the guilty one. See 
2 Cor. V. 21. Tit. ii. 14. 1 Pet. i. 18. It 
does not occ. in Class., but dvTLXvTpooj 
is found in Aristot. 

AvTLixET pE(xi, f. 77(70), to mcasurc out 
in return, absol. Matt. vii. 2. Lu. vi. 38, 
where it is put metaph. for requite. 

"'AvTL/uLLord ia, a?, rj, {dvTl,^iuiL(Tdd^,) 
retributioi?.,\yhGihGV foT good, [recompense,) 
2 Cor. vi. 13, or for evil, [punishment,) 
Rom. i. 27. Does not occ. in Class., but 
dvTLfXLGdo<s is found in j$]schyl. Suppl. 285. 

"'AvTLTrapE.pxo/JiCLL, f. eXeva-QuaL, 
to p)<^ss along on the opposite side of any 
thing (as a road), and so to pass by, Lu. x. 
31, sq. Wisd. xvi. 10. Anthol. Gra3C. Ja- 
cobs, vii. 255. 

'' AvT L'K ipav, adv. (aWi, ivEpav,) over 
against, on the opposite shore, Lu. viii. 26, 
and Class. 

AVT LTTLTT TO), f. 'TrECTOV fXai, 1) prOp. 

to fall ctgaifist or upon, implying violence 
^ C 3 



ANT 



30 



I 



and hostility, Polyb. and Hdian. So our ' 
phrase ' to fall foul of ' is used both in a 
natural and figur. sense, of being in oppo- 
sition to any one or his laws ; and so Acts 
vii. 51, Tw Uvs-UfxaTL tco dyico ccutl- 

TTLTTTETE. 

''AvT LOTT pan- E uo fxa f. evdOfxaL^ 
mid. dep. 1) prop, to lead out an army 
against; 2) met. to he adverse to^to oppose^ 
with dat. Rom. vii. 23, dvTLcr. too vofito 
Tov voo's fxov, Aristsen. Ep. ii. 1. 

'Ai/TiTctcrcra), f. Jw, act. to range an 
army in battle-array against^ or to oppose 
some persons to others, Tliuc. iv. 55 ; me- 
taph. to oppose^ as Jos. Ant. iii. 1, 2, tw 
(3LaX^OjUiiv(jo T^5 dvclyKvi's duTLTa^aL to 
dvopaTov. In N. T. mid. dvTLTacrcrofxaL^ 
met. to set oneself against^ to resist^ oppose^ 
either with dat. or absol. Acts xviii. 6. 
Rom. xiii. 2. Ja. iv. 6. v. 6. Prov. iii. 34. 
Xen. Mem. iii. 5, 4. 

'Ai/ TiTUTT 09, ou, o, 77, adj. lit. 'foraaed 
after a type or model hence by a metaph. 
taken from coining, correspondent in form^ 
similar to. So Nonnus, dvTiTVTra ?J0>;, 
' similar manners.' Hence in N. T. it de- 
notes (agreeably to the adjectival significa- 
tion in the neut. to duTLTvirov^ used 
subst.) that ivhicJi corresponds to a type., 
an antitype^ Heb. ix. 24. 1 Pet. iii. 21, and 
in the early Fathers. 

'AyTtXjC' i crT0 9j ou, o, an opposer of 
Christ., i. e. an}- one who denies that Jesus 
is the Messiah, and that the Messiah is 
come in the flesh, 1 John ii. 18, 22. iv. 3. 
2 John 7. 

'Az/TA-fcO), f. ricru\ (ai^T-Xo?, a ship's 
pump,) to draw forth from a vessel (by 
means of some machine for that purpose) 
water, wine, or other liquors, either trans, 
or absol. John ii. 8, 9. iv. 7, 15. Sept. 
and Xen. (Ec. vii. 4. 

'Ai/t\7]/>i«, aT09, TO, prop, idiai is 
draivn up; but in N. T. that vessel in 
which the water drawn up is contained, 
a bucket., John iv. 11. 

'Ai/Toc^OaX/xE 60, f. 770-60, to looh at 
in the face., to face, Barnab. Epist. c. 5, 
and Chrysost. In N. T. used metaph. of 
a ship, to face., i. e. hear up against., resist., 
the wind, Acts xxvii. 15. Wisd. xii. 14. 
PoL xxviii. 17, 18, ovvaadai dvT. Tots 

"Avvopog., ou, 6, 77, adj. (or, uowp,) rf>?/, 
(lit. waterless,) Matt. xii. 43. Lu.' xi. 2*4, 
dvvopoL TOTTot, harrcu., descH. See Is. 
xii. 19._ Hos. ii. 3. 2 Mace. i. 19. In 
2 Pet. ii. 17, TTJiyat dwopoi., and Ju. 12, 
vscpi\aL dvvo. are fig. said of specious 
seducers, as being like those fountains or 
clouds which promise water, but deceive 
those who rely upon them. 

'Ai/uTTo'/cp i TO?, ou, 6, 77, adj. (a, utto- 



KpLvo/jLaL^) unfeigned., real., true., Rom. xii. 
9. 2 Cor. vi. 6. 1 Tim. i. 5. Ja. iii. 17- 

I Pet. i. 22. wisd. V. ra. 

'Ai/uTTOTa/CTos, ou, 6, 77, adj. (a, utto- 
Taa-o-60,) unsuhjected., I. of things, not 
■made subject., or put under one's controul, 
Heb. ii. 8. — II. of persons, not subjected.^ 
or not to be subjected, refractory.^ 1 Tim. 
i. 9. Tit. i. 6, 10. 

'A 1^60, adv. up or above., denoting, I. 
place ichere^ Acts ii. 19. Rev. v. 3, kv 
T60 oupavcp dvct). Hence o, 77, to dvco as 
adj. ivhat is above (referred to heaven), 
and therefore heavenly. So to. aVo), the 
things of heaven, John viii. 23. comp. 
iii. 13, 31. vi. 38 ; but in the sense hea- 
venly things^ Col. iii. 1, 2. Gal. iv. 26, 77 
dvco 'lspov(TaXri/.L. Phil. iii. 14, 77 dvio 
/c\7';o-t§, equiv. to kirovpdvLO's in Heb. iii. 1. 
Sept. and Class. — II. motion to a higher 
place, upwards., John xi. 41. Heb. xii. 15, 
Sept. and Class. John ii. 7, ews a'yco, to 
the very top. Sept. in 2 Chr. xxvi. 8. 

'A 2^607 soy, ou, TO, same as dudyaiov., 
which see. 

'Ay6o6£y, adv. {dvuy,) I. of place, 
from above., Matt, xxvii. 51. Mk. xv, 38. 
John xix. 23, and Class. Hence said of 
whatever is from heaven : and because 
God dwells in heaven, it means from 
God., or in a divine manner., John iii. 31. 
xix. II. Ja. i. 17. iii. 17^ {n di^oodsv cro- 
0i'a, 'heavenly wisdom,') Sept. and Class. 
— II. of time, /ro??i the first, i. e. the very 
beginning, Lu. i. 3. Acts xxvi. 5, and 
Class. On the sense of dviodav in John 
iii. 3, 7, yEuv\]QT]vaL dvo)dav, and Gal. iv. 
9, see my notes. 

'Az;60T£pi/c6 §, 77, 62/, adj. tipper^ 
higJier., Acts xix. 1, d. fxipri.^ 'inland parts.' 

' XvujTzpo's., a, oy, adj. higlier., used in 
neut. as the compar. of ai/w, Lu. xiv. 10, 
to a higher place., Heb. x. 8, dv. \iywv., 
above., i. e. 'in the former part of the 
quotation.' 

'Af wf/j £X7? 9, £os, 6, 77, adj. (a, wcpE- 
Xeo),) 1) 2iseless, unprofttabh., Heb. vii. 
18, TO dviocpaXi^., ' uselessness.' Sept. and 
Class. 2) by impl. injurious., Tit. iii. 9, 
said of juidxaL vo/uLKal, and so Prov. xxviii. 
3, u£T09 du. Thuc. vi. 33. Plato, p. 334. 

'A^I'yij, 77?, 77, {dyvvfXL., inf. d^at.,) an 
aoce., Matt. iii. 10. Lu. iii. 9. Sept. and 
Class. 

'A Jto9, ta, Lov., adj. luorthy, lit. 'what 
draws the balance,' and makes th6 scales 
weigh down. Hence said metaph. I. of 
equal icoHh or value., i. e. worthy of being 
compared with,' Rom. viii. 18, ovk d^iaTa 
Tradv/xaTu, &c. So Sept. and Class. — II. 
gener. woiihy., i. e. 'deserving of,' whether 
of good, or evil ; 1) of good^ absol. and of 
persons ivorthy of, i. e. of benefit, Matt. x. 



31 



AHA 



11. Lu. vii. 4. Rev. iii. 4. foil, by gen. of 
tiling, Matt. x. 10, & oft. 2) of evil, 'de- 
serving of,' either absol. Rev. xvi. 6, or foil, 
by gen. 'irXrjycou, Lu. xii. 48. ^ai/ciTov, 
Rom. i. 32, & oft. — III. by impl. suitable, 
or coi'respojiding to, Avith gen. as Kapirov? 
d^tous fxETavoLa^, Matt. iii. 8. Ln. iii. 
8, et al. Hence d^LOu sanrL, it is suitable, 
or proper, 1 Cor. xvi. 4. 2 Tli. 1. 3, and 
Class. 

''A^LOco, f. waoy, (a^io?,) to account as 
deserving, or worthi/ of any thing, 1) prop, 
and gener. w ith acc. of person, and gen. of 
thing, 2 Th. i. 11. 1 Tim. v. 17. Heb. iii. 
3. X. 29, and Class. 2) spec, to regard as 
suitable, tJmik good. Acts xv. 38, and Class. 

' A ^ / CO §, adv. suitably, becomingly, with 
sen. Rom. xvi. 2. Eph. iv. 1. Phil. i. 27. 
1 Th. ii. 12, and Class. 

'AopaTos, ou, 6, v, adj. (a, opaco,) 
tinseen, or tliat cannot be seen, Rom. i. 20. 
Col. i. 15, sq. 1 Tim. i. 17. Heb. xi. 27. 
Sept. and Class. 

'ATray y tWco, (f. eXw, aor. 1. 
d7rt7yy£iA.a, aor. 2. pass. d7niy'yi.\i]v,) 
with dat, of pers. and acc. of thing, or 
TTfot with gen. or otl, -ttcos, &c. or infin. 
I. to bring word, convey intelligence to any 
■peison, from any person or place, concern- 
ing any person or thing. \) io relate, tell, 
what has happened, with dat. of pers., or 
£t§ and acc. Matt. viii. 33, & oft. 2) to 
make knoivn, announce what is done, or to 
be done. Matt. xii. 18. Lii. xviii. 37, & oft. 
Heb. ii. 12, aVayyeA-O) to ovofJLd crov Tot5 
ddiXcpoL^ fxov. — II. to bring back ivord 
from any one, to export, foil, by dat. of 
pers. with or without acc. of thing, Matt, 
ii. 8. xi. 4. Lu. vii. 22, xiv. 21. Acts v. 
22. Sept. and Class. 

'ATra'yxw, f. dy^uj^ to strangle; but 
gener. as in N. T. mid. dirdyxofJicti-) to 
strangle oneself, namely, by hanging, to 
hang oneself. Matt, xxvii. 5. Sept. and 
Class. On Acts i. 18, see my Note. 

'ATrdyw, f. ^oo, aor. 2. dirriyciyov, 
aor. 1. pass. dTrvx^Vt^-, to lead or conduct 
away, 1) gener. Lu. xiii. 15. foil, by 
Trpos, Acts xxiii. 17. Sept. and Class. In 
N. T. said chiefly in a judicial sense, to 
lead aivay or bring, i. e. either before a 
judge, or to prison, Matt. xxvi. 57. Mk. 
xiv. 44, 53. XV, 16, al., or to punishment, 
Matt, xxvii. 31. Lu. xxiii. 26. John xix. 
16. Hence absol. diray^rivaL, to be led 
off to death. Acts xii. 19, and Sept. 2) 
used of a way which leads (i. e. points or 
tends) to, foil, by cts. Matt. vii. 13, sq. 
Jos. Ant. iv. 6, 10, d-Tr. £t§ fXETauoLau. 
3) mid. dTrdyoixai, lit. to take oneself off, 
to go away, also metaph. to go astray, be 
seduced to evil, 1 Cor. xii. 2, dir. irp6<s to. 
t'LocoXa TO. d(pu)va. 

'ATrat^EUTOs, ou, 6, 77, adj. (a, irai- 



Sevco,) prop, uninstructed, Xen. Mem. iv. 
1. 4. Hence, ignorant, said both of ])er- 
sons, as Sept. and Jos., and of things, 
foolish, 2 Tim. ii. 23, d. ^ijT77o-£te. So 
Plut. vi. 143, 5, dTTaLtevTOL ^iaGeaais. 

'ATrai^oto, f apw, prop, trans, to take 
aicay, remove, Hdot. viii. 57 ; intrans. to 
go aioay, depart, Sept. often, and Class. 
In N. T. occ. only in aor. 1. pass, diryp- 
6i]v, to be taken away. Matt. ix. 15. Mk. 

11. 20. Lu. V. 35. 

'ATraiTso), f. Tjcrw, to demand back 
from any one, to require at his hands, trans, 
with ccTTo TWO'S, Lu. vi. 30. xii. 20, t?ji/ 
\\fvxfw crov d'TTdLTOvarLV diro crov. 

AnraXy f. ri<TUi, in Class, to grieve 
Old, i. e. to cease from grieving, Thuc. ii. 
61. In N. T. to cease to feel, whether 
grief, shame, or other passions, to be un- 
feeling, esp. without sense of shame, Eph. 
iv. 19. 

'' A IT aW d (T cr (x), f. d^w , to remove 
from, trans, foil, by tl, diro tlvo£. Class, 
and Sept. Hence, in N. T. 1) mid. 
diraXXdcxGOfxaL, to remove oneself from, to 
depart, leave, with dird. Acts xix. 12. 
Sept. and Class. 2) pass, by impl. to be 
set free, or dismissed, Lu. xii. 58, divriX- 
Xd^^aL diro avTov, to be let go, i. e. by 
some private adjustment of the demand ; 
metaph. to liberate from ; Heb. ii. 15, in 
act. to free from fear ; so the Class, use 
the phrase, dTraXXayrjvaL vocrov, and dir. 
dTTo dovXo(Tvvt^9. 

''ATraXXoTpLOM, f. tocrw, to estrange^ 
cdienate ; pass, to be estranged, or alienated^ 
from any one, either foil, by gen. Eph. ii. 

12. iv. 18, or absol. Col. i. 21. Sept., Jos., 
Pol., and Diod. Sic. 

'ATraXos, 7?, 6v, adj. prop, yielding to 
the touch, but gener. soft, tender, said of 
the young shoot of a tree, Matt. xxiv. 32. 
Mk. xiii. 28. So Lev. ii. 14, Aq. diraXd 
Xd)(^ava. 

'ATTai/T dw, f. 770-00 or vao/uLUL, prop. 
to meet from opposite dii^ections, to fall in 
ivith, meet ivith, foil, by dat. Matt, xxviii. 
9. Mk. V. 2. John iv. 51, al. Sept. and 
Class. Said of a hostile rencounter, Lu. 
xiv. 31. also in Jud. viii. 21. 2 Sam. i. 15. 

'' Air dvTi]cr L<s, gws, 77, (dTrai/Tdto,) cc 
meeting or rencounter, Sept. often and lat. 
Class. In N. T. occ. only in the phrase 
£t§ d7rdvTi](TLu, put by Heb. for the infin. 
dfravTav, to meet ivith, foil, by gen. Matt. 
XXV. 1,' 6. 1 Th. iv. 17; by dat. Acts 
xxviii. 15. 

"ATTag, adv. 1) prop. 07ice, 2 Cor. xi. 
25. Heb. ix. 7, al. Sept. & Class. So 
dira^ KUL ok, o?ice and again, i. e. several 
times, Phil. iv. 16. 1 Tli. ii. 18, & Sept. 
2) metaph. once for all, Heb. vi. 4. ix. 27. 
X. 2. Joseph. & Sept. 



AUA 

'ATrapa'/^aTos, ou, o, 77, adj. (a, Tra- 
pafSaLvo),) used in later Class, either act. 
not passing over, or transgressing a law, 
Joseph. Ant. xviii. 8, 2 ; or pass, not vio- 
lated, i. e. inviolate, as said of a law. In 
N. T. said of Christ's priesthood, Heb. vii. 
24, as being not transient, or passing to a 
successor, but perpetual. 

^ Air a p acT KEv aaT o<5, ov, 6, 77, adj. 
(a, TTapacrKzvdX^io,) unprepared, 2 Cor. 
ix. 4, & Class. 

'' Air apv io fxai, f. 7j(T0juLai, depon. 
(though the tirst fut. pass, dirapi/^dv- 
(TOfxai occ. in a j^ciss. sense, Lu. xii. 9.) 
prop, to deny, foil, by infm. Lu. xxii. 34, 
TTplv 77 Tpl<3 OLTrapvncnj /mi} eidtuuL fXE. He- 
rod, viii. 69. Hence metaph. of persons, to 
disown. 1) as said of Christ and his reli- 
gion, Matt. xxvi. 34, 35, 75. Mk. xiv. 30. 
John xiii. 38, al. ; 2) of persons disowned 
by Christ, Lu. xii. 9. Sept. & Class. 3) foil, 
by kavTou, to deny and renounce self, all 
personal interests of one's own, Matt. xvi. 
24. Mk. viii. 34. Lu. ix. 23. 

" Airap-rl, sometimes printed cctt' dpTi, 
adv. of timQ, from this time, Y)liencefortli, 
hereafter. Matt, xxiii. 39. John i. 52. 2) 
nearly equiv. to dpTi, but stronger, at this 
very time, even now, John xiii. 19. xiv. 7. 
Rev. xiv. 13. Aristoph. Plut. 388. 

'ATrapT-i 0-^0 9, ou, 6, (aTrap-rt^co, to 
complete,) completion, Lu. xiv. 28, Trpos 
ccTrapTLa-jULou, for completion, i. e. of the 
building. Dion. Hal. 

^Att a PXV-) V^i V-, [dirdpxoiu'.ciL, to 
offer first-fruits in sacrifice, 2 Chron. xxx. 
24.) prop, an offering of first fruits ; then 
an offering gener. In N. T. prop, the first- 
fruits of any thing, which were usually 
consecrated to God ; and hence, I. as said 
of things, the first part, or earnest of any 
thing, Rom. xi. 16, dirapxn scil. (pvpd- 
paTo<s, meaning, ' the first portion,' taken 
out of the mass, said metaph. of the 
Jewish Patriarchs. In Rom. viii. 23, n-r]v 
dirapxh^ Tou nvev/jLaT0<5 is used fig., to 
denote the first gifts of the Holy Spirit, 
considered as the earnest and pledge of 
still higher gifts hereafter. — II. of per- 
sons, first in time, as to any thing, i. e. 
the first of whom any thing may be pre- 
dicated, a firstling, Rom. xvi. 5, 05 karTLv 
aTTupxh T?;s 'Acrms XpLcrTOv, 'the 
first who embraced the Gospel.' 1 Cor. xv. 
20, 23, (of Christ,) dirapyj] Tcof kekol- 
ix-\]fj.ivwv, ' the first who had arisen from 
the dead.' 1 Cor. xvi. 15. Ja. i. 18, dir. 

TOOV aVTOV KTLOr/JLaTOOU. 

"A-Tras, aaa, av, adj. {d/uLa, Tras,) 
nearly the same as Tra?, bat stronger in 
sense, the whole, every, all together. Matt, 
xxiv. 39. Mk. xvi. 15, & oft. 

'A TT a 7- a 60, f. ?7crco, to deceive^ trans. 



32 



AH E 



Eph. V. 6. 1 Tim. ii. 14. Ja. i. 26. Sept. 
and Class. 

'ATraTj], 779, 77, (aTTttTao),) deception, 
cZecezY, said both of joerso;25, a making false- 
hood pass for truth, 2 Pet. ii. 13, and, as 
mostly in Class., of any thing deceptive or 
seductive ; and so Matt. xiii. 22. Mk. iv. 
19. Col. ii. 8. Heb. iii. 13. Eph. iv. 22, 
tTTLdv/iia? T^9 a7raT7j9, for a7raT7j/\ia9, 

'ATraVcop, opo9, o, adj. (a, Tra^rtjp,) 
icithoid father, prop, one ivho has lost his 
father, but in N. T. ' one whose father is 
not reckoned in the genealogies,' Heb. vii. 
3. See, however, my note. 

"'Airavyaa-fxa, aTo<s, to, {diro, avyi), 
splendour,) lit. off-shining, prop, tlie light 
reflected from any lucid body, any reflected 
brightness ; but in Heb.i. 3, dir. nrri's ^o^jjs 
Tov Qsov, (as said of Christ,) fig. for ' in 
whom the Divine majesty is conspicuous, 
the effulgence of His glory,' implying his 
Divine nature. The term is equiv. to 
ELKMu in Col. i. 15. 

Air &I80V, (aor. 2. subj. aTrtoco,) used 
as aor. of dcpopdco, which see, prop, to 
look off from one object, and by impl. 
upon another, foil, by 7rpo9 or eh, and 
metaph. to look at, or regard ivith attention. 
Also in N. T. from the adjunct, to per- 
ceive and know any thing fully, after due 
consideration, Phil. ii. 23, a)9 dv dTriow 
Tti TTfpi ip.i. So Jon. iv. 5, £609 ov dir- 
id}] TL 'iaTUL Trj ttcXbl. 

'ATreLdsLa, a9, 77, [dirsLdi]?,) prop, a 
resistance to jjersuasion by contumacy. In 
N. T. said of the ivant of the obedience of 
faith, by unbelief Rom. xi. 30, 32. Eph. 

ii. 2. V. 6. Heb. iv. 6,11. Col. iii. 6. Jos. 
Ant. iii. 15, 2. & Fathers. It is a stronger 
term than dirLorTLa, denoting obstinacy of 
unbelief 

Att E id ito, f. 77(Tcu, (a7r£i6ii5,) prop. 
not to suffer oneself to be persuaded, to 
refuse belief, to disbelieve, or be disobedient. 
In N. T. it is used 1) absol. of unbelievers 
in Christ, Acts xiv. 2. xvii. 5. xix. 9. 
Rom. XV. 31. 1 Pet. ii. 7 ; and of those 
who are disobedient to God, Heb. iii. 18. 
1 Pet. iii. 20. Rom. xi. 31. x. 21. Sept. & 
Joseph. 2) foil, by dat. of pers. or thing, 
e. gr. TwYlw, John iii. 36. tw Q&w, Rom. 
xi. 30. dXn^ELa, Rom. ii. 8. tco Xoyw, 
1 Pet. ii. 8. TcJ EvayyEXicp, 1 Pet. iv. 17. 

'AtteiG)]?, £09, o, 77, adj. (a, 7r£t06t>,) 
umcilliug to be persuaded, refusing belief 
and consequently obedience ; absol. Lu. 
i. 17. Tit. \. 16. iii. 3. foil, by dat. of pers. 
or thing, Acts xxvi. 19. Rom. i. 30. 2 Tim. 

iii. 2. Sept. and Class. 

'ATTfiiXfew, f. 7?ara), (the etymology is 
variously deduced, but with little success, 
I suspect it to be the same word with dir- 
tiXio), which prop, means, to hem irir^ hem^ 



A n E 



33 



A 11 E 



or drive into a corner^ Hdot. ix. 9, and 
metupli. to drive into straits. See Hdot. i. 
24. ii. 141. viii. 109.) Thence it came to 
mean gener. to threaten^ i. e. to compel to 
do any action, or to desist from any action. 
Xen. Symp. iv. 31, ovkbtl aTreikovfxai^ 
* deterred by tlircats.' The coustr. is acc. 
of thing, or a verb in infin. and dat. of jiers. ; 
so Acts iv. 17, uTTSLXri dTretX-i/o-w/xE^a 
avTo'i^ fxt]KiTi XaXtlv^ ^ here tlie lit. sense 
is, 'minis dcterreamus ne,' &c. the full 
sense, ' strictly cliarge them, under me- 
nace of punisliment, not to speak,' &c. a 
sense of a-rr. very rare, but of which I 
can cite two exaaiples. Joseph. Ant. x. 
7, 4, o Sk dirtLXsl {avTOL's) Trpos tous 
TToXaiuLLov^ (pvytlv. Theocr. Id. xxiv. 16, 
a7r£tA.77cra<7a (pvyiXv ^pt<po^ ^UpaKXyja. 
In the only other passage where the word 
occurs in N. T. it is used absol. in the 
sense, to use threatening language^ reproach^ 
1 Pet. ii. 23, irdcry^oov ovk rjTrsLXsL : as in 
Demosth. p. 42, dTr&LXei. Hdot. iii. 77, 
Tola-L TT. d-rraiXEOif. Ecclus. xix. 17, 
'dXsy^ov Tov 7r/\T](Tioi/ cou irpiv h dir- 
eiXyaruL. 

'ATTSiX?;, 77, prop, a threat^ Actsiv. 
17, 29. ix. 1, and hence, reproach^ up- 
hraidings^ Eph. vi. 9, dviii/Te^ n-i]u dir., 
and so aTrsLXico^ 1 Pet. ii. 23, and often 
in Sept., but see my note. 

"Att £ I fxL^ f. icrofxaL^ to he absent., 1 Cor. 
V. 3. 2 Gor. x. 1, 11, and Class. 

'ATTEtTToi', aor. 2. fr. obsol. aTTETrw ; 
Avhich prim, meant, as in Horn, to spjeak out., 
(equiv. to £^£t'7rw,) as in putting forth a 
message, but afterwards to speak off, i. e. 
recall one's words, and metaph. renounce 
any purposed action, and gener. to reject 
any proposal, refuse or interdict., forbid 
anv thing proposed to be done. Thuc. v. 
23; 32, 43. vi. 89. vii. 60, & oft. in Class. 
In N. T. it occurs only in mid. which lit. 
means, to speak oneself off ivom any thing, 
i. e. to renounce or disoivn^ and gener. to 
have nothing to do tvith ; and is often 
used both as regards persons and things ; 
the latter alone occ. in N. T. 2 Cor. iv. 2, 
dir. Ta KpvTTTrd t^§ atcr)(ui/t]§, ' to have 
nothing to do with, renounce the practice 
of.' 

'ATretpao-Tos, ou, o, 77, adj. («, ttei- 
patw,) either pass, untried., untempted ; or 
act. that has not tried or experienced. In 
each of these two senses the word has been 
taken by one or other of the Commenta- 
tors at Ja. i. 13, 6 Gcos dir. Io-tl kukcov : 
but though the latter is quite agTeeable to 
the usus loquendi., the former is more 
suitable to the context ; and in the sense 
' is untempted,' there seems implied that 
of '• is not to be tempted.' 

"ATTfitpo?, 01;, o, 77, adj. (a, TTEtpa,) 
prop, unexperienced., from not having made 



trial of, and conseq. uninstructed., ignorant., 
Se])t., Joseph., and Class. -And so the 
word is gener. explained at Heb. v. 13. 
But I prefer the intcrpr. ' unht for, un- 
equal to, unable to comprehend' the doc- 
trines of the Gospel. 

'ATTE/c^EXo/xa I, f. ^o/xat, depon. lit. 
to ivait out the time of any one's absence, 
i. e. to wait long for, to auxiit^ or eocpect 
ardently, trans. Rom. viii. 19, 23, 25. 
1 Cor. "i. 7. Gal. v. 5. Phil. iii. 20. Heb. 
ix. 28. 1 Pet. iii. 20. 

'Atte Kovofxai., f. vaofxai., depon. mid. 
1) prop, to strip off and lay aside., as one's 
clothes; 2) fig. to divest oneself of find 
renounce any habit or practice, Col. iii. 9, 
aTT. TOV iraXaLOV dvdpuiirov^ i. e. the cor- 
rupt nature we derived from our father 
Adam. Simil. Hesychius. Philo, p. 59, 
XciXeTTou 6A.O(T)(£jOa)9 Lk^vvul tov dvdpco- 
TTov^ ' the man,' i. e. the disposition of man, 
also p. 1081, EKdvopLsvoL Ta d/mapTt'iiULaTa., 
and Joseph. Ant. xiii. 7, 1, aTrs/co. Tiiv 
vTTOKpLcnv., in allusion to actors putting off 
the dress and mask of one character, and 
assuming that of another. 3) to strip.^ 
i. e. divest of power or authority. Col. ii. 
15, dTT. Tds dpxd^., 'having despoiled 
them of their power ;' by an allusion to 
stripping vanquished foes of their armour 
and arms, and thereby making them 
powerless. 

'AtTE/CO l/<ri9, £0)5, 17, (dTTE/CCL'/Xl,) 

prop, aputting offoi garments, and metaph. 
reriunciation or abandonment of habits and 
practices, Col. ii. 11, dir. tov crco,aaTos 
Tri<s crapKo^., ' by a renouncing of the sins 
to which the body and flesh are prone.' 
Comp. Col. iii. 9, aTrsK^. tov TraXaiov 
dvdpcoTTov crvv Tats Trpd^&cnv avTOv, 

' AiT eXavv 00^ aor. 1. aTrrJXao-a, to 
drive off., or aivay from., Acts xviii. 16. 
Sept. and Class. 

'ATTcXEy/xos, ou, o, (a7r£X£y)(o/>cat, 
to be confuted,) prop, a being convicted of 
error., and by impl. the disrepute thence 
resulting. Acts xix. 27, where £i§ ccTrg- 
Xsyuov iXdeTv is equiv. to d7r£\£7}(£0-- 
0ac, and that parallel to ah ovdkv Xoyi- 
crdrjvaL. 

'AtteXeuOePos, ou, 6, 77, adj. {^aTro., 
eXevdepo^.,) lit. o?ie ivho has ceased to he 
(aVo) a slave., and become a freeman., a 
fi'eedman, 1 Cor. vii. 22, and oft. in Classr 

'ATTEXTTt^CO, f. Law, (ttTTO, fiXTTi^O), 

pro]), to hope oid., i. e. to have done witk 
hoping, to he hopeless., lose cdl hope., to 
despair. Sept. and Class, oft. In Lu. vi. 

35, Oai/ci^ETE, p.1]Skv CtTTEXTTi^OI/Tf 9, thc 

sense is, ' expecting nothing in return." 
See my note in loco. 

'ATTtvavTL., adv. (aVo, svavTi.,) lit. 
Ifivm over against., as in Class, opposite to., 
C 5 



A n E 



34 



Ano 



over against ; but in Sept. and N. T. 1) 
prop, over against^ in the presence of^ as 
said both of persons, Matt. xxi. 2. xxvii. 
24, aTT. Tou 6y\o\). Acts iii. 16, & Sept. ; 
and things, places^ Matt, xxvii. 61, dir. 
Tou Ta^ou, and Sept. 2) fig. by Hebr. 
as said of what is before the mincl^ Rom. 
iii. 18, dir. tcou ofpQaXixoov avTU)v. 3) by 
Hebr. over against, in the sense contrary 
to. Acts xvii. 7, air, tcov doy/uidTcou Kai- 
aapo^, and Sept. 

'Air ip avT09, ou, 6, 77, adj. (a, Trepas, 
limit,) unlimited, interminable, 1 Tim. i. 
4, yEvsaXoyLaL dir. Sept. and Class. 

'A7r£(0t G-Trao-Tw?, adv. (a, TTEpi- 
(T'Trdoi, to draw round, i. e. in another di- 
rection,) lit. idthout being pulled in a dif- 
ferent direction ; and met. without distrac- 
tion, or solicitude about earthly things, 
1 Cor. vii. 35, and Class. The adj. aTrs- 
pLcr7ra(TTo<5 often occurs in the sense, 'un- 
distracted by cares or business,' in Polyb. 
and Porphyr. 

'Attep tT/xT}T0 9, ov, 6, 1], adj. (a, 
TrepLTEfxuo),) prop, uncircunicised, Gen. 
xvii. 14, et al. in Sept. In N. T. metaph. 
Acts vii. 51, dir. n-fj Kapoia kul toTs cocriu, 
as said of those who, from carnal a/cpo- 
(BvcTTLu, turn a 'deaf ear to all calls to 
repentance, Ezek. xliv. 7, 9. Jer. vi. 10, 
hence obdurate, perverse, 

' Air ipy^o fxai, f. eXEvcrofxai, (aTro, 
£/)Xo/xai,) to go away from one place to 
another. Hence, 1. gener. to depart, 
absol. and prop, of persons, Matt. viii. 21, 
et al. or foil, by aTro, Mk. v. 17, et al. ; 
but fig. of things which pass away, cease, 
or perish, Mk. i. 42. Lu. v. 13. Rev. ix. 
12. xi. 14. xxi. 1,4. Cant. ii. 11. — H. spec. 
to go away to a place,toset off thither, &c. 
used 1 ) prop, and foil, by prepositions or 
adverbs of motion. Matt. ii. 22. viii. 19, 
et al. and Class. 2) metaph. of things, 
which go forth, or are spread abroad, as a 
report. Matt. iv. 24, including the idea of 
arrival at, as well as travelling towards, 
Lu. xxiii. 33. Gen. xlii. 21.— III. by 
Hebr. with case, diripx- ottlo-o) tlvo^, 
to go after, follow, as a disciple, Mk. i. 20. 
Lu. xvii. 23, John xii. 19 ; or as a lover, 
Ju. 7. — IV. in the sense to withdraw, go 
apart, Matt. xxvi. 36. Acts iv. 15 ; or turn 
back, return, (foil, by et?,) Matt, ix, 7. 
Lu. i. 23, al. also Sept. and Class. 

'A7r£)/a), f. dcpi^oti, (cctto, £X^i) !• ^0 
hold off^ from, as a ship from the shore, 
Hom. Od. XV. 33; and hence, to avert, 
restrain, Hom. and Hdot. In N. T. 1) 
mid. diriyopLaL, to hold back oneself from, 
( App. ii. 82,) i. e. to abstainfrom-, with gen., 
or foil, bv diro. Acts xv. 20, 29. 1 Th. iv. 
3. V. 22. 1 Tim. iv. 3. 1 Pet.ii. 11. Sept. 
and Class. 2) intrans. to be distant from, 
be absent from, suppl, kavrov^ Lu. vii. 6. 



XV. 20. xxiv. 13. Sept. and Class. Also 
fig. said of the heart. Matt. xv. 8. Mk. vii. 
6, TToppu) diri^zL utt' i/xou, ' has no re- 
gard or reverence for me.' — II. lit. to have 
out or aicay, i. e. all that is one's due, and 
then to receive in full, said 1 ) of persons, to 
have, as we say, ' for good and all,' Philem. 
15. Gen. xliii. 23. Num. xxxii. 19. Jos. 
and Class. 2) of things, as reward or 
wages. Matt. vi. 2, 5 ; satisftiction, Lu. vi, 
24 ; or gener. Phil. iv. 18. Hence the 
idiom diriyzi, ' it is enough,' equiv. to 
iKavov ecTTL, Mk. xiv. 41. 

'ATTtOrTE O), f. 77(760, (aTTtCrTOS,) 1) 

gener. to icithhold or be devoid of belief, to 
doubt, distrust, absol. Acts xxviii. 24. Mk. 
xvi. 11. Lu. xxiv. 41. with dat. xxiv. 11. 
Sept. and Philo. Hence, 2) spec, to dis- 
believe, be unbelieving, without faith in 
God or Christ, Mk. xvi. 16. Rom. iii. 3. 
Wisd. x. 7, and by impl. ' to break one's 
faith to God or Christ, prove false,' 2 Tim. 
ii. 13. 

' Air LCTTL a, as, 77, (aTrto-ros,) tvant of 
faith, or belief, in the doctrines of the 
Gospel, Matt. xiii. 58. xvii. 20, «& oft. 
Sometimes used of wilful disbelief and 
apostasy, as Heb. iii. 12, 19 ; at others of 
ignorant unbelief, 1 Tim. i. 13. i. e. a 
state of unbelief, before knowing or em- 
bracing the Gospel. 

"ATTiCTTOS, OV, 6,V, adj. (a, TTiO-TOS, 

credible,) 1) pass, as said of things, inc7'e- 
dible. Acts xxvi. 8. Joseph, and Class. 
2) act. as said of persons, withholding be- 
lief, incredulous. Matt. xvii. 17. Mk. ix. 
19. Lu. ix. 41, al. 2 Cor. iv. 4, of belief 
in Christ. Hence by impl. a lieathen, one 
who does not believe in and worship the 
true God, 1 Cor, vi. 6, & oft.; so with 
the idea oi impiety. Tit. i. 15. ^ Farther by 
impl. as said of apostates, faithless^ false, 
Lu. xii, 46. Rev. xxi. 8. 

'ATrXooe, ov<s, 611, Sou, 2idy lit. uncom- 
plete, also simple, sincere, sound, as said of 
the eye. Matt. vi. 22. Lu. xi. 34. 

'AttXot?]?, 17x0?, ?7, (aTT/V-oos,) prop. 
simplicity, but mostly used metaph. 1) 
gener. sincerity, probity, 2 Cor. i. 12. Eph. 
vi. 5. Col. iii. 22. Sept., Jos., and Class. 
2) spec, of Chr'istmn. simplicity, i.e. frank- 
ness and fidelity, or as showing itself in 
liberality, Rom. xii. 8. 2 Cor. viii. 2. ix. 
11, 13. Joseph. Ant. vii. 13, 4. 

'AttXcos, adv. (a7rXoo5,) lit. simply, 
as opposed to doubly. In N. T. in sim- 
plicity or reality, as opposed to duplicity, 
Ja. i. 5. 

'Atto, prep. gov. the genit. denoting 

the going forili, or proceeding, of one 
object FROM another, and used of such 
objects as before were on, by, or with 
another, but are now separated from and 



A no 



35 



A no 



stand apart from it; either of place, time, 
and origin, or source ; its general meaning 
being from^ awat/ from^ of\ &:c. I. of 
PLACE, 1 ) as implying motion, //•o?/z, aicay 
from^ both gener. and put after Mords de- 
noting either departure from a place, pers., 
&c. prop, as Matt. viii. 34, & oft. or fig. 
as Mk. i. 42, & oft. Also, after words 
implying any kind of motion aivay from a 
place or pers. ; and sometimes Mith the 
accessory idea of doicn from^ after verbs 
of motion, Matt. viii. 1, et al. Also, as 
indicating the place ivhence any thing 
comes or proceeds, Acts xii. 20. xv. 33. 

1 Th. iii. 6 ; after verbs of coming or 
going off. Matt. ii. 1, et al. ; or of order, 
succession, ap^ofxaL diro Tti/o?, ' to begin,' 
Matt. XX. 8. 2) implying the separation 
or removal of one thing from another, and 
put after words that denote this, in what- 
ever way, e. gr. after verbs implying sepa- 
ration. Matt. XXV. 32. Rom. vi'ii. 35, 39, 
and Class. ; after verbs of depriving, re- 
moving, or taking away, Matt. ix. 1 57 Lu. 
X. 42, or where that idea is implied in the 
context, as after verbs of concealing. Matt, 
xi. 25. Lu. ix. 45. Sept. and Class. ; after 
verbs of demanding, desisting, or restrain- 
ing, as ccTratTgij/, Lu. vi. 30. kK^^Tziv^ xi. 
5L dcpiaTCLvaL^ Acts v. 38. a-n-fi'xscrOai, 
XV. 20. KUTaTravELv^ Heb.iv. 4. EKOLKeiv^ 
Rev. vi. 10 ; after verbs of losing, as \velv 
and aVoX., KaTapyiiv ; also after verbs of 
freeing, purifying, &c. as redeeming ; after 
verbs implying fear, caution, &c. 3) in 
verbs implying distance of one object from 
another. Rev. xii. 14, et al. — II. of time, 
viz. from any time onwards, siiice any 
time, 1) before a noun, as Matt. ix. 22. 
xi. 12. Lu. i. 70, et al. 2) before a pron. 
as a(/)' r]§ scil. rjixipa^^ 'since,' Lu. vii. 45. 

2 Pet. iii. 4, or d(p' ov scil. xp^^ov, 
' since,' Lu. xiii. 25. Rev. xvi. 18. Sept. 
and Class. 3) before adverbs of time, 
with or without tou, as d'lro tov vvv, cctt' 

apTl^ dTTO TTE/OfO-t, CtTTO TTpWi, dlTO TOTE. 

— ^^III. of the ORIGIN, or source, of any 
thing; w'here aVo marks the secondary, 
indirect, mediate origin, while ek denotes 
the primary, direct, ultimate source, and 
vTTo the immediate efficient agent. 1) said 
of the place whence any one is derived, 
and where he belongs, with the art. Matt, 
xxi. 11. Mk. XV. 43. Acts vi. 9, or with- 
out it, Lu. ix. 38. John i. 45, and Class. 
2) of the source^ i. e. the person or thing 
from which any thing proceeds, or is de- 
rived. Matt. xxiv. 32, diro ttj9 <jvki]'$. 
2 Tim. i. 3, diro TrpoyoVwi/, 'inherited 
from my ancestors ;' said of persons from 
whom any one hears, learns, or asks any 
thing, Matt. xi. 29. Col. i. 7; before the 
inciting cause or motive, Matt. xiii. 44, et 
al. ; or before the secondary efficient cause, 
or that which produces or bestows any 



thing. Matt. xii. 38. Gal. i. 1 ; after verbs 
of having or receiving any thing from an- 
other, &c. 1 Cor. vi. 19 ; put after neut. 
pass, verbs, to mark the author and source 
of the action, but not M'hcre the author is 
to be conceived of as personally and im- 
mediately active, (this latter idea being 
expressed bv utto and Trapa,) Matt. xvi. 
21. Acts ii." 22. Ja. i. 13. 3) said of 
the manner or mode in whicli any thing 
is done, &c. e. gr. Matt, xviii. 35, to 
forgive diro tcov Kapoiwv v/xwv^ Lu. xiv. 
18, & Class. 4) said of the mstruinent^ or 
instrumental source, from.^ by means of\ 
idth^'Lw. viii. 3. xv. 16. Rev. xviii. 15, & 
Class. 5) of the material, i. e.from., of 
Matt. iii. 4, Evdvfxa diro Tpiywv Kafx-nXov, 
& Class. 6) said of depe^idence from ox on 
any person or thing, i. e. attachment to or 
connexion with any one, Acts xii. 1. xv. 
5, and Class. 7 ) implying a pan in rela- 
tion to the whole, a part//'0?7z a whole, in 
the sense, from^ of; so after Eadico and 
TTi'yco, or other verbs where an acc. would 
imply the whole, Mk. vi. 43, et al. ; said 
of a class or number of persons, from 
which anyone is selected, and of which he 
forms a part, Matt, xxvii. 9. Lu. xvi. 30. 
Heb. vii. 2, and Class. In composition, 
d'TTo implies, 1) separation, /"ro???, o^, as 
aTToXuw, diroTEfivu}. 2) removal, aicay^ 
?is diT a (3 dXXoo^ dirdy CO. 3) abatement or 
cessation, as diraXyio}. 4) completion, 
in full., as cctte'xw, dTco^v{](yKU3. 5) in- 
tens. as in diro^avixdXoi^ d'lroToXfxdoiy. 

6) restitution, requital, as diro^'ituifxi. 

7) like a priv. it removes the force of the 
simple word, as aTro^o/ci/xa^w, diroKa- 

XvTTTCO. 

' Air o (3 a LV (JO., f. (3iicrojixaL^ aor. 2. dnr- 
i^r,v. 1) prop, to go away., depaH from., 
any place, gener. ; but often to descend 
from., as from horseback to the ground, or 
from a vessel to land, to disemharh., Lu. v. 
2. John xxi. 9, and Class. 2) metaph. 
to turn Old., residt., happen., like Lat. 
evenire., foil, by dat. of pers. and some- 
times acc. of thing preceded by et?, de- 
noting the end of action, as Artemid. iii. 
67, EL^ KaKov diri(37](Tav x.PV^'^ai cpa- 
veXctul eXttloe^. So we may account for 
the expression in Phil. i. 19, tovto fxoi 
d7ro(3ri<TETaL si9 cr co tij p i a i;, with which 
comp. Job xiii. 16, Alex, kul tovto jxoi. 
aTrofSvarETaL tls GooTiipiav. 

'ATTO/SaXXw, f. (SaXco., aor. 2. dir- 
E(3aXov. I. prop, to cast aivay any thing 
as arms or utensils ; also, to cast off a gar- 
ment, Mk. X. 50. Is. i. 30. ^1. V. H, 
xii. 38. — II. metaph. to lay aside., aban- 
don., dir. Ti]v rrrapp^criav vp.u)v, Heb. X. 
35. Philo, Joseph, and Class. 

'A'7ro/3\ ETTO), f. xj/co, I. prop, to look 
off (aTTo) from any thing, and towards 



A no 



36 



A n 0 



(£i§) another, Polyb. vi. 50, 3.— TI. to 

regard^ have respect to^ rationem habere^ 
Heb. xi. 26, 

* had regard to the reward he hoped for.' 
So Philo p. 852, sh TO Tov Oaov fxiyado^ 
dTro^XiiroDV. 

'A7ro|3\7)T09, ou, 6, ^, adj. (aVo- 
^aXkto^) prop, what is fit to he cast aivay 
or rejected^ despicable^ so oft. in Class. 
In Sept. it is often used of what is abo- 
rainable^ as being interdicted by the Mosaic 
law, Hos. ix. 3. And so 1 Tim. iv. 4, 'wdv 
KTLcriuLa Qeou /caXoV, Kai oiidku dir. Lu- 
cian Tim. § 37, ovtol diro^X^Ta elctl 
owpa TO, TTapd tou Aio§. 

' Airo fSoXi]^ 7/9, 77, {dirofSdWo)^) 1) 
prop, a casting off ov aivay., as of arms, or 
articles of dress. 2) the loss (jactura) of 
any goods, or the deprivation of persons 
dear to ns, as children, Joseph. Ant. iv. 8, 
46, et al. or of life itself, as Acts xxvii. 
22, d7ro(3o\i) \l/vxv^ ovdsjULLa. 3) metaph. 
■rejection^ as opp. to reception into favour. 

^ Att ay Lv 0 jtia aor. 2. dirEysvojJujv., 
prop, to be absent from a place where any 
thing has happened ; also, to be removed 
or to remove oneself from., to depart. 
Hence, in a fig. sense, to depaH from life, 
to die., as Thuc. ii. 34, 51, and often in 
Class. Hence, 'in N. T. metaph. foil, by 
dat. to die to any thing, to renounce it, 
1 Pet. ii. 24, diroy. Tar9 dixapTiai^. 
Comp. Rom. vi. 4. 

'A-TToy p a ^ t;?, 17, (a7roypa(^aj, to 
write off, enter in writing, ) an enrolment., 
or register.^ as of citizens, their names, pro- 
perty, &c. for the purpose of taxation, &c. 
Lu. ii. 2. Acts v. 37. The former passage is 
supposed to refer to an enumeration of 
persons, and the latter to a cejisus., i. e. 
of persons and property. 

'A7roypcc(^a), f. prop, to ivrite 

off or out., and hence, to enrol., or inscribe., 
as in a register, Hdot. vii. 100. Pol. xxx. 
10, 7, and Heb. xii. 23, where Christians 
are said to be dTroyEypafx/nlvoL Iv ovpa- 
i/ois, with allusion to the book of life, Ps. 
Ixix. 29. The mid. form diroypdcpofxaL., 
' to enrol oneself,' occurs in Lu. ii. 1, 3, 5, 
and sometimes in Class. 

'A'TTodsLKVVJUiL., f. ^£1^60, I. prOp. tO 

point Old any person or thing to notice ; 
hence, to point out any one as fit for any 
office, to nominate ; also by impl. to ap- 
poijit, as often in Class. So in 1 Cor. iv. 
9, 6 0£o? vp-u's Tous d7roaT6\ov<3 ia-X- 
dTTtdsL^eu., ' effecit, constituit.' — II. met. 
to point out., or shoiv., any thing to be so or 
so, to prove., as often in Class. So Acts 
XXV. 7, d ovK Icryyov dTTodeL^aL. ii. 22, 
diroBitSsiy^ivo^ SvvdpaarL., ' proved to be 
the Messiah by miracles.' 2 Th. ii. 4, diro' 



dELKvvvra kavrdv oti IcttI 0£o9, where 
the action is put for the endeavour. 

'AtToSeL^L?., £609, 77, {d7ro8EtKVVp.L.,) 

manifestation., proof 1 Cor. ii. 4, & Class. 

' Att £ K aT o CO, f. 600-60, 1)^0 take 
tithes of any one, Heb. vii. 5. Sept. in 1 
Sara. viii. 15, 17. 2) to pat/ or give tithes 
of Matt, xxiii. 23. Lu. xi. 42. xviii. 12, 
and Sept. 

'Atto ^£ /<:to9, ou, 6, 77, adj. [diroSi- 
Xo^a/,) 1) of persons, admissible, worthy 
of admission or approbation, Plut. x. 380. 
2) of things, acceptable, worthy of appro- 
bation or praise, 1 Tim. ii. 3. v. 4. 

'A7ro^£XOfiat, f. Si^oniai, mid. de- 
pon. prop, to take from anotlier, and to 
oneself ; and gener. to receive, admit, trans, 
in N. T. used in various shades of sense. 
I. said of persons, to receive any one kindly, 
i. e. as a friend or guest, to bid ivelcome, 
Lu. viii. 40. Acts xv. 4. xviii. 27. xxviii. 
30, and so Class, oft. — II. of things, me- 
taph. \) to accept, applaud an action, 
Acts xxiv. 3, duohExopiEda sc. tovto : so 
Joseph. Ant. vi. 4, 4, dir. to epyov. 2) 
to admit, embrccce, as said of a doctrine, 
Acts ii. 41. Joseph. Ant. ix. 8, 5. Pol. ih 
39, 5. 

'A7ro5)J/U£60, f. 770'60, ( aTTOO J]jU09, ) 1) 

prop, as in Class, to be absent from one's 
own people or country. 2) in N. T. to go 
abroad, travel in foreign countries. Matt. 

xxi. 33. XXV. 14, et al. Jos. Ant. viii. 13, 
5. Xen. Cyr, viii. 5. 1. 

' AiT 6hr[p.o<5, ov, b, 77, adj. (cctto, 
ST] pes, people,) absent from home, abroad 
in foreign countries, Mk. xiii. 34. Arte- 
mid. ii. 8. 

' Att o d l6 o) p. I, (f. ddxTu), aor. ]. a'7r£- 
ScjoKa, aor. 2. dTTEocot/, opt. d7rodiSv,v.) 
I. to give aivay from one's self, i, e. to de- 
liver over, give up, bestou-, trans, or absol. 
1) gener. Matt, xxvii. 58, d-Tro^odrivaL to 
cru)p.a. 2 Tim. iv. 8. Sept. and Class. ; 
metaph. of evidence. Acts iv. 33 ; so aTTo- 
dLSouai \6yov, ' to give account, render 
account,' Matt. xii. 36. Lu. xvi. 2. Acts 
xix. 40. Heb. xiii. 17. 1 Pet. iv.'5. 2) 
said in reference to obligation of any kind, 
to give in fidl, to render, pay over or off\ 
e. gr. wages. Matt. xx. 8. Sept. & Class. ; 
of rent, "tribute, expenses, Matt. xxi. 41. 

xxii. 21. Lu. X. 35. Sept. & Class. ; of 
vows or oaths. Matt. v. 33 ; of duties in 
general, 1 Cor. vii. 3. 3) said of trees, 
fruits, &c, to yield. Rev. xxii. 2 ; meta.ph. 
Heb. xii. 11. 4) mid. to deliver over for 
one''s self \. e. to dispose of by sale, to sell, 
trans. Acts v. 8. vii. 9. Heb. xii. 16. 
Sept., Jos., Philo, and Class. — II. to give 
back agai?i, restore, trans, or absol. 1) 
gener. Lu. iv. 20. ix. 42 ; spoken of debts, 
obligations, &c. to repay, refund Matt. v. 



A no 

26, al. Sept. and Class. 2) spec, in the 
sense of to render hack., requite.^ retaliate., 
either good or evil, Matt. vi. 4, al. oft. & 
Sept. Eur. Med. 130. 

to bound,) prop, of things, to set or divide 
oJf-\ any thing by bounds, from something 
else. In N. T. of persons, to set oneself 
oJf\ separate oneself from another, Ju. 19, 
ovTOL eicTLv oi a7roOiOf)i^Oi/T£§ iavTov?. 

'ATToooKi/ua^co, f. a<ra), (ctTrd, Sokl- 
ua^cu, to approve of,) to disapprove of 
reject., trans. Avhetlier things. Matt. xxi. 
42. Mk. xii. 10. Lu. xx. 17 : or persons, 
Mk. viii. 31. Lu. ix. 22. x^-ii. 25. 

'Attooo)^?;, 77?i V-> [dTrodexo/ULai., to 
receive, admit, approve,) prop, reception., 
admission., as said of a guest or friend ; and 
metaph. apjjrobation or praise^ 1 Tim. i. 
15. iv. 9. Joseph, and Class. 

'A7rO0€Cr{5, £6t)9, 77, {uTTOTlQi] flL,) 

prop, a putting off., laying aside., as of clothes 
or arms; and metaph. a putting of oi the 
tabernacle of the body by death, 2 Pet. 
i. 14, dir. Tou (TKi^vw/ixaTo? /ulov, where 
(as in 2 Cor. v. 2, to olki]ti]plov — ettev- 
cucraordaL) there is a double allusion ; viz. 
to the body, as a garment /o, and a taber- 
nacle or habitation of the soul. In 1 Pet. 
iii. 21, craoKo's aTroGscrt? puTrov., there is an 
allusion to the getting rid of \1cious habits 
which defile the soul, (Matt. xv. 18,) the 
temple of God, (1 Cor. iii. 17,) with refe- 
rence to the true spiritual baptism, that of 
the soul, by the being washed from our 
sins in the blood of Jesus : the same 
double allusion exists at Heb. x. 22. 

'A7ro0r7/C7], ?7, (a7roTi'07jM^) lit. 
a place where articles of every kind are 
laid up., whether arms, or treasure, or, as 
in N. T. grain ; a ham or granary., Matt, 
iii. 12. vi. 26. xiii. 80. Lu. iii. 17. xii. 
18, 24. 

'A TToO ?) era up i^o), f. icrco, prop, to 
treasure up., lay hy. In N. T. fig. 1 Tim. 
vi. 19. Lucian'Lap. § 15. 

'A7ro6/\Z'jSa), f. x/ao), (ctTo intens. 
dXi^oo^) to press or crowd from [diro) 
every side, Lu. viii. 45. 

'A7ro0y77o-K'tt), (f. ^avoufxai., aor. 2. 
diriOcivou.,) to die., intrans. lit. to die off. 
] ) said prop, and phys. of the death of 
animate creatures, esp. men, whether to 
die. Matt. ix. 24. Mk. v. 35, & oft. ; or 
to he put to death, Matt. xxvi. 35. Acts 
xxi. 13. Rom. v. 6. Heb.xi. 37. Rev. viii. 
9; of animals, to perish. Matt. viii. 32. 
Rev. xvi. 3 ; of trees or vegetables, John 
xii. 24. 1 Cor. xv. 36; metaph. Ju. 12. 
In an inchoative sense, to he dying, i. e. 
near to death, 1 Cor. xv. 31. 2 Cor. vi. 9 : 
to he sidjject to death, Rom. v. 15. 1 Cor. 



7 A n o 

XV. 22. Heb. vii. 8. — II. metaph. of spi- 
ritual and eternal death, the perishing of 
the soul, involved in exclusion from the 
Messiah's kingdom, and including eternal 
punishment for sin; equiv. to ' tiie second 
death,' (Rev. xx. 14.) John vi. 50. viii. 21, 
24, xi. 26. Rom. vii. 10. viii. 13. Also 
said of the extinction of faith, works, 6:c. 
by tlieir ceasing to exist, Rev. iii. 2, cnro- 

dvi'](TKELV TLVL, OX CLIT 6 TLV09, *" tO dlC tO Or 

from' any thing, to renounce, forsaJce its 
use or practice. Col. ii. 20, diro tvou 
crTOL^^ELoov Tov Kocruov. Gal. ii. 19, v6- 
luu). Rom. vi. 2, Ty afxapTia, and Col. 
iii. 3, ToTs ETTi T7;5 7?;s, ' earthly things.' 

' XiroKad LCTTmxL, I. KaTa<TTV(jco, to 
hring hack into a former state, replace, re- 
store, and by impl. to amend, said 1) as 
regards p)ersons, of restoration to health 
from sickness, (see Foesii CEcon. Hipp, 
in Y.) Matt. xii. 13. I\Ik. iii. 5. viii. 25. 
Lu. vi. 10. Sept. and Class. 2) of resto- 
ration to liberty, home, or country, &c. 
from prison, Heb. xiii. 19. Sept. & Class. 
3) as regards tilings, (a kingdom or govern- 
ment,) to re-estailiili, or restore, what has 
been abrogated, or disarran2'ed, Diod. Sic. 
XX. 32. Pol. iv. 25, 7. In^X. T. said of 
the Jewish kingdom, or government, which 
the Messiah was expected to restore and 
enlarge. Matt. xvii. 11. Mk. ix. 12. Acts 

i. 6. So Pol. ix. 30, to ird-rpLov diroK. 
'TToXLTEvp.a, implying some improvement 
thereon. 

'ATTOKaXuTTTtO, f. xboj, tO 2171- 

cover, unveil, Sept. 6c Cla--. : also metaph. 
to reveo.l, disclose, what was secret, or un- 
known, trans. Class. Sept. and N. T. 
where it is used, I. gencr. Matt. x. 26. 
Luke xii, 2 : espec. of things which be- 
come known by their eftects, Lu. ii. 35. 
John xii. 38. Rom. i. 17, 18. viii. 18. 
j 1 Pet. i. 5. V. 1 ; also of things tiied and 
proved, and thus made knoivn, 1 Cor. iii. 
13, kv TTf Oi diroKuXvirTETaL. Gal. iii. 23, 
— II. said of things revealed, 1) from 
God to man, and made known by the 
Holv Spirit. Matt. xi. 25. Lu. x. 21. 1 Cor. 

ii. 10. Epli. iii. 5. Phil. iii. 15. 2) of 
things revealed from God through Christ, 
Matt. xi. 27. Lu. x. 22. — HI. said of per- 
sons, in the pass, to he revealed, i. e. to 
appear, Lu. xvii. 30, of Chri-t's ajrpearing 
from heaven ; of Anticluist, 2 Th. li. 3, f), 
8. Sept. in 1 Sam. iii. 21. 2 E-dr. xiii. 32. 

'Atto/v a\ f ilri ?, £0)?, 7/, prop, the vji- 
covering o/'any thing that was covered up: 
but mostly meta])li. the disclosure of any 
thing secret or unknown. In X. T. it is 
used, 1) of the removal of the veil of 
ignorance, by the communication of know- 
ledge, instruction, <kc. Lu. ii. 32. 2) m 
the sense nianifestation, Rom. ii. 5, vutpa 
a.7roKa\v\!/EOj<s, 'when it will be made 



Ano 



38 



AHO 



known,"' Rom. viii. 19. So of that which 
before was concealed, as the Divine mys- 
teries, purposes, doctrines, &c. Rom. xvi. 
25. 1 Cor. xiv. 6, 26 ; of revelations from 
God or Christ, 2 Cor. xii. 1, 7. Gal. i. 12. 

11. 2. Eph. iii. 3. 3) appearance^ said of 
Christ's appearance from heaven, 2 Th. i. 
7. 1 Cor. i. 7. 1 Pet. i. 7, 13. iv. 13. 

^A'TTOKapadoKia^ a?, 77, {diroKapa- 
GOKEto^ fr. ttTTo, KCLpa^ SoKtco^ to look for, 
prop, to look at any thing, with the head 
bent forward, and, of com'se, attentively, 
and hence, to aivait or eocjoeci anxiously^ 
prop, thrusting forward the head; and 
metaph. earnest expectation^ Rom. viii. 19. 
Phil. i. 20. 

'ATTO/caTct Watro-co, f. ^w, (aTro, 
/caTa, dX/vacrcrw, to change,) lit. to change 
or alter a person/rowz one state of feeling, 
or disposition, to another, e. gr. from 
enmity to friendship, to reconcile him to 
another, Eph. ii. 16. Col, i. 20, sq. 

'ATTo/caTacTTacrt?, fws, 17, (aTro- 
Ka6t(TTi]luLL^) 'restoration to a former [and 
better] state ; prop, said of the restoration 
of a city or state, Joseph. Ant. xi. 3, 8. 
Pol. iv. 23, 1, and metaph. of the restitu- 
tion of all things in the Messiah's king- 
dom. Acts iii. 21. 

'AiroK&LiuLaL^ f, ELcrofiaL^ (aTro, KiX- 
fxai^) 1) prop, to he laid up>, for future 
use, Lu. xix. 20. Sept. and Class. 2) 
metaph. to he laid up in store for, reserved 
for^ to aicait any one, as rewards, or the 
hope thereof, Col. i. 5. 2 Tim. iv. 8. Jos. 
and Class. ; of death^ ix. 27. D. Hal. v. 8. 

'Atto KEcfy aXiX^o)^ f. icrw, (aTro, ke- 
(pa\i]^) to take off the head^ hehead^ trans. 
Matt. xiv. 10. Mk. vi. 16, 27. Lu. ix. 9. 
Sept. and later Class. 

'Atto/c A.£ t o), f. £^(^6^), to shut to^ as Tr/y 
^vpav^ Lu. xiii. 25. Sept. and Class. 

'Attok: oTTTCt), f. \l/-a), to cut off^ am- 
putate^ trans. Mk. ix. 43, 45. John xviii. 
10, 26. Acts xxvii. 32. Sept. and Class. 
On the sense in the obscure expr. Gal. v. 

12, ofpsXav uTTOKOKj/ovTaL^ see my note. 
'Attokp l fxa^ aTO?, to, {airoKpivofxaL^^, 

an ansicer, also a judicial response or sen- 
tence. So in Class. In N. T. to aivoKpL- 
/ua Tox) ^avciTov^ 2 Cor. i. 9, fig. denotes 
utter despair of life. 

'ATTOKpl'voimaL., mid. form fr. act. 
a'TTOKpLVM^ to sift o/f, luinnow out., separate. 
Hence 1) to judge and in mid. to judge 
of for oneself, i. e. in reply to a question, 
to answer^ whether to a simple question, 
Matt. xi. 4, et al. oft., or to a judicial 
interrogation, Matt. xxvi. 62. xxvii, 14. Mk. 
xiv. 61, or to an implied question in an en- 
treaty or proposal, Matt. iv. 4, & oft. or 
to an accusation, by denial, Matt. iii. 15, 
et al. oft. 2) by Hebr., to proceed to 



speak.^ either in continuation of a previ- 
ously commenced discourse, to continue 
discourse., Matt. xi. 25. xii. 38, & Sept. ; 
or in commencement thereof, to begin to 
speak., and occasionally with reference to 
something that has been said. So aTro- 
KpiQil's eItte or aTTEKpidri /cat eItte^ Matt. 
x\di. 4, et al. oft. and Sept. 

'A7rO/C|0 I a-/ S, £609, 17, {cLTrOKpLVOIULaL.,) 

an ansicer.^ Lu. ii. 47. xx. 26. John i. 
22. xix. 9. Sept. and Class. 

' Air OK pvnTT u)., f. \|/^6o, (aTTo, off or 
away, icpvirTuy.,) 1) prop, to conceal any 
pers. or thing out of sight, Matt. xxv. 18, 
TO dpyvpLov. 2) metaph. to conceal from 
any one's knowdedge, foil, by aTro with 
gen. of pers. Matt. xi. 25. Lu. x. 21. 

1 Cor. ii. 7. Eph. iii. 9. Col. i. 26. Sept. 
and Class. 

'ATTOKpvcpo^., ov, 6, 77, adj. {aTTO- 
KpvTTTco,) prop, hidden aivay h'om si^ht. 
In N. T. metaph. 1) concealed from 
knowledge, Mk. iv. 22. Lu. viii. 17. Sept. 
and Class. 2) by impl. laid up in store., 
Col. ii. 3, and Sept. 

' A TT O /£ T £ 1 1/ O), f . £I/W, tO Mil off., put tO 

death., 1) in a physical sense, Matt. xiv. 
5. xvi. 21, & oft. al. Sept. and Class. 
2) in a moral sense, to kill eternally., occa- 
sion the death of the soul by eternal 
punishment in hell, Matt. x. 28. Rom. 
vii. 11. 2 Cor. iii. 6. 3) metaph. of things, 
to destroy., aholish., uTr, tijv Ex^pav.^ Eph. 
ii. 16. 

'Attok-ueo), f. 770-60, (aVo, off, and 
/ci;£6o, to be pregnant,) lit. to finish heing 
pregnant with, and, from the adjunct, to 
bring forth., metaph. Ja. i. 15, 18, where 
see my note. 

' AiroKv\ivh(xi., or -tw, f. tcco, to roll 
from or aimy., trans. Matt, xxviii. 2. Mk. 
xvi. 3, 4. Lu. xxiv. 2. Sept., Jos., and 
Class. 

' Airo\a\k^dvw., f. XriKj/ofxai^ aor. 2. 
d7rE\a(3ov, to take or obtain from anj^one, 
i. e. I. to receive, and hence, as said of 
things, to obtain, Lu. xvi. 25, dTriXa^E's 
Td aya^d crov. Gal. iv. 5, cztt. Ti)V vlodE- 
G-Luv : also to receive from any one some- 
thing due, as debts, Lu. vi. 34. xv. 27, et 
Class. ; or merited in requital, Lu. xviii. 
30. xxiii. 41. Rom. i. 27. CoL iii. 24. 

2 John 8, and Class.— TI. in mid. and said 
of persons, to take to oneself from another 
person or place, to take aside with oneself, 
Mk. vii. 33, d7roXa(36fJLEVO<s avrov diro 
Tou ox^ov KaT iSiav. So^ 2 Mace. vi. 
21, aTToXa^ovTE^ avTOV KaT idiav Trap- 
EKoKovv, and so Jos. and the later Class. 
In 3 John 8, diroX. signifies ' to receive 
any one as a guest,' for uTro^sx^o-Oat. 

'ATTo^auo-is, £co§, J7, [air oXavu},) en- 
joyment, i. e. 1 ) the act of enjoying, 1 Tim. 



Ano 



39 



Alio 



vi. 17, diroXava-Lu, ' for enjoyment,' 
i. e. to enjoy, Jos. Ant.ii. 4, 4, and Class. 
2) the source of enjoyment, in the pleasure 
or profit of the thing, Heb. xi. 25, ufxap- 
Ttas dir. Sept., Jos., and Ckiss. 

'AttoA. € iTT o), f. xj/co, gener. to leave a7ca?/ 
from oneself, I. to leave any one behind^ 
2 Tim. iv. 13, 20. Jos. and Class. Pass. 
to he left heliind^ remain^ Exod. xiv. 28. 
Met. ctTroXeiVi-Tat, 'there remains,' Heb. 
iv. 6, 9. X. 26. AYisd. xiv. 6, and Class. — 
II. to forsake^ renounce^ Jude 6, uir. to 
"lBiov oiKi]Ti]pLou. Sept. and Class. 

'AttoXs I'x^^i f. Ht^w, to lick, lick of 
or clean, helick. Lu. xvi. 21, ol kvvs^ diri- 
\ELypv TO. k'/V/c?; avTov. 

'AttoWv /uLt, (f. diroXia-ct), perf. utto- 
XcoXsKa, perf 2. aTro'XooXa, mid. f. aVo- 
Xou/xai, aor. 2. aTrooXo/nTiu,) lit. to destroy 
or perish off. I. act. form, 1 ) to destroy, 
cause to perish, used both of things, 1 Cor. 
i. 19, and Class, and persons ; and said 
both of physical death, Matt. ii. 13. xii. 
14. xxi. 4], & oft. Sept. and Class., and 
of moral or spiritual, involved in everlast- 
ing exclusion from the Messiah's kingdom, 
together with positive punishments eternal 
in their duration, (see on v. dTrodvricTKct),) 
Matt. x. 28. Mk. i. 24. Lu. iv. 34. ix. 
25, 56. Rom. xiv. 15. 2) to lose, he de- 
prived, of any thing, as an article of pro- 
perty, reward, or one's life, Matt. x. 42. 
Mk. ix. 41, & oft. — II. mid. and pass, 
forms diroXXvfjiaL, 2 perf dTroXoaXa, 1) 
to he destroyed, to perish, 1) said of things, 
Matt. v. 29, seq. ol da-Kol ccttoX. Matt. ix. 
17. Mk. ii. 22, et al. 2) of persons, both 
of physical death, Matt. viii. 25. xviii. 14, 
& oft. Class. ; and of moral and spiritual 
death, to perish eteivially, he deprived of 
eternal life, Lu. xiii. 3. John 'iii. 15, sq. 
X. 28. xvii. 12. Rom. ii. 12. 1 Cor. viii. 
II. XV. 18. 2 Pet. iii. 9. Also said of 
things, to he lost, as strayed shee]), Lu. xv, 
4, 6, or to come to nought, as ^p\^, Lu. 
xxi. 18 ; or of persons, Lu. xv. 24 ; also 
metaph. Matt. x. 6. xv. 24. xviii. 11. Lu. 
xix. 10, and Sept. 

'A'TToXoy io niai, f. ncrojJLai, dep. mid. 
lit. to speak oneself off of any charge, i. e. 
to plead for oneself before a tribunal, or 
simply in justification of any thing ; used 
either absol. Lu. xxi. 14. Acts xxv. 8. 
E-om. ii. 15, or foil, by dat. of pers. to or 
against whom. Acts xix. 33, or kTrl with 
gen. Acts xxvi. 2, or with an accus. of 
manner, tl, Lu. xii. 11, al. 

'ATToXoyta, as, ri, (ctTroXoyEO/zat,) a 
defence before a tribunal or elsewhere. 
Acts xxii. 1. 2 Tim. iv. 16, al. So of de- 
fence gener. 2 Cor. vii. 11. Phil. i. 17, tou 
zhayytXiov, 1 Cor. ix. 3, et al. 

'AttoXoi'/w, f, ovcru), trans. 1) prop. 
to wash off dirt from any person or thing, 



(constr. TLvd Tt,) mid. dTroXovofxai, to 
ivash oneself clean. 2) met. to cleanse any 
one from tlie moral pollution of vice or 
sin, and, as used of things, in mid. to re- 
nounce the sins in their guilt and punish- 
ment. Acts xxii. 16, dir. ras duxapTia^^ 
and absol. 1 Cor. vi. 11, dTrsXavcraade, 'ye 
have washed yourselves clean from sin,* 
Sept. and Philo, p. 1051, n-d Kan-apvTrai- 
vovTa TTiv \l/vxhv dTToXovaacrdaL. 

' AiroXvT p (X) cr L'S, ews, rj, {aTroXv- 
Tpoco,) gener. redemption of a captive or 
slave by payment of his XvTpov, or ran- 
som. So often in Class. In N. T. it is 
used I. fig. of deliverance from the penalty 
and also the power of sin, Rom. vi. 14, on 
account of the ransom paid by Christ of 
his own life. Comp. Matt. xx. 28. Rom. 
iii^. 24. Eph. i. 7, 14. Col. i. 14. Hebr. ix. 

15. — II. by meton. to denote the author 
of the deliverance, the Redeemer, 1 Cor. 
i. 30. — III. said of deliverance simply, the 
idea of ransom being dropped, ex. gr. from 
calamities and death, Lu. xxi. 28. Heb. 
xi. 35 ; of the soul from the body as its 
prison, Rom. viii. 23. Eph. iv. 30. 

'AttoXi/'w, f. vcru3, to unhind, let loose, 
release from, trans, and foil, by gen. of 
person or thing, prop. Horn. Od. xxi. 46, 
et al. in Class. In N. T. metaph. 1) to 
release from bonds or imprisonment. Matt, 
xviii. 27. Mk. xv. 6. Lu. xxii. 68, et al. 
oft. ; to release from disease, which was, 
like death, considered as a bond, Lu. xiii. 
12, aTToXiXvcTaL Til's dadeveia^ arov, and 

16, \)v 'ioTjcr&u 6 2., ouK £0£t Xvd-rjvaL ; 
comp. Acts ii. 24. 2) to let go, send atvay, 
dismiss. Matt. xiv. 15. xv. 32, et al. oft. 
and Class. So mid. dmoXvofxaL, to send 
oneself cnuay, take oneself off, go away^ 
Acts XV. 33. XX viii. 25. Sept. and Class. ; 
to dismiss from life, to let die, Lu. ii. 29. 
Sept., Apocr., lEAiVin, Diod. Sic, and the 
heathen Philosophers, as Porphyry, Marc. 
Anton. Indeed the word signif. prop, to let 
go from any place, or fig. from any state 
which implies restraint, to any other place, 
as home, or state, as freedom instead of 
bondage ; and sometimes it is employed 
metaph., and by euphem., of decdh, either 
with the addition of tou <juc>ixa'ro'i, tov 
^T/j/, as gener. in the Class, writers, or 
without them, as here and elsewhere in 
the Scriptures. In short, the term was 
used partly of liberation from confinement, 
and partly of release from disease, or 
labours and anxieties, not only by the 
being eased of pain and troubles, but by 
removal from them by death. 3) to dis- 
miss, as said of a husband divorcing a wife, 
Matt. i. 19. V. 31. xix. 3, or a wife a hus- 
band, Mk. x. 12, and Class. 

'ATTo/xao-fTco, f. ^co, to ivipe off or 
away, act. as tears from the eyes, Pol. xv. 



An o 



40 



Ano 



26, 3 ; mid. to tvipe off f rom oneself, as 
'dust, Lii. X. 11. 

'A-TToi/E/x o), f. /xa>, prop, to apportion 
off^ divide out. assign to^ as in Sept. and 
Class. In N. T. to allot^ bestow^ assign^ 
1 Pet. iii. 7, cLTT. TLfxnv. Jos. Ant. i. 7, 1. 

'A TT o 1/ 1 TTT CO, f. to loasli off^ cleanse 
hy ivashing^ as Homer and Sept. In mid. 
ctTrovL'KTOjxaL^ to ivash oneself\ sometimes 
foil, by an ace. noting the part of the body 
washed, as tocs xaioas, Matt, xxviii. 24. 

'ATTOTrtTn-o), to fall ojf, intrans., foil, 
by air 6 with gen. Acts ix. 18. Sept. and 
Class. 

'ATTOTrXai/a to, f, rjo-w, 1) prop, to 
cause to ivander from^ i. e. from the right 
road. 2) metaph. to mislead^ seduce from 
the truth, deceive^ trans. Mk. xiii. 22. 
Pass, metaph. to be dratvn aivay^ go astray 
from^ siverve from, 1 Tim. vi. 10, dir. 
diiO -rfj^ Tr/o-TEO)?. Sept. and Apocr. Pol. 
iii. 57, 4. Prop. Xen. Eph. p. 50, 13. 

'A7ro7rA.££o, f. 7rA.£L' (To/iai, to sail 
aivay^ intrans. Acts xiii. 4. xiv. 26. xx. 
15, and Class. 

^ Air ottXv'v (JO, f. vvoj, to tvasTi off^ 
cleanse, trans, said of nets, Lu. v. 2. Sept. 
and Class. 

'ATrcTrvl'y CO, f. ^co, prop, to cliohe, as 
by drowning, Lu. viii. 33. Metaph. said of 
plants, to choke, by exclusion of air, Matt, 
xiii. 7. Lu. viii. 7, and Class. 

'ATTopgw, f. ?7cra), (ccTTopos, fr. a, tto- 
/009, way or exit,) Jos. and Class, act. ; in 
N. T. mid. ctTropioixaL, to be at a loss 
which w'ay to go, be ivithout resource, foil. 
l)y TTEOL with gen. John xiii. 22 ; by f k 
TO, Acts XXV. 20. by impl. to be perplexed, 
anocious, 2 Cor. iv. 8. Gal. iv. 20. Sept. 
and Class. 

' Air op L a, as, 17, (ccTropgo),) lit. 'a not 
knowing which course to take,' perplexity, 
Lu. xxi. 25. Sept. and Class. 

'A TTopp tTTTO), f. y\ru3, prop, and in 
Class, to cast off, throiv asid.e, as dress, 
arms, &c. In N. T. with a reflex, pron. 
implied, Actsxxvii. 43, dir. euvtov?, ^cast- 
ing ourselves off" from the deep into the 
water.' Sept. and Class. 

'ATTopfjyavLX^o), f. lcoj, {diro, opcpa.- 
j/09,) to bereave of prop, of parents, ^Esch. 
Choeph. 246. In N. T. it occurs only in 
the Pass., to be bereaved of foil, by diro ; 
metaph. to be deprived, of as parents are 
deprived of their children by death ; also 
said of a teacher separated from his dis- 
ciples, 1 Th. ii. 17. 

'A 7ro(r/c£ u a^to, f. acrw, and mid. 
a.iro(TKtvaX,oiJiaL, lit. to rid oneself of heavy 
baggage, and hence to remove any incum- 
brance out of the way, Sept. and Class. 
In JN. T. Acts xxi. 15, d7rocrKeva(rdp.'dvoL 



dvEfBahofiEv £t5 'Igp. 'ridding ourselves 
of our baggage,' viz. by leaving part of it 
behind ; or rather, '"having packed up our 
baggage :' a signif., however rare, deriva- 
able from diroarK&vh-, 'baggage,' and found 
in Dion. Hal. Ant. ix. 23. 

' Air ocTKLacr jjLa, aro^, to, {diro, (tkl- 
dX,o},) a casting of a shadotv, metaph. an 
adumbration, ov faint appearance of change, 
Ja. i. 17, where see my note. 

ATToo-Trao), f.dcrco, of things, to draiv 
from, as a sword from its scabbard, Matt, 
xxvi. 51 ; but gerier. to drag or tear off: 
also of persons, to draiv from another to 
oneself. Acts xx. 30. Jos. and Class. In 
aor. 1. pass, in a mid, sense to ivithdraiv 
oneself go away from, Lu. xxii. 41. Acts 
xxi. 1. Yet see my notes there. 

' AnrocTTaarLa, a<s, 1), apostasy, defec- 
tion ; a term of later Greek for dTrocjTa- 
o-is. Acts xxi. 21. 2 Thess. ii. 3. Sept. and 
Plut. 

A7rocrTa(Tioi/, iov, to, (a0torT7],ai,) 

defection, desertion, as of a freedman from 
his patron, Demosth. In N. T. repudia- 
tion, divorce, as (3lI3\lou diroarTacrLou, ' a 
bill of divorce,' Matt. xix. 7. Mk. x. 4, 
and Sept. 

ATTocTTsya^o), f. acrco, to unroof a 
building, Mk. ii. 4. Strabo p. 304. 542. 

ATroarTfiWo), f. g-teXw, to' send off 
or ccivay, or forth and out, Constr. as to 
the pers. to whom, with dat., or acc. with 
TTpos or £t§ ; as to the place tvhither, Avith 
£t§ or iv ; and as to the person- or place 
whence, with d^cb or Tcapd with gen. of 
pers. I. prop, said of persons sent forth 
or out from men, as messengers or agents. 
Matt. X. 5, 16. xi. 10. xxi. 1, & oft. ; of 
persons sent from God, as angels, prophets, 
or teachers. Matt. x. 40. xiii. 41, et ah oft. 
In this sense the acc. of pers. is often 
omitted, as John v. 33, d'TZEGTuXKETz 
TT^os '\oidvvr\v, esp. a7rocn-£t/\a§ before 
an act. verb, as Matt. ii. 16, aTr. ai;£T/\£ 
Traz/xas. Mk. vi. 17. Acts vii. 14, and 
Sept. and Class. — II. metaph. said of 
THINGS, to send forth, i. e. to proclaim, 
promulgate,^ and thereby bestow, as \6- 
yov. Acts X. 36. xiii. 26. to crcoTvpLov, 
xxviii. 28. TVjU kirayy sXiau, Lu. xxi v. 
49. Sept. and Class. Also, to send forth, 
of things. Acts xi. 30, d-rr. tvjv OLaKovlav, 
Class. Ti)v ETTLc-ToXvv. Mk. iv.29, aTroa-T. 
TO dpi-rravov. So E^aTroo-r. Sept. in Joel 
iv. 9, iii. 13. — III. to send aivay, dismiss, 
Mk. viii. 26. Matt. viii. 31. Mk. xi. 3. 
Lu. iv. 18, and Class. 

' AirocTTEpEoo, f. 770-0), to deprive or 
defraud of, constr, with acc. of person, and 
acc. or gen. of thin6-. I. said of persons, 
foil, by acc. 1 Cor. vi. 8. absol. Mk. x. 
19, w^here I have remarked that diroaTEp. 



A no 



4 



1 



A no 



signifies ' to deprive any one of liis pro- 
perty,' whether by actual and open rob- 
bery, or by secret fraud, as denying a 
debt, cheating in the quality of goods sold, 
or overreaching in a bargain; also -with re- 
ference to the conjugal intercourse, 1 Cor. 
vii. 5. So mid. to sujfcr oneself to he 
dcfraiided^ 1 Cor. vi. 7. II. of THiNCiS, 
foil, by acc. n-ov ixiadov^ and in the Pass, 
constr. by nom. b (XLcrdo^^ Ja. v. 4, 6 juLicr- 
Oo§ diraa-rspijuiiuo's^ ' fraudulently held 
I back.' So Sept. and Class. 

'Attoc-toA. ?/, i}?, {ctTroan-iWco^) in 
Class, any thing sent oJf\ as a present, or 
an expedition ; in N. T. the office of apo- 
stle, apost/eship^ Acts i. 25. Rom. i. 5. 
1 Cor. ix. 2. Gal. ii. 8. 

'AttocttoXos, OU, 6, (aTTOO-TEWct),) 

one sent fortJi^ whether as a messenger, or 
ambassador. I. gener. a messenger^ John 
xiii. 16. Pbil. ii. 25. Sept. and Class. — 
II. spec, said of messengers or ambassa- 
dors from God, and joined with mrpo- 
cl)7]TaL, I Cor. xii. 29. Eph. iii. 5. Heb. 
iii. 1. Rev. ii. 2. xviii. 20.— III. of the 
apostles of Christ, 1) prop, of the Twelve 
Apostles, Matt. x. 2. Lu. vi. 13, & oft. 
2) in a wider sense, of the companions 
and colleagues of the Twelve, in raising 
up Churches, 2 Cor. viii. 23. Acts xiv. 4, 
14. Rom. xvi. 7. 

'A'TTOCrTO/XaTl^ 60, f. iVto, («7ro, 

cTo/xa,) a rhetorical term equiv. to diro 
aTo/uLaTO's Xiyco, to speak from mouthy or 
memory, also to cause others (as pupils) to 
repeat by heart. And as divd o-TOfxaTo^^ 
ex tempore^ involved the idea of what is 
unpremeditated, hence it came to mean, 
' to cause any one to answer questions off- 
hand' and without forethought, and also 
metaph. ' to answer any one' by such 
questions, Lu. xi. 53, ijp^avro dirocyro- 
fxaTiX^s-LV avTov. 

'Airoa-^p i(pu)^ f. act. to timianj 
person or thing aicai/ from any other per- 
son or thing, 1) act. prop. dirocrTp. Ti]v 
dKoi]i/ dTTo Til's d\. to turn aivay the ears 
from the truth, 2 Tim. iv. 4. So Sept. 
and Class. Fig. Acts iii. 26, to reform. 
Lu. xxiii. 14, dir. tov Xaov., i. e. dTro 
'KaL(Tapo9 : also, topmt away from., remove., 
Rom.xi.26, dir. darefBeta^ diro' luKwfS. 2) 
mid. d7rocrTpi(po/j.aL., to turn oneself away 
from., i. e. to forsake., 2 Tim. i. 15, or to 
'reject., Matt. v. 42. Tit. i. 14. Heb. xii. 
25. Sept. and Class. 3) act. to turn hack., 
i. e. return., Matt, xxvii. 3, d'lroa-. Td 
dpyvpia T0T9 upevcTL : said of a sword, zfo 
return it to its scabbard. Matt. xxvi. 52. 

*A7ro(TTi''y £60, f. jjcr6o, (tzTTo, intens. 
(TTvyiix).,) lit. to thoroughly detest., trans. 
Rom. xii. 9, and Class. 

^A'KOGvvdyix>yo<s., oy, 6, 77, adj. ex- 



cludedfrom the synagogue., excommunicated^ 
Jolm ix. 22. xii. 42. xvi. 2. 

'A TTo T a cro-60, f. ^w, prop, and lit. to 
range off\ i. o. to appoint certain persons to 
])arti(:ular places, or set apart certain 
tilings to particular purposes, Jer. xx. 2. 
1 Mace. xi. 3. Pass, iu Josepli. Bell. iii. 
4,2, ovK dv dTTOTacraoLUTo tou pLa^ifxav. 
Mid. a7roTC£crcro/xat, prop, to range one- 
self off., separcde oneself from. But as 
parting from suggests the idea of taking 
leave of so it came to mean, take leave of 
bid fareicell to., foil, bv dat. 1) prop, as 
Lu. ix. 61. Acts xviii. 18,^21. 2 Cor. ii. 
13. Joseph. Ant. viii. 13, 7. Charit. ii. 1. 
and by impl. to dismiss., send away., Mk. 
vi. 46. Jos. Ant. xi, 8, 6, toTs S. cttte- 
Ta^aTO. 2) fig. of things, to renou7ice^ 
forsake., abandon the use of, Lu. xiv. 33, 
cicTT. 'Trdai toIs kavTov vTrdpyov^iv. Jos. 
Ant. xi. 6, 8. Philo, p. 87 & 274. Jambl. 
V. P. c. 3. Euseb. H. E. ii. 7, naGaL^ 
d. TaTs TOU (3lov (ppovTLcriu. 

'A'7roT£\8 6o, f. £0-60, to finish off^ com- 
plete., accomplisli any action, or fulfil any 
duty. Xen. Hist. iii. 2, 10, & oft, and 
Apocrypha. In N. T. pass, to be grown 
up., have attained complete growth and 
full stature, but metaph. Ja. i. 15, d^xap- 
Tia dTTOTaXsGdsTo-a., ' adulta.' So Xen, 
de Mag. Eq. vii. 4, dvi]p dTroTiTeXea-fJiii^o's, 
' consummate,' and CEcon. xiii. 3. 

'AjTTOTt 0Tj/xr, f, 3-770-0), to put of \ lay 
aside., Sept. Ex. xvi. 33. trans., but inN.T. 
and Class, the mid. form, ctTroTtOs/xott, is 
more common, to put off from oneself and 
thereby lay aside., both prop, as Acts vii. 58, 
aV. Ta I^aTta, 2 Mace. viii. 35, & Class, 
and metaph. to renounce., Rom. xiii. 12, 
dir. Td spy a tou <tk6tov9. Eph. iv. 22. 
Col. iii. 8. Heb. xii. 1. Ja. i. 21. 1 Pet. 
ii. 1, and oft. in Class. 

'A-iroTLvda-cTU)., f. ^6o, to shake off., 
trans. Lu. ix. 5, tov KoviooTov, Acts 
xxviii. 5, TO ^^p'lov. Sept. and Class., as 
Eur. Bacch. dir. klctctov. 

' A TT o T r 1/ CO , or - / 60 , f . i (760 , to pccy off] re- 
pay, Philem. 19, diroTLorco. Sept. & Class. 

'ATTOToX/xaco, f. 7j<T6o, lit. to dcirc ozd, 
i. e. to come forth boldly to do an action, 
Rom. x. 20, dTTOToXfJia Kal Xiy&i., for 
ctTTOToX^cos Xay&L. j^Eschin. p.52l & 547, 
direToXixa ok XtysLU, et al. in Class. 

'Attoto/x ia, a?, 77, {diroTejULUO).,) prop. 
ct cidting off\ and metaph. a cutting seve- 
rity, sharpness., Rom. xi. 22. Plut. de 

EcluC. C. 18, T1]V aTTOTOjULLaU T7J TTpUO- 

Ti]TL fxiyvvvaL. 

'Attoto/xco?, adv. (aTroTo/xo?, rug- 
ged, and metaph. harsh, severe,) metaph. 
sharply., severely., 2 Cor. xiii, 10. Tit. i. 13, 
and Class. 

'Attot/) £7r6o, f. i|/6o, act. to turn Taj 



AHO 



42 



A PA 



one away from ; mid. aTroTpfcTro/xat, to 
turn oneself aivay from any person or thing, 
to shun or avoids 2 Tim. iii. 5, tovtovs 
dTTOTpiTTov^ and Class. 

'Air over La, as, 77, (a7r£i/>it,) absence^ 
Phil. ii. 12, and Class. 

^ A.Tro<pipu}^ (aor. 1. ctTTTj^sy/ca, aor. 2. 
OLTrnveyKov^ aor. 1. pass. dTr->]vixdi]v^) to 
bear off Midi carry aivay from one person 
or place to another, Mk. xv. 1. Lu. xvi. 
22. 1 Cor. xvi. 3. E-ev. xvii. 3. xxi. 10. 
Sept. and Class. 

'Atto 0 £ u 7 w, f. ^60, to flee aivmj from^ 
escape^ trans. In N. T. metaph. 2 Pet. i. 
4. ii. 18, 20, and Class. 

' AiroipQ iyyofxaL^ f. ^Ofxai^ to utter 
forth^ speak out., declare., absol. Acts ii. 4. 
trans, xxvi. 25. ii. 14. Sept. & Class. ; 
espec, used of deeply sententious, and of 
prophetic speech, by oracular responses. 

' AtTO (pO pT lX^O fxa {. LCTOjULaLj (aTTO, 

<^opT05,) to disburden, unlade., as said of 
a ship, whether in port, or at sea, Acts 
^xxi. 3, ctTT. nrov yo/uo//, and Class. 

'A'7ro)(p?jG'ts, fcos, T]., {dTToxpaoiuLaL., 
to use up,) prop, ct using up., also co7isujnp- 
tion by use ; but in Col. ii. 22, is denoted 
simply use,' as Dion. Hal. Ant. i. 58, ev 
diro^rKTEL TE y^s p.OLpa<s. 

'Attox^p £ w, f. Ti^^-> to depart from, 
go aicay, INIatt. vii. 23. Lu. ix. 39. Acts 
xiii. 13. Sept. and Class. 

'ATToxtopi^o), f. io-o), to paH off, 
separate, pass. Rev. vi. 14, 6 ovpavo^ utte- 
X(J0pLcr6i], was separated and rent off ;' 
mid. to separate oneself from. Acts xv. 39, 
cocxTE aTToxf^pi-crG^JvaL air' dXXii\cov. 

'Airoylfv'xu), f. ^o), to brecdlie out, ex- 
pire, as said prop, of the dying, but also 
fig. of those Viho faint aicay, Joseph. Ant. 
xix, 1, (so EK^vncTKuj,) and also of those 
who are ready to die aicay throus'h fear, 
Horn. Od. xxiv. 347, tov hk irpoTi oi EI- 
Xeu diroylrvxpifTa. TroXvTXa^ dlo^ 'OSvcr- 
o-£us. Lu. xxi. 26. Comp. Matt, xxviii. 4. 

*A7rp6(TL'ro<3, ou, 6, V, adj. [a, irpoa- 
^ifXL, to approach,) unapproachable, 1 Tim. 
vi. 16, 060? dir. Comp. Ps. civ. 1 — 3. 
Ezek. i. 4, and Class. 

'ATrpoo-zcoTTOs, ov, 6, rji adj. (a, 
irpoa-KOTTTU},) lit. 7iot stumbling. 1. act. 
not causing to stumble, either prop, as said 
of a road, level, Ecclus. xxxv. 21 ; or 
metaph. occa.sioning no stumbling, not 
causing to sin, 1 Cor. x. 32. — II. pass, not 
stumbling, i. e. metaph. ' not falling into 
sin,' Acts xxiv. 16, a. avvELdi]€rLV. Phil. i. 
10. 

'A7rpocra)7roXT77rTa)9, adv. {a, irpoar- 
iD7r6Xi]7rTo?,) li'ithoid respect of persons, 
impciHicdJy, 1 Pet, i. 17. 

" AiTTaLdTo^y ov, 6, 77, adj. (a, 



TTxaio),) prop, not stumbling, as said of a 
horse, Xen. Eq. i. 6 ; but in N. T. metaph. 
not falling into sin, blameless, Ju. 24. So 
Lucian, ii. 449, ol dirTaLCTTOv kul a/c\t- 
i/ous I3lov a/\u7rco§ eh y^pas odsvcraL. 

"Attt-o), f. \!/co, to pzct one thing to an- 
other, to adjoin or apply one to the other, 
Hom. Od. xxi. 408. Hence, I. in act. 
said of fire, applied to material substances, 
to put or set fire to, kindle. So with Xv^- 
vov, Lu. viii. 16. xi. 33. xv, 8. irvp, 
Lu. XX. 55, and Class. — II. mid. depon. 
u.TTTOjj.aL, to apply oneself to any person or 
thing, i, e. to touch, with gen. 1) gener. 
Matt. viii. 3. ix.20. Mk. i.41. v. 27. Ln. 
vii. 14, & oft. Sept. and Class. 2) in the 
Levifcical sense, (comp. Lev. v. 2, 3. vii. 
18, et al.) Col. ii. 21, /x?/ d\l/y. 2 Cor. vi. 
17. 3) fig. and by euphemism, ci:7rT£cr6ac 
yvvaLK6<s, to denote ' carnal intercourse,' 
1 Cor. vii. 1. Sept, and Class, 4) by 
impl. to hurt or harm, 1 John v. 18, (but 
see my note,) Sept. and Class. 

Air (a^ EUi, f. dTTcoaco, (cctto, codio),) 
to push aicay from any one, cast off] Sept. 
and Class. In mid. diroodEOjUiai, to push 
aicay from oneself, east off, or repel with 
disgust, trans. Acts vii, 27, dir. avrov. 
Sept. and Class. Hence, to reject, refuse. 
Acts vii. 39, xiii. 46. Rom, xi. 1,2. 1 Tim, 
i. 19: Sept. and Class. 

^ Air mXe La, a'3, 1), [dTroXXviuL,) gener. 
severe loss, destruction, or 7ncin. I. said of 
THINGS, tcaste or loss, Matt. xxvi. 8. Mk. 
xiv. 4. Lev. vi. 3. sqq,, a loss, lit. some- 
thing lost. — II. of PERSONS, destruction, 
1) in this world, death. Acts xxv. 16, 
Prov. vi. 15. Is. xxxiv. 5, and later 
Class. 2) in the world to come, by the 
second death spoken of in "Rqy., 2:>erdition, 
consisting in everlasting exclusion from the 
Messiah's kingdom, together with certain 
positive torments, eternal in their duration, 
Matt. vii. 13. Rom. ix. 22. Phil. 1. 28. 
iii. 19. 1 Tim. vi. 9. Heb. x. 39; or what 
tends to produce that ruin, aLpEcrEi<5 aVo)- 
Xsia^, 2 Pet. ii. 1. iii, 7. In John xvii. 
12. 2 Thess. ii. 3, 6 ulos ttj? dir. ' one 
devoted to perdition.' See in v. ulos, and 
my note in loc. 

'A pa, a§, r], in Class, earnest prayer, 
couched in supplication, sometimes for 
good, but mostly for evil, to the person 
forming the subject thereof, by impreca- 
tion. And so in N, T. Rom. iii. 14, where 
see my note, and Sept. 

"Apa, or a pa, an illative and interro- 
gative particle ; as illative, it stands after 
other words in a clause, and is accented 
dpa : as interr. it stands first in a clause, 
and is accented dpa. In N. T. I. as 
ILLATIVE, dpa means, therefore, then, or 
consequently, and serves to introduce a trans- 
ition. 1) according to its proper force, and 



APT 



43 



APE 



agreeably to Classic usage, Rom. vii. 21, 
evpLOTKio apa tov vofxoi/^ '' I find then the 
law,' &c. viii. 1. 1 Cor, xv. 14. Gal. iii. 7. 
Wisd. vi. 20, and Class. So Itt&I dpu^ ^^incc 
ilie?i, in that case, 1 Cor. v. 10. vii. 14; 
and so in Class. 2) Avhere it does not 
directly answer to any thing exi)ressed, 
but still tlie idea ' according to nature or 
custom,' &c. suggests itself, then, noiv, &c. 
as Ti? dpa, ' who then ?' Matt, xviii. 1. 
xix. 25, et al. ; nrt dpa, *" what then ?' 
Matt. xix. 27, and Class.; ei dpa, 'if 
then,* Mk. xi. 13 ; elttep dpa, 'if indeed,' 
1 Cor. XV. 15. SoovK dpa. Acts xxi. 38 ; 
fiVTi dpa, 2 Cor. i. 17. 3) where, con- 
ti-ary to Class, usage, dpa is employed in 
N. T. as illatwe, at the beginning of a sen- 
tence, and without interrogation, in the 
sense therefore, or consequently, Lu. xi. 48. 
Rom. X. 17. 2 Cor. vii. 12. Gal. iv. 31. 
Heb. iv. 9, rarely in Class. IVhen il 
precedes dpa in the apodosis, we may 
render, 'it follows that.' So Matt. xii. 
28, et al. In this use dpa is sometimes 
strengthened by the addition of other 
particles, as ovv, ' so then' or ' wherefore.' 
— II. as INTERROGATIVE, apa, at the be- 
ginning of a clause, merely serves (like 
the Latin num) to denote a question, and 
cannot be expressed in English. It re- 
quires the answer to be in the negative, 
Lu. xviii. 8. Gal. ii. 17. Sept. and Class. 
Sometimes it is strengthened by ye, as 
apa ye, ' Avhether indeed,' Acts viii. 30. 
Sept. and Class. 

'Apyew, f. ncroo, {dpyo's,) prop, not to 
labour, metaph. to be inactive, to linger, be 
delayed, 2 Pet. ii. 3, to Kpifia ouk dpyal. 

'Af)yos, t], 6v, adj. (for dspyS?, fr. a, 
spyov,) gener. 7iot at ivorh, unemployed, 
I. prop. Matt. XX. 3, 6, inactive or idle, 
] Tim. V. 13, & Class. — II. by impl. in- 
dolent, slothful, prop. Tit. i. 12, yacrTepss 
dpyat. Wisd. xv. 15, Tropes dpyol, and 
Sept. Metaph. ' sluggish in the perform- 
ance of Christian duty,' 2 Pet. i. 8. — 
III. bv impl. vai?z, ineffectual, for kevou. 
Matt. xii. 36. Comp. Stob. Serm. c. 34, 
Xoyos dpy6<s. 

'Apy V p £ o?, ia, ecu, adj. [dpyvpo^,) 
made of silver. Acts xix. 24. 2 Tim. ii. 20. 
Rev. ix. 20. Sept. and Class. 

'Apyup Lov, Lov, TO, {dpyvpo<s,) silver, 
1) prop. Acts iii. 6. vii. 16. xx. 33. 1 Pet. 
i. 18, & Class. 2) meton. for money in 
general, Matt. xxv. 18, 27. Mk. xiv. 11. 
Lu, ix. 3. xix. 15, 23, & Class. 3) meton. 
in sing, for a^^zece of money, a certain coin 
so called, the Jewish shekel, (on which see 
Calmet,) Matt. xxvi. 15. xxvii. 5. Acts 
xix. 19. In short, the Avord denotes, 1) 
silver in bidlion ; 2) silver coined, mvArich 
sense it is chiefly used to the singular ; 
3) silver coins; but chiefly the stater, 



tctradrachma, or shekel, in which sense it 
is generally used in the plural, mostly 
accompanied with numerals, or words that 
imply number, as many, feiv, &c. 4) in 
the plural, money, as here. 

^ Apyv poKoir o<s, ov, 6, {dpyvpo£, 
KOTTToo,) a ivo7'ker in silver. Acts xix. 24. 
Sept. and Class. 

"Apy V po£, ov, 6, {dpyd^,V!\ute,) silver, 
or by meton. the metal ivorked up, either 
into images, plate, &c. Acts xvii. 29. 1 Cor. 
iii. 12. Ja. v, 3. Rev. xviii. 12. Class. ; or 
coined into money, Matt. x. 9, and Class. 

'A p £ lOTra y r T1J s, ov, 6, a judge of 
the court of the Areopagus, Acts xvii. 34. 

' A pi(T KEia, a?, 77, {dpicTKia,) a desire 
to please others. In the Class, gener. in a 
bad sense, of ingratiating oneself into the 
favour of others by undue compliances ; 
but in N. T. in a good sense, as referred to 
God, Col. i. 10, £is Trdaav dp. 'so that ye 
may wholly please God.' Simil. Philo, p. 
33, says of Adam, Eh dpiarKEiau tuv 
iranrpd^ /cat ^acnXico^. 

' A p E or Kco, f. dpEoroo, aor. 1. ripEaa, 
{dlpco, to adapt,) to please, be pleasing to, 
intrans. and with dat. case. I. to be pleas- 
ing, or acceptable to. Matt. xiv. 6. Mk. vi, 
22. 1 Cor. vii. 33. Gal. i, 10, ^tjTw dv- 
OpcoTTOL^ dpECTKELV. 2 Tim. ii. 4. So 
Qeco, Rom. viii. 8. 1 Cor. vii. 32, al. Sept. 
and Class. By Heb. dpiaKELv euwttlov 
TLvo^, to be acceptable to any one, Acts vi. 
5. & Sept. — II. to seek to please, or to ac- 
commodate oneself to any one, Rom. xv. 
1, 2, 3. 1 Cor. X. 33. Gal. i. 10. 1 Th. ii. 4. 

'ApecTos, 17, 6v, adj. pleasi?ig, ac- 
ceptable, foil, by dat. John viii. 29, -rd 
dpEaTa Tw Qew. Sept. and Class, By 
Heb. Toc dpEo-Ta EvcoTrLou tov Qeov, 
1 John iii. 22. Sept. Hence, dpEaTov 
eoTLu, 'placet, it is good,' Acts vi, 2. 
also foil, by dat. of person, ' it is pleasing 
to,' Acts xii, 3, 

'Ap€T7/, T]9, 7]. Its etymon is gener. 
supposed to be from "Ap7]§, Mars ; but it 
is better derived from dpco, 'to adapt,' de- 
noting 1) prop. Hhe fit7iess of any thing 
to any particular purpose ;' 2) the good 
quality therein involved ; and 3) espec. 
the good quality of moral virtue. After 
all, however, it may best be derived from 
dpEcrKO), (as that from apw,) being, it 
would seem, immediately from dpEaTti, 
and thus denoting ' that which approves 
itself to, is acceptable to,' man or God, by 
its intrinsic excellence of whatever kind, 
whether physical or moral. Accordingly 
it is applied to qualities inherent, not only 
in things, animate and inanimate, but also 
persons, both man and God. In the Classic 
poets (espec. Homer) it usually denotes 
valour, courage , but in the prose writers 



A P H 



44 



A p n 



'(espec. the philosophers) it usually denotes 
moral virtue in general ; as in Thnc. ii. 45, 
et al. Diod. Sic. v. 71. In N. T. it occurs 
•only five times ; and in all these in nearly 
the same general sense, that of moral excel- 
lence. I. that of God, as 2 Pet. i. 3, om 
co^r]^ Koi dpsTTj^. 1 Pet. ii. 9, Ta? dps- 
T-ris. And so in Joseph. Ant. xvii. 5, 6, 
dpETT] Tov 9f i'oi;, and i. 3, 1. Hab. iii. 3. 
■et al. it is used to denote the glorious per- 
fections and attributes of God. — II. that 
of 7na?i, as Phil. iv. 8, el tis dpe-n) kul el 
Tts Eiraiuo<5. 2 Pet. i. 5; also Wisd. iv. 1. 
viii. 7, & Sept. 

""Ap^^y^ 6, (nom. absol.) gen. dpv6<s^ by 
sync, for rtpsz/o?, a lamh^ Horn. Od. o, 85. 
metaph. in Lu. x. 3, co9 dpvws^ ' lamb-like.' 

'ApiO/u-sw, f. jjcro), to reckon up by 
number^ trans. Pev. vii. 9. pass. Matt. x. 
30. Lu. xii. 7. Sept. and Class. 

'ApcO/xos, ou, 6, numher^ denoting a 
multitude composed of units. Usually 
said in N. T. of a defi/iite number, Lu. 
xxii. 3. John vi. 10, et al., though some- 
times of an indefinite^ Acts vi. 7. xi. 21. 
xvi. 5. Rom. ix. 27. Rev. xx. 8. 

'AptcTaw, f. 77(760, (apiCTToi/,) to tahe 
an dpL(TTov^ any meal before the chief 
meal, supper^ intrans. Lu. xi. 37. John 
xxi. 12, 15, and Class. 

'' ApL(TTtp6<5^ a, oi/, adj. IcBvus^ left^ 
Matt. vi. 3, dpLCTTEpa^ scil. x^ '^P- P^^-ii"- in 
Lu. xxiii. 33, £^ dpL(jT&pwv^ scil. /xspcov. 
2 Cor. vi. 7. 

"ApLo-Tov, ou, TO, a meal correspond- 
ing partl}^ to our hreahfast^ and partly to 
our lunclieon^ or early dinner, about noon. 
See more in my note on John xxi. 12. 
It occ. Lu. xi. 38. xiv. 12, et al. 

'Ap/c£To?, 7/, Of, adj. (ap/C£6o,) suffi- 
cient^ enougli^ Matt. vi. 34, dpKE-rov [ecttl) 
vfxEpa^ &c. Matt. X. 25. 1 Pet. iv. 3, 
and Class. 

'Ap/c£co, f. 770-60, to hold hack from^ 
ward, off^ trans. Hom. II. vi. 16. In N. 
T, 1) ^0 asiiist^ foil, by dat. of person, 2 
Cor. xii. 9, dpKEl gol i) x^P'-^ fJ.ov^ and 
Class. 2) by impl. to he strong and, ahle^ 
i. e. to assist any one : hence to suffice^ he 
enough for^ foil, by dat. of person. Matt. 
XXV. 9. John vi. 7. Sept. and Class. 
Hence impers. ao/cst mvl^ 'it is enough,' 
John xiv. 8. mid. dpKEo/naL, to suffice one- 
self icith^ he satisfied vjith, foil, bv dat. of 
thing, &c. Lu. iii. 14. 1 Tim. vi. 8. Heb. 
xiii. 5. Joseph, and later Class. So with 
prep. sTTi TouTois, 3 John 10. 

"A p /ex 0 9, Of, o, 77, a hear^ Rev. xiii. 2. 

"Ap^a, aTo?, TO, (ap6(7,) ct chariot^ 
Acts viii. 28. Rev. ix. 9. Sept. and Class. 

'Ap/xo'^to, f. o'cr6o, (ap/xo?,) to adjust^ 
■adapts join fith) together^ trans, foil, by 
^cc. and dat. Horn. Od. v. 247. Jos. Ant. 



vi. 9, 5. Hence, dp. Tiz/l, to join in teed- 
lock^ marry to another^ trans, mid. dpfxo- 
^o,a«i, in Class, to marry to oneself^ Hdot. 
V. 32 ; but in N. T. as depon. to marry to 
another^ fig. 2 Cor. xi. 2, at least according 
to the general interpret. ; but see my note. 

'Ap/xos, oD, o, (ap6o,) prop, a joint, 
Ecclus. xxvii. 2; espec. a joint, or articu- 
lation of the bones of the human body, 
Heb. iv. 12. Test. XII. Patr. p. 63, ol 
dpjULol Tou a-u)fj.aTO<s. Xen. Yen. v. 29. 

'ApveofxaL^ f. ri<jofxaL^ to deny, 1. to 
affirm a thing not to he^ as opp. to ofxaXo- 
jeIv, absol. Lu. viii. 45. John i. 20. Acts 
iv. 16, et al. also Sept. and Class. ; foil, 
by acc. Lu. xxii. 57, vpv. avrou (Jesus, 
his Messiahship). Tit. i." 16, dpv. Qeou, 
' deny his existence.' ] John ii. 22, 6 dpv. 
TOV HuTEoa Kal TovXldv, i. e. 'denying 
God to be the Father of Christ, and Christ 
to be the Son of God.' — II. to refuse., foil, 
by inf. Heb, xi. 24, 7701/. XiyECj^aL. Hdot. 
vi. 13. Jos. and Apocr. — III. to renounce, 
reject., said with reference to Christ, or the 
Christian faith ; also reciprocally of Christ, 
as rejecting men. Matt. x. 33. 2 Tim. ii. 12, 
& oft. Fig. Lu. ix. 23, dpv. (or dTrapi/.) 
£czi/Toi;, is said of selfdenial ; but in 2 Tim. 
ii. 13, it means ' to renounce one's charac- 
ter' by inconsistency ; in Tit. ii. 12, a. ^iju 
dcrtfSELav^ of repelling all solicitations to 
sin. In 2 Tim. iii, o^Tijv ok dvvajxLV avTij-s 
i]pvy]jXEvoi, sc. E-XEiv., the sense is, ''but de- 
clining to shoiv its poiuer in their deeds. 

''ApvLOv, ou, TO, (dim. from dprjv, 
dpvo^,) a lamb, Sept. and Joseph. In 
N. T. fig., either of the folio v/ers of Christ, 
John xxi. 15, or of Christ himself, as Rev. 
V. 6, and freq. 

'A pi' OS, see 'Apjji/. 

'ApoTpta6o, f. daruy., {dporpov,) to 
plough, intrans. Lu. xvii. 7. 1 Cor. ix. 10. 
Sept. and Theophr. 

"ApoT pov, ou, TO, (apo'6o,) ct plough, 
Lu. ix. 62. Sept. and Class, 

'ApTrayV/, 7^?, 77, {dp7rdX.w,) 1) prop, 
of the act of plundering, pillage, Heb. x. 
34. Sept. and Class. 2) metaph. of the dis- 
position to plunder, rapaciiif, Matt, xxiii. 
25. Lu. xi. 39. and Class. 

'Ap7r6iy/xos, ov, 6, (c6p7rd^6o,) 1) 
prop, the cict of plundering, robbery, Plut. 
de Educ, c. 15 ; 2) fig. the object of ra- 
pine, something coveted, Phil. ii. 6, accord, 
to common interp. ; but see my note in loc. 

'ApTTct^co, f. daco, (obsol. dpTrco,) to 
snatch, or seize, and carry forcibly aicay ; 
said both of things and persons : I. of beasts 
seizing their prey, John x. 12, Sept. and 
Class. : also metaph. of persons seizing any 
thing with avidity. Matt. xi. 12, d. Tt^v 
jSacxLX. Ttvv oupavcov, implying the eager- 
ness with which the Gospel is embraced. — 



APn 



45 



A P X 



11. dpir. in Class, and ' accipere' in Latin 
are used of persons suddenly sf2afchi/>(/ any 
thing, or person, away from any other per- 
son, Matt. xiii. 19, dp7rdX,£i to kcnrap- 
fxivov iv Ty KapSia avTou. Ju. 23, ek 
Tov TTvpo^ dpir. (couip. Amos iv. 11. Zcch. 
iii. 2.) Sept. and Class. ; also, forciblij 
depriving another of any thing, John x. 
28, 29, oux dpirdasL tl<5 aiiTa £/c tt/s 
X^tpos jJLOv. Sept. and Class. — III. to forci- 
hbf carry mcuij any person, John vi. 15, 
dpirdX^f.Lv avTov. Acts xxiii. 10. The 
other passages referred to this head (Acts 
viii, 39, TLv&vixa TLupiov yp-jracrE tov <J>. 
2 Cor. xii. 2, 4, dpirayivTa & vpTrdyi] 
£t9 TOf TrapdoELCTov^ 1 Th. iv. 17, dp- 
nray^crofXEda £ts dTrduTi^a-iv tov Kvpiov^ 
and Rev. xii. 5, -npirdadi^ Trpos tov Qeov) 
ought to be kept distinct, as belonging to 
the same common subject; (comp. Judg. 
xxi. 21. Ps. vii. 2.) namely, that of the in- 
fluence of the Holy Spirit. 

"ApTra^, ay 09, 6, 77, adj. {dpird'C^co^ 
1) prop, ravenous^ said of Avild beasts, as 
symbols of violent and wicked men. Matt, 
vii. 15, and Class. 2) metaph. rapacious; 
or subst. a plunderer^ Lu. xviii. 11. 1 Cor. 
v. 10, sq. \\. 10, and Class. N.B. dpira^ 
denotes one who injures another by vio- 
lence ; a^iKos, one who injures him by 
fraud. It is a stronger term than ivKeovek- 
Tjjs, though a weaker one than kXettti]^. 

''Appa(3(hv^ wi/05, 6, prop, sometliing 
given as a pledge or earnest to ratify an 
agreement ; a part of any price first agreed 
on for any object, and then paid down to 
ratify the agreement ; so Class. In N. T. 
said metaph. of the gifts of the Holy Spi- 
rit, as being a pledge of the future privi- 
leges and blessings of the Messiah's king- 
dom, 2 Cor. i. 22. V. 5. Eph. i. 14. 

"Appacpo^^ ov, 6, 77, adj. (a, paTTTw,) 
unsewed^ i. e. ' having no seam,' but woven 
whole, John xix. 23, xltwv d. 

"Apprjv, EV09, and dppEv, to, adj. 
77iale^ i. e. ' of the male sex,' Rom. i. 27. 
Rev. xii. 5, 13. Sept. and Class. 

"ApptjTo?, ou, 6, ?7, adj. (a, pi^To?.) 
in Class, either unspoken^ or not to he 
spohen ; in N. T. unspeakable^ 2 Cor. xii. 
4, dp. pvfJLaTa. 

"AjOpo) cTos, ov, 6, 77, adj. (a, pwvvv- 
/ui,) infirm^ i. e. wanting strength of mind 
or body : espec. said of the sick. Matt. xiv. 
14. Mk. vi. 5, 13. xvi. 18. 1 Cor. xi. 30. 
Sept. and Class. 

'Ap (TEi/o/co IT77S, Of, o, {dpcn]v^ kol- 
T»7,) a sodomite, 1 Cor. vi. 9. 1 Tim. i. 10. 

"Aparrjv, evo£, 6, a male, one of the 
male sex, Matt. xix. 4. Mk. x. 6, et al. 

ApTEfjiOiv, 0V09, 6, (aoTao), to hoist,) 
either the large sail of the prow, answering 
to our mizen-sail, and still called by the 



Venetians ^r/^'??2o;?. ; or a small sail near 
the prow calied dolon, answering to our 
jib. See Juven. Sat. xii. 68. Acts xxvii. 40. 

"ApTi, adv. of time, noiv : 1) of time 
just past, even noiv, Matt. ix. 18. Rev. xii. 
10, and mostly used in the Attic writers; 
2) of time present, noiv. Matt. iii. 15, d(pE<s 
dpTL, 'for tlie present,' xxvi. 53. Johnix. 
19, as opposed to words or phrases denot- 
ing time past, oft. in N. T. and Class. 
Sometimes used adjectively, as 77 dpTi 
copa, 1 Cor. iv. 11. gws aprt. Matt. xi. 12. 
et al. <i7r' apri, &c. See "ATrapTi. 

'ApTty £1/1/7} TO §, ou, 6, 77, adj. (apTi,, 
y£i/i/j}Tos,) 1) prop, lately bo7'?i, Liucmn. 
D. Deor. Mar. xii. 1, (3pe(po^ dpT. 2) 
metaph. used of ' one w^ho has recently em- 
braced the Christian faith,' 1 Pet. ii. 2. 

"ApTtos, ou, 6, 77, adj. 1) prop, whole, 
i. e. sound in body; 2) fig. sound in 
mind; 3) metaph. Jiited to any work; 
equiv. to kciti] pT lct iulevo^, or £^7]pTio-^£- 
vo?, see 2 Tim. iii. 1 7. Perhaps, however, 
the primary sense of uotlo's may be that 
found in Horn. II. E. 326, and 92, (from 
dpco,) suitable, fitted to the purpose ori- 
ginally intended, and hence, complete, and 
perfect. Comp. Eph. ii. 10, where Christ- 
ians are said to be KTia^ivTE^i ettI 'ipyoLS 
dyadol'S. 

"ApT-os, ov, 6, bread. I. gener. and 
prop. BREAD, or rather a loa/] or cake, like 
our biscuit, Matt. iv. 3, 4. vii. 9, and oft. ; 
said of the shew-bread, Matt. xii. 4. Heb. 
ix. 2; of the bread in the Lord's Supper, 
Matt. xxvi. 26. Mk. xiv. 22. Lu. xxii. 19. 

1 Cor. X. 16; et al. Metaph. 6 apxos ek 
TOV ovpavov, as applied to Christ, ' the 
Bread of life,' who was typified by the 
manna which fell from heaven in the wil- 
derness, and who, by his Spirit, sustains 
the spiritual life of believers here unto 
eternal life, John vi. 31, 58. — II. from the 
Heb. FOOD, gener. all the necessaries of 
life. Matt. vi. 11. Mk. vi. 8. Lu. xi. 3. 

2 Cor. ix. 10, et al. as also in the phrase 
dpTov EcrdiELv, 'to take food, eat a meal,' 
Matt. XV. 2. Mk. vii. 5, and Sept. ; also 
dpTov (payETv irapd tlvo9, ' to be main- 
tained by any one,' 2 Th. iii. 8. (comp. 2 
Sam. ix. 7, 10.) and tov euvtcov dpTov 
eotOlelu, ' to support oneself,' 2 Th. iii. 12. 

'AoTuo), f. v<T(jo, {dpu},) prop, to Jit, 
prepare, adjust, as often in Homer and 
the other early Class. ; in later Class, to 
prepare food, including all the arts of 
cookery : hence, in N. T. to season, (as 
cooks do food,) Mk. ix. 50. Lu. xiv. 34; 
and so in later Class. Also metaph. Col. 
iv. 6, A.oyos i]pTv/iXEvo<5 d\aTL,\. e. 'both 
appropriate and salutary.' 

'Ap^ayyeXos, ov, o, (apx^^oi/, dy- 
ysXos,) an archangel, 1 Th. iv. 16. Ju. 9. 



A PX 



46 



APX 



'Ayox^to^i «i'a, 01/, («PX''0 ^^j- 
ancient^ of old time^ Mat t. v. 2i, 27, 33, et 
al. oft. Sept. and Class. 

'Apxv-> ^2, v-> the beginning^ or first 
part of any thing, espec. action. I. said 
of TIME, the beginning^ Matt. xxiv. 8. Mk. 
i. 1. Heb. vii. 3. Sept. and Class. Hence 
apxhv Xa(3aLu, ' to begin,' Heb. ii. 3; also 
Philo and later Class. n-i]v apx^v toov 
c-rjjULsLoDV^ 'first miracle,' John ii. 11. to. 

(TTOt^^Eta TT/S dpXV'^i foi' '^^ TT^W- 

Ttt, Heb. V. 12. So also in the phrases 
wtt' dpxv^i 'from the beginning,' either of 
all things, ' from everlasting,' Matt. xix. 
4, 8. John viii. 44. 1 John iii. 8 ; or of 
any particulS-r thing, as the Gospel dispen- 
sation, ' from the first,' Lu. i. 2. John xv. 
27, and oft. ; ev ctpxih 'ii^ the beginning,' 
either of the world, John i. 1 , 2, or of the 
Gospel dispensation, ' at the first,' Acts xi. 
15. Phil. iv. 15; dpxv^-i 'frcm the be- 
ginning,' i. e. of Christ's ministry, John 
vi. 64. xvi. 4; /caT-' dpx^^-, the be- 
ginning,' i. e. of all things, Heb. i. 10. 
Sept. and Class. ; accus. tj]v dpxh^-, ad- 
verbially, ' from the very beginning,' i. e. 
tliroughout^ lulioUy^ John viii. 25 ; but see 
my note. — II. said, by meton. of abstr. for 
concrete, of persons, &c. the firsts Col. i. 
18, OS ECTTLv dpxfh Gen. xlix. 3. 
Deut. xxi. 17, dpxv t&kvcou. So dpxv 
Kai T£\o5, Rev. 1. 8. xxi. 6. xxii. 

13. iii. 14, 77 dpX^) KTLCTSCO'S. — III. 

said of PLACE, 1) prop, the angular ejc- 
tremity or comer of any thing, e. gr. of a 
sheet. Acts x. 11. xi. 5. Diod. Sic. i. 35. 
Phil. p. 638. 2) metaph. of dignity, the 
first place^ i. e. power or dominion, Lu. 
XX. 20. Sept. Joseph, and Class. ; or pre- 
eminence, Ju. 6. Sept. and Apocr. By 
metaph. of abstr. for concrete, princes^ 
rulers^ Lu. xii. 11. Tit. iii. 1 ; said of the 
chiefs among angels, Eph. i. 21. iii. 10 ; 
among demons, vi. 12; and gener. the 
powers of the other world, Rom. viii. 38. 

'Apyijyos, oD, 6, {dpx>h "7^?) o?^^ 
zcho makes a begijining of any thing, 1 ) as 
the author and cause of it ; 2) as leader 
of the agents therein. Thus it denotes, 
\) a chieftain^ as in Sept. and Class. In 
the first sense it occ. Acts iii. 15, b dpxv- 
yos TT)§ ^cut;^, of Christ; Heb. ii. 10, 6 
dpX- 'TV^ (T(j)Ti]pLa<s avTcov^ and xii. 2, 6 
dp)(. Tij? TTLcrTeco?. And so oft. in Sept. 
and Class, any one is said to be dpxvyo^ 
of any thing, whether evil or good. 2) a 
leader^ chief Acts v. 31, tovtov dpxvyov 
Kai (TioTfipa vxLrcocrs. Sept. and Class. 

'Apxi-- an inseparable particle, derived 
from dpxhi and prefixed to names of office 
and dignity, in the sense of our Arch-, de- 
rived from thence. 

'Ap)(t€pa'Tt^'os, ?/, oV, 'adj. {dpxi-s- 
pEus,) belonging to the High Priest, Acts 



iv. 6, Lk yivov^ dpX'-^po.''^'-Kov, ' of High- 
priestly descent.' So Joseph, xv. 3, 1, 
calls a person dpxL^pf^^t.Kov yivov9. 

'Ap X t £p £ us, £60S, 6, (a|0)(l-, i€/0£l'S,) 

a i7z(//iPnes^, more usually called 6 hpEvg 
6 /uiyas, as oft. in Sept. and sometimes in 
Class. In N. T. it denotes I. the High 
Priest of the Jews, Matt. xxvi. 3, 63, 65. 
Mk. ii. 26, et al. — II. a chief priest, one 
of the heads of the 24 classes of priests 
mentioned at 1 Chron. ch. xxiv. and in 
Joseph. Ant. xx. 8, 8. Bell.iv.3, 6. Matt, 
ii. 4, and oft. They were members of the 
Sanhedrim ; and indeed the expressions ol 
dpxi-^P^^^ '<^c-i ypafj-fxaTEL's, Matt. ii. 4, 
and OL dpx'-^P^^'s x^f^i oi- ^ctpiaaToL, John 
vii. 32, et al. seem put, by way of circumlo- 
cution, for TO cruvkopLov, 'the Sanhedrim.' 
— III. said of Christ, compared with the 
High Priest of the Jews, as having off'ered 
himself up a sacrifice for sin, Heb. ii. 17, 
and elsewhere. 

*Apx'''^o'-I^V^-> kvo^, 6, prop, a chief 
shepherd ; said metaph. of Christ, as Head 
of the Church, Eph. v. 23. Col. ii. 10. 
with allusion to his office both as Head- 
teacher, and espec. Lord of the Church ; 
there being a double allusion, inasmuch as 
anciently both princes and interpreters of 
the Divine ^^ill were called ' shepherds,' 
from the similarity of their offi.ce and du- 
ties to the pastoral ones, 1 Pet. v. 4, (pavs- 
pcodkvTo? Tpv dpX'-'^oLfXEvo^ '. couip. 1 
Pet. ii. 25, where we have Christ desig- 
nated also in a two-fold capacity, as a 
' Shepherd and Care-taker {^ettlgkotto^) of 
their souls.' 

'Apx^^^^^y^yo's,ov,o, a ruler, or 
moderator, of the synagogue; equiv. to 
dpx'J^v T77§ cruy. Lu. viii. 41, one of those 
Elders, of whom there were several in 
every s^'nagogue, whose duty it was to pre- 
serve order, and make choice of persons to 
read or speak in the assembly ; see Acts 
xiii. 15, The presiding elder was called 
o dpx^^^v^y^yo^ ' of the others each 
was called doxLorvu. without the article, 
Mk. V. 22, 35, 36, 38. Lu. viii. 49. xiii. 
14. Acts xiii. 15, et al. 

'Apxt-TEKTcou, ova's, 6, a master- 
builder, architect, one who presides over 
the building of edifices, 1 Cor. iii. 10, and 
Class. 

'Apx^T^^f^vvi^, ov, o, a chief farmer^ 
or collector, of the taxes, Lu. xix. 2. Sept. 
and Class. 

'Apx'-'TP'-K^^^^o^, ov, 6, magister 
C07ivivii, the director of an enteHainment^ 
who had the direction of the whole of the 
previous arrangements for, and the manage- 
ment thereof; see Ecclus, xxxv. 1. He is 
to be distinguished from the av/ixTroarLap- 
X>/§, or, (Sao- l\ev 9, of the Greeks, and the 
'rex convivli' of the Romans; the latter 



APX 



4' 



A2e 



being one of the (/2(ests, who presided at 
table; whereas the former Avas a domestic, 
answering to the TpctTrsZ^oTroid^ of tlie 
Greeks, and the Triclinia rchcs of the 
Romans. 

"Apx^i ^' ^^•> («<^X'^) Chass. to 
l)C(/in^ take the lead in ani/ thinc/^ Xen. 
Symp. vii. 1. In N. T. to he first in rank, 
dignity, &c. to rule over^ foil, by gen. Mk. 
X. 42. Rom. XV. 12. Sept. in Gen. i. 18, 
et al. Mid. ap^o/xat, to hegin^ intrans. and 
foil, by infin. expr. or impl. 1) gener. 
Matt. iv. 17, vp^aTo Kijpvcrcrsiv^ xi. 7, 
and oft. Sept. and Class. Lu. iii. 23, -^i/ 
iTtov Tp. dpxojuEvo^, ' was beginning, en- 
tering npon his 30th year.' By Hebr. to 
attempt^ venture upon^ implying difficulty, 
Acts i. 1. Mk. yi. 7. x. 28,' 32. Lu. iii. 8, 
and Sept. 2) part. ap^aij.Evo's with inf. 
and aTTo, foil, by gen. in the sense hegin- 
7iing from, expressing ' the point of depar- 
ture.' So Matt. XX. 8, airo^o^ ai/Tots, 
dp^d/uLevo9 aVo tcou kcrx^Twv, ' begin- 
ning at the last,' Lu. xxiii, 5. xxiv. 27. 
John yiii. 9. Acts i, 22. viii. 35. x. 37. 
1 Pet. iv. 17. Sept. Gen. liv. 12, and some- 
times in Class. 

"Apx^J^v, oyT09, 6, (part. pres. of 
a/)xw,) one first in power or dominion, a 
ruler, or magistrate, gener. Matt. xx. 25. 
Acts iv. 26. Rom. xiii. 3. 1 Cor. ii. 6, 8, 
and oft. Sept. and Class. 

"Xpatfxa, axo?, to, an aromatic, or 
spice, such as myrrh and aloes, John xix. 
40. Mk. xvi. 1. Lu. xxiii. 56. xxiv. 1. 
Sept, and Class. 

Ao-aA.8UT0 9, ov, 6, V, adj. (a, cra- 
Xevo),) prop, not to be shaken, immoveable. 
Acts xxA^i. 41 ; metaph. firm, enduring, 
Heb. xii. 28. Diod. Sic. ii. 48, eXsudspiav 

0LaCpvXdTT0VTS9. 

'A cr/3 £ o"To ?, ou, 6 ?7, adj. (a, cr^ivvv- 
fxL,) not extinguished, or not to be eodin- 
guished. In N. T. unquenchable, as said 
of fire, i. e. eternal. Matt. iii. 12. Mk. ix. 
43, 45. Lu. iii. 17. Comp. Horn. Od. iv. 
58, 'Lv aar(3&aTov ktXeos elt}. 

'AarifSaia, as, 77, {dcrs^f]?,) 1) gener. 
impiety or ungodliness, either in thought, 
word, or deed, Rom. i. 18. 2) spec, zvick- 
edness, consisting in a violation of our duty 
to God, our neighbour, or ourselves ; and 
considered as springing from the source of 
ungodliness, ' the carnal mind that is enmity 
against God,' (spoken of Rom. i. 28. viii. 
7.) 2 Tim. ii. 16. Tit. ii. 12. Jude 15, 18. 
Sept. and Class. 

'Ao-fijSsw, f. ^(Tco, {dcrs(3i]'s,) to be un- 
godly, act impiously, intrans. 2 Pet. ii. 6. 
Jude 15. Sept. and Class. 

A(r£/37;s, £09, o, 77, adj. (a, crt(3ofxaL,) 
1) ungodly, impious, irreligious, 1 Tim. i. 
9. 1 Pet. iv. 18. 2) wicked, from impiety, 



fsynon. with d/iapTto\6<i,) Rom. iv. 5. v. 
6. 2 Pet. ii. 5. iii. 7. Jude 4, 15. Sept. and 
Class. 

'A cr tXy £ I a, a?, 7/, prop, excess or in- 
temperancc in the use of even permitted 
pleasures, from datXyv^' which, that it 
primarily means eacessice, is plain from 
^lian ap. Said., where it is said of a wind 
7roXu9 Kat daeXyii^- nrLKTETat EKsldE. 
Hence it denotes unbridled insolence, 
either 1) in language, as .Jos. Ant. iv. 6, 
12, da. Tuw \6yvov, and Mk. vii. 22; or 
2) in conduct, licentiousness, 2 Pet. ii. 2 ; 
or 3) spec, lasciviousness, Rom. xiii. 13. 
2 Cor. xii. 21. Gal. v. 19. 2 Pet. ii. 7, 18; 
or, in a wider sense, dissoluteness in gene- 
ral, Eph. iv. 19. 1 Pet. iv. 3. Ju.4. 

"Acri] jULO^, ov, 6, 1), adj. [a, a-fj/na,) 1) 
prop, u'ithout mark or stamp, opp. to etti- 
cr7j/xo9. So Gen. xxx. 42, 7rp6j3aTa dat}- 
ixa — k'TTLdrijxa. Also of money, dpyvpo^ 
da-\]jxo<s, opp. to ETTLor^] IXC'S, Hdot. ix. 41. 
Thuc. ii. 13, where see my Note. 2) 
metaph. ignoble, obscure, Acts xxi. 39, ovk 
dav/uLov TToXfiw?. And so Eurip. Ion 8, 
ttoXlv ovk dcr^i/uLOv, and oft. in Class. 

'Acrd EVELa, fta9, 17, {dardEvt}^,) ivant 
of strength, i. e. infirmity of body or feeble- 
ness of mind. I. gener. Rom. vi. 19. 

1 Cor. x. 43. Gal. iv. 13, et al. Said 
espec. of the weakness of human nature, 

2 Cor. xiii. 4. Heb. iv. 15. v. 2, al.—II. 
spec, infirmity, 1) of body, by disease. 
Matt. viii. 17. Lu. v. 15. vin. 2* xiii. 12. 
John v. 5, et al. and Class. 2) of mind, 
by depression of spirits, 1 Cor. ii. 3. Xen. 
Ag. ix. 3 ; also, by impl. affliction, as pro- 
ducing depression, Rom. viii. 26. 2 Cor. 

xii. 5, 9, 10. 

^ Acrd EVEia, f. ricrw, (ao'6£i/r/9,) to be 
destitute of strength, 1. gener. as mostlv 
in Class., but metaph. Rom. viii. 3, iv w 
TjadivEL, 'was [too] weak' to- answer the 
proposed end, 2 Cor. xiii. 3. Sept. and 
Class. ; also to be accounted lueak, 2 Cor. 

xiii. 4, 9. — II. spec, to be infirm in body, 
to Icdtour under disease. Matt. x. 8. Mk. 
vi. 56. Lu. iv. 40, et al. — HI. fig. of the 
mind, to be faint-heaHed, depressed, 2 Cor. 
xi. 21 ; also, by Hebr. to be tveak in mind, 
vacillating, and easily perturbed, Rom. xiv. 
2, 21. 1 Cor. viii. 9. xi. 12. So dadzvElv 
T?7 'TTiaTEL, 'to be unsettled in the faith,' 
Rom. iv. 19, or in opinion, Rom. xiv. 1. 
See, however, my note there. — IV. by 
impl. to be afflicted or distressed by op- 
pression or calamity, Acts xx. 35. 2 Cor. 
xi. 29. xii. 10, and Sept. 

'Acrd EVf} ixa, anro^, to, (a(r0£i/£6o,) in- 
firmity, prop, of body, but also metaph. of 
mind, and producing doubts and scruples, 
Rom. XV. 1. 

' Add Evi]^, EC'S, 6, rj, adj. (a, o-6£i;o9,) 
ivithout strengtli, feeble, I. gener. ?*Iatt. 



A 2 I 



48 



AST 



XXvi. 41, 77 cap J aadsvv^ ecrTL^ 'is too 
Aveak for the task,' Mk. xiv. 38. 1 Pet. iii. 
7. Sept. and Class. Including tlie idea of 
imperfection, 1 Cor. xii. 22. Gal. iv. 9. 
1 Cor. i. 25. Heb. vii. 18.— II. spec. 1) 
infirm in hody^ sick^ Matt. xxv. 39, 43, 44. 
Lu. X. 9. Acts iv. 9, et al. 2) fignr. of 
the mind, depressed oy faint-hearted^ 2 Cor. 
X. 10 ; also, as implying a want of decision 
or firmness of mind, duhious and vacil- 
latinq in faith or opinion, 1 Cor. viii. 7, 10. 
ix. 22. 1 Th. V. 14. 3) by impl. afflicted 
or distressed^ 1 Cor. iv. 10 ; or, in a moral 
sense, diseased and ivretcJied^ by bearing 
about the body of sin, Rom. v. 6. 

'A(rtTia, as, Z?, (a, o-tT09,) abstinence 
from foocl^ fasting^ Acts xxvii. 21. Jos. 
Ant. xii. 7, and Class. 

"ActItos, ou, 6, 77, adj. (a, ctTtos,) 
fasting^ Acts xxvii. 33. Joseph, and Class. 

'Ao-zcEO), f. 77(760, prop. to worlx, up icith 
sJdll^ as the raw materials of any handi- 
craft, (Horn. II. iii. 388, tip /a ao-.) ; also 
to exercise or practise any art, either of 
body or mind. Hence gener. with the 
reflex pron. understood, to exercise oneself 
in any thing, implying endeavour and 
striving. Acts xxiv. 16, iv toutco ok av- 

TO? aCTKU}. 

'A<TKd9^ ou. 6, a shiji-hottle^ sewed up, 
like a bladder, to hold liquid ; such as 
were anciently used, and are to this day in 
use, in the East, Matt. ix. 17. Mk. ii.*22. 
Lu. V. 37. Sept. and Class. 

'Ao-^£yco§, adv. [i)cr/ui£vo<5. part. perf. 
pass, of voofxaL^) gladly^ Acts ii. 41. xxi. 
17, and Class, 

''A CO 00 9, ou, o, 77, adj. (a, cro^os,) 
7miL'ise^ Eph. v. 15, as applied to true wis- 
dom, that which is in Christ Jesus. 

'AcTra^o/xa i, f. acro/xat, depon. mid. 
(cTTrao),) lit. to draiv to oneself Hom. Od. 
iii. 35. Hence, to embrace ; and as that 
was a form of salutation at meeting or part- 
ing, so it came to mean salute. In N. T. 
it is said, I. of those who meet, to salute^ 
ivelcome^ Matt. x. 12. Mk. ix. 15. Lu. i. 
40. x. 4. Sept. and Class. Including the 
idea of paying one's respects, Mk. xv. 18. 
Acts xviii. 22. xxi. 7. Jos. Ant. vi. 11, 1; 
foil, hy kv 0t\77/xaTt, Rom. xvi. 16, 1 Cor. 
xvi. 20. — II. of those who separate, to 
take leave of Acts xx. 1. xxi. 6, and Class. 
— III. of salutations sent by letter, Rom. 
xvi. 3 — 23, & oft. — IV. by impl., as said 
both of persons, to love and cherish^ Matt. 
V. 47, and Class. ; and of things, to icel- 
come, receive gladly^ Heb. xi, 13, aa-rr. 
T-as kiray'YgK.La^. Jos. Ant. vi. 5, 3, acrTr. 
Ti]V Evvoiau. 

'AcTTTac/xos, ov^ 6, (acTTra^ofia/,) 5^- 
lutatio7i, whether oral, or bv letter, Matt, 
xxiii. 7. Mk. xii. 38. 



"Ao-TTi-Xo?, ou, 6, 77, adj. (a, cttIXos,) 
prop, icithoid blemisli^ (as said of a victim,) 
or icithoid stain gener. Fig. of Christ, 
1 Pet. i. ]9, and Class. ; metaph. unble- 
mished^ pure^ as said of doctrine, 1 Tim. 
vi. 14, or conduct, Ja. i. 27. 2 Pet. iii. 14. • 

'Ao-TTi?, i^o§, 77, an asp^ a species of 
most venomous serpent, Rom. iii. 13. Sept. 
jElian H. An. i. 54. 

"'Ao-TTOi/oos, ou, o, 77, adj. (a, crTrovci], 
compact after libation,) 1) icithout treaf 
Thuc. i. 37. V. 32. 2) not making^ or / 
observing treaties^ irreconcilably hostile, int- 
p)lacable^ Rom. i. 31. 2 Tim. iii. 3, and 
Class. 

'Acer ap toy, ou, to, dimin. of Lat. as. 

A brass coin, equiv. to one-tenth of the 
Spaxi^V-, 01' denarius, and half of the as. 
Used in N. T.,like our farthing, to denote 
the most trifling value. Matt. x. 29. Lu. 
xii. 6, and Dionys. Hal. 

'^Ao'croz/, adv. (compar. of ayx^, near,) 
prop. ?iearer, next to, and without comp. ve7'y 
near to ; also, in a nautical sense, close in- 
shore. So dcraov TrapaXtyf cr6at, ' to coast 
along close inshore,' Acts xxvii. 13, and 
Homer, Eurip., Herodot., and Class. 

'A cTTaTfe to, f. 7](TO)., (acTTaTos, unsta- 
ble, fr. a & XcTTrjiuLi,) 1) prop, to be un- 
fixed, unsettled, always in motion, said of, 
' the troubled sea which cannot" rest.' SH 
Appian, Bell. Sym. p. 221, aG-raToijay]^ 
■yjLipiOiyVL ^a\da-ai]^. 2) metaph. to be un- 
settled, i. e. without anv settled abode, 
1 Cor. iv. 11. 

'Ao-TsTos, ou, 6, 7), adj. (aorTu,) prop. 
of or belonging to a city, and, by impl., 
civilized, and polished in manners. In 
N. T. elegant, and, as said of external form, 
fair or handsome, Heb. xi. 23. Acts vii. 
20, ao-T-gZos, exceeding fair. Comp. Ex. 

ii. 2. Jos. Ant. ii. 9, 6. 

'A(rT77p, £po?, o, a star, said as well of 
fixed stars as of planets and comets, and 
even meteors. Matt. ii. 2, 7, 9, 10. 1 Cor. 
XV. 41. Rev. vi. 13. viii. 12. xii. 1, 4. Sept. 
and Class. It is sometimes used symbol, 
of Jesus, as 'the morning-star, ushering 
in the Gospel day of knowledge, grace, and 
glory,' Rev. ii. 28. xxii. 16 ; and of the 
angels. Rev. i. 16, 20. ii. I. iii. 1, 

'A (TT7?|0 I KT OS, ou, 6, 77, adj. («, (TTTJ- 

pi'^60,) unestablished, unstable; met. incon- 
stant; said of those who have no firm per- 
suasion of Christian doctrine to guide 
them, 2 Pet. ii. 14. iii. 16. Longin. de 
Subl. ii. 2. 

"A cT'Topyo's, ou, 6,77, adj. (a, GrTopyi},) 
ivithoid the natural affection of man, devoid 
of a sense of humanity, Rom, i. 31. 2 Tim. 

iii. 3, and Class. 

^ Kanr oy^kod, f. 77crw, [^acTToyo^, fr. a & 
o-Tox^s, mark,) prop. ?o miss the mark in 



A2T 



49 



shooting; fig. to err or swerve from know- 
ledge, truth, &c. foil, by gen it. of thing, 

1 Tim. i. 6\ wi/ ao-Tox^ycrai/Tf?, and Pint, 
t. ii. 414, d(TToyov<TL nrov juLSTpiov kul 
TTptTTouTO's OY 'AH acc. Avitli TTfpi, 1 Tim. 

Vi. 21, "TTSpi TljU TTLCrTLV ijCTTOX^CrOLV, 

2 Tim. ii. 18, and Pint, de Audit. irEpl 

TaS 7rOiOT7JTa§ dcTTOXOVVTE'S. 

'Ao-TpaTTtj, 77, lightning^ I. prop. 
Rev. iv. 5. viii. 5, xi. 19. xvi. 18. Sept. 
& Class. ; put as the symbol of speed, 
celerity^ &c. Matt. xxiv. 27. Lu. x. 18. 
xvii. '^4. Nah. ii. 4. — II. by impl. hriglit- 
ness^ splendour^ Matt, xxviii. 3. Lu. xi. 
36, and Sept. Deut. xxxii. 41. 

'Ao-T/o aTTTO), f. xj/u)^ {dcTTpa'jn]^) 1) 
prop, to lighten^ flashy as lightning, Lu. 

xvii. 24. Sept. & Class. 2) by impl. to 
shine^ he bnglit^ Lu. xxiv. 4, 

"Ao-Tjooi/, oi;, TO, prop, a constellation^ 
Xen. Mem. iv. 3, 4, but in N. T. and 
sometimes in Class, (as Pind. 01. i. 9. 
j^lsch. Socr. Dial. iii. 7,) a star^ equiv, to 
do-TJ/p, Lu. xxi. 25. Heb. xi. 12, al. In 
Acts vii. 43, the ' Star-god,' an image of 
Saturn in the form of a star. 

'Aarv fji<p a)vo9^ ou, 6, 77, adj. (a, arvp.- 
0601/09,) 1) prop, dissonant^ as said of 
the absence of musical harmony, Wisd. 

xviii. 10, dar. ix^potiv (Sov. Dion. Hal. de 
Comp. V. xi. x^P^^)^ • in N. T. fig. 
of persons, discordant^ Acts xxviii. 25, 
davjUL(p(jovoL 6vTe9 Trpos dWyjXov?. Diod. 
Sic. iv. 1, darv/JL(p(jovov9 sluaL irpo^ dXXrj- 
Xoi»?. 

'A<rui/£'ro9, ou, o, rj-, adj. (a, o-ui/etos,) 
I. prop, devoid of understanding^ dull of 
comprehension^ Matt. xv. 16. Mk. vii. 18. 
Sept. Thuc. ii. 24.— IL from the Heb. 
with the accessory idea of impiety, impious^ 
ungodly^ Rom. i. 21, 31. x. 19, and Sept. 
See however my note on Rom. i. 21, 

'A(rui/0£Tos, ou, o, 77, (a, crvvTiQEfxai^) 

1) prop, qui componi non potest^ one who 
cannot be brought together with others ; 

2) ' one who will enter into no covenant,' or 
breaks it when Tm.^^^ faithless^ Rom. i. 31. 
Jer. iii. 7 — 11. 

'Ao-</)aX£ta, as, tj, (dcrcpaXr}^,) I. 
prop, j^rm7^m ov fixedness of a body, imply- 
ing security from slipping or falling. Thuc. 
ii. 22, Tov dpLCTTipov TTooa fxovov viro- 
SEdsfxivoL^ dcr<pa\iLa<s svEKa Trj^ Trpos 
TOV TTTjXov. Gener. security^ Acts v. 23. 

certainty^ Lu. i. 4. — II. metaph. and 
by impl. security from peril^ safety^ 1 Th. 

v. 3. Sept. and Class. 
' A cr (/) a A. 7/ s, go?, adj. (a, o-0aX\a),) 

TWit slipping or falling^ firm ^ fixed ^ immov- 
able ; I. prop, as said of an anchor, Heb. 

vi. 19. Prov. viii. 28. Wisd. iv. 3. Xen. 
An. iii. 2, 19. — IL fig. to darcpaXh^ cer- 
tainty, Acts xxi. 34. xxii. 30. xxv. 26, and \ 



Class. — III. metaph. secure from peril, 
safe, i. e. 'affording safety,' Phil. iii. 1, 
and Class. 

'A<T0aXt^aj, f. to-co, and mid. depon, 
dacpaXiX^ofxaL, {da<paXi]^,) to make fast, 
firm^ or sure, trans. 1) prop, as toi/s 
TToda^ eU to ^vXov, Acts xvi. 24. Wisd. 
xiii. 15, dar(f)aXiardiixEvo^ crLSvpo). Pol. vi, 
22, 4, o 3'up£os, dLcc TO crLdr^povu (tlu- 
Xcofxa, da-rpaXiX^ETai, &c. 2) metaph. to 
secure, make safe against enemies, &c. tov 
Td(pov, Matt, xxvii. 65. Jos. Ant. xiii. 1, 
Triv 'lovdaiav (ppovpal^ darcp. Pass, in 
aor. 1. dacpaXiad^uaL, ' muniri custodia,' 
Matt, xxvii. 64. Joseph, and Class. 

'A<T(p aXu)?, adv. [darcpaX^]?,) 1) prop. 
firmly, i. e. without falling or slipping, 
Xen. Mag. Eq. viii. 3, EidLafxivoL — dcp^ 
vxj/rjXcov da-cpaXu)^ KaTiivai. 2) fig. 
securely, safely, viz. against enemies, &c. 
Mk. xiv. 44, ctTrayaygTE (auToi;), d. So 
Pol. xiv. 44, dirayayoiv d. t^v dvvafxiv, 
and oft. in later Class., also Acts xvi. 23, 
a. Ti]pELV ai)Tov<3. Others understand, 
diligently and cautiously^ that none may 
escape. Indeed, in those passages there 
seems a blending of the two idioms, that 
of security as the object, and diligent care 
as the means. Also metaph. certainly, 
assuredly, securely from all danger of error, 
&c. Acts ii. 36, dacp. jLVMorKiTO). So 
Wisd. xviii. 6, dG<p. £t8oT£s. Eunap. 
Proaer. £i<$oTt d(T(p. 

'Aarx^lf^oviw, f. rjcrco, (do-x^/ztoi/,) 
1) prop, to be without form, shapeless, in- 
trans. j^llian V. H. xi. 4. 2) metaph. to 
behave oneself unbecomingly, 1 Cor. xiii. 5. 
(where see my note,) Sept. and Class. 
3) ^0 suffer disgrace, 1 Cor. vii. 36, el 61 
Ti9 d(TxmJ-0VELV Eirl TTjv TTapQivov aVTOV 
vojULi'^EL, ' incurs disgrace on account of his 
unmarried daughter.' So Deut. xxv. 3, 
dfTxnp-ovncrEL. Eurip. Hec. 407, dcrxnfJ-o- 
vtja-aL, Diod. Sic. xiv. 10, dcrxm^opilv 
sTTonjcrg avTOVr 

'AarxV l^ocrvvTj, rj^, rj, {daxnfxuiv,) 
1) prop, deformity or ugliness, Plato ap. 
Steph. Thes. 2) metaph. indecorum, and 
hence, by impl. obscenity, Rom. i. 27. 
Comp. Ecclus. xxvi. 8. Joseph. Ant. xvi. 
7, 6 ; by euphemism, nakedness, pudenda. 
Rev. xvi. 15, and Sept. 

' Aaxv p.(j3v, 0V09, 6, 7?, adj. (a, arxvf^<^-, 
form, or figure,) prop, without form, Hdian. 
V. 6, 24 ; metaph, indecorous, Plato and 
Hdian. ap, Steph, Thes. 1 Cor. xii. 23, 
TO. daxvp-ova rifxwv. Sept., Xen., & Plut. 

'Ao-wTta, as, 77, (ao-6oTos, lit. unsave- 
able, incorrigible, dissolute, Pol. xiv. 12, 
3,) dissolute7iess, debauchery, Eph. v. 18. 
Tit. i. 6. 1 Pet. iv, 4. di/axv<rts t^s aor., 
' sink of debauchery.' Prov. xxviii. 7. 
i 2 Mace. vi. 4. Hdian. ii. 5, 2. 

D 



50 



A YG 



'Ac ft) TO)?, adv. (a a- WTO?,) dissolutely^ 
Lu. XV. 13, ^coi/ a. Jos. Ant. xii. 4, 8. 

'ATafCTtto, f. ijcw, (aTa/CTOs,) 1) 
prop, to behave oneself disorderly^ as sol- 
diers who do not keep their ranks, Xen. 
Cyr. vii. 2, 6. 2) metaph. and spec, to 
desert one's joos^, or in any way neglect 
one's duties. (Comp. Hor. Epist. i. 16, 67. 
Xen. CEc. v. 15, 2.) 2 Th. iii. 7, ou/c ^xa/c- 
Tvo-a/uLEv kv vjULU. So Pint. Apophth. 
ap. Steph. Thes. in voc. ara/cTtjo-as t^s 
TraTpiov dycoyrj^. 

"At a /c TO 5, oif, 6, 17, adj. (a, Tacro-Ojucti,) 
1) prop, by a military figure, not keeping 
one's ranks^ as said of soldiers ; 2) metaph. 
neglectful of one's duties., and gener. 
orderly, 1 Th. v. 14, tous aT. Pint, de 
Ediic. § 7, ccTa/CTOt ti^ovai. 

'ATa/CTcos, adv. (ccTa/CTO?,) prop. 
tuithout order., and metaph. irregular.^ dis- 
orderly^ 2 Th. ii. 6, 11, aV. TrepLiraT&lu^ 
to live a disorderly life. Comp. Isocr. ad 
Nic. ctTa/CT£o§ X,V^- 

"At£kvo9, ou, 6, 77, adj. (a, te/ci/oj/,) 
childless, Lu. xx. 28, seqq. Sept. & Class. 

'AT£Z/i^a),f. t(ra),(aT£i'?75,fr. a,T£ti^oo,) 
prop. ^0 ^ oneself, and then, by use, to 
fx one''s eyes upon any person or thing ; 
also, to look fidcedly at the object, aTsuu)^ 
opav, or dcpopav. In fact, there is an 
ellipsis of Tols o06a\/iot9, or opLfxaa-L^ 
sometimes expressed, as in two passages of 
Philostr. and Themist. cited by Schleusner. 
The word is construed either with £is and 
acc. of object, or its equiv, a dat. without 
prep. In one or other of these construc- 
tions it occurs ten times in the Acts, as 
also in the later Class, writers, in both the 
sense to look at and to gaze fixedly, as said 
of the person, but never, as in Lu. iv. 20, 
applied to the eyes, ol ocpdaXjULol ricrav 
dT£VLX^ovrE<s auTw. With the phrase at 
Acts i. 10, aTEi/i^oivTES r\(Tav £t§ Toy ov- 
pavov, we may compare the Virgilian (tEu. 
ii. 405,) ' ad coelum tendens ardentia lu- 
mina frustra.' 

''At£|0, adv. or prep, ivithout, governing 
the gen. & chiefly occ. in the poets, though 
sometimes in the prose writers, as Dion. 
Plal. and Plutarch, also 2 Mace. xii. 15. 
In N.T. at Lu. xxii. 6, aT£p oxkov, ' with- 
out tumult and annoyance quite agree- 
ably to the Classic usage, (so Horn. Od. 
aT£p KafxaTOLO nriX^ca-av, and II. ccts^o 
TToXifxav £tcr^X0£, and Hesiod 0pp. 113, 
ccTsp T£ TToi/wi/ /cat 6t^uo5,) but in Lu. 
xxii. 35, d-rsp (BaXavTLov, without, as said 
of possession, is unsupported by Classical 
authority. 

'ATt/xa^o), f. a<j(jo, {uTifxa^,) 1) to 
dishonour, disgrace, trans. John viii. 49, 
Rom. ii. 23. Sept. •& Class. 2) to treat 
with indignity and ahuse, as said of persons, 



Lu. XX. 11. Acts V. 41. Ja. ii. 6 ; of things, 
Rom. i. 24, dr. Tot (roofxaTa. Sept. & Class. 
'A^l/LLLa, a?, t], {drL/uLO^,) dishonour. 

I. prop. 2 Cor. vi. 8. xi. 21. Rom. i. 26. 
Sept. and Class. ; indecorum, 1 Cor. xi. 14. 
— II. in the sense of vileness, meariness, 

1 Cor. XV. 43. So fis aVi/x/ai/, ' for a 
mean use," Rom. ix. 21. 2 Tim. ii. 20. 
Sept. and Class. 

"AtI^uos, ou, o, 17, adj. (a, Tt/x77,) 1) 
prop, unhonoured, also dishonoured. Class. 
In N. T. contemned, despised., 1 Cor. iv. 

10, and Class. 2) by impl. mean, of no 
estimation. Matt. xiii. 57. Mk. vi. 4. 1 Cor. 
xii. 23, and Sept. 

' At L /ULO (jd, f. (hcru), {aTLjuLO^,) to dis- 
honour, disgrace, Sept. and Class. In 
N. T. to treat ivith indignity, abuse, Mk. 
xii. 4, ii]TLp.(jop.ivov. Sept. and Class. 

' A T/x t s, ioo5, 17, a vapour or exhalation, 
Ja. iv. 14. comp. Wisd. ii. 2, 4 ; also said, 
per catachresin, of a cloud of smoke. Acts 

11. 19, aT/xi? Kwrrvov, (cited from Joel ii. 
30,) also in Sept. and Class. 

" At a HID ^, ov, 6, 77, adj. (a, To/nr},) 
uncut, also not to be cut or divided ; and 
by impl. very minute. In N. T. said of 
time, kv dTo/uLU) sc. ^povto, ' in a moment, 
instantly,' 1 Cor. xv. 52. 

"Atotto?, ov, 6, ri, adj. (a, T07ro5.) in 
Class, out of place, misplaced, and by impl. 
incongruous, absurd. In N. T. unbecom- 
ing, improper, and gener. evil or zcicked, 
as said both of persons, 2 Thess. iii. 2, and 
of things, as conduct, Lu. xxiii. 41. Sept. 
& Class. Also evil, in the sense noxious, 
Acts XX viii. 6, pLrjSkv d. 'no harm.' Thuc. 
ii. 49, and oft. in the Medical writers. 

Auya^ct), f. daru), [avyi],) 1) prop, to 
shi?ie upon, give light to. Lev. xiii. 24, 25, 
26, 28, & Class. 2) metaph. to enlighten^ 

2 Cor. iv. 4, foil, by dat. 

Avyt), rj-s, 77, a beam of light, gener. 
that of the sun, and esp. at his rising above 
the horizon, the daivning of day. Acts xx. 

II. Polysen. p. 386, kuto. Tr\v Trpu3Tr\v 
a. Trj's 77/x£pa§. 

Avd d 8i^9, £09, 6, 77, adj. (ai;T05, ?7^o- 
yuat,) lit. self-complacent, and by impl. self- 
suficient, self-tvilled, arrogant, Tit. i. 7. 
2 Pet. ii. 10. Sept. and Class. 

Av6 aip ET09, ov, 6, f], adj. (auTos, 
alpiofxaL.,) self-chosen, voluntary, of one's 
oicn accord; said both of persons and 
things, 2 Cor. viii. 3, virkp duva/uLiv av6. 
soil. (Tvi/e(pEpov, and ver. 17, avd. k^rjXdz 
TTpos u/xa5, where it is used adverbially, 
as Lucian, Cataplus § 4, £i7r£TO avd. fxou 

Avd EVTEiti, f. 770-co, from avdeuTT}^, 
for uvToivTYi?, which means lit. one who 
slays ivith his oivn hand, whether himself, 
or others ; and hence fig. the actual or 
virtual doer of any thing ; also, orie ivho 



AY A 



5 



1 



AY T 



cccercises authority in .my matter, Eurip. 
Snppl. 442, one who ' pro anctoritate agit,' 
avTodiKO's^ or i^ouo-iacTT?;?. Hence av- 
dEi/Teu) came to mean, as in N. T. (1 Tim. 
ii. 12.) to tisicrp authority/ over, for i^ovcn- 
Kvpiivo). So Diod. Sic. i. 27, kv- 
pisvELu Ti)u yvvoLKa Tciudpo?. And as it 
bears the se?ise of Kvpisvoo, it carries its 
sy7itaa\ a genit. ; as indeed all verbs that 
have the idea of ruling. 

AuXeco, f. ?;or6o, to plai/ on tlie au\o§, 
OY Jinte, (see in voce,) Matt. xi. 17. Lu. 
vii. 82. 1 Cor. xiv. 7, and Class. 

AvXi], t}?, 77, (ai/u), fr. aoj, to blow,) I. 
a court-yard^ any inclosed but open and airy 
spot before a house, Athen. v. 2. Used 
in N. T. I. of a sheep/old^ John x. 1, 16. 
Horn. II. iv. 433. Joseph. Ant. i. 11, 2.— 
II. of the court of an Oriental edifice, 
whether, 1) inner ^ around which the 
house was built, Matt. xxvi. 58. Mk. xiv. 
54, 66. XV. 16. Lu. xxii. 55. John xviii. 
15. Sept., Joseph., ^1. Y. H. iii. 4—8; 
or, 2) the outer or eoderior courts before 
the vestibule of a dwelling-house, Hom. 
II. xxiv. 452, or other edifice, as Rev. xi. 
2, of the Temple. — III. bv synecd. of part 
for whole, a mansion having such an ex- 
terior court; which accordingly was the 
name given to the residences of monarchs, 
or supreme governors, or great men gene- 
rally, a;nswering to our palace or mansion. 

AvXi]fTr]9^ ou, 6, a player on the 
auXos, or j^wfe. Matt. ix. 23. Rev. xviii. 
22. Joseph, and Class. 

Au/\t^o/x«i, f. Larofxai^ depon. mid. 
(avXi/,) to pass the time, whether day or 
night, i)i an auXy, court, encampment, &c. 
espec. the night. Hence, gener. to pass the 
night or lodge in any place, intrans. Matt, 
xxi. 17. Lu. xxi, 37. Sept. Jos. i. 19, 1. 

AuXos, ou, 6, {auco, to blow,) a tvind 
instrument, corresponding to the tibia of 
the Romans, and our ^fiute, or rather Jla- 
geolet, 1 Cor. xiv. 7. Sept. and Class. 

Av^avui, (a later form fr. av^io,) i. 
ah^YjcTw, to increase, trans, and intrans. 

I. trans, to cause to increase, to eiilarge, 
whether in size, 1 Cor. iii. 6, 7, or number, 
2 Cor. ix. 10. Sept. Joseph, and Class. — 

II. intrans. av^dvoo, mid. av^dvofxaL, (f. 
vcropai, aor. 1. pass, with mid. signif. 
'y]\)Xridqv,^ to receive increase, to grow up. 
1) mid. either prop. Matt. xiii. 32. 1 Pet. 
ii. 2, or metaph. 2 Cor. x. 15. Col. i. 10. 
Sept. and Class. 2) act. or trans. Matt. vi. 
28. Mk. iv. 8. Lu. i. 80, and oft. al. 

Ai/^t](rf?, £0)?, 77, (au'^ai/oj,) prop. 
growth, or increase gener. In N. T. occ. 
only metaph. of spiritual enlargement, be- 
stowed by God through the influences of 
the Holy Spirit, Eph. iv. 16. Col. ii. 19, 
av^ei Tr\v av^r]<rLU rrov Qeov. 

Au Jo), see Aujdi/w. 



iS^vpiou, adv. {avpa, 'the breezy call 
of incense- breathing morn,') to-morroic. 
Matt. vi. 30. Lu. xii. 28, et al. Sept. and 
Class. Sometimes accompanied by the 
art. 77 avpiov, scil. v/nipa, Matt. vi. 34, et 
al. and Class. 

Au<TT7}pos, a, 6if, adj. {avu),) I. prop. 

1) as applied to the feeling, dry, harsh; 

2) as applied to the tf^ste, harsh, or sour. — 

11. metaph. of the disposition, severe and 
harsh, Lu. xix. 21, seq. or as the following 
context requires, churlish, in the sense 
griping, covetous: 

AvT dp KEia, a<5, 77, (auVap/cj]?,) lit. 
self-sufficiency, i. e. sufficiency M'ithin one- 
self. 1 ) said of a mind contented with its 
lot, self-contentedness, I Tim. vi. 6, and 
Class. 2) of the having sufficiency for 
one's wants, competency, 2 Cor. ix. 8. 

AuTa/)/C7j§, £0§, b, V, adj. {avTO's, 
apKEU),) 1) prop, self-suffcient ; i. e. to 
satisfy one's own wants ; so Class. 2) me- 
taph. ' contented with one's o^vn lot,' Phil, 
iv. 11, kv oI§ avrapKri^. So Ecclus. 

xl. 18, ^0)7/ avTaoKovs ipydn-ov yKvKav- 
dncTETaL. Diog. Laert. ii. 24 ; of Socrates, 
Pol. vi. 48. Thuc. iii. 36. 

AvTOKaTdKpLro^, ov, 6, ?7, adj. 
{avTo?, KaTaKpivdi,) self- condemned. Tit. 
iii. II, where see my note. 

AvTO fxaTO's, n-) ov, adj. 1) prop. 
self-moved, (as certain machines, called 
automatons,) Hom. II. 376. Thus in Acts 
xii. 10, avTOiuidTi] v TrvX^t ijvoLX^ih. ^- e. 
'without any foreign aid.' Plut. Timol. 

12, (h<S OL TOV VEtb 'WvXcoVE'S avT. OLaVOLyj- 

6eTev. 2) metaph. sjoontaneous , as said of 
land yielding its produce without cultiva- 
tion, Mk. iv. 28, avTOfxd^y] 7j yy] Kap- 
irocpopEl. Arrian, E. A. vii. 4, 8, ol 

XELfX(jovE<s vdpbov aVTOpaTOL EK(pipOV(TL. 
Hes. 0pp. 117, 118, Kapirov d' 'icpEpE 
X^EiS(jDpo9 apovpa AvTOfxaTY]. 

Al/T0 7n-77 9, ov, 6, {aVTO?, OTTTOjULaL,) 

prop, an adj. self beholding ; but used as a 
subst. an eye-ivitness, Lu. i. 2, and Class. 

Autos, 77, o, pron. used in three ways; 
1 ) in the sense self; 2) in the oblique case, 
him, her, it; 3) with the art. the same. 
I. SELF, in all the persons, as 'myself, 
thyself, himself. — ^. joined icith ct noun, or 
pron. as if in apposition, and put either 
after the noun, or before it, and its article. 
1) self, emphatic, and apart from every 
thing not self, e. gr. with proper name, 
Mk. xii. 36, auTos yap Aaut^. Lu. xx. 
42. John iv. 2, 'l7]croi;§ auTos, ' Jesus 
himself,' in distinction from his disciples. 
2 Cor. X. 1, auTos ^£ tyto HauXos. Mk. 
vi. 17, et al. oft. in N. T. and Class. ; 
with other nouns, Rom. viii. 26, ahTo to 
WvEvaoL. I Cor. xv. 28, auros 6 Ylos. 
Gal. vi. 13. Rev. xxi. 3; with personal 
pronouns, as auTOs iyw, /cayw auros, 
D2 



A YT 



52 



AYX - 



v/ule'l<s auToJ, &c. in N. T. and Class, and 
sometimes other pronouns, as avToi ovtol. 
Acts xxi7. 15. OS Kai auros, Matt, xxvii, 
57. Sept. and Class. 2) in the sense even^ 
implying comparison and distinction, 1 Cor. 

Xi. 14, 77 Ov6k aVT}] 77 (pVCTL^ OlddarKEL \ 

2 Cor. xi. 14, auros yap 6 'Ear. al. and 
Class. 3) as marking the strongest em- 
phasis, the 'cery^ John v. 36, aura to. 
spya. Heb. ix. 24, £is avTov tov ovpa- 
v6v. 4) as marking the exclusion of all 
else, self alone ^ 2 Cor. xii, 13, avTo'i iyw, 
'I alone,' exclusive of the other apostles. 
Rev. xix. 12, el yU7/ auVos, 'except himself 
alone;' ^vith /movo^ subjoined, John vi. 15, 
et Class. 5) in the sense of oneself of one's 
own accord, apart from all external im- 
pulse, John xvi. 27, auVos yap b UaTitp 
cpiXEL u/xas. 1 Pet. ii. 24, and Class. — ii. 
used alojie, the pers. pron. heing under- 
stood, chiefly in nomin. for / myself lie 
liimself with various degrees of emphasis, 
1) gener. and often with K-at, Lu. vi. 42. 
xxiv. 24. John ix. 21. Phil. ii. 24, /cat 
ctuTos Tayi(Xi'$ kXEixrofJLaL, et al. ssepe. 2) 
put emphat. for a person distinguished 
from all others. So often of Jesus, auTos, 
He, i. e. the Lord and Master, Matt. viii. 
24, Mk. iv. 38, et al. So of God, Heb. 
xiii. 5. Compare the ajxos ecpa of the 
disciples of Pythagoras, as said of their 
master. — iii. where several words inter- 
vene between the subject and the verb, 
auTos is put empJiatically, instead of re- 
peating the subject itself, 1) in the sense 
of 0VT09 or i/vHTi/09, tJiis, that. Matt. i. 21, 
auVos yap (for He, and no other) crooarEL 
TOV Xaov avTOV. v. 4, fxaKapioL ol tvev- 
idovvTE<5, OTL avTOL (for they, of all others) 
irapaKK^QncTovTaL. xi. 14, auTos eottiv 
'H.X. ' this is Elias,' et al. saepe in N. T. and 
Sept. and sometimes in Class. 2) with 
ordinals, ail to § denotes o^e's oivn self 
with the others included in the number. 
Rev. xvii. 11. 2 Pet. ii. 5, et Class. — II. 

PUT INSTEAD OF THE PERS. PRON. of 

Srd pers. him, her, it, but only in the 
oblique cases, and not at the beginning of 
a construction. — I. as refer rhig to a definite 
subject or antecedent expressed ; viz. gener. 
and simply, Matt. iii. 16, /cat t^oi', avE- 
wy^^crav ai/'rw ot ovpavoX, Kal slos to 
XluEVjui.a TOV Qeov KaTa^alvov cotrEt 

TTEpLCTTEOaV, Kul kpyOjJLEVOV EIT UVTOU, 

vi, 26. viii. 1. xi. 25, et al. oft. — ii. 
where no definite subject, or antecedent, is 
directly expressed, but avTov, ^c. stands 
in the con^tructio ad sensum, 1) as refer- 
ring to names of places, (countries, cities, 
&c. ) in which is included the collective 
idea of 'their inhabitants, Matt. iv. 23, 
TaXiXaiav — ahTcou. Lu. iv. 15. Acts viii. 
5, auTots, i. e. the Samaritans, xx. 2. 
2 Cor. ii. 13. 1 Thess. i. 9. Thuc. i. 136, 
fpEvyEi — h KioKvpav, wv avTcbi/ EVEpyi- 



T779, and oft. al. ap. Class. 2) as referring 
to an abstract noun implied in a preceding 
concrete, and vice versa, John viii. 44, 
\//£ucrT?]9 E(TTL, Kal 6 -TTaT/jo avTov, scil. 
TOV xj/Evdov^ : vice versa, Rom. ii. 26. 
Lu. V. 17. 3) as referring to an ante- 
cedent implied in a preceding verb, Acts 
xii. 21, 6 'HpwoT^s Edi]iuLijy6pEL irpo^ 
avT0V9, scil, TOV diiixov. 1 Pet. iii. 13, 14, 
(p6(3ov avTcov, i. e. tcov kukouvtcov vfxd^. 
4) where there is no grammatical refer- 
ence whatever to tlie preceding context, 
but the antecedent is merely pre-supposed, 
Lu. i. 17, TrpoEXEvcTETaL avTov, namely, 
the Messiah. 1 John ii. 12. 2 John 6. 
Lu. ii. 22, /ca0api(r/xoD avTwv, i. e. the 
mother and her child, xxiii. 51, t^ 
Trpd^sL avTcov, the Sanhedrim. Acts iv. 
5, avTU)v (i. e. the Jews). Matt. xi. 1. 
xii. 9. Heb. viii. 8, aurots XiyEL, and 
sometimes in Class. 5) avTov, uvtSv, 
Sec. is sometimes found where one might 
expect the reflexive iavTov, &c. Matt, 
xxi. 45. John i. 48, et al. and Class. — 

III. WITH THE ARTICLE, 6 ai/TOS, 7? 

auT7], TO avTo, the same. — I. gener. the 
same, i. e. not diff"erent, objectively, Mk. 
xiv. 39. Lu. vi. 38, tw avTw fxETpcp. 
Rom. ix. 21. x. 12, et al. Hence the 
adverbial phrases to avro, 'in the same 
manner ;' ettI to uvto, ' in one and the 
same place,' or, ' at one and the same 
time ;' /caTa to auTo, ' at the same time, 
together.' — ii. put sidjectively, in the 
sense always the same, unchanging, Heb. 

i. 12, (TV 8e 6 auTo? £t. Heb. xiii. 8. Thuc. 

ii. 26, o auT05 Eip,i. — III. as constr. with 
a dative, tlie same ivith, tJie same as, I Cor. 
xi. 5, 'iv yap e<ttl /cat to avTo tt? k^vpt]- 
juLEvy. 1 Pet. V. 9, and Class. 

AuTou, adv. of place, here, there, Matt, 
xxvi. 36. Acts XV. 34. x\iii. 19. 

AvTov, yj^, ov, Attic contr. for sauTou, 
&c. himself, herself. Matt. i. 21, and oft, in 
N. T. and Class. 

AuTocpwpo?, ov, 6, 77, adj. (auTos, 
(poop, fur,) prop, taken i?i the very theft, 
and gener. taJce?i in the very act of commit- 
ting any crime, Thuc. vi. 38, KoXa^tav 
avTo<pu)pov9, Jos. Ant. xvi. 8, 4, espec. 
adultery, as John viii. 4, KaTEiXvcpdri kir* 
avTocpoopcp fxoLyEvofXEvr], where Itt' avT, 
is an adverbial phrase, formed from the 
neuter avrocpcopov. 

AvTox^f- P-, (005, o, 77, adj. {avTo^, 
X£iyO,) doing any thing with one's own 
hands, equiv. to avTovpyo^, Acts xxvii. 
19, avT. kppLxj/aiuLEV. Aristoph. Av. 1155. 
Hdian. vii. 2, 17. 

Avxf^vpb^,d, ov, adj. (auXi^^o?, dirt, or 
dust,) prop, dusty, dirty ; and as the idea 
of squalidness in a place suggests that of 
dimness or duskiness, hence the word 
comes to have that sense, as in Aristot. 



I 



A^> A 



53 



1 



cited by Wets, where to crTikfiov kuI 
Xafxtrpov is opposed to tm axjxfx^pto kul 
dXafxTTEi^ Such, too, is the s(Mise, how- 
ever disputed, at 2 Pet. i, 19, 
(paii/ouTL tv av)(^iJ.i]p(o totto), such being 
demanded by the context; though there 
may also be included an under sense, by 
way of allusion to the world as a dark and 
dreary abode. 

*A(paLpico^ f. 7/ (TO), to taJce away ^re- 
move. I. gener. as to ousloo^^ Lu. i. 25. 
Rev. xxii. 19, text. rec. Sept. and Class. 
In Rom. xi. 27. Heb. x. 4, d(paipilv 
dfxapTLav or dfxapTia^ means to take 
away the [consequences of] sm., by remov- 
ing its punisliment and procuring its for- 
giveness ; and so oft. in Sept. and some- 
times in Apocr. The mid. form occ. in Lu. 
xvi. 3 ; the pass, in Lu. x. 42, and Sept. & 
Class. — II. spec, to cut oJf\ as we say ' to 
take off;' e. gr. to iotlov, to ous. Matt, 
xxvi. 51. Mk. xiv. 47. Lu. xxii. 50. 
Sept. and later Class. 

£09, 6, 77, adj. (a, (paivoi^) 
not apparent^ unseen^ Heb. iv. 13. Apocr. 
and Class. 

'A<^ai/i^a), f. icrtt), {d<pau7]<3^) to cause 
to disappear^ to put out o/sight^ClsLSS. Pass. 
to be out of sight., disappear., Joseph. Ant. 
iv. 8, 48, In N. T. it is used in two senses, 
I. prop, to disappear., vanish^ Ja. iv. 14, 
dTfxl<s d(p. Philo, p. 714, to (tkoto? d(p. 
Also metaph. ' to faint away from fear,' 
Acts xiii. 41. Ez. xxx. 9. — II. by impl. 
to destroy., Matt. vi. 19, sq. answering to 
SiatpdELpo) in Lu. xii. 33. And so in Sept. 
and Class. — III. fig. 'to deprive of a 
goodly appearance,' to deform.^ disfigure., 
Td TTpocruiTra^ Matt. vi. 16. 

^ Aq) av Lcr IXC'S., ou, o, {dcpaviX^co^) prop. 
a putting out of the ivay., making away 
with., and metaph. destruction ; also fig. a 
making aivay with a law or covenant by 
aholishing it, Heb. viii. 13, eyyus d(^a- 

VLO-fMOV. 

"A0ai/TO9, ou, o, 77, adj. (a, irecpav- 
xat, fr. cpaivofjiaL,) same as dcpavrj^, not 
apparent^ or seen. Hence in Lu. xxiv. 31, 
d(p. ysuEo-dai, ' to disappear or vanish.' 
So a^aj/T]? yEuicrdai., 2 Mace. iii. 34, of 
the disappearance of angels. 

'A^E^pcoi/, wi;o9, o, (ccTTo, apart, and 
edpa., a stool,) a privy., Matt. xv. 17. Mk. 
vii. 19. A later Greek word. 

'A(f)EidLa., as, 77, (a(^£t^7]5, fr. a, and 
<f>ELdojuiaL.,) prop, unsparingness^ as said of 
the body, by fasting, or other austerity. In 
this sense the word does not occ. elsewhere 
in N. T. ; but in the Class, writers, as 
Thuc.ii. 43,51, and Lucian ii. 915, the cog- 
nate verb dcpsLCElu foil, by o-co/uaTos, 
(:^lou, or cr(pu)v avroou, is used in the sense 



of 'neglecting the care of the body,' by not 
attending to its safety. 

'A^£/\o'7-7/?, TjjTos, o, {dcptXrj^., sim- 
ple, sincere,) simplicity^ sincerity.. Acts ii. 
4(>. The Class, use for it a'^^t/Vtia. 

"A(^£(rts, £w§, 77, (dcpirjiui.,) prop, a 
letting go., in various views : 1) dismission 
from service., or deliverance from captivity., 
Lu. iv. 18. Sept. and later Class. 2) re- 
mission of debts., &c. Deut. xv. 3. Esth. ii. 
18. 1 Mace. xiii. 34; or of szws, as in 
N. T. either absol. Mk. iii. 29. Heb. ix. 
22. X. 18, or foil, by duxapTiwv, Matt, 
xxvi. 28. Mk. i. 4. Lu. i. 77, et al. oft. 
So, with eyicXrjfxdTCov or Tifxcopia^^ in 
Died. Sic. 

'A 07/, tj'Sy 77, (aTTTO), 7iecto.,) -proip, the 
sense of touch., or the act of touching ; but 
as that implies close communion, thus 
the w^ord came to mean 'vinculum' in 
gener. and espec. any ' ligature' by which 
the different members of the body are con- 
nected, a joint. So, though metaph. 
Eph. iv. 16, d(pr\ TTjS eTrLXopvyias, Co], 
ii. 19, £^ ov irdv to (juifxa did tUov dcpoov 
Kai crvvSiafxcov, &c. this sense of dcpi] is 
rare, only occurring elsewhere in Pint. 
Anton, c. 27, and Orig. contra Cels. vii. 4. 

'Acpdapaia., a9, 77, {dcpdapTo^^) 1} 
prop, incorruptibility, i. e. incapability of 
decay; 2) metaph. as said of the future 
bodies of the saints, immortality, 1 Cor. 
XV. 42, 50, 53, 54. Plut. Aristid. c. 6. Sg 
also of their future life and felicity, 2 Tim. 
i. 10, ^0)7/1/ Kal d(pdap(TLav, by hendiad. 
(for X^iMYiv dcpQapTov, as kv dcpdapcria is 
at 1 Cor. XV. 42, and Wisd. ii. 23, put for 
dfpdapTo^.) Also in Rom. ii. 7. Comp. 
1 Cor. ix. 25. 1 Pet. v. 4. But as the 
sense incorruptibility naturally involves 
that oi perpetuity, so d<pd. came to denote 
perpetuity, as said of things. So Eph. vi. 
24, kv dcpdapa-ia, though there it is an 
adverbial phrase, for dcpddpTco^, ' per- 
petually, unceasingly.' 

"AcpdapTO?, ov, o, 77, adj. (a, and 
(pdapTo?, fr, cpdsLpco,) prop, incorruptible. 
I. as said of persons, immortal, Rom. i. 23. 
1 Tim. i. 17. 1 Cor. xv. 52. — II. as said of 
things, imperishable, I Cor. ix. 25, arTi(p. 
d<p6. Comp. Wisd. xviii. 4. 1 Pet. i. 4, 
KXr^povo/JLLau dcpO. (so Horn. II. xv. 498, 
kXtjpo^ dK-npaT09,) and 23. iii. 4. Jos. 
Ant. iii. 5, 3. 

'A<p iriiuLL, (ceVo, li]iull,) f. dcprja-o), 
aor. 1. dcpr^Ka, aor. 1. pass. d(pidi]u, fut. 1. 
pass. d(p£(^v<TOfj.aL, (anomalous forms, 2 
p. pres. a0£ts, fr. d<piu),ReY. ii. 20. Impf. 
n<pLov, fr. dcpLco, Mk. i. 34. xi. 16, and 
Philo. Perf. pass. 3 pi. dcpkcovTaL, Matt, 
ix. 2, 5. Mk. ii. 5, 9, et al. from a form of 
the perf. act. dcfykioKa,) to send forth or 
aivay, or to let go from oneself. I. prop. 
to dismiss, as persons. Matt. xiii. 36, and 



A$ I 



54 



A ^ O 



Class, to put away^ as a wife, 1 Cor. vii. 
11,12, 13. Joseph. Ant. xv. 7, 10; to 
give up^ lit. letting go^ the spirit or life, to 
TTi/gy/xa or Tr]u \!/uxv^-> Matt, xxvii. 50. 
Sept., Jos., and later Class.; to utter\ lit. 
sending forth^ a shout or outcry, Mk. xv. 
37. Sept., Joseph., and sometimes Class. — 
II. to let go^ prop, from one's power, &c. 
to let escape^ Matt. xxiv. 40, 41. Lu. xvii. 
34. Sept. and later Class. ; fig. to let go 
from obligation, to remit^ as a debt or of- 
fence, Matt, xviii. 27, 32, 35. Mk. xi. 25. 
Sept. and Class. So of sins, to remit the 
penalty, forgive^ foil, by dat. of person. 
Matt. vi. 12. ix. 2, 5, 6. xii. 31, and oft. 
al. in Sept. and Class. — III. to let go from 
further notice, care, &c. to let alone^ 1) 
prop, to qidt^ forsake^ as said both of per- 
sons and things ; so to leave^ or let remain, 
in any place or state, Matt. v. 24. xviii. 12. 
Mk. i. 20, &c. ; also to leave to any one^ let 
Mm have or take any thing, Matt. v. 40, 
a(pt<5 avTuo Kal to IfxaTLOv. toleave heliind 
at death. Matt. xxii. 25. Mk. xii. 19, sq. 
and Sept. ; so to leave remaining^ Heb. ii. 
8, et al. 2) metaph. to leave^ in the sense 
quit or desert^ Rom. i. 27. Rev. ii. 4 ; or 
omit^ pass hy^ Heb. vi. 1, and Class. ; or 
neglect^ Mk. vii. 8. Lu. xi. 42. — lY. to let 
go^ i. e. to let pass, permit^ suffer^ foil, by 
accus. with infin. expressed or implied, 
Matt. viii. 22. xiii. 30. xix. 14. Mk. i. 
34, et al. 

'A<pLKV&o /JLUL^ f. L^ofxai^ dcpou. (rXTTO, 
iKviofxai^) prop, to come or go aicay to a 
place, i. e. to arrive at, foil, by hI§ ; but 
in N. T. metaph. as said of a report, to go 
fort'k^ or abroad^ Rom. xvi. 19. So in 
Ecclus. xlvii. 16. ^1. Y. H. ii. 41. 

'A0 1 A. a y a 6 o §, of, o, ??, adj. (a, 0i- 
Xo9, aya.^b<s^ unfriendly to good men or 
goodness^ 2 Tim. iii. 3. 

'A(pL\dpyvpo?, Of, 6, 77, adj. (a, 
<^t\o§, apyupos,) not fond of money ^ libe- 
ral^ 1 Tim. iii. 3. Heb. xiii. 5, 

A0l^i9, £60?, 77, [uCpiKviojULaL^) ITl 

Class, mostly arrival ; in N. T. departure^ 
Acts XX. 29. And so in Jos., and occa- 
sionally in the Class. 

'Acp I cTTt] fj. f. 77crLO, trans, and intr. 
I. TRANS, in the pres. imperf. fut. and 1st 
aor. tenses, to put away or apart from, 
separate, cause to depai^t, foil, by acc. of 
pers. and gen. of pers. or thing, Sept. and 
Class. In N. T. to lead or draiv away, as 
a people from their allegiance, Acts v. 37, 

aTTECTTTJCg \a6v IKaVOV OlTLaU) aVTOV, 

And so Sept., Herodot. i. 154. Thuc. iv. 
81. viii. 35, & oft. and elsewh. in the best 
Class. — II, INTRAXS. in the act. perf. plu- 
perf. and aor. 2 ; and in mid. to separate 
oneself from, to depart. 1) gener. to go 
aivay from, or leave, either foil, by airo 
and gen. (Lu. ii. 37. iv. 13. Acts xii. 10. 



xix. 9. Lu. xiii. 27, and Sept.) or by gen. 
without prep., as in Class. ; spec, to icitJi- 
draiv from, avoid, as said either of per- 
sons, and prop. 1 Tim. vi. 5. 2 Tim. ii. 19, 
(with which I would compare Thuc. vi. 88, 
3, OL TToWoi a<pscr'r7]KS(ruv, ' kept off or 
aloof,' and Eurip. Iph. T. 1295, i^lvtva 
diroaTrivaL Trpocrco, ' to stand off at a dis- 
tance ;') or of persons and things ; in the 
former case to refrain from., let alone. Lu. 
iv. 13, aTTEo-Tij aTr' auToD. Comp. 2 Cor. 
xii. 8, 'Lva aTrocTTrj aTr' ejuov. Acts v. 
38, a7rocrT73T€ cnro tcou avdocoTTcoi' mov- 
Tcou. xxii. 29, aTricTTTjcrav aTr' avTov ol 
/uL&\XovTE<s avTov avETctX^Eiv : or of things, 
metaph. to desist from, to cd)andon, as Jos. 
Ant. i. 19, 10, d'TTOCT'TrjvaL t^9 epsuvti'S. 
Thuc. ii. 47, avToov diriGTijcrav, and vii. 

7, STL d(pECrT7]KEL TOV TToXijULOV , cLTld oftCU 

in Polyb., but always without aVo'. 2) 
In act. & mid. metaph. to revolt from, ab- 
sol. Lu. viii. 13. foil, by gen. 1 Tim. iv. 
1 ; by air 6, Heb. iii. 12. Sept. and Class. 

"K^vui, adv. (contr. from dcpavw^,) 
lit. £u pLirrj 6<pdaXiuLov, suddenly, uneoc- 
pectedly. Acts ii. 2. xvi. 26. xxviii. 6. 
Sept. and Class. 

At^o'jSo)?, adv. (a, (poke's,) fearlessly^ 
boldly, Lu. i.74. 1 Cor. xvi. 10. Phil. i. 14. 
Jude 12. Sept. and Class. 

^ A(^0 fXOLO UJ, f. COCO), {^d'K6, OIJLOlO'S,') 

to render or make like, i. e. 'from {diro) 
being unlike,' and gener. to liken ; also 
pass, to be likened unto, or to be like unto., 
Heb. vii. 3, dcpco/jLOLcojULtvo^ tw Ylw toO 
Q&ov. The pass, form is thought rare, 
being only cited from Epist. Jerem. v. 63, 
71 ; but it occurs often in Plato, and gener. 
in a mid. sense, to be like imto, so as to 
admit of a comparison with. 

' Xfpopdco, f. aTTOxl/ofxaL, aor. 2. aTral 
Sou, {aTTo, 6pd(v,) 1) prop, to look of or 
aivay from an object, and turn the face to 
a distant one, fixing it thereon. 2) metaph. 
of mental survey, by forcing the mind 
intently upon any object of consideration, 
whether a person or thing, espec. for imi- 
tation. So Heb. xii. 2, a0. eU 'l7j- 
(jovv. 4 Mace. xvii. 10, d<\>. sh tov Qsov. 
Jos. x\nt. 12, 1, d(p. TTpd^ tov Qeou. 
Arrian Diss. Epict. iv. ], Tav-ra dcpo- 
pa n-d TrapuoELyiuaTa : but also as an 
object for reflection, Jos. Ant. vii. 5, 4, 
7rpo5 Ti]v dXi'idELUV d(popu)V. 

'A(/)op t^w, f. iCTdo or tto, (aTTo, opiX^co,) 
1) prop, to mark or limit of, by setting 
bounds ; 2) met. to set of or apcui, sepa- 
rate. Matt. xiii. 49. xxv. 321 Acts xix. 9. 
2 Cor. vi. 17. Gal. ii. 12. Sept. and Class. 
3) metaph. to put apart or separate, for 
the purpose of rejection, to excommunicate, 
Lu. vi. 22, oTav d<popLcru)cnu vfxd^. Eu- 
rip. Hec. 931. 4) to set apai't, as an ob- 
ject of choice, to select for any purpose, to 



A4>0 



5 



5 



appoint^ Acts xiii. 2, d(/). (iol tov 'Raf)v. 
*<ai Tov YiavXov &h to ipyov. Rom. i. 1, 
<l(p(i3pLa-fxLvo^ (.U EvayytXiou Qeov. Gal. 
i. 15, d<p» /U£ Ik kolXlu^ fxiiTpo^ /ulov. 

779, 77, (CCTTO, Op/JLl),) 1) tllC 

place from M'hich any person issues, or any 
thing originates ; 2) the means Avhereby 
the action is accomplished ; 3) the occa- 
sto?i or opportuniti/ of undertaking the 
thing, Rom. vii. 8, 11, dcpop/uLiju Xa^ovaa 
i) dfxapTia^ ^lcl tj]^ eifTokfj^. 2 Cor. v. 12, 
«. clSovte^ v/ulTu KavxvpaTo^. Gal. v. 13, 
ah dcpopfjLijv T?/ aapici^ 1 Tim. v. 14. 

'A0p£^co, f. Lcro)^ {d(ppo9,) to froth or 
foam, Mk. ix. 18, 20, and Class. 

'A0pos, oD, 6, froth, foam, Lu. ix. 39, 
and Class. 

'Acf)pocrvvii, 77, {dcppwv,) ivant of 
wisdoin or prudence, 1) gener. 2 Cor. xi. 
1, 17. Sept. and Class. 2) from the Hebr. 
want of true and spiritual Avisdom, impiety, 
Mk. vii. 22. Sept. 

"Acppcov, ova?, 6, 77, adj. unwise, fool- 
ish, I. gener. Lu. xi. 40. xii. 20. 1 Cor. 
XV. 36. 2 Cor. xi. 16. xii. 6, 11. Sept. and 
Class. — II. spec, uninstructed, i. e. ignorant 
of true religion, Rom. ii. 20. Eph. v. 17. 

1 Pet. ii. 15, and Sept. 
'AtpvTrvoco, f. wo-60, {cicpvTrvo?, fr. 

diro, v-TTvo?,) prop, and in the earlier 
writers, to cease from sleejJ, to aivahe from 
sleep. In N. T. and later writers, to sleep 
out or away, as said of deep and lengthened 
sleep, Lu. viii. 23, for which the earlier 
writers use Kadviruoco. 

" A(po3vo<i, ov, 6, 77, adj. (a, (pa)V}],) 
speechless, in two senses : I. prop. dumb,i.e. 
devoid of the power of speech, as beasts, 

2 Pet. ii. 16 ; idols, 1 Cor. xii. 2. Comp. 
Hah. ii. 18, sq. — II. mute, silent, ie e. in 
patient suffering, IKl. V. H. xii. 41 ; me- 
taph. inarticidate in expression, not having 
T7JI/ ovva/jLLu T^s (pcovfjs, 1 Cor. xiv. 10. 

'A^dpLCTTo^, ov, 6, rji adj. (a, X^P^~ 
X,ofj.aL,) unthankful, imgratefid, Lu. vi. 35, 
Tous d\, Kai 'jTouripov^. 2 Tim. iii. 2, dX'-, 
auoarioL. 

'A)(£tpo7roir]T0 9, ov, 6, 17, adj. (a, 
X^'-P-) TTotew,) not made with human hands, 
not the work of men, t6v vaov tovtov 
TOV ^(gtiooTroitjTOi'. 2 Cor. v, 1, oIkluv 
dx^ipo-Tron]Tov. Col. ii. 11, 'TrepLTop.r} 
dx^t-poTT. 

'A^Xi/s, uo§, ?7, a thick mist or cloud, 
such as shrouds objects from the view, 
Horn. Od. vii. 41. In N. T. said of the 
eyes, in the sense a mist before the sight. 
Acts xiii. ll,axA-us kul ckotos, Jos. Ant. 
ix. 4, 3, dx^vv Tttls oxj/ai^ avTcov kiri- 
(SaXdov. Hippocr. and Galen. 

'Axps7o^,La,oi/,'ddj. (a, xpsta,) I. 
prop, unprofitable^ i. e. good for notliing, 



2 Sam. vi. 22. In N. T. by impl. evil and 
harmfid. Matt. xxv. 30. And so cixpv- 
CTTO^ in Philem. 11. — II. mctaph. unmeri- 
torious, by liaving only done one's duty, 
Lu. xvii. 10, dovXoL ct'xpttot kcrp-zv. 

'A X9 £ i o f. 60(760, {dxp^'io^,) prop, to 
render useless, mar. In N. T. pass, me- 
taph. to he spoiled for use, become corrupt^ 
Rom. iii. 12. 

" A x /O 77 cr T o s, ov, 6, 77, adj. (a, XP'*1~ 
cTo?,) 1) prop, unprofitable, useless, Sept. 
and Class. 2) metaph. and by impl. evil 
and detrimental, foil, by dat. of pers. Phi- 
lem. 11. Sept. and Class. 

"Ax/Oi, or dxpL^ before a vowel, 1) 
prop, an adverb of time, and sometimes of 
place, marking duration, continuity, but 
also used as a prep, with gen. continuedly, 
until, during. 2) with verbs as a con- 
junction, so long as, until, foil, in N. T. 
only by the subj. mood, implying uncer- 
tainty. I. as a PREPOS. with the gen. 
1) with nouns of time, as aXP^ 
pov, 'during a season,' Lu. iv. 13. Acts 
xiii. 11. XX. 11, dxpL^ avyrj?, & oft.; 
also dxpi ^avaTov, Acts xxii. 4. Rev. ii. 

10. xii. 11. 2) with nouns of ptlace, Acts 

xiii. 6, dxpi Yid(pov, xx. 4. xxviii. 15. 
2 Cor. X. 13. Rev. xiv. 20. 3) with a 
relat. pron. either with a noun of time, as 
ax/Oi 779 hp-ipa^, until the day or time (i. e. 
until) Matt. xxiv. 38. Lu. i. 20. xvii. 27. 
Acts i. 2 ; or foil, by ov, for axpt XP^^^^ 
ov, ' until the time when,' i. e. until. Acts 
vii. 18. xxvii. 33. Rom. xi. 25. 1 Cor. xi. 
26. XV. 25. Gal. iii. 19. iv. 19. Rev. ii. 
25. vii. 3, and Class. With a verb in the 
pres. d-xpL^ ov means so long as, ivhile, 
Heb. iii. 13, dxpL^ ov to avjuspov KaX&T- 
Tai. 2 Mace. XIV. 10. 4) before particles, 
Rom. i. 13, oLXpi- "TOV devpo, viii. 22, axpt 
TOV vvv, Phil. i. 5. Jos. and Philo. — II. 
as a CONJUNCTION before verbs in the sub- 
junct., Lu. xxi. 24. Rev. xv. 8. xvii. 17. 
XX. 3. Jos, and later Class. 

"Ax^pov, ov, TO, prop, chaff, Sept. and 
Class. In N. T. the broken straiv left after 
the sheaves of corn have been trodden 
out, Matt. iii. 12. Lu. iii. 17. 

'Ai//£u^7;s, £0§, 6, 77, adj. (a, xlfsvSi]^,) 
incapable of falsehood or deceit, Tit. i. 2, 6 
av//. Gsos, an appellation of God, found 
also in the Classical writers. So Eurip. 
Or. 364, dxlrEvdt]^ 0£O§. 

"Axj/ iv6o£, OV, 77, wormivood, as the 
emblem of poisonous bitterness. Rev. viii. 

11. Comp. Jer. ix. 15. xxiii. 15. 

" A\lfvxo^-> ov, 6, 77, adj. (a, \l/vxv->) 
inanimate, devoid of life or sense, 1 Cor. 

xiv. 7, Td di|A. sc. opyava. Sept. & Class. 



D4 



BAG 



B. 



56 



BAH 



Ba0^os, ou, 6, {^aiuu)^) I. prop, a 
5fep, whether of a staircase, or as leading 
up to a door ; also any degree of ascent. 
So of the degrees of the hours in a sun- 
dial, 2 Kings XX. 9. Jos. Ant, x. 2, 2.— 
II. metaph. a degree of ascent in honour 
or dignity, 1 Tim» iii. 13, and later Class. 

B a6os, £0§, TO, (/3a6u5,) depths I. prop. 
Matt. xiii. 5. Mk. iv. 5. Rom. viii. 39. Eph. 
iii. 18. Lu. V. 4,£ts to /3a0o9, soil, tz/s 3'a- 
Xao-o-rj?, the deep water, the sea, Sept, and 
Class. — II. metaph. 1) greatness, abun- 
dance, Rom. xi. 33, (3ddo? irXnvTov. Ml. 
V. H. iii. 18, ttXovto^ (3adv<s. 2 Cor. viii. 
2, t} KaTo. /3a6os (for (3adv^) 'KTUiX^ia, 
'extreme poverty.' 2) Ta /3a0t7, the 
depths, i. e. the secret purposes of any one. 
1 Cor. iL 10, rov 0£ou. Rev. ii. 24, tov 

BaQv'uto, f. ui/to, (/3a6L/9,) deepen, 
Lu. vi. 48, earKa^E kul i^dOvi/s, equiv. to 
(Sadioo? 'icTKaxl/e. 

Badv's, ELu, V, adj. deep, 1 ) prop, as said 
of a well, John iv. 11, and oft. in Sept. & 
Class. 2) metaph. Lu. xxiv. 1, opOpov 
(Badio^, ' deep twilight,' or earliest dawn. 
Indeed, the word is often used with words 
denoting time, as evening, night, or dawn 
of day. It is equiv. to Xiav Trpwt, Mk. 
xvi. 2. Joseph, and Class. 

Batoy, ou, TO, (/Saios, slender, taper- 
ing,) pi. TO. ^ata, branches of the palm- 
tree, John xii. 13. 1 Mace. xiii. 51. Test. 
XII. Patr. p. 668. 

BaXdvT Lov, ov, TO, {^dAXto, to put 
in,) a purse, Lu. x. 4. xii. 33. xxii. 35, 
36. Sept. and Class. 

BdWo), f. (3a\uj, to cast or throiv, 
trans, and foil, by dat. or acc. with prep. 
I. gener. a^nd foil, by KKripov, 'to cast 
lots,' i. e. into the vessel which contained 
them. Matt, xxvii. 35. Mk. xv. 24. Lu. 
xxiii. 34, al. and Sept. Joseph. Ant. vi. 3, 
4. Comp. Virg. Mn. v. 491. Said of a 
tree, ' to cast [off]' its fruit. Rev. vi. 13. 
(SdWsiv kavTov, 'to throw or cast oneself 
dowTi,' Matt. iv. 6. Lu. iv. 9. John xxi. 7. 
Foil, by dat. ' to cast down to any one,' 
and by impl. put the thing into his hands, 
Matt. XV. 26, (SaXtTv (t6v dpTov) tol<5 
KvvapLOL?. Mk. vii. 27. So Matt. xxv. 27, 
/3. TO dpyvpiov fj-ov toi^ TpaTre^iTals, 
' to put it into the hands of.' As con- 
strued with different prepositions and par- 
ticles, the signification is variously modi- 
fied, though the notion of throwing is 
always fundamental: 1) foil, by utto, to 
throiv from one, to cast away. Matt. v. 29. 
xviii. 8, et al. and Class. 2) foil, by he, 
to cast out of, as the mouth. Rev. xii. 15, 
sq. 3) foil, by 'i^co, to cast out^ to throvj I 



ccway, reject. Matt. v. 13. xiii. 48. Lu. xiv. 
35. John XV. 6 ; fig. in 1 John iv. 18, /8. 
TOV (po^ou. 4) foil, by £15 with acc. of 
place whither, to cast into, as £ts 'rrvp. 
Matt. iii. 10, & oft. ; or eh tyiv QdXaaaai/, 
Matt. xxi. 21, et al. ; of nets, ' to cast 
into,' Matt. iv. 18, et al. ; sh (pvXaKijv., 
Matt, xviii. 30, et al. ; ' to cast into,' as 
money, put into a treasury, Mk. xii. 41 ; 
of a sword, ' to put into' its scabbard, John 
xviii. 11 ; 'to put into,' as bridles into 
horses' mouths, Ja. iii. 3, or as liquid into 
a vessel. Matt. ix. 17, et al. Metaph. 
ISaXXsLv Ti]u KapoLav, John xiii. 2. Simi- 
larly the Classical writers use the phrase, 
(SaXXsLu or ^dXX&aOaL or kfji^dXXeiv tlvl 
£i§ vovv or kv ^vfXM or <ppsat, but never, 
I believe, eh Kapdiav : foll.hy E/uLirpo a 6 ew 
or kvwTTLov Tii/o§, to cast before any one, 
or at his feet, Rev. ii. 14. iv. 10; foil, by 
£7ri, to cast upo7i, or over, as seed sown on 
the ground, Mk. iv. 26 ; of casting stones 
at any one, John viii. 7. Sept. ; (SaXetv 
£ip7ivr]v kirl ti)v yrjv, ' to send forth 
peace on earth,' Matt. x. 34 ; also of cast- 
ing or putting a burden upon any one. 
Rev. ii. 24. — II. pass. perf. and pluperf. 
^i^Xrifxai, to be cast or laid, to lie, as 
upon a bed. Matt. viii. 6. Mk. vii. 30. Lu. 
xvi. 20. Rev. ii. 22.— III. foil, by acc. of 
person, to throio at, i. e. pelt any one, 
either with missiles, as oft. in Sept. and 
Class., or with blows, Mk. xiv. 65, pa- 
TTLafxacTLv avTov 'i(3aXov. — IV. intrans. or 
with kavTov underst. to cast oneself, rush 
forward, as said of wind, to blow icith 
force., Acts xxvii. 14. Hom. 11, xi. 721, 
TvoTap.b'i £t§ dXa (3dXXu)V. 

BuTTT LX^ii), f. laco, (jSaTTTw,) to im- 
merse, or sink any thing, in water, or other 
liquid ; said both of persons (also animals) 
and things. Class. In N. T. it occurs only 
in the following senses, I., from the ad- 
junct of immersion, to tvash, or cleanse by 
washing, trans, mid. and aor. 1. pass, in 
mid. sense, to ivash oneself, bathe, Mk. vii. 
4, kdv f^ri (SaTTTLO-covTai, equiv. to vl- 
xj/covTai at ver. 3. Lu. xi. 38, kdavfiaaev 

OTL ov irpODTOV EfSaTTTiadj^ Trpo TOO 

dpicTTov. Sept. and Apocr. — II. to bap- 
tize, administer the rite of baptism, either 
that of John, or of Christ ; and in pass, and 
mid. to be baptized, or cause oneself to be 
baptized, i. e. gener. to receive baptism; 
which in the primitive churches was, ac- 
cording to Oriental habits, usually, though 
not necessarily, performed by immersion. 
— I. prop, and 1) simply. Matt. iii. 6, 13^ 
14, 16. Mk. i. 4, 5, & oft. ; then with a 
dative of instrument or material employed, 
v^aTL, ' with water,' as Mk. and John, kv 
v^uTL, or £i§ and accus. Mk. i. 9. Joseph. 
Ant. iv. 4, 6. 2) with adjuncts marking 
the object and effect, chiefly fk with acc. 
of thing, ' unto any thing,' i. e, unto the 



BAH 5 

belief, profession, or observance of any 
thing, Matt. iii. 11, /3. £ts fxeTcivoLau. 
Acts ii. 38, £is a.(pe(riv afxapTLU)v. xix. 3. 
1 Cor. xii. 13, £i§ ev acofxa^ ' that Me 
7nay become one body.' So with eh and 
an acc. of person, to baptize, or be bap- 
tized into, i. e. a profession of faith in 
any one, and obedience to him, Rom. vi. 3. 
Gal. iii, 27, £is Xpjo-To'i/. 1 Cor. x. 2, tis 

TOV MwuCTT/i/. So €£9 TO OUO/ULCC TIZ/OS, ' intO 

or unto the name of any one,' in the same 
sense. Matt, xxviii. 19. Acts viii. 16. xix. 
5. 1 Cor. i. 13, 15 ; also £7ri or h tco 6v6- 
luanri Tii/a§, Acts ii. 38 ; yvith utteo, 1 Cor. 
XV. 29, OL (^utttlX^o/jlevol vtt&p tcou vs- 
Kpwv, ' baptized on account of the dead,' 
i. e. a belief of the resurrection of the 
dead. See more in my note in loc. — ii. 
metaph. and 1) in direct allusion to the 
sacred rite, ^airTLX^ziv iv TLvEvfxaTt, ay loo 
KOL TTvpi, Matt. iii. 11. Lu. iii. 16, to 
overiL'helm (richly furnish) icitli all spi- 
ritual gifts, or Avith eu nuEu/xaTL alone, 
Mk. i. 8. John i. 33. Acts i. 5. xi. 16. 
2) gener. and by indirect allusion to the 
rite, to baptize with calamities, i. e. to 
overiclielm ivilh sufferings. Matt. xx. 22, 
sq. Mk. X. 38, sq. to ^anzrifrfxa, o Eyob 
^aTTTL'^o/j.aL, ^aTTTiadfjuai, Lu. xii. 50. 
Comp. Is. xxi. 4, rj duojULLa jne (SaTrTiX^sL. 
Joseph. Bell. iv. 3, 3, ol dij vaTEpov e^d- 
TTTLadu TTiv ttoXlv, *■ filled the city with 
calamity,' Plut. de Educ. xiii. 3, ij/vxv 

TOtS /iXEU (TVfXfxkTpOL^ aV^ETUL TTOVOL?, 
TOi§ ^£ VTTEpjBdXXovaLV /SaTTTl^STOti. 

Heliod. iEth. ii. 3, Trj crv/unpopa ^EfBair- 
TLcrfxii'ov. Perhaps, however, in those pas- 
sages, adduced by the Commentators and 
Lexicographers, the sense may be utterly 
ruined, like a sunken ship, by a nautical 
allusion, for (SaTTTi'^Eiv aKacpo^ or vavu, 
' to sink a vessel,' a use of the word fre- 
quent in the best writers. With the nau- 
tical figure comp. the noble allegory in 
Hor. Carm. i. 14, ' O navis,' &c. 

BaTTTtcr/ia, aTO?, to, (jSaTTTi'^w,) 
I. prop, something immersed in liquid, 
and thereby washed. In N. T. the rite 
of baptism, whether that of John or of 
Jesus Christ. — II. metaph. baptism into 
calamity, a being plunged into and over- 
whelmed by aflSictions, Matt. xx. 22, sq. 
Mk. X. 38, sq. Lu. xii. 50. See on j8a- 

TTTi^W, II. 2. 

Ba7rTt(r/xo9, ov, 6, {(SairTiX^vo,) the 
act of washing, or ablution, of vessels, &c. 
Mk. vii. 4, 8. Heb. ix. 10. Comp. Lev. xi. 
32. 2) spec, and metaph. a religious rite, 
which directs immersion into, or washing 
with, water, as the symbol of spiritual 
ablution and purification, 1) as applied 
to John's baptism, Joseph. Ant. xviii, 5, 2. 
2) to the Christian rite, Heb. vi. 2. 

BaTTTlO-TJ/S, ov, O, (/SaTTTt^fO,) lit. 



.7 BAP 

a baptizcr. Hence o BaTTT. used as a 
cognomen of Jolm the Baptist, the fore- 
runner of Christ, Matt. iii. 1. xi. 11, 
oft., also Joseph. Ant. xviii. 5, 2. 

BccTTTO), f. \ifoii, to dip or immerse, 
trans. 1) prop. foil, by Eh and accus. 
John xiii. 26, /3. to xJ/wiullov scil. Eh to 
Tpv^Xiov, expressed in Levit. iv. 6. xiv. 
6. Num. xix. 18, though the more Class, 
constr. is kv tivl. The gen. without prep, 
occurs in Lu. xvi. 24, 'Lva (3d\!/rj to 
uKpov TOV daKTvXiov uoaTOS. Comp. 
II. vi. 508, XovEcrdai TTOTUjULoTo, though in 
Luke the use of the gen. is rather partitive. 
2) by impl. to tinge ov dye, with dat. of 
means. Rev. xix. 13, (^E^apifxivov aifiaTL. 
The sense and constr. alike Classical. 

BdpfSapo^, ov, 6, a barbarian, denot- 
ing, according to ancient usage, simply a 
foreigner, ' one who speaks another lan- 
guage ;' with, however, two modifications, 
suggested by the context, 1) one tcho 
uses a language different from some other 
in question, 1 Cor. xiv. 11. Sept. 2 Mace, 
ii. 21. Hdot. ii. 158, (3apl3dpov9 itavTa^s oi 

AiyviTTLOL KaXEOVaL TOV'S pLYj (T(pLCn opLO- 

yX(joa<Tov^, et al. Class. 2) one ivho does 
not speak G-reek, not, at least, as the 
natives. Acts xxviii. 2, 4, of the inhabitants 
of Malta, who spoke a dialect of the Phoe- 
nician. (See, however, my note there.) 
Rom. i. 14:," EXXi]a-L te kuI ^ap(3dp0L^, 
'non-Greeks.' Joseph. Ant. iv. 2, 1. B. v. 
1, 3. Joseph. Bell, prooem. 5, "EA.X?jcrt 
Kai (3up(3dpoL^, meaning by (3ap(3. all the 
nations of the Roman empire who did not 
speak Greek, as the Jews, Romans, Span- 
iards, Gauls, &c. 

Bap £60, f. rjarco, {(3dpo9,) equiv. to 
jSapvvio, to load ; pass, ^apiofxai, to be 
loaded, oppressed with. So Lu. ix. 32, 
/3. vTcviti, and Matt. xxvi. 43. Mk. xiv. 
40, and Class. ; also metaph. Lu. x:ii. 34, 
fxr]'rroTE (Sapt]du)crLv al KapSiuL vuwv, be 
oppressed, ' become dull and stupid.' Comp. 
Hom. Od, xix. 122, otvio ^E^api]6Ta. 
Also, to be iveighed or borne down, as by 
evils, as grief, calamities, 2 Cor. i. 8. v. 4, 
and Class. ; to be burdened, by expense, 
1 Tim. V. 16, ^apELcrdci) rj EKKXyjaia. 

B a p £ 60 §, adv. ( jSapus, ) prop, heavily^ 
and by impl. ivith difficidty. Matt. xiii. 15. 

Bap OS, £o§, TO, iveight, both prop, and 
metaph. In N. T. occ. only in the latter 
sense. I. iceight, in reference to its pres- 
sure, as a burden, prop. Xen. CEcon. 
xvii. 9; metaph. Matt. xx. 12, ^aaTaX^Eiv 
TO l3dpo£ Tr}<s vfx. ^ the heavy labour of 
the day ;' said of precepts, the observance 
of which is burdensome, Acts xv. 28. Rev. 
ii. 24. Plato p. 971, vo/mcov /3. Said of sin, 
in reference to its consequences in this 
world, both to ourselves and others, and 
in the next, sorrow, trouble, GaL vi. 2, 
D 5 



BAP 



58 



B A2 



dWvXwv TCI (Sclpi) (3. ; in a pecuniary 
sense, I Thess. ii. 6, iu ^dpsL elvai^ 'to 
be burdensome.'' — IL tceir/ht, in reference 
to its cause, greatness^ abundance^ 2 Cor. 
iv. 17, auhvLov (3dpo^ oo^r^s, for (3upo9 
aioovLov d. 

Bapuj/60, f. fyto, [(3apv?,) in N. T. 
only aor. 1. pass. el3apvvQi]v, to be heavy ^ 
Lu. xxi. 34, in text. rec. -svhere lat. Edd. 
(Bapi]6u)G-L. 

Bapu9, Eia, v, adj. {(3dpo<5^) lieavy^ I. 
prop. Matt, xxiii. 4, (pooTia (3.; also metaph. 
of burdejisome precepts. So Ps. xxxviii. 
5, and of a yoke, 2 Cliron. x. 4, 11. 
Eccliis. xl. 1. — II. fig. iceighty^ i. e. im- 
portant, Matt, xxiii. 23, nra ^apvTspa tov 
v6/uLov. Acts XXV. 7, cuTLw/jiaTa (3. severe. 
Sept. & Class. ; said of an epistle, weighty., 
and ' not to be made light of,' 2 Cor. x. 

10. — III. metaph. of things, grievous., op- 
pressive ; of precepts, 1 John v. 3. Wisd. 

11. 15. Ecclus. xxix. 28 ; of persons, af- 
flictive., violent., Acts xx. 29, Xvkol (BapsT^. 

Comp. 3 Mace. vi. 5, 6 (Sapii^ AaraupLcov 
(3aariKEV^. 

Bap u-T-I/io?, ou, 6, ?7, f^dj. 
Ti^ujj,) of great price., liigldy precious., Matt, 
xxvi. 7; so iEsch. Siippi. 25, et al. ap. 
Class. The more usual term is 7ro\vTLfxo<s. 

Bacraf/i^co, f. tcrco, {(Bd(javo<s^) 1) prop. 
to apply fite (Bdcrauo^ or touch-stone ; 2) 
metaph. to examine., either by words, or by 
torture, into the truth of certain alleged 
facts. So Thuc. and others of the best 
writers. Hence in N. T. to torment., af- 
flict ivith pain., I. said prop, of disease, 
Matt. viii. 6, oslvu)? ^aa-avLX^ofMSVcs., Rev. 
ix. 5. Sept. ; of the pains of parturition, 
Rev. xii. 2. Sept. ; of punishment, Matt, 
viii. 29. Mk. v. 7. Lu. viii. 28. Rev. xi. 
10. Sept., Joseph. Ant. ii. 14, 4.— II. fig. 
to harass or oppress., whether physically 
with toil, Mk. vi. 48, (3acrauLX^o/uLivov9 kv 
TOO eXavveiv, or morally, 2 Pet. ii. 8, (3. 
xj/vxv^ CLKaiav ; also fig. of a vessel tossed 
by the waves. Matt. xiv. 24. So in Polyb. 
i. 48, a stormy wind is said irvnyov^ /3a- 
cravL^ELv. 

cr av L<r /JLO'S., ov., o, (/3acrai't^a;,) 
prop, examination., namely, by touch-stone, 
torture. In N. T. torment.. Rev. xiv. 11, 
Ka-nuo's TOV ^acravicrfxov avTcou., ' the 
smoke [of the fire] in which they are tor- 
mented,' Rev. ix. 5. xviii. 7, 10, 15. 
4 Mace. ix. 6. 

Ba<rayi<7Tij e, ou, o, (/^acai/i^w,) 
prop. 07ie icho applies the toHure ; but as 
jailors were occasionally permitted to use 
the torture to their prisoners, so the term 
was sometimes used simply for jailor. So 
Matt, xviii. 34. Thus (SaaavLaTiipLOv., 
Jer. XX. 2, Symm. in the sense 'jail,' and 
the Latin ' cruciatus corporis' is sometimes 
used of a prison. 



B a o- a 1/0 9, ou, 77, prop, a touch-stone., 
the ancient lapis Lydius for trying metals, 
by rubbing them upon it. Comp. Pind. 
Pyth. X. 106. Hence it came to mean 
examination., or trial gener., and also spec, 
that by torture ; also, torment or pain., 
whether from disease, Matt. iv. 24. Ezek. 

xii. 18, and Class. ; or punishment, Lu. 
xvi. 23, 28. So Jambl. de Vit. Pyth. c. xvi, 

l^acr iX&La., a?, 77, (/SacriXsus,) king- 
dom., in various applications and modifica- 
tions, I. kingship., the exercise of kingly 
dominion. Matt. vi. 13. Lu. i. 33. xix. 12, 

15. Heb. i. 8, &c. and Sept. and Class 

II. kingdom., meaning a land and people 
under kingly rule, Matt. iv. 8. Mk. vi. 23. 
Lu. iv. 5, & oft. and also Sept. and Class. 
— III. in the phrase ry (BuaiXaLa tov Geou, 
or TOV Xptfj-Tou, or tcou ovpavwv., and 
simply 7] (Bao-iXeLa^ Matt. viii. 12. ix. 35, et 
al. ; all of them synonymous expressions, 
and denoting the divine spiritual king- 
dom and glorious reign of the Messiah ; 
an idea formed on the phrases of the O. T. 
which were to be understood spiritually, 
though by the Jews at large understood 
temporally. Accordingly, we may regard 
the expression kvigdom of heaven., &c. 
in the N. T. as designating, in its Evan- 
gelical sense, the Christian Dispensation., 
or the community of those who receive 
Jesus as the Messiah, and who, united by 
his Spirit, under Him as their Head, lead 
a holy life, in communion with Him, and 
love unto their brethren. This spiritual 
kingdom has both an internal and an ex- 
ternal form. As internal, it already exists 
in the hearts of all true Christians, and is 
therefore present. As external, it is either 
embodied in the visible Church of Christ, 
and, so far, is present and progressive, or 
it is to be perfected at the advent of the 
Messiah. Sometimes, however, the ex- 
pression embraces both the internal and 
external sense, referring alike to the com- 
mencement of this kingdom in this world, 
and its completion in the world to come. 
Hence in N. T. it is employed, I. in the 
Jeivish temporal sense., Matt, xviii. 1 . xx. 
21. Lu. xvii. 20. xix. 11. Acts i. 6.— IL 
in the Evangelical seme, as that announced 
by Jesus Christ and the Apostles, Matt, 
iv. 17, 23. ix. 35. x. 7, et al. oft. In the 
internal and spiritual sense. Rom. xiv. 17. 
Matt. vi. 33. Mk. x. 15. Lu. xvii. 21. 
xviii. 17. John iii. 3, 5. In the external 
sense. Matt. vi. 10. xii. 28. xiii. 24, 31, 
33, 41, 47. xvi. 28. Mk. iv. 30. xi. 10. Lu. 

xiii. 18, 20, & oft. In this view, it denotes 
espec. tJie bliss of heaven., to be enjoyed in 
the Redeemer's kingdom, equiv. to eternal 
life. Matt. viii. 11. xxv. 34. Thus it is 
said gener. of the privileges and reivards 
of the heavenly kingdom, both here and 



B A S 



59 



BAT 



hereafter, Matt. v. 3, 10, 20. vii. 21. xviii. 
3. Col. i. 13. 1 Til. ii. 12. 

Bao-tXaios, ou, 6, ?/, adj. (/3a(ri\£us,) 
regal^ roi/al^ not inifrequent in the Class, 
writers with substantives, denoting what 
belongs to royalty. In N. T. it occurs 
only in 1 Pet. ii. 9, (3. lepaTEu^a. As a 
substantive, to (BaaiXsLov^ sub. ocojua, ' a 
royal palace,' Lu. vii. 25. Sept. & Class, oft. 

Bao-tXsus, 6, a king^ one who 

exercises royal dominion, but with some 
modification of sense according to the con- 
text. I. prop, and gener. of kings in the 
widest sense. Matt. i. 6. Acts xiii. 22. vii. 
10, 18. Heb. xi. 23, 27. John xix. 15. 
Ln. X. 24, and oft. in Class. Also said of 
t\\Q Messiah^ as King of Israel, Matt. ii. 2. 
xxi. 5. XXV. 34, 40. Lu. xix. 38. John i. 
50. xii. 13, 15, et al. also in Sept. Said 
of God^ Matt. V. 35, it6\l<5 tov fXEydXov 
/3ao-tA.£a)§, ' the King supreme.'' Comp. 
1 Tim. vi. 15, and Rev. xvii. 14, ' King 
of kings, and Lord of lords,' i. e. King and 
Sovereign supreme. See also 1 Tim. i. 17. 
Rev. XV. 3. — II. in a more extended, and 
^.consequently lower, sense, viceroy or 
^ prince^ as said of Herod and his successors ; 
also prince or chieftain^ as Aretas, king of 
Arabia Petrsea, 2 Cor. xi. 32 ; also when 
joined with iiyefxovE^. Matt. x. 18. Mk. 
xiii. 9., Lu. xxi. 12. Acts iv. 26. Gener. 
IPet. ii. 13, 17. 1 Tim. ii. 2. Matt. xvii. 25. 

xviii. 23. Acts ix. 15. Rev. ix. 11, & Class. 
Ba<ri\£ua), f. guo-o), (jSacrtXei/?,) to 

rule as a king^ intrans. I. gener. and foil, 
by £7rt with genit. of country, or accus. of 
person, to reign over^ Matt. ii. 22, Lu. xix. 
14^,27. 1 Tim. vi. 15, 6 /jacriA.£ucoi/. Sept. 
and Class. Said of Messiah^ Lu. i. 33. 
1 Cor. XV. 25. Rev. xi. 15. — II. absol. and 
prop, to reign, i.. e. ' to possess and exer- 
cise dominion ;' said of God, Rev. xi. 17. 

xix. 6. Sept. ; or figur. of Christia?is, 
who are to reign with Christ in heaven, 
i. e. ' to partake in the honour and felicity 
of the Messiah's kingdom,' Rom. v. 17. 
Rev. V, 10. XX. 4, 6. xxii. 5, or on earth, 
'to enjoy the prosperity of kings,' 1 Cor. 
iv. 8. Comp. Hor. Epist. i. 10, 8, ' vivo 
et regno.' Metaph. to have dominion, hold 
prevalence over, as said of death, Rom. v. 
14, 17 ; of sin and grace, v. 21. vi. 12, 

Ba<riXt/c6s, ?/, oi/, adj. [(SacnXevg,) 
regal, royal, 1) prop, belonging to a king. 
Acts xi'i. 20, 21. Sept. and Class. 
Used subst. with av^p underst. of a re- 
tainer of a court, a courtier or nobleman, 
John iv. 46, 49. Jos. Ant. xvii. 10, 3. 
Pol. iv. 76, 2. — II. fig. noble, i. e. excel- 
lent, Ja, ii. 8, vofxo'i (3, And so later Class. 

Baa- l\ Lara- a, 7]§, i], {(3aaL\ev9,) later 
Gr. for ^aaiXh, a queen. Matt. xii. 42. 
Lu. xi. 31. Acts viii. 27. Rev. xviii. 7. 
Sept. and Class. 



Bao-ts, £C()9, T], {(SuLuo),) 1) tlic act of 
2valki?ig ; 2) the effect thereof in the step 
taken. 3) the part whereon we go in 
taking it, the foot. Acts iii. 7. Jos. Ant. 
vii. 3, 5, & 11, 3, and elsewhere in later 
Greek writers. 

Baa-KaLuu), f. auco, {ftdarKU), equiv. to 
(Sd'^co,) prop. & lit. to babble respecting any 
one, intrans. and by impl. (see Prov. x, 
19) to slander, trans. Plut. Pericl. 12; 
also, as we vulgarly say, '' to talk any one 
over,' cast a spell on his judgment, and 
mislead it, as it were, by fascination or 
witchcraft, Gal. iii. 1, ti's vfxd<s k^daKava ; 
In the literal sense, of fascinating and be- 
witching, it occurs not unfreq. in the later 
Greek writers, and hence the Latin /as- 
cino. There is an allusion to the mutter- 
wz^and frequent repetition of certain fonns 
of incantation. So Milton : ' And back- 
ward mutters of dissevering power.' 

BaoTT-a^co, i.dau3, I. to TAKE or lift 
UP ; also by impl. to bear, carry, \) to 
take up and hold in the hands, trans. John 
X. 31, k(3d(TTaX,ov Xidov?. Jos. Ant. vii. 11, 
7, (B. Tr]v fxd^aipav aTto tij^ y^v : to take 
up any one from the ground, and carry 
him. Acts xxi. 35. So to take up and bear 
off, i. e. to take or remove away, John xx. 
15. Jos. and Polyb. ; also fig. to take upon 
oneself and bear. Matt. viii. 17, jS. Ta? 
v6(yov<^. — II. to BEAR or CARRY in the 
hands, as any article of dress or furniture. 
Matt. iii. 11. Mk. xiv. 13. Lu. xxii. 10 ; 
or on the shoulders, as tov aTavpov, Lu. 
vii. 14, & oft. al. Fig. Acts ix. 15, cr/csuos 
TOV (3aarTda-aL to ovofxd fiov kvuiirLOu 
kdvoov, ' to carry forth and make known.' 
In the sense to bear up, support, Rom. xi. 
18, ou cru Ti]u piX^au /3aorTa^£i§ : also 
metaph. to bear up under labours, &c. 
Matt. XX. 12, and gener. ' to bear or en- 
dure suff'erings,' Rev. ii. 3, or punish- 
ments, Gal. V. 10, and Sept. So ' to bear 
patiently,' Rom. xv. 1. Gal. vi. 2. Rev, 
ii. 2, and later Class, Metaph. 'to bear 
up imder with the mind,' to understand, 
Johnx\d. 12, TToXXa — oh ovuaads (SaarTa- 
'C^Eii' dpTi. Arrian Epict. iii. 15 ; to bear or 
carry about, as attached to one's person. 
Gal. vi. 17, /3. (TTtyixaTa kv t<Z a-cofxaTi., 
where see my note. Ps. Ixxxix. 51. Lu. 
xi. 27, KoiXia t] (SaaTacraad as. Lu. x. 
4, iJL)] /3aorTa^£T£ (SaXduTtou, Class, cpo- 
pico, and perhaps John xii. 6, tu (SaXXo- 
fxcua k(3daTa'^ev, or similarly as 'ferre' in 
Lat. for ' auferre,' embezzled : a sense 
arising from that of taking off or away, 
found at John xx. 15. Diog. Laert. iv. 59, 
where Menag. quotes Lucil, ap. Anthol. 
Gr. ii. /3. ah /cXetttccs. 

BaTo?, ov, 77, « thorn-bush or bramble, 
Lu. vi. 44. XX. 37. Acts vii. 30, 35. Sept. 
and Class. 

D 6 



BAT 



60 



B H P 



Baros, ou, 6, a hatli. A Jewish mea- 
sure of liquids, equal to the ephah for dry 
measure, Lu. x^-i. 6. It is = 8 or 9 gallons, 
though some recent estimates extend it to 
11. 

Barpaxo?, ow, o, « fi^g-, Rev. xvi. 
13. Sept. and Class. 

B a T T o A. a 7 £ a;, f. tkjUj^ prop, stam- 
mer^ then (^0 babble or prate; hence in 
N. T. /o 2^56 needless icotrls^ espec. by vain 
repetitions, intrans. Matt. vi. 7. Comp. 
Ecclus. vii. 14. Simplic. in Epict. p. 212, 
Trepi KadtiKovToov ck (S. 

iXvy iJia^ aros, to, {3dE\va-(Tco,) 
prop. a?i7/ thing ahominated^ an abominable 
action. I. gener. Lu. xvi. 15, /3(5. kvo^tviov 
Tov Geoy, opp. to to kv avdpcoTroi^ v\l/t]- 
\6u. So Sept. in Prov. xi. 1 . Deut. xxiv. 
4, et al. — II. spec, said of what was U7i- 
clean in the Jewish acceptation, esp. idol- 
icorsliip : hence idolairy and its constant 
concomitant, licentioKsness of morals. And 
as idolatry was one of the foulest sins, the 
term was used to denote any great sin, as 
Kev. xvii. 4, 5. xxi.27, and oft. in Sept. 
On the same principle we may explain 
the phrase to ^di\vy fxa ttJs epiiawcrsu)?., 
Matt, xxiv, 15, taken from Dan. ix. 27, 
which denotes prop, an abomination causing 
desolation, and is applied by Christ to what 
was to take place at the destruction of 
Jerusalem by the Romans, (comp. Lu» 
xxi. 20, and see Jos. Ant. x. 11, 7,) and is 
prob. to be referred to the pollution of the 
Temple by setting up idols. Comp. 2 Th. 
ii. 4. The phrase occurs also at 1 Mace, 
i. 54, where it refers to the like pollution 
of the Temple by Antiochus Epiphanes, 
who set up in it the statue of the Olympian 
Jove. 

B 0 eXuKTo ?, 77, 01/, adj. {(SdsXvaa-co,) 
abominable^ detestable, Tit. i. 16, & Sept, 

BSsXvcra to^f. ^co, (/3o£a), pedo,) prop. 
to emit a stencJi, and fig. by meton. to cause 
disgust. So Exod. v. 21, IjSoeXu^aTg tijv 
ocTfx^^v rjjjLwv^ ' ye have caused disgust to 
be felt at us.' And so Gen. xxxiv. 30, ' ye 
have made me to stink wh. Sept. fxian^rou 
fxs. TTETToiriKaTE. ]Mid. ^0i\v(rcT0fxaL, as 
trans, to feel disgust at. turn away from 
ivitli loatliing, as from a bad smell, Aris- 
toph. Plut. 700, ere, clul tout', £uOu5 £/3o£- 
XuTTgTo. So Rom. ii. 22, ^osXvu-cro- 
u.Evo's TO. sldwXa, though probably the 
sense is there ' to declare a thing detest- 
able,' as would appear from the words 6 
Xiycov iJLt} ixoL)(EvELv. The pass, occurs 
in Sept. and Rev. xxi. 8, £/3o£/\uy/u.£yoi5, 
' detestable, polluted with crimes.' 

B£/3ato9, ata, 01/, adj. (/3£/3cia, perf. 
ind. act.fr. jSatyw,) prop, stable, firm ; and 
fig. stecfast^ sure, as said of peace, good 
fortune, reputation, faith, friendship, &c. 



In N. T. said of hope, 2 Cor. i. 7. Heb. 
vi. 19; of promise, Rom. iv. 16; of the 
Mosaic law, Heb. ii. 2 ; of a covenant, ix. 
17: of confidence, iii. 6. 

B £/3a t o' oj, f. ctxTco; (/3£j3atos,) to maJce 
sure, assure, confirm, as said, 1) of per- 
sons, 1 Cor. i. 8. 2 Cor. i. 21. Col. ii. 7. 
Heb. xiii. 9. 2) of things, to establish., 
ratify, bv arguments, proofs, &c. Mk. xvi, 
20. RoDQ. XV. 8. 1 Cor. i. 6. Heb. ii. 3. 
Joseph, and Class. 

B £ /3 a i w cri s, £6i)S, 77, {(3E(3ai6(jt),) con- 
firmation, lit. maliing sure, Phil. i. 7. Heb. 

vi. 16. Thuc. iv. 87. 

B£/37;\os, ou, 6, i], adj. (/^tjXos, fr. 
(Sacvcjo, or rather /3?)\6§, fr. [3il3yiXo^, Dor. 
l3ij3aXo?, fr. fSEjSaa,) I. prop, said of 
places, 'what is gone upon by all,' ac- 
cessible to all, Soph. GEd. Col. 10 ; hence, 
met. connnon or profane, opp. to hoh\ 
Thuc. iv. 97, et Sept. Hence said in 1 Tim. 
iv. 7. vi. 20. 2 Tim. ii. 16, of disputes, zf/e- 
' lioly, — II. of persons, profane, impious, 1 
Tim. i. 9. Heb. xii. 16. Ez. xxi. 25. 
3 Mace. ii. 14. 

B £/3);\oa), f. Mcru), {^i^i]Xo^,) to pro- 
fane, trans. Matt. xii. 5. Acts xxi.T. 6. 
Sept. and later Class. 

B££X^£|3ou\, 6, inde<:l. Beelzehd, the 
prince of the evil a.ngels, eq. to Satan, Matt. 
X. 25. xii. 24, 27. Mk. iii. 22. Lu. xi. 15, 
18, 19. 

BfiXtaX, or -ap, fr. Heb. Belial, tcicJc- 
edness, used as an appellative of Satan, 
2 Cor. vi. 15. 

BeXovv,, t]<s, 7), prop^ f/^e 7:>ozW of an 
arrow, or dart, but gener. and in N. T. a 
needle, Lu. x™. 25, in some MSS. for 
the textual pacpU. 

B£\o9, £0§, TO, {(Si(3oXa, fr. (SaXXco,) 
lit. and prop, something hurled ((3aXX6,as- 
vov) either by the hand, or by a bow, e. gr. 
a dart, arrow, or javelin ; fig. in Eph. vi. 
16, Tol? /SfiXcCi 7r£7rupwjU£i/ots. Compi. 
Apoll. Bibl. ii. 4, Trupcpopa /SeXij. 

B eXtlwi/, ovo^, compar. of ayaQo^. 
The neut. occ. in an adverbial sense, 2 
Tim. i. 18, jS. yti/wa/CEis. 

Briixa, aT05, to, [^i^i]fxaL,i'C. (Baha},) 
a step, 1) a pace, or step, of the foot, Acts 

vii. 5, ou'oE (3. TTooos, ' not a foot-breadth,'" 
Deut. ii. 5, and Class. 2) by impl. an 
elevated place, to which there is ascent by 
steps, as a pulpit for a speaker, or an ele- 
vated seat, like a throne, on which kings 
or supreme magistrates sat. Acts xii. 21, 
KaQiaai ettI tov (SvjmaTO^. So Joseph. 
Ant. vii, 15, 9, o-Tds i^' v\!/TiXoTaTou 
(37]/xaT09 : more usually, however, of the 
seat for judgment of a magistrate or judge, 
Matt, xxvii. 19. John xix. 13, et al. and 
Class. 

BtjouXXos, ov, o, ?7, herj/l j a precious 



BI A 



6 



1 



BAA 



stone of a sea-green colour, Rev. xxi. 20. 
Sept. and Jos. 

Bia, as, ?/, prop, strength of hody ; but 
gener. there is implied an unjust and vio- 
lent exercise of it, i. c. /orcc% violence^ com- 
pulsion, &c. Acts V. '26. xxi. 35. xxiv. 
7. xxvii. 41. Sept., Jos., and Class. 

Bitt^to, f. ao-w, (jSm,) to compel^ or 
strongly ui-ge, Ilom. Od. xii. 297. In N. 
T. only ^LoC^ofxaL as dep. mid. to use force^ 
to force^ and pass, to he forced., to sicffer 
violence, I. mid. to force oneself force 
o?ie^s icay ; fig. Lu. xvi. 16, gts avTi)v 
)8ta^£Tai, ' uses violence to enter into it, 
presses violently and eagerly into it.' So 
prop. Philo, p. 618, «is to. bvto^ ^id'^ETai. 
Thuc. vii. 69, j3. es to e^w j8ta<racr0at, 
and fig. Xen. Cyr. iii. 3, 69, j3. al? n-i]u 
apX^y. — II. pass, and fig. Matt. xi. 12, 77 
(BaaLXEia tcov oupavcou jSm^sTai, ' su fibers 
force,' i. e. 'is eagerly sought and forcibly 
snatched at,' vi et impetu eaiorquetur.^ 
(Siaico^ KpaTELTUL. Prop. Thuc.i. 77, ddi- 
KovjULEVOL OL audpcoTTOL ndWoi/ opyiX^ov- 
TUL rj (3LaX^6juLEV0L. Xen. Hist. v. 2, 23, 
TToXtis Tas ^E^LacrfXEva<5, 

Bi'ttios, m, oi/, adj. {(Sia.,) violent., ve- 
hement^ said of a wind. Acts ii. 2. And so 
Exod. xiv. 21, h dvi/au) (3. Arrian, E. 
A. ii. 63, ETTLyiuETaL TTVEvixa ^Laiov. 
Philo, jSiam irvEvixaTa. 

BLa<TTi)9., ou, d, (iSi'a,) prop. 0726 who 
uses violence in efi^ecting his purpose ; fig. 
one ivho forcibly presses forward., through 
vehement desire of any thing, and pursues 
it eagerly. Not found in Class, (who use 
/3tato9,) but occ. in Philo, p. 314 ; also, in 
a fig. sense, as applied to the headstrong 
passions. Matt. xi. 12. 

BifSXapidLov^ ou, to, (dim. fr. (3l- 
/3\os,) a small roll or scroll., a little hook., 
Rev. x. 2, 8, 9, 10. Pollux On. vii. 110. 

Bt/3\toi;, ou, TO, (dim. in form, but 
not in force, of /3i'/3\o9,) a roll or scroll., 
such being the form of the books of anti- 
quity, Lu. iv. 17, 20. John xx. 30. xxi. 
25, et saepe al. Said of letters, which 
were also rolled up^ Rev. i. 11. 2 Tim. iv. 
13. 2 Sam. xi. 14 : or other written docu- 
ments, e. gr. a Jewish bill of divorce, 
Matt. xix. 7. Mk. x. 4. 

Bi/3\os, ou, 77, prop, the inner rind, or 
bark, and part of the stalk of the Egyptian 
papyi'us, of which the paper of the ancients 
was made, Hdot. ii. 38. Joseph. Ant. ii. 
10, 2, but gener. and in N. T. a roll or 
volume, a hook in the ancient roll-like 
form, Mk. xii. 26. Lu. iii. 4. xx. 42. 
Acts i. 20. vii. 42. xix. 19, et Sept. Also 
said of a genealogical table or catalogue 
occupying a roll. Matt. i. 1. Remarkable 
is the phrase 7; /3<^Xos T77S ^wt/s, eq. to 
/3t/3\o§ X^uovTiov., Ps. Ixix. 29, where GoA 
is fig. represented as having the names of 



the righteous, who are to inherit eternal 
life, inscribed in a book, Pliil. iv. 3. Rev. 
iii. 5. xiii. 8. xx. 15. Different from 
this is the book in which God is repre- 
sented as having from eternity written 
the destinies of men, Ps. cxxxix. 6 ; and 
also the books (tcc (3ij3\ia) of judgment, 
in which are recorded the actions of men, 
Rev. XX. 12. 

B t /3 10 o) o- /<• oj, f. jSpcoo-o), to eat., John vi. 
13. Sept. and Class. 

Bi'o9, ou, d, life., I. the present scene 
of existence, Lu. viii. 14. 1 Tim. ii. 2. 
2 Tim. ii. 4. 1 Pet. iv. 3. Sept. & Class. 
— II. by meton. the means of life, i. e. of 
obtaining sustenance, Mk. xii. 44. Lu. viii. 
43. XV. 12, 30. xxi. 4. Sept. and Class. ; 
also things necessary to furnish that suste- 
nance, joo^^smzwz^, property, 1 John ii. 16. 
iii. 17. Hdot. i. 31. 

Bio'to, f. COCO), (/3/09,) to live., to joass 
one's life., 1 Pet. iv. 2, (BicoaaL xpoi'ov., ' to 
pass the time of one's life.' So Job xxix, 
18, 7ro\vL> y^povov ^icoauy. 

Bi'(«o-ts, £605, ^, ((3 LOO),) life, i. e. mode 
of life. Acts xxvi. 4. Prol. to Ecclus. diet 

T77S EVPOfXOV (3Ld)(TE(Jt}^. * 

BiojT I /COS, 7/, ov, adj. (/3i60(ris,) per- 
taining to this life, Lu. xxi. 34, iuL7i7roTS 
(SapvvdcocTLV VjULcov ai Kapdiai kv /UL£piiuvaL9 
{3. So Diod. S. ii. 29, Trgpio-Trao-Osis utto 
fS. xp£i'as. Pol. iv. 73, 8, xp£i'«5 j3, 1 CoF. 
vi. 3, jSKjoTLKu, 'things of this life' only, 
Plut. viii. 704, iXacppol toTs ^. 1 Cor, 
vi. 4, /3. KpLTvpLu, So Polyb. xiii. 1, 3, (3. 
a-vfaWdy fiuTa. 

BXajSHpds, a, df, adj. (/3\a7rT(i»,) zVz- 
jurious, 1 Tim. vi. 9. Sept. and Class. 

BXaTTToj, f. xUco, prop, to hinder a 
thing's being done ; also, to impede the 
agent for the action, Hom. Od. xiii. 22; 
but gener. to hurt or injure, Mk. xvi. 18. 
Lu. iv. 35, and Class. 

BXacTTai'w, f. vera), (jSXacTos, a 
germ,) to germinate, to p>id forth, intrans. 
and trans. I. intrans. to shoot or sprout 
forth, spring up as a plant, Matt. xiii. 26. 
Mk. iv. 27. Heb. ix. 4. Sept. and Class. 
— II. trans, to cause to spring up, to pro- 
duce, or yield, as said of the earth, Ja. v. 
18. Gen. i. 11. Num. xvii. 8. Apocr. 
Philo, and .^sch. 

B\a cr 077 jueo), f. 7j<Tft), {(3Xd<T(f)iiiuL09,) 
prop, and gener. said both of men and 
things, to speak evil of, espec. respecting 
the Deity, or to speak what is of evil 
omen. In N. T. said 1. gener. of both 
persons and things, to speak evil of, slander., 
defame, either absol. as Acts xiii. 45. 
xviii. 6. 1 Tim. i. 20. 1 Pet. iv. 4. Apocr. 
and Class, or with acc. of person or thing ; 
trans. Acts xix. 37. Tit. iii. 2. Ja. ii. 7. 



BAA 



62 



Boe 



2 Pet. ii. 10. Jiid. 8, 10 ; pass. Rom. iii. 

8. xiv. 16. 1 Cor. iv. 13. x. 30. 2 Pet. 
ii. 2. Sept. and Class. — II. spec, as said of 
God and the Holy Spirit, or of Divine 
tilings revealed thereby, to revile^ set at 
nougld^ foil, either by aeons. Rom. ii. 24. 
Tit. ii. 5. 1 Pet. iv. 14. Rev. xiii. 6. xvi. 
9 ; of a heathen god, Acts xix. 37. Sept. : 
or by £t§ with acc. Mk. iii. 29. Lu. xii. 10. 
Apocr., Jos., and Class. Absol. Matt. ix. 3. 
xxvi. 65. John x. 36. 

B/\.ao-0 TjjU ia, as, j7, {(3\a(T<pinuL0<s^) 
evil speahing. I. gener. as said of men, 
and sometimes of things, slander^ remlinq^ 
Matt. xii. 31. xv. 19. Mk. iii. 28. vii. 22. 
Eph. iv. 31. Col, iii. 8. 1 Tim.vi.4. Rev. 
ii. 9. Sept., Joseph., and later Class. — II. 
SPEC, said of God and his Spirit, or of divine 
things, reviling^ or at least irreverence and 
contumely^ Lu. v. 21. John x. 33. Rev. 
xiii. 5, 6. 

(p7]jULi]^) I. as ADJ. blasjoliemous^ of words 
uttered 1) against God and divine things, 
Acts vi. 11, 13; or, 2) against man, 
slanderous^ or contumelious^ 2 Pet. ii. 11, 
and later Gr. writers. — II. as subst. a 
hlasphemer^ 1) in respect of God, 1 Tim. 
i. 13. Wisd. i. 6. Ecclus. iii. 16. 2) 
as regards men, a slanderer^ or reviler, 2 
Tim. iii. 2. 2 Mace. x. 36. 

B\£|U/xa, aTO§, TO, (jS/\fc7r£o,) prop, 
and gener. something seen ; also the aspect 
or sight of any person or thing. So 
Demosth. tw a-yjifxaTi^ tco ^XifxfxaTL^ 
Trj (pvovrj. So 2 Pet. ii. 8, ^XifxixaTi kul 
aKorj, ' at sight and report,' i. e. at what he 
saw and heard of their conduct. 

BXetto), f. li/o), prop, to 2^ossess and use 
the faculty of sights or to look at^ intrans. and 
trans. I. to see, gener. i. e. to be able to see, 
to have the faculty of sights and, as said of the 
blind, to recover sight, intrans. Matt. xii. 
22, ooa^rg Tov Tvcp\6u (SXIttelu. Acts ix. 

9, /mil (BXiTTcjov, blind. Rev. iii. 18. ix. 20. 
Sept. and Class. So to ^Xettelv as a 
subst. sight, the faculty of seeing, Lu, 
vii. 21 ; fig. .John ix. 39, 41, of mental and 
spiritual discernment. 2) spec, in the sense 
dispicere, to discern, descry, trans. Matt, 
vii. 3, and oft. al. Sept. and Class. Intrans. 
as absol. Matt. vi. 4, 6, 18. By impl. to 
have before the eyes, said of what is present, 
Rom. viii. 24, kKirU ^\£.Trofxivr\ ovk 

EdTLU sA-Tt/s' O (^XeTTEL Tf§, Tt Kal 

sXttl'^el ; So TO. jSXEiroiuLEva and to. 
iJLi) (SXett. 2 Cor. iv. 18. Heb. xi. 1, 3, 7. 
3) metaph. 'to perceive with the mind,' 
find, obse?'ve, Rom. vii. 23, ^Xiirw sTEpov 
vofxov kv ToZi fxiXECTL fjiou, Heb. x. 25, et 
al. Joseph. Ant. vi. 10, 2. — II. to look, 
j. e. cd or upon, behold, trans, and intrans. 
1) prop, as said chiefly of persons, either 
foil, by acc. Matt. v. 28, Tras 6 (SXettcou 



yvvalKa, and xviii. 10. Rev. v. 3, 4. Sept. 
and later Class.; or by el<s with acc. Acts 
iii. 4. John xiii. 22. Sept. and Class. Also \ 
of places, to look towards, be situate. Acts ! 
xxvii. 12, Xifxiva ttjs K()7jt7]§ (3Xt7roi'Ta i 
KuTo. AljSa. Sept. and Class. 2) metaph. ; 
to direct the intellectual sight upon, consi- 
der, reflect upon, mind, foil, by acc. 1 Cor. 
i. 26, (SXettete tiju kXTjctiv vfxcou, and x. 
18. Joseph. Ant. vi. 8, 1. Col. ii. 5. 
Phil. iii. 2, ^Xettete tou5 kvvu^, 'mind, 
keep an eye to;' foil, by £i§ with acc. 
Matt. xxii. 16, oh (SXettel^ his TrpoacoTrov 
avdpcoircou, 'heedest not.' Pol. xxxix. 2. 
10 ; foil, by Ti and ttcos, Mk. iv. 24. Lu. 
viii. 18. 1 Cor. iii. 10. Eph. v. 15 ; by iW, 
1 Cor. xvi. 10. Col. iv. 17. 2 John 8. 
Said by way of caution, in the imperative, 
(SXettete, ' look to it, take heed,' Mk. xiii. 
23, et al. 

B\7jT£os, a, ou, {(3aXXo),) a verbal adj. • 
implying wliat must or oztght to be done^ 
to be cast or j^^d out, Mk. ii. 22. Lu. v. 38. ! 

Bo act), f. ncno, {(3oi),) to cry aloud^ \ 
shoid, gen. and absol. Lu. xviii. 38; foil. I 
by TL, Acts xxi. 34, or otl. Acts xvii. 6. 1 
Sept. and Class. Said both of exclama- ; 
tions of joy and of terror or pain, or crying ■ 
for help ; also of shouting, by way of com- 
mand, and as a herald. Matt. iii. 3. Mk. i. 
3. Lu. iii. 4. John i. 23. Sept. and Class. 

Bo 77, T]<5, 77, (onomat.) an outcry, for 
various purposes, as for help, Ja. v. 4. 
Sept. and Class. 

Bo7?0£ta, as, 77, (jSojjOgw,) aid, suc- 
C07Lr, Heb. iv. 16, £i's EVKaipov (3o7]dELav, 
'for opportune succour,' 'that we may be 
aided opportunely,' in time of need. So 
Xen. Mem. ii. 8, 6, tt/ dnropLa (SovdEiav 

EVpElv. In x\ctS xxvii. 17, ^Of]d£LaL9 

EXpij^i>To, we may take ^oiiO. by meton. 1 
for the means of help in ropes and chains ; 
but rather, p)rops and stays. 

Bo7;0£w, f. fjcro), (jSo7j, ^i(x},) prop, to 
nm up, on hearing a cry for lielp ; to ad- 
vance in aid of any one. In N. T. gener. , 
to succour, help any one, foil, by dat. Matt. 
XV. 25, al. saepe. Sept. and Class. 

B077O0S, ov, 6, a helper, Heb. xiii. 6. 
Sept. and. Class. 

Bo'Gui/os, ou, 6, a pit dug to receive 
water. Matt. xv. 14. Lu. xi. 39, where the 
word is used as an emblem of destruction. 
Sept. and Class. ; also a cistern. Matt. xii. 
11. The word is not derived, as the lexi- 
cographers say, from (366po?, but from. 
(Sod u PCD, to deep)en, and that from the old 
word (3odv<3, eq. to [3adv?. It was prim, 
an adj. but at length, by ellips. of yfopo^^ 
became a subst. And as (3a6vvto comes ; 
from (3a6v^, so does ^odvvoo from the old 
(3o6v£, of the same meaning ; and they 
come, one from /3dw, the other from (36w. 



BOA 



63 



B P A 



It tlicrcfore means a tlecp hole or pit, for 
;iny purpose, espec. a pool. Of the same 
form with (36duuo9 is £u6uj/os from Evdvuto, 
uiul opKvvo'i from opicuvco. 

BoX?/, ^9, 77, (/3a/\/\a),) the act of 
fltwicing^ and the ihinq throicn, whether a 
stone or any other missile, Thnc. v. 65, 
ufc'xpi X'tQov ^o\-i\<s kx^J^pncrciv : also, a 
cast or throu\ said of distance, Ln. xxii. 
41, wast Xidov l3o\}tu. Corap. Gen. xxi. 
Uva)o-£i To^ou /3o/\7;i/, either expression 
meaning, a short distance. 

BoXt^w, f. iVo), heave the (SoXl's or 
/('(^(/, to sounds intrans. xVcts xxvii. 28. 

Bo\/s, t^o?, 77, (jSaWo),) prop. 5o?72e- 
thing tliroimi^ as the lead in sounding, a 
missile^ iceapon^ javelin^ or dart^ Heb. xii. 
20. Sept. and Class. 

B op op OS, ou, o, ^^zW, mire^ filthy such 
as accumulates Avhere animals are kept up 
in stalls or sties, 2 Pet. ii. 22, Xovora- 
fxiin] £19 KvXia/jLa (3opj36pov, sc. Ittl- 
<TTpid/acra. 

Boppas, a, 6, (contr.fr. /3opEa9,) prop. 
^Ae iV. or iV. iV. iiJ. wind ; but sometimes 
by meton. the northern -.quarter of the 
heaven, Lu. xiii. 29. Rev. xxi. 13. Sept. 
and Thuc. iii. 4. 

Bo'cr/cw, f. 770"w, to pasture^ (supply 
with grass,) and by impl. to tend while 
grazing, trans, also mid. (BocrKoinaL, to 
feed or qraze^ Matt. viii. 30, 33. Mk. v. 
11, 14. Lu. viii. 32, 34. XV. 15. Sept. and 
Class.; metaph. said of a Christian teacher, 
to instruct^ to nourish up in the words of 
faith and sound doctrine, (1 Tim. iv. 6.) 
John xxi. 15, 17, where see my note. And 
so in Sept. 

BoTa'i/^;, 7)9, 77, (/3oo-/C6o,) prop, pas- 
turage^ also herbage^ grass^ or even green 
corn^ Heb. vi. 7. Sept. and Class. 

BoTpus, 1/05, o, a cluster of any thing, 
espec. grapes^ Rev. xiv. 18. Sept. and 
Class. 

BouXguT?/?, ou, 6, a counsellor or 
senator^ in Class. In N. T. said of a 
member of the Jewish Sanhedrim, Mk. 
XV. 43. Lu. xxiii. 50. 

BouXeuw, f. guco), (/3ouX7/,) act. to 
give counsel to another^ to deliberate^ coun- 
sel ; also, to advise^ intrans. mid. (3ovXev- 
o,uai, to co7isult or deliberate with oneself^ 
or with one another ; also, ' to determine 
or decide for oneself.' In N. T. occ. only 
in mid. in two senses, I. to take counsel^ 
co?iS7ilt^ deliberate^ foil, by £t, Lu. xiv. 31. 
And so in Xen. Cyr. ii. 1, 7. — II. to re- 
solve^ determine^ i. e. after deliberation ; 
foil, by accus. 2 Cor. i. 17, touto j8. Sept. 
and Class. ; foil, by '/z/a, John xii. 10, 
e(3ovXsu<TavTo %va tou A. airoKTELvajGiv. 

BovXi]^ 77?, ?7, counsel^ gener. and with 
various modifications. In N. T. it de- 



notes, I. the eflect of counsel in deter- 
mination or derision^ whctlier as said of 
God, Lu. vii. 30. Acts ii. 23. xiii. 36. xx. 
27. Eph. i. 11. Ileb. vi. 17; or of men, 
Lu. xxiii. 51. Acts xxvii. 12. Sept. and 
Class. — II. by impl. purpose^ plan^ Acts 
iv. 28. v, 38. xxvii. 42. Sept. and Class. 
Said of the secret counsels and purposes of 
the mind, 1 Cor. iv. 5, a\ (SovXai tcou Kap- 
diuiv. Sept. oft. 

Bo u X?]^a, aros, to, {(SovXouai^) prop, 
what is willed or purposed^ i. e. tdll^ pur- 
pose^ Acts xxvii. 43, kucoXva-EV avTov^ 
Tov (3ovX. Rom. ix. 19. Joseph. & Class. 

B o u X o /X a i, gener. to tcill or be icilling ; 
to ivish^ desire. In N. T. foil, by an infin. 
expr. or impl. According to Buttm. the 
distinction between ^ovXcfxai and ^eXoj 
is, that the latter expresses an active voli- 
tion and purpose, the former a mere passive 
desire or willingness. I. as said of men, 
to be willing^ disposed^ induced^ Mk. xv. 15, 
/3. Tw oxXco TO LKuvov^ ct S8epe al. Sept. 
and Class. In the sense, to have in mind^ 
intend^ Matt. i. 19, i^. Xddpa dTroXvaai 
avnrnv. Acts v. 28. xii. 4. 2 Cor. i. 15. 
also Sept. and Class. ; to desire^ 1 Tim. vi. 
9, ol (SovXojUEVoL irXovTElv. Ja. iv. 4. 
Joseph. iVnt. v. 8, 3. Xen. An. ii. 6, 21 ; 
in the sense, to choose^ please^ John xviii. 
39, jSovXEG-dE aTToXvaai^ &c. Acts xviii, 
1 5. XXV. 20. Ja. iii. 4. Sept. and Class. ; 
as implying command or direction, to icill^ 
direct^ foil, by acc. and inf. Phil. i. 12, 
(SovXoiuaL^ 'it is my will.' See 1 Tim. ii. 
8. V. 14. Tit. iii. 8. Jude 5. Xen. An. i. 1, 1. 
— II. said of God, and equiv. to ^-tXw, to 
ivill, or to please, appoint, Lu. xxii. 42. 
Heb. vi. 17. Ja. i. 18. 2 Pet. iii. 9; of the 
Son of God, Matt. xi. 27. Lu. x. 22 ; of 
the Holy Spirit, 1 Cor. xii. 11. 

Bouz/os, ou, o, a rising ground or hil- 
lock, Lu. iii. 5. xxiii. 30. Sept. and later 
writers. 

Bo 1*9, oo?, 6, 77, an animal of the 0=3? 
kind, whether bull or cow, Lu. xiii. 15. 
xiv. 5, 19. John ii. 14, sq. 1 Cor. ix. 9. 
1 Tim, V. 18. Sept. and Class. 

Bp a/3 £ Toy, ou, TO, 1) prop, a prize, 
such as was bestowed on victors in the 
Grecian public games by the (3pa^EV9, or 
arbiter ; and consisted of a crown, wreath, 
or chaplet, &c. 1 Cor. ix. 24. 2) said 
metaph. of the prize of the Christian 
calling, the unfading crown of glory, Phil, 
iii. 14. 

BpajSsuw, f. Eva-(jo, 1) to be a ^pa- 
jSfii;?, director or arbiter in the public games. 
2) to exercise that office by aivarding the 
prize, Wisd. x. 12, and Class. In N. T. 
gener. metaph. to rule, i. e. prevail. Col. 

iii. 15, 77 EipilVI] TOV XpLOTTOV (Spaf^EVETCO 

iv TttTs Kapd'iai9 vfxijov, i. e. ' be the rule 



B P A 



64 



B P12 



and law of all your feelings and actions.' 
Comp. Phil. iv. 7. So Arist. Rhet. i. 56, 

TOV OLKaioV (3pa(3£VT1]^ loTTLV 6 OLKaOTTV^. 

Hp adv vw^f. vvu)^{(3padu^^)to he sloic\ 
he tardy ^ delay ^ intrans. 1 Tim. iii. 15, ii 
ok ^paduvoo. 2 Pet. iii. 9, ov (BpaovvEL d 
KvpLo^ Ti)u £7r., 'will not be tardy in ful- 
filling his promise.' 

BpadvTrXoEU}, f. tJctco, (/3paou9, 
7r\ou9,) to sail slowly^ Acts xxvii. 7. 
Artem. iv. 30. 

Bpa^u9, fla, u, adj. 1) prop, slow of 
action; as Thuc. i. 80, where we have op- 
posed (Spaosl's to o^£r§, Joseph. Ant. iii. 
1, 4. And so Ja. i. 19, (3p. &k to \a- 
XrjaraL. 2) metaph. slow in understanding^ 
as opp. to dyyivovs^ stupid^ Lat. tardus^ 
Lu. xxiv. 25, (Spacel^ n-f] Kapoia. So 
Dion. Hal. de Rhet. Att. (Spadv? tov 
vovu, as Polyb. iv. 8, 7, opposes (Spaov^ 
to o-ui/fTos, and Aristoph. Nub. 129, yi- 
puiv u)U, K.drrL\.r]crp.<x)v^ kul (3padv^^ 
stupid. Hence the Latin bardus. 

BpaouT-r]9, f/TO?, 77, 1) prop, sloiv- 
ness in accomplishing any action, or shcc/- 
gishness in setting about it, Hom. II. T. 
411. 2) in N. T. tardiness in carrying 
intention into action, or promise into per- 
formance, 2 Pet. iii. 9, Tii/es (3padu- 
TrjTa vyovvTai* Hdian. iii. 4, 15, fxik- 
XricTL? Kai ^p. 

B/oax^'wi/, 01/09, 6, 1) prop, the arm. 
2) metaph. by meton. (such being the 
principal organ whereby strength is ex- 
erted) strength., poicer^ Lu. i. 51. Johnxii. 
38. Acts xiii. 17. Sept. 

B/)axi'9, £ta, v, adj. short., whether in 
size or number, place or time. In N. T. 
used 1) of time., Lu. xxii. 58, ^gra [3paxv, 
a little time after.' Acts v. 34. Sept. and 
Class. 2) of place^ prop. Acts xxvii. 28, 
(Spax^ otao-Tijcrai/Tss, ' having gone a 
little further.' Sept. & Class. ; fig. as re- 
gards dignity^ Heb. ii. 7, 9, (^paxv tl 'Trap' 
dyyikovs. 3) of quantity., or number., 
small, few, John vi. 7, ^po-X^ Tt, ' a lit- 
tle.' Sept. and Class. Heb. xiii. 22, om 
/3pax£wi/, 'few,' scil. Xoyvov. Sept. and 
Class. 

Vtpicpo^, ED'S, TO, a child, (for Tps.cpo<s, 
prop, a nurseling,) 1) said of a child un- 
born, EjulBpuou, by Homer. 2) and usually 
a tiew-born child, or one who yet sucks 
the mother, a babe. In N. T. 1) prop. 
Lu. ii. 12, 16. xviii. 15. Acts vii. 19. 
2 Tim. iii. 15, diro (3pt(pou<5, 'from in- 
fancy.' 2) metaph. of those who have 
recently embraced the Christian religion, 
1 Pet. li. 2. 

Bptx^, ^'^^ I- ^^'^^ moisten, 
trans. Lu. vii. 38, 44, /3. tou? 7ro'(5a?. 
Comp. Ps. vi. 6. Rev. xi. 6, 'iva pt] usto? 
(3pixv scil. t^]v yriv, Sept. and Class. — 



11. to rain or shower upon, Arrian Ep. i. 
6 ; also, cause to rain, to rain, equiv'. to 
vEiv, and by an ellipsis of xjetov, Joel ii. 
23. Is. y. 6.' ^ So in N. T. 1) absol. Matt. 
V. 45, 6 Gho? (Spix^'-i so Sept. and! 
later Class. 2) to pour dozen, as rain, to^ 
rain, foil, by acc. Lu. xvii. 29, b Geo?' 
'if3ps.^e TTVp Kal diToi^dir' ovpaiwv. Thus 
Sept. Gen. xix.24. Ezek. xxx\dii. 22, and, 
so Milton, P. L. 'God rained from heaven, 
manna.' Impers. (the subject being im- 
plied, (SpixcL, as we say, ' it rains,') Ja. v. 
17, TOV p.y] (Spiral, sc. tou Qeov. 

BpouTr], Tj9, V, (quasi ^popivTy], iv, 
(SifSpopa, perf. mid. of (Spipco,) thunder, 
Mk. iii. 17, & oft. also Sept. and Class. 

Bpoxv, v^, {(^P^X^->) li^etting 
or wet, but in later Gr. rain, as Matt. vii. 
25, 27, 

Bpo'xo?, prop, a cord, and fig. a snare.^ 
as 1 Cor. vii. 35. Pro v. xxii. 25. Xen. 
Yen. V. 12. 

'Bpvy p6 9, ov, 6, (/3pux"J,) grinding 
or gnashing, i. e. of the teeth. Matt. viii. 

12. xiii. 42. xxii. 13. xxiv. 51. xxv. 30. 
Lu. xiii. 28, an image derived from a per- 
son in a paroxysm of pain, (comp. Acts 

vii. 54,) and transferred from the feelings 
of the body to the affections of the mind. 
It is highly expressive of the sensations of 
bitter grief, indignation, and regret. 

Bpuxf-o, f. ^w, to grind or gnash, i. e. 
the teeth, trans. Acts vii. 54. Sept. and 
Class. 

Bpuo), f. \}(TUi, prop, to be full to over- 
floioing, intrans. ; by impl. trans, but me- 
taph. to pour forth abundantly, said of a 
! fountain, Ja. iii. 11 ; so in Class. 

I Bpw/xa, aT09, TO, {(SLfSpwcrKU),) lit. 
\ ivhat is eaten, food, esp. KaT k^oxh^-, the 
solid food of meat or grain, as opposed 
to milk or vegetables. See 1 Cor. iii. 
2. I. prop. Matt. xiv. 15. Mk. vii. 19. 
Lu. iii. 11. ix. 13. 1 Cor. vi. 13, et al. 
Sept. and Class. — II. metaph. aliment., 
nourishment, John iv. 34, kpov ftp. ka-TLy 
' that by which I live, in which I delight,' 

1 Cor. X. 3, ftp. TTVEVp.. 

Bp o) (T i/xo9, ov, 6, rj, adj. {ftpwcn^,) 
eatable, Lu. xxiv. 41, £X£T£ tl ftp .; Sept. 

Bpwcrt9, £0)9, 77, {ftLftpd}<rKco,) eating^ 
I. said of the act of eating, 1) prop. 1 Cor, 

viii. 4. 2 Cor. ix. 10, dpTO<s el9 ftpwcnv. 
Sept. and Class. 2) fig. corrosion. Matt., 
vi. 19, 20, 0-^9 Kal ftpMO-L^, ' corroding 
rust.' — II. of ' that which is eaten,' food, 
equiv. to ftpoopa, 1) prop. John vi. 27. 
Heb.xii. 16. Rom. xiv. 17. Sept. andClass. 
2) metaph. nourishment, i. e. spiritual, 
John iv. 32. ^n.. 27, 55. 

Bp wo- /CO), f. CO (TOO, to eat, John vi. 13. 
Sept. and Class. 



B Ye 



65 



r A p 



BuBi'^w, f. i'o-co, (/3u6o§,) to cause to 
dhk^ and puss, to he sunk., to sink ; intrans. 

1) prop. Lu. V. 7. 2 Mace. xii. 4, & Class. 

2) metapli. 1 Tim. vi. 9, cIs okt^^ov. 
Bu6o§, ou, 6, a depth., or f7/e f/ec/), 

2 Cor. xi. 25, of tlie sea, Sept. & Class. 

Bupo-gus, £co§, o, (/Sypcra, hide,) a 
tanner., leather-dresser., Acts ix. 43. x. 6', 
32. Artemid. iv. 56. 

Buo-crtj/os, ?;, oi/, adj. {(Suaruo^.,) made 
of byssus or fine cotto?i. So o-to\?; /3. in 
Sept. In N. T. ^vaaivov sc. 'ivdvjxa., 
Rev. xviii. 12, 16. xix. 8, 14. Diod. Sic. 
i. 85. 

Bucro-09, ou, 77, (X 50?'^ q/" fine cotton., 
highly prized by the ancients, and of vari- 
ous kinds, as Egyptian, Syrian, Indian, 
Grecian, &c. Lu. xvi. 19. Rev. xviii. 12. 
These varied in colour, some being white. 
Rev. xix. 8, 14; some, as the Syrian or 
Hebraic, yellow ; and others, purple or 
crimson. 

B CO /A OS, ou, 6, (/3aa), /SatVw,) prop, a 
step., or a pedestal., but gener. an altar., as 
that to which ascent was made by steps, 
Acts xvii. 23. Sept. and Class. 



r. 

rdyypati/a, rjs, rj, (by redupl. from 
ypaw, -ypatfco, to corrode, eat away,) gan- 
</rene^ i. e. a mortification of the flesh, 
arising from high inflammation, and spread- 
ing over the whole body, 2 Tim. ii. 17. 

Fa^a, 77, a treasury^ Acts viii. 27. 

ra^o<|) uXttACtoi/, ou, TO, (yd^a, 
Xa/cf;,) a treasury., or place where the 
public treasure was deposited. ~ Among 
the Jews this was in one of the courts of 
the Temple, Mk. xii. 41, 43. Lu. xxi. 1. 
Said of the whole court in which this 
sacred treasury stood, John viii. 20. 

r«\a, a/cTos, To,mz7^, 1) prop. 1 Cor. 
ix. 7. Sept. and Class. 2) by a Jewish 
metaphor, used to denote the rudiments of 
Christian doctrine meant for babes in 
Christ, 1 Cor. iii. 2. Heb. v. 12, 13. In 
1 Pet. ii. 2, milk is used as the emblem of 
pure spiritual nourishment, as regards 
Christian doctrine generally, by which 
believers grow in grace, and are nourished 
unto life eternal. Comp. Is. Iv. 1. 

FaXTji/T], 7]s, 77, (fr. yaico, gaudeo,) a 
freedom from storms., a calm., whether by 
sea or land, but esp. the former, when, in 
the words of Dryden, 'the storm is hush'd, 
the dimpled ocean smiles,' Matt. viii. 26. 
Mk. iv. 39. Lu. viii. 24. 

ra|U.fcct), f. ^o-co, to marry., trans. & 
neuter, I. trans, of men, to take as a wife., 
Matt. V. 32. xix. 9. Mk. vi. 17. x. 11. 



Lu. xiv. 20. xvi. 18, and Class. Neut. & 
absol. to take a u'ife., enter into the mar- 
riage state., Matt. xix. 10. xxii, 25, et ah ; 
of WOMEN, absol. 1 Cor. vii. 28, 34, 36. 
1 Tim. V. 11, 14, and Class. — II. aor. 1. 
pass. iya/uLvdi]!/., as mid. to marry., neut. 
& absol. 1 Cor. vii. 39; foil, by dat. Mk. 
X. 12. Jos. Ant. iv. 7, 5, and later Class. 

FajWi'^to, f. to-to, (yd/>i05,) to give in 
marriage., 1 Cor. vii. 28. Griesb. & Scholz, 
for vulg. sKyajULLX^co : but see my note. 

Fa/xt 0-/C60, equiv. to yayui^co, pass. 
Mk. xii. 25. 

Fa'yuos, ou, o, a ivedding., meaning the 
nuptial solemnities. 1) prop, as 'iv^vfxa 
yct/uLov., Matt. xxii. 11, 12. dElTrvov tov 
ya'/xou, Rev, xix. 9. Often used in plur. 
with reference to the repetition of the ori- 
ginal banquet, for seven days. Matt. xxii. 
2, et al. Sept. and Class. Bymeton. 'the 
apartment where the nuptial feast was 
held,' Matt. xxii. 10. 2) in the language 
of common life, any great entertainment^ 
Lu. xii. 36. xiv. 8. Esth. ix. 22. 3) by 
meton. the marriage state., Heb. xiii. 4. 
Wisd. xiv. 24. Jos. Ant.vi. 11,2. Hdian. 

iii. 10, 10. 

Fdp, a causative particle, standing after 
one or more words in a clause, and ex- 
pressing, directly or indirectly, the reason 
of what has been previously asserted, or 
at least implied, /or, or because. I. put 
SIMPLY, i. e. ALONE, 1) after an antecedent 
sentence eocpressed.. Matt. i. 20, 21. Mk. 
i. 22, et al. freq. ; put after two words in 
a clause. Matt. ii. 6. Mk. i. 38 ; in tivo 
consecutive clauses, i. e. where the same 
idea is expressed twice, i. e. afBrm. and 
negat. or gener. and spec. John viii. 42. 
1 Cor. xvi. 7. 2 Cor. xi. 19 ; or where the 
latter clause is dependent on the former. 
Matt. x. 20. Mk. vi. 52. John v. 21, sq. 
Acts ii. 15 ; or where two diflferent causes 
are assigned. Matt. vi. 32 ; also in three 
consecutive clauses, Mk.ix.39, sqq. Matt, 
xvi. 25, et al. 2) elliptically ., where the 
clause to which it refers is omitted, and to 
be mentally supplied, in which case it 
serves merely to assign the ground for an 
opinion, Matt. ii. 2. xxvii. 23. Mk. viii, 
38. xii. 23. Lu. xxii. 37. John iv. 44. Lu. 

iv. 16. Acts xiii. 36. xxi. 13. Rom. ii. 25. 
viii. 18; in a quotation, where the pre- 
ceding clause is omitted, Acts xvii. 28, al. 
3) elliptically., and in common usage, ydp 
is intensive., like our then.,truly., &c. 
in questions where a preceding no may be 
supplied. Matt, xxvii. 23. John vii. 41. 
Acts viii. 31. xix. 35. Rom. iii. 3. Phil, 
i. 18. 1 Cor. xi. 22 ; in a strong affirmation 
or negation., John ix. 30. 1 Pet. iv. 15. 
Acts xvi. 37 ; in exclamations., as of wish- 
ing, with the opt. 2 Tim. ii. 7. 4) put by 
luay of explanation., or demonstratively 



r A2 



66 



FEN 



where it takes up a preceding annunciation, 
and continues or explains it, as our namely^ 
that is to say^ Matt. i. 18; also in a less 
strict sense, where it introduces, by way 
of explanation, the ground or motive of 
what precedes, yb?', since^ Sec. Matt. vi. 7, 
16. X. 35. XV. 4. xxiv. 7. 1 Cor. xi. 26, 
al. and Class, in which sense it serves to 
introduce parenthetic clauses, Mk. v. 42. 

vi. 14. xiv. 40. xvi. 4. John iv. 8, et al. 
oft. — II. WITH OTHER PARTICLES, where, 
however, each retains its own force, e. gr. 
edu ydp^ EL yctp^ 'for if;' idov ycip^ 'for 
lo !' Kai yap, 'for even.' So yap kul^ 

for also,' Acts xvii. 28. 2 Cor. ii. 9. kul 
yap ovK^ ' for neither,' 1 Cor. xi. 9. fxiv 
ydp^ foil, by 0£, ' for indeed,' Acts xiii. 
36, and sometimes without the di. Foil, 
by dWd^ Acts iv. 16. fxi] yap and ou 7«p, 
'for not;' ovdk yap and oute ydp^ 'for 
neither.' 

Va<TT7]p^ ipo?, 7;, the helly^ gener. but 
sometimes put, by synecdoche, only of the 
parts thereof; e. gr. 1. the stomachy Qiihtx 
prop. Horn. Od. xx, 25. Job xv. 2. xx. 
23; or fig. for 'excess in eating,' 3 Mace. 

vii. 11, and also Horn. Od. xviii. 2, and 
elsewh. in Class. Hence in N. T. by a 
meton. of abstr. for concr. a glutton^ Tit. 

. i. 12, ya(TTipE<s dpyal^ ' lazy gorman- 
dizers.' And so Hesiod Th. 26. — II. the 
womb^ Lu, i. 31. Sept. and later Class. 
Hence kv yacTpl 'ix^iv^ ' to be with child,' 
Matt. i. 18, et al. and Class. 

Fg, an enclitic particle, serving to 
strengthen the word to which it is sub- 
joined, by placing it in opposition to other 
words, e. gr. a part in reference to the 
whole, a single object in reference to 
many, a less in reference to a greater, and 
vice versa. Its general meaning is at least., 
indeed., even., I. used alone, 1) as marking 
a less in reference to a greater, at least ^ 
Lu. xi. 8. xviii. 5. 1 Cor. iv. 8. Class. 
2) as marking a greater in reference to a 
less, &c. even., indeed^ Rom.viii. 32. Sept. 

& Class. II. IN CONNEXION WITH OTHER 

PARTICLES, 1) dXka 7£,'yet surely,' 1 Cor. 
ix. 2. 'but indeed, moreover,' Lu. xxiv. 
21 ; apayg, cipayg, stye, ' if indeed, if 
so be,' Eph. iii. 2. iv.21.^Col. i. 23. Sept. 
and Class. ; also gtyg /cal, 'if indeed also, 
since, although,' Gal. iii. 4. 2 Cor. v. 3 ; 
£t ^£ /Li^/ys, 'if otherwise indeed,' and 
serving to annul the preceding proposition, 
whether affirmative, ' but if not, otherwise,' 
Matt. vi. 1. Lu. X. 6. xiii. 9; or negative, 
where it consequently affirms, if otherwise., 
else.. Matt. ix. 17. Lu. v. 36. xiv. 32. 
2 Cor. xi. 16 ; Kai ye, ' and although,' 
Lu. xix. 42, ' and even, yea even,' Acts 
li. 18. 

View a., 77, Gehenna, i. e. the place 
of puiiishment in Hades, equiv. to Tdp- 



Tapo9., 2 Pet. ii. 4; or 77 Xlpvij tov Trupo?, 
Rev. XX. 14, sq. to Trvp to ulwvlov, Matt. 
XXV. 41. See on adi\<s. Simply yizwa^ 
Matt. V. 29, sq. x. 28. Lu. xii. 5. Ja. iii. 
6, or y. Tou 7ru/)6s, Matt. v. 22. Mk. ix. 
47. Hence it is a place of eternal fire and 
everlasting punishment. See more in my 
note on Matt. v. 22. 

rstTcoi/, oz/os, 6, 77, prop, an adject, but 
often put as a subst. in the sense a neigh- 
hour., Lu. xiv. 12. XV. 6, 9. John ix!^ 8. 
Sept. and Class. 

FfXao), f. a (760, to te^/i, whether in 
joy, or triumph, or in derision, intrans. 
Lu. vi. 21, 25. Sept. and Class. 

TsXcos, 60TOS, 6, (ygXao),) laugKter., 
esp. in joy or triumph, Ja. iv, 9. Sept. 
and Class. 

Ffyat^oi), f. icro), (yt/xw,) to make full., 
fill up., trans, and foil, by gen. of thing, 
Mk. XV. 36. John ii. 7. vi. 13 ; so with 
dTTo, Lu. XV. 16, or £/c. Rev. viii. 5. Ab- 
sol. in Mk. iv. 37. Lu. xiv. 23. 

Ffi/xo), to he fidl., intrans. foil, by gen. 
of thing. Matt, xxiii. 27, & oft. sometimes 
preceded by i/c, Matt, xxiii. 25. 

r€i/£a, as, 77, {yivojULai,) prop, birth, 
but in N. T. and sometimes in later Class. 
generation., in the following senses, 1) 
offspnng., both gener. and fig. Acts viii. 33 ; 
posterity., Sept. and Class. 2) a descent., 
i. e. a degree in a genealogical line, Matt, 
i. 17. Sept. and Class. 3) said of the 
period of time from one descent to another, 
i. e. the average duration of human life, 
reckoned at 33 J years each. Hence in 
N. T, of a less definite period, an age., 
time., period., times of old, &c. Acts xiv. 
16. XV. 21. Eph. iii. 5. Col. i. 26; of 
future ages, Eph. iii. 21. Lu. i. 50. On Lu. 
xvi. 8, see my note in loe. 4) said by 
meton. of pers. of any generation or age., 
a race., Q. gr. n y&v&ct auT?], 'the present 
generation,' Matt. xi. 16. xii. 39. & oft. 
also Sept. and Class. 

T svEaXoy iu)., f. tjcro), to trace one''s 
genealogy., {t7)u yevEav XiyEiv.) In N. T. 
only pass. yEVEa\oyiop,ai., to be inscribed 
in a genealogy., i. e. by impl. ' to be rec- 
koned by descent, to derive one's origin,' 
Heb. vii. 6, and Sept. 

r£i/£a/Voy la, as, 77, a genealogical 
table., 1 Tim. i. 4. Tit. iii. 9, where see my 
notes. 

r £ £ cr t a, wi/, Ta, (fr. adj . y£y£crios, na- 
tal,) in the earlier writers the ferios cleni- 
cales. or solemn rites for the dead, Hdot. 
iv. 26 ; in the later ones, and in N. T. the 
celebration of a birth-day festival, or the 
festivcd itself. Matt. xiv. 6. Mk. vi. 21. 
In this sense the earlier writers used Td 
yEvidXia, 



FEN 



67 



r E p 



r£i/£<T t?, €(os, [yiuofxai,) j)Y\m. (/ef?e- 
rcdlon or procreation, and thence by me- 
ton. birth^ both in Class, and N. T., uhere 
it is used, I. prop, birth., Matt. i. 18. Lu. 
i. 14, in lat. Ed. Ja. i. 23, to Trpoaajirou 
Til's ysi/Eo-Ecos, Miis native ornatural tace.' 
Comp. Gen. xxxii. 9, i) yi] ttJs yEutasco^ 
<rou. Judith xii. Ic), al iiutpai ttJ? ysvtasu}<s 
/ut>v, i. e. d(p' 01) syevt]di]u. 2) tig. Ja. iii. 6, 
6 Tpd^os T?]? yEffo-ftos, to denote liter. 
the U'ht'el of birth^ i. e. \vheel as put in 
motion at birth, and ^vllich rolls on through 
life, equiv. to ' course of life.' So xVnacr. 
iv. 7, Tpo)(os apixaro<5 yap oTa., ^iotos 
-rpi^EL KvXtadsL^. Comp. Wisd. vii. 5. — 
I II. in the sense gcjius^ descent^ lineage. So 
I ^i(3\o^ 7£f£o-£a)§, to denote 'a genealo- 
gical table,' i\Iatt. i. 1. So Sept. in Gen. 
fi. 4. V. 1. X. 1, 32. 

TsvETi], 77s, 77, {y EVE a.,) birth., John ix. 
1, £/c 'y£i/£Tj]9, and so in Class. 

TEVi]iua, aTO?, TO, (yE-yEfij/xai, perf. 
pass, of yivofxai.,) produce., fruit ; lit. 
li'hat is produced., both the fruit of the 
womb in animals, and the fruit yielded by 
the earth, Lu. xii. 18, and often in Class. 
In 2 Cor. ix. 10, to. y. Trj? OLKaLocrvui]? 
means ' the rewards of Christian virtue.' 
Comp. Hos. X. 1. In both passages the 
text. rec. however has yivviin. 

rgyi/ao), f. 77(70), {yivva, poet, for 
yffo?,) trans, to beget., as said of men ; also, 
though more rarely, to bear^ bring forth., 
as said of women : pass, to be begotten., or 
born., I. act. and 1) as said of men, to be- 
get. Matt. i. 2—16. Acts vii. 8, 29. Sept. 
oft, ; fig. to generate., i. e. occasion or pro- 
duce, 2 Tim. ii. 23, y. /ixdxa?. And so in 
Class, as Plato, Epist. (3\d^r]v vdovr} kuI 
XvTT^v yEvva. Also metaph. said of men, 
and denoting, in Jewish phraseology, the 
relation between a teacher and his disci- 
ples, — to beget., in a spiritual sense, to be 
any one's spiritual father, by being the 
instrument of his conversion from a carnal 
to a spiritual life, 1 Cor. iv. 15. Phil em. 
10. And so Philo and the Rabbins. 2) as 
said of God, to beget., in a spiritual sense, 
i. e. 'to impart a new and spiritual life,' by 
invigorating, ennobling, and sanctifying the 
powers of the natural man, and imparting 
to him a new life and a new sj)irit in Christ 
Jesus, 1 John v, 1. Hence Christians are 
said to be 'born of God,' and to be 'sons 
of God,' Rom. viii. 14. Gal. iii. 26. iv. 6 ; 
also used to express the relation between 
God and the Messiah, who, as the vice- 
gerent of God, is fig. called his ' Son,' and 
whence accordingly God is fig. said to be- 
get, i. e. appoint or declare, as a kinsf, &c. 
Acts xiii. 33. Heb. i. 5. v. 5. 3) said of 
women, to bear, bring fojih, both prop. Lu. 
i. 13, ,57. xxiii. 29. John xvi. 21, & Class, 
and fig. Gal. iv. 24, y. eU dov\ELav.—ll. 



pass. yEuuuo/jLai, and 1) to be begotten or 
conceived, ]Matt. i, 20, to iv avTrj yavvti- 
6tv, 'conceived in her womb,' i. e. the 
foetus, Heb. xi. 12. 2) to be bor?i, gener. 
Matt. ii. 1, 4. xix. 12, and oft. ; also with 
adjnncts, £i5 tov Koa/uLOv and KaTo. adpKa., 
' in the course of nature ;' also foil, by £is 
final, denoting destination, John xviii. 37. 
2 Pet. ii. 12, or by i/c with gen. or kv with 
dat. of place or condition : metaph. i/c 
0£ou, or YlvEvixaTo<s yEvv. in the sense 
' to have received from God, or the Holy 
Spirit, a new and spiritual life,' John i. 13. 

iii. 5, 6, 8. 1 John ii. 29. iii. 9. iv. 7. v. 1. 

iv. 18. So also yEvvri^r\vaL dvcodEv, equiv. 
to EK Qeov yEvv. John iii. 3, 7. 

V Evvi] jJLa, ctTos, TO, (y£i/yaw,) lit. 
ichat is born ov produced, phys. 1) said of 
the animate creation, offspring, ov progeny. 
Matt. iii. 7. xii. 34. xxiii. 33. Lu, iii. 7. 
Sept. but rarely in Class, except Plato. 

2) of the inanimate creation, the produce 
of the ground, whether grain or the fruits 
of trees, Matt. xxvi. 29. Mk. xiv. 25. Lu. 
xxii. 18. 3) metaph. said of the reicards 
of Christian virtue, 2 Cor. ix. 10, in text, 
rec. 

r £1/1/7] crt9, £60?, 77, {yEvvdco,^ birth.^ 
nativity. Matt. i. 18. Lu. i. 14, in text, 
rec. al. yivEcrL<s. 

T EvvnTo?, dv, adj. brought forth, 
bom. Matt. xi. 11. Lu. vii. 28, kv yEvvi]- 
Tots yvvuLKcov, ' those born of women.' 
Ecclus. X. 19, yEvvrj/uLacTL yvvaiKcov. Sept. 
in Job xiv. 1. xv. 4. xxv. 4. 

Tevo^, £09, TO, {yivofiai,) genus, race, 
1. said of men, 1) ojfspring, posterity. 
Acts xvii. 28, sq. Rev. xxii. 16. Sept. and 
Class. 2) descent, lineage. Acts iv. 6. vii. 
13. xiii. 26. Phil. iii. 5. Sept. and Class. 

3) ncdion, people, Mk. vii. 26. Acts iv. 36. 
vii. 19, and oft. Sept. and Class. — II. of 
animals, species, hind. Matt. xiii. 47. xvii. 
21. Mk. ix. 29. 1 Cor. xii. 10, 28. xiv. 10. 
Sept. and Class. 

V E pov (Jia, a§, 77, (fr. adj. yEpovGio^, 
senilis, occurring in Homer,) gener. an 
assembly of elders, i. e. counsellors, Lat. 
sencdus. So in Sept. it denotes the elders 
of the Jews, either of the whole people, 
Exod. iii. 16, 18, or of particular cities, 
Deut. xix. 12. xxi. 2, et al. ; and in later 
times it denoted the Sanhedrim, or great 
council of the nation, as oft. in the Apocr. 
In N. T. it occurs only in Acts v. 21, to 
avvEopiov Kai irda-av Trjv yEpovaiav tcov 
VLcov 'lcrpai]\, i. e. either ' the Sanhedrim, 
even the whole senate of Israel,' or rather 
it denotes the elders of Israel in general, 
i. e. persons who, from age and influence, 
were invited to sit with the Sanhedrim, 
equiv. to oi irpEo-^vTEpoL tov 'Icrpa7jA., 
Acts iv. 8. xxv. 15. 



rEP 



68 



riN 



Tipvov^ oz/Tos, 6, an old man^ John iii. 

4. Sept. and Class. 

Ffuo), f. succt), trans, cause to taste^ 
give to taste, Gen. xxv. 30. Hdot. vii. 46. 
Eur. Gycl. 149. Plut. i. 302. In N. T. as 
also in the Class, gener. the mid. ysvoixai, 
alone occ. in the sense to taste, depon. or 
trans. 1) prop, and absol. Matt. xx\\\. 34. 
Col. ii. 21, or foil, by acc. John ii. 9, and 
Sept. ; in the sense to partake of, to eat, 
either absol. Acts x. 10. xx. 11, or foil, by 
gen. Lu. xiv. 24. Acts xxiii. 14. Sept. and 
Class. 2) metaph. to ex-perience, try any 
thing by use, y. p^lxa 0£oi}, Heb. vi. 5. 
y. ^ava-Tov, Matt. xvi. 28. Mk. ix. L 
Lu. ix. 27. John viii. 52. Heb. ii. 9. vi.4, 
y. Tijs oojpEas. 1 Pet. ii. 3. Sept., Philo, 
Joseph., and Class. 

r£6opy£w, f. 7}cra;, (yEcopyo?,) to till 
the earth; whence the pass. yewpygtcrOai, 
Heb. vi. 7. Sept. and Class. 

T zuo py Lov, ov, TO, prop, a plot of 
arahle land. Pro v. xxiv. 30, and Class. In 
N. T. metaph. said of Christians, 1 Cor. 
iii. 9, where it is used like our field. 

r Eoi} py 6<s, ov, 6, {yia, whence yjj and 
Etupya, perf. mid. of obsol. 'ipyco, to work,) 
i) a tiller of the groimd, a husbandman, 
2 Tim. ii. 6, Ja. v. 7. Sept. and Class. 2) 
a vinedresser. Matt, xxi. 33 — 41. Mk, xii. 
1—9. Lu. XX. 9, sq. 14, 16. Metaph. of 
God, as taking care of the Church, con- 
sidered as the spiritual vine, (see Is. v. 1, 
sqq.) John xv. 1. Pare in Class., yet 
occ. in yElian H. A. p. 419. Philostr.* p. 
87, and yEiopyElv in Plato. 

F)], y^j^i Vi (contr. from obs. yia, cog- 
nate with yala,) earth or land, i. e. one of 
the four elements, said I. in reference to 
its vegetative power, eaHh, soil, Matt. xiii. 

5, 8, 23. Mk. iv. 5, 8, 20. Lu. xiv. 35. 
John xii. 24, al. Sept. and Class. — II. as 
that whereon we tread, the ground. Matt. 
X. 29. XV, 35. Lu. vi. 49, et al. Sept. and 
Class. — III. as distinguished from the sea, 
or a lake, the land, ' terra firma,' Mk. iv. 
1. vi, 47. John vi. 21, et al. Sept. and 
Class. — IV. of a country or region, as yr\ 
'Ia-pai]\, Matt. ii. 20. Xauaav, Acts xiii, 
19. AiyuTTTou, Acts vii. 11; espec. as said 
ahsol. of the la?id of Judoea, Matt, xxiii. 
35, et al. and sometimes simply t^]v yiju. 
By meton. put for the inhabitants of a 
country. Matt. x. 15. xi. 24, et al. So 
Dryden : ' These answers, in the silent 
night received, The king himself divulged, 
the land believed^ — Y. the earth, 1) the 
terraqueous globe of earth, as distinct from 
6 ovpav69, Matt, v. 18, 35. vi. 10, 19, et 
al. oft. Sept. and Class. Hence the phrase 
TO. iirl yijs kul to. kv toZ? ovpavol's, to 
denote the universe. Col. i. 16, 20 : also 
yi] Kaivh, 2 Pet. iii, 13. Rev. xxi. 1. 2) 
as said of the habitable eaHh, olkovixIvv,, 



Lu, xi. 31. xxi. 35. Acts x. 12. xi. 6, et 
al. oft. Sept. and Class. Hence Ta LttI 
Tr\<5 yrj9, ' earthly things,' i. e. things per- 
taining to this life, as opp. to -ra auco, Col. 
iii. 2. By synecd. put for the inhabitants 
of the earth, ?nen, Rom. ix. 17. x. 18. 
Rev. vi, 8. xi. 6, et al. and Sept. So 
where things are said to be done, or to 
take place on earth, which have reference 
chiefly to men. Matt. v. 13. vi. 10. x. 34. 
Lu. xii, 49. John xvii. 4, al. So John 
iii. 31, 6 u)h' sK Tf]9 yi}^, ' he who is of 
human origin.' 

Tijpa's, ao9 or £os, to, old age, Lu. i 
36. Sept. and Class. 

r^jpacr/cco, or -dco, f. dcrco, {yrjpa.9,) to 
groic or become old, to be old, in trans. John 
xxi. 18. Heb. viii. 13. Sept. and Class. 

V Lvo fxai, f. yEui'tcroixaL, (earlier and At- 
tic form y'lyvoixai,) mid. depon. intrans. 
with the primary signif, to begin to be, i. e. 
to come into existence in any state ; and 
then in the aor. and perf. to have come i?ito 
eaistence, or simply to be. 1. to begin to be, 
to come into existence, as implying origin, 
either from natural causes or through 
special agency, result, and also change of 
state, place, &c. 1) as implying origin in 
the ordinary course of nature, both as said 
of persons, to be born, John viii. 58 ; foil, 
by £/c TLvo's, Rom. i. 3. Gal. iv. 4. 1 Pet. 

iii. 6. Sept. and Class. ; and of things, as 
plants, fruits, 6cc. to be produced, to groiv. 
Matt. xxi. 19. 1 Cor. xv. 37, and Class. ; 
or as said of the phenomena of nature, to 
arise, occur, e. gr. o-fic/xos. Matt. viii. 
24. XaiXaxlr, Mk. iv. 37. yaXrivi], Matt, 
viii. 26, et al. o-ktotos. Matt, xxvii. 45. 
v&cpiX-i], Lu. ix. 34. jSpovTi], John xii. 
29 ; also of a voice or cry, (pcovij, John 

xii. 30. Kpavyi], Matt. xxv. 6 ; or vrhat 
implies it, as ^6pu(3o£, Matt. xxvi. 5. 
(TTdcn^, Lu. xxiii, 19. cr^icriJia, John vii. 
43, ^7/T?jo-i9, John iii. 25 ; or the absence 
thereof, as ciy?;. Acts xxi. 40. Rev. \m. 
1. So of emotions generally, Lu. xv. 10, 
or the affliction accompanying them, Matt. 

xiii. 21. 2) as implying origin through 
an agency specially exerted, to be made, 
or created, as said of things, the work of 
creation, John i. 3, 10. 1 Cor. xv. 15. Heb. 

iv. 3. xi. 3, and Sept. ; or the works of 
art. Acts xix. 26, dLo. x^tpoov : of mira- 
cles, to be turought ov performed., Matt.xi. 
20, et al.'; of a promise made. Acts xxvi. 
6 ; or plot formed, xx. 3 ; or Avaste made, 
Mk. xiv. 4; of the will or desire of any 
thing, to be accomplished or fulfilled, ^i- 
Xrifxa, Matt, vi. 10. aWmxa, Lu. xxiii. 
24 ; of a repast, to be made ready, John 
xiii. 2; of judicial proceedings, to be made 
or set on foot. Acts xxv. 26 ; of festivals, 
to be made or celebrated ; of persons, e. gr. 
made, i. e. appointed, to fill any office, 



riN 



G9 



Col. i. 23, 25. Heb. v. 5, or uliat is done 
or takes place to or in any one, Lu. xxiii. 

31, Tco TL ytui}Tai ; Gal. iii. 13, 
y. virip vjULwv Kwrdpa. 3) as implying 
result, event, &c. to come to pass^ occur ^ 
Sic. both absol. as Matt. i. 2-2, cS: oft. and 
foil, by dat. of person, to happen to any 
one, Mk. ix. 21 ; or it is equivalent to an 
accus. governed of some prep, as tts or 
£7rt. Hence the phrase kul kyiven-o or 
kyivs-To 0£, ' and it came to pass that,' 
always with a notation of time, introduced 
by oT£, tos, ii/, or gen. absol. &c. and foil, 
by a finite verb with or without /cat, Matt, 
ix. 10, and elsewh. 4) as implying a change 
of state, condition, &c. or transition from 
one to another ; said of persons or things 
that receive any new character or form. 
Matt. V. 45, and elsewh. As construed with 
prepositions or adverbs implying motion, 
it denotes change to another place, &c. to 
come, and is followed by various preposi- 
tions denoting the beginning or end of 
motion. — II. in the aor. & perf. to have 
begun to he, to have come into existence. Sec. 
or simply to exist, to be. 1 ) gener. to be, 
John i. 6. Rom. xi. 5. 1 John ii. 18, et 
al. 2) as copula connecting a subject and 
predicate, Lu. i. 2. ii. 2, et al. So with a 
dat. of profit, to be any thing to, or for, 
c. gT. ohr\yb<i. Acts i. 16. (rrjjULsTov, Lu. xi. 
30. Trapr^yopia, Col. iv. 11. tvitol, 1 Th. 

i. 7, and Class. ; with gen. of age, Lu. ii. 
42, ETtoy ^woe/ca, 1 Tim. v. 9 ; implying 
property, &c. Matt. xi. 26. Lu. x. 21. 
Joined with the participle of another verb, 
it forms, like elvul, a periphrasis for a 
fini^ tense of that verb, Mk. i. 4, kyiviTO 
(BaTTTLlcou, ix. 3, 7. Heb. v. 12, et al. 3) 
joined with prepositions, it implies locality, 
Matt. xxvi. 6. Mk. ix. 33, et al. or state 
and condition, Lu. xxii. 44, y. ku dycovia. 
Acts xxii, 17, kv kKo-TdarsL, &c. Foil, by 
juLETo. with gen. of person, ' to be with any 
one,' Acts ix. 19. xx. 18, or arvu and dat. 
Lu. ii. 13, or by tt^os and acc. ' to be dis- 
posed towards anyone,' 1 Cor. ii. 3.xvi. 10. 

T Lvu)(TK(o, {. yvcoao/uLai, to know, both 
in an inchoative and completive sense. I. in 
the former, to come to knoiv, to attain know- 
ledge of, where the perf. implies complete 
action, and is often equiv. to pres. to know, 
pass, to become known, 1) gener. and foil, 
by acc. of thing, Matt. xii. 7. John viii. 

32, et al. sometimes implied, Mk. vi. 38. 
1 Cor. xiii. 9 ; foil, by Ik tivo^, ' by any 
thing,' Matt. xii. 33. Lu. vi. 44, et al. or 
its equiv. 'iv tlvi, or oQev, 1 John ii. 18. 
Kara t'l, Lu. i. 18. Foil, by acc. of per- 
son, John xiv. 7. Lu. xxiv. 35. xix. 15. 
Rom. i. 21. 2 Cor. v. 16. Gal. iv. 9. 1 John 

ii. 3. iii. 1, et al. Foil, by otl, instead of 
an acc. and infin. John vi. 69, kyvojKafxEv 
OTL ail eI 6 XpLaro?. vii. 26, et al. ssepe. 
2) in a forensic sense, to knoiv by inquiry 



or eo'amination, to eoramine, tiiv aWiav^ 
Acts xxiii. 28. 3) to know by information 
from others, to learn or find out. Matt. x. 

26. Acts ix. 24; foil, by acc. of thing, 
expr. or impl. Mk. v. 43. Acts xxi. 34. 
Col. iv. 8. Matt. ix. 30, et al. ; or otl, 
John iv. 1, or diro tivo<s, Mk. xv. 45. 4) 
to know by perception or observation, to 
perceive, obse^-ve, foil, by acc. expr. or 
impl. Matt. xxii. 18. xvi. 8. xxvi. 10, or 
by OTL, John iv. 53. vi. 15 ; by acc. and 
partic. for infin. Lu. viii. 46, kyoo 'iyvcov 
dvvafXLv k^EXdovcrav dir k/mov. 5) to know 
by intellectual disquisition, to understand, 
comprehend, foil, by acc. expr. or impl. 
Matt. xiii. 11,7. /mva-TripLa. Mk. iv. 13, 
7rapa(3oXd^. Lu.xviii. 34. John vii. 49, Toy 
vojuLov. 6) by euphemism, to have [carnal] 
knowledge of, Lu.i.34. Sept. & Class. — II. 
to know in a completive sense, to have ob- 
tained and to possess a knowledge of, 1) 
gener. and foil, by acc. both of thing expr. 
or implied, or acc. and oti, by attraction 
or by adv. ; and of person in acc. to know 
any one by sight, John i. 49. 2 Cor. 
V. 16, or ' to know any one's character 
and disposition,' John i. 10, et al. 2) to 
knoiv, as being what one is, or professes to 
be, to acknoidedge, foil, by acc. Matt. vii. 
23. 1 Cor. viii. 3. Gal. iv. 9, and Sept. 
3) from the Hebr. with the adjunct idea 
of well-wishing, to know and approve of, 
to love and care for, foil, by acc. both of 
person, as 2 Tim. ii. 19. John x. 14, 15, 

27. Sept. ; and of thing, Rom. vii. 15, o 
ydp KaTEpyd\pp.aL, ov yti/ctxr/cw, (and 
so Sept. Ps. i. 6.) but see my note. 

VXev Kcs, £05, TO, (yXv/cus,) prop. 
must, or new ivine, but sometimes stveet 
ivine, whether new, and consequently 
sweet, or of which, though old, the sweet- 
ness is preserved by art, as Acts ii. 13. 
Job xxxii. 19. Athen. p. 176. See more 
in my note. 

TXvKv^, Eta, if, adj. sweet. Rev. x. 9, 
10 ; of honey, Ja. iii. 11, sq. ; of water, 
meaning, ' fit for drinking,' potable, as opp. 
to brackish. So in Lucian i. 295, Reitz. 
we have yXvKv pElcOpov, as opp. to what 
is mixed with sea- water, and conseq. 
brackish. 

TXuiacra, 179, 77, the tongue, I. PROP, as 
a part of the body, Rev. xvi. 10, as the 
organ of speech, Mk. vii. 33, 35. Lu. i. 
64. 1 Cor. xiv. 9. Ja. iii. 5, sq. Personi- 
fied, Rom. xiv. 11. Phil. ii. 11. irdcra yX. 
' every person,' Acts ii. 26. So ' to bridle 
the tongue,' &c. Ja. i. 26. iii. 8. 1 Pet. 
iii. 10. Comp. Ecclus. xxviii. 18, sq. — II. 
By METON. speech, language, 1) gener. 
1 John iii. 18, /xr/ dyaTrwiuLEV Xoyu) 
/uiijok yXoiaarr], 'in speech or talk [only].' 
Comp. Theogn. 63. 13, yXcoaari (piXo^. 
So Sept. & Class. 2) spec, of a particu- 



r All 



0 



FN 12 



lar language or dialed^ Acts ii. 11. 1 Cor. 
xiii'. 1. Sept. and Class. Put for the peo- 
ple who use a language, e. gr. (puXal, 
Kal Xaoi, Kai yXooacFaL^ Rev. v. 9. vii. 9. 
X. 11. xi. 9. xiii. 7. xiv. 6. xvii. 15, and 
Sept. In the phrases yA-oicrcrats frspats, 
or KaLvai<5^ XaXelu, ' to speak in new 
tongues' not previously known, and other 
than those known, Acts ii. 4, (see my 
note,) Mk. xvi. 17, yXw'o-crats XaXsTu, ' to 
speak with tongues miraculously;' Trpoa-ev- 
X£o-0ai yXcocrcrr}^ ' to speak in an unknown 
tongue,' 1 Cor. xiv. 14. And so must be 
understood the expression 1 Cor. xiv. 
19, XoyoL kv yXaicrar}^ or simplv yXwcr- 
a-ai, 1 Cor. xii. 10, 28. xiii. 8. xiv. 22, 
26. See more in my note on Acts ii. 4. — 
III. METAPH. put for any thing resembling 
a tongue in shape, Acts ii. 3, where see my 
note. 

TXwara'oKOiULOV^ ou, to, {yXcoaaa^ 
the tongue, mouth-piece (like our reed) 
of a wind-instrument, and /co/xeo), to take 
care of,) prop, a case or box to keep the 
tongues of musical ivind-instrmments in^ 
but afterwards any hooc for preserving uten- 
sils, books, or other valuables. Thus it is 
used by Jos. Ant. vi. 2, 6, to express the 
little cliest^ in which the Philistines put the 
golden mice and emerods, 1 Sam. vi. 11, 
and by Sept. in 2 Chron. xxiv. 8, used to 
express tlie Ark: it also occurs in Lon- 
ginus, Plutarch, and other later writers. 
In N. T. it only occ. John xii. 6. xiii. 29, 
where it denotes a casket to put money 
and so Plutarch Galb. § 16. The early 
and correct spelling was yXoD(T(TOKoiuLs.Tou. 

Vvacp El) £0)9, o, (yi/a^os, a card, or 
teazle, used by wool-combers,) a fuller^one 
who fulled and dressed new clothes, or 
scoured and cleansed old ones, raising the 
nap by means of the teazle ; and also, by 
the use of fullers' earth and alkali, restored 
the colour to its original whiteness. Mk. ix. 
3, ola yua<ps.v£ ettI t^s yrj's ov duvarai 
XsvKauai. Xenoph. Theoph. Plut. & Sept. 

r//r/(ri09, oi», o, 77, adj. {yEveaLo^ or 
y£vricrL09^ fr. y£i/o§,) of genuine hirth^ 
prop, as said of legitimate children, opposed 
to bastards, Hom. II. xi. 102. In N. T. 
applied to- express the relation of a disciple 
to his teacher, 1 Tim. i. 2, yv. tLkvijo kv 
TriarTEL. Tit. i. 4, yy.T. kuto. KOLvrjUTTLaTLV, 
Hence of things, (as moral qualities,) 
genziine^ as opp. to spurious, Pind. 01. ii. 
21, yapLU dyojv Fi/rjcrtats ett' dpsTais. 
Also by impl. as said of persons, sincere, 
true, faithful, Phil. iv. 3, cru^uyg yvva-LE. 
Polyb. iv. 30, 4, ol yvvo-Loi tmv uvopcou, 
' truly just and upright.' So to yvricrLov, 
' sincerity,' 2 Cor. viii, 8, to ayairii's yv. 
3 Mace. iii. 19, ouSkv yvrja-LOv (SouXovraL 

(pipELV. 

Tvriariws^ adv. (yi/^cios,) sincerely, 



faithfully, Phil. ii. 20, octtl? yv. to. iTEpl 
vp.u)v ixipLfxvri(TEL. 2 Macc. xiv. 8, virkp 
Toov av-i^KouTuyv tm ^aarLXel yv. (ppo- 
vuiv. 3 Macc. iii. 23, toi/s Trpos yv. 
diaKELixivov^. 

Fvocpo^, ov, 6. This, and the rarer 
term 6v6(po9, were old and rough forms, 
afterwards softened to v6<po<s and vE<po?, 
though both came from vivocpa, perf mid. 
of vicpco, cogn. with vk<pu), 'to snow.' 
The original word was vEvocpd^, part. neut. 
corrupted into Sv6(po<s or yvocpo^, signify- 
ing prim, snow-cloud, and then subst. a 
dense cloud, such as that around Mt. Sinai, 
when Jehovah appeared there. See Ex. 
xix. 16. 

TvwjULTi, 179, 77, {yLyvwcTKco, to perceive, 
conceive, acquire knowledge of, and by 
impl. to exercise it in judging and decid- 
ing,) prop, and gener. the mind, or se7itient 
principle, the xp^uxv in man, Xen. Cyr. viii. 

8, 10; also in Class, the faculty of judgment 
or imll, and its result, in knoidedge of, or 
hidgment respecting, any thing ; also pur- 
pose, and even simply volition, &c. In 
N. T. it is used in various modes and 
diversified shades of sense; 1) as import-, 
ing opinion judgment, either in reference 
to oneself, 1 Cor. vii. 40, KaTo. t^v k^x^v 
yvcofjLi^v, or to others, counsel, 1 Cor. vii. 
25, yvcojULt^v SlScdiull. 2 Cor. viii. 10, and 
Class. 2) as denoting volition, in refe- 
rence to the bent of the mind on any 
object ; (so the phrase e^elv yvM/uLrjv irpo's 
TLva or Ti, Thuc. v. 13. iii. 25,) and that 
in various modes, whether simply inclina- 
tion, or desire, 1 Cor. i. 10, kv ttj avT^ 
yvcojuLTj, ' same mind or will,' (so Thuc. iii. 

9, taroL yvoofxr], also v. 38,) or, as merely 
implying will, in the sense accord or consent, 
Philem. 14, ou x^P^^ '^^^ ^V*^ yi/toyur;§ — 
TTotTjaai, (for which a Class, writer would 
have said ovk avEv,) or finally, as the ej^c^ 
of inclination and will, in the sense purpose, 
design. Acts xx. 3, kyivETO yj/w/xr?, scil. 
avTM, Tov viro<rTpE(pELv. So Thuc. i. 
62, 3, riv ok rj yvco/nr] tov 'A. kTriT^pEtv, 
&c. Rev. xvii. 17, TroirjcraL ttjv yv(jifxr]v 
avTov, Joseph, and Class. 

VvcopiX^u), f. L(Tw, to make known, 
trans, foil, by acc. of thing and dat. of 
pers., or acc. with Trpo?, I. to others, 
1) gener. to reveal, declare, Rom. ix. 22, 
sq. Lu. ii. 15. Acts ii. 28. Eph. iii. 5, 10. 
Col, i. 27. Gal. i. 11. Ph.iv.6. Sept. and 
Class. 2) spec, in the sense, to narrate, 
tell, Eph. vi. 21. Col. iv. 7, 9. 2 Cor. viii.l, 
1 Macc. xiv. 28. 3) said of a Divine 
teacher, who unfolds divine revelations, 
John XV. 15. xvii. 26. Rom. xvi. 26. 
Eph. i. 9. vi. 19. 2 Pet. i. 16. In 1 Cor. 
xii. 3, yv(x>pLX,w vpXv, xv. 1, and per- 
haps Gal. i. 11, it seems to stand for 
avayvuipiX^w, by recalling to the mind 



71 



rp A 



truths which, though taught, had not been 
sufficiently hiid to heart. — II. to onesclf\ 
in the sense, to pid in mind of^ impress^ 
Phil. i. 22, ov yvo3pLX,ity^ ' non video, 
nescio.' Sept. and later Class. 

Vvio(TL<5^ €(o<s^v^ {yiviva-hcu)^) k>/07cled(/c, 
i. e. 1) the facuUi/ of Jiuo^i'ing^ as evinced 
in discemment^ ov penetndion^ Eph. iii. 19, 
Tiiv VTTspfSdWovcrau TTj^ yv(jo(TEUi<s ayd- 
TTjjz/ Tov Xptcr-Tou, ' which surpasses all 
comprehension,' or is superior to all other 
knowledge. 2) suhjectivehi^ said of 'what 
one knows,' knowledge^ Lu. i. 77. Phil. iii. 
8. Rom. xi. 33, yi/wo-is Gsou. Sept. and 
Class. So of a knowledge of the Christian 
religion gener. Rom. xv. 14. 1 Cor. i. 5. 
viii. 1. 2 Pet. iii. 18, or spec, of a deeper 
knowledge thereof, both theoretical and 
experimental, 1 Cor. viii, 7, 10, 11. 2 Cor. 
xi. 6. Said of a practical knowledge of 
what is to be done, or not done, discretion^ 
prudence^ 2 Cor. vi. 6. 1 Pet. iii. 7. 2 Pet. 

i. 5, 6. and Sept. 3) said of what is 
kno\\ii ohjedively^ either gener. hioiv- 
ledge^ science^ doctrine^ 2 Cor. ii. 14. iv. 6. 
Col. ii. 3! Sept. or spec, religiotis know- 
ledge^ or religion gener. Ln. xi. 52. Rom. 

ii. 20. 1 Tim. vi. 20; also the deepest kind 
of it, 1 Cor. xii. 8. Xoyo5 yi/wcrews, where 
see my note, and compare Lu. xi. 52, 
V K\tl<s Tfj9 yyctXTEcos, 1 Cor. xiii. 2, 8. 
xiv. 6. 2 Cor. viii. 7. x. 5. 

r 1/ 60 cr T s, ou, 6, {yLV(x)<TK(i}.)gnarus^ 
one iclio tJioroughly Icnoics any tiling^ Acts 
xxvi. 3. Susan, ver, 42. Said of God, tuw 
KpvTTTuju yv(jo(jTi]<s. Sept. 1 Sam.xxviii. 3. 

Pj/ to o-To §, r/, oi/, adj. (yiywo-zcoj,) I. 
as an ADJ. 1) in the sense hiown^ gener. as 
said both of persons and things, and foil, 
by dat. Job. xviii. 15, 16. Acts i. 19. xv. 
18. xix. 17 ; by icaTct with gen. of place, 
Acts ix. 42. Sept. So yvoio-nrov zcttoj 
foil, by dat. 'be it known to,' Acts ii. 14. 
iv. 10, et al. and Sept. In an emphatic 
sense, notable^ i. e. known of all, Acts iv. 
16, yvudUTov (STiiixiiov. So Ps. Ixxvi. 1, 
yi^woTTos 6 0£6§, ' known and magnified.' 
2) in the sense hnoicahle^ to yv, tov 
Qeou^ ' what may be known of God,' Rom. 
i. 19. Xen. Hist. ii. 3, 18.— II. As a 
SUBST. an acquaintance^ or ordinary friend, 
Lu. ii. 44. xxiii. 49. Sept. 

V oyyvX^ui^i. vcroo^ (a word formed from 
the sound, derived from the noise of 
doves) to midter or murmur; 1) to mutter^ 
i. e. utter in a low voice, and aside, Job. 
vii. 32. 2) with the notion of complaint, 
to murmur^ absol. 1 Cor. x. 10. foil, by 
KaTo. with gen. Matt. xx. 11, or Trspt, 
John vi. 41, 61, or 7rp6§ with acc. Lu. v. 
30 ; by ^£t' aXKriKmv^ John vi. 43. Sept. 
and Class. 

Foyy uo-/xo§,oi/, 6, (yoyyu^co,) gener. 
a mutter or murmur^ 1 ) a muttering^ arising 



from latent discontent; and dictated by cau- 
tion, or ap])rehciit;ion, rather than resent- 
ment. So dpuv^ in Thucyd. and the best 
writers, John vii. 12. 2) murmuring^ de- 
noting the eocpression of discontent, or dis- 
satisfaction. Acts vi. 1 ; foil, by Trpo's and 
acc. of person, Lu. v. 30, ky6yyvX,ov Trpo^ 
T0V9 /ua0?)Td9 avTov. Sept. & later Class. 

Poyyuo'TT/s, ou, o, (yoyyu^to,) a 
miLrmurer^ Jude 16. Prov. xxvi. 21, Theod. 

PoTjs, rjTos, 6, 1) prop, a juggler^ con- 
jurer^ or diviner ; prob. derived from yoos, 
' a low murmur :' and indeed in ^schyl. 
Choeph. 809, we have yo7j§ in the sense 
plor^ator, Kp&Kn-ou yor]TU)v vofxov /u£0rjo-o- 
ixiv ; such being the tone in which the 
ancient conjurors uttered their incanta- 
tions. So Milton : ' Without his rod re- 
versed, And backward mutters of dissever- 
ing power.' Soph. Aj. 582, QpoEiv eiru)- 
Sd9 TTjOos TOficovTL iTrjfxaTL. 2) by impl. 
an impostor or clieat. 2 Tim. iii. 15. and 
Class. 

Po/xos, Of, o, (ytyOjLia fr. y£jU6o) lit. 
'that of which any vessel yefiEi^ is full,' 
Exod. xxiii. 5. esp. 1) the lading ov freight 
of a ship, Acts xxi. 3. and Class. 2) by 
impl. the merchandise with which it is 
freighted, Rev. xviii. 11, sq. 

Poi/gus, £tt)§, 6, (ygyoi/a, fr. yLvofxai^) 
prop, generator^ a father. In N. T. occurs 
only in the plur. denoting both father and 
mother, ^are7^zf5, Matt.x. 21. Mk.xiii. 12. 
Lu. ii. 27. et al. Sept. and Class. 

Poi/u, yoyaT09, to, the hnee^ to. yo- 
i/ttTa, ' the knees,' Heb. xii. 12. Sept. and 
Class. Hence, in the phrases TidsvaL to. 
youuTa, ' to kneel in prayer and supplic' 
Mk. XV. 19. Lu. xxii. 41. Acts vii. 60. 
ix. 40. XX. 36. xxi. 5. KafxirrEiu yovv. or 
yovaToc tlvl^ ' to kneel in homage or 
adoration,' Rom. xi. 4. xiv. 11. Phil, ii, 
10 ; in supplic. Eph. iii. 14. 

rOZ/l'7r£T£00, f. ?7CT'W, (yOfUTTgTtjS, fr. 

the phrase eh yovv irEcr&lv^) to fall on 
one''s knees., to kneel., whether in supplica- 
tion, Matt. xvii. 14. Mk. i. 40 ; or rever- 
ence, Mk. X. 17 ; or mock homage, Mk. 
xxvii. 29. Class. 

Ppa/x/za, aT09, to, (.ypa^w,) gener. 
any thing ivritten., (see on ypa</)6o,) as 1. 
an alphabetical character.^ or characters, 
marked on writing-boards, or engraven on 
stone or metal, Lu. xxiii. 38, y. "^W^vl- 
Kol^, 2 Cor. iii. 7, iv ypdjuLfxao-Lv evte- 
TVTTcojuLivri iv Xidoi?. Gal. vi. 11, ttiiXl- 
Koi? yp. 'at how great length;' and so 
Class. — II. any thing written., a ivriting., 
I Esd. iii. 9, 13, and Class. In N. T. 1) 
a letter.^ Acts xxviii. 21. Gal. vi. 11, and 
Class. 2) a bill, bond., Lu. xvi. 6, 7. Jos. 
Ant. xviii. 6, 3. Class, in the sense ac- 
counts of expenses, &c. 3) ypd/uLfxaTa, 



rpA 



72 



r YM 



said of the writings composing any book, 
as of Moses, John v. 47, or of the 0. T. 
(the Scriptures) 2 Tim. iii. 15. Jos. Ant. 
V. 1, 17._ X. 10, 4. 4) fig. TO ypdiJLjxa, 
'the written, verbal, or literal meaning,' 
as opp, to the spirit, or spiritual one, to 
'TrvEVjxa^ and applied to the Mosaic law, 
opp. to the Gospel, Rom. ii. 27, 29. 2 Cor. 
iii. 6, 7. — III. letters^ or learning^ as con- 
tained in written books. Acts xxvi. 24, 
TToXXa ypdju/jLaTa. John vii. 15, ypdfx- 
juLUTa EioivuL, 'to be learned,' namely, in 
Jewish knowledge, Dan. i. 4. Class. 

TpajULjULaTEv^^ ecos, o, (ypa^co,) prop. 
a icritei\ but, by use, a -puhlic ivnter^ or 
notary^ &c. 1) in the Greek sense, a pub- 
lic officer, like our custos rotulorum^ or 
puhlic secretary^ whose office it was to en- 
rol and recite, also to keep the public laws 
and decrees, &c. Acts xix. 35, where see 
my note, 2) in the Jewish sense, a kind 
of secretary of state ^ whether civil, 2 Sam. 
viii. 17. XX. 25, or military, 2 Kings xxv. 
19. 2 Chr. xxvi. 11. Liter, in Sept. and 
N. T. a scribe^ one skilled in the know- 
ledge of the Jewish ypa^/xaTa, or Scrip- 
tures, a sci'ipturist. Thus, there may be 
an allusion to their transcribing the copies 
of the Scriptures ; at any rate, that they 
were transcribed under their superintend- 
ence is very probable, Matt. ii. 4. v. 20, et 
ai. Hence, by impl. one instructed^ a 
scliolar^ one able to teach others, Matt, 
xiii. 52. xxiii. 34. 1 Cor. i. 20. 

rpaTTTOs, tj, oV, adj. {ypdcpw^) 1) 
prop, tvritten or engraved^ as applied to 
Xo'yos, &c. 2) fig, Rom. ii. 15, to 'ipyov 
Tov vofxov ypaiTTov kv TaZs Kapdiai? 
vjuLcov^ ' deeply imprinted,' with allusion to 
the characters traced with the iron stylus 
on the waxed tablets of the ancients, al- 
luded to in iEschyl. Prom. 814. 

rpa(pv^ 17, (ypd<pco^) prop, and in 
Class, a tvriting, as oft. in Sept. and Class, 
In N. T. 17 ypacprj and ai ypa(pai^ the 
St^inpture^ or Scriptures^ i. e. of the Jews, 
the 0. T. Matt. xxi. 42. John v. 39. 
Acts viii. 32. Rom. ix. 17, et al. By 
sjTiecd. put for ' the contents of the Scrip- 
tures,' whether declarations or promises. 
Matt. xxii. 29. Mk. xii. 24. John x. 35. 
Acts i. 16, &c. ; or ' prophecies,' Matt, 
xxvi. 54, 56. Lu. iv. 21. Rom. xvi. 26, al. 

Vpacpo}^ f. I. prop, and prim, to 

SCRATCH, or scGre, Horn. II. xvii. 599, 
ypdxj/E Se oi oCTEOv axpi-^ ^'■Xf^V 
UovXvSd/ixavTo?. Also, to gr^ave, or cut 
in, Horn. II. vi, 169. Hence, to carve 
figures, as 1 Kings vi. 29. Sept. tolxov^ — 
Eu KoXaiTToT^ Eypaxp-E : or engrave them 
on metal or wood, like our etching ; also 
to form alphabetical characters with the 
stylus, (whereby the characters were cut 
or graven in,) to ivrite, absol. John viii. 6, 



8, yp. £t9 n-rju yfju. — II. TO WRITE, i. e. 

eapress by writing, foil, by arc. of thing, 
expr. or impl. John xix. 22, o '^^iypacpa, 
yiypacpa, xx. 30, sq. xxi. 24, sq. Lu. i. 
63. xvi. 6, sq. Rom. xvi. 22, et al. Sept. 
and Class. Said of what is written, i. e. 
contained in Scripture, Mk. i. 2. John 
viii. 17. Lu. iii. 4, al. So ytypaTTTat, or 
TO yEypafxp.tvov, as a form of citation, 
Matt. iv. 4, and oft.; also constr. with 
prepositions and a noun or pron. as Sid 
TLvo^, ETTL Tiz/tt, TLvi, OY Tti/o§, or a dat. 
of pers. without prep. ; also foil, by acc. of 
pers. to ivrite about, or describe, John i. 
46, — HI. TO WRITE, i. e. to commit to 
ivriting, Mk. x. 4, yp. (3l(3\lov diro- 
(TTaorLou. Lu. xxiii. 38, kiTLypucpriv. Acts 
xxiii. 25, ETTLGToX^v, 2 Pet. iii. 1. Sept. & 
Class. — iy..^o lurite to, address any one, 
foil, by acc. of thing, and dat. of pers. 2 Cor. 

i. 13, ov yap dXXa ypdcpofxEV vixlv, Phil, 

iii. 1 ; by dat. Rom. xv. 15. 2 Cor. ii. 4. 
2 John 12. Rev. ii. 1 ; by dat. and oti, 1 
John ii. 12, sq. So of written communi- 
cations, either for information or instruc- 
tion, Acts XV. 23. xviii. 27. xxv. 26. 1 
Cor. V. 9. vii. 1. xiv. 37. 2 Cor. ix. 1. 
1 Thess. iv. 9. v. 1. Hence ypdcpEiv 
EVToXrjv TLVL, ' to wrlto a precept or 
command to any one,' Mk. x. 5. 1 John 

ii. 7. So yiypaiTTaL, ' it is directed,' 
i. e. in the law, Lu. ii. 23, and Sept. and 
Class. — V. for kyypdcpEiv, to ivrite any 
one's name in a register or book, to regis- 
ter, Lu, X. 20. Rev. xiii. 8, al. and Sept. 

TpawSi] <s, £09, 6," V, adj. {ypav^,) 
cmile., foolish, 1 Tim. iv. 7, and Class. 

Tp7]yopE(x),f. 770-0), {kypvyopa, 2perf. 
of EyELpu),) gener. to be wakeful, to tvatck, 
intrans. (a later Greek word,) 1) prop, to 
be icakeful, leep awake. Matt. xxiv. 43. 
xxvi. 38, 40, sq. Mk. xiii. 34. xiv. 34, 37, 
sq. Lu. xii. 37, 39. Sept. and Class, 2) 
fig. to be ivatcifid, attentive. Matt. xxiv. 
42. xxv. 13. Mk. xiii. 35, 37. Acts xx. 
31. 1 Cor. xvi. 13. Col. iv. 2. 1 Th. v. 6. 
1 Pet. V. 8. Rev. iii. 2, sq. Sept. and 
Class. 3) metaph. to be aicake, i. e. alive, 
as opp. to the sleep of our bodies in death, 
1 Th. V. 10. Comp.iv.15. Rom. xiv. 8, 9. 

Vv fxvdX,(jii, f. aVo), {yv five's,^ 1) propc 
to practise gymnastic exercises, as one of 
the athletse, Thuc. i. 6. Arr. Epict. iv. 4, 
11. 2) metaph. to exercise oneself m any 
pursuit, to train or accustom oneself, 1 Tim. 

iv. 7, yvp^vaX^E (TEavTGV nrpo^ Evai^Eiav. 
Athen. p. 25, D. y. ^rpos opvEodi-^pEVTi- 
Kvv. Arr. Epict. i. 26, 3, yvpLvdX,ovaiv 
'n/ud<5 oi (pL\6ao(pOL ettl t^§ ^Ewpia^. 
Heb. V. 14, at<T6i/Tr7pta yEyv/mvaariuEva 
ky^ovTiJov, *• exercised by use,' and thereby 
accustomed, xii. 11, tois avT-fj? 
yiyv fxvatrpiivoL^. 2 Pet. ii. 14, Kapciav 



r Y M 



73 



A AI 



yzyv fxvacrnivi]v TrXeove^iais^ 'practised 
in covetousncss.' 

TujULvaaia^ a?, i/, {yviixv<xX,(i)^) 1) 
prop, gymnastic exercise^ cspec. as taken in 
the palaestra ; 2) the exercise^ or trial, of 
the bodily powers attendant thereon. In 
N. T. exercise^ or training, gener. 1 Tim. 
iv. 8, croofxaTLKi] y. where, as being in an- 
tithesis with ver. 7, many eminent Com- 
mentators ex})lain ascetic training^ mortifi- 
cation of bodily appetites, &c. as described 
at ver. 3 ; conip. Col. ii. 23. And an ex- 
ample has been addnced from Arr. Epict. 
i. 7, 1'2; but it rather refers to the first, or 
active, training : see my note. 

ru^i/?}T£i/a), f. £ucra), (yu^yr^T)]?, fr. 
yu/xiyos,) prop, to he naked ; also fig. to 6e, 
as we say, half-naked^ i. e. poorly clad, 1 
Cor. iv. 11. 

Fu/xi/os, r/, 02/, adj. naked^ I. PROP, as 
regards the body^ viz. 1) lit. naked^ with- 
out any clothing, prop. Mk. xiv. 51, sq. 
fig. Rev. xvi. 15. xvii. 16. Sept. and 
Class. 2) said of one who is 'without an 
outer garment,' and is clad only in his 
tunic, (xtT6bv,) John xxi. 7. Acts xix. 16. 
Sept. and Class. 3) ' poorly clad, desti- 
tute of necessary clothes,' implying ex- 
treme want. Matt. xxv. 36, 38, 43. Ja. ii. 
15. Sept. ; fig. destitute^ i. e. of spiritual 
good. Rev. iii. 17, ' not clothed in the robe 
of Christ's righteousness,' and thereby ex- 
posed to the wrath of God. — II. fig. said of 
the soul^ as disengaged from the body, in 
which it had been clothed, 2 Cor. v. 3, ou 
yviJLvoL &vp£dt)<j6fjLeda, i. e. ' our souls 
will not strictly be found naked, but our 
bodies will be glorified,' 6lc. Comp. v. 4, 
and 1 Cor. xv. 51, sq. So the ancient 
Fathers, and also Plato, Cratyl. 20, li/u- 
XVV y' -mrju Tou (y(x>fxaTo<s. The ellips. 
is very rure ; yet it is found also in Aretseus, 
p. 17, yv/JLvrj Trj ^VXV yivovTai ixavnrLe<s 

Vv jmvoTr}^^ tt^tos, 77, naked^iess^ gener. 
In N. T. said 1 ) of the being destitute of 
necessary clothing, Rom. viii. 35. 2 Cor. 
xi. 27. So Sept. in Dent, xxviii. 48. 2) 
put, as in Gen. ix. 22, eT^e yvfxvcoa-iv, 
for 'the parts of shame.' Rev. iii. 18, 'iva 
/Lit] (pavspoodrj rj aicrx^ivr^ t?/§ yvfxv. crou, 
where the word denotes fig. ' the being 
destitute of spiritual clothing,' i. e. of the 
righteousness which is by faith. 

T vvaiKap Lov^ ov, to, (dim. of yvvr)^) 
prop, a little woman^ but fig. as muliercula 
in Latin, a paltry weak woman^ 2 Tim. iii. 
6. Marc. Anton, and Arrian. 

Vvva LKzlo^^ (.ia^ eIov, adj. of or per- 
taining to woman^ Esth. ii. 11, /cara Tr]v 
avXrjv Trjv yvvaiKeiav. Thuc. ii. 45, y. 
apET^s. Horn. Od. A. 436, yvvaiKeia^ 
(3ov\d^. Also of female dress, orna- 



ments. Sec. In N. T. occ. also in 1 Pet. 

iii. 7, avi/OLKOvuTE^ KaTcc. yi/uxTLV^ ws 
dadsveaTtpcp (tkevsl tw yvi/aiKeiu) utto- 
vEfjLouTa? Ti/U)///, where tw yvu. is dat. 
neut. of TO yvuaiKEToVy scil. yti/o?, the 
ivoman-kind^ the female sex. The word is 
expressed in Plato, p. 620, A. ixl<tel toD 
yvvaiKELov yeuov^. And so yvvrj in 
Hdot. vii. 39. 

Fui/t], alKos, 17, voc. CO yui/ai, a 
ivomcm., one of the female sex, as distinct 
from the male. I. gener. Matt. xiv. 21. 
XV. 38, and oft. Said of a young woman 
or damsel, Lu. xxii. 57. Gal. iv. 4. Sept. 
in Esth. ii. 4; of an adult female, Matt. 
V. 28. ix. 20, 22. xi. 11, and oft.— II. 
SPEC, with a gen. or EX^t^^i or the adj. 
vTraudpo^, Rom. vii. 2, as denoting rela- 
tion to some man, viz. 1) as one betrothed^ 
but not yet married. Matt. i. 20, 24. Lu. 
ii. 5. So Sept. and Class. Fig. of the 
Church, as the bride of Christ, Rev. xix. 
7. xxi. 9. 2) a married woman, wife^ 
Matt. V. 31, sq. xiv. 3. Mk. vi. 18, et al. 
ssepe. Sept. and Class. 3) a ividotv, X^P^ 
being understood, Matt. xxii. 24. Mk. xii. 
19. Lu. XX. 29; expr. in Lu. iv. 26.— III. 
in the vocative w yvuuL, in direct ad- 
dress. Matt. XV. 28. Lu. xiii. 12. John ii. 4. 

iv. 21. XX. 13, 15. 1 Cor. vii. 16 ; where it 
is far from implying disrespect, (any more 
than avSpE's as applied to men,) but rather 
the contrary, as in the best Classical 
writers, from Homer downwards ; so that 
it differs little from the use of our lady, or 
madam, in the voc. 

T (JO via, as, 17, prop, an angle, also a 
corner, gener. I. an exterior projecting 
corner. Matt. vi. 5, iv TaT§ yvoviai^ tcov 
irXaTELwv, i. e. where several streets meet. 
Matt. xxi. 42. Mk. xii. 10. Lu. xx. 17. 
Acts iv. 11. 1 Pet. ii. 7. Rev. vii. 1. xx. 8, 
al TEcraapE^ y coi/tat, ' the four corners (or 
quarters) of the earth.' Sept. and Class. 
And so Johnson, Diet, in v. corner, ex- 
plains. — II. an interior angle, an inner 
corner, and by impl. a dark corner. Acts 
xxvi. 26, kv yuiuia TmrpayixEvov. Arr. 
Epict. ii. 12, 17, kv yojvia ttoleIv. 

A. 

AatfioviX^o ixai, f. icrofxaL, (Saificov,) 
equiv. to daipiOvLov exoo, to have adcemon, 
to be possessed by an evil spirit, 'to be a 
demoniac,' Matt. iv. 24. viii. 16, 28, 33. 
ix. 32. xii. 22. xv. 22. Mk. i. 32. v. 15, 
16, 18. Lu. viii. 36. John x. 21. Comp. 
V. 20. On the true view respecting the 
Scripture demoniacs, see my note on the 
above passages, espec. Matt. iv. 24. 

AaLpLovLov, ov, TO, (neut. of adj. 
SaLfjiovLQ^,) prop, by an ellips. of ttj/eu- 
fjLa, a spirit coming from 6 daifxuiv. 



A AI 



74 



A E 



a denion^ or good spirit. Hence, 1) 
gener. an inferior deity^ as said of the 
heathen gods oft. in the Class. ; and so 
Acts xvii. 18, ^evcov daijULOVLcov^ 'foreign 
deities ;' sometimes in Class, of the Deity 
himself. 2) said of a tutelary or guardian 
sinrit^ e. g. that of Socrates, Xen. Mem. iv. 
8. Apol. Socr. 4. 3) of an evil spirit ; for as 
the Jews regarded the gods of the heathen 
as, if at all real beings, devils or unclean spi- 
rits, irvzvfxaTa ^aLfxovicov^ Rev. xvi, 14, 
so they used the terms dai/uLcov and Saifxo- 
vLov of the evil spirits^ (fallen angels,) sub- 
ject to Satan as their head. Matt. ix. 34, 
and wandering up and down in the world 
to do his behests, and consequently work 
evil of every kind, both physical and moral, 
on the human race ; in the former case, by 
rendering men demoniacs, and afflicting 
them with various diseases ; in the latter, 
by tempting them to all manner of evil, 1 
Tim. iv. 1. Ja. ii. 19; comp, Eph. vi. 12. 
It often occ. in the phrases daLfxoi/Lov 
t'XSii^, ' to be a demoniac ;' &K(SdXXELv rd 
c. 'to eject demons;' i^epx£(yGai £«: 
Tii/09, ' to depart from, cease to vex ;' and 
ELo-ipx^adaL £i§ Tti/a, ' to enter into,' and 
make their abode. 

AaLfMovLwdrj^^ £os, 6, adj. {daLjui.6- 
vLou^) demon-like^ devilish^ Ja. iii. 15, ovk 
ecrmv avT7] rj cro<pLa dvcod&v KaTEpy(p- 
jU£i/>j, dA.\' fTTiygios — BaLpLOVLcoSi]^, with 
which I would compare a similar senti- 
ment of Plut. vii. 241, H. to eu iifxiv 
dXoyov Kul dTUKTOV Kai ^iaLov^ oh ^elov 
dXXd oaLfxovLKov : the same writer in his 
Pericles speaks of cpdovov as daL/jiovLKou. 
And, indeed, ^aLfxavLKo^ is the Class, term, 
whereas daLfxovLthSti^ is so rare, that it has 
only been found elsewhere in Symmachus' 
version of Ps. xci. 3, and Etym. Mag. 336,' 
38. I 

AaifjLcov^ o, 77, {Barifxayv^ know-, 

ing,) prop, and in Class, writers, a deity ^ a 
divine and omniscient intelligence, a ge-^ 
nius. In N. T. a demon^ or evil spirit. Matt. ' 
viii.31. Mk.v.l2. Lu. viii.29. Rev.xviii.2.' 

A a /CI/ CO, f. ^rJ^Ojuai, 1) prop, to hite 
or tear ivith the teeth. Class. In N. T. 2) 
metaph. to vex, annoy, harass. Gal. v. 15, 
EL dXXriXov^ duKUETE, i. e. ' annoy each 
other by abuse or calumny.' So Arr. Epict. 
ii. 22, duKVEiu dXXriXovs Kai XoLdopEla- 
dai, 

ActKpv, uos, TO, and AdKpvov, ov, to, 
a tear, Lu. vii. 38, 44, et al. and Ta 
SaKpva, tears, iceeping. So did or /x£t« 
daKpvcov, Acts XX. 19, 31. 2 Cor. ii. 4, 
and EU SaKpvori, as denoting the tenderest 
affection. 

AaKpvtx), f. v(Tit), {SaKpv,) to shed 
tears, intrans. John xi. 35, and Class. 

Aa/cTuXtos, ov, 6, {odKTvXo?,) a 
finger-ling, Lu. xv. 22, given as a mark of 



honour ; comp. Gen. xli. 43. Esth. viii. 2, 
and Class. 

Aa/cTuXos, ov, 6, (not from duKco, as 
Lennep supposes, but from o£t/ca), 'to point 
out,' as Heb. m'^^, ' finger,' fr. ' to 
point out,' so called fr. one of its chief uses. 
It is, indeed, a dimin. in form fr. dELKTo^, 
(as Lat. digitzisfr. SelketS^,) q. SelktvXos:, 
the pointer, of which a vestige remains in 
the name given to the fo7^efinger,bELKTLK6'3,) 
a finger. Matt, xxiii. 4. Mk. vii. 33. Lu. xi. 
46, et al. & Sept. In Matt, xxiii. 4, and 
Lu. xi. 46, the phrase ' not to touch with a 
finger, or the tip of the finger,' is said pro- 
verbially of those, who do not make the 
slightest effort to accomplish any purpose 
they profess to seek. It occ. also in the 
later Class. By meton, 6 daK. tov Qeov, 
(the finger being considered as the chief 
instrument of work, so our finger from 
A.-S. fengan, capere, prehendere,) 'the 
power of God,' Lu. xi. 20. 

A a ^ a ^ o), f. aoro), to tame, subdue, trans. 

1) prop, of taming wild animals, (asHom, 
II. xxiii. 655, and Ja. iii. 7,) but also 
of coercing wild and brutal men, Mk. v. 4, 
ov^EL<5 avTov tcrx^^ oafxdcraL. 2) fig. to 
subdue, both as said of conquering encr 
mies, and of repressing unruly passions, 
Hom. II. ix. 492, and Joseph. Ant. iii. 5, 3, 
<pp6vi]jULa. Hence Jas. iii. 8, d. ti]v 
yXcoaarav. 

AafxaXi^, £609, 77, (^a/xa^co,) a heifer, 
so called as being of fit age to be tamed by 
the yoke, Heb. ix. 13. Sept. and Class. 

Aaz/£ 1^0), f. fio'co, (^ai/£ioi/,) \)tolend 
money, whether at or without interest ; but 
in N. T. only the latter, Lu. vi. 34, sq. 

2) mid. havEL^pixai, to cause any one to 
lend money to oneself i. e. to borrow 
money. Matt. v. 42. Sept. and Class. 

AdvELov, ov, TO, neut. of SdvEio^, fr. 
Sduo^, a debt, i. e. ' something due for 
money lent,' Matt, xviii. 27. Sept. and 
Class. 

AavE La Tfj?, ov, 6, {Suvel'^u),) a lender^ 
a creditor, Lu. vii. 41. Sept. and Class. 

Aairavdu), f. ricrw, {dairavr),) 1) in 
a good sense, to expend money, to be at ex- 
pense, trans. Mk. v. 26, S. Ta Trap' fauT^s 
'wdvTa : absol. 2 Cor. xii. 15, SaTravrjara), 
Acts xxi. 24, d. ett' auToTs. Thuc. vii. 29. 
2) in a bad sense, to spend, i. e. waste, 
trans. -Lu. xv. 14, d. TrduTa : absol. Ja. 
iv. 3, EU Tats ri6ovaL9 vfxibv d. Thuc. iv, 
3. vii. 47. viii. 45. 

A air dv IT, 17, (^aTTTco, to consume,) 
expense, Lu. xiv. 28. Sept. and Class. 

Ag, a particle standing after one or two 
words in a clause, strictly adversati^'-e, but 
oftener transitive, and serving (like our 
but) to introduce something else, whether 



A E H 



5 



A EI 



opposite to what has been said, or in addi- 
tion thereto, or in explanation thiireof. 
Hence it denotes gener. hit^ and^ also, 
nameli/, &c. L adversative, bid, i. e. * on 
the contrary,' 1) simply or alone. Matt. vi. 

6, av Se, and Lu. xii. 14. xiii. 8, and oft. 
2) in the formula mku — Sk, ' indeed — but,' 
Acts ix. 7, et al. — II. continuative, hut, 
now, a?id, also, &c. 1) gener. and intro- 
ducing a new paragraph or sentence. Matt, 
i. 18. li. 9. iii. 1, et al. ssepe. In this use 
it is sometimes emphatic, espec. in interro- 
gative clauses, as 2 Cor. vi. 14, 15, 16. 
Gal. iv. 20, vdeXov Si. 2,) where it re- 
sumes a thought interrupted, in the sense 
t7ie?2, there/ore, &c. Matt. vi. 7, irpocrsv- 
XoiuLEvoL OS. John XV. 26. Rom. v. 8. 
2 Cor. X. 2. Ja. ii. 15. So in an apodosis 
after eI for sirEi, Acts xi. 17, tyw 6k Th 
i'lfxiju ; 3) as marking something added by 
way of explanation, or example, &c. but, 
and, namely, &c. Mk. iv. 37, to. cs 
KVfxaTa iTTE^aXEV. xvi. 8, elx^ Sk auTas 
Tpofxa's. John vi. 10, riv 8k xopiro^ ttoXv^ 
iv Tw ToVcj). Acts xxiii. 13. ix. 8. Rom. 
iii. 22. 1 Cor. x. 11. xv. 56. 4) Kai Sk, 
(where Kai always has the sense also,) and 
also, Mk. iv. 36, kul dWa dk 'TrXola riv 
IJ.ET avTov. John xv. 27. Acts v. 32. 

AtSjo-ts, ££o§, 1^, {diofiai,) prop, and 
prim, ivant, need of any thing, as in 
Aristot. and Antiph. ap, Steph. Thes. 
^schin. Socr. Dial. ii. 39, 40. Ps. xxi. 
24. Hence, as the expression of need and 
the desire of removing it, petition or sup- 
plication, considered as the deprecation of 
evil and entreaty for good, either for one- 
self, Lu. i. 13. Phil. iv. 6. Heb. v. 7. 

1 Pet. iii. 12, and Sept., or for others, 
Rom. X. 1. 2 Cor. i. 11. ix. 14. Eph. vi. 
18. Phil. i. 4, 19. 1 Tim. ii. 1. Ja. v. 16 ; 
or gener. as said of earnest prayer gener. 
Lu. ii. 37. V. 33. Acts i. 14. 1 Tim. v. 5. 

2 Tim. i. 3. Sept. and later Class. ; though 
there it is merely entreaty, earnest request, 

A El, impf. £0£i, f. Sevgel, impers. it 
is necessary, there is need of, i. e. some- 
thing that is absent and wanting; foil, 
by genit. In N. T. occ. only with an 
infin. pres. or aor., expr. or impl., and with 
or without an acc. ' it is necessary,' I. prop. 
from the nature of the case, a sense of 
duty and obligation, one must. Matt. xvi. 
21, oTt SeZ avTov aTTEXdElv £i§ 'I. xxvi. 
35. Mk. xiv. 31. Lu. ii. 49. iv. 43. John iii. 

7, 30. Acts xxi. 22. Heb. ix. 26, and Class. 
— II. spec, said of what is made necessary 
by Divine appointment, Johniii. 14. xx. 9; 
of what is right and proper in itself, or is 
prescribed by law, or custom, it is right, 
one must, it ought, &c. Lu. xiii. 14, 16. 
Mk. xiii. 14. John iv. 20. Acts v. 29. 
2 Tim. ii. 6, et al. Sept. and Class. ; also 
of what prudence would dictate, as a neces- 



sary means to an end. Acts xxvii. 21, eoel 
/ixt] dvdytadai. Of things unavoidable, 
' one must needs,' Matt, xxi v. 6. Mk. 
xiii. 7. Acts i. 16. 

AEiyima, aTO^, to, {Selkwijll,) 1) 
prop, what is shown, espec. as a sample of 
any merchandise to be sold. So Class, 
often. 2) in N. T. an eocample, held out 
to others, for warning, Jude 7. Comp. 
2 Pet. ii. 6. 3 Mace. ii. 5. Sometimes 
also occ. in later Class. 

Afiiy/xaTt^w, f. iaw, {^Elyfxa,) 1) 
prop, to make a public example of, to ex- 
pose to public shame. 2) equiv. to 
Tf apaSELyixaTiX^oti, absol. Col. ii. 15, Tas 
E^ovaia^ kSELyfxdTLCTEv, 'triumphed over 
the powers, triumphantly conquered,' with 
allusion to the public exposure of con- 
quered enemies, in the triumphal proces- 
sion. 

AELKvvfjLL and Aelkvvco, f. Sel^u), to 
show, trans. I. to point out, shoiv to the 
sight, cause any one to see. Matt. iv. 8. 
Lu. iv. 5, d. avTcp Trdaa^ Tas (SaaLXEia^ 
Tov Kocr/jLov. John v. 20. xiv. 8, 9. Matt, 
viii. 4, S&L^ov (XEavnrdv tw IepeT, 'pre- 
sent thyself for inspection.' Mk. i. 44. 
Lu. V. 14. Sept. and Class. So of what 
is shown in vision. Rev. i. 1. iv. 1. xvii. 1. 
xxi. 9, 10. xxii. 1, 6, 8.-11.^^ to offer to 
view, to display, John xx. 20, eSel'^ev av- 
ToX's Tas XEtpa's avTov. Heb. viii. 5. Sept. 
So of deeds, &c. John ii. 18. x. 32. 1 Tim. 
vi. 15. Sept. Of internal things, to tnani- 
fest, prove, Ja. ii. 18. iii. 13. Sept. and 
Class. — III. to shoiv, for use, and, by 
impl. to assign to, Mk. xiv. 15. Lu. xxii. 
12. — IV. to shoiu by words, to teach, de- 
clare. Matt. xvi. 21. Acts vii. 3. x. 28. 

1 Cor. xii. 31. Sept. and Class. 
AziXia, as, v, {oelXo's,) timidity, 

2 Tim. i. 7, irvExjfxa SEiXia's, equiv. to 
TTVEVfxa SelXov, Sept. and Class. 

A £ i \ ta w, f. daco, {SelXo?,) to be timid, 
or afraid, absol. John xiv. 27, and Sept. 

AfitXos, t], 6v, adj. {Sico, B&idno,) for- 
merly ^££Xos, timorous, fearful. Matt, 
viii. 26. Mk. iv. 40. Rev. xxi. 8. Sept. 
and Class. 

Aeluu, b,h-) TO, gen. Selvo^, dat. ^fiivt, 
acc. dEtva ; an idiom used in speaking of 
a person, or thing, whose name we do 
not know, or at least remember, or do 
not choose to mention. Matt. xxvi. 18, 
t'7ray£T€ £t§ Ttju ttoXlv Trpos tou dETva. 
So the Spaniards use fullano, the French 
tel, and the English Mr. Such-a-one, or 
What-d'ye-call-him, and the Latin nescio 
quis, 

Aelvoos, adv. from adj. Selvos, which 
signifies not only terrible, but great, vehe- 
ment, excessive, espec. as said of the suffer- 
ings of life, (so Selvul avfxcpopai,) and 
E 2 



AEI 



76 



the passions of men, espec. fear, grief, indig- 
nation. In this latter manner the adv. is 
chiefly used, having the sense vehementer. 
So Matt. viii. 6, oeivco^ (3acrauLX^6/j.svo?^ 
' grievously tortured,' and Lu. xi. 53, 8. 
iv&x^iv (for lyKOTslv) avrco, meaning 
' hard, bitter indignation against,' as Horn. 
II. V. 439, Selvo. bfJLOKkricra^ 7rpo(T€<^?7, 
' addressed him in sharp rebuke.' Herodot. 
ix. 35, idiouTO Sslvco's tov Tiypdvov. 

AstTTygo), f. J7craj, {Selttvov,) to take 
the ^ELTTvov^ or evening meal^ (see ^£t7r- 
vov^) intrans. Lu. xvii. 8. Sept. and Class. 
Said of the Paschal supper, Lu. xxii. 20. 
1 Cor. xi. 25. In Rev. iii. 20, 8. ^et 
auTou, /cat auT05 fXE-r e/ulov, symb. of 
admission into the Messiah's kingdom. 
See v. ydfxo^. 

Aelttvou^ ou, to; in Horn, and the 
early writers the morning meal^ as opp. to 
dopTTou^ the evening meal^ but in the Attic 
and later writers the evening meal^ whe- 
ther termed dinner or supper. And so in 
N. T. 1. prop, the late meal of the Jews, 
and also of the Greeks and Romans, taken 
at or towards evening; and, from this 
being the chief meal, the term is one em- 
ployed to denote a banquet or enteHain- 
inent^ both in N. T. (as Matt, xxiii. 6. 
Mk. vi. 21. xii. 39. Lu. xiv. 12, et al. 
John xii. 2. ) and the Class. Also a figure 
to denote the felicity of the Messiah's 
kingdom, Rev. xix. 9, 17. — II. said of the 
Paschal supper.^ John xiii. 2, 4. xxi. 20 ; of 
the Lord's Supper, 1 Cor. xi. 20. — III. by 
meton. the food taken at supper, 1 Cor. 
xi. 21, TO Ihiov TrpoXajuLfidi'EL. So 
Dan. i. 16. Hom. II. ii, 383, et al. He- 
siod. Op. i. 207. 

AELo-LdaLfxcov., 6, 17, adj. [SEldco, 

SaifxcDv^) prop, god-fearing., and in the 
Class, used both in a good sense, to signify 
religiously disposed.^ and in a bad one, 
superstitious. In N. T. occ. only in the 
former sense, as said of the Athenians, 
Acts xvii. 22, SELo-idaLjULovECTTipov^, i. e. 77 
aWous, 'more than the other nations.' 
See my note in loc. 

AsLCTLda LiJLOv ia^ a?, 77, {dELaiSai- 
juivovy) occ. in the Class, writers in a bad 
sense, super stitiousness., but sometimes in 
a good one, for religiousness., or religion., 
esp. in the later Class, and Joseph, and 
so in Acts XXV. 19. 

AsKa., ot, at, to:, so called, because it 
contains (^t^gTat, Ion. ^g/ccTat) all the 
units under it (as ten from teneo). Some- 
times put for any specific number, Matt. 
XXV. 1, 28. Lu. XV. 8, et al., or standing 
for a short time, Rev. ii. 10. 

A £ /c a ^ u o, tivelve, more usually dooSzKa^ 
Acts xix. 7. xxiv. 11. 



Afc/caTTEfTf, ( more usually Trhre kul 
(5£/ca,) fifteen., John xi. 18, et al. 

A£K:aT£cro-a|0£9, coi/, ot, at, fourteen.. 
Matt. i. 17. 2 Cor. xii. 2. Gal. ii. 1 

Af /caTi], 7j§, 77, (^£/caTOs,) scil. /moipa, 
a tenth part of any thing, e. gr. of the 
spoils in war, Heb. vii. 2, 4. Gen. xiv. 20. 
Also of the fruits of the earth and the in- 
crease of the flocks ; which, by the Jewish 
law, was paid to the priesthood, tithe, Heb. 
vii. 8, 9. 

A E/cttTos, 77, 01/, adj. the tenth., John i. 
40. Rev. xxi. 20. Hence to ^. scil. fxipo^, 
the teiith part. Rev. xi. 13, and Sept. 

As/caToo), f. axrw, (^g/caTT],) for the 
Class. dEKaTEVM, to tithe, trans, i. e. to 
receive tithes from, Heb. vii. 6. v. 9. 
Pass, to be tithed, or to pay tithes, Heb. 
vii. 9. 

A£/CT0 9, 7], 6v, (verbal from third pers. 
perf. of SEXOfxai,) 1) prop, accepted, i. e. 
pleasing^ acceptable, for apgo-Tos, Lu. iv. 

24, 0U^£i5 TrpOCp . SsKTO^ ECTTLV. ActS X. 35, 

(5. avTto ECTTi. Phil. iv. 18, dvaria d. and 
Sept. 2) by impl. favourable, propitious, 
as said of a time or season for doing any 
thing, Lu. iv. 19. 2 Cor. vi. 2, KULpo^ S. 

AeXeuX^o), f. d(Tco,(dEXEap, a bait,) 1) 
prop, to bait, i. e. put meat on a hook, 
with which to tempt fish or animals, and 
thereby catch or entrap them. 2) like 
our word ' to decoy,' to allure, entice, Ja. i. 
14, xjird T^5 i^tas Eiridv/ULLa^ SEXEuX^ojULt- 
2/os. 2 Pet. ii. 14, d. xj/vxa^, et Class, 
saepe. 

Aiudpov, ov, TO, a tree, Matt, iii, 10. 
vii. 17, and oft. Sometimes a shrub, as 
Matt. xiii. 32. Lu. xiii. 19. 

AE^LoXd(3o9, ov, 6, (<5£^t6§, XajUL- 

(Sdvco, ) lit. 07ie who takes place on the right 
hand of any person ; a term to denote a 
sort of light-armed soldiers, who (like the 
' lancearii' of the Romans) covered the 
right flank of the phalanx of heavy-armed 
soldiery, and prob. acted, in turn, as body- 
guards and sentinels, in attendance on the 
principal officers, Acts xxiii. 23. Not 
found in the Class., but occ. in the Byzan- 
tine historians. 

A £ g 1 6 §, a, 01/, adj. right, as opp. to left, 
I. with a subst. expr. esp. x^^Pi Matt. v. 30. 
Lu. vi. 6, et al. ; ttous, ReT. x. 2; ocpdaX- 
fx6<s. Matt. V. 29 ; ous, Lu. xxii. 50 ; aia- 
yoiv, Matt. V. 39 ; ixipri, John xxi. 6 ; 
oirXa TO. hE^id Kal dpioTEpa, 2 Cor. vi. 
7. Sept. and Class. — II. ivithout a subst. 
expr. 1) 77 ^£jta, scil. x^^P? Matt. vi. 3. 
xxvii. 29. Rev. i. 20. ii. 1. v. 1, 7. Sept 
and Class. The phrase ^g^ia? ^ihovai tivi 
in Gal. ii. 9, and sometimes in Class, sig- 
nif. like the Lat. 'dextram dare,' 'to make 
a covenant,' the right hand being a sign of 



AEO 



77 



A E Y 



faith, as well as charity and love. Put for 
the nglit hand or side in general, Heb. i. 
3. viii. 1. xii. 2, et al. So tt/ Bi^'lo. tou 
GfoO, Acts ii. 33, . et al. 2) 
scil. fxipi}^ ' the right parts' of any thing, 
* the right' in general. So ek Ss^lcov, ' on 
the right,' Matt, xxvii. 38, et al. h toIs 
Se^LOL<s, Mk. xvi. 5. Sept. and Class. Kad- 
ijadat or k(TTi]KivaL ek Se^lcov tov Qeov 
or TOU Xpto-ToD, ' to be next in rank, to 
have the highest seat in heaven.' Also ek 
Se^lcou TLvo'i Eluai, ' to be at any one's right 
hand,' (i. e. his unguarded side,) i. e. to 
be his protector. Acts ii. 25. Ps. xvi. 8. 

Aiofxai^ f. otriaofxai, dep. pass, (aor, 
1. pass, with mid. signif. EdEi]di]v^ imp. 
eSeo/uliji/^ i(5££T0,) 1) prop. to 7ieed^ 
stand ill need of\ as oft. in Class, though 
not in N. T. where it is used in a sense 
very rarely found in the Class, writers, 
i. e. to maJce knoicn one''s 7ieed hy en- 
treaty^ to beseech^ ask\ pray, &c. as our 
verb to icant is, in the language of com- 
mon life, used to signify desire, and 
also, from the adjunct, to express that 
desire by entreaty. Thus it is used in the 
N. T. 1) gener. and absol. to make re- 
quest, Rom. i. 10. 2 Cor. v. 20, foil, by 
gen. of pron. pers. and accus. of thing, 
sometimes governed by KaTa, Matt. ix. 30, 
& oft. .2) as said of praying to God, foil, 
either by gen. of pers. Acts viii. 22. x. 2. 
Sept. or acc. and irpo's. 

Aeov^ ovro<s, part, impers. of BeI (wh. 
see,) meaning either ' what is necessary and 
proper,^ from the nature of the case, as 
1 Pet. i. 6, or in accordance with ' what is 
7'igM and proper^ Acts xix. 36. tcl diov- 
Ta, 1 Tim. v. 13, and Class. 

Aip/uLa, aT09, to, {Sipco,) the shin of a 
flayed animal, Heb. xi. 37. Sept. & Class, 
or rather a garment of skin, such as was 
worn by the prophets. See Zech. xiii. 4. 

Agp/uaTti/05, t/, 01/, adj. made of skin, 
leathern. Matt. iii. 4. Mk. i. 6. Sept. and 
later Class. 

Aipw, f. ^£jow, (cogn. with TEpw, or 
TEipu), tero, to rvh [otf], see my note on 
Thuc. ii. 11.) 1) to fay, excoriate, Horn. 
II. i. 459, and elsewh. in the Class, writers. 
In N. T. like the Lat. ' excorio,' to beat 
or scourge severely. So foil, by acc. Matt, 
xxi. 35. Mk. xii. 3, 5. Lu. xx. 10, sq. Acts 
xvi. 37. xxii. 19. John xviii. 23. With acc. 
underst. Lu. xxii. 63. Acts v. 40. Pass, 
with acc. of manner, TroXXds, or oXtyas, 
sub. TrXrjyas, Lu. xii. 47, sq. and Class. 

Aeo- luLEv (JO, f. sucw, {dEaiJLd<s,) to bind, 
trans. 1) prop, to hold any thing or per- 
son fast v^iih a band, espec. as a prisoner, 
with cords or chains. Acts xxii. 4. Sept. 
and Class. 2) to bind up ai'ticles together 
so as to form a bundle, as said of sheaves, 
Gen. xxxvii. 7. Judith viii. 3. So Matt. 



xxiii. 4, B. (fyopTLa, a metaphor taken 
from loading a packhorse or a porter. 

AEarfXEU), f. ■ncru), to bind iviih chains, 
&c. Lu. viij. 29, and later Class, for Beo-- 

jUEVCt). 

AEcr/uLi), V, {Sict},) a bundle, Matt, 
xiii. 30. Sept. and Class. 

Aiafxio?, Lov, 6, ((5£cr/x£6o,) one bound, 
a prisoner. Matt, xxvii. 15. Mk. xv. 6, 
& oft. The phrases d. tov XpLo-Tov, 
Kvpiov, or Ev JLvpLui, signify 'one in 
durance for Christ's sake,' or his religion, 
Eph. iii. 1. iv. 1. 2 Tim. i. 8, et al. Comp. 
Zech. ix. 11. Lament, iii. 34. 

Aeo-^os, ou, 6, {dio},) band or Jo?2(i, 
such as prisoners were bound with, 1. in 
sing. 1) prop, any ligament by which one 
thing is bound to another, as Xen. An. iii. 
5, 6. Hence said of a ligament by which 
the use of some member of the body is 
impeded, e. gr. the tongue, Mk. vii. 35 ; 
the limbs, Lu. xiii. 16. Sept. and Class. — 
II. plur. OL dacr/uLol, and Attic Ta dEcr/ma, 
bands or bonds ; of which the former occ. 
in St. Paul's epistles, as Phil. i. 13, & oft. 
but not in the Class. ; the latter, in St. 
Luke's writings, as Lu. viii. 29, & oft. 

Aeot p.o(pv\a^, aKO£, 6, (^Ea/xos, (pu- 
Xa^,) a prison-keeper, jailor. Acts xvi. 23, 
27, 36. Jos. and Sept. It is supposed 
not to occur in the Class, but I find it in 
Lucian ii. 509, 539. iii. 335. 

Aect jjLWTri p LOV, LOV, TO, {SEcr/uLOU),) a 
priso?i, Matt. xi. 2. Acts v. 21, 23. xvi. 
26. Sept. and Class. 

Aeo- jULooTi]?, ov, 6, {SEor/uLou),) a pH- 
soner. Acts xxvii. 1, 42. Sept. and Class. 

Afo-TTOTi]?, ov, 6, {dEGT'Troco, fv. old 
SiaTTU) or dETToro), subigo, premo,) one ivho 
rides or is at the liead of any thing, 1) 
a master of a family, opp. to the rest of the 
family, including the servants, 1 Tim. vi. 
I. 2 Tim. ii. 21. Tit. ii. 9. 1 Pet. ii. 18. 
Apocr., Joseph., & Class. 2) by impl. as 
denoting supreme authority. Lord, whe- 
ther as said of God, as Lu. ii. 29. Acts vi. 
24. Rev. vi. 10, or Christ, 2 Pet. ii. 1. 
Jude 4. Sept. in Gen. xv. 2, 8. Job v. 8. 
Prov. xxix. 26. In the Class, it is often 
applied to kings, or supreme rulers, though 
sometimes to the heathen gods. 

A £ y po, adv. here or hither, as used both 
of place and time, I. of place, here, 
hither, espec. with verbs of motion, as 'ip- 
XecOaf, often in Class. In N. T. only 
used as an exclamation, by an ellips. of 
'^PX^^-) John xi. 43, dEvpo e^co. Acts 
vii. 3, ^Evpo £1? yfju. With an impera- 
tive, Matt, xix, 21, SEvpo, uKoXovdEL /mot. 
Mk. X. 21. Lu. xviii. 22. Sept. With 
fut. indie. Acts vii. 34. Rev. xvii. 1. xxi. 
9. Sept. & Class.— II. of time, axpt tou 
SEvpo, sc. -y^oSvov, Rom. i. 13, tmtil now. 
E 3 



AEY 



78 



AHM 



Class, oft. both with axpt and nix?'-- 
Thuc. iii. 64. 

Aeuts, adv. formed from ^gujo' tre, 
come hither^ and consequently, only used 
of the piur. Matt. xxii. 4. Mk. vi. 31, and 
often either by itself, foil, by ttoos or fk, 
or with an imper. as g£Dt£, iOgTs, Matt, 
xxviii. 6. ^£UT£, aTTOKTEivcxifxiv^ Matt. xxi. 
38. 

AEUTEpato^, aia^aiov^ adj. (^fUTgpa, 
scil. -hfxipa^) an adj. marking succession of 
days, and used only in an adverbial sense, 
071 tlie second day^ Acts xxviii. ] 3, & Class. 

AEVT&poirpuiTO's^ ou, 6, 77, adj . prop. 
& lit. tlie second-first, occ. only in Lu. vi. 
1, crdfSfSaTou to o. where it is a sort of 
roper name for the festival of unleavened 
read connected with the Passover. 
A £ u T £ p o §, a, o//, ordinal adj . meaning, 
gener. second^ in any way, whether in num- 
ber. Matt. xxii. 26^ John iv. 54. Tit. iii. 
10 ; or order. Matt. xxii. 39. Acts xiii. 33. 
1 Cor. XV. 47 ; in place, Acts xii. 10. Heb. 
ix. 3; or time, Acts vii. 13. So neuter 
adv. TO OEVTapov,^ again^ 2 Cor. xiii. 2 ; 
or davTspoi/., John iii. 4 ; or secondly^ 

1 Cor. xii. 28. So £«: osvTipov, again^ 
Mk. xiv. 72, et al. 

A£)(o/xa/, f. ^ofiaL^ (fr. obs. oiv^o, 
whence our tal'e, through the Goth, tecan,) 
dep. mid. lit. to take to oneself what is 
offered by another, to receive^ trans. I. prop, 
of THINGS, in various acceptations, I) 
to take into 07ie's hands, to receive, where a 
genit. of person sometimes with prep, is 
either expr. or impl. So Lu. xvi. 6, sq. 
ci^ai arou to ypdju/ULa, scil. Trap' b/ulov. 
xxii. 17, ds^dfjLeuo^ TroTripiov. Eph. vi. 17. 
Sept. and Class. 2) gener. to receive, as 
£7ri<TToXa§, Acts xxii. 5. xxviii. 21. Ti]v 
X^-pLv, 2 Cor. \mi. 4. Ta nrap' vjULoov, Phil, 
iv. 18. Sept. and Class. 3) metaph. t{]v 
(SacriXELav tov Qeov, Mk. x. 15, Lu. xviii. 
17. Xoyia X^covTa, Acts vii. 38. xapiv, 

2 Cor. vi. 1. xi. 4. — II. of persons, to 
receive, admit, 1) to receive Mndly, to 
icelcome, as a teacher, friend, or guest, 
e. gr. ^, eU tov oJkov, Lu. xvi. 4, 9, and 
Class. So gener. Matt. x. 14, 40, sq. et 
al. ssepe, & Class. So of reception or 
admission into heaven. Acts iii. 21; or 
into any one's 'presence, Lu. xi. 11. Hence 
by impl. to hear ivith, 2 Cor. xi. 16, cos 
dcppova di^aadi fxs. 2) metaph. of things, 
to receive or admit with the mind and 
heart, i. e. by impl. to approve, embrace, 
absol. Matt. xi. 14, d 
with TOV Xoyov, Lu. viii. 13. Acts dii. 
14. xi. 1. xvii. 11. 1 Thess. i. 6. ii. 13. 
Ja. i. 21. TO. TOV UvBvp.aTO's, 1 Cor. ii. - 
14. T^]u TrapaKXijcTLV, 2 Cor, viii. 17. tv,v 
dyd7n]v ttj-s dXi]dsLa<s, 2 Th. ii. 10. Sept. , 
and Class. So Thuc. ii. 10, ra TrapayyEX- . 
XofxEva d. i I 



AEw,to want ; see 6eT and ciofxai. 
A£6o, f. tjcro), to bind, tie, trans. I. of 
, THINGS, to bind things together, or one thing 
: to another, Thuc. iii. 104, dXvaEL ^. irpo's 
TY]v AijXov. Matt. xiii. 30. xxi. 2. Mk. 
, xi. 2, 4. Lu. xix. 30. Acts x. 11. Sept. 
and Class. ; of dead bodies bound, or 
wound around, with grave-clothes, John 

xi. 44. xix. 40. Matt. xvi. 19. xviii. 18, 
where see my note. — II. of persons, to 

■ bind, as the hands or feet, to put into 
bo?ids, foil, by aXva-ECL, Mk. v. 3, 4. Acts 

xii. 6. xxi. 33. Wisd. xvii. 18. So gener. 
Seoo TLvd, Matt, xii. 29. xiv. 3. xxii. 13, 
0. avTov TTooa?. Matt, xxvii. 2. Mk. iii. 

■ 27. vi. 17, d. Ev (pvXaKr}, et al. Pass. 
oEOfxai, to he in bonds, or prison, Mk. xv. 
7, and oft. Sept. and Class. Fig. in Lu. 

xiii. 16, riv Eoi]aEv o 2. i. e. has deprived 
of the use of her limbs; see my note; 
2 Tim. ii. 9, dXX' 6 Xoyos too Qeov ov 
oiSaTaL, ' is not hindered or restrained 
because / am bound.' — III. perf. pass. 
oioEfxaL to be bound, which often occurs 
in the Class, in its proper sense ; but in 
N. T. only in the metaph. one. 1) as said 
of the conjugal bond, Rom. vii. 2. 1 Cor. 
vii. 27, 39, and later Class. 2) Acts xx. 
22, oeSeiulevo^ tm TTVEv/jiaTi, impelled 
or compelled in mind, i. e. ' under a strong 
impulse of my mind,' equiv. to (tvvexpp.e- 
vo's T(Z TTv. Acts xviii. 5. 

A?;, a particle which imparts to a clause 
or sentence a notion of reality or certainty, 
in opposition to mere opinion ; and thus 
serves to strengthen affirmation : indxed^ 
truly, recdly. Matt, xiii. 23. 2 Cor. xii. 1. 
Sept. and Class. Also in a hortative sense, 
come noiv, then, Lu. ii. 15, diiXdoouEv dij 
£0)5 B. Acts xiii. 2. xv. 36. 1 Cor. vi. 20, 
co^dcraTE di] tov Oeov. Sept. and Class. 
But even here, it merely Strengthens the 
exhortation expressed in the other words 
of the passage. In fact, its almost sole 
force is that of strengthening an assertion. 

A^Xos, ?7, ov, adj. manifest, evident^ 
Matt. xxvi. 73. So SyjXov scil. eottl, 1 
Cor. XV. 27. Gal. iii. 11. 1 Tim. vi. 7, and 
Class. 

AtjXSo}, f. oiorco, {drjXo^,) to maJce 
manifest, evident, or hiown, trans, as said 

I. of things, 1) past, to relate or tell, 1 
Cor. i. 11. CoL i. 8. Sept. and Class. 
2) future, or hidden, to reveal or shoic^ 
teach, 1 Cor. iii. 13. Heb. ix. 8. 1 Pet. i.' 

II. 2 Pet. i. 14. Sept. and Class.— II. ^of 
WORDS, to signify, Heb. xii. 27, to oe, etl 
uTra^, di]XoT. Joseph. Ant. iii. 7, 1, (SovXe- 
TciL OE (scil. Mai/a)(ao-r/i/) crvvaKTrjpa 
fXEv di]Xovv. 

At] /uLTiyo pio), f. rjo-o), {dijuxo'S, dyo- 
pE(jt},) to address the people in a p)ublic as- 
sembly, foil, by TTpos and acc. Acts xii. 21. 
Sept. and Class. 



AHM 



79 



A I A 



prop, one ivlio ivorks for the public benefit ; 
also, one ivho foUotrs a public calling^ of 
whatever kind, (Horn. Od. xvii. 383,) 
espec. that of an artisan. Hence it came 
to mean artifea\ a inaste7'-hdldei\ or ar- 
cJiitect, Accordingly, it is by the philoso- 
phers, espec. Plato, often applied to God 
as the Maker and Creator of the world. 
So Xen. Mem. i. 4, 7 & 9, where the world 
is called (rocpov ^iifxiovpyov iri^v^fxa. 
Aristotle, too, calls God tov B)]fxLovpy6v 
Twv oXwv, ' the Artificer or Framer of the 
universe.' So Heb. xi. 10, it is applied to 
God, as the Architect and Framer of that 
'continuing city' which Abraham looked 
for. 

A^/xos, ov, 6, {Sl(jo, to bind, collect, 
^9P^^g<^f'te^) t^^e people at large, as distin- 
guished from the principal persons, (Horn, 
and Thuc.) or, the people or community 
of a country or city, espec. when brought 
together in a public assembly. The latter 
is the sense wherever it occurs in N. T. 
as Acts xii. 22. xvii. 5. xix. 30 ; for 
in the fii'st passage it does not merely 
mean the bystanders^ but the people 
assembled for the occasion ; and in the 
rest it does not mean, as Schleusner and 
others suppose, the forum^ or place of pub- 
lic meeting, but the people there assembled; 
equiv. to 77 eKKXiicrLa^ espec. in the phrase 
dyayElv Tiva? sh tov drjfxov^ Acts xvii. 
5, and Eia-ipx^o-Oai tov djjjuLov^ Acts 
xix. 30. They both occ. in the Class, writers, 
espec. Thuc. ayco Trpos tov SfjiuLov^ ' to 
conduct to an audience with the public as- 
sembly,' and £tcr£\0£ti/ eh tov B^fxov^ 'to 
be so introduced,' which occurs in Xen., 
Thuc, and Polyb. iii. 44, 10, and xxiv. 3, 1. 

A?7/xo(rta, adv. formed from dat. sing, 
fem. of drifxocno^^ with ellips. of yjjopa^ 
publicly^ Acts xvi. 37. xviii. 28. xx. 26, 
and Class. See my notes on Thuc. (Index.) 

Ai^fjLoa-LO^, La, ov, adj . {orjjuo^, ) belong- 
ing to the public, public. Acts v. 18, kv 
TY\pr]<jzi 5. Joseph, and Class. 

Atjvap Lov, Lov, TO, a word adopted 
into Greek from the Latin denarius, equiv. 
to the Greek SpaxfiVi which is equiv. to 
seven pence half-penny. Matt, xviii. 28, et 
saepe al. 

AniroTE, adv. ttots,) prop. 

demum, once for all; but also subjoined 
to relative words to strengthen the idea 
of generality and comprehensiveness, and 
equiv. to the Lat. cunque and the Eng. 
ever or soever, John v. 4, w ornroTs voan- 
fxaTL. 

Avirov, adv. [S}), ttov,) indeed, verily, 
Heb. ii. 16, and Class. See my note on 
Thuc. vol. i. 137, 196. 208. 

At a, prep, with the primary significa- 



tion, through, or throughout, and governing 
the genit. or acciis. I. with the genit. 
through, &c. as said, 1) of place, implying 

1 motion through a place, and put after verbs 
I of motion, *as going, coming, &c. as Matt. 

ii. 12. Heb. xi. 29, and oft. or with words 
implying motion, as 2 Cor. viii. 18. 1 Cor. 
xiii. 12. Mk. xi. 16. Acts xiii. 49. Lu. v. 
19. 2Cor. xi. 33, ^la nrvpo^, 'as if pass- 
ing through the fire.' ] Cor. iii. 15, and 
Class. 2) of time, either continued time, 
how long, through, throughout, during, 
Lu. V. 5. Acts i. 3. Heb. ii. 15; or of an 
indefinite period, during a longer interval, 
as ^la. vvKTo^, ' by night,' Acts v. 19. xvi. 
9; or of time elapsed, i. e. after. Acts 
xxiv. 17, ^t' sTcov ttXeiovcov. Gal. ii. 1, 
Slo. dsK. ETwv. Mk. ii. 1, di vjULEpcov, scil. 
TLvuiv. Sept. and Class. 3) of the instru- 
ment, or intermediate cause, between the 
act of the will and the effect, and through 
which the effect proceeds, through, by 
means of; said partly of things, as Mk. 
xvi. 20, dia (tviulelcov. John xi. 4. xvii. 20. 
Acts iii. 18, 21. V. 12. viii. 18. x. 43, et 
al. ssepiss. ; or of persons, through whose 
hands any thing as it were passes, through 
whose agency the effect is produced, Matt, 
i. 22, TO pridEV Sid TOV ir pocpriTov . ii. 5, 
15. Lu. xviii. 31. John i. 17, et al. saepiss. 
4) of the mode, state, or circumstances 
through which any thing passes or takes 
place, both of manner, Lu. viii. 4. Acts 
XV. 27. Rom. viii. 25. xiv. 20. 2 Cor. x. 

11. Gal. V. 13. Eph. vi. 18. Heb. xii. 1, 
et al. ; and of state, or circumstances, 
Rom. xiv. 14. xv. 32. 1 Cor. i. 1. 

2 Cor. V. 7. viii. 5. Heb. ix. 12, et 
al. ssepe. — II. with the accus. through, by 
means of, or on account of 1 ) of the i7i- 
strument, the intermediate or efficient 
cause, through, by means of, both as said of 
things, John xv. 3, did tov Xoyov. Heb. 
V. 14. Rev. xii. 11. xiii. 14. 2 Pet. iii. 

12, and Class. ; and of persons, John vi. 
57. Rom. viii. 11. Heb. vi. 7 ; also of emo- 
tions, through or from which any one is 
led to do any thing, Matt, xxvii. 18. Mk. 
XV. 10, Sid <pd6vov. Lu. i. 78. Eph. ii. 4, 
dcd dydin^v. Phil. i. 15, and Class. 2) of 
the ground or motive, the moving or im- 
pelling cause, of any thing, on account 
of, because of, and that both gener, as 
Matt. X. 22. xiii. 21, 58. Lu. viii. 47, et 
al. and spec, in the sense for the sake of, 
in behalf of as marking the purpose of 
an action, Mk. xiv. 3. xxiv. 22. John 
xi. 15. Acts xvi. 3, and oft. ; also, as mark- 
ing the occasion of any thing, on account 
of which it takes place. Matt, xxvii. 
19. John vii. 43. x. 19. Rom. ii. 4. xv. 
15. 2 Pet. ii. 2, and Class. 3) of the 
manner or state through which any thing 
takes place, Gal. iv. 13, 01 da-divELav t-^s 
craoKo^, ' through or during bodilv weak- 

E4 



A I A 



80 



AI A 



ness.' So Aristot. Mir. Ausc. 68, Sid 
Tov x^t/woii^a. In composition Sid mostly 
retains its signification, and refers, 1 ) to 
space and time, through^ throughout^ im- 
plying transition, continuance, &c. as 
dia(3aii>u), OLairXico^ SLayLvajxaL^ oidyoi : 
also trop. thi^ough^ to the end. marking com- 
pleteness, and thus becoming intensive, as 
Sia^\kiTUi^ dLayLvuxTKco. 2) to distribu- 
tion, diffusion, &c. throughout^ among 
every ivhere^ as dLayyiXXco. 3) to mutual 
or alternate effects or endeavours, ^/iroz^(//i, 
hetiveen^ among^ scil. one another, to and 
fro^ as CLaKpLvoimai, dtaixd^ofxaL. 4) to 
separation, equiv. to Latin dis^ in ttuo, in 
pieces^ apart, &c, 

Aia/3ati/w, f. /Sj^co/xat, to pass 
through or over, foil, by acc. of thing, as 
a country, or a sea or river, Heb. xi. 29, 
{Ttiu ddXaararav,) Sept. and Class.; foil, 
by £is or tt/jos, denoting the end of ac- 
tion. Acts xvi. 9. Lu. xvi. 26, and Class. 

A t a a A. A. w, f. j8a\w, prop, trajicio, ( dia- 
TTgtpoj,) to pass or thrust any thing through 
another, to transpierce. So Diosc. iv. 76, 
cited by Steph. Thes. 6 (pXcLo^ 8La(3Xii- 
6eh Xhu). Diog. Laert. i. 118, cited by 
Schleus. Lex. Sia^aXovra t/;§ Ovpa^ tov 
SdKTvXov. Also Jos. Ant. xiv. 67, /uy) 
Svudfx£V09 0La(3aXELu avTov tov <TLdi]pov. 
Hence, by the same figure as that in the 
Lat. traduco, to defame any one, lit. to 
thrust through, and thereby destroy any 
one's reputation, there being (as in the 
phrase '7rpo(Ti)Xu)aa<s auVo, i. e. the en- 
mity, Tw (TTavpop, by his cross. Col. ii. 
14) an allusion to the ancient custom of 
annulling covenants, by driving a nail 
through them. In this sense the word 
often occurs in Thuc. and other of the 
best writers. And so in the pass. foil, by 
dat. Lu. xvi. 1, dLefSXndii avTcp for Trpos 
avTov, as in Sept. and Hdot. v. 35. Yet 
with this difference in sense, that in the 
Class, writers it is almost always used of a 
false, not a true charge ; though in the 
latter it occurs in Aristot. Plut. iii. 15. 
Philostr. Vit. Ap. iii. 38. App. i. 420. 

Aia^ sfSaLoo), f. cocro), to strengthen 
thoroughly, render quite firm, as any thing 
implying a compact, as laws, government, 
peace, &c. ; but in N. T. and almost 
always in Class, used only in the mid. 
SLa^E^aLoofxaL, metaph. to strengthen one- 
self in affirmation, to affirm strongly, as- 
severate, assure, foil, by Tr&pl with gen. 
1 Tim. i. 7, fxri iripi tlviov S. Tit. iii. 
8, -TTEpl TovTwv S. and later Class, and 
Philo. 

A i a/3 XsTro), f. xj/co, 1) prop, to look or 
see throitgh any thing, and 2) like the Lat. 
dispicere, by impl. to vieiv it attentively and 
see it clearly. Matt. vii. 5. Lu. vi. 42, and 
later Class. 



Aia/3oA.o§, ov, b, v, {oia^aXXu}, 
which see,) prop, an adj. as in Plut. Op. 
vi, 225, 13, TO did^oXov Kai KaKorjtiES, 
and Gloss. didlSoXo^, ' criminosus.' Hence 
subst. a traducer, calumniator, accuser, 
1) gener. 1 Tim. iii. 11. 2 Tim. iii. 3. 
Tit. ii. 3. Sept. and Class. 2) with 
the art. 6 ALd(3oXo9, the Accuser, by way 
of eminence, equiv. to Heb. Satan, adver- 
sary ; both designations highly appropri- 
ate, since the Devil is in Scripture repre- 
sented as the constant adversary both of 
God and man ; of the former, by withstand- 
ing all His plans for the good of men ; of 
the latter, by acting as their accuser and 
calumniator before God (Job i. 7, 12. 
Zech. iii. 1, 2,) and their seducer to sin, 
1 Chron. xxi. 1 ; and, in short, as being, 
in a great measure, the author of all evil, 
physical and moral, to the human race. 
Such is the representation of the devil in 
the O. T. ; and in the N. T. he appears as 
the constant enemy of God and Christ, and 
also of the Gospel and its followers, full of 
falsehood and malice, and exciting men to 
evil in every possible way. Matt. iv. 1, 5, 
8. xiii. 39. XXV. 41. Lu. iv. 2, 3, 5, 6, 13. 
viii. 12. John xiii. 2. Acts x. 38. Eph. 
iv. 27. vi. 11. ] Tim. iii. 6, 7. 2 Tim. ii. 
26. Heb. ii. 14. Ja. iv. 7. 1 Pet. v. 8. 
-Jude 9. Rev. ii. 10. xii. 9, 20. Hence the 
phrases ek tov dLa(3. or uto§ tov'o. alvai, 
' to be like Satan,' in disposition and qua- 
lities, John viii. 44. Acts xiii. 10. 1 John 

iii. 8, 10. In John vi. 70, didlSoXo^ is 
either equiv. to ulos tov d. 'an enemy of 
God and man,' or ' one disaffected to any 
person,' a betrayer or enemy. 

ALayyiXXo), f. ygXw, {Sid, dy- 
yiXXu),) lit. to announce throughoid, i. e. 
to disseminate thoroughly, as a report, or 
tidings. Also, to announce by messengers 
any edict or proclamation. So in Class. 
In N. T. it is used I. oi- proclaiming every- 
where the glad tidings of salvation in the 
Gospel, (Lu. ix. 60, hidyyEXXE tijv (3aaL- 
Xe'luv tov Qeov,) or disseminating the 
glory and majesty of God, Rom. ix. 17, 
OTTOJS SiayyEXri to ovofxd .fiov. So also 
in Herodian, SiaTpExoo is used of a report 
disseminated far and wide, i. 1 5, 2. ii. 2, 5. 

iv. 11, 2. — II. it is used of fully announc- 
ing, or giving notice of any thing. Acts 
xxi. 26, (5. Ti-iv EKirXripuicnv Tihv nifXEpwv, 
(where see my note,) Sept. and Class. 

Aiay LVOjUL ai, aor. 2. SLEyEv6fxr]v, lit. 
to he throughout, or always, as said of ex- 
istence, Thuc. V. 16. Xen. Mem. ii. 8, 5. 
& al. and denoting permanency. More 
frequently used of time, to he througliouty 
i. e. past, or elapsed, Mk. xvi. 1, h. tov 
a-afS^aTOv, ' past.' Acts xxv. 13, vjxEpCov 
S, having elapsed or intervened.' And so 
in the best Class, writers. 



AI A 



81 



AI A 



Aiay ivw a- Ko>^ f. yvtlxrofxai^ to h'Knv 
throughout^ or thoroziglilij. Also, by mcton. 
to examine carefulli/^ in order to distin- 
guish. Hence in N. T. in a judicial 
sense, to e.vamine and inquire into any 
matter ; and, by impl. to decide or deter- 
mine concerning it. Acts xxiii. 15, 6. 
ccKpL^eaTtpov to. TTEpi avTov. xxiv. 22, 
B. TO. Kad' VjuLu^. So Thuc. iii. 53, 
diEyvuxj fxivi]v KpiaLV^ iv. 46, vi. 29, and 
often in Class. 

A t ay 1/60 pi'^ to, f. iVo), to JuaJce Jcnoicn 
thro2igJiout, or everj/ where, to tell abroad, 
divulgare, Lii. ii. 17, ^LEyvoopLcrav Trspi, 
&c. for dLECpv/uLLorau, in Mark. 

prop, exact knoivledge, Eurip. Hipp. 921 ; 
but also, in a judicial sense, such a full 
cognizance or examination, as produces 
determination, judgment. Acts xxv. 21, 
'TY]pEX(rdai £t§ Tr]v tov ^e^acrrov Slo.- 
yvu)(TLv, and the best Class. 

Atayoyyu^o), f. uo-co, lit. to murmur 
throughout, to keep murmuring ; implying 
an idea of sullen discontent, absol. Lu.xv. 

2. xix. 7. Sept. Eccl. xxxiv. 24. Heliod. 
vii. 27. 

A.Laypi]yopi(i), f. rjcroj, prop, A'eep 
awake throughout the night, Hdian. iii. 
4, 8. In N. T. to he thoroughly aicake, 
Lu. ix. 32. 

Atayoj, f. ^£0, (^la, ay 03,) prop, to 
lead or bring any person or thing through 
any place, to another place. But also, 
like the Lat. traduco, transigo, used of 
time, and words implying time, as day, 
night, life, &c. which we are said to bring 
or carry ourselves through, i. e. to pass, 
spend. So 1 Tim. ii. 2, rja-vxi-ov (3lov S. 
And so Xen. Hier. vii. 10, EvSaLjULovu)^ 
t6u ^lov d. Comp. Xen. Ephes. v. 15, 
], avToi, ToyXoLirov, Biriyov, aoprvv 
e^ovTE^, TOV fXET ctXkriXujv (iiov. So 
the passage should be pointed ; and for k'^. 
read a^ovTE^, for cos dyovTai, ' as if cele- 
brating.' See in ayco, II. 

P^ia^iXoixai, f. ^o/uLaL, to receive any 
thing through the medium of others, espec. 
as an inheritance, whether sovereignty or 
property. Hence Acts vii. 45, riv (scil. 
aKTjvrjv) SLaos^dix&voL {avTi]v) ol ira- 
Ttpts. So Philo, p. 634, irapa iraTipcov 
Trjv 'QnTYicrLV aXvTou ^Lad&^dfXEVOL. 

ALoiSr] /iia, axos, to, (^ta^eco, to bind 
quite round, Hdot. ii. 29,) a diadem, or 
tiara, a symbol of royal dignity. Rev. xii. 

3. xiii. 1. xix. 12. Sept. and Class. 
ALaBidoDjULi, f. ococrco, 1) to deliver any 

thing, through various hands, in succes- 
sion. So Plato de Rep. i. 328, XajULirdda 
e'Xoj^tes SLadu}(Tov(TLv a\X?7A.ots. Thuc. 
i. 76, apxriv diadidofxivnv koi^d^ida. 
Rev. xvii. 13, in text. rec. rriv i\ov<jLav 



eavTcou Tio dy]pito dLadcocrovariv, Other 
copies have dLdoaaiv. 2) to deal out, dis- 
tribute, trans, or absol. Lu. xi. 22. xviii. 
22. John vi. 11. Acts iv. 35. Xen. and 
Demosth. 

AidSoxo^, ov, (from diadiSoxa, perf. 
mid. of SLadixofxaL,) prop, an adj. as 
Eurip. Troad. 304, 'ipya S. Thuc. i. 110, 
TpnjpeU S. ; but almost always a subst. 
a successor. Acts xxiv. 27, and often in 
Class. 

Ata^toi/yu/ut, fut. \d3(Tw, to gird quite 
round, i.e. firmly, trans. John xiii. 4. mid. 
to gird any thing round oneself, xxi. 7. 
perf. pass, xiii, 5. Sept. and Class. 

AiaQriKri, i]<s, 77, (from SiiOiiKa, aor, 1. of 
^taTt0T]/xi,) gener. a disposition or arrange- 
ment of any thing ; and said, 1. of a testa- 
mentary disposition, a testament or icill, 
Heb. ix. 16, 17. Jos. and Class. — II. of a 
covenant, as effected by mutual arrange- 
ment and disposition, a mutual agreement 
on mutual promises or mutual conditions, 
Gal. iii. 15, KSKupw/uLivrji'. So Sept. 
oft. and sometimes the Class. In N. T. 
1 ) of the Abrahamic covenant, confirmed 
also to the other patriarchs, of which cir- 
cumcision was the sign, (see Gen. xv. 1 — 

18. xvii. 1 — 19.) Lu. i. 72. Acts iii. 25. 
Gal. iii. 17, and termed rj diadiiKri 7r£f)t- 
T0fjLrj<s, Acts vii. 8. Sept. and 2 Mace, viii, 
15. 2) of the Mosaic covenant, entered 
into at Mount Sinai, Exod. xxiv. 3 — 12. 
Heb. ix. 4, ttjV kl^ojtov tt}^ S. Rev. xi. 

19. Since the old covenant is contained 
in the Mosaic books, SiadjiKV is put by 
meton. for the book of the covenant, tJie 
Mosaic tvritings, the laiu, 2 Cor. iii. 14, 
d.vdyvuxTL's Trj? TraXaias d. Sept. 3) of 
the neiD covenant, sanctioned by the blood 
of Christ, the Gospel dispensation, Heb. 
viii. 10. X. 16, et al. 

Atatp£<Ti9, scos, 7], {SiaLpico,) 1) 
prop, the act of dividing, division, as Xen. 
Cyr. iv. 5, 55. 2) as a consequent there- 
on, pccHition, or separation. 3) by impl. 
the distinction, or difference, between the 
things so kept apart, 1 Cor. xii. 4, 5, 
hiaipi(jzi<s x^^P'-^^f^dTcov, ' different classes 
of gifts for when, in this sense, it is 
joined with a substantive it makes a peri- 
phrasis for the adj. different. This use of 
the word is rare in the Class. Besides 
two examples, adduced by Steph. Thes. 
and AYahl from Theophr. and Diod. Sic. 
I have noted the folloT^ing from Plato ; 
Cratyl. 424, B. Phil. 15, A. Protag. 348, 
A, Soph. 267, B. Tii/a fxEiXpy OLaipEcnu 
dyvcoaria^ te Kal yvcocrsco^ 6i](To/j.£v. 

Ai-aLpiu), aor. 2. SlsTXcv, {dia, apart, 
alpiu),) prop, to tctke and put apart, to se- 
parate into parts., Sept. and Class. In 
N. T. to divide out, distribute, trans. Lu. 
1 XV. 12, clelKev ai'Tot? tov (3lov. 1 Cor, 



AI A 



8 



2 



Al A 



xii. 12, TO Tlysujua ^laipovv Iolo. eKaa- 
Tio. Sept. and Class. 

A La Kad a p lX, (o^ f. tw, to cleanse 
througliout^ i. e. tliorougTily ^ intrans. Matt, 
iii. 12, Lu. iii. 17, ^. t^v aXcova^ 'his 
corn,' i. e. by ventilation '\;v1th a fan. 
Hence XtK/xai/ Tr]u aXoova^ Ruth iii. 2, 
and dLaKadaipsLv nr^v d\. Alciph. iii. 26. 

AiaKaTsXiyxoimaL^ f. iy^Ofiai^ 
(ota, thoroughly, and /car.) to utterly con- 
fute in argument. The term has a stronger 
sense than KaTsXiyx^J^ in Hesiod, or 
SisXiyxfJ^ in Plato, would have alone ; as 
in diaKaTa(3dXXa), SLaKaTadapdico^ Sia- 
KaTaxpaoimaL^ dLaKaT&X(^- So Acts xviii. 
28, (where alone it occurs,) toTs 'Iov- 
caL0L9 dLaKUTiiXiyx^^o. Lucian i. 481, 
2wK:paTt7S eksT TTspLepx^'Tcci' BLsXiyx(J^v 
aTTcivTa^. Valckn. indeed, and the re- 
cent Commentators, contend that the dice 
denotes ' contention,' as in oLairLvco, Slu- 
To^svofxai^ oLopx^ojULai, 'to vie in drink- 
ing,' &c. Thus it would be equiv. to Slu- 
X&y6/uL£V09 KaTsX. That, however, would 
be too refined an idiom for the plain style 
of Scripture. The Commentators in gene- 
ral would have been better employed in 
clearing the construction, which is, from 
brevity, far from obvious. Expressed at 
full length, the passage would run thus : 
EyToi^cos yap tovs 'lovdaiov^ SiaKaTrj- 
Xiyx^TO SiiiixocrLa, E'jrid£LKVv<5 auVots dia 
TO)!/ ypacpcov^ el. t. X, 'I. 

Aia/coi/£co, f. ?7cra), (5ia/coi/o9,) prop, 
and lit. to hustle through the dust, in the 
duty of running footman, as iyKovElu is 
" to run amidst the dust.' (See Etymolog. 
and Phavor. in v. iy/covet]/, perhaps al- 
luded to in a passage of Aristoph. Av. 
1233, ct)S ^XaKLKco^ dLaKov£'L<; ov daTTOu 
EyKovna-EL^ \) Thus it came to mean, 
hustle ahout any business, espec. that of 
personal attendance on any one, and is 
used, I. of persons, foil, by dat. expressed 
or impl. 1) gener. as master or guest. 
Matt. viii. 15, /cat diriKovEL auVoTs. xxvii. 
55. Mk. i. 31. XV. 41. Lu. iv. 39. xxii. 26, 
et al. and Class. ; espec. said of those who 
wait at table, Lu. x. 40. xii. 37. xvii. 8. 
xxii. 27. John xii. 2. Class. 2) by impl. 
to miyiister to the wants of any one, by pro- 
curing and supplying the necessaries of 
life, Matt. iv. 11. xxv. 44. Mk. i. 13. Lu. 
viii. 3, al. 3) to he the attendant on., or 
assistant to, any one, as Timothy and 
Eratosthenes are said to be ^LaKovovvTE^ 
HavXud, Acts xix. 22. 4) to fill the 
office of a deacon, 1 Tim. iii. 10, 13. 
1 Pet. iv. 11 ; part of which consisted in 
attending to the collecting and distri- 
buting of the alms for the poor, 2 Cor. 
viii. 19, 20. Heb. 10.— XL of things, 
foil, by acc. of manner, and dat. expr. or 
impl. to minister any thing to any one, to 



administer, provide, 2 Tim. i. IB, oar a kv 
'Ecpiaco CLi]K6vr}(rE. So Anacr. ix. 14, 
' AvaKpiovTL SLaKovu) ToaravTa. 2 Cor. 
iii. 3, E'TTLCTToXr) XptcTTou ^ta/coyijOfilcTa 
v(p^ -hpioov, ' written by our instrumental- 
ity.' By impl. to minister any thing to 
any one's icants, to supply, 1 Pet. iv. 10, 
£ts kavTOv^ avTo d. i. e. spiritual wants. 
So of the alms collected by the churches, 
to administer and distrihiite, pass. 2 Cor. 
viii. 19, sq. Said of prophets, &c. who 
minister to the spiritual good of 'Christians 
by annozmcing the wdll of God, 1 Pet. i. 12, 
VjuTv ^li]k6vovv avTa, Acts vi. 2, d. Tpa- 
TTs^tti?, ' to have the charge of.' So 'mi- 
nistrare velis,' Virg. JEn. x. 218. 

AiaKovia, as, 77, {BiaKovo?,) service., 
attendance, ministry. I. gener. Heb. i. 14, 
XELTOvpyiKa TTVEVfxaTa, £15 ^LaKoviav 
ccTToarTEXXofxEva. Joseph. Ant. iv. 6, 3. as 
performed towards a master, or a guest, at 
table, Lu. x. 40. 1 Cor. xvi. 15, eU cia- 
Kov'iav ToX<s dyioL^ ETa^av eavrovs. 
Xen. (Ec. vii. 41. — 11. spec, as said 1) in 
the sense of aid or relief, in respect to 
alms, contributions, &c. Acts xi. 29, eU 
diaKoviav Tri/uLxp-aL, Rom. xv. 31. 2 Cor. 
viii. 4. ix. 1, 13. xi. 8. Rev. ii. 19. 
2) said of the ministration, i. e. distribution, 
of the alms so collected, Acts vi. 1. xii. 

25. 2 Cor. ix. 12. — IH. ministry, or minis- 
tration, i. e. the office of ministering in 
divine things, said chiefly of apostles and 
teachers, Acts i. 17, 25. vi. 4, rj d. tov 
Xoyov. XX. 24. xxi. 19. Rom. xi. 13. 
1 Cor. xii. 5. 2 Cor. iii. 7—9. iv. 1. v. 18. 
vi. 3. Eph. iv. 12. Col. iv. 17. 1 Tim. i. 
12. 2 Tim. iv. 5, 11 ; of the office of a 
deacon, Rom. xii. 7. Indeed, the words 
OLaKovo'S, ^LaKOVEtv, and ^LaKOvia, though 
general terms, and used even of the Apos- 
tles themselves, are often in N. T. taken 
of some certain specific office, undertaken 
in the cause of the Christian religion, 
(comp. 1 Cor. 'xii. 5. 2 Cor. ix. I.) and 
exercised by those who did not so much 
employ themselves in explaining tlie doc- 
trines of the Gospel, as in managing the 
external and temporal affairs of the 
Church ; see my note on 1 Cor. xii. 4, 30. 

AiaKovo^, ov, 6, rj, {^i-d, kovl^,) prop. 
a personal attendant on any one, as run- 
ning footman, bustling through the dust ; 
and hence an active diligent attendant on 
any one, in any service whatever; one 
who is busily engaged therein. I. gener. 
and with gen. of person served. Matt. xx. 

26. xxiii. 11. Mk. ix. 35. x. 43; said 
espec. of those who wait at table, (so 
Eurip. Cycl. 31, Ku/cXcotti Sei'Trucoi/ 
SiaK. ) but also of the servants or attend- 
ants on a king, Matt. xxii. 13; and fig. 
of a?i attendant on any one, as a disciph, 
John xii. 26. — II. spec, of ministers or 



A I A 



83 



AI A 



teachei'S of divine things, who act for 
God and Christ, with genitive of person 
served, Rom. xiii. 4, Qsov diaK. 1 Cor. 
iii. 5. 2 Cor. iii. 6. vi. 4. 1 Th. iii. 2. 
Xpio-Tou, 2 Cor. xi. 23. Eph. vi. 21. Col. 
i. 7. iv. 7. tt;? £K:/c/\j;crta9, Col. i. 25. 
— III. with a gen. of the thing done hy 
the service and ministry, Rom. xv. 8, S. 
irepiTOfiT]^^ 'of Judaism,' i. e. to the Jews. 
2 Cor. xi. 15, d. ^iKaiocrvvn^. Gal. ii. 17. 
Eph. iii. 7. Col. i. 23. — IV. a particular 
kind of minister in Christ's church, a dea- 
con^ one who, among other practical du- 
ties, as assistant to the presbyter, had es- 
pecial charge of the sick and poor of the 
church, acting as its almoner, (see Bing- 
ham's Antiq. and Notes on 1 Cor. xii. 4, 
30,) Phil. i. 1. 1 Tim. iii. 8, 12. iv. 6. 
Also of a female SLdKovo<3, a deaco7iess^ 
who had charge of the sick and needy, 
Rom. xvi. 1 ; see Bingham, vol. ii. p. 22, 
and Suicer's Thes. in v. SiaKovLacra : 
these were consecrated hy the laying on 
of hands ; though their offices were not 
priestly, but were merely to assist at the 
baptism of women, to instruct female cate- 
chumens, attend the female sick, the mar- 
tyrs in prison, and to govern the women at 
church. 

AiaKoa lOL^ ai^ a, (^i§, ekutov^) tivo 
liundred^ Mk. vi. 37. John vi. 7, et al. 

Ata/couco, f. ovcTOfxai^ (^ta, a/couw,) 
to Jiear through^ i. e. throughout, or fidly^ 
Xen. Hier. vii. 11. Hence, in a forensic 
sense, to hear a 'cause oid^ to take full cog- 
nizance of it^ Acts xxiii. 35, diaKovcroixaL 
<Tov^ i. e. ' this cause.' Sept. and Class. 

Ata/cpti/o), f. vu), (^ia, dis, apart, and 
Kpivu}^) prop, to separate, pid asunder, 
whether persons or things, Hom. II. ii. 
474. Hdot. viii. 34, and in the pass, to he 
separated, and go contrary ways, Thuc. 
i. 105 & 18. iii. 9, and mid. to separate 
oneself from, and by impl. contend with, 
any one. But it is more freq. used in 
various metaph. senses. In N. T. as fol- 
lows, I. in ACT. and 1) by impl. to dis- 
tinguish, make a distinction, cause to differ. 
Acts XV. 9, ohdkv SLEKpLve fXETa^v njxiov. 
Athen. p. 239, ovy(l ^liKpiva^ Tr]v ttevl- 
XP^v ^ 'rrXoucriav. Xen. Cyr. vii. 5, 14, 
SiaKpivavTE^ irpocrUcrav avd. Thuc. i. 49, 
dLEKEKpiTo ouBkv ETL, ' there was no differ- 
ence made between friends and enemies.' 
1 Cor. xi. 29, fxii SiaKpLVCov to arwfJLa tov 
Kvpiov, i. e. 'not distinguishing it from 
common food.' Mid. Jude 22, oO§ niku 
eXeeTte SiaKpLvojuLEvoL, 'making a distinc- 
tion.' Pass, in mid. sense, Ja. ii. 4, /cat ov 
dLEKpidr^TE iv EavToT^; ' do ye not make a 
distinction in yourselves ?' i. e. are ye not 
partial .^^ Hdian. iv. 6, 12, ovk etl oiEKpi- 
vovTO t/i/£s rjaav, &c. ; with the adjunct 
notion of preference, 1 Cor. iv. 7, Ti§ yap 



(TE ^LaKpivEi ; 2) fig. to distinguish, or dis- 
cern clearly^ note accurately. Matt. xvi. 3, 
diaKp. TO TrpocrcoTTov tov ovpavov. 1 Cor. 
xiv. 29, ol (iXXoL ^LaKpLVETODcrav, ' try, or 
examine, w^hat is said ;' (comp. ^o/ci/xa^Eii/ 
TO. TrvEVfxaTa, 1 John iv. 1. Sept. and 
Class.) or rather, ''decide, determine, on 
what is said.' So Hdot, ix. 58. vii. 54, 
med. Demosth. 1301, toc dlKaia dLUKpT- 
vuL : also Plato, Hesiod, and Sept. And 
so 1 Cor. \i. 5, diaKpTvuL avd julegov 
Tiv6<s. — II. MID. OLaKpLvofxaL and aor. 

I. pass. SLEKpLdi]v, with mid. signif. lit. to 
separate oneself from, Thuc. vii. 34. viii. 

II, and by impl. to he at hostility icith, to 
contend with, prop, in battle, or at variance, 
Class. In N. T. metaph. 1) to contend 
or strive ivith in disputation, Jude 9, tw 
6La(36X(x} d. TTEpi, Acts xi. 2, absol. o. 
TTpos avTov. Sept. and Appian, i. 767, 33. 
2) to he at strife icith oneself, as said of 
doubt or wavering, to hesitate, Matt. xxi. 
21. Mk. xi. 23. Rom. iv. 20. xiv. 23. Ja. 
i. 6. ii. 4, KoL oh ciEKpid^TE Ev kavToT^, 
' if ye do this -without hesitation.' So 
fjL7]dku dLaKpLvSfjLEvo^, ' wlthout hcsltation,' 
Acts x. 20. xi. 12. Ja. i. 6. 

AiaKp L(TL£, Eto^, t], {SLaKpiuco,) 1) a 
distinguishing, or discerning clearly, said of 
the action or faculty thereof, Heb. v. 14, 
B. KaXov Kai kukov. 1 Cor. xii. 10, dia- 
KpiaEL^ Tcov 'TrvEvp.a.TODv. 2) by impl. the 
dijudication, Rom. xiv. 1, fxi) eU BiaKpL- 
o-£t5 OLaXoyLCTjULwv, 'not for the dijudica- 
tion of his thoughts and reasonings.' But 
see my note. 

AtafcwXu'w, f. vcrco. The Sid is not, 
as many suppose, emphatic ; but it is highly 
significant, and intensive of the sense of 
KcoXifco, In fact, the term signifies to hin- 
der the accomplishment of any meditated 
action hy interposing some impediment, 
which shall keep the intention and the 
action apart [dia) ; and that either in 
deeds, to hinder, with an acc. of thing or 
person, or in words, to forhid, with an acc. 
of person, as Matt. iii. 14, diEKUiXvEi/ 
avTov, Plato de Rep. ii. p. 240, tov gkv- 

TOTOfJLOV OLaKCoXvOjULEV yEUJpyELV. 

ALaXaXio), f. -ncTOD, {Sia, to and fro, 
one with another, and XaXico,) 1) to inter- 
change mutual converse, converse icith, intr. 
Polyb. xxiii. 9, 6, B. rrpd^ dXXvXov?, and 
oft. in Class. 2) to speak of throughout, 
every where, divulge, tell abroad, trans. ; 
equiv. to diacpt^fxiX^u), Ps. 1. 16, Symm. 
OLoXaXricrEL v yXcoarad aov Tr]v eXe7]/j.o- 
arvv7]v aov. Pass, in Lu. i. 65, diEXaXElTO 

TTUVTa. 

AiaXiy u), f. Jw, {Sid, to and fro, 
one with another, and Xiyofxai, to talk,) 
prop, to lay out, cidl out, gather apart, 
select, Xen. CEcon. viii. 9. In N. T. only 
as deponent middle : dLaXiyofiai, f. 



AI A 



84 



A I A 



fo^at, used of mutual converse^ both in 
Class, and N. T. and in various shades of 
meaning, 1. as said of disputation, to dispute 
or liold disputation with, intrans. foil, by 
dat. Jude 9, tw ^cafSoXco diaKpivofXE- 
i/os ^ifiA-iysTo, and Class. Mk. ix. 34, 
TTpo^ aXXri\ov9 S. and Sept. — II. of pub- 
lic teaching, to discuss, reason, argue, in- 
trans. & absol. Acts xviii. 4. xix. 8, sq. 
XX. 9, foil, by TTpos with acc. Acts xxiv. 
12; fig, of exhortation, &c. to address, 
speak to, with dat. Heb. xii. 5, and Class. 

AiaXeLTTo), f. [Slo., through, be- 
tween, and Xelttu),) prop, to leave a space 
of time hetiveen one action and another. 
Hence by impl. to intermit, cease any ac- 
tion ; gener. preceded by oh, and foil, by 
partic. of some verb of action, as Lu. vii. 
45, ov diiXLirz KaTa(pLXov<ja, and Class. 

AidXeKTO?, ou, rj, (^taXlyto,) prop. 
speech, Umgiiage ; or spec, as spoken by a 
particular nation, or province, dialect. Acts 

i. 19. 

AiaXXacrcTiJO, f. ^o), {^lcl, to and fro, 
mutually, and dXX.) permuto, commuto, 
to change any thing for another, to inter- 
change, exchange. So Class. Hence fig. 
to change any one's feelings towards an- 
other, to reconcile wdth liim. Class. In 
N. T. only mid. dLaXXdaaofxaL, and aor. 
pass, with mid. signif. to change Oiie's oimi 
feelings towards any one, to he reconciled 
to h im. Matt. v. 24, hia}CX(vyy\^i tw 
ddsXipcp. Sept. and Class. 

AiaXoy lX^o jULai,f. LcroiuLaL, I. prop, 
reckon through, i. e. completely reckon up 
and balance an account with any one, 
Demosth. p. 1236, and fig. to reckon or 
account, cogitare. In N. T. to mentally 
reckon, reason, consider, either with others 
or oneself, 1) gener. and foil, either by kv 
Tal^ KapdLaL's avTcou, Mk. ii. 6, 8. Lu. iii. 
15. V. 22, or £u eavTco, Lu. xii. 17, or 
sauTois, Mk. ii. 8, or Trap' iauTots, Matt, 
xxi. 15. Sept. and Class. — II. in a reci- 
procal sense, to consider together, foil, by 
£f iavTOL?, Matt. xvi. 7, 8. Trpos dXXv- 
Xous, Mk. viii. 16. Trpos eavTou^, Lu. xx. 
14. Also to debate one with anotlier, and 
by impl. to dispute, Mk. ix. 33, -Trpos lav- 
Tous 0. Xen. Mem. iii. 5, 1. ^lian V. H. 
xiv. 43. 

AiaXoy icT }x6^, ou, 6, [SLaXoyLX^oiULaL,) 
1) prop, a reckoning up of accounts, De- 
mosth. p. 951, 20. R. 2) fig. reasoning, 
thought, either with others or oneself. So in 
N.f . I. GENER. Lu.ii.35. v. 22. ix.47. Ja. 

ii. 4. Sept. and later Class, reckoning, i. e. 
reasoning, or opinion, Rom. i. 21. 1 Cor. 

iii. 20. Rom. xiv. 1. device, purpose, gener, 
evil, Lu. vi. 8. Matt. xv. 19. Mk. vii. 21. 
Sept. In Lu. ii. 35, ottojs dv diroKa- 
XvcpdcocTLV Ik ttoXXodv Kap^iwv diaXo- 
yia-fxai, it seems to mean disposition of 



mind, whether for good or evil. — II. spec. 
of thought or cogitation, i. e. internal dis- 
C0U7-sing, Lu. ix. 46, iicrriXQE 6k SiaXo- 
yLcr/uLO^ kv avTol's. Hence, as cogitation 
suggests the idea of care, (so Shakspeare, 
' The native hue of resolution is sicklied 
o'er With the pale cast of thought,^) the 
plur. ^LoXoyLcrixol is used to denote, as 
H. Steph. expresses it, internes discepta- 
tiones, i. e, varice et perpetucR ambages, 
quales solent in mentem venire, cum ali- 
quid novum et parum per se probabile oc- 
currit. So Lu. xxiv. 38, Tt n-^Tapayixi- 
voL £(TT£, Koi diaTL S. dva(3aLvovcriv kv 
Tat? KapSiai^ vjuioov ; i. e. *■ thoughts fluc- 
tuating between affiance and distrust;' and 
so in Phil. ii. 14, iravra ttolsIte x^P'-^ 
yoyyvarpicov /cat diaXoy l (t ixwv, (comp. 
Judg. V. 16, k^ETaa-fxoL Kapdia^,) 'with- 
out hesitation, or distrust in God's provi- 
dence.' And so 1 Tim. ii. 8, nrpoaEu- 
X^<Tdai — x^P'-^ dLaXoyia/jLov, 'with en- 
tire affiance.' Comp. Ja. v. 15, r/ evxv 
T775 TrtffTtcos, and i. 6, aiT&Tv kv itlo-tsl, 

AiaXva), f. ucrw, (^ta, apart, and Xuco,) 
1 ) prop, of things, to dissolve, lit. ' to re- 
solve any thing into the parts of which it 
is composed.' So 1 K. xix. 11, we read 
of a strong wind, SLaXuov oprj. 2) metaph. 
to separate persons who have been united 
(e. gr. to discharge troops, Polyb. xxxi. 
25, 7, ) or break zip an assembly. " Pass, to 
he separated and scattered abroad, Acts v. 
36, Trayres — SuXvdrjaav. ' 

ALajmapTvpOjULai, f. ovfxai, depon. 
mid. in Class, to call any one solemnly 
to icitness, whether gods or men, and by 
impl. to affirm with solemn obtestations. 
In N. T. to testify thoroughly, bear full 
ivitness, as ex])ressive of asseveration, 
admonition, and entreaty. I. to prove 
like a witness, and to set forth fully and 
freely, to teach, enforce. Acts viii. 25. x. 
42. xviii. 5. xx. 21. xxiii. 11. Heb. ii. 6. 
Sept., Jos., and Class. — II. to call to wit- 
ness, i. e. to make a strong appeal to the 
reason or conscience, and, from the ad- 
junct, to admonish, solemnly charge, enjoin 
to do this or that, Lu. xvi. 28. absol. in 
Acts ii. 40. 1 Th. iv. 6. strengthened by 
the adjunct evcoiTLOv tov Qeov, 1 Tim. 
V. 21. 2 Tim. ii. 14. iv. 1, and thus equiv. 
to our verb to conjure, solemnly enjoin. 
Sept. and Class. 

Aiafxdxo fJiai, f. vo'cimai, depon. mid. 
1) prop, to fight through or out, to combat 
in deed, Thuc. vii. 63. v. 41. 2) metaph. 
to contend in ivords, to dispute warmly. 
So Acts xxiii. 9, dLSjULaxovTO, XiyovTE<s, 
&c. Thuc. iii. 42, and oft. in Class. 
However it rather means insisted, con- 
tended, as often in Plato, and so Thuc. iii. 
40, 2, dLa/maxop-aL jut] fXETayvwvaL uuas 
Ttt irpoGOEOoyixiva. 



MA 



85 



AI A 



AtajUEz/o), f. i/w, gener. and in Class. 
to remain^ or continue throughout^ i. e. 
permanently, in the same place, state, con- 
dition, or circumstances, &c. Class. In 
N. T. to remain the same in state or con- 
dition, Heb. i. 11, cru diajxhefs^ scil. 6 
«ut65, as opp, to the changing adverted to 
in next ver. So 2 Pet. iii. 4, Travra outw 
CLafxiv&L^ ' continue as they have been,' 
Sept. and Class. With adjuncts, as KUi- 
06s, Lu. i. 22. Trpo's Tii/tt, ' remain unto^ 
be preserved unto, continue with, (apud) 
any one,' Gal. ii. 5. Also ^. /x£Ta tii/os, 
of persons, ' to continue ivith^ be constant 
towards any one,' Lu. xxii. 28. 

Aia^gpi^co, f, icro), lit. to dispart any 
thing, separate it into portions, with the 
implied notion of dividing them among 
others, or sharing them with others. I. prop. 
Mk. XV. 24, dLSfxipL^ov TO, ifxaTia avTov. 
Pass. Acts ii. 3, ^iayuepi^o/xei/at yXtoccai, 
'divided out to each person from one com- 
mon source.' Mid. in a reciprocal sense, 
to divide out for oneself Matt, xxvii. 35, 
diEfjLEpLo-avTo TO. LfxaTLci jULov. Lu. xxiii. 
34. John xix. 24. and Sept. or among one 
another, Lu.xxii. 17,^o distribute to others^ 
Acts ii. 45, diBfxipLX^ov avTu Trdcri. Sept. 
and Class. — II. fig. as said of discord and 
dissension, pass, to he separated into par- 
ties ; foil, by kirl and an acc. or by dat. 
Lu. xi. 17, ^aoriXaLa k(p' kavTriv dia- 
figpio-Ofto-a, and 18. xii. 52, 53, dia/uLE- 
pLcrdyjaETUL i(p' ulw. 

AiafXEp Lo- fxo's^ ou, o, (^ta^Epitoo,) 1) 
prop, a partition^ and by impl. apportion- 
ment of any thing, Ezek. xlviii. 29, and 
Class. 2) in N. T. metaph. dissension^ 
disagreement^ dispciHitio^ opp, to Eiprivt]v^ 
Lu. xii. 51. Comp. Lu. xi. 17. 

ALauE/uLU)^ f. /xw, (^id. denoting apart, 
andi/a'^o),) 1) prop, to divide into poiiioiis^ 
and distribute to others ; Xen., Plato, and 
other Class. 2) fig, to dividge^ spread 
abroad^ and in pass, to be spread abroad^ 
divulged^ Acts iv. 17, diavEfxii^ij Eh tou 
Xaov^ ' serpat in populum.' So the simple 
VEfxEaQai has often the sense se77?ere ; nay, 
there may be here a medical metaphor, 
such as we should expect in St. Luke the 
physician, with allusion to those ulcers call- 
ed kpirvcrTLKa^ (comp.Virg.Georg. iii. 469,) 
which are said vEfxeaOaL^ kirLvifXEadui^ and 
irpocru) i/£/>i£crOai,andconseq. OLavifxEadai. 

A t a 1/ £ u w, f. £U(ra), lit, to make signs by 
the hand, eyes, or otherwise, and thereby 
express one's meaning, when not commu- 
nicable by words; equiv, to oid VEvixaTo<5 
SrjXoco^ Lu. i. 22, and so in Pint. Arat. 20. 
Thus it is opp. to XuXeoo^ e. gr. in Athen. 
ap. Steph, Thes. Efxoi XaXoov ajxa kul Slu- 
vsvcov. The word occurs in Sept. and 
later Class. The earlier ones use vEofxaTi 
Xj0^o-6at. See my note on Thuc. i. 134, 1. 



AiavoTj fia^ aTos, to, {SLavoioiuLaL, 
to pass any thing through the mind, turn 
in one's mind,) the object or result of 
thought, i. e, cogitation^ sentiment^ opinion^ 
Lu. xi. 17, et^ojs TO. d. uvtwv. Sept. and 
Class. 

AiavoLa^ a9, r?, ( ^ta, i'ou9,)prop. a pass- 
ing any thing through the mind^ but gener. 
and in N. T. the power of thought in various 
shades of signif. I. by meton. the tliink- 
ing facidty^ the mind or intellect, as 
opp. to the body, Matt. xxii. 37. Mk. xii. 
30. Lu. X. 27. Eph. i. 18. iv. 18. Heb. 
viii. 10. X. 16. 1 Pet. i. 13. Sept. & Class. 
In 1 John v. 20, didcoKav vjuuv OLctvoLav^ 
it means the poicer of understanding^ 
as Xen. Mem. iii. 12, 6. iv. 8, 1.— IL 
MIND, as denoting not so much the 
thoughts, as the feelings^ affections^ and dis- 
positions of the mind. Lu. i. 51, viTEpri- 
cpavoL ^lavoLO. Kapoia's avTuov. Col. i. 
21, kx^pol Ttj diavoLa^ ' mind and heart.' 
Eph. ii. 3, 'TTOLOVUTc's n-d ^aXv/ULaTa 
T?7S (rapKo'5 KUL Twv dLavoLcov^ ' the 
affections or passions of the mind.' 2 Pet. 
iii. 1, dLEyELpoo vfxwv Ti]v eIX. cLavoLav^ 
' your pure and uncoi rupt disposition of 
mind.' So Plato Phsed. p. 66, A. elXl- 
KpivEl Ty OLavoia -y^ptMfXEVo^. 

Aiavoiyui^ f. ^w, (^ia, thoroughly, 
and avoiyu),) gener. and in Class, to open 
fully what had before been closed. In 
N. T. I. PROP. fxvToav^ to open the 
icomb^ as said of the first-born, Lu. ii. 23. 
Also Sluv. Ttts d/cods, to ope?i the ears, i.e. 
restore the hearing, Mk. vii. 34, sq. — 

11. METAPH. Siau. TOv<s o^OaA^MOus, to 
restore the sight, Lu. xxiv, 31. 2 Kings 
vi. 17 ; or the heart, i. e. ' to make 
one able or willing to understand, or re- 
ceive, moral truths,' Lu. xxiv. 45. Acts 
xvi. 14. 2 Mace. i. 4. Themist. p. 29. So 
also Hos. ii. 15, d. avvEcriv avTTj's. Hence 
— III. SPEC, to open out the sense of 
what had before been closed to the un- 
derstanding, Lu. xxiv. 32, S. Ttts ypacpd^. 
Acts xvii. 3. 

ALaVVKTEpEVU), f. EVCTCO, {Sid & 

vvKT.) to pass through the 72zV//z^, intrans. 
foil, by a dat. of place, and gen. by kv ; as 
Sept., Jos., and later Class. So Lu. vi. 

12, r\u SiavvKTEpevwv kv Ty irpoarEVXV 
Tov Qeov. 

Aiavvu), f. ucrw, (^id, dj/uw,) to bring 
ct thing through to an end, complete any 
action, e. gr. that of travelling. Acts xxi. 
7, 0. TOV ttXovv, Jos. and Class. 

Aia7rai/To§, adv. from tlie phrase ^id 
nravTo^ Xpovov, lit. through cdl time, 
ahcays, continually, 1) prop. Mk. v. 5. 
Acts ii. 25. xxiv. 16. Rom. xi. 10. 2 Th. 
iii. 16. Heb. xiii. 15. 2) in a lower or 
popular sense, of what is done at proper 



AI A 



86 



A I A 



or stated times, Lu. xxiv. 53. Acts x. 2. 
Heb. ix. 6. Sept. and Class. 

ALairapaTpifi}]^ tj^, ri-> violent dis- 
pute, 1 Tim. vi. 5, in several MSS. and the 
Edd. of Griesb. and Scholz for the text, 
rec. irapadLaTpi^al, where see my note. 

ALaTTEpdo), f. aoro), to pass through or 
ewer, as a lake. Matt. ix. 1. xiv. 34. Mk. 
V. 21. vi. 53 ; foil, by tt/jos and acc. Lu. 
xvi. 26 : the sea, by €t§. Acts xxi. 2. Sept. 
and Class. 

AtaTrXsw, f. svo-tu, to sail through or 
over ; e. gr. to iriXayo^, Acts xxvii. 5, 
and Class. 

Aiairov iui, f. 77<r<«, lit. to bring any 
thing through, i. e. to perfection, hy much 
labour, and in pass, of persons, to he exer- 
cised ivith labour, Eccl. x. 9 ; also to be 
wearied out therewith. Hence, from the 
adjunct, to feel aggrieved, bear with im- 
patience, be indignant. Acts iv. 2, dia- 

TVOVOVpiEVOL SlO. TO SLddcrKELV UVTOV^ TOV 

\a6v. xvi. 18, {5m7roy7j6£is, moleste ferens, 
\v7rrjdEL9. 

ALairopevo pcai, f. evcro/iiai, depon. 
to go or j^f^ss through a place. Acts xvi. 4. 
Lu. xiii. 22. xviii. 36. Rom. xv. 24. Sept, 
and Class. 

Aiairopiu), f. riGU3,{^Ld intens. and 
dnropio),) to be thoroughly in perplexity 
what to do, Lu. ix. 7. Acts ii. 12. x. 17 ; 
foil, by TTgpt and gen. Lu. xxiv. 4. Acts 
v. 24, and Class. 

Aiaw pay fxaTEvofxaL, f. EvcrofxaL, 
(from Old, through or out, and irpayfxa- 
Ts-vofxai, which signifies to d,o any busi- 
ness, esp. mercantile, to trade, and "irpay- 
fiaTEVTi]<s, a merchant, as the term is used 
several times in Plutarch.) Thus oiairp. 
signifies io carry through or accomplish a 
business. So Lu. xix. 15, 'iva yvw, Tt§ 
Tt dwwpayfjiaTEvcra'To, 'what any one 
had effected, or, as we say, done, in busi- 
ness,' gained by traffic. 

ALanrpVoD, f. Lcrco, to saw through. 
Aristoph. and others of the best writers 
use nrpiu) and dLairpico tov9 oSovTa^, to 
saw, grate, or gnash the teeth, and also, 
as descriptive of rage, Lucian Calumn. 24, 
T0U5 0(5oi/Ta§ OLaTrpiEi. In N. T. only 
the Pass, occurs, and in a met. sense, to be 
enraged. Acts v. 33, aKovcravTE's SisTrpi- 
ovTo, sub. Tats Kapdiai^ ah. which is ex- 
pressed infra vii. 54, Slettplovto Tats Kap- 
dLaL<s avTcou, and with the addition of the 
Words Kal EfSpuxof Toil's 6S6vTa<3 ett av- 
Tov, prob. in order to unite the outward 
expression of rage with the inward feeling. 

AtapTraJo), f. derm, prop, (like the 
Latin divellico,) to snatch or tear different 
loays, {dis,) and thence, as a graphic de- 
scription of plundering, to ravage, plunder, 
spoil, as said of a city or house, or the pro- 



perty therein. So Sept. and Class. So 
Matt. xii. 29, Ta gkevi) avTov ^tapird- 
auL, and Polyb. iv. 18, d. tou§ (iiov^ av- 
n-u)u. Thuc. viii. 31, baa inrE^EKELTO 
dn'ipTraarav, 

A Lap prjy vv juLi, & ALappncrau), f. ^w, 
(^ia, apart, and pny.) prop, to rend asun- 
der., as dEcrfxd, Lu. viii. 29. Judg. xvi. 9, 
Alex. vEvpd<5 : also to tear through, rend, 
said of a garment. Matt. xxvi. 65. Mk. xiv. 
63. Acts xiv. 14, as denoting grief, &c. ; also 
of a net, Lu. v. 6. Not found elsewhere, 
though there is perhaps an allusion to it 
in Hos. xiii. 8, ^lappn^oi crvyKKEKJixdv 
Kupcia^ avTcov, 'the caul of their heart,' 
meaning that fine piece of net-worh, the 
omentum, or integument, wrapped around 
the heart and bowels, and which wild beasts 
delight to tear and glut themselves withal. 

Aiaa acpEtti, f. ricrui, {did, thoroughly, 
and (ra(pi]9, clear,) to make fully manifest, 
i. e. to make known, narrate, tell, Matt, 
xviii. 31, SLEa-d(pi]<Tav tw icvpico avToov 
nrdvTa. 2 Mace. i. 18, 20, w§ ^£ diEadcpri- 
(Tav vfxiv, Polyb. i. 46, 4. 

Aiaa EL(t3,i. gtVw, prop, to shake tlio- 
roughly, i. e. vehemently, as said of things, 
Diod. Sic. XX. 87, to cause to shake with 
terror. Job iv. 14, fxov nrd ocrTa SiiaELcrE : 
also 2) fig. to intiraidcde, Polyb. x. 26, 4. 
3) metaph. to extort moiiey of any one by 
intimidation, Lu. iii. 14, fxiidiva diaarEL- 
o"f]T£. And so in various passages of the 
Class, adduced by AVets. all with accus. 
of person. And so ^tacfto-ts in the 
Greek law-books, and concussio in the 
Latin. The passive is found in 3 Mace. 

vii. 21, UTTO lJLl]CEvd<5 SiaCTELadivTE^ Tthv 

virapxdvTiov, lit. 'shaken out of their pro- 
perty.' 

AiacTKo piri^co, f. l(T(j), to scatter 
throughoid or abroad, I. prop, as grass 
to be made into hay, or corn to be dried 
and browned. So the simple verb in Matt, 
xii. 30, 6 pcY] crvvdycov /xet e/ulov crKop- 
ttlX^el : also said of corn, when thrown 
against the wind, and scattered abroad, in 
the process of winnowing (see on the word 
XiKjixdu),) Matt. XXV. 24, 26, crvudycov 
bdsu oh SiEcrKopTrLcras. Hence to dis- 
pei'se, scatter, as said of men or animals, 
Matt. xxvi. 31. Mk. xiv. 27. John xi. 52. 
Acts V. 37. Sept. and Class. Hence said 
of utterly discomfiting an enemy, Lu. i. 

51, dLEO-KOpTTLCrEV hTTEpl](pdvOV<S . So 

^lian V. H. xiii. 1, 6, tou§ /llev StEaKop- 

TTLCTE, TOV? Se d'TTEKTELVE, aud Scpt. II. 

METAPH. to dissipate ov squander property 
that had been got together by others, Lu. 
XV. 13, dLEa-KopirLcrE ohcrLav avTov, 

and xvi. 1, d. Ta vTrdpypvTa avTOv. So 
Dan. xi. 24, virap^Lv avTol^ CLacTKop'irLE'i. 

Atao-TTfiw, f. ao-o), prop, to pidl asun- 



AI A 



87 



Ai A 



der^ and by impl. to tear in pieces^ jNIk. v. 
4. Acts xxiii. 10. Sept. and Class. 

Atao-TTEipo), f. €pto, prop, to scatter zip 
and doicn^ as seed ; fig. to scatter abroad and 
disperse, as said of jiersons, Acts viii. 1, 
4. xi. 19. Sept. and Class. 

ALaairopn^ a9, {^^licnropa^ pret. 
middle of ^iao-7r£to6o, to disperse,) prop, 
a subst. denoting dispersio?i^ as in Class. ; 
but in the Sept. Jer. xxxiv. 17. Judith 
V. 19. used of the state of dispersion, in 
which many of the Jews were, after the 
Babylonian captivity, scattered up and 
down in Chaldsea, Persia, Egypt, Syria, 
and Asia Minor. See Jos. Bell. vii. 3. 
In N. T. the word is used by meton. as a 
partic. or adj. to denote the ot Sua-Trap- 
jjiivoL 'lovdaToL^ ' the Jews living in dis- 
persion,' Ja. i. 1, TaT? SuidEKa cpvXat^ 
TaL9 kv Ty SLacrTTopa. 1 Pet. i. 1, oia- 
ariropd's TIovtov. So of Israel, Deut. 
xxviii. 25, £0-77 diaa'Tropd. Comp. Ps. 
cxlvii,2. Sept. s'TTLcrvvd^EL Tas SLacTropd^ 
Tov 'la-pavX. 2 Mace. i. 27, siria-vvdyayE 
Ttji; ^Lacrnropdv vjULcov. In Jo. vii. 35, fxi) 
&h t{]i^ Siacnropdv tcov *EXX. fxiXXsL 
TropEuecrOat ; the meaning is, 'the Jews 
dwelling in dispersion among the Gentiles,' 
espec. those using the Greek language, and 
so equiv. to the Hellenists. A similar use 
of the genit. is found in Paralip. Jerem. 
cited by Wets, in loc. etTraxe toIs vloT^ 
'Icrpa-nX' 'O Bapoux aTriorTSLXev eh ttju 
^lacnropdv tcov edvcou. 

Aiao-TEWw, f. sXw, to send or put 
apart ^ to separate^ and metaph. to distin- 
guish differences, and determine doubts. 
Also in mid. to state distinctly and clearly. 
Hence, as in N. T., to distinctly enjoin^ 
eocpi'essly charge^ Acts xv. 24, foil, by dat. 
and absol. Heb. xii. 20. Foil, by a nega- 
tive clause, to forbid^ Matt. xvi. 20. Mk. 
V.43. vii. 36. viii. 15. ix. 9. Sept. & Class. 

Aid(TTr] fxa^ aTos, to, {oucrTrjjULL^^ 
distance^ i. e. interval, whether of time, 
Acts V. 7, and Class, or of place, 2 Mace, 
xiv. 44, and Class. 

ALaarToXt}^ ^9, 77, {6 LaaT&XXco,) dis- 
tinction^ difference^ Rom. iii. 22. x. 12. 
1 Cor. xiv. 7. 

Aiacr^picpu)^ f. i/zto, {Sid and cn-p.) 

1 ) prop, to distort, and fig. to pervert ; said 
in N. T. of persons, to turn aicay, seduce, 
Lu. xxiii. 2. Acts xiii. 8. Sept. and Class. 

2) of things, to ivrest, pervert, corrupt. 
Acts xiii. 10, Tas 6oov9 Kvpiov, i. e. 
Divine truth, Sept. and Class. Pass, 
perf. part. OLEaToap./uivo's, perverse, cor- 
rupt, Matt. xvii. 17. Lu. ix. 41, uttlctto^ 
Kai dcsaTpap.iixs.vj]. Acts xx. 30, XaXovv- 
T€§ SiECTTpafXfxiva, ' things erroneous.'' 
So Arrian opposes Soyixa-ra opdd to 
^LEdTpapLfJiEva Kai arTpef^Xd. 

Aiaa (joX^uo, f. cvaro, to save, i. e. bring 



safely through danger, presei'^'C, traris. 
So 1 Pet. iii. 20, 6t£(ra)t)?/crrti/ ot' vdaTO^. 
Acts xxvii. 43. Sept. and Class. With 
the idea of motion, to bring safely to any 
place or person, or pass, to he brought to, 
& reach safely. Acts xxiii. 24, 'Lva — ITau- 
Xov SiacruicxcjoaL 7rp6§ ^nXiKa. Pass. Acts 
xxvii. 44, ETTL Ti]v yrju. Sept. and Class. 
Of the sick, to bri7ig them through, i, e. 
from sickness to health. Matt. xiv. 36. 
Lu. vii. 3. Poljaen. ii. 33, 3. 

Aian-ay-t], ^s, ij, {oiaTETaya, perf. 
mid. of SLardaad), dis-pono, to dispose., 
arrange,) a disposing in order, disposition, 
arrangement. The word occurs in N. T. 
only twice, 1) prop. Acts vii. 53, EXdlSETs 
TOV vop-ov £19 SiaTayd^ dyyiXwv, where 
the sense seems to be, 'ye have received 
the law at (i. e. conformably to) the ap- 
pointment of angels,' (see my note there). 
2) in the sense ordinance, Rom. xiii. 2, Tr; 
Tou Qeox) SiaTayy. Ezra iv. 11. 

AiaTay p-a, aT09, to, ordinance, man- 
date, Heb. xi. 23, d.Tov. ^aaiX. Sept. and 
Class. 

AiaT a p d(r (T (JO, f. ^w, {Sid intens. 
and Tap.) as said of the mind, to perturb, 
disturb, agitate; but almost confined to the 
pass. So Lu. i. 29, SiEi-apax'^^h ^ Class. 

ALaTaoraro), f. ^oo, prop, to range in 
order, arrange, as trees, or troops. In 
N. T. fig. to set in order, arrange, appoint, 
ordain, 1) gener. Gal. iii. 19. See on 
SiaTayr]. 2) spec, to direct, prescribe, 
order, vA\2ii is to be done, Matt. xi. 1, S. 
T0I9 Stxt^EKa fxad. Lu. viii. 55. Acts 
xviii. 2. 1 Cor. ix. 14, diETa^E, for oia- 
Tay/ixa ETroii^crE, and xvi. 1. So to Slu- 
TETayfxEvov, ' what is appointed,' as of 
enctctments by law, Lu. iii. 13. Acts xxiii. 
31, and Ta SLaTaxdiv-ra, Ln, xvii. 9. 
Sept. and Class. Hence mid. Siai-dcrao- 
P-UL in the same sense. Acts vii. 44. xxiv, 
23. 1 Cor. vii. 17. xi.' 34^ Tit. i. 5. In 
Acts XX. 13, QVTU) yap 7]v diarETayp^i- 
I/09 naLi\o9, ' so Paul had directed.' The 
perf. pass, has the mid. signif. 

A i a T £ A. £ w, f. Eau), 1) to bring through, 
i. e. to an end, to fully complete, trans, 
as said of any work or occupation ; and 2) 
of time, with ^poi/oi/ or jSi'oi/, to pass 
through it, peragere, transigere. So often 
in Class. Hence, to continue through, re- 
main, intrans. foil, by nomin. of adject, or 
partic. Acts xxvii. 33, dcnTOL diuTEXELTE. 
2 Mace. V. 27, T7]v yppTcoor] Tpo(pi]i/ 

(TLTOVfXEVOL SlETeXoVV. JEhSLTl, V. H. 

X. 6, SiETiXEaE dvo(To<s, and oft. in Class. 

A LaTT] p ECO, f. v<Tco, TO kecp oiic's cyc 
thoroitghly or continually fixed on any 
thing. Hence, to ivatch it carefully, heep 
it with care. So in Class. In N. T. fig. in 
two senses, \) to guard with care, care- 
fully lay lip, or retain, Lu. ii. 51. 2) 



AI A 



88 



AI A 



witli kavrdv^ Sec. to guard or Jceep one- 
self from any thing, wholly abstain from 
it, Acts XV. 29. 

ALaTLdrifjLL^ f. 6170-0), to place apart^ 
and by impl. to set out in order ^ arrange^ 
dispose. In N. T. it occ. only in mid. to 
arrange or dispose any thing, trans, to 
make a disposition of\ I. gener. to ap- 
point^ make over^ commit to^ as ^acri- 
\i.Lav^ Lu. xxii. 29, foil, by dat. Xen. 
Cyr. V. 2, 7, d. ti]v dvyanripa. So of 
a testamentary disposition, to bequeath. 
Hence 6 SiaTLdiiuLEvo's^ the testator^ Heb. 
ix. 16, sq. and Class. — II. spec, of a cove- 
nant, to make an arrangement with another 
parti/. So diaTLOsfiaL diadriKriv^ to make 
a Govenxint ivith^ foil, by dat. Heb. yiii. 10, 
or TT/oos with acc. Acts iii. 25. Hel>. x. 16. 
Sept. and Aristoph. Av. 439, nv ixt] did- 
Gcourat y olSe diad^K^jv kfxoi. 

AiarpT^ w, f. xj/co^ lit. and prop, to ruh 
through., and by impl. to wear away by 
rubbing, Herod, vii. 120. Hence, to con- 
sum^, eospend., waste, and, as said of time, 
to spend or pass it. Acts xvi. 12, d. vfxi- 
pa9. XX. 6. XXV. 6 & 14. Sept. So ab- 
sol. with xpo'^'oi/, &c. understood, to re- 
main in a place, with an adv. or other 
kdjunct of place, John iii. 22. xi. 54. 
Acts xii. ] 9. XV. 35. Sept. and Class. 

AiaTpocjyr], ^s, rjt (^tarpt^o),) nou- 
rishment, food, 1 Tim. vi. 8. 

Atauyct^o), f. aVto, prop, to shine 
through ; and, as said of daylight, to shine 
forth, dawn, 2 Pet. i. 19. 

Aiavyij's, io^s, 6, n-, adj. (Bid and 
avyr},) lit. shining through, pellucid, trans- 
parent. Rev. xxi. 21, in later Edd. for 
text. rec. dLa(l)avm, Sept. Jos. & Class. 

A La<pa.vi]9, EOS, 6, t], adj. [SiacfyaLvct), 
to make any object visible through any 
medium,) pellucid, transparent. Rev. xxi. 
21, in text. rec. Others have Siauyij^. 
Sept. and Class. 

ALacpipw, f. OLaco, I. to bear or carry 
any thing through a place, &c. Mk. xi. 16, 
lua Tt§ diEuiyKr] (rK£vo<s Slu tou iepov. — 
II. to bear asu7ider, carry different ivays, 
differo, 1) trans, but in N. T. onljdifferri, 
to be published abroad. Acts xiii. 49, diE- 
(pepsTo 6 A-Jyos tou Kvpiov. Said of a 
ship, to be borne to and fro, to be driven 
up and down. Acts xxvii. 27, S. kv tm 
'ASpLcc. So Luc. Herm. 28, dX\' avdyKt] 
£1/ Tw TrgXayo) diacpipEa-daL. 2) intians. 
(or reflex, with eavTou unders.) to bear 
oneself apart, separate oneself from others. 
Hence gener. to differ, Sept. and Class. 
In N. T. it is used in three ways; 1) in 
the phrase tu diacpipovra, ' things that 
are different,' Rom. ii. 18. Phil. i. 10, and 
Class. 2) impers. Siacpipsi, it differs, 
makes a difference, with dat. of pers. Gal. 



ii. 6, ovSsv fxoL SLa(pkpEL. ^lian, V. H. 
i. 25, EjULol ovSkv S. and also in lat. Class. 
3) foil, by gen. to differ from, i. e. to be 
other than ; usually, and always in N. T. 
implying a difference of superiority, to be 
superior, surpass. Matt. vi. 26. x. 51. Lu. 
xii. 7, et al. Sept. Jos. and Class. 

ALa(pEuyoo, f. ^w, to fee through, es- 
cape by fight, absol. Acts xxvii. 42. Sept. 
and Class. 

Aiacpf] iuLL'^co,f. ia-o), to rumour abroad, 
trans. 1 ) prop, of a thing, d. tou \6yov. 
Matt, xxviii. 15. Mk. i. 45, and Class. 
2) of a person, to spread abroad his fame ; 
what is strictly applicable to the thing 
being applied to ^the person. Matt. ix. 31, 
dLE(p^jULLaav avTov kv bXrj Ty ytj. 

AiaipdEipw, i. Epw, {Sid, intrans. and 
(pO.) to wholly corrupt and destroy; and 
in pass, to utterly perish. I. gener. and 
PROP. Lu. xii. 33, ovdk orrjs SiacpdELpEi. 
2 Cor. iv. 16, 6 e^o) dvBp. dLacpdEipETai. 
Rev. viii. 9. xi. 18. Sept. and Class. — II. 
METAPH. to deteriorate, vitiate, spoil. I) 
as said of things, ^. -ra irpdyfxara, to 
spoil the business. 2) of persons, to wholly 
corrupt, seduce. Rev. xi. 18, tous Bia- 
(pdEipovTa^ Ttiv yrjv, i. e. ' the men of 
the earth.' Hdian. i. 6, 2. Hdot. v. 51. 
Also 1 Tim. vi. 5, SLECpdap/uLEVoi tou 
vovv. Comp. Isocr. Paneg. c. 41, diE- 
(pdapfxlvo^ Ttjv (pucTLu : and so Xen. often 
uses the word of perverting the mind, or 
corrupting the morals, or both, and that 
both by false doctrine and evil example : 
sometimes with adjuncts, as yi/w/xais, &c. 
In the passage of 1 Tim. it is implied, not 
only that the mind is perverted, but the 
conscience corrupted. 

Aiacpdopd, a?, 17, (SiacpdEipu),) prop. 
corruption; and metaph. destruction. In 
N. T. corruption in a phys. sense, putre- 
faction, i. e. of flesh in the grave, Acts ii. 
27, 31. xiii. 35, sq. In xiii. 34, p.7]ketl 
iiTTocrTpicpELv EL'S Siacpdopdv, there is a 
fig. mode of expression, (like a similar one. 
Job xxxiii. 28, k\dEXv Eh SiacpQopdv,) 
meaning 710 more to die. 

A Ld<popo9, ov, 6, 17, adj. {dLacpEpa),) 
gener. different. In N. T. 1) diverse, 
various, Rom. xii. 6. Heb. ix. 10. Sept. 
and Class. 2) compar. (as in diacpEpco, 
see in v. II.) better, &c. Heb. i. 4. viii. 6. 

ALacpvXda-a-w, f. gw, lit. to guard 
through, i. e. amidst danger, protect, Lu. iv. 
10, S. <TE. Sept. apd Class. 

Atax£t/Oi^oj, f. Lo-o), to have pass 
through one's hands, to handle, or adminis- 
ter. In mid. hiax^Lpi{pix.ai in a depon, 
sense, to thoroughly manage, despatch busi- 
ness. Hence in N. T. as Acts v. 30, and 
xxvi. 21, and the later writers, like our 
verb to despatch, in the sense mak^ away 
ivith, kill. 



A I A 



89 



AI A 



and x^-.) utter/i/ scoff at^ deride^ absol. 
Acts ii. 13; in later edd. for text. rcc. 

Aiax'^pt^'C^-) LO'iff-, (^ta intens. and 
Xwp.) to ivholli/ separate any persons or 
things, Sept. and Class. In N. T. raid. 
SLax(JopLX^oiJ.uL, in a reciprocal sense, to 
separate oneself irholhj from, depart from, 
Lu. ix. 33. Sept. and Class. 

AidaKTtKo^, oi/, adj . apt^ or Jit to 
teach, 1 Tim. iii. 2. 2 Tim. ii. 24. 

A 1 5 a k: T o 9, 77, oi/, adj . ( ao-KO), ) tauglit, 
foil, by gen. of the agent, and used in 
N. T. I. of persons, taught, instructed, 
John vi. 45, irdvTs.'s dioaKTol Qsov : a 
phrase formed on that at Is. liv. 13. 
Hence, as an adj. learned or skilfid, 1 
Mace. iv. 7, ovTOL diSaKxpl TroXi^xov. 
— II. of things, taught, communicated by 
instruction, 1 Cor. ii. 13, kv BidaKToT^ 
dvdpcoTTLUi]^ cTO<pta's Xoyois. Pind. Olymp. 
ix. 153, TToWoi dk dLdaKTUL^ avdpccnrtJDV 
apETats kA.£o§ cbpovcrav, ' virtues taught 
by men.' 

AiSaarKaXia, a?, t], {SLddcTKU),) teach- 
ing, instructio7i, said 1) of the art or man- 
ner of teaching, Rom. xii. 7. 1 Tim. iv. 
13, 16. V. 17. Tit. ii. 7, and Class. 2) of 
the information conveyed by teaching, the 
instruction \t toTii?^^^, Rom. xv. 4. 2 Tim. 
iii. 16. Comp. 1 Cor. x. 11. 3) of the 
things taught, precept, doctrine. Matt. xv. 
9. Mk. vii. 7. Eph. iv. 14. Cbl. ii. 22. 
1 Tim. i. 10. iv. 1, 6. vi. 1, 3. 2 T]m. 
iii. 10. iv. 3. Tit.i. 9. ii. 1, 10. Sept. & Class. 

A i^dcr Ka\o^, ov, 6, {diddcrKco,) a 
teacher, master, gener. Rom. ii. 20. Heb. 
V. 12; of the Jewish doctors. Matt. ix. 11. 
X. 24, et al. ; of Jesus Christ, Matt. viii. 

19, and oft.; of St. Paul, 1 Tim. ii. 7; of 
other Christian teachers, 1 Cor. xii. 28, 
et al. 

Aidda-KM, f. ^o), I. GENER. to teach, 
1) gener. and absol. Matt. iv. 23. ix. 35. 
Mk. i. 21, et al. ssepe. Constr. with acc. 
of person or thing, or both, Matt. xv. 9. 
John xiv. 26. 1 Tim. iv. 11, et al. In- 
stead of acc. of thing, infin. as Matt, xxviii. 

20. Lu. xi., 1, et al. ; or oVt, as Mk. viii. 
31. Sept. and Class. ; or Trspi, with gen. 
of thing, 1 John ii. 27. — II. spec, in the 
sense to counsel, admonish. See. Matt, 
xxviii. 15. John ix. 34. Acts xxi. 21. 
Heb. viii. 11. Rev. ii. 20, and Class. 

Aioaxhi (fropa the perf. mid. of 

BM<TKU3,) prop, instruction, and equiv. to 
^Ldaa-KaXia: but used in N. T. 1) of the 
art of teaching, Mk. iv. 2. xii. 38. 1 Cor. 
xiv. 6, 26. Tit. i. 9. 2) of the manner or 
character of anv one's teaching. Matt. vii. 
28. xxii. 33. Mk. i. 22, 27. Lu. iv. 32. 
3) of the thing taught, precept, doctrine, 



&c. Matt. xvi. 12. John vii. 16, sq. Acts 
xvii. 19. Rom. vi. 17. Hob. vi. 2, et al. 

Aldpax/^oi/, ov, TO, {Sh, apart, and 
Spaxi^Vi) tJie double drachma, an Attic 
silver coin equal lo two drachmas Attic; 
used in Matt. xvii. 24, of the yearly tri- 
bute to the temple paid by every Jew, 
Exod. XXX. 13, sq. 

AiBwfxL, f. B<jua-(jo, prim, to divide and 
distribute, and by impl. to make over any 
thing to any person, denoting voluntary 
action; but in use it signif. I. gener. 
to give, i. e. bestow upon. i. gener. 
Matt, iv. 9, TovTa nrdwa aoi duxrco, 
xiii. 12. XXV. 8. Mk. ii. 26, et al. ssepe. 
— II. said of sacrifice, homage, &c. to 
offer, present, Lu. ii. 24. Rev. iv. 9, and 
Class. 3) said of a person who does any 
thing to or for another, from whom he 
receives any thing ; the source, author, or 
cause of a favour ; to give, grant, &c. 1) 
gener. Matt. xxi. 23, Ti's crot edooK& Tr;i/ 
i^ovcTLav TavTTiv ; John iv. 12. 1 Cor, 
vii. 25. 2 Cor. viii. 10, et al. and Class. 
Hence the phrase SiSouai tottov, to give 
place, i. e. 'make way, yield,' Lu. xiv. 9. 
Rom. xii. 19. Eph. iv. 27. 2 Thess. iii. 9, 
and Class. So with an acc. where the 
idea may often be expressed by the verb 
cognate with the noun, e. gr. SiSovat 
alvov, to praise, Lu. xviii. 43, Paleeph. 43, 
^id. cLTTOKpicrLv, to ansiver, John i. 22. 
(5i^. 86^av Gew, to glorify, Lu. xvii. 18, 
John ix. 24. Acts xii. 23. mh. tyKOTrrjv, 
1 Cor. ix. 12. o. ivToXnv, John xi. 57. d. 
7rpo(TKO'Tr^]v, 2 Cor. vi. 3. 8. pdTricrjxa, 
John xviii. 22. o. xdpaypia. Rev. xiii. 16. 
2) said of God or of Christ, as the author 
or source of what one has, receives, &c. to 
give, grant, &c. Matt. vi. 11. ix. 8. xii, 
39, et al. ssepe. So dovvat x^P*-^-) 
fer grace or favour, Ja. iv. 6. Rom. xii. 
3, et al. Used in various constructions ; 
viz. foil, by gen. of part, and by ek tlvcs 
in the same sense ; sometimes by £t<? : oft. 
with the dat. and an infin. as neut. subst. 
instead of an accus. ; though sometimes 
the infin. is implied, as Matt. xix. 1 1, oI§ 
SEdoTaL sc. x^P^^v ' with lua instead of 
the infin. Mk. x. 37. So with an acc. and 
infin. to permit, suffer, grant, Acts ii. 27. 
xiii. 35, ovok ^ooo-gis tov octlov crov iSsTv 
^Lacpdopdv. X. 40. xiv. 3, and Class. As 
said of evil or punishment, to inflict, 2 
Thess. i. 8, eKOLKrjcriu. Rev. xviii. 7, 
(Saa-avLcriuLov. 2 Cor. xii. 7, crKoXoxp^ : 
metaph. of things, which are the cause or 
occasion of any thing, to impart, cause. 

Acts iii. 16, 77 TTLOrTL^ eScOKEP UVTCO TtiV 

oXoKX^jpiav. And so in Class. — II.' spec. 
to give up, deliver over, i. e. put into 
the hands of any one, 1) gener. Matt, 
xix. 7. Lu. vii. 15, et al. ssepe. 2) in the 
sense to commit, or entrust, namely, to the 



AIE 



90 



MQ 



charge of any one, and said both of thmgs^ 
Matt. xvi. 19. XXV. 15. Mk. xii. 9. Lu. 
xii. 48, al. Sept. and Class. ; and persons 
delivered over to one's charge, for instruc- 
tion, &c. John X. 29. xvii. 6, 9, 22, 24. 
Heb. ii. 13. 3) to give, i. e. deliver one- 
self^ devote oneself^ to any one, 2 Cor. viii. 
5; or for any one, virlp or Tr^pt Ttz/os, in 
the sense to encounter death for ; or as a 
ransom (ai/Ti'XuTooy) for, Gal. i. 4. 1 Tim. 
ii. 6. Tit. ii. 14; see Lu. xx. 19. Johnvi. 
51. So also covvaL Tr]v \l/vxhv aiiTov 
XvTpov avTL^ Matt. xx. 28. Mk. x. 45. 
Jos. and Class. 3) to givefoHli^ to render^ 
yields said both of persons. Rev. xx. 13, loco- 
K^v T] dccXacraa tou9 VEKpov9 tou§ &v ccut^, 
and things, Lu. vi. 38 ; and also metaph. of 
rendering an ctccount. to any one, Rom. 
xiv. 12, and Class. ; also spec, of Avhat is 
given as a recompense for labour, to Xioij, 
Matt. XX. 4, 14. Mk. xiv. 11. Rev. xi. % 
et al. and Class. ; likewise said of the earth, 
as yielding its fruits, Matt. xiii. 8. Mk. iv. 
7, 8. Sept. & Class. 4) by Hebraism, used 
for Ti'6?j/u.i, to put or place ^ and that both 
prop, to put any tiling upon any thing, Lu. 
xix. 23. Rev. viii, 3 ; and metaph. in the 
sense to apply ^ in the Latinism, covvul 
ipyaoTLav, dare operam^ to use one^s effoHs 
to effect any thing, Lu. xii. 58 : also of 
miracles, to exMhit^ Matt. xxiv. 24. Acts 

ii. 19, and Sept. Finally, with a double 
acc. of person and thing, as office, to ap- 
point^ constitute^ Eph. i. 22, avTov ecwke 
K£<pa\i)v vTrkp Trai/ra, and Sept. ; or, as 
said of a law, or ordinance, to ordai?!^ John 
vii. 19 & 22. Gal. iii. 21. 6. OLadiTKtiv 
TrepLTOfxrj^^ Acts vii. 8, and Sept. 

Ateystpo), f. gpcD, to rouse up^ 1) 
prop, of awakening persons from sleep, 
Matt. i. 24. Mk. iv. 38, sq. Lu, viii. 24. 
Jos. and Class, 2) fig. of things, e. gr. the 
sea, to agitate^ John vi. 18 ; or, as said of 
the mind, to stir up^ incite^ 2 Pet. i. 13. 

iii. L 2 Mace. vii. 21. xv. 10. 

AtEyGu/ulo/xat, to tliorouglily revolve 
in mind^ to consider carefully^ Acts x. 19. 
in rec. Edd. for hdvfx. 

A i £ 5 o 0 o s, ou, 17, a free passage through, 
any place, a pass. In N. T. a thorough- 
fare where several streets meet, and many 
persons have to pass through. Matt. xxii. 9. 

AL€p/UL1]U£VTr}<5^ OV, O, (oi£p/>l?]2/£ UCO, ) 

an interpreter^ 1 Cor. xiv. 28. 

A i £ p /X 7; £ u 60, f. £ucra), to fully i'nterpret^ 
or expound any thing, trans. Lu. xxiv. 27. 
absol. ix. 36. ' 1 Cor. xii. 30. xiv. 5, 13, 
27, and Class. 

Aiipxo p-dL., f. £\Evaop.aL, gener. to 
come or go through^ to pass through or 
along^ to traverse. In N. T. it is used 1. 
PROP. foil, either by om with gen. of place, 
Matt. xii. 43. Lu. xi. 24, 0. ct' avvootjov 



ToV wy, and iv. 30. xvii. 1 1 . John i v. 4. Mk. 
iv. 35. Lu. viii. 22, to pass over a sea, et al. ; 
or by acc. of place, as Lu. xix. 1, ^. Tr)v 
'IfotX^- ^cts xii. 10, et al. Heb. iv. 14, 
0. Tous ohpavov<5., ' has passed throughout 
[all] the heavens, so as to reach the throne 
of God.' So also Sept. and Class. Absol. 
but with an acc. underst. as yT]v.^ X'^P"^-' 
or the like. Acts viii. 4, 40, tiEpxofxzvo^ 
£i;?]y7£/\.t^£T0 ras 7roA.£ts -Trdcra?. x. 38. 
xvii. 23. XX. 25. Hom. II. vi. 392, diEp- 
Xopi£vo<s piya acTV. Foil, by gen. of 
place, to go through the country as far as. 
Acts xi. 19, 22 ; and hence simply to pass 
through a place as far as, Lu. ii. 15. 
Acts ix. 38. — II. FIG. 1) of persons, ah 
TrayTas avdpcoTrov^ 6 ^dvaTCS cltjXBe, 
Rom. V. 12. 2) of things, as a sword, to 
pass through, pierce, Lu. ii. 35 ; or fig. as 
said of a rumour, to pass through a coun- 
try, to spread abroad, Lu. v. 15, OLVpX^'^^ 
6 X6yo<5 'TTspl ai)Tov. So Thuc. vi. 46. 
Xen. An. i. 4, 7, OLrj\.d£v 6 X6yo9, 

AL&pcoTcia), f. vaco, lit. to inquire 
through, so as to find out anyplace, person, 
or thing. Acts x. 17, 0. Ti]u oiKLav. 

Ai£TT7S, £0?, 6, 77, adj. (ois, bis, and 
£T09,) tico years old. Matt. ii. 16, aird 
CLET0U9, scil. iraLOO'S, Kal KaTcoTipco. 

Ai£T£a, as, 77, (oi£T7?§,) a period of 
tivo years. Acts xxiv. 27. xxviii. 30. 

Airiy io p.aL, f. vcropaL, dep. mid. {olo. 
& 777.) prop, to lead or conduct throughout. 
Hence fig. to go through with any narra- 
tion, to recount or relate any thing fully : 
a term appropriate to historical narrations ; 
e. gr. Thuc. vi. 54. trans, and foil, by acc. 
of thing, and dat. of pers. with other ad- 
juncts, as TTcos, o(Tov, TTspi, Mk. V. 16. ix. 
9, 'iva prioEvl oi^yriauiVTaL d zloov. Lu. 
viii. 39, d. oaa £7roLi)(TE gol 6 0£o§. 
Sometimes it has the sense of encomiastic 
narration, as Lu. viii. 39, (see Ps. xlviii. 

13. ) and ix. 10. Acts viii. 33. ix. 27. xii. 
17. Heb. xi. 32. 

A 477777 cTi 9, £ws, 77, (^i777£0/^ai,) a 7mr- 
rative or history, Lu. i. 1. Sept. & Class. 

At 771/ £k: 77 s, £09, 6, 77, adj. {did & vve- 
Kr}£, prop, carried through, i. e. extended 
in length, as said of space, Hom. II. xii. 
134.) but sometimes protracted, as said 
of time, and that even to the utmost 
length. So Luc. Yer. Hist. i. 19, vvktI 
cLi]VEKs'i irdara ku^elx^'TO. In N. T. 
used only of time, in the adverb, phrase 
Eh TO ol77y£K:£5, for adv. continually, per- 
petually, Heb. X. 1,/or ever, and x. 12, 

14. Sept. and later Class. 

Aid dXacrcro^, ov, 6, rj, adj. {ok, bis, 
and ^dXacraa,) situated between two seas, 
as bimaris, the term applied to Corinth, 
Hor. Od. i. 7, 2. In T. said of ^ shoal or 
sand -bank, raised by two opposite currents, 



All 



9 



1 



A 1 K 



and situate at their confluence, Acts xxvii. 
41 . So Dio Chrys. v, p. 83, Tpax^a ^'ai 
dLddXaTTa. 

ALLKutofiaL^ f. ^o/xat, prop, to go or 

pass through, traverse, but in N. T. to 
penetrate, i. e. pierce through, Heb. iv. 12, 
d. a\pL fxtpLCTfxov xl/vyji^ nre /cat iruevjULU- 
Tos, i. e. ' the inmost recesses of the heart.' 
So Galen ad Glaucum : £is /3a0os avTcou 
dal duKVEladaL t^v dvvajXLV. 

Allo-ti] [XL, prop, to separate or divide, 
put asunder, Sept. and Class. ; but also 
used in a reciprocal sense, to separate one- 
self, he separated, foil, bv airo, Lu. xxiv. 
51. Acts xxvii. 28, (Spa^v ok OLacTTYicrav- 
Tfs, sc. kavTov^ : also of time, to pass 
away, elapse, Lu. xxii. 59, <5iaorTdcr?js 
cocTfi copa^ yuta9. 

Allctx^ P t-^o lULaL, f. LcrofxaL, dep. mid. 
to thoroughly affirm, strongly assert, Lu. 
xxii. 59. Acts xii. 15. Jos. and Class. 

ALtcaLOKp Lcria, a?, rj, {oLKaL09 & 
KpL<7i<s,)just or right judgment, Rom. ii. 5. 
Comp. 2 Thess. i. 5. 

AiKaio's, aia, ov, adj. right, just, lit. 
' that which is agreeable to olk7i,'' i.e. 'what 
is laid down as a rule of action.' Such, at 
least, is the moral sense of the word, accord- 
ing to its general acceptation in the N. T. 
& Class. That, however, is founded on the 
primary physical sense, namely, what is^^, 
right, smdjiist. Thus it is said of numbers, 
full, or measures, complete. So Herodot. 
ii. 147, OLKULOL opyvLai : also of a chariot 
that runs evenly, without swerving to one 
side or the other in its course. Thus the 
Hebr. term pn2 to which OLKaLo^ gener. 
corresponds in the Sept. means prop, equal, 
as said of weights and measures, or even 
as said of a balance; or rather straight, 
rectus, as opp. to what is crooked. Whence, 
in the moral sense, right, as opposed to 
wrong. But the term is almost always 
used in a moral sense, 1. of one who 
deals out even-handed justice, acting alike 
to all, or impartial, as said of a judge, 2 Tim. 
iv. 8, o 0. KpLTm. Rev. xvi. 5. just, of a 
judgment or decision, John v. 30, Kpia-L^ 
S. vii. 24. Lu. xii. 57. 2 Th. i. 5, 6. Rev. 
xvi. 7. xix. 2. Sept. and Class. — II. of 
character or conduct, upright, virtuous, lit. 
'just as it should be;' also gener. ^oocZ ; 
but 6 ^LKaLo<5 is strictly ' one who does 
what is right ;' while 6 ayaOos is ' one 
who does good.'' In this sense the term is 
used both of things, as 1 John iii. 12, 'ipya 

Rom. vii. 12, ivToXr] o. and Matt. xx. 
4, 7. Col. iv. 1. Eph. vi. 1, Phil. i. 7. 
2 Pet. i. 13, TO dLKULov, ' what is right and 
just to be done or rendered ;' and of per- 
sons, e. gi'. Matt. V. 45. Lu. v. 32, et al. 
Sept, and Class. But it is espec. used of 
those whose ' hearts are right with God,' 



righteous, pious, godly. Matt. xiii. 43, 49 
xxiii. 29. XXV. 46. Mk. vi. 20, et al. Rom. 
i. 17, diKaLo^ Ik ttlo-tbu}^, equiv. to ot- 
KULcvdeU Ota TT. Sept. oft. Finally, it is 
used j:>ar excellence of God, John xvii. 25. 
Rom. iii. 26. 1 John ii. 29, or Christ, 
Acts iii. 14. vii. 52. xxii. 14. 1 John ii. 1. 
iii, 7, and Sept. 

AiKaiocrvvt], 7}5, 17, (^I'/cato?,) prop. 

' the doing or being what is right and just,' 
viz. I. ' the doing alike to all,' preserving 
even-handed justice, as said of a ju^ge. 
Acts xvii. 31. Rev. xix. 11. Heb. xi. 33, 
zipyaaavTo dLKaLo<r{jvi]v. Rom. ix. 28, and 
Sept. — II. of character, or conduct, as re- 
gards persons, i. e. 'the being just as we 
should be,' rectitude, righteousness, virtue. 
So of actions, equiv. to to OLKaiov, Matt, 
iii. 15, TrXiipuya-ai irdcrav 0. : also of dis- 
position, &c. 1) in a popular sense, Eph, 
V. 9. 1 Tim. vi. 11. 2 Tim. ii. 22. Heb. 
i. 9, and Sept. ; also including the idea of 
kindness, or benignity, 2 Cor. ix. 9. 2 Pet. 
i. 1, and in later edd. Matt. vi. 1. Sept. 
2) said of that righteousness which has re- 
gard to God and the Divine law; and that 
whether merely external, and consisting in 
the observance of outward precepts, Phil, 
iii. 6, 9, oi/c. 7] iv vojucp, or i/c vo/jlov, or 
internal and spiritual, when the heart is 
right with God, righteousness, piety, godli- 
ness. Matt. V. 6, 10, 20. vi. 33. xxi. 32. 
Lu. i. 75. Acts X. 35. xxiv. 25. Rom. vi, 
16, 18, and oft. Sept. and Joseph. Hence, 
77 OLK. h £/c or Ota tt/cttews, scil. iv 
XpicTTco, 'where faith is counted or im- 
puted as righteousness,' Rom. ix. 30. x. 6. 
Phil. iii. 9. 77 /caTa 'k'kttlv, Heb. xi. 7, al. ; 
and by meton. Christ, as the source or 
author of righteousness, 1 Cor, i. 30. 
Hence, too, o. toD Ofou objectively, i. e. 
' the righteousness which God approves or 
bestows,' Rom. i. 17. iii. 21, 25, 26 ; and 
by meton. ot/c. Qeov is equiv. to oLKaioL 
irapa Qiw, 2 Cor. v. 21. Finally, as said 
in the highest sense of God subjectively, 
i. e. as an attribute of his character, Rom, 
iii. 5 ; and perhaps of Christ, John xvi. 8, 
10. — III. by meton. in the sense of the 
being regarded as just, i.e. the imputation 
of righteousness, justification, equiv. to 
ot/cai'oxrts, Rom. v. 17, 21. x. 4, 5. 2 Cor. 

iii. 9, Gal. ii. 21. iii. 21. v. 5. Put for 
the mode of justification, Rom. x. 3. 

At/catoo), f. wcw, {oLKaio^,) to justify, 
i. e. to regard, or declare as just, trans. 
I. as a matter of right, justice, &c. to ab- 
solve or acquit of any charge, as opp. to 
being condemned. Matt. xii. 37. 1 Core 

iv. 4 ; foil, by aTro with gen, of thing, 
Acts xiii. 39. Rom. vi. 7, aTro afxapTia^, 
and Sept. So OLKaiovv euvtov, to justify, 
i. e, excuse, oneself, Lu. x. 29. So Gen. 
xliv. 16. Ecclus. X. 29. — II. as said of 



A IK 



92 



AIO 



character, &c. to declare to he just as it 
should be, i. e. to pronounce rights &c. and 
used both of things, to regard as right and 
proper, eq. to a^ioco, Herodot. i. 89. Jos. 
Ant. ix. 9, 1, and of persons, as alone in 
N. T. to recognise or declare aiiy one as 
righteous, virtuous, &c. Hence, 1) by 
impl. to vindicate, approve, honour; and 
in pass, to receive honour, Lu. vii. 29, <5. 
Tov Qeov. So Matt. xi. 19. Lu. vii. 35, 
kdiKaiw^T] 77 aocpia airo tcov tIkvlov 
avTTj^. On 1 Tim. iii. 16, see my note. 
2) in relation to God and the Divine law, 
to declare righteous, regard as pious, Lu. 
xvi. 15, OL diKaLovuTt^ iavTOv^ evootvlov 
Tcov a.vQpoo'iriDv. Said espec. of the justi- 
fication bestowed on men through Christ, 
in which he is said to regard and treat 
them as righteous, absolving them from 
the guilt of sin, and admitting them to 
the Divine favour, Rom. iii. 26, diKaLovv- 
Ta TOV EK TTLaTECo^ 'ItjaoD. iv. 5. viii. 
30, 33. Gal. iii. 8. So pass, of men, to be 
justified, e. gr. iricrTEL or ek 'tt'lctteu}^, Rom. 
iii. 28. V. 1. Gal. ii. 16. iii. 24. epywu 
or ovK Epywv, Rom. iii. 20. iv, 2. 
Gal. ii. 16. ovk kv vojuio. Gal. iii. 11, et 
al. — III. in the sense to make or cause any 
one to be upright, &c. And in mid. to 
make oneself upright, i. e. to he upright, 
virtuous, &c. aor. 1. pass, in mid. sense, 
Rev. xxii. 11, 6 diKaLOS diKaLOid-nTCo &tl» 

AiKai CO [xa, ttTos, TO, (dLKaLoco,) prop. 
' any thing justly or rightly done hence, 
right, justice, equity, 1 ) as said of a ' doing 
any one right' or justice in a judicial sen- 
tence, whether favourable, justification, 
acquittal, Rom. v. 16, or unfavourable, 
condemnation, judgme^it. Rev. xv. 4. 
Hence, 2) a decree, as laying down what 
is right and just, an ordiyiance, law, pre- 
cept, Lu. i. 6. Rom. i. 32. ii. 26. viii. 4. 
Heb, ix. 1, 10. Sept. Jos. and Class. 3) 
as said of character, &c. righteousness, 
piety towards God, and the virtue agree- 
able thereto ; used of the saints. Rev. xix. 
8; of Christ, as manifested in his obedi- 
ence to God the Father, Rom. v. 18. 

At /cat 0)9, adv. {^LKaLo^,) justly, rigidly, 
1) as regards strict justice, Lu. xxiii. 41. 
1 Pet. ii. 23. Sept, and Class. 2) as to 
what is ' right and proper,' 1 Cor. xv. 34. 
Sept. and Class. 3) as to what respects 
duty to God, righteously, piously, 1 Thess. 
ii. 10. Tit. ii. 12. 

ALKaitocr L^, £to9, v, {SLKaLooo,) prop. 
' the act of doing justice on any one,' 
espec. in trial, and that whether by ac- 
quittal, or as gener. by condemnation and 
punishment. In N. T. only used in the 
former sense, as said of the justification, 
i. e. acquittal or pardon, which God grants 
to man, through Christ. Rom. iv. 25. v. 



18. So Jos. Ant. xviii. 1, 3, SiKaLuxrai^ 
Eli/aL, 0I9 dpEH-rj^ sTTLnrvdEvarL^ yiyovE. 

AiKacTTi]^, ou, 6, {olkoX^oj,) a judge^ 
Lu. xii. 14. Acts vii, 27, 35. Sept. and 
Class. 

Alki], ri£, 77, prop, rigid or justice^ 
espec. in a judicial process ; or gener. 
what is laid doiun {Slkco, jacio) as right for 
men to do ; so daa/jLO^ and dk/uLL^, from 
'TLdi]niL, to lay down, vofxo^, from ve/ulco, 
laiv, from lecyan, to lay down, as a rule of 
conduct. Hence, the sentence passed, whe- 
ther for acquittal or for condemnation, as 
often in Class. So in N. T. it denotes 
gener. punitive justice, I. in the sense jtidg- 
ment, such implying punishment. Acts 
XXV. 15, Kanr' avrov o'lki^v, and gener. 
pimishmerd, vengeance, 2 Th. i. 9. Jude 7. 
Sept. and Class. — II. as the name of the 
heathen goddess of justice, Nemesis, Venge- 
ance, Acts xxviii. 4, and Class. 

Alktvov, ov, to, {diKco, to cast,) a 
casting-net, in opp. to a large drag-net^ 
whether for hunting or fishing, espec. the 
latter, as Matt. iv. 20, sq. Mk. i. 18, sq. 
Lu. V. 2 — 6. John xxi. 6, 8, 11, and 
Class. 

AiXoyos, ov, 6, 77, adj. (dh, bis, 
and Xkyco,) prop, 'uttering the same 
speech twice.' Class. In N. T. • double- 
tongued, deceitful, i. e. saying one thing 
and meaning another, 1 Tim. iii. 8. 

A to, conj. equiv. to m' o, on which ac- 
count, ivherefore, therefore, Matt, xxvii, 8. 
Lu. i. 35, et ssepe al. 

Alo^ev 03, f. EvcTuy, {dua and o^evoo,) to 
travel through any country, traverse it ; foil, 
by acc. of place. Acts xvii. 1, or Kara with 
acc. Lu. viii. 1. Sept. and Class. 

AioTTEp, (^co, strengthened by Trep,) 
on which very account, 1 Cor. viii. 13. x. 
14. xiv. 13, and Class, 

AioirETi)<3,EO'5,b, 77, adj. (Ai05, gen. of 
Zgi/9, and TTETco, equiv. to TriTTTCo,) fallen, 
from Jove, i. e. 'the heaven-descended,' 
Acts xix. 35, TOV Slottetov^, sub. dyd\- 
lxaTo<3, which word is expressed in Hero- 
dian i. 11, 2. See my note in loc. 

Aiop06o(rts, £tfis, 77, {^Lopdoco, to tho- 
roughly rectify,) a reformation, thorough 
improvement, Heb. ix. 10, Kaipd^ diopdo)- 
(TEws, meaning ' the time of a better dis- 
pensation under the JVlessiah.' Jos. and 
Class. 

ALopva-aru), f. ^u), to dig through any 
thing, espec. the walls of houses. Matt. vi. 

19, sq. xxiv. 43. Lu. xii. 39. Sept. and 
Class. 

AtoTt, conj. for Sl oti, equiv. to Sid 
TovTo, oTL, on account of this that, for 
this reason that, i. e. simply because, or 



Ai n 



93 



AOK 



' 0?% Lu. ii. 7. xxi. 28. Acts xvii. 31. Rom. 
i. 19. Gal. ii. 16. Sept. and Class. 

AiTrXoos 0U9, 6i} 77, 60U oui/, adj. {Sh 
and ttXeu}, an obsol. form, M'bence irXi- 
Ko},) prop, double ; but in N. T. and also 
in Sept. and Class, meaning not simply 
double, but greedy or increased^ both as 
regards what is good., as reward, 1 Tim. v. 
17, ^lttXti^ TLjlri^ a^. or evil^ as punish- 
ment, Rev. xviii. 6, dnrXoDO-aTE avTrj 
diTrXd. Sept. and Class. Comparative, Sl- 
TrXoTEpoi/, as adv. two/old-more, Matt, 
xxiii. 15. 

AittXoo), f. wo-w, (^t-TrXoos,) to double, 
Rev. xviii. 6, diTrXooo-aTE avTtj dLirXd, 
lit. ' double to her doubly,' render to her a 
twofold punishment. 

Ais, numer. adv. bis, twice, Mk. xiv. 
30, 72. Lu. xviii. 12. Jude 12, oh airo- 
dauovra, utterly dead. So the phrase 
dira^ Kol 619, O/iCf^, and again, aliquoties, 
someichat requently. So the Class. 

Kal Tpt9. 

AiCTTdX^ui, f. daru), (^1?, CTTaw,) 1) 
prop. ' to stand where two ways meet,' 
and by impl. to be in doubt which to 
choose. 2) metaph. * to be in doubt as to any 
course of action,' Matt. xiv. 31, sh tl 
iSia-Tua-a^ ; xxviii. 17, ol Sk EdiaTacrav. 
Plut., Biod. Sic, and Synes. 

A / O-.T O /X O S, 01;, 6, 17, (^iS, CTTO/za,) 

prop, double-mouthed, gener. and as the 
edge of a sword or axe is fig. called its 
mouth, so CLcrTOfxcs is used for tivo-edged, 
both in N. T. Heb. iv. 12. Rev. i. 16. ii. 
12. Sept. and Class. 

At<rytXtot, at, a, ordin. adi. 2000. 
Mk.v.l3. 

AiuXt^o), f. iVo), [did, uX/^w,) prop. 
to pass any liquid through a strainer, ( so 
Diosc. iii. 9, vXi'C^sTaL di odovLOv,) in 
order to separate from it the vXi^, or mate- 
rial particles, in order that they be strained 
off and out, and so to strain out or off. 
Matt, xxiii. 24, n-ov Kwvcoira. Sept. 
Plut. Artemid. 

Ai^a^w, f. acro), (^tya,) prop, to cut in 
two, divide into two -parts. Sept. and Class. 
But in N. T. metaph. to set one at vari- 
ance with another, oiyJt\ELv tlvu Kwrd • 
TLvo?, Matt. X. 35, equiv. to ot'xa ttoleIv 
in Class. 

ALXoa-Tctaia, asr, v, ((5ix«» CTacrts,) 
prop, a division into two parts, or a stand- 
ing at two, and metaph. dissension, or dis- 
cord, Rom. xvi. 17. 1 Cor. iii. 3. Gal. v. 
20, and Class. 

ALXOTOfMEU), f. 770-0), (OiX", T0IUL7),) 

prop, to cut in two, Jos. Ant. ^dii. 2, 2. 
Polvb. vi . 28, 2, or to cut in pieces, Polyb. - 
x. 15, 5, denoting a horrible mode of put- 
ting to death in use among the Hebrews 



and other ancient nations. In N. T. the 
word is used gener. and fig. in the sense, 
to inflict severe punislunerd, to as it were 
cut asunder by scourging, Matt. xxiv. 51, 
^ Lu. xii. 46. So Hist. Susan, ver. 55, 
, arxLOTEL (TE fXECTov. Aroau Epict. iii. 22, 
, fiXto-a? ETEfxEv [avTou), also scindere and 
discindere in Latin. 

Aixl/duj, f. ricrco, to thirst, to be athirst^ 
1) prop, and in trans. Matt. xxv. 35, 37, 42, 
44. Job. iv. 13, 15. xix. 28. Rom. xii. 20. 
1 Cor. iv. 11. Rev. vii. 16. Sept. and 
Class. 2) metaph. and trans, to thirst after^ 
long for. Matt. v. 6, 0. t^V hiKawcrvv^v^ 
meaning piety towards God, and its attend- 
ant spiritual privileges, Wisd. xi. 14. Jos. 
B. i. 32, 2. Hence absol. to thirst, i. e. after 
the dispositions and privileges of the chil- 
dren of God, John iv. 14. vi. 35. vii. 37. 
Rev. vii. 16. xxi. 6. xxii. 17. Ps. xlii. 2, 
and Class. 

Ail// OS, Eo<5, TO, thirst, 2 Cor. xi. 27. 
Sept. and Class. 

Al\I/vxo?, ov, 6, 77, adj. (^is, xp^vxv-,) 
double-minded, zvavering, Ja. i. 8. iv. 8. 
Clem. Alex, but not in Class. 

Aicoy jULO^, ov, 6, {Slcokco,) prop, an 
eager pursuit of any one; and as that 
often implies hostility, so the word came 
to mean persecictio?i, as Matt. xiii. 21. 
Mk. iv. 17, et ssepe al. Sept. and rarely in 
later Class. 

Alwktyi?, ov,6, [SlcSkco,) a persecutor, 
1 Tim. i. 13. 

AicoKiti, f. fw, prop, to cause to flee; 
hence gener. to pursue after fleeing ene- 
mies. Sept. and Class. Hence in N. T. 
1) to pursue with malignity, to persecute ; 
foil, by acc. expr. or impL Matt. x. 23. 
xxiii. 34. Acts xxvi. 11. Rev. xii. 13, and 
Class. So gener. to persecute, Imrass, 
Matt. V. 10, sq. Lu. xxi. 12. John v. 16. 
Acts vii. 52. Rom. xii. 14. Gal. i. 13, 23. 
vi. 12, and Sept. 2) to pursue, follow, in 
order to overtake persons, Lu. xvii. 23, 
and Class, also metaph. of things, to follow 
after, pursue earnestly, in order to attain, 
Rom. ix. 30, sq. 1 Cor. xiv. 1. 1 Tim. vi. 
11. Heb. xii. 14, absol. to follow, press 
forward after, Phil. iii. 12, 14. Sept. and 
Class. 

Ao'y/xa, aros, to, {doKEO),) a decree, 
ordinance, e. gr. of a prince, Lu. ii. 1. 
Acts xvii. 7 ; of the Mosaic law, Eph. ii. 
15. Col. ii. 14; of the apostles, Acts xvi. 
4. Sept. and Class. 

Aoy fxaT lX^(jo, f. icrco, to make a deci^ee, 
equiv. to Class. Soyjua TiQivaL. In N. T. ' 
mid. ooy/xttTi'^o^ai, to suffer a law to be 
prescribed to oneself, to be subject to its. 
ordinances, Col. ii. 20. 

A 0 /c £ 60, f. Jw, to seem, or appear, neut. 



AOK 



94 



A O A 



and intrans. I. as used with a reflex, pron. 
expr. or impl. denoting self, Sokco kfxav- 
Tw, ' I seem to myself, am of opinion, 
suppose,' foil, by infin. pres. Acts xxvi. 9. 
Hence gener. as an act. intrans. verb, in 
the above sense, the reflex, dat. being sup- 
pressed, i. e. to he of opinion that, 1) foil, 
by infin. with the same subject, e. gr. with 
infin. pres. expressing continued action, 
Matt. iii. 9, ^i) ^o^tjTs Xiyziv kv kavroi^. 
Lu. viii. 18. xxiv. 37. John v. 39. xvi. 2, 

^O^V XcLTpELaV TTpOCrCpkpSLV TW GfO). 

Acts xii. 9, and Class, With infin. perf. 
implying action completed. Acts xxvii. 13, 
do^avTE's T^s Trpodiarsw^ KS-KpaT^Kivai. 
1 Cor. viii. 2. Phil. iii. 4, and Class. 2) 
foil, by infin. with 2i different subject in the 
acc. Mk. vi. 49, edo^au cpduTaa/Jia slvai. 

1 Cor. xii. 23. 2 Cor. xi. 16. Sept. and lat. 
Class. 3) foil, by otl and infin. Matt. vi. 
7, SoKovcTL yap ort, &c. xxvi. 53. Lu. 
xii. 51, et al. saepe. 4) absol. Lu. xvii. 9, 
ov SoKu), Matt. xxiv. 44. Lu. xii. 40, rj 
wpa ov ookeTte. Heb. x. 29. — IL used in 
reference to others, to seem^ or appear^ 
foil, by dat. and infin. Lu. x, 36, t/s ovu 
TrXriaLov doKel croi ytyovivai ; without 
dat. but with infin. of the same subject, 
which then takes the adjuncts in the 
nomin. Acts xvii. 18, ^kucov SaLjULOvicov 
SoKil /carayyeXsus eluul. 1 Cor. xii. 22. 

2 Cor. X. 9. Heb. xii. 11, and Class. 
Said also, with modest delicacy, of what is 
real and certain, Mk. x. 42, ol doKovvTe^ 
apx^iv. Lu. xxii. 44. 1 Cor. xi. 16. Gal. 
ii. 9. Heb. iv. 1. Jos. and Class. Yet see 
my note on Mk. x. 42. At Gal. ii. 2, 6, 
OL ooKovvTE^ gli/tti, and ol doK. the sense 
is, ' those who were esteemed something, 
persons of consequence.' See my note 
there, 1 Cor. iii. 18. & xiv. 37.— HI. im- 
PERS. ookeT fxoL^ 1) as equiv. to person, to 
tliinh or sztpjjose, either interrog. tl ookel 
aroL^ or 77/xTi', or vfxlv; Matt. xvii. 25. 
xviii. 12. xxi. 28, al. or without interrog. 
Acts XXV. 27, aXoyov yap fxai ^okeI^ and 
Class. 2) it seems good to me^ equiv. to 
pers. / determine^ resolve^ Lu. i. 3. Acts 
XV. 22 — 34. Jos. and Class. So partic. 
neut. TO ooKovv fxoi^ denoting one''s ivill 
or pleasure, Heb. xii. 10, /caTo to doKEiv 
auTots, and Class. 

AoKtjuaJw, f. ao-co, (^o'/ct/xos,) I. PROP. 
& GEN. to try^ prove^ put to proof the ge- 
nuineness of any article, espec. metals, &c. 
by fire, ringing, or the touchstone, 1 Pet. i. 

7. 1 Cor. iii. 13. Sept. and Class. So of 
other things, tried by icsing^ Lu. xiv. 19, 
or gener. and fig. in any ivay^ Rom. xii. 2. 
1 Cor. xi. 28. Gal. vi. 4. Eph. v. 10. 1 Th. 
ii. 4, Ta§ KapoLa<s vp-UiV. v. 21. Sept. 
Jos. and Class. Also of persons^ 'to try or 
put to the proof,' as to the genuineness or 
reality of any alleged quality, 2 Cor. viii. 

8, yvvcTLou S. and ver. 22, xiii. 5, kavrov^ 



S. 1 Tim. iii. 10. 1 John iv. 1. Said of 
God, to put to the proof his moral attri- 
butes, equiv. to irEipA^Eiv^ Heb. iii, 9. 
From this sense oi proving arises by impl. 
that of examining^ judging of estimating^ 
disti7iguisJiing^ Lu. xii. 56, to TrpocrcDirov 
Trj<s yrj^ kol tov ovpavov oloaTs 6. Rom. 
ii. 18. Phil. i. 10. — II. spec, in the sense 
to regard as proved or tried^ and conseq. 
to approve^ judge proper ; said of persons^ 
1 Cor. xvi. 3, 0U5 kdv ooKLfxda-riTE. 
1 Thess. ii. 4, S&SoKLfjLaa-iuLEda. Jos. Ant. iii. 
4, 1. Diod. Sic. iv. 7 ; of things, Rom. i. 
28, ovK kdoKLfxaaav tov Qeov ex^lv kv 
kirLyvwcTEL. Jos. Ant. i. 7, 1. ii. 7, 4. Sept. 

AoKLpLfi, ^s, 77, prop, proof trial, gener. 
In N. T. I) the state of being tried, a 
trying, as of faith by affliction, 2 Cor. viii. 
2, kv TToW-jj coKLfx^ ^Xixj/Eco^, ' trial by 
affliction.' 2) the having been tried and ap- 
proved^ tried probity, approved integrity, 
Rom. V. 4, T] dk SoKi/mt} kXTrida, scil. kut- 
EpydX^ETaL. 2 Cor. ii. 9. ix. 13, nrij^ Sok. 
Ttjs diaKovia^, ' tried probity, as exhibited 
in this ministry.' Phil. ii. 22, tt^v doKL/uLtjv 
avTov yivooaKETE, 'ye know his excellent 
or approved disposition.' 

AoKL [JLLOV, ov, TO, {BoKL/ULO^,) prop. 

proof, test, that by which any thing is 
tried, Hdian ii. 10, 12. In N. T. equiv. 
to SoKL/iir], proof trial, gener. either act. 
a trying, Ja. i. 3, S. v/jlwv tt}^ 7rt(rT«w§, 
or pass, tried probity or approved faith, 
1 Pet. i. 7. 

AoKLfjLO^, ov, 6, 77, adj. {cEXOfJiaL,) 
prop, said of money that, having passed 
the assay, is current and receivable, or is 
approved by the king or state, and received 
as current by the people. Hence metaph. 
tried, approved as genuine, Rom. xvi. 10. 

1 Cor. xi. 19. 2 Cor. x. 18. xiii. 7. 2 Tim. 
ii. 15. Ja. i. 12, and Class. ; also by impl. 
acceptable, well rep)oHed of, Rom. xiv. 18, 
^. ToTs dvdpwTTOL?, and Class. 

A OK 6 5, ov, 77, (Skxo/JLaL,) prop, a beam 
or rafter, Sept. and Class. ; but in N. T. 
Matt. vii. 3. Lu. vi. 41, sq. as opp. to 
Kapcpo^, it rather denotes a solid piece of 
wood. Sept. and Class. 

Ao'Xto5, la, ov, adj. (^o'Xos,) deceitful, 

2 Cor. xi. 13. Sept. and Class. 
AoXloo), f. 0)0-60,^ (^o\os,) to use de- 
ceit, intrans. Rom. iii. 13, Tats yXoxrcrats 
auToov kSoXiovaav. 

Ao'Xo9, ov, 6, {SeXw, to take with a 
bait, whence dkXEap, a bait,) prop, a bait, 
Hom. Od. xii. 252. Hence metaph. de- 
ceit, guile. Matt. xxvi. 4. Mk. vii. 22, & 
oft. Sept. and Class. 

AoXoco, f. ward), (SoXo's,) in early 
Class, to deceive, but in later, to falsify, 
i. e. to adulterate, corrupt, by foreign ad- 
mixture, espec. wine or money. So 2 Cor. 
iv, 2, d. TOV Xoyov tov Qeov, equiv. to 



A O M 



95 



AOS 



Ka7r>jX.£uoi/T£9 Tov \6yov Tov Geou at ii. 
17; i. e. 'adulterating the Gospel by the 
impure admixture of Jewish tradition,' 

Aofxa^ aros, to, {Btdo/JLai perf. pass, 
of SiduiiuiL,) a gift. Matt. vii. 11. Phil. iv. 
17. Eph. iv. 8. 'Sept. and Plut. 

Ao^a, 775, (^o/cto), to seem,) prop, a 
seemiiKf or aj^pearauce, Jos. Ant. i. 11, 2, 
oi 6k do^av avTco Trapicr^ov EadiovTcov : 
also a notiou or idea^ Luc. ii. 287, cos fx^ 
So^au dyvoia? v d/uLaOia^ irapa.o'^ujfxaL. 
Thus it came to denote opinion, either 
that which one has of any thing, Herodot. 
i. 79. Xen. Mem. iv. 8, 10, or that which 
others have of us, espec. a favourable one. 
Hence the sense honour, glory, which is 
often found in the Class, and the N. T. 
with some modifications however, I. as said 
of honour paid or done to any laudable 
action, Lu. xiv. 10, tote ECTat ctol to^a 
kvuiTTLov, &;c. John viii. 54. 2 Cor. vi. 8. 
John V. 41, 44, \ajUL(3dv&Lu So^av 'Tvapd 
dvdpwircov. John xii. 43. 1 Th. ii. 6, al. 
So in the phrase eIs tiji/ So^av tov Qeov, 
' to the honour and glory of God,' i. e. 'that 
God may be glorified,' Rom. iii. 7. xv. 7. 
Phil. i. 11. And so Trpos So^av tov 
Qeov, 2 Cor. i. 20, and inrkp tt}? oo^rjs 
TOV Qsov, John xi. 4. So Xa^iiv ti)v 
S6^av^ 'to be extolled in praises,' &c. Rev. 
iv. 11. So in ascriptions, Lu. ii. 14, <5o^ai/ 
Eu v\l/L(TT0L<s Qscp. Rom. xi. 36. Gal. i. 5. 

1 Pet. iv. 11, al. ; also said, like Lat. de- 
cus, by meton. of the ground, or source 
of honour and glory, 1 Cor. xi. 15. 2 Cor. 
viii. 23. Eph. iii. 13. 1 Th. ii. 20.— II. as 
used of that which excites admiration, and 
to which honour is ascribed, and that in 
various views, 1) said of external con- 
dition, i. e. dignity, glory, 1 Pet. i. 24, 
Trda-a d. t^s aapKo^ ojs dvdo's. Heb. ii, 

7. So by meton. of that which reflects 
or exhibits this dignity, 1 Cor. xi. 7, yvvii 
Sk do^a dvSpo? eaTLV. Apocr, & Jos. Said 
of ki7igs and regal majesty or splendour, 
Matt. xix. 28. xxiv. 30. Mk. x. 37. xiii. 
26. Lu. ix. 26, et al. ; also of the accom- 
paniments of royalty, as splendid apparel, 
Matt. vi. 29. Lu. xii. 27 ; or wealth, Matt, 
iv. 8. Lu. iv, 6, al. Said in plur. by me- 
ton. for persons in high honour, oo^ai, 
dignities, i. e. princes and magistrates, 

2 Pet. ii. 10. Jude 8. 2) of external 
APPEARANCE, i. e. lustre or brightness, 
prop, and gener. Acts xxii. 11, ou/c ivt^Xs- 
irov diro Trj^ d6^t]9 tov 0wto5. 1 Pet. v. 
4 ; of the sun, stars, &c. 1 Cor. xv. 40 ; 
of Moses' face, 2 Cor. iii. 7 ; or of the 
celestial light which surrounds angels, Rev. 
xviii. 1, or glorified saints, Lu. ix. 31, et 
al. Said espec. of the celestial splendour 
and effulgence in which God sits en- 
throned, 2 Th. i. 9. 2 Pet. i. 17. Rev. xv. 

8. xxi. 11, but sometimes visible to mor- 



tals, Lu. ii. 9. John xii. 41 ; and also as 
manifested in Christ's second coming, 
Matt. xvi. 27. Mk. viii. 38. So often 
Sept. 3) of internal character, im- 
plying glorious moral attributes, and to 
be rendered by eocceUence or p)erfection, as 
said both of God, John xi, 40. Acts vii. 
2. Rom. i. 23. vi. 4. Eph. i. 17. Col. i. 
11. Heb. i. 3. 2 Pet. i. 3, al. and of 
Christ, as the aTravyaa-fxa of the divine 
perfections, John i. 14. ii. 11 ; also of tlte 
Holy Spirit, 1 Pet. iv. 14. Just. Mart, de 
Resur. p. 284 ; also said of things, in the 
genit. or dat., thus supplying the place of 
the cognate adject, glorious, excellent, &c. 
2 Cor. iii. 7 — 9. Eph. i. 6, eh 'i'waivov 
^o^i}§ T?7S ydpiTo^ avTOv. 4) used of that 
exalted state of blissful perfection, reserved 
for those who dwell with God in heaven, 
whether as said of Christ, and including 
the idea of his regal majesty, as king Mes- 
siah, Lu. xxiv. 26. John xvii. 5, 22, 24. 
2 Th. ii. 14. 1 Tim. iii. 16 ; or of glorified 
saints, and denoting salvation, eternal life, 
&c. Rom. ii. 7, 10. viii. 18. 1 Cor. ii. 7. 2 Cor. 
iv. 17. 1 Th. ii. 12. 2 Tim. ii. 10. Jleb. 
ii. 10. 1 Pet. V. 1. 7] 66^a tov Qeov, tlie 
glory ivhich God icill bestoiu, Rom. v. 2. 
Also by meton. the author of this glory 
or salvation to any one, Lu. ii. 32. 1 Cor. 

ii. 8, Tou K.vpLov Trj<s oo^?]§. 
Ao^a^o), f. dcr(jo, ((5o^a,) in the Class. 

to form an opi?iion, thi7ik, suppose; also 
to estimate ot judge. Hence, like our verb 
to esteem, to thinh favourably of, ascribe 
vraise to. In N. T. its general sense is 
to glorify, with, however, some modifica- 
tions, as foil. I. to ascribe glory to, to 
laud, celebrate. Matt. vi. 2, ottws ^o^ao-Oai- 
(Tiv VTTO tCov dvOpcoircov, Lu. iv. 15. John 
viii. 54. Rom. xi. 13. Acts xiii. 48. Heb, 
V. 5. Rev. xyiii. 7. Polyb. vi. 53, 10, 
do^acjfxivoL ett' apsTtj. Diod. Sic. vol. vii. 
196, dvhp Ev TraLOZLo. ^sdo^acrfxivo^, and 
74, dsSo^aa/uikvo^ kv dcrTpoXoyia* i. 242. 

iii. 153, and Sept. So oo^dX,sLv tou Qeov, 
' to celebrate God with praise and worship,' 
adore. Matt. v. 16. ix. 8, & oft.— II, to 
honour, i. e. bestow honour upon, exalt, 
render glorious, 1) gener. 1 Cor. xii. 26, 
e'lte ^o^aX^ETai ev /uleXo?. 2 Th. iii. 1. 
Sept. Diod. Sic. xii. 36. Pass, to be glorious 
or excellerit, 2 Cor. iii. 10, ovBk ^EOo^acrTai 
TO SEdo^aa-fXEVov. 1 Pet. i. 8, X^P^ 
So^aa-iuLEur]. 2) said of GoD and Christ, 
to glorify, i. e. 'render conspicuous and 
glorious' the Divine character and attri- 
butes, e. gT. of God as glorified by the 
Son, John xii. 28. xiii. 31, sq. xiv. 13. 
XV. 8. xvii. 1, 4, or by Christians, John 
xxi. 19; of Christ as glorified by the 
Father, John viii. 54. xiii. 32, or by Chris- 
tians, John xvii. 10, al. 3) to advance to 
that state of bliss and glory, which is the 
portion of those who dwell with God in 



Aon 



96 



AP A 



heaven, e. gr. of Christ as the Messiah, 
John vii. 39. xii. 16, 23, or Christians, 
Rom. viii. 30, tovtovs ido^ao's. 

Aocr't?, £609, T7, ((5i'(5a)|U,t,) prop, a giving^ 
but also hj meton. the thing given, gif\ 
Jas. i. 17. Ecclus. xi. 17 ; also, in the 
sense of giving out^ eocpeiiditure^ Phil. iv. 
15, £ts \6yov (5ocr£a)§ kol Xrjylr&u)^^ expen- 
diture and receipt^ or, as we say, debt and 
credit^ Ecclns. xli. 1 9, clttq a-KopaKLcr/uLod 
Xv\lrEU}9 Kai Socteu}?. xlii. 7. 

AoTt79, ou, o, {SioMfXL^) a givev^ 2 Cor. 
ix. 7. Sept. for the Class. doTnp. 

AouXaycoy £a),f. 77<r6o, (^ouA.09, ayw,) 
1) ^0 carry off as a slave ^ to make a slave 
of; 2) to treat as a slave ; 3) by impl. to 
bring into and hold in subjection^ 1 Cor. ix. 
27, 0. TO crcbfxd fxov. 

AovXsLa^ a?, 77, (^ouXeuw,) prop, a 
state of slavery^ Sept. and Class. ; but in 
N. T. only said fig. of spiritual bondage^ 
Rom. viii. 15, irvEv/ma dovXsia?^ ' a slavish 
spirit,' as opp. to the spirit of adoption ; of 
the condition of those who are under the 
Mosaic law. Gal. iv. 24. v. 1 ; also of the 
condition of those who are subject to 
death, Rom. viii. 21, or its fear, Heb. ii. 15. 

AovXev (jo^ f. £ucra), (^ouXos,) to be a 
slave or hired servant, foil, by a dat. of 
pers. expr. or impl. I. prop, said of i?i- 
voluntary service, 1) of individuals. Matt, 
vi. 24. Lu. xvi. 13. Eph. vi. 7. 1 Tim. 
vi, 2. Sept. and Class. 2) of 7iations, 
denoting political subjection, John viii. 
33. Acts vii. 7. Rom. ix. 12. Sept. and 
Class. ; metaph. of ' those subject to the 
Mosaic law,' Gal. iv. 25. — II. of voluntary 
service, and that fig. to obey, Lu. xv. 29. 
Phil. ii. 22. Gal. V. 13. Rom. xii. 11, and 
Sept. In a moral sense, said of obedience 
to God, Matt. vi. 24. Lu. xvi. 13. Acts 
XX. 19. Rom. vii. 6. 1 Th. i. 9; or Christ, 
Rom. vii. 25. Sept. ; or to false gods. Gal. 
iv. 8. Ex. xxiii. 33 ; also of things, to be 
devoted to, indulge in. Matt. vi. 24. Lu. 
x\i. 13, fxaiuLCova. Rom. vi. 6, dfxapTLa. 
Rom. vii. 25, vofXM dfiapTta^, and xvi. 
18, Ty kolXlcc. Gal. iv. 9, -rot? <jtol- 
Tit. iii. 3, £7r:0i;/xtai§. Jos. and 

Class. 

AovXi], 77, {dovXo?,) prop, a female 
slave, or maid-servant, Acts ii. 18. Sept. 
and Class. ; but used, in the Oriental 
style, by a female addressing any one 
greatly superior in rank, instead of the 
pers. pron. kyoa, Lu. i. 38, 48, and Sept. 

AoGXos, {dioXo^, fr. diw, to bind,) I. 
prop, as an adj. dovXo^, ov, held in 
bondage, bound to serve ; foil, by dat. Rom. 
vi. 19, TrapacTT. to. jxiXi] Vfioou oovXa Trj 
SiK. Wisd. XV. 7, and Class. — II. as a 
SUBST. (dvdpcoTTo^ understood,) a slave or 
servant, 1) prop, said of involuntary ser- 



vice, as that of a slave, opp. to a free person, 
1 Cor. vii. 21. Gal. iii. 28. Col. iii. 1 1. Rev. 
vi. 15 ; or even of a servant, opp. to a mas- 
ter. Matt. xiii. 27, sq. John'iv. 51. Acts ii. 
18. Eph. vi. 5. 1 Tim. vi. 1. 2) fig. said of 
voluntary service, a servant, implying obe- 
dience, fidelity, and devotedness, John xv. 
15. Rom. vi. 'ie. 1 Cor. vii. 23. Gal. iv. 
7. So used in modesty of ministers of the 
Word, ^ovXo^ vfjLvov, Matt. xx. 27. Said 
of the faithful followers and devoted ser- 
vants of God, either as ajubassadors and 
legates from God, as Moses, Rev. xv. 3, (so 
Joshua i. 1. Joseph. Ant. v. 1, 13;) or as 
the prophets. Rev. x. 7. xi. 18, and Sept. : 
or simply as ivorshippers of God, Rev. li. 
20. vii. 3. xix. 5, al. — Used in the Ori- 
ental style, on addressing a person greatly 
superior, Lu. ii. 29. Acts iv. 29, and Sept, 
Said of the faithful followers of Christ, 
^ovXoL Tov 'KpLanrov, Eph. vi. 6. 2 Tim. 
ii. 24; espec. of the apostles, &c. Rom. i. 
1. Gal. i. 10. Col. iv. 12. Ja. i. 1. 2 Pet. i. 1. 
Jude 1. Rev. xxii. 3. Also used with refer, 
to things, to denote one who is addicted to 
(as we say, enslaved to,) any action or prac- 
tice, foil, by gen. t?;? djuLapTia^, John 
viii. 34. Rom. vi. 16, and tt/s cpdopd^, 2 
Pet. ii. 19. So ^1. V. H. ii. 41, toD 
TTLVELV d. and Eurip. Autol. frag. 3, yvd- 
60V r]<TcrrijUitvo^. — III. in the sense of 
MINISTER, said of the officers of an Ori- 
ental court. Matt, xviii. 23 — 32. xxii. 
3 — 10, al. and Class. 

AouXoco, f. our u), to enslave, trans, pass, 
perf. dEdouXwfxaL, to be a slave, equiv. 
to SovXeuco. I. PROP, of the enforced ser- 
vice of a slave, to make a slave of any one, 
Acts vii. 6. 2 Pet. ii. 19. Sept. and Class. 
Metaph. dECovXcofxaL, to be held hound, or 
subject, 1 Cor. vii. 15 ; absol. to he in 
bondage. Gal. iv. 3, 0. vizb tu crToiy^Ela 
TOV Kocrfxav. — II. FIG. of voluntary ser- 
vice, to make devoted to any one, and pass. 
to become devoted, 1) act. said of persons, 
1 Cor. ix. 19, TrdcTLV EfxavTov k^ovXoocra, 
' I have devoted myself to the service of 
all.' Rom. vi. 22, too Oeco. 2) pass, of 
things, as d. Trj SLKaLoavvrj, Rom. vi. 18. 
OLL>a) TToXXto, Tit. ii. 3. So SovXevelv 
o'Lvoo, Liban. Ep. 319. 

Aoxhi ^5, J7, {^EypfxaL,) prop, recep- 
tion or entertainment of guests. - Hence, a 
banquet or feast, Lu. v. 29. xiv. 1 3. Sept. 
and later Class. 

ApdKwv, ovTo<s, 6, {EdpaKOu, 2 aor. of 
oipKO), with allusion to its piercing sight,) 
a dragon, or larger kind of serpent, Sept. 
and Class. In N. T. put symbol, for 6 
Saxai^as, Rev. xii. 3 — 17. xiii. 2, 4, 11. 
xvi. 13. XX. 2. Comp. Gen. iii. 1, sq. 

Apdcrcrco, f. ^u), prop, to gi^asp with the 
hand, take fast hold of Hence, to seize, 
catch, any person or thing. In N. T. fig. 



AP A 



97 



A YN 



1 Cor. iii. 19, <5. tous aot^ous, taken from 
Job V. 13, where Sept. has KUTaXanxfBduwv. 

Apaxi^ht V^-, (^/oao-cro/xat,) an 

Attic silver coin, = 6 oboli, 

Ape/iico, see Tpix^' 

Apiiravou^ ou, to, (<5p£7r6o, to pluck 
off,) a sickle, or crooked knife, for reaping 
corn, or gathering grapes, Mk. iv. 29. 
Sept. and later Class. 

Apo'/>i0 9, ou, 6, {dpE/jLto, to run,) prop, a 
run7iifig ; also, ^/ie race run; and sometimes 
^Ae race-cotirse. In N. T. fig. coe^rse of life 
or action. Acts xiii. 25, irK^povv tov d. 
xx.24,T€\€ta><rat ^. 2Tim.iv. 7,T£/\ftj/ dp. 

Avvafxai, f. ncrofiaL, depon. to he able, 
both in a physical and a moral sense, and 
as depending either on the disposition or 
faculties of mind, the degree of strength or 
skill, the nature and circumstances of the 
case, &c. Always foil, by an infin. expr. 
or impl., belonging to the same subject. 
I. foil, by an infin. erpressed, either of the 
pres, as denoting continued action. Matt, 
vi. 24, OX) dvvacr^E dovXtvEiv Ggw. vii. 18. 
Mk. ii. 7, et al. ; or more commonly of 
the aorist, implying transient or moment- 
ary action, either past or present, Mk. i. 
45. Lu. viii. 19, ovk ijdvvavTO crvvTV^Xiv 
avTw. Matt. iii. 9. Mk. vi. 5. Lu. v. 12, 
et al. ; or of the per/, to express completed 
action in reference to the present time. 
Acts xxvi. 32, dTTokiXuadaL rjSvuaTO 6 
avdpu)7ro9, &i, &c. — II. with an infin. m- 
plied, suggested by the context, Matt. xvi. 
3, ov duvaade sc. dtaKpivzLv. Mk. vi. 19. 
Lu. ix. 40, et al. Constr. with ace. tl 
depending on ttoleIv impl., or as acc. of 
manner, Mk. ix. 22, el tl dvvaaaL. 2 Cor. 
xiii. 8, and Class. 

Av va/uLL^, £609, T7, {ovvafxaL,^ prop, the 
being able, ability, poiver, corporeal & men- 
tal. I. said of INTRINSIC joower, whether 
physical or moral, and 1 ) of the body, Heb. 
xi. 11, dvva/uLLU £is KaTa^o\i]v (ywipfxaTO^ 
s\a(3s. 1 Cor, XV. 43, to (rcofxa sysipE- 
TciL Ev dvvdp.EL, foY dvvaTov. 2) gener. 
Matt. XXV. 15, i/cdo-Tw /caTcc ttiv iSiav S. 
Acts vi. 8. 1 Cor. xv. 56. 2 Tim. i. 7, ttvev- 
fULa ^yi/d/x£to§, vigour, courage, opp. to ttvev- 
fia SelXLu^. Heb. i. 3, to prifxa Trj? Svv. 
auTou, 'his powerful word.' vii. 16. xi. 34. 
Eev.i. 16. Sept. & Class. So in such phrases 
as Ka-rd dvuaiJLLv, ' according to one's 
power,' 2 Cor. viii. 3, and Class. vTrkp S. 
'beyond one's power,' 2 Cor. i. 8, & Class. 
EV Svvd/JLEL, ivith power, i. e. adv. mightily. 
Col. i. 11, 29. 2 Th. i. 11; and without 
iv. Acts iv. 33. Eph. iii. 16. 3) said of 
God, Christ, or the Holy Spirit, e. gr. r] 
dvv.aiJLL9 Tou Qeov, meaning his Almighty 
energy, &c. gener. Matt. xxii. 29. Mk. xii. 
24, et al. saepe ; joined with do^a, it im- 
plies the majesty of God, Rev. xv. 8 ; and 



hence, abstr. for concr. ij SvuafXL^, the 'om- 
nipotence,' the Omnipotent, the Almighty^ 
Matt. xxvi. 64. Mk. xiv. 62. Lu. xxii, 69, 
EK dE^L(jt)v T7]9 Svv. Tov Oeou. Mctou, Said 
of a person or thing wherein the power of 
God is manifested, \\z.the manifestation of 
the powerof God, Acts viii. 10, outo's eutlv 
rj dvvaixL^ tov Qeov. Rom. i. 16. 1 Cor. i. 
18, 24. Elsewhere the gen. OeoD expresses 
the source, i. e. power imparted by God, 1 
Cor. ii. 5. 2 Cor. vi. 7. xii. 9, v dvpa/uLL^ 
TOV XpLo-Tov : in the sense of omnipotent 
majesty, Matt, xxiv. 30. Lu. xxi, 27, fxETU 
SvvdiuLEU}9 KUL do^rj'i. Mk. ix. 1. xiii. 26. 
2Th. i. 7, />1£t' dyyiXoov SvvdfXEU)? aiiTOV, 
Also said of the Holy Spirit, t? dvvafXL^ 
TOV nvEv/uLaTo?, tho power imparted by 
the Spirit, Lu. iv. 14. Rom. xv. 13, 19; 
also of prophets and apostles, as inspired 
by the Holy Spirit, Lu. i. 17. xxiv. 49. 
Acts i. 8. 4) said of miraeulous power^ 
dvvajUL? cnTfXELcov Kai TEpaTtiw, the power 
of working miracles, imparted by the Holy 
Spirit, Rom. xv. 19. Acts x. 38. 1 Cor, ii. 
4, 2 Th. ii, 9, By meton. of effect for 
cause, plur. dvvdfXEL9 is put for iniracles. 
Matt. vii. 22. xi. 20, and oft. and Sept. 
Hence, as abstr. for concr. a woi^ker of 
miracles, 1 Cor, xii, 28, sq, duvafXEL^. 5) 
said of the essential power, trice nature, 
efficacy, or reality of any thing, Phil. iii. 
JO, yvuiVUL Ti]v ovvafXLv tT]^ avacTT, 
avTov. 2 Tim, iii. 5. So, as opp. to Xo'yos, 
speech merely, 1 Cor. iv. 1 9, sq, Metaph. 
said of language, the force, i« e, the mean- 
ing, of a word, 1 Cor. xiv, 11, Tr]v Suva- 
jULv Tt}^ (p(jovT]£. Dio Cass, Iv. 3, d. tov 
dvojULUTO^. So Latin ^o^es^as. — II. said of 
poiver as resulting from extrinsic sources, 
viz, 1) poiver, authority, Lu. iv, 36. ix. 
1. Acts iii, 12, 2 Pet. ii. 11. Rev. xiii, 2, 
xvii, 13, and Class. Said of omnipotent 
sovereignty, as due to God ; e. gr. in 
ascriptions. Matt, vi, 13. Rev. iv. 11. v. 
12. vii. 12. xi, 17. xii. 10. xix. 1. Meton. 
abstr. for concr. put for 6 kv ovvdfXEL ujv, 
Eph, i. 21. 1 Cor, xv. 24; plur. in Rom. 
viii, 38. 1 Pet, iii. 22, So Lat. potestates, 
and Eng. authorities. 2) in the sense of 
number, or quantity, Rev. iii. 8, fuKpdv 
e-Xj^lv dvvufXLv : also by impl. a great quan- 
tity, abundance. Rev, xviii, 3, ek Ttj^ hvvd- 
IxEMi TOV (TTpnvov^ avTf}?. S) o{ war-Uke 
power, like the Eng, force ov forces, host, 
or army, Lu. x. 19, kiri Trdarav tiiv Svva- 
jULLv avTov. Sept. and lat. Class. By Heb. 
ai SvvdiLLEL's Twv ovpavoov, 'the hosts of 
heaven,' i.e. the sun, moon, and stars. Matt, 
xxiv, 29. Mk. xiii. 25, Lu. xxi, 26. Sept. 

Avva/JLOO), f. waru), {SvvajJLL^,) to 
strengthen, pass. Col. i. 11, kv irdcrrf dvva- 
fxEL ovvafxovfXEvoL. Sept, and lat. Class. 

Avvd<rTi]9, ov, 6, {dvvafxaL,) one in 
great power or influence. 1) a potentate. 



AYN 



98 



prince^ Lu. i. 52. 1 Tim. vi. 15; of God, 
the supreme Potentate, 6 /ulouo's dvvda-Ti]?^ 
called in 2 Mace. iii. 24, 6 TraV^js e^ov- 
(TLa<5 S. 2) one invested with political 
power, espec. under a prince, a minister of 
couH^ Acts viii. 27, ^. ^avbaK7]<s. Gen. 1. 
4, ol Bwdcr-raL ^apaco^ and Class. 

Aui/aT£a), f. ?7crco, (^uyaTos,) prop, 
/^e intrans. Rom. xiv. 4, in some MSS. 
Hence to show oneself able, 2 Cor. xiii. 3, 
OS ovK daOsi'gT, dWd cvvaTil tv vjuuv. 

Aut/aTos, j;, oy, adj. (<5uVajUat,) prop. 
«5Ze to do any thing. Hence, strong^ poiver- 
ful I. GENER. and 1 ) of ^^^272^5, 2 Cor. X. 
4, oirXa — ovvard tco Geco 7rp6^^ Sec. So 
Xen. CEc. vii. 20, acofxa d. tt^o's tl. 2) of 
persons., 6 ouyaTos, the mighty ; and, said 
of God, Lu. i. 49, the Almighty, Ps. xxiv. 
8. Hence, ovvaTO's st/ui, equiv. to ovva- 
/uLUL^ foil, by infin. both pres. Tit. i. 9. 
Heb. xi. 19 ; and aor. Lu. xiv. 31. Rom. 
iv. 21, et al. Metaph. Swuto's^ strong, 
Rom. XV. 1, OL ouvaTOL, scil. eu 7rI(TT£t. 
So cvvaTO's £luaL, without infin. 2 Cor. 
xii. 10. xiii. 9. — II. spec, in phrases, as 
Swards 'iv tlvl, able, i. e. eminent in any 
thing, Lu. xxiv. 19, kv 'ipycp kul Xoycp. 
Acts vii. 22, S. kv Xoyots kul kv EpyoLi, 
Comp. Thuc. i. 139, Xiysiv t& kul irpda- 
(TELv d. Acts xviii. 24, d. kv Tais ypa- 
0aT§, ' eminent in Scrip, learning.' — III. 
OL ovvaTOL, the poiverful, the great, said of 
persons in authority, 1 Cor. i. 26. Rev. vi, 
15 ; of the Sanhedrim, Acts xxv. 5, and 
Class, espec. Thuc. — IV. neut. hxjvaTov, 
possible, (lit. able to be done,) in the 
phrase el Swutov, absol. or with ecttl, 'if 
possible,' Matt. xxiv. 24. xxvi. 39, et al. 
and Class. Foil, by da,t. of pers. 'possi- 
ble for, or with, any one,' Mk. ix. 23. 
xiv. 36. Acts XX. 16, et al. and Class. 
Hence to dvvaTov as subst. equiv. to dv- 
va/mL^, Rom. ix. 22, 

Avvu), aor, 2. eovv, {Svu), Sv/ull, to im- 
merse,) to go down, sink ; said of the sun, 
Mk. i. 32. Lu. iv. 40. Sept. and Class. 

Aoo, OL, al, nrd, two, indecl. in Attic 
writ, and N". T. except that the irregular 
and later ^vctl occ. in Matt. vi. 24. xxii. 
40. Lu, xii. 52, et al. Note — the phrases 
cvo rt rpeTs, some, a few. Matt, xviii. 20. 
1 Cor. xiv. 29. dvd hvo, /cara hvo, in two 
(parts), ^vo dvo, two and two. 

A us-, an inseparable partic, importing, 
like the English un-, in-, mis-, 1) contra- 
riety, or adversity of any kind ; 2) diffi- 
culty, pain, &c. 

Auo-jSao-Ta/cTos, ov, 6, i), adj. (Svs, 
difficult, and ftaarTaX^u),) ha7'd to be borne, 
(popTLa d. Matt, xxiii, 4. Lu. xi. 46. 
Sept. and Class. 

Avaevrepia, as, 77, (^us, bad, and 



EVTEpov, intestine,) dysentery, plur. Acts 
xxviii. 8, and Class. 

AvcTEpfxriVEVTo^, OV, 6, ^, adj. (ous 
and kpfx-iyjEvu),) prop, difficult of explana- 
tion, and by impl. hard to be UTiderstood, 
Heb. V. 11, and lat. Class. 

Ai/c/coXos, ov, 6, ??, adj. ((jUS, koXov, 
food,) prop, 'difficult about one's food.' 
Hence, gener. of persons, hard to please^ 
peevish ; and of things, hard to be pleased 
with, disagreeable, Xen. Mem. ii. 2, 2. 
In N. T. hard to be accomplished, diffimlt, 
Mk. X. 24. Joseph, and Class. 

Auc/coXajs, adv. {dva-KoXo^,)with diffi- 
culty, hardly, Matt. xix. 23. Mk. x. 23. 
Lu. xviii. 24, and Class. 

Avcrpir}, ?7s, 77, ( Svvu),) but more usually 
plur. dva-fxai, the goin^ down of the sun. 
In N. T. by impl. the West, Matt. viii. 
II, et al. Sept. and Class. 

Auo-yoT^TOs, ov, 6, rj^ adj. (ous, 2/017- 
Tos,) ha7'd to be understood, 2 Pet. iii. 16, 
ecttl SvcrvoiiTa tlvu. Diog. Laert. ix. 13, 
d. T£ KUL dvcrE^riyf]Tov. 

Av cr (pt) fxiw, f. ri(TU}, (^us, (pinfiV')) 
prop, to utter words of ill omen against 
any one, Eurip. Hec. 183 ; and by impl. 
maledicere. In N. T. to revile, defame, 

1 Cor. iv. 13, in some Edd. Sept. & Class. 
Av (T <pr] pLLa, as, rj, {dv(T<priiui.Ew,) prop. 

ill-omened language ; also, injuHou^ lan- 
guage, malediction ; further, by impl. re- 
proach, calumny, 2 Cor. vi. 8, and Class. 

Aa)SEKu, oi, al, -rd, indec. twelve. 
Matt. ix. 20, et al. ssepe. So oi doodEKa, 
the Twelve, i. e. apostles. Matt. xxvi. 14, 
20, et al. 

Aw^fcfcaros, rj, ov, adj. the twelfth. 
Rev. xxi. 20. 

AwSEKCKpvXov, ov, TO, {SwSsKa, 0u- 
Xi),) a subst. formed, by ellipse of fc0i/os, 
from the adj. ^a)5£/ca(^u\os, ' consisting of 
twelve tribes,' found in Orac. Sibyll. iii, 
p. 365, Gall, and also Acts xxvi. 7, de- 
noting, like TO 'EXX-nvLKov in Thuc. the 
whole Jewish nation, 

Auifxa, ttTos, TO, (^£/x6o,) prop, a build- 
ing, house, as often in Homer ; but gener. 
a chamber or room, Horn. II. i. 600. In 
N. T. only in phr. kirl tov dwjULaTO^, ' up- 
on the house,' i. e. the house-^ojt>, which 
in the East is flat, Matt. xxiv. 17. Mk, xiii. 
15. Lu. V. 19 ; or kiri to dcofxa, Lu. xvii, 
31. Acts X. 9. So Hdian vii. 12, II, £^s 
TO ScoiuLa. Matt. x. 27. Lu. xii. 3, ettI 
Ttov ^(jo/maTwv, i. e. by impl. publicly. 
Comp. 2 Sam. xvi. 22. 

AwpEa, ds, {diSay/jLL,) a gift, John 
iv. 10. Acts viii, 20. xi. 17. Rom. v, 15. 

2 Cor. ix. 15. Heb. vi. 4. Eph. iv. 7. 
Foil, by gen. of that in which the gift 
consists, Acts ii. 38. x. 45, 77 0. tov ay. 



99 



E A Y 



UvEVflUTO^. Rom. V. 17, T))? SLKaLO(TVV^]<S. 

Eph. iii. 7, Tt/s X"P^'^^^ '''^'^ GfoD. Sept. 
and Class. 

AwpeaV, adv. formed from accus. of 
Stopsd, by ellip. of KaTo.^ gratuitously. In 
N. T. it denotes, 1) freely^ gratis, witli- 
out requital, Matt. x. 8. Rom. iii. 24. 
2 Cor. xi. 7. 2 Th. iii. 8, et al. Sept. and 
Class. 2) groimdlessly, causelessly, John 
XV. 25, ijULL<Ti]a-dv fXE d. Gal. ii. ^1, ctpa 
Xp. 0. d7r£0ai/£. Sept. in Ps. xxxv. 7. 
See Jos. Ant. xvi. 4, 2. 

Aojpfc'w, or more usually Aoopio/maL, f. 
Tjcoyuat, depon. mid. (owpga,) ?>Z(2A:e a 
present of any thing, trans. Mk. xv. 45, 
k6(jopr}GaTo TO acofxa tw 'I. 2 Pet. i. 3, 
irdvTa 3&ou}pi]fXEifi]^, and 4, Tot [xiyiGTa 
kirayyiXfxaTa daocoprjTaL. 

Acopi^fia, axo?, to, (^wps'w,) lit. 
' something given to any one,' a gift, Rom. 
v. 16. Ja. i. 17. 

Atdpov, ov, TO, a gift. Matt. ii. 11. 
Eph. ii. 8. Rev. xi. 10. Sept. and Class. 
Said of gifts dedicated to God, an offer- 
ing, sacrifice. Matt. v. 23, sq. viii. 4. xxiii. 
18, sq. "Heb. v. 1. viii. 3, 4. ix. 9. xi. 4. 
See my Note on Heb. v. 1. In Matt. xv. 
5. Mk. vii. 11, doopov, soil, ecttl, the sense 
is, ' it- is a gift to,' i. e. consecrated to, 
God. So also of money contributed to 
sacred uses in the Temple, Lu. xxi. I, 
4, e(BaXov €i9 Tct dcopa tov Bfiou. Sept. 
and Class. 

E. 

"Ea, an interj. expressive of wonder or 
complaint, Mk. i. 24. Lu. iv. 34. Sept. & 
Class. 

'Eai/, conjunct. (for ei du,) if, contr. also 
into dv. It differs from si, inasmuch as si 
expresses a condition merely hypothetical, 
i. e. a subjective possibility ; while edv im- 
plies a condition which experience must 
determine, i. e. an objective possibility, and 
accordingly always refers to something 
future. 'Edv is usually construed with 
the subjunct. in later writers ; also with 
the indie, and very rarely in Class, with 
the optat. It is used in two ways : 1) 
alone; 2) in connexion with other particles. 
I. USED ALONE, and I. with the subjunct. 
and implying uncertainty, with the pros- 
pect of decision ; 1) with tlie subj. pres. 
and in the apodosis foil, by indie, fut. 
Matt. vi. 22, sq. Lu. x. 6, et al. Sept. and 
Class. The future of the apodosis, or the 
whole of the apod, is sometimes to be 
supplied, John vi. 62, edv ovv ^&u)prjTe, 
&c. i. e. 'how much more will this 
offend ■ you ?' Acts xxvi. 5. 1 Cor. iv. 
15. Instead of the fut. indie, is put 
the aor. subj. after ov /xi]. Acts xiii. 41, 



tpyov w ov fxi] TTtcTcucrijTf, Idu TtS &K- 
dniyfiTaL vfxlv. 2) foil, by imper. pres. 
John vii. 37. Rom. xii. 20, or aor. Matt. 
X. 13. Mk. ix. 43. 3) foil, by indie, pres. 
John viii. 16, et al. ssepe. 4) with the subj. 
aor. and in the apod. Also foil, by indie, 
fut. Matt. iv. 9, et al. ssepe. Sept. & Class. 
With the apodosis or the fut. implied, 
Mk. xi. 32, dW edv eiTrco/jLev, 'E^ dvdpco- 
TToov, i. e. ' ye know what will follow.' 
Fut. for imper. Matt. xxi. 3. 1 John v. 16 ; 
foil, by imper. pres. Matt, xviii. 17, "or 
aor. Matt, xviii. 15, 17 ; foil, by indie, 
pres. Matt, xviii. 13, et al. ; by aor. 
subj. 1 Cor. vii. 28. Ja. iv. 15. Sopie- 
times vAth both subj. pres. and aor. in the 
same clause, 1 Cor. xiv. 23, 24. Ja. ii. 15. 
1 John i. 6. — II. with the indie, but only 
in later Gr. writers. 1 John v. 15, edv 
ol^afxev — OLoa/jLsv on, &c. — III. used in 
respect to things certain as if they were 
uncertain, and hence equiv. to oVai/ with 
subj. John xii.32, iai' uv/^wGw l/c Tri<s yrj^. 
xiv. 3. 1 John iii. 2, and Sept. — iv. used 
instead of dv, in the N. T. and later Gr. 
writers, found in relative clauses and with 
rel. words, whereby they become more 
general, implying mere possibility, and so 
equiv. to our ever, soever, Lat. cunque, 
taking the subj. only; e. gr. o§ kdv, ivho- 
soever, tchatsoever. Matt. v. 19. vii. 9, et 
al. ssepe. octtis edv. Col. iii. 23. oVo? edv, 
whosoever, as many as. Matt, xviii. 18. 
oTTov kdv, ivheresoever. Matt. viii. 19. ov 
edv, icheresoever ; edv, as ifasichen, 
Mk. iv. 26, et al. KaQo edv, according to, 
tchatsoever. — II. in connexion with 
OTHER PARTICLES and with subj. only ; 
where however, each usually retains its 
own power, e. gr. kdv ok kul, hut if also. 
Matt, xviii. 17. 1 Cor. vii. 11, 28. 2 Tim. 

ii. 5. kdv fir}, if not, i. e. unless, except. 
Matt. V. 20. xxyi. 42. Mk. iv. 22. 
X. 30. edvirep, if indeed, if noiv, Heb. 

iii. 6, 14. vi. 3, and Class, kdv te, if it 
be, be it that, 2 Cor. x. 8. Rom. xiv. 8. 
Sept. and Class. 

'KavTov, T^s, TOV, refl. pron. third pers. 
of oneself, of itself, contr. avTov, tt]9, tov, 

I. prop, of the third pers. sing, and plur. 
Matt. viii. 22, et al. saepiss. — II. as a gene- 
ral reflexive pron. standing also for the 
first and second persons, Rom. viii. 23. 

1 Cor. xi. 31, et al. ssepe, and Class. — III. 
plur. in a reciprocal sense, for dWriXcov, 
e. gT. XeyovTe? irpo? eavrov^, for dXX. 
Mk. X. 26. John xii. 19, and Class.— IV. 
with prejoositions, as d<p' eavTov, St eav- 
Tov, by itself, in its own nature, Rom. xiv. 
14. kv kavTcp, in himself. Matt. xiii. 21. 
Mk. V. 30, et al. Sept. In the phrase 
yiveadai or €p)(£(T0at kv iavTw, to come 
to oneself recover one's senses. Acts xii. 

II. k^ eavTov, of or by oneself, cdo?ie, 

2 Cor. iii. 5, /caO' eavTov^ by himself 



100 



ETK 



Acts xxviii. 16. Ja. ii. 17. /xeO' Iuvtov^ 
along with^ Matt. xii. 45. Trap' tauTw, by 
himself^ 1 Cor. xvi. 2. Trpos kavnrdv^ to 
one's house, home, Jo. xx. 10, and perhaps 
Lu. xxiv. ]2. 

'Eaoj, f. acrw, gener. to let, either to 
let happen, i. e. to suffer, or to let be, let 
alone. In N. T. I. prop, to let happen, 
permit, foil, by acc. and infin. Matt. xxiv. 
43. Lu. iv. 41. Acts xiv. 16. xxvii. 32, 
xxviii. 4. 1 Cor. x. 13, et al. and Class. — 

II, to let he, or alone, foil, by acc. of pers. 
Acts V. 38, kdcran-E auVous. Sept. in Job 
vii. 19, and Class, as Thuc. viii. 63, 4; 
said of things, to let alo7ie, and absol. to 
desist, Lu. xxii. 51, idTs. ecos tovtov. — 

III. to leave to, commit to, 1 ) of pers. to 
leave in charge. Acts xxiii. 32, iao-ai/xg? 
Tov<s iTTTTfls iropf.vt.adaL. So Jos. Ant. 
ii. 9, 4, ilaGrav kirl tw Qe<Z (TioTi^piav 
auTov, or leave behind, suffer to remain, 
as Soph. Trach. 329. 2) of things, to let 
^0, Acts xxvii. 40, elcoi; eh t^v ddXaaraav. 

'E (3 do jULV KovT a, ol, al, tcc, indecl. 
seventy. Acts vii. 14. xxiii, 23. xxvii. 37. 
Lu. X. 1. 17, OL £/5<5. the Seventy disciples, 
sent out by Christ as teacliers. 

'Ej8^o/u?;/coj/Ta/ct9, adv. seventy- 
times. Matt, xviii. 22, k^B. kirTa, a high 
certain, for an uncertain and unlimited 
number, as Gen, iv. 24. 

"E/3^o^os, t], ov, ord. adj. seventh, John 
iv. 52. Heb.iv. 4, et al. 

'E-yyt^w, f. iao), (iyyus,) prop. act. 
to bring near, cause to approach to. Gen. 
xlviii. 10. Polyb. viii. 6, 7, kyy. Ty yy 
Tas vaif^, but gener. in neut. sense (like 
/Sa^i^ct) and kXTriX^co), to draiv near, ap- 
proach to, foil, by dat. and sometimes tis 
or k-TTL, said both of persons. Matt. xxvi. 46. 
Mk. xiv. 42, et ssepe al. or foil, by acc. ^vith 
€i§ or Trpos ; and of things. Matt. iii. 2, 
nyyuKsv rj (BaonXELa tcou ovpavwv. iv.l7, 
et al. Also kyyiX^Eiv tm 6£aT in Sept. to 
offer sacrifice ; but in N. T. to approach 
to God, in acts of worship, Heb. vii. 19. 
Ja. iv. 8. And, on the other hand, God 
is said kyyVC^sLv toTs dvdpMnrroL^, to draiv 
near to believers by the aids of the Holy 
Spirit, and grace given from on high. 

'Y^yypdcpoii, {kv, ypd<pu),) prop, in- 
sculpere, to engixii'e, Hdot. iv. 19 ; also, 
with allusion to the waxed writing-tablets 
of the ancients, to tvrite any thing in a 
letter, or to inscribe it in a list or written 
document. In N. T. metaph. to infix in 
tlie heart, 2 Cor. iii. 2, 3, kirLcrToXr] 
kyyey pa p. pL&vri kv -rals Kapdiai^ rip-OiV. 
Jos. and Class. 

"Eyyuos, ov, 6, rj, prop. adj. (from 
£yyu>], bail,) yielding a pledge, 2 Mace. x. 
28. In N. T. subst. masc. 6 tyyuos, a 
surety, metaph. Heb. vii. 22. 



'Eyyi/5, adv. 7iear, said both of place 
and time ; but gener, the latter. In N. T. 

I. of place absol. John xix. 42 ; foil, by 
gen. John iii. 23. vi. 19, et al. Sept. and 
Class.; foil, by dat. Acts ix. 38. xxvii. 8, 
Fig. near for aid, Phil. iv. 5, 6 Kuptos 
eyyus ; foil, by gen. Heb. vi. 8. viii. 13= 
Rom. X. 8. So OL kyyv9, scil. ovtb^, 
those ivho are near, i. e. the Jews as 
having the knowledge and worship of the 
true God, opp. to ol fxaKpav, the Gentiles, 
Eph. ii. 17. Is. Ivii. 19. So kyyv9 
yivsaQaL, to become near to God, i. e. by 
embracing the Gospel, Eph. ii. 13. — II. of 
ti7ne, kyyv9 to dkpo?. Matt. xxiv. 32. 
Mk. xiii. 28. Lu. xxi. 30, et al. & Class. 

'EyyuTEpoi^, adv. compar. of iyyus, 
nearer, said of time, Rom. xiii. 11. 

'Eyttp CO, f. spu), to wake up, cause to 
arise, arouse, I. prop, to rouse from 
sleep, with allusion to its recumbent pos- 
ture. Matt. viii. 25. Acts xii. 7. Mk. iv, 
27. Sept. and Class. Fig. to rouse from 
sluggishness, Rom. xiii. 11. So metaph. 
from death, of which sleep is the emblem. 
Thus ky&ipELv tou§ veKpov^, to raise 
the dead. Matt. x. 8. John v. 21. 
Acts xxvi. 8. 1 Cor. xv. 15. 2 Cor. i. 9. 
Also ky. EK vEKpu)V, John xii. 1, et al. — 

II. the idea of sleep being dropped, to 
CAUSE TO RISE UP, and mid. to raise 
oneself up, rise up, 1 ) prop, of persons, as 
sitting, Acts iii, 7, reclining at table, John 
xiii. 4, &c. and so of sick persons, Matt, 
viii. 15. Mk. i. 31. Also, with the notion 
of convalescence, to set up agaiii, to heed, 
Ja. V. 15. 2) by an Oriental pleonasm, 
prefixed to verbs of going, or going about 
anything. Matt. ii. 13, sq. kyEp^izU irapd- 
Xa^E TO iraidiov, ii. 20. John xi. 29, et 
al. 3) fig. of persons, mid. to rise iip 
against as an adversary, Matt. xxiv. 7. 
Mk. xiii. 8. Lu. xxi. 10. Sept. Jos. Ant. 
viii. 7, 6 ; of things, to raise up, as out of 
a pit. Matt. xii. 11 ; also to bicild, lit. raise 
a building, John ii. 19, 20. Jos. Ant. iv. 
6, 5. Hdian. viii. 1, 12, and ii. 12. — III. 
metaph. to raise up, cause to arise or 
exist, and mid. to arise, appear, Lu. i. 69. 
Acts xiii. 22. Matt. xi. 11, et al. to came 
to be born, Matt. iii. 9. Lu. iii. 8. — IV. in- 
trans. with kavTov, &:c, implied, to aivahe, 
arise, either prop, or fig. Eph. v. 14, 
(where see my note,) also to rise f rom a 
recumbent posture, Mk. ii. 9, 11. iii. 3. 
V. 41, et al. 

"Ey£pcrt§, ££0?, 77, (systpco,) prop, a 
waking up from sleep, but in N. T. from 
the dead, a resurrection. Matt, xxvii. 53. 

'Ey/ca0£TO9, ov, 6, v, prop, an adject, 
(from kyKadripaL, to sit in ambush,) sit- 
ting in ambush, lying in wait, Polyb. v. 70. 
Sept. Job xix. 12. xxxi. 9, l3ut gener. as 
a subst. And so in N. T. Lu. xx. 20, 



ETK 



101 



Era 



dTTEorTELXav eyKadkTov^^ 'suborned emis- I 
saries,'' or spies. So Jos. Bell. ii. 5, and vi. 
5, 2. Demosth. 1483, 2. Polyb. xiii. 5, 1. 

'Ky Kaiv La^ t'coi/, -rd, (fi/, Kaii/os,) 
prop, an imitation or handselling of any 
thing new. Sept. In N. T. the feast at 
the consecration of something new ; and 
gener. the festival of dedication^ John x. 
22, eyivsTo to. iyKaivia. 

'EyK'a tfi'^o), f. lo-oj, (ii/, Kaii/i'^to,) 
prop, to renew ^ 2 Chron. xv. 8, or initiate^ 
Dent. XX. 5. In N. T. fig. to initiate^ 
Heb. X. 20, kvEKaivLonv b^ov^ i. e. KaLvy]v 
eTroLtja-e^ for KaTearKEuaa-e^ and ix. 18, to 
consecrate^ and by impl. to sanction^ iyKe- 
KaivLCTTaL^ ' was consecrated or sanction- 
ed' (of the first covenant). So 1 Sam. xi. 
14, kyKaLvl'^iLv Ti]v (SacyiXEiav. 

*Ey/va\£tt», f. £0-0), (ti/, KaXlw^) prop. 
to call in or into^ a forensic term, to call a 
person into a court of justice, to call upon 
him to answer to a charge. Hence, to 
accuse^ or bring a chaise against^ foil, either 
by dat. of pers. Acts xix. 38. Jos. & Class, 
or by acc. of pers. or in pass, with gen. of 
thing. Acts xix. 40. xxiii. 29. xxvi. 7, or 
by /card with gen. of pers. Rom. viii. 33. 

'Ey/caTaXgiTTCo, f. \|/a>, {kv^ Kaira- 
XgiTTO),) to leave behind in any place or 
state, or gener. to leave. In N. T. 1) 
prop. Acts ii. 27, ou/c kyK. ti^v \l/vyjiv 
jULOv Eh adou. Demosth. 1326, 25. 2) 
spec, in the sense to leave remaining^ Rom. 
ix. 29, EL fii] — syKraTtXtTTs, and Class. 
3) by impl. to leave imsuccoured^ forsake^ 
abandon^ with acc. of pers. Matt, xxvii, 46. 
Mk. XV. 34. 2 Cor. iv. 9. 2 Tim. iv. 10, 
16. Heb. X. 25. xiii. 5. Sept. and Class. 

*Ey/caTOi/C£ tt), f. rjtro), (if, KaTOi- 
Kfo),) to dicell^ or reside among ^ 2 Pet. ii. 
8. Sept. and Class. 

'Ey /c€ j/rp 1^60, f. tcrw, (ii/, KEVTp.) to 
prick in^ i. e. put spurs into. Also to insert^ 
by making a puncture, (the notch made 
into the stick in grafting,) to engraft.^ as 
trees, Theophr. H. PI. ii. 3. Marc. Ant. 
xi. 8. Geopon. x. 76. Athen. 653. 

"Ey K:\T]/ua, aT09, TO, (fiy/caXiw,) a7i 
accusation, Acts xxiii. 29. xxv. 16, & Class. 

'Ey /co/x/3oo/x at, f. waojuLai, {kv, ko/jl- 
/3os, a string, loop, &c. to tie up a gar- 
ment ; hence kyKo/xfSwfxa, a kind of apron 
fastened with strings, Pollux iv. 119,) mid. 
to clothe oneself with an kyKoix^to^a. In 
N. T. gener. to put on, clothe oneself in ; 
foil, by acc. of thing, metaph. 1 Pet. v. 5, 
Trji; 'Ta'irELVO<ppo(TVvr]v kyKOfx^uxyaaQE. 

'Ey/co7r77, ^9, 77, (gy/coTTTOj,) an ob- 
stacle, hindrance, by which the means for 
effecting any thing are cut off, 1 Cor. ix. 
12. Diod. Sic. i. 32. 

'Ey /coTTTco, f, \//-a), (ii/, kiotttoj,) prop. 
to cvt in, indent. Hence, to cut a ditch. 



and, by impl. to separate one plot of 
ground from another, and also to cut 
off' any one's course, by digging trenches 
in his way : and metaph. to imjiede, hinder 
any one in what he is about, Rom. xv. 22, 
^id Kal EVEKOirTOfxriv. Gal. v. 7, Tts u/xas 
kvEKoxj/E ; 1 Thess. ii. 18, ei/ekoxI/ev v/ulo.^ 
6 S. Farther, in the sense to retard. Acts 
xxiv. 4, fxi] kiri ttXeTov ge kyKOTrTU). 

'Ey AT/o drs ta, as, 77, {k-yKpuTti^,) self- 
controid, temperance. Acts xxiv. 25. Gal. 
V. 23. 2 Pet. i. 6, and Class. 

'Ey K'paTE uo^ai, f. EvcrofxaL, dep. 
mid. lit. to be kyKpuTti^, i. e. €i/ KpctTEi, 
'in the possession of power of any kind,' 
espec. self-controul. Hence, to be conti- 
nent, abstinent, 1 Cor. vii. 9. ix. 25. Gen. 
xliii. 31. Not found in Class. 

'Ey/cpaTr]§, £09, o, 77, adj. (for phrase 

O kv KpOLTEl TLVO^ WU OV £)(6t>l/,) prOp. 0716 

in possession ofpotcer over any thing, also 
having mastery over, foil, by gen. Class, 
oft. Hence, as in N. T., metaph. possessing 
self-command, having mastery over the 
passions and appetites, temperate, conti- 
ne7it, abstinent. Tit. i. 8, a-wcppova, oi- 
Kaiov, odLov, kyKpaTtj, a sense freq. in 
Class, but almost always foil, by gen. of 
thing or kavTov. This absol. use is very 
rare, but occ. in Xenoph. Mem. iv. 8, 11, 
where it is distinguished from EvaE(3t]<s 
and SiKaLo^, also from au)<pp(jou,m. 9,4. So 
also, but of continency of tongue, in Ec- 
clus. xxvi. 15, where yuy7/ atcrxi'i'Ttjpa is 
opp. to £yKpa'r7/9 xj/vxv-, as in Xen. Symp. 
viii. 27, it is opp. to aiSovfxEvo^. 

'Ey /cpl'i/o), f. Lvu), {kv, Kpivu),) the 
opp. to EKKpLvw, lit. 'so to discriminate, as 
to admit irC or into a certain number. 
Hence, to i-eckon among, foil, by dat. 
2 Cor. X. 12, oh ydp ToXfxuDfxEv kyKplvai 
h (TvyKpTvai kavTox)^ tlctl tcov euvtov^ 
(TvvL(TTav6vTwv '. and so oft. in Class. 

'Ey /C/3 UTTT W, f. V\lflt}, {kv, KpVTVTO),) 

to hide any person ^V^ any place, oi- to hide 
any thing in another thing ; as Diod. Sic. 
iii. 62. Hom. Od. v. 488. Hence, to mix 
one substance in another, to mioj in, knead 
in, as leaven with flour, Matt. xiii. 83. 
Lu. xiii. 21, \)v Xa^ovaa yvvij kvEKpv^Ev 
£t9 dXEvpov aaTa nrpia. So Sept. in 
Ezek. iv. 12, kyKpvfpiav Kpidivov cpdyE- 
(TUL avTa, kv (3oX^ltol^ Koirpov dvdpu)- 
iTivt]^ kyKpvxj/EL^ avTa. 

"Ey/cuo9, ov, T}-, adj. equiv. to iy/cu- 
fMvov, preg7ia7it, Lu. ii. 5. Sept. and Class. 

'Ey ^pt'o), f. lo-oj, (ii/, xpiui,) to rub in, 
as Tob. xi. 8, t>;i/ ypXrjv sis tov^ 6(pdaX- 
fxov^ Eyx- Jer. iv. 30, kdv kyxpi-f^V o"ri'/3t 
Toi;9 6(p^aXiJiov<s aov. So Rev. iii. 18, 
KoXXovpLov iyxpi'o^ai tou9 ocpdaXfxov^'. 
with ocpd. Philo, 589. 

'Ey oj. pron. of first pers. /, plur. rjfXEl^, 
F3 



E A A 



102 



EI 



Sometimes used with emphasis, Matt. ill. 
11, 14. V. 22. John iv. 26, et al. s£epe. 
Occasionally employed by St. Paul, when 
the speaker puts himself as the representa- 
tive of all, or vice versa, e. gr. iyo) for 
77Mf t?, Kom. vii. 9—20, 24, 25. 1 Cor. x. 
30. v/uLsl^ for gyoj, 1 Cor. i. 2, 3. ii. 10. 
The genit. /uov and rmwu are often used 
instead of the possess, £/xo§, &c. 

'Kdacp l'^O), f. io-oj, (£^a0o5,) to level 
tcitli the ground^ destroy^ trans. Lu. xix. 
44, kdacpLovcTL <ts. (of Jerusalem). Sept. 
and Class. 

''Eoa^o9, £os, TO, (£<5os, scat,) base^ 
or bottom of any thing, on which it rests ; 
e. gr. of a sMj^^ Horn. Od. v. 249 ; of a 
room, the Jioo7\ Sept. In N. T. the ground, 
Acts xxii. 7, £7r£ aoy £ts to £. Sept. and 
Class. 

'Eopatos, ai'a, alov^ adj. (k'^pa, seat, for 
£oos,) prop, seated, sedentary, Xen. Lac. 

i. 3, but gener. metaph. stable, immovable, 
as said of things. In N. T. of persons, ykec/, 
firm, stedfast, in mind and purpose, as a 
column on its base, 1 Cor. vii. 37, 'iari]- 
KEi/ edpalo? kv ry Kapdia. XV. 58, iSpaloL 
yivEada, Col. i. 23, TedEfXEXLco/mivoL Kai 
i^paToi, Trj ttlgtel. So Ignat. Epist. 
to Ephes. § 10, kdpaiov Trj iriaTEL. Plato, 
p. 98, and so idpaico^, Hdian. iii. 14, 10. 

^KdpaLct) fxa, aTos, to, {kSpaioo), from 
kSpaio^,) foundation, 1 Tim. iii. 15. 

'E0£Xo0p cr/C£ / a, as, 77, [k%i\u3, 
dpr](TKELa,) voluntary, or swpererogatory 
tvorsldp, beyond what God requires, an 
affected luorship. Col. ii. 23, kv kd. kul tu- 
TT&Lvocppoavvi], Comp. k^sXo^LKaLoa-vvi]. 

'EOiXto, see 9£/\£o. 

'EOi'^to, f. Lcrui, (£00?,) of persons, to 
accustom, and pass, to be accustomed; of 
things, to be customary, Xen. Eq. vii. 7. 
Mem. iii. 14, 6. In N. T. to eldicrixivov, 
tuhat is customary, a custom or rite, Lu. 

ii. 27. 

'E0i/ap)(?;s, ov, 6, (£0fos, ap^co,) a 
ruler 0/ a people, a prefect, 2 Cor. xi. 32. 
Jos. and lat. Gr. writ. 

'E0iytKos, ?/, 6v, adj. (£0i/os,) in Class, 
prop, ncdional, popular. In N. T. in the 
Jewish gentile, heathen, not Jewish, 

Matt. vi. 7. xviii. 17. 

'E^vtKws, adv. (£02/t/c6§,) in the man- 
ner of Gentiles, Gal. ii. 14. 

"EOfos, £o§, TO, (contr. fr. 'i^ivo^, fr. 
£009, 77105,) gener. a multitude, or people, 
implying intercommunity, or the being 
iconted to each other. In N. T. it is used, 
I. gener. for the people or inhabitants of a 
country. Acts viii. 9, to 'i. ttj^ 2a/x. and 
xvii. 26, Trdu 'i. avdpuiTrtou. 1 Pet. ii. 9, 
al. — II. in the sense nation, as distinct 
from others, Matt. xx. 25. Mk. x. 42, et al. 



— III. in the Jewish sense, to. IQvt], the 
Gentile nations, the Gentiles, i. e. non- Jews, 
Matt. iv. 15. X. 5. Mk. x. 33, et saepe. 

"E0OS, £os, TO, (£00),) a custom^ mage^ 
whether by law, or otherwise, Lu. i. 9. 
ii. 42. xxii. 39, et al. Apocr. and Class. 

"E0aj, occ. only in perf. 2. ELioQa, with 
pre-, signif. to be accustomed. Hence, 
pluperf. ELu^dELv, as imperf. Matt, xxvii. 
15. Mk. X. 1, and Class. Partic. Eiuod6<s, 
Lu. iv. 16. Acts xvii. 2, KaTo. to £ia)0os 
avTM, So in Numb. xxiv. 1. 

Et, a conditional conjunction, if ex- 
pressing a condition merely hypothetical, 
and separate from all experience; i. e. a 
mere subjective possibility, and accordingly 
differing from kdu. It is sometimes con- 
strued with the opt., but more usually 
with the subjunct. It has two leading 
uses, 1) as a conditional particle ; 2) as an 
interrogative particle. I. as a condit. 
PARTIC. used ALONE, without other parti- 
cles, I. with the o»^. implying that the 
thing in question is possible, but uncer- 
tain, though assumed as probable. In 
N. T. it is foil, only by the indie, in the 
apodosis, affirming something definite ; e. 
gr. foil, by pres. 1 Pet. iii. 14, eI kul 
TrdarxoLTE, ' even if, as it is probable, ye 
should suffer;' by perf. Acts xxiv. 19, 
ov£ EOEL ETTL (Tov TTapElvaL, Kul KaTr\yo- 
PeTu, el tl e^olev Trpo's fXE, ""if they had 
had any thing to urge against me.' Else- 
where in parenth. Acts xxvii. 39, ti 
duvaivTo. 1 Pet. iii. 17, eI diXoL. eI 
TuxoL, it may be, perhaps, 1 Cor. xiv. 10. 
■ — II. with the i?zdic. implying possibility 
without the expression of uncertainty, a 
condition, or contingency, as to which 
there is no doubt, 1 ) vnth the indie, pres. 
and in the apod. foil, by pres. Matt. xix. 

10, e'l OUTCOS kcTTLV 7] ULTLa OU aVfJL- 

(pipEL, &c. xicts V. 39. Rom. viii. 25. 1 Cor. 
ix. 17 ; by imper. Matt. iv. 3, eI vIos eJ tov 
Qeov, £t7r£, &c. xix. 17. xxvii. 42. John vii. 
4. 1 Cor. vii. 9. Class. ; by indie. /z^^. Mk.xi. 

26, £i 0£ VjULEl^ OUK d(pLETE, Ovdk 6 UaTTjp 

vfxoov d(pi](TEi. Acts xix. 39. Rom. viii. II. 
Heb. ix. 13, and Class. ; by indie, aor. 
Matt. xii. 26, 28. Gal. ii. 21; by perf. 
1 Cor. XV. 13, 16, e'l vEKpoi OUK kyELpov 
Tat, ovCE XptcTos £y77y£pTat. Rom. iv, 
14. 1 Cor. xi. 17. Class. 2) with the 
indie, fid. and in the apodosis foil, either 
by pres. 1 Pet. ii. 21, or perf. as pres. Ja. 

11. 11, or by fut. Matt. xxvi. 35. 3) with 
the indie, perfect, and in the apodosis by 
pres. Acts xxv. 11. 1 Cor. xv. 14, 17, 
19. 2 Cor. V. 16, and Class. ; or by im- 
per. Acts xvi. 15 ; by fat. John xi. 12. 
Rom. vi. 5 ; by perf. 2 Cor. ii. 5. 4) with 
the indie, aorist, and in the apod. foil, by 
pres. Rom. iv. 2, £t 'A. k^ 'ipyujv kdc- 
KaiooQi], £X^^ Ku.vxVf*'^' ^v. 27. 1 John iv. 



103 



ETA 



11; by imper. John xviii. 23; by fut. 
John xiii. 32 ; by aor. Rom. v. 10. 5) 
with the indie, of the Mstoiic tenses^ and 
in the apod, a similar tense with av^ ex- 
pressing a previous condition on which de- 
pended a certain result, but implying that 
neither has taken place. Foil, by imperf. 
in the sense would be, would do, &c. after 
imperf. with £i, Lu. vii. 39, outos ei r\v 
'irpo<p» kyLV(ti(TKEv av. John v. 46. ix. 
41. XV. 19. 1 Cor. xi. 31 ; after aor. with 
Ei, Heb. iv. 8. Gal. iii. 21 ; by aor. in the 
sense would have been, would have done, 
&c. after imperf. with ft, John xiv. 28, si 
7jya'Tra.Ti juLE, kyaprire av. xviii. 30. 
Acts xviii. 14; by pluperf. in the sense 
woiddhave been, &c. after imperf. with gi, 
John xi. 21, si r]"s u3hz,o ad&\(p69 fxovovK 
av eTeOvvKsi. 1 John ii. 19, and Class. 
6) with the indie, sometimes where the 
opt. would rather be expected, viz. where 
a thing is uncertain, though assumed as 
probable. Acts xx. 16, E<j7rEvdt yap, si 
dvvaTov r]v avT<Z, yEveadaL, &c. and 
Class. And even where there is no pro- 
bability nor even assumed possibility, Mk. 
xiv. 35, £t dvvarov ecttl. Mk. xiv. 35, el 
BuvaTov ECTTL, TrapEKQr) 77 oopa. Matt, 
xxiv. 24. Mk. xiii. 22. 7) in the urbanity 
of Greek discourse, el with the indie, is 
said of things not merely probable, but 
certain, and dependent on no condition. 
Thus after Oau^djw and other similar 
verbs ; where it is equiv. to ort, Mk. xv. 
44, Edau/JLacTEV eI ^dt} teOvtike. 1 John 
iii. 13, and Class. Acts xxvi. 8, tl 

aTTLCTTOV KpiVETUL EL, &C. 2 Cor. Xi. 15. 

Also as equiv. to ettel, since, inasmuch as, 
both with indie, pres. Matt. vi. 30. John 
vii. 23, and aor. John xiii. 14, 32. Also 
in EL Tts, EL TL, if a7iy one, &e. used em- 
phat. for oCTTis, and either with indie, 
pres. Lu. xiv. 26. Mk. ix. 35, &c. or 
indie, fut. 1 Cor. iii. 14, 15, or perf. 
2 Cor. vii. 14. x. 7. — in. with the subj. 
rarely both in N. T. and early Greek 
writers, and only where an action, &c. 
depends upon something future, if , if so 
be, and with a neg. unless, except, Lu. 
ix. 13, EL fxvTL Trap. v/jleI^ dyopacru)- 
fiEv. 1 Cor. xiv. 5, £/<:t65 eI per] CLEpprj- 
vEvrj, Phil. iii. 12. Rev. xi. 5. — II. as 
an 'interrogative particle, whether, 
Lat. an, 1 ) prop, in an indirect question, 
after verbs implying question, doubt, &c. 
with the opt. and indie. With the opt. Acts 
xvii, 11, dvaKpivovTE^ Tots ypa<pd^, el 
Ixot TaxjTa ovTio^. xxv. 20 ; also el 
dpays. Acts xvii. 27. With the indie. 
both pres. & fut. and aorist often. 2) in a 
dhxct question, num, ne ; where it implies 
some doubt or uncertainty, though not to 
be expressed in Engl. Lu. xiii. 23, eItte 
di Ti§ auTcp' KvpLE, EL oXiyoL OL 0-0)^. ; 
Lu. xxii. 49, e'l TraTd^ofxEv. xicts i. 6, So 



Matt. xii. 10. xix. 3. Lu. xiv. 3. Acts 
vii. 1. xxi. 37. xxii. 25, and often in Sept. 
but not in Class. Greek. — III. in con- 
nexion with other particles, where, 
however, each usually retains its power, 
as in eI dpa, el yE, eI Se, Matt. xii. 7, & 
oft. e'l 8e p.7], but if not, always standing 
elliptically, prop, only after an affirmative 
clause, of which it then expresses the con- 
trary, John xiv. 2, 11. Rev. ii. 5, 16. Sept. 
and Class. ; sometimes also after a negative 
clause, of which it then expresses the con- 
trary, if otherwise, else, Mk. ii. 21, ou^ets 

ETrijSXljpa ETTLppdlTTEL ETTL IpiaTLU) TTa- 

XaLtp' eI Se pri, a'LpEL, &c. And so in 
Class. Et Kal, where Kal either refers to 
the subsequent clause, if also, or to the 
condition expressed by el, if even, i. e. 
though, although. So oft. in N. T. El 
jUT], if not, i. e. unless, except ; expressing 
a negative condition, supposition, «&;c. in 
which the pit] refers to the whole clause ; 
thus differing from el ov, where the ov 
refers only to some particular word with 
which it expresses one idea, 1) before 
finite verbs with the indie. Matt. xxiv. 22, 
e'l p.ri EKoXo(B(jD6rj(Tav al np-EpaL, Mk. xiii. 
20. John ix. 33, et al. 2) gener. and 
without a following finite verb, Matt. xi. 
27, et al. ssepe. So e/ctos el pn], unless, 
except, 1 Cor. xiv. 5. xv. 2. 1 Tim. v. 19, 
EL p.vTL, unless, perhaps, Lu. ix. 13. 1 Cor. 
vii. 5. 2 Cor. xiii. 5. Et 'Tvsp, if indeed, 
if so be, assuming the proposition as true, 
whether justly or not, Rom. viii. 9, eLttep 
YlvEvpa Qeov qlkeX ev vp.lv. 1 Cor. xv. 
15. 1 Pet. ii. 3, and Class. Et ttcos, if 
by any means, if possibly, with the opt. 
Acts xxvii. 12, or ind. fut. Rom. i. 10. 
xi. 14. Phil. iii. 11. eIte — eIte, ivhether — 
or, as including several particulars, either 
foil, by a verb, 1 Cor. xii. 26. 2 Cor. i. 6, 
and Class. ; or without a verb, Rom. xii. 
6—8. 1 Cor. iii. 22, et al. 

EI^os, £os ou§, TO, (obsol. fct^a>,) prop. 
any thing seen, but gener. external appear- 
ance. In N. T. 1) prop, the form, figure, 
or appearance of any thing, Lu. iii. 22, 
cru)p.aTLKio elSei. ix. 29. John v. 37. 
2 Cor. V. 7. Sept. and Class. 2) fig. man- 
ner, kind, species, 1 Th. v. 22, diro mrav- 

TOS £t^0U5 TTOVITpOV. JcY. XV. 3. EccluS. 

xxv. 2. Jos. Ant. x. 3, I, Tray sldo^ tto- 
vripia^, and Class. 

'Eld 00, to see, obsol. in pres. act. for 
which opdco was used. The tenses from 
elSu) form two classes, one having the sig- 
nification to see, the other to know, I. to 
SEE, viz. aor. 2. eISov, opt. tSoLpL, subj. 
lSo), infin. iSElv, part. iScbv, I saiv, imply- 
ing not the mere act of seeing, but the 
perception oi some object, 1) prop. foil, 
by acc. of person or thing. Matt. ii. 2, 
ELdonEv ydp avTOv tov dcTEpa, v. 1. 

F4 



EI A 



104 



E I K 



xxi. 19. Mk. ix. 9. xi. 13,20. John i. 48, 
et al. saepe. Sept. and Class. Foil, by 
acc. with partic. Matt. iii. 7, iowv ok tto/V 
Xoi/5 kpxofxivovs. viii. 24. xxiv. 15. Mk. 
vi. 33. By Hebr. with partic. of the same 
verb, by way of emphasis, idiiiv eISou^ 
Acts vii. 34 ; also in various modifications 
of sense, as to look upon^ contemplate^ 
Matt. ix. 36. xxviii. 6, et al. ssepe; 'to 
see in order to know,' to look at or into^ to 
examine^ Mk. v. 14. vi. 38. xii. 15. Lu.viii. 
35 ; to see face to face^ talk with^ Lu. viii. 
20. ix. 9. John xii. 21. Acts xvi. 40. 
Rom. i. 11. 1 Cor. xvi. 7, al. ; to see, i. e. 
spy out, watch to see, observe, Matt. xxvi. 
58. xxvii. 49. Mk. xv. 36, and Class. ; to 
see, to live to see, ivitness. Matt. xiii. 17. 
xxiv. 33. Mk. iii. 12. Lu. xvii. 22. 2) 
fig, said of the mind, to perceive. Matt, 
ix. 2, LOODV Trjv iricTTLV auTcou. Lu. xvii. 
15. John vii. 52. Rom. xi. 22, and often 
foil, by OTL. And so Sept. oft. 3) hi/ 
Hebr. to see, i. e. to eocperience, viz. either 
good, to enjoy, or evil, to suffer, Lu. ii. 26, 
1(5. ^dvarov. Heb. xi. 5. Acts ii. 27, 31, 
oiacpdopdi/. Rev. xviii. 7, Trivdo^. 1 Pet. 

iii. 16, rj/xipa^ ay. John iii. 3, t^u (BuglX. 
nrov Q&ov, ' to enjoy the privileges of the 
divine kingdom.' — II. to know, perf. 2. 
olda, subj. sioco, infin. zidivai, partic. el- 
cw?, pluperf. TjdtLv. Olda is strictly ' I 
have seen or perceived ;' hence it takes 
the present signif. to knoiv, and the plu- 
perf. becomes an imperf. 1) prop, and 
gener. to be acquainted icitli, foil, by acc. 
both of thing, as Matt. xxv. 13, & oft. ; 
and of person, Matt. xxv. 12. Mk. i. 34. 
John vi. 42. Acts vii. 18, et al. 2) in the 
sense to perceive, understand, foil, by acc. 
of thing. Matt. xii. 25, -ras £i/6i;fi77(T£ts. 
Mk. xii. 15, viroKpLGLV avrihv. Lu. xi. 
17, Siavori/uiaTa, et al. 3) to knoiv Jioiv 
to do a thing, and by impl. to be able to do 
it, and to do it, Matt, vii. 12. Lu. xii. 56. 
Phil. iv. 12. 1 Th. iv. 4. 1 Tim. iii. 5. Ja. 

iv. 17. 2 Pet. ii. 9. 4) by Hebraism, 'to 
know and approve,"* to love. Hence, as 
said of men, to care for, 1 Thess. v. 12, 
sioEuaL Toifs KOTTLcovTa^ EV vfjuv, as said 
of God, to acknowledge and adore. Gal. iv. 
8. 1 Th. iv. 5. 2 Th. i. 8. Tit. i. 16. Heb. 
viii. 11, and Sept. 

^IdodXElov, ov, TO, (gi^wXoy,) cm 
idol-temple, 1 Cor. viii. 10. 1 Mace. i. 47. 
X. 83 ; of the same form with lioatLdu)- 
veXov, TafxiE'iov, and many other substan- 
tives in £101', which are properly adjectives 
neuter with an ellip. of some subst. suit- 
able to the occasion, as here lEpoi/. 

Ei^CoXoOuTOJ/, ov, TO, {e'lSvoXoV, 

^■v(x},) idol-service, ' any thing sacrificed to 
idols,' i. e. in the N. T. the fiesh of victims 
offered to idols, which remained over, and 
was eaten or sold, Acts xv, 29. xxi. 25. 



1 Cor. viii. 1, sqq. where see my note, 
X. 19, 28. Rev. ii. 14, 20. 

EiOwA.o\aTf)€t a, as, v, {ELOioXov Sc 
XaTpEia,) idol-ivorship, idolatry, 1) prop, 
and gener. as said of eating meats offered 
to idols, and other actions approaching to 
idolatry, Gal. v. 20. 1 Cor. x. 14. So in 
1 Pet. iv. 3, it is said of the vices usually 
connected with idolatry, TrETropEvpifvov's 
kv adE/uLLTOL^ sldcoXoXaTpELaL^, 2) fig. of 
covetousness, Col. iii. 5. 

^io uaXoXaT pr]^, ov, 6, {ELdcoXov, 
XdTpL£,) lit. an idol-worshipper, 1) prop, 
and gener. 1 Cor. v. 10. vi. 9. Rev. xxi. 
8. xxii. 15 ; also said of one who partakes 
of meats offered to idols, 1 Cor. v. 11. x. 
7. 2) fig. of a covetous person, Eph. v. 5, 

Yi'id mXov, ov, TO, (£1^05,) prop, an 
image, in figure or representation, whether 
corporeal or mental, of some other thing, 
esp. the statues of men, particularly of the 
dead, Horn. Od. xi. 476, (BpoTcou E'LdujXa 
Ka/jiovTCDu. Xen. Mem. i. 4, 4. In N. T. 
cm idol,\. e. 1) an idol-iMAG'E, Acts vii. 
41, ^va-iav Tto eISooXu). 1 Cor. xii. 2, 
TTjJos TO. eLo. to. d(pu}va. Rev. ix. 20. 
Sept. and later Class. 2) by meton, an 
idol-GOB, SL heathen deity, 1 Cor. viii. 4, 7. 
X. 19, Sept. By impl. in plur. idols, for 
idol-ivorship, Rom. ii. 22. 2 Cor. vi. 16. 

1 Th. i. 9. 1 John v. 21. Spec, things 
offered to idols. Acts xv. 20. 

EtK?;, adv. (Ei/caTos, without order,) 
prop, disorderly, confusedly. Hence 1 ) by 
impl. inconsiderately, rashly, causelessly. 
Matt. V. 22, opyiX,. TLVL eUtj. Col. ii. 18, 
e'lktj (pvcnovpiEvo's, So Class. 2) in vain., 
to no pjurpose, Rom. xiii. 4, ov yap el. Ttji/ 
fxdxf^i'Pc^i' (popEl. 1 Cor. XV. 2, t/cTOS el 
/mrj EL. ETTLaTEVcraTE. Gal. iii. 4, €7ra0. eIkt}. 
iv. 11, ixYiTTUi^ EL. KSKOTTiaKa, and Class. 

EtKotri, ol, al, rd, indecl. twenty, Lu. 
xiv. 31, et al. 

Ei/co), f. go), to give way, to yield, foil, 
by dat. of pers. Gal. ii. 5, ols ovok Trpos 
ihpav EL^afxEv. Sept. & Class. 

EiKo), obsol. form, whence perf. 2. 
EOLKa, with pres. signif. to be like, foil, by 
dat. of pers. or thing, Ja. i. 6, eolke kXv- 
oixiVL ^aXdcrat]^, and 23, el. di/Spl, &c. 
Sept., Jos., and Class. 

KiKiov, ovos, 17, {elk(d,) I. GENER. a 
like?iess of any person or thing, and spec. 
cm image or effigy of a man, &c. as a sta- 
tue, picture, or coin. Matt. xxii. 20. Mk. 
xii. 16. Lu. XX. 24. Rom. i. 23. Said erf 
an idol-image (of some heathen deity) 
Rev. xiii. 14, sq. xiv. 9, 11. xv. 2. xvi. 2. 
xix. 20. XX. 40. Sept. and Class. In the 
sense representation or copy, 1 Cor. xi. 7. 

2 Cor. iv. 4. Col. i. 15. So Heb. x.^ 1, 
aurr] h elkmv twv irpayfxdTwu, meaning 
' the full and complete image of a thing,' 



E I A 



105 



E I M 



as opp. to cKta, a shadowy and imperfect 
one. Wisd. ii. 23. vii. 26. Luc. Imag. 28. 
— II. ABSTR. liketiess to any one, resem- 
blance^ Rom. viii. 29. I Cor. xv. 49. 2 Cor. 
iii. 18. Col. iii. 10. Sept. 

El\ lK'pti/€ta, a9, 17, {tL\LKpivi]'5^) 1) 

prop, clea rness^ ' such a whiteness and purity 
as will hear the closest examination,' like 
that of an article inspected in the full light 
of the sun. 2) metaph. jPz^nY^/, sinceritv, 
1 Cor. V. 8, kv aX^vfxoL^. 2 Cor. i. 12, siX't- 
KpLvtia GeoD. ii. 17, cos EiXiKpLveia^. 

Ei\i/cpii/»/s, £09, 6, 17, adj. (fi'A.??, the 
sunshine, and Kpivco, to examine, judge,) 
lit. ' found pure and white when examined 
in sunshine and hence by impl. metaph. 
pure, sincere, Phil. i. 10, 'Lva r\TE alXi- 
KpLval^. 2 Pet. iii. 1, £t\. Sidvoiav, 

El A. /(raw, f. Jo), (for the Attic fXtV- 
<raj,) to roll up, as a scroll, Rev. vi. 14, 
and Class. Poet. 

Ei/^i, f. 'icrofxai, has two uses : 1) as 
the usual verb of existence, to he; 2) as 
the logical copula, connecting the subject 
and the predicate. I. as verb of existence, 
TO BE, EXIST, to have eocistence, 1 ) prop, 
and gener. in the metaphysical sense, John 
3. 1, kv apxy r\v 6 Aoyos. viii. 50, 58. 
Mk. xii. 32, et al. ; of things, John xvii. 
5. 2 Pet. iii. 5. Rev. iv. 11, and Class. 
Said of life, to eocist alive. Matt. ii. 18. 
xxiii. 30. Jos. and Class.; to exist, be 
found, both of persons, Lu. iv. 25, ttoX- 
\al X^/o«t r^crav. Matt. xii. 11. John iii. 
1, and Class, and things, to eocist. Matt. vi. 
30. xxii. 23, et al. ssepe. Said of time gener. 
Lu. xxiii. 44, i]v dk ihaei thpa eKTf}. John 
i. 40. Acts ii. 15. 2 Tim. iv. 3. Mk. xi. 
13, and Class. ; of festivals, Mk. xv. 42. 
Acts xii. 3, and Class. 2) by impl. and 
from the adjuncts, to come to be, come to, 
come to pass: Matt, xxvii. 7, & oft. 3) kari 
foil, by infin. it is proper, licet, Heb. ix. 
5, 'jrspi (tiv ovK EOTTL vvv Xiji-Lv, & Class. 
4) partic. <mv, ova a, ov, joined with noun 
or pron. it is used in short parenthetical 
clauses, to indicate an existent state or con- 
dition, character, &c. in the sense being, as, 
as Matt. vii. 11, tt ovv viulel?, Trovrjpol 6v- 
T£9, oi^are, &c. John iii. 4. iv. 9. ix. 25. 
Acts xvi. 21, et saepe al. With the artic. 6 
wv, TO. ovTa, it denotes real and true exist- 
ence, as in the phrase b tov kul 6 rjv koI 6 
lpXOfJ.svo^, prop, name of God, Rev. i. 4. 
xi. 17. xvi. 5. Comp. Wisd. xiii. 1, ovk 
Lcryycav eldkvaL tov out a. So ra ovTa 
& TO. fxi] ovTa, prop. Rom. iv. 17. metaph. 
1 Cor. i. 28, and Class. — II. as logical 
COPULA connecting the subject and predic. 
TO BE, where the pred. specifies who or what 
a person or thing is, in respect to nature, 
origin, office, condition, circumstances, &c. 
while the copula merely connects the pred. 
with the subject. The* pred. may be made 



by various parts of speech. 1) with an 
adj. Matt. ii. 6. xviii. 8, and Mk. i. 7, et 
al. saepe. 2) with a substant. as pred. in 
the same case with the subject, both prop. 
Matt. iii. 4, 17. XV. 14. Mk. ii. 28, et al. 
sa3pe ; and fig. and meton. when the subst. 
of the pred. expresses not what the subj. 
is, but what it is like, or is accounted to 
be, or signifies; viz. by comparison, sub- 
stitution, &c. or as cause and effect ; so 
that fli/atmaybe rendered to he accounted, 
to be like, or to signify, Matt. v. 13, sq. 

xii. 50, et al. ssepiss. 3) with a pron. as 
pred. in the same case with the subj. viz. 
o5to9, Matt. X. 2, TO. ovopaTo. kaTi Tav- 
Ta. John i. 19. xv. 12. xvii. 3, et al. So 
also Ti9, TL indef. or interrog. ttoTos, tto- 
Ta7ro9, oo-Ti9, £/xo9, Qo^. Fig. as with 
nouns, the pred. often expresses not what 
the subj. is, but what it is accounted to be, 
or signifies. Matt. ix. 13. Mk. ix. 10, & 
oft. 4) with a genit. of a noun or pron. as 
pred. said of quality and character, Lu. 
ix. 55, et al. ; of age, Mk. v. 42, et al. ; of 
a ivhole, whereof the subject is part. Acts 
xxiii. 6 ; of possession, property, Matt. 
V. 3, and oft. Also metaph. of persons or 
things to whom the subject belongs, or on 
whom it is dependent, 2 Cor. iv. 7. 1 Cor. 
iii. 22, sq. et al. ssepe. 5) with the dctt, of 
a noun or pron. as pred. to be to any one, 
im^lymg possession ox property, John xvii. 
9, oTL aoL sia-L. Lu. xii. 20, et al. 6) 
with a partic. of another verb as pred. 
either wuth or without the article; and 
then sipl often forms a periphrasis for a 
finite tense of the same verb, expressing, 
however, a continuance in or duration of 
the action, Lu. v. 1, kul avTO's t]v icTcoy. 
Matt. xxiv. 9. Mk. ii. 6, et ssepe al. ; also 
with the art. when the partic. may be re- 
garded as equiv. to a noun. Matt. iii. 3, 
0VT09 yap kcTLV 6 p-ndsi^ viro 'Hcraioi/. 

xiii. 19. Mk. vii. 15. John iv. 10. Acts 
ii. 16. Rom. iii. 11, et al. ssepe. 7) with 
an adv. as pred. e. gr. of quality or cha- 
racter, as OUTC09, John iii. 8, et al. TavTa, 
Lu. xi. 30, et al. w9. Rev. xxii. 12. 
waTTEp, Matt. vi. 5. x^P'-^i Heb. xii, 8. 
kyyv<s, Rom. x. 8. eksl. Matt, xviii. 20. 
fxaKpav, Matt. xii. 34. ttoG, Matt. ii. 2. 
£o^£, Matt. xii. 6. itoQev, Matt. xxi. 25. 
8) with 2i preposition and its case as pre- 
dicate, as ctiro, John i. 45 ; £t9, denoting 
direction, object, end, Lu. v. 17 ; ek, 
with genitive implying origin, John i. 
47, et al. Hence metaph. of a person on 
whom any thing is dependent, to whom he 
is devoted as a follower, John viii. 47, ek 
TOV Qeov ovk k(TTE. 1 Johu iii. 10, iv. 6. 
vi. 19. So of things, as i/c t?;9 d\i]0£ia9, 
John xviii. 37. Epyoov, Gal. iii. 10, and 
£/c TTLcrTEtjos, ver. 12. Of a whole in re- 
lation to a part, 1 Cor. xii. 15, sq. et al. 
of the material, Rev. xxi. 21. 'Ei/ with 

F5 



EIN 



106 



EIP 



dat. implying a being in a place, thing, or 
person. 'EttI foil, by gen. of place, upon^ 
Lii. xvii. 31. John xx. 7. foil, by dat. of 
place, upon^ in^ at. Kara foil, by gen. 
elvai Kaird tlvo^^ ^ to be against any one,' 
Matt. xii. 30. Gal. v. 23. Me-ra foil, by 
gen. fli/at /xgra tlvo<s^ 'to be present 
with, in company with any one,' Matt, 
xvii. 17, et al. or ' on the side of any one,' 
Matt. xii. 30, et al. \lapd foil, by gen. 
E'lvai Trapd Tti/os, ' to be from any one,' 
i. e. ' sent by any one,' John vi. 46. vii. 
29. Hp 6 foil, by gen. of place, to be be- 
fore^ Acts xiv. 13. metaph. of dignity. 
Col. i. 17. npo5 foil, by acc. of place, 
&c. eJvaL nrp6<s Tt, ' to be near to,' Lu. 
xxiv. 29. Mk. iv. 1. Si/i^ foil, by dat. 
&lvaL (Tvu TLVL^ to be in company with any 
one, Lu. xxiv. 44. Phil. i. 23. Col. ii. 5, 
et al. 'Tttep foil, by gen. slvai virip 
Tti/o9, to be for any one, on his side, Mk. 
ix. 40. uTTE/o xii/a, above any one., fig. Lu. 
vi. 40. 'Ytto with acc. to be under.^ said 
of place, John i. 49. 1 Cor. x. 1 ; of per- 
son or thing, to be subject to.^ Rom. iii. 9. 
Gal. iii. 10. 1 Tim, vi. 1. 

Ei'yg/ca, see"Ei/£/ca. 

EtTToy, inf. EtTreri/, I. GENER. to say or 
speah^ with an acc. of the thing said. Matt, 
xxvi. 44, TOi/ avTOv XSyov ttTrcoV, Lu. 
xii. 3. John ii. 22. Acts i. 9, et al. Along 
with the accus. expr. or implied, are fiir- 
ther constructions of the pers. to whom, 
the manner by which, &c. 1) foil, by dat. 
of pers. John xvi. 4. Lu. vii. 22. 2) by 
£i5 and acc. of pers. ' to speak against,' 
Lu. xii. 10. 3) by Ka^d and gen. of pers. 
Matt. V. 11. 4) by TTf pi with gen. of pers. 
or thing, ' to speak of,' John vii. 39. x, 41. 
xi. 13. 5) by Trpos and acc. of pers. or 
thing, 'to say to,' Lu. xi. 1, or with re- 
ference to, Mk. xii. 12. 6) by adv. or a 
prep, with its noun, implying manner, e. gr. 
6/uoi'a)9, Matt. xxvi. 35, et al. Metaph. 
by Hebr. siTreTu kv Kapdia^ to comitate, 
think., Matt. xxiv. 48. Lu. xii. 55. Rom. 
X. 6, and Sept. 7) by infin. with acc. 
Rom. iv. 6, or with elvaL impl. John x. 
35. 8) by oTt, Matt. v. 31, et al.— II. 
as modified by the conteoct., where the sense 
often lies chiefly in the adjuncts, e. gr. 1) 
said before interrog. to ask., inquire.. Matt, 
ix. 4. xi. 3, et al. 2) before replies, to 
answer to a question, whether direct, or 
indirect, Matt. xv. 34, et al. 3) of nar- 
ration^ teaching, &c. to tell., declare., Matt, 
viii. 4. xvi. 20, et al. ssepe. 4) of predic- 
tions, to foretel.. Matt, xxviii. 6. Mk. xiv. 
16, et al. espec. in the pass. 5) of what is 
said with authority, to direct., command.. 
Matt. viii. 8. Mk. v. 43, et al. ssepe. Sept. 
Ex. XXXV. 1. Lev. ix. 6. Xen. Eph. ii. 5. 

Etf)77i/fua), f. eucro), (elp??!'??,) prop, to 
to be at peace., as opp. to war ; but in N. T. 



metaph. to live in peace and harmony, as 
opp. to discord, &c. absol. 2 Cor. xiii. 11, 
&Lpl]Vi\)S.TE. 1 Th. V. 13, EiprjvevETE kv 
kavTol's. Mk. ix. 50, siprivEveTe kv dWn- 
XoL's. Rom. xii. 18, jmsTd irdvToov dvOpu)- 
TTcov Eipr]v&vovTE^, Apocr. and Glass. 

Etf)?7i^j], ?7, (eipuy^junpo. See Eph. 
ii, 14 — 17, and so Li v. i. 1, ' Latinum 
pacem cum JEiUQ^—junocisse.^) 1) prop. 
in a civil or political sense, as the opposite 
to war or intestine broils, Lu. xiv. 32. 
Acts xii. 20. Rev. vi.4, al. and Class. 2) 
in a private sense, as regards individuals., 
peace and concord., Matt. x. 34. Lu. xii. 
51. Acts vii. 26. Rom. xiv. 19. Col. iii. 
15. Heb. vii. 2. 3) fig. peace of mind., 
spiritual peace with God and our own 
conscience through Christ, arising from 
reconciliation with God, and a sense 
of the Divine favour, Rom. ii. 10, v. 1. 
XV. 13. John xiv. 27. Phil. iv. 7. Comp, 
Is. liii. 5. 4) by impl. a state of peace., 
quietness, and security, Lu. xi. 21, kv ti- 
pnvT] kcTTi Ta virdp^ovTa avTov. ii. 29. 
John xvi. 33. Acts ix. 31. xxiv. 3. 1 Cor. 
xiv. 33. 1 Th. V. 3, and Sept. 5) by 
Hebr. well-being or external prosperity of 
every kind, Lu. i. 79, o(5os sipnvrjsi, ii. 
14. xix. 42. Rom. ii. 10. Ja. iii. 18, et al. 
Hence it is used as a wish of welfare in 
salutations, either at meeting or parting ; 
at meeting, Lu. xxiv. 36. John xx. 19. 
Lu. X. 5, iipr\vr[ tw oi/coj touto) : also in 
letters, Rom. i. 7. ii. 10, et al. aipuvij 
vfxlv'. Sit parting, vTC aye fis Elprivt]v, Mk. 
V. 34, or 'TTop&uov eh eipvuijv or kv eiprj- 
vrj, Lu. vii. 50, et al. So in the phrases 
IUL8T eipvvri^. Acts xv. 33. Heb. xi. 13, & 
kv eiprivrj, 1 Cor. xvi. 11. See my note 
on Heb. xi. 31. There are, however, some 
passages where it is difficult to say whether 
the temporal or the spiritual sense of the 
word has place ; and others where, though 
expositors adopt one or the other, both 
may have place. So Eph. vi. 15, to Euay- 
ykXiov T7]^ £.ipvvf)^. 2 Thess. iii. 16, 6 
Kuptos T^s ELprivi]^. So also the phrase 6 
0£o§ T^9 elpnvr}^, Rom, xv. 33. xvi. 20. 
Phil. iv. 9. 1 Th. V. 23. Heb. xiii. 20. 
Comp. Is. ix. 6, dpxoiv &ipr}vr]<i : also dpx^iv 
Tfj<s eipvvr]^, Xen. Eph. p. 92. At Eph. 
ii. 14, auTos yap kcrTiv v s.iprivr) vp-dyv, 
the sense is, ' he is the author of recon- 
ciliation of differences.' So Col. i. 20, ei- 
pr]voTroLricra<5 irdvTa 8is avTOV Sid tov 
aifxaTo^ tov cravpov avTov, (as in the 
phrase sip-nviiv TroiilaQaL : and so Eipri- 
vi)v SL^ovaL, John xiv. 27,) there is an 
allusion to the title of Christ, Is. ix. 6, 
' Prince of peace,' i. e. the gTeat Author of 
reconciliation with God, and thereby the 
Giver of peace of conscience, the Author 
of, and enjoiner to peace, 1 Cor. xiv. 33; the 
Author to believers of all peace both from 



EIP 



107 



EI S 



without and within, God being considered 
as in ' Christ reconciling the world nnto 
himself,' and thereby becoming their 
Peace. 

Ei/otji/iKos, Tj, oi/, adj. (ft^>7j/t7,) joeace- 
aZ>/c', peaceful^ prop, relating to political 
peace, as opp. to war, Xen. (Econ. i. 17, 
e.Lpi]VLKaL £7ri£7Tj;/xat. In N. T. 1) pa- 
cijic, i. e. disposed to peace, Ja. iii. 17, and 
Sept. and Plato often. 2) from the Hebr. 
sahitajy^ productive of happiness, Heb. 
xii. 11, KapTTo^ eip. at least according to 
the general interpretation. See, however, 
my note there, where I have shown that 
tiie sense is prob. peace-heari?ig ; of course 
including the other sense. 

Eip^ji/oTTOit'o), f. ?7cr6o, to maJiC peace^ 
equiv. to sipijui^v iroiiuo^ Col. i. 20. Prov. 
X. 10. Stob. Phys. 984. 

E t p t) 1/ o TT o I o s, oD, o, prop, a pacificator^ 
one sent to treat of peace. In N. T. one 
who studies to presei've or promote peace 
among others, and consequently icith 
others, Matt. v. 9. 

Els, a prep, governing the accus. with 
the primary idea of motion mto any place 
or thing, and then of motion or direction 
to^ towards^ unto., upon any place, thing, or 
pers. I. of PLACE, into.^ to., 1 ) after verbs 
implying motion of any kind into., or also 
^0, towards, upon any place or object: 
e. gr, verbs of coming or going, leading or 
following, sending, throwing, delivering 
over, &c. Matt. ii. 12, ai/£X^P^J^"^ 
T?7i» \u}pav avTwv. iv. 8. v. 1. vi. 6, et 
ssepiss. But a few peculiar usages may be 
noted. With an acc. of pers. but referring 
to the place where the person dw'ells or is, 
and implying to, among, &c. Lu. x, 36, 
kfjL'Trs.cTuiv sh toi/s Xtyo-xds. Acts xx. 29, 
ii<TeXEV(TovTai \vKoi £is u/xas, and xxii. 
21, et al. Said also of persons into whom 
demons have entered, Mk. ix. 25. Lu. 
viii. 30. 2) after verbs implying direction 
upon or toicards any place or object, e. gr. 
verbs of hearing, calling, announcing, 
showing, &c. Matt. x. 27. Acts xi. 22, 

CLKOVELl/ Eh Tft WTU. Lu. vll. 1. Matt. 

xxii. 3. Mk. V. 14. xi. 8, et al. ; espec. 
after verbs of looking. Acts i. 10, oltevl- 
X^ovTE^ £ts Tov ovpavov. iii. 4, 3) metaph. 
of a state or condition into which any one 
comes, after verbs of motion or direction, 
Matt. XXV. 46, a.TrE\i{j<jovTaL gj's KoXacriv 
aiwvLov. Mk. V. 26, £is TO y/ipov kX- 
Qovara, et al. ssepe. So vTayE or iropEvov 
sh ELprivi]v. So in the construct. prcBg- 
nans (SwTrn-LX^ELv ft? Tiva, or f l§ to ovopd 
TLvo<3, ' to baptize into, or unto, the obli- 
gations incumbent on any one's disciple,' 
Matt, xxviii. 19. Acts viii. 16. Rom. vi. 
3, 4, al. — II. of TIME, viz. 1) time u'?ien, 
implying a term or limit, to, up to, until, 
Acts. iv. 3, £i§ Ti)v avpLov, till the morrou'. 



Matt. x. 22, eU teXos. Phil. i. 10, th 
vpipav XpL(TTOv, ' agai?ist the day of 
Christ;' and ii. 16. 2 Pet. iii. 7. Acts 
xiii. 42. 1 Thess. iv. 15. 2 Thess. ii. 6. 
2 Pet. ii. 4, al. 2) of time hoiv long, 
marking duration, for, &c. Matt. xxi. 19, 
eU tov aitova, for ever. Mk. iii. 29. 
John viii. 35. Lu. i. 50, Eh jEVEa? jeve- 

COV. xii. 19, Eh £T)] TToWd, ct al. — III, 

TROPICALLY, as marking the object or 
point to or toicards which any thing tends, 
aims, &c. : said 1) of a result, or effect, 
marking that to which any person or thing 
tends to, or becomes. Matt. xiii. 30, Si'icraTe 
auTous Eh di<Tp.a?. xxvii. 51, iaxia-dt] sh 
Svo, sc. nxipi}. John xvii. 23. Acts ii. 20. 
Rev. xi. 6, et al. ssepe. Thus XoyLX^ofxaL 
{tlvol, Tt) £i§ TL, to reckon or count for, 
or as any thing, Acts xix. 27. Rom. ii. 26. 
ix. 8. Also, XoyiXpixai tivi E^h ti, to 
reckon or impute to any one for, or as, 
Rom. iv. 3, Eh dLKaLoavvvv. v. 5, 9, 22. 
Gal. iii. 6, al. So after verbs of coiisti- 
tuting, making, becoming, &c. Acts xiii. 22, 
vyEipEu auToIs top AavlS Eh (SacnXia, 
and V. 27. With eIvul or yivEcrdaL, to be 
one. Matt. xix. 5. Mk. x. 8. Lu. xiii. 19, 
and oft. 2) of measure, degree, cedent, 
chiefly by periph. for an adv. Lu. xiii. 11, 
Eh TO TrayTfiXis, entirely. 2 Cor. iv. 17, 
Eh v'KEp^oXnv. 2 Cor. x. 13, Eh to. 
afXETpa, and xiii. 2, Eh to ttoXlv, and 
vi. 1, Eh KEvov. 3) of a direction of mind, 
as marking an object of desire, towards, 
for, in behalf of, Rom. i. 27. x. 1. Ju. 
21, et al. saepe ; including the con- 
struction of iXTTi'^o) and ttlgtevm with 
Eh implying confidence in ; or of aversion 
against, as Matt, xviii. 6. 1 Cor. vi. 18, 
afxapTuvELv Eh. Lu. xii. 10, kpEl Xoyov 
E'h TLva. Mk. iii. 29, et al. and Class. 
4) of an inte?ition, purpose, aim, end, viz. 
Eh final, either in the sense of unto, or in 
order to, or for, i. e. ' for the purpose or 
sake of,' Matt. viii. 4, et al. saepe : or in 
the sense to or for, implying use, advan- 
tage, &c. and equiv. to the dativus corn- 
modi et incommodi, but more emphatic, 
Matt. X. 10. Mk. viii. 19, sq. Lu. ix. 13, 
et ssepiss. 5) gener. as marking the object 
of any reference, relation, or allusion, i?ito, 
unto, toicards, either prop, in the sense 
conformably to, in accordance zvith, Matt. 
X. 41, sq. xii. 41. Lu. xi. 32. Acts vii. 53, 
or gener. in the sense as to, in respect to, 
as concerning. Acts ii. 25. Lu. xii, 21. 
Rom. iv. 20. xiii, 14, xvi. 5. Heb. vii. 14, 
et al. ssepe. Note — In composition Eh 
denotes, 1) motion hito, as EiaSE^o/jiai, 

EtcTELpL, ELCTEpypfXaL, ELGCpEpUi, &C. 2) 

motion or direction to, towards, as elg- 
aKOvvo. 

Els, fxia, 'iv, gen. Evd<s, pad^, fj/os, the 
first cardinal numeral, one, 1) pro2^. and 



£12 



108 



EI S 



gener, e. gr. Tvith a subst. Lu. xviii. 19, 
ohhzi^ «7a0o9, ii p.^ eIs, 6 Geo?, 1 Cor. 
ix. 24. Gal. iii. 20, al.; with a subst. 
Matt. vi. 27. John xi. 50 ; with a negat. 
eqiiiv. to not one^ none^ Matt. v. 18. Rom. 

iii. 12. So 01)^1 eIs, more emphatic than 
outfits, Matt, xxvii. 14. John i. 3. Acts 

iv. 32. Rom. iii. 10. 1 Cor. vi. 5, al. 2) 
used distrihutively^ viz. eTs — eTs, one — 
the other. Matt. xx. 21, xxiv. 41, et al. 
fcl§ £/ca(rT05, each^ every one^ Acts ii. 6. 
xx. 31. Col. iv. 6, al. /caO' kVa, OTze hy 
one^ singly^ for eTs /caG' k'l/a. So KaG' 

0726 6?/ 0726, Rcv. iv. 8. Hcnce the 
anomalous form eIs Koff eIs, OTze hy one^ 
Mk. xiv. 19. John viii. 9, and 6 hi kuQ' 
eI?, Rom. xii. 5, 3) emphatic, OTze, i. e. 
0716 only, or even one, Matt. v. 36. xxi. 
24, et al. or ' one and the same,' Rom. iii. 
30. 1 Cor. iii. 8. Gal. iii. 28. Phil. ii. 2. 
Heb. ii. 11. Rev. xvii, 13. 4) indefin. 
some or any one^ a certain^ equiv. to rk, 
Matt. viii. '19. xix. 16. Mk. xii. 42, ixia 
X'7^>a. John vi. 9. Rom. ix. 10, et al. 5) 
from the Hebr. as an ordinal, the first^ 
espec. of the first day of the week, Matt, 
xxviii. 1. Mk. xvi. 2, et al. 

E to- ay CO, f. ajw, to lead or hy-ing in 
or into^ trans, and foil, by eis with acc. of 
place. I. of person, Lu. xxii. 54, e. uvtov 
Ets Toi/ oIkov tou apxL&piit)^, and ii. 27. 
Acts ix. 8. xxi. 28, 29, 37. Also eIct- 
uysLV TLva eh Tr]v oiKovfxivi]v, ' to intro- 
duce into the world,' implying the formal 
introduction of one vested with ample au- 
thoritv, to those whom he is to govern, 
Heb. 1. 6. foil, by c^^e, Lu. xiv. 21. Sept. 
and Class. — II. of things. Acts vii. 45, vu 
{(rKt]vr]if Tov fxapTvpLOu) ELanyctyov ol 
7raTepE<s iifxihv. And so in the Class, 
espec. of the introduction of merchandise, 
as often in Plato, Xen., and Thuc. 

Etcrafcouo), i. ovcrofxaL, 1) to perceive 
bv the ear, to hear, as Horn. II. viii. 97. 
fhuc. iv. 34. V. 45. Soph. Trach. 351. 
2) to give ear to, hearken, Thuc. v. 17; 
and by impl. to give heed to, to liear fa- 
vourably, as petitions or prayers, Matt. vi. 
7. Lu. 1. 13. Acts X. 31. Heb. v. 7. Sept. 
but not Class. 3) to give heed to, obey, 
foil, by gen. of person, 1 Cor. xiv. 21, 
ou(5' OUT605 ELcraKovcrovTai /ulov. Sept. 
Ecclus. iii. 6. Thuc. i. 126. v. 45, and 
often in Class. 

^ia-SixofMaL, f. ^o/ixaL, depon. mid. 
to 7'eceive into, i. e. into one's house, city, 
or country, or zmto oneself, namely, in 
hospitality, or kindness and favour. The 
word often occurs in Sept., where God is 
said ' to gather and collect the exiles of 
Israel into their own land.' Hence in 
N. T. 2 Cor. vi. 17, we have, /cdyo) Eto-- 
di^ofxaL vjuia9, where a reception into 
cor,imu7iion is meant. See v. 16, and 



Zech. X. 8. Hos. viii. 10 ; q. d. ' I will 

receive you into my especial communion 
and favour.' 

EiOTEt/xt, imperf. eIctijelv, to go into, 
enter, foil, by eU with acc. 1) of place. 
Acts iii. 3. xxi. 26. Heb. ix. 6. 2) by 
TT^os with acc. of pers. Acts xxi. 18. 
Sept. and Class. 

EAirr ipxo fxai, f. E\Ev<TOfxaL, to go or 
come in, e7iter ; said I. of persons, and 
1) prop. foil, by eU with acc, of place, 
Matt. vi. 6. xxiv. 38, et al. saepe ; by Ets 
with acc. of pers. Acts xvi. 40, Et? Tr;V 
Kvoiav, and xix. 30. xx. 29. Mk. ix. 25. 
Lu. viii. 30, et al. ; also foil, by irapd 
with dat. of pers. Lu. xix. 7, and Trpo? 
with acc. of pers. Mk. xv. 43. Acts x. 3. 
xvii. 2. Rev. iii. 20; foil, by utto with 
acc. of place. Matt. viii. 8. Hither may 
be referred the idiom, formed from the 
Hebrew, Ela-EpxofxaL Kai k^ipxofJiaL, to 
go in and out, to perform one's daily du- 
ties. Acts i. 21. Fig. John x. 9. So 
EicTTrop. Kal EKirop. Acts ix. 28, and 
Sept. 2) metaphorically, followed by eas 
with acc. of state or condition, Matt, xviii. 
8, sh '^ojrjv. Mk. ix. 47, ei? ttiv 
(SaortXELav tov Oeov, et al, — II. of 
THINGS, to enter i7i or into, equiv. to 
Eicr(pEpoiuLaL, espec. food, sh to crTOfxa, 
Matt. XV. 11. Acts xi. 8; also metaph. 
Lu. ix. 46, Eta-^\0£ dLoXoyiariJid'S kv au- 
Toi?. Ja. V. 4. Heb, vi. 19. 

Etc/caXEO), f, Ecru), to call in, invite 
into a house, or to hospitality, Xen. Cyr. 
viii. 3, and oft. in Class. In N. T. mid. 
ElcFKaXiofxaL, to invite into one's 0W7i 
house. Acts x. 23. 

Ei<ro^o§, ov, fj, (fit?, 0^65,) prop, ci 
ivay into any place, an eiitrance, Horn, 
Od. X. 90, and in Thuc. ii. 9, the act of enter- 
i7ig ; but in N. T. entrance, 1. e. the power 
of entering, ad7nission. Foil, by eis with 
acc. of place, 2 Pet. i. 11, rj e. Ets ti]v 
aiuiVLOv (3a(TLXELav tov JLvpiov : by gen. 
Heb. X. l9, Trju e. tmu dyitov : by 7rpd9 
with acc. of pers. 1 Thess. i. 9, coining to, 
approach, oTroiav e. Ecrxop-^v Trpo^ vp.d9, 
and ii. 1, Ttiv &. vfxiov eis u/xas. Absol. 
Acts xiii. 24. 

'Eia-irriSdu), f. ricro), to leap or rush 
into a place, or upon a person. In N. T. 
E. eI§ t6i/ oyXov, 'to rush in among the 
people,' Acts xiv. 14, and absol. xvi. 29. 

EtcTTTOjO £ uo/xat, f. EV(TOfxaL, dcpon. 
to go into, enter ^ I. of persons, foil, by Ets 
with acc. of place, Mk. i. 21. vi. 56. xi. 2. 
Acts iii. 2; with eU underst. Lu. viii. 16. 
xi. 33. xix. 30, or Trpos with acc. of pers. 
to enter iiito any one, i. e. into his house, 
xxviii. 30. — II. of THINGS, to enter in or 
iiito, as food, foil, by eU, Matt. xv. 17. 
Mk. vii. 15. Metaph. to arise, enter into 



E I S 



109 



EK 



the mind, Mk. iv. 19. — III. from the 
Heb. £i(77r. KUL tKirop. to go in and 02(t, 
i. e. ' to perform the daily duties of life,' 
Acts ix. 28. 

EiCTTptxw, f. dpi^co^SL. 2. siaeSpa/uLOV^ 
to 7'un into any phice, as a house, Acts xii. 
14, absol. but with ets oi/ciai/ impl. in cont. 

Eiar<^£/0 6i), (f. t^otVoj, aor. 2. Eicniviy- 
Kov^ aor. 1. EicvvEy Ku^) to bear, or bri?ig 
into, trans, and foil, by with acc. of 
place, 1 Tim. vi. 7, ovdkv (.iai^vtyKafxev 
£i§ Tov Koa/uLou. Hcb. xiii. 11 ; with sh 
Tov oIkov underst. Lu. v. 19, sq. Sept. 
and Class. Said of pei'sons, foil, by £t9 
with acc. of state or condition, to lead into, 
Matt. vi. 13, sq. Lu. xi. 4, £. £t§ ttel- 
paa-piov. Those passages, indeed, are usu- 
ally rendered, ' Suffer us not to be led 
but, as Mr. Rose remarks, 'the arguments 
for that version are rather of a metaphy- 
sical, than a philological nature.' Fig. 

S.L(J<pS.pS.LV TL £i§ TUS tt/COaS Ttl/OS, ' tO 

bring unto the ears of any one,' i. e. to 
announce to him. Acts xvii. 20. So Eur. 
Dan. oh, £ts tcTa cp&pEiv, and elsewhere 
in Class. 

Elra, an adverb, 1) of time, after 
that, tlien, Mk. viii. 25. Lu. viii. 12. 
John xiii. 5. xix. 27. xx. 27. Ja. i. 15, 
and Class. 2) of order and succession, 
as TTpcoTov, eItu, 1 Tim. ii. 13. iii. 10. 
Mk. iv. 28. 1 Cor. xii. 28, and Class. 3) 
as a PARTic. of continuation, then, so then, 
consequently, Heb. xii. 9, and Class. 

'E/c, (before a vowel 'Eg,) a prep, go- 
verning the genit. with the prim, significa- 
tion oz^^ of, from, of, used of such objects 
as were before in another, but are now 
separated from it, either in respect of 
place, time, source, origin. I. of place, 
which is the prim, and most frequent use, 
out of, from, 1) after verbs implying mo- 
tion of any kind out of or from any place 
or object, e. gr. verbs of coming or going, 
sending, throwing, falling, gathering, or 
separating, removing, and such like, Mk. 
V. 2. vii. 5. John ii. 15. Lu. ii. 4, et al. 
saepiss. With a gen. of pers. out of, i. e. 
from whose presence, number, &c. any 
person or thing proceeds, John viii. 42. 
Acts iii. 22, sq. xx. 20. 1 Cor. v. 13. 
Heb. V. 1. 1 John ii. 19, al. 2) after 
verbs implying direction, out of, or from 
any place, &c. ; thus marking the termi- 
nus de quo, the point from which the direc- 
tion issues or tends, Lu. v. 3, ihihaQKEv 
EK Tov ifKoLov. John xix. 23, iic tcov 
aviodev xxpavTO's. Mk. xi. 20, crvKrjv 
E^7]paiuLiiiivr]v ek pCC^ijov, Acts xxviii. 4, 

Kpe/ULclfXEVOV TO dl]pioU EK Tf]^ )^£i.p05 

avTov, and Class. So, by Hebr. in the 
constr. prcegnans. Rev, xviii. 20. xix. 2, 
E^E6^K^uE TO alfxa tcov dovXcov avTou ek 



XEi/Oos aurfi^, 'God hath avenged, or 
taken vengeance, of or from her.' So 
in the constr. prceg. of a different sense, 
Rev. XV. 2, Tous vLKoovTa^ ek tov 6r)ptov, 
&c. — As implying the direction in which 
any one is placed from or in respect to a 
person or thing, as KaOiaaL, icFTctvaL, or 

eIvUL, ek ^£^ta§, EK Se^LCOU, EVOOVVfJiUiV^ 

Matt. XX. 21. xxii. 44. xxv. 33. xxvi. 64, 
et al. Sept. and Class. 3) metaph. of a 
state, cotidition, &c. out of which any one 
comes or tends, after verbs of motion, 
direction. Sic. John x. 39, ij^fiXdEv ek 
Tt7§ x^'^P^^ avTodv. Rom. xiii. 11. r^yip- 
07] EK vEKpwv. vi. 4. Acts xvii. ?>, dva- 
(XTr\vaL EK vEKptZv. Rom. vi. 13, ^toi'Tas 

EK VEKpWV. Col. i. 18, TT/OtOTOTOKOS EK 

uEKpoou, et al. saepe. — II. of time, viz. as 
said of the beginning of a period of time, a 
point FROM which onward any thing takes 
place. So EK kolXlu^ /j.i]Tp69, Matt. xix. 
12. Lu. i. 15, al. et Sept. ek veottjto^^ 
Matt. xix. 20. EK iKavwu, Lu. 

viii. 27. £^ dpxv^i John vi. 64. ek yEVE- 
T'f]§, ix. 1. EK TOV ai(Zvo<s, ix. 32, and 
Class. Hence it may sometimes be ren- 
dered ajter, as Rom. i. 4, £^ dj/acrTao-ftos 
VEKp<jov. Rev. xvii. 11, ek twv ettto, 
ia-TL, ' is after the seven,' i. e. as their 
successor. So, by Hebr., 2 Pet. ii. 8, 
v/m-Epav E^ vfXEpa^, lit. day from day, i. e. 
' day after day.' With an adj. or pron. it 
sometimes forms an adv. of time, e. gr. 
avTij^ scil. wpa^, from this time, immedi- 
ately, Mk. vi. 25, iKavov, of a long 
time, of old, Lu. xxiii. 8, ek tovtov scil. 
Xpovov. — III. of the ORIGIN and source 
of any thing, i. e. the primary, direct, im- 
mediate source ; in distinction from cltto, 
which represents the secondary, indirect, 
mediate origin. It is said, 1) oi pei^sons, 
viz. of the place, stock, family, condition, 
&c. out of which one is derived, or to 
which he belongs; place, Lu. viii. 27, 
dv7ip Tis ek Ttj^ ttoXew?. xxiii.7. Johni. 
47, al. ; family, Lu. i. 5, lepsv^ Tts i^tj- 
juLspia^ 'A/3tc£. ii. 4. Acts iv. 6. xiii. 21, 
et saepe ; condition or state, John viii. 41, 

rj/JLEL^ EK TtOpVELU'S OV yEyEVVVfXEda. 

Acts X. 45, et al. ol ek 'KEpLTOfxV\<s. 2) of 
the source, whether pers. or thing, oitt of 
or from which any thing proceeds, is de- 
rived, or to tchich it pertains, and that 
both gener. Mk. xi. 30, ovpavov. 
Matt. xxi. 19, iuLi}KETL EK aov Kapiro? 
yEui]TaL. Lu. i. 78, duaToXt} e^ u\|/^ous, 
and oft. ; and spec, as marking not only 
the source and origin, but also the cha- 
racter of any person or thing, as derived 
from that source, implying connexion, de- 
pendence, adherence, devotedness, like- 
ness, &c. John vii. 17, ek tov Qeov. viii. 
47, et al. saepe ; also fig. of the source of 
character, quality, &c. implying adherence 
to, connexion with, &c. John xviii. 37, 



EKA 



110 



EKB 



7ra§ 6 (VI' Ik rij? d\i]dsLas. 1 John ii. 21. i 
iii. 9, et al. Hence ek with gen. forms a \ 
periphr. for an adv. or partic. as 6 ek , 
TTLCTTEws^ Rom. iv. 16. Gal. iii. 7, 9. 6 Ik 
vofxov^ Rom. iv, 14. ol epidsLa^, ii. 
8. 77 £/c (pvaB(x}9 aKoofSvo-TLa. 27. 3) of 
the motive, ground^ or occasion whence : 
any thing proceeds, the incidental cause • 
of it, from, out of, i. e. by reason of, in 
consequence of, &c. John iv. 6, keko- 
7rLaK(h<s EK TT/s bcoiTTopLa's. Ja. iv. 1. 
Rev. viii. 11. 2 Cor, xiii. 4. 1 Tim. vi. 4. 
Heb. \\\. 12, et al. So ciKatovv or ^l- 
KaicodrjvaL ek ttlctteco^, out of from, by, 
on account of, faith, and clk. Lk toov tp- 
yu>v. 4) of the efficient cause, agent, &c. 
that from which any action or thing is 
produced or effected, from, by, Rom. ix. 
11. Gal. V. 8, EK Tov KaXovvTO^. 1 Cor. 
viii. 6. 2 Cor. i. 11. John xii. 49, and oft. 
0) of the manner or mode in which any 
thing is done, ]Mk. xii. 30, ayairav 
0/\?js T7;§ Kapoia^. So ek kItvxv'^-) &c. 
6) of the means, instrument, instrumentaj 
cause, /)'0??z. i. e. by means of, by, through, 
'uith, &c. Lu. xvi. 9, TvoLricraTE Eavrol^ 
(piXovQ EK TOV paixcoua TtJS aClKLWi, 

' by means of.' John iii. 5, voaTo<s. 
1 Cor. ix. 14, EK TOV EvayyEXiov, and oft. 
Hence v^ith verbs of filling, Matt, xxiii. 
25. John xii. 3, and also of the price paid 
down, as a means of acquiring any thing. 
Matt. XX. 2, EK c-rjuapiov. 7) of the ma- 
terial, viz. of, out of from, ]^Iatt. xxvii. 
29, (TTi<pavov 1^ aKavdwv. John ii. 15, 
(pp. EK (j^oLVioav. Rom. ix. 21. 1 Cor. xi. 
8. Eph. V. 30. Heb. xi. 30. 8) of a icliole 
in relation to a part, a whole from which 
a part is spoken of, i. e. paiiitively, 1 Cor. 

.xii. 15, OVK ECTTLV EK TOV (TtO/aaTO?. So 

after verbs of eating or drinking, 1 Cor. ix. 
7. xi. 28. Lu. xxii. 16. John y\. 26, et al. 
Said of a class or nwmhex ozit o/" which any 
one is separated, of icliicli he forms a part, 
6cc. John i. 24, ol (ZTrEO-TaXuivoi t]o-av 
EK Tojv ^ap. Mk. xiv. 69. Lu. xxii. 3. 
Acts xxi. 8. 2 Tim. iii. 6. Phil. iv. 22, ol 
EK Tvj's Kaiaapo^ oiKia's. Finally, after 
a numeral or pron. as els. ?>Iatt. x. 29. 
31k. ix. 17, et al. s^pe. — X. B, in com- 
position EK implies, 1) removal, out, from, 
off, aicay, as EK^aLV(jo, EK^dWco, EKcpipco. 
2) coniinuance, as ekteluo}, EKTpicpoD. 3) 
completi'jn , as EKcaTraudco. 4) intensity, 
as EKCi]Xo^, E^a-rraTcxco, EKcaTraudco. 

"E/cacTTos, 77, ov, adj. (superl. from 
EKd<s, separate.) eacJi, every one, i. e. of 
any number separately. 1) gener. Matt. 

xvi. 27. aTTUC'JUCrEL EKUCTTCp KaTU TJjl/ 

Ttpd't^iv aiiTou. Lu, vi. 44. John vii. 53, 
et al. This idea of separation, or singling 
out, is expressed yet more strongly by eT? 
EKacrT09, Acts xx. 31, vovdETcov Eva 
EKacTTov. Eph. iv. 16. Rev. xxi. 21, al. 
2} distnhv.tively, in constr. with plural 



verbs, where it is in apposition with a plur. 
noun implied, Matt, xviii. 35, kdv fxt] 
dcprjTE EKacrTo<5 xco doEXcpijo, 6cc. John 
xvi. 32. Heb. viii. 11, al. So els e/cgo-tos, 
Acts ii. 6. In apposition with a plur. 
noun or pron. expressed, Lu. ii. 3, kiro- 

pEVOVTO irdvTE'S, EKaCTTCS £ts Tr/v, &c. 

Acts ii. 8. Eph. v. 33. 

'E/ca<7T0T£, adv. (t/cacTTos,) each 
time, always, continually, 2 Pet. i. 15, and 

Class. 

'E/caToi;, ol, al, to., num. adj. a hun- 
dred. Matt, xviii. 12. John xix. 39, al. 
Adverb, a hundred- fold. Matt. xiii. 8. 
Mk. iv. 8, al. 

'E/caToi/TttET?]?, OV, 6, Ti, adj. a 
hundred years old, Rom. iv. 19. 

'E/caToi/Ta7r\a (Ttajv, 01/05, 6, 17, 
adj. a hundredfold, Lu. viii. 8, Kapirov e. 
Matt. xix. 29. Mk. x. 30. Sept. & Class. 

'^Y.KaTovT dp^r]^, ov, & — os, ov, 6, 
[EKaTou, dpx(j^-,) <^ centurion. Matt. viii. 5, 
and oft. Sept. and Class. 

'E/c/SaWo), f. (iaXu), to throw from 
or out of, to cast out. I. gener. and with 
the idea of force employed, Matt. xv. 17, 
eI<s dcpEcpcova EKfBdXXETaL. Acts xxvii. 
38. :Matt. viii. 12. XXV. 30. Foil, by t^co 
with gen. of place. Matt. xxi. 39 ; some- 
times implied, Lu. xx. 12. John ix. 34. 
xii. 31. In the sense of to force, thrust 
out, Mk. ix. 47, i. tov 6(pdaX/x6v. to urge 
or drive out, Mk i. 12, to Yivzvixa avTov 
EK(3dXXEL Eh Trjv IpDfxov. John x. 4, 
7rp6(3aTa EK^dXr). Foil, by ek with gen. 
of place, either expr. John ii. 15. 3 John 
10. Lu. iv. 29. or impl. Lu. viii. 54. John 
vi. 37. xii. 31. Said of demons, to cast 
out, expel. Matt. vii. 22. Mk. vii. 26. xvi; 
9, et al. Metaph. in the sense to cast 
out, i. e. with scorn and reproach, reject as 
vile, Lu. \u. 22, oTav EK^dXcvcn to ov. 
vpcov 0)5 iTovnpov. Thus it is used by x^lian 
and Demosth. of rejected actors, and so 
EK^Xi]Td^,vile. — II. SPEC, the idea of force 
being dropped, to 7'emove, draw- foiih. 
Matt. \\\. 4, £h'/3. TO Kapcpo^ dirb tov 
ocpd. In Matt. xii. 35, EK(3dXXEL tol 
dyadd, and Lu. x. 35, EK^aX(hv ova orj- 
vdpia, there is a signif proegnans, i. e. 
two senses are blended in the compound 
verb ; one suggested by the prep, the other 
expressed by the verb.* In the former case 
the full sense is, ' draws forth and utters 
(so Pindar, Pyth. ii. 148, ettos ek(BuXeIv,) 
in the latter, ' having drawn forth and put 
down,' as we should say disbursed. On 
the sense in Matt. xii. 20, see my note 
there. In Rev. xi. 2, Ttjv avXrjv — ek^oXe 
E^co, ' put it out of your measurement,"' 
do not include it in your measuring. 

''Ek: /3 a 0-15, £605, v, (l/c/^atT/to,) prop, a 
going out, egress, Hom. Od. v. 410. In 



EK B 



111 



EK A 



N. T. fig. of egress from life, ftuV, eml^ 
Pleb. xiii. 7, £. Tt]s dva<rTpo<pi~]^. Wisd. 
ii. 17. Also metaph. the issue of any 
thing, i. e. the result^ events 1 Cor. x. 18, 
iroiriCTEL^ crvv tco 'Treipacrjunv^ Kal ti]V ek- 
(SaaLv^ ' will guide the issue or result,' as 
Wisd, viii, 8, iK^dcrEL? Kaipuiv^ or ' will 
cause or bring about a way out of the 
temptation.' 

'EfCjSoX?;, ^9, 7/, (sK^aWw,) a casting 
out^ as of the lading of a ship, to lighten 
her, Acts xxvii. 18, k. ettolovvto, and 
Class. 

'E AC y a /xi' 5 o), f. to-tu, lit. to marry out, 
i- e. to give in marriage, 1 Cor. vii. 38. 
Pass. Matt. xxii. 30. xxiv. 38. Lu. xvii. 
27, to become a wife. The word only 
occurs elsewhere in the Greek Pandects. 

'E/cya/u i(r/ca>, same as eicyajULLX^oo. 
pass, in Lu. xx. 34, sq. Aristot. Polit. p. 22. 

"E/cyoi/o?, 01/, 6, T)-, adj. (i/vygyoi^a, 

2 perf. of EKyivo/iiaL,) prop. adj. sprung 
from^ born of, as often in Plato. Hence 
subst. a descendant of any kind, whether 
son or grandson. In N. T. in nevit. to. 
EKyova, descenda?its, espec. grmidchildreji, 
1 Tim. V. 4, TEKva t) 'iicyova. And so in 
Sept. and occas. Class. 

'E/c5a7rai/ato, f. ^co), to expend, (lit. 
spend .out, ) utterly consume, and pass, to 
he quite spent, utterly ecchausted, as said of 
the vital powers, 2 Cor. xii. 15, EKoaira- 
vi]driaofxaL virkp, &c. Polyb. xxv. 8, 4. 
xxi. 8, 9. XY\\. 11, 10. phys. as said of 
pecuniary resources. 

''EKdixo fJiai, f. ^ofxaL, prop, to receive 
any thing from any person. In N. T. in- 
ch oatively, to be ready to receive from any 
quarter, to receive by anticipation, ivait for, 
eoepect, John v. 3, i/c^. Ti-jv tov v6aT09 
KLV)]cnv. Acts xvii. 16. 1 Cor. xi. 33. xvi. 
11. Heb. xi. 10. Ja. v. 7. absol. Heb. x. 
13. 1 Pet. iii. 20, and Class. 

"Ek 017X09, ou, 6, ?7, adj. {ek, dijXo^,) 
quite plain, conspicuous, 2 Tim. iii. 9. 

3 Mace. vi. 5. Hom. II. v. 2. Pol. iii. 2, 6. 
'^k8it fJLEco, f. -naco, {EKOrifxo^,) prop. 

and in Class, to be absent from one's peo- 
ple or country, by travelling abroad. In 
N. T. gener. to be absent f-om any place 
or person, 2 Cor. v. 6, 8, ek^. ek tou aco/m. 

'Kk6 tSu) luLi, f. EKdwao), prop, to give 
out any thing, or to give up any person, 
espec. to place out in marriage, to give in 
marriage ; also to give out or let out any 
property, ^lian V. H. xiv. 15. In N. T. 
mid. EK^ihoixaL, to let out for one's own 
benefit, as aixmEXoiva, Matt. xxi. 33, 41. 
Mk. xii. 1. Lu. XX. 9. 

'EK(5iT}yfco/xat, f. ija-ofxai, to tell out, 
relate at large any narration, Acts xiii. 41. 
XV. 3. Sept. #os. Ant. xiii. 5, 7. Ecclus. 
xxxiii. 8. 



'EK(5tK£tt),f. r'/o-oo, (e/c^iko?,) gener. 'to 
execute right and justice.' 1) to do jus- 
tice to any one, by maintaining his right, 
Lu. xviii. 3, 5. Sept. in Ps. xxxvii. 28. 
1 Mace. vi. 22. xiii. 6. 2) to avenge, 
i. e. to take personal satisfaction, Rom. xii. 
19, yu»; EuvTov<5 ekS, So to take venge- 
ance on, to punish, as to alfxa, i. e, 
crime of bloodshed, airo tlucs. Rev. vi. 
10. xix. 2. So 2 Cor. x. 6, ekS. Trdcrav 
TrapuKcni/. So Sept. and later Class, and 
sometimes Engl, avenge. 

the execidion of right and justice, viz. I. 
avengement, in the sense of maintaining 
any one's right. So ttoleIv ekS. equiv. to 
ekolkeIv, to maintain one's right, defend 
one's ca?^se, foil, by gen. of pers. for whom, 
Lu. xviii. 7, 8 ; by dat. of pers, against 
whom. Acts vii. 24,' and Sept. — II. venge- 
ance, penal retribution, Rom. xii. 19. Heb. 
X. 30, and Sept. In the sense of vin- 
dictive justice, punishment, Lu. xxi. 22, 
VfxipaL EKdiKriaia}?. 2 Cor. vii. 11. 2 Th. 
i. 8. 1 Pet. ii. 14, and Sept. 

"KkS LK09, ov, 6, 71, {ek, Slki],) prop. 
adj. execiding Hght and justice. Soph. (Ed. 
Col. 920 ; in N. T. a subst. retributor, 
avenger, punisher, Rom. xiii. 4. 1 Th. iv. 
6. Sept. and later Class. 

'E/c^tw/cu), f. ^60, {ek & (^ico/vO),) to 
drive out from a place, to chase off, to 
cause to flee away, Sept. and Class, Hence 
in N. T. byimpl. to purstLeys\\\\ malignity, 
to persecute, Lu. xi. 49. 1 Tli. ii. 15; in 
the latter of which passages the simple 
idea of persecution is intended : in the 
former, as appears from a comparison with 
Matt, xxiii. 34, sq. the various forms 
thereof, both active and passive, espec. the 
being chased from place to place by acts 
of persevering enmity, are intimated. 

"E/C0 0T0 9, ov, G, 77, adj. {ekolSco/ull,) 
delivered up, Acts ii. 23, tovtov e. Xa- 
/So'i/Tfis. So Jos. Ant. vi. 13, 9, ekcotov 
XajScov. In the later Class, ekBotov cov- 
vai or XafjL^. signifies to give up, or to 
receive, anyone to be treated at discretion. 
The earlier writers have ekootov ttolelv. 

'Ek SoxVi V^i V-i {EKOExo^aL,) a icaiting 
for, expectation, Heb, x, 27. 

'Ekou'co, f. vaoo, prim, intrans. to go 
or come out of, Hom. Od. xxii. 334, ek- 
ous fXEy dpoLO. Eur. Iph. Taur. 602, ek^. 
kukCov. Hence trans, to cause to come oid 
of, as in the putting off of armour or 
clothes, to unclothe, IMatt. xxvii. 31, and 
Mk. XV. 20, E^iovuav avTOv T7]v 7rop<pv- 
pav, 'stripped him as to his clothes.' Horn. 
Od. xiv. 341. /Eschyl, Ag. 1342. With 
the acc, of person only. Matt, xxvii. 28. 
Lu. X. 30, and Sept. Mid. EKOvofxai, to 
put off one's clothes, 2 Cor. v. 4, ov ^i\o- 



EKE 



112 



EKK 



/J.EV iKSvaacrQaL^ scil. to c/ctj^o?, meaning 
the mortal body. So serpents are said 
s.KSueLv TO yTjpa^, when they have cast 
off their old skin. See Virg. ^n. ii. 473. 

'EksT, adv. of place. 1) of place 
where, tJiere^ in that place^ Matt. ii. 13. v. 
24. vi. 21. xii. 45, et al. By Hebr. joined 
with birov, as birov ek&I^ icliere^ Mk. vi. 
55. Rev. xii. 6, 14, and Sept. 2) by at- 
traction, of place whither, thitlier^ to that 
place^ after verbs of motion, instead of 
«fC£T(r£, Matt. ii. 22. Mk. vi. 33, et al, 
Sept. and Class. 

'E/cEtOfii/, adv. thence^ from that place, 
Matt. iv. 21, 7rpo/3a§ £K:£l0£t;, and v. 26. ix. 
9, et al. So oi s.K&ldEu, those from the?ice, 
' those who belong there,' as Eurip. Hec. 
719. Sept. and Class. 

'EkeIuo^^ ij, o, pron. demonstr. {skel, 
lit. 'that one there,' plur. ' those there,') 
equiv. to our emphatic he, she, or it. When 
put in antithesis, it usually refers to the 
person or thing more remote or absent, or 
otherwise to the next preceding, which it 
thus renders more definite and emphatic. 
I. in antitliesis, and referring to the more 
remote subject, c. gr. with outo?, Lu. 
xviii. 14. Ja. iv. 15; or gener. Matt. xiii. 11. 
Mk. xvi. 20, et al. ssepe, and Class. — II. 
witliout antithesis, referring to tlie pers. or 
thing immediately preceding, or just men- 
tioned, i) gener. Matt. xvii. 27. Acts iii. 
13. Mk. iii. 21, and oft. and Class. 2) 
emphatic, like the Engl, that, Mk. vii. 15. 
John i. 18. V. 11. ix. 37. x. 1. xii. 48, et 
al. and in the case of persons well known 
or celebrated. 

'EK:£t(r£, adv. [ekeT,) prop, thither, to 
that place. In N. T. by attraction, for 
£«:£T, there, Acts xxi. 3. xxii. 5. Sept. & 
later writers. 

'E«:^i]T£6t), f. riao}, prop, to seek 02it, in 
order to find, any thing or person lost. 
Sept. and Class. In N. T. 1) to inquire 
diligentlii, scrutinize, 1 Pet.i. 10, ekX,- ttepl 
Ttj/09, parallel with k^EpEvvdco, Sept. 2) 
to seek after any thing, i. e. endeavour to 
gain, Heb. xii. 17, fiETo. daKpvcov e. av- 
n-f]u, and Sept. By Hebr. to require, de- 
mand, e. gr. £K^. TO aTixd tlvo's clttg 
TLvcs, ' to avenge or punish the crime of 
any one's blood,' Lu. xi. 50, sq. ; and Sept. 
in'Ezek. lii. 18, 20. 2 Sam. iv. 11. Gen. 
ix. 5. 3) from the Hebr. ek'(^i]teTv tov 
Qeou, to seeh out God, i. e. 'to seek to 
know his will, vAxh a full determination 
to follow and obey it,' Acts xv. 17. Rom. 
iii. 11. Heb. xi. 6, and Sept. often. 

'E/<:6a,a/3£a), f. ricroa, (£K"6a,u/3o5,) ge- 
ner. to utterly amaze, quite astonish, Job 
xxxiii. 7, Aq. Ecclus. xxx. 9. In N. T. | 
pass, to he greatly astonisfied, whether : 
from admiration, Mk. ix. 15, or terror, i 



Mk. xvi. 5, sq. or perturbation, Mk. xiv. 
33. 

^'E/cOa /x/3o9, ov, 6, 17, adj. (e/c, ^dfx- 
/3o9,) quite astonished., Acts iii. 11. Polyb. 
XX. 10, 9, and Sept. 

''E/<:0£Tos, ov, 6, 17, adj. (fi/cTiOij/xt,) 
prop, put away, cast aside ; but used 
espec. of an infant, in the sense exposed 
or abandoned. So Acts vii. 19, ttolelv 
£K0£Ta rra (3pE(pii. The verb £«:Tt6t]/xt is 
freq. in the Class, in this sense. 

'E/cK-aGai/Ow, f. apu), to purge out^^ 
cleanse thoroughly, prop, as furniture or 
utensils, Xen. Anab. i. 2^ 16. Dent. xxvi. 13. 
In X. T. metaph. with acc. of pers. ekk. 
kavTov airo TLuoy, 2 Tim. ii. 21. Plato 
Euth. p. 3, v/j.d'S EKKadaipEL tous toov 
VEitiv Ta§ (BXaa-Ta's SLacpdELpovTa^. Xen. 
Conv. 1, 4, dvdpdcnv EKKSKadapfXEvoL^ 
Ta§ \l/uxd?' With acc. of thing, to cleanse 
out, i. e. put away, I Cor. v. 7, £. tiji/ ira- 
Xaidv Juuiji/. Dinarch. c. Aristog. p. 67, 
EKK. 'Ti)V SripodoKLai'. 

''EKKaio), f. Kavaco, to cause to hum, or 
flame out, to hindle, Hdot. iv. 134, and 
Sept. In X. T. pass, or mid. to hum or 
flame out, metaph. ev opi^EL, Rom. i. 27; 
of passion oft. in Sept. and Class. 

'E /c/v:a/C£ w, f. vau}, {ek, kukos,) prop. 
to give ivay, despond, lose courage under 
danger, as a soldier who abandons his 
post : but in X. T. gener. to despo/id, lose 
courctge imder trials and difficulties, Eph. 
iii. 13, airoviJLaL jui] EKKaKEiv kv Tats 
^XlxI/ectl fxov virkp v/ulcou. 2 Cor. iv, 1, 
16, and also to give tuay under labours, and 
gener. to he remiss or careless in the dis- 
charge of any duty, Lu. xviii. 1, nrtLvroTE 
Trpo(TEvxE(rdaL, kul /mi] ekkukeIv. Gal. vi. 

9, TO <j€ KaXoV TTOLOVVTE^ fxi] kKKUKM- 

fxEv. 2 Thess. iii. 13. Polyb. iv. 19, 10. 

'Ekkevt ECO, f. ijaw, {kK intens. & kei/- 
TEU),) prop, to quite pierce the surface of 
any body, to troMsfijc, John xix. 37, oxl/ov- 
TUL EL'S ov k^EKEVTi](Tav. Rcv, i. 7, and 
Sept. and later Gr. writers. The earlier 
writers use the simple kevteco. 

'E/c/cXaco, f. daco, to break off., as a 
branch, Rom. xi. 17, 19, 20, k^EKkdcrQri- 
aav. Lev. i. 17. Plato Pol. x. 611, D. 

'E.K k\e LO), f. ELo-co, prop. to shut any 
one out, as of a house, or a city. In X. T. 
fig. to ea elude from intercourse with any 
one; foil, by acc. Gal. i^-. 17, EKKXElarai 
v/iid'i ^eXovctl. Pass, to he excluded.^ hive 
no place, Rom. iii. 27, £^£/v\£t(T6ij 17 /cau- 

'E/ckXi; o- 1 a, as, 77, (£/c/cXi]tos, fr. ek- 

KaXiw,) a convocation. This word is used in 
X. T. in two ways : 1. in the Classical 
SENSE, and 1) of an assembly of the people., 
either lawfully called out byihe civil magis- 
trate, Acts xix. 39, & Class, writers, or of a 



EKK 



113 



EK A 



tumultuary assembly, not legal, Acts xix. 
32, 40. 2) in the Jewish sense, a conpre- 
gatio?i^ or assembly of the people, as often 
in Sept.; espec. for public worship in a 
synagogue, Matt, xviii. 17, or gener. of 
the whole people. Acts vii. 38, yev6/j.euo9 
kv T\] EKK\)]a-La kv tij kpyi/uLco. Heb. ii. 12. 
1 Mace. ii. 56. iv. 59. Ecclus. xiii. 20. — 

11. IN THE Christian sense, a?i assem- 
hly or society of faithful Christian persons, 
called out of the world at large by the 
\vord of God, and given, out of the world, 
by God unto Christ, (see John xvii. 6 & 
14,) that they may be sanctified through 
the truth of God, ' whose w^ord is truth,' 
John xvii. 17. — i. the U7iiversal and visible 
Churchy militant here on earth, i. e. the 
whole society of Christians dispersed 
throughout the world, Matt. xvi. 18. 
1 Cor. vi. 4. x. 32. xi. 22. xii. 28. Col. 
i. 18, 24. Eph. i. 22. v. 23, 25, 27. 
— II. the universal Church triumphant 
and glorified, Eph. v. 27. Comp. Heb. xii. 
23.— III. a particular Churchy though 
composed of several congregations, as the 
Church in Jerusalem, Antioch, Corinth, 
Galatia, Thessalonica, &c. Acts viii. 1. xi. 
22. 1 Cor. i. 2. Col. iv. 16. Rev. i. 4, 11, 
20. ii. 1, 18, et al. — iv. a particular or 
single congregation of Christians, or those 
believers who were wont to assemble in 
any particular house for Divine worship, 
Rom. xvi. 5. 1 Cor. xvi. 19. Col. iv. 15. 
Philem. 2, and in the plur. Acts xiv. 23. 
xvi. 5. 1 Cor. xi. 16. xiv. 34. xv. 9. xvi. 

1, 19. 1 Th. ii. 14. Gal. i.2 v. the place 

"where such congregation is assembled, 
Acts xi. 26. 1 Cor. xi. 18, 22. 

'E/c/cA-I'i/o), f. prop, to hend any 
thing out of the straight course, trans, and 
also to bend from any course, Mai. ii. 8, 
k^sKXhaTB eK t^s oSov. In N. T. me- 
taph. of turning aside and swerving from 
the straight road of piety and virtue, Rom. 
iii. 12, irdvTs^ k^iKXivav. So Sept. 
Numb. xxii. 23. Job xxxiv. 27. Also of 
turning aside from by avoiding any person 
or thing, to shun^ Rom. xvi. 17, t/c/cX. «7r' 
avTwv. 1 Pet. iii. 11, kKKKivaTco airo 
KUKov. So Ps. xxxvii. 27, 'IkkKlvov airo 
KUKov, and Prov. iii. 7. 

'E/cKoXu/i/Sao), f. 77crci), to swim out 
or o^, as from a sinking vessel to land, 
Acts xxvii. 42. Dion. Hal. iv. 24, ekk. 
Ti]i/ yrjv. Thuc. iv. 25, aTroKoX. absol. as 
here. 

'E/c/co/xt Jto, f. iVct), to carry out or 
forth, as a dead body for burial, Lu. vii. 

12, and oft. in Class. 

'E/CKOTTTO), f. 1 ) prop. ^0 cw^ as 
a branch, Rom. xi. 24, et al., or a limb. 
Matt. V. 30, Tt/i; Ss^idu. xviii. 8. Also, 
to cut doivn, as said of a tree, Matt. iii. 10. 
vii. 19. Lu. iii. 9. xiii. 7, 9, and Class. 



2) metaph. to cut off an occasion, by re- 
moving it, 2 Cor. xi. 12. So Hierocl. i. 
acfiopina^ : also to A2/2<ier, render ineffectual, 
1 Pet. iii. 7, to /ni] E/cKOTTTEaGai tocs 
7rf)oo'£U)(as v/ulu)V. 

'^KKpifxafxai, mid. form intrans. of 
kKKpefjLdvvvjmi, prop, to hang from^ by 
clinging hold o/nny thing, (as Lucian, t. ii. 
513, kKKpt(xavvvfXf.voL T(jov TTt^^aXiWi/,) or 
person, as Thuc. vii. 75, Tuyv ^vcKrivtov 
kKKpEfxavvufXEVOL. But it is often used 
fig. of that on which we depend, as hope, 
Slc. Also said of those who listen atten- 
tively to a person speaking, and are said 
to hang on him, i. e. on his lips. (So Pope, 
'And wond'ring senates hung on all he 
spoke,') and Virg. -^n. iv. 79, pendetque 
iterum narrantis ah ore. So Lu. xix. 48, 
o Xaos k^eKpkfxaTO avTov aKoucov. 

'E/cXaX£w, f. varoo, to speak out, dis- 
close, trans, with dat. of pers. Acts xxiii. 
22, iuLr}SevL kKXaXrjcrai, and Class. 

'E /c X « yd TT w, f. \l/(a, to shine out or forth, 
to be resplendent. Matt. xiii. 43, £/cXayu\//ou- 
<Tiv a)s 6 77X109, in allusion to Dan. xii. 3. 
The word occurs in the Class. 

''EiKXavddvu), f. Xva-oD, to make to 
quite forget, Hom. II. ii. 600. In N. T. 
mid. kKXavdavofiai, lit. to lose out of{kK) 
mind, to forget, Heb. xii. 5, EK-XtXijaOg, 
' have forgotten.' Jos. and Class. 

'E/cX£7<o, f. Xi^o), prop, to lay out, 
i. e. put aside certain persons or things out 
of 2. larger number proposed or offered, to 
choose out, whether for others or oneself, 
Joseph. Bell. ii. 8, 6. Xen. Hist. i. 6, 13. 
Plato 536, C. 458, C. et al. In N. T. 
only mid. kKXiyop.ai, to choose out FOR 
ONESELF, and gener. to choose or select any 
thing or person, I. GENER. and 1) of 
things, Lu. x. 42, Tr\v dyaOijv /uLEpida 
k^EXi^aro. xiv. 7. 1 Cor. i. 27, sq. Sept. 
and Class. 2) of persons, foil, by ace. 
simply, John vi. 70. xv. 16. Acts i. 2,24. 
vi. 5. XV. 22, 25, et al. Ja. ii. 5. Sept. and 
Class. Foil, by ek with gen. John xv. 
19, or d'TTo with gen. Lu. vi. 13. — II. spec. 
and by impl. to choose out for special privi- 
leges, &c. with the accessory idea of favour 
or love, Mk. xiii. 20. John xiii. 18. Acts 
xiii. 17. Eph. i. 4, and Sept. 

'E/cXstTTw, f. xf/u), prop. & in Class, to 
leave out or omit any person or thing from 
any number ; also to leave offanj action or 
practice ; but in N. T. and sometimes in 
Class, intrans. to leave off, cease, or fail, 
as said of any commenced action, or 
course of action, Lu. xxii. 32, rj Tr/o-Ti?, 
' to fail.' Heb. i. 12, ett}, ' to fail.' Sept. 
& Class. By impl. ' to cease to live,"* i. e. to 
die, Lu. xvi. 9. Joseph. Bell. iv. 1, 9. 
Apollod. iii. 4, 3, and Sept. In the Class. 
/Si'ov or TO ^rjif is generally added ; yet in 
Plato it often occurs without addition. 



EK A 



1 



14 



EKn 



'E/cXf/CTos,^, 01/, adj. (EwrXtysaOat,) 
cJiose?i^ elect ; 1) of things, select^ choice^ ex- 
cellent^ 1 Pet. ii. 4, 6, \t6os £. 2) of persons, 
chosen^ distinguished^ 1 Pet. ii. 9, ysVos £. 
1 Tim. V. 21 , tCov £. ayyiXuiv. See my note. 
3) by impl. chosen^ with the accessory idea 
of favour, love, &c. beloved^ Lu. xxiii. 35, 
6 Xpicrros 6 toG GeoD I. Rom. xvi. 13. 
Sept. in Is. xlii. 1. Ps. cv. 6. 1 Chron. 
xvi. 13. Hence the expression ol ekX&k- 
Tot, the elects ' those chosen by God unto 
salvation, or to peculiar pri%'ileges and 
blessings, as members of the kingdom of 
heaven : and accordingly those enjoying 
his favour, and leading a holy life in com- 
munion with Him ' true and faithful 
Christians.' Comp. Rev. xvii. 14, ol /c/Vij- 
Tot Kal sKXaKroL kul ttlcttol^ where there 
is an allusion to chosen men picked out for 
soldiers, as oft. in Sept. ; e. gr. Judg. xx. 
16, 34. 1 Sam. xxiv. 3. xxvi. 2, et al. 
So Clemens, 1 Cor. § 2, ' Ye contended 
day and night for the whole brotherhood,' 
£ts TO o-6o^£a6at /U£t' kXeov^ Kal ctuvel- 
o^cfcos TOi/ dpidfxov Twv eKXsKTcov av- 
Tov. And in the Martyrdom of Polycarp, 
§ 16, we have twv ekXektwv opp. to twv 
diTLaTtov, the unbelie^^ng heathen.' In 
' this sense ol knXtKrol tov Qeov occurs in 
Matt. xxiv. 31. Mk. xiii. 27. Lu. xviii. 
7. Rom. viii. 33. Col. iii. 12. Tit. i. 1, 
and Avithout 6£oO, Matt. xx. 16. xxii. 14. 
xxiv. 22, 24. Mk. xiii. 20, 22. 2 Tim. ii. 10. 

'E/cXoy?';, ^s, 77, {eKXiyco,) election^ 
selection^ I. gener. Acts ix. 15, ctkevo^ 
i/cXoy^?, i. e. a chosen vessel. Class. — II. 
spec, in the sense election, i. e. the bene- 
volent purpose of God, whereby any are 
chosen unto salvation, so that they are led 
to embrace and persevere in the Gospel, 
to the enjoyments of its privileges and 
blessings both here and hereafter, Rom. 
xi. 5, KUT sKXoyi}v x^P'-^^'^i ("^liere see 
my note,) 1 Thess. i. 4. 2 Pet. i. 10. By 
meton. of abstract for concrete, equiv. to 
ol ekXektol, Rom. xi. 7. — III. by impl. 
free choice^ free icill^ Rom. ix. 11, n kut' 
EKXoyi]u 7roo'6£o-i5, i. e. ' the free spon- 
taneous purpose of God,' uninfluenced by 
external motives, Joseph. Bell. ii. 8, 14, 
£7r' avdpwTTuiV EKXayy to ts KaXou Kal 
TO KuKou irpoKElTaL. Psalt. Salom. ix. 7, 
TO. epya v/mcov h EKXoyy Kai i^ova-ia 
Tfjs xj/yxv"^ V}xoov. 

'E/cXJ'a), f. ucro), prop, and trans, to 
loosen or disengage from any thing which 
binds or holds fast, either animcds (as 
horses, Horn. Od. iv. 35,) or men^ as 
Xenoph< ; also metaph. to set free from any 
thing that shackles the mind, as captivity^ 
or adversity^ (see Gray's Ode to Ad- 
versity,) also to quite loosen the strength, 
(lit. that which stringeth up a man,) 
Polyb. xvi. 6, 12. Diod. Sic. xiii. 77, et al. 



See Foesii (Econ. Hippocr. In N. T. 
pass. £/c\uo/xai, to he wearied out^ tiMerly 
exhausted^ as said of the body. Matt. ix. 
36 ; to he iceary^ Gal. vi. 9, jur/ bkXvo/xsvol, 
with allusion to reapers, tired out^ and so 
Sept. Also as said of the mind, to faint^ 
despond^ Heb. xii. 3, y^vyaX^ vficoif IkXu- 
ofxavoL, and Class. 

'E/c^atra-w, f. Jo), to wipe out, or 
wipe dry, Lu. vii. 38, 44. John xi. 2. 
xii. 3. xiii. 5, and later Class. The earlier 
ones have k^oixopyvvfxi. 

'^KUV KTTj p i^CO, f. iCO), (fi/C, jUUKT^O,) 

lit. to turn zip the nose at, to utterly deride, 
scoff at, Lu. xvi. 14. xxiii. 35. Sept. 

'EACi/£uco, f. fucro), to hend the head 
aside (l/c) or away, to avoid a blow. 
Hence, to turn aside out of the ivay. So 
Plut. t. ii. p. 577, B, kKVEvaa^ t^s b^ov. 
Hence in N. T. to turn aside or away, 
John V. 13, k^ivEVCEV, oyXov ovto^ evtco 
to'ttw, at least, as most Exp6sitors under- 
stand ; but the best interpreters are, with 
reason, agi^eed that the word is to be 
derived from kKviuo, to sicim off or away, 
as in Thuc. ii. 90, though that term also, 
like the Latin enatare, signifies fig. to glide 
off unohservedly , a sense far more agreeable 
to the context. 

'E/ci/7j9 6o, f. y\foy, prop, to hecome soher 
from (ek) being drunken, as often in later 
Class. In N. T. metaph. to aicahen or 
ro2ise up, i.e. from a state of ignorance and 
mental delusion, by returning, through 
sincere repentance, to a right mind, 1 Cor. 
XV. 34, kKV7]\!/aTE ciKaLO)^. So also, in 
the same spiritual sense, Joel i. 5, EKvn- 
ij/aTE ol fjLEdvovTE^, and Ps. Ixxviii. 65. 
Sept. 

'E/couctos, ov, 6, 77, adj. {ekoov,) will- 
ing, vohmtary, Philem. 14, kuto. ekovctlov^ 
adv. phrase for the adv. EKovcrio)^, Nehem. 
XV. 3. Xen. Mem. ii. 1, 18. 

*E /CO f (7 i 60 §, adv. {EKov(TLo^,)ivillingly^ 
voluntarily, Heb. x. 26. I Pet. v. 2. Sept. 
and Class. 

"EKiraXaL, adv. of old, long since, 
2 Pet. ii. 3. iii. 5, and later Class. 

'E/CTTE t/oa'^o), f. ao-o), lit. to try out, 
put to the utmost test by temptation. Matt, 
iv. 7. Lu. iv. 12. X. 2o. I Cor. x. 9. Sept. 

'E/cTTE/xTTO), f. ^60, to scnd out or 
forth, Acts xiii. 4. xvii. 10. Sept. & Class. 

'^KTrETavvv fjLL, f. aVct), to spread out^ 
stretch forth the hands, as in supplicatioD, 
Rom. X. 21. Sept. and later Class. 

'E/c7r7]^aw, f. 77(760, to leap, rush forth, 
intrans. Acts xiv. 14, k^ETniSi^crau £ts tou 
oxXov, in many MSS., Versions, and later 
Edd. for text, recept. £to-£7r. See my note 
there. 

'E/ctti'tttco, f. TTEcrov/jLaL, to fall from. 



E K n 



1 



15 



EKT 



i. e. out of or off, intrans. T. prop, as 
said of things which fall from or out of 
their place, as the stars from heaven, Mk. 
xiii. 25, and Class. ; chains from off a 
prisoner, Acts xii. 7 ; or as said of a boat 
falling from a ship down into the sea. 
Acts xxvii. 32 ; of flowers falling aivay^ 
Ja. i. 11. 1 Pet. i. 24; said of a ship, to 
fall (i. e. be driven) out of its course ; 
usually foil, by £i§ with acc. of place, to 
he driven 2ipon^ Acts xxvii. 17, cpo^. fx^i 
ii<s Ti]v YvpTLv kKiri(Toi(jL. So Diod. Sic. 

ii. 60, TO 'wXoLapLOV fiK-TTECrtll/ £t9 tt/U- 

fxov<s, and elsewh. in Class. Also fig. foil, 
by gen. to fall from any state or condition, 
by abandoning one's part or interest in it. 
Gal. v. 4, E/cTT. T7}5 X(^P'-^^'^-> fi^^^ aivay 
from^ namely, by apostasy. See Lu. viii. 
13. And so 2 Pet. iii. 17, e/ctt. tov ^lowv 
<7T7i pLyfxou. Rev. ii. 5, Trodsu kKTriirrco- 
Ka9. — II. METAPH. to fall to the ground^ 
fdil^ become ineffectual^ Rom. ix. 6, 6 
Ao'yos Tov Beou. And so Pind. Pyth. vi. 
37, x«/'>'-«t7r£T£§ fcVos, and Pint. vi. 140, 
\6yo<s VTri]viixL0'5 sKTrLTTTcou. Plato p. 13, 
D, 6 Xoyos v/Jiiu eKiraaoDu oix'n^^^'TaL. 

'E/c7rX.£ to, f. sva-ofxaL, to sail front ot 
out of a port, foil, by £t§ with acc. of 
place* Acts xv. 39. xviii. 18 ; by ccTro with 
gen. of place, xx. 6. Class. 

'E/v-ttXtz/o o o), f. wo-co, prop, to Jill out 
or up^ i. e. fully complete any number or 
measure. In N. T. metaph. to fulfil^ as a 
promise, Acts xiii. 32. Polyb. i. 67, 1. 

'E/cTrXrjpwo-ts, ews, ?7, prop, as in 
Class, a fulfilling or completing of any 
thing. In N. T. said of time, fulfilment^ 
Acts xxi. 26, oiayyiWujv tiiv ektv. tlov 
rj/xEpwu T. a. 'announcing the fulfilment, 
or full observance, of the days of purifi- 
cation,' i. e. that he was about to fully 
keep them. So tKirXripouj in Diod. Sic. 
ii. 57. 

'EKirX^cra-u}^ f. Jw, prop, to strike ojf 
i. e. to strike off any one by a blow, as in 
Theophr. ap. Steph. Thes, ; but elsewhere 
only in a fig. sense, to strike any one out 
of his self-possession, by exciting terror, 
astonishment, admiration. So Thuc. ii. 
87, (f)6(3o9 yap p.vrilJi.r\v sKTrXvac-EL. The 
word sometimes occurs in the act. but 
gener. in the pass, to be, as we say striwk 
with astonishment and admiration. And 
so often in N. T. either absol. or foil, by 
€7rt with dat. Matt. xix. 25. Mk. x. 26, 
and oft. 

'E/cTTi/EOj, f. €ucrw, prop, to breathe out 
or forth, emit the breath, i^vxv^ being 
underst. which is eccpressed in Eurip. Orest. 
1163; but it gener. signifies to breathe 
cut the last breath, to ejcpire, Mk. xv. 37, 
39. Lu. xxiii. 46, and often in Class. 

'^KiropEvofxai^i. Evaoiiai, to go out 



of to go or come forth, and used in N. T. 

I. of PERSONS, foil, by tK or aTco with 
gen. of place whence, Mk. x. 46. xiii. 1, 
or 'jrapa with gen. of pers. from ichom, 
John XV. 26 ; also foil, by £ts, kirl, or 
TTpo^ with acc. of place ivhither, Mk. x. 
17. John V. 29, et al. and Class. So in 
the phrase i.icnTopf.vop.a.L kul EKirop. 
meaning ' to perform one's daily duty.' — 

II. of THINGS, to go forth, jyroceed out of, 
foil, by EK or ccTrd with gen. of pers. or 
thing, as Matt, xv. 11, 18. Mk. vii. 20, sq. 
et al. ; by £ts with acc. of 2ilace ivhither, 
Lu. iv. 37. Mk. vii. 19. 

'^KiropvEv (x3, f. Evar(x), to practise for- 
nication, be given up to leicdness, Jude 7. 
Sept. 

'Eactttu'w, f. uVco, prop, to spit out of 
the mouth, as Hom. Od. v. 322, o-TOfxaTo^ 

E^iiTTvcrEv dXjJi^v TliKpriv : but in N. T. 
metaph. to reject tcith disgust or scorn, 
respuere. Gal. iv. 14, tov rrrELpaa/uLou /xov 

TOV EV Ty aapKL fXOU OVK E^ElTTVaaTE, 

'F.Kp lX,6 (JO, f. 0)0-0), to 2iproot, as trees, 
Lu. xvii. 6. Jude 12, or plants, Matt. xiii. 
29. XV. 13, and Sept. 

"E/ccTT ao- 1 5, Eco<3, ?7, (fi^tcrTtj/Ai,) prop. 
a removal of any thing out of any former 
place or situation to anotlier, (so Pint. ix. 
727, 728,) but in N. T. (and almost always 
in Class. ) it is used I. metaph. of mental 
state, removal, i. e. from an ordinary to an 
extraordinary one, prop, the ecs^«5?/ of mental 
alienation, as in Hippocr., Pint. vi. 136, 
and Artemid. ii. 37, but gener. in a milder 
sense of the excited state of mind arising 
from any strong emotion, whether wonder^ 
Mk. V. 42. Lu. V, 26. Acts iii. 10, oi terror, 
Mk. xvi. 8. Sept. & Class. — II. A trance, 
or a state in which the soul is unconscious 
of present objects, being carried out of 
itself, and rapt into visions of distant or 
future things; a state wherein is revealed 
something in a peculiar manner, as to the 
prophets or apostles, Acts x. 10. xi. 5. 
xxii. 17. Comp. 2 Cor. xii. 2, sq. Ez. i. 1. 

'E/ca-Tp£0o), f. \|ao), prop, to turn any 
tJdng inside oid, as an old garment. See 
Aristoph. Plut. 721. Also metaph. to 
totally change any thing, as one's conduct, 
and gener. by impl. for the better; (so 
Aristoph. Nub. 88, EKcrTpEd/ov tou? crav- 
Tov TpoTTov?,) but sometimes for the 
worse. Hence to utterly pervert, and in 
pass. Tit. iii. 11, £i5o)§ otl E^iaTpuTTTaL, 
to be utterly perverted or turned out of the 
right course, Deut. xxxii. 20. So adv. 
E^EcTTpafXfxivui's, 'more eorum quae £^£- 
(TTpaTTTaL, inversa sunt,' H. Steph. and 
EKcrTpocpfj TOV Xoyou, ^ the destruction of 
reason,' Plut. x. 422, 5. 

'EKTapao-croj, f. ^to, 1) prop, to stir 
up any liquid from the bottom, as water in 
a pool. See John v. 4, 7. 2) fig. to per- 



EKT 



116 



EK$ 



turh^ greatly agitate^ as said of persons, 
Acts xvi. 20, £. Trji/ ttoXlv. So Andoc. 
de Myst. tijv iroKiv '6\ii]v e.Krupd^a?. 
Pint. Coriol. t6u drjfxov EKTapdaaeLv 
Tols ciifxuy coy el's. 

'E/cT£ti;6o, f. gyai, to stretch Old, as any 
member of the body, espec. the hand. So 
often in X. T. both gener. and partic. for 
healing or aiding, and sometimes simply 
in the way of entreaty, John xxi. 18; or 
to point out any object, Matt. xii. 49 In 

Lu. xxi. 53, OVK e^ET&LUaTE TCCS x^^P^^ 

£7r' £/x£, it signif. to lay hands upon^ for 
apprehension, as sometimes in Sept., and 
so in 1 Mace. xii. 39, 42. It is equiv. to 
ETril^dXXsLu rds Acts xii. 1. 

Also of an anchor, to let go^ to stretch out^ 
Acts xxvii. 30. 

'F,kteXe(x}^ f. £ora), to finish off^ com- 
plete^ Lu. xiv. 29, sq. fxi] iaxvouro^ ekte- 
Xiaai^ scil. tou irvpyov. 

'Ekteve La^ a?, 77, (ektelvu)^) 1) prop. 
extension^ Hdian. xii. 2, 8. 2) fig. intense- 
ness., assiduity. Acts xxvi. 7, eu ekt. wliich 
is adv. phrase for adv. ektevco^, i7itently^ 
assiduously., 2 Mace. xiv. 38. Phal. Ep. 68. 

'E/CT£y)j9, £09, 6, 77, adj. {ektelvu}.,) 
1) prop, of things stretched out., ejciended. 
as a rope at full tension ; or gener. length- 
ened. 2) fig. of persons, intent upon., at- 
tentive to, diligent in. So Anom. ap. 
Suid. arvvaycovLCTTy'i^ L and later Gr. 
writers, as Polyb. and Hdian. In N. T. 
as said of things., actions and dispositions, 
persevering., earnest, fervent, Acts xii. 5, 
irpoaEVxi] ekt. 1 Pet. iv. 8, dy. k. Lu. 
XX. 44, EKTEVEo-Tspov, Said of prayer. 

'E/cT £1/609, adv. {ektevi)^.,) assidue., 
perseveringly., earnestly., 1 Pet. i. 22, dya- 
7r77(raT£ k. Sept. and later Gr. writers. 

'E/CTtGi^/xt, f. £/c0?7cra), I. act. exponere., 
to place out., or put forth., 1 ) as said of an 
infant, to expose.^ that it may perish, Acts 
vii. 21, kKTEdkvTa dk auToi/, and so later 
Class. — II. mid. EKTidE/uLaL, to set forth, 
declare. Acts xi. 4, expound, instruct in. 
Acts xviiiv 26, £. 'ti]v tov Qeou bdov, 
Sept. Jos. Ant. ii. 13, 2. i. 12, 7, 'irdvTa 
TOV Xoyov kK^ricrofxaL, and later Class. 

''EiKnrLvd(T(T(jo, f. fco, to shake out or 
o/f of any thing, as dust from one's shoes, 
Matt. X. 14. Acts xiii. 51, or one's clothes, 
Mk. vi. 11. Acts xviii. 6. 

"E AC TO 9, 77, ou, ordin. numer. (e^,) the 
sixih, as said of the sixth hour of the day, 
1. e. according to the Jewish reckoning, 
noon, Matt. xx. 5, and oft. also Sept. and 
Class. 

'E/CT0 9, adv. {ek,) out of, withoid, as 
opposed to within, Horn. Od. xv. 11. 
Emip. Iph. Aul. 1117, X^P^'- ^' T. 
it is used, I. prop, of place, with the art. 



TO £/cT09, the outside of any thing, Matt, 
xxiii. 26, TO £. avTu)v. So xd fAcrds 
occurs in the Class. ; but not to ekt6<s. 
As a prep, with gen. out of, 2 Cor. xii. 2, 
3, £. TOV (TcofjiaTo?, and metaph. 1 Cor. vi. 
18, irdv djudpTfjima ekto? tov adjfxaTO'i 
k(TTLv, i. e. ' does as it were not pertain to 
the body, is, strictly speaking, not phy- 
sical.' — II. FIG. icithout, ii e. except, be- 
sides, as prep, with gen. x\cts xxvi. 22, 
ovoEv £/cT09 Xkywv (jov, &c. 1 Cor. XV. 
27. Sept. and Class. By pleonasm pre- 
fixed to e'l jULt), as EKTO^ EL fxi], ivithout^ 
iLTiless, except, 1 Cor. xiv. 5, £k:to9 el fxt] 
cLEp/uLt]VEvri. XV. 2. 1 Tim. v. 19, and 
sometimes in Lucian and Plutarch, 

''EKTpEirtt), f. xp^o), to turn anything 
or person 02et of a course, &c. So Thuc. 
V. 65, TO voiap k^ETpETTE i dlso ill mid. 
EKTpE'TTOf.LaL, to tum omsclf aivay from 
any way or course, to turn aside from it, 
gener. foil, by T779 boov, or e^u) T7]S odov, 
but sometimes absoL, as in Xen. Anab. iv. 
5, 15. Hence in N. T. mid. metaph. to 
turn away from, I. from the right course, 
as said of those who abandon truth and 
virtue, and embrace error and vice, 1 Tim. 
i. 6, k'^ETpdiTr\(xav el^ [xaT aLoXoyiav. So 
Polyb. vi. 4, 9, EKTpiTTEadaL Eh oXLyap- 
X}av, Foil, by kirl, 2 Tim, iv. 4, k. kirl 
Tov<s jULvdov9 : by ottlctu), 1 Tim. v. 15. 
Absol. in Heb. xii. 13, Xva fxr] to xwXov 
kKTpuTT^, where see my note. — II. foil, 
by acc. of pers. or thing, to turn aivay 
from, avoid, 1 Tim. vi. 20, k. rds (iEjSri- 
Xovs KEvo(p(x}VLa9, and Class. 

'^KTpE(pu), f. kKdolxl/u), to nourish 
from infancy to maturity, biding up to 
maturity ; prop, said of the nurture of 
children, as in Class, and Sept. but also 
including the educcUi?ig of them, espec. by 
instruction in letters, Eph. vi. 4, EKTpi- 
cpETE avTa kv iraLOELa, &;c. Pol. i. 65, 
£. kv iraL^ELaL's Kai vofioL^. In Eph. v. 

29, EKT. Kai ^dXlTEL T7]V EUVTOV CTUpKU, 

it denotes gener. nourishing and cherish- 
ing. Comp. Ja. ii. 16. So also, but fig., 
Plut. vi. ll6, 12, kKTpkcpELV Kai av^ELV. 

"^KT pOJ p.a, aT0£, TO, {EKTLTpCoarKO), 

to cause or to suffer abortion ; lit. to ex- 
ceedingly pierce or ivound ; with allusion 
to the physical effect of abortion,) prop. 
an abortion, a child born prematurely. 
Occ. only in the later writers and the 
Sept. The Attic writers use d/x/SXco/xa. 
Occ. in N. T. fig. 1 Cor. xv. 8. And so 
in Ignat. Epist. ad Rom. and Simeon 
Styl. Ep. ad Basil. 

K<p Ep (X), f. k^oL(TU3, aor. \, k^rivEyKa, 
to bear or carry out, to bring forth. 1) 
prop, to bring out of a place, Lu. xv. 22, 

£. T1]V (TToXriV. Acts V. 15, €. TOV^ 

dadEVEl^, ' the sick out of their houses.' 
1 Tim. vi. 7, ovok k^EVEyKEiv tl cvvd- 



EK^> 



117 



E A A 



/xfOa, ' take away out of it/ Sept. and 
Class. ; to carry forth ^ as a dead body for 
burial. Acts v. 6, 9, 10, and Class. 2) 
said of the earth, to bring forth^ yields 
Heb. vi. 8, k. aKavda<5. Sept. and Class., 
and so Latin efferre. 

'E/c^tuyco, f. go/xat, to flee out of a 
place^ 1) intrans. Acts xix. 16, e. Ik n-ou 
oi'/cou. absoL xvi. 27. 2) trans, to flee from^ 
escape ; foil, by acc. of thing, Lu. xxi. 36, 
£. TavTa Trai/T-a, 'all these evils.' Rom. 
ii. 3, £. TO Kpi/ma rov Qsov. 2 Mace. vii. 
35, Kpiariv : with acc. impl. 1 Thess. v. 3, 
oi) fULi] sKipvycoarLV, Heb. ii. 3, ttws ij/xeis 
lKcf)Ev^6ij.Eda ; Sept. and Class. In 2 Cor. 
xi. 33, £. rds x^Tpd^ Tti/os, the sense is, 
to escape out of any one'' s power ^ as Susann. 
22. 2 Mace. vi. 2*6. It is, however, not 
Hellenistic, since it occurs in Horn. II. vi. 
57, [JiriTL<s vTrsKcpvyoL aiTrvv oXEdpov, 
XfijOas ^' v/uLETspa^. 

'E/c(/)o/3£a), f. jjCT-o), to frigliten any 
one out of his seiises^ i. e. to exceedingly 
terrify^ 2 Cor. x. 9. Sept. and Class. 

"EK(po(3o^^ ou, 6, 17, adj. frightened 
out of his senses^ qreatly terrified^ Mk. ix. 
6. Heb. xii. 21. Deut. ix. 19. 

'EK(f)V(jo^ f. ucrct), prop, to engender^ 
generate^ produce ; also to put forth^ as a 
branch does leaves, Matt. xxiv. 32. Mk. 
xiii. 28, oTav 6 kXccSo^ — Ta (pvXXa 
EK<puri^ subj. pres. others read EK(pv{], subj. 
of E^E(pvi]v^ a later form of aor. 2. for 
i^Ecpvv. Jos. Ant. ii. 3, 5, crTa^va^ 

'E/cx^w and 'E/c)(ut»a), f. ek'^evg-co, to 
pour out, I. PROP. Matt. ix. 17. Mk. ii. 22, 
6 olvo9 EKx^'^'TctL, 'is spilled,' Lu. v. 37. 
John ii. 15, e^exee to KEpfxa^ 'scattered 
upon the ground.' So of ashes and dust. 
Lev. iv. 12. xiv. 41. Actsi. 18, k^EX^^n Td 
arirXdyxva aurou. Comp. 2 Sam. xx. 10, 
£^€)^u6?] 7] KOiXia avi-ov. Note the phrase 
al/uLa gKXEO), to shed bloody to kill. Acts 
xxii. 20. Rom. iii. 15. Rev. xvi. 6, et al. 
and often in Sept. By meton. of the con- 
tainer for the contents, ekx- Td§ 0idXas, 
Rev. xvi. 1, seqq. — II. metaph. to pom- 
out , give largely, foil, by kv, Rom. v. 5, 77 
dydiry\ tov Qsov kKKEXV'^a.i kv Tats Kap- 
SLaL^ vjULcov : by £7rt with acc. of pers., as 
Ui/Ev^a, Acts ii. 17, 18. x. 45. Tit. iii. 6, 
and Sept. — III. fig. in pass, or mid. to be 
poured out, as in Engl, to pour forth, i. e. 
to rush tumultuously , Hom. Od. viii. 515. 
Plut. iii, 761, €. £15 T771/ ohov. In N. T. 
and later writers, it is used metaph. of an 
impulse or passion for any thing, to rush 
into, give oneself up to, Jude 11, k. T77 
'TrXdvy n-ov B. So Test. xii. Patr. p. 520, 
iropvEia, kv y k^ExuOr]v iyco, where the 
dat. is for accus. and Eh, Plut. Anton. 21, 
sh uKoXaaTov (3lov kKKEX^fxivo'S. 



'E/cxwptco, f. ri<TU},to depart out of a 
place, flee aivay, Lu. xxi. 21. Sept. and 
Class. 

'Ek\1jvx<^-, ^' ^ro"^, to breathe out ^ 
and gener. the breath of life, to eapire, Acts 
V. 5, 10. xii. 23, for Classic. d7ro\l/vx(^' 

'Ekcov, oua-a, 6v, adj. primarily a par- 
tic, of the old verb k'/cw, (whence the later 
one r]K(x), to come,) as our now obsolete 
adj., but formerly a particip. coming, i. e. 
forward, ready to come, ivilling, voluntary, 
Rom. viii. 20. I Cor. ix. 17. Sept. and 
Class. 

'EX at a, a§, 17, an olive-tree, as often in 
N. T. in the expression to opo^ nrCov 
kXaitov, Matt. xxi. 1, and oft. In Rom. 
xi. 17, 24. Rev. xi. 4, it is used symbol, 
and in Ja. iii. 12, it stands for the fruit, 
an olive, and so occurs in Class. 

"EXaiov, ov, TO, {kXaia,) olive-oil. In 
Judaea it was of various qualities, and put 
to various uses, as for lamps, Matt. xxv. 
3, 4, 8 ; for embrocating w^ounds, or 
anointing the sick, Mk. vi. 13. Lu. x. 34, 
Ja. V. 14; also mixed with spices, for 
anointing the head or body, Lu. vii. 46. 
In Heb. i. 9, sXaLOV dyaXXtdcTEcos de- 
notes the unction of the Spirit, anciently 
typified by oil; by which unction Jesus 
was appointed to the offices of prophet^ 
priest, and king, 2 Kings ix. 6. I Sam. x. 
I. See Glass, Phil. Sacr. p. 416 and 
1109. 

'EX at CUV, u)V09, 6, prop, an olive-yard, 
but in Acts i. 12, the name of the Mount 
of Olives. 

'EXdo-crtoi/, ovo^, 6, rj, adj. prop, a 
compar. of iXa^t's, ' little,' but, in use, a 
compar. of jxiKpo's, in the sense less, both 
prop, smcdler, and fig. i. e. worse in qua- 
lity, as wdne, John ii. 10, or inferior in 
age, younger, Rom. ix. 12, (as Gen. xxv. 
23,) or dignity, Heb. vii. 7. Hdian. v. 1, 14. 
Neut. adv. less than, 1 Tim. v. 9. Diod. 
Sic. i. 32. 

'EXaTToy £60, f. ricruo, (iXaTTtoy,) 
prop, to make less, diminish, trans, as in 
Sept. and later Gr. writers. In N. T. in- 
trans. to be less, in respect of quantity, i. e. 
to fall short, 2 Cor. viii. 15, 6 to oXiyov, 
ovK r]XaTT6vri(TE. 

'EXaTToco, f. cocro), {kXaTTUiV,) to 
lessen, or diminish, prop, in size, and fig. 
in dignity ; to make loiver than, Heb. ii. 7, 
9. Sept. and later Gr. writers. Pass, or 
raid, to become less, or lower in dignity, 
John iii. 30. Sept. and Class. 

'EXayyco, f. kXd(7uo, perf. kXnXaKa, to 
impel, urge forward. In N. T. used, 1) 
prop, of ships impelled by oars, to row, 
Mk. vi. 48. John vi. 19. Sept. and Class, 
or clouds driven about by winds, Ja. iii. 4. 



E AA 



118 



E A E 



2 Pet. ii. 17. Jos. Ant. v. 5, 3, tov vetov 
ilXavuEV avE/uLO?, 2) metaph. of a person 
urged forward or impelled by resistless 
force, as demoniacal influence, Lu. viii. 
29, 7j\avv£To viro tov daifjiovo's. The 
nearest approach to which is that Class, 
idiom by which persons under the influ- 
ence of maniacal feelings, or unbridled 
passions, are said kXavvEcrdai nrrjv xp^v')(i]V, 
or Tt/i/ yvwfxriv. 

'lE,\a<p pLa^ as, ?/, (sXa^yOos,) prop. 
lightness as to weight. In N. T. metaph. 
of mind, leviti/^ inconstancy^ 2 Cor. i. 17, 
and later Gr. writers, as Plut. vi. 239, 14, 
where the flatterer is called eXa^pos, as 
compared with a true friend. 

'EXa</)p6s, a, oz/, adj. 1) prop, liaht^ 
easy to heai\ Matt. xi. 30, (popTLoi/ IXa- 
<pp6v^ and Class. 2) metaph. easy to be 
endured, 2 Cor. iv. 17, to 8.\a(ppdv t^s 
^\l\I/£U)9 vfjLcov, ' our light affliction.' So 
Plato, 934, A. ^//ctjj/ kXacppoTtpav. 

'EXa)(KTTo§, I], Of, adj. (prop, superl. 
of the old word aXax^'s, ^ little,' but used as 
superl. of /xt/v-pos), least, whether in magni- 
tude, Ja. iii. 4 ; number and quantity, Lu. 
xvi. 10. xix. 17; rank or dignity. Matt. ii. 
6. V. 19. XXV. 40, 45. 1 Cor. xv. 9; or im- 
portance. Matt. V. 19, IvToXal eX. Lu. 
xii. 26. 1 Cor. iv. 3. vi. 2. Sept. and 
Class. 

''EXax''(J'"^oT£po9, tj, ov, adj. (comp. 
from cA-dxtcrTos,) Jh?' less, far inferior, 
Eph. iii. 8. Such double comparatives 
occur only in lat. Gr. 

''E A. £ y ^ i. 9, £0)5, 77, (tXty^w,) convic- 
tion, 2 Pet. ii. 16, eXej^iv E^^iv, equiv. 
to kXEyx^crQaL. 

"EX £7)^0 9, ov, 6, (kXEyx^i) prop. 
convincing argument, proof. In N. T. 
conviction, meaning a certain persuasion 
of any thing, Heb. xi. 1. Also refutation, 
or confutation, as of gainsayers, 2 Tim. iii. 
16. Sept. Longin, frag. iii. 11, and often 
in Plato. 

'EXtyxo), f. Jo), originally to put to 
shame, to disgrace ; but afterwards, and in 
N. T., to convict any one of error, prove 
him to be wrong, and thus ^ut him to 
shame, I. prop, to convict, shotv to be 
wrong, John viii. 9, viro tt/s crvvELdricrEO)^ 
kXEyxofJ^^voL'. foil, by irEpi, John viii. 46. 
xvi. 8. 1 Cor. xiv. 24. Ja. ii. 9. Sept. and 
later Class. Hence, to convince of error, 
confute. Tit. i. 9, 13. ii. 15. Sept. and 
Class. — II. BY iMPLic. to reprove, admo- 
nish, Lu. iii. 19, kXEyxop-Evo^ v'tt avTov 
iTEpl 'Hp. Matt, xviii. 15. I Tim. v. 20. 
2 Tim. iv. 2. Sept. and later Class. Hence, 
from the Heb., in the sense to reprove by 
chastisement, to chastise in a moral sense. 
Rev. iii. 19, kXiyxco kol iraL^Evoi, and 
Sept. — III. by impl., said of things hidden, 



to detect, make manifest, John iii. 20. Eph. 
V. 11, 13, and later Class., as Pol., Hdian. 
and ^lian, cited by the Commentators. 
1 add Artemid. i. 154, to. KpuirTo. 
kXkyx^L. 

'EX££ti;o9, ?/, ov, adj. (£X€09,) prop. 
moving pity, as Hom., Plato, and other 
earlier writers. And such may be the 
sense in 1 Cor. xv. 19, eXeelvotepol irdv 
Tcof avdpu)7rcDV,a.nd Rev. iii. 17, TaXaLirco- 
pos Koi kX. though some of the best ex- 
positors make it ivretched, miserable. 

'EX££a), f. Tjcro), (£X£09,) to commise- 
rate, have compassion on, trans., and pass. 
to be pitied, to obtain mercy ; implying, as 
Tittm. shows, not merely a fellow feeling 
for the miseries of others, {oiKTLpjuLo^,) 
but also an active desire of removing 
them. In N. T. it is used, i. gener. 
Matt. V. 7. XV. 22. xvii. 15. xviii. 33, et 
al. ssepe. Sept. and Class, ii. spec. 1) in 
the sense to have mercy on, to pardon, to 
spare, and in pass, to obtain mercy, to be 
pardoned or spared, 1 Tim. i. 13, 16, and 
Sept. 2) by impl. and from the Hebr., to 
be propitious toicards, to bestow kindness 
on, Rom. ix. 15, 16, 18, kXEri(TU3 ov av 
eXeu). Hence, 3) by impl. as said of the 
mercy of God through Christ, to bestow 
salvation on, and in pass, to obtain salva- 
tion by, Rom. xi. 30, ^X£r76?]T£, and 31, 
kXEi^dcoarL, 1 Cor. vii. 25, 7]Xeihui,evo9 
viro 'KvpLov. 2 Cor. iv. 1, Kadu)9 ijXEri- 
Oi^jULEv. 1 Pet. ii. 10, ol ovK ^jXetj/ulevol, 
vvv Se kXErjdtVTE^. 

'^^Xei] jULoarvvri, r}9, 77, ( kXErjfxcov, ) prop. 
compassion, mercy, as in Sept. and Class. ; 
but in N. T. by meton. of effect for cause, 
and joined with ttoleIv or didovai, al7ns, 
money given to the poor, Matt. vi. 2 — 4. 
Lu. xi. 41, et al. Sept. in Dan. iv. 27. 
Ecclus. iii. 14. xii. 3, ou/c eottlv dyada — 
TO) kXEi]fjioavvriV fxi) xc^P^'^ojULEVto. Diog. 
Laert. v. 17, Trovijpcp dvvpodTrw kXEtj-. 
jULOorvvfjv eScokev. 

'EXev juLcov, ovo£, 6, fi, adj. (eXeo9,) 
compassionate, merciful, i. e. actively so, 
Matt. V. 7. Sept. and Class.. 

"EX£0 9, ov, 6,- compassion, mercy, 1. e. 
active pity. Matt, xxiii. 23. Tit. iii. 5. 
Heb. iv. 16, and Class. From the Hebr., 
goodness in general, espec. pity, Matt. ix. 
13. xii. 7. Besides this masc. there is a 
neut. form, 

"EX£0 9, £ou9, TO, (fouud ouly in the 
Sept., N. T., and Eccles. writers,) mercy, 
compassion, i. e. active piety, I. gener. Lu. 
i. 50, 78. Rom. ix. 23. xv. 9. Eph. ii. 4. 
1 Pet. i. 3. Ja. iii. 17. Sept. oft. Note the 
phrases ttolelv eXeo's /uETd tlvo9, by 
Hebr. to shotv mercy to, Lu. i. 72. x. 37. 
Ja. ii. 13, and often in Sept. jULvi^ardtjvaL 
kXiov^, Lu. i. 54, ' to give a fresh proof of 



E AE 



119 



E AA 



mercy.' Also said of mercy, as shown in 
the remission of deserved punishment, Ja. 
ii. 13. — II. spec, said of the mercy of God 
through Christ, meaning salvation^ in tlie 
evangelical sense, i. e. both from sin and 
from misery, the punishment of sin, Jiide 
21, TO eXeo9 tou KvpLov. Rom. xi, 31. So 
espec. in benedictions, including the idea 
of mercies and hlessings of every kind, 
e. gi\ 2 Tim. i. 16, 18,' owS; eXeos 6 Ku- 
f)io§, et al. 

'EXs i/0£|O i a, a§, 77, (tXfiuOgpos,) 
liberty^ i. e. freedom from restraint of any 
kind, either gener. or spec. ' the power of 
doing or of forbearing any particular ac- 
tion,' 1 Cor. X. 29, LvaTL yap rj kX. fxov 

KpLVETUL VTTO dX\t]£ (TUi/gt^TyCTEWS *, Diog. 

Laert. vii. 121. This may be either eijc- 
te)'?ial or internal. I. external, i. e. 
freedom., opp. to slavery., either as regards 
individuals, (comp. Lev. xix. 22. xxv. 
10. Ecclus. vii. 21,) or the public at 
large, political freedom^ exemption from 
tyranny, or inordinate government, 1 Mace, 
xiv. 26, and Class. Again, in the N. T. 
only, as regards tlie law of God, as con- 
tained in religion and the worship of God, 
freedom from the curse of the moral., or 
the servitude of the ceremonial law., Gal. ii. 
4. V. 1, 13. 2 Cor. iii. 17, ekeI eXev- 
dEpLa, i. e. freedom or release from the 
yoke of external ordinances in general., 
1 Pet. ii. 16. 2 Pet. ii. 19. Simply free- 
dom., 01 deliverance., from all temporal evils, 
misery, sin, and death, Rom. viii. 21. — II. 
INTERNAL, ' deliverance from the dominion 
of corrupt appetites and sinful passions,' 
Ja. i. 25. ii. 12, where see my notes, and 
Xen. Mem, iv. 5, 2. 

'EX.£u0£pos, gpa, 01/, adj. (from 
sXeuOo), equiv. to Ip^o/xai,) prop, unre- 
straiiied., ' the being able to go where one 
will.' Hence, /ree, ' at liberty to do what 
one '^ill,' I. in a civil or political sense, 
and 1) free hy birth., 1 Cor. xii. 13. Gal. 
iii. 28. iv. 22, 23, 30, 31. Eph. vi. 8. Col. 
iii. 11. Rev. vi. 15, et al. Fig. said of the 
heavenly Jerusalem, Gal. iv. 26. Sept. 
and Class. 2) freed by laiv^ manumission, 
John viii. 33. 1 Cor. vii. 21. 3) free by 
law., i. e. ' exempt from obligation by 
law,' Matt. xvii. 26. Rom. vii. 3. 1 Cor. 
vii, 39. Sept. and Class. Also free., 
either from external obligation in general, 
so as to act as one pleases, 1 Cor. ix. 1, 
19, and Class., or from internal, in re- 
spect to the exercise of piety, 1 Pet. ii. 16. 
Also metaph./?'ee from the slavery of sin, 
John viii. 36. So, free from passions, 
Arrian Epict. iii. 24. iv. 1. — II. gener, 
free from., destitute of Rom. vi. 20, eXev- 
dEpoL TTj dLKaLoaifvy., 'destitute as to 
righteousness,' i. e. without righteousness. 
So Denham cited by Johnson Diet, in v. 



Free, ' Who fears not to do ill, yet fears 
the name. And., free from conscience., is a 
slave to fame.' 

'E A. € u 0 f p o CO, f. uioru}., (eXsuOspos,) 
prop, and gener. to set free or at liberty^ 
either from slavery, or any political obli- 
gation, Class. In N. T. metaph. to make 
free., either fiom the power and penalty of 
sin, John viii, 32, 77 aXjydeia fcXtuOtpwcrtt 
u/xas. Rom. vi. 18, 22, iXf-uOfpcoOfci/Tfis 
ttTTo T7/9 ct/xapTias : or from the yoke of 
the Mosaic law, Gal. v. 1, or its condem- 
natory power, Rom. viii. 2 ; or from a 
state of calamity and death, Rom. viii. 21. 
Comp. 2 Mace. i. 27. ii. 22. 

"EXgufTts, £w?, 77, {h\E\}^M^ a coming^ 
or going. In N. T. the coming., advent^ of 
the Messiah into the world, Acts vii. 52. 

'EXe «i/Tii/os, t/, 01/, adj. made of 
ivory., kXicpa^^ lit. elephant's tusk, Rev. 
xviii. 12. Sept. and Class. 

'EXiao-60, f. ^o), (fXt^, flXfito,) prop. 
to ivhirl round., to roll ; also to roll 01: wind 
any thing up. Hence, to roll or fold up a 
garment., in order to be laid away, and fig. 
of the heavens, Heb. i. 12, wctel irEpi^o- 
Xaiov eXl^el^ auTous, 'thou s.halt make 
them vanish, destroy them.' So Is. xxxiv. 
4, EXiyncTETaL 6 ovpavo^ cos (Sl^Xlov., ' as 
a roll of a book.' 

"EXkos, £os ous, to, (eX/cco,) prim, 
and prop, a wound., but in N. T. and later 
writers an ulcer or sore, Lu. xvi. 21. Rev. 
xvi. 2, 11. 

'EX/cc)co, f. cotrco, (fiX/fos,) to idcerate ; 
and pass, to be full of ulcers., Lu. xvi. 20, 
and Class. 

"EX /ceo, f. fX/cucrco, (from cXkuco,) to 
draw or drag any thing or person ; 1 ) of 
things, to draw or drag a net, John xxi. 
6, 11 ; draw a sword, John xviii. 10. Sept. 
and Class. 2) of persons, to drag., force 
away., either to go before a magistrate, 
Acts xvi. 19 ; or from one place to another. 
Acts xxi. 30, and Class. ; or metaph. said of 
the compulsion of strong mom^ inducements 
to embrace the Gospel, John vi. 44, xii. 
32, i, e. by the evidence of its truth in 
miracles : yet far more is meant ; for 
God not only inclines ihe widerstanding 
to acknowledge the truth of the Gospel 
by the miraculous evidences of the Mes- 
siahship of Jesus, but he inclines the will 
to embrace and obey the Gospel, by the 
supply of all fit moral motives to obe- 
dience, in the rewards and punishments 
of the next life ; enforced, too, on the soul 
by the secret and pov/erful, though not 
irresistible, influences of the Holy Spirit. 
See more in my note on John vi. 37. 

"EXXi]!/, 171/os, 6, a Greek., I. prop, ol 
"EXX. as opp. to OL (3dp(3apoL., meaning 



E A A 



1 



20 



EMB 



' those not Greeks^ Rom. i. 14, (where hy ol 
<ro(poi are meant the polished Greeks,) and 
Acts xviii. 17, & Class. — II. as opp. to oi 
*lovSaLOL, it denotes the Greeks in the widest 
sense, i. e. ' all those who used the Greek 
language and customs,' whether in Greece 
and Asia Minor, or in the other countries. 
And as this was the then prevailing lan- 
guage, the name Greek was often used to 
designate all those who were not Jews^ and 
thus became equiv. to Gentiles^ John vii. 
35. Acts xvi. 1, 3. xix. 10, 17. xx. 21. 
xxi. 28. Rom. i. 16. ii. 9, 10. iii. 9. x. 12. 
1 Cor. i. 22, 23, 24. x. 32. xii. 13. Gal. 
ii. 3. iii. 28. Col. iii. 11, also in Acts xi. 
20, in later edd. f. 'EWrji/to-Ttis in text, 
rec. Is. ix. 11. 1 Mace. viii. 18. 2 Mace, 
iv. 36. Joseph. Ant. xii. 5, 1. — III. as 
said of a Gentile convert to Judaism, a 
Greek proselyte^ John xii. 20. Acts xiv. 
1. xvii. 4. xviii. 4. 

'EWijyt /cos, ?7, Of, adj. Grecian^ Lu. 
xxiii. 38. Rev. ix. 11. Sept. Jos. & Class. 

'EWtjyts, t^os, 77, (fem. of adj. "EA.- 
X^ji/,) a female Gt^eek Gentile^ Mk. vii. 26. 
Acts xvii. 12. 

'E Wtji/i o-Trj 9, ou, o, (fiWiji'i^aj, to 
speak Greek, Thuc. ii. 68,) an Hellenist^ 
meaning a Jew by birth or religion, but 
who speaks Greek ; used chiefly of foreign 
Jews and Jewish proselytes, whether con- 
verted to Christianity or not. Acts vi. 1. 
ix. 29. xi. 20, in text. rec. where later 
edd. have "EWrjj/as. See more in my 
note on the passage. 

*EWr] y lo-Tt, adv. (gWr/i/i'Jto,) Greece,^ 
in the Greek language^ John xix. 20. Acts 
xxi. 37, and Class. 

'EWoyeco, f. r\ao3^ (£i/, Xoyos,) 1) 
prop, and lit. to reckon in., i. e. to enter or 
put any thing to any one's account, as a 
debt, Philem. 18, touto e^oI kXkoyzL. 
2) metaph. said of sin, to impute., Rom. v. 
13, afxapTia ovk tWoystTai, i. e. ' is 
not entered to our account,' laid to our 
charge. 

'EX-TTt Jo), f. iVw, (IXttI?,) to Jiope for, 
expect., trans, and absol. I. prop. & alsol. 
Lu. vi. 34. Acts xxvi. 7. Rom. xv. 24. 
1 Cor. xvi. 7. 2 Cor. viii. 5. Phil. ii. 19, 
23, & oft. ; foil, by acc. of thing, to hope 
for, Rom. viii. 24. 1 Cor. xiii. 7, and 
pass. TO. kX'KLC.ofXEva., Heb. xi. 1. Class. 
— II. in the oblique constr. and foil, by dat. 
of pers. or thing, with or without kvOY kiri^ 
or its equiv. an acc. of pers. with or 
iTTt, to hope in., or confide on., any one. Matt, 
xii. 21. John v. 45. Rom. xv. 12. 1 Cor. 
XV. 19. 2 Cor. i. 10. 1 Tim. iv. 10. v. 5. 
vi. 17. 1 Pet. i. 13. iii. 5. Sept. 

'E \ TT I s, too5, 77, in Class, wr., espec. the 
Attic ones, simply eocpectation., whether of 
good or evil ; though more freq. the former, 



and always so in Homer and Pindar. In 
N, T. only the former, namely, an expect- 
ation of some good., on which the mind 
dwells with pleasure, inasmuch as hope is 
the desire of some good, with the expect- 
ation of attaining it. Christian hope is a 
firm expectation of all promised blessings, 
as far as they may be for God's glory and 
our own good, but espec. eternal salvation 
in heaven ; a hope founded on the 
mighty power, unchangeable truth, and 
abundant mercy of God, which is from 
everlasting to everlasting, and the grace, 
blood, righteousness, and intercession of 
Christ ; and attested by the earnest of the 
Holy Spirit in our hearts. In N. T. it is 
used I. GENER. Rom. viii, 24. 2 Cor. x. 
15. Phil. i. 20 ; with gen. of the thing 
hoped for, Acts xvi. 19. xxiii. 6. xxvi. 6, 
sq. XX vii. 20 ; or of the person hoping, 
Acts xxviii. 20. 2 Cor. i. 7. Sept. and 
Class. By meton. said of the object of 
hope, Rom. viii. 24, kX'irU Sk ^X&tt. ovk 
'icTTLv kX^Trk. Sept. Job vi. 8. Callim.Ep, 
20. Note the phrases fTr' kXiridL., in hope., 
Acts ii. 26. Rom. iv. 18. viii. 20. 1 Cor. 
ix. 10, and tto/j' kXirioa., beyond or against 
hope., Rom. iv. 18. — II. spec, as said of 
the Christian's hope, i. e. the hope of sal- 
vation through Christ, namely, of eternal 
happiness in heaven, Rom. v. 2, knr' kXir. 
T7/S ^o^7}s Tov 0EOU. V. 4, sq. xii. 12. 
XV. 4, 13, 1 Cor, xiii. 13. 2 Cor. Iii. 12. 
Eph. i. 18, ii. 12. iv. 4. 1 Th. iv. 13. V. 8. 
2 Th. ii. 16. Tit. i. 2. iii. 7. Heb. iii. 6. 
vi. 11. X. 23, 1 Pet. i. 3. iii. 15. By 
meton. of the object of this hope, salvation., 
Col. i. 5. Gal. V. 5, i/c 'Trto-TEws kXirida 
Slk. i. e. ' the hope, or salvation, resulting 
from justification by faith.' Tit. ii. 13. 
Heb. vi. 18. vii. 19 ; meton. also of the 
source, ground, and author of this hope, 

1. e. Christ, Col. i. 27. 1 Tim. i. 1 ; 
gener. 1 Th. ii. 19. — III. of a hope re- 
posed in or upon any one, i. e. trust or con- 
fidetice, foil, by £is, Acts xxiv. 15, kXTrLda 
g'xwi/ £i§ TOP Q&ou. 1 Pet. i. 21 ; foil, by 
fTTi Tti/i, 1 John iii. 3. 

'E/xauTou, 775, ou, reflex, pron. of 1. 
pers. found only in gen. dat. and acc. sing. 
of myself to myself myself Lu. vii. 7. 
John V, 31, et al. ssepe. Sometimes for 
the simple £yuou, Matt. viii. 9. Lu. vii. 8, 
et al. 

'Kfj.(3aLVU)., f. pri(TOjxai., (ei/, (Sahu),) 
to go in., enter into., John v. 4, e. scil. fis 
TO i)d(jop : also to step into., mount a car- 
riage, or ascend or embark on board a ship, 
£i5 TO ttXoTov., Matt. viii. 23. ix, 1. xiii. 

2, et al. So in N. T. oft. and Class. 
'E/x/JaWct), f. (3aXu), (fi/, (3dXXa)^) to 

cast in, i. e. to cast any thing or person 
into any place. So Lu. xii. 5, k/jL^aXeii/ 
£is nrrjv yitvvav. Sept. and Class. 



EM B 



121 



E M n 



*E/xj3a'7rT£o, f. x/ao), (si/, /SaTrrte,) to 
dip any substance into any liquid, John 
xiii. 26, k. TO xl/cofXLov^ i. e. into the liquid 
in the dish. And so Matt. xxvi. 23, 6 kiuL(3. 
Ti]v x^^P^ Tpv[3\lco. Mk. xiv. 20. 

'Eyu/SaTfuoj, f. £ucra), prop, to set foot 
on or 2ipo)i any thing, to enter into a place 
for any purpose, whether good or evil. 
Eoll. by an acc. of place with or without a 
prep, of motion, or its equiv. a dat. without 
prep. ; but it is sometimes used metaph. 
in the sense to go into^ enter upon^ inves- 
tigate any matter, with the adjunct idea 
of care, diligence, and study. So Philo 
p. 225, eTTLTrXEOv Enx^aTEVOVTe^ avTaT^, 
sc. sTTLarTviuLaL^. 2 Mace. ii. 31, to kfx(ia- 

TEVELV^ KOL TToXviTpay fXCVElV KaTO. (xl- 

po^. Xen. Symp. iv. 27, of searching for 
any thing in a book. But the above may also 
imply a notion of busy, prying, and intru- 
sive curiosity; as in Aristid. de Socr. p. 

240, £im(3aTEVtJ0l/ £tS to, TWV 'EWfJl/OJl/ 

TTpdyfxaTa^ 'busily prying into.' And so 
in Col. ii. 18, a fxi] ecopuKEv EfjL^arEvwv, 
where see my note. 

'E^^i/3a^£o, f. ao-ft), (gi/, |8tj8a^(o,) to 
cause to go or enter into any place, espec. a 
higher one, to mount any one on horseback, 
or into a chariot ; but gener. to embark or 
put on' ship-board, Acts xxvii. 6, i. vjULd^ 
eh auTo, scil. to TrXoTov, & oft, in Class. 

'E^.'^Xetto), f. xl^o), (ez/, /SXetto),) gener. 
to look any person in the face^ or fix the eyes 
stedfastly upon, look attentively at any ob- 
ject. The proper constr. of the word is 
a dat. of pers. or an acc. of thing preceded 
by eU. The former constr. is found in 
Matt. xix. 26. Mk. x. 21. xiv. 67. Lu. 
XX. 17. xxii. 61. John i. 36,43, & Class.; 
the latter, in Matt. vi. 26, k. el's nra ttet. 

TOV OUp. Acts i. 11, £. £tS TOP OVp. ' tO 

look at mentally, consider^'' Sept. Also by 
impl. dispicere^ to discern^ see clearly^ trans. 
Mk. viii. 25. absol. Acts xxii. 11. 

'^fxjSpLudojjLaL^ f, ^(To/xai, depon. 
mid. (ei/, ^pifxdomaL^) in Class, to feel 
and express indignation at any one, foil, 
by dat. In N. T. the word occurs I. in 
the sense to murmur against^ censure any 
one, Mk. xiv. 5. — II. by impl. to admo- 
nish sternly^ charge strictly^ from indigna- 
tion at previous disobedience, to order 
under a threat^ Matt. ix. 30, kvE^pifxrioraTo 
auTots. Mk. i. 43. — III. by Hebr. used 
of great perturbation of mind, to he greatly 
agitated^ foil, by dat. of manner, John xi. 
33, kvE^p. Tw irvEvixaTL^ parallel with 
krdpa^EV kavrov just after, 'he was 
greatly troubled in his spirit.' 

'E^£w, f. £0-0), prop, to spew oid^ eject 
from the stomach, foil, by acc. and fig. to 
reject with loathing^ Rev. iii. 16, /uleXXw 
(TE E/uLEcraL. Sept. Lev. xviii. 28, Sjmm. 
i^^/iXE(TEv, ' ejected with abhorrence.' 



'^/uL jixa LV 0 jixa f. fxavovixai^ {^kfxp.a- 
1/?;?,) to be mad or infuriate at or against 
any person. Acts xxvi. 11, k/uLfxaivo/jLEvo^ 
avTOL9. Jos. Ant. xvii. 6, 5, k/x/xaLVO- 
fXEvov Tract tov (BaaiXEco^ 6/xoiws. 

'E/xuEi/w, f. £i/to, in Class, prop, to 
remain in any place; or metaph. to con- 
tinue in any action or practice ; to abide by 
any engagement, keep any faith, or to ob- 
serve any oath, implied therein. In N. 
T. only metaph. ' to continue, persevere in 
any thing directed to be done,' Gal. iii. 10, 
7ra§ OS ovK kjUfxEVEi kv Tracrt Tots yEyp. 
Heb. viii. 9, £. kv Ty Siad-nKri fxov. Acts 
xiv. 22, £. Tri TTtcTTfit. And so Sept. Deut. 
xxvii. 26, and oft. in Class. 

'E^69, 7/, 01/, possess, adj. of the first 
pers. my^ mine. I. prop, subjectively^ or 
actively, as marking possession or property, 
Matt, xviii. 20. John iii. 29. iv. 34. Rom. 
x. 1, et al. saepe. Implying power or 
office^ OVK ECJTLv kfxov SoviiaL, 'is not mine 
to give,' Matt. xx. 23. Mk. x. 40. Said 
of things which proceed from any one, as 
the source, agent, &c. Mk. viii. 38, tous 
Ejixov^ X6yov9. Lu. ix. 26. John vi. 38, 
et al. ssepe. — II. objectively or passively, 
said of what is appointed or destined for a 
person, as o KULpo^ 6 £/>io§, John vii. 6, 8. ri 
rifXEpa 7] Efxf]^ John viii. 56. 6 Kaipo? t^§ 
£fiTj5 a/yaXucr£6os, 2 Tim. iv. 6 ; or what 
is done to, or in respect to, a person, as Eh 
TTjv kfxriv dvdp.vr)(TLv^ 'in memory of me,' 
Lu. xxii. 19. 1 Cor. xi. 24, sq. v dydirr] rj 
kfxt]^ ' love to me,' John xv. 9 ; also in 
Class. 

'K/xTT a ly fxovr], i7^, 77, (£/x7rai^<o, il- 
ludo,) scoffing at., derision., in later Edd. 
at 2 Pet. iii. 3, kv k/xiraLyjuovy k/xTTOLKTai, 
intens. for shameless scoffers. 

'E/xTratyjuos, ou, 6, (gMTra/^oj,) scoff- 
ing at., derision., Heb. xi. 36. Sept. and 
Alexand. writers. 

'E /X TT a t ^ 6t), f . a igo), 1 ) prop, to sport, 
at or to jest., scoff at any one ; foil, 
by dat. Matt, xxvii. 29. Mk. x. 34, et al. 
also absol. Matt. xx. 19, et al. Sept. and 
later Class. 2) like the Latin illudere^ by 
impl. to delude^ deceive.. Matt. ii. 16, kv- 
ETraiydri vtto tcov jxdyiov. 

'EjUTTa t/CTjjs, ou, 6, (IjUTrai^o),) pro- 
perly a jester or mocker., and by impl. a 
deceiver or impostor., said in N. T. of false 
prophets and teachers, 2 Pet. iii. 3. Jude 18. 

'E /X TT £ ( TT a T £ o), f. T^cw, prop. to Walk 
about in a place. Job i. 7. ii. 2. Wisd. xix. 
21. In N. T. fig. to live among, to be 
habitually conversant with a people, 2 Cor. 
vi. 16. 

fxTT LirXr\fxi, f. £/x7rXr7(Tco, in Class. 
to fill in, fill up, make full. Sept. and 
Class. In N. T. either prop, to fill, or 
fully satiate, with food, John vi. 12, ois 



EM n 



122 



0£ hf.TrXi^ardy]crav. Sept. and Class. ; or 
fig. to satiate one's desires with any 
good, Lu. i. 53. vi. 25. Acts xiv. 17, 
and Sept. ; also metaph. pass, to be filled 
with any person, i. e. ' to have one's desire 
of his society gratified,' Rom. xv. 24, euu 
vfxuiv E/jLirXriadu}, So Susann. 32, ottcos 
ifXTrXy^adaxn tov koXXov^ auTrj9, and 
j^^lian, of the peacock, sa kfxTrX^crQriuaL 
'Tr\<s 3'£as (the sight of her) tov irapaa- 

TUiTa. 

'KjULTT LTTT U)^ f. ITEOrOV fXai^ (ly, TTITTTW,) 

foil, hy £i's, 1) with acc. of place, to fall 
into, Matt. xii. 11, eh (Sodvuov. Lu. xiv. 
5, £k cfypiap, Sept. and Class. 2) of 
pers. to fall in with, or among, Lu. x. 36, 
£ts Tous Xr\(TTa.^. Arrian Epict. iii. 13, 3, 
oTav €t§ Xi7<TTas e/jL7ri(ru)iJ.ev. 3) metaph. 
to fall into any state or condition, 1 Tim. 
iii. 6, eh Kpifxa. ver. 7, eh oveiOLcrfxdv, 
and vi. 9. Sept. & Class. Note the phrase 
ifj-TT. eh xe1pa<5 Qeov, 1. e. into his power, 
for punishment, Heb. x. 31. Comp. 2 Sam. 
xxiv. 14. 1 Chron. xxi. 13. Ecclus, ii. 18. 

'E/xTrXf/coj, f. ^o), (fii/, irXeKti},) prop, 
and in Class, to interlace, braid in, inter- 
weave, ^lian V. H. xiii. 1, iveTrXeKovTo 

01 KLTTOL fxaXaKoT^ oivopoL9. In N. T. 
metaph. to eiitangle, or involve i?i, mid. to 
entangle oneself in affairs, &c. 2 Tim. ii. 4. 

2 Pet. ii. 20. Arrian Ep. iii. 22. Plutarch 
ii. 787, and so implicari negotiis in Lat. wi\ 

'E/xTrXo/c?;, r/, (e/ixTrXeKU},) a braid- 
ing or plaiting of the hair, hy way of orna- 
ment, 1 Pet. iii. 3. See my note. 

'E/xTTi/Ew, f. evaru), [ev, irveu),) prop. 
to inhale breath by the nostrils, and by 
impl. to exhale it, to breathe; and as breath- 
ing with vehemence implies the emotion 
of strong passion, so irviui is used in the 
sense to be full of, intrans. with a gen. 
and sometimes acc. of subst. denoting the 
kind of passion or emotion, espec. love, 
as Ach. Tat. ii. p. 65, £pwTo§ Trvel, or 
anger, as Aristaen. Epist. i. 5, izvetjov 3'i/- 
/xou. Eurip. Rhes. 786, ^v}xbv Try. Horn. 
II. ii. 536, fxevea Trveiovre^. Schol. ^v/ulov 
TTv. ; and not only with passions, but the 
result of passions, in certain actions or 
vices, as Aristoph. Eq. 435, kuklu's irveT. 
Theocr. Idyll, xxii. 82, (povov uXXdXoLcrLv 
TTueovTe's. So Acts ix. 1, efXTrvicov aireL- 
Kai (povov. 

jUL'TTO p ev o fJLa L, f. Evcrojuiai, depon. 
mid. prop, and in early Class, to travel 
about in any country ; in N. T. and later 
writers, to travel about as a merchant or 
trader, to trade or traffic, 1) gener. and 
absol. Ja. iv. 13, e fXTr o pev or cofxed a Kai 
Kepd-naw/xev. Sept. and Class. 2) foil, by 
acc. to traffic in, make a gain by, 2 Pet. ii. 
3, i/iuas e/j.-TTopevaouTaL, i. e. 'will deceive 
you for their own gain.' Elsewhere only 



with acc. of thing, Themist. p. 298, ifx- 
TTopeveaduL (pLXocrocpLav. 

'E/xTTO/ota, as, 17, prop, a journey for 
traffic, Arr. Epict. iii. 24, 80, but usually 
trade, traffic, as Matt. xxii. 5. Sept. & Class. 

'E/xTTo/o toi/, ov, TO, an emporium, or 
mart for the sale of goods, John ii. 16, 
oIkov kpLTTopLov, a market-house. Sept. and 
Class. 

"Yifxiropo^, ov, 6, {h, TTopo^,) lit. and 
prim, a passenger from one place to ano- 
ther by sea, who pays fare, Hom. Odyss. 

ii. 319. xxiv. 299 ; or a traveller gener. 
Soph. (Ed. Col. 25, 303. Usually, how- 
ever, a travelling merchant, one y^ho trades 
to foreign countries by sea and land, im- 
porting and exporting the commodities of 
each. Thus from the Hebr. "ino, cor- 
responding to efxTTopo^ in the Sept. comes 
the verb IHD, to go about. Hence it is 
distinguished from the /cdTrijXos, who pur- 
chased bis wares of the 'ipLiropo^, and sold 
them by retail. So the word often occurs 
in the Class, and also in Matt. xiii. 45, and 
Rev. xviii. 3, 11, 15, 23. 

'E/x7rp>7 0a), f, ricrui, prop, to put fire 
in, set fire to, and by impl. to burn up, de- 
stroy by fire. Matt. xxii. 7, £. t^v ttoXlu. 
Sept. and Class. 

"EjUL'TT poad ev, adv. & prep, before. I. 
as ADVERB OF PLACE, aftor verbs of 
motion forwards, Lu. xix. 28 ; or before 
an implied person, xix. 4, and Class. So 
ra £. thingsbefore, Phil. iii. 14, and Class. ; 
of the body before, in front. Rev. iv. 6, 
and Sept. and Class. — II. as prepos. with 
gen. used 1 ) of place, before, with gen. of 
pers. after verbs of motion, &c. Matt. vi. 
2. xi. 10. Lu. vii. 27. John iii. 28. x. 4. 
Sept. and Class. ; or gener. before, in pre- 
sence of. Matt. V. 16. vi. 1. x. 32, & oft. 
In Matt, xxiii. 13, KXeieTe Trjv /SacriX. 
Twi/ ovpavaou ejULTrpoadev tcov avOpcoTTcoi/, 
lit. ' ye shut the door, &c. in the face of.' 
Hence, and from Heb. e/ultt. tov Oeov, 
' in the sight of God, God being witness,' 
i. e. knowing and approving, 1 Th. i. 3. 

iii. 9, 13. So Matt. xi. 26. Lu. x. 21. 
2) of time, before, foil, by gen. of pers. 
John i. 15, 27, 30. Sept. and Herodot. vii. 
144. 

'E/xTTTuo), f. vera), to spit in, on, or at, 
foil, by eh, as eh to Trpoawirov, Matt, 
xxvi. 67 ; gener. xxvii. 30. Sept. & Plut. 
vi. 715, 14, EixTTTveLV TLVL eh TO irpSarou- 
TTov : foil, by dat. (equiv. to acc. and eh,) 
Mk. X. 34. xiv. 65. xv. 19. Lu. xviii. 32, 
and later Class. 

'E/x<|)a2/r)s, £09, 6, 77, adj. (fr. e/uLCpat- 
verrQai, to appear, as in a mirror, Xen. 
Conv. vii. 4 ; or in the sight of any per- 
sons,) prop, appearing in ; or gener. appa- 
rent; and £/x</)ai/rjs yivtaQai, equiv. to 



EM$ 



123 



EN 



£/u<^ai/i^£(r0ai, to appear^ he seen., openly., 
Acts X. 40, and Class. Also metaph. iix<p. 
y'lu. to become manifest., or known., &c. 
Rom. X. 20. Exod. ii. 14. Pol. xx. 15, 7. 

'E/LK^ai/i^oj, f. to-o), {s/iKfyavf]^^) to 
make apparent., cause to be seen plainly., 
shmc clearly., trans, and pass, to appear 
clearly., be seen openly^ 1) prop. Matt, 
xxvii. 53. Heb. ix. 24, where see my 
note. 2) fig. to make known., shew., foil, 
by acc. of thing and dat. of person, or its 
equiv. acc. with tt^o?, Acts xxiii. 15, 22 ; 
by oTt, Heb. xi. 14. Sept. and Class. In 
a forensic sense, with dat. and /earn: with 
gen. to sliew up., inform against., accuse., 
Acts xxiv. 1, EVE(pdvLarau tw vyEjixovL 
Kara x. U. lit. ' have appeared before the 
governor to give information against Paul 
^nd XXV. 2, 15, and Joseph. Of a person, 
kfKpavLX^zLv eavTov tlvl^ to manifest one- 
self to any one, 'to let oneself be inti- 
mately known to of God, John xiv. 21, 
sq. Ex. xxxiii. 13. Joseph. Ant. i. 13, i. 

''E/a0o/3os, oy, 6, 77, adj. for phrase 8u 
^o/3a), usually, and always in N. T. ac- 
companied by ytvea-dai, Lu. xxiv. 5, 37. 
Acts x. 4. xxii. 9. xxiv. 29. Rev. xi. 13. 
In the Class, as Soph. (Ed. Col. 39. 
Theophr. Char. xxv. 1, it is used simply 
for c^o^spo^ : and so in 1 Mace. xiii. 2. 

'E^0 uo-aw, f. 770-0), (ei/, (^ixrao),) 
prop, to hreatlie in or into.^ as in blowing up 
a bladder, or playing on a wind instru- 
ment ; also, to bi^eathe on., ' to pour forth 
the breath on,' John xx. 22, iv&ipvcrrjcTEv 
avroL^. So 1 Kings xvii. 2l, evecfyifarjcrs 
Tco TraiSapLtp Tpis. Job iv. 21, ivz<pvcF7]- 
asu auTOL^., Kai e^rjpdvQifjcrav, 

"E/x^uTos, ou, 6, 77, adj. (Eyu^u'w,) 
prop, inborn^ (lit. implanted by nature,) 
Wisd. xii. 10. Pol. ix. 11, 2. Xen. Mem. 
iii. 7, 5 ; but in N. T. implanted., engrafted, 
Jas. i. 21, Tou 'ifKfyvTov Xoyoi/, where 
the Gentile is represented under the figure 
of a shoot implanted or engrafted on the 
original stock, as elsewhere by a seedling 
sown. Comp. Barnab. Epist. ix. t] efxcj). 
dwpEct Tt/s dLda)(ri^ tov Qeov. 

'Ei/, prep, governing the dat. with the 
prim, idea of rest in any place, or thing ; 
as also 072, at, or by any thing. It is used 
I. of PLACE, and employed of every thing 
that is conceived as being, remaining, or 
taking place, within some definite space or 
limits, in, on, at, by., &c. 1) prop, in, 
within. Matt. viii. 6. Lu. xi. 1. xxii. 55. 

' Acts ii. 46, et al. sape and Class. ; 
with the names of countries, cities, towns, 
or places, gen. Lu. ii. 43, h 'Is-povcr. 

, Matt, ii, 1, kv Br^BXEspi, et al. Matt. iii. 
1, iu T?7 kpvjULO} TT75 'lovoaLa<s, Lu. xvi. 
23, h Tco a.^y> Matt. vi. 10, et al, iv tlo 
ovpavw. So also ev n-y yy, ' on earth,' kv 



tt; ^aXdcraii, kv tw icoar/uLto, &c. Also 
used of the body or any of its members, 
Rom. vi. 12, et al. Likewise in phrases, 
as kv yaa-Tpi 'e)(elv. Matt. i. 18. kv ttj 
kolXlo., Lu. i. 44 ; and fig. kv Ty Kapdia, 
Matt. V. 28, et al. kv tm crTOfxa^L, 1 Pet. 
ii. 22. 2) said of elevated objects, in, i. e. 
on, upon, as kv tm ooel, Lu. viii. 32. John 
iv. 20. Heh. viii. 5, et al. and Class, kv 
avTy, on it, (a fig-tree,) Mk. xi. 13. kv tm 
^povco. Rev. iii. 21. So also kv nry yy, kv 
Ty ^aXdarcry, &c. 3) in a somewhat wider 
sense, implying simply contact, or close 
proximity, i. e. at, on, by, near, with, e. gr. 
kv Se^lo. TLV09, Heb. i. 3, et al. kv tul^ 
yvoviaL^ TMV TrXaTELoov, Matt. vi. 5. kv 
Tw ovpav(Z, ' in or on the sky,' Acts ii. 
19. kv Tto StXtorijU, Lu. xiii. 4. kv Ty dfi- 
tteXu), ' attached to the vine,' John xv. 4. 
Fig. with dat. of pers. and said of those 
with whom any one is in near connexion, 
intimate union of mind and heart, espec. of 
the union of Christians by faith with 
Christ, as a branch is united with the 
stock or trunk of a tree, John xv. 2, 4, 5, 
et al. ssepe. So oi vEKpoi kv 'KpLo-Tw, 
'those who have died in union by faith 
with Christ,' 1 Cor. xv. 18. 1 Thess. iv. 
16. Rev. xiv. 13. Hence ol kv Xp. equiv. 
to oi XpLorTLavoL. Also gener. 'm con- 
nexion with Christ,' by the profession of 
the Christian faith, Rom. xii. 5. Gal. iii. 
28. V. 6. vi. 15, et al. ; and vice versa of 
the union of Christ with Christians, in 
consequence of their faith in him, John vi. 
56. xiv. 20, XV. 4, 5 ; also of a like union 
with God, and vice versa, 1 Thess. i. 1. 
1 John ii, 24, iii. 6, 24. iv. 13, 15, 16, et 
al. ; of the Holy Spirit with Christians, 
John xiv. 17. Rom. viii. 9, 11. 1 Cor. iii. 
16. vi. 19. 1 Pet. i. 11, et al. ; of those in, 
with, in whom (i. e. in whose person or 
character) any thing exists or is done, i. e. 
in their conduct, John xviii. 38. xix. 4, 6. 
Acts xxiv. 20. xxv. 5. 1 Cor. iv. 2. 1 
John ii. 10. So gener. of any power or 
influence from God, the Holy Spirit, &c. 
Matt, xiv. 2, ai ^vvdp.EL<s kvEpyovcrLv kv 
avTw. John i, 4. xiv. 13 & 30, kv kfxol 
ovK £X£t ovdiv, &c. : of those in or with 
whom (i. e. in whose mind, soul, or 
heart) any thing exists or takes place, as 
virtues, vices, faculties, &c. John i. 48. iv. 

14, et al. 4) of a number, or multitude, 
as indicating place, in, among, ivith. Matt, 
ii. 6, kXax'i-^TV £^ kv toIs vyE/iioaLv 'I. 
xi, 11, etal. ssepiss. 5) of persons, byimpl. 
before, in the presence of Mk. viii. 38, 
OS yap dv kiraiax^^^V y^v^d 
TuvTy. Lu. i. 25. Acts vi, 8. xxiv. 21, et 
al. Hence metaph. in the sight or judg- 
ment of any one, he being judge, Lu. xvi. 

15, TO kv dvOpooTTOL^ vxj/riXov. 1 Cor. xiv. 
11. So kv o00aXjUol5 Vfiu)V, Matt. xxi. 
42. Mk. xii. 11. 6) said of that by which 

G2 



EN 



124 



EN A 



any one is surrounded, in which he is en- I 
veloped, &c. in^ tvith. Matt. xvi. 27, ep- 
■X^EcrdaL kv Trj ^0^77, xxv. 31. ku VE(pi\\i^ 
Lu, xxi. 27. iv (pXoyi Trupos, Acts vii. 
30 ; of clothing, &c. Matt. xi. 8, ku /JLaXa- 
/co'ts l.aaTiots, &c. So ki/ arapKi^ clothed 
with Jiesli^ 1 John iv. 2. X^yv kv arapKi^ Gal. 

11, 20, et al. Hence of that tuith which 
any one is furnished, which he carries 
with hira, &c. 1 Cor. iv. 21, kv pd(3du) 
'iXdco. Heb. ix. 25. Metaph. Lu. i. 17, kv 
Trvs.vfxaTL kol dwdfisL, Rom. xv. 29, Eph. 
vi. 2. Sept. — II. of TIME, 1) of time 
when, i. e. a definite point or period, 
during, on, at which any thing takes place. 
Matt. ii. 1, kv TifJLipaL^ 'Upcodov. iii. 1, et 
al. ssepiss. 2) of time how long, i. e. a 
space, or period, within which any thing 
takes place, in, within, as kv Tpialv v/uii- 
paL9, Matt, xxvii. 40. Mk. xv. 20, et al. 
Sept. and Class. — III. metaph. of the 
state, condition, or manner, in which one is, 
moves, or acts ; or of the occasion, means, 
on, in, by, through, which one is affected, 
moved, acted upon, &c. 1) of the state, 
condition, or circumstances, in which a 
person or thing is, and that whether exter- 
nal or internal, as a state of mind and feel- 
ing, kv kKCTTuaii, kv yjapa, kv aordEVELa 
Kal kv (p6(3cp, kv dTTOKaXuxkei, kv d<ppo- 
(Tvvr}, &c. In this usage kv with its dat. 
is often equiv. to an adj. or an adv. 2) of 
the business, employment, or action, in 
which any one is engaged, Matt. xxi. 22, 
kv irpocTEvyri. Mk. iv. 2, kv Ty Sidaxy 
avTov, ' as he taught.' Lu. xxiv. 35. x^i. 

10. John viii. 3. Acts vi. 1. xxiv. 16. 
Rom. i. 9. xiv. 18. xv. 58. 1 Cor. xv. 1. 
2 Cor. iv. 2. Col. i. 10. 1 Tim. iv. 15, et 
al. seepe. So with dat. of person, i. e. 'in 
the w^ork or cause of any one,' Rom. xvi. 

12, 77Ti5 TToWd kKOTriacTEV kv K. Rom. 
vi. 3. 1 Cor. iv. 17. Eph. vi. 21, et al. Also 
imply, in tlie poicer of ^ny one, Actsiv. 12, 

OVK ECTTLV kv dWo) Ou6evI 7] <TU3T)]pLa. 

V. 4. So kv TTVEVfxaTL, uudcr the influ- 
ence of the Spirit,' in a state of inspira- 
tion, Matt. xxii. 43. Mk. xii. 36. Lu. ii. 
27. iv. 1. ix. 1, et al. Also of demoniacs, 
kv TTVEVfiaTL aKaddoTo^, Mk. i. 23. v. 2. 
3) of the manner or mode, i. e. the state or 
circumstances, external or internal, by 
"which any action is accompanied, in refer- 
ence to which it is performed, whether of 
manner gener. whereby an action is done, 
or of a rule, law, or standard, in, by, ac- 
cording to, as Matt. vii. 2, kv to KpifxaTL 
KpivETE, KpLdnoTEcrdE. Lu. i. 8. Phil. i. 8. 
1 Thess. iv. 15. 1 Tim. i. 18. Heb. iv. 11, 
et al. saepe : in the sense as to, in respect 
to, Lu. i. 7, 18, TTpo^i^^KEvaL Ev v/ixipai^. 
Gal. iv. 20, OTL dTropo\jp.ai kv v/uuv. Eph. 

11. 11. Tit. i. 13. Ja. ii. 10. iii. 2; also after 
words signifying plenty, or ivant, Rom, xv. 

13, ■TTEpicrcTEVELv kv kXiridi, Eph. ii. 4, 



'TrXovcno? kv kXkEL, et al. 4) of the 
groimd, occasion, iri or on which any thing 
rests, exists, or takes place, and that both 
of a person or thing in or on which any 
thing rests, (1 Cor. ii. 5. 2 Cor. iv. 10. 
Gal. vi. 17, et ssepiss.) and espec. of the 
motive, in consequence of which any action 
is performed, in, on, at, by. Matt. vi. 7. 
Acts vii. 29. 1 Cor. xi. 2. 2 Cor. vi. 12. 
1 Pet. iv. 16. Also of the ground, or oc- 
casion, of an emotion of mind after words 
expressing joy, wonder, hope, confidence, 
&c. Lu. i. 21, kdavixa\ov kv tw xpovVC^ELv 
avTov. Lu. X. 20. Acts vii. 41. Rom. ii. 
23. Eph. iii. 13, et al. 5) of the means 
whereby any thing takes place, in, i. e. by 
means of, with dat. both of person, by 
whose aid or intervention any thing is 
done. Matt. ix. 34. Acts iv. 9. xvii. 28. 
1 Cor. XV. 22, et al. ; or of things, used of 
such means as imply that the object affect- 
ed is actually in and among them. Matt, 
viii. 32, diriQavov kv toX<s vdacn, ' in and 
by the waters.' 1 Cor. iii. 13, kv Trvpl 
diroKaXv'KTETaL. Rev. xiv. 10, et al. 
From the Hebr. as said of price or ex- 
change. Rev. V. 9. In composition kv im- 
ports, 1. a being or resting in, as eveljull, 
k/uL/uLEvu) : 2. into, with verbs of motion, as 
kjULlSaLva) : 3. conformity, &c. as.ti/^tKos, 
Evvoixo's : 4. participation, as lyoxos. 

'^vajKaXiX^o fxai, f. icroiJLai, 
djKdXri,) to take into on£''s arms, Matt.ix. 
36. X. 16. Sept. and Class. 

'Ej/aXios, ov, 6, 17, adj. {kv, 0X9,) he- 
longing to the sea, Ja. iii. 7, epttetcov kuI 
kvaXioov, sc. X^odwv, 

"l^vavTL, adv. prop, over against, Sindi 
hence in the presence of, before, Lu. i. 8, 
and Septe 

'EvavT Lav, adv. (neut. of adj. kvav- 
Tto?,) prop, over against ; hence, before, 
in tJie presence of, foil, by gen. of pers. 
Mk. ii. 12. Acts viii. 32. Sept. and Class. 
From the Hebr. in the sight of. Acts vii. 

10, eScokev avTco X^P'-^ — ^* ^apaw, ivitJl 
him, Lu. xxiv. 19, Bwolto^ k. tov Beov, 

i. e. 'God being judge,' Sept. Gen. xxi. 

11, et al. 

'Ei/ai/Tto9, a, ov, adj. [dvTLO^ for 
dvTL^ over against, opposite to. 1) prop, 
of persons and things, Horn. II. ix. 190, ol 
— kvavTLo? rjcTTo. So k^ kvavTia^ as adv. 
with gen. over against, Mk. xv. 39. Of a 
ivind, adverse, contrary. Matt. xir. 24. 
Acts xxvii. 4. 2) metaph. of persons, 
adverse, hostile. Acts xxviii. 17. 1 Thess. 

ii. 15. Sept. and Class. So b k^ kvav- 
nria^ equiv. to o kvavTio^, an enemy. Tit. 
ii. 8. 

''Evdpxo^ai, f. ^Ofxai, {dpxofJ-cih) 
lit. to make a beginni?ig in, i. e. to begin. 



E N A 



125 



EN A 



absol. Gal. iii. 3 ; foil, by acc. Phil. i. 6. 
Sept. and Class. 

'Ei/^£VS, ££0s 0U9, o, 7?, adj. {kvSiu)^) 
in icant^ iudigejit^ destitute^ Acts iv. 34. 
Sept. and Class. 

"Ei/^f ly/ua, aT09, to, {evSelkwiull^) 
indicatio7i^ token^ proofs 2 Th.i.5, & Class. 

'^voELKvv fxL^ f. €ijoo, prop. to pohit 
oiity as it were with the finger, any person 
or thing exposed to view, see Polyb. iii. 
54, 3, shoM'ing what it is in itself ; also, to 
show any thing to be in a place, by with- 
drawing what hides it from view ; and also 
fig. to shoic any quality to he inherent in 
any person or tiling, and thus to disclose 
its nature and properties. So Plato, p. 
278, D. ivdeLKuvvaLTi^v avTijv bjiOLOTt^Ta 
Kal (pvcTLv iv aiucpOTspoL's ouarav. But 
in N. T. and mostly in Class, the middle 
form is alone found, EvdeLKw/uLaL^ 1) to 
slwiv forth ^ or manifest publicly, prop, any 
thing relating to or depending upon one- 
self, but often on others, Rom. ii. 15, kvd. 
TO 'ipyou Tov vo/uLov ypaTTTOV kv Tats 
Kapdlai^ avTcov. ix. 17, ttju ^vvaixiv 
juLov. 2 Cor. viii. 24. Eph. ii. 7. 1 Tim. 
i. 16. Tit. ii. 10, iriaTLv eud. iii. 2. Heb. 
vi. 10, sq. Sept. and Class. 2) by impl. 
to manifest oneself to any one, by evincing 
certain qualities to them. So Thuc. iv. 
126. Diod. Sic. vol. x. 171, Bip. fxeyd- 
\tiv v^pLv Ty Trpea-^eLo. kvEdsi^aTO. And 
hence, ]ike prcestare and eocJiibere in Latin, 
it comes to mean patrare^ facere^ as said 
of things evil, 2 Tim. iv. 14, ttoWu /ulol 
KUKO. kvsdEL^aTO. So Sept. Gen. 1. 15, 
17, /ca/ca d iueSEL^d/uLEda £ts axjTov. 

*Ey^£i^is, foos, 77, {kvoELKvvfXL^) prop. 
a pointing out of any object, Polyb. iii. 38, 
5; in N. T. fig. 1) manifestation^ declara- 
tion^ Rom. iii. 25, sq. £ts evSel^lv t^s 
diKaLOcrvv7]9 avTOv. Philo, t. i. p. 9, 50. 
2) indication, plain joroo/^ tofa, equi v. to 
ev6Ety/xa, 2 Cor. viii. 24, ttjv evS. t^s 
dyoLTn^^ v/uLcoi/. Phil. i. 28, £. aTrcoXELa^. 

"EyoE/ca, ol, at, t^, card. num. eleven ; 
in N. T. only of the eleven apostles, Matt, 
xxviii. 16. Mk. xvi. 1 4, et al. 

*Ei/<5£/caTo?, 1], o2/, ordin. eleventh^ 
Matt. XX. 6, 9. Rev. xxi. 20. 

^^v^ixo fxai, f. ^ofxaL, prop, to take 
or receive i. e. among any persons or 
things, to admit, Thuc. iii. 31. In N. T. 
occ. only in the impers. form, kv^i^ETai, 
lit. 'admissible, or occurrible,' Lu. xiii. 
33, and ovk evS. equiv. to dviv^EKTov 
£o-Tt, xvii. 1, 'it can scarcely happen,' 
Thuc. i. 121. Demosth. ovk kvS. &c. 

'Ei/^t]jU£W, f. tJcto), {Evdrj/ULO^,) prop. 
to be among one's own people, to be at 
home, as opp. to £/c^. or dirod. Jos. Ant. 



iii. 11, 3. Theod. Hist. E. iv. Kal kudi]- 
fJiOVVTL Kal kK^r]p.ovvTL (Tvvriu. In N. T, 
fig. to be resident in any place, with any 
person, 2 Cor. v. 6, kv^. kv tw cruifxaTi^ 
to live ; and v. 8, kv^. Trpos tov JLvpiov^ 
to divell, be with, Comp. Phil. i. 23, avv 

X/OtCTTW El.vaL. 

'Ei/5t6u cr/cw, (equiv. to kv^vco or kv- 
Suvco,) to clothe any one in a garment, and 
mid. to clothe oneself therewith, to ivear ; 
foil, by acc. Lu. viii. 27, IpidTiov ovk k. 
and xvi. 19, eveS. iropcpvpav. Sept. and 
Judith ix. 1. 

"Ez/^t/cos, ou, 6, 17, adj. lit. 'agreeable 
to right and justice,' 6 kv SUri wV, 'right 
and just.' Anon. ap. Suid. &vSlko9 riv j8a- 
(rt\£6o§, opp. to ekSiko^, Soph. Aj. 1282. 
Anthol. Gr. i. 216, to. jULtivSiKa, In 
N. T. applied only to punishments, Rom. 
iii. 8, wv TO KpijuLu 'ivd. kcTTi. Heb. ii. 2, 
Evd, jmiada'TrodoarLav. Comp. Pollux, 'iv- 
Slko^ KoXacri^ : and Epigr. AaodiKfj Xaots 

EvSlKa TLVVVfXEVr]. 

'KvSo lULTI or £0)5, ^, {kvSoiULEU),) prOp. 

something built in, an interior structure, as 
opp. to an exterior one. In N. T. said of 
a structure gener. Rev. xxi. 18, ?? kvdSjiir}- 
cris TOV TELXovs, at least according to the 
interpretation of Commentators. The 
term, however, signifies, not structure, but 
superstructure, as built upon another that 
forms the foundation. So Jos. Ant. xv. 

9, 6, speaking of the mole, or superstruc- 
ture, built in forming the artificial harbour 
of Caesarea, says, 77 ^£ kvd6fir](TL9 oarrjv 
kvE^aXETO KaTCL Tr}9 daXaTTrj^. This 
kvSojULfjarL^, indeed, was the superstructure 
raised on a lower structure, which formed 
the foundation of the lofty and vast walls 
of the edifice, and was indeed the wall 
itself, as is here implied. So Herodot. i. 
179, describing the mode of building the 
city wall of Babylon, says, that ' after dig- 
ging the ditch, they made bi^icJcs of the 
earth thrown up, and burnt them in fur- 
naces, and laying three courses of brick- 
work, E^Eipav irpcoTa julev t^s Tacppov 
TO. The term kvSofxricrL^ is 
well adapted to express the above sense, 
since kvdijULot) and kv^EL/naadaL are terms 
used of the building of walls themselves ; 
and the kv has reference to the ditch on 
the bank of which the wall was erected. 
See Thuc. iv. 90, 2. 

'Ei/^o^a^w, f. dew, {evSo^o^,) to 
glorify, lit. ' to cause to be in glory or 
honour ;' occ. in pass, or mid. 2 Thess. i. 

10, 12, where observe the formula kvdo- 
l^aadrjvai ev tlvl : signifying, ' to get glory 
from another's good or evil,' so that one 
may be praised as its author ; but here de- 
noting, ' that God may gain glory by the 
eternal happiness to which he will raise 

G3 



E N A 



126 



ENE 



believers."' Comp. Exod. xiv. 4. Ezek. 
xxviii. 22. 

"Ej^^o^os, ou, o, 77, adj. (sz/, (5o^a,) prop, 
for iu do^rj wi/, and used, I. of persons 
honoured^ 1 Cor. iv. 10. Sept. and Class. 
— II. of THINGS, e. gr. deeds, to. evdo^a^ 
glorious^ memorable, Lu. xiii. 17. Sept. 
also of apparel, splendid, Lu. vii. 25. Sept. 
and Class. Fig. iKKXrjaia &. Eph. v. 27, 
of 'the Church adorned in pure and 
splendid raiment,' a bride. Comp. v. 25, 
and Rev. xix. 7, 8. xxi. 9, sq. 

"Ftudv fiia, aT09, to, prop, clothing, 
Matt. vi. 25, 28. xxviii. 3. Lu. xii. 23. 
Sept. and later Class. Said of the outer 
garment, a cloah of camel's hair, such as 
the ancient prophets wore, in contempt of 
earthly grandeur, Matt. iii. 4. Also a 
robe, such as was presented at feasts to 
guests, (see Gen. xlv. 22. Judg. xiv. 12. 
2 Kings V. 5, 22,) Matt. xxii. 11, sq. 
metaph. Matt. vii. 15, kv hdufxacn Trpo- 

'Ef^i/va/xow, f. 0)0-0), prop, to invi- 
gorate, impart strength to, trans, and pass, 
or mid. to acquire strength, become strong. 
Said prop, of the body, Heb. xi. 34, and 
fig. of the mind and soul, Acts ix. 22. 
Rom. iv. 20. Eph. vi. 10. Phil. iv. 13. 
1 Tim. i. 12. 2 Tim. ii. 1. iv. 17, and 
Sept. 

'^vBv'v UD, or 'Evou'o), f. u<to), (^uo), to 
go in, or into ; also to cause to go into, to 
envelope,) I. to go in, or irito, 2 Tim. 

iii. 6, £. £i9 Tos 0LKLa<s. Hdot. ii. 121, 2, 
EuSvuTO'S scil. £§ TO OLKrjfxa. — II. to put 
on, lit. to cause to go into, to clothe or 
dress, trans, and foil, by double acc. of 
pers. and thing, pass, or mid. to be 
clothed, or to clothe oneself, 1 ) prop. Matt, 
vi. 25, TL lvdvcr7]arde. xxii. 11. xxvii. 31, 
and oft. and Sept. and Class. Said of 
armour, &c. Rom. xiii. 12. Eph. vi. 11, 
14. 1 Thess. V. 8. Sept. and Class. 2) 
metaph. both of the soul, as clothed with 
the body, 2 Cor. v. 3, stys kul ivdvad- 
fxevoL : and also of a person, as ' clothed,' 
i. e. endued, with any power or quality, 
&c. Lu. xxiv. 49. 1 Cor. xv. 53, sq. £i/<5. 
cTTrXdyyva oiKTipfxov, Col. iii. 12, and 
Sept. Also of one who assumes a new 
character, k. tov kcilvov avdpcoTrov, Eph. 

iv. 24. Col. iii. 10. svS. tov Kvp. 'to be 
endued with a spirit like his,' Rom. xiii. 
14. Gal. iii. 27, and Class. 

"Ey^ucrts, £ws, rj, {evovo),) a putting 
on, or ivearing of clothes, 1 Pet. iii. 3. 

'F^viSpa, as, 77, {ev, sSpa,) a lying-in- 
wait, prop, in war, an ambuscade, Sept. 
and Class. In N. T. a lying-in-ivait to 
kill any one, Acts xxv. 3. 1 Mace. i. 36. 

'Ei/£^/0£uo), f. Evcru}, {ei/sdpa,) prop. 
to lie in ambuscade, Sept. and Class. ; in 



N. T. to lie-in-wait to kill any one. Acts 
xxiii. 21 ; also by impl. to lie in wait for, 
or in order to ensnare any one in his 
words, Lu. xi. 54. Sept. and Class. 

"Ei/£^poi/, ou, TO, equiv, to kviopa. 
Acts xxiii. 16, in later Edd. for the vulg. 
kvihpa. 

'KvEiXiw, f. -T^cro), to roll up in, or 
tvrap up in ; foil, by acc. and dat. Mk. 
XV. 46, kvEiXi^crs, scil. avTOv, cnv- 
SovL : said by Lexicographers not to be 
elsewhere so applied, but it occurs in 
Artem. i. 13, ol dTrodvi'icrKovTE^ kcr^Lcr- 
IxivoL'S kvEiKovvTaL paKecnv. 'EytA.to'O'co 
occurs in Plato, p. 220, B. kpEiXLy/xivaw 
Tous 'TToda^ Eh ttlXov?. 

"Eyfii^ui, prop, to be in any place, and 
fig. to be in or ivith, in the same place 
with, any person, Xen. Mem. i. 2, 28. 
In N. T. it occ. in the impers. form eve(ttl, 
or contr. evl, 'there is with or among^ 
Gal. iii. 28, ou/c evl scil. kv vjxiv. Col. iii. 

11, oTTou ovK EVL. Ja. i. 17, Trap' <Z ovk 
EVL. Thus TO. kvovTa, prop, things within, 
' what is within any thing,' as a vessel, 

1 Mace. V. 5, and Class. In N. T. Lu. 
xi. 41, fig. Tfi kvovTa Sote kXErj/Jioa-uvriv, 
q. d. ' Give that within the cup as alms.' 

"KvEKa or "^VEKEV, prep, governing the 
genit. for, on account of, because of by 
reason of Matt. v. 10. x. 18, and oft. In 

2 Cor. vii. 12, it occurs with artic. and in- 
fill. ELVEKEV TOV (pavEpooQrivaL. 

'l^v ip y ELa, a?, 17, [kvEpyt]^,) prop. 
energy, efficacy, lit. the being at work, Eph. 
i. 19, KaTct Tr]v kvkpyELav tov Kp6c.Tov<5. 
iii. 7. iv. 16. Col. i. 29 ; espec. as ex- 
hibited in miracles, Phil. iii. 21. Col. ii. 

12, or false and pretended miracles, 
2 Thess. ii. 9 ; also, by meton. put for the 
tvorks themselves, 2 Thess. ii. II, kvkp- 
yELav irXdvr]^. 

'Ei/£py£o), f. ricruj, {kvEpyt}?,) to be 
effective or operative. It occurs in N. T. 
in two uses, I. intrans. as said of things, 
to be active, or effective, to %mrk. Matt, 
xiv. 2. Mk. vi. 14, al cwdjUiEL^ kvEp- 
yovcTLv kv avTtp, 'the power of miracles 
works in him,' i. e. miracles are wrought 
by him, Eph. i. 20. ii. 2. Phil. ii. 13, to 
kvEpyETv : with dat. of person. Gal. ii. 8^ 
o kvEpynaa? liiTpio, i. e. ' effected in the 
case of Peter.' So Prov. xxxi. 12, yvvi] 
dvopELa EVEpyEl tw dvdpi £ts dyadd, 
and Class. — II. trans, foil, by acc. of 
thing, but said of persons, I Cor. xii. 6, 6 
kvEpytov Td irdvTa. Gal. iii. 5. Eph. i. 
11. Phil. ii. 13, 6 kvEpyuiv kv rjj^LV to 
^eXelv, Sec. Jos. B. iv. 6, I. Diod. Sic. 
xiii. 95. — III. MID. to shoiv oneself active, 
to operate, be active, said only of things, 
Rom. vii. 5, kvrjpyElTO kv TOts iuleXe(tlv. 
vpLcov. 2 Cor. i. 6. iv. 12. Gal. v. 6. Eph. 



ENE 



127 



ENN 



iii.20. Col. i. 29. 1 Thess. ii. 13. 2Thess. 
ii. 7, and later Class. Partic. evspyov- 
/ULEV09 for adj. evepyj]^, or partic. act. 
ivEpyovara (as Wisd. xv. 11, x/auxj/ ivEp- 
yovcra). Ja. v. 16, ^tt^crts hspyov/xivi]. 

'Kvt pytj /na, aT09, to, {ivEpytco^) 
prop, something icroui/ht^ ' some effect pro- 
duced or operation worked out,' 1 Cor. 
xii. 6, 10, li/epyv/uiaTa dvuajuLicou^ ' effects 
wrought by the gift of working miracles.' 
See my note. 

'Ei/£joy?>5, £09, o, T7, adj. (si/, spyov^) 
active^ elective, Thuc. iii. 17, z/t^es svepyoL. 
Heb. iv. 12, Xo'yos e. 1 Cor. xvi. 9, 
^vpa L i. e. ' presenting opportunity for 
great effects.' 

"Ei/t for 'ii/£<TTL, see^Ej/Ei/xt. 

'Er/fuXoy £ w, f. tJcco, prop, to praise 
or or through any one. In N. T. 

only in pass, to be blessed^ or made happy, 
Acts iii. 25, kv tw aTrip/JLaTL <tov kvzv- 
\oy. irda-aL at Trarptai. Gal. iii. 8. Sept. 

'E 1/ £ X w, f. Jo), gener. = iTrixco-, to have 
in any person or thing, or to keep hold o/*any 
person or thing, I. act. to have in oneself^ 
foil, by dat. of pers. implying a disposition 
of mind toicards a person or action, whe- 
ther favourable, (as Jambl. Vit. Pyth, 6, 
kviy^udv. vovv irpo's to fxavddvELV,) or un- 
favourable, as in N. T. Mk. vi. 19, 'Hp. 
kvEl^EV (scil. xo'^oi/) avTcp. Lu. xi. 53, 
Selvu)9 kvix^i-v. Sept. in Gen. xlix. 23, 
kvELXpv avTM KvpioL To^EV jmaTcov. The 
ellipsis is supplied in Herodot. i. 118, 
KpvTTTwv Tov oi kvELXEE yoXov^ aud 
vi. 119, EVELXE crcpL oELvov x6\ov. Thus 
it is equiv. to kyKOTElv^ to bear a grudge 
against any one. — II. pass. kvixop-dL^ to 
he held in by any thing, as ropes, nets, &c. 
Pausan. Lacon. 75, k. Tais irooaL^. He- 
rodot. ii. 121, 2, tt7 irdyr) kvEXEo-dai : 
but gener. metaph. to be entangled in any 
thing which hampers the mind, and impedes 
the course of action. Thus it is applied 
to laivs^ ordinances, &c. to which men are 
subject, whether political, as Plut. viii. 
518, kv. Soy/nacTL., or religious, as Gal. 
v, 1, X^vyw 8ov\ELa^ kvix^tyOccL. 

'Ez/0a^€, adv. of place, a lengthened 
form from £V6a, and intended, from the 
force of the ^£, (which is equiv. to our 
termination ward^) to modify the sense of 
£j/0a. Thus the meaning is either, as said 
of place WHITHER, there-ward., i. e. there- 
abouts^ whither., or hither^ John iv. 15, sq. 
Acts xxv. 17, and Class. ; or 2) of place 
WHERE, here-ward., hereabouts^ Lu. xxiv. 
41. Acts X. 18. xvi. 28, et al. and Class. 

^Ey0£i/, adv. demonstr. hence., from 
this place, Lu. xvi. 26, and Class. 

'E.v6v jULEo fxai., f. yia-ojULaL, dep. mid. 
(fi/, 3'Uyuo5,) to take into and have in the 
mind, to think upon., trans. Matt. i. 20. 



ix. 4. Thuc. V. 32. Xen. Mem. i. 7, 2; 
foil, by TTEpl and gen. Wisd. vi. 15. 

'El/0U/X17 O-tS, £W9, 77, {kvOv/JLtO/ULaL.,) 

1 ) ' the act of taking any thing in mind,' 
i. e. thought., cogitation., Matt. ix. 4. xii. 25. 
Heb. iv. 12. Thuc. i. 132. 2) by impl., 
as the effect of cogitation, i?ivention., device^ 
Sic. Acts xvii. 29, x^P^7H-<^ tex^v^ «at 
kvdvfxyia-Eco^. 

'Ei/tai/To?, ou, 6, a year; so called 
because in that period the system of 
things goes or returns upon itself : in the 
words of Virg. Georg. ii. 402, Atque in se 
sua per vestigia volvitur annus. John xi. 
49, 51 . xviii. 13, et al. ssepe, in N. T. and 
Class. ; also, by Hebr., put for any defi- 
nite time, as we say csra, Lu. iv. 19, 
kvLavTov Kvpiov Sektov. 

'EvioTTr] fjLi., prop, to stand in or upon. 
In N. T. fig, to stand near, be at hand., 
impend, 2 Th. ii. 2. 2 Tim. iii. 1. 2 Mace, 
iv, 43, and Class. Part. perf. kvE(jr(j}^y 
present, Rom. viii. 38, ovte kv. ovte fxiX- 
XovTa. 1 Cor. iii. 22. vii. 26, Gal. i. 4. 
Heb. ix. 9, and Class. 

'Ey icxu f. vara), prop, to be strong in. 
In N. T. 'to zVstrengthen ;' 1) in trans. 
to be invigorated, become strong, Acts ix. 
19. Sept. and Class. 2) trans, in Sept. 
and N. T. to cause to strengthen, invi- 
gorate ; foil, by acc. of pers. Lu. xxii. 43, 
and Sept. 

"EiVvaTo?, 7], ov, ordin. adj. ninth. 
Matt. XX. 5, et al. 

'Eyi/£a, OL, al, rd, card. num. nineJjM. 
xvii. 17. 

'KwEvt^KovTaEvvia, ol, ai, tu, 
card. num. ninety-nine, Matt, xviii. 12, sq. 
Lu. XV. 4, 7. 

'Ei'i;£0 9, a, 01/, (or 'Ei/£09,) "^xo^.dumb 
by nature, incapable of speech. So Plato 
p. 206, o fxi] kvEO^, 7] Kuxpo^ dir' dpxv^- 
Also deaf and dumb. Is. Ivi. 10. Ep. Jer. 
41. Joseph. Ant. iv. 8, 32. Xen. Anab. 
iv. 6, 23. And fig. speechless, i. e. ' de- 
prived of the power of speech,' from some 
strong passion, as fear, wopder, &c. Acts 

ix. 7, ELCTT'nKELaraV EVVEo'l. 

'Ej/i/£uto, f. Evaw, innuo, to nod, or 
make signs {kv)byi\\e head, eyes, or'hands, 
Lu. i. 62, kvEvEvov Tto iraTpl, i. e. 'inti- 
midated by nods or signs.' 

"Kwoia, as, 77, (li/, I/O U9,) prop. W/*7/-a^ 
passes in the mind., the image or idea 
formed in the mind by the act of thinking, 
a mental conception or notion, Xen. Cyr. i. 
1, 1. Diog. Laerl. iii. 79, k. KaXov : also 
the thinking facidty. In N. T. I. by me- 
ton. of effect for cause, thought, in the 
sense purpose, counsel, Heb. iv. 12, KpiTi- 
Kd<3 kvvoLcov Kap6La<3. Prov. iii. 21 ; and 
G 4 



ENN 



128 



ENT 



so vovfiara in 2 Cor. ii. 11. x. 5. — II. 
with refer, to the prim, sense, mind, i. e. 
mode oft}dnhing and feeling^ disposition and 
manners (mores)^ inasmuch as they proceed 
from the thoughts and feelings of the mind. 
See Matt. xii. 34, sq. xv. 18, 19. So 1 Pet. 
iv. 1, avri]v 'ivvotav oirXicraads : 

also Wisd. ii. 14, kyiv^TO vfxiv £ts 'i\£.y- 

yOV EUVOLWV VfXtjoV. 

"Ei/yo/Lto9, ou, 6, 77, adj. i/o/xos,) 
prop, within law^ I. legitimate^ appointed 
or sanctioned by law ; and, like Trapdvofxcs^ 
used both of persons and things, but espec. 
the latter. So Acts xix. 39, kv rrj kv- 
vofJLio e/c/cXijo-iot. Luc. Cone. Deor. 14, 
EKK\i]aLa<s ayo/X£i/?js. Plato 413, E. tto- 
XiTEia 'iv. Polyb. ii. 47, 3, (SaaiXsia e. 
But the sense in the passage of Luke is 
rather, ' the regular assembly,' i. e. some 
one of the assemblies fixed for transacting 
public business. — II. as said of a person 
only, suhlex (as opp. to eoclex)^ under the 
law^ 1 Cor. ix. 21, euvo/jlo^ 'KpLcrroo^ 
' bound to obedience unto Christ.' 

"Ei/i/uxos, oi>, 6, 77, adj. (Ii/, i/uj,) by 
night, nightly, Homer and other Class. ; in 
N. T. only neut. 'ivvvy^ov ^ith ellip. of 
KuTci, as in the adv. by night, Mk. i. 35, 
TT/owt Evv. Xiav, ' very early, while yet in 
the night.' 3 Mace. v. 5. 

'EvoiKTEw, f. 770-60, prop. to dicell vi, in- 
habit any place, whether country or city, 
Xen. QEc. iv. 13. In N. T. metaph. to dicell 
in or with any one, to be in, said of the in- 
dwelling of the Holy Spirit in Christians, 
Rom. viii. 11. 2 Tim. i. 14. So in Jos. 

Bell. Vi. 1, 6, kuCOKEL Ti.9 VOMLK}] xf/VXV 

Xetttco (TcoixaTL. Also said of the Divi'ne 
presence, aid, and blessing, 2 Cor. vi. 16, 
ivoLKricrui kv auTois. Compare 1 Cor. 
iii. 16. Lev. xx\d. 12. Ezek. xxxvii. 
27. And so Plato, 549, B, says of God^ 

09 jULOVO^ (TCOTi^p a.pETrj9 kvOLKEL TCp 

E^ovTL. Also, applied to the ' word of 
Christ,' the Gospel, Col, jii. 6, which may 
be said ' to dwell in a person.' when it is 
suffered to sink deep into the heart, so as 
to be diligently studied, and carefully 
practised. So Test. xii. Patr. 539, ovk 
kvoLKi]aEv kv avTco ov^kv irovripov. Lastly, 
of faith in the Gospel, 2 Tim. i. 5, ttLcttl^ 
77Tts kvcjpKTia-E kv. Sec, which, it is thus 
intimated, is deep-rooted in the heart, as 
a principle of action. 

'EyoT7]§, T77TOS, 77, (sT?,) Ht. onencss, 
unity, Eph. iv. 3, 13, 77 kv. tt}^ ttlc-teco?, 
agreement as to the doctrines of the faith. 
So Clem. Alex. Str. vi. 13, kv. t^s ttl- 

'Eyo)(X£a), f. 7j(ra), (6)(\£cofr. 6xXo<s,) 
prop, to excite tumidt in or among any per- 
sons ; and hence gener. to peHurb, disturb 
them. Absol. Heb. xii. 15, ixr, tis pi\a. 



TTLKpia^ kvoxXy, give troiMe. So Xen. 
Cyr. viii. 3, 9, EiraLov, el Tts kvoyXoir). 

"E 1/ o xo 5, 01;, 6, 77, adj. ( kvE\ofxaL,^Q(\\nN. 
to part. EvEyppiEvo^, held fast by, hound 
to, any thing, as Anthol. Gr. i. p. 179, kir 
ayKvpri's evo^ov (Sdpo^. In N. T. metaph. 
subject to, liable to, e. g. judgment, &c. in 
various modifications, 1. prop. foil, by 
dat. of the tribunal, for the punishment 
denounced by that tribunal, Matt. v. 21, 

sq. EV. KpicTEL, TCO (TWEOptu) alsO 22, 

£. £is Trjv yEEvvav, scil. jSdXXEcrdaL, as 
Numb, XXXV. 31, ev. dvaLpEdtjvai. The 
dat. occ. in Gen. xxv. 11, ev. ^avuTtp : 
also in Class, with vo/ulu}, kp'lctel, ypa(^^. 
Also with gen. Heb. ii. 15, evoxol dov- 
Xe'lu^, subjects of bondage. So, too, of 
punishment, evoxo's ^avdTov, ^ a subject 
of death,' guilty of (crime which is ob- 
noxious to) cZea/A, Matt. xx%^. 66. Mk.xiv. 
64. iii. 29, ev. aiojvLov KpicTEw^. Dera. 
229, 11. — II. in the sense chargeable with., 
guilty of, foil, by gen. of that in, or in 
respect of, which the crime is committed, 
1 Cor. xi. 27, EV. Tov crcopaTo^ Kal aifxa- 
T05 TOV ILvpiov. Ja. ii. 10, iravrixiv I. 
Sept. and later Class. 

"^VTaXpia, T09, TO, {kvTiXXofiaL,) 
equiv. to kvToXii, a mandate or ordinance. 
Matt. XV. 9. Mk.^di.7. Col. ii. 22, & Sept. 

'YaVT a<p L(iX,Oii, f. dcru), [kvTacpLO^, fr. 
kv, Ta0o9, plur. Tct kvTacpLa,) ' to make 
all due preparation for burying a corpse,' 
as washing, laying out, anointing, embalm- 
ing, decorating, clothing, &c. in the man- 
ner of the ancients, trans. Matt. xxvi. 12. 
John xix. 40. Sept. Gen. 1. 2, 3. Plut. x. 
138. Anthol. Gr. iv. p. 137. 

'Ey-ra^ tacr/Aos, ov, 6, preparation 
for bunal, by washing, lading out, em- 
balming, &c. Mk. xiv. 8. John xii. 7. 

'KvteXXo pLUL, f. TEXovpiai, dop. mid. 
to enjoin on, charge tuith ; foil, by ace. of 
thing, and dat. of pers. or both, sometimes 
left underst. Matt, xxviii. 20, bcra eve- 
TELXdpit]v vp.lv, and xv. 4. xvii. 9. Mk. 
X. 3. xi. 6. John viii. 5, et al. Sept. oft. 
Joseph, and Class. 

'E y T £ u 0 £ y, adv. lit. and prop, from 
here, or there, hence, or thence. Matt. xvii. 
20. Lu. iv. 9, et al. Jos. and Class. So 
kvT. Kal kvT. ' on this side and that,' or 
' on every side,' John xix. 1 8. Rev. xxii, 
2. Fig. of the cause or source of action, 
hejiee, Ja. iv. 1 . Jos. and Class. 

"El/T£ujt9, £0)9, 77, [kvTVyxdl^f^-,) 

prop, and in Class, a falling in icith, meet- 
ing ivith, any one ; also, accosting, address., 
conference ; espec. for the purpose of soli- 
citation or petition. In N. T. entreaty or 
supplication, made from man to God in 
prayer, 1 Tim. ii. 1, iroiEla^ai o£77(r€ts-. 



ENT 



129 



EN Y 



So Pint. Num. 14, TTOLEtadaL -ras irpo^ 
TO ^SLOV £i/T£u^£i?. 1 Tim. iv. 5. 

"Ei/Ti/xo?, ou, o, >7, adj. (for £i/ Ti/uj? 
wi/,) used both of pereons and things, 1) 
of persons, estimable^ dear^ Lu. vii. 2. xiv. 
8. Phil. ii. 29. Sept. and Class. 2) of 
things, precious^ valuable., 1 Pet. ii. 4, 6 ; 
said of a stone, but fig. of a pers. Sept. and 
Class, e. gr. Dem. p. 1285, (tItov e. 

'Ez/ToX?/, ^5, 77, (ei/TeXXo/uat,) gener. 
precept., command., I. iii junction., direction., 
John X. 18, kvT. 'iXa^ov Trapd tov Ila- 
Tpo's ^ou, & xii. 49, sq. et al. Sept. & Class. 
Also, cliargc., or edict, from magistrates, 
John xi. o7, hi^ovai I. Sept. 2 Chron. 
XXXV. 16. — II. precept., or law, said 1) of 
the traditions of the Rabbins, Tit. i. 14, 
2) of the precepts and doctrines of Jesus, 
John xiii. 34. xv. 12. 1 Cor. xiv. 37, et 
al. 3) of the precepts and commandments 
of God, 1 Cor. Y\\. 19. 1 John iii. 22, sq, 
et al., and Sept. oft. 4) of the precepts 
of the Mosaic law, in whole or part, Matt. 
V. 19. xix. 17. xxii. 36, et al. ssepe, and 
Sept. 5) of any precepts given to Christ- 
ians as to doctrine or duty, 1 Tim. vi. 14. 
2 Pet. ii. 21. iii. 2. 

'Ei/TOTTto?, OU, 6, 77, prop. adj. for 6 
iv TOTTM cov., denoting indigenous or native, 
as opp. to new-coming or foreign ; but in 
the later writers it signifies resident in., 
and is with the article a subst., to denote 
an inhabitant of a place., Acts xxi. 12. Occ. 
also in Soph. GEd. Col. 843, & Plato 848, D. 

'Ey TO 5, prop, an adv. (iy) ivithin., as 
often in Homer ; and it is gener. used as a 
prep, with gen. as Lu. xv. 21, evto^ vfXMv, 
* seated in your heart and affections.' The 
phrase to ej/tos, the inside., occurs in Matt, 
xxiii. 26, Sept. and Class. 

'Ei/T/osTToj, f. xl/co, prop, to invert, turn 
any one back; and fig. to turn any one 
hack upon himself by bringing him to 
reflection., and hence to make Mm repent of 
what he has done amiss, or at least to make 
him ashamed thereof. In N. T. I. act. 
1 Cor, iv, 14, ouK kvTpiiroov u/xa? ypdcpco 
TavTa, Pass. 2 Thess. iii. 14. Tit. ii. 8. 
Sept., Apocr., Plato Crit. 14. — II. mid. h- 
TpiirofxaL., to shame oneself before any one., 
i. e. to feel reverence., respect, towards. 
In N. T. and later writers foil, by acc. 
Matt. xxi. 37. Mk. xii. 6. Lu. xviii. 2. 
XX. 13. Heb. xii. 9 ; in earlier writers 
with gen. 

'EvT/o fc(^co, f. £i/6pEi|/a), to nourish ox 
train up in any pursuit ; and pass, to be 
trained up in ; and by impl. to be ivell im- 
bued ivith., skilled in., 1 Tim, iv. 6, kuTps- 
<p6iuLEvo9 Tols Xoyots. So Philo, p. 855, 

EVT. VO/lOl^. 

*Ei/Tpo/uos, ou, 6, J7, adj. lit. in a tre- 



mour., i. e. trembling with fear ; hence kirr. 
y'lVEcrduL or eIvul., Acts vii. 32. Heb. xii. 21. 

'Ei/Tpo7r77, ?;§, 77, (fz/TptTTO),) a put- 
ting to shame., 1 Cor. vi. 5, irpo^ kvTpo- 
TTTjv vfxiv Xiyo). xv. 34, and Sept. 

'KvT pv (p dw., f. 7JO-60, to live lux- 
uriously., and by impl. to revel in., 2 Pet. ii. 
13, £. kv Tot's dTrarats a,, meaning, either 
' revelling, exulting in their o^vn deceits, 
feeling pleasure from deceiving others,' 
(as EVTp. is used in Is. Iv. 2. Ivii. 4, and 
Herodian, iii. 5, 4,) or, 'who by means 
of their deceits live luxuriously.' Thus 
kvTp. is for kv Tpvcprj SLdyovTE<s., the ori- 
ginal sense of kvTpvcpdco, and though 
comparatively rare, yet found in Xen. 
Hist. iv. 1, 13, 77cr)(ui'67] kvTpv(pt]crai. 
Dio Cass. 1074, 83, tov kv avTto (sc. Tra- 
XaTict)) kvTpv(p7]aravTa, 

'FiVTvyx^v(^, f- sv^OfxaL^ prop, fall 
in icith., or to light upon, any one ; foil, by 
dat. Xen. Anab. iv. 5, 19 ; also, to come to 
the speech ofanj one, and talk with him, 
Xen. Mem. iii. 2, 1, et al. In N. T. to 
address oneself or apply to any one, usu- 
ally in the way of request or petition, 
Acts XXV. 24, TTEpi ov rrrdv to ttX^Oos — 
svETvxov fjLOL. So Joscph. Ant. xvi. 

6, 5, EVETVyOV fXOL VVV, W§ UTTO TLVCOV 

(TVKocpavTcov E7rr]pEd'(^0LVT0. Philo, p. 629. 
2 Mace. iv. 36. Wisd. viii, 21, and later 
Class. Hence, to address oneself in the 
way of iiiterposition, or intercession for any 
one with another ; foil, by dat. expr. or 
impl,, and vTrkp or KUTa (sometimes 
omitted) with gen. ; for though it is gener. 
implied that the interposition is in favour 
of the person mentioned to the other, as 
Rom. viii. 27, 34, k. tm Qe(Z virkp dyicov., 
virkp vfioou. Heb. vii. 25. Joseph. Ant. 
xiv. 10, 13; yet sometimes agai7ist, as 
Rom. xi. 2, £. Tw Geoj KUTa tov 'Ic- 
paiTiX. 1 Mace. viii. 32. x. 61, xi. 25. j^El. 
V. H. i. 21. Polyb. iv. 30, 1. 

'Ei/TuXio-crco, f. ^60, (fi;, TUX77, cover- 
lid,) to emcra'p or sicathe, trans, with dat. 
of thing, Matt, xxvii. 59. Lu. xxiii. 53, 
k. aivoovL : a funereal term ; so Hesych. 
explains KEipiai by kiridavaTLa kvTETV- 
XiyixEva. Also to fold, icrap up., or to* 
gether, John xx. 7. 

'EyTUTTOo), f. tocro), {kv, tuttos,) to 
enstamp, imprint, impress, engrave. Pass. 
2 Cor. iii. 7, kvTETvirco/JLEVi] kv Xidoi^, 
and later Class. 

'Kvv (3 p lX,co, f. icto, {kv, u/3pi§,) prop. 
' to show insolence, or insult, in the case of 
a person,' i. e. to him. Consequently, the 
proper constr. of the verb is a dat. of pers. 
to instdt over, as always in the Class. In 
N. T. it occ. only at Heb. x. 29, to ILvEvixa 
T7]<s xdp. kvv(3pL(Ta^, insulted, contemned ; 
as also in Joseph. Ant. i. 8, 1. v. 8, 12. 



EN Y 



'Ei/uTTi/ia Jco, f. dcru), as -ofxai^ depon. 
{evvttulov^) prop, to dream^ as often in 
Plutarch, intrans. ; said of visions in 
dreams, Acts ii. 17, euvTrvLu kvvirvia- 
a-Ova-ovTat. Fig. kvvirvLaX^oiJLEvoi^ dream- 
ers^ persons holding vain opinions, as we 
say visionaries^ Jude 8. 

'EvvTTv Lov^ ou, TO, insomnium ^ lit. 
bpafxa, £1009 TO su vTrvto ; for kvvirvLov 
is prop. acc. neut. of the adj. evvttvlo^^ 
occ. in Eurip. Hec. 702, and equiv. to 
EuuTTvo's. So Plut, de Superst. 166, h. 
(pavTaa/uLa^ by ellips. of &Jdo<s, as a subst. 
a dream ^ but said in N. T. of visions in 
dreams, Acts ii. 17, where see my note. 

'E y 60 TT i 0 1', prop. neut. of adj . ei/cottios, 
[ h, a)i^,)but, in use, a prep. gov. the gen. 
in tlie p7xsence of, before ; found only in 
]ater Greek, and almost entirely in the 
Sept. and N. T., where it is used I. prop. 
mostly of jDerso?25, Lu. i. 17, 19. iv. 7. Rev. 
iii. 9. iv. 10. v. 8. xv. 4, et al. ; but some- 
times of things, as svcottiov tov ^povov, 
Rev. i. 4, et al. Sept. in Jos. vi. 4. 1 Sam. 
V. 3. — Hither, too, we may refer the pe- 
culiar use, whereby it marks the manner, 
and espec. the sincerity/, in which any thing 
is done, kvcoiTLOv tou Ghou, God being 
thus regarded as present, and a witness to 
what is said, Rom. xiv. 22. 2 Cor. iv. 2. 

vii. 12, and Sept. So in obtestations, 
hefore God, God being a witness, Gal. i. 
20. 1 Tim. V. 21. vi. 13. 2 Tim.ii. 14. iv. 
1. — II. METAPH. in the sight of, i. e. 'in 
the mind, will, or judgment of any one, 
Lu. i. 6, diKaioL kvwTTLov tov GsoD, and 
15, fxiya's kvwTTLov JLvpiov. Indeed the 
phrase necessarily implies reality, since 
whoever is, in the sight of God, what he 
professes to be to man, cannot but be really 
such as he professes. Lu. xvi. 15. Acts 

viii. 21. Rom. xii. 17. 2 Cor. viii. 21, et 
al. and Sept. From the Hebr. kvunriov 
Tii/os is used where, in Class. Greek, a 
dat. is employed, Lu. xv. 10, X"/°" y'f-vs.- 
Tttt I. Ttof ayyL\(jov, ' there is joy to the 
angels,' they rejoice, and xxiv. 11. Acts vi. 
5, and so in Sept. Such, at least, is the 
interpretation of recent Lexicographers ; 
but there the usual sense, 'in the judg- 
ment or estimation of,' seems preferable. 
Nay, perhaps, the still more Hebraic phrase 
ivpia-KSLV X^P'-^ kvooiTLOv tlvcs, (occurring 
in Acts vii, 46. Exod. xxxiii, 17. Num. 
xi. 11, et al.) maybe so explained, and not 
be regarded, with most recent interpreters, 
as simply for the dat. 

'Ey COT 1^0 /A at, f. Lcrofxai, dep. mid. 
{kv, ov<s,) prop, to receive into the ear, (see 
Hesych.) and by impl. to give ear to,liste?i 
to, foil, by acc. Acts ii. 14. Sept. and later 
Greek writers. 

"E^, ol, al. Ta, six, Matt. xvii. 1. Mk. 

ix. 2. 



130 ESA 

'EJayytWw, f. Xa 



. . . . , , (kK, ayyiX- 
Xo),) lit. to give out intelligence f'ojn one 
person to another, Xen. Anab. ii. 4, 24 ; 
also gener. to tell or declare abroad, make 
hioimi, celebrate, 1 Pet. ii. 9, i. Tas ap£- 
Tas ToG 9fou, and Sept. 

'E^ayopd^w, f. doro), (g/c, dyo/od^w,) 
lit. to buy up any thing from the posses- 
sion of another by paying the price, Plut. 
Crass. 2 ; and, as said of a person, to liber- 
ate any one from the possession or power 
of another, by paying his ransom. Thus in 
N. T. it signifies I. act. and prop, to re- 
deem, or set free from bondage, Gal. iii. 13, 
EK T7;s KUTfipa^ TOU vofxov, and iv. 5. — II. 
MID. & fig. Eph. V. 16, & Col. iv. 5, k^ayo- 
paX^ofXEvoL TOV KULpov, 1. e. ' rescuiug the 
time from abuse,' by improving every 
opportunity to do good. This sense arises 
naturally from the proper import, ' to 
redeem any thing to any one's use,' by 
rescuing it from abuse. 

'E^dyo), f. djo), (l/c, ayio,) to lead or 
bring forth, conduct out of one place to 
another ; foil, by acc. of pers. and gen. of 
place, with ek, or its equiv. gjco, simply, 
Mk. viii. 23, usually denoting oid of con- 
finement to a state of liberty. Acts v. 19. vii. 
36, 40. xii. 17. xiii. 17. Heb. viii. 9, & Sept. 
as Gen. xv. 9. Sometimes simply to lead 
forth for any purpose, expr. or impl. Mk. 
XV. 20, E^dy. avTov, 'iva aTavpoocrcoa-iu 
avTov. Lu. xxiv. 50, auTous £^a) k'cos 
Eh Bt]0. Acts xxi. 38. Hence of a shep- 
herd leading forth his flock from the fold 
to pasturage, John x. 3, ijdyf t avTa. 

'^^aLpico, f. ?7<Ta), (i/c, aipEO),) gener. 
and in Class, to remove, take oid, trans, 
in N. T. l.to remove forcibly, plu<;k out, 
as an eye. Matt. v. 29. xviii. 9, and Class. 
— II. to take out from any number, and by 
impl. to select for oneself, to chuse, Acts 
xxvi. 17. Sept. and Class. — III. mid. fig. 
' to take out of the power of any one, and 
into one's protection,' to rescue, deliver, 
foil, by acc. and i/c, Acts xii. 11, k^EiXETo 
IXE EK x^Lpd<5 'Hp. and vii. 10, 34. xxiii. 
27. Gal. i. 4. Sept. oft. & Class. 

'E^atpo), f. apu), {ek, aipa},) prop. 
to take up or lift any person or thing out 
of any place. In N. T. like tollo in Latin, 
to take cavay oid of or from, to remove, 
vAih. acc. of pers. and ek with gen. of 
pers. 1 Cor. v. 2, 13, k^. t6u irovripdv If 
v/ulCou avTcov, expel, excommunicate. Sept. 
and later Class. 

'Ef aiTEO), f. ricruj, {ek, alTtco,) lit. to 
ask out Qxfrom, to seek to have, and mid. to 
ask for oneself, demand any thing or per- 
son to be delivered up to us, whether for 
good, e. gr. pardon, &c. as gener. in the 
Class. ; or for evil, as punishment, Lu. 
xxii. 31, o 2aT. E^rjTnaaTo u/na^, ' desires 



ES A 



131 



that you should be delivered to him,' i. e. 
to have you in his power. 

'E^ai^j/?;?, adv. (ek-, ai^i/t;?, equiv, 
to a 01/609 or a 01/60,) suddcnli/^ uneocjpccU 
edly^ Mk. xiii. 36. Lu. ii. 13. *ix. 39. Acts 
ix. 3. xxii. 6. Sept. and Class. 

'E^aK:o\ou6£6o, f. 770-60, (e/c, aicoX.) 
prop, to folloiv out, i. e. 'to follow any per- 
son or thing,' to the abandonment of all 
others. Hence fig. to conform to any sen- 
timent, by embracing and acting upon it, 
•2Pet.i. 16, ig. /xuOois, (so Jos. Ant.prooem. 
ToTs jULvdoi^ E^aKuXouQvcravTE^,) or to 
any practice, by imitating it, 2 Pet. ii. 2, 
aaE\yELaL<3^ and 15, tt; bB<Z tov B. 
And so Is. Ivi. 11, iravTS^ Tais oSol^ 
avTwv s^r]Ko\ovdrjcrav. Pol. xvii. 10, 7. 

^E^aKoa- LOL^ at, a, num. adj. six liun- 
dred. Rev. xiii. 18. xiv. 20. 

'E^aXft^to, f. i|/^a), (e/c, aXsL(pu)^) 
prop. ^0 trzjoe o/f or om^ from any thing, or 
to wipe off gener. as Rev. vii. 17. xxi. 4, 
i^aX. TTciv ddKpvou dird tcov ocpQaXixCov 
avTujv : ' to wipe off,' i. e. as we say, Hot out, 
characters traced on a writing-board ; also 
to obliterate any writing, whether on waxed 
tablets, by wijjing out, or on parchment by 
scratching out. So Rev. iii. 5, t f . to ovofxa 
auTov k-K TTjs ^i(3Xov T^s ^6o?7§. Sept. & 
Class. Hence in the sense to abrogate, as 
said of a law, as often in the Greek Orators. 
And so Col. ii. 14, ij. to x^^poypci(pov^ 
i. e. ' the written law of Moses.' And as 
crossing out accounts in a ledger implies 
that the debts are paid, so it is fig. used at 
Acts iii. 19, of cancelling spiritual debts, 
(i. e. trespasses and sins,) by pardoning 
them. And so Sept. in Ps, li. 1,9. Is. xliii. 
25. Jer. xviii. 23. Lysias 106, 35. 

'EJaWo/uai, prop, to leap, spring, 
rush out of any place. In N. T. to spring 
forth, rush from any place where one sate, 
or was, Acts iii. 8, k^aXXofXEvos egti]. 
Sept. and Class. So at least the Lexx. 
in general explain ; but the expression 
rather means leaping up, as to denote the 
eagerness of incipient action, and the joy 
accompanying it. 

'Egai/a<rTao-t9, ews, 17, (Igaj/to-Ti/jUt,) 
a rising up from a recumbent posture, Pol. 
iii. 55, 4 ; also a rising up from any secret 
place, as Thuc. iii. 107. Polysen. p. 483. 
Procop. p. 57, 62. Hence it is used of the 
rising up from the secret chambers of the 
grave (see Job xiv. 13,) by a resurrection 
from the dead, Phil. iii. 11. 

'E^ai/aT£XX6o, f. £X6o, prop, to rise 
up from any place, as said espec. of the 
springing forth of light, whether of the 
sun and moon, or stars. In N. T. it is 
used of the springing forth out of the 
ground of corn, to shoot forth, intrans. 
Matt. xiii. 5. Mk. iv.5, £i;0€6os IJai/tTfiXs. 



The word occurs thrice in the Sept. but 
in the trans, sense to cause to grow, as said 
of grass. And so Apoll. Rhod. iv. 1423, 
)(0oi/o5 i^avETEiXav noLrjv. 

'Ei^av LCTTt] fit, f. (TT-nau), trans, to 
cause to rise up or out of, to raise; in- 
trans. to rise up out of, to rise, or stand 
forth, I. TRANS, and 1) prop, to raise 
up, rouse to action; 2) in N. T. aor. 1. 
act. fig. to raise up, cause to arise, or exist, 
out of, as offspring from the womb, Mk. 
xii. 19. Lu. XX. 28, e^. criripfxa t(o do&X- 
<p<Z a. Sept. in Gen. iv. 25. xix. 32, 34. — 
II. INTRANS. in aor. 2. act. to rise up out 
of a place, stand foHh, for speech or action, 
Acts XV. 5, E^avicTTi]crav, XiyovTE^, &c. 

'E^aTTaTa'co, f. ?7cr6o, lit. to lead out 
of tlie right way into error, to deceive, 
seduce, Rom. vii. 11. xvi. 18. 1 Cor. iii. 18. 
2 Cor. xi. 3. 2 Thess. ii. 3. Jos. & Class. 

'EfttTTti/a, adv. and later form for 
k^aiTLvr]^ or i^aicpvr]^, suddenly, unex- 
pectedly, Mk. ix. 8. 

^^^aTTopioixai, ovjULai, f. -ncroimaL, to 
be utterly at a loss ivhat to do, absol. 2 Cor. 
iv. 8, diropoviuLevoL, dXX' ovk ij. Ps. 
Ixxxvii. 16, & later Class. Hence by impl. 
to despair, 2 Cor. i. 8, sg. tov X,yv, of life. 

'E^aTroorriXXa), f. eXco, lit. to send 
away out of any place where one now is ; 
also gener. to send forth. I. to send aivay, 
dismiss, Acts xvii. 14. Sept. and Class. 
Also to dismiss any one, with the implied 
notion of not having obtained his purpose, 
Lu. i. 53, irXovTovvTa^ k^. kevov^. xx. 

10, sq. avTov kevov. So Sept. in 
Gen. xxxi. 42. Deut. xv. 13. Job xxii. 9. 

'E^apTt^fo, f. 10-60, (l/c, dpTiQii), fr. 
apTLo<s,) prop, to fidly complete, as said of 
things, e. gr. a business ; or of time, to 
bring to an end. Acts xxi. 5, k. -ras rjixi- 
pa<s. And as business is said to be com- 
pleted when accomplished, so a person is 
said to be accomplished for atiy purpose 
when he is furnished with all the aids for 
bringing it about, 2 Tim. iii. 17, (of the 
minister of the Gospel,) Trpos irdv 'ipyov 
dyaQov k^r^pTLCfMEvo?. So Jos. Ant. iii. 
2, 2, iroXEjULElv irpos dvdpcoTrovs toT^ 
diraaL KaXu)^ k^rjpTLO-fJLivov^. 

'E^ao-TpaTTTco, f. xj/co, prop, to flcish 
forth, as lightning, Ez.i. 4, nrvp k^aan-pd- 
TTTov : also of burnished metal, Ezek. i.7, 
^oXko's, espec. when worked up 
into armour, Nah. iii. 3. In N. T. used 
of raiment, dazzling, or glittering from ex- 
treme whiteness, Lu. ix.29, IfxaT. Xevko^ 
k^aa-T. 

'E^auT77§, adv. lit. fiom this time, 
immediately, Mk. vi. 25. Acts x. 33. xi. 

11. xxi. 32. Phil. ii. 23, and later Class. 

'E^gygtpco, f. £|06o, prop, to wahe or 
arouse out of sleep, implying a raising up 



1 



32 



ESI 



from the posture of sleep, Gen. xxviii. 16, 
and Class. Hence in N. T. I. to raise 
up from death, equiv. to syeipeiu ek tcou 
vsKpcou^ 1 Cor. vi. 14. Dan. xii. 2. — II. to 
raise up out of nothing into existence, to 
cause to eodst^ Rom. ix. 17, as Comm. ex- 
plain, but see my note. 

"E Jgt/At, (ej, gl/xi, to go,) to go out of 
a place, intrans. foil, by £/<:, Acts xiii. 42, 
£/c T^s (Ti/i/aycoy^s, to escape from^ to go 
away^ depart from a place, absol. Acts 
xvii. 15. XX. 7. Jos. and Class. 

"Ei^si (I I, see "E^scTTt. 

'EggXey )(co, f. ^co, to thoroughly con- 
vict^ show to be quite wrong. Class. Also 
by impl. to condemn and punish^ Jude 15, 
€ J. irdvTa's tous ao-E/Sels, and so in Class. 

'E^fc\K-a), f. Jo), prop, to draw off 
from any place. Sept. in Gen. xxxvii. 28. 
Hdian. viii. 8, 14. In N. T. fig. to draw 
out of the • right course into vice or error, 
to seduce^ hurry away^ Ja. i. 14, viro Til's 
idia^ kirLdvfxia's £^£\/<:o/x£i/os. JEX. H. 
An. vi. 31, xjTTo Tt]^ rjSouri^ kXKOfx&voi. 

'E^ipafxa, aros, to, {e^epdu), to eject 
from the stomach, Diosc. viii. 9,) lit. what 
is vomited from the stomach, a vomit^ 2 Pet. 
ii. 22, (see Prov. xxvi. 11, where Sept. has 
£/x£Toi/,) Diosc. vi. 19. 

'E^gpgufcto), f. ?7crco, to search out, 
eocplore diligently, 1 Pet. i. 10, k. ir&pL Tt- 
J/09. Sept. and Class. 

i p Xo fJL a L, f. fXEUcojuat, to go or 
come out of amy place, or from any person. 
In N. T. used I. of persons, and that 
1) prop, to go or cojne forth, either with 
adjuncts denoting the place out of which, 
foil, hy gen. as Matt. x. 14. Acts xvi. 39, 
et al. or with an adjunct of pers. out of 
or from whom, &c. as of those from whom 
demons departed, Mk. i. 25, sq. Lu. iv. 
35, al. ; or of those from whom any one 
goes forth with authority, John xiii. 3, 
if. ctTro Gfiou. John xvi, 27, and Sept. 
So also to depart, go away. Matt. ix. 
31. Mk. ii. 12, et al. ; or to depart from, 
as one in disfavour, Lu. v. 8. Also, 
with an adjunct of place whither, foil, hy 
th, £7rt, or 7rpo5 with accus. of place or 
person. 2) metaph. in the sense to go 
forth or abroad from, to proceed from. 
Matt. ii. 6, kK a-ou k^eXsvarETaL nyovinE- 
1/09. < Acts XV. 24. 1 John iv. 2. Also 
E^ipX^crQiii kK T?j§ 6<r(puo9 tlvo^, '' to 
come forth out of the loins of any one,' 
to descend from, Heb. vii. 5, and Sept. 
Also gf. EK Trjs yEipcys, 'to depart out of 
any one's hands or power,' John x. 39. — 
II. of THINGS, to go or come forth, as a 
voice, report, doctrine, 1 Cor, xiv. 36. 
Rev. xvi. 17. xix.5, foil, bygis with accus. 
or kv with dat. ; or as thoughts, from the 
heart. Matt. xv. 18, or words from the 
mouth, Ja. iii. 10 : of an edict, to be pro- 



mulgated, Lu. ii. 1 ; of a hope, to pass 
away, Acts xvi. 19. 

"Eg£o"ri, impers. (from 'i^eifiL, not 
otherwise in use,) it is possible, with refer- 
ence to moral possibility or propriety, it is 
lawful, permitted, &c. Matt. xiv. 4. Mk. 
vi. 18, et al. ; also k^ov, sc. £<TTt, for tj- 
£o-Ti, 2 Cor. xii. 4, et al, 

'EffiTctJo), f. aorw, to search out, 
fully examine, as to the reality or truth of 
any thing. In N. T. 1) gener. to in- 
quire out, foil, by TTEpL and gen. Matt. ii. 
8 ; by nrk interrog, x. 11. Sept. and Class. 
2) hy impl. to question or ask a person, 
John xxi. 12. 

''E^7]y iofxaL, f. ri<yofxai, depon. mid, 
(fif , vyEOfxaA,) prop, to lead out or forth, 
i, e. to take the lead, be the leader, Class. 
In N. T, ^0 lead, bring out any narration, 
to make known, decla7'e. I. gener. of 
things, to recount, narrate, Lu. xxiv. 35, 
fig. ra kv Tt7 o^w. Simil. Xen. Eph. iii. 
1, k^rjyELTaL to. kost avTov. Acts x. 8. 
XV. 12, 14. xxi. 19. Sept. and Class.— IL 
SPEC, of persons, to make known, reveal, 
John i. 18, if. Tov Qeov, 'hath revealed 
God,' or disclosed his nature, attributes, 
will, &c. Comp. Matt. xi. 27. So Sept. in 
Levit. xiv. 57. Xen. Mem. xiv. 7, 6, tocs 
Twv dEwv fxnx^^^^ E^nytlaQaL. 

'EJjj/coi/Ta, 01, al, Ta, num. adj. in- 
decl. siocty. Matt. xiii. 8, et al. 

'E 2 ^ 9, adv. (prop, a gen. fern. gov. with 
/ca0' understood, of the adj. £fo9 fr. I'xw, 
k'f o), adhsereo, in ordine sequor,) in order, 
sitccessively, Sept. and Class. In N. T, 
only used with article as adj. h k^rj^ scil. 
rifXEpa, expressed in Lu. ix. 37, & Joseph. 
Ant. iv. 8, 44 ; impl. in Lu. vii. 11. Acts 
xxi. 1. XXV. 17. xxvii. 18. 

sound out, forth, ov abroad, Sept. and later 
Class. In N. T. pass, to be sounded 
abroad ; said fig. of the Gospel, &c. to be 
proclaimed, 1 Thess. i. 8. 

"Eg t9, £0X9, 17, (eft*>5 fr- ^X^i) P^'OP- « 

habit (i. e. constitution), whether of body, 
Hippocr. de Victu, Xen. CEc. vii. 2. Plato 
167, A. et al. ; or of mind, (as often in Plato 
and Aristotle) and the faculty obtained hy 
its use, Ecclus. prol. kv tovtoi^ LKavr]v 
E^LV TTEpLTTOL'na-diJ.Evo^. Heuco, by impl. 
habit, i. e. habitual use or practice, Heb. v. 
14, Tcov Sia Ti)v E^LV TO. aiadr]Tiipia 
yEyvfjivacTfXEva k^ovTcov, 

'Egton-rj/it, f l/co-Tijo-o), prop. & trans. 
to move or put out of place, to displace, 
also intrans. to be out of place. In N. T. 
only used fig. 1) titans, in pres. aor. 1. 
and later perf. to put any one out of him- 
self, i. e. out of his mind, Lu. xxiv. 22, 
k^ECTT-na-av vfxd^, (scil. rrov (lipovsTy, ex- 
pressed in Xen. Mem. i. 3, 12, or kvtwv, 
expressed in Demosth, p. 537.) 2) intrans. 



133 



in perf. and aor. 2. act. and mid. to he he- 
dde omselt\ out of one's mind^ Mk. iii. 21, 
i^toTT)}. 2 Cor. V, 13, £^£crTt)/>i£i/. Sept. 
Joseph, and Class. ; where, however, tu^v 
(ppeucov is gener. expressed. Hence said, 
by a sort of popular exaggeration, in the 
sense to be amazed^ Matt. xii. 23, s^icr- 

TaVTO TTtt^TES OL '6)(\oL. Mk. ii, 12. V. 

42. vi. 51. Lu. ii. 47. viii. 56. Acts ii. 7, 
et al. Sept. and Class. 

f- to he in full 

strength, to he quite able, foil, by some 
verb in infin. Eph. iii. 18, k^. KaTa\a(3Ecr- 
dai. Julian, Strabo, and other late writers. 

"E^odo?, ou, 77, (e/c, 6^o§,) prop, like 
Latin exitus^ an outlet^ or way oat, as 
Thuc. i. 106, Kal ovK ijv e^odo^. In N. T. 
nsed 1) prop, of journeying out, de- 
parture from, Heb. xi. 22. Sept., Joseph., 
and Cla'ss. 2) fig. of depaHure from life, 
decease, Lu. ix. 31. 2 Pet. i. 15. Wisd. vii. 
6. Jos. Ant. iv. 8, 2, ett' k^odov tou X,rju, 

'EJoXoOpsuo), f. svao), to utterly 
destroy, pass. foil, by &k tov Xaov, Acts 
iii. 23. Sept. and Joseph. 

'Egojuo/Voy EO), f. Tjo-o), prim. & prop. 
to speak out the same things as another; 
which, as in Latin confiteor, (lit. ' to say 
with,') implies a full acknowledgment of 
any thing (so, by use, a confession of 
fault). So Plut. Ant. 59, i^. tt;i/ aXn- 
dsLav. In N. T. used I. in ACT. and mid. 
and 1) ^0 freely acknoivledge, fully con- 
fess ; e. gr. Tas d/uLapTLa^ avTwv, Matt, 
iii. 6. Mk. i. 5. Acts xix. 18. Ja. v. 1 6. 
Sept. oft. Jos. Ant. viii. 4, 6. Bell, v, 10, 
5. 2) in the prim, sense, to acknowledge, 
Phil. ii. 11. Rev. iii. 5. Hence 3) to 
make acknowledgment for benefits, i. e. to 
give thanks, praise ; foil, by dat. of pers. 
Matt. xi. 25. Lu. x. 21. Rom. xiv. 11. 
XV. 9, and oft. in Sept. ; also Philo, p. 
1105. — II. act. fr. the prim, sense, to say 
the same thing ivith another^ fully assent, 
agree to what he proposes, Lu. xxii. 6, 
kfiapioXoyi'icre, (so ojULoXoyio) in Thuc. i. 
101. Xen. Hist. ii. 2, 10, & 3, 8,) or, by 
impl. to promise, as bjxoX. in Joseph. Ant. 
vi. 3, 5 & 8, & 4, 3. Xen. Anab. vii. 4, 13. 

'E^oz/, see "E^Eo-Tt. 

'E Jop/ct^o), f. Lcrui, to put any one to 
an oath, to bind him by oath, or exact an 
oath from him. Matt. xxvi. 63. Sept. in 
Gen. xxiv. 3, and Class. 

'E^op/cio-T ^7 9, ou, 6, (i^opKi^co,) a?2 
eocorcist^ lit. 'one who binds another by 
oath but, in use, 'one who by adjuration 
and incantation professes to expel demons,' 
Acts xix. 13, where see my note. 

'E go p u o- (T o), f. gco, prop, to dig out, as 
', earth from a ditch ; also, to remove by, as 
it were, digging, to scoop out. So Mk. ii. 4, 
«gopugaj/T£§ scil. Tr]v (XTtyrju, where, by 



a mixture of two senses, it means, 'having 
dug through and scooped out the roofing.' 
Joseph. Ant. xiv. 15, 12, tous 6p6(pov9 
Twu oLKUiv auacrKdiTTcou. So also Gal. iv. 
15, fig. Toi)^ 6c()daXiJLov's vjXijDV, a strong ex- 
pression, found in the best Class, writers, 
for pluck out. 

'Egou^Ei/oo), f. (txTO), (eac intens. and 
ovo.) to set utterly at nought, quite con- 
temn ; also, by impl. to reject ivith con- 
tempt, Mk. ix. 12. Sept. Apocr. and later 
Greek writers. 

'EgouOEZ^ECO, f. ■Y](SU3, (fig, OU0.) tO SCt 

quite at riought, co7itemn, treat ivith despite., 
trans. Lu. xviii. 9. xxiii. 11. Rom. xiv. 3, 

10. ICor. vi.4. xvi.ll. Gal.iv.14. IThess. 
y. 20. Hence, 1 Cor. i. 28, & 2 Cor. x. 10, 
k^ovdEvi}/ixtL>o9, C07itemptihle, vile., Sept. 
Also, by impl. to reject ivith scorn. Acts iv, 

11. Sept. 1 Sam. viii. 7, and Apocr. 

'Egoutrta, as, v, {s-^ecttl,) power^ i.e. 
I. ' the power of doing any thing,' ability, 
faculty. Matt. ix. 8. John xix. 11. Acts 

viii. 19. Rev. xiii. 12 ; sometimes foil, by 
gen. of thing to be done, in the infin. pres. 
or aor. Lu. x. 19, et al. and Class. In the 
sense strength, efficacy. Rev. ix. 3, 19, 
So kv k^ovGia, for adj. powerfid, Lu. iv. 
32, &c. — II. poiver, self-derived, i. e. of 
doing or not doing any thing, license., 
liberty, free choice. Acts i. 7. v. 4. Rom, 

ix. 21. 1 Cor. vii. 37. et al. and Class. 
— III. power., entrusted from another, 
commission, authority. Matt. xxi. 23, kv 
TroLo. fig. TaDra ttoieIs ; Mk. iii. 15. xi, 
28, sq. Lu. XX. 2. John i. 12, et al. 
Jos. and later Class. — IV. power, over 
persons and things, dominion, authority^ 
1) prop, and gener. Matt, xxviii. 18, kSodri 
fxoL nrdcra k^ova-ta. Lu. vii. 8, utto k^ov- 
aiav. Mk. xiii. 34, tyiv eJ. Jude 25. 
Rev. xiii. 2, 4, et al, Sept. and later Class. 
So also when foil, by gen, of pers. to whom 
the power belongs, Lu. xx. 20, rj k^. tou 
■nysjULOvo^. Rev. xii. 20, rj k^. tov Xp. av. 
Acts xxvi. 18. Col. i. 13. Sometimes pre- 
ceded by ETTi, power over, Rev. ii. 26, e J. 
ETTi TU)V k6vu)v. xi. 6. xiv. 18. XX. 6; orsTrt 
with acc. in the same sense, Lu. ix. 1. Rev. 
vi. 8. xiii. 7. xvi. 9,al. 2) meton. put either 
for what is subject to rule, dominion, Lu. 
iv. 6. xxiii. 7, e/c t^s e^, 'Upcodov. Sept. 
and later Class.; or in the plur. (collect.) 
denoting ' those invested with power,' as in 
Latin potestates, and in English thepoicers: 
for rulers, magistrates, Lu. xii. 11. Rom. 
xiii. 1, seqq. Tit. iii. 1. Also for poten- 
tates, both celestial (angels and archangels, 
Eph. i. 21. iii. 10. Col. i. 16. ii. 10. 1 Pet. 
iii. 22.) and infernal, Eph. vi. 12. Col. ii. 
15. Eph. ii. 2. So at 1 Cor. xi. 10, ocpEiXiL 
17 yvuij Eg. 'i^iiv ETTi TT/s KE(p. it seems to 
denote a veil or kerchief for the head, so 
called. See more in my note in loc. 



ESO 



1 



34 



En A 



Class, to possess p>owei\ privilege^ or au- 
tliority ; also, 2^0 exercise it. In N. T. it is 
used 1) in the sense to have leave^ to be 
permitted., 1 Cor. vii. 4, tou ioi'ou croofxa- 
T05 01//C £^oucrtd^£t. 2) to exercise autho- 
rity., to rule., Lu. xxii. 25, ol ej- 'tlieir 
mlers,' and Sept. Pass, to he ruled over hy., 
i. e. to be under the power of., fig. 1 Cor. 

vi. 12. 

*E^oy77, ^s, -J?, (£^£X^5 j^^ ^^^1 
above,) 1) prop, prominence., or projection 
to a point. Job xxix. 28. 2) metaph. emi- 
nence., distinction.. Acts xxv. 23, avdpE<s ol 
KaT i-^oxw ovTs^., ' men of distinction,' 
as oi E^oxoL auSpe^., as Horn. II. ii. 188. 

'EJuTTi/i Jo), f. icrco, (I J, u7ri/09,) prop, 
to aicahen out of sleep., trans, as in Sept. 
and later Class, for the earlier acpvirv. In 
N. T. only fig. to raise from the dead^ 
John xi. 11. 

*Ef uTTi/os, Of, 6, 17, adj. lit. ow^ o/" 
sleep., aivake., Acts xvi. 27. The word 
only occurs elsewhere in Marc. Ant. vi. 
31. X. 13, and Test. xit. Patr. 

"EJo), adv. of place, (ff,) also prep. 
^vitll gen. out., idthout, and used in N. T. 

I. of place WHERE, ivithout., out of doors., 
after verbs implying motion, as kaTavai., 
&c. John xviii. 16, elariiKEL e^co. Matt, 
xii. 46, sq. xxvi. 69. Mk. iii. 31, sq. So 
gener. 'outside of any city or place,' 
abroad., Mk. i. 45, iv kprifxoL^ to- 
-TTots. Lu. i. 10. Rev. xxii. 15. Sept. and 
Class. So with the art. for adj. external., 

foreign.. Acts xxvi. 11, eU Tas 'il^oo tto- 
\el<5. Sept. and Class. Also fig. of those 
out o/* one's society, &c, e. gr. in N. T. out 
of tJie Church., i. e. non-CToristians., 1 Cor. 
v. 12, sq. Col. iv. 5. 1 Thess. iv. 12; or 
not of the apostles^ Mk. iv. 11. Further, 
6 e^oo n/uicov ai^OjOWTTos, ' our outward per- 
son,' ' the body,' 2 Cor. iv. 16 ; as a prep, 
'v^ithgen. outside of Lu. xiii. 33. Heb. xiii. 

II, seqq. and Class. — II. of place whi- 
ther, out., out of doors., after verbs imply- 
ing motion or direction, as ayo), niiXXco., 
EpXOfJiaL^ &c. Matt. V. 13. xiii. 48. Lu. 
xiv. 35. John xix. 4, et al. saspe and 
Class. Also as prep, with gen. Matt. xxi. 
17, k^rjXdiV E^u) Tt}^ ttoXeojs, et al. 

*Ega)0£i/, adv. of place, (fijw, o0£i/,) 
from icithoitt., outivards., outwardly., I. as 
adv. Matt, xxiii. 27, sq. Lu. xi. 39. 2 Cor. 

vii. 5. Sept. and Class. So with art. 6, 
77, TO, for adj. outicard., 1 Pet. iii. 3. Rev. 
xi. 2. TO E^codEv., the outside., Matt, xxiii. 
25. Lu. xi. 40. 01 E^. non- Christians., 1 
Tim. iii. 7. Class. — II. as prep, with gen. 
equiv. to £^60, out of tvithout., Mk. vii. 15, 
Sept. and Class. 

'E Jw0£w, f. vao), to thrust out., drive 
out from a place. 1) prop, as said of per- 



sons., to expel from any society ; or of a 
nation, to banish out of their country, Acts 

vii. 45. Sept. in Deut. xiii. 5. Jer. viii. 3, 
and Class. 2) spec, of thhigs., to drive a 
ship from seaward on shore, to strand it, 
Acts xxvii. 39, if. to nrXolov. Thuc. ii. 
90. 

'E J o) T £ p o s, a, oj/, adj . compar. fr . £^00, 
outer ^ Ezek. x. 5. xl. 20, al. for superl. 
outermost., Exod. xxvi. 4, and oft., or ut- 
most., like our uttermost for utmost.. Matt. 

viii. 12, TO (TKoTos TO E^wTEpov., 1. 6. 'the 
farthest remote from the light and splen- 
dour of the feast within ;' with allusion to 
the Tartarus or Gehenna, the dark abode 
assigned to those excluded from heaven. 

'EopTa^w, f. ao-o), [kopTi]^) to Jceep a 
festival, keep holiday., 1 Cor. v. 8. Sept. & 
Class. 

'Eo|0Tt7, ^9, r], 1) gener. a festival, 
holiday., Col. ii. J 6, kopT{]9 77 vovfX7]via^. 
Acts xviii. 21. John v. 1. Sept. and Class. 
2) spec, said of the Passover., and the feast 
of unleavened bread connected with it, the 
paschal festival., either simply. Matt. xxvi. 
5, et al. ssepe, or by the addition of tov 
irdaxa.) or twv cl^v/jlwv., Lu. ii. 41, and 
xxii. 1. John ii. 23. xiii. 1. 

'^TrayyEXia., a?, 17, (fiTrayygWw,) 
an announcement., notification. In N. T. 
I. PROP. 1 John i. 5. Sept. and Class. 
— II. BY IMPLICATION, mandate., edict., 
Acts xxiii. 21. Pol. ix. 38, 2.— III. by 
implication, promise., in two senses : 1) 
a promising, or declaration, assuring the 
promisee of some benefit to be conferred 
upon him, and as it were letting it go 
(Lat. mittens) beforehand (jt>ro), and that 
either gener. as 2 Cor. i. 20. Eph. vi. 2. 
1 Tim. iv. 8. 2 Pet. iii. 4, 9. Sept. and 
Class. ; or of special promise, Acts vii. 17. 
Rom. iv. 20. Heb. vi. 15. vii. 6. Rom. ix. 
9, et saepe al. Note the peculiar phrases 
by Hebr., Eph, i. 13, tw llvEVfxaTi Tr]<s 
ETrayyEXia^., ' the Spirit promised,' and 
Heb. xi. 9, 77 yrj tt]s kTrayyEX'ia^, 'the 
promised land.' 2) meton. for tJie thing 
promised., like the Latin promissum., Acts 
ii. 33, Tnv kir. tov liv. 'the promised 
effusion of the Spirit ;' and i. 4. Gal. iii. 14. 
Heb. iv. 1. vi. 12. x. 36. xi. 13, 33, 39. 

'ETray 7 £ Wo), f. eXoo, (fTrl, ayy£\- 
Xco,) lit. to bring ivord to., to announce., 
make known, notify, declare, or in the 
way of injunction, to order. In N. T. 
as deponent mid. kTrayyiXXofxaL with 
perf. pass, in mid. signification, Rom. 
iv. 21, to promise, lit. to declare to any 
one, as to any thing, to promise it to him ; 
a promise being a declaration with assur- 
ance of something thereby engaged to be 
done. In N. T. it is used I. gener. to 
promise, with acc. of thing or action, and 
dat. of pers. either expr. or impl. Rom. iv. 



En A 



135 



E n A 



•21. Tit. i. 2. Heb.vi. 13. Jas. i. 12. ii. 5. 

Pet. ii. 19. 1 John ii. 25, et al. Sept. 
and Chiss. Also pass, impers. with dat. 
Gal. iii. 19, to ETniyyeXi-ai^ to M'hom tlie 
jiromise was made.' — II. spec, in tlie sense 
to pro/ess^ i. e. make profession of; foil, 
by ucc. as ^eoaffSsiav^ 1 Tim. ii. 10. yvco- 
CTLv^ vi. 21. So Wisd. ii. 13, sTTLyvuiaiu 
^X^'-^ Oeou. Xen. Mem. i. 2, 7, dpeT-tju 
tTT. Diog. Laert. xii. prooem. auxppo- 

GVUIjU. Phot. Epist. 97, iTTLSLKELaU Kai 

<.pL\.avdpu)irLav. 

'ETTotyyEX^a, a-ro^^ to ^ a promise^ 
2 Pet. i. 4. iii. 13, and Class. 

'ETrayoj, f. ^tu, I) to lead zip to a 
place, as said of persons ; 2) to briiig upon^ 
as said of things, ^\■ith reference to pers. 
The 2d signif. is alone found in the N. T. 
1) gener. as 2 Pet. ii. 1, ett. fauToIs airoi- 
Xeiai/^ and v. 5, ett. KaTaKkvcr/uLdu Koafxio 
d<T&^u)v. Sept. Gen. vi. 17. Exod. xi. 1. 
Lev. xxvi. 25. Philo 1018, klvovvov kir. 
and Class. 2) spec. foil, by kirl and acc. 
Acts V. 28, kir. kepi" v/ulcc? to aljULa^ ' to 
bring upon us, to impute to us the guilt 
of this slaughter.' Sept. Gen. xx. 9. E^od. 
xxxiv. 7. Demosth. 275, 4. 

'EiTraycoviX^o fxai^ f. iaro/ixai^ to con- 
tend about or for any thing, Jude 3, Itt. Trj 
TriarT&L. So Plut. Num. 8, ett. Ty <TO(pLa. 

'ETraGpot^oj, f. oicru)^ to collect to- 
gether^ Lu. xi. 29, toov ok 6)(X(jou kiradpoi- 
X^ofxiv(jov. It only occurs elsewhere in 
Plut. Marc. Ant. 44, ttoXv ttXelove's kirri- 
dpoiX^ovTo. It is 720^, as the Lexx. and 
Expositors say, put for the simple dO/ooi'^w, 
any more than kTray&ipio is for a^s/pw, 
though H. Steph. affirm^s it. Suffice it to 
refer to Hom. Od. xi. 631, "XWa irplv 
kiri eOve' dysipeTO fxvpia vsKpcou, and 
Pind. Pyth. ix. 92, kiri Xadv dydpa^ Na- 
(TLujTav ox^ov £§ 'Afxcp. The full sense of 
the verb is ' to collect together persons from 
various quarters to one place.' 

'E7raii/£<w, f. Ecrco, (ettI & ali/os,) to 
bestow praise upon^ ascribe praise unto^ 
commend^ any one, Lu. xvi. 8. 1 Cor. xi. 
2, 17, 22 ; but in the two last passages we 
are to notice the idiom whereby ou/c kirai- 
vGi is said, by a mild mode of expression, 
for / blame^ as often in the best Greek 
wi-iters. In Rom. xv. 11, kiraLvkcraTe 
auTOj/, the expression, as said of God, 
is to be regarded as an ascription of praise, 
'celebrate ye his praise,' such as is found 
in many passages of the O. T. 

*E7ra 1^09, ou, o, (etti, alyos,) 1) prop. 
praise, Eph.i. 6, 12,14. 2Cor. viii. 18. Phil, 
i. 11. 1 Pet. i. 7. 2) meton. oJjject of praise, 
' something praiseworthy,' Phil. iv. 8 ; also 
Sept. and Class. In Rom. ii. 29, ov 6 ett, 
ovK k^ dvdp. and xiii. 3, it is said of God, 
as Wisd. XV. 19 : in such case, it seems to 
denote the reward as well as praise of vir- 



tue, as at 1 Pet. ii. 14, eh tiraivov ay ado- 
TTOLoov, and sometimes in the Class. So 
also the verb kTruLvkco. In 1 Cor. iv. 5, 
6 eTTaivo^ yevYiatTaL eKaarTto, it means 
(as being a word of middle signification) 
retribution, whether for good or evil. 

'ETrai/oco, f. apu), (fiTrt, a'/pco,) gener. 
to raise up in any way, trans. In N. T. 
it is used, I. act. and 1) prop, of a sail, 
to hoist up. Acts xxvii. 40, & Class. Pass, 
to be taken up, borne upward. Acts i. 9 ; 
also of the hands, to lift up, as in prayer 
and praise, Lu. xxiv, 50. 1 Tim. ii. 8. 
Sept. and Class, 2) fig. to lift up, as 
said of the eyes, to look upon. Matt. xvii. 
8. Lu. vi. 20, et al. saepe, and Sept. ; of 
the voice, to cry out, Lu. xi. 27. Acts ii. 
14. xiv. 11. xxii. 22. Sept. Demosth. 
and Philostr. ; of the head, to take cou- 
rage, Lu. xxi. 28. Also ett. Tr\v itTipvav 
kiri TLva, i. e. in the way of attack, John 
xiii. 18. — II. MID. k'Kaipo.p.ai, 1) prop, to 
lift up oneself, to lise up, foil, by kutu, 2 
Cor. x. 5, ETT. KaTa ttjs T'ywo'Ecos tov 
Geou. Sept. 2) metaph. to be lifted up, 
elated, 2 Cor. xi. 20. Sept. and Class. 

^Ett aicfyjjvoixai, f. ovjuai, to be 
ashamed of ore at,fo\\. by acc. Mk. viii. 38. 
Lu. ix. 26. Rom. i. 16. 2 Tim. i. 8, 16. 
Heb. xi. 16. 2 Tim. i. 12. Sept. & Class. ; 
by kirl with dat. Rom. vi. 21. 

'ETratTEw, f. 77cra), prop, to ask fur- 
ther, i. e. more, or to ask at any one's 
hands. Hence to ask alms, Lu. xvi. 3, 
and so Ps. cix. 10. Ecclus. xl. 28. Hom. 
II. xxiii. 593. 

'ETra/co XouGeoj, f. 770-0), I. PROP, to 
follow upon or after ; also to accompany^ 
Mk. xvi. 20, did Tujv kir. cr^jjiduiv. With 
dat. 1 Tim. v. 24, tlctl dk ETraKoXovdov- 
CTLV, scil. al dfxapTLai a. i. e. ' are mani- 
fest only afterwards.' Sept. and Class. — 
II. METAPH. 1 Pet. ii. 21, iVa ett. toIs 
LXv^cTLv avTov, ' follow his example.' Philo 
p. 385, 44. 1 Tim. v. 10, iravTi 'kpyco dy. 
ETT. ' has followed up, been studious of.' 
So Luc. Paras. 3, ett. Tats TEXi^ats. 

'ETTa/couo), f. ova (A, lit. to hear to, 
listen, hearken ; the kirl denoting that the 
hearer turns his ear toicards the speaker ; 
and that, again, implies a granting of the 
request. So in N. T. ' to hear and answer 
prayer,' with gen. of pers. 2 Cor. vi. 2, 
kiriiKovad crov. So Sept. oft. & Class, as 
Luc. Cont. 14, 6 Zeus TavTa kirvKovcri 
(TOV. Timon, 9, ett. tujv evx^V' Prom. 20, 

ETT. TUtiV EVX'^V. 

'EiraKpodofxaL, depon. mid. to hear, 
listen to, foil, by gen. Acts xvi. 25. 

'ETrdi/, conj. for ettei dv, ichenever as, 
as soon as. Matt. ii. 8, kirdv dk eu/otjte. 
Lu. xi. 22, 34. Jos. and Class. 

'ETrai/ayKEs, adv. (from nom. neuter 



E n A 



136 



of obsol. adj. iiravdyKri^^ and that for 
kir' and avcty/ctj?, 'by need,') necessarily^ 
as in the best Class. ; but with the art. it 
takes, by an ellips. of the partic. of ct/xt, 
the meaning of the adj. Thus to. kird- 
vayKE9, sc. 02/Ta, Acts xvi. 11, and some- 
times in Class, means 'things which are of 
necessity,' necessary. 

'ETTtti/ayw, f. afo), I. PROP, and gen. 
to hrhig hack toiuards^ cause to return^ trans. 
Hdian. vi. 6, 4. vii. 6, 7. In N. T. intrans. 
to return to, e. gr. Tr)v itoXlv^ Matt, 
xxi. 18. 2 Mace. ix. 21, and later Greek 
writers. — II. spec, used as a nautical term, 
to take [a ship] off to [sea], Lu. v. 3, airo 
Tjj's y^s ETrafayaygti/, scil. i/aGi/, and 4, 
£7r. £t9 TO (3ddo<s. Xen. Hist. i. 6, 40. 
See at avdyoo. 

'^aTT avaiJLLfxvricrKOD, f. ?7(ra), (ai/(i, 
fjLLim.) prop. ^0 caZZ [the mind] to any 

subject of previous thought, to remind any 
one, Rom. xv. 15, kir, v/md^. Demosth. p. 
/4, EKacrTov v/moou kiravaix. BouXoaaL. 
Plato, p. 688. 

'EiTTavainrav u), f. autrw, prop, to cause 
to rest zipon, mid. to rest oneself upon^ lean 
upon, Sept. in 2 K. vii. 2, 17, kir. kirl Ti]v 
X£ipa and mrj x- Hdian. ii. 1, 3, kiravE- 
TravovTo -rals x^P^'-- T. only me- 

taph. \) to rest upon, abide with, Lu. x. 6, 
£7rai/a7rau(T£Tai ett' avTov rj siprivri 
v/nd)u. So Sept. Num. xi. 25. 2 K. ii. 15. 
2) to rest in,\. e. confide in, rely upon; foil, 
by dat. Rom. ii. 17, kiravairaur} tw v6- 
fAco. 1 Mace. viii. 12, kir. auTots. Arr. 
Epict. i. 9, 9, aXXots ^appovvra Kal kir. 
with £7rt Til/a, Mic. iii. 11. 

^KTravepxojULaL^ aor. 2. kTravrjXdoi/^ 
to come hack to, return to, any place one 
had left, Thuc. iv. 135, as one's own house, 
or any place of sojourn. Sept. and Class. ; 
gener. foil, by prep, with acc. of place, 
sometimes a proper name. In N. T. ab- 
sol. ; the place being implied in the con- 
text, Lu. X. 35. xix. 15. 

*E,7ravL(TTr}ij.L, f. tjct-w, to raise up, 
excite to opposition. In N. T. only mid. 
kiravLCTTafxaL, f. crTnrrofjLaL, to rise up 
against one in the wav of hostilitv, Matt. 
X. 21. Mk. xiii. 12. Sept. and Class. 

'ETrayop 0 to o"t9, £0)9, y\, {tTravop- 
00 CO, to revert,) prop, a setting upright icJiat 
was overthroivn, or a straightening what was 
crooked ; and fig. a setting to rights what 
was wrong, either by reform of laws and 
political institutions, (Jos. Ant. i. 11, 5. 
Demosth. 707, kntav. twu vofxcov,) or by 
correction and reformation of what is wrong 
in private life between man and man, by 
redress of injury, and amendment of life 
and conduct, 2 Tim. iii. 16, cocpiX. tt/sos 
kiravopQcocTLv. So Xen. Epist. i. 5, £i§ 
kiravopdiacnv, 'ad emendandos mores.' 
Luc. Herm. 3. Polyb. i. 35, 1, irpo^ kirav- 



6pd(jo(TLv Tov dvdpw'TrcDv (3lov. Arr. Diss. 
Ep. iii. 21, 15. Philo, p. 319, B. £7r. Tod 
(3lou. Plato 101, A. kiri nry xt/s ^i^XV^ 
kiravopQ(x)a£.L Tax^^^o-ai viro ^etov te 
Kal vofxuiv. 

'EiTrdvco, prop, an adv. (£7ri, ai/o),) but 
in use a prep, with gen. in the sense up 
ahove, i. e. over above, o?i high ; sometimes 
upon. In N. T. it is used, I. as an adv. 
either of place, ahove, over, Matt. ii. 9, 
Ln. xi. 44, or number, more than, Mk. 
xiv. 5. ] Cor. XV. 6. Sept. and Class. — II. 
as PREP, with gen. of place, 1) ahove, 
over. Matt, xxvii. 37. £. t??? KscjiaXrj^. Lu. 
iv. 39. Rev. xx. 3, and Sept. 2) upon. 
Matt. V. 14, kirdvoo opovs KEifxivt]. xxi. 
7. xxiii. 18, al. Sept. and Class.; said of 
dignity, over, Lu. xix. 17, 19, yivov kir. 
TrivTs TToXecov. John iii. 31, ett. irdvTcov. 

^E'TT ap K i (jo,f. icru), {kiri, dpKECo,) prop. 
to hold hack, or ivard off [evil coming upon 
any one] by interposing an hindrance ; foil, 
by acc. and dat. Hom. II. ii. 873. In 
N. T. by impl. to aid, relieve, foil, by dat. 
1 Tim. V. 10, £7r. ^Xif^ojULivoL^, and 16, 
and so Class. 

'E7ra|0)(ta, a?, (eVapx^^? P^'sefectus,) 
Acts xxiii. 34. xxv. 1. Prefecture was 
the name given to the larger provinces of 
the Roman empire, to which Proconsuls, 
or Propraetors, were sent; while the smaller 
ones were termed k'KiTpoiral, and their 
governors kirLTpoTToi. 

''E7rau\is, £609, 77, {kitavXiXp^ai, to 
pitch a tent, to tent, contr. fr. kiravKL-- 
(ri9,) prim, and prop, a tent, or hut, for 
temporary abode. Num. xxxii. 16, or shep- 
herd's tent ; also a cottage or rustic dwell- 
ing, as in later Gr. writers. In N. T. a 
habitation gener. Acts i. 20. So Judith 
iii. 3. Prov. iii. 33. 

'E7raU|0 toi/, adv. of time, {kiri, av- 
pLov,) on the morrow. Hence in N. T. v 
kiravpiov, scil. rj/uLkpa, 'the next day,' 
Matt, xxvii. 62, et ssepe al. and Sept. 

'ETracppiX^co, f. iaru), to foam up, 
Mosch. Id. V. 5, ei dk ^dXaaaa Kvprov 
(curvedly) kiracppV^r). So Jude 13, kv- 
fxaTa dypia ^aXdacr^'s kTracppiX^oi/Ta, 
&c. ' foaming up upon [the shore].' See 
Valckn. on Callim. 269. Jacobs on An- 
thol. Gr. ix. 223. 

'ETrsyeipco, f. Epw. This verb has 
two distinct senses, according to the force 
assigned to the k^L I. prop, to rouse any 
one from sleep to watchfulness, as Homer, 
Aristoph. Xen. et al. ; or fig. from inac- 
tivity to action ; Lucian de Salt. 85, kirE- 
y El poucra tijv oidvoiav nrpo's EKacTTa 
TMU Spcofxivwv : also, with an iraplied no- 
tion of hostility, to excite against any one, 
of course foil, by subst. of pers. with prep, 
espec. acc. of pers. with £7rt, as oft. in 
Sept. e. gr. Is. xiii. 17, kirEyEipoo vfxiif 



EHE 



137 



EnE 



T0U9 M. xix. 2, kirsyspdvcrovTaL AiyvTr- 
TioL ett' AiyvTTT. So Acts xiv. 2, £7rj?- 
yttpai/ Acat £KaK:a;<rai/ rds i|/ux«5 twv ad. 
Comp. Diod. Sic. xiv. 52, iTri}yE'ipovro 
Tals i/zuxals. Nor is this idiom confined 
to the Alexandrian Avriters, it being found 
in Homer, II. iv. 352, Tpcoaiu E(p' Itttto- 
BafxoLGLV kyELpofxtv o^vv 'Ap7]a. Plato, 
p. 657, D. viJid^ Eh Ti\v vsorijra ette- 
ysipEiv. Nor is it unexampled in our cor- 
respondent term to rouse : so Shakspeare 
says, ' Good things of day begin to droop 
and drowse. While night's black agents to 
their prey do rouse.'' In Acts xiii. 50, kirn- 
ysipav OLiJoyfxov kirl tov rTaCXoy, there is 
an allusion to dormant ill-will being roused 
to active enmity. Comp. Soph. (Ed. C. 510, 

TO irdXaL KEL/JLEVOV k-WEyELpELV kukov. 

'E7r£i, conjunct, {kirl^) as, said both of 
time, and cause or motive, 1 ) of ti3IE, «s, 
when, after that, foil, by aor. indie. Lu. 
vii. 1, t'TTEL Sk kirXvpoiiCTi. Sept. & Class. 
2) of CAUSE, or motive, as, since, because, 
inasmuch as. Matt, xviii. 32, £7r£t irapE- 
KclXEord's jjLE. Mk. XV. 42. Lu. i. 34, et al. 
'ETTft ovv, since then, or in that case, 1 Cor. 
V. 10. Heb. iv. 6. Hence, before ques- 
tions implying a negat. and before similar 
hypothetical clauses, it signif. for, i. e. by 
impl. for then, for otheridse, Rom. iii. 6, 

klTEL TTCOS KOLVeI 6 0£OS TOU KOCrfXOV ', 

1 Cor. xiv. 16. XV. 29. Heb. x. 2. So 
Rom. xi. 6, £7r£t v X^P'-^ ouketl yiuETai 
xdpL^. Heb. ix. 26. Sept. and Class. 

'ETTELdr]. conjunct., prop, and in Class. 
as indeed, as now, but in N. T. used of a 
ground or motive, si7ice noiv, iiiasmuch as, 
Slatt. xxi. 46. Lu. xi. 6, and oft. 

'E7r£i^777rf /o, conjunct. {kirELohiTrEp,) 
since noiv, or hotcever, inasmuch as, Lu. i. 1. 

'EtteT^oi/, (used as aor. from k(popdw,) 
prop, to behold, but in N. T. like Lat. respi- 
cere, & our regard, to behold for c/ood, vieiu 
with kindness, Lu. i. 25, kv v/akpaL^ al§ 
k'TrELOEv (sc. /ule) dcpEXElv, &c. ; and so 
Exod. ii. 25. Ps. xxxi. 7, e'tte'Ioe^ Tr]v n-a- 
TTELvwrriv jULov, and xxv. 18. Comp. Ps. 
cxix. 132, k7rL(BXE\l/ov kir kfxk, Kai kXk- 
fjcrou /ULE : also for evil (with disfavour) 
foil, by k'TTL with acc. Acts iv. 29, ettlBe 
ETTL ras ctTTEiXds avTi)v : an expression 
formed on those passages of the O. T. 
where God is said to look on, when injury 
is done or meditated, in order to ward it 
off from the aggrieved party, and turn it 
on the injurer. This is gener. left to be 
understood, as here, and at Gen. xxxi. 49. 
Exod. v. 21 ; but sometimes eocpressed, as 
1 Chron. xii. 17, looi 6 Gtos kul eXEy^aL. 

"Ettel/jll (kirl, eJ/ull, to come, or go,) 
to come on ; said of persons, to approach, 
or attack ; of things, to come to pass, as 
said of events ; also of time, to come on, 
approach. And so in N. T. the part. 



kiVLOvGa, from kirLUiv, is said of the follow- 
ing day, Acts vii. 26. xvi. 11. xx. 15. xxi. 
18, or night, Acts xxiii. 11. Sept. & Class, 

'E7r£t7r£|0, conj. [etteI, irEp,) since 
indeed, since noiv, Rom. iii. 30, and Class. 

'"E.irELaaycoyi], 779, 77, lit. a bringing 
in of sometliing in additio7i to what before 
existed, whether a thing, Thuc. viii. 92, 
ETTELa-aycoyd^ tcou ttoX. or pers. Jos, 
Ant. xi. 6, 2, ETEpa<s, i. e. wife, kirEicray, 
In N. T. fig. of things, Heb. vii. 19, 

ETTELCr. KpELTTOVO^ kXTTido^. 

"EiTELTa, adv. (kTri, eItu,) marking 
succession of time and order, thereupon, 
thereafter, next. As said of time, thereupon, 
Mk. vii. 5. Lu. xvi. 7, ett. ETEpco elTTEu. 
Gal. i. 21. Ja. iv. 14. Sept. and Class. 
So, along with a more precise notation of 
time, John xi. 7, ett. /xetq: tovto. Gal. i. 
18. Also, in enumercdions, when the fore- 
going clause contains likewise a notation 
of time, and that both gener. as 1 Cor. xii. 
28. XV. 6, 7, 23. Heb. vii. 27, and spec, as 
in the formula 7rpcon-ov — EirELTa, S:c. first 
— then, or need, Sec. 1 Cor. xv. 46. 1 Thess. 
iv. 17. Heb. vii. 2. Ja. iii. 17, and Class. 

'ElTTEKELva, prop. adv. (Itt' EKEiva^ 
scil. juiEpr],) but, in use, a prep, with gen. 
suspended on fXEpt] understood, beyond, 
Acts vii. 43, k'TTL Ba[3. Sept. and Class. 

'ETTEKTgiyco, f. Evcb, to strctch out 
toicards ; mid. to stretch oneself, reach 
forth toicards ; foil, by dat. Phil. iii. 14, 
Tols EjULTTpoadEV k'TT. ; where, by a metaph. 
taken from a charioteer, is denoted great 
earnestness & ardour : so Max. Tyr. viii. 2, 

EvQvTOVOVpaVOV dvaTELVOfXEVOV T7]\p^VXV' 

'Ett Ev^vTr-j^, ov, 6, {k7rEv6uco,) theup- 
per garment, tunic, Attic xyToiv, so called 
in distinction from the inner one, the vizo- 
SvTTj's, or xiTwi/ic/cos, John xxi. 7, & Sept. 

'ETTEvdvw, or vvu), f. v(Tio, to put on 
over, trans. Jos. Ant. v. 1, 12, ettev^vvte^ 
aaKKov^ Tats CToXaT?. Plut. Pelop. 21. 
In N. T. in mid. to put on over one's other 
garments; said fig. of the spiritual body 
destined for the blessed in heaven, 2 Cor, 
V. 2, 4, kTTEVOvaaadaL £7ri7ro0oui/T£S, 

'E,7r kpxo /ma L, f. EXEixrofiai, prim, to 
go or come upon or over any place, as 
dypov, Hom. Od. xvi. 27. In N. T. to 
come on, upon, to any place or person. I. 
of PLACE, to come to, arrive. Acts xiv. 19. 
Sept. and Class. — II. of pers. to come 
upon, attack, Lu. xi. 22. Sept. and Class, 
oft. So of evils, fig. to come upon, befall; 
foil, by kirl with acc. Lu. xxi. 35. Acts 
viii. 24. xiii. 40. Sept. and Class. Also 
said of the illapse of the Holy Spirit, as 
resting upon, and operating in a person, 
Lu. i. 35. Acts i. 8. 1 Sam. xi. 7, and oft. 
in Sept. — III. part. k7r£px6/uLEvo^, said of 
TIME, &c. coming on, impending, Eph. ii. 



EHE 

7, iv Tots aiuxTL kir, Lu. xxi. 26. Ja. v. 1. 
Sept. and Class. 

'E7r£/oa)Taw, f. 77<rftj, to ask at, inquire 
of, I. GENER, and with acc. of pers. and 
thing, Mk. xi. 29, ETrsptoTT^cw vjud^ eva 
\6yov. Lu. XX. 40. Sept. and Class, or 
acc. of pers. with gen. of thing, and Trspt, 
Mk. vii. 17, and Class, or acc. of pers. and 
Xiyoiv, Matt. xii. 10. Mk. v. 9. Lu. iii. 10, 
al. Sept. and Class. So also, in 2i judicial 
sense, to interrogate, with acc. of pers. and 
thing, John xviii. 21, or acc. of pers. and 
Xiycov, Matt, xxvii. 11. Lu. xxiii. 6. 
Acts V. 27. From the Heb. kTrEpcoTdco 
Tov Qedv, to ask after God, to seek God, 
Rom. X. 20.— II. SPEC, in the sense to ask 
or desire, with acc. of pers. and infin. 
Matt. xvi. 1, ETrripwTrja-av requested of) 

*E>7r £ p COT J] fjL a, Tos, TO, gener. aqtces- 
tion, inquiry, lit. 'something asked.' In 
N. T. used in a peculiar sense, 1 Pet. iii. 
21, (SdiTTLa-fxa, (Tvv&Lhricreoii's cty. iTrea. 

Qeov, where, though Expositors are not 
agreed on the exact sense, the term is best 
explained an answer, lit. the profession, or 
engagement, made in answer to a question. 
Said with allusion to the questions and 
answers used at baptism, which Tertullian 
calls sponsio?iem salutis ; & in ref. to the 
present passage, says, 'the soul is conse- 
crated not by washing, but by answering.' 

'ETTg'xw, f. E(pi^u), prop, to have or 
hold any thing upon, to hold out any thing 
iowm^ds. In N. T. it is used, 1. fig. as said 
of the 7ni?id, to hold or fix the mind upon, 
to attend to, by a metaph. taken from 
archery. So Find. 01. ii. 160, ro^ov 
(TKOTi ix) ETTEXELv I foll. by dat. and vovv 
impl. Acts iii. 5, b etteXx^v avToX^. 
1 Tim. iv. 16; foil, hy ttws, Lu. xiv. 7, 
and Class. The ellip. is expressed at 
Lucian Alex. 4, toIs fxeyLorTOL^ ettex^lv 
Tov vovv. — II. as ETTEyELv TLvd signifies 
in the best Class, e. gr. Thuc. i. 9. Hdian. 
vi. 5, 18, to hold hack, detain any one ; so 
in N. T. Acts xix. 22, auros ETZE^ryE 
■%p6vov Eh T71V 'Aaiav, it means, by an 
ellip. of EavTov, to hold oneself hack, to 
remain, as in Sept. 2 Chr. xviii. 5, 14. 
Gen. viii. 10. 2 Mace. v. 25. Philo, p. 
1029. Thuc. ii. 101. Xen. Cyr. iv. 2, 6. 
V. 4, 38 ; and so Pint. vi. 574, 3, ob iro- 
\vv xpovov ETTLcrxoov : a sense which 
springs from the primary one to hold, or 
keep on or hy any thing. At Phil. ii. 16, 
koyov ^60^9 ETTEXovTE^, somc eminent 
Expositors suppose the sense to be, ' per- 
severing in the knowledge and practice of 
the word of life.' But although supported 
by Heb. iv. 14. x. 23, it is against the 
context; which rather requires the sense 
generally assigned, ' holding forth,' or 
raiher 'out,' i. e. towards, like Lat. por- 



Eni 

rigere. This use of ettex^lv for 'rrapix^i-v, 
however rare, is found in Hom. Od. xvi. 

444, KptaS OTTTOV 'El/ X^l'/OEO-Oril' EdfJKEV, 

Eiricrx^ t£ olvov ipvOpov : and something 
like it in the phrase /uajof kiricrx'^^^-i 
which occ. in Hom. Pausan. & others, also 
£7r£xw ttleIv Aristoph. Nub. 1382, et al. 

'E7rr7p£ a Jo), f. dcroj, (EirvpEia, insult 
or threat ; see my note on Thuc. i. 26,) 
gener. to maltreat, either by deeds, to in- 
sult, trans. Matt. v. 44. Lu. vi. 28 ; with 
dat. Philo, p. 972. Xen. Mem. iii. 5, 16 ; 
or by words, to traduce, calumniate, with 
acc. 1 Pet. iii. 16, and Class. 

'EttI, prep, governing the genit. dat. 
and accus. with the primary signif. on or 
upon. I. with the genit. and i. of place, 
in a great variety of relations, compre- 
hended under the two leading ideas, of 
REST upon, on, or in, and of motion u2)on, 
to, towards, 1 ) of place where, after words 
implying rest upon, on, in, &c. and that 
both gener. with gen. of place, as Matt, 
iv. 6, ETTL x^i-pd)v dpov(rL (TE, aud ix. 2, 6. 
xvi. 19, et al. ssepe; also fig. Matt, xviii. 16, 
Lva ETTL aTOfxaTos dvo fxapTvpwv v TpLWV 
orTadf] irdv prjl^a, ' on the testimony,' Mk. 
xii. 26, ETTL T^s (SaTov, i. e. 'at the section 
called the bush,' Acts xxi. 23, evxvv 
ExovTE£ E<p' kavTuiv, and spec, in a judi- 
cial sense, coram, apud, in the presence of. 
Matt, xxviii. 14. Acts xix. 20, cTavro^ 

fXOV £7rt TOV CrVVEdpLOV. XXvi, 2, dTTO- 

XoyElcrdaL £7rt crov. 1 Cor. vi. 1, 6. 
1 Tim. vi. 13, and sometimes without a 
judicial allusion, 2 Cor. vii. 14, v kuvxv- 
o-i§ 77 £7rt TtTou, also in Class. 2) of place 
tchither, after words implying motion or 
direction upon, to, towards. Sec. with sub- 
sequent rest upon, Matt. xxvi. 12. Mk. 
iv. 26. ix. 20. xiv. 35. Lu. viii. 16. xxii. 
40. John vi. 2, et al. ssepe, and Class. — ii. 
of time when, i. e. on, at, or during, Heb. 
i. 2. 2 Pet. iii. 3 ; of time, as marked by 
contemporary events, at. Matt. i. 11, £7rt 
T7]^ fiETOLKEnia^ Ba/3. Acts xi. 28, ' un- 
der,' kiTL KXavdtov. Mk. ii. 26. Lu. iii. 2. 
iv. 27. So of actions as specifying time, 
e. gr. £7ri tcov 7rpoaEVX(jov /ulov, 'during, 
or in, my prayers,' Rom. i. 10. Eph. i. 16. 
Philem. 4. — iii. fig. as said 1 ) of dignity 
or authority, upon, over. Matt. ii. 2z, 
(SaoTiXEVEL kirl t^s 'lovdaia?. Rom. ix. 
5. Eph. iv. 6, 6 u)v kiri irdvTujv 9£05. 
Acts viii. 27. xii. 20. Rev. ii. 26. ix. 11, 
and Class. 2) of a suhject of discourse, 
ON, of, only after verbs of speaking, 
writing, &c. Gal. iii. 16, ov XiyEi ws kirl 
TToXXcov, and Class. 3) of manner, where 
ETTL with gen. forms a phrase for an adv. 
e. gr. £7r' dXrjdELa^, ' of a truth, in truth, 
truly,' Mk. xii. 14, 32. Lu. iv. 25. Acts 
iv. 27. X. 34, and Sept. So in the Class. 
k(p' ria-vxia^ for i^aux^^? — ^^ith 



138 



Eni 



139 



the DATIVE, and i. of place, in the same 
sense as tTrl vAi\\ gen. 1) of pLace where^ 
after words implying rest 7ipo?i^ on^ in^ &c. 
and that both prop, as Matt. xiv. 8, 11. 
Mk. ii. 4. iv. 38, & oft. ; and as implying 
also proximity, at^ close hy^ Matt. xxiv. 33. 
John iv. 6. V. 2. Acts iii. 10. v. 9. Rev. 
xxi. 12 ; also, as said of pers. ivith^ among^ 
Acts xxviii. 14, iir auTois iiriixiivaL. 
2 Cor. vii. 7, and Class. 2) of place 
ivliitlier^ after verbs implying motion, or 
direction itpon^ to^ toivards ; and that both 
gener. & prop, as Matt. ix. 16. Mk. ii. 
21. John viii. 7. Acts viii. 16, and fig. Heb. 

X. 16, ^l^OUS VOfXOV^ fXOV £7rt TOLS Kap- 

^I'ats a. Also as implying direction of mind 
towards any one, either friendly, 2 Cor. ix. 
14,'rr;i»x«|Oii/TOu6£OL'£(p' v/luv. Lu.xviii. 
7, or hostile, Lu. xii. 52, 'irarijp i<p' ulw, 
Kai vtos ETTL iraTpi. Rev. xii. 17, and 
Class. — II. of time when, iqoon^ at, in, 1) 
gener. Heb. ix. 26, kirl crvuTsXeia toov 
aiujvuiv. 2 Cor. iii. 14. vii. 4. Eph. iv. 

26. Phil. i. 3. Heb. ix. 15. Sept. and 
Class. 2) spec, in the sense afte7\ lit. 
immediately upon, Actsxi. 9, tt/s ^XLip-sco? 
TT/s ysvojULEvr}^ kirl ^T£<pdv(jp. John iv. 

27, eirl TouTw, tJie7'eupon, and Class. — iii. 
and ^)fig^ as said of power, authority over. 
Matt. xxiv. 47. Lu. xii. 44, & Class. 2) 
as marking accession to something already 
mentioned, or implied, upon, unto, besides. 
Matt. XXV. 20, 22, aWa ToXavTa sKsp- 
dr]ara iir' ai/Tots. Lu. iii. 20. xvi. 26. 
Eph. vi. 16. Col. iii. 14. Phil. ii. 27. 
Heb. viii. 1, and Class. 3) as that 2ipon 
which any thing rests as a foundation or 
support, in various specification s, both gener. 
Matt. iv. 4. Lu. iv. 4, & after words imply- 
ing hope, trust, or confidence upon or in 
any person or thing, Mk. x. 24. Lu. xi. 22. 
Rom. XV. 12. 1 Tim. vi. 17, et al. ; also 
in the phrase KaTaanr^v. k'K eK'ki^l, Acts 
ii. 26, et al. kirl tw dvofiarL tlvo^, ' on 
the ground of his name,' &c. Acts iv. 17. 
V. 28. Lu. xxiv. 17, et al. and Class. Also 
of the subject of an action, or discourse, in 
reference to, or concerning, Mk. vi. 52. 
Lu. xxiii. 38. John xii. 16. Heb. xi. 4. 
Rev. X. 11, and Class. ; of a condition or 
sanction, under which any thing takes 
place, 1 Cor. ix. 10, Itt' eX'ttlSl apoTpLav. 
Heb. vii. 11. viii. 6, kiri KpeiTToaLv 
kirayyiKLai^. ix. 17. x. 28, and Class. 
Of the ground or motive of any action, 
upon, at, i. e. on account of, because of. 
Matt. xix. 9, fxr] kirl TropvELO.. Lu. ii. 20, 
aivovvTE^ Tov Qeou £7ri TTaacv. v. 5. 
Acts iii. 16. iv. 21, et al. and Class.; of 
the occasion upon which any thing takes 
place, upon^ at, over, after words denoting 
an emotion of the mind, as joy, sorrow, 
surprise, &c. Matt, xviii. 13, x^^'P^*- 
avTtp. Lu. i. 14, 47, et al. saepe and 
Class. ; of the object or purpose of any 



action, 2ipon, unto, for. Gal. v. 13, €7r' 
kXEvdEpia kK\i'}6r]Te. 1 Thess. iv. 7. 
Eph. ii. r. 2 Tim. ii. 14. Phil. iii. 12, et 
al. and Class. — III. Mith the accus. i. of 
place, and 1) as implying rest and motion 
combined, in which case it marks a spread- 
ing out upon or over any thing, in various 
directions. Hence prop, along upon, along 
over, throughout, or simply upon, over, at^ 
among ; and that both gener. ii^ Matt.xxvii. 
45, (TKoxos kyivETo £7rt irdcav tyiv ytjv, 
and X. 34. xiv. 19, 26. xv. 35. xviii. 12. 
xxii. 9. xxiv. 16, et al. sajpe; and spec. 
where the motion is directed to a higher 
place, up upoji, up to. Matt. iv. 5, 'LcrTir](nv 
avTov kirl to TTTEpvyLOv tov LEpov. xiii. 
48, dva^ifi. ETTL TOV aiyLoXdv, & xxi. 5, 
E7ri[3£(3i]K<jb'3 k'TTL ovov, ct al. ssepe & Class. 
So of a yoke or burden taken up, or placed 
upon any one. Matt. xi. 29. xxiii. 4. 
Acts XV. 10; and metaph. said of fear, 
guilt, or punishment, which come upon 
any one as a burden laid upon him to 
bear. Matt, xxiii. 35, sq. Lu. i. 12. xxi. 
34, sq. John iii. 36, et al. ; also of good, 
&c. Matt. X. 13. Lu. x. 6. Gal. vi. 16, 
&c. ; where the motion is to a lower place, 

Matt. X. 29, EV £^ aVTU)V OV TTEOrElTat, 

ETTL Trjv y7]v : and xiii. 5, 7. xxi. 44. 
Acts ii. 3. Rev. viii. 10. xvi. 2, and Class. 
Fig. of the Holy Spirit descending and 
abiding upon any one, Matt. iii. 16. xii. 
18. 2) of place whither, implying motion 
upon, to, towards, any place or object, as a 
limit, aim, end, prop, and gen. e. gr. after 
TTi'TTTO) and EKTrLTTTOD, Matt. xxvi. 39. 
Lu, V. 12, et al. So after verbs of going, 
coming, conducting, &c. equiv. to tt/jos 
with an acc. Matt. iii. 13. xii. 28, et al. 
Fig. of measure, extent, upon, zmto, i. e. 
up to, about, Rev. xxi. 16, k/uLETpi^a-e ttjv 
ttoXlv kirl a-Tadiov^ Said. X'-^- Class. 
So also E(p' ocrou, in so far as, inasmuch 
as. Matt. XXV. 40. Rom. xi. 13, ettl 
ttXeIov, further, the more, Acts iv. 17. 
2 Tim. ii. 16. iii. 9, and Class. — il. of 
time, 1) time h.ovf \ong, during, for, Lu. 
iv. 25, EKXELordf] 6 ovpavo^ kirl ETf] Tpta, 
and xiii. 31. xviii. 20. xix. 8, 10. Heb. 
xi. 30, and Class. So also £7ri )(poi'oi/,ybr 
a time, Lu. xviii. 4. kcp' ocrov, sc. xpovov, 
so long CCS, Matt. xix. 15. kcj)' lkuvov soil. 
Xpovov, a long while. Acts xx. 11, and 
adverbs kirl ttoXv and kirl ttXeIov, Acts 
xxviii. 6. XX. 9. 2) implying a term or 
limit of time, upon the coming of which 
any thing is done, upon, at, about, Mk. 
XV. 1, £7rt TO Trpcot. Lu. x. 35, £7rt ttjv 
avpiov. Acts iii. 1, kirl Ti)v aipav Ttj^ 
•TTpoarEvxv^-, and Class. ; joined with an 
adv. in later usage, ettl Tph, Acts x. 16. 
xi. 10, and Class. — iii. fig. as said of 
power or authority over, or care over, 
upon, over, Lu. i. 33, (Saa-LXEVcrEL kiri tov 
oIkov 'la/c. and ix. 1. x. 19. Acts vii. 10. 



Eni 



140 



Eni 



Rom. V. 14, et al. and Class. ; as said of 
an object, or ground wpon^ ovei\ or in re- 
spect of vihich any thing is done, or felt, 
l) of the subject of an action, over, in re- 
spect to^ Mk. XV. 24, BaXXouTs^ Kkfjpov : 
or of discourse^ &lc. concerning^ Mk. ix. 12. 
Rom. iv. 9. 1 Tim. i. 18. Heb. vii. 13. 
Sept. and later Class. 2) of that on which 
the mind and heart are set, either in kind- 
ness towards, upon^ over^ Matt. xiv. 14, 
fc<j-7r\a'y)(i;i'cr0t] ett' aurots. xv. 32. Lu. 
vi. 35. Rom. ix. 23. xi. 22. Eph. ii. 7 ; or 
hostility, against, Matt. xii. 26, i<p' eau- 
Ttjv E/jLEpLa-dr}. Mk. iii. 26. Lu. xi. 17. 
Acts vii. 54, and Class. Hence also as 
the object of hope and trust, Matt, xxvii. 
43, TriTTOLdev iirl tov Oeov. Acts ix. 42, 
et al. Also of the occasion or object, on or 
over which joy or sorrow is felt. Rev. 
xviii. 20, Evcppaivov ett' avrvv. Lu. 
xxiii. 28, fxy] KXaisre Itt' e/ulI. Rev. i. 7, 
K6\j/ovTaL £7r' avTou. Also as denoting pur- 
pose of action, upon, for. Matt. iii. 7, ipx. 
ETTi TO (SoLTrTLcrjULa av, ' to be baptized & 
xxvi. 55, ETTL Xria-T-nu. Lu. vii. 44. xv. 4. 
xxiii. 48, and Class. In composition, tTrt im- 
plies, 1 ) motion upon, towards, against, as 
ETrayo), ETrip^o/uLaL, &c. 2) rest upon, 
over, at, as ettex^-, i'T^avairavu), &c. 

3) accession, as ETTLcrvvdyoo, ETratTEw. 

4) succession, as ettel/ull, ETrLTcccrcrco. 5) 
repetition or renewal, as ETravSpdcocn^. 

'Kit aiv (i), f. ricofxaL, prop, to go 
upon, tread, ivalk on, as Deut. i. 36, and 
elsewhere in Sept. and Xen. Cyr. iii. 3, 
27. Indeed, from such passages as Eurip. 

Elect. 94, TEL)(ElJOV EVTO'S OV (BaLVU) TTOOU, 

it is plain that the primary signification 
was, to set foot upon. Thus in N. T. it 
signif. I. to set foot on, to come into, arrive 
in a country. Acts xx. 18, eU T-t]v 'Acriav, 
and XXV. 1, t?7 kirapyj^i-' — !!• to set foot 
UPON, and by impl. to mount, either on 
the back of a horse, or ass, Matt. xxi. 5 ; 
or on board ship, to embark. Acts xxi. 6, 
fits TO nrXolov, and xxvii. 2, TrXoico, 
absol. xxi. 2. Sept. and Class. 

''E'm(3dX\(i), f. (SaXo), to cast, throw, 
or laT/ any thing tipon another thing, or 
person. In N. T. it is used, I. trans. 
prop, and foil, by dat. Mk. xi. 7, ett. avTco 
TO. LfJLaTLa, oft. in Class. 1 Cor. vii. 35, 
(Spoxov vjJ^lv £. So Xenoph. Venat. x. 7, 

ETTL^aXXoVTa T0U5 (SpOXOVS ETTL OLTTO- 

G-xaXLdu)fxaTa. See more in my note on 
1 Cor. In the sense to clap on, as said of 
a patch. Matt. ix. 16. Lu. v. 36. In the 
phrase ettl^oXXelv Tr]v x^^P^-> '^^^ 
Xetpas, foil, by ettl Tiva, or a dat. to lay 
hands upon, in two senses, \) to seize, as 
said of a person, Matt. xxvi. 50. Mk. xiv. 
46. Lu. XX. 19. xxi. 12. John vii. 30, 44. 
Acts V. 18. xxi. 27. Sept. and Class. 2) 
to lay hold of, undertake ; as said of a 



thing, Lu. ix. 62, kir. t^v X^^P^ uvtov ett' 
dporpov. Sept. in Deut. xii. 7, 18. — II. 
INTRANS. with kavTov implied, to cast 
oneself upon, foil, by eU and acc. Mk. iv. 
37, TO. KVfxaTa ETrijSaXXEV eU to ttXolou. 
absol. xiv, 72, Kai ETTLfBaXwu, ' rushing 
out of the hall,' ekXule, Hence, impers. 
to fall towards, to fall to, pertain to any 
one, Lu. xv. 12, to E7rL(idXXov (/xoi) 
p.Epo<s. 1 Mace. X. 30, and Class, oft. 

'Ett L(3ap Ew, f. 770-0), prop, to he a bur- 
den upon, iceigh down. In N. T. only 
metaph. to be burdensome to, in a pecu- 
niary sense, to be chargeable to, 1 Thess* 
ii. 9. 2 Thess. iii. 8, Trpos to /x.77 ettl- 
(Sapijaai Tiva, So Dion. Hal. 658, 9. 
1688, 3. In 2 Cor. ii. 5, tW fxi] kirL^apoo^ 
the words may either be construed with 
what follows, meaning 'that I may not 
bear too hard on you al? in my censure ; 
or be taken as parenthetic, in the sense, 
' that I may not be too severe,' where 
vfxiv may be supplied from v/md^; as in 
Appian, vol. ii. p. 415, 71. Schw. fir} kiri- 

(BapELU. 

'E7rt/3t/3a^a), f. d(Tio, to cause to 
mount, trans, as a beast for riding, Lu. x. 
34, ETTtjS. avTOv kirl to Iolov KT7jvo9 : 
with ETTt impl. Lu. xix. 35. Acts xxiii. 24. 
Sept. and Class. 

'E7rij3X.£7r to, f. xj/u), prop, to cast tJie 
eyes upon, look upon, Luc. i. 197, ett. to 
TrpoacoTTov tov vo(tovvto<3, and elsewh. 
with acc. ; but in Sept. foil, with acc. and 
ETTt. In N. T. only fig. to look upon, i. e. 
by impl. with respect, Ja. ii, 3, kiri^. kirl 
TOV (popovvTa, &c. ; or gener. with favour 
and kindness, Lu. i. 48, kiri^XExj/Ev kiri 
TOV vLov fxov : and so oft. in Sept. 

'Ett L ^Xr] /jLa, aTos, to, {kirLfSaXXaj^) 
lit. a7iy thing put on, as a patch. Matt. ix. 
16. Mk. ii. 21. Lu. V. 36. In Josh. ix. 5, 
Symm. the shoes of the Gibeonites, which 
had various pieces of hide sewed to them, 
are said to have E7rL(iXrifxaTa. The word 
also occurs in Is. iii. 20, Sept. and Arrian 
Vit. ^1. vi. 29, 8, but only of tapestry, 
with reference to the figures wrought upon 
the ground. 

'ETTLfSodu), f. va-co, to cry aloud to, 
foil, by TLVL, Thuc. v. 65. iv. 28. vii. 70. 
Pol. X. 12, 5. The word occurs absol. (as 
in Thuc. viii. 92,) at Acts xxv. 24, ettl- 
(SocovTE^ fXY] 6eTv ^yv avTov, cryi?2g out to, 
inclamantes : fxoi is to be repeated from 
the preceding. Comp. Thuc. viii. 92, kir. 
fxi] diroXicraL tijv iraTpida. 

'Ett lISovXt], ?}<s, j7, a project or design 
against any one, a plot. Acts ix. 24. xx. 
3, 19. xxiii. 30. Sept. and Class, oft. 

'Eiriy a fJLfSpEvu), f. Eucrco, (etti, ya/uL- 
(BpEuco,) prop, to contrctct affi.7iity with by 
marriage, to intermarry with • but in N. T. 



E n I 



141 



Eni 



to marry any woman by right of affinity. 
Matt. xxii. i24, as said of the marriage of 
a brother's ^vido^v, according to the Jewish 
law, Deut. xxv. 5. 

'E7rty£io9, ou, 6, 77, adj. for the 
phrase stti yy^, (yetas,) eariiiiy, belong- 
ing to the earth, as croo^aTa kiriyiia, 
1 Cor. XV. 40. 2 Cor. v. 1 ; of persons, 
Phil.ii. 10. Lucian Icar.2. Diod. Sic. i. 13, 
init. ; also of thi?2f/s, xa £7riy. ' things 
pertaining to this life,' [i. e. only,] and so 
level to human capacities, John iii. 12. 
Phil. iii. 19. a-ocpia £7ri'y£to§, earthly, and 
by impl. imperfect, mean, Ja. iii. 15. 

'ETTty ty 1/0 /X at, to arise upon, come 
on ; said of a wind, to spring up, Acts 
xxviii. 13, kiTLy^vofxivov votov. So Thuc. 
iv 30, TTi/euuaTos i7rt.yEvou.i1/ov, and iii, 
74. 

'^TT ly Lvuj (T Kw, f. yvcjoaofxaL. The 
primary sense seems to be that of the 
Latin agnosco (adgnosco), lit. to know at, 
i. e. ' to know by looking at' any person or 
thing, Hom. Od. xviii. 30. Hence easily 
arise the various senses, to ascertain, (i. e. 
by observation,) perceive, recognise ; and 
also by impl. to acknoidedge as true. 
These all occur in N. T., and are so closely 
connected, that it is sometimes difficult to 
fix the exact sense to one in particular. 
Moreover, the action (of knowing) is some- 
times represented as uichoative, or in pro- 
gression; and at others as completed by 
full knowledge. I. inchoative, and 1) 
gener. to come to know, 'become acquainted 
with,' from observation of things, Lu. i. 4, 
'iva ETTLyvcp^ ttju aacpaXELav. Acts xxii. 
24, al. Sept. & Class. ; with acc. of pers. 
Matt. xi. 27, £7r. tov Ylov — t6v TLaTipa. 
So with airo tlvo?, ' to know from or by 
a thing,' Matt. vii. 16. 2) to ascertain 
from observation, foil, by oti, Lu. vii. 37, 
iiTLyvovcra otl avaKELTai, and xxiii. 7. 
Acts xix. 34. xxii. 29; absol. ix. 30. 
3) in the sense to perceive, he ivell aware 
of, "with acc. Lu. v. 22, iiriyvov^ tous 
SLa\oyLarfjiov9 av. Mk. v. 30 : foil, by otl, 
Mk. ii. 8. Lu. i. 22. 4) recognise, i. e. 
to Jcnoic hy sight, and perceive a person or 
thing to be one whom we have before seen ; 
of persons. Matt. xxiv. 35. Mk. vi. 33, 54. 
Lu. xxiv. 16, 31. Acts iii. 10. iv. 13; of 
things. Acts xii. 14, iir, ty^u <pujvriv tlvo<s, 
and xxvii. 39, tyiv yrju. Sept. and Class. 
— II. in a COMPLETIVE sense, to have a 
full knowledge of &c. 1) gener. and foil, 
by acc. of thing, Rom. i. 32, to SLKaLO)fxa 
TOV Qeov £7rtyyoi/T£s. Col. i. 6 ; by acc. 
of pers. 2 Cor. xiii. 5 ; absol. Acts xxv. 
10 ; pass. 1 Cor. xiii. 12, /cat E7rEyvwadr]v. 
2) spec, in the sense to acknoivledge, as 
being what one is or professes to be. Matt, 
xvii. 12, 'HXtas nh] r]X.0£, koI ovk iiri- 
ypvaaav avroif. 2 Cor. i. 14 ; so of things, 



doctrines, an epistle, &c. v. 13. 3) from 
the Hebr., & with the idea of good-will, to 
know and approve, ack?ioivledge and care 
for, cherish, foil, by acc. 1 Cor. xvi. 18, 
fTrtytfcocr/cfiTE ovv tous tolovtovs, and 
Sept. Numb. xvi. 5. 

'ETTty f a)(Tt?, £609, rj, corresponds to 
Lat. cognitio, denoting I. subjectively, 
the act of coming to a full knowledge of 
any thing, and its results, acknoidedgment^ 
e. gr. T?}? a\?)0£tas, 1 Tim. ii. 4. 2 Tim. 
ii. 25. iii. 7. Tit. i. 1 ; ayaOou, Philem. 6 ; 
TOV J^vpLov, 2 Pet. i. 3. ii. 20 ; d/uLapTLa^, 
Rom. iii. 20, & Class. — II. objectively, 
the knowledge so acquired, ftdl know- 
ledge ; said in N. T. of what is known 
in Scripture of God, Christ, divine things, 
&c. Rom. i. 28, TOV Qeou ^^elv ev etti- 
yvcoaEL, and x. 2. Eph. i. 17. iv. 13. Phil, 
i. 9. Col. i. 9. ii. 2. iii. 10. 2 Pet. i. 2, 8. 

'E TTtypa^r/, 77§, 77, {iirLypafpco,) a su- 
perscription or inscription, e. gr. on a coin, 
Matt. xxii. 20. Mk. xii. 16. Lu. xx. 24. 
Also that placed on the breast, or over the 
head of a criminal about to be executed, 
stating his name and crime, Mk. xv. 26. 
Lu. xxviii. 38. 

'E7r/y/oa0ct), f. I. prop, to graze, 
wound slightly, as Hom. II. xi. 388, to 
make a mark on, as vii. 187, to graveupon^ 
inscribe with a stilus ; espec. said of a 
public inscriptipn, Mk. xv. 26. Acts xvii. 

38. Rev. xxi. 12. Sept. and Class.— II. 
fig. to impress deeply on the heart, 
Heb. viii. 10, £7rt KapSia^ avTwv ettl- 
ypd\l/ui [vofiov^ pt-ov], and x. 16. So Prov. 
vii. 3, iiTLypaxlrou [Aoyous] ettl to 
ttXcctos tt/s Kapdia^ aov. jEschyl. Prom, 
791, vv iyypdcpov crov pivvpocnv di\TOL^ 

(ppEVUiV, 

'^TT lSelKVV piL, f. OEL^CO, tO shoiV tO 

any one, exhibit, I. prop, to shoiv for ob- 
servation. Matt. xxii. 19, iiTL^EL^aTE julol 
TO vopiapia. Lu. xx. 24. Mid. Acts ix. 

39, ETTLOELKvvpEvaL y^LTvova's. Lu. xvii. 
14, £7rt^. kavTov's rots lepevctl, & Class. 
So of deeds, as miracles, &c. to shoiv forth. 
Matt. xvi. 1, and Class. Also, to point 
Old to any one, for observation. Matt. xxiv. 

I, £7r. avT(Z Tas oLKoSopid?, and Class. — 

II. FIG. to show, and by impl. make ap- 
pear, by arguments, &c., to prove to be so 
or so, Heb. vi. 1 7. Acts xviii. 28, & Class. 

'Ett t^EXo/xat, f. di^opLUL, depon. 
mid. to receive to oneself; and by impl. to 
admit to hospitality, &c. trans. 1) prop. 
3 John 10. 1 Mace. xii. 8, iir. tous u^eX- 
(pov^. Pol. xxii. 1, 3. 2) fig. of a teacher, 
to culmit, assent to, approve, 3 John 9, ovk 
ETTidixETaL r]pid<s : of things, admit, em* 
brace, Ecclus. li. 26. Pol. vi. 24, 7. 

'E-Trt^rj/XEO), f. tKroD, {iiri, drjpLO^,) 
prop, and in Class, to reside among one's 



Eni 



142 



E ni 



own people, or at liome^ as opp. to ajro- 
h)fxia}. Xen. Cyr. vii. 5, 7. Time. i. 1, 30 ; 
in N. T. to come among any people as a 
stranger^ to sojourn among them; intrans. 
Acts ii. 10, OL k-TTLomxavvTe^ ^FcofialoL^ 
' the Romans resident at Jerusalem,' and 
xvii. 21, OL £7rto?;,aouyTf 5 ^ivoi^ ' the 
sojourning foreigners' in Athens. So Xen. 
Mem. i. 2, 61, tou? ETrLSii/jLOvvTa^ kv 
AuKsd. ^ivovs. So Theophr. Eth. Ch. 3, 
says of Athens, ttoWol sTrLOinuLodcrL ^ivoi. 

^Ett id LaTdcrao fxaL, i. ^ofxai, prop. 
to arrange fuHlier^ ' to issue other and 
further directions ;' fig. Gal. iii. 15, where 
see my note. 

'ETTto io w/u.i, f. Saoaru}^ in Class, to 

five to, in addition, Hom. II. xxiii. 559. 
n N. T. to give or reach forth any thing, 
to deliver over, put into any one's hands, 
I. PROP. & GEXER. Matt. vii. 9, fxh Xidov 
ETTLOcocrEL auTw ; Lu, xi. 11, sqq. iv. 17, 
ETTEdodrj avTia (3l(S\lov, et al. In Class. 
to deliver, as said of a letter. — II. fig. to 
give over, commit, as a ship to the wind, 
Acts xxvii. 15, £7rt6oi/T£S (to irKoZov Tto 
dvE/JiU)) kipipofXEQa. 

'ETTt^topOoco, f. 600-60, prop. 'to put 
further to rights what has heen wrong,' 
but partly righted. In N. T. only mid. 
in Tit. i. 5, -rd XeLttovtu k7rL8Lopd(jo(Tr]. 
And so Philo, t. ii. 534, Trept t^s tcov 
Xelttovtcov £7rt5top066cr£aj5. 

'ETTtouo), f. ^uo'60, (^u6o, or Sovco,) to 
go down, as said of the sun, to set upon or 
during any thing, kirL tlvl, Eph. iv. 26. 
Sept. Deut. xxiv. 17, kirLOvaEraL 6 rjXio^ 
£7r' avTco scil. fiLadM, i. e. unpaid. Ex. 
xxii. 3, kav ok dvaTEiXy 6 tjXlo^ £7r' 
avTw. Philo, t. ii. 324, fxi] £7rt2u£T6o 6 

77X1OS TOls dvECrKoXoTTLCrjULEVOL^. 

'^TTLELKELa, ttS, f], {klT LELKTj^,) prOp. 

7noderation, propriety. In N. T. and later 
writers, clemency, humanity. Acts xxiv. 1. 
2 Cor. X. 1, at least as the word is there 
explained by the Commentators. See, 
however, my notes. 

*E7rt£t/c/;§, £09, 6, 77, adj.fr. £7ri and 
e'Lko}, to yield. The primary signification 
is 1) yielding to any person or feeling, 
pliable, mild, gQnlle, forbearing, as in 1 Tim. 
iii. 3. Tit.iii.2. Ja.iii. 17. IPet.ii. 18. Sept. 
& Class. So Aristot. defines to ettlelke's, 
as TO diKaLov ov kutu t6v vopiov, dXXd 
k'Kavopdoofxa tov vop.Lu.ov diKatov. 2) by 
a metaphor taken from a garment, which 
yields to the shape of the body, and, as we 
ssLj,fits it ; it means, fitting, suitable, and 
proper, as said of things ; and decorous, 
respectable, as said of persons. See my 
note on Thuc. viii. 93. In like manner, 
ETrLTr\6i]<s (from kirl & Ta^6o, to stretch,) 
means lit. stretched over, so as to fit any 
thing, and fig. fitting.^ ineet^ suitable., &c. 



Hence to ettleike?, propriety and probity, 
Phil. iv. 5. Such, at least, is the sense 
assigned by the recent Commentators in 
general. But though this be a sense found 
in the purest writers, yet it does not suit 
the context ; which, as I have shown in 
my note there, rather requires that of 
modestia, meaning what the Greek philo- 
sophers denote by /xfTpioTrctOfta" which, 
of course, includes the sense gentleness., or 
forbearance, on which latter see my note 
on Thuc. i. 76. 

'E7rt5r?T£6o, f. 170-60, in Class, to seek 
after, look for ; in N. T. 1. to seek for 
any person lost. Acts xii. 19, ETrt^'fjTTjo-as 

avTOV, KOL pLt] EVpooV, &C. Scpt. EccluS. 

vii. 28, and Class. ; in the sense to seek at 
the hands of any one, to require. Matt. xii. 
39, (TiipElov £7r. and xvi. 4. Mk. viii. 12. 
Lu. xi. 29. Phil. iv. 17, to (5o'/xa. Acts 
xix. 39, nrl irEpi kripo^v, and later Greek 
writers. — II. to seek cfter any thing, 
to long for it. Matt. vi. 32, TauTa Ta 'idvr] 
kiTLX^n^EL. Lu. xii. 30. Rom. xi. 7. Phil, 
iv. 17. Heb. xi. 14, al. 

'E7r/.6a2/aTto9, ov, 6, 77, adj. doomed 
to death^ as condemned criminals, 1 Cor. 
iv. 9, where see my note. Dion. Hal. Ant, 
vii. 35. 

'E7ri0£O'ts, £609, 77, (£7rtTi6?7/>it,) « lay- 
ing hands on any pers. or thing, for any pur- 
pose, good or evil. In N. T. applied only 
to the imposition of hands, as a rite used 
among the Jews, when blessing was be- 
stowed, and divine assistance imparted ; 
(see Gen. xlviii. 14. 2 K. v. 11,) and em- 
ployed by the Apostles in ordaining 
ministers to the Church, or imparting the 
extraordinary graces of the Holy Spirit, 
Acts viii. 18. 1 Tim. iv. 14. 2 Tim. i. 6. 
Heb, vi. 2. 

'EtTiOujUECO, f. 770'60, (fTTt, 6uju5s,) gC- 

ner. & in Class, to set 07ie''s hea7i upon, desire 
earnestly, trans, in N. T., and denoting, I. 
to desire, in a good sense, Matt.xiii. 17. Lu. 
xxii. 15. 1 Tim. iii. 1. Heb. vi. II. 1 Pet. i. 
J 2, and Class. — II. to desire, in a middle 
or indiff"erent sense, to crave, Lu. xvi. 21. 
xvii. 22. Gal. v. 17. Rev. ix. 6. Theocr. 
xiv. 57. — III. to desire, in a bad sense, to 
covet, Matt. v. 28. Rom. vii. 7. xiii. 9. 
1 Cor. X. 6. Ja. iv. 2, and Class. 

'E TT 1 0 u 7; Tr) 9, ov, 6, one who eagerly 
longs after any thing, 1 Cor. x. 6, £7rt0u- 
p-rirai kukwv. Sept., Jos., and lat. Class. 

'E7ri0u/>tta, a9, 77, eager desire, long- 
ing, 1. gener. and in a good sense, Lu. 
xxii. 15. Phil. i. 23. 1 Thess. ii. 17. (In a 
middle sense. Rev. xviii. 14. Sept. & Class.) 
— II. in a bad sense, inordinate desire, lust., 
espec. on sensual objects, pleasure gener. 
&c. 1) gener. Mk.iv. 19. Rom. vi. 12. vii. 
7. Col. iii. 5. I Tim. vi. 9. 2 Tim. iii. 6. 



Eni 



143 



E n I 



iv. 3. Tit. iii. 3. Ja. i. 14. 2 Pet. iii. 3. Jiide 
16, 18. So £7ri6ujui'at crap/cos, carnal 
lusts. Gal. V. 16\ 24. Eph. ii. 3. 2 Pet. ii. 

18. 1 John ii. IG. kir. crapKLKai^ 1 Pet. ii. 
11. £7r. KOcrniLKui, Tit. ii. 12. ett. tu)v 
ocpdaXjULcov^ 1 John ii. 16. eir. fXLacrfxov, 
polluted desires^ 2Pet.ii. 10. al kirSvixiaL 
tT]^ aTra-TTj?, deceitful lusts, Eph. iv. 22. 
al Itt. I/E60T., youthful lusts, 2 Tim. ii. 22, 
and Class. 2) said of impure desire, 
lewdness, Rom. i. 24. 1 Th. iv. 5 ; or by 
meton. the object thus lusted after, John 
viii. 44. 1 Johnii. 17. Sept. in Dan. xi.37. 

'ETTtKraOi'^o), f. ttro), to cause to sit 
upon, to seat upon, trans. Matt. xxi. 7, in 
text. rec. ; though other copies have stte- 
KadLdev, intrans. sate on, as Sept. Gen. 
xxxi. 34. Lev. xv. 20. 

'Yatt LKaXiuo, f. £o-to, gener. in Class. 
to call upon in any way, or for any pur- 
pose. In N. T. only used in mid. I. to 
CALL UPON to oneself, to call upon for aid 
in one's behalf, to invoke, trans. 1 ) prop, 
of invocation addressed in prayer to Christ 
for aid, Acts vii. 59, 2t. kirLKoKovixEvov 
{t6v Kupioi/] Koi XiyovTa, Sept. 1 Sam. 
xii. 3 7, sq. 2 Sam. xxii. 7, and so in 
Class. £7r. Toif Qeov, or tous 0£ous. 
Hence, gener. to pray to, as said of God, 
Rom. X. 12, 14. 2 Tim. ii. 22 ; or to ovo/uLa 
KvpLov, Acts ii. 21. ix. 14. Rom. x. 13, 
& oft. in Sept. As said of Christ, 1 Cor. i. 
2. Acts ix. 21. xxii. 16 ; espec. in adjura- 
tions, imprecations, &c., to invoke as a wit- 
ness, 2 Cor. i. 23, and Class. 2) in a Ju- 
dicial sense, to invoke by appeal to an- 
other and higher tribunal or judge, Acts 
XXV. 11,' 12, 21, 25. xxvi. 32. xxviii. 

19. P]ut. Marc. 2. C^s. 4.— II. to call or 
name in addition, to surname, Matt. x. 
25. Sept. Num. xxi. 3. Judg. vi. 32. So 
mid. 1 Pet. i. 17. Elsewhere only pass. 
to he surnamed, 1) prop. Matt, x. 3, o 
iTTi/cXrjOfils O. Lu. xxii. 3, et al. ssepe. 
Sept. and Class. 2) from the Heb. Ja. ii. 
7, and Acts xv. 17, It/)' ous iirLKlKXi^TaL 
TO ovofxd fiov, i. e. ' who are called (or 
surnamed) by my name;' implying pro- 
perty, relation, &c. Baruch ii. 15. 

'FiTT LKciXv fJL fiia, aTCS, TO, {eTTLKaXvir- 

Tw,) , ct covering thrown over any thing; 
and fig. a cloak to hide one's real designs, 
a pretext, 1 Pet. ii. 16, k, n-rj's KUKia^. So 
Menand. frag. p. 30, irXovro^ dk iroXXcov 
k'n-LKaXvfXfx kaTiv. But the Class, elsewh, 
use irpoKaXvfXfxa, or irapaKdXvfXfxa, 

'FiTTLKaXviTTU), f. xj/u), prop. and lit. 
to cover up by placing any thing upon. In 
N. T. fig. to cover over ; as said of si7is, to 
put out of sight, pardon, Rom. iv. 7. 

'E-TrtKiaTa'paTos, ov, 6, v, adj. prop, 
one upon whom a curse rests, accursed, 
abominable, John vii. 49. Gal. iii. 10, 13. 
Wisd. iii. 13. xiv. 8. 



'Rtt LKELiixai, f. KtLaofxaL, gener. to lie 
or be laid upon, to rest upon, in any way. 
In N. T. used I. prop. foil, by kiti tivi, 
John xi. 38, XiGos kirkKEiTO ett' uvtw, 
absol. John xxi. 9, and Class. Metaph. to 
be imposed upon, as necessity, 1 Cor. ix. 16. 
Thuc. viii. 15; or as Ji law, Heb, ix. 10. — 
II. by IMPL. to lie heavy upon, to press 
upo7i, Lu. V. 1, oyXov kiTiK. uvTto : of a 
tempest. Acts xxvii. 20, and Plut. x^^H-^~ 
vo^ kiTLKEifxkvov. So inciwibo in Latin, as 
Virg. Georg. ii. 311, tempestas incubuit sil- 
vis ; fig. to press, to he urgent on, (i. e. with 
entreaties, &c.) Lu. xxiii. 23. Jos. Ant. 
xviii. 6, 6. XX. 5, 3, and Class. 

'ETTi/coup ta, as, 77, {kiriKovpo's^ as- 
sistance, help. Acts xxvi. 22, kirLKovpia^ 
Tvywif. The phrase is oft. used by Polyb, 

'ETTt/cplVoj, f, vu), prop, to judge 
upon, i. e. to confirm or ratify by a later 
judgment. Class. In N. T. to give judg- 
ment upon, to adjudge, decree, Lu. xxiii. 
24, £. yi-vka^ai to aLTtifxa avTwv. 

'EttiX ttju/^ai/o), f. Xv^ofiaL, gener. 
lay or taJce hold of in any way, or for any 
purpose ; lit. to take to oneself, equiv. to 
TTpocrXaiuL^dvuy and Latin adsumo. In N. 
T. it occurs only in mid. kirLXafx^dvofxaL, 
which means prop, to take to oneself, and 
appropriate to one's own use ; but in N. T. 
the word has chiefly the sense to lay or take 
hold of, both prop, and fig. and with various 
shades of meaning, I. gener. foil, by 
Tt]§ }(£if>05, to take hold of by the hand, 
Mk. viii. 23. Acts xxiii. 19. (fig. Heb. 
viii. 9.) Sept. and Class. With gen. of 
pers. expr. or impl. denoting that some 
part is laid hold of, either in order to lead or 
conduct, Lu. ix. 47. Acts xvii. 19. absol. ix. 
27 ; or in order to succour. Matt. xiv. 31. 
Heb.ii. 16 ; espec. to heal, Lu. xiv. 4. Sept. 
& Class. — II. SPEC, with the idea of vio- 
lence, to lay hold of in order to detain, 
1) prop, to apprehend, as a prisoner, Lu. 
xxiii. 26. Acts xxi. 30, 33. absol. xvi. 19. 
xviii. 17. Sept. and Class. 2) fig. as said 
of language uttered, to lay hold of any 
one's words, in order to censure, Lu. xx. 
20, tVa kiriX. avTov Xoyov. Isocr. 223, 
£7rtX.. TU)V £ipriij.kua)v. — III. to get hold of 
make oneself master of. Test. xii. Patr, 
p. 595, Twu v^r]Xu)V k'TreXa^op.eda, nan- 
ciscor, 1 Tmi. vi. 12, 19. Plato, p. 273, 
yaXr\vr\<s knrCX. 425, tou (BeXtl(ttov. 954, 
jur] k^kaTOD tolovtov KTtifxaTO^ kiriXa- 
(3k<x6aL. 

^^TT iXavd dvco, f. Xvarco, to cause an- 
other to be forgetfid of, mid. kTriXavQavo- 
fxuL, to make oneself forgetfid of any person 
or thing. In N. T. it is used 1. prop, to 
forget, Matt. xvi. 5. Mk. xviii. 14, £7r£Xa- 
dovTo dpTovs Xa^sLv. Ja. i. 24, krrr. 
oTTolo^ Y\v. Sept. and Class, foil, by gen. 
— II. FIG. not to mind ox care for; foil. 



E n I 



144 



E n I 



by gen. Heb. vi. 10, ettlX. tov 'ipyov 
v/uLcou. xiii. 2, 16 ; by acc. Phil. iii. 14, to. 
oTTLCTio kiriX. Both constructions occur in 
the Sept. and Class. Pass. perf. part. Lu. 
xii. 6, s7n\£Xr}(TjjL£i/ov. Is. xxiii. 16. Wisd. 
ii. 4. 

'ETTtXty o), f. ^60, prop, and gener. ' to 
say any thing in addition' to what has been 
already said, Herodot. ii. 156. In N. T. 
it signifies, I. to utter upon^ or over^ any 
one a name, to call or name^ John v. 2, n 
kTTLXEyofxivr] 'E/3p. B?]0£cr^a, a Hebraism, 
with which I would compare (as coming 
near to it) the expression in Gen.ii.20, Lko.- 
Xecsy 'A^d/x ovofiaTu irdcrivTol^KTriVEcrL^ 
lit. ' called names over,' graphice, where 
knriXE^Ev would have as well expressed 
the sense; comp. Acts xix. 13, ovofxaX^zLV 
kirl TOV's E')(^ovTa<5 to. irv&vfxaTa to. tto- 
vtipd. How often XiysLv and XiyeaduL 
are in N. T. used for KaXeLV and KaXEia- 
6aL^ espec, in proper names of persons, it 
is needless to remark. So Matt. ii. 23, 
sh ttoXlv XsyofjL&ui^v Na^. This graphic 
use seems to have given rise to the idiom in 
question. — II. from ettI, /or, & Xiyou^ to 
choose, arises kiriXiyiJO, and in mid. kirt- 
XiyojiaL, to choose unto, for oneself, Acts 
XV. 40, kTrLXE^d/jLEvo^ 2. So Sept. and 
Herodot. iii. 157. 

'ETTiXgiTTO), f. xj/M, prop, to Isave om 
at or during any thing, as we say, ' to leave 
any one in the lurch,^ and hence, by impl. 
to fail any one, by being wanting to him 
in doing any thing, Hdot. \m. 21, ttlvohie- 
v6v jjLLv vocop ovK ETTtXiTTf, aud ii. 25. 
So Heb. xi. 32, sTrLXsLxl/eL fie Siriy. 6 

^Ett lXiio- fjLOVi], t]?, ?7, (iTTiXTyo-zxajz/,) 
forgetfulness, Ja. i. 25, dKpoaTij's £7rt\r]o-- 
fxovrj?, for ccKp. kTrLXvcriuLcov. Ecclus. xi. 
27. Dio Cass, and elsewhere. 

'ETTtXoi TTos, Of, o, 77, adj. lit. remain- 
ing over and above to any one, 1 Pet. iv. 2, 
of time. So Isocr. p. 39, tov kir. xpo^ov. 

'EtTiXuCI?, £609, 77, (ETTtXuO),) prOp. 

an untying of any hnot, and met^^h. solution 
of any difficulty, by explication, 2 Pet. i. 
^0^ i<5r«s £7rz.Xuor£a)9, where see my note. 
Comp. Heliod. i. 18, ovELpd-rcou £7rtXuCTt§, 
and iv. 9, tcov )(p?7cr0£i'Tcoy Itt. 

'Ett lXv o), f. ucrctj,prop. to untie a knot, 
lit. to Loosen the strings at the knot; so 
Hdn. iv. 12, 14, aXXo^ kiriXvETaL £7rio-To- 
Xds,i.e. by untying the strings which bound 
them around. So Plut. Alex. 18, tov 
'AX. d/x7JX«i^oi/yTa XvaaL, ^laTEfxilv Trj 
fxaxo-'i-po- '^o (TvvaiuL[JLa. In N. T. fig. to 
solve a difficidty, by removing that which 
causes it, to eocvlain, interpret, Mk. iv. 34. 
Sept. Gen. xlit 12, & Class. Also, fr. the 
adjunct, to determine upon, decide a doubt- 
ful question, Acts xix. 39, £7rtXi/67}cr£Tat. 



'Etr LiiapTX) pioi, f. 770-a), to testify to, 
adtestor, with acc. and infin. 1 Pet. v. 12, 
' to call upon God to witness the truth of 
any assertion ;' see my note on Thuc. ii. 
74, 2. 

'ETTt^fiXEta, a?, 77, {kTrifxiXofxaL^) 
gener. attention to any thing, or attendance 
on any person,, espec. by care of his body, 
as to nursing, or even medical attendance. 
Thus Pollux, iv. 177, inserts among medi- 
cal terms eTTLfxeXeLa, KOfxiSri. And so 
Galen has the expression kirLixiX(.La a-w- 
luaTo^. In the former sense the word is 
to be taken at Acts xxvii. 3, kirLfxeXeia^ 
TVXU.V, (with which compare Xen. Mem. 
iv. 8, 10, eTTLjULEXELa^ TEv^ofxaL,) 'to re- 
ceive the care and attention of his friends;' 
having probably suffered from sea-sickness, 
&c. So Schol. on Apollon. ii. 390, cited 
by Wetstein, vavayvcravTE's etvxov etti- 
jULEXELa^ irapd tcov 'Hp, 

'Yiir LfxiXo fxai, or EOjULaL, f. rjcrofxai^ 
to have care over, to take care of foil, by 
gen. of pers. ; as, for instance, of the sick, 
Lu. X. 34, sq. ; the Church, 1 Tim. iii. 5. 
Sept. and Class. 

'YiTT lpleXoo^, adv. (kirLjtjLEXr]^,) care- 
fully, assiduously, Lu. xv. 8. Sept. and 
Class. 

'YaTt LfXEvuo, f. vw, in Class, to remain 
upon or at, i. e. to remain at any place or 
state, or to continue [intent] on any action ; 
in N. T. it is used I. prop, of place, to 
continuehere or there, foil, by avTOv, Acts 
XV. 34. xxi. 4 ; or with dat. 1 Cor. xvi. 8. 
Phil. i. 24; by acc. of time how long, 
Acts X. 48. xxi. 10, xxviii. 12, 14, et 
Class. : of person, in dat. Acts xxviii. 14 ; 
or TTpo^ with acc. 1 Cor. xvi. 7. Gal. i. 18, 
and Class. — II. FIG. 'to continue in any 
state of life or course of action,' to perse- 
vere in, foil, by dat. as Ty tt'lcttel. Col. i. 
23. T}] x^P'-'^'-'i Acts xiii. 43. Tfj afxapTLff., 
Rom. vi. 1. xi. 22, sq. So 1 Tim. iv. 16, 
ETTLfxEVE avToT^, 1. c. iu ouc's duties, Jos. 
and Class. ; foil, by partic. pres. to con- 
tinue in any action. Acts xii. 16, ettlkpou- 
oov. John viii. 7, kir. kpcoToovTE^. Philo, 

p. 197, CLTTELdcoV klT. 

'Ett Lv EX) (xi, f. vEvcTui, prop. to nod or 
beckon to, Hom.Il. ix. 616; also, by impl. 
to assent by a nod, Hom. II. ix. 528. In 
N. T. gener. to assent, consent, absol. Acts 
xviii. 20, OVK kiTEVEva-Ev. 2 Mace. iv. 10, 
ETTLVEvaavTO? 6e tov /SactXiws. Lucian, 
cited by Parkh, £7rii/£U£ts ^£ o/aojs. 

'EiTTLVOLa, as, 17, {ettlvoeu), to turn 
the mind upon, to reflect,) prop, the act 
of thinking upon any thing; also, the men- 
tal image so formed in the mind, concep- 
tion, cogitation, idea, as in Thuc. iii. 46. 
iv. 92, £9 EiTLVOLav eXOeXv also, from the 
adjunct, the counsel oi purpose then adopt- 



EHI 



145 



E n I 



ed, Acts viii. 22, si apa a(l)t6ti(T£TaL cot 
17 iirivoia t/;§ Kapdia^ aov. So Time. v. 
8, Ti]v tTTLVOLav (ppdcTai. Eurip. Phoen. 
419. Joseph. Ant. v. 6, 2, The term is 
rarely used, as here, without adjunct, of an 
evil purpose; vet an example occurs in 
Jos. de Tit. § 44. AVisd. xiv. 12. And so 
in our language we have to think on, for to 
devise. So Swift: 'Still the work was 
not complete, When Venus thought on a 
deceit.' 

'ETTiopfCf o), f, Tjcro), (a'7rio/)/cos,) to 
forsiL'ear oiieself\ to swear falsely ; or to 
violate one's oath, to commit perjury , Matt. 
V. 33, and Class. 

'ETTtOp/COS, Oy, 6, 77, (tTTi, bpKO^,) 

prop, an adj. meaning 'frequently swear- 
ing,' and by impl. with levity and falsely. 
Hence, perjured, as here and Arist. Ran. 
150, kiriopKOv opKOV cofxoa-E. Generally, 
however, it is used as a subst. a perjurer. 
So Hesiod, D. 40, t&ke irrifx kiTLopKOL's, 
and other wTiters downwards. So in 1 
Tim. i. 10, xf/tvaTaLS, iTriopKOL^. 

'Kir Lov or Lo^, ou, o, 77, adj. A word 
found only in N. T. Matt. vi. 11. Lu. xi. 

3, Tov (ipTov iijuLcov Tov kir. and meaning 
either (deriving the word from kirLovcra, 
part. pres. of 'iirsLfiL,) to-mbrroiv' s bread, 
' bread for the coming day ;' or rather, from 
kiTL and ova-La, existence, bread, (food,) for 
sustaining life, and by impl. sufficient 
food, suste7iance. 

'Kir LIT LOT T u), f. TTsa-ovjULaL, prop, to 
fall upon in any way, as when things fall 
foul of each other, jEsch. Pers. 512, 
£. <5' £7r' cLS\rikoL(yL : or w'hen persons 
fall upon, attach each other ; also, fig. of 
things, to fall upon any one, to befal. In 
N. T. it is used I. prop. 1) ^0 throiv 
oneself upon. Acts xx. 10, kTriirEcnv 
avTco, i. e. his body; comp. 1 K. xvii. 21. 
2 K. iv. 34, seq. Lu. xv. 20, kirkTrsarev 
kirl TOV Tpdyr]\ov auTou, i. e. to embrace 
him, Acts xx. 37. Sept. Gen. xlvi. 80. 1. 
1. John xiii. 25, gTriTrtcrajy kirl to (TTrj- 
60s tov 'I. 2) in the sense to rush against, 
to press upon, Mk.iii. 10, coaTs kTriTrLTrTeiv 
avTcp : as Thuc. vii. 84, 3, kTriirLirTov 
dA.X77A.ot9, /cat KUTETrdTOvv, sc. oKXri- 
Xovs. — XL FIG. 1) of the illapse of the 
Holy Spirit, Acts x. 44, ETrtTreo-E to 
Tivtvjjia. viii. 16. xi. 15. Ezek. xi. 5, 
fcTTfccrg kntr kfxk ttv. Kvpiov. 2) to fall 
upon, come over any one, foil, by kirl with 
acc. of pers. as cp6(3o9, Lu. i. 12. Acts 
xix. 17. Ex. XV. 16. EKCTTaaL^, Acts x. 
10. Dan. X. 7. dx^v^, Acts xiii. 11. ovai- 
OLO-fxal, Rom. xv. 3. And so in the Class, 
writers, disease, and whatever is calami- 
tous in general, is said to fall upon any 
one, as in Thuc. iii. 82, kiriiTEcrE iroWd 
Kal xaXiTrd xats ttoXeo-l. 



'Ktt LirXj] a<r u), f. ^to, prop, to strike 
i. e. to give blows, upo?i any person or 
thing, to beat, Hom. 11. x. 500, 'lttttov^ 
To^w k-rrLir\r](T<ru}v. Hence, as reprehen- 
sions are ihe vcriera Vmgiice, ' to chastise 
with words,^ to rebuke ; in which sense the 
word sometimes carries the acc. as in Hom. 
II. xxiii. 580, and Plato, 269, B. 327, A. ; 
but usually the dat. and so 1 Tim. v. 1, 
Trpsa[3vTipu) iTrtTrXij^T/s. 

'ETTtTToOfcCO, f. ?7(rC0, (fiTTt, TTodlo), fr. 

7ro'6o§,) prop, to desire, or ivish for above 
or besides, Hdot. v. 93 ; but gener. to de- 
sire earnestly, long for any thing absent ; 
and in N. T. where it is used of ear- 
nestly desiring, gener. both of things, as 
TO ydXa, 1 Pet. ii. 2. Rom. i. 11. 2 Cor. 
V. 2. 1 Thess. iii. 6. 2 Tim. i. 4; and of 
persons, to long after, to ardently love, 
2 Cor. ix. 14. Phil. i. 8. ii. 26. Diod. Sic. 
xvii. 101. The word often occurs in Sept., 
where it denotes vehement desire of, love 
for, any thing. Foil, by acc. of thing, 
governed by Trpo?, Ja. iv. 5, Trpos cpdovou 
kTTLTrodaL TO nvevfia o kut. kv ri/uuv; 
where, though the construction is harsh, 
it is not unprecedented. So Ps. Ixxxiii. 2, 
Sept. kiTLTrodET 77 ^^vy^V pLOv £t§ Tcts av- 
Xds TOV Kvpiov, and Ixi. 1, ov Tpoirov kiri- 
TTodsl 77 'kXacpo^ £7rt rd? 7r7j'yds tcov vd. 
ovTU) kTTLTrodel 77 \l/vxn fJ-ov irpo's (re, 6 
0£o'§. and Ixi. 10, £7rt dpiraypia p.i} Lttl- 
TTod&LTe. Deut. xiii. 8, ovk eTTLirodriaEL's 
£7r' avTcp. I conj. avTov. In all these 
passages it is not vehement desire for any 
thing present that is meant, but strong 
inclination towards any absent object ; and 
in the passage of James, the inclination or 
tendency of the desire towards any thing ; 
what in Latin is expressed by ferri ad. 
Comp. supra iii. 14 — 16, and the passage 
of Plutarch cited at SaipiovLcodt]^. 

'E TT I TT o 0 7] (T 1 9, £ w?, 77, fervcid dcsirc^ 
strong affection for, 2 Cor. vii. 7, 11. Ezek. 
xxiii. 11, Aq. 

'E7rt7ro67]To§, ov, o, 77, fervently 
desired., longed for, Phil. iv. 1. 

'ETTtTToOta, a5, 77, earnest desire, 
Rom. XV. 23. 

'ETTtTTopfuo/xat, f. Evcrofxai, prop. 
to go or come to any place. In N. T. of 
persons, Lu. viii. 4, tu)V kutu ttoXlv kiri- 
7ropevop.iu(DV irpos avTov, as in Polyb. 
iv. 9, 2, ddpoicj^ivTODv ^£ Toov kv rfXLKLat^ 
£i§ Ti]v M. Kai Ttiv M. kTTLTropEvdivTooif 
fiTTi TO 7rXf/6o9. In each passage the sense 
is accedere ad, to repair or resort unto ; 
and in that of St. Luke, as we have not 
TropEvdEVTcou, but TTopEvopiivijov, I would 
render, ' were resorting to him.' So, by a 
similar mode of exi)ression, Mk. ii. 13. 
John X. 41. and 2 Chr. xi. 13, kul ol 
LEpEl^ — (Tvv)]-)(dy](Tav irpo's avTov Lk Tcdv- 

TOOI/ T(jt)V bpiiJOV, 



Eni 



146 



Eni 



'ETrijopaTrTO), f. to sew any ma- 
terial upon another, Mk. ii. 21, iiri^\')]fxa 

ETTLppdlTTEL STTL LfXaTLCp TTok, Comp. 

Job xvi. 16, caKKov &ppa\lfav (I conj. 
'ippa\lfa) kirl {3vpar]9 fxov. Read, from 
the Alex, and other MSS. ^voari : and 
render, ' I have sewed sackcloth on my 
hide.' 

'ETTijOjOtTrTO), f. prop, to cast or 
tliroiv upon^ Lu. xix. 35, kir. L to, LfxccTLa 
kirl Tov TTooXov. Sept. Joseph. Bell. Jud. 
iv. 5, 3, KouLv kirLppLTTTOvv Tols (Tuofxacn. 
Fig. said of care^ ' thrown upon' or reposed 
on any one in full confidence, 1 Pet. v. 7, 
irdcrav ti]v p.ipLfxvav v/ulcov kirippiKj/avTe^ 
kir' avTOv. 

'ETTiO-IJftOS, OU, O, 77,adj. (fiTTt, (Trjfxa^) 

1) lit. hearing a mark upon^ signatus, 
something whereby any person or thing is 
distinguished from another. So the word 
is used of the insignia on a shield, or the 
insigne^ ensign, on the head of a ship ; 
also of the stamp or image of the sovereign 
on money. But in N. T. used only of 
2Mrsons^ 1) notahilis^ iu a good sense, dis- 
tinguished^ eminent^ Rora. xvi. 7. 3 Mace. 

vi. 1. Joseph. Bell. vi. 1, 8. Hdot. ii. 20. 
Thucyd. ii. 43. 2) notabilis^ in a had 
sense, notoi'ious^ Matt, xxvii. 16, oiarfiLov 
kir, Joseph. Ant. v. 7, 1, and later Class. 

'ETTtCT-iTKr^o?, ou, o, {kirLcnTiX^opiaL^ 
to provide oneself with eatables, Hdot. vii. 
176. Thuc. vi. 94,) prop, tlie providing 
oneself with food, Xen. An. i. 5, 9, but 
gener. tlie provisions themselves, Lu. ix. 
12, and Class. 

'ETrtar/CETTTO/uai, f. xj/oiuLaL^ depon. 
mid. gener. to look upon or at^ for the pur- 
pose of observation or inspection. In N. T. 
used in two senses, I. to look at^ in order 
to select, to look at for choice^ as of per- 
sons for an oflQce, Actsvi. 3, kTrLcrKexl/aade 
avSpa£, &c. So Sept. in Judg. xv. 1. Xen. 
Cyr. V. 4, 10. Diod. Sic. 295.— II. to look 
upon or after^ visits for the purpose of 
comfort and aid. Matt. xxv. 36, 43. Ja. i. 
27 ; as said of the sick and poor, Ecclus. 

vii. 35, and Class. Also applied, by Hebr., 
to God^ who is said to visit men, to en- 
quire into their condition, in order to 
afford them relief and aid ; foil, by acc. 
either expr. as Lu. i. 68, 78. vii. 16. Heb. 
ii. 6 ; or impl. Acts xv. 14, 6 9£05 kirz- 
(TK&xi/an-o (scil. TO. 'idvi^) Xa^sTv, &c. and 
Ecclus. xlvi. 14. 

'ETTto-Ksua^o), f. acrw, (sTri, (TKiv- 
ajw,) the primary signif. of the word is, 
' to put all things in readiness unto,' or 
for any purpose ; to fimiish out every thing 
for it. Hence it is used of furnishing out 
or forth a feast, equipping and fitting- out 
■a ship; also, of equipping horses, as, for 
instance, with saddles, bridles, &c., espec. 
beasts of burden. So Xen. Hist. vii. 2, 18, 



ETTia-KEvacrdiuLEvoi k'TTit^vyLa. Also, to 
load carts ^ Xen. Cyr. vii. 3, 1. And this, 
it may be observed, affords much coun- 
tenance to the reading of not a few ancient 
MSS. and the Ed. Princ. in Acts xxi. 15, 
kiTLcrKevacrdpiZvoL duEfSaLUO/JLEU 'Isp., 
where the sense is, ' having made prepa- 
ration for our journey,' lit. ' having loaded 
horses or carriages for our journey.' So 
Hesych. kiricrKEvacrdpiEvoi' EUTpEirLadiv- 

TE9. 

'E TT t o" K i; o £0, f. wcrw, lit- to pitch tent 
upon^ or at a place, and gener. to take one's 
abode or sojourn there, Polyb. iv. 18, 8. 
72, 1. In N. T. fig. of a spiritual influ- 
ence descending from on high, and resting 
or abiding on any one, 2 Cor. xii, 9, ett. 
£7r' kjxi. 

'ETTKr/cia^ct), f. acroj, (sTrt, c/cta^o),) 
1. PROP, to cast a shadoiu upon^ to over- 
shadow ; foil, by acc. Matt. xvii. 5. Lu. 
ix. 34 ; and dat. Mk. ix. 7. Acts v. 15. 
Sept. Ps. xci. 4. — II. FIG. said of a Divine 
power and influence, to as it were over- 
shadow, by resting upon^ and exerting its 
influence in, Lu. i. 35. Comp. kTTLaKTjvooi 
in 2 Cor. xii. 9. 

'ETTi rr/tOTrEO), f. 770'a), (eTrt, c/cotteo),) 
prop, to look iipon^ visits as the sick ; to in- 
spect^ examine what is done by others, 
to overlook^ see that any thing is done. 
Hence in N. T. to look after ^ take care of 
1 Pet. V. 2, kTrLaK07rovvTE9, scil. to ttol- 
fjiVLov. Also, with neg. fxii Tt5, to see to, 
take heed lest, Heb. xii. 15, E7rL<xKo7rovvTE9 
fxrj xis vcTTEpwv, &c. Xen. Lac. ii. 2. 

'YaTt L<T Koir-i], ?]<s, 77, gener. visitation or 
ca7^e over, and inspection or charge of 
In N. T. the word is used 1. of the act 
of being visited or taken care of ; and fig. 
said of God's gracious care and favour,, 
Lu. xix. 44, Tou Kaipov t^s kTrLcrKOirT]^ 
aov, i. e. ' the time when God was present 
to save and bless thee.' See Job xxix. 4. 
xxxiv. 9. Prov. xxix. 13. 3 Mace. v. 42, 
And so 1 Pet. ii. 12, ku -hfxipa kiriGKOTTT)^. 
Though some there explain, ' visitation for 
evil, avengement,' as often in Sept. and 
Apocr. So Synes. ap. St. Thes. ETrLarKOTrt] 
Qeov, and Eurip. Iph. Taur. 1414, kiri- 
cTKo'TrELv, ' to avcugc.' — II. of the duty or 
chai^ge of visiting and inspecting gener., 
Acts i. 20, Ti)V kirLCTKOirriu avTOV Xd^oL 
ETEpo^, (so often in Sept.); and spec, of 
the office of an k'TricrKoiro^, 1 Tim. iii. 1, 
e'L tl<s kTrLcrKOTTTj^ 6piyETaL,SLc. 

'EtT LCrKOTTO^, OV, 6, {kTrLaKETTTOfXaL,) 

in Class, an overseer, guardian, prefect, or 
governor, in various capacities, civil, but 
not military or religious ; but in the Sept. an 
overseer, guardian, or governor, in civil, 
military, and espec. religious affairs. Hence 
it was used by the N. T. writers to desig- 
nate an ecclesiastical functionary, who had 



EHI 



147 



Eni 



the spiritual oversight, eitlier of a congrega- 
tion of Christians worshipping in any place, 
or of a Church gener., consisting of several 
or many congregations : the pastors of 
which were, it would seem, originally called 
indifferently Trpsa^vTspoL, (a term derived 
from the Jewish polity,) or kirLCTKOTtoL^ 
(from the Grecian,) i. e. overseers and care- 
takers of their flocks ; espec. as the term 
ETTLGK. was well adapted to designate the 
pastoral duties. But soon afterwards, 
when it became necessary that one pres- 
byter in eacli Church should take the 
charge of general inspection and govern- 
ment over the whole, the term kirLGKOTro^ 
was selected, as best adapted to designate 
the nature of the duties of such an officer ; 
while 7r/3£<r/3. was confined to denote 
pastors generally. And not only was the 
term more appropriate, but as it was prob. 
borrowed immediately from the use in the 
Sept., so, in appropriating it as above, there 
might be allusion to a passage of Isaiah, Ix. 
17, Sept., where the prophet, foretelling 
the glory and felicity of the Church by 
the admission of the Gentiles, says, kul 
Scoau) Toi/s ap-)(ovra.^ aov kv iip-nvrj, kul 
Toi/9 kirLdKOTTOv^ (Tou kv SLKaLoavvr]. 
Here the idea ruling is prominent. Be- 
fore the term was so appropriated, the 
governing presbyter was, as we find from 
1 Tim. V. 17, called 6 7rpo£crTw§ irpEcr^v- 
Tspo?. See my note there, and those on 
Acts xi. 30. XX. 17. Phil. i. 1. Eph. iv. 
11. In the first of the above senses, i. e. 
for pastor, it is used at Acts xx. 28, and 
Phil. i. 1 ; in the second, superintendent 
or bishop, at 1 Tim. iii. 2. Tit. i. 7. It is 
used Jig. at 1 Pet. ii. 25, of Jesus Christ, 
as the great Care-taker of souls, who 
' careth for us,' 1 Pet. v. 7. 

'E-TTto-Trao), f. daw, prop, to draw to, 
as a door in shutting it, Xen. Hist. vi. 4, 
36. In N. T. mid. to draw upon or over, 
1 Cor. vii. 18, ix^ k-KLcrTrdadu), ' let him 
become uncircumcised.' See my note. 

'ETTicTTa/xai, f. (XTricrofiaL, mid. form 
to k<pL(TT-t]fjLL, with 7r for cp. Ionic, and used 
to express the particular sense of k(pLa'r- 
dvai Toj/ vovv. Hence prop, to fix one's 
mind upon any thing or pers. ; and hence, 
by impl., to understand, know about it. 
In N.T. I. to liave knowledge of, to know 
a thing or person ; the former. Acts xviii. 

25, klTLCJ'TU.fXf.VO^ jULOVOU TO (BctTTTLCr /JLU 'I. 

Ja. iv. 14; the latter in Acts xix. 15, 
YLavXou kiTLCT^afxai : foil, by accus. and 
partic. Acts xxiv. 10, ovTa g& KpLTijy 
kir. Foil, by ir&pl tov^oov. Acts xxvi. 

26, and also b}'^ ws, otl, Trois, or irov, 
Sept. and Class. — II. to understand ; foil, 
by acc. oxjk kir. tl av XkysL^, Mk. xiv. 68. 
1 Tim. vi. 4. Jude 10. Sept. and Class. 

'ETTtcraTTjs, oy, 6, {kcpLcrTafxaL, to 

i 



set over,) prop. ' one set over otliers,' in 
the discharge of any business, civil or 
military. In N. T. master, for teacher, in 
Engl. ; and applied only to Christ as a 
title of respect, and acknowledgment of 
authority, like that of Rabbi, Lu. v. 5. 
viii. 24. ix. 33, 49. xvii. 13. 

'FiTTLarTiXXco, f Xw, 'to send word 
to any one,' whether verbally, by message, 
or in writing, Thuc. vii. 14. In N. T. it 
means, I. ' to send word in writing,' to 
ivrite a letter to, Heb. xiii. 22. -^lian, V. 
H. X. 20. — II. to send ivord (i. e. make 
one's will known) by letter, give direction 
to by letter. Acts xv. 20, kTrLaTilXai ah- 
TOL£ TOU uTrix^fyQai, &c. And so Joseph. 
Ant. viii. 2, 7. Xen. Hist. i. 5, 2. Hdian. 
i.5,2. 

'^TTLCTT-n jULCov, ovo£, 6, 7}, {kiriaTa- 
juiaL,) adj. prop, knowing, i. e. endued with 
knowledge, skilful in any art or science ; 
mostly foil, by gen. of thing, but also 
absol. and gener. intelligent, and by impl. 
prudent, discreet, Ja. iii. 13, Tts aro(f>d<s 
Kai kTTLcrTrjiuLcou kv vfxiv ; Ecclus. x. 25, 
avi]p k7rL(TTrip.(jou oh yoyyvdEL. The word 
often occurs in the Sept. united with 
erodes or cui^fTos, and in Plato and 
Xenophon. 

'E7rt(rTt7pt^ w, f. icrcty, to fix a tiling 
firmly upon its basis, or as leaning against 
something else, (nearly equiv. to kTrEpeidco,) 
and in the pass, or mid. to be supported, or 
to rest upon another. In N. T. the act. 
alone occurs in a fig. sense, to coiifirm, 
establish. Acts xiv. 22, Ta§ xf/vx^^ twi/ 
luLadi]TU)u kir. xv. 32, 41. xviii. 23; and 
cTTtjpt^a) often in N. T. signifies to confirm 
believers in their adherence to the Gos- 
pel, notwithstanding persecution and afflic- 
tion. 

'ETria-ToX?;, rj^, rj, (eTriCTfeXXa),) 
prop. ' intelligence sent, or orders commu- 
nicated by letter ;' and also the letter 
itself, as Acts xv. 30, and often in N. T. 
and sometimes in Sept. and Class. In 
Acts ix. 3, it signifies a letter of aidliority , 
a dispatch, and in 2 Cor. iii. 2, a letter of 
recommendation. 

'ETTiCTTO/x/^Ct), f. tVtO, (tTTt, (TTO/Aa,) 

lit. to put any thing upon the raouth, as a 
bit in a horse's mouth, or a muzzle upon 
a dog ; and fig. in N. T. to put to silence. 
Tit. i. 11, 0U5 ^il kirLcrTOfxiX^Eiv. So 
Dem. 85, 4, kirLCfToixLEZu tou? avTto clvtl- 
XiyovTa^. Aristoph. Eq. 845, kx^pov^ 

kTrLaTOlxiX^ELV. 

''E'TTLo-n-pkcpct), f. xpoD, gener. act. with 
mid. signif. })rop. to turn upon, or toivards, 
Hom. II. iii. 370. Soph. Tr. 566, or fig. 
to turn one's attention to any subject. Also 
act. with act. signif. to turn any one back 
H 2 



Eni 



148 



E n I 



from one course to another, Thnc. ii. 90. 
Xen. Hist. vi. 4, 9, and Sept. ; and fig. 
from error to truth, Lucian, Timon ii, 7, 
TToKKov's ai'Tcov iir. Pint. Alcib. iv'iov^ 
TO Xexdkv kiricTTpzipE. Hence in N. T. 
I. TRANS, to convert^ in a spiritual sense, 
to turn to the service of the Lord, Lu. i. 
16, 7ro\Xov<3 iTrLcrTpiy\rEL tTrl ILvpLou 
Tov 0. Sept. Ezra vi. 22, or ' to turn from 
error to truth,' Ja. v. 19, sq. kirKm-php-ai 

avTOV SCil. ETTL TT]U Q-XvOsLaV. XL IN- 

TRANS. with savTov understood ; and also 
in mid. to timi oneself toicards or u?2to^ 
1) act. intrans. prop. Acts ix. 40, ett. 
Trpos TO arcojULa. Polyb. vii. 11, 4, and 

-fig. E7ri(TTpi<pBLV ETTL TOV OsOV OY Ku- 

ptoi/, ' to turn to the service of the true 
God,' from paganism and idolatry. Acts ix. 

35. xi. 21. xiv. 15. xv. 19. xxvi. 18, 20. 
2 Cor. iii. 16. 1 Thess. i. 9. ettl tov 
iroLfxiva^ 1 Pet. ii. 25. Sept. 2) by 
impl. to abut upon or totcards, Acts xvi. 
18. Rev. i. 12. Sept. and Class. Hence, 
3) to turn [back] upon, to return unto^ 
prop, and with diriacn^ Mk. xiii. 16. Lu. 
xvii. 31. ^lian, V. H. i. 6; without 
oTTtcro), Lu. viii. 55. With eU or kirl and 
ace. Matt. xii. 44. Lu. xvii. 4. Acts xv. 

36. 2 Pet. ii. 22. Fig. as said of a return 
to good^ to return, to be converted^ absol. 
Matt. xiii. 15. Mk. iv. 12. Lu. xxii. 32. 
Acts iii. 19. xxviii. 27. Also, as said of 
a return to evil^ ' to turn back to the com- 
mission of sin,' Gal. iv. 9, Itt. ttoXlv kirl 
TO. — 'TTTwya (TTOLXELa. 2 Pet. ii. 21, £7r. 
Ik ti]<5 kvTo\ri<s^ scil. kirl Ti]V (pdopdv. 
— III. MID. INTRANS. with aor. 2. pass. 
1) tur?i about upon or towards^ Matt, 
ix. 22. k7rLaTpa<f)Eh^ Mk. viii, 33. John 
xxi. 20. Sept. Apocr. and Class. 2) to 
turn back upon^ to return unto^ Matt. x. 13, 
V Elp-nvt] vp.. irpo's v/uid's k7ri(TTpa<pvT(J0. 
Sept. and Pint, de Educ. 17, med. Fig. 
' to return to the right path,' to be co?i- 
ve7ied, John xii. 40, kiTLCTpacpuocn. 

'^'TT L(TT po(pi]^ 7/?, 77, prop. and in 
Class, a turning back from one thing to 
another, Pol. v. 72, 8. Thuc. ii. 90. iii. 71. 
In N. T, fig. co7iversion^ by a turning back 
from paganism, or Judaism, to Christ- 
ianity, Acts XV. 3 ; from paganism to 
Judaism, Ecclus. xviii. 21. Jos. Ant. ii. 
14, 1. 

'ETTto-ui/ayw, f. a^to, prop, to lead or 
bring together^ upon or to a place, to gather 
together to, trans. Matt, xxiii. 37. Mk. i. 
33, et al. Sept. and Class. 

'ETTtoruyaycoy??, 77?, 77, (eTrio-i/yayco,) 
a being gathei^ed together^ 2 Thess, ii, 1 ; 
an assembling together at one place^ Heb. 
X. 25. In 2 Mace. ii. 7, ' an assembly.' 

'Y^TT L(TvvT p Exu}^ to run together to 
any scene ot action, or towards any person, 
Mk. ix. 25. 



'ETTtcucTTao't?, fo)?, 77, {k7rLarvvi<TTa- 
o-6ai, to come together to any place,) Acts 
xxiv, 12, £7r. TTOLSLv oxXov, to make a 
concourse^ raise a tumult. So 1 Esdr. v. 
73, k'Tri(TV(jTd(TEi<5 iroLovfXEvoi. The word 
also occurs in Num. xvi. 40. Jos. C. Ap. 
i. 20. Sext. Emp. Eth. 127. In 2 Cor. 
xi. 28, 77 £7r. fjiov T] Kud' I'j/LLtpav^ the 
meaning is either, ' the concourse of cares 
continually resting upon me,' or, ' the con- 
course of persons perpetually resorting to 
me.' So Cicero pro Archia, c. 6, has, in 
the same sense, the expression quotidianos 
hominum impetus. See, however, my note 
on the above passage. 

'ETriC^aA-ijs, £0S, o, 17, (sTrt, <j(^d\- 
/V£o-0at,) prop, and lit. 'near upon falling,' 
i. e. ready to fall, or slip from the hold ; 
and metaph. insecure^ dangerous., Acts 
xxvii. 9, kiTLcrcpakov^ tov ttAoos. De- 
mosth. and the later writers. 

'^TT LCrX^'f^-) f- UCTtt), (fiTTt, t(T)(U60,) 

I. TRANS, to strengthen., lit. to put strength 
upon. So Ps. Ixxxviii. 19, Sept. we have 
kdip.riv (3oi]dELav kirl SvvaTov. Xen. CEc. 

xi. 13, €7f. Ti]V TToXlV. IL INTRANS. to 

receive strength., be strG?ig, E(,'clus. xxix, 1, 
kTTLcrxyfj^v ^{1 yj-^P*- avTov. 1 Mace. vi. 6. 
Hence, fig. to gi^oic more vehement., Lu. 
xxiii. 5, kiria-xvov, \&yovTE£. 

'E TT i cr to p £ ct>, f. £U(ra), prop, to heap 
up upon., i. e. more and more, trans. Pint. 
Pyrrh. 22, kir. tov-s vEKpov<s. Athen. p. 
123 ; metaph. to accumulate upon., as said 
of things., Artem. iii. 66, viro'dnKct^ irpo^ 
Tots ELOTquivoL's kiTLcrMOEvcrui. Plut. de 
Vit. ^r. Al. 6. In N. T. only used of 
persons., 2 Tim. iv. 3, kir. dLdaa-KaXov^., 
' accumulating teachers upon teachers.' 

'Ktt LTayi]., 77s, 77, (eTrtTao-cro),) an 
order or injunction., whether of God, as 
2 Cor. viii. 8, or of Christ, 1 Cor. vii. 6, 
25. And, as injunction implies earnest- 
ness and strictness, so in Tit. ii. 15, 
eXejx^ />t£Td 7racr7]s ETTLTayfj^., the 
meaning is, ' with strictness and severity.' 
At Rom. xvi. 26, and 1 Tim. i. 1, the 
term signifies decree, appointment., as also 
at Wisd. xiv. 16, and ordin. Polyb. xiii. 
4, 3. In Tit. i. 3, commanding authority, 

'ETTtTaccct), f. ^o), (e'TTi, Ta(r<raj, 
which see,) prop, to range in order., one row 
upon another, and in military affairs one 
rank of soldiers upon another, to range 
in ranks., by placing each in his station. 
Hence, from the adjunct, to give order to., 
to e7ijoi?i upon, charqe, with dat. of pers. 
So in N. T. Mk. i. 27. ix. 25. Lu. iv. 36. 
Sept. and Class. Also foil, by dat. and 
infin. Mk. vi. 39. Lu. viii. 31, and Class. ; 
by accus. and infin. Mk. vi. 27, kiTETa^EV 
kvEX^rjvaL Ti}V KE<p, avTov. Sept. & Class. 



Eni 



149 



E n I 



ETTtTEXto), f. c'trw, to hrhifj anything 
to an end^ to finish, accomplish. 1. prop. 
in act. sense, as said ot any work, bnsiness, 
or course of action, Lu. xiii. Honi. xv. 
•28. 2 Cor. vii. 1. viii. (), 11. Phil. i. C. 
lieb. viii. 5. ix. 6. Sept. and Class. In 
mid. to come to an end, finish, with dat. of 
manner, Gal. iii. suup^dinEuoL nrviv- 
/uaTt, vvv aapid ETrLTtXt'Ccrda ; — II. FIG. 
said of sufferings, iscc. to yo through, 
endure^ in pass. 1 Pet. v. 9, iirLTtkil- 
trdaL, scil. to. TradiifxaTu, with dat. of 
pers. 

'E7riT?7(5£ io?, a, ov, adj. (from the 
jren. iTriTndtu^ of the old adj. £7rtT?7^tjs, 
fittinc>,) prop, suited to., suitable., prope7\ 
Wisd. iv. 5. Xen. Cyr. i. 4, 17. Hence 
in N. T. by impl. needfid, necessary, Ja. 
ii. 1(), TO. sTTLT. Tov <T (M ixat o<s , 'the ne- 
cessaries of life,' food and clothing, 
Xenoph. Theophr. and ^sch. 

'ETTtTiOij/xt, f. Qr](T(jd, to place., lay 
upon, trans. I. act. prop, and 1) gen. foil, 
by €7rt and acc. Matt, xxiii. 4, cpop^ia ett. 
iirl Tov<s W/U0U9, Lu. xv. 5. Acts xv. 10, 
i'TTLda'tvaL '^vyou IttI n-6v Tpdx- Matt, 
xxvii. 29. Mk. iv.21. John ix. 15. Acts 
xv. 28, ETT. vfxlu (3dpo<s. Lu. xxiii. 26, 
John xix. 2. Fig. of giving a name to, 
Mk. iii. 16, 17. Sept. in Dan. i. 7. v. 13. 
Jos. and Class. 2) spec, in the phrase 

ilTLTLdEVaL TlfV -)(^ELpa, OT TttS X^TpWi, tO 

lay hands upon, as a symbol of healing 
])ower, foil, by intl with acc. Matt. ix. 18. 
Mk. viii. 25, al. ; foil, by dat. Mk. v. 23. 

vi. 5, al. ; or for benediction, inaugura- 
tion, &c. foil, by ETTL with acc. Acts viii. 
17; bvdat. Acts vi. 6, where see my note, 
viii. 19. xiii. 3. xix. 6. 1 Tim. v. 22, al. 
3) said of stripes, to lay on, inflict, TrXr/yds 
kir. Lu. x. 30. Acts xvi. 23. And so 
plagas imponere in Latin. 4) fig. of gifts, 
to load with. Acts xxviii, 10, dvayofiivoL^ 
ETridEVTO TO. Trpos Tr]v XP^'-^^- 
Ruth iii. 15. Xen. Cyr. viii. 2, 4. — II. 
MID. to set oneself upon any one, to set 
upon, attack, with dat. Acts xviii. 10, 
ovoeU kiridriaETaL ctol. Sept. Jos. and 
Class. — III. to put upon, add, foil, by 
7rpo9 with acc. Rev. xxii. 18, kdv -rt? 
(Xoyos) ETTLTedrj irpd^ nravra. Horn. II. 

vii. 364. Dem. 165, 2. 

'E -TT i T t a CO, f. T70-W, prop, to put a 
Tt/i?/, value or price (see next word) 
upon any thing; and as that estimate is 
either favourable or the contrary, so 
iTTLnTL/jida} may signify either to prize and 
honour, or to censure, criminate, and 
punish. The original and complete phrase 
was iTTLTLfjiav TL TLVL, which often occurs 
in Plato, Xenoplion, and other of the best 
writers. See Steph. Thes. and Lex. Plat, 
and Xen. From the notion of criminating 
and censuring springs that of rebuking, 



found with the dat. only in Isocrat. and 
other writers, and often in the N. T. ; 
e. gr. Mk. viii. 32, sq. x. 13. Lu. ix. 55. 
xvii. 3, et al. and Sept. Thus it is used 
for EirLirXriacM. And as that word signi- 
fies both to rebuke or blame, and to puiiish, 
so ETTLTLjuLdu} uieaus to pu?iish, lit. irro- 
gare podiiam alicui, at Jude 9, ETTLTifxri- 
aruL croL Kupto9, sub. Slki]V or Ti/uLuypLuu. 
So Hdot. iv. 43, avEcrKoXoTTLarE avTov, 

TIJU ap~)(aLl]V 6LKf]i; {aVTw) ETTLTLfJiCOV, 

and Jos. Ant. xviii. 4, 6, TL/uLMpia^ ettl- 
TLfxa Tols akovcTLV. From the proper 
sense of rebuking springs a fig. one, fovmd 
only in the Scriptural writers, and alone 
with dat. of thing, by which the inanimate 
object, as the wind, waves. Matt. viii. 
26. Mk. iv. 39. Lu. viii. 24, the sea, Nah. 
i. 4. Ps. cvi. 9, is as it were personified, 
and its violence checked, since reproof and 
correction are supposed to check an evil 
doer. Comp. 2 Pet. ii. 16. Lastly, from 
the sense of rebuking springs that fouad, 
foil, by dat. in Matt. xvii. 18. Mk. i. 25. 
ix. 25. Lu. iv. 35, 41, and oft. in N. T. 
by which, together with the notion of re- 
buking, is united, and chiefly to be under- 
stood, that of strictly charging., whether to 
do or to forbear, any action. 

'ETTtTi/xta, a?, J7, (sTTiTi/xao),) in 
Class, the Ti/xJ7 or political honour per- 
taining to a citizen ; but in N. T. said of 
the Tip.y] or estimate fixed by a judge, in 
the v\ay of retribution, upon any wrong, 

1. e. pencdty, punishmeyit, 2 Cor. ii. 6. 
Wisd. iii. 10. The Class, writers use 

ETVLTLIXLOV. 

'ETTtTp fcTTw, f. y\ro3, prop, to turn any 
thing upon or to any one ; and hence by 
impl. to give it over to him., Horn. Od. ii. 
226. Xen. An. vi. 1, 31. In N. T. to 
permit to any one the doing of any thing. 
Matt. viii. 21. Mk. v. 13, and oft. 

'ETm-poTrr;, ^s, 77, (i'TrtTptTro),) a 
comrnission., charge., Aci'&xxNi. 12, and Lat. 
Class. 

'EtTIT^OTTOS, OV, O, (fiTTtTpETrO),) 

prop, one to whom a charge is committed., 
as steward, agent, &c. In N. T. it is 
used, 1) prop. Matt. xx. 8. Lu. viii. 3, 
ETTLTpoTTov 'Hp. ' Hcrod's house-steward.' 
So Jos. Ant. xviii. 6, 6, mention is made 
of one Thaumastus as Agrippa's ETTLTpo- 
TTos oiicrLa<s. See Ps. cv. 21. See, 
however, my note on Lu. viii. 3. 2) 
equiv. to 6 Trat^ayojyos, a private tutor, 
or guardian of the morals of boys, Gal. iv. 

2, and Class. 

'ETTiTTvy x"^^^ prop, to light upon., 
chance to meet with, Thuc. viii. l4. Also 
in archery, to hit a mark, and fig. to attain 
one''s aim. In N. T. to obtain an object 
of desire, Heb. vi. 15, tTrtTux^ t^s 



EEI 



150 



EHI 



kirayyikia^^ and xi. 33, and Class. Ab- 
soL Rom. xi. 7. Ja. iv. 2. Thuc. vi. 38. 

''¥iTr LcpaLVM^i. cpavu)^ prop, to cause to 
appear to^ to sho7u to any one ; and fig. to 
display^ evince^ 3 Mace. ii. 19, kiricpavov 
TO fc\fO§ crov. Theogn. 359. Plut. Marc. 
1. In N. T. we find both the act. form with 
kavTOv imderstood, and the pass, or mid. 
to sJi02V oneself to^ appear to ; and as said 
of ligJit^ to shine iipoii^ intrans. I. prop, in 
act. pres. absol. Acts xxvii. 20, yttryTs 
ao-Tpcov E7rL<paLu6vT(jDv : aor. 1. with dat. 
Lu. i. 79, dvaToXti £^ u\//-ou§, kirKpavat 
ToTs kv (TKOTEL j^^lian. V. H. xiii. 1, airp. 
kirkcpijvE^ dicrirsp dcT'/jf) — II. fig. in aor. 2. 
pass, to he co7ispicicozis^ manifest., to become 
knoicn., Tit. ii. 11, kiTf.cpdvi'] 77 X"P^^ "^^^ 
0EOL', and iii. 4, cpiXavOpioirLa k7r£<pdvi]. 

'IEtt L(pdv£La., a?, 77, {sTrLcpaLVco.,) 
prop, an appearing., or appearance ; espec. 
as said of the sun, moon, and stars ; and, 
accordingly, suggesting the idea of sple?i- 
clid appearance. The word is used in 
2 Mace. iii. 24. v. 4, et al. of splendid 
celestial appearances in aid of Israel ; and 
in Jos. Ant. iii. 14, 4, of the pillar of fire. 
So, too, the Class, writers often use it of 
the appearance, on earth, in splendour, of 
some deity. Hence we see the fitness of 
its use in N. T. to denote the advent, or 
manifestation, of Christ (God-man) in the 
flesh, 2 Tim. i. 10 ; also, of his future 
advent in glory to judgment, 2 Thess. 
ii. 8. 1 Tim. yi. 14. 2 Tim. iv. 1, 8. Tit. 
ii. 13. 

'KiTLcpavi)?., ko<5.,b.,v., adj. prop, ap- 
parent., visible to., Thuc. vii. 19, or clear., 
manifest., Xen. Mem. iii. 1, 10, and fig. 
splendid., illustrious., as said botlr of per- 
sons., Jos. Ant. V. 8, 2. Xen. Ag. iii. 2. 
^lian Y. H. iii. 19, and things., as Pol. i. 
36, 3. i. 78, 11. So Acts ii. 20, ti^v -iifxipav 

J^VpiOV T)]V fXEJ. Kai ETTLCpaVr]. 

'ETTt^auco or 'ETrt^aucr/cct), f. aucw, 
{(pduoo., (pdu).,) prop, to give light to., as 
said of the rising and giving light of the 
heavenly luminaries, Sept. in Job xxv. 5. 
xxxi. 26. xli. 9. Orph. Hymn. xlix. 9. 
In N. T. fig. foil, by dat. of pers. to en- 
lighten., i. e. to save and bless, Eph. v. 14, 
kiTLipavar&L croL 6 XpicrTo?. Comp. Is. 
Ix. 1 — 3, and espec. Ps. xviii. 27, 28, where, 
in antithesis with the words 'thou wilt 
save the afflicted people,' we have, 'thou 
wdlt light my candle ; the Lord my God 
will enlighten my darkness,' make my 
darkness light, i. e. convert my affliction 
into gladness, will save and bless me ; 
darkness being a frequent emblem of sor- 
row and death, (comp. Ps. xiii, 3,) as light 
is of life and joy. 

'ETTt^tpo), f. oicro), gener. to bring to., 
or bmg it'pon any one. In N, T. it is 



used I. prop, in the sense to bring to any 
person, foil, by kirl and accus. Acts xix. 

12. Jos. Ant. iv. 8, 22. Thuc. iv. 37.— II. 
to superadd., Phil. i. 16, oiofjLsvoL ^\l\1/lv 
eTTLCpkpELV TOiS dtorjULoT? fxov. So Philo, 
p. 1009, 'wvp kiTLCpipicv TTvpi. Aristot. 
Rhet. iii. 6, fin. ek tcov <TTEpr\(TE(jov yap 
dirocpEpovcTL. — III. to bring upon (i. e. 
against) in a judicial sense, as a chai^ge., or 
accusation.. Acts xxv. 18, aWiav. Thuc. 
iii. 46. v. 75. Jos. Ant. ii. 67. Jude 9, 
KpL(TLv. Jos. Ant. iv. 8, 23. Hdian. iii. 8, 

13. So of wrath or punishment, Rom. iii. 

5, kTTLCpEpCOV OpyVV. And so kltKpEpELV 

TijV 7roLvi]v^ Jos. Ant. iii. 13. kirLcpips' v 
7rXi]ynv TLVL, ii. 14, 2. 

'Etti^ £60, f. ?]<Tct), prop, to cry out 
upon., i. e. thereupon, Lu. xxiii. 21, or to 
shout at., applaud., absol. Acts xii. 22, 
/xo§ ETTECpwvEi. Esdr. ix. 47. 2 Mace. i. 
23. Philo de Herod. Malig. 34. Foil, by 
dat. of pers. upon, for (i. e. against) whom 
the outcry is made, Acts xxii. 24, outws 
k'TTEcpwvovv auTw, 'so exclaimed against 
him.' 

'Ettk^cockw, to daivn itpon.,{\\i. to 
grow light upon,) intrans. Matt, xxviii. 1, 
1, T?; ETTLCpcoa-Kovcrri, scil. ij/LEpa. Lu. 
xxiii. 54, Grd(38. kTrkcfiiaorKE. Diod. Sic. 
xiii. 18. 

' E TT i X « ' P ^' ^7 prop, to lay hands 

upon., Hom. Od. xxiv. 386. Now that may 
be either in the way of laying hold of and 
seizing any thing, or putting the hand to 
any thing, and fig. of undertaking it. So, 
foil, by infin. Lu. i. 1, E7rEXELpi](Tav dva- 
Ta^acrdaL SLijyjjariv. And so Class. 

'ETTtx^^i ^' ^va-ct)., to pour upon any 
thing or person, as water for washings 
Hom. Od. i. 136. In N. T. of wine and 
oil upon wounds, Lu. x. 34. 

'ETTtxopijy £ to, f. t/cro), (I'TTt, X^P- 
from x^PVyo^-, tlie person who supplied 
the expenses of the theatrical entertain- 
ments,) to supply or furnish to., trans. , 
2 Cor. ix. 10, o ETTLypp^ywv criripixa tm 
criTELpovTL. Gal. iii. 5. 2 Pet. i. 5, 11. 
Mid. in a recipr. sense, to supptly aid to 
one another., furnish mutual aid., Col. ii. 
19, TO crui^a kTrLXopvyoifjiJiEVOv Kai cru/x- 
pL^aX^ojUiEvov. Comp. Eph. iv. 16, where- 
see my note. 

'ETTixo/O^jyta, a9, 77, (£7rtxop7jy£a),) 
supply^ aid, Phil. i. 19. Eph. iv. 16, cia 
TToccr?]? d(pr\<5 t?7S ETrtx^p^jyia?, ' through 
all the joints of supply,' i. e. which afford 
mutual aid. 

'EttixP'^'^i f' io-co, to smear over ; said 
espec. of oil, but also as used of paint, to 
daub., and likewise as applied to any simi- 
lar substance, as whitening, mud, or mor- 
tar, Joll,n ix, 65 ETTEXpifTE TOV TTliKoV klfl 



Eno 



151 



Epr 



Toi/s ocpdaXiuLov^, iianicly, as meant to 
suggest the idea of coUyriuin, or eye-salve. 

'ETTOtKO^o/uto), f. varu), (t'^ri, oIkuSo- 
/UEO),) prop, to (mild upon any thing, as a 
foundation. In N. T. only fig. to build 
iipofi^ said of Christian faith and life, as 
built upon the only foundation, Jesus 
Christ. So pass. foil, by £ i with dat. 
Eph. ii. 20, i'7roLKo6o/jLi}dt.vre<s sttl tco 
^E/uL. &c. Col. ii. 7, 'resting on Christ for 
better knowledge.'' Act. foil, by ace. and 
iiri with acc. 1 Cor. iii. 12, 14. By impl. 
to build any one up further^ i. e. in the 
faith, and upon Christ, Acts xx. 32, to) 
SvvafXEVu) aTTOLKoSofxijaaL^ sc. vfiu^. Jude 
20, iTroLKoSojJL. eavTOv'S. 

'E7ro/v'£/\.A.a), f. f/Vw, (fiTTi, o/ceXXo), 
equiv. to keXXco^) to drive any thing iipon^ 
as a ship upon a shoal, when run aground. 
Acts xxvii. 41, tir. tjji/ vavu^ and Class. 

'ETTOi/c/xa'^w, f. acrw, (sttI, ovo/JLciX^co.) 
lit. to name upon^ i. e. with allusion to 
some other name or circumstance, Sept. 
in Gen. iv. 17, 24, 25, al. In N. T. pass. 
to be named so or so in addition to some 
other name, to be also called^ Rom. ii. 17, 
av 'lov^aZo<5 k-TrovofidX^ri, Pol. i. 29, 2. 
Xen. CEcon. vi. 17. 

'Ettottts i3 w, f. CTcu, (from sttottti^?, 
which see,) to look at or behold attentively^ 
contemplate closely^ 1 Pet.ii. 12, kiroTrTEv- 
cai/Tes, for kav iTroTTTSuaaxTL, scil. to. 
KoXa vfxcov e'yoya, denoting the full know- 
ledge derived from close observation. The 
term is used foil, by to. apya in Hom. 
Od. xvi. 140. Hesiod, Op. 765. And so 
1 Pet. iii. 2, E7ro7rTav(TauTi9 t^v dyvr]v 
a.vaaTpo(pi]U v/mcou. 

'Ettottt?]?, ou, 6, {k'Troxp^OjUiaL, f. to 
kcpopdco^) prop, a looker-on or spectator of 
what is passing, 2 Mace. vii. 35. 3 Mace, 
ii. 21, JEsch. Prom. 299, ttovcov — kiro- 

TTTTJS. Plato, p. 105, TOt§ ETTOTTTatS TCOV 

avdpooTr'iv(jov. Thus it becomes equiv. to 
auTOTrn-y]^. So Plut, iii. 647, iTTOTTTas 
Kai iJidpTvpa<5. And such may be the 
import at 2 Pet. i. 16, ETroTrrat yEvi]Qiv- 

T£g T^S EKELVOV jULEyaXELOTt^TCS. But 

some stronger sense seems intended ; and 
as those, who were admitted to a sight of 
the more secret mysteries of the pagan 
religion by the last initiation, were called 
i-TTOTTTa/, as distinguished from the /ixv- 
cTat, whether lower or higher, so the sense 
here is, 'admiited to the most intimate view 
and acquaintance with His majesty prob. 
■with allusion to the august scene of the 
Transfiguration, Matt. xv. 5. Nor is this 
metaphorical sense unexampled: so Synes. 
says, V0V9 (piXocrocpQ^^ £7ro7rT?js lou tu- 
XfjOov^ : and Gregor. de Theolog. tovto 
EidELEV av OL kyyvTEpoj Qeov^ Kai tcov 
avE^LXVLctcr^uiV avTOv KpifxaTUiV kwo- 

TTTUL Kai ^ECopOL. 



"EtTO?, £0S, to, (fiTTOf, ETTO),) prOp. 

somclliing spoken^ a ivord^ or speech; in 
N. T. occ. only in Heb. vii. 9, ws ettos 
ELTTtlv^ ' SO to speak a form of expression 
frequent in the best Greek writers, (prob. 
founded on the phrase ettos el'tteIv^ occ, 
in Homer,) where anything is about to be 
said which might sound too bold, and re- 
quire to be thus softened doivn. 

'FiTTovpaVLO^, Lov^ o, 77, adj. for 
phrase 6 ett' ohpavw^ prop, connected with 
heaven^ heaverdy ; in N. T. said I. of 
PERSONS, 1) ' those who dicell in heaven^ 
Matt, xviii. 35, 6 YlaTi]p 6 kir. Phil. ii. 

10, ol ETT. the angels. 2 Mace. iii. 39, and 
Class. 1 ) of those who come from heaven, 

1 Cor, XV, 48, sq. — II. of things, 1 Cor. 
XV. 40, crcofxaTa kirovpavLa, meaning 
the heavenly bodies, as the sun, moon, 
and stars. 1 ) as neut. plur. without subst. 
TO. kirovpavLa, the upper heavens^ the 
abode of God and the angels, Eph. i. 20. 

11. 6. iii, 10 ; also the lower heavens, the 
sky^ the seat of evil spirits, Eph. vi. 12. 
2) as said of the kingdom of heaven 
and whatever pertains to it, 2 Tim. iv. 18, 
or the calling thereto^ Heb. iii. 1. vi. 4. 
viii. 5. ix. 23. xi. 16. xii. 22. Also to. 
kirovpavia^ ' things pertaining to the king- 
dom of God,' Ei)h. i. 3, or gener. ' things 
spiritual,' John iii. 12. 

'Ettto:, ol, at, ra, indecl, seven, Matt. 
XV. 34. Acts XX. 6, et ai. The number 
seven was often used by the Jews as a 
round number. Matt. xii. 45. Lu. xi. 26, 
al. and oft. in O. T. Also as a sacred 
number of good omen. Acts vi. 3. Rev. 
i. 4, 12, 16, al. and oft. in O. T, And 
so among the Egyptians, Persians, and 
Arabians, 

'ETTT-a/cis, num. adv. seven times, put 
for an indef. round number. Matt, xviii. 
21. Lu. xvii. 4, and Sept. 

'ETTTa/ci cxt^tot, ciL, a, 7000, Rom. 
xi. 4. 

'KpydX^ojULaL, f. dcro/JLaL, dep. mid. 
(with pert', pass. ELpyaafxai as depon, in 

2 John 8, but pass, in John iii. 21,) gener. to 
ivork, both intrans. and trans. I. intrans. 
and 1) prop, to work, labour, whether at 
one's trade, Matt. xxi. 28. Acts xviii, 3. 
1 Cor. iv. 12. 1 Th. ii. 9. 2 Th. iii. 8, or 
gener. as Lu. xiii. 14. John ix. 4. 1 Cor. ix. 
6. 1 Th. iv. 11. 2 Th.iii. 10, 11, 12. Sept. 
and Class. 2) fig. to do business, i. e. 'to 
trade or traffic,' Matt. xxv. 16, EipydcraTO 
kv avTOL's. Dem. 957,27, k. tlvl. 3) met. 
to be active, exert one's powers and facul- 
ties, John V. 17, 6 naxT/p kpydX^ETai. 
Rom. iv. 4, Toj dk kpyaX^ofxivw, and 5, 
Tw ok /u?7 kpy. — II. TRANS, to W'ork, tvork 
out, produce, effect, 1) gener. of things 
wrought or perfoiiued, as miracles, John 
vi. 30, T/' kpydZri; scil. (rt^ixELov, Acts xiii, 

' H4 



EPr 



152 



EPr 



41, Epyov : of sacred rites, to. Ispa spy. 

1 Cor. ix. 13, 'to be employed about.' 
Comp. Horn. Od. v. 101, o'l ts ^rsola-L 
lepd T£ pe'^ouo'L. So goner, of epya tou 
0£ou, or Tov Kvpiov^ John vi. 28. ix. 4. 
Eph. iv. 28, Col. iii. 23, al. or h Kv- 
pi'o), i. e. in conformity to his will, John 
iii. 21. Sept. and Class. Also kpyaX^oixaL 
'ipyov KoKov t"L<s TLva or tlvl^ Matt, 
xxvi. 10. Mk. xiv. 6. 3 John 5 ; or ku- 
Kov TivL, Rom. xiii. 10. Class. Fig. to 
ivorJc, i. e. habitually, practise good or 
evil, Matt. vii. 23. Acts x. 35. Rom. ii. 
10. Ja. ii, 9. In Sept. and Class, it is 
only used of what is evil. 2) to work, i. e. 
to till, as said of ground, in Sept. Gen. ii. 5. 
Xen. (Econ. i. 8. Thuc. ii. 71, et al. In 
N. T. only fig. of the sea, as Rev. xviii. 17, 
OL kpyaX,6fXEV0L ti)v ^dXaarcrav, to ply it, 

1. e. follow nautical pursuits as an occu- 
pation. So Aristot. Probl. § 38, 2, tous 
TJji/ ^d\a(T(Tav kpyaX^opLivov^ : also in 
Arrian, Appian, Plutarch, and other later 
writers. 3) used, by meton. of effect for 
cause, in the sense to ivorh for and earn, 
John vi. 27, T^v (3pu)(nv spy. Sept. and 
Class, e. gr. lies. Oper. 43, (3lov kpy. 
Hdot. i. 24, xpnpLaTa kpy. Aor. 1. gener. 

2 John 8. 

'Epyao'ta, a£,r]-> (^py^^o^at,) I. prop. 
' any labour undergone,' either in agricul- 
ture, Thuc. i. 139, or in the exercise of 
any handicraft, Hdot. Yit. Hom. 3 ; also, 
of any trade or occupation ; but sometimes 
fig. 'labour or effort'' gener. So Jos. Ant. 
iii. 1, 7, /U,>; <Tuu ttovco /x?]^' kpyacria. 
Hence it occurs in the phrase kpyaoriau 
SidSvaL, Lu. xii. 58, corresponding to Lat. 
daj-e operam, ' to do one's best' to bring 
any thing about. — II. ' the effect of any 
labour,' i. e. the practice or performance, 
whether of good, Plato, p. 404, et al. or of 
evil, Eph. iv. 19, £i§ kpyacriau CLKcidap- 
aia? Trdcrjjs. Sept. 1 Chron. vi. 49, al. 
-^schin. Dial, ii, 36, ttoos kpyaala^ 
TrpayfxaTUiu p.oyQ)]puiu. Plato, p. 404, — 
III. work, i. e. a trade or craft. Acts xix. 
25. Sept. and Class. — IV. by meton. the 
gain accruing therefrom, Acts xvi. 16, 19. 
xix. 24, oft. in Class. Xen. Mem. iii. 10, 1. 

'EpyaT?j9, ov, 6, {kpydX^ofxai,) a la- 
bourer or ivorkman ; prop, in agriculture, 
but also in trade. I. gener. and prop, a 
labourer, i. e. an agricultural labourer, 
Matt, ix 37, 6 fxkv Q&pL<rp.6<s iroXv's, oi da 
kpyaTUL oXiyoL, & ver. 38. x. 10. xx. 1, 

2, 8. Lu. x. 2, vii. 1. 1 Tim. v. 18. Ja. v. 
4, and Class. ; fg. of labourers in the 
work of the Gospel, teachers in the Church, 
2 Tim. ii. 15, koyd-n-jv dveTr. So, with 
censure, 2 Cor. xi. 13. Phil. iii. 2. Hence, 
with gen. of thing, a icorker, i. e. habitual 
doer, of any thing, Lu. xiii. 27, kpyaTai 
Ttj-s doLKLa^, 1 Mace. iii. 6. In Class, the 



word is used exclusively of good deeds, 
except in Menand. Hist. p. 145, £pya>y 
dvoa-'icou k. — II. a workman, or artisan^ 
Acts xix. 25, and oft. in Class. ; gener. with 
a genit. denoting the kind of employment. 

"Rpyov, ov, TO, (not of Gr. origin, 
but I believe from the Gothic weorcan, 
whence the Dutch werken, operari, agere, 
to DO,) lit. sometJiing done or to he done^ 
work in various senses, I. labour, busi- 
ness, Mk. xiii. 34, ^ou§ i/cao-TO) to 'ipyov 
avTov. Eph. iv. 12, £t§ 'ipyov diaKovia^. 
1 Tim. iii. 1. Sept. and Class. ; of the 
work which Jesus Christ was sent to ac- 
complish, John iv. 34. v. 20. ix. 4. xvii. 
4. So TO 'ipyov TOV K-vpiov, the Gospel- 
ivork, 1 Cor. xv. 58. xvi. 10. Phil. ii. 30. 
Also of this work as committed to apostles 
and teachers, 2 Tim. iv. 5, 'ipyov irob^croi/ 
BvayyfXLiTTov. Acts xiii. 2. xiv. 26 ; and 
fulfilled by them, Acts xv. 38. Phil. i. 22. 
It is likewise designated as to 'ipyov tov 
Qsov, i.e. 'which God requires,' 'duty 
towards God,' John vi. 28, sq. In the 
sense of undertaking, lit. ' work set about,' 
Acts V. 38. 2 Tim. iv. 18. Sept. in Deut. 
XV. 10. Job xxxiv. 21. Wisd. ii. 12.~IL 
work, i. e. deed, action ; implying 
something already done, 1) gener. as 
'ipyov kpydX^scrdaL, to do a deed. Acts xiii. 
41 ; and so in the Class. 2) spec, of the 
' might V works' of Jesus, miracles. Matt, 
xi. 2. John vii. 3 & 21 ; or of God, Heb. 
iii. 9, ildov Ta epya fxov. 3) where \6~ 
yo§ and 'ipyov are opposed, Lu, xxiv. 19, 
ovvaTo^ kv ipyw Kai kv Xoyco. Acts vii. 
22. Rom. XV. 18, et al. Eccl. iii. 8, and 
Class. 4) of the work of men, in refer- 
ence to right and wrong, whether as judged 
by the moral law, or by the precepts of the 
Gospel ; and that, either gener. as Matt, 
xxiii. 3, 5. John iii. 20, sq. Rom. ii. 6. 
iii. 27, et al. Sept. ; or specially, either of 
good works gener. Rom. ii. 7. xiii. 3. 
Eph. ii. 10. 2 Thess. ii. 17, et al., or of 
evil works, John iii. 19. Col. i. 21. Heb. 
vi. 1, et al. Moreover, there are found 
two phrases placed in contrast, tu 'ipya 
TOV vofxov, ' the w^orks required by the 
Mosaic moral law,' Rom. li. 15, where 
see my note, and 'ipyov vofxov, 'con- 
formable to the law,' Rom. iii. 20. Gal. ii. 
16, though TOV vofjLov is often implied, 
Rom. iv. 2, et al. tu 'ipya tt)§ 7n'crT£to9, 
'works springing from faith, combined 
with faith,' 1 Thess. i. 3, where see my 
note, 2 Thess. i. 11; or with tjJs ttlctt, 
impl. Heb. vi. 10. Ja. ii. 14, 17,— III. 
icork, i, e. A thing avuought, something 
made, as said of man. Acts vii. 41, kv tol9 
'ipyoL<5 Tcvv y^ELowv (idols), 1 Cor, iii. 13, 
seqq. ix. 1. Sept, and Class, ; or created, 
as said of God, both gener. Acts xv. 18, 
yvuxTTa T60 0£w 'Trdi'Tu tu 'ioya avTov. 
Rom. xiv. 20. Phil. i. 6. Heb. i. 10, et al. 



EPE 



153 



E V I 



Sept. and Horn. II. xix. '22; and spec, of 
work implying power, and put for power^ 
mighty John ix. 3, 'iva (pavepcody to. tpya 
Tov 0(.ov kv avTio. 

'E/OsBt^o), f. to-o), {eptdu), fr. the 
obsol. f/oto), to move or ply, whence Epta- 
<rct), lit. to move, as Eurip. Iph. A. 138, 
epicrcTELV tov Tro'oa, and espec. to move 
the oars of a vessel, and fig. to excite.) 
The prim, idea seems to he, ' to excite to 
motion' any quiescent object ; and some- 
times it is used of ' urging forward' horses, 
Eurip. Rlies. 373 ; but chiefly of moving the 
passions of men, whether to sorroiv^ Horn. 
Od. iv. 813, or a7igei\ TO exasperate, 
Trapo^i'/fot), as oft. in the Class. So Col. 
iii. 21, iJii] sptdiX^ere to. tIkvu v/jlcou. 
From the primary idea to excite to motioii^ 
springs that of exciting to action, found in 
2 Cor. ix. 2, b £^ vixwv ^>jA-o§ ripidicre 
Tous TrXsLova^, ' hath impelled very many 
to contribute.' So Arr. Diss. Ep. ii. 23, 
13, and Horn. Od. xix. 45, 6<ppa k 'in 
S/xa)a9 Kal fxriTlpa (T^v iptOiJoo. 

'Epet^oj, f. Ei'o-w, ^To^. to fijc firmly, 
place, or rest any thing or person upon 
something else, which may support it, 
Hom. II. xxii. 112. In N. T. with kavrov 
nnd. to become fixed to any thing, to stick 
fast, as. a ship on a sand bank, Acts xxvii. 
'41, EpELO-aaa 'ifx&LV&v da-dXevTO^. 

'EpBvyoiuLaL, f. ^ofxaL, dep. mid. prop. 
to eject wind or matter from the stomach ; 
or, as said of water, from a reservoir, to 
pour forth, gush; or fig. to eject loud 
sounds from the lungs, to helloiu or roar, 
Theocr. Id. xiii. 58. Hom. II. xx. 403. 
and Sept. 1 Mace. iii. 4. Hence, in N. T. 
and Alexandrian Greek, to utter foiih, to 
apeak out, trans. Matt. xiii. 35, kptv^oixai 
KtKpv/uLiuLtva. Sept. in Ps. xix, 2. 

'Ep&vvdu), f. T70-W, {eipio),) prop, 
search for any one by tracking or tracing 
his footsteps. So Hom. Od. xix. 436, 
tx^V kpsvvcovTE? KUfES fjlcTav, et al. 
Hence, to seek diligently for any thing, 
Hom. Od. xxii. 18, Tiv)(E kpsvva, or per- 
son, Eurip. Med. 1315. Xen. Cyr. i. 2, 
12. Hence, as said of a thing, to make an 
exact scrutiny after, Pind. Nem. iii. 42, to 
investigate or explore it, espec. as to its 
nature, properties, &c. which are supposed 
to be hidden or obscure, Hdian. vii. 6, 12, 
Ta a.7r6pp'i]Ta ijpsvua. So, fig. in John v. 
39, kp. T-as ypa(pa<s. vii. 52. kp. Tas Kap- 
Slu9, Rom. viii. 27. to. (3ddii tov Qsov, 
1 Cor. ii. 10, where, however, it denotes, 
as in Rev. ii. 23, by meton. to he tho- 
roughly acquainted icith, as the result of 
full scrutiny, 1 Pet. i. 11, et Sept. 

'Ep?7/xi'a, a<5, 77, {'ipt]fxo'5,) prop, a 
desert, or uncultivated and uninhabited 
tract of land, Matt. xv. 33. Mk. viii. 4. 



2 Cor. xi. 26. Heb. xi. 38. Sept. Joseph, 
and Class. 

"Epmxo^, ov, 6, V, adj. in Class, desert; 
and by impl. vast, cSic, In N. T. I. as an 
ADJ. and used 1) of a region uninhabited 
cuid uncultivated. Matt. xiv. 13, £is tptj- 
jjLov TOTTov. Mk. i. 35, et al. Sept. and 
Class. 2) in the sense desolate, laid icaste, 
deserted. Matt, xxiii. 38. Lu. xiii. 35, 6 
oIko9 vfxihv epri/ji09. Acts i. 20. viii. 26. 
Sept. and Class, (of a city.) 3) of a fe- 
male, destitute, i. e. of a husband, solitary. 
Gal. iv. 27, TToWd TO. TtKva Trjs kprifxcv. 
Is. liv. 1. And so Hdot. viii. Qb, forsaken, 
abandoned by. Eurip. Suppl. 1143, and 
Soph. GEd.Col. 1719, bereft of Plut. Cses. 
63, living alone. — II. as subst. v 'ipr]fxo9, 
sc. x^P"-> equi\^ to kpi]uLa, ' the desert,' 
meaning gener. an uninhabited and uncul- 
tivated tract of country, Matt. iii. 3. Mk. 
i. 3. Lu. iii. 4. John i. 23; also at kpi]- 
luoL, Lu. V. 16, et al. Also said of the 
Desert ofJudcea, situate in the S. E. part 
of it, from the Jordan along the Dead Sea, 
Matt. iii. 1. Mk. i. 4. Lu. i. 80. iii. 2. 
In the above passages, however, it does not 
signify a country absolutely desert and un- 
cultivated, but only one little cultivated, and 
thinly inhabited; comp. Josh. xv. 61, sq. 
and my Gr. Test. vol. i. p. 12. Of the 
desert, or mountainous region, where Christ 
was tempted. Matt. iv. 1. Mk. i. 12, sq. 
Lu. iv. 1 ; of a desert between the Mount 
of Olives and Jericho, Acts xxi. 38. John 
xi. 54; of the Arabian desert, between 
Mount Sinai and Palestine, John iii. 14. 
vi. 31, 49. Acts vii. 30, and seqq. 1 Cor. 
x. 5. Heb. iii. 8. 

'Y,pr\ p.6 (J), f. too-w, {zp-i^fxo^,) to lay 
ivaste, make desolate, trans. Sept. & Class. 
In N. T, only in pass, to be laid ivaste, 
made desolate, said both of things, as /3a- 
cnXeia, Matt. xii. 25. Lu. xi. 17; iroXig, 
Rev. xviii. 19. Sept. saepe and Class. 
ttXoutos, to be destroyed, come to nought, 
Rev. xviii. 16 ; and of a person, Rev. x\ni. 
16, r}pt]iui(jo/tj.kv)]V rrrouTa-ovcn t^)v iropv^v, 
' shall make her desolate,' despoil her of 
her riches and power. So in Sept. foil, 
by (SaaiXeT^, 2 Kings xix. 17. Is. xxxvii. 
18. Plut. Vit. Alex. a-Eavrou gprj^iol?^ 
' become bereft of friends.' 

'Epv/jico(TL9, £0)9, rj, {kpi]jUL6(ji},) a lay- 
ing waste, desolation, Matt. xxiv. 15. Lu. 
xxi. 20. Mk. xiii. 14, to ^SkXvyjma ti]? 
kp. Sept. Jer. iv. 7. vii. 34. Arrian, E. 
Al. i. 9, 13. 

'Epi^o), f. toro), (gpis,) \) to dispute, 
ivrangle. Class, and Apocr. 2) by impl. 
to cry out, vociferate, as do persons when 
quarrelling, in trans. Matt. xii. 19, oxjk 
kpicTEL, ovdk KpavydcEL. So at least the 
recent Expositors and Lexx. interpret, to 
make the sense correspond to the Hebr. 
H5 



EPI 



154 



EPX 



p5?!?^ and Sept. KSKpa^ETat. But it is 
more probable that the Evangelist here 
chose to render freely^ in order the better 
to characterize the Pharisees, whose dispu- 
tatious spirit, in the words of a great poet, 
' Loquacious, brawling, ever in the wrong,' 
is well kno'wn. Indeed, the best version 
will be, ' He shall not brawl, nor shall he 
even raise his voice.' 

'E|OiO£ia, a?, 77, (£pi0£U6t>, to wrangle, 
fr. iptdw, cogn. with tpi^co,) in the Class, 
writers, zeal in the service of a party, by 
solicitation, &c. ; but in N. T. gener. 
paHy-strife^ rivalry^ Phil. i. 16. ii. 3. Ja. 
iii. 14, 16. Rom. ii. 8. plu. 2 Cor. xii. 20. 
Gal. V. 20. And so Aristot. Polit. v. 2 & 
3, juETa^dWovcTL d' al iroXiT&laL Kal 
aviv crTdar£0)9^ did Ta§ eptOsia?. 

"EpLov^ ou, TO, (dimin. fr. £,009, £lpo§,) 
tvool^ Heb. ix. 19. Rev. i. 14. Sept. and 
Class. 

"E/)i9, ioo§, J7, (see supra at £^£6/^00,) 
1) prop, strife^ contention^ 1 Cor. i. 11. 
iii. 3. 2 Cor. xii. 20. Gal. v. 20. 1 Tim. 
vi. 4. Tit. iii. 9, and Class. 2) meton. 
love of strife^ equiv. to (piXovELKLa^ Rom. 
i.29. Phil. i. 15. Hdian. iii.2, 13. On the 
distinction between this term, ^tj/Vos, and 
dixoaTaaia, see my note on ] Cor. iii. 3. 

'Kp L (p Lov^ ou, TO, (dim. of epLCpo^,) a 
Jcidlmg, Matt, xxv, 33. Athenion ap. 
Athen. xiv. sub fin. p. 661, B. epicpiov 
kvTaKepov^ ifxirvLKTOv. 

"EpLcpcs^ ou, 6, 77, a kid, prop. Lu. xv. 
29. Sept. and Class. In Matt. xxv. 32, 

dcpOpiEl nVTOV£ IXXTTVEp 6 'TrOLIJ.1]V U(p- 

opiX^EL Ta TrpofSaTa diro toov epicpcjov^ it 
must signify, from the antithesis, a goat ; 
young goats, of course, being meant. That 
the word may have this sense, is plain from 
the circumstance that this was (as we learn 
from Hesychius) an appellation of Bac- 
chus. Moreover, it is, I would say, re- 
quired by the antithesis there with sliee'p^ 
as in Ex. xii. 5. Lev. i. 10. So also in 
Hom. II. xxiv. 262, we have dpucou yd' 
kpicpuiv kTTLOVfXLOi dpiraKTrips^. 

*Ej0^7ji/£ta, as, r/, (£/o/it]y£ua),) prop. 
interpretation or explanation^ as 1 Cor. 
xiv. 26 ; but in 1 Cor. xii. 10, put meton. 
for the faculty of interpretation^ considered 
as a spiritual gift. See my note in loc. 

'EjO;a7ji'£u 60, f. fiuco), prop, to inter- 
pret^ i. e. explain what is obscure. In 
N. T. to translate from one language to 
another ; lit. to make intelligible, by trans- 
lation, what would otherwise be unintelli- 
gible, John i. 39, 43. Sept. Ezra iv. 7. 
Xen. An. v. 4, 4. 

'Ep7r£T6y, ou, TO, prop. neut. of adj. 
■ €f>7r£To§, fr. k'pTTO), to creep, which occ. 
in Hom. Od. iv. 418; but, in use, a subst. 
neut. denoting ' a creeping animal,' a rep- 



tile^ Acts X. 12. xi. 6. Rom. i. 23. Ja. iii, 

7. Sept. and Class. 

'Epu0po§, a, oy, adj. (ipEj/Gco, to red- 
den,) red. In N. T. only used of the Red 
Sea, Acts vii. 36. Heb. xi. 29 ; where see 
my notes. 

"E/3)(o/za/, f. EXEvcTOfjLaL^ to come or 
go^ move or pass along^ intrans. in any di- 
rection whatever, as indicated by adjuncts, 
or suggested by the context. I. to go, 
with adjuncts implying motion from a 
place or person to another, John \d. 17, 
VPXOVTO Tripav T?j§ ^aXdaay]^ £i§ K. 
xxi. 3. Heb. xi. 8 ; foil, by oodv^ to go 
one's way^ Acts ix. 17. Xen. An. ii. 2, 
10 ; by oodv ij/uLina^.^ accus. of distance, 
Lu. ii. 44. Xen. Anab. iii. 1, 5. — II. to 
COME, with adjuncts implying motion to 
or towa7^ds any person or place, ] ) prop, 
said of pers. both ahsoL as Matt. viii. 9. 
Mk. iv. 4. vi. 31. John i.^40. Acts v. 15, 
et ssepe, (on the phrase 6 £pxo/x£i/o9, to 
denote the Messiah, see my note on Matt, 
xi. 3, and on the pleonasm of k\Qd)v pre- 
fixed to verbs of motion, see on Matt. ii. 
23,) and with adjuncts marking object or 
purpose., as Matt, ii, 2, i]\do}XEv TrpocrKv- 
vrjaai auTw. Mk. ii. 17. Lu. iv. 34. John 
X. 10. xii. '9. Acts viii. 27, et al. With 
dat. of pers. either pleonastic, in respect to., 
for., or directly, for Trpo's Tiz/a, Matt. xxi. 
5. Rev. ii. 5, 16 ; also with dat. of thing., 
as manner or instrument, John xxi. 8; 
with adv. of place. Matt. viii. 29. Mk. v. 
27. Lu. X. 1. John iv. 16, et al. Also 
constr. with prep, as rxTro with gen. of 
place or person, eU with acc. of place or 
purpose, £/c with gen. of place iclience., ettI 
with gen. of thing ; or with acc. of place, 
upon or to which one comes, Mk. vi. 53. 
Lu. xix. 5. xxiv. 1 ; with acc. of ohjed or 
purpose. Matt. iii. 7. Acts xxiv, 8 ; KaTa 
with accus, of object ; fxEToi with acc. of 
person, after : oTricrtx) with gen. of person 
or of time ; 'rrapd witli gen, of person or 
acc. of place ; Trpos with acc. of person or 
of thing. 2) in the sense to come forth., 
make one's appearance publicly. Matt. xi. 
14, 19. Mk. ix. 11, sq. Gal, iii'. 19. 2 Pet. 
iii. 3, et al. 3) in the sense to come again 
or hack., to return.^ absol. Lu. xv. 30. xix. 
13. John ix. 7. xxi. 22. Rom. ix. 9. 2 
Thess. i. 10. Heb. xiii. 23.^ 4) metaph. 
of pers. foil, by ^ia, as 01 voaTO's Kal 
«i/xaT05, 1 John v. 6 ; by £k, as £i§ 
EavTov eXQcov^ 'recovering his right mind,' 
Lu.xv. 17; Ei<3 TO yfipov iXGoi/cra, 'grow- 
ing wwse,' Mk. V. 26 ; £i§ dTTEXEyfxov., 
Acts xix. 27; eU Kpia-Lv^ 'to be con- 
demned,' John V. 24 ; Eh ETVLyvLccriv., 1 
Tim. ii. 4. 2 Cor. xii. 14 ; £t§ Tr;j/ 
oopav TavTVu, John xii, 27. 5) fig. said 
of things., as of tiine., kkEvcrovTai vfxipaL, 
Matt. ix. 15 ; brau eXdri v wpa^ John xvi. 



155 



E20 



4, et al. : of the kinirdom of God as to 
come, or to he establislwd^ Matt. vi. 10. 

1 Cor. xiii. 10; of things, good or evil, 
which cojue ?/pou men, as ])eace or Avar, 
wrath or punishment, Matt. x. 13. John 
xviii. 4. Eph. v. (), et al. Also of natural 
phsenomena which occur. Matt. vii. 25, et 
al. So of a law which is said to come. i. e. 
to be announced ; and of /uitli., to come 
abroad, be manifested, Gal. iii. 23. 

'EpcoTaw, f. 7?(r6t), (cogn. with epo- 
Atat,) to ask or question, gener. foil, by 
acc. of pers. and also of thing, or other 
adjuncts. In N. T. it bears tw^o accepta- 
tions, I. to ask, i. e. interrogate, in- 
quire of, with acc. of pers. Matt. xvi. 13, 
ijpwTa T0U5 jua67jTa9 uvtou, Xiyoov. 
John i. 19. xvi. 5. Sept. and Class. ; foil, 
by acc. of person and thing. Matt. xxi. 24, 
ipcDTnaco v/uLa^ — Xoyou sua. Mk. iv. 10. 
Lu. XX. 3. Sept. and Class. ; foil, by acc. 
of person and Trspl with gen. of thing, Lu. 
ix. 45. Sept. and Class, to propose ques- 
tions. Absol. Lu. xxii. 68. Deut. xiii. 14, 

2 Mace. vii. 2, and Class. — TI. From the 
Hebr. to ask, i. e. to request, entrecd, 
beseech ; foil, by acc. of pers. Matt. xv. 23, 
7jpu)Tuw avTov, Xeyoi/TES. Lu. xiv. 18, 
19. John xii. 21. Phil. iv. 3. Joseph. Ant. 
v. 1, 14 ; by acc. of thing, kp, Ta Trpos t^v 
&Lpnvr]v, Lu. xiv. 32. Ps. cxxii. 6. Sept. ; 
by acc. of pers. and prep, irzpl or irpo's, to 
ask for, Lu. iv. 38. John xvi. 26. 2 Th. 
ii. 1 ; by acc. of pers. and tVa or ottcos, 
Mk. vii. 26. Lu. vii. 36 ; or infin. aor. Lu. 
V. 3. 

'E 0-677?, r]Tos, 77, {'ivvvfXL, eaBrjv^) a 
garment, clothing, Lu. xxiii. 11. 

"E o-'0 7] (T I §, £60?, 77, a garment, raime7it, 
Lu. xxiv. 4, kv kadijarsaLU acrTpaiTTOv- 
(TaL<s. The w^ord is rare, and, I believe, 
found no where else in the plural, since it 
only means clothing. A Classical WTiter 
would have written k(rdrjfxa(TL. 

'EcrOtco, (£0-060, fr. £<56o,) to take food, 
eat, I. gener. and ahsol. of persons. Matt, 
xii. 1. xiv. 21, et saepe al. Sept. & Class. ; 
foil, by ,u€Ta with geo. to take a meal 
with, Lu. vii. 36, and Sept. ; with kvuyiriov 
TLvo^y Lu. xxiv. 43. Sept. 2 Sam. xi. 13. 
— IL zvith an adjunct of the object, i. e. 
the thing eaten. 1) foil, by gen. Lu. xv. 
16, KspaTLCJif wv I'ladiov ol 'yo'ipoL. 2) by 
£/c with gen. to eat of, i. e. part of, Lu. 
xxii. 16. John y\. 26, 50. 1 Cor. xi. 28. 
Rev. ii. 7. Sept. 3) foil, by airo and gen. 
to eat q/*, i. e. a part of. Matt. xv. 27. Mk. 
vii. 28. Rev. ii. 7 ; foil, by acc. of the 
thing eaten both gener. Matt. xxvi. 17. 
Mk. xi. 14, and xiv. 12, 14, et al. saepe, 
(prop, and fig. as 1 Cor. xi. 20. Rev. 
xvii. 16,) and spec, as in the phrase apTov 
kcrdUiv or cfyayeTu : to take food, or a 



meal, Matt. xv. 2, et al. and Sept. ; and 
fig. in Lu. xiv. 15 ; also, to eat, i. e. use as 
ordinary food, lire upon, Mk. i. 6, kadiayv 
ccKpi^u^ Kai /xt/\t dypLoi/, .John vi. 31. 
Rom. xiv. 2, et al. — 111. fro)n the Hebr. 
in the phrase kaQltiv or cpuytlu kul ttl- 
vilv, used either ahsol, or with acc. in 
three senses, 1) simply to take a meal, 
Lu. X. 7. xvii. 8. Sept. 2) to lire in the 
usual manner, Matt. xi. 18, ixvts. kaditou 
/uLVTe "TTLvcov. Lu. vil. 33. 1 Cor. ix. 4. 
3) by impl. to feast, Lu. xii. 19, (pdyt. 
Trie, £v(ppaLvov. 1 Cor. x. 7. xv. 32; 
with the idea of revelling. Matt. xxiv. 49. 
Lu. xii. 45. xvii. 27, sq. 1 Cor. xi. 22. 
Sept. 4) foil, by kvwirLov tlvo^, and fig. 
Aenoimg acquaintance ; while kadUiv Kal 
iTLveiv kiri tt/s Tpcnri^ii^ tlvo^ denotes 
the closest social intercourse and intimacy, 
Lu. xxii. 30. — IV. fig. to devour, i. e. 
consume, as said of fire, Heb. x, 27 ; to eat 
into, as said of rust, Ja. v. 3. 

"^(TOTTT pOV, OV, TO, (£5, at, O7rT£O-0af, 

to look,) occ. only twice in the N. T. Ja. i. 
23, eoLKEU avdpl KUTavoovvTL — kv kaoTr- 
Tpcp, and 1 Cor. xiii. 12, ^Xi-rrofXiv cl 
kaoTTTpov kv aivLyfxaTL : in the former 
of which passages it means a min^or, such 
as those of the ancients, which were made 
of highly polished metal ; see Exod. 
xxxviii. 8. Job xxxvii. 18, and espec. Jos. 
Ant. xii. 2, 9, ol o dpyvpsoL {KpaTrjpss) 
nrcov kaoTTTpcov Ttjv \a/x7rpoT7]Ta ttoXv 
SLavyiorTcpoi yeyov&LCTau, co? Tpavori- 
pa^ Old TOVTHiv Tct? Toov TTpoG-cpspoiUik- 
vcov 6\l/si9 opdadaL. In the latter passage 
the sense has been not a little disputed. 
Most expositors assign the same sense 
C" mirror'), and either imagine an allusion 
to be made to the spots and rust, which 
would sometimes be found in such metal- 
lic mirrors; or, as that might seem to in- 
volve an absurdity, they suppose the sense 
to be, 'But now we have only a reflected 
image, obscurely, and not face to face, as 
we shall hereafter.' Yet, how this sense 
can be elicited, I see not. That would 
require kv kaoirTpw, It is, therefore, bet- 
ter, with Bos, Wolf, Schoettgen, Schleus. 
Wahl, and Bretschn. to suppose, that the 
allusion is not to a speculum or mirror, 
but to specula, window-glass, i. e. a ivin- 
doiu, filled up with some imperfectly- trans- 
parent substance in lieu of glass, such as 
transparent stone, lapis specularis ; see 
Oldermann, de Specularibus Veterum, who 
has ably illustrated this seeing through a 
specular. And Buxtorf, Schoettg. and 
"Webster have shown that the Jewish 
writers often use the expressions videre 
per specular lucidum, and videre per specu- 
lar ohscurum, of clear and of imperfect 
knowledge. So of Moses, they say that he 
saw per spec, lucidum ; the rest of the prc- 
H6 



156 



ETE 



phets, 'per spec, ohscurum ; for of the 
transparent stones used for windows, and 
called by Strabo dLoiTTpaL, some, as we 
find from Pliny, Hist. Nat. were as clear 
as crystal ; others dusky. So Philo, 1042, 
D. TrpoaTaTTBL Ta§ kv kvkXm ^vpiSa^ 
a.va\i](pdrivaL (I conj. ai/a(ppax^riuaL) 
Tols vd\(jp XiVKri SiacpaviaL 'TrapaTrXi]- 
c/tos Xt0ot, ' with stones, in plates, like 
unto white amber or crystal.' It is true 
that no other example has been found of 
this use of saoTTTpou, which may perhaps 
be numbered among the Latinisms of later 
Greek, and regarded as one of the peculiar 
idioms occurring in St. Paul's writings. 
Yet KaTOTTTpou is so used in Philo, de 
Decal. p. 198, 34, in a similar sentiment : 
COS yap did KaToiTTpov (pavTLOUTai te 
vov^ Qeov dpoovra kciI Koa/moTroiovvTa. 

'EcTTTt/ja, a?, ?7, prop. fern, of adj. 
£cr7r£|0o§, (fr. scnroiuLaL,) eve?ii?ig, Lu. xxiv. 
29. Acts iv. 3. xxviii. 23. Sept. and Class. 

"Ecr)/aTo§, 7j, 01/, adj. [eax^adaL for 
EX^^^<^i->) fuvtliermost^ or uttermost^ last ; 
used both of place and time. I. of place, 
1) prop, remotest^ extreme^ and neut. to 
'icrx'^'^ov as subst. the eitremity ^ Acts i. 8. 
xiii. 47, £to§ kaxdrov tT]<s yrj^. Sept. and 
Class. 2) fig. of rank or dignity, the 
lowest^ last^ Lu. xiv. 9, tou Ecrx<^TOv 
TOTTov. So gener. of j'^ersons^ 'iaxa'TOL, as 
opp. to TrpooTOL, Matt. xix. 30. Mk. ix. 35. 
X. 31, et al. 3) of order or number, ut- 
inost^ Matt. v. 26, tov £0")(. KodpdvTi]v. 
Lu. xii. 59. — II. of time, the latest or last, 
only in the later Gr. writers ; 1 ) of per- 
SOTis^ Matt. XX. 8, 12, oi eaxaroL, 'those 
last hired.' So Anon, in Phryn. Eel. Lo- 
beck, 135, pidpTvpa Trapi-Xiiv soil. to-T^a- 
Toz/, ' to bring forward the last witness.' 
1 Cor. XV. 26, 45, 6 eVxaros 'A^a/x. In 
an adverbial sense, Mk. xii. 6, 22, kcrxoiT-r] 
— diridavE. 2) of things, the last; or, in 
reference to two, the latter. So to. Ecrxa- 
Td Ttfos, the latter state of any one. Matt, 
xii. 45. Lu. xi. 26. 2 Pet. ii. '20, al. and 
Sept. 3) with a noun of time, as -ij/uspa, 
KULpo^, or xpofos, John vii. 37, and oft. 
See my note on 1 John ii. 18. On the 
phrase o TrpajTo? kul 6 ecrxct-'J'o?, applied 
to the Messiah in glory, to denote eternal, 
and occurring in Rev. i. 11, 17. ii. 8. xxii. 
13, see my note on Rev. i. 11. 

'E(TX«'TW5, adv. extremely, occ. in 
the phrase £(T)(;«Ta)S ex^lv, like the Latin 
in extremis esse, to be in great extremity, 
at the point of death, Mk. v. 23, and often 
in the later Greek writers, as ttovi] poo's 
£Xf in the earlier ones. 

"Eo-w, or Eicro), (fr. £i§,) prop, a prep, 
and a lengthened form of el<s, into, in, 
u'ithin, in the inmost place, as opposed to 
£^0). In N. T. it is used as an adverb. 
1. of place ichither.^ implying motion 



into or inwards. Matt. xxvi. 58, koI zlg- 
eXOodu e. Mk. xiv. 54. Sept. and Class. ; 
with gen. Mk. xv. 16, eo-co t^s auX?j^. 
Xen. Hier. ii. 10, and oft. in Class. — 
II. of place li'here, within, John xx. 26. 
Acts v. 23. — III. with art. o, it, to screo as 
adj., 6 £(Tco dvQptxi'iro^, the inner man, i, e. 
the mind, soul, Rom. vii. 22. Eph. iii. 16. 
OL E(T(x) scil. T^s EKKX^aia^, ChrisHajis, as 
opp. to heathens, 1 Cor. v. 12. 

"^(T ijod Ev, adv. of place, {e(tu},) from 
U'ithin; prop, implying motion from with- 
in, Mk. vii. 21, EGOoQav ek ttjs Kapoia^^ 
&c. Lu. xi. 7, and Class. By im])l. 
ternally, of pers. Matt. vii. 15, 'icr. hi elctl 
XvKOL dpTT., and xxiii. 25, 27, 28. 2 Cor. 
vii. 5. Rev.iv.8. V. 1. Sept. and Class. Also, 
with art. 6, ij, to, as adj. Lu. xi. 39, sq., 
TO EacodEV scil. /x£|009, i. e. the mind, soul, 
2 Cor. iv. 16, 6 ecrcodEi/ scil. dvdp(x}Tro<i. 

'Eo-a)T£/oo§, a, ov, adj. (com par. from 
£cra),) inner, interior. Acts xvi. 24. Heb. 
vi. 19. 

'ETttTpos, ov, o, (£T7]5, socius,) a 
companion, frie7id. Matt. xi. 16. Sept. and 
Class. In Matt. xx. 13. xxii. 12. xxvi. 
50, EToipE is, like the Class. <J dyadi or 
(P'lXe, bone vir, and Engl, my friend, a 
familiar form of address, and consequently 
chiefly used to inferiors ; and sometimes 
in the Classical writers, to persons little 
known, and wholly indifferent to one. 

'Et£ p 07 Xco or (TO?, ou, o, 17, adj. (gVe- 
po§, yXtoo-o a,) lit. other-tongue d, i, e. of 
another language, 1 Cor. xiv. 21, iv ete- 
poyXuxTcroL'i scil. A-o'yois, or rather neut. 
for yXcocrcraL^ £T£pat§, with allusion to Is. 
xxviii. 21. The word occ. in Aquila, Ps. 
cxiv. 1. Pol. xxiv. 9, 5, TrXsio-Tots dXXo- 
(puXoL^ Kul ET&poyXu)<TcroL9 dvdpddL XP^?' 
crdjULEVO^. 

'^TEooS LSaa KaXiu), (kVfpo?, ot- 
oaaK.) f. jjau), equiv. to ETtpa oid., to 
teach othericise ; i. e. other doctrines than 
those taught by the Apostles, 1 Tim. i. 3. 
vi. 3. 

'YaTE poX,vy EUi, f. Tjcrci), (tTtpo^vyos, 
having a different yoke; so Phocyl. 13, 
CTaO/xos £T. ' an unequal balance,') to 
bear a different yoke; and by impl. to he 
yoked unequally, or heterogeneously. In 
N. T. only fig. of Christians living in 
familiar intercourse with heathen idolaters, 
2 Cor. vi. 14, where see my note. 

"ET£po§, a, ov, correl. pron. the otJier, 
other, I. PROP. & defin. o £T£po9, the 
other, i. e. of two already mentioned, Matt, 
vi. 24. Lu. V. 7. vii. 41, et al. ; or implied, 
as Lu. iv. 43, Tai§ fTtpat? ttoXectlv, 
^ the other cities,' viz. where the Gospel 
has not been preached. In distinction 
from oneself, another person ; equiv. to 
o TrXijaiov, Rom. ii. 1. 1 Cor. iv. 6. xiv. 



ETE 



157 



ET O 



17. Gal. vi. 4. Ja. iv. 12, and Class. So 
7] ei-ipa scil. i]fxtpa, the other (i. e. next) 
dxu/. Acts XX. 1.5. xxvii. 3. Xcn. Cyr. iv. 
b\ 10. — II. INDEFIN. and witliout the art., 
other, another, equiv. to aXXos, stru?i(/e. 
]) prop. Matt. viii. 21, kxtpos Sk tcov 
fia6i]TU}V. Lu. viii. 3. Jolm xix. 37, et al. 
Class. Also, joined with ti§, indef., some 
oilier one, any other. Acts viii. 34. xxvii. 1. 
Rom. viii. 39. 1 Tim. i. 10. 2) sjw.c. of 
another kind, i. e. another, different; eqniv. \ 
to aXKolo^, ]Mk. xvi. 12, iv i. niopcpy. 
Rom. vii. 23. &. v6/xo^. Ja. ii. 25, 666?. 
Gal. i. G, ivayyiXiov. Heb. vii. 11, U- 
pEV's. Acts vii. 18, [3a<TLXeu<s. In the sense 
foreign, strange, and by impl. wonderful, 
'Jude 7. Sept. in Ex. xxx. 9. 

'E-r£/ot«9, adv. (kVg/jo?,) otherwise, 
Phil. iii. 15, and Class. 

"ETt, adv. yet, still, I. implying dura- 
tion, and said 1) of j^resent time, either 
simply yet, still, hitherto. Matt. xii. 46, &tl 
XakovvTcs, and xxvii. 63. Lu. ix. 42, & 
Class. ; or of the pres. in allusion to the past, 
even noiv, as before, Mk. viii. 17. Lu.xxiv. 
41. Acts ix. 1. Rom. iii. 7. Gal. i. 10, et 
al. In the sense even, Lu. i. 15, sVi ek 
KOLkia? fji.i]Tp6? av. Heb. vii. 10. 2) of 
fidure time, yet, still, i. e. still further or 
longer, Lu. xvi. 2, ov yap ovmiG-y etl 
olKovo/xelv. Mk. V. 35. John iv. 35. vii, 
33, et al. and Class., as &tl X^rjv : espec. 
'R'ith a negat. ovk or ovSk etl, not further, 
no more. So jMatt. v. 13, £t§ ovoiv Icr-yvEL 
£Tt. Lu. XX. 40. John xiv. 30. Gal. iv. 
7, al. and Class. — II. implying accession 
or addition, yet more, fuiiher, Ijcsides, 1) 
gcner. Matt, xviii. 16, irapaXa^e p.E^a. 
crou ETL Eva 7? ouo, and xxvi. 65. Heb. xi. 
32, al. and Class. So etl Sk Kai, and 
fuHher also, moreover, Lu. xiv. 26. Acts 
ii. 26. xxi.28, and Class. 2) with compar. 
intens. yet, much, far, Phil. i. 9, etl fxdX- 
\ov. Heb. vii. 15, TTEpLcrcroTEpou etl 
KUTadriKov. 

'^To I pdX^co, f. daco, (eTot/Uos,) gener. 
to prepare, or get 7^eady, and keep in readi- 
ness, as said of things, Horn. II. i. 118, 
ETOLp-daaTE poL yipa?. Tlnic. vii. 18, 
ipyaXEla i]T. eis k'TTLTEL^LcrpiOV, i. e. 'to 
get in readiness also of pers. Polyb. oft. 
In N.T. it is said I. of things, as Ti]u 666v, 
'road,' Rev. xvi. 12; fig. of the Messiah, 
Matt. iii. 3. Mk. i. 3. Lu. i. 76. iii. 4. 
See my notes. Of a meal, or banquet, &c. 
Matt. xxii. 4. Lu. x\di. 8. to irdtjya. 
Matt. xxvi. 17, 19. Mk. xiv. 12, et aL 
So Hom. II. X. 571, ipov (sacrifice) et. 
^ k^dnvri, and II. xix. 197, Kdirpov et. ; of 
an abode, k. tottov, John xiv. 2. 1 Chron. 
XV. 3. Rev. xii. 6. ttoXlv, Heb. xi. 16. 
Ps. cvii. 36. ^Eviav, Philem. 22. Lu. ix. 
52. — II. of PERSONS, to put in readiness 
for some service or office, as soldiers, Acts 



xxiii. 23; horses for war. Rev. ix. 7; a 
bride, EavTy]v, Rev. xix. 7. xxi. 2 ; a 
servant, euvtov. Rev. viii. 6. ix. 15. Lu, 
xii. 47 ; pass. part. iiTOLp.acrfxtvo's, pre- 
pared, fitted, fit, 2 Tim. ii. 21, (tkevcs — 
£t§ Trai/ 'ipyov dy. iiTOLp.. Comp, Rom. 
ix. 23, 7rpuriTOLp.aaEV ah 66^au. — III. in 
the sense to provide, as necessaries for pre- 
sent use, Lu. xxiii. 56, dpwpaTa, or sub- 
sidia for future use, Lu. xii. 20, dyadd. 
So Sept, & Class. Fig. of God, as having, 
in his counsels, prepared good or evil for 
men, i, e. to destine, appoint. Matt, xx, 23. 
XXV. 34, 41. Mk.x. 40, Lu. ii. 31. 1 Cor. 

ii. 9, and perhaps Heb. xi. 16. Rev. ix. 15. 
Sept. in Gen. xxiv. 14. Ex. xxiii. 20, Is. 
xii. 21. Tob. vi. 17. 

'ETot/xao-t a, a?, ??, (eTot/ios,) prop. 
the act of preparing or getting ready any 
thing for any purpose. So Sept. Ps. Ixv. 9, 
OTL ovT03<5 Y] ETOLp.a<TLa. Nah. ii. 3, 
rifxipa EToip^aGLas avTov. Wisd. xiii. 12, 
£t§ ET0Lp.a(7Lav Tpo<pfi£. The term is 
also susceptible of other senses, as founda- 
tion, or basis, (lit. ' something prepared,' 
as a support to build on,) and a support 
gener,, Dan. xi, 7, 20, 21, Ezra ii. 68. 

iii. 3. Zach. v. 10 ; also disposition, or 
form in which any materials for building are 
laid down, ground-plan. So Ezek. xliii. 11, 
Sept, Alex. CLaypd\l/EL^ tov oIkov kul 
Tj]v ETOLp.a(TLav avTov. Also, fig, a dis- 
position of mind, and by impl. inclination., 
desire. So Ps, x. 17, Sept. ttjv ettlOv- 
piav TU)V TTEvriTwv ELavKova-E Kuptos* 
Ti]u ETOLpiacrtav Trj? Kapoia's uvtCov 
TrpocrtGX^ 'TO ous crov, where read avTov, 
from Alexand., also Trj ETOLp-aaia, even 
without MSS,, such being absolutely re- 
quired by the construction of Trpoaix^'-v, 
and by the parallelism. As illustrative of 
the above may be noticed the signif. found 
in EToLpLOTi]?, and our term readiness for 
action, i. e, promptitude and alacrity. 
Moreover, the above discussion mayatford 
materials for judgment as to the sense (ob- 
scure and disputed) of the word at Eph. 
vi. 15, viro6i](ydp.EVOL tov<s ir66a? iv etol- 
pacria tou EuayyEXiov, where many, from 
Bynaeus to Parkh., think that constancy in 
the profession of Christianity is inculcated. 
But however that may be supported by- 
one of the physical senses, it is forbidden 
by the context. And as to the interpre- 
tation propounded by Schleus., ' the being 
ready at hand,' i. e. prompt to help, this, 
however agreeable to the original force of 
the word, is feeble and frigid. That of 
Wahl and Bretschn., readiness of mind, 
alacrity, (q. d. shod as to your feet with 
alacrity in behalf of the Gospel ; let your 
feet be ever ready to go forth and preach 
the Gospel,) it is also jejune and too 
limited ; the words not regarding the 

\ p)reacJiers only, but the professors of the 



ETO 



158 



EYA 



Gospel geiieralh' ; and the Apostle having 
here in view not merely constancy in the 
faith of the Gospel, but perseverance in 
its pj^actice. So Theophyl. (Slouvte^ Kara 
TO EvayyiXiov^ the feet being a symbol 
of life and conduct. So, just before, it is 
said, ' See that ye "walk circumspectly.'' 
Yet Bynasus was right in iv^cmg a military 
allusion : indeed, the air of the context, 
presenting a succession of military meta- 
phors, demands this. There is undoubtedly 
a reference to the military i/7roo7//xa of the 
Greeks, or the caliga of the Romans, 
which, by means of the clavi^ or hob-nails, 
with which the heels were well armed, 
afforded a great security against the rough- 
ness or slipperiness of any road. So 
Thucyd. iii. 29, r\(Tav os euo-TaXsTs t£ 
Tj; OTrXlcTEL^ Kai TOV apLCTTspov TTooa 
liiovov virodEos(xivoL^ da(pa\tLa<3 'ivEKa 
T»7s TTpos Tov 'wi]\6v. Thus the sense is, 
And [like as soldiers have their feet shod 
with sandals armed with iron, as a defence 
against the roughness, and a security 
against the slipperiness, of the roads,] so 
do ye arm yourselves against the rough or 
slippery temptations of your Christian 
course, by being, as it were, shod with the 
preparation and defence supplied by the 
Gospel of peace, (i. e. which alone gives 
peace with God, Rom. v. 1. xiv. 7, and our 
ow^n consciences,) even the strong motives 
to constancy in religion and a holy life 
supplied by the Gospel.' 

"Etoi/xo?, rj, ov^ adj. ready ^ as applied 
both to things and persons. 1. of things,- 
ready ^ i. e. 'prepared for any purpose, 
ready furnished,' and not to seek. So 
Horn. Od. xiv. 453, &7r' ovsiaQ' kTolfxa 
irpoKELfXEva ')(E'Lpa'5 laWov. Thuc. vi. 65. 
So of a banquet^ Matt. xxii. 4, 8. Lu. xiv. 
17 ; of a chamber, Mk. xiv. 15 ; of a con- 
tribution, 2 Cor. ix. 5 ; of time, at liand^ 
John vii. 6, Kaipb^ ETOLimo^. So of an 
event, imminent^ Plato 715, D. (pdopau 
ET. Horn. II. xviii. 96, ttoV/xo? et. And 
so Job XV. 23, ""the w-ay of darkness is 
ready at hand.' Of things done to our 
hands, and therefore ready ^ i. e. obtained 
for us, 2 Cor. x. 16, el^ to. et. kuuxv- 
(xaardaL. So Thuc. i. 70, ETOifxa^ and i. 
20, ETTL TO. ET. TpEivovTaL. Foll. by infiu. 
of accomplishment, ready to be done, 1 Pet. 

i. 5, £tS (TlOTVipiaV ET. aTTOKaXvcpd?]- 

i/ai, and often in Class. — II. of persons, 
ready to act, prepared for any design, so 
that there shall be no delay ; and foil, either 
by a simple infin, expr. or impl. or an in- 
fin. with TT^os or els, or its equiv. a noun 
subst.; foll. by infin. ready to do., Lu. xxii. 
33, or to he done., ] Pet. i. 5. Acts xxiii. 
15; with inf. impl. ver. 21, and Matt. xxv. 
10, ai ET. (scil. EL(TEpyE<TdaL) Eio-TjXdoi/, 
Matt. xxiv. 44. Lu. xii. 40, yiVeo-Og etoi- 
fjiOL^ ' be ye in readiness.' So Ex. xix. 



15; foll. by Trpos to. Tit. iii. 1. 1 Pet. iii. 
15, ET. TT/oo? aTroXoyiav. Besides these 
may be noticed the phrases ij EToifxav 
£)(cii/ and Eu ETOLfXix) Xa(3Elv or Ey^sLu, of 
which the last occurs only in X. T. to he 
in readiness, foll. by infiu. 2 Cor. x. 6. 
Pol. ii. 34, 2. 

'Erot/xcos, adv. {EToifio^,) readily; 
but chiefly for phrase kv ETolfxu). and used 
in the form of expression etol/xw? '^X^'-^-> 
to he ready, Acts xxi. 13. 2 Cor. xii. l4. 

1 Pet. iv. 5. Sept. and Class. 

'Exos, £os, TO, a year., Lu. iii. 1. Acts 
vii. 30. Heb. i. 12, et al. Sept. and Class, 
oft. In N. T. are to be noted the follow- 
ing peculiar idioms : in dat. plur. etectl^ 
marking a period in or during which any 
thing is done, John ii. 20. Acts xiii. 20, 
Accus. plur. of time, hoiv lo7ig. Matt. ix. 

20. Lu. ii. 36. John v. 5, et al. ; in the 
phrase elyat or yii/£ 0-0 at etwv., 'to be of 
such or such an age.' Mk. v. 42. Lu. ii. 37, 
42. Acts iv. 22, al. Sept. and Class. ; also 
John viii. 57, ivEVTriKovTa etjj ovTrto 
£X£t?, 'thou art not yet 50 years old.' 
So the Latin habere as said of time, ' to 
pass, or have spent.' 

Eu, adv. (prop. neut. of £us,) we// or 
good. I. prop, with a verb., Eph. vi. 3, Iva 
Ev (TOL yiv)]TaL. Sept. Gen. xii. 13. Deut. 
iv. 40. Arr. Epict. ii. 5, 30. Mk. xiv. 7, 
£u 'TToujaaL Tti/i, to benefit any one. Sept. 
and Class. Acts xv. 29, £5 Trpacrcrsiy, to 
do right., act icell., Sept. in 1 K. viii. 18. 

2 K. X. 30. Jos. Ant. iv. 8. 38. Arriar 
Epict. iv. 6. Xen. Mem. iii. 9, 14.— II. 
without a verb., in commendations like 
Latin euge., well I Class. £U7£, Matt. xxv. 

21, £u, oouA.£ a7o:0£, Lu. xix. 17. In 
comp. besides the above senses, it has the 
force of intenseness, as in EvirpoaE^po^, 
£UTOi;a)s, &c. 

EuayyEX-t^oj, f. icro), (£i;ayy£\os, a 
messenger of good,) to bring glad tidtJigs. 
announce good neivs. In N. T. it is used 
I. ACT. with acc. of pers. and acc. of thing 
impl. Rev. xiv. 6, Evayy, tou9 Ka6i]fXE- 
yous, and x. 7. Sept. with dat. as also in 
Dio Cass. Ixi. 13. Polysen. v. 7. The act. 
form not found in the earlier writers. — II. 
MiDD. in the N. T. and also in the Class. 
to announce., publish., as glad tidings, 1) 
gener. with acc. of thing. Acts x. 36. Rom. 
x. 15, £. Eipnv^v : foll. by acc. of thing 
and dat. of pers. (the m.ore usual con- 
struction,) Lu. i. 19, aTTECTTdXnv svay- 
yEXiaraaQat col tuvtu, and ii. 10. Eph. 
ii. 17. 1 Th. iii. 6. Sept. Jos. and Class. 
With acc. of thing impl. Lu. iv. 18, e-XP'-' 
ci fiE svayyEXLcracrdaL tttoo^^oT?. Dem. 
332, 9. 2) spec, as said of the annunci- 
ation of the Gospel of Christ, and all that 
pertains to it, to proclaim or p)reach : the 
idea of glad tidings being, of course, every 



E Y A 



159 



E Y A 



where implied; and tliat in various plirascs, 
as evayy. tj/i/ ^aa-LXtiav rov Beou, Lii. 
viii. 1, or absol. witli (Sacr. implied, Lii. ix. 
6. XX. 1. 3) svayy. 'Itjcrovu Xp. or top 
Kvpiov 'Itjcoui', Aets v. 42. xi. *20. xvii. 
18, or with svayy. tov Xoyov^ T»/f iriaTiv^ 
&c. Acts viii. 4. xv. 35. Gal. i. 23, et al. 
— III. PASS, to be anuounced or published 
as glad tidings, 1) with a nomin. of the 
thing announced, Lu. xvi. 16, ?/ ^aanXiLa 
Tov Qtov. Gal. i. 11, TO EvayytXiov^ 
1 Pet. i. 25; with dat. of pers. 1 Pet. iv. 6. 
2) with nom. of pers. Heh. iv. 2, /cat yap 
saiuLfV Bvi]yy. Kaduir^p kclkelvol. Sept. 
in 2 Sam. xviii. 31. So in respect to the 
Gospel, to have it preached^ Matt. xi. 5. 
Lu. vii. 22, TrTvuypl evayy sXiX^ovTaL. 

EuayytXiOi/, ou, to, {^ev ay y ike's ^) 
prop, the reicard for good neics^ Horn. Od. 
xiv. 152. Aristoph. Eq. 661, and several 
times in Sept. In ftict the word is no 
other than neut. of the adj. svayytXio^ 
(on which see Steph. Thes.) with Swpov 
underst. but sometimes signif. the glad 
tidings themselves, as Sept. in 2 Sam. 
xviii. 20. Aristoph. Plut. 765. Appian, 
vol. ii. p. 523, 84. 557, 33. 677, 77. Jos. 
B. iv. 11, 5. In N. T. it is said only of 
the glad tidings of God's erecting that spi- 
ritual and eternal kingdom foretold in 
Dan. ii. 44, vii, 13, sq. by the coming of 
the Messiah in the flesh, or the glad 
tidings in the Gospel^ of the redemption of 
man from sin and death, through the 
merits and intercession of Jesus Christ our 
Saviour. — I. PROP, in the sense of glad 
tidings^ \iz. of salvation, every where ex- 
cept in the Epistles of St. Paul, e. gr. to 
Euayy. Trj<s (Sa(TLXsLa<s {tov Qsov) Matt, 
iv. 23. ix. 35. xxiv. 14. Mk. i. 14, et al. 
or meton. annunciation of the Gospel 
through Christ, Mk. i. 1. Also Evayy. 
T7]9 )(aptTo§ Tou Geou, 1. c. as manifested 
in Christ, Acts xx. 24. Also the Gospel 
or glad tidings of salvation by Christ, Mk. 

viii. 35. X. 29. xvi. 15. Acts xv. 7. 1 Pet. 
iv. 17. — II. in the writings of St. Paul, the 
Gospel^ i. e. 1) gener. the Gospel scheme^ 
its doctrines, precepts, promises, &c. Rom. 
ii. 16, KaTu TO Evayy. fxov^ 'the Gospel 
which I preach,' and xi. 28. xvi. 25. 1 Cor. 

ix. 14, 18. XV. 1, et ssepe al. — III. by me- 
ton. the Gospel n'orh^ i. e. tJie preaching of 
the Gospel and the labour therein, Rom. i. 
1, 9, 16. X. 1 6. 1 Cor. iv. 15. ix. 14. 2 Cor. 
ii. 12. viii. 18. Gal. ii. 7. Eph. vi. 15. 
Ph. i. 12. iv. 3, 15. 2 Th. ii. 14. 2 Tim. 
i. 8. Philem. 13. 

Euayy gXiCTT^s, ou, o, (su, dyys- 
Xtjo/xat,) prop, a messenger of good 
tidings. In N. T. an evangelist., preacher 
of the Gospel., meaning probably not a 
regular pastor in any particular place, but 
one of a sort of travelling preachers sent 



out as assistants to the Apostles, to preach 
the Gospel and found churches, or exe- 
cute some paiticular con)missions con- 
nected therewith, Acts xxi. 8. Kph. iv. 11 
(where see my note), 2 Tim. iv. 5. 

E u a p >• CT fc CO, f. ^Jo-w, (tuaptcTo?, ac- 
ceptable,) placeo., to please icell^ he well 
pleasing., with dat. Tleb. xi. 5, 6, e. tw 
Qeco. Sept. in Gen. v. 22, 24. Ecclus. xliv. 
16. Diod. Sic. xiv. 4. Mid. to he pleased 
ivith., take pleasure in., Heb. xiii. 16, t. 
^vcf'iai^ EvapsaTELTaL 6 Geo?. 

EudpgfTTO?, ou, 6, 77, adj. (fu, api- 
(TKU).,) icell-pleasing., acceptable ; with dat. 
expr. or impl. Rom. xii. 1, e. tw Geco, 
and xiv. 18. 2 Cor. v. 9. Eph. v. 10. Phi'l. 
iv. 18. Tit. ii. 9 ; foil, by evvottlov tlvo^ 
instead of dat. Heb. xiii. 21. By ev with 
dat. of pers. ku Kuptw, Col. iii. 20. Wisd. 
ix. 10, £. Trapa croi. 

a p E(TT (jo^, adv. (eudpscrTOS,) ac- 
cep)tahly., so as to please, Heb. xii. 28, and 
later Class. 

Euy£i^7y§, EO^.1 6., v., adj. (tu, yti/os,) 
I. PROP, tcell-horn., of good fiimily, 1 Cor. 
i. 26, £uy£i/£r?, and oft. in Class. Also 
honourcdjle., as said of a person of rank and 
distinction, Lu. xix. 12. 1 Cor. i. 26. Job 
i. 3, & Class. — II. METAPH. noble-minded., 
intelligent., candid., equiv. to yEvvato's., Acts 
xvii. 11, Evy^vECTTEpoL. And so 4 Mace, 
vi. 5, pLEyaXocppcov Kal Evyevii^. Joseph, 
Ant. xii. 5, 4, oi coKipcoTaTOL Kal Td? 
i/Ai;)^d§ EvyevET^, and sometimes in Class, 
as Plato 413, B. EvyEvou^ i'-jdov?. 

Eu^ia, a?, 77, (£uoto§, fr. f5, A169 gen. 
of Zfu?, the air or sky,)/a2r zceather., (lit. 
fair sky,) Matt. xvi. 2, Evoia, scil. eaTai. 
So Xen. Hist. vi. 2, 17, w^e have ei Evdia 

Eh]., &c, 

Eu^O/CEO), f. 77(7W, (fU, OOAC£60,) prOp. 

to seem good., and by impl. to think good. 
Found only in later Gr. Hence with dat. 
to he ivell disposed toicards any person, to 
favour him, Diod. Sic. xvii. 47. xiv. 61, 
or thing, to embrace and assent to it, 1 Mace, 
i. 43. Diod. Sic. iv. 23. xiv. 110, or to 
consent to it, Pol. ii. 38, 7, et ssepe al. In 
N. T. to thhik good., and take pleasure in 
any person. I. to vieiv tvith approbation., 
to like., foil, by ev and dat. of pers. Matt, 
iii. 17. xvii. 5. Mk. i. 11. Lu. iii. 22. 

1 Cor. X. 5. Heb. x. 38. By kv and dat. 
of thirig., 2 Cor. xii. 10, £i;^. kv dadevELaL^. 

2 Th. ii. 12, Evd. kv Ty aoLKLa. Sept. and 
Apocr. Pol. ii. 12, 3, ttois tTat c-vvQriKa^. 
kv a1<s EvdoKTjo-E. Diod. Sic. vol. iii. p. 72, 
Ev66Ky]crE Trj crvvdriKri., and iv. 184. vi. 
313. Foil, by Ek Avith acc. of pers. Matt. 

xii. 18, £iS OV EVOOKTICTEV 7] ^l^X^? JUOV. 

2 Pet. i. 17. Foil, by acc. of thing, Heb. 
X. 6, 8, oXoKavTcofxaTa — ovk Evd. Sept. 
— II. in the sense to ivill or desire, foil, bv 
infin. expr. or impl. and in two shades of 



EY A 



160 



E YK 



sense, 1) gener. to he willing or ready to 
do a thing, 2 Cor. v. 8, tvcoKovfx^v ,ua\- 
\ov iKdy]fx?'j(raL ek too acofxaro^. 1 Th. ii. 
8, £. fxtracovvaL u. Ecclus. xxv, 16. 

1 Mace. 23. Pol. i. 8, 4, et sa?pe. 2) 
by impl. to determine, reiohe^ the idea of 
spontaneous bounty being implied, Rom. 
XV. 26, i.\}c6Ky]<yav 31. Kai 'A. 1 Th. iii, 
1, £1^0. KUTu\-i]cp6r]vaL. Said of God, Lu. 
xii. 32, svcoKTjcrtv a rTarjjp vfxwu onvvai 
vfxlu Tiju (ScictlX. 1 Cor. i. 21. Gal. i. 15. 
Col. i. ly. 1 IMacc. xiv. 46, sq. 

EucoK'ta, a?, 77, [evcokIoo,) prop, 'a 
being well pleased wicli a thing;' implying 
approbation and good-will. In N. T. it 
denoies, I. prop, delight in any person, 
and hence favour^ Lu. ii. 14, ku dvdcw- 
iroL^ £uo, favour, i. e. on the part of God. 
So in Sept. and Ecclus. xi, 17. Of men, 
good-i'dll^ kind irdentio/i^ Phil. i. 15, cC 
zvcoKLav. And so Epigr. Adesp. 612, 
ed. Jacobs. By impl. desire^ Rom. x. ], 
V EvcoKLa — KapcLa<s. — II. SPEC, in the 
sense of good pleasure, in which are in- 
cluded the ideas of purpose and benevo- 
lence, E})h. i. 5, 9, K'ara ti/i^ evcokluij 
Tov ^E\wxaTO<s aiirov. Phil. li. 13. 

2 Thess. i. 11. And so Matt. xi. 26. 
Lu. X. 21. OUT cos kyivETO EucoKia s/x- 
Trpocr^'cU aov. 

Eu£|Oy£cr/a. as, ?'/, ( £L'£p'y£T>?9.) the 
primary sense of the word is that found in 
Horn. Od. xxii. 374, ivell-doing : 'Qs 
KCCKOEpyit]^ iVEoyEcrn] fxiy' cifx&LVcov. 
But el-e where in Class, it denotes a be- 
mrfiting any one. or a benefit done to any 
one. And so Acts iv. 9, kirl EVEoyEaia 
dvdpooTrov dcrBEuov<s : also 2 Mace. vi. 13. 
and Ps. Ixxvii. 14. The word only occurs 
elsewhere in X. T. at 1 Tim. vi. 2, t?/s 
EVEpyEaLa<s dvTLXu/ijSavouEvoL : where, 
if referred, as it is by some Expusiiors, 
ancient and modern, to the maiters, it Avill 
mean, "those who are kind to them.' So 
frigid, however, is the sense thus arising, 
that it is better, with Bretschn. Rose, and 
others, to explain, " those Avho partake of 
the benefits and bles-ings [of the Christian 
faith].' Yet this involves an ellipsis so 
harsh, that, after all. it is best to refer 
T^§ EUEpy, to the >t/'va/^ts, in this sense : 
'Let them serve them the better, because 
those who possess the benefit [of their ser- 
"vice] are believers and beloved [brethren].' 
This subaudition from the context is. in- 
deed, suggested by the use of the article, 
which in the singular has always the force 
of reference. 

Eu£n'y£T£w, f. ?7crto, (£U£p'y£T?]S.) 

do good^ to ben.efit, absol. Acts x. 3^!. 
CL7]\)dzv cVcp-. ETd)v. Sept. Jos. and Class. 

EuEoy £T>]§. 01'. 0. (£5, absol. 'kpyo:.) 
prop, a verbal adj. as in Xen. Cyr. v. 3, 8, 



1 dvopi EVEpyiry : but, in use, a subst. 
he7iefactor^ as often in Class. In X". T. it 
is a title of honour, benefactor,, correspond- 

i ing to the Latin pater pcdricB^ Lu. xxii. 

I 25, oi E^ovcnd'lovTE^ uvtvou ivspytTai 

j KaXoUVTUL. 

j Eu6£To?, ou, 6, 17, adj. (gu, Ti'0rj/xt,) 
j prop, icell situated^ convenient for any pur- 
I pose : foil, either by el<5 and acc. or its 
i equiv. a dat. Diod. Sic. ii. 57, Trtjyds £ts 
'; XovTpd EvdiTov9. In X. T. fig. fit, 
\ proper, for any purpose, Lu. ix. 62, ovk 
I Evd. £. eU Ti]v (3a(T. T. 9. So Xicolaus ap. 
Stob. xiv. p. 87, oT/xaL 6' kfxavTOv EvdeTov 
Tols Trpdyfxao-L. Also of things, Lu. xiv. 

35, OUT£ eI<3 KOTTpLUU EvQeTOV kcTTLU, So 

Dio-c. ii. 65, £ii6£T09 fis fCTro'Gscrii/. Also, 
us fid to any person, Heb. vi. 7, ^0Tdvi]v 

Evb. kKELL'OL'3, &C. 

E 1' d fc w s, adv. ( £u6u?, ) straightu-a?/, 
irnmedi'jMy, Matt. viii. 3. Mk. i'. 31, et 
al, ssepe. Sept. and Class. 

E u 6 u 6 p o/u £ to, f. t;(T6o, {svQuopofxO'S, 

running straightforward,) prop, to run 
str'jdfd, t'.d:e a straight course: in X. T. 
suid of a sJiip^ Acts xvi. II. xxi. I ; foil, 
bv £iQ and acc. of place, and so Philo, p. 
Iij2, 213. 

EuduuEco, f. r^cro), (tuGu/uos,) to he 

cli.eerfuL in good spirits,, Acts xxvii. 22, 
25. Ja. V. 13. Plut. de Tran. 2 & 9. The 

earlier Class, use the mid. form. 

EuOu/.'. OS. ou. o. ?/, adj. (£1/, 3'L'^aos.) 



prop. 



cdl- d imposed, Mnd-l\eaii.ed. 



In 



X. T. clieerfdf Acts xxiv. 10. xxvii. 36. 
2 Mace. xi. 26. Xen. Ag. viii. 2. Cvr. ii. 
2, 27. 

El'SuVo). f. vo), (evdu^,) to make 
straight, trans. 1) prop, of a \yay, to iimke 
>fraigJd and level,, John i. 23. 2) gener. 
to guide any thdng a straight ivay ; also, 
to steer a vessel straigld,, Lucian Dial. 

Mort. X. 10, EvdvVE. 60 TTOpdjULEV^ TO TTJ/OCZ- 

Xlov. Eurip. Hec. 39. Hence in Ja. iii. 
4. o Evdvi'OJiJ. tJiC steersman. 

Eudv9, ala, V. adj. 1) prop, straight, 
^ucitt. iii. 3. Mk. i. 3. Lu. iii. 4 & 5, 
\vhere see my notes. Sept. and Class. 2) 
fig. of the heart and life, uprigJd, sincere,, 
Acts viii. 21, n Kapcia. xiii. 10, xds oooi/s 
Kvplov Tas EvdELa<s. 2 Pet. ii. 15. Sept. 
As adv. of time, for £06£ajs, Matt. iii. 16. 
xiii. 20. et al. and Class. 

Et'0L'T?JS, '7-J7TOS, (suOuS,) piOp. 

straightness,, fig. rectitude, Heb. i. 8, 
cos EvdvTi]T09, equiv. to /ad/Soos &vdtTa. 

ILvKaLptu), f. T^o-o), {EvKaipo^,) prop. 

to have leisure, lit. good time fordoing any 
tbing, \) gener. ]\Ik. vi. 31, ouC£ (payElu 
']]VKiLipovu. Lucian ii. 433, rjuKaipovu 

ETTLVOslv TL TtOV KOciTTOVLOV. Absol. 

1 Cor. xvi. 12. eXevo-etul ce orav evkui- 



EYK 



161 



E YA 



pVa-T}. Pol. XX. 9, 4, OVK f.(j)a<TKEV EvKaL- 

ptlv. 2) spec, with Eh final, to have lei- 
sure for^ and by impl. to spend onc-s time 
in., any thing, Acts xvii. 21, 'AO. ovSkv 
eTEpov EVKnipovu., 1] Xfygii/, SiC. So 
Philo, p. 969, ttXt/Oos 6' egtlv evevkui- 
povv ^lajSoXats /cat /3\a(r</>?j/xi'ats. 

EuKrttpta, as, tj, (£u»cai|Oos,) a Jit 
time, opportunity.^ Mk. xxvi. 16. Lu. xxii. 
6, and Class. 

l^v Kaipo^., ov, o, 17, adj. well-timed., 
opportune., Mk. vi. 21, vp-Epa^ evk. Heb. 
iv. 16, and Class. 

E u K a t p w s, adv. opportunely, Mk. xi v. 
11. 2 Tim. iv. 2, and Class. 

E UK OTTO 9, ou, o, ?7, adj. easy to he 
done ; lit. ' of easy labour,' Pol. xviii. 1, 
2, TovTo 6e evkottov., opp. to ctovvaTov., 
Ecclus.xxii. 15. 1 Mace. iii. 18. InN.T. 
occ. only in compar. neut. easier., Matt. ix. 
5. Mk.* ii. 9. x. 25. Lu. v. 23. xvi. 17, 
et al. 

EuXa'/3fcta, as, 17, (fcuXajS/^s,) prop, 
and in Class, circumspection., caution., lit. 
'fear of handling' any thing ; and fig. cau- 
tion, as to taking any thing in hand, Soph. 
(Ed. Col. 115, £. TO)!/ TToioviuLEvcov I also by 
impl. the avoiding of it, Arist. Eth. iv. e. 
Twv ai<T\p(j}V : the fear of any thing, Jos. 
Ant. xi. 6, 9. Hdian. v. 2, 3, evXcl- 
^Eiav navxoX.ovTiJDv, timidity, Wisd. xvii. 
8. Prov. xxviii. 14. Hence the sense, 
' fear of offending God,'' piety found only 
in the later Class, and even there with an 
adjunct, as Diod. Sic. vol. v. 215, 77 tt^os 
TO QeToi/ Ev\d(3ELa. Plut. Cam. 21, Tr/i/ 
TTpos TO Qelov evX. Philo, p. 113, EvX.. 
Oeov pETO. aiSov^ Kai f uXa/Se/as. In 
the N. T. the word is used without ad- 
junct; as Heb. v. 7. xii. 28. 

^vXa^Eopai, f. riaopiaL, depon. pass. 
[EvXa^t]^,) in the earlier Class, the term 
signifies to be circumspect, or cautious, to 
heware of any thing, and avoid it : in the 
later ones, as Polyb. and Diod. Sic. to he 
afraid of any thing or person, as Plut. 
Pericl. 7. Also with infin. as Soph. (Ed. 
Tyr. 616, e. ttecteTv. Sept. Jos. and Apocr. 
Also foil, by p.i] and subj. 1 Mace. iii. 30, 
evXafS^dr] prj ovk exv, &c. So Acts xxiii. 
10, EvXa^rideU pit] dLaaTracrdrj. And so, as 
the words are understood by many, Heb. 

xi. 7, EvXa(3ridEL<S KaTECrKEVaCTE Ki[3u)- 

Tov. But the meaning there appears to be, 
not 'fear of the deluge^ but 'fear of God, 
and reverence to his word ;' a sense of the 
word often found in the Sept. but rare in 
the Class. ; though an example occurs in 
Plato, p. 879, Qeov EvXa(3oupEvo£ : and 
iEschin. ap. Steph. Thes. EvXaf^ElaBaL. 

ISivXa^t}?, £os, 6, v, adj. {ev, Xa^Eiv,) 
prop, taking well hold of any thing, so as 



not to let it slip from one's grasp, TElian 
An, iii. 13. Hence fig. cautious, wary of 
undertaking any thing, and circumspect in 
carrying it on, Airian, Epict. ii. 1, 2; 
Hdian. vi.9,2; & thence timid, fearful, ab- 
sol. So in Aristot. Demosth. Philo, & Plut. 
ap. Steph. Thes. Hence the term came to 
mean, as in N. T. Lu. ii. 25. Acts ii. 5. 
viii. 2, par excellence, 'one who fears God, 
a pious person ;' a sense derived from the 
Hebrew idiom, and the character of the 
Mosaic law, in which the fear of God 
stands for the whole of the worship and 
service of God, see Ps. xxxiv. 11, as love 
does under the Gospel. 

'EvXoy EM, f. 770- w, prop, and in Class. 
to speak well of, commend : but in N. T. 
to bless, trans, and said I. of jnen towards 
God, to bless, i. e. praise and celebrate, 
with ascriptions of praise and thanksgiving. 
Lu. i. 64, EvXaycou tov Qeov, and ii. 28. 
xxiv. 53. 1 Cor. xiv. 16. Ja. iii. 9, and 
often in Sept. and Apocr. ; and so in Jos. 
Ant. vii. 14, 11. — II. of men in respect to 
men, and sometimes things, to bless, i. e. 
to invoke God's blessing upon, 1) with acc. 
of pers. expr. or impl. to pray for any 
one's ivelfare, Matt. v. 44, EvXoyELTE toi/s 
KaTapcopLEVOV^ vp.d'3. Mk. x. 16, rjvXoyEL 
avTct, scil. Ta TraLoia. Lu. ii. 34. vi. 28. 
xxiv. 50, et al. Sept. and Jos. Bell. vi. 5, 
3. 2) with ace. of thiyig expr. or impl. in 
N. T. only used of food, or a meal, to 
bless, i. e. to ask the Divine blessing upon 
Its use. Matt. xiv. 19. Mk. vi. 41. viii. 7. 
Lu. ix. 16. So of the Lord's Supper, 
Matt. xxvi. 26. Mk. xiv. 22. Lu. xxiv. 
30. 1 Cor. X. 16.— III. of God or Christ 
in respect to men, to bless, i. e. to favour, 
prosper, and make happy, Eph. i. 3. Acts 
iii. 26. Heb. vi. 14. Sept. as Gen. xxiv. 1, 
35. Pass, as in Philo, to he blessed, viz. of 
God, Gal. iii. 8, 9, and Sept. Pass. part, 
perf, Ev\oyr]pLEVo9, ' blessed and favoured 
of God,' happy. So it is said in joyful 
salutations, &.c. espec. of the Messiah and 
his reign, EvXoyi^piivo^ 6 kp^opEvo^ kv 
6v6p.aTL KvpLov, Matt. xxi. 9. Mk. xi. 9, 
sq. Lu. xiii. 35. John xii. 13, al. So 
Matt. XXV. 34, oi EvXoy^pivoi, tov Tia- 
Tpos pov. Lu. i. 28, and Sept. 

EiJXoyTjTos, ov, 6, ?7, adj. (euXoyew,) 
prop, of men, blessed. In N. T. used only 
of God, to signify worthy of praise, adora- 
ble, Mk. xiv. 61. Lu. i. 68, et al. Sept. 

EilXoyia, as, 77, (cu'Xoytw,) prop, and 
in Class, commendation, in N. T. blessing, 
I. from men towards God, blessing or 
praise., as expressed in ascriptions, imply- 
ing also thanksgiving. Rev. vii. 12, '77 
EvXcyia — T(jp Qew, and v. 12, sq. Ecclus. 
iii. 9. Jos. Ant. xi. 4, 2, — II. from men 
in respect to men and things, blessing, i. e. 
benediction, or invocation of good, viz. from 



E YM 



162 



EY [I 



God, upon certain persons, Heb. xii. 17. Ja. 
iii. 10. Sept. inGen.xxvii. 12,35. Eccliis. 
iii. 8, 9. Jos. Ant. iv. 8, 44. Also upon 
tilings^ 1 Cor. x. 16, to ttot. tT]^ EvKoyia's 
o Ev\oyov/jLsi/, ' the cup of blessing,' i. e. 
consecration, drunk at the paschal supper, 
— III. by meton. blessing^ i. e. favour con- 
ferred, benefit^ bounty^ 1) from God to 
men, Rom. xv. 29, kv Tr\-\]^<x)ixa%^i £u\o- 
yta? Tov zvayy. tov X/). Gal, iii. 14, i) 
EvXoyla TOV A(3paa/UL^ ' the blessing pro- 
mised of God to Abraham*' and his seed, 
Eph. i. 3. 1 Pet. iii. 9. Sept. in Gen. 
xlix, 25. Heb. vi. 7. 2) from man to 
God, gift^ present^ 2 Cor. ix. 5, tt/i/ irpoK. 
EvXoyiav vjULcoi/. Sept. in Gen. xxxiii. 11, 
et al. Hence, by impl. liberality^ sponta- 
neous bounty, 2 Cor. ix. 5, cus EvXoyiav^ 
Kal lui] d}<s TrXgoi/E^iai/, & ver, 6, £7r' euA.o- 
yiaL£, as adv. liberally^ bounteously. 

Kv jULETadoTO^^ Of, 6, 77, adj. (eu, 
uETadLScojuLL,) ready to impart., liberal^ 
hountiful., 1 Tim. 18. Marc. Ant. iii, 

14, TO EVjULETaSoTOV Kul EV7rOLl]TLK6lf. 

E J I/O £60, f.* r/cro), (fu, vov^^) prop, to 
he well-minded., or icell-disposed to., to be 
on friendly terms tvith^ Hdian. viii. 8, 11. 
Xen. Cyr. viii. 2, 1. (Ec. xii. 5. At 
Matt, v, 25, tcrOt Evvocou too avTL^LKCo., it 
rather signifies, as we say, to be friends 
with., meaning, to be reconciled to. 

Ei;i/ Ota, as, 17, {^evvoew.,) prop, good- 
will^ a willing mind, as in Eph. vi. 7, {jlet 
EvvoLa<s SouX. But in 1 Cor. vii. 3, the 
word is used per euphem. as x^P^^ 
the Classical writers. Though Evvoia is 
found in Jos. Ant. vii. 12, 4. xvi. 7, 3. 
xvii. 3, 1, and Dio Chrys. p. 52, and 
(piXoTri^ in Hesiod, Theog. 126, 306. 

Ey i/ou)(i^ttJ, f- icTi^-, (£uVoL')(os,) to 
make any one an eunuch ; prop. Matt. xix. 
12. Jos. Ant. X. 2, 2 ; fig. Matt. xix. 12. 

Eyi/ou)(o§, ou, 6, {evvy]., a sleeping- 
place, and e'x^i) pi"op- keeper of the bed- 
chamber ; and hence, eunuch., one who has 
been emasculated ; such persons alone 
being employed as the keepers of Oriental 
liarems. In N. T. the term denotes, 1) 
prop, eunuch^ Matt. xix. 12, as often in 
Sept. and Class. 2) fig. Matt. xix. 12, 
twice, of those impotent from birth, and 
also of those who live in voluntary absti- 
nence. 3) by impl. a minister of state., 
Acts viii. 27, 34, 36, seqq. See my note 
on ver. 27. 

EJo^ow, f. (jDoruo., {Evodo?, well on a 
road,) prop, to lead any one ivell on his 
tvay, direct his course., Sept. Gen, xxiv, 

27, EjULE t' EVwScOKEV K, £l§ oIkOV^ &C. 

Theophr. de Caus, Plant, v. 6. Fig. to 
prosper oiie's journey ; and gener. to give 
one success., Sept. Gen. xxiv. 21, 40. 
Nehem, ii, 20. In N. T. it occurs only 



in pass, to be led in a good way., i. e. I. 
prop, to ham a prosperous journey., Rom. 
i. 10, gtTTws — Evodw^ncrofxaL eX^eZv irpo^ 
v/j.d^. — II. fig. to be prospered, i. e. to ob- 
tain a happy issue in anv undertaking, 
1 Cor. xvi. 2, ^7](TavpL'i^<jov o TL EvodcoTai. 
3 John 2. Sept. and Hdot. vi. 73, fowocoOr? 
TO) JLXeo/uleuel to TTpriyfxa. 

'EvTrdpES po^., Of, o, 77, adj. prop, sit- 
ting by, in close attention on, i. e. assiduous., 

1 Cor. vii. 35, in some Edd. tt^os to evtt. 
Tw Kupi'w, equiv. to assiduity, devoted- 
ness to. 

Ei;7r£t0»7s, £o§, o, 7j, adj. (£i), 'ttelQo- 
fxai,) easily persuaded, Ja. iii. 17, & Class. 

EuTTf picTTaTos, ov , o, 77, adj. (fV, 
'TTEpl, IdTapai,) lit. standing or stationed 
well around,' i. e, by impl, and fig, easily 
besetting, Heb. xii, 1, evtt. d[xapTLav, 

^vTroita, as, 77, {evttoleco,) lit. tvell- 
doi?ig, doing good, beneficence, Heb. xiii. 
16, Jos. and later Class. 

Eu7rof>£a), f, 770-0), prop, and lit. to be 
icell off, as to the means for effecting any. 
projected purpose, Thuc. vi. 34, 44. 
Plato de Leg. vii. 791, Frequently, how- 
ever, the term signifies ' to be well ofif as 
to {TTEpl) any possession,' food, clothing, 
goods, &c. & espec. money ; in which case 
the genit. is usually expressed; tbough 
sometimes implied, as Xen. Cyr. -i. 6, 10. 
Mem. ii. 7, 4. QEcon. xx. 2, EviropElv, as 
opp. to diTopElv. So also, in the absolute 
constr. but in the passive form and depon. 
sense. Acts xi. 29, /caOcbs i]v7ropElT6 Tis, 
where, as often, the sense is, ' to have the 
means [of doing it], to be able to affo7^d it;' 
for the idea of zvealth is not necessarily to 
be supposed. So Musonius ap. Stob. Serm. 
p. 476, distinguishes between Eviropo^ and 
TrXovcTLo?, observing, that ' some men, 
when they cannot pretend poverty, dXX' 

EVirOpOL \pi]p,dT(JOV Ol/T£S, Tt2/£9 ^£ Kal 

TrXouGTLOL, yet go so far as not to educate 
their younger children, iva to. TrpoyEvo- 
fjLEva EVTropy jmaXXoi;, that the elder may 
be the better provided for.' This depon. 
use of the word, though rare, is found in 
Lev. XXV. 26, 49. Pol, i. 66, 5. Luc. Bis 
Acc. 27. Aristot. Q5con. 2, and Theo- 
pomp. ap. A then. 275. 

EuTTopia, as, 77, prop, 'the means for 
effecting any purpose,' espec. acquired 
icealth ; as Acts xix. 25, and Class. 

EuTTpfeTTfiia, as, 7), [Ev7rpETr)]<s, of 
becoming presence,) comeliness, personal 
beauty, Ja, i. 11. Sept. Pol. i. 4, 8. Arr. 
Epict. i, 8. 

EuTrpocr^fi/vTos, ov, 6, 1], adj. (fi/, 
TTpoo-dixo/uiaL,) I. and lit. tcell-received^ 
i. e. approved, acceptable, with dat. Rom. 
XV, 31. 1 Pet, ii. 5; absol. Rom. xv. 16. 

2 Cor. viii. 12. Plut. ix. 196.— II. by 



E Yn 



163 



impl. favourable^ as Kaipo's Evirp. 2 Cor. 

vi. 2, ' a time of favour.' 

Eu7r|0O(r£<5f)o§, ou, o, 77, adj. synonym, 
with Evirapeopo^, assiduous. Ilencc to 
EUTT. assiduitf/^ devotedness, 1 Cor. vii.35, 
where see my note. 

EuTTpoo'coTTtw, f. 7j(Ta), [evTrpocr- 
loTTo^, prop, well-faced, handsome; and fig. 
specious, Hdot. vii. 1()8,) fig. to make a 
^'air skou\ Gal. vi. 12. So popular and 
plausible arguments are by the rhetoricians 
styled svTrpoa-coTra. 

"Etv pier K(jo^ f. T/o-o), to find^ trans. I. 
gener. to find without seeking, to light 
upon^ meet xrith^ 1) prop, and with acc. of 
pars. Matt, xviii. 28. John i. 42, sqq. et 
al.; with acc. of thing. Matt. xiii. 44. Lu. 
iv. 17, sq. et al. Sept. and Class. 2) fig. 
to find, i. e. perceive^ or learn by expe- 
rience. Matt. xii. 44. Lu. viii. 35, et al. 
saepe, and in Class, frequently. — II. to find ^ 
i. e. find out^ viz. by search or inquiry, to 
discover^ prop, and absol. Matt. vii. 7, 
^^jTfiT-fi, K'cti EvpriCTETE. Also with acc. of 
pers. or thing, Mk. i. 37. Lu. ii. 45. John 

vii. 34. Acts v. 22, et al. saepe, and Sept. 
and Class. — III.^^. in various senses, 1) 
EvpicTKELv Osov, ]. 6. ' SO to find out the 
way of pleasing God as to be accepted by 
him.' (See £K'^7]T£a», III.) Acts xvii. 27, 

^r^T-Etl/ TOV Osoy, EL CLpajE aVTOV 

Kai EvpoLEif. Pass, in Rom. x. 20, Evpidrjv 
ToTs Ejuik p-fj '(^i]i-ouarLV. 2) to find or make 
out ; as said of the result of mensuration 
or computation, Actsxix. 19, Evpov dpyv- 
piov fxvpidda^ 7r£i/T£, and xxvii. 28. Xen. 
Cyr. \^iL 2, 18. Hist. iii. 2, 10. 3) to 
find out mentally, to invent^ contrive^ Lu. 

V. 19. xix. 48. Acts iv. 21 IIL mid. to 

find for oneself to acquire^ obtain^ Heb. ix. 
12, aicoviav Xvi-pcocnv Evpdp.Evo's. Jos. 
Ant. i. 19, 1, So^av dpETrj^ &vpdp,Evo<s^ 
and Class. The act. in this sense often 
occurs in N. T. as Matt, x. 39, 6 Evpcbv 
xlfvxv^ xi. 29. Lu. ix. 12, Evp. 
ETTLcrLTLa-p.ov. Johu xxi. 6. Acts vii. 46. 
Rom. iv. 1. Heb. xii. 17. Rev. ix. 6. 
Sept. and Class. By Hebr. in the phrase 
svpicTKELv \upLV iTapd T(Z Gfiw, ' to ob- 
tain favour and acceptance with God,' 
Lu. i. 30. Acts vii. 46. So EvpElv e\eo<5 
irapd KvpLov, 2 Tim. i. 18 ; absol. Heb. 
iv. 16. Sept. 

Eupo/cXu^wy, wyo§, 6, Euroclydon^ a 
tempestuous wind prevailing in the Le- 
vant, and so called from Evpa and k\v- 
dcov^ an obsolete adj. from k/Vu^oj, mean- 
ing lit. cm jEast-souser^ or wave- stirring 
Easter, the Tvcpoov of the ancients, and 
the Tuffone of the moderns ; so called 
from its two peculiar properties, 1) as 
coming principally from the East; 2) as 
exciting the waves to a great height; 



which is usual in the Mediterranean with 
Easters. Acts xxvii. 14. See more in my 
note in loc. 

Eu/3u^copos, ov, o, J7, adj. (gupus, 
Xotfjos,) prop, broad-spaced^ broad^ spa- 
cious^ as 77 o^os, Matt. vii. 13. Sept. and 
Joseph. 

Yii) <T tl^ELa^ a?, 77, {evote^i]^^^ in Class, 
'a dutiful reveren(;e' both towards God and 
our parents ; in N. T. it is confined to the 
former, and may be rendered godliness^ 
Acts iii. 12. 1 Tim, ii. 2, et al. saepe, also 
in Sept. & Apocr. and Jos. Ant. iii. 2, 3, 
and oft. in Class. In 1 Tim. iii. 16, /xtya 
£0"Ti TO Tijs ev(te(3. pLvcTTripLov ^ the seuse 
is, the doctrine of piety in the Gospel,' 
i. e. by meton. ' the Gospel scheme,' so 
named because piety towards God is the 
foundation of it. Thus Jos. c. Ap. i. 12, 77 
Kanrd tous vopov^ TrapadEOoptvi] Evcri- 
/3£ia, meaning, 'the form of religion.' Ant. 
xviii. 5, 3, fin. oi;o£ dWr] tl<5 aX/c?/ twv 
iv dvdpwTroL? kiriTETEvy pivwv., oiya tu)V 
TTpos TO OeTov £{jo-£|3£ta)t/, meaning, 'the 
various forms of religion in the world/ 

Euo-fijSfia), f. 770-0), (£i'0-£jS?7s,) prop, to 
be EV(jE(Si]'3^ 'to entertain a reverential and 
dutiful feeling' towards any one, trans. I. 
as regards God, to I'everence^ ivorship^ Acts 
xvii. 23, dv evcte^eTte. Xen. Hist. i. 7, 

10. Jos. Ant. X. 3, 2, evg-. tou Qeov. — 

11. as respects parents, I Tim. v. 4, £u'<r, 
TOV lSlov oIkov. And so in Class., where, 
however, the acc. is governed of Trpos, 
7r£p], or £t§. 

(TE^rig^ £0S, 6,77, adj. (fS, ai/SEordaL, 
which prop, signifies ' to agitate oneself, to 
tremble,' and when foil, by an acc„ ' to 
tremble at any one's presence,' and, like 
the Latin tremo, ' to dread,' and then again 
by impl. ' to reverence,' as in our law 
phrase, ' the king's dread majesty,') the 
primary sense of this word is 'the quality of 
feeling revereiice'' for those to whom it is 
due, as God, or one's parents; but in N. T. 
it is used only of the former mode, lit. sig- 
nifying, pious., devout., Acts x. 2, 7. xxii. 

12. 2 Pet, ii. 9. Sept., Apocr., and Class. 
Eua-£/3a)?, adv. piously., religiously., 

2 Tim. iii. 12. Tit. ii. 12. Jos. and Class. 

Eucri7/xo§, ou, o, 77, adj. (fu, o-r^^aa,) 
lit. icell- marked., or ' easy to be distin- 
guished by certain marks ;' & hence, 'easy 
to be recognised and known,' Pol. x. 44, 3. 
Theoph. C. PI. iii. 8, 2. In N. T. said fig. 
of speech, distinct.^ ' easy to be understood,' 
1 Cor. xiv. 9, Evarip-ou \6yov. So Por- 
phyr. de Abstin. iii. 4. Sext. Erap. adv. 
Arithm. 18, and in the physical sense, 
Plut. p, 564, (pcovd^ d(jr}p.ov<s. 

E u o"7rXay )(i;09, oi», 6, adj. (eu, 
(TTrkdy^vov^) tender-hearted., compassion- 
ate^ Eph. iv. 32. 1 Pet. iii. 8, and Apocr. 



164 



E YX 



The word occurs in Class., but in a very 
different sense. 

Ei><rx^]Moi/a)9, adv. (fuVx^/Ucoi/,) in 
Class, decorously^ becomingly^ so as not to 
violate modesty or propriety in any way. 
In N. T. it is used, 1 Cor. xiv. 40, of the 
mode of conducting public worship, de- 
cently^ decorously^ and also Rom. xiii. 13, 
creditably^ as Xen. Mem. iii. 12, 4. At 
1 Th. iv. 12, it is used of life and conduct, 
such as becometh those professing godliness. 
There is nothing that exactly corresponds 
to this in the Class. The nearest approach 
to it is in Stob. Eclog. Phys. vol. ii. 144, 
Heer. kclv Xiyw/uLeu ddid(popa to. god/jlu- 
TLKO. irpo^ TO svcrxVfJ-oua}^ '^V^^ ^ 

nrdpECTTL TO tVOULjUOUCO^. 

prop, becomingness as to dress or general 
appearance ; and sometimes used of deco- 
rum of manners. In N. T. 1 Cor. xii. 23, 
it is used of the decorous dressing of the 
body. 

E w cr X ^7 /X CO y, oi;o§, o, 77, adj. (tS, 
(r)(^iua,) prop, and lit. rcell ojf to the 
<rx^//aa, or to external figure, form, and 
general appearance. Hence, comely^ as 
applied both to persons and things, I. 
'prop, as said of the former ; in N. T. it is 
used prop. 1 Cor. xii. 24, to. E\}CTyJ]\xova. 
fiiX-n. Xen. Cyr. i. 17. — II. metaph. to 
svaxv/^ou, decorum, propriety., 1 Cor. vii. 
35, and Class. — III. of jjersons^ fig. ' of 
good o-v^^a,' i. e. rank, condition, and the 
figure one makes (see Xen. (Econ. ii, 4) ; 
hence, ko7iourable., noble., &c. Mk. xv. 43, 
€. ^ouXtuTTys, Acts xiii. 50, yvvdlKa^ Tas 
tvcrx, and xvii. 12, yvvaLKcov tcou £V(tX' 

EuTova)9, adv. (guToyos, fr. gS, Tfiz/co, 
to stretch a cord,) intensely., i.e. strenu- 
ously., vehemejitly., Lu. xxiii. 10. Acts xviii. 
28. Sept. and Class. 

EuTjOaTrgXia, a?, 77, fr. f uTpaTrtXos, 
prop, icell-turned., and fig. facetious., icitty., 
' who can readily turn his discourse' to a 
present occasion, for the purpose of ex- 
citing merriment. See Aristot. Eth. iv. 8, 
and Anstoph. Yesp. 467. As, however, 
such may be done either to a good or an 
evil purpose, so the thing itself, svTpa- 
TTsXia., according as it kept within due 
bounds or not, admits of a good or a bad 
sense. Hence in the Class, it is used I. 
in a good sense, to denote ?{.7Y, pleasantry., 
as Plato p. 563, evrpuTrskLa^ te Kal 
Xctpi-^i^TLcriuLOu E/uLTriTrXavraL. Soin Arist. 
Eth. ii. it is said, irepl to i]6u to ku ttul- 
Slu, 6 fx'iv p.&cro's (he who keeps in due 
medium) EvTpa.TrEXo's, k(u i) otaOscris, 
€i/Tpa7r£/\ia" ?; ok v7rap[3uXyi. j3u)txoXoy(^La' 
Kal 6 E)^(jou auTj/i/, (BcofJiuXoxo'S' 6 6k 
eXXsi'Trcjoi/ dypoLKog Ti§, ' a booi'ish per- 
son.' — Also II. in a bad sense, for seur- 
j-ility, bujfoonery^ coarse and even obscene 



jesting. So Isocr. Areop. 18, tou5 f uVpa- 
tteXov^ Kai aKwiTTELu cvvafxivovs., ous 
vvv iv<pueL'S irpoaayopEVOva-Lu. Aristot. 
Eth. i. 31. Endem. iii. ol ^w/jloXoxol 
EVTpd7re.XoL irpocrayopi.vovTaL., namely, 
by an Attic vTroKopLcrfid?., or calling bad 
things by good names. See mv note on 
Thuc. iii. 82, 4. So in N. T. at Eph. v. 4, 
we have Kai aiaxpo'J'V^ Kai /utopoXoyLa., 
77 EVTpaTTsXLa, 

Eucpt]/xia, as, 17, [Evcfyy^fxa^.) in Class. 
tJie usi?2g of words of good omen ; but in 
N. T. good report., good fame., 2 Cor. vi. 8, 
(5ia ovcr<piTfJLLa<s kul Ev<pi]fj.ia^. And so 
j^llian Y. H. iii. 47, rj EiKprjiuLa h KaXou<Ta 
avTOv XPV^^'' ou.,oudEV u)(piXr]asv. Alciph. 
Ep. i. 39. Hdian. i. 7, 11. Plut. vi. 462. 

E 1/(^7] ^0 9, ou, o, 77, adj. (eu, cpri^i}^) 
prop, icell-spoken. Hence, by impl. of 
favourable import ; also, of words, lauda- 
tory, as Pol. xxxi. 14, 1, Xo'yo? e. In 
N. T. (of actions) of good repoH., laudable., 
and so Anthol. Gr. iv. p. 183, aiaXP^^ 
ett' Ev<pn/uL0L^ oo^av EVEyKafxivi]. 

(pop iio., f. )70"a), {Evcpopo^., fertile,) 
to bear zvell., yield abimdantly., as said of 
ground, Lu. xii. 16, Evcp6pt]Gtv ri x^P^- 
Jos. Bell. ii. 21, 2, et al. 

^vippaivco^ f. ccfto, (fuc^pcof, cheer- 
ful,) to gladden., cause to rejoice., trans., 
also mid. and aor. 1. pass, in mid. signif. 
to be glad., rejoice, intrans. I. gener. in 
act. 2 Cor. ii, 2, t/s egtlv 6 Evcppatvuyu 
JUS ; Sept. and Class. Mid. Lu. xv. 32, 
EvcppavdrjvaL 6e Kai x^o^yai 'e6el. Acts 
ii. 26. Rom. xv. 10. Rev. xi. 10. xii. 12, 
et al. Sept. and Class. — II. spec, as con- 
nected with feasting, mid. to rejoice., make 
merry., Lu. xii. 19, cpdys., TTi'g, Evcppaivov, 
and XV. 23, 24. Sept. and Class. Hence^ 
by impl. simply to feast, Lu. xv. 29, where 
see my note. 

(p poor V VII, 77s, 77, (Eu^pcoi/,) glad- 
ness., joy., Acts ii. 28. xiv. 17. Sept. and 
Class. 

Eu'x«piO'T£(jt', f- 7?cra), (fux«/OiO"Tos,) 
prop, and in earlier writers, to shotv oneself 
gratefid, i. e. to requite a favour ; equiv. 
to CLOovai X"-P^^ '• ^^^^ Gr. and 

N. T. to give thanhs., to thank., equiv. to 
EldhaL X^P'-^i ' ^0 f^^l express one's 
gratitude to any one,' Lu. xvii. 16, fu'xa- 
pLCTTcov avTto. Roui. xvi. 4. Jos. Ant. 
xiv. 10, 7. Pint, de Garr. 7, fin. ; else- 
where in N. T. only used in reference to 
God, 1) in the sense to give thanks to 
Him, usually foil, by tw Gtw, &c., and 
also other adjuncts, as prepositions, or con- 
junctions, &c. Lu. xviii. 11. John xi. 41. 
Rom. i. 8. vii. 25, et al. ssepe ; but some- 
times absol. as in Eph. i. 16. 1 Thess. v. 
18. Pass, with acc. 2 Cor. i. 11, %va — 
EvxapiaT^Qij TO x^P'-^P-^* Apocrypha, 
Philo, Joseph., and later Class. 2) as 



EYX 

said of giving God tliaiiks before meals, 
&c. foil, by Tw Bf(o, ActsxxYii.35. Honi. 
xiv. 6 ; absol.'Matt. xv. ',16. Mk. viii. G. 
xiv. 23. Jolm vi. 11, -23. 1 Cor. x. 30, et 
al. By im))l. to praise or tcoiship, for 
euXoysLV, Rom. i. 21. 1 Cor. xiv. 17. 

prop. (jratitndL\ thankfulness. Acts xxiv. 3. 
Philo p. 231, bol. Pol. viii. 14, 8. Josepb. 
Ant. iv. 8, 26. In St. Paul's Epistles and 
Apocalypse, thanksgiring^ thanks, i. e. ' tbe 
expression of gratitude to God,' 1 ('or. xiv. 
16. 2 Cor. iv. 15. ix. 11, sq. Pbil. iv. 6. 
Col. ii. 7. iv. 2. 1 Tb. iii. 9. 1 Tim. ii. 1. 
iv. 3,. 4. On tbe sense at Epb. v. 4, see 
my note tbere. 

Eux«pio"ros, ou, 6, 17, adj. (si/, x«- 
pi^o^at,) prop, and in C\2i%^. grateful, i. e. 
pleasinci aiid acceptable, Xen. Cyr. ii. 2, 1. 
In N. T. grateful, i. e. thankful, to God, 
Col. iii. 15, see mv note. Jos. Ant. xvi. 
6, 2. Xen. Cyr. viii. 3, 19. 

Eux'), V^-, V, {evxoimah) I- prayer, to 
God, Ja. V. 15. Sept. in Job xvi. 17. Prov. 
XV. 9, and Class. — II. a vow, as said in 
N. T. of the vow of a Nazarite, Acts xxi. 
23, where see my note. So Sept. in Num. 
vi. 2, 21. Acts xviii. 18, KELpdjuiEvo^ ritv 
KE(pa\i]v Ev K. eIx^ yct-p Evxhv-, meaning 
votum civile, on which see my note in loc. 

Eu'xo/iai, f. Jojuat, dep. mid. This 
word bears, in the Class, writers, various 
senses, though closely connected together; 
of which the primary one seems to be that 
assigned by Hemsterhuis, who traces its 
origin from the obsolete eux^, which he 
says meant peto, postulo, in the mid. ev- 
XPp.aL ; and in the latter of those senses, 
sibi postulo, arrogo, (whence gloriari,) and 
also to solemnly aver or affirm, claiming 
belief to one's words ; whence to promise : 
in the former, 'to seek for oneself,' long for, 
* anxiously wish for,' any thing ; whence, to 
pray for any thing. The two last senses, 
viz. to pray for, and to earnestly icish for, 
are alone found in the N. T. I. to pray 
to God, foil, by dat. tw Qem, Acts xxvi. 
29, by TTpos Tov Qeov, 2 Cor. xiii. 7, ab- 
sol. and by v'rrip tlvo^, Ja. v. 16. Sept. & 
Class. — II. to ivish for, desire earnestly, 
with acc. and infin. Acts xxvii. 29, r}v- 
XOVTO rifxipav ysviadaL, Rom. ix. 3. 
3 John 2 ; with acc. toDto, 2 Cor. xiii. 9. 
Sept. and Class., espec. Plato. 

Ei;)(p77 o-Tos, ov, 6, Tj, adj. {ev intens. 
Xpdo/JLUL,) very useful, 2 Tim. ii. 21. iv. 
11. Philem. 11. Sept. and Class. 

Eui//"i' X ^' V(T(jo, {svxjjvxo^,) prop. 
to be bold or brave, and fig. to be in good 
spirits, Phil. ii. 19. Anthol. Gr. iv. 275. 

Euco^ta, a9, J7, (suto^ijs, fr. o^w, pf 
o^coba,) prop, good odour, fragrance, Ec- 
clus. xxiv. 15. Xen. Conv. ii. 3. In N. T. 



I \ 

only fig. of persons or things, ''well-pleasing^ 
or acceptable to God,' 2 Cor. ii. 15, X/oi- 
GTov tvcoSia Eafxiv, where see note. Epb. 
V. 2, £t§ oafxriv tv(jod'ia£. Pbil. iv. 18, 
6(yfxi]v EvooSLa^, ^vaiau 6. Hebr. for^'m- 
grant odour, Sept. Lev. i. 9, 13, 17. 
Num. XX viii. 13, and oft. 

Eucoj/Ujuos, ov, 6, i], adj. [ev, ovojia,) 
prop, of good name, honoured, renowned^ 
Hes. Theog. 409. PinH. 01. ii. 3, and oft. 
Or, having an auspicious name. Hence, 
of good omen, used by euphem. instead of 
dpLCTTEpd^, the left, which was a word of 
ill omen; all omens on tlie left being 
si?iister, or regarded as unlucky. In N. T. 
the left, said chiefly of the left hand, opp. 
to the right. Matt. xx. 21, 23. Mk. x. 
37, 40. XV. 27 ; of the left foot. Rev. x. 2. 
— Adverbially, Acts xxi. 3, KaraXLTvov- 
TE9 avTi]!/ Evwuvfiov, ' OQ the left hand.' 
Sept. and Class. 

'^(pdWofxaL, f. a\ovfxaL, [ettl, aX- 
XoiuaL,) to leap upon, or against, foil, by 
ETTL with acc. Acts xix. 16, i^aXXoniEvo^ 
£7r' auToi/s, ' springing upon.' In Pind. 
Nem. vi. 85, €t§ AiOtoTras kirdXro, & 
Homer often ; foil, by dat. of pers. And 
so Plut. vi. 526. 

'E0a7ra^, adv. (sTri, dira^,) lit. at 
once, i. e. 1) 'once for all,' Rom. vi, 10. 
Heb. vii. 27. ix. 12. x. 10. 2) at once, 
i. e. not at several times, 1 Cor. xv. 6. 

'YiipEV PETE'S, ov, 6, {E<pEVpLarK(JO, tO 

find out any thing,) an invention or device, 
Rom. i. 30, Ecp. kukIjov, So Philo, p. 968, 

KUKfoV EVpETUL. 

'K<pi] fXEp La, a?, 77, {E(priiJLEpo9,) not 
found in Class. In Sept. it is used prop, 
of the daily service of the priests in the 
Temple, 2 Chron. xiii. 10. 1 Esd. i. 16. 
In N. T. meton. a course or class, into 
which the priests were divided for the daily 
service of the Temple, each continuing for 
a week at a time, Lu. i. 5, 8, h Ty 
Ta^EL T^s E(f). where see my note. 

'K(p7T iuLEpo9, ov, 6, rj, adj. {ettl, vfxi- 
pa,) prop. /or a day, 6 E<j)' v/mEpav wi;, 
'ephemeral.' In N. T. daily, ' sufficient for 
the day,' Ja. ii. 15, Tt/§ E<prjp.Epov Tpocfyrj^. 
Diod. Sic. iii. 32, tocs E<pr]pLEpov^ Tpoipd^. 

'Fi<p iKVEOjULaL, f L^ofxaL, to com,e to, 
arrive at, foil, by dxpi vvith gen. 2 Cor. x. 
13; by Eh with acc. 2 Cor. x. 14, et Class. 

'E^ icr T77/xt, f. ETrL(TTr}cr(i), trans, to 
place upon or over, to set over. In N. T. 
the v/ord occurs only in the intrans. form, 
(act. aor. 2, eitectt^v : perf. part. t^Eo-Tws : 
and mid. E(pL(j^aixaL,) I. prop, to place one- 
self upon or near, to stand by or near. 1) 
gener. Lu. ii. 38, kul auTt) auTt; 'ry copa 
E7rL(TTdaa. Acts xxii. 13, 20; with dat. of 
pers. Acts xxiii. 11 ; with iTrt tl. Acts x. 
17. xi. 11 ; with iirdvu) nvo^, to stand by 



165 



Exe 



166 



and over, Lu. iv. 39. Sept. and Class. 
2) as implving also approach, to come and 
stand hy^ to come to or iipon^ any person 
or place, Lu. xx. 1, kiriar^aav ol cipx- 
LspeT^, and x. 40, and Class. So also, with 
the idea of sudden appearance, Acts xii. 7, 
ayysXo? 'Kvolou kiria-ri] : Mith dat. Lu. 

ii. 9. xxiv, 4. Class. In a hostile sense, to 
come upon ; gener. Acts vi. 12. xxiii. 27 ; 
Avith dat. Acts iv. 1, Jos. Ant. vii. 11, 1. 
— IL fig. 1 ) of persons, to stand fast hy^ 
i. e. he instant, pressing, 2 Tim. iv. 2, iivi- 

(TTJjdL SVKaLpCO<S UKalpCO^ SCil. KJ]pVCr(TU)V 

Tov Xoyov. Demosth. 70, 16, Slu tout 
kypnyop&v^ e(pi(TTi]Kev. 2) of things, as 
evils, to come upon^ befall^ Lu. xxi. 34. 
1 Th. V. 3 ; of a tempest, Acts xxviii. 2. 
Jos, Ant. ii. 4, 3. Wisd. vi. 5, 8 ; ^o(^05, 
Pol. xviii. 3, 7. In the sense, to impend^ 
' be close at hand,' 2 Tim. iv. 5", o Kaipo^ 
a(l)iorTi]Ke. Demosth. 287, 5. 

'"E)(0pa, as, 77, (prop. fern, of adj. &x~ 
Ojoos,) enmity^ hatred^ Lu. xxiii. 12. Gal, 
V. 20. Eph. ii. 15, 17. Ja. iv. 4. Sept. & 
Class. In Rom. viii. 7, £X^P« Qidv 
means, 'is in a state of enmity against God.' 

'Ex;0joos, a, 6i/, (g'x^os, fr. £X£o-6ai, 
to stick close to, q. d. ' deeply-seated ill- 
will,') 1) pass, hated, hateful^ an object 
of enmity, Rom. xi. 28, kxdpol Sl v/jlcc^. 
Class. 2) act. hating^ hostile, L as adj. 
Matt, xiii, 28, kxdpd<s avdpwTro?. Rom. 
V. 10, kx^poi ovTE^, Col. i. 21. Sept. and 
Class. — II. as siibst. 6 kx^po?, an enemy, 
I) gener. and foil, by gen. of pers. Matt. 
V. 43, sq. X. 36, et al. saepe. Sept. & Class. ; 
with gen. of thing, Acts xiii. 10. Sept. oft. 
and Class. 2) spec, of the adversaries of 
the Messiah, Matt. xxii. 44. Mk. xii. 36. 
Lu. XX. 43. Acts ii. 35, 1 Cor. xv. 25, et al. 
or of God, Jas. iv. 4. Also, 6 ix^pos, said 
KaT k^oxh^ of Satan, Lu. x. 19. Matt, 
•xiii. 39. 

klBvo's, small,) a viper ; lit. a little ser- 
pent, Acts xxviii. 3, and Class. ; fig. of 
ivicked men., yswijuaTa kx^ovuiv. Matt. 

iii. 7. xii. 34. xxiii. 33. Lu. iii. 7, Class. 

■*Exw, f. £^60, to have or hold, implying 
continued possession, I. prop, and prim. 
to hai'e or hold in the hands, Rev. i. 16, 
£XW2^ kv Trj Se^La aurov X^'-P''- a.anrkpa^ 
i, vi. 5. X. 2, xvii. 4. Hom. II, i. 14, ku 
X^pcrlv £X^^? ^^V^i 3.nd sometimes 

in the other Class, So, by impl. Matt, 
xxvi, 7. Heb. viii, 3. Rev. iii. 1, et al. 

11. GEX. and most freq. to have, i. e. pos- 
sess, 1) with the accus. of the thinr/s in 
one's possession, power, charge, &c. and 
that whether gener. as property, Matt. xiii. 

12. xix. 21, et al. (sometimes left underst. 
as sx^'-^ '^X^'-^) spec, as estates, 
or inheritances, produce, or personal pro- 
perty, as clothes, arms, furniture, provi- 



sions, &c., and also of the members of 
the body ; also of power, faculty, dignity, 
John iv, 44. vi. 68, &c. or any advantage, 
benefit, &c. Matt. v. 46 ; favour with. 
Acts ii. 47 ; faith as a gift, Rom. xiv. 22 ; 
eternal life, as a free gift, John iii. 36. vi. 
40, et^al. ; of a law, John xix. 7. 1 Cor. 
vii. 25 ; of age, or years, John viii. 57. ix. 
21 ; of a ground of complaint against any 
one, Matt. v. 23. Acts ix. 38. xxiv. 19, 
et al. ; or of reply, 2 Cor. v. 12. By impl. 
with the idea of charge, trust, &c. Rev. i. 
18, &x^ '^0:9 kXeT? tou ^avuTov, and xii. 
12, £x. ^u/uLOu p.. and xv. 1, 6, I. TrXriyd^. 
Dem. 1153, 4. In the sense to have at 
hand, ' ready,' 1 Cor. xiv. 26, with acc. of 
pers. implying some special relation or 
connexion, 1) gener. and simply, as of 
husband or wife, Matt. xiv. 4, et al. : bro- 
thers, Lu. xvi. 28 ; children, Tit. i. 6 ; 
widows, 1 Tim. v. 16, et al, 2) where the 
subject is a thing, to have, implying the 
existence of something in, i. e. in con- 
nexion with, the subject. Matt, xiii. 5, dio. 
TO fxi] EX^'-^ /SaOos 7^s. Lu. xi. 36. xx. 
24. Acts i. 12. 1 Cor. xii. 23. 1 Tim. iv. 
8. 2 Tim. ii. 17. Heb. ix. 8, Ja. i. 4. Rev. 
iv. 7. — HI. used of what any one is said to 
have in, or on, by, or tvith, himself, i. e. 
of any condition or state external or in- 
ternal, in which any one is, 1 ) gener. of 
any obligation, duty. Acts xxi. 23," Evxh^ 
EXov'TE<s k(p' kavTwu, and xviii. 18. Rom. 

xii, 4, £. irpd^Lv. 2 Cor, iv, 1, 'i. Bluko- 
viav. Phil. i. 30, & Col. ii. 1, £, ayiova. 
Lu. xii. 50, £, ^aiTTLcrp.a. Of sin, guilt, 
&c. dfxapTLav ex^'-^i Jolm j-X. 41. sy/cA.?]- 
fxa. Acts xxiii. 29. Kpipa, 1 Tim. v. 12. Of 
effects or results, dependent on the subject, 
as a cause or antecedent, Heb. x. 35, 'i]tl^ 
£X£t pnaQairooocTLav, ' has, or brings with 
it, reward.' 2) of any condition or affec- 
tion of body or mind, where one is said to 
have, i. e. sustain or bear, such or such an 
affection, &c. whether of the body^ as in 
the case of disease or infirmity, so ex- 
pd(TTiya<s or aadEVEia^, Mk. iii. 10, Acts 
xxviii. 9. Heb. vii. 28. oul/jloulov £X« ' to 
have a devil,' namelv, inflicting disease, 
Matt.xi.l8. Mk.iii.22,30. ix,17''. Lu.xiii. 
11. Acts xvi. 16. xix, 13 ; or of the mind, 
as TJ]v dydir-i]v tov 0. ix^i-i^-) John v. 42. 

xiii. 35. dudyKtjv, Lu. xiv. 18. xxiii. 17. 
So xps^cci^ ^'x^^^5 U'a'nt of. Matt, 
vi. 8. Lu. V. 31, et al. saepe ; x^P'-^ ^X- 
TLvl, gratias habere, to thank, Lu. xvii. 9. 
1 Tim. i, 12, and Class. By an inversion 
of subject and predicate, such an affection 
is in the Class, often said to have or pos- 
sess a person, Hom. II. x\iii. 247, and oft. 
Hdot. iv. 115, cp6j^o<s. And so Mk. xvi. 
8, £Tx£ 0 aurds Tpofxo^ kul EKcrTacri^. 
3) of things which any one has in, on, or 
about himself, involving the idea of carry- 
in oneself, as kif yaaTpi f'x^^*'? Matt. i. 



EX a 



18. Rev. xii. 2, and fig. 2 Cor. i. 9. iv. 
7. Phil. i. 7. So o/i oiiVsclf, as garments^ 
arms, ' to wear, or bear,' Matt. iii. 4, t. ev- 
Svfia. John xii. G, to yXcacrcroKoiJLov, and 
xviii. 10, fxdxaipav. Rev, ix. 17, •S'wpa- 
K'as. Fig. of persons, tcearim/ an appear- 
ance, Col. ii. 23. 2 Tim. iii. 5. Rev. iii. 1. 
4) in tlie sense to contain, i. e. to have 
within itself, Heb. ix. 4. Rev. xxi. 11. 
Fig. fj'iX^au eu eavTw, Matt. xiii. 21. Mk. 
iv. 17. — IV". fig. and intens. to liave Jinnly, 
i. e. in mind, to hold to, to hold fast^ 1 ) 
gener. of things, John xiv. 21, 6 'ixoyv 
To.'i euToXd's fjLOv. 1 Cor. xi. 16. Phil, 
iii. 9, et al. ; also of persons, as e'xsii^ 0£ov, 
Tov YiuTtpa, Tov Ylo//, to hold fast to 
them, hold them in devoted affection,' 
1 John ii. 23. V. 12. 2 John 9. 2) by 
impl. to hold or ' regard as,' account ; with 
acc. of pers. and noun in appos. Matt. xiv. 
5, cos 7rpo(p. avToif &1xov, and xxi. 26, 46. 
Mk. xi. 32. Isocr. p. 239, TLva.<s ovv e^w 
TTi.TraLO&vfxivov^. — V. foil, by infin. with 
an acc. as Ti, ov§kv, &c. namely, — '''^ 
coa-TE sIttsTv or iroLrjcraL, i. e, by impl. ' I 
am able to say or do something,' I can, 
implying only an objective or external 
ability, and so differing from SvuajixaL : 
usually with infin. aor. Lu. vii. 40, &xco 
crot TL ELTriiv, and xii. 4, fxri ixovToov — tl 
TTOLrjaaL. Acts iv. 14. xxiii. 17, sq. xxv. 
26. xxviii. 19 ; with infin. pres. 2 John 
12. And so in Class. More direct is the 
sense to be able, I can, where the acc. is 
suppressed, Matt, xviii. 25, ^i?/ &xoi>to9 ck 
avTou dirobovvaL, 'not having where- 
withal to pay,' pres. John viii. 6, 'Lva £)(a)cri 
KaTi]yopiLv aurou. 2 Pet. i. 15. So in 
Class, as Xen. Mem. ii. 7, 11, ovx £^to 
cLTrooovi/ai. Sometimes the infin. is sup- 
pressed, as Mk. xiv. 8, o ecrx^i' ccvtii 
{TToiija-aL), kiroLrjarE. Acts iii. 6, & Class. 
— VI. intrans. or with kavrov, &c. im- 
plied, always with an adv. or adverb, phrase, 
to have oneself, i. e. to be circumstanced so 
or so, to be; e. gr. knroLixw<5 exelv, to be 
ready. Acts xxi. 13. 2 Cor. xii. 14. ^lian 
Y. H. iv. 13. E(TxdT(jo<5 E-XELv, to bc in ex- 
tremity, Mk, V. 23. KUKU)^ ^X^^^-) 
sick. Matt. iv. 24. Lu. vii. 2. Xen. OEcon. 
iii. 11. Ka\u)<s EXELu, to be icell, namely, 
after being ill, Mk. xvi. 18. John iv. 52. 
oOVdos E-X^'-^i Acts vii. 1. ttws, 

XV. 36. dXXu)^, 1 Tim. v. 25, and so Class. 
Acts xxiv. 25, TO vvv 'ixov ('for the pre- 
sent') TTooEvov : and so in Class. ; foil, by 
£u and dat. adverbially, John v. 5, 6, eu 
dardEVELu ex^lv, 2 Cor. x. 6. So of place, 
E-X^'-^ ' to he in a place,' John xi. 17, e'x- 

EU TOO /JLV1]/iXEL(jp. JoS. Aut. vii. 1, 1. VII. 

mid. Exo/uLUL, to hold oneself upon, or to 
hold by, adhere to a person or thing, Hom. 
Od. xi. 346 ; also to be contiguous to any 
place, foil, by gen. Hdot. iv. 169. Thuc. 
V. 67. In N. T. only occ. in partic. £Xo- 



167 EOS 

jULEV09, 1], ov, 'next in \i\i\.CG^ adjacent, Mk, 
i. 38. £i§ Ta§ EXOfJ-Euwi /C6o/>io7ro/\f 19, Jos. 
Ant. vi. 1. 1. Xen. Mem. iii. 5, 10. Of 
time, T?7 EXOfxivij, suppl. ijuxtpa, expr. Acts 
xxi. 26. Tw ^£ £X- craf3(i. xiii. 44, et al. 
Sept. A])ocr. Jos. and Pol. iii. 112, 1. Fig. 
Heb. vi.9, T« EXop^Eva (roonipLa?, 'things 
closely connected with salvation.' So 
Lucian,Herm.69,TaGT' eXttlSo^ kxopiEva 
Xejel?. 

"Ews, prop, and prim. adv. but in the 
later writers also prepos. with gen. In 
N. T. I. ADV. in two senses : 1) ttntil, i. e. 
so long as, until, i. e. ' unto such a time,' 
marking the continuance of an action up 
to the time of another action, and foil, by 
the indie, subj. or opt. according as the 
latter action is certain or uncertain. It is 
foil, either by indie, of a past action, as 
Matt. ii. 9, £w§ kXdojv ecTt;, and xxiv. 39, 
in a future action, or foil, by subj. aor, 
with dv, where the latter action is only 
probable, Matt. ii. 13, £605 dv e'Lttm aoi, 
and V. 18, et ssepe ; also Sept. and Class. 
2) by impl. so long as, while, i. e. during 
the continuance of another action, until it 
ends, &c. John ix. 4, £w§ rjjuiipa e(ttlv, 
and xii. 35, and so in Class, — II. as prep, 
gov. the genit. until, unto ; marking a ter- 
minus ad quem, and used both of time and 
place. I. of time, and 1) foil, by gen. of 
a noun of time, Matt. xxvi. 29, £ws t^§ 
r]p.Epa<s EKELv^<s. Lu. i. 80, et al. ; or by 
gen. of pers. or event, Matt. i. 17, £005 

Aavtb, £605 T?}9 jULETOLKECrLa? Baj8., £0)9 

Tou XptcTToD, et al. and Class, as Diod. 

Sic. i. 4, £609 T7;9 ' AXE^dvSpOV T£\£UT^9. 

2) foil, by gen. of a pron. e. gr. £cos, scil, 
Xpovov, lit, until ivhat time, until ichen, 
i. e. simply with indie, or subj. ; with 
indie. Matt, i. 25, £609 ov eteke tou 
vLov. xiii, 33. Palaeph. iv. 2; with subj. 
aor. without dv. Matt. xiv. 22, £609 ov 
d'TToXva-ri rov^ oxXovs, and oft. ; also in 
Sept. Eccl. xii. 2, Jos, Ant. v. 1, 3. So 
£609 oToy, scil. xP^^o^i '^^dil iL'hen, until, 
either with indie, as John ix. 18, £609 
oTov E<pu)vricrav, et al, or with subj, Lu. 
xiii. 8, £. o. arKaxj/u}. 3) foil, by adv. of 
time, with or without tou. So £co9 tou 
vvv, until noiu. Matt, xxiv. 21. €co9 
arj/uLEpov, 2 Cor, iii. 15. So gener. with- 
out TOV, more usually in later writers, £609 
dpTL, until 7101V, Matt. xi. 12. £co9 TroTf ; 
until when ? i. e. how long ? xvii. 17. 
Mk. ix. 19. — II. of PLACE, as far as to, 
until, unto. 1) prop, in various construc- 
tions, e. gr. foil, by gen. of place, Matt.xi. 
23, £609 Tou ovpavov, ' as far as, up to 
heaven.' xxvi. 58, £6o9 t7;9 ax]Xri<5 tov 
dpX' Lu. ii. 15, £609 BrjB. iv. 29. Acts 
i. 8. xi. 22. xxvi. 11, £609 kuI eI? Td<s e^m 
7ro/\£i9, 'as far as and even unto foreign 
cities.' So with gen. of pers. as marking 



Z All 



168 



Z All 



a place, Lii. iv. 42. Foil, by adv. of place, 
as £cos dvui^ ' to the very brim,' John ii. 7. 
tws /caTw, 'to the very bottom,' Matt, 
xxvii. 51. £609 tew, 'as far as the interior.' 
Mk, xiv. 54. k'ws to^£, ' unto this place,' 
Lu. xxiii. 5 ; foil, by prep, and its case, 
e. gr. £0)$ ft? B. 'as far as unto Bethany, 
Lu. xxiv. 50. Diod. Sic. i. 27, £W9 £t5 

TOl/S aOt/CT7TOl'5 TOTTOUS. So £0)9 E^Ct) T779 

TToXficos, 'as far as to the outside of the 
city,' Acts xxi. 5. — iii. fig. foil, by gen. 
either of a term or limit^ marking extent. 
Matt. xxvi. 38, £W9 ^avd-rov. Lu. xxii. 
51, £aT£ £609 TovTov i ov of pcrs. in a like 
sense. Matt. xx. 8, £6oe tcov TrpcoToov. 
Dion. Hal. vi. 37, £609 kKyovoov. John 
viii. 9. Acts viii. 10. Rom. iii. 12, ovk 
'darrLV £0)9 hd^^ ' not so much as one.' 



z. 

later ^va-oinaL,) gener. to live, intrans. ; 
but employed in various shades of sense 
in N. T. as follows, 1. to live^ have life^ as 
said of physical life, or existence, as opp. 
to death, or non-existence, and implying 
always some duration. It is used, 1) 
gener. of human life, &c. Acts xvii. 28, kv 
avTio JwyUEi/, and xxii. 22. Rom. vii. 1, 
et al. So ^oh;t£s kol vEKpol^ Acts x. 42, 
et al. Sept. and Class. Also to Jt/^^, 
subst. life, Phil. i. 21, sq. 2 Cor. i. 8. Jos. 
Ant. ii. 3, 1, and Class. Of persons raised 
from the dead. Matt. ix. 18, apTi eteXev- 
Ti^arsv' aWa IXdcbv — /cat ^rJo-fTat, et al. 
Sept. in 2 Kings xiii. 21. Said likewise 
of persons restored to health from sick- 
ness, not to die^ i. e. by impi. to mend^ he 
well., John iv. 50, 6 i;Io9 crov J?/, and Sept. 
in 2 Kings viii. 8, sq. 2) spec, in the 
sense to eocist., absol. now and hereafter, to 
live for ever ; of human beings. Matt. xxii. 

32, OVK E<TTLV 6 9£69, 0£O9 I/£/CpO)I/, aWo. 

^covTcov. John xi. 25 ; of Jesus, John vi. 
57 ; of God, vi. 57, 6 ^uw IlaTrjp^ equiv. 
to 6 E-X^^ kv iavTo), V. 26 ; also, in 

an oath, by Hebr. Rom. xiv. 11, iyo), 
XiyEL ILvpLo^.^ ' I live, saith the Lord.' 
So Sept. Numb. xiv. 21, et al. Partic. 
Joii/, ever-living., eternal^ 6 0£O9 o ^oi^'. 
Matt. xvi. 16. Rom. ix. 26, et al. ; and as 
opp. to idols., which are dead, non-existing, 
Acts xiv. 15. 2 Cor. vi. 16. 1 Thess. i. 9, 
and Sept. 3) fig. of things., only in par- 
ticip. ^601/, ^6o(ra, ^601;, living., i. e. lively, 
active, and also enduring, as opp. to what 
is dead or inactive; likewise transient, e.gr. 
1 Pet. i. 3, £X7ri9 ^oicra, ' lively and endur- 
ing.' Rom. xii. 1, ^vcria X^oocra, 'enduring 
and constant,' opp. to the interrupted sacri- 
fice of slaughtered victims. Heb. iv. 12, 



^601/ o Xoycs Tov 0foD, ' is lively, active, 
and enduring.' 1 Pet. i. 23, X6yo<s X^vovto^ 
9£6?u, 'living, efficient, enduring;' and ii. 

4, >Li6o9 ^60i/, of Christ as the corner-stone 
of the Church, ' not inactive, but efficient 
of Christian?, v. 5. So v^cop Jwiy, living 
water, i. e. the water of running streams, 
opp. to that of stagnant waters, as pools or 
cisterns, John iv. 10. vii. 38. Rev. vii. 17, 
and Sept. in Gen. xxvi. 19, et al. By 
impl. and by Hebr. particip. ^wi^, life- 
giving., John vi. 51, 6 dpTo^ 6 Jcoi/, 'which 
imparts eternal life.' Acts vii. 38, Xoyia 
X^uiVTa. Heb. x. 20, 0009 ^wcra. And so 
sometimes in Sept. — II. to live., i. e. sus- 
tain life, to live on or hy any thing. Matt. 

iv. 4, OU/C ETT dpTtp jULOVU) X^VCTETai. 

1 Cor. ix. 14, and Class. ; as Demosth. i. 

309, 26; with Sid, Xen. Mem. iii. 3, 11 

III. to live in any way, to pass one's life in 
any manner, Lu. xv. 13, '^cov dawn-CD's. 
Acts xxvi. 5, E'^rjaa ^aoLaaTo^. Gal. ii. 
14, kduiKU)^ '^rju. 2 Tim. iii. 12, £uo-£/3o>9 
^jyz/. Tit. ii. 12, J. (rco0poi/w9, &c. Rom. 
vii. 9, E^(x)i/ x^P'^^ uofxov. Apocr. Jos. 
and Class. Lu. ii. 36, '^ncraaa ety] jULETa 
di>Sp6?. Hence the phrase X^rju tlvl., ev 
TLVL., Kaird TLva., to live to., in., according 
to any one., i. e. ' to be devoted to, to live 
conformably to the will, purpose, precepts, 
or example of any person or thing ;' e. gr. 
of a person., J. xco 0£6o, Lu. xx. 38. Rom. 
vi. 10. Gal. ii. 19. And so 1 Pet. iv. 6, 
\. KUTa^ Qeov TruEV/jLUTL, i. e. 'to live 
spiritually according to the will of God.*^ 
Also Gal. V. 25, J, irvEvp-aTL, 'to live^ 
under His influences.' 1 Pet. ii. 24, J. ttj 
SLKaLoavvrj. Rom. xiv. 7. 2 Cor. v. 15, 

5. iauTO), ' to live agreeably to one's own 
corrupt inclinations.' Demosth. p. 80, 26, 

^lXLtTTTM ^60y'T£9, Kul OV EUVTWV 

iraTpidL. Of a thing^ ^?7i/ kv df^apTLu., 
' to live under the dominion of sin,' Rom. 
vi. 2; kv tt'lo-tel., 'under the power of taith,' 
Gal.ii.20; kv koctixio., i. e. ' in conformity to 
the world,' Col. ii.' 20. iii. 7. So ^lian, 
V. H. iii. 13, ^. kv OLVco. . tcanrd adpKa 
Sjyi/, ' to live conformably to the flesh, '^ 
Rom. viii. 13. Jos. Ant. iv. 8, 44, /ult} 
KUTa T0U9 vojULov^ J' — ^7 ii^opl. to live 
and PROSPER, he blessed., \) gener. and 
prop. Rom. x. 5. Gal. iii. 12, 6 TroLnara^ 
avTa XficTETai, kv avTol^. 1 Thess. iii. 8, 
vvv ^6o/x,£i/, 'we live, feel ourselves happy.' 
So Sept. in Deut. viii. 1. 1 Sam. x. 24, al. 
and Demosth. 434. 2) metaph. to be 
exempt from death., temporal, Lev. xviii. 
5, or spiritual, ' to enjoy eternal life, and 
be admitted to the blessings and privileges 
of Christ's kingdom,' Lu. x. 28, tovto 
TTOLEL, Kai X^va-ri. John vi. 51. Rom. i. 
17. 1 Thess. V. 10, 'iva. dpa aiiv avTcp 
X/)(T(x>fx&v. 1 John iv. 9, iVa X,r]cyu)p.Ev dC 
avTov. Heb. xii. 9, kol X^naopiEv., for %vcl 
XfiG-oipiEv ai/Tou, et al. 



Z E 2 



169 



ZHT 



ZfCTTo?, 01/, adj. (^t'fo,) proj). hoiled., 
or boilmg^ Diosc. ^. uoco^). In N. "V. fer- 
vent in zeal, (like tlo irvEvixaTL ^fcot/rt?, 
Rom. xii. 11, and ^twj/ tiottv. Acts xviii. 
25,) as opp. to \bvxpo<3^ 'frigid, indifferent.' 

Z £ uy 0 5, £os, TO, {'^evyvvfXL,) prop, a 
?/oA« for joining together two beasts of 
draught, and sometimes a carriage or wain 
drawn by them ; but in N. T. the /jftzV 
of animals thus yoked together, Lu. xiv. 
19, vyy] (3o(joL> ijyooaaa irtuTe. Sept. 
1 Kings xix. 19. Is. V. 10. ^1. V. H. ix. 
25. Xen. Mem. ii. 4, 5; and gener. a pair, 
or couple, of any animals, as turtle-doves, 
Lu. ii. 24. Sept. Lev. v. 11. 

Z£u/CTi;pta, as, 77, (^£i//CT7;p, X^evyvv- 
yui,) a hand^ or fastening of any thing to 
another, Acts xxvii. 40, tccs ^. tmv iriida- 
\tct)i/, rudder-hands^ called by Eurip. Hel. 
a552, 5£uyXat, see my note. 

Zeo), f. ^scro), (Onomatop. like our 
hiss^) prop, of water, to boil, be boiling hot. 
In N. T. only fig. of the ardour of the 
affection, ' to be fervent,' Acts x\iii. 25. 
Rom. xii. 11, ^. too irvEVfxaTL. Anthol. 
Gr. iii. 169. v. 218, 219. 

Z^Xos, ou, 6, (fr. gs-to and the termin. 
«Xos, contr. to Xfi\o<s, as in /37jA.6s, &c. 
formed as ueXos, ij.v&\o9, TrufXos, &c.) 
prop, heat, produced by the action of fire 
or water. Hence it is applied to ever?/ 
kind of heat or fervour of the mind and 
affections; and so admits both of a good 
and a bad sense. I. in a good sense, 
ardour for a person, or a cause, and foil, 
by gen. of that for whom or -which it is 
felt, John ii. 17, 6 ^. tov olkov crov. 
Rom, x. 2, X/iXov Qeov 'iyovcxLv : by 
virkp with gen. 2 Cor. vii. 7 ; absol. 2 Cor. 
xi. 2, X,y]\u) v/ma^ Qsov '^vXcp, ' I am zeal- 
ous for you with a zeal proceeding from, 
i. e. inspired by, God.' Sept. and later 
Class. — II. in a bad sense, 1) JieaH-biirn- 
ing, envy. Acts xiii. 45. Rom.' xiii. 13. 

1 Cor. iii. 3. Ja. iii. 14. Plur. XfjXoL, 

2 Cor. xii. 20. Gal. v. 20, and later Class. 
2) anger, indignation. Acts v. 17. Heb. x. 
27, KUL TTvpo^ X^fj\o9, fieri/ luratJi. See 
Ps. xxi. 9. Mai. iv. 1, and Blomf. on 
iEschyl. Ag. 449. 

ZrjXo'o), f. wco), (J^Xos,) to be zealoiis 
toivards, i. e. for or against, any person or 
thing, trans. I. gener. for a person or 
thing, and usually in a good sense, e. gr. 
of things, to desire ardentlii, be eager for, 
1 Cor. xii. 31, ^tjXoute c& to. yapicrfxaTa 
T. K. and xiv. 1, 39. Sept. and Class, 
e. gr. Demosth. p. 500, 2, ^. ap^nrriv : of 
persons, in a good sense, to hear an ardent 
affection for, to love. Gal. iv. 18. Sept. in 
2^Sam. xxi. 2. Pro v. xxiv. 1. Soph. Aj. 
552, and Elect. 1027. In a had sense, to 
make a sJmv of zeal or affection for any 



one, in order to gain him as a follower. 
Gal. iv. 17. — II. AGAINST a person, to he 
jealous of, to envy^ Acts vii. 9, j. tov 
'Icocriicj)^ and xvii. 5. Ja. iv. 2, (jiuvev&Ts 
Kai ^?]/\oDt£, ' ye have heart-burnings 
even to meditate the murder of one 
anotlicr.' 

Z?}\C0T7;9, OV, 6, (^1]\o'w,) 1) 0726 

zealous for, eagerly desirous of any thing, 

1 Cor. xiv. 12, X^1]\o}TUL eCTTE TTVaV/ULa- 

Tcov. Tit. ii. 14, and later Class. So also, 
in a bad sense, of zealots for the ancient 
Jewish law, Acts xxi. 20. 

Zi]jXLa, as, 77, Schl. after Spanheim 
supposes the primary sense of the term to 
be tlie imdct or penalty for any crime, 
whether in person or purse. But though 
such be a sense frequent in the best 
writers, even the early ones, — that is, I 
apprehend, the primary one, which is laid 
down by him as secondary, — namely, 
damage, or injury, loss, as opposed to gain 
or advantage. Now this arises naturally 
out of the other, inasmuch as, by a meto- 
nymy of antecedent for consequent, pecu- 
niary penalty is a payment, to make up 
the damage occasioned or injury inflicted 
by a person. A sense of the word found 
at Acts xxvii. 10, & 21, KEpSfjcraL Ttjv 
X^rifxiav, ' this damage.' In Phil. iii. 7, 
n-avTa ^jyiiaai, dia tov XptCTTOi/, ^rj- 
jULiav, the term signifies, as opp. to Ktpdj], 
li'hat occasions loss, and in the next verse, 
tcJiat is injiirioiis, mere jiooca. So Test. 
XII. Patr. p. 651, Jrj^m 7"; airocikELa. Vrith 
the phrase X^iifxiav iiysladaL, ' to count as 
loss,' comp. a similar one, Xen. de Vect. 
iv. 5, ^i]fjLLav XoyiX^EordaL, and /cc'poos vy. 
Thuc. ii. 44, where see my note. 

Z7] fjLLo (JO, f. (joaco, {X^i]/uLLa,) to occasion 
loss to any o?ie, prop, with double accus. 
In N. T. only pass, or mid. to suffer loss or 
damage, 1 Cor. iii. 15. 2 Cor. \ni. 9. 
Ph. iii. 8, TO. nravTa eX,tnuiL(hdi]v, ' I have 
suffered the loss of all things.' Class. 
Aor. 1. pass. £^7j/xta)07;f, in mid. sigiiif. to 
bring loss upon oneself, i. e. to lose, n-rjv 
ciuTov, Matt. xvi. 26, kavrov, Lu, 

ix. 25. 

ZrjTEco, f. r7<T6o, to seeJc, trans. L prop. 
to seek after, look for, strive to find, find 
Old, or know, 1) gener. e. gr. absol. in the 
proverbial phrase. Matt. vii. 7, 8, ^7]t£I'T£, 
Kal EvpnuETE : foil, by acc. of pers. Matt, 
ii. 13, X^r]TElv TO TraLdiov. Mk. iii. 32. 
Lu. ii. 45, et al. Sept. and Class. So in 
the phrase formed on Hebr. X^}]teTv tov 
Qeov, i. e. ' to turn to God in humble and 
heartv obedience,' & X^titelv tov Kvpiov, 
Rom.' x. 20. Acts xvii. 27. Foil, by acc. 
of thing, prop. ' something lost,' Matt, 
xviii. 12, X^r]TELV to TvXavuyjxEvov. Lu. ii. 
45, and xix. 10, with acc. impl. xv. 8, 
gener. as an object of desire and endea-- 



Z HT 



170 



vour, Matt. xii. 43, avdiravcnv, xxvi. 59, 
xlrevSofiapTvpLav. Rev. ix. 6, toi/ ^dva- 
Tov: or of striving^ as to buy, fxapyapi- 
T-as, Matt. xiii. 45. Theophr. Char. 23. 
Xen. Cyr. ii. 2, 26. Hence from the 
Hebr. X^r]TEXv tiiv \lfv^riv tlvo^^ ' to seek 
the life of any one,' i. e. to endeavour to 
kill him, Matt. ii. 20, and often in Sept. 
Note the construction grjTErzy ttw?, 'to seek 
Jiow to do any thing,' Mk. xi. 18. 2) to seek 
what was not before lost, in the sense to 
strive after ^ try to gain any thing. Matt. vi. 
33, ^. T^v (SaariXsLav rrov Oaou. Lu. xii. 
29, /nr] jijTEtTE Tt c})dyr]Ts. John v. 44, 
et al. Sept. and Class. So gener. to 
endeavour^ strive; foil, by iva and subj. 

1 Cor. xiv. 12 ; by infin. aor. Matt. xxi. 
46, ^. avTov KpaTrjorai, Lu. v. 18, et al. 
or infin. pres. Lu. vi. 19. Gal. i. 10 ; infin. 
impl. John v. 30, ou ^t]Tw to ^iXr^jULa to 
k/jLov, scil. ttoleIv. Sept. and Class. 3) by 
impl. to desire, ivisJi, foil, by infin. aor. 
Matt. xii. 46, ^. aurw XaXrjaaL, Lu. ix. 
9, k'QnTEL i^ELv avrov. xi. 54. John vii. 
4 ; with acc. John i. 38. iv. 27, tl Ji^rfts ; 

2 Cor. xii. 14, ou ^rjTw -ra v/ulcov. 1 Cor. 
\'ii. 27, & Class. — II. metaph. to seek for, 
require, demand, expect, with acc. of thing, 
1 Cor. i. 22, ao(pLav '^t]T0vcrLv. 2 Cor. xiii. 
3. Heb. viii. 7 ; foil, by irapd tlvo9, Mk. 
viii. 11, ^. Trap' avTov a-rjiuL&Tov, Lu. xi. 
16 ; by Ev TLVi, 1 Cor. iv. 2 ; with accus. 
of pers. John iv. 23. — III. by impl. to in- 
quire, ask ; foil, by ivEpl and gen. John 
xvi. 19, TT&pl TovTov ^TjTglTE. And SO 
in Class. 

Z77T?7/xa, aT09, to, (^r^TEco,) prop. 

something sought or inquired about, an 
object of search; also fig. an object of 
research, a question. Acts xv. 2. xviii. 15. 

Z7?Ttj(rt§, £60?, 77, (^t]T£w,) prop, thc 
act of seeking, Thuc. viii. 57, or the search 
for any thing lost or wanting, Eurip. Cycl. 
14. Thuc. i. 20. vi. 53; also, fig. the pro- 
cess of inquiry concerning it, discussion, 
debate, Plut. Coriol. Xjiry]<yLv ETroLvo-avTo 
Tov Trpay/xttTos. And so John iii. 25, 
ly&uETo t,ri'rt]crL<s. Acts xxv. 20, £t§ ti]u 
iTEpl TovToov X^vTt^arLV, and so oft. in the 
Philosophers, espec. Plato. In 1 Tim.i. 4. 
vi. 4. 2 Tim. ii. 23, it means a question, or 
topic of discussion, as often in Plato. 

ZiC^dvLov, ov, TO, prop, a general name 
for weeds among grain, like our cockle, 
darnel, Sec, but in N. T. a weed common 
in Palestine, which infests fields of grain, 
and resembles wheat, but is worthless. 
Matt. xiii. 25, sqq. 

Zo^os, ov, 6, darkness, thick obscurity, 
Hom. Od. XX. 353 ; espec. as said of the 
infernal regions, Hom. Od. xi. 57. II. xx. 
191, & xxi. 56. So in N. T. of the dark- 
ness of Tartarus, or Gehenna, 2 Pet. ii. 4, 
(TEipal^ X^Scpov TapTapMcra^, ' thrusting 



them down to Tartarus, and consigning 
them to chains of darkness,' i. e. where 
darkness encompasses them like chains, 
and holds them fast. So Wisd. xvii. 17, 
of the wicked, aXvcEi aKOTovs EdEdrjcrav. 
Luc. Contemp. 1, Trapadov^ tw X^6(p(jo, 
'infernal darkness.' Intens. 6 J. tou ctko- 
T0U9, 'thickest darkness,' 2 Pet. ii. 17. 
Jude 13. 

Zuyo9, ov, 6, (5£uyyujUt,)prop. a ?/ofe, 
so called as coupling two things together, 
e.gr. draught cattle. In N.T. only used fig. 
I. of a yoke, either as an emblem of servi- 
tude, 1 Tim. vi. 1, and Class. ; or, as de- 
noting moral bondage, e. gr. of the Mosaic 
Law, Acts XV. 10. Gal. v. 1. Hence, by 
antith. the precepts of Christ, Matt. xi. 
29. And so Lucian says of necessity, 
that it puts (3apvv kut avyiva ^uyoi/ 
-hfxiv, — II. from its resemblance thereto, 
the beam of a balance which unites the 
two scales ; hence, by synecd. a pair of 
scales, Rev. vi. 5, 'iyoiiv X^vyov iv Ttj X^^P^ 
avTov. Sept. and Class. 

TiVjULT}, rjs, f], (^uo), cogn. with ^eco, 
ferveo,) fermentum (for fervimentum), id 
quod ferveat, Zea-ye^z, Matt. xiii. 33. Hence, 
as leaven causes the dough to ferment and 
turn sour, it is said proverb. Gal. v. 9, 
jULLKpd ^Uiutj bXoy TO (pvpafxa X^vfxol, i. e. 
' a few bad men corrupt a multitude.' 
Also fig. for corruptness of heart, life, &c. 
Matt. xvi. 6. Mk. viii. 15. Lu. xii. 1. 
1 Cor. V. 7, sq. . , 

Z u ^ o o), f. wo-o), ( ^u/xi?, ) to leaven, make 
to ferment, trans. Matt. xiii. 33. Lu. xiii. 
21. 1 Cor. V. 6. Gal. v. 9. 

2tU3y pi(x}, f. ri(T(i), (^wos for a-wo^, 
dypEvo),) prop, to take alive, Hom. II. vi. 
46. Hdot. i. 86 ; or to take prisoner^ Thuc. 
vii. 23, sq. But the word seems to have 
been by the later Greek writers used of 
catching or taking game, as beasts, birds, 
or fishes in a net or snare; as we may 
infer from the phrase, kv pro's 6 X^myp-i]- 
tlk6<s, for ' a fishing-net ;' and X>^ypE'iov^ 
' an aviary.' In N. T. the word only oc- 
curs twice, 1 ) in Lu. v. 10, of Peter, diro 
TOV vvv dvdpcoTrovs Ecry X^wypoov, where 
the latter sense is alluded to, q. d. ' hence- 
forth thou shalt catch, i.e. win over to 
the truth and hold fast, 77ien ;' as applied 
spiritually to the taking or catching of 
men by the preaching of the Gospel; 
terms of hunting and fishing being by the 
ancients often used of those who attach, 
men to themselves. 2) in 2 Tim. ii. 26, 
of sinners, kX^ayypmxivoL vir avTov (the 
Devil), where the allusion (as appears fr. 
the next words, £15 to ekelvov ^iXrifxa) is 
to the former sense, i.e. of taking and hold- 
ing captive ; and therefore the meaning is 
not, as the recent Commentators explain, 
ensnared or seduced, but held captive. 



Z I I 

ZwT/, 775, 77, I. GEXER. as said 

of physical lite or existence, opp. to death, 
or non-existence, 1) prop, and gencr. of 
human life, &c. Lu. xvi. 25. Acts xvii. 25, 
Bihov's irdai ^o)?/!/. Heb. vii. 3. Ja. iv. 14, 
and Sept. and Class. ; also of life after 
rising from the dead, only of Christ, Roni. 
V. 10. 2 Cor. iv. 10 ; fig. of the Jewish 
people, Rom. xi. 15, wh. see my note. 2) in 
the sense of existence^ absol. & withont end, 
Heb. vii. IG, ^wj/ a/caraXuTOS. So to ^v- 
Xoi/T^§^6o;'}§, 'which preserves from death,' 
Rev. ii. 7. to Howp Ti;§ ^6077s,xxi. 6. b ap- 
Tos T7/S ^wT/s, John vi. 35. Meton. of God 
and his Son Jesus Christ, life^ i. e. source 
of life, John i. 4. — II. life, i.e. manner of 
life^ conduct^ Rom. vi. 4, iv kulvot^tl 

^6077? TTSp. Eph. iv. 18, T77§ X.HO^'S TOV 

Seoy, ' a godly life.' — III. life, i. e. a 
hapT^j life Jiappi?iess^ 1) gener. Lu.xii. 15. 
John vi. 51, virep Trj£ tou Kocrfxov '^cot}?. 
2 Cor. ii. 16, Scrfxii ^60)7?, ' salutary.' Acts 
ii. 28, 68ov<3 5^r7s, ' life and happiness.' 
1 Pet. iii. 10, t^ooi]v ayaizav. 2) spec, in 
the Evangelical sense, of eternal life, 
that life of bliss in the kingdom of God, 
which awaits the true followers of Christ, 
after the resurrection. So \. aiwvio^, 
Matt. xix. 16, al. 77 ovtw^ J. 1 Tim. vi. 
19 ; absol. Matt. vii. 14, rj gw?;. Acts v. 20, 
TO. pvfxaTa TTjs ^wrjs TauT7]5, i. e. ' the 
doctrine of eternal life.' Rom. v. 17, et al. 
saepe. So 6 o-Ti<pavo? tPi? ^^^^^7^5 ' the re- 
ward of eternal life,' Ja. i, 12. x<^P^^ ^^^7^i 
I Pet. iii. 7. Meton. for the author or giver 
of eternal life, John xi. 25; the cause 
thereof, John v. 39. 

Za>]/77, T^s, 77, {X,(x>vvv{XL^) prop, a helt or 
girdle^ such as was worn by both sexes, 
among the ancients, Gr. and Lat., espec. 
the Orientals, because of their long flowing 
vestments, Matt. iii. 4. As, however, this 
girdle was often holloiv, it served as cc 
purse to hold money, Mk. vi. 8, by a cus- 
tom still subsisting in the East. 

Zwi/i/u/it, or Tjcovvv (JO, f. ^coca), to 
gird, or bind with a girdle, put on a girdle, 
John xxi. 18. Sept. and Class. 

Zwoyoi/EO), f. 77crco, (^woyovo?, from 
^coos and obsol. yivco,) prop, to bring 
foiik olive, and pass, to he horn cdive, as in 
the later Class. In N. T. to preserve alive, 
Lu. xvii. 33. Acts vii. 19. Sept. and 
Fathers, 

Taioov, ov, to, prop. neut. of adj. ^wos, 

meaning, a living thing, i, e. an animcd, 
Heb. xiii. 11. 2 Pet. ii, 12. Sept, & Class. 
Symb. Rev. iv. 6, and often in that book. 

ZwOTTOtiw, f. 770-0), (^6o6§, TTOLiiO,) 

prop, and in Class, to make alive, i, e, en- 
gender; also, to vivify, or reanimate, by 
restoring lost animation. In N. T. 1) 
prop, to make alive, endue luith life, 1 Tim. 

vi. 13, TOU QeOV TOV ^COOTT. TO. TTCLVTa. 



H 

Sept. Act. Thom. 10, 6 Gaos tov Kocrfxov 
X^cooTTOLcou. Of the dead, to recall to life, 
reanimate, John v. 21. Rom. iv. 17. viii. 
11, 1 Cor. XV. 22. 1 Pet, iii. 18. Of seeds, 
to quicken, like reaniniation in animals, 

1 Cor. XV, 36, O (TTTEiptL^ ov ^WO-TTOiE tTat. 

2) metaph, and by irapl, to make alive, 
cause to he alive, happi/ for ever in Chi ist's 
kingdom, John vi, 63, to irvivixd aaTi 
TO XcoonroLOvv. 1 Cor. xv. 45, eh Trvsvfxa 
X^u}07roLovv. 2 Cor. iii, 6, to ge irvivfxa 
X^uiOTTOLsl. Gal. iii. 21, 6 dvvdfxEVO's '^coo- 
TToujaraL. Sept. and Fathers. 

H. 

"H, a particle, disjunct., interrog., and 
comparat. I. DISJL^XT, oaU, or, 1) ge- 
ner. Matt. V. 17, TOV vofj-ov 7) TOu§ Trp. 
2) 77 — 7'), repeated, ezY/^er — or. 3Iatt.vi.24, 
7j TOU Eva fJLLcrricrEL — 77 gyos avdi^ETUL. — 
II. INTERROG., where, however, the pri- 
mary force is strictly retained, or icJietJier, 
if pet-haps, 1) prop, indirect, in the lat- 
ter clause of a double interrog., after tto- 
TEpov, ichether — or, Jolmvii. r7,7^'a)0-HTai 

'TTOTEOOV EK TOU QeOV ECTTLV., t) lytb UTt' 

EfxavTov XaXco. So gener. where TroTEnou 
or something eqiiiv. is implied, Matt. ix. 5. 

2) gener. and in a direct question, where 
the interrogation implies a negation of 
something preceding, Matt. vii. 9, f/ tl? 
EdTLv £^ vfxoov ai^OpwTTos; XX. 15, Rom. 
iii. 29, — HI. COMPARAT. than ; e. gT. 1) 
after comparatives, and words implying 
comparison, Matt. x. 15, dvEKTOTEpoi/ — 77 
tt; 7ro'/\£i EKELvy. Jehniv. 1. jUidWov rj, 
more than, rather than, iii. 19. irplv ri, 
sooner than, before. Matt. i. 18. So after 
^iXto, 1 Cor. xiv. 19. 2) after d\\o<s, 
ETEpo9, and the like, Acts xvii, 21, Eh 
ovoku ETEpov EuKaipovv 77 XiyELV, &c. ; 
with d\\o<s, &c. impl. John xiii. 10, 6 
XeXov/ulevu^ ov XpELav [aXA.7}i;] 'iy^Ei, rj 
Tov-s iroca? vixp-. Acts xxiv. 20, 21, tl dSi- 
Ki]fxa [dXXo] rj iVEpl p.Ld^ TavTi]<s (poovij^. 

3) after the positive, where it may be ren- 
dered rather than, more than, judXXov rj, 
so that the positive with 7) is equiv. to the 
compar. Matt, x\'iii. 8, KaXov aoi ecttiv 

ELCTEXdElv £[§ T^IV "^CoijV XCoXoU 7? KvXXoV, 

77 Sua x^tpas — exovtu, (3Xi]dr]vaL Ei<s to 
TTvp TO aioov. Lu, xvii. 2. xviii. 14, — lY. 
tcith other jxirticles ; viz. \) dXX f], unless, 
except. 2) 77 kul, or cdso, or even, Lu, 
xviii. 11, ovK el/ulI IharirEp oi Xolttol — 7? 
Kal 605 ouTOs : interrog. xi, 11. 3) 777r£p, 
than perhaps, than indeed, after /udXXou, 
J ohn xii. 43. 4) 77toi =177, or, but stronger ; 
in N. T. only 77TOi — 77, ichether hideed-^r, 
Rom. vi. 16. 

"^H, a particle of aiBrmation, tridy, as- 
suredly, certainly ; in N. T. only in the 
connection ^ ixijv, the usual intensive form 
12 



171 



t 



HTE 172 H0O 



of oaths, most certainly^ most surely^ Heb. 
^^. 14. 

Hy £yUoi/£ua), f. €U(rw, (jjyg/x.aji',) 
prop, to go first, Horn. Od. iii. 306. Hence, 
to lead or point out the ^vay, Horn. Od. 
xxiv. 225. And hence, in the later ^vriters, 
to lead an army, also, to command or 
govern men, Hdot. vii. 99; foil, by gen. 
Thuc. iii. 61. In N. T. to he governor of 
a Roman province, Lii. ii. 2. iii. 1. 

Ejiovia, a?, 77, (777£/xa)i/,) reign, 
Lii. iii. 1. In Class, as Hdot. vii. 2. 
Thuc. iv. 91, it means chief command, do- 
Timiion. 

'Hy £/>tci)i/, oi/os, 6, {rjyiojxai,^ prop, a 
guide, one who goes first and directs the 
■way, Horn. Od.xi. 505. Hdot. v. 14, also, 
a chief ov leader, whether military (as oft. 
in Class. ) or civil. So Matt. ii. 6, kv tois 
vys/uLocTLv 'louda, 'heads of families,' (see 
my note). And so in Sept. and Joseph. 
Hence, also, a political chief, as Thuc. i. 4, 
also a governor of a Roman province, 
whether proconsul, legate, or procurator, 
as often in later Class. Hence in N. T. 
it is used 1 ) gener. of a proconsid, legate, 
&c. Matt. X. 18. 2) spec, of the procu- 
rator of Judea, Matt, xxvii. 2. Acts xxiii. 
24. xxvi. 30. The usual and more exact 
term is kirLTpoiro's. But ijy. occurs in 
Hdian. iv. 6, 8. 

'Hy£o/xat, f. ija-o/naL, depon. mid. 
(ayct),) prop, and prim, to go first, lead the 
way, Hom. Od. x. 263. Joseph. Ant. vi. 
5, 2 ; then, to he a leader or chief, whether 
in war, or in civil government, Diod. Sic. 
i. 4, or in the management of affairs in 
general. Hence in N. T. I. prop, to he 
leader in any business, Acts xiv. 12, 6 
vyo6fjLEuo£ Tov \6yov, 'chief speaker.' 
Jambl. de Myst. init. ^£os 6 tJ)!/ Xoycou 
i)y£fjL(hv 6 'E. Said gener. of those who 
have authonty, Lu. xxii. 26. Acts xv. 22 ; 
of officers in the churches, Heb. xiii. 7. 
xiii. 24 ; of a chief magistrate, as Joseph 
in Eg}^t, Acts vii. 10 ; of the Messiah, as 
Ruler, Matt. ii. 6, and often in Sept. — 
II. by a peculiar idiom, yyoviuaL and perf. 
77y7],uat signif. fig. (like the Latin ducere) 
' to lead out before the mind,' i. e. to vieiv, 
regard as being so or so, to esteem, count, 
reckon ; said of things, with acc. 2 Pet. 
iii. 9, cos TLvk^ (SpaSvTTjTa rjyovvTaL : 
with acc. and infin. Phil. iii. 8, vyoviuLaL 
nrdvTa \i]fxiav zlvai : with acc. and sTvaL 
impl. 2 Cor. ix. 5, avayKolov r]yri<rdfx7}u 
'TrapaKoXka-ai. Phil. ii. 25. 2 Pet. i. 13. Ja. 
i, 2 ; with double acc. and elvai impl. to 
thijik to be such and such, to esteem as any 
thing, Phil. iii. 7, Tavra rjyt]ixaL X^iT/nLai'. 
Sept. and Class. So, of persons, to hold 
or esteem one as such or such ; M'ith double 
acc. and slvai impl. Acts xxvi. 2, tiyiifJ^ai 
ifiavTov fxaKapLov, Phil. ii. 3, yu?j cos 



kx^pov, 2 Thess. iii. 15. Sept. & Class. ; 
with acc. and adv. 1 Thess. v. 13, vy^lcrdai 
avTov's VTrepsKTrEpLcraov kv dydiry, 'to 
regard them as very highly desei'ving of 
love.' 

*Ho£ws, adv. {i]^v9,)Y\i. siceetly^ i.e. 
' with pleasure,' Mk. vi. 20. xii. 37. 

"'Hdt], adv. noiv, eveii noio, already ; 
often used with particles of time, and ap- 
plied to time past, pres., and fut. I. said 
in reference to time present and past. Matt, 
iii. 10, 1]^)] ok Kal rj d^ivi] (jam vero) 
KeiTai, 'is being laid.' Lu. iii. 9. And so 
Hom. II. i. 260, not] ttote (hfiiXijara, and 
with vvv, 1 John iv. 3, vuv £<ttlu v^V-, ' i& 
now already [in the world].' Plato Apol. 
Socr. 33, i'ldi] copa [karTLv] aTrikvaL, Thuc. 
ii. 35, 2, 7;mj Kal dTTLcrTovaiv : A^ith^xis^, 
marking the action as completed. Matt. v. 
28, n^i] kfjLOLX^vaev avTvu. Lu. vii. 6. 
John iii. 18. iv. 35, et al. Synes. ap. Steph. 
Thes. 7]87] Sk Kal toTs aWois to 7r£,o. r)i/. 
So with IT ark, Phil. iv. 10, ?ioiv at length. 
Dion. Hal. Ant. vii. 51. — II. by impl. of 
the immediate future, noiv, presently, soon, 

Rom. i. 10, fiTTWS 7rOT£ iXJOOltidrj- 

(TOfxaL, ' if perhaps I may ere long be pros- 
pered.' And sometimes in Class., espec. 
Dion. Hal. 

"H^tcra, adv. (/y^us,) prop, most 
sii-eetly, zcith high relish, as said of eating 
and drinking ; in N. T. fig. most gladly, 
2 Cor. xii. 9, 15, and so in Xen. Mem. ii. 
7, 10. 

'HSovi], ^s, 77, {ijSojiiaL, as dixiTEyovri 
fr. afxiriyofxai, dyyovt] fr. ayxpfxaL, &c. ) 
prop, 'that by which we are pleased,' jo/ea- 
sure, enjoyment, of every kind, whether of 
the mind or of the senses, and both in a 
good and a bad sense. In N. T. only in 
the latter acceptation, as said either of 
sensual pleasure, or of that which closely 
resembles it, the carnal gratification 
of luxury, in dress, sights, &c. Lu. viii. 
14, viro Tj^ovuiv TOV (3lov, where the ex- 
pression is equiv. to IttiOu/x. in the passage 
of Mark. Tit. iii. 3, kTrLQvfXLai's Kal vSo- 
vaX's, ' sensual lusts.' 2 Pet. ii. 13, vdovijv 
rjy. ' regarding it as a matter of gratifica- 
tion.' In Ja. iv. 1, by £/c twu ijSovtou 
vfXLov, &c. are meant not only sensual lusts, 
the desire of sensual pleasure, but also the 
carnal passions of our corrupt nature. See 
my note there. 

^^^{) DC fxcv, ov, TO, (neut. of adj. 
r]Ovo(TiJLo<s, sv^eet-scented,) spearmint, Matt, 
xxiii. 23. Lu. xi. 42, strewed by the Jews 
on the floors of their houses or synagogues. 

H60S, £os, TO, (Ion. for £0os, fr. £^0- 
/xai,) prop, 'the accustomed seat, haunt, 
or abode' of animals or men, as often in 
Homer, Hesiod, and tidot. ; or fig. accus- 
tomed action, habit, behaviour, conduct; 



HKll 



173 



H ME 



and in the plnr. morals^ Ildot. ii. 35. 
Thuc. vi. 18. Menand. in a passage quoted 
at 1 Cor. XV. 33. 

"Hk-w, (f. 7)^(0, later aor. 1. to 
come^ i. e. to have come, to be Jicrc^ in the 
sense of pret. Gen. of pcrs. foil, hy cltto 
with gen. of place whence, Matt. viii. 11, 
aTTo civaToXiov rj^ovcn. Mk. viii. 3 ; by 
Ik:, John iv. 47 ; and in the sense of to 
come fotih^ arise^ Rom. xi. '26 ; hy tt/oos 
with acc. of pers. Acts xxviii. "23, riKov 
TTpo^ avrov. Sept. and Class. Fig. John 
v\. 37 ; with iiri rti/a, to come upon one, 
in a hostile sense, Rev. iii. 3. Sept. and 
Class, absol. Matt. xxiv. 50, 77^£t b kv- 
pio<s Tov douXov sKeLvou. Lu. xii. 46. xv. 
*27. John viii. 42, sk tov Qeov k^7]/\dov 
Kai 7]Ku), for l^E\d(hv Yikco. Heb. x. 7, 9. 
Sept. and Class. Fig. of things^ e. gr. of 
time, John ii. 4, 77 topa i'ik&l. Lu. xiiL 35. 
2 Pet. iii. 10 ; of the end or consumma- 
tion of any thing. Matt. xxiv. 14 ; of evils. 
Rev. xviii. 8. So foil, by kiri tlvu^ to 
come upon any one, i. e. as said of evil 
times^ Lu. xix. 43 ; of guilt and its punish- 
ment, to be lead upon, Matt, xxiii. 36. 

'HXt/c ta, as, 77, [v^i^^ adult,) adidt- 
ness, maturity of life in mind, person, &c. 
1) age^ i. e. full age for any purpose, John 
ix. 21, rikiKiav fi'x^^- i^- ^'2- Heb. 

xi. 11. Jos. and Class. 2) stature, size, Ty 
i]XiKLa fiLKpo?, Matt. vi. 27. Lu. xii. 25. 
Sept. and Class. Fig. Eph. iv. 13, eU fxi- 
Tpov ijXiKia^. 

'HXiK'os, ?7, ov, [riXi^,) corr. pron. like 
Lat. quantus, hoiu great, Col. ii. 1. Ja. i. 
5. Jos. and Class. 

"HXios, ov, 6, prop, the sun, {sXi^ or 
£\o§, beajn of light ; whence adj. aiXio^, 
a for cifxa, & eXlo<5 splendidus, and subst. 
splendidus, by an ellip. of orbis, par excel- 
lence, as a designation of the sun. From 
a.iXLo<s came the Doric aXio? and the 
common ??\io§, not only the orb or sphere 
of the sun, but the light thence proceed- 
ing. So Mimnerm. bcrov t' iiri yTjv 
KLdvaTUL riiXio^ : and Clem. Al. cited by 
Suicer, says, 'God hath poured forth, 
£^£^££1;, the sun, the father of light also 
the heed therebv produced, Theocr. Id. x. 
56, Iv dXiw.) Thus in N. T. it is 1) for 
the sun, meaning the orb ; 2) for the 
light of day, Acts xiii. 11, (SXIttcov tov 
r,X^ what Milton, Sams. Ag. 82, beautifully 
expresses by ' total eclipse to whom the 
sun is dark.' 3) the heat of the sun. Rev. 
vii. 16, ovdk fXT] irLcri eir^ avTOV's 6 iiXlo9, 
or rather the sun-stroke thence resulting, 
as in Polysen. viii. 10, 2, and often in the 
plur. with reference to the rays of the sun, 
as ^1. V. H. xiii. 1, TrecpoivLKTo viro tcou 
vXScov avTTj TO TrpocTODTTov, and Thuc. 
^^ii. 87, 1, where see my note. This is 
placed beyond doubt by a passage of Is. 



xlix. 10, on which the expression in Rev. 
was doubtless formed : ob TreivdcrovcrLV, 
ovdk dLxj/varovaiv' ovdk Trara^ft auTOUS 
6 Kavcrtxjv, ovdk 6 iiXia, where 6 ryXios is 
explanatory of 6 Kavawv. 

'^U.Xo^, ov, 6, (from eXo), to drive, as 
our peg fr. Trtjyyuto, and nail fr. A.-S. 
na^glian, to fix,) a nail, John xx. 25. Sept. 
and Class. 

'Hju ipa, as, 7/, prop. fem. of adj. 
f)os, hlandiis, jiicundiis. Thus it lit. signif. 
the pleasant time,TiD.me\y,'hfxtpa,{of which 
it is said, Eccles, xi. 7, yXvKv to (pws, 
Kai dyaddv T0T9 6(pdaXfxol^ tov (SXiirEiv 
TOV vXlov^ as opp. to the time of 7iight, which 
suggests the contrary idea, being an em- 
blem of sorrow, (see Is. xxi. 12, and comp. 
Rev. xxi. 25,) day-time, meaning either 
the natural day, or the time from one sun- 
rise to the next, or the artificial, from sun- 
rise to sun-set. In N. T. the word is used 
in two leading senses, — day and time. I. 
DAY, i. e. I. the artificial day, the time 
from one sun-rise or sun-set to the next, 
equiv. to wx^vimspov, 1) gener. Matt. vi. 
34, dpK&Tov TT) vix. rj KUKLu avT?]^. John 
xi. 9, lopai T77S ?j/ifpas, Ja. v. 5, cos kv 
vjuipa (T(payrj<5. So with gen. of a fes- 
tival, &c. 77 vp.ipa T(jov (Ta^^CLTcov, or 
TOV (xa^jSaTov, ' the sabbath-dav,' Lu. iv. 
16. John xix. 31. Sept. Jer, xvii. 24, 27. 
77/x. Tcou dX^vjULMv, ' day or days of unlea- 
vened bread,' the passover, Acts xii. 3. xx. 
6. 77 vfxipa TT/s ir&VTr\KocrTrj<s, day of pen- 
tecost. Acts ii. 1. xx. 16. In specifications 
of time, viz. in the genitive, of time ichen, 

i. e. indefinite, e. gr. tt^s r]iJLspa£,in a day, 
' every day,' Lu. x\ii. 4. Xen. An. i. 7, 
18. In the dative, of time zvhen, i. e. de- 
finite, Matt. xvi. 21, T77 TpLTy npiipa 
iyepdTjvai. Mk. ix. 31. Lu. ix. 22. John 

ii. 1. By Hebr. 2 Cor. iv. 16, npiipa kuI 
iifxipa, day by day, ' every day, daily.' 
Sept. v/jiEpav AcaO' vfxLpav. In the acc. 
of time hoiD long, implying duration, Matt. 
XX. 6, oXi]v Ti)v vjuiipav dpyoi. xxviii. 20, 
Trdcras Tas rj/jLapa?, i. e. alicays. Mk. i. 
13, John i. 40, et al. So Matt. xx. 2, 
cru/x^coi/jjcras — ek Stjuapiov ti)v nfxipav, 
for a denarius per day. Acts v. 42, irdcrdv 
TE ijfjLEpav, every day, i. e. the whole 
time. 2 Pet. ii. 8, ripipav e^ vfxipa^. In 
these and similar specifications of time, 
rijULfpa is often constr. with a prep. viz. in 
gen. after aTro, d^pi, did, k'cos, irpo : in dat. 
after kv : in acc. after £ts, IttI, kutu, /ule- 
Td, Trpos : for which see those prepositions 
respectively. 2) spec, vpipa tov Kvpiov, 
the day of the Lord, when the Saviour 
will return to judge the world, and fully 
establish his kingdom, 1 Cor. i. 5, 8. 
2 Cor. i. 14. 1 Thess. v. 2, 4. 2 Pet. iii. 10. 
al. Lu. xvii. 24, o Tlos tov dvdp. kv Ty 
rjfxipa avTov. Comp. ver. 30, 77 -fj/iiEpq. 6 



H ME 



174 



H2 Y 



TIo9 Tou avdpooTrov dTrOKaXvTTTETaL. 
absol. 1 Cor. iii. 13. So iKeii/r} h v/mtpa, 
that day, the great day of judgment, Matt, 
vii. 22. Mk. xiii. 32. 2 Thess. i. 10. AVith 
a gen. of what is then to take place, e. gr. 
rj/ULtpa KpL(T£co<s, Matt. X, 15. xi. 22. rifj.. 
opyri's, Rom. ii. 5. Rev. vi. 17. v.fx. diro- 
/\uTpwcr£aj§, Epli. iv. 30. 77 Vfxipa too 
Qauv, 'the day of God,' by whose autho- 
rity Christ sits as judge, 2 Pet. iii. 12. — 11. 
day, daylight, from sunrise to sunset, e. gr. 
as opp. to vv^, as in the gen. of time ivlien, 
ilfxipa^ Kal vvkto^ or vvkt6<s kul vfxlpa^, 
by day and by nigld, Lu. xviii. 7. Mk. v. 
5. Acts ix. 24, al. Xen. Cyr. ii. 3, 23 ; or 
in acc. of time how long, Matt, iv. 2. So 
viKTa Kal vixipav, nigld and day, i. e. 
continually, Mk. iv. 27. Lu. ii, 37. Acts 
XX. 31, al. Xen. An. vi. 1, 14. Gener. 
Rev. viii. 12, 77 yU?? cpaiuri — Kal rj vv^ 
ofxoLiti^. Simply e. gr. to.^ jjfxipa^, the 
days, i. e, ' the day-time,' ' every day,' 
Lu. xxi. 37. Xen. Cyr. i. 3, 12. So rjfj-i- 
pa's fxi(Ty]<5, at mid-day. Acts xxvi. 13. iifx. 
yzvofxivT]^, ' day being come,' Lu. iv. 42. 
Acts xii. 18. Xen. An. vii. 2, 34. h vp.ipa 
kXlvei, 'the day declines,' Lu. iv. 42. 
John ix. 4, k'ws rj/jiipa icrri, ' so long as 
it is day.' Fig. for the daylight of true 
knowledge, moral light, Rom. xiii. 12. 
1 Th. V. 5, 8. 2 Pet. i. 19.— II. time in 
general, nearly equiv. to xpovo's. i. sing, 
of a point or period of time. Matt. xiii. 
1, iv ok Ty rjfJLtpa iKELny k^eXdcoif 6 'I. 
John xiv. 20. Eph. vi. 13, lu Ty hp.- Trj 
TTovripa. Xen. H. G. ii. 4, 17. Foil, by 
gen. of pers. Lu. xix. 42, iv rrj hixipa 
crou Tavry, ' in this thy time,' whilst thou 
yet livest. So John viii. 56, 'Lva Idrj Tiju 
hjJiipav ifxnv, my time, ' the time of my 
manifestation ;' by gen. of thing, e. gr. 
£609 rj/mipa^ dvaoEL^Eoo^, Lu. i. 80. crtoT?]- 
/Otas, 2 Cor. vi. 2. irELpaa-fxov, Heb. iii. 8. 
kiTLCTKOTrT]^, 1 Pet. ii. 12. 2 Pet. iii. 18, 
vpL. aicouos, equiv. to ulmvlo's, ' time eter- 
nal,' for ever. — 11. from the Hebr. plur. 
VfxipaL, days, i. e. time, 1) gener. Matt, 
ix. 15, kXevcrovraL ok vp-kpaL. Mk, ii. 20. 
Lu. xvii. 22; with adj. Act^ xv. 7, d<p' 
V/uispwu dpxaLcou. Acts ii, 17, & Ja. v. 3, 
ki/ Tats kcrxccTaL^ ■{Tp.kpaL<s. Acts iii. 24, 
KaTayy. Td§ Vfxkpa^ tuutu^. xi. 27, al. 
Foil, by gen, of pers. Matt. xi. 12. Lu. 
iv. 25, ku Tais v/JL. 'HXi'ou. Acts vii, 45, 
£0)5 Toov 77/x. Aauto : by gen, of an event, 
e. gr. Lu. ii. 6, ai v/x. tov tekelu ahrriv. 
Acts V. 37, al. and Sept. 2) spec, 'the 
time of one's life,' i. e. one's days, years, 
age, life, e. gr. fully, Lu. i. 75, irdo-a^ ras 
rip.kpa<5 TTi^ 'iwr)<3. Absol. Lu. i. 7, nrpo- 
^eIBi]k6t&^ ku Tats rip.kpaL^ avTcou, ' ad- 
vanced in years,' and ii. 36. gener. Heb. 
vii. 3, and Sept. and Heb. 

'H^£T£po9, a, ov,{vfXET?,) poss, pron. 
of 1 pers. plur. our, our own, Acts ii. 11. 



'R fx lO avi]9, io<s, 6, 17, adj. (from 
77/Liicru, ^ui']<xK(t),) half-dead^ Lu. x. 30, 
lat. Class, 

"Rp.L(TV9, ELu, V, adj. dimidius, half 
In N. T. occ. only in neut, to tj/xlctv, as 
subst. half, Mk. vi.23. pi. to. r]pLL<Tr}, Lu. 
xix. 8. (both forms of later Grecism) Rev. 
xi. 9. 

'R pLU)p LOV, OV, TO, (77/it foi VpHCV, 

(i)pa,) a half-hour, prop. neut. of adj. 
vpiLwpLO^, dimidius, with an ellip. of ju£- 
po<s, ' a half-hour's space,' Rev. viii. L 

'RvLKa, correl. adv. iclien, ivhenever.^ 
with indie. 2 Cor. iii. 15. Sept. and Class, 
with subj, & av, ver, 16. Jos. Ant. v. 1. 2. 

"Rttlo^, ov, 6, 77, adj. mild, gentle, in- 
didgent, 1 Th. ii. 7, kyEvvdtjp.Ei/ t^ttlol, 
2 Tim. ii. 24, riTTLOu eIuul, as opp. to /la- 
X£cr6ai, as in Class. The word is almost 
always used of those superior in some way 
or other to the persons who are the ob- 
jects of this indulgence; and hence it is 
best derived from ettos, eItte'lu, the prim, 
sense being afahilis, which word similarly 
signifies likewise, from ad and fari, 1) 
easy of access ; 2) gentle, mild, 1 Th, ii. 
7. 2 Tim. ii. 24. 

"RpEp.o's, ov, 6, 77, adj. (formed by 
transp, from ?7/>c£pos, tame or gentle, as 
opp, to wild or fierce,) quiet, tranquil^ 
1 Tim, ii, 2, iip. kul rjaux'-ou (Slou. 

'RarvxdX,oo, f. dcrco, {vcrvxo^^) 'to 
cease from any commenced action,' to be 
quiet, still, tranquil, either by cessation 
from labour, or freedom from disturbance 
of any kind. In N. T, the word is used 
1) of rest from labjour, Lu. xxiii. 56, to 
Plev (Td[3(3aTOu 7;(Tu)(acrai/, In the Class, 
writers it is, not dissimilarly, used of ces- 
sation from any action that has been car- 
rying on, as Xen, Anab, v, 4, 8. Thuc.iv. 
4, vi. 44. vii. 11, Hdian vii, 5, 5. 2) of 
freedom from disturbance, 1 Th. iv, 11, 
(piXoTLpLElordaL r]crvxdX,Eiv, for nrrvxiav 
dysLv, as in Thuc. i. 12. vi. 38, Tjo-ux^^st? 
as opp. to CTTacTEts dvaipEXTai. 3) of ces- 
sation from speaking, to hold one's peace^ 
Lu. xiv. 4. Eurip. Cycl. 620. Thuc. viii. 
86, and often in Class. Also by impl. to 
tacitly acquiesce in what has been said, 
Acts xi. 18. xxi. 14, as va-vxiciv kx^^^ 
Class. 

'Hcruxta, (^o'l^Xo^O quiet, by 

cessation from motion, Eurip. Hipp. 205, 
esp, rest from labour, Hom. Od. xviii. 22. 
Hdot. vi. 135 ; freedom from disturbance, 
by the stillness of a quiet life, 2 Th. iii, 12, 
p.ETd 77(ruxt«? kpyaX^ofxEvoi, (so Class, 
e. gr. Eurip. Hipp. 205, p.ETd 3*' -hcrvxj-oL's,) 
or by cessation from speaking, stillness^ 
silence, Acts xxii. 2, irapkcrxov ricrvxi-o-v^ 
for var. dyEiv. 1 Tim. ii. 11, sq. Sept. and 
Class, as Hdot. i. 80. 



HSY 



175 



BAN 



'Ho-uxtos, ou, o, f/, adj. (equiv. to 
f'}<ruxo^-,) qiiiet^ tranquil., by freedom from 
disturbance, 1 Tim. ii. 2, vcr. (3lou did- 
•ysii/, namely, by public peace and tran- 
quillity. See Find. Pyth. viii. 1 — 6. In 
the Class, it is used only of persons ; at 
least I remember nothing like the expres- 
sion in 1 Pet. iii. 4, 'Tryeuiua, with 
which Bretsch. aptly compares Psalt. Sa- 
lom. xii. 6, (pvXdfai- Kuptos v//i>)(?;y ijcru- 
Kai KaTS.vVvi/aL dvSpa ttolovvtu 
eipi]Pi]v iv OLKw. 

'H TT a Oju at, f. v(rofxaL, depon. pass. 
{vTTOJv.) prop, to be ivorse off than ano- 
ther, to he inferior to him. So 2 Cor. xii. 
13, Ti — o 7/TT?j6?jT£, &c. and also in 
later Class. ; though in them the word 
carries after it a dat. or something equiv. 
Hence to he ivorsted by any one, either in 
war, or in any contest, as often in Class. 
And so 2 Pet. ii. 19, to yap tl^ vttijtui, 
where fig. as Jos. Ant. i. 19, 4, spvoTL rjr- 
TTjGfiis. Absol. 2 Pet. ii. 20, vTTwvTui. 
Xen. Cyr. i. 4, 5, sk tou riTTacrdaL. 

"HTTr//xa, aros, to, (?iiTTdo/xat,) prop. 
a being in a icorse state than any former 
one, or that of some other person. So 
Rom. xi. 12, rjTTTiifxa avTcov : and as rjT- 
TdojxaL signifies to come sliort^ he worsted.^ 
so TjTTTiiuia in 1 Cor. vi. 7, vrTrj/uLa iv 
vfxiv €g-Tii/, signifies, ' there is a falling 
short of your duty,' a failure., a fault. 

''Httwi/, 01/05, 6, n, adj. irreg. compar. 
to KaKo^.^ worse., inferior. In N. T. the 
word occurs only in neut. 1 Cor. xi. 17, 
£ts TO rjrTou^ ' for the worse,' and Class. 
Adverb. 2 Cor., xii. 15, rjrTou dyairw^aL^ 
and Class. 

*Hx£<f, f. ^o-tu, (tJx^s) sound., re- 
sound., clang., in trans. 1 Cor. xiii. 1, X"'^" 
/COS i^X'^u. Hes. Th. 42. Of tlie sea, to 
roar. Lu. xxi. 25. Sept. and Hom. II. i. 
157. 

'^Hxos, ou, 6, prop, sound., noise., Acts 
ii. 2. Heb. xii. 19. Sept. and Jos. metaph. 
fame.^ rumour ^ Lu. iv. 37. 



e. 



Qd\a(T<Ta., 17, (aXs, wh. a\acr<ra,) 
tlie sea., or a sea, 1) gener. Matt. xiii. 47, 
<rayr\vy] fiXrjdELa-ri Ttju ^d\. and xviii. 
6. Rev. V. 13. vii. 1. xx. 13. 2) spec, of 
particular sins, as specified by adjuncts. 
Acts X. 6, 32. vii. 36. 1 Cor. x. 1, et al. 

OdXiru), {. \j/(jo, prop, to make tvarm, 
either by fire, Hom. Od. xxi. 179, or by 
warmth imparted from the bodv, Jos. Ant. 
vii. 14, 8. In N. T. fig. to cherish, 1 Th. 
ii. 7, tos ay Tp6(po^ ^dXirr) to: kavrfj^ 



TtKva. (See my note.) Eph. v. 29, and 
Class. 

SajUL^ia), f. tjo-o), (3'a/xj8os,) to be i?i 
amazement, intrans. Acts ix. G, ^pifxwv 
Kul ^afx^wv. Hom. Od. i. 328, and Sept. 
Hence pass, to he astonished, Mk. i. 27. x. 
32, and later Class. 

Odfxf^o^, £os, TO, (^dco,) prop, ad- 
miration mixed icith terror, as Pind. Nem. 

i. 85, and elsewh. but sometimes ' amaze- 
ment from admiration,^ or a mixed feeling 
of admiration and awe, Lu. iv. 36. v. 9. 
Acts iii. 10, and so Hom. II. iii. 342. iv. 79. 
Thuc. vi. 31. 

Q av dcriixo's, ou, 6, v, adj. (6ai/aT09,) 
causi7ig death, deadly; in N. T. applied 
to death by poison, Mk. xvi. 18, Kav Q. 
Tt TTLijoarLv, where sub. <pap(xaKdv, which 
is ejcpressed in Eurip. Ion 616, ^apfid- 
Kitiv 0. and Jos. Antiq. iv. 8, 34. Artem. 

ii. 64. V. 33. 

QavaTr]<p6po^, ov, 6, 77, adj. {Qdva- 
T05, (pipco,) deadly, (lit. death-bringing,) 
Ja. iii. 8, jULsa-n-i] lav 6av. And so in later 
Class. 

QdvaTO£, ov, 6, (0ai/£ty,) death, i. e. 
the extinction of life, whether naturally, 
or by violence. 1. said of 7iatural death, 
John xi. 4, 13. Rom. viii. 38, et al. ssepe. 
Rev. xiii. 3, rj irXriyr] tov BauaTov, 
' deadly wound.' Plur. ddvaTOL, ' exposures 
to death,' 2 Cor. xi. 23. Artem. iv. 83. 
Hence meton. for pestile?ice. Rev. vi. 8. — 

II. said of violent death, espec. as a punish- 
ment. Matt. XX. 18. xxvi. 66. Phil. ii. 8, 
0. (TTavpov : gener. Matt. x. 21 ; of the 
death of Jesus as piacular, Rom. v. 10. — 

III. in 0. T. death often has the sense of 
utter destruction, or perdition, implying 
both physical dissolution and exclusion 
from the presence and favour of God, in 
consequence of sin ; in N. T. this sense is 
applied with more definiteness to the Gos- 
pel-scheme; and as ^w?? is used to denote 
the bliss and glory of the kingdom of God, 
including the idea of a joyful resurrection, 
so 6ajyaTo§ is put for the opposite, namely, 
' exclusion from the kingdom of God,' in- 
cluding the idea of physical death as ag- 
gravated by eternal damnation and punish- 
ment, John viii. 51, QdvaTov ov ixr] d&oj- 
pi'icrr] ah tov aioova. Rom. vi. 16, dovXoL 
dfxapTLa^ sh ddvaTov. ver. 21, to teXos 
sKSLVivv ddvaTOL. 2 Tim. i. 10, KaTup- 
yvcravTO's jukv tov ddvarov, <p(x)TL0-avT09 
ok ^cojjjy — Sid TOV Evayy., called ' the 
second death' in Rev. ii. 11. But besides 
this death eternal, in another world, there 
is adverted to, John v. 24. 1 John iii. 14, 
a death spiritual in this, a present exclu- 
sion from the favour of God ; for, as spi- 
ritual life consists in constant communica- 
tion with the Divine light and spirit, which 
constitute life, (see under ^coij, III.) so 



BAN 176 eEA 



spiritual death is the being separated from 
their blessed influence. — IV. 6 Oai/aros 
per sonified^ Death, the King of Hades, 
Rev. vi. 8, meton. for q^r]^ itself. Matt, 
iv. IG, kv X^P9- '^"^ CTKLO. duvdrov^ ''death- 
shade,'' i. e. the thickest darkness. 

Q avuTo CO, f. cJcroj, [ddi/anro^,) to 
put to death ; in N. T. by the interven- 
tion of others ; i. e. to cause to be put to 
death, to deliver over to death, trans. 1) 
prop. Matt. X. 21, QavaTcofrovcLV avTO\)<s, 
saepe. 2) fig. to mortify, subdue evil de- 
sires, &c. Rom. viii. 13 ; pass, to become 
dead to any thing, be freed from its power, 
with dat. vii. 4. 

0 dirnroi, f. i/ro), (prob. fr. Oaw, obruo,) to 
cover over or wp with any thing, and there- 
by remove out of sight ; also to bury, which 
Avas done either by simply covering over 
the corpse with heaps of earth or stones, wh. 
was called kirafxdarQaL, iTri^ELv, kin^dX- 
XeLv yrj^i 01" by digging a grave, and 
interring the corpse; of Avhich modes, 
whichever were the most ancient, ezYAer was 
designated by OaTrrw. When, however, 
burning the dead was introduced, as it was 
at an early period, the same term was re- 
tained in use, espec. as the bones at least 
were often interred ; see Hom. Od. xi. 52. 
Yet, to make the meaning more distinct, 
TTvpL was often added, as ^^^1. H. An. x. 
22. Philostr. Heroic. 721. Vit. Soph. 601. 
The word QdirTuj came, however, at 
length, to denote the performing of the 
funeral rites of every kind, whether pre- 
liminary, as embalmment, or at the time 
of the burial, whether by burning or inter- 
ment, Hom. Od. xii. 12. In N. T. it sig- 
nifies gener. to inter, trans. Matt. viii. 21, 
et al. Sept. and Class. 

Qapp&co, f. vcru), (6ajOcro§,) prop, and 
in Class. ' to have courage to perform any 
action ;■■ or, ' to take courage as to any 
thing.' In N. T. it bears the latter sense; 
imper. signifying absol. ' to be full of con- 
fidence,' as to any evil, 2 Cor. v. 6, Oap- 
povvTB<s ovv TTCLVTOTE. Hcb. xiii. 6. Sept. 
and Class. ; also foil, by 'iv tlvl, ' to have 
hope or confidence in any one,' 2 Cor. vii. 
16. Sept. in Prov. xxxi. 11. Pol. v. 29, 4, 
and elsewhere in Class. ; or by its equiv. 
&L<s TLva, ' to use boldness towards any 
one,' 2 Cor. x. 1. 

G a joo-eo), f. 77(760, same as 6a/OjO£6t). In 
N. T. only imperat. ddporai, dapo-slTe, 
' be of good cheer,' Matt. ix. 22. xiv. 27. 

Odpa-09, £0s, TO, courage, as in the 
phrase Xuiui(3dvBLv Gap. to take courage, 
equiv. to Gapcriu), Acts xxviii. 15. Apocr. 
Joseph, and Class. 

QavjULa, aT-o§, to, prim, and prop. ' an 
object of admiration or astonishment,' a 
ivonder, i. e. cause of wonder, as oft. in 



Hom, and Hes. ; but gener. in succeeding 
writers, the effect produced on the mind 
thereby, admiration, ivonder, Thuc. viii. 
14. Hdot. and others. And so in Rev. 
xvii. 6, kdavixacra davfxa fxiya, a Hebra- 
ism for ' I wondered exceedingly.' 

Oav/xa^O), f. ao-w, (0au/xa,) to tvon- 
der, I. INTRANS. ^ to be astonished,' to he 
amazed; absol. Matt, viii, 10, b 'Itjcous 
kOav/uLacTE kul tiTre, and 27. ix. 8,33. xv. 
31, et al. ; with adjuncts, to ivonder at any 
thing ; e. gr. with acc. of pers. as remote 
object, John v. 28, /m) davfx. tovto. Lu. 
xxiv. 12. Thuc. vi. 33, o -Travv dav/ixd- 
^£T£ : with Sid TL, Mk. vi. 6. John vii. 
21, 'iv TLVL, Lu. i. 21. £7rt TLvi, Lu. ii. 
33. iv. 22, et al. ; by nrspi tlvo^, Lu. ii. 
18 : foil, by oTt, to wonder that, because, 
&c. Lu. xi. 38. John iii. 7. iv. 27. Gal. i. 
6 ; by £i, to wonder if, whether, Mk. xv. 
44. 1 John iii. 13, — II. by impl. trans. 
to wonder at, i. e. ' to admire,' with acc. of 
pers. Lu. vii. 9, 6 'Irjcrov^ kQavfxacT&v 
auTov. Acts vii. 31. Diod. Sic. iv. 31, 
T?)y dpsTi]v, and oft. in Class. ; from the 
Hebr. Jude 16, QavjUidX^ovTE^ TrpocrioTra, 
admirers of persons, i.e. ' having respect 
to persons,' partial. So Sept. Is. ix. 15, 
Job xiii. 10. In constr. praegn. Rev. xiii. 
3, davfxdX^ELv oTTLao) Tov dripiov, to won- 
der after the beast, i. e. ' to admire and 
follow him, to become his worshippers;' 
comp. V. 4. 

Oai//xacrtos, ov, 6, adj. (0aU|Ua^<o,) 
admirable, as said of persons ; wonderful^ 
as said of things, la N. T. neut. to 0a u- 
/uLd(TLov, as subst. a wonder or miracle^ 
Matt. xxi. 15, and Sept. 

Q av pacTT 09, ov, prop, a verbal adj. 
signif. admirandus, admirable or excellent^ 
as said of persons ; wonderful, as said of 
things. In N. T. only the latter, 1) gener. 
as 1 Pet. ii. 9, £is to davjULacrTov avTov 
cpM<5. Matt. xxi. 42. Sept, and Class. 2) 
spec, in the sense strange, unusual, 2 Cor. 
xi. 14, KUL ov davjuLaa-Tov, 'no wonder,* 
John ix. 30. So Xen, Cyr. vii. 5, 9, 
ovdkv dv th] 0. et ssepe al. 

6£a, d<3, ri, (fem. of Ofos,) a goddess^ 
Acts xix. 27, 35, and Class. 

Q ido fxuL, f. dcrofxai, dep. mid. (0£d, 
fr. ddopuL,) to see, look at, behold, &c. 1. 
prim, and simply, to see, i. e. ' to perceive' 
with the eyes, equiv. to idelv, foil, by acc. 
John viii. 10, fir\^iva Qs.acrdfxevo<s. Acts 
xxi. 27, et al. ; with acc. and partic. Mk. 
xvi. 14. Lu. V. 27, £0€ao-aTo TsXcovriv 
Kadv/uLEvov. John i. 32. Acts i. 11 ; in 
Class, by otl, as John vi. 5. Acts viii. 
18.— II. including the notion of pleasure 
in seeing. Matt. xi. 7, tl ££rj/\0£T£ 0£a- 
craadaL ; 

OtaTjOi^o), f. icro), (0£aTpoi/,) to be an 



e E A 



1 



77 



BE A 



^tor in the theatre^ to hnng upon Hie the- 
atre^ 'present as a spectacle,' trans. Hence 
in N. T. gener. ' to make a public specta- 
cle of, expose to public scorn,' pass. Heb. 
X. 33. Criminals were sometimes exposed 
and punished in the theatre. 

BtaTjOoi/, ou, TO, (6fao/xai,) prop, a 
tlieatre^ i. e. the place where dramatic and 
other public spectacles were exhibited, 
M\. V. H. iii. 8. Xen. H. G. iv. 4, 3, 
where, too, the people were convened, in 
order to hear harangues, hold public con- 
sultations, Sac. ; see Xen. Hist. vi. 5, 7. 
And so in Acts xix. 29, 31,meton. a spec- 
tacle^ public shoiv ; fig. 1 Cor. iv. 9. 
Comp. Heb. x. 33. ^sch. Dial. Socr. iii. 
20, diarpa Trot^jToii/. 

OeTov, ov, TO, prop. neut. of adj. Oeios, 
but used subst. for sidp]iiu\ called dtiov^ 
soil. TTu/o, as being, the ancients thought, 
fire from heaven^ such as lightning: and 
since lightning leaves a sulphurous smell, 
— and as sulphur was used in lustrations^ — 
from this notion of its affinity to lightning, 
so it obtained the name of Oetoi/, Lu. xvii. 
29, s^pe^E TTvp Kal QsLOv (' sulphurous 
flames') utt' ovpavov. Rev. ix. 17, 18, al. 
Sept. and Class, 

9 £ tos, a, ov,adj.(0£os,) divine ^pertain- 
ing to God^ 2 Pet. i. 3, sq. Sept. & Class. ; 
neut. TO 6£t02/, ' the Divine nature,' the 
Deity ^ Acts xvii. 29, and Class. 

OstoT?]?, 7]To?, 77, (0£O5,) Dcity^ God- 
head^ i. e. the Divine nature and perfec- 
tions, Rom. i. 20. Lucian iii. 149, and 
Isocr. 

Gfifo)^?]?, £0§, o, v-> adj. {dsXav^) sul- 
phurous^ i. e. made of sulphur. Rev. ix. 
17, dwpaKa^ TTvpivovs — Kal 0. Philostr. 
Imag. i. 27. 

0fcX.r]/aa, aTO§, to, (perf. nrs.Qi\r\Ka^ 
fr. 0£A.ct>,) icill^ i. e. active volition^ the 
faculty by which we will any thing. The 
word does not occur in Attic Greek. In 
N. T. it denotes, I. prop, the result of 
the exercise of this faculty, icill^ icish^ 
good pleasure^ Matt. xxvi. 42, yEvrjOriTco 
TO 0£A.. (Tov. Acts xxi. 14. 1 Cor. xvi. 12, 
ovK 0. Epn. V. 17. 1 Pet. ii. 15. iv. 2, 
sq. 1 John v. 14, al. And so in John i. 
13, dsX. a-apKo^^ 'carnal desire,' or rather 
' that to which we are led by natural instinct.' 
Sept. Ps. i. 2, and Ecclus. viii. 15. — II. 
METON. will, the thing tuilled, ' what one 
wills to do, or to be done,' Matt. vii. 21, 
aW 6 TTOLcov TO TOV IlaTpos, and 

xii. 50, al. saepe. Eph. ii. 3, to. ^sXriiJLaTa 
T^s cap/cos, ' the desires of the flesh,' i. e. 
those to which a body making us prone to 
sin inclines us. The plural also occurs in 
Sept. 2 Chron. ix. 12, et al. and Theodor. 
V. 958. And so in our own language ; as 
Shakspeare : ' The wills above be done !' 
In Lu. xxiii. 25, irapLoioKE tw ^e\. 



auTtt)!/, it means, 'their will and pleasure,' 
what they willed to be done. Hence, by 
impl. will, i. e. purpose^ decree^ Matt, 
xviii. 14, OVK £(TTi 3". f-fxirpoddEV tov 
l\aTp6<s. John vi. 39. Acts xxii. 14. Heb. 
X. 7, seqq. So collect, to ^. tou GeoD, 
i. e. ' the counsels, eternal purposes of 
God,' Matt. ^^. 10. Lu. xi. 2.— III. meton. 
icill^ meaning the faculty of icilling^ free 
icill ; of man, 1 Cor. vii. 37, e^ovariai/ ok 
£X£t 'TTspl TOV lSlov 3*. 2 Pct. i. 21 ; of 
God, Eph. i. 5, 11. 1 Pet. iii. 17, si ^IXei 
TO TOV Oeov. 

0£A.Tj(rt§, fws, 77, ('S'fiXa),) will, 'the 
good pleasure of God,' Heb. ii. 4. Sept. 
Ezek. xviii. 23. 2 Mace. xii. 16. Stobsei 
Eel. Phys. vol. ii. 162. 

9 £ \ w, (f ^eXvo-co ), to will, wish, desire ; 
implying active volition, and thus differing 
from (SovXoiiiai, w^hich denotes passive. 1. 
prop, to u'ill, i. e. to purpose, intend, choose, 
to do a thing, or not ; 1) of God & Christ, 
foil, by infiu. aor, Rom. ix. 22, eI ^eXwi/ 
6 9fo§ EvdEL^aadaL Tr]v opyrjv. Col. i. 27; 
by infin. and acc. 1 Tim. ii. 4; absol. with 
inf. impl. John v. 21. 2) of men, foil, by 
inf. aor. Matt. v. 40, tw hiXovTL aoi Kpi- 
OtjvaL. John i. 44 ; pres. Matt. xix. 21, eI 
PIXEL'S teXelo^ eIvul. John vi. 67; by 
inf and aor. Lu. i. 62 ; absol. with inf. 
impl. Matt. viii. 2, kav ^iXri's, Mk. iii. 13. 
So with neg. ov ^iXco, not to ivill or have 
in mind, and by impl, to will not, to deter- 
mine NOT to do this or that, &c. ; foil, by 
inf. aor. Matt. ii. 18, ovk ti^eXe irapa- 
KXr]dfjuaL. Mk. vi. 26; pres. John vii. 1 ; 
absol. with inf. impl. Matt, xviii. 30. lu 
antith. e. gr. to ivill and to do, Rom. vii. 

18. Phil. ii. 13. In Matt.i. 19, fxr] ^iXwv 
avTi]v TrapadELyfxaTLcraL, and Lu. xviii. 

13, OVK TiOeXeV OVOE T0V9 OCpdaXfJLOV^ — ■ 

ETrapaL, the recent Commentators and 
Lexicographers take ^iX. as standing for 
dvvaixai, (by a use freq. in the Class.) 
i. e. ' could not bring himself,' dared not. 
But in the former passage the sense is 
simply, as we say, not caring, not being 
disposed ; and in the latter much the 
same ; as also in Matt. ii. 18, ovk rjdEXE 
TrapaKXtjdijpaL. ^)fig. of the wind, John 
iii. 8, birov ^eXel, ttveT : an expression 
not to be paralleled by those passages of 
the Classical writei^ (as Xen. Cyr. ii. 4, 

19, ) where volition is ascribed to animals. 
The Commentators might more aptly have 
adduced from Hdot. ii. 11, 4, e'l cov dii 
IdeXria-EL EKTpi'draL to pEEdpov 6 NftXos, 
&c. Xen. Q5c. iv. 13, birocruv yrj (pipEtv 
eOeXel. — II. to ivish, desire, choose ; foil, 
bv infin., either aor. Lu. viii, 20, or pres. 
John xvi. 19. Gal. iv. 20 ; foil, by inf. 
and acc. Mk. vii. 24 ; absol. with infin. 
impl. Matt. xv. 28, 7£yTj077Tw ctol cos 
PIXEL'S. Mk. ix. 13. So with neg. ci- 

I 5 



GEM 



178 



GEO 



^i\(x)^ he unwilling^ choose not; foil, by i 
inf. aor. Lu. xix. 14, ou ^IXo/jliv toutou 
^a(TL\.&v(raL. 1 Cor. x. 20 ; pres. ver. 1. 
Rom. i. 13; absol, with inf. impl. John 
xxi. 18. Foil, by £t, Lu. xii. 49, tl ^iXco^ 
ii ?jf(5T] dmi(pdri ; foil, by 'iva with subj. 
Matt. vii. 12, ocra av ^iXtjTs 'iva. nroLcocnu 
vfxiv ol avd. Mk. vi. 25. So in interrog. 
foil, by fut. ind., or more properly aor. 
subj. pres. with 'iva implied. Matt. xx. 32, 
Tt h'iXere ['iva] iroLriarui vfxiv^ and xxvi. 
17, oft. and Class. Once with in the 
sense to choose rather^ to prefer^ 1 Cor. 
xiv. 19. Sometimes kdiX^iv., when fol- 
lowed by an infin., is to be rendered as an 
adv. before a finite verb, ivillingly., gladly., 
John vi. 21, rjdEXov \a^&iv avrov to 
irXotov^ lit. 'they desired to receive him.' 
— III. TO BE DISPOSED, incliiied., or prone 
to any thing ; and by impl. to like to do it, 
(nearly equiv. to ^tXsto,) foil, by infin. 
Lu. XX. 46, Tu)V ^s-XovTMV irepiiraTiiv 
kv (TToXats (as Hdot. i. 74. vii. 50, 2. 
viii. 60, 3). So, by.Hebr., with acc. Matt, 
xxvii. 43, el ^eXel avrov. ix. 13, 'iXzov 
^eXu). Foil, by £1/ TLVL, to delight in any 
thing. Col. ii. 18, ^eXwv iv Tair. And so 
in Sept. — IV. by impl. to he so or so 
MINDED, to he of opinion., affirm., 2 Pet. iii. 
5, XavdavEL auTOVs tovto ^iXovTa<s. So 
Hdian. v. 3, 11, eIkovu te tjXlov dvip- 
ya<TTov eIvul ^eXovctlv., and v. 6, 10 ; so 
also volo in Latin. — V. ^iXto with infin. 
is sometimes nearly equiv. to /uleXXw, to 
he ahout to., giving to the infin. a fut. 
sense, (but only of inanimate objects,) 
Acts ii. 12, TL dv ^eXol tovto eIvul ; 
Hdot. i. 78, et al. Artemid. iv. 80, cctto- 

ntoV TL irOTE ^eXeL G7]fJiaiVELV 6 6vELpo£. 

0£^£/\.tov, ou, 6, 77, prop. adj. (3'£/xa, 
something laid,) meaning, ' placed or laid 
as a ioimdsitioii^'' fundamental ; but almost 
always used as a suhst. fou7idation; some- 
times ^s/uleXlov in neut. I. masc. o ^e/uleX. 
scil. \i'0o§, prop, foundation-stone., Heb. 
xi. 10, T})v Tov? ^EfJL. E-xovcrav TToXlV. 
Rev. xxi. 14, 19, bis. Sept. and Class. 
Fig. of elementary doctrine and instruc- 
tion, the foundation., 1 Cor. iii. 10, 
Xlov TEdELKa. Rom. XV. 20. Eph. ii. 20. 
Heb. vi. 1 ; of a fundamental doctrine or 
principle, e. gr. Christ, 1 Cor. iii. 11, 12. 
1 Tim. vi. 19, ^EfxiXiov KaXdv., a good 
foundation., one on which hope of salva- 
tion may rest. Meton. 2 Tim. ii. 19, b 
^EfxiXLO's Tov 9£ou, ' that which God 
hath founded,' God's building, the Gospel- 
scheme. — II. neut. TO ^EfxEXiov, foun- 
dation., Acts xvi. 26, Tct ^EfxiXia. Lu. vi. 
48, 49. xiv. 29. Sept. and Class. 

Q E iuleXlSco., f. too-o), {^ehxeXlo^,) 1) 
prop, to lay the foundation of any building, 
trans. Matt. vii. 25. Lu. vi. 48, teQeixe- 
Xlcoto yap IttI Tijv iVETpav, Heb. i. 10. 



Sept. and Class. 2) metaph. to ground, 
establish., conUrm., Eph. iii. 17. Col. i. 23, 

Ty TTLO-TEL TEdEfXEXLUyjULEVOl. 1 Pet. V. 10, 

Diod. Sic. xi. 68, KaXw<s ^EfXEXLooQaiara^ 
and XV, 1, -nyEjuovLa TEdEfxEXLco/jLEvr]. 

0 £o^t ^a/CTos, oi>, 6, ?7, adj. (Beos, 
^i^a<r/ca),) taught of God., 1 Thess. iv. 9. 

GfoXoyos, ou, o, 77, adj. (Gfos, Xoyos, 
discourse,) in Class, theologus^ a divine, 
i. e. one who treats of God and divine 
things, as did Epimenides, Diod. Sic. v. 80. 
Pherecydes, Plut. Syll. 36. In N. T. it 
stands only as a title to the book of Reve- 
lation, signifying a theologian or divine, 
and is applied to St. John in an eminent 
sense, because in his Gospel, Epistles, and 
book of Revelation, he handled the sub- 
limest doctrines of Christian theology; 
particularly by asserting the Divine Word, 
proving Him to be God. Thus he is 
called by Athanasius, ^EoXoyo^ dvr)p, and 
by Theophylact, ^EoXoyLKvuTaTo^. 

Q EG fxaXEUi., f. 770-0), (3^£0/xaxos,) to 
contend against God., Acts xxiii. 9. 2 Mace, 
vii. 19, and often in Class. 

0 e6 fxaxo's-, ou, 6, 77, adj. (0£09,;id)(o- 
/xat,) contending against God, Acts v. 39. 
Prov. ix. 18, Symm. 

0£O7ri/£UO'TOS, ou, 6,77, adj. (0fO9, 

7ri;£w,) inspired from God, 2 Tim. iii. 16, 
irdcra ypacpi] ^. Phocyl. 121. ttjs 3'£o- 
irvEvcTTOV crocpLa^ Xoyos e(ttlv apiCTO?. 
And Plut. ix. 583, applies the word to 
dreams sent from God. 

0£O5, ou, 6, God. I. gener. God, the 
supreme Lord and Father of all, Jehovah, 
6 0£o§, Matt. i. 23, and oft. ; without the 
art. vi. 24 ; KvpL09 6 0£O9, Mk. xii. 29, 
oft. and Sept. In construction, 1) before 
a gen. of person, 6 0£os tlvo?, 'the God 
of any one,' i. e. his protector, benefactor, 
the object of his worship,' Matt. xxii. 32, 
6 0£o§ 'A^pad/JL, Mk. xii. 26. Lu. i. 68. 
Acts V. 30, et al. So voc. Matt, xxvii. 46, 
0££ fxov. Mk.xv. 34, 6 0£os pLov : of thing, 
when God is considered as the author and 
giver, the source of any thing, e. gr. 0f 09 
TT^s viropovj]^ Kai tt/s 7rapaKXr}(TEU)^, 
Rom. XV. 5. T^s eXttlSo?, ver. 13. t^9 
Eipnvr]^, xvi, 20. irda-r}^ xdpLTO^, 1 Pet. 
V. 10, al. 2) gener. 0£ou after other 
nouns, e. gr. both as active or suJbjective, 
(denoting what comes forth, is sent, given, 
appointed/rom God, Matt. iii. 16, to ttvev- 
pa TOV 0. Lu. xi. 49, 77 ao(pLa tov Q, 
iii. 38, (Yto?) ToD 0. ix. 20,^ 6 Xpio-ros 
Tou 0£ou. Acts xxiii. 4, tov dpy^LEpia 
TOV 0£ou. Matt. vi. 33, 77 (SacTLXELa tov 
0£ou. 2 Tim. iii. 17, 6 dvdpcoTro^ tov 
Qeov, the man of God, i.e. 'taught, fur- 
nished of God.' 1 Thess. iv. 16, ardX- 
TTtyg Qeov, the trump of God, ' which 
sounds by his command,' see 1 Cor. xv. 



GEO 



179 



52;) and also as pasdve or ohJecHve ; e. gr. 
Lu. xi. 42, t) dydin} tov Otou, ' love to 
God,' (see aydin} 2,) and vi. 12, i] Tvpoa- 
£ux'/ '^ov BeoD, ■prayer to God. Mk. xi. 
22, TTto-TiS ^Eov^ faith in God, So b oIko^ 
TOV 0£oD, i. e. ' consecrated to God,' Lu. 
vi. 4, et al. Rev. xv. 2, KiOdpaL tov Seov^ 
* harps for the praise of God.' Further, 
Tu TOV Ofou, the things of God, e. gr. his 
counsels and purposes, 1 Cor. ii. 11, or 
''things agreeable to him,' Matt. xvi. 23, 
or pertaining to him, xxii. 21, in which 
sense we also find to. irpo's Qsou, i. e. 
'his service and worship,' Rom. xv. 17. 
Heb. ii. 17. v, 1. 3) dat. Ofw, e. gr. after 
adjectives, as d(TTsTo9 too 0. Acts vii. 20. 
SvvaTa T(jp O. 2 Cor. x. 4, as an intensive, 
from the Heb., exceedingly, (see da-TsTo^ 
and SvvaTO^ : ) elsewh. after verbs, &c. 
to or /or God, Rom. vi. 10, X^yv tw 0£w, 
i. e. ' to his honour and glory,' in accord- 
ance with his will. — II. it is applied to 
Christ, the Son, who is declared to be 
6 Geos, John i. 1. xx. 28. Rom. ix. 5. 
Phil.ii. 6. 1 Tim. iii. 16. Heb. i. 8. 1 John 
V. 20. Rev. xix. 17. comp. ver. 7. xxii. 
6. In like manner He is called 6 Gsos 
in very many passages of the early Fa- 
thers, adduced in Dr. Burton's Testimo- 
nies of the Ante-Nicene Fathers. — III. in 
the Greek sense, ^'fo?, a god, 6 Geos, 
the Deity, and oi 3'£0i, the gods, i. e. 
the heathen gods, Acts vii. 43, c ^sos. 
xiv. II, OL ^eoi. So Satan is called, 6 
3'£os TOV aiu)V09 tovtov, the god of this 
ivorld, as being its leader, &c. 2 Cor. iv. 4. 
Once fem. v ^ed^, a goddess, Diana, Acts 
xix. 37. Meton. aw image, idol, Acts vii. 
40. 

OEOcr&^Eia, a^, v, (3'£oo'£jS?js,) reve- 
rence for God, piety, godliness, 1 Tim. ii. 
10, (where see my note,) Sept. and Class. 

0 Eocrs^i]^, £09, 6, V, adj. (9fo§, ari- 
fiofxai,) reverencing God, godly, namely, 
by worship and obedience, John ix. 31. 
Sept. and Class. 

GfocTuy^s, £05, 6, 77, adj. (Geo?, 
(FTvyiio,) prop, as in Class, pass, hated hy 
the gods, Eurip. Tr. 1243. In N. T. act. 
hating God, impious, Rom. i. 30. Eurip. 

GsoTt^s, (same as 3'£ioV?;§,) tjros, ??, 
the Deity, or Godhead, i. e. the Divine 
nature, Col. ii. 9. Luc. Icarom. 9, but 
only in the sense deity, godship. 

OzpaTTELa, as, r],{^£pa7rEV(jt3,) service 
or oMendance of any kind, by impl. volun- 
tary, whether of servants or their masters, 
or of nurses, or medical attendants, on the 
sick. In N. T. used 1) of care of the 
sick, and by impl. the relief imparted, &c. 
Lu. ix. 11. Rev. xxii. 2. Jos. and Class. 
2) meton. and collect, attendants, retinue, 



Matt. xxiv. 45. Lu. xii. 42. Sept. and 
Class. 

QepaiTEvu), f. evaa), {SrspdTrtJDV,) in 
Class, to ivait upon, minister unto, pay court 
to ; to ho7iour, venerate, seek to please ; 
also, to ivorship. In N. T. the word is 
used in two senses, 1) prop, and gener. to 
minister to, wait on. Acts xvii. 25, ovtk (6 
G£o§) vTTo ytipvov dvdp<j3TroiV ^spair, 

2) spec, to take care of, tend, the sick. 
Class. In N. T. by impl. to relieve, or 
heal, Matt. iv. 24. xii. 10. Mk. i. 34. Lu. 
vi. 7. X. 9, al. And so in Thuc. ii. 47, 
where see my note. 

Q spd'Troiv, ovTO'5, 6, {^ipo), to che- 
rish,) a?i attendant; implying voluntary 
service, and therefore differing from oov- 
\o5, Heb. iii. 5, where see my note. 

G£pi'Ja), f. iaio, {^&po^,) 'to gather 
the fruits of the summer,' to reap or har- 
vest. 1) prop, and absol. Matt. vi. 26. 
Ja. V. 4, OL ^EpiaavTE^, the reapers. Matt, 
XXV. 24. John iv. 37. 2 Cor. ix. 6. Gal. 
vi. 7. 2) fig. to reap tJie fruits of one's 
labours, 1 Cor. ix. 11, Ta aapKiKd. John 
iv. 36,^ 38. Gal. vi. 8, 9. Sept. and Class. 

3) by impl. to cut dozen, destroy. Rev. xiv. 
15, l6, idEpLcrdt] f] yij, i. e. 'the iniquity 
of men is fully ripe, and is cut off,' (comp. 
Joel iii. 13,) i. e. the bad are cut off, as 
corn by the reaper. 

0 £p L<r jULo^, ov, 6, {^Epi^o),) prop. 
harvest, harvesting, John iv. 35, 6 ^Epid- 
/ULO^ epX^Tai, Matt. xiii. 30, 39. Sept. and 
Class. Meton. the harvest to be gathered, 
produce of the harvest. In N. T. fig. for 
tlie converts to be gathered into Christ's 
kingdom. Matt. ix. 37. Lu. x. 2 ; also of 
those who#e iniquity is fully ripe for 
punishment, Rev. xiv. 15. 

Ge/otoTT?/?, OV, o, (^£/0iJw,) a reaper, 
harvest-man. Matt. xiii. 30, 39. Sept. and 
Class. 

0 sp jULaivu), f. ayw, (3'f/0jUO9,) to warm. 
In N. T. mid. ^EpfxaivoixaL, to warm one- 
self, Mk. xiv. 54, 67 ; at the fire, Ja. ii. 16; 
' to become warm with clothing,' Sept. and 
Class. 

Oipfir^, i7§, 77, {^Epfjio^ fr. ^ipw,) 
loarmth, heat. Acts xxviii. 3. Sept. and 
Thuc. ii. 49. 

Gepos, £09, TO, (^ipco, to warm,) 
summer, i. e. 'the warm season,' Matt, 
xxiv. 32. Mk. xiii. 28. Lu. xxi. 30. Sept. 
and Class. 

G £ wp £0), f. 770*0), (3'£a)po9, spectator,) 
prop, to he a spectator of, to heJwld, view 
any thing, espec. a public spectacle, or 
person, I. prop, including the notion of 
attention, wonder, &c. See Schol. on 
Eurip. Hec. 342. 1) gener. with acc. of 
thing, Lu. xxiii. 48, ^EwpovvTE^ Ta yz- 
vofxEva. John ii, 23. Acts viii. 13; ofpers. 



e Ell 



180 



e H s 



Rev. xi. 11, 12 ;^fo]l. by ttw?, Mk. xii. 41, 
and TTou, xv. 47 ; absol. Lii. xiv. 29, al. 
Sept. and Class. 2) to look at^ ' view with 
attention,' Matt, xxviii. 1, 3-. ^6v Td<pov. 
Ceb. Tab. 1. Fig. to consider attentively^ 
Heb. vii.4, ^^.(jopeIti <5£, 'jn^XiKO's outos, 
and Class. 3) to look at^ i. e. by impl. to 
comprehend^ recognise^ acknoivledge^ with 
acc. of pers. John vi. 40, 7ra§ b ^siapCov 
Tov Yioi/, and xii. 45. xiv. 17. Wisd. xiii. 
5. Diod. Sic. xix. 52, tous Xoyous. — II. 
simply to see^pei'ceive with the eyes, behold^ 
nearly equiv. to ide.lv^ 1) gener. foil, by 
acc. of pers. Mk, iii. 11. John ix. 8, etal. ; 
with part, added, Lu. x. 18, edscopovv 
TOV ^uTuvau — TTsarovra. xxiv. 39. Mk.v. 
15. John vi. 19. Foil, by acc. of tM7ig^ 
Lit. xxi. 6, raura d ^scopElTs. John vii. 
3; with partic. added, John x. 12, ^. tou 
XvKov kpxo/uL^i'oi^. XX. 6, al. Sept. and 
Class. 2) to perceive^ mark^ note^ foil, by 
ort, Mk. xvi. 4; by ttoVo?, Acts xxi. 20; 
by acc. of thing, Mk. v. 38, kol ^scopEl 
^6pv(3ov. 2 Mace. ix. 23. Diod. Sic. xiii. 
28. 3) from the Hebr. to see, i. e. eape- 
rience, e. gr. tov ^dvaTov^ John viii. 51. 

B sojoia, a<s, 77, (^'scopos,) prop, the act 
of vieii'ing any thing, Jos. Ant. ii. 9, 5, 
KCLTd ^E(jopiav. Dan. v. 7, Cod. Chisl. 
Also the sight of what is \dew^ed, 2 Mace. 
XV. 12 ; but chiefly that of public spec- 
tacles, as games, &c. Thuc. vi. 16. Xen. 
Hier. i. 12, espec. a religious one, as Eu- 
rip. Bacch. 1000, Matth. And so 2 Mace. 

XV. 20, TOU? l^eXGoyTttS £7rt T^V ^£60- 

piav. In N. T. of the spectacle of public 
execution, Lu. xxiii. 48, ol a-v/uiTrapays- 
vofievoL 6y\oL kirl tviv ^ecopiav TavTi]v. 
Simil. 3 Mace. v. 24, rd St TrXi'idi] crvvr}- 

6pOL(TTO TTpOS Ti]V OLKT pOTaTViV ^tCopiaV, 

and of a sad spectacle, gen. in ^Esch. 
Prom. 827, aXXtiv 6' aKovcrov Svcrx^pv 
^scopiau. And so spectacidum in Latin, 
and spectacle in Engl. 

BrjKri, 77, (Ti0?jfii,) repository, or 
receptacle to put any thing in, as a coffer 
or chest, cell or chamber ; likewise a sheath 
or scabbard for a sword, John xviii. ] 1, as 
in Engl, case is sometimes used for a 
sheath. 

07jXa^6t), f. ao-60, ( 3*75 X. 77,) 1) prop, 
causative, for ^nXviv iiriyja., papillam 
prceheo, to suckle ; absol. Matt. xxiv. 19. 
Mk. xiii. 17. Lu. xxi. 23. Sept. & Class, 
but foil, by acc. 2) immed. to suck at the 
breast, more usually 3'7j\d^o/zat. Foil, 
by acc. Lu. xi. 27, fxaaTol ou§ kdr]Xa(Ta<s. 
So Job iii. 12, /nacrTov? kdi'iXacra. Cantic. 
viii. 1, and Class. Partic. ^i-jXd'^cov, a 
siicUing, Matt. xxi. 16. 

QrjXv^, £ta, u, adj. gen. female, applied, 
as mostly in Class, to the female of any 
animals whatever. In N. T. 1) 77 ^nXtia, 
as subst. to denote a female.^ \. e. a wo- 



man, Rom. i. 20, sq. Sept. Lev. xxvii. 4, 
and sometimes, though rarely, in Class. 
2) TO ^rjXv, scil. 7£i/os, as in the phrase 
ap(j&v Kai ^TjXv, Matt. xix. 4. Mk. x. 6. 
Gal. iii. 28. Sept. and sometimes Class, as 
Hdot. ii. 85, to 3". yho^. 

9 77 pa, a§, 77, {^hp-)) prop, the chase of 
ivild aninnals, hunting, Horn. II, v. 49. Od. 
i. 429, or meton. the fruit of the chase, 
the prey or game, Hom. Od. ix. 158, 
Xen. Ven. vi. 13. In N. T. meton. cap- 
ture or destruction, i. e. cause of destruc- 
tion, Rom. xi. 9. So, too, Plut. Alcib. 
M7?xctWj 3'77pcts dv^puaTtiov. 

Giipevco, f. svaru), (3'77pa,) prop, to 
hint, take wild animals, as often in Class. 
In N. T. fig. to hunt, i. e. catch at, lay hold 
of, any one's words, Lu. xi. 54, XpiTovvrs^ 
^i]peuaaL tl Ik tov CTOjuaTos auTOu. 

Q7]pL0IULaX^(^i f« nO-CO, {^7]pL0V, fxd- 

XOjuiaL,) to fight ivith wild beasts, as con- 
demned persons in the public spectacles, 
Artem. ii. 54. Absol. 1 Cor. xv. 32, si 
KUTa dvdpcvTTOV edr]pLOfidxv<^<^ 'E(p. 
and probably fig. in allusion to what is 
recorded. Acts xix. 29, where see my note. 

Qi]piov, ov, TO, (equiv. to 3-/)^,) L 
prop, a icild beast, Mk. i. 13, & oft. Sept. 
and Class. — II. fig. of brutal savage men^ 
Tit. i. 12, and sometimes in Class. 

9 7j o-a p i'Jo), f. l(jU}, {^vicravpd^,) I. 
prop, to treasure up, lay in store for one's 
use ; foil, by acc. of thing and dat. of 
pers. expr. or impl. as Matt. vi. 19, sq, 
Lu. xii. 21, al. Sept. and Class. — II. fig. 
to lay up, as said of evil, punishment.^ &c. 
Rom. ii. 5, opynv. Ja. v. 3. Sept. in 
Prov. i. 18 ; also in pass, reserved, by the 
providence of God, for, 2 Pet. iii. 7, ol 
ovpavol Kai h yv — TiQ^cravpicr^ivoL Eiari. 

Qrjcrav po?, ov, 6, der. from Tt07j/xt 
and avpov : or rather, as there is no trace 
of the existence of avpov in the Greek, 
from Heb. li^^h? from to lay up. The 
word has two senses : 1 ) ' something laid 
up in store and 2) the plciee where it is 
reposited ; of which significations the for- 
mer is the earlier, being found in Hesiod 
and Pindar. The latter, however, is as 
ancient as the time of Herodotus, by whom 
it is often used. In N. T. it means I. a 
treasure, i. e. any thing laid up in store, 
ivealth, 1) prop, temporal, in this life, 
Matt. vi. 19. xiii. 44. Lu. xii. 34. Heb. 
xi. 26. Sept. and Class. 2) fig. spiritual., 
pertaining to the soul and eternal life. 
Matt. vi. 20. Mk. x. 21. Lu. xii. 33, aL 
Said in 2 Cor. iv. 7, of the Gospel of Christ 
considered as a precious deposit to be im- 
proved. See Matt. xiii. 44. Of the trea- 
sures of divine knowledge, which are laid 
up in Christ, and in the scheme of our 
redemption by him, Col. ii. 3, ol ^ricravpol 



eir 



181 



e p A 



Tr;9 (TO<pia^, intimating the plenfeoi/sncss 
as well as preciousness thereof. So IMaio, 
Phil. 15, E. cos TLva aro(jna9 evpijKco'i rjij- 
aravpov. Xen, Mem. iv. 2, 9, ^ijaavpov^ 
— (Tocpia^. Julian. Or. iv. aocp'ia^ ^ijaau- 
pov9. — II. a treasiin/^ or 2)lacc where 
stores or treasures are reposited to he 
drawn forth and distrihuted as. occasion 
may require, Matt. xiii. 52, lK(3dX\eL Ik 
Tov ^iicravpov avTOu KULvd^Scc. So Iso- 
crates tells Demonicus, § 20, that he had 
laid down such and such rules for his con- 
duct, that he might draw them forth 
a)(T7r£/o £/c Ta/jLLSLov. And Lucian, Rhet. 
Praecep. tells his pupil to read the modern 
writers so as occasionally to make use of 
them Kaddirtp ek Tafxiaiov irpoaipwv. 
In Matt. ii. 11, dvoL^avTE? tous 3't}(rav- 
pov^ auVoii/, it simply signifies a chest or 
casket, in which valuables are kept. So 
Jos. Ant. ix. 8, 2, ^vXivov ^. Fig. of the 
storeliouse of the mind, or heart, where 
the thoughts, feelings, and counsels are as 
it were laid up, to be drawn forth by the 
daily exigencies of life. Matt. xii. 35, 6 
dya0O5 dvdpcoiro's ek tov ay. ^tjor. tt}? 
Kapdia^ ek^uXXel ra dyadd' where ek/S. 
is simply for irpocfiEpEL, as used of words 
spoken and in the term there is merely 
an allusion to the disbursement of money 
or valuables from a treasury. So Lu. x. 
35, kk^aXoov Svo oi^udpia. 

Qiyydvco, f. ^i^ofxai, aor. 2. 'iQiyov, 
(a lengthened form of the pres. for ^iyto,) 
1 ) gener. to touch, prop, with the hand or 
foot. Col. ii. 21. 2) with gen. to touch by 
coming to, to reach, Heb. xii. 20, kuv ^rj- 
piov ^lyri tov opovs. 3) with an idea of 
force, to smite, harm, Heb. xi. 28, iVa (xh 6 
oXodpEvcov nrd TrpcoTOTOKa ^iyrf avTcov. 

QXl(B(x), f. gener. to press, com- 
j)ress, depress, oppress. In N. T. I. prop. 
of a person in a crowd, Mk. iii . 9, %ua ijli] 
^Xt^wcTLv avTov. Ecclus. xvi. 28. Ar- 
temid. ii. 37. Luc. Nigr. 13, ^XifScou kul 
CTEvoyuipiiov T0V9 aTravTcouTa?. So also 
Arrian, Epict. i. 25, conjoins ^Xl(3elv and 
(TTEvo^oipELV '. also ^Xi^EaQaL, Luc. 
Pseud, vii. 6, to be crowded upon, as said 
of a person ; also to be narrow, as said of 
a joZace, Pollux ix. 23, ttoXis ^Xi^op,Evr\, 
and Theocr. Id. xxi. 18, '^Xi^ophav Kd- 
Xv^ai>. In N. T. said of a road Iiemmed 
in, and by impl. narrow. Matt. vii. 14, 
TEdXipLfXEVi] t] 0009, 1. 6. crT£i/o)/ctjpos, as 
opp. to Ty odu) EvpvX(J^p(^- — II- '^T-G. to 
oppress with evils, affiict, 2 Th. i. 6, toT? 
^Xl^ov(tlv vfxd^ : pass. 2 Cor. i. 6. iv. 8, 
and Sept. and Class. ; espec. to be abided 
with poverty, 1 Tim. v. 10, el ^Xi(3ojULE- 
voL<s, distressed. Heb. xi. 37, vcTTEpovpLE- 
voL, ^Xl^o/ulevol. The full expression oc- 
curs in Artemid. iii. 66, ^XlI36peijo9 viro 
TTJ9 TTEvias. Dion. Hal. Ant, p. 1688, 2, 



EKdcrTov TEdXi/nptvoDv T(Zv /Sioji/, * their 
fortunes being narrow,' 

QXiyf/L^, £W9, 77, (3^/\i')36o,) prop, in act, 
sense, compression, & fig. pressure fr. evils, 
ajfliction, distress, whether from trouble of 
mind, as 2 Cor. ii. 4, ek ttoXXTj^ ^X. kul 
crvvoxV'^ Kapdia^ Eypa\j/a, Phil. i. 16; or 
pain of body, John xvi. 21; where said of 
a woman in travail ; as also in Sept. and 
Apocr. Oft. however, it is used, pass, by 
meton.,of evils by which any one is pressed, 
affliction, distress. Matt. xiii. 21, yEvo/uLt- 
!/?]§ ^£ 3r. Acts vii. 10, al. So with syno- 
nymes, as /cat a-TEvoxiopta, Rom. ii. 9. 
2 Cor. vi. 4. 1 Th. iii. 7. Sept. and ApocV. 

Q vv <r K (X), (f. ^avovpai, aor. 2. £0a- 
vov, perf. TEdvriKa, inf. TEdi/dvai,) to die. 
In IN^. T. only perf. TEdurjKa, to have died, 
i. e. to be dead, in a pres. sense, Mk. xv, 
44, £t i']dr] TEdut-jKE. Lu. viii. 49. 1 Tim. v. 
6, X^ooa-a Tedv7]KE, * is as good as dead.' 
Sept. and Class. 

9i/7]T05, ?;, Of, adj. {^vnarKu),) mortal ; 
Gwfxa, Rom. vi. 12. viii. 11. crdp^, 2 Cor, 
iv. 11. TO ^vi]t6v, ' mortal nature,' mor- 
tcdity, 1 Cor. xv. 53, sq. 2 Cor. v. 4. Sept. 
and Class. 

Oopv(3E(a, f. {^6pv(3o9,) to 

make a noise or uproar, said of a multi- 
tude, gener. whether as a mark of appro- 
bation or disapprobation. Class. In N. T. 
1) mid. and intrans. said of loud lamenta- 
tion, to make a noise together, to wail 
together. Matt. ix. 23, lowv oyXov ^opv- 
(Sou/uLEvov. Mk. V. 39. Acts xx. 10. 2) 
trans, to set in an uproar, to excite tumult 
in a place, as Tr]V 'ttoXw, Acts xvii, 5. 
Dion. Hal. ix. 68, k%opv^r\(jav T7]v ttoXiv. 

06pv^o9, ov, 6, noise, uproar, of a 
multitude, viz. 1) gener. Matt, xxvii. 24, 
^6pv(3o<s yiuETaL, and oft. ; of loud la- 
mentation, wailing, Mk. v. 38. 2) spec, 
of popular commotion, tumult. Matt. xxvi. 
5. Mk. xiv. 2. Acts xx. 1, and Class. 

Qpavw, f. (Tlx), p. pass. Tidpavo-fxaL, 1) 
prop, to break in pieces, crush, Pol. vi. 23, 
11. Artem. iii. 30, but 2) almost always 
used metaph. in the sense to crush any 
one's strength, to destrov his power, Pind. 
01. vi. 164. Pint. Alcib. 3". dvvapiv, or 
to crush his hopes, Hdian. iii. 2, 4, or his 
courage, Diod. Sic. v. 240, n-lBpava-TaL 6 
3'f/xos. Plut. Cses. 19. ETtdpavcTTO Trjs 
T0/\yu?j9, or his mind altogether, Plut. 
Anton. 17, ^pav6fiEV09 tov Xoyia-fxdv, 
animo fractus, ' broken down in mind,' opp. 
to EppcojULEi/o?. Hence in Lu. iv. 18, diro- 
GTElXaL TEdpuva-pEvovs, the sense is, 
' broken down in mind and spirits,' like 
prisoners in hopeless captivity ; as Deut, 
XX. 3, prj cpo^ELddE p-tjds. ^pavEcrdE : or 
bruised, i, e. oppressed by unjust imprison- 
ment, as Deut. xxviii. 33, ddiKoupiEvos 
Kal teQ paver piEV09. 



e PE 



182 



e Yr 



BpifXfxa^ aro's^ to, (Tp£0w,) prop, a 
nursling^ 'any animal bred up,' used espec. 
of tame animals reared by the care of man, 
cattle^ flocks^ and herds. So John iv. 12, 
oi VLOL avTOv Kal tol ^pefx/ULUTa avrov^ 
where, however, Kypke, Tittman, and 
Schleusner render domestics^ liouseJiold ; 
appealing to two passages of ancient in- 
scriptions, where, after the husband, wife, 
and children, the domestics are mentioned. 
Yet those, being merely inscriptions, afford 
no direct proof of the existence of this 
sense of ^pifxfxara. And the usus linguce 
is quite adverse, since 3'p. in the plural 
always, I apprehend, (except in two or 
three passages of Jambl. and Liban. where 
men are, in the rhetorical style of those 
writers, fig. termed ^pifXfxaTa^ in imita- 
tion of the poetic usage of ^pipLjxa in the 
singular for an alumnus^ almost always in 
a bad sense,) denotes cattle^ such as are 
bred, reared, and nourished by the care of 
man, as often in Joseph, and not unfre- 
quently in the Class, as Xen. CEcon. xx. 
23. Pol. ii. 26, 5. iv. 75, 2, (TtofxaTa kuI 
^pipfxaTa^ ' slaves and cattle.' Hdian. iii. 
9, 17. ^1. V. H. xii. 56, where twz/ 
^pEfijULOLTcov are opposed to toov iraiBiov, 
Diod. Sic. t. i. 221. And the mention of 
the cattle is not^ as Kypke says, irrelevant 
to the purpose in view ; which was to inti- 
mate the great copiousness of the water ; 
cattle, in the East, requiring to be watered 
at the wells. As to the alleged indecorum 
of mentioning the cattle to the exclusion 
of the domestics, the latter are not ex- 
cluded ; veriioB^ or household servants bom 
and bred in the house (who are, in Gen. 
xiv. 14. Eccles. ii. 7, termed oi/coygz/fis) 
being considered as part of the family ; and 
so in the latter passage they are in the 
Heb. called ' sons of my house.' Finally, 
the mention of the cattle is quite agreeable 
to the simplicity of ancient times, espec. 
in a rural country like Samaria. 

QpTjVEw^ f. vcrco, {dpT]V09,) to weep 
aloud^ wail^ mourn^ viz. 1) intrans. John 
xvi. 20, /cXau(r£T£ /cat .3'p>/i/rj(r£T£ : of 
hired mourners wailing for the dead. 
Matt. xi. 17. Lu.vii.32. Sept. & Horn. II. 
xxiv. 722. 2) trans, in later usage, to he- 
wail. Lu. xxiii. 27. Sept. and Hdian. iii. 
14, 3. 

0p^i/o5, oi;, 6, (3'(Ofc6t), to wail,) loiid 
weeping^ wailing^ Matt. ii. 18. Sept. and 
Class. 

0p??(r/c£ia, a?, 77, (3'pi70'/c£uto,) a ivor- 
shipping^ religious worship ; oft. in Class, 
with the idea of superstition. And so 
^pi]arKELa timv ayyi\u}V^Co\. ii. 18; also 
of a severe ascetic mode of worship, such 
as Judaism, Acts xxvi. 5. Wisd. xiv. 27. 
Luc. Sacrif. 10. Hdian. v. 3, 12 ; gener. 



of the worship of God, and hence religion^ 
piety ^ Ja. i. 26. Jos. Ant. i. 13, L 

0pt)cr/co5, ou, 6, 17, adj. {^piu)^ to 
speak in a low voice and humbly,) lit. 
God-fearing^ equiv. to dsLGLdaLjULUiV, and 
gener. pious^ religious, Ja. i. 26. See my 
note. 

0 pLap.(3Ev CO, f. (TOO, {^piapL^o?,) to tri- 
umph, ' to hold a triumph,' Pint. Marcell. 
4. Hdian. i. 6, 16. In N. T. 1) trans, to 
lead in triumph, to triumph over, with acc. 
Col. ii. 15. 2) causat. to cause to triumph, 
with acc. 2 Cor. ii. 14. 

GpiJ, T-pt^^o?, 77, (plur. Tptx^s, dat. 
plur. ^pL^l,) a hair, plur. the hair, i. e. 
of the head ; sing. Matt. v. 36, et al. ; 
plur. X. 30, and oft. in Sept. and Class. ; of 
the hair of animals. Matt. iii. 4. Mk. i. 6. 
Rev. ix. 8. Sept. and Class. 

OpoE(jo,f. r\(y<ji, (3'poos, ^pi(jo,)tomahe 
a clamour or tumidt. In later Greek, and 
in N. T. trans, to perturb, disturb, terrify ; 
pass. Matt. xxiv. 6, fxri ^poEladE, 

0 p6 pL(3o£, ov, 6, a drop or clot of 
coagulated matter, espec. blood, as in Plato, 
-^schyl. and oft. in Galen and Diosc. Lu. 
xxii. 44. 

0 povo^, ov, 6, {dpdoo, cogn. with Opoco, 
to mount, prop, a high seat ascended by a 
foot-stool, Hom.'Od. i. 145. In lat. Gr. and 
in N. T. a throne, as the emblem of regal 
authority. 1 ) prop, as attributed to kings, 
Lu. i. 52. Acts ii. 30. Sept. & Class. ; also 
to God, as the Sovereign of the universe, 
Matt. V. 34. Acts vii. 49. Heb. iv. 16, al. 
Sept. ; to Jesus, as the Messiah, Matt. xix. 
28, al. ; to the Apostles in the kingdom of 
God, Matt. xix. 28. Lu. xxii. 30. Rev. xx. 
4 ; also symbol, to the elders around God's 
throne, Rev. iv. 4 ; further, to Satan, ii. 
13 ; symbol, to the beast, xvi. 10. 2) 
meton. for dominion, Lu. i. 32, dcocTEL 
avTcp Tov ^povov Aav'td. Heb. i. 8 ; also 
for a potentate, higher power. Col. i. 16, 
£tT£ ^povoL, &c. where ^p6i/oL is spoken , 
gener. whether of earthly or of celestial 
potentates. See more in my note. 

SvydTr]p, T£po5 rpos, rj, a daughter, 
1. PROP, and gener. Matt. ix. 18. x. 35. 
Mk. V. 35, et ssepiss. in N. T. and Sept. 
as also in Class. ; fig. as expressing, like 
filiola in Latin, and daughter in English, a 
relation of kindness and affection, 2 Cor. 
vi. 18, £te vLo\)<s Kal ^vy. i. e. Qeov ; 
comp. Jer. xxxi. 1, 9 ; also voc. in a direct 
address, Matt. ix. 22, ^upa-Ei, 3*. Lu. viii. 
48. Sept. in Ruth ii. 8. iii. 10 ; and also 
in Homer and the Greek dramatists. — II. 
SPEC, from the Heb., daughter, i.e. a fe- • 
male descendant, however remote, Lu. « 
xiii. 16, ^vy. 'A(3padpL, and i. 5. Sept. 
Gen. xxxvi. 2, ' daughter of Canaan,' and 
oft. — III. from the Heb., prefixed to names 



GYP 



183 



0YP 



of cities, by which the city is j)^'>'sonified^ 
and its female inhabitants, born and living 
in her, are regarded as her offspring^ e. gr. 
Lu, xxiii. 28, ^vywripE^ 'lepovcraXtjiui.. 
So Sept. in Cant. ii. 7. iii. 5. Is. iii. 16. 
iv. 4, and oft. Hence, in sing. ^vy. Sttui/, 
for the i?iha{)ifauts. This form of expres- 
sion in the corresponding Hebrew term 
rQ is very common in the 0. T. ; and 
though almost wholly confined to the 
poetic books, is occasionally found in the 
plainest prose narrations ; e. gr. Gen. xxiv. 
13, ' the danghters of the dty came out to 
draw water with which may be compared 
a similar expression in Pind. Pyth. ix. 31, 
ov iroTS — Nats — Itlktsv^ Taia^ ^vyd- 
Tijp. How common among the ancients 
was this personification, may be imagined 
from the fact, that in sculptures and coins, 
cities and countries are not unfrequently 
represented as icomen. Thus, for instance, 
on the reverse of some medals of Vespa- 
sian and Titus, Judaea is exhibited as a 
woman sitting sorrowful on the ground 
under a palm-tree, with the inscription 

JUD^A CAPTA. 

Qvy ciT piov^ ou, TO, (dimin. of 
TT]p,) a little dmighter^ Mk. v. 23. vii. 25. 
Athen. p. 581. Long. p. 6. Anon. ap. 
Suid. in 7]y fxivo?. 

GueWa, 77, (fr. 3'u6o, to rush, as 
asWa fr. aw and s'lXslu, to ivhirl ; thus 
in Hes. Theog. 874, it is said of the winds, 
KaKy ^vovcTLv aiXXt]^) aivhirlii'iiid^ hurri- 
cane^ Horn. Od. v. 317, 0£ii/?7 fXLayofxivcov 
avifxijov eXdouaa ^veXXu. Arist. de 
Mundo 4. In N. T. the word occurs only 
in Heb. xii. 18, yvocpw kul ctkotco kul 
^viXXrj^ a mode of expression formed on 
the Sept. version of Deut. iv. 11, where 
^viXXr] corresponds to the Hebr. ^D"!!? 
though it does not represent its sense, 
thick darkness^ but was adopted by the 
Sept. translator with reference to the vio- 
lent tempest that accompanied the cloud, 
the thunder, and lightning of Sinai, Exod. 
xix. 16, 18. XX. 18 ; perhaps reading HDIl? 
and supposing the expression to come from 
?]"G?, ' to break the neck of,' and ' utterly 
destroy,' Hos. x. 2, a not unapt designa- 
tion of a hurricane. So Job ix. 17, it is 
said, ' He breaketh me with a tempest.' 

0uti/o9, t], oy, adj. (3^uta,) thyine.^ Rev. 
xviii. 12, ^vXov 3". ' thyine wood.' The 
-3'i'ta, or Sua, Lat. cityms^ was an ever- 
green African tree, with aromatic wood, 
from which statues and costly vessels 
were made. 

Gu/x/a/^a, axos, to, in- 
cense^ any substance burnt in religious wor- 
ship, Rev. V. 8 ; meton. Lu. i. 10, Uopa tov 
^vfXLafxaTo^^ and ver. 11, to ^vaia(Trri- 
piov TOV ^vjjL, ' for burning incense.' 



Ov/uiiaTv p Lov^ ou, TO, {^v/HLciu),) a 
censer^ for burning incense, Heb. ix. 4; 
others, cdtar of incense. 

Bu/Utao), f. acrti),' (3'u/ua, 3'uaj,) to 
hum incense., absol. Lu. i. 9, 'iXa^e tov 
^vjULidaai. 

Ov p-Ofxaxiu}., f. ^(Tw, (3'u/>ios, fxa^o- 
yu«i,) in Class, to fight fiercely., (for ^vfjua 
/ua)(£o-0ai,) or 'to carry on war with ob- 
stinate animosity,' even with little chance 
of success, as in Polyb. Diod. Sic. and 
Dion. Hal. In N. T. the word occurs 
only once. Acts xii. 20, ^vfio/jiaxcov Tu- 
p'ioL9 : W'here, as there is no reason to 
think that Herod was at war with the 
Tyrians, the sense is supposed to be, ' was 
gi^eatly offended with,' as in Polyb. xxvii. 
8, 4, 3". Eirl Tols yEyovocn., and ix. 40, 3. 
Plut. Demetr. 22, idujULo/uLdx^L Trpos 
auTou5, oTt, &c. See more in my note. 

0U/XOS, ou, 6, (^uw,) prop, the heaii, or 
50wZ, considered as the seat of life, Horn. 

11. iv. 470 ; also the soul or mi7id., as the 
seat of the icill or desire^ II. vi. 439 ; or 
of the emotions and passions, Horn. II, 
i. 196. Hence gener. and in N. T. pas- 
sion, i. e. ' violent commotion of mind,' 
indignation or ivrcdh., differing from opyi] 
in the mode of conception rather than in 
the thing signified, Lu. iv. 28, kirXnaQr]- 
crav TTtti/Tfis ^vfxov. Acts xix. 28. Eph. 
iv. 31. Col. iii. 8. Heb. xi. 27. Rev. xii. 

12. Sept. and Class. ; plur. ^vfxol, hursts 
of aiiger, Gal. v. 20 ; spoken of God, and 
including the idea of punishment, ^zmzYzVe 
judgments^ Rev. xv. 1. Rom. ii. 8, ^u^os 
Kal opyi]., 'the direst judgTQents.' Fur- 
ther, in 0. T. as Jer. xxv^ 15. Is. li. 17, 
Jehovah is represented as giving to the 
nations in his wrath an intoxicating cup, 
so that they reel and stagger to destruc- 
tion. Hence, also, in N. 1\ 6 olvo's tov 
^vfxov tov 6£ou, ' wine of the wrath of 
God,' Rev. xiv. 10, and with olyos impl. 
XV. 7. By a similar figure, 77 Xr]v69 tov 
^v/mov TOV Geou, Rev. xiv. 19, and xix. 
15, ' the wine-press of the wrath of God,' 
in allusion to Is. Ixiii. 8. 

Gu/xoco, f. 60(70), (3'u/xos,) to p7WoJi'e to 
anger, and pass, to be atigry, Matt. ii. 16. 
Sept. and Class. 

Gup a, a§, ?7, a door., and plur. at 
3'upat, doors, perhaps double doors. I. 
PROP, and GENER, Matt. vi. 6. Acts xii. 

13. ttV ^upav TOV TTuXa'fo?, i. e. a smcdl 
door, or icichet, within a larger; so the 
door of a prison, v. 19. xii. 6 ; of the 
Temple, iii. 2; of a fold, John x. 1; 
symbol. Rev. iii. 20, 'i(TTi]Ka sttI ttiv 
^vpav Kal Kpovo), i. e. ' at the door of the 
heart.' So ^vpa \l/vxfi^ in Class. Hence 
Ta Trpos Tviv ^vpav, equiv. to to ttjOO- 
dvpLov, vestibule, porch, Mk. ii. 2. Ta 7rp6~ 
dvpa, Xen. Cyr. vii. 5, 22. So IttI ^6- 



GYP 



184 



I A2 



pai9 Eti/ai, to he at the door^ i. e. ' near at 
hand,' Matt. xxiv. 33 ; also Ja. v. 9, Trpd t. 
^upu)V £o-Tj]/c£j/. — II. BY IMPL. entrance^ 
e. gr. of a cave or sepulclire, mouthy Matt, 
xxvii. 60. Mk. xv. 46. Horn. Od. ix. 243, 
and oft. Indeed, there is reason to think 
that this sense of ^vpa was the 'primary 
one, i. e. passage or outlet ; whence our 
prep, through. Thus, in Philostr. 946, it 
is put for oculus, which word, being a 
dimin. of ocus., and found in its original 
form in the Russian oA'o, means prim. ' the 
orifice through which we see as in Stob. 
307, 42, it is put for the orifice of the 
podex : metaph. access^ opportunity^ as 
dvoiysLV tyjv 3'upai/, to set open a door., 
i. e. ' to give access,' ' present opportunity,' 
Acts xiv. 27, dvoiy. Srvpav ttlcttem's : 
see Rev. iii. 8, ^vpa dvf.ioyixivy]^ 'free ac- 
cess to one;' meton. 'one who is the me- 
dium of access to any thing,' John x. 7, 
iyo) ei/uLL rj ^vpa toov Trpo^cLTODV. So 
Christ is said by Ignat. ad Phil. § 9, to be 
h ^upa Tou TLaTpo^. 

Gu^oso?, oy, o, (3'upa,) prop. & prim. 
a door ; lit. 'something to close the .Srupa,' 
or entrance to an apartment. The word 
seems to have been prim, an adj. with the 
ellips. of TTETpos. In lat. Gr. it came to 
mean a shield^ from the resemblance to a 
door. And so in N. T. Eph. vi. 16, fig. 

TOP ^. T^S 7ri(rT£&)S. 

Oupts, i^os, 77, (dim. of 3*15 pa, a pas- 
sage,) a little door or apertio^e, Pol. xii. 
25, 3 ; see on ^upa (2). In N. T. Acts 
XX. 9, KadrijULEvo^ Eiri Trj's 3'i;pi^o§, it sig- 
nifies a kind of open casement projecting in 
front, like the Turkish kiosh, or hay win- 
dow., shut or opened by a lattice, 2 Cor. 

xi. 33, hid ^upLOo?, a iviiidow^ or rather 
windore., i. e. an orifice to let in wind ; as 
fenestra in Latin means a light-hole. The 
word freq. occ. in the later Class, in this 
sense. 

Gi/pwpo?, ou, 6, 77, (3'upa, ovpo's^ a 
door-keeper., Mk. xiii. 34, o ^vp. John 
xviii. 16, 77 3'L'p.; of a shepherd keeping 
watch at the door of a fold, John x. 3. 
Sept. and Class. 

Oucta^ as, tj, (3-061),) sacrifice., i. e. I. 
PROP, the act of sacrificing., Matt. ix. 13. 

xii. 7, Tkzov ^eXo) Kal ou ^vaiav. Heb. 
ix. 26, did Tt]^ ^ucria^ avTcu. xi. 4, ai. 
and Class. Said of an expiatory sacrifice 
for sin, Eph. v. 2. Heb. v. 1, et al. — 11. 
by METON. ' the thing sacrificed,' the vic- 
tim, ' the flesh of the victim,' Mk. ix. 49. 
1 Cor. x. 18, OL EadiovTc^ Tas 3'uo'i'as, 
' who eat of the victims,' as was done by the 
priests and persons offering the sacrifice. 
Sept. and Class, ; metaph. 1 Pet. ii. 5, ttvev- 
(xaTLKal B'vaiaL. Rom. xii. 1, 'TrapacrTT]- 
crai Td crw/JLaTa VjULcov ^uaiav X^axrav. — 
III. FiGUR. of ' the service of obedience 



or praise' offered to God, offering., ohlation, 
Phil. ii. 17, 7j ^v(ria Trj<5 TTLaTacos. iv. 18. 
So 3". a|y£o-£a)s, ' offering of devout 
thanks,' Heb. xiii. 15, sq. and Sept. 

QvarLacrTiipLov, ov, to, (S'ucria^w,) 
an cdtar^ gener. Matt. v. 23, and oft. Sept. 
Jos. and Philo; spec, of the altar for 
burnt- offerings in the Temple, Matt, xxiii. 
35. Lu. xi. 51. So 1 Cor. ix. 13, bis, and 
X. 18, Koivcovoi TOU Srvcr. and Heb. xiii. 
10, (payaTu ek tov ^vcr. 'of the victims 
laid upon the altar;' symb. in heaven, Rev. 
vi. 9. xvi. 7, rjKOvcra tou 3'u<t. Xiyovro^^ 
' a voice from the altar,' Sept. ; of the 
altar of incense in the temple, made of 
gold, prop. Lu. i. 11 ; symbol, in heaven, 
Rev. viii. 3, 5. ix. 13. 

9ua), f. 3'iJ'cra), perf. pass. T£0y/>idi, 
aor. 1. pass, sTvdriv., to sacrifice., kill and 
offer in sacrifice., immolate., absol. Acts 
xiv. 13, 7]^e\e ^uelv, with dat, ver. 18, 
with acc. and dat. 1 Cor. x. 20. Sept. and 
Class. So TO Trd(TX<^ ^velv, 'to kill 
the paschal lamb,' i. e. as a species of sa- 
crifice, Mk. xiv. 12. 1 Cor. v. 7. Hence, 
as sacrifices were connected with feasting, 
^uEiv was sometimes simply to JciU, 
slaughter., i. e. animals for a feast, Matt, 
xxii. 4. Lu. XV. 23, Toy fxocrxov tov 
(TLTEUTov ^ucraTE. Acts X. 13. xi. 7 ; 
gener. John x. 10, and Sept. 

0 60 p a a/co9, o, a hr east-plate., cuirass^ 
Lat. lorica., armour covering the body 
from the neck to the thighs; prop. Rev. 
ix. 9, 17. Sept. and Class. ; fig. Eph. vi. 
14, TOV ^cop. TTj? SiKaLoaruvri?. 1 Th. v. 
8. Comp. Sept. Is. lix. 17. Wisd. v. 19. 



I. 



"la/ia, aTos, to, (la/xai,) healing., cure., 
as yapLtJixaTa iafxaTcov^ 1 Cor. xii. 9, 28, 
30. Sept. and Class. 

'lao/zai, f, dcTOfxai., (fr. iaw, cognate 
with idXkoi and iaivco., foveo., ^£pa- 
TTEvo),) deponent mid. to heal., cure., trans. 
(The pres. imperf. ito^rji/, and aor. 1. mid. 
iaad/uLiiv., have the active signification ; 
while perf. pass. Xafxai., aor. 1. pass, iddrjv, 
and f. 1. pass. iadvarojULaL., retain the pass, 
sense.) So with acc. Lu. v. 17, £t§ to 
ido-daL avT0U9. vi. 19. ix. 2, 11, 42. John 
iv. 47. Acts X. 38, al. ; pass. Matt. viii. 8, 
Kul ia077cr£Tat o TraTs fxov. Lu. vii. 7, al. 
foil, by aTTo, to he healed from or of any 
thing, 'Mk. V. 29. Lu. vi, 17. Sept. and 
Class. ; metaph. of moral diseases, to Jieal, 
i. e. save., from the consequences of sin. 
Matt. xiii. 15, nxniroTE — ETTLcrTpExlrwa-L 
KUL idarvofxai auTov<s. John xii. 40. 

"I acts, £cos, 77, (tdo/uat,) healing., cure., 



IAS 



185 



I A I 



Lu. xiii. 32. Acts iv. '2-2, 30. Sept. and 
Class. 

"lacTTTi?, i5o§, jasper^ a precious 
stone of viiiious colours, as purple, ceru- 
lean, green, &c. Rev. iv. 3. xxi. 11, 18, 

19. Sept. 

'laxpo?, ou, o, (iaoyuat,) a plnjsician^ 
Mk. ii. 17. V. 2b', ct al. and Sept. and 
Class. 

*I5£, lat. form for t^e, imper. aor. 2. of 
€T5oi;, see. In N. T. often partic. of ex- 
clamation, /o, behold ! e. gr. as calling at- 
tention to something present. Matt. xxv. 

20, 22, 25. Mk. xi. 21. John i. 48. Ad- 
dressed apparently to several, but directed 
to one, Mk. iii. 34. John i. 29. vii. 26, al. 
In the sense of observe^ consider^ Mk. xv. 
4. John V. 14. Gal. v. 2, at least as the 
Editors and Lexicog. direct. But, in 
fact, there is in those passages no ex- 
clamation at all ; nor, indeed, is iO£, in 
that case, a particle at all, but the imperat. 
of ildov : and, therefore, it ought to be 
accented 'Lde^ as is done by Griesb. and 
Scholz at the passage of Galat. ; and ought, 
in consistency, to have been done at the 
two others. 

'I^£a, as, 17, (fit^o),) species^ aspect^ ex- 
ternal appearance, Matt, xxviii. 3, and in 
Class, as Thuc. vi. 4. Eur. Bacch. 463. 

"I^tos, la, oi/, adj. (fr. I(5o§ for eT^os, 
species.) The word, as Lennep observes, 
denotes prop, specialise (though lot/cos is 
the more usual term to convey that idea,) 
and thence privus^ proprius^ privatus^ I. 
as pertaining to a private person, and not 
to the public, private, particular, opp. 
to 377MiO§, Horn. Od. iii. 82 ; or dnfxoGLO^^ 
Xen. Vect. iv. 21. Jos. Bell. Jud. iv. 4, 1. 
Hence in N. T. in two adverbial expres- 
sions : 1) i^i'a, individually e severally^ (opP- 
to h]fxo<TLa.e Xen. Hist. xi. 9, and oft. in 
Class.) 1 Cor. xii. 11, OLaipovv ioia eko.- 
CTTCp Kudu)^ (SovXetul. 2) kut' ISiav^ 
privately^ by oneself, apart from others, 
as said of an individual, alone, Matt. xiv. 
13, 23, ai/£/3T] ft§ TO opes KaT idiav. 
xvii. 1. Mk. vi. 31, al. ; of several, as a})art 
from all others. Matt. xvii. 19. Mk. iv. 
34. ix. 2, al. and Class. — II. as belonging 
to oneself, and not to another, own, pro- 
per , peculiar, viz. 1 ) denoting ownership, 
that of which one is himself the propri- 
etor, my oicn, thy oiun, his oicn. Sec. Used 
of THINGS, Matt. xxii. 5, ft§ top ISlov 
aypov. xxv. 15, id. Suvajuav. Mk. xv. 20, 
IjuaTia TO. lSlu. John v. 43, ev too ovofxaTL 
Tcp idio). vii. 18. Rom. x. 3, Tt;i/ idLau 
BiKaLoavvnv. xiv. 5. 2 Pet. i. 20, t^i'as 
i7rt\uo-£a)§. So eU t^v idiav ttoXlu, 
'where one resides,' Matt. ix. 1, or 'the 
seat of one's family,' Lu. ii. 3. Iv Ty iS'ia 
'jraTpt^t, John iv. 44. Pleonast. with a 



gen. of person in addition, John x. 12, ou 
ovK clcTL TO. Trpo^uTa ISia. 2 Pet. iii. 
3, 16. Sept. and Class. Hence -ra iom, 
gencr. possessions, property, Lu. xviii. 28, 
in MSS. Xen. Hist. x. 5 ; and spec, one's 
otrn house, home, John xix. 27, EXafSEv 
avT)]v o fxad)]Ti]<s Eh to. Idia. xvi. 32. 
Acts xxi. 6. Sept. Esth. v. 10. vi. 12, and 
Class. ; or oivn nation, people, John i. 11, 
i]XQ&v Ei<s TO. 'Idia. Also TrpdaaEiv to. 
LOLu, to transact one''s oivn affairs, 1 Thess. 
iv. 11. XuXeZv ek Tihv idicov, to speak 
out of ones oicn heart, i. e. disposition, 
character, John viii. 44. As said of per- 
sons, e. gr. loia acEX(p6^, John i. 42. 
avi]p^ 1 Cor. vii. 2. oecrTroTijs, 1 Tim. vi. 
1. dovXo^s, Matt. xxv. 14. Kupios, Rom. 
xiv. 4. Traryp, John v. 18. ulos, Rom. 
viii. 32. avpcpvXiTai, couidrymen, 1 Thess. 

ii. 14. Id. irpocprjTaL, i. e. ' of their own 
coLuitry,' 1 Thess. ii. 15. iotos avrcoU 
'jrpo<priTr\<5, Tit. i. 12, and Class. Hence 
oi 15lol, ojie's oivn household, family, 
1 Tim. V. 8. oicn friends, companions., 
John xiii. 1. Acts iv. 23. xxiv. 23. own 
people, countrymen, John i. 11. Collect. 
TO loLOv, John XV. 19. 2 Mace. xii. 22. 
Jos. B. J. iv. 4, 6. Diod. Sic. xiii. 92. 2) 
in the sense of peculiar, paiiicular, said of 
things, distinguishing one person from 
others, e. gr. idia olccXekto^, Acts i. 19. ii. 6, 
8. daLG-LdaLjaovLa, XXV. 19. y^dpiarfxa, 1 Cor. 
vii, 7, and Class. 3) as denoting that 
which, in its own nature, or by appoint- 
ment, pertains in any way to a person or 
thing, e. gr. Acts xiii. 36, Aaut^ fxkv 
yap idia yEVEo. \)Trr]pETrj(Ta<s, his oivn 
generation, in whicli he lived. 1 Cor. iii. 
8, TOf Idiov jULLcrddv — kottov, and xv. 23, 
Jude 6, Acts i. 25, Eh tov tottov t6v Iclov, 
to his oicn place, i. e. proper and appointed 
for him. So Kaipos 'IdLo?, or Kaipoi tdiOL^ 
oivn time, i. e. due, proper time, as de- 
termined of God, Gal. vi. 9. 1 Tim. ii, 6. 
vi. 15. Tit. i. 3. 4) sometimes ldL0£ is 
put instead of a possess, pron. without any 
emphasis, e. gr. Matt. xxii. 5. xxv. 14. 
1 Pet. iii. 1, 5. Also equiv. to favTou, 
1 Cor. vii. 2, k'/cacTTos ttjv kavTov 
yvvalKa Eyirco, Kai EKacrTt] tov IdLov 
dvdpa. John i. 41, tov ddEX<pdv TovldLOv. 

'I^ttuTij?, ov, 6, {ldL09,) 1) prop, and 
often in Class, a private p)erson, as dis- 
ting. from one in a public station, hold- 
ing any office civil or ecclesiastical ; 2) 
from one who practises an art profes- 
sionally, compared with one who is merely, 
as we say, an amateur. So in Xen. Mern, 

iii. 7, 7, we have IdiuiTaL opp. to da-KrjTal, 
as in Thuc. ii. 48, 3, iaTpo? to iOiwT7j§, 
and in Plato Pol. p. 433, laTpol to IdLwTaL. 
3) ' one who is unexercised in an art^ opp. 
to ' one who is exercised in it,' Thuc. vi. 
72, ioLooTU's—x^LporEXvai^, So in N. T. 



I AO 



186 



lEP 



Acts iv. 13, avdp. aypdjULjULaTOL Kai 
loLwraL. 1 Cor. xiv. 16, 23, 24, as in 
Athen. 176, idiooTrj? kul dva\(pd(^r)TO^. 
Artem. iv. 59, tous dTratOEUTOus iotcoras. 
So 2 Cor. xi. 6, id. tm Xo'yoj, ' one devoid 
of eloquence,' or excellency of speech, 
(see 1 Cor. ii. 1, 4,) whose language and 
address is plain and unpolished, as at Ex. 
iv. 10, Moses says, ' I am not a man of 
words^ or, as Jos. renders it, idicoTt]^^ sc. 
xto \6yu) : and simil. Xenoph. de Venat. 

xiii. 4, calls himself tc^tcoTi]?, as opp. to 
the <ro(pLai-al^ toIs fxkv ovo/maaLV ov (T£- 
(TocpLariJLEva)^ X&yoo' cou ok oiovTai si£ 
dpsTTjv OL KaXu)^ TTEiraiOEVixivoL 6pd(jo<3 
kyvoocrixiva ^rjTco XeyELv. At 1 Cor. xiv. 
16, 23, it means, ' one not endued with the 
gift of tongues.' 

'1 5 01/, a demonstr. particle, lof heliold ! 
(prop, for loou, imperat. of aor. mid. el^o- 
luLr]v\,) serving to call attention to some- 
thing beyond oneself ; usually put at the 
beginning of a clause, or only with Kal be- 
fore it; but sometimes in the middle^ before 
words which are to be particularly noted, 
e. gr. Lu. xiii. 16 ; constr. 1) with a nom. 
and finite verb. Matt. i. 20, i^oi;, dyy&Xo^ 
ILvpiov ECpdvr] avTw. Sept. and Class. 
2) from the Heb. with a nom. simply, 
where the verb of existence is implied. 
Matt. iii. 17, ioou, (pojur] ek tu)U ovpavcou. 
Acts viii. 36, ioov vooop. Foil, by iyw, 
or its equiv. expressing obedience, Lu. i. 
38. Acts ix. 10. Heb. ii. 13, and Sept. 

'I^pw5, wTos, 6, (loos,) sweat, Lu. 
xxii. 44. 

*l£paT£ta, a?, 77, {lEpaTEuco,) priest- 
Tiood, i. e. ' the priests' ofBce,' Lu. i. 9. 

'IgpaTEu^a, axo?, to, (IgpaTEuo),) 
priesthood, meton. and collect, for priests^ 
i. e. Christians, who are said dvEviyKai 
irvzvfxaTLKd^ ^'uo'ia?, 1 Pet. ii. 5, and are 
called (SaarLXELou lepaTfu/xa, ver. 9. 

'IspaTsuw, f. Evarco^ {lEp€v<3^) to be a 
priest^ to officiate as priest, Lu. i. 8. Sept. 
and Class. 

'l£/0£l»S, £60S, 6, (t£|009,) « pviest^ OUC 

who performs the sacred rites ; said of 
heathen priests, b hpEV's tou Ato§, Acts 

xiv. 13. Sept. and Class. ; of the Jewish 
priests, gener. Matt. viii. 4 ; of the High- 
priest, Acts V. 24, and oft. ; of Melchise- 
dec, Heb. vii. 1 ; of Jesus, as a spiritual 
High-priest for ever, v. 6. Fig. of Chris- 
tians, who are called IspEl^ tw Oem, priests 
unto God, as rendering to him spiritual 
sacrifices, acceptable through Jesus Christ, 
Rev. i. 6. V. 10. xx. 6. 

"lEpbv, ov, TO, (i£pos,) atemple,\.e. 
a consecrated place, whether of the true 
God, Matt. xii. 6, et al. ssepe, (mcluding 
the temple proper, or fane (vao^), and all 
its courts, &c.) or of a heathen temple, 



as the term is used. Acts xix. 27. Else- 
where in N. T. only said of the Jewish 
temple in Jerusalem, and always in re- 
ference to it as rebuilt by Herod the 
Great. According to Jos. Ant. xv. 11, 
3. Bell. V. 5, 1, who minutely describes 
it, the whole circuit of the temple (to 
LEpov) consisted of three parts, or en- 
closures, viz. the Temple proper (i/ao?) 
in the midst, and two circular courts, or 
areas, around it. The jfirst, or outer court, 
(which was also the lowest, and surround- 
ed the whole temple,) was open for all, and 
contained the piazzas, where the people 
collected, and where things and animals 
pertaining to the sacrifices were bought 
and sold, as well as money exchanged. It 
is often called by Christian writers, ' the 
court of the Gentiles.' From this to the 
second or inner court, (to iiEVTEpov lEpov,) 
was an ascent of fourteen steps, and then 
of five more. This was divided into the 
court, or separate place, of the women, 
and the court of Israel, or of the priests ; 
and none but such as were ceremonially 
clean were permitted to enter it. Here, 
too, the sacrifices were prepared and offer- 
ed, for here stood the altar of burnt-offer- 
ings before the entrance of the z/ao's. 
Comp. Matt, xxiii. 35. The third and 
highest enclosure was the temple itself, 
(z/aos, TO LEpov TO TpiTov,) iuto which 
the priests alone might enter, (comp. Lu. 
i. 9, 10,) and which was divided into two 
parts, the sanctuary (to ciyLov) and the 
holy of holies (to ayLov dyiiav). The 
whole temple, therefore, consisted strictly 
of two parts, 6 va6<s, and to Trpovaov, or 
the courts, &c. Hence to ispov is put for 
the whole, and also for the nrpovaov, but 
not for the i/aos; e. gr. 1) gener. and for 
the ii'liole. Matt. xxiv. 1, Ta? olKodofxd^ 
TOU LEpov. Mk. xiii. 1, 3. Lu. xxi. 5. 2) 
of the courts, irpovaov. Matt. xii. 5, 01 

LEpEL£ EV TM UpcO TO C-d(B(3aT0V ^E^f]- 

Xova-L. Mk. xi. 11. 3) of the outer court, 
where things were bought and sold. Matt, 
xxi. 12 ; where also our Lord disputed 
and taught, ver. 23, as also the apostles. 
Acts V. 20, et al. 

IspOTTp ETTf]?, £09, 6, 77, adj. (l£|0O9, 

'TTpiirui,) prop, 'suitable to a sacred jt?Z<2ce,' 
Lucian i. 537, t. KvLcraa, or purpose, Jos. 
Ant. xi. 8, 5, Up. vTrdvTija-Lv, or 'be- 
coming to a sacred place,' as Tit. ii. 3, ev 
ica^acTTrjfJiarrL LEpoirpETTEL^, 'in deport- 
ment such as becomes holy persons,' 
august. So Xen. Sympos. viii. 40, ii/ 
Eoprrj LEp07rpE7ria-TaT09 doKEl^ Elvai 
TU)U 7rpoyEyEV'i]p.iva}v. Dio Cass, 843, 
24, i£po7rp£7r£t9 6Vt£9, sacrosanctL Philo, 
t. ii. 457, ^EpaiTEVTal Oeov yEyovacn, 
ov Xfjoa. KaTadvouTE?, dXX' LEpoTrpETrel^ 
(scil. oi/T£9), TU^ iavTcoi; dLapoia^ Kara- 



I EP 



187 



I A A 



fTKEvd'^SLU U^LOVl/TEi. Plut. vi. 37, 12, 

hp. sanctum ct pium.^ deceits. 

'lepos, a, 6v^ adj. (fr, tea), to give up,) 
prop, and in Class, sacred^ i.e. 'conse- 
crated to God or divine worship also 
said of utensils set apart for sacred pur- 
poses, or rites and ceremonies appropriated 
to divine worship. In N. T. the word oc- 
curs only in neut. plur. to. Ispa^ 1) in 
the sense sacred rites^ as 1 Cor. ix. 13, oi 
TO. ispa ipyaX^o/jLEvoL, ' those performing 
the sacred rites.' So Hom. Od. v. 101, ot 
T£ deoLCTL Upd TE pLX^ovcTL. Luciau Pseu- 
dol. 12, oTav fJLjjTE TO. Lspd UpovpyrjTai. 
Plato, 394, BeI ixe n-oov lEpoiv k'nrLfXEXi]^!]- 
vuL, et al. ; of sacred rites of every kind, 
Thuc. i. 25. 

'l£pO0ruA.£60, f. 770-0), {lEp6<Jv\o^^) 1) 

prop, as in Class, to rob temples^ or, in any 
other way, to commit sacrilege, 2) as in 
Rom. ii. 22, lepo(tv\eI'5 : metaph. to pro- 
fane the temple^ by withholding from it the 
support, in tithes, oblations, &c. appro- 
priated to it by God. 

prop, a temple-robber., or, like sacrilegus in 
Latin, a profane person. Acts xix. 37, one 
who offers contempt to the worship of any 
deity, as the w'ords following, ovte ^Xacrcp. 
TTju Oeoz/, more clearly express, i. e. by 
denying her deity. 

'I £|Ooup y £60, f. vcrco, {hpovpyd?., fr. 
lEpov, and obsol. £pyw,) equiv. to tu lspd 
kpydX^ofxaL^ to perform sacred rites., espec. 
sacrifice, to officiate as a priest, Jos. Ant. 

vi. 6, 2. Hdian. v. 3, 16. In N. T. fig. in 
the Christian sense, Rom. xv. 16, Ispovp- 
yovvTa TO EvayyiXiov., ' ministering as a 
priest in respect to the Gospel.' 4 Mace. 

vii. 8, T0v<i LEpovpyovvTa<s t6v vo/ixov 
idico aLpLUTL. Greg. Naz. lEp. ttjv iifxoou 
atoTTipLav. 

'Ifpworui;?], 77s, 7j, (hpos,) priesthood., 
Heb. vii. 11, seqq. Class. 

'I/cay6§, 77, 01/, adj. (t/cco, I/caz/o),) 
prop. ' coming to, reaching unto,' and 
hence sufficing., as applied both to quan- 
tity and number. I. as said of quantity, 
sufficient., and 1 ) of things, enoiigh., 2 Cor. 

ii. 6, LKaVOV T(Z TOLOVTCO T] ETTLTLfxia 

avTYj. Lu. xxii. 38. LKavou., ^ it is enough., 
desist.' Sept. and Class. Hence to l/ca- 
voi/, satisfaction., e. gr. to lkuvov ttolelv 
Tii/t, ^0 ?naJce satisfaction, to satisfy, Mk. 
XV. 15, and Class, to LKavov XafSElu, ' to 
take satisfaction,' i. e. security, (by Latin- 
ism,) Acts xvii. 9, 2) of persons, compe- 
tent to do any thing, Eurip. Phoen. 564. 
Hdot. viii. 35^ 5. Thuc. oft. So, foil, by 
Trpos Ti, 2 Cor. ii. 16, Trpos TaVTa tl<s 
I/cai/os ; and Class, by inf. aor. 2 Cor. iii. 
5. 2 Tim. ii. 2, and Class. Also, in the 
sense of competent^ worthy.^ foil, by inf. 



aor. Matt. iii. 11, ou ou/c ei\.Cl iKavo? Ta 
VTT. (3a(TTdaaL. Mk. i. 7. Lu. iii. 16; 
pres. 1 Cor. xv. 9. Hdot. viii. 36. Xen. 
Mem. i. 2, 27, Ik. /xa07jT7}s. Plut. ix. 4, 
3, yvi/ii LKavy] to Eldo9. Hdot. iii. 4. — II. 
said of NUiViBER or magnitude, abundant, 
great, much, plur. many, Matt, xxviii. 12, 
dpyvpia LKavd. Mk. x. 46, o^)(Xov iku- 
vov. Sept. and Class. So of time, iKavai 
v/xtpaL, many days,' Acts ix. 23, 43, al. 
1KUU69 xpoVos, ' a long time,' genit. Acts 
xxvii. 9. viii. 11, & Class, acc. XjOoVous 
iKauov^, Lu. XX. 9. So ek -x^povoov lku- 
vcou, ' of a long time,' Lu. viii. 27. if 
LKuvov, id. Lu. xxiii. 8. kcp' Itzavov, * a 
long while,' Acts xx. 11, and Class. 

'I/cayoT7]s, TITO'S, 77, {iKav 69,) fitness 
for any purpose, also competency, or \diility 
to do any thing, 2 Cor. iii. 5, 77 LKavory]^ 
rifxcov EK Tou Qeov, ' ability to reason out 
any thing.' Plato, Lys. frag, xxvii. 35, 
' ability to speak.' Plato, 215, 930. 

'I AC a yo CO, f. uxTio, {iKavo?,) to make 
sufficieiit, render competent, ov fit ; foil, by 
acc. 2 Cor. iii. 6. Col. i. 12. And so in 
Class, but only in pass. 

'iKETrjpia, as, 77, (fem. of adj. Ikettj- 
pL09, by an ellip. of pd^dos,) 1) prop, 
' the suppliant branch of olive,' which 
suppliants held forth, by way of depre- 
cation; so Hdot. V. 51, and often in Class. 
2) metaph. the supplication, or petition., 
thus implied, Polyb. 7rpo[3dXXEadaL Ike- 
T')]pLav. Isocr. p. 46, LKETtipia^ Kal 0£7?- 

(T£iS irOLOVfXEVOL. So Hcb. V. 7, OEri(TEL<S 

Kal LKETYipia^ TTpocrrivEyKa^, 

'I/c/xas, aoos, 77, {lkoo, venio. So Hom. 
II. xvii. 392, iKfxd^ £i377,) moisture, vapour, 
Lu. viii. 6. Sept. and Class. 

'iXapo^, d, dv, adj. (i\ao5,) cheerful, 
joyous, 2 Cor. ix. 7, lX. ^o'ttjs, alacris. 
Sept. and Class. 

'lXapoT77 9, 7]tos, 77, (tXapos,) cheer- 
fulness, alacrity, Rom. xii. 8, kv IX. for 
IXapu)^. Sept. and Class. 

'IXda-Ko/xuL, f dcrofxaL, (iXao5,) mid. 
V. without an act. form, to recorccile to 
oneself, (i. e. by expiation, to propitiate,) sc. 
Tov 0£oV, Jos. Ant. vi. 6, 5, or tous ^eov^, 
Xen. CEc. v. 20. In N. T. with acc. Ta? 
dfxapTLa?, ' to propitiate, as to sins,' to 
make propitiation for sins, Heb. ii. 17. 
Sept. with dat. Aor. 1. imperat. IXacr07]Tt 
in pass, sense. Be propitious, be merciful ! 
with dat. of pers. Lu. xviii. 13. Sept. Ps. 
XXV. 11. Dan. ix. 19. The Classical form 
is 'lXtjOl, or iXaOt. 

'IX ucrfxo^, ov, 6, {lXd<TK0fxai,) pro- 
pitiation, expiation, abstr. for concr. '"pro- 
pitiator,' 1 John ii. 2. iv. 10, and Sept. 

'IXao-T77pto§, a, oy,adj. (IXacr/co/xai,) 
propitiatory, expiatory.^ Jos. Ant. xvi. 7, 



I A E 



188 



I N A 



1, iXacTT. iJivrifxa. In N. T. 1) masc. o 
iXaa-TtjoLo^^ a propitiator^ '• one ayIio 
makes propitiation,' Rom. iii. 25. 2) neiit. 
TO iXacrTvpLov^ mercy-seat^ Heb. ix. 5 ; 
prop, the lid or cover of the ark of the 
covenant. And so in Sept. 

"iXews, 60, o, ?7, adj. (Attic, for iXao?, 
from. IXao),) in Class, used chiefly of the 
gods appeased or propitiated, propitious^ 
fjracious^ as often in Horn. Find, and the 
Greek Tragedians ; though sometimes, of 
men, placcMe^ or gentle. In X. T. only 
of God, pi^opitioiis^ merciful^ dat. 
Heh. viii. 12, iXetos tcro/xat Tats aoLKLaL<5 
auTcoi/, where the thing is put for the per- 
son, q. d. auTots aoLKOL^ oven. Indeed, 
in the Class, the dat. is always of pers. as 
strict propriety requires. Yet that of thing 
occurs in Sept. at Jer. xxxvi. 3. 1 Kings 

viii. 34, 36, 50. 2 Chron. vi. 25, 27, 39. 
\ii. 14. Found only elsewhere in N. T. 
in the plirase, formed on Heb. tXetos cot, 
scil. 'icTTUi 0£09, lit. God he merciful to 
thee ! God forgive thee ! equiv. to ' God 
forbid that thou shouldest do so,' fxi) 
yivoLTo ! an exclamation of aversion, Matt, 
xvi. 22, and often in Sept. 

'I/xd§, ayT09, 6, (fr. I'co, i7?/xi, 'to send 
forth, let fall,' as said of a welhrope,) 
prop, a thong., leathern strap ; and hence, 
the leathern strap witli \Yhich the sandals 
of the ancients were fistened to the foot. 
Plut. Symp. iv. 2, tcov virooi-ifxaToov 
Toijs L/uLdvTa<5. Xcn. An. iv. 5, 14. And 
so in Lu. iii. 16. John i. 27, and Sept. ; 
also, a leathern ?'ojD'e, such as was used by 
the ancients for various purposes where 
strength was requisite ; as well-ropes, nau- 
tical ropes to raise up the main yards and 
sails ; also ropes which were used for tying 
up horses, (as Horn, oft.) or securing pri- 
soners, Hom. II. xxi. 30, dfjds o OTricraco 
X£i,oa§ £. LfJidcrLv. Find. Nem. vi. 60, l/mdv- 
TL x^^oas oedc'i's. Accordingly, at Acts 
xxii. 25, TrpoiTSLvav avTov xoTs Lfxacnv^ 
the sense may be, as Bretschn. supposes, 
^ the thongs, or leathern ropes,' with which 
the hands of malefactors were bound, in 
order to be scourged ; but, as I have 
show^n in my note in loc. there is refer- 
ence rather to the leathern belts attached 
to the whipping-post, and thence drawn and 
buckled around the body of the criminal 
to hold him fast. So 4 Mace. ix. il, /cat 
S, dvappn^avTi<s tov y^irijova^ 6Ltdi](Tav 
Tas x^tpas avTOV kul tous ^pa^LOva<s 
Lfxdcnv EKUTipwdEV. 

'I/xaTt^6o, f. tcro), (luaTioi;,) to clothe. 
In N. T. only pass. perf. part. Lfxan-Lafxi- 
fos, clothed., Mk, v. 15. 

'I/xaTtoy, ou,t6,( dim . of Ijxa for sT/xa , ) 
a garment., I. gexer. any garment. Matt. 

ix. 16, £7rl IjULaTLU) ira\ai<jo. Mk. ii. 21. 
Lu. V. 36. plur. toc liidna^ garments^ 



clothing., raiment., including both the outer 
and inner garment (mantle & tunic), Matt, 
xvii. 2, TO. ijuuTLa avn-ov iyiv&TO Xevkcl, 
et al. s£epe. So in the phrase to rend the 
clothes^ xx\i. 65. Actsxiv. 14. xvi. 22, al, 
Sept. and Class. — II. spec, the outer gar- 
ment., mantle^ pallium., different from the 
tunic (xtTcoy), and worn over it ; comp. 
Acts ix. 39. It seems to have been a 
large piece of woollen cloth nearly square, 
which was wTapped round the body, or 
fastened about the shoulders, and served 
also to wrap the wearer in at night. 
Hence it might not be seized by a credi- 
tor, though the tunic could be, Matt. v. 40. 
Lu. vi. 29, et al. saepe. So Matt. ix. 20, 
21, plur. Td i/uLccTLa., outer garments.^ which 
were often laid aside, Acts \di. 58, al. Sept. 
and Class, as Xen. Mem. ii. 7, 5. 

'I/xaTia/xos, ou, 6, (I/xaTi^w,) cloth- 
ing., raiment ; gener. clothes., Lu. vii. 25, 
and ix. 29. Acts xx. 33, al. Sept. and 
Class. 

'llx&LpofxaL., depon. ('LjULEpo^^) to long 
for any thing or person ; and hence, to 
have a strong affection for any person ; 
with gen. 1 Th. ii. 8, text. rec. where lat. 
Edd. ofxs'ip. wh. see. Sept. and Class. 

"li/a, conjunct, that., construed usually 
with the subj. seldom with the opt. often 
with the indie. ; prop. TeXi/cws OTf?ial, as 
marking the end, purpose, or cause /or or on 
account of which any thing is done, to the 
end that., in order that it might or may be 
so and so ; but also kKfSaTLKw^ or eventzial, 
as marking simply the event or residt of 
any action, that in which it terminates, 
' so THAT it icas^ is., icill be so and so,' I. 
PROP. teXlku)^., as marking the final end, 
purpose, or cause, to the end that., in order 
that ; and 'Lva in order that not^ lest. 
— T. with the subjunctive., 1) preceded 
by the pres. or an aor. of any mood except 
the indie, or by the perf in a pres. sense, 
John vi. 38, where the subj. marks what 
it is supposed will really take place, Matt, 
ix. 6, 'iva eidrjTE — tots Xeygt, ' to the 
end that ye may know,' xviii. 16. xix. 16, 
Lu. viii. 10. xii. 36. John i. 7, ovto^ 
?)/\0£i/ 'iua fxapTvp-ncrr). v. 34, Tav-ra 
Xiyud %va v/uLet^ (tcoOtjte, and vi. 38, 
KaTa(3il3i]Ka oij)( 'lva ttolu). xi. 4, xvii, 
21, 'iva 6 Koa/uLo? TTLCJT&ixrr]. Acts xvi. 
30. Rom. i. 11. Gal. vi. 13, ssepiss. 'lva 
jui], Lu. viii. 12. Rom. xi. 25, and Class. 
2) by the imperat. the subjunct. as above 
in 1 ; after imper. pres. Luke xxi. 36, 
aypvTrvELTZ 'iva KUTa^LoodriTE. John vii. 
3. 1 Cor. ^^i. 5. Eph. iv. 28. vi. 3, al. 
'lva fxi], Matt. vii. 1. John v. 14, ah ; 
after imper. aor. Matt. xiv. 15, aTroXvcrov 
TOu§ o)(/\oi's, 'iva dyopdorooa-Lv (^pw/ULanra. 
Mk. XV. 32. 'iva ftr/. Matt. xvii. 27. John 
iv. 15, So after an exhortation, dyw/x£i/, 



1 N A 



189 



TOY 



Mk. i. 38. Rom. iii. 8, al. ; after an imper. 
irnpl. Matt. xxvi. 5. John i. 22, and 
Class. 3) by the fat. the subj. as above 
in 1, Lu. xvi. 4, iyvvov tl TrotTjcrw, 'lua 
Si^couraL fxE. 1 Cor. xvi. 6 ; interrog. 
Matt. xix. 16. 'iua Lu. xviii. 5, and 
Class. 4) by a past tense ; where the 
subj. strictly stands instead of the opt. and 
marks an action which, in itself or its con- 
sequences, is still concinued, or which the 
speaker regards as certain, either gener. as 
Mk.iii. 14. Lu. i. 3, 4, eoo^e — ctol ypai/zat, 
iva sTTiyvw^. John i. 31. iii. 16, 17. viii. 
6, oft. 'ii/a'ij.}), Eph. ii. 9. Heb. xi. 28; or 
in simple narrations, Matt, xxvii. 26, 
^Itjcovu 7raptd(joKeu 'iva crTavpcody. Mk. 
vi. 41, eoidou toI? yuaOijTats, iVa irapa- 
ScocTLv auTOL^., al. iVa /u??, John xviii. 28. 
xix. 3L — II. with the op/, preceded by the 
pres. where the opt. marks what viai/ pos- 
sible/ take place, Eph. i. 16, 17, gv ttuvo- 
fxai Eu^apLCTTwv — Lua 6 0£os 00)7], &c. iii. 
16. — III- with the indie, but in N. T. only 
the fut. and pres. and not with a past 
tense, as often in the Class, writers. 1) 
with indie, fut. in the same sense as the 
subj. and preceded only by the pres. 1 Cor. 
xiii. 3, sau Trapadu) to crco/ia fxov 'Lva 
Kavd-t'iawiiiaL. 1 Pet. iii. 1. So fut. and 
subj. together, Rev. xxii. 14, 'iua 'ia^aL tj 
fc^ovcTLa avTwv — Kal EiatXdaxrLV eh ttjv 
■ttoXlu. Eph. vi. 13. 2) with indie, pres. 
in the same sense, preceded by the pres. 
&c. Gal. iv. 17, ^ijXoucrti/ u/xa?, 'iva av- 
Tous X^7]\ovTE. 1 Cor. iv. 6, 'iva fxr] <pv- 
aLouadE. Not found in Classical Greek. — 
II. EKftaTLKU3<5^ as marking simply the 
event or result of an action, so that. In 
N. T. only with the subj. implying some- 
thing which really takes place ; in Class, 
writers oftener with tlie indie, of a past 
tense. 1) preceded by the pres. Lu. xxii. 
29, 30, diaTLdEjUiaL vjuuv — 'iva £cr6njT£ Kai 
•7r(2/7]T£, &c. John vi. 7. Rom. iii. 19. vi. 
1, al. lua |U.J7, Acts ii. 25. Gal. v. 17. 2) 
by the imjjerat. Acts viii. 19, Sore Kafxal 
TTjv E^ovaiav 'ravTi]v^ 'iva — Xafx^avrj., 
&c. Ja. i. 4. 1 Pet. iv. 13. 'Lva /xr?, Tit. 
iii. 14. Rev. iii, 11. 3) by the fut. John 
V. 20, fxeiX^ova tovtoov oe'l^el avTco fijOya, 
Yua V/J.EL9 ^avfj.dX^i]TE. Lu. xi. 50. John 
xvi. 24. 4) by a past tense, Lu. ix. 45, 
rjyvSouv to prifxa touto, 'Lva fxt] atcrdcov- 
TUL auTo. John ix. 2, tl<s vp^apTEv, 'Lva 
TvcpXd^ yEvvt]d^; Rom. xi. 11, /uli) 'iiTTaL- 
arav., 'Lva TricrooaL' and ver. 31. To this 
is to be referred the frequent phrase 'Lva 
'TrXrjpcodrj rj ypacpi]., to pr]dkv., &c. used 
as a formula of quotation, and implying 
that something took place, not in order 
that a prophecy might be fulfilled, but so 
that it was fulfilled. Matt. i. 22, touto 
oXov yiyovEv 'Lva 7rXi]p(x)dri to pTjOiy, al. 
— III. hi later Greek., 'iva^ in various con- 
structions, lost the power of marking either 



purpose or event, and became simply a 
demonstr. conjunct, like our that; i. e. 
merely pointing out that to which the 
])reccding words refer, or introducing 
something already implied in the preced- 
ing words. In this way 'Lva with the 
subjunct. came often to be employed 
where earlier writers used the infin. or 
other particles ; e. gr. 1) used instead of 
the construction ivith the infin. originally 
perhaps because the infin. also often implies 
purpose; e. gr. either afterwords and phrases 
implying command and the like, Mk. xiii. 
34, Tw ^vpoDptZ EVETEiXaro 'Lva ypvyopy- 
John xi. 57. Acts xvii. 15, and oft. ; with 
some word of command implied, Eph. v. 
33 ; or after verbs of entreating., persuad- 
ing., Sec. Lu. ix. 40, EdEvi)-i]v twv /xaOrjTOJi/ 
(Tov 'Lva EK^aX(x3<jLv avTo., and xxii. 32; 
or after verbs of desire, &c. Matt. vii. 12, 
'ocra av ^eXy]te 'Lva ttolwctlv vpuv. xviii. 
14, ^iX}]pa eaTL 'Lva. John vi. 39. 2) 
after ttoieo) in the sense to cause., to effect., 
&c. John xi. 37, ovK -rjovva-ro ovtcs TroLrj- 
craL 'Lva Kal outos fxi] diroQavr] ; Col. iv. 
16. Also after w^ords implying j^/?2e5s, sufii- 
ciency., need.,SLC. ovk a^Lo^ Eip.L 'Lva Xuco), 
John i. 27. LKavo^., Matt. viii. 8. x. 25, 
John ii. 25, al. 3) instead of ottcos after 
verbs of taking care^ endeavouring., &c. 
(^Xettete 'Lva dcp6(3a}<5 yEVTjTaL., 1 Cor. 
xvi. 10. ^?]\oa), 1 Cor. xiv. 1, et al. 4) 
instead of oTi, Mk. ix. 12, yiypaiTTaL 
'Lva TToXXd Trdldr] : with oTi, Rom. iv. 23. 
5) of time, for ote, John xii. 23, al. only 
in St. John. 

'Ivanri or 'Lva Ti, as an interrog. par- 
ticle, ellipt. for 'Lva tl yiv^Tai., in order 
that tuhat., i. e. may take place .^^ equiv. to 
'to what end.^' why.^ wherefore.^ Matt, 
ix. 4. xxvii. 46. Lu. xiii. 7. 

'1 09, ou, 6, (tr^ftt,) prop, 'something 
sent out or emitted.'' Hence, a missile 
weapon., arroiv., Horn. II. xv. 451. In 
N. T. 1 ) ritst., as being emitted on metals, 
Ja. V. 3, and Class. 2) poison., venom., as 
emitted by serpents, &c. Rom. iii. 13. Ja. 
iii. 8, and later Class. 

'lofoat^o), f. t(rw, ('lou^alo?,) to Jvr- 
daize., i. e. to live like the Jews, follow 
their manners, customs, rites, Gal. ii. 14^ 
equiv. to 'loi/oat/ccos X,^v. 

'lovda'tKo^, I?, Of, adj. Jeivish, cur- 
rent among the Jews, juivdoL^ Tit. i. 14. 
Jos. 

'lou^at/cws, adv. Jewishly., in the 
Jewish manner, Gal. ii. 14, and Jos. 

'lou^a tosr, a, oz/, ('lou^as,) prop. adj. 
Jeivish. In N. T. 1) fem. prop. 77 'lou- 
^a'la x^P" 7^1 l^i^ la7id of Judcea., 
Mk. i. 5. John iii. 22. yyW; 'lou^a/a, 
a Jewess, Acts xvi. 1. xxiv. 24. 2) 
masc. 6 lou^alos, as subst. a Jew., prop. 



10 Y 



190 



I 2T 



'one of the tribe of Judah,' but in later 
usage applied to all the inhabitants of 
Judaea or Palestine, John iv. 9. Usually 
plur. OL 'lovdaioL, the Jeics, xix. 21, 
oft. 'lovSaToL K'at "E/\.\?)z/£§, Acts xiv. 1. 
By synecd. oi 'lovSaloi is put for the chief 
men, leaders of the Jews, John i. 19. v. 
15, and oft. As adj. joined with a noun, 
e. gr. avr]p 'lovdaTo's, Acts x. 28. plur. ii. 
14. \j/EvSo7rpo(p7iTri^-, xiii. 6. apxi^spev^, 
xix. 14. Sept. and Class. 

'lovdaicrjULo?, ov, 6, Judaism, the 
Jewish religion opp. to heathenism, 2 Mace, 
ii. 21. xiv. 38. In N. T. opp. to Chris- 
tianity, Gal. i. 13, sq. 

'iTrTreus, ews, o, (tTTTros,) a horseman, 
plur. iTTTrgTs, cavalry, Acts xxiii. 23, 32. 
Sept. and Class, opp. to irtX^LKoi, Xen. 
Cyr. ii. 4, 18. 

'iTTTTt/cos, r/, 6v, adj. (iTTTTos,) eques- 
trian ; by impl. skilled in riding. In N. T. 
neut. TO LirTTLKov, i. e. Tay}xa : collect. 
the horsemen, cavalry, as in Engl, the horse, 
Rev. ix. 16, and Class. 

"Ittttos, 01', o, a horse, Ja. iii. 3. 

"^Ipt?, ioo?, 77, a rainhoiv, iris, Rev. iv. 
3, x. 1, and Class. 

'IcrayyEXo?, ou, 6, adj. (Tcros, ay- 
7eXo9,) angel-like, Lu. xx. 36. Comp. 
the Homeric tVoGgos. 

'^Icro9, t?, 01/, adj. Vtke, cdihe, equal, 
used of measure, quantity, condition, na- 
ture, and the like. Matt. xx. 12, to-ofs 
rjfxiv cuTous kiroiricra^. Lu. vi. 34, 'Lva 
diroXafSayaL to. \aa. John v. 18, Icoi/ 
kaxjTov TTOLuw TOO Gew. Phil. ii. 6, to 
filivat Taa Bsw, "with which comp. lo-a 
^-fots, Horn. Od. xi. 303, and tara Tots 
KaXoL^ (ppovncTEL, Arlstoph. Concion. 630. 

'Io-oT>??, iiTO^, V, (To-o?,) likeness, equa- 
lity, as said of equal state or propor- 
tion, 2 Cor. viii. 13, Io-o'tijto?. Plut. 
vi. 367, 2, ovok biKaLocrvvr] ovo iaoTTj's. 

'lo-oTtfioe, ov, 6, adj. (Icros, TLfxi],) 
in Class, and Jos. a/zX^e honoured, alike 
prized, i.e. of equal honour; in N. T. 
' alike precious, of like value,' 2 Pet. i. 
1, toIq icroTLfxov Vfxiv XayovcTL ttlcttlv, 
or rather to-o is not to be referred to the 
preciousness, but to St. Peter, as a like 
partaker in it. 

'I cro\|/uxo5i ou, 6, ^, adj. (To-os, 
y>/,) like-minded, Phil. ii. 20. Sept. Ps. 
Iv. 13. ^sch. Ag. 1479. 

"la-Tri lULi, f. cTT-ncra), aor. 1. ea-Ttjo-a, 
aor. 2. sa-TTiv, perf. k'o-Tij/ca, pluperf io-Tt?- 
K-gti; and £lcrT>7K£:f, 3 pers. pi. Att. sa-n-rj- 
icEcrav, perf. infin. kar^Kivai contr. £o-Ta- 
vai, perf. part. £crT?}K:tbs, contr. scttws, 
coo-a, COS, aor. 1. pass. kcyraQ^v, fut. 1. 
pass. (TTadncropLai. The significations of ' 
this verb are divided between the trans. ] 



j to cause to stand, to place, and the intrans. 
to stand, I. trans, in the pres. imperf. 
flit, and aor. 1. of the active, to cause to 
stand, to set, to place, 1) with acc. and 
adjunct implying place where, Acts xxii. 
30, Jla\)\ov 'icTT^dEv avTov<5, ' before 
them.' Matt. iv. 5, la-Trja-tu avTOu kirl to 

TTTEpvyLOU TOV LEpoV . Lu. iv. 9. So ETtI 

or EK dt^Loov, Matt. xxv. 33. kv fxiarw, 
xviii. 2 ; gener. to cause to stand forth.^ 
Acts i. 23, £o-Ti]crai/ ovo. vi. 13. opp. to 
falling, Rom. xiv. 4, and Sept. 2) to esta- 
blish, conjirm, Rom. iii. 31, i/o/moi/. x. 3. 
So of time, to fioc, appoint, ■f]iuipav. Acts 
xvii. 31, and Sept. 3) to place, i. e. in a 
balance, to iveigh, with acc. and dat. of 
pers. Matt. xxvi. 15, 'iaTncrav avTco Tpi- 
aKovTa apyvpia. Sept. Ezra viii. 25. Is. 
xlvi. 6, and Class. Metaph. to impute, tlvl 
TTjv djULapTLav, Acts vii. 60. — II. INTRANS. 
in the perf. pluperf. and aor. 2. act. in the 
midd. and by impl. in aor. 1. and fut. 1. 
of the pass, to stand ; and so perf. act. 
ECTTYiKa as pres. whence plup. kcTTriKELv as 
imperf. 1 ) prop, and absol. 1 Cor. x. 12, 

0 doKu>v ECTTavaL, ^Xettetod imi] Tricrr). In 
sacrifice or prayer. Matt. vi. 5. Heb. x. 11. 
With an adjunct implying place where, 
Matt, xii.46. e^co, Mk. xi. 5. xiii. 14. John 
XX. 19, al. 'EttI with gen. of place, ecttti 
ETTiToVou iTEOLvov, Lu.vi. 17; lu the sense, 
of before. Acts xxv. 10, kiri Tov-fS-niuaTo^. \ 
xxiv. 20, ETTt Tou crvvEopLov. Mk. xiii. 
9 ; with acc. of place. Matt. xiii. 2 ; also 
ETTi Tous TTo'^as, to stajid upon the feet. 
Acts xxvi. 16. Without an adjunct of 
place expr. but in the sense to stand by, 
he present. Matt. xxvi. 73, Trpoa-EXdovTE^ 

01 ECTTWTES eItTOV TW TLETpVd. Lu. xiX. 

8; joined with an adj. or partic. Acts 
ix. 7, EL(rTr]KEL(Tav kvvEoi. Eph. vi. 14. 
So of persons standing before a judge, 
either as accusers, Lu. xxiii. 10; or as 
accused. Acts xxvi. 6, E(TT7]Ka KpLv6fXEvo<s. 
Matt, xxvii. 11. Lu. xxi. 36. Spoken of 
fishing-boats, to stand, be stationed, in Engl. 
to lie, V. 2. 2) fig. to stand fast, endure; 
of things, (^aartXELa, Matt. xii. 25. ^sfii- 
Xlo?, 2 Tim. ii. 19, to persist ; of persons. 
Acts xxvi. 22, dxpi- T?;? v/jiipa^ TavTr\^ 
eaT7iKa. John viii. 44. Rom.v.2. ICor. vii. 
37. 1 Pet. V. 12, and Sept. So to stand fast 
against an enemy, Eph. vi. 13 ; with Trpos 
Ti, ver. 11. Sept. and Class. So against 
evils, to ivithstand. Rev. vi. 17 ; to be esta- 
blished, confirmed, Matt, xviii. 16, 'Lva kirl 
(XTOjxaTO's duo juapTvpcov t) Tpicjov crraQy 
'Ttdv prjixa. 3) ECTTrjv and £crTa0j]i/, to 
stand still, stop ; of persons. Matt. xx. 32, 
cTas 6 '\n(Tov^ : of things, ii. 9 ; to cease, 
Lu. viii. 44. Sept. and Class. 

'lo-TopEW, f. ^(TO}, {'larTcop, 'one who 
has knowledge of any thing or person from 
personal experience, Eurip. Iph. T. 1434. 



ISX 



191 



K A e 



fr. iidivaL,) prop, to seek to hioiv any 
thing, by inquiry, or personal investiga- 
tion, Eurip. Hel. 423 ; also to kno2V, i. e. 
to have seen any one personally, Jos. 
Ant. viii. 2, 5, icrToptjcrd Ttva 'E/\. viii. 
4, 6. X. 11, 7, et al. In N. T. to see, 
(Hesych. icrTopii' opa,) i. e. to visit 
a person, in order to become acquainted 
with him. Gal. i. 18, avrjXdou sis 'lap. 
IcTopriaaL TliTpov. So the Latin visito, 

i. e. coram cognosco^ and Engl, to go 
to see. Of this sense, probably con- 
fined to the common dialect, and arising 
from Latinism, I know no other example ; 
yet something very like it occurs in Jos. 
Bell. vi. 1, 8, avi)p^ ov kyu) KaT eKsTvov 
la-Toptjara ttoXs/xoi/, ' whom I had become 
acquainted with ;' not see?i, as Whiston 
renders. And such is nearly the sense in 
^sch. Eum. 433. 

mighty^ I. of persons, with reference to 
the powers both of body and mind, 1) 
'physical^ Matt. iii. 11. Mk. i. 7, o iax^po- 

Tspos fxov kcTTLV. Hcb. xi. 34, L(T)(ypOL kv 
iroXejULo} : with art. 6 icrx^po^-, Matt, 
xii. 29.' 1 Cor. i. 25. 2) morale 1 John 

ii. 14, strong, i. e. firm, in faith ; said of 
angels. Rev. v. 2 ; of God, xviii. 8, & Sept. 
Fig. strong in influence and authority, 
mighty,- honouraUe, 1 Cor. iv. 10. i. 27, to. 
iarxvpa for concr. oi laxvpOL. — II. of 
THINGS, strong, fortified, said of a city. 
Rev. xviii. 10 ; vehement, gi^eat, as applied 
to avEjULos, Matt. xiv. 30. ^oovral. Rev, 
xix. 6. Xi/JLOQ, Lu. XV. 14. Kpavyr), Heb. 
V. 7; also^r??i, sure, said of 'wapdKk^arLs, 
vi. 18; severe, kirLaToXaL 2 Cor. x. 10. 
Xen. Cyr. iii. 48. 

'lo'Xi's, i^os, 77, (tffX^O strength, might, 
spoken of tbe powers both of body and of 
mind, (physical and moral;) the former, in 
Rev. x\^ii. 2, sKpa^sv kv io'Xi't,!. e. might- 
ily, veliemently, Sept. «& Class. ; the latter, 
power, might, in Mk. xii. 30, eg oA.t]9 Tr7s 
i(Txyo<$ <Tov, 'with all thy might,' & ver. 33. 
Lu. X. 27. 1 Pet. iv. 11 ; also gener. power, 
pre-eminence, 2 Pet. ii. 11, ayyfXot Icrxy't 

Kal SvvdfXEL fXELX^OVSS OfTES. Eph. i. 19, 

TO KpuTos Tr]£ icrx'^os avTov, equiv. to 
Kparos iarxvpov, ' mighty power.' So in 
ascriptions to God, Rev. v. 12, vi. 12. 

'larx^'fj^', f- vcrw, (iO'xi'?,) valere, to he 
strong, i. e, ' to have strength or ability,' 
whether physical or moral, 1) physical, 
to he strong', rohust. Matt. ix. 12, oi iax'^- 
ovTE's, the strong,!, e. the well, as opp. to the 
weak and sick, and gener. to he able, foil, 
by infin. Matt. viii. 28, Iogte pLti icryy^i-v 
TLvoL 'TrapsXds'Lv. xxvi. 40; with inf. impl. 
Mk. ix. 18. Lu. xiii. 24. Phil. iv. 13, 
irdvTu i(TX^ci-> i. e. ' I can do, or endure, 
all things.' 2) moral, to have ejicacy, avail. 

Gal. V. 6, OVTS 'TTEpLTOfMU TL i(TXO^h 



vi. 15. Heb. ix. 17. Ja. v. 16. Matt. v. 

13, sh ovSev torxuei, ' it has no value,' is 
worthless. 3) for prce-valeo, to prevail., 
foil, by Kara tlvcs, ' against or over any 
one,' Acts xix. 16. absol. Rev. xii. 8, and 
fig. to accj?dre strength and efficacy. Acts 
xix. 20, 6 k6yo<s Tou KvpLov — IcrX'^i^v- 

"lo-ojs, adv. (loro?,) prop, and in Class. 
equally, alike. In N. T. perhaps, doubt- 
less, Lu. XX, 13. Sept. and sometimes in 
Class, as Xen. Cyr. ii. 1, 13. 

'Ix^ '^<5toi/, ou, TO, [iy^h^s^ a small 
fish. Matt. XV. 34. Mk. viii. 7, and Class. 

'Ix^'^^i 6, a fi^h.^ Matt. xv. 36, & 
oft. 

"Ixvos, EOS, TO, (Z/C60, to go,) prop, the 
planta pedis, that on which one goes in 
walking, Eurip, Bacch. 1132; but more 
freq. the mark, or impress left by the foot, 
and gener. the step thus taken. Some- 
times, however, like vestigium in Lat. it is 
used metaph. as Soph. QEd. T. 109, and 
espec. in the phrases (formed on the phy- 
sical KaT or £7r' "lyy^'^ (Sulvelv,) occurring 
in Rom. iv. 12, (ttolxeTv toIs Ixvectl 
TLVos. 2 Cor. xii. 18, irEpLiraTElv toIs 
avTols LXi>Ea-L. 1 Pet. ii. 21, k'lraKoXov- 
6elv toTs lxvE(rL tlvo<s, 'to follow any 
one's example.' And so in Class, e. gr. 
Lucian i. 770, kKELVoLS sxl/ri KUTa to. Xpv- 

a-LTTTTOV LX^V 'TrpOOTLCOV. 

'IwTa, TO, indec. iota, Heb. yodth, the 
smallest Hebrew letter ; fig. for the mi- 
nutest part, Matt. v. 18. 



K. 

Kdyo), crasis for Kal kyth, dat. KajULoU 
acc. KUfXE, and I, &c. the Kai everywhere 
retaining its own power, just as if written 
separately. Matt. ii. 8, and oft. ; dat. Lu. 
i. 3. acc. John vii. 28. 

KaOa, adv. (/ca0' a,) lit. 'according to 
what,' i. e. according as, or simply as. 
Matt, xxvii. 10. Sept. and Class. 

KaGatpfort?, £W9, 77, (/caGatpsw,) 
prop, a putting doicn what has been raised, 
and espec. demolishing of a building. So 
Thuc. V. 42, K. TlavaKTov. Arrian E. Al. 
i. 9, 4. Pol. xxiii. 7, 6. Xen. Hist. ii. 2, 
15, a sense freq. found in the verb Kadai- 
pico. In this manner, too, the word is 
used at 2 Cor. x. 4, Trpds KaOaLpscrLv 
oxvpoijuaTODv : said fig. of pulling doivn 
the ratiocinations of human pride. So 
XoyLoriixovs KadaipEtv, 2 Cor. x. 5. Comp. 
Plato p. 254, 58, 77 k. toov oyKwv, and 
Dio Cass. 927, n-f]s iaxvos. Also fig. 
2 Cor. X. 8. xiii. 10, ovk eIs KadaipEO-Lv 
v/uLcov, where it means, ' destruction of 
religious knowledge,' as opp. to edification, 
oiKodojUL-nv. The nearest approach to tbis 



K A 0 



192 



K AG 



sense in the Class, is destruction or ruin. 
SimiL in 1 Mace. iii. 43, the word is used 
of mischief done to any person or thing. 
See on Kuraa-Tpocj)!]. 

Ka0atf)£a), f. r/crw, aor. 2. KadelXou^ 
(/cara, alptw,) to take doivn from a higher 
place to a lower, e. gr. from tlie cross, Mk. 
XV. 36, gl zpyjtTai 'H\ta§ KaQEXeiv avTov^ 
and ver. 4(i, al. Sept. and Class. With 
the idea of force, violence, e. gr. to pull 
dotU7i, demolish^ as huildings, KadeXaj fxov 
Tds a.'Trod-/]Ka<5^ Lu. xii. 18, and Class. ; a 
people, to oveHliroii\ conquer., KadsXthv 
eduT] ETTTCL, Acts xiii. 19. Sept. & Class. ; of 
princes, potentates, to cast doiim from their 
thrones, dethrone., Lu. i. 52, and Class. 
Fig. to suhveH., destroj/, nrijv jULEyaXmo- 
TjjTa, Acts xix. 27. Aoytor^ous, 2 Cox. 
X. 4. 

KadaLpu), f. apu), («:a6apo9,) prop, to 
deanse from filth, puiify, trans. In N. T. 
to cleanse a tree or vine from useless 
branches, to prune, John xv. 2. Sept., Jos., 
Philo, and Class. So purgare in Latin. 

KaOaTrep, adv. {KaQa., Trip.,) accord- 
ing as^ equiv. to a^, even as., Rom. iv. 6, 
KaduTTEp Kai Aav'ld XiyEL., & oft. Foil, 
by ouTws, 50, xii. 4. 

KctOaTTTO), fut. [hCaTCt., aiTTU^) 

to bind dozen., or fasten upon any thing, 
trans. In N. T. intrans. or with kavTov 
impl. Mid. Ka^a.-KTop.al., to fix oneself 
upon., to fasten on., foil, by gen. Acts xxviii. 
3, 'ixLOva Kadrjif/E tt/s X^'-P^^ avrov. 

KaOapi'^o), f. tcrw, (/caOapo?,) a later 
form, not found in Class., of /caOarow, to 
malce clean., cleanse., trans. I. prop. ]Matt. 
xxiii. 25, KadapiX^ETaL to e^co6ev tou 
TTOTi^pLov., ver. 26. Lu. xi. 39. Spoken 
of lepers afflicted with a filthy disease, and 
accounted as unclean, to cleanse., i. e. to 
heal., Lu. iv. 27, & oft. ; prsegn. Matt. viii. 
3, EKadapiadrj avTov ii A.£7rpa, *■ his 
leprosy was cleansed and removed,' i. e. 
was healed. Comp. Lu. v. 13. — II. fig. to 
cleanse., in a moral sense, 1 )fspec. from sin 
or pollution, i. e. by expiation, to purify., 
Heb. ix. 22 ; foil, by airS tlvo's., 1 John 
i. 7, TO aTfxa 'li]crov KudapiX^EL vp-d^ cctto 
'Trdari]^ dpLapTLu^., 'from the guilt of sin 
and its consequences,' ver. 9. So Tit. ii. 
14, 'iua Kadapiarr] EavTco Xaov. 2) gener. 
and without expiation, to cleanse., purify., 
free from moral uncleanness, with diro 
Ti.i/09, 2 Cor. vii. 1, KadapicrcofXEu kav- 
Toi/s aTTo TrafTos fioXvcrfiov crap/cos : 
without aTTo, Acts xv. 9. — III. caus- 
ative, in the sense of, to declare clean., 
viz. Le\ntically, i. e. to make laicful., trans. 
Acts X. 15, a b Qe6<5 EKaddpLcrE, cu jmij 
KOLvov. xi. 9. Sept. So Mk. vii. 19, 
KadapiX^ov irduTa to. (SpcojuLaTa, i. e. 
' making lawful all meats,' showing them 
to be permissible. 



Ka0«pt(T/>io§, ou, 6, (/caBapt^o),) a 
cleansing., purification., I. PROP. e. gr. of 
the Jewish washings before meals, John 
ii. 6. Fig. of the ceremonial purification 
of lepers, Mk. i. 44. Lu. v. 14 ; of a 
woman after child-birth, Lu. ii. 22, and 
Sept. So of baptism., as a rite of purifi- 
cation, John iii. 25. — II. metaph. purifi- 
cation from sin, expiation., Heb. i, 3. 2 Pet. 
i. 9. So Class. Kadap/uio?. 

K a 0 a |0 6 5, a , 01/, ad j . in a natural sen se, 
free from dirt., clean ; in a fig. spotless., 
pure. I. prop, clean., Matt, xxvii. 59^ 
evetvXl^ev avTO (tlvoovl Kudapa. Hom, 
Od. iv. 750, ELfxaTa k. Heb. x. 22, vdart 
KuQapw., al. and Class. Fig. in the Leviti- 
cal sense, John xiii. 10, eo-tl Kadapo^ 
o/\w§. So in Class, of those who approached 
to the gods with the requisite previous 
ceremonies. Hom. Od. iv. 759, sq. By 
impl. lawful., to be used, not forbidden^ 
Lu. xi. 41. Rom. xiv. 20. Tit. i. 15, irdvTa 
Ko.'dapd. — II. METAPH. in a moral or spi- 
ritual sense, 1) free from the guilt of siri., 
guiltless., free from blood-guiltiness, Acts 
xviii. 6, /cat)apos eyw, &c. : foil, by diro tl- 
2/os,xx. 26. Sept. & Class. 2) sincere, single- 
hearted., upright., Matt, v. 8, ol KaOapoi Ty 
Kupcia. In John xiii. 10, vixeX^ Kudapoi 
£o-T£, the sense symbol, is ''washed from sins 
in the blood of Jesus.' Comp. Ps. li. 2, 7. 
1 Tim. i. 5. 2 Tim. ii.22. 1 Pet. i. 22, ek 
Kadapd's Kapoia^. 1 Tim. iii. 9. 2 Tim. i. 3, 
Eu Kudapa crvuELOJicrEL. Ja. i. 27, /c. ^pr]- 
(TKELa, i. e. from error, untainted by base 
motives, as hypocrisy, selfishness, avarice, 
vain-gioiy ; so equiv. to the definition 
1 Tim. i. 5, dydin-i ek Kadapd's Kapdia^, 
Kal (7VVEL8n(TE(x)<s dyadrjs., kul ttlctteco^ 
difVTTOKpLTOv. In Tit. i. 15, toTs Kada- 
pots, the sense is, 'whose hearts are purified 
by faith.' In John xv. 3, v, Kadapot 
£o-T£, (by a figure taken from the vine,) 
the meaning is, cleansed., lit. ' pruned' of 
evil affections. 

Ka0apoT?]s, 7]tos, 77, (/ca0apo5,) in 
Class, cleanness., purity. In N. T. clean- 
ness, pureness., legal or ceremonial, Heb. 
ix. 13. 

KaGfi^pa, a9, 77, (/ca0£^ojua(.,) a seat., 
Matt. xxi. 12. xxiii. 2, Kadi'^ELv kirl t^s- 
KadEopa<s Mwi^cfcco?, ' to sit in Moses' 
seat,' fig. ' to occupy his place.' 

ILaQ eX^o fxai., (/caTa, k'^o/iat,) prop, to 
seat oneself i. e. to sit doiim., to sit, Lu. ii. 
46. John iv. 6. xi. 20, ev t<£ olkco ekuQe- 
X,ETo, i. e. ' continued sitting.' Acts vi. 15. 

KaGsJ^?, adv. (/caTa, e^?]?,) lit. 'ac- 
cording to the order or succession of,' i. e. 
successively, consecutively, in connected 
order, Lu. i. 3, /ca0££r]s crot ypdxl/ai, ' to 
write a connected narrative,' Acts xi. 4. 



K AG 



193 



K A0 



xxin, 23, and Class. ; with tlie art. 6 Kad- 
f^ij^, successive^ i, e. subsequent, follow- 
ing ; spoken of order, iii. 24, Kal toov 
tcads^i]^ scil. 'Tr^ocjuircov : of time, Lu. 
viii. 1. 

KadevSco^ (Ka-ra, ev8(o^) in Class, to 
lie down to sleep. In N. T. gener. to go to 
sleep^ to sleep^ and imperf. to be asleep^ in- 
trans. Matt. viii. 24. xiii. 25, et saepe al. 
Sept. and sometimes Class. By impl. to 
be iti a deep sleep^ in a state of uncon- 
sciousness like one dead, Matt. ix. 24, ouk 
dTTtOai/gf, aWa KuOevdsL. Mk. v. '39. Lu. 
viii. 52. Hence spoken of those really 
dead, 1 Thess. v. 10, elte ypiiyopcojULEv., 
SITE KadEvdoopEv^ and Sept. Fig. to be 
slothful, not vigilant, Eph. v. 14, 'ijEipE^ 
6 KadivScov. Xen. An. i. 3, 11. 

KaOt/ytjT/js, ou, 6, {Kadi^yEO/uLaL,) in 
Class, a leader, guide. In N. T. teacher, 
master. Matt, xxiii. 8, 10, and so in Plut. 
viii. 511. 

TLaQriKu), prop, to come or reach down 
from a higher place to a lower, as moun- 
tains to the sea (so oft, in Class.), pertingo : 
also, pertineo, as said both of place, Xen. 
Mem. iii. 5, 25, and persons, Pol. i. 66, 
convenio, to be becoming, suitable, Xen. 
Cyr. viii. 1, 1. Hipp. ix. 5, in which sense 
it is gener. used impersonally, KadnKEi 
IXOL, foil, by infin. ' it is fit or right to do 
so and so,' Thus in N. T. Acts xxii. 22, 
ov KadfjKEv aWov X^^v, a very rare con- 
struction, with which may be compared 
fropi Ecclus. X. 23, ov KaQf]K£ do^daai 
ai/Spa dfiapTuiXSv. Also partic. neut. 
TO KadijKov, ' what is fit and right to be 
done,' more frequently to. KaduKoi/Ta, as 
Xen. Cyr. i. 2, 5. So Rom. i. 28, ttoleIv 
Ta lit) Kad. as 2 Mace. vi. 4, to. fxr] Kadri- 
KovTa EvSov (pEpovTojv, meaning, ' things 
that profaned it.' In each case there is a 
litotes, or a mild expression for a strong one. 

KddrjjULaL, (2 pers. Kd6r], imper. Kddov, 
like tlOt}, Tidov, infin. KadijadaL,) prop. 
to sit down, but in common usage equiv. 
to rj/JiaL, to sit, intrans. 1) prop, to 
sit down. Matt. xv. 29, dva(3d^ Eh to 
opo's EKddrjTo EKEL. Johu vi. 3. Sept. in 
Gen. xxi. 16. Hom. II. xxii. 569. 2) gener. 
to sit, absoL, i. e. to sit there, to sit by, 
Lu. v, 17, 't](Tav KadrifXEvoL ^apLcraiot,. 
With an adjunct of place. Matt. ix. 9. Mk. 
ii. 6. Acts ii. 2, & oft. Sept. and Class. 
3) said of any dignitary who sits in public, 
a judge, Matt.xxvii. 19; aqueen, Rev.xviii. 
7. Sept. Ex. xviii. 14. Philostr. Vit. Ap. 
vi. 2. 4) in the sense of to abide, dwell, 
he, Matt. iv. 16, tois Kadij/uLfVot^ ev yj^pa 
Kai (TKLU ^avuTov. Lu. i. 79. Acts xiv. 8, 
and Sept. Foil, by ettl with gen. of place, 
Rev. xiv. 6 ; with acc. Lu. xxi, 35. 

K a 6 t;/x£ < i;o9, rj, ov, adj. (/caTa, 



v/jLEpa,) daily. Acts vi. 1, ku tP] ^laKOvia 
Ty Kadi^juLEpLVjJ, i. e. of alms. Jos. and lat. 
Class. 

Kad CO, {kutu, i^w,) f. Kadico or 
Kadiaro), aor. 1. EKddia-a, trans, to cause 
to sit doivn, to seat ; intrans. to sit down, 
to sit. I. TRANS, to cause to sit doicn, to 
seat, with ev of place, Eph. i. 20, EKdOiaEv 
[avTov] EV dE^Lu avTov. Sept. and Class. 
So to cause to sit, to set, scil. as judges, 

1 Cor. vi. 4, nrovrrov^ KadiX^ETE sc. /cptrds 
or ^t/cao-Tds : gen. expressed in Class, — 

II. INTRANS. or with kavTov impl., and 
also mid. to seat oneself, i. e. to sit down, 
to sit, 1) prop. & gener. Matt. v. 1, Kadi- 
(ravT0<s avTOv. Mk. ix. 35. Lu. iv. 20. v. 
3, et saepiss. Sept. and Class. With an 
adjunct of place, avTov, here. Matt, xxvi. 
36. (SSe, Mk. xiv. 32 ; with prepositions, 
Matt. XX. 21, & oft. Sept. and Class,— 

III. by IMPL. to abide, take up one's 
abode, ivrri itoXel, Lu. xxiv. 49 ; absol. 
Acts xviii. 11. Sept. Exod. xvi. 29, Jer. 
xlix, 32, Test, xii, Patr. 644, KaQicTEdQs. 
EV eQvecl. So also sedeo in Latin. 

ILaQ Lr]fXL, (f. Kadn<y<JO, inf. KaQiivai, 
part. /caOtHts, aor. 1. Kadi]Ka,) gener. im- 
mittere, to let doivn, as food or drink into 
the stomach, Hom. II. xxiv. 642 ; or to 
let any thing or person down by a cord, as 
an anchor, Hdot. vii. 36, or plummet, or a 
fishing-line or net. So Hom. II. xxi. 132, 
EV divrjari KadiETZ /xwyu^a? iTTTTOus. Lu. 
V, 19, Ka6r]Kav avTov — £is to fxicrov. 
Jos. Ant. ii. 3, 4, Kadiscrav Eh tov XdKKOv. 
Acts ix. 25, avTOV KadrjKav Slu tov tel~ 
XOfs. Simil. Jos. Ant. vi. 11, 4, Kadi/jLtj- 
craaa oid ^vpido^ avTOV. Pass. part. Kadi- 
ijULEV09, Actsx. 11, aKEvo^ K. ETTL Tr}£ yjjs, 
for ETTL TTjv yrjv, as often in Eurip. 

Kad iaTr]fXL, (also /caOiCTaw, f. /cara- 
(rT?7<r<o, aor. 1. KaTEarTrjcra,) gener. to set 
down, i.e. to set or place. In N. T. for 
the most part used only in the trans, 
forms ; pass, or mid. to be set, to be, &c. 
1 ) of persons and things, to set up, to cause 
to stand, Sept. and Class. ; pass, to stand ; 
fig. KadiaTajmaL, to sta7id, to be set, to be, 
Ja. iii. 6, ri yXwacra KadicrTaTaL ev toTs 
PleXeglv. iv. 4. Hence also act. KaQi- 
(TTf}/uLL, to cause to be, to render, make, 

2 Pet. i. 8, TovTa ovK dpyovs [vfxa.^] 
KadicTTrjaLv : pass, to be made, become, 
Rom. V. 19, dixapTuoXol KUTEaTddrjcrav 
oi TToXXoL. Jos. and Class, 2) of persons, 
to set, constitute, foil, by accus. and kiri 
with gen. to set one over any thing, Matt, 
xxiv. 45, ov KaTE(jTY](rEv 6 /cuptos avTov 

ETTL T^S ^EpaTTEia^ UVTOV. XXV, 21. ActS 

vi. 3 ; with dat. Matt, xxiv, 47 ; with acc. 
Heb. ii. 7 ; foil, by double acc. of pers. & 
station, to constitute, make, Lu. xii. 14, 
Ti§ fxE KaTEcrTtjarE SiKacrTiiv kcp' u^as ; 
So with acc. of pers. omitted. Tit. i. 5. 



K AG 



194 



K AI 



Sept. and Class. Pass, with acc. of man- 
ner, Heb. V. 1 ; with eh t6, viii. 3. 
3) as in English, to set 07ie dozen on a 
journey, i. e. to accompany^ conduct^ out 
of respect, or for security, Acts xvii. 15, 

01 KadLcrToyvTE^ t6v \iav\ov. Sept. and 
Class., as Homer and Thucyd. 

Ka06, adv. (/caO' o,) lit. 'according to 
what,' equiv. to KaQa^ as^ according as^ 
Eom. viii. 26, KaQo dsl, 2 Cor. viii. 12, 
bis, Kadd kav 'ixv '^^^5 ' proportion 
as,' 1 Pet. iv. 13. 

Kad oXov, adv. (/ca0' oXov,) prop. 
' throughout the whole,' i. e. iL'Jiolly, en- 
tirely ; KadoXov fJLr]^ not at all, Acts iv. 
18. Comp. Sept. in Ezek. xiii. 22, tou 
KaTLcryycraL ysXQa's avofxov to KaQoXov 
fjii] dTroa-Tpixj/aL drrro ooov irov\]pa.^^ and 
xvii. 14, TO KadoXov fxi] kiraLpEadaL. 
Pol. i. 20, 3, ovok KadoXov fxiKpov irXolov. 

KaOoTrXi^o), f. /(TO), to arm com- 
pletely ; and pass, to he fully armed^ Lu. 
xi. 21. Sept. and Class. 

KaOopao), (/caTa, bpdio^) 1) prop. 
dispicio^ to look doiun upon any thing. So 
Plut. Popl. £^ vxl/ovs (iiravTa Kadopa. 

2) by impl. perspieio^ to descry^ heliold^ 
Hdot. ii. 138. Thuc. i. 48. But gener. 
used fig. for 7nente perspicio, to perceive^ 
as Rom. i. 20, to. dopuTa tou Q&ov Kad- 
opaTaL. So 3 Mace. iii. 11, ov KaQopoov 
TO Tov Geou ATjoaTos, and often in Class. 

KaOoTt, adv. (/ca6' ori,) lit. 'accord- 
ing to what,' i. e. 1) according as^ as. Acts 
ii. 45. iv. 35, KadoTL dv tl9 ypziav 
£lX£. Sept. & Class. 2) for that, because 
iliat, inasmuch as, Lu. i. 7, KadoTi — rjv 
(TTElpa. Sept. and Class. 

KaOtos, adv. (fcara, cos,) a later form 
for Kadd, prop, according as, equiv. to 
simple cos, as. I. prop, implying man- 
ner, 1) gener. Matt. xxi. 6, /ca6cbs Trpocr- 
£Ta^£]/ ai/ToTs o 'Iijcous, et sa^piss. 
Prsegn. Mk. xv. 8, vp^aTO aiTaladaL 
Kad(jo<s del ettolel ciuToTs, ' began to de- 
mand [that he should do] according as he 
had ever done to them ;' with et/xt, equiv. 
to such as, 1 Thess. ii. 13. 1 John iii. 2. 
So with ouTcos corresponding, John iii. 14. 

2 Cor. i. 5 ; and 6/uotcos, Lu. vi. 31. Sept. 
Hence the formula /caOtbs kuI, even as, freq. 
in the Epistles of St. Paul, which is ellipti- 
cal for/caOcbs — outco kul. 2) after verbs of 
speaking, &c. hoiv. Acts xv. 14, 'Ev/jleodv 
E^riyvcraTO /caGtos irpcoTou. 3 John 3. 

3) in the sense propoHion, comparison, 
Mk. iv. 33, /caGws rjduvavTO dKovELV. John 
V. 30. Acts xi. 29. 1 Pet. iv. 10. Sept. 
and Class. — II. in a causal sense, as, i. e. 
even as, inasmuch as, John xvii. 2, K'a0ajs 
£^co/ccts avTco E^ovcTLav. Rom, i. 28. ICor. 
i. 6. Eph. i.' 4. Ph. i. 7.— III. of time, 



equiv. to wJien, Acts vii. 17, /cameos riyyi- 
"^Ev 6 xpovo^. 2 Mace. i. 31. 

Kat, copul. conj. and, prob. derived 
from the imperat. of the obsol. verb kuw, 
to join, add, (as 0£ from ^£co, to join, and 
our and from A.-Sax. anan, to join.) 
From this obsol. /caco came the word 
which has so puzzled the Etymologists, 
/cao-ts, CL brother, or sister, lit. ' one joined 
by birth,' (as dcEX(p6^, ' fellow-wombed,' 
cruyyoi^os) ; and also the word Kdaaru^ 
meretrix, which originally, like fTaipa, 
meant a female friend, and thence, like 
that word, a concubine or courtezan. 

Kaii'os, 11, 6v, adj. (a word, I con- 
ceive, derived, though the Etymologists 
have failed to see it, from the obsol. /caco, 
to join or add, on which see in v. Kal init. 
as the Latin que, (/c£,) from the cogn. kem,) 
the general signification is neiu, something 
that has been added to what before exist- 
ed, I. PROP, neivly made, not impaired 
by time or use ; ddKol, Matt. ix. 17. 
fjivi]fXElov, xxvii. 60. Lp.dTLov, Lu. V. 36. 
Matt. xiii. 52, Kaivd Kal TraXaid. to 
KULvov, Mk. ii. 21, and Class. — II. fig, 
7ieiv, i. e. not before Tcnoion or current, 
7ieidy introduced ; oLoaxv-, ^Ik. i. 27. iv- 
ToXi], John xiii. 34. ovofxa. Rev. ii. 17. 
iii. 12, and Class. Also in the sense of 
other, foreign, Mk. xvi. 17, yXo^araai^ 
XaX-narovcTL Kaival^, ' wdth new, i. e. other, 
tongues,' new to them, which they had 
never learnt, Xen. Mem. i. 13. — III. n^w^ 
as opp. to old or former, to TraXaidv, to 
nrptoTov, and by impl. also better, e. gr. v 
KULVT] cLadriK7-i, ' the new and better cove- 
nant,' Matt. xxvi. 28. So olvov ttlvzlv 
Kaivov, ' to drink %vine new,' ver. 29. w^r, 
KULvi], 'a new song,' i. e. a nobler, loftier 
strain, Rev. v. 9. xiv. 3. So Ps. xxxiii. 3. 
xl. 3. Is. xiii. 10. Also for reneived, made 
new,' and therefore superior, more splen- 
did, e. gr. KaivoL ovpavol Kal yrj Kaivrj, 
2 Pet. iii. 13. Rev. xxi. 1. Is. Ixv. 17. 
Rev. iii. 12. xxi. 5. Metaph. of Christ- 
ians, as renewed and changed from evil to 
good by the Holy Spirit of God, 2 Cor. v. 
17. Kaivf} KTL<TL9, Gal. vi. 15. Kaiv6<5 
dvdpco7ro£, Eph. ii. 15. iv. 24. Ez. xviii. 
31, Kapdia Kaivn- 

ILaiv 6^r]'s, r\T0's, v, {kuivo^,) prop, 
and in Class, neivness, in a physical sense : 
in a moral, Rom. vi. 4, kv k. ^w^s, for kv 
Kaivy ^co?7, & vii. 6. 

TLatTTEp, conjunct. {Kal and 'rrsp,) 
cdthough. Foil, by particip. Phil. iii. 4. 
Heb. V. 8. vii. 5. xii. 17. 2 Pet. i.^ 12. 
Foil, by fin. verb, Rev. xvii. 8, KaiTrep 
irapicTTaL. 

Katpos, ov, 6, a word of which the 
derivation has been exceedingly disputed. 
It is, I conceive, from Kaco, to join, q. d. 
Kaepo?, formed like TaKspo^ from tukco. 



K A T 



195 



K A K 



Dor. for T7//cai, yXuK-ffvos fr. y\vKU9^ 
^aXspd^ fr. ^Ti/Wo), /uLuX^po^ fr. /iaXos, 
<T(f)a\Epd^ fr. ar<puX\u}^ doXtpd'S fr. 60A.0S, 
rifxepo^ fr. fj^tai, scdco^ 'Ifxtpo^ fr. fl/xt, 
'Tpo|^x£p^9 fr. t/oo/uo?, (fjOouepo^ fr. (^do- 
i/os, &c. Its primary sense is tliejDo//^^ of 
jimction formed by two lines nieeting at 
an angle, and then the ov pohit thus 

made; also point gener. as denoting the 
sharp end of any instrument. The only 
vestige I can find of this primary sense is in 
Hesych. "who explains kulom by poTrdXto^ 
meaning, I presume, raembro virili, for in 
that sense the word occurs in the Anthol. 
Gr. As supplying another proof of the 
above sense of kcioj, to join^ it may suffice 
to adduce the gloss of Hesych. Kaipcoo-tv' 
Tov CTTV/JLOvo^ Tous (Tvvdscr piovs . In N. T. 
the word has only two senses, time and 
season. I. time, meaning time^ proper 
season^ 1) gener. opportunity^ occasion^ 
Acts xxiv. 25, KaLoov pLETaXu(3wv. 2 Cor. 
vi. 2, /caipw d. Gal. vi. 10. Eph. v. 16. 
Col. iv. 5. *(See t^ayopa^w.) Heb. xi. 
15. John vii. 6, Kaipo's vjixiTspo?. 2) set 
time^ certain season^ i. e. a fixed and defi- 
nite time; foil, by gen. of thing. Matt, 
xiii. 30, iv Kaipo) tou ^spLcrp.od. /caipo? 
crvKcov^ Mk. xi. 13. Acts iii. 20, Kaipol 
dva\l/v^E(i}9, ' times of refreshing,' i. e. 
appointed of God. Lu. xix. 44. 2 Tim. iv. 
6. Heb. ix, 10. Sept. and Class. By gen. 
of pers. or a pron. 6 Kaipo^ /u.ou, or o 
i/xos, my ti?ne, as appointed of God, e. gr. 
' in which I am to suffer,' Matt. xxvi. 18, 
or accomplish any duty, John vii. 6, 8. 
Lu. xxi. 24, Kaipol iducov. So i(5ios kul- 
' one's own due time,' Gal. vi. 9. 
With a demonstr. art. or pron. 6 vvv, 
ouTos, eKeXfo^, ' this present time,' that 
time, definitely marked out and expressed. 
Matt. xi. 25. Mk. x. 30. Rom. iii! 26, et 
al. ; also fcatpds e.crx^'^^^-) 1 Pot. i. 5. 
va-TepoL, 1 Tim. iv. 1. kvE(T'Tr\KM<3^ Heb. 
ix. 9. Gener. Acts xvii. 26, irporETay- 
{xivovs KaLpov<5. 2 Tim. iv. 3, Ean-ai 
/caipos, i. e. appointed of God. Rev. xii. 
12; dat, Tw KaiptZ^ 'at the proper season,' 
Mk. xii. 2. "With prepositions, dxpl kul- 
pov^ ' for or during a certain season,' Lu. 
iv. 13. El/ KULpw^ *" in due time,' xx. 10. 
Acts vii. 20. Ka-rd Kaipou, ' at the set 
time,' Rom. v. 6. ix. 9. Trpo Kaipov^ 
' before the proper time,' 1 Cor. iv. 5. 
^schyl. Ag. 356. tt/jo? KaipSv^ 'for a 
season,' Lu. viii. 13. Trpd? k. wpa's^ i. e. 
' for a short time,' 1 Thess. ii. 17. So, in 
allusion to the set time for the coming of 
the Messiah in his kingdom, or for judg- 
ment, Matt. viii. 29. xvi. 3, oft. Plur. 
fcatpoi, absol. times^ circumstances, ap- 
pointed of God, 2 Tim. iii. 1. — II. gener. 
time^ SEASON, equiv. to xpovo^-, 1) prop. 
Lu. xxi. 36, Ev TravTL icaLpop dEop-Evoi. 
Eph. vi. 18. 2) a season of the year, as 



KaLpoL KapTTocfiopoL^ ' fruitful seasons,' 
Acts xiv. 17. 3) in the prophetic style, 
put for a ycQu\ Rev. xii. 14, Kaipd^ Kai 
KULpoi Kcu vjULcru icaipov^ i. e. ' three 
years and a half,' comp. ver. 6, in allusion 
to Dan. vii. 25, where Kaipol stands, in 
Sept. as here, for the dual, tico years. 

KaiToi, and yet^ nevertheless^ though 
truly^ Heb. iv. 3, kultol tcov epycov aTro 
Ka^a(ioXri<5 Kocrpiov yEVi]divTcov, ' the 
works, nevertheless, having been finished 
at the foundation of the world.' KaiTot 
7£, though tridy^ John iv. 2. Acts xiv. 17. 
xvii. 27. 

Kato), (f. Kavcroi., f. mid. KavaovfiaL^ 
2 Pet. iii. 10. 1 aor. pass. EKavdiiv^) gener. 
to hurn^ in the two senses of the English 
word, to set on fire, and to he on fire^ I. to 
set on fire, make to burn, as a fire, lamp, 
&c. pass. part. /catd/x£i/o§, burning^ flaming^ 
Matt. V. 15, ov^E KaLovcTL Xvyyov. Lu. 
xii. 35. Heb. xii. 18, KEKavp.Evw Trupt, 
flaming fire. Class, and Sept. Fig. X^X" 
V09 Kaio/uLEvo^ Kai (paivcov^ 'a burning and 
shining light,' i. e. a distinguished teacher, 
John V. 35. Metaph. Kaiofxai.^ to hum ; 
said of the heart, i. e. to be greatly moved, 
Lu. xxiv. 32. — II. trans, to himi, i. e. to 
consume with fire, John xv. 6, /cat kule- 
Tat, scil. Ttt KXvfjLaTa. Matt. xiii. 40. 
I Cor. xiii. 3. Sept. and Class. 

KaKEt, crasis for Kal ekeT, Matt. v. 23. 

Ka/v£t0£i/, crasis for Kai ekelOev, Mk. 
X. 1, and oft. Sept. and Class. 

Ka/c£Ti/os, crasis for Kai eke1vo<s^ 
Matt. XV. 18, and oft. Sept. and Class. 

JLaKia^ as, 17, (/ca/cos,) prop, badness^ 
or defect in general, as to any personal 
quality or property, w^hether physical (Jos. 
Ant. iii. 1 & 2, of bad water) or moral ; 
and thus denoting either faultiness or im- 
perfection, whether from frailty, Pol.vi.lO, 
2. vii. 6, 48, or some settled purpose of evil, 
espec. of doing injury to others, expressed 
by Lat. vitiositas. So in ^sch. Socr. ii. 37, 
it is opp. to dpE^i]^ also in Aristot. Eth. vii. 
In N. T. it is used only in the last-mention- 
ed senses, I. of depravity 0/ heart., life., and 
character., Acts viii. 22, fxETavot^a-ou aTro 
Trj^ KaKLa<3 crov. James i. 21, 'TTEpicrcrELav 
KaKLa9. 1 Pet. ii. 16, EirLKdXvp.p.a Trj-s 
KUKia^. 1 Cor. xiv. 20, Ty k. wiTZLaX^ETE. 
Sept. and Class, as Xen. ' Mem. i. 2, 28, 
T77S ovK iuovcri]^ avTco KaKLa<5. — II. in an 
active sense, mulitia^ malignity^ the desire 
of doing mischief to others, Rom. i. 29. 
1 Cor. 8. Eph. iv. 31. Col. iii. 8. Tit. 
iii. 3. Sept. and Class, as Thuc. i. 32. 
Pol. iv. 27, 7. Jos. Ant. i. 1, 4. And 
KaKOTi]^ in Herodot. viii. 168. — III. in a 
milder sense, en7, i. e. trouble., affliction., 
Matt. vi. 34, dpKETov Ty rjpiipa 77 k. 
avTtj's. Sept. and Apocr. but not Class. 
K 2 



KAK 



196 



KAK 



JLuKonQ sia, a9, 77, from KaKovd^i^, 
{kuko^ and rfOo?,) evil-disposed, meaning 
either gener. of evil habits, character, and 
conduct, [KaKOTpoTTo^, as Hesych. ex- 
plains it,) or evil-inclined towards others, 
malignant, ill-natured, Plato, p. 360, C. 
In Herodot. vii. 3, 11, Tiyas twv kuko- 
vOcov KUL cpavXcov, hoth senses seem con- 
joined, as also in Aristoph. Pac. 822.. And 
so Isocrates joins KUKorideia and Trovripia. 
In like manner, the subst. KUKoridELa has 
the two senses, morum pravitas, and male- 
volence, for both which good authority 
exists. At Rom. i. 29, fxEo-Tov^ epL^o^, 
o6\ov, KUK. the latter is justly preferred, 
and, besides many other examples which 
might be adduced, occurs in Jos. Ant. vi. 
13, 2. 

K. a K 0X0 ye (JO, f. rjcrto, {KaKoXoyo?,) 
to speak evil of, revile, with acc. Mk. ix. 
39. Acts xix. 9, and Class, as opp. to 
TLfxaw, by impl. to dishonour, contemn. 
Matt. XV. 4, 6 KaKoXoywu iraTepa 
fxriTipa, also Sept. 

Ka/co7ra0£ta, as, 77, (/coccoTraOEO),) 'a 
suffering of evil,' 1. e. gener. suffering, 
affliction, Ja. v. 10. Sept. and Class, as 
Thuc. vii. 77. 

Ka/coTraGto), f. ricroi, {KaKOTradi]?, 
fr. KUKo^, 7ra0o§,) to suffer evil, be afflict- 
ed, intrans. 2 Tim. ii. 9. Ja. v. 13, and 
Class, espec. of soldiers and others, to 
endure hardships, fig. 2 Tim. ii. 3, koko- 
'KdQr](rov ws /ca\o§ (TTpartwrt]?, and iv. 
5, Sept. and Class. 

ILaKOTroLEU), f. ricroo, {KaKOTroLo?,) to 
do evil, i. e. 1) to others, equiv. to injure, 
harm, absol. Mk. iii. 4. Lu. vi. 9. Sept. 
and Class. 2) gener. and absol. equiv. to 
com,mit sin, 1 Pet. iii. 17. 3 John 11, and 
Class. 

JLaKOTTO LO^i, OV, 6, 17, (/Ca/COS, TTOLECO,) 

an evil-doer, 1 Pet. ii. 12, 14. iii. 16. iv. 
15 ; malefactor, John xviii. 30, and Class. 

Ka/cos, r/, OV, adj. a word of very ex- 
tensive signification, inasmuch as, like the 
Latin malus, and the English bad, it is a 
general term used to denote what is not 
good, by either physical defect, or moral 
fault. It is used either of things or per- 
sons ; of course varying widely in sense, 
according to the circumstances of the ob- 
ject to which it is applied; but always 
containing a negation of any quality re- 
garded as good, which should be inherent 
therein. Consequently, there is always a 
tacit opposition thereto, and generally to 
KoXo^ in one or other of its senses. 
Hence, as applied to things, it denotes 
what is unfit for use, bad, in its conse- 
quences evil : to persons, what is faulty or 
incomplete in any required moral pro- 
perty — ti^ly^ base, cozvardly, ignoble, inex- 



pert, bad, i. e. evil-disposed, wicked. And 
the qualities ascribed to persons are like- 
wise applied to things, when implying 
agency, as actions or contrivance. Thus 
the leading senses are bad, evil, ill, wicked. 
In N. T. the general sense of the word is 
evil both in a moral and physical sense, 
I. in a MORAL, of persons, ivicked, bad, in 
heart, conduct, character, Matt. xxi. 41, 
KaK0V9 KaKoo<s StTroXia-sL auTous. xxiv. 
48, 6 /ca/cos oovXcs. Phil. iii. 2. Rev, ii. 2, 
KaKov9, i. e. impostors. So also of things, 
implying moral agency, as contrivances or 
actions, Mk. vii. 21, OLaXoyLa/jLOL ol kukol. 
Rom. xiii. 3, tcov KaKoov, scil. 'ipywv. 
1 Cor. XV. 33, bpLiXiaL KUKat. Col. iii. 5. 
Sept. and Class. ; e. gr. Hesiod, Opp. i. 
238, TToXXaKi Kai ^v/JLiraa-a TroXts 
KaKov dvopo? kiravpEi. Neut. kokov or 
TO KaKov, plur. KaKo. or xa kukci, evil, 
evil things, i. e. ivickedness, fault, crime. 
Matt, xxvii. 23, tl ydp kukov iTroLrjaEV ; 
et ssepiss. Sept. 1 Kings iii. 9. Prov. iii. 7. 
Xen. Mem. ii. 6, 4. — II. in a physical 
sense, of things, act. causing evil, i. e. 
hurtfid, banefid, Rom. xiv. 20, dXXd 
KaKov Tw dvdpMTrcp, &c. Rev. xvi. 2, 
eXko£ kukou, where see my note. Tit. i. 
12, KttKa 3't]pta, 'ravenous beasts.' Sept. 
Am. vi. 3. Prov. xvi. 5. Xen. Mem. iv. 
1, 4. Neut. TO KaKov, evil, i. e. cause or 
source of evil,' Ja. iii. 8, evil done to any 
one, harm, injury, whether in deeds, as 
Acts xvi. 28. Rom. xii. 17. xiii. 10. 
1 Cor. xiii. 5. 1 Thess. v. 15. 1 Pet. iii. 
9, 11, or in words, evil-speaking, 1 Pet. 
iii. 10. Sept. Mic. vii. 3. Plur. Td KaKd, 
evils, i. e. troubles, afi9ictions, Lu. xvi. 25, 
Aa^apo9 bfxoLto<s n-d KaKd, scil. aTTEXafBE. 
Acts ix. 13. 2 Tim. iv. 14. Sept. and 
Class, espec. Homer. 

KaKoif py 09, OV, 6, t|, (KaKov, obsol. 
Epyui,) prop, an adj. doing evil, injury, as 
in Hom. Eurip. Soph. Plato, and Xen. ; 
but in use a subst. in the sense ' an evil- 
doer.' And so in N. T. 1) gener. an 
evil-doer, 2 Tim. ii. 9c Sept. and Class. 
2) spec, a robber, Lu. xxiii. 32, seqq. and 
often in Class. 

K-aKovx^f^-) f- vcco-, (/ca«:o9, «X^0 
male habeo, to ill treat, Diod. Sic. xix. 11, 
et al. Siob. 522, but gener. in pass. 
KaKoux^^o-^ai, as Heb. xi. 37. xiii. 3. 

Ka/cooj, f. (hao), (/ca/cos,) prop, equiv. 
to KaKov TTOLEw, physicc, vitio, to maht 
bad, deteriorcde, Theophr. Hist. PI. i. 15, 
TO Trnyavov KaKovTai Kal aXXuTTETai. 
Of pers. to bring to a low state, Hom. II. 
xi. 689. Od. xvi. 212. Also gener. to ill 
treat or harm any one, as often in Hdot. 
and Thuc. And so in a physical sense, 
1 Pet. iii. 13, tl9 6 KaKujcrwv v/jlo.^'. Acts 
xviii. 10 ; also to afflict, oppress, vii. 6, 19, 

EKUKCOarE T0lf£ TVUT, 1]/J.WV. Xii. 1, K, TlV^ 



K AK 



197 



K A A 



Toil; CLTTO iKK\t]<TLa'5. Aiid SO Hom. 
Od. iv. 754, and elsewhere in Class. In a 
moral sense, to mal:e evil-ajfeded^ Acts 
xiv. 2, eKaKioaav to:? v|/u)^a§ tcov tO. 
Jos. Ant. xvi. 1, 2, & 7, 3, & 8, 6. An idiom 
formed on that sense of KUKovadai by 
which it means to he made ill or sick, 
Xen. An. iv. .5, 24, dediws /jli) aTroddurj' 
iKcbccDTo yap viro Tropsia's. Epigr. in 
Anthol. KcKaKu^piiJO? Ik iTvptToXo. 

K.aKu}9^ adv. (KaKog^) badly ^ ill, evilly, 

I. PHYSICALLY, in the phrases kukcos 
tX^'-^i ^0 ^ Matt. iv. 24, et saepiss. 
and Class, kukcos irdcrx^LV, ' to suffer ill,' 
i. e. grievously, xvii. 15, and Class. KaKov^ 
KUKU)^ dTToXicraL, malos male perdere, 
i. e. to destroy utterly, xxi. 41, and Class, 
oft. ; gener. in the sense of grievously, xv. 

22, KUKU)^ daLjxov'iX^ETaL. — II. MORALLY; 
KaKco£ kp&iv, to speak evil of any one, to 
revile. Acts xxiii. 5 ; gener. kukco^ \a\sTv, 
absol. to speak evil, i. e. amiss, John xviii. 

23. So Ja. iv. 3, KaKco? aiTElads, 'ye 
ask amiss.' 

Ka/c<oo-t9, £0)9, v, (/ca/cow,) prop, & 
in Class, ill treatment or injury to others, 
and the damage ; but in N. T. the state 
of the injured, affliction. Acts vii. 34, 
eIBov Tr]v KOLK. Tov \aou, and sometimes 
in Class, as Thuc. ii. 43. vii. 82. Hdian. 

vi. 6, 11. 

JLaXdfJLri, i)9, rj, prop, and in Class, 
the stalk of grain : in N. T. stuhhle or 
straw, after the ears are removed, 1 Cor. 
iii. 12. Sept. and sometimes in Class, as 
Theocr. Id. v. 7. Xen. Ven. v. 18. 

KciXa/xo9, ov, 6, the reed or cane, a 
plant with a jointed hollow stalk, I. prop. 
tJie plant itself, Matt. xi. 7. xii. 20, Koka- 
jxov cvvTET pLfi/jLivou. Sept. and Class. — 

II. the stalk, as cut for use, a reed, as 
a mock sceptre, Matt, xxvii. 29 ; a rod, or 
staff, ver. 48 ; a measuring reed, Sept. in 
Ez. xl. 3 ; a reed for writing with, 3 John 
13. Sept. and Class. 

KaXgco, (f. tcro), aor. 1. E/caXscra, perf. 
KEKXriKa, aor. 1. pass. kKXvdi]v,) I. to call 
TO any one to come or go any where. 1) 
prop, with the voice, as a shepherd his 
flock, John X. 3, to. Idia irpo^aTa koXel 
Kanr ovofxa. Lu. xix. 13, KaXtcra? SIku 
SovXov? kavTov. Matt. iv. 21. Mk. i. 20, 
kKdX(.(TEv auTov9, i. e. ' to follow him and 
become his disciples.' 1 Mace. i. 6. Hdian. 
iii. 11, 20. Xen. Conv. ii. 12. 2) gener, 
to call in any way, to send for, to direct 
to come. Matt.ii. 7, Xddpa KaXiaa? tous 
Mdyous, and 15, Aiyu-m-ov. Heb. xi. 
8. 3) ^0 call upon with the idea of autho- 
rity, to call FORTH, to summon, e. gr. before 
a judge, &c. Acts iv. 18. xxiv. 2. Hdian. 

vii. 3,5. Xen. Apol. Soc. i. Tijv diKi]u. 
Fig. of God, Rom.iv. 17, kuXovvto^ rd 
tit] ovra ws oi/Ta, ' calling forth and dis- 



posing of things that are not, even as 
though they were,' i. e. calling them into 
existence, &c. Sept. and Philo. 4) in the 
sense to invite, prop, to a banquet. Matt, 
xxii. 3, 9. John ii. 2. absol. Matt, xxii. 8, 
al. and Class. Metaph. to call, to invite, 

i. e. to any thing, e. gr. said of Jesus, k. 
ih p. ET duo Lav, to call to repentance, to 
exhort, Matt. ix. 13. impl. Mk. ii. 17. Of 
God, Rev. xix. 9, £i§ to oslttvov tou yd- 
pov TOV dpvLov K£KXi]fxivoL, SCO in rd- 
/xo§ 1. 1 Tim. vi. 12, £ts X,^r,v aiwviov. 
1 Cor. i. 9. 2 Th. ii. 14. 1 Pet. ii. 9^ v. 10. 
So KoXeTu £15 T7]v ^acTiXe'iav tov 9£0u, 
to the duties, privileges, and final bliss of 
the Christian life here and hereafter, 1 Th. 

ii. 12, and so by impl. Rom. ix. 24, et 
ssepe al. 1 Cor. vii. 15, 17, sq. Gal. v. 8, 
13. 2 Tim. i. 9. Heb. ix. 15. 1 Pet.ii. 21. 
al. saepe. 5) in the sense of to call any one 
to any station, equiv. to appoint, to choose, 
Heb. V, 4, dpy^LEpi:v<5 — KaXov p.svo^ viro 
TOV Qeov. Gal. i. 15. — II. to call over, with 
allusion to the posture of the action, i. e. 
to name, to give name to any person or 
thing. I. prop, and 1) of a proper name 
or surname ; of persons, foil, by to ovop.a 
and the name in apposit. Matt. i. 21, /ca- 
XiarsL's to ovop.a aiiTov'lr](Tovu,thou shalt 
call his name Jesus. Pass, with tl, sc. 
ovop.a, Lu. i. 62, and Sept. Foil, by acc. 
of pers. and the name in apposit. Matt. x. 

25, EL TOU 0LK08e<T1t6t1i}V ^EeX'^E^OvX 

EKdXiorav. In the Pass, constr. Lu. i. 60, 
dXXd KXi)6v<ys.TaL 'loodvvri's. Acts i. 23. 
Rev. xii. 9. So of places. Matt, xxvii. 8. 
Lu. ii. 4, et al. Sept. and Class. With 
ETTL TO) ovopaTL added, i. e. after the name 
of any one, Lu. i. 59. Pass, with dat. tw 
6v6p.aTL, hy name, Lu. i. 61. xix. 2. So 
with kv, Rom. ix. 7, ku 'Icrad/c KX^QridE- 
Tai croL airippa, i. e. ' in and through 
Isaac, in his line,' shall thy seed bear 
name. — ii. of an epithet or appellation, 
e. g. of persons. Matt. ii. 23, Na^wpalos 
/c\r]6t70'£Tat. xxii. 43. xxiii. 7, 8. Of tilings. 
Acts X. 1, & Class. Hence 2) pass, in the 
sense of to he regarded, accounted, = to be. 
Matt. V. 9, 19, bis, £\dxto-T05 KXrjdiic-ETaL 
kv Ty (Sa<J. TCOV ovp. k. t. X. Lu. i. 32. 

Ka\A.i£X.ato5, ov, 6, rj, adj. (/cdWo? 
& E-Xaiov,) prop, 'yielding fine oil;' hence 
v KaXXiiXaio^, i. e. kXaia, a good olive- 
tree, i. e. cultivated as opposed to dypL- 
iXaL09, Rom. xi. 24. Aristot. de Plant, 
and yielding fine oil. 

l^aXXicov, ovo^s, 6, 77, (compar. of Ka- 
Xds,) better. Acts xxv. 10, /cat <yv KaX- 
Xiov k7rLyLV(v(TKEL9, 'as thou also better 
knowest,' i. e. than I can tell. 

KaXodiodaKaXo^, ov, 6, rj, adj. 
(/ca\6s and CLSdarKaXo^,) teaching what is 
good, and as subst. teacJier of good, Tit. ii. 
3. 

K3 



K A A 



198 



RAM 



KaXoTT o I i co^f. 77cra), to do ivell^ to live 
virtuously, 2 Th. iii. 13 ; or to do good to 
others. 

KctXos, Tj, ov, adj. handsome^ heautifid. 
A term of very extensive sense, though 
its uses may he distributed into tivo classes^ 
1) as to external form or appearance ; 2) 
as to intrinsic value ; namely, either good 
as to intellectual or moral excellence, as 
said of persons^ to koXov^ abstract heauty 
as opp. to TO aia-y^pou ; also moral excel- 
lence, as opp. to TO KUKou. alaxpdv, or 
'Trovi]p6v : or good, in -respect to what is 
useful or profitable, as said of things. In 
N. T. the word is only used in the latter 
mode, and with less extensive application 
than in the Classical writers, signifying, 
I. f/oor/, as regards quality, and also of 
such things as express the actions of per- 
sons ; and as Ka\6<s is said of persons, 
like /caXo? /cayaOos, so, by comparison, it 
is used, as KaXr] aTpaTsia., 1 Tim. i. 18 ; 
of land. Matt. xiii. 8, 23 ; a tree. Matt, 
xii. 33, et al. So /msTpou /caXoi/, Lu. vi. 
38, handsome measure, such as a fair- 
dealing person would use. And so of other 
things, by comparison, as /cap7ro§, oTi/os, 
/ua/jyaptTai, Xi6ot, ojULoXoyia. — II. good 
or excellent.^ as to effect, useful^ 'projitahle.^ 
e. gi\ aXa?, Mk. ix. 50. epyoi/^ Matt, 
xxvi. 10. So also at 1 Tim. i. 8. iv. 4, 
Hence Ka\6v ea-Ti, it is good., profitable., 
foil, by acc. and infin. Matt. xvii. 4; by 
dat. of pers. and inf. as subj. Matt, xviii. 
8, 9; by Matt. xxvi. 24. Mk. ix. 42. 
xiv. 21 ; by sav, 1 Cor. vii. 8. — III. good 
in a moral sense, viHuoiis., spoken i) of 
things, as thoughts, feelings, actions, e. gr. 
K. (Tvv£Loi](TL^., a good conscience., Heb. xiii. 
18. K. dvacTTpocp}], Ja. iii. 13. 1 Pet. ii. 

12. 1 Tim. vi. 12, k. dycou. 2 Tim. iv. 7. 
1 Tim. ii. 3. v. 4, tovto yap KaXov kvoo- 
TTLOV Tov Q&ov. Ouco Ka.\6<s Kui dyudo's 
is spoken of -/j Kapoia., where dyadd<s 
refers to the disposition of the heart itself, 
and Ka\6<s to the external manifestation, 
Lu. viii. 15. So 'ipyov kuXov^ spy a /caA.a, 
TO. KuXd spya^ a good deed, good icorJcs., 
Matt. V. 16. 1 Pet. ii. 12 ; with soya 
impl. Rom. xii. 17. 2 Cor. viii. 21. Tit. 
iii. 8, TO. KoKd. Neut. to kuXov., prop. 
that li-hich is handsome., good., right., Rom. 
vii. 18. So TO kclXov iroLELv., ' to do 
good,' i. e. to do well, to act virtuously, 
Rom. vii. 21. Hence KaXou £crTt, it is 
good, it is right., foil, bv inf. Matt. xv. 26. 
Mk. vii. 27. Rom. xiV. 21. Gal. iv. 18. 
Heb. xiii. 9. 2) of persons., in reference 
to the performance of duty, e. gr. o iroifxiiv 
6 KaXos, John x. 11 bis, 14. OLdKovo?, 
1 Tim. iv. 6. cn-jOaxtw-r?)?, 2 Tim. ii. 3. 
oLKovofxoL., 1 Pet, iv. 10. Xen. jNIera. i. 6, 

13. — N. B. In the senses which fall under 
the second head, kuXo? is synonymous 
witli dya0o5. The difference between 



the terms is, that kuXo? denotes rather 
external qualities, personal or mental, and 
some moral ; ayaOos, rather internal, 
(what is morally good, virtuous, &c.) and 
when external, what is useful to the com- 
munity, as bravery in the field, talent in 
the council, cleverness in the dispatch of 
business, or dexterity and skill in the ex- 
ercise of any art. 

KaXu^/xa, axos, to, (KraXu'TTTa),) 
1) ct covering, thrown over any thing, 
.^schyl. Ch. 487, espec. a veil, 2 Cor. iii. 
13. Horn, and jS^sciiyl. 2) fig. an im- 
pediment, (lit. something interposed be- 
tween,) 2 Cor. iii. 14, sqq. KuXv/jt/uLa knrl 
TVji/ Kapoiav KelTat. Act. Thorn. § 34, 

OV TO KaX. TTpO'i]yZLTaL aKOTCS. 

KaXuTTTw, f. i/ro), (kindr. with Kpv- 
TTTtu,) to cover over ov around, to envelope., 
trans. 1) Matt. viii. 24. Lu. viii. 16, /ca- 

XvTTTEL aVTOV (TKEVEL. XXUl. 30. Scpt. & 

Class. 2) by impl. to hide, Matt. x. 26, 
ovoEV KEKaXu/uL/jLEuov. 2 Cor. iv. 3, bis. 
So James v. 20, and 1 Pet. iv. 8, /ca\u\|/£t 
7rX7]do<3 dixaoTLvov* Comp. Soph. (Ed. 
Col. 282. 

KaX 60 9, adv. (/caXos,) prop, hand- 
somely, in N. T. icell, good, in various 
connections and shades of sense. I. as to 
manner and external character, ii^ell, i. e. 
right, suitably, properly, John xviii. 23, el 
ok KaXu)?, i. e. kXdXi^ara. Acts x. -33, and 
oft. So ou KaXws, ' not well,' Gal. iv. 17o 
Of office or duty, ivell, faithfully, 1 Tim. 
iii. 4, 12. v. 17, and Class. With emph. 
very icell, excellently, Mk. 37. Gal. v, 
7, ETps-X^TE KaXa)9. Ironically, in the 
sense of the Latin probe, Mark vii. 9, 

KuXw'S ddsTSLTe TYjV kvToX^]V T. 0£OU. 

2 Cor. xi. 4. ^lian Y. H. i. 16. In 

the sense of conveniently, James ii. 3, cru 
Kddov (ZoE /caXws. — II. as to effect, 
tendency, &c. ^VELL, i. e. justly, aptly, as 
of declarations, &c. Matt. xv. 7, kuXco^ 
7rpoE(pi]TEvcrE TTEpi vfxuiu. Mk. vii. 6. xii. 

28, OTL Ka\u}£ dTTEKpidl]. YQW 32. Lu. XX. 

39. John iv. 17. viii. 48. xiii. 13. Acts 
XX viii. 25. Rom. xi. 20, and Class. — III. 
in phrases, e. gr. 1) koXco^ eItte^v, to 
speak icell of, to praise, with acc. Lu. vi. 
26. 2) KoXoo^ £X^^^' ^''^ icell, to recover., 
i. e. from sickness, Mk. xvi. 18. Comp. 
Xen. Cyr. vii. 5, 47. 3) KaXw'S rtroLElv 
with acc. or dat. to do icell to any one, to 
benefit. Matt. v. 44. Lu. vi. 27; absoL 
Matt. xii. 12. 

ILdfxk, see in TLdyu). 

Ka/ii]Xos, OV, 6, V, a camel, Matt. iii. 
4, Mk. i. 6, and Class. In proverbs, e. gr. 
I\Iatt. xix. 24. Mk. x. 25. Lu. xviii. 25, 

eVKOTTtOTEpOV ECTTL Kdp.1]XoV Cttt T/OUXTJ- 

jULctTo^ pacpLOo^ £icrE\6sTv, applied to that 
which is extremely difficult, or impossible. 
So Matt, xxiii, 24, oi dLvXiX^^ovres tov 



K AM 



199 



K AH 



Kwi/wTra, Tijv KctjULijXou KaraTTivovTE?, 
as said of those who are diligent in the 
observance of lesser duties, but negligent 
in the discharge of higher ones. 

Kd/uli/o?, ou, 77, an oven or furnace 
for smelting metals, burning pottery, &c. 
Matt, xiii, 42, 50, eis ^\]v kcl^lvov toD 
r/rupo?, i. e. 'a burning furnace.' Sept. and 
Class. 

Ka/u/Auo), f. yaw, (contr.fr. KaTafxvco^ 
as KdjuLfxopo? fr. /caxa/xopo?,) to shut doivn 
the eyelids^ (i. e. close the eyes. So Xen. 
Cynag. k. t. (3\i(papov,) Matt. xiii. 15. 
Acts xxviii. 27, tov9 dcpd. avTcov eKcc/uL- 
fivarai/^ ' have closed their eyes.' So Phiio, 
p. 589, Kafxjj.. TO Tfj's i|/ux?l? o/jL/uia : and 
so Marc. Anton, iv. 29, Tv(p\6^ 6 kutu- 
ftivoDv Tw vospw oixfxaTL^ ' with his mind's 
eye.' In the Class, writers, however, the 
acc. is left understood, as Lucian Tim. 9, 
where it means 'conniveo, dissimulo.' 

Ka^i/o), (f. KajuLU), aor. 2. eKa/uLOv^ perf. 
KEKiJit]Ka^) I. prop. act. 'to work out any 
thing,' i. e. obtain any thing by hard labour, 
Gs oft. in Horn. ; and so laboro in Latin. 
Most frequently, however, neut. to labour 
hard; and — II. from the adjunct, to be 
weary or faint^ Rev. ii. 3, KeKOTriaKa^, 
Kai ov KEKjULt^Ka?, ' hast not fainted under 
it.' So Thuc. vi. 34, KZKjx7]K6<rLv., weary.^ 
fatigued. So also at Heb. xii. 3, we have k. 

Tal9 Job X. 1, KCLflVCOV Trj \J/vx^ 

fxov : also Joseph. Philo, and Class. — III. 
from the sense of faintness from labour 
arises another, that from weakness or ill- 
ness, to be sick, Jas. v. 15, rj evxh '^V^ 
iriaTsco? (tuxtel tov KaiixvovTa, 'the sick 
person ;' and so oft. in Class. ; as laboro 
in Latin, though always with some ad- 
junct. 

Ka/iTT To), f. to bend., gener. or to 
make crooked any thing straight, as Hom. 
II. iv. 486, K. "ltvu : mostly, however, used 
of bending a limb, espec. tJie knee, either 
through weariness, or in supplication, or 
worship. So always in N. T. I. trans, 
foil, by TO yovu, to bend the knee, as in 
homage, with dat. Rom. xi. 4 ; by tt^os 
•with acc. Eph. iii. 14. — II. intrans. 'Tzav 
yovv Kd/uL\J/£L, every knee shall bow; i. e. 
bend itself in homage, worship ; with dat. 
Rom. xiv. 11. 

Kav, (crasis for kul edv,) and if also 
if I. and if with subj. aor. or perf. and 
in the apod, the fut. or ov fxt) with subj. 
Mk. xvi. 18. Jas. v. 15, and Class.— II. 
also if even if although, with subj. 1) 
gener. with subj. aor. and fut. in the apod. 
Matt. xxi. 21, Kav tw opEi tovtco k. t. 
\. John xi. 25, Kav ccTroddurj, '^varETaL. 
Heb. xii. 20; also with subj. pres. and the 
apod, with pres. or fut. or subj. aor. Matt, 
xxvi. 35. John viii. 14. x. 38, and Class. 



2) if even, if but, at least, where /cat is 
in tens, by way of diminution ; foil, by 
subj. aor. and in the apod, the fut. Mk. v. 
28, Kav TU)V iiuLaTLcov avTOV a\\/o)fxai, 
GiadricrofxaL. Ellipt. ivithout apod. Mk. vi. 
56. Acts V. 15. 2 Cor. xi. 16. 

TLavthv, 6vo<i, 6, (fr. Kavt], a reed, this 
word being of the same form as kooScdv fr. 
Ku)di], ajKcbv fr. ayKij,) prop, a straight 
}nece of ivood, usually cane, employed for 
the purpose of adjusting and regulating the 
straightness of other things required to be 
straight. Thus the term was employed to 
denote a mason or carpenter's rule or 
square, to which allusion is made in 
Eurip. Here. E'ur. 945, ^olvlkl kuvovl 
vplxoafXEva, mason's plummet. Eurip. 
Tr. 6. Also, a measuring pole, and some- 
times a measuring-Zme, plumb-line, re- 
quired to be exactly straight. Thus the 
word came to denote a measure, ' that by 
which any thing is measured,' as to its 
straightness or perpendicularity. So Soph. 
(Enom. frag. iii. 5, wctte tektovo^ Trapd 
crTadjuii^v (the plumb-line, Hom. II. xv, 
410. Od. xxiii. 197.) iSovTO^ opdovTat 
Kavoov. Also metaph. a standard or rule 
of morals, or conduct, by which any one's 
judgment or actions are regulated. So 
Phil. iii. 16, tco avTco (ttolxeIv kuvovl. 
Gal. vi. 16, baroL too kuvovl toutw 
(TTOLxncTOvcnv, with which comp. Pind. 
Pyth. vi. 45, a-Tad/uLr^v (for Kavova) rrrpd? 
TraTpcpav £/3?7, ' walked in the straightway 
of his father's footsteps.' This sense is 
found also in the Class, e. gr. Eurip. Hec. 
606, oloEV TO y aiorxpov kuvovl tov 
KuXov jixadMV. Plut. vi. 90, kuvove^ 
dpETrj?. So in 2 Cor. x. 13, 15, 16, kuto. 

TO fXETpOV TOV KUVOVO'S, OV E/ULEpL(T£, &C, 

it may denote (with allusion to the line set 
out on either hand, which defined the space 
within which the racers were to run at the 
games, Pollux On. iii. 151.) limits, i.e. 
sphere of action, or duty assigned to any 
one. Or rather, fXETpov tov Kav6vo<5 
means the space measured out by rule, the 
allotment assigned, of action or duty. So 
fiETpov is used at Rom. xii. 3, for the 
portion measured off of any thing. So 
Ps. xxxix. 4, ' Lord, make me to know 
the measure of my days,' i. e. the space. 

a7rr]\£V(jo, f. evctod, fr. Aca7r?7\o9, a 
retail dealer or huckster, espec. of wine 
and provisions. See Luc. Herm. 59. 
Hence, KuirrikEvia meant prop, to exercise 
a petty retail traffic, as Herodot. i. 155. 
So ^^schyl. Theb. 541 ; but metaph. 

k\Q<hv ^' EOLKEV OV KUTTrfkEVaELV, ' will 

not fight by retail,' i. e. in a peddling way. 
Metaph. to make a traffic or gain of any 
action, Herodot. iii. 89, ekuttyiXeve 
iravTu TO. TrpTjyjULUTU, And as the com- 
modities in which these KUTrriXoL chiefly 
K4 



K An 



200 



K AP 



trafficked, drinkables and eatables, were 
easily susceptible of adulteration, and, in 
fact, were proverbially adulterated by 
them (see Ecclus. xxvi, 29) ; hence Ka-Ki)- 
Xeoo), in its metapho?ical sense, came 
almost always to mean, ' to turn any ac- 
tion or pursuit to a fraudulent account,' 
as KaTTijAEueLV T-d9 diKa's^ so Eurip. Hipp, 
957. d' axlfvx^ov f}opd<s ctltol^ KairriXiv, 
Hence it was applied to the Greek So- 
phistce^ who made a gain of their doctrines 
and wisdom, (hawking them about to all 
who would, see Plato Prot. p. 219,) and 
that often a fraudulent gain, by corrupting 
the truth to suit the taste of their auditors. 
So Clem. Alex. 66, ob KaTrrjXavs.TaL n 
akri^ELa. Thus KairriXEvoo came to mean 
to corrupt or adulterate any thing, both 
prop, and also m^taph. as 2 Cor. ii. 17, 
Ka7n]\E\)ovTE<5 Tov \6yov Tov GeoD, 
equiv. to ooA.ouj/t£s tou Xoyov t. 0. 
2 Cor. iv. 2. Comp. Anthol. Gr. iii. 130, 
Tu)(?] KaTniXs-vovcra Travra tov (3lov. 
See more in Bentley's Sermon on Popery, 
p. 3. 

K a Try 0 9, ov, 6, (fr. K-aTrco, to breathe, 
espec. to exhale the breath,) prop, 'the 
hreath exhaled by the mouth,' and then, 
from the resemblance, smoke^ Acts ii. 19, 
and often in N. T. and Class. It is of the 
same form with L7n/o<s from tTrw, oeTttvo^ 
(pr. oalTrvcs fr. oatco), ^aXTTi/o? fr. ^dX- 

TTO), (TTLXTTl/d'S fl. <TTlX[3(X)^ TSpiTUG'S ff. 
TEflTTO), &C. 

Ktrp^ta, as, 17, (cogn. with Kf.ap and 
Krjp.) tJie heart, as the seat and centre of 
the circulation of the blood, and therefore 
of life, in the human system, Hom. II. 
X. 94. xiii. 282. In N. T. only fig. 1. 
as the seat of the desires, feelings, affec- 
tions, passions, impulses, &c. the heart, 
1) generally, Matt. v. 8, ol Kctdapol n-rj 
Kapoia. vi. 21. Lu. i. 17. 1 Cor. iv. 5, 
Tds f3ovXd9 Toov KupoLwu^ and oft. Sept. 
and Class. 2) in phrases, as i/c or aTrd 
Kapdia^, from the heart, i. e. willingly. 
Matt, xviii. 35. Rom. vi. 17, and Class. 
&^ oXy)9 T?7§ K. and bXy Trj Kapoia, 
' with the whole heart,' Matt. xxii. 37. 
Mk. xii. 30. Sept. and Class, v Kapoia 
KUL T] \lfvxi /"-^a, ' one heart and one soul,' 
denoting entire unanimity, Acts iv. 32. 
IvdufXELcrdaL, or SLaXoyiX^EadaL ev Trj 
Kapdia auToO, ' to consider with oneself,' 
to reflect. Matt. ix. 4. Lu. iii. 15. avfx- 
^clXXelv ev Ty K. to ponder in mind, Lu. 
ii. 19. dva(3aivELv iv nry k. or ettl Ti]v k. 
to come up in or into one''s heart, Lu. xxiv. 
88. Acts vii. 23, and Sept. ^dXXEiv eU 
Tyv k. ' to put into one's mind,' to suggest, 
John xiii. 2. oidovaL ettl Kapoia^, 'to 
place upon the hearts,' i. e. put into them, 
Heb. X. 16, Comp. viii. 10. 'ix^i-i' Kap- 
oia^ ' to have in one's heart,' i. e. to love, 



to cherish, Phil. i. 7. tlvaL ev Ty k. tlvo^, 

' to be in one's heart,' to be the object of 
his love, 2 Cor. vii, 3, dv)]p /card ti]v 
Kapdiav Tuva's, ' a man after one's own 
heart,' i. e, like-minded, and therefore ap- 
proved and beloved. Acts xiii. 22. 6 Kpvir- 
To's TTj's Kapoia^ dudpcoiro^, i. e. 6 tccu 
dvdpioTTo^, 1 Pet. iii, 4. 3) by synecd. 
put for the person himself, in cases where 
various affections, passions, &c. are attri- 
buted to the heart or mind, John xvi. 22, 
Xapv<TETaL v/JLwv f] Kapoia. Acts ii. 26, 
Eucppuvdy 7) K. pLov. xiv. 17. Col. ii. 2, al. 
So in eltteIv or XiyEiv iv Ty Kapdia, ' to 
say in one's heart,' i. e. to think. Matt, 
xxiv. 48. Rom. x. 6. Rev. xviii. 7. — II. 
as the seat of the intellect, according to the 
Hebr. views, the heart, or mind, under- 
standing. Matt. xiii. 15, bis, Kai Ty 
Kapdia crvvLcoai. Mk. vi, 52, et al. and 
Sept. and Class. In the sense of con- 
science, Rom. ii. 15. 1 John iii. 20, bis, 
21. — III. fig. the heart of any thing for the 
middle, midst, the central part. e. g. 17 k, 
T77S 7^9, Matt. xii. 40, and Sept. 

K a p <5 1 o 7 1/ o) cr T 7j 9, ou, b, ( Kapdia., yi- 
vcocrKO),) heart-knoicer, searcher of hearts. 
Acts i. 24. XV. 8. Found only in N. T. 

Kaf)7ro9, ou, 6, fr. KEipia, to pluch., 
crop ; being of the same form as adpTro^, 
a dust-box, fr. aaipu), and dopiro^ fr. 
dpETTco, that being derived from the pret. 
mid. 'iSpoTra, whence it became (5op7ro9, 
by metath. for dpoiro's. Thus the word 
signifies ' what is gathered from any thing,' 
whether prop, or met. in fruit or advan- 
tage ; see John iv. 36 ; fruit, produce, of 
trees and plants, and of the earth. I. 
PROP. Matt. iii. 10. xiii. 8, & oft. ; allegor. 
John XV. 2, and 8. So also dirodidovai 
KapTTov?, to pay over the fruits, i. e. a por- 
tion of them, as rent, Matt. xxi. 41. Sept> 
and Class. By Heb. said of children, 
offspring, as 6 Kapiro? T779 KoiXia^, Lu. i. 
42. K. Tf]<s oarcpvo^, Acts ii. 30, and Sept. 
— II. METAPH. fmit, i. e. 1) for deeds., 
ivorks, conduct. Matt. iii. 8, TroincraTE 
KapTTov d^LOV TTj's fXETavoia^. vii. 16. 
Lu. iii, 8, al. and Sept. 2) for effect, re- 
sidt, Rom. XV. 28. Gal. v. 22, 6 Kapiro^ 
TOV irvEvp.aTO's. Eph. v. 9. Heb. xii. 11. 
Ja. iii, 17. Sept. Jer, xvii, 10. Mic. vii. 
13. 3) by impl. for profit, advantage, 
good, John iv. 36, kcI crwdyEi Kapirov 
EL^ X^wyv aiwvLOV. Rom. i. 13. vi. 21, 22. 
Ja. iii. 18, al. Sept. and Class. 4) KapTro^ 
X£tA.£toi;, fruit of the lips, i. e. praise, 
Heb. xiii. 15. 

Kap7ro<popiu), f. vera}, {Kap7ro(f)6~ 
/309,) to bear fruit, intrans. I. prop. Mk. 
iv, 28, avTop-dTy yap h yy KapTTocpopEl, 
Sept. and Class, — II. meiaph. of life and 
conduct, gener. Col. i. 10, Kap-rroipopovv- 
T£9 iv nravTL 'ipyfjo dyaOoJ. Matt. xiii. 



K A P 

23. Mk. iv. 20. Lu. \m. 15 ; foil, by dat. 
commodi et incoiiim.e. gr. tw Otto, Rom. 
vii. 4. Ttp davuTto^ ver. 5, i. c. to live 
worthy of God or of death. Also in mid. 
to bear fruit to oneself i. e, to propagate 
oneself to i//crease^ Col. i. 6, EvayytXiou 
ioTTL KapiTOipopov fxEVOV Kal av^av6{Xi.vov. 

Kapiro (p 6 po^^ ou, o, ?/, adj. (/ca()7ro§, 
'jrlcpopa^ fr. (pipio^ to bear,) 1) prop. 
fruit-bearing^ as said of trees, Theophr. 
H. PI. i. 3, 5. iii. 8, 1. Xen. Cyr. vi. 2, 
8, and Sept. 2) fruitful^ as said of land^ 
Ps. cvii. 34. Diod. Sic. i. 74. Xen. Cyr. 
vi. 2, 22, So Acts xiv. 17, Kaipoi Kap-rr. 
with which comp. Eustath. on Horn. Od. 
Tov's K. /xf]i/a§, ' fruit-producing months.' 

KapT ep EO), f. T70'£o, (/caf)T£pos, fr. 
Kapro^^ equiv. to /cparos,) to be strong^ 
iirjn, to endure^ to persevere^ intrans. Heb. 
xi. 27. 

K a p 0 o 9, £os ous, TO, (from part. pret. 
KEKapcpd^^ fr. KCLpcpu)^ to dry up,) lit. 
' something dried up and withered ;' any 
light substance, such as draw^ chaffs or 
any minute particle of wood, Polyb. vi. 

36, 3 ; used as the emblem of lesser faults, 
in oppos. to <5o/cos, Matt. vii. 3, seqq. Lu. 
vi. 41, seqq. with allusion to a Hebrew 
proverb ; such as Horace calls tubera et 
verrvxiCB. 

Kara, prep. gov. the genit. and the 
accus. with the prim, signif. down, i. e. 
down frorn^ down upon^ dozen in. I. with 
the GEN. e. g. — I. of PLACE, 1) as said of 
motion doivn from a higher to a lower 
place, e. g. /cara tov Kpr^jULVOv eh ttju 
daX. ' down from a precipice into the sea,' 
Matt. viii. 32. Mk. v. 13. Lu. viii. 33. So 
KuTa KscpaXij's s-X^'-^t ' have depending 
from the head,' 1 Cor. xi. 4 ; see in "E)(a), 
III. 3. Joseph, and Class. 2) of motion 
down upon a lower place, upon, Mk. xiv. 
3, KaTiytEv avTOv KaTO. Ttj? K&(pa\.r]<s, 
and Class. ; fig. Kara. (3ddov<5 7rT6ox,£ta, 
lit. ' poverty down to the very depths,' i. e. 
deepest poverty, 2 Cor. viii. 2. 3) gener. 
of motion or direction upoji., toivards, 
through^ any place or object, both prop, in 
the sense of ujioii, against. Acts xxvii. 14, 
'il3a\e KaT avTtj^ avepLcs TvcpcoviKo?, 
and spec, in the sense of through, throiigli- 
out, Lu. iv. 14, (pripit] k^r\\de Kad' oA.i]S 
Ttjs irepLXJ^pov. xxiii. 5, oiodcrKcov Kad' 
vXi]^ Tt]§ 'lovoa'ia^;. Acts ix. 31, 42. x. 

37, and Class. Also after verbs of swear- 
ing, i. e. to swear upon or b?/ any thing, at 
the same time stretching out the hand 
over, upon, towards it, Matt. xxvi. 63, 
e^op/ct^w <r£ KaTO. tov Qsov. Heb. vi. 13 
bis, cop.o<TE Kad' eavTov. Sept. and Class. 
— II. metaph. of the object toivards or 
upon which any thing tends, aims, &c. 
upon, in respect to, 1 Cor. xv, 15, Jude 
15, TTOLrjaraL Kpicriv koto, ttuvtvov, and 



K AT 

Class. ; more usually in a hostile sense, 
against, after terms of speaking, accusing, 
wai'iing, &c. ; lit. ' down upon.' Matt. v. 
11, irdv TTov. pfjjULa Kad' vmoov. ver. 23, 

£>(£t TL KUTCt (TOV. X. 35. xii. 14, (TU/X- 

f^ouXiou 'e\a(3ov kut uvtov. ver. 30, 6 
pi] tov ps-T kpov, KUT kpov iaTi. xxvi. 
59. Mk. xi. 25. xiv. 55, sq. Lu. xxiii. 14, 
(Su KaTtjyopaLTE kut avTov, oft. and 
Class. — II. with the accus. where the 
primary and general idea is down upon. — 
1. of place, i. e. 1) as said of motion, 
expr. or impl. or of extension, through, 
throughout a place, Lu. viii. 39, Kad' oXtjv 
Tijv ttoXlv Kj-jpiXTacou. XV. 14, iyiv&rro 
\Lp.o^ KaTO. T7/I/ )(oJpaj/ eKELvriv. Acts v. 
15. viii. 1. xi. 1, 6vtz9 kutq. ttjv 'lov- 
Saiav, ' who were throughout Judaea.' xv. 
23. xxiv. 12. So TTopeuEo-daL Kan-d Tr\v 
boov, ' to travel through^ i. e. along the 
way. Acts viii. 36, & gener. Kara Ttjv odov, 
'along or BY the way,' while travelling 
upon it, Lu. X. 4. Acts xxv, 3. xxvi. 13, 
and Class. Hence, from the idea of mo- 
tion throughout every part of a whole, 
arises the distributive sense of KaTa, e. g. 
Matt. xxiv. 7, KaTa tottovs, ' throughout 
all places,' in various parts. Lu. viii. 1, 
OLOdOEVE KaTa ttoXlv Kal K(jop.f]v, ' through- 
out city and village,' i. e. every one, gener. 
Acts ii. 46, kXwvte^ t& KaT oIkov 
doTov, i. e. from house to house, viii. 3. 
xiv. 23, et al. And so Class. KaTd Kcop.a^. 
2) of motion or situation upon, at, near to, 
adjacent to, &c. Lu. x. 32, yevopEuo^ Ka- 
Ta TOV TOTTOV. ver. 33, ?)\(7£ KUT UVTOV. 

Acts ii. 10, T^s Al(3vi]^ tt^s KaTa J^vpv- 
vTjv. xvi. 7. xxvii. 2, tov<s KaTa Tijv 
'Aartav tottov^, i.e. 'the places on and 
near the coast of Asia Minor.' v. 7, and 
Class. 3) of motion or direction up, 
i. e. toivards any place or object. Acts viii. 
26, TTopEuou KaTa p.E(Tr]p^pLav. xxvii. 12, 
XipLEva — ^XiirovTa Kara A'l^a. Phil. iii. 
14, KUTd (TKOTtdv Slcoko). Thuc. vii. 6, 
o7r£p Kad' avT0V9 ?]2/=over against them. 
Fig. KaTa TrpocrcoTrov tivl dvTLCTTrjvaL, 
'to withstand one to his face,' Gal.ii. 11. So 
Class. KaT op-p-a. 4) of place tcliere, i. e. 
of being at, in, ivithin a place ; foil, by acc. 
of place, Rom. xvi. 5, Ti]v KaT oIkov 
avTwv kKKXr](TLav, ' the church at or in 
their house,' i. e. accustomed to meet 
there. Acts xiii. 1, -qcrav KaTd Trjy ekkXy\- 
criav 7rpo<pT]TaL : by acc. of joers. imply- 
ing place, in, ivith, among. Acts xxi. 21, 
T0V9 KaTd Td 'idvri 'lovdalovs, ' the Jews 
dispersed among (prop, throughout) the 
Gentiles.' xxvi. 3, twv kutu 'lovSaLovs 
idiiov. xvii. 28, Tt2/£9 TU)v Kad' u/xa§ ttol- 
tlTcov, Eph. i. 15, T-t]V Kad' u/xas ttlcttlv. 
And so in Class. Also foil, by acc. of 
thing implying place, e. gr. KaTa irpocr- 
ioTTov TLvo^, in the presence of before any 
! one, Lu. ii. 31. Acts iii. 13. So kut 
' Ko 



201 



K AT 



202 



K AT 



6<pda\iuLov^, i.e. u/xwi/, Gal.iii. 1. Metaph, 
of a state or condition in which any thing 
is, or is done, thus implying also manner ; 
e. gr. Kan-' ovap^ in or by a dream^ Matt, 
i. 20.^ ii. 12, 13. 1 Cor. ii. 1, ^\^ov oh 
Kad' virepoxiju Xoyov^ I came not in ex- 
cellency of speech. Adverbially, /cax' tj- 
ovaiav, Mk. i. 27. Kanrd KpaTO^^ strongly^ 
vehemently^ x\cts xix. 20. Thuc. i. 64, kut' 
Idiav, in private, /cara /xof a§, see in v. So 
Ka%' u7r£p/3oX?7i/, exceedingly., Rom. vii. 
13, or excellently.^ 1 Cor. xii. 31. Also ol 
KaT E^ox^) those in disti?iction ^=th.e dis- 
tinguished. Acts XXV. 23. II. of TIME, 

i. e. of a period or point of time down zcpo?i 
which, i. e. at^ during which, any 
thing takes place, e. gr. Kan-ci to auTo, at 
tlie same time., together. Acts xiv. 1. Rom. 
V. 6, KaTCL KULpoiJ^ i?i duc time. Acts xii. 
1, fCttT-' EKELuov nrov KaLpov, during that 
time. xvi. 25. xxvii. 27. Heb. i. 10, 
/car' ap^a.'s^ in the beginning., of old. iii. 8. 
So distributively, /caG' vnxipav., daily. 
Matt. xxvi. 55. Mk. xiv. 49, al. ; also to 
/caO' 77/x£f)az/, Lu. xi. 3. xix. 47. Kan-' 
ETos, /cttT' EULavTov^ yearly, every year, 
Lu. ii. 41. Heb. ix. 25. x. 1, 3. KaTo. 
EopTijv, 'at each passover,' Matt, xxvii. 
15. Lu. xxiii. 17. Kan-a Kaipov., 'at cer- 
tain times,' John v. 4. Kara fxiav <Ta(3- 
(SdroDV, every first day of the week,' 
1 Cor, xvi. 2. Also Acts xvii. 17, Kan-k 
nrda-av rjfxipav. xviii. 4. Heb. iii. 13. 
Rev. xxii. 2, k. {xrjva Eva EKaaTov, and 
Class. — III. in a distributive sense, derived 
from the idea of pervading all t]i£ parts of 
a whole. Also gener. of any parts, num- 
ber, &c. e. gr. Kun-d /xtpos, i. e. part for 
part, particularly.^ Heb. ix. 5. Apocr. and 
Class. /caO' k'ya, one by one., 1 Cor. xiv. 31. 
Kanrd ova., tioo at each time., 1 Cor. xiv. 27. 
— IV. tropically., as expressing the relation 
in which one thing stands towards another, 
thus also every where implying manner. 
Spoken 1 ) of accordance, or conformity ; 
e. gr. of a rule or standard of comparison, 
&c. according to, conformably to, after, 
secundum. Matt. ix. 29, Kan-d Trjv ttlg-tlp 
vfXMv jEvridnTdi vfxtv. xxiii. 3. Lu. ii. 22. 
xxiii. 56, John viii. 15. Acts xxiii. 31. 
xxvi. 5. Rom. ii. 2, £<tt/. KaTd d\ridELav— 
iarTLu dXridi'Ts. ver. 5, 6,7. viii, 4, 5, Kard 
(jdpKa, KttTd nrvEv/xa. Eph. iv. 22. Col, 

ii. 8, al. oft. Sept. and Class. So with 
acc. of person, i. e. according to tlie ivill of 
any one, Rom. \m. '21, Kanrd Qeou. 1 Cor. 
xii, 8. 2 Cor. xi. 17. Gal. i. 11, ovk Ecrn-i 
Kan-d dvdpcoirov, 'is not human' i. e. of 
human origin, Apocr. and Class. With 
the idea of proportion, Matt. ii. 16. xxv. 
15, EKcicrn-oj Kan-d ttiv loiav ovvafXLv. 
Rom, xii. 6, and Class. Adverbially, Lu. 
X. 31, Kard crvyKvpiau, 'by chance, acci- 
dentally.' John X. 3, KaT ovopia. Acts 
xviii. 1*4, KaTd Xoyoif, 'reasonably.' Ph. | 



iii. 6, KaTd X^rjXov, zealously. 1 Pet. iii. 7, 
KUTa yvcoarcv, discreetly. So KaTd tl, 
how ? Lu. i. 18. 2) of an occasion, i. e, 
by virtue of because of, for, by, through. 
Matt, xix, 3, dnroXvaraL Tt/z/ yvvaiKa 
avTov KUTd nrdcrav aiTiav, for any cause. 
Acts iii. 17, KaTd dyvoiav, because of 
ignorance, ignorantly. Rom. ii. 5, 2 Cor, 
viii, 8. Gal, i. 4. ii. 2, & oft. Apocr. and 
Class. Of any general reference, allu- 
sion, &c. in respect to, as to, Rom. i. 3, 
KaTd ordpKa. xi. 28, Phil. iii. 6, KaTd 
OLKaLoarvvr\v. Tit, i. 4. Heb. ix. 9, KaTd 
a-vvELoi'icnj/, and Class. Hence, foil, by 
acc, with a preced. article, it forms a peri- 
plirasis for the cognate adjective ; e. gr. 
Rom, xi, 21, ol KaTd cpva-tu, 'the natural 
branches,' Col. iii. 22, toIs KaTd aapKa 
KvpLOL'2. So Td KaTd Tov TLavXov, PuuV s 
affairs, his cause. Acts xxv. 14. Td KaT 
kpk, my affairs, Eph. vi. 21. Apocr. and 
Class. Also in phrases, as KaTd nrdvTa 
TpoTTov, hi every respect, every way, Rom. 
iii. 2 ; with neg. 2 Thess. ii. 3. to kut 
Ep.E, lit. ' as to what concerns me,' so far 
as in me lies, Rom. i. 15. So Class. Ta 
KaT EpLE. — V. of likeness, similitude, &c. 
like, after tlie manner of 2 Cor. i. 17, 
KaTd crdpKa, ' like a frail and feeble man.' 
Heb. V. 6, 10, KaTd ti)v tu^lv M.eXx^- 
g-eSek, i, e. ' of an order like that of Mel- 
chisedec,' and Class. So with acc. of 
pers. Gal. iv, 28, KaTd 'IcradK, like Isaac, 
as Isaac. Rom. iii. 5, and Gal, iii. 15, 
KaTd uudpioTTou Xtyo), I speak as a mere 
man, 1 Cor. iii, 3, & Class, Adverbially, 
/caO' ov Tpoirov, as, even as. Acts xv. 11. 
KaTd TavTd, thus, so, Lu. xvii. 30. /ca0' 
opoLOTrjTa, like, similaiiy, Heb. iv. 15. — 
VI. of the end, aim, or purpose, towards 
which anything is directed, for, by way of 
Sec. 2 Cor, xi, 21, KaTd dTipLiav [i/xt/i/, 
or vjtxMif, or avToov] Xiyco, I say it by way 
of disparagement, reproach. 1 Tim. vi. 3, 
h KaT EvcrijiELav oLoaxv* 2 Tim. i. 1. 
Tit. i. 1. — Note, In composition KUTd 
implies : 1 ) motion dowmicar^ds, as KaTa- 
(3aLv(jo, Kadaipiio, KaTaTrLnrTco, &c. 2) 
agaijist, in a hostile sense, as KaTa- 
yivwcTKM, KaT-ijyopta), KaTaXaXiw. 3) 
distribution, as KaTaKX^poooTEw. 4) in 
a general sense, doimi, down iqoon, and 
also throughoid. 5) where it gives to an 
intrans. verb a transitive sense, as KaT- 
apyiw. 

KaTapaivo}, f, (iiiaofxaL, aor, 2, KaT- 
Ef3i]v, imper. KaTu(Si]dL and KaTafia, to go 
or come doivn, i, e, from a higher to a 
lower place. I. as said of persons, &c. 
foil, by dnro with gen. of place whence. 
Matt, viii. \,KaTa(SdvTL ok avTM dnro tov 
opovs, xvii, 9, Mk. ix, 9, Matt. xiv. 29, 
dnro TOV nrXoiov. Mk. xv. 30, KaTd(3a 
dTTo TOV uTavpov. Foil, by els with acc. 



K AT 



203 



K AT 



of place whither, Mk. xiii. 15, /uLi] Kara- 
(SccTco €i§ Ti]if oIkluv. Acts viii. 38. £7rt 
^i]v OdXaararav, dou'fi upon the seashore^ 
i. e. from the uiountiiin, John vi. IG. 
TTpo? TLva^ Acts X. 21. xiv. 11. Absol. 
Matt. xxiv. 17, et al. Spoken of those 
who go from a higher to a lower region, 
e. gr. cnro 'IspocroXu/jLoou^ Mk. iii. 22; foil, 
by £is, John ii. 12, £i§ KairEpvaov/jL. 
Acts vii. 15, £i§ AiyvTrTov. Absol. Acts 
viii. 15. xxiv. 1, et al. Sept. and Class. 
Spoken of those who descend^ come doicn 
from heaven^ e. gr. God, as affording aid 
to the oppressed. Acts vii. 34; of the Son 
of Man, with s/c, John vi. 38, 42 ; with 
dTTo, 1 Thess. iv. 16, et al. and Class. — 
II. as said of things^ e. gr. ' a way leading 
do\\-n from a higher to a lower region,' 
Acts viii. 26, 6o6v Ti]v kutu^. diro 'le- 
pova-. £15 TdX^av. Of things descending 
from heaven^ i. e. let down or sent down 
from God, e. gr. a vessel. Acts x. 11. xi. 
5 ; spiritual gifts, foil, by aTro, Ja, i. 17. 
So gener. from the heavens or the clouds, 
to fall^ e. gr. rj ^poxh-, Matt. vii. 25, 27. 
Xat\a\|/", Lu. viii. 23. irvp anrro tov ovp. 
Lu. ix. 54. TTup l/c TOV ovp. Rev. xiii. 13. 
Also in the general sense of to /all, to drop, 
Lu. xxii. 44. 

KaTafSdWo), f. (3a\u), (/SaWw,) to 
cast doivn, trans. Rev. .xii. 10, and Class. 
In the sense to 2>^'ostrate, 2 Cor. iv. 9. 
Sept.' and Class. Mid. to lay down, i. e. 
a foundation, Heb. vi. 1, and Class. 

KaTa(3apea), f. vaco, prop, to iveigh 
down, by laying on a burden or weight, as 
Luc. Deor. D. i. 21, and metaph. to be 
burdensome to any one. So 2 Cor. xii. 16, 
ov KUTE^. O/^as, and KaTa^apvuu)^ 2 Sam. 
xiii. 25. 

KaTtz/Sao-i^, SCO'S, f], {^KaTa^aivco,) a 
going dozen, e. gr. towards the coast, Xen. 
An. 7, 8, 26. In N. T. descent, i. e. place 
of descending, declivity, Luke xix. 37, 
Kard^. TOV 6pov<s tmv kXaLuiv. Sept. 
Josh. x. 11, kiTL T^9 K. BijdoDpcou. Mic. i. 
4, and Class. 

KaTa/St/Sa Jo), f. dcu), {(SL^dX^co,) to 
came to descend, Herodot. i. 87 ; also to 
bring down, e. gr. k'oo? cioov. Matt. xi. 23. 
Lu. X. 15. Sept. and Class. 

ILaTafSoXi], 7}<3, rj, {KaTa(3dW(t},) a 
casti?ig down in any way whatever, but 
espec. employed, (correspondently to the 
architectural use of KUTajidWco,) Heb. vi. 
1, of a laying doicn the foundation of a 
building, and also metaph. of political in- 
stitution. Find. Nem. ii. 5. And as foun- 
dation implies the beginning of any thing, 
so KaTa^oXi] is simply put for beginning, 
as Pol. xxvi. 1, 9. In N. T. it is frequently 
used, as Matt. xiii. 35. Lu. xi. 50, in 
the phrase KaTu^oXrj Kocrfxov, which 
may thus be explained, as it is by the 



Commentators, the beginning of the world, 
as KaTu^dXXofxaL often in the Class, sig- 
nifies to begin. But there rather seems an 
allusion, agreeably to Jewish ideas, to the 
world as a vast edifice erected on founda- 
tions. Thus it signifies creation, as in 
Plut. Aq. and Ign. Comp. 2, dfxa Ty 
TrpooTij KaTa^oXrj Tthv dvdpuMrMv. It is 
alsousedatHeb.xi.il, ovvapLiv 'iXa^Ev 
f t§ KaTa(3oXi]i/ (T7ripjxaTo<5, as a technical 
expression, employed by physicians to 
popularly denote the act of conception, 
q. d. ' strength for conception and procre- 
ation.' So Arrian Epict. i. 13, 3, vld-s ek 

T(Zv aVTOOV (TTTEpfXaTCOV KUL T?]9 aVTtj^ 

dvLodEv KaTa(3oXr}^, a kind of Hendiadys. 

KaTa(3pa(3Evu), f. eixtu), (/cara, (Spa- 
(Ssvto,) prop, to give tJie (SpafSslov or prize 
against any one, and by impl. to deprive 
him of the palm, Euseb. Eccl. H. vi. 30, and 
from the adjunct to beguile, TrapaXoyi- 
X^Eordai, to deprive o/any thing by trickery. 
So in N. T. gener. Col."ii. 18, fxt]dEL<s u/xas 
KaTa^pa^EVETU), 'let no one beguile you 
of your reward,' i. e. by drawing you off 
from the true doctrine to a false one. Comp. 
Rev. iii. 11, and see m.y note in loco. The 
word is called by Jerome a Cilicism, 
though it is used not only by Plut. and 
Polyb. but by Demosth. 

KaTayygXgus, £ws, 6, {KaTayyiX- 
Xio,) an announcer, proclaimer. Acts xvii, 
18. 

^aTayyiXX(x>,{i. ysXco, aor. 2. pass. 
KaTi]yyiXr]v,) prop, to bring word, an- 
nounce, make knoicn to any one. So Xen. 
An. ii. 5, 11, KaT-riyyEiXav avTto Ti]v 
ETTL^ovXriy. Hence in N. T. 1) to an- 
nounce, proclaim, publish. Acts xiii. 38, 
vixLv dcpecTL^ dfxapTLcov KaTayyiXXeTac. 
Thus in the Class, it is used of declaring 
war, proclaiming a festival, &c. 2) by 
impl. to set forth, teach, preach. Acts iv. 
2, KaTayyiXXELv Trjv dvadTacriv Ttjv ek 
vEKpcou. xiii. 5, al. said either of the Gos- 
pel, or some expression designating it, or 
its author, Jesus Christ. 3) from the sense 
to announce, make knoivn publicly, arises 
that of to laud, Rom. i. 8, ttlottl^ vju. 
KaTayylXXsTaL. 1 Cor, xi. 26, ^dvuTov 
TOV K. KaTayyiXXsTE, celebrate, com- 
memorate. 

KaTay £Xdu),{. darco, [KUTd, yfiXaw,) 
lit. to laugh doicn, utterly deride, foil, by 
gen. Matt. ix. 24, Kai KaTEyiXcov avTov. 
Mk. V. 40. Sept. and Class. 

K.aTay LvwcTKU), f. yvwao/xaL, {yi- 
vwcTKco^) to form a judgment against vmy 
one to his disadvantage. Aristoph. Eq. 46. 
Xen. Mem. i. 3, 10. acc. of thing and 
gen. of pers. In N. T. to think ill of, to 
condemn, to blame, foil, by gen. 1 John iii, 
20, sq. kdv KaTayLvwa-Ky rjjULtvv rj Kapdia. 
Prov. xxviii. 11, 7r£yijs vonauiv KUTa- 
K6 



KAT 



204 



KAT 



yuco(TEraL aurov. Pass. Gal. ii. 11, oti 

KaTeyv(x)(Tfxivo<s y\v^ because he teas hlame- 
ahle. So Lucian de Salt, cited by Eisner, 
€7ri jULavia KaTEyvucxjfxivo^^ 'charged with 
madness.' Sept. and Class. 

KttTayi/u/xt, (f. /caTaJw, Anom. fut. 
Att. KaTsd^co^ aor. 1. Ka-rea^a^ aor. 2. 
pass. /caTgdyrj]/,) to break doivji^ break in 
tico. Matt. xii. 20, Ka\afxou crvvT. ou 
KaTEa^EL. John xix. 31, 'tva KanrEaycocnv 
av. -rd GKi\r]. ver. 32,33. Sept. & Class. 

Kardya), f. djw, {ay on ^) to lead down^ 
trans. I. gener. to bring or biing down^ 
i. e.'from a higher to a lower place, foil, 
by £i§. Acts ix. 30, KUTrjyayov avTov 
€t9 KaLc-dpELav. xxiii. 20, 28. foil, by 
TTpS^ Ttva, xxiii. 15. absol. xxii. SO. Sept. 
and Class. Horn. II. v. 53. Od. xxiv. 10. 
— II. spec, as a nautical term, to bring a 
ship down, i. e. to land, Lu. v. 11, Karaya- 
y6vTE<s rd TrXola kirl Tr]V yrju. Xen. 
Hist. iv. 8, 34. An. vi. 6, 3. Sext. Empir. 
Adv. Phys. ii. 68, vt^e^ eU k^ipovs kut- 
dyovTUL Xifxiva^. Hence aor. 1. pass, kut- 
JiX^V^i foil- by £ts, to come to land, to land 
at. Acts xxi. 3. xxvii. 3. xxviii. 12. Jos. 
Ant. xiv. 14, 3. Hdot. viii. 4. 

KaTaywyt^o,uat, f. icro/JLaL, depon. 
mid. to contend against, and by impl. to 
comjiier, subdue, e. gr. ^aariXELa^^ Heb. 
xi. 33. lat. Class. 

KuTad ECO, f. oner (JO, {6e(jo,) in Class. 
to bind doicn ; in N. T. to bind together, 
to bind up, as wounds, Tpav/uLaTa, Lu. x. 
34 : a surgical term. Occ. also at Ecclus. 
xxvii. 21. 

KaT£Z0 7jA.0 9, ou, 6, rj, adj. (/cocrd in- 
tens. driXo^,) most evident, Heb. vii. 15. 
Jos. and Class. 

ILaTa^LKoX^ijo, f. acrw, (ot/cd^oj,) to give 
sentence against any one, condemn, in N. T. 
foil, by acc. of pers. Matt. xii. 7, 37. ab- 
sol. Lu. vi. 37, bis. Ja. v. 6, Sept. Jos. 
and lat. Class. 

'KaTa^ iw KOO; f. £cx), lit. to pursue 
dozen, as we say to hunt down, to pursue 
closely, a flying foe. So often in Gr. Hist. 
In N. T. to follow any one closely, in order 
to find him. Mk. i. 36, KareoLco^av 
avrov. So we say, to hunt out. In this 
sense the word occurs at Ps. xxiii. 6, Sept. 
TO eXeo's crov KaTaoiao^ETai jule. 

K aTaoovXo CO, f. waroo, 1) prop, to 
bring down, i. e. under bondage, to enslave, 
trans. : as said both of persons and coun- 
tries often in Class. 2) metaph. to treat 
in a slavish manner, domineer over, viz. 
by the imposition of ceremonial rites, 
2 Cor. xi, 20, e'L tl<s vfxa's KaTaoovXol. 
Gal. ii. 4, iVa Jj/Jtds KaTacovXivcrcovTaL. 
So Is. xliii. 23, ouic EOOvXcocrd are kv B'v- 

KaT a8vv aaT E u cOy t eucrw, (/card, 



cvvaaTEvw, fr. dwdcTTt^s,) to exercise 
poiver against any one, to oppress or hold 
in subjection, Diod. Sic. t. v. 358, iXTri^tt 
KaTaduvaarTEvcTELU twi/ TToXLTWLf. Exod. 
i. ]3, KaTEovvdaTEvou oi Aty. tous uioi/9 
'lap. (Slu, and often in Sept. So Acts x. 
38, ioofXEVO^ irdvTws toi/s KaTaovvaa-Tav- 
ofxivov^ viro tov ALa(36Xov. Simil. Diod. 
Sic. t. X. 180, TrdcTiy airivEifXE Tots /cara- 
ovvaa-TEvofxEVOL<s (oppressed) kiriKov- 
piau. Metaph. to lord it over, domineer 
over, Ja. ii. 6, ov\ ol TrXovcnoL Kwraov- 
vacTTEvovcnv v/ulwi/ ; sim. Xen. Sympos, 
V. 8, o&doLKa TOV ardif ttXoutov, fxn /ue 
KaTa^vvaaTEvcrij. 

Y.aTaLcr\v'uijo, f. vvoo, lit. to brinff 
doivn to shame^ bring dozen shame upon 
any one, trans. I. prop, and I) gener. 
1 Cor, i. 27, 'Lva tov<s cro(pov<s KaTaKyyyvrf. 
xi. 22, KaTaiayyvETE tous jxr] £)(oy'Ta§, 
and oft, in Class. 2) spec, and in pass. 
to be put to shame by being convicted of 
falsehood, 2 Cor. vii. 14, ou KaTri<TXvvd7]v, 
and ix. 4. 1 Pet. iii. 16, Xva kv to KUTa- 
XaXooarLv vfxcov, KaTaLo-xP^^^^^^- 3) 
from Heb. by meton. of cause for effect, 
to disappoint, Rom. v. 5, 17 oe kXirh 00 
KaTaicr^vvEL. ix. 33. x. II. 1 Pet. ii. 6, 
oh nxi] KaTaLayvvdy. Sept. Ps. xxii. 5, al. 
Ecclus. ii. 10. — II. metaph. to dishonour, 
disgrace, 1 Cor. xi. 4, 5, KaTaLcrxvvEL 
Tr)v KE<paXrjv av., where the full sense 
is, 'incurs disgrace on account of her 
head,' i. e. by being left uncovered. See 
my note. So we have in Jos. Ant. xx. 4, 
2, (though not in the metaph. sense,) 
aTTooco Ti]u KECpaXriv KaTaiayyva^ . 

IZaTaKaico, (f. Kavaoo, aor. 2. pass. 
KaTEKui]v, fut. 1. pass. KaTaKavdijcrofxaL, 
and in later usage fut. 2. pass. KaTUKaij- 
cro/uLaL,) to burn dozen, Angl. to burn up, 
to consume utterly, trans. Matt. iii. 12, to 
d.)(vpov KaTaKuvcTEL TTvpl aa^ECTTco. xiii. 
30, 40. 1 Cor. iii. 15, al. Sept. and Class. 
Rev. viii. 7, bis. 

KaT" cc/caX uTTTw, f, v/zo), prop, to cover 
down or over, as with a veil. Hence to 
veil. In N. T. only pass, or mid. to be 
veiled., zvear a veil, absol. 1 Cor. xi. 6, bis. 
foil, bv Ti}v KE(paXrjv, ver. 7. Sept. and 
Class. " 

JLaTaKavx^o /lai, f, vcrofxaL, depon. 
mid. to boast oneself against any person or 
thing, to glory over, foil, by gen. Rom. xi. 
18, }x^] KUTUKavx^ Tcov kXccocov k, t. X. ; 
by KaTct, Ja, iii, 14, Hence Ja. ii. 13. 
KUTaKuvxaTaL eXeo<s (for concr. 6 kXEcov) 
KpL(TEco9, i. e. 'the merciful man glories 
over judgment,' fears not condemnation. 
Sept. and rarely in Class. 

KaTCiKE LfxaL, f. ELcrofxaL, ^KElfxai,) to 
lie dozvn, \. e. to lie, to be recumbent, in- 
trans. 1) said of the sick, foil, by part. 
Mk. i. 30, KaTEKELTO Trupicraovcra, she 



K AT 



205 



KAT 



lay sick of a fever. Acts xxviii. 8, So 
Class. K. vo(Twv or atT^tvuiV : foil, by £7ri 
with dat. Mk. ii 4. Lu. v. 25. xVcts ix. 
33 ; by kv John v. 3. absol. vcr. 6, (S: Class. 
2) to recline^ i. e. at tabic in the oriental 
manner, Mk. xiv. 3; Mith ii/, Mk. ii. 15. 
1 Cor. viii. 10, and Class. 

KaTa/cXa'to, f. a(rw, (/cXaco,) to break 
do2vn, or up^ in pieces^ e. g. tov's apT0V9, 
Mk. vi. 41. Lu. ix. 16, and Class. 

Kaxa kXe t o), f. £i(ra), prop, to shut 
dotm^ as the door of a cistern, or a subter- 
ranean vault, or prison. Hence, to shut 
up any place. But it is gener. used of 
pers. in N. T. foil, by dat. of place with 
or without £1/, Lu. iii. 20, KaTtKXeicrE rrov 
*I. Ev Tj; (pvXaKtj. Acts xxvi. 10. And so 
Jer. xxxii, 3, si^ y {(pvXaKtj) KaTiK\Ei<Ts.v 
avTov. So also in Apocr. and Hdian. v. 
8, 12. In the earlier Class, it is foil, by 
£ts and an accus. 

KaTa/cXt7po^oT£co, f. >7crco, to give 
hy lot to eacli^ to distribute by lot^ trans. 
Acts xiii, 19, in text rec. Others Kara- 

KXl^pOVO/JLiu). 

KaTa/cXl'i/w, f. i/co, prop, to make in- 
dim, or lie doivn. In N. T. used only of 
the oriental posture at meals, to make re- 
dine, trans, mid. to recline at a meal, Lu. 
ix. 14, Ko.TaKKiva.'TE avTOv? /cXtcias. 
mid. Lu. xiv. 8. xxiv. 30, and Class. 

KaTa/cXu^o), f. ucro), (/cXu^to, to 
dash,) to dash doivn upon with water, i. e. 
to ovei^foic, pass. 2 Pet. iii, 6. 

KaTa/cXu(r/xo9, ou, 6, (/caTa/cXu^w,) 
a flood, deluge. Matt. xxiv. 38, 39. Lu. 
xvii. 27. 2 Pet. ii. 5. Sept. and Class. 

Ka-ra/coXou Ofio), f. ri(T(xi, {KaTci m- 
tens. cLKoXovQiu},) to folloiu closely, with 
dat. Acts xvi. 17 ; absol. Lu. xxiii. 55, 
and Class. 

KaToc/coTTTw, f. i/ao), prop. to cut 
down, or lop, as a tree; also, to cut or 
wound severely, Mk. v. 5, k. kavrbv 
Xi'Oots. So Hdot. viii. 92, KaTaKOTrTSL^. 
Also in mid. KaTaKOTri-o/uLaL, 'to wound 
and mangle the face in violent grief,' often 
in Class. 

J^aTaKptj fiviX^to, f. ia-co, to cast down 
from a precipice, to cast down headlong, 
trans. Lu. iv. 29. Sept. and Class. 

K.aTdK p L fXa, UTO?, TO, {KaTaKpLVM,) 

judgment agahist, condemnation, Rom. v. 
16, 18. viii'. 1. Dion. Hal. Ant. vi. 61, 
yjpEUiv aTroKoira^ kuI KaTUKpipidTiov 
d<pe<TEL^ aLTEtv, 

KaTaKpl'ucjt), f. vu), to give judgment 
against, to condemn. In Class, construed 
with gen. of pers. and acc. of punishment. 
But in N. T. with other constructions, 1) 
prop. foil, by acc. of pers. and dat. of 
punishment, Matt. xx. 18, KaraKpivovcriv 



avTov dauuTO}, ' tlicy shall condemn liim 
to death.' 2 Pet. ii. 6 : foil, by acc. of 
pers. and infin. Mk. xiv. 64, KwrkKpLvou 
avTOv ilvaL ivoyov davdrov. Foil, by 
acc. of pers, the ci ime or punisliment being 
inipl. John viii. 10, ovdsU ge KaTtKpivEV \ 
ver. 11. Rom. ii. 1 ; absol. Rom. viii. 34; 
pass. Matt, xxvii. 3. James v. 9 ; of the 
last judgment, Mk. xvi. 16. 2) fig. Rom. 
viii. 3, KaTEKpLVE Tj)u afxapTLau ev ttj 
arapKL, i. e. ' hath condemned, passed sen- 
tence upon, all carnal lusts and passions,' 
in antith. to ver. 1. 3) by impl. to con- 
demn, i. e. to show any one's guilt, by con- 
trast, i. e. to show, by one's good conduct, 
that others are guilty of misconduct and 
deserve condemnation; foil, by acc. Matt, 
xii. 41. Heb. xi. 7. Pass. Rom. xiv. 23. 

KaTCt/C/JKTt?, £609, t], [KaTaKpLVCt),) 

1 ) prop, condemnation, 2 Cor. iii. 9. In 
the sense of censure, blame, vii. 3. 

ILaTUKv p LEV (JO, f. Eiaco, 1) prop, to 
prevail against, overpoiver any person. 2) 
take possession of any thing by subduing 
its possessors. Both senses often occur in 
Sept. The latter only in Class. The former 
occurs in N. T. at Acts xix. 16, kutukv- 
piEvaa^ avTcou. Mk. x. 42. Sept. and 
Ecclus. xvii. 4. And so KaTaKOLpavtco, 
in Hom. II. v. 332, al. 3) in a bad sense, 
to hold U7ilaufal authority over, exercise 
tyranny over, 1 Pet. v. 3, /xrj^' cos k. twv 
KXnpoiv, ' neither as lording it over, domi- 
neering over the congregations.' So Ps. x. 
10, Sept. KaTUKvpLEvaaL tuov 'ttevvtcov, 

Kan-aXaX E(jo, f. I'larco, to speak against, 
i. e. to speak evil of, slander, with gen. 
Ja. iv. 11, ter, fxri KaTuXaXElTE dX\t]Xcai>, 
K. T. X. 1 Pet. ii. 12. iii. 16. Sept. and 
Class. 

KctTaXaXia, a5, {Kai-aXaXico,) a 
speaking against, evil speaking, sla7ider, 
2 Cor. xii. 20. 1 Pet. ii. 1.— Wisd. i. 11, 
and lat. Gr. 

KaTctXaXo?, ov, 6, r/, {KaToXaXtu),) 
1) adj. speaking against, 2) as subst. a 
slanderer, backbiter, Rom. i. 30. 

l£aTa\aiUL(3dv (X), f. \ri\lropLaL, aor. 2. 
KaT&Xa(3ov, [Kara intens. & X.) to take 
hold of, i.e. with the idea of eagerness, &c. 
trans. 1) prop, to lay hold of, to seize, as a 
criminal, John viii. 4, auTtj ?; yvv^ kut- 
EiXricpdi] E7ravT0(p(x}p(jt) fxai^Evofxivi], and 
Class. So of an evil spirit seizing and 
possessing a daemoniac, Mark ix. 18. Ml. 
V. H. iii, 9. Fig, of darkness, or evil, or 
the like, to come suddenly upon, John xii, 
35, 1 Thess, v. 4. Sept. and Class. 2) 
spec, in allusion to the public games, see 
Herodot. vi, 39. Thuc. iii. 30, to obtain, 
i. e. the prize, with the idea of eager and 
strenuous exertion, to grasp, seize upon, 
Rom. ix. 30. 1 Cor. ix. 24, ovrw n-pi^ErE, 



KAT 



206 



KAT 



tW KaTaXd(3riTE^ i. e. to (^pafBeXov. Phil, 
iii. 12, bis, olooku) oe, /cat KaTokafito 
[to ^paj^ELOv^ ver. 14], i^' w /cat /car- 
eXrjcpdrju virb tov ILpicTTOv^ i. e. ' for 
which \evy end I also was won as a prize 
by Christ.' ver. 13. 3) fig. to lay hold of^ 
grasp with the mind, to compi-eliend^ John 
i. 5, r\ Se CTKOTLct ov KaTE-Xa^EV avTo. 
Clem. Alex. Strom, i. 16, KaraXafx^dvEiv 
TO jjiiyEdo^ TTj^ a\y]QELa<3. Hence mid. 
to compreJiend for oneself pei^ceive^ find^ 
foil, by oTt, Acts iv. 13, KaTaka(36fiEvoL 

OTL (ivdoUMTOL CLJ pdfXfXaTOL ELCTL. X. 34; 

with ace. and inf. xxv. 25. A.nd so in 
Class. 

KaTaXsyw, f. ^u)^ 1) prop, to lay 
down any thing, and by impl. out or apart 
from others, to select. 2) to lay down any 
thing or person /o, or among others ; and 
thereby to reckon it or him under such a 
number. Hence, to enrol or enlist^ in a 
military sense, and also, in a civil one, to 
put on a list as fit for any duty or office. 
So 1 Tim. V. 9, X^ipa KaTaXEyicrdco 
jU7;, &c. 

KaTaXst/xjU-a, aT09, to, (/caTaXsi- 
TTO),) 1) prop, a residue of any number, of 
which the rest have been removed, Ecclus. 
xliv. 17, Nw£ kyEvvdi^ KaraXELfXfxa Tij 
yrj. 1 Sara. xiii. 15, Sept. to k. tov 
\aov ai/£/3?7, &c. 2) by impl. a small 
part,ye?y, Rom. ix. 27, to k. orcoQiiarEn-aL, 
prob. with allusion to the leaven^ called 
TO KaTaXELfXfxa.^ reserved for the next 
bread-making. 

KctTaXe iTTtt), f. aor. 1. /c«t- 

iXELxira^ prop, to leave doivn to one's 
heirs, i. e. to leave heliind^ so as to descend 
to them. Hence gener. and in N. T. to 
LEAVE BEHIND, at one's departure, trans. 
I. prop, at death, Mk. xii. 19, /cat Kara- 
Xi-TTri yvvdlKa. Lu. xx. 31. Sept. and 
Class. Gener. in any place, trans. Mk. 
xiv. 52, KaTaXiinhv Ti]v (tlvoovci. John 
viii. 9. Foil, by kv with dat. of place, 

Lu. XV. 4, ov KaTClkELlTEL TO. EVV. EV Trj 

kprijjiM. 1 Thess. iii. 1, kv ' AdnvciL<5. Tit. 

i. 5 : by ai/roD, tJiere^ Acts xviii. 19 : by 
eU aoov. Acts ii. 31. So with acc. and 
predicate of condition. Acts xxiv. 27, 
KaTEknre tov TlavXov OiOEfxivov. xxv. 
14. Sept. and Class. — II. in the sense of 
to leave^ quit tcholly^ forsake. 1) of 
place. Matt. iv. 13, KaTaXiiriov Tr]v 
'Na(,apid. Heb. xi. 27. So by impl. 
Acts xxi. 3. Sept. and Class. Hence of 
persons and things, to leave., forsake^ i. e. 
so as to have nothing more to do with 
them. Matt. xix. 5, /c. tov TraTipct Kal 
Ti)v fxr]TEpa. Matt. xvi. 4. xxi. 17. Mk. x. 
7. Eph. V. 31. 2) of things, Lu. v. 28, 
KaTaXiTTcbv ccTravTa. Acts vi. 2. 2 Pet. 

ii. 15. Sept. and Class. — III. to leave re- 
maining — to HAVE LEFT, tO TCServC, 



Rom.xi. 4, K. kjULavTM £7rTa/ctcr)(. dudpa^. 
Pass. Heb. iv. 1. Xen. Ag. v. 1. 

KaTaXtOa^o), f. acro), prop, to stone 
doivn., i. e. to stone to deaths trans. Lu. xx. 
6. Sept. Ex. xvii. 4. Num. xiv. 10. 

KaTaXXayr;, 77, (/caTaXXacrcro),) 
prop, and in Class, exchange^ i. e. of 
money. In N. T. reconciliation.^ i. e, 
restoration to the divine favour, Rom. v. 
11. 2 Cor. V. 18, 19. Rom, xi. 15, kutoX- 
Xayh Kocrpiov^ i. e. 'the means, occasion of 
reconciling the world' to God. 

KaTaXXatro-o) or ttw, f. ^w. In 
Class, 'to change any thing against any 
other thing,' viz. by weighing it against^ 
to exchange for. In N. T. to change TO- 
AV^ARDS, i. e. the disposition of one person 
towards another, to reconcile to any one, 
thus differing from dLaXXdararoD, which im- 
plies mutual change. With acc. and dat. 
2 Cor. V. 18, 19, KocrpLov KaTaXXdcrcrcDV 
kavTcp, Pass. aor. 2. KaTr]X\dyr]v^ to he 
or become reconciled to any one, with dat. 
Rom. V. 10, bis, KaT}]XXdyriiuLEv tw Gew 
K. T. X. 1 Cor. vii. 11. 2 Cor. v. 20. 
Xen. An. i. 6, 2. Eurip. Iph. A. 1157. 
Soph. Aj. 744. 

KaTaXotTTOs, ou, 6, 17, (XotTros,) left 
over., 7'emaining^ plur. ol KctTaXoiiroL^ the 
rest., the residue^ Acts xv. 17. Sept. and 
Class. 

KaTctXufia, aTOS, to, (KaTaXuo;,) 
prop, a place where one puts up, lodging- 
place., inn., in the East, a Ma?^, Lu. ii. 7, 
ovK rju avToT^ tottos kv tw KaTaXvfxaTi. 
By synecd. Lu. xxii. 11, ttou kaTi to 
KaTuXvpLa; i. e. 'a room where we may 
sup and lodge.' Sept. and later Class. 

KaTaXu'o), f. uo-o), lit. to loosen doimi^ 
i. e. 1) prop, to dissolve., disunite the 
parts of any thing ; hence spoken of build- 
ings, &c. to throw doivn^ destroy., with acc. 
Matt. xxvi. 61, KUTaXvcraL tov vaov. 
xxvii. 40. Acts vi. 14, et al. So Matt, 
xxiv. 2. 2 Cor. v. 1. Fig. Gal. ii. 18. 
Sept. and later Class. Metaph. to destroy., 
put an end to., render vain., e. g. toi; 
vopLov., Matt. V. 17. Epyov, Acts v. 38, 
and Class, 2) to unloose., to halt for rest, 
p2it up for the night., with allusion to the 
unloosing of beasts of burden, and unbind- 
ing packages. In N. T. gener. to lodge., 
taJce lodging., intrans. Lu. ix. 12. xix. 7, 
£tC7;X0£ KaToXvcraL. Sept. and Class, 

K-aTafiavQ dvco^ f. pLadijcropLaL. In 
Class, prop, to learn thoroughly : in N. T. 
to note accurately., observe., consider., with 
acc. Matt. vi. 28, k. to. Kpiva tov dypov. 
Sept. and Class. 

'KaTapLapTvpkco., f. tjcw, to witness, 
or testify against any one, with gen. 



KAT 



207 



KAT 



Matt. xxvi. 62. xxvii. 13, al. Sept. and 
Class. 

KaTa/xfii/o), f. vo), to remain f.vedli/, 
ahide^ dwell, intraiis. Acts i. 13. Sept. and 
Class. 

KaTtt/xoi/a?, adv. (/caTa, ^oi/o?,) 
alone, hi/ oneself, Mk. iv. 10. Lu. ix. 18. 
Sept. and Class. 

Yi aTavdd £^a,aTos, to, (/caTaintens. 
Slav.) a curse against any one. Meton. 
'accursed thing,' for concr. 07ie accursed, 
Rev. xxii. 3, in text. rec. See my note 
on Matt. xxvi. 74. 

intens. & av.) to litter curses against, i. e. to 
curse, Matt. xxvi. 74, in text. rec. Later 
edd. Kan-aQiixaTLX^u), probably a corruption 
of the above. See my note. 

ILaTavaXicncu), f. Xuktco, (/caTain- 
tens. & dv. ) to consume dozen, i. e. wholly, 
absol. Heb. xii. 29, irvp KaravaXiGKov. 
Sept, and Class. 

KaTai/ap/c a w, f. vcray, (/caTa, vap- 
Kao), fr. vapKi], torpor ; so called from a 
fish of that name, the torpedo, or electric 
eel, having the power of affecting any one 
■with torpor by the touch,) prop, to affect 
with torpor ; and also, by a harsh idiom of 
the common Greek dialect, to lie heavy 
upon any one, to weigh him dozen, thus 
affecting him with torpor ; also fig. to he 
burdensome- to any one, in a pecuniary 
sense, 2 Cor. xi. 8, ov KaTsvapKriora 
ovoevo?. So w'e say, to lie a dead weight 
upon any one. 

^anrav EX) 00, f. fucrw, to nod or zvinlh 
tozvards any one, i. e. to make signs to any 
one, with the head, eyes, &c. to hechon, 
with dat. Lu. v. 7, and Class. 

KaTai/OEO), f. Tjcrw, (/caTa intens. 
voi(x),) to see or discern distinctly, to per- 
ceive clearly, trans. 1) prop. Lu. vi. 41. 
Acts xxvii. 39. Fig. Lu. xx. 23, /c. n-\\v 
'Kavovpyiav. Sept. and Class. 2) fig. to 
mind accurately, to ohserve, to co?isider, 
Lu. xii. 24, K. Tov? KopaKa^. ver. 27, Ta 
KpLva. Acts vii. 31, 32. xi. 6. Heb. iii. 
1. Ja. i. 23, 24. Sept. and Class. 3) in 
the sense to have respect to, to regard, 
Rom. iv. 19, oh KaTEv6i](rs to kavTov 
cru}/j.a K. T. X. Heb. x. 24. Sept. Is. Ivii. 
1. Xen. Cyr. iii. 3, 35. 

KaTayTaw, f. rjtrw, (/caTa & afTaw,) 
to come down to or upon, to arrive at a 
place, Acts xx. 15, KaTi^vWjcraiuLBv uvtl- 
Kov Xiou, ice arrived over against Chios. 
Elsewhere in N. T. always with and 
acc. Acts xvi. 1, KaTrjuTv,a£ &h Aip^r^v, 
at Derbe. xviii. 19, 24. xxi. 7, and later 
Class. Of things, foil, by £i§, to come or 
he hrought to any one, 1 Cor. xiv. 36, to 
come upon, happen to, i. e. in the time of 
any one, 1 Cor. x. 11. Fig. to attain to 



any thing, i. e. obtain it, x\cts xxvi. 7, 
£iS vu {s-TrayytXiav) — tX.7ri^€t /caT- 
auTijarai, Eph. iv. 13. Phil. iii. 11. Pol. 
iv. 34, 2. 

KaTuvv^ L9, Eoo'S, V, {KaTavvcrcro},) 
prop, a piercing dozen or through, and fig. 
vehement pain, grief. So in Class. ; but 
Sept. has the verb KaTavvcrcroo for Heb. 
' to be silent, dumb,' and ' to lie in a deep 
sleep, stupor.' Hence also Sept. KaTu- 
vv^L's for Heb. deep sleep, stupor. Is. xxix. 
10, which Paul quotes in Rom. xi. 8, 

EOCOKSV avrol'S 6 9£05 TTVEVfJia KUTavv- 
^£0)9. 

KaTayucTo-oj, or tt6o, f. Jw, (/caTain- 
tens. & dv.) to prick through, p)ierce. Pass, 
metaph. to he greatly pained, deeply moved. 
Acts ii. 37, KaTEVvyiicrav tj7 KapSia. 
This sense rarely occurs in Class. But it 
is not imfrequently found in Sept., as 
Gen. xxxiv. 7, KaTs.vvy'i]crav oi dvopE's. 
Ps. cix. 16, Sept. KaTEvvyjULivov t>7 Kap- 
oia. Ecclus. xiv. 1, ov KUTEvvyz] iv 
XvTrrj dfxapTLa<s, et al. Apocr. And so 
the lA^iim pimgo. By the same metaphor, 
Plut. de Animi Tranq. p. 476, says that 
' the conscience of evil-doers always leaves 
in the soul fXETafxiXELav vvcrcrovcrav^ 
which may remind one of a well-known 
passage in Shakspeare. 

KaTaJtow, f. dxrca, to account as 
zvorthy o/'any thing. Died. Sic. ii. 60, fiE- 
ydXrj<s avTov ccttgooxv^ Kai-a^LcocraL. 
Jos. Ant. XV. 3, 8. Though in the earlier 
writers it is gener. used absol. in the sense 
to esteem or honour, as also in the pass. ; 
while in the later ones it is followed by 
gen. In N. T. it is either foil, by gen., as 
2 Th. i. 5, /caT. vfxd^ t^s /Sacr. t. Qeov, 
or by infin. Lu. xx. 35, Kan-a^L(x>divTE<s 
Tov aLmvo<5 I. Tvyfiv. xxi. 36, k. eKcpv- 
yilv TavTa. Acts v. 41, k. aTLfxacrdrivaL. 
And so Demosth. 1383, 11. 

KaTaTraTEO), f. ricrco, {jraTEw,) to 
tread or trample dozen, trans. Matt. v. 13. 
vii. 6, /x?77roT£ KaTa'Ka.Tr]<ji£)<yiv avTov^ 
kv ToTe iroGLv avTwv. Lu. viii. 5. xii. 1. 
Sept. and Class. Metaph. as a mark of 
scorn and contempt, Heb. x. 29, tcv vlov 
TOV Qeov. And so often conculcare in 
Latin. 

KaTaTrai/o-t?, £ws, 77, prop, a resting, 
rest. In N. T. from the Heb. a place of 
rest, fixed ahode, dzvelling. Acts vii. 49, 
Ti§ TOTTos tt;? /caTaTT. fxov; and zehgt the 
place of my rest, abode ? i. e. of God, in 
allusion to a temple. Also of the rest, or 
fixed and quiet abode, of the Israelites in 
the promised land after their wanderings, 
Heb. iii. 11, 18. iv. 3, 5. Hence fig. t?oe 
rest, quiet ahode of those who shall dwell 
with God in heaven, in allusion to the 
resi of the sabbath, Heb. iv. 1, 3, 10, 11. 
Comp. Wisd. iv. 7. 4 Esd. viii. 51. 



KAT 



208 



KAT 



KaTctTrauw, f. trw, I. TRANS. l)prop. 

to cause to cease^ to make desist, to 7'estrain, 
Acts xiv. 18, /uloXl^ KaTtiravcrav tov<5 
oy\ov<s. Sept. and Class. 2) to cause to 
rest^ Xen. Ven. vii. 2, to give rest to, i. e. 
to bring into the state of rest and happiness 
of those who dwell with God, Heh. iv. 8. — 
II. INTRANS. from the Heb. to cease f rom, 
to rest from, foil, by airo with gen. Heb. 
iv. 4, KaTETravcrev 6 0£os cctto tt. t. 
tpycoy avTou. ver. 10, and Sept. 

K.aTairiTacrfxa, axes, to, {kutu- 
Tr&i-dvvvfxL,) gener. a covering, veil, which 
hangs down. In N. T. the veil, curtain, 
i. e. of the tabernacle and Temple, of 
which there were two. See Wets. N. T. 
i. 539. Hence to KaTairiTaa-fxa tov 
vaov may be either the outer or the inner 
veil, Matt, xxvii. 51. But to cavTspov 
KaT. the second or inner veil, Heb. ix. 3. 
Fig. Heb. vi. 19, to scrcoTEpov tov kutu- 
'TTETo.crp.aTO's, that ivithin the veil, i. e. the 
inner sanctuary, holy of holies in the 
heavenly temple, comp. ver. 20, and x. 19, 
So Heb. X. 20, where it is emblematic of 
the body and death of Jesus Christ. 

ILaTairXv (ij, f. irLOfxai, prop, as said 
of liquids, to sivalloiv doivn hastily, to gulp 
doum, and sometimes used of things as well 
as persons, to absorb; of liquids, Rev. xii. 16, 
V yrj KaT. tov iroTafxov : but more freq. 
of solids, which are, as we say, bolted doiun, 
{so diglutio in Latin,) Matt, xxiii. 24, Tj/i/ 
KdfjLr]\ov Ka.TaiTLuovTE's. And so Galen, 
KaTaiTLVELv TO. cTtTtt, and Diod. Sic. ii. 58, 
TpocpY] KaTairivajxivri. In this sense ob- 
sorbere is used in Latin, as Hor. Serm. ii. 
8, 24, ' totas simul obsorbere placentas.' 
But the word is also used not only of 
bolting food, but of devou,ring persons 
alive, as Hes. Theog. 457, toi/§ plv kute- 
TTLVE. Eurip. Cycl. 218, fxri /jle KaTaTrirrs. 
So 1 Pet. V. 8, X^riTitiV TLva KaTaTrirj. 
Also fig. of the sea, which sivalloivs tip 
those who are drowned therein, Heb. xi. 
29, KaTE7r6d\i(Tav. So Athen. tov te 
vavK\r]pov XafSovcra KaTairiirtoK avTco 
cTKacpEL. Again, by anotlier metaphor, 
2 Cor. ii. 7, a person destroyed by grief is 
designated as Xuirr} /caTaTroOek, co?i- 
sumed. Moreover, at 2 Cor. v. 4, a thing 
annihilated by another is said to be ab- 
sorbed, 'iva KaTaTTodrj to ^v^tov vtto 
Trjs ^a>?;?, perhaps with allusion to a river 
being swallowed up by being absorbed or 
lost in the sea, or in marshes or sands. 
See Diod. Sic. i. 32. Again, as a wild 
animal worsted by his antagonist is usually 
devoured by him in triumph, (so Jer. li. 

.34, KaTETTLE fXE 6 dpUKOOU,) SO, with allu- 

sion thereto, St. Paul, 1 Cor. xv. 54, ex- 
presses the Christian's triumph over the 
last enemy, Death, by saying, KaTEirodi] 



6 QdvaTo^ £is v'lko's, i. e. 'is overcome 
triumphantly.' 

KaTaTTiTTTO), f. TTEo-ov/uLaL, to fall 
doivn, e. gr. prostrate, sk t{]v yrjv, Acts 
xxvi. 14. vEKpov, xxviii. 6. Sept. and 
Xen. Cyr. iv. 5, 7, kirl t^s y^s k, 

KaTaTrXEO), f. Evcrta, prop, to sail 
doivn, i. e. to land-ward, in opp. to sea- 
ward {dvd). Also, to make the land, in 
opp. to keeping to sea, Horn. Od. ix. 142, 
Ev^a KaTairXEO/jLEV. Thuc. vi. 42, ottcos 
ETTLarTdjUiEVOL KaTarrXEcocrL, and i. 5, and 
espec. to make some poH, Dem. 886, oQev 
i^EirXEvcTE TO ttXoTov, EVTavda KaTa- 
itXeIv auTo. Xen. Hist. v. 1, 20. But it 
is more freq. followed by £ts and acc. of 
place, in the sense to come hy ship to, to 
arrive at. So Lu. viii. 26, KaTETrXEVcrav 
EL'S T7]v \uopav Tcou Tad. lit. 'made land 
at.' 

J^aTairov E(i), f. -no-co, lit. to work 
down, i. e. to wear down by labour or sick- 
ness, (Dion. Hal. 1669, 3, vttS kottov 
/caTa7roi^7)0£ts,) also to ivear dozen by 
trouble, affliction, Pol. xxix. 11, 11. ^1. 
V. H. iii. 27, VTTO iTEvia^ KaTairovov- 
fj.Evo<5. 2 Mace. viii. 2. And so Acts vii. 
24, EiroU](rEV EKdiKtiaLV tw KUTairovov- 
jULEVM, 'the aggrieved or injured party,' 
or the persou pcBne confecto ; 2 Pet. 
ii. 7, KaTaTTOuoupiEvov vtto t^s — dva- 
(TTpocpf]<s, ' wearied or worn out,- eneca- 
turn, annoyed. So Theophr. Char. viii. 

5, KaTUTTOVOVVTE^ TtttS xlfEvhoXojLaL^. 

The sacred Avriter may have had in 
mind Isa. xliii. 24, ' Thou hast made me 
to serve with thy sins, thou hast ivearied 
me (lit. worn me out) with thine iniqui- 
ties.' The sense to be wearied is indeed 
not frequent ; but it is found in Plut. 
Alex. 40, where warning his soldiers 
against luxury and idleness, Alexander 
bids them remember oTt toov KaTaTrovi]- 
Oevtcou oL KaTaTTOvrjaavTE? tjolov Kad- 
EvdoucTLV. Here, however, notwithstand- 
ing w^hat the Editors say, the sentiment 
expressed by the words as they now stand, 
is so harsh and little suitable to the scope 
of the context, (which is to enjoin labour 
in preference to idleness,) that the passage 
is, I doubt not, corrupt; though easy to 
be emended, by reading otl tcov diro- 
irovi](rdvT(jov ol KaTaTrovridiuTE'S rj. k. 
' those weary with labour sleep more 
sweetly than those that have shrunk from 
labour.' 

KaTaTToyTt^o), f. tcrw, (TrofTi'^o), fr. 

TTovTO's, sea,) to plunge, immerge into the 
sea, to sink therein, trans. Class, often. 
Pass, to be sunk. Matt, xviii. 6, crvpLcpipsi 
— 'Iva KaTairovTLO-dy] kv to) tteX. So 
Plut. Timol. 13, yvvri KaTairovTLcrQEtcra 
eU to TriXayo^, with allusion to drowning 
in the sea; a frequent mode of capital 



K AT 



209 



K AT 



punishment amonor the Gentiles and Ro- 
mans, and also the Eiryptians, Syrians, 
and other Orientals. In Matt. xiv. 30, 
ap^dasvo9 Kaxa7roi/T£^£cr6at, it simply 
signifies, to be sunk\ to i^ink, or rather to be 
drowtied^ as in Diod. Sic. xviii. 20, viro 

KaTtxpa^ a?, tj, (fcaTa, dpd,) lit. im- 
precation agai?ist, i. e. 1) prop, and gener. 
imprecation^ cursing^ Ja. iii. 10, ek t. a. 
CTofxaTos s^tp')(^sTaL EvXoyia Kai KaT- 
dpa. Sept. and later Class. 2) from the 
Heb. curse^ i. e. a devoting or dooming to 
utter destruction ; hence by meton. con- 
de?nnation, pimisliment^ Gal. iii. 10, viro 
Ka-rdpav eto-i, are subject to cuise, equiv. 
to iTTiKai-dpaToL E/ct. ver. 13 bis, sk 7-?]§ 
KUTapa? Tov v6/jL0V, ysvo/xsvo? virip 
v/uijov KUTctpa^ i. e. from the curse, doom, 
"which the law threatens, being himself 
made a curse for us,' i. e. meton. accursed 
(see more in Bp. Pearson cited in my 
note). So 2 Pet, ii. 14, Kai-dpa^ TtKva, 
i.e. ' on whom the curse abides,' or ' per- 
sons devoted to destruction.' Also said 
of the earth, Heb. vi. 8, yv ... KaTapa^ 
tyyv9, near to a curse., 'almost accursed,' 
i. e. doomed to sterility. So Sept. Gen. iii. 

17, E'TTlKaTUpaTO^. 

KaTupdo fjLai, f. ucrofj.ai^ depon. mid. 
(ycaxa, . dpaofxai,) prop, to ivish or pray 
against any one, i. e. to ivish evil to, to ac- 
curse., with acc. Matt. v. 44, tous kut. 
v/uLas. Rom. xii. 14. Ja. iii. 9. Sept. and 
Class., namely, as opp. to EvXoyeTv. So 
Xen. An. v. 6, 3, ttoXXol Eo-fcrOe oi kir- 
aivovvTi's, TToXXoi EcrEcrds ol KaTupco- 
fxEvoL : but mostly foil, by dat. From 
the Heb. to curse., i. e. ' to devote to de- 
struction so of a fig-tree, Mk. xi. 21. 
Pass. part. Ka'Tr\pafXEvo<s, accursed^ Matt. 
XXV. 41. Sept. and Apocr, 

KaT-apyto), f. ncrui, prop, and gener. 
to render, dpyd^, (i. e. tifpyos,) inactive.^ 
idle, useless. I. directly, 1) prop, as 
said of land, to spoil, make unproductive, 
Lu. xiii, 7, IvaTL Kal n-t^v yfju /caTapygt; 
Ezra iv. 21. And so dpyo^ often in Class, 
of unproductive land. 2) fig. to maJce vaiji, 
render ineffective or fruitless, e. gr. Ti]v 
irL(TTLV TOV Beoo, Rom. iii. 3. vofxov, iii. 
31. Eph. ii. 15. E'wayyEXlav, Rom. iv. 
14, Gal. iii. 17. Hence, by impl. to abase., 

1 Cor. i. 28. — II. BY IMPLICATION, to 

cause to cease, do away, put an end to, 
1 Cor. vi. 13. xiii. 11, -ra tou vyittlov' to 
abolish, destroy, Rom. vi. 6, 'Lva Kwrap- 
yridrj to crujjxa Trjs djuapTia^, lit. ' might 
be deprived of its efficacy,' and no longer 
cause sin. 1 Cor. xv. 24, otuv Kwrap- 
yncri irdcrav dp^w. So Hos. i. 4. 2 K. 
xxiii. 5. Also 2 Thess. ii. 8. 2 Tim. i. 
10, K. Tov ^dvaTov, ' deprived death of 
its power.' Heb. ii. 14. Pass, to he done 



away, to cease, 1 Cor. ii. 6'. xiii. 8, tt/oo- 
07}T£rat KaTapyt^dtjcTovTaL. 2 Cor. iii. 
7, 11, 13, 14.^ Gal. V. 11. So also KUTup- 
yElcrdaL d^o tlvo<s, to cease from, i. e. to 
cease being in connection with any person 
or thing. So k. aTro tov v6/ulov, to be 
freed from the law, Rom. vii. 2, 6, equiv. 
to iXivdlpa EGTLv diro tov vopiov at ver. 
3. Or rather there is an hy])allage for 
KaTr]pyi]TaL 6 vofxo's tov dvopo^, ' the 
law or right over her by her husband, is 
annulled,' has ceased. Gal. v. 4, /carrjp- 
yriQi]TE d-TTo TOV Xpia-Tov, 'ye have 
separated yourselves from Christ,' have 
apostatized from him, ceased to be Christ- 
ians. A Hebraism, formed on the use of 
1p bin, which often means ' to cease from 
having connection with, or dependence 
on,' &c. Job xix. 14, ' my kinsfolk have 
ceased from me,' i. e. ceased from connec- 
tion with me ; Is. ii. 22, ' cease ye from 
man,' i. e. have nothing to do with him. 

ILaT ap lQ fxiw, f. 77cra), prop, to count 
doivn to, to reckon under or amo7ig. Pint. 

Sol. E(3do/iXOV EV TOtS CTOCpol'S KUTapiQ- 

fwvcTL. And so Plato, Polit. p. 266. A. 
Dion. Hal. p. 402, k. tlvu ev toT§ Trpwrois. 
In N.T. only in pass. Aci%i.\l ,KaTripidfir]- 
fjLivo's rju (Tvu hfjuv. 2 Chr. xxxi. 19, ttuvtI 
KaTapLd/moviJLEuw Iv t. Aevltul'S. Diod. 
Sic. iv. 85, iv Tax's kut ovpavov darTpOL9 
KaTapLQfxi]QEL<s. The Class, constr. is 
fxETa and gen., as Eurip. Tr. 865. Plut. 
Solon, p. 84. Jambl. V. P. vi. 30. 

KaTapTt^o), f. L(TM, (/caTfi intens. &, 
ap-Ti'^w, apTiOs,) to make quite ready, to 
put in full order, to make complete, trans, 
I. PROP, and 1) espec. of what is broken, 
injured, etc, to refit, to repair, e. gr. Ta 
cLKTva, Matt. iv. 21. Mk. i. 19. Sept. & 
Class. Fig. of a person in error, to re- 
store, to set right his judgment. Gal. vi. 

I. Plut. Marcell. 10. 2) by impl. to make 
perfect, deficient in no part. Of persons^ 
Lu. vi. 40. 2 Cor. xiii. 11, KaTapTiX^EoQE, 
'be ye perfect.' 1 Pet. v. 10. with Iv tlvl, 
' in any thing,' Heb. xiii, 21, KaTapTiaat 
vfid'S iv TT. Eoyco dyadw. 1 Cor. i. 10. 
Pol. V. 2, 11. Of thijigs, e. gr. Ta vuth- 
prilxaTa, to fill out, supply, 1 Th. iii. 10. — 

II. GENER. to prepare, set in order, consti- 
tute. In N. T. only in pass, and mid. 
Rom. ix. 22, cr/cfiu?) 6pyr]<i KUTripTLcrjUiiva 
£is dircoXELav. Matt. xxi. 16, k. alvov. 
Heb. X. 5, crcofxa ok KaTtjpTi'o'w ^ot, ' a 
body hast thou prepared for me,' i. e. as a 
sacrifice to thee. Heb. xi. 3, KaTripTLcrdai 
Tous aicova? pn/xaTL Qeov, ' were created 
and set in order.' Comp. Ps. Ixxiv. 16. 
Ixxxix. 37. Sept. Diod. Sic, xi. 75. Pol. 
i. 21, 4. 

KaT d pT icr L9, €cov, t], (/caTapr/^tt),) 

restoration to a right state, perfection, i. e, 
the being made or becoming perfect, 2 Cor. 



K AT 



210 



KAT 



xiii. 9, Tr/y /c. v/jLU)V^ i. e. ' your "being re- 
stored to a perfect state' in faith and 
morals. Plut. iv. 16, 

<i perfecting^ i. e. the act of making per- 
fect, or wliole, Eph. iv. 12, Trpos tov k. 
TMV ayitov. 

KaTa(r&L(o^ f. gicroj, prop, to shake 
doivn^ and, by use, to shake the hand down 
to any one : a mode of enjoining silence 
and attention, Acts xix. 33, k. Ttjv -y^lpa. 
xxi. 40, K. TTj x^'P^ Xaw. xii. 17. 
Philo, 1018. Jos. Ant.viii. 11, '2. Heliod. 
iv. 16. 

KaTafT/caTTT w, f. i/aco, prop, to dig 
doivn under a building, &c. to undermine^ 
and hence to overthroiu^ to destroy^ to rase^ 
as buildings or cities, &c. Rom. xi. 3, /ra 
^V(JLa(JTi]^ia (TOV KaTiaKaxf/av. Part, 
pass. Acts XV. 16, to. KaTEcrKafXfxiva^ 
ruins. Jos. and Class. 

KaTa<T/C£ua^a), f. ao-w, to prepare 
fully ^ to pid in readiness^ trans, as a way 
before an oriental monarch. Matt. xi. 10. 
Lu. vii.27. i. 17, \a6v KaTEaKevaa-jULivov^ 
a people fully prei^ared^ i. e. to receive 
the Messiah : and so in Class. Said of 
buildings, to huild^ construct^ e. g. oTkov, 
Heb. iii. 3, 4. cr/crjyjji/, ix. 2. kl^odtov^ xi. 
7. 1 Pet. iii. 20. Jos. and Class. Of God, 
to create^ scil. to. iravra^ Heb. iii. 4. 
Sept. Is. xl. 28. xliii. 7. 

JLaTaoTKrivou}^ f. wco), prop, to pitch 
a tent^ Class. In N. T. gener. to sojourn^ 
divell ; said of birds, to lodge or harbour^ 
kv TOtQ kXclool^^ Matt. xiii. 32. vwo Ti}u 
cKLuv^ Mk. iv. 32, & Sept. Fig. to res^, 
remain^ Acts ii. 26, i] aap^ fxov Kara- 
crKr]V(jt)(yeL ett' eXirtdL. 

voco^) in Class. & Sept. the act of pitching 
a tent^ or a te?it pitched ; in N.T. a dwelli?ig- 
place^ abode ; and, spoken of birds, a haunt^ 
Matt. viii. 20. Lu. ix. 58. Sept. & Apocr. 

KaTacr/cta^o), f. do-w, (cr/Cia^co,) to 
shadoiv dozen upon., oversJiadoiu, Heb. ix. 
5, and Class. 

KaTaar KOTT iu), f. tjo-w, in Class, to 
vieiv accurately., carefully inspect ; in N.T. 
with sinister intent, to spy oid., exploi^e^ 
trans. Gal. ii. 4, KaTacrKoirrjaaL nri]v eXev- 
dspiav nixoov. Sept. 2 San>. x. 3. 1 Chr. 
xix. 3. 

KaTac/coTTO?, ou, 6, {KaTacrKoirito^^ 
a spy., Heb. xi. 31. Sept. and Class. 

J^aTacTOCp lX^o nia f. LaoiuaL^ depon. 
mid. prop, to be ivise or crafty against any 
one, i. e. to deal subtlety icith^ overreach 
with deceit, foil, by acc. Acts vii. 19, 
KaTacrocpLadixEvcs to yivo^ vjULoov. Sept. 
Jos. and Class. 

Karao-TtWo), f. eXw, 1) ])T0^ . to put 



doim, as said of the fasces, Dion. Hal. 
Ant. viii. 44 ; or to let doivn, loiver., by a 
sense found in KaraaToXiu 2) fig. to put 
doivn or repress., as said of a tumult, Jos. 
Ant. i. 1, 2. iv. 4, 4. xiv. 9, 1. xx. 8, 7. 
And so Acts xix. 35, k. tov ox^ov. Also 
used pass, of persons, to put dowm^ or re- 
press them when making a tumult, Plut. 
viii. 162, 11. Diod. Sic. Vit. x. 97, tou? 
avaLcr'yyvTovvTa<s k. ^lian H, An. iv. 
29. 3 Mace. vi. 1, for KaTacrLydto, In 
Acts xix. 36, KaTEaTakjj.Evov's has the 
sense quiet., orderly^ as Diod. Sic. Vit. i. 
227, Kan-EaTaX/mivoL tois ridcCTL* so 
KaTaarnroXi] signifies quietness^ composure., 
in Plut. and Epict. 

Y^aTacTTti fxa., aTo?^ 'Td^{KadLcrTv,iuLL,) 
prop, a constitidion or fixed state., whether 
of body (habit of body) or mind ; also of 
visage, mien., look., Plut. Marc. 23, oh tov 
<Tuvvdov£ fxETU^aXwu KaTacrTVjijLaTO^., 
not altering from his accustomed mien.' 
Athen. p. 38, 219. Jos. Ant. xv. 75, uTpE- 
jxaiM TM KaTaarTrj/JLaTL. In N. T. the 
word only occurs at Tit. ii. 5, h KUTaaTri- 
fxaTL LEpoTrpETTET?., whcrc the sense dress., 
and even mien., is too limited. It may be 
supposed to denote, in a more general 
sense, carriage or deportment., as in Por- 
phyr. de Abstin. iv. 6, (speaking of the 
Egyptian priests,) to crEjxvdv Kal ek tov 
KaTaGTUfiaTO? EcopaTO. Simplic. in 

Epict. p. 278, WCTTE TO K. jULl] (TEjJivdv fXEV 

a)S ^apv (patvEadai^ &c. Ignat. 
Epist. ad Trail, p. 3, where he says of a 
bishop, ov avTo to /c. /uLEyaXt] fxaQriTEia. 

J^aTaoTToXr]., 77, (/caTacrTsXXo),) 
prop, a loivering., as said of sails, or a let- 
ting dozen of a garment, so as to cover the 
whole person ; implying the adjustment of 
it around the person. In N. T. 1 Tim. 
ii. 9, EV KUTacfToXy Kocrfxiw., it is used 
simply for dress., as in Jos. B. ii. 8, 4, 
KaTaa-ToXi] /cat <x\7jjxa awfxaTO^. At 
Is. Ixi. 3, KaTa(TToXi]v oo^rj?, it means 
garment., as our raiment for garment. In 
the Class. KaTaaToXi^u of itself meant 
modesty^ as said of dress. So Plut. Per. 
5, commends Pericles for his Trpoaon'Trov 
oruaTacTLV., irpaoT^Ta iropELa^., KaTa- 
(TToX^v 7rEpi(SoXrj<s. And Hippocrates 
admonishes the physician fxEjULUTjadaL Kad- 
£0,07}?, Kal KaTaaToXr]<5 7r£pt/3oA.775, dua- 
/cfpicocTEcos,', (3pa')(yXoyia9. For so the 
passage should be pointed, and not, as it is 
generally edited, KadiSpr]^ /cat /caracrTo- 

A.779, TTEpLCTToXrj'S. 

J^aTaoTT p E(p (X)., f. i/ro), prop, to turn 
doiun., or under ; also, to turn upside doivn., 
Matt. xxi. 12, TpaTTE^as /c. Mk. xi. 15. 
In Sept. and Class, to oi-erturn^ as said of 
buildings, or fig. of thrones. 

YaT a<TT p7]v idco^ f. a'crw, (/caTa & 
o-T. fr. arTprjvo's, self-willedness, lust, which 



K AT 



211 



K A T 



occurs in 2 K. xix. 28. Rev. xviii. 3,) to 
grow wanton apah/st any person or thing, 
as a law, &c. 1 Tim. v. 11, oTav KUTa- 
<TTpi]VLd<TU)(yL Tov XjOio-TOu, '' Icad a life 
of luxury or disobedience to Christ' and 
his law. 

KaTacrTpo(^T], t/s, t?, {KaTaarTpicpco^) 
I. prop. & gener. ' the act of overturning' 
what is set up ; and fig. destruction^ as said 
of cities, 2 Pet. ii. 6, TroXets — KaTucrTpo- 
(py KaTEKpLvtv. Sept. & Class. — II. spec. 
destruction^ 1) prop, as said of men car- 
ried off by sudden death. Job xxi. 17. 
2 Chron. xxii. 7, al. in Sept. Jos. Ant. 
XV. 8, 4. 2) metaph. serious damage or 
injury, as opp. to to xp^JO'^MO^^, 2 Tim. 
ii. 14, kirl KaTaa-Tpocpy t. cikovovtwu, at 
least according to the interpretation of the 
best Expositors. But there is, I appre- 
hend, no such opposition intended to XP'?" 
(TLfxov^ and the sense thus assigned is too 
vague and general. The true meaning of 
the expression rather appears to be sub- 
versio7i of faith^ by a tacit opposition to 
o'lKoSofxt]^ such as is alluded to at ver. 18, 

dvaTpiTTOVGLV Tl]v TLVWV nTLCTTlV. The 

opposite is denoted, 2 Cor. x. 8. xiii. 10, 
sis 0LK000ixr\v^ koI ovk sh KadaipEorLV 
vfJLcvv. And so in Rom. xv. 2, Trpos oIko- 

^anracTT puivvv fXL^ f. (TTpwcra)^ prop. 
to spread dotvn or over the surface of any 
thing, to streio over ; (so Galen ap. Steph. 
Thes. /oooots KaTadTpoovvvvai to 'ida- 
(po^. Diod. Sic. vol. i. 129,) and then, as 
in the Latin sterno^ prosterno^ as said of 
persons, to prostrate^ and by impl. to Jcill^ 
Herodot. ix. 69, KaTEC-Topecrav avTiwv 
E^aKoaiov?^ and 76. Eurip. Here. Fur. 
1000. And so Numb. xiv. 16, KaTscrTpoj- 
(TEV avToi)^ kv ttj iptj/xw, perhaps with 
allusion to mowing. So Hor. Od. iv. 14. 
31, ' primosque et extremes metendo strcc- 
vit humum from which two passages it 
is plain that there is an hypcdlage for to 
streic the ground with dead persons. So 
Diod. Sic. XV. 80, irdvTa tov tottov 
VEKpcou KaTE(TTp(jD(T£ but morc freq. in 
plur. e. gr. Diod, Sic. xix. 108, Tras 6 t6- 
7ro9 vsKooov KaTsaTpood}]. So in 1 Cor. 
X. 5, KaTea-Tpwdiiarav kv Ty kpinfxu)., the 
sense is not ^im^Aj perished^ as the recent 
Commentators explain, but ''ivere stretched 
out dead^ the desert was overspread with 
their corpses ; meant to represent death 
graphically.^ in its most appalling form. 
So Mi. H. A. \\\. 2, XoLfio^ avTOv^ crv\- 
XajSoJi/, KaTkarTpioarE. 

KaTa cru'p w, f. pw, prop, to drag doivn., 
as a heavy stone or log of wood, also to 
drag, pull heavily along, as said of a ship 
in launching, or a net in fishing, but gener. 
as used of persons forced to any place, to 
Jiaul along or away, Philo, p. 990,1010. Lu. 



xii. 58, nivTTOTE KaTarrvpy ore Trpos t. Kpi~ 
Ti']v. And so Latin detraliere in judicium. 

K ara (T^ajo), f. ^co, {kutu in tens. 
o-</)aJaj,) to kill outright, to butcher, Diod. 
Sic. xii. 76, TrdvTa's v(3i]ddu k. and often 
in Class. So Lu. xix. 27, KUTuacpd^aTE 
Efxirpoa-Qiv fxov. 

KaTacrcp pay L^u), f. lao), prop, to 
seal doicn, as the orifice of any vessel, or 
to seal up, as said of closing up any thing 
by a seal ; espec. said of a book or roll, 
Rev. V. 1, K. (3l(3\lou. So Lucian, Pseud. 

49, EL TTOTE ^EaCraLTO TO /3. KUTECTCppa- 
yiCTlXEVOV, 

^aTdcry^ECTL's, fw?, 77, (/caTtx^i) i^^ 
Class, tlie act of tcddng possession of any 
thing, or the holding it when possessed; but 
in N. T. the thing so possessed, as house or 
land, Acts vii. 5, dovvat avTyu €ts KUTd- 
orxEoriv, (so Gen. xvii. 8. xlvii. 11. xlviii. 

4, and freq. in Sept. and Jos.) and Acts 
vii. 45, kv Ty KaTucr^icTEL, for tls Tyv k. 

'KaTaTLdr]iJLL, f. dvcrw, to pid or lay 
doum, to deposit in any place, trans. \) 
prop, e. gr. in a tomb, Mark xv. 46', 
KaTkdi)KEv avTov kv iuLV'i]fiEL<jp, and Class. 
2) mid. to deposit for oneself i. e. to lay 
up for future use, gener. Xen, Cyr. vii. 

5, 34. An. vii. 6, 34. ^ In N. T. fig. Acts 
xxiv. 27, ^iXcov x^P'-'^^^ KaTadiadaL 
TO?? 'lovo. 6 ^rjXi^, ^ wishing to lay up 
favour with,' i. e. to win the favour of, 
the Jews, xxv, 9, and often in Class. 

l^aTUTOfxri, rj?, 77, {KaTaTEfxvco,) con- 
cisioji, i. e. a cidting off, midilation. So 
Phil. iii. 2, (^XIttete Tr\v k, it is said con- 
temptuously, for the Jeivish circumcision, 
in contrast wdth the true spiritual circum- 
cision ; or rather it signifies, abstr. for 
concr. ' those who maintained the neces- 
sity of circumcision.' 

K.aTaTG^Ev CO, f. Evaro), {to^evw,) to 
shoot doivn. Pass, with dat. ^oXidi, Heb. 
xii. 20, and Class. 

KaTttTp £X (aor. 2, KaTeopajUiOv,) 
to run doivn. Acts xxi. 32, KaTEopafiEv £7r' 
avTov's, ' he ran down to them.' Sept. and 
Class. 

KaT acb dy CO, see ILaTEordico. 

J^aTacp kp CO, (J. KUTotcrco, aor. 1. pass. 
KraTijys'xOjjy,) 1) to bear or carry any 
thing or pers. doicnwith violence, to throw 
dou'n. So Class. In N. T, pass. KaTa- 
cpkoEcrdaL, to be borne or throivn doivn, to 

fall. Acts XX. 9, KUTEVEX^^'i-'S aTTO TOO 

vTTvov ETTECTE, \. c. ' hc sunk down, from 
sleep,' lost his balance and fell. And so in 
Class. Fig. to be borne dozen, oppressed, 
with sleep, virvuo. Acts xx. 9. Also in 
Class, with kcp' virvvo or eU viruov. 2) 
KaTucfykpco xl/rjcpou, with kutu intens. to 
give a vote, to vote, equiv. to cpipco \l/r}(pov, 
but stronger, implying alacrity, zeal, Acts 



K AT 



2 



12 



K AT 



xxvi. 10, KaTnvsyKa xl/rjcfyov^ I gave, lit. 
cast doivn, my vote, assented. So cpipoj 
\l/rj(pov, Dem. p. 271, Plut. Coriol. p. •220. 

KaTa(^£i;ytt), f. ^o/uLai, to flee doivn 
to any place, &c. i. e. to fl^ee for refuge, 
e. gr. £ts Ta5 TroXsts, Acts xiv. 6. Fig. 
with inf. Heb. vi. 18. Sept. and Class. 

KaTacpd E L p CO, f, £pu), prop, to quite 
spoil, mar, corrupt, make useless, as said 
of things ; and also by impl. of persons, to 
destroy. In N. T. the word signifies, 1) 
prop, in pass, to he destroyed, as said of per- 
sons, to perish, 2 Pet. ii. 12, ku t?7 (pdopa 
avTcov KaTa(p6apvcrovrai, ' shall utterly 
perish.' So Sept. and Diod. Sic. i. 78. 2) 
fig. to corrupt, deprave, e. gr. n-du vovv. 
Pass. 2 Tim. iii. 8, KaTe(pdapuhoL. So 
Gen. vi. 12, eTSe Ku^oto? tj/i/ yTju, Kal r]u 
KaT£(pdapiiiEvi], OTL Kari<pd&Lp£ iracra 
arap^ Ti]u oodv avTov, 

KaTa<p lXeo), f. i](T(x), to Jciss ivarmly, 
deosculor, Xen. Mem. ii. 6, 33, tous ^xeu 
Ka\ov9 (piXvcrouTo^ /ulov, tov<s o' ayaQov<s 
KaTa(pL\.ri(ToiiTO<5. And so gener. in Class, 
as also in N. T. Matt. xxvi. 49. Mk. 
xiv. 45. Lu. vii. 38. xv. 20. Acts xx. 37. 
Though in the first two passages, Schl. 
Wahl, and Bretsch. regard the Ka^a as 
pleonastic, urging that the LXX. render 
the Hebr. pt^3 indifferently by (pLXico and 
KctTacpiX. But that is no good argument ; 
for Karacp. is in the Sept. always used in 
the full sense. And so in the Class. ; for 
as to the passage of ^lian V. H. xiii. 34, 
fcaTEcpiXEL KXaicov, it is of the same cha- 
racter as Lu. vii. 38, where the kuto. is 
allowed to be significant. In Xen, Cyr. 
vi. 4, 10, the /cara is not jDleonastic, And 
as to the passages of the N. T. where 
those Critics contend that it is so, namely, 
Matt. xxvi. 49, and Mk. xiv. 45, if the 
kiss were really a mere kiss of salutation, 
we might regard the kuto. as redundant, 
espec. since (pLXtw, to denote the kiss of 
salutation, is used at Gen. xxvii. 26. 
Exod. xviii. 7 ; but it is probably not 
such. It would seem that the sacred 
writers used the kuto. after the simple 
(pLXio), to intimate the baseness of Judas ; 
who was not content with the bare kiss of 
salutation and respect, but, to conceal his 
treachery, kissed his master more cordially 
than usual. 

KaTacp pov ico, f. tf (toj, lit. to tliinh 
against any one, and by impl. to despise, 
with gen. Matt. x\dii. 10, fxi] /car. iv6<5 
nrtjou fXLKptbu tovtwv. 1 Cor. xi. 22. 
1 Tim. iv. 12. 2 Pet. ii. 10, and Class. 
In the sense to neglect, not care for. Matt, 
vi. 24. Lu. xvi. 13, toD k^kpov k. as 
opposed to avTkyE(j'daL. Appian, ii. 493, 
K, kavTov. Also to disregard, Rom. ii. 4. 
1 Tim. iv. 12. vi. 2, fii) KaTucppovELTco- 
aav. Heb. xii. 2, aicrxvvri'S Karacppo- 



vi](Ta?. And so in Class, as Plato ApoL 
S. § 16, K, KLvduvov. 

KaTacf) p ovr]Tij£, ov, 6, {KaTa<ppo- 
vkco,) a despiser, contemner., Acts xiii. 41, 
and Class. 

Karax^w, f. Evcrui, to pour down 
upon, to pour upon, e. gr. kirl ttjv Kscj), 
Matt. xxvi. 7. Kara KE(p. Mk. xiv. 

3. Sept. and Class. 

Karax^ Lo^, lov, 6, rj-, adj. (/cara, 
X^wf,) utider-groimd, Phil. ii. 10, put for 
adi]<s and its inhabitants, the souls of the 
departed, as sometimes in Class. 

KuTaXPaoiuLaL, f. j^aofiaL, depon. 
mid. to use over-much, and thereby misttse, 
foil, by dat. 1 Cor. vii. 31, ol xP'^I^^^ol 
Tw KocTfjiu) Tovi-(jp, 60S fxi) KaTaxptJO/J-^voL. 

ix. 18, and Class. 

KaTa\^v'xu}, f. £(0, to cool doicn from 
being hot, i. e. to refresh by cooling, with 
acc. Tviv yXu)(T(Tav, Lu. xvi. 24. Sept. 
and Class. 

KaT£iocoXo§, ov, 6, Vi adj. (/cara 
intens. E'ldooXov,) full of idols, given to 
idolatry. Acts xvii. 16, KaTELdcoXou ovaau 
'Ti]v itoXlv. Comp. KaTadEvopcs, Kara- 
(pvTo^, &c. in Class. 

Is^ar iv avnr L, adv. (/cara, suavTL,) 
prop, dozen over against, i. e. at the point 
over against, quite opposite to; foil, by 
gen. Mk. xi. 2, K6)fxi]v riju KaTkuavTt 
v/uLU)u. xii. 41. xiii. 3. Also, with art, as 
adj. opposite, Lu. xix. 30, Eh ti^v Kark- 
vavTL KcofxYju, aud Sept. ; also before, in 
the sight of, Rom. iv. 17, KarkvavTL ov 
kirLG-TEVcrE Qeov. 

KaT£ y to TT toy, adv. (/cara, lytoTrtoi/,) 
prop, doicn in the presence of in the very 
presence of, and hence gener. before., in 
the sight of foil, by gen. 2 Cor. ii. 17, 

KaTEVCOTTLOV TOU QeOV. XU. 19. Eph. 1. 4. 

Col. i. 22. Jude 24, kut. t^s oo^?js 
avTov, before^ 'in the presence of,' and 
Sept. 

KaTE^ouata^o), f. acrw, (/caTd and 

E^ovcrLoX^iti,) to exercise authority against, 
i. e. over, with gen. Matt. xx. 25. Mk. 

x. 42. 

ILaTEpyaX.ofxaL, f. dcroiJLaL, depon. 
mid. (aor, 1. pass. KaTEipydordijv with 
pass, signif.) lit. to ivork down, and that in 
various views, according to the different 
applications of the term ; prop, as said of 
breaking up food with the teeth, and 
digesting it, Diod. Sic. and Theophr., or to 
icork up a block of stone into a statue, 
Diod. Sic. vol. i. p. 291. Also fig. and 
gener. to work out, i. e. bring about, ac- 
complish any thing. Class, often ; and, as 
applied to persons, to ivork dozen, i. e. to 
subdue, or to bring dozen, destroy. In 
short, the use of the word is much the 
same as that of conficio in Latin. In 



K A T 



213 



K AT 



N. T. it signifies, I. to icork o?it, effect^ 
produce^ of things, i. e. to be the cause 
or author of, Rom. iv. 15, 6 vofxo^ 6pyi)u 
KaTEpydX^ETai. v. 3. vii. 8, 13. xv. 18. 
2 Cor. iv. 17. vii. 10, sq. ix. 11. Ph. ii. 
12. Ja. i. 3, 20, and Class. Nearly allied 
to this is the sense to luork oiit^ i. e. to 
practise, as said of moral habits, Rom. i. 
27, T?/!/ acrxvi^oavvi}v k. ii. 9, k. to kukou. 
vii. 15, 17, 18, 20. 1 Cor. v. 3, tovto k. 
to perjietnite^ as Rom. i. 27. 1 Pet. iv. 3. 
Xen. Hier. i. 32. Pint. vi. 130, 7, irXovToo 
dpETav KuTspyacrdardco, Also of miracles, 
to work, 2 Cor. xii. 12. — II. to luork down^ 
i. e. as said of persons, to vanquish^ as 
often in Class. And so Eph. vi. 13, 
airavra KaTspyaad/jiEVOL^ i. e. ' having 
subdued not only all your spiritual ene- 
mies, the M'orld, the flesh, and the devil, 
but all things,' i. e. persons, hostile to 
you. So Dionys. Hal. t. i. p. 99, Huds. 
TTttj/Ta TroXifxLa KaTEpyacrdfXEvoL. At 
2 Cor. V. 5, 6 ^£ Kai-Epyacrd/JLSvo^ rj/id^ 
€ts avra touto, Oeos, the sense, though 
disputed, is such as arises from the primary 
one to work out or up^ as said of a sta- 
tuary, who works up his vXt] into a statue 
of the required form. So Plut. Pericl. 
KaTEpyaddjXEvoL Tt]v v\y]v Tiyycti-, i. e. 
'working up the materials into things 
which are made.' The expression may 
therefore be rendered, 'wrought us unto 
this [state of immortality],' or, as the 
idiom of our language rather requires, 
moulded us. So Milton, Paradise Lost, x. 
744, ' Did I request thee. Maker, from my 
clay to mould me man,' i. e. to mould me 
into man. Thus the Apostle, as Cameron 
observes, expresses the force of Divine 
grace, whereby we are brought from a life 
the very reverse of heavenly, and are ren- 
dered fit for immortality. Wherefore we 
are called God's building.^ 1 Cor. iii. 9 ; 
his creation., 2 Cor. v. 17 ; his ivorhnan- 
ship., Eph. ii. 10. After all, there may be 
an hypallage., as Rom. vii. 24, Tis ixe 
pvdZTaL &K Tov crcofjiaTO^ tov ^avdTOv 
TovTov ; for tov cuifxaTO^ tovtov tov 
^av. The Apostle may possibly have had 
in mind the words of Ps. Ixviii. 28, Sept. 
Compl. dwd/iicocrov., 6 Beos, touxo, o 
KaTELpydcru) iv (I conj. k<p\ 'for') hfJiLV. 

KaTepxofJLai, aor. 2. KaTrjXdou, 
(fca-ra, EpxofJLat.,) to go or come dotcn^ to 
descend., as said, e. gr. of persons going 
from a higher to a lower region, the sea- 
coast, &c. foil, by £19 with acc. of place, 
Acts viii. 5 ; by aTro with gen. of place, 
XV. 1 ; by £t§ and ctTro, xi. 27 : by 7rpd<s 
with acc. of pers. ix. 32; of persons coming 
from the high sea down to land, with eIs, 
xviii. 22. Fig. of divine gifts coming from 
heaven, Ja. iii. 15, uo(pia dvcodEV KaTEp- 
Xo/x£Z/r]. 



KaT£cr6i'a), aor. 2. KaTE<payov, to 
swallow dotvn., eat up entirely., diglutiOy 
to devour., Horn. II. ii. 14, et al. I. prop. 
and 1) of animals, Matt. xiii. 4, kute- 
(payiv aura. Mk. iv. 4. Lu.viii.5. Rev. 
xii. 4. Sept. and Class. 2) of men, Xen. 
Diod. &c. Rev. x. 10, ^L^XapioLOv kutu- 
(payELv, an image to denote perfect 
knowledge of its contents. Comp. Ez. iii. 
1, 3. In Lu. XV. 30, K. TOV (3iov fig. sig- 
nifies to squander one^s substance., as in 
Hom. and other Classical writers. And 
so in Latin devorare patrimonium. — II, 
FIG. and 1) of persons., to., as we say, eat 
any one up., consume his substance, by 
plunder, extortion, or living upon him, 
&c. So 2 Cor. xi. 20, e'L tl<s KaTEadLei, 
scil. v/jLU's. Comp. Ps. xiv. 4, 'eating up 
{KaTEadiovTE^) my people as it were 
bread.' Matt, xxiii. 14. Mk. xii. 40. 

Lu. XX. 47, K. Tag OLKLa'5 TCOU Xt]p(ji)V. 

Comp. Od. ii. 237, KaTidovai piaiaj's 
OIkov '06va(T7jo£. Somewhat different is 
the sense at Gal. v. 15, dXXvXov^ kut- 
£cr0t£T£, 'ye destroy one another;' with 
which passage Expositors compare Xen. 
An. iv. 8, 14, tovtov^ co/ulov? SeT kutu- 
(payiXv^ formed on Hom. II. iv. 34. 
And so it is said, Prov. i. 12, 'let us 
swallow them up alive.' But most to the 
present purpose is a passage of Plut. adv. 
Colot. t. ii. 1124, Franc. iroXXov ^£7j(ro- 
[XEv dXXy]Xov<5 KuTEadLEiv, ' to prey upon 
each other,' Kai dripicov ^'lov X,^v. Is. ix. 
12, KaTEadiouTE? tov 'IcrparjA.. 2) of 
things., e. g. of fire, to consume., Rev. xi. 5. 
XX. 9. Sept. Lev. x. 2. Is. xxix. 6. Joel 
ii. 5. So of zeal, John ii. 17, 6 
TOV o'lkov (TOV KaTECpayE jUE, a form of 
expression imitated in Test. xii. Patr. p, 
624, 6 ^77X05 avTov KaTEadiei. Jos. Ant. 
vii. 8, 1, Trj'S odvvT]^ avTov KuTEadLOv- 
0-779. 

KaTfuGy'z/o), f. ui/w, {kutu and 
Evdvvco.,) prop, to guide in a straight 
course towards any object, whether person 
or thing, Plut. Alex. 33, init. kirEhEiKvvTo 
aETov KaTEvdvvovTa opdiov (I conj. 

OpQov) ETTL' T0V9 'TToXeiHOV?. Aud SO 

KaTEvdvvELv TO (TKdcpo?. Ot geucr. to 
guide., direct., any one's course to a place, 
1 Thess. iii. 11, 6 KvpLO£ KaTEvdvvai Triv 
oodv vfxwv rtrpd^ u/xa?, and fig. tov? 
TToSa? iifxoov KUT. £i§ odov e'lo^vi]?., Lu. 
i. 79. KaT. KapSia? eL<s Tt, 2 Thess. iii. 5. 
Both phrases are found in Sept. Comp. 

Plut. vi. 71, K. T0V<2 VtOVS TT^OS TO. 

(^eXtlovu. 

KaTEip La-Ti^jULL., f. (rT77(rw, in N. T. 
only in aor. 2. /caT£7r£(rT77f, intrans. to 
stand forth against., and by impl. in a hos- 
tile sense, = to rush upon., assaidt, foil, 
by dat. tw IlauXw, Acts xviii. 12. 

K aT£X£«, f- /caGt'^w, aor. 2. KaTE(T\ov., 



K AT 



214 



K AT 



to hold doim and hold fast^ i. e. retain, 
detain, to hold firmly^ trans. I. gener. in 
various senses. I ) to retain^ to detain a 
person, Lii. iv. 42, Kal kuteT-x^ov avTov 
Tov jui] 'TTopEveadaL. Philem. 13. Sept. 
and Class, often. Also, to hinder^ and of 
things, to 2 Thess. ii. 6, 7, and 

Class. 2) to possess, i. e. to hold in firm 
and secure possession, 1 Cor. vii. 30, kuI 
oi dyopdX^ovTS's ws fxr^ KaTz^ovTi's. 2 Cor. 
vi. 10. Rom. i. 18, toov T?ji/ a\.t']Q&Lav kv 
doLKia KaTE^ovTuav, i. e. as many ex- 
plain, ' possessing a knowledge of the 
truth, hut living in unrighteousness.' See, 
however, my note there. Sept. Dan. vii. 
18. 3) fig. of a thing, to hold fast in 
one's mind and heart, to keep in mind, &c. 
e, g. TOV \6yov, Lu. 15. (Dion. Hal. 
Ant. iv. 29, \6yov<5,) ras 7rapad6crsL<s, 
1 Cor. xi. 2. TO KaXdu, 1 Thess. v. 21 ; 
also Heh, iii. 6, 14. x. 23 ; in memory, 

I Cor. XV. 2. Theophr. Char. 26, TOiu 
'0/JLvpov kirwv EV fxovov KaTix^H'- 4) 
pass, to he held fast, i. e. fig. to be hound. 
by a law, ku co KaTELXOfx&da, Rom. vii. 6. 
Comp. Sept. Gen. xxxix. 20. Also of 
disease, John v. 4, w orjTrore KaTEiyETo 
voa-n/xaTi, ' by whatever disease he was 
held bound,' Sept. and Class. 5) as a 
nautical term, with reference to the helm, 
KaTEyELv [tyiv vavv\ eU tov aiyiaXov, to 
hold a ship firm toicards the land, i. e. to 
steer her towards the land. Acts xxvii. 40. 
Hdot. vii. 188, KaTiax^ ... is tov 
alyLoXov, and often in Class. Horn. Od. 
xi. 455, £s iraTOLoa yalav vyja KUTLcrx^- 
jjLEvai. — II. by impl. to lay fast hold of, to 
seize, occupare. Matt. xxi. 38, KaTao-x^- 
fxEv Tr\v K\'\]povo}x. In Lu. xiv. 9, k. tov 
Ua-xaTov TOTTov, it simply signifies occii- 
j)0.re, to fill, as Plut. vi. 554, Tr\v odov 
airacrav KovwpTo^ Kal ^6pvj3o<3 kut- 

K «T^] y op £ 60, f. rjcix), {kutcc, dyo- 
pEvw,) to speak against, in public, espec. 
before a court, to accuse, e. g. I. prop, in 
a judicial sense, foil, by gen. of person, 
expr. or impl. Matt. xii. 10, 4Va KaT^yo- 
prjcrioarLV avTou. Mk. iii, 2. Lu. xi. 54. 
John viii. 6. Acts xxiv. 2, 19. Rev. xii. 
10, and Class. Foil, by gen. of pers. and 
acc. of thing, Mk. xv. 3, KUTiiyopovv av- 
Tov TToXXd. Xen. H. G. i. 7, 14 : or with 
gen. of thing by attract. Acts xxiv. 8. xxv. 

II ; foil, by TTEpi with gen. of thing. Acts 
xxiv, 13 ; foil, by /caTtt with gen. of pers., 
also with gen. of thing by attract. Lu. 
xxiii. 14. Pass, where the subject is a 
person. Acts xxv. 16, 6 KaTr,yopov p.Evo? : 
by vTTo TLvo£, Matt. xx\ii. 12. Hdot. vii. 
205. "Where the subject is cc thing, foil, 
by irapd tlvo<5, Acts xxii. 30, to, tl kut- 
-ityooElTaL TTupd Tcov 'love. Thuc. i. 95, 
KaTijyopELTo auTov fj.i]0L(Tfx6^, and Lu- j 



cian i. 482, auTcov kut. TroWd. — II. in a 
general sense, of extra-judicial accusation, 
(like incusare in Latin, as differing from 
accusare,) 1) co?;i/)/am o/, foil, by gen. 
of pers. John v. 45, fxii ookeIte, otl kut- 
t]yop77G-a) vfxcov irpo^ tov UuTEpa, and 
not unfreq. in Class. ; but rarely foil, by 
TT/Dos, of which, indeed, not a single ex- 
ample has been adduced by the N. T. 
Commentators and Lexicographers. I 
have, however, noted it in Hdot. ii. 113, 
K:aTt]y6pEov tuvtu [avTov] TTyOos tou? 
ipia^. Plato, 482, C. KaTi]y6pEL Trpos cte. 
The sense is somewhat different at Rom. 

ii. 15, TttiV XoyLCTjULcjoV KaTtjyopovvTcov 

(scil. avTLov) (for KaTayLVcoorKovToyv in 
1 John iii. 20, kdv KaTayivuxTKri vfjicov rj 
KapoLa) ?) Koi aTToXoyovixivoov, incusan- 
tihus, ' blaming.' Thus things are fig. said 
to blame or condemn any one, when they 
give occasion for his being blamed. So 
Eurip. Hipp. 1061, ?? oeXto? r]OE KaT^yo- 
pEl crov TTicTa, ' affords certain e\ddence 
of thy guilt.' Plato, Alcib. 118, B. 6 Xoyos 
(TOV KaTiiyopEX, kol cri) cravTOv. 

KaT7J7opta, a<s, rj-, {KaTr]yopE03,) 
accusation, either judicial, Lu. vi. 7. John 
xviii. 29, and Class., or gener. complaint, 
Tit. i. 6, kv KaTJjyopta acrcoTtas. 

KaT?7yopos, ov, 6, [KaTiiyopEco,) an 
accuser, John viii. 10. Acts xxiii. 30, al. 
and Class. 

JLaTV <p E La, a'5, r], {KaTiT<pi]9, with 
cast down eyes, fr. kutu & obsol. (pdi], 
Eurip. Her. '633, KaTi](pE<s ofifxa,) dejec- 
tion, sorroiv, as opp. to X"P"- Horn. 
II. iii. 51, ovcr/jLEviarLV fxkv ^ap/ua, kutt]- 
(pELi]v CE croL avTco. Thuc, vii. 75, and 
other Class. 

vcroo, prop, to sound 
doivn, and espec. to sound into the ears of 
any one. So Lucian Jup. Trag. 39, ota 

TOVTO fJLETpOL'S TE KO-TUOOVCrL Kal jULvBoL^ 

KaTiixovGL TOV? aKovovTa?, lit. ' sound 
into them with fables,' make their ears 
resound with fables. Hence fig. to teach 
hy oral instruction, and by impl. the ele- 
ments of any science, Luc. ii. 616. In 
X. T. the word is used, I. prop, as said 
of the oral instruction, preaching, of the 
Apostles and early Chnstian teachers, foil, 
bv acc. of pers. I Cor. xiv. 19, 'iva. Kal 
V9 KaTt^X'^icTco : by impl. Gal. vi. 6. 
Pass, with acc. of thing. Acts xviii. 25^ 
KaT't]xmJikvo<s T7]v odov TOV 'KvoLov. Gal. 
vi. 6 : foil, by ivEpl with gen. Lu. i. 4 ; i/c, 
Rom. ii. 18. — II. gexer. to inform^ ap- 
prise of; pass, to he informed of to hear 
by report, foil, by ivEpl ^ith gen. Acts 

xxi. 21, TTgpt TLV0<5. Plut. dc FluV. 10, 
^-aT7J)(;?]0£is iTEpl tcov avpifSE^IIKOTiOV. 

KaTiow, f. 60(70), [kutu intens. t(?co, 
fr. t6§,) to cause to rust otd, to corrode 
xcith rust ; pass, to rust out. he quite cor- 



K AT 



215 



KAY 



roded^ liyperbol. Ja. v. 3, 6 XP^^09 v/ulwv 
Kai 6 apyvpo's KaTLwraL. Arrian. Diss. 
Epict. iv. b', 60S birXapLu iiTLKELfxEva 
KaTLioTUL. Comp. Lain. iv. 1. 

KaTifTX^'w, f. uo-o), (icxi^w,) 1) to 

he strong against any one, and by impl. to 
prevail against^ overcome^ vanquish^ Avith 
gen. Matt. xvi. 18, and often in Class. 
2) gener. to prevail^ get the upper liand^ 
absol. Lu. xxiii. 23. Pol. vi. 51, 6. 

KaToiKao), f. 7/0-0), prop, to settle 
doufi in a fiaed divelling^ to dicell perma- 
nently^ viz. I. trans, to dicell fi.vedly in 
a place, to inhabit. 1 ) proj:). with acc. of 
place, Acts i. 19, toT^ KaroLKovcrii/ 'Ispov- 
a-aXv/jL. ii. 9, et saepe al. Sept. & Class. 
2) Jig. of God, as manifesting his constant 

?resence in the temple, Matt, xxiii. 21. — 
I. INTRANS. to dicell fixedly., to reside^ 
1) prop, of men; foil, by £ts, Matt. ii. 23, 
k\d(X)v KaTcpKiiarsv £15 ttoXlv Xs.yoixi.vi]v 
Na^apET. Acts vii. 4; by £iyT\-ith dat. Lu. 
xiii. 4, KaTOLKovvTa's kv 'IspovcraXvia 
by £7rt with gen. Rev. iii. 10, et al. ; with 
acc. Acts xvii. 26 ; by ttou, ottov^ Rev. ii. 
13, bis; sKEL, Matt. xii. 45. 2) fig. of 
God, with ii/, Acts vii. 48 ; of Christ, as 
being ever-present by his Spirit in the hearts 
of Christians, Eph. iii. 17 ; of the rnrXi'i- 
p(afj.a TTj^ Geiotijt-os which was in Jesus, 
with £1/, Col. i. 19. ii. 9; of the spirit or 
disposition of mind in men, Ja. iv. 5. So 
in prosopop. t] OLKaiocrvvr]., 2 Pet. iii. 13. 

KaTotK:i}o-ts, £6o§, 77, (/caroiKEOj,) 
divelling., habitation., Mk. v. 3. Sept. and 
Class. 

K.aTO LK11T}'] p LOl/^ OW, TO, [KaTOL- 

/c£ft),) dicelling-place^ divelling.^ e. gr. tov 
0£oD, as being ever-present by his Spirit 
in the hearts of Christians, Eph. ii. 22. k. 
daLfxovcov^ Rev. xviii. 2. Sept. and Class. 

ILa^oiKLa., a?, 77, (/caT0i/c£6t),) dwell- 
ing., habitation., Acts xvii. 26. Sept. and 
Class. 

KaTOTTTp t ^60, f. icroj, {KaTOTrn-pov.,) 
in Class, to let look in oy show in a mirror ; 
mid. to look in a mirror., to behold in a 
mirror. In N. T. mid. to behold as iii a 
glass., with acc. 2 Cor. iii. 18, Trjy cS^av 
Kvpiov KaTOTTTpL'^op.EuoL., 1. 6. ' beholding 
the glory of the Lord as reflected and 
ludiant in the Gospel;' in antith. to ver. 
15. So Philo 2 Alleg. p. 79, ^770£ Kan-oTr- 
n-picraifXTiv kv aXXco tlvl ti]V arjv iokav, 
77 iu aoi Tcp Qeco. 

KaTop0a)/ua, aTO?, to, (fr. KUTop- 
60C0, to set upright, or establish, 1 Chron. 
xxviii. 7. 2 Chron. xxxiii. 16, and also 
metaph. to direct successfully, to achieve 
prosperously, ^1. V. H. xi. 9. Xen. Mem. 
iii. 1, 3. Or rather by a metaphor derived 
from bowling, to take a straight course down 
to the end of any given line ; and metaph. 



' to bring any afl'air to a prosperous tenni- 
nation.' See Sext. Emp. vii. p. 158, cited 
by me in Recens. Synop. Thus KUTopdoaj 
is opposed to TTTai'co, to miss one's aim., in 
Dcmosth. Epist. ad Phal., and to ar(})dX- 
XEordai in Thuc. ii, 65,) any thing brought 
to a successful residt., Mhethcr in war, or 
government, or political institutions. Acts 
xxiv, 3, KaTopd(x}p.cLT(jov yii'o/uiivcov., at 
least according to the sense usually there 
assigned. But the term is rather to be 
interpreted, affairs 'proceeding success- 
fully. So in Thuc, ii. 6"5, we have KaTop- 
dovfxEva opp. to (TcpaXivTu., missing of 
success,' and vi. 13. 

KaTto, adv. {KaTa,) dow-nwcnrls, doiC7i. 
Compar. KaTWTipco. I. of PLACE. 1) of 
place tchither ^im^lxmg motion dozen, Matt, 
iv. 6, ^uXe crEavTov kclto). Acts xx. 9. 
Sept. and Class. 2) of place where, 
belozu, iinderneatli, Mk, xiv. 66, kv tt] 
avXf] KUTU). Acts ii. 19. Sept. and Class. ; 
with article as adj. '' ih^t ichich is belong'' 
earthly, John viii. 23. — II. of time, com- 
par. Matt. ii. 16, airo ciItovs kul kutw- 
Tspo), oftico years old and under that age, 
Sept. and Class. 

KaTwTfipos, a, oy, adj. (compar, fr. 
/cttTO),) loicer dozen, lozcer, Eph. iv. 9, 
KaTE^T] £t§ TO, KUTooTEpa fxip-i] TVj'S yr\^.y 
i. e. as some explain, the grave, Hades., 
(comp. Neh. iv. 13, eU Ta KanruoraTa 
Tov Toirov,) implying that Christ became 
subject to death. 

Kau/xa, aTos, to, {kulco,) burning, 
heat. Rev. vii. 16. x\'i. 9. Sept. & Class, 

Kau/^aTt^o), f. tcrct), {Kav[xa,)to burn, 
scorch, trans. Matt, xiii. 6. Rev. xvi, 8, 9, 
and later Class. 

Kaucrts, Eix}<s, 1), {Kaioo,) a burning, 
burning up, Heb. vi. 8. Sept. and later 
Class. 

ILavcroofxaL, (/caucric,) only pass, to 
be set on fire, to burn, 2 Pet. iii. 10, 12; 
fig. of a fever, Gal. and Dioscor. 

Kav(T6oi;, coz/os, 6, (/caiw, Kavcrto, and 
of the same form with owcruiv, (putawv, 
(TELacov, a^cov, jULV^oov, 6cc.) lit. ''the 
Burner,'' 1) prop, 'the burning wind' so 
called, Eurus, denoted in Heb. by I2*lp, in 
Arab, hy Simooni, Ja. i. 11, ccvetslXev 6 
vXlo? aiiv TO) KavcrcovL. 2) the burning 
heat of the sun, Matt. xx. 12, (Saai-daacrL 
TO (3dpo9 T779 vp.kpa'S Kai nrov k. In Lu. 
xii. 55, Kavacov ecttul, we have a com- 
mon saying, of which the meaning is, ' It 
will be fine weather,' which is always the 
case when the wind in question prevails. 
And so Kau(TO)vo? wpa in Athen. 73, (tte- 
(pavo<s £U6ooi]9, Kai Kavacovo? xI/vktl- 
K(x)TaT0<5, means 'when the Kuvacov blows.' 

K.avTt'i p LaX^u), f. daroo, {KavriipLOv, 



KAY 



216 



KEN 



brand-iron, fr. fcai'w,) to cauterize^to hrand 
with a hot iron^ pass. 1 Tim. iv. 2, kekuv- 
T-tjpLaG-fjiEUOL Ti]v iSiav avueidiicTLu^ brand- 
ed in their consciences^ having the marks 
of their guilt burnt in upon their con- 
sciences ; or rather by impl. ' being seared^ 
hardened in their consciences Avith allu- 
sion to the cauterising employed by sur- 
geons on dead flesh. So Diod. Sic. xx. 
54, Tats \l/v\ai^ loarirep KavTrjpd tlvu 
irpocriiyE. 

Kai;x«o/iat, (f. vcrofxaL^ 2 pers. pres. 
KavxciaraL,) to boast oneself, to glory, to 
eocidt, both in a good and bad sense. E. gr. 
absol. 1 Cor. i. 29, 31, 6 Kav^cjofx^vo^. iv. 
7. 2 Cor. X. 13, 17, al. Foil, by accus. of 
thing as to which, or of which, one boasts, 
2 Cor. ix. 2, i)v — Kavyuifxai MaKEOoariv. 
xi. 30 ; with acc. of degree, xi. 16. Foil, 
by kv with dat. of that in which one glo- 
ries, e. gr. of things, Rom. ii. 23, oe kv 
vo/uLuj KavxacraL. v. 3. Gal. vi. 13, et al. ; 
of persons, Rom. ii. 17, kv Qeco. v. 11. 

1 Cor. i. 31. iii. 21, et al. Foil.' by ettI 
with dat. Rom. v. 2, fTr' kXTridi : /cara 
with acc. as to any thing, 2 Cor. xi. 18; 
TTEpl with gen. 2 Cor. x. 8 ; vTrkp with 
gen. 2 Cor. vii. 14. Sept. absol. or with 
prep, and Class, with prep. 

Kau)(7}^a, GTOs, TO, {Kavxoc-Ofxai,) a 
boasting, glorying, eocidting, i. e. I. prop, 
the act of glorying or exulting in any 
thing, with gen, Heb. iii. 6, to Kavxtifxa 
TTj? IXtti'oo?, i. e. ' the hope in which we 
glory.' So VTrkp tlvo's, 2 Cor. v. 12. ix. 
3. absol. 1 Cor. v. 6. Find. Isth. v. 65. — 
II. meton. the object of boasting, ground 
of glory big, exultation, Rom . iv. 2, 'ix^i 
Kavxvi^f^- 1 Cor. ix. 15, 16, al. and Sept. 

Kau)(Tj(ri9, £a)§, 77, {^Kavxaofxai,) a 
boasting, glorying, exulting. I. prop, the 
act of glorying or exulting in any thing, 

2 Cor. vii. 14, 77 Ka\)yr\(7L^ rjiuijov 7) 
sTTL Tltov, and xi. 17. 1 Th. ii. 19, cts- 
(pavo9 /cau)(770'£co?, i. e. ' the crown in 
which we glory,' Ja. iv. 16, and Sept. So 
VTrkp TLvo's, 2 Cor. viii. 24. — II. meton. 
the OBJECT of boasting, ground of glory- 
ing, Rom. iii. 27, -ttoD ovv 77 Kavxn^'-'s ; 
2 Cor. i. 12. kv XpL(TTw, Rom. xv. 17. 
VTrkp v/uLvov, 2 Cor. vii. 4. So 1 Cor. xv. 
31, vi] Ti]v V/ULETkpav (for VTrkp vp-cov) 
Kavxnf^i-v 771/ EX(J^' Sept. Jer. xii. 13. 

Kgtyuai, i. KEicrofxaL, to lie, and also 
to be laid. I. prop. TO LIE, to recline, of 
persons, Lu. ii. 12, Kctfievov kv (pdrvrj. 
xxiii. 53, ov ovK riv ovdeU (scil. veKpo^) 
KELjULEvo?. Of things, Lu. xxiv. 12, Td 
oOovLa KELfXEva fxova. John xxi. 9. 2 Cor. 

iii. 15. — II. equiv. to perf pass, of Ti'07j/xi, 
i. e. TO BE LAID, set, placed, e. gr. as a 
foundation, 1 Cor. iii. 11 ; a throne. Rev. 

iv. 2 ; vessels, John ii. 6. ttoos tl, to be 
laidy or rather directed at, as a hlow, Lu. 



iii. 9. So to be laid zip, reposited, Lu. xii. 
19. Of a place, to lie, to be situated, Rev. 
xxi. 16, TTo'Xis TeTpdy(jovo<s KelTUL. Matt. 
V. 14. Fig. of persons, to be set, appointed, 
with £i§ final, for any thing, Lu. ii. 34. 
Phil. i. 17. 1 Th. iii. 3. Of laws, to be 
given, made, (lit. laid dozen, so our word 
km means,) with dat. 1 Tim. i. 9. — III. 
equiv. to to be, i. e. in any state or con- 
dition, M'ith kv, 1 John v. 19, 6 KocrfJio^ 
o\o<s keT^ul kv Tw Trovtipcp, ' is wholly 
given to wickedness.' 2 Mace. iii. 11. iv. 3L 

KELpia, a9, 77, a band, bandage, for 
swathing infants, or wrapping around dead 
bodies. So Hesych. exi)lains KELpiai by 
kTrcdavaTLa kvTETvXiyfxkva. See in v. 
kurvXiX^co. In N. T. only in the latter 
sense, John xi. 44. 

Ketpo), f KEpu), prop, to wear away, 
eat away, i. e. by rubbing, gnawing, cut- 
ting. Hence gener. and in N. T. to shear, 
trans, e. gr. a sheep. Acts viii. 32; espec. 
the head, to cut off the hair. Acts xviii. 18, 
K8ipd/jLEvo£ ri^v KE(pa\i}v, having shorn 
his head, 1 Cor. xi. 6, bis. Sept. & Class. 

KiXsuciua, aTO§, to, {keXevco,) cry 
of incitement, or urging on, (as of soldiers 
rushing to battle, Thuc. iii. 14; or sailors 
at the oar, Lyc. Capt. 19 ; or labourers 
exciting themselves to any common work. 
See my note on Thuc. iii. 9, 2,) outcry, 
clamour, shoid, 1 Th. iv. 16, kv keXev- 

KeXevco, {. evctu), prop, to set in mo- 
tion, to urge on, Hom. II. xxiii. 642. In 
N. T. and gener. to command, order some- 
thing to be done. Foil, by acc. and infin. 
aor. Matt. xiv. 19, KE\Evcra^ tov£ oxXov^ 
uvaKXidTivai, and oft. ; with acc. impl. 
Matt. viii. 18. xiv. 9, al. Sept. and Class. 
Foil, by acc. and inf. pres. Acts xxi. 34, 
kKsXEvc £V dyEadaL avTov: with acc. impl. 
Acts xvi. 22. Foil, by dat. and infin. aor. 
Matt. XV. 35, Kal kKk\EV(TE toI? o^Xots 
dvaTTEcrElv. Absol. Acts xxv. 23, & Class. 

KEvodo^ta, as, 77, {KEvodo^o^,) vain- 
glory, empty pride, Phil. ii. 3, and Class. 

KEv6So^o<5,ov,6,rj, adj . ( kevo's, do^a, ) 
vain-glorious, full of empty pride and 
ambition, Gal. v. 26, and Class. 

KEv6^,i),dv,2idi].empty, opp. to TrXvprj^, 
full. In N. T. I. prop, as avn-dv — dir- 
ka-TELXav KEvov, i. e. with empty hands, 
Mk. xii. 3. Lu. i. 53. Sept. and Class. — 
II. METAPH. empty, vain,\. e. \) fruitless, 
without utility or success, Acts iv. 25, Kal 
Xaoi kp.EXkTii(Tav kevu. 1 Cor. xv. 10, v 
X«pt§ — ov KEvi] kyEvndi] : eis kevov, in 
vain, 2 Cor. vi. 1. Gal, ii. 2. Sept. and 
Class. 2) said of that in which there is 
nothing of truth or reality, false, falla- 
cious, e. gr. KEvoL Xoyoi, Eph. v. 6. k. 
uTrdTi], Col. ii. 8. Sept. and Class. ; of 



KEN 



217 



K E P 



persons, empty ^ foolish, Jii. ii. 20. Arr. 
Epict. ii. If), k 

lit. empty voice, i. e. i-aiu tvords, fruitless 
disputation, I Tim. vi. 20, equiv. to pa- 
TaLoXoyia. 

Kei/oo), f. cofTct), (/cfi/o?,) to empty^ 
make emjity, as oft. in Class. In N. T. fig. 
I. in tiie sense kevovv kuvTov, to empty 
oneself, * divest oneself of rightful dignity' 
by descending to an inferior condition, to 
abase oneself Phil. ii. 7, sKivooaev kavTou. 
Sept. Neheui. v. 13. — II. to make empty, 
vain, fruitless, pass. Rom. iv. 14, kekI- 
vuDTai V TTLCTTL^. 1 Cor. i. 17. Hcnce to 
falsify, i. e. to show to be groundless, e. gr. 
Kavxt]pa, 1 Cor. ix. 15. 2 Cor. ix. 3. 

K £i/Tpoi/, ou, TO, (/cti/xfew,) a prick, 
gener. any thing by which a puncture is 
made, as a thorn, &c. Hence in N. T. I. 
a sthig, e. gr. of locusts, scorpions. Rev. 
ix. 10. So ^Elian H. An. i. 60, of bees. 
Fig. as a ' venomous weapon, ascribed to 
Death,' 1 Cor. xv. bb,bQ^ to dk KeuTpou 
Tov ^avoLTov f] dpapTLu. See my note. 
— II. a goad or staff with an iron point 
for urging on horses, oxen, &c. Class. In 
N. T. only in the adagial expression Trpo? 
Kti/Tpa XaKTi'^BLu, to kick against the 
goads^ i. e. ' to offer vain and rash resist- 
ance,' Acts ix. 5. xxvi. 14. Occ. often in 
Class. 

Kevtv p Lcov, tt)yo5, 6, (Lat. centurio,) 
centurio7i, originally the commander of 

100 foot- soldiers, equiv, to kKUTovrapxo^, 

Mk. XV. 39, 44, 45. 

K£i/a»9, adv. (/cfi/6s,) vainly, in vain^ 

with no purpose or meaning, Ja. iv. 5. 

Sept. Is. xlix. 4. Arr. Epict. ii. 17, 6. 

Kspa/a, as, i?, (/C£f)as,) t^yo"^. a little 
horn, also a point, ecctrewJty of any thing, 
as of a sail-yard, Luc. Navig. 4. In N. T. 
the apex, point of a letter, put for the least 
particle. Matt. v. 18. 

KEpapEv?, i(xi<5, 6, {KEpa/uLO?,) a pot- 
ter, Matt, xxvii. 7, 10. Rom. ix. 21. Sept. 
and Class. 

Kspot^i/cos, r], 6v, adj. of or he- 
longing to a potter. Rev. ii. 27, aKEvr] to. 
KEp. So Plut. viii. 327, KEpapiKol Tpo- 
Xot, ' potter's wheels' (for turning). See 
Horn. II. xviii. 600. 

Ke papLov, ov, TO, (prop. neut. of adj. 
KEpafxics, earthen, with ellip. of (tkevo<s,) 
an earthen vessel of any kind to hold li- 
quids, Mk. xiv. 13. Lu. xxii. 10, /c. vda- 
Tos. Xen. K. oluov. Jos. k. eXulov. 

Kipafiog, ov, 6, prop. potte7-''s earth, 
Ep. Hom. 14. Hdian. iii. 9, 10; also any 
eaHhen utensil formed of it, Hdot. vi. 6. 
gener. a vase, or amphora, but sometimes 
a tile for covering roofs, Lu. v. 19, dta 



tTov K(pafxo)i/. And so Class, as Xen. 
Mem. iii. 1, 7, Xidoi^ Kai irXivdoi, Kal 
^vXu, Kul Khpapo^, wiiere ohserve the use 
of the sing, for plur. (as in our word tiling 
for tiles,) often found in Thucyd. Indeed 
no Class, writer uses the plur, which is 
only found in KEpu/ui'idE?. 

KEpdi/vvpi, f. KEpd<r(jo, perf. pass. 
KEKtpaapaL, to mix, mingle, as wme with 
water or spices, Sept. Is. v. 22. Xen. An. 
i. 2, 25. In N. T. by impl. to prepare a 
draught, pour out, fill one's cup. Rev. xiv. 
10, KEKEpacrpivov uKparov kv tw TroTt]- 
pito. xviii. 6, bis. Sept. and Thuc. vi. 32, 
KEpdoravTE^ KpaTTjpa^. So also Hom. Od. 
xxiv. 363, KEpcovTu^ aWoira olvov. Or 
rather, as others explain, ' wine untem- 
pered with water,' but mixed with aro- 
matics or bitters, (which formed, among 
the Jews, the cup of malediction,) and 
that to increase its potency ; the above 
passage of Rev. being espec. formed on Ps. 

IXXV. 8, TTOTYipLOV {e<TT l) EV X^^P^ KvpLOV 

o'LvOV UKpdTOV, 7rXrjpE<3 KEpdcTfxaTO^. 

Thus the term Kip. is to be imderstood of 
mixing by infusion, as in a similar passage 
of Hom. bd. iv. 220—4. 

K £ p a s, aTos, TO, plur. Ta nipaTa^ a 
horn, I. prop, of a beast. Rev. v. 6. xii. 3. 
and oft. Sept. and Class. From the Heb. 
as the symbol, of strength, power^ meton. 
Lu. i. 69, KEpa^ a-wTvpLa?, horn of deli- 
verance, i. e. strong deliverer. — II. fig. of 
any extremity, projecting point, resembling 
a horn, e. g. upon the four corners of the 
Jewish altars, Rev. ix. 13. 

KEpdTiov, ov, TO, (dimin. fr. /c£pas,) 
prop, little horn; in N. T.pod^ caroh-pod, 
Lu. XV. 16. 

Kfip^aiyo), f. avu), (/c£p^o§,) (later 
fut. KEpdvcropaL, aor. 1. EKEpSrjcra, fut. 1. 
pass. KEpSrjdna-opaL,) to gain, to acquire 
as gain, to win, trans. I. prop, of things, 
e. gr. TOV KoaiuLov oXov, 'the wealth of 
the whole world,' Matt. x\d. 26. Mk. viii. 
36. Lu. ix. 25. In trade, with acc. Matt. 
XXV. 17. absol. Ja. iv. 13, and Class. Said 
of any loss or evil, to so far gain, by being 
saved from, or avoiding its loss. Acts 
xxvii. 21, Ksporjcrai {eSel) tyiv v(ipLV Tav- 
TY\v /c. T. X. and so to have saved, avoided, 
this loss. An idiom found also in the 
Class, from whom many examples have 
been adduced by Eisner and Kypke. So 
Aristot. Eth. 11, /cat w KaTa Xoyov X^t]- 
piav Eh] Xa(3Elv tov to tolovto KEpdai- 
vavTa EVTvyij <pdpEv. And so Jos, Ant. ii. 
3,2. Philemon, p. 352, TTEvrj^ o)v pkyaXa 
KEpSaivEi KaKa. — II. FIG. of persons, to 
gain, to win any one, i. e. 1) as a friend 
or patron, e. gr. XpLcrTov, Phil. iii. 8. tov 
dSEX(})dv, Matt, xviii. 15. 2) to gain over 
to one's side. In N. T. to ivin over to 
Christ, and thus bring to salvation, 1 Cor. 



KEP 



218 



KH P 



ix. 19, 20, bis, 21, 22, where it is equiv. 
to (Tcojo) in ver. 22. 1 Pet. iii. 1, comp. 
1 Cor. vii. 16. 

Kgp^os, £o§ Of?, TO, gain, profit, Vhil. 

1. 23. iii. 7, Tit. i. 11, and Class. 
KipjULa, aTos, to, (fr. KEipco, to clip,) 

prop, something clipped off, and thence a 
small coin, (Aristoph. Av. 1108. Plut. 
379,) or rather, taken collectively, the 
small money so called, because the most 
ancient coins were of a square form, like 
Spanish rials, so as to admit of being 
clipped, as they were, to form the smaller 
kind of money. 

Ksp/xaTio-Tr/s, ou, b, {KspjuLaTt'^co, 
to change into smaller coin,) a money- 
cJianger, John ii. 14, tous Kap/maTLaTa^, 
persons who sat in the outer court of the 
Temple, and furnished money to such 
foreign Jews as needed it, to pay the half- 
shekel of tribute money, in exchange for 
Greek or Roman coin ; also, to such as 
wanted small coin, to purchase the petty 
offerings, as turtle-doves, &c. 

K£(pdXaLov, ov, TO, (neut. of adj. 
KEcfyaXaio^,) prop, a head. In N. T. and 
gener. fig. I. the chief thing, main point, 
Heb. viii. 1, K&<paXaLov 6k iiri tol9 
\£yofJLivoL9, and Class. ; as Thuc. vi. 6. 
See my note. — II. sum, amount, in com- 
puting, summing up. Class. Hence of 
money, a sum, capital. Acts xxii. 28, 
'TToXXou K£(f)aXaiov. Sept. Jos. Ant. xii. 

2, 3, and lat. Class. 

KscjyaXaLocD, f. axro), {KscfxxXaiov,) 
to sum up. In N. T. same as KEcpaXi^uy, 
to wound on the head, trans. Mk. xii. 4, 

KCLKELVOU XLdo(3oXv<TClVTE^ EKECpuXai- 

lacrav. 

KEcpaXt], tj^, n, the head, i. e. I. 
prop, of persons, as of men. Matt. vi. 17, 
and oft. ; also of animals, Rev.ix. 17. By 
synecd. as the principal part, put for the 
whole person. Acts xviii. 6, to alfxa 
vixcov ETTL T7]v KE<paXi]V v/uLU)V, your hlood, 
i. e. destruction, be on your own heads,'' 
rest upon yourselves. So Rom. xii. 20. 
Sept. 2 Sam. i. 16. 1 Kings ii. 33, and 
Class. It is justly noticed by Mr. Rose, 
on Parkhurst, as worthy of remark, that 
the head is espec. mentioned, in speaking 
of imprecations and guilt. See Josh. ii. 
19. And he adverts to the putting of the 
sins of the people on the liead of the scape- 
yoat. Lev. xvi. 21. Fig. of things, the 
head, top, summit, e. g. KE<paXi] ycovia^, 
the head of the corner, i. e. the top-stone of 
the corner, the cope-stone. Matt. xxi. 42. 
Mk. xii. 10. Lu. xx. 17. Acts iv. 11. 
Sept. and Class. — II. metaph. of persons, 
i. e. the head, the chief, one to whom 
others are subordinate, e. g. a husband in 
relation to a wife, 1 Cor. xi. 3, KE(f)aXr} 6e 
yvvaiKOi 6 dvnp. Of Christ in relation 



to his Church, which is his body, ccofJLa, 
and its members, his members, Eph. i. 22. 
iv. 15, et al. Of God in relation to Christ, 
1 Cor. xi. 3. 

K£<^aXt§, i^os, 77, {KEcpaXri,) in Class. 
a little head, e. g. bulb of garlic, or the 
head, hnob, of a column. In N. T. the 
head or knob of the wooden rod on which 
Hebrew manuscripts are rolled, and hence 
meton. for a roll, volume. Heb. x. 7. 

K^y<ros, ou, 6, (Lat. cewsz^s,) prop, and 
in Class, an enumeration of the people 
and valuation of property. In N. T. the 
tribute, poll-tax, (iirLKEtpaXaLov,) paid by 
each person whose name was taken in the 
census. Matt. xxii. 17, Sovvul kTjvo-ov 
KaicrapL. Matt. xxii. 19, to voixKTfxa tov 
KYivcrov, the tribute-coin, equiv. to StjvdpLov 
in Mk. xii. 15. 

KrjTTos, ov, 6, a garden, any place oc- 
cupied with herbs and trees, Lu. xiii. 19, 
et al. Sept. and Class. Not, however, a 
^oii?er-garden, but an enclosure, planted 
with fruit-trees and vegetables, q. d. a 
garden, orchard, more usually called Trapd- 
Sel<to^. See Jos. Ant. ix. 10, 4; comp. 
with X. 3, 2. 

KryTToupos, ov, 6, {Kfjiros, oupos,) 
garden-keeper, gardener, John xx. 15, and 
Class. 

K?7ptoi/, ov, to, [Ktjpd^, wax,) a 
honey-comb, i. e. full of honey, Lu. xxiv. 
42. Sept. and Class. 

K-n pvy jiia, ctos, to, {Kr^pvaato,) in 
Class, proclamation by a herald, or the 
edict thus proclaimed.' In N. T. annun- 
ciation, preaching, said I. of prophets, e. g. 
the denunciation of Jonah against Nine- 
veh, TO Kvpvyjxa 'Iwi/a, Matt. xii. 41. 
Lu. xi. 32. — II. of Christ and his apos- 
tles, the preaching of the Gospel, 1 Cor. i. 
21. Meton. for the Gospel thus preach- 
ed, i. e. Christ crucified, Rom. xvi. 25. 
2 Tim. iv. 17. 

Knpuf, u/cos, 6, in Class, a herald, 
public crier. In N. T. a preacher, public 
instructor, of the Divine will and precepts, 
as Noah, 2 Pet. ii. 5; of the Gospel, as 
St. Paul, I Tim. ii. 7. 

Ki^puo-co), or TTUi, f. fa>, {icripv^,) in 
Class, to be a herald, or to make proclama- 
tion through a herald. In N. T. to pro- 
claim, announce publicly, trans. I. gener. 

Matt. X. 27, KnpV^aTE ETTL TU)V SaJfldTtOU. 

Lu. xii. 3. Acts x. 42. Rev. v. 2. In the 
sense of to noise or blazon abroad, laud 
publicly, Mk. i. 45, i^p^aTo Kt^pvaasLv 
TToXXd, Kal dLa(pril^il^i'V' v"- S^-— H- 
SPEC, to preach, publish, announce, i. e. re- 
ligious truth, the Gospel with its attendant 
privileges and obligations, the Gospel dis- 
pensation. 1) gener. e. g. of John the 
Baptist, Matt. iii. 1, Kripvaatav ku 



K HT 



2 



19 



K A A 



ipy'ifitp^ Kal Xtycou. Acts x. 37. Of Jesus, 
Matt. iv. 17, 23. Of apostles and teach- 
ers. Matt. X. 7. xxiv. 14. So tov XpLo-rou 
Ki]pv(T<Tftv^ to preach Christy i. e. to an- 
nounce him as the Mcssiali, and exhort 
men to the reception of his Gospel, Acts 
viii. 5. ix. 20. xix. 13, et al. 2) in allu- 
sion to the Mosaic and prophetic institu- 
tions, to preachy teach^ Acts xv. 21, 
Moji/CTT/? .... Tov<5 K^pvcraovTa^ avTov 
IX^t- Rom. ii. 21, o Ktjpucrarojv juli] /cXtTr- 
TELU. Gal. V, 11, ei irEpLTOfxiiu etl 
Kt]pva-aa). Lu. iv. 18, 19. 

Kt/xos, £os ous, to, a large fish^ Matt, 
xii. 40, Ev kolKlo. tov KnTov9^ with 
reference to Jon. ii. 1, kvtel fiEyaXuo. It 
is now gener. admitted, that the term is to 
be understood not of the ichale^ but another 
large fish of the shark genus called Lamia^ 
or Carcharia^, See more in my note 
there. 

K t /3 £0 T o 5, ou, ri->an arh^ i. e. a wooden 
chest. In N. T. used of the ark of the 
covenant, Heb. ix. 4, and Sept. oft. Jos. 
Ant. iv. 8, 44. Of Noah's ark. Matt, 
xxiv. 38, al. and Sept. Gen. vi. 14, sq. 

vii. 1, sq. 

K( 0dpa, a9, 17, (/ci'6apis,) Lat. cithara; 
Engl, guitar ; though the modern instru- 
ment is different, the ancient cithara, or 
lyre, being Mithout a neck, and with the 
strings open like the modern harp ; hence 
we may best render li/re at 1 Cor. xiv. 7. 
Rev. v. 8. xiv. 2. xv. 2. Sept. and Class. 

Ki6api^&), f. icrct), (/Ci6api?,) to play 
upon the cithara, or Ipre, 1 Cor. xiv. 7. 
Rev. xiv. 2. Sept. and Class. 

KtOapw^os, 01/, o, {KiBdpa & aot^os, 
woo?,) a lyrist^ one who plays on the lyre, 
and accompanies it with song, Rev. :^iv. 2, 
al. and Class. 

Kti/a/ua)/ioi», ou, to, cinnamon^ the 
aromatic bark of the Laurus dnnamomum^ 
which gi'ows in Arabia and India, used by 
the ancients in their incense and perfumes. 
Rev. xviii. 13. Sept. and Class. 

Ktyoui/Euw, f. Evuu), ( Kti/o ui'os,) to he 
in danger^ in trans, as in war, or in stand- 
ing one's trial. It is used, 1) ahsol. Lu. 

viii. 23, EKLvdvvsvou. 1 Cor. xv. 30, kiv- 
dvvEvoniEv. So Ecclus. xxxi. 12, and so 
sometimes in Class. 2) /oil. by case, vdth 
reference to the kind of danger, espec. by 
infin. Acts xix. 40, klvBvi/evel kyKa- 
XEicrQaL, and often in Class. In Acts 

xix. 27, KLV^VVEVEL EL'S (ITTeXeJ /ULOU 

iXOeti/, the sense is somewhat different, 
namely, ' is near being, or like to be, set 
at nought :' an idiom often found in Attic 
writers, espec. Plato. So Xen. M( fn. iii. 

13, 3, KLvdvVEVEL^ bvTapECTTOTEpO'S eTvuL 

Tuv dppu)(TTovuTU}v. Syncs. ap. Steph. 



Thes. KLv^vvEvovari irEidEiv eulov<s, propc 
in eo sunt, ut, &c. Hdot. iv. 105, klvov- 
vEvovai ok OL avdpMTTOL ovTOL yo'ijTts 
fcli/at. 

KlvSvuo9, ou, o, danger, Rom. viii. 
35. 2 Cor. xi. 26, al. Sept. and Class. 

KivEU), f. rio-o), to move, put in motion, 
as applied to objects both inanimate and 
animate, I. of things, Matt, xxiii. 4, ou 
^tXavcTL KLVTjaaL avTa, scil. to. <popTLa» 
Sept. Job xiii. 25. Is. xli. 7. Xen. Conv. 
ii. 22; espec. in the phrase klveXv n-rju 
KE(pa\r]u, to shake the head in derision, 
Matt, xxvii. 39. Mk. xv. 29, and Sept. 
In Class, gener. as a token of dissent or 
displeasure. So k. Kapa, Horn. Od. xviii. 
491. II. xviii. 200.— II. of persons, to 
move, act upon, Hom. Od. xxiv. 5, n-y p 
dyE KLVY\cra's : or to remove. Rev. ii. 5, k. 
Xv^vlav. But gener. metaph. to stir up, 
excite. Acts xxiv. 5, k. orTcia-Lv. Class, 
with TToXEfxav or an acc. of pers. Mid. to 
move oneself. Acts xvii. 28, '^(^p.Eu /cat 
KLuovjULEda. And so often in Class, but 
chiefly in the sense to stir ; while here the 
meaning is simplv to move, as an indica- 
tion of' life. So'^l. V. H. i. 6, klvov- 
fjiivov^ vSt] Toi/5 VEOTTov'5. Tho ouly 
other example known to me is Gen. vii. 
21, probably in the mind of the Apostle, 
Kal airidavE Trdcra adp^ kivou fiivri 
ETTL T^s yri<s. Pass. prop. Rev. vi. 14, ek 
T(Zv TOTrwv a. EKLvridr](Tav. Hom. II. 
xvi. 280, EKLvr]QEv Se (pdXayyE9. But 
gener. in neut. sense. 

Kluf] (7 L?, ECO?, 77, {klveu),) mx)tion, 
John V. 3, Tr}u tov vSaTo? KLvr\<TLv, and 
Class. 

'KiXP't]fXL, f. xp^i<^^i (— XP^^^O 
lend, trans. Lu. xi. 5, y^prjaov (jlol tpe'l<5 
dpTovs. Sept. and Class. 

KXct^os, ou, o, (/cXao),) a shoot, sprout, 
branch, prop, young and easily broken off, 
Matt. xxiv. 32, et al. Sept. and Class. 
Fig. and allegor. ol KXdooi, bi^anches for 
oj^spring, posterity, Rom. xi. 16 — 21. 

KXaiw, f. KXavaofxai. In N. T. fut. 
KXavaru), to weep, wail, lament, implying 
not only the shedding of tears, but every 
other external expression of grief, I. in- 
trans. and absol. Matt. xxvi. 75, EKXavcre 
TTLKpu)?. Lu. vii. 13. Foil, by ettl with dat. 
to weep for or over any one, Lu. xix, 41 ; 
ETTL and acc. Lu. xxiii. 28, /xt; KXaiETE 
£7r' EfXE K. nr. X. With dXaXd^ELv, Mk. 
V. 38. ^opv(3ELv, Mk. V. 39. ^pnvEiv, 
John xvi. 20. KoirTEadaL ett' avTy, Rev. 
xviii. 9. oXoXv'^ELv, James v. 1. irEvdEiv 
£7r' auT^, Rev. xviii. 11. — II. foil, by acc. 
to beivail, lament for, e. g. the dead, Matt, 
ii. 18. Sept. and Class. 

KXao-ts, £0)9, ^, (/cXcto),) a breaking, 
L 2 



K A A 



220 



KAH 



\. e. the act of breaking, Lu. xxiv. 35, al. 
t; k. tou ciprov. Theophr. de Caus. PI. iii. 

19, kXcCCTL^ djULTTtXcoV. 

KXacr^a, aros, to, (icXatu,) a frag- 
ment^ bit, e. g. of food, Matt. xiv. 20, al. 
Sept. and Class. 

KXttfO/xo?, oD, 6, {KXaLM,) iceephig^ 
wailing, Matt. ii. 18. viii. 12, and oft. 
and Sept. 

KXaoj, f. K\d(T(x), to hreah, i. e. to 
break off or in two, Horn. II. xi. 584. In 
N. T. only in tlie phrase KXacrai tou 
apTov, to break bread, i. e. for distribution 
at a meal ; the Je\Yish bread being in the 
form of thin cakes like biscuits. Also 
gener. Matt. xiv. 19. xv. 36, et al. So in 
the Lord's supper. Matt. xxvi. 26. Acts ii. 
46. Metaph. of the body of Christ, as 
typically b?'oke?i in the Eucharist, 1 Cor. 

xi. 24, TO (TCOfJLa TO VTrkp V/ULchv KXwfXEVOV, 

where the allusion is to the death of Christ 
on the cross. 

K/\£ts, dd<s, 77, acc. kXeTu and KXEida, 
acc. plur. KXilda^ and contr. kXei^, a 
key, lit. a shutter. In N. T. as the symbol 
of power and authority. Matt. xvi. 19, 
c(jo(TU) croL Tas kXeT^ tt;? (^acnXELa^ twu 
ovp. i. e. the power of opening or shut- 
ting, of admitting to or excluding from 
the kingdom of heaven. See more in my 
note there. Rev. iii. 7, 6 s-x^^^ ^rji/ kXeIu 
TOU Aavtd, in the same sense. Rev. i. 18, 
Td9 kXel^ tou aSov. ix. 1. xx. 1. Me- 
taph. Lu. xi. 52, T7]L> kXsISu Trj<s yucocrsco's, 
the key ofknouiedge, i. e. the means of at- 
taining to true knowledge in respect to 
the kingdom of God. Comp. Matt, xxiii. 
13; 

KXeio), f. o-ct), (perf. pass. KEKXELcr/uLaL, 
aor. 1. pass. iKXEia-driv,) to shut, to close, 
trans. I. prop. Matt. vi. 6, /cXeicas Trju 
^vpav (Tov. XXV. 10. Lu. xi. 7, et saspe al. 
and Sept. Also of the heavens, i. e. the 
windows of heaven, so that no rain can 
fall, Lu. iv. 25. — II. metaph. Matt, xxiii. 
13, kXelete Trju ^acr. tcov ovp. So of 
authority to exclude or admit. Rev. iii. 7, 
bis, 8. 2) 1 John iii. 17, KXEiaai to. 
'inrXdyxvoL airo tlvo<s, to shut up ones 
boivels from any one, i. e. ' not to let one's 
compassion flow out.' 

KXEfxfia, aT05, TO, (/cXe'tttw,) theft, 
Rev. ix. 21, and Class. 

KX.SOS, £Ous, TO, {kXe(jo fv. KaXsoo.) 
prop. repoH, rumour, Hom. II. ii. 486. 
In N. T. and gener. fame, renown, glory, 
1 Pet. ii. 20. Sept. and Class. 

KXettti]?, ov, 6, {kXetttu),) a thief. 
Matt. vi. 19, ssepiss. Fig. of false teach- 
ers, deceivers, who steal men away from 
the truth, John x. 8, 10. Sept. in Hos. 
vii. 1. 

KXeTTTco, f. kXe\I/(jo and KXixp^ofiai, 



to steal, absol. Matt. vi. 19, 20, Biopvcr- 
crovaL Kal kXetttovctl. Fut. ov kXe^el9 
as imperat. Matt. xix. 18. Rom. xiii. 
9. In the sense of to steal away, take by 
stealth, foil, by acc. as a dead body, Matt, 
xxvii. 64. xxviii. 13. Hdian. ii. 1, 5. 

K\77^a, aTos, to, [KXdw,) a braiich^ 
or twig, such as is easily broken off, equiv. 
to /cXa<5os, chiefly, and in N. T. only, of 
the vine. And so a shoot or tendril., John 
XV. 2. Sept. Jos. and Class. 

HXt) povo/uLito, f. v(Tu), (/cXrjpoj/o/xos,) 
prop, to receive by lot, i. e. a portion thus 
distributed. Num. xxvi. 55. Josh. xvi. 4. 
Hence, as an inheritance might also be 
distributed by lot (Ecclus. xiv. 15), to in- 
he?'it, to be heir to any person or thing. 
And so often in Class., espec. the Orators. 
In N. T. gener. I. to inherit, to be heir, 
absol. Gal. iv. 30, ov yap fxri KXrjpoi/o- 
fxricrri 6 ulos Ttj^ iraLOLcrKri's fiETO. k, t, X, 
& Sept. — II. in later usage, in Sept., Jos., 
Diod. Sic, and Polyb., simply to obtain., 
acquire, possess, foil, by acc. In N. T. 
said only of the friends of God, as receiv- 
ing admission to the kingdom of heaven 
and its attendant privileges, Matt. v. 5, 
KXiipovo/iivcrovarL t^v y rjv, they shcdl quiet- 
ly possess the land, i. e. prim, the land of 
Canaan, but in a spiritual sense, the Mes- 
siah's kingdom. So kX. Tr\v ^acnXeiav 
(tou Qeou), Matt. XXV. 34, et al. "^(arjv ai- 
(jovLov, Matt. xix. 29. d(pdaparLav, 1 Cor. 
XV. 50, also Heb. i. 4, 14. vi. 12. xii. 17. 
Rev, xxi. 7, Sept. and lat. Class. 

KX 77 0 0 I/O /XI a, a9, 77, {KXripovojiito, 
which see,) inheritance, i. e. I. prop, de- 
rived from one's ancestors, patnmony., 
Matt. xxi. 38. Lu. xii. 13. — II. gener. 
poHion, possession, espec. the land of Ca- 
naan, as the possession of the Israelites, 
Acts vi'. 5. Heb. xi. 8. Hence fig. of ad- 
mission to the kingdom of God and its 
attendant pri\'ileges. Acts xx. 32. Gal. iii. 
18. Eph. i. 14, 18. V. 5, et al. 

l^Xy]pov6 fjLO^, ov, 6, adj. {KXrjpos, 
VE/uLO),) prop. ' receiving by lot,' namely, a 
portion thus distributed. Hence in N. T. 
and gener. subst. an heir. I. prop. Matt, 
xxi. 38. Lu. XX. 14. Gal. iv. 1, Sept. and 
Class. Fig. KX-npovo^xo^ Geou, heir of 
God, i. e. a partaker of the blessings which 
God bestows upon his children, implying 
admission to the kingdom of heaven and 
its privileges, Rom. viii. 17, bis.^Gal. iv. 
7. So iii. 29. KXyipouofxoL i. e. tou 'A(3pa- 
dfx, ' heirs of the blessings promised to 
Abraham.'— II. gener. possessor, i. e. of 
any thing received as a possession, ^ e. gr. 
the kingdom of heaven, &c. Rom. iv. 13, 
14. Tit. iii. 7. Heb. i. 2. Ja. ii. 5. 

KX?7po§, ov, 6, (/cXaco, to break,) I. 
lit. a bit, i. e. of stone, wood, &c. used as 
a lot or die in determining chances, Ps. 



K A H 



221 



KM 



Ixviii. 13. Eurip. Phoen. 855. Homer 
often, and Hdo^. iii. 83. So in N. T. in 

the phrase KXfjpov (3d\Xs.Li;^ to cast lots^ 
Matt, xxvii. 35. Mk, xv. 24. Lu. xxiii, 
34. Jolin xix. 24. So tTriftuW. Honi. 
Od. xiv. 209. Sept. Ez. xxiv. b\ with allu- 
sion to the ancient custom, on which see 
Potter's Greek Antiquities ; also OLSouai 
K\-npov9^ Acts i. 26. — XL meton. 1) the 
part or portion assigned and obtained 
by lot, J. Pollux and Epigr. in Anthol. 
Xaipu) vi) Tov Kkripov du kvEK\rip)]cra^ 
iu adXoi^ : also in Sept. In N. T. fig. 
of a part or portion of duti/ pertaining 
to any office, assigned to any one by lot, 
Acts i. 17, 25, XafStli/ t6u Kktjpov 
SLUKovLa^, ' to receive the appointment of 
this duty or office.' Also Acts viii. 21, 

OVK ECTTL aOL /iXSpl? OvSk KXijpO^ iv T(jp 

Xoyw TouTO), with allusion to Deut. x. 9. 
xii. 12. 2) the possession or property of 
any kind obtained by such allotment, 
(which among the Jews was always heri- 
table and unalienable,) Horn. II. xv. 498, 
Kal oIkos Kai kXjjpo^ uK^paTO?. Od. xiv. 

63, 'idoDKEV oIkOV T£ KX^pOV Tfc. But 

espec. landed property, estates (like the 
Latin hceredia). So Hdot. i. 76. ix. 94, 
KX-npov<s. jElian V. H. xii. 61, K\ripo<s. 
Jos. xVnt. iv. 7, 5. In N, T. the word 
occurs both in sing, and plur. ; but only 
Jig. of the heavenli/ possession called a 
heritage, or inheritance, to denote that it 
is secured to the saints unalienably, Acts 
xxvi. 18, Xa^iiv KXrjpov iv toIs ■hyiaar- 
fiivoL^. And so Acts xx. 32, Sovvai v/jlTu 
KXrjpouo/uiLau iv xots r]yLa(Tfx&voL^ Trdaiv. 
Col. i. 12, iKavcocravTL rifxd's £i§ Ti]v 
fiEpiSa TOV KXrjpov todv dyioov, where 
Tijv fxBpiSa TOV KXvpov signifies the allot- 
ted portion^ with allusion to a country 
whose citizens have assigned to them a 
territory divided into nispios^^ to be ap- 
portioned to them severally by lot {iv 
KXripoi). Comp. Wisd. v. 5, ird)^ kuteXo- 
yiaO^i iv uiolv 9foD, kul iv dyioL's 6 kXt]- 
po's avTov iaTLv. So Thuc. iii. 50, kXv- 
pov£ TTOLVcravTe^ Tt]s 7J?5, aiptov avTu)v 
KXrjpovxov^ Tous XaxouTa<s diriTTEixxl/av^ 
where kX. is simply for juspida^, (comp. 
Acts viii. 21,) as fxeph for /c\r7po5, Gen. 
xiv. 24. At 1 Pet. v. 3, fxi] KaTuKvpisv- 
ovTE^ Tuyv KXvpo^v scil. Qeov^ the meaning 
is, ' the churches, or congregations,' over 
which the presbyters addressed, severally 
presided ; so termed with allusion to the 
division of Canaan into KXrjpoi^ (as Lesbos 
was among the Athenians,) which accord- 
ingly formed so many separate heritages 
or possessions. 

KXtjpoo), f. werw, (/cXrjpos,) to cast 
lots^ Thuc. vi. 52 ; and mid. to acquire by 
lot^ Xen. Cyr. i. 6, 46. In N. T. only mid. 
fcXtipoofiai, gener. to obtain, to receive, 



absol. Eph. i. 11, iv tZ Kal iKXi]pwBi]fxEv 
...Eh TO Elvai i7/xd§, K. T. X. through 
whom we have attained to be,' i. e. 
' through whom it has been granted us.' 
^lian H. An. i. 13. Alciphr. iii. ep. 49. 

KXrjcri?, £6t)s, 77, (/caXto),) prop, tlie 
act of calling., also its effect in a call, in- 
vitation, espec. to a feast. In N. T. fig. & 
spiritually a call to the kingdom of God 
and its privileges ; i. e. that divine call by 
which Christians are introduced into the 
privileges of the Gospel, Rom. xi. 29, ij 
nXijaL^ TOV Qeou. Eph. iv. 1, et al. See 
my note on Rom. viii. 30, and 2 Pet. i. 10. 
So also Eph. iv. 4, iv p.ia iXiridL Ttj^ 
KXiiaEU)^, i. e. 'the hope which the Christ- 
ian's call permits him to cherish.' In 

1 Cor. i. 26, jSXtTTETE TIJV KXfjaLV VJULCOV, 

the sense is, ' the manner of your calling, 
how ye were called ;' and vii. 20, EKaaTo^ 
iv Ttj kXvotel ?7 EKXiidr], iv TavTy fXEvi- 
Toj, ' as, i. e. in the same state as, he was 
called, so let him remain.' 

KXtjTos, ri, 6v, adj. {KaXico,) called, 
invited, e. gr. to a banquet, Sept. 1 K. i. 
41, 49. Hom. II. xvii. 386. ^schin. 1. 1. 
Hence in N. T. fig. called, invited, i. e. to 
the kingdom of heaven and its privileges, 
gener. Matt. xx. 16, (where see my note,) 
and xxii. 14, ttoXXoI yap eIctl KXj]Toi, 
oXLyoL 6k iKXEKTOL. Also emphat, of 
those who have obeyed this call,=:saints, 
Christians, Rom. i. 6, 7, kXiitol 'Iriaov X. 
— kXiitoI? dyioL's. viii. 28. 1 Cor. i. 2, 24. 
Jude 1. Rev. xvii. 14, KX.rjToi Kai ekXek- 
Tol Kal TTLCTTOL. lu the sense of appointed, 
chosen, i.'e. to any office, (see in KaXIco, 
no. I. 5,) Rom. i. 1. 1 Cor. i. 1, /cXrjjos 
aTTocTToXo^, comp. Gal. i. 15. So Hom. 
II. ix. 165, 'AXX' dyETE, /cX?jtous (i. e. 

t/C/CpiTOUs) OTpVVOfJLEV, 

J^Xi^avo?, ov, 6, an oven, i. e. for 
baking bread, Matt. vi. 30, et al. See 
Calmet. 

YiXifxa, aTo<3, to, (kXlvu),) prop. i?i- 
clination, declivity, Pol. ii. 16, 3, KXLua 
TU)v opuw. So of the supposed incli'nation 
of the heavens towards the poles in ancient 
geography, whence the northern hemi- 
sphere was divided into seven KXi/aaTa, 
climates, by lines parallel to the equator. 
Hence in N. T. and gener. climate, i. e. 
clime, region. Gal. i. 21, eU tu KXifxaTa 
Trjs 'Evpia^'. Rom. xv. 23. 2 Cor. xi. 10, 
and Class. 

KXl'vr], 77, (kXlvo),) prop, a couch, 
any thing on which one lies, reclines, &c. 
In N. T. I. gener. and only of the sick, 
Mk. vii. 30. Rev. ii. 22. Sept. and Class. 
Of a bed in which the sick are borne. 
Matt. ix. 2, 6. Lu. v. 18. Acts v. 15.— 
II. SPEC, a couch, sofa, for sitting or re- 
clining, Lu. xvii. 34, ectovtul cvo iirrl 
L3 



K A I 



222 



KOI 



K\Lvti<s /xms, 'two persons shall be sitting 
or reclining together corap. Matt. xxiv. 
40, and see below. Mk. iv. 21. vii. 4. Lu. 

viii. 16. Sept. Or, in all these passages, 
kXivi] may be taken in the sense of tri- 
dinium^ i. e. the couch or sofa on which 
the ancients reclined at meals. And so 
it is often used in Sept. and Class. 

KXii/iotoi/, ou, TO, (/c\i'yr},) a little 
hed, Lu. V. 19, 24, and Class. 

K\i'y(o, f. jyw, aor. 1. sKXiva^ perf. 
KEKXiKa^ prop, and gener. to bend any 
thing from a straight position, in whatever 
direction ; used in various senses, [incXmo. 
reclino, acclino, and c/eclino, ) of which in 
N. T. there occur only the following : I. 
TRANS, to hend doicmcards^ used lit. in 
Horn. II. xix. 223, of one of the scales of 
a balance : but in N. T. of the eyes or 
head, to hoiL\ in reverence, Lu. xxiv. 5, k. 
TO TrpocrooTrou sh Ti]u yrjv, John xix. 30, 
K. Tiju KE(p.^ as one dying, or gener. to 
recline the head for rest, Matt. viii. 20. Lu. 

ix. 58. Sept. and Class. Also, in a mili- 
tary sense, as said of the inclination of a 
column of troops out of the straight line. 
So Jos. Ant. xiv. 15, 4, KXiusraL to svw- 
vvjjLOV Klpws Tr}<: cpaXayyo^^ and Homer, 
cited by Passow, kXcuelv (pdXayya^. 
And so Heb. xi. 34, Trapefx^oXa? ekXlvuv 
aXXoTpLojv^ lit. 'made the lines bend,' 
i. e. routed the troops. And indeed the 
term is in the Class, almost always applied 
to the men^ rather than the lines. So Hom. 
II. V. 37, Tf)coas o' sKXiuau Aavaoi. Od. 
ix. 59. Jos. Bell. vi. 2, 6. — 11. intrans. to 
incline oneself., (so prop. Polyb. iii. 15, 9, 
Inr (Kjirioa kXluelu, ' to bend to the left,') 
as said o[ the day as declininrj.^ Lu. ix. 12. 
xxiv. 29, k'ckXlkzv 7] vfiipa. So Sept. 
Judg. xix. 8, 11. Jer. vi. 4. In the Class, 
only used jO/'O/). of the sun and its declin- 
ation to the horizon, though £t? saTripau 
is sometimes added, as Arr. Ex. A. iii. 4. 

KXtcrta, as, ?/, (fr. perf. pass. KiKXicraL^ 
fr. /v/ViVw,) prop. ' a ])lace where one may 
recline.' Hence in Homer a tent, or a 
hut; but gener. a bed, or rather couch., 
( triclinium,) used for reclining at a meal, 
Pind. Pyth. iv. 237 ; and also, by meton., 
the 'party sitting around it, Jos. Ant. xii. 2. 
Hence in N. T. /c\tcrias, sub. Kara, lit. 

by table-parties,' or conijjanies., Lu. ix. 
14, KaTaKXlvuTE auTOv-i KXicria'S dud 

TTEVT. 

KA-OTT?;, 7]<s, 77. (fr. perf. mid. KEKXocpa 
or KEKXaira, fr. kXetttco,) the act of steal- ! 
%, theft. Matt. xv. 19. Mk. vii. 22. Sept. | 
and Class. 1 

KA-uowf, covo^^ 6, (fr. aor. 2. ekXvSov^ j 
fr. k/Vl'^w, to dash,) prop, 'a dashing of 
water,' espec. the sea, s?'.r(/e, Lu. viii. 24, Tip 
kXvomvl tou vo. (as Jos. Ant. ix. 10, 2.) ' 
Ja. i. 6, EOLKE kXvolovl ^aXdcrarj]^, where 



there seems an allusion to the true force 
of the term kXvowi^., which, in use, meant 
a shoH breaking wave, wliich curls back 
before it dashes over : an apt image of an 
unstable person, who from belief and hope 
falls back into disbelief and despair, as he 
is moved by every wind of doctrine. See 
Eph. iv. 14. The term is one of frequent 
occurrence in the Class, from Homer 
downwards. 

KXu^coi/i^o/xat, f. icro/xa., depon. 

(/cXu^wi',) prop, to be tossed luith billoivs, as 
the sea, or to and fro^ as any thing tossed 
by the waves of the sea ; but almost 
always used metaph. of mental fluctuation 
or perturbation. See Is. Ivii. 20. So Eph. 

iv, 14, KXvCOJViX^OiXEVOL TTaVTl dvE/JL(Jp X^S 

Oioacr/ca/\i'a§, i. e. ' agitated by doubts and 
difficulties ;' a sense frequent in the later 
writers, as Josephus, Philo, Plutarch, and 
Aristaen., from whom see examples in my 
note. 

K 1^77 0 60, (/ci;aw,) f. Kvrjau)^ gener. to 
rub or scratch ; and in mid. to scratch one- 
self (or as used with to 0119 or Tijv k&- 
(paXi]v,) but gener., in a special sense, to 
tickle, as Anthol. Gr. iii. 85, 8, KVvQstv 
oIBev ovo<i Tov ovov. In N. T. only in 
pass, to be tickled, feel an itching ; fig. 
2 Tim. iv. 3, KvridofxeuoL Ti)v aKorju., lit. 
' being tickled, itching, as to the ears,' i. e. 
having a desire to hear something pleasing. 
So Julian p. 333, 6vvdfXEvo<5 ras a/coas 
xjfioov KL>i](jTLd)ara<5 Trapafxudno-ao'daL, ' to 
soothe,' as our English Poet says, ' Can 
flattery soothe the dull cold ear of Death 

Koop uvTri<5., ou, 6, Latin quadrans, 
the 4th part of an as, daa-dpiov, and a 
small brass coin, — two Xetttu, Matt. v. 
26. See dcrcrdpLOv. 

KoLXia, a?, ?7, ( fr. /coTXos, hollow,) prop, 
any cavity, but confined to those of the hu- 
man body, and almost exclusively to the 
belly ; and denoting sometimes the venter 
superior, KEKpu(paXo^, as Judg. iii, 21. Pol. 
xxxix. 2,7; but gener. the inferior or cdvus. 
And so alone it is used in N. T. where it 
signif. I. gener. the belly, as the recep- 
tacle of food, put, as often in Engl., for 
the stomach, either in men or animals. 
Matt. xii. 40, kv Ty kolXlo. tov kvtov^. 
Lu. XV. 16. 1 Cor.'vi. 13, et al. Sept. and 
Class. — II. from the Heb., by sAmecd., for 
the icomb, Matt. xix. 12, ek KoiX'ia^ fxr}- 
Tpos, et al. Lu. i. 42. As personified, put 
for the woman herself, xi. 27. xxiii. 29, 
and Sept. oft.— III. fig. from the Heb. for 
the imcard paH, the inner man, as in 
Engl., the breast, the heart, John vii. 38, 
and Sept. 

K o t /X a 60, f. 770-60, to make sleep, to put to 
sleep, as often in Homer. Hence in N. T. 
and gener. pass. KOi/xdo/JLaL., with fut. mid. 



KOI 



223 



KOI 



r)(To/iai, to fall asleep, to sleep, intrans. 
I. prop. Matt, xxviii. 13. Lii. xxii. 45, 
KOI aiofjLfvov^ aTTo T?7§ Xu7rtj9, al. Sept. & 
Class. — II. as said of the sleep of death, 
for to die, to be dead. Matt, xxvii. 52. John 
xi. 11. Acts vii. 60, tovto ftTrtbi; ekol- 
ju/jdi], et al. Sept. and Class. 

Koijui]o-t9, £0)9, 77, {Koi/mdco,) tJie act 
of sleeping, ox the state of sleep ; also meton. 
rest, repose, John xi. 13. Eccliis. xlvi. 19. 
xlviii. 14. 

Koivos, r/, 6v, adj. common^ I. prop. 
tvhat belongs alike to all, opp. to t<5ios, as 
Wisd. vii. 3, 6 kolv6<s dvp. Jos. Ant. v. 1, 
27, Qeov t6v ^E(3paioL^ kolvov. So in 
N. T. Acts ii. 44, ^Txof d'n-avTa kolvcl, in 
reference to their being used kv kolvw^ or 
£/c KOLVOV, ' as a common meal.' See 
Hesiod, Opp. 721. Diod. Sic. vol. i. 242. 
Acts iv. 32. Tit. i. 4, k. ttiVtii/, as Eur. 

Or. 489, TOl/ KOLVOV 'EXX-nVCOV VOfJLOV. 

Jude 3, V K. (TuiTtipLa, as 2 Mace. ix. 21, 77 
K. dcr(pdXsLa. — II. BY METON. in the Levi- 
tical sense, ' not permitted by the Mosaic 
precepts,' and therefore common, not sacred 
or holy; hence,— ceremonially unlawful^ 
j)rofane, Mk. vii. 2, kolv. x^P^h tout' 
ea-TLv dvL7rroL9, wh. see my note. Acts x. 
14, ovdiiroTE Icpayov irdv kolvov r) uku- 
dapTov, see my note. ver. 28. xi. 8. Rom. 
xiv. 14. 1 Mace. i. 47, 62. Jos. Ant, 
xiii. 1, 1, kolvov (3lov^ Sl saepe al. Fig. under 
the Gospel dispensation, unholy, uncon- 
secrated, Heb. x. 29, to alfxa t^5 ^ta- 
Qr}Ki]9 KOLVOV ?7yt]o-a/x£i/os, i. e. ' unconse- 
crated,' and therefore having no atoning 
efficacy. So Just. Mart. Apol. ii. p. 98, 

OU ycip cos KOLVOV dpTOV, Ovdk KOLVOV 

rrrofxa tavTa, (the bread and wine in the 
Eucharist.) Rev, xxi. 27, ov /mii tlaiXdt] 
Trdv K. (in lat. edd. for vulg. kolvovv,) 
unholy ; others, polluted, profane, as Jos. 
Ant. xii. 12, 3, kolvol dvdpcoTroL, pro- 
fanum vulgus. 

ILoLvou), f. cooro), i^KOLvb^,) in Class, to 
make common, to communicate^ with others, 
Thuc. i. 39. iii. 96. In N. T. in the Lev. 
sense, to make common^ i. e. to render 
unlawful or unclean, to defile, ceremonially, 
M'ith acc. Matt. xv. 11, touto kolvol tov 
dvdpoiTrov. ver. 18, 20. Mk. vii. 15, 18, 
20, 23. Heb. ix. 13. So to regard as com- 
mon, to call unclean. Acts x. 15. xi. 9. 
Hence gener. to profane^ desecrate, pollute. 
Acts xxi. 28, TOV dyLov tottov. absol. 
Rev. xxi. 27 in text. rec. This use is very 
rare out of N. T., yet Philo, I think, 
somewhere says, kukw^ tX^wv oi dv6pu)7roL 
Kai dWriXov^ ekolvovv. 

lS.OLV(joviu), f. rj(TU), {kolvwvo^,) to 
be partaker of or in any thing, tvith any 
person, i. e. to share in common. I. of 
THINGS, foil, by gen. to partake of any 
thing, Heb. ii. 14, K&KOLV(jivr\KE aapKOi 



Kal a.'LfxaTO's, and Class. ; by dat. to par- 
take in any thing, Rom. xv. 27. 1 Tim. v. 
22, yUTj^fc KOLVuovsL afxapTLUL^ dWoTpiai^. 
1 Pet. iv. 13. 2 John 11; fig. Rom. xii. 
13, Tai? X(0£tai9 Tcov dyLcov koivcovovv- 
T£s, sharing in the necessities of the saints^ 
i. e. by aiding them. Wisd. vi. 25, and lat. 
Class. — II, of PERSONS, to partake with 
any one, foil, by dat. and iv. Gal. vi. 6, 
KOLVcovsLTO) 6 KaTi]\o\) p.Evo's TOV \6yov 
TOO KUTiixovvTL sv 7rd(TLV uyudoT^, let 
him share icith his teacher, i.e. ''communicate 
to his teacher of his good things ;' with £ts 
and acc. Phil. iv. 15 ; with dat. of pers. 
and gen. Pol. ii. 42, 5. M\. V. H. iii. 17. 

Kotyoji/ta, a?, 77, {kolvcoveco,) prop, 
the act of partaking, sharing with others. 
So Aristot. Eth. viii. 9, ev kolvcovlcc yap 
(pLXia. In N. T. 1) participation, f el- 
loivship icith^ communion in. Acts ii. 42. 
1 Cor. i. 9. X. 16, ou'xt KOLvawia tov 
alfxaTO^ — K. TOV crw/xaTos tou Xp. 2 Cor. 
vi. 14, t/s KOLVwvia (pojTL irpo's cr/coTos ; 
'what of community .^^^ q. d. tl kolvov, I 
would comp. Epich. ap. Stob. Sent. p. 501, 
4, Tt§ yap KaTOTTTpto Kai TvcpXuj kolvm- 
via ; Eur. Iph. T. 254. Arist. Thesm. 137. 
2 Cor. viii.4, 77 k:.t7]§ ^taKoy/as,' part, share 
in transmitting this alms,' xiii. 13, 77 k. tov 
dyiov UvEv/naTo^, 'the fellowship of the 
Holy Ghost,' meaning that communication 
and indivelling of the Holy Ghost, the 
Comforter, by which the blessings of God 
the Father and the Son, the grace of 
Christ, and the love of God, are bestowed 
on man. If it mean, as the recent foreign 
Commentators say, paHidpation, it must, 
at any rate, denote a participation in the gifts 
of the Holy Ghost as a person, the two 
former being such. Gal. ii. 9, ^f^ia kolvco- 
VLa<i, right hand offelloivship, ' the pledge of 
communion,' &c. Eph. iii. 9, in text. rec. 
Phil. i. 5, 77 K. vjULiov eU to EvayyiXLOv, 
i. e. ' your participation in the Gospel,' 
accession to it. ii. 1. iii. 10. Philem. 6. 

1 John i. 3, 6, 7. Jos. and Class. 2) com- 
munication, distribution^ gener. Hdian. i. 
10, 3. In N. T. meton. for contribution, 
collection of money in behalf of poorer 
churches, Rom. xv. 26. 2 Cor. ix. 13. 
Heb. xiii. 16. 

Y.O Lv (jov LKo^, 7), 6v, adj. {kolviovo^^) 
commimiccdive, i, e, idoneus vel propensus 
ad societatem, social, as Pol. ii. 41, 1, and 
a writer in Cic. aVOpwTros k. (pvarEL, In 
N. T. communicating, i. e. ready to give, 
liberal, 1 Tim.vi.l8. Lucian Tim. 56, tt^oos 
dvopa, olov CTE, dirXdiKov Kal tcov ovtcov 
KoivwvLKOv. M. Anton, vii. 52. 

Kotywi/os, OV, 6, t]-, {kolvo's^) a par- 
taker, or a paHner, companion, absol. 

2 Cor. viii. 23, kolvu)v6<5 i/xo?, Philem. 17. 
Hdian. ii. 8, 5. Foil, by gen. of the pers. of 
whom any one is the companion, vnth 



KOI 



224 



KO A 



whom he partakes in any thing, Matt, 
xxiii. 30. 1 Cor. x. 20 Heb. x. 33. Sept. 
and Chiss. ; by dat. of pers. to or witk 
whom one is partner, Lii. v. 10, kolvodvol 
Tio ^i/mcouL : by gen. of thing partaken, 

1 Cor. X. 18, KOLVODVOL TOV duCLaCTTr^pLOV^ 

i. e. 'of the victims sacrificed,' 2 Cor. i. 7. 
1 Pet. V. 1. 2 Pet. i. 4, and Class. 

KoLTt]^ 77s, ?7, {KsTfxaL^) a lying doivn^ 
i. e. for rest or sleep, Hdot. i. 10, wpjj ti;? 
ko'lti)^. Hence gener. & in N. T. 1 ) place 
of repose^ hed^ Lu. xi. 7, Ta iraidLa /uou 
/a£t' a/uLOu £ts TJ/f KOLTTjv. Hom. Od. xix. 
341, et al. Class. ; espec. the marriage- bed, 
and meton. for marriage itself, Heb. xiii. 
4. Jos. Ant. ii. 4, 5, kolti]V fxiaivai. Plut. 

de FltlV. p. 18, |JL^ dtXcOV jULULVELV T^^V 

KOLTif)u Tou ysvvricrcivTO^, 2) a lying with 
a woman, cohabitation^ whether lawful or 
unlawful, gener. the latter, Rom. xiii. 13, 
TTEpLTraTyiariofxEV iuli) Koi^ai^^ ' not in lewd- 
ness.' Sept. oft. and sometimes Class., but 
only the poets. Pind. Pyth. xi. 39. Eurip. 
Med. 154. Hippol. 154. Hence, from the 
Heb., meton. semen^ as necessary for con- 
ception, Rom. ix. 10, Evo^ KOLTtyj 
EXouaa^ Miaving conceived by one,' &c. 
So Sept. oft., and sometimes the. fuller 
phrase, kolti] cnripfxaTO's, 

KotTcbf, oifos, 6, (/coiT?},) lit. a sleep- 
ing-place^ a bed-chamber^ Acts xii. 20, b 

ETTL TOU K0LTCOVO9 TOV jSaCTLXitJO^^ i. C. thc 

king's chamber- attendant, chamberlain. 
Sept. and Class. 

Ko/c/cti/os, ?), oz/, adj. {kokko^, a small 
insect used by the ancients for dying pur- 
ple,) coccus-dyed^ crimson^ Matt, xxvii. 28, 
X^ct/uLuda KOKKLvi)v^ for which in Mk. xv. 
17, TTopi^vpav. Heb. ix. 19. Rev. xvii. 3, 

4. xviii. 12, 16. Sept. Ex. xxv. 4. xxviii. 

5. Josh. ii. 18, 21. Plut. ed. R. vi. p. 546, 
8. 

K0/C/C09, ou, 6, a laernel^ grciin^ seed^ 
Matt. xiii. 31, k. o-iyaTTEO)?. xvii. 20. John 
xii. 24, et al. Hdot. iv. 143. 

lLo\aX,o3^ f. acrojuat, (/co\o9, Ko\o(3d^^) 
prop, to lop or prune^ as trees, koXoX^elv to. 
SevSpa^ Theopbr. de Cans. Plant, v. 9, 11. 
fig. to attemper^ correct^ moderate^ lEi. V. 
H. xi. 3. Xen. QEc. xx. 12. Hence in 
N. T. and oft. in Class., espec. Thuc. and 
the Traged., to correct^ punish^ with acc. 
Acts iv. 21, TTw? KoXacTuivraL avTOu^. 
2 Pet. ii. 9. KoXaX^ofxlvovs TtjpETv^ i. e. 
' to reserve as subject to punishment.' 

KoXa/cg/a, a§, rj, (/co\a^, flatterer,) 
Jiattery^ adidatio7i^ 1 Th. ii. 5, and Class. 

KdA.acri§, €0)9, ??, {koXclX^o}^) prop, 
the act of pruning^ e. gr. /coAacrt? twi/ 
^Ey^joojy, Theophr. de Cans. Plant, ii. 4, 4. 
gener. in Class, restriction^ castigation ; in 
N. T. punishment^ Matt. xxv. 46, k6- 



Xaaiv aluDVLov. 1 John iv. 18, and lat. 
Class. 

KoXac^/'^O), f. icra), {K6Xa(f)09^ fr. ko- 
XaTTTO),) to strike with the fist, bi(ffet, with 
acc. Matt. xxvi. 67, eKoXdfpLaav avTov. 
Mk. xiv. 65. Hence gener. to maltreat, 
1 Cor. iv. 11. 2 Cor. xii. 7. 1 Pet. ii. 20. 

KoXXao), f. ?7cr6o, {koXXu, glue,) prop. 
to glue together, make cohere. Diod. Sic. ii. 
58, K. TL diaT/jii)dkv, Lucian, Quom. Hist. 
Conscr. 51. espec. to solder metals; also 
to fasten closely, prop. Pind. 01. v. 29. 
fig. Plato 776, A. KoXXa tto'Gos Trdvra 
Tidy]. In N. T. mid. KoXXdofxaL, aor. 1. 
pass. sKoXXvQi]v, with mid. signif. to ad- 
here, cleave to, prop, of things, foil, by dat, 

Lu. X. l\,Tdv KOVLOpTOV TOV KoXX')]divTa 

viulu. Rev. xviii. 5, in later edit. sKoXXyj- 
di]aau avTr}<3 al dp-apTLaL (see my note). 
Sept. Job xxix. 10. Ps. cii. 5. Anthol. 
Gr. i. p. 231. Fig. of persons, to join 
oneself unto, with dat. of thing, e. g. tm 
dppaTL, to folloiv, accompany, Acts viii. 
29, and oft. in Sept. t<Z dyaOcp, to cleave 
to, Rom. xii. 9. Sept. 2 Kings iii. 3, al. 
elsewhere by uKoXov^iw : of pers. to be- 
come a servant to any one, Lu. xv. 15, to 
folloiv, cleave to, tt) Tropvrj, 1 Cor. vi. 16. 
Ecclus. xix. 2, KoXXctipEvo^ TTopvai^, an 
appropriate term. So Nichareh. in Anthol. 
ETaipa KoXXaTUL, kvl'^el. The Class, 
however rather use irpocrKoXXdadai, wh. 
also occ. in Sept. Gen. ii. 24. 1 Esdr. iv. 
20, al. So Livy, ' scortis impliciti.'' tw 
Kvpito, 1 Cor. vi. 17. Sept. 2 K. xviii. 6. to 
follow the side or party of any one, to asso- 
ciate ivith. Acts V. 13. ix. 26. x. 28. xvii. 
34. Sept. and lat. Class. 

Y.0XX0V p Lov or l^oXXvpiov, ov, to, 
(dimin. of KoXXvpa, a cake,) prop, a small 
cake. In N. T. collyrium, eye-salve, so 
called PS resembling the dough of the koX- 
Xvpa, Rev. iii. 18. Arr. Epict. iii. 21, 21. 
Luc. Alex. 21. 

KoXXv ft LCTTri^, ou, 6, {koXXv^o^, a 
small coin, and the profit on change,) a 
money-changer, broker, equiv. to Kepfxa- 
Matt. xxi. 12. Mk. xi. 15. John 
ii. 15. Lysias Fragm. 34, ult. 

KoXo/3oa), f. dicrw, {KoXo(3d9, muti- 
lated, fr. KoXo^,) prop, to mutilate, curtail, 
Sept. and espec. by cutting ofn limb. In 
N. T. fig. of time, to cut oft, shorten, pass. 
Matt. xxiv. 22. Mk. xiii. 20, KoXoftM- 
aovTai al vpipai. So Malela, p. 237, tou 
avTov firjvd^ tocs tipEpa<s EKoX6(Bu)(jav, 

KoXtto^, ov, 6, the bosom. 1. prop, 
the front of the body between the arms ; 
hence John xiii. 23, dvaK&ipEvo^ kv tw 
koXtto) tou 'Irjorov, reclining on Jesus' 
bosom, i. e. sitting next to him on the tri- 
clinium at supper, so that his head was 
opposite to Jesus' bosom. So Lat. in sinu 



KO A 



225 



Kon 



rectnnho. Fig. to be in or on the bosom of 
any one, to be cherished by him ; a bosom- 
friend. John i. 18, o wz/ ets t6v koXttov 
ToD Xlanrpd^^ equiv. to b iuLOvoyEvii<s vto^. 
So Lu. xvi. 22, fis Tou koXttou 'AfSpa- 
a/i, and ver. 23, AdX^apou ku toI^ k6\- 
TTots auToD, i. e. 'in near and intimate 
communion Avith Abraham,' as one of his 
beloved children. So Jos. de Mace. § 13, 
[4 Mace. xiii. 16,] outm yap 3'ai/oi/Ta§, 
'AjSpactfi kul 'laauK Kai 'lai<(h(3 
virodi^oi'Tai £ts tou? koXttou^ avTtov. 
Sept. 7j yvv^] kv T(o koXttco <rov. Deut. 
xiii. 7. xxviii, 54, 56, al. Ecclus. ix. 1. 
Pint. Cato Min. 33, nit. Ta(3LULoi/, sk 
Tail/ IIo/xTrtjioi; KoXiruiv avdpcoTTou. Cic. 
ad Div. xiv. 4, ' tu vero sis in sinu semper 
et complexu meo.' — II. spec, the bosom of 
an oriental garment, which falls down 
over the girdle, and is often used as a sort 
of pocket for carrying small articles. Lu. 
vi. 38, d(x)(Tovcnv ets tov koX'Ttou v/ulcov. 
So Sept. Is. Ixv. 6. Jer. xxxii. 18, and 
sometimes Class, e. gr. Horn. Od, xv. 468, 
Tpi aXELcra KUTaKpvxp^aa viro koXttio 
''EKcf)sp£v. — III. fig. put for a bay^ d^lf] 
inlet of the sea. Acts xxvii. 39. Jos. and 
Class, and hence our gulf. 

KoXv iJL^dw^ f. 77cra), to sicim^ Acts 
xxvii. 43, and lat. Class. 

KoXu/ij8/?0pa, as, 77, (/coXu/.t/3aa>,) 
prop, a ,sivi7n?ning- place, hence a pool, 
pond, for any purpose whatever ; e. gr. 
gener. John ix. 7, 11 ; a healing bath or 
pool, ver. 2. Sept. Jos. and lat. Class. 

KoXwvia, a§, 77, Lat. colonia, i. a 
Roman colony. Acts xvi. 12. On the con- 
nexion of colonies with the Roman repub- 
lic, see Kuinoel in loc. 

Ko/xatt), f. ri<TO), {kout],) to wear the 
hail' long, 1 Cor. xi. 14, sq. and Class, as 
Hom. Hdot. Xen. 

Kofxt], 7j?, 77, hair, head of hair, 1 Cor. 
xi. 15. Sept. and Class. 

Ko/xtjw, f. L(xoi, Att. f. ic5, {Koniio},) 
prop, and gener. to take care of, provide 
for ; so of one fallen in battle, to take up 
<vnd bear aicay, Hom. II. xiii. 196 : hence 
gener. to take up, carry off, as booty, Hom. 
11. ii. 875, or a weapon in the body, xxii. 
286. In N. T. gener. 1) act. to bear, 
to bring, trans. Lu. vii. 37, KOfxicracra dXd- 
(BacTTpov fxvpov. Arr. Alex. M. vii. 22, 8. 
Xen. Cyr. iii. 3, 2. 2) mid. Kofj-iX^oixai, 
Att. f. KOfXLovfxaL, to take for oneself, to 
beojr or bring to oneself, i. e. to acquire, 
obtain, receive, trans. Matt. xxv. 27, i/co- 
IdiadjuLrjv dv to kjxov. 2 Cor. v. 10. Col. 
iii. 25, KOjULULTaL o r]SLKj]a-E. Heb. x. 36, 
K. Trjv kirayyEXiav, et al. Apocr. & lat. 
Class. In the sense of to receive again, 
recover, trans. Heb. xi. 19. Sept. Gen. 
xxxviii. 20. 2 Mace. x. 1. Jos. Ant. xiii. 
4, 1. Diod. Sic, xii. 80. 



Kg jULxp^ 6t E pov, adv. (compar. of Kofx- 
i|a6os, belle, ' well,' Xen. Cyr. i. 3, 8,) bet- 
ter, in the phrase Kofixj/oTEpov e^elv, se 
melius habere, to be better, John iv. 52. 
Arr. Epict. iii. 10, 13, Ko/jLif/oo^ '^X^'-^- 

KovLdco, f. daco, {kovlu, dust, slacked 
lime,) to tchite-ivash, i. e. with lime, trans. 
Matt, xxiii. 27, Tdcpoi^ KEKoi/Lafxii/oi^, 
ichite-icashed sepulchres. See my note. 
Acts xxiii. 3, toIx^ kekovlupleve, ' thou 
whited wall,' 1. e. thou hypocrite, fair 
without and foul within. Sept. and lat. 
Class. 

Koi/iopTos, OV, 6, {KOVia & opvvfxi,) 
dust, prop, as raised up, flying. Matt. x. 14. 
Lu. ix. 5. X. 11, et al. Sept. and Class. 

KoTTa^w, f. a(7<o, (kottos,) prop, 'to 
be beaten out, be weary,' equiv. to ko~ 
TTLdoD, hence gener. to relaoc, remit, cease, 
as oft. in Class. Sept. an:d Apocr. ; inN.T. 
of the wind, to lull, intrans. Matt. xiv. 
32.^ Mk. iv. 39. vi. 51. So Hdot. vii. 191, 
kKoiraarEu 6 dvEp.o^. Sept. in Gen. viii. 1, 

EKOTTUCTE TO U^COp. 

KoTTgTos, OV, 6, {KOTTTOjULui,) Icimcn- 
tation, wailing, i. e. as accompanied with 
beating the breast, &c. Acts viii. 2. Sept. 
Gen. 1. 10. Dion. Hal. Ant. xi. 31. 

KoTT?;, ri^, 77, (/coTTTO),) prop, tlie act of 
cutting, or its effect, a cut or blow; also 
slaughter, carnage, Heb. vii. 1, in allusion 
to Gen. xiv. 17. Sept. in Josh. x. 20. 
Judith XV. 7. 

KoTTiaO), f. dew, {KOTTLa KOTTOS,) 

prop, in Class, to labour unto wea7'iness, 
to be weary, intrans. I. prop, to be lueary 
from bodily labour. John iv. 6, k. ek tt}^ 
oSoiTTopia^. Jos. Ant. ii. 15, 3, k. vtto 
Tfj^ odoLTropLu?. Sept. in Is. xl. 31, Spa- 
fjiOvvTUL Kai ov KOTTidcrovcn. Deut. xxv. 
18, et al. in Sept. Also by impl. to faint 
or tire with labour, both prop, as Rev. ii. 
3, k(3d(TTa(Ta9, Kai ouk EKOTTLaara^. Aris- 
toph. Thesm. 795. Athen. p. 416, and fig. 
Matt. xi. 28, Sevte Trpos jUE irdvTE^ ol 
KOTTLcovTE's, \. 0. ' arc weary of the burden 
of sin,' (see Ps. xxxviii. 4. Heb. xii. 1,) 
and the yoke of the ceremonial law. See 
Gal. V. 1. — II. in N. T. to weary oneself 
with labour, to labour, to toil, absol. Lu. 
V. 5, KOTTLdcravTE^ ovSkv kXdfiojuLsv. Matt, 
vi. 28. Lu. xii. 27, Ta Kpiva — ov KOTria 
ovdk v-^dsL. Acts XX. 35. 1 Cor. iv. I'J. 
Eph. iv. 28. 2 Tim. ii. 6. Fig. of spiritual 
labour (see Ps. cxxvii. 1) of»a teacher who 
' labours in the Gospel,' John iv. 38, o 
ovX t'/.tels KEKOTTLaKaTs. Josh, xxiv, 13, 
edwKep vjuuu yrju kcp^ i)u ovk ETroKidaraTE. 
1 Cor. xy. 10. xvi. 16. Foil, by iu, to la- 
bour in, kv Xoyw, 1 Tim. v. 17. kv Kvpitp., 
i. e. Mn the work of the Lord,' Rom. xvi. 
12. kv vfxiv, ' among you,' 1 Th. v. 12. by 
EL'S with acc. of pers. upon or for whom, 
eU iifxd^, Rom, xvi. 6. Ek vjulu?, Gal. iv. 



Ko n 



226 



KO S 



11. with eU final, as tis tovto oti, 1 Tim. 
IV. 10. £i§ o, Col. 1.29. 519 KEvov^ iTi vam^ 
Phil. ii. 16. Sept. Is. Ixv. 23. Jer, li. 53. 

K OTTOS, ou, o, (/coVtco,) prop. a heat- 
ing, jfEschyl. Myrra. 119; also the being 
beaten out ivith labour^ utter iveari?iess, Xen. 
An. V. 8, 3. Hence in N. T. as gener. in 
Class. ^027, labour^ implying wearisome 
effort, gener. John iv. 38, v/xeTs f ts nrou 
KoTTov auTtvv f.i<Ts.\r\\vduTs.^ i. e. the fruit 
of it ; also of labour in preaching the 
Gospel, 1 Cor. iii. 8. xv. 58, 6 /coVos 
vixouu kv Kuf)i'w. 2 Cor. vi. 5. x. 15. 
xi. 23, 27. 1 Tiiess. i. 3, o kotto^ t^s 
ayaTTT^s, labour oflove^ i. e. work of bene- 
ficence, as in Heb. vi. 10. See my note. 
In the sense of trouble^ vexation^ in the 
phrase kottov^ iraoi^zLv tlvl^ — to trot&- 
hle, to vex any one, Matt. xxvi. 10. Mk. 
xiv. 6. Lu. xi. 7. xviii. 5. Gal. vi, 17, and 
later Greek writers. The earlier ones said 
TTOvov irapi^ELv^ Hdot. i. 177, or irpay- 
fxara irapLxELV^ Hdot. i. 155, 175. 

l^oir pia^ a<}^ 77, (/coTrpos, dung,) prop. 
a dunghill. In N. T. dung^ Lu. xiv. 35. 
Sept. and iat. Class. 

KoTrp Lou^ ou, TO, (neut. of adj. k6- 
Trpios,) dung^ manure^ plur. KOTrpia^ Lu. 
xiii. 8, in lat. edit. 1 Mace. ii. 62. An- 
thol. Gr. iii. p. 85. Arr. Epict. ii. 4, 5. 

Kd-TTTO), f. to beat or cut^ by a 
blow, as oft. in Hom. ; also to chop. In 
N. T. 1) prop, to lop trees, to cut off 
branches, Matt. xxi. 8. Mk. xi. 8. Sept. 
Num. xiii. 24. Judg. ix. 48. Xen. An. iv. 
8, 2. 2) mid. K-oTTTOiuat, to beat or cut 
oneself i. e. the breast, &c. in loud wailing; 
hence to lament., wail, beicail, absol. Matt, 
xi. 17. Jos. Ant. vii. 1, 6, and Class. ; 
with acc. Lu. viii. 52. 

Kd/)a^, a/<:o9, o, a raven, Lu. xii. 24. 
Sept. and Class. 

Kopatrtof, Lov, to, (dimin. fr. /cop?],) 
girl, maiden, damsel. Matt. ix. 24, 25, et 
al. Sept. 

Ko p (3 d V, 6, indec. also Kop(3avd^, d, 6, 
Hebr. ]2"ip, corban, i. e. a gift, offering, 
oblation, to God, Lev. ii. 1, 4, 12, 13. In 
N. T. 1) prop. Kop(3av, 'something de- 
voted to God,' Mk. vii. 11, KopfSdu, b egtl 
duypou, K.T.X. See Jos. Ant. iv. 4, 4. 2) 
Kop(3avd^, said of money offered in the 
Temple, the sacred treasure, and by meton. 
the treasury, — yaX^ocpvXuKLov, Matt, 
xxvii. 6. See Jos. B. J. ii. 9, 4, tov 
iepov ^^cravpov, KaXil^ai ok Kop[3ava'S, 

Kop kvvv fXL, (f. Kopkaro), perf. pass. 
KEKopea-fxai.. aor. 1. pass. kKopk<Tdr]v,) to 
satiate, satisfy, with food and drink, pass, 
or mid. to be satiated or full ; foil, by gen. 
of thing, pass. Acts xxvii. 38, Kop£adkvTE<3 
6k Tpo^ri<5, and Class. Fig. absol. 1 Cor. 
iv. 8, and Hdian. i. 13, 10. 



Kdpos, ou, 6, corns, Hebr. cor, the 
largest Hebrew dry measure, equal to the 
homer, i. e. to ten baths, or ephahs, and 
also to ten Attic ixk^ifxvoi, Jos. Ant. xv. 

9, 2. Lu. Xvi. 7, EKaTOV KOpOV^ (TLTOV, 

Sept. 2 Chr. ii. 10. xxvii. 5. Ez. xiv. 13. 

Kocutco, f. ??(T6o, {Kocr/uio?,) to order^ 
i. e. to put in order, e. g. an army, to draw 
up, Hom. II. xiv. 388, and oft. ; to re- 
gulate, Hes. 0pp. 308; to adorn, Hes. 
0pp. 72. Thuc. and jEschyl. In N. T. 

1) ^0 adjust, e. g. lamps, to trim. Matt. 
XXV. 7, kK6(Tfxr](Tav Td§ ka/nTrdda^ av. 

2) to decorate, adorn, e. g. Tot; oIkov, as if 
for a new dweller. Matt. xii. 44. Lu. xi. 
25, and so Class. ; a bride, vvpicpr^v, Rev. 
xxi. 2 ; gener. Lu. xi. 25. 1 Tim. ii. 9. 
Rev. xxi. 19. Sept. and Class. So Matt, 
xxiii. 29, KocfxEirE to. /jLvij/uLSLa, ' ye de- 
corate the sepulchres,' &c. i. e. with gar- 
lands and flowers, or by adding columns or 
other ornaments. See my Rec. Syn. in 
loc. Fig. to honour, make honourable, or 
respected. Tit. ii. 10, T7/y BidaaKaXiav. 
1 Pet. iii. 5, al dyiai -yumt/css — kKoar- 
jjLOvv kavTCL^. Theogn. v. 941. Hdian. vi. 
3, 5. Xen. Conv. viii. 38. 

K OCT /At /cos, 77, 6v, adj. {Koafxo^, world,) 
worldly, terrestrial, opp. to kiroupdvLO^. 
Heb. ix. 1, ajLov Koo-fxLKou' comp. ver.23, 
and see my note. Plut. vi. 455, Koc/uLLKt} 
otaTaJts. As highly illustrative of the 
above passage of Heb. compare Joseph. 
Bell. iv. 5, 2, of the Jewish piiests, oi Sk 
irpo oXiyov nri]v lepav kordrjTa TTEpLKELfie- 

VOL, KOL T?/S KOa/ULLKT]^ ^pi](JKELa^ KUTUp- 

yovTE^ — tppLjUL/iikvoL yvfjivoL, jSopd Kvvdw 
Kal ^-npLwu, kf^XtTTovTo. Fig. wo?^ldly^ 
as conformed to this world, belonging to 
the men of this world, Tit. ii. 12, kTVLdv- 
fxiai KocrpLKal, ivorldly lusts. 

Kd(TMios, ov, 6, 77, adj. (/cdcrfios,) 
ivell-ordered ; of thingrs, decorous, modest, 
in a moral respect, 1 Tim. ii. 9, kv Kara- 
(TToXfj Koa-pitp. So Xen. Mem. iii. 11, 

14, TOUS SEOpivOV9 V7r0pLpvn(TK0l£ tOS 

Koa-pLcoTaTr] 6p.LXia : and Hdot. Vit. 
Hom. 4, 7} dk Trap' avTco eipydt^en-o, 
'TToXXto Koa-p'iw y^pwpikvri. The term is, 
however, prop, used of persons who are 
obedient to lawful authority, Xen. An. vi. 
6, 17 ; but in 1 Tim. iii. 2, vj^cpaXiov, 
(ruxppova, Kocrp-Lov, it means of well- 
ordered morals and habits, as very often 
in Plato, orEpvoTrpiirri, as Theophyl. ex- 
plains. And so Epict. Ench. § 62, k. kuI 
ai6np.ovs£ kv (Tcocppoavvri. 

KocrpLOKpaTtop, epos, 6, {KoapLo^, icpa- 
Tso),) prop, lord of the ivorld, Schol. in 
Aristoph. Nub. 397, 2. 6 (BaaiXsv? twv 
AiyvTTTLiJDV., Kocrp.oKpd'Twp ysyova)9 
K. T. X. Orpheus, Hymn on the Sun, 11, 
on Pan, 11. In N. T. of Satan as the 
prince of this world, i. e. of worldly men, 



KOS 



227 



KP A 



plur. Eph. vi. 12, tt^os tous KoafxoKpd- 

TO/OaS TOV (TKOTOU? TOV aitOJ/O? TOUTOU, 

i. e. Satan and his angels. Comp. John 
xii. 31. 2 Cor. iv. 4. ^ Ignat. i. 1, Sid^o- 
\oi/, ov Kai KoafMOKpaTopa Ka\ov<Tiv. 

Ko(r/u.os, ou, 6, order ^ implying orderly 
disposition, arrangement, Horn. Od. xiii. 
77, KotTfxtjo KadiX^sLi/. Thiic. iii. 77 ; also 
gener. regulajit?/^ Thuc. vii. 40. And as 
orderly arrangement is in nothing more 
necessary than in dress, (so our Avord to 
dress comes from Ital. drissare^ fr. Lat. 
dingere^ to put in order,) so k. came to 
mean personal attire, espec. that of women, 
Horn. II. xiv. 187; and then, from the 
adjunct, decorative attire^ decoration^ as in 
N. T. at 1 Pet. iii. 3. In N. T. it has 
two significations: 1) decoration^ 1 Pet. 
iii. 3, ovx o e^codsp Kocrfxo^. Sept. Ex. 
xxxiii. 4, 5, 6. Jer. iv. 30. Hdian. iii. 6, 
19. Xen. Cyr. viii. 4, 24 ; and 2) from 
arrangement being implied, the order of 
the universe, the world, Lat. mundus^ 
first so used by Pythagoras, and then 
adopted as a technical term of philosophy. 
In N. T. it is used i. gener. for tlie world, 
the universe, the heavens and earth, &c. 
Matt. xiii. 35, dito KaTa^oX?]^ k6(t/j.ov. 
xxiv. 21, et al. and Class. Meton. for the 
inhabitants of the universe, 1 Cor. iv. 9, 
^iaTpov Ey£vt]dr]/UL£V tco k6<tihw^ Kai 
dyyiX.oL's Koi dvdpooTroL's. Fig. and sym- 
bol, as in Engl, a world of any thing, for a 
congeries. Ja. iii. 6, rj yXcoaa-a ttu/), 6 koct- 
/UL09 Ti}<s doLKLU's^ a world of iniquity. — it. 
by synecd. the earth, this lower world as 
the abode of man. 1) prop. Mk. xvi. 15, 
'KoptvdiuTE's sh TOV Koa/JLOV ccTravra. 
So 'ip^iadai flv TOV Kocrfxov^ ' to come or 
be sent into the world,' to be born, John 
i. 9 ; or 'to go forth into the wbrld,' to 
appear before men, John iii. 19. vi. 14, et 
al. : hyperbolically. Matt. iv. 8, Tracras 
Tocs /3acriA.£tas tov koct/jlov. Rom. i. 8. 
Comp. Lucian de Astrol. 12. 2) meton. 
the world for its inhabitants., mankind. 

Matt. V. 14, VfXil^ kcTTE TO CpU)^ TOV 

Koar/uLov. xiii. 38. John i. 29. iii. 16, 
ouTO) yap rjyd'K^cTEv 6 0£O§ tov k6(T- 
/jLov., et al. So hyperb. the world for tlie 
multitude., every body., Fr. tout le monde. 
John vii. 4, (pavipwcrov aiavTov too 
/co'cr/Lito, opp. to eu KpvirTw. xii. 19. xiv. 
22. xViii. 20. 2 Cor. i. 12. 2 Pet. ii. 5, 
Koa/uLo^ dcTE^Mv. Put also for the heathen 
world., equiv. to Ta 'iQvr]., Rom. xi. 12, 
15. — III. with o5-ro§, in the Jewish mode 
of speaking, the present tvorld^ or order 
of things, as opposed to the kingdom of 
Christ ; and hence always with the idea of 
transientness, worthlessness, and evil both 
physical and moral, the seat of cares, 
temptations, &c. ; and tbus nearly equiv. 
to o aioDv ouTos, 1) gener. with of/^os, 



John xii. 25, 6 /jaawv Trjv xj/vx*)^ avTov 
iv Tip Koa/uLOo TOUTW, opp. to £19 ^corjV 
aiu)viov. xviii. 36, bis, v ^aaiXsia ij iyurj 
uuK iaTLV in tov koct/jlov tovtov k. t. \, 
1 Cor. V. 10; without outo9, 1 John ii. 
15, 17 ; spec, the wealth and enjoyments 
of this world, this world's goods, Matt, 
xvi. 26, TL yap dxpsXiiTai dvdpcaTro^., 
kdv TOV Koaixov oXov Kspdvcrri ; Mk. viii. 
36. Gal. vi. 14. Ja. iv. 4,' et al. 2) 
meton. for the men of this icorld, world- 
lings., as opp. to those who seek the king- 
dom of God, e. g. with outos, John xii. 

31, 77 KpLCn<5 TOV K. TOVTOV. 1 CoF. 1. 

20, crocpia tov k. tovtov. iii. 19. As 
subject to Satan, John xii. 31, 6 dpyujv 
TOV K. TOVTOV. XIV. 30. xvi. 11. Without 
ouTos, John vii. 7, ov dvvaTau 6 k6<T[xo's 
fXLaiiv vfxd'3. xiv. 17, et al. saepiss. 

Ko u/xf, Syro-Chald. imperat. fern, arise, 
Mk. V. 41. 

Kouo-Tw^ta, a§, 77, Lat. custodia ; in 
N. T. meton., abstr. for concr. watch.^ 
guard., of soldiers, Matt, xxvii. 65. 

Kou^i^o), f. lo-oj, ( /CO OS, light,) to 
lighten., as a ship by discharging its cargo, 
Acts xxvii. 38, tKovcpiX^ov to ttXoTov. 
Thuc. vi. 34; or preparing for battle, Thuc. 
vi. 34. So Jon, i. 5, (a passage probably 
then had in view by St. Luke,) iKfSoXi^v 

ETTOinaaVTO TCOV CrKeVU)V, tov K0V(pL(7dT}- 

vai air avTUiV. Pol. i. 39, 4, /c. toc? 

vav^. 

K6(p Lvo^^ ov, o, cophinus, a iviclcer- 
bashet, meaning the Jewish travelling- 
baskets to csrry provisions. Matt. xiv. 20, 
owofiAca Ko<pLvov'5 TrXrjpEL's, where see my 
note. Ps. Ixxxi. 6. Judg. vi. 19. Aristoph. 
Av. 1310. Xen. Mem. iii. 8, 6. 

K|oa/3/3aTo§, ou, 6, Lat. grabbatus, a 
small portable couch, with only a skin or 
rug spread over ; or a kind of stretcher used 
for travelling or conveying sick persons, 
called by the Class. aKLfxTrov?, or GKLfx-no- 
Slov, Mk. ii. 4, 9. vi. 55. John v. 8. Acts 
V. 15, al. Arr. Epict. iii. 22. Used only 
by very late writers. 

Kpajca, (f. KEKpd^Ofxai, aor. 1. 
sKpu^a, perf. 1. KtKpdya with signif. of 
pres. ) a word supposed to be formed from 
the sound, and imitating the hoarse cry of 
the raven, rook, &c. (see Aristoph. Nub. 
258, 388,) and akin to KpwX^co and /cXa^oj, 
hence gener. and in N. T. to cry out., 
vociferate, in trans. 1) as said of ina^'ticur- 
laie cries, clamour, exclamation, e. g. from 
fear, uTro tov (p6(3ov, Matt. xiv. 26 ; from 
pain. Matt, xxvii. 50. Mk. xv. 39; abhor- 
rence. Acts vii. 57. Of demoniacs, Mk. i. 
26. V. 5. Lu. ix. 39. Sept. So, in joy, 
Lu. xix. 40, oi XidoL KzKpd^ovTaL, a pro- 
verbial expression, to express that a thing 
can by no means be concealed, of which 
see examples in my note. Josh. vi. 16, 



KP A 



228 



KP A 



and Class. 2) of any atiiculate outcry^ 
to exclaim^ call aloud ; in Class, almost 
always absol. but in N. T. foil, by the 
words uttered, Mk. x. 48, 6 ok ttoXXw 
fxdWov 'iKpaX^^v' Yi£ Aaut^ k. t. \. xv. 
13, 14, al. Foil, by a tense or .part, of 
Xeyw, &c. e. g. EKpa^s Xlywu, Matt, xiv. 
30. Mk. iii. 11. John i. 15, and oft. 
K/oa^as EXgyg, Mark ix. 24 ; of urgent 
prayei\ or entreaty, &c. Kom. viii. 15, 
kv M KpaX^Ojuiev' 'A.^j3a 6 UaTrip. Gal. 
iv. 6 ; metaph. Ja. v. 4, 6 jULordo^ Tuiv 
kpyaTuov — KpaX^Ei^ scil. nrpo'S Kuptov, 
for vengeance. So Aristoph. Nnb. 982, 
KEKpaye irpo^ tou§ oiKETa^ : and so Sept. 
in Is. xix. 20, KEKpa^ovrai Trpo? KupLoi^. 
Ps. xxviii. 1, Trpos a-g eK&Kpa^a^ 6 Gsos 
fAov. 2 Sam. xix. 28. Jer. xi. 11. 

KpatTTaXi], 77, (so Lat. crapula^ 
from /cpa, caput^ and TraWo), vibro^ the 
disorder being so called from its chief 
symptom,) prop, seizure of the head, and 
hence intemperance by gluttony or intooci- 
cation^ and its consequences, giddiness^ 
headache, &c. Lu. xxi. 34, kv KpanraXy 
Kal piidrj, i. e. ' in constant revelry, 
carousing.' Aristoph. Ach. 277. Hdian. i. 
17, 7, al. in Class. 

KpavLov^ ou, TO, (dimin. of Kpavov^) 
a skull, Matt, xxvii. 33. Mk. xv. 22, al. 
Sept. and lat. Class. 

KpaoTTTsdov, ou, TO, (kindr. Avith 
Kpoarao?,) prop, the edge, margin, skirt, 
extremity of any thing, e. g. of a moun- 
tain, Xen. Hist. iv. 6, 8 ; of a garment, 
Theocr. ii. 53. In N. T. fringe, tassel, 
Matt. ix. 20, et al. Sept. Num. xv. 38. 

KpaTaios, a, 6v, adj. (/cpocTo?,) 
strong, migldy^ e. g. h k. x^lp tov 9 sou, 1 
Pet. V. 6. So 1 Esdr. viii. 47, tviV k. x^^P^ 
TOV Yivpiov v/jLcov, and sometimes in Sept. 
and Class, espec. the poets, as Horn. Pind. 
and the Tragedians. 

KpaTaioo), f. ojcrco, {KpaTULo?,) to 
make strong, strengthen, trans, a form 
found only in Sept. N. T. and later 
writers, for the earlier Kpanrvvui, act. in 
Sept. 1 Sam. xxiii. 16. 2 K. xv. 19. In 
N. T. only in pass, to he strong, to groio 
strong, Lu. i. 80. ii. 40, EKpai-aLovTo 
'TTvEVfxaTL. Eph. iii. 16, Swd/uLei Kpa- 
TaLu)df]vaL. Also pass, in mid. sense, lit. 
' to string up one's nerves,' for any labo- 
rious undertaking, 1 Cor. xvi. 13, avdpi- 
'^sade, Kpai-aLOvcrds, as Ps. xxxi. 24, dv- 
dpiX^sade, Kal KpaTaiovaQoi v Kapdia 
vfxcov. 1 Sam. iv. 9, /cpaTatoutrOs kul 
yivEads et? avopa<s. 

KpaTEto, f. vcTUi, {KpaTo^,) in Class. 
to be strong, mighty, 'poicerfid, either absol. 
as often in Hom.er, or with gen. of pers. to 
liave poicer, ride over ; or with gen. of 
tiling, to get the better of hold the mastery 



over. In N. T. either with gen. of thing, 
or acc. of pers. or thing. I. foil, by gen. 

of thing, to have power over, to be or 
become muster of, i. e to gain, to attain 
to. In Class, gener. prop, as Demosth. 
KpaTELV T(jou XP''ll^'-(^'^(^^-) or Tcou TTpay- 
jucLTojif. Thuc. iii. 47, KpaTslu Ttoi/ 
oTrXayu : but in N. T. only fig. as in Acts 

xxvii. 13, T7j<s •7rpudi(TE<t)<s. The same 
phrase occurs in Diod. Sic. xvi. 20. Galen 
cited by Wet. ; and KaTaKpa-riiv t. Trp. 
Pol. V. 38, 9 ; & KpaTELv TOV kyy^Eiprifxa- 
Tos,Dion. IIal.p.906, 1. Heb.iv.l4,/cpaT6o- 
p.iv Tr]<s bpLoXoyia^s, ' let us attain to the full 
benefit of our profession in him,' equiv. 
to vi. 18, KpaTTjaai t?/s TrpoKELfiivi]^ 
kXiri^o^. Sept. Prov. xiv.. 18, oi iravovp- 
yoL KpaTricrovaLV aladrKTtto^. Hence 
gener. KpuTi.1v tt/s x^ipo's tivo?, to take 
the hand of any one. Matt. ix. 25. Mk. i. 
31. V. 41. Lu. viii. 54, and so oft. in 
Sept. but not in Class. — II. foil, by acc. of 
pers. or thing. \) to have potcer over, to 
be or become master of Hence gener. to 
get into one's poiver, to lay hold of, seize, 
take, e. g. a person. Matt. xiv. 3, 6 yap 
'Hyow^jjs KpaTr}(ra^ t6v 'Icodvvrjv, edrjatv 
avTov, Mk. iii. 21, and oft. ; also Palajph. 
ii. 7, 9. xxxii. 2. Ach. Tat. p. 309, 
iTTEXELpEL p.E KpaTElv. So of au auimal, 
Matt. xii. 11, and Sept. Apocr. Class. 
Hence gener. kputeIv tlvu tt}^ x^ipos, 
to take any one by the hand, in order to 
raise him, Mk. ix. 27. Also to hold in 
ones hands or arms, to embrace. Matt. 

xxviii. 9, kKpdTi]<rav avTov tov? irodas, 
' they embraced his feet.' 2) to have in 
one's power, be master of, i. e. to hold, hold 
fast, e. g. things, Rev, ii. 1, 6 KpuTuw 

TOV? ETTTO. dcTTEpaS EV TT] de^LO. auTov. 

Comp. i. 16, where g'xwi/. Comp. Athen. 
p. 290, poiraXou EKpuTEL : and Achill. 
Tat. ^lP>\lov KpaTiov. Rev. vii. 1, /c. tov<s 
TEcra. dvEjuov?. Pass. Lu. xxiv. 16, ol 
ocpdaX/uioi avTwv kKoaTovvTo. Of per- 
sons, to hold in subjection, pass. Acts ii. 24, 
KadoTL ovK rjv hwuTov KpaTEladaL avTOV 
vtt' avTov, scil. QavciTov. Aristoph. Av. 
419. Xen. An. v. 6, 7. So to hold o?ie 
fast, i. e. to hold fast to hiin, cleave to him^ 
whether in person, Acts iii. 11, KpaTovv- 
To§ 6e avTov TOV WiTpov K. T. X. OT iu 
faith. Col. ii. 19, tijv KE(paXr]v, i. e. 
Christ. Metaph. spoken of sins, to hold 
fast, retain, not remit, John xx. 23. Also 
to keep to oneself, e. g. tov Xoyov, Mk. ix. 
10. So the Class, writers have KpaTElv 
TL 7rpo§ kavTov : and Test. xii. Patr. p. 
683, kv ^^xf^ f^^^ KpaTTiaa? SoXov. 

Others explain, ' held fast in mind ;' and 
so Athen. ap. Steph. Thess. in v. KoaTElv 
ol/uaL TT]? Xe^eco9, memoricL tenere. Comp. 
^sch. Choeph. 78. Gener. to hold fast in 
mind, observe, Mk. vii. 3, KpaTovvTE^ 
Tijv TrapadocTLV tujv TrpEorfSvTipwv. ver. 



K P A 



229 



KPI 



4, 8. 2 Thess. ii. 15. Rev. ii. 13, sqq. iii. 
11. Test. xir. Patr. p. 665, K^yaTelu to 
t^f'Xt/^a Tov Btou. 

K/oaxtcTTos, t], Of, (prop, superl. of 
poetic KpaTv<5^ (Kjoa-ro?,) used also as 
superl. of ayaOos,) Diost eivcellent^ most 
nohle^ used in addressing persons of rank 
or authority, Lu. i. 3, KpaTLo-TE OeocpLke. 
Acts xxiii. 26, et al. Jos. and Class. 

KpttTos, €os ous, TO, strencftli^ prop, 
physical, Horn. 11. xvi. 524. xxiv. 293 ; 
but oft. in Class., and also in N. T., said 
of moral strength, mighty poi.cer^ &c. I. 
gener. Acts xix. 20, Kraxa k-octtos, 
mightily^ veheme,-jtly ^ and so Class, oft. Eph. 

i. 19, KaTo. Tifv kvipytiav tov KpccTov^ 
T^s i(TX^>09 avTov^ i. e. ' of his mighty 
power.' (Comp. 'laxv?.) Eph. vi. 10. 
Col. i. 11. Sept. Is. xl. 26, dird iroXXi]^ 
oo^tjs, Kal kv KpaTEL tff^^uos avTov. 
Meton. mighty collect, for miglity deeds ^ 
in the phrase ttolelv KpaTo^^ to eaert 
strength^ perform mighty deeds, Lu. i. 51, 
iTToLtjare KpoLTos kv ^payiovL^ &c. And 
so Ps. cxix. 16, 'KOLtiv ovvafxLV. — II. 
poiuer^ i. e. dominion, implying dignity, or 
the authority attached thereto, and often 
occurring in doxologies, as I Tim. vi. 16, 
w Tifxi) Kal KpuTo^ aiuovLov. 1 Pet. iv. 
11. v.. 11. Rev. i. 6. Heb. ii. 14, tov 
TO Kpa.TO's 'iypvTa tov ^avocTov^ ' the 
Lord of death.' And so in Class., as 
Hdot. iii. 36, to TlEpcriuiV KpaTO^ ^X^^" 
Ta. Horn. Od. i. 359, tov yap /cpotTOS 
£(tt' kvL oLKco^ ct al. Hdot. vii. 187. ix. 
42. 

Kpauya^w, f. acro), (K-pauy?/,) to cry 
oat^ vonferate^ intrans. equiv. to KpaX^oo^ 
Matt. xii. 19, ovk kpLcrsL^ ovdk KpavydcEL. 
XV. 22. John xi. 43. Sept. and later 
Class. 

Y.pavyr]^ tj?^ 17, (/cpa'^o),) cry^ outcry^ 
e. gr. to intimate something to be done, 
Matt. XXV. 6. Rev. xiv. 18, and Class, as 
Xen. An. ii. 2, 17. Thuc. vii. 44; of tumult, 
clamour^ Acts xxiii. 9. Eph. iv. 31. Pol. 

ii. 70, 6 ; of sorrow, wailing^ Rev. xxi. 4. 
Sept. and Class. ; of supplication, Heb. 
v. 7, and Sept. often. 

Kpeas, aTO£ ao9, to, (plur, tu 
KokaTu^ contr. Kpia,) meat, fleshy Rom. 
xiv. 21. 1 Cor. viii. 13. Sept. and Class. 

Kp £ i (TCO) I/, or TTWl/, OVO'S^O^h^ (p^op- 

KpaLaa-wi/,) compar. of poetic /c/oaTus, 
used also as comparat. of dyaOos, letter. 
The word properly signifies stronger., as 
often in Homer and Hdot. ; but generally 
by impl. better., whether intrinsically or 
extrinsically, and differing in sense, as ap- 
plied to persons, or to things, chiefly quali- 
ties. In the former case it denotes what is 
hetteT m dignity or quality ; in tlie latter, 
w liat is better in valiie. In N. T. it signi- 



fies, I. better, in value., more useful 01 
profitable, and therefore ])refcr:ible ; though 
found only in the neut. to Kpelacrov., 
1 Cor. vii.' 9. xi. 17. xii. 31. Phil. i. 23, 
et al. So also Sept. and Class. ; as Xen. 
CEcon. XX. 9; also KpaTel for KpEia-crov 
io-Ti, Eurip. Hipp. 248. — II. better in 
quality., as said both of things, more excel- 
lent., and of persons, superior^ Heb. i. 4, 
ToaouTco KptLTTvov yivofXEvo^ : and vi, 9. 

vii. 7, 19, 22. ix. 23. X. 34. xi. 16, 35. 
1 Pet. iii. 17, and Class. ; as Horn. II. iii. 
71, oTToTspo's ok K. vtKT^a-y^ Kp^Lorawv TS 
yivriTai. In the passage of Heb. vii. 7, 
TocrovTijc) K. the sense is, ' higher in dig- 
nity,'' as in Chrys. de Sacerd. iii. 6, €7rt to 
KpalTTou kKoo-juLvdr]., ' was invested with 
higher dignity.' 

KjOf/xctf i/u/xi, f. Kpsfidaco., aor. 1, 
pass. kKpep-dadriv., to hang., suspend., trans, 
mid. Kpifjiafxai. after the form iCTa/xat, 
to hang., to he suspended., intrans. 1) act. 
with acc. impl. and foil, by kirl with gen. 
Acts V. 30, & x. 39, KpafxdcravTE'i {avTov) 
kirl ^vXov. Gen. xl. 19, 22. Pass. foil, 
by £is, Matt, xviii. 6 ; absol. Lu. xxiii. 
39, and Class. 2) mid. Acts xxviii. 4, 
KpefxaiuLEVov to 6r]pLov tK t7j? x^ipo^ 
avTov., hanging from his hand. So with 
£/c, Xen. Mem. iii. 10, 13. Foil, by k'jrl 
^vXov, Gal. iii. 13. Fig. with ku, Matt, 
xxii. 40, kv TavTaL9 — KpkuauTai. So 
fig. with £/c, Philo t, ii. p. 420, wu al tov 
edvov^ kXTrioE<3 kKpifxavTo, Mid. oft. in 
Sept. and Class. 

Kp»]juyos, ou, o, {KpEjULauwiuLL.) a pre- 
cipice., pro]), an overhanging cliff. Matt. 

viii. 32. Mk. v. 13. Lu. viii. 33. Sept. and 
Class. 

KptG??, r], barley., Rev. vi. 6. Sept. 
and Class. 

Kp 1 011/ OS, 7], 01/, (/cpi0>;,) of barley., as 
apToL KpidivoL, barley -loaves., John vi. 9, 
13. Sept. 2 K. iv. 42, dpToi Kp. Xen. An. 
iv. 5, 26, dpTOL's Kp. Artemid. i. 69, 

dpTOL Kp. 

KpijUia., aTos, TO, {Kpivco,) judgment., 
i. e. I. the act of judging, giving judg- 
ment, equiv. to KpiaL?. In N. T. only in 
reference to future reward or punishment, 
Johnix. 39, eU Kpifxa kyoj eU tov Kocr/ULOV 
TovTov ijXdov, for judgment am I come 
into this icorld., i. e. in order that the 
righteous may be approved and the wicked 
condemned. Comp. 1 Pet. iv. 17. So, of 
the judgment of the last day. Acts xxiv. 
25. Heb. vi. 2. Meton. for the poiver of 
judgment, Rev. xx, 4, — II. the judgment 
given, decision., aivard., sentence. 1) 
gener. Matt. vii. 2, kv w yap KpifxaTi 
KPLVETE., KpidnaEadE. Rom. V. 16, Plur. 
Rom. xi. 33, to. KpL/maTa auTou, the 
judgments of God, ' liis decrees.' Sept. and 
Class, as ^sch. Suppl. 392. 2) oftencr, 



KPI 



230 



K P I 



sentence^ i. e. of punisliment, condemnatioii^ 
implyiijg also the punishment itself as a 
certain consequence, Matt, xxiii. 14, olcl 
TovTo Xfixp-Eade TrEpicrcroTspov Kpitxa. 
Mk. xii. 40, et saepe al. Sept. Deut. xxi. 
22. Jer. iv. 12. Eccliis. xxi. 5, not in 
Class. — III. from the Hebrew, laivsuit, 
CAUSE, something to be judged, e. gr. 
KpifxaTa i-X^'-^i to have latvsuits, to go to 
law, 1 Cor. vi. 7. So Sept. Job xxiii. 4, 
xxxi. 13. Pol. xxiv. 1, 12. 

J^pivov, ou, TO, a lily^ Matt. vi. 28, 
Lu. xii. 27. Sept. and Class. 

KpZfco, f. ti/w, aor. 1. EKplva^ perf. 
KEKplKa, aor. 1. pass. i/cpi'Ojji/, — Lat. 
cerno, by transpos. of the vowel, prop, to 
separate, put asunder, espec. (which was 
probably the primary application of the 
word) grain from the chaff, in the act of 
winnowing. So Hom. II. v. 499 — 501, 
Qs o' avifJLo<s dyya^ (popeEi iepa<s kut 

dA.Wa§, ^ XvOpwV XLKfXWVTWV, OTE T£ 

^avdi] AjjavTrjp Kplvj], iirELyofJiivcov 
dvifxoov, KaoTTov te kul ciyya^. Also, to 
sift the flower from the bran, rejecting the 
latter, in allusion to which Aristot. de 
Probl. has Acoijygt TTji; TrgptTTwcTif, 'sifts 
off the superfluity.' The word was, how- 
ever, used not of things only, but also of 
persons, as Hom. II. ii. 362, Kplv avopa? 
KaTct (pvXa. Also metaph. (like sift in 
English) in the sense to sift out, discrimi- 
nate between truth and falsehood, or good 
and evil, (Xen.Mem. iii. 1,9. iv. 8,11,) 
also, to distinguish the good from the bad. 
Thence, from the adjunct, it came to 
signifv select, choose out the good, Hdot. 
vi. 129. Xen. An. i. 9, 20. Mem. iv. 4, 16. 
^sch. Eum. 465. Hom. often. Hence 
gener. and in N. T. it signifies to judge, 
(i. e. to form or give an opinion or decision, 
after separating truth from falsehood, and 
sifting all the particulars of a case,) and 
that in various acceptations, as cer7io, dis- 
cerno, secerno, excerno, decerno, dijudico, 
cognosco, eodstimo. In N. T. I. to judge 
in one's o%mi mind as to what is right, 
proper, expedient, i. e. to deem, decide, de- 
termine, foil, by infin. Acts xv. 19, 
kyoi) Kpivui fxi] 'irapEvoyXElv toT? k, nr. X. 
' my decision is,' «&c, iii. 13, KpLvavTo<s 
iKsivov diroXvELu. XX. 16. 1 Cor. ii. 2. 
V. 3. Tit. iii. 12 ; by tov with infin. Acts 
xxvii. 1, 6t)9 0£ iKoidri tov diroTrXELU 
r]fJid<s K. T. X. 3 Mace. i. 6. Jos. Ant. vii. 
1, 5. Xen. An. iii. 1, 7. By acc. & infin. 
Acts xxi. 25, KpLvavTE<s fxi]dkv tolovtov 
tyipeTv a\jTov<s, and Class. ; with infin. 
eTvul impl. Acts xiii. 46, kuI ovk d^lov^ 
KpivETE EavTov^ Trj's at. ^o)/;?, ' ye deem 
yourselves unworthy of eternal life.' xvi. 
15. xxvi. 8, and Class. Rom. xiv. 5, bis, 
OS /iiEV KpivEL vpipav [eIvul] Trap' r]p.E- 
pav, OS dk KpLusL iracrav np-ipau, ' one man 



deemeth one day to be above another; 
another judgeth every day' i. e. to be alike, 
as we must supply from the force of - the 
antith. Comp. Diod. Sic. xii. 13, rr/i/ 
ypa/uLfiaTLK})if Trapd Tas aWas fxadncri-i^ 
TrpoEKpLVEV 6 U0/UL06 ETt]^. Foll. by acc. 
of thing, to determine on, and by impl. to 
decree. Rev. xvi. 5, otl tuvtu EKpLva<s. 
Acts xvi. 4, TO. coy/uLaTa to. KEKpifxiva. 
Pol. iii. 6, 7. Foil, by acc. toDto as in- 
troducing the infin. with art. to, Rom. 

xiv. 13, dXXd TOVTO KpiVUTE jULuXXoi/, 

TO /ULT] Tidiuai, &c. 1 Cor. vii. 37, toGto 

KEKpiKEV, TOV TIJOeTv K. T. X. So, TOVTO 

OTL, 2 Cor. ii. 1. v. 14. — II. to judge, i. e. 
to form and eocpress a judgment or opinion, 
favourable or unfavourable, but gener. 
the latter, as to any person or thing ; foll. 
by acc. of pers. John \iii. 15, kyio ov 
Kpivui ovoEva. Rom. ii. 1, 3. iii. 7, al. ; of 
thing, 1 Cor. x. 15. Xen. Vect. v. 11; 
absol. Matt. vii. 1, 2. Lu. vi. 37, et al. ; 
foll. by interrog. Avith el, Acts iv. 19; 
gener. 1 Cor. xi. 13. So, with an adjunct 
of manner, e. gr. kp'lvelv Kpia-iv, John vii. 
24. TO OLKaLov, Lu. xii. 57. 6p6cl)§, vii. 43. 
KaT oxlfLv, John vii. 24. KaTo. t)]v crdpKa, 
viii. 15. By impl. to condemn, foil, by acc. 
Rom. ii. 27, KpivEl o-e. xiv. 22. Ja. iv. 11, 
12. Sept. Job X. 2. — III. to judge, in a 
judicial sense, viz. 1) to sit in judgment 
on any person, to try him, John xviii. 31^ 

KaTa TOV VOjULOU VpLUiV KpivuTE avTov. 

Acts xxiii. 3. xxiv. 6. 1 Cor. v. 12, and 
Class. Pass. KpivofxaL, to he judged, he 
tried, he on trial. Acts xxv. 10, ov /ule ^e'C 
KpLVEcrdaL. Rom. iii. 4. Sept. Ps. li. 6 ; 
foil, by TTEpL TLuo<5, for any thing. Acts 
xxiii. '6. xxiv. 21. ettl tlul, for, xxvi. 6. 
ETTL Tiyos, hefore any one, xxv. 9, 20, and 
so Class. Said in reference to the Gospel 
dispensation, to the judgment of the great 
day, e. g'^. of God as judging the world 
, through Christ, John v. 22. viii. 50. Acts 
' xvii. 31, KpLVELv Ti]v oiKoviJ.EVY]v. Rom, 
iii. 6, TTcos KpLVEL 6 Qeo's TOV KocTpov ; ii. 
I 16, Ta KpvTTTa, et al. Of Jesus, as the 
Messiah and Judge, John v. 30. xvi. 11. 
2 Tim. iv. 1, 'I. Xp. toD pleXXovto^ kp'l- 
velv X^MVTa^ Kal vEKpou<s. 1 Pet. iv. 5, 
Rev. xix. 11. Fig. of the apostles. Matt, 
xix. 28. Lu. xxii. 30. 1 Cor. vi. 2, 3. iv 
vpTv KpivETUL 6 Koa-fjLO^, 1 Cor. vi, 2, and 
' so in Class. 2) in the sense of to pass 
■judgment upon, condemn, with acc. John 

vii. 51, fXI] 6 VOfXO^ VpWV KpLVEL TOV Uvdp. 

Lu. xix. 22. Acts xiii. 27, and Class. As 
implying also punishment, 1 Cor. xi. 31, 
32. i Pet. iv, 6. So of the condemnation 
of the wicked, and including the idea of 
punishment as a certain consequence, — to 
punish, to take vengeance on, e. gr. of God 
as judge. Acts vii. 7, Ka\ to e6vo<s — KpLvw 
j kyoo. Rom. ii. 12. Heb. xiii. 4, et al. Of 
Jesus, John iii. 17, ov — 'iva Kpivt} tov 



KPI 



231 



K PY 



KofffJLov^ et al. 3) Once, from the Hcb., 
= to vhidicale^ avevgc, Ileb. x. 30, Ku- 
ptos KpiuEL Tov Xaov aiiTov^ the Lord 
will avenge his people^ i. e. by punishing 
their enemies, and so Sept, in Gen. xxx. 
b\ et al. — IV. mid. KpLuo/naL^ prop, to 
let 07ieself he judged^ i. e. to have a laicsuit^ 
to go to laiL\ foil, by dat. with any one, 
Matt. V. 40; foil, by /xtTa tii/os, icith^ 

1 Cor. vi. 6 ; by kiri tlvo^^ be/ore any one, 
vi. 1, 6. Sept. and Class. 

Kp/o-is, €ct)S, 17, {kp'lvu),) prop, sepa- 
ratioji^ and fig. discrimination^ espec. as 
shown in judgment or decision, and choice. 
In N. a . judgment^ i. e. I. gener. opinion 
formed and expressed, John vii. 24, Ttjt/ 
diKaiav KpicrLv KpivaTE. viii. 16. Jos. c. 
Ap. i. 24, OL vyLaiuovTB^ Trj Kpia-EL. 
Pol. xvii. 14, 10. Xen. Mem. iii. 5, 10.— 
II. judgment in a judicial sense, i. e. 1) 
the act of judging^ in reference to the final 
judgment, e. gr. rjpiipa KpL<T£(jo9, day of 
judgment^ Matt. x. 15. xi. 22. h copa T775 
Acpi'crgcos, Rev. xiv. 7. Kpiai'S iJLeyd\r]<s vp-^- 
/oas, Jude 6, and simply Kpiat^ for Kpia-L^ 
fx^y. rip.. Matt. xii. 41, 42, et al. So 
Johnxii. 31, vuv Kp.ka-TL tou Kocrpov tov- 
Tou, ' now is this world judged.' John v. 27. 
Jude 15, KpicTLV TTOLsli/ — KpivELv i mctou. 
for the power of judgment, John v. 22. 
Sept. and Class. 2) the judgment given, 
or sentence pronounced, gener. John v. 30. 

2 Pet. ii. 11, l3\d(T<pr}pov Kpicnv. Jude 9, 
Kpiai^ (3Xaa<p-tip.La9.i and Class. Spec. 
sentence of punishment, condemnation., Acts 
viii. 33. Sept. and Class. ; usually imply- 
ing also punishment., as a certain conse- 
quence, e. gr. from God, ^LKaiai ai Kpi- 
<TEL9 (Tov., Rev. xvi. 7. xix. 2. Sept. 
Jer. i. 16. Of Christ, as Judge of the 
world, condemning the wicked, judgment., 
condemnation^ e, gr. Matt, xxiii. 33, 77 icpi- 
<ris yEEvvr]^. Mk. iii. 29. John v. 29, 
dvd(rn-a(TL9 KpiasM^. 3) meton. court of 
justice, tribuncd., said of the smaller tri- 
bunals established in the cities of Pa- 
lestine, subordinate to the Sanhedrim, 
Matt. V. 21, 22, 'ivo)(o<s ea-TaL n-y Kp. 
— III. from the Heb. right, justice, equity. 
Matt, xxiii. 23. Lu. xi. 42, irapipxEcyhs 
Ti]v KpicTLv. Sept. Gen. xviii. 25. Dent, 
xxxii. 4. Jer. xxii. 15. Also for laiv, 
statutes, i. e. the divine law, as developed 
in the Gospel, Matt. xii. 18, 20'. 

KpLTVpLOV, OV, TO, {KpLTrj<S,) \W0\). 

any instrument by which one judges of 
any thing, as a square, plummet, or touch- 
stone ; also fig. the organ or faculty of 
judgment, (comp. aio-0jjx77p/oj/, the organ 
of sensation, the sensorium,) also, a cri- 
terion or rule of judging, Arr. Epict. i. 11, 
9, sq. ; judgment-seat, tribunal, Sept. /caO- 
vpeuoL Ittl KpLTrjpLOv, Judg. V. 10. In 
N. T. fig. court of justice, tribunal, Ja. ii. 



6, eXKovaw vpd^ £is KpLTvpia. 1 Cor. vi. 
2, 4, where, however, it may mean causes, 
Susann. 49. Pol. ix. 33, 12. xvi. 27, 2. 
Sibyll. Or. i. 

Kf)tTTj5, 00, 6, {Koira),) a judge, i. e, 
' one who decides,' or gives an opinion in 
respect to any person or thing. 1) gener. 
Ja. ii.4, KpLTal dLaXoyLo-pvoi/ Trov.judgers, 
(see in AiaXoytd/xos 1 ) Matt. xii. 27 ; in 
an unfavourable sense, Ja. iv. 11. Sept. 
1 Sam. xxiv. 16. AVisd. xv. 7. Pol. ix. 33, 
12. Xen. Conv. v. 1,9, 10. 2) spec, in a 
judicial sense, one who sits to dispense 
justice. Matt. v. 25, & oft. Of Christ the 
final Judge, Acts x. 42, et al. ; of God, 
KpiTrj O&io TrdvTcov, Heb. xii. 23. Sept. 
and Class.' 3) from the Heb. a leader., 
ruler, chief; said of the Hebrew judges 
from Joshua to Samuel, Acts xiii. 20. 

KyoiTt/cos, r\, 6v, adj. («:p^'r^)s,) skilled 
in judging, quick to discern and judge of 
any thing, with gen. Heb. iv. 12, /cptTi/cos 
ivBvpvaracou, i. e. OLaKpivoou \oyL(Tpov9. 

Kpovw, f. aco, to knock at a door for 
entrance, with TrjV Qvpav, Lu. xiii. 25. 
Acts xii. 13. absol. Lu. xi. 9, et al. Sept. 
Judith xiv. 14, k. Tr^u dvpav. Xen. Conv. 
i. 11. The m.ore Attic phrase was kott- 
TELv T?/V ^vpav. 

KpuTTTt], 7], (prop. fern, of Kpvir- 
Tos,) a crypt or vault, or rather a dark 
hole or corner, in which things are stowed 
away, Lu. xi. 33, aU KpuirTi^v TW^iaiv in 
some edd. In text. rec. £t§ Kpv7rTi]v, as 
if by Hebraism for neut. tis KpviTTou. 

KpuTTTOs, 7), 6v, adj. (/cpuTTTa),) prop. 
hidden, concealed, as Horn. II. xiv. 168, 
kXt^lSl KpvTn-fj, i. e. as Eustatli. explains, 
KpuTTTopEut] Tols E^codeu, namely unseen, 
as opposed to <pavEp6<s. So Hdian. v. 6, 

7, K. Kai dopaTov. Xen, Mag. Eq. § 12, 
K. (pvXaKu^. Hence also, secret, as Matt, 

X. 26, OVciv ECTTL KpVlTTOV, O OV yvUi~ 

crdvaraTaL. eutco Kpv7rTw,in sec?'e^,' where 
we cannot be seen of others,' Matt. vi. 4, 
6. EV KpvTrTo}, in secret, 'privately,' John 
vii, 4, 10. 1 Cor. iv. 5, Ta KpvirTd tov 
g-k6tov<5, the secret works of darkness. 
Sept, Jer. xlix. 9, Lucian iii. 673, k. nro- 
vo<s. Fig. Ta KpvTTTd TLvo's, thc sccrcts of 
one's heart, secret thoughts, Rom. ii. 16. 
Ecclus. i, 30, iv. 18, 1 Cor, xiv. 25. 
1 Pet. iii. 4, 6 Kpvir'r6<3 tt/s Kapdias dv- 
dpcoTTo?, i. e. ' the internal man,' the mind 
and heaH. Rom, ii. 29, o kv tw KpvwTM 
(scil, TT/s Kapdia's) 'lovdalo^, *■ a Jew at 
heart.' 

JLpvTTTU), f. xl/co, to hide, conceal, pass, 
or mid,, aor. 2. pass. Matt, v. 14, Lu, xix. 
42, and with mid, signification, to hide 
oneself Matt, v, 14. xiii. 35. John viii. 59. 
xii. 36. 1 Tim. V. 25. Heb. xi. 23. In 
Rev. ii. 17, the spiritual manna is called 



KP Y 



232 



KT I 



KEKpvfi^hov, as being laid up in heaven 
for the righteous. 2 Tim. iv. 8. Ps. xxxi. 
19, ' great is thy goodness,' r]s EKpu^^a^ 
T0L9 <pol3. <TE. And so the Latin recojido 
means both to hide and to store up^ as 
Horat. viniun reconditum. Foil, by 'iu 
Ttj/t, Matt. xiii. 44, ^r\<Tavp<Z K^Kpu/m- 
fxeuo) kv Tfo ayp(Z. Fig. Col. iii. 3, h X^cot] 

VjJiOOV KEKpV7rT(XL (TVU TtO XpiCTTW EU TCO 

Beu), where the sense is, your felicity 
(salvation) is laid up, is wholly at the dis- 
posal of God, in or through Christ.' Comp. 

2 Cor. V. 19, 0£OS TfU iu XptO-TO) KOar/JLOV 

KaTaWda-crwu kavTco, Comp. Heb. vii. 
2o ; foil, by airo tlvo^^ to hide from^ John 
xii. 36, 'Itjcrous aTTsA-Oooi/ EKpv(3ti air' 
avTthv. hid himself from them. Lu. xviii. 
34. xix. 42. Rev. vi. 16, and so Horn. 
Od. xxiii. 110, and oft. in Sept. with the 
aiTo Tivo<s underst. John viii. 59, 'l)/(rou5 
0£ iKpvjSri^ Kui t^rjXdtv Ik tov l&pov^ 

i. e. Jesus hid himself and [afterwards] 
ice?it out of the temple ; and so oft., espec. 
in this tense, in Sept., and KpuTTTeadaL in 
Xen. Cyr. iv. 5, 5. Perf. part. KEKpufx- 
juLtuo^^ hidden, as adv. secretly, John xix. 
38. Sept. 

Kp ucTTaXX i^o), f. Lcrco, {Kpva-ToX- 
Xo?,) to be as crystal, pellucid. Rev. xxi. 

KputTTaXXos, oi;, o, {^Kpvo<5 &c Kpv- 
(TTaLuui, to freeze,) crystal, prop. ' any 
thing congealed' and pellucid, e. gr. ice, 
Horn. II. xxii. 152. Thuc. iii. 23. Hdot. 

ii. 22. In N. T. rock-crystal, a sort of 
precious stone, on which see Pliny, Rev. 
iv. 6. xxii. 1. Diod. Sic. ii, 52, init. 

\s.pv(pT], adv. {KpvTTTix),) secretly, not 
openly, Eph. v. 12. Sept. and Class. 

K-rao/xai, f. KTi^croixaL, depon. mid. 
to get for oneself acquire., procure, by 
purchase or otherwise, perf. KiicTrjiuuL as 
pres. to possess ; with acc. Matt, x, 9. Lu. 
xviii. 12, TrdvTa baa KTuy/maL. In 1 Th. 
iv. 4, TO lavTou (TKtvos KTaa-dai, the 
sense, however disputed, is simply ' to 
have in possession, hold, use, his body,' 
for the purpose of sanctification. Nor is 
this sense harsh ; since possession implies 
use. And, indeed, there is an allusion to 
the body as a precious utensil, to be used, 
not abused, 1 Cor. vii. 31. With an ad- 
junct of price in gen. Acts xxii. 28 ; Slo. 
and gen. viii. 20; kic and gen. i. 18, oSto5 
eKTticraTO yjapiov sk tov /uLLcrdod k.t.X. 
i. e. ' was the occasion of its being pur- 
chased ;' foil, by kv with dat. fig. Lu. xxi. 
19, ku Trj vTrojUiovy vfxcov /CTjjcraorGfi tccs 
xj/vxd'S vp.wv, 'through your patience pur- 
chase your lives,' procure your safety ; 
comp. Matt. x. 22, & xxiv. 13. Sept. and 
Class. 

Kt7;^«, aros, to, (/cfc/CTTj^aai,) prop. 
a possession, property, any thing acquired 



and possessed but espec. an estate ; and, 
in pi nr., the bona immobilia, lands and 
houses, as distinguished from the bona 
MOBiLiA, furniture and other personal 
property, virap^tL^, Matt. xix. 22, and 
Mk. X. 22, tiv yap ex(jov KTnfxaTa iroWd. 
Acts ii. 45, TO. KTrifxaTa kol to:? virdp- 
f £t§. Acts V. 1, KTriixa, with which comp. 
X(JopLov at ver. 3. Sept. and Class. 

Kt7]V09, £09 OUS, TO, (cOUtr. fr. /CT£- 

avo<s, and that from /cTao/xai,) prop. — 
KTtjiua, a possession, a property ; but only 
in plur. So jEschyl. Ag. 127, & Gen. 
xxvi. 14. It is, however, espec. used of 
flocks and herds of every kind, in Homer, 
Hdot. and Xen. In N. T. and the prose 
writers gener., of objects of purchase or 
possession, e. gr. a beast, domestic animal, 
1 Cor. XV, 39, as opposed to men ; and 
that whether for riding or burden, &c. 
Lu. X. 34. Acts xxiii. 24. Sept. and Class. 

KT77'T<tif), oyoos, 6, [KTaojULaL,) pos- 
sessor, oivner. Acts iv. 34, kttjtopes )^a)- 
piociv, 'owners of farms,' i. e. landed pro- 
perty. A rare word, but occurring in 
Diod. Sic. X. p. 102, ol TrXeLorroi twi/ 
KTi]T6pu}v. Angl. landlords. 

Kti^w, f. Lcro), fr. KTLOi, of whicli the 
pnmary sense was domo, whence kti\o<s^ 
tame, as said of persons, and tamed, as said 
of ground reduced from wildness to culti- 
vation ; see Virg. .^n. ix. 608. Hence 
came to mean, to bring land into 
cidtivation, to plant or settle a country, to 
found a city : whence, to found, in the 
sense to origi7iate, give birth to, condo : 
and as condo in Latin meant prim, to put 
together, arrange what is out of order, so 
ktlX^co came to mean to create, as said of 
the universe reduced from chaos to a state 
such as to entitle it to be designated kg<t- 
/xo§, arraiigement. Such, at least, was 
the idea entertained of the work of creation 
by the heathen philosophers ; who, it 
would seem, originated the term /cTt^co as 
well as K6crixo<5, whence it was borrowed 
by the writers of the Sept. and Apocr., 
and from them adopted by the N. T. 
writers ; though they used it in the Christ- 
ian acceptation, ''to produce out of nothing, 
to bring into being out of non-entity.' So 
Mk. xiii. 19, ?|s eKTiasu 6 0£o'§. Rom. i. 
25. 1 Cor, xi. 9. Eph. iii. 9., et al. Fig. 
of a moral creation, by regeneration or 
spiritual renovation. Tit. iii. 5. Eph. ii. 10, 
/CTi<T0£fT€5 kv X. 'I. £7rt 'ipyoL<5 dyadoX^, 
and iv. 24, KTia-QivTa kv SLKaioarvvr] Kal 
6(xl6ti]ti. So Sept. Ps. li. 10, KapSiav 
Kadapdv KTLcrov kv kixoi. Thus spiritual 
renovation and regeneration are conver- 
tible terms. 

Ktio-is, £0)9, 77, (/cTt^o),) in Class, a 
founding of cities, or constructing any 
thing. In N. T. creation, i. e. I. tlie act 



KTI 



233 



KYP 



of creating^ Rom, i, 20, airo k'tiVews 
Koafjiov. Psalt. Saloni. viii. 7. — II. gener. 
for /cTicr^a, created thiug^ wliatever exists 
in rerum natiira, ami collect, created things^ 
Rom. i. "25, kXan-p^vcrav Trj Kn-Lcru irapa 
Tov KTLoravTu. viii. 39. Wisd. ii. 6. Ecclus, 
xlix. 16. Collect. 1) creation m general^ 
tlte universe^ world, e. gr. dir' ctpX'l'^ 
o-ews, Mk. X. 6. xiii. 19. 2 Pet. iii. 4. Col. 
i. 15, irpcoTOTOKO'S 7rd(r?j5 ktlg-eco?. Rev, 
iii. 14. Wisd. v. 17. xvi. 24, Used spec. 
of the visihle creation, Heb. ix. 11, ov 
TavTy]<s T?}? /v'TiVfco?, ""not of this cre- 
ation,' but of heavenly fabric, (see viii. 2,) 
namely, the visible creation of this world, 
composed of ' the things which are seen,' 
as opp. to the next., ' the things which are 
not seen.' Judith ix. 12. xvi. 14. 2) by 
meton. for num., mankind., all intelligent 
creatures, Mk. xvi. 15, /c?;pu^aT£ to 
ivayy. Tracrt] Trj ktlctel. Col, i. 23. 
Heb. iv. 13.' So Rom. viii. 19 — 22, 
creation for human creatures., all mankind. 
2 Cor. V, 17, and Gal. vi. 15, kului) /cTio-t§, 
a new creature in a moral sense, equiv. to 
Kaivo'i ai/dpcoTTO? in Eph. iv. 24. — III. by 
impl. ordifiance., institution., by a use formed 
on that of c?'eo, to appoint., 1 Pet. ii. 13, 
v-TTOTaytjTe ovu Trda-rj dvBpcoTrivri KTLor&L. 

KTio-^xa, aros, to, (/cti^co,) any 
created thijig., a creature., 1 Tim. iv. 4, 
Rev. V. 13. viii. 9. Wisd. ix. 2. xiii. 5. 
Metaph. Ja. i, 18, aTrapyji tl<s twv uvtov 
/CTicr^iaTooi/, equiv. to Kaivy) ktlctl^., see 
KTiVts, ii. 2, 

KTto-T)j9, ou, 6, (/cTi^o),) in Class. 
a founder of a city, or the framer or in- 
ventor of any thing. In N. T. the Creator., 
spoken of God, 1 Pet. iv. 19. Ecclus. 
xxiv, 8. 2 Mace. i. 24. 

Ku/Seia, as, 77, (/ctl/3o§, cube, die,) 
prop, and in Class, a playing at dice ; in 
N. T. fig, gaming., gambling^ with allusion 
to its deceptiveness and trickery or leger- 
demain, Eph. iv, 14, h T?] KvfSsLa Ttov av 
6ptt)7ra)i», ' by the trickery of men and so 
KuftsuELv in Arr. Epict. ii, 19, 28. 

KujSepi/jjorts, £0)9, 77, [KvlBepvau),) 
prop, in Class, & Sept, a governing., direc- 
tion ; in N, T. 1 Cor, xii, 28, put abstr, for 
concr, for governor., director., i, e, in the 
primitive churches. See my note. 

Ku/3£pi//7T?79, ou, O, {KV^Epvdu}., Lat. 

gnJierno., to steer a ship,) a steersman.,- 
pilot., so called by the ancients because he 
had the sole direction of the ship. Acts 
xxvii, 11, where see my note, Rev. xviii. 
17. Sept. and Class. 

Ki;/c\o0£i;, adv. (/cu/cXos,) from 
around., round about., Rev, iv, 3, 8. v, 11, 
Sept. and lat. Class. 

K u/cXos, ou, o, a circle., in N, T. only 
in dat. kvkKi^ as adv. around., M.k. iii. 34, 



■7rspL(3\E\l/a.iJ.euo9 kukXcu. vi. 6, 36. Ln, 

ix, 12, Rom. XV. 19. Sept, and Class. 
Foil, by gen. Rev. iv, 6, kukXco tov ^p6- 
vov. v, 11. vii. 11. Sept, and Class. 

Ku/fXo'ti), f. (oarw., (/cu/c\o§,) to encircle., 
to surround., trans. John x. 24. Acts xiv, 
20, and Class. Of besiegers, Lu. xxi, 20, 
KVK\ovfXivi]V VTTO GTo aTOTriduov Trjv 'Ie- 
pnva-. Heb, xi, 30. Rev. xx. 9, Sept. and 
Class. 

KuM'to, f. I'crto, (another, and indeed 
the primitive, form for kvXluSco,) to roll, 
to move any heavy body., by volutation, as 
a stone, or log of wood, trans. In N.T. mid, 
to roll oneself., intrans. Mk. ix, 20, i/cu- 
\i'?To dcppit,oou., ' rolled himself about,' 
and foamed, even from agony. So in 
Thuc. ii. 52, 3, eif Tats o^ots ekuXlv- 
dovvTo i]p.Ldvf]Te<s. 

KuXtcr/xa, aT09, to, [kvXlco,) prop, 
' something rolled.,' as a wheel, Symm. Ez. 

x. 13, In N. T, tcalloicing-place, — kv- 
\iVTpa, which occ. in Xen. Eq. v, 3. 
2 Pet. ii. 22, U9 — £t9 KvXLa/uLa (Sop^opov, 
A proverbial expression, also alluded to in 
Arr. Epict. iv. 11, 29, aTrsXde kul X^'-PV 
diaXiyov lu kv (3op(36p(x) fxf] KvXiriTai,. 
Diod. Sic. t. i. 256, ixi^evjuiova^ kvXlo- 

fxivOVS kv TW TTJ^Xo), 

KuA.Xo9, r\., 6v, adj. (kindr. with koZ- 
Xcs., & /co'Xos,) prop, bent., crooked., e, gr. of 
the hand as held out in begging, Aristoph. 
Eq, 1083. Also of the limbs, dya7rr]po9, 
(so Hesych, explains it, Kd/u7rvXo<s, club- 
foot,) and hence gener. and in N. T. 
crippled, lame, espec. in the hands, Matt. 
XV, 30, (where see mv note,) 31. xviii. 8. 
Mk. ix. 43. Anthol. Gr, iii. p. 31. Ari- 
stoph. Av. 1379. Hippocr. ssepe. 

Kuyua, aT09, to, (/cuco,) a ivave,bil- 
loic. Matt. viii. 24. Mk. iv. 37, al. Sept. 

and Class. 

Kv fnfiaXov, ov, TO, (/cy/x^09, bason,) 
a cymbal, 1 Cor. xiii. 1. Sept. and Class. 

KvfxTuov, ov, TO, cumin, the cuminum 
sativum of modern botany, an umbelli- 
ferous plant, with aromatic seeds of a 
warm and bitterish taste, very similar to 
caraway-seeds, and used by the ancients as 
a condiment, Matt, xxiii. 23. Sept. and 
lat. Class. 

YivvdpLOv, ov, TO, (dimin.of kvihv,) a 
little dog, a term of contempt, as our cur 
for curtal, (see Johns. Diet.) Matt. xv. 
26, 27. Mk, vii. 27, 28, and Class, 

KuTTToj, f. i|/6o, to stoop, bend oneself 
dozen, intrans. Mk. i. 7; absol. as Hom. 
II. iv. 468, and oft. in Sept. John viii. 6, 8 ; 
foil, bv /cdTco, as in Aristoph. Vesp. 279. 
Theophr. Eth. Ch, 24. 

Kvpia, a9, 77, (fern, of /cup f 09,) prop. 



KYP 



234 



KYP 



the mistress of a familj^ as in Sept., but 
often used as an honorary title of address 
to a female, as lady in English, 2 John 1, 
ekXekt}} Kvpia, and 5, ipcoTu) cte, Kvpia. 
Comp. in Kupto5 I. 3. Epict. Enr.h. 40, 
al yvvaLK^<5 Kvpiai KoXovvTai airo tect- 
crapEcrKaiSEKa etcou : gener. Sept. Gen. 
xvi. 4. 2 K. V. 3. Xen. H. G. iii. 1, 12. 

KuptaK0 5,T?,oi/,adj. (/cupto?,) in Class. 
' pertaining to a master but in N. T. and 
the Fathers, ' relating to the Lord,' i. e. 
the Lord Jesus Christ, as KvpiaKov Beltt- 
vov, the Lord's supper^ 1 Cor. xi. 20. 77 
Kvp. TjiuLEpa, ' the Lord's day,' Rev. i. 10. 

Kuptsuo), f. gucro), (/cuptos,) in Class. 
to be lord over any person^ or master of 
any thing, as its proprietor, to have domi- 
nion over, foil, by gen. In N. T. used 
1) prop, of persons, Lu. xxii. 25, o\ (Saa-L- 
Xets Toov eQvujv Kvpuvovaiv avToov. 
Rom. xiv. 9. 2 Cor. i. 24. Part, o kv- 
pievcov^ a potentate^ 1 Tim. vi. 15, Kvpio^ 
Toiv KvpiEvovTiov^ Lord of lords. 2) fig, 
of things, to have poiver over, Rom. vi. 9, 
14, djuapTLa yap v/ulcov ov kvplevctel. vii. 
1, 6 vo/uLo^ KvpiEVEL Tou avdpwTTOv. And 
so Law is said to be KupLcs irdvTiav, and 
iravTiav (3a(rL\EV9. Of this figurative use 
of KvpLEVELV uo example has been adduced : 
nor have I been able to find any except 
the following, Ecclus. xxxvii. 18, TEorarapa 
fiipy] ai/aTS-WEL, dyaddv kui kukov, X^u>ri 
Kai ^dvuTO?' Kal (and yet) KvpiEvovcra 
lvdE\EX(j^^ avTwv yXuxrcrd icmv, 'holds 
the mastery over them, by awardmg one 
or the other.' Now there dvaTtWEi has 
the sense arises, i. e. occurs, ylvEn-ai, as 
eocorior in Terent. Hec. iv. 4, 11, 'A Myr- 
rhena hsec sunt mea uxore exorta, omnia.' 
And such is the real meaning (though 
with an elegant allusion, as at Lu. i. 78, to 
the dawning of day) in Ps. xcvii. 11, Sept. 
0a)S dvETi-iKE Tu) SiKaiu), ' light (i. e. 
joy, as in Esth. viii. 17) arises, is produced 
to the righteous.' 

K up to 5, ou, 6, (kGpos, power, autho- 
rity,) prim, an adj., signifying, as used of 
persons, hoxing power or authority' {kv- 
/oo? EX(Jov) to do, or not to do, any action ; 
foil, by gen. of thing, or infin. with or 
without the article. Of things (as laws, 
ordinances, awards, &c.) having force, 
valid, &c. And so it is often used in the 
earlier waiters ; but espec. in the later 
ones, as a suhst. And so it is invariably 
used in N. T. where it has two accepta- 
tions, I. as said of private persons invested 
with authority, as having property in any 
thing or person; 1) in the sense oiimer, 
proprietor, whether of things, as Matt. xx. 
8, o KvpLO^ Tov diuLTTsXcovo^, aud xxi. 40. 
Gal. iv.'l. (with which compare Xen. Eph. 
p. 68, 13, 6 KvpLO<s Tou Toirov, the land- 
lord,) Sept. Exod. xxi. 28, et sqq. 6 ku- 



pLO£ TOV Tavpov, (as we say, a horse's 
master,) Xen. Cyr. iii. 3, 44. Pol. iii. 98, 
10; or persons, as slaves or servants. Matt. 
X. 24. xxiv. 45, sqq., any one's lord or 
master, Sept. and Class. Also, as holding 
authority over any persons, whether as 
master of a family, Mk. xiii. 35, 6 k. ttJs 
OLKLa's, or husband, 1 Pet. iii. 6, where 
Sarah is described as Kvpiov avn-ov Ka- 
Xovaa, with reference to Gen. xviii. 12, 
6 6e Kvpio^ fxov 7rp£cr/3. A use of the 
word very rare in the Class., but found in 
Aristoph. Eq. 969, 'EfxiKidri Kai 6 KvpLo^^ 
i. e. ' S. and her husband.' Plut. vi. 32, 13. 
And so dominus is used in Latin, as Virg. 
^n. iv. 213. Fig. Matt. xii. 8. Mk. ii. 
28, K. TOV ara^^aTov, ' master over it,' by 
having authority as to its observance or 
non-observance. And so Matt. ix. 38, 6 
KupL09 TOV ^EpLo-jULOv. 2) of a supremc 
lord, sovereign, e. gr. the Roman emperor. 
Acts XXV. 26. Philo Leg. ad Cai. ii, p. 
587,^42. Arr. Epict. iv. 1, 12. Plut. vi. 
p. 673, 13. Of the heathen gods, 1 Cor. 
viii. 5, IvcrTtEp eIctl ^eol ttoXXol Kal kv- 
pLOL TToXXoi, meaning prob. gods superior 
and inferior. Pind. Isth. v. 67, Zsus 6 
irdvTUDv KvpLo<s. 3) as an honorary title 
of address, especially to superiors, as in 
Engl. Sir, Fr. Sieur or Monsieur, Germ. 
Herr, e. gr. from a servant to his master. 
Matt. xiii. 27. Lu. xiii. 8 ; a son to his 
father. Matt. xxi. 30 ; to a teacher, master. 
Matt. viii. 25. Lu. ix. 54 ; to a person of 
dignity or authority, Mk. vii. 28. John iv. 
11 ; to the Roman procurator, Matt, xxvii. 
63 ; also in the respectful intercourse of 
common life, John xii. 21. xx. 15. Acts 
xvi. 30. Sept. and lat. Class. — II. said of 
God and Christ, i. of God as the Su- 
preme Lord and Sovereign of the universe; 
with the art. 6 Kupios, Matt. i. 22. v. 33. 
Mk. V. 19. Lu. i. 6, al. saepe; without the 
art. Mk. xiii. 20. Lu. i. 58, al. saepe, & Sept. 
oft. with and sometimes without the art. 
With adjuncts, without the art. e. gr. Ku- 
/Oios o 9£09 crov. Matt. iv. 7. xxii. 37. 
Lu. i. 16, al. K. ca^a<hQ, Rom. ix. 29. 
Ja. V. 4. Sept. 1 Sam. xv. 2. Is. i. 9. K. 
TravTOKpdTuop, 2 Cor. vi. 18, and K. 6 
0£os b iravTOKpdToop, Rev. iv. 8. xi. 17, 
al. Sept. 2 Sam. vii. 8. Nah. ii. 14. K. 
Twv KvpLEvovTcov, Lord oflovds, 1 Tim. 
vi. 15. K. ovpavov Kai yrj's. Acts x vii. 24; 
and so, applied also to God as the Father 
of our Lord Jesus Christ, Matt. xi. 25, 

YldTEp, Kupt£ TOV ovpavov K. T. X. Lu. 

X. 21. Comp. Sept. Kvpics 6 Geo? tov 
ovpavov, 2 Chr. xxxvi. 23. — li. of tJie 
Lord Jesus Christ, 1) in reference to his 
abode on earth as a master and teacher^ 
where it is equiv. to pa(3[3i, and gTrtcn-d- 
Tr]5, comp. Matt. xvii. 4 with Mk. ix, 5, 
and Lu. ix. 33; comp. also John xiii. 13, 
14. So chiefly in the evangelists before 



KYP 



235 



KQ,A 



the resiirrcrtion of Cliiist, and with the 
art. 6 Kvpiwi, the Lord emphat. Matt. 

xxi. 3, o K. auTtvu )(^ptLai/ £X£t. Lu. vii. 

13. John iv. 1, & oft. With adjuncts, e. gr. 
6 Kyptos Kal 6 SLtidaKaXos^ Jolin xiii. 13, 

14. 6 KvpLu^ 'I);croLis, Lii. xxi v. 3. Acts 
i. 21. iv. b3, al. 2) as the supreme Lord 
of the gospel dispensation. Head over all 
things to the cliiavh, Eph. i. 22, Lord of 
all, 6 yap auTos K. TrafT-toi/, Rom. x. 12, 
comp. ix. 5. 1 Cor. xv. 25, sq. Heb. ii. 8. 
viii. 1. Eev. xvii. 14. With the art. o 
K. Mk. xvi. 19. Acts viii. 25, & oft. So, 
with gen. of pers., 6 K. /xou, &c. Matt. 

xxii. 44. Eph. vi. 9. Heb. vii. 14. Rev. xi. 
8 ; without the art. Lu. i. 76. 2 Cor. iii. 
17, al. With adjuncts, e. gr. with art. 6 
Kuptos 'Ijjctoos, or '1i]go'v<s 6 K. Rom. 
iv. 24. 1 Cor. v. 5. xi. 23. 6 K. hutov 
'li]aov<5, Heb. xiii. 20. 6 K. iiiixoov XpL- 
o"Tos, once Rom. xvi, 18. 6 K. 'Itjo-ous 
XpiCTTos, or 'I. Xp. 6 Kvp. Acts xvi. 31. 
Rom. xiii. 14, al. 6 K. rj/uLwv 'I. Xp. 

1 Cor. i. 2, 10. Gal. vi. 18, al. ssepe. 'I. 
Xp. 6 K. i)jULu)v, Eph. iii. 11. 1 Tim.i. 2. 

2 Pet. i. 2. So, without the art., e. gr. 
Kuptos 'It/o-ous, Rom, x. 9. 1 Cor. xii. 3. 
Pliil. ii. 19, al. Xptaros K., i. e. the Mes- 
siah, Lu. ii. 11. Kupto5 'lr)(70u^ XpiCTos, 
or 'I. Xp. Kuptos, Rom. i. 7. 2 Cor. i. 2. 
iv. 5. .Kupio5 iijuLcov 'I. Xp. Gal. i. 3. 
We have yet to consider the frequent 
phrase sometimes difficult of interpreta- 
tion, lu Kup/w, which varies in sense ac- 
cording to tlie force ascribed to the if, 
(1) as denoting proxiiniti/ or co?itact^ and 
joined with tioz/, either expr. or impl. (2) 
as denoting 7neans or manner^ and standing 
alone. In the fir^st case, b kv Kvpicp scil. 
wi/, denotes ' one united to the Lord by 
the mystical union which subsists between 
Christ and his Church,' the union, by 
faith, of Christians with Christ, repre- 
sented in John xv. 2, 4, 7, as that of the 
branches of a vine with the trunk. See 
in 'Ei/, I. III. 1. Accordingly, by 6 Iv 
TLvpico is meant a Christian^ Rom. xvi. 8, 
11, T0U5 ofTtts iv Kupi'w, & 13. Philem. 
16. In the second case, kv will mean 
either through^ hy^ as denoting the means 
by which the action is done, through a 
certain aid or influence, e. gr. 1 Cor. xv. 
38. 2 Cor. ii. 12. Gal. v. 10. Eph. ii. 21. 
Col. iv. 17 ; or, in virtue of an authority, 
Eph. iv. 17. 1 Thess. iv. 1 ; also, after 
verbs of trusting, Phil. ii. 19, or glorying, 
1 Cor. i. 31, also of rejoicing, (where iv 
denotes source or origin, Phil. iii. 1. iv. 4, 
10. 1 Thess. V. 16. Comp. Ps. xxxiii. 1); 
and perhaps of salutation, as Rom. xvi. 22. 
1 Cor. xvi. 19, ao-TTct^. vfxa'i iv Kupi'w, 
where it denotes manner^ q. d. 'a holy and 
Christian salutation,' as in 1 Cor. vii. 39, 
fxovov iv Kupiw. Also, 'in deference to 
the authority, injunction of the Lord,' and 



by impl. 'as becomes those who are in the 
Lord,' Eph. vi. 1. Ph. ii. 29. Col. iii. 18, 
609 avTjKtv kv Kupioj. In some other 
passages kv Kuptto means ' in the work of 
tiie Lord,' i. e. the Gospel, as Rom. xvi. 
12. ICor. iv. 17. ix.2. Eph.vi.21. Phil, 
iv. 1. 

KupioT»)s, Ti)T09, 17, (/cupios,) prob. 
in abstr. lordship^ dojuinion^ as Theodor. 
iv. 1255, KvpLOTt^Ta fxiav^ of the Holy 
and undivided Trinity. In N. T. abstr. 
for concr. lords, princes^ rulers, Eph. i. 21. 
2 Pet. ii. 10. Jude 8. In plur. Col. i. 16, 
joined with ^-poVot, as denoting supreme 
potentates, like the Roman emperor, or 
king of Persia ; while by cip\al kol k^ov- 
criaL are denoted the subordinate ones ; 
such as the Roman proconsuls, ruling over 
provinces. 

Kupoo), f. CO (TO), lit. ' to make strong,' <&: 
fig. ' to give authority' (/cupos) to any act, 
' establish as valid,' confirm^ 1) gener. as 
in Plato, cited by Budseus, where he says 
that astronomy, rhetoric, and other exact 
sciences, confirm fill things by reason ; 
2) spec, of what is confirmed and decreed 
by public authority, as Thuc. iv. 125. viii, 
69, and often in Hdot., ^sch.,and Polyb., 
as also Sept. and Joseph. And so in 
2 Cor. ii. 8, we have Kvpuxrai si? avTov 
ayaTTi]!/, where the full sense is ' to so 
publicly confirm (i. e. by some public and 
solemn act) your love to him, that he may 
be assured of it.' See my note there. 

Kvayv, Kui/o?, o, ^, a dog, 1) prop. 
Luke xvi. 21. 2 Pet. ii. 22. Sept. & Class. 
2) fi,g. a person who resembles the dog in 
disposition, ' an impudent, shameless, 
greedy person,' Phil. iii. 2, where it is 
spoken of Judaizing teachers, comp. Is. 
Ivi. 11. (Horn. II. vi. 344, 356. Od. xxii. 
35.) Matt. vii. 6, /uli) owts to fiyiov toTv 
Acuo-t, lit. give not cojisecrated meat to dogs, 
i. e. gener. ' proffer not good and holy 
things to those who will spurn and pervert 
them.' Also in plur. for catamites, Rev. 
xxii. 15. So Sept. Deut. xxiii. 19. 

KcoXoi/, Of, TO, prop, and in Class, a 
limb, member, whether of the human body, 
(Eurip. Phoeniss. 1192 or 1201. Apollo- 
dor. Bibl. iii. 5,) or of an animal, Diod. 
Sic. iii. 2 ). In N. T. plur. to. KU)\a for 
carcass, corpse, (as in Engl, bones,) Heb. 
iii. 17. So Sept. Lev. xxvi. 30. Num. xiv. 
29, 32. Is. Ixvi. 24. 

K.odXv'co, f. v<j(x), (/coX.05, a stump, 
and kindr. with KoXdX^u), koXovco,) prop. 
' to cut oflf,' and hence gener. to hinder^ 
prevent, restrain, prop, with acc. of pers. 
and gen. of thing. Acts xxvii. 43, sKuyXv- 
arsv UVT0V9 tou ^ovXri^aTo<s. So Sept. 
and Class. Foil, by acc. of pers. and 
infin. Acts viii. 36, rt kooXvsl /x£ ^utt- 



236 



A A0 



TLadrjvaL; xvi. 6. So PLato, Theset. p. 
143, TL KcoXvsL rifJ.a's SiiXOtTv, al. ssepe ; 
with acc. impL Matt. xix. 14. Lu. xxiii. 2. 

1 Tim. iv. 3; with i?2f. \m\)\. Lu. ix. 49, 
et al. ; absol, ix. 50, and Class, in all the 
constr. Foil, by acc. of thing, 1 Cor. xiv. 
39, /cat TO XaXelv yXtocrcrat? lui] kcoXvets. 

2 Pet. ii. 16 ; with tou and inf. Acts x. 
47, and Class. Hdian. iii. 1, 13. Xen. 
Meni. iv. 5, 4, 5. By Hebr. with acc. of 
thing and wtto with gen. of pers. Lu. vi. 
29, diro TOU alpovTO^ crov to IfiaTLOv^ 
Kai ToV X'-'^^^^ M KcoXvarj^. So Sept. 
Gen, xxiii. 6. 

Kto/x??, tjs, i),a village ov count^y-to^vn, 
as opp. to a walled town or city. See 
Thuc. i. 5. iv. 42. 1 ) prop. e. gr. t«s tto- 
X«i9 irdcras Kai -ra? Kwixa^^ Matt. ix. 35. 
Lu. viii. 1. dypoL kcll kHi^xcil^ Mk. vi. 36. 
Kwnai ri ttoXel^ f? dypoi^ Mk. vi. 56. i) 
KMfjL-ii^ al Ku)ixai^ simply, Matt. xxi. 2, & 
oft. Meton. villages for the inliahitants of 
villages, Acts viii. 25. Sept. and Class. 
Mk. viii. 27, ai Kuy/jLui Kato-ao£ias% the 
villages of CcBsarea^ i. e. lying around and 
dependent upon it. 2) apparently of a 
large town or small city, kod/ixottoXl^s, with- 
out walls, or disem battled, e. gr. Beth- 
saida, prob. of Galilee, Mk. viii. 23, 26, 
Ms. Comp. ver. 22, and John i. 45. Sept. 
Josh. X. 37. XV. 9. Hdian. iii. 6, 19, of 
Byzantium. 

K.(J0 IXOTT oX L^, £605, 77, {K(X)fir\^ TToXi?,) 

lit. a village-citi/^ i. e. a large village or 
country-tow^n like a city, but without 
walls, Mk. i. 38. Strabo, Ptolemy, J. 
Malela, Isidore. 

Koi^os, ou, 6, a feasting^ revel^ Lat. 
comissatio^ a carousing after supper, Rom. 
xiii. 13. Gal. v. 21. ] Pet. iv. 3. 2 Mace, 
vi. 6. Eur. Cvcl. 531. Diod. Sic. xvii. 72. 
^1. V. H. xiii. 1. Xen. Cyr. vii. 5, 25. 

Kwi/toi//-, coiro?^ 6, 77, a gnat^ culex, 
found in acid wine and vinegar, Matt, xxiii. 
24. Hdot. and Aristot. 

Kw(/)69, 77, 01/, adj. fr. KeK0(pa^2 perf. 
KOTTTco^ to heat^ pounds and also to chop 
off any limb, Horn. II. xiii. 203, and Od. 
xxii. 477, or hioch q/f the edge or point of 
a weapon, so as to make it blunt. So Horn. 
II. xi. 390, Ku)(pdv (3s.\o?. Thus the word 
signifies prop, bhmted, and fig. (as in our 
words obtuse., dull^ dolt.,) stupid., as in Soph. 
Aj. 911. Pind. Pyth. ix. 151. But tlie 
term was generally applied to persons who 
are deprived of one of the organs of sense, 
by being deaf, dumb, or blind. The last- 
mentioned use is, indeed, rare, but it is 
found in Hippocrates. The other two are 
frequent, but the former is the primary 
sense ; and the same term might well 
serve for both, since those born deaf are 
necessarily dumb ; though the Latin and 
English languages are provided with sepa- 



rate terms for each. And it is remarkable 
that in all the words denoting de{)rivation 
of sense, in Greek and Latin, and Hebrew, 
there is the same common idea of cutting 
off or closing up. So our word dumb comes 
from the A.-S. daman, to stop up, to darn 
up., lit. stunned in the hearing, as the 
German stumm., from stump/] blunt. So 
also our word blind., fr. A.-S. blinnan, to 
stop up., means ' one whose sense of sight 
is blinned' or stopt up, as the Latin mutus 
from Gr. ^uco, to stop up. Thus Strabo 
says, TvcpXo^ iroTafxb^ for a river stopped 
up at its mouth by bogs ; and other writers 
have Tv(p\6<i toTxos for a wall which 
shuts up access. The other terms, indeed, 
might change places, as equally fitted to 
express deprivation of sense. Sophocles 
was aware of this when he made OEdipus 
say to Tiresias, (CEd. Tyr. 371,) TvcpXo^ 

TO. T lOTa TOV T£ VOVV., TO. T O/ULfiaT sl. 

And so Beaumont and Fletcher : ' You 
that have stopt souls, that never knew 
things gentle,' as ^schyl. Ag. 462, (ppE- 
vu)v K&Kou.uivo^. Milton, P. L. vii. 541, 
' senses obtuse.' In N, T. of the senses 
and faculties. 1) blunted as to the tongue 
or speech, i. e. dumb., Matt. ix. 32, 33, 
£\a\7jcr€i; 6 Ktocpo?. xii. 22. xv, 30, 31. 
Lu. i. 22. xi. 14, daifxovLov Kuxpov., comp. 
in "AXaXo^. Sept. and Class. 2) blunted., 
dull., as to hearing, deaf., Matt. xi. 5, Kai 
K(x)(pui aKovova-L. Mk. vii. 32, 37. ix. 25, 
Trvsvfxa Kuxpov. Lu. vii. 22. Sept. and 
Class. 

A. 

Aayx^vuy., (fr. obsol. Xd^^ Xdyw, 
to lay, lay down,) f. Xn^ofxat., aor. 2. 'iXa- 
XOf, prim, and prop, with KXr]pov<s under- 
stood, CO lay down., cast lots., Isocr. Areop. 
8. Diod. Sic. iv. 63, 'iXaxov Kai., &c. ; 
also to cast lots upon any thing, but gener. 
to obtain by lot., foil, either by acc. or by 
gen. of thing. In N. T. both construc- 
tions occur, the 1st in Lu. i. 9, 'iXa^s. tov 
^v/uLido-aL, with allusion to the different 
portions being assigned by lot ; the 2d, in 
Acts i. 17, 'iXa\^E tov KXrjpov Ttj^ oiaK. 
TavTi]<5. In 2 Pet. i. 1, TOts Ictotliulou nfx. 
Xaxovc-L TTio-Tti/, the sense is obtained, 
lit. ^shared with us,' in allusion to the 
blessings of salvation being allotted to 
them, as an inheritance, by the gracious 
benignity of the Saviour. Also in Class, 
from Homer downwards, though the genit. 
is more usual. But eXax^ KXrjpou no 
where occurs in Class., only tXax^ KXrjpa. 
In John xix. 24, Xd)(6t)/x£f wEpl auTov, 
TLuo£ eoTTaL, the primary sense has place. 

Ad 6^ a, adv. (XaOeiv, Xauddvco.,) se- 
cretly, privately. Matt. i. 19. ii. 7, et al. . 
Sept. and Class. 



A A I 



237 



AAA 



Aa?Xa\(A, aTTos, 17, (fr. very, and 
XaTTTO), Dor. for X^tttu)^ cogn. with Xdco 
and Xa/^oj,) take o^], carry aivay^ (as iij 
\ai-i//^T;f)09, XuL-ar'TroSia^^ of the same 
form as y^^fpi/Lxj/, oI/coT/oti//, &:c.) 

a wliirhvind or hurricane^ which carries 
away all before it, Mk. iv. 37. Lu. viii. 23, 
X. avtixov. 2 Pet. ii. 17, utto XatXaTro^ 
iXavifOfiEi/ai. So Aristid. has ^dXaTTu 
kXavvtTo XaiXuTTL dypia. The word 
is oft. found in the Sept. and Class, espec. 
Homer, but no where the expression X. 
dvijULov^ the term always elsewhere occur- 
ring without dvifxov. Something, however, 
like this occurs in Hom. II. xvii. 57, kX^<hv 
d' i^aTTtfrjs dvefxo'S <tvv XaiXa-JTL TroXXy. 

Aa/CTiJ^, f. iCTW, (adv. Xaf,) to Icick^ 
to strike with the heel, e. gi\ Trpos kIv- 
Tpa, Acts ix. 5. xxvi. 14, and Class. 

A a /CO), see AdcrKio. 

AaXto), f. 770-0), to talk, prop, and 
mostly in Class. ' to use the voice,' sj^eak, 
without any necessary reference to the 
words spoken, and thus differing from 
zItteIv and Xiyf.LV, So Plut. Alcib. 13, 
XolXeXv apLOTOs, dduvaTODn-aTO^ XiysLV, 
and Plut. Placit. Phil. v. 20, XaXovcn jxiv, 
ou (ppdX^ovarL. In N. T. gener. to speak, 
sometimes to talk. I. prop, of persons, 
absol. Matt. ix. 33, kXdXncnv 6 Kcocpo^. 
Mk. V. 35, ETL avTov XaXovvTo^, al. ssepe. 
Sept. and Class. Foil, by adv. John xviii. 
23, si /ca/cws eXdXriara. Mk. vii. 35. Acts 

vii. 6. 1 Cor. xiii. 11. Heb. vi. 9. o-ro- 
fjLa TT/oos (TTOfxa, mouth to mouth, i. e. face 
to face, 2 John 12. Sept. and Class. With 
other adjuncts of manner, e. gr. dat. as 
Trappr](TLa, holdly, openly, John vii. 26. 
Acts ii. 6. Wia dLoXlKTu), vi. 10. 1 Cor. 
xiii. 1 ; gener. yXwacraL^ XaXsTu, see 
in TXooaaa, II. 3. Also with prep. e. gr. 
£ts dspa, 1 Cor. xiv. 9. (in 'Avp.) John 

viii. 44, EK Toov lBlcov XaXsl : iv with dat. 
1 Cor. xii. 3, ev 'TrvEVjuLarL G. XaXcov. In 
various constructions designating the per- 
son or thing to or 0/ whom one speaks, 
e. gr. 1 ) foil, by dat. of pers. to speak to 
or with any one, Matt. xii. 47, X^rjTovvTE^ 
aroi Xa\f]araL. Lu. i. 22, al. Sept. and 
Class. With adjunct of manner added, 
e. gr. dat. Trappijaia, John vii. 13. Eph. 
V. 19, XaXovvTE^ EavTOL<s xlraX/uiol^, i. e. 
'singing tegether.' Foil, by £f with dat. 
1 Cor. xiv. 6, 21. Trspt tlvo^, Lu. ii. 38. 
Foil, by particip. Xiycov, giving definite- 
ness to the idea of XoXeiu, Matt. xiv. 27, 
al. Sept. 2) foil, by hieto. tivo^, to speak 
with, John iv. 27. ix. 37. With Xiyvo, 
Mk. vi. 50. Rev. xxi. 9, and Sept. 3) 
foil, by 7rpo9 Tiva, to speak to. Acts iv. 1. 
xxi. 39. Sept. & Class. 4) foil, by irEpi 
TLV09, to speak about or of any one, J ohn 
viii. 26. xii. 41. Sept. 5) foil, by acc. of 
a kindred noun or of a pronoun, in a gene- 



ral or adverbial sense. Matt. xii. 34, dya- 
dd XuXelu : John viii. 20, pv/maTa. Rom. 
XV. 18, et al. So Mk. ii. 7, XaXtt jSXao-- 
(f)i}lijLLa9. Acts vi. 13, pnp.an-a ^Xdcr(p. 
John viii. 44, to \1/eu8o^. Jude 15, 16. 
Sept. and Class. With other adjuncts, 
e. gr. acc. and dat. of pers. Matt. ix. 18. 
John xiv. 25. xv. 11. Sept. Gen. xxviii. 
15 ; with dat. of manner, &c. Mk. viii. 
32, Tou Xoyov Trapprjcr'ia eXclXel. 1 Cor. 
xiv, 2. did with gen. of manner, 1 Cor. 
xiv. 9. Eu with dat. of manner, 2 Cor. xi. 

17. EV Xpto-Tw, i. e. ' by his authority,' 
2 Cor. xii. 19. tl /caxct Tti/a, i. e. accord- 
ing to, 2 Cor. xi. 17. TL fXETa tlvcs, Eph. 
iv. 25. Sept. Gen. xxxi. 29. tl TTEpi tl- 
vo's, Lu. ii. 33. TL irpo's tlvu, Acts xi. 14. 
Lu. xxiv. 44. Trpos to ou5, Lu. xii. 3, & 
Sept. — II. as modified hy the context, where 
the sense lies not so much in XoXeXv as 
in the adjuncts, e. gr. 1) of one teaching, 
to teach, preach, absol. Lu. v. 4. 1 Cor. 
xiv. 34, 35. 1 Pet. iv. 11 ; foil, by adv. 
John xii. 50, al. ; foil, by diro or ek with 
gen. of source or occasion, John vii. 17, 

18. xii. 49 ; by E/c with gen. of manner, 
John iii. 31 ; by dat. of manner, yXtoo-- 
(Tai5 XoXeTv, Mk. xvi. 17. Acts ii. 4, al. 
With adjunct of pers. to whom, e. gr. dat. 
John XV. 22. 1 Cor. iii. 1 ; also with irap- 
pr](XLa, John xviii. 20. iv with dat. of man- 
ner. Matt. xiii. 10, ^lut'l iv irapa^oXai's 
XaXsTs auTots ; xiii. 34, al. Foil, by acc. 
of thing taught, comp. in I. 5, absol. John 

iii. 11. viii. 30, 40. xviii. 20. Acts xvi. 
14. XX. 30. Tit. ii. 1 ; and so, in reference 
to the doctrines of Jesus, John viii. 28, 
38. xii. 50. Acts v. 20. xvii. 19. 1 Cor. 
ii. 6, 7. XaXslv Kai diSdcrKELV, Acts xviii. 
25. With pers. to whom, e. gr. dat. Mk. 

ii. 2, eXuXel auTots tov Xoyov. iv. 33, 
John vi. 63. Acts viii. 25 ; also foil, by iv 
with dat. of manner, John xvi. 25. Xlyoov, 
Matt. xiii. 3. tl Trpos tlvu. Acts iii. 22. 
1 Th. ii. 2. 2) of those who tell, relate, 
declare, announce any thing, John i. 37. 
Trpos TLva and adv. Lu. ii. 20. TTfpt tl- 
vo<s, John ix. 21 ; foil, by acc. of thing, 
comp. above in I. 5. Matt. xxvi. 13. Acts 

iv. 20; by acc. and dat. of pers. Acts 
xxiii. 18, and with Xiywv impl. Matt, 
xiii. 33 ; also with tteol tlvo<s, Lu. ii. 17. 
Acts xxii. 10. /ca0' ov TpoTrov, xxvii. 25. 
Trapa tlvo?, Lu. i. 45. 3) of prophecy, 
predictions, &c. to foretell, declare. Acts 

iii. 24. xxvi. 22. ?rpo's tlvu, xxviii, 25 ; 
foil, by acc. of thing. Lu. xxiv. 25, ols, 
by attr. for a. Acts iii. 21 ; by acc. and 
dat. of pers. John xvi. 1, 4. So of a 
divine promise, Lu. i. 55, 70. 4) of 
what is said with authority, for to di- 
rect, charge, prescribe, with dat. Mk. 
xvi. 19 ; with acc. and dat. John xv. 11 ; 
acc, f ts, and Tr^pt, Heb. vii. 14 ; for to 
publish, promulgate, authoritatively, Heb. 



AAA 



238 



AAM 



iii. 5. ix. 19. 5) fig. to speak by writing, 
by letter, 2 Cor. xi. 17, bis. Heb. ii. 5. 
2 Pet. iii 16. Of one dead who speaks, 
eoclioHs, by his example, Heb. xi. 4. — 
III. melon, of things, e. gr. 1 ) of a law, 
equiv. to prescribe, Rom. iii. 19. 2) 
of the expiatory blood of Jesus, Heb. 
xii. 24, KptLTTov XaXouvTL nrapa. Toif 
"AjSeX, speaking better than [the blood 
of J Abel, since this hitter cried only for 
vengeance. Gen. iv. 10. 3) in the imagery 
of the Apocalypse, spoken of a voice. 
Rev. i. 12. iv. 1. x.4; oi thunders, which 
are said XaXslv -ras aauTcov (pcovd's. Rev. 
x. 3, 4; of a bea.st, Rev. xiii. 5, 11, 15, al. 

AaXict, d<s, 11, {XaXsco,) in Class, tattle, 
speech, gener. implying loquacity ; in N.T. 
speech, utterance, 1) manner of speaking, 
e. gr. a dialect. Matt. xxvi. 73, rj X. a-ov Si]- 
Xou <TE TTOLSL. Mk. xiv. 70, & Sept. 2) me- 
ton. ' what is uttered,' talk, speech, John 

iv. 42, Slo. rr]v crf]L'XaXLdv, ' by what you 
have said.' viii. 43, diuTL ti]v XaXidv t. 
k, ov yivuxTK&Te ; why do ye not acknow- 
ledge my doctrine [as divine] 

A a fid or Xa/uLfxd, Heb. ichi/? ivhere- 
fore ? Matt, xxvii. 46. Mk. xv. 34. 

Aafx^dvui, (f. Xri\lfOfxaL, aor. 2. 'iXa- 
/3oi/, perf. iLXi](pa,) to take, actively, and 
also in the partially passive sense to re- 
ceive, trans. I. to take, i. prop, with 
the hand, foil, by acc. expr. or impl. 1) 
gener. Matt. xiv. 19, kuI Xa^thv tou§ 
irivTE dpTovs. xxv. 1, al. saepe ; with ek 
TLvo<s, John x\T, 14. Rev. v. 7. Sept. & 
Class. Fig. fcauTw Tifxi^v, Heb. v. 4. 
duva/jLiv, Rev. xi, 17. Part. XajSwv is 
often used before other verbs by a sort of 
pleonasm, in order to express the idea 
more graphically. Comp. AvLa-Trj/uiL ii. 3. 
Matt, xiii. 31, ou XafSwu dvdpwTro^ 
'darTTEipEv. ver. 33. Lu. xxiv. 43. Acts 
xvi. 3. Sept. and Class. 2) of taking 
food or drink, with acc. John xix. 30. 
Acts ix. 19, Xa(3(hu Tpocpnv. 1 Tim. iv. 4. 
absol. Mk. xv. 23. 3) in the sense of to 
take ivith one, e. gr. Matt. xvi. 5, 
k'TTEXadovTo dpT0V9 XafSsLU. ver. 7. xxv. 
4. John xviii. 3. ju£0' iavrcou. Matt. xxv. 
3. So XafxfidvELV yvvaiKa, to take a 
wife, take as a icife, Mk. xii. 19, seqq. 
Lu. XX. 28, sq. Sept. and Class. 4) to 
take upon oneself, to bear; fig. endure. 
Matt. X. 38, Tov CTTavpov. viii. 17, -rd? 
d<r0fz/£ta§ ri/uLwv. 5) to take up, gather 
up. Matt. xvi. 9, 10, irScrov^ ko^lvov^ 
kXd^ETE ; fig. Xa^Eiv Tr-jv -^vyjiv, as opp. 
to Tidijuii, John X. 17, 18. Xen. QSc. viii. 
2. ix. 10. — Ti. to take out from a num- 
ber, to ditoose. Acts xv. 14, XajSsTv k^ 
kduwv Xaov, Heb. v. 1. Sept. & Class. — 
III. to take, to lay hold of, seize. 1) prop. 
Matt. xxi. 35, Koi Xa(36vrE^ tou§ dovXov?. 
Mk. xii. 3, 8. John xix. 1 ; absol. 2 Cor. 



xi. 20, and Class. So in hunting or fish- 
ing, to take, catch, Lu. v. 5. Xen. Cyr. i. 
4, 9 ; fig. 2 Cor. xii. 16, SoXco ufxd% eXu- 
(3ou. So Soph. Phil. 100, *oV\a) $iX. 
Xa(3&7v. Virg. ^n. ii. 196, ' capti dolis.' 
2) metaph. of any strong emotion, to seize, 
come or fall upon any one, e. gr. EKo-Tacn^ 
'iXa^Ev diravTa's, Lu. v. 26. <p6(3o<s, vii. 
16. 'TTEipaajUid?, 1 Cor. x. 13. Sept. and 
Class. So of an evil spirit, demon, Lu. ix. 
39. Comp. Jos. Ant. iv. 6, 5. — iv. to 
take AWAY from any one by force, Matt. 

V. 40, /cat Tov -)(LT(jovd aov Xa^EXv. Rev, 
iii. 11. vi. 4. Sept. and Class. — V. to take 
UP a person, i. e. to receive him as a friend 
or guest into one's house, equiv. to 
Sixo/uLaL. 1 ) gener. John xix. 27, 'iXa^Ev 
avTi-jV 6 jua0i]Tr/§ sts toc tSia. John vi. 
21, £i§ TO irXolov. 2 John 10. Hom. Od. 
vii. 255. Fig. of a teacher, &c. to receive, 
acknowledge, ' to embrace and follow his 
instructions,' John i. 12. v. 43, al. So of 
doctrine, to embrace, admit, e. gr. tov 
Xoyov. Matt. xiii. 20. Mk. iv. 16. tt/i/ 
/napTvpiav, John iii. 11. 1 John v. 9. tu 
pvfxaTa, John xii. 48. xvii. 8. 2) from 
the Hebr. XafifSdvELV irpocrooTrov tlvo^, 
to receive the person q/'any one, prop, said 
of a king, or judge, who receives or admits 
the visits of those who bring him saluta- 
tions and presents, and favours their cause. 
See espec. Job xiii. 10 ; hence to favour 
any one, both in a good and bad sense ; in 
N. T. only in a bad sense, to accept one's 
person, equiv. to be paHial toivards 
him, with gen. Gal. ii. 6, 'Trpocrooirov 
0£o? dvdpto'Trov ov XapifBdvEL. Sept. ; 
absol. to show partiality, Lu. xx. 21. — 

VI. fig. in phrases, where Xafx^dvELv with 
its accus. is often equiv. to the verb cor- 
responding to the accus. e. gr. dpxY\v 
XapfSdvEiv, equiv. to begin, Heb. ii. 3, 
and Class, dcpopjurju to take occa- 
sion, Rom. vii. 8, 11. ^dpcro? Xap(3. to 
take coiirage, ~ ^appkcv. Acts xxviii. 15. 
LKuvov Xa/uL(3. to take security. Acts xvii. 9. 
X1^Q^v X. to forget, 2 Pet. i. 9. Jos. and 
Class, mopcpriu tlvo^ X. to take the likeness 
or form of any one, to liken o?ieself to him, 
Phil. ii. 7, iuLop(pi]U SovXov XafBoov. So 
Test. XIT. Patr. p. 542, 6 Geo? a-wima 
Xa^iJov. Comp. Zech. vi. 13. Wisd. v. 19. 
iTElpav Xaju^. to make trial of i. e. to 
attempt, Heb. xi. 29, and Class. ; or also 
equiv. to have tnal of, to eocverience, 
Heb. xi. 36. Xen. (Ec. xvii. 1, a-vpi^ov- 
Xlov Xap^. to take counsel, equiv. to 
considt. Matt. xii. 14. xxvii. 1, 7. xxviii. 
12. vTTo^ELypd TLva Xap(3. to take any 
one as an example, Ja. v. ] 0. vTropLvijaLv 
Xafx(3. to recollect, to remember, 2 Tim. i. 
5. x^P^yt^^ TLvo's Xap^duELv, to take or 
adopt the mark of any one, Rev. xiv. 1 1 ; 
foil, by £7rt with gen. xiv. 9. xx. 4. — 
n. to RECEIVE what is given, imparted, 



A A M 



239 



A AN 



imposed, to obtain^ partake o/*. 1 ) gener. 
absol. Matt. vii. 8, Trd? yap o aWuiv Xufx- 
(SdvEL. X. 8. 1 Cor. iv. 7, al. with Ik of 
source, John i. 16; foil, by acc. Matt. xx. 
9, 'iXa^ov avcL dnvin)Lov. vcr. 10. xxv. 16, 
TrivTE TaXavTa \a(3u)V. Mk. X. 30, et 
al. By eK tivo<s pai titively, Rev. xviii. 4, 
EK Twv Tr\i]y uiv avTri^s 'iva fxi] Xa'^ijTg, 
and Class. With an adjunct of tlie source^ 
&c. e. gr. diro with gen. from, 1 John ii, 
27; irafm with gen. from any one, Acts ii. 
33, al. ; spoken de conatu, John v. 34, 41, 
So^av Trapd dvOpuyTTov ou XanxfSduo), ver. 
44 ; uTTo with gen. 2 Cor. xi. 24. 2) of 
those who receive an office, station, or dig- 
nity, either as committed or transmitted, 
e. gi\ ETTKTKO'Triju, Acts i. 20. kXt/poj/, ver. 
25. LEpa^ELav, Heb. vii. 5. ^acnXEiav, 
Lu. xix. 12, 15 ; with irapd tivo^, Acts 
XX, 24, and Class. Also of a successor in 
office, Xa(3ELv Siddoxov, Acts xxiv. 27. 
3) of persons appointed to receive tribute, 
rent, &;c. to collect. Matt. xvii. 24, oi -rd 
Bidpa\iuLa Xu/uL^duovrE^, i. e. the re- 
ceivers, collectors, xxi. 34. Heb. vii. 8 ; 
with dTTo Matt. xvii. 25. 3 John 

7. And so Class. 4) fig. to receive in- 
struction, equiv. to be instructed, to 
learn. Rev. iii. 3, pLvrj/uLouEVE oZv ttcos 
EiX7](^a<s KOL vKovawi. Diod. Sic. ii. 29, 
/St/Jaioj? EKacTTa Xap.^dvov(ri. 5) fig. in 
phrases Evi-oXi]u Xap.^dvELv, to receive 
commandment, irapd tlvo^, John x. 18. 
2 John 4. TTEpi TIV09, Col. iv. 10. irpo^ 
TLva, Acts xvii. 15. KaTaXXaytjv Xap.^. 
to be reconciled, Rom. v. 11. Kp'ifxa Xajx^. 
to receive condemnation, to be condemned. 
Matt, xxiii. 14. Ja. iii. 1 ; with dat. 
reflex. Rom. xiii. 2. oLKo^ofxriv Xa/x/3. to 
be edified, 1 Cor. xiv. 5. irapayyEX'iav 
X. to receive a charge. Acts xvi. 24. TTEpi- 
TOfiTiv Xa/z/3. to be circumcised, John 
vii. 23. 

Aa/Lt7rds, d^o's, v, {XdjuLiru),) lit. a 
light, e. gr. a torch, or lamp, &c. ; the 
first of which uses, occ. in Hdot. vi. 105. 
Thuc. iii. 24, et al. was the primary one, 
called SItti by Homer. In N. T. too, the 
word gener. means a torch, such as was 
formed by a piece of iron wrapped round 
with bandages of linen, and moistened 
with oil, as Matt. xxv. 1, seqq. John 
xviii. 3. Rev. viii. 10 ; but in Acts xx. 8, 
and Rev. iv. 5, a lamp of the ancient 
form, on which see Jahn, Arch. § 40. 

AafJLTT pd^, d, 6v, adj. {Xajxirw,) 
ener, shining, bright, radiant ; but espec. 
. as applied to the heavenly luminaries, 
as the sun, moon, and stars. So of the 
sun, Hom. II. i. 605, etteI kuteSv Xap.- 
irpov (pdo9 rjEXioLo : of the moon, Thuc. 
vii. 44, (teXtiui] X. : of the stars, Hom. II. 
iv. 77, and so Rev. xxii. 16, o d<TTiip 6 
XafiTT. 6 irpuiivo^. Also of what reflects 



back the light, as a bright mirror, Eurip. 
Med. 1158, or burnished metal, which 
glitter's; or any thing that is very white, 
radiant. So of angels' robes, Acts x. 30. 
Rev. XV. 6. xix. 8, and later Class, as 
Diod. Sic. t. i. 266. Of the robe put by 
Herod upon Christ in mockery, as Pilate's 
soldiers afterwards put on him a purj)le 
robe, Lu. xxiii. 11. Comp, Mk. xv. 17, 
&c. There, however, we are to under- 
stand, not white, but bright in colour, as 
we say of such colours as pur})le, yellow, 
&c. So Plut. vi. 546, oi irpocriovTE^ 
kXlipaa-iv EadtjTa XafXTrpdu ou XajuL^d- 
vov(TL, ovSk cpoLVLKLda^, and viii. 124, 
fco-^t/s A.. Hence, by impl., splendid, 
sumptuous, of dress, Ja. ii. 2, 3, kcr- 
X. Simil. Diod. Sic. t. ix. p. 23, 
irpoEXQuiv iv LfxaTLco Xa/uLirpw. So gener. 
Rev. xviii. 14, tu Xafxirpd, costly arti- 
cles, Ecclus. xxix. 22, idiafxaTa X.- — II. 
clear, limpid. Rev. xxii. 1, TroTafxdv 
Xafxirpov cos KpvcrTaXXov. Xen. H. G. 
V. 3, 19, vduTa X. Hippocr. vdaTa X. 
Kai XEVKd. 

Aa/ATrpoTtjs, TrjT09, rj, (Xa/uTrpos,) 
brightness, splendour, X. toD vXlov, Acts 
xxvi. 13. So of the heavenly bodies, 
Sept. Is. Ix. 3. Dan. xii. 3. So in its 
primary sense of light, Plut. viii. 477, ti]v 
dyav XaLpjwp, tou (^wtos. 

Aa/iTTptos, adv. (Xa/xTrpos,) splen- 
didly, i. e. sumptuously, Lu. xvi. 19, 
sv(f)paiv6juLsvo^ X. And so Class. ; e. gr. 
Comicus ap. Menand. and Phil. p. 208, 
ed. Cler. X. yap ^wo-iy. 

Ad/xTTw, f. li/o), to shine, give light, 
intrans. prop, with dat. Matt. v. 15, Xap.- 
iTEL TrdcTL Tot? &u Ty oiKLa, absol, xvii. 2, 
EXa/uLxj/E TO irpoGco'Kov avTov, (Hom. II. 
iv. 432, TEvyEa ttolklX' EXa/mxJ/E.) Lu. 
xvii. 24. Acts xii. 7, 'iXajuLxj/Eu iv tw 
oLKruxaTi. (Xen. Mem. iii. 1, 9.) 2 Cor. 
iv. 6, EK (TKOTOv^ (pu)^ Xdp.\^aL. Metaph. 
Matt. V. 16, ouTw Xa/jLyj/dra) to 0cos 
vjUL<ov, &c. ' Let the light, i. e. fame, of 
your example, shine forth, become mani- 
fest.* So Pind. 01. i. 36, Xd/xTret dk ol 
kXeo^. Eurip. Andr. 778, d dpgTd kul 
^avovoTL XdyUTTft. Plato, Epist. 7, did 
TrdvTcov dvdpcoTTcov Xd/uLxj/acra ^o^a. 
Sept. in Prov. iv. 18. Dan. xii. 3. In 
2 Cor. iv. 6, os 'iXafxxl/EV iv tuT^ KapSiai^ 
vfjLcov, it has, I apprehend, an active sense, 
(as in Eurip. Hel. 1142, SoXlov daTEpa 
Xd/x\|/-as, ' lighting up, causing to shine,') 
supply (J)u)9 from the preceding context ; 
lit. 'hath lighted up the light of the Gos- 
pel in your hearts.' See my note on Lu. 
i. 78. 

Aavddvco, aor. 2. IXadov, to lie hid^ 
concealed, to be unknown, absol. Mk. vii. 
24, ovK i}dvvr]6ri XabEtv. Lu. viii. 47. .^1. 
V. H. iv. 20, init. Foil, by acc. of pers! 



A A ^ 



240 



AEr 



^to he Jiid AS TO any one,' i. e. /?'om him, 
to escape liis knowledge or notice, Acts 
XX"ST. 26, XavddvsLV avTov tl i-ovtcov ov 
TTttOo/uat ovoeu. 2 Pet. iii. 5, 8, & Class. 
Joined with the partic. of another verb it 
lias tlie force of an adv., in the sense 
secretli/^ zmaivares^ Ilcb. xiii. 2, 'iXadov 
TLvt<s ^EuLcrai/Tt? dyyiXov?. Xen. An. i. 
1, 9, and often in Class. 

Aa^guToe, 6u^ adj. (Xa^euo), fr. 
A.as, ^so),) rock-heivn^ i. e. hewn in the 
rock, said of a sepulchre, Lii. xxiii. 53. 
fSept. Deut. iv. 49, et al. 

Aaos, ou, 6, (\c£t»), whence Xa/36t), to 
hold, as it were in one's grasp, to grasp, 
collect ; so meaning ' what is collected,'' 
Lat. manipulus ; see v, %\ao's.) Thus the 
term is used to denote a people or multi- 
tude, as Tr\r}^o<5 from ttXew, to fill ; and 
with art., the multitude, or people, as opp. 
to the sovereign or ruler, (Horn. Od. vi. 
194. Hdot. V. 42,) and in plur. copice 
(from capio), militares, troops, as opp. to 
the chieftain. In N. T. its uses are as 
follows : I. PROP, a people or nation^ 
meaning the mass of any people, and not, 
like SyjuLo^, a community of free citizens, 

1) gener. Lu, ii. 10, vtl^ 'icr^ai Travrl 
Tco Xaw. Acts iv. 25. Rev. v. 9, and Sept. 

2) spec, of the Jews, as the people of 
God's choice, absol. or with toD Gto?, 
&c. Matt. i. 21. ii. 4. Mk. vii. 6. Lu. ii. 
32, al. ssepe. Sept. ssepiss. Fig. of Chris- 
tians, as God's spiritual Israel, Tit. ii. 14. 
Heb. ii. 17. iv. 9, et al. — II. gener. the 
people., i. e. th£ many^ the multitude., the 
pvhlic, Lu. vii. 29, Tras o \a6§ a.Kova-a's. 
\m. 47. ix. 13. xxiii. 27, 7r\>j0o§ tou 
Xaov. Acts iii. 9, et al. Hom. II. xviii. 
502, et aL Espec. the common people., the 
populace^ of any city or territory, e. gr. 
Jerusalem, Acts ii. 47 ; of Galilee, Matt, 
iv. 23. Sept. Gen. xix. 4. Hom. Od. xiii. 
156. As distinguished from magistrates, 
&c. Matt. xx\-i. 5, \va /ulj) ^6pv(3o^ yivi]- 
TaL kv Tw XatZ. Acts vi. 12, al. Sept. in 
Ex. xviii. 22. josh. vi. 8. 

Aa^juyJ, uyyos, 6, the throat., from 
Xapvdcru)., ' to savour, enjoy,' fr. Xapos, 
' savoury, pleasant,' and that from Xaco, 
volo. Thus Xdpvy^ means lit. ' that part 
in which we especially e?ijoy meat or drink, 
the upper part of the throat, the gullet, or 
cesophagus.'' Thus it is considered, in the 
words of H. Steph., as the cibi vehicidum 
vel meatus. So in Aristoph. Ran. 575. It 
is, however, also and gener. considered as 
vocis vehiculum, as Aristoph. Eq. 1363. 
Also, as most Commentators explain the 
word, in Rom. iii. 13, (compared with 
Ecclus. vi. 5, Xapvy^ yXvKv? 7rXi]dvve'L 
^(Xou?,) but there the former sense is 
preferable. See my note. 

Aac/cw, f. Xa/cfjcroj, in Class., as Hom. 



II. xiii. 616. XX. 277, to break with a 
crash ; in N. T. and later Greek writers, 
as said of things which burst with a noise 
on being too much distended, to crack 
open., to burst asunder., Acts i, 18, kXdKr](Te 
jutao?. Act. Thorn. § 33, 6 de dpuKcov 
<pv(Ti}deh kXdKi]crs. So OLaXaKricraa-a in 
Aristoph. Nub. 409, is explained by the 
Schol. dLappayelca. 

Aaxo/xso), f. Tycrco, (\aTo/i09, fr. \as, 
TtjuLvix).,) to cut stone., heiv in stone., e. gr, 
fxvfiixELuv., o kXcLTOjULnaev kv Trj TTtTjOCt, 
Matt, xxvii. 60. Mk. xv. 46. Sept., Jos., 
and Class. 

A ttT/o £ i'a, a?, ?7, (XaTpsuo),) service., 
prop, in Class, for hire, or as a slave. 
Soph. Aj. 503. In N. T. only in respect 
to God, religious service, worship., John 
xvi. 2. Rom. ix. 4. xii. 1. Heb. ix. 1, 6. 
Sept. Ex. xii. 25, 26. Josh. xxii. 27. 
1 Mace. i. 45. 

AaTpEvoo., f. £uo"tt), (XaTpis, 'one 
hired,') and in Class, prop, to serve for 
hire, or as a slave, equiv. to oovXevEii'. 
In N. T. spoken in respect to God, to 
serve., to zvorship. 1) gener. foil, by dat. 
Matt.iv. 10. Lu. iv. 8, avrw (Otw) fxouu) 
XaTpEvcTEL^. Lu. i. 74. ii. 37, et al. ssepe. 
absol. Acts xxvi. 7. Sept. Once of idol- 
worship, Rom. i.25, kXarpavaav Ttj kti- 
(TEL K. T. X. Sept. Deut. iv. 28. Judg. ii. 
11, 13. 2) spec, and of an external ritual 
worship, to officiate as priest, Heb". viii. 5. 

xiii. 10, and so in the celestial Temple, 
Rev. \'ii. 15. Also gener. to offer sacri- 
fice., worship., Heb. ix. 9. x. 2. 

Kd\avov., ov, to, {Xaxaiuu)., to dig,) 
prop, a plant in dug., as o})p. to ploughed., 
ground ; hence a garden-plant, as cabbage, 
sinapi., (and so distinguished from trees,) 
Matt. xiii. 32, fXElX^ov to)V Xaxo-vi^v- 
Mk. iv. 32 ; also pot-herbs and roots, 
or vegetables in jreneral. (See my note on 
Thuc. iii. 111. No. 2.) Lu. xi. 42. Rom. 

xiv. 2. Sept. and Class, as Plato 372, C. 
(SoX^ovs Kai Xd^avO" 

A £ 7 £ w I', wi/os, o, Lat. legio, a legion, 
prop, the largest body of troops in the 
Roman armv, varvino: in number at dif- 
ferent periods, as 3000, 4200, 5000, but in 
the time of Christ above 6200. In N. T. 
put for an indefinitely great number, e. gr. 
of angels. Matt. xxvi. 53; of demons, 
Mk. V. 9, 15. Lu. viii. 30. 

A£yto, f. ^ct), (not from Xiw, capio, as 
Lennep supposes, but fr. the Gothic laggan, 
whence the Germ, leg-en, and our to lay,) 
primarily to lay, i. e. to lay or let lie down 
for sleep, Hom. II. xxiv. 635, and mid. to 
lay oneself, to lie dotcn for sleep, Od. xvii. 
162; also to lay together, collect, II. xxiii. 
239. Od. xxiv. 72. Thus our /a^ some- 
times means to put together ; so in Is, v. 



A Er 



241 



AEI 



8, ' Woe to them thnt lay field to field.' 
And further, to lay before^ i. e. to relate^ to 
recount; Sl hence tlie prevailing Attic and 
lat. signif. to say, to speak, i. e. to utter arti- 
culate words in connected and significant 
discourse, = to d iscou rse ; tiuis differing fiou) 
XaXtTi/, and al?o from Ei'irtiv, inasmuch 
as this latter refers only to words as spoken, 
and not to their connected sense. In N.T. 
I. to lay liefore the hearers, i. e. to re- 
late, e. gr. 'Kapa^oXxiv, to put forth, io 
propound, with dat. of ])ers. Lu. xviii. 1, 
iXzyE 6k Kai irapafSoXiiv auToIs. xiii, 6. 
with TT/oos TLva, Lu. xii, 41. So of events, 
to narrate, tell, with acc. of thing and dat. 
of person, Lu. ix. 21. And so Class. — II. 
to SAY, speak, discourse, gener. and con- 
strued, I. with an adjunct of the object, 
i. e. the words spoken, the thing or person 
spoken of, &c. 1 ) foil, by the words ut- 
tered, Matt. i. 20, ayygXos — i(pav7] av- 
Tw, Xlyayu, 'Icocrijc^). viii. 2. Mk. vi. 2. 
Lu. ii. 13. John i. 29, XiysL' "Ids 6 afxvo^ 
Tou Oeov, al. saepiss. Xen. Conv. iv. 1. 
Foil, by oTi before the M-ords quoted, 
Matt. ix. 18. Mk. ii. 12. iii. 21, al. saepe, 
and Class, esp. Hdot. Hence part. Xiycov, 
XiyouTE^, saying, is often put after other 
verbs or nouns implying speech, as intro- 
ducing the exact words, equiv. to in these 
words. Matt. v. 2, idLSaarKev auTous, Xt- 
yuW MaKupLOL, and oft. So Sept. perpet. 
Palseph. vii. 7. 2) foil', by acc. of thing or 
pers. e. gr. of the thing spoken of. Matt. xxi. 
16, dKov£L9 Tt ovTOL XtyovcTLv ', Lu. viii. 
8, TavTa Xiycov, oft. So eXe^e TOidds 
freq. occ. in the historians, as introducing 
a speech. Hence n-d XEyofXEva, Lu. xviii. 
34. Acts viii. 6. 3) foil, by acc. and inf. 
John xii. 29, tXgyg (ipovTrjv yEyovivai. 
Matt. xvi. 13, et al. and Class. 4) foil, 
by oTt instead of the acc. and inf. Mk. 
ix. 11. Lu. ix. 7. John iv. 20. So with 
OTt and the apodosis impl. in the phrase 
av XiyELS, Matt, xxvii. 11. — ii. as modi- 
fied BY THE CONTEXT, where the sense 
lies not so much in Xiyuj as in the ad- 
juncts, e. gr. 1) before questions, for to ask, 
inquire, foil, by the words spoken, Matt, 
ix. 14. John vii. 11, /cat tXEyov' Hou 
itTTiv EKELUo^; Rom. X. 19; with dat. of 
pers. Mk. vi. 37 ; foil, by £t, whether. Acts 
XXV. 20; with dat. of pers. xxi. 37. 2) 
before replies, in the sense to answer, foil, 
by the words spoken, e. gr. after a direct 
question. Matt. xvii. 25 ; with dat. of 
pers. xviii. 22; also with oVt of citation. 
Matt. xix. 8. prec. by tzTro/cptOtts, Mk. 
viii. 29. Lu. iii. 11. 3) in affirmations, 
for to affirm, maintain, e. gr. with the 
words or propositions uttered, Mk. xiv. 
31, o ^£ EK TTEpLcraov 'iXEyB fxdXXov' 'Eai/, 
&c. Gal. iv. 1. 1 John ii. 4; foil, by acc. 
with inf. Matt. xxii. 23. Lu. xxiii. 2. 
xxiv. 23, ot XiyovcLV avrov : foil. 



by oTi instead of acc. and inf. Matt. xvii. 
10; with a dat. of pers. in the formulas 
Xt-yui aroL or v/ulTv, d/xiiu \tyu) vpA.v, &c. 
in solemn affirmations, gcner. Matt. xi. 22. 
Mk. xi. 24. Lu. iv. 25 ; with d/x»>. Matt. 
V. 18, al. 4) of teaching, for to teach, in- 
cidcate, e. gr. with the proposition taught. 
Matt XV. 5; with acc. Acts i. 3; with 
acc. and infin. xxi. 21 ; with acc. and dat. 
of pers. Matt. x. 27. 5) of predictions, 
to foretell, predict, with acc. and dat. Mk. 

x. 32; with acc. Lu. ix. 31; with dat. 
John xiii. 19. 6) of what is spoken with 
authority, to command, direct, charge, 
absol. Matt, xxiii. 3, Xiyovai yap, Kai 
ov iroLovcTL : with acc. Lu. vi. 46 ; with 
acc. and dat. Mk. xiii. 37 ; with dat. of 
pers. and imperat. Matt. v. 44; with 
dat. and inf Rev. xiii. 14; Avith inf Rom. 

11. 22; foil, by tW, Acts xix. 4. So in 
the sense of to charge, exhort, with dat. 
Acts V. 38 ; with dat. and inf Acts xxi. 4. 
7) of calling out, equiv. to call, exclaim., 
8lc. Matt. XXV. 11, XiyovcraL' Ki/pi£, 
KuptE, dvoL^ou vplIv. 8) fig. to say or 
speak by writing : e. gr. with the words 
written, Lu. i. 63, Eypavj/E^ Xiycov. xx. 
42 ; with acc. 1 Cor. vii. 6. — III. meton. 
of things, e.g. 1) a voice, (poDvi] Xiyovcra, 
Matt. lii. 17. Rev. vi. 6 ; with dat. Acts 
ix. 4. Rev. xvi. 1 ; wdth dat. of manner. 
Acts XX vi. 14. 2) a writing, Scripture, r/ 
ypacpi], John xix. 37. Gal. iv. 30; impl. iii, 
16. 3) a law, 6 vopLo^, with acc. 1 Cor. ix. 8. 
absol. ver. 10. 4) gener. 6 X/0?i/>ta'7-to"|u6s, 
Rom. xi. 4. 77 AiKaLoa-vvri, as personified, 
X. 6. — IV. FIG. for to mea72, have in mind, 
foil, by imper. Gal. v. 16 ; with acc. of 
thing, 1 Cor. x. 29, (rvvELdrja-LV Xiyo} 
K. T. X. i. 12. Gal. iii. 17 ; of pers. John 
6. 71, tXgye ^£ TOf 'lovdav. Jos. and 
Class. — III. to CALL, to NAME, equiv. to 
KuXiuj, prop, 'to speak of as being, or 
being called,' so and so, foil, by acc. Matt, 
xix. 17, Tt fXE XiyEL^ dyadov, Mk. xv. 

12, ov XlyETE (SacnXia tuiv 'lovoaicoi/. 
Acts X. 28, al. Pass. Matt. xiii. 55, rj 
/uLVTrjp avTov XtyETUL M-apidfi. Part. 
6 Xsyo/xEi/os, called, named. Matt. ii. 23. 
ix. 9, et saepe al. Also surnamed. Matt, 
iv. 18, Styuwfa Tov XEyofxEVov HiTpov. 
Jos. Apocr. & Class, al. With the idea 
of translation into another language ; e. gr. 
fully, John i. 39, pa^fSl, o XiyEn-at, Epfir}- 
VEvojULsvov, diSdaKaXE. xix. 17; simply, 
John iv. 25, Mecro-ias £p)(£Tat, o XEyo/ms- 
f09 X/Otaxos. XX. 16. 

AEtfJLfxa, aT0<5, to, {Xelttm,) prop, a 
remnant, lit. ' what is left,' and by metcm. 
of pers. some remaining out of a large 
number, the residue, by impl. small, Rom. 

xi. 5. So Sept. Josh. xiii. 12. 2 K. xix. 
4. In N. T. and Sept. used in the sing. ; 
in Class, only in the plural. 

M 



AEI 



242 



A EH 



A £ To §, a, 01/, adj. (fr. obsoi. Xtco and 
Xsitt), whence Xsta/fw, to rub down, make 
plain,) smooth^ level, plain, as opp. to Tpa- 
and applied to a surface, of whatever 
kind, especially the ground, or a road when 
levelled down. So Horn. 11. v. 443, x^- 
po£ — X£W5 TTgpawi/, and the phrase Xsla 
o^os, occurring in Horn. Od. x. 103. Hes. 
Erg. i. 286. Xen. Mem. ii. 1, 20. Thus 
in Lu. iii. 5, sis 6dov9 Xelws. 

As LIT u), f. to leave, forsake, prop, 
trans, and occurring in various senses, 
according to the application, to quit, aban- 
don, forsake, as said of places, persons, 
and things. In N. T. T. pass, to he for- 
saken of any thing, i.e. to he destitute of, 
to lack ; foil, by gen. Ja. i. 5, el 6e Tts 
vjULcov XaLTTETaL (TOCpLa?. ii. 15, Xeltto- 

(JLEVOL Ttj? E<pr\lXEpOV TpO(p7]9. Aud SO 

Plato p. 264, F. toutou XEiirofxEva, ttclv- 
Ta, KOL KT-nfian-a Kal E7rLT7]dsviULaTa, 
ai<yxpoL Kal kuku. The word is often 
found followed by ev iultiSevI, Ja. i. 4, i. e. 
' to be wanting in nothing so equiv. to 
teXelo^, oXoKXrjpo^. Similar is the ex- 
pression of Jos. Ant. ix. 11, 2, ovok juias 

«p€T?7s aTTEXstTTETO. II. INTRANS. to 

fail, lack, he wa^iting, with dat. of pers. 
Lu. xviii. 22, etl ev ctol Xelttel. Tit. iii. 
13, 'Lva ixi]Bev auToT's Xelttti, and i. 5, to. 
XELirovTa ETrLdLopdwarri. 

Aeltov py EO), f. rjaro), {XELTovpyd?,) 
prop, to perform some public service, and 
by impl. at one's own expense, intrans. 
Dem. p. 833, 25. Isocr. 161; also to p)er- 

form any function, whether in public or 
private life, espec. the former, Ecclus. viii. 
8, XELTOvpyricraL fXEyicrTdarLV. In N. T. 
gener. to serve, to minister, 1) publicly in 
religious worship, as said of the priests of 
the 0. T. absol. Heb. x. 11, /caG' vfXEpav X. 
and often in Sept. and sometimes in Jos. ; 
of Christian teachers, foil, by xco Kuptw, 
Acts xiii. 2. Dion. Hal. Ant. ii.22, TavTa 
XELTOvpyELV, as said of the services of the 
Pagan religions. 2) privately, to minister 
to any one, ' to supply pecuniary aid,' with 
dat. Rom. xv. 27, X. avTol's. So Xen. 
Mem. ii. 7, 6, tt? ttoXei X. Ecclus. x. 25, 
oiKETrj (TOCpM iXEvdEpoL XELTOvpyncTOvari. 

Aeltov py la, a?, rj, {XELTOvpyd^,) 
public service or office, i. e. such as, in 
Athens and elsewhere, were administered 
by the citizens in turn and at their own 
expense, as a part of the system of finance, 
but in N. T. gener. service, ministry, e. gr. 
1) of the public ministrations of the Jew- 
ish priesthood, Lu. i. 23, al v/uLEpai -rrj? 
XEL^ovpyLa^ auTOV. Heb. viii. 6. ix. 21. 
Sept. Jos. Diod. Sic. i. 21, of the heathen 
priesthood. Fig. of the ministry of a 
Christian teacher in bringing men to the 
faith, Phil. ii. 17, XELTOvpyia t?!? 'tt'io-tew^ 
vjxwv. 2) by impl. friendly service, kind 



office, gener. Phil. ii. 30, Trpos /i£ X. And 
so Athen. ap. Steph. Thes. of the offices of 
personal attentions, &c. Spoken of alms^ 
i. e. public collections in the churches, 
2 Cor. ix. 12, 77 biaKovia ti]5 X. Tav- 

Aeltov py iKo^, ij, 6v, adj. pertaining 
to the public service of the Temple, Sept. 
(TKEvi) X. Num. iv. 12, 26. In N. T, 
act. ministering, ' rendering service to 
others,' Heb. i. 14, XELTovpyLKo, ttvev- 
fxuTa, i. e. £t5 ^laKoviav, &c. 

AfiiTOupyos, ou, o, (Xao5, Xi'iTO^ 
or Xe'l'to's, public, and Epyov,) a public 
servant, (Hesych. dmxLovpyds,) such as in 
Athens performed the XEiTovpyiaL, or 
state offices, at their own expense ; in 
N. T. gener. a minister, servant, viz. I. 
GENER. e. gr. Qeov, Rom. xiii. 6. Heb, 

i. 7, o iroLCov — Tous XELTOvpyov^ av- 
Tov TTvpo^ (jyXoya. And so Dion. Hal. 
A. ii. 73, X. Twi/ ^Ewv. Ecclus. x. 2, of a 
judge's attenda?it ; of Paul, as a minister 
of Christ, Rom. xv. 16. — II. spec, said of 
a priest in the Jewish sense, Heb. viii. 2, 
Twi/ dyiajv XELTovpyo?. Sept. Neh. x. 
39. Jer. xxxiii. 21.— III. by impl. Phil. 

ii. 25, XELTovpyov t^js xpEia's fxov, a 
minister for my wants, i. e. one who minis- 
ters to my wants. So Lysias, Xetroup- 
yElv TOO oroofxaTL. 

Aevtlov, ov, TO, (Lat. linteum, fr, 
Xlvov, flax,) a linen cloth, a sort of coarse 
apron, worn by servants (Sueton. Calig. 
26, succi9ictos linteo) or persons exercising 
handicraft occupations. The more usual 
term was (xd^avov, John xiii. 4, 5. 

AfTTts, ides, 77, (Xettos, fr. Xettco, to 
peel off,) the crust or scale on the surface 
of any substance, as the htisk of corn, the 
peel or rind of fruits, scales of fish, or the 
lamina of metals hammered out. In N. T. 
of the something like scales encrusting the 
eye -balls. Acts ix. 18, wo-eI XEiridE?, simi- 
lar to those scales formed by humours in 
the eyes, in the disorder called Xfu/cco/xa, 
becoming concrete. (See Foes. (Econ. 
Hipp. V. Xfiw/cw/xa.) So Tobit ii. 11. vi. 8. 
xi. 13, where the disorder is called Xfv- 
Ku^jua or XEVKUDixaTU, which Xevk. are 
said to have peeled away. 

Aiirpa, as, 17, (XfTrpos, ir, Xettos,) 
leprosy, in which the skin becomes scaly ^ 
Matt. viii. 3. Mk. i. 42. Lu. v. 12. Sept. 
Jos. and Class. 

AfiTTpo?, ov, 6, (XeVos, Xettls,) piop. 
'scaly, scabby,' hence a leper, one diseased 
with leprosy. Matt. viii. 2. x. 8, and oft. 
Sept. & Class. 

Aetttov, ov, to, (neut. of Xe-tttos, 
thin,) the name of the smallest Jewish 
coin, like Engl. mite. Its value was half 



A E Y 



243 



AH S 



a Kodpavnj^^ or the 8th of an aa-adptou. 
Mk. xii.42, al. XcTn-oy Ktpaa^ Alciplu'. i. 
Ep. 9. XsTTTou vo/uLLafxa^ Pollux Oii.ix. 92. 

Aev KaivM^ f. afco, (Xfu/cos,) toivliiteti^ 
make ichife, e. gr. CToXas, Rev. vii. 14. 
absol. Mk. ix." 3. Sept. and Class.; as 
Horn. Od. xii. 172. 

Aeu/vO?, 7/, Of, adj. (XeiVcco, liiceo,) 
prop. li'(/Jit^ i. e. emitting light, sliinwg^ 
radiant^ & hence dazzlimi irhite. 1) prop, 
of raiment, espec. that of angels, &c. Mk. 
xvi. 5. John xx. 12. Acts i. 10, and oft. 
in Rev. Ln. ix. 29, 6 ifxaTLa-fxo^ uvtov 
XsuKo^i E^a(TTpu7rru)V. Matt. xvii. 2, 
XevKa u)§ TO </)w9. (Comp. Horn. II. xiv. 
\^5^Kpi]6£iJLVov\£VKdu r]e\L09 cl)^.) xxviii. 
3, and Mk. ix. 3, \. (hael X'-^^ ' ^ 
throne, Rev.xx. 11. 2) gener. white, e-gi*- 
hair, Matt. v. 36. Rev. i. 14; a stone, 
Rev. ii. 17 ; a cloud, xiv. 14 ; a horse, vi. 
2 ; a field ripe for the harvest, John iv. 
35. Sept. and Class. 

A £00 1/, oi/Tos, 6, a lion. I. prop. Heb. 
xi. 33. 1 Pet. V. 8. Rev. iv. 7, et al. Sept.' 
and Class. — II. metaph. and 1) for a cruel 
adversary, persecutor, 2 Tim. iv. 17, ip- 
pvadi^u £/c crTOfxaTd XiovTO's, namely 
Nero. So Jos. Ant. xviii. 6, 10, of Tibe- 
rius, TtdwiKEv 6 Aewj/, with allusion to 
those passages of the 0. T. where tyrants 
are so called. See Ez. xix. 3. 2) for a 
hero,pqiverful deliverer, Rev. v. 5, 6 \iu3v 
6 cov Ik t7]<s (pvXrj'S 'lou^a, comp. Neh. 
ii. 13. Jer. xlix. 18. . 

Avdr], ?7§, 77, {Xvdu), or XiidofxaL,) for- 
getfidness, oblivion, e. gr. Xn^nv XajuLjSd- 
vBLv, to forget, 2 Pet. i. 9. The word oft. 
occ. in Class, and Sept. and the phrase in 
Jos. Ant. ii. 9, 1, & 6, 10. JEl. Y. H. iii. 
18. H. A. iv. 35. 

Ar]vd^, ou, 6, 77, prop, and prim, a 
trough, for drinking or watering. Horn. 
Hymn, in Merc. 104, (as also in Sept. Gen. 
XXX. 39, 42,) but in later writers, as Theocr. 
Id. xiv. 17, a wine-trough, icine-vat. And 
so in N. T., but in two senses : I. the upper 
vat, or press, into which the grapes were 
cast and trodden by men, Rev. xiv. 19, sq. 
xix. 15. Sept. Neh. xiii. 15. Is. ixiii. 2. 
Diod. Sic. iii. 63. Anacr. lii. 4. It was 
generally dug in the earth, the sides being 
plastered ; but it was sometimes hewn in a 
rock, and had always a grated opening 
near the bottom, through which the liquor 
flowed off into a lower vat, like a cistern. 
— II. the lower vat, or reservoir, carefully 
stuccoed like the Xclkkol of the Greeks, 
for holding wine or oil, (and so equiv. to 
vTroX-nvLou,) Matt. xxi. 33, (with which 
comp. Mk. xii. 1. Is. v. 2.) and so Sept. 
and later Class. See my note in loc. 

At} po's,ov, 6, either from the obs. Xdw, 
whence XaXiw, to talk, as KXijpo^ fr. 



KXdco^ ^j/pos fr. ^dco, cf>Xrjpnc: nnd (jiXij- 
i/os, nonsense, fr. cjiXtu), to babble ; or 
rather fr. some Oriental term, whence 
came the A.-S. Iceran, tlic Germ. Ichren, 
and our^o learn, in its original active sense, 
of which the primary notion was simply to 
tell, inform ; whence (like our verb to tell) 
it came at length to mean teach. Thus as 
our word lore, from Iteran, means some- 
thing taught, and our tcde, from tellan, 
something told, so Xijpo^ prop, signifies 
sojnethi?ig fold, a tale, and, by use, a mere 
tale, a fiction, (Athen. p. 117,) or mere 
talk, idle gossip, as in Lu. xxi v. 11, k<pd- 
vi](Tav ivoDTTLOu avTcov (for auToTs) wael 
Xf]p09 n-d prijULai-a avTcov. Similarly we 
have in Xen. An. vii. 7, 24, 'UpaKXEidr} 
Xypo? TrdvTa eSSkel ELvai. Lucian, Tim. 
1, airavTa TauTU X7]p09 dvaTriiprjvE, 
Jos. Bell. iii. 8, 9, el imi] Tovra X. eltj. 

At/o-ttjs, ov, 6, {XifL^oidaL, fr. XifC^, 
plunder,) in Class, prop, cc plunderer, or 
robber, of any kind whatever, whether by 
land or by sea, esp. the latter, as the word 
is used in Eurip. Cycl. 1 12, and often in 
Thucyd. The former sense is alone found 
in the N. T. as Matt. xxi. 13. xxvi. 55, 
where the word almost always denotes rob- 
hers, such as our highwaymen. In John 
X. 1, /<:\£7n-7]5 Koi Xri(TTi]<s, the terms dif- 
fer exactly as our thieves and highicaymen, 
but are there united in order to strengthen 
the sense. At John x. 8, KXtTTTai eIg-I 
Kal XriarTal, the expression is figurative, 
as designating ' exceedingly avaricious and 
rapacious persons.' See more in my note. 
As to the criminals crucified with our 
Lord, of whom mention is made, Matt, 
xxvii. 38, 44. Mk. xv. 27, the best Expo- 
sitors are agreed that there the term signi- 
fies not lit. robbers, but brigands, free- 
booters, insurgents against the Roman go- 
vernment. The term, indeed, was applied 
not only to robbers, but to pillagers in tear, 
(see Thuc. ii. 22, 67. iii. 1. iv. 2. vi. 6. 
vii. 4, 10. viii. 40,) and also to those free- 
booters, who carried on a sort of private and 
petty warfare, for plunder only, as Thuc. 
iv. 67, et al. Xen. Hist. iv. 5, 35. Now 
this was in some measure the case witli 
the persons in question, they being proba- 
bly political insurgents, who, under the 
specious pretext of liberty, (namely, to 
deliver their country from the Roman 
yoke,) had taken up arms on a principle 
of resistance to tyranny. Such persons 
are freq. mentioned in Josephus by the 
term \r](T^ai, a term, of conr, e, given them 
by the Romans. So J. Formicus, vi. 31, 
says : " solent latronibus accenseri qui 
hello civili vincuntur." iVnd there was at 
that time a sort of civil war carrying on in 
Judsea. But whatever might be the prin- 
ciple on which they took up arms against 



A 



244 



AI K 



the Roman power, their practices were at 
the best lawless, and accordingly merited 
the censure implied in the term KUKovp- 
yot, as bestowed upon them by St. Luke, 
xxiii. 32, and probably adopted in order 
to avoid the harsher term, sometimes not 
* merited, XricTTai, 

A^i|/^ts, £0)9, 17, (Xa/x/Saj/w,) a receiv- 
ing^ receipt^ Phil. iv. 15, for which see in 
Aoo-is. Ecclus. xli. 19. The plural is 
chiefly found in Class, as Plut. Alcib. 1. 

Aiav, (prop, an accus. taken adverbi- 
ally, by ellips. of Kara, of the old noun 
Xta, from Xio), See Lennep.) vera/ much^ 
exceedingly^ e. gr. with a verb, Matt. ii. 
16, kQvfxudQr] Xiav. xxvii. 14, and with 
adj. Matt. iv. 8, opos vxjfnXov Xiav. viii. 
28. Mk. ix. 3. Sept. and Class. With 
other adverbs, Mk. i. 35. vi. 51. xvi. 2, 
and Class. For ol virtp X'lav^ 2 Cor. xi. 
5. xii. 11, see in virepXiav. 

Ai/3ai/os, ou, o, prop, arhor tJiurifera^ 
the tree which produces frankincense. 
In later writers & N. T. frankincense^ — 
to Xt/SaywTos, a transparent and fragrant 
gum, which distils from incisions in the 
tree, and was used by the ancients as in- 
cense, (comp. Ex. XXX. 34.) Matt. ii. 11. 
Rev. xviii. 13. Sept. and Class. 

At/Sai/toTos, ou, o, (Xi/3ai/09,) prop. 
frankincense ; but in N. T. meton. a censer 
for burning incense, thurihulum^ Rev. viii. 

3, i.\U3V XlfBaVCOTOV \pV(TOVV. 

AijSgpTlyos, ou, 6, (Lat. libertinus^) a 
freed-man of Rome, either personally made 
free, or born of freed parents. In N. T. 
Acts vi. 9, TLvk^ TU3V EK T^s orvvaywyij^ 
Ttj^ XEyo/iximi^ Al^eptlvvou, ' certain of 
those belonging to the synagogue of the 
Libertines so called;' meaning, it is sup- 
posed, either manumitted slaves, of Gentile 
origin, but who had become proselytes to 
the Jewish religion, and had a synagogue 
at Jerusalem; or Jews by birth, but taken 
captive by the Romans, and afterwards 
manumitted, and who formed a synagogue 
by themselves at Rome : but see my note 
in loc. 

AiOago), f. ao-o), (Xi6o5,) to stone, pelt 
with stones, in order to wound or kill, foil, 
by acc. John x. 31, 32, 33. Acts v. 26. 
xiv. 19. 2 Cor. xi. 25. So Sept. 2 Sam. 
xvi. 6, 13, XLddlELu kv XlQoL'5. Pol. X. 29, 
5. Strabo, p. 1031. Arrian ap. Suid. In 
John xi. 8. Heb. xi. 37, the term is used 
of the punishment of stoning, equiv. to 
XlQo^oXeu}. 

AidLvos, rj, ov, adj. (Xi'0os,) of stom, 
i. e. made of stone. John ii. 6, vSpiai 
XidivaL. 2 Cor. iii. 3. Rev. ix. 20. Sept. 
and Class. 

Aido(3oX&(o, f. vara), (Xt6os, (3dX- 
Xo),) to throw stones at any one, to stone, 



i. e. in order to wound or kill, with acc. 
Matt. xxi. 35. Mk. xii. 4, et al. As a 
Mosaic punishment, John viii. 5. Heb. xii. 
20. Plut. X. 202. 

Ai0o§, ov, 6, a stone, (fr, Xico, attenuo, 
to break up, lit. a rock broken up into 
smaller parts, each a stone ; as i|Aa/x/xos 
and \j/d/uLado^, from xl/dw, to break up,) 
I. PROP. 1 ) said of small stones. Matt. iv. 3, 
'iua ol X'lQol ovtol dpToi yivuDVTai. ver. 6, 
al. Sept. 2) of stones for building. Matt, 
xxiv. 2. Mk. xiii. 1, Trorairol Xidoi, 
ver. 2. Lu. xix. 44. Xen. Mem. iii. 1, 7. 
Of a mill-stone, X. /uuXi/cos, Mk. ix. 42. 
Hdian. iii. 1, 14. Of a stone for closing 
the entrance of a sepulchre, Matt, xxvii. 
60, 66. Sept. Gen. xxix. 2, 3, 8, 10. Luc. 
de Luctu 19. Of stone tablets, 2 Cor. iii. 
7, comp. Ex. xxxi. 1, 4. Of idols carved 
in stone or marble. Acts xvii. 29. Sept. 
Deut. iv. 28. xxviii. 36. Of precious 
stones, XtOos Tifxio?, Rev. xvii. 4, and 
Sept. oft., Jos., and Hdian. iv. 21 ; fig. I 
Cor. iii. 12. X/Oos mcrTrts, Rev. iv. 3. 
xxi. 11. — II. FIG. said 1) of Christ, as 
XiOos dKpoya)viaTo<s, Eph. ii. 20. 1 Pet. 

ii. 6. As Xi0o9 X^wv, 1 Pet. ii. 4. As Xido9 
TrpocrKOjjLfiaTo^, stone of stumhling, Rom. 
ix. 32, 33. IPet. ii. 7. 2) of Christians, 
as XidoL X^wvTE^, 1 Pet. ii. 5. 

AiOoo-rp WT0 9, ov, 6, V, adj. (XtSos, 
(TTpudVvvfjLL,) prop. & lit. stone-paved, App. 
Bell. Civ. iii. 26, kv XidoaTpuiTw ttoXel. 
Arrian Epict. iv. 7, 37, o-ot (xeXel ttws dv 
kv XiQcaTpw^oL^ [oiKiJiuacri] olkyicf^te, 
i.e.' houses decorated with tesselated or 
Mosaic pavements,' as was customary at 
Rome after the time of Sylla. In N. T, 
neut. TO XiQocTTpojTov, the pavement, i. e. 
a tesselated pavement of Mosaic work as 
above. John xix. 13, 6 HiXaTos — nya.- 
yEV E^u) Tov 'ItjctoDi/, koX EKdOiasv kirl 

TOU (S-nfJ-aTO? £t§ TOTTOV XEyOfXEVOV XtGo- 

(TTpuiTov ; where see my note ; i. e. ' he 
led Jesus out of the prsetorium, whither 
the Jews might not enter, and took his 
seat upon the public tribunal, ^rjpLa, which 
stood upon a tesselated pavement ;' comp. 
Jos. B. J. ii. 9, 3. 

AiKfjidui, f. -ncru), {XiKfjio^, a win- 
nowing-fork,) to winnow grain, which in 
the East is done by throwing it with a fork 
against the wind, which scatters the straw 
and chaff, Hom. II. v. 500. Xen. GEc. 
xviii. 2, 6. Hence by impl. to scatter, dis- 
perse, Sept. Is. xvii. 13. Amos ix. 9. 
Wisd. xi. 19. In N. T. fig. Matt. xxi. 44. 
Lu. XX. 18, ov dv nricrri (o Xi0os), 
XLKfjLTKrEi avTOv, 'it shall scatter him to 
the winds,' i. e. ' crush him in pieces, make 
chaff of him.' So Sept. Dan. ii. 44. Job 
xxvii. 21, XiKfx-ncrEL avTov ek xou tottov 
avTOv. 



AIM 



245 



Aor 



At/A^i/, tyos, o, (fr. obs. Xico, laevigo, to 
smoother!, lit. a place where the waves are 
evenly spread, smooth, or still. See on 
.\.t/ui/»},) a haven^ harbout\ port. Acts xxvii. 
12, and Sept. 

Ai/xi/Tj, t]<s^ 77, (Xio), laevigo, fr. the part, 
pass. XtXi/jLtvo^, whence XtyU£i/ov, Xifxtvi]^ 
Xi/uLvi], and per metathesin XijULijv^) prop, 
any standing water, pool, lake, e. gr. the 
lake of Gennesareth, Lu. v. 1. absol. ver.2, 
al. Of a lake of burning sulphur, yeevva. 
Rev. xix. 20. Sept. 

Atyuos, ov, 6, {XeIttu), XiXc i/x/xai, ) 
prop, /'ail are, want, i. e. of food, hence 
hunger, famine, 1) of individuals, hunger, 
2 Cor. xi. 27, iv Xijulw Kal Sixf/EL. Lu. xv. 
17. Rom, viii. 35. 2) of cities or coun- 
tries, famine. Matt. xxiv. 7, 'icrovrai Xi- 
fxoi Kal XoijuiOL. Lu. iv. 25. Sept. & Class. 

A LVOV, ov, TO, prop, flax, e. gr. the 
plant, Sept. Ex. ix. 31. Xen. Ath. ii. 11, 
12; also as worked up into cloth, linen, 
Horn. 11. X. 661. In N. T. the cloth 
formed into a garment. Rev. xv. 6, hd&- 
SvfxivoL Xiuov KaQapoi/. Comp. Sept. Is. 
xix. 9. So also in Horn. 11. ix. 661. Od. 
xiii, 73. ^schyl. Suppl. 114, 125. Put 
also for the wick of a candle or lamp, i. e. 
a strip of linen. Matt. xii. 20, XLvov tvc^o- 
fiEvov ov cr^ioTEL, ' the smoking wick he 
will not quench.' The nearest approach 
to this use is that by which the word stands 
for flaxen thread, as in Eurip. Orest. 1431, 
1436. 

At-n-apos, a, ov, adj. (Xi-tto?, as v^a- 
p69 fr. vdo9, &c.) fat, e. gr. ^-np'ia, Xen. 
Cyr. i. 4, 11 ; or anointed with oil, &c. 
Horn. Od. XV. 332, and, from the shining 
appearance of the skin being regarded as 
indicative of good health, fidl, fresh, said 
of the goddess Themis, Hesiod Theog. 
901. Plutarch. Ages. 29. So Jerem. v. 
28, ' they are waxen fat ; they shine.' 
So also it denotes, by implication, the 
being at ease in one's condition, Hom. Od. 
xi. 136. xxii. 368. Hence in N. T. it is 
used of things such as belong to ornament 
and luxury, in the sense precious, sump- 
tuous. Rev. xviii. 14, ttavTa nra Xncapa 
Kai Ta XajUL'jrpa. aTrcoXexo. So Hom. II. 
xxii. 406, we have XiTrap-^v KaXvirTprjv. 
Pind. Olymp. viii. 108, XtTrapos Koarfio^. 

Alt pa, as, 77, Lat. libra, a pound, i. e. 
in weight, John xii. 3, Xa^ovcra Xii-pav 
fivpov. xix. 39. It is not a mere Hellen- 
istic term, since Pollux and Eustath. tes- 
tify its use in the early Greek writers. 
The XiTpa varied in different countries ; 
the Roman libra was divided into twelve 
ounces, equal to about 12 oz. avoirdupois. 

Ail//-, Xt/3o9, 6, (fr. Ai(Bv7], Africa,) for 
the S. or S. W. wind, lit. the African, 
Pol. X. 10, 1. Hdot. ii. 95. Sept. Ps. 



Ixxviii. 26. In N. T. meton. for South, 
the southern quarter, Acts xxvii. 12. Sept. 
and Class. 

Aoyia, as, 17, {Xiyoo, to collect,) prop, 
a collection of any articles. In N. T. ap- 
plied toacollectionorcontribution of money 
for charitable purposes, 1 Cor. xvi. 1. The 
word is not found in the Class, writers; yet 
that it was used by them, we cannot doubt, 
since Suidas and Hesychius attest that the 
plural, as in ver. 2, was used in the sense 
EKXoyai. It also occurs in the title of 
one of Epicharmus' Comedies, Aoyos- 
Kai Xoyiai, which was probably a satiric 
drama directed against the philosophers 
and rhetoricians, as aiar)(poKEpSEL9, and 
of which the title affords an example of 
the false antithesis ascribed to Epich. by 
Aristotle, Rhet. 111. The other signifi- 
cation assigned by those Lexicographers, 
KapTTocpopai, is not Classical, but Eccle- 
siastical, meaning sacred oblations, as tithes, 
&c. 

AoyiX^oiuLaL, f. icrojJiaL, (Xoyos,) de- 
pon. mid. aor. 1. iXoyicrafxiiv : also aor. 
1 pass. kXoyi(Tdi)v, fut. 1 pass. Xoyiadn- 
(TOfxaL, in the pass, sense. Even the pre- 
sent is used passively at Rom. iv. 4, 5, 24. 
ix. 8 ; not in Class, who confine that to 
the partic. pres. Hdot. iii. 95, and so Sept. 
to REASON, i. e. to use the reason, to think, 
consider. The prim, signif. of the word is 
to count up numbers ; whence its other 
significations, more or less figurative, arise ; 
as to ac-count, m-pute, re-count, reckon, 
reason, and finally, conclude, or form a 
conchosion, as it were after balancing the 
account, for crvXXoyLX^EorOaL. In N. T. it 
is used I. gener. in the sense to reason, 
Mk. xi. 31, Kai iXoyL^ovTO Trpos euvtov^, 
XiyovTE's, &c. similarly Wisd. ii. 1, we 
have eIttov yap eavToU, (Alex. & Compl. 
EV EavroT^,) XoyLcrajULEVoL ovk 6pdu}<s. 
And so Plut. vi. 393, X. ovk opdco^ : with 
oTi, Heb. xi. 19. tovto on, 2 Cor. x. 7, 
and Class, who, however, oft. use it ab- 
sol. ; foil, by acc. of thing, to think upon, 
consider, Phil. iv. 8, TauTa Xoytjto-Of. 
So Thuc. vii. 73, tuvtu X. Eur. Andr. 
316, TauTa ovv Xoyi'^ov. Xen. Athen. 
iii. 13, TauTa X. and oft. in Plato. In 
the sense of to reason out, think out, find 
out hy thinking, 2 Cor. iii. 5, oux iKavoi 
EcrfXEV acf)' EavTU)V,XoyLcra(rdaL Tt k.t.X. 
So Liban. Orat. xliv. p. 914, d<p' kavTwv 
avTo. XoyiX^OfXEVOL Kai aKoirovvTS^ ol 
SLKacTTai K. T. X. — II. of the result of 
reasoning, to conclude, judge, suppose, 
foil, by acc. and inf. Rom. iii. 28, Xoyt- 
^o'/i€0a yap, dLKaiovcrdaL 'ttlcttel avQpw- 
irov. vi. 11. xiv. 14. 2 Cor. x. 7, X. a<^' 
kavTov, xi. 5. Phil. iii. 13 ; foil, by oTt 
instead of acc. and inf. Rom. viii. 18. 
Sept. and Class. So gener. to reason, 
M3 



A or 



246 



Aor 



Jiid(je^ deem^ absol. 1 Cor. xiii. 11, vn- 
TT/os k\oyL(,6fxt]v : mth sh Tiva^ 2 Cor, 
xii. 6, and Class. ; also in the sense to 

pu7'pose, 2 Cor. x. 2, XoyiX^ofxaL ToXfx?]- 
crai. So Neb. vi. 2, XoyilofjLSVoL TroLrj- 
craL fxoL 7rovi]pLau, Comp. Ps. xxi. 11. 
Hos. vii. 15. — III. to reckon as or for any 
thmg, to county regard as^ with acc. and 
foil, by co§, 1 Cor. iv. 1, out(o9 r/uas Xoyi- 
X^idQu) avdpwTTos, cos VTrf]piTa<s Xp. Rom. 

viii. 36. Am. vi. 5 ; foil, by eU with acc. 
for or 05 any thing-. Rom. ii. 26, X. €t§ 
TTspLTOjULijv^ ' regarded as circumcised,' and 

ix. 8, TO. TeKva — XoyiX^ETaL tts crTripjULa^ 
' esteemed as a race,' as sons. Acts xix. 

27, £t§ ovokv XoyLcrdrjvaL^ 'be reckoned 
for nought,' be despised. Wisd. ix. 6, 
ovokv XoyLG-di'icrs.TaL (scil. Tts). Is. xl. 17, 
eh ohokv X. et al. in Sept. The idiom is 
one not found in Class, and is supposed to 
be a Hebraism fr. b for w?, lit. sh. So 
I Sam. i. 13, eXoyLcraTo avri^v 'H\t eh 
fjLeQvovcrav. Lament. iv. 2, EXoyi'crOijcraj/ eh 
dyyeXa 6(TTpaKLva. Though XoyiX^ecrdaL 
eh does occur in Class, as Xen. Cyr. iii. 1, 
19, yet only in the prim, and proper sense. 
Hovy'ever in Eurip. Hec. 739, we have ap' 
eKXoyLX^ofjiaL ye irpo'S to dvcrfxevk'S MaX- 
Xov <ppeva<s toGos, ' regard his mind as 
inimical.' Foil, by /xsTa with gen. to 
reckon icith or fo, i. e. to count as. Mk. xv. 

28. Ln. xxii. 37, ftsTa dvoficov eXoyiadr}. 
So 'TrpocrXoyLX.ea-daL fxe^d^ Ps. Ixxxvii. 
4. — IV, to reckon or count to anyone, prop. 

to put to one's account,' foil, by dat. 
Rom, iv. 4, Tco ok kpyaX^ofxivw 6 jULLcrOd^ 
ov XoyiX^eTaL kutcc y^doLV. So JEl. H. 
An. iii, 11, XoyV^eTat oi (to him) pucrdou. 
Dio Chrysost. xiviii. p. 534, ovok oi yo- 

VeX<S TOtS TEKVOL'S CiVTL TOOV dv aXoo jXCLT OiV 

Ttts evyd<3 XoyiX^ovTaL. 1 Cor, xiii. 5, ov 
X. TO KUKov. 2 Cor. V. 19. 2 Tim. iv. 16, 
fii) avToT? XoyLC-deii] ! So Sept. 2 Sam. 
xix. 19. Hence fig. to impute.^ attribute^ 
prop. foil, by dat, of pers. and acc. of thing, 
but often in the pass, construction. 1) 
gener. Rom. iv. 6, cj 6 Gsos XoyiX^eTuL 
CLKaLocrvvi]v ycoph epycov. ver. 11. So also 
of EVIL, to impute., lay to one's charge., and 
with a neg. not to impjute., i. e. to overlook., 
forgive., Rom. iv. 8, pLUKdoLo^ dvijo <Z ov 
fxi^ XoyL(rr]Tat IvvpLcs dpapTiav. 2) also 
foil, by eh Tt, e. gr. Rom. iv. 5, 9, kXo- 
yicrdi} Tw 'AfSpadpL ?? ttlottl? eh olkulo- 
(rvvt]v^ i. e. ' AlDraham's faith was imputed 
to him as righteousness,' he w'as treated on 
account of it as if righteous. So with v 
TTLGTL's or the like implied, Rom. iv. 3, 
22. Gal. iii. 6. Ja. ii. 23; with eh impl. 
Rom. iv. 10, 23, 24. 

Aoyi/co?, t?, OI/, adj. (Xoyos,) prop. 
' endued with the Xo'yo?, or faculty of 
speech.,'' and also the faculty of speaking, 
oratory. Also used to qualify the subst. 



Tex^ih so as to denote logic, or the art of 
reasoning. But most freq. it means, ' en- 
dued with the fticulty of reason^' rcdional, 
as opp. to a\oyo9, (Arr. Epict. i. 2, 1. 
Anthol. Gr. iii. p. 87,) being thus em- 
ployed by the philosophers, who designate 
man as X^u)ov Xoy. having (pvcLv XoyiKtiv. 
Hence was derived the use in N. T. ' per- 
taining to the reason' or the understanding 
in man, as distinguished from his material 
part ; what Plato calls the voepov Kai Xo~ 
yiKou p.epo<3. Thus St. Paul, Rom. xii. 
1, exhorts his converts to 'present, on the 
spiritual altar, their bodies, a liviiig sacri- 
fice,' as opposed to that of dead animals, as 
Ti]v XoyLia]v XaTpeiav., ' the service of the 
reason or understanding.' So Rom. vii. 25, 
we have vot covXeveiv, And so Porphyr. 
de Abst. ii, 45, speaks of a voepd 3'ucria, 
and Jambl. Y. Pyth. § 229, says that Py- 
thagoras required a worship not by slain 
animals, but ol sTrtcrTTj/xoi/i/crj? ^epa- 
TT eta's. Or it may be explained spiritual 
service, that of the heart and life, 'in 
spirit and in truth,' John iv. 24. So in 
Test. XII. Patr. 547, we have 'Trpoarcpepovat 
X. XaTpeiav. Both senses, indeed, may 
have place ; q. d. ' rational and conse- 
quently spiritual service,' such as becomes 
rational creatures, as offered to the great 
source of reason, whose spiritual nature 
requires that we should worsliip him ' in 
spirit and in truth.' So Phild, p. 850, 
says that the purest part of the worshipper 
is the 'TTvevp.a XoyLKov. The former^ 
however, must chiefly be intended, because 
it is not worship, but service, by ' bringing 
every action and even thought to the obe- 
dience of Christ,' that is here required. 

Aoyiov, ov, TO, (neut. of Xoyio?,) 
prop. ' something uttered,' efxitum, (so Ps. 
xix. 14, Ta Xoyia tov crTopiaTo^ ftou,) 
but, by use, ' something purporting to be 
from God,' a divine comimmiccttion, whether 
in answer to some inquiry, namely, an 
oracular resporise, or an aniiouncement of 
future events, equiv. to the Homeric 3'£o- 
TTpo-TTLOv, or the Attic xp^?cr/«-os. In N. T. 
a divine communicatvm, gener. 1) as re- 
gards the revelation of God in the Old 
Test. esp. the Law given from God by 
Moses, Acts vii. 38, Xoyia XjihvTa, or the 
divine doctrines and commands therein 
contained, espec. the divine promises to 
the Jews, Rom. iii. 2, tu Xoyta tov Gtov, 
said perhaps with reference to Ps. cvi. 1], 
Sept. (cvii. Heb.) ^ apeTTLKpavav to. 
Xoyta TOV Qeou. And so the phrase to. 
Xoy La TOV KvpLov and tu Xoyia in the 
Psalms. 2) of ' the doctrines revealed by 
God through Christ in the Gospel, Heb. 
V. 12, Ta orTOLyeZa ttj's dp')(^T]<5 tujv Xo- 
yLU)v TOV Qeov, ' the system of Divine 
1 truth' which we understand by the Chns- 



Aor 

tian reliaion. In 1 Pet. iv. 11, et -rts \a- 
XeI, (h^Koyia GsoC, scil. Xiywv^M means 
* something communicated hy supernatu- 
ral wisdom,' that of the Spirit ; as is espe- 
cially the case in the writings of the N. T. 
which accordingly are called by Procopius, 
p. 157, 17, to: \6yia tov B&ov. 

Aoyto9, ou, o, adj. (Xo'yo9.) In 
the earlier writers the word means learned^ 
equiv. to TroXuto-Tcop, Dionys. Hal. Ant. 
i. 7. Hdot. i. 1, ol Xoytoi, & ii. 77. iv. 
46. Pind. Pyth. i. 183. Nem. vi. 51. But 
it also meant eloquent^ and so it is used by 
Philo and Lucian. Hence it is a frequent 
epithet of Mercury. And such is the 
sense assigned to the word at Acts xviii. 
24, ayj/p Xo'yios, as said of Apollos. But 
the former sense there seems preferable, 
especially as it is alone found in Josephus, 
namely. Ant. ii. 5, 4. xvii. 6, 2. Of course 
the learning in question is sacred wisdom^ 
though the latter may be included, as is 
required by the term eXaXei. at ver, 25. 

Aoy t(r/>io§, ou, 6, (XoyiX^ofxai,) prop. 
' the act of reckoning,' or the art thereof, 
arithmetic^ Xen. Mem. iv. 7, 8 ; or compu- 
tation, as iv. 2, 21. Thuc. iii. 20. iv. 122. 
Far more frequently, however, it is used 
fig. of the act of reasoning and drawing 
conclusions, or simply cogitation^ reflexion^ 
Thuc. ii. 11. 40. In N. T. it signifies 
thought^ cogitation^ judgment^ as Rom. ii. 
15. gener. Wisd.ix. 14. Also device^ coun- 
sel^ as 2 Cor. x. 5, XoyLcrfJiov's Kadaipovv- 
TS9. Sept. Prov. vi. 1 8, Kapoia tektul- 
vofxivrj XoyLo-jULov^ KaKov's. Jer. xi. 19. 
Jos. Ant. V. 1, 26. Eccles. ^^i. 30, kX,n- 
Ti](Tav XoyLor/jLOvs ttoXA-ous, and often in 
Sept. 

Koyofxaxiui^ f. 770-0), (Xoyojuax^^5 
fr. Xoyo5, /uLaxVi) to strive about words, 
dispute about trifles, 2 Tim. ii. 14. Dionys. 
Areop. 

Aoyo iJLay^ia, as, 77, (Xoy os, fMUXOfMai,) 
word-strife, 1 Tim. vi. 4. 

Aoyos, ou, 6, (Xeyco,) word, as said 
of speech, ' any thing spoken also, as 
said of tJwught, ' the faculty by which any 
thing is thought out,' reason. A sense 
derived from that force of Xiyco, (to lay,) 
by which it means to lay, or pzit together, 
what is presented to the mind — the main 
office of reason. So the Latin ratio comes 
from pcLu), whence pdirTO}, ' to put toge- 
ther,' both prop, and fig. as Hom. Od. iii. 
18, Kaica p. I. WORD, both the act of 
speaking and the thing spoken, Lat. ora- 
Tio, and I. word, as uttered by the living 
voice, a speaking, speech, utterance, Lat. 
vooc. Matt. viii. 8, /movov iiire \6yov. Lu. 
vii. 7, al. Sept. Gen, xliv. 18, and Class. 
So eiTTELv Xoyov kuto. n-Lvo<s, to speak a 
word against any one, Matt. xii. 32, d<s 



Aor 

Tiva, id. Lu. xii. 10. Also 6 Xoyos tov 
OfoD, the word of God., his omnipotent 
decree, 2 Pet. iii. 5, 7. So Sept. Ps. xxxiii. 
6. Comp. Gen. i. 3. — 11. ivord, emphat. 
i. e. a saying, declaration, 1) gener. John 
vi. 60, (yKXi]p6<5 koTTLV ouTOs 6 Xoyo9. 
Lu. XX. 20. Matt. vii. 24, ocms clkovei 
fxov Tou<s Xoyov? tovtov<s. Sept. & Class. 
So in reference to words or declara- 
tions, either such as precede. Matt. xv. 
12, OL ^apiaraToL UKOuaavTe? tov Xoyov, 
i. e. in ver. 3, sq. xix. 22. comp. ver. 21, 
al. ; or follotv, John xii. 38. Acts xx. 35, 
al. and Sept. Foil, by gen. of thing, e. gr. 
o Xoyos sTrayyeXias, Rom. ix. 9. 
6pK(jojjiO(TLa'5, Heb. vii. 28. Also 6 Xoyos 
TOV TTpocpriTov, &c. thc ivord, declaration 
of the prophet, i. e. prediction, prophecy, 
Lu. iii. 4. John xii. 38. Acts xv, 15. 
2 Pet. i. 19. Rev. i. 3. In the sense of 
proverb, maxim, John iv. 37. ^1. V. H. 

1. 19. Lys. 115, 29. 2) in reference to 
religion, religious duties, &c. equiv. to 
doctrine, precept. Acts xviii. 15, £t o£ 
XfiTYifxd kcTTL nrepl Xoyov. xv. 24, oi 
Xo'yoi TT^s TTiCTTEcos. 1 Tim. iv. 6, Xoyos 
avdpoiTTajv. 1 Thess. ii. 13. Tit. i. 9. 
Espec. of God, 6 Xo'yos tov Qeov, word 
of God, divine declaration, oracle, John x. 
35. V. 38, or divine promise, Rom. ix. 6. 
Heb. iv. 2, et al. In relation to duties, 
&c. precept, John v. 24. viii. 55, al. Sept. 
Ex. XXXV. 1. So of the various declara- 
tions, precepts, oracles, relating to the in- 
structions of men in religion, the Word of 
God, i. e. the Divine doctrine, the doc- 
trines and precepts of the Gospel, the 
Gospel itself, Lu. v. 1, ukovelv tov 
Xoyov TOV Qeov. John xvii. 6, and oft, ; 
with tov Qeov impl. Mk. xvi. 20. Lu. i. 

2, al. 2 Tim. iv. 2, Kvpv^ov tov Xoyov, 
al. So 6 Xoyos tt/s dXridEia?, Eph. i. 13. 
^w^s, Phil. ii. 16. Trjs aroiTrjpLa?, Acts 
xiii. 26. Trj? (SacriXELa?, Matt. xiii. 19. 
TOV EvayyEXiov, Acts xv. 7. tov (ttuv- 
pov, 1 Cor. i. 18. T?7S j(^dpLT09 avTOv, 
Acts XX. 32. In the same sense of Christ, 
6 Xoyos TOV Xp. John v. 24. Col. iii. 16. 
TOV K.vpLov, Acts viii. 25. t?;s yapiTO's 
avTov, Acts xiv. 3. — III. icord, words, 
i. e. talk, discourse, speech, Lat. sermo, the 
act of discoursing, &c. 1) prop, and 
gener. Matt, xxii. 15, ottws avTov nrayi- 
oEvarMCTLv Ev Xoyui. Lu. ix. 28. 2 Cor. x. 
10. kv Xoyw, in word, in discourse,' 
Ja. iii. 2. 1 Tim. iv. 12. kv Xoyw kgXu- 
KELa<s, ' flattering words,' 1 Thess. ii. 5. 
Oid Xoyou, by word, orally. Acts xv. 27. 
In antith. Xo'yos and epyov, tvord and 
deed. Col. iii. 17. 2 Cor. x. 11, and oft. in 
Class. Xo'yos and dvvajULL?, 1 Cor. iv. 19, 
20. 1 Thess. i. 5. Also TTEpl ov ttoXi/s 
v/uuv 6 Xoyos, ' of whom we have much to 
say,' Heb. v. 11 ; with gen. 1 Tim. iv. 5, 
oid Xoyou Qeov kcu kvT&v^Eio?, ' throuo-]i 

M4 



247 



A or 



248 



A 01 



prayer TO God and supplication.' Jos. 
Ant. iv, 8, 24. Hdian. i. 4, 1. Of teachers, 
&c. discourse^ Uaching^ preaching^ Matt, 
vii. 28, OT£ avvnTtXacrev 6 'I. tous 
Xoyous TouTOus. Acts XX. 7, TrapeTeLVE 
Tov \6yov. 1 Tim. v. 17, kv Xoyw Kal 
SLdaarKaXLCC. X6yo9 aXrjOs/as, 2 Cor. vi. 
7. James i. 18. tj]9 KaTaWayrj^^ 2 Cor. 
V. 19. Of those who relate any thing, zz: 
nan-ation^ story ^ John iv. 39. Acts ii. 22, 
and Class. Meton. history^ treatise^ i. e. 
a book of narration, ttsoi tlvos^ Acts i. 1, 
and Class. In the sense of conversation, 
colloquy^ Lii. xxiv. 17. Xen. Ag. iii. 5. 
Hence ansicer, reply^ Matt. v. 37. 2) 
meton. for the power of speech^ delivery^ 
oratory^ eloquence, 2 Cor. xi. 6, t(5i60Tr7§ 
TO) Xo7(f'. 1 Cor. xii. 8. Eph. vi. 19. 
Hdian. vii. 5, 10. 3) meton. for the sub- 
ject of discourse ; topic, matter, thing, 
e. gr. both gener. Matt. xix. 11. Lii. i. 4, 
'iva eTTtyvw? Trspi (Lv K-aT?])(Tj6r]s \6yoiv 
Ti]v aarcpdKsiav. Acts viii. 21. Sept. and 
Class. ; and spec, matter of dispute or dis- 
cussion, question ; judicial, Acts xix. 38. 
Dem. 942, 17; moral, Matt. xxi. 24, 
ipcDT-ncio vfjtd^ Kayd) \6yov &va. Diog. 
Laert. Stilpo ii. 116, ^olovtov tlvu 
\6yov epwTTjcraL. — IV. ivord, i. e. talk, 
rumour, report. Matt, xxviii. 15, Kal 
dLE<pi]jUiL(Tdr] 6 Xoyos oCtos k. t. X. Mk. 
i, 45 ; foil, by irepL tlvo<s, Lu. v. 15, al. 
Sept. Jos. and Class. Hence for mere 
talk, shoiv^ Col. ii. 23, \6yov jxlv 
arocpLa^. Diod. Sic. xiii. 4, opp. to 
aXiiQsLa. — II. REASON, the reasoning 
faculty, as that power of the soul which is 
the basis of speech, Lat. ratio. Dem. 
783, 2, fXTi^iTTonr Ik Xoyov TauTa 
(XKoirelTE. Arr. Epict. i. 12, 26. In N. T. 
I. a ground, cause, reason. Matt. t. 32, 
TrapsKTo? Xoyov TvopvEia^. Acts x. 29. 
Sept. Eirl Xoyov, 2 Sam. xiii. 22. Pol. 
xxviii. 11, 7. Xen. An. vi. 2, 10. So 
Karra Xoyov, with reason, reasonably, ' for 
good cause,' Acts xviii. 14. 3 Mace. iii. 
14. Luc. D. Mort. xxx. 3. Thuc. iii. 39. 
— II. a reason, as demanded or assigned, 
i, e. a reckoning, account. 1) prop, avv- 
uipELv Xoyov fXETa TLV09, to take up an 
account with any one, i. e. to reckon with. 
Matt, xviii. 23. xxv. 19. airohihovai 
Xoyov^ to render an account, i. e. tt;? 
oiKovofiia^, Lu. xvi. 2. So Phil. iv. 15. 
simil. Diod. Sic. t. i. p. 148, o avyKECpa- 
XaLovfXEVov £ts apyvpiov Xoyov, 2) fig. 
account, i. e. such a relation, as shall 
give the reasons of any transaction, ex- 
plancdio7i ; so a.'Ko^ovvaL Xoyov, to give 
a^icount, e. gr. t;'}? a-va-Tpocj)?]^, Acts xix. 
40; foil, by iTEpi tivo<s. Matt. xii. 36. 
Rom. xiv. 12; absol. Heb. xiii. 17. 1 Pet. 
iv. 5, and so Sept. and Class. So Xoyov 
uIteTv TTEpi TLvcs, 1 Pct. iii. 15. Also 
Heb. iv. 13, tt^os ov h^Jiiv 6 Xoyo's, Sept. 



dirobL^. Xoyov, Dan. vi. 3. Diod. Sic. i 
37, cLTTooL^. Xoyov TTEpi. lii. 47. Dem. 
227, 26, ^L^ovaL Xoyov. 3) fig. Xoyou 
TTOLEicrdaL, to make account of i. e. regard, 
care for. Acts xx. 24, ovdsvo^ Xoyov 
TTOLOVfxaL, ' I am not moved by them.' 
Jos. Ant. ii. 5, 3, ixr]^iva X. avTov tt. 
Dion. Hal. Ant. ix. 50, Xoyov ovdsvo^ 
uvTcov. Theocr. Id. iii. 33, tv 8i (xev 
Xoyov ovSiva ttol^. — III. the Word, the 
Logos, in the writings of John, John i. 1, 
bis, 14. 1 John i. 1. v. 7. Rev. xix. 13; 
where it stands for the ' pre-existent 
nature of Christ,' i. e. that spiritual and 
Divine nature mentioned in the Jewish 
writings before and about the time of 
Christ, under various names; e.gr. (rocpia, 
Prov. viii. 12, 22, sq. Ecclus. ch. xxiv. 
Yios avdpwiTov, Dan. vii. 13; called 
in Philo, 6 TrpEafSvTaTo^ tov Qeov 
Xoyos, Opp. i. p. 207. Of this Divine 
Word, St. John commences his Gospel 
with affirming : kv ccpxy 6 Aoyos, /cat 
6 Aoyos r\v Trpo^ tov Oeov, kuI Oeos 
riv 6 Aoyos, John i. 1 ; and then also de- 
clares that this Word became flesh, and 
was thus the Messiah, ver. 14. Comp. in 
Baos II. 

Aoyx^-) n^i prop, ''the point of a 
weapon,' the triangular iron head of a 
lance or javelin. In N. T. lance, spear., 
John xix. 34, as sometimes Sept. and 
later Greek writers ; also Xen.- An. ii. 
2,9. 

Ao l3o p E CO, f. T70'a), {XoiSopo?,) to 
rail at, reproach, revile, with acc. .Tohn ix. 
28, &Xoid6pi](Tav avTov. Acts xxiii. 4. 
Pass. 1 Cor. iv. 12. 1 Pet. ii. 23. Sept. & 
Class. 

AoiSopia, as, ij, {XoLdopEco,) railing, 
reproach, 1 Tim. v. 14. 1 Pet. iii. 9. 
Sept. and Class. 

AoiSopo^, ov, 6, 77, prop. adj. railing, 
revilhig, but sometimes as subst. a railer, 
reviler, 1 Cor. v. 11. vi. 10. Sept. Prov. 
xxv. 25. Ecclus. xxiii. 8. Plut. vi. 676. 

A o tft o s, ov,b, pestilence, plague. Matt, 
xxiv. 7. Lu. xxi. 11. Sept. and Class, 
Fig. of a mischievous person, a pest. Acts 
xxiv. 5, EvpovTE^ yap tov civdpa tovtov 
XoLfMov. Sept. in 1 Sam. ii. 12. xxv. 25. 
Ps. i. 1. Ez. vii. 21. IMacc.x. 61. Dem. 
794, 5. 

AotTTos, r], ov, adj. (XetVco,) left, re- 
maining, other. 1) plur. Matt. xxv. 11, al 
XoLTTai TrapQivoL. Acts ii. 37, al. Absol. 
oi XoLTTOL, the rest, the others. Matt. xxii. 
6, al. and class. Neut. to. Xolttcl, Mk. iv. 
19, et al. Xen. Ag. ii. 22. Sept. 2) ad- 
verbially, as TOV XoLTTov, scil. ■)(^p6vov, in 
future, henceforth. Gal. vi. 17. Hdian. viii. 
4, 17. Xen. Cyr. iv. 4, 10. to Xonrdv,for 
the rest ; of time, henceforth, henceforward. 



AO Y 



249 



A Y X 



Matt. xxvi. 45, & Mk. xiv. 41, KadevSen-e 
TO XoiTToi/ ; i. e. sleep ye even still ? 1 Cor. 
vii. 29, al. and Class. Also, as to the rest^ 
finalhj, Eph. vi, 10. Phil. iii. 1, al. and 
Class, acc. Xoittoi/, and o Xolttov^ as to 
the rest, fincilly, hut 7iotv, 1 Cor. i. 16. iv. 
2, al, and Class. 

AooTpoi/, ou, TO, (Xouto,) prop, a 
bath, or water for bathing, washing. In 
N. T. the act of bathing, ablution, said of 
baptism, Eph. v. 26. Tit. iii. 5, 

Aouo), f. (TO), to bathe, wash, trans, said 
only of persons, &c. foil, by acc. Acts ix. 
37, \ov(TavTE<s avTvv : with acc. impl. 
and foil, by dird. Acts xvi. 33, 'dXovasv 
auTous d'TTo Tcov 7rXi]ya}V. Pass. John 
xiii. 10. Heb. x. 23, XeXovjULivoL to 
(TcojULa, and so Class. Fig. to cleanse, to 
purify, with acc. and diro, Rev. i. 5, 
Tto Xova-avTL rj/jid^ utto twv dfxapTioov 
rjfxujv, and conip. Is. i. 16. 

Au/co9, ou, 6, a ivolf, 1) prop. Matt. 
X. 16. Lu. X. 3. John x. 12. Sept. and 
Class. 2) fig. a rapaxiious and violent 
person, wolf-like, equiv. to Xvkoi^ ofxaioL 
in Arrian, Epict. i. 3. Matt. vii. 15, ettri 
XvKOL apirajE^. Acts xx. 29, Xukol 
(3apEL9. Sept. Zeph. iii. 4. Horn. II. iv. 
471. jElian V. H. v. 19. viii. 6. 

Av fxaivofxai, depon. (Xu/xtj,) prop. 
to stain, disgrace by insult or indignity, 

i. e. to insult, treat tvith indignity, foil, by 
dat. Hdot. ix. 79. In N. T. to make 
havoc of, destroy, with acc. Acts viii. 3, 
2auA.o§ ok kXvfxa'ivETO TrjV kKKXr\(TLav. 
So Jos. Bell. ii. 4, 1, of soldiers devas- 
tating a country ; and iv. 9, 7, or destroy- 
ing the truth. Ant. prooem. 1. The accus. 
is often found in the later writers, as 
Diod. Sic, Appian, and Pint. 

Aviriw, f. nau}, (Xuttij,) to affiict 
with grief, trans, pass, or mid. to be 
grieved, sorrowful. Matt. xiv. 9. xvii. 23, 
fXnTT/^Oijo-ai; a(p6dpa, et al. saepe, also 
Sept. and Class. In the sense of to 
aggrieve, occasion grief to, Eph. iv. 30 ; 
see my note there, and so often in Class. ; 
offend, Rom. xiv. 15, si Sk did (SpwjuLa 6 
ddeXcpo^ arov XvirsLTaL, i. e. 'stumbles 
in mind, being brought into self-condemna- 
tion,' namely, by being induced to do what 
he thought unlawful. 

AuTTtj, ^]s, 77, grief sorroiv, John xvi. 
21. Rom. ix. 2, & oft. and Class. Meton. 
for cause of grief , grievance, trouble, 1 Pet. 

ii. 19, \u7ra§, dolores, molestias. So plur. 
in Gen. iii. 17. Prov. xxxi. 6. Xen. Lac. 
vii. 6. Hier. i. 2. Isocr. Panath. d^j^ias 
Koi XuTTas. In sing. Thuc. vi. 59. 

Aucts, €0)9, 77, prop. ' a loosing or de- 
livering' from any thing that binds us, and 
impedes action ; and fig. from evil of any 
kind, or what implies constraint, as slavery, 



or civil obligations, to pay money, or per- 
form certain conditions. In N. T. the 
word is used of liberation from the con- 
jugal tie by separation or divorce, as 
1 Cor. vii. 27. 

Auo-tTEXfcO), f. 770-0), (Xuo-tTcXrjs, fr. 
Xuo), Tfc'Xos',) prop. ' to discharge any ex- 
pence' incurred in any thing. Hence, ' to 
make oneself useful,' to profit any one, 
Aristoph. Plut. 509, and often in Class. 
So Lu. xvii. 2, XvarLT&Xii avTw — rj, &c. 

i. e. ' it were better for him — than,' &c. 
Ecclus. xxix. 11. Xen. Cyr. ii. 4, 12. 

AvT pov, ov, TO, (Xuo),) the price paid 
for any one, ransom, the fine paid for set- 
ting free, lit. loosing- money, Thuc. vi. 5, 
and oft. Class, and Sept. The word is 
used fig. Matt. xx. 28, and Mk. x. 45, 
Sovvai Ttjv xp^vxnv avTov XvTpov dvTi 
'woXXcov, i. e. ' as a ransom paid by Him 
for the deliverance of many,' viz. from the 
bondage of sin and death, presenting it as 
an expiation or expiatory sacrifice. Comp. 
-^schyl. Choeph. 47, tl yap XvTpov 
TTEcrovTO^ aijULaTCS rrriSto ; 

AvTpoco, f. COCO), {XvTpov,) to ran- 
som, ' let go free for a ransom,' Diod. Sic. 
xix. 73, ult. ; said espec. of ransoming a 
captive from the enemy. In N. T. only 
used in mid. (in a deponent sense) Xv- 
Tpoofxai, f. (xiarofxaL, ' to cause to let go 
free for a ransom,' i. e. to ransom, to re- 
deem, deliver, namely, by paying a ransom 
oneself, and not the ransomed party, Jos. 
Ant. xiv. 14, 1, X. tu^v iroXEfxiujv avTov: 
fig. with acc. Lu. xxiv. 21, XvTpovardai, 
Tov 'lorpaijX, i. e. from the power of the 
Romans, and gener. to raise them from 
their present fallen state. Also foil, by 
dTTo, Tit. ii. 14, X. 77/ias diro ndcrj^ 
dvo/uLLa^, i. e. ' from the power and penalty 
of iniquity.' A sense this confined to the 
later writers, as Polyb. xviii. 16, 1, T7/y 
LEpdv xvopav X, Diod. Sic. often, and 
found in the Sept. and the Apocryphal 
writers. Aor. 1, pass. kXvTpuicrQriv m a 
pass, sense, with ek, 1 Pet. i. 18. Sept. for 
b^y Is. xliv, 22, sq., also for niD with 
uTTo, Ps. cxix. 134 ; with ek Ps. cxxx. 8. 
1 Mace. iv. 11. Act. Thom. § 15. pr. Plut. 
Cimon 9 ult. Diod. Sic. v. 17. 

AuTpO)(ri§, £0)9, 77, {XvTpOOfJiai,) 

prop, redemption, deliverance, Lu. i. 68. 

ii. 38. Sept. and Class. Fig. from sin aiid 
its consequences, Heb. ix. 12. 

AvT p(i3Tr,<s, ov, 6, (XvTpoojULo.i,) a re- 
deemer, deliverer. Acts vii. 35. Sept. and 
iat. Class. 

Avxvia, as, 77, {Xvxi^09,) a €a?idelabra^ 
lamp-stand; a word of the later Greek 
for the earlier to Xux^'iov, Matt. v. 15, et 
al. Sept., Joseph., Luc. Asin. 41. Em- 
blematically, in the Apocal., of a Christiau 
M 5 



A YX 



250 



MAT 



church, Rev. i. 12. ii. 1, al. ; of a Chris- 
tian teacher or prophet, Rev. xi. 4. 

Avxi^o?^ ov^ 6, a lights i. e. portable, 
as a candle^ lamp^ or lantern, Slc, Sept. 
and later Class. In N. T. Matt. v. 15, 
ovdk KaiovcTL \vyvov. Mk. iv. 21. Lu. 

xii. 35, 'icTTuxrav vjxoov — ol \vxvol kulo- 
fx&voL^ 'let your lumps stand burning,' i. e. 
' be ye ready, watch.' So 6 Xuxyo's tov 
o-w/xaT-os, of the eye, as being that part of 
the body which alone is capable of receiv- 
ing light, and thus directing the whole 
body, so the Latin lumina for the eyes^ 
Matt. vi. 22. Lu, xi. 34. Fig. of John 
the Baptist as a distinguished teacher, 
with reference to his luminous knowledge 
of divine truths, John v. 35 ; of the Mes- 
siah, TO ' ApvLov^ Rev. xxi. 23, as an aTrav- 
ya<Tixa from the Divine glory, (see Heb. 
i. 3,) enlightening the new Jerusalem. 

A u CO, f. uo-to, to loose^ loosen^ &c. what 
is fastened, or bound, to U7ibind^ untie^ 

1. prop, of a ligature, or any thing fastened 
by it, Mk. i. 7, Xvarai tov l/navTa tcov 
virodif]iuidT(x)v auTou. Lu. iii. 16. John i. 
27. Acts vii. 33. X. viro^mxa^ ' by loosing 
its straps.' Sept, Ex. iii. 5. Horn. II. xvi. 

804, X. ^(X)p7]Ka. Fig. TOV 0£<TjUidv tT]<s 

yXuxTcrri's^ i. e. impediment, Mk. vii. 35. 
Tds (hdlva^ TOV B'avdTov^ Actsii. 24. .^1. 
H. An. xii. 5. Here belongs the phrase 
o kdv Xvory^ kirl 7?}?, scTctt XeXv- 

/mivov kv ToTy ovpavol?^ Matt. xvi. 19. 
xviii. 18, i. e. ' whatsoever ye shall loose 
(open) on earth,' &c. (see Atoj, II.) Of 
animals, tied, e. gr. iruyXov^ Mark xi. 

2, sqq. Lu. xix. 30, 31, 33. absol. Matt, 
xxi. 2; foil, by cnrd Trj9 ^aryr]?, Lu. xiii. 
15. Sept. and Class. Of a person swathed 
in bandages, grave-clothes, John xi. 44. — 

II. spoken of persons bound, to let go 
loose^ to setfree^ e. gr. prisoners, Acts xxii. 
30, EXuaEi; auT-oi/ (aTTO to^v Sscr/xcov). Rev. 
ix. 14. XX. 3, 7, £/c tTj's (pvXaKTj^^ fig. Lu. 

xiii, 16, 1 Cor. vii. 27, XiXvaat uTrd yv- 
vaLKO^ ; i. e. art thou free from a wife T 
free from conjugal ties. See my note. — 

III. to loosen^ dissolve^ sever^ break, e. gr. 
Td§ arcpayida?. Rev. v. 2, 5. So Charit. 
p. 97, Xvalv TO. ypo-ixfxaTa, and Thuc. i. 
32, Xv&L TCfs kiTLcxToXa.'i. Acts xxvii. 41, 
7/ TTpu/uLva kXvETo, ' but tho stern went 
to pieces,' from the violence of the waves. 
So Ach. Tat. iii. p. 163, to TrXolov di- 
sXvdfi. Virg. -^n. x. 305, solvitur, scil. 
puppis, probably with allusion to the un- 
loosing of the crirdpTa, or hempen cord- 
age, which bound the planks of a vessel 
together. So Horn. II. ii. 135, dovpa 
(rkarri'Tra vewv^ kol (nrdpTa XiXvvTai, 
Now such were called pafjifxaTa tcov 
vscov. Fig. of an assembly, to dissolve, 
break up, as Trjv (jvvayuiyi]v, Acts xiii. 
43. Diod. Sic, xix, 25, t^v kKKXy]<jLav, 



Horn. II. i. 305, dyopriu. — Hence, IV. by 
impl. to destroy, 1) prop, of buildings, 
to demolish, John ii. 19, XvcraTS tov vaov 
TovTov, witli allusion to the body as a 
temple, (so Philo uses the term lEpov,) for 
the abode of its august tenant, the soul, 
Eph. ii. 14, Xu(ra§ to /jlecotolxov. So 
in the Class, this verb is used of destroy- 
ing large massy edifices, as city w^alls or 
bridges; with allusion to the unloos- 
ing of the compages lapidum. And so 
solvere compages in Latin. So, of the 
world, e. g. to be destroyed by fire, to dis- 
solve, melt, 2 Pet. iii. 10, 11, 12. 2) fig. 
of a law, to loosen its obligation, i. e. either 
to make it void, do aivay, John x. 35, oh 
ouvaTUL XvQrjvaL rj ypa(pr}, where see my 
note, Dem. xxxi. 12; or, to break, to 
violate, as Matt. v. 19, in opposition to 
TTOLELV. John vii. 23, 'Lva /xt) Xvdri 6 vo/mo^^ 
M. v. 18, TO ad^jSaTov. Thuc. vi. 14, 
T0V9 v6fxov9. Xen. An. iii. 2, 10, Tas 
crTTovSa? Kai tou<s opK0U9. Hither, at 
least in the former sense, I would refer the 
expression, 1 John iii. 8, tovtq k<pa- 
vepuidr} 6 Tto? TOV Ghou, 'lva Xvay tu 
'ipya TOV ALa(36Xov, where the meaning 
is simply, ' that he might undo, do away 
with, the works of the Devil,' i. e. sin, 
misery, and death, namely, by his atone- 
ment, &c. Now there is here the same 
primary idea of untying. And as in Engl, 
we say to undo for untie, so the Greeks 
used XvELv of untying a knot, or unloosing 
a strap, to signify undo, annul, KUTap- 
ysLV. 



M. 

May EL a, a9, rj, (jua'yo9,) magic, plur. 
juayElai, magical arts, sorceries. Acts viii. 
11. Jos. Ant. ii. 13, 3, /xaygtat? Kai te- 
paTovpyiaL^. Plut. vi. p. 653. 

M « 7 € u to, f. Ev<Tu), ( lixdyo?,) to practise 
magic, sorcery, &c. intrans. Acts viii. 9, 
'Trpov7rrjp\E — fxnyEvuiV. And so Plut. 
Num. 15. Luc. Asin. 4. Macrob. 4. Dio 
Cass. p. 622, 24. 

Mayos, ov, b, magus, pi. fxdyoL, magi, 
the name for the priests and wise men 
among the Modes, Persians, and Baby- 
lonians ; see my note on Matt. ii. 1 ; prop. 
great, powerful, Heb. wdience comes 
the Gr. p.iya^s, Lat. mag-nus, for mag-inus. 
Comp. Jer. xxxix. 3. Xen. Cyr. iv. 5,51. 
vii. 5, 57. ^1. V. H. ii. 17. Hdian. iv. 12, 

6, 8. In N. T. said 1) of the Magi from 
the East, (Persia or Arabia,) w^ho came to 
salute the new-born Messiah, Matt. ii. 1, 

7, 16. 2) of a magician, sorcerer, diviner. 
Acts xiii. 6, 8, fxdyov, \lrEv6o7rpo(pi^Tr}v. 
Sept. often in Dan., and Class., as Hdian. 
iv. 12, 6, 8, -/Eschin. iii. 13, toioutos 



MAG 



251 



M AK 



^uc'cyos Kal y6j}9. Sometimes used with 
an implied notion of imposture, as Soph. 
(Ed. Tyr. 387, fxayov — ayvpTi]v. 

Ma67iT £ uo), f. fiuo-o), (/Lia0>;T>;?,) 
prop. 1) intrans. to he the disciple of any 
one, foil, by dat. Matt, xxvii, 57, kuI av- 
Tos tfxadiiT^va-E t(o 'Itjctou. Plut. Vit. 
X. Rhet. init. kjULaSjjTsvcre avTco Kal 
OeoTTo/xTTo?. 2) also trans, to train as a 
disciple, to teach, instriict. Acts xiv. 21, 
luLady}T&u(TavTE<s lkuvov^. Matt, xxviii. 19, 
/UL. iravTa to. eBvii, for /xaO^/Tas itoleIte. 
Pass. Matt. xiii. 52, />iaO?jT£u0£i? Ty (3aa. 
Tcov oup. where the sense is either, ' in- 
structed for the Messiah's kingdom,' so as 
to understand its nature ; or, ^ disciplined 
into the Messiah's kingdom,' i. e. con- 
verted to Christianity. 

Ma07;T7/?, ou, 6, {jULavddvco,) a disciple, 
scholar, follower of a teacher, 1 ) gener. 
Matt. X. 24, et al. sffipiss. and often in 
Class. So Jos. Ant. vi. 5, 4, Joshua is 
called o jULaBrjTr]? Ma>o'£W9. 2) spec, of 
the Twelve Apostles, Matt. x. 1. xi. 1. 
XX. 17. Lu. ix. 1, 3) emphatic, for true 
disciple, John xiii. 35. xv. 8. After 
Christ's death the term disciple took the 
wider sense of follower, believer, equiv. to 
Christian, Acts vi. 1, 2. xi. 26. 

ISlaQriT p La, as, t], {imadiiTt}^,) for the 
Attic fxad-i]'rpl?, a female disciple, i. e. a 
female Christian, Acts ix. 36, and Class., 
as Diod. Sic. ii. 52. Diog. Laert. iv. 2. 
viii. 42. 

ISlaivoiLLaL, f. jxavovfxai, {fxaco, to be 
eager after,) depon. prop, to be mad, to 
rave ; but also [li\^e insa?i{re in Latin) said 
fig. of persons who so speak and act, as to 
seem to others to be out of their senses, 
or acting under the influence of extrava- 
gant enthusiasm, John x. 20. Acts xii. 15. 
xxvi. 24, 25. 1 Cor. xiv. 23. Sept. and 
Class., as Eurip. Hec. 1270, av fxaivy. 
Iph. Taur. 1310. Xen. Mem. i. 3, 11. 

Ma/capi^6u, f. t(Tw, Att. fut. tw, 
{fiaKap,) to deem or call happy, with acc. 
of pers. Lu. i. 48. Ja. v. 11. Sept. Gen. 
xxx. 13. Is. iii. 11. Ecclus. xi. 28, and 
Class., as Horn. Od. xv. 537. Hdot. vii. 
45. Soph. (Ed. Tyr. 1195. Xen. Mem. i. 
6, 9, and often. 

Ma/cctyotos, a, ov, (a prose form, equiv. 
to the poet. jmuKap,) happy, blessed, e. gr. 
of God, 1 Tim. i. 11. vi. 15. Gener. Matt. 
V. 3, sq. Lu. i. 45. vi. 20, sq. Rom. iv. 7, 
al. sa3pe. With fxaXKov, Acts xx. 35, 
juLaKupLou k(jTL fxaXkov, more blessed is 
it,' &c. Compar. /jLaKapLooTEpcs, 1 Cor. 
vii. 40, and Eur. Troad. 567. Sept. and 
Class. 

MuKap L(T fx6?, ou, 6, [jmaKapLX^ct),) a 
calling or pronouncing happy, declaration 
of blessedness, felicitation ; hence Xeysiv 



Tov fxaKapLcrfxoi/ Tiyos, ~ fxaKapiX^tLv, 
Rom. iv. 6, 9. Gal. iv. 15, ti9 ovv i]v 6 /u. 
vfjiuyv ; ' how great then was your self-con- 
gratulation,' &c. ' how happy did you 
think yourselves.' 

MukeKXcv, ov, to, (fr. hat. mctcel- 
lum, ) a market-place for all kinds of pro- 
visions, 1 Cor. x. 25. Plut. Qua3st. Rom. 
54. 

MaKpav, adv. (pr. acc. fem. of fxa- 
/cpos, strictly for fxuKpav odov,) a long ivay, 
i. e. far off, Lu. xv. 20, fxaKpav clttL- 
yovTo^. Acts xxii. 21 ; foil, by aivo -rti/os, 
xvii. 27, al. Sept. and Class. With the 
art. o\ pcaKpav, those far off, the remote, 
i. e. from God, i. e. ' the Gentiles' as opp. 
to OL kyyv<s, the Jews, Eph. ii. 13. " So ol 
£t§ fxaKpav, Acts ii. 39. 

MaKpod EV, adv. {fxaKoo? & Bev, a 
syllabic suffix, denoting from,) from far, 
Mk. viii. 3, fxaKpSQiv vKovaiv. xi. 13, al. 
Sept. and later Class. ; aTro fxaKpoOEv, 
from far, Matt. xxvi. 58, et al. ssepe. Sept. 
and Class. 

M aKpoQv p-EU), f. 770-0), (fxaKpoQvfxo^, 
fr. fxaKp6<s, 0uyuos,) prop, to be long-minded, 
have longanimity. In N. T. it is used in 
the sense I. to be long-siffering, forbear- 
ing, to bear patiently offences or injuries, 
absol. 1 Cor. xiii. 4, r] dyait^ puKpodv- 
juleX, lit. ' bears up.' So Plut, viii. 345, say^ 
of those in the present life, that ' they are 
striving to swim from sea to land and reach 
home,' E^apLWdardaL kul fxaKpoBvixElv, 

Sl 0lKELa<S TTELpOdpEVOVS dpETY]^ (TUiX^ECT- 

6aL : foil, by £is Tiva, 2 Pet. iii. 9 ; by 
Eiri TLVL, Matt, xviii. 26, /x. Itt' Efxol, 
'have patience with me.' Lu. xviii. 7, 
fxaKpodvpcov Itt' avToT^, ' though he be, 
in respect to them' (i. e. the injured), ' long- 
sufiering,' slow to punish their injurers. So 
Ecclus. xxxii. 18, it is said, ov /jii] fxaKpo- 

OvjULT^CTEL (o JLvpLO^) EIT aVTOL^, SCil. TOiS 

TaTTELvol^. — II. to ivait patiently, be pa- 
tient, absol. Heb. vi. 15, outw, fxaKpoBv- 
/uLvora^, iirETv^E T77S ETrayysXta^, and 
Ja. V. 8, /jLaKpodvpvo-ccTE, and ver. 7, 
jULaKpodvjULujv £7r' avT(M, scil. Kapirio. So 
Artem. iv. 11. However, in those two 
passages there seems to be a blending of 
two senses, to patieiitly endure evils, and 
to pcdiently wait for the removal of the 
evils. 

MaKpodvfXLa, as, rj, {fxaKpoQvpiw,) 
longanimity, i. e. slowness to anger and 
punishment ; long-suffering, forbearance. 
1) gener. Rom. ii. 4, t^s jxaKpoBv jxia^ 
Tov Oeov Kan- a<ppov EL'S ; and so 1 Pet. 
iii. 20, n tou Oeou p. 2 Pet. iii. 15, 77 tov 
KvpLOV r]fx(x)v fx. Eph. iv. 2. Col, iii. 12. 
ITim. i. 16. 2Tim.iii.lO. iv.2. Sept.Prov. 
XXV. 15. Plut. Lucull. 33, dpETi^v ptu 

ETTEdELKVVTO, KUL fXaKpaQv plaV . 2) SpCC. 

patient endurance of evil, and waiting for 
M 6 



M AK 



252 



MAN 



its redress, Col. i. 11. Heb. vi. 12. Ja. v. 
10. Sept. Is. Ivii. 15. 

MaKpodv/ma)?, adv. patieiitly^ i. e. 
with indulgence, in all clemency, Acts 
xxvi. 3. 

Ma/CjOos, a, oi/, adj. {[xaKo^^ Dor. for 
fx{\Ko<s^ orig. juLaKspo^^ contr. to fxaKpo^ ; as 
TvayEpd^ fr. Trdyo^ or 7r»7yo?, -raKspd'S fr. 
T77/ca), &c. So our adj . length?/, fr. subst. 
length,) long, in all the senses of the term, 
whether of space or time ; as said of the 
former, namely, from one point to an- 
other, a long way off, far distant, Lu, xv. 
13, & xix. 12, aTTopi-udri £i§ ■)(^Mpav 
fxaKpav, and Class, as Hdian. vi. 7, 10, 
/ii. yrj. Xen. Cyr. v. 4, 20, fxaKpal Kai 
knri^oriQtLaL. Thuc. vii. 13, 6ia dpiray^v 
IxaKpau. In such a case we are to under- 
stand bdov aTTslvai, as Thuc. iii. 13. 
Of time, e. gr. fxaKpoo xf^ovw, Hdot. i. 32, 
and oft. in Class. In N. T. only neut. pi. 
fjLaKpd as adv. long, as /maKpa irpocrEvyp- 
IxsvoL, praying loiig, ' making long prayers,' 
Matt, xxiii. 14. Mk. xii. 40. Lu. xx. 47. 
Joseph. Ant. vi. 11, 10, ^u. ^cTraJoi/TO. 
Luc. Tim. 38, elitelv. M\. V. H. vi, 6, 
Xdi-p^iv, al. ssepe. 

M.aicpo\p6v 10^, ov, 6, 7?, adj. 
(jua/cpos, XP^^^^-t) long-lived ; lit. long- 
timed, Eph. vi. 3, tVa ea-T) fx. Sept. 
Plato in Timaso. Porphyr. V. Pyth. 24. 

Ma\a/cta, as, 77, {fiaXaKO's,) prop. 
softness, and fig. timidity, Pol. iii. 79, 4 ; 
effeminacy, Luc. D. Deor. x. 6, 8. In 
N. T. disease of body, Matt. iv. 23, 6epa- 
TTEVMU irdcrav uoarov Kai tt. fxaXaKiav. ix. 

35. x. 1. And so very often in Sept. of 
disorders of every kind both chronic and 
acute ; and gener. of a dangerous kind, 
even mortal ones ; as Gen. xlii. 4. 2 Chron. 
xxi. 19, And so Pseud. Hdot. Vit. Hom. 

36, says Homer died rf? fxaXaKuj. The 
original and proper import of the word, in 
this application, seems to have been simply 
indisposition of body without any formed 
disease, consisting chiefly in languor. 

MaXaKos, d, ov, adj. (/uaA.tio'O'a), fr. 
fjidXu), to rub down a rough surface and 
thoroughly s7noothe?i or soften it, as in tan- 
ning leather,) prop, soft, viz. to the touch, 
in opposition to crKXi)pd<s, stiff, hard ; 
spoken of raiment as made of soft mate- 
rials, fine texture, ifidTia luaXaKd, Matt, 
xi. 8. Lu. vii. 25. Luc. Saturn. 1, ea-drj- 
-ras evaudels kul fxaXaKa^. Hom. Od. 
i. 437, fJL. X'-'^^^ '• ^o- effeminate, spoken 
of a catamite, scortum virile, 1 Cor. vi. 9. 
Dion. Hal. Ant. vii. 2. Plut. vi. p. 328. 

MaXtcrxa, adv. (superl. of fxaXa, 
very, ) ?nost, most of all, especially, Acts 
XX. 38, et al. 

MdXXou, adv. (compar. of fxdXa, 
very,) ??iore, rather^ in various connexions. 



I. gener. 1 Cor. xiv. 1, JjjXoute tu ttvev- 
/jLUTLKa, pdXXov dk 'iua /c.t.X. ver. 5. 2 
Cor. V. 8; with gen. 1 Cor. xiv. 18, iravTouv 
vjUL. fxdXXov. Xen. An. iii. 12, 1. TroXXta 
fjLdXXou, much more. Matt. \d. 30, et al'. 
TTocrw pdXXov, how much more. Matt. vii. 

II, et al. Too-ouTo) p.. so much the more^ 
Heb. X. 25. pdXXoi/ Kai pdXXov, more 
and more, Phil. i. 9, and Class. ; with v 
or iiTTsp, i. e. pdXXov 77, inoi'c than, rather 
them, Matt, xviii. 13, xaip^i kir' avTM 
pdXXov 7) ETTL Tot's K.T.X. Johu iii. 19. 
p.dXXov rjTTEp, John xii. 43, and Class. 
Also as in tens, the more, the ratJier, Matt, 
xxvii. 24, dXXd pdXXov d6pv[3o^ yii/ETat, 
equiv. to pdXXov dopvlSalTai. John v. 18, 
Sid TovTO ovv pdXXov kXfiTovv avTov 
diroKT&Lvai, et al. Thuc. v. 44. So ov 
pdXXov, in interrogat. ICor. ix. 12. 2 Cor. 

iii. 8 ; comp. ver. 7. — II. joined with the 
positive, pdXXov forms a periphr. for the 
com})arat. like Engl, inore ; with t). Acts 
XX. 35, paKdpiov IcTTL pdXXov OLdovai, 77 
Xap^dveiv, 1 Cor. ix. 15. Gal. iv. 27 ; 
with €t, Mk. ix. 42, kuXou ecttlv ovtco 
pdXXou, EL K.T.X. — III. Joined emphat. 
ivith a comparative, either in form or 
sense, Mk. vii. 36, pdXXov TrEpLcraroTE- 
pov. 2 Cor. vii. 13. Phil. i. 23, iroXXu) 
ydp pdXXov KpEXaraov. So, with verbs of 
comparison. Matt. vi. 26, oux vpEt^ /uaX- 
Xov SiacpEpETE avTuw ; Heb. xi. 25, /uidX- 
Xov EXopEuo?. So p.. kXicrdai, Dem. 946, 
7. Xen. Mem. i. 6, 4. — IV. after a nega- 
tive clause or prohibition, expr. or imp}. 
rather; so ^£ pdXXov, but rather, Matt. 
X. 6, TTopEUEo-dE 6k pdXXov, al. & Class.; 
dXXd pdXXov, but rather, id. and Rom. 
xiv. 13. 1 Cor. vii. 21. Eph. v. 4 ; impl. 
Mk. XV. 11, 'Lva (sc. /x?; t6v 'L/o-oGi/ 
dXXd) pdXXov : and so oux^ pdXXov in 
interrog. 1 Cor. v. 2. vi. 7. — V. i?itens. 
pdXXou 6e before an antithetic clause, or 
rather, yea more, Rom. viii. 34, X/o. o 
aTTodavoDV, pdXXov Sk Kai kyEpdEi^. Gal. 

iv. 9. Eph. V. 11, and Class. 

Mdppt^, i]s, 77, grandmother.^ a word of 
lat. Gr. for Tr]dy], 2 Tim. i. 5. Jos. Ant. 
X. 11, 2. Hdian. v. 3, 7. Plut. Agis, 4. 

Ma/xcoyas, or M.app.u)vd?, a, o, mam- 
mon, i. e. wealth, riclies, Lu. xvi. 9, 11 ; 
personified, like Gr. IiXovTo<3, as desig- 
nating (thinks Mr. Greswell) the divinity 
suppose,d to preside over and regulate the 
distribution of wealth. 

Islavd dv(jo, (f. /madrjo-ofLaL, aor. 2. 
Epadov,) to learn. I. prop. i. e. intel- 
lectually, either from others, or from one's 
own obserration, &c. ; to learn, be taught., 
absol. Matt. ix. 13, iropEvdivTE's Sk 
pddETE, TL ECTTLV. John vi. 45, et al. ; with 
diro Tiyos, Matt. xi. 29 ; with acc. of 
thing, Rom. xvi. 17, vv u/xels e/xa6£'rs, 
et al. 1 Cor. iv. 6, 'iva kv hp.lv /xdQi]T£ xd 



MAN 



2 



53 



MAP 



ju»/ virsp K. T. \. in 7/<f, i. c. by our exam- 
ple ; with act", imp]. John vii. 15; foil, by 
dtro Til/OS, Col. i. 7. irapd t/i'o9, *2 Tim. 
iii. 14 ; foil, by acc. of person, fo learn any 
one^ i. e. his doctrines, precepts, Eph. iv. 
20. Sept, and Class. In the sense ' to 
learn by information,' he informed^ foil, by 
oxi, Acts xxiii. 27. airo tluo?^ Gal. iii. 2, 
and Class. ^1. V. H. ii. 42. Xen. Cyr. 
vi. 1, 31 ; also to understand^ comprehend^ 
Rev. xiv. 3. Xen. Cyr. i. 3, 10.— II. mo- 
rally, to lea7vi, i. e. from experience, to 
do a thing, eqiiiv. to do habitually, be ivont^ 
foil, by inf. expr. or impl. Phil. iv. 11, 
kyu) yap 'ifjiadov — avTdpK7]<3 eIuui. 1 
Tim. V. 4, 13, dpyal fxavdavovaL Trs.pL- 
fpX' (sim. Xen. An. iii. 2, 25, edv ccTrag 
dpyol '(,yv.) Tit, iii. 14; with acc. Heb. 
V. 8, Eju. Tijv viraKortv. 

Mavia^ as, ?7, {fxaivofxai^) mania^ 
madness^ insanity, Acts xxvi. 24, & Class. 

Mai/va, TO, indec. manna, the miracu- 
lous food of the Israelites in the desert, 
John vi. 31, 49, 58. Heb. ix. 4 ; symboli- 
cally. Rev. ii. 17. Comp. Exod. xvi. 31, 
sq. Joseph. Ant. iii. 1, 6. Josephus re- 
lates that in his day manna Was still found 
around Mount Sinai, Ant. iii. 1, 6 ; and 
the same fact has also been abundantly 
ascertained by modern travellers ; and the 
recent Commentators and Lexicographers 
are agreed in regarding the manna men- 
tioned in Scripture as the modern Manna 
Arabica, which the Arabs collect and re- 
gard as a dainty ; see Calmet, art. Manna. 
Yet it still remains to be proved that the 
manna in question is the same with that 
gathered by the Israelites. But (as Le 
Clerc and Deyling have shown) so many 
and important are the points of difference, 
that the negative is almost certain, and 
must establish the miraculous nature of 
the transaction. 

Mai/T£uo^at, f. EvcrojUiaL, depon. mid. 
(/AafTi9, diviner, soothsayer,) to utter re- 
sponses, as from an oracle, to divine, fore- 
tell. Acts xvi. 16. Sept. and Class. 

Ma^ a 11/60, f. avu), (fr. the obsol. 
fxdpu), whence the Latin marceo,) prop, to 
cause to fall aicay, become flaccid ; and 
pass, in a neuter sense, to fall away, be- 
come lean. Hence the word is used both 
of flowers that fall away and wither, and 
of the human body, which falls away with 
'pining sickness,' (Is. xxxviii. 12. Ps. 
cvi. 15,) or under the influence of that of 
which a great poet as well as physician so 
gi-aphically depicts, ' Restless anxiety, for- 
lorn despair, And all the faded family of 
care.' As respects the former, see Eurip. 
Ale. 201. Thuc. ii. 49. In N. T. it is said 
fig. of the rich man, .Ja. i. 11, that 'as the 
flower of the grass falls away, so he shall 
fade away,' fxapav^^wETai, equiv. to the 



plainer expression in the preceding verse, 
TrajOtXEUCTfTai. 

Mapai/ a 0a, maran-atha, Syr. equiv. 
to Kuptos epx^Tai, ' the Lord will come, 
to judgment, 1 Cor. xvi. 22. See my note. 

Mapyapin-r^^, ov, 6, {judpyapo^,) 
prop, verbal adj. sc. 6 \i'0os /aapyaptTrj?, 
a pearl, Matt. xiii. 45, 46, 'iva ttoXvtl- 
fxov ixapyapLTriv. 1 Tim. ii. 9. Rev. xvii. 
4. xviii. 12, 16. xxi. 21, bis; fig. Matt, 
vii. 6. ^1. H. An. x. 13. 

^d p fxa po^, ov, 6, 77, {fxapfxaLpu), to 
glitter,) in Homer and early writers, sto7ie, 
roch, and later in N. T. (equiv. to Lat. 
marmor,) marble. Rev. xviii. 12. In 
Theophr. frag, de Lapid. ii. 36, ed. Schn, 
it denotes a precious stone, so called, thrice 
the value of the purest gold. On the natural 
history, use, and value of pearls in ancient 
times, see Mr. Greswell on the Par. t. ii. 
220, sqq. 

MapTu/), see in MapTus. 

MapTupgo), f. tjo-o), (/xapTus,) to wit- 
ness, i. e. I. to be a witness, to be able or 
ready to testify, with dat. commodi, John 

iii. 28, auTOi v/uleI^ p.0L fxapTvpElTE, o^l 
K. T. X. Acts xxii. 5 ; absol. 2 Cor. viii. 3. 
Xen. Hist. G. i. 1, 31. — II. to bear 
tvitness, testify, to the truth of what one 
has seen, heard, or knows. 1 ) prop, and 
gener. foil, by TTEpi with gen. to bear tvit- 
ness respecting any person or thing, John 
i. 7, 8, 'Iva ULapn-vpricrri TTEpi tov cpiaTO^^ 
ver. 15. ii. 25. v. 31, et al. ; with dat. & oTt, 
vii. 7 ; foil, by otl equiv. to acc. and inf. 
John i. 34, fxEjxapTxjpt]Ka otl oStos e<ttl. 

iv. 44, et al. ; also with dat. comm. vel 
incommodi. Matt, xxiii. 31, /uLapTvpEiTE 
kavT0i<s, OTLK.T.X. Rom. x. 2. Gal. iv. 15. 
Col. iv. 13. Xen. Cyr. viii. 8, 1. KaTa 
Tivo^, 1 Cor. XV. 15; foil, by the words 
testified, after Xiytou, eItte, otl, of quota- 
tion, etc. John i. 32, Kal E/uLupTvprjo-EU 
'I. Xiyicv "Otl k.t.X. iv. 39; foil, by acc. 
of a synon. noun, John v. 32, 77 fxapTvpia 
vv /jLapTvpEL TTEpl Ejuov I comp. 1 Johu V. 
9, 10. 1 Tim. vi. 13, fx. ttjv KaXrjv bjxo- 
Xoyiav. Arr. Epict. iv. 8, 32. So, with 
acc. of thing, gener. to testify any thing, to 
bear icitness of any thing. John iii. 11, o 
ECopaKa/JLEv fxapTvpovjULEv. ver. 32. 1 John 
i. 2. Rev. i. 2. xxii. 20 ; with an acc. impl. 
fr. the context, e. gr. Ta Trtpl £/xou, Acts 
xxiii. 11. TouTo, xxvi. 5. Heb. x. 15, & 
Class. ; foil, by dat. of person or thing, to 
or for whom, in favour o/'whom one bears 
testimony, John iii. 26, w (xv jxEfxaoTv- 
priKa9. V. 33, al. Pass, with utto, Rom. 
iii. 21. Xen. Cyr. viii. 8. 1, 27; in the 
sense of ' to prove by testimony,' John 
xviii. 23. Xen. Conv. viii. 12. 2) fig. of 
God as testifying by his Spirit, by signs, 



MAP 



254 



MAP 



miracles, etc. foil, by Trepl, John v. 37. 
viii. 18. 1 John v. 9, 10. tm Xoyw, to^ in 
favour of Acts xiv. 3 ; of the Scriptures, 
prophets, &c. with Trtpi, John v. 39 ; with 
dat. and inf. with acc. Acts x. 43. Hdian. 
iii. 12, 5. Xen. Mem. i. 2, 20. So of one's 
deeds, works, &c. with 7r£pi, John v. 36, 
TO. 'ipya a ky(h ttolu)^ fxapTvpsi irepi 
E/uLov. X. 25. Sept. and Class. — III. em- 
phat. io testify strongly^ and by impl. hear 
honourable testimony^ and pass, to be ivell 
testified of have good ivitness ; with oTi, 
Heb. vii. 8 ; with inf. Heb. xi. 4, ol 
ijmapTVp-nQt] elvai ot/caios. ver. 5 ; hence 
gener. to speak ivell of applaud; foil, by 
dat. Lu. iv. 22, Traj^Tss eimapTvpovv 
avTM. xi. 48. Acts XV. 8 ; absol. 3 John 
12; 'with ETTL TLVL, Hcb. xi. 4. Joseph. 
Ant. xiv. 10, 2. M\. V. H. i. 30 ; pass, to 
he commended^ he of good report^ Acts vi. 
3 ; with uTTo, Acts x. 22, et al. ; kv^ 1 
Tim. V. 10. Heb. xi. 2; ^ta, ver. 39, and 
later Class. — IV. equiv. to ixap^vpofxaL^ 
to call as witness^ prop. Dion. Hal. vii. 49, 

Ult. IJ.ap'TVpOVfXi.VO'S Qs.0V£ TE Kul CLvOpO}- 

TTou?. Hence in N. T. to protest^ make an 
earnest and solemn appeal, to exhort so- 
lemnly^ 1 Thess. ii. 12. 

M-apTv pia^ a^^ 77, (/napTvpEio^) ivit- 
ness^ testimony^ as borne, I) judicial, Mk. 
xiv. 56, 59, ovdk ovTdo'S 'Lcrri r\v r] fxapTvpia 
avTcov, John viii. 17, fxap, kuto. tlvo<s. 
Mk. xiv. 55. Sept. and Class. 2) gejier. 
to the truth of any thing, John xix. 35. 
xxi. 24. 1 John v. 9, jul. tcvu avdpco- 
ircdv. So in Class, of a poet. Tit. i. 13. 
Elsewhere only in reference to Jesus and 
his doctrines, i. e. to the truth of his mis- 
sion and gospel; gener. John v. 34, oh 
■Trapa avdpcoTTov Tfju fx. \ajui(Bdv(ji). IJohn 
V. 10, fjL. kv kavToo. So from John Bapt. 
John i. 7, 19. v. 36 ; from other teachers. 
Rev. xi. 7. Also from God, John v. 32. 
1 John V. 9, bis, 10, 11. Of Christ's tes- 
timony respecting himself, John iii. 11, 32, 
33. V. 31. viii. 13, 14. So in the phrase 
17 juLapTvpca Tou 'Irjcrou, the testimony of 
Jesus, i. e. what he testified and taught 
respecting himself and his gospel, and 
hence equiv. to the gospel. Rev. i. 2, os 
EiuLapTvpr-jCTE Tov Xoyou Tov Qeou KaL Triv 
fxap. '1. X. ver. 9. xx. 4. xix. 10, 77 yap 
fxapTvpLa TOV 'I. ecttl to irvzvfxa Tr}<5 
•7rpo(pr]TELa£, 'for the testimony of Jesus 
is (comes from, has for its author) the 
same Spirit of prophecy which acts in me.' 
Hence ex^i-v Trju /ul. tov 'I?j(Tou, to hold 
fast the testimony of Jesus, Rev. xii. 17. 
xix. 10 ; 3) emphat. honourable testimony, 
good report, 1 Tim. iii. 7. Jos. Ant. vi. 
10, 1. 

lilapTX) piov, OV, TO, {piapTVpioD,) 
tvit?iess, testimony, as borne, m pLacTvpia. 
1) gener. 2 Cor. i. 12, to /ul. tT]^ ctvvel- 



O77cr£6o§ : historically, Actsiv. 33, to /u. 
T-^§ ava(TTd(TE03<s TOO ILvpiov, concerniiig 
the resurrection, &c. Heb. iii. 5, £ts /x. 
Twv \a\r\dr](Top.Evu)v, 'for giving testi- 
mony, testifying.' ^lian V. H. ii. 5. 
Xen. Conv. viii. 34. So, in reference to 
Jesus and his doctrines, from teachers, 
2 Thess. i. 10 : also to p.. tov 'KpiaTov, 
the testimony of Christ, i. e. ' what he testi- 
fied and taught respecting himself and his 
gospel,' and hence equiv. to 77 fxapTvpta 
TOV 'I. 1 Cor. i. 6. ii. 1, to /u. tov Qeov, 
id. Gener. in the sense of testimony, evi- 
dence, proof , e. gr. £69 pcaoTvpLOu avTol<s, 
' as a testimony unto them,' Matt. viii. 4. 
xxiv. 14. Mk. i. 44. Lu. v. 14. xxi. 13; 
also ' against them,' Matt. x. 18. Mk. vi. 
11. xiii. 9. Ja. v. 3, and so ett' avTovs, 
Lu. ix. 5. Also 1 Tim. ii. 6, to fxapTv- 
pLov KaipoT? idioL^. So Sept. and Class. 
2) from the Sept. 77 <tk)]vi] tov fxapTv- 
pLov, the tabernacle of witness, put for tlie 
tabernacle of the congregation, Hebrew, 
ll?1D bn^^, Acts vii. 44. Rev. xv. 5. So 
Sept. Ex. xxix. 42, 44, et al. 

M.apTv po}xcLi, depon.mid. (/iapTus,) 
in Class, to call to witness, hivohe as wit- 
ness, whether gods or men, to the truth of 
an assertion. Hence in N. T. to protest, 
make an earnest and solemn appeal, by way 
of affirmation or protestation, equiv. to 
papT, TOV Qeou, Xtyo) tlvl, otl, &c. 
Acts XX. 26, p.apTvpop.aL vjuuv otl. Sec. 
equiv. to ' I solemnly affirm, call God to 
witness,' that, &c. Gal. v. 3, /x. iravTL 
dudp. otl, &c. So Jos. Bell. iii. 8, 3, 
/uLapTvpojULaL co?, & v. 12, 4, Also, by 
way of exhortation, to exhort solemnly, 
conjure, with acc. and inf Eph. iv. 17, 

p.apT. kv ILvpiw pLt^KETL vp.d<5 TTEpLTra- 

TELv, &c. So Thuc. viii. 53, pcapTvpo- 
p.aL, ical kiTLQELaX^ovTcov — p.r} KUTdyELV. 
Polyb. xiii. 8, 6, p.apT. toi/s dvdpas 
ETravdyELV. Eurip. Med. 22, vp.d^ 
duovELv TavT kyoi) papTvpofxaL. 

MdpTv?, vpo-s, 6, J7, a ivitness, 1) 
p?'op. in a judicial sense. Matt, xviii. 16. 
xxvi. 65. Acts vi. 13. Sept. and Class. 
2) gener. ' one who testifies,' or can testify, 
to the truth of what he has seen, heard, or 
knows, Rom. i. 9. 2 Cor. i. 23. Phil. i. 8. 
1 Tiiess. ii. 5, 10. 1 Tim. vi. 12. Sept. & 
Class. ; in allusion to those who witness a 
public game, Heb. xii. 1. Longin. § 14. 
Espec. of those who witnessed the life, 
death, and resurrection of Jesus, or who 
bear witness to the truth as it is in Jesus, 

Lu. xxiv. 48, Vp.El'S Si kcTTS pdpTVpE^ 

TovTMv. Acts i. 8, and oft. 2 Tim. ii. 2, 
d i]KOV(Ta<s "Trap' kfxov Sid 'TToWwv pLap- 
Tvpcov, i. e. ' confirmed by many other 
vvitn esses.' Foil, by dat. Acts xxii. 15. 
1 Pet. V. 1. So of one who bears Avitness 
, for God, and testifies to the world what 



IVI A S 



255 



MAX 



God reveals through him, i. e. a teacher^ 
2}ropket, gener. Rev. xi. 3 ; of Jesus, o 
/udpTv^ 6 TTto'Tos, Kcv. j. 5. iii. 14. 
Comp. John i. 9. xiv. G. 3) a ma?it/t\ 
one who by his death bears witness to the 
truth, Acts xxii. 20, 2T£^dj/ou tov fxap- 
Tupos aov. Rev. 11. 13. xvil. 6. Freq. in 
Ecclesiastical writers. 

M a 0- (7 a o /X a I, f. ricrofxai^ depon. {[xaa- 
(Tw, depso^ and also to cheiv^ as appears 
from its derivative ^tro-Ta^, ' the mouth,' 
meaning lit. tlie eating part. So our 
mouthy from the third person sing. Indic. 
of the Gothic matgan, to eat; q. d. 'the 
part which eateth,' which, as gan is only a 
termination, is no other than the same 
word as the Greek /xaTTco,) to clieiv.^ mas- 
ticate., as Aristoph. Pint. 320, and often in 
Class. In N. T. we have fx. -ras ^Xwo-- 
cas, Rev. xvi. 10, to champ the tongue., as 
persons do In pain, or from anger. Sept. 
Job XXX. 4. Jos. Bell. J, vl. 3, 3. 

M acTiy oo), f. too-w, (/xacrTt^,) to 
scourge., trans, e. gr. persons as criminals. 
Matt. X. 17, al. Sept. and Class. Fig. of 
God, to chastise., correct^ Heb. xii. 6, 
(xacTLyol 6k TravTa vlov ou irapa- 

Mao-Ti^w, f. t^w, (/xao-Ti.^,) to scourge. 
trans, e. gr. a person as criminal, Acts 

xxii. 25. Sept. and Class. 

MacTTi^, tyos, (fr. /uLacrao), 'to 
bite,' q. d. a cutter ; so Shaksp. ' a biting 
falchion,') a ivhip., scourge., Acts xxll. 24. 
Heb. xl. 36. Sept. and Class. Fig. a 
scourge., from God, 1. e. disease., plague., 
Lu. vll. 21, airo vocrcov Kai fxaarTLycoj/. 
Mk. ill. 10. V. 29, 34 Sept. Ps. xxxii. 10, 
et al. Ecclus, xl. 9. 2 Mace. Ix. 11. Hom. 
II. xli. 37. xiil. 812. 

Mao-Tos, ou, 6, the breast., pap, Lu. 
xi, 27, fxaKaoLOL fxacr^ol ov<5 edvXaaa^. 

xxiii. 29. Rev. 1. 13. Sept. and Class. 

MttTa toXoy/a, a?, ?j, {jmaTaLO- 
Xoyo§,) vain talk., 1 Tim. i. 6. Porphyr. 
de Abstln. iv. 16. Plut. vl. p. 21. 

MctTatoXoyos, ou, 6, 77, (/uaTaios & 
Xfeyw,) given to vain talking., subst. a vain 
talker., empty wrangler, Tit. 1. 10. 

M aTaLO^., a., 02/, adj. (/xaTijy,) vain., in 
various acceptations, espec. U7ip7'oJitable, 
fruitless., Tit. iii. 9. TrtcrTts, 1 Cor. xv. 17. 
^pi](TKeLa., Ja. i, 26. Sept. and Class, as 
Eur. Iph. T. 629, fi. svx^- From Hebr. 
T« /jLUTaLa, vanities., nothings., for idols., 
idolatry. Acts xiv. 15. So Sept. 1 K, xvi. 
13. 2 K. xvil. 15, Jer. 11, 5; also fxaTa'ia 
dvaaTpocpi]., 1 Pet, i. 18, — idolatrous 
walk., practice of Idolatry. 

MaTaiOTijs, 7JT05, 77, (/ucsTaio?,) vanity., 
' what does not ejfect what it professes or 
boasts,' 2 Pet. ii. 18, viripoyKa yap 



ixaTaLOT^ro^ cf)6 tyy 6 liXEuoL. And so Ps. 
iv, 2, where in parall.wlth xf/tdSo^. Comp. 
Ps. cxliv. 8, XaXelv jxa-r. Figuratively, 
fragility., transicntness., Rom. yiii. 20, 
yap fxaTaioT^TL 77 /cTiVts vTrETayr}. Sept. 
Eccl. i. 2, 14, and oft. Ps. 1x11, 9. xxxix. 
5. From the Hebrew, for folly, perverse- 
ness, tcickedjiess, Eph. Iv. 17. Sept. Ps. 
xxvi. 4, et al. 

MaTaioco, f. coo-oj, (/xarato?,) prop. 
to make vain ; in N. T. from the Hebr. 
only pass, to become vain, 1. e. foolish, 
perverse, icicked, Rom. 1. 21, ifxaTaionQr]- 
orav kv TOts otaXoyic^ots avTihv, in re- 
ference espec. to idolatry ; see my note. 
So Sept, 2 K. xvil. 15. Jer. 11. 5. 

Ma'Ttjy, (prop, accus. sing, with elllps. 
of KaTCL, of the old noun fiaTrj, fr. the 
ohsol. fxaTo^, fr. fxifxaTui, in use an ad- 
verb,) in vain, to no purpose, Matt. xv. 9. 
Mk. vll. 7. Sept. and Class. 

Ma'xctijoa, h-, (fr. ixaxofxai : or 
rather, fem. nom. of the old adj. judxcti-- 
po^, fighting ; as eTaipa fr. sTatpos, and 
viaipa fr. viatpo^ or veapo?, young. Thus 
the word lit. means a battle-knife, falchion, 
as distinguished from that used for domes- 
tic purposes,) Sidagger, something like the 
coiiteau de chasse of continental sports- 
men, and used as such, (see Servlus on 
Virg. ,^n, ix, 505,) being worn by Homer's 
heroes along with the sword, II. iii. 271. 
Hdot. ii. 61. jEllan V. H. viii. 3. In 
N. T. a sword for cutting, like our 
sabre, as distinguished from the pofxc^yala, 
for thrusting. Matt. xxvi. 47, et al. ssepe. 
But in the Gospels it gener. denotes the 
cutlass which travellers in Judsea used to 
carry, for security against the robbers who 
Infested the country, as we learn from 
Josephus. Sometimes also forming phrases 
with a verb, as Xajm^dvsLv, (^aXXsiv, &c. 
for which see the verbs. Some metaph. 
phrases are, however, worthy of notice, 
e, gT. 1) 77 fJ-dX' TOV Jlv&v/LLaTO^, Eph. vl. 
17, a figure to denote the power of the 
Spirit to overcome all opposition ; 2) as 
used of the sivord of justice, i. e. of the 
executioner. Acts xii. 2. Rom. viii. 35. 
Heb. xi, 34, 37. Hence (popeXv judxc^ipau, 
to bear the sword, i, e. to have the power 
of life and death, Rom. xiii, 4. Philostr. 
V, Apollon. vll. 16, Tov<3 sxovra^ ^icpv,, 
'summas potestates.' Meton. by Hebr. 
sword for tear, opp. to sipnmi, Matt. x. 
34. So Sept. Jer. xiv, 13, 

Ma'x^?, V^t v-, prop, ct fight, battle. In 
N, T. gener, strife, conteMion, with allu- 
sion to the violent opposition of un- 
believers ; and so we have 'ipL<s conjoined 
M'ith TToXifxcL and jmdxac in Hom, II. i, 
177. 2 Cor. vll, 5, e^codsv fxdxai. 2 Tim, 
ii. 23, /xct'x"?* iv. 1, TToXf/LiOL Kai 

Hidx<^^' I'it' iii' 9, fxdxoi^ voixiad's, ' dis- 



MAX 



256 



MET 



putes,' i. e. disputes or controversies re- 
specting the Mosaic law ; and so the word 
is often used in Sept. chiefly in sing, but 
sometimes in plur. ; as Prov. xxiv. 33, 
k'^iv e^iXKri^ Xoyous, k'^&Xtvcrov'raL Kp'i- 
crtL^ Kui jxdxaL : also in Class, as in the 
passage of Horn. II. above cited, £/>t§, 
'TvoX.&jxoL TS fxa^^ai t&. Xen. Hier. i. 35, 
ixdyai Koi £|0t^£§. 

Ma^o/xai, f. ia-o/ULaL, {iJ.dx^h) tofigJit^ 
prop, in war or battle, as often in Class. 
In N. T. gener. to strive^ contend^ e. gr. 

1) physically in ^private quarrel, Actsvii. 
26. So Sept. Ex. xxi. 22. 2 Sara. xiv. 6. 

2) in words, to strive^ dispute^ e. gr. Trpos 
d\\r\\ov<s^ John vi. 52, recipr. 2 Tim. ii. 
24. Ja. iv. 2. Sept. and often in Class. ; 
but gener. with some adjunct, as 'ipLOi. 
Yet the word is used absol. in Xen. Mem. 
iii. 5, 6, TTipi TouTwu fxd^ovTaL^ and 
sometimes in Plato. 

yi^y aXavxiw^ f. 770"^, (/^ttyas, 
avxiu)^ to boast,) to boast largely, vaunt^ 
Ja. iii. 5, 77 yXuxrcra /uLsyaXavx^^i where 
the sense is not according to the usual in- 
terpretation, 'boasteth greatly;' for that 
circumstance is irrelevant to the purpose. 
Hather, ''effects gTeat things,' verbs of 
speech sometimes standing for the actions 
implied. As, however, the principle in 
question is a somewhat precarious one, 
and the sense of the words would thus be 
not a little weakened, it may be best to 
suppose here, as often elsewhere, a signifi- 
catio prcegyians^ ' and yet boasts, i. e. may 
boast, of effecting great things,' for jxiyaXa 
ai)\iL^ or avyjuTai^ as a Classical writer 
would have said. For though in the Class, 
the word is sometimes used absol. yet 
more freq. it occurs foil, by dat, of thing 
with ETTi, or some equiv. construction. 
And sometimes, though rarely, an aecus. 
of thing. So Lucian Philops. 38, fxri o-ql 
dirLG-Ta 00^0) 'Trspi kfxavTov fXEyaXav- 
X^LcrdaL. ^schyl. Ag. I0O6, /mrjokv iv 
adov MgyaXaux^tTO). 

M £ 7 a \ £ I o §, a, 02/, adj . (/xEya?, ) great., 
glorious., ivonderful^ e. gr. to. /uLEyaXsla^ 
imnderful luorks., ' magna et praeclara,' and 
bv impl. beneficia eximia providentise, Lu, 
i.'49. Acts ii. 11. Sept. Ps. Ixxi. 19. Also 
Ecclus. xviii. 4, and Class. 

M € y aXfi toTtjs, ?]T09, 17, (/x£yaX£to§,) 
greatness., majesty^ glory ^ e. gr. tov GeoG, 
Lu. ix. 43. TOV Kvpiov, 2 Pet. i. 16. 0£as 
'Af>T£/>tt5os, Acts xix. 27. Sept. Jer. 
xxxiii. 9. Also Esd. i. 5. Jos. Ant. viii. 
4, 3, as said of God, et al. 

M£y aA.07rp£7rr/§, £os ou9, o, 17, adj. 
(/>i£yas, TrpETTo),) prop. ' becoming to 
great and noble persons,' magnanimous., 
Xen. Mem. iii. 10, 5. In N. T. magnifi- 
cent., gloiious^ as said of things, 2 Pet. i. 



17, vTto T^s h^y- ^o^t]?, alluding to the 
august scene of the Transfiguration. It is 
also in Class, used of things ; but those 
only terrestrial ; while in Sept. it is ap- 
plied to things celestial. So of God it is 
said, Deut. xxxiii. 26, b fxeyaXoTrpEirr}^ 

TOV (yT&piODfXaTCS. 

M £ y a X i/ w, f. ui/w, (/x£ya§,) in Class. 
])rop. to make great., enlarge., increase., and 
fig. to magnify^ aggrandise, extol. In N.T, 

1) gener. e. gr. to. KpdaTreda tCov I/jl. 
au. Matt, xxiii. 5. 'iXso? hietu tii/o$, to 
shoiv one great mercy., ' do him great kind- 
ness,' Lu. i. 58. So Sept. Gen. xix. 19. 

2) ii: to magnify., praise., extol., Lu. i. 46, 
TOV Y^vpLov. Acts V. 13. X. 46. xix. 17. 

2 Cor. X. 15. (see my note.) Phil. i. 20. 
Sept. 2 Sam. vii. 26. Ps. xxxiv. 3. Ixix. 
30. Ecclus. xliii. 31, and lat. Class. See 
Elsn. and Kypke on Lu. i. 46. 

MfiydXws, adv. (jU£yas,) greatly., 
much., Phil. iv. 10, kxdprjv fxsydXot)^. Sept. 
and Class. 

Mfiy aXwcri'i/t], t]9, 77, (/U£yas,) ma- 
jesty., i. e. the Divine majesty, meton. for 
God himself, Heb. i. 3. viii. 1, as in Lib. 
Henoch. Fabr. Cod. Pseud. V. T. p. 187. 
Also in ascriptions, Jude 25. So oft. in 
Sept. and Apocr. 

Mfi'ya?, /LtEyaXi], /x£ya, adj. (gen. fxe- 
yaXou, 7/9, ou, compar. /xEt^wi/, super!. 
fxiytcTTO^. /x£t^oT£/3o§, doublc compar. 

3 John 4.) great., large.^ prop, of physical 
magnitude. I. of men or animals, great 
in size, stature, John xxi. 11, i^v's. Rev. 

xii. 3, hpdKiJdv : of persons, full-grown., 
Heb. xi. 24, /xEyas ysfoiuLsvo^ : and so 
IJ.LKpd's Kal /x£ya§, S7nall and great., Acts 

viii, 10, al. Sept. & Class. Hence of age, 
6 jULsit^cov., the elder., Lat. major natu., Rom. 

ix. 12. — II. of things, great., e. gr. 1) in 
size, extent. Matt, xxvii. 60, XlOov, Mk. 

xiii. 2, oLKiai. Luke xii. 18. xvi. 26, 
Xda-fJLa. Acts x. 11. 1 Cor. xvi. 9, .S-upa, 
al. Fig. of guilt, John xix. 11. Sept. 
2 Sam. xiii. 16. Hdian. iii. 7, 5. iv. 15, 
14. 2) in measure, e. gr. tall., large., Lu. 
xiii. 19, ^ivopov : long., Rev. vi. 4, fxa- 
XttijOa : broad., large.. Rev. ix. 14, iroTa- 
fxo^. XX. 1, aXuo-iS, and so in Class. 3) 
in number or amount, Mk. v. 11, dyiXt]. 

1 Tim. vi. 6. fig. Acts iv. 33, x^P'-^- Sept. 
and Class. 4) in price, cost, great., L e. 
costly., splendid^ Lu. v. 29, ooxn- xiv. 16, 
oetTTf 01/, and Sept. Of a day, celebration, 
great., solemn., John vii. 37 ; of the day of 
judgment. Acts ii. 20, et al. and Sept. 5) 
fig. great in estimation, weight, import- 
ance. Matt. xxii. 36, 38, evtoX?]. Eph. v. 
32, and 1 Tim. iii. 16, ixvcrTrjpiov. 1 John 
V. 9, /jLapTvpia. So juLsiX^cov, greater, more 
important. Matt, xxiii. 19. /ic'yto-Tos, 

2 Pet. i. 4. Sept. & Class. — III. fig. great 
in force, intensity, effect, e. gr. 1) as 



MET 



257 



M E0 



affecting the external senses, great^ velie- 
ment^ violent., Matt. viii. 24, atL(xfx6<s ^i- 
ya<s. Lu. xxi. 11. ^1. V. H. yi. 9. Mk. 
iv. 37, XatXaxl/. ver. 39, yaXiju}}. John 
vi. 18, avifxa^. Dem. 1213, 27. Hev. xi. 
19, & xvi. 21, ^d\ata. Tn-fxicrts, Matt, vii, 
27. /OT/y/ua, Lu. vi. 49. cptvuf). Matt. xxiv. 
31. Hdian. i. 8, 12. Kpuvyii, Acts xxiii. 

9. -TTUptTO?, Lu. iv. 38. K'OTTfcTO?, ActS 

viii. 2. 2) as affecting the mind, causing 
emotion, e. gr. Matt. ii. 10, xapav fxey. 
3 John 4. jNIark v. 42, s.KaTaai's fx. Lu. 

11. 9, cf)6(3ou. Rom. ix. 2, Xuttij. Rev. xii. 

12, ^-u^os fx. So of events, &c. Matt, 
xxiv. 21, ^Xl\I/l^. Lu. iv. 25, \t/xo§. xxi, 

23. Acts viii. 1, diwy/jLO^, Ja, iii. 1, Kpi- 
fxa. Rev. xvi. 21, TrXir/n. Sept. & Class. 
Of things exciting admiration, great^ 
mighty^ wonderful^ e. gr. cryifxela fx. great 
signs, mighty deeds, miracles. Matt. xxiv. 

24, al. oui/a/xft?. Acts viii. 13. dOua/XL^ fx. 
iv. 33. So fxeiX^oua., scil. eoya, John i. 
5L V. 20. xiv. 12. Joined with ^avfxa- 
o-To?, Rev. XV. 1, 3. 2 Cor. xi. 15, ov 
fxiya oui/, no wonder then. So Sept. and 
Class. — IV. fig. great in power, dignity, 
authority, e. gr. oi ixeyaXoL., the great., 
i. e. nobles, princes, Matt. v. 35, tou fxey. 
^acnXtco's. xx.'25. oft. in Class. Heb. iv. 14, 
apxupia fx. X. 21. Of God, Tit. ii. 13. 
Rev. xix. 17 ; of Diana, Acts xix. 27. So 
gener. great distinguished., Matt. v. 19, 
ouTos fxiya's KXi-jdricreTaL. Mk. x. 43. 
Lu. vii. 1&, Trpocp^'iT-i]^. Acts viii. 9. In 
a bad sense, great., noted., v iropvr]., Rev. 

xvii. 1. xix. 2. Sept. & Class, as jEschin. 
22, 28, fx^ TTopvo^. — V. implying censure, 
great., i, e. lofty., boastful., arroga/nt., Rev. 
xiii. 5, (TTOfxa XaXovu /xeydXa kul l3\acr- 
cl)i]/iLa<s. So Sept. Dan. vii. 8, 20, et al. 
Hom. Od. xxii. 288, /xiya eltt&Ii/. Dem. 
1124, 25, fxiya XuXelv. 

MtysOos, £09 OU5, TO, (/i£'ya9,) great- 
ness., fig, Eph, i. 19, TO fX. T^S OVvdfXECO^ 

avTov. Sept. and Class. 

Msyto-Tccyg?, coy, ol, (/xgyto-TO?,) 
Lat. magnates., i. e. chiefs, nobles, princes, 
Mk. vi. 21. (see my note.) Rev. vi. 15. 

xviii. 23. Sept. and Jos. only in lat. Class. 
MeyifTTos, see Miyas. 

M£0£p/Ut]y£Ua), f. £U(760, (/>t£T(i, kp- 

/urji/futo,) to translate., lit. render over., from 
one language into another, to interpret; 
in N. T. only pass. Matt. i. 23, o fccrTt 
/xedspfxr^uEvoixEvov. Jos. and Class. 

Mf'Gr], rj§, 77, {fxtdv^) any intoocicating 
drink; (a word derived from the northern 
term for wine, mcBth., as preserved in the 
Germ, meth and our mead., so called from 
its highly /er77i€?2^e6? character. The Polish 
and Danish form of the word, miod., seems 
to come nearest to its original, as being 
derived from p^dio and /-to'o), whence Lat. 
mo-veo^ which signified to riwve, with an 



implied notion of fervour.,) drunkenness, 
drunken frolic, Lu. xxi. 34. Rom. xiii. 13. 
Gal. v. 21. (See on KpaL7ruX->].) Sept. 
Ezek. xxiii. 33. xxxix. 19, and Class. 

M £0l'(rTT]/Xl, f. fXETaCTTVCrW., {fXETU, 

'iarTriixi.,) also MeGto-Tcti/w, 1 Cor. xiii. 2, 
to set or jnove from one place to another, 
or to remove from one situation to another. 
In N. T. prop, with acc. as 1 Cor. xiii. 2, 
(jocTTE oprj fXE^LcrrrdvELv. So Sept. Is. liv. 
10, TO. op)] fXETuarTijcrEaduL. With £ts, 
Col. i. 13, IXETt(XTr}(TEV {njxd'i) Eh ttju 

fSaa. &c. And so Jos. Ant. ix. 11, 1, 
Tous oLKiiTopa9 fXETEaTr]crEV £19 T»ji/ av- 
Tou (3acT. So Thuc. iv. 57, et al. in Class. 
Also to remove from office., as said of a 
king., to depose^ Acts xiii. 22. (See 1 Sam. 
xvi. Dan. ii. 21.) of a steward., to dismiss., 
j Lu. xvi. 4. jUL. Tjj's oiKovouia^., sub. aTro, 
which is expressed in Pol. iv. 87, 9. IK. 
XV. 13, and Joseph, often. Finally, the 
word signifies fig. ' to alienate any one's 
affections, to draw him over to another 
side or party,' to seduce, Acts xix. 26, /x£t- 
E(TTy]crEv LKavov 6)(Xov. In Class, it is 
used of withdrawing any one from alle- 
giance, or from alliance, (as Xen. Hist. 
Gr. ii. 2, 5. Appian i. 334. Thuc. viii. 76.) 
or from the religion and customs of their 
country to those of another, as Josh, xiv, 

8, /X. T?V Kapdiau tov Xaov., et al. in 
Sept. In the above passage, however, of 
the N. T. it signifies ' seducing from truth 
to falsehood.' See Is. lix. 15. 

MfOo^Eta, a9, 77, fr. ft£0oo£ua), to 
methodize., i. e. ' to trace out any thing 
with method and skill,' to bring about 
with art, to deal artfully, Sept. 2 Sam. 
xix. 27. Polycarp, Ep. ad Phil. § 7, 09 du 
fXEdooEVf] Ta Xoyia tou Kupiou 7rpo9 
Td9 iocas ETTLdvfXLa^. Hence fXEdodEia, 
art, idle, Eph. iv. 14, irpo's /x&d. ttj? 
irXdut]^, i. e. with deliberate planning of 
deceit, vi. 11, Ta9 fx. rod Aia^oXov, with 
reference to the wiles of the great De- 
ceiver to catch souls. So dirdry] kul /xeB- 

0009, Artemid. iii. 25. 
Mf 000109, ov, 6, 77, adj. (/xfTct, 0^09.) 

bordering tipon, e. gr. 7roA.i9, Jos. B. J. 
iv. 11, 2. y^T, Thuc. ii. 27. In N. T. only 
neut. plur. Td fxEdopia, scii. y^copia, bor- 
! ders, confines, Mk. vii. 24, toc fx. Tvpou 
Kal I.LOcouo's. So Class, espec. Thucyd. 
and Jos. 

M Ed V a KO), f. vcrco, {/xldv, comp. in 
fxidr],) to make drunk; mid. to become 
drunk, be drunken; aor. 1. pass. £yu£0u- 
(Tdt]v in mid. signif. Absol. Lu. xii. 45, 
TTLVELV Kal ixedu(TKEadaL. John ii. 10, 
bi-av fxEdvcrdooo-L, Mhere, however, the 
term does not imply intoxication, but only 
drinking freely, as in Gen. xliii. 34. Cant. 
V. 1, and elsewhere in the Hellenistic 
writers, and also perhaps in 1 Cor. xi. 21. 



ME0 



258 



MEA 



With dat. oti/w, Epli. v. 18. Fig. Ik tov 
oLvov Trj? TTopvELa^^ Rev. xvii. 2. Sept. & 
Class, both act. and mid. 

M£0uo-o§, 6, 77, adj. (/x£6ua), as fxvaro^ 
fr. /uuo), &c.) driinken^ and siibst. a drunk- 
ard^ 1 Cor. V, 11, \oL8opo9 V juLedvcro's^ and 
vi. 10, fxidvoroL^ OX) XoiSopot. Sept. Prov. 
xxiii. 21. xxvi. 9. Lucian, Tim. 55, /m. 
Kai 'TrdpoLvo's. 

MsOuco, {juldv, comp. in /U£0tj,) occ. 
only in pres. and imperf. all other forms 
belonging to /mtdvaKco, to be drunk ^ and 
by impl. to carouse^ absol. Matt. xxiv. 49, 
fXErra Tcov fxedvovTcov. Acts ii. 15, et al. 
and Sept. and Class. Fig. /jl. sk tov aL- 
uaTO's Tuiv ctyicoi/, Rev. xvii. 6. Sept. in 
Is. xxxiv. 7. li. 21. In Class, it is often 
used in a figurative sense, of being, as it 
were, intoxicated with any passion. 

Mfii^toi/, M£t^0T£(009, see Miyas. 

MsXav, avo<s^ to, (neut. of fxiXa^^) 
any thing blacky as ink. 2 Cor. iii. 3, kiri- 
(TToXi] kyyEypa/xjULevTi oh /ntXavL. 2 John 
12. 3 John 13. Dem. 313, 11. 

MeXas, uLua^ av, adj. black, Matt. v. 
36. Rev. vi. 5, 12. Sept. and Class. 

MiXft, impf. eiuleXe, fut. fXEXri<TEL, to 
he for care and concern to any one, avQpoo- 
TToicrL jutXct), Horn. Od. ix. 20. Hence 
aiXsL^it co?icerns, with dat. of pers. caring, 
and a gen., and usually to be rendered per- 
sonally, \. e. to care for or of prop. foil, 
by gen. of the thing cared for. 1 Cor. ix. 9, 
lx^ Tcov fjocov /j-eXel tw 0£a) ; i. e. ' does 
not God take care of oxen ?' with gen. 
impl. 1 Cor. vii. 21 ; and so Jos. and 
Class. ; foil, by irEpl with gen. Matt. xxii. 

16, OV fJLtX&L (TOL -TTEpi OvSeVO'S^ 1. 0. ' thoU 

carest for no one, art impartial.' Mk. xii. 
14. John x. 13. xii. 6. 1 Pet. v. 7. 1 Mace, 
xiv. 43. Jos. Ant. xii. 4, 2. Xen. Hist. ix. 
10. Once with a nominat. Acts xviii. 17, 
ovBev Tovrcov rco TaXXiiovL e/uleXev^ i. e. 
' none of these things was matter of con- 
cern to Gallio,' he cared for none of them. 
So Horn. II. V. 490. Eurip. Hippol. 104. 
See Blomf on ./Eschyl. Prom. 2. Foil, 
by OTL, Mk, iv. 38, ov /uleXel (tol., otl 
aTToXXvfjLEQa ; Lu. X. 40. Xen. Cyr. iii. 
2, 13, with a,s. 

MfiXsTaa), f. 77(Tw, (|U£\a),) to take 
assiduous care about , bestow close atten- 
tion upon any pursuit, Thuc. i. 142. ii. 86. 
or to practise any art or science, (a use of 
th-e term frequent in Plato and other of 
the best writers,) especially oratory. So 
Plato in his Phsed. 3, and often. Hence 
in N. T. as Mk. xiii. 11, />t>j^£ ixeXetute., 
* nor study before-hand what ye shall say.' 
And so the word is used in Sept. Now 
from the idea of foretliouglit naturally 
arises that of design. Hence the term also 
signified (like the Lat. meditor^ to whiclij 



in fact, it gave birth,) to meditate or de- 
vise., as said of plans. So Acts iv. 25, Xaoi 
ElxE\i'Ti]crav kevu.. Again, as the idea of 
close application is inherent in the term, 
so it came to mean, not with reference to 
arts and sciences alone, but in a general 
way, to perform any tldng ii'ith zecd.^ ' stu- 
diose et ex professis aliquid agere,' as 
Hdot. iii. 15, tovto fx. and vi. 105, ' to 
make any thing one's care and study.' So 
1 Tim. iv. 15, Tav^a /-ifXETa. Comp. 
Arrian Epict. iv. 1, ravra (xeX. and Diog. 
Laert. x. 123, Tauxa irpuTTE Kai ixeXetu. 

MeXi, tTos, TO, honey Lat. met, Rev. 
X. 9, 10. Matt. iii. 4, and Mk. i. 6, ^xeXl 
aypiov : so Diod. Sic. t. vii. 405. viii. 
411, on the nature of which see niy note 
on Matt. iii. 4. 

MfXtco-ios, ou, 6, -»7, adj. {fxiXLcrcra., 
bee, ) of bees, made by bees, Lu. xxiv. 42, 
aiTo JUL. K^pLov, of bee-comb. Comp. 1 Sam. 

xiv. 27, TO K7]pL0V TOV /X£\lT05. 

MeXA-co, f. ?7<ra), imperf. e/jlsXXov and 
viueXXov, to be ctbout to do or suffer any 
thing, to be on the point of foil, by infin. 
of that which one is about to do or suffer, 
mostly the inf. fut, freq. inf. py^es. and 
rarely inf. aor. I. prop, and 1) genei'. to 
beaboid, foil, by inf. pres. Lu.vii.2, £/xfX- 
Xe teXevtcLv, ' was about to die, i. e. was 
at the point of death.' John iv. 47. Acts 
xxi. 27. xxvii. 33, and Class. ; by inf aor. 
Rev. iii. 2, a ^eXXel airoQavElv. xii. 4, & 
Class. 2) spec, as implying purpose, to have 
in mind, intend, ivill, foil, by inf. pres. Matt, 
ii. 13; by inf. aor. Rev. ii. 10, l^ov jxiX- 
Xel (SaXhu. iii. 16, and Class. — II. in the 
sense ought, shoidd, must, as implying ne- 
cessity, accordance with the nature of 
things or with the Divine appointment, and 
tlierefore, as destined, sure to take place. 
So foil, by inf pres. Matt. xi. 14, 'HXta? 
6 juiXXtou £p)(£cr6at. Mk. X. 32. Lu. ix. 
31, et al. and Class.; by inf aor. Rom. 
viii. 18. Gal. iii. 23, and Class.; by inf 
flit. Acts xi. 28. xxiv. 15, and Class. 
Hence parti cip. juleXXodv, ovara, ov, im- 
pending,fidure,v;\tX\ inf. impl. as EaEcrQat, 
Epx^ahuL, &c. Matt. iii. 7, airo t^s ^f\- 
Xovari^ 6py7]9. xii. 32. Rom. v. 14, al. 
rra ijleXXovtu, things to come, Rom. viii. 
38. 1 Cor. iii. 22. eU to jxiXXov, in future, 
hereafter, Lu. xiii. 9, al. and Class. — III. 
equiv. to may, can, icill, implying possi- 
bility, probability, what one hopes or fears, 
foil.* by inf. pres* Matt. xxiv. 6. Lu. xxii. 
23, 6 TOVTO fxiXXcou <7rpdor<rEiV, ' who 
might or could do this ;' by inf fut. Acts 

xxvii. 10, ^ECopU) OTL fXETO. V^pEO)^ fxiX- 

Xelv E(T£a6aL TOVTrXovv. — IV. to be EVER 
ABOUT to do a thing, and by impl. to li?i- 
ger, delay. Acts xxii. 16, /cat vvv tL ueX- , 
Af : and oft. in Class. 

M£Xo9, £os oi/s, TO, (prob. the same ' 



MEA 



259 



MEN 



word, differently pronounced, as ^tpos : 
both of them expressing division or sepd- 
ration of any object into its parts,) a limb, 
meml)cr of the body, 1) prop. Matt. v. 
29, 30, 'iv Twu /iieXiou aov. Rom. xii. 4, 
al. and Class. Ta fxiXij, ' the members' 
collect, meaning the tfodi/, as the seat of 
the desires and passions, Rom. vi. 13, Ta 
fxiXi] vjULutu OTT/Xa dSiKLa^^OY 6Li(aiO(xvui]9, 
and vii. 23, to. at\i] fxov^ meaning the 
flesh, as opp. to the spirit ; the unrenewed 
part of a man, which is like a body con- 
sisting of many members, in the animal 
appetites and carnal affections. Hence the 
propriety of the use of the phcral^ as more 
significant and graphic. Such is espec. the 
case at 1 Cor. vi. 15. In Col. iii. 5, vsKpoo- 
(raT€ TO. fiiXt] u/uwi/, and Ja. iv. 1, au 
Tots fxiXsa-LV vfxcoi/^ the sense is carnal 
appetites and sensual affections. 2) fig. a 
member of the Church, the mystical body 
of which Christ is the Head, and believers 
in Christ members inserted thereinto by 
baptism, and dedicated to the service of 
the Head in the sacraments, as 1 Cor. xii. 
27. Eph. iv. 27, aXXvXcov jULsXri, ' mem- 
bers of one another,' namely, as intimately 
united in Christian fellowship, Rom. xii. 5. 
Me A. to, see MtXat. 

Me fifBpdva, 77, Lat. meinhrana^ 
skin, parchment, 2 Tim. iv. 13. 

MifxcpofxaL, f. ^ofxaL, (fr. obsol. fiifx- 
cf)(x), as noticed by Et\Tn. Mag. ' to lay 
hold of,' and metaph. to find fault tmtJi ; 
just as aTTTEcrdaL meant prim. ' to lay hold 
of,' and then metaph. 'to find fault with, 
censure,') depon. mid. to find faidt ivith, 
Uame, censure, with dat. Heb. viii. 8, 
fXEiJiipofXEvo's yap avTol<s XiyEi, and often 
in Class, chiefly the later ones, the earlier 
having the accus. The word occurs absol. 
Mk. vii. 2. Rom. ix. 19. Ecclus. xi. 7, 
nrpiv £^£Tacr77?, _u>7 fxiixxl/r). This use is 
rare in Class, but I have noted it in Xen. 
Cyr. i. 4, 25. Hist. i. 4, 2. Eurip. Med. 
558, and xVlc. 1020. 

M-E/ULXp- ifXO Lp09, OV, 6, TJ, adj. {lULEjUL- 

(po/uLaL, fxolpa,) prop. finding fault with 
one's lot,' i. e. discontented, complaining, 
Jude 16 ; a word not unfrequent in the 
Class. See the spirited sketch of Theophr. 
Char. Eth. xvii. of the juEfxxl/L/uLOLpo^, or 
grumbler, 

Mev, conjunct, implying affirmation or 
concession, indeed, truly, and at the same 
time pointing forward to something anti- 
thetic, or at least different, which is then 
commonly subjoined with ok or an equi- 
valent particle ; so that ijlev and de cor- 
respond to each other, and mark respect- 
ively the protasis and the apodosis. I. 
Where there is a distinct and definite 
antithesis, and fxkv retains its concessive 
power, indeed^ e. gr. 1) foil, by ok in the 



apodosis, so that fxkv — 6k is equiv. to in- 
deed — but. Matt. iii. 11, kyu) fxkv ^utt- 
Ti'^o) v/j.d<s Ev U(5aTi, o ok oiriaoi fxav kp- 
XOfxEva. ix. 37, et al. Sept. and Class. 
So too with yap and ovv, where each par- 
ticle retains its own proper force, e. gr. 
ixtv yap — 6k, for indeed — but. Acts xiii. 
36, Aav'id fJikv yap — ov Sk 6 Geos vysL- 
pEv, al. InveHed, Acts xxviii. 22. Wisd. 
vii. 30. Class, fxkv ovv — dk, where ovv is 
illative, and imkv refers to 6k, indeed there- 
fore or then — but. Acts xviii. 14, sq. el fxkv 
ovv t]v ddiKriixd tl — el 6k XfiTiifxa k.t. X. 
xix. 38, sq. 2) With some other particle 
in tlie apodosis, e. gr. fxkv — dXXd, Rom. 
xiv. 20. fxkv ydp — dXXd, Acts iv. 16, sq. 
jukv — ETTELTa, Ja. iii. 17. lULkv — Kal, Acts 
xxvii. 21, sq. jukv — irXrjv, Lu. xxii. 22. 
So liikv ovv — Kal, Acts xxvi. 4, comp. ver. 
6. fikv ovv — Tavvv, Acts xvii. 30. 3) 
The adversative particle {6k or the like) 
is sometimes wanting after fxkv, either 
because the antithesis is expressed in some 
other way, as Heb. xii. 9 ; or because the 
apodosis itself is omitted, first, where the 
apodosis is obviously implied, Rom. vii. 12, 
w'cTg 6 fxkv vojULo? ayto5, suppl. ' but not 
this abuse of it.' Col. ii. 23. Heb. vi. 16 ; 
secondly, where, through a change of con- 
struction, the writer neglects the apodosis, 
Acts i. 1, Tov fxkv TrptvTov Xoyov k. t. X. 
Rom. i. 8. x. 1. 2 Cor. xi. 4. Sometimes 
the apodosis is thus as it were obliterated, 
and then imkv serves to insulate some per- 
son or thing, and thus to exclude every 
thing else which might otherwise be ex- 
pected or implied. So espec. with a pers. 
pron. as iyd) fxkv, I indeed, I at least, 
1 Cor. iii. 4. kyih fikv ovv. Acts xxvi. 9, 
4) vice versa, 6k sometimes stands in the 
apodosis without /xsi; in the protasis, e. gr. 
Lu. xi. 47. — II. where the antithesis is less 
definite, so that fxkv — 6k serve to mark 
transition, or are merely continuative. 1) 
simpl. jxkv foil, by Lu. xiii. 9. Acts 
xiv. 12. Rom. viil. 17. 1 Cor. i. 23, al. 
2) With ovv, i. e. jjikv ovv, in Engl, only 
therefore, then, either foil, by 6k, Mk. xvi. 
19. Acts i. 6, sq. ; or icithout 6k, where 
ixkv ovv then serves as a continuative, with 
a certain degree of illative force, Engl. 
then, therefore. Acts xxiii. 22. 1 Cor. vi. 
4. Heb. vii. 11, and Class. Foil, by Kal, 
Acts i. 18; or also with an affirmative 
power, yea, indeed, certainly, verily, Heb. 
ix. 1. 1 Cor. vi. 7, n6y] fxkv ovv oXw5 vt- 
Tf^ima v/ulTv egtlv, otl k. t. X. So dXXa 
fxkv ovv, Phil. iii. 8. — III. in partition or 
distribution, 1) joined with the art. 6, ?/, 
TO, or the relat. o§, r\, o, e. gr. foil, by 6k, 
Phil. i. 16, 17. Heb. vii. 5, 6 ; also one — 
another. Acts xiv. 4. xvii. 32. 6 fxkv — a\- 
Xo§ 6k, one — anotJier, John vii. 12. So 
OS /j-kv — OS 6k, the one — tlie other, Lu. 
xxiii. 33. 2 Cor. ii. 16. os ^ikv — 6 6k dcr6£- 



MEN 



260 



MEP 



j/cov, tJie one — hut the weak^ Rom. xiv. 2; 
also one — another^ plur. some — others^ ix. 
21. Lu. viii. 5, sq. Jude 22. 2) joined 
with other pronouns, as tycu fxev — iyth 

1 Cor. i. 12. aXka fxlv — a\A.o§ ot, 1 Cor. 
XV. 39. Ti§ fxkv — Tts <5£, Phil. i. 15. tovto 
/nkv — TOVTO parti?/ — paiily^ Heb. x. 
33. 3) joined with an adv. as co^e }xkv — 
iKti Heb. vii. 8. 

M-Evovvy s rr fxEv ovv but stronger, 
indeed, yea verily, Lu. xi. 28. Rom. 
'ix. 20. Phil. iii. 8, al. 

MiyTOi, conjunct, (/usf, Tot enclit.) 
prop. ~ /jLEv affirmative or concessive, but 
stronger, indeed, truly, certainly, espec. in 
negative clauses and answers. Hence in 
N. T. 1 ) though, yet, nevertheless, John 

iv. 27, OU^£iS -[kivTOl eItTE, T/ ^TJXEtS ; 

vii. 13. xii. 42, o/xcos fiivTOL. xx. 5, al. 
and Class. 2) once in the prim, sense of 
each particle, prop, fiiv tol, indeed there- 
fore, indeed then ; or, the force of /uleu 
being lost in English, therefore, then 
(— fxkv ovu); foil, by ^£, Ja. ii. 8. Xen. 

H. G. iv. 8, 5. Hiero i. 25. 

Mfii/o), (f. jULEvu), aor. 1. ifxEiva, perf. 
fiEfiEvnKa, pluperf, 3 plur. fXEfxEvriKELa-av,) 

I. INTRANS. to remain, continue, abide, in 
^cay place, state, or condition. 1) of place, 
i. e. of persons remaining or dwelling in a 
place, foil, by adv. Matt. x. 11, kukel 
fXEivaTE. xxvi. 38. John ii. 12; foil, by 
iv with dat. of place, Lu. viii. 27, ev oiKLa 
ovK E/uLEVEu. Johu vii. 9, al. and Class., 
espec. Homer ; foil, by /uleto. with gen. of 
person, Lu. xxiv. 29; foil, by Trapd with 
dat. of pers. John xiv. 25. Acts xviii. 3, 
20. /ca6' EavTov ixevelv^ ' to dwell by one- 
self,' Acts xxviii. 16 ; foil, by avv with 
dat. of pers. Lu. i. 56. In the sense of to 
lodge, foil, by irov, John i. 39, 40 ; by kv 
with dat. of place, Lu. xix. 5 ; by irapa 
with dat. of pers. John iv. 40. Acts ix. 43. 
Sept. and Class. So of things, foil, by 
ETTt with gen. John xix. 31, iVa ^xelvyi 
£7rt Tov (TTavpov TO. (TiMfxaTa : fig. foil, 
by £7rt with dat. 2 Cor. iii. 14. 2) of a 
state or condition, foil, by adv. 1 Cor. vii. 
8,40, lat' ovTui fjLEivr]'. (comp. Xen. Mem. 
iii. 10, 15, TOV au)fxaTo<5 /nil fxivovTO<s.) 
by Eu with dat. John xii. 46, kv t(] o kot'lo. 
fii] jxEivr), al. and Class. ; foil, by dat. of 
pers. ' to remain to one,' i. e. in his power. 
Acts V. 4. Sept. Dan. iv. 23, r] (iaaiXE'ia 
aov croL /ulevel. 1 Mace. xv. 7. With a 
subst. or adj. implying condition, charac- 
ter, &c. 1 Cor. vii. 11, /uleveto) ayafxo^. 

2 Tim. ii. 13. Heb. vii. 3. Hom. II. xix. 
263. Also of things, John xii. 24, auTOs 
[o Ko/cKTos] fxovo^ fjLEVEL, 1. 0. stcrilc. Acts 
xxvii. 41. With an adj. i7npl. e. gr. 
daraXEVTO^, ' firm, stedfast,' Rom. ix. 11, 
(so Hom. oft.) opp. to KaTaKULEcrdaL, 
1 Cor. iii. 15. Part, /ulevov opp. to irpadkv^ 



i. e. ' remaining unsold,' Acts v. 4, ovxl 
fXEvov, aoL EfXEVE ; and Class. With an 
adjunct of time during or to which a per- 
son or thing remains, Matt. xi. 23, yu^XP* 
TTj^ (rnfXEpov. John xxi. 22, sq. I Cor. xv. 
6. Rev. xvii. 10. John xii. 34, eU tov 
uiuova. vi. 27. Hence absol., with the 
idea of perpetuity, — to remain or endure 
for ever, be perpetuxil, 1 Cor. xiii. 13, vvvl 
Se jULEVEL TTicTTt?, eXttl^, dyaTTr]. 2 Cor. 
iii. 11. Heb. x. 34. xii. 27. xiii. 1. Thuc. 
V. 40. 3) of the relation in which one 
person or thing stands to another, thus, 
to remain in or with any one, is equiv. to 
be and remain united icith him, one with 
him, in heart, mind, will ; foil, by kv with 
dat. of pers. John vi. 56, kv kfxol fxivEt, 
Kayui kv uvtw, xiv. 10. xv. 4, sqq. al. 
So to remain in any thing, is equiv. to 
remain stedfast, to persevere in it, e. gr. 
foil, by kv with dat. John viii. 31, kv Tto 
\6yuct. XV. 9, et al. 1 Tim. ii. 15, idv 
fxEivcoa-Lv kv TTLdTEL, 2 Macc. viii. 1. 
Vice versa, the same things are said to re- 
main in a person, e. gr. foil, by kv, John 
V. 38, TOV Xoyov avTov ovk e-X^'^^ I^^' 
vovTa kv vjuTv. xv. 11. 1 John ii. 14. iii. 
17. In a kindr. sense, spoken of Divine 
gifts, privileges, foil, by ettl Tiva, John i. 
32, 33, TO UvEv/ixa KaTa(3aTvov /cat E/mEL- 
vEv £7r' avTov. So of evils, John iii. 36, v 
opyi] TOV 0. jULEVEL ETT avTov. ix. 41, h 
ovv d/uLapTia v/ulwv julevei, sc. k<p' vjud^. — 

11. TRANS, to remain for any one, to wait 
for, await, with acc. Acts xx. 5, ovtol 
'ifxEvov vp-d^ kv Tpwddi. Is. viii. 17. Acts 
XX. 23, ^Eapd p.E Kai 0Xii|/-£is /jlevovotiv, 
and Class., espec. the poets. 2 Macc. vii. 
30. Xen. An. iv. 4, 20. 

Mfpi^to, f. iaru), {/iiEpU,) to part, di- 
vide into parts, trans. Aristot. Pol. ii. and 
Sept., and pass, to be divided into parts, 
Xen. An. v. 1, 9. In N. T. 1) mid. fXE- 
piX^opai Ti juLETd Tiva, to divide anything 
with another, to share with him, Lu. xii. 
13, jULEpiaaadai /ulet kjuLOV Ti]V KXrjpovo- 
p.Lav. Sept. and Class., as Hdian. iii. 10, 

12. Theocr. Id. xxi. 31. 2) pass, to be 
divided into parties or factions, to be dis- 
united. Matt. xii. 25, 26. Mk. iii. 24, 25, 
26. Hdian. iii. 10, 6, rj aTrovdi] avTwv 
EKaaTOTE kpLEpiX^ETO. Pol. viii. 23, 9, /ule- 
pLX^Ecrdai Eh Sidcpopa. Also fig. in the 
sense to be distinct, to differ, e. gr. I Cor. 
i. 13, jULEpLEpLOTTaL 6 XpLffTo^ ; IS Christ 
divided ? i. e. ' are there distinctions in 
Christ .5^' I Cor. vii. 34, pLEp-ipicTTaL rj 
yvvh Kal t] irapQivo^. 3) by impl. to 
divide out, distHbide, e. gr. tous ix^'^a^, 
Mk. vi. 41. Sept. and Class. Hence, 
gener. to distribute, for to assign, grant, 
bestow ; of God, Rom. xii. 3. 1 Cor. vii. 
17. 2 Cor. x. 13; gener. Heb. vii. 2. Sept. 
and Class. 



MEP 



261 



MES 



M ip I jULva^ a9, 77, {f^^P'-'S-, f^^ptX,o)^) 
care^ anxiety^ as dividing and distracting 
the mind, Matt. xiii. 22, and Mk. iv. 19, 
ai fxipifjivaL tov aioovo^ tovtov, i. e. for 
'this Tiorld's goods,' Lu. viii. 14. 2 Cor. 
xi. 28. 1 Pet. V. 7. Sept. and Class. 

MepijUi/aco, f. r/cro), [fxipLfxva^) to 
care^ he anocirnis or troubled^ take anocmis 
thoiight^ absol. Matt. vi. 27, Tts Bk 
vfjiwv^ fxEpipivuw^ SvvaTaL — ; ver. 31. 
Lu. xii. 25. Phil. iv. 6 ; foil, by dat. foi' 
which. Matt. vi. 25, /mi] jULspijULVuTE n-y 
xj/vxv vfxuiv : foil, by €t§ to avpiov^ Matt, 
vi. 34 ; by irepi with gen. Matt. vi. 28. 
Xen. Mem. i. 1, 14 ; also with acc. Lu. x. 
41 ; by vTrep with gen. 1 Cor. xii. 25; by 
'TTois Matt. X. 19 ; by acc. of thing, prop. 
as to or for which one cares; hence by 
impl. to care for^ take care of 1 Cor. vii. 
32, 34, fjLspLfxva TO. TOV KvpLov. Matt, 
vi. 34, Ta eavTT]?. Phil. ii. 20, to. irspi 
v/jLcov. Xen. Cyr.viii. 7, 12, /cat to ttoXXo. 
fxspifxvai/. Dem. 576, 23, fxf-pifxvav to. 

M£|Ots, i(5os, 17, (/i€po9,) a part, 1) of 
a country., i. e. a district or province, Acts 
xvi. 12; so Sept. Josh, xviii. 6. 2) apart 
assigned, portion, share, fig. Acts viii. 21, 

OVK ECTt COi IULEpi9 kv TW Xoycp TOUTOJ. 

Sept. Gen. xxxi. 14. Deu't. xii. 12; prop. 
Plut. Agesil. 17. Dem. 1039, 22. Also 
portion, lot, destiny, as assigned of God, 
Lu. x. 42, Tr]u ayadi]V fxipida s^eXi^aTo. 
Sept. Eccl. iii. 22. ix. 9. Dan. iv. 12. 
3) as implying participation, fellowship, 
2 Cor. vi. 15, t/? /uLspU ttlcttm (xeto. 
aTTLO-TOv ; Col. i. 12. So Sept. Deut. x. 
9. Ps. 1. 18. 

Mspic/ios, ov, 6, (^gpi'^w,) 1) paHi- 
tion, division, i. e. separation, Heb. iv. 12, 
a\pi fxipLdfiov xl/v^rj^ te kuI TrviVfx. 
Com p. 1 Cor. xii. 4. 2) distribution, and 
by impl. gift, Heb.ii.4, Tiv&vixaTo^ ayiov 
fifpttr/xoTs. 

Mfpio-T^s, ov, 6, (^£pi^a),)a divider, 
distributor, Lu. xii. 14, see my note. 

Mt'pos, 80S 0U9, TO, (jUEtpo), to divide, 
apportion, allot,) a part, e. gr. I. part of 
a whole, I) a portion, piece, absol. John 
xix. 23, riaa-apa fxipr] : foil, by gen. of 
the whole, Lu. xv. 12, to kTri^dXXov 
fiipo^ T?7S ov(TLa<5. xxiv. 42. Acts v. 2, 
suppl. Tfjs TtyUjjs. xxiii. 6, suppl. tou 

(TUV&dpLOV. xix. 27, TOUTO KlvSvVEVEL TO 

fj.Epo9, this part, i. e. ' this branch of our 
trade," &c. Hence often in adverbial sig- 
nifications, e. gr. accus. p.Epo<s tl, in some 
part, partly, 1 Cor. xi. 18. Thuc. ii. 64. 
Xen. Eq. i. 12. air 6 jxipov^, in part, 
partly, in some degree, Rom. xi. 25. 2 
Cor. i. 14. ii. 5, al. Diod. Sic. xiii. 108. ek 
fXEpov^, in particular, individually, 1 Cor. 
xii. 27 ; in part, partly, i. e. imperfectly, 
1 Cor. xiii, 9, 12. ver. 10, to ek fxipov^. 



' this piece-meal knowledge.' KaTo. fxtpo^, 
particularly, in detail, Heb. ix. 5. Pol. i. 
4, 3. Thuc. iv. 26. 2) said of a country, 
the earth, &c. a part, tract, region. Matt, 
ii. 22, f IS TO. pipt] T77s Ta\i\aLa's. Acts 
ii. 10, al. absol. xix. 1. xx. 2. So Eph. iv. 
9, Ta KaTwTEpa fXEpi] t?]s 'yt7§. Sept. & 
Class. So of a ship, part., i. e. side, John 
xxi. 6, Ta ^£^ta pipr\ tov ttXolov. Sept. 
Ex. xxxii. 15, al. 1 Mace. ix. 12. 3) fig. 
of some part of a general topic, &c. a par- 
ticular. Col. ii, 16, EV pipEL E0pTr}<3 v 

vov/uLTivia^, ' in the particular of a festival/ 
i. e. in respect of. Philo, 989, p.EpEL 
XaptTos, and 156, ev p.EpEL Xoyov. So 
Ev Tto pipEL TovTco, ' iu this particular,"* 
in this respect, 2 Cor. iii. 10. ix. 3. 1 Pet. 
iv. 16. — II. part assigned, portion, share. 
Rev. xxii. 19, dcpaLp-na-Ei 6 0€os to fis'pos 
ai'Tou. Adv. dvd p.Epo9, 'each in his 
part or turn, by course,' 1 Cor. xiv. 27, 
and oft. in Class. Also portion, lot, des- 
tiny, as assigned of God, Matt. xxiv. 51, 

TO pLpO'S aVTOV pLETO. TU)V VTTOKpLTWV 

dria-EL. Lu. xii. 46. Rev. xxi. 8. Sept. 
Eccl. V. 18. Soph. Antig. 147. Thuc. i. 
127. — HI. as implying participation., feU 
loivship, John xiii. 8, ovk I'x^^^ p.Epo's 
p.ET Ep.ov. Rev. XX. 6. 

l^Eari pL(3p ia, as, 77, (for p.^ar}p.Epia, 
fr. jXEcros, v/mipa,) prop, mid-day, ?ioon. 
Acts xxii. 6. Sept. and Class. Meton. 
the mid-day quarter, i. e. the south. Acts 
viii. 26. Jos. Ant. iv. 5, 2. Xen. Cyr. i. 
1, 5. 

MgctTcuct), f. Evau), {pLEcrLTTi^,) prim. 
' to be in the middle,' as autumn between 
summer and winter ; but almost always of 
persons, 'to be a mediator' between two 
parties disagreeing, Jos. Ant. xvi. 4, 3, or 
to mediate for any one, to intercede for 
him with another, Jos. Ant. vii. 8, 5, 
kpLECTLTEvcTE TTpos TOV ^acnXia. Also 
foil, by an acc. of the object accomplished 
by the mediation, Diod. Sic. xix. 71, /u. 
Tas cvvdriKa^. Pol. xi. 34, 3, p.. Tr\v <5ia- 
XvcTLv, ' reconciliation.' In N. T. to in- 
tervene with any thing, i. e. to interpose it, 
Heb. vi. 17, opfco) kp-EcriTEva-E, 'he inter- 
posed an oath,' i.e. between himself and 
the other party. So Soph. El. 47, dyyEXXe 

bpKU) 'Trpoo'TiOets, for Trpoo-TiOfis op- 
Kov Ttj dyyEXia, namely, by way of con- 
firmation, pledge. 

Meo-I'tijs, ov, 6, {pi(Tos, elp-L,) prop. 
' one who is in the middle ' between two 
others, (so Plut. Is. and Osir. 46, it is 
used of the intermediate Being between 
the Good and the Evil principle,) and fig. 
a mediator, one who intervenes between 
two parties, 1) as a mere medium of 
communication between them. Said of 
Moses, Gal. iii. 19, 20. Jos. Ant. xvi. 2, 2. 
Comp. also Job ix. 33. 2) as an inter- 



M E 2 



9 



62 



MET 



rcsso}\ or reco7iciIei\ said of Christ, 1 Tim. 

ii. 5, fXECTLTi]^ Qeov kul avdoaoTTcov^ i. e. 
'so as to reconcile man to his offended 
Maker.' The term must not be lowered 
(as it has been by many recent Commen- 
tators) to the mere sense of arbitrator^ 
referee^ umpire^ or agent bet^yeen two 
parties, to make a covenant between them, 
as in Polyb. xxviii. 15, 8. and in vain is 
it to appeal to such passages as Virg. ^n. 
X. 175, ' ille hominnm Divumque inter- 
pres^ for there respect is had only to one 
part, and that the least important, of the 
office of mediation ; for mediation, to be 
effectual, required full satisfaction^ with- 
out which intercession would not have 
availed. The context in the above pas- 
sage requires espec. the higher sense, by 
wliich the word denotes mediator both by 

■ intercession and atonement. We may also 
suppose an allusion to Christ's Mediator- 
ship by nature.^ as well as office, by his 
partaking of both natures, divine and 
human ; in the latter effecting satisfaction, 
and exercising continual intercession for 
us, by presenting the merit of His sacrifice 
once offered. Besides the above passage, 
the Lexicographers adduce also Heb. viii. 
6. ix. 15. xii. 24, where Christ is repre- 
sented as otaO/j/c?]? KULvf]? /xEcrtT?]?. But 
there the sense is merely 'effector of the 
mediation supplied by the New Cove- 
nant,' as Diod. Sic. iv. 54, ult. /xEcrtTrji^ 

TUiU 6/ULo\oyLU}l/. 

MEcroi/u/CTtoy, iou, to, (neut. of adj. 
fxscrovvKTLo^^ fr. iuLi<70<s., vi)^,) midnight., 
Lu. xi. 5. Acts xvi. 25. xx. 7; tlie mid- 
night watch.^ Mark xiii. 35. Sept. and later 
Class. 

Meo-os, oy, (kindr. with /isra,) mid., 
middle.^ midst. I, prop, as adj. e. gr. fxicr-)] 
rjimipa, mid-day ; fxiai) vv^., midiiight., 
Matt. XXV. 6. Acts xxvi. 13. A later 
form occ. in Sept. of the earlier jxiarov 
Vfxipa^., i. e. jiXEcrovcra i^fxipa., fxe(Tt]/u(3pLa. 
In an adverb, sense, Lu. xxiii. 45, gcrxi'crO?? 
TO KaTairiTaa fxa tov vaov fxicrov. Acts 
i. 18. Sept. Gen. xv. 10, olsIXsv avTci 
fxicra. Lucian, Conv. 43 ; foil, by gen. 
John i, 26, /xicro<s ok vjxwv £crTr]/c£, i. e. 
'in the midst of you.' Matt. xiv. 24, to 
0£ ifkolov 7)0?j fxiuov TT]^ OaXdcTai}^ tji/, 
' the vessel was now midway of the lake.' 
Joseph, and Class. — XL neut. to fxia-ov, 
subst. the middle^ the midst., only with pre- 
positions : ] ) dva fxiaov., hi the midst of., 
among., with gen. of person or thing. Matt, 
xiii. 25. Mk. vii. 31. 1 Cor. vi. 5. 2) ^lcl 
fxia-Qv., through the midst of with gen. of 
person or place, Lu. iv. 30, al. Sept. and 
Class. 3) &h fxicrov., iU to /xecrov^ into 
the midst., i. e. of an assembly, &;c. Mk. 

iii. 3, 'ijEipai to fxicrov. Lu. iv. 35. 
V. 19. 4) £/c /ixiaov, out oftlie midst, with 



gen. of person, />o?7i among., Matt. xiii. 49, 
al. Sept. and Class. ; absol. atpEiv tK tou 
/xia-ou, ' to take away from the midst,' tol- 
lere e medio, i. e. to abolish, to destroy, 
Col. ii. 14; and so yLvsardai Ik /xeuov, 2 
Thess. ii. 7. 5) iv fxiccp., kv tw fx&artp., in 
the midst ; absol. Matt. xiv. 6, dipxTio-aro 
kv Tco fxi<Tio. John viii. 9, and Class. ; 
with gen. of thing or place, Mk. vi. 47, kv 
fx. TTj's daXdaary}?., et al. ; of person, i?i the 
midst of among., Matt, xviii. 20. Lu. ii. 
46, al. ssepe and Class. 6) KaTo. }xi<Tov 
Trj's yi/zcTos, Acts xxvii. 27. Sept. & Class. 

ISIectotolxov, ou, to, {/JLBCro^., TOi' 

Xos.',) middle-ivall., paHition., fig. of the 
Mosaic law, as separating the Jews and 
Gentiles, Eph. ii. 14 ; see my note. 

^1e(t ov p dvt] fxa^ aT09, to, (/xecos, 
ovpavd<5^) mid-heaven., tJie midst of the 
heavens., Rev. viii. 13. xiv. 6. xix. 17. 

Mscoo), f. COCO), (rectos,) to he in ox 
at the middle., in the midst., mid-icay^ in- 
trans. John vii. 14, tt/s koprf]^ iixs(Tou(rti<s, 

i. e. ' at the middle of the festival.' Sept. 
Ex. xii. 29. Thuc. v. 57. 

MEccTias, ou, 6, Messiah., Heb. tlie 
anointed., equiv. to XptcTos, John i. 42. 
iv. 25. 

Mecto?, ?j, 01/, adj. full., filled., foil, 
by gen. of that of or icith which a person 
or thing is full. The word is almost 
always used in the Class, in a had sense, 
not unfrequently in a middle^ and very 
rarely in a good. In New Test, it occurs 
1) in a had.. Matt, xxiii. 28, fx. vtto- 
KpLo-sco?. Rom. i. 29, fx. (pdovov. 2 Pet. 

ii. 14, fx. fxaLXt^XLco^. 2) in a middle 
sense, John xix. 29, ogous fx. xx. 11, fx. 
IxOuwv : and so often in Plato and Xen. 
3) in a good sense, Rom. xv. 14, fx. dya- 
dcocruvt]^. Ja. iii. 17, /x. kXkovs, So Xen. 
Hist. iii. 4, 18, fx. kXirLOitiV dyadivv. 
S}Tnp. i. 13. 

Mectto'co, f. ajcro), (/xsctto?,) to fill : 
pass, to he filled or full., with gen. Acts 
li. 13, yXsvKOV^ /uLE/xEaTvofxivoL siori. 3 
Mace. V. 10. 

M£Ta, prep, (kindr. with /uecos,) go- 
verning the genit. and accus., in the poets 
also the dat. with the primary signif. mid, 
ctmid, (Germ, mit,) i. e. in the midst, 
WITH, AMONG, implying accom2)animent, 
and thus differing from avv, which ex- 
presses conjunction., union. I. with the 
Gen. implying companionship, fellowship. 
— I. icith, i. e. amid, among, *in the 
midst of,' with gen. plur. of person or 
thing, i\Iatt. xxvi. 58, kKadrji-o /xsn-d Tuiv 
viTiipETihv. Mk. i. 13. Lu. xxiv. 5, oft. 
and Class. — ii. icith, i. e. together with, 
prop), and with gen. of pers. 1) where one 
is said to be, go, remain, sit, stand, &c. 
icith any one ; so, with a notation of place 



MET 



263 



MET 



added, Matt. v. 25, tcos brov eI kv Trj 
oBm fxET avTov. Lii. xi. 7 ; oft. icithout 
notation of place, c. gr. /utVeti/, ^lafxtveLv^ 
TTEpLiraTelv^ OLKelv fxtTO. Ttyos, to abidc^ 
walk^ dwell iviih any one, Ln. xxii. 28. 
xxiv. 29. John vi. 6b\ 1 Cor. vii. 13, fig. 
fxivELv fXETu TLvo<s^ to cuiitviue on the side 
of' any one, be of his party, i John ii. 19. 
So sluaL /jL&Td TLVO's^ to he icith any 
one, i. e. in his company. Matt. ix. 15. 
Mk. V. 18; also ysvicrdaL /msn-d tlvcs^ id. 
Acts vii. 38. ix. 19 ; fig. 2 John 2. Hence 

OL 6VT£9 or yeVO/ULBVOL fXETO. TLVO£, oi 

fxerd Ttt/o§, " those with any one,' his 
companions, Matt. xii. 3, 4. Mk. xvi. 10, 
and Class.; fig. to be of one'' s side ov party ^ 
Matt. xii. 30, 6 fx^ tou fxt'r afxov, Kanr' 
sjuiov kcTTL : to be present ivitli any one, 
i. e. for aid, e. gr. God, John iii. 2, idv 
fxii y 6 8£0§ /x£t' avTov. viii. 29 ; fig. 
X£if> KvpLov, Lu. i. 66. So of Jesus, 
Matt, xxviii. 20 ; of the Holy Spirit, John 
xiv. 16. 2) where one is said to do or 
SK^er any thing icith another, implying 
joint action, &c. Matt. ii. 3, 'Hpw^ij? 
£Tapa)(07], Kal 'iracra ^IspocroXvjUia /ulet 
av^ov. V. 41. xii. 30, 41, oft. and Class. 
3) foil, by genitive of a personal pronoun 
after verbs of having or taking ivith one- 
self Matt. XV. 30, EXOVTE^ fJLEd' aavTcov 

XwXous. XXV. 3, and Class. 4) where the 
accompaniment implies only nearness, con- 
tiguity, etc. Matt. xxi. 2, Kal ttcoXov /ulet 
avTtj^. Acts ii. 28. Rev. xiv. 1. — iii. fig. 
with gen. of thing^ gr. 1) as designa- 
ting the state or emotion of mind which 
accompanies the doing of any thing. Matt, 
xxviii. 8, E^EXdova-aL Tayy /uleto. (p6(3ov 
Koi ■x^apd's juLEydXrj^. Mk. iii. 5. Lu. xiv. 
9. Acts XX. 19, oft. and Class. 2) as de- 
signating an external action, circumstance, 
or condition ivith which another action or 
event is accompanied, e. gr. Matt. xiv. 7, 
jU£0' bpKov u)iuoX6yt](TEV avry. xxiv. 31. 
xxvii. 66, ' together with a guard.' Mk.vi. 
25. x. 30, oft. and Class. 3) foil, by gen. 
of thing which any one has or takes along 
with him, or icith which he is furnished ; 
comp. above in ii, 3. Matt. xxiv. 30, hietu 
ouvd/LLEco^ Kal do^i}^, Mk. xiv. 43. John 
xviii. 3. Acts xxvi. 12. — iv. from the 
Heb. usage, jUETa is sometimes put where 
the common Greek construction is diff^er- 
ent ; espec. after verbs and nouns imply- 
ing joint or fnutual action, influence, suf- 
fering, &c. ; after words implying accord 
or discord, Lu. xxiii. 12, iyivov^o dk 
KpiXoi — fXEnr' aXX^Xtfiv. Rom. xii. 18, 

/XETfX irdvTWV dvdpdyTTCOV EipyVEVOVTE^. 

Heb. xii. 14. 1 John iv. 17, v dydiry yu£0' 
77/ucui/, 'our mutual love.' John iii. 25, 
\r\Tr\<Ti^ — )U£Td Tou^a/wv. Rev. ii. 16, 
'TroXE/uLVcra) /ulet' avnrcov. xi. 7. xii. 17. 
xiii. 7, where the dat. is more common. 
Also after /ulolx^vm^ iropvEvco, etc. Rev. 



ii. 22, Tous ixoLXiyovTa<5 /ULET auTi]s. xiv. 
4. xvii. 2. Also after words signifying 
participation, fellowship, 2 Cor. vi. 15, 16, 
Tis fiEph TTtcTTw fXETa d7ri(TTov ; John 
xiii. 8. So Xoyi'^EaQaL fXETd Ttyos, ' to 
be reckoned, counted icith'' any one, Lu. 
xxii. 37, Kal fjLETa dvofxwv kXoy'iady : 
with dat. Hdot. viii. 136. Also after verbs 
implying to speak with any one, Mk. vi. 
50, Kal Evdico^ kXdXyo'E /jlet avTtou. 
Rev. iv. 1, al. So ttoleIv tl fXETd tlvo^, 
to do with any one, i. e. to or towards him, 
Lu. i. 72, TTOLijaraL eXeo£ fXE^d twv iraTE- 
pcov vjuwv. X. 37. Acts xiv. 27. xv. 4. — 
IL with the Accusative, /x£Td strictly 
implies motion towards the middle, into the 
midst of any thing ; and then also motion 
after any person or thing, i. e. either so as 
to follow and be with a person, or to fetch 
a person or thing. Hence also spoken of 
succession, either in place or time, after. 
In N. T. 1) of succession in place, 
after, behind^ Heb. ix. 3, fXE^d to 0£i;t£- 
pov K aT air ET acrfxa, and Class. 2) of 
succession in tivie, e. gr. with a noun of 
time, Matt. xvii. 1, /x£6' rjp.Epa's ' after 
six days.' xxv. 19, juLETa Sk xpovov iroXvv. 
Mk. viii. 31. So {xet ov iroXXd^ vjULEpa^, 
Lu. XV. 13. ov jXETa iroXXd^ TavTa^ v/ule- 
/oa§. Acts i. 5, and Class. ; with a noun of 
person, Acts v. 37, jmtTd tovtov dvicrTy 
'lou^as. xix. 4, and Class. ; with a noun 
marking an event or point of time, Matt, 
i. 12, fXETa dk t{]v /nETOLKEcrLav Ba(3vX(v- 
vo<s. Lu. ix. 28, al. and Class. ; also /u.£Ta 
^aiiTa or tovto, Mk. xvi. 12 : with adj. 
Lu. xxii. 58, fxETa ^pa^v- Acts xxvii. 14, 
/uLEH-d ov TToXv. — NoTE. lu compositiou 
fxETa implies, 1. fellowship, partnership, 
as juLETadiSwiuL, fxETEX'^-, /Ji ET aXajUL (3 dv CO, 
etc. ; 2. proximity, contiguity, as yLc£0- 
opLou : 3. motion or direction after, as 
juEdodEia, ixETa'TTEixiroixaL : 4. transition, 
transposition, change, over, Lat. trans, as 
fXETa^aivio, fXETaTLQrjfXL, fXEdicr^yjULL. 

'M.£Ta(3aivio,f. ^naofxai, prop, to go 
or pass from one place to another, to re- 
move, Lu. X. 7, [xy iuLE'ra(3aLVETE k^ oiKia-s 
eU OLKiav. So Pol. xxi. 10, 12. absol. fxi] 
jULETafSaivELV — y X'-^P^ KaTaXricpdooarL. 
Lucian, Vit. Auct. v. is dXXo (crcojua) fx. 
Hdot. i. 57, /X. £t§ TavTa Tct x^P'-^- 
Fig. John V. 24. 1 John iii. 14, /x. ek toO 
OavdTOV EL9 Tyv X^ooriv. So Plato, 550, 
[x. Td T?]^ TL/xapx^-f^^ "^^1^ oXiyap- 
Xi'ai^, and 165. Eurip. Hipp. 1287, tto)? 
ovx y'T^o yy'2 TapTapa KpvTTTEL'S Akfxas, 
aicrxw^^i-^ ; V TTTtjyos dvco jtxETafBd? 
(^lOTov ; 2 Mace. vi. 9, 24. Hence gener. 
to pass over or away, depart, foil, by diro. 
Matt. viii. 34, fx. dird tvov opicov avTwv : 
by EK and Trpo?, John xiii. 1 ; by adv. 
Matt. xi. 1, fxETt^T] ekeWev, xii. 9, and 
Class. 



MET 

MerajSaWo), f. aXw, to cast^ throw 
or turn over^ as the earth with a plough, 
Xen. (Eg. xvi. 13; to turn about^ as one's 
back to the enemy, Horn. II. viii. 94; to 
move one's hody, Eurip. Hipp. 204, /xt? 
/uLETafSaWs Si/uLa^ : and neiit. to change^ 
Diod. Sic. i. 12 ; to change one's opinioii or 
mind^ Hdot. i. 65. Xen. Hist. iv. 3, 13. 
In N. T. to cliange oneself^ i. e. one's 
mind, Acts xxviii. 6, fx^Ta^aWofxEvoi 
tXeyou. So Xen. Hist. iv. 3, 7, /uLSTajSaX- 
\6/uLevo9 eXEys^ and Plato, 481, E. fjL&Ta- 
fiaXX6iuiEi/o9 Xi.yEi^. 

MgTayo), f. ftt), (ayo),) in Class, to 
lead over^ from one place to another, to 
transfer^ remove. The primary sense of 
the word is to lead with^ take where one 
pleases, 1 K. viii. 48. In N. T. it signi- 
fies to move or turn about from one place 
to another, as a horse is managed by a bri- 
dle, Ja. iii. 3, or a ship is steered by the 
helm, ir^^dXiov^ called by Hom. Od. x. 
32, TTo^a i/i?os, where Didymus, with al- 
lusion to this sense, explains t6v niETayco- 
ybv xoD KEpaTO^ kclXwv^ t} to irrjd. 

M-STadiSwiuLL^ f. Smotu)^ to. give a 
share of^ share ivith any one, i. e. to im- 
part^ communicate ; foil, by dat. Lu. iii. 
11. Eph. iv. 28 : absol. 6 iuETadLdov<s^ 
'one who distributes alms,' perhaps an 
officer of the primitive church, Rom. xii. 
8 ; see, however, my note : with acc. and 
dat. Rom. i. 11, 'iva tl jULETaSoo \dpL(r/j.a 
vfjiiv TTVEVfxaTLKov. 1 Thcss. ii, 8. Both 
constr. occ. in Class. 

M£Ta0€(rtS, £W9, 17, duLETaTLdrjfJLL^) 

in Class, transposition^ lit. ' a setting in an- 
other place,' implying change or alteration. 
In N. T. I. prop, removal from one place 
to another, Heb. xi. 5. Diod. Sic. i. 23. — 
II. fig. from one thing to another, muta- 
tion^ change^ Heb. vii. 12, vouou ixeto.- 

BeO-L^. xii. 27, TCOlf (ToXEVOfxivOOU Ti]U 

fULETcidEarLv. 2 Mace. xi. 24, ettI n-d 
*KXXt]VLKd, scil. eOt], fxETadia-EL, Thuc. 
V. 29. 

METatpw, f. apaJ, (atpco,) in Class, 
prop, to lift up and take aivay^ remove 
from one place to another, to carry off. 
In N. T. intrans. or with eolvtov impl. to 
take oneself off ov an- ay., i. ^. go aicay., de- 
jtart., Matt. xiii. 53, /jlet^pev ekeWei/. 
xix. 1. So Gen. xii. 8, Aq. /cat /ixETpjpEu 

EKEldEV, Plut. X. 482. 

MsTa/caXfiO), f. £cra), in Class, to call 
off or away any one, i. e. from one place to 
another, and to oneself, to recall. In N. T. 
only in mid. to call aivay to oneself to call 
for., to send for^ with accus. Acts vii. 14, 

fXETEKflXiaaTO TOV TTUTEpa auTov 

'la/cwjS. X. 32. XX. 17. xxiv. 25. Eurip. 
Epist. iv. Diod. Sic. xvi. 10. 

MsTaKLVEO), f. vau)^ to move any thing 



MET 

or person from one place to another, and 
so change its place ; only pass, in N. T. 

fig. Col. i. 23, /Xrj fXETUKLUOVIXEVOL ttTTO 

T^s eXttlSo^., k.t.X. ''not moved away froni 
the hope,' &c. i. e. not fallen away, waver- 
ing in opinion ; occ. fig. also in Class., but 
only of a change of political institutions, or 
the like. I am not aware of any other 
example of the sense in Col. (i. e. to be 
drawn away from any opinion into an- 
other,) except 1 Sam. xx. 30, Theodot. 
said of rebels, who fall away from their 
allegiance. 

METaXafi^dvu)., f. Xi^xj/oiuiai,, to take 
apart., share., o/'any t\\m^ with others, i. e. 
to partake of share in., with gen. 2 Tim. 
ii. b*, Tuiv Kap'TTwu fxETaXapi^dvEiv. Heb. 
vi. 7. xii. 10. So n-po<prj9 juETaXa/ifBd- 
vELu^ ' to partake of food,' i, e. gener. to 
take food, Acts ii. 46. xxvii. 33, and oft. 
in Class. Hence gener. to take., get., ob- 
tain., with acc. Acts xxiv. 25, Kaipoi/ 6k 
fXEToXa^wv. Simil. Pol. ii. 16, 15, fxETa- 
Xa(36uTES Kaipov dpfioTTovTa^ and v. 98, 
11, TOTTov fx. V. 80, 6, and 40, 6. Nor is 
it confined to the later writers, since it 
occ. in Isocr. and Plato in the sense obtain. 

MfxaXijilAt?, ££«)§, 77, {fXETaXa/xfid- 
vcu,) a partaking of any thing, 1 Tim. iv. 
3, eU fjLETaX'nx^LV., 'to be partaken of, en- 
joyed.' Pol. xxxi. 21, 3, iJLETdXr]\l/t^ t^s 
dpxv^. 

MfiT-aXXaa-fTO), f. Jw, to exchange ^ 
one thing for another ; foil, by gv, Rom. i. 
25; £t§, ver. 26. Diod. Sic. iv. 51. 

MfiTa/iiXojuat, f. Tjo'O/xat, (/x£Ta, 
/utXojuat, ' to let be for care or concern to 
oneself,' to care for,) aor. 1. pass. jHET- 
E/uLEXvO^nv., with mid. signif. ; prop, to change 
one^s care., &c. Hence, to change one!'s 
mind or purpose., after having done any 
thing, 1) simpl. Matt. xxi. 29, va-TEpov 
Se /uLiTa/jiEXi^dEi^. ver. 32. Heb. vii. 21. 
Pol. XXV. 5, 11. iv. 50, 6. 2) with the 
idea of regret, sorrow, (as in /it£Tai/ota,) 
to repent., feel sorrow.. Matt, xxvii. .3. 
2 Cor. vii. 8. Thuc. iv. 29. ^ 

M£Ta^op0oco, f. co<ra), prop, to trans- 
form., to transfigure any one, e. gr. £awToj/, 
^1. V. H. i. i. Athen. viii. p. 334. In 
N. T. mid. to change one's form., to be 
transfigured., Matt. xvii. 2, where see my 
note. Mk. ix. 2; fig. to be transformed in 
mind and heart, Rom. xii. 2, ixETafxop- 
(povadE Trj dvaKaivwcTEL tov voos Vfxcov. 
2 Cor. iii. 18. Comp. Seneca, Epist. vi. 
' Intelligo non emendari me tantum, sed . 
transfigurari.^ See more in my note. ^ 

MfTai/ofcO), f. 77cra>, prop, to perceive 
afterwards., lit. to take after-thought., as 
opposed to forethought ; and hence to 
change one^s vieivs or opinion as to any 
thing, so as ' to be sorry it has been done,' A 
Sept. Zech. viii. 14. Pro v. xxiv. 32. Jos-\ 



264 



MET 



265 



M T 



Ant, ii. 14, 5, mh\ Class., as Xen. Cvr. i. 
], 3. Diod. Sic. i. 67. xv. 47. Plut. vi. 
94 & 95. In N. T. to change olio's mind^ 
in the sense to repent., implying the feeling 
of sorrow and contrition for M-hat one has 
done, 1 ) gener. in a moral sense, I^n. 
xvii. 3, Kai iav jULETavoi'ia-n^ ' if he be 
sorrv for what he has done.' So also absoL 
Died. Sic. xiii. 53. Epict. Ench. 34. 2) 
spec, in a Christian sense, implying heart- 
felt sorrow for unbelief and sin, and the 
turning from them unto God and the Gos- 
pel of Ciirist; absol. Matt. iii. 2, yutxa- 
i/OEiTE, ijyyLKE yap v l3a(TL\eLa tcou ov- 
pauiou. iv. 17. xi. 20. Mk. i. 15. vi. 12. 
Lu. xiii. 3, 5. xv. 7, 10. xvi. 30. Acts ii. 
38. iii. 19. xvii. 30. xxvi. 20, ixeTavos.lv^ 
Kai iirLaTpicpiiv kixl tov Geoi/, ' repent 
and turn to God i. e. by abandonment 
of idolatry and iniquity, and the worship 
of the true God, and performance of what 
he has commanded, Rev. ii. 5. iii. 3, 
19. xvi. 9, 11. Prsegn. followed by aTTo, 
Acts viii. 22, p.sTavGr](Tov aTro tt/s 
/caKi'as, i. e. ' repent and turn from this 
evil foil, by stti and dat. 2 Cor. xii. 21, 
Kai fxi) jUETav. ETTi T-^ aKaQapcTLa, &c. 
So Lucian, t. ii. 315, fXETavorjcraL k(p' ol? 
€7ronjcr£, et al. in Class, implying sorrow 
for what has been done, and a consequent 
change of mind; foil, by £/c. Rev. ii. 21, 
Ik t^<5 TTopvzLa's. ver. 22, et al. Sept. ; 
with ttTTo, Jer. viii. 6. As attended with 
acts of external sorrow by penance, (though 
sucli form only an adjunct of /nETccuoLa^ 
but are not an essential part of it,) Matt, 
xi. 21, dv kv accKKto Kai aTroSw /xetsvo- 
^icrav. Lu. X. 13. The idea of penance, 
eapressed in the above passagfes, is implied 
at Matt. xii. 41. Lu. xi. 32.^ 

McTaz/ota, a?, i'?, {fXETavoEto.,) gener. 
and in Class, change of mind ov purpose on 
reflection on any thing that has been done, 
Polyb. iv. 66, 7. Jos. Bell. i. 4, 4. iv. 6, 
1 ; or regret for what one has done wrong, 
Thucyd. iii. 36. Plut. de Discr. Adul. & 
Am. 17, o fXEV kXiyyjM koX xj/oya) ^^yfxdv 
EfxTTOLcov Kai /uLETttvoLav . lu N. T. it is 
used 1) geiier. Heb. xii. 17, fXE^avoia^ 
yap Toirov ovx tSpe, 'he found no place 
for a change of mind,' viz. in his father 
Isaac, Joseph. Ant. iv. 6, 1. Pol. iv. 66, 
7. 2) spec, in a religious sense, repentance., 
denoting, as the word is usually explained, 
' sorrow for unbelief and sin, and a turning 
from them imto God and the Gospel of 
Christ.' So Matt, iii. 8, Kapirov a^Lov 
TT/s /uLErravola^. ver. 11. ix. 13. Mk. i. 4. 
ii. 17. Lu. iii. 3, 8. v. 32, KaXtaai dimap- 
TtoXov^ £t§ fXETavoiav. xv. 7. xxiv. 47. 
Actsv. 31, dovvai fXETavoiav too 'IcrpaijX 
Kai dcf)E(TLv afxapTiCov., (where see my 
note, and compare Joseph. Ant. xx. 7, 7. 
iv. 6, 10. Wisd. xii. 19, and Clemens, 1 



Epist. ad Cor. § 7, fxETavola^ tuttou 

EdcoKE.) Acts xi. 18, TJ/I/ fXETCLl/OLaU ci'v 

^wT^i/. xiii. 24. xix, 4, xx. 21,tj/i/ eU tov 
B£oi/ fxETCLVOLav. xxvi. 20, Rom. ii. 4. 
2 Cor. vii. 9, 10. 2 Tim. ii. 25. Heb. vi. 
I, 6. 2 Pet. iii. 9. In the above passages, 
however, there are various shades of the 
general sense, which may be found stated 
in my notes in loc. Suffice it to add, that 
sometimes the term is used Avith reference 
to the repentance, or change of mind and 
conduct (by moral reformation) produced 
by the preaching of John the Baptist ; but 
more frequently of the change of hea?-t as 
well as conduct (by the abandonment of 
idolatry and sinfulness) required by the 
Christian covenant. In short, this fxETa- 
voia is not merely such a sorrow for past 
sins, (arising from a conviction produced 
by reason, that they are destructive of 
our happiness in this world and in the 
next,) as shall occasion abandonment of 
them for the future; but it is rather, in its 
second stage, and in its only evangelical 
sense, such an entire change of mind and 
heart, both as to the sins repented of and 
forsaken, and all sin, as is produced by 
the motives to holiness propounded in the 
Gospel of Christ, and wought in us by 
the Spirit of God working with our wills ; 
such, in short, as springs from a filial love 
rather than a slavish fear., from an anxious 
desire to please God, and to be ' holy as he 
is holy ;' thus carrying with it a hatred of 
the sins abandoned, as being odious in the 
sight of Him who is ' of purer eyes than 
to behold iniquity.' Of the two foregoing 
stages, the first marks a change of miiid., 
the second, a change of heart ; such as can 
only be entirely effected by Him who 
made the heart, in answer to such prayer 
as David's, ' Create in me a clean heart, 
0 God ; renew a right spirit within me.' 

MsTa Ju, adv. (jusra, /xeco?,) in Class, 
with genit. i?i the midst., i, e. betwixt, of 
place or space., and of thing or object, 
Hdot. vii. 85. Eurip. Hec. 437. Thuc. i. 
97 ; also absol, chiefly with the art. as 
said of time, or with a particle of time ichile., 
during. In N. T. 1) with gen. of place., 
Matt, xxiii. 35, ixEta^v tov vaov Kai tov 
^vcriacT^pLov. Lu. xi. 51, (and so in 
Xen. Cyr. vii. 1, 10,) or of person., xvi. 
26, fx. hiJi(jtiv Kai viJivov. Acts xii. 6, p.. 8vo 
<jTpaTL(joT(hv. Fig. of pers. Matt, xviii. 
15, jUETa^v (TOV Kai avTov. Acts xv. 9, 

OVOEV ^LEKpiVE p.. r}pU)V TS Kai avTwv. 

Rom. ii. 15, pETa^v dWriXcov., 'between 
one another,' i. e. in turn, alternately : a 
use very rare in Class. ; of M^hich the only 
apposite example is one adduced from Plut. 
de Discr. Adulat. et Am. I, pletu^v <^iXta5, 
' in the mutual intercourse of friendship.' 
2) absol. only of time, 7nea7i-time, mean- 
N - 



MET 



266 



MET 



wliile^ e. gr. kv tw fx^Ta^v^ scil. xP^j^oj, 
'■in the mean time,' Jolm iv. 31. And so 
in Xen. Conv. i. 14, 20. Also with art. 
6 jULETu^v^ ' the intervening ;' put for neo't 
Jhllowi?ig^ neod^ as Acts xiii. 42, to /msra- 
(TafSjSaTou^ and often in Joseph, and 
later Class. 

Mf TaTTE^Tro), f. xj/o)^ in act. sense, 
' to send persons after another, in order to 
fetch or bring him to any one,' to send /or, 
Thuc. iv. 30, 40. vii. 15. Aristoph, Vesp. 
670. More freq. in mid. to send for any 
one to oneself \ on one's own account, as 
often in the best Class. And so Acts x. 
5, 22, 29. xi. 13. There, however, the 
sense is 'to invite to come,' as in Thuc. 
viii. 5, and often in Xen. said of an infe- 
rior with respect to a superior. In Acts 
xxiv. 24, 26. XXV. 3, we have the judicial 
sense, as in Lat. accerso and our summon. 
With the primitive plena locutio at Acts 
X. 5, Tre/ULij/ou avdpa^, /cat lULiTaTri/ULXp^aL, 
comp. Xen. Hist. ii. 1, 6, 6 6k avTov 
fxsTa'/r&iuiTrf.'TaL 7r£/xv|/as dyyiXov^, Gen. 
xxvii. 45. 

MsTao-TpE^o), f. xf/co, to turn about 
from one direction to another, neut. Plut. 
Otho 4. Xen. Cvr. viii. 3, 28, and pass. 
to he turned, or mid. to turn oneself, round, 
Horn. viii. 258, and foil, by eU or Trpos. 
So Ja. iv. 9, b y&Xco? v/ul. sis 'ttIuOo^ fXETa- 
CTTpaipTiTco. Simil. 1 Mace, ix, 41, fxe-r- 
£(TTpd<pi] 6 Trivdo's. Ecclus. xi. 

31, TO. dyada &h KaKcc /ulst. And as the 
Classical writers use the terra of changing 
both for the better and for the worse, (e. gr. 
Hom. Od. ii. 67,) so also, in a trans, sense, 
it signifies to peri-ert, as Gal. i. 7, /u. to 
EvayyiXiov : a use arising perhaps from 
the sense to invert, ' turn to another pur- 
pose,' found in Aristot. Rhet. i. 15. 

MeTacxtj/xaTigo), f. iara), (cx^iua- 
t/Jo), (Txvi^ct-,) prop, to change the o-x^iua, 
figure, form, or appearance of any thing, 
trans. Phil. iii. 21, os ixETaaxnixanriaEL 
TO arw/uLa T7j^ Tair&LV(jo(TEiJO'5 iifxGiV. Jos. 
Ant. vii. 10, 5. viii. 11, 1, /x. abrov, of the 
external habit, 1 Sam. xxviii. 8, Symm. 
Mid. to transform oneself into another 
shape, character, &c. foil, by eU, 2 Cor. 
xi. 13, fjL&Taa-xvi^f^'T^'CoiuLEVOL eh diro- 
(yToKov^. ver. 14; with cos, ver. 15, fxETa- 
<TyY\ix.aTLXpvTai cos Slcckovol SiKaio<TV- 
vt}<s. Fig. to transfer figuratively, i. e. 
to apply metaphorically, with eU TLva, 
1 Cor. iv. 6, where see my note, and comp. 
Quintill. ix. 2. 

Me-TaT 1 6T]/u.i, f. QrtcTO}, to transpose, 
put in another place, and hence to trans- 
port, also transfer, translate, trans. Acts 
vii. 16, Kul /uLETETidrjcrau {aiiTOv) £t§ 

2vX^i^- ^' 'El/WX lULETETtdf}, sc. 

£t5 Tov ovpavov (see my note). Sept. 
Gen. v. 24. Heb. vii. 12, /xeraTtOg/xti/tis 



TT/s bpa)(Tui/r7s, ' the priesthood being 
transferred,' i. e. to Christ ; see my note. 
Sept. Jos. Ant. xii. 9, 7, fXcTaQELvai Trjv 
TLfxi)v diro TauTTis ttj^ oii<ia<3 eIs ETspou 
oIkov. Mid. to transfer oneself, to go over 
from one side or party to another, cltto and 
&U, to fall away from one to another, GaL 

i. 6, ouToj Tayioi<i fxETaTLdsGde ; and so 
Class, oft. (see Kypke,) insomuch that b 
pLETarLdf/uLSvo^ was, as we find from Diodo 
Laert. vii. 37, the name given to a philo- 
sopher who changed his sect. Metaph. 
to transfer to another use or purpose, to 
pervert, abuse, Jude 4, tj;i/ x^^P^^ "^^^ 
Oeou vfxuiv fXETaTSivTE^ eU doriXysiaVj 
' into an excuse for lasciviousness.' 

Metette LTa, adv. (ETreiTa,) lit. after 
then, i. e. afterwards, Heb. xii. 17, and 
Class. 

MsTEX^i P-^Q^^w-, aor. 2, fxETiorxov, 
prop, to have with another, i. e. to partake 
of share in, be a partaker. Sec, with gen, 
1 Cor. ix. 10, 12, £t dXXoL t^s k^ov- 
(Tia^ iffXMu jULETtx^^^'-^-)^^^ my note. Heb, 

ii. 14. vii. 13, (pvX7j<3 txt'/oas ^sTEcrxtj/cfi/, 
' he had part in another tribe,' belonged to 
another tribe : with ek, 1 Cor. x. 17, see 
my note. So to paHahe of food, i. e. to 
take as food, Heb. v. 13, and oft. in Class. 

M£T£ cop i^w, f. ioru), {pLETECopo^, high, 
fr. pETa, Ewpa fr. dEipct),) prop, to lift zip 
on high, fig. of the mind, to elate, as with 
hope, confidence, pride, &c. Also to ren- 
der hesitating, fiuctuatinq, to make of 
doubtful fidelity, Pol. v. 70, 10. Diod. Sic. 
xvii. 5, ixETE(apLX,E(Tdai Trpos diroa-Tacnv, 
Hence in N. T. pass, or mid. pletemol- 
X,op.aL, to he in suspense, he of doubtful 
mind, anxious, fluctuating between hope 
and fear, Lu. xii. 29. Comp. pLETEwpo^ 
Tats 6LavoiaL<5, Pol. iii. 107, 6. v. 18, 5. 
viii. 22, 8, et al. Oppian. Hal. iv. 22, plet- 
thpov fjTop EX^LV. And so Gloss. fXET- 
fccopos, 6 p.i] crTaOspos TOf vovu. This 
sense, however, probably arises, not from 
the foregoing uses, but from that use by 
which a sliip is said pLETECDp'iX^Ecrdai, ' to 
be out at sea,' Thuc. i.48, or 'tossed to and 
fro by tempestuous winds,' Arr. E. A. vi. 
192. And so the persons on board a ship 
thus tossed are spoken of as pLETEcopLadlv- 
Tas. Thuc. viii. 16, pLETEiopLcrdEU kv toj 
iTEXdyEL. And because these are per- 
petually tossed up and down by the winds 
and waves, hence ^£T£a>pt^H(r0at may 
well represent the state of one tossed about, 
fluctuating between hope and despair, as in 
tlie above passages of Polyb. and Diod. 
Sic. and oft. in Jos, And as pETEtopi- 
JtaOat is used of vessels tossed to and fro, 
up and down, now aloft, and then at the 
very depths, (see Ps. cvii. 26,) so it is an 
apt image of anxiety and unstableness of 
mind. So in Horat'. Epist. i. 18, 109, we 



MET 



267 



MEX 



have, by the same nautical image, ' neu 
fiuitem dubiae spe pcndnlus hoia;,' 

MfiTo iK'£ (T t a, as, 7/, (juExoiAc/o), cqiilv. 
to /utTot/ci^fo, ) i)ro]). change of abode., mi- 
gration^ and hence put for tlie Babylonian 
eocile^ Matt. i. 11, 12, 17. Sept. 2 K. xxiv. 
16. 1 Chr. V. 22. 

MfTot/ci^o), f. lo-o), Att. fut. icT), (oi- 
K'j^co, tV. o/a:o5,) 2^0 cause to change one's 
abode., to cause to migrate., trans. Acts vii. 

4, jULETtOKLO'eU UVTOU f t§ TljU JTJU TaUTI}!/. 

ver. 43, fxeroLKLcb iiriKELva Ba(3. Sept. 

iicipation^ and so equiv. to ixiQ^^i's : also 
partnership^ felloivship, 2 Cor. vi. 14, Ti's 
yap jULETox^v — ; ])arallel with Ti§ ^e koivuh- 
v'la — ; as in Pint. viii. 980, opxn^'^^x^V 
6k Kal TroiiiTiKy KOLVvovia Kal /x£TO)(»; 

Metoxos, ou, 6, 77, prop. adj. (/uet- 
i^u)., ) partaking^ as Hdot. iii. 52, and oft. 
in Plato. In N. T. subst. 1) prop, a 
partaker., Heb. iii. 1, KXiiGraoo^ kirovpavLOv 
fxiToyoL^ and ver. 14, fx. tov XpLorTov. 
vi. 4, /u. IluEviuiaTo^' ay. xii. 8, and so 
sometimes in Plato. So also Synes. to 
TTVf.'vtxa iXapuuEL tov^ [neToxov^ auTou. 
2) in the sense of partner., associate, fel- 
low., Lu. V. 7. Tous yu. Heb. i. 9. 

MfTp e'o), f. Tjo-o), (/xETpoi/,) ifo measure., 
trans, e. gr. of capacity., with an adjunct 
of manner, in the proverbial phrase w, or 
kv w, /j.i'rpM /uiZTp&LTB (deal out), /uet/otj- 
OjJo-ETaf, Matt. vii. 2. Mk. iv. 24. Lu. vi. 
38. Of length., &c. as measured by the 
rule, KaXa/uLcs., Rev. xi. 1, fxirp^crov tov 
vaov TOV 0EOU. ?.l. and Class. Fig. to 
estimate., judge of., 2 Cor. x. 12, kv eavToT? 
iavTou? fXkTpouvTe^. Aristot. Rhet. ii. 14, 
TTi yap avTuiv (iKaKLO. T0V<s iriXn? juls- 
Tpovcri. And so Hor. Epist. i. 7, fin. ' Me- 
tiri quemque se suo modulo ac pede verum 
est "where pede stands for a foot-rule. 

MsTprjT^s, ou, 6, (^et/oe'o),) prop, a 
measurer., but almost always metretes., John 
ii. 6, the Attic amphora, a measure for 
liquids, containing 12 x^^^i or 144 kotv- 
Xat, = I of an Attic medimnus, or He- 
brew bath. Hence the fx&Tpr\Tr]'s was =: 
about English quarts, or to 8| gallons. 
Sept. and Class. 

IsIet p Loir aQ lay, f. 77<tw, {^fXETpwrra- 
G/'/s, of moderated passions, fr. p.iTpLo<s, 
nrddo^,) to be moderate in one's passions, 
to have one's passions moderated ; hence 
to be gentle, indulgent, compassionate, with 
dat. toivards any one, Heb. v. 2, fxETpio- 
iradELU Svuu/j.Euo^ Tots dyvoovai k.t.X. 
Philo de Joseph, ii. p. 45, 37, pLvpla 

aUTOS ETTuQoV TWU dvi]Ki(TT(JOV, E(p' ols 
TraiOEvdrU /JLETpLOTTudill/, OUK Eyvdfi- 

(f)6r]v. Jos. Ant. xii. 3, 2, speaks of Ves- 
pasian and Titus as fxETpLoiradyja-avTaii/, 



'exercising moderation towards the Jews," 
notwithstanding the provocations they re- 
ceived from them. 

METpi'w?, adv. (/XtVptOS, fXETpOV,) 

measuredl]/., moderately, proj). with mode- 
ration ; also, and perhaps \)Y\m. mediocri- 
ter, ' in middling degree,' neither too little 
nor too much, Hdian. iv. 9, 16. ii. 7, 8. 
As, however, our terms middling ^nd mean 
came at length to have a bad sense, so (jl. 
came to mean parum, little, as Xen. Mem, 
iv. 1, 1. Hdian. i. 13, 16. iv. 6, 3. And 
so in N. T. Acts xx. 12, we have irap- 
EK\ridr]crav ov /xETpiws, ' not a little a 
rare idiom, but found in Jos. Ant. xv. 8, 
1, ou fXETpid}^ idvcryipaLvov. 

Met pop, ov, TO, (fr. Goth, met-an, 
whence the Latin met-ior, and our mete; 
so signifying lit. that by which any thing 
is measured,) measure, 1) prop, as of 
capacity, in the proverbial expression, 
Matt. vii. 2. Mk. iv. 24. Lu. vi. 38. Sept. 
and Class. Measure of sins. Matt, xxiii. 
32. Also of length or surface, a measure, 
i. e. a measuring-rod, KaXa/uLO's, Rev. xxi. 

15, in later edit. xxi. 17, fxiTpou dudpco- 
TTov, man's measure, i. e. common, ordi- 
nary. Sept. and Class. Gener. and adv. 
EK fiETpov, by measure, equiv. to fXETpiw^, 
i. e. moderately, sparingly, John iii. 34. 
2) meton. measure, for portion, as mea- 
sured off or allotted, allotment, proportio7i, 

Rom. xii. 3, WS 6 GeOS E/ULEpLCrE [XETpOV 

TTLCTTEw?. 2 Cor. X. 13. Eph. iv. 7, 13, 

16, and Class, See on icavuiv. 
M-ETuiTTov, ov, TO, {fXETa, coxj/,) the 

forehead. Rev. vii. 3. ix. 4,al. & C'lass. Sept. 

Mtx/ot, ^ilso Me'xpi? sometimes before 
a vowel, a particle serving to mark a ter- 
minus ad quern, both of place and time. 
It differs therefore from in that dyjpi 

fixes the attention upon the tt"/io^e duration 
up to the limit, leaving the further con- 
tinuance undetermined ; while ^^xpi re- 
fers solely to the limit, implying that the 
action there terminates. I. as prep, with 
the gen. unto, until, usque ad. i. of place 
UNTO, as far as to. Rom. xv. 19, p-ixpt- 
TOV 'IXXvpLKov. Sept. and Class. — IT. of 
time, UNTIL, 1) with gen. of a subst. 
Matt. xiii. 30, piixpL tov ^Epiar/nov. Acts 
X. 30. Rom. V. 14, ^EXPi Mojua-fco)?. 1 Tim. 
vi. 14. Heb. iii. 6, 14. ix. 10. Sept. and 
Class. 2) fXEXpL? ov, i. e. ■)(.P'^'^^^-> 
until what tirne, i. e. U72til, as a conjunct, 
with the subjunct. where the thing is un- 
certain. Mk. xiii. 30, jue'xpts ov TrdvTa 
TavTa yii/rjTai : with impf. indie. Xen. 
An. V. 4, 16. 3) p-E^pL Ttj? crffXEpov, 
' until this day,' Matt. xi. 23. xxviii. 15. 
So pixpf- 'TOV vvv, Palseph. xvii. 2. pixpi 
tu)L'Se tu)V Kaipuiu, Diod. Sic. iv. 19. — 
III. fig. of degree or extent. 2 Tim. ii. 9, 
KaKoiradu) fXEYpL ^EcrpCov. Heb. xii. 4, 
N2 



M H 



268 



M H 



/xfc'xpis aLixuTO's. Phil. ii. 8, fiixpf' ^avd- 
Tov. ver. 30. Sept. & Class. — II. as con- 
junct, until^ before a verb in the sub- 
junct. where the thing is either pres. or 
fut. and therefore uncertain, Eph. iv. 13, 
fj.ixpi KaTavT-na-oofiEV — dvSpa TiXtiov. 
Xen. H. G. i. 3, 11, tteple/jlev&u — juLi~xpi-9 

M?7, a negative particle, not, but im- 
plying every where a dependent and con- 
ditional negative, i. e. depending on the 
idea or conception of some subject, and 
therefore subjective ; while ov expresses 
the direct and /ull negation independently 
and absolutely^ and is therefore objective. 
That is, (xri implies that one conceives or 
supposes a thing not to exist, while ov ex- 
presses that it actually does not exist ; and 
hence ^t] refers to the predicate^ ov to the 
copula. I. as a negative particle, not^ 
where the following special uses all flow 
from the general principles above stated ; 
e. gr. yurj, and not ou, is used : i. in all 
negative conditions and suj^positions, in 
N. T. after idv and £i, e. gr. idv fxit]. 
Matt. V. 20, kdv fit] iTEpLarcrEvarri i) 
diKaLocrvvr] v/jlcov. Mk. iii. 27, al. So eI 
fxr]^ Matt. xxiv. 22, eI fXY\ EKo\o(3a)dt](Tau 
al ijiuLEpaL EKELvai. Mk. ii. 7. John iii. 13, 
al. With kdv or glimplied, Mk. xii. 19. Lu. 
X. 10. Sometimes el is followed by ov. 
but oh then refers not to the condition, 
but to the verb alone, which it renders 
negative, as Matt. xxvi. 24, koXov r\v 
ctuTw, EL ovK EjEuviidr}^ i. e. ' the not 
being boim would have been better for 
him.' John x. 37, el ov ttolco nrd 'ipya 
nrov IlaTpos /uou, i. e. ' to not do,' equiv. 
to leave undone. Ja. ii. 11. Comp, in 
Ou. — ^11. after 'particles implying purpose^ 
also result anticipated or supposed, i. e. in 
N. T. after tm, ottws, wo-te. Matt. xxvi. 
5, tW p.r] ^'6pv(3o^ yEV7]TaL. Matt. vi. 18. 
Lu. viii. 10. John iii. 16. So before an 
infin. expressing purpose, &c. either inf. 
simply, or with wo-rg, £i§, Trpos, ^m, &c. 
— III. after relative pronouns^ as o§, ocTi?, 
ocros, wherever they refer not to definite 
antecedents, but to such as are indefinite 
and general, or implied, Matt. x. 14, os 
kdv fXY] dk^riTaL u/u-as. xi. 6. Lu. ix. 5. 
But ov is put after oV, ocTts, where 
these refer to a definite antecedent, as Lu. 
xiv. 33 ; or where any thing is said actu- 
ally not to be, or to be done, as Matt. x. 
38. xiii. 12. — iv. with the infin. as being 
dependent upon another finite verb or 
word expressed or implied : 1) inf. simpl. 
Matt. xxii. 23, oi Xejovte^ /at] ElvaL 
avdcTTaGLv^ i. e. as they suppose and 
believe. Lu. ii. 26. Rom. xiii. 3, diXtL^ 
dk /ULT] (po^ELcrdaL tyIv k^ovcriav ; 1 Cor. 
vii. 1, al. After ^gl, 6<pEiXo}^ &c. Matt, 
xxiii. 23. Lu. xviii. 1. Rom. xv. 1. 



1 Tim. iii. 3. After o/nvvpLL^ implying 
future purpose, Heb. iii. 18. After verbs 
of conimanding^ entreating, Matt. ii. 12. 
V. 34. Acts i. 4. Eph. iii. 13. By ple- 
onasm after verbs implying a negative, 
e. gr. of denying, Lu. xx. 27, oi avriXi- 
youTE^ dvdaTaa-Lv ,ar] Elvai. xxii. 34. 
Vice versa after ov hvvafxaL, where each 
negative has its proper power, and both 
together constitute an emphatic affirma- 
tive. Acts iv. 20, oi) SvvdfXEda d eloo/ulev 
— jULY] XuXeTv, i. e. we cannot but speak. 
After locrnrE, in N. T. marking a 7'esulf 
anticipated, or supposed, on the part of 
the speaker or writer. Matt. viii. 28. Mk. 
iii. 20. 2) infin. with tou as dependent 
on a subst. Rom. xi. 8, and 1 Cor. ix. 6. 
After verbs of hindering or being hinder- 
ed, Lu. iv. 42. xxiv. 16. Acts x. 47. So 
by impl. Lu. xvii. 1. As marking pur- 
pose or result, where wVte might stand 
instead of tou, Rom. vii. 3, kXEvdkpa 
ka-Tlv d'TTO Tov vo/nov, Tov fxr] Elvat 
avTrjv jULOLXccXiSa. 3) infin. with tw, 

2 Cor. ii. 12, tw /u?; EvpElv /jle Tltov. 
4) infin. with to, Rom. xiv. 21, KaXdv to 
/uLri (payELV Kpia. 1 Cor. iv. 6. So with 
eU and Trpos as marking purpose, supposed 
result, &c. e. gr. eU to fxi], Acts vii. 19. 
Heb. xi. 3. tt/oos to /a?;, 2 Cor. iii. 13. 
1 Th. ii. 9.— V. with participles^ when 
they stand elliptically for any of the above 
constructions, or refer to an indefinite sub- 
ject, or in general where they imply sup- 
position, condition, purpose, any thing sub- 
jective, e. gr. 1) when the partic. may be 
resolved into the construction with et, 
kdv, &c. Lu. xi. 36. Rom. v. 13. Gal. vi. 
9. 2) where the part, either with or with- 
out the article, is equiv. to a relat. refer- 
ring to a general or indefinite antecedent ; 
e. gr. 6 fxi] with part. Matt. xii. 30, 6 /urj 
lov fxET kfjLov, i. e. ' whosoever,' John 
iii. 18, 6 nil} TTLGTEvuiv, and x. 1. 
Matt. XXV. 29, dnro tov firi exovto's. 
Lu. iii. 11. Tras pn], with ^art. 1 Thess. ii. 
12, nrdvTE's ol pr] TTLCTTEvcravTE^. Matt, 
iii. 10. 1 John iii. 10. So gener. Matt. ix. 
36, (h(TEL 7rp6(3aTa p-i] exovtu TroLpiva. 
X. 28. Acts XX. 22, iooi> ky<h — p.r, 
Eidd)9, Rom. ii. 14. 3) where the part, 
with pv, expresses the supposed or appa- 
rent cause or occasion of any thing. Matt, 
i. 19, 'l(ocrt](p Sk 6 dvrip avTtj<5, Slkulo^ 
lov Kal pn] ^eXoov k.t.X. xviii. 25, p.7] 
EXOVTO^ ok avTov dirodovvaL^ ekeXevctev 
K.T.X. Mk. ii. 4. xii. 24. 4) where the 
part, with pir] expresses a supposed or ap- 
parent result, like uxtte pn] foil, by infin. 
Lu. vii. 30. Acts xx. 29, EiaEXEVcrovTaL 

XvKOL (3apET9 £t9 L^/Xa?, p.t] CpELdopEVOL 

TOV iroip-vLOv. 2 Cor. iv. 2. So Acts ix. 
9, ^v ripkpa^ Tjosts fiy] ^Xettwv, kul ovk 
EcpayEv. Also with Kai as equiv. to wtrTg, 
Lu. i. 20, 'iarrj crtwTrcoi/, kul fiy] cvvdp.Evo's 



MH 



269 



M H A 



XaXiforaL. xiii. 11. — VI. in all negative 
expressions of tvish, oitreaty^ command; 
where fxii] tlien often stands at the begin- 
ning of a short independent clause, the 
2dea of wishing, cScc. not being expressed, 
but retained in the mind. Thus to express 
a negative ivish^ fxi] is construed with the 
optative ; in negative entreati/ and com- 
mand^ with the imperative and sub- 
junctive. 1) with the opt. implying a 
negative ivish., in the frequent exclamation 
fiii] yivoiTo ! may it not be !' let it not 
happen ! Lu. xx! 16. So Gal. vi. 14. 
2 Tim. iv. 16, fxri auTois XoyLcr^En] ! 2) 
with the imjjcr. always, (which never takes 
ou,) usually with the imp. pres. implying 
continued action, and forbidding what one 
is already doing. Matt vi. 16, fjn] yivEcrde 
waTTsp oi vTTOKpiTaL. ver. 19, 25. xxiv. 6, 
opaTs., fxi] ^poelards, ' beware, be not 
troubled.' Mk, ix. 39. 3 pers. pres. Rom. 
vi. 12, fxi] ovv (3a(TLXsviTco t] dfxapTLa. kv 
Tw ^vi]T(a Vjxuyv arcofxaTL. xiv. 16, al. So 
hi antithetic clauses, as Col. iii. 2, to. avoo 
(ppovsLTS., p.i) TO. Eirl Trj<s yrj's, Ja. i. 22. 

aWd, Lu. xxii. 42. Matt. xxiv. 18. 
Mk. xiii. 15. John vi. 27. 3) with the 
subj. in negative entreaties.^ commands.^ ex- 
hortations, &c. where the action is to be 
expressed as transient; 1 pers. plur. subj. 
present^ Gal. v. 26, fir] yLV(jop.&da ksvo- 
So^oL, vi. 9 ; aor. John xix. 24, jun] 
cr)(LcrwiJLi.v aurov. In 2 and 3 pers. subj. 
aor. Matt. i. 20, /u?/ (po(3iidr}?. iii. 9, fin 
do^ijTE XiyELV. 1 Cor. xvi. 11, al. — vil. 
gener. in any construction, where the 
negation is from the nature of the case 
subjective or conditional, i>Iatt. xix. 9, os 
du dTToXvcrri Trjv yvvoLKa avi-ov^ jULt] kiri 
TTopvELa., where fxr\ either depends upon 
the preced. relat, or it expresses condition.^ 
^ if not for fornication.' Mk, xii. 14, ow- 
^€1/, r\ firj Scojuisv ; John iii. 18. Rom. iii. 
8. Col. ii. 18, d /ULri scopaKsv Lp^aTevcoif^ 
i. e. into what he cannot possibly have 
seen, or be supposed to have seen ; where 
ov would have expressed that he had not 
seen them, though he had the power. 
1 Thess. iv. 5, ,arj su TrddiL iiridv- 
/xms, where jULi] refers to the preceding 
infinitive, KTaadat. Rom. xiv. 1. — viii. 
coupled with ou, i. e. ov jjlt]^ as an 
intensive negative, in em]>hatic assertions 
and assurances referring to the future, not 
at all., by no ?«ea?2s, construed prop, with the 
Indie, future^ or more commonly with the 
Subj. aorist. 1) foil, by Indie, fut. Matt, 
xvi. 22, ou /j.^) 'icTTaL croi tovto. xxvi. 35, 
ou fxri crs. dirapvyiaofxaL. So, in emphatic 
interrogation, Lu. xviii. 7. John xviii. 11. 
2) foil, by Subj. aorist., e. gr. aor. 1. pass. 
Matt. xxiv. 2, ob fxr] dcpedrj woe Xi'6o9. 
Heb. viii. 12. Aor. 2. act.' Matt. v. 18, 
20 ; mid. Mk. xiii. 19.— II. as a Con- 
JUxVCTiON, that not, lest, Lat. ne ; in N. T. 



only after verbs ex])rcssing fear., ana iety., 
foresight., with which both the Greeks and 
Latins connect a ncgat. implying a wish 
that the thing feared may not be or hap- 
pen. Construed variously : 1) with the 
Subjunct., where the preceding or govern- 
ing* verb is in the present. So after verbs 
of/e«;7W(/, &(f. Actsxxvii. 17, c^o^ovixtvol 
T£ fxi] €is Tr]v 2. EKTTEcroocn. 2Cor. xii. 21, 
& Class. After verbs of foresight or caiUion., 
the verb being in the pres. Matt, xviii. 10, 
opaTE jui] KaTa(ppovr}(Tr\TE evo'S k.t.X. 
Mk. xiii. 5, 36. 2) with the Opt., where 
the preceding verb is a perf. of the Indie. 
So after a verb of foresight. Acts xxvii. 42. 
3) with the Indie., less often, and implying 
that the thing feared already exists, or is 
about to happen. So with indie, pres. Lu. 
xi. 35 ; with indie, fut. Col. ii. 8. 4) with 
the Infin. in negative wishes or admoni- 
tions, implying a fear of the contrary, i. e. 
withacc. & infin. 2 Cor.vi. 1. xiii. 7. — III. 
as an emphatic interrogative particle, which 
has lost its own negative power ; hut ex- 
pressing a degree of -fear or anxiety, and 
implying the expectation of a negative 
answer ; while oh interrog. demands an af- 
firmative answer. Constr. with the Indie, of 
all the tenses. 1) simply, with indie, pres. 
Matt. ix. 15, yU7j hvvavTai o\ v\oi Toy 
vv/uL<pu)Vo^ TTEvdElv. Johu ill. 4. Acts vii. 
28; aor. Lu. xxii. 35, ^i/ tlvo^ vcrTsor,- 
o-aTE ; John vii. 48. Rom, xi. 1 ; perf. 
John vii. 47 ; fut. Matt. vii. 9, 10. 2) as 
used before ov, i. e. py ov, where p.i) is 
interrogative, and ov belongs solely to the 
following verb, Rom. x. 18, dXXd Xtyoy' 
Mr/ ovK riKOvcrau ; ver. 19, pi] ovk iyvio 
'la-pai^X ; 1 Cor. ix. 4, 5. xi. 22. 

MriyE, see in Tk no. II. 4. 

Mtj^a/xws, adv. {pi^dapco'S for piiok 
dp.69,) by no means. Acts x. 14. xi. 8. 
Sept. and Class. 

Mt?^£, conjunct, (pn) & 6k,) differing 
from ovdk as /x?; from ou, and having the 
same general signification as pt], prop. 
and not, also 9iot, and hence neither, not 
even, as connecting whole clauses or pro- 
positions. 1) in continued negation, at the 
beginning of a subsequent clause, neither, 
NOR, mostly preceded by /ur/. Matt. x. 14, 
o? kdv pi] 6i^i]TaL iipd'S, p.i]dk aKovcrr] 
Tous Xoyovs vp.u)u. Mk. vi. 11. John iv, 
15; by pLtiiroo, Rom. ix. 11. So in con- 
tinued prohibition, usually after pLv : and 
then it takes the same constr. as p,T] with 
Imper. or Subj. Foil, by imperat. pres. 
expr. or impl. Matt. vi. 25. Mk. xiii. II. 
Rom. vi. 13. pr]6EU — pLi]dk, I Tim. v. 22; 
aor. 1. pass. 1 Pet. iii. 14 ; foil, by Subj. 
pres. 1 pers. plur. in exhortations, I Cor. 
X. 8, 9 ; aor. 2 and 3 pers. Matt. vii. 6, pi] 
CcoTE — , p.i]ok (idXrjTE. Mk. xiii. 15. pcridEL^ 
— pi}ok, Lu. iii. 14. Foil, bv infin. de- 
N 3 ' 



MH A 



270 



M HT 



pending on a verb of prohibition, Acts iv. 
18. 1 Tim. i. 4. 2) in the middle of a 
clause, NOT even, Mk.ii. 2, wo-te ixi]KirL 
XcopsTv mt]8k TO. TTpo? rijv 6upai>. Eph. v. 
3, and Class. 

?iot even one^ no one, i.e. no one, whoever 
he may be.' 1. gener. Matt. xvi. 20, 'iva 
fxi]6Eul EL'7ru}(TLV. Mk. vi. 8, iVa ix^dkv 
alpcocriv sh oSou. John viii. 10, and 
Class. With /x?/, (jl^kLtl, or jULi}d&i^ re- 
peated, in a strengthened negation, Mk. 
xi. 14. Acts iv. 17. 1 Pet. iii. 6, al. and 
Class. — II. in prohibitions, foil, by Imper, 
pres. Lu. iii. 13, /miokv trkiov — irpdcr- 
<TETE. 1 Cor. iii. 18, 21, al. ; with imper. 
impl. Matt, xxvii. 19. Phil. ii. 3; with 
double neg. Rom. xiii. 8. Foil, by Subj. 
aor. Matt. xvii. 9, /uLi]dsvL ELirnTe to bpa- 
fjLa. Acts xvi. 28. Luc. D. Deor. i. 2. 
Matt. viii. 4, opa p.t]d£ul £i7rj;s : with 
double neg. Mk. i. 44. — III. neut. juLv,dtu, 
nothing. 1) as a.dY.^iot at all, e. gr. /xtj- 
081/ ^LaKpivoixEvo^, Acts X. 20. xi. 12. Ja. 
i. 6. After verbs of profit or loss, Mk, v. 
26, Kal fxtjokv cocpeXiiQfiTcra. Lu. iv. 35. 
Phil. iv. 6, and Class. So ev /ul}]08vl, ' in 
no respect,' 2 Cor. vii. 9. Phil. i. 28. Ja. 
i. 4. 2) metaph. /mv^ku tou, ' of no ac- 
count,' Gal. vi. 3, and Class. 

M7;o87rox£, adv. (/x>/0£, ttote,) 7iot 
even ever, never, 2 Tim. iii. 7, and Class. 

Mtjoetto), adv. (/x)/0£, ttoj,) even not 
yet, not yet, Heb. xi. 7, and Class. 

M?)/c£Tt, adv. (/X?; £Ti,) no more, no 
further, no longer, in the general sense of 
/u>/, and constr. after Iva, (comp. /x?; I. Ii.) 
2^ Cor. V. 15. Eph. iv. 14, 'iva fxi]KiTL 
wfxsv vi'iTTLOL. With the infin. (comp. /ui) 
I. IV.) Acts iv. 17. Eph. iv. 17, & Class. ; 
with inf. after oxtte, Mk. i. 45 ; with inf. 
and Tou, Rom. vi. 6. £i? to /uli) with inf. 
1 Pet. iv. 2. With participles, as express- 
ing a cause, Rom. xv. 23, vuvl 6k />t7j/c£Ti 
ToVoi/ 'ix^^" 1- Thess. iii. 1, 5. As ex- 
pressing a residt. Acts xiii. 34, and Class. 
In negative expressions of icish, entreaty, 
command, see p^] I. v. Foil, by Opt. 
implying a negative icwh, Mark xi. 14, 
^TjKeTL £K <rov fXTjSfh KctoTrdv (payoL : 
hy Imper. pres. John v. 14, and viii. 11. 
Pli^kIti dpapTuvE. Eph. iv. 28, al. and 
Class. ; by Sid)junct. pres. 1 pers. plur. 
Rom. xiv. 13 ; aor. 2 and 3 pers. Mk. ix. 
25, al. 

M^/co?, £09 OU9, TO, length. Rev. xxi. 
16 ; metaph. Eph. iii. 18. Sept. oft. and 
Class. 

MjjKu'fw, f. vvM, {pfjKo?,) prop, to 
7nake long, leiigtlim any thing; fig. to pro- 
long. In N. T. mid. fxi-\i<vvopaL, to 
lengthen oneself; spoken of plants, i. e. to 
grow up, Mk. iv. 27, Kal b criropo^ ^\a- 
crdy??, Kul pt]Kui^\]Tai. So Sept. in act. 



Is. xliv. 14, o i<pvTEV(Tev 6 Ku/otos, Kal 
kpriKvvE. 

Mi}\fj}Ti], ?79, 77, {ptjXov, a sheep,) a 
sheep-skin, as used for clothing, Heb. xi. 
37, see mv note. Sept. 1 K. xix. 13, 19. 
2 K. ii. 8,* 13, 14, Clem. Rom. Ep. 1 ad 
Cor. xiii. 

Ml] I/, a particle of strong affirmation, 
yea, assuredly, Sec. In N. T. only in the 
connexion ?] pi]v, see in '"H. 

M>7f, pi)v6<s, 6, a month. I) prop. Lu. 
i. 24. iv. 25, & oft. Sept. and Class. 2) 
meton. for new-moon, which was the first 
day of the month and a festival, Gal. iv. 
10. Sept, vEopL}}uia. 

Mi]vv(x), f, v'(T(o, to make known, dis- 
close, discover, reveal, i. e, something be- 
fore unknown, trans, Lu. xx. 37. Johnxi. 
57. 1 Cor. X. 28 ; with dat.. Acts xxiii. 30. 
Class, oft. 

Mjjttots, neg. partic. (/xtj, itote,) in 
the same general sense and uses as pLti. 

I. as a NEGATIVE PARTICLE, 7lOt CVCr., 

never, at no time, in no case, Heb. ix. 17, 
kiri-l yu7?7roT£ tcr^^wEi [oiadvKtfi ote ^j; o 
oiadtpEvo's, and in Class. — II. as a con- 
junction, ' that not ever,' that ever, lest 
ever, i. e, 'lest at some time or other,' 
indefinite, — lest perhaps. So after verbs 
implying pu7pose, foil, by Subjunct. and 
preceded by a fut., a pres. or aor,, or a 
perf Indie. So with fut. preced. Matt.iv. 
6, dpouaL (TE, pniroTE TrpoaKOxbrj^ k.t.X. 
Lu. iv. 11 ; with pres. or aor. Matt. v. 25. 
vii. 6, 'Iva pniroTE, Lu, xiv, 29 ; perf. 
preced. Matt. xiii. 15, Acts xxviii. 27 ; 
foil, by Indic. fut. Mk. xiv. 2, pri'iroTE 
^opvfSo^ EGTai Tov Xaou. After verbs 
implying or caidion, foil, by Subjunct. 
Matt', XV. 32. Lu. xxi. 34, al. ; with prec. 
verb impl. Matt, xxv. 9. Acts v. 39. Xen. 
Cyr. i. 6, 10 ; foil, by Indic, fut. Heb. iii. 
12,— III. as an interrogative par- 
ticle, in a direct inquiry implying a nega- 
tive answer, John vii. 26, pviroTE dXi]- 
6u}9 'iyvwcrav ol dp^ovTE^ — ; Indirect, 
ivhether perhaps, if perhaps, Opt. Lu. 
iii. 15 ; with Subjunct. 2 Tim, ii. 25. 

MtJtto), adv. {p-t], TTO),) 7iot yet., Rom. 
ix. 11, Heb. ix. 8, and Class. 

M?;7rct)5, conjunct, (yujj, ttcos,) that in 
no way, that hy no means, i, e. lest in any 
2cay, lest perhaps. After verbs implying 
puipose, foil, by Subj, and preceded by 
the pres. (comp. in p-i] II. I.) 1 Cor. ix. 
27 ; by aor. Gal. ii. 2. After verbs im- 
plying/ear or caution, e. gr. foil, by Indic. 
(comp. in pt] II. 3.) Gal. iv. 11 ; by Sub- 
junct. aor. Acts xxvii. 29. Rom. xi. 21. 
1 Cor. viii. 9. 

Mj/pos, ov, 6, the thigh. Rev. xix. 16. 

M77T£, conj. (_U7], T£,) a continuative, 
referring usually rather to a part of a 



MIIT 



271 



MIK 



proposition or clause,. tlian the whole ; and 
not^ also not ; hence neither^ 7iot even. 1) 
in continued neciation^ at tlie beginning of 
a subsequent clause, after /u>/\ neither^ no7\ 

Eph. iv. 27, 6 7;/\iOV /ill] £7I-iOUtTW, jULVT€ 

^idoTE TOTTou Tiv ota/io/\(o, al. and Chiss. 
Repeated, /x?'/Tt — fxvTe^ m'Uher — no)\ be- 
fore different parts of the same clause. 
Matt. V. 34, al. and Class. 2) alone^ in 
the middle of a clause, not even^ Mk. iii. 
20. Xen. Lac. x. 7. 

M?/TT} jO, xtf)o§ Tpo?, a mother. 1) 
prop. Matt. i. 18. ii. 11, 13, 20, al. ssepe. 
Sept. and Class. Fig. of one in tJie place 
of a mother, Matt. xli. 49, 50. Mk. x. 30, 
al. Horn. II. vi. 429. Xen. Mem. ii. 2, 1. 
2) gener. for parent^ or ancestor^ Gal. iv. 
26. Sept. Gen. iii. 20. Fig. of a city as the 
parent or source of wickedness and abomi- 
nations. Rev. xvii. 5, BwjSuXcbf r\ /xaydA.?/, 
h jiiVTi]p Tuyv iropvuiv Kal twv ftdtkuyfiu- 
Toou TT/s yTj's. So Cic. de Orat. ii. 40, ' lux- 
uries, avaritiae mater.' A poetical mode of 
expression, so much the less harsh, since 
cities were commonly considered as females. 
\ Mj7Tt, neg. partic. (/uij, ti indef. ) 
perhaps., for the Tt diminishes the force of 
the negat. See my note on John iv. 29. 
In N. T, 1) as negat. only in the con- 
nection €t |U>?Tt, 'if not perhaps, unless 
perhaps,' Lu. ix. 13. 1 Cor. vii. 5. 2 Cor. 
xiii. 5. Also ^T^xiye, equiv. to /ulvtl^ but 
stronger, 'much more then.' 2) as IN- 
TERROG. ivJiether at all ? ivhether perhaps ? 
i. e. is ov has then^ perhaps? Matt. vii. 16, 
U7J1-L avWtyouaiu utto aKauOcov cttu- 
<pu\vu : Mk. iv. 21, al. oft. Sept. & Class. 
fiilTi apa., 2 Cor. i. 17. 

Mz/Ttye, see in M?7Tt I, 

M^/Ti?, pron. interrog. (yu>7, Tis indef.) 
whether any one ? is or has any one ? John 
iv. 33. vii. 48, 

M77T/oa, as, 77, ((U7?T?]p,) matrix .,womh.^ 
Lu. ii. 23. Rom. iv. 19. Sept. and Class. 

M77T/oa\a)as, ou, o, Attic jULrjTpa- 
Xoia9, (/x77Tjj(0, aXoLdco — aXodo), to 
smite,) a smiterofhis mother, a matricide. 
1 Tim: i. 9. 

Mta, see Els. 

Mtatvw, f. ai/ai, (perf. pass, fx^fxiaa-fxai., 
Tit- i. 15; perf, pass. 3 pers. sing, /xe/xt- 
cwraL, Tit. i. 15; aor. 1. pass. s/xtdfOiyf/,) 
a lengthened form of the obsol. /x/o), 
(whence /Mtapos,) cognate with yuoo, 
mo?;eo, admoveo., signifying 1) manibus 
moveo ac tracto., taiigo., tracto ; 2) con- 
trecto^ and that often used in the sense 
«eV«>, poUuo., as our verb to thumb for to 
soil. The signif. to colour.^ tinge^ stain., 
(found in Horn. Il.iv.l41,) is only a derived 
one, midway between the prim, sense and 
the general one to defile., trans., oft. occ, 
in Class,, and also found in N. T, ; but in 



two acceptations, 1) in the Levitical sense 
to defile., ceremonially, John xviii. 28, iva 
jULi) /JL Laud wart, and oft, in the Sept. 2) in 
a moral or si)iritual sense, 'J'it. i. 15, yu£/xt- 
avi-UL avrwv kulovou'S /cat 7; auut'idr}(TL9., 
i. e. ' have become corrupt.' Comp. Dio- 
nys. Hal. de Thucyd. viii. kputlcxtov Se 
TrdvTcou TL iuii]dku i.Kovcr'LUi's i//fcuofa0at, 
(X)]6t jULa'ivtLU Tiju avTou (rvvE'i6i]cnv. Heb. 
xii. 15, Kill did TauTi}<i fxiavduxxi TroWot, 
' be corrupted and seduced,' namely, to 
sensual corruption. An idea more dis- 
tinctly expressed in a similar passage at 
Jude 8, adoKu fxtaivovcTL., 'they pollute 
their bodies with fle&hly lusts.' Such are 
described, 2 Pet. ii. 20, as ol oirLGOt) aap- 
/cos, iu eTTLdv/jLLa fMLacrjiiou 'woptvofxeuoL, 
So Rev. iii. 4, of the righteous, ovk kfxo- 
Xvvav Ta IjULdn-La avToov. With fxLav- 
duocri in the above passage of Hebrews we 
may compare the similar expression in 
Liber Enoch Fabr. Cod. Pseud. 182, fxi-^ 
a'lvtadai kv yvvai^i., where tlie sense is, 
'to defile themselves with women; as 
Rev. xiv. 4, dt /xtT-d yvvaiKoov ovk kfxo- 
\vvdr]<Tav. 

Mtao-jua, aT05, to, (/uliulvo}.,) prop. 
iiiquinamentum., any j)ollution., defilement^ 
I) physical., from contact with anything 
dirty ; 2) legal., by the violation of the 
Mosaic ritual laws; 3) ceremonial., by pro- 
fanation of the Temple, or any thing holy ; 
4) in a moral sense, the pollution of the 
mind and soul, by deeds of sin and ini- 
quity. The 1st signif. is attested by He- 
sych. and Suidas ; the 2d, namely, what 
brings legal pollution, occurs at Lev. vii. 
8. Jer. xxxii. 34, 'iQy]Kav to fxiacrixa kv 
Tto oLKw : with which comp. Demosth. p. 
1374, Lua fxr] ixidafxaTu ysurjTai ku tol^ 
Lspol?. The 3d occurs in N. T. 2 Pet. ii. 
20, dirocpvyouTE^ Ta /x. tov Koajuov. 
And so often in Class., as Plut. vi. 605, 
TO fjL. TTj^ arapKo^ hfxaw., and espec. the 
poets gener. in the sense crime. 

M Laa- iuLd<s., ou, 6, {fiLaiuoj.) pollutio?!., 
defilenmit., in a moral sense, 2 Pet. ii. 10, 
kv kTriduiuLLa fxiacrfjLOv., ' in polluting lust.' 
See Wisd. xiv. 26. 

Mt y^a, aT09, to, (/x/yi/u/xt,) a mixture 
or compound., John xix. 39, ^xty/xa (Xfxvp- 
vi)9 Kai dXo7j§. Elsewhere only used of 
medical mixtures, Plut. vi. 298, 2. Ecclus. 
xxxviii. 8, TTOLva-sL fx. So Lat. mixtura. 

Miyvv juLL., f. p. 1^0)., to nrix., mingle., 
prop, with acc. and dat. and in pass, with 
dat. Rev. viii. 7, jusjULtypiua (xipaTi. xv. 
2, and Class. ; also with acc. and jUL&Ta 
Tiyos, Lu. xiii. 1. 

Mi/cpo?, d, oi/, adj. small, little, corn- 
par. pLiKpoTfpog., smaller., less; ])rop. the 
opp. of piya^., large. 1) of magnitude, 
Matt. xiii. 32, 6 piKpoTEpo^ ttuvtcov tu)v 
aTTEpjjLdTtov. Ja. iii. 5, and Class. : of 
N 4 ■ 



M I A 



272 



MIS 



stature, Lii. xix. 3, -r?7 vXiklu juiKpo^ rju. 
Sept. Ez. xvii. 6. Xen. Cyr/viii. 4, 20 ; 
hence of age, small^ youny^ Acts viii. 10, 
a'TTo fxLKpov £ws fxEyaXov^ et al. In a 
compar. sense for less^ younger^ Lat. minor 
natiL^ Mk. xv, 40, tou 'la/c. tou /uLiKpou. 
2) of quantity, cr ^/f//e, prop. 1 Cor. v. 6, 
uLKoa X^v/JLi}. Gal. V. 9, and Class. Fig. 
Kev. iii. 8 ; adv. fxiKpov 2 Cor. xi. 1, 
16', and Sept. So of space, neut. fxiKpov^ 
as adv. a little, TrposXdwu fUKpov^ Matt, 
xxvi. 39, and Class, 3) of number, little^ 
feii\ Lu. xii. 32, to fxcKpov TroLfxviov. 
'Sept. Gen. xxx. 30. Xen. CEc. ii. 8. 4) of 
time, John vii. 33, /LLiKpdu \p6vov^ al. 
Hence absol. fxiKpov^ i. e. xpo^^oi/, a little 
u-Jiile, prop. acc. of time how long, John 
xiii. 33, et al. So /men-d fxLKpov^ after a 
while, a little after, Matt. xxvi. 73, and 
Class. 5) fig. of dignity or authority, 
hu'ly, Immhle, Matt. x. 42, 'iva toov fxL- 
Kpoov TovTwv, al. and Class. 

MtXtoi/, iou, TO, a mile^ Matt. v. 41. 

Mi/xHo/xai, f. vcrofxaL, depon. mid. 
(yuT/io?,) to imitate, folloii\ as an example, 
with acc. 2 Th. iii. 7, ttw? oil /uLLfjLELcrdai 
viiia9. ver. 9. Heb. xiii. 7. 3 John 11, 
and Class. 

Mr/>i7jT7j§, ou, 6, {jJiLjj.iofj.aL,) an imi- 
tator, folloii'er, occ, only in the phrase 
jj.ijit]m]9 jLvojxaL, 'to become an imitator,' 
i. e. to imitate, equiv. to jxijiiojiai, 1 Cor. 
iv. 16. xi. 1. Eph. V. 1, al. Jos. & Class., 
as Hdian. vi. 8, 6, cos /u?? jxaQ;]Tr\<s zlvai 

jXOVOV, aWd ^?jX60TTJ§ Kal jXLfJ.1}T1]<S TTJ^ 

Ikelvov dvopsia's, 

~MLjivi]crKoo, f. jivi](Tco, in Class, prop. 
to recall to one's mind, to remind anv one, 
Hom. Od. xii. 38. II. i. 407 ; but gener. 
as neut. to bear in mind, remember. In 
N. T. only as a partial depon. mid. jxijivij- 
GKOjiuL., (f. jjLvvorojxciL, aor. 1. pass, kjxvri- 
a67]v both as mid. and pass., perf. part. 
IJLEjxvv,jxivo<s, as pres.) to call to mind, re- 
collect, remember, usually with gen. 1) 
prop, in pres. Heb. ii. 6, otl jiLfxpy'ia-Kij 
avTov. Heb. xiii. 3; aor. 1 as mid. Matt, 
xxvi. 75, Ejxv7](jdi] — Tou p-njxaTO's. Lu. i. 
54, k\iov<i, ver. 72, al. saspe. Heb. viii. 

12. X. 17, TWV dvOjJLLWV avTwv OV jll] 

/uiin]Gdu} ETL, — ' I Mill pardon them,' and 
Class. Foil, by otl. Matt. v. 23. Lu. 
xvi. 25, al. and Class. 2) aor. 1. kjivvcr- 
thjv as pass, to be remembered, to be had in 
remembra/ice, EvtoirLov tou 0£Ot}, for good, 
as prayers, Acts x. 31, comp. ver. 4; or 
for punishment. Rev. xvi. 19. So Sept. 
Ez. xviii. 22. 

jM/o-£a>, f. 770-60, to hate, detest, trans, 
pass, to be hcded, odious. 1) foil, by acc. 
of j^^i's. usually implying active ill-will in 
words and conduct. Matt. v. 43. /xio-?]V£t§ 
Tov £)(;6poy <Tov. ver. 44. x. 22, EG-sadE 
fXKJovfxEvoL, and very oft. also m Sept. and 



Class. By impl. to persecute. Rev. xvii, 

16, OVTOL /JLLat](70VarL T7/I/ ITOpVIJl/. So 

Sept. 2 Sam. v. 8. xxii. 18. 2) foil, by 
acc. of thing, to detest, abhor, John iii. 20. 
Rom. vii. 15, o fxia-u), tovto Trout}. Heb. 

1. 9. Jude 23, where see mv note. Tob. 
iv. 15. Jos. B. i. 31, 2. Xen. Cyr. iv. 

2, 37. 3) espec. in antith. with dyaTrdoo, 
it is 9wt to love, to love less, to slight, with 
acc. of pers. Matt. vi. 24, Toy eua /jLiartjorEL, 
Kal TOU ETzpov dya7n](TEL. Lu. xiv. 26. 
xvi, 13. John xii. 25. Rom. ix. 13. So 
Sept. Gen. xxix. 31. Deut. xxi. 16. Mah 

'Micrd aTTooocr ia, a§, v, prop, 'full 
pa^Tnent of wages ;' hence recomjiense, re- 
quited, e. gr. in the sense of reicard, Heb. 
X, 35, xi. 26 ; 2i\%o jmnishnent, Heh. ii. 2. 
Constit. Apostol. vi. 11 ; comp. fxicdo- 
docria, Thuc. viii. 83. 

Mio-OaTTO^oT-j/s, ot/, o, {jJLLcrdd^, diro- 
o'Ldcx}jj.L,) prop, 'a payer in full of wages ;' 
hence requiter, rewarder, Heb. xi. 6, of 
God. Constit. Apost. iv. 6, of Jesus 
Christ. 

Mi'o-0iO9, ia, Lov, ca lov, {jiicrdd^,) 
prop, an adj. hired, with, ellips. of dvdpui- 
TTo?, as in Jos. Bell. iii. 6, 2 ; but in use a 
subst. one hired, a hired servant, Lu. xv. 

17, 19. Sept. and Apocr. 

]M i o- 0 6 5, OV, 6, hire, ivages, reco?npe?ise. 
1) prop, and gener. Matt. xx. 8. Lu. x. 7, 
d^L0<3 ydp 6 EpydTij<s tou fXLcrdoy auTOV 
ECTTLV. Acts i. 18, yUicr06? T7}§ ddLKLa's,'' the 
wao-es of his iniquitv.' Rom. iv. 4. 1 Cor. 
iii.^8. 1 Tim. v. 18.' Ja. v. 4. 2 Pet. ii. 15, 
/uto-Oos dStKLa?, ' wages got by iniquity.' 
Jude 11, jXLadov, i.e. for hire or gain, 
Sept. and Class. 2) in the sense of re- 
icard or recompense, though far exceeding 
the merit of the receiver, Matt. v. 12, 6 
jjiLado-s vjxwv TToXus, saepe al. Sept. and 
Class. But in reference to the X. T. use, 
the word differs in this, that it often signi- 
fies a reward of mere grace, as well as 
wages, e. gr. Rom. iv. 4. 3) in the sense 
of retribution, pimishment, 2 Pet. ii. 13, 
jj-Lcrdo^ doLhcla^. — 2 Mace. viii. 33. Callim. 
Hymn, in Dian. 264, oi;0£ ydp 'Atoelc^^ 
oXiyco ETreKOjiTTacTE jiLcdio. Eur. Iph. A. 
1169.^^1. Frag. 937. 

'Ml (J 66 CO, f. too-w, (/jiio-6o§,) in Class. 
to hire out, let for hire to others. In X. T. 
only mid. fxicrdoojiaL, f. (varojiuL. to hire 
for oneself simply to tahe to hire any per- 
son for any service, especially labourers or 
artificers, trans. Matt. xx. 1, jj.La6(jocraaQat 
EoyaTa's. Sept. and Class. 

Islia-d (tifxa, aro?, to, (/uto-Oo'co,) prop. 
the hire or icages paid for work or service, 
Sept. and Class. Thus -^lian, V. H. iv. 
12, applies it to a painter. In X. T. it 
signifies a thing hired or rented, e. gr. a 
lodging or hired dwelling, Acts xxviii. 30. 



Yi T 2 



273 



Mor 



r/ad Pliilo, eu /xicOw^caTt ot/ctti/, and 
Theophr. Char. 23, junadtoTiiu olkluu oi- 
KEif. And so in Isocr. Orat. Areop. p. 
145, it is used for the rent of land. 

M to- 6 60 TO 9, OU, 6, {/ULLadoU}^) OTtC 

hired^ a hired semmt^ Mk. i. 20, as used 
of seamen ; John x. 12, 13, of a shepherd. 
Sept. oft. and Class. ; but ehiefly of mer- 
cenary troops. 

Ml/ a, a?, 7;, Lat. inina^ prop, a Greek 
weighty containing 100 opax/^ott, and larger 
tlian the Roman U'))-a or pound in the 
proportion of 4 to 3. Hence, as the latter 
is reckoned at about 12 oz. Engl, avoir- 
dupois, the /ui/a would be nearly equivalent 
to the Engl, pound avoirdupois. In N. T. 
fxvd is a silver coin^ estimated by weight, 
containing 100 dpaxfJ-ai-, and being itself 
the 60th part of a talent, Lu. xix. 13, al. 

Mt/£ta, a?, ?7, (/ULfjimlarKU}^) prop. ' the 
act of bringing to mind what is forgotten ;' 
but also used of presenting to the mind 
something to be knoiun ; thus correspond- 
ing to the two uses of the Lat. commemo- 
ration namely, calling or bringing to mind, 
and recouiiiing^ detail^ mention. The for- 
mer sense is rare in the Class. ; but found 
in Sept. and N.T., Phil. i. 3, k'TrX Trdcrr] tt} 
/u'j&Lq u,aa)j/, ' on every remembrance of 
you."' So Baruch v. 5, -)(aLpovTa<s nrri tou 
Baov fxvELci. The latter oft. occ. in Class. ; 
but almost always in the phrases /uLvsiav 
'dX^Li^ Tt-t^o^i 'to bear any one in memory,' 
liave remembrance of him, (which is 
found in the best Attic writers, as also 
in N. T., 1 Thess. iii. 6. 2 Tim. i. 3.) 
and fxvELav TroLETa-daL^ ' to make mention 
of,' which occurs in Plato and Lysias, and 
oft. in Sept., as also in N. T., Rom. i. 9. 
Eph. i. 16. I Thess. i. 2. Philem. 4, of 
making mention of any one in prayer to 
God ; with which compare Eurip. Bacch. 
46, kv &vyal<s oudafxov jULV&iav ix^i scil. 
iixov. 

Mi/^/xa, aTos, TO, (yUi/xi/rjcr/ca),) prop. 
a monument^ (lit. 'memorial,') intended 
to preserve the memory of any deceased 
person or past thing, Horn. Od. xv. 126 ; 
hence sepulchral monuments^ Hom. II. 
xxiii. 619. Eur. Or. 118. In N. T. meton. 
a toivh^ sepulchre^ Mk. v. 5. Lu. viii. 27, 
et al. saepe. Sept. and lat. Class. 

Mi/T7/x£roi/, OU, TO, (|Ut/xz/ijcr/ca),) prop. 
a memorial^ monument^ — /xi/^/xa, Xen. 
Ag. vi. 2. Thuc. ii. 41 ; hence a sepulchral 
monument^ cenotaph^ Dem. 1125, 16. Thuc. 
i. 138. V. 11. In N. T. meton. a tomh^ 
sepjidchre^ Matt. viii. 28. xxviii. 8, where 
see my note, and INIk. xv. 46, where see 
mv note, et al. Sent. Gen. xxiii. 6, 9, et 
ni: Xen. H. G. iii. 2, 14 & 15. 

Mf?]'/x?j, 77, (yui/xyrjcr/c6o,) prop, 'the 
act of reminding,' but gener. its effect in 



remembrance or recollection ; lit. ' that by 
which any thing is brought to mind,' 
whether before known or unknown. In 
the latter case the word may be rendered 
mention ; in the former, 7'eriiembrance. 
The latter sense only is found in N. T., 
namely 2 Pet. i. 15, in the phrase ti/z/ 
TOVTcov fiv)]^i]v TTOLelcrQaLn ' to call lo 
one's mind, bear in recollection ;' a phrase 
occurring in Hdot., Thucyd., &c. but only 
in the sense ' to make mention of.' To 
express the other sense, a Class, writer 
would have said /jli^. ix^^-^-, as Eurip. Iph. 
T. 1231. 

^Ivr] fjLOv S.V (i)^ f. sucrw, {/xutj/JLOov^ /ull- 
IULV1](TKU),) to remember^ i. e. to call to one's 
mind, and to bear in mind, I) prop. & 
absol. Mk. viii. 18 ; foil, by gen. Lu. xvii. 

32, IXVmxOVtVETt T7;5 yVVaLK6<5 Att)T. 

John XV. 20, fxv. tou Xoyov. Gal. ii. 10, 
Col. iv. 18, ' to be mindful of in the way of 
kindness; foil, by acc. 'to bear in mind,' 
1 Thess. ii, 9, fxv. t6v kottou. 2 Tim. ii, 8, 
fxv. 'lr](rovv Xp. So, by a certain mode 
of speaking, God is said to remember sin, 

i. e. to p)unish it, Rev. xviii. 5, e/ului^/jlo- 

VEVCTEV 6 GeOS T« do LK}'] jUUTa aVT7]£. 

(see fxifxvr\<rK.(jo and v'lrofXLixvriarKfo :) foil, 
by oTt, Acts XX. 31. Eph. ii. 11; iroQEv^ 
Rev. ii. 5; 7raj§, iii. 3. 2) by impl. to 
mention^ speak of^ foil, by Trtpt, Heb. xi. 

22, Trept T^S k'^O^OV kfJLUIIIJLOVEVC-E. 

Hdian. i. 1, 5. Xen. Vect. iv. 25. 

iSlurj fx6<TvvoVn OU, TO, (prop. neut. of 
adj. fxvt]fi6crvvo'Sn a word of tlie same form 

with ^Ov\6(TVVO<5n dECTTTUCrVVO'S^ dLKULO- 

avvo9, and signifying, 'commemorative,') a 
memorial^ monument^ — fxvy]fj.EloVn Hdot. 

ii. 136, 148. Thuc. v. 11.' In X.T. gener. 
memorial^ i. e. any thing preserving the 
remembrance of a person or thing, Matt, 
xxvi. 13, and Mk. xiv. 9, tis \xvmx6avvov 
auTT/s, i, e. 'in memory of her,' to her 
honourable remembrance, fame. Acts x. 
4, ai 'Trpocrevx'^'i- crou — dvi^i]<yav el<s jui/. 
kvuoTTLov T. 9. ' thy })rayers — are come up 
as a memorial, i. e. into remembrance, be- 
fore God.' Sept. and Apocr. 

M 2/?] CTE U O), f. EVCTOfXaL^ {jULVUOjULaL^) tO 

ask in marriage^ to woo. In N. T. only 
pass., prop, to be asked in marriage ;. hence 
by impl. to be betrothed., affianced., with 
dat. of pers. Matt. i. 18, /uy'Jjo-TguOsi'crtje 
T779 fxrjTpo^ avTou Mapias Ta> 'Iwcrrj^. 
Lu. i. 27. ii. 5. So Sept. Deut. xxii. 23, 
25, 27, 23. Artemid. ii. 12. 

Moy iXaA-os,^ 01/, 6, (/Aoyts & \d- 
Xo§, loquens,) speaking ivith difficulty., a 
stammerer., Mk. vii. 32, where see my 
note. Sept. for ' tongue-tied,' Is. xxxv. 6. 
Aetius viii. 38. 

Mo'yts, adv. (/io'-yos, labour,) with 
difficulty.^ hardly^ Lu. ix. 39, and Class. 
N 5 



MO A 



274 



MON 



Mo^io?, ou, o, Lat. modius, a Roman 
measure for tilings dry, J of the Attic 
medimnus^ and containing therefore 1.916 
gall. Engl, or nearly one peck. Matt. v. 15, 
et al. 

Mot^aXts, t^os, 77, (dimin. form of 
fxoLXf^^i express, of contempt,) 1) prop. 
an adulteress^ Rom. vii. 3, bis, 2 Pet. ii. 
14, dipdaXfioL /uLsa-Toi /ulolxoXl^o^, 'eyes 
full of the adulteress,' i. e. gazing with 
desire after such persons, ' gloating for,' 
as in the line of Rowe, ' Teach her delu- 
ding eyes to gloat for you.' The word oft. 
occ. in Sept. and sometimes in lat. Class, 
as Plut. Procop. Heliod. 2) fig. from the 
Heb. 07ie faithless toicards God^ as an 
adulteress towards her husband ; in 0. T. 
spoken chiefly of those who forsook God 
for idols, Hos. iii. 1. Is. Ivii. 3, 7, sq. Ez. 
xvi. xxiii. In N. T. gener. of those who 
neglect God and their duty towards him, 
and yield themselves up to their own lusts 
and passions ; or, at least, transfer their 
best affections from God to the world, Ja. 
iv, 4, fULOLypl Kal fxoixaKi^s.^. So also 
yiVEO. TToviipa Kai /j.oLXc^^'f-'S-, as said of 
the Jewish people, expresses an attribute, 
adulterous, i. e. faithless, idolatrous. Matt, 
xii. 39. xvi. 4. Mk. viii. 38. 

Moix«^: ^- ^jcTw, (fxoLXo^i) act. to de- 
file a married icoman, commit adultery 
with her. This act. form is very rare, yet 
it occ. in Xen. Hist. i. 6, 15, but in a fig. 
sense. In N. T. only mid. /xot)(«o/xai, 
gener. to he an adulterer, commit adultery, 
used both of man and woman, intrans. 
Matt. V. 32, bis, ttolU auVjjf juoLxdcrdaL' 
Kai 09 — /uLOLXctTai. xix. 9, bis, Mk. x. 1], 
12. Sept. Jer. iii. 8. ix. 2, & oft. Me- 
nander ap. Clem. Alex. Strom, v. p. 205. 

MotX£i«: '^t {/noix^vct},) adultery, 
Matt. XV. 19. Mk. vii. 21, al. Sept. and 
Class. 

Mot)(£va), f. Evao), and mid. /noix^v- 
ofiai, {/uLOLXo^^) to commit adultery, gener. 
and absol. act. Matt. v. 27, ov /jlolx(^oo-£L9. 
Rom. xiii. 9. Mk. x. 19, fxy] jULOLXeuay^, 
et al. Mid. once, John viii. 4. Diod. Sic. 
i. 78. Xen. Mem. ii. 1, 5. Foil, by acc. 
to commit adultery icith any one. Matt. v. 
28, 7J0?; kjjLoix^y<^^v avTi]u, and often in 
Class. Fig. Sept. Jer. iii. 9. Symbol, 
foil, by jmETcc tlvcs, Rev. ii. 22. 

iSloLxo^, ou, 6, an adulterer, Lu. xviii. 
11, et al. Sept. and Class. Fig. from the 
Heb. one faithless towards God, &c. see in 
MotyaA.is, fin. Ja. iv. 4, and comp. Is. 
Ivii. 3. 

MoX.t9, adv. {/uLU)\o<s, fx6\o<s, labour,) 
~ /uoyis, but less Attic, ivith difficulty, 
hardly, scarcely. Acts xiv. 18, al. and 
Class. 

MoXy'vco, f. vvuo^ prop, to spot, (fr. the 



obsol. fxo\v9, or fioXd?, a spot or stain, fr. 
fxoXu), accedo, lit. 'something whereby an- 
other colour is imparted than the original 
one.') The term, however, signif. gener. 
to soil both in the Class, writers, as Aris- 
toph. Eq. 1286. Lucian, de Gymn. 2, and 
Sept. as Gen. xxxvii. 31. Cant. v. 3. In 
N. T. Rev. iii. 4, ouk kfxoXwav Td IfxaTia 
avTtjov, there is simply an allusion, by a 
strongly figurative expression, to the de- 
filement of iniquity and sin, espec. by evil 
communications, derived from the case of 
a person whose clothes are soiled by mix- 
ing himself with foul companions. At 
Rev. xiv. 4, /x£Td yw. ovk ifxoXvvdrja-av, 
there is reference to still greater moral 
pollution. See Theocr. Id. v. 87. xx. 9. 
So Liber Henoch, p. 182. Fabric. Cod. 
Pseud. fxiaivEG^ai kv yvvai^Lv. At I Cor. 
viii. 7, rj GWELd^GL^ avTU}v /JLoXifVETai, 
the sense is, ' their conscience is as it were 
stained in its moral purity,' by violence 
being done to it. So Ammian. Marc. xv. 
2, a person is said ' polluere conscientiam.' 
And in Ecclus. xxi, 28, the soul is spoken 
of as polluted by vices. And Plato p. 535, 
E. says the soul is easily polluted, /moXv- 
VETai, Ixicnrep ^ijpLou veiov ('a swinish 
beast') ku d/xaOi'a, q. d. 'when rolled in 
the mud of ignorance and vice.' 

MoXv or jULo^, ov, 6, {/jLoXvvo),) prop, a 
soiliiig, and fig. defilement, pollution, in a 
moral sense, 2 Cor. vii. 1, dTro iravTo^ 
/uLoXvcTjuou crapKo? Kai nrv. i. e. purity from 
all the pollutions produced by the carnal 
appetites and sensual passions. 

Mo/iKpi), rj9, rj', (p-^fJifpo/uLaL,) fault 
found, blame, censure, i. e. ' occasion of 
complaint,' Col. iii. 13. Eurip. Orest. 1068, 
9. Plato, Epist. vi. 

Moi/Tj, ?}§, 77, {pkvu3,) prop, a staying in 
a place, Xen. An. v. I, 5. In N. T. abode^ 
dwelling, mansion, John xiv. 2. So iroLiiv 
fijLovi]!/ irapd tlvl, ' to make one's abode 
with any one,' i. e. to abide or dwell with 
him, fig.' John xiv. 23, comp. Rev. xxi. 3. 
prop. Thuc. i. 131, p.oui]i/ TrouladaL, Jos. 
Ant. viii. 13, 7. 

Mouoy e.vi)9, £os ou?, o, ^, adj. (/xoi/05, 
yivo<5,) oidy born, only begotten, i. e. only 
child, Lu. vii. 12, pLOvoysvi]^ Trj pLr]TpL, 
viii. 42, ^vyaTi^p pou. rju. ix. 38. Heb. 
xi. 17. Tob. iii. 15. vi. 9. Jos. Ant. ii. 7, 
4. Diod. Sic. iv. 73. In St. John's writings 
spoken only of 6 Aoyos, the only begotten 
Son of God in the highest sense, as alone 
knowing and revealing the essence of the 
Father, (implying his Divinity, or Divine 
nature,) John i. 14, (where see my note,) 
18. iii. 16, 18. 1 John iv. 9. Comp. Ao- 
yo<s III. 

Moi/os, r], ov, adj. 07ily, alone, i. e. 1) 
prop. ' without others,' liter. ' apart from 
others,' without companions, e. gr. of per- 



MON 



275 



MYE 



sons, Matt. xiv. 23, /ulouo's rjv tKst. Mk, vi. 
47, Kai auTos fxovo^ IttI t/}§ yij^. ix. 2, 
KUT idiav ijl6vuv<s. Sept. and Class. Fig. 
of one acting by his own autliority, alojie, 
John viii. 16 ; or as destitute of help from 
another, ver. 29. xvi. ;32. JE\. V. H. ix. 
40. Of thimjfs, Lii. xxiv. 12, to. odopia 
Ksifieva fxova, i. e. without the body of 
Jesus. John xii. 24, 6 k6kko<s — /noi/o^ jmi- 
i/£i, i, e. sterile, barren. Used in an ad- 
verbial sense, of persons and things, Matt, 
iv. 4, ovK £7r' aprcp /uoi/o) X^na-tTaL 6 avdp. 
John V. 44,T»;z/ 66^av ti^u irapa nrov fxovov 
OfoO ov '^\]TtiTs.. Jude 4. Rev. xv. 4, and 
Class. So after tl /x/;. Matt. xii. 4, ft ixi] 
Tol^ LEpEuai ix6voL<5. Matt. xvii. 8, al. 2) 
alone of many, one out of many, Lu. xxiv. 
18, (TV /j.6l>o£ irapoLKal^ ^lepova-aXiip. 
1 Cor. ix. 6. 2 Tim. iv. 11. Xen. Cyr. i. 
4, 27. Mem. i. 4, 11. 3) neut. jxouov as 
adv. onli/^ alone ; simply, Matt. v. 47, tous 
dSeXcpov^ v/ixcou fX-ovov. ix. 21, kau povov 
axj/wpuL Tou IpaTiov avTov. Mk. v. 36, 
al. and Class. After ii pi). Matt. xxi. 19, 
£t p.r] (pvXXa povov. Mk. vi. 8. With 
negatives, e. gr. ^ur; povov, not only, sim- 
ply, Gal. iv. 18. Ja. i. 22 ; in antith. or 
gradation, foil, by dWa, Phil. ii. 12 ; by 
aWd Kal, hut also, John xiii. 9, pi] tous 
TTo^as pov povov, dXKd Kal tccs ^elpa<s 
ic.T.X. Hdian. ii. 5, 10. ov povov, not only, 
. comp. in Ou III.; simply, Ja. ii. 24; in 
antith. or gradation, foil, by dWa, Acts 
xix. 26 ; by dX\d Kal, hut also. Matt, 
xxi. 21. John v. 18, al. and Class. Hdian. 
i. 12, 14. Xen. Cyr. i. 6,17, al. 

Mov6(f)daXp.o<i, ov, 6, ri, adj. {p6vo9, 
6(f)da.Xp.d9,) one-eyed, having lost an eye, 
Matt, xviii. 9. Mk. ix. 47. Luc. Ver. Hist, 
i. 3. 

Moi/o6t), f. waroo, (povo^,) to leave alone, 
pass, to he left alone, e. gr. as a widow, to 
he solitary, probably childless, 1 Tim. v. 5. 
Diod. Sic. xix. 39. Xen. Ven. ix. 9. 

M.op(f)ri, ri, form, shape, Mk. xvi. 
12, &v &Tipa. p.op(prj. Sept. Is. xliv. 13. 
Xen. CEc. vi. 16. Phil. ii. 7, p^opcpiiv dov- 
\ov Xa^cov, i. e. ' appearing in a humble 
and despised condition ;' where see my 
note. In Phil. ii. 6, o§ ev pop(f)r} Qeov 
virdp^div, the sense is, ' subsisting in the 
real form or nature of God,' one and equal 
with the Father. Viopcpi) has the sense 
nature, <pvcn^, so that kv p.op<prj Qsov 
virdp-^^wv is equiv. to being of that nature, 
of the same nature with God, i. e. being 
God: so Test. xil. Patr. 644, Qeov iv 
cr^npaTi dvdpoD'Trov. Of this sense of 
fxop(pri, see many examples in my Gr. Test, 
in loc. 

Mop<p6(x), f. wcrw, {poptpii,) to form 
or fashion, trans. Sept. Is. xliv. 13, where 
the word is used of forming a block of 
wood or stone into a statue. And so in 



other later Greek writers, as Pint. x. 207, 
and the writer de Mundo, kpTrptTrei tw 
Oeco dpopcl^u popcl)ovv. In N. T. pass. 
to be formed, fig. Gal. iv. 19, dxpi^ ov 
popcpoSri Xf). kv vpTv, i. e. ' until the very 
image of Christ be impressed upon your 
hearts.' So Gregor. 6 avT7j ttlg^tel 

pEfJiOp(pU3pEVO<5. 

Mopc^cocris, €0)9, 77, {pop(p6a},) prop. 
' a forming or sketch of the outline' of any 
figure with chalk, &c. on a plain surface. 
In N. T. form, appearance, (the Class, use 
p.6p(f)(jop.a, but p.6p(p(jo<n9 in this sense 
occ. Test. XII. Patr. 742,) e. gr. mere ex- 
ternal form, 2 Tim. iii. 5, e^ovte^ p.6p- 
cpcuaLV EV(TE(iELa<5. So Philo, p. 340, 14, 

BTTLpOpCpaX^OVTtVV T^jV EVCTt^ELaV. By 

impl. a prescribed form, norma, Rom. ii. 

20, E-X(JOV TTJV p.. Ttj^ yV(x)(TE(JO£, &C. 

' having in the Law the very form and 
figure of true knowledge prescribed by 
God.' 

MocrxoTTotEW, f. iiaro), (/xoo-^os, ttol- 
EU),) to make a calf i. e. the image of a 
calf or bullock, Acts vii. 41. Comp. Ex. 
xxxii. 4, sq. where Sept. has kTcoiricrav 
p-oaxov. 

Moo-xo?, OV, 6, prop. sJtoot of a plant, 
young and tender, Hom. II. xi, 105. Dio- 
scor. iv. 108. Hence a young animal, and 
espec. in prose Class, and N. T. a calf, a 
young bullock, Lu. xv. 23, et al. Sept. and 
Class. 

Wovcr LKo?, i], ov, adj. {povcra^) de- 
voted to the Muses, i. e. to the liberal arts 
and sciences, Aristoph. Eq. 191. Vesp. 
1244, and often in the earlier writers. In 
N. T. it is explained a musician, performer 
on a musical instrument, subst. Rev. xviii. 
22, cf)(jovr] KLdapwSvov Kal p-ovarLKoov Kal 
avXi]TO)v. But of this sense little or no 
proof exists. It would 7'ather seem that 
the meaning is singers ; a sense found in a 
passage of Artemid. iii. 49, where it is 
said of the cicadcs, grasshoppers, that in 
dreams they mean p.ov(nKov9, and also 
T0V9 ovdkv a)(pEXovvTa<3 ; for, adds he, 
grasshoppers are of no force, TrXi/y (p covtjv 
EXpvcTL. Hesych. however explains p.ov- 
(TLKo^ By xj/dXTf}?, for which he had, I 
doubt not, good authority ; and this I ap- 
prehend to be the sense intended in the 
present passage, namely, ' the sound of 
lyrists and harpers, of pipers and trum- 
peters.' 

Mox^os, ov, 6, ivearisome labour, tra- 
vail, sorroiv ; in N. T. coupled w th k >- 
7ro§, 2 Cor. xi. 27, kv kottco kul po^^o). 
1 Th. ii. 9. 2 Th. iii. 8. Sept. and Class! 

MueXo?, ov, 6, 7na?'7vw, Heb. iv, 12. 
Sept. and Class. 

Mufcw, f. 770-0), {p.v(jo, to shut the 
mouth, inasmuch as those initiated in the 
N 6 



MYB 



2 



76 



M YP 



heathen mysteries were to shut their 
mouth, and not reveal what they were 
tanght,) to initiate^ to instruct^ viz. in 
things before unknown, pass. Phil. iv. 12, 
/jLEjULVijiuLaL Kal y^opTuX^eadaL Kai ireLvav^ 
' I have been thoroughly instructed, fully 
learnt probably with allusion to the 
heathen mysteries ; for the proper signifi- 
cation of lULvelv is, ' to initiate any one into 
the heathen mysteries and such is its 
general sense in the Class. ; though some- 
times it is used in the sense to fully 
imbue with knoAvledge as Diod. Sic. iv. 

7, fJLVELV TOl/S dvdpiOTrOVS' TOUTO d' ecrTLU, 
TO OlddcTKELV TO. KoXd KUL (TV jUi<pipOUTa. 

MvGo?, ou, 6, prop, and prim, 'some- 
thing said' for any purpose whatever, 
whether to direct, counsel, &c. a saying^ 
i. e. injunction^ &c. or simply to narrate, a 
speech^ discourse^ as Horn. Od. xi. 561. 
Xen. Mem. i. 2, 58 ; and thence a narra- 
tion^ prop, by word of mouth, whether 
founded on truth, as Horn. Od. iii. 94. 
iv. 324, or fiction, as Hdot. ii. 54. Pind. 
01. i. 47. Nem. vii. 34 ; also a narrative. 
In N. T. fable, fiction, 1 Tim. i. 4. iv. 7, 
Tous ^£ (3e(3ri\ou<s Kal ypa(hdeL<i fxvdov^ 
nrapaiTov, where see mv note. 2 Tim. iv. 
4. Tit. i. 14. 2 Pet. i. 16, a-Eao(pL<yjuLivOL^ 
fx. So Diod. Sic. i. 93, fxvQov^ TrtirXacr- 

IS/Lu Kuo fxa L, f. riGOfxaL, {fxv,) to moo, 
to loic, prop, said of oxen, as in Homer, 
Lucian, and other writers ; but sometimes 
transferred to other animals, as asses or 
camels. In N. T. said of a lion, to roar, 
Rev. X. 3, uiGTTEp \iitiv fxvKctTaL. And 
so Anthol. Gr. i. p. 246. 0pp. Cyneg. iv. 
and }xvKi]fxa in Theocr. xxvi. 21. 

M u/cTjjp i^tt), f. to- 60, {fxvKTijp, nosc,) 
lit. to turn up one's nose in scorn, and 
hence to mock, deride, pass. Gal. vi. 7, 
Ofos ov fxvKTrjpL^eTUL, i. e. 'God is not 
to be mocked' with impunity. The act. 
form oft. occurs in Sept. and the pass, is 
found at Prov. xii. 8. The word rarely 
occurs in the Class. 

MuXi/cos, 7?, 6v, adj. (/uuA.77, mill,) 
belonging to a mill, e. gr. Xi'0os fxvXiKo^, 
' a mill-stone,' Mk. ix. 42. 

MuX0 9, ov, 6, i/ULvXt], fr. lULvWco,) 

prop, a grinder ; hence a mill-stone, also a 
mill. The mills of the ancients were 
chiefly hand-mills, worked by two per- 
sons, generally females, and composed of 
two stones, of which the lower was called 
meta ; and the upper nD^, the rider, Ittl- 
jULvXiov, turned round upon it for the pur- 
pose of grinding the com, having a hole in 
the middle for receiving the grain. See 
Lucian Asin. xxviii. 42, Larg'cr mills 
were turned by an ass, whence the upper 
mill-stone was called oulko^. In N. T. 



the word signifies, 1) a mill, as Rev. xviif. 
22, Kal (ptovri fxuXov, where the sense is 
either, 'the sound of the mill,' the noise 
made by the mill in working, or by meton. 
' the song of the mill,' i. e. the sound of 
the singing in the mill, viz. of the maid- 
servants while grinding. Comp. Is. xxiv. 
8. Jer. XXV. 10. Ez. xxvi. 13. And so 
just before we have (pcovi] KLdapuctooov, &c. 
In this sense the word occurs also in Sept. 
Exod. xi. 5, and Plut. viii. 172. ix. 301. 
2) by synecd. a mill-stone, i. e. the upper 
one, or rider, e. gr. /iuXos ovlko?. Matt, 
xviii. 6. Lu. xvii. 2. /u. ixiya<5, Rev. xviii. 

21. Sept. Judg. ix. 53. 2 K. xi. 21. 
Anthol. Gr. iii. p. 46, 51. 

'MvXuiv, IOU09, 6, (fxvXi],) lit. 'a grind- 
ing-place ;' also, the place where the mill 
is, mill-house. Matt. xxiv. 41, Suo dXr'jdov- 
aruL kv tco fxvXwvL. Lucian Asin. 42, £t5 
Tov fxvXuiva ELorayi fxs. Vit. Auct. 27, 
EjulSaXoov £ts Tou fxvXoova. Thuc. vi. 22, 

CrLTOTTOLOV^ EK TCOV fXvX(JiV (JDV . lu whlcll 

passages, and in the one of St. Matthew, 
we are to understand, not a private grind- 
ing-place, but a public mill-house, where 
corn was ground into flour and made into 
bread. This is clear from the use of the 
article, which is used very properly ; fxv- 
Xoov being one of the nouns called monadic 
nouns, on which see Middl. Gr. Art. iii 
§ 3, and Winer, Gr. Gr. § 12, 2. 

MujOtas, aoo§, 77, {/xvpio?,) a myriad, 
\. e. ten thousand. Acts xix. 19. Sept. and 
Class. Put, as in English, for any inde- 
finitely large number, Lu. xii. 1. Acts 
xxi. 20, al. Sept. Gen. xxiv. 60, al. and 
Class, as ^schyl. Pers. 891. 

Muptjo), f. icro), {fxvpov,) gener. to 
anoint with aromatic oil or unguents, for 
any purpose whatever, as often in Aristoph. 
Plut. and other Classical writers, espec. 
for feasting, &c. ; but sometimes for 
burial. So Clem. Alex. Psedag. ii. 0, 
IxvpiX.ov'raL oi vEKpoi. So Artemid. iv. 

22, fin. vo(TovuTL 08 iTovTipd TO. fxvpu, did. 

TO (TVl>El<T<pipE(Tdai VEKpcp. 

Mvpios, a, ov, adj. in Class, as said 
of persons, very many, innumerable ; of 
things, immense, infinite ; used both in 
sing, and plur. chiefly the latter ; in N. T. 
we have only plur. ixvpioi, ten thousand, 
prop. Matt, xviii. 24, /uvpiwif TaXdvTwv. 
Sept. and Class, ; as Diod. Sic. xv. 59. 
Xen. Cyr. ii. 1, 5. Put, as in English, 
and seoccenti in Latin, for any indefinitely 
large number, 1 Cor. iv. 15, kdv ixvpiovs 
iruLdayiayov^s £X^7T£. xiv. 19. The idiom 
is not unfrequent in Class. ; but only as 
used of things, as in 1 Cor. xiv 19, jx. 
X6yov<5. As used of persons, the only fip- 
posite examples are Philo, t. ii. p. 533,;, 
EfLol yap fxvpioL SLodaKaXoL ytyovacn. 



M Y P 



277 



i\] a p 



Oalen de Compos. INIcd. /xupioi? viro- 

Mypof, ou, TO, (Heb. yo, fr. an old 
root preserved in the Arabic 'mut\ to flow, 
whence the Gr. ^upw, to flow,) prop, any 
aromatic juice distilling of itself from a 
tree or plant, especially vu/rrh, fxvppu^ 
(TfjLvpva^ JEWan V. H. xii. 81. comp. 
Died. Sic. V. 41. Also, a fragrant oil, or 
balsam, thence prepared. So Archil, ap. 
Athen. p. 688, and often in Aristoph. In 
N. T. an aromatic or perfumed ointment, 
zmgiient^ Matt. xxvi. 7, a\d(3a(rn-pov fxv- 
pov. ver. 9, 1*2, et al. ssppe 0pp. to 'iXatov^ 
Lu. vii. 46, as also Sept. and Class, as 
Xeii. Conv. ii. 3, 9. ^lian V. H. ix. 9. 
Pol. XX xi. 4, 1. 

Islv cr-rri p Lov^ lov^ to, (/xuotti]?, fr. 
fxv&co,) a mystery^ lit. ' something shut up, 
or hidden,' either Avholly, or partially; 
^ something into whicli one must be 
initiated, instructed,' before it can be 
known; (so it is in the Classics often 
used of the various heathen mysteries) ; 
something of itself not obvious^ and -beyond 
human insight, so sometimes in (3lass. 
also in Sept. and Apocrypha. In the 
Evangelical sense, ' that which is naturally 
hidden from human reason, and only to 
be known by the revelation of God.' See 
more in Home's Introd. iv. 526. In N. T. 
the term is used, I. gener. Matt. xiii. 
11, xjfxiv StdoTaL yvoouuL to. jULvaTiipia 
TTj^ (Sacr. Twv ovp. ' the mysterious things 
of the kingdom of heaven.' 1 Cor. xiv. 2, 
XaXel /mvo-TijpLa. Eph. v. 32, to jULvarTij- 
oLov TOVTo fjiiya icxTLV. 2 Thess. ii. 7, 
TO fJLVcrTiipiov T77§ (zi/o/xta?, ' mystcrious 
wickedness,' i. e. hidden wickedness, as 
yet unknown to Christianity, in opposition 
to aTTOKaXviVTZcrQaL at ver. 8 ; ' such as 
had begun to work in secret, but was not 
then completely manifested.' So in Joseph. 
B. J. i. 24, l,we have KaKLa<5 fivcrTnpLov. 
In Rev, i. 20. x. 7. xvii. 5, 7, it denotes 
' a spiritual truth,' couched under an ex- 
ternal representation or similitude, and 
consequently concealed until some ex- 
planation be given. Thus in the passage 
of Rev. i. 20, TO fxvcrTripiov twi/ £7rTa 
ad-ripoov^ it means ' the spiritual meaning' 
concealed under that symbol. And so of 
the rest. — II. spec, of the Gospel^ the 
Christian dispensation, as having been 
long hidden, and first revealed in later 
times ; and espec. with reference to its 
most hidden doctrine, the calling of the 
Gentiles, Eph. iii. 9, and Col. i. 26, to 
fjiva-Tripiou TO airoKZKpv p.fxivov airo tcov 

uluiVOJV. Eph. Vi. 19, TO fXV(TTr]pLOU 

Tov Evayytkiov. Col. ii. 2, to p.. tou 
Geou, and iv. 3, and Eph. iii. 4, toD Xp. 
1 Tim. iii. 9, tt}? ttlo-teu)^. Rom.xvi. 25. 
1 Cor. ii. 7, where see my note, and comp. 



AVisd. ii, 22, ovk tyvwanv ixva-Tiipid 
Geou. 1 Cor. iv. 1. xiii. 2. I'.ph. iii. 3. Col. 
i. 27. So, of particular doctrines or parts 
of tlie Gospel, Rom. xi. 25. 1 Cor. xv. 51, 
E])h. i. 9, TO pi. TOV ^e\np.aT09 auToG, 
scil. Beoti, ' llis purpose or Avill, long 
liidden in the mind of God,' namely, for 
tlie salvation of all men by Christ. In 
1 Tim. iii. 16, to t?]? evcrffSeia^ plvott. 
there is reference to the mysteries of the 
Gospel dispensation in general, but chiefly 
to that greatest of mysteries, *■ God mani- 
fested in the flesh,' on which all the 
others hinge. 

MuwTrd^co, f. wo-w, {pLvtx)\lr fr. juvco & 
coiIa,) prop, to simt the eyes., i. e. close or 
contract the eyelids, to blink., like one who 
cannot see clearly ; hence by impl. to be 
near-sighted., Aristot. Prob. Sect. 3. Fig. 2 
Pet. i. 9, <Z yap /uli) irapEan-i tuvtu., mean- 
ing, ' he who does not acquire tliese virtues, 
and does not practise these duties,' TvcpXa-s 
Eo-TL., pLVioTToX^wv., &c. ' closiug his eyes, 
that he may not see the truth ;' meaning 
what is similarly expressed by comiivens. 
Comp. Matt. xiii. 15, and Acts xxviii. 17, 
TOU§ 6(pda\p.ov<s avTMU EKajxpivaav., juij 
iroTE LdcDCTL ToT? 6 c})6 a\ juLol^ » Comp. 
Marc. Anton, iv. 29, Tv<pX6^ (gcTt) 6 
KUTapLvcov Tw voEpop ojULpiaTL. And so in 
Soph. Q^d. Tyr. we have TvcpXo^ — TOi^ 
vovv. 

MwXcoiIa, wttos, o, (fr. ^toXo5, battle, 
and wi/a, the eye,) q. d. the mark left 
from battle, as we say a black eye. See 
Hesych. ; also gener. weal^ i. e. mark from 
a stripe or blow^, 1 Pet. ii. 24, ov tw 
pLcoXcoTTL avTov iadrjTE., i.e. collect, stripes. 
The word oft. occ. in the later Greek 
writers, espec. Plutarch. 

Ma)/xao^«i, f. va-o/uLaL., depon. mid. 
(/XCO/X05,) to find fault icith., carp at., blame., 
with acc. 2 Cor. viii. 20, fxi] tl<: hpta^ 
/uLcojuiio-yTaL. So Wisd. x. 14. Prov. ix. 
7, pLMpn'ia-ETaL kavTov. Hom. II. iii. 412. 
^schyl. Ag. 268. Aor. 1. Ep.vopivd'i]v.. as 
pass. 2 Cor. vi. 3, 'Lva /x?) iunop.i]6rj h 
OLaKovia. 

Mco/xo?, ou, 6. Of this word it is fruit- 
less, with the etymologists, to seek the 
origin in the Greek language. It is mani- 
festly the same word as the Hebr. DITD? 
which means prop, a spot or stahi on the 
surface of any thing, and thence a blemish; 
also, a bodily defect, as lameness or blind- 
ness, Deut. XV. 21 ; and fig. a moral 
stain., or disgrace, by some vice. And 
such is its sense in N. T. as 2 Pet. ii. 13, 
(tttIXol kul ^loi/xot, ' spots and stains,' 
q. d. ' they are a disgrace to you.' 

Mct)f)ati/w, f. ai/a», (/xwpo?,) prop, to 
make dull or iveak., see in Mwpo's. Hence 
used 1) of impressions on the taste., pass, to 



278 



NAP 



hecome insipid^ tasteless^ to lose its savour, 
us salt, Matt. v. 13, and Luke xiv. 34, iau 
dk TO a\as jULwpavdrj. 2) of the mind, to 
make foolish^ i. e. to show to be foolish, 
withacc. 1 Cor.i.20, ovxi s/uLcopavau 6 Oe6<s 
rrr]v <yo(pLav to'u Koar/jLOu ; Sept. Is. xliv. 
15. Pass. Rom. i. 22, (pdrvKovT^^ sIvaL 
<TO(poL^ EfxcopdvQricrav^ iliey hecame foolish^ 
'acted like fools,' Sept. 2 Sam. xxiv. 10. 
Is. xix. 11. In Class. juLoopaLuco^ in this 
sense, is intrans. to be foolish^ to act fool- 
isJdy^ Luc. D. Mort. xiii. 3. Xen. Mem. i. 

Mtopta, a?, r/, (/Awpos,) folly ^ ab- 
surdity^ 1 Cor. i. 18, 6 \6yo£ — to7s /ulev 
d7ro\kviiiiuoL9 fxwp'ia kcrTL. ver. 21, 23. 
ii. 14. iii. 19. Apocr. and Class. 

MtopoXoyia, a?, 77, {fxoopoX.oyo's fr. 
fjLtopd's^ Xtyo),) foolish talk^ Eph. v. 4. So 
IJi(jopo\oyELv^ Plut. vi. p. 669. 

Mwpos, d, Of, adj. In tracing the ori- 
gin of this word, etymologists are, I ap- 
prehend, all wrong. It is simply the same, 
with a dialectical change, as ixavpa and 
afxavpd<s^ ' faint, weak,' i. e. incapable of 
making impressions on the senses, as sight 
or taste : prop, dull^ i. e. not capable of 
making impressions on the taste, faint^ 
insipid^ tasteless^ Dioscor. iv. 18, pi'^ai 
yEvcrafxivco fioDpai. IIii)pocr. de Diseta, ii. 
27, 2. And so fxuipaLuEcrdaL is used of 
salt that has lost its saline property. Matt. 
V. 13. Lu. xiv. 34. Hence, as applied to 
the mind^ (by the same translatio as that 
of the Hebr. ^DD and the Latin insulsus 
and fatuus^ and our insipid^) it stands for 
foolish^ lit. addle-pated^ by a metaphor de- 
rived from a stale egg. In N. T. it signif. 
as said of the mind, foolish. And so 6 
^lopo?, subst. a fool ; e. gr. of persons. 
Matt. vii. 26, o/xoicoOj/crsTat avSpi jucopio. 
xxiii. 17, fxuypol /cat TvcpXai. ver. 19. 
XXV. 2, at irivTE /ncopal^ sc. irapdEVOL. 
ver. 3, 8. 1 Cor. iii. 18. iv. 10. In Matt. 
V. 22, it means ivicked^ impious., like 
d(ppiou., Ps. xiv. 1. liii. 2. Job ii. 10, and 
Arr. Epict. iii. 22, 85 ; of things., 1 Cor. i. 
25, TO fxoopov Tou Gfiou, i. 0. ' what men 
count foolish in the ordinances and pro- 
ceedings of God ;' comp. ver. 23, 24. ver. 
27, Tct /JLoypa Tov koctixov. 2 Tim. ii. 23, 
and Tit. iii. 9, ^?}T?7cr£t§ fx. Sept. & Class, 
both of persons and things. 



N. 

Nat, Heb. adv. of affirmation, yea^ 
ycs^ certainly. 1) prop, in answer to a 
yuestion., Matt. ix. 28, 7rtcrT£U£T£ oTt 
ouvajxaL toGto ri'GLT]{raL \ \tyovcnv avTia' 
Nat, Kuyotf, al. saepe and Class. 2) as 
expi'essing assent to the words or deeds of 



another. Matt. xi. 26, yat, 6 IlaTT/p, [sc. 

OpOais TTOtEt?,] OTt OUTOJS kyivETO EV- 

^o^ia K.T.X. Lu. X.21. Rev. xvi. 7. Xen. 
Mem. ii. 7, 14 ; foil, by /cat introducing a 
subsequent limitation or modification, 
Matt. XV. 27, and Mk. vii. 28, t/at, KvpLE' 
/cat yap Ta Kvvdpia k.t.X. and Class. 
3) intens. in strong affirmation, asseve- 
ration, Lu. xi. 51, fat, Xkyu) v/jllv., ek- 
Jt7Tr]0f7(r£Tat /c.t.\. xii. 5. Phil. 20. 
Kev. i. 7, fat, d/uinv. xiv. 13. xxii. 20, and 
Class. Also with /cat, yea and more also., 
Matt. xi. 9. Lu. vii. 26, fat, XkyoD vixiv^ 
Kai TTEpLcrcroTEpou 7rpo^77Tou, ' yea, and 
more than a prophet.' Xen. Con v. viii. 4 ; 
with the art, to fat, yea., (i. e. ' the word 
yea.,'') 2 Cor, i. 17, tVa Trap' k/mol to 
fat, fat, /cat to oi), ou. ver. 20. Ja. v, 12; 
with art. impl. Matt. v. 37. 2 Cor. i. 18, 19. 

Naos, oD, o, (fato), to dwell,) prop, a 
dioeUing ; hence a temple., as the dwelling of 
a god ; in Classic writers mostly equiv. to 
LEpov., though sometimes spoken of the 
interior and most sacred part of a temple, 
the fane where the image of the god was 
set up. In N. T. I. gener. of any tem- 
ple, £f yELpo'KOLr]TOL'i vaol^., Acts xvii. 
24, and Class. In Acts xix. 24, TroLuoif 
vaov<5 dpyvpov's 'ApTt/xi^o?, means, ' sil- 
ver shrines of Diana,' i. e. small models of 
the temple of Diana at Ephesus, or at 
least of its sanctum., containing a small 
image of the goddess. So Hdot, ii. 63. 
See more in ray note in loc. — II. spec, of 
the Temple at Jerusalem, or in allusion to 
it, but spoken only of the fane itself, in 
distinction from lEpov. See Joseph. Ant. 

viii. 4, 1. xi. 4, 3. 1) prop. Matt, xxiii. 
16, bis, OS af o/xocr77 £f tw faw, equiv. to 
£f Tw y^pvcrco TOV vaov, ver. 17, 21. ver. 
35, jULETu^v TOV vaov Kai tov dv(TLa(rTrj- 
p'lov. xxvii. 5, p'nj/as to. dpyvpia kv tw 
faw, prob. in the entrance of the i/aos. 
Lu. i. 9. John ii. 20. 2 Thess. ii. 4, and 
Joseph, oft. 2) symbol, of the Temple of 
God in heaven, to which that of Jerusalem 
was to correspond, (comp. Heb. viii. 5. 

ix. 11.) Rev. iii. 12. vii. 15. xi. 1, al. 
ssepe. Test. xii. Patr. p. 550 ; comp. 
Wisd. iii. 14. 3) metaph. of persons in 
whom God, or his Spirit, is said to dwell 
or act, e. gr. the body of Jesus, John ii. 
19, 21 : of Christians, 1 Cor. iii. 16, sq. 
fao§ 6£ou £0-T£. vi. 19. 2 Cor. vi. 16. 
Eph. ii. 21. Act. Thorn. § 12, yivEa^E 
vaol dyLOL. 

Ndp<5o9, ou, 77, 7iard., i. e. the oriental 
spikenard. Heb. n:, Sanscr. narda. The 
ancients extracted from it an oil or oint- 
ment which was highly prized, (Theophr. 
H. Plant, ix. 7. Dioscor. i. 66.) hence in 
N. T. juvpoiJ vdpdov 7rLaTLKtj<3., 'ointment 
of pure spikenard,' i. e. 'the most pre- 
cious,' Mk. xiv. 3. John xii. 3. 



NAY 



279 



NEK 



Nauayta), f. fjorco, (i/auayo?, 'one 
shipwrecked,' fr. vav<^\ ayw/jLi^) to make 
sJiipivi'eck^ i. e. to he shipwrecked., iiitnnis. 
2 Cor. xi. 25, -rpi? lvavdyi](Ta^ and oft. in 
Class. ; fig. 1 Tim. i. 19, v. Trspi tiiv 'ttLcttlv. 
So Philo, de Somn. p. 1128, D. vavayrj- 
a-avra^ tteoI yXcoTTav advpov. On the 
exact nature of the metaphor, see my 
note. 

sliip-oivnei\ -miuclerus^ i. e. the master or 
owner of a trading vessel, who took pas- 
sengers and freight for hire, Acts xxvii. 
11 ; see my note in Recens. Svnopt. or 
Gr. Test, 

Naus, gen. i/£cbs, acc. vaui/^ 77, (from 
the ohsol. i/aw, cogn. with veto, ' to float.' 
The first vessels were floats or rafts, such 
as are still in use in the interior of South 
America.) a ship^ vessel, Acts xxvii. 41. 
Sept. and Class. 

Naj^T?;?, ou, o, (i/aus,) a seaman or 
sailor, (lit. ship-man,) Acts xxvii. 27, 30. 
Rev. xviii. 17, and Class. 

Neaj/ias, ov, o, {vsav &, vio^,) a 
youth, a young man. Acts xx. 9, al. Sept. 
and Class. Spoken of Saul, (i. e. Paul,) 
Acts vii. 58, where, however, it determines 
nothing definitely as to his age, since vsa- 
via^, like vEaviorKcs, was applied to men 
in the vigour of manhood, up to the age of 
40 years. 

eavtp-Ko^, ou, 6, {v&ai/, fr. vto^,) a 
youth, a young ma7i, Mk. xiv. 51, el<s tis 
ifsavLCTKo?. Lu. vii. 14. Sept. and Class. 
So of young men in the vigour of man- 
hood up to the age of 40 years and up- 
wards, Matt. xix. 20, 22 ; comp. Lu. xviii. 
18, where it is apywv. Acts v. 10, veavi- 
a-KOL, i.e. 'the younger members of the 
community equiv. to v&MT&poL in ver. 
6 ; opp. to 'Trpta^vTtpoL, Acts ii. 17 ; of 
soldiers, Mk. xiv. 51. So Sept. and 
Class. 

N£K-'f)o9, ov, 6, adj. {viKV9,) dead, used 
also as subst.; prop, only of persons, or fig. in 
allusion to them. In N. T. I. subst. one 
dead, a dead person, as oft. in Hom. and the 
early writers. — I. a dead body, corpse. Matt, 
xxiii. 27, yifxavcTLV ocr^ioov veKpcou. Rev. 
XX. 13. Sept. Deut. xxviii. 6. Jer. vii. 31. 
Xen. Cyr. iv. 6, 5, et al. — 11. gener. a dead 
person, plur. the dead, e. g. 1) as yet 
unburied. Matt. viii. 22, daxl/ai tous 
usKpou^. Lu. vii. 15. Heb. ix. 17. So for 
one slain. Rev. xvi. 3. Sept. and Class, 
2) as buried, laid in a sepulchre, and 
therefore as being in ao?j§, Lu. xvi. 30, 
sdu Tis aTTo vf:Kpu)V TTop^vdrj Trpo^ av- 
Toi?. John V. 25. Acts x. 42, et al. Sept. 
and Class. So oi vfKpoi iv Xpto-TO), i. e. 
'those who have died in the Christian 
faith.' In reference to being raised again 



from the dead, by resurrection, c. gr. 
^ojyTfs £/v DtKowv, fig. Horn, vi. 13. X^coi) 

tK V. fig. xi. 15. So X^lOUirOLhlv TOVS V. 

Rom. iv. 17. iye'iptLu vticpov's. Matt. x. 8, 
al. iys'iptiv tlvo. ctiro or e/c vnKpoov, 
Matt. xiv. 2. Acts iii. 15, al. dvaaTrjvaL 
SK TU}V viKpCou, Matt. xvii. 9, et al. ; 
fig. Eph. V. 14. 77 dvacTTUcrL^ twu veKpojv, 
Matt. xxii. 31, .1I. cw. h i/c veicptov. Acts 
iv. 2. 3) empliat. oi veKpoi, the dead, i. e. 
idterly dead, extinct, both body and soul, 
Matt. xxii. 32, ovk tanriv 6 Oios, 0f.o§ ve- 
KpCov, dWd X^(l)VTO)v. Mk.xii.27. Lu.xx. 
38. 4) fig. in plur. those dead to Christ and 
his Gospel, spiritually dead. Matt. viii. 22, 
d(p£9 Tous v&Kpov^ K.T.X. ' let thc spi- 
ritually dead bury their dead,' i. e. 'let 
no lesser duty keep you from the one 
great duty of following me.' So Rom. vi. 
13. xi. 15. Eph. V. 14. — II. ADJ. vEKpd^, 
d, 6v, dead, in Attic and later usage. 
— I. prop. Matt, xxviii. 4, eyivovnro totrst 

VEKpOL. Acts XX. 9, Kal rjpOl] VSKpO^, 

'was taken up dead,' (not ' for dead,' as 
the recent foreign Commentators gener. 
interpret, evidently to explain away one of 
the miracles of the N. T. See more in my 
note.) xxviii. 6. Rev. i. 17. Sept. and 
Class. ; fig. for lost, perished, ' given up as 
dead,' said of the prodigal son, Lu. xv. 24, 
32, parall. with aTroXcoXws. So, at least, 
the Lexicographers explain, referring to 
Aristoph. Ran. 420. Menand. Incert. fab. 
188, p. 249 ; but the meaning is rather, 
'spiritually dead.' See my note. — 11. 
metaph. in opposition to the life or salva- 
tion of the Gospel, which is ' hid with 
Christ in God.' 1) of PERSONS, dead to 
Christ and his Gospel, spiritually dead, 
(as Rev. iii. 1, and prob. Lu. xv. 24.) viz. 
in trespasses and sins, separated from the 
vivifying influences of the Divine light 
and Spirit, unable to do any thing good, 
or to raise and convert themselves, as a 
dead body is to quicken itself. There 
seems also to be implied a being subject to 
the second death, ' without hope of life 
eternal.' Foil, by dat. of cause or manner, 
Eph. ii. 1, u/xas ovra^ vsKpov^ irapa- 
TrTWfiacri, ver. 5; with ev. Col. ii. 13; 
with did Tt, Rom. viii. 10, to criofia 
vsKpdu Sl' djULapTiav, i. e. ' as to the body 
ye still remain subject to sinful passions,' 
etc. See, however, my note. Vice versa,. 
ueKpo^ f.lvaL rry djuapTia, ' to be dead to 
sin,' no longer willingly subject to it, 
Rom. vi. 11 ; equiv. to aTrodavtlv Ttj dfx. 
in ver. 2. See Gal. ii. 19. 2) of things, 
dead, i. e. inactive, inoperative, e. gr. 
d/uiupTta, Rom. vii. 8. ttlg-tl's, Ja. ii. 
17, 20, 26. So 'ipya viKpd, ' dead works,' 
i. e. 'external ligliteousness,' not proceed- 
ing from a living faith, and thei'efoie fruit- 
less, unable to j\islify, nay sinful, (see Art. 
xvii. of our Church,) Heb. vi. 1. ix. 14. 



N E K 



280 



Ns/cpo'to, f, ojcrco, {usKpo^^) to put to 
deaths and pass, to be put to deaths to die, 
prop. Anthol. Gr. iv. p. 276. In X. T. 
fig. to deaden^ to deprive of force and 
vigour, e. gr. to: i. e. to mortify, 

Col. iii. 5 ; pass. part. uevtKp(jLy.xivo<i, 7j, 
ov, deadened, i. e. dead, powerless, impo- 
tent, (so Lat. emortuum or jyrcBmortuum.) 
as crwfjLa vEu&Kp. Rom. iv. 19, Heb. xi. 12. 
In illustration of the figur. sense, comp. 
Pint. ix. p. 758, s.(rTi]crs t^v e^cv EKira- 
yEicrav kuI vEKpixiQ&laav. Arr. Epict. iv. 

5, TO atdlJflOU (XTTOl/EVeKpoOTaL. 

'NlKpOOCTL^, £W9, ( yg/CpO tt), ) prOp. ft 

putting to detail, hence 1) death, i. e. 
violent death, 2 Cor. iv. 10, T-qv vEKpoo- 
CTLU TOO 'lv,aou kv TM crwixaTL irtpicpi- 
povTt<5, i. e. ' ever exposed to suffer, for 
the cause of Christ, the same violent death 
%vhich He suffered.' 2) fig. deadness, ini- 
potency, Rom. iv. 19. Arr." Epict. i. 5, 4. 

Neos, a, ov, adj. young, neic ; compar. 
V£0}T£po<s, younger. 1) of" persons, 
young, youthful, Tit. ii. 4, 'iva c-cocppoul- 
Jojcrt Tot's via<5. Sept. and Class. ; compar. 
y£a»T£po§, the younger, i. e. of two or 
more, Lu. xv. 12, 6 vEooTzpo<s avTcov. 
Sept. and Class. ; gener. for a young per- 
son, as in old Engl, a younher ; plur. the 
younger, in opp. to the elder, John xxi. 

18, OTE ■j]<S VE6iTEpO<5. ActS V. 6, ol VEOO- 

TEooL, equiv, to oi vEavicTKOL in ver. 10. 
1 Tim. V, 1, al. : as implying inferior dig- 
nity, Lu. xxii. 26, o (jlelX^wu — yEvicrdo) w§ 
6 VEvoTEoo^. Sept. Jer. i. 6, 7. Ceb. Tab. 
2. Dem. 242, 15. Thuc. i. 42. See more 
in my note. 2) of things, neic, recent, 
e. gr. olvo^, acTKol, ]Matt. ix. 17. Mk. ii. 
22, aL Sept, and Class. ; fig. of the heart, 
disposition, nature, as reneiced, and there- 
fore better, e. gr. 1 Cor. v, 7, 'iva ijte 
VEov (pvpaua. i. e. 'a society greatly supe- 
rior' to the former. Col. iii, 10, Toy v&ov 
dvdpwTTov, 'the new man.' as opp. to the 
old ; denoting that Chri^tian disposition 
which is the fruit of a man's being 'renewed 
in mind and heart, after the image of his 
Creator,' and v/hich is called by St. Peter 
' a Divine nature,' 

Neocrcros, ov, 6, {vio^,) youngling, the 
young of animals, espec. of birds. Lu, ii, 
24, cuo vEocrcrov? tteolctteooov. Sept. and 
Class. 

N£OT?j?. i]To<5, //, (2/£o§.) youth,^ word 
occurring only in N. T. in the phrase ek 
v£6ti]to^, as Matt. x. 20, al, with the 
single exception of 1 Tim. iv. 12, /jli]cel9 
crov T7]9 V. KaTucppoveLTco, 'let no one 
despise thy youth,' i. e. give no one reason 
to despise thee on account of thy youth, 
i. e. ' conduct tliyself with the wisdom of 
riper age.' This word oft. occ, in Sept, 
but almost always in the phia?es ek veo- 
i-i}To<s and iv ve6ti]tl, the former of i 



Mdiich is not found in the Classics, but onlr 

EK TraLOO'S. 

'S e6 (pvTo?, ov, 6, 77, adj. (y£09, cpvco,) 
prop. ?ieicly-planted. Sept. oft. In N. T. 
as subst. fig. a neophyte, 7ieiv conveH^ I 
Tim, iii, Qf 

Nfiuw, f. vEvaru), to nod, beclion, as a 
siun to any one to do any thing, John xiii, 
24, vEVEi ovv avTo) ^'ifxaov irvQEcrdai 
K.T.X. Acts xxiv. 10, vEva'avT09 auTw 
Xf jELv : absol. in Horn. Od. xvi. 283'. 
I£A. V. H. xiv. 22, Its general sense, 
liowever, is, '■to assent or p)roniise by a 
nod.' 

'S E (p iXi], i]<5, 77, (dim, of vi<po9, as 
nubecula of nubes,) prop, a small cloud, 
Lu. xii. 54, comp. 1 K. xviii. 44 : gener. a 
cloud, Jude 12, vEcptXaL awcpoL. 2 Pet. 
ii. 17. Sept. and Class. ; as accompanying 
supernatural appearances and events, e. gr. 
the pillar of cloud in the desert, 1 Cor. x. 
1, 2 ; in connexion with Christ, as with a 
voice from heaven, Lu. ix. 35 ; or at his 
transfiguration, vEcpiXi] cpcoTELvi], Matt, 
xvii. 5. al. : as receiving him up at his as- 
cension, Acts i. 9 ; as surrounding him at 
his second coming, Matt. xxiv. SO, et al. 
saepe ; as surrounding ascending saints or 
angels, 1 Th. iv. 17. Rev. x. 1, al. 

X£^o§, £05 ous, TO, prop. a cloud ; in 
X. T. fig. for crowd, throng, Heb. xii. 1, 
vE(po<s fxapTvpwv. Horn. II. xxiii. 133, 

VE(pU<5 ELTTETO TTE^aiZ/. Hdot. viii. 109, 

vE(po<5 ToaovTo civd ouoiToov, and oft. in 
Class. 

i N£9po9, ov, 6, a hidney, Aristoph, 
i Ran. 476, us'-ially plur. oi vEcppol, the 
' hidnrys, reikis. Sept. Ex. xxix. 13, 32. 
; Job xvi. 13, & Class, e. gr. Aristoph. Lys. 
962. Athen. lib. ii. And as the Iddneys, 
from their being placed in the inmost part 
of the body, are, like the heart, re- 
garded as the seat of the afi:ections, so oc 
vEcppGL in X". T, is used fig, for the inmosi 
mind, the seat of the desires and passions, 
Rev, ii, 23, eoewcov vEcppov^ Kai Kapoia^y 
as oft. Sept, in the sim. phrase, Ps. xii. 9. 
XXV, 2. Jer. xi. 20 xvii. 10. xx. 12. 

Xf C0K'O/)O§, ov, 6, (yaOS, Att. VECb9, & 

Koptcv.) The word at first meant simply 
tempi e-siceeper, but afterwards, when the , 
humility of religious devotees made the 
office sought after even by persons of rank, | 
the term came to denote temple-heeper ; i 
lit. prefect of a temple, who had charge ; 
also of the decorations, Joseph. Ant. i. 7, I 
6. Xen. An. v. 3, 6 ; also simply icorship- \ 
per, 'one Mho frequents the temple of j 
God,' e. err. of the Israelites in the desert, | 
Jos. B. J. V. 9, 4, ov<s 6 0£O9 kavTM \ 
vELoKopovs rjyEv. At length, what wa!» f 
properly applicable only to the |?e7'S072, | 
came to be transferred to cities, who used } 



N E 



281 



NIK 



to appoint a person to fill tlie ofTicc ; and 
as that expressed the attachment of the 
cities, so the -svord came to mean devoted 
to the worship and service of the Deity in 
question : thus in N. T, said of JEphcsus, as 
a ivorsJnppet\ devotee of Diana, Acts xix. 

See more in my note in loc. 

NetOTf piK"09, 7/, Of, adj. (l/£WT£|OOS,) 

youthful^ pertaining to youth, 2 Tim. ii. 
2*2, Trts V. ETTLdv/jLLa^ (psvye. Joseph. Ant. 
xvi. 11, 7, avOaSia^ vecot. Pol. x. 247, v. 

N?/, prop, a particle of swearing, always 
affirmative, and taking the acc. of that by 
which any one swears, &c. In N. T. how- 
ever, it is used as a particle of solemn 
asseveration, whereby we protest a thing is 
so or so, by some circumstance attesting 
its truth, as 1 Cor. xv. 31, vi) ti]v vfx. 
Kavxnf^t-v-) ' by all my ground of glorying 
in you,' i. e. I protest, &c. So Sept. Gen. 
xlii. 15, 16, VI) Tijv vy'iELUv ^apaci). Arr. 
Epict. pi] Ti]v ILaicrapo^ Tv^tiv kXevdEpoL 
ia/uLEV. 

N 77 6 60, f. yjjcrto, (=: yeo),) to spin^ 
absol. Matt. vi. 28. Lu. xii. 27, ov^k vvOai, 
i. e. TO. Kpiva. Sept. and lat. Class, 

NT^TTtd^o), f. d(Tw, {vriTTLO^^^ to 1)6 as 
a child^ childlike^ intrans. 1 Cor. xiv. 20, 
KaKLo. y7]7rt(i^£T£, 1. 6. ' bc ignorant of 
evil,' comp. Matt, xviii. 3. Gr. prov. dia- 
(pEpEL Se tou vi]7rtou /caG' riKiKLav ovoiv 
6 kv Toi^ cppEai vrjTnaX^cov. 

Nj^TTtos, /a, toi/, also of two endings, 

0, 77, adj. (y7)- insep. ?m, gVo?, prop, 'not 
speaking,' in/ans, and hence cm infant^ 
child^ habe^ without any definite limita- 
tion of age.) 1) prop. Matt. xxi. 16, ek 

(TTOfXaTO^ VYITTLIOV KOL dl]kat^6vT COV , 1 

Cor. xiii. 11, ote vfirju uvttlo^ k.t.X. By 
irapl. a minor, one not yet of age. Gal. iv. 

1. Sept. and Class. 2) metaph. babe, for 
one unlearned, unenligfdened, simple, in a 
good sense, Matt. xi. 25, a7rEKa\v\l/a<5 
avTO. vr}7rL0L9. Lu. x. 21. Rom. ii. 20 ; 
implying censure, 1 Cor. iii. 1, ws vi\itlol<5 
kv Xpto-Tw. Gal. iv. 3. Eph. iv. 14. Heb. 
V. 13. Sept. Prov. i. 32. Ps. xix. 7, and 
sometimes in Class, but only in the sense 
' foolish.' 

'NrjarLOV, ov, to, (dim. of vjjcro^,) an 
islet ^ Acts xxvii. 16. 

Nt^cto?, ou, 77, {vEco, to float,) an 
island^ Acts xiii. 6, al. ssepe, Sept. & Class. 

NrjcTTEta, a?, 77, {vr\(TTEvio,) tlie act of 
fasting^ and the state of fasting, fast. In 
N. T. 1) gtnev. fasting, for want of food, 
2 Cor. vi. 5. xi. 27, kv XifxiZ kuI SL\^el, 
kv VTioTTELai^ 'TToWa.KL?. Plut. vii. 642, 
vi)<TTElaL. 2) in a religious sense, e. gr. 
of the private fastings of the Jews, some- 
times twice a week, Matt. xvii. 21, and 



Mk. ix. 29, kv irpuarEVXV '^"^ v^crrtia' 
Lu. ii. 37. 1 Cor. vii. 5. Sept. for rm 
Dan. ix. 3, and Is. Iviii. 3. Ps. Ixix. 10. 
Spec, tlie fast., i. e. ' the great annual public 
fast' of the Jews, the great day of atone- 
ment, which occurred in the month Tisri, 
corresponding to the new moon of Octo- 
ber, and thus served to indicate the season 
of the year after which the navigation of 
the Mediterranean became dangerous, Acts 
xxvii. 9. Comp. Lev. xvi. 29, sq. xxiii. 
27, sq. Jos. Ant. iii. 10, 3. Philo, de Vit. 
Mos. ii. p. 657. C. Plut. viii. p. 669, 12. 
And so at Athens the middle day of the 
Thesmophoria, on which there was a fast, 
was called N77<n-f ta, ' the Fast.' 

N7ja-'T£UC0, f. £U(TCO, {vrjcTTLS,) tO fast, 

to abstain from eating ; in N. T. only of 
private fasting. Matt. vi. 16, sqq. et al. saepe. 
Sept. ^1. V. H. V. 20 ; witb the notion 
of grief moimiing, with which fasting was 
often connected, Matt. ix. 15, ttevQeIv — 
vricrrEvcrovcTLv. Mk. ii. 20. Lu. v. 34, 35 ; 
of our Saviour's supernatural fast of forty 
days, Matt. iv. 2, where it is plain from 
Lu. iv. 2, ovK ECpayEv ovSkv, 'he ate 
nothing whatever,' that entire abstinence 
from food must be meant. If so, as Mr, 
Rose observes, our Saviour's life was mi- 
raculously preserved, though be Avas not 
the less alive to the pains of hunger. 

N77(rTt5, 109, 6, 77, adj. {vv}- insep. m?, 
kcrdlco,) fasting.^ plur. acc. vvcttel^, Matt» 
XV. 32. Mk. viii. 3. Dion. Hal. Rhet. ix. 
16, vv(TTEi£ : elsewhere generally in sing. 

Ntj^dXios, ia, Lov, adj. (v}i(pto,) in 
Class, sober, temperate, absti72e?it, espec. 
in respect to wine; in N. T. fig. sober- 
minded, u'atchftd, circumspect, 1 Tim. iii,. 

2, dil OVV TOV ETTLCrKOTTOV eIvUL V1]<paXLOV. 

ver. 11. Tit. ii. 2. Not found in Class, 
who use vncpcov, 

'Nvcfxv, f. \p-(jt), in Class, gener. to be 
sober, temperate, abstinent, espec. in respect 
to wine, as Soph. (Ed. Col. 100, vrjcpuiv 
aoLvoL^. In N. T. to be sober-minded, and 
by imp], ivatcliful, circumspect, intrans. 
1 Th. V. 6, ypi]yopu)fJiEv Kai vvcpco/uLEV.^ 
and ver. 8. (so in Plut. Pol. Prase, we 
have aypvTTvcov Kal vn(poov, and 1 Pet. v. 
8, vtjxl/aT£, ypi]yopv<Tai-£.) 2 Tim. iv. 5, 
orv ^E vrj(p£ kv irdarL. 1 Pet. i. 13. iv. 7, 
vrj-draTE ah 7rpoo-£L')^«9, render, 'be ye 
vigilant unto your prayers,' be vigilantly 
attentive to prayer. Similar to tt; Trpoar- 
Evyjj TrpoarKapTepElnrE, Col. iv. 2, and T77 
Trpoa-Evx^f} irpocTKapTEpovvTE^, Rom. xii. 
12. also irpocrfXEVEL — Tats 'TrpocyEv^a'i^, 
1 Tim. V. 5. By a similar mode of ex- 
pression it is said in Lucian, Hermot. 47, 
vrj<p£, Kai fxip.vi]cro d7ri(TT£lv. 

Nt/cdw, f. 77(70), {vLKi),) to be victorious., 
e. gr. I. INTRANS. to come off victor^ carry 



NIK 



282 



NO M 



one's cause, Rom. iii. 4, ottcos av viKri<Tri<5 iv 
icpLveadai cr^^ i. e. over their accusers, 
by being acquitted. Of the woid thus used 
in a judicial sense, examples are found in 
the Class, as Li ban. Or. p. 249, vlkG}v 
dirdcraL'i. Isaeus, Or. iv. t'l uxp&kvv/jLtOa 
viKi'iaauTE's ; So also Horn. II. i. 576, 
i'TTEi TO. x^psLova VLKu, but gcucr. with 
the addition of olki]u, yvco/xiiv^ and such 
like. In the militar}^ sense this intrans. 
use is found in Horn. II. iii. 71, o-ttttots- 
po5 0£ ICE vLKncrrj^ and 255. In Rev. v. 5, 
kvLKriCTEV 6 Aecou — duol^aL to (3l[3\lou^ 
there mai/ be, as Vitringa and Eichhorn 
suppose, an allusion to carrying a cause in 
a court of justice, evlk. standing for -ij^l- 
ojO}]. In ver. 4 we have oc^ios Eupidi]. 
As, however, this view involves something 
not a little harsh, it is better to suppose 
vLKu) here used, as the Lat. prcsvaleo^ for 
mm, habere^ as Pliny, H. N. xxviii. 7, ' Lac 
praevalet ad vitia in facie sananda.' And 
so oft. valere in Lat. for vires habere^ posse, 
— II.TRANS. ^vo)^. to overcome ^conquei\\\'\t\\ 
acc. Lu. XI. 22, k-Trctv 6 iarx^poTEpo<i — vl- 
Knort] avTov. Rev. xi. 7. xiii. 7. fig. Rom. 
xii. 21, vLKa kv tco ayaOw to kukuu. Also 
to overcome spiritually/^ either as said of 
Christ, John xvi, 33. Rev. iii. 21, ' who 
overcame the powers of evil,' or of his fol- 
loivers, who are hound to fight under liis 
banner against sin, the world, the flesh, 
and the Devil, 1 John v. 4, viKa tou 
Koa-fiov, and ver. 5. ii. 13, 14. iv. 4. 
Hence part, absol. 6 vlkmv, ' the victor,' 
'he that overcometh,' Rev. ii. 7, 11, 17. 
iii. 5, and oft. in Rev. wdiere sometimes 
we have the nomin. absol. as ii. 26. iii. 12, 
21. In Rev. xv. 2, tous viKihvTa's ek tou 
^riptov, there is a constr. prsegn. by Hebr. 
for ' those who have come off conquerors 
out of (or after) contest with the beast.' 

Nt/ct?, ij?, r), prop, victory in battle, or 
any advantage gained over any one. In 
N. T. by meton. of the effect for the effi- 
cient, ' the ground or means of victory,' 
1 John V. 4, avTi] egtlu h vlk)] h vlkvi- 
craa-a t6v Koa-fxau, i. e. that ])rinciple 
whereby we overcome the world. See 
piKaco II. 

Nl/cos, £05 ous, TO, {vLK7],) victori/, a 
later form for v'ikyi, 1 Cor. xv. 55, ttoG 
o-ou, a<5r], TO vlko<3 ; and ver. 57. So ah 
vLKo^l adv. victoriously, triumphantly, 
Matt. xii. 20. 1 Cor. xv. 54, where see 
my note. 

NtTTT^f), ^009, 6, (z/iTTTct),) a ivasJi- 
hasin, John xiii. 5. 

NiTTTO), f. ylfoi, to ivash some part of 
the body, as the face, hands, feet. Trans. 
TO nrpoawirov. Matt. vi. 17; byjmpl. 
Toi/s 6(pda\fxu\)<s, John ix. 7, 11, 15. Td§ 
Xsi.pa?, Matt. XV. 2, Mk. vii. 3. tous tto'- 
ias, John xiii. 5, 6, 8, sqq. Sept. & Class. 



No £60, f. 7? (7 to, (i/o'os,) prop. to see with 
the eyes, to perceive, as ocpdaX/jLol^ voeTv, 
Horn* II. xxiv. 294. iii. 396. Xen. An. iii. 
4, 44; also ' to remark, observe,' as Horn 
Od. iv. 116, et al. In N. T. fig. to see, 
perceive, with the mind, i.e. 1) to per- 
ceive, tmderstand, comprehend, absol. Matt, 
xvi. 9, ovTTco voELTE ; Johu xii. 40, 
Kapoia : with acc. expr. or impl. Eph. iii. 
4, duayLV(jo(rKouTE<s vorjaaL gvveciv fxov. 
ver. 20. Rom. i. 20. 1 Tim. i. 7. foil, by 
iufin. Heb. xi. 3 ; by oTt, Matt. xv. 17, 
al. Sept. Prov. i. 2, 6. iEl. V. H. v. 5. 
Died. Sic. V. 31. Plut. Thes. 3. In Eph. 

iii. 20, VTT&p EK TTEpLO-aOU WV alTOV/ULEda, 

77 voovfxhda, the sense is conceive, embrace 
by thought, (whence v6i]fxa, 'a mental con- 
ception,') as in Hom. II. xv. 81, cos o otuu 
di^r} v6o£ dvipo's — (ppEcrl itEVKaXifxricTL 
uorjart], "Kud' e'lijv, f) 'ivOa, fXEVoivricrELE te 
'woXXd. 2) to have, or turn in mind, 
think of, consider, absol. Matt. xxiv. 15. 
Mk. xiii. 14, 6 dvayivucxTKiov voeitw. with 
acc. 2 Tim. ii. 7, voel d kiyco. Ecclus. xi. 
7, voijarov ttowtov kuI tute kiTLTifxa, 
Hom. II. XV. 81, et al. Arr. Epict. iii. 1. 

No7) jUa, aTos, to, [voeco,) a thought, i. e. 
what has passed through the mind, as 
Hom. Od. vii. 36, vee^ tb/cetai, cotrft ttte- 
pou, i]E vot^fxa. And so often in Plato. 1) 
prop, 'any thing thought out,' excogitated; 
hence a purpose, project, whether ^ooc? (as 
Hom. II. x. 104, and often both in sing, 
and plur.) or evil, as in N. T. 2 Cor. ii. 
11, ou ydp avTov {tou "EaTavd) tu voti- 
fjiUTu dyvoovixEV, and X. 5, aiy^fj-aktoTi- 
Baruch ii. 8. 3 Mace. 
V. 30. 2) meton. as in Engl, for the mind, 
e. gr. the understanding, 2 Cor. iii. 14, 
E7ru)pd)di] Ta vuvfjLaTa avTiov. iv. 4 ; also 
the affections, disposition, xi. 3, /x7/ ovtm 
<pdap^ Ta voiijULuTa vpLujv. Phil. iv. 7. 
Hom.' Od. XX. 82, 346. Hes. Op. 128. 
Pind. Pyth. vi. 29. Plato, p. 197, C. but 
only in sing. 

No' 00 9, ou, 6, ?'/, adj. as often in Hom. 
joined with ulos, spurious, illegitimate, as 
said of offspring, Heb. xii. 8, voQol egte 
Kal oux viol, i. e. not true sons, meaning 
not spiritual sons. See Rom. viii. 14, 17, 
19. Gal. iv. 7. 1 John iii. 1. So Aristoph. 
Av. 1694, i/o'6o9 eI Kal ou yvncri09, a 
passage chiefly worthy of notice, from the 
similarity of the sentiment ; for of the word 
in question examples are by no means 
rare. 

'NofxTj, 7]<s, 77, {vEfjiuj, act. to feed per- 
sons or pasture cattle, also neut. to feed, 
take food, whence vofxr], fr. vkvofxa,) feed- 
ing, or pasturage, Xen. CEcon. vii. 20. 
Eurip. Cycl. 61, and oft. Only in 
N. T. John X. 9, vo/ixi]u EupvcTEL, 'shall 
find [spiritual] nourishment,' namely, that 
which shall nourish the soul unto ever- 



N 0 M 



283 



N O M 



lasting life. And as tlie word is used gencr. 
of the act of feeding, iElian, V. H. xiii. 
1, so it is also used spec, of that spreading/ 
of a gangrene or ulcer by which it eats 
away the sound flesh. And so in Ilippocr, 
de Ulcer, p. 51G. Jos. Bell. vi. 2. 9. Hence 
the phrase i/o/uiju TrottlcrOai, Polyb. i. 81, 
and in N. T. i/o/x»/i/ tx^'-^^ "-^ Tim. ii. 
17, o \oyo9 avTwv cos yayypaiva vofx^u 
k'^£(, i. e. ' will spread further, has a ten- 
dency to spread further \ answering to the 
plainer expression at Acts iv. 17, 'Lva py) 

f. ICO), {vofio?, which see,) 

1) to 'establish a thing by law or usage;' 

2) to adopt it when established, and regard 
it as fixed by law or custom, 1) prop, to 
do ami tiling by custom, to he accustomed, 
or wont ; as Hdot. ii. 51, TauTa vevofx'i- 
Kaai, and oft. Pass. Acts xvi. 13, ou ii/o- 
ui^ETo irpoKTivxh ^IvcLi-) ' whcrc, accord- 
ing to custom, was the proseuche,' (a sense 
frequent in the Class, from Hdot. and 
Thucyd. downwards, espec. in the parti- 
ciple pres.) or ' where prayer was wont to 
be made.' See my note there. 2) gener. 
to recogrdse or acknowledge any thing as 
being what law has prescribed or custom 
fixed, and gener. to regard as so or so ; 
e. gr. Tiva Oeoy voixiX^f-Lv in Dinarch. 102, 
13, and Xen. oft. vofxiX^sLv 3'£0u§. So pass. 
Lu, iii. 23, cos kvofxiX^^To, ' as he was re- 
garded, reckoned,' namely, according to 
Jewish custom. Dem. 1022, 16, ol vopL- 

X^OfXEVOL fXEU uUTs, fXI] OfT£§ 0£ yiv&L £^ 

auTcou. Hdot. iv. 180, toutou Trats vofxi- 
X^ETai. Hence gener. to think, supjoose, 
regard, foil, by inf. with acc. Lu. ii. 44, 
voplcravTs^ dk avTov iu Ty avvodLa sluai. 
Acts vii. 25. viii. 20. 1 Tim. vi. 5, voiull- 
X^ovTOiV TTopicriuidv Elvai ttju svcr&^&Lav, 

i. e. ' accounting, regarding the Gospel- 
scheme (1 Tim. iii. 16.) as a mere means 
of acquiring gain.' So Jos. Bell. ii. 21, 1, 
apBTj^v riyovfxzvo's Trjv aTraT^v. Dion. 
Hal. iii. 5, )(p7;^aTt(rjuoi/ riyovfxsvoi, toj/ 
'TToXEpoir. In 1 Cor. vii. 26, vofxiX^oD tov- 
To KaXou vTrdpx^i-i'-, it has the force of 
'my opinion is.' So Lat. censeo ; e. gr. 
Cic. Epist. Fam. vii. 13, ' Treviros vites, 
censeo.'' And so Plato, Phsed. p. 230, 009 
uopiX^co av/Li(pipELU hpiv, y&vopivuiv tou- 

TlOV, 

mofjLLKo's, i], 6v, adj. (i/o/uos,) pertain- 
ing to law, 1) gener. of things. Tit. iii. 9, 
pctxai vofxLKUL, i. e. disputes relating to 
the Mosaic law, 2) of persons, one skilled 
in tlie laic, a laivyer, Tit. iii. 13, tov vo- 
fjLLKov. Plut. vii. 99, o\ vo/uLLKOL, Strabo, 
xii. p. 813, ol Tvapa 'Pooyuai'ot? vofxiKOL, 
Arr. Epict. ii. 13, 7. Diog. Laert. vi. 54. 
In the Jewish sense, an interpreter and 
teacher of the Mosaic law, (as Jos. Bell. 

ii. 21, 7,) equiv. to vopodioctdKaXo^ and 



ypaiJifi(tTf.v<5, (which see,) Matt. xxii. 35, 
& X. 25, vopLiKo^ TL<5, et al. Dissert, vii. 
cSc xii. Trigland de Karajis, p. 66. Reland. 
Diss. Misc. P. ii. p. 90, and my note on 
Matt. xxii. 35. 

No^i/ua»9, adv. (yoiui/xor, fr. vopo^,) 
ImcfuUy, 'according to law or custom,' 
1 Tim. i. 8, avrio v. X(07}Tat, i. e. act upon 
it, fulfil its injunctions. 2 Tim. ii. 5, kau 
/mil V. a0/\j?(T?7. Arr. Epict. iii. 10, 8, £t v, 
n6Xi](Ta?, and oft. in Class. 

^ 6 iJLLcr fxa, UTO's, to, (yo/xi'^o), to use 
as money, Plato Eryx. p. 400,) prop. ' any 
thing prescribed by law or custom,' to 
vivo^Lo-fxivov &Qo<5. Hence current money, 
coin. Matt. xxii. 19, to v. tou Knvarov, 
and Sept. ; also oft. in Class, from Xen. 
downwards. 

No/xoo t^atr/caXos, ou, 6, {vopo^, Sl- 
ddorKaXo<s,) lit. a laiv-teacher, 'a teacher 
and expounder of the Jewish law,' equiv. 
to voixLKd<s and ypap(xaTf.v<s, Lu. v. 17. 
Acts V. 34. (See on ypafXfxaTtv<s, Lu. v. 
17.) Spoken also of Christian teachers 
who obtruded themselves upon the churches 
as expounders of the Mosaic law, 1 Tim, 
i. 7, ^iXovTE^ iivaL vojUiod. 

l>i o fiod a a- ia, as, /?, (i/o/xo0£T£co, for 
the phrase vo/ulou Tidsuai, ' to lay down a 
law,' laiv-giving, legislation, the giving of 
a code of laws. So Plato Legg. 684, t] 
KaTOLKLCTL^ Kal vojuLoB. ct ssepc al. In N.T. 
by meton. tlie laiv so given, or latvs, the 
LAW, e. g. the Mosaic code, Rom. ix. 4, 
al SiadrjKUL Kal rj vo/uLod. 2 Mace. vi. 
23, 6 Xoyicrixdv dvaXajSoDU — T7]9 dyia9 Kal 
^eoKTLGTou uo/ixo6Ecr'ia?. Jos. Ant. iii. 13, 
5. yi. 5, 6. Dion. Hal. Ant. ii. 23. Plut. 
Reisk. vi. p. 892, k'ws ov iravTdTra<nii> 
virapLdoPTE^ t^v AvKoupyov vopod. 

NojUoOfTto), f. ?70'6o, {yopo^ETri's,^ to 
make or give laws, to enact as law, 1) 
prop, and with dat. for any one, Xen, 
Apol. Socr. 15, AvKoifpyov tov AaKf.daL- 

p0UL0L<S VOjULodtTIWaVTO^. Scpt. Ex. XXiv, 

12, Tas kvToXd<5, d<s eypa\lra vo/uLodsTTj- 
crai auTots. Hence in N. T. pass, to be 
legislated for, to receive laivs, (where the 
dat. of the active construction becomes 
the nom. to the passive,) Heb. vii. 11, o 
Xaos yap Itt^ avTy vEvofxodiT-^TO, ' for 
the people received the (Mosaic) law upon 
this condition,' i. e. of being under the 
Levitical priesthood. So Jos. Ant. iii. 11, 

4, ETTi TJ7 aVTOV dTLjULia TOiaVTU kvOfJiO- 

di-TTicre. 2) to establish, sanction, prop, as 
law, or by law, act. Xen. Mem. iv. 4, 25, 
and oft. in Class. In N. T. pass. Heb. 
viii. 6, 77Tis {oLadi'iKr]) ettI kpelttoo-lu 
k-rr ay yEXi a L<s vEVoixcQiT^TaL. Deut. xvii. 
10, TTOLrjoraL Kara Trdurra o(ra dv vofxo- 
6&Ti]6y aroL. Jos. Ant. iii. 15, 5, to vojuo- 
t^£Trj6£V. And so Plato, as H. Steph. tes- 



NOM 



284 



N O S 



tifies, sometimes uses it for legi siihjici^ 
legem accipere. 

laii'givei\ Ja. iv. 12, and Class. 

No/xo§, OU, o, {vivofxa^ fr. vi/uLco^ to 
divide out, allot,) prop. *" what is assigned, 
allotted, or ordered' for any one to have or 
to do, or ' that principle which assigns or 
marks out' to every one his duty. So 
Etymol. Mag. j/o/xos' 6 vifxoov irdcn to 
Seov. Of course, there is an implied notion 
of ordering^ as is the case in all terms 
denoting law, in every language. Thus, 
for instance, the Lat. Lex and our laiv 
(anciently Ley, Lage) is the past partic. 
of the Goth, laggan, to lay down, and 
means anything laid doicn^ (i. e. ordered,) 
as a rule of conduct. So Hooker defines 
law to be ' that which assigns unto each 
thing the kind, that which moderates the 
force and power, that which a2)2Joints the 
form and measure of working,' In like 
manner 3'£(t/^os comes from Tidiiixi^ 'to 
lay down.' Thus a man's right by law is 
only what it is ordered he shall have. A 
view certainly in the mind of Pindar, 
when he says : No'uo? o irdvTcov (Bacn- 
\ev<s. But besides this sense of v6/ulo?^ 
there is another and qualified one, namely, 
that of custom, v^-hich, by long prescription, 
becomes law. So Thucyd. ii. 37, speaks 
of laws. b(TOL aypacpoL 6urE<s explained 
by the Schol. 'idi). And so oft. in Hdot. 
and other Class. In N. T. the word only 
'means laiv, as sometliing laid dotcn or 
prescribed, by some authority, human or 
divine. I. gener. and without reference to 
a particular people or state, Rom. iv. 15, 
OU ytip ovK tCTL i/ouos, ovdk irapdf^aa-L^. 
V. 13. vii. 8, X^P^^ vofxov dfxapTLa uskou. 
1 Tim. i. 9, SiKaLcp votxa ov keItul. 
Xen. Mem. i. 2, 41, and oft. in Class. — 
II. spec, of particular laws, statutes, ordi- 
nances, spoken of in N. T. mostly of the 
Mosaic, viz. 1) of laws relating to civil 
rights and duties, John vii, 51, 6 vojulos 
VfJicov Kpiv&L Tov dv6pai7rov ; viii. 5. xix. 
7. Acts xxiii. 3. xxiv. 6, So the law of 
marriage, Rom. vii. 2. 1 Cor. vii. 39 ; of 
the Levitical priesthood, Heb. 16, 
also ix. 19, KaTo. vojxov, ' according to 
the ordinance or command,' i.e. respecting 
the promulgation of the law. 2) of laws 
relating to external religious rites, e. gr. 
purification, Lu, ii. 22. Heb. ix. 22 ; cir- 
cumcision, John vii. 23. Acts xv. 5 ; sacri- 
fices, Heb, X. 8. 3) of laws relating to 
internal religious principle on the hearts & 
consciences of men, as influencing their 
conduct, Rom. vii. 7, o v6fio<3 eXsjev' 
OvK £7ri0u,a?/o-£i?. Ja. ii. 8. Heb. viii. 10. 
X. J6, cl8ov<s vojULOVs fjiov Eirl hcapcla'S av- 
Tcov. 4) by impl. for a wriitea law, a 
law expressly given, 6 vo/llo^ tyypaTTTo^. 



Rom, ii. 14, Edui] n-d /jli) vo/hov E)(ov'Ta — 
Eav-ro\<s e'lg-l vofxo'i. Diod. Sic. i. 94, vofxoi- 
'iyypaTTTOL, — HI. the law, i. e. the 
body of laics contained in the Mosaic code, 
and that whether moral or ceremonial, 
i) prop. Matt. V. 18, twra 'iu — ov /uli} 
irapEXdr} cctto tov vofxov. xxii. 36. Lu. 

Xvi. 17, & oft. Ot EK VOfXOV, OL iv VOjULU), 

ol vTTo VOfXOV, *■ those under the Mosaic 
law,' Rom. iv. 16. iii. 19. 1 Cor. ix. 20. 
o(joL Ev vofxcjp, id. Rom. ii. 12. Sept. Deut, 

i. 5. iv. 44, al. 2) fig. for the Mosaic 
dispensation, Rom. x. 4, TtXos ydp vojxov 
XpifTTos. Heb. vii. 12. x. 1. 3) meton. 
for the hook of the Icav, prop, the books of 
Moses, the Pentateuch, Matt. xii. 5. Lu. 

ii. 23, et al. So Sept. Neh. viii. 2. As 
forming part of the Old Test, o vofxo^ Kal 
OL TTpocpfjTaL, Matt. V. 17. Lu. xvi. 16. 
Johni, 46, et al. Jos. de Mace. 18. 6 vofxo^ 
M. Kai TTpocp. Kal Kl/aXjUiOL, Lu. xxiv. 44. 
Also simply 6 v6fxo9, for the Old Testa- 
ment, John X. 34. xii. 34. 2 Mace. ii. 18. 
— lY. fig. VOfXOV teXelo?, Ja. i. 25, 'the 
[more] perfect law,' the Christian dispen- 
sation, in contrast with that of Moses, 
which made nothing perfect, Heb. vii. 19. 
ix. 19, called at Ja. i. 25, vofxo? 6 t^s- 
kXEvdEpLus, as freeing believers from tiie 
yoke of ceremonial observances and the 
slavery of sin. Tliis is also called, Rom. 

iii. 27, ' the law of faith,' as opposed to 
any law of works. On the phrase 'ipya 
VOfXOV at Rom. iii. 28, and ix. 32; see Bp. 
Bull's Harm. Apost. ch. vi. Also, ' the 
law of the spirit of life,' in opposition to 
the law (i. e. power) of sin and death, 
Rom. viii. 2. Also, at ix. 31, vofx. Slkul- 
oavvi]?, as containing Evangelical right- 
eousness, in opposition to that arising from 
any law of works ; (such as is adverted to 
at 'Phil. iii. 6, 9. Tit. iii. 5, et al.) even 
that imputed to sinful man, th rough faith 
in Christ, by which his past sins are for- 
given, and he is accepted, as righteous, to 
life eternal. See Rom. iv. 6, 7, 8. v. 18, 
21. X. 10. Phil. iii. 9. Also used of the 
laws, precepts, established by the Gospel, 
e. gr. 6 v6fxo<s Xpto-Tou, Gal. vi. 2 ; absol. 
Rom. xiii. 8, 10, irXvpoofxa ovv vofxov h 
dydiri]. — V. fig. laiv, i. e. norma, rule, 
standard, of judging or acting, or a prin- 
ciple of action, Rom. iii. 27, olci tto'wv 
VOfXOV ; Tcov Epy(x>v', ohyj.' a.XXd otd vofxov 
tt/g-teo)?. vii. 21, 23, 25. viii. 2, 7. In the 
sense of ride of life, discipliiie, Phil. iii. 5, 
K'aTa VOfXOV, ^apLaato^. Arr. Epict. i. 

•26, 1. 

No CEO), f. vcrco, {vocro^,) to he sick, to 
sufi'er under bodilv disease, prop. Hdot. i. 
105. Thuc. i. 138. In N. T. fig. voo-elv 
TTEpi TL, ' to have a sickly longing' for any 
thing, to pine away, ' have a morbid fond- 
ness for,' 1 Tim. vi. 4, voatov irEpl X^nri}- 



N O 2 



285 



N 0 Y 



CTEis Kal Xoyo/xaxLa's- Pint, de Ira 
Cohib. 14, Tots TTEOi do^av voaovcnv. 
Plato, Phcedr. p. *228, Trspl K6yu3v aKoi'iv. 

l^oa-ij/ma^ a-ros, to, (voartco^) sickness^ 
disease, equiv. to j/ocros, Jobn v. 4, and 
Class. 

No cos, cu, 6, 77, prop. sicJi)iess, disease, 
Matt. iv. 23, ^epairevcou nrdaav voaov, 
and ver. 24, ^vhere see my note, et saepiss. 
Sept. and Class. Metapli. used to denote 
the pain or sorrow of sickness. Matt. viii. 
17, auxos Ta<s aadsusLa^ nfxwv '£\a(is Kal 
Tas v6(rov<5 kj^cicrTaartv, where the latter 
term relates to disorders of the body, the 
other to the diseases of the soul, (not of 
the mind, as most, even orthodox, Com- 
mentators explain.) namely, those diseases 
of the soul by sin, (see Ps. xli. 4. ciii. 3. 
cxMi. 3,) alone to be healed by the great 
Physician of souls, Jesus Christ, that 
' Sun of righteousness,' who, arising ' Avith 
healing- in his wings,' hy the efficacy of 
his blood, (as it is said, 1 Pet. ii.. 24, ' by 
whose stripes ye were healed,') healeth our 
spiritual disorders, and by the potent in- 
fluence of his Spirit helpeth our infirmities, 
enabling us both to will and to do. By 
the same allusion it is said, Ps. xxxviii. 4, 
^ Mine iniquities are a burden too heavy 
for me to bear.' And in Gal. vi. 2, such 
da-QivsLaL are called burdens, as being 
burdensome to those who bear them, and 
to others— burdens from which Christ alone 
sets us free. So again in Ps. xl. 12, it is 
said, ' Mine iniquities have taken such 
hold of me, that I am not able to look up,' 
where there is an allusion to disorders so 
violent in their nature as not to permit 
the sufferer even to look up. Now the 
Saviour is represented as suffering in his 
own body the sins of many, inasmuch as 
' on him were laid the iniquities of us 
all.' See Is. liii. And he calls those ini- 
quities his oivn, of which he bore the 
penalty. Of this spiritual sense of the 
term, it is said no example occurs in the 
Classical writers. Yet Plato speaks of 
various vices, and of vice in general, as 
disorders of the soul ; e. gr. Soph. p. 228, 
TO fxevTrov^pia kuXoviu&vov v6<to^ avTrj^, 
scil. T^9 xlrvxv^i 6.91, T^§ jULEyLcrn-}]^ 
vocrov, dvoLa<5, 7rXt]pa)de.'L(Ta. 477, KaKiav 
dv (piTcruL's ua-diuEiau eIvul Kal voaov. 
610, Ti]u ddiKLUv Eluai ^avdaifxov tw 
s-XovTi, wairsp voaov. 

Nocrcrta, a?, t?, (a contracted later 
form for VEoac-La, from veo(T(t6^,) a nest, 
i. e. with the young. Sept. Ps. Ixxxiii. 3. 
Pausan. ix. 30, sq. In N. T. a nest of 
young birds, a brood, Lu. xiii. 34, ov 
rrpo-rrov opvL^ n-})v BavTrj<s voaaLav. So 
Sept. Deut. xxxii. 1 1. 

^ o(T(TLov, ov, TO, (coutr. for veog-- 
(Tiov,) a young bird, Plur. to: voaty'ia, a 



brood of young birds. Matt, xxiii. 37. Sept. 
Ps. Ixxxiii. 3. Aristot. H. An. i.y. 29. 
^1. V. H. x. 3. 

Noc^tt^ai, f. iVw, (yo'(rr/)t, apart,) prop. 
' to put or set apart, to separate,' mid. to 
separate oneself, to go away, Hom. Od. xi. 
73. Act. to take or snatch aicay, to rob, 
Pind. Nem. vi. 106. In N. T. m'id. to take 
away for oneself, to keep back any thing 
which belongs to another, to embezzle, 
purloin, absol. Tit. ii. 10, p.\] voacpi'^^o- 
fxsvo^: with acc. 2 Mace. iv. 32. Jos. Ant. 
iv. 8, 29. Foil, by aTrd with gen. partit. 
Acts V. 2, 3, voa^LcracrdaL diro t^s Ti- 
fjL7]^ : with aTTo, Sept. Josh. vii. 1, hoa<pi- 
(ravTo aTTo tov dvadifxaTo^. Philo de 
Vit. Mos. i. p. 641, ovdkv £/c tlvo^ v. 

NoTos, ov, 6, the south icind, or strictly 
the south-ivest ivind, Lat. notus. 1) prop. 
Lu. xii. 55, voTov irviovTa. Acts xxvii. 
13. xxviii. 13. Sept. & Class. 2) meton. 
the south, the southern quarter of the 
heavens and earth. Matt. xii. 42. Lu. xi. 
31, jSaoriXLcraa votov. xiii. 29. Rev. xxi. 
13. Sept. Eccl. i. 5, al. Jos. Ant. viii. 13, 
2. Hdot. vi. 139. 

'Novdsaia, as, rj, {vovd&TEU},) prop, a 
putting in mind, i. e, warning, adinonition, 
exhortation, 1 Cor. x. 11, TavTa kypdcp'ri 
TTpo's vovdEcriav rjjuLtiov. Eph. vi. 4. Tit. iii. 
10. Jos. Ant. iii. 15, 1. Diod. Sic. xv. 7. 

Nou0£T£6o, f. rjaro), (i/oOs, Ti'6t]/xt,) 
prop, to put in mind, to put into one's 
heart ; hence to ivcmi, admonish, exhort, 
trans. Acts xx. 31, ovk. kTravadix^v — i/ou- 
Oetcov Eva EKacr^ov. Rom. xv. 14, al. 
Sept. Job iv. 3. Jos. Ant. iv. 8, 24. Xen. 
Cyr. viii. 2, 15. 

^ovjuLTjvia, as, Att. contr. for veo- 
lxr]VLa, {vies, p.r,v,) prop, neiv-month, i. e, 
the new-moo7i, as a festival, Col. ii. 16. 
Sept. and Class. 

Noi/ygxws, adv. [vovvEXV^-, 'having 
understanding,' fr. vov<s, £X^^) '^^^der- 
stajidingly, discreetly, Mk. xii. 34, vow 
sxd)9 dTTEKpLdii, Pol. ii. 13, 1. Diod. Sic. 
X. p. 41. 

Nous, vov, acc. vovv, 6, Att. contr. for 
Noos, voov : but in N. T. only gen. vo6^, 
dat, VOL, prop, the seer or perceiver, i. e. 
the intelligent or intellectual principle, the 
MIND, 1) as the seat of the passions and 
affections, 'mode of thinking and feeling,' 
disposition, moral inclination, equiv. to 
heart, Rom. i. 28, TrapidcoKEV auTOus o 
0. £ts ddoKLjuLov vovv. xii. 2, 1 Tim. vi. 5, 
CLE(pdapiuLEV(x)v TOV VOVV. So for firmness 
or presence of mind, 2 Th. ii. 2. As im- 
plying heart, reason, conscience, in opp. 
to fleshly appetites, Rom. \\\. 23, 25. 
Sept. Is. X. 7, 12. Hom. Od. i. 3. Xen. 
Cyr. V. 2, 17. Hdot. i. 117. ix. 120, and 
oft. 2) 7nind, for understanding, intellect. 



N YM 



286 



Lii. xxiv. 45, Sli]vol^£v avTu)V tov vovv. 
ICor. xiv. 14, sq. 19. Phil. iv.7. Rev. xiii. 
18, 6 ^xy^^ '^^^ vovu^ i. e. ' the wise.' 
Sept. Josh. xiv. 7, & oft. in Chass. from 
Horn, downwards. 3) meton. mind^ for 
what is in the mind, i. e. thought, counsel, 
purpose, e. gr, of God or Christ, Rom. xi. 
34, Tis yap s.yi^u) vovv Kvpiou ; 1 Cor. ii. 
16. Of men, Rom. xiv. 5. Judith viii. 
14. Hdot. vii. 150. iv. 36, and oft. 4) fig. 
of things, sejise, meanincf, Rev. xvii. 9, 
ioB& 6 i/ous b 'ixu3V (TocpLav, i.e. 'the deep 
or hidden sense.' Hdot. vii. 162, ovto^ 6 
u6o9 Tou pv/maTo?. Svnes. Ep. 103, cru 
KUKU)^ EirEdi^u) Tou vovv T?/s i-TrL(TroXrj<s. 

l!!^ V jUL (p 7] , 77, (ohsol. vu(3a), Ijnt.nubo, 
to veil, with allusion to her being con- 
ducted veiled from her father's house,) a 
bride, spouse, newly " married, 1) prop. 
John iii, 29, 6 '^X^^ ^^^^ vvpcpi]v, vv/u(l)io<s 
kcTTL. Rev. xviii. 23, al. Sept. and Class. 
2) as opp. to 77 TTEvdepa, & put for daugJi- 
ter-in-law. Matt. x. 35. Lu. xii. 53. So 
Sept. Gen. xxxviii. 11. Ruth i. 6, 7. Mic. 
vii. 6. Tob. xi. 16, 17. Jos. Ant. v. 9, 1. 
Not in Class. 

Nv/i^tos, 017, 6, {vu/ucf)}-!,) a hride- 
groom, spouse, newly married. Matt. ix. 15, 
et al. ssepe. Sept. and Class. 

Nu/i^cby, wvcs, 6, {vv/uL<piT,) bridal 
chamber, where tlie nuptial bed was pre- 
pared, usually in the house of the bride- 
groom, whither the bride was brought in 
procession. The word occ. sometimes in 
the Sept. and Apocryphal writers, also in 
Heliod. vii. 113; in N. T. only in the 
phrase oi viol tov vvucpcovo^, 'sons of the 
bridal chamber,' Matt. ix. 15. Mk. ii. 19. 
Lu. V. 34. These were the companions of 
the bridegroom, or rather his guests during 
the nuptial festivities, brldemen, just as 
the bride had also her companions or 
bridemaids ; whether they were the same 
or not with the irapavvjucpioL and vvjucp- 
ayayyoi of the Greeks, is debated, but 
prob. they were not the same. 

Ni/i/, adv. (also vvvi as strengthened hy 
the demonstr. i,) ?iou\ Lat. nunc. I. prop, 
as adv. of time, KOW, used 1) of the 
actual present, as opp. both to time past 
and future, Lu. vi. 21, ol ttelvIjovte's vvv. 
ver. 25. John iv. 18. xii. 27, al. saep. 
Sept. and Class. In direct antith. to 
something done in time past, e. gT. vvv Sa, 
Lu. xvi. 25. Gal. iv. 9. vvvi ok, in which 
connexion chiefly is vvvi found, Rom. iii. 
21. So in antith. to something future, 
emphat. Mk. x. 30, vvv Iv tco KaLpui 
TovTu). Xen. Conv. viii. 4, vvv iv tco 
irapovTL. With the art. 6, to vvv, as 
adj. the noiv existing, present. Acts xxii. 1, 
T7y9 Tvpo's u/xas vvvi airo\oyLa<3, Rom. 
iii. 26, kv TM vvv Kaipuo, ai. and Class. 
So airo TOV vvv, scil. ^povov, from now, 



henceforth, Lu. i. 48. 2 Cor. v. 16. axpi 
TOV vvv, until now, Rom. viii. 22. Phil. i. 
5. £a)§ TOV vvv, id. Matt. xxiv. 21. to. 
vvv or Tavvv, adv. now, at present. Acts 
iv. 29. V. 38, al. and Class, to vvv 'ixov, 
as it noiu is, i. e. for tiie present. Acts 
xxiv. 25. 2) in reference to time just 
past, 7101V, i. e. just now, even now. 
Matt. xxvi. 65. John xi. 8. Rom. v. 11, 
et al. 3) in reference to future time just 
at hand, even now, presently, immedi- 
ately, e. gr. foil, by fut. John xii. 31, vvv 

6 apX^^ 'TOV K. T. &K(3X7'j6}l(T8.TaL £^60. 

Acts xiii. 11. Phil. i. 20, and Class. Foil, 
by perf. for fut. as implying what is imme- 
diately to take place, John iv. 23, 'ipx^^ai- 
(jopa, Kai vvv karTiv. xii. 31, vvv Kpicn? 
kcrri tov KocTfxov t. xvi. 5, 32, et al. — II. 
as a 2^(^i^ticle of transition or continuation, 
NOW, 1) gener. noio, as marking a pre- 
sent condition, i. e. 'in the present state 
of tilings, as things are,' Lu. ii. 29, vvv 
a7roX.u£t§ TOV dovXov crov, xi. 39. Rom. 
V. 9. Col. i. 24. Kai vvv. Acts iii. 17. In 
antithesis, vvvi dk, 1 Cor. xiii. 13. 2) as 
implying that one thing follows noiv out of 
another, thus marking a conclusion, in- 
ference, equiv. to NOW then, 7iow tliere- 
fore, i. e. ' since these things are so,' Acts 
xii. 11, vvv old a dXt]du)9. xxii. 16. 1 Cor. 
xiv. 6, vvvL. So vvv ovv. Acts xvi. 36, & 
Xen. Cyr. vii. 5, 34; interrog. Acts xv. 
10. vvv dpa, Rom. viii. 1. 3) emphat. in 
commands and exhortations, implying that 
what is to be done should be done now, at 
once. So with imperat. Matt, xxvii. 42, 
KUTajSaTO) vvv cltto tov crTavpov. ver. 
43. John ii. 8. Ja. iv. 13, aye vvv. v. 1. 
Acts vii. 34, vvv Ssvpo. Horn. II. xxiii. 
485. Aristoph. Pac. 851, et al. 

N i; J, vvKTo?, 7], night, Lat. nox. 1 ) prop. 
Matt. xiv. 25, TETapTy cpvXaKy ttj^ 
vvKToi, Lu. ii. 8. Rev. viii. 12, al. Sept. 
and Class. ; fig. John ix. 4, £f))(£'rai vv^, 
' the night of life's little day ;' so Hor. Od. 
iv. 1, 16, ' jam te premet nox.' In speci- 
fications of time ; genit. of time ivhen, in- 
def. and continued, e. gr. vvkto^, hy night. 
Matt. ii. 14. xxvii. 64. John iii. 2, al. 
i)p.tpu£ Kai vvKTo^, by day and by night, 
i. e. continually. Acts ix. 24. Rev. iv. 8. 
i/f/vTos Kul iijuL. 2 Tim. i. 3, and so Class. 

yUf(T7J§ ^£ VVKTO^, Matt. XXV. 6. KaTO. 

/ukcrov Tf}<5 V. Acts xxvii. 27. Slo. t^s 
vvKTOi, duri?ig the night, i. e. either the 
whole night, Lu. v. 5, or by night. Acts 
V. 19. Dat. of time ivhen, definite, Lu. 
xii. 20, TavTT} t(j vvktl, this very night. 
Acts xii, 6. kv vvktI, by night. Acts xviii, 
9. kv Trj V. Matt. xxvi. 31. John xi. 10. 
A ecus, of time hoiv long. Matt. iv. 2, vvk- 
Ta'i TEcraapaKOVTa. xii. 40, TpaL9 vvk- 
Tas. So Ta^ vvKTa<s, the nights, i. e. 
during the nights, Lu. xxi. 37. vvktu kul 



N Y2 



287 



hfiifiCLVs night and day, continually, Mk. 
iv. 27, al. and Class. 2) metaph, for a 
time of moral and s])iritual darkness, the 
opposite of gospel light and day, Rom. xiii. 
12, 77 vi)^ TTpotKuyj/ei/. Such at least is the 
interpretation of most recent Commenta- 
tors ; but it rather denotes tlie time of this 
present life, as being a state of darkness 
and ignorance, in comparison with the 
clear light and knowledge of which the 
saints shall be partakers in anotlier and 
better state, When,' in the words of a 
great poet, ' they waken with that liglit, 
Whose day shall never sleep in night.' In 
1 Th. V. 5, ovK kcrfxiv yu/cros, scil. ulot, 
there is a combined notion of ignorance 
and dissoluteness. See otkoto^ 2. 

Nucro-o), f. ^w, to prick, pierce, e. gr. 
TTiv TrXsvpav, John xix. 34, and Class. 

Nvo-Ta^co, f. ^w, (i/euct),) prop, to 
nod, hence to slumber, intrans. Matt. xxv. 
5, kvv<rra^av TrdaruL Kai eKadsuSov. Sept. 
and Class. Fig. 2 Pet. ii. 3, a-rrtoXeia 
QiVTwv ov vvo-TdX^tL, a highly fig. expres- 
sion, perhaps formed on prosopopoeia for 
XpoviX.sTaL, as in Eurip. Hec. 662, outtot 
£.vcei A^uTrpct arov Ki]pvyp.aTa, 

Nux^^J/^ts/oof, ov, TO, {vv^, rijULlpa,) 
a day and niyht, 24 hours, 2 Cor. xi. 25. 
Found only in late writers. 

Na)6f)09, a, Of, adj. contr. for i/a)6€|0o?, 
fr. i/tt)6f/s, sloiv, didL, stupid, prop, physic- 
ally, Ecclus. iv. 29, Lucian de Astrol. 21. 
In N. T. fig. of the mind, Heb. v. 11, 
vwdpoi ysyouaTE tul^ dKoai<s. vi. 12. 
Sept. Prov. xxii. 29. Pol. iv. 8, 5. Plut. 
Lycurg. 18, med. 

NwTos, ov, o, the hack, Rom. xi. 10. 
Sept. and Class. 



^Evia, as, 77, (^ei/os,) prop, guest- 
right, or claim, alliance of hospitality, as 
oft. in Class. In N. T. place for a 
guest, a lodging. Acts xxviii. 23, yikov irpos 
avTov eh Tr]u l^tviav. Philem. 22. 

^EviX^ay, f. t(Taj, {^ivo<5,) \) to receive 
as a gued, to entertain, Hom. Od. iii. 355, 
trans, pass, to he entertained, to lodge with 
any one. Acts x. 6, ^euiX^sTaL irapd tlvl 
^LfiuiVL (Svpa-El. ver. 18, 23, 32. xxi. 16. 
xxviii. 7, 7j/xas c\iL\ocpp6vco^ k^iviatv. 
Heb. xiii. 2. Xen. Cyr.^ vi. 2, 3, 
l^EVL(rQivTE^ TOTE irapd Kuf)w. 2) to 
appear strange to any one, to surprit^e, 
trans. Jos. Ant. i. 1, 4, t6v Geof k^ii iX^^v 
TO TrpaTTo/uLEi/oi/. In N. T. purtic. plur. 
TO. ^EviX^ouTu, *• things strange, surprising 
also mid. ^BviX^o/jiaL, to he surprised at, 
1 Pet. iv. 12, 1X7] ^efi'^£cr0£ ev vfxlu 
nrvpuxTEi. 



'fi!, Evo^oxiui, f. 7)0-0), {^fvoooxo's, fr. 
^tVos and dixoixai,) to entertain straiigers^ 
to practise hoi'pitality, absol. 1 Tim. v. 10, 
where see my notes. Max. Tyr. Diss, 
xxxii. 133. Dio Cass. Ixxviii. 3. ^tvo- 
doKtu), Hdot. vi. 127. 

Sfct^09, 1], ov, prop. adj. not of one^s 
family or nation, foreign, strange to one ; 
also s'uhst. a foreigner, or a stranger, i. e. 
one not of the family ; also, by use, one 
who, though a stranger, has been intro- 
duced into the family, and connected with 
it by bonds of hospitality and friendship. 
In N. T. it occ. 1) subst. o ^ivo^, a 
guest, hospes, prop, a friend allied in hospi- 
tality, hospes, such an alliance being in 
ancient times usual among friends, who 
lived in different cities or countries, who 
then were entertained at each other's 
houses. So Rom. xvi. 23, Td'io's, 6 ^ivo^ 
jULov Kul Tf]<s iKK\i]crLa9 oX7]s. But there 
the sense is by impl. Iwst, as sometimes in 
the Class. ; e. gT. Hdot. ii. 114. Diod. Sic. 
xvii. 47. Xen. An. iii. 1, 4. Thus Eustath. 
says, ' both he who entertained, and he 
who was entertained, were each called 
^£fo§ in respect to each other.' And so 
the Lat. hospes bears both senses. 2) in a 
more gener. a stranger, i. q, foreigner, as 
coming from another place or country. 
Matt. xxv. 35, ^evo<5 tjijliiv. ver. 38, 43, 
44. xxvii. 7, Eh Ta(f)i]v toTs ^evol^. Acts 
xvii. 21, ol ETridmxovvTE^ ^Evoi, ' resident 
strangers, foreigners.' Heb. xi. 13. Sept. 
and Class. Fig. for dXkoTpio^, as not 
belonging to the Christian community, an 
alien, with gen. Eph. ii. 12, ^evol todv 
diad7)Ku)v, ' aliens from the covenants.' 
Simil. Soph. (Ed. Tyr. 218, ^ivo^ fih 
TOO \6yov. So absol. a stranger, not of 
the family of Christ, a Christian, Eph. ii. 
19. 3 John 5. 2) ADJ. strange, i. e. 
foreign, unknoicn, as coming from another 
country. Acts xvii. 18, oaip.6via ^iva. So 
^1. V. H. ii. 13, ^Euoi oaLfxovE^. Fig. 
Heb. xiii. 9, ^i^ax"^^ Rival's, 'strange 
doctrines,' i. e. foreign to the Christian 
faith. See my note. Fig. strange, i. e. 
novel, unheard of, causing wonder, 1 Pet. 

iv. 12, (h<5 l^ivOV Vfxiv <TV/Ui(3aLV0VT09. 

Wisd. xix. 5, ^. ^dvaTOV. Theocr. Or. 
p. 29, ^. TTttOos. Diod. Sic. iii. 52, J. 77 
7rff>i TovTCov la-Topla. 

S E(rT7;s, ov, 6, Lat. seccfus ov secctarius, 
prop, a Roman measure, the 16th part of a 
modius, — about 1-J pint English, Jos. 
Ant. viii. 2, 9. In N. T. gener. for any 
small measure or vessel, cup, pitcher, &c. 
Mk. vii. 4, 8. The word is generally, but 
most ir^nrobably, thought to be derived 
from iiid Lat. sejctarius. There is little 
doubt that the word is, as Erasm. sup- 
poses, derived from ^eo-Tos,-, polished, so 
as to mean a wooden vessel turned and 



SHP 

polished. And he might have proved the 
point from the expression in Aristoph. 
Thesm. 778, ^eo-xos Triva^ : also from a 
passage of Horn. Od. i. 138. iv. 54, ^aaTviv 
Tpa'KtC.av. Indeed, the epithet J^cn-os 
was applied to utensils of all kinds that 
may be formed by turning and polishing. 

S^/paii/w, f. avoo^ (^^]jOos,) aor. 1. 
kl^i]pavct^ Ja. i. 11 ; perf. pass. e^tjpajuLjULai^ 
3 pers. sing. i^i']pavTaL^ to dr?/, make dri/, 
trans. ; pass, to be dried up^ become dry : 
of plants, act. to dry up^ iDitlm\ Ja. i. il, 
6 77\ios £^tjpat/£ ToV yopTov : pass, to 
wither away^ Matt. xiii. b'. Mk. iv. 6, om 
TO ft?j 'i^s.Lv piC,av £^?jpai/0rj, et al. In 
the sense of to be dry^ i. e. ripe., as otl 
k^npcivdi] 6 3'£picr/^6§, Rev. xiv. 15. Sept. 
Jer. xii. 4, 6 y^op-ro^ ^'t-ioavdvcr&TaL^ & oft. 
Xen. Mem. iv. 3, An. ii. 8, 9. Of 
fluids, pass, to be dried tip., Rev. xvi. 12, 
TO vowp. Mk. V. 29, ?7 '7n]yri. Sept. Gen. 
viii. 7, ^.^ TO uooop. Is. xix. 5, TroTayuo?. 
Horn. II. xxi. 345, Trai/ ^' i^^]pavdi] 
tteSlov., (T^iro o dy\a6v vbcop. Of the 
body or its members, pass, to wither^ Mk. 
iii. 1, k^-iipapijULtijyjv s-X^^ '^^^'^ X^'-P"* 
3. Sept. 1 K. xiii. 4, iJ^j^at'O?] ?/ x^^'j^ • 
'to pine away,' Mk. ix. 18, Kal ^i-jpaivs- 
Tai. So Prov. xvii. 22, dvdpo^ XuTTj/pou 
^VpaLVETaL Ta oa-rd. Sept. Ps. xxii. 15, 
i^i]pdvdt]^ (haral ocTTpaKov^ rj tcrxus P-OV. 

Svpo?., a, oV, adj. dry. 1) of a tree, 
c?r^, withered, Lu. xxiii. 31, ti/ tw 
vypcp ^vXix) TuvTa iroLovariv.j iv tm 
^7;ptt) Ti yivi]TaL \ i. e. a green or a dry 
tree, as emblematic, re^spectively, of the 
righteous and the wicked, comp. Ps. i. 3. 
Ez. XX. 47, q. d. ' if an innocent man be 
thus treated, what shall be done to the 
wicked.^' The phrase occ. Sept. Is. Ivi. 3. 
Ez. xvii. 24. Of the body or its members^ 
John v. 3. /; xdp.^ Matt. xii. 10. Comp. 
Sept. Hos. ix. 17. 2) h ^tip^-> scil. yij, 
'the dry land,' as opp. to v ^akdcrcrt], 
Matt, xxiii. 15. Heb. xi. 29. Sept. Gen. i. 
5, 10. Jonah i. 9. lat. Class. 

^5JuXt^/os, 7], 0L>, adj. (^uA.oi/,) li'ooden., 
2 Tim. ii. 20, ctk-evi] ^vXiua. Rev. ix. 20. 
Sept. and Class, espec. Thucyd. 

^uA.oy, ou, To\ (^I'w,) prop, 'a loc/ of 
wood,' or a piece of a tree witli the branches 
hewed. I. gener. for fuel, 1 Cor. iii. 12, 
Xidov? Tt^tou?, ^uXa, xopTov. Sept. Gen, 
xxii. 3, GXLcra^ ^\j\a. So Xen. Cyr. v. 3, 
49, ^uXa Ti§ (TXLcrdTif}. iEl. Y. H. ^v\a 
ova. Also, timber hewn or sawed square. 
Rev. xviii. 12, irdv ^. & ^vXov Tip.. 
Hom. II. xxiii. 327. Hdot. i. 156'. Thuc. iv. 
52. — II. spec. ' any thing made of wood,' as 
1) a staff or club, as peTu p.axcf-pdii' 
^vXcov, Matt. xxvi. 47, 55, al. Jos. B. J. 
V. 3, 1. Hdot. ii. 63. Hdian. vii. 7, 8. 
Dem. 645, 16, or 2) stochs, Lat. nervus, 



o 

a wooden block, or frame with lioles, in 
which the feet, and sometimes the hands 
and neck, of prisoners were confined. Acts 
xvi. 24, TOi/s TTOoas auTuw rjcrcpaXicraTo 
sh TO ^vXov. Job xxxiii. 11, £0£to ok kv 
^vX(x) irdv TToda juov. Luc. Tox. 29, to. 
CTKiXr] ku n-(jo ^vXu) KaTaKEKXELorp-kva. 
Pkit. viii. p. 361, tous Tro'oas kv too ^uXto 
OEcsfxkvov^. 3) a stake, c7'oss, — ai-av- 
pd<3, Acts V. 30, and x. 39, KpEp.dcrauTE^ 
kiri 5u\ou. xiii. 29. Gal. iii. 13. I Pet. ii. 
24. So Sept. Deut. xxi. 22, 23. Esth. v. 
14. — III. living wood, i. e. cc tree, Lu. 
xxiii. 31, k^ Tw vypto ^vXco, meaning the 
righteous, <vho are not unfrequently de- 
signated as green and flourishing: trees. 
See Ps. i. 3. Ez. xx. 47. Rev. ii. 7, to J. 
T7j<; X,cjorj<3, with allusion to Christ as the 
author of salvation to all that believe in 
and obey him, comp. Lu. xxiii. 43; a 
figurative designation of that eternal life 
which was lost by our first parents, and 
restored by Christ. In the same sense 
the word also occ. in Class, as Hdot. 
Aristot. and Theophr. 

^vpdu), f. v<T(jo, {^vpov,) to shear, 
shave, i. e. the locks or beard, mid. Acts 
xxi. 24, %va ^vpji(Tu)VTaL ti]V KE(paXi]if, 
' that they may shear their heads,' i. e. 
have them shorn : pass. part. fem. k^vpn- 
pLEvi], I Cor. xi. 5, 6. Sept. and Class. 



o. 

'O, 77, TO, gen. Tou, tTj?, tov, originally 
a demonstr. pron. this, that, but in Attic 
and later usage mostly a prepositive arti- 
cle, the. I. as a deimonstr. prox. this, 
that. 1) simply, Acts xvii. 28, tou yap 
Kul ykvo<s kcrp-EV, ' for of this one [him] we 
are also the offspring.' . 2) in distinctions 
and distribution; distinc. with p.Ev — ^£ : 6 
p.kv — o ^£, the one — the other., that one — 
this one, Phil. i. 16, 17, ol p.kv k^ kpidEia^ 
— ol ^£ dyd7rt}<s. Heb. vii. 5, 6, ol p.kv 
— 6 ^£ ; distrib. one — another, pi. so?ne. 
Matt. xiii. 23. Acts xiv. 4. Rom. ii. 7. 
Eph. iv. 11. Also ol juL&v — aXXoL Sk, 
Matt. xvi. 14. KUL TLVEs — OL Be, Acts xvii. 
18. So Matt, xxviii. 17, ol 6e kBLcrTacrav, 
' but some doubted,' i. e. in antith. to all 
as impl. in TrpocrEKvvricrav. 3) in the nar- 
rative style 6 ok is used by way of trans- 
ition to another person or party already 
mentioned, without a preceding 6 p.kv, but 
this one., i. e. bid he. Matt. ii. 5, ol ok 
eIttov. Mk. viii. 28. Lu. vii. 40. So with 
a participle intervening. Matt. ii. 9, ol Bk 
dKov(TauTE<5 kiropEvdijarav, ver. 14. iv. 4. 
s£epe. — II. as the prepositive article, 
originally a demonstrative, but having its 
demonstrative power gradually softened 
down, so as simply to mark an object as 



288 



o 

definite, or specific. — I. -with vSubstan- 
TIVES, or words standing tor substantives. 
— I. simply^ i. e. without adjectives or 
other adju/icts., where the subst. is to be 
expressed as do finite or specific. 1 ) gencr. 
where the subst. refers to a person or thing 
as ivell ktioiv/i^ i. e. either as already men- 
tioned, or as of eomiuon uotoriety. As 
alreadii mentioned^ Matt. i. '24. v. 1, tous 
oyXovs. *2) as oi common notoriety., Matt, 
i. '2'2, ^LOL Tov 7rpo(pnTou. ii. 15. ix. 
28. xii. 41. Mk, ii. 24. Lu. v. 14, 
hpel. xii. 54. Acts xi. 13. Rom. iv. 3, v 
ypa<^?;, ' the Scriptures.' Rev. v. 13. 
3) with nouns implying a person or thing 
as alone or monadic^ either as pre-eminent 
above all others, or as alone existing, thus 
approaching the nature of a proper name, 
and sometimes passing over into one ; 6 
Xpio-Tos, Hhe Christ,' the Messiah, Matt. 

1. 17, and so almost always where it stands 
alone ; without the art. as a prop, name, 
very rarely in the Gospels and Acts, Lu. 
xxiii. 2. John ix. 22 ; but oftener in the 
Epistles, Rom, v. 6. vi. 4. 6 Yio? tou Qeov 
or Tov aiidpcDirou., see utos; 6 diodar- 
«:a\os, Mk. xiv. 14. So 6 dLajSoXo?., ' the 
devil,' Matt. iv. 5, and always except Acts 

xiii. 10. The names of God, Geo? and 
Kvpio<s (the latter also of Christ), often 
have the article, but more frequently 
omit it, espec, in the oblique cases ; tlanriip 
applied to God has usually the art. and a 
gen. hut likewise simply 6 UaTvp. So to 
n.uEviuLa and to TLusd/uLa ayiov^ almost as 
a prop, name, Acts i. 8. x. 19. Also with 
nouns or names of single objects, concrete 
or abstract ; where the article under cer- 
tain circumstances is sometimes omitted : 
6 77/Vio?, Matt. xiii. 43, anar. ver. 6. 6 ov~ 
pavo^., OL ovpavoi^ iii. 16. v. 18. anar. 2 
Pet. iii, 5, 12. rj y^. Matt. v. 18, anar. 2 
Pet. iii. 5, 10. So 0aA.ao"o-a, I'l'^, &c. ; 
also 6 vofxa^ ^ the law' of Moses, John i. 
17., anar. Rom. iii. 31. v. 20. tov aypou^ 
Matt, vi, 28 ; but air' aypov as opp, to 
the city, Mk. x;v. 21. So with abstract 
nouns, rj apfxr/, 2 Pet. i. 5, anar. ver. 3. 
tj dy«7r?/, Rom. xiii. 10, anar. 1 Cor. xiii. 

2, 7? afxapTLa^ Rom. v. 12, anar. ver. 13. 
rj SLKaLocruvf}^ vi. 18, anar. ix. 30. ij ttlct- 
Tte, iv. 9, anar. iii. 28. 4) with nouns 
implying a definite genus or class of indi- 
viduals, distinct from all others ; gener. in 
plur. ai dXwTTEKs^., Matt. viii. 20. oi 
«£Toi, xxiv. 28. So ol yg/cpoi, ' the dead,' 

xiv. 2. xxii. 31, but more freq. without the 
article. Here belong also the plural names 
of nations, which take the article as gene- 
ric, oi 'lovdaloL^ ' the Jews,' John v. 1. 
oi "EWrjfes, John vii. 35. oi 'Pco/xaioi,, 
xi. 48. Also in the sing, where the noun 
expresses a generic idea, or stands as the 
representative of a class, where in English 
also we commonly put the^ Matt. xii. 35, 6 



o 

ayaOos dvQpaDiro's — kul 6 Trouiipo^ dvd. 
Mk.iii.27. Lu. x. 7, o tpyartj?. Johnx. 11, 
6 TroLfxifV 6 /caXos. Rom. i. 17, o otVatos. 
5) witli nouns in themselves indefinite, 
which yet become definite as standing in 
some certain relaiion to the definite person 
or thing there spoken of, as Lu. xviii. 15, 
TO. (3ptcl)i]^ i. e. their own children, John 
V. 36. Acts xiv. 10. 1 Cor. xi. 5, uKUTa- 
KoXvTTTM T^ KstpaXy^ ' with the head 
uncovered.' Heb. vii. 24. Rev. iv. 7. 6) 
where two or more nouns in the same case 
are connected by kul^ &c., if the first have 
the article, the second either takes or 
omits it in certain circumstances. If the 
nouns are of different genders or numbers, 
the article is repeated. Matt. xv. 4, Ti/txa 
TOV iraTtpa kul T-i)V ixt]Tipa. Lu. xiv. 
26. Eph. ii. 3. Col. ii. 13. If the nouns 
are of the same gender, hut express dif- 
ferent and independent objects, the article 
is repeated, Mk. ii. 16, oi ypajuimaTsl's 
Kai oi ^apiaaloL. Lu. i. 58. xii. 11. But 
if the nouns be of the same gender, and 
stand in near relation to each other, the 
article is more commonly not repeated ; 
e. gr. when they all are parts of one gene- 
ral idea, of a whole, &c. Mk. xv. 1, oi 
ap)(i£jO£r§ fJL&Td Tuyv irpEcr^vTEpwv Kai 
ypafxixaTicov. Lu. xiv. 3, 21. Col. ii. 8, 
19. 1 Tim. iv. 7. 1 Pet. ii. 25 ; or where 
a noun is added for clearer explanation, 
Col. iii. 17, £UX- Q&io Kai YlaTpi. Eph. 
i. 3. 2 Pet. i. 11 ; or where with the first 
noun and its article there is connected a 
gen. or other adjunct, which refers also to 
the second, Phil. i. 25, fts Tr]V ujixcov tt/jo- 

KOTTTJU Kai yapdv Tf}9 TTtCTTfOOS, 1 Th. ii. 

12. Acts i. 25. Eph. iii. 5 ; or where the 
nouns thus connected are adjectives, or 
other predicates referring to one subject. 
Acts iii. 14, v/jieL<s tov dyiov Kai diKaLov 
f]pvri<Taard&. ii. 20. John xxi. 24. Phil. iii. 

3. 1 Th. ii. 15. So with aA.Xa, John x. 1. 
7) with the subject or predicate of a sen- 
tence. Here a common rule is, that the 
subject takes the art. and the predicate 
omits it ; but this is true only in so far as 
the former is more frequently definite than 
the latter ; and the case may he inverted ; 
or both may be definite or indefinite : so 
that, strictly speaking, the subject and 
predicate, as such., neither take nor reject 
the article, but are governed in respect to 
it by the same principles as other nouns. 
The subject takes the article, but not the 
predicate, John i. 1, Qeo's rjv 6 Xoyos. iv. 
24, nrvEuiua 6 9£09. vi. 63, Td pij/uLaTa — 

irVEO/LLd ECTTL Kui ^607? EOTTLV. Rom. vi. 21. 

1 John iii. 15. iv, 8, 6 Beos dyaTrrj ecttlv. 
Both subject and predicate have the art. 
Matt. vi. 22, o Xvyyo^ tou aoo/uLaTO^ e(ttlv 
6 Qcl>QaX[x6^. John i. 4. vi. 63. 1 Cor. xv. 
56. 2 Cor. iii. 17. Phil. iii. 19. 1 John iii. 

4. The predicate has the art. where the 

O 



289 



o 

subject is \nthont it ; e. gr. where the sub- 
ject is a proper name, 1 John iv. 15. v. 1, 
6 ; or a pronoun, John vi. 51, eyco ^ifxi 6 
apTo^. Acts vii. 32. 2 Cor. iii. 2 : so 
where the predicate is a participle with the 
art. the subject being still a pronoun, eyw 
eifXL 6 fxapTvpwu, John viii. 18. But 
sometimes both suhject and predicate are 
without the art. Matt, xx. 16, ttoWol yap 
eIctl k\i]tol^ oXiyoL 8k skXektol. 8) with 
a noun in the nom. where it stands for tJie 
roe. Matt. xi. 26, yai, 6 IlaT?;©, oti. 
xx\ii. 29. Mk. ix. 25, et al. — ii. with 
TiQuns as accompanied hy adjuncts. Here 
the use of the art. depends on the definite- 
ness of the noun, either in itself, or as af- 
fected by the adjunct: the adjunct may 
stand either before the noun (i. e. between 
it and the article, if it have one), or after 
the noun; and then, if the noun have an 
art. this may be repeated or not before the 
adjunct, according to circumstances. 1) 
"vvith a substantive as adjunct, either in the 
gen. or in apposition : in gen. (and here 
each noun, both the leading and the 
governed, takes or omits the art. according 
to the general rules above,) e. gr. between 
the art. and noun, 1 Pet. iii. 20, ij tov 
Oeov fxaKpoQvfXLa. 2 Pet. iii. 2 ; more 
freq. the gen. is put last, Matt. iii. 2, 77 
(SaG-LXeia tcov oiipavoov. iii. 1. vi. 22. In 
apposition; and here the leading noun 
takes or omits the article as above in i. ; 
w^hile with the adjunct the article is either 
inserted or omitted, according as the latter 
is, or is not, intended to distinguish the 
leading noun from all others of the like 
kind or name. Rom. viii. 23, vlodeo-iav 
aTrzKCs.y6iJ.EV0L., ttiv airo\vTp(xi(TLV tov 
crwjiiaTo^ v/Moov. John xvi. 13, oTav eXOt] 
EKELVO's^ TO TLvEVfxa K.T.X. Matt. ii. 1, 3, 
'Hpcoorj? 6 /3acrt/V£U5. iii, 1. iv. 21. 2) 
with an adjective as adjunct ; prop, as ex- 
pressing an essential or intrinsic cpialitij of 
tlie subst. and forming ^vith it one idea; 
here if the subst. have no art. the adject, 
takes none, and is put either before or after 
tlie noun, Matt. xiv. 14, eI^e iroXvv oy- 
Xov. vii. 11, oo/uLaTa dyadct. But if the 
noun have the art. the adj. may stand 
either between the noun and its art., or 
after the noun, in which case the art. is 
repeated before the adj. Matt. vii. 13, Slo. 
T?7s (XTEvrj9 ttuXtis. xii. 35. Where the 
adj. is the predicate of a clause or sentence, 
it naturally stands without the article, as 
being indefinite ; its place is then usually 
before the subject, Matt. vii. 13, irXaTEla 
V 7ru/\.7/, Kai Evpvycopo? 7) 6005. Heb. v. 
11, TTEpl ov TToXvs vp.1v 6 Xoyo^ I but also 
after the subject, Matt. ix. 37. Ja. ii. 26. 
Where an adj. connected with a noun 
having the article expresses not an intrin- 
sic quality belonging to the noun, but a 
circumstance or co?idition p7'edicated of it, 



o 

the adj. then stands without the art. either 
after the noun, or before the noun and its 
art. and constitutes a species of indirect pre- 
dicate, John V. 36, Eyu) ok iyoo TrjV fxapTV- 
piav fxEi'^a} tov 'Icodvvov. 3) with a pj'on. 
as adjunct; p)erso7ial pronouns in the gen, 
used instead of possessives, follow the same 
general rule as the gen. of nouns. Pos- 
sessive pronouns follow the rule of adjec- 
tives. Matt. xvii. 20. Demonstrative pro- 
nouns are put between the art. and noun, 
2 Cor. xii. 3, tov tolovtov dvdpcoirov. 
Mk. ix. 37; or, more commonly, either 
before the art. and noun, or after the noun, 
as auTos, outo§, ekeTvo^., &c. which, being 
definite, usually require the art. along 
with the subst. which they qualify, Matt, 
iii. 4, auT05 6 'Iwdi/yijs. John v. 36, avTo. 
TO. 'ipya. Acts xvi. 18, avTy Trj copa. 
4) with a participle as adjunct J wh'ere the 
construction is nearly the same as with 
adjectives; 5) with 3, preposition and its 
case as adjunct, i. e. as a periphrasis for an 
adj. or the like : here if the leading noun be 
indefinite, the adjunct in general is so like- 
wise, and is put after the noun, 1 Tira. iv. 

3, £tS pLETdXrjxl/LV pLETCt EVyapLCTTLa'S. i. 

5, dydiri] ek Kadapd'S Kapoia?. Rom. xiv. 
17 ; but if the leading noun have the art. 
or be in itself definite, then the adjunct 
sometimes stands between it and the art., 
but more commonly after it, wdth the art. 
repeated, or not, according to circum- 
stances. Matt. XV, 1, OL diro 'Ispocr. ypap.- 
p.aTEL^. Lu. i. 70. Acts xxvii. 2. Rom. 
ix. 11. xi. 27 ; after the noun, with art. 
repeated, Matt. vi. 6, tw Tlarpt aov tw 

EV TCp KpVTTTCO. vll. 3. Mk. Iv. 31. Johu 

xii. 21. Acts iv. 2. xxvii. 5. 6) with an 
adverb as adjunct, i. e. as placed between 
the art. and subst. and thus forming a 
periphrasis for an adj. Acts xiii. 42, to 
juETa^v crd^jSaTov. Rom. vii. 22, KaTa 
TOV Ecru) dvdpcoTTOv. 2 Pet. i. 9. — II. with 
ADJECTIVES : 1 ) as connected icith nouns, 
see above. 2) used as nouns.^ and then the 
article is employed, or not, precisely as 
with nouns. Neut. adjectives with the 
art. are often put as abstract nouns ; sing. 
Rom. i. 19, TO yvwcTov tov Gsou. ii. 4, 
TO ypriGTov T. G. Yin. 3. 1 Cor. i. 25. 
2 Cor. iv. 17; as collect. Heb. vii. 7. — 
III. with PRONOUNS : 1) pron. possessive., 
as connected with nouns, see above, I. ii, 
3. As standing for nouns, these take or 
omit the art. like nouns, 2) with demon- 
stratives., 6 T0L0VT09, either as a generic 
idea, eve^y or cdl such, as a class, Matt, 
xix. 14. — lY. with participles: 1) as 
connected with nouns, see above, I. ii. 4. 
2) absol. in tlte place of nouns, and then 
the use of the article corresponds to the 
usage with nouns. — V. before preposi- 
tions ivith their cases, which then form a 
periphrasis for subst. or adj. 1) gener. of 



290 



OTA 



291 



O AO 



jjersons, ol cctto Tfj-s 'iTaXms, ' those from i 
Italy; the Italitins, Heb. xiii. 24. Phil. iv. : 
2'2, OL EK ttJs KaLa-apo^ oiKia^, Rom. iv. 
14, OL EK vofiov, 'they of the law.' ii. 8, ' 
OL ipiOfci'as, ' the contentious.' Mk. iii. ] 
21, OL Trap' auTov. Lu. xxii. 49. 2) neut. t 
TO, T«, Enh. i. 10, TO. iv toI? ovpai/uU < 
Kni TO. iiTL TT/s 7^9, ' the things celestial I 
and terrestrial.' Lu. xxiv. 35, n-a iv ti; 
o^w, ' the events in the way.' — VI. before ^ 
ADVERBS, which then usually stand in | 
place of a subst. or adjective ; as subst. 
Phil. iii. 14, to. ottiVw kirLXavdavo/xevo's. 
— VII. the NEUTER of the article is pi-e- ' 
^fio'ed : 1) absol. to the genitive of a noun, ■ 
'and thus expresses the abstract idea of 
something having relation or reference^ to ^ 
that noun, as pertaining to it or derived ' 
from it, as done by or to it, &c. ; sing, to. 
Matt. xxi. 21, TO t^? cukt;?, ' the thing 
of the fig-tree,' i. e. done to it. 1 Cor. x. 
24 ; more freq. in pi. Td, Matt. xxii. 21 . , 
2) the sing, to is prefixed both to single 
. ucords and to ichole clauses^ when they are 
to be taken as independent, or as them- 
selves constituting an object; with single 
ivords, Gal. iv. 25, to "Ayap, i. e. ' the 
name Agar,' as here used, signifies, &c. 2 
Cor. i. 17. 3) the singular to is prefixed 
to the injin. when taken as a noun, which , 
is then employed in all the constructions 
that occur with substantives ; nomin. with 

TO, Phil. i. 21, kfJLOL TO Xpto-Tos, Kal 
TO aTTodavELV Kipoo<5. 1 Cor. vii. 26. 2 
Cor. viii. 11. Gal. iv. 18; genit. with tou. 
Acts XX. 3, iyivsTo yvwfx-i^ toG vtto- 
(TTpicpzLV. As referring to a whole sen- 
tence, and expressing purpose^ where some 
supply evEKa or the like : here it nearly 
resembles the Engl, infin. with to^ equiv. 
to in order to^ that, and so tou fit], in 
order not to^ that not^ lest^ &c. Matt. ii. 
13, fxiXKEL 'Hp. X,r]TElv TO iraL^Lov^ tov 
aTToXfccrat auTo. iii. 13. Dative with tw, 
as implying cause, 2 Cor. ii. 12 ; purpose, 
1 Thess. iii. 3. Accus. with to, as depend- 
ing on a verb, Lu. vii. 21, tu^XoT*? ttoX- 
XoL'S E'X^aplcraTO to ^Xettelv. 

'Oyoo-nKov^u^ (o/cTO),) eighty^ Lu. ii. 
37. 

"Oyooo5, tj, 01/, ordin. (o/cto),) eighth^ 
Lu. i. 59. 2 Pet. ii. 5, oydoov Nais i(^v- 
A.a^£, ' the eighth person,' i. e. ' one of 
eight.' Plato, p. 693. But the Class, more 
gener. add ai/To?, as Thuc. i. 46. 

"OyK'os, ou, 6, prop, mass^ tveigJit, mag- 
nitude, a tumour, sicelling, and fig. infla- 
tion, elation, pride. In N. T. ^ceight, bur- 
den, impediment, Heb. xii. 1, oyKov irav- 
Ttt dTrodEjULEvoL. Xcu. Vcu. viii. 8. 

"0^£, r'lOE, To'oe, demonstr. pron. (fr. 6, 
77, TO, as pron. and enclitic ce), this, that, 
gener. equal to ovto^, but stronger: 1) 
g-s referring to the person or thing last 



mentioned, Lu. x. 39, ttjoe i]u ddeXcj)!']. 
xvi. 25, and Class. 2)' as introducing 
what follows, the following. Acts xv. 23, 
ypdxf/avTE^ tcloe, Oi dir. k.t.X. xxi. 11. 
Rev. ii. 1. 3) instead of an adv. for here, 
there, i. e. Selktlku)^. Ja. iv. 13, iropev- 
crco/jLEda £i§ tiivSe t^v ttoXlv. Plut. 
Symp. i. 6, 1, tvvoe Ti]v rjjULtpau. 

'O^Euo), fut. Evcrco, (o^os,) to be on the 
ivay, to journey, travel, intrans. Lu. x. 33. 
Sept. and Class. 

'Oo??7£w, f. 770-w, (o^Tjyos,) prop, to 
lead the icay, to lead, guide any one, & gen. 
Matt. XV. 14, Tu^Xos 0£ TvcpXov kdv oci]- 
yrj. Rev. vii, 17, & Class.; fig. of teaching, 
John xvi. 13, 6di]yv(rEL vfxd^ e'cs Trdarav 
T?/i/ dXndELai/, 'all the truth, the whole 
truth.' Acts viii. 31. Sept. Ps. xxv. 5. 
Wisd. ix. 11. 

'Oojjyos, ou, 6, (ooo?, nyEOixai,) prop. 
a guide, leader. Acts i. 16, and Class. ; fig. 
of a teacher, Matt. xv. 14. xxiii. 16. Rom, 
ii. 19. Wisd, vii. 15. 

^OoOL'KOpio), f. tJco), (oOOtTTOyOOS, fr. 

hod's, Tcopo^,) to be on the icay, to journey, 
travel, intrans. Acts x. 9, and Class. 

^O^OLTTopia, a§, 77, (o^ot7rof)£aj,) a, 
journeying, travel, John iv. 6. 2 Cor. xi, 
26. 

'0^0 9, ov, 71, a ivay, L in respect to 
PLACE, a way, highway, road, street, 1) 
gener. Matt. ii. 12, dXXt]? odov dvEyua- 
prjarau. vii. 13, 14, al. Sept. and Class. ; 
of a street in a city, &c. xxii. 9, ettl tocs 
OLE^6dov9 Twv bouiv. ver. 10. Lu. xiv. 23, 
Sept. and Class. ; also Kara ti]v odov, 
along or on the ivay, x. 4. Acts viii. 36, 
and Class. 2) foil, by gen. of place to 
which a way leads, Heb. ix. 8, rj toov 
dyioiv odd's, ' the way, entrance into the 
sanctuary.' Gen. iii. 24, v 66o§ toD ^uXov 
T^§ X^coij's. Meton. for the whole region to 
or through which a way leads, Matt. x. 
5, eIs odov idvcov, 'into the way,' i, e. 
country, ' of the Gentiles.' iv. 15, ooov 
QaXd(Ta7}9, 'way of the sea,' i. e. the 
region around the sea of Galilee. 3) in 
the phrases EToifxaX^ELv, or KaTacTKEvdX^ELv 
Trjv odov, ' to prepare the way,' for a 
king; prop. Rev. xvi. 12; fig. Matt. iii. 3. 
xi. 10. So EvdvvELv Ti)v ooov, Johu i. 23. 
4) meton. of Jesus as the Way, i. e. the 
author and medium of access to God and 
eternal life, John xiv. 6. — II. in respect to 
ACTIO x\% ivay, 'a being on the way,' a going, 
journey, course, 1) gener. eU ttjv odov, 
' for the way, journey,' Lu. ix. 3. i^ odov, 
xi. 6. Ev Ty 6d(jp, ' in or by the w^ay, on 
the journey,' Acts ix. 17. kutu riiv odov, 
, ' by or on the way,' xxv. 3. Also 1 Thess. 
, iii. 11, KUTEvdvvaL tijv odov rifxwv. Acts 
) viii. 39, TTopEVEorOaL ttjv odov, ' to go on 
t one's way,' continue one's journey. Sept. 



O AO 



292 



OIK 



and Class. So Mk. ii. 23, vp^avTo oi 
/j.adf}TaL ahnrov odov nroiiiv tlWovte^ 
Tous <TTd')(^ua9^ ' his disciples began to go 
along, plucking the ears of grain,' where 
odov iroLtiv is a Hebraism, and corresponds 
to the Latin iter facere. 2) foil, by gen. 
of time, Lu. ii. 44, nfJiipoi^ odou, ' a day's 
journey.' Acts i. 12, G-a(3(3dTov 'ix^v 
66dv^ 'a sabbath-day's journey,' i. e. ac- 
cording to the Rabbinic limitation, 1000 
larger paces, equal to about 7^ furlongs. 
— III. FIG. zmz/, manner^ means : 1 ) wa2/ 
or method of proceeding, in order to do or 
effect any thing, 1 Cor. iv. 17, Tas o^ous 
jULOV Tas £1/ Xp. xii. 31. at odoi tov 0£oD, 
' the ways of God,' his mode of proceed- 
ing, administration, counsels^ Acts xiii. 10. 
Sept. and Class. 2) wai/ or means of ar- 
riving at or obtaining any thing, Lu. i. 79, 
o^os Eipmr}^^ i. e. ' the way to salvation.' 
Acts ii. 28, ohoifs Jwfjs. xvi. 17. 2 Pet. ii. 
21, TTju odou Tf}^ SiKaLoavvr]^. Matt. xxi. 
32, ^Xdev 'lcodvvr]£ kv odw ^LKaLoavvr]<s. 
However, the Christian religion is called 
' the way of righteousness,' ' peace,' &c. 
not only because it leads to righteousness, 
&c. but because it is a discipline of righte- 
ousness, and leads to justification, and con- 
sequently peace with God and salvation. 
Nay, at Rom. iii. 17, o^ov elpnvr}^ ovk 
'iyvuxrav, the sense of ' peace with God' 
may be added to that of ' peace with man ;' 
the other is predominant. See my note. 
3) foil, by gen. of pers. the way or ways of 
any one, i. e. his mode of life^ conduct^ 
actions^ Acts xiv. 16. Rom. iii. 16. 2 Pet. 
ii, 15. Jude 11. ^wt the way of God ^ or 
of the Lord, is also the way^ walk^ life^ 
which God approves and requires. Matt, 
xxii. 16. Acts xviii. 25. Heb. iii. 10. 
Hence absol. for the Christian way^ the 
Christian religion^ Acts ix. 2. xix. 9, al. 
So 2 Pet. ii. 2, rj o^os t»js dA.i]6£tas, ' the 
true religion.' 

'05oi/s, oyros, 6, a toothy Matt. v. 38. 

'O^ui/ao), f. 770-0), (o^ui/?],) to pain^ 
whether in body (as Galen ap. Steph. 
Thes.) or mind, trans, to grieve^ Soph. El. 
804, and elsewhere in Class. In N. T. 
only pass, or mid. to he pained^ distressed^ 
to sorrow^ Lu. ii. 48. xvi. 24, dSuvcofxaL 
iv Ty (pXoyl TavTYf. ver. 25, cv 6bv- 
udauL. Acts XX. 38, ddvvtojtxevoL. Sept. 
and Class, oft. 

'Odvvf}, ?7S, rii (perhaps from o^ous, 'a 
tooth,') lit. a gnawing paiti^ pain^ distress^ 
sorrow^ of body or mind, Rom. ix. 2. 1 
Tim. vi. 10. Sept. and Class. So jEschyl. 

Suppl. 550, 6difVaL£ TS K£VTpoSr]X^TOL9. 

'O d u p fid's, ou, 6, {odvpoiiiaL, to be- 
wail,) wailing, lamentation, mourning. 
Matt. ii. 18, Kkasj'dfxo's Kal oSvp/ixd^ tto- 
Xus. 2 Cor. vii. 7, ' heartfelt sorrow.' 

"O'^co, f. 770-0), or £0-0), to smell, yield 



odour, gener. a fragrant one, as Hom. Od, 
V. 60. Theocr. i. 149, ws KaXov ocrh&L, 
but sometimes the reverse. So in N. T. 
of a corpse, to stink, absol. John xi. 39. 
Sept. Arr. Epict. iv. 11. xv. 18. 

"OGfii/, relat. adv. whence, 1) oi place. 
Acts xiv. 26, o6fi/ r]<rav irapaoEdofxivoL 
TTj x^pLTL TOV 9., where see my note, 
xxviii. 13, et al. Sept. and Class. For 
EKEideu oTTov, thcncc whei^e. Matt. xxv. 
24, crvvdyiov bdev ou ^LEcrKopTTLGra^. 

ThuC. i. 89, ^LEKOfxiXfiVTO oQeV VTTE^- 

eOevto iralda^, &c. 2) of a source, means 
whereby, 1 John ii. 18, oOev jlvmctkoixev, 
& Class. 3) illative, as referring to a 
cause, ground, motive, wherefore, where- 
upon. Matt. xiv. 7, o0£// fXid' bpKov (jofjLo- 
Xoyria-Ev. Heb. ii. 17. iii. 1, et al. Judith 
viii. 20. Xen. Mem. i. 1, 2. 

'OQovij, ?7S, 77, prop, fne white linen, 
Hom. Od. vii. 107. In N. T. gener. linen 
cloth, e. gr. a sheet, Actsx. 11, (tkevo's o)9 
ddourjv ixEyaXr]v. xi. 5. Hom. II. xviii, 
595, Tcoud' al fXEV Xetttcl^ oQova^ ^X®''* 
OL dk Hdian. x. 6, 21, io-O^rds 

T£ Kai oQova^. Jos. Ant. v. 8, 6, oQova^ 
Kal OTToXd^, and oft. in Lucian. 

'OdouLov, ou, TO, (dimin. from odovrj, ) 
a smaller linen cloth, bandage; in N. T. 
only of bandages in which dead bodies 
were swathed for burial, Lu. xxiv. 12. 
John xix. 40. xx. 5, 6, 7 ; not in this sense 
in Sept. or Class. 

015 a, see in E'/^o), no. II. 

Ot/c£ 105, a, ov, adj. (ol/cos,) in Class. 
belonging to a house, or ' connected with a 
family,' by relationship, also by the ties of 
intimacy, so familiaris in Latin. In N. T, 
only plur. ol olkeIol tivos, those of one's 
house, one'^s family, 1 Tim. v. 8. Sept. and 
Class. Fig. for associates, kindred, e. gr. 
TOV Qeov, zr. TEKva TOV Qeov, Eph. ii. 
19, ' those who are of the family of God,' 
(comp. Eph. iii. 15, and see our Collect 
for Good Friday,) often called oIk:os tov 
0. and avfxiroX'LTaL tcov dyicov. ol oIk, Tfj9 
TTto-TEws, Gal. vi. 10, ' those connected in 
the faith,' brother Christians, o/moTTLcrTOL, 
as Theod. explains. So Strabo, p. 7, uses 
oiKELOL (^LXoa-ocpLa^, for 'philosophers,' 
and p. 13, oIkelol yEcoypacpias, for 'geo- 
graphers.' 

Oik:£T7]5, ou, o, (oI/co9, ) prop. ' any one 
belonging to a house,' or living in the 
same house, Ecclus. vi. 11. Hdot. viii. 106. 
but espec. and in N. T. a domestic, a 
servant, slave, Lu. xvi. 13, ov^Eh oIk. Sv- 
vaTai Sv(tI KvpLOL<s SovXevelv. Acts X. 7. 
Rom. xiv. 4. 1 Pet. ii. 18. Sept. and Class, 
oft. 

OIkeu), f. 77o-o>, (ol/co?,) to dwell. 1) 
in trans, with ev, to dwell in, fig. of the 
Holy Spirit abiding in Christians, Rom, 



OIK 



293 



OIK 



viii. 9, UveujUia Qeov oIkeI kv vfxiv. ver. 
11. 1 Cor. iii. lb\ Of sin, or a sinful 
propensity, abiding in men, Rom. vii. 17, 
7/ o'lKovaa kv kfxol afxapTia. ver. 18, 20. 
Sept. and Class. Foil, by fxETo. ^vith gen. 
to dwell with any one, and when spoken 
of man and wife, to live icith^ coka()it as 
man and \yife, 1 Cor. vii. 12, 13. So 
Sept. Prov. xxi. 19. The Class, use <tvv- 
OLKico. 2) trans, to inhabit, ] Tim. vi. 16, 
<^w5 oLKwv airpocTLTOv. (comp. Jer. xxv. 
20.) Sept. and Class., e. gr. Eur. Phcen. 
125, Aipvaia ^' OLKti vd/ixad^ and some- 
times in Plato. For 17 oLKovfxivi], ' the 
habitable world,' see in its order. 

OiKTj/xa, axos, to, (ol/cico,) prop, a 
dwelling, a hotise, but in Attic usage, and 
also in N. T., a prison, (lit. jDmo?z-liouse, ) 
Acts xii. 7, (piti's i\afx\l/&v kv too oiKJifxaTL. 
Thuc. iv. 48, and oft. in Attic writers. 

O Iktit}] p Lov, ou, TO, (oi/cijT7/p, fr. 
olKiu),) prop. 1) a dwelling, habitation, 
abode, Jude 6, airoXLtrovra^ to XBlov 
OLK^TripLov, 'their proper habitation,' — 
heaven, and, by impl. their proper sitit- 
ation, aspiring to a higher. 2) fig. of the 
future spiritual body as the abode of the 
soul, 2 Cor. V. 2. Jer. xxv. 80,- airo tov 
oiKi}Ti]pLOv Tou dyLov auTO's (sc. KuyOios), 
owarEL (pcovi)v avrov. 

OlKca, as, 77, (oT/cos,) a house, dwelling- 
place, habitatio7i, 1) prop, and gener. 
Matt. ii. 11, £/\6o'yT£§ £t§ ti/v olkluv. vii. 
24, sq. John xii. 3, al. Sept. and Class. 
Matt, v, 15, oi kv Tri oLKLa, those in the 
house,* i. e. the household. Of heaven, as 
the dwelling of God, John xiv, 2, kv Trj 
OLKia TOV IlaTpo's. Comp. Ps. xi. 4. Is. 
Ixiii. 15. Am. ix. 6. Artemid. ii. 68, 6 
ovpavo^ 6eu)v k<TTLV oIko£. Fig. of the 
body as the habitation of the soul, 2 Cor. 
V. 1. 2) meton. a household, family, those 
■who live together in a house, Matt. x. 13. 
xii. 25, OLKLU fXEpLordElcra kuO' aavTfj?. 
John iv. 53. 1 Cor. xvi. 15. Sept. Gen. 1. 
8. Dem. 1358, 13. Xen. Mem. ii. 7, 6. 
Spec, domestics, servants, attendants, Phil, 
iv. 22, ol kK Trjs Kaicrapo^ OLKLa^. Sept. 
Gen. xxiv. 2. Comp. Jos. Ant. xvii. 5, 8. 
3) meton. goods, property, i. e. ' one's 
house and ichat is in it,' Matt.'xxiii. 14, 
KaTsad'iETE Tas ot/ctas toov yj]p(x)V. So 
Heracl. de Incred. c. 8, KaTa(paye2v oi- 
Kiav. Hom. Od. ii. 237, KaTicouarL (3l- 
atcos oTkov 'Oducra-fjO's. iii. 318, kcrdiETai 
fioL oXko<5, and so ' domus' in Lat. 

Oi/cta/cos, r/, 6v, adj. [oiKLa,) belong- 
ing to tlie house, domestic, — oIkeZo^, in 
N. T. only plur. ol oiKLUKOL nrivo^, ' those 
of one's house,' i. e. household, family, 
Matt. X. 25, 36. Plut. Cic. 20. 

Ot/coo £ crTroTEw, f. rjo-o), (oi/coofiCTTro- 
T?]s,) prop, to be master of a house, and 
gener. to be head of a family, rule a house- 



hold, absol. 1 Tim. v. 14. Lucian, Astrol. 
20. Plut. Placit. Philos. v. 18. 

0 I /CO ^ E (TTT OTl] S, OV, 6, (oIkOS, 0£0"7rO- 

T7;s,) a head of a family, master of a 
house, (pater-familias,) sometimes simply 
master. Matt. x. 25, & oft. Pleonast. Lu. 
xxii. 11, oLKooEG'Tr. T?js oLKLa^. Jos. c* 
Apion. ii. 11. Plut. Qu. Rom. 20. 

OiKodofXEW, f. rjco), [oIko^o/jlo^,) 
prop, to build a house, and gener. to build, 
co7istruct, erect, trans. I. prop. e. gr. oi- 
Kiav, Lu. vi. 48. -n-vpyov, Matt. xxi. 33. 
vaov, Mk. xiv. 58 ; with dat. commodi, 
Lu. vii. 5, Ti]V GVvaycoyi]v auTos wkooo- 
fxr](Tiv v/uTv. Acts vii. 47, 49, Foil, by 
ETTL with gen. to build upon, Lu. iv. 29 ; 
with acc. Matt. vii. 24, 26. Sept. and 
Class. ; absol. Lu. xiv. 30. John ii. 20. 
Part, ol oLKodo/uouvTE<s, ' the builders,' 
Matt. xxi. 42. Mk. xii. 10. Lu. xx. 17. 
Acts iv. 11. 1 Pet. ii. 7; in these latter 
passages the term is applied to the Priests, 
Scribes, and Pharisees, who ought to have 
built up the Jewish Church in the true 
faith of a glorious but suffering Redeemer. 
Fig. of a system of instruction, doctrine, &c. 
Rom. XV. 20, £7r' dWorpLOV ^EfxiXiov 
OLKodofxct}. Gal. ii. 18, eI o KaTiXvcra, Tav- 
Ta ttclKlv oiKooofjiu), i. e. direct, or coun- 
tenance, its observance. — II. by impl. to 
rebuild, reneiv, i. e. a building decayed 
or destroyed, Matt, xxiii. 29, tous nrd(pov^ 
Tcov 7rpo(pijTwv. xxvi. 61, al. So Sept. 
Josh. vi. 26. Job xii. 14. Am. ix. 14. — 
III. METAPH. to build zip, in a spiritual 
sense, establish, confirm, 1) in a good 
sense, as said of the Christian Church and 
its members ; who are thus compared to a 
building, a temple of God, erected upon 
the one only foundation, Jesus Christ, 
1 Cor. iii. 9, 10, and ever built up pro- 
gressively and unceasingly more and more 
from the foundation ; whether externally, 

Matt. xvi. 18, ETTL TaVTT] Trj TTETpa OLKO- 

do/jLV(j(x} jULOv Tt)v EKK\'i](rLav. Acts ix. 31, 
oiK.odoixovfXEvaL Kai iropEvopiEvai, 1 Pet. 

ii, 5, a)§ XidoL ^. oiKoSo/uLELadE : or inter- 
nally, in a good sense, to build up in the 
faith, to edify, to cause to advance in the 
Divine life, 1 Cor. viii. 1, -rj ay dirt) olko- 
dofXET, (where see my note,) x. 23, ov 
irdvTO. OLKOoojULEl. xiv. 4, kavTov oiko- 
dofiEL. So Test. XII. Patr. p. 737, Kadapd^ 
vov^, kv Tots fxidcrfxacn Trj^ yf]^ avvEyo- 

fXEVO^, /UiClWoV OLKOOOfXEL auTos aUTOV, 

Kai ov fxiaivETaL. 1 Th. v. 11, olk. eI^ 
TOV Eva, i. e. ' build up and help each other 
forward' in your Christian course. 2) in a 
bad sense, oiKodo/jLEladaL, to be built up>, 
confirmed, or emboldened to think or to do 
any thing, 1 Cor. viii. 10, oiKocofx-naETaL 
Eh TO TO. EiocoXodvTa ka-diELV, 'embold- 
ened to the eating of idol-meats.' So Mai. 

iii. 15, dvoLKodouLOvvTai ttoiouvtes dvoua. 

O 3 



O 1 K 



294 



O I K 



Jos. Ant. xvi. 6, sts vovdEcriau n-f]v ek^l- 
vcDu avTov OLK. A Classical writer would 
have said sTrapOrjo-ETai ; for £7ratp£cr0at 
often means, to be, as we say, huoyed up to 
do any thing, excited^ induced^ as in Hdot. 
i. 87, 0£6§, £7rapa§ iyUg aToaTsuacrdaL. 
Plato, p. 416, C, £7r. KaKovpysLV, et al. 
^schin. C. Tim. 7ro\Xov<s d/uapTccvELU 
kirapEL. And so erigi in Latin, as Hor. 
Sat. ii. 8, 57, ' erigimur.' Sallust Jug. 25, 
' siios ad virtutem erexit.' 

0 i/co^o/xj;, r]<3^ (ol/cos, Sofxi],) a 
later word for oiKod6jULt](TL£ and oIkooo- 
/iiVH-cC') I- <^ huilding tip^ the act of build- 
ing walls and houses, also an edifice so 
huilt, a building. In N. T. only metaph. a 
huilding up in the fiiith, edification, ad- 
vancement in the Divine life, said of the 
Christian Church and its members, see in 
OlKodojuLEco III. Rom. xiv. 19, dnjoKuyfxzv 
— Ta TTjs oIko8oij.7]£. XV, 2, 7rpo5 oiKodo- 

fJiVlV. Eph. iv. 12, £tS OLK, TOV (TMfXaTO'S^ 

&c. ' for the building up, completing the 
building of the edifice of the Church of 
Christ,' et al. ssepe. II. a huilding, an 
edifice, =r olKooojuLi^/jia, Matt. xxiv. 1, tccs 
oiKodo/iia? TOV hood. Mk. xiii. 1, 2. Fig. 
1) of the Christian Church as the Temple 
of God, and sacred to Him, Eph. ii. 21, 
Ev CO irdcra tj oiKodojiiri — au^sL &h vacv 
dyuov kv Kupto), w'here there is a meta- 
phor taken from vegetahle, to denote csdi- 
ficicd, increase, in a spiritual sense. 2) of 
man, as the object of God's purposes in 
the Gospel, to build him up, and give him 
an inheritance among the saints, (see Acts 
XX. 32,) 1 Cor. iii. 9, Q&ov yeuopyLov, 
Baou OLKodofxi] £crT£, q. d. ' Ye are that 
which has been cultivated (and made 
fruitful) by God that which has been 
huilt up to the faith by Him. 3) said of 
the future spiritual body as the abode of 
the soul, 2 Cor. v. 1, ot/co^o/LtijV i/c Q&ov 

OlKoSofxia^ as, (oI/co^o/xeoj,) prop. 
a huilding up, the act of building ; in N. T. 
fiof. edification, spiritual improvement, 1 
Tim. i. 4, in text. rec. Others OLKo^ofxi] 
or OLKOVOjxla, 

OtKovofxiw, f. ?]'(76o, {oLKouofxo'S,^ prop. 
to he OLKouofxo's, or manager of a household, 
and gener. to he manager, steiuard, &c. 
absol. Lu. xvi. 2. Diod. Sic. xii, 15, to, 
XpriaaTa. Xen. Mem. iv. 5, 10, Toy 
eavTou oIkov. 

OIkovo jULLa, as, 77, {oiKovoniio},) in 
Class. m,anagement of a household, or of 
household affairs ; in N. T. 1 ) prop. i. e. 
stewayrdship, administration, the office of a 
manager or steward, Lu. xvi. 2, aTrooos 
\6yov T?7s oLKOvojXLa^ (tou. ver. 3, 4. Sept. 
Is. xxii. 19. Jos. c. Apion. ii. 18. Xen. 
(Ec. i. 1. Fig. of the apostolic office, 

1 Cor. ix. 17, OLKOVOIXLUV 'KS.TVLCrrEVlXaL, 



Col. i. 25, Kara. 'ti]v oiKovofxiav tov 
Qeov, where the sense is, if not verbally, 
yet really, the same as at Eph. iii. 2, Ty]v 
OLK. x^pfTOS, for Ttjs codeLcrt]^, though 
grammatically belonging to x^yotTos, yet 
does, in effect, stand for oiKovofxiav, by 
a license not uncommon in the Class., 
espec. Thucyd. 2) from the original sense 
of dojnestic managemerd (which implies 
orderly arrangement, disposition, and dis- 
tribution of every thing to its proper place) 
at length arose that of plan, method, '' con- 
silium institutum,' as found in Pol. i. 13, 
9. ii. 47, 10. iv. 65, 11 ; also system, v, 
40, 3, avTi] (pvaEw^ oiKovojULia. And 
such is nearly the sense at the obscure 
passage of Eph. i. 10, £i§ olKovofxiav tov 
7rXi]p. Tvov Kaipcov, where render, ' with 
a view to the plan of (respecting) the ful- 
ness of time,' meaning, the time of salva- 
tion. Though the term dispensation may 
be retained, if it be taken to mean a 
system of distribution of good and evil, 
natural and moral, in the Divine govern- 
ment, a system of principles and rites en- 
joined on man, such as the Mosaic dispen- 
sation, and the Gospel dispensation — the 
plan of salvation by Christ. The same 
sense is observable in 1 Tim. i. 4, oIkovo^ 
fxiav Qeov, (as found in the early Edd., 
and almost all the MSS., for the vulg. 
oLKobofjiLav,) where the full meaning in- 
tended is, ' which occasion questions or 
controversies, rather than produce [a know- 
ledge of] the dispensation of God [in the 
Gospel].' 

Olkov 6 jxo^, ov, 6, (oT/cos, ve/JL(x},) a 
house-manager, overseer, steivard ; 1 ) prop, 
one who had authority over the servants 
or slaves of a family, to assign their tasks 
and portions ; so Diod. Sic. x. 156, where 
an oIk. is mentioned over a household 
of 200 ; with which was also united the 
general management of domestic affairs 
and accounts. Such persons were usually 
slaves, Lu. xii. 42 ; so Eliezer, Gen. xv. 
2. xxiv. 2 ; and so Joseph, who is called the 
oiKoi/ojULo? of Potiphar, Gen, xxxix. 4. 
Plut. de Educ. 7. and Lucian, Tim. 14, ws 
KaTo.paTO'S oIket?]^, 77 oiKOVOfXO?, v 'TTUL- 
doTpLxj/. But free persons were some- 
times employed, Lu. xvi. 1, 3, 8, comp. 
ver. 3, 4. These oiKovS/uLOL had also some 
charge over the so7is of a family ; probably 
in respect to pecuniary matters, (and some- 
times others, see Gen, xxiv, 3,) thus dif- 
fering from the kirLTpoiroL, or tutors. 
Gal. iv. 2, 6 K\iipov6jULo^ — utto kirLTpS- 
irovs koTTi Koi oLKovojuiov?. 2) in a wider 
sense, ' one who administers a public 
charge or office, a steiuard, minister, agent., 
for others, gener. 1 Cor. iv. 2. So of the 
fiscal officer of a city or state, treasurer., 
qucBstor, Rom. xvi. 23, 6 oLKovop.o's tt^s 



OIK 



295 



OIK 



TToXfo)?. Diod. Sic. i. 62. Xen. Mem. iii. 
4, 7,11. lEsdr.iv.49. Jos. Ant. xi. G, 12. 
Fig. of the apostles, as shnvards^ ministers 
of the gospel, 1 Cor. iv. 1. Tit. i. 7; also 
others, private believers, ^vho had received 
any miraculous gift of the Spirit, (1 Pet. 
iv. 10, cos KoXol oiKovofxoL x«f-HTos Geou,) 
and consequently were bound to use the 
gift, and impart it, as the term suggests, to 
others. 

OI\'os, ou, o, a Jiouse^ divelling^ 1) 
gener. Matt. ix. 6, viraye eis t6v olkov 
<rov. Mk. iii. 20. Lu. i. 40, al. Sept. saepiss. 
and Class. So in phrases, ku olkw^ 'at 
home,' 1 Cor. xi. 34. kut oIkov^ kut' 
oiKous, ' from house to house,' Acts ii. 46, 
al. Said of various kinds of houses, edi- 
fices, as 6 o1ko9 xou jSacrtXea)?, or tov 
apxupiu)^^ i. e. a palace, Matt. xi. 8. Ln. 
xxii. 54. Sept. and Class. oT/cos kfXTropiov^ 
' house of traffic, bazaar,' John ii. 16. 
Spec. 6 oJko9 tou Gf ou, ' house of God,' 
where the presence of God was manifested, 
and where God was said to dwell, e. gr. 
tJie Tabernacle, Matt. xii. 4. Mk. ii. 26. 
Lu. vi. 4. So Sept. 1 Sam, i. 7, 24, al. 
the Temple at Jerusalem, Matt. xxi. 13. 
John ii. 16, 17, al. and Sept. Once for 
o va6<s alone, Lu. xi. 51 ; also ol/cos 
irpoaevxi]^-, id. Matt. xxi. 13. Mk. xi. 
17, al. Sept. By synecd. put for a room 
of a house, e. gr. the codnaculum, or large 
room for eating, Lu. xiv. 23 ; for the 
virsocoov^ or place of prayer. Acts ii. 2. 
X. 30". xi. 13. Jos. Ant. x. 11, 2. Xen. 
Conv. ii. 18. Fig. of persons, e. gr. Chris- 
tians, as the spiritual house or temple of 
God, 1 Pet. ii. 5, comp. in OiKodojuLEoo III. 
Of those in whom evil spirits divell, Matt, 
xii. 44.. 2) in a wider sense, dwelling- 
place, habitation, abode, as a city or coun- 
try. Matt, xxiii. 38, 6 oIkos vjULwv sprjjULo^ 
d(f)LeTaL. Lu. xiii. 35. Xen. H. G. iii. 2, 
10. 3) meton. a household, family, Lu. 
X. 5, iip-hv)] Tw oi/co) TouTO). Acts X. 2. 

xi. 14, (TV /cat -Tras 6 oT/cos crov, al. Sept. 
and Class. Including also the idea of 
household affairs, &c. Acts vii. 10. 1 Tim. 
iii, 4, 5, 12. Fig. oT/cos tov Geou, 'house- 
hold of God,' i. e. the Christian Church, 
Christians, 1 Tim. iii. 15, iv olkiv Oeov — ■ 

VTL9 kcTTLV kKKky]GLa GfioD X^(J^VT0<5. Hcb. 

iii. 6. X. 21. 1 Pet. iv. 17. So of the 
Jewish Church, Heb. iii. 2, 5. Sept. Num. 

xii. 7. 4) meton. family, lineage, pos- 
terity, descended from one head or ances- 
tor, Lu. i. 27, k^ OLKOV Aavto. ii. 4. Sept. 
Ex. vi. 14, al. and Class. By Hebraism 
extended to a whole people, nation, as 
descended from one ancestor, e. gr. oT/cos 
'lcrpar]\, ' house or people of Israel,' Matt, 
x. 6. o oT/cos 'Ia/ca)/3, id. Lu. i. 33. oolko^ 

Heb. viii. 8. So Sept. oft. 

Olkov fxivr], 77, (otK£W,) soil, yri. 



the inhabited earth, the world : I. prop, as 
inhabited by Greeks, and afterwards by 
Greeks and Romans ; hence 1) the Roman 
empire. Acts xvii. 6. xxiv. 5, toIs 
'\ovda'iOL£ Tots KUTa Ttjv oiKovfxkvriv. 
Jos. Ant. xii. 3, 1. Hdian. v. 2, 5. 2) of 
Palestiiie and the adjacent countries, Lu. 

ii. 1, cnroypaipEcrdaL iraaav Tr\v olkov- 
fxivr]v. xxi. 26. Acts xi. 28. Joseph. 
Ant. viii. 13, 4. — II. gener. in later 
usage, the habitable globe, the earth, the 
world, i. e. as known to the ancients. 1) 
prop. Matt. xxiv. 14, K:T7pux0^o'£T«t 
TOVTo TO evayyiXLOV kv 0A.77 olkov- 
fxivr]. Rom. X. 18. Heb. i. 6. Rev. xvi. 
14 : hyperbol. Lu. iv. 5, Tracas Tci? 
(Saa-LXsia^ t^s olkov fxivi]'S, — tov k6(t- 
jULov, Matt. iv. 8. Sept. Is. xxiii. 17. Ps. 
xix. 4. Jos. Ant. iv. 8, 2. Pol. i. 1, 5. 
Diod. Sic. i. 1. 2) meton. the ivorld, for 
the i)ihabitants of the earth, mankind, Acts 
xvii, 31, KpLvELv Tnv OLK. xix. 27. Rev. 

iii. 10. xii. 9. Sept. 3) fig. Heb. ii. 5, v oi- 
Kov/jLEUi] V /miXXovaa,— 6 aiuiv 6 fxkXXoiHf, 

O i Kov p OS, ov, 6, 77, adj. (0I/C09, 
ovpos, watchman,) prop, and in Class, 
'taking care of and guarding the house^ 
Artemid. ii. 11. Aristoph. Vesp. 964, 
Kvoiv oLKovpo's also one who keeps at 
home, lives a retired life, iEsch. Ag. 1608. 
In N. T. keeping the house, i. e. keeping 
at home, domestic; and by impl. care- 
takers, oLKovop.LKa\, said of females, Tit. 
ii. 5. And so Eur. Here. Fur. 45, Tpo- 
(pou tIkvoov, olkov pov, {housewife,^ and 
Hec. 1277. Philo de Exsecr. p. 932, 
yvvatKas — <T(jt)(f)povas, oiKovpovs, Kal 
(piXdvdpovs. Dio Cass. p. 391, yvvi} 
cruxppcov, OLKOvpos, oiKovofJLO's, 'waiBo- 

Tp6(p09. 

OiKTELpu), f. epu), {oTktos, pity,) later 
fut. oLKTELpridot), to pity, hojve compassion 
on, with acc. Rom. ix. 15, oLKT&LpricyM ov 

aV OLKTELpW. 

OiKTLp ads, ov, 6, {oiKTELpCO,) pity, 

compassion, i. e. the feeling, less strong 
than eXeo9, (which see,) Tittm. de Synon. 
N. T. p. 69, sq. Col. iii. 12, cnrXdyxva 

OLKTLpfJLOV, but text. reC. O-TtX. OLKTLpfXUiV. 

Elsewhere in N. T. only plur. suitably to 
the plur. Hebr. term to which this word 
corresponds, and intensively, Rom. xii. 1. 
2 Cor. i. 3. Phil. ii. 1. Heb. x. 28. 
Though the sing, is occasionally found in 
Sept. and Apocr. It is remarkable, that 
in perhaps the only instance in which the 
word occurs in the Class, it is in the 
plural form, Pind. Pyth. 164, KpEiaa-wv 
olKTLpfxwv (pdouos, ' it is better to be 
envied than pitied.' Theocr. Id. xv. 75, & 
lat. Class. 

OiKTLpfXMV, ovos, 6, V, adj. [olk- 
TEipu),) compassionate, merciful, Lu. vi. 
36. Ja. V. 11. Sept. 

04 



O I M 



296 



O A I 



Ol/uat, see OlofxaL, 

O ivoTT oTrj's^ ou, 6, (oTi/09, TTOXJ]?,) 
prop, a ivine-drinker^ one who drinks wine, 
'vini potor,' as Pliny says, but gener. in a 
bad sense, a wi?ie-hibbet\ as in N. T. Matt, 
xi. 19. Lii. vii. 34. Sept. Pro v. xxiii. 20. 
Pol. XX. 8, and so, in the epitaph on Ana- 
creon, preserved by Suidas, ^Trttcroi/ /moi 
Trapiwv' ELfXL yap oivoTroTr)^. 

OIi/0 9, ou, o, wine, I. prop, as oTi/os 
V£09, neiv ivine, must^ Matt. ix. 17. Mk. 
ii. 22, al. xv. 23, kcrjxvpvKrfxivov olvov. 
Ln. i. 15, olvov Koi a-LKEoa, & vii. 33. 
Sept. and Class, oft. Meton. for the vine 
and its fruit, Rev. vi. 6. & Sept. Joel i. 
10. — II. symbol, o oli/os tov ^vfxov tov 
Geoi;, icine of God's wratli, (see Gu/xos,) 
Hev. xiv. 10, al. Symbol, ch aJvo^ tov 
B'viuLov T7]<s TTopveia's av. ' wine of wrath of 
fornication,' i. e. a love-potion, philter, 
with which a harlot seduces to fornication 
(idolatry), and thus brings upon men the 
WTath of God, Rev. xiv. 8. xviii. 3. So 
ellipt. 6 olvo<s Ttj's TTopvELa^ avTrj^, Rev, 

xvii. 2. Comp. Jer. li. 7. 

Oivo<p\vyLa, a?, 77, {oivocpXv^, fr. 
oTi/o?, (pXvoo, to overflow,) ivine-drinking, 
drunkenness, 1 Pet. iv. 3, and Class, oft. 

Oio/jLaL, contr. dlfxai, to suppose, think, 
he of opinion, prop. foil, by infin. with acc. 
aor. John xxi. 25, ov^k avTo^s ol^xai tov 
Koa-jJLov ycopT^arai to. ypacpofixsva ^ifSXia, 
and Class. : with simpl. inf. when the sub- 
ject of both verbs is the same, Phil. i. 16, 
and Class. : with otl instead of inf. Ja. i. 
7: with inf. and acc. Hdian. iv. 15, 15. 
Xen. Cyr. i. 4, 10 : with inf. 2 Mace. vii. 
24. Xen. Mem. ii. 1, 15. 

OIos, a, ov, a correlative relat. pron. 
corresponding to ttoZos, toTos, &c. prop. 
of what kind or sort, what, such as, qualis. 
I. prop, in a dependent clause, with 
ToLovTo^, &c. corresponding, 1 Cor. xv. 48, 

oTo§ 6 yOLKO'S, TOL&VTOL Kul ol -yOLKOL. 

2 Cor. X. 11; with 6 auT05, Phil. i. 30 ; 
with TOLoxjTo^, &c. impl. Matt. xxiv. 21, 
d\L\ln<5 /JLEyaXt^, dia ov yiyovtv. Mk. ix. 
3, et al. — II. in an independent clause, 
when it has the nature of an exclamation, 
implying something great or unusual, what, 
what manner of, how great ! Lu. ix. 55, 
ovK. otdaTE o'lov irvEvp-aTO^ egte v/uleX^; 
1 Th. i. 5. 2 Tim. iii. 11, ult. Jos. Ant. 
X. 3, 2. Hdian. vii. 4, 2. — III. neut. ovy 
olov, adv. not so as, 7wt so, usually follow- 
ed by an antith. as aXXa,not so— but, Pol. 

xviii. 18, 11. ib. i. 20, 12. Hence Rom. 

ix. 6, OVX olov Sk, OTL iKTr&TTTCJOKEV 6 

Xoyos TOV O&ov, lit. 'it is not so that,' in 
full, 'but not so (i. e. would I reason) as 
that the promise of God is become void,' 
and then the antithesis follows indirectly 



in the general sense, and directly in dXX\ 
ver. 7. 

Olm, see ^spco. 

'Okveo), f. vera), {okvo's, slowness,) to 
be sloiv, tardy, to delay, in doing any 
thing ; intrans. witli inf. Acts ix. 38, fjJ} 
oKvrjcraL ElaEXdelv e(jo<s avTU)V. Sept. and 
Class, as Hom. II. v. 255. Hdot. vii. 20. 

'O Kvt] pd^, a, ov, adj. [okveu),) slow, 
tardy, 1 ) of persons, slothful. Matt, xxv, 
26, TTOv^pk SovXe Kal oKvripE. Rom. xii. 
11. Sept. and Class, as Prov. vi. 6, 9. 
Thuc. i. 142. 2) neut. of things, tedious, 
tiresome, Phil. iii. 1, to. uvto. ypd^Eiv — ■ 
Efjiol fxkv OVK 6KV7]p6v. Thcocr. Id. xxiv, 
35. 

'O KTai'i iJLEpo^, ov, 6, V, adj. (o/ctw, 
7]/uLEpa,) lasting eight days, lit. an eighth- 
day person or thing, Phil. iii. 5, TTEpLToimtj 
oKTarifXEpo's, 'as to circumcision an eighth- 
day man,' i. e. circumcised on the eighth 
day. Comp. Gregor. Naz. Orat. xxv. p. 

465. D, XptO-TO? dvLGTaTaL TpLVjULEpO'S, 

Aa^apos TETpavp-Epo^. 

'O/CTO), 01, al, Ta, indecl. card. num. 
eight, luw. ii. 21, et al. 

"0 \ £ 0p 0 s, ov, 6, {oXXvjULi,) destruction, 
ruin, death, 1 Cor. v. 5, £k oXEdpov Tf}9 
<rapK69. Sept. & Class. ; of divine punish- 
ment, 1 Thess. V. 3, al. 

'OXty oTTio-To?, ov, 6, t], adj. {oXiyov^ 
TTio-Tis,) of little faith, incredulous. Matt, 
vi. 30. viii. 26. xiv. 31, al. 

'OXtyos, r], ov, adj. little, prop. opp. to 
iroXv-s. I) of NUMBER, small, in N. To 
only pi. oXiyoL, at, a, few, Matt. vii. 14, 
oXiyoL OL EvpiaKovTE^ avTi'jv. XXV. 21. 
Lu. xii. 48, dapnoTETaL oXiyas, scil. TrXtj- 
ya§. Heb. xii. 10, Trpos oXtyas hfxipa^ : 
hence 1 Pet. v. 12, Sl oXiycov 'iypaxi/a, 
briefly. Thuc. iv. 95, ^i* oXiyov. 2) of 
MAGNITUDE, amount, little, small, in N. T, 
only sing. Lu.vii. 47, (5 ^£ oXiyov dcpiETai. 
Acts xii. 18, Tdpaxo<s ovk oXiyov. xv, 2. 
1 Tim. iv. 8, Trpos oXiyov uxpiXLjULO?, 
' profitable for little.' Ja. iii. 5 : hence 
Eph. iii, 3, ev oXiyw irpoEypaxlra, 'in 
brief,' briefly. 3) of time, little, short, 
brief Acts xiv. 28, xpovov ovk oXiyov. 
Ja. iv. 14, irpo^ oXiyov, scil. ypovov : so 
iv oXiyiti, Acts xxvi. 28. 4) neut. oXiyov, 
as adv. spoken of space, amount, time, &c. 
Mk. i. 19, TTpo^a^ oXiyov. vi. 31. Lu. vii. 
47, dyaira oXiyov. Rev. xvii. 10, oXiyov 
avTov Sel fxElvai. Sept. and Class. 

^OXiy 6\lrvyo'5, ov, 6, 77, adj. (oXtyo?, 
yj/vxrh) faint-hearted, 1 Thess. v. 14, 
TrapafxvdELcrdE tous oXtyoxj/., i. e. ' those 
in doubts and fears about their salvation.' 
The word is very rare in the Classical 
writers, and only found in Artemid. iii. 5. 
It occurs several times in Sept. but only 
in the sense ' low-spirited,' Is. liv. 6, 



O AI 



297 



OMI 



'humble-spirited,' ' contrite.'' In Is. xxxv. 
4, as here, ' say to them that are of a feeble 
(rather faint) heart, (ol oXiy. tt} Siavoia,) 
Be strong, fear not.' 

'OXiytopto), f. t)(rci), (oXtywpos, 6\l- 
yos, wpa, care,) to ccD-e little /or, make 
liglit of\ contemn^ with gen. Heb. xii. 5, 
yUTj 6\ty(hpEL Trai^ftas ILvpiov. Thuc. ii. 
62, and oft. in Class. 

'OXo0|O£1;T)|§, ou, (oXo0p£U6t),) « 
dest?'Ot/er, 1 Cor. x. 10, equiv. to o 
oXot^pfcuwf, ' the destroying angel.' See 
my note. 

'OXodpEVW^ f. Evarco, (oXfiOpos,) ^0 
destroy^ trans, only in particip. Heb. xi. 
28, b oXodpEvuiV Ta irpuiTOTOKa. Sept. 
Ex. xii. 23, and oft. elsewhere ; always a 
strong term, denoting utter destruction. 

'OXo/cauTWyUa, aT09, to, {bXoKav- 
Too;, Jos. Ant. i. 13, 1. Xen. Cyr. viii. 3, 
24, oXoKavTo?, from oXos and Kaico,) a 
Iiolocaiist, ivhole hurnt-offering^ prop, in 
which the whole victim was burned ; but 
gener. hurnt-offering^ Mk. xii. 33. Heb. x. 
6, 8. Sept. Ex.'xviii. 12, and oft. 

'OXo/cX^] p i a, a§, 77, {^oXokX'^ipo's^ 
ivholeness^ soundness of body. Acts iii. 16, 
eSoDKEv avTco TJ^u bX. TavTi]v. So Is. i. 

6, CCTTO TTobuiV k'c09 KECpaXtj^ OVK E(TTLV 

kv avTM bXcKXt^pia. So Diog. Laert. 
Zenon; we have joined bXoKXijpLai/, 
vyiELav^ EvaL(rdr]<TLav^ &c. And so Lucian, 
t. iii. p. 209, Ei> bXoKXvpu) tw coofxaTL. 

'OXo/cX7]po§, oi;, 6, 77, adj. (oXos, 
kXtjoo^^ sors, ) prop. ' cui tota sors inest, 
totum quod sorte obvenit;' but gener. 
' whole, entire in every part.' So Hdian. 
vi. 2, 6, JlEpcraL9 duavEcoaraadai Trdcrav 
bXoKXripov dpxw-) ' in its full integrity.' 
Thus the word is synonymous with oXo?, 
but a stronger term, sig-nifying 'whole, 
in the full integrity of its parts,' as in 
Aristot. Eth. iv. 1, ov iracnv bXaKX-t^pcs 
nrapayivETaL. So 1 Thess. v. 23, b\6- 
kX^pov v/JLcoi/ TO irvEvpa^ koI t] ^^x^'? 
Kai TO arwjuia^ 'your whole spirit, soul, 
and body,' i. e. your whole man. And as 
oXokXtjoo^ was used of sanity of body, as 
Lucian iii. 209. Arr. Epict. iii. 26, so it 
was transferred fig. to mental qualities, as 
in James i. 4, 'lua tite teXelol Kal bX. 
where, however, there may be an allusion 
to that bodily soundness required by the 
Mosaic law, in both the victims and the 
sacrificing priests, who were to be teXelol^ 
bXoKXripoL^ d/uLcopLOL. See Deut. xxvii. 6. 
Jos. Ant. iii. 12, 2. 

'OXoXuJw, f. ^o), (a word formed from 
the sound,) prop, to cry aloud to the gods, 
either in supplication or thanksgiving ; 
especially said of hymns of joy uttered 
by females on festival days, accompanied 
with shouts and cries, Horn. II. vi. 301. 



Od. iii. 450. ib. xxii. 408, 411. In later 
usage, gener. to cry aloiid^ Lat. uhdare 
e. gr. in joy, to shozit, Theocr. xvii. 64. 
Eur. Bacch. 678. In N. T. in complaint, 
to shriek., to hotel., absol. Ja. v. 1, kXuv- 
craTE oXoXvX^ovTE^. So Sept. Is. xiii. 6. 
XV. 3. xvi. 7. Diod. Sic. iii. 59. Dem. 
313, 20, 21. 

"OX 0 9, 7;, Of, adj. ichole, the ivhole, alL 
including every part ; 1 ) of space, extent, 
amount, &c. Matt. iv. 23, oXr\v t^v VaXi- 
Xaiav. V. 29, oXov to orcopa. Xvi. 26, tov 
Kocrpov oXov KEpb/ja-rj. xxi. 4, toOto ok 
oXov yiyovEv, al. Neut. oXov, the whole^ 

1. e. mass. Matt. xiii. 33. Lu. xiii. 21. dC 
bXov, throughout, in every part, John xix. 
23. Sept. and Class. 2) of time, Matt. 
XX. 6, bXt]v Ti-jv rjpipav. Lu. v. 5, Sl oXr?9 
T7'79 vvKTo?. Acts xi. 26, EviavTov bXov, 
al. Sept. and Class. 3) of an affection, 
emotion, condition. Matt. xxii. 37, iv bXrj 
Tij Kapbia crov. Lu. x. 27. Jos. Bell. i. 

2, 4, oXo9 Tou 7rdOou9 r\v. Xen. Mem. ii. 
6, 28. John ix. 34, kv dpapTLais cru kyEv- 
vridr\^ bXo's, where there is a blending of 
two phrases, oXos d/>iapTcoXo9 £19, and 
kyEvvrid))^ kv dpapTLaL<s. Ps. li. 5. John 
xiii. 10, Kadap6<s bXo<s. Xen. Hist. v. 3, 7, 
bXov dpdpTTipct. ^sch. Socr. iii. 11, oXov 
eXko9. Demosth. p. 1110, TrXdcrpa oXov 
77 dLadriK}]. 

'OXoTEXri?, £09 Oli9, 6, 77, adj. (oXo9, 

T£Xo9,) quite complete, perfect, ichole. 
1 Th. V. 23, dymcrat vpu^ bXoTEXEL^, 
i. e. u'holly, in every part ; see my note. 

'''OXuy6o9, ov, b, an itntimely, or ivin- 
ter jig, such as grows under the leaves and 
does not ripen at the proper season, but 
hangs upon the trees during winter. Rev. 
vi. 13. Sept. and Class. 

"OX 60 9, adv. (oXo9,) wholly, altogether, 
in every respect or sense, 1 Cor. vi. 7, 
0X009 ^Tn-rjpa vpZv eottlv. I would com- 
pare Xen. Hist. v. 3, 7, di'Tt7rdXot9 to 
^£t' op'y^9 7rpocr(j)EpE<TdaL oXov dpdp- 
Tr]pd ECTTL. Also every ivhere, gener. 
1 Cor. V. 1, oXco9 dKovETai kv vpiv k.t.X. 
Negat. ov or pr] oXto9, not at cdl, 1 Cor. 
XV. 29. Matt. V. 34, and Class. 

"Op (3 pes, ov, 6, a heavy shower, violent 
rain, with thunder and tempest, Lat. im- 
her, Lu. xii. 54. Sept. & Class. 

'O pEipopat, to long for, have strong 
affection for, with gen. equiv. to IpELpo- 
pat, for which it is substituted, 1 Th. ii. 
8, in later edit. ; but see my note. 

'0 plXkio, f. Tjcrco, (oaiXo9,) prop, to he in 
company with any one, have intercourse 
icith. Find. Pyth. vi. 53. Luc. Tim. 45. 
Xen. Conv, ii. 10. In N. T, to converse, 
to talk ivith, absol. Lu. xxiv. 1 5. Acts xx. 
1] ; foil, by dat. Acts xxiv. 26. Jos. Ant» 
X. 11, 7. Xen. Mem. i. 2, 15; by Trpos 



OM I 



298 



O M O 



a\X?;/\.ou§. Lit. xxiv. 14; with 7r/)o§, Xen. 
Mem. iv. 3, 2. 

'0/xi.X.ia, as, 77, (6^t/\.£w,) prop. & lit. 
a being togetlier^ companionship^ Xen. Mem. 
iii. 7, 5. In N. T. intercourse^ 1 Cor. xv. 
33, (pdsLpovcTLv ri^rj '^pi]aTa ojULiXiaL Ka- 
Kai, and so Class, as Diod. Sic. xvi. 54, 
Tals TTomjpaL? CLicpdaLps to. 

?;Orj Twi' avdpMTTcov. 

"O//IX05, 01/, 6, (6/UOS OiJLOV^ tXij, 

crowd,) prop, a crowding together^ hence a 
croivd^ m2dtitude^ Rev. xviii. 17, in text, 
rec. and Class, oft. 

'OjULLX^V'i ^s, 77, cloud, mist, vapour, 
2 Pet. ii. 17, bfXL^Xai vird XaLXairo's 
£Xavv6iuL£vaL,la.t. Edd. for text. ve<pi\aL. 
Sept. and lat. Class. 

"OfXfxa, aros, to, {oil/o/JLai, (Z/uLfJiaL,) 
prop. any thing seen, Soph. Electr. 

903. Usually ei/e, plur. Ta ofxixanra, the 
eyeSy Mk, viii. 23. Sept. and Class. 

"OfxvvfXL and 'Ofxyvon, f. ojULouiuLaL, aor. 
1. co/uLoara, to stvear, i. e. I. gener. and 
absol. to take or ?>i«A:e oaif^. Matt. xxvi. 
74, vp^aTO ofiuvELV. v. 34, fxi] d/uLoaaL 
oXcos. The person or thing by which one 
swears is variously construed ; accus. Toy 
ovpavov, Ja. v. 12. kuto. with gen. Heb. 
vi. 13. co/uLoa-e /caG' kavTov, ver. 16, and 
Class. ; once with 'lapocroXvjua, Matt, 
v. 35 ; by Hebr. with kv, v. 34, eu tw ou- 
pavco, iv T77 777, oft. and Sept. — II. spec. 
= to declare with an oath, foil, by the 
words of the oath, Heb. iii. 11, co^o<ja 
kv TT] opyfj jULOV, e'l Ei(T£\.EuaovTaL, vii. 
21 ; by inf. iii. 18, and Class. Hence to 
p7'omise zcith an oath, foil, by dat. and on, 
Mk. vi. 23 ; with op/cw, foil, by dat. and 
infin. Acts ii. 30 ; by acc. and dat. xii. 17, 
T775 ETrayygXms ?js wfxoorEu 6 0£os tw 
'A^padjui : so with Trpo's Tiva, Lu. i. 73, 
opKov ov coiUiO(j& 7rpd<3 'AfSpadjUL. Horn. 
Od. xiv. 331. 

'0 jxoQv fxahov, adv. {o/j.odviuLO's, fr. 
ojULo^, dvfxd^,) tvith the same mi?id, with 
one accord, all togetJier, Acts i. 14, & oft. 

'O fxcLaX^co, f. dcro), (o/xoios,) to be like, 
intrans. Mk. xiv. 70, 77 XaXtd crov o/moid- 
$€i, not elsewhere found except in comp. 

'O fioLOTraQ})?, E09 0V9, 6, f], adj. [ofjiOL- 
09 & irdQo's,) Uke-qfected, i. e. 'of like 
nature, affections, condition hence gener. 
with dat. Acts xiv. 15, ?j/x£ts 6fioL07radEL<s 

kcTfXEV Vfxiv dvdpiOTTOL. Ja. V. 17, 6/ULOLO- 

'TTudij's nixLV. It is, however, too complex 
a term to be represented by any single 
expression. From the passages adduced 
by Wetstein, it plainly denotes gener. the 
being subject to all those accidents which 
attach to human nature, namely, to the 
passions and affections, the wants and 
weaknesses, the liability to disease and 
death, which 'flesh is heir to,' — forming the 



opposite to the notion of Deity. Wisd.vii. 3. 
Jos. de Mace. § 12. Theophr. H. PI. v. 8. 

"OyU-otos, a, ov, adj. (6/i6§,) like^ re- 
sembling, foil, by dat. 1) gener. in exter- 
nal form and appearance, John ix. 9, Rev. 
i. 13, b/jLOLov Yiw dvdpooTTov^ ver. 15, and 
oft. and Class. in kind or nature, Acts 
xvii. 29. Gal. v, 21, and Class. ; in con- 
duct, character. Matt. xi. 16 ; in condition, 
circumstances, xiii. 31, oft. and Class. 2) 
just like, equal, the same with ; in kind or 
nature, Jude 7, tov bfxoiov toutoi? Tpo- 
irov, Palseph. xxix. 3. Ecclus. xiii. 16 ; 
in conduct, character, once with gen. John 
viii. 55, Ecrofxai, ojxoio^ v/txwv, i//£U(rT7j§ : 
in authority, dignity, power, Matt. xxii. 
39, ^EVTEpa dk o/ULoia avTy. Rev. xiii. 1. 
Jos. viii. 14, 1. Ecclus. xliv. 19. 

'0/>ioioT77s, 7JT0S, r],{b 1X0 likeness, 
similitude, Heb. iv. 15 ; parity of nature, 

vii. 15, in Christ's human character. 

'0 /xo l6 CO, f. tocro), {bfxoLo^,) to make 
like, with acc. and dat. pass. aor. 1, ojfxoL- 
wdr]v, to be or become like, with dat. 1) 
gener. only pass. ; in external form. Acts 

xiv. 11, ol ^£0L O/XOLCodivTE^ dvd p 'SiTT O L<5 . 

Sept. and Class. ; in conduct, character, 
Matt. vi. 8. Ecclus. xiii. 1. Thuc. iii. 82; 
in condition, circumstances, Heb. ii, 17, 
Tois ddE\(po2£ ofxoLwdrjvai. Thuc. iv. 92. 
V. 103 ; once foil, by ws, Rom. ix. 29, ws 
T6/xoppa dv (hjuoLwdriixEv. 2) in compari- 
sons, to liken, compare, pass, to be likened, 
be like. Matt. vii. 24, ofxoLooo-oo avTov dv6pl 
(ppovL/xto, oft. So Sept. and Philostr. V. 
Soph. ii. 27, 3, Tw HoX. o/xoLwcru) avTov. 

^0 IJ.0L(x) fxa, aTos, to, (6/iOtoto,) prop, 
'something made like,"' a likeness. 1) 
form, shape, figure, Phil. ii. 7, kv ofxoLua- 
fxa-TL dvdpooTrov yEvofXEvo^, parall. with 
/xop(pi]. Rev. ix. 7. Sept. and Aristot. 
Ethic, viii. 10. 2) abstr. likeness, resem- 
blance, only in the sense of an adj. Rom. 

i. 23, kv 6/xoLu}ixaTL eiKovo^ (pdaprov dv- 
dpwTTov, equiv. to kv eIkovl bfxoia k.t.X. 
' an image like unto mortal man ;' v. 14, 
ETTL TO) ofxoKhfxaTL ttJs 7rapa(3d(TEco? 
'Ao£4/x, i. e. a transgression like that of 
Adam, vi. 5. viii. 3. 

'0/xoi6o§, adv. {bfxoLo^,) in like man- 
ner, likewise. Matt. xxii. 26, oixoiw's kul 6 
dEVTspo^. 1 Cor. vii. 3. 6iulol(jo<s ttoieIi/, 
Lu. iii. 11, al. Sept. and Class. 

'O/xoiWfTts, £cos, 77, (o/xotoco,) prop, a 
likening, comjxirison; in N. T. likeness, 
resemblance, Ja. iii. 9. Sept. and Class. 

'0 jUoXoy £ o), f. 7?crw, (o/xoXoyo?, fr. 
o/xo?, ofxov, & Xfiyco,) prop, to speak or 
say the same with another, e. gr. to speak 
the same language, with dat. Hdot. i. 142. 

ii. 18, to say the same things, i. e. to assent, 
consent, agree ivith, foil, bv dat. Jos. Ant. 

viii. 6, 2. Hdot. i. 23, 171. Thuc. iv. 69. 



OMO 



299 



ONE 



Xen. Cyr. iii. 3, 19. Hence in N. T. I. 
to concede, admit, con/ess, with ace. e. gr. 
a charge, Acts xxiv. 14, o/xoXoyai tov- 
t6 (xol. So of sins, Ta<s d/mapT'ia^, 1 John 
i. 9. Ecclus. iv. 26. Hdian. i. 6, 8. Xen. 
An. i, 6, 7. Hence to co?i/ess pidMcly, ac- 
knowledge opeidy, pro/ess, e. gr. with acc. 
of cogn. noun, 1 Tim. vi. 12, oj fxo\6yi](Ta^ 
Ti]v K. bfxoXoyiav. AVith accus. gener. 
Acts xxiii. 8, ^apLcrdioi dk ojULoXoyova-t 
TO. afxcpoTEpa : with inf. Tit. i. 16, Qeou 
ofxoXoyovcrLv eidiuaL. Xen. Mem. li. 3, 9. 
With particip. for infin. 1 John iv. 2, irdv 
'TTVEV/j.a o o/xoXoyEi 'Iijcroui/ Xp. eu crapKi 
k\i)\vQ6Ta. ver. 3. 2 John 7 ; absol. but 
with particip. impl. John xii. 42. Rom. x. 
10. iEl. V. H. ii. 44. Foil, by otl instead 
of infin. Heb. xi. 13, 6iJ.o\oyn<jctvn-B^ otl 
^ivoL Kal TT, Ei<rii/. 1 John iv. 15. ^1. 
V. H. xii. 2. Note the construction o/xo- 
Xoyelv 'iv tlvl, to confess in any one'^s 
case, i.e. to profess or acknowledge him, 
(see in 'Eu no. HI. 3.) Matt. x. 32. Lu. 
xii. 8, where the sense is, * I will acknow- 
ledge him as my disciple.' By Hebr. with 
dat. of pers. to acknowledge in honour of 
any one, to give thanks, praise, Heb. xiii. 

15, ^eiKicou ofJLoXcyovvTCov rrcp ovo/uLaTt 
avTov. Sept. oft. — II. to accord with or 
to any one, to promise, with dat. and infin. 
Matt. xiv. 7, fJL&d' bpKov (hnioXoytiasv av- 

Sovvai. Jos. Ant. viii. 4, 3. Xen. An. 
vii. 4, 22, and oft. in Class. 

'O fxoKoy ta, as, 17, {o/JLoXoyew,) prop. 
asse?it, agreement, as oft. in Thuc. ; in N.T. 
confession, profession. 1 Tim. vi. 12, 13, 
Tr[V KaXr\v bfxoXoyiav, comp. in '0/xoXo- 
yio). In the sense of an adj. 2 Cor. ix. 
13, sTTi vTTOTayy T775 o/JLoXoyta^ vjuitov, 
'your professed subjection,' or obedient 
profession of the Gospel. Heb. x. 23, kut- 
i^iofXEv Ti}v ofJLoX. T77§ IXTTi'^os, i. e. 'the 
hope we have professed,' i. e. the Christian 
religion, and iii. 1, KaTavo-ncTaTE apX" 
lEpia T^s bfjioXoyia^ rjfjL. 'the High- Priest 
whom we profess or own as a Master,' i. e. 
the Messiah. Hence meton. profession 
for ' the thing professed,' i. e. the Christian 
religion, Heb. iv. 14, KpaToojULEv o/ulo- 
XoyLa^. So Philo de Somn. i. p. 654, 

16, 6 jULEU orj fxiya^ af))(t£p£us t7j<s ofxo- 
Xoy/as. 

'O fxoXoyov fjLEvo)?, adv. (part. pres. 
pass, of ofAoXoyiu),) hy consent of all, con- 
fessedly, without controversy, 1 Tim. iii. 
16, and Class. 

*0/uoT£xi^os, ov, 6, 77, adj. (6^6s, 
t^X^'^jO 9f same trade. Acts xviii. 3, 
and Class. 

'Ofj.ov, adv. (prop, genit. neut. of 6/uos,) 
at the same place or time, together, e. gr. 
of place, John xxi. 2, and Class. ; of time, 
John iv. 36. xx. 4. Sept. and Class. 

'O fxocppcov, ovcs, 6, 7], adj. (o/uo§ & 



cpphv,)ofthe same mind, like-miiided, 1 Pet. 
iii. 8, and Class, from Homer downwards. 

"O/xws, advers. part, (o/xos,) 'at the 
same time,' i. e. nevertheless, notwithstand- 
ing, yet, oft. in Class, as strengthened by 
jjLEVTOL, John xii. 42, o^ws fxivToi kul, as 
in Engl, yet nevertheless, but yet. Aristoph. 
Ran. 61. Vesp. 1345. Hdian. ii. 3.* Cebet. 
Tab. 33. On the connexion between the 
various senses of o/xws, see Mr. Tate on 
Soph. CEd. Tyr. 1326. In the usage of 
Paul, oix(jd<3 is put before a comparison 
with something inferior, out of which 
there then follows a conclusion a minori 
ad majiis, equiv. to yet even, 1 Cor. xiv. 7, 
oyutos TO. a^vxa cpwvrjv didovra k.t.X. 

i. e. ''yet even as to inanimate musical in- 
struments, you require them to give forth 
distinct sounds ; [how much more then,' 
&c.] Gal. iii. 15, '•yet even a man's cove- 
nant, duly confirmed, no one annulleth,' 
&c. 

"Ovap, TO, indecl. a dream ; in N. T. 
only KaT ovap, ' in a dream,' Matt. i. 20. 

ii. 12, 13, 19, 22. xxvii. 19, and oft. in 
lat. Class. 

'OvdpLOv, ov, TO, (dim. of ovo9,) a 
young ass, John xii. 14, coll. v. 15. Athen. 
xiii. p. 582. 

'Oygt^t^o), f. i(Tto, (oi/£t5o9,) prop, to 
defame, disparage, reproach, 1 ) gener. 
to rail at, revile, to assail with opprobrious 
words, in later usage with acc. of pers. 
Matt. v. 11, \xaKdpioi egte, otuv ovelol- 
crajoTLV iz/xas. xxvii. 44. Rom. xv. 3, and 
oft. Sept. absol. Horn. II. i. 211. vii. 95. 
2) spec, to reproach with any thing, ~ to 
upbraid, chide, e. gr. with acc. pers. and 

OTL, Matt. xi. 20, TOTE vp^aTo ovelolX^clv 
T-a§ TToXsi? K.T.X. and Class. ; with acc. 
of thing for which, Mk, xvi. 14, ttjv (lttl- 
(TTLav avTwv, and Class. Absol. to up- 
braid, scil. with benefits conferred, Ja. i. 
5, Slo6vto£ a7rXw9, Kal jui] 6velS'iX,ovto?, 
'does not upbraid them with benefits con- 
ferred.' So Menander, koXw^ 'Troiricra^, 
ov KaXu)^ (hvELOLora^. It not unfreq. occ, 
in Class. 

'Oi/£t5to-/x65, ov, 6, {ovEL^iX^co,) rc- 
proach, reviling, contumely, Rom. xv. 3. 
o'i dvEidLa-jULOL twv ovelSl'^ovtcvv (Te. 1 Tim. 

iii. 7. Heb. x. 33. xi. 26, tov ovelS. tov 
Xp. 'reproach like that of Christ.' xiii. 13. 
Sept. and Apocr. ; only found in late Gr. 
writers. 

"OvE L00£, £os ov£, TO, prop. famc, 
name, report, good or bad, e. gr. good 
fame, renown, Eurip. Phcen. 828, koX- 
Xlcttov ovELdo<s, and Bacch. 640. Usually 
and in N. T. fame, i. e. reproach, dis- 
grace, Lu. i. 25, dcpEXslv TO OVELOO'S fXOV^ 

i. e. for sterility, in allusion to Gen. xxx. 
23. 

0 6 



ONI 



300 



o ni 



'Oi/t/cos, r/, Of, adj. (oyos,) pertaining 
to an ass, Matt, xviii. 6 ; see fivXo^. 

'0 V tvri fx f. dv^crco, to he of use, to 
profit ; in N. T. only mid. ouLvafiaL, aor. 

2. opt. dvaLjxriv, to have profit ox joy, with 
gen. q/*or from any one, Philem. 20, vai, 
kyoD crov 6vaifxr]V» 

"Ovofxa, aTo$, to, « name, i. e. the 
proper name of a person, &c. I. prop, and 
gener. Matt. x. 2, tuw duoS. dirocrroXcou 
TO. dvo/uLaTOr ecTTL TavTa, L.u. i. 63. Rev. 
xiii. 1, ovofxa /3\a(7<^r]/xms, ' a blasphe- 
mous name.' The verb KaXeoo sometimes 
takes ovofjia with the name in apposition, 
Matt. i. 21, Ka\&(T€L<3 TO ovofxa avTov 
'l7](rovv, ver. 23, 25. Mk. iii. 16 ; also 
KoXsTv TLva Tw dvofiaTi tovtm, ' by this 
name,' Lu. i. 61. Further, ou to ovo/uLa, 
scii. ioTTL, Mk. xiv. 32. to ouo/ma avrov 
or auTj]9, scil. iyti/sTo, Lu. i. 5. Adv. 
KUT ovofxa, ' byname,' severally, John x. 

3. Meton. name is put for the person or 
persons bearing that name, Lu. vi. 22, g/c- 
(daXoxTL TO ovofxa vfiivv cos Trovrjpoi/. Acts 
i. 15, -^v o)(A.o§ oyo/xaTOjf. — II. implying 
autho7'ity, e. gr. ' to come or to do any 
thing in or by the name of any one,' i. e. 
using his name, as his envoy, representa- 
tive, by his authority, kv ovofxaTL tlvo<s. 
Matt. xxi. 9, o spxoi^^i^o? ku 6v. ILvpLov, 
John X. 25. Acts iii. 6. iv. 7. — III. as im- 
plying character, dignity. Matt. x. 41, 6 
c&\6}xs.vo<s t: po^YiT^v ei<s ovofxa Trpo^r}- 
Tou, ' in the character of a prophet,' as a 
prophet, xviii. 5. Hence 77iere name, as 
opp. to reality, Rev. iii. 1, ovojULa sx^'-^ ^'^'^ 

Kai vEKpo's &T. — IV. emphat. to ovo- 

lULU TOV OSOU, TOV Ku/^iOU, TOU XpLCTTOV, 

&c. the 7iame of God, of Christ, as a peri- 
phrasis for God himself, Christ himself, in 
all their being, attributes, relations, mani- 
festations; gener. Matt, xxviii. 19, /3a7rTt- 
^Oi/T£9 avTov£ £i§ TO ovofxa TOV IlaTpos 
Kai TOV Ylov Kai tov^ AyiovTlvev/iiaTO^. 
Spec. 1) of God, where his name is said 
to be hallowed, revealed, invoked, honour- 
ed, and the like, Matt. vi. 9, aytao-0?;Tw 
TO ovopiCi (TOV. Lu. i. 49, ayiov to ovofxa 
avTOv. John xii. 28. xvii. 11. Rom. ix. 
17; after kirLKaXeco, Acts ii. 21. xv. 14. 
Rom. X. 13 ; of praise, homage, xv. 9, tw 
ovofxaTL crov xlraXoo. Heb. vi. 10. 2) of 
Christ, as the Messiah, where his name is 
said to be honoured, revered, believed on, 
invoked, and the like. Acts xix. 17, kfie- 
yaXvvETo TO ovofxa tov JLvplov 'Irja-ov. 
Rom. i. 5. Phil. ii. 10. 2 Thess. i. 12. 
Where benefits are said to be received in 
or through the name of Christ, John xx. 

31, Iva TTLGrTZVOVTE^ 'C^V^ ^'X^?'''^ 

ouopLctTL avTov. Acts iv. 10, 30 ; where 
any thing is done in his name, i. e. ' in and 
through him,' through faith in him, Eph. 
V; 20. Especially the name of Christ 



stands for Christ as the head of the Gospel- 
dispensation, Christ and his cause. Acts viii, 
12, Evayyf.XCC^ofxzvo's t« — tou 6y. 'Ljcoi 
Xp. ix. 15. Matt, xviii. 20, arvvriyixkvoi 
€ts TO kpLov ouo/ma : so where evils and 
sufferings are endured, dia to ovopLa tov 
Xp. Matt. X. 22, pLicrov/uLsvoL ota to ovo- 
/ixd pLOv, i. e. ' on account of me and my 
cause,' as believing on me, John xv. 21. 
1 Pet. iv. 14 ; ev£K€v tov 6v. p.ov. Matt, 
xix. 29 ; virkp tov ovop.. Xp. Acts v. 41 ; 
or where one opposes and blasphemes to 
ovop.a TOV Xp. xxvi. 9. 3) of the Holy 
Spirit, Matt, xxviii. 19. 

'Oi/o/xa^oj, fut. d(Tiii,{ovopa^ to name^ 
call hy name, trans. 1 ) gener. and foil, 
by ovop.a, to name the name of any one, 
to call or pronounce his name ; with £7rt 
TLva, Acts xix. 13; also to call upon, in- 
vohe^ profess the name of any one, 2 Tim. 
ii. 19, 7ra§ 6 6vop.aX^(MV to ovop.a "K-vpiov. 
Pass, to be named, i. e. mentioned, heard 
of known, Rom. xv. 20, ottou covopidadi} 
Xp LOTTOS, i. e. ' where Christ is already 
known and professed ;' Eph. v. 3, pLtjSk 
duopLaX^iada) kv vpuv, ' let it not be so 
much as named among you.' 1 Cor. v. 4. 
2) in the sense of to call\ i. e. to give a 
name or appellation, with double acc. Lu. 
vi. 13, 14, dv Kai covopLacrs TliTpov. Pass. 
1 Cor. V. 11 ; foil, by e/c tlvo?, to he named 
from or after any one, Eph. iii. 15. 

"Ovo<s, ov, 6, V, an ass, male or female, 
Matt. xxi. 2, 5, 7. Sept. and Class. 

"OvTw^, adv. {cov,) really, truly, in 
very deed, Mk. xi. 32, oti oi/tws Trpo- 
(pUTn^ Vf' Gral. iii. 21 ; with the art. i? 
6vT(x)9, as adj. real, true, 1 Tim. v. 3, 5, 
16. Sept. and Class. 

"0 Jo§, £0? ovs, TO, (oJi/§,) prop, sharp- 
icine, vinegar, also gener. vinegar, sour 
loine, posca, a cheap thin Avine, which, 
mixed with water, constituted a common 
drink, espec. for the poorer classes and 
soldiers (Sept. & lat. Class.) ; mingled with 
myrrh or bitter herbs, it was given to per- 
sons about to be executed, in order to stu- 
pify them : so in N. T. gener. Matt, xxvii. 
30, 48, Xaj3(hv airoyyou irXricra^ te o^ous, 
Lu. xxiii. 36; where see my notes. 

'0^u5, sla, V, adj. sharp, Jceen, 1) prop. 
' having a sharp edge,' popLcpaia, opkiravov. 
Rev. i. 16. xiv. 14. Sept. and Class. 2) 
quick, sicift, since the idea of sharpness, or 
keenness, implies also eagerness, vehe- 
mence, and speed. Rom. iii. 15, ojfit? ol 
7ro'5£s avTvov. Sept. and Class. 

'Oirf], ^9, 77, an opening, hole, e. gr. a 
fissure in the earth, Heb. xi. 38; (see my 
note,) a fountain. Jam. iii. 11. Sept. & Class. 

''O TT t o- 0 £ I/, adv. (oTTts,) prop. from^ be- 
hind ; in N. T. only of place, behind, after ^ 
at the hack of any person or thing. 1) 



oni 



301 



0 n ^1 



nbsol. Mk. V. 27, s\6ou(Ta ev tio 6y\u) 
OTTLorQev, i. e. from behind Rev. iv. b'. v. 
1, (Sl^Xlov yeypafxixtvov ecraydau Kal oiri- 
crOff, ' a scroll written within ancl on the 
back,' and Class. 2) with gen. as prep. 
behind^ aftci\ Matt. xv. 23, KpaX^eL ottl- 
crOfi/ vfxvov. Lu.xxiii.26. Sept. and Class. 

'Ott icro), adv. (ottis,) behind^ back\ back- 
wards, both of place and time. I. as adv. 
in N. T. of place only, Lu. vii. 38, or-rdcra 
oiriaco. Matt. xxiv. 18. juLi) E7ri(XTpE\j/dTU) 
oTTicro), i. e. to his house. Sept. and Class. 
With the art. to. ottiVco, prop, thmc/s be- 
liiiid^ and (.U Tct otricrui^ backward^ bach ; 
so diripx- TO. Sttlo-u}, to go back^ fcdl 
hack, prop. John xviii. 6. fig. from a 
teacher, vi. 66 ; ISXettu) f Is to. 6-rr. Lu. ix. 
62. aTpEcfjo/jLaL £i§ TO. Sir. ' to turn back,' 
i. e. about, John xx. 14. fxi) sTria-Tpexlrd- 
Tu) ft5 TO. oTT. to vetum, 'turn back,' i. e. 
to one's house, Mk. xiii. 16, al. ; fig. Phil, 
iii. 14, TO. oTTLa-u) eTTLXavdavofXEvo's, i. e. 
former pursuits and acquirements. Sept. 
and Class. — 11. as prep. foil, by gen. 
spoken both of place and time. 1) of 
PLACE, behind, after; place where, Rev. 

i. 10, I'lKovcra ottlc-u) fxov <po}vi]v, beJiind 
me ; with verbs implying motion after any 
one, i. e. following as a disciple, partisan, 
or otherwise, ukoXovQei oirLcrix) fxov., Matt. 
X. 38. OEVTE oTTicrco jULOv, iv. 19. eXOeTv^ 
xvi. 24 dTTsXQETu, Mk. i. 20 ; so Lu. xix. 
14. Acts V. 37 ; fig. 1 Tim. v. 15. 2 Pet. 

ii. 10 ; also implpng motion behind any 
one, to his rear, in expressions of aversion, 
as vTrays ottlctu} [lov., ' Get thee behind 
me,' i. e. Away, avaunt thee, Mk. viii. 33. 
2) of TIME, after ; 6 oTrLaon fxov kp^ofXE- 
2/os, Matt. iii. 11. John i. 15. 

'OTT/Vt^w, fut. io-o), (oTT/Voi/,) tofur- 
nish out., prepare., equip., arm., and mid. to 
prepare one's self for a work, to arm one's 
^self take arms ; in N. T. only mid. to arm 
one's self fig. in a moral sense, with acc. 
1 Pet. iv. 1, vjULEL^ Ti]v aiiTiiv 'ivvoLav 
dTrXta-aadE. Soph. Electr. 991, 3'pacros 
oirXiX^EcrQaL. Jos. Ant. vi. 9, 4. 

"OttXoi/, ou, to, (fr. eVco, operor., to 
work, whence Lat. opus., ott-eXov., contr. 
to birXov., as in the cases of iriTrXov., dv- 
n-Xov, Sec. ) an instrument., implement., tool ; 
in N. T. only pi. Ta oTrXa, instruments., 
implements., 1) of war, iveapons., arms., 
armour.. John xviii. 3; fig. 2 Cor. x. 4, 
TO. yap birXa tt/s crTpaTELa's rifxuiv ou 
crapKLKu. Rom. xiii. 12, Ta birXa tov 
</)a)Tos. Comp. Eph. vi. 11. Hdot. vii. 
25. ix. 121. 2) metaph. instruments., with 
which any thing is eflrected or done, Rom. 
vi. 18, oirXa dSiKia^ and oirXa diKaLO- 
c-uvm., where see my note. 

'OttoZos, a, 01/, relat. pron., correlat. to 
TTotos, Tolos, zvhat^ i. e. of ichat kind or 
sort^ qualis, and with toiovto^^ equiv. to 



as. Acts xxvi. 29, tolovtov? oitolo^ Kayoi 
EifiL : simpl. 1 Cor. iii. 13, to ipyov 
birdlov ECTTi. Gal. ii. 6, and Class. 

'Ottote, compound relat. particle of 
time, (oT£,) ichen., at luhat time., (so our 
poetic, luhai time.,) with indie, of what ac- 
tually took place at a certain time, Lu. vi. 
3. cSc* Class. 

"Ottou, compound relat. adv. of place 
(ttou,) where., in ivhich or what place. 
1) prop, and after express mention of a 
place; foil, by indie. Matt. vi. 19, 20, eu 
oupauw., birou cute a-f]<s k.t.X. Mk. ix. 
44. John i. 28, al. ; with ekel added ple- 
onast. Rev. xii. 6, ottou £)(£t ekel tottov. 
ver. 14. Sept. and Class. ; by subjunct. of 
that which is indef. Mk. xiv. 14. With 
EKil emphatic in the corresponding clause. 

Matt, vi, 21, OTTOU ECTTLV 6 ^. U/UttH/, EKEL 

Eo-TaL Kal rj Kapbia vfx. al. Simply, and 
including the idea of a demonstrative, 
there where., Matt, xxv, 24, ^Ep'i\(jov ottov 
ovK EcnrEipa<5. Mk. v. 40. With ay, as 
OTTOU (Zf, ivheresoever., with subjunct. Mk. 
ix. 18, OTTOU dv avTov KaTaXd^ri : birov 
sdv, id. Matt. xxiv. 28. 2) fig. in a wider 
sense, including also time, manner, cir- 
cumstances, &c. Col. iii. 11, OTTO?; ovk 
EVL "EA.X?ji/, 2 Pet. ii. 11. Simply, there 
ivhere., Heb. ix. 16. x, 18; so in reason- 
ing, whereas., equiv. to since., 1 Cor. iii. 3, 

OTTOU yap EV vfxlv X^TjXo'S , OU)^i aapKLKOL 

EG-TE ; 3) by attract, after verbs of mo- 
tion, instead of ichither ; foil, by indie, 
John viii. 21, 22, birov kyob virdyw. xiv. 
4 ; so OTTOV dv with subjunct. Lu. ix. 57. 

'OiTTav (X), & "Ottto/xc: i, see 'Opdco. 

'OTTTacta, a§, 17, (oTTTa^o),) a sight, 
appearance, espec. a vision, apparition, 
Lu. i. 22. xxiv. 23, oTTTa^TLav dyyiXuiv 
EwpaKEvai. 2 Cor. xii. 1. Sept. & lat. Class. 

'Ottto?, 7], ou, adj. (etto),) roasted, 
broiled, cooked, by fire, Lu. xxiv. 42, ixOuos 
oTTTov /xEpos. Sept. aud Class. 

'OTTujpa, a§, V, prop, late summer ; or, 
generally, the season in which fruits ripen, 
autumn ; hence in N. T. meton. and col- 
lect. /rz^Y^, Rev. xviii, 14, 77 oTrcopa T779 
ETTLdvjUiLa? T77§ li/u^^s (Tou, i. 6. 'tlic fruits 
in wiiich thou hast delighted.' Sept. Jer. 
xl. 10, 12, and oft. in Class. 

"Ottojs, prop, a relative adv. of manner, 
m whcd manner, hoio ; it passes over also 
into a conjunct, in the manner that, so that, 
&c. I. as a RELAT. ADV. in ivhat man- 
ner, hoiv ; once in N. T. foil, by indie, 
aor. in the narration of an actual event, 
Lu. xxiv. 19, 20, Ta TTspi 'Irjcrou — ottcos 
T£ TTapibooKav avTov oi dp')(^iEpET<s. — XL 
as a CONJUNCTION, prop, in such manner 
that, and then gener. so that, that, in the va- 
rious senses of 'Lva, hoi\\ final, as marking 
end or purpose, to the end that, in order 
that, and eventual, as marking the event or 



0 P A 



302 



OP A 



result of an action, so that it was or is so 
and so. In the N. T. ottcos is found only 
"with the subjunct. though in the Class, it 
is construed with other moods, like 'lua. 
I. FINAL, to the end that^ in order that^ and 
oTTws /it^, in order that ruot^ lest^ with sub- 
junct. 1) simply, i. e. without av. Pre- 
ceded by the pres. or an aor. of any mood 
except the indie. ; and then the subjunct. 
marks what it is supposed will really take 
place ; pres. Matt. vi. 2, a/o-TTEp ol vtto- 
KpLTOL 'TTOLOvcrLV^ oTTws do^aaOcocrLV. 1 Pet. 
ii. 9 ; aor. Mk. v. 23, ti/a ETrtOjys avTy 
Tas x^^P^^-> o'TTOJS a-oodrj. John xi. 57. 
oTTco? juLrj^ Acts XX. 16. By the imperat. 
aor. Matt. ii. 8, sTrayyELXaTE /ulol, ottws 

KCCyO} E\6(hl> K.T.X. vi. 4. O7rt09 /XI/, 

vi. 18. By a past tense. Matt. xxvi. 59, 
eCjitovv xlfEvoofJiapTvpiav — , ottcos avi-dv 
^avaTwa-cocTL. Rom. ix. 17. 2) ottojs 
dv ; preceded by pres. Matt. vi. 5 ; by 
imper. Acts iii, 19, ottws du EXdooa-L Kai- 
poi K.T.X.; byfut. xv. 17.--II. eventual, 
so that^ so as that^ with subjunct. Pre- 
ceded h J pres. Matt. v. 45, /caXcos ttolelte 
— oTTws yiuricrdE k.t.X. ; with perf. as 
pres. Lu. xvi. 26. By aor. Matt. v. 16. 
By fut.. Matt, xxiii. 35, Slw^ete — ottcos 
gXSt;. By perf. Heb. ii. 9, (SXiTrofiEu 

'ItJCrOVl/ E(TTE(pavU}IULEVOV^ OTTCOS ^^a^iTi 

9£ou uTrep Trai/Tos yeucrj/Tat Oai/arou. — 
III. after verbs of asJcing^ entreating.^ ex- 
horting., also of deciding., commanding., 
which in themselves imply purpose, ottw? 
becomes equivalent to a demonstrative con- 
junction, like our that., simply pointing out 
or introducing that to which the preceding 
words refer, Matt. ix. 38, bEriQr\TE — o7rw9 
EK^dXy Epyd'ra's. Acts viii. 24. EptoTau)^ 
Lu. xi. 37. Acts xxiii. 20. Evxofxai^ Ja. 
V. 16. Trpoa-Evxop.aL.) Acts viii. 15, impl. 
Philem. 6. irapaKaXEco, Matt. viii. 34. 
(these verbs are also followed by lua or 
an infin.); after verbs of deciding., Matt, 
xii. 14, (tviul(3ovXlov s.Xa(3ov kut avTOv, 
OTTw? auTou dTToXiarcocnv. 

"Opa/xa, aros, to, (opaw,) prop, a 
thing seen, a sight., spectacle., gener. Acts 

vii, 31, 6 Ma)i;cr77§ iduiv edavfiacrE to 
opajua. Matt. xvii. 9. Sept. and Class. ; 
spec, of a supernatural appearance, a vision^ 
Acts ix. 10. oft. 

"Op acts, £609, rr, (opaw,) prop, the 
sight., or sense of seeing ; in N. T. appear- 
ance^ i.e. 1) prop, aspect., external form. 
Rev. iv. 3, b/jiOLO^ opdcTEL Xidcp tao-'Trt^t, 
i. e. in his appearance, Eccl. xi. 2. 2) 
equiv. to bpajuia, or oTTTaaia., a sight., 
vision., presented to the mind, Acts ii. 17. 
Rev. ix. 17. Sept. 

'OpaTos, tj, 6z/, adj. (op«w,) seen., visi- 
ble, Col. i. 16, rd opaTd Kal Ta dopara. 
Sept. and Class. 

'Opccw, (less freq. oTTTayw,) f. oxj/o- 



fxaL., a, 1. wi/x^a/xt]!/ ; a. 1. pass. uxpOrju; 
a. 2. eToou ; perf. ktopafca ; pluperf. kojpd- 
KELv ; to see., perceive with the eyes., discern., 
trans, implying not merely the act of see- 
ing, but also the actual perception of some 
object, and thus differing from (BXettco. 
I. PROP, with accus. of person or thing, 
Lu. xvi. 23, 6pa Toy ' A/3paa/x. i. 22, ott- 
n-aariav EuopaKEv. ix. 36. John vi. 2. Acts 
vii. 44. Matt, xxviii. 7, ekeI avTov ov//-£- 
o-0£. ver. 10. Lu. iii. 6. xiii. 28. John xi. 
40, oxlfEL Ti]v 66^av. So with acc. and 
partic. Heb. ii. 8, outtw opCo/jiEv auTw Ta 
Trai/Ta vTroTETayfxEva. Matt. xxiv. 30, 
oxl/ovTai Tov Yidu tou dvdp. kpySp-^vov. 
Also in various modified senses : 1) 
look upon., beliold., contemplate., John xix. 
37, oxj/ouTaL £19 bv E^EKEUTTiarav. 2) to 
see face to face, to see and converse with., 
i. e. to have personal intercourse with, 
John vi. 36. viii. 57. xvi. 16. 1 John iii. 
2 ; foil, by TO -TrpocrcoTroy Tti/09, ' to see 
one's face,' id. Col. ii, 1. Acts xx. 25. So 
to see God., fig. for to Jcnotv him., i. e. to 
know his character, &c. John xiv. 7, 9, al. 
See my not6 on John i. 18. In a wider 
sense, to see God means to be admitted to 
his presence and special favour.. Matt. v. 
8, o\l/ovTai Tov 9£oi/, Heb. xii. 14. Rev. 
xxii. 4. In the sense of to visit, oxI/ofxaL 
vfid?, John xvi. 22. Heb. xiii. 23. 3) to 
see take place, to witness, ttiv vfxipav 
TLvo^, Lu. xvii. 22. — II. fig. to- see^ i. e. 
to perceive with the mind, &c. 1) gener. 
to be aware of, observe, with acc. & part. 
Acts viii. 23, £i9 orvvdsarp-ou dSiKLa^ opto 
CTE ovTa : foil, by oti, Ja. ii. 24. 2) of 
things, to see and know, i. e. to come to 
know, to learn, John iii. 11, o kcupaKafxEv 
imapTvpovpEv. ver. 32. viii. 38; in the 
sense of to understand, Col. ii. 18, a jult} 
EiapaKEv EfjifBaTEvoov. Rom. xv. 21, parall. 
with avvLtifjLL. — III. by Hebr. to see, i. e. 
to experience, attain to, John iii. 36, ovk 
oxj/ETai X^uiYiv. — IV. absol. to see to it, take 
care, only in imperat. phrases, Heb. viii. 
5, bpa ydp, ^t}CTL, TTOLrjcrr]? Trai/Ta, 
strictly for bpa oTra)?. Elsewhere only as 
followed by /x?/, or an equivalent phrase, 
bpa fxi], opaTE /jLtj, take fteed lest, beivare ; 
with subjunct. Matt. viii. 4, bpa fj.rjdEvi 
eIttti's. 1 Thess. v. 15. Rev. xix. 10, bpa 
P-f], sc. TTouj^ : with imperat. Matt. ix. 30. 
xxiv. 6 ; fut. (TV bxj/EL, vpEl^ bxj/Eads, 
' look ye to it,' a milder form for the im- 
perat. Matt, xxvii. 4, 24. — V. pass. a. 1. 
u)(pBr]v, f. 1. ocpdiicro/xaL, pres. part, ott- 
Tav6p.Evo£, with dat. to be seen by any one, 
to appear to any one. 1 ) prop, and used - 
of things, foil, by iv of place. Rev. xi. 19, 
uxpOrj t] KLfScoTO^ — EV Tw vaw avTov. xii. 
1 ; with dat. of pers. Acts ii. 3, wtpdricrav 
auTol^ yXuxTcrat iharEL Trvpo?. xvi. 9. 
Spoken of persons, with dat. of pers. ; of 
Godj 6 Geos cocpdrj tw TraTpt vfA. Acts vii. 



opr 



303 



ope 



2; of Jesus after his resurrection, Lii.xxiv. 
34. 67rTav6iuLsvo<s, Acts i. 3, oft. ; or at his 
second coming, d<pdt]asTaL^ Heb. ix. 28; 
of angels, Lu. i. 11. Acts vii. 30; of per- 
sons dead, Matt. xvii. 3 : M'ith eu of man- 
ner, Lu. ix. 31, oi, 6<pdivTe<5 kv Bo'^r}. 2) 
as mid. to shoic one's self] to present one's 
self to or be/ore any one. Acts vii. 26, 
a><p6i] auToT? fxayofxtvoi^. 3) f. 1. pass. 
d(i)dvaojULai^ Acts xxvi. 16, /mapTvpa wv 

croL^ ' a witness of what thou hast seen and 
dost see, of those things [as to] which I 
shall hereafter or further reveal myself 
nuto thee.' See my note there, and comp. 
Is. Ix. 3. Sept. 

'Of)77/, 779, 7;, {opydoo^ o/) £70),) prop, 
the native character, disposition, temper 
of mind,' impulse ; lit. hent^ fr. opiyco, to 
stretch forward towards any thing, he 
prone to it, &c. Hence gener. and in N. T. 
passion^ i. e. any violent commotion of 
mind, indignation^ loratJi^ espec. including 
the desire of vengeance or punishment, and 
therein differing from 3'u/u.os. 1) prop, 
and gener. Mk. iii. 5, Tr&pi^Xiylfafxevo^ 
avT0V9 jULET opy?/?, i. e. indignantly ; see 
my note. Rom. xii. 19. Eph. iv. 31. Also 
for irascihleness^ fretfulness^ 1 Tim. ii. 8, 
X^opis 6pyri<s Kal dLaXoyLcriiov. Ja. i. 19, 
20. Said of God, as implying utter ahhor- 
rencQ of sin, and aversion to those who 
live in it, Rom. ix. 22. Heb. iii. 11 ; 
meton. icrath^ as including the idea of 
'punishment ; as the penalty of law, Rom. 
iv, 15, 6 vofxc^ 6pyi]v KaTspydX^eTai. xiii. 
4, 5 : also of the punitive ivrath of God, 
the divine judgments to be inflicted upon 
the wicked, diro Trj<3 /xsWoucrt]? dpyrj^^ 
Matt. iii. 7. Rom. i. 18. ii. 5. 1 Th. i. 10. 
So Lu. xxi. 23. John iii. 36. Rom. ii. 8. ix. 
22, (jKEVt] opyf]?. Eph. ii. 3, TE/cya <^uo"£t 
opy^s. V. 6. Rev. xvi. 19, to ttotjiplov 

TOV OLVOV TOO dvfXOV TT]? opyT}? avTov. 

'Opyi^w, f. i'o-w, (opyj*;,) to make 
angry, provoke. In N. T. only pass, or 
mid. 6pyiC,oiJiaL, a. 1. wpyiadrju, to be or 
become angry, provoked, &c. absol. Matt, 
xviii. 34. xxii. 7, et al. Eph. iv. 26, opyi- 
^£(r0£, KOL /uLi) dfxapTdvETE, ' if angry, 
suppress your anger so as not to sin ;' 
comp. Ps, iv. 5 : foil, by dat. 7ra§ 6 opyi- 
X^ofXEVo? Tco udi\(p(j3 avTov, Matt. v. 22 ; 
with kiri tlvl, Rev. xii. 17. Sept. & Class. 

' 0 p y t X o 9, 77 , 01;, adj . ( op y , ) irascible. 
Tit. i. 7. Sept. and Class. 

'Opyuta, d's, 77, [opiyuj,) a fathom, 
prop, the space equal to both arms extend- 
ed at full length. Acts xxvii. 28, bis. 

'0 p £ y w, f. ^0), to reach or stretch forth, 
as the hand or foot. In N. T. only mid. 
opiyofxai, to stretch oneself out, to reach 
after any thing, and hence fig. to long 
after, to desire; with gen. Heb. xi. 16, 



iraTpLdo? KpELTTovo9 optyovTaL. 1 Tim. 
iii. 1. And so in Class, as Apoll. Rhod. 
ii. 878, TOLD Se opi^uTo yi)doau- 

VJICTLU. By impl. to be given over to, 1 
Tim. vi. 10. 

'O p£ Lvo^, r/, 6u, adj. (opo5,) found on 
or pertaining to mountains, wild, moun- 
tainous, as 77 opsLvt], sc. y^uop^f '^moun- 
tainous country , Lu. i. 39, 65. Sept. & Class. 

"Opgjis, £609, 77, (optyojuai,) prop, a 
reaching after ; fig. longing ; and in a bad 
sense, lust, Rom. i. 27. Ecclus. xxiii. 6. 
Hdian. iii. 13, 14. Wisd. xiv. 2, op, iropL- 

'O pQoTTOOEco, f. 77crtt), (opOos & 7rou9,) 
prop, to walk straight; fig. wa?^ (live) 
uprightly, occ. only in Gal. ii. 14. 

'Op0o9, 7/, 6v, adj. (ojpOat, fr. opco, to 
raise,) erect; hence straight, right. In 
N. T. 1) prop, upright, erect. Acts xiv, 
10, dvdcTTi-idL 6pd6<5. 1 Esdr. ix. 46. 2) 
horizontally, straight and level, not crooked 
or uneven, fig. Heb. xii. 13, n-poxtas 
opQd^ iroL'na'aTE. 

'0 pdoTOjULEU), f. 7?(T60, (op0OTO/XO9, 

from 6pdd<s & te/jlvm,) to cut straight, to 
divide right, equiv. to dp6to9 TifxvEiv in 
Athen. vii. p. 303, E. Hence ooQoto- 
IxeIv bcdv, Lat. ' viam recte secare,' prop. 
to cut a straight way, i. e. to make oneself 
a right way, i. e. to go straight or right. 
In N. T. fig. to go the right way, proceed 
aright, 2 Tim. ii. 15, opdoToimovvTa tov 
\6yov T77§ dX7]0£ta9, ' rightly proceeding 
as to the word of truth ;' by impl. ' rightly 
(with all wisdom, truth, faithfulness, and 
diligence,) teaching the word of truth, the 
Gospel.' Such, at least, is the sense as- 
signed to the words by many eminent 
recent Commentators. Yet in the ellipsis 
as to thus supposed, there is a certain de- 
gree of harshness ; and perhaps the idea of 
0009 thus introduced has no place here. 
The metaphor is rather, I apprehend, from 
sto/ze-cz^^/zVz^, in which operation to act aright, 
it is necessary for the workman to cut 
straight ; whence, I suspect, the term in ques- 
tion was popularly transferred to any 'ipyov, 
and those who handled it aright were said 
opOoTo/xEti/ TO 'ipyov. Sometimes, too, 
the art, &c. that called forth the labour 
was subjoined in its place. Thus those 
who handled (i. e. taught) the law of 
Moses were denominated ol teixvovte^ 
TOV vojjLov. And here, instead of the fig. 
designation of the Gospel by its chief pro- 
perty, Ave might have had simply its appel- 
lative TO EvayyiXiov. 

'O pd piX^co, f. icrco, (op0po9,) prop, to 
rise early : hence to do any thing early in 
the morning, e. g. prasgn. Lu. xxi. 38, '7ra9 
6 Xad<s topQpiX^E irpo^ avTov kv Tto LEpw, 
' came early in the morning to him, to hear 
him.' Sept. and Apocr. but not Class. 



ope 



304 



OS 



'Op0/)iy69, 7?, Of, adj. (of)0po5,) early 
in the morning^ Rev. xxii. l6'. Sept. and 
later writers. 

"OpOpios, a, oi/, adj. (op0po?,) matu- 
tinus^ early in the morning^ as adv. Lu. 
xxiv. 22, yevo/uLsuaL opOpiaL ettI to fi2/)j- 
fjiiiov. Sept. and Class. 

"OpOpos, ou, o, (kindr. with opvvfjLL^ 
fJpGat, M€ (/a?67z, day-hreak^ prop, the time 
before and about day-break,) 1) prop. Lu. 
xxiv. 1, opdpov (Sadio's^ comp. Johnxx. 1. 
2) equiv. to ecos or r/cos, morniiig^ twilight^ 
daiLm^ John viii. 2, op6pou os TrdXii' 
TrapEyiv&TO £t§ to Upoi/. Acts v. 21. 

'OpOois, adv. (op06s,) prop, straightly^ 

i. e. erectly, Xen. Eq. vii. 5. In N. T. of 
manner, rightly, correctly, prop. Mk. ^ii. 
35, £/\d/\£i 6p6u)<3. Fig. in a moral sense, 
Lu. vii. 43, dpOojs 'iKpLva-s. x. 28. xx. 21. 
Sept. and Class. 

'Ooijo), f. i<ra), (opos,) bound, set a 
boundary, Sept. and Class. In. N. T. and 
usually, to marh out definitely, terminare, 
determinare, i. e. to determine, to appoint, 
to constitute, foil, by acc. of thing, Heb. iv. 
7, irakLv TLva opiX^EL rj/JLepau. Acts xvii. 
26. Part. perf. pass. (hpLcrfxho^, deter- 
mined, decreed, Lu. xxii. 22. Acts ii. 23. 
By acc. of pers. as appointed to an office or 
station, Acts xvii. 31, ku dvopl w [ov] 
ojptcre. Pass, with a noun of office, &c. in 
apposit. Acts X. 42. So Rom. i. 4, tou 
opLadsi/TO's Yiov Qsov k.tX. comp. Phil. 

ii. 8, sq. Eph. i. 20, sq. Others here ren- 
der declared, publicly set foiih, against the 
usus loquendi. With inf. Acts xi. 29, 
wpicrav (resolved) k'/cacTos — irip.'dfaL 

K.T.X. 

"OpLol/, OV, TO, (dim. of opes, in form 
only,) a boimd, border. In N. T. only 
plur. Tct opia, the borders. 1) prop, the 
borders of a land, the frontiers. Matt. iv. 
13. xix. 1, £i5 TCI opia T?7? 'lou^ai'a?. 
Sept. and Class. 2) meton. and by Hebr. 
for a space within certain boundaries, re- 
gion, district. iSIatt. ii. 16, ev 'Bi^OXesiul 
Kal ku TracTL toIs 6oioL<s avTrj's. viii. 34. 
XV. 22. 39. Sept. 

'Op/ct^ai, f. Law, [boKog,] to p2it to cm 
oath, to make swear, with acc. Sept. and 
Class. In N. T. to adjure, with dupl. acc. 
of person whom, and by whom, Mk. v, 7, 
opKiX^u) <je t6v Beov. Acts xix. 13. 1 Th. 
V. 27. Sept. 

*'Op/co9, ov, 6, an oath, Matt. xiv. 7, 
and oft. and Sept. ; meton. what is pro- 
mised with an oath, Matt. v. 33, utto- 

dcOCTEL'S TCO Kupi'w TOU? OpKOV^ GOV. 

'OpKCJOfJiocrLa, a§, v, {opKco/xoTEco, fr. 
op/co§, opLvv/jiL,) prop, the swearing of an 
oath, by impl. an oath, Heb. vii. 20. Sept. 
and Class. 

'0 pfxau), f. ridu), {opfxi),) prop, to MAKE 



to rush on, to impel, incite, trans. ; but 
gener. and in N. T. intrans. to rush on., 
move forwards impetuously, foil, by iiri 
Tiva, Acts vii. 57, u)pfxi]aav kir' avTov '. 
with £ts Tt, xix. 29, £i§ TO diuTpov, and 
so oft. in Class. 

'Op/uLt], f}?, ?7, {opvvjULL,) prop, ct move- 
me7it, a rushing on, onset, Acts xiv. 5. Sept. 
and Class, Fig. of the mind, impulse., 
purpose, ivill, Ja. iii. 4. Thuc. iv. 4. 

"O p jULii pLa, aTo<5, TO, (op/udto,) prop, aw 
impetuous movement, a rushing on ; hence, 
by impl. impetus, violence, as dat. of man- 
ner, Rev. xviii. 21, bpfxvp-ctTL ^\r]Qricr^- 
TaL, ' with violence.' 

"OpvEov, ov, TO, (opi/t9,) abird,fowl ; 
carnivorous. Rev. xviii. 2. xix. 17. 

"OpvL^, lOo^, 6, CL bird, foid, gener. 
in N. T. only of poultry, the hen, gallina, 
Matt, xxiii. 37. 

p o 0 £ c t a, a9, 77, ( opodETEco, fr. opo9, 
Ti'07jui,) prop, a setting bounds, meton. a 
bound, limit. Acts xvii. 26. 

"Op OS, £0§ OUS, TO, pi. TO. Opt], gCH. 

Tcov opiwv, a mountain, hill. Matt. v. 1, 
avi^-i] eIs to op., oft. ; so to opes to 
KaXovjULEvov kXaiwu. Proverb, to remove 
mountains is =i ' to accomplish great and 
difficult things,' 1 Cor. xiii. 2. Sept. and 
Class. 

'Opuccrco, f. ^oj, {opco, to raise,) to dig 
out, dig, with acc. Matt.xxi. 33, lopv^Ev kv 
avTco Xiivov: absol. xxv. 18. Sept. & Class. 

'Opcpavo^, 1], ou, adj. cogn. with 
6p(po9, orbus, bereaved of any thing or 
person ; prop, of children bereaved of 
parents, either with gen. or absol.; whence 
it becomes a subst., Ja. i. 27, 6p<pavov9 
Kal x^^P"^ • fi?* disciples without a 
master, John xiv. 18. 

'Opx£f*>-> fut. t]crot}, (kindr. with op- 
vvfiL,) to lift up), raise cdoft ; earlier and 
more usual mid. op^ko/uLai, f. r\crofjiaL, to 
lift up oneself vc^Q>vi one's feet, to dance, in- 
trans. Matt. xi. 17, ^vXy]aa}XEV vixiv, Kal 
ovK a)pxtjcra(T0£. xiv. 6. Sept. and Class. 

''O9, 77, o, gen. ov, r]§, ov, originally a 
demonstrative pron. this, that ; but in Attic 
and later usage mostly the postpositive 
art., or relative pron. icho, ivhich, what, 

thcd. I. as a DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN, 

this, thcd, only in distinctions and distri- 
bution, with fxiv — 0£ ; 09 fXEV—o<s ok, 
that one — this one, the one — the other, &c. 
less frequent in Attic than o fxkv — 6 ^£, 
but equally common with it in later writers 
and N. T., 2 Cor. ii. 16, 0I9 ^ev — 0I9 ol, 
to the one — to the other ; Matt. xxi. 35, ou 
fxEv EOEipau, ou ok dirEKTELvav, one — 
another : xiii. 8, o fxkv — o ok. xxv. 15, oft. 
— II. as the POSTPOSITIVE article, or 
relative pronoun, tvho, ivhich., what, thcd. 



OS 

The construction with the relative strictly 
implies two clauses ; in the first of which 
there should stand with the verb a noun 
(the antecedent), and in the second the 
corresponding relative, each in the case 
W'hich the verb of its own clause demands, 
the relative also agreeing with the ante- 
cedent in gender and number : but the 
form and power of the relative are much 
varied, both in construction and in signi- 
fication, as well as by its connexion witli 
otner particles. — i. in construction : 1 ) 
as to gender^ the relative agrees regularly 
with its antecedent, Matt. ii. 9, 6 d(TTi)p 
ov eISoi/. Lu. v. 3. John vi. 51 : so where 
it relates to a remoter antecedent, 1 Cor. 
i. 8, OS jSE^aLuxTEL u/xas, i. e. 6 Geos, ver. 
4, comp. ver. 9. But from this rule there 
are two departures in form : Where the 
relat. with the verb to be, &c. conforms 
in gender to the foil, noun, Gal. iii. 16, tw 
GriripixaTL crov, b's ecttl XpiCTo's. Eph. i. 

,Ti]v fxa^aipavTov Yiv&vix. o kaTL 
p^lfJiOL 9. Where, by the constructio ad sen- 
sum, the relat. takes the gender implied in 
the antecedent, and not that of its external 
form, Rom. ix. 23, sq. aKsvri IXeou?, d 
'7rpo'>]TOLfxa<TEV — oi)§ Koi EKoXecrev. Gal. 
iv. 19. Phil. ii. 15. 2 Pet. iii. 16, Iv ird- 
(raL9 Tats eTTiCTToXaTs {—ypapifxacrL), kv 
ols K.T.X, 2) as to number, the relat. 
agrees regularly with its antecedent ; and 
the departures from this rule are rare, 
e. gr. relat. pi. after an anteced. sing, col- 
lect. Phil. ii. 15, Ev /uLEcrco yEVEd<s <TKo\id<s, 
iv ols (paivEo-dE, here the construction is 
ad sensum both in number and gender : so 
where the anteced. includes in any way 
the idea of plurality, Acts xv. 36, KaTo. 
'Trdarav ttoXlv, ev als k.tX. 3) as to 
case; here the general rule is, that the 
relat. stands in that case which the verb 
of its own clause demands ; as subject, 
John i. 9, TO <p(h<5 TO aX. o (pioTiX^EL nrdv- 
Ta dvdp. ver. 30, dvi)p os 'ifxTrpocrdiv jmov 
ykyovEv. Matt. x. 26; as object, acc. ii. 
9, 6 d(XTr\p ov eldov : dat. Acts viii. 10, 
dvt)p <Z TrpoaElxov ttuvte^. But the de- 
partures from this rule are frequent, viz. 
(1) hy attraction, i. e. where the relative 
in respect to its own verb would stand in 
the accus., but the antecedent stands in 
the gen. or dat., and then the relat. is at- 
tracted by the antecedent into the same case 
with itself ; genit. John iv. 14, tou u^aTos 
ov kyio owcru). vii, 31, oft. ; dat. Lu. ii. 20, 
£7rt irdcrLv ols riKov(Tav. (2) by inverted 
attraction, i. e. where the antecedent is 
attracted by the relat. into the same case 
with itself, viz. Where the antecedent 
remains connected with its own clause, 
and before the relative. Matt. xxi. 42, 
Kidov ov dTTEdoKi/txacrav — , oDtos k.t.X. 
Lu. i. 73, opKov [for bpKov] ov cojULoaE. 
1 Cor. X. 16, Tov dpTov ov kXco/jlev, ou^l 



OS 

KOLVu)via — ; AVhere the antecedent itself is 
attracted over into the clause of the relat., 
and stands after it in the proper case of the 
relative, Mk.vi.l6, ov kyu) d'TrsKECpaXLca 
'Iu)dvvi]V, ouTos kaTLV for outos e<ttiv 
'Ia)a;^i/7/s bv iyw diTEKEcf). Lu. i. 4. Acts 
xxi. 16. (3) often the case of the relat. 
depends on a prep, with which the verb is 
construed ; gener. Matt. iii. 17, 6 ulos 
juov, kv to Evd6Ki](Ta. x. 11. xi. 10. Rom. 
X. 14. 1 Cor. viii. 6, tis Geos, 6 IlaT7)p, 
k^ ov Ta TrdvTa. (4) som.etimes the 
relat. is not dependent on the verb, but on 
some noun connected with the verb, and 
then the relat. is put in the genit. Matt, 
iii. 11, ov ovK eI/ull ii<.av6<s tu viroSt'iiuLarra 
(SaaTacrai. ver. 12, ov to tttvov. 4) as 
to positiuji ; here the relat. with its clause 
regularly follows the antecedent, as in 
most of the preceding examples : but, for 
sake of emphasis, the relat. clause may be 
put first, especially where a demonstr., as 
auTos, oDtos, &c. follows. Matt. xxvi. 48, 
ov dv (piXri<T(jo, avTo^ kaTL. John iii. 26, 
OS i/i/ pLE-rd crov, ovtos /SaTTTi^st. Heb. 
xiii. 11. — II. in signif. The relative, in 
strictness, serves simply to introduce si 
dependent clause, and mark its close rela - 
tion to the leading proposition, as Matt, 
ii. 9, 6 dcTTvip, ov eISov kv Ty dvaToXr},, 
•TrpoijyEV avTov<s : but in common use it 
was employed in a wider extent, both as a 
general connective particle, and also some- 
times as implying purpose, result, cause., 
or the like, which would properly be ex- 
pressed by a conjunction: for the sense 
what, that ivhich, he who, see i. 4. 1 ) as a 
general connective, John iv. 46. xi. 2, riy 
Map/a 7] dXELxlraaa tov Kuptov fxvpcn, 
rj<s 6 dSEXcpa^ A. rjadivEL. Where it is 
equiv. to a demonstrative, and this, these ; 
and he, they, &c. Lu. xii. 24, ols ovk egtl 
TupLELov, ' and they have no storehouse,' 
Acts vi. 6, oi}s EcrTi]<Tav, and these, &c. 

vii. 45. xi. 30. k(f)' to, Phil. iii. 12. kv 

ols — kv TOUTOfS Lu. xii. 1. £iS o 

— £is TouTo Col. i. 29 : this is rare 
in early Greek writers, but more fre- 
quent in later ones. Also in the for- 
mula bv Tpoirov. 2) as implying pur- 
pose,TzzLva, Matt. xi. 10, kyoo dTroa-TEXXto 
TOV dyyEXov pov, os KaTaarKEvdcreL Ttjv 
oSov (TOV, 3) as marking result, event, 

&C. ~ locrTE, Lu. V. 21, TtS koTTLV OUTOS, 

OS XuXel (3Xaa(prjp.ia<5 ; vii. 49, os /cat 
dpLapTLa<5 dcpL7](TLv. 4) as implying cause, 
ground, a reason, &c. — otl, because, Lu. 

viii. 13, ovTOL p'iX,av ovk 'iyovcnv, dl irpo^ 
Kaipdv TTLcrTEvova-i, Lat. ut qui,—heca.\ise, 
since, &c. iv. 18. — iii. connected with 
other particles. 1) os dv, os kdv, ivhoso- 
ever. Matt. v. 21, 19. 2) os yE, see Ti. 
3) OS ^r/7roT€, see Ayittote. 4) ogttep, 
who indeed, who namely,— S^.^ but stronger 
and more definite, Mk. xv. 6, k'l/a dko-piov 



305 



O 2 A 



306 



02T 



ovTTEp rjTovvTo^ I. c. ' the very one whom 
they demanded.'* 

^ 'Ocra/ct?, adv. (oVos,) prop. Tioiu many 
times ^ lioiv often ; in N. T. only with dv 
and £ay, which see. 

"OcrLo<5^ a, ov^ ^^]. lioly^ piire^ sanctus, 
prop. rigJit^ as conformed to God and the 
Divine will ; thus distinguished from di- 
Kaio's, v>^hich refers more to human laws 
and duties, Pol. xxiii. 10, 8, to: Trpos 
Tous avQpLOTrovi diKaia^ Kai nrd Trpos tol;5 
6eov£ oo-m. Thuc. i. 71, 5 ; in N. T. 1) of 
PERSONS, holy ; spoken of God, as the 
personification of holiness and purity, Rev. 
XV. 4, OTL ijl6uo9 ocrtos. xvi. 5 ; of men, 
pio2is, godly^ careful of all duties towards 
God, Tit. i. 8, ^st t6v eTTLcrKOTrou eluai 
cr(x)<ppova^ diKaLou^ octlov : elsewhere of 
Christ, Heb. vii. 26. Acts ii. 27, and xiii. 

35, OV dociCTEL'S TOV "OoTLOU <TOV IoeTiJ Sia- 

(pdopdv. Sept. and Class., as Xen. Ag. iii. 
5. Arr. Epict. ii. 4, 6. 2) of things, /zo/y, 
1 Tim. 

i. e. by impl. pure^ spotless^ Pro v. xxii. 11, 
o(TLa KapSia. Acts xiii. 34, dcoa-oj vpuv 
TO. ocrta AavtS rd TTLO-Ta^ lit. ' the holy 
[promises] of David, the sure promises,' 
i. e. the things inviolably promised by 
God to David. Comp. Is. liii. 5. 

'Oe-ioT?]?, ?]Tos, 77, (ocTios,) holiness^ 
i. e. godliness^ P^^ty-, careful observance of 
all duties towards God ; distinguished 
from SiKaLOcrvvy]^ as octlov from SiKaLO^ 
(see"Ocrios), Lu. i. 75, ki/ octlotiitl kul 
dLKaLoavui] evcottlou avTov. Eph. iv. 24. 
Sept. and Class. 

'Ocio)?, adv. {oa-Lo?^) holily, piously^ 
godly, 1 Th. ii. 10. Jos. and Class. 

'0(r/u?7, 7;s, 77, (o^co,) a smell, odour, 
whether bad or good; in N. T. only of 
fragrant odour, John xii. 3, -h oLKia ettXii- 

pU}6v, EK T77§ OCr/ULT]^ TOV /ULVOOV. By 

Hebr. dcrjur) Evwdia^, ' odour of fragrance,' 
i. e. sweet odour, as accompanying an 
acceptable sacrifice, Eph. v. 2. Phil. iv. 18. 
Sept. Lev. i. 9, and oft. Fig. 2 Cor, ii. 14, 
Tt]v 6. T7J9 yvu}<yE(x}<5. ver. 16, Scrfxt] 3'a- 
vaTou. In like manner the Rabbinical 
writers use the expressions aroma vitcB 
and aroma mortis, designating the Law as 
an aroma vitcB to Israel, but to the heathen 
an aroma mortis. 

"0(709, 7/, OV, relat. pron. correl. to 
Tocros, in N. T. to to(tovto<5 or the like, 
either expr. or impl. Lat. qua?itus,) 
hoio great, hoiv much, hoic many, as great 
as, as much as. Sec. I. of magnitude, 
Jioiv great, as great as. Rev. xxi. 16, to 

/UL7]KO<5 aUT^? TOaOVTOV ECTTLV OCTOV Kai TO 

7r\aTos. — II. of TIME, hoiv long, as long 
as, ocrou )(poVof, Mk. ii. 19. E<p' ocrov 
Xpovov, Rom. vii. 1. kcp' ocrov. Matt. ix. 
15. Repeated intens. Heb. x. 37, 'in 



j fjLLKpov ocrov oGov, ' yct a very very little 
! while.' — III. of QUANTITY, number, mul- 
titude, hoiu much, hoiv many, &c. I ) sing. 
as much as, John vi. II, ek tojv oxj/apicov 
[to(toutov] go-ov ^OeXoi/. 2) pi. baoL, 
barai, as many as, all ivho, neut. bcra, as 
many as, all that or ivhich, all what, &c. 
Matt, xiv, 36, bcroi rjxLravTo dLEar(hdi](Tav. 
Mk. iii. 10. Acts iv. 6, 34; neut. Lu. xii. 
3, bora Ev Trj (tkot'lo. ELiraTE. John xv. 
14. Acts ix. 39 ; preced. by TrayTss, Matt, 
xiii. 46. xxii. 10 ; with ovto9 or ctuTos 
corresponding, Rom. viii. 14, ocoi — ovToi 
e'lctlv. John i. 12. Gal. vi. 12, 16; with 
dv, as ocos dv, ocros lav, ichosoever, what- 
soever, Matt, xviii. 18, bcra kdv dn<Tr)'TE 
ETTL Tr}£ y7]<s. Mk. vl. 11. Johu xi, 22. 
Rev. iii. 19. 3) neut. bcra by impl. ex- 
presses also admiration, hoiv many and 
great things. Acts ix. 13, oVa /ca/ca Ittoi- 
?jcr£ TOts dyioi's gov. ver. 16. xv. 12, baa 
E7roLi](7Ev 6 Oeos a-iifXELa : so gener. of 
great or unusual deeds, Mk. vi. 30. Lu.iv. 
23. John xxi. 25; of benefits conferred, 
Mk. iii. 8. V. 19. Acts xiv. 27.— IV. of 
MEASURE, degree, extent. 1) before a 
comparat., /caO' bcrov — kutu tocovtov, 
hy how much — hy so ?/zwc/i, Heb. vii. 20, 22. 
oVa' — TocrovTU) id. i. 4. 2) absol. neut, 
bcrov, adv. hoiv much, hy how much, Mk. 
vii. 36, ocroy auTos auTots ^ieo-teWeto, 
fJidWov 7rEpL<Tar6TEpov EK-npvacrov : pi. 
bcra for toctovtov. Rev. xviii. 7, £<^' bcrov, 
ijiasmuch as, Matt. xxv. 40. 

"Ocr-TTE/O, ?77r€jO, OTTfp, SCO "Off. 

'OcTTEOi/, contr. ocrrovv, ov, to, pi. 
uncontr. ocrTEa, gen. oaTEwv, a hone, pi. 
607265, John xix. 36, octtovv oh avvTpi- 
^rjCTETaL. Lu. xxiv. 39, crdpKa Kai ocrTEa. 
Matt, xxiii. 27, yifxovcnv ocrTEcov. 

"Oo-Tis, 77Tt§, o Ti, compound relative 
pron., i. e. os strengthened by ti§ ; gen. 
ovTivo's, &c. does not occur in the N. T., 
but only gen. otou in the phrase k'cos 
oTou ; prop, any one who, some one who, 
whoever, whatever; differing from os in 
referring to a subject only generally, as 
one of a class, and not definitely, thus 
serving to render a proposition general. 
I. in the proper relative sense. 1) prop, 
and gener, who, i. e. one who, some one 
who, ivhoever, &c. Matt. ii. 6, ek ctov 

E^EXEVCTETai TiyOV fXEVO^, bcTTL'S TTOLjULaVET 

TOV Xaov fxov, i. e. one who. vii. 24. Lu. 
ii. 10 ; pi. Matt. xvi. 28. xxv. 1. 1 Cor. 
vi. 20. 2) by impl. every one ivho, all 
ivho, ivhosoever, ichatsoever, where the 
relative clause often stands first. Gener. 
with indie. Matt. v. 39, oo-t^s cte paTria-EL 
— c-Tpixj/ov avTw K.T.X. ver. 41. xiii. 12. 
With dv, which strengthens the indefinite- 
ness, ivhosoever, whatsoever, in N. T. only 
with the sing, with subjunct. Matt. x. 33, 
ocTts dv dpvtj(Tt]TaL fXE, Lu. X. 35. John 



02T 



307 



OTI 



ii. 5. Col. iii. 23- 3) sometimes oottl^ 
refers to a definite subject, and is tlien 
apparently equiv. to o§, Lu. ii. 4, el^iroXiu 
AautS f/xi9 KaXslTaL BtjOX. Acts xi. 28. 
xvi. 12. — II. like os, so also oo-tis is era- 
ployed in a ^vider extent, both as con- 
nective, and as implying result^ cause^ or 
the like, where a conjunction might 
also stand. 1) as a genei-al connective^ 
Lu. i. 20, ai/0' 001/ ovK ETTLcrTtvcra^ toIs 

\6yOL£ fJiOV^ oLtIVE^ Tr\l]pU3dl'](T0VTaL. 

xxiii. 19. Rom. ix. 4. Gal. iv. 24, 2) as 
marking result^ event, &c. ~ coarTe ; after 
TOiouTos, 1 Cor. V. 1. 3) implying cause, 
ground, or reason, &c. = oTi, because. 
Matt. vii. 15, irpocriyETE aird tcov xp^avSo- 

Lat. ut qui. xxv. 3. Acts x. 41 ; so 77Tts, 
Col. iii. 5, 14. 

'OcTTpa/cti/os, ?7, ov, adj. {oCTTpaKOV,) 
eaiihen, 2 Tim. ii. 20 ; fig. as an emblem 
of frailty, 2 Cor. iv. 7. Sept. and Class. 

"0 a ^ p^cr L<s, iia^, 77, {ocrcfypaLuojUiai,) 
the smell, the sense of smell, 1 Cor. xii. 
17. Class. 

'O 0-0 us, U09, and pi. al Sarcpvs^, 
the loins, the lower region of the iDack, 
lumbar region, the hips ; in N. T. 1 ) ex- 
ternal, = the hips, where the girdle is 
worn. Matt. iii. 4, ^coi/rji/ SspjULaTLurji' Trf pi 
Ttju ocTcpvv avTou : the Orientals, in order 
to run or work with more ease, are accus- 
tomed to gird their long flowing garments 
close about them ; hence to have the loins 
girded ~to he in readiness, prepared 
for any thing, Lu. xii. 35. Eph. vi. 14; 
fig. 1 Pet. i. 13. 2) internal, as the seat 
of procreative power in men, Heb. vii. 5, 
(see 'E^ipxoiuLai, I. 2,) ver. 10. Acts ii. 
30, KapTTo^ 6(T(pvo^, 1. 0. children, 
offspring. 

"OTav, adv. {ote, dv,) lohen, with 
the accessory idea of uncertainty, possi- 
bility, whensoever, if ever, in case that, so 
often as, &c. ; construed regularly with 
the subj., referring to an often-repeated or 
possible action in the present or future 
time ; in Gr. writers sometimes with the 
opt., and in a few very late instances with 
the indie. I. prop, with the subj. 1) in 
general propositions, with. subj. pres. Matt. 
XV. 2, OTUu dpTOV EcrdLvoariv, Lu. xi. 21. 
John xvi. 21. In a general comparison, 
with pres. Lu. xi. 36, cos brav — ^coTi'^r; 
<T£. 2) in reference to a future actioii or 
time ; with subj. pres. Matt. xxvi. 29, sw? 
Trjg rjfx. eke'lvy]^ otuv avTo ttlvoj fxsd' 
vfxCiiv. Mk. xiii. 4. John vii. 27. — II. with 
the indie, imperf. in narrating an actual 
event, once, Mk. iii. 11, to: nrvEvixara Ta 
UKadapTa, oTav avTov idscDpEi, i. e. 
ivhenever, as often as ; here Class, writers 
would employ the opt. — III. by impl. 
orav is put like Engl, since, while^ in 



assigning a cause, reason, zzhecause, hi that, 
foil, by subj. John ix. 5, orav iv Tto 
KocTfxu) 60, </)to§ eI/hl /c.t.X. Rom. ii. 14. 
1 Cor! XV. 27. 

"Ot£, adv. of time, u'he?i, correl. with 
TTOTE, TOTE coustrucd regularly with the 
indie, as relating to an actual event, some- 
tliing actually taking place ; rarely with 
the subjunct. 1) with indie, pres. in ge- 
neral propositions, John ix. 4, i/uj, ote 
ov8eU dvuaTUL ipyd'^Eadai. Heb. ix. 17- 
2) usually of time j!9a5^^ ; with indie, pres. 
in an historical sense, Mk. xi. 1, comp. 
Matt. xxi. 1 ; imperf. Mk. xiv. 12, ote to 
Tvdaya eOvov. xv. 41, ote r\v kv Ty TaX, 
John xvii. 12; with ttote corresp. Col. 
iii. 7. 1 Pet. iii. 20; aor. Matt. vii. 28. 
xii. 3, Mk. i. 32 ; with tote corresp. 
Matt. xxi. 1 ; perf. 1 Cor. xiii. 11, ote 
yiyova dvt]p. 3) of future time, foil, by 
indie, fut. Lu. xvii. 22, eXevctovtcil vfxipai 

OTE ETTLdv filler ETE K.T.X. John Iv. 21. 

Rom. ii. 16. 

"Otl, a conjunct, demonstr. and causal, 
like Engl, that, originally the same as 
neut. of bcTTL's : as demotistrative it stands 
properly for touto b tl, as pointing out 
or introducing that to which the prece- 
ding words refer, i.e. their object, contents, 
&c. ; as causal it is properly the same as 
Slu touto b TL, and assigns the cause, 
reason, motive, ground of any thing, that, 
because, &c. It is construed in N. T. 
with the indie. I. as a conjunction de- 
monstrative. I. prop, after a demonstr. 
pron., as touto or the like, expr. or impL 
John iii. 19, avTif ecttlv v Kpicn^, oTi to 
0005 fiXtjXuOfii/. Rom. ii. 3. Rev. ii. 6; 
implied, Matt. xvi. 7. — ii. after a pron. 
interrog., as tis, tl, John xiv. 22, tl yi- 
yovEV, oTL rjiJuv /uleXXel^ k.t.X. ; so tl 
OTL for TL ia-TLi/ oTi, prop. ' what cause is 
there that,' &c. Mk. ii. 16. Acts v. 4, 9 ; 
with a pron. or subst. Mk. iv. 41, Tts dpa 

OUTo's ECTTLV, OTL K.T.X. Hob. ii. 6. III. 

most freq. otl with indie, is put in con- 
struction after certain classes of verbs, to 
express the object or reference of the verb ; 
and is then equiv. to an accus. with infin., 
or to the corresponding participial con- 
struction, and often alternates with these 
in one and the same verb. 1 ) after verbs 
signifying to say, speaJc, and all verbs in- 
cluding this idea ; e. gr. after Xiyu), Matt, 
iii. 9. xii. 6. eIttov, Matt, xxviii. 7, 13 ; 
dvayyEXXo), Acts xiv. 27. ypdcpuj, Mk. 
xii. 19. oLddcrKa), ] Cor. xi. 14. diriyi- 
ofxai. Acts ix. 27. jxapTVpiio, Matt, xxiii. 
31. ofJ-vvjULL, Rev. X. 6. ojuLoXoysio, Heb. 
xi. 13. (Tcppayi'^co, John iii. 33. Some- 
times Xiyu) or the like is implied in the 
preceding verb or words, e. gr. Acts xiv. 
22. John vii. 35. 2) after verbs signif. to 
shoiv, make known, &c. with particip. or 



OTO 



308 



infin. ; after Sslkvvco, Matt. xvi. 21, 2 Th. 
ii. 4. ^>j\oa), 1 Cor. i, 11. aTro/caXuTTTOj, 
1 Pet. i. 12. E/ii(paviX^(jo, Heb. xi. 14. cpa- 
vspou)^ 2 Cor. iii. 3. 3) after verbs signif. 
to hear^ see^ and fig. to perceive, knoiv, &c. 
4) after verbs signif. to 7^ememhei\ care 
foy\ &c. ; after /Ai^i/Tjo-zco), Matt. v. 23. 
Jude 5. /uLv^j/uLouEvco, John xvi. 4. 5) after 
verbs signif. to liope^ believe^ tliink^ consider^ 

&C. iXTTi^O), TTiO-TgUO), TTETTOtOa, &C. IV. 

oTt serves also to introduce words quoted 
without change, chiefly after verbs imply- 
ing to say^ &c. and is then merely a marh 
of quotatio7i^ not to be translated in Engl. ; 
Matt. ii. 23, to pt]deu — otl Na^wpalos 
K\i]d7j(T£TaL. V. 3]. vii. 23. — II. as a con- 
junct, causal. 1) after a demonstr. pron. 
as TouTo, that, because ; dia tovto otl, 
Johnviii. 47. x. 17. iv tovtlo otl, Lu. 
X. 20 ; also outcos otl, Rev. iii. 16. 2) 
after a pron. interrog., as Tts, tl, e. gr. 
dLUTL, OTL, Rom. ix. 32. 2 Cor, xi. 11 ; 
so x«P^^ TLuo's, OTL, 1 Johu iii, 12, 3) 
absol. put after certain classes of verbs, 
and also gener. to express the cause, 
reason, motive, occasion of the action of 
those verbs, or of any action or event 
mentioned, tJmt, — seeing that, because, 
for. Sec. 4) after verbs signif, an emotion 
of the mind, as wonder, joy, pity, sorrow ; 
^avfxaC,(x3, x^'-P^^ Lu, x, 20. 5) after 
verbs expressing praise, thanks, kiraLvico, 
1 Cor, xi, 17. £i/x«f>to"T£">i Lu, xviii. 11, 
&c. 6) gener. Matt. ii. 18, ovk nds\E 
TapaKXrjdTjvaL, otl ovk. bIcti. Mk. i. 27. 
V. 9. 

"Otov, see"OcrTts, init. 

0 V, adv. ichere, see "0§, II, 7. 

O V, also OVK or ovx before a vowel, ac- 
cording as it is smooth or aspirated ; usu- 
ally \vithout accent, but written ov when 
standing alone or at the end of a sentence; 
a negative particle, not, no, expressing 
direct and full negation independently and 
absolutely, and hence objective ; thus dif- 
fering from (ji^, which implies a conditional 
and hypothetical negation, and is therefore 
subjective ; I. before the subject of a verb, 
where it renders the verb and proposition 
negative in respect to the subject. 1) 
gener. Matt. i. 25, ovk kyivoicxKEV aVTijv. 
Mk. iii. 25. Lu. vi. 43. John i. 10, 11. 
Acts ii. 15. 2) wdth the 2d ^ers. future in 
prohibitions, where the neg. fut. then stands 
for a neg. imperat. precisely as Engl. ' thou 
shalt not do it,' &c. which is stronger than 
the direct imperat. do it not ; Matt. vi. 5, 
OVK 'icrtj (jjarTTsp ol viroKpLTai. Lu. iv. 12. 
Acts xxiii. 5. 1 Cor. ix. 9 ; so from the 
decalogue, Matt. v. 21, ov <pov£vcrEL^, ver. 
27, 33. Rom. vii. 7, al. 3) where the sub- 
ject is Tras or els, and ov is joined not 
with TTa? but with the verb ; here by 
Hebr. Tras — ov or ov — 7ra§ is = oiJ(5£ts, 



j not one, none, Matt. xxiv. 22, ovk aw 
Ecroodr] Trdcra arap^, prop, all flesh would 

I not be saved, i, e. no flesh, Rom. iii. 20, 
Eph. V. 5, 7ra§ Tropvos ovk ex^i- Lu. i. 
37. 2 Pet. i. 20. 1 John ii. 21, Rev. xxii. 
3, sis — ov, not one, none. Matt, x, 29, kV 
E^ avTuw ov TTEaElTaL. Lu, xii, 6. 4) 
where ov with its verb is followed by 
dWa, i. e. ov — aWd, prop. Matt, ix, 12, 
ov X(0£i'ai/ Exovariv oi icrx^ovTE? iaTpov, 
dXX' ol KaKu)9 E-xovTE's. XV, 11, John vii. 
16 ; also ovx otl — a\X otl, vi, 26, xii. 
6, 5) sometimes ov stands in a condi- 
tional sentence after el, where the usual 
negative is fxi^, as strengthened by other 
nega,tive particles ; also by compounds of 
ov, as OVK ov^E, not even ; ovk ridE\EV 
ov§E Tou? 6<pQ. ETTapaL, Lu. xviii, 13, iv. 
2, xxiii. 53. Acts viii. 39. Rom. iii. 10. — 
II. before the object of a verb, where it 
renders the proposition negative in respect 
to the object ; gener. Matt. ix. 13, eXeov 
^eX(jo, Kai ov ^vcriav. 1 Cor. iv. 15 ; more 
freq. as followed by dXXa, Mk. ix. 37, 

OVK EfJLE oix^^CLL, dXXd TOP K.T.X. ActS 

V. 4. Eph. vi. 12 ; so ovx '^'^'^ — dXy oTt, 
2 Cor, vii, 9. — III. before the adjunct of a 
verb, adverbial or the like, where it ren- 
ders the proposition negative in respect to 
the adjunct; e. gr. before a noun implying 
manner, 2 Cor. iii. 3, ov fxiXavi, dXXa 
•TrvEVjxaTL. V. 7. John iii. 34. Gal. ii. 16 ; 
before an adject, as adv. ovx ^f<:ou(Ta^ 
Rom. viii. 20 ; before an adv. 1 Cor, v. 10, 
Eypaxj/a vpCiv ov TrdvTw^, 'not generally,' 
John vii. 10, ov (pauEpco?, dXXd. — IV. 
before participles, where a direct and ab- 
solute negative is to be expressed, 2 Cor. 
iv. 8, ^Xl(36iUevol, dXX' ov ottevox- k.t.X, 
Gal. iv. 27. Eph. v. 4.— Y, as aff"ecting 
single words, ov not only renders them 
negative, but often gives them the directly 
contrary sense, sometimes as a sort of 
compound, like Engl. 7ion, tin. 1) with 
verbs, ovk dyaTrdu}, to not love, — to be 
careless of. Rev, xii, 11 ; ovk dyvoiio =z 
to know well, 2 Cor. ii, 11 ; ovk kdu) — to 
restrain. Acts xvi, 7 ; ovk djXEXiui ~ to 
be careful, 2 Pet. i. 12 ; ov ^eXu), nolo, to 
be umcilling, Matt, xxiii. 37; ovk eI/jll 
d^LO£ or LKavo^, to be univorthy, &c. Matt, 
iii. 11. Acts xiii. 25. 2) with nouns; ov 
Xad<3, OVK eOuo^, q. d. a no?i-people, 1 Pet. 
ii. 10, ol TTOTs ov Xad<s, vvv Sk Xad^ 
Qeov. Rom. X. 19, 3) with adjectives ; 
TTas, where in the form ov 7ra§, ov irdv- 
TE<s, it merely takes away the positive 
force, — not every one, not all. Matt. vii. 
21, ov ird^ 6 Xiycov. xix. 11 ; but 7ra§ — 
ov means no one. With other adjectives 
it expresses the contrary ; ovk aa-rjfio^, not 
mean, — renowned. Acts xxi. 39. xvii. 4. 
4) with adverbs, ov /xsTptcos, Acts xx. 12, 
OVK £ij0£cos, Luke xxi. 9. — VI. in nega- I 
tive answers, no, nay, not, = not at all, ! 



O Y A 



309 



O YK 



Matt. xiii. 29, 6 dk tcpi], Ov. 2 Cor. i. 
17, ov ou, intcns. Matt. v. 87 ; ^vith the 
art. TO oi), i. e. the word ou, •2Cor. i. 17. — 

VII. ill negative questions, noinie; is not ? 
are not? wliere an attirm. answer is always 
presupposed, so that the neg, question 
stands instead of a direct affirmation ; 
simply. Matt. vi. 2b\ ovx vfJi^L^ /ndXXou 
oiacpipsTE avn-u)u ; xii. 3, 5. Mk. iv. 13, 
21 ; so xiv. t)0, ovK anroKpivT] ovStu; with 
other particles, ovk apa, Acts xxi. 38. 
dW ou, Heb. iii. 16, ' u'ho noiv were they 
that did provoke God.^' aW ou, yea^ 
were tliey not all those ? &c. compare 
'AX\a. 

Ova, inter j. ah! aha! Lat. vah! ut- 
tered in derision, Mk. xv. 29. 

Oval, interj. wo! alas! Lat. vcb ! ut- 
tered in grief, indignation, &c. 1) prop, 
and in later usage, with dat. Matt. xi. 21, 
ovai aoi, XopaX^iv. xxiii. 13, sq. ; with 
dat. impl. Rev. viii. 13. xviii. 10. 2) as 
subst. indec. 1 Cor. ix. 16, ovai fxoi Icttl, 
Engl, ivoe is me ! Hence with art. fem. 77 
oval h /xta, the first woe. Rev. ix. 12. 

Ou^a/Acos, adv. i^ovdauio^,) hy no 
means. Matt. ii. 6. 

0\)h\, conjunct, (ou ^£,) denying abso- 
lutely and objectively, and differing from 
/fx?]^£ as ov from [ki] : properly continu- 
ative, in the sense and not, also not, and 
hence \.—nor, neither, not even ; 1) in con- 
tinued negation, at the beginning of a sub- 
sequent clause. 2) and not, nor, neither, 
gener. preceded by ov. Matt. v. 15. vi. 20, 

O-KOV /cXsTTTat ov hlOOVCtfTOVCTLV 01/(58 

KXiTTTovcni/. ver. 26, 28. Acts viii, 21. 
ov — ovSk ovTs, 1 Th. ii. 3. outtoj — ovdk 
interrog. Mk. viii. 17 ; preceded by ovSeh, 
Matt. ix. 17. Rev. v. 3; so in apposit. 
with ouo£t?, e. gr. ovSk — ovdk, neither — 
nor, Mk. xiii. 32 ; by %va jui] — ovSk, Rev. 
ix. 4. 3) also not, neither, in a stronger 
transition or antithesis ; preceded by ou. 
Matt. xxi. 27, OVK otda/jLEV — ovSk sycb 
Xiyuj vfXLV. Mk. xii. 21. Lu. xvi. 31. 
John XV. 4. Rom. iv. 15; by ovdiU — 
ovok, John viii. 11. ovBel's — ovdk ovketl. 
Matt. xxii. 46. sdv jiii] — ovdk, vi. 15. 
With yap and dXXd, after a preceding 
neg. expr. or impl. in the context ; as 
ovdk yap, for not also, for neither, where 
oil denies, dk connects, and yap assigns a 
reason, John vii. 5, ovdk yap ol ddsXipol 
avTov ETTiaTEvov si? avTov. Rom. viii. 
7 ; strengthened by ovdsh, John v. 22, 
ovdk yap 6 llaTrjp Kp'ivEL ovdiva. Gal. i. 
12, ovdk yap — outs. Also dXX' ovdk, 
yea, neither, where dXXd merely strength- 
ens the negation, Lu. xxiii. 15, ovdkv 
evpov — dXX' ovdk 'Jlpu)dr]9. 1 Cor. iii. 2. 
Gal. ii.^ 3. — II. — not even, not so much 
as. 1) in the middle of a clause. Matt. vi. 
29, Xiyui vfiLt/, oTL ovdk ^oXofiiov iv 



Trdai) T?7 d6^\]. Mk. vi. 31. Lu. vii. 9. 
John xxi. 25 : also dXX ovdk, yea, not 
even. Acts xix. 2. 1 Cor. iv. 3. 2) in 
interrog. Mk. xii. 10, ovdk t^v ypa<pi]u 
TavTijv dviyvoDTE ; liU. vi. 3. xxiii. 40. 

Ou^£ts, ovdEfxia, ovdkv, {ovdk, cIs,) 
deck like eI?, a neg. adject, denying abso- 
lutely and objectively, and differing from 
/xTj^£i§ as ov from fxt] : gener. no one, 
nothing, i. e. none at all ; prop, emphat. 
72ot even one, not the least, but in this 
sense it is commonly written separately, 
oi;^£ £l§, ovdk 'iv, &c. I. as adj. with 
subst. no one, no, Lu. iv. 24, ou'ofis Trpo- 
<priT^9. John xvi. 29, 7rapoi/j.lav ovde- 
pLiav : neut. Lu. xxiii. 4, ovdkv ati-iov. 
xVcts xvii. 21. Partitively, with gen. of a 
whole, Lu. iv. 26, 7rpo5 ovdEjxiav avTwv. 
ver. 27. John vii. 19. Acts xviii. 17. — II. 
absol. as suhst. ovd&\<3, no one, no person. 
Matt. vi. 24, ovdil^ dvvaTai dval kvolol^ 
dovXEvsLv. John v. 22. Acts ix. 8. With 
other negatives for strength. Matt. xxii. 
16, ov p-eXel aroL TTEpl ovoevo^. Lu. xxiii. 
53, ovdETTU} ovdEh. Mk. xii. 34, ovdEl^ 
OVKETL. — III. neut. ovdkv, absol. nothing, 
gener. Matt. x. 26. Acts xv. 9. Gal. ii. 6. 
With other negatives for intensity, Mk. 
xiv. 60, OVK diroKpLvri ovdiv ; Lu. iv. 2. 
1 Cor. viii. 2. ovdkv — ov fii), Lu. x. 19. 
Accus. ovdkv, adv. i. e. in no iray, in no 
respect. Acts xxv. 10, 'Yovdaiov^ ovdkv 
rjdiKYicra. Gal. iv. 12; with ov, John vi. 
63, crap^ OVK a}(pEXEL ovdiv. Metaph. 
nothing, i. e. of no account, weight, value, 
authority, &c. Matt, xxiii. 16, o? dv 
ojULoa-ri iv tw vaw, ovdiv icTTLv. 1 Cor. 
xiii. 2 : so £ts ovdkv yEvia-Qai, to come to 
nought. Acts v. 36. eU ovdkv XoyiadrjvaL, 
to be set at nought, be contemned, xix. 27. 

Ou^£7roT£, adv. {ovdk, ttote,) not 
ever, never, comp. ov, init. ; foil, by pres. 
1 Cor. xiii. 8, t) uydirri ovd. EKTrLTTTEL. 
Heb. x. 1 ; pret. Matt. vii. 23, ovd. 'iyvvov 
vfxd^. ix. 33. Lu. XV. 29. Acts xiv. 8; 
by fut. Matt. xxvi. 33. In interrog. xxi. 
16, ovd. dviyvcoTE ; 

OuO£7rw, adv. {ovdk, ttco,) prop, not 
ever yet, not yet, never; foil, by pret. 
John vii. 39, ovd. ido^dcrdy]. xx. 9. 
Strengthened by ovoEh, Lu. xxiii. 53, 
ovd. ovdEL^. 1 Cor. viii. 2, ovd. ovdiv. 

Ou0£i?, lat. Gr. for ovdEk, 1 Cor. xiii. 
2, in early Edd. 

Ou/c£Tt, or OVK ETL, adv. no more, no 
further, no longer, in the general sense of 
ov, which see, init. ; gener. Matt. xix. 6, 
ct)(rT£ ovKin-L eioI dvo. Lu. xv. 19. Rom. 
vii. 17. With other negatives for strength, 
Matt. xxii. 46. Mk. vii. 12. Acts viii. 39, al. 

OvKovv, adv. {ovk ovv,) prop, inter- 
rog. 7ionne ergo ? not so then ? implying an 
affirm, answer, and hence used by the 
Attics as au affirmcdive illative paHicle, 



O Y N 



310 



O YP 



THEREFORE, THEN ; in N. T. once, John 

xviii. 37, ovKovv /SaciXeus at av ; i. e. 
thoic art a king tlien^ art thou not ? 

Ouz/, conj. thereupon^ i. e. now^ then^ 
therefore ; put after one or more words in 
a clause, and expressing either the merely 
external connexion of two sentences, that 
the one follows upo7i the other; or also 
the internal relation of cause and effect, 
that the one follows fi^om the other. — I. 
as marking mere eodernal connexion, and 
thus denoting transition or continuation 
from what precedes to what follows, there- 
upon^ now then^ Slc. 1) gener. Lu. vi. 9, 
eIttev ovv 6 'I, Trpos avTov?. John xii. 
1, 9. xix. 29, cr/C£uos ovv ekelto o^ou? 
fXECTTov. Rom. xi. 1, 11 : so where, after 
introductory matter, the transition is made 
to the thing itself. Matt. xiii. 18. Lu. xx. 
29, kiTTa. ovv ddsX<pol i](rav. John iv. 5. 

xix. 40. Also imkv oui/, comp. /ulev : with 
^£ following, Mk. xvi. 19. Acts i. 6, sq. 
viii. 4, sq. ; without dk, xxiii. 22. xxvi. 4. 
2) joined with a, particle of time ^ or words 
implying time ; oTav ovv^ Matt. xxi. 40. 
Lu. xi. 34. oTB ovv, John ii. 22. ovv, 
iv. 1, 40. E^avTrj^ ovv, Acts x. 33. vvv 
ovv, ibid. ttoXlv ovv, John viii. 12. ovv 
itoXlv, ver. 21. tote ovv, xi. 14. So with 
a participle, which may he resolved by a 
particle of time, as oTav, ote, ws, with a 
finite verb, John vi. 14, oi ovv audpcoiroL 
idovTE^, then those menivhen they had seen, 
ver. 15. Acts xv, 2. — II. as expressing the 
internal conneocion of two sentences, that the 
one follows from the other as effect from 
cause, therefore, consequently; i. gener. 
where any thing is said to be done, &c- in 
consequence q/*what is previously narrated. 
1) gener. Lu.xv. 28, wpytcrGjj ^e, Kai ovk 
tiBeXev EicrEXdElv' 6 ovv 7raTi]p avTov 
e^eXOcov mrapEKoXEL avTov. Actsxvii. 20. 
Rom. ix. 19. Eph. iv. 1 : so freq. in the 
phrases eIitov ovv,XEyEL ovv. Sec. John viii. 
13. xxi. 5. 2) in exhoHations founded on 
what precedes. Matt. v. 48, £cr£<r0£ ovv 
vfjLEi^ teXeiol. Mk. xiii. 35. Acts iii. 19. 
Rom. xi. 22. 3) where the consequence 
is connected with a conditional or causal 
clause ; kav ovv, if therefore. Matt. v. 23. 
Rom. ii. 26. el ovv. Matt. vi. 23. Lu. xvi. 
11. £iT£ ovv, 1 Cor. X. 31 : so £7r£t ovv, 
Heb. ii. 14. iv. 6. — ii. illative, ex- 
pressing an inference or conclusion from 
what precedes; 1) gener. Matt. iii. 10, 77 
a^Lvrj — keItul, irav ovv oivdpov. Mk. x. 
9. Rom. vi. 4. Heb. ix. 23. 2) after an 
enumeration of particulars, expressing the 
general result or conclusion, Matt. i. 17, 
TTacrai ovv al yEVEai airo ' A^padfi. John 
vii. 43. XX. 30. 3) where the conclusion 
is connected with a conditional or causal 
clause; eI ovv in the sense of ettel ovv. 
Matt. vii. 11, £t ovv u/xeTs o'idaTe k.t.X. 



John xiii. 14. Acts xi. 17. — ni. where sl 
sentence has been interrupted by a paren- 
thesis, or by intervening clauses, and is 
again resumed, rr ' I say,' ' as before said,' 
&c. Matt. vii. 24, Tras ovv ocTis, comp. 
ver. 21. X. 32, comp. ver. 22. 1 Cor. viii. 
4, comp. ver. 1. Gal. iii. 5, comp. ver. 2. 
Heb. iv. 11, comp. ver. 6. — iv. in inter- 
rog. sentences, referring hack to a previous 
assertion, supposition, circumstances, &c. ; 
gener. Matt. xiii. 28, ^eXel^ ovv diraX- 
dovTE^ arvXXE^cojULEv avTo. ; After inter- 
rog. particles. Matt. xvii. 10, tl ovv ol 
ypajULjULaTsl^ XiyovcrLV ; Rom. iii. 1. iv. 1, 
ttoQev ovv ; Matt. xiii. 27. Trois ovv ; xii. 
26. 

Ou-TTw, adv. (oO, TTcoy) not even yet, not 
yet ; foil, by pres. Matt. xxiv. 6, dXX' 
ovTTco ecttI to teXo<s. Johu ii. 4; by pret. 
iii. 24. Heb. xii. 4. ovirm oy^f Is, Acts viii. 
16. In interrogat. Matt. xv. 17, ovirm 
voeTte — ; 

Ovpd, a9, 77, the tail of an animal, Rev. 
ix. 10, 19. xii. 4. Sept. and Class. 

O J pay I OS, a, ov, {ovpavo's,) and tos, 
Lov, adj. heavenly, i. e.. dwelling in heaven, 
6 IlaTijp 6 ovpdvLo?. Matt. vi. 14, 26, 
32. ^ XV. 13. So Aristoph. Nub. 1530, 
^Eol ovpdvLOL. <JT puT id ovpdvLo^, heavenly 
host, angels, Lu. ii. 13 : also as coming 
from heaven, ovpdvLo^ oTTTaaia, Acts 
xxvi. 19, 

O V pavoO Ev, adv. {ovpavo^,) from 
heave7i, Acts xiv. 17. xxvi. 13. Class. 

Ov pavo^, ov, 6, pi. ovpavoL, cov, ol, 
heaven, the heavens; spoken prop, of the 
expanse of the sky, the apparent concave 
hemisphere above us, which was regarded 
by the Hebrews as solid, the firmament ; 
but, in common usage, including also the 
regions above the sky, where God is said 
to dwell ; and likewise the region under- 
neath and next the firmament, where the 
clouds are gathered, the birds fly, &c. : in 
N. T. I. prop, and gener. as including 
the visible heathens and all their pheno- 
mena ; so where heaven and earth are 
spoken of together, opp. 1 Cor. viii. 5, 

ELTE EV OVpaVM, ELTE ETTL Tt}^ yT/V. 2 Pct. 

iii. 5 : also 6 ovp, kuI v yij, heaven and 
earth, = the universe. Matt. v. 18. Lu. x. 
21, Rev. xiv. 7, tov ovp. Kai ttjv yijv Kai 
Ti]v ^dXacra-av. Col. i. 16. So uKpov 
ovpavov, d.Kpa ovpavwv, the extremities of 
the heavens, where they seem to touch the 
earth, Matt. xxiv. 31. Mk. xiii. 27. vtto 
TOV ovp. under heaven, i. e. on earth, 
Acts iv. 12. ol vird tov ovp. ii. 5 ; 77 vir' 
ovpavov, soil. x^P^i = earth, or region 
of the earth, Lu. xvii. 24, ek tt/s vtt' 
ovp. £15 Ti]v vtt' ovp. ' from one part of 
the earth to another.' Further, oi vvv 
ovp. 2 Pet. iii. 7, and 6 TrpcoTO's ovp. Rev. 
xxi. 1, the present heaveris, which are to 



O YP 

be destroyed at tlie final consummation of 
all things, after which new heavens are to 
appear, Kaivoi ovpauoi^ 2 Pet, iii. 13. Fig. 
Vif/codijuai ecos tou oup. Lat. ad cceliim 
efferri^ ' to he exalted to heaven,' ' to be 
highly distinguished,' Matt. xi. 23. More 
specifically spoken, — II. of the firmament 
itself] the starry heaven^ in which tiie sun, 
moon, and stars are fixed, Mk. xiii. 25, oi 
d(TTipE<s Tov ovp. Heb. xi. 12. Hence i) 
(TTpaTLa TOV ovp. Acts vii. 42, and ai 
dvvdfj.£L9 Ttou ovp. or kv tois ovp. Matt, 
xxiv. 29. Mk. xiii. 25. Further, the stars 
are said irLTTTELv diro tov ovp. to fall 
from heaven^ as emblematical of great 
commotions and revolutions, Matt. xxiv. 
29 : the firmament itself, which is spread 
out over the earth as a curtain, is likewise 
said to be rolled together as a scroll. Rev. 
vi. 14. Fig. Lu. X. 18, edacopovu tov 
'SiUTavdv ws d(TTpaTrr\v t/c tov ovp. 
TTf (To'i/Ta, where the form of expression is 
in allusion to Isa. xiv. 12, the lightning 
being emblematic of swiftness, — for the 
sense, q. d. the power of Satan is broken.^ 
comp. John xii. 31. — III. of the lower 
heaven.^ or region below the firmament, — 
the air, atmosphere., where clouds and tem- 
pests are gathered, and lightning breaks 
forth, where the birds fly, &c. ; of clouds. 
Matt. xyi. 2, 'irvppaX^EL 6 ovp. xxiv. 30. 
Mk. xiv. 62. Lu. xii. 56, et al. ssepe. Fig. 
KXslaraL tov ovp. to shut up heaveii., i. e. 
' to withhold rain,' Rev. xi. 6. — IV. of the 
upper or superior heaven., beyond the visi- 
ble firmament, the abode of God and his 
glory, of the Messiah, the angels, the spi- 
rits of the just after death, and gener. of 
every thing which is said to be with God. 
1) gener. of God, Matt. v. 34, fxriTi. kv tw 
ovp. OTL ^p6vo£ kaTL TOV 0£ou, xxiii. 22. 
Heb. viii. 1 ; hence God is called 6 Geos 
TOV ovp. Rev. xi. 13 ; KvpLo<s tov ovp. 
Matt. xi. 25 ; o K. kv Tots ovp. Eph. vi. 9 ; 
6 JIaT7]p 6 kv ToT? ovpavoL9., Matt. v. 16, 
saep. ; 6 UuTrip 6 k^ ovpavov, Lu. xi. 13 : 
of the Messiah, the Son of God, as 
coming from heaven, John iii. 13, 31 ; or 
as returning thither after his resurrection, 
Mk. xvi. 19. Acts i. 10, whence he will 
again come to judge the world, 1 Th. i. 10. 
iv. 16 ; of the Holy Spirit, Matt. iii. 16. 
1 Pet. i. 12 ; of angels. Matt, xviii. 10, al. ; 
hence called to. orTpaTev/maTa to. kv tco 
ovp. Rev. xix. 14 ; of the righteous after 
death. Matt. v. 12, 6 /utcGo? v/ulcov ttoXvs 
kv Tots ovp. vi. 20. Lu. x. 20. 1 Pet. i. 4, 
al. : in heaven also is the spiritual temple 
with its sacred utensils, Heb. ix. 23, 24. 
Rev. xi. 19 ; and there also the new Jeru- 
salem is prepared and adorned, iii. 12. 
Hence to be or to be done., kv tw ovp. n: 
among or by those who divell in heaven., Lu. 
XV. 7, X"/0" £o-rat kv tw ovp. Matt. vi. 
10. xvi. 19. TO. kv ToT9 ovp. r= the higher 



O YT 

spiritual world, Eph. i. 10, and so iii. 15, 
irdaa iruTpid kv ovpavol^ : so poetically, 
where the heavens are said to rejoice. 
Rev. xii. 12. In various phrases, &c. to 
look up to heaven., as the abode of God, 
dva^XiiTELv aU tov ovp. Matt. xiv. 19. 
aT-gfi^fii/, Acts i. 10. £/x/8Xfc7r£ii/, ver. 11. 
kirdpai tov<5 6<pd. Lu. xviii. 13. To 
ascend or be taken up into heaven., Lu. ii. 
15. Acts ii. 34. x. 16. 1 Pet. iii. 22. To 
come or be sent from heaven., John iii. 31. 
vi. 33. 1 Thess. iv. 16. Heb. xii. 25. 
1 Pet. i. 12. Also heaven is said to be 
opened., so as to let pass in or out, to lay 
open the interior, &c. Matt. iii. 16. Mk. 
i. 10. John i. 52. Acts vii. 56. 2) k'ws 
TpLTov ovp. unto the third heaven., 2 Cor. 
xii. 2, probably in allusion to the three 
heavens as above specified, viz. the lower, 
the middle or firmament, and the superior, 
hence i. q. the highest heaven., the abode of 
God, angels, and glorified spirits, the spi- 
ritual paradise, ver. 4 ; comp. Eph. iv. 10, 
Heb. iv. 14. vii. 26. 3) meton. and from 
the later Hebr. ovpav6<3., ovpavol., like 
Engl, heaven., as being the abode of God, 
is often put for God himself Elvai k^ 
ovpavov, ~ kK TOV Gfou, Matt. xxi. 25. 
Sedofxevov kK tov ovp. John iii. 27. 
rifxapTov £t5 TOV ovp. Lu. XV. 18; also in 
the formula so freq. in Matt. 77 ^acnXeia 
Tcov ovp. iii. 2, al. ; elsewhere 77 Bacr. 
TOV Qzov. 

05 s, wTos, TO, an ear., pi. to: wTa, tJie 
ears., Mk. vii. 33. viii. 18. Lu. xxii. 50. 
In phrases : 6 iyjMv cotu or el Tts £X^t 
(joTa aKov&LV., aKoveTU)., or 6 s-X^^ 
a/coucraTco, i. e. ' whoever can hear and 
understand, let him hear and attend,' 
Matt. xi. 15. Mk. iv. 23. Rev. ii. 7. 
^eadaL &h Ta toTa, to let sink into the 
ears., to fix deep in the mind, Lu. ix. 44 : 
also to come eh to. coTa Ttj/o§, unto the 
ears of any one, Acts xi. 22. XaXelv 
Tvpo^ or aKovELv £is TO ous, to speak or 
hear in the ear., i. e. privately. Matt. x. 27. 
Lu. xii. 3 (Ps. xviii. 6. Is. v. 9) : so to do 
any thing kv T0I9 wctlv tlvo<s, i. e. in his 
hearing, presence, Lu. iv. 21. coTa shokr]- 

(TLV — U)Ta 0£OU kcTLV EL^ 6. 1, C. God 

listens to prayer, 1 Pet. iii. 12. Poetically, 
o5s, as the organ of hearing, is put for the 
person who hears, Matt. xiii. 16, paKapioi 
— Ta (joTU vpu}V, OTL UKOVEL. 1 Cor. ii. 9. 

Ovcria^ as, 77, (ovaa., fern. part, of 
dpX.,) prop, entity., essence., nature., being., 
life ; in N. T., and usually, what is to any 
one, what he has, i. e. substance., property., 
Lu. XV. 12, 13. Jos. and Class. 

Oi/Tf, conj. (ou, T£,) a continuative, 
referring usually to a part of a proposition 
or clause, and not., also not, i. e. neitJier., 
nor., not even. 1) as introducing a neg. 
clause, with or without a preceding neg. 



311 



O YT 



312 



O YT 



neither^ 7ior ; ovte yap, Lii. xx. 36. John 
iv. 11, ovTE avT\-\]ixa 'ix^^^i ^^f- 
(ppiap kcnl (3a6u. More freq. repeated, 
ouxg — oi;t£, yieither — Tzor, before different 
parts of a clause. Matt. vi. 20. Acts xv. 
10. Gal. V. 6, al. After another nega- 
tive, ov — ovTs^ John i. 25. ouok — outs, 
Gal. i. 12. 2) in the sense of not even^ 
Mk. v. 3, ovTz a\vcrE<TLv ov^il's 7]du- 
vaTo avTov dijcraL. Lu. xii. 26. 1 Cor. 
iii. 2. 

Ouxos, auTt], TouTo, genit. toutou, 
TauT)j§, TouTou, pron. demonstr. ^/^w ^Aa^, 
prop, for 6 auTos, 17 avTr]^ to avro^ this 
same. I. prop, as refei^riny to a person or 
thing before mentioned, i. e. to something 
preceding. 1) nrop. to that next pre- 
ceding, Lu. i. 3'2, 'Iijcrouy ouTO? 'icTTat 
ytisyas, ii. 25. John i. 2, Geos t]i/ o Xo- 
yos' ovTo^ r\v. iii. 2. vi. 71. Rom. xiv. 
18, kv TouTOis. 2 Pet. ii. 20, oft. Neut. 
pi. rravTa sometimes refers only to one 
thing, 3 John 4. Lu. xii. 4, and oft. in 
Class. 2) sometimes outos refers not to 
the nearest, but to another person or thing, 
as being the chief io^io, of discourse, Matt. 

iii. 3, ovt6<5 EdTLV^ scil. 'Iwai/i/fjs, ver. 1. 
Lu. xiii. 2. John i. 42. xi. 37, kul outos, 
even this man^ Lazarus; Acts iv. 11, ov- 
T05 kcTTLv 6 Xi'0o§, scil, XoiCTTO?. vii. 19. 
Gal. iv. 26. 3) as referring generally to 
the preceding discourse, jMatt. vii. 28. Mk. 

iv. 13. Lu. i. 29. xxiv. 21. John ii. 11. 
Rom. xi, 27. — n. as referring to or intro- 
ducing what follows, with emphasis^ as in 
Engl. THIS, i. q. ' the following \ as fol- 
lowed by the express words, Gal. iii. ] 7, 
TovTo A.£y6i), oiadriKijv., 1 John iv. 2 ; or 
with subst. Matt. x. 2, to. ovofxaTo. kaTL 
TuvTa. Lu. ii. 12. Acts viii, 32. 1 Cor. ix. 
3 ; or by a noun simply, as the predicate, 
2 Cor. xiii. 9, tovto €L;)(o/^£6a, tiiv vfxwv 
KaTctpTLO-Lv. 1 John V. 4, al. — III. used 
S&iKTLKu)?., i. e. as pointing to a person or 
thing present either to the eyes or to the 
mind. 1) gener. Matt. iii. 17, oSto? eg-tlv 
6 uio§ fjLov. xvii. 5, 20. Mk. xii. 43. John 
i. 15. Matt. viii. 9, 7) cro<pLa avTT]. xxvi. 
34, kv TavTT} Trj vvktl. Lu. xii. 26, Kai- 
pov TovTov. 2) in admiration. Matt. viii. 
27, 7ro-ra7ro9 karTiv outos, otl k.t.X. xii. 
23. John vi. 14. 3) more usually in con- 
tempt or aversion, as in Engl. ' this fel- 
low,' &c. Matt. ix. 3, ouTos ^\acr(/)t]/x£r, 
xii. 24. xiii. 54. Acts vii. 40. — IV. 171- 
serted for emphasis^ 1) after the subject 
or object of a verb, i. e. between this and 
the verb ; after a noun, Matt. xiii. 38, to 
KctXbv cnripp.a., ovtoL eiaiv oi vioL. xxi. 
42. Lu. viii. 21. Rom. vii. 10. 1 Pet. ii. 
7; after a relative pron. Matt. v. 19. Mk. 
iii. 35. Lu. ix. 24. John i. 33 ; after a 
partic. Matt. xiii. 20, 6 criraptL's^ ovto^ 
ioTTLv. Mk. xii. 40. Lu. ix. 48. 2) in 



apodosis after £t, Rom. viii. 8. 3) after a 
parenthesis, or intervening sentence, when 
the writer again returns to the leading sub- 
ject. Acts vii. 35, TovTov tov Mwuo-^jy 
— TOVTOV 6 Beos K.t.X. comp. ver. 31 ; 
so ver. 37, 38. — V. where outos is fol- 
lovred by a relative sentence, ovto^ — os, 
equiv. to this laho., he ivho.^ that tvhich., Lu. 
ix. 9, TL<s kcTTLV 0^X09, TTipl ov — ; 1 Pct. 
V. 12. 1 John V. 9. — VI. as strengthened 
by auTo?, i. e. avToi ouTot, ' these men 
themselves,' gelktlkco^^ for 'they them- 
selves,' Acts xxiv. 15, 20 ; oftener neut. 
avTO TOUTO., tovto auTo., 'this very thing,' 
Slc. as referring to what precedes, 2 Cor, 
ii. 3, Eypaxlra vfXLV tovto uvtS. Eph. vi. 
18. \^ith relat. o — avTo. tovto., Gal. ii. 

10. — VII. after /cal, as kul outos, often 
gener. in the foregoing senses, e. gr, 
and this man^ and lie., Lu. xvi. 1 ; he also., 
XX. 30 ; OELKTLK(x)<s., xxii. 56, 59. But 
spec. Kal oSto9, kul tovto., Kal Taura, 
and he too., and. this too., and tJiat indeed., 

1. e. where a particular stress is to be laid 
upon the connexion of two circumstances, 
OUTOS is thus joined to Kal., and then al- 
ways refers back to the former, 1 Cor. ii. 

2, EL /UT; ^1)](T0VV ^pLCrTOU., Kal tovtov 

ka-TavowjjiEVou : oftener neut. Rom. xiii. 

11. ICor.vi. 6, 8. Heb. xi. 12.— VIIL m 
distribution., tovto fxkv — tovto ^£, prop. 
as to this — as to that., equiv. to jjartly — 

Heb. x. 33. — IX. neut. -rauTa, acc. 
as adv. so, thus., equiv. to ouTa)9 ; after 
/ca0w9, John viii. 28 ; TovTa ETuai., to be 
thus, such., lCor.vi.il. — X. in gender., 
&ic. the use of oSto9 exhibits some ano- 
malies of syntax; 1) where ovto<s refers 
in sense to a preceding noun, it yet some- 
times takes the gender and number of a 
noun following, Matt. xiii. 38, to koXov 

(TTTEpina, OVTOL ELCi LV ol VLOL. Lu. viii. 14, 

15. 2) by Hebr. the fem. avTi] stands 
for neut. tovto in Matt. xxi. 42, and Mk. 
xii. 11. 

OuTto9, also OuTO) before a consonant, 
(ouT09,) demonstr. adv. ^V^ this manner., so., 
thus., to which corresponds relat. a)5, &c, 
1. prop, as referring to what precedes, 
and in complete sentences preceded by a 
relative adv. or adverbial word : 1) with 
a preced. relat. adv. as—so ; KaQdirEp — 
ouTa)9, Rom. xii. 5. 1 Cor. xii. 12, /ca0a- 

TTEp TO CT<JOp.a 'iv kcTTLV., OVTOi Kal 6 ^pL- 

<TT09. 2 Cor. viii. 11. KaOcb^ — ouTa)9, Lu. 
xi. 30. 1 Th. ii. 4. cos — outws, Acts viii. 
32. Rom. V. 15. 2 Cor. vii, 14. tocTrsp — 
ouTws, Matt. xii. 40. Rom. \i. 4; fur- 
ther, KaO' bcrov — outws, Heb. ix. 27, 28. 
ov TpoTTov — ouTojs, 2 Tim. iii. 8. 2) 
alone, and as referring gener. to the pre- 
ceding discourse. Matt. iii. 15, ovtco irpi- 
TTov kaTLV rj/nlv TrXijptocraL Trdarav olk. 
i.e. ' by being baptized,' v. 12. yi. 30. Lu» 



O YX 



313 



i. 25. John xi. 48. 1 Cor. ii. 11. interr. 
John xviii. 22. Acts vii, 1. xvii. 11. 3) in 
emphatic ajfinmtion or prohibition, outcos 
lo-Tttf, so shall it bc% Matt. xii. 45. xiii. 
49, XX. 26. — II. as referring to and intro- 
ducing what FOLLOWS ; in complete sen- 
tences followed by a relat. adv. or adver- 
bial word. 1) with a follo\ving relat. adv. 
so — as; ovTU) Kad(jo<s^ Ln. xxiv. 24. Rom. 
xi. 20. ouTws — ojs, John vii. 46. 1 Cor. iv. 
1. ouTcos — tocrTf, with inf. Acts xiv. 1. 
ouTws — ov TjOOTToi/, i. 1 1 . Kad' ov Tp. xxvii. 
25. 2) alo)ie ; as followed by direct nar- 
ration or quotation, jNIatt. i. 18, toD 'I. 
^p.V yivvi](TL^ ouTuis r\v' iJ.vj]crn-EvdE(a-i]9 
K.T.X. ii. 5, ouTU) yiypaTTTai, Kai av 
Bi]6\si/uL. Rev. ix. 17. — III. used Sslk- 
Ti/cois, Acts xxi. 11, TOf au8pa — ouVw 
dt'icrovaiv kv ^l^povcr. Rom. ix. 20 ; with 
the idea of aversion, 1 Cor. v. 3, tov outw 
TovTo KaTEpyacrdixzvov. — IV. inserted for 
emphasis: 1) after participles, before the 
foil, verb, like oSto?. Acts xx. 11, bjXL- 
\ri<Ta's axpi-^ auy^s, ovtvo^ i^TjXdev. xxvii. 
17. 2) in apodosis, after ort causal, Rev. 
iii. 16. — y. spohen of degree^ extent, so, 
so miLcJi^ to such a degree, in such a man- 
ner ; with adjectives and adv. Heb. xii. 
21, ovTUi (bo^epov r\v to (pavTaX^ofXEvov. 
Rev. xvi. 18. ouTCt) Tax^^^-, Cal. i. 6 ; 
interrog. Mk. vii. 18, ovto) kul vpLsT^ 
dorvu&TOL koTTE ; iv. 40. Gal. iii. 3. With 
a verb, 1 John iv. 11, eI outo)? 6 9£o§ 
7jyd7r't]a-EV Vinci's : foil, by wotte with indie. 
John iii. 16 ; interrog. Matt. xxvi. 40. 
1 Cor. vi. 5. 

O u X adv. not, a strengthened form of 

oil. I. gener. John xiii. 10, aW ou)(t 

-TravTES, ' by no means all,' ver. 11. 1 Cor. 
* vi. 1. ouXl — aWd, X. 29. — II. in neg. an- 
. swers, 720, na?/, hy no means, only foil, by 

aWd, Lu. i. 60. Rom. iii. 27. — HI. often 
' in neg. questions, nonne ? is not ? are not ? 

&c. implying an affirm, answer. Matt. v. 

46, oi'X'- TsXiiovaL TO avTO ttolovctl ; 

XX. 13. Lu. xvii. 6. ver. 8, dW ovxl kpEl 

auTco ; 

'O0£tA.£'Ti]s, ou, 6, (o0£t\a),) a debt- 
or. 1) Matt, xviii. 24, sis 6(p. fxvpiwv 
TaKavTUiv : fig. of one indebted for fa- 
vours, Rom. XV. 27. 2) metaph. debtor, 
one morally bound to the performance of 
any duty ; foil, by infin. Gal. v. 3, 6<pEL- 

\£Tr]9 koTTLV o\oV TOV VOfJLOV TTOLTJCraL l 

by dat. and inf. Rom. viii. 12 ; so i. 14, 
"EW/jcrt TE /cat (Sap^dpoi^ ocpEiXiTii^ 
ei/iit, soil. EvayyEXiX^EordaL. Soph. Aj. 590, 

3'£0T5 COS OVOEV dpKELV EL/UL o'^EtXtTrjS £Tt. 

3) from the Hebraic idiom, equiv. to a 
delinquent, one who fails in the perform- 
ance of duty, Matt. vi. 12, Tot5 o0. nfJ^uiv, 
i. e. ' those who fail in their duties towards 
us hence gener. a tr aggressor, sinner^ 
equiv. to d/iapTwXds, Lu. xiii. 4 ; comp. 



ver. 2. So Liber Henoch. 180, 6(p. d/uLup- 
Tia<s /uLEydXt}^, 

'O (p E lXi], tj^, 17, (o0£iA.6o,) a debt. 
Matt, xviii. 32, Trdaai/ ti/i/ 6^. d(f)fiKd 
aroL : metaph. a due, duty, obligation, Rom. 
xiii. 7. 1 Cor. vii. 3, in lat. Edd. 

'O (pELXrjjULa, aT09,T6,{6<pELXa),) prop. 
' something owed,' a debt ; in N. T. only 
metaph. I) a due, duty, obligation, Rom. 
iv. 4, oh XoyiX^ETai kutu xdpiv, dXXd 

KUTU OCpEiX. So ThuC. ii. 40, OVK £S X"" 

pLv, dXX' £§ 09. 2) from the Hebraic 
idiom, delinquency, L e. a fault, sin. Matt, 
vi. 12, d(pE9 hfXLV Ta 6<p. vpicou, equiv. to 
Ttt TrapaTTTcofxaTa, ver. 14, and Ta? 
duapTLu^, Lu. xi. 4. The Class, only 
say dcpLEvaL tlvl Ta xpia, 

'0<PelXco, f. 770-0), to oire, be indebted. 
I. PROP, in a pecuniary sense, with acc, 
and dat. expr. or impl. Matt, xviii. 28, o? 
cocpEiXsv avTcp EKaTov 8r]vdpLa. Lu. vii. 
41, al. Sept. and Class. ; pass. part. neut. 
TO ocpELXofxEvov, prop. 'what is owed,' a 
debt, due, Matt, xviii. 30. Sept. and Class. 
— II. METAJPH. to be bound to the perform- 
ance of any duty, equiv. to / ought, I 
must, foil, by infin. ; so of what is i^equired 
by law or duty in general, with infin. impl. 
Matt, xxiii. 16, os dv djtxoorr) — ocpEiXEi, 
i. e. dTTodovvaL, ver. 18 ; elsewh. with in- 
fin. Lu. xvii. 10, o wcpElXofJiEV TroLTjaaL, 
TTETroLTjKaiuLEV. Johu xix. 7, ocpEiXeL diro- 
davElv, 'he ought to die.' Rom. xv. 1, 
27, & oft. and Class. ; also of what the 
circumstances of time, place, person, &c. 
render proper, — to be fit and proper, I 
ought. Acts xvii. 29. 1 Cor. vii. 36, ovtws 
o^elXel yivEcrQaL. xi. 7, al. ; or of what 
is, from the nature of the case, necessary, 

V. 10, k'TTEL 6(PelXeTE dpa EK TOV KOCTfXOV 

E^EXdsTu. ix. 10. — III. by impl. and from 
the Hebraic idiom, to fail in duty, to be 
in fault toiuards any one, with dat. Lu. xi. 
4; see 'OcPelXettj^ 3. 

"OcpEXov, epic and later form for Att. 
co(pE\ov, aor. 2. of 6<PelXw, prop. I ought, 
but used only in the implied sense of toish- 
ing, UTiNAM : in earlier Gr. writers it is 
still a verb, foil, by inf. and is often pre- 
ceded by cos, EL, eWe : in later writers and 
N. T. o(pEXov is an indec. particle of wish- 
ing, or interject. O that I would that I uti- 
nam, with indie. I Cor. iv. 8, /cat oc^eXov 
ys k^acnXEvaaTE. 2 Cor. xi. 1. Gal. v. 
12. Rev. iii. 15. Sept. and lat. Class. 

"O^fXos, £os ous, TO, {ocpiXXiti,) uti- 
lity , profit, advantage, ICor. XV. 32, Tt juLOL 
TO O0EA.OS ; Ja. ii. 14, 16. Sept. & Class. 

'O^OaXjuo^ouX £ta, as, n-, {o(pda\- 
fjLo^, hovXsLa,) eye- service, i. e. rendered 
only under the master's eye, Eph, vi. 6. 
Col. iii. 22 : not found elsewhere. 

'O<^0aX^os, ou, 6, (d^Gfts, aor. part, 
P 



0^1 



314 



0^1 



of 6\l/o/uLaL^) lit. ' that (organ) by which 
any thing is seen ;' (see Gupa,) the eye^ I. 
PROP, and 1) gener. Matt. v. 29, 6 o^O. 
cou 6 0£^iO9. 1 Cor. XV. 52, kv piTry 6(p- 
daXfxov^ and oft. 2) in phrases, ocpQ. 
dirXov?, iroviTpo^, i. e. sounds or unsound^ 
diseased^ Matt, vi, 22, 23, but o00. ttovi]- 
pos, see also below in 3 ; for acc. tous 
6(pdaXfxov^ in phrases after the verbs dvoL- 
yoj, diavoLyco^ E^opvaau)^ ETraipw, /ca^- 
/uuo), &c. see under these verbs respect- 
ively ; for 2 Pet. ii. 14, see fioLxaXk. 
3) poetically, the eye, as the organ of 
seeing, is put for the person who sees. 
Matt. xiii. 16, /uaKapLOL oi ocpO. Lu. ii. 30,- 
sldov oi d<pd. [jLov. X. 23. Rev. i. 7. Fur- 
ther, as affections of mind are visible 
through the eyes, hence that is attributed 
to the eyes which strictly belongs only to 
the person, e. gr. envy, Matt. xx. 15, 6 
6(pQ. cov TTouiipo's £crTty, OTL ayo) dya- 
Oos £i/u.t ; Mk. vii. 22, ocpd, Troyrjpos, evil 
eye, i. e. envy. So Ecclus. xiv. 10, o00. 
7royT]p6s (pdovspo?, and oft. in Apocr. — 
II. FIG. the eye of the mind, the power of 
perceiving and understanding, o\ ocpd. t-t/v 
cLavoia^, Eph. i. 18, text. rec. other Edd. 
KapSia^. So Clem. Rom. ad 1 Cor. § 19, 
oa/uLaoTL T7j9 i//ux^s- Lucian i. 373, tu- 

(pXd^ EL xj/V^V^ '^OV ocpd, ElsCwll. 

absol. Lu.xix. 42, vvv iKpvfSt] aTro 6(pdaX- 
fxuiv crov. Acts xxvi. 18. So John xii. 40, 
Rom. xi. 8, al. By Hebr. h ocpdaX/jiOL? 
TLvo^, Matt. xxi. 42, (see kv 1,) and oft. 
in Class. 

"0(pL9, £609, o, a serpent, Matt. vii. 10, 
6<pLv iiTLdcoareL avrco ', Mk. xvi. 18, & 
oft. comp. Ps. xci. 13; of the brazen 
serpent, John iii. 14. As the emblem of 
wisdom or cunning, in a good sense. Matt. 
X. 16 ; in a bad sense, xxiii. 33 : hence 
symbol, for Sedan, 2 Cor. xi. 3 ; so Rev. 
xii. 9, 6 6(pi^ 6 dpxaio<s — 6 "Earavd^. 

'0(^pi/s, uos, 17, hroiv, prop, eye-hroia ; 
in N. T. broio or a mountain-edge of a 
precipice, Lu. iv. 29, and Class. 

'Ox^^sw, fut. 77(7(0, (oxXo9,) prop, to 
disturb icith a crotcd, a tumidt, foil, by 
acc. ; in N. T. gener. to harass, vex, only 
in pass. Lu. vi. 18, 6^)(X. vird Trv&vjULdTcov 
aKaddpTcov, where see mv note. Acts v, 
16^. Tob.vi.7. Act. Thorn'. §^12. vtto Sul- 
fxovuiv oxXov/jLsvoL. Class. Evo^XeTar^aL, 
said of a disorder, Hdian. iii. 11. 1. 

''O'X^Xo'TrOLEU), f.ri(T(jO,{6')(Xo<5, TTOLECO,) 

to occasion a croicd, raise a mob or tumidt, 
intrans. Acts xvii. 5 : not found elsewh. 

"0x^0^, ov, 6, a croicd, midtitude, 
Thucyd. vi. 31. I. prop. sing. Matt. ix. 
23, i^Lov Tov OX- Oopv^ovimEvov. ver. 25. 
xiv. 14. xxi. 8. Mk. \dii. 1, and oft. oi 
/jLvpidde? TOV Lu. xii. 1. PI. ol oxXol, 
intens. croivds, multitudes^ Matt. v. 1. 



iowv Tov> jx- iv. 25. vii. 28. xii. 23. 
Sept. and Class. : once pi. ol oxXol^ of 
throngs or midtitudes out of different na- 
tions, and thus equiv. to ncdions, tribes. 
Rev. xvii, 15, Xaoi Kal 6x- £tcri, kol edvi] 
Kul yXuxTcraL. — II. spec, with article, for 
the common people, the plebs. Matt. xiv. 5, 
i(po(3vdii TOV OX' -Xxi. 26, & oft. and 
Class, as Thucyd. vii. 8 ; pi. oi o'xXot, ver. 
46. Acts xvii. 13. — III. gener. a midti- 
tude, a great number, foil, by genit. of 
class, Lu. V. 29, oyXo^ teXcouoov ttoXus. 
vi. 17 ; by ek, John xii. 9 ; o. I«:af09, 
Acts xi. 24, 26. — IV. by impl. tumult, 
uproar, Lu. xxii. 6, aT£p oxXov. Acts 
xxiv. 18, ou u£Ta oxXov. D. Hal. Ant. 
1071. 

'Ox^^pw^a, aT05, TO, {oxypou}, fr. 
4'xw,) prop, a stronghold, fortress, oft. in 
Sept. and Class. ; in N. T. fig. 2 Cor. x. 

4, Trpo? KaQaipEcnv 6xyp(^/^dTU}v, 'in 
order to the destruction of all [spiritual] 
strongholds,' those of sin and Saltan, such 
as superstition, prejudice, perverse reason- 
ing, habitual vice, &c. ail opposed to the 
reception of the Gospel. Fig. in Pro v. x. 
29, dx- ocTLov (polo's Kupiou. Comp. the 
murus aheneus of Horace. 

'0 drd p lov, ov, to, {o\j/ov,) Lat. opso- 
nium, i. e. 'any thing cooked' and eaten 
with bread, as meat, &c. See Xen. Cyr. iv. 

5, 4; in later WTiters, espec. fish, Sept. 
Num. xi. 22. Plut. Symp. 4. Thuc. i. 
138 ; hence in N. T. o'd/dpiou, afi^h, John 
vi. 9, Bvo 6\l/. (comp. Lu. ix. 13.) ver. II, 
and lat. Class. 

'0\!/E, adv. (fr. obsol. ottlo-e,) prop, late, 
i. e. after a long time, Hom. Od. vii. 135 ; 
late in the day or evening, late evening : 
hence in N. T. 1) absol. late evening, 
Mk. xi. 19, oTE oxp^E kyivETO ; put for the 
evening-watch, xiii. 35. Gen. xxiv. II. 2) 
with genit., in the sense of cd the end of, 
at the close of, after. Matt, xxviii. I, o^^k 
(ra(3(3dTCt)v, Trj kirLCpujdKovcrr} eh fxiav 
K.T.X. at the e?id of the sabbath, after the 
sabbath, the sabbath being now ended, 
towards the dawn, equiv. to SiayEvo/uLEvov 
TOV aa(3^. Uk. xvi. I. So Philostr. Yit. 
Ap. iv. 18, 6\lfE /uLvcTTtjpLwv, aud de Ludis 
Pythiis, oxLrk tovtcov, sc. tcou TpuiiKWV^ 
' the time of the Trojan war.' 

"Q-^ Lfxo<5, ov, 6, 77, adj. [o^E,) late, 
latter, Ja. v. 7, e(jo<s dv Xd^rj vetov irpu}- 
'ifxov Kai o\!/.^ where see my note. 

"0\!/LO's, a, ov, adj. (dii/"€,) late, 1) 
prop. Mk. xi. 11, oxlria^ voi] ovarr]9 tt/s 
lopa's, i. e. 'it being now late evening,' al. 
ssepe ; comp. dv//'£. 2) fern. 17 oxlfia, scil. 
u)pa, as subst. eveni7ig, prop, late evening ; 
the Hebrews reckoned two evenings, the 
first from the ninth hour, i. e. about 3 
o'clock until sunset ; the other from sunset 
onward ; comp. Matt. xiv. 15, with ver. 



0^1 



315 



n A I 



23 : in N. T. i) oxj/ia appears to denote 
the former evening in Matt, viii. 16. xiv. 
15. xxvii. 57. Mk. iv. 35. xv. 4'2 ; the 
latter in Matt. xiv. 23, comp. ver. 15. xvi. 
2. XX. 8. xxvi. 20. Mk. i. 32. vi. 47. xiv. 
17. John vi. 16. xx. 19. This latter the 
Greeks called 6\l/La SelXij. Thnc. iv. 59. 

"Oxp-L^, ECUS, 7/, (c)i//ofia/,) prop, 'some- 
thing seen/ a sight, appearance, Hdot. iii. 
30. Xen. An. vi. 1,9; hence in N. T. 
aspect, looks, &c. 1) prop, as denoting the 
visage, face, coiint€?iance, -irpScrujTrov, John 
xi. 44, 7/ oi/Ai«? avTov (TovdapLa) irspLEoi- 
Seto. Rev. i. 16. Sept. and Class, oft. 2) 
external appeaixmcc, mere shoiv, John vii. 
24, fxi} KpivETE KaT oxj/Lv, and Class. 
See my note. 

'Oxj/WVLOV, OV, TO, {6\J/0l/, WVEOfXai,^ 

Lat. opsonium, prop. ' whatever is bought 
to be eaten with bread,' see 6\\fapiov. 
Hired soldiers were at first paid partly in 
meat, grain, fruit, &c.; hence in N. T. 
oxJ/wuLov, a stijmid, wages, prop, of sol- 
diers, Lu. iii. 14, dp/cfitcrt^s tois oi/a. v/ulcov. 
1 Cor. ix. 7 ; fig. and gener. tvages, recom- 
pence, 2 Cor. xi. 8. Rom. vi. 23, Td di/r. 
Ttj^ djULapTLa?, opp. to yapicrfxa tovQeov, 
the former term having allusion to the 
soldiers' regular pay, the latter to the free 
donative occasionally bestowed on the 
troops by the Roman emperor. 



n. 

Hay L^EVM, f. ev<tu3, {irayU,) prop, to 
lay snares for, to snare, Ecclus. ix. 12 ; in 
N. T. fig. to ensnare, entangle, by difficult 
questions, &c., with acc. Matt. xxii. 15, 
oTTojs axjTov 'TrayLdEvcroocrLV kv \6yw. So 
Sept. Prov. vi. 2, Symm. iTrayL^EvQn<5 
kv pv/JLacTL Tov cn-ofxaTO's crov. See also 
Sept. 1 Sam. xxviii. 9. 

Hayl^, lScs, rj, {Trvyvv/ixL,) prop. 
' whatever makes fast or holds fast,' hence 
a snare, trap, gin : 1) p?'op. Lu. xxi. 35, 
cos Trayh kivEXEVGETaL, 'as a snare shall 
it come upon them,' i. e. suddenly, unex- 
pectedly, as beasts are suddenly caught in 
a trap, or pitfal. The word is used both 
in the Sept. and Class. 2) fig. 'what en- 
snares and entangles' one to destruction, as 
v Trayts tov Aiafi., 'the snare of the 
devil,' i. e. wile, stratagem, 1 Tim. iii. 7 ; 
absol. vi. 9, Eh irEipacrixdv Kai 'TrayiSa. 
Josh, xxiii. 13 ; also, by impl., for ccmse 
of destruction, Rom. xi. 9, yEVi^d^ro) rj 
TpuTTEX^a avTwv EL'S TTayiSa. See my note. 

Uddr} jULa, axo?, to, (7rdo-)(a), TraOttj/,) 
prop. ' something suffered,' some suffering, 
whether in body or mind, 7rd0os, or some 
passion, i. e. affection of the mind. In 
N. T. 1) prop, suffering affliction, dis- 
tress ; Heb. ii. 9, did to irdd. tov dav. 



i. e. ' suffering even unto death,' the genit. 
being explanatory: sing, in Xen. Hier. i. 
36 ; also pi. Ta iradv/uLaTa, sufferings, 
calamities, Rom. viii. 18. 2 Cor. i. 5, Ta 
Trad. TOV Xp. ' the sufferings which Christ 
endured,' Phil. iii. 10, et al. ssepe, and 
Class. 2) meton. passion, i. e. affection 
of mind. Gal. v. 24, Tijv crdpKa crvu tol9 
irad. Kai Tats ETrLdvfxLaL<s. Rom. vii. 5, 
Ta TT. Tu)V d[xapTL(jov, So oft. in Class. 

naO jjTos, ov, 6, 77, adj. {Trda-x^t '^f^- 
Oelv,) liable to or susceptible of suffering, 
(so Plut. ix. 501, '7radi]Td (TwfJiaTa,) or 
passibilis, that can suffer, Philo, p. 805 ; 
in N. T. destined to suffer. Acts xxvi. 23, 
Xiyojv — EL TraOijTos 6 XptcTTos, ' that 
Christ must needs suffer,' i. e. according 
to the prophets ; comp. Lu. xxiv. 26. 

nd0o§, £os ofs, TO, (Trdcxw, TraGsif,) 
suffering, e. gr. affliction, calamity, as gener. 
in Class. ; in N. T. passion, i. e. affection 
of mind, espec. lust, concupiscence, Rom.i. 
26, TrdOi] aTLfjiLa^, ' infamous lusts.' Xen. 
Cyr. V. 5, 10. 

TlaLSay coy 09, ov, 6, (Trats, dyu), 
dyioyr]^) a pedagogue. In Class, a person 
of mean condition, a freedman, or even a 
slave, to whose care children were com- 
mitted, in order to train, instruct, and dis- 
cipline them at home, as a sort of private 
tutor, and to conduct them to the public 
school ; so answering to the kirLTpoTro^ at 
Plut. de Educ. § 7. Xen. Laced, ii. 1, 2. iii. 
1, who expressly distinguish between these 
and SLdaa-KaXovs, 'the masters'' of the 
public schools. — In N. T. gener. an in- 
structor, 1 Cor. iv. 15 ; fig. of the Mosaic 
law. Gal. iii. 24, 25, o vSjULO^ iraid. rifJioov 
yiy. €ts Xp. & with reference to the first- 
mentioned proper sense of the word ; the 
leading idea being that of bringing to and 
preparing for, as the paedagogus did for the 
didasculus, and the Law for the Gospel. 

Ilatodpioi/, ov, TO, (7rat5,) ahoy, lad, 
John vi. 9. Sept. and Class. 

Ilat^Eta, as, r\, (Trat^Euo),) prop. ^7z<3 
training of a child, and hence gener. edu- 
cation, as it consists either in instruction, 
or in morcd discipline, informing the mind, 
or forming the morals : 1) gener. Eph. vi. 

4, EKTpkcpETE aVTd EV TTaLSELCC KvpLOV, 

denoting ' such a course of moral discipline 
and religious instruction as shall prepare 
them for the Lord.' 2 Tim. iii. 16, 'TraiS. fj 
kv dLKaLoarvvrj. And so Class. 2) by 
synecd. of part for the whole, correction, 
chastisement, Heb. xii. 5, sq. Ecclus. xviii. 
14. 

Hat^euTJ/s, ov, 6, (Trat^euo),) an in- 
structor, preceptor, ^to^. of boys ; in N. T. 
1) gener. Rom. ii. 20, TraLdEVTtjv dcppo- 
vcov. 2) by synecd. a corrector, chastiser, 
Heb. xii. 9. Sept. Hos. v. 2. 



n Ai 



316 



n A A 



JlaL^EVu)^ f. EvaroD^ (Trats,) prop, to 
train up a child, and hence gener. to edu- 
cate, discipline, instruct, trans. 1) gener. 
with dat. of thing, Acts vii. 22, gTrat^euO?; 
Mwucr?}? irdarj crocpLa AiyvitTLujv : with 
KaTOL, xxii. 3. Jos. and Class. In the 
sense of to teach, admonish, by word or 
deed. 2 Tim. ii. 25, kv TrpaoTjjTt iraL^s-v- 
ovra. Tit. ii. 12 : pass, with inf. 1 Tim. i. 
20, 'iva. iraLoevdcocTL jui) (3Xa(T<pi]fj.eLi/. 
Sept. and Class. 2) by synecd. of part 
for the whole, to correct, chastise, as chil- 
dren, Heb. xii. 7, 10, and oft. in Sept. ; said 
of God's chastening, by afflictions, cala- 
mities, 1 Cor. xi. 32. 2 Cor. vi. 9. Rev. 
iii. 19, and Sept. ; hence of malefactors, to 
scourge, Lu. xxiii. 16, iraLoevaa's avrov 
dTToXva-u), and Sept. 

TL a Lo Lod EU, adv. {TraLOLOv.) from a 
child, from childhood, Mk. ix. 21. 

TLaLOLOu, ov, to, (Trals,) a little child : 
1) said of a child recently bom, a habe, in- 
fant, Ln. xviii. 16, 17, ra Trat^ia, comp. ver. 
15, (3p&(pi] : also of those more advanced, 
Matt. xiv. 21. XV. 38. xviii. 2—5. Sept. 
and Class. Spec, of a male child, bo?/, 
recently born. Matt. ii. 8, sq. ; also more 
advanced, Mk. ix. 24, 36, Sept. and Class. 
Of a female child, girl, partly grown, Mk. 
V. 39. Used as a term of kindness or 
affability by elderly persons or superiors to 
those with whom they conversed, corre- 
sponding to carissimi in Latin, John xxi. 
5. 1 John ii. 13, 18. As an endearing 
appellation for the followers of Christ, 
Heb. ii. 13, 14. 

TlaL^LCTK-i], 179, 77, (Trals,) a girl, young 
maiden, free-born ; in N. T. a bondmaid, 
female slave, or servant. Matt. xxvi. 69. 
Gal, iv. 22, 'iva ek T775 Trai^. kul 'iva ek 
T^s gXeuOipas, oft. in Sept. and Class. 

IXa/Jo), fut. 'TTai'^ofxaL, [irdl's,) aor. 1. 
E7raL<ra, prop, to play or sport as a child, 
as oft. in Class. In N. T. used in a gene- 
ral sense (also found in Sept. 1 Chron. 
XV. 29, and Hdot. ix. 11) to play, as by 
leaping, dancing, singing, and all other 
kinds of festal sport, 1 Cor. x. 7, EKadicTEv 
6 Xao's (payElv /cat ttleIv, /cat dvEorTt]crav 
iraVC^ELv. 

IlaTs, 7rat5o5, 6, v, a child, male or 
female ; a hoy ; a girl ; pi. ol iraloe?, 
children, &c. : spoken of all ages from 
infancy up to full-grown youth : I. prop, 
and gener. Matt. ii. 16, dvEtKE irdvi-a^ 
Tous Tral^as tous ev B. xxi. 15 ; sing. 
6 Trals, xvii. 18. John iv. 51, 6 Trats crov 
Jj;. Acts XX. 12; also 77 Trats, Lu. viii. 
31, comp. ver. 42. Sept. and Class. — II. 
(like Engl, boy, and Lat. puer,) put for 
servant : 1) prop, and gener. for dovXo9, 
a servant, slave. Matt. viii. 6, comp. ver. 
9. Lu. vii. 7. Sept. and Class. 2) an at- 
tendant^ minister^ as of a king, Matt. xiv. 



2, eItte TOts iraLalu avTOV. Sept. and 
sometimes in Class. Diod. Sic. xvii. 36. 
3) 6 7ra7§ Tou Oeov, tlie servant of God^ 
spoken of a minister or ambassador of 
God ; of David, Lu. i. 69 ; of Israel, ver. 
54 ; also of Jesus the Messiah, Matt. xii. 
18, i^ov 6 7raL<s /mov. Sept. oft. 

Hat 60, f. TraiVo), to sti^ike, smite, vdth 
the fist, a rod, sword, &c. Matt. xxvi. 68. 
Mk. xiv. 47, £7rat(T£ tou ^ouXov, and oft. 
in Sept. and Class. ; of a scorpion, to strike, 
sting. Rev. ix. 5. 

n a X a t, adv. of old, formerly. So Horn. 
II. ix. 523, fxifxv^ixai tooe 'ipyov £ya> 
7ra/\at, ovtl viov je. j ) prop, and gener. 
Matt. xi. 21. Lu. x. 13. Heb. i. 1, irdXac 
6 0£o§ XaXvaa's rols Tra^pdcnv, Jude 4, 
OL TT. TrpoyEypafxjULEvoL. Jos. Vit. 65. Hence 
2) oi TToXaL, as adj. former, 2 Pet. i. 
9, TUiv irdXai avTov djuapTijiudTcov, ' the 
sins committed before he was converted to 
Christianity.' So Eurip. Orest. 129, eo-tl 
77 irdXaL yvvi], ' the same woman who 
was formerly.' 

HaXatos, a, ov, adj. (TraXat,) oZc?.• 
l) in age or time, old, former, not recent; 
oluo^, Lu. V. 39. X^u/uLi], 1 Cor. v. 7. <5ta- 
driKi-j, 2 Cor. iii. 14. ivroXi], 1 John ii. 7. 
dvi)pu)7ro9, Rom. vi. 6. Sept. and Class. 
2) from use, eld, xvorn out; L/uLaTiov, 
Matt. ix. 16. dcTKol, ver. 17 ; gener. xiii. 
52. Sept. and Class. 

HaXatoT^js, 7JT09, 77, (-TraXatos,) prop. 
oldness, as oft. in Plato, ancientness, (so 
antiquitas in Cic. pro Planco, c. 18;) also 
by impl. cuitiquatedness, Rom. vii. 6, iv 
7ra\atoT7]Tt ypdjjifxaTO^^ equiv. to kv 
ypdjULfxaTL iraXaLto. 

UaXaLoco, f. wa'(x), {iraXaLO?,) lit. 
to let grow old, pass, to become old, prop, 
in age ; Sept. and Class. : in N. T. from 
use, pass, to he ivorn out, Lu. xii. 33, ^a- 
XdvTLa jULi] TraXaLoviuLEva, 'which do not 
decay.' Heb. i. 11. viii. 13, to iraXaiou- 
fxEvov Kal yiipd(TKov, 'what has become 
old and worn out.' Metaph. to mahe anti- 
quated, render or consider as obsolete, — 
to abrogate, irEiraXaLcoKE ti)v 'rrpwTijv, 
scil. diaQjiKTiv, Heb. viii. 13. The Com- 
mentators here compare only the Lat. law- 
phrase antiquare legem; but the present 
mode of expression is not unprecedented 
in the Greek Class. Thus in Plato Conv. 
p. 208, we have, to) to dirLov Kal TraXai- 

OUjULEVOV ETEpOV VEOV kyKaTaXEL'TTELV, 

where aTr. /cat iraX. means ' quod abit et 
antiquatur,' and is exactly similar to to 
7ra\. Kat yiipdaKov in the passage of St. 
Paul ; there being in each a hendiadys 
introduced to strengthen the sense : in the 
one case we may render, ' what is worn 
out and superannuated ;' in the other, 
' what is gone off and worn out,' as we say 
' dead and gone.' 



HA A 



317 



HAN 



HaXt;, r;, (TraWco,) a ivrcstUng ; 
in N. T. fig. a sfru(f(/le^ combat., Eph. vi. 
12, as applied to the spiritual combat with 
the world, flesh, and Devil. 

IlaXiyyfii/EO'ia, as, 7'/, (TrtiXtj/, yti/e- 
cis,) prop, regeneration., phi/sical repro- 
dit4)tion ; but in N. T. used 1) in a moral 
sense, regeneration^ new birth., i. e. ' the 
change, by spiritual grace, from a carnal 
nature to a Christian life,' Tit. iii. 5. 2) in 
the sense of renovation., restoration., resti- 
tution., i. e. to a former state, equiv. to 
diroKaTCLGTaaL's ; in N. T. spoken of the 
complete external manifestation of the 
Messiah's kingdom, when all things are to 
be delivered from their present corruption, 
and restored to spiritual purity and splen- 
dour; see Matt, xix.28, kv Ttj TiaXiyyevE- 
(ria^oTav Kadicn] oXio^ tov avOpAiri dpo- 
vov do^i]^ avTov., comp. Acts iii. 21. Jos. 
Ant. xi. 3, 9. Cicero ad Att. vi. 6.^ This 
interpretation, however, though probably 
the true one, is far from being firmly esta- 
blished as such. TLak. may here denote 
(what the ancient and most modern Ex- 
positors suppose it to mean) the resurrec- 
tion to judgment ; in which sense the term 
is used by Philo more than once. And 
certainly the following context, together 
with the similar passage. Matt. xxv. 31, 
seems to require this interpretation. 

TlaXii/, adv. bacJc, back again., again^ 
p?»op. as implying return back to a former 
place, state, act, &c. like Lat. and Engl. 
re : I. prop, of place, espec. after verbs 
of motion, Mk. ii. 1, ttuXlv sio-rjXd&v £k 
KaTT. V. 21. John vi. 15. xiv. 3. 2 Cor. 
xiii. 2. Phil. i. 26, Sid rfj^ kfxrj^ Trap- 
ova-ia^ ttoXlv irpo^ vfxd^: so Xa/ii^dvELv 
irakiv^ to take back again,' John x. 17. 
Acts X. 16. xi. 10. OLKodofXELV 7raA.ty, re- 
build^ Gal. ii. 18. — II. of time, again.,an- 
other time., once more: 1) gener. Matt. iv. 
8, irdXiv '7rapa\ajUL(3dvsL avtov 6 Aid^o- 
Xo9. XX. 5. xxvi. 42. Acts xxvii. 28. Rom. 
viii. 15. In the sense at another time, 
gener. John i. 35, Actsxvii. 32; including 
also perhaps the idea of place, equiv. to 
'again in another place,' Matt. iv.7. Rom. 
XV. 10, sq. 2) hence as a continuative par- 
ticle connecting circumstances which refer 
to the same subject, again., once more.^ 
further., Matt. v. 33, Trakiv ijKovaaTs. 
xiii. 44, sq. Heb. i. 5, oft. and Class. So 
where there is an implied antithesis, a^am, 
on the other hand, contra. Matt. iv. 7. 
2 Cor. x. 7. Gal. v. 3. 1 John ii. 8, and 
■ Class. 

Uafji'TrXriQ El, adv. (7ra/A7rXt]0>;9, fr. 
Tras, 7rA.^0o§,) the whole multitude togetJier, 
all at once, Lu. xxiii. 18. 

IXa/xTToXus, TToXXt], TToXu, adj. (Tras, 
'TToXus,) very much, very great, vast, Mk. 



viii. 1, irafiTroXXov oxXou ovto^, and 
Class. 

Tlav dox^^o^i ou, to, {iravSox^^^-,) 
prop. ' a place where all are received,' i. e. 
an inn, in the East cc khan, caravanserai, 
Lu. X. 34, and lat. Class. 

Ilavdox^^^-, k(ji}9, 6, [iravSoxo^-, fr. 
Tras, ^£)(o^a/,) prop, 'one who receives 
all,' i. e. the keeper of an inn or caravan- 
serai, a host, Lu. X. 35, and Class. 

Tlavriyv p i^, £609, 77, (Tras, ayup/s,) 
prop. ' an assembly of the whole people,' 
held to celebrate any public festival or 
solemnity, as games, public sacrifices, &c.; 
so oft. in Class. ; hence gener. a festive 
convocation or assembly ; in N. T. occ. only 
Heb. xii. 23, fivpLacnv, dyyiXcov iravr]- 
yvpzL, Kal EKKXr^oria Trpton-oTOKcov k.t.X, 
' to countless throngs, [even] the joyful 
assembly of angels,' i. e. as hymning the 
praises of God around his throne. Comp. 
Rev. V. 11. 

HavoLKL, adv. (ttk^, oI/cos,) with all 
one's household, Acts xvi. 34. Sept. 

UavoTrXia, as, 77, (Tra^oTrXos, fr. 
7ra5, ottXov,) prop, complete armour, of- 
fensive and defensive, Lu. xi. 22 ; fig. of 
spiritual armour, Eph. vi. 11, 13, where 
see my note. 

Ilai/oi'p'y ta, as, 7?, {iravovpyo^^ 
craftiness, Lu. xx. 23, al. and Class. 

Xiavox) py o<$, ov, 6, 77, adj. (Tras, 
'ipyov,) prop, one who can turn his hand 
to any thing, capable of doing any thing ; 
hence, dexterous, clever, as oft. in Sept. 
But, like our words cunning and knoiving, 
the term came to have a bad sense, as ap- 
plied to one who scruples at nothing, ' au- 
dax omnia perpeti, qui ruit per vetitum 
nefas.' ^sch. Choeph. 378, (SpoTtiov tXv- 
fxovL Kal Travovpycp x^ipi. Also said of 
one who is knoiving., but whose knowledge 
is craft, 2 Cor. xii. 16. Sept. Job v. 12. 
Prov. xii. 16. Jos. Bell. i. 11, 13. Xeu. 
An. ii. 5, 12. 6, 13. Aristot. Eth. vi. 12. 

TiavTaxoQ^v, adv. (Tras,) from all 
sides, from every quaiier, Mk. i. 45. 

TlavTaxov, adv. (Tras,) in all places, 
every where, Mk. xvi. 20. 

TlavTsXr]^, io9 ous, 6, 77, adj. (Tras, 
TeXos,) ' to be wholly ended,' complete, 
i. e. gener. perfect, entire ; in N. T. only 
in the adverbial phrase, eis to TravTsXe^, 
wholly, entirely, i. e. as referring to time, 
always, Heb. vii. 25 ; /ui; £ts to tt. — not 
at all, Lu. xiii. 11. Jos. Ant. vi. 2, 3. -^1. 
V. H. xii. 20. 

Hdvn-r], adv. (Tras,) every ichere ; in 
N. T. of manner, in every way, in all 
things. Acts xxiv. 3, and Class. 

HdvToQzv. adv. (ttcs,) from every 
P 3 



HAN 



318 



HAP 



side or quarter^ and hence, on every side, 
round about, Lu. xix. 43. Heb. ix. 4. 

TLavTOKpaTtjop, opos, o, (Tras, Kpa- 
Tto),) in Class, omnipotent, as applied to a 
ruler; but in N. T. with article, the Omiii- 
potent, the Almighty, said of God, 2 Cor. 
vi. 18. Rev. i. 8, al. and oft. in Sept. 

TLdvTOTE, adv. (Tras,) always, at all 
times, ever. Matt. xxvi. 11. Mk. xiv. 7. 

nai/TW9, adv. (7ra§,) ivholly, alto- 
gether, entirely: 1) prop. 1 Cor. v. 10, 
Kai oh TravToo^. ix. 10, and Class. 2) 
gener. hy all means, assuredly, Lu. iv. 23, 
iravTOi^ kpiinri fxoL. Acts xxi. 22. 1 Cor. 
ix. 22, tVa TravTuo's tlvcc^ craxTco. Tob. 
xiv. 8. ^1. V. H. i. 32. So in a neg. 
reply it is emphatic, Rom. iii. 9, ov ttccv- 
T(x)9, not at all, 7iot in the least. Xen. Cyr. 

viii. 4, 10. 

Tiapa, prep, governing thegenit.dat. 
and accus., with the primary signif. near, 
near hy ; expressing thus the relation of 
immediate vicinity or proccimity, which is 
diiferently modified according to the force 
of the different cases. I. with the genit. ; 
where, as combined with the force of the 
genit. itself, it expresses the sense from 
Tiear, from with ; it is found, in prose 
writers and in N. T., only with a gen. of 
person, implying a going forth or proceed- 
ing from the near vicinity of any one, 
from the presence or side of any one, and 
thus takes the general sense from : i. 
prop, after verbs of motion, as of coming, 
sending, &c. Mk. xiv. 43, TrapayivE^aL 
'lov^a<5, Kal o)(/Vos 7roXv9 irapd rwv 
dpxi-Epiuov. Lu. viii. 49. John xv. 26. 

xvii. 8 ; so after ilvaL, to he from, — to 
came from, vi. 46. vii. 29. Of things, Lu. 
vi. 19, ovuaiJLL^ Trap' avTOV k^rjXdEV, 'a 
virtue went out from him.' — ii. fg. after 
verbs of asking, receiving, or those which 
imply these notions. Matt. ii. 4. ver. 7. 
XX. 20. Mk. viii. 11. Acts iii. 2; of hear- 
ing, learning, &c. from any one, John i. 
41, aKovauvTcou Trapd 'I. Acts xxiv. 8. 
Gal. i. 12. 2 Tim. iii. 14. 2 John 4 ; of 
receiving, obtaining, buying, being pro- 
mised, and the like, from any one. Matt. 

xviii. 19, ysvricrETaL auTol^ irapd tov 
IlaTpos. Mk. xii. 2, 'iva irapct tuiv ye- 
woywv Xd(3ri. Lu. vi. 34. Acts vii. 16. 

ix. 14. Rom', xi. 27. Eph. vi. 8. After 
elvai, expr. or impl. to he from any one, 
i. e. to come, he given, hestowed, from or hy 
any one, John xvii. 7, TravTa oaa didco- 
/cas jULOL, irapd crou egtlv. Acts xxvi. 22. 
2 John 3 ; so of hospitality or gifts, Lu. x. 
7. Phil. iv. 18, Tct Trap' vp.oov : or gener. 
to come, he derived or possessed, from any 
one, Mk. v. 26, to. Trap' avTTrs Travra, 
i. e. ' all she had from herself,' all her 
own property; so of persons, ol 'jrapd 
Ttyos, prop, those from near any one, i. e. 



his kindred, Mk. iii. 21. — itt. fig. with 

gen. of pers. as the source, author, from 
whom any thing proceeds, is derived, &c. 

1) gener. Matt. xxi. 42, irapa Kvpiou 
syivETo avTt}. Lu. i. 45. ii. 1. John i. 6. 

2) hence after pass, verbs instead of viro. 
Acts xxii. 30, to, nrL KaTr]yopiLi-aL irapd 
Toov 'lovdaicov. — II. with the DAT. both 
of pers. and thing, expressing rest or posi- 
tion near, hctrd hy, with, and with dat. pi. 
among : i. prop, of place, after verbs im- 
plying rest or remaining in a place: 1) 
gener. and with dat. of thing, John xix. 
25, eLa-TJiKBLcrav Trapd tw aTavpw tov 
'I. Foil, by dat. of pers. as indicating 
place. Matt. vi. 1, juLadov ovk e^. "Trapd 
TM IlaTpi vfxcov. xxii. 25. John i. 40, 
viii. 38. xvii. 5. Acts x. 6. 1 Cor. xvi. 2, 
Trap' kavTM TSiTco, with himself, i. e. at 
home. Col. iv. 16, Trap' vixiv, anwng you, 
in your presence, 2 Tim. iv. 13. Rev. ii. 
13, al. 2) rarely after verbs of motion, 
and only when subsequent rest is also 
implied ; so in Engl, hy, ivith ; Lu . ix. 47, 
'I. kirtXa^OfXEVo^ iraLoLov, 'icrrr^cTEv avTo 
Trap EuvTM. xix. 7. — II. foil, by dat. of 
person, the reference being to the person 
himself, without regard to place : 1) prop, 
and gener. ivith, among. Matt. xxi. 25, oi 

dLEXoyLXpvTO Trap' kavToX?. Lu. i. 30. 
ii. 52. 2 Cor. i. 17. 1 Pet. ii. 20. 2) me- 
taph. ivith or before any one, i. e. ' in his 
sight, presence, or judgment,' Acts xxvi. 
8. Rom. ii. 13, ditcaLOL Trapd tm 0. xi. 
25. 1 Cor. iii. 19. Ja. i. 27. 2 Pet. iii. 8; 
so ii. 11, Trapri Kvpico, before the Lord, 
as Judge ; also of what is in the poiver of 
any one. Matt. xix. 26, Trapa dy6pct)Trots 
TovTo dduvaTov ecttl, irapd ck Qew 
TrdvTa SvuaTa : so of moral qualities 
which are with any one, i. e. belonging to 
his character, Rom. ii. 11, ovk 'iarTL TTpoa- 
(x)7ro\i)\lfLa Trapd tw 0£a. ix. 14. Ja. i. 
17. 3) fig. 1 Cor. vii. 24, k'/cao-ros ku <Z 
kKXridri, kv tovtw /ulevetco irapd Bsw, 
ivith God, i. e. in union by faith with him, 
= ku KvpLcp, ver. 22. — III. with the AC- 
CUSAT., prop, expressing motion near by^ 
near to a place, &c. i. prop, implying 
motion along or by the side of any thing, 
i. e. near, by, along, after verbs of motion, 
with acc. of thing, Matt. iv. 18, irepiira- 
Twv 6 'I. Trapd Ti]v ^dXaccrav. xiii. 4. 
Mk. iv. 15. — II. as expressing motion to 
a place, i. e. place whither, near to, to, at, 
after verbs of motion, and so — eh or 
Trpos with acc. Matt. xv. 29, /jLETa^d^ 
kKEldev, rjXdE irapd tt]U ^dXacrcrav, ' he 
came near to the sea.' ver. 30. Acts iv. 
35. vii. 58. — III. sometimes also express- 
ing the idea of rest, (after previous motion,) 
near a place, &c. near, hy, at, irapd 
with dat. 1) prop, after verbs of rest or 
remaining, Matt. xiii. 1, £/cd0rjTO irapd 
T7)v ^dX. Mk. v. 21. Lif. v. 1. vii. 38, 



HAP 



319 



HAP 



Trapa Toi»s Tro'^a? avrov. X. 39. 2) mc- 
taph. of the ground or reason hi/ or aloiig 
idth \vhicli ctT conclusion follows, by reason ^ 
of.^ because of] irapa n-ovro = thereby^ 
therefore^ on this account, 1 Cor. xii. 15, 
16, ou Trapa tovto ovk ecttlv I/c tov , 
croifxaTO^. — IV. as denoting motion by or 
past a place, i. e. a passing by^ going be- 
yond ; in N. T. only fig. as implying a 
failure, in the general sense of other tltan^ 
viz. 1) equiv. to Engl, aside from^ not 
coincident \^ith, not conformable to, i. e. 
contrary to^ against^ Acts xviii. 13, irapa 
TOV i/d/xoy, aside from the laiv^ i. e. con- 
trary to our law, Rom. i. 26, irapa (puaLV. 
xi. 24. iv. 18, Trap' kXTTiSa. xvi. 17. Gal. 
1. 8, and oft. in Class. Yet, perhaps, in 
none of these passages is the sense, strictly 
speaking, contrary to^ but only prceter, 
besides. This is plainly the case in Rom. 
xi. 24, and xvi. 17, as compared with Gal. 
i. 8, 9. In Acts XYiii. 13, the difference 
was only the maimer of worshipping God ; 
not as if the person in question had been 
an Atheist. As to Rom. i. 26, and all 
other passages where Trapa <pvcrLv occurs, 
we must bear in mind the admitted dis- 
tinction between things prcBter naturam 
and contra naturam ; of which the passage 
in question affords a good illustration. In 
the freq. phrase Trap' sXirLoa the prep, 
cannot, from the nature of the term kXjrh^ 
denote more than prceter. And it were 
vain to allege the passage of Rom. iv. 18, 
because the Oxymoron there and the anti- 
thesis so modify the sense, as to make the 
passage of no use on any question as to the 
proper force of the phrase. 2) equiv. to 
beside., in the sense of except., prop, failing, 
falling short, 2 Cor. xi. 24, TEorarapaKovTa 
Trapa fxiav, forty stripes save one., i. e. 
falling short by one. 3) equiv. to Engl. 
past^ in the sense of beyond.,- more than., so 
gener. Heb. xi. 11, Trapa. Kaipov riXiKia^.) 
past the proper age. More commonly z=. 
more than., above., beyond., so gener. Lu. 
xiii. 2, aixapTUiXoL Trapa TrdvTa^. Rom. 
i. 25. xii. 3, Trap' o ^st (ppouelu. xiv. 5,- 
see Heb. i. 9 ; so after comparatives, Lu. 
iii, 13, fJLyiS&v TrXiov Trapa. to otaT^Tay- 
ixivov. ileb. i. 4. ii. 7, 9 ; after aXXo<s., 
1 Cor. iii. 11. — Note. In comp. Trapa 
implies 1) proximity, near., by., as Trapa- 
KadiX^ct)., TrapLarTi-ifXL^TrapadaXdcrario^., Sec. 
2) motion or direction near to., to., by., as 
Trapa^dXXu)., Trapa^iooo/xi, Trapiyoa^ Tra- 
paTsiVoj, &c. 3) motion by or past any 
place, a going beyond, as Trapayco, Trap- 
epxofJ.aL.,TrapaTrXi(jD : 4) fig. of whatever 
swerves from the true point, comes short 
of it, or goes beyond it, like Engl. 7nis- 
(i. e. wrongly, falsely,) as TrapaKovw, 
TrapaQecopio) : or like Lat. prceter., trans., 
implying violation, as Trapapaivco., Trapa- 
vofxiu) : also by stealth., as Trapfio-ayoj, &e. 



napa/3a£i/a), f. ^^(rofxai., aor. 2. Trap- 
£j8iji/, prop, to go by one's side., to accom- 
pany ; as one of the warriors in a chariot ; 
to pass by or over in silence ; usually and 
in N. T. only fig. to go aside from., trans- 
gress., with accus. Matt. xv. 2, 3, v/uleT^ 
Trapa/3. Ti]v kvToXriv tov 0. absol. 2 John 
9 ; praign. Acts i. 25, 1^ r\<s TrapifSt} 'lou- 
^a§, ' from which Judas by transgression 
fell away,' i. e. which he deserted by 
transgression. Jos. Ant. xiv. 9, 2, ovckv 
Trpos 'T. evvoia? Kai ttoXeu)^ Trapi^r]. 

Ilapa(3dXX(o, fut. (SaXco, prop, to 
throiv near., cast before., to lay down by any 
one, hold out to view; in N.T. 1) trans, to 
place side by side., fig. to compare., tl 'iv 
TLVi, Mk. iv. 30. Hdot. iv. 198.^ Xen. 
Mem. ii. 4, 3. 2) intrans. or with kavTov 
impl. prop, to throw on^s self near., i. e. to 
betake one's self any where, to go to a place, 
espec. by ship, foil, by £i§, Acts xx. 15, 
TrapE^dXojULEV eIs Sa/xoy. Hdot. iv. 179, 
et al. in Class. 

napd/3a(rt5, £ws, 77, {rrapa^aivd),) 
prop, a passing over., Plut. vi. 466 ; but 
gener. in a moral sense, transgression ; 
Tou vSfxov., Rom. ii. 23; absol. iv. 15. v. 
14, oft. Sept. and Class. 

napa/3aT>7§, ou, 6, {TrapafSaivu).,) a 
transgressor., vofxov^ Rom. ii. 25, 27. Ja. 
ii. 11 ; absol. Gal. ii. 18. Ja. ii. 9. Sept. 
and Class., as jfEsch. Eum. 540. Macrob. 
V. 19. 

TLapa^idX^o fxai,., fut. acro/xat, depon. 
mid. to force., do violence to any thing, con- 
trary to nature or right. So Plut. x. 118, 
fxi] TrapafBidX^EadaL Tats rjdovaT? Ti}V 
cpifOTLV. In N. T. to compel, constrain by 
overmuch entreaty, foil, by acc. Lu. xxiv. 
29. Acts xvi. 15, where see my note. Sept. 
and Class. 

HapajSoXsuo^at, f. sucro/zat, depon. 
mid. {TrapajSoXo^., fr. Trapa^dXXofxai.,) 
to expose one's self to danger., Phil. ii. 30, 
in late edd. for text. rec. Trapa^ovX. (see 
my note,) Trapa^oXEV{TdfxEvo<s Trj \l/v')(^y., 
' exposing himself in respect to his lite,' 
i. e. regardless of his life. 

Hapa/JoX?;, 17, (TrapajSaXXw,) 

prop, a placing things side by side; in 
N. T. fig. comparison, similitude : 1 ) gener. 
Mk. iv. 30, kv Troia Trap. Trapa^dXwfjiEv 
axjTYiv ; Heb. xi. 19, kv Trapa(3oXrj., i. e. 
figuratively, or ' with similitude,' see my 
note. In the sense of image., figure., sym- 
bol., r= TUTTOS, Heb. ix.9, r}TL<s Trapa- 

■ /SoXtj, ' a symbol or type of spiritual things 
; in Christ,' comp. ver. 11. 2) spec, a 

■ parable., i. e. a short discourse, usually a 
, narrative, under which something else is 
, figured, or in which the fictitious is em- 

■ ployed to represent and illustrate the real, 
. (see more in my note on Matt. xiii. 3,) so 



HAP 



320 



HAP 



Matt. xiii. 24, 31, 33, often ; once of a 
series of comparisons, including also a 
parable, Lu. xiv. 7, comp.also ver. 7 — 11, 
12 — 14, 16 — 24. 3) in a wider sense, a 
figurative discourse^ a dark saying^ i. e. 
obscure and full of hidden meaning, Matt, 
xiii. 35, dvoL^co iv 7rapa(3o\aL^ to aTOfxa 
(xov : hence also = a proverb, adage, Lu. 
iv. 23. 

HapafiovXevojixaL, f. evcrofxai, to 
misconsidt, Phil. ii. 30, in text, rec, where 
lat. edd. read Trapa^oX&vofxaL : see my 
note. 

Tlapayys.\La, as, 17, {irapayyiX- 
Xw,) prop, an announcement, declaration, 
by authority ; in N. T. command, charge ; 
in Class, used of an order from a military 
officer ; from magistrates. Acts v. 28, ou 
irapayyikLO, irapi^yyeLXafxiv v/ullu; xvi. 
24; from teachers of religion, 1 Thess. iv. 
2, TrapayyfiXias kBajKafXEv v/jilv did tov 
Kvp. 'I. 1 Tim. i. 5. See my note. 

HapayyiWco, f. sXco, {irapd, dy- 
ysWct),) prop, to bring or send word to 
any one ; hence in Class, and N, T. to 
direct, command, charge, and 'irapayyiX- 
Xeiv /ult], to forbid, with dat. of pers. expr. 
or impl. the thing commanded being put 
in the acc. or infin. or with 'Iva, &c. 1) 
with dat. and acc. 2 Th. iii. 4, 10 ; with 
dat. impl. 1 Cor. xi. 17. 1 Tim. v. 7. 2) 
with dat. and infin. aor. Mk. viii. 6. Lu. 
V. 14. viii. 29 ; with present, ix. 21, 
'TrapjiyyELXe /uiyidavi XiysLV tovto. Acts 
i. 4. iv. 18; with acc. and inf. pres. 1 Tim. 

vi. 13; with dat. impl. Acts xv. 5. 3) 
further, with dat. and ii/a, Mk. vi. 8. 
2 Th. iii. 12 : foil, by dat. with KaOco^, 
1 Th. iv. 11. 

IlapayivoiULaL, fut. y€.vri(TOfiaL, prop, 
in pres. to become near or present, i. e. to 
come near, approach^ arrive. Matt. iii. 1, 
(see my note) 13. Mk. xiv. 43. John iii. 
23 : aor. 2. 'KapeyEv6ixr]v, to be near, be 
present, i. e. to have come or arrived : 1 ) 
gener. and absol. John iii. 23, irapEyi- 
vovTO Kal k^aTTTLX^ovTO. Acts xi. 23. 
XX v. 7. With an adjunct of place whither; 
foil, by £15 of place, Matt. ii. 1 ; by iTvl 
with acc. of place, iii. 13; with acc. of 
pers. to come upon or against any one, Lu. 
xxii. 52 ; by ttjoos with acc. of person, 

vii. 4. With an adjunct of place whence ; 
as aTTo, Matt. iii. 13. oSov, Lu. xi. 6. 
'wapd TLV09, Mk. xiv. 43. 2) ~ to come 
or appear publicly ; of John the Baptist, 
Matt. iii. 1 ; of Jesus, Lu. xii. 51. 3) — 
to come bach, return, Lu. xiv. 21. 

Tlapdy w, f. ajw, (Trapa, ctyw,) to 
lead along, near, by, or past ; hence, 1 ) in 
N. T. mid. irapdyoimai, to pass along, pass 
away, absol. 1 John ii. 8, 77 a-KOTia irap- 
dytraL : fig.— to disappear, perish, 1 John 



ii. 17, 6 Koa-fio^ Trapdy&TaL, see my note. 
2) intrans. Trapdyco, to pass along, pass 
by. Matt. xx. 30, aKovaauTe^ otl 'lr]<70V^ 
irapdy&L. Mk. ii. 14. xv. 21. John ix. 1. 
In the sense of to pass on further, to pass 
aivay. Matt. ix. 9, Trapdycov 6 'Irjar. 
kK&ldsv. ver. 27. John viii. 59 : fig. to 
disappear, pei'ish, 1 Cor. vii. 31, to 
(TXni^oi TOV Koa/uLov T. irapdys.L. See my 
note. 

Tlapa^Eiy fxaTiX^ca, f. tew, (Trapa- 

daiyjuia, fr. irapadi'iKwixL,) to make an 
example of, expose to public shame, with 
acc. Matt. i. 19, ixi\ ^tXaov avTi]v irapa- 
StLyfAaTiaaL. Heb. vi. 6. 

ILapdd&La-o£, ov, 6, paradise, a word 
which seems to have had its origin in the 
languages of E. Asia, comp. Sanscrit joam- 
desha & Persic paradisha, ' a land elevated 
and cultivated Armen. pardes, 'a garden 
round a house in the Hebr. form DTID 
and Gr. irapddsLao?, it is applied to the 
pleasure-gardens, and parks with wild 
animals, surrounding the country resi- 
dences of Persian monarchs and princes, 
Neh. ii. 8, comp. Eccl. ii. 5. Xen. Cyr. i. 
3, 14 ; the Sept. employ it of the garden 
of Eden ; and hence in later Jewish usage 
and in N. T. pai-adise is put for the abode 
of the blessed after death, viz. 1) the 
inferior paradise, or the region of the 
blessed in hades, Lu. xxiii. 43. Jos. Ant. 
xviii. 1, 3. Bell. ii. 8, 11. iii. 8, 4. And 
this, Chrysost. says, was the idea entertain- 
ed of paradise by all the orthodox believers 
of his time. 2) the celestial paradise, where 
the spirits of the just made perfect dwell 
with God, 2 Cor. xii. 4t,—6 tp'lto^ ovpavos, 
ver. 3. Rev. ii. 7, 6 Trapdd. tov Q&ov, 

IlapaSixop.aL,i. ^ofxai, depon. mid. 
{dex^fxai,) to take near or to on^s self 
i. e. to receive to one's self prop, from the 
hands of any one ; in N. T. fig. to receive, 
admit, approve, with acc. ; of things, Mk. 
iv. 20, TOV Xoyov. Acts xvi. 21, hOt?. xxii. 
18. 1 Tim. V. 19. Sept. and Class. : of 
persons, by Hebr. to delight in^ Heb. xii. 
6, vlov ov Trapadk^ETaL, 

Hap ad LaT p L^7], 7]<s, n, {irapd, dia- 
TpL^Y],) mis-employment, ~ idle occupa- 
tion, 1 Tim. vi. 5, text. rec. lat. Edd. dia- 
Trap. See my note. 

TLa pahidu) fXL, f. -(5a)crto, lit. to give 
near, i. e. give to any one, to give over^ 
deliver over or up, into his possession 
or power, trans. ; said 1 ) of persons deli- 
vered over, with evil intent, into the 
power or authority of others ; to magis- 
trates for trial, condemnation, with acc. & 
dat. Matt. v. 25. Mk. xv. 1, irapkd. avTov 
TOO TLlX. Lu. XX. 20 ; with dat. impl. 
Acts iii, 13; to lictors, or soldiers, for 
punishment or imprisonment, Matt. v. 25. 



HAP 



321 



HAP 



xviii.34. XX. 19, T0T9 tdi/ecnv^ i.e. the Ro- 
man soldiers, Acts xii. 4; foil, by acc. with 
eh final, Lu.xxiv. 20, Trap, avrov eh Kpifxa 
^avdrov^ i. e. 'to be punished with death 
with tVa, Matt, xxvii. 26, and Class. So 
gener. to the power and pleasure of one's 
enemies, with acc. and dat. Matt. xxvi. 15. 
Mk. X. 33. Lu. xxiii. 25 : acc. simply. 
Matt. X. 4. Lu. xxii. 21 ; pass. Matt. iv. 
12. Apocr. and Class. : instead of dat. 
foil, by £ts (Twidpia, into^ i. e. before 
councils, X. 17. Lu. xxi. 12 : foil, by 
yELpa<s TLvo^., into tlie hands^ or power, of 
any one, Matt. xvii. 22. Acts xxi. 1 1 : 
with £is final, Matt. xxiv. 9. xxvi. 2. 
Mk. xiii. 12. Acts viii. 3. Rom. iv. 25. 
viii. 32. 1 Cor. V. 5. Gal. ii. 20. 2) of 
persons or things delivered over to do or 
suffer any thing, in the sense to give or 
yield up^ over, with acc. Acts xv. 26, 
ai/O/OcoTTois TrapadEdcoKocn Ta§ xl/vx^'s 
avTcov, 'jeoparded their lives;' with acc. & 
ii/a, 1 Cor. xiii. 3, and Class. So of per- 
sons given over to follow their passions, 
&c. with acc. and dat. of thing, eavrov? 
'jrapeS. tj; dcriXyELct, Eph. iv. 19 ; acc. 
and infm.' Acts vii. 42; acc. and eh Tt, 
iiiio any thing, i. e. into the power or prac- 
tice of it, Rom. i. 24, 26, 28. 3) of per- 
sons and things delivered over to the charge 
or care of any one, in the sense to give 
unto, commit, entrust, gener. with acc. and 
dat. Matt. xi. 27, iravTa fxoi irapEdodr} 
vTro Tou IlaTpos juov. xxv. 14. Lu, iv. 6. 
Acts xxvii. 1, irapedidovi/ tov HavKov 
eKarovTdpxv- 1 P^t. ii. 23, and Class. 
So irapao. Tivd Trj x«ptTt tov Qbov, ' to 
commit or commend to the favour of God,' 
Acts xiv. 26. XV. 40 ; irapad. to 'jrv&vfxa, 
scil. TM Gew, to give up the ghost, John 
xix. 30. Also, to give back, deliver up, 
re7ider up, 1 Cor. xv. 24, oTav irapaSco 
TrjV [Bacr. Tto 9. Xen. Hist. ii. 3, 7. 4) 
of things delivered orally or by writing, to 
declare, impart, teach, trans. Mk, vii. 13. 
Lu. i. 2. Acts vi. 14, to. 'idrj d iraptdco- 
KEV v/uLLV M. xvi. 4, al. ; pass. Rom. vi. 

17, £tS OV 7rap£OO0TJT£ TUTTOV ^t(5a)(^§, 

and Class. 5) intrans. or with eavTov, by 
impl. to deliver up one's self, to yield one's 
self, Josh. xi. 19, Alex. e.gr. as the harvest 
presents itself for the sickle, Mk. iv. 29, 
OTav irapaovp 6 /capTros, where see my note. 

n apa 5o go 5, ou, 6, 'J7,adj. (fr. the phrase 
'jrapd do^av, prceier eocpectationem, be- 
yond all expectation,) in N. T. by impl. 
strange, wonderful, Lu. v. 26, and Class. 

liapd^ocTL^, £(J09, 17, {TrapadiSMfiL,) 
prop, delivery, i. e. ' the act of delivering 
over' any thing from one to another, Thuc. 
i. 9 ; in N. T. ' any thing orally delivered,' 
precept, ordinance, instruction: 1) of oral 
precepts delivered down from age to age, 
tradition, traditional laiv. Matt. xv. 2, 



7rapa(3aii>ov(TL ti]i/ Trapdd. tcov irpKT^. 
ver. 3, 6, oft. Jos. Ant. xiii. 10, 6. Pol. 
xii. 6, 1. 2) gener. precept, doctrine, 
1 Cor. xi. 2, /caOobs nrapt^voKa vpilv, tu? 
irapab. /caT£X£T£. 2 Th. ii. 15. iii. 6. lat. 
Class, and Jos. 

Hap 0^17X0 60, f. wcroi, (^^^Xow,) prop. 
to make jealous, provoke to jealousy or 
emulation ; fig. spoken of Israel, whom 
God would make jealous of their own high 
privileges, i. e. cause them to set a right 
value upon them, by bestowing like privi- 
leges on other nations, trans. Rom. x. 19, 
TrapaX^. vjuds ett' ovk e6v£l. xi. 11, 14 : 
also to provoke God to jealousy or anger, 
i. e. by rendering to idols the homage due 
to him alone, 1 Cor. x. 22. Sept. 1 Kings 
xiv, 22. Ps. xxxvii. 1. Ecclus. xxx. 3. 

TLapaQ a\d(TcrL09, a, ov, adj. (-Trapd, 
^dXaacra,) situated near the sea, mari- 
time. Matt. iv. 13, £t5 ILair. Tr/i/ irapa- 
da\a<r<TLav, scil. 'ttoXlv. So Hdot. vii. 
109, 7ro\£i§ Tas Trap. viii. 23, Ku^fxa^ 
Trap, Thuc. vi. 62, iroXia-fxa Trapada^ 
XaarcTLdLov. 

JlapadscDpia), f. vcrio, to look at and 
examine a thing, while placing it by the side 
of another, i. e. to compare, Xen. Mem. iv. 
8, 7 ; in N. T. to look by or aside from 
any thing, — to overlook, neglect, slight, 
pass. Acts vi. 1, on Trapsd. al xripai 
avTwv. Diod. Sic. x. 135 : the earlier 
and purer writers use irapopdui, 

TlapaQri K.r], 17s, v, {TrapaTidfJinL,) a 
deposit, trust, ' something committed to 
one's charge,' 1 Tim. vi. 20. 2 Tim. i. 12. 
Sept. and lat. Class. 

Hapaiu&co, f. iarco, {'irapd, aivico,) 
prop, to speak to, as in jEsch, A g. 98, 1461 ; 
or to speak at, i. e. to any one ; hence to urge 
any thing on any one, \o exhort, admonish, 
foil, by infin. with acc. of pers. Acts xxvii. 
22, TrapaLvo) u/xas evQvimeiv : absol. ver. 9. 

HapaiTEO fiai, f. varojULaL, depon. 
mid. [irapd, aiTEO),) in Class, to ask from 
any one, i. e. at his hands, also to obtain by 
asking, as in Pind. and Hdot, ; in N. T; 
to ask aside or away, to deprecate ; lit. 
to beg off from : 1) prop, and gener. to 
entreat that something may not take place, 
foil, by inf. Acts xxv. 11, ou irapaiT. to 
aTTodavEiv, I do not depreccde death, 'do 
not refuse to die :' so Jos. Vit. § 29, 
^avElv ov TrapaLTovpiaL : so, foil, by yur; 
with inf, Heb, xii, 19. 2) to excuse one's 
self from an invitation, absol, Lu. xiv. 18, 
rip^avTO TrapaLTELadaL. Pint, J, Cses. 68, 
TrapaLTov p.Evo'5, ' excusing himself :' perf. 
part, as pass. Lu. xiv. 18, £)(£ 'JraprjTr}- 
jULEvov. 3) by impl. not to receive, i.e. 
to refuse, reject, with acc. Heb. xii. 25, pty] 
Trap, TOV XaXouvTa. 1 Tim. iv. 7. v. 11, 



n AP 



322 



HAP 



and oft. in lat. Class, and Jos. Also to 
avoids sliun^ 2 Tim. ii. 23. Tit. iii. 10. 

ITapa/caGt^co, f. icrw, to sit down 
near^ to seat one's self near^ foil, by irapa 
with acc. Lu. x. 39. Sept. and Class. 

TlapaKaXioo^ f. £<tco, to ccdl^ or to 
call for^ trans. 1 ) to invite to come, Acts 
xxviii. 20, 5td T, Tr\v alTiav TrapsK. 
tr/ias, and Class. 2) to call for or upon 
any one, as for aid, to invoke^ and oft. in 
lat. Class. ; hence in later usage and N. T. 
gener. to beseech^ entreaty vAth. acc. Matt, 
xviii. 32. Acts xvi. 39. With the acc, 
expr. or impL, are also put other adjuncts, 
as part, \iywv or the like. Matt. viii. 5, 
31. Acts XXV. 2. Also with inf aor. Mk. 
V. 17. Acts viii. 31. ix. 38, al. Mk. v. 18. 
oTTws, Matt. viii. 34. 3) to call upon any 
one to do any thing, i. e. to exJiort^ ad- 
monish^ with acc. of pers. Acts xv. 32. 
2 Cor. X. 1. Heb. iii. 13. Also with acc, 
and further adjuncts, e. gr. the express 
words. Acts xi. 23. 1 Cor. iv. 16. 1 Pet. 
ii. 11. V. 1. Absol. with acc. of pers. 
impl. Luke iii. 18. Rom. xii. 8, b Trapa- 
Ka\u)u. Heb, X. 25 : so tuvtu XoKel Kai 
irapaKoXtL^ Tit. ii. 15, 1 Tim. vi. 2. 4) 
by impl. to ejchoii, in the way of consola- 
tion, encouragement, &c. = to console^ 
comfoii^ with acc. of pers. Matt. ii. 18. v. 
4. 2 Cor. i. 4, b irap. Vfxd<5 k-rrl irdcrr) ttj 
^XlxI/el. ver. 6. Eph. vi. 22. Col. i'i. 2. 
In the sense of to maJie glad^ pass, to he 
glad^ rejoice^ Lu. xvi. 25. Acts xx. 12. 

napaAcaA-UTTTci), f. iZ/oj, to cover over, 
liide, prop, by putting any thing beside or 
before an object ; in N. T. fig. Lu. ix. 45, 
TO piTfJia ■}]V TrapaKEKa\vfXfJiivov air av- 
Twi/, and Class. 

II ap a fcaT a 07? /Cfj, ijs, ??, {irapaKaTa- 
Tt6>i^t,) a deposit, trust, something com- 
mitted to one's charge, 1 Tim. vi. 20, and 
2 Tim. i. 14, where recent edd. have the 
later form TrapadvKj]. 

JlapaKeLfjiaL, f. (JoixaL, to lie near, he 
adjacent to ; in N. T. fig, to he at liand, he 
present, prompt, Rom. vii. 18, to ^£Ks.lv 
TTapaKSLTai fxoL, ver, 21, ^is prompt and 
ready.' Comp. 2 Cor, viii. 12, 77 Trpodv- 
ixia irpoKSLTai. 

n ap a/cX7j art?, £to?, 77, {TrapaKaXioo.) 
prop, a calling near to one, invitation, 
Thuc. iv. 61, espec. for aid ; in N. T. 1) 
entreaty, petition, 2 Cor. viii. 4, fx&n-a. 
TToWij's 7rapaK\. oe6/j.8Vol hfxwv. ver. 17. 
2) exhortation, admonition, Rom. xii. 8, 
£iT€ 6 TrapaKokuyv, kv tt/ Trap. 1 Cor, 
xiv. 3; in the sense of instruction^ teach- 
ing, meaning hortatory, Acts xiii. 15. xv. 
31. 3) consolation, comfort, Rom. xv. 4, 
'iva bid tPj^ "Trap, tuju ypacpTw Ti)v 
kX'TTLba EXiJO/uLEv, 'the consolation afforded 
by the Scriptures.' 2 Cor. i. 4 — 7. c 0£6s 



T^5 Trap. Rom. xv. 5, ^ spiritual aid,' ' aid 
and consolation.' And so Acts iv. 36, vlo^ 
TtapaKXriarEio's, where see my note. Acts 
ix. 31, 77 Tr. Tou dyiov Hv. : meton. for 

'the Author of spiritual aid and consola- 
tion,' the Messiah, Lu. ii. 25. So Xv- 
TpcocTL^ for XvrpioTii?, Lu. ii. 38. See 
more in my note. By impl. in the sense 
of JOT/, gladness, Lu. vi. 24. 

n ap d/cA.7]T OS, ov, 6, 77, prop, verbal 
adj. {TrapaKctXiw,) called upon, i. e. for 
help ; hence as subst. 1) Lat. advocatus, 
an advocate, intercessor, who pleads the 
cause of any one before a judge, &c. 
Said of Christ, who standing at the right 
hand of God, intercedes for man with God, 
as the eternal High-Priest, Heb. vii. 25. 
ix. 34. 1 John ii. 1, kdv Tis dyiidpT?;, 
TrapdK:X7]T0i' 'ixofJii-v Trpos t6v YiaTtpa, 
And so in Philo we have this term and 
irapaKaXsTv used of the Jeiuish High- 
Priest. Josephus, too, Antiq. iv. 8, 3, ap- 
plies it to JMoses : tjttoi/ tou Geou Trpo- 
vo->]<rofXEVOv, bid to Mcoi/o-^y gTi/at t6v 
TrapaKuXovvTa, where the full sense is, 
' as if God would [then] take less care of 
them, inasmuch as Moses had been their 
advocate, or intercessor, [vritb. God].' In 
Class. Gr. also the word is often used in 
the sense advocate. The allusion, how- 
ever, in the above passage of the N. T. is 
not to such hired advocates, or "barristers, 
but to friends, called TrapaKX-tjTOL, whose 
office it was to intercede for the accused 
with the judge. See Bp. Pearson on the 
Creed, Art. viii. note 5, 2) as said of the 
H0I2/ Spiirit, John xiv. 16, dXXov Trap, 
bdxTEL vfjuv. XV. 26, brav be kX^y b IT.' 
xvi. 7, 6 n. ovK kXEvcTETaL. In the first of 
which passages however the term is, strictly' 
speaking, applied to both Chiist and the 
Holy Spirit ; and, consequently, used 
with an especial reference to some quality 
common to both. That, I apprehend, 
is intercession, which pertains to Christ as 
well as the Holy Spirit ; though the office 
somewhat differs in each : how far, and in 
what respect, I have shown in my note on 
Rom. viii. 26. In the other three pas- 
sages it may best be rendered the Para- 
clete ; for no single term will express the 
full extent of signif. in a term so pregnant 
with meaning ; inasmuch as it includes 
the senses Intercessor and Helper, Com- 
forter and Monitor, guide or instructor. 

TlapaKoi], 7)9, 77, [TrapaKovco,) prop. 
' a hearing amiss,' or want of attention to 
what is heard ; in N. T. 7ieglect to hear, 
i. e. obey, equiv. to disobedience, Rom. v. 
19, bid TTi's Trao. tou kvd^ dvOpcoTrov. 
2 Cor. X. 6. Heb'. ii. 2. 

UapaKoXovd iu), f. Jiarco, {irapd, 
dKoXovdiu},) prop, to accompany any one 
side by side, follow closely, as oft, in Class. 



n A p 



323 



HAP 



n N.T. said fig. 1 ) of things, to accompavi/^ 
i. e. ' be done by' any one, with dat. Mk. 

xvi. 17, <Ti]fXEia TOts TTLO'TSvcrao'L TavTa 
TrapaKoXovd/icTEL^ a peculiar expression, 
best explained by Kypke as put for ' mira- 
cula hajc patrabunt credentes.' So Lucian 
de Conscrib. Hist. § 6, there is mention 
made of the faults, oirocraL toIs (pavXoi^ 
crvyyp(X(l)OvaL irapaKoXovdovcTLV. Pol. 

xvii. fin. ovK oKvvcro/uLEv diaaacpiiv to. 
TTapaKoXovdovvra -rat? i^oucrtai^ avTwv 
dTTpETT?]. Dioscor. Prsef. to 1. vi. tcc 
"TrapaKoXovdovvTa cn^/ne'la sKaa-Tio tcov 
(papficLKuyu. It would seem, however, 
that the intent of the words in the above 
passage is not so much to represent theni 
as working the miracles, but rather the 
power of working the miracles as being in- 
herent in them ; just as in Hermog. p. 34, 
the attributes of a person are represented 
as TrapaKoXovdouvTa tco Trpoa-coTra). 2) 
to /allow up closely in mind, to trace out^ 
examine^ with dat. Lu. i. 3, Trapa/c. Tracnv 
dKpL(3u)9, and oft. in Class. 3) to conform 
unto, embrace, with dat. Trj dLSacTKoXIa, 
1 Tim. iv. 6. ^ 2 Tim. iii. 10. 2 Mace. ix. 
27, Trap. Ty k/LLrj TrpoaipiaEL. 

UapaKOUui, f. era), {'Trapd, aKOVo},) 
to hear amiss, imperfectly, or inattentively. 
In N. T. to neglect to hear, i. e. fig. not to 
obey, with gen. Matt, xviii. 17, kctv irap- 
aKovcrr] avTwv. Sept. and later Class. ; 
chiefly of things, but sometimes of per- 
sons; as Epict. Enchir. 39, tlvoov irap- 
aKova-y^ ; ' whom will you disobey ?' 

JlapaKvTTTa), f. \l/u}, to stoop down 
near by any thing, to bend forward near, 
i. e. in order to look at any thing more 
closely. Sept. and Class. 1) prop, and 
absol. Lu. xxiv. 12, itapaKvyi/a^ ^Xettel 
Ta o^ovLa : with £t9, John xx. 11, Trap- 
EKux^EV Eh TO fJLvnfXELOv. And SO Thcocr. 
Id. iii. 7, kut' dvTpov 'Trap. 2) metaph. 
to look into, in order to find out or know, 
with Eh, Ja. i. 25. 1 Pet. i. 12, eh d 
ETTLdvpLOuarLv dyyEXoL irapaKuxkaL, lit. 
*to get a glimpse of it.' So Lucian, Pise. 
38, ETTELCt] TraptKuxj/a Ta vfxETEpa, ' when 
I had taken a peep into your maxims.' 

JlapaXafifSdvco, f. X^xj/o/uiaL, to taJce 
near, with, to one's self; and also semi- 
pass, to receive ivitk or to one's self: 1. to 
take to one's self, e. gr. a city or kingdom, 
i. e. to take in possession, seize ; in N. T. 
only of persons, to take unto or ivith one^s 
self, i. e. as an associate, companion, with 
acc. Matt. i. 20, /xrj 0o/3t;6775 TrapaXa- 
^ELu M. TTjf yvualKa cou. ver. 24. xvii. 
1, irapaXap^dvEL 6 'I. tov UtTpov. x-x. 
17, and oft. Also with Eh of place. Matt, 
iv. 5, 8, al.; ^£Ta and gen. of pers. xii. 
45. xviii. 16 ; 7rpo§ and acc. of pers. John 
xiv. 3. Sept. and Class. Part. irapuXa- 
^uiv is sometimes used, by partial pleo- 



nasm, before other verbs, to express the 
idea more fully and graphically. Acts xvi. 
33, irapaXa^oiv avTou'5 eXov(tev diro 
Tu)V TrXnyoov. xxi. 24, al. : so also the 
verb itself with /cat before another verb, 
Matt. ii. 13, TrapdXa^E to iraiOLov, Kai 
(psvyE. John xix. 6, al. Sept. 1 Sam. 
xvii. 31, 57. Fig. of those whom Christ 
will take with him, or receive into favour, 
at his coming, pass. Matt. xxiv. 40, 6 eTv 
irapaXap.^di/EraL, Kai 6 fcis dipiETai, 
Lu. xvii. 34, sqq. : also of a teacher, ~ to 
receive, acknowledge, to embrace and follow 
his instructions, Johni. 11. — 11. to receive 
ivith or to one's self, i. e. what is given or 
delivered over, = to take from another 
into one's own hands ; in N. T. 1 ) prop, to 
receive in charge, as an office, dignity, ^^a- 
Koviav, Col. iv. 17. (SaaiXELav, Heb. xii. 
28. Sept. and Class. 2) metaph. to re- 
ceive into the mind, = to be taught, to 
learn, with acc. of thing, Mk. vii. 4, d 
TTapiXa^ov KpaTElv. 1 Cor. xv. 1. Gal. 
i. 9. Phil. iv. 9, a Kai E/madETE Kai 
rrrapEXdfSeTE. (Simil. scriptor ap. Routh. 
Fragm. Patr. i. 464, Tr|i/ ttlcttlv, \)v 
dpxv^ "nrapEXafSojULEV.) Col. ii. 6 : foil, by 
acc. with aTTo Ttyos, 1 Cor. xi. 23; with 
Trapd Tuva's, Gal. i. 12. 1 Th. ii. 13. 

JlapaXiy CO, f. ^co, to lay 7iear, and 
mid. to lie near or with any one ; in N. T. 
only mid. TrapaXiyofxaL, as a nautical 
term, to lay one''s course near, i. e. to sail 
near, by, along a place or coast, equiv. to 
TTapaTirXiu), with acc. depending on irapd 
in composit. Acts xxvii. 13, irapEXEyovTo 
Trju Kpvrrjv. So Died. Sic. xiii. 3, Trap. 
Tr]V 'iTaXiav. In Acts xxvii. 8, irapa- 
XEy ofXEvoL avTr\v, (namely, the promontory 
of Salmone,) it means doubling. The term 
TrapaXaygo-Oat was used in preference to 
TrapairXELv, with allusion to the custom 
of the ancients in doubling promontories, 
or coasting close in shore, or in dangerous 
navigation, of having the ship towed by 
ropes from boats. So Thuc. iv. 25, 
TrapaTr\£oVTcoi» aTro KoXui, where see 
my note. 

IlapaXtos, ou, 6, 17, adj. {irapd, aX§,) 
near or by the sea, maritime, Lu. vi. 17, 
T^9 TTapaXiou (^(ttipas) Tupou, i. e. the 
sea-coast of Tyre. Sept. and Class. 

IlapaXXayT], 77, (TrapaXXacrtrto,) 
change, alteration, vicissitude, Ja. i. 17, 
Trap' u) OVK zvL TrapaXXayri. So Plotin. 
Enn. ^i. 6, 3, niXEpthv Trpd's vvktu? 
irapaXXayn. Plut. viii. 214, fXEiXflva^ 
TTapaXXayd'S al vXiKLaL TCEpl EKaan-ou 
rifxujv TroLOucTLv, ri KOLvy TrepI Tas tto- 
Xfi?. 

riapaXoy i^o^uat, f. icro/xaL, to mis- 
reckon ; in N. T. prop, to deceive by false 
reasoning, and hence gener. to deceive, 



HAP 



324 



HAP 



circumvent^ with acc. of pers. Col. ii. 4. 
Ja. i. 22. Sept. and Class. 

Tlap a\vT LKo^^ 17, oz/, adj. {irapa- 
Xvoo^) paralytic^ palsied^ Matt. iv. 24. 
viii. 6. 

TlapaXv ui^ f. vcrw, to loosen at or 
yrowz i. e. things joined side by 

side, to disjoin ; in N. T. to dissolve, i. e. 
to relax, enfeeble, only perf. part. pass. 
'KapaKzK.vii.ivo's, relaxed, enfeehled,^ feeble. 
1) prop. Heb. xii. 12, TrapaXsXvfxiva 
yovaTa, see my note there. Sept. and lat. 
Class. 2) in the sense of paralytic, equiv. 
to TrapaXvTLKd^, Lu. v. 18. Acts viii. 7, 
iroWoi irapaXsXv/uL&voL Kai y^coXoi. ix. 
33. 1 Mace. ix. 55, and lat. Class. 

Hapajiiivu), f. evco, to remain near, 
by, with any one, foil, by Trpos Tii/a, 
1 Cor. xvi. 6, Trpos u/xas tu^oi/ Trapa- 
fi&vuj : absol. Heb. vii. 23, KioXvEaQai 
irapafxiv&Lv, i. e. thereby, therein, scil. in 
the priest's office ; and in Class, fig. to 
continue in any thing, to persevere tlierein. 
So Diod. Sic. ii.29, irap, iv tco imadvfJiaTL. 
Absol. Ja. i. 25. 

Hapap-vdi-oiuLaL, f. vcrofxctL, depon^ 
mid. to speak near or ivith any one, i. e. 
kindly, soothingly, to soothe, pacify. See 
Hemsterh. on Xen. Eph. p. 153 ; hence 
in N. T. ] ) to exhort, encourage, with 
acc. of pers. expr. or impl. 1 Th. ii. 11, 
TrapcLKaXovvTE^s vfxd<5 kul Trapafxvdov- 
/JLEVOL. y, 14. Xen. Hist. iv. 8, 28. 2) 
to console, comfort, with acc. of pers. John 
xi. 19, iW Trap. avTci's irspl tou a^£\- 
<pou avTvov. ver. 31. Jos. and Class. 

Tlap ajJivQ ia, as, 17, {TrapafivQiofxai,') 
in Class, gener. exhortation, encourage- 
ment ; in N. T. consolation, comfort, 1 Cor. 
xiv. 3. Wisd. xix. 12. Jos. & lat. Class. 

Uapaiiivd Lov, ov, to, {irapajULvdio- 
fxai,) consolation, comfort, solace, Phil, 
ii. 1. 

TLapavo fxiw, f. tjcoj, {irapavofio's,) 
prop, to act aside from law, i. e. to violate 
law, transgress, absol. Acts xxiii, 3. 

Ylapavo fxia, a?, t], {irapavofxitx},^ 
violation of law, transgression, 2 Pet. ii. 16. 

Tiapair LKpaivii}, f. avuj, a. 1. Trap- 
EirLKpava, fonnd only in Sept. and N. T. 
strictly to 7nake bitter, or be bitter, toivards 
any one, ti^eat idith bitterness ; more usu- 
ally to embitter, provoke, hence absol. to 
provohi, i. e. God, Heb. iii. 16. 1 Esdr. v. 15. 

TLapaTT LKpacT 1x6^, ov, 6, {irapaTri- 
Kpaivu),) an embittering, provocation, of 
God by disobedience, Hek iii. 8, 15. Sept. 
Ps. xcv. 8 : not in Class. 

Jl a pair ITT T 10, a. 2. irapiiTEcrov, to 
fall near by any one, and hence to fall in 
with, meet, also to fall aside from, to 
swerve or deviate from any thing ; hence 



in N. T. fig. to fall away froDi the path of 
duty, from the faith, to apostatise, absol. 
Heb. vi. 6. Wisd. vi. 9, and Class, as Pol. 
xii. 7, 2, T^s aX770£ta§. 

TLapa'TrXiuj, f. ivcrofxai, to sail mar., 
by, past a place, Acts xx. 16, and Class. 

TLapairXricrLov, adv. ('7rapa7rX»70"tos,) 
near by, nigh to, i. e. like, similarly, foil, 
by dat. Phil. ii. 27, vadivnars irapaTrXv- 
criov ^avoLTi)^. 

JlapairXr\(rLuy^, adv. (irapaTcXri- 
crio^,) prop, near to, nigh by ; hence like.^ 
in the like manner., Heb. ii. 14, and Class. 

Tiapairopzyofxai, f. Evarofxai, to go 
near or by the side of any one, — to ac- 
company ; in N. T. to pass by, pass along 
by, intrans. Mk. xi. 20, TrapaTropEuo/JLEvoL 
eIBov Tr\v orvKrjv : part, oi TrapairopEVOfXE- 
voL, the passers-by, xv. 29 : foil, by Slo. with 
gen. of place through which, ii. 23, Slo. tcov 
a-iropLiuLcov. ix. 30. Sept. and lat. Class. 

HapdiTTto liia, GTos, to, {irapaTri'Tr- 
T(jo,) prop, a fall, occasioned by stumbling 
against or upon any thing, Hdot. viii. 87, 
also a fall gener., in N.T. fig. a falling aside 
or away, scil. from right, truth, duty, a 
lapse, error, fault, viz. 1 ) prop, as com- 
mitted unintentionally, from ignorance or 
inadvertence, Matt. vi. 14, idv dcptjTs 
Tots dvdp. TO. 'Trap. avTwu : so Rom. xi. 
11. Gal. vi. 1. Sept. Ps. xix. 13. Pol. ix, 
106. 2) by Hebr. gener. for transgression, 
sin, Rom. iv. 25, os Trapedodri did Ta 
Trap, vfxuiv. V. 15, oft. : of Adam's first 
transgression or fall, v. 15, 17, 18, & Sept. 

TLapap pi(jo,i. pevGOfxai, {Trapd, piw,) 
a. 2. pass. TrapEppvY\v, in act. signif. prop, 
to flow near or by, prop, of a river ; and 
fig. to glide away, escape, from the mind ; 
also of a person, to glide along by stealth, 
as a thief ; in N. T. once of persons, fig. to 
glide aside from, to svjerve or deviate from 
any thing, as the truth, law, precepts, &c. 
absol. Heb. ii. 1, SeT ■hfJLU's Trpo(TiyEiv tois 
aKovaQEiaL, juLrjTroTE TrapappvojfXEV, 'lest 
we glide aside from them,' i. e. lest we 
transgress them ; parallel with Trapd^aai^ 
and TrapaKor], ver. 2. See my note. 

TLapacrrifxcs, ov, 6, v, adj. {crfjima,) lit. 
bye-marked, i. e. having a particular mark 
or sign to distinguish it from others. Hence 
as neut. to Trapd(T'Y]fxov, as subst. sign^ 
mark., pi. insignia, scil. by which any thing 
is distinguished from others ; espec. spoken 
of the sign of a ship, a painting or image in 
bas-relief on the prow, and distinguished 
from the tutela, or figure of the tutelar god 
of the ship upon the stern, though some- 
times the parasemon and tutela were the , 
same; as in Acts xxviii. 11, kv TrXoicp 
TrapatTrjfjLM ALoarKovpoL^, in a ship with < 
the ensign Dioscuri.' 

TLapacrKEvaX^w, f. daw, lit. to make 



HAP 



325 



HAP 



ready ^ and place 7iear or for any one, to 
prepare^ and cause to be at haiid^ as food, 
absol. Acts X. 10, kyiviTo 7r^o<T7r£ti/os, 
irapacrKEvaX^ovTUiV EKeivcou^ .ind Class, 
mid. or pass, to prepare o?ie^s seJf^ he 
ready^ '2 Cor. ix. 2, TrapecrKEvaa-TaL aTro 
Tripva-i, ' was prepared or ready.' ] Cor. 
xiv. 8, Tis TrapaarKEuda&TaL £. tt. ; ' who 
will prepare himself, get ready Sept. 
Jer. 1. 42. Jos. Ant. v. 7, 5, & Class. 

IT a p a o- /c £ u 7/, ?)§, 77, ( ctkeui)^ ) a mahiiig 
ready ^ preparation ; in N. T. Avith article 
7;, in the Jewish sense, the preparatiori^ 

1. e. the day or hours before the sabbath, 
or other festival, when preparation was 
made for the celebration, the eve of the 
sabbath, Sac. John xix. 14, 31, 42, al. : it 
is also called 7rpoa-d^(3aToi/^ Mk. xv. 42. 
Judith viii. 6, and TrpoEopriov^ Philo, 
p. 626. 

TlapaTELvto^ f. Ei/w, to stretch out 
near^ hy^ or to^ to eodend near ; in N. T. 
fig. to eoctend^ prolong^ continue^ in time, 
trans. Acts xx. 7, Trapgxetys tov \6yov 
fi-EXpi fXE(TovvKTLOv^ and Class. 

HapoLTiqp EU)^ f. 77(rw, lit. 'to keep 
one's eye near,' to observe narroidy^ watch 
closely : 1) prop, as the actions of any one 
with sinister intent, trans. Mk. iii. 2, Trap- 
€Tnpovi/ avTov^ el toIs crd^^arrL ^epa- 
"TTEvcTEL avTov, Lu. xiv. 1. XX. 20 : so Tas 
7ru\as, Acts ix. 24. 2) fig. of times, to 
observe carefully^ Jceep superstitiously^ Gal. 
iv. 10: so Jos. Ant. iii. 5, 5, irap, Tas 

YlapaTTipricrL^^ ecos, 77, {TrapaTtipEco^) 
dose ivatching^ accurate observation^ Lu. 
xvii. 20, ovK 'ipyETaL h ^aar. tov G. p-ETci 
TrapaTiTpiiG-Eco^, not icith observation, i. e. 
not so that its progress may be watched 
with the eyes, or with what attracts ob- 
servation, scil. so as to catch observation 
by its external appearance. 

n a p a T 1 6 7] /X t, f. 3'770-a), to put or place 
near any one, trans. 1) prop, of food, to 
set or lay before any one, with acc. of 
thing and dat. of pers. expr. or impl. Mk. 
vi. 41, \va irapadoocTLV avTdl<s. viii. 7. Lu. 
xi. 6. Acts xvi. 34, TpdirEX^av. 1 Cor. x. 
27. Sept. and Class. 2) fig. as a teacher, 
to set or lay before^ = to propound^ deliver^ 
with acc. and dat. Matt. xiii. 24, aXK^v 
irapa^. irapidriKEv avTols : mid. with 
oTi, Acts xvii. 3. Sept, and Class. 3) 
mid. 'TrapariQEfxai^ (a, 2. TrapEdijUL-ijv, a. 

2. imper. TrapdOov,) prop, to place luith 
any one on one's own account, = to give 
in clmrge^ commit, entrust, with acc. and 
dat. Lu. xii. 48, w TraptdevTo ttoXu. 
1 Tim. i. 18. 2 Tim', ii. 2, 1 Pet. iv. 19 ; 
also Lu. xxiii. 46, £t§ ^^etpas crov irapa- 
Qri(TOfxaL TO TTVEv/uLa jULOV. Sept. and Class. 
In the sense of to commend, with acc, and 
dat. Acts xiv. 23, irapidEUTo avTov^ too 



Kupio). XX. 32. So Jos. Ant. iv. 8, 2, tt. 

Ufxd^ vofxco (Tcocppoarvvi^^. 

UapaTvyxoi^f^-) 2. irapiTvxov-, 
to fall in tvith any one, to happen to he 
near, part, ol 'napaTvyx^^ovTE^, Acts 
xvii. 17, Tou§ TT. ' those that happened to 
be there.' And so oft. in Class. 

JlapavTiKa, adv. (Trapd, avTiKa,) 
prop, at this very instant, instantly, for 
Trap' avTO. to. Trpay/uara. In N. T. once, 
with art. to TrapavTLKa, as adj. instant, 
i. e. momentary, transient, 2 Cor. iv. 17, 
TO TT. IXacppou, momentary, light. Freq. 
in Class. 

Jlapacpipo), aor. 2. TvapnuEyKov. 
This verb, like other comp, of Trapd, has 
very different meanings, according to the 
sense assigned to the irapd. Hence some- 
times it signif to bring to or towards any one ; 
at others, to turn aivay, as the eyes from 
an object, or aside, as a weapon levelled at 
any one ; also, to hurry away, as a stream 
does those who attempt to cross it, or as a 
tempestuous wind hurries a ship out of its 
course. From the two last senses have 
sprung those two in which the word occurs 
in N. T., namely, 1) act. and fig. to cause 
to pass by, as said of evil, Mk. xiv. 36, 
irapivEyKE to iroTripLOV dit e/jlou tovto. 
Lu. xxii. 42, where there seems to be an 
allusion to a host's causing a cup of wine 
to be carried past one of the guests. 2) 
pass. prop, to be borne along, carried away 
by, Jude 12, in later edd. vEcpiXai avvSpoL 
UTTO dvifX(jov 7rapa(pEp6jULEvaL. But the 
text, rec. irEpLfpEp. yields by far the better 
sense ; the context requiring that of drcum- 
aguntur, or circumferuntur. On the con- 
trary, in Heb. xiii. 9, SiSaxal^ ttolkl- 
Xats fxi] 'TrapacpipEGrdE, as in later edd. 
for text. rec. 7r£pK/)., which yields, indeed, 
a good sense, (and so Eph. iv. 14, it is 
said, fxrjKETL KXvdoovL^ojuisvoL iravTL avE- 
fXM T7/§ ^id. ) but not so good a one as 
Trap, ahripio. Similarly Plut. Timol. 6, 
we have at KpiaEi^ aELOVTaL /cat irapa- 

<p EpOVTUL pa^lCOS VTTO TlioV TVXOVTOiV 

ETraivcov kul if/oywv, a metaphor taken 
from a ship hurried out of its course by 
violent winds. Plut. Arat. 12. The full 
sense, then, in the above passage is, ' to be 
carried away [from the truth].' So in 
Plato, p. 265, it is said, dXvdov^ TLvd<s 
ECpaTTTOfXEVOL, Ta)(a 0 dv Kai dWocTE 
7rapa(pEp6p.EvoL, and 893, itapacpEpo- 
fiEvo^. 275, TrapEVEx^^luLEv, et al. also in 
Plut. vi.53, /caTaoeoyTEs t^)u Kpicnv (judg- 
ment) oTTcos fxf] KaTacptpriTaL tuj Ttp- 

TTOVTL irpo^ TO (SXdlTTOVi 

HapacppouEw, f. 770-60, to be aside 
from a right mind, be aside oneself, to be 
foolish, act foolishly, absol. 2 Cor. xi. 23, 
7rapa(ppovu)v XaXco. Sept. and Class. 

Haparppovia, a§, rj, {'7rapa<ppovioo,) 



HAP 



326 



HAP 



prop, a being beside oneself, madness, 
folly, 2 Pet. ii. 16. 

liapaxELfxaX^u), f. a<rw, to winter 
near or at a place, or icith a person, intrans. 
Acts Kxvii. 12. xxviii. 11, 1 Cor. xvi. 6, 
and Class. 

IIapa)(£ t^acia, a?, 77, {'7rapa-)(EL- 
/uajo),) a ivintermg near or a place, 
Acts xxvii. 12, and Class. 

TLapay^pr] fxa^ adv., prop, for Trapa 
TO ■)(^prifxa, lit. ' with the thing itself,' at 
the very moment, on the spot, — forth- 
with, immediately, Matt. xxi. 19, &^i]pdv6r] 
"TrapaxpvfJici rj crvKr], i. e. immediately 
after being cursed, ver. 20. Lu. i. 64. iv. 
39, & oft. Sept. and Class. 

IlapoaXt?, £605, 77, (Trapoos,) a pan- 
ther, leopard, Rev. xiii. 2. Sept. & Class. 

TS.ap p EX) (ji3, see VipocrEopEvco. 

Jldp ELfXL^ f. ECTo/jLaL, {irapd, Eifxl,) to 
he near by, be present, absol. John vii. 6, 6 
Kaipd'S 6 Efjid^ ovTTu) irdpEcrrLV. xi. 28, 6 
OLdda-KaXo<3 TrdoEdTL. Acts x. 21. xvii, 
6 ; so 2 Pet. i. 12, kv tt} Trapovcni d\r\- 
dELa, i.e. 'the truth ^v^ich ye have re- 
ceived.' Part. TO irapov, the present time, 
Heb. xii. 11, Trpos to irapov. Said of 
things, foil, by dative of person, to be 
present with or to a person, q. d. 'the person 
has the thing,' 2 Pet. i. 9, w jxi] irdpEcrTL 
TauTa, i. e. ' he who has not these things.' 
So Wisd. xiii. 1, ols irapvv Qeov dyvoo- 
aia. xi. 21, & Class. Hence nrd irapovTa, 
the things ivhich one has, i. e. property, 
fortune, condition, Heb. xiii. 5, dpKov- 
fjLEvoL Tot? irapovcTLv. Class, e. gr. Xen. 
Conv. iv. 42, 0I5 Ta irapovTo. dpKEl, 
riKLcrra toou dXkoTpLO)V opiyovTai. 
Phocyl. 4. 

TLapsKj dytjd, f. Jw, {irapct, Elcrdyoo,) 
to lead in or bring by the side of others, 
to introduce along loith others ; in N. T. 
to lead or bring in by stealth, trans, alpi- 
G-EL9, 2 Pet. ii. 1. Pol. i. 18, 3, et al. 
Pint. Pyrrh. 29. Diod. Sic. xii. 41. 

IlapEL(raKTO£, ov, 6, v, adj. {'irap- 
ELcrdyoo,) brought in by stealth. Gal. ii. 4, oid 
TOL*? TT. \j/EvoadiX<pov9 for dWoTptov^. 

IlapEKTCuu), f. vaoD, {Trapd, etcouoo,) 
to go or come in by stealth, to creep in un- 
awares, Jude 4. Jos. and Class. 

TlapEKTEpxo ^(^^-i ^■or. 2. irapEiarjX- 
60V, {irapd, Eia-EpxopiaL,) intrans. 1) to 
go or cojne in near to any thing, to enter in 
unto or witli any thing, Rom. v. 20, v6ixo<s 
GE TrapEicrtjXdev sc. Eh tov Kocrfxov, 'but 
the law entered in thereunto,' viz. unto or 
upon the TrapdirTivpLa, ver. 18, (comp. 
ver. 12, V dp-apTia EicrTjXdE,) i. e. 'the 
law supervened upon the state of trans- 
gression from Adam to Moses.' So Test, 
XII. Patr. p. 608, ytveTUL fxidri. ical Trap- 
F.Lcripx^'TaL dvaLorx^vrta. But irapd 



may mean by-the-bye, indirectly, silently. 
See my note. 2) to go or come in by stealth, 
to enter unaioares, intrans. Gal. ii. 4, ot- 
TLVE9 irapELcr^Xdoi/ KaTacrKOTrrjcrai,, and 
Class. 

Ilap£Lcr(p Epu), aor. 2. irapEicrnvEyKov, 

{irapd, EL(T(pip(j),) to bear or bring in 
thereivith or thereunto, to bring forward ; 
in N. T. fig. to bring forward along with, 
to exhibit tfiereioith. Trap. crTrovdrju irdcav, 
2 Pet. i. 5, where see my note. 

TLapEKT6<s, adv. {irapd, ekto^,) prop. 
?iear by idthout, on the outside ; fig. besides, 
used with art. Ta irapEKTO's, the things 
besides, over and above, 2 Cor. xi. 28, 
Xwpk Toov irapEKTO's : with gen. in the 
sense of except. Matt. v. 32, wapEKTo^ 
Xoyov iropvEia's. Acts xxvi. 29, and lat. 
Gr. writers. 

Tlap Eix^oXr), rj^, rj, {irapEfxfidXXa),) 
a putting something beticeen others, also, as 
a military word, a juxta-array, a certain 
method of drawing up troops, Pol. xi, 32, 
6; hence in N. T. 1) meton, array, for 
aynny, host, i. e. as drawn up in battle- 
array, Heb. xi. 34, 7rapEfx(3oXd9 ekXl- 
vav aXXoTpLcou. Rev. xx. 9. Sept. and 
Pol. iii. 73, 8. ^1. V. H. xiv. 46. 2) en- 
campment, i. e. prop, juxta-arrangement 
in a camp, hence gener. a camp, Pol. vi. 
28, 1. Jos. Ant. vii. 4, 1. Plut. Cses. 45, 
al. ; said of a standing camp, castra stativa, 
or barracks, of the Roman soldiers at Je- 
rusalem in the fortress of Antonia, Acts 
xxi. 34 ; also of the encampments of the 
Israelites in the desert, Heb. xiii. 11 ; and 
in the same connexion, fig. ver. 13. 

JlapEVoyX^^i ^ycro), (Trapa, £i/ox- 
Xeco,) to trouble besides, foil, by dative of 
pers. Acts xv. 19, Kpivia jmr) irapEvoxXziu 
Tots K.T.X. ' to give no further molesta- 
tion.' Sept. and lat. Class., as Pol., Diod. 
Sic. and Arrian. 

Hap Eir Lori IUL09, ou, 6, 77, adj. {irapd, 
ETridniuLO's,) a by-resident, a sojourner, i. e. 
among a people not one's own, Heb. xi. 
13. 1 Pet. i. 1. ii. 11. Sept. Gen. xxiii. 
4, al. Pol. and other late writers. 

TlapEpxofxuL, [Trapd, Epxop-aL,) f. 
TrapEXEvcTOfxai, aor. 2. iraprjXdov, intrans. 

I. to COME near to any person or thing, to 
draic near, Lu. xii. 37, irapEXdayv ota- 
Kovri<TEL avToT?. xvii. 7. Ecclus. xxix. 9; 
gener. Mk. \i, 48, vOeXe irapEXdElv av- 
Tous, JEl. Y. H. ii. 35, £7r£t oi Tts avTov 
TraprjXdE : in a hostile manner. Acts xxiv. 

7. Jos. Bell. iii. 8, 2. Xen. Conv. i. 7 — 

II. to GO or pass near, to pass along by : 
1) prop, and absol. Lu. xviii. 37, oTt o 
'L;cr. Traplpx/'TaL : foil, by acc. Acts xvi. 

8, irapEXdovTE^ Ti]v M. ; by did n-r]9 
ocov, Matt. viii. 28. Sept. and Class. ; said 
of time, to po^s by, be past, absol. xiv. 15, 



HAP 



327 



HAP 



V wpa ridi] 'TrapfiXdev. Acts xxvii. 9. 
1 Pet. iv. 3, 6 '7rapEXi}\vd(jt}^ XP^'^^^- 
2) fig. to pass awai/^ perish^ absol. and 
gener. Matt. v. 18, ews av irapiXQy 6 
ovp. Kal V 7»), oft. Sept. Ps. xxxvii. 36, 
and Class., as Tbeocr. Id. xxvii. 8, as 
irapipy^ETai^ ws ovap^ Of words, 

declarations, &c, to pass away without 
fulfilment, be in vain^ Matt. v. 18. xxiv. 
35, OL \6yoL fxov ov /un) iraptXdioaL. 3) 
fig. of evils, to pass aivay from any one, 
to he removed, averted, foil, by cltto of 
person, Matt. xxvi. 39, TrapeXviTU) air' 
ifjLov TO iroTYipLov T. Mk. xiv. 35. Sept. 
Cant. iii. 4. ^1. V. H. xiii. 38. 4) fig. 
to pass by or over, equiv. to neglect, trans- 
gress, with acc. Lu. xi. 42, rr/i/ Kpicriv. 
XV. 29, ivToXriv. Sept. and Class. 

Hap £0-1 9, f£05, 77, {'Traph]fxL^) prcBter- 
Quissio, i. e. a letting pass or remission, in 
the sense of overlooking, not punishing, 
Rom. iii. 25 : it differs from a(p£<yL<3, 
which implies pardon, forgiveness. Dion. 
Hal. Ant. vii. 37. 

II a/0 £Xw,f. £^0), (Trapa, E^w,) prop, 
hold near to any one ; in N. T. to hold out 
near or toivards any one, =to present, 
offer, &c. 1) prop, with acc. Lu. vi. 29, 
'wdpzys kolX Tr\v aXXrjv sc. cnayova, and 
so oft. in Class. 2) fig. ' to be the cause, 
source, occasion of any thing to a person,' 

1. e. to make or do, to give or bestow, to 
slioiv, to occasion, sc. in one's behalf, with 
acc. and dat., expr. or impl. ; kottov or 
KOTTov? irapiysLv tlvl, to give one trovhle, 
— to trovhle, vex, (see Kotto?,) Lu. xi. 7. 
xviii. 5 ; epyaaiav irapi^siv mvi, to 
make or bring gain to any one, Acts xvi. 
16. xvii. 31, TTLCTTLV 'wapacT^oov irdcTLV, 
''causing belief in all.' i. e. 'proving, con- 
firming it to all.' Jos. & Class. Acts xxii. 

2, irapiaxov vavxtdv, they gave silence. 
xxviii. 2, TT. (pLXavdpcoTriay. 1 Tim. i. 4. 

vi. 17. Class. Mid. irapixoixai, to do or 
show for one's self, for one's own part, Lu. 

vii. 4, d^Lo^ ka-TLV w irapi^sL touto, ' for 
whom thou shouldst on thy part do this.' 
Acts xix. 24. Col. iv. 1, to oUaLov toIs 
dovXoL^ irapixEcrdE : with double accus. 
Tit. ii. 7, crtavTov 'jrapf.\6fXEvo's tvttov 
KoXuiv 'ipyuiv, and so in Class. 

'n.apr]yopia, a?, rj, {Traprjyopico, fr. 
Tvapd, dyop&vw,) consolation, comfort, 
solace. Col. iv. 11. Pint, de Exil. 1. 

Ti(xp% zvia, a9, ri, {Trapdevo^,) vir- 
ginity, virgin age, Lu. ii. 36, X^v(raaa eTrj 
fiETCt dvopd'5 ETTTd diro Tr]<5 TTapd. auTrj?, 
i.e. 'with the husband whom she had mar- 
ried as a virgin.' Sept. and Class. 

Uapd ov, 6, 11, adj. virgin, as oft. 
in Class. ; in N. T. 1. fem. v irapOivo's, 
as subst. a virgin, maiden : 1 ) one who 
has not known man, Lu. i. 27, irpd^ 
irapQivov fXEfXvr](TTiVfxivr\v — 'bHapiafx. 



comp. ver. 34. Sept. and Class. Matt, 
i. 23, 17 irapdiuo^ ku yacrTpl 'i^ei : also 
youthful spouse : fig. 2 Cor. xi. 2. 2) 
gener. of a marriageable maiden. Matt. 
XXV. 1. Acts xxi. 9. 1 Cor. vii. 34, fxejiit- 
pLCTTat T] yvvi] Kai rj Trapd. equiv. to 77 
dyafxo^. ver. 37, Trjy iavTov TrapQ. equiv. 
to his virgin-daughter, marriageable but 
unmarried. Sept. and Class. — IT. masc. 
Rev. xiv. 4, ovTOL ticTLV dt pLSTa yvvat- 
Ku)V ovK kfxoXvvd^a-av, irapd&i'OL yap ei- 
(TLv, i. e. chaste, pure, who have not known 
women. 

TlapirifXL, f. 7rap^(T(jo, {irapd, ltiiull,) 
perf. pass. TrapilfxaL, to let pass by or 
along, Hdot. iii. 72, to let go loose, relax, 
as ropes ; hence in N. T. fig. pass, nrap- 
isfMaL, to be relaxed, enfeebled, lit. unstrung, 
only in perf. part, xfipz^ Trap&ifxivaL, 
hands enfeebled, hanging down from wea- 
riness and despondency, Heb. xii. 12^ 
Sept. Zeph. iii. 17. Ecclus. ii. 13. xxv. 

23. Jos. Ant. xiii. 12, 5, avTol^ al x^^P^^ 
Trapsidiqaav. Eur. Ale. 203, irapeifxeut] 
dk X^^P09 ddXiOV ^dpo£, 

H a p L (T T rj jUL L Siiid JlapLcr^dvw {irapd, 
XaTrifxi,^ f. TrapacrTTjo-o), a. 2. 7rapi(TTi]v, 
trans, to cause to stand near, intrans. to 
stand near, see "IcTtjjai. I. trans, in the 
pres. imperf. fut. and a. 1. of the act. to 
cause to stand near, to place near by; hence 
in N. T. to place or set before any one, to 
present, exhibit : 1) gener. with acc. and 
dat. expr. or impl. Acts xxiii. 33, irap- 
kaTTjaav Kai t6v TLavXov avTcp. Lu. ii. 
22, Tw JLvptto. 2 Cor. iv. 14, TrapacrT-na-eL 
{vjuids) <TVV vfiiv, scil. Tw jSriimaTL tov 
Xp. &c. : so with double acc. of object 
and predicate, Tivd tl. Acts i. 3. ix. 41. 
Rom. vi. 13, 16, c6 TrapLCTdvETE £avTov<s 
douXov^, xii. 1. oft. Sept, and lat. Class. 
2) — to place at hand, furnish. Matt. xxvi. 
53, icapaaTncrEL fxoi ttXeiov^. Acts xxiii. 

24, KTvvr]. Pol. XXX. 9, 3. Lucian D. 
Mort. vi. 2. 3) in the sense of to com- 
mend, 1 Cor. viii. 8, ^poofxa vimd? ov 'wap- 
L(TTri(TL 9f w. Jos. Aut. XV. 7, 3. Arr. 
Epict. i. 16, avTa kiraLvicraL fj TrapacrT?}- 
craL. 4) metaph. to set forth by arguments, 
i. e. to shoiv, prove. Acts xxiv. 13, ovte 
irapa(TTri(TaL dvvavraL Trspl <jov k.t.X. & 
oft. in Class. — II. intrans. in the perf. 
plup. and aor. 2. of the act. and in the 
mid. to stand near or by : 1) gener. to be 
present, &c. with dat. expr. or impl. Acts 
i. 10. ix. 39, TtapEaTTidav avTco 'TrdcaL 
al xvpc-f- xxvii. 23. Mk. xv. 39, b irap- 
Eo-TtiKU)^ k^ kvavTLa?, 'who stood by over 
against him :' so part, oi TrapEorTrjKOTE^, 
contr. OL TrapEo-TooTE?, the bystanders, 
Mk. xiv. 47. Acts xxiii. 2 ; with evoottlov 
TLvcs, iv. 10. Sept. Jos. and Class. Fig. 
in a friendly sense, to stand by, to aid, with 
dat. Rom. xvi. 2, Iva TrapaarTrjTs avTij. 



HAP 



328 



HAP 



2 Tim. iv. 17, and Class. ; in a hostile 
sense, by impl. absol. Acts iv. 26, irapi- 
crTrjaav ol ^aaiX&l^ ttj's yr]9. Ecclus. li. 
3. Said of time, a season, &c. to be pre- 
sent^ to have come, Mk. iv. 29, irapkcrrr]- 
KEv 6 3'£pta-/xos. Dem. 255, 25. 2) to 
stand before any one, in his presence, 
(Hdian i. 4, 1.) e. gr. in a forensic sense, 
before a judge. Acts xxvii. 24, KatcrapL 
(TE del •wapacrTrjuaL. Rom. xiv. 10. Said 
of attendants who ivait in the presence of 
a superior, Lu. i. 19, kyoo ElfXL Va^p. 6 
TrapearTrjKcb^ kvwTTLOv toD 0. dat. xix. 
24. Sept. and Class, as Lucian, D. Deor. 
xxiv. 1, ^£t — irapea-Tavai nrto All. 

Ilapo^o?, ou, 77, lit. a way by, passage- 
way, of place, Thuc. iii. 21 ; in N. T. of 
action, a passing by, 1 Cor. xvi. 7, iv 
Trapodu), by the way, in passing. Class, as 
Thuc. 1. 126. 

HapoLKBU), f. 7icroo, {irapa, oiKECo,) 
to divell near, be neighbour ; in N. T. to 
1)6 a by-dweller, to sojourn, dwell as a 
stranger, with kv, Lu. xxiv. 18, cru pLovcs 
TrapoLKEl^ Ev 'Ifp. ; foil, by eU, Heb. xi. 
9, TrapcpKtia-EV eh T>;y ytjf, 'he came and 
sojourned.' Sept. and Class. 

TLapoLKLa, as, 77, {'irapoLKEU),) a dicell- 
ing near; in N. T. a sojourniiig, residence 
in a foreign land without the rights of citi- 
zenship. Acts xiii. 17, EV Ty irap. kv yy 
Aiy. Sept. and Wisd. xix. 10. Metaph. 
of human life, 1 Pet. i. 17. Sept. Ps. 
cxix. 54. 

TldpoLKo^, ov, 6, rji adj. {Trapa, ol- 
Ko<s,)divelling near, neighbouring ; in N. T. 
o TrdpoLKo^, subst. a by-diceller, a sojo2irner, 
scil. \^ithout the rights of citizenship, a 
foreigner^ Acts \^i. 6, 29, irapoLKO's kv 777 
M. Fig. of human life, 1 Pet. ii. 1 1 ; also 
in respect to the Church and kingdom of 
God, Eph. ii. 19. 

UapoLfxta, as, {TrdpoLp.o9, fr. 

Trapa, ol/uos,) prop, 'something uttered by 
the way ;' hence a by-ivord, by-speech : I. 
prop, a proverb, adage, 2 Pet. ii. 22, to Tfj? 
a\770ou§ TrapoiULa^, & oft. in Class. — II. 
In St. John's Gospel same as irapa^oXr] : 
1 ) gener. figurative discourse, dark saying, 
1. e. obscure and full of hidden meaning, 
John xvi. 25, kv TrapoLjXLaL^ XoXelv, ver. 
29, (comp. TrapajSoXi] 3.) Prov. i. 1. xxv. 
I. Ecclus. vi.'35. 2) a parable, in the 
usual sense, John x. 6, comp. irapa^oXt] 2. 

TLdpoLvo's, ov, 6, 77, adj. (Trapd, oTi/os,) 
lit. by or at idne, i. e. spoken of what takes 
place by or over wine, revelry, as rd irdp- 
oLva, scil. pleXi-i, drinking songs,' Boeckh. 
Pind. Fr. p. 555; in N. T. of persons, 
equiv. to given to wine, prop, 'sitting long 
by wine,' (comp. Prov. xxiii. 30.) 1 Tim. 
iii. 3. Tit. i. 7, and oft. in Class. 

IlapotxGfxaL, {irapd, o'lxo,^cth) ^' 



■/larofxaL, perf. irapcoxVfJ-ciL, to go along by, 
to pass along, Hom. II. iv. 272 ; in N. T. 
only of time, to pass away, intrans. Acts 
xiv. 16, kv Tats TrapcoxVfJ-^^^t'^ yEVEoi^. 
Xen. An. xi. 4, I. 

HapojuLOLdX^w, f, da-CD, {'wapd, o/uloi- 
dX,(jo,) prop, to be nearly like, i. e. gener. to 
be like, to resemble, with dat. Matt, xxiii. 
27. So TrapoiuLOLovadaL, Xen. Eph. 

Ilapo/xotos, ov, 6, 77, adj. (Trapa, 
b POLO'S,) prop, nearly like, i. e. gener. like, 
similar, Mk. vii. 8, 13, and Class. 

TLapo^v'vw, f. vvu), {irapd, o^uvo), fr, 
o^v'i,) to sharpen by or on any thing, (i. e. 
by rubbing,) to ivhet as a knife, metaph. 
to sharpen the mind, temper, courage of 
any one, to incite, impel, Xen, Mem. iii. 3, 
13 ; hence in N. T. metaph. to provoke, 
rouse, i. e. to anger, indignation, only pass, 
or mid. Acts xvii. 16, 'Kapw^vvE-ro to 
irvEvp.a avTov. I Cor. xiii. 5. Sept. & Class. 

Hapo^v a- p.6^, ov, o, (Trapo^uz'w,) 
prop, a sharpening, also fig. 1) incitement, 
i. e. to action or feeling, Heb. x. 24. 2) 
sharp contention, Acts xv. 39. Sept. and 
Class. 

Ilapopyt Jo), f. Law & tto, to make, 
angry by some act or thing, to provoke 
thereby, &c. with acc. Eph. vi. 4, pii] irap- 
opy. Ta TEKva vfx. Rom. x. 19. Sept. 
Ecclus. iii. 16. iv. 2. 

II apop y tor /xos, oi}, 6, (Trapopyt^co,) 
provocation ; in N. T. anger provoked, in- 
dignation, icrath, Eph. iv. 26. 

IIapoTpu'i/00, f. vvu), {irapd, orpuvw,) 
to urge on by something, to stir up, incite 
tliereby, with acc. Acts xiii. 50. lat. Class, 
and Jos. 

Ylapovaria, as, 77, (7rap£t^/,) prop-, the 
being or becoming present : in X.T. \) pre- 
sence, 2 Cor. x. 10, rj Trap, tou croofxaTO^ 
dcrdevm. Phil. ii. 12, & Class. 2) a coming, 
advent, gener. 1 Cor. xvi. 17. Phil. i. 26, 
Trapovaria ttuXlv Trpos ujuas, cc coming 
again, return. Said of the final advent 
of Christ to judgment, Matt. xxiv. 3. 
1 Cor. XV. 23. r\ Trap, tou Ylov tov dvd. 
Matt. xxiv. 27. TOU KvpLov, 1 Th. iii. 13 : 
in a like sense, 2 Pet. iii. 12, 77 Trap, tt^s 
Tov 9. 7|/x8pas. Also of the coming, i. e. 
manifestation of the man of sin, 2 Th. ii. 9. 

Ilapoii/ls. i'oos, 7], {oxl/ov,) prop, and 
lit. a by-dish, i. e. a side-dish, consisting of 
dainties set on the table as a condiment, 
Xen. Cyr. i. 3, 4; in later usage and N.T. 
a side-plate, i. e. a plate, platter, dish, 
prop, in which some dainties are served 
up. Matt, xxiii. 25, to e^coBev tov TroTrj- 
pi'oi' Kai Trj's Trapoxl/Loo?, ver. 26. Arr. 
Epict. ii. 20. Pint, vi! 197. 

Ilapprjcrta, as, 7], (Tras, prjaL?,) prop, 
'the speaking all one thinks,' equiv. to 
free-spokenness, hence meton. and gener. 



n AP 



329 



HAS 



frankness^ boldness^ as of speech, demean- 
our, action, &c. 1 ) prop, and gener. xVcts 

iv. 13, ^ElO()0VVTE<S TllV ToD ITtTpOU TTap- 

pi)<jLav. 2 Cor. iii. 12. So in adverbial 
phrases, Trappija-iq^ boldhj^ John 

vii. 13; or openly^ plahdi/^ without con- 
cealment or ambiguity, x. 24. xi. 14 ; also 
of actions, openly^ ver. 54. xviii. 20 ; iv 
nrappi]<TLa^ in or with boldness^ equiv. to 
freely, boldly, Eph. vi. 19; also openly, 
publicly, opp. to kv KpviTTiZ, John vii. 4. 
Col. ii. 15. ^uExa TrapjOJjcrtas, iviiJi bold- 
ness, i. a. freely, boldly. Acts ii. 29. iv. 29. 

2) by impl. ticence, authority, 1 Tirp. iii. 
13, TToXW/i/ irapp. kv ttlcttel. Philem. 8. 
Jos. Ant. iv. 8, 12. xv. 6, 7. Zos. iii. 7. 

3) as implying frank reliance, confiding 
hope, confidence, assurance^ Heb. iii. 6. iv. 
16. X. 19, 35, al. 

ILappi]<Tia.X,oiJiaL, f. dcTopLai, depon. 
mid. {7^app^(J^a,) to be free-spoli^n, to 
speak freely, openly, boldly, i. q. to be free, 
frank, bold, in speech or action, &c. ; joined 
with verbs of speaking. Acts xiii. 46, 7ra/)- 
pt](TLa(Td}x&voL tlirov, xix. 8; gener. and 
foil, by kv of place, kv avvayoiyy, 
xviii. 26 ; of thing, object, i. q. ' in behalf 
of,' kv avTcp, Eph. vi. 20; of person, kv 
Qew, i. e. 'in faith and trust in God,' 
1 Th. ii. 2. also kv tw ovofxaTL tlvo^, 'in 
one's name,' by one's authority, Acts ix. 
27, 28 ; foil, by kiri tiZ Kupi'w, xiv. 3, 

Has, Trdaa, ttoLv, gener. iravTO's, ird- 
crr/9, 7rai;T09, adj. all, Lat. omnis, viz. I. 
as including the idea of oneness, a totality, 
all, THE WHOLE, Lat. totus, i. q. 0X05 : in 
this sense the sing, is put with a noun 
having the art. ; and the plural also stands 
witli the art. where a definite number is 
implied, or withmt the art. where the 
number is indefinite. — A) in sing. 1) 
before a subst. with the art. Matt. vi. 29, 
iv irda-n Ty So^y avTOv. viii. 32, irdaa r) 
dyiXi}. Lu. i. 10, Trdv to tt/VtJOo?. iv. 25. 
John viii. 2, Tras 6 Xaos : so with the 
names of cities, countries, &c. meton. for 
the inhabitants. Matt. iii. 5. Lu. ii. 1. 
"With proper names, sometimes without 
the art. Matt. ii. 3. Acts ii. 36. Rom. xi. 
26. 2) after a subst. with art. John v. 22, 
Tr]v KpicTLv irda-av SISojke tco Ylco. Rev. 
xiii. 12. 3) rarely between the art. and 
subst. where Tra? is then emphatic, Acts 
XX. 18, nrov iravTU \p6vov. Gal. v. 14. 
1 Tim. i. 16. — B) in plur. i. before a 
subst. or other word : 1) subst. with art. 
implying a definite number. Matt. i. 17, 
'Kaaai at yevEul uTrd 'A(3p. sws A. iv. 
8. Mk. iii. 28. Lu. i. 6. Acts v. 20.; ivith- 
out art. TTuvTE^ dvdp. all men, all man- 
\ kind indef. Acts xxii. 15. Rom. v. 12, 18. 
Heb. i. 6 ; -rravra 'idvr]. Rev, xiv. 8. 2) 
pajiicip. with art. as subst. Matt, iv. 24, 
Trai/ras Toi/9 KaKU)<s e^^^'''"^' ^i* ^8. Lu. 



i. 66, 71. Acts ii. 44. — 11. after a szibst 
or other word : 1 ) subst. with art. as 
definite. Matt. ix. 35, xds ttoXeis irdara^, 
scil. of that region, Lu. xii. 7. Acts xvi. 
26. 2) particip. with art. as subst. Acts 
XX, 32, kv TOT'S -nyLaarjuLEvoL^ irdaiv. Heb. 
V. 9. — III. betiveen the art. and subst. as 
emphatic. Acts xix. 7. xxi. 21. — iv. joined 
luith a pron. whether pers. or demonstr. 
either before or after it ; vfiEl's irdvTE's, 
John i. 16. TT. 77. Acts ii, 32. tt. v. Matt, 
xxiii. 8. V. TT. Lu. ix. 48. Acts i. 14. iv. 33. 
1 Cor. XV. 10. — V. absol. 1) with art. ol 
irdvTE^, ' they all,' i. e. all those defi- 
nitely mentioned, Mk. xiv. 64, ol ttuvte^s 
KUTEKpLvav. Rom. xi. 32. Eph. iv. 13. 
Phil. ii. 21. Neut. Ta Travra, all things., 
equiv. to (1) the universe, the whole cre- 
ation, Rom. xi, 36, £t5 avTov to: 'irdvTa. 
1 Cor. viii. 6. Rev. iv. 11 ; fig. of the new 
spiritual creation in Christ, 2 Cor. v. 17., 
18 ; meton. for all created rational beings, 
all men. Gal. iii. 22. Col. i. 20 ; also for 
all the followers of Christ, Eph. i. 10, 23. 
(2) gener. all things before mentioned or 
implied, Mk. iv. 11 ; all the necessaries of 
life, &c. Acts xvii. 25. Rom. viii. 32. (3) 
as a predicate of a prop, name, 6 Geos rd 
Trdvra kv irdaL, all in all, i. e. above all, 
supreme.^ 1 Cor. xv. 28. Col. iii. 11. 2) 
without art. irdvTE^, all, equiv. to nrdv- 
T£§ dvdp. 'all men,' Matt. x. 22. Mk. ii. 
12. X. 44. Lu. ii. 3. iii. 15. Neut. Trai/ra, 
all things. Matt. viii. 33, dirvyyeLXav 
irdvTa. Mk. iv. 34. Acts x. 39. 1 Cor. 
xvi. 14, irdvTa vjucov, i. e. ' all your ac- 
tions.' Heb. ii. 8. Jam. v. 12. Accus. 
irdvTa, as adv. as to or in all things, in all 
respects, wholly, Acts xx. 35. 1 Cor. ix. 
25. X. 33. xi. 2. So KaTa Trdvra, as to 
all things, in all respects. Acts iii. 22 ; ah 
iravra, id. 2 Cor. ii. 9 ; kv irdcTLV, in all 
things, in all respects, xi. 6, oft. — II. sing. 
Tras without the art. as including the idea 
of plurality, all, every, equiv. to kVacrTos : 
1) with nouns. Matt. iii. 10, irdv Sivopov 
jULf] TTOLOvv Kapirov. iv. 4. Mk. ix. 49. Lu. 
ii. 23, oft. 2) before a relaf. pron. it is 
intensive, Tras octtis, equiv. to oo-Tis, 
Matt. vii. 24, 7ra§ oo-ris aKovEL, every one 
whosoever. Col. iii. 17. Tras os. Gal. iii. 10. 
Trdv o, Rom. xiv. 23. 3) before a partic. 
with the art. where the partic. with art. 
expresses the idea he who, and becomes a 
subst. expressing a class, &c. Matt, v, 22, 
TTas 6 opyCC^ofXEvo^, 'every one who is 
angry,' Lu. vi. 47. John vi. 45. Acts x. 
43 ; without art. where the participial sense 
then remains. Matt. xiii. 19, Trayros a/cou- 
o^Tos, ' every one hearing,' 2 Th. ii. 4. 
4) ahsol. Mk, ix. 49, Tras Trupt dXLcrQn- 
(TETai. Heb. ii. 9, did Trai/Tos, scil, XP^' 
i vov, continually ; so kv TravTi, 1 Cor. i. 5. 
! 2 Cor. iv. 8. vi. 4, al.— III. all, i. e. of all 
kinds^ of every kind and sort^ equiv. to 



HAS 



330 



HAT 



Trai/To^aTTo?, TrayToTos. 1) gener. Matt, 
iv. 23, ^epaiTEvtav Trdaav vocrov Kal ira- 
uav fxaXaKiav. Acts vii. 22, irdcrr) aocpta 
AiyvTTTLoov. Rom. i. 18, 29. 2) in the 
sense of all possible, equiv. to the greatest, 
utmost. Matt, xxviii. 18, £0o6t/ jj-oi irdcra 
k^ovcTLa kv cup. Kal ettl yr]9. Acts v. 23. 
xvii. 11, fjL&Td 7racrj;§ Trpodv/uiLa^. xxiii. 
1. 2 Cor. xii. 12.^ Phil. i. 20, al.— IV. 
with a negat. ov Tras, ov TrdyxES, not every 
one, not all, the neg. here belonging to 
7ra9, and merely denying the universality. 
Matt. vii. 21, ov Tras 6 Xiyajv. xix. 11. 
Rom. ix. 6. X. 16; but Tras — ov (^yhere 
ov belongs to the vei^) is by Hebr. equiv. 
to OV0&U, not one, no one, 7iot?dng, none, 
Lu. i. 37. Rom. iii. 20. Rev. xxii. 3. 
Acts X. 14, ovd&TTOTe 'icjyayov irdv kolvov. 
2 Pet. i. 20 ; also Trd^—juii], 1 Cor. i. 29. 
Eph. iv. 29. Rev. vii. 1. 

Ilao-xa, TO, indec. tJie passover ; a 
great sacrifice and festival of the Jews, 
when the Paschal lamb was offered up. 
See Calmet. In N. T. to Trao-xa is used 
both of the victim and the festival : 1) the 
paschal lamb, as I. prop, cpayiiv to tt. 
' to eat the passover,' =z to keep the fes- 
tival, Matt. xxvi. 17; kToifidX^sLV to tt. 
' to make ready the passover,' i. e. for eat- 
ing, &c. ver. 19; ^v^iv to tt. 'to kill the 
passover [victim],' Mk. xiv. 12. 2) metaph. 
of Christ, 1 Cor. v. 7. — II. equiv. to the pas- 
chal supper, the festival of the passover, 
which was also the commencement of the 
seven days' feast of unleavened bread. 
1) prop, of the paschal supper alone, Mk. 
xiv. 1, TO TT. /cat Ta dX^vfxa. Matt. xxvi. 
18, TTpo? CE TTOLoo TO TT. ' kccp. Celebrate.' 
Heb. xi. 28, '7rs.7roLr}K8 to tt. ' kept, in- 
stituted, the passover.' 2) in a wider sense, 
including also the seven days of unleavened 
bread, the paschal festival, Lu. ii. 41, ttj 
kopry Tov 7racrx«- xxii. 1, t] kopTt] toov 
dX^vfxcov 7] Xsyo/iJikvr} Trdcrxci- John ii. 13. 
Acts xii. 4, oft. 

nacxw, (f. TrsLa-ofxaL, aor. 2. Eiradov, 
perf. iri'TTovda,) to suffer, in the most 
general sense, i. e. prop, to he affected by 
any thing from without, to be acted upon, 
to receive an impression from external 
circumstances, to eocperieiice ; almost al- 
ways used in a had sense, with or without 
the addition of kukw^, or kukov tl, as 
Matt. xvii. 15, KaKU)<2 irdcryEL. 1 Cor. xii. 
26, £tT£ nrdaryjE-L {xk\o^. 1 Pet. ii. 20. 
iv. 1, 6 nradoov kv crapKL. Heb. ii. 18, al. 
et Class. Indeed, of the word in a good 
sense, except with the addition of eu, or 
such like, to explain it, no instance occurs 
in N. T. or Sept. For though at Gal. iii. 
4, TocTavTa £7ra0£T£ eIkt] ; many recent 
Commentators assign the sense, ' have ye 
experienced such things (i. e. blessings) in 
vain ?' yet there it is better to retain the 



usual interpr. ' have ye suffered so many 
evils in vain ?' the argument proceeding 
on the principle, that men usually value 
things in proportion to the labour or suf- 
fering undergone in their acquisition. 
Finally, of the word in the above sense, 
it is difficult to find any example even in 
the Classical writers, (for the use — a fre- 
quent one — of 'wd<ry8iv^ with £u, dya^ov, 
or such like, is not to the purpose.) 
The Commentators, indeed, adduce The- 
ocritus, Id. XV. 138, ovT ' Ayaixifxvujv 
tout' ETTade, and Jos. Ant. iii. 15, 1, 
VTrojULUTjarai oara 7rct9oi/T£s k^ avTOV 
(Geo?) Kal irijXLKcov EvepyearLcou fXETa- 
\aj36i/TE9, &c. Yet in the latter passage 
the sense is merely, ' what ye have expe- 
rienced at the hands of God ;' and the 
former example, being from a poet, is little 
decisive. 

UaTdarcrco, fnt. d^oo, prop, intrans. to 
pidsate, beat, as the heart. Homer ; but in 
later writers & N. T. trans, to strike, smite : 
1) gently, ~ totouch,tap,\;\lh acc. Acts xii. 
7, TTttT. Ti)v TrXevpau tov HiTpov, and 
Class. 2) with violence, so as to ivound, 
with acc. Matt. xxvi. 51, irard^a^i tov 
dovXov TOV dpxi'^pkco's. Lu. xxii. 50. So 
Plut. Them. TruTa^ov, aKovcrov Si. Thuc. 
viii. 92 ; with kv of instrum. ver. 49 : hence, 
by impl. and by Hebr. to smite, == to kill. 
Acts vii. 24, TraTa^as tov Aiy. Rev. 
xix. 15. Matt. xxvi. 31, TraTdgw tov 
TTOLfxiva. So Plut. Alcib. p. 205, iraTa- 
^avT09 kyxEipLdLii} Kal diacpdELpavTO? : 
3) fig. and from the Heb. to smite, i. e. Ho 
inflict evil,' to afflict with disease, calamity, 
&c., spoken only of God or his angel. 
Acts xii. 23, kyrdTa^EV avTov dyyEXo^ 
Kvpiov, Rev. xi. 6, and Sept. 

HaTEOj, fut. 7?(ra), (TraTos,) to tread 
with the feet, Msch, Ag. 981 : 1) trans, 
with acc. = to tread down, trample under 
foot, = to profane and lay waste. Rev. xi. 
2, T^v 'ttoXlv Tr]v dyiav TraTtjcrovcn, Lu. 
xxi. 24 ; Sept. and Class, to tread out, as 
grapes, ti)v X'r]vdv, Rev. xiv. 20. xix. 15. 
So Anacr, iii. 5, dpaEVE<s iraTovaL crTa- 
(pvXvv : also in Sept. 2) intrans. to tread, 
to set the foot upon, &c. Luke x. 19, 
iraTElv kirdvco ocpEcov, 'to tread upon,' and 
by impl. utterly overcome, serpents, i. e. 
without harm. 

TlaTijp, Tkpo9 T/Oos, 6, a father ; used 
gener. of men, and in a special sense of 
God. I. GENER. 1) prop. /a^^e?-, one by 
Avhom one is begotten. Matt. ii. 22, dvTi 
'E-puydov TOV TTUTpo's avTov. xix. 5. Lu. 
ii. 48. PI. ol TtaTEpE^, one's parents, both 
father and mother. Heb. xi. 23. Eph. vi. 
4, comp. ver. 2 : 2) of a remoter ancestor, 
equiv. to forefather, progenitor ; also as 
the head or founder of a tribe or people, 
a patriarch; sing. Matt. iii. 9, iraTipa 



HAT 

'ixofiev Tov 'A/3paa/x. Mk. xi. 10. John 
iv. 12. Acts vii. 2. Rom. iv. 17 : fig. in a 
moral and spiritual sense, of Abraham, 
ver. 11, £i§ TO ELvai avTov iraTtpa irdv- 
Tiov Toov TTLcrTsvovTcov, VGY. 12, 16 ; so 
of Satan, as the father of wicked men, 
John viii. 38, 41, 44. PI. ol TraTtpEs, 
forefathers^ ancestors, Matt, xxiii. 30, kv 
TaT<s hfxipaL's tcov tt. vfjL. ver. 32. Lu. vi. 
23,26. Acts iii. 13. Rom. ix. 5: 3) as a 
title of respect and reverence, either honor- 
ary, or towards one who is regarded in the 
light of a father ; in a direct address, Lu. 
xvi. 24, TTciTEp ' k^padpi. ver. 27 ; so of 
a teacher^ as exercising paternal care and 
authority. Matt, xxiii. 9, iraTEpa jui^ 
Ka\i(Trii-E vfxCov. 1 Cor. iv. 15, comp. 
Phil. ii. 22. PL ol ira^ipf.^^ nom. for 
voc. fathers^ as an honorary title of ad- 
dress ; used towards elder persons, 1 John 
ii. 13, 14 ; also towards magistrates, mem- 
bers of the sanhedrim, &g. Acts vii. 2. 
xxii. 1. 4) metaph., foil, by gen. of thing, 
equiv. to the author^ source^ hegimmr of 
any thing, Rom. iv. 12, Tra^rip TrspiTO- 
)U^9, i. e. Abraham. John viii. 44, xj/svcr- 
T?;9 £(TTt, Kal 6 iraT^p avTOV^ scil. tou 
\l/£vdov<5. — II. of God, gener. as the Cre- 
ator, Preserver, and Governor of all men 
and things, over whom he watches with 
paternal -love and care : 1) as Father of 
the Jeivs^ John viii. 41, sua Traripa ex- 
TOV e. ver. 42. 2 Cor. vi. 18 : 2) of all 
true CJiristians ; who are also called nriKva 
8£oi}, John i. 12. Rom. viii. 16. So it is 
said. Matt. vi. 4, 6 HaTvp <tov 6 ftXtTrtou 

iv TW KpVTTTOO. VCr. 8, 6 II. V/JLCOV. X. 20, 

29. xiii. 43. Rom. i. 7. 1 Cor. i. 3. Gal. i'. 
4. Eph. i. 2. Phil. i. 2 ; with the further 
adjunct, 6 II. v/jloov 6 iv toIs ovp. Matt. 
V. 16, 45, 48. 6 oupdvio^^ vi. 14, 26, 32. 
6 i'TrovpdvLO'5^ xviii. 35. 6 i^ ovpavov^ Lu. 
xi. 13. Used also absol.in the same sense, 
Rom. viii. 15, iXd(3ETE irvEvixa VLoQEaia^^ 
Ev CO KpdX^ofXEv^ 'A/3/3a, 6 tlaTvp. Eph. 

ii. 18. Col. i. 12 : so Heb. xii. 9, tm 
ITaTpt Ta)V irvEvfidnroDV^ in antithesis 
with Toi;§ Tr)£ (TapKO^ rifxuiv Trartpa?, 
i. e. 'the Father of our spirits,'' our spi- 
ritual Father : 3) spec. God is called the 
Father of our Lord Jesus Christ, in re- 
spect to that peculiar relation in which 
Christ is the Son of God. So where the 
Father and Son are expressly distinguished. 
Matt. xi. 27, ovSel? iiTLyLvoDcrKEL nrov 
Yioi/, EL jULT} 6 UaTiip. Mk. xiii. 32, John 

iii. 35, 6 TlaTt]p dyaTra tov Ylov. 1 Cor. 
viii. 6, eI? 9. 6 IlaTr]p — kul gis Kuptos, 
'I. X^. Heb. i. 5. 1 Pet. i. 2. Also, in 
the same sense. Matt. xi. 27, irdvTa /llol 
'TTupEdodri viro tou UaTpo^ fxov. xvi. 27. 
Mk. viii. 38. John x. 18. Rev. ii. 27 : 
and so 6 JlaTrip p.ov 6 iv ovp. Matt. vii. 
21. X. 32. 6 ovpdvLo^, XV. 13 : absol. in 
the same sense, xxiv. 36, ovdik old&v — 



HAT 

eI /mrio UaTrjp fiovo^. Mk. xiv. 36, saepiss. 
So God is called 6 IlaTr,p tou Kvpiov 
rj/uitov 'I. Xp. Rom. XV. 6. 2 Cor. i. 3, 
al. : absol. 1 Cor. xv. 24, otuv Trapadw 
Ti)v (Saa. Tto Qem kul HaTpi. Gal. i. 1, 
oft. : 4) metaph., with gen. of thing, Ja. 

i. 17, dTTo TOU 7raTpo9 Toov (pwTcov, ' the 
Father of lights,' meaning, in a double 
sense, the Creator of the heavenly lumi- 
naries, and the Author and source of spi- 
ritual light. See Ps. cxxxv. 7. 1 Tim. 
vi. 16. 

IlaTpaXwas, ou, o, Att. iraTpakoia^^ 
(7raT??f), aXoidio,) a smiter of Ms father^ 
a patricide, 1 Tim. i. 9, and Class. 

ITaTpta, a9, j7, (7raT?7p,) paternal de- 
scent, Hdot. iii. 75. lineage, a family, race, 
Hdot. i. 202 ; in N. T. family, or the sub- 
division of a Jewish tribe : 1) prop. Lu. 

ii. 4, £^ o'Lkov Kal TraTptas Aaui'^, where 
see my note ; and so Sept. and Jos. ; fig. 
Eph. iii. 15 : 2) in a wider sense, tribe, 
people, nation, like cpvXij, Acts iii. 25, 
Trda-ai al iraTpial ttj's yrj^. Sept. 1 
Chron. xvi. 28, et al. 

IIaT-ptap)^?js, ov, 6, {'TraTpia, dpxv-,) 
a patriaixh, the father and founder of a 
family or tribe ; Abraham, Heb. vii. 4 ; 
the sons of Jacob, as heads of the twelve 
tribes. Acts vii. 8, 9 ; so of David, as the 
head of a family. Acts ii. 29, comp. Lu, 
ii. 4, and see TraTpia. Sept. oft. 

JlaTpLKO's, 7], ov, adj. (Trarrjp,) prop. 
paternal, i. e. pertaining to one's father, or 
like a father ; in N. T. received from one''s 
fathers, handed down from ancestors, he- 
reditary, for TTUTpoirapd^oTO^' TrapaSo- 
(TEi's, Gal. i. 14. So Thuc. i. 13, tt. (3aaL- 
XeIul. Diod. Sic. i. 188, tt. iEpcoarvvai. 

UaTpl^, iSo9, V, (prop, poetic fem. of 
irdTpLO's,) one''s native country , lit. 'father- 
land ;' in N. T. one's native city or place, 
home ; of Nazareth as the city of Jesus, 
because he was brought up there. Matt, 
xiii. 54, 57, and oft. in Jos. and sometimes 
in Pol. and Hdian. and other lat. writers : 
fig. of a heavenly home, Heb. xi. 14, 
comp. ver. 16 and my note. 

TLaTpoirapd^oTo^, ov, 6, Vi adj. 
(iraTrip, TrapaolScojuLL,) delivered down 
from one's fathers, handed down from 
ancestors, hereditary, 1 Pet. i. 18, ava- 
(TTpocprj TTttTpoTT. i. 6. a way of life de- 
rived from one's ancestors, and so oft. in 
Class. 

HaT-pwo?, a, ov, adj (TraTijp,) pa- 
ternal, pertaining to one's father, or patri- 
monial, transmitted from father to son ; in 
N. T. received from one's fathers, handed 
down from ancestors, hereditary, vojuLo^, 
Acts xxii. 3. £6o§, xxviii. 17. xxiv. 14, 
XaTpEvio Tco iraTpcpco Ofto, i. e. ' our 



331 



HAY 



332 



n E I 



paternal God,' the God whom our fathers 
worshipped and made known to us. Jos. 
Ant. ii. 13, 1. ix. 12, 3. 

ITauo), fut. TTauo-tt), to stop^ pause: 
1) ACT. TRANS, to stop^ make leave off^ 
restrain^ i. e. from any thing, foil, by acc. 
and ttTTo, 1 Pet. iii. 10, TraucrotToj Tt;V 
•yXwcrcrai/ avTov diro kukov. The usual 
construction in Sept. and Class, is accus. 
of pers. and gen. of thing without prep. ; 
though sometimes ivith, as Soph. Elect. 

987, TTaVaOU EK KaKU)V S/JLE. 2) MID. 

INTRANS. to pause, stop^ leave off, refrain, 
i. e.from any thing, foil, by genitive, as in 
1 Pet. iv. 1, irEiravTaL a/mapria^, 'hath 
ceased from sin,' and so Class. ; by parti- 
cip. instead of infin. Lu. v. 4, ws iirav- 
craTO XaXcov. Acts v. 42, ovk kiraiJOVTo 
diddcrKouTEs, ' they ceased not teaching.' 
xiii. 10. XX. 31, al. ; with part. impl. Lu. 
xi. 1, and Sept. ; absol. to cease, to come 
to an end, Lu. viii. 24. Acts xx. 1. 1 Cor. 
xiii. 8, ELT& yXcoarcraL, Travaovrai. 

Uax^'vco, f. vvco, (7ra)(u5,) to make 
fat, pass, to become fat and thick ; in N. T. 
metaph. only pass, to become gross, didl, 
callous, as if from fat, {yrayy^ and its de- 
rivatives being often used of stupidity; 
from a notion common to all ages, that 
fat tends to mental dulness,) Matt. xiii. 
15, Eirayyv^r^ h Kapdia tov Xaov tovtov, 
so Philostr, tt. vovu, 

Uidyi, ri^, rj, {ireX^a,) a fetter, shackle, 
for the feet, pi. Tridai, Mk. v. 4. Sept. 
and Class. 

TLeolvo's, hi oi', adj. [tteolov,) plain, 
level, opp. to hilly, Lu. vi. 17, ecrTtj e'ttl 
TOTTOu tteBlvou, ' he stood upon a level 
place,' i. e. upon the plain, being, we may 
suppose, a sort of table- land ; by which 
the description, here and at St. Matthew, 
may very well be reconciled. 

Ile^gua), f. Evarco, {irtX^a,) prop, to tra- 
vel on foot, also to travel by land, intrans. 
Acts XX. 13, and Class. 

Ilg^T?, adv. (tteJos,) on foot, Matt. xiv. 
13. Mk. vi. 33 ; or rather by land, as opp. 
to EU irXoLco ; a signif. not unfreq. in Class., 
espec. the Attic writers, as Thuc, where 
see my notes, also in Hom. Od. iii. 324. 

n£t6ap)(£a), f. 77(760, (7r£t0ap)(os, fr. 
ireido/uLaL, Q:p)(?7,) prop, to obey a ruler, one 
in authority; hence gener. to obey, with 
dat. dpx"'^^! Tit. iii. 1. Geoj, Acts v. 29, 
32, and Class., see my notes ; al. so to obey 
or conform to advice, with dat. of pers. 
xxvii. 21, and Class. 

IlEtOos, 7/, dv, adj. [TTEiQui,) a form else- 
where unknown, ■=:. TTEidavd^ or iridavo's, 
persuasive, icinning, 1 Cor. ii. 4. 

lie 1060, (f. -TTELcruo, pf. 2. iriiroLda, pf. 
pass. TTETTficT/utzi, aor. 1. pass. £7r£i'cr07jy,) 
to persuade, prop, to incline any thing out 



of the perpendicular, and thus, in a moral 
sense, ' to bend or sway,' suadeo, per- 
suadeo. I. act. to persuade, 1) gener. 
to the belief and reception of the truth, = 
to convince, and in this sense used mostly 
of endeavour, prop, with acc. of pers. Acts 
xviii. 4, ettelOe 'lovdaLovs, ' he sought to 
persuade and comdnce them.' 2 Cor. v. 
11 ; also with double acc. of pers. and 
thing. Acts xxviii. 23, irEidujv avT0V9 to. 
TTspl TOV 'I. : so, the accus. of pers. being 
impl., xix, 8, ttelQoov {auTov<s) to. Trspi^ 
K.T.X. Foil, by acc. of pers. with infin. 
to persuade to do any thing, to induce. 
Acts xiii. 43, ETrsLdou avT0V9 k'lrifxivELV 
Ttj xaptTi Tou 9. xxvi.28. In the sense 
of to instigate, with acc. of pers. and 'iva. 
Matt, xxvii. 20 ; without 'Lva, Acts xiv. 
19. 2) as said oif bringing over to kindly 
feelings, to co?iciliate, win over, gain the 
favour of, to make a friend of, with acc. 
of pers. Gal. i. 10, dvd p(j}Trov<5 TTEidot), ?) 
TOV Qeou; Used of pacifying by entreaties 
or bribes. Matt, xxviii. 14. Acts xii. 20, 
TTELcravTE? BX. Also, as said of an ac- 
cusing conscience, to quiet, 1 John iii. 19, 
xas KapSLa? rj/uL. — II. PASS, and MID. to 
let one's self be persuaded, to be persuaded : 
1 ) gener. of any truth, &c. =: to be con- 
vinced, to believe^ absol. Lu. xvi. 31, ovBk 
kdv TL<3 £/c VEKpcov dva<TTy TTELord-norovTaL. 
Acts xvii. 4, al. Perf. pass. 'TTEirELcrfxaL, as 
pres. / ajn persuaded, convinced, with 
infin. and acc. Lu. xx. 6, al. ; with acc. 
TO., Heb. vi. 9, where, however, the term 
is not to be understood of fidl persuasion. 
So to be persuaded, induced to do any 
thing, absol. but with infin. impl. Acts xxi. 
14, fx^ irELQajxEvov avTov sc. /uli] ctva^ai- 
VELv. 2) to assent to, obey, folloiv, with 
dat. of pers. Acts v. 36, 37, 40. xxvii. 11, 
6 EK. T(Z Kv(3EpvnTr] kiTEldETo. Rom. Ii. 
8. Gal. V. 7, & oft. in Class.— in. perf. 2. 
TTETTOLda, intrans. to be persuaded, to tru^t. 
1) to be confident, assured, foil, by acc. 
with inf. Rom. ii. 19, TrtTroiOas a-EavTou 
odyp/ov Elvai : "uith oti, Heb. xiii. 18. 
TovTo otl, Phil.i. 6, 25 ; foil, by kiri TLva 
OTL, in respect to any one, 2 Cor. ii. 3; 
e"l<s TLva OTL, id. Gal. v. 10. 2) to confide 
in, rely on, with dat. Phil. i. 14. Philem. 
21, 7r£7roi6w9 tt; vTraKorj aov. 2 Cor. x. 
7, kavTw : with ku, to t?'ust or have confi- 
dence in any thing, Phil, iii. 3, kv arap^^i : 
with ETTL TLVL, id. Mk. X. 24. Lu. xi. 2'2. 

n£ti;et6o, f. ao'60, aor. I. kiTELvacra, to 
hunger, be hungry, intrans. 1) prop. Matt, 
iv. 2. xii. 1. Rom. xii. 20, and oft. in 
Class. 2) meton. or by synecdoche, to he 
famished, be u'ithoid food, — to be poor^ 
needy, Lu. i, 53, 7rELVMVTa<s kviirXricrEv 
ctyaQijov, see my note. vi. 25, Phil. iv. 12. 
Sept. and Ecclus, iv. 2. 3) metaph. to 
hunger after any thing, to long for^ with 



HEX 



333 



HEN 



acc. Tijv SiKaioavvijv^ Matt. v. 6 ; so Jos. 
Bell. i. 20, Sixj/Jio-y^ TOvjuLoif aifjia. In 
Class, foil, by genit. only; absol. of long- 
ing after spiritual nourislmient by feeling 
a spiritual want, John vi. 35. 

EEs I/O a, a?, 77, (TTEi/oato,) trial, attempt 
to do any thing; in N. T. only in the 
phrase 'irslpav Xafif^dusiv Tiz/o?, prop, to 
take trial of any thing, cqniv. to Trfipd^w. 
1) to make trial of, to attempt, tt}^ daXdar- 
o-tjs, Heb. xi. 29, and Sept. Deut. xxviii. 
56, and so sometimes in Class. 2) to have 
trial of to eaperience, ifxiraiyixuiv, Heb. 
xi. 36, Jos. Ant. ii. 5, 1. Xen. An. v. 8, 
15. 

rEfi/oa'^w, f. aVw, (TTEtpa,) prop, to 
make trial of to try, Horn. Od. i. 281 ; said 
I. of things, as actions, = to attempt,fol\. by 
infin. Acts xvi. 7, eTrEipaX^Gv eh TrjV Bi0. 
'TropBus.ardaL. xxiv. 6. — 11. of persons, zz 
to tempt, i. e. to prove, put to the test, foil, 
by acc. 1 ) gener. and in a good sense, in 
order to ascertain the character or dispo- 
sition of any one, Matt. xxii. 35, see my 
note. John vi. 6, toOto 'i\syE irELpaX^tav 
avTov. 2 Cor. xiii. 5, iavrov^ TrsLpd'^ETE. 
Rev. ii. 2, where see mv note. So Sept. 
oft. Jos. B. i. 10, 4. Plut. Clem. 7. 2) in 
a bad sense, with ill intent. Matt. xvi. 1 , 
iTELpa^ovTE^ ETrrjpooTt^aav avTOV. xxii., 
18. Mk. yiii. 11. John viii. 6, al. Hence 
to try one's virtue, to tempt, ' to solicit to 
sin,' gener. Gal. vi. ], /XJ7 kol av 'jTEipaa- 
6r7s, 'lest thou also be tempted,' i. e. 
' yield to temptation,' Ja. i. 13. Rev. ii. 
10; espec. of Satan, Matt. iv. 1, TrEipacr- 
QrjvaL vTTo Tov Am/?. Ln. iv. 2. 1 Cor. vii. 
5. 3) from the Hebr,, God is said Ho try or 
prove men' by adversity, in order to try their 
faith and confidence in him, 1 Cor. x. 13, 
OS ovK kdaEL v/j.d's ir&LpacrdTjvaL virkp o 
Suvaa-dE. Heb. ii. 18. iv. 15. xi. 17, al. 
Sept. AVisd. xi. 9 : vice versa, men are 
said to prove or tempt God, by distrusting 
his power and aid, Acts v. 9, irELpdcraL to 
UvEv/ma Kvpiov, 'to try whether the Spirit 
of God would detect your hypocrisy.' xv. 

10, TL TTELpdX^ETE TOV QeOV, 1 Cor. X. 9, 

see my note. Heb. iii. 9. Wisd. i. 2, ev- 

picTKETaL {g GeOs) TOtS /JLt] TrELpdX,OV<TLV 

avTov, E/uL<pavL^ETaL ok TOts fxr] dincrTov- 

(TIV aVTCp. 

TlELpaajULo?, ov, 6, {'TTEipd'^to,) the act 
of trying, trial, proof a putting to the test, 
1) gener. trial of one's character, &c. 
1 Pet. iv. 12, TTpos TTELpacrpidv v/uuv, i. e. 
' to try, to prove you,' Ecclus. vi. 7. xxvii. 
5 ; by impl. trial of one's virtue, tempta- 
tion, i. e. solicitation to sin, espec. from 
Satan, Lu. iv. 13. 1 Tim. vi. 9. 2) from 
the Heb. trial, temptation. Matt. vi. 13. 
xxvi. 41. 1 Cor. x. 13. 1 Pet. i. 6 : hence 
me ton. for adversity, affliction^ Lu. xxii. 
28. Acts XX. 19, ^ov\e\)odv tw Kvpicp 



fXETu SaKpvcov Kal irELpa(y(xu)V. Gal. iv. 
14. Rev. iii. 10 : vice versa, temptation of 
God by man is distrust of God, Heb. iii. 
8, KUTa TTju rjiuLtpaif tov TrELpaa-fxov SC. 
TOV Qeov. 

Help act), f. acrw, to try, Thuc. ii. 19; 
but more usual, and in N. T. mid. ttel- 
pdojuLaL, to try for 07ie's self, for one's own 
part, to attempt to do any thing, foil, by 
inf. Actsix. 26, ettelputo KoWdaduL tols 
/iaOijTais. xxvi. 21. 

IlELar/uLovr], 7]<5, n, {jttelQu),^ persuasion^ 
i. e. the being easily persuaded, credulity^ 
Gal. V. 8, see my note. 

TiE\ayo<5, Eo^ ov£, to, the sect^ the deep 
or open sea, i. e. remote from land. Matt, 
xviii. 6, Ev TOO tteX. Ttj^ ^a\da(T7}^. Thuc. 
iii. 32. Aristot. Probl. § 23, 3, Said of 
the sea adjacent to a country. Acts xxvii. 

5, TO TT. TO KUTU TVJV KlXlKLaU^ 1. C, the 

sea of Cilicia. 

UeXe kl'^u), f. terw, (tteXekv^,) to 
strike or heiv with an axe; in N. T. to he- 
head with an aoce, prop, with acc. of pers. 
pass. Rev. xx. 4, Tas x^/vxa^ twv tte'tte- 
X&KLarfJLEvcov, found only in lat. writers. 

He/utttos, t], OV, ordinal adj. (ttez/tc,) 
the fifths Rev. vi. 9. ix. 1, al. 

He/xttw, f. i|rw, to send ^ trans. I. of 
PERSONS, to cause to go : 1 ) gener. with 
acc. Matt. xxii. 7, TTE/nxl/a^ Ta a-TpaTEv- 
fxaTa avTov, Phil. ii. 23 ; foil, by acc. 
and dat. of pers. to whom, ver.'19; £ts of 
place. Matt. ii. 8 ; of pers. Mk. v. 12. Acts 
XXV. 21. Eph. vi. 22, 2) spec, of mes- 
sengers, agents, ambassadors, &c., with 
acc. Matt. xi. 2, Trijiixlra^ Svo tcov juad. 
avTov. Lu. xvi. 24. John i. 22. 1 Pet. ii. 
14. oL TTEfxcpQivTE's, thosc scnt, the mes- 
sengers, Lu. vii. 10. TT/oos TLva, iv. 26 ; 
with infin. of purpose, 1 Cor. xvi. 3. Rev. 
xxii. 16. irpo^ Tiva, Acts x. 33 ; so par- 
ticip. TTEfjLxj/a^ before a finite verb, imply- 
ing that one does a thing by an agent or 
messenger, Matt. xiv. 10, TTEfiyl/a^ ctt- 
EKE<pd\LarE TOV *lct)dvvr]v, comp. Mk. vi. 
27. Said of teachers or ambassadors sent 
from God or in his name, John i. 33. iv. 
34, oft. xiii. 20. xiv. 26. — II. of things, 
to send, transmit : 1 ) prop, with acc. of 
thing and dat. of person, Rev. xi. 10, ^copa 
TTEfxTTovcnv ciWriXoi^ : with acc. of thing 
impl. Acts xi. 29, al. 2) fig. to send upon 
or among, with acc. and dat. 2 Th. ii. 11, 
nTEfx\lfEL avTo1<5 6 9. EvipyEiav TrXaVij? : 
so with simple acc. to send forth, to Spi- 
Travov,— to thrust in. Rev, xiv. 15. Wisd. 
xii. 25. Horn. II. XV. 109. 

TLevyi^, r}T09, 6, rj, adj, {Trivofiai^) 
poor, needy ^ 2 Cor. ix. 9. Sept. and Class. 

TIevQ Epd^ d^,^, (iTEvdEpd^,) a mother- 
in-law, e. gr. the wife's mother, Mk. i. 30, 
77 TTEvd. St/utoi/os. Lu. iv. 38 : also the 



HEN 



334 



HEP 



husband's mother, Matt. x. 35. Sept. and 
Class. 

n £ 1/ 6 £ |0 6 s, oO, 6, a fatlier-in-laii\ John 
xviii. 3. Sept. and Class. 

nfi;0£a), f. ?7(ra), {irivdo<s^) to mourn^ 
lament: 1) trans, with acc. of pers. to 
hewail any one, grieve for him, 2 Cor. xii. 
21, iTEvdvcroi TToWoys. Sept. and Class. 
2) intrans. to mourn^ &c. at the death of 
a friend, with Kkaiw^ Mk. xvi. 10 ; so 
gener. — to he sad^ sorroiiful^ Matt. v. 4, 
(xaKapioL ol 'TTEvdovvTE^. \x. 15 ; mid. /or 
one's self, 1 Cor. v. 2, al. 

Iley 60s, £o§ ov§, TO, mourning^ 9'^^^f-> 
gener. Ja. iv. 9, o yiXcos u/xwi; ets Trti'Oos 
luaTaaTpacf)ijTa). Rev. xviii. 7. Sept. and 
Class. 

JlsvLXpo^, a, 61/, adj. {TrEi/ofiaL,) 
poor^ needy^ equiv. to 7r€i/?j9, Lu. xxi. 2. 
Sept. and Class. 

n £ 1/ T a /ci 9, adj . (ttei^te, ) ^t'e ^2??2e5, 
2 Cor. xi. 24. Sept. and Class. 

Jl&VT aKLcrxiXLO ai, a, adj. (x^- 
Xtos,) /Zre tliousand^ prop, five times one 
thousand, Matt. xiv. 21. xvi. 9, al. and 
Class. 

Tls-VTaKocr Loi^ ai, a, adj. jive hun- 
dred^ Lu. vii. 41. 1 Cor. XV. 6. Sept. and 
Class. 

TlivTi^ ol, at, Ttt, indec. Matt, 
xiv. 17; as an indefinite small number, 
1 Cor. xiv. 19. Sept. and Class. 

Il£i/T€/cai^£/caT09, 17, ov, ord. adj. 
(7r£i/Tf/cat^£/ca,) the fifteenth^ Lu. iii. 1. 

HEVT-nKovTa, 01, at, Ta, indecl.^^if?/, 
Lu. ix. 14, dud TTEvTriKovTa^ ' by fifties.' 

vii. 41. 

rEEi/Tlj/COO-TT], ^S, 17, (TTfl/TIJ/COCTTOS,) 

ajiftietli part ; in N. T. pentecost^ the day 
of pentecost, one of the three gTeat Jewish 
festivals, in which all the males were re- 
quired to appear before God. 

Il£7rot0t7O"t5, £0)9, 17, (7r£t6a), iri- 
iroida^) trusty confidence, 2 Cor. i. 15. iii. 
4. Eph. iii. 12. Phil. iii. 4. Sept. Jos. 
Philo. 

IIe/o, enclit. particle, (from Trfpt, adv. 
very, equiv. to TTEpLcra-o)?,) prop, very, 
ivholly, ever; in N. T. found only as 
joined with a pronoun, or with particles, 
for greater emphasis and strength. 

Uipav, adv. (accus. with ellips. of 
KaTd, of obsol. irspa, equiv. to iripa^, 
end,) heyond, over, on the other side ; as 
prep, with gen. iripav tou 'lopS. Matt, 
iv. 15. John vi. 1. xviii. 1, al. Sept. and 
Class. With neut. art. to nripav, prop. 
that beyond, the other side, i. e. the region 
beyond, ^la tov iripav tou 'lopB. Mk. x. 
L £ts TO TT. T^s 3'aXacro-J7§, v, 1. Lu. 

viii. 22. absol. Matt. viii. 18, al. Sept. and 
lat. Class. 



Hfipas, aTos, to, {iripa obsol.) end, 
ext7'emity of the earth, i. e. the remotest 
regions, Matt. xii. 42. Rom. x. 18. Diod. 
Sic. iii. 53; Ta tt. t^s y^§. Xen. Ages, 
ix. 4. Thuc. i. 69, Ik TrapaTouu y^s : fig. 
of 'what comes to an end,' conclusion, 
termination, Heb. vi. 16, avTiXoyia^ 
'Trepan. Sept. and Class. 

n £ p t, prep, governing in N. T. the gen. 
and acc, in the Classics, also the dat. ; 
with the primary signif. around, about, 
in a local sense, implying a surrounding 
and enclosing on all sides. I. with the 
GEN. which expresses as it were the central 
point from around which an action pro- 
ceeds, and ahoid which it is exerted ; but 
in N. T. 7r£pt with gen, is used only in the 
fig. sense about, concerning, respecting, &c. 
I. where the genit. denotes the object 
aboid which the action is exerted, as in 
Engl, 'to speak or hear about or of a 
thing ;' so, after verbs of speaking, asking, 
teaching, &c. oTt 7r£pt 'IcoaVyou sIttev 
auTots, Matt. xvii. 13. XaXico, Lu. ii. 17. 
Xiyijo, Matt. xi. 7. fpwTao), Lu. ix. 45. 
SLddarKw, 1 John ii. 27. ypdcpuo. Matt. xi. 
10, oft. ; after nouns of like signif., where 
the simple gen. might stand, Lu. iv. 14, 
(pv^ri TTEpi auTov. ver. 37, iJX^^ Trapt 
avTov, Acts xi. 22. XXV. 16. Rom. i. 3 ; 
after verbs of hearing, learning, knowing, 
&c. aKovu), Mk. V. 27. KaTYix^Wi Acts 
xxi, 21. ETTLcxTafxaL, xxvi. 26. yvooa-TOV 
E(TTi, xxviii. 22 ; after verbs of inquiring, 
deliberating, &c. Jt]T£u), John xvi. 19. 
E^Erd'^u), Matt. ii. 8. TrwddvojULai, Acts 
xxiii. 20. dLEvdviuLEOjULaL, x. 19. SLoXoyi- 
X^ofxaL, Lu. iii. 19. — 11. where the gen. 
expresses the ground, motive, or occasion of 
the action, equiv. to on account of, because 
of, for, 1) gener. after verbs of reproving, 
accusing, being tried, &o. with gen. of 
thing, EXiyxoo, John viii. 46. iyKakiw, 
Actsxix. 40. KaTYiyopio), xxiv. 13. Kpi- 
vo/maL, xxiii. 6 ; after verbs denoting an 
affection of the mind, o-TrXayx^^T*^/""^^ 
Matt. ix. 36. dyavaKTEw, xx. 24. hav- 
fxdXjM, Lu. ii. 18. Kavxaojuai, 2 Cor. x. 8. 
2) where the action is exerted in favour 
of the person or thing denoted by the 
gen. equiv. to on account of, in behcdf of, 
for. Matt. iv. 6, TOts dyyiXot^ avTOu kv- 
TEXElTaL TTEpi cTou. Lu. xxii. 32. John 
xvi. 26. Eph. vi. 18. Philem. 10. 1 Pet. 
V. 7, oTt avTw hjleXel TTEpi vfxoov : after 
verbs of offering sacrifice, (as one's life,) 
&c. i7i behalf of any one. Matt. xxvi. 28, 
TO aT/dd jULOV — TO 7r£pt 'TtoXXcov EKXvvd- 
/uLEvov. Gal. i. 4. Heb. v. 3. 3) where 
the action is exerted against a person or 
thing ; with gen. of person after words of 
accusing. Acts xxv. 18, 7r£pt ov oi kut- 
riyopoL ov^Efxiav alTiav kiTECpEpov. comp. 
ver. 27. ver. 15, -Trfpt ov kvEcpdvLaav o\ 



HEP 



335 



HEP 



ajOXttpcIs : so TTEpi ttJq auapTia?, "Trepl 
dfxapTLcou, Oil account of sin ^ for sin^ i. e. 
for expiating sin, Rom. viii. 3. 1 Pet, iii. 
18 : also irpoacpopa^ ^vaia^ &c. Heb. 
X. 18, 26. xiii. 11. 1 John ii. 2.— iii. 
where there is only a mere general refer- 
ence to the person or thing denoted by 
the gen. eqiiiv. to as to^ in relation to. Sic. 

1) gener. Matt, xviii. 19, iai/ Svo v/ncov 
<rvfX(poivy]cr(jocrL Trspi ttuvto^ irpayfxaTO^. 
Lu. xi. 53. John ix. 18. xi. 19. xv. 22. 
Acts xxviii. 21. Col. iv. 10, nrepl ov kXd- 
(Sete hroXd^. Heb. xi. 20. 3 John 2. 

2) absol. or independ. usually at the be- 
ginning of a sentence. Matt. xxii. 31, Trspi 
T^s dvaaTd(TE(x}<s tcov vEKp. fc.T.X.' as to the 
resurrection of the dead, have ye not read ?' 
Mk. xii. 26. Acts xxviii. 22. 1 Cor. vii. 
1, 25. 3) with neut. art. -ra iTEpi tlvo^ : 
with gen. of thing, the tilings relating or 
'peii.aining to any thing, Ta Trept jSacr. 
Tov 9. Acts i. 3. viii. 12, also xxiv. 22 ; 
foil, by gen. of pers. equiv. to one's cir- 
cumstances, state, cause, Lu. xxii. 37. 
xxiv. 19, 27. Eph. vi. 22.— II. with the 
ACCUSATIVE, which expresses the object 
around or about which any thing moves, 
comes, and also finally remains, i. of 
PLACE, around, about ; place whither, after 
verb of motion, Lu. xiii. 8, k'ojs otov 
(TKaxlfo). TTEpl avT^v. More freq. of place 
where, implying the coming and remaining 
around ; with acc. of thing. Matt. iii. 4, 

Ei^E '^(j}V1]V dspfJL, TTEpl TYiV OCTipVV aVTOV. 

Mk. ix. 42. Rev. xv. 6; of pers. Matt, 
viii. 18, iScbv 6 'Irja. TroWov? ox^ov^ 
TTEpL avTov. Mk. iii. 32, 34. Acts xxii. 6. 
With the art. ol, al, to. TTEpl, foil, by acc. 
of place, Mk. iii. 8, oi TTEpl Tupov Kal 
St^. ' they about Tyre and Sidon,' i. e. 
dwelling in and around these cities ; Acts 

xxviii. 7, EV TOTs TTEpl TOV TOTTOV EKELVOV, 

i. e. ' in the parts around, environs.' Jude 
7 ; acc. of pers. ol ttep'l tlvu, of a person 
and his followers, Mk. iv. 10. John xi. 19. 
Acts xiii. 13. — ii. fig. of that about which 
an action is exerted, about, concerning, 
respecting, equiv. to TTEpl with gen. 1) of 
a matter or business a6oz«^ which one is occu- 
pied. Acts xix. 25, Tous TTEpl Ta ToiavTa 
ipyaras. Lu. x. 40. 1 Tim. vi. 4. 2) 
gener. equiv. to as to, touching, 1 Tim. i. 
19, TTEpl Ti^v TTLcrnrLv Evavdyrjaav. vi. 21. 
2 Tim. iii. 8. Tit. ii. 7. 3) with neut. 
art. Ta TTspl e/jle, ' my circumstances, 
affairs, state,' Phil. ii. 23. — iii. of time, 
i. e. of a point of time not entirely definite, 
about, Matt. XX. 3, TTEpl tyiv TpLrrju topav. 
Mk. vi. 48. Acts x. 9. xxii. 6. — Note. In 
composition TTEpl denotes, 1) prop, a 
moving, being, spreading around on all 
sides, around, round about, e. gr. ttepl- 
/3aWw, ttepl(3\ettu), TTEpiiyu), &c. ; 2) 
fig. as around an object, and therefore 
more than^ over, above, e. gr. TTEpizijXL, 



TTEpLov(Tia ; 3) gener. emphasis or inten- 
sity, or strengthening of the simple idea, 
Lat. per, equiv. to completely, very, exceed- 
ingly, as TTEpLkvTTO^, TTEpLEpyo^, TTEpi- 
TTELpiO. 

Hep Lay CO, f. ajto, to lead about, Eur. 
Cycl. 680. 1) trans, to lead or cai^y about 
companions, 1 Cor. ix. 5, ddEX^ijv yvv. 
TTEpLayELv, implying sustenance as well as 
conveyance at the Church's expence. 
Sept. and Class, as Dem. 958, t PET'S Tral- 
a/coXou0oi»s TTEpidyEL^. 2) intrans, 
or with kavTov implied, to go about, to 
traverse, absol. Acts xiii. 11 ; or with acc. 
of place depending on TTEpl in comp. Matt, 
iv. 23, TTEpLTjyEv oXtjv TY]v TaXiXaiav, 
' he went about all Galilee.' ix. 35. xxiii. 
15. Mk. vi. 6. absol. Cebet. Tab. 6. 

TLEpLaipio), f. ricrio, aor. 2. ttepleI- 
Xov, to take aivay what is round about, 
trans. 1) prop. Acts xxvii.40, T-ds dyKv- 
pa^ TTEpLEXovTE^, ' taking up the [four] 
anchors round about' the ship, comp. ver. 
29 ; or rather, ' having removed the an- 
chors,' by cutting them away from the 
cables. See Aristoph. Eq. 290. So of a 
veil, 2 Cor. iii. 16, TTEpiaipElTaL to Ka- 
Xv/uLfxa, as in Jon. iii. 6, tt. t7]v (ttoXvv. 
2) fig. to tahe aivay wholly, i. e. all around, 
Heb. X. 11, ttepleXeIv dfxapTLa<5, 'wholly 
to take away sins,' to make complete expi- 
ation for them. Comp. ver. 4, and Zeph. 
iii. 15, TT, Kuptos Tot ddLKrifxaTa crov. 
Pass. Acts xxvii. 20, TTEpiripEiT-o TTaa-a 
eXttU, ' all hope was destroyed :' a form 
of expression not unfrequent in Class. 

Tlsp LacTT paTTTU), f. \J!rct), to fash 
around, shine around, with acc. of pers. 
Acts ix. 3 ; TTEpi Tiva, xxii. 6. 

HEpL^dXXo), L (3aXu), to cast, throw, 
or pid around any person or thing : I. 
gener. with acc. anddat. Lu. xix. 43, TTspi- 
(SaXovarL yapaKa <tol. Sept. and Class. — 
II. spec, of clothing, = to put on, to clothe, 

1) act. with acc. of person, expr. or impl. 
Matt. XXV. 36, yvjuLVo?, Kal tteple^oXete 
fjLE, ver. 38 ; with double acc. to put a gar- 
ment around or upon any one, clothe with 
any thing, Lu. xxiii. 11, TTEpi^aXoov av- 
Tov kadriT-a XauTTpdv. John xix. 2. Sept. 
and Class, as Hdian. ii. 8, 10, ttiv (3a<TL- 

XeLUV TTOpcfyvpaV {aVTOv) TTEpL(3aX6vT£9. 

2) mid. and pass, to put on one's own gar- 
ments, to clothe oneself, be clothed, absol. 
Matt. vi. 29, ovdk SoXo/xcbv TTEpiE(3d- 
Xeto ws kV TovTuiV. Rev. iii. 18; foil, by 
acc. of garment, Acts xii. 8, TT£pi(3aXov 
TO IfxaTLOv crov. Matt. vi. 31 ; part. perf. 
Mk. xiv. 51, TTEpL^E^Xr]ixivo's (TLvdova, 
xvl. 5. Rev. vii, 9, et al. Sept. and Class. 
With Eu TLVL, Rev. iii. 5, TTEpL^aXELTai kv 
LjULaTLOL<s Xevk. iv. 4 ; once with dat. of gar- 
ment, xvii. 4, TTEpL(3E^XiiiuLEvrj TTop<pvpa 

I Kal KOKKLVvp, text rec. Sept. and Class. 



HEP 



336 



HEP 



nept/jXETTO), f. i/ao), to look around 
upon ; in N. T. only mid. 'WEpL^KiTrofxaL^ 
f. xifofxai^ to look round about one : 1) in- 
trans. = to look around^ absol. Mk. ix. 8, 
'7repL(3XE\lrd/uLivoi^ ouketl ovdiua eldov. 
V. 32. X. 23. Sept. and Class. 2) trans. 
to look around upon, with acc. Mk. iii. 5, 
TTepLfSXExp^djULsvo? avTov's, ver. 34. xi. 11. 
Sept. and Class. 

^£J0tj3o\a^O2/, ou, to, (irEpifBaXXa),) 
prop. ' something throivn around^ i. e. a 
covering, garment, said of the outer gar- 
ment, mantle, 'pallium, Heb. i. 12. Sept. & 
Class. ; by impl. a covering for the head, a 
liead-dress, or perhaps a veil, 1 Cor. xi. 
15. See my note. 

Hzp f. ^ncrui, perf. pass. Trzpidi- 

de/iiai, to bind around, pass. John xi. 44, 
t] o\|/"is avTov arovdapico 'TTEpL&didaTO. 
Sept. and Class. 

HspLBpdjUia), see n£ptT/)£)(w. 

Tlsp Lspy dX^o /xai, f. dcrofxaL, {iTEpLEp- 
70?,) prop. ^0 t6"or^ aZZ around a thing, on 
every side, i. e. to ivork carefully, sedu- 
lously, to do with extreme pains, j^^l. V. 
H. ii. 44 : hence in N. T. to overdo, to do 
■with superfluous care and pains, to be a 
husy-body. So, in the paronomasia, 2 Th. 
iii. Il,/U7}^£y EpyaX,op.Evov<s aWa irspiEp- 
yaQofXEvovs, ' doing nothing [in one sense] 
but over-doing [in another],' ' not busy at 
work, but busy-bodies [at play].' Comp. 
Ecclus. iii. 23. Dem. 130, 24, ipyctjt? /cat 
TTEpLEpydXpy. 

TlEpitpyo's, ov, 6, rji a<lj. prop, work- 
ing or doing carefully, sedulously, comp. 
TTEpLEpydX^oiuiaL : in N. T, over-doing, 
doing with care and pains what is not worth 
while : 1) of persons, a busy-body, an 
intermeddler, 1 Tim. v. 13, ov ixovov ap- 
yal, aXkcL Kai (pXvapoL Kai iTEpLEpyoi, 
and so oft. in Class. 2) of things, to. 
TTEpLEpya, prop, over-wrought, curious, 
superfluous, said espec. of magic arts, sor- 
cery. Acts Xix. 19, LKaVol TCOV TO. TTEpl- 

ipya irpa^dvTOiV, and oft. in later writers. 

IT£pt£p )(0/uat, aor. 2. 7r£pt^\6oz/, to 
go about, icander up and down, absol. 
Acts xix. 13. Heb. xi. 37 ; so of a ship 
sailing on an irregular course with unfa- 
vourable winds, xxviii. 13, see my note; 
foil, by acc. of place, dependent on 7r£pi 
in composition, 1 Tim. v, 13, irepLEpxo- 
fXEvai n-d^ oi/cta?, 'going about to houses,' 
i. e. from house to house. Sept. & Class. 

IlfptEXw, f. fw, aor. 2. irEpLEcrxov, 
intrans. prop, to have or hold any person 
or thing, by enclosing it around. Hence to 
surround, environ, as a mountain or a city 
besieged. In N.T. gener. to enclose, embrace, 
contain : \) to clasp around, seize, as said 
of a person, fig. Lu. v. 9, 3'a/x/3o§ irEpi- 
i(Ty(Ev avTov. So 2 ]\Iacc. xiv. 16, irepL- 



E<TX^^ auTous )(aX£7rTj Tr£pi(TTacrL9. Jos, 
Bell. iv. 10, TTspLEo-x^ '^hi' poop.r]v Tr^.d^]. 
2) to contain, as a writing, with acc. Acts 
xxiii. 25, ypdij/as ett lottoXyju TrspLEXov- 
crav Tov Tvirov toxjtov. 1 JVIacc. xv. 2. 
EirL<rToXd<s, kul rjcrav TTEpiixovaaL tou 
Tpoirov TovTov. 2 IMacc. ix. 18, ettio-toXj; 
TrEpiixovcra ovTUi^ : also in Philo and 
Josephus. Impers. or with subject impl. 
1 Pet. ii. 6, ^LOTL 7r£pt£)(£t kv Trj ypa(py, 
idov /c.T.X. where supply rj irEpioxh-i or the 
like. Jos. Ant. xi. 4, 7, (^ovXojuLaL yivE- 
crdaL irdvTa, /ca6ajs kv avr^ k'TTLCTToXy 

TTEpLEX^L. 

TLep LX,<JiVvv fXL, f. ^wfTO), to gird 
aroimd ; in N. T, only mid. or pass, to 
gird oneself around, to be girded around^ 
spoken in reference to the long flowing 
garments of the Orientals, which are girded 
up around them while engaged in any 
active employment; mid. absol. Lu. xii. 37, 
TrEpiX^worETaL kol dvuKXiVEi avTov's. xvii. 
8. Acts xii. 8; with acc. fig. ti]v 6(T<pvv vfx, 
kv dX-ndEia, Eph. vi. 14. Sept. and Class. 
Pass. perf. part. 7r£pi£ja)<TjU£i/09, girded 
arouiid, absol. Lu. xii. 35, IcrroiXTav vfxwv 
ai ocrcpvE^ 'KEpLEX.aicrfxivaL, ' be ye ready, 
prepared ;' with acc. of thing, as girdle, &c. 

Rev. i. 13, ITEpLEX^COCrfJiEVQV '^(iivrjv XP^^V^- 

XV. 6. 

TiEpid ECri^, 71, {TTEpLTidl^lULL,) <Z 

putting around, wearing, as of golden orna- 
ments, 1 Pet. iii. 3. So Diod. Sic. xii. 21, 
TTEpLTLdEO-dai )(pucrta. 

He p i t cTTr} jULL, f. Trsp LorTvara), trans. 
to cause to stand around, to place around^ 
in N. T. only aor. 2. perf. and mid. intrans. 
to stand around : 1 ) prop, and absol. John 

xi. 42, did TOV OXXOV tov TTEpLECrTWTa, 

Acts XXV. 7, 7rEpLE(rT7]crav, ' stood around' 
the tribunal. 2) mid. 7r£pucr'Ta/uat,prop. 
' to place one's self round about,' i. e. by 
impl. away from, so as not to come near, 
= to stand aloof from, to avoid, with acc. 
depending on 7r£pi in composition, 2 Tim. 
ii. 16, Td<5 (3e(3tiXov9 KEvocpoovia^ 7r£/0t- 
icTTacro. Tit. iii. 9. So Jos. Ant. i. 1, 4, 
cpEvyEL Kai TTEp. iv. 6, 12, and oft. Jambl. 
V. Pyth. 31. Lucian, Hermog. § 86. 

TlEpLKadapfxa, aro?, to, {TrspLKad- 
aipu},) equiv. to Kadapfxa, but a stronger 
term, lit. ' cleansings up,' i. e. offscour- 
ings, filth, as collected in cleansing ; hence 
gener. and in N. T. put meton. for a vile 
and worthless person, a wretch, an outcast, 
1 Cor. iv. 13, cos TTEpiKaddpniaTa tov 
KoarjULov, ' outcasts from society.' So Jos, 
Bell. iv. 4, 3. Philo, p. 607. Dem. 574 
14. Lucian, D. JMort. ii. 1, and so purga- 
mentum in Latin. It is probable tha' 
the Apostle had there in mind the word, 
of Lament, iii. 45, ' Thou hast made us a^ 
the offscouring and refuse in the midst 0 
the people ;' or, as it might better be ren 



HEP 



337 



HEP 



()ered, ' Tliou hast made us an offscoiiring 
and refuse among the people,' Kadapjua 
Kai 'TrtpL\l/t]fxa kv idviCTL. 

irEpt/caXuTTTO), f. \//a), to cover 
around; e.gr. to Trpoa-wTrov^—to blindfold^ 
Mk. xiv. 65; with acc. of pers. id. Lu. 
xxii. 64; pass, to be, overlaid -with gold, 
Heb. ix. 4. Sept. 1 K. vii. 42. 

IlEpiKEi/uat, flit. KELorofxaL^ ])rop. to 
lie around^ be circumjacent^ as said both of 
things and persons. So Hdiun. vii. 9, 3, 

TO TTEpLKEllXtVOV 7r\^6o5 TWV (Sup^d- 

pu)v : in N. T. to Ha around^ and also 
to be laid around, equiv. to perf. pass, 
of TTEpLT'idfiiuLL. 1) to sun'0tt?id, cncoiH- 
pass, with dat. of pers. Heb. xii. 1, Trt/ot- 
KEL/JLEVOv vfxiv vicpo9 fxapTvpoiv. 2) equiv. 
to perf. pass, of irEpLTidrjiuLL, to be laid or 
put arou7id^ and so to be hung round^ the 
neck, Xi'(^o§, Mk. ix. 42, and Class. ; foil, 
by acc. of thing, in the manner of pass, 
verbs. Acts xxviii. 20, Tr]v aXvcnv Tav- 
Trjv TTEpLKELniaL, lit. ' I am hung around 
with this chain,' i. e. bound with it. So 
4 Mace. xiii. 13, opcov {avTov) nrd dEor/uLd 

TTEpLKEilXEVOV '. fig. Heb. V. 2, TTEpLKElrai 

dcrdivELav, a metaphor taken from cloth- 
ing, for TTEpiKELfMUL is oft. uscd foil, by 
(TToXrjv, &c. rarely, as here, fig. yet an 
example occurs in Theocr. Id. xxiii. 14, 
v^pLv TTEpiKELfxEvci. Comp. Hom. II. i. 
149, dvaL^Eir]v kiruipiivE. Ps. xxxv. 26, 
Sept. Ev^v(Td<y%Oiy(Tav ai(T)(yvr]v» 

TLEpLKECpaXaia^ as, ??, (adj. TTEpi- 
KE(pdXaL09^ fr. KEcfyaXi],) a head-piece, 
helmet, fig. Eph. vi.l7. I Thlv. 8, & Class. 

Hspt/cpaTr/s, ios oUs, 6, ?7, adj. prop, 
and lit. 'strong round about any thing,' 
equiv. to quite able to do it, or absol. verp 
powerful ; in N. T. having wholly in OTie's 
power, being wholly master of, and Trgpt- 
KpaTt]? yivEadai, to become master of, with 
gen. Acts xxvii. 16, irEpiKpaTEl^ jEVEordaL 
T^s a-Kd(f)ri9, ' to become masters of the 
boat,' i. e. to secure it so as to hoist it into 
the ship, comp. ver. 17, 30. So Susan. 
39, Alex. EKELvov ovK r]dvvndr\p.Ev ITEpi- 
Kpar&l^ yEVEordaL, ' get hold and secure 
him.' 

II £ p t K p u TTT oj, f. \jru), to hide by cover- 
ing up all round, i. e. wholly or carefully, 
iavT7]v, Lu. i. 24, ' kept herself private.' 

n £ p t /c u kX 6 u), f. (jixTU), to encircle round 
about, to surround, a city as besiegers, Lu. 
xix. 43. Sept. azid Class. 

n sp iXd/uLir CO, f. \^(jo, to shine around, 
with acc. Lu. ii. 9. Acts xxvi. 13. 

H E p iX E LIT oj, f. to leave over, 

pass, to be left over, remain over, equiv. to 
TTEpiyivopiaL, part, oi TTEpiXELTrofXEvoi, 
' those remaining over,' the survivors, 
1 Th. iv. 15, 17, and Class. 

Ilf ptA-u-TTos, 01/, b, V, adj. (TTfpt, Xv- 



TTij,) prop. ' environed with grief,' quite 
griet'ed, very sorrotiful. Matt. xxvi. 38, 

TTEpiX. E(TTLV t] xl/V^V /LLOV £605 3'aj/aTOU. 

Mk. vi. 26. Lu. xviii. 23, 24. Sept. & Class. 

n Ep I pLEV u), f, Evu), prop, to wait about 
for a person or thing, i. e. to wait for it, 
aicait it in earnest expectation, e. gr. tj/v 
E'TrayyEXiav, Acts i. 4, ' awaiting the pro- 
mise,' i. e. its event or performance. So 
Gen. xlix. 18, t7;i/ a-ooTr^piaif TTEpLfxivcoi/ 
KvpLov, where the true reading is, I sus- 
pect, 'TTEpifxivoj, to be rendered eocpecto, 'I 
wait for.' 

n £ p t ^, said to be a stronger form for 
prep. 7r£pt, but it may be better to regard 
it as the original form, afterwards softened 
to 7r£pt. Thus it occ. very freq. in Hdot. 
foil, by gen. or accus. So j^lsch. Pers. 
360, with acc. Polyb. i. 48, et al. By the 
Attic writers it was almost always confined 
to the adverbial use, and by later writers 
was employed as adv. for adj. by prefixing 
the art. So in N. T. we have 77 iripil^, 
surrounding, circumjacent. Acts v. 16, to 
irXrjdo'S Twu Tripi^ ttoXecov. 

UEpLOLKEO), f. ^(TCO, {'JT E p LO I KOS ,) tO 

dwell around, with acc. Lu. i. 65, toi/s 
7r£piot/coui/Ta5 avTovs, ' their neighljours.' 
Class. 

TiEpioLKo^, ov, 6, v, adj. one divelling 
around, a neighbour, Lu. i. 58. Sept. and 
Class. 

HEptoufTios, OV, 6, V, adj. {Trspi- 
ovaria,) having abundance, superabundant ; 
in N. T. by impl. one's own, special, pecu- 
liar, Xaos TTEpLOvcrio's, Tit. ii. 14; and so 
Sept. Ex. xix. 5, Xaos tt. et al. (see my 
note,) equiv. to Xaos €is 'TrEpL'jroirjaw, 
1 Pet. ii. 9, for Xaos TrspiTroi^jTo?, i. e. 
oiKsTo9. 

IlEpLox^h V^i Vi {'rTEpLEXco-,) prop, cir- 
cumference, circuit, compass, also fig. con- 
tents a writing in general ; hence in N.T. 
the contents of a book, a period, section, 
passage, Actsviii. 32, v TTEp. Trjs ypacp^]<s: 
and so Stob. Eel. Phys.i. 164. Dion. Hal. 
de Thucyd. 25. 

TlEpiTraTEO), f, ricroi, prop, to tread or 
walk about, and gener. to ivalk, intrans. 1 ) 
PROP, and gener. Matt. ix. 5, EyEipai Kai 
TTEpLTrdTEL, xl. 5. Mk. xvi. 12. Johu J. 
36. With an adjunct of place or manne>'; 
adv. Lu. xi. 44. John xxi. 18 : so with 
prepositions, did tou ^cotos avn-ri<s. Rev. 
xxi. 24. Mk. xi. 27. John vii. 1, et al. 
piETd with gen. of pers. = to accompany, 
associate with, John vi. 66. Rev. iii. 4 ; 
Trap a with acc. irapd tyiv ^dXacrarav, 
Matt. iv. 18. 2) fig. and from the Heb. 
to live, pass one's life, always with an ad- 
junct of manner, circumstances, &c.; with 
adv. Rom. xiii. 13, EvcrxniJi6vo)9 irEpLTra- 
Tvacofxev. 1 Cor. vii. 17. Phil. iii. 17. Col. 



HEP 



338 



HEP 



i. 10, a J/a)9 : with dat. of rule or manner, 
Acts xxi. 21, ToI§ edea-L TTEpiTraTE.lv. 
2 Cor. xii. ] 8, tw irvEVjjia^L : so with pre- 
positions, Blcl with gen. dia 7rio-T£ws, v. 
7; £z/ of state or condition, kv aapKL, x. 
3 ; also of rule or manner, Iv KaLv6nrr\TL 
Jco^s, Rom. vi. 4. kv a\i}deLa, 2 John 4. 
kv XpicTTco^ Col. ii. 6 ; KaTo. with acc. 
implying manner or rule, Mk. vii. 5, ov 
TT. /card Ti]v Trapadoaiv. Rom. viii. 1, 4, 
KaTcc crdpKa. xiv. 15. 

TlEpL'TrELpM, f. Trspo), ^0 pierce quite 
through^ trans/be^ as oft. in Class, and Jos. ; 
in N. T. metaph. 1 Tim. vi. 10, kavTov^ 
TTzpiiirzipav ddvvai^ TroXXaTs. So Horn. 
II. V. 399, KTjp dxk(jov^ oSuvyoTL irEirap- 
fxivo<s. Philo, p. 965, di/r^/cto-TOis ir&pL- 

iir&LpE KUKOT'S. 

ngjOtTrtTT'Ta), aor. 2. 'TrspLEiTEcrov, to 
fall about or upon any person, whether for 
good, to emhrace him, or for evil, to fall 
foul ofliim ; also, to fall upon or into any 
thing, as a state or condition. So EfxTti- 
irnrEiv Eh in Jos. Bell. iii. 9, 5. Diog. 
Laert. iv. 50, Pol. i. 76, 8 ; in N. T. to 
fall into or among^ with dat. Lu. x. 30, 
Xryo-Tats TrspLEirEcrEv. In Acts xxvii. 41, 
TT. €t§ TOTTov didd\a(T<Tov^ ' to light up- 
on.' So Arrian Peripl. irEpnTLTTTELV el<s 
n-oirov? 7r£Tpa)^£i9. Fig. to fall into^meet 
with^ Ja. i. 2, Trftpac/iots tt. So Thuc. 

ii. 54, TOLOVTW IToBeL 'TTEpLTTECrOVTE^. 

Dem. 1417, 18, dTv^tats tt. 

TlEpLTroLEO}^ f. T^o-o), to TmJce remain 
over and above, i. e. to lay up, acquire ; 
in N. T. only mid. to acquire for one's 
self, trans. Acts xx. 28, r)i/ 7r£pt£7rot?jo-aTO 
Sid Tov aijULaTO? tov idiov. 1 Tim. iii. 13, 
fiaBjuLov kavToT^ koKov TrEpLiroLOvvTaL. 
Sept. and Class. 

Il£/ot7rot?]<rt9, £609, v, {TrEpnroLEta,) 
prop, a making remain over, a laying up : 
in N. T. 1) gener. an obtaining, 1 Th. v. 9, 

£iS TTEpLTrOlTlCTLV (TMTrjpLa^. 2 Th. ii, 14. 

Eph.i. 14, £i§ dTroXvrpotXTLv Ttjs irEpLTroi- 
VCFEU)^, equiv. to £t9 ctTroX. tyiv TTEpnroL- 
rjdElarav, i. e. the redemption acquired for 
us by Christ (see my note); meton. tJdng 
acquired, a possession, 1 Pet. ii. 9, Xaos 
eh irEpLTToiricrLv, 'a people for a posses- 
sion,' i. e. peculiar, one's own, equiv. to 
Xaos TTEpLoixTLo^, Tit. ii. 14. 2) preser- 
vation, a saving of life, Heb. x. 39, £t§ 
'TTEpLiroLria-LV yp^vxri?, opp. to diroaXELa. 
Sept. 2Chr. xiv. 32. 

llEpLpp'nyvvfXL,f. TTEpippri^oi, prop, to 
tear from around any one ; in N, T. of gar- 
ments, to tear off, as the clothes of persons 
about to be scourged, nrd ifxdTia, Acts 
xvi. 22. 2 Mace. iv. 38. Plut. Popl. vi. 
TTEpLEpp-nyvvov Ta l/JLaTLa — pd(3BoL^ E-^aL- 
vov Ta cTOtiiia^a. 

JlEpLCTTrduy, f. acw, to draw from 



around any one, to draw off, to draw about 
or away ; in later usage and N. T. pass. 
iTEpLcnrdofxaL, fig. to be drawn about in 
mind, to be distracted, ove7'-occupied, i. e. 
with cares or business, foil, by TTEpl with 
acc. Lu. X. 40, v Mdpda irEpLEcrirdTO 
WEpl iroWrjv ^LaKoviav. Diod. Sic. i. 74, 

'TTipl TToWd Ttj dLaVOLCt TrEpLaTrwfXEVO^. 

Ecclus. xli. 2, TrEpKrircojULEVw TTEpl irdv- 

TMV. 

JlEp LacTELa, as, 77, {iTEpLcrcro^,) super- 
abundance, Rom. V. 17, Ti]v TTEpicrcrEiav 
Tt7s xctptTos, equiv. to ttjv x«pt'r« rrjV 
TTEpLcra-Evovaav, ' superabounding grace.' 
2 Cor. viii. 2. x. 15, eU TTEpLo-araiav, adv. 
superabundantly, exceedingly; Ja. i. 21, 
TTEp. /ca/ctccs, ' superabounding wickedness.' 
Sept. Eccl. i. 3, al. 

TLEpLo-cTEviuLa, ttTO^, TO, {irEpLcraEva),) 
more than enough : 1 ) ' what is left over,' 
remainder, residue, Mk. viii. 8, Trfptccfiu- 
IxaTa KXaa-jULaTcov. 2) ' what is laid up,' 
superabundance, i. e. affluence, wealth, 
2 Cor. viii. 14, to ekelvcov irEpicrcrEviJLa 
yEvrjTaL sts to vpiwv v(TTEpr]fxa. : fig. 
Matt. xii. 34, kK tov irEpKTcrEv fxaTo^ ttJ^ 
Kap^ia^. 

TLEpL(T<TEvo}, f. Evcro), {'TTEpLcrord'S,^ to 
be over and above, eocceed in number or 
measure ; in N. T. be more than enough: 
I. to be left over, to remain, intrans. John 
vi. 12, Ta irEpL(T<TE\)(TavTa KkdcrfxaTa. 
ver. 13. Part, to irEpKrcrEvov, the re- 
mainder, residue, touv K\a<rp.dTwv, Matt, 
xiv. 20. Lu. ix. 17. — II. to superabound^ 
intrans. 1) oi persons, zz. to have more 
than enough, absol. Phil. iv. 12, 18; with 
gen. Lu. XV. 17, TrEpia-arEuova-iv dpTwv : 
foil, by £is Ti, to or for any thing. Eh nrav 
Epyov dyaQov, 2 Cor, ix. 8 ; by ev tlvi, 
in or in respect to any thing, Rom. xv. 13. 
Phil. iv. 12. 2) oi things, = to abound 
intens., with dat. Lu. xii. 15, ovk ev Tto 
TrEpLarcEVELv TLvi V X^corj avTov : part, to 
'TTEpLcra-Evov TLVL, cquiv. to one''s abund- 
ance, wealth, Mk. xii. 44 : foil, by cts 
TLva, to abound unto any one, ' to happen 
to him abundantly,' Rom. v. 15 ; by E'h 
Tt, unto any thing, to redound, super- 
abundantly conduce. 2 Cor. iv. 15, 'Lva ri 
Xdpi^ irEpLcrcTEvri sh Tr\v do^av tov Qeov. 
viii. 2. absol. i. 5 : so, with the idea of 
increment, to abound more and more,= 
to increase, to be augmented, with dat. 

Acts xvi. 5, ETTEpiCrcrEVOV TW dpldjUitO. 

Phil. i. 9, 26 : 3) causative, to make su- 
perabundant, cause to abound ; of persons, 

1 Th. iii. 12, vfid^ 6 Kupto? TrXfoi/aVat 
Kul TTEpLGrcrEva-aL Ty dyaTrri : of things, 

2 Cor. ix. 8, ^vvaTO's 6 0£O9 irdcav xdpiv 
'TTEpKTCTEvcTaL Eh vjuLu^. Eph. 1. 8. iu at- 
traction : pass, to be made to abound, of 
persons, ' to have more abundantly,' Matt, 
xiii. 12. xxv. 29. — III. by imp]., in a 



HEP 



339 



HEP 



comparative sense, to he more abundant, 
= fo be more conspicuous, distinguished, to 
excel ; with irXelou and gen. Matt. v. 20, 
idv fxt) 7r£pL<T(TEua-rj i) diKaLOavvi] vfxwv 
'ttXe'loi/ Toiv ypafifxaTiodv : foil, by iv 
TLVL, in or in respect to any thing, 1 Cor^ 
XV. 58, irEOLcrcTEvovTi^ kv tm spyco tov 
KvpLov. 2 Cor. iii. 9 ; absol' Rom. iii. 7, 
el ?; aXtidsLa tou S&ov iirEpLcraevasv, 
*■ has been made more conspicuous;' i Cor. 

viii. 8, ovTE kav (pdyuifizv^ir^pLcrcrEvofxtv, 
^ are we the better xiv. 12. 

n € p I <r cr o s, tj, 6v, adj . over and above, 
niore than enough : I. prop, as exceeding 
a certain measure, with gen., equiv. to 
more than. Matt. v. 37, to 'TrspLcrardi/ tov- 
Tu)v, lit. ' the ovei-plus of these,' what is 
beyond or more than these. Sept. Jos. 
Ant. X. 4, 2, TO TTsp. Twv xpVM-dTcov, and 
Class. In the sense of super jlvAius, 2 Cor. 

ix. 1, 'TTEpLcra-oi; julol io-rt to ypdcpEiv 
vfdLlv, and Class. — II. gener. superabund- 
ant, or exceedingly great : 1 ) in positive, 
only as adv., neut. irspLcradv, abundantly, 
in superabundance, John x. 10, 'iva ^wt/V 
t-)((x}cri, KOL irspLcrcrov 'i^wcnv : so €/c Trg- 
pL(y(Tov, beyond measure, vehemently, Mk. 
vi. 51. xiv. 31. 2) in comparat. 'vrepLarcroTE- 
pos, more abundant, more, greater; in 
number, Lu. xii. 4 ; in degree. Matt, xxiii. 
14, TTspLcrcroTepov Kpifxa. 1 Cor. xii. 23. 
2 Cor. ii. 7. Neut. TTEpicrcroTEpou, as 
adv. more abundantly, moi-e, more ear- 
nestly or vehemently, absol. Lu. xii. 48, 
'TTipLcra'OTEpov aiT-ncrovariv avTov. 2 Cor. 
X. 8, idv Kai iTEpLarcroTEpSv tl Kavxriaui- 
(lai. Heb. vi. 17 ; foil, by gen. 1 Cor. 
XV. 10, with fxdXkov, Mk. vii. 36 : also, 
like jjidWov, it forms with a positive a 
periphrasis for a comparative, Heb. vii. 15, 

TTEpLCra-OTEpOV ETL /CttTa^JjAoZ/ E<TTLV. 

III. by impl., in a comparative sense, more 
abundant, i. e. distinguished, excellent, bet- 
ter. Matt. V. 47, TL iTEpLcradv 'TToleTte ; 
so Diod. Sic. xii. 15, 6 vofxcs ov6ev opaTai 

TTEpiiXfJ^V (X0<p6v V TT. *. hcUCC UCUt. TO 

'TTEpLCTcrdv, excellence, pyre-eminence, Rom. 
iii. 1. Comparat. Matt. xi. 9, irEpLcrcro- 
TEpov irpocpn'Tov. 

XIsp to- croTsptos, adv. of compar.de- 
gree, more abundantly, more, more ear- 
nestly or vehemently, the object compared 
being every where implied ; Mk. xv, 14, 
'JTEpia-o'OTipu}? EKpa^av, ' they cried out 
more vehemently,' i. e. than before; 2 
Cor. i. 12, iTEpLcrdOTipui'i Trpos vp.d's, 
' more abundantly towards you,' i. e. than 
towards others; ii. 4, vv ex(j^ irEp. Eh 
vfjid^, i. e. than others have, &c. ; vii. 15. 
Also the more abundantly, the more, 1 
Th. ii. 17. Heb. ii. 1. xiii. 19 : with fxdX- 
Xou, 2 Cor. vii. 13. 

JlEpLo-crd)^, adv. abundantly, exceed- 
ingly, vehemently, Matt, xxvii. 23, Trepto-- 



o-ws EKpaX^ov. Mk. x. 26. Acts xxvi. 11. 
Sept. and Class. 

HeptcTTEpa, d<5, v, a dove, pigeon. 
Matt. iii. 16. Lu. ii. 24, ^vo VEoarcrov^ 
TTEpLaTEpcov, ' two youug doves,' the of- 
fering of the poor, et al. ssepe, and Class. 

n€ptT£/U.i;a),f. TEfXU), aor. 2. TTEpitTE- 

fxov, to cut around, to circumcise ; mid. to 
let one's self be circumcised, only in the 
Jewish sense, ' to remove the prepuce 
1) prop, with acc. of pers. Lu. i. 59, 
riXdov TTEpLTEfXElv TO TTaLdiov. Johu vii. 
22, and oft. ; mid. Acts xv. 1, 24. 1 Cor. 
vii. 18 ; pass. part. perf. TrEpLTETpLYifXEva, 
ibid. 2) metaph., in a spiritual sense, 
' to put away impurity,' Col. ii. 11, irEpi- 

ETfJL7ldl]TE TTEpLTOjULTJ a)(£ip07r0t77TW. 

IlEpLTLdrjiuLL, fut. TrEpLdvcyco, to put 
or place around any person or thing, foil, 
by acc. and dat. expr. or impl. Matt. xxi. 
33, (ppayfjLoi; avTco TTEpiidriKE. xxvii. 28, 
7rEpLidi]Kav avTco ^XaiuivSa. ver. 48, 
tteplOeU {tou (TTrSyyov) KaXdfxco, 'put- 
ting or winding it around the end of a rod.' 
On the contrary, Aristoph. Thesm. 387, 
uses TTEpiOov for EITLdoV. Mk. XV. 17, 
'TTEp IT iQEatTLV UVTCp, 'wXi^avTE^ aKuvdi- 

vov oTTECpavou. John xix. 29. Sept. and 
Class. Fig. to bestow upon, to give, 1 Cor. 
xii. 23, TouTots TiiuLr]v TTEpLcra-oTipav 

TTEpLTLdEfXEV. Scpt. Esth. i. 20. Job 

xxxix. 19. Xen. Athen. i. 2. Hdian. v. 1. 

HeptTO/x?], ?7?, 77, {TTEpLTEjULVU},) cir- 
cumcision, in the Jewish sense, the re- 
moval of the prepuce. I. prop. 1) the act 
or rite of circumcision, John vii. 22, 23, 
TTEpLTOfxriv Xafx^dvELv, 'to receive circum- 
cision,' be circumcised, Acts vii. 8. Rom. 
iv. 11 ; in Sept. oft. 2) the state of cir- 
cumcision, the being circumcised, Rom. ii. 
25, 27. iv. 10, kv 'TTEpiTOfxy d)v, equiv. to 
' being circumcised :' so ol ek irEpiTOfjirj's, 
' those of the circumcision,' equiv. to ' the 
circumcised,' put for the Jeics, ver. 12 ; for 
Jewish Christians, Acts x. 45. Gal. ii. 12. 
3) meton. and collect. 77 TrspiTo/xt], for 
the circumcised, i. e. the Jews, the Jewish 
people, Rom. iii. 30, os diKaLwa-EL irEpi- 
To/xrjy EK TTio-Tgcos. iv. 9, 12. XV. 8. — II. 
FIG. in a spiritual sense, it denotes espec. 
' the circumcision of the heart and affec- 
tions (comp. Deut. x. 16. xxx. 6. Jer. iv. 4. 
Plato i. 450.) by putting off the body of the 
sins of the flesh,' Rom. ii. 28, 29, iTEpi- 
TOjuLrj Kapdia^. Col. ii. 11 ; collect, and 
emphat. Phil. iii. 3, VfXET^ ka-ixkv rj irEpi- 
Tofxr], i. e. 'we are the true spiritual cir- 
cumcision,' the true people of God. 

ngptTpE-TTO), f. prop, to turn about 
as a person, to turn upside down, overturn, 
as a thing. In N. T. fig, to turnabout into 
any state, &c. =: ' to cause to become any 
thing,' to make, with el's. Acts xxvi. 24, (te 
£t§ fxaviav TTEpLTpEirEi, 'turns thee about 



HEP 



340 



11 HA 



into madness,' makes thee mad. Jos. Ant. 

ii. 14, 1, £is 6pyr]u Trcp. 

IIcjOtTp £)(a), aor. 2. TrepLiSpafiov, to 
run round in a circle. In N. T. to run 
about in a place, with acc. Mk. vi. 55, 
TTEpLdpafMovTE^ b\7\v Ti^u iTspiyaypov. 
Sept. and Class. 

Yl(.pL(pipu}^ flit. TrspioLCTU)^ prop, to 
hear or carry around or about. In N. T. 
\) to bear about., i. e. hither and thither, 
Mk, vi. 55, Toy's kuko)^ 'i\ovTa^ nrspL- 
(pipELv. 2 Mace. vii. 27, ttjV ev yaa-i-pi 
irtpLEviyKacrav : or carry about in the 
arms as a child, Eur. Or. 458. Xen. Gr. 
vii. 5, 58. 2 Cor. iv. 10. See vek pwa l^. 
2) pass, to he carried or driven about 
hither and thither, i. e. by the wind, as a 
ship, Jude 12, vtto avifxwv ir. So Max. 
Tyr. Diss. 31, v i/aus 7rEpLE(pEpETo : fig. 
Eph. iv. 14, iTEpLcf). TTavrl dvEjULU) Trj's 
didacKoKia^. Heb. xiii. 9. See irapa- 
cpipo)^ 2. 

TlEpLcppovEco^ fut. ^(Tw, to tMnk about., 
reflect upon a thing., to consider it on all 
sides ; also to think over or beyond a 
thing or person, to overlook or despise., 
Thuc. i. 25, TTEpicppovovvTE^ avrov^. Jos. 
Ant. iv. 8, 24 ; also with gen. ^sch. Dial. 

iii. 2. Plut. Thes. i. And so in N. T. Tit. 
ii. 15, firiSak GOV 'KEpL(ppovEiTU3. See 
4 Mace. vi. 8. 

TLEpi^w po^., ou, o, 17, adj. (x'^'Po?,) 
around a place., circumjacent., neighbour- 
ing. Hence in N. T. fem. 77 -Trtptx^P^^^ 
sc. y^, ' the country round about,' Matt, 
xiv. 35, al. ; meton. of inhabitants, iii. 5. 
Sept. 

Ilspt if/^rj/ia, ttTos, TO, ('TrEpLxf/da).,) 
prop, scrapings up., filth. In N. T. meton. 
for a vile and worthless person (as in Engl. 
the scum), 1 Cor. iv. 13, irdvTOiv irEpi- 
y\rr]fxa k'ws dpTi. And so Jerem. xxii. 28, 
Symm. There may, however, be an allur- 
sion to those mean and wretched persons 
who were offered up as expiatory victims 
to the heathen gods ; q. d. ' we are so 
despised as to be like the 'TTEpLxp^^iJ.ara.^ 
So St. Ignat. Ep. to the Eph. viii. 18, ap- 
plies the term to himself. 

Iltp'TrEpsuo/Liat, {TripTTEpo^^) depon. 
mid. to shotv one''s self a boaster., — to 
boast one's self to vaunt., 1 Cor. xiii. 4. 
Marc. Ant. v. 5, koL dpECKEordaL /cat 
iTEpTrepEVEardaL. See more in my note. 

IXtpuo-t, adv. (dat. plur. with ellip. of 
of the obsol. Tripvs fr. Trgputo, cogn. 
with TTE/oao),) the past year, a year ago ; 
in N. T. only with diro, i. e. diro TripvGL, 
prop, a year ago, 2 Cor. viii. 10. ix. 2 : so 
TTpo 'jTEpvarL, Dem. 467, 14 ; and ek 'tte- 
pvcTL, Luc. Soloec. § 7. 

IlETdofiai, see Xltro/xat. 

JIetelvov, ou, t6, (7r£T£iyos,) a bird, 



fowl, in N. T. only pi. tu irETiivd, Matt. 

vi. 26, oft. Sept. and Class. 

JLeto fxai, f. TTETricrofxaL or irTncro- 
fxai, depon. mid. to fly, intrans. Rev. xii. 
14, 'Lva TTETriTaL eU Ti]v Eprjfxov : part. 
TTETo/uLEvo^, flying, in later edd. iv. 7. viii. 
13. xiv. 6. xix. 17, al. Sept. and Class. 

IlfiTpa, a9, 77, a rock, prop, a project- 
ing rock, a clijf: 1) prop. Rev. vi. 15, eU 
T-ds TTETpa's Tu)v opEcov. vor. 16 : in such, 
sepulchres were hewn, Matt, xxvii. 60. 
Mk. XV. 46 ; and houses and villages built 
for security, Matt. vii. 24. Lu. vi. 48. Said 
of a rocky soil(=: TTETpcoSr}^), Lu. viii. 6, 
13. Sept. and Class. 2) fig. of Christ, in 
allusion to the rock whence the waters 
flowed in the desert, 1 Cor. x. 4. comp. 
Ex. xvii. 6. Num. xx. 8 ; also as iriTpa 
cTKai'SaXov, a rock of offence or stumbling ; 
said of Christ, the occasion of destruction 
to those who reject him, Rom. ix. 33. 
1 Pet. ii. 7. 

IlfTpos, ov, 6, rock, John i. 43. 

Il£Tp6o5r7§, £0S 0V9, 6, V, adj. ('TTfc- 

Tpos, £1^09,) rock-like, stone-like, having 
the form of a rock, Diod. Sic. iii. 44. 
Soph. Antig. 774 ; in N. T. rocky, stony., 
and TO 7r£Tpto^£5, rocky ground, stony soil., 
Mk. iv. 5, Ta TTETpco^T, id. ver. 16, sc. 
yoopia. So Dioscor. <^u£Tat iv TraTpoo- 

Seotl TOirOL^. 

Urjyavov, ov, to, {irriyvv/jLi,) rue, a 
plant, Lu. xi. 42, and Class. 

Uriyt), ri<s, ri-, fountain, source: 1) 
gener. Ja. iii. 11. Sept. and Class. From 
the Hebr. ir^yal vdaTwv, ' fountains of 
water,' Rev. xiv. 7, and Sept. ; metaph. of 
life-giving doctrine, John iv. 14; also as 
an emblem of the highest enjoyment, Rev, 

vii. 17. xxi. 6. Sept. Prov. xiii. 14. xiv. 
29. Ecclus. xxi. 13. 2) — a well, to 
(ppiap, John iv. 6, ir^yri tov 'laKoyft, 
comp. ver. 11, to cppiap. 2 Pet. ii. 17. 
S) = an issue, flux, ii Trrjyi] tou aip.aT0<i, 
Mk. V. 29 ; =17 pua-te tou atft. Lu. viii. 
44. Sept. Lev. xii. 7. Comp. Jer. ix. 1, 
irrjyrj SaKpvwv. 

Ylvyvv p.L,i.'Trri^u),to fijx, fasten, make 
fast, Thuc. V. 66 ; tofioe or fasten together, 
to construct, build, Hdot. v. 83; in N. T. 
of a tent, to set up, to pitch, Heb. viii. 2, 
riv ETrrj^EV 6 Kvpio9 : so Sept. Gen, xxvi. 
25. 1 Chron. xvi. 1. Hdot. vi. 12, and 
elsewhere in Class. 

TLrjSdXiov, ov, to, (-ttij^oi/,) a helm, 
rudder. Acts xxvii. 40. James iii. 4, and 
Class. 

nijXi'/cos, 7], ov, pron. correl. Iwiv 
great, quantus, corresponding to vXlko^, 
T7]\iKos ; Gal. vi. 11, lSete Trr^XiKoi^ 
vjuLLv ypd/uLfxacrLv Eypaxj/a, i. e. either 
with what large letters, or tvith how large ' 
a letter, Imve written, &c. see my note. 



n H A 



341 



niN 



Fig. of dignity, Heb. vii. 4, ttjjX. outos. 
Sept, Zepli. ii. 6. Lucian Haic. 2. rol. i. 
6, 28. 

n»jX6s, oD, 6, clay^ mire^ mortar^ John 
ix. 6 : spec, potter s day^ Rom. ix. 21. 

lit? pa, a?, a 6"ac'^', ivallet^ Lat. 
pera^ of leather, in which shepherds and 
travellers carried their provisions, Matt. x. 

10. Mk. vi. 8, and Class. 

11 ^X^^''* ^» (kindred with ttux^'s,) 
gen. pi. TTj/xtwi^, hater form contr. Trt/x^'^i 
prop, /ore-arm, from the wrist to the 
elbow ; in N. T. a cuhit^ equal to the dis- 
tance from the elbow to the tip of the 
middle finger, and usually reckoned at 
foot, Matt. \i. 27, TTijyyv 'iva, John xxi. 
8, cos CLTro TTijx^^ OLaKoa-icov^ and Class. 

Ilta^a), f. ao-o), (Dor. for TTitJoo fr. 
•TTfcJa,) io press down or upon^ prop, with 
the foot, as beasts hold their prey; also 
with the Itands^ to seize and Jiold : so 
Tlieocr. iv. 35, Taupoi/ air' wpso^ ays 
'TTid^a^ Ta? oTrXas. In N. T. 1) of per- 
sons, to take one by the hand, with acc. & 
gen. of the part, Acts iii. 7, Triacas avrov 
T^s de^La^ x^'-P^^- 1^ ^ judicial sense, 
to take, arrest, John vii. 30, iX^riTovv avTov 
TTLuaaL. ver. 32, oft. Ecclus. xxiii. 21. 
2) of animals, to take in hunting or fish- 
ing, to catch, with accus. John xxi. 3, kv 
Trj i/uKTL iiriacyav ovoiv. ver. 10. Rev. 
xix. 20, kiridaQy] to ^^p'lov. Sept. Cant. 

11. 15. 

YliiX^ui, f. fcoro), (a later form for 
TTid^ct), which alone occ. in Hdot.) to 
press, hold fast, e. gr. one's hand ; in 
N. T. to press down, make compact, 
juLEi-pov, Lu. vi. 38. Sept. and Class. 

H id avoXoy ia, as, rj, (TrtOayos, X6- 
•yos,) persuasive discourse, eiiticing words, 
Col. ii. 4 : so TriQavo^ \070s, Jos. Ant. 
viii. 9, 1. 

TLiKpaivco, f. avu), (TTi/cpos,) prop, to 
make sharp ; hence of taste, to make bit- 
ter, acrid, trans. 1) prop, of water, pass. 
Rev. viii. 11 : meton. of the pain caused by 
bitter and poisonous food or drink, = to 
make painful, to cause hitter pain, with 
acc. X. 9, TTLKpavii crou t^v KOLkiav, 
comp. Sept. Job xxvii, 2. 2) fig. of the 
feelings, to embitter, pass, to be or become 
hitter, i. e. to be harsh, angry. Col. iii. 19. 
Sept. Ex. xvi. 20. Jer. xxxvii. 14. Esdr. 
iv. 31. Dem. 1464, 18. Theocr. v. 120. 

TliKpia, as, 77, (TTt/cpos,) bitterness: 
1) prop, with the accessory idea of venom, 
the two being often connected in the mind 
of the Jews : so in place of an adj . Heb. 
xii. 15, /Oi^a TTiKptas, = pi'^a iTLKpu. 
Acts viii. 23, eIs xo\)]v TriKpia^, = x- 
TTLKpav. 2) fig. angriiiess of spirit or 
speech, Eph. iv. 31, Traora iriKpLa kul 
i'u/xo's. Rom. iii. 14. Sept. and Class. 



lit /epos, a, 6v, adj. prop, prickinc/, 
pointed, sharp ; hence gener. and in N. T, 
of taste, hitter, acrid. Sept. and Class. 1) 
prop, and opp. to yXvKV^, Ja. iii. 11. 2) 
metaph. of the feelings, or spirit, hitter, 
harsh, cruel, Ja. iii. 14, X^iiXov tt. Diod. 
Sic. i. 78. Pol. vii. 14, 3. 

Ilt/cpajs, adv. (Trt/cpos,) bitterly, in 
N. T. of bitter weeping. Matt. xxvi. 75, 
al. Sept. and Class. 

n i'/UTrXrj/xi, f. 7rXr}crco, (TrXaw, obsol.) 
aor. 1. 'iirX^aa, aor. 1. pass. kTrXri(yQr]v, 
to fill, make fidl, trans. I. prop. aor. 1. 
'i-irX^ara, with acc. Lu. v. 7, eVXtjcrai/ 
dp-cpoTspa nrd TrXota : also with gen. of 
that with which, Matt, xxvii. 48. John 
xix. 29, TrXrJa-ayTES cr'Koyyoif o^oys. 
Sept. and Class. Pass, with gen. Matt, 
xxii, 10. — II. METAPH. aor. 1. pass. 
ETrXricrdriu, to be filled, he full: 1) of per- 
sons, to be filled ivith any thing, i. e. to he 
wholly imbued, affected ivith or by any 
thing, with gen. of thing ; IIi'et'/xaTos 
dyiov, Lu. i. 15, and oft. hvp.ov, iv. 28. 
al. (p6[3ou, V. 26, al. dvoia's, vi. 11, al. : 
also Acts iii. 10. v. 17. Sept. and Class, 
as Anthol. Gr. iv. 28, crocph]^ irX7]Q6p.E- 
f OS : meton. of a place. Acts xix. 29. 2) of 
prophecy, to he fidfilled, accomplished, Lu. 
xxi. 22, Tou 7rXr]cr0^i/at -rd y&ypap.p.iva, 
in later edd. Sept. in 1 K. ii. 27, TrXrjpto- 
dfjvaL. 3) of time, to he fulfilled, com- 
pleted, be fully past, Lu. i. 23, ws £7rX>j- 
aQr]aav al ripipaL t^s X&iTOvpyia^ au., 
ver. 57. ii. 21, 22. Sept. in Gen. xxv. 24, 
TrXripcodijvaL. 

TLl pLTT pmxL, f. Trprycrco, to set on fire, to 
burn, iElian V. H. xii. 23 ; in N. T. pass, 
only fig. to be inflamed, to swell, become 
swollen, from the bite of a serpent. Acts 
xxviii. 6. Lucian, Dips. 4, o0ts kKKaUi — 
/cat TrLpLirpaaOaL ttolsT. 

llLvaKLdLov, ov, TO, {iriva^,) a small 
tablet, ivriting-table, Lu. i. 63. Arr. Epict. 
iii. 22, 4. 

Tliva^, aKo<s, 6, a hoard, Hom. Od. 
xii. 67 ; table, spec, in Class, a icriting- 
tahle or tablet, covered with wax ; in N. T. 
a plate, dish, on which food and the like 
was served up. Matt. xiv. 8. Lu. xi. 39. 
Hom. Od. i. 141. xvi. 49. Athen. vi. 3. 
Jos. Ant. viii. 3, 8. 

Tlivui, (f. TTLopaL, and 2 pers, Triec-aL, 
aor. 2. 'iTTLov, perf TrtTrcoKa, aor. 1. pass. 
ETTo'O?]!/,) to drink, I. gener. of persons, 
absol. Matt, xxvii. 34, ovk vOeXe ttluv. 
Lu. xii. 19. Acts ix. 9, al. ; fig. John vii. 
37. Rev. xvi. 6. Infin. final, covvat 
TTLelv, ' to give to drink,' John iv. 7. 
aLTziv TTLELU, xcY. 9. With adjuncts: 1) 
foil, by Lk of the drink, or meton. of the 
vessel containing it, i. e. to drink of any 
thing. Matt. xxvi. 27, 29. John iv. 12-1 
14. 2) by dTTo of the drink, Lu. xxii. 



nio 



342 



nis 



]8. 3) by acc. of the thing drunk, to 
drink any thing, Lu. i. 15. Rom. xiv. 21. \ 
1 Cor. X. 4 ; to drink of. Matt, xxvi.- 29 : 
fig. John vi. 53. Meton. to ironrripLov | 
TTLv&Lv, 'to drink a cup,' e. gr. of wine, 
prop. 1 Cor. X. 21 ; fig. of suffering, to 
dHnk tlie cup which God presents, i. e. to 
submit to the allotments of his providence, 
Matt. XX. 22. xxvi. 42.— II. fig. of the 
earth, to drink in, to imhihe, with acc. 
Heb. vi. 7. Sept. Deut. xi. 11. Hdot. iii. 
117. Xen. Conv. ii. 25. 

ntoTt]9, rjTos, jj, (TTtwy,) fat, fatness, 
Rom. xi. 17, T^s TT. T^s iXaia's, and 
Sept. 

Ili'TrpdarKU), (perf. iriTrpaKa, perf. 
pass, iriirpafxai, aor. 1. pass. iirpaQ^v, 
fr. irzpacD,) 'to make Jo pass to another,' 
and by impl. to deliver over, give up for 
consideration : so our sell, from A.-S. 
syllan, to deliver up; and so Hebr. nb^^ 
to let go, and TrcoXio) fr. ttoXsio, to turn 
over, by commutation ; hence gener. to 
sell, with acc. Matt. xiii. 46, iriTrpaKE 
TTCLVTa ocra sTx^' Acts ii. 45. jPass. Matt, 
xviii. 25, kKeXivaEu avTov irpadfjuaL. 
Mk. xiv. 5. Acts iv. 34. v. 4 : foil, by 
gen. of price. Matt. xxvi. 9, irpadrji/aL 
TToXXov. John xii. 5. Fig. pass, to be sold 
to, so as to be under any one, to he his 
slave, Rom. vii. 14, TTEirpafxivo^ viro t^)v 
dfxapTLav, ' to be the slave of sin,' de- 
voted to it, and doing its drudgery. See 
my note. 1 K. xxi. 25. Is. 1. 1. 

XTtTTTw, f. irecrovixaL, 2i.o\\ 2. 'im-Ecrov, 
aor. 1. ETTfcra, to fall, intrans. 1) prop, to 
fall, i. e. from a higher to a low^r place, 
said alike of persons and things ; in N. T. 
always with an adjunct of place whence or 
whither; with diro, to fall from. Matt. 
XV. 27, diro T^5 Tpa7r£^?js. Matt. xxiv. 
29. Acts XX. 9. Ik, id. Lu. x. 18, ek. tou 
ovpavov. Acts xxvii. 34. ku fxicrti) tcov 
ctKavdcou, among, Lu. viii. 7 ; ettI with 
acc. to fall upon any person or thing. 
Matt. X. 29, ETTi Tjjy yrju. xiii. 5, 7. xxi. 44. 
Lu. xxiii. 30. Rev. vii. 16, ovdk /mi] Trtarj 
ETT avTov's 6 rfXLO's, i. e. ' the burning sun 
shall not injure them ;' fig. = to seize, xi. 
11, <p6(3o£ jueyas eVsctsi; Ittl tov£ k.t.X,: 
foil, by £ts TL, to fall into, among, upon 
any thing. Matt. xv. 14, eU ^oQwov. xvii. 
15. Mk. iv. 7, 8, and so in Class. ; by 
Trapd with acc. of place, to fall at, hy, 
mar, ver. 4. 2) of persons, to fall 
down, fall prostrate, absol. Matt, xviii. 29, 
'TTEcrcbi/ 6 (TvuoovXo?. Acts V. 5. Joined 
with TrpocTKvuilu, Matt. ii. 11, irEcrovn-E^ 
'TrpoGTEKvurjcrav. iv. 9. xviii. 26, al. Sept. 
and Class. More usually with an adjunct 
of place or manner ; foil, by evohttlov 
Tti/09, Rev. V. 8, or irpoGrKWElv, iv. 10 : 
by els. Acts xxii. 7. el's toi/§ Trooas tlvo's, 
John xi. 32. Diog. Laert, ii. 79 : by kirl 



with gen. of place, kirl Trj^ yrj^, Mk. ix. 
20 ; mth acc. of place or manner, ettl Trfv 
yTji/, Acts ix. 4. ettl tou? Tro'^as Tiyo9, 
X. 25. Sept. 1 Sam. xxv. 24. IttI irpoar- 
(xiirov, on one''s face, Lu. v. 12 ; with irapd 
Tous TTo^as, xvii. 16 ; with irpocrKvvEZv, 
1 Cor. xiv. 25. 'i/uLTrpoadEv TUiv ttoBcov 
with irpoaKvvELv, Rev. xix. 10 : foil, by 
Xafxal, John xviii. 6. Said of those who 
fall dead, i. e. to die, perish, Lu. xxi. 24, 
TTEcrovvraL crTo/xaTL fxayaipa^. 1 Cor. x. 
8. Heb. iii. 17, al. Sept. and Class. Fig. 
to fall from any state or dignity, with 
ttoQev, Rev. ii. 5. 3) of things, edifices, 
walls, &c. to fall in ruins. Matt. vii. 25. 
Lu. vi. 39, al. : fig. Lu. xi. 17. Acts xv. 
16: so in prophetic imagery, Rev. xi. 13. 
xiv. 8, ETTECTE, ETTEdE Ba/SuXwi/. Sept. and 
Class. 4) of a lot, to fall to or upon any 
one, foil, by kurl with acc. Acts i. 26. 
Sept. and Class. 5) metaph. of persons, 
to fall into or under any thing ; condemna- 
tion, uTTo Kpia-Lv, Ja. V. 12. Diod. Sic. 
xix. 8, utt' E^ovariau : absol. to fall into 
sin, to sin, Rom. xi. 22. xiv. 4. 1 Cor. x. 
12, al. : bence also to fcdl from happiness, 
be made miserable, perish^ Rom. xi. 11, 
lULt} ETTTaicrau, 'iva Tricruycn', Heb. iv. 11. 
Sept. and Class, Of things, = to fall to 
the ground, to fail, become void ; Lu. xvi, 
17, v TOU vojULOv fxiav KEoaLav iTEorElu, 
Sept. Josh, xxiii. 14. 1 Sam. iii. 19. 
Plato Euth. p. 14, ou X^i"*"^ ttote "Trfo-cl- 
Tat o TL dv Etirr]^. 

Tl LCTT EU CO, fut. EVCrCD, (TTtfTTlS,) aor. 1. 
ETTLCTTEVa-a, pcrf. TTElTLCr'TEVKa, tO hxiVB 

faith, believe, trust, prop. ' to have a firm 
persuasion of, a confiding belief in the 
truth, veracity, or reality of any person or 
thing.' I. INTRANS. and 1) prop, and 
gener. to be firmly persuaded as to any 
thing, to believe, foil, by infin. Rom. xiv. 

2, OS IXEV TTLOTTEVEL (payElu TTUVTa bv 

oTi, X. 9, absol. Ja. ii. 19 : so, with the 
idea of hope and certain expectation, with 
inf. Acts XV. 11 ; with oTt, Rom. vi. 8. 
More commonly of words spoken and 
things; with dat. of a person speaking, 
whose words one believes and confides in, 
Mk. xvi, 13, ovdk ekelvol^ kTrLcrTEVcai/, 
John V, 46. Acts viii. 12. With an ad- 
junct of the words or thing spoken, in dat. 
Lu. i. 20, ovK EirLcrTEuara^ toZs \o'yoi9 
jULov. Acts xxiv. 14. 2 Th. ii. 11 : foil, by 
ettI with dat, Lu. xxiv. 25, ettI Trdcnv : 
by EU, Mk. i. 15, kv tw EvayysXLio. With 
acc. of thing, John xi. 26. 1 Cor. xiii. 7, 
TrduTa TTLarTEVEL. 1 John iv. 16 : hence 
pass. 2 Th. i. 10, oTt kirLcrTEXjQr] to fJ-ap- 

TVpLOV r]/ULU)V E<p' V/Uid'S. Foil, by £tS Tl, 

1 John V. 10, £ts Ti]u fiapTvpiav : by oTi, 
z=. acc. and infin. John^xiv. 10. ix. 18, 
TTEpl avTov oTL TucpXo^ r}v. Absol. where 
the case of pers. or thing is implied from 



nis 



343 



ni 2 



the context, Matt. xxiv. 23. John xii. 47. 
Acts viii. 13, auxos eirLO-TevaE^ scil. tw 
<I>/\i7r7ra) suayycXiX^o/jLtvu). ver. 12. xv. 7. 
2) espec. of God, to believe on God, to trust 
I in Him, as able and Milling to help, listen 
i to prayer, &c. foil, by dat. of person Avith 
; oTi, Acts xxvii. 25, TTLorTkuco Too Gew, 
j OTL ovTto9 tcTTaL h\ f t9, John xiv. 1, 
I TTio'Tf u£T£ «is Tov Osov I absol. Matt. 
I xxi. 22, 7rt(rT£yoi;T£9, equivalent to el 
\ iria-TEvBi-t. 2 Cor. iv. 13: also as faithful 
to his promises, M'ith dat. Rom. iv. 3, 
iiTLCF'Ts.vcrtv 'AjSpad,u T(Z Gfw, kol k\o- 
yicQi] K.T.X. Rom. iv. 17. Jam. ii. 23 : 
absol. Rom. iv. 18. Heb. iv. 3. Or gener. 
* to believe in the declarations and charac- 
ter of God as made known in the Gospel,' 
with dat. John v. 24. Acts xvi. 34, ttettl- 
<rT£u/cw§ Ttt) 0£w. 1 John v. 10 : foil, by 
£L<s with accus. praegn. = to believe and 
rest upon^ to believe in and profess, toi/5 
di avTov TTLCTT&vovTa^ £t5 Ocoy, 1 Pet. i. 
21 ; by iiri acc. id. Rom. iv. 24 ; 

absol. Lu. viii. 12. Acts xiii. 48. 3) of 
belief in Jesits as the Messiah, with, how- 
ever, a considerable variety of sense, from 
an ample credit reposed in Him, as ' a 
messenger sent from God,' to full belief in 
Him as one with God. And in not a few 
instances it is difficult to determine whe- 
ther simple belief in Jesus as the Messiah, 
or belief of a higher order, is intended. 
Consequently, no Lexicographical arrange- 
ment of passages is to be relied on, but the 
reader must exercise his own judgment. 
In such cases he is referred to the notes in 
my Greek Testament, in which he will, I 
trust, rarely miss of finding something 
that may assist his researches. With £ts, 
John xiv. 1 ; with ort. Matt. ix. 28, 
absol. viii. 13. Mk. v. 36. John iv. 48; 
with dat. of person, John v. 38, dv air- 

IcTTZlKeV SKsliJO^^TOVTtO U/UEtS OV TTLOTTEV- 

£T€. viii. 31. x. 37. Acts v. 14 ; with otl, 
John viii. 24. xi. 27. xx. 31, and oft. 
Foil, by €ts of person, pr. prseg. =: to 
believe aTid rest upon^ to believe in and 
profess. Matt, xviii. 6, k'l/a twi/ 'jricrTivou- 
Tu)U eU s/ulL John ii. 11. iii. 15. viii. 30 ; 
fig. £is TO xii. 36 : so with eh to 

ovofxa 'l^crov in a like sense, = ' to 
believe on Jesus, and invoke or profess 
his name,' i. 12, toTs irLaTevovcrLv £ts to 
ovofxa avTov. ii. 23 ; with too dvo/maTL 
auTou, id. 1 John iii. 23. Foil, by ettI 
^vith acc. of pers. = £t§ Tiya, Acts ix. 42. 
xi. 17, comp. ver. 21 ; so eiri with dat. 
1 Tim. i. 16, fig. Rom. ix. 33. Pass. 
1 Tim. iii. 16, kirLCFTEvQr] kv k6<t/j.io. 
Hence absol. to believe, i. e. to believe 
and profess Christ, to be or become a 
Christian, Mk. xv. 32. Lu. xxii. 67. 
John i. 7, oft. ; part, ol 7rto-T£uoi/T£s or 
7rio-T£u<rai;T€5, believers, Christians, Acts 
ii. 44. iv. 32. 4) of belief or credit given | 



to any one as a merely human messenger, 
as Moses, John v. 40 ; or John Baptist, 
Matt. xxi. 25, 32. Mk. xi. 32. Lu. xx. 5. 
— IL TRANS, to entrust, commit in truest to 
any one, for kjULirLaTEuo), Lu. xvi. 11, to 
a\i}BLudv Tt§ v/uLLU TTLcrTEvcTEL *, Johu ii. 
24. Wisd. xiv. 5. Xen. Mem. iv. 4, 17. 
Pass. 'TTLcrTEvofxaL Tt, to be entrusted with 
any thing ; foil, by acc. Rom. iii. 2. Gal, 
^irETTLcrTEv^aL TO Evayy&Xiov. 1 Cor. 
ix. 17, OLKovofxiav irEir'KTTEVfxaL. 1 Th. 
ii. 4. 1 Tim. i. 11. Tit. i. 3, and oft. in 
lat. Class, as Diog. Laert. vii. 1, ttlcttev- 
6evto^ Trjv kif lUepyafxw ^L^\LoQriKi]v. 

Hto-Ttico?, 6v, adj. (TrtcrTi?,) 

causing belief or persuasion, faithful, trust- 
worthy ; hence in N. T. fig. true, genuine, 
pure, vapoov TriaTLK?]^, Mark xiv. 3 ; 
others (fr. ir tvu)), potable, liquid. See my 
note. 

HtCTis, £co§, 77, iir LOTTO'S,) faith, belief 
trust, prop. 'firm persuasion, confiding belief 
in the truth, veracity, or reality of any 
person or thing.' 1. in the common Greek 
usage, 1) prop, and gener. Acts xvii. 31, 
TTLO-TLV TrapacT^ihv iracTLv. Rom. xiv. 22, 
<Tv TTLO-TLV E\EL<s, thou hust faith, i. e. ' art 
firmly persuaded,' ver. 23. Heb. xi, 1 : so. 
with the idea of hope and certain expecta- 
tion, 2 Cor. V. 7, CLO. TTLCrTECjii^ 'TTEpLTra- 

TovjULEv, 1 Pet. i. 5. v, 9. 2) equiv. to 
good faith, faithfulness, sincerity, Matt, 
xxiii. 23, Triv Kpia-LV /cat tou eXeov kul 
Trjv TricTTLv. Rom. iii. 3, tov Oeov. Gal. 
V. 22. 1 Tim. i. 19, EX^y ttlcttlv, i. e. 
' being faithful,' sincere, ii. 7. Tit. ii. 10, 
TTLCTTLV TTciaav ayadi]v, cdl good fidelity. 
Rev. ii. 19. — II. in N. T. TrtcTig, as 
spoken in reference to God and Christ., 
and his gospel, becomes in some measure 
a technical term, denoting that faith, that 
confiding belief which is the essential trait 
of Christian life and character, i. e. gospel- 
faith. Christian faith, comp. Rom. iii. 22, 
sq. — I. of God, i. e. faith in, on, towards 
God; £7rt Gfioi;, Heb. vi. 1. irpo? tov 
Gfof, 1 Th. i. 8. £ts Oeov with iXTri?, 
1 Pet. i. 21 : with gen. Gfoi}, Mk. xi. 22, 
Col. ii. 12; absol. Matt. xvii. 20. xxi. 21. 
Heb. iv. 2. Jam. i. 6, a'lTELTO) kv ttlcttei, 
i. e. in full confidence, nothing doubting. 
Spoken analogically of the faith of the 
patriarchs and pious men under the Jewish 
dispensation, who looked forward in faith 
and hope to the blessings of the gospel, 
comp. Gal. iii. 7, sq. Heb. xi. 13 ; of 
Abraham, Rom. iv. 5, 9 — 20 ; gener. of 
others, Heb. xi. 3 — 39, also Lu. xviii. 8. 
— II. of Christ, faith in Christ, 1) as 
able to work miracles, heal the sick, &c. 
absol. Matt. viii. 10, ov^k kv tw 'lo-p. 

TO(Ta\)Tr]V TTLCTTLV EVpOV. IX. 2, 22, 29. 

xv. 28, oft. : so mediately, Acts xiv. 9, 
2) of faith in Christ's death, as the only 



R 1 S 



344 



HA A 



ground of our justification before God, r= 
saving or justifying faith^ Rom. iii. 22, 
OLKaLoarvvY] Qzov oia TrtcrTEws 'I. X^. 
ver. 25, Blci tj;? 'TrlcrTzui's iv tco uvtov ul/ul. 
ver. 26, ek it. 'li-\crov : so from the con- 
nexion, absol. ver. 27 — 31. 1 Cor. xv. 14, 
17 : gener. Rom. i. 17. v. 1, 2, and often 
in St. Paul's Epistles. 3) gener. not only 
as the Messiah and Saviour, the Head of 
the gospel dispensation, but also as God- 
man^ one with the Father. And here will 
fully apply what was remarked in the 
case of TTLCTTEvijo I. 3, as to the variety 
of sense in the several forms of expression 
which fall under this head, e. gr. Triarn-Lv 
*rr]v eis tov K. rijjiujv 'I. X^o. Acts xx. 21. 
kv Xpia-TfJo^ Gal. iii. 26. tov Kvp. vjuloov 
'I. Xp. Ja. ii. 1. /uoD, Rev. ii. 13, i. e. 
' faith toward me absol. Mk. iv. 40. 
Acts vi. 5, avSpa TrXrip't] TriaTEto^. Eph. 

iii. 17 ; so vi. 16, Toy ^upedu Trj's tt. — III. 
gener. with gen. tj TrtcrTts tou e-vayye- 
Xlov^ the faith of the gospel, i, e. gospel- 
faith, Phil. i. 27. TTLCTTL^ a\ij0£ms, faith 
in the truth, i. e. in the gospel, 2 Th. ii. 13. 
Absol. in the same sense, i. e. Christian 

faith, a firm and confiding belief in Jesus 
and his gospel, gener. 1 Cor. ii. 5, 'Lua rj 
TTLCTTL's v/uLOJU fxi] y Ev crocpLct ccvOp. 2 Cor. 

iv. 13, ssepiss. Uto-Tts also seems to mark 
indirectly various predominant traits of 
Christian character, such as arise from and 
are combined with Christian faith ; e. gr. 
Christian knowledge, Rom. xii. 3, fXETpov 
TTLorTEio^. ver. 6. xiv. 1, dadEvwv 
iriarTEL. 2 Pet. i. 5 : so in James, as opp, 
to 'ipya, ii. 14 — 26 ; of the Christian py-o- 

fession, the faith professed. Acts xiii. 8, 
XrfTuyv diaaTpE\lfaL tov avdviraTov airo 
Tr}<s7r. 1 Cor. xvi. 13. Gal. vi. 10. 1 Tim. 

11. 15. 2 Tim. iv. 7; of Christian zeal, 
ardour in the faith, Rom. i. 8, on rj ir. 
Vfiwv KaTayyiXXETai. xi. 20. 2 Cor. 
viii. 7. Eph. vi. 23 ; of Christian love, as 
springing from faith, Rom. i. 12, v h 
d\\-n\oL'3 TTtcTTis, 1. e. mutual faith and 
love, 2 Th. i. 3. Philem. 5 ; of Christian 
life and morals, -practical faith, 1 Tim. iv. 

12, TUTTOsytfou Tcov ttlcttwu ev dyd7rri,EV 
TT., EV dyvELct. V. 8, 12. vi. 10. Tit. ii. 2 ; of 
constancy in the faith, Col. i. 23. 1 Th. iii. 
2 — 10. Heb. xiii. 7. Ja. i. 3. — iv. meton. 
of the object of Christian faith, the faith, 
i. e. doctrines received and believed, 
CItristian doctrine, and gener. the system 
of Christian doctrines, the gospel promising 
justification and salvation to a lively faith 
in Christ, Acts vi. 7, virriKovov tt} tt. 
' were obedient to the faith,' i. e. embraced 
the gospel, Rom. i. 5. Acts xiv. 27, ^vpa 
7rt<n-£to§, i. e. ' access for the gospel.' 
xxiv. 24. Rom. x. 8. Jude 3, Ty ctTraf 
•TrapadodeLa-r] Tot's dy Lob's ttlcttel, ver. 
20, oft. : so Tit. iii. 15, cpiXovvTU's vp-d^ 
iv TT. i. e. in the gospel, as Christians, 



1 Tim. i. 2, tekvov ev ttlcttel. Emphat, 
the true faith, ' true doctrine,' 2 Th. iii. 2. 
1 Tim. iv. 1, 6. 2 Tim. iii. 8. 

rEio-Tos, f], 6v, adj. (tteiOw,) prop. 
' worthy of belief and trust,' faith/ul : 1) 
prop, in the sense of trustworthy, 1 Cor. 

Vii. 25, 7j\Etjp.EV09 VTTO KvpLOV TTtCTOS 

EJvat. 1 Tim. i. 12. 2 Tim. ii. 2, tuvtu 
irapddou iriaTOL^ dvOp. 1 Pet. iv. 19. 
Rev. xix. 11. Sept. and Class. Hence of 
persons, true, vera^, worthy of credit, b 
p.dpTV9 6 TTto-Tos, Rcv. 1. 5. ii. 13. iii. 14 ; 
of things, t?'ue, sure, verus, X6yo9, 1 Tim. 
i. 15, oft. Sept. and Class. : so Acts xiii. 
34, Ta oaia A. Ta irLCTTd. 2) faithful, as 
to what may justly be required of anyone: 
thus, as applied to God, with reference 
to His attributes : so 2 Cor. i, 18, ttlctto^ 
6 0€os, with especial reference to His 
truth : as faithful to His promises, 1 Cor. 

i. 9, TTio-To? 6 Qeo's. X. 13. Heb. x. 23 : 
so of Christ, 2 Tim. ii. 13. Also of men, 
faithful in duty to themselves or others, 
Col. iv. 9, 6 TTLcrTo^ ddEX<p6?. Rev. ii. 10. 
Espec. of servants, ministers, who are 
faithful in the performance of duty, Matt, 
xxiv. 45, 6 TTLarTo? SouXo?, xxv. 21. Lu. 
xii. 42, 6 TT. oiKovofxo^, Eph.vi. 21. Heb. 

ii. 17, al. 3) act. faithful, i. e. firm in 
faith, confiding, believing, equivalent to o 
TTLCTTEvayv, John xx. 27, jmrj yivov diri- 
(TTo<s, dXXd TTLCTTO's. Gal. ill. 9. Theogn. 
283. Soph. (Ed. Col. 1031 ; with dat. to? 
ILvpiio, Acts xvi. 15. ev Kvpiw, 1 Cor. 
iv. 17, i. e. 'faithful to the Lord or in 
Christ, believing in him,' equivalent to a 
believer, sl Christian ; absol. id. Acts x. 
45. xvi. 1, oft. Adv. Tna-Tov ttoielv, 'to 
do faithfully,' as a Christian, 3 John 5. 
See more in my note. 

n to- TOO), fut. coau), (TTto-Tos,) prop. 
to make any one faithful, trustworthy, 
hence to make, one give security, pledges, 
Jos. Ant. XV. 7, 10. Thuc. iv. 88 ; pass, 
or mid. to make one's self ox be made trust- 
worthy, i. e. to give security, to pledqe one's 
self Hom. Od. xv. 436 ; in N. t. ettl- 
(TTwQ\iv, to be made confiding, believing, to 
be assured, hence equiv. to believe, 2 Tim. 

iii. 14, p.EVE EV ols EfXadE^ KOL E'TTLaTwdrj^. 

So TTLaTcodEh, for TTLcrvvo^, Soph. (Ed. 
Col. 1039, equiv. to TrtcrTos at 1031. 

IlXavduj, f tjcro), (TrXdvr],) to cause to 
wander, to lead astray, trans, both physi- 
cally and morally, pass, to ivander, go 
astray. I. prop. Heb. xi. 38, kv EprjiuLaL^ 
TrXavdypiEvoL, 1 Pet. ii. 25, (h<s 'wpo^aTa 
TrXavoofxEva. Matt, xviii. 12, 13. Sept. & 
Class. — II. FIG. to mislead, i. e. 1) to de- 
ceive, cause to err; pass, to err, form a wrong 
judgment. Matt. xxiv. 4, ^Xettete jULtj ti9 
vfxd^ 'TrXavyjo-rj. ver. 5, 24. 1 John i. 8, 
al. ; pass. Matt. xxii. 29, TrXavdadE. Lu. 
xxi, 8, fxi] 7rXavt}d7jTE. John vii. 47. 



HA A 



345 



n AE 



1 Cor. vi. 9. Gal. vi.7. Heb. iii. 10. Sept. 
Prov. xii. 27. Jos. Bell. vi. 5, 4. Plut. 
Thes. 27, et al. in Class. 2) to seduce a 
people into relnillioJi^ John vii. 12, TrXava 
Tov oy\ov. Rev. xx. 8, 10. Also to se- 
duce from the truth, and pass, to be seduced, 
to go astral/, 1 John ii, 26, Tripi twv irXa- 
vcovTu)i/ y/xas. 2 Tim. iii. 13 ; pass. Ja. v. 
19, idu Tis TrXavijdrj diro ti]^ d\. 2 Pet. 
ii. 15 ; pai't. oi TrXavcofxEvoL, those seduced, 
gone asti-aj-, Heb. v. 2. Tit. iii. 3. Spec. 
to seduce to idolatry, Rev. ii. 20, al. Sept. 

2 K. xxi. 9. Ezek. xliv. 10, 15. Ecclus. 
ix. 8. 

nXa'i/tj, tjs, f], piop. a wandering, 
going astray from the right path, -^1. V. 
H. iii. 29 ; in N. T. only fig. error : 1 ) 
gener. false judgment or opinion, 1 Th. ii. 
3, 7/ Trapa'/cXtjciS v/ulcov ovk e/c TrXai/tjs. 
2 Th. ii. 11. 2) act. deceit, fraud, seduc- 
tion to error and sin, Eph. iv. 14, v fxed- 
oStia tT]^ irXdv. 2 Pet. iii. 17. 1 John iv. 
6, TO TTv. irXdvri's, the spirit of error, 
i. e. a deceiving spirit, a teacher who seeks 
to seduce ; so a deception, fraud. Matt, 
xxvii. 64, and perhaps 1 Th. ii. 3. 3) of 
condi\\.ct,pei"6erseness, ivicked?iess, sin,'Rom. 
i. 27. Ja. V. 20. 2 Pet. ii. 18, tous iv 
'TrXdvri dvaa-Tpecj). Jude 11. 

n\ai/t]'Tt]s, ov, 6, {TrXavdu},) prop. 
one wandering about, a ivanderer; in N.T. 
ao-TH/o TrXaytjTtjs, a wandering star, pla- 
7iet, fig. of a false teacher, Jude 13. 

nXcti/os, ou, o, 77, adj. (TrXdvr],) wan- 
dering about, subst. a ivanderer, vagabond, 
juggler ; in N. T. for TrXavwv, deceiving, 
seducing, 1 Tim. iv. 1, Trpoari-yovTE's irvs-v- 
IxacFL TrXdvoL^. So Jos. Bell. ii. 13, 4, 
TrXdvoL dvOpcoTTOL. Subst. a deceiver, im- 
postor. Matt, xxvii. 63, and later Class., 
as Diod. Sic. 

njX d ^, aKos, v„ any broad and flat sur- 
face ; in N. T. and gener. a table or slab 
of wood or stone, on which any thing was 
inscribed ; so Sept. and Class. ; e. gr. the 
two tables of the decalogue given to Mo- 
ses, Heb. ix. 4, al 7rXa/C£s ti7s diadriKri^. 
2 Cor. iii. 3 : fig. ib, iv TrXa^l KapSLa^ 
crapKLvai^. Comp. Rom. ii. 15. Heb. viii. 
10. Indeed, from Prov. iii. 3, and Jer. 
xvii. 1, it appears that the Hebrews were 
accustomed to speak of any thing deeply 
infixed on the mind, as ' written on the 
tables of the heart.' 

JlXdcr jma, a-ros, to, {TrXdcrcrio,) any 
thing formed, as an image, Hab. ii. 14; 
also, a model in wax, and especially the 
figure itself, Rom. ix. 20, ipsZ to 
TrXdarfxa TOO TrXdaavTL ; so Aristoph. Av. 
686, irXda-jULaTa tt^Xov, (similar to the 
phrase elsewhere, TrXdorcr&Lv TTTjXof,) Lu- 
cian, D. Deor. vi. 4. Artem. i. 56. To this 
also there is an allusion in Ps. ciii. 14, 
auTos 'iyvm to 7rXd(yfxa VfJLwv. 



HXdarau), f. dau), to knead, form, 
fashion, mould, any soft substance, as a 
potter the clay, absol. Rom. ix. 20; pass. 
1 Tim. ii. 13, 'Add/x 'jtowto^ iTrXdcrdrj, 
with allusion to Gen. ii. 7, 8, 19, (.TrXaasv 
6 B£09 TOV dvdpwKov. In the Class, 
writers, too, the word is used of Prome- 
theus forming the first man of clay. 

nX. a OTTOS, tj, 6v, adj. {TrXdarcro},) 
formed, fashioned ; metaph.yee^Tzeo?, false, 
deceitful, 2 Pet. ii. 3, irXaaTol<s Xo'yois. 
So Isa^us, p. 70, Xoyots TrtTrXaafxivoL^ 
d^LcoasL TTLorTEV&LV 77/xas. Plut. Thcs. 20, 
ypdfXfxaTa irXaGTa TrpocrcpipELV. 

nXccTos, EOS, TO, (TrXttTus,) breadth. 
Rev. xxi. 16. Sept. and Class. ; fig. Eph. 
iii. 18. Rev. xx. 9, to ttXcctos ttjs yrjs, 
' the breadth of the earth,' q. d. ' wide 
plain,' such as the earth was supposed to be. 

UXaTvvu}, f. vvu), (TrXaTi/s,) (aor. 1. 
pass. i7rXaTvvdr]v, perf. pass. TreTrXd- 
TVjULaL, & 3d pers. sing. TrtTrXdTui/Tai,) 
to make broad, enlarge, trans. 1) prop. 
Matt, xxiii. 5, ttXut. Ta <pvXaKTripia 
avTwv. Sept. and Class. 2) fig. to make 
broad or large to or for any one, i. e. ' to 
give him enlargement or deliverance from 
straits,' Ps. iv. 2. Hence in N. T. pass. 
to be enlarged, i. e. to have enlargement, 
in opposition to o-Tsyoxwptw, 2 Cor. vi. 
13, irXaTvvdr\TE Kai vjUL&l^. So of the 
heart, rj KapSia rifx. 'Tr&TrXdTvvTai, ver. 
11, namely, in the exercise of the tender 
affections, by which the heart is in reality 
dilated, and feels enlarged ; while by the 
opposite it is actually tightened, and the 
pulsation checked. 

HXaTus, Ela, V, adj. broad, wide. 
1 ) Matt. vii. 13, TrXaTEia rj TrvXtj. Sept, 
Neh. ix. 35. Jos. Bell. iii. 2, 2. 2) as 
subst. 77 TrXaTEta sc. 656s, a broad tvay, 
ivide street in a city, Matt. vi. 5, kv Tais 
ycovtai^ Twv irXuT. xii. 19, oft. Sept. 
and Apocr., also Artem. iii. 62. 

nXty^aa, aTos, t6, (ttXe/cw,) prop, 
any thing plaited, braided, or woven, as a 
net; in N. T. a braid of hair, an orname?it 
of braided hear, 1 Tim. ii. 9, /xrj iv irXiy- 
fxacTLv, see my note, and comp, 1 Pet. iii. 
3, ifXTrXoKri Tpixcov. 

HXeTcttos, rj, ov, adj. {ttXelidv,) the 
most, the greatest, very great, the usual 
superl. to TToXus ; in N. T. only of num- 
ber. Matt. xi. 20. xxi. 8, 6 TrXEto-Tos 
o'xXos, ' a very great multitude.' Xen. Ag. 
iii. 1. Hist. vii. 1, 23. Neut. to TrXfio'To*', 
adv. at most, 1 Cor. xiv. 27. 

UXtLUJv, OV09, 6, 77, neut. ttX £101' or 
ttXsov, pi. contr. nom. and acc. TrXtiov^, 
— more, the usual compar. to ttoXus. 1) 
prop, of number, but also of magnitude, 
and in a comparison expr. or implied ; foil, 
by gen. Matt. xxi. 36, ttXcioi/us t^mv 
Q 5 



n AE 



346 



n AH 



TTpwruiv, 'more than the first,' or former 
ones, Mk. xii. 43. John vii. 31, & Class. ; 
foil, by ^, than^ Matt. xxvi. 53, irXeiov^ 
7} dood&Ka. John iv. 1, and Class. ; before 
a numeral 17 is usually omitted, Acts iv. 
22, £Td)v TrXELovuiv TeoTaapctK. xxiii. 13 ; 
once ttXeiov 11 TTEi/rg, Lu. ix. 13 ; once 
with TrXtji/ and gen. Acts xv. 28. So, 
when the object of comparison is implied, 
Matt. XX. 10. John iv. 41. Lu. xi. 53. 

vii. 43, TO ttXeToi/, the more^ i. e. ' the 
greater' debt. Xen. Vect. iv. 32. Hdian. 

viii. 3, 11 : hence gener. and emphat. 
manT/, very many. Acts xiii. 31, os oi(^^\\ 
£7rl rifiipa^ ttXe/ou?. xxiv. 17, al. ; so 
Heb. vii. 23, ol jukv ifKiiovi^ sicri IspEl^^ 
in opp. to one: 2) plur. with art. oi 
TrXetof £s, OL ttXelov^, the more, the most, 
the many, Acts xix. 32, oi irXetous ovk 
ridsiaav. xxvii. 12. 1 Cor. ix. 19, 'tva 
Tou§ TrA-Etoj/as Kspdj^cru). x. 5. xv. 6, al. 
& Class. 3) fig. of worth, importance, dig- 
nity, 7nore, greater, higher, with gen. Matt. 
Vi. 25, OVyl 7] ^vxv 'ttX&lov ecftl Tt/S 
n-po(pr]^ ; xii. 42. Mk. xii. 33. Heb. iii. 3. 
Rev. ii. 19. 4) neut. irXziov, as adv. more, 
& Class. With gen. John xxi. 15, dyaira^ 
juLE ttXeTov tovtmv ; also, kirl ttXeTov, 
further, longer ; spoken of space, Acts iv. 

17. 2 Tim. iii. 9 ; with gen. daE^Eia^, ii. 

16. Xen. Eq. i. 9 ; of time, Acts xx. 9. 
xxiv. 4. Pol, iii. 58, 8. 

JIXekco, f. ^u), to plait, braid, weave, 
trans. Matt, xxvii. 29, TrXi^avTE^ cte^. 
15 aKavdoov. Mk. xv. 17, et Class. 

nXeoj/aJo), fut. a CO), (ttXelodv,) to be 
more than enough, intrans. 1 ) of persons, 
to have more than enough, to have an over- 
plus, 2 Cor. viii. 15, 6 t6 ttoXu ovk ettX. 
2) of things, to be abundant, lit. to abound 
more, to increase, Rom. v. 20, 'iva ttXeo- 
vdarrj to irapaTTTcofxa, vi. 1. 2 Pet. i. 8, 
al. ; foil, by £t§ tl, to abound unto any 
thing, equiv. to redound, conduce, Phil. iv. 

17. Sept. and Class. 3) trans, to cause to 
abound, to increase, 1 Th. iii. 12, u/xas 6 
ILvpio^ TrXEovdcrai Ty dydTrrj. Sept. 
Num. xxvi. 54. Ps. lxx. 21. 1 Mace. iv. 35. 

JlXEOVEKTiu), f. lj(T(jO, {ttXeOV, EX^->) 

intrans. prop, to have more than another. 
So Thuc. vi. 39. Xen. Cyr. i. 6, 19. 
(equiv. to 'ttXeTcv e.X(^->) %• lo have an ad- 
vantage, be superior, also to take advan- 
tage, seek unlawful gain ; in N. T. trans. 
to take advantage of any one, to circum- 
vent for gain, defraud, with acc. 2 Cor. 
vii. 2, ov^Eva ETrXEovEKTvaa/mEv. xii. 17, 

18. 1 Th. iv. 6, where, however, it means 
over-reaching and injuring our brother by 
adultery ; see my note there. Pass. 2 Cor. 

ii. 11, 'iva 1X7] irXEOVEKT^QciofXEV VTTO TOV 

' that we may not be worsted by Satan.' 
So Xen. Mem. iii. 5, 2, BoiwTwy iroXXoi, 
'irXEovEKTovfiEVOL VTTO 6r//3ataji/, &c., and 



Pint. irXEovEKTEld^ai vtto twv itoXe- 

fXLCOV. Also fig. X. 738, irXEOUEKTELodaL 
VTTO TOV tpWTOS. 

TIXeOV EKTY]^, OV, 6, {ttXeOV, '^X^f) 

prop. ' one who would have more than 
others,' i.e. a covetous person, a defraud^r^ 
1 Cor. V. 10, 11. 

ILXEovE^ia, as, 17, (ttXeov, ^X^t) 
prop. ' a having more,' i. e. a larger portion, 
advantage, superiority, Xen. Mem. i. 6,12; 
in N. T. ' the will to have more,' i. e. covet- 
ousness, greediness for gain, Mk. vii. 22, 
TrXEovE^iai, i. e. ' covetous thoughts,' 
plans of fraud and extortion ; Lu. xii. 15. 
Rom. i. 29. 2 Cor. ix. 5, outws ws evXo- 
yiav, KOL fni] tos ttX. ' as bounty, and not 
as covetousness,' i. e. ' as bounty on your 
part, and not as covetousness on ours,' not 
as extorted by us from you. 

nXeupa, a5, v, the side, said of the^ 
human body, John xix. 34. xx. 20, al. and 
Class. 

nXtft), fut. irXEvcToiiai, to sail, absol. 
Lu. viii. 23. Acts xxvii. 24 ; with £is of 
place, xxi. 3, ETrXiofxEv eU ^vpiav. xxvii. 
6 ; with Eirl and acc. Rev. xviii. 17 ; with 
acc. of place by or near which, i. e. of the 
way. Acts xxvii. 2, ttXelv tov<s KUTd Tr,v 
'Aa-iav tottous, i. e. to sail along or by 
the coast of Asia Minor. So Pol. iii. 4, 
10, ttXeTu tu TTEXdyi]. Xen. Hist. iv,8,6. 

liXnyT], 7]^, 77,(2 perf. -TTETrXrjya, of 
irXriarorco,) a stroke, blow : 1 ) prop. Lu. xii. 
48, d^ia nrXnyihv. Acts xvi. 23, al. Sept. 
& Class. 2) meton. a wound, caused by a 
stripe or blow, Lu. x. 30. Acts xvi. 33, 
eXovctev {avTov?) dird Tuiv ttX., i. e. 
'washed the blood from their wounds.' 
Rev. xiii. 12, rj irX^yn 'tov ^av. i. e. 
'deadly wound.' Sept., Jos., & Class. 3)fr. 
the Heb. a plague, i. e. a stroke or bloio 
inflicted by God, calamity. Rev. ix. 20. 
xi. 6, et saepe al. Sept., Philo, Jos., though 
not Class. 

HXtJOos, €os ous, to, {irXriQu),) prop. 
fulness, hence a multitude, a great number : 

1) gener. Lu. v. 6, ttX^Oos Ix^*^^^ iroXv. 
Acts xxviii. 3, and oft. Sept. and Class. 

2) of persons, a multitude, foil, by gen. of 
class, &c. Lu. ii. 13. Acts iv. 32. v. 14, 
irX-ndii dvhpuiv, i. e. multitudes : so ttoXu 
ttX^Oos with gen. Lu. vi. 17. irdv to 
'wXriQo's with gen. i. 10. dirav to irXij- 
do£ with gen. xix. 37; with gen. of place, 
viii. 37, d'wav to ttX^Oos t?7§ 7rEpixd)pov. 
Acts V. 16. 3) the midtitude, the people, 
populace. Acts xiv. 4, to ttX^Oos t^§ tto- 
Xews. xix. 9. xxi. 22, 36. Sept. & Class. 

JlXr]Qvv(jo, f. VVU3, ('7rXr]dv^ equiv. to 
TrXfjdo^,) prop, to make full, multiply, in- 
crease : 1) trans. 2 Cor. ix. iO. Heb. vi. 
14, TrXi]Qvv(ji)V TrXridvvu) cte. Pass. ttXt]- 
dvi/o/nai, to be multiplied, increased; in 



HAH 



347 



HAH 



number, Acts vi. 7, i'7r\i]6vi>sTo 6 aoid- 
juds. vii. 17. ix. 31, and Sept. ; in magni- 
tude, extent, Matt. xxiv. 12, 7rXi}dvv6{}vaL 
dvo/uLiai/. Acts xii. 24. Gen. vii. 17, 
sq. ; with dat. of person, to abound to any 
one, 1 Pet. i. 2, ydpi's vfxiv Kal ilpr\vri 
Tr\i]dvv'dBU]. 2 Pet. i. 2. Jude 2. 2) in- 
trans. to midtipJy one's seI/\ to increase^ 
Acts vi. 1, 'K\y]dvv6vTa>v tujv /madi^Tcov. 
Sept. and Class. 

nXtjOct), see HiniTrXi^juiL. 

nX.IjKT7JS, OU, O, (ttXiJO-O-OJ,) pFOp. « 

striker^ one apt to strike, Plut. Kan-d 
Xst/oa ttX. Fig. a quarreller^ 1 Tim. ill. 
3. Tit. i. 7, in opp. to dfxaxo^. So Plut. 
Dio, 30, dvdpdarL irkriKTaL^ Kal fJLax'LfxoL^. 
Or it may mean, as Chrys. and Theod. 
explain, o^u§, equiv. to £/uL7r\t]K'rco9 o^us 
in Thuc. iii. 82. So Plut. vi. 502. ix. 
642, '7rX?j/cT7/§ Kai o^u§. See more in my 
note on 1 Tim. 

UXri iuliul6 pa^ as, 77, (-TrXryz/, ^U/0|Oa fr. 
jjivpio^) the tide ^ flood-tide^ and hence by 
impl. a floods inundation^ Lu. vi. 48, comp. 
Matt. vii. 27, and lat. Class. 

nX?/i/, prep. & adv. (fr. obsol. TrXijiUi, 
it being the accus. of the old noun ttXt/s,) 
prop, more than^ over and above^ hence 
besides, except^ hit: 1) as prep, in the 
middle of a clause, vAih. gen. Mk, xii. 32, 
ovK ea-TLu aXXos ttX^v auToD, ' there is 
no other besides him,' equiv. to ' but he :' 
John viii. 10. Acts viii. 1, irdvTz^ — ttXtjv 
Twu diroa-ToXcov. xv. 28. xx. 23. xxvii. 
22. Sept. and Class. 2) as adv, at the 
beginning of a clause, equiv. to viuch more, 
rather, besides^ verging into an adversative 
particle, meaning but rather, but yet, never- 
theless, &c. Matt. xi. 22, 24, TrXtjV Xiyco 
vfXLv. xviii. 7, oft. ; so where the writer 
returns after a digression to a previous 
topic, Eph. v. 33, comp. ver. 25, 28. 

nXtjprjs, £os ous, o, 77, adj. (ttXeo?,) 
full, filled: 1) PROP, said of hollow ves- 
sels, with gen. of that 0/ which any thing 
is full, expr. or implied, Mk. vi. 43, kXug-- 
lidTUJV 6u)dsKa Ko(pLvov9 TrXtj'peis : im- 
plied, Matt. xiv. 20. Sept. and Class. Of 
a surface, full, i. e. fully covered, with 
gen. Lu. V. 12, dvtjp TrXr/ptjs XtTrpas. 
Sept. and Class. 2) fig.fidl 01: filled, i. e. 
fully imbued witb or abounding in any 
moral quality, or property, or disposition, 
whether good, (as Acts vi. 5, 8, ttX. Trt- 
0-TEC09. ix. 36, ttX. dyaduiv 'ipywv : and 
so Sept. and Class.) or evil, as Acts xiii. 
10, ttX. S6X0V, and xix. 28, ttX. ^ufxav. 
Both phrases occur in the Sept. In Lu. 
iv. 1. Acts vi. 3. vii. 55. xi. 24, ttX. 
dyiov Uv. means, ' filled with the gifts 
and graces of the Holy Spirit.' The ex- 
pression ttX. x^P^'tos in John i. 14, said 
of Christ, is of a different kind ; the ful- 
ness of Christ possessing these three essen- 



tial points of distinction, 1. that while in 
others grace and the Spirit are by parti- 
cipation, in Christ they are of himself, as 
one with the Deity, in whom ' the fulness 
of the Godhead dwells bodily' (Col. ii. 9.); 
2. while in others they exist by measure, 
Eph. iv. 16, in Him they are without 
measure and infinite, John iii. 34. 3. 
whereas the saints cannot communicate 
them to others, they are in Christ as a 
head and fountain of supply to his mem- 
bers, John i. 16. 3) fig. fidl, i. e. com- 
plete, perfect, Mk. iv. 28, 7rXvpi]<5 crlxo?, 
the fully-formed grain, (so Sept. Gen. 
xii. 7, 22, a-Tdxya<s 7rXt]'p£i§,) 2 John 8, 
IJ.L(jd6<s 7rXr\pri<s. And so Xen. An. vii. 
5, 5, fXLdddv irXrio. Also Sept. Ruth ii. 

12, fx. TT. 

HXi]po(popiui,i. ?](T6o, (7rX?7p?^s, <po- 
ps-co,) prop, to bear or bring fully, carry a 
full measure, to be full or mahe full. 
Hence, to bring fidl proof ^nx thing, to 
give full assurance, persuade fully, trans, 
said 1 ) of PERSONS, pass, to be fully as- 
sured, persuaded, Rom. iv. 21, TrXvipocpo- 
prj0£i§ oTL K.T.X. xiv. 5. Sept. Eccl. viii. 
11. Clem. Rom. Homil. xi. 17. Isocr. p. 
626, ed. Lange. 2) of things, to give 

full proof of any thing, with acc. 2 Tim. 
iv. 5, Tt-jv CLaKOviav <tov 7rXi]po(p6pi]crov, 
i. e. by fulfilling all its duties. Pass, to be 

fidly assured, conformed, to be fully esta- 
blished as true, Lu. i. 1, Tuyv 7rE7rXi]po- 
(popmjiiviov, i. e. ' which may be regarded 
as certain truths, and received with full 
assurance of faith,' for TrtirLCTTEvp.ivuov, 
And so 2 Tim. iv. 17, 'Iva to Kr,pvyp.a 
irXripo ^opriQy], for irLdTivd^, 'might ob- 
tain fall credence.' 

ZLXrjpocpopia, as, 77, (TrX-fjpo^opiw. ) 
fdll assurance, firm persuasion ; kv ttX??- 
pocpopta iroXXr], 1 Th. i. 5. Col. ii. 2. 
Heb. vi! 11. X. 22. 

nXrjpoo), f. (jocro), {'TrXii]pri<3,) to mahe 
full, tofill,fillup, trans. I. prop, of a vessel, 
hollow place, &c. pass. Matt. xiii. 48, riu 
OTE ETrXtjocodi] sc. crayvivt], Lu. iii. 5, 
Trdcra (pdpay^TrXijpcodyjcrsn-aL. Sept. and 
Class. ; fig. Matt, xxiii. 32, TrXijpcoaraTs 
TO jueTpov Twv iraTipoov v/ul. i. e. ' the 
measure of your sins.' Gener. of a place, 
to fill, by diffusing any thing, as a sound, or 
an odour, throughout, with acc. Acts ii. 2, 
•fjXos sTrXripctxTev oXov tov o1.kov : foil, 
by EK of thing from or zuith which, John 
xii. 3, v OLKia £7rX))pto6j] ek Tri<5 oa-fxri^ : 
fig. with acc. and gen. Acts v. 28, ttettX?/- 
puiKaTE Tr\v 'Isp. T?7s OLoayfi's vpLtov. So 
Liban. Epist. p. 721, Tracas (TroXsis) toov 
virkp rjpoou Xoywv kvETrXrj era's. Justin, 
xi. 7, 14, ' Phrygiam totam religionibus 
implevit.' Fig. irXt]povv Trjv Kapolav 
Tti/os, to fill the heaH of any one, to take 
possession of it, John xvi. 6 ; or to fill it 



HAH 



348 



HAH 



with some strange impulse to action, Acts 
V. 3, diaTL kTrXt'ipcoGEV 6 2. t7]u Kapdiav 
<rou ; So Eccl. viii. 11, iTrX-npotpopridr} 
Kapo'ta vLoov tov dudp. tov iroL^craL to 
troviipov^ ' their heart is fully bent.' — II. 
FIG. to fill ^ i. e. to furnish abundantly vAih. 
any thing, impart richly^ imbue icith^ foil, 
by acc. and oft. an adjunct of that icith 
which any one is filled or furnished : 

1) with acc. and gen. Acts ii. 28, ttXt]- 
poocret^ lULE &v(bpo(TVurj9. xiii. 52. Rom. 
XV. 13, 14. 2 Tim. i. 4, and Class. 2) 
with acc. and dat., in pass, with dat. Rom. 
i. 29, ttettX. irdcrri ddiKLa. 2 Cor. vii. 4. 
3) with Eu instead of the simple dat. Eph. 
V. 18, TrXripovcTdE kv TTUEV/iaTi. 4) with 
acc. simply, irdcrav y^pEiav v/ncov, ' to 
supply fully,' Phil. iv. 19 : also ttX. xa 
TrdvTa^ Eph. i. 23. iv. 10, said of Christ 
as filling the universe with his influence, 
presence, power. Hence pass. TrXy-jpov- 
fxaL^ absol. to be filled full ^ fully furnished^ 
abound^ Phil. iv. 18. Col. ii. 10, kv auTw, 
i. e. in Christ, in his work : Eph. iii. 19, 
Xva 7rXr]pwQriTe £t§ irdv to 7rXr']pco/uLa 
TOV 0. ' i7ito or unto all the fulness of 
God,' i. e. ' that ye may fully participate 
in all the rich spiritual gifts of God, of 
every kind, both extraordinary and ordi- 
nary,' or such graces as are given to every 
man to profit withal.' Also pass, with 
acc. Col. i. 9, 'iua TrXrjpcodrjTE Tt]v kiri- 
yvcocTLV. Phil. i. 11, TrEirXr^poopLEVOL Kap- 
TTov SLKaL0(Tuvr]<s. — III. to fulfil, perform 
fully, with acc. 1) spoken of duty, obli- 
gation, &c. Matt. iii. 15, irXripcocTaL Trdcrav 
CLKaL0(rvvy]v. Acts xii. 25. Rom. viii. 4. 
xiii. 8. Gal. v. 14. 1 Mace. ii. 55, and 
Class., as Hdian. iii. 11, 9, tt. kvToXd^. 

2) of a declaration, prophecy, to fulfil, 
accomplish, with accus. Acts xiii. 27, Td<s 
(pcvi/d<; Twu Trpo(p. kirX^puocrav. iii. 18. 
Pass, to be fulfilled, accomplished, have an 
accomplishnent, Matt. ii. 17, tote ettXtj- 
pcody] TO pvidii/. xxvi. 54. Mk. xv. 28, 
EirX-npcodri i] ypa(prj. Here belongs the 
phrase 'iva TrX-itpiJodrj, Matt. i. 22, oft. ; 
also oTTcos irXi-jpcodi], ii. 23, al. see my 
note. — TV. to fulfil, i. e. to bring to a full 
end, accomplish, complete. 1) pass, of 
time, to be fulfilled, completed, ended, Mk. 
i. 15, TmrXripwTaL 6 KaLp6<s. Lu. xxi. 24, 
dy^pL TrXYjocodcocL KaipoL. John vii. 8. 
Acts vii. 23, 30. ix. 23. Jos. AntM. 4, 1. 
2) of a business, work, &c. to accomplish, 
complete, Lu. vii. 1, e'ttel kirX^pwcrE 
TrdvTa Td pr\p.aTa avTov. ix. 31. Acts 
xiii. 25. xiv. 26, eI<s to 'ipyov o ettX?]'- 
pvoaav. xix. 21. Rom. xv. 19, ttettXi']- 
puiKEvai TO EvayyiXwv. Col. i. 25. 3) 
by irapl. to fill tip, complete, make perfect, 
with acc. Matt. v. 17. Phil. ii. 2, ttX??- 
pcocraTE jULOV Ty]v y^apnv. 2 Th. i. 11. 
Pass, to be made full, complete, perfect, 
X«/od, John iii. 29 ; Tracrxa, Lu. xxii. 16 ; 



viraKori, 2 Cor. x. 6 ; 'ipya^ Rev. iii. 2 ; 
of persons. Col. iv. 12, TTETrXripwiuLivoL kv 
iravTL 2rEXi]juiaTL tov 9. ' complete in all 
the will of God,' i. e. in the knowledge 
and practice of what God would have us 
to do. 

UXt] pu) fia, aT09, TO, {TrXripoto,) ful- 
ness, filling, PROP. ' that with which any 
thing is filled,' of which it is full, tJie con^ 
tents : I. prop. 1 Cor. x. 26, -n yrj Kal 
TO TrXvp. avTri^, 'all that it contains:' 
so Mk. viii, 20, irocrvov (XTrvpLdcou 7rA.r]- 
pwfxuTa KXaG-jULaTCtiv ypaTE ; ' how many 
baskets-full of fragments ?'' equiv. to iro- 
aa<s (jirvpLda^ TrXi^'ptts ; ' how many full 
baskets ?' Also, a filling up, a supplements 
that which fills up, and hence = kiri- 
(SXi'i/na, a patch, Matt. ix. 16. — II. fig. 
fidness, i. e. full ineasure, abundance : 1) 
gener. John i. 16, ek tov irX^p. aurou, 
' from his rich storehouse of benefits and 
blessings ;' Eph. iii. 19, see HXt^poa), II. 
4. Col. ii. 9, TO irXrip. ttjs ^eoti^to^, 
' the fulness, plenitude of the divine per- 
fections,' and so absol. i. 19. In both of 
the passages the fulness of the Godhead 
must be meant, see my note. Rom. xv. 
29, kv 'TrXrjp. EvXoyia? tov Evayy. *m 
the full, abundant blessings of the Gospel 
so of a state of fulness, Rom. xi. 12, Troorw 
/jidXXov TO ttX. avTwv ; ' their prosperous 
condition.' 2) of persons, full number ^ 
complement, multitude, Rom. xi. 25, to 
irXrip. Tcou kdvcov, 'the full number, all^ 
the multitude of the Gentiles :' so of the 
Church of Christ, Eph. i. 23, to TrXrj- 
poijuia, &c., where see my note. — III. 
fulfilment, a fulfilling, full performance, 
vojuov, Rom. xiii. 10. Philo 387, irX. kX- 
Tridcjou. — IV. fidfilment, i. full end, com- 
pletion : 1 ) of time, full period. Gal. iv. 
4, 7]XdE TO irXvp. TOV xpovov. Eph. i. 10, 
Twv KULpcov. 2) by impl. completeness, 
perfectness, Eph. iv. 13, f is dvhpa teXeiov, 

£i§ fXETpOV hXLKLa'S TOV TT/Vt^p. TOU Xp., 

as adj. ' to the full and perfect stature of 
a man, complete manhood in Christ,' 
meaning, to that full growth in spiritual 
graces, and that wisdom and holiness 
which becomes the fulness, perfection, of 
Christ, i. e. his Church. See more in my 
note there. 

UXrio-Lov, adv. {TrXtjario^,) near, near 
by: I. prop. foil, by gen. John iv. 5, 
ttX. tov x^piov. Sept. and Class. Fig. 
Eli/aL ttX. TLvd<s, to be near any one, be 
neighbour to him, Lu. x. 29, 36. — II. with 
art. 6 TrXricriov, subst. OTie near, a neigh- 
bour, FELLOW, another person of the 
same nature, country, class, &c. 1 ) gener. 
a felloic-^ixs, any other member of the 
human family ; so in the precept dyaTrn']- 
crEL<s TOV TrXrTCTLOV (rov, Matt. xix. 19. 
Rom. xiii. 10. Eph. iv. 25, al. Sept. and 



n A H 



349 



HNE 



Class. 2) one of the same people or 
country, a felloiv-cov'STRYMAS, Acts vii. 
27, comp. ver. 26. 3) one of the same 
faith, a fclloiv- Chkistia-s, Rom. xv. 2. 
4) from the Heb. a friend, opp. to 6 
^X^pos, Matt, V. 43, and Sept. 

n\i/(r/u,oi/ i]<i, 7?, (7n'/A7rXr]^(,) a 
filling, satisfi/in(j, as Mith food, Sept. and 
*Xeu. Mem. iii. 11, 14; also fulness, sa- 
tiety. Col. ii. 23, and Class. 

nXij'o-cra), fut. Jw, to stnke, smite; in 
N. T. from the Heb. to plague, smite, i. e. 
afflict with disease, calamity, evil, pass. 
Rev. viii. 12, gTrXifyr/ to Tp'iTOV tov 
vXlov. Sept. Ex. ix. 32, sq. 

UXoLOip Lov, ov, TO, {irXoTou,) a small 
vessel, bark, spoken of the fishing-vessels 
on the sea of Galilee, Mk. iii. 9, al. and 
Class. 

UXoZov, ov, TO, (TrXto),) a ship, harh, 
ofener. Matt. iv. 21, 22. Acts xx. 13, oft. 
Sept. and Class. 

nXoo5, contr. ttXou?, gen. 6ov ov, but 
in later writers, as Arrian, Peripl. p. 
176, also gen. ttXoo's, 6, sailing, navigation, 
a voyage. Acts xxi. 7. xxvii. 9, oVto? vor] 
£7rtcr0aXous tou tt/Voos. ver. 10, and 
Class. 

TlXov a L09,La,ou, Sid]. (ttXoutos,) prop. 
' abundantly provided with' any thing, 
rich, wealthy: I. prop. Matt, xxvii. 57, 
dvdp. nrXouarLO^ cltto 'Ap. Lu. xii. 16. 

xvi. 1. xiv. 12, y&LTOva^ TrXovcriov^. 
xviii. 23 ; fig. happy, prosperous, wanting 
nothing. Rev. ii. 9. Subst. 6 irXovaio^, 
a rich man; pi. the rich. Matt. xix. 23, 
24. Mk. xii, 41, 'noXXoi nrXovcrLoi, oft. 
Sept. & Class. — II. metaph. rich in any 
thing, abounding in, 1) as said of ma?z, 
abounding in faith, and holiness, Ja. ii. 5. 
2) as said of God, abundant in mercy, 
Eph. ii. 4. 3) as said of Christ before 
his incarnation, 2 Cor. viii. 9, <5t' vfxd's 
kiTTODyjivcfs., irXovcTLO^ cou. Comp. John 

xvii. 5. 

UXova-LU)^, adv. (-TrXoucrto?,) richly, 
i. e. abunda7itly. Col. iii. 16, al. & Class. 

nXovTeo), f. rjoro), (ttXoutos,) to be 
rich, intrans. 1) PROP. Lu. i. 53, irXov- 
Tovwra'S l^aTrgcrTEiXs kevov<s, 1 Tim. vi. 
9. Sept. & Class. ; foil, by airo of source. 
Rev. xviii. 15 ; by ek, ver. 3, 19 : fig. Lu. 
xii. 2J, /jirj sis Oeou ttXovtcou, not rich 
toward God, 'laying up no treasure in 
heaven,' namely, by works of piety and 
benevolence ; or, ' not being rich in the 
glory of God,' as it consists in the benefit 
of man. So Lucian and Philostr. have 
'TrXovTSLV £i§ TO KOLvov. Also, to prospev, 
be ftappy, 1 Cor. iv. 8. 2 Cor. viii. 9. Rev. 
iii. 17. 2) FIG. to be rich in any thing, as 
spiritual gifts and graces, and their corre- 
spondent fruits, in the life and conver- 



sation ; with kv, 1 Tim. vi. 18, irXovTiiv, 
absol. Rom. x. 12, Ku/oio9 ttXovtmv eIs 
Trai/Tas, namely, in grace, mercy, and 
blessing. 

IXXouTi^o), f. i(Ttt), (ttXouto?,) prop. 
to make rich, to enrich, trans, in N. T. 
only fig. to bestow richly, to furnish abun- 
dantly ; and in a spiritual sense, with the 
blessed truths of the Gospel here, and the 
hopes of glory hereafter, 2 Cor. vi. 10, 
TTTioyoL, iroXXov^ dk ttXovt'iX^ovte^. So 
Xen. Mem. iv. 2, 9, we have Tas twv 
crocpMV yvoufxa's «p£T^ ttXovtl^s.lv tou§ 
KEKTi]/uLEvov^. Pass. to be enriched, i. e. 
richly furnished, with all spiritual gifts 
and graces ; foil, by kv Travrl, 1 Cor. i. 5. 
2 Cor. ix. 11. 

IIXoDto?, ov, 6, riches, ivealth: 1) 
PROP. Matt. xiii. 22, ri dyaTrt] tov 'irXou- 
Tov. Mk. iv. 19. Lu. viii. 14. 1 Tim. vi. 
17, al. Meton. as a source of power and 
influence, in ascriptions, Rev. v. 12. Sept. 
and Class. Fig. b ttXoDtos tov 9. or 
Tou Xp., 'the abundant mercy and good- 
ness' of God and Christ, and the rich 
spiritual gifts and blessings imparted by 
God and Christ, Phil. iv. 19. Eph. iii. 8; 
also spiritual welfare, Rom. xi. 12. Heb. xi. 
26. 2 ) METAPH . riches, richness, abundance, 
usually before the gen. of another noun, 
equiv. to adj. rich, abundant, pre-eminent, 
Rom. ii. 4, tov 'kXovtov Ttj^ y^pricrTo- 
T7]To?, equiv. to ' his rich goodness.' 
2 Cor. viii. 2, tov ttX. Trj^ d7rXoT7}To§ av. 
' rich liberality.' Eph. i. 7. ii. 7. Col. ii. 
2. So 6 ttXoutos tt}? do^ri^ av. Rom. ix. 
23, (where see my note,) et al. xi. 33, w 
^ddo<s ttXovtov Kal <TO<pia^ Kai yvcoa-Eco^ 
9. See my notes in loc. and compare 
Philo Euth. 13, Tpvcpa^ vtto ttXovtov 
Tfj5 cro<pLa^. 

TiXvvM, f. vv(M, to wash, rinse; said 
espec. of clothes, (as Xouo) of the body, & 
VLTTTO) of the hands,) trans. Rev. vii. 14, 
EirXvvav to? (TToXas avTwv. Sept. and 
Class. 

TlvEV ixa, aTO<s, to, {ttveco). I. 
BREATH. 1) of the mouth or nostrils, 
a breathing, blast, 2 Th. ii. 8, to it v. tov 
(TTOfxaTo^, ' the breath of the mouth,' 
here spoken of the destroying power of 
God ; of the vital breath. Rev. xi. 11, irv. 
^a)^s, 'breath of life.' 2) breath of air, 
air in motion, a breeze, the ivind, John iii. 
8, TO TTVEVfxa oTTOv ^eXel ttvel, Hcb. i. 
7, 6 iroicov Tous dyytXov^ avTov ttvev- 
fiaTu. 

II. SPIRIT. I. the vital spirit, life, 
soul, Lat. anima, the principle of life re- 
siding in the breath, breathed into man 
from God, and again returning to God, 
Matt, xxvii. 50, ucpTjKs to TrvEv/ma, 'he 
gave up the ghost,' expired, Lu. viii. 55. 
xxiii. 46. John xix. 30. Acts vii. 59. Ja. ii. 



n N E 

26. Rev. xiii. 15. -Fig. John vi. 63, to 

TT//. feCTTt TO "^(JOOTTOLOVU K.T.\. SCO Uiy llOte. 

1 Cor. XV. 45, kyiv&TO 6 ttoooto^ civOp. 
'Add/j. eh xp^vxh^ ^coo-ai/, o eg-xccto^ 'A. 
(io-Tij/) £i§ TTVEUfxa X^woTTOLovi/^ u quickeii- 
ing spirit^ i. e. a spirit of life, as raising 
the bodies of his followers from the dead 
unto immortal life. — il. the rational spirit^ 
MIND, soul^ Lat. alliums. 1 ) gener. as opp. 
to the body and animal spirit, 1 Th. v. 23, 
TO Try. Kai i) xj/vx^) Kai to cruofxa^ as a 
periphrasis for the whole man, Lu. i. 47. 
Rom. ii. 29. viii, 10, to Tn/eD/xa Jojj/. 

1 Cor. V. 3 — 5. Heb. xii. 9, 6 IlaT^p tuw 
TTi/f u/xaTcoi/, opp. to OL TvaripE^ t?;5 aap- 
/cos. So where ^vyj] or aco/iia are not 
expressed, Rom. viii. 16, auTo to Hu. 
avjuL/uLapTvpEl TM irv. rjfxoov^ ' the Divine 
Spirit himself testifieth to our spirit,' 
mind, Rom. i. 9. Gal. vi. 18. John iv. 23, 

'7rpO(TKVV1]<JOV<jL TO) IlaT^t EU TTV. KOL 

dXi]d£ia, 'in spirit and in truth,' i. e. with 
a sincere mind, with a true heart, not with 
mere external rites. 2) as the seat of the 
affections., and passions of various kinds ; 
e. gr. humility. Matt. v. 3, ol TtTiayoL tw 
TTvivixaTL., ' the poor in spirit,' i. e. those 
of a lowly mind or disposition, 1 Cor. xvi. 
18, dviTTavcrau to gyuoi/ irvEUfxa. 2 Cor. 
ii. 12; of joy, ^yaWtao-ctTO to? irvEvixaTL 
6 'h](T. Lu. X. 21 ; of ardour, fervour, 
Acts xviii. 25, "^ecov tw ttz/, Lu. i. 17, eu 
TTvtvfxaTL Kai dvvd/xEL *H/\iou : of per- 
turbation, from grief, indignation, Mark 
viii. 12, dvaaTEvd^a<s Tui irv. avrov, 
John xi. 33. xiii. 21. Acts xvii. 16. 3) 
as referring to disposition^ feelings., temper 
of mind, Lu. ix. 55, ovk. oldaTs oiov 
irvtvfxaTO's eo-te u/itTs. Rom. viii. 15, 
•TTi/. dov\ELa<s. xi. 8. 1 Cor. iv. 21, ttv. 
'irpa6n->]To<5. xiv. 14, to irvEVfid fxov 
TrpoaEvxETaL., 6 dk vou's fiov d.KapTro's 
£(TTi, jni/ spint prays., i. e. ' my own feel- 
ings thus find utterance in prayer, but 
what I mean is not understood bv others ;' 

2 Cor. iv. 13. 1 Pet. iii. 4. Ja. iv. 5. 4) 
as implying will., counsel., purpose., Mark 
xiv. 38, TO fxEU TTi/Ev/ixa TrpoOu/uoi/, 77 Se 
adp^ dadEvn?. Acts xix. 21, sOeTO o II. 
Eu Tw TTv. XX. 22. 5) as including the 
u?idersta?iding or intellect., Mark ii. 8, 
kiTLyvov^s Tco ivv. Luke ii. 40, EKpa- 

TaLOVTO 'TTVEU/JLaTl.^TrXrjpOVfJLEVOV (socpia^. 

1 Cor. ii. 11, 12. 

III. A SPIRIT, i. e. a simple, incor- 
poreal, immaterial being, possessing far 
higher capacities than man, in his present 
state, can even conceive. A) spoken of 
created spirits : 1) of the human soid., 
spirit, after its departure from the body, 
and as existing in a separate state, Heb. 
xii. 23, '7rpo<jE\y]\vdaTE iruEVfxacn SiKai- 
(JDV teteXelcop-eucov. 1 Pet. iii. 19, ev w 

Kul TOls iv (puXuK^ 7n/EVpa<TL TTOpevdEL^ 

EKvpv^E. Acts xxiii. 8 : so of the soul of 



n NE 

a person re-appearing after death, a spii^., 
ghost., ver. 9. Luke xxiv. 37, 39. 2) of a;2 
EVIL spirit, dcemon, equivalent to dai- 
IxovLov, daifxiiiv, mostly with the epithet 
aKadapTou, which see ; irvEVfxa aKad. 
Matt. X. 1. xii. 43, oft. ; also Try. dai- 
jULOVLOv aKaddpTov^ Lu. iv. 33. ttv. dai- 
jULovLcou, Rev. xvi. 14. to ttu. to iTovr)pdv, 
Acts xix. 15, and tu ttv. to: Troviipd, ver. 
12. TrvEVjjLa dXaXov, Mark ix. 17. irv. 
dadEifELa^, ' a spirit of infirmity,' i. e. 
causing disease, Lu. xiii. 11, comp. ver. 
16. TTV. TTuOwyos, ' a spirit of divination,' 
a soothsaying demon. Acts xvi. 16, 18. 
Absol. Matt. viii. 16. Mk. ix. 20. Ln. ix. 
39. x. 20. Eph. ii. 2. 3) seldomer, in 
plur. of angels, as God's ministering spirits., 
Heb. i. 14, XEiTovpyLKa Try. Rev, i. 4, Ta 
EiTTd TTV. i. e. ' the seven archangels,' iii. 
1. iv. 5. V. 6. B) of God in reference to 
his immateriality, Johniv. 24, ttv. 6 Oeos. 
C) of Christ in his exalted spiritual 
and divine nature, in distinction from his 
human nature, 1 Pet. iii. 18, ^avaTcoQEh 
PLEU crapKL, ^a)O7rotTj0£ts dk too TTUEvp. re- 
ferring to the spiritual exaltation of Christ 
after his resurrection to be head over all- 
things to the Church: so Rom. i. 4, Ka-rd, 
TTVEVjia dyLOicrvvi]'s. 1 Tim. iii. 16. D) 
of the Spirit of God, to TLv&vfxa tov 
Qeou or Kvpiov also to JlvEufxa to 
dyLov, tlie Holy Spirit, and absol. to 
TlvEvpia, tlie Spirit, Kar e^ox>w', called 
likewise the Spirit of Christ, as being sent 
or communicated by Him after his resur- 
rection and ascension, livEvfia XpidTov, 
Rom. viii. 9. 'h]aou Xf>. Phil. i. 19. 
Kvpiov, 2 Cor. iii. 17. tou Ylov too 
Qeov, Gal. iv. 6. In N. T. the Spirit is 
every where represented as in intimate 
union with God the Father and Son, as 
proceeding from and sent forth by them, 
as possessing the same attributes, and per- 
forming the same acts with God the Father 
and God the Son, of course implying per- 
sonality s.nd Deity. The passages in which 
irvEvp-a is to be referred to this significa- 
tion may be divided into tivo classes ; viz. 
I. those in which being, intelligence, and 
agency, are predicated of the Spirit. — ii. 
metou. those in which the effects and con- 
sequences of this agency are spoken of. 

I, the Holy Spirit, as possessing being, 
intelligence, agency, &c. 1) joined with o 
0£o§ or o n.aT}]p and 6 XptcTos, &c. 
with the same or with diff^erent predicates. 
Matt, xxviii. 19, (SairTiX,. avTov^ Eh to 
ovopa TOV HaTpos /cat tou Ylov kul too 
dy.Ilv. ICor. xii. 4 — 6, to avTo TivEVfxa 
— o auTo? Kuf>to§ — o avTO^ Bfo'9. 2 Cor. 
xiii. 13. 1 Pet. i. 2. Jude 20. 2) spoken 
in connexion with or in reference to 
God the Father ; where intimate union 
or oneness wdth the Father is predicated 
of TO IIi/fu/Aa, John xv. 26, to Hvivixa 



350 



ONE 



351 



n N E 



T?/§ aX»;0€i'as, o irapa tov Tlwrpo'S 
iKiropiuETai : where tlie same omnisci- 
ence is predicated of to UvEVjua as of 6 
G€09. 1 Cor. ii, 10, to Uvsv/ixa nravTa 
spevva, Kal to. jBccdi] tov BsoD, ver. 11 ; 
where the same things are predicated of 
TO Ili/fi D/xa which in other places are pre- 
dicated of 6 Ofos, e. gr. Ananias and Sap- 
phira are said to lie to the Holy Spirit, &c. 
Acts V. 3, xp^svaraadaL are to UveujULa to 
ayiov : so ver. 9, com])are ver. 4, ovk 
ixj/Evaco uudp. aWa tvo Qeco. As speak- 
ing through the prophets of the O. T, Acts 
i. 16, T7/1/ ypa^i]v i\v ttpoeItte to IIi/. 
TO ay. Slcl cto'/x. A. comp. iv. 24, 25, & 
Heb. i. 1. xVcts xxviii. 25. Heb. iii. 7. 
ix. 8 : also gener. as speaking and warn- 
ing men through prophets and apostles, 
Acts vii. 51, comp. verse 52. Where a 
person is said to be born of the Spirit, 
spoken of the moral renovation, the new 
spiritual life imparted to those who sin- 
cerely embrace the gospel, John iii. 5, 6, 

8, 6 yEyEvv\]iJLEVo<s EK tov UvEvjUL. comp. 
i. 13. Where to irvEvjULa^ &c. is said to 
dwell in or be with Christians, Rom. viii. 

9, ELTTEp Hi/. Qeov olkeI ev vfxXu. ver. 11. 
] Cor. iii. 16. 2 Tim. i. 14, comp. 2 Cor. 
vi. 16. Where to TLvEVfxa and o Gto? are 
interchanged, 1 Cor. xii. fl, nrdvTa TavTa 
kvEpyEL TO EV Kal TO auTo irvEvfia^ 
spoken of miraculous gifts, comp. ver. 6, 6 
G£09 o kvEpyvov TO. ^avTa kv iracriv : so 
Eph. vi. 17. 3) spoken in connexion with 
or in reference to Christ ; e. gT. joined with 
o XpiCTTos in a form of swearing, Rom. ix. 
1, nXriQEiav Xtyto kv Xp., ov \j/EudojULat^ 
kv III/, dyitp : in a solemn obtestation, xv. 
30 : in the renovation and sanctification 
of Christians, 1 Cor. vi. 11. 2 Cor. iii. 17, 
18. Heb. X. 29. So to Hvev/ulu and 6 
Xpio-Tos are said to be or c?z^?e/^with men; 
compare the examples cited above in 2, 
with John xiv. 23. xv. 4. Eph. iii. 17. 
Also where to HvEvp-a to ayiov is said 
to descend crw/xaTi/cw eI^ei upon Jesus 
after his baptism, Matt. iii. 16. Lu. iii. 22. 
4) as coming to and acting upon Christian 
men, exerting in and upon them an en- 
lightening, strengthening, sanctifying in- 
fluence : thus where the Holy Spirit is 
represented as the author of revelations to 
men, e. gr. through the prophets of the 
O. T. ; or as communicating a knowledge 
of future events, Acts x. 19, eIttev uvtm 
To Hytoyua, 'ISoi) avBpE's TpEl<5 X^r]TOvarL 
<TE. XX. 23. 1 Tim. iv. 1. Rev. xix. 10 ; 
or as directing or impelling to any act, 
Acts xi. 12. As communicating instruction, 
admonitions, warnings, and invitations, 
through the apostles, Rev. ii. 7, ctKovordTOD 
TL TO HvEvfxa XiyEL TaL9 ekkX. oft. xxii. 
17, TO HvEvfJLa Kal h vvjULCpt} Xiyovariv^ 
*Epxow : so 1 Cor. ii. 10. As speaking 
through the disciples when brought before 



rulers, &c. Matt. x. 20. Mk. xiii. 11. Lu. 
xii. 12 : as qualifying the apostles power- 
fully to propagate the gospel. Acts i. 8 ; or 
aiding in edifying and comforting the 
churches, ix. 31 ; or directing in the ap- 
pointment of church ofliicers, xx. 28; or 
assisting to speak and hear the gospel 
aright, 1 Cor. ii. 13, kv dLSaKToT's Tlveif- 
juaTCi (Xoyots), 'in words taught, sug- 
gested by the Holy Spirit,' ver. 14 : emphat. 
as the Spirit of the gospel, 2 Cor. iii. 17. 
Also as coming to and remaining with 
Christians, imparting to them spiritual 
knowledge, aid, consolation, and sanctifica- 
tion, making intercession with and for 
them, and the like, John xiv. 17, 26, to 
UvEvjULa TO ayioi/, l/cetyos u/xas diSd^EL 
TrdvTa. XV. 26, to Hvevuxa t/;s aXtjOeias, 
'that Divine Spirit who will impart the 
knowledge of divine truth,' Rom. viii. 14, 
16, 26, 27. 2 Cor. i. 22, 6 dppa^dov tov 
UvEVfx, Eph. iii. 16. vi. 18. So where 
any one is said to grieve the Holy Spirit, 

Eph. iv. 30, lULI] XvTTELTE TO HvEV/Ha TO 

ayiov TOV G. kv io Ea-(ppayL(Tdr}T£., i. e. 
by whose gifts and influences ye are 
strengthened and confirmed. 

II. met on. the Holy Spirit^ as put for 
the eff^ects and consequences of the agency 
and operations of the Spirit of God, i. e. a 
divine influence., a divine energy or power ^ 
an inspiration., resulting from the imme- 
diate agency of the Holy Spirit, rz: r\ 
dvvaiXL's TOV dyiov Hv. Spoken. 1) of 
that physical procreative energy exerted 
in the miraculous conception of Jesus, 
Lu. i. 35, HvEvfxa ayiov kirEKEvcrETai 
sTTL <T£, where it is =: SvvafXL^ "YxItlcttov 
in the following clause ; Matt. i. 18, 20 : 
so in respect to the conception of Isaac out 
of the course of nature. Gal. iv. 29. 2) of 
that special divine influence., inspiration, 
and energy, which rested upon and existed 
in Jesus after the descent of the Holy 
Spirit upon Him at his baptism, Lu. iv. 1, 
'I?70'ou§ YlvEVix. dyiov TrXrypt]?, comp. iii. 
22. John iii. 34, ovk ek fXETpov BidtocrLv 6 
Geos to Uv. Matt. xii. 18. Lu. iv. 18. 
Acts i. 2. X. 38. 1 John v. 6, 8, to ttv. 
Kal TO vdojp Kal to alfxa : i. e. by which 
also he was sealed as a spotless victim for his 
atoning sacrifice, Heb. ix. 14. As prompt- 
ing him to go into the desert to be tempt- 
ed. Matt. iv. 1. Mk. i. 12. riyETo kv tm 
Tiv. EL'S Ti)v Ep. Lu. iv. 1 ; and afterwards 
to return into Galilee, ver. 14 ; as enabling 
him to cast out demons. Matt. xii. 28, e'l 
kv TLv. Qeov kyd) kK(3dXXco Ta Sai/xovLa., 
comp, Lu. xi. 20. 3) of that divine influ- 
ence by which /?rop^e^s and holy men were 
inspired when they are said to have spoken 
or acted kv llvEVfxaTL., vtto or Sid JIvev- 
fxaTO's., in., hy^ or through the Spirit., i. e. 
by inspiration ; Aaut(5 eI'ttev kv TlvEjjfx. 
dyi'o), Mk, xii. 36; so 2 Pet. i. 21, utto 



ENE 



352 



n N E 



UvEVjULaTO's dyiov (pspofxevoL k\d\r](Tav. 
1 Pet. i. 11, TO kv auToIs Tiv^vfJia X-picr- 
Tou : of John in the Apocalypse, as being 
£v HvEviuLaTL^ Rev. i. 10, al. : of the in- 
spiration resting upon John the Baptist, 
Lu. i. 15 ; Zacharias, veb. 67 ; Elizabeth, 
ver. 41 ; Simeon, ii. 25 — 27. So of that 
divine influence and inspiration imparted 
to Christians, by which they are taught, 
enlightened, guided, in respect to faith and 
practice, Lu. xi. 13. John vii. 39. Rom. 
V. 5, 77 aytxTTt] Tou 6. kKKtyvTaL kv Tats 
KapdiuL's v/x. did Hvev/ul. dyiov. 1 Cor. 
xii. 3. 2 Cor. iii. 3. Tit. iii, 5 : so when 
the disciples of Christ are said to be 
baptized with the Holy Spirit, i. e. to be 
richly furnished with all spiritual gifts. 
Matt. iii. 11. 4) of that influence of the 
Spirit by which the apostles were origin- 
ally qualified to act as founders and direc- 
tors of the Church of Christ, John xx. 
22, XeyEi auT0t9, Ad/?£T£ HvEv/ma aytoi/, 
comp. ver. 23. Spec, of that powerful 
energy and inspiration imparted by the 
Holy Spirit on the day of pentecos't and 
afterwards, by which the apostles and 
early Christians were endowed with high 
supernatural qualifications for their work, 
e. gr. a full knowledge of gospel-truth, 
the power of prophesying, of working 
miracles, of speaking with unknown 
tongues, &c. So where they are said to 
be baptized with this Holy Spirit, Acts 

1. 5, comp. ver. 8. 1 Cor. xii. 13, comp. 
ver. 8, 9. Acts ii. 4, £7rA.?7cr6rjcray diravTE^ 
HvEVfx. dyiov., kul rjp^avTo XuXelv ete- 
paiQ yXwa-crai'S /caOws to HvEVfxa koidov 
avTol's d7ro(pdEyyacrdai.,i.e. 'as the Spirit 
impelled them,' ver. 17, 18. ii. 33, 38. 
xix. 6. Rom. XV. 19. So also Acts xix. 

2, ovdk si ILvEVfJia ayiov kcrTiv rjKova-a- 
fXEV., i. e. 'they did not know that the 
Holy Spirit had yet been given,' that the 
time foretold by Joel had arrived. Simi- 
larly as it is said in another passage, John 

vii. 39, ovTTU) yap i]v HvEv/uLa dyiov, 'for 
the Holy Ghost was not yet given.' That 
the meaning there cannot be, according to 
the common rendering, ' we have not 
heard whether there be any Holy Ghost,' 
will sufficiently appear, when it is con- 
sidered that these Ephesian disciples, hav- 
ing been baptized into John's baptism., 
must necessarily have received John's 
doctrine., that ' he that should come after 
him, i.e. Christ, should baptize them with 
the Holy Glwst f and so could not be 
ignorant of the existence of the Holy 
Ghost. So as prompting to or restraining 
from particular actions or conduct. Acts 

viii. 29, 39, HvEVfxa Kvpiov ripTra(TE tqv 
4>t\. comp. Matt. iv. 1 ; so Acts xiii. 2, 4. 
XV. 28. xvi. 6, 7 ; as prompting to holy 
boldness, energy, zeal, in speaking and act- 
ing, Acts iv. 8, JLirpo^ TrXijcrOgis Hv. 



dyiov fitTTf Trpos avTov's. ver. 31. vi. 3, 
dvdpa^ ETTTa 'wXr]pEL<s UvEVjUL. dyiov Kai 
aro(f)ia^. ver. 10 ; as the medium of divine 
communications and revelations. Acts xi. 
28, "Aya(3o^ kcrrifxavE did tqv UvEVfia- 
Tos. xxi. 4. Eph. iii. 5 ; as the source of 
support, comfort. Christian joy and tri- 
umph, Acts vii. 55. xiii. 52. Eph. v. 18. 
Phil. i. 19. Plur. irvEVfxaTa, Spiritual 
gifts, 1 Cor. xiv. 12. To this head we 
may also refer many of those passages, 
where the idea of Spiritual influence is 
conveyed by certain adjuncts, 1 Cor. vii. 
40. xii. 7. xiv. 2 & 32. 5) spoken of 
that divine influence, by which the temper 
or disposition of mind in Christians is 
afi'ected ; or rather, put for the spirit, tem- 
per, disposition of mind produced in 
Christians by tlie influences of the Holy 
Spirit, which corrects, elevates, and enno- 
bles all their views and feelings, fills the 
mind with peace and joy, and is the pledge 
and foretaste of everlasting happiness : a) 
as opposed to 77 adp^, which includes the 
idea of what is earthly, grovelling, and im- 
perfect, John iii. 6, to yayEvv, ek T77S 
crap/cos (rdp^ egtl, Kai to yEyEVv. ek tov 

TTVEVfX. TTVEVfxd ECTTL, put for TTVEV/JLaTL- 

Kov ka-TL, is spiritual, i. e. has those dis- 
positions and feelings which are produced 
by the Spirit of God : so Rom. viii. 1, /ar} 
KaTa crdpKa irEpLiraTovcnv, dXXd kutu 
TrvEVfxa. ver. 9, kv irvEVfxaTL. ver. 13. 
1 Cor. vi. 17, 6 KoXX6)fiEvo's tw Kupto) 
Ev irvEvixd ECTTL, 1. 0. ' through the in- 
fluence of the Spirit of God, they have the 
same spirit with Christ,' Gal. v. 16 — 25. 
(3) gener. Rom. viii. 9, TrvEVfxa XpiCToD, 
i. e. ' the same mind as Christ possessed,' 
wrought in us by the Spirit, vii. 6. viii. 
15, TTVEV/Jia viodEaia^, ' a spirit of son- 
ship,' i. e. a filial spirit, ver. 23. 1 Cor. ii. 
12. Eph. i. 17, otor] v/juv irvEVfxa CFOcpia^ 
Kai dTTOKaXvxj/Ea)^, ' a spirit of wisdom 
and illumination,' imparted through the 
Holy Spirit, ii. 18,22. 

III. meton. spoken of a person or 
teacher tvho acts, or professes to act, under 
the inspiration of the Holy Spirit, 1 Cor. 
xii. 10, diaKpia-EL^ irvEVfxdToov, ' the try- 
ing of spirits,' where see my note. 1 John 
iv. 1, iravTL ttvev/jl. ttlcttevete, dXXd 
doKLfidX^ETE Ttt TTVEVjUL. ver. 2, 3, 6. 1 Th. 
iv. 8. 2 Th. ii. 2, /ulvte dud 'wvEVfji. i. e. 
' neither by any one professing to be in- 
spired.' 

IlvEVfxaTLKd^,ri,6v, adj. [irvExifxa,) 
in Class, breathing, aerial, or spiritual, i. e. 
mental, proceeding from the mind, Plut. 
vi. 491 ; in N. T. spiritual: 1) pertain- 
ing to the nature of spirits, 1 Cor. xv. 44, 
46, o-w^a TrvEV/jLaTLKov, a spiritual oi 
spiritualized and glorified body, opp. to 
acofjLa \|/-i;)(t/coz/, an animal body; Eph. vi. 



n N E 



3 



53 



noi 



12, Tct irvEvixaTLKo. t;;? 7roi;7;f)ta?, eqiiiv. 

to TO. TTVEVjULaTCt 'TrOV)]pU. So TOC Xj;o"Tt- 

Ka, for X7;crTa9, Polyten. v. 14. 2) 'per- 
taining to or proceeding from the Holy 
Spirit,' see IIve Gyua. ( 1 ) of persons^ spiri- 
tual, i. e. ' whose mind is enlightened by 
the Holy Spirit,' 1 Cor. ii. 13, Trveu/ua- 
TLKoT^. ver. 15. iii. 1, v/ixlu ojs irv&vfxa- 
TLKol<i. (2) of things^ spiritual, i. e. com- 
municated or imparted by the Holy Spirit, 
Rom. XV. 27. 1 Cor. ii. 13, TrvEVfxaTLKo.^ 
equiv. to to. tov nuEv/uLaTO's^ ver. 14, 
' things revealed by the Holy Spirit ix. 
11. xii. 1, TO. TTVEvixaTLKci, 'spiritual 
gifts,' miraculous powers ; Eph. v. 19, 
woats TTi/fy/xaTt/cars, 'spiritual songs,' i.e. 
composed in the Spirit, on spiritual and 
religious subjects ; Rom. vii. l4, 6 vSjULO^ 
TrviVfiaTLKOs io-Tii/, ' is according to the 
mind and will of the Spirit ;' or ' re- 
quiring, not merely outward, but inward 
and spiritual obedience;' i. 11, \apLc>ixa 
■TTvivixaTLKOu^ ' a spiritual gift,' i. e. a gift 
relating to the mind or spirit of Christians 
as enlightened and quickened by the Holy 
Spirit, comp. ver. 12, and TLvEVfxa. Also 
spoken of things ' in a higher and spiritual 
sense,' i. e. not literal, not corporeal, but 
typical and mystical^ including also a re- 
ference to the Holy Spirit, 1 Cor. x. 3, 4, 
(3pu)/uLa TTvEVfxaTLKov 'i(payov Kai irSfxa 
TTv. ETTLou /C.T.A.. 1 Pet. ii. 5, o1ko<s ttv&v- 
jxaTLK6<s^ ' a spiritual house,' or temple, as 
opp. to the material one. See my note. 

TlvevfiaTLKu)^, adv. spiritually, i. e. 
in or through the Holy Spirit, 1 Cor. ii. 
14. Clem. Rom. Ep. to Cor. i. 47, ttvev- 
fxaTLKoo^ aTTEcr^ELkEv ■hfJi'iv, scil. HauA-Os: 
so Rev. xi. 8, tjtl's kuXeTtul ttv. 2o^. 
Kai Aty. i. e. ' speaking in the Spirit, 
prophetically, allegorically, or mystically.' 

Ili/ew, fut. irvEva-Ofxai, aor. 1. ettvev- 
cra, to breathe^ breathe out ; in N. T. to 
blow, intrans. only of the wind, Matt. vii. 
25, ETri'Evarav oi avE/moi. Lu. xii. 55. John 
iii. 8, TO irvEvfxa ttveI. vi. 18. Rev. vii. 1, 
I'l/a fxh TTviri : so Acts xxvii. 40, nry ttve- 
ouarj, i. e. avpa. Sept. and Class. 

ni/t'yo), f. Jw, to choice, strangle, by 
stopping the breath, trans. Matt, xviii. 28, 
KpaTii<Ta9 avTov EirviyE, & Class. Pass, 
of drowning, Mk. v. 13. Jos. and Class. 

YlvLKTO's, tj, 01/, adj. {TTi/Lyo),) stran- 
gled ; in N. T. meton. to ttviktov, stran- 
gled meat, i. e. the flesh of animals killed 
by strangling, without shedding their blood, 
Acts XV. 20, 29. xxi. 25. See my notes. 

Tlvo^, r}^, t], {ttveod,) breath: 1) vital 
breath, respiration, Acts xvii. 25, "^oytji; 
Kai TTvoriv. Sept. and Class. 2) breath of 
air, a blast, wind. Acts ii. 2, (pEpajmivrj^ 
TTi/o^s. Sept. and Class, as Horn. II. v. 

697, TTi/. jSopEUO, 



TLody] pi]^, £09 OV9, 6, rj, adj. (ttoi's, 
apu),) reaching to the feet, spoken of long 
flowing robes. Rev. i. 13, kv^E^vfxivov 'wo- 
Bi'ipi], scil. £o-0;'/Ta, wlierc Christ, in glory, 
is represented as clothed with such a gar- 
ment, like the Jewish High-Priest, whose 
outer robe is called iroh)pr]<s in Ex. xxviii. 
4, and elsewhere in Ex. Comp. Ezek. 
ix. 2, avi^p Eude8vKu)9 iroSrjp'n. Jos. Ant. 

viii. 3, 8. Moreover the expression xltuw 
TT. occ. in the Class, as Xenoph. Pausan. 
Athen. 

HoQev, interrog. adv. whence 1 correl, 
with irov, TTOTE, &c. I. prop, of place^ 
equiv. to ' from what place or quarter ?"* 
Matt. XV. 33, TTo'Oti/ v/jlTv kv kpiifxia aproi 
TocrovTOL', Mk. viii. 4. John iv. 11; also 
indirect, Lu. xiii. 25, ouk olda v/id^ iro- 
dev kaTE. John iii. 8. viii. 14; fig. of 
state, condition, indir. Rev. ii. 5. Sept. & 
Class. — II. of source, author, cause, man- 
ner, whence ? hoiv ?- Matt. xiii. 27, ttoBev 
£X£t gtjai/ia ; ver. 54, 56. xxi. 25. John 

i. 49. xix. 9, ttSOev eI a-v ; Ja. iv. 1 ; in- 
direct, Lu. XX. 7, fJif] EidiuaL ttoQev. John 

ii. 9. ix. 29. Spoken in surprise, admira- 
tion, Lu. i. 43, ttoBev fxoL TOVTO ; Epict. 
Ench. 22 ; implying strong negation, Mk. 
xii. 37, ttoQev ulos axjTov icTt ; ^1. V. 
H. xiii. 2. 

HotEO), f. ?7o-w, aor. 1. iTrottjcra, perf. 
iTETroLtjKa, pluperf. 'TraTroL-nKELV, without 
augm. The various signif. may all be 
classed under the two primary ones, to 
MAKE and to DO, i. e. expressing action, 
either as completed or as continued : I. to 
MAKE, i. e. to form, produce, bring about, 
cause, prop, said of any external act, as 
manifested in the production of something 
tangible and corporeal, obvious to the 
senses, i. e. completed action : i. gener. 
1) prop, with acc. Matt. xvii. 4, iroiricrui- 
fXEv code Tpets crKrjyds. John ix. 11, 7rr}- 
X6v ETroLr\(jE. xviii. 18, itvQpaKidv TTEiroL- 
rjKOTE^. Acts vii. 40, ^teou^. ver. 43. ix. 
39, l/uLctTLa, xix. 24. Rom. ix. 20 ; foil, 
by i/c of material, John ii. 15, TroLvara^ 
(ppayiWiou ek cyoLvioDV. ix. 6. Rom. 

ix. 21 ; with Kara tl, of manner, model, 
Acts vii. 44. Heb. viii. 5 ; mid. Acts i. 1, 
Tou TTpGiTOv \6yov ETTOLria-djULriv. 2) said 
of God, to make, — to create, with acc. Acts 
iv. 24, 6 TTOLricra^ tov ovp. vii. 50. xvii. 24. 
Lu. xi. 40. Heb. i. 2,— ii. fig. spoken of a 
state or condition, or of things intangible 
and incorporeal, and gener. of such things 
as are produced by an inward act of the 
mind or will, to make, i. e. to cause, bring 
about: 1) gener. with acc. Lu. i, 68, 
kiroLiq^TE XvTpwa-Lv tw Xaw avTov, Acts 
XV. 3. xxiv. 12, kTTLcruaTacrLV TroLOvvTa 
oxXov. Eph. ii. \5,7roLU)V ELprivr\v. iv. 16; 
mid. Rom. xv. 26. Heb. i. 3. 2) itoleZv 

, with accus. forms a periphrasis for the 



no I 



354 



noi 



cogn. verb; e. gr. active, ttoleXu iK^iK7]criv 
for ekSlkelv^ Lu. xviii. 7, comp. ver. 3 ; 
iviSpav for ei/&dpevELU^ Acts xxv. 3 ; to 
iKavoi/ for iKavovv^ Mk. xv. 15; fxovriv 
for fxiveiv^ John xiv. 23 ; o^oi/ for bdo- 
iroulcrQai^ Mk. ii. 23 ; ttoXeiulou for tto- 
Xe/xfity, Rev. xi. 7; crvix^ovXwv for ci;/;!- 
^ovXeuearQaL^ Mk. iii. 6 ; arvucojULoa-iav for 
cFvvofjLvvEiv^ Acts xxiu. 13; avcrTpo<pi)v 
for <TV<TTpi(pB(r6aL, ver. 12. Mid. ttoleTct- 
t^at, as TTotfelcrOat dva(3oXi]v, for dvafSuX- 
XEordaL, Acts xxv. 17 ; j^ETjcrsts, for (^ftcr- 
6ai, Lu. V. 33 ; Ei<:ftoX})v, for ek(3uX\elu^ 
Acts xxvii. 18; koitetov^ for /coVTEtrOai, 
viii. 2 ; Xoyo^, ' to make account of,' for 
Adoyt^scOai, XX. 24; fxvELav^ for /uLi/uLvi'ia- 
KELv^ Rom. i. 9. 2 Pet. i. 15; iropziav^ 
for -TTopguEo-tlai, Lu. xiii. 22; irpovoLav^ 
* to make provision for,' for irpovoElcrdaL^ 
Rom. xiii. 14 ; orirovdrjv, for CTroi/^a- 
Jtti/, Jude 3. 3) said of a feast, to make^ 
— to Jiold^ celebrate^ Lu. v. 29, E7ron]or£ 

^OXW P-^y- xiv. 12, OTaU TTOltJS apLCTTOV. 

ver. 16. Hence of a festival, to hold, keep, 
celebrate^ Matt. xxvi. 18, Trpos eg ttolm 
TO irda-x^a. Acts xviii. 21; so in the sense 
institvte, Heb. xi. 28. — iii. to mahe exist, 
cause to he, prop, spoken of generative 
power, to heget, bring forth, bear : 1) of 
trees and plants, to germinate, bring forth 
fruit, yield, Kapirov or Kapirov^ ttolelv. 
Matt. iii. 10. vii. 17; metaph. iii. 8. xxi. 
43 ; so of branches, to shoot forth, Mk. iv. 
32. Once of a fountain, Ja. iii. 12, ovte 
dXvKOv yXvKV iroLjjaaL vdcop. 2) fig. of 
persons, to mahe for oneself, get, acquire, 
gain, Lu. xii, 33, TroLncraTE kavTol^ /3a- 
XdvTia. xvi. 9, (piXov^. John iv. ], jua- 
dt]Td'S. So of profit, advantage, = to gain, 
gener. 1 Cor. xv. 29, nri 'iroL'na-ovaLv ; in a 
pecuniary sense, like Engl, to make. Matt, 
xxv. 16, ETTOLfja-Ev oXXa irivTE TaXavra, 
Lu. xix. 18. — IV. causat. to make do or be 
any thing, to cause to do or be : 1 ) foil, 
by inf. Mk. i. 17. vii. 37, tov9 K(jo(pov<s 
'TTOLEL dtcovELV. vili. 25. Lu. V. 34. John vi. 
10, al. ; inf. with tou, Acts iii. 12. 2) foil, 
by Iva with subjunct. to make or cause 
that, &c. John xi. 37. Col. iv. 16. Rev. 
xiii. 15. — V. causat. to make be or become 
any thing, to cause to be or become so or so, 
foil, by double accus. of object, and a pre- 
dicate of that object, either subst. adj. or 
adv. strictly with EivaL implied : 1) with 
subst. as predicate; of things. Matt. xxi. 
13, ayVov (oT/coi/) k'Tzoi-ncraTE (Tirr]Xaiov 
XycTTcov. John iv. 46, ottoi; Eiroirjcre to 
iiScop olvov. 1 Cor. vi. 15. Heb. i. 7. Of 
perso7is, Matt. iv. 19, tto/tjco) u/xas dXist? 
dvQp. so to constitute, appoint, John vi. 15, 
%va TTOLvarcoo-LV avTov jiacrLXia. Acts ii. 
36. Rev. i. 6 ; with 'Lva instead of acc. 
Mk. iii. 14, kiroi^crE ScooeKa, 'tva uxtl /ulet 
avTov : in the sense of to declare, give out 
as any one, John viii. 53, tlvu aeavrov 



ttoleT^ ; X. 33, TTOLEL^ (TEavTov 0£Of/. xix. 

7, 12. 2) with adj. as predicate : of per- 
sons, Matt. XX. 12, taovs vjuuv avToijs 
ETToirjaa^, xxviii. 14. John xvi. 2. Rev. 
xii. 15. Of things, Eph. ii. 14, 6 Trotvcra^ 
TO. djULCpoTEpa Eu : once to makeby suppo- 
sition, equiv. to suppose, judge, assume^ 
Matt. xii. 33, rj Trouja-aTE to diudpou Ka- 
Xov. In this construction also ttglelu with 
acc. of adj. often forms a periphrasis for 
the cogn. verb, as ttolelv ^rjXov, to make 
manifest, betray — Si^Xovv, Matt. iii. 3. v. 
36. xii. 16. xxvi. 73. John v. 11. Acts vii. 
19. 2 Pet. i. 10. 3) with adv, as predi- 
cate, ttoleIv TLvd E^co, to make one be or 
go out, to cause one to go out, to send out, 
Actsv. 34, ekeXevo-ev £^co ^pa^v tl tous 
dTro<TT6Xov^ TTOirja-aL. — II. TO DO, express- 
ing an action as continued, or not yet com- 
pleted; what one does repeatedly, con- 
tinuedly, habitually ; like 'irpdcraru) : i. 
foil, by accus. of thing, and without refer- 
ence to a person as the remote object : 1) 
with accus. of pron. to do, gener. Matt. v. 
47, TL TTEpLCTCTov ttoleXte ; Mk. xi. 3. xiv. 

8. Lu. XX. 2. Acts i, 1. Gal. ii. 10. Phil, 
ii. 14. 1 Tim. v. 21. 2) with accus. of a 
subst, rarely implied, and spoken of par- 
ticular deeds, acts, works, done repeatedly 
or continnedly, to do, = to perform, exe- 
cute, ttoleTv Ta Epya tou ' A^p. John viii. 
39. Ta irpcoTa Epya, Rev. ii. 5. Ta Epya 
Tov G. Johnx. 37. 'ipyov cuayyeXtcrTou, 
2 Tim. iv. 5. eXeo<s, Ja. ii. 13. EXeiumoo-v- 
vr]v. Matt. vi. 2. dLKaLoavvt^v, ver. 1 : 
so of mighty deeds, wonders, miracles, 
ouvdjULEL^, vii. 22. Epya, John v. 36. Kpd- 
Tos, Lu. i. 51. cn]fXE'La, John ii. 11. te- 
paTa Koi (Tr]fiEla, Acts vi. 8. Also of the 
will, precept, requirement of any one, to 
do, perform, fulfil. Matt. xxi. 31, Tts ek 
Twu ova ETTOLr^arE to 6EXi)p.a tov TraT^oos; 
Mk. vi. 20. John ii. 5. Eph. ii. 3 : so of 
the precepts of God or of Christ, Matt. v. 
19. vii. 21, 6 'TTOLcov TO ^iXf)itia tov 
TlaTpo^ /xou. ver. 24. Lu. vi. 46. John vii. 
19, TOU vofxov. Acts xiii. 22; of that which 
one asks, entreats, promises, John xiv. 13, 
o TL dv aLTna^TE, TOVTO 'Koiricrw. Rom. 
iv. 21. Eph. iii. 20 : of a purpose, plan, 
decree. Acts iv. 28. Rom. ix. 28, Xoyov 
arvuTET/uLnfXEvov TTOLvarEL Ki/pto9, ' the 
Lord will execute his word decreed.' 
2 Cor. viii. 10, 11. 3) said of a course of 
action or conduct, to do, i. e. exercise, prac- 
tise ; KpLOTLV itoleZv, ' to do judgment, act 
as judge,' equiv. to kolvelv, John v. 27. 
Ti]v E^ovaiav tluo^ iroLElv, ' to exercise 
the power' of any one. Rev. xiii. 12. Spec, 
of right, duty, virtue, Rom. ii. 14, Ta tov 
vofxov TT. X. 5. Ti]v dXr\dELav, John iii. 21. 
SLKULOorvvriv, 1 John ii. 29. xpV^^'TO'rrjTa, 
Rom. iii. 12 : so John v. 29, tu dyadd, 
viii. 29, Ta dpECTd. Ja. iv. 17, KaXdv 
ttoleIv. 4) of evil deeds or conduct, to i 



noi 



355 



noi 



c?o, = to commit^ d/uLcipTmuia, 1 Cor. vi. 18. 
dfxapTLav^ John viii. 34. dvofxlav^ Matt, 
xiii. 41. a^icc TrXijycoi/, Lu. xii. 48. 
Xvyfxa. Rev. xxi. '21 . tcc fxij Kadi')KovTa^ 
Rom. i. 28. ovdkv ivavTiou tlvl^ Acts 
xxviii. 17. KaKov^ Matt, xxvii. 23. KaKa, 
Rom. in. 8. 7rovi]pd, Ln. iii. 19. cpovov^ 
Mk. XV. 7. \l/svSo^, Rev. xxii. 15 ; gener. 
John vii. 51. — ii. intrans. to do, i. e. ad : 
1) absol. to he active, to woi'k. Matt. xx. 
12, ovTOL 01 icryaToi fxiav lopaif Ittoii]- 
<rav. Rev. xiii. 5. 2) ^vith adv. of man- 
ner, to do so and so, to act in any manner ; 
Ka\w<3, Matt. xii. 12. Acts x. 33. Phil, 
iv. 14. With KpELar(Tov, 1 Cor. vii. 38. 
ovTU), xvi, 1. (ppovLfiio^, Lu. xvi. 8, cos. 
Matt. i. 24 : so KaTo. tl ttolelv, xxiii. 3. 
Trpo's Tt, Lu. xii. 47. — iii. like Engl, to 
do, is often used in the latter member of 
a sentence instead of repeating the verb 
of the preceding member ; e. gr. foil, by 
acc. of thing. Matt. v. 46. Lu. vi. 10. Rom. 
xii. 20, kdv SLxj/d, ttotlX^e avTov' tovto 
ydp iroLcov, k,tX. al. — iv. used in refer- 
ence to a person, to do to or in respect to 
any one, i. e. for or against him, the per- 
son being the remoter object : 1) foil, by 
acc. of person and thing, Matt, xxvii. 22, 
Tt TTOitjcraj 'Ir]crovu ; Mk. xv. 12. 2) foil, 
by dat. of person, to or for any one, in his 
behalf, wdth acc. of thing, Matt. xx. 32. 
Mk. V. 19, bcra aoL 6 ^vpio^ TreTrotr^/cs. 
Lu. i. 49. Also against any one, with acc. 
of thing, Acts ix. 13, bcra kuku iTrolrjcrE 
ToTs dyLoL?. John xv. 21. Or gener. in 
respect to any one, in his case, with accus. 
of thing, Matt. vii. 12. xxi. 40. 3) foil, 
by iv of pers. to do in respect to any one, 
in his case, with acc. of thing, Matt. xvii. 
12, iTToh^arav iv auTw ocra ridi\i]crav. 
Lu. xxiii. 31. 4) foil, by fikrd with gen. 
of pers. to do ivith any one, by Hebr. Lu. 
i. 72. Acts xiv. 27. — v. foil, by acc. of 
time, prop, intrans. to do or act for a cer- 
tain time, — to spend, pass. Acts xv. 33, 
TTOLTicravTE'i y^povov. xviii. 23. xx. 3. 
2 Cor. xi. 25. Ja. iv. 13. 

TLoLr]iJLa, aros, to, (-TTotEw,) a tiling 
made, tvork, Ezra ix. 13. Neh. vi. 14. 
Rom. i. 20, Tots iroLrip-adL, said of the 
universe, as God's workmanship. So Ps. 
cxliii. 5, kv iroiYipiacrL tcou x^ipwv crov 
IfMsXeTcov. Eccl. iii. 11. Fig. Eph. ii. 10, 
of human beings, as the ivo7^k of God. 

rEotrjo-is, £609, V, {'TTOiiu),) prop, a 
making or producing of any thing, Thuc. 
iii. 2. In N. T. cc doing, i. e. keeping of a 
law, Ja. i. 25, kv i-y Trotrjcrgt. So Ecclus. 

Xix. 20, TT. VOflOV. ' 

not7]Ti7§, ou, 6, {iroiiu},) 1) a maker 
of any thing, inventor, as tt. iuli]X^^VI^<^- 
TODv, or, as applied to ivords, namely, com- 
positions either in prose or verse, though 
espec. the latter. So of a poet, as the maker 



of a poem. Acts xvii. 28. 2) a doer, 
keeper of a law or precept, Rom. ii. 13, oi 
7roi?;Tat tov vo/iiou, (with which comp. 

1 Mace, ii. 67, toi/§ Troi^jras tov p6/jlov.) 
Ja. i. 22, 25, tt. epyov, a doer of the 
works enjoined in the law. 

UoLKiXo^, 17, Oi/, adj. prop, variegated, 
parti- coloured, as oft. in Sept. and Class. ; 
in N. T. various, divers, as TroLKLXat^ 
voaoL's, Matt. iv. 24. kirSvfxiaL^ ttolk. 

2 Tim. iii. 6. Tit. iii. 3. ttolk. 6vvdfXicrL, 
Heb. ii. 4. ttolk. ydpLTo^ Qeov, 1 Pet. 
iv. 10, i. e. of his manifold grace, various 
gifts. So 2 Mace. xv. 21. Jos. Bell. iii. 
8. 8, and oft. in later Class, as Hdian., 
Plut., Athen,, and -^lian. 

Xloiyaa ti/o), f. avoj, [TroLjULi^v,] to feed 
a feck or herd, to pastiire, tend, trans. 1 ) 
prop. Lu. xvii. 7, ^ov\ov iywv iroLfxai- 
vovra, 1 Cor. ix. 7. Sept. and Class. 2) 
fig. to feed, = to clierish, provide for, as 
kings should for their people. Matt. ii. 6, 
ocTTts 'KoifxavEl TOV Xaov p.ov. Rev. vii. 
17 ; also of the spiritual care of pastors 
and teachers of the Church, John xxi. 16. 
Acts XX. 28, iroLfxaLVELV rr/y kKKX7}ar'iav, 
1 Pet. V. 2. Sept. and Class. ; hence by 
impl. to ride, govern, with severity, only 
in the phrase TroLfxavil ahrov^ kv pdfidtp 
(TLdi]pa, Rev. ii. 27, al. and Sept. In a 
bad sense, with euvtov, to feed or cherish 
one''s self, to take care of one's self, scil. at 
the expense of others, Jude 12, kavTov^ 
7roifxaLvovTE9, said with allusion to Ez. 
xxxiv. 2, 8, 10, w^here the unfaithful shep- 
herds of Israel are described as feeding 
themselves, {k(36(rKricrav lavTov^,) while 
they neglected their flocks. 

TLoLixi] V, ivo<5, 6, a herdsman, shepherd, 
one who tends herds or flocks, 1) prop. 
Matt. ix. 36, 7rp6(3aTa /xr/ 'iypvTa iroi- 
fxiva. XXV. 32, al. Sept. and Class. 2) fig, 
one icho has the care or superintendence 
of any thing ; and so the term was espec. 
applied to kings, as iroifxavE^ Xacov, ' nur- 
sing fathers of their people.' In N. T. it 
is employed of Jesus, as the Great Shep- 
herd, who watches over and provides for 
the welfare of the Church, his flock, Matt, 
xxvi. 31, 'TraTa^co tov TroLfxiva, John x. 
2, 11, 12, 14, 16. 1 Pet. ii. 25. Heb. xiii. 
20, where see my note. So in Sept. it is 
used of the Messiah, Ezek. xxxiv. 23. 
xxxvii. 24 ; also of a j)o.stor, the spiritual 
guide of a particular Church, Eph. iv. 11. 
Sept. Jer. ii. 8. iii. 15. Ezek. xxxiv. 2, 5. 

TioLfXVI], t]<5, f], {TTOL/ULijV,) tt fock, 

espec. of sheep, Matt. xxvi. 31. Fig. the 
fock of Christ, his disciples, Church, John 
X. 16. Comp. no/|aytoi/. Act. Thom. § 25. 

TloipiVLOv, ov, TO, (sync, for Troifxi- 
vLov, from ircfxi^v,) a fock. In N. T, 
only fig. the fock of Christ, his disciples, 



no I 



356 



n o A 



Church, Lu. xii. 32. Acts xx. 28. 1 Pet. 
V. 2, 3. Sept. Jer. xiii. 17. Zech. x. 3, to 
TT. Tov Kuptou. 

notos, a, 01/, correl. pron. interrog. 
corresponding to olos, toIos, prop, ivhat ? 
of what kind or sort? Lat. qualis : I. 
prop. Mk. iv. 30, kv iroLa 7rapal3o\rj 
irapa^aXujfXi.v avTriv ; Lu. \\. 32. John 
xii. 33. Acts vii. 49. Rom. iii. 27. Ja. iv. 
14, iroia 7] Jwr; v/mcov ; So Matt. xxi. 23. 

Acts iv. 7, €1/ TTOLa dvvdjUL&L V kv TTOLCO 

ovo/jLUTL ; — II. what one ? sc. out of a num- 
ber, equiv. to what ? which ? Matt. xix. 18. 
xxii. 36, "TTota kvToXt] /xey. kv tm vo/jlco ; 
xxiv. 42, -TTota wpa. ver. 43. John x. 32. 
Eev. iii. 3. Sept. and Class. 

IloXgjusaj, fut. 770-60, (ttoXe/uos,) to 
war, make war, fighi-, foil, by ^zto. with 
gen. Rev. xii. 7. ii. 16, TTo\zixn<ru3 ^z-t 
avTuiv. xiii. 4. The usual construction 
is with the dat. Absol. Rev. xii. 7 ; joined 
with KpLvw, xix. 11, kv dLKaLocrvvr} KpivEL 
Kai iroXEfXEL, will avenge, punish, Hyper- 
bol. — to contend, quarrel, Ja. iv. 2. Sept. 
Ps. Ivi. 2. Diod. Sic. xiii. 84. 

IToXg/Aos, ov, 6, war: 1) prop, battle, 
1 Cor. xiv. 8, Tts irapaa-Kzvdcre.TaL el's 
TToX. ; Heb. xi. 34, lo-xf pot kv iroX. Rev. 
ix. 7. So 'iroLrja-aL iroX, fXETo. tlvo'S, ' to 
make war with' any one, equiv. to ttoXe- 
fjLEiv, xi. 7. Sept. and Class. Hyperbol. 
equiv. to contest, strife, Ja. iv. 1. Class. 
2) gener. war. Matt. xxiv. 6, clkouelv 
rfroXkiuLOV'S Kai a/cods iroXifjutiV. Lu. xiv. 
31. Sept. and Class. 

IloXts, €W9, 77, (obsol. 7ro\o§, whence 
iroXv^,) a city, prop, a walled town : I. 
prop, and gener. Matt. ii. 23, kut^k^ctev 
Eh TToXiv. Mk. vi. 56. Lu. viii. 1, al. 
Sffipe. In various constructions : 1) with 
art. V ttoXl^, ' the city,' i. e. before men- 
tioned. Matt. xxi. 17. Mk.xi. 19 ; or par 
excellence, ' the city,' i. e. the chief city, 
metropolis. Matt. viii. 33. xxvi. 18. 2) with 
adj. or other adjunct, Matt. x. 15, T77 
ttoXel kKEivrj. Acts xix. 29, 77 tt. 0X1]. 
xxvi. 11. Rev. xvi. 19. So 77 idia ttoXl^, 
' one's own city,' i. e. in which one dwells, 
Matt. ix. 1 ; 'or the chief city of one's 
family, Lu. ii. 3. 77 dyia ttoXl^, ' the holy 
city,' Matt, iv, 5, called 77 ttoXl^ v rjya- 
nry'ifjiEvy], Rev. xx. 9. 3) foil, by^ gen. of 
pers. the city of any one, i. e. one's native 
city, TTo'Xts Aauto, Lu. ii. 4 ; or in which 
one dwells, iv. 29. John i. 45 ; tt. tou 
fXEy, (SaarLXico?, i. e. where God dwells. 
Matt. V. 35. 4) with the prop, name of 
the city subjoined ; in apposition. Acts xi. 
5, kv ttoXel 'Io'ttttt?. xxvii. 8 ; or in the 
gen. 2 Pet. ii. 6, ttoXei^ ^odo/jLcov Kai T. 
5) foil, by gen. of region or province, Lu. 
i. 26, EL'S itoXlv T77S TaX. John iv. 5. 
Lu. i. 39, fls itoXlv 'lovda.—ll. meton. 



for the inhabitants of a city, Matt. viii. 34, 
irdaa 77 TroXts k^rjXdEv. Mk. i. 33. Acts 
xiii. 44, al. and Class. — III. symbol, of 
the celestial or spiritual ' Jerusalem, the 
seat of the Messiah's kingdom, described 
as descending out of heaven, Rev, iii. 12. 
Heb. xi. 10, al. 

UoXLTapxv^-) ov, 6, (ttoXi?, apxtfi-,) 
a city-ruler, prefect, magistrate, Acts xvii. 
6, 8. Class. 7roXtTap)(os. 

IIoA.iT€ta, a?, 77, {ttoXltevco,) prop. 
' the being a free citizen,' the relation of a 
free citizen to the state: hence, 1) citi- 
zenship, the right of citizenship, freedom of 
a city. Acts xxii. 28. Joseph, and Class. 
2) the state itself, a community, common- 
wealth, Eph, ii. 12, where see my note. 
2 Mace. iv. 11. Xen. Mem. ii. 1, 13. Pol. 
vi. 14, 4. 

TIoXlt Ev fia, aros, to, {ttoXltevu},) 
prop, the administration of the state. In 
N. T. the state itself, i. e. community, 
commonwealth ; fig. of Christians in refe- 
rence to their spiritual community, Phil, 
iii. 20. See my note. 

TLoXiTEVw, fut. Evcrui, (ttoXitt]?,) to 
live as a free citizen : oftener, depon. pass. 
TToXLTEvofiaL, to bc a citizen of a state, to 
live as a good citizen, to conduct one's self 
according to the laws and customs of a 
state. Hence in N. T. gener. to live, to 
order one's life and conduct, according to a 
certain rule ; with adv. Phil. i. 27, d^tws 
Tou Evayy, ttoXltevecQe : with dat. Acts 
xxiii. 1, iTETroXLTEVfxaL TO) ©. i. e. to or 
for God, according to his will. So 2 Mace, 
vi. \, fxr] IT, nrol^ tou 9. vo/jlol^. Jos. Vit. 
2, TT. Tw irarpLM vofxco, and oft. in Jos. 
and Philo. 

TloXl'Tr]^, ov, 6, (TTO/Vis,) a citizen, an 
inhabitant of a city, Acts xxi. 39, ovk 
da-n/JLOv TToA-fccos 7ro\tT775. Lu. XV. 15 ; 
with gen. avTov, equiv. to fellow-citizen, 
xix. 14, and oft. in Class. 

JIoXXdKL^, adv. ( 7ro\i»s, ) many times, 
often. Matt. xvii. 15, oft. and Class. 

HoXXairXacriuiV, ovos, 6, v, adj. 
(ttoXus,) manifold, many times more, Lu. 
xviii. 30. Pol. XXXV. 4, 4. 

UoXvXoyia, a.<5, 77, (TroXuXoyo?, fr. 
'TToXvs, Xiyu},) much speaking, loqiLOxMy, 
Matt. vi. 7. Sept. and Class. 

HoXu/AEpws, adv. ('TToXvfiEpr]^, fr. 
TToXi/s, juLEpo^,) in many parts, inmxmifold 
ivays, Heb. i. 1. See my note. 

HoXuTTOi'/ctXo?, ou, 6, 77, adj. (ttoXvs?, 
TToi/ctXos,) prop. mu£h variegated ; in N.T, 
fig. veyn/ various, manifold, multifarious, 
Eph. iii. 10, TT. arocpLa tov Qeov. 

HoXuS, TToXXt], TToXu, gCU. IToXXoV, 

r]<3, ov : compar. ttXelcov, superl. 'TrXsIo'- 
T05, see in their order ; many, much, prop. 



no A 



357 



HON 



of number, quantity, or amount : I. sing. 
prop, many^ much ; and ^vith nouns im- 
plying number or multitude, great^ large : 
1) without art. with subst. John vi, 10, 
XopTos 7ro\u9. Acts XV. 32, dia \6yov 
TToXXov. xvi. 16, Ipyaaiav ttoWiiv. xxii. 
28, TToXXou KBcf)a\aiov. Matt. xiii. 5, 
yfji/ TToXXnu. So with a noun of multi- 
tude. Acts xi. 21, TToXv^ api6/x6?, ' a 
great number.' xviii. 10, Xao? ttoXv^. 
Mk. V. 24, 6xXo£ TToXus. Acts xiv. 1, 
TToXv irXriSog : fig. Matt. ix. 37, 6 ^spLcr/utd^ 
iroXvg. Absol. -ttoXu, much^ Lu. xii. 48. 
xvi. 10. Acts xxvi. 29. 2) with art. and 
subst. Heb. v. 11, tte^l ov ttoXv^ vfJuv 6 
\070s. Mk. xii. 37, o TToXus oxXo^^ ' the 
multitude.'* Absol. to ttoXv, 2 Cor. 
viii. 15, 6 TO TToXv, scil. crvXXi^a^. — il. 
PLUR. TToXXol^ ai, d, many ; and with 
nouns of multitude, gi^eat^ large : 1) with- 
out art. with subst. Matt. viii. 16, daLfxo- 
viX^oixivov^ TToXXov?. Mk. ii. 15, ttoXXol 
T&XwvuL. Lu. xii. 7, 19, iroXXa ayaQd. 
John iii. 23, v^aTa iroXXd. So with a 
noun of multitude. Matt. iv. 25, oyXoi 
iroXXoL : with another adj. sTEpoL '^oXXoi, 
Matt. XV. 30; fem. Lu. viii. 3. Absol. 
TToWot, many, Matt. vii. 13, 22. Lu. iv. 
41, diro TToXXwi/. John viii. 30. So by 
impl. many, equiv. to a multitude, all. 
Matt. XX. 28, XvTpov uvtI iroXXcov. Mk. 
xiv. 24. Heb. ix. 28. Neut. iroXXd, many 
things, much. Matt. xiii. 3. Mk. v, 26. 
Lu. X. 41. 2 Cor. viii. 22. Foil, by gen. 
partit. Matt. iii. 7, ttoXXov^ todv ^>apt- 
cra'iujv. Lu. i. 16. John vi. 66 ; by ek 
with gen. partit. ver. 60, ttoXXoX ek tcov 
fiadriTcov. X. 20. 2) with art. as referring 
to something well known ; with subst. Lu. 
vii. 37, 47. Rev. xvii. L Acts xxvi. 24, 
rd TToWd ypdfxfxaTa, ' the much learn- 
ing' which thou hast. Absol. ol iroXXol, 
' the many,' i. e. those before spoken of, 
including the idea of all, Rom. v. 15, 19, 
i. e. the many of whom the apostle had 
been treating as having all suffered through 
Adam ; see more in my note. So of tJbe 
many, i. e. all who receive Christ, ver. 15. 
xii. 5. 1 Cor. x. 33. Also the many, 
equiv. to the most, the greater number, but 
implying exceptions, Matt. xxiv. 12, 77 
dydirr] toov 'ttoXXcov. 2 Cor. ii. 17, cos 01 
'TToXXoi, ' as the most do,' i. e. the Juda- 
izing teachers. — IIL fig. and intens. of 
AMOUNT or DEGREE, much, great, vehe- 
ment. Matt. ii. 18, 6dvpp.6? ttoXus. v. 12. 
Lu, X. 40, itoXXtju diaKOviav, Matt. xxiv. 
30. John vii. 12. Acts xxi. 40, oft. Sept. 
and Class. — IV. of time, much, long, pi. 
many. Matt. xxv. 19, /xerd xpovov iroXvv. 
Mk. vi. 35. Lu. viii. 29. xii. 19, ett] 
•TroXXd, ' many years ;' ettI iroXv, ' for a 
long time,' Acts xxviii. 6 ; (xet' ov ttoXv, 
' not long after,' xxvii. 14; /uet' ov ttoX- 
Xds J7/U. Lu. XV. 13; ov fXETa iroXXd^ rjfx. 



Acts i. 5, and Class. — V, neut. ToXif, 
TToXXd, adverbially : 1) sing. iroXv,much, 
grtatly, Mk. xii. 27. Lu. vii. 47. Rom. 
iii. 2, and Class. With compar. 2 Cor. viii. 
22, TToXv ffTTovBaioTepov. Dat. ttoXXw, 
id., with compar. John iv. 41. ttoXXw 
ludXXov, Matt. vi. 30. 2) pi. TroXXd with- 
out art. many times, often. Matt. ix. 14, 
vriCTTEvofXEv TToXXd. Ja. iii. 2 ; alsowrf, 
greatly, Mark i. 45. iii. 12. v. 10, irap- 
ekoXel avTOv 'TToXXd. Rev, v. 4, and 
Class, With art. -rd TroXXd, these many 
times, for the most part, greatly, Rom. xv. 
22. 

IToXucTrXay^^i/os, ov, 6, 77, adj. 
(ttoXu?, cnrXdyxi^ov), very compassionate, 
of great mercy, J a. v. 11. 

TLoXvT eXii^, E09 ov^, 6, 77, adj. (tto- 
Xu§, TtXos,) very costly, sumptuous ; 
vdpSo9, Mk. xiv. 3. IfxaTLa-jULO^, 1 Tim. 

ii. 9. Sept. and Class. ; fig. very precious, 
excellent, 1 Pet. iii. 4. Diod. Sic. xiv. 30. 

IIoXoTljUOs, OV, 6, 77, adj. (TroXus, 
Tifxt],) of great value or 'price, very costly, 
very precious ; vdpSo^, John xii. 3, yuap- 
yapLTY}^, Matt. xiii. 46. 

IIoXvTpoTrws, adv. (TroXuTpoTros, 
fr. TToXv^, TpoTTo?,) iu many ways, in 
various manners, Heb. i. 1. 

Ho^a, aTos, TO, {irivui,) drink, 1 Cor. 
X. 4. Heb. ix. 10. Sept. and Class. 

TLovTipia, a§, 77, (Troi/rjpo?,) badness, 
prop, in a physical sense ; in N. T. only in 
a m oral sense, evil disposition, ivichedness, 
malice. Matt. xxii. 18, yvov^ 6 'Irjar. ti)v 
TTov. ah. Lu. xi. 39. Eph, vi. 12, Td 
TTVEVfjiaTLKd T^s TTovijpias, equiv. to Td 
TTovrjpd. PI. at TTov^piai, tvicked counsels, 
Mk. vii. 22 : wiclced deeds, iniquities, Acts 

iii. 26. 

noi/Tjpos, d, ov, adj. {ttoveco,) prop. 
' causing labour, soitow, pain,' Theogn. 
274, or ' having it,' wretched, miserable : 
hence gener. evil, both physi-cally [faulty 
as opposed to xP^^^^^i) morally, 
tvicJced : it is used both active and passive : 
I. ACT. evil, i. e. ' causing evil to others,' 
evil-disposed, malevolent, wicked: 1) of 
persons, Matt. v. 45, g-Trt ttoi/. kuI dya- 

60US. vii. 11, si i;/X£t5 TTOV. OVTE'S. ActS 

xvii. 5, dvSpa9 irovvpov?, where, how- 
ever, it may mean, ' bad, worthless, mean,' 
as Matt. xxv. 26. So TrvivfxaTa ttov, 
' e\-il spirits,' malignant demons, Lu. vii. 
21. xi. 26, 'TTVEVfxaTa TrovrjpoTEpa. Sept. 
1 Sam. xvi. 14, al. : hence 6 -Troyrjpds, 
' the Evil One,' Satan, Matt. xiii. 19, 38, 
oft. 2) of things, 600aX/xds Trovijpo?, 
' an evil eye,' envy, Matt. xx. 15. So Sia- 
XoyicrfxoL irov. xv. 19, 1 Tim. vi. 4. Lu. 
vi, 45, EK Tov TTov. Oijcaupou T^s Kap- 
^ias, equiv. to Otja'avpov t^s Troi/T^pias. 
Hdian. i. 8, 5. So prop, as causing pain 



noN 



358 



nop 



or damage, hurtful^ e. g. words, injurious^ 
calumnious^ irdv "ov. prj/uLa^ Matt. v. 11. 
Acts xxviii. 21. 3 John 10. Sept. Gen. 
xxxvii. 1, al. : also painful, grievous, 
Rev. xvi. 2, sX/cos kukov kuI ttov. Neut. 
TO TToviipdi;, evil, i. e. ivickedness, Matt. v. 
37, TO irspiao'di/ tovtwv Ik tov ttoz/. 
koTTLV. ver. 39, al. ; or evil, gener. Matt, 
vi. 13, puaaL rifxci's airo tov ttov. See my 
note. John x\ii. 15.2 Thess. iii. 3, where 
see my notes. — II. pass, evil, i. e. evil in 
nature or quality, had, ill, vicious : 1 ) of 
persons, ivicJced, corrupt, an evil-doer, 1 

Cor. V. 13, £^ap£tT£ TOV TTOV. £^ VjULMV. 

2 Tim. iii. 13, and Class. So yei/ta ttov. 
Matt. xii. 39. aicov ttov. Gal. i. 4 ; of a 
servant, remiss, slotliful, Matt. xxv. 26 ; 
of things, wicked, corrupt, flagitious, John 
iii. 19, TToviipa avTwv to. 'ipya. vii. 7. 
Col. i. 21. 2 Tim. iv. 18, al. Sept. and 
Class, as Xen. Mem. ii. 6, 20, tcl •Trov^]pa 
ttolUv. padLOvpyi]/ixa ttov. Acts xviii. 14 
(see my note). 1 Th. v. 22, aird TravTo? 
el6ov9 TTOV. Heb. iii. 12; also of tdnes, 
prop, as full of soitow and affliction, evil, 
sorrowfid, calamitous, rjniipaL ttov. Eph. 
v. 16. Neut. TO 7rov7]p6v, evil, ivickedness, 
guilt, Lu. vi. 45. 1 John v. 19 ; pi. to. 
'TTov'npa, evil things, wicked deeds, Matt, 
ix. 4. xii. 35. Mk. vii. 23. 2) in a phy- 
§iccd sense, or rather of external quality 
imd condition, evil, had, KapTrol ttov. 
Matt. vii. 17 ; 6<^0a\/x6s irov. i. e. ill, 
diseased, vi. 23. xxii. 10, iroviipov^ te 
Koi ayaQov^, ' both bad and good,' a peri- 
phrasis for all ; Lu. vi. 22, IkPolXcoo-l to 
ovofxa v/uLcov tos ttoi/. 

ILovos, ov, 6, (ttez/o),) labour^ toil, tra- 
Dail: hence pain, anguish, Rev. xvi. 10, 
kfxa(T(TU}VTO T«5 yXwccTas avTcov Kk tov 
nrovov. ver. 11. xxi. 4. Sept. and Class. 

Tloptia, a?, ri, {Trop^vto^ prop, a 
going ; also a journey, Lu. xiii. 22, tto- 
psiav TroLovfJLEVo's, ' making his way,' i. e. 
journeying. From the Heb. in pi. goings, 
ways, pursuits, occupations of life, Ja. i. 
11, where see my note. 

TLopEvw, f. zv(T(jo, (7ropo5,) to cazise to 
pass over by land or water, to convey, 
transport; oftener, and in N. T. depon. 
mid. rrropEvofxai, f. Evcrofxat, aor. 1. pass, 
as mid. kTroptvdriv, prop, to convey one's 
self, hetake one's self — to Pxiss from one 
place to another, intrans. ; hence, 1) prop. 
to pass or go, implying motion from the 
place where one is, and hence often = to 
pass ON, go away, depaH ; absol. Matt, 
ii. 9, ol a.Kov(ravT££ ETropEvdrjcrav. Mk. 
xvi, 10. Acts V. 20. viii. 39, kTropevETo 
Tijv oddv avTov. Usually with adjunct of 
place whence or tvhither ; e. g. a prep, and 
its case, cltto. Matt. xxiv. 1. Acts v. 41 ; 
5ta, Matt. xii. 1 ; £t§ of place, ii. 20. Lu. 
iv. 42 ; of state or condition, xxii. 33, £ts 



^dvaTov. vii. 50, tls Elpf]vi]u s.fi'Trpoar- 
6ev, John x. 4; kv of state or manner, 
Acts xvi. 36 ; ettl with acc. of place, 
Matt. xxii. 9. Acts viii. 26 ; of person, xxv. 
12; of thing sought, object, ettI to diro' 
XcoXd^, Lu. XV. 4 ; £to§ of place, Acts 
xxiii. 23 ; /caTa with acc. of place towards 
which, viii. 26 ; of way along which, ver. 
36 ; oiricrui of person, by Hebr. to go 
afier any one, to follow, Lu. xxi. 8 ; irpo's 
with acc. of pers. Matt. x. 6. Lu. xi. 5 ; 
(jvv of pers. vii. 6. So with adverbs, 
ekeI^ev, Matt. xix. 15 ; kvTEv^Ev, Lu. 
xiii. 31 ; ov for oTroi, xxiv. 28; ttov, John 
vii. 35. By a sort of pleonasm, TropEvo/uLaL 
is often prefixed, espec. in the part., to 
verbs which already imply the idea of 
going, comp. EpxojULaL and dviorrrijuLi. 
Matt. ii. 8, 'TropEvdivTE^ aKpifSco^ k^e- 
TcicraTE. ix. 13. X. 7. Lu. X. 37. 1 Pet. 
iii. 19. Sept. oft. and Jos. Ant. vii. 13, 1. 

2) by impl. to depart this life, — to die, Lu. 

xxii. 22, Sept. and so o'L^oixai in Class. 

3) gener, to go, zvalk ; in N. T. only fig. 
and from the Hebr. to zvalk, — to live, 
conduct one's self, with adjunct of man- 
ner ; with dat. of rule or manner. Acts ix. 
31, irop. Tw cjyofBco tov K. xiv. 16. Jude 
11. 1 Mace. vi. 23; with prep, and its 
case, kv of rule or manner, Lu. i. 6. 2 Pet. 
ii. 10. Sept. in Ecclus. v. 2 ; KaTo. with 
acc. of rule or manner, KaTo. Td? ihias 
avTUiv ETTidvfxia?, 2 Pet. iii. 3. Jude 16, 
18. Sept. Num. xxiv. 1. Wisd. vi. 4; 
oTTLcrfjo of rule or manner, oiria-u) crap/cos, 
2 Pet. ii. 10 ; vtto with gen. under or 
among, Lu. viii. 14, vtto fiEpifivtov Trap, 
Absol. Lu. xiii. 33, o£t /ule orvjuiEpov irop. 
i. e. to ivalk, act, fulfil my duties. 

Uopdiaj, f. rjcu), {TTEpdo),) to lay 
waste, ravage, destroy, a stronger term 
than SiwKW. ttiv kKKXi-jaiav, Gal. i. 13; 

Tr]V TTLCTTLV, VCr. 23 ; TOUS klTLKaX. K.T.X. 

Acts ix. 21. 

Hoptcr/zos, ov, o, (TTO/Di^o),) prop. 
' the act of providing oneself with any 
thing,' or its effect ; acqitisition, gain ; 
also meton. a source or means of gain, 
1 Tim. vi. 5, 6. Apocr. and lat. Class. 

TlopvELa, a?, v, {TTOpvEvco,) prop. 
harlotry ; also fornication ; any commerce 
of the sexes out of marriage, as oft. in 
Class. In N. T. 1) prop, and gener. Matt. 
XV. 19, fjiOL^EiaL, iropvElat. Rom. i. 29, 
and oft. ; John viii. 41, i7|W£T§ ek iropv. ov 
yEyEvv. ' we are not born of fornication,' 
we are not spurious children, born-of a 
concubine, but are the true descendants of 
Abraham ; see, however, my note : spec, 
of whoredom with a married woman, 
adultery. Matt. v. 32. xix. 9. Ecclus. 

xxiii. 23 ; see my note ; of incest, or in- 
cestuous marriage, 1 Cor. v. 1. Probably 
also in reference to marriages within the 



nop 



359 



noT 



degi'ees prohibited by the Mosaic law, and 
gener. to all such intercourse as that law 
interdicted, Acts xv. 20. xxi.25. 2) from 
the Hebr. symbol, for idolatry^ the for- 
saking of the true God to worship idols, 
(comp. TTopyeuto, 2.) Kev. ii. 21, al. 

TLo pv Ev lo^ i. £u(T6o, (TTopi/os,) to Com- 
mit fomication^ (comp. Num. XXV. 1,9.) 
intrans. 1) prop. 1 Cor. vi. 18, 6 nrop- 
vEvcov, X. 8. Sept. and Class. 2) from the 
Heb., symbol., of idolatry^ the spiritual 
relation existing between God and his 
Church being shadowed forth under the 
emblem of the conjugal union ; which re- 
lation is broken by those who worship 
idols, Rev. ii. 14, 20. xvii. 2. Sept. & oft. 

rtojOi/Tj, 77, (TTOjOvos,) licirlot; 
prop. ' a woman who prostitutes herself 
for gain,' Matt. xxi. 31. Lu. xv. 30. 1 
Cor. vi. 15. Heb. xi. 31. James ii. 25. 
Sept. Though the sense in Class, is gene- 
rally a prostitute for gain, yet it may be 
doubted whether prostitution for gaiyi is 
necessarily meant in, any passage of the 
N. T. It is better to suppose it used in 
the general sense, frequent in our word 
whore^ ' one w-ho holds illegal intercourse 
with men.' From the Hebr., symbol., of 
Babylon, r\ iropvn fitydXr}, the great 
harlot,' as being the chief seat of idolatry. 
Rev. xvii. 1, al. 

Hopfos, ou, 6, (irspvaoi)^) prop, a 
male prostitute, catamite ; in N. T. a for- 
nicator, 1 Cor. V. 9 — 11. vi. 9, and oft. 

n 0(0/0 0), adv. (Trpocrco, Dor. iropfrto, 
fr. TT/oo,) prop, and lit. 'forwards, far for- 
wards ;' hence far, far off, Lu. xiv. 32, 
and Class.; foil, by cfwo, Mk. vii. 6, and 
Class. ; comparat. TroppiaTtpw, farther, 
Lu. xxiv. 28, and Class. 

TL6 ppwQ Ev, adv. {iroppu),) from far, 
from a distance, Heb. xi. 13. Sept. and 
Class. ; also far off, at a distance, Lu. xvii. 
12, di eorT7}(rav irop. So Sept. and Cla?". 
as Hdian. ii. 6, 20, €(n-wT£5 tt. 

Ylop<^\) pa, as, 17, Lat. purpura, i. e. 
tlie purple-muscle, a shell-fish, found on 
the coasts of the Mediterranean, which 
yields a reddish-purple dye, much prized 
by the ancients. In N. T. meton. purple, 
i. e. any thing dyed with purple, purple 
cloths, rohes of purple, worn by persons of 
rank and wealth, Lu. xvi. 19, hsdidifcr- 
KETO iropcjivpav Kal (Bvcrcrov. Rev. xvii. 4. 
xyiii. 12. Sept., Jos. Bell. vi. 8, 3. Hdian. 
vii. 1, 21. Spec, a purple robe, put upon 
Christ as a mock-emblem of rovalty, Mk. 
XV. 17. 

Hopi^upgos ows, ia a, eov ovu, adj. 
{TTopcpvpa,) purple, i. e. reddish purple, 
John xix. 2, ifxdTLov iropcp. and Class. 

TLo p (fiv poTT (oXl^, eojs, rj, [iropcpvpa, 
{ircoXtu),) a dealer in purple cloths or 



vests, for the dyeing of which the Lydians 
were famous; who seem to have partici- 
pated in, or rather succeeded to, the repu- 
tation of the Tyrians, Acts xvi. 14. 

YlocT cLKL^, adv. interrog. (ttoctos,) how 
many times ? how often ? Matt, xviii. 21. 

Ho 0-19, £<os, V, {tt'lvco,) prop. a drink- 
ing. In N. T. drink, John vi. 55. Rom. 
xiv. 17, /SpoxTis Kal TTOGL's. Sept. & Class. 

Ho'c-os, 1?, ov, interrog. pron. (correl 
to o(ros, TOCOS,) hoio great 1 quantus7 

1) of MAGNITUDE or QUANTITY, hoW 

great 1 hoiv much ? Lu. xvi. 5, 'ttScov 
6(P&l\el^ tw Kvp'icp jULov ', ver. 7. Intens. 
Matt. vi. 23, to o-koto^ nrocrov ; 2 Cor. 
vii. 11. Dat. TToVw, by how much, foil, by 
comparat. fxaWov, how much more, Matt, 
vii. 11 ; ^EipoDv, Heb. x. 29 ; diacpipsL, 
Matt. xii. 12. Wisd. xii. 21. Xen. Mem. 
ii. 5, 4. Of an amount of time, how much^ 
how long, iroaov xp^^^^i 21. 
Isocr. p. 424, tt. xpoVos, 2) of number, 
how many ? Matt. xv. 34, ttogov^ apTovQ 
£X£T£ ; xvi. 9, 10. Acts xxi. 20, TroaaL 
luvpLaSe^. Intens. Matt, xxvii. 13, Troa-a 
crov KaTafiapTvpovai ; ' how many and 
great things.' 

HoTa/ios, ov, 6, (-tto'to?,) a river, 
stream, Mk. i. 5, &v tm 'lopddvr} TroTa/uw. 
Acts xvi. 13. AUegor. John vii. 38. Rev. 
xxii. 1, 2. Said of a stream, as swollen, 
overflowins-, equiv. to a torrent, flood., 
Matt. vii. 25, al. .Hom. II. iv. 452. 

HoTtt/io^opr? Tos, ov, 6, rj, adj. 
(7roTa/x6§, (poplco,) borne away by a 
food. Rev. xii. 15. Hesych. in d'Trospa-e. 

UoTaTTo^, 7], 01/5 interrog. adj. what? 
i. e. of what kind, sort, or manner 1 Said 
of disposition, character, quality ; equiv. to 
TTOtos, Matt, viii. 27, TroTaTros egtiv 
oCtos ; what manner of man is this ? qua- 
lis, quantusque sit ! Mk. xiii. 1, tt. \lQol 
Kal TT. olKodojULai, Lu. 1. 29. vii. 39. 

Hots, interrog. adv. (correl. to tot£ 
or oT£,) ivhen ? at what time ? e. g. direct. 
Matt. xxiv. 3, ttote n-avTa EorTai ; xxv, 
37, 'TTOTE (TE EidojULEv TTEivwvTa ; ver. 38, 
39, 44. So €6t)5 '7roT£, zmtil when? how 
long? xvii. 17, to yEVEo. a-Trto-Tos, k'a)S 
TTOTE EcrojULaL juleO' vfjLwv ; indirect, Mk. 
xiii. 33, ovK oldaTE ttote 6 Kaipo? Etrriv. 
Lu. xii. 36. 

HoTE, indef. and enclitic, (correl. to 
to't£, oT£,) prop, when, whenever. 
I) at some time, one time or other, once, 
both of time past and future ; of the past, 
once, formerly, John ix. 13, t6v ttote 
TvfXou. Rom. vii. 9. xi. 30. 2 Pet. i. 21. 
Phil. iv. 10, oTi ijSi] TTOTE, ' now at 
length ;' of the future, once, one day, at 
last, Lu. xxii. 32. Rom. i. 10. 2) at any 
time, ever, Eph. v. 29, ou^gts ttote ttiv 
EavTov crdpKa EjuLia-nasv. 1 Th. ii. 5. 



noT 



360 



noY 



2 Pet. i. 10. Intens. in an interrog. like 
Engl, ever^ now^ expressing surprise, 1 
Cor. ix. 7, Ti§ (TTpaTsuETaL iotois 6x1/0)- 
VLOL's TTOTE ; Heb. i. 5, 13. Indirect, Gal. 
ii, 6, oTToioL TTOTE Tjcrav. 

IToTfpos, a, oiy, interrog. pron. tvJiich 
of two ? In N. T. only neut. iroTspou^ as 
adv. whether? utrum? indirect, and fol- 
lowed by or, John vii. 17, iroTspov £k 
Tov 0&0U icTtt/, ri kyu) /c.tA. 

TioTrj p LOV^ OU, TO, (TTOTjJptOS, fr. TTO- 

T»/|0,) a drinking -vessel^ cup: I. prop. 
Matt. X. 42, TToT-npLOv yj/vxpov fXOVOV. 
xxiii. 25, TO t^ayQsv tov TroT-npLov. ver. 
26. xxvi. 27, et sape al. Sept. and Class. 
— II. meton. cup^ for the contents of a 
cup, cup-full^ e. g. cup of wine, said of the 
wine drunk at the eucharist, 1 Cor. xi. 25, 

TOUTO TO TT. TJ KaiVt] diaOllKri. X. 16, TO 

TT. Tt]^ fuXoytas, i. e. ' the cup for or 
over which we give thanks to God.' So 
irivELv TT. 'to drink a cup,' ver. 21, tt. 

K.VpLOU TTLVELV KUL 'TT. OaLfXOVLiOV^ \. 0. 

consecrated to the Lord and to idols, xi. 

28, TTLUiLV EK TOV TT. CODip. John iv. 14. 

— III. metaph. from the Heb. lot^ portion^ 
under the emblem of a cup, which God 
presents to be drunk, either for good (as Ps. 
xvi. 5. xxiii. 5.) or evil, (as Ps. xi. 6. Ezek. 
xxiii. 31.) In N. T. cup of sorrow, i. e. the 
bitter lot which awaited the Saviour in his 
passion and death for the sins of the world, 
Matt. XX. 22. xxiii. 26. xxvi. 42, al. 
Said also of the cup of God's WTath, see 
3'i;/xos, Rev. xiv. 10. xvi. 19. 

IIoTi'^w, f. icrui, (7roT09,) to give to 
drink: 1) prop, with acc. of pers. Matt. 
XXV. 35, ETTOTLcraTi fxe. xxvii. 48 ; acc. 
impl. XXV. 37 ; fig. Rev. xiv. 8. Pass. fig. 
1 Cor. xii. 13. Sept. and Class. With 
double acc. of person and thing, Matt. x. 
42, OS kav iroTLcrrj sua tu>v fxLKpcou t. 
iroTTipiov xp^vxpou : fisf. 1 Cor. iii. 2. 
Sept. Ecclus. XV. 3. Ceb. Tab. 19. 2) of 
plants, to water, irrigate, Sept. and Class. ; 
only fig. of instruction, absol. 1 Cor. iii. 
6—8. 

IIoTo?, ov, 6, {ttlvo},) prop, a drink- 
ing, the act of drinking; oftener, and in 
N. T. a drinking together, a drinking-hout, 

1 Pet. iv. 3, kv KODfXOL^, -TTOTOtS, K.T.X. 

Sept. and Class. 

IIov, indef. enclitic particle, (correl. 
with TToO, ov,) someivhere, in some place 
or other, Heb. ii. 6, dis-jxapTvpaTo ttov 
Tt9. iv. 4, and Class. Joined with nu- 
merals, someivhere about, Tiearly, Rom. iv. 
19, £KaToyTa£Tt]§ ttou vTrapyjav, and 
Class. 

Hou, interrog. adv. (coiTel. to ttou 
indef. and ou,) where ? in what place I. 
prop, and gener. 1 ) in a direct question, 
foil, by indie. Matt. ii. 2, ttou Iqtiv b 



TE\ds.L^ ^a(T. ; Mark xiv. 14 : foil, by 
^iKsLu with subj. Matt. xxvi. 17, irot 
kToifxdcrujixiv k.t.X. Lu. xxii. 9. 
Sept. and Class. 2) indirect ; with indie. 
Matt. ii. 4, kTrwddvsTO Trap' aiiTcou ttoxj 
6 X. yEvvcLTai. Mk. xv. 47. John i. 40, 
Eldov TToD fxivEL. xi. 57 : with subj. Matt, 
viii. 20, TTou Tj;i/ KE<pa\.i]v kXivt]. Lu.xii. 
17. 3) in a direct question implying a 
negative, i. e. that a person or thing is not 
present, does not exist, Lu. viii. 25, ttov 
EdTLv T] TTtcTTL^ vfjLtov ; Rom. iii. 27. 1 Cor. 
i. 20, al. Sept. and Class. — II. by attrac- 
tion, after verbs of motion, zvhere 1 — 
ivhither? to what place as often in 
English ; in a direct question, John vii. 

35, TTOU ouTOs /xtXXgi iropEVEordaL : xiii. 

36. xvi. 5. Indirect, John iii. 8, ovk 
olSa? TTov virdyEL. viii. 14. xii. 35. Heb. 
xi. 8, al. 

Ho us, TTooos, b, the foot; of men, 
Matt. X. 14, al. ; of animals, vii. 6 ; an- 
thropopath. of God, v. 35. Acts vii. 49. 
Sept. and Class. The following special 
uses may be noted : 1 ) irapd tous 
TTo^as Tti/os, said of what is at one's feet, 
e. gr. to cast or lay at one's feet, z=. to give 
over into one's care and charge ; as sick 
persons, Matt. xv. 30 ; money, or gar- 
ments, Acts iv. 35. vii. 58 : also to sit at 
the feet of any one, as disciples were ac- 
customed to sit on the ground before their 
teacher, Lu. viii. 35. x. 39. Acts xxii. 3 ; 
but Lu. vii. 38, cTaca oTTLcrco irapd tous 
TTo^as auTou, i. e. standing behind the 
triclinium, at the feet of Jesus' as he 
reclined on it. 2) viro tous Tro^as tlvo^, 
i. e. to put or subdue under oim's feet, — 
' to make subject to any one, in allusion 
to the ancient manner of treading down or 
putting the foot upon the necks of van- 
quished enemies. Matt. xxii. 44. Rom. 
xvi. 20, 6 Oeos <yvvTpi\\fEL tov 2aT. utto 
TOUS TT. v/uLcou. 1 Cor. XV. 25. Heb. ii. 8, 

TrdvTa UTTfeTCt^aS VTrOKUTCO tcou ttoowv 

ai'Tou, et al. 3) spoken of the oriental 
mode of making supplication, or of doing 
reverence and homage to a superior by 
prostrating one's self before him, to fall at 
one^s feet ; in supplication, iTEcroyv fls 
TOUS TTo^as avTov, Matt, xviii. 29. irpb<i 
TOUS TTo^as, Mk. V. 22; in reverence, 
Lu. xvii. 16. John xi. 32. Acts x. 25. 
Rev. iii. 9. xix. 10 ; in a like sense, Kpa- 
TtjaraL TOV? TToBa? Tti/os, Matt, xxviii. 9. 
4) in allusion to the custom of washing 
and anointing the feet of strangers and 
guests, Lu. vii. 38, 44, vdcup ettI tous 
Tr6ba<5 fxov ovk eScokcc?. John xiii. 5. ver. 
6 — 14. 5) meton. to the feet, as the in- 
strument of going, is sometimes ascribed 
that which strictly belongs to the person 
who goes, walks, &c. Lii. i. 79, kutev- 
dvvaL TOUS TTO^as rj/uL. sh bbov sipvi/r]<s. 
Acts V. 9. Rom. iii. 15. x. 15. Heb. xii. 13^^ 



np A 



361 



HP A 



Updy/uLa, aT09, to, (Trpacff-w,) prop. 
a thing done or io he done: 1) a thing 
DONE," a deed, ad, fact, matter, Lu. i. 1, 
^Lr]yi](TLv iripl tCov ttettX. kv vjULTv irpay- 
fxaTcov. Jam. iii. 16, Trdv (pavXov irpdy- 
fxa. Heb. vi. 18. x. 1. xi, 1. Sept. & Class. 

2) a thing doing or to be done, a mat- 
ter, busi?iess, ajfair. Matt, xviii. 19, kdv 
Svo vfJLtjDV <TV/iX(pu)vv<xu)(n irepl Trai/xos 
TTpdy. Acts V. 4. Rom. xvi. 2. 2 Cor. vii. 
11. 1 Til. iv. 6, where tw irpdyfiaTi 
means ' the matter in question.' In a ju- 
dicial sense, nrpdyixa ^X^^-^i have a 
matter at law,' a lawsuit, 1 Cor. vi. 1. 
Xen. Mem. ii. 9, 1. 

Upay fiaTi'ia, a<s, 77, {irpayinaTEvo- 
uai,) a prosecution of some business^ and 
gener. business^ affair^ 2 Tim. ii. 4. 

npay^aTfuo/xat, f. zvcrofiaL^ depon. 
mid. (TTpay/xa,) to be doing, be busy, occu- 
pied ; in N. T. like Engl, to do business, 
i. e. to trade^ traffic^ ' to do business with 
by investment in trade,' Lu. xix. 13, — 
kpydX^ofxaL^ Matt. xxv. 16, al. ; so Greg. 
Basil, and Chrys. ap. Staph. Thes. 7935. 

YLpaiTuioiov, ov,t6, Lat. prcetorium, 
i. e. in Lat. usage the generaVs tent in a 
camp^ the house or palace of the governor 
of a province, whether a prsetor or other 
officer ; also any large house, palace ; hence 
in N. T'. a proBtorian residence, governor^ 
house, palace ; said 1 ) of the palace of 
Herod at Jerusalem, Matt, xxvii. 27. 
John xviii. 28. 2) of the palace of Herod 
at Cajsarea, perhaps in like manner the 
residence of the procurator. Acts xxiii. 35. 

3) of the prcetorian camp at Rome, i. e. 
the camp or quarters of the praetorian 
cohorts, Phil. i. 13. And so in Soph. 
Trach. 862. Antig. 39. 121. 

npa/CTa)|0, opos, 6, (TT/oao'coj,) prop. 
a doer. As, however, irpdcraELV, the verb, 
sig^iiified * to exact, or require payment' 
of money, so irpaKTuop came to mean, as 
in N. T. an exactor, collector^ i. e. a public 
officer, whose business it was to exact any 
sum of money adjudged to be paid, in the 
way of fine or satisfaction, to the injured 
party, by a court of justice. A sense in 
which the word often occurs in Demosth. 
and which is attested by Suid. and Hesych. 
The term, however, probably meant also 
an exactor pcence gener. which is alluded to 
in Soph. Elect. 953, Trp. <p6uou, & ^sch. 
Eum. 315, TT. ai/naTo^, where the sense is 
avenger ; and such was, it seems, the name 
given to an officer of the court, like our 
bailiff who apprehended and committed to 
prison any person who failed to pay the 
fine or mulct awarded, and there secured 
him till he should pay it. A sense this 
clearly intended in Lu. xii. 58, especially 
considering the definite term irpaKropL^ 



for which St. Matthew, v. 25, uses the 
geiieral one uirrjptTr/. 

Tipd^L's, lui's, 1), (TTpacrco),) prop, and 
gener. a doing, or the prosecution of any 
thing, an action, or course of action, also 
an occupation or business, Hom. Od. iii, 
72, and lastly, practice or behaviour. In 
N. T. 1 ) ' something done,'' an act, or deed, 
and pi. acts, works, conduct^ Matt. xvi. 27, 
diro^Ma-ii, EKctcrTM kutu Tiju irpd^iv 
avTov, i. e. ' practice, conduct,' as taken 
generically for Ta§ Trpajsis. Thus in a 
similar passage of Ecclus. xxxii. 19, k'ws 
avrairodia dvOpcoTrco Kara Ta? irpd^Ei^ 
avTov. Lu. xxiii. 51. Acts xix. 18. Rom. 
viii. 13. Col. iii. 9. Sept. Jos. and Class. 
2) ' something to be done,' business, office, 
function, Rom. xii. 4, ou Trji/ aurrji/ iyei 
Tpd^Lv, a peculiar idiom, of which I know 
of no other example ; for, as to those ad- 
duced by the Lexicographers, they are not 
to the purpose. The expression may be 
best explained, in reference to the primary 
sense, ' an acting or course of action.' 

Hp a OS, neut. 'jrpdov, adj. meeJc, mild, 
gentle. Matt. xi. 29, Trpao's &ifXL, 

HpaoTtjs or Hpaorr^s, -rrjTos, 77, 
(7rpao5,) meekness, mildness, forbearance, 

1 Cor. iv. 21, kv TTvevfjLaTL te irpaoT^To^. 

2 Cor. X. 1. 

Hpao-ia, as, 77, (fr. Trp a coy, an onion,) 
prop, an onion-bed, hence a bed in a gar- 
den. In N. T. an area, square, like a 
garden-bed. See my note on Thuc. ii. 56. 
Hence the term came to denote regular 
and equal companies of men, like squa- 
drons of troops. So Mk. vi. 40, 'Trpatrial 
Trp. by squares, like beds in a garden ; the 
repetition without copula denoting distri- 
bution, q. d. KOTa TTpacnd^. So ver. 39, 
we have av/nTroarLa crvjuLTroorLa, ' by table- 
parties.' And so Sept. Exod. viii. 14, 
^rifKxiVLa^ ^Y]{X(x3VLa^, ' in heaps.' So also 
fjLvpia jULvpia, in -^schyl. Pers. 974. 

Tip da era), f. fw, aor. 1. sTrpa^a, perf. 
TTtTTpa^a, to do, expressing an action as 
continued or not yet completed ; what one 
does repeatedly, habitually ; like Trotto) 
II. I. foil, by acc. of thing, without re- 
ference to a person as the remote object ; 
comp. below in III. 1) as said of parti- 
cular deeds or acts, done repeatedly, or 
continually, to do, to perform, to execute. 
Acts xix. 19, LKavoL dk toov rd irEpLtpya 
TTpa^dvTcov. ver. 36, iuit)S&v ttpotthtes. 
xxvi. 26. 1 Th. iv. 11, 'irpda-a-sLv Ta tdia, 
Xen. Cyr. v. 4, 11, Trp. Ta kavrov. 2) 
of a course of action or conduct, espec. of 
right, duty, virtue, to do, i. e. to exercise, 
to practise. Acts xxvi. 20, d^ia t^s fxETa- 
voLa^ 'ipya TTpdcffovTa^. Rom. ii. 25, 
vofxov, i. e. Ttt Tou vo/jlov. vii. 15. ix. 11, 
al. Sept. and Class. 3) oftener of evil 



HP A 



362 



npi 



deeds or conduct, to do^ to commit^ to prac- 
tise^ Lu. xxii. 23, o tovto /jleWwv irpacr- 
Gs.Lv. xxiii. 15, 41, bis. John iii. 20, 6 
(pavXa irpacrcTuiv. Rom. ii. 1. Sept. and 
Class. — 11. intrans. to do., ad., 1) with an 
adjunct of mannei". Acts iii. 17, KaTo. 
ayvoLav kirpal^aTe. xvii. 7. 2) like Engl. 
to do., i. e. to fare, to be in any state of 
good or ill, with an adjunct of manner, 
Eph. vi. 21, Tt Trpdcrcra}., Jiow I do. And 
so in Apocr., Jos., and Class. — III. said in 
reference to a person, to do to., or in respect 
to any one ; in N. T. only of harm or evil : 
1) gener. with acc. of thing and dat. of 
pers. Acts xvi. 28, fxr]okv irpa^ri^ craavTM 
KaKov. So with ETTL Tti/tt, as to, Acts V. 
35. TTpo's TLva, against, Acts xxvi. 9, and 
Class. 2) in the sense to exact, to collect 
money from any one ; a use of the word, 
like that of perficere in Latin, frequent in 
the Class, writers, and of which the full 
construction is irpdacrELV tlvcc dpyvpLOV ; 
though sometimes the acc. of person is 
omitted, especially when the person is not 
meant to be made prominent ; e. gr. XP^" 
fiara irpaTTELv and t&Ko^ irp. So in 
N. T. Lu. iii. 13, jui^Skv TrXiou irapd to 
CLaTETayfxivov vjjuv Trpdaa-ETe. And Lu. 
xix. 23, Eyo) eXBcov crxjv tokm dv Eirpa^a 
avTov, is also adduced; but there irpdcraw 
has the sense found in the Lat. eocigo, ' to 
require or call in money' deposited with 
any one, or due from him. 

TLpav<s, Ela, u, gen. tos oDs, sia^, io9 
ous, adj. imek, mild, gentle. Matt. v. 5, 
fxaKdpLOL ol TrpaEL^. xxi. 5, (where see 
my note,) 1 Pet. iii. 4. 

TlpavTi]9, T7]To§, t]', {Trpa'v^,) meek- 
ness, mildness, forbearance, Ja. i. 21. iii. 13, 
EV TTpqvTiiTL (T0(pLa9, foi cro<pLa TrpaEia, 
in allusion to the dictatorial temper of the 
false teachers. 1 Pet. iii. 15. Sept. Ecclus. 
iii. 17. iv. 8. 

XIpETTct), prop, to he eminent, distin- 
guished, to excel; in N. T. impers. itpettel, 
it becomes one, it is right, proper ; part. 
TTpETTOv Eorrl, it is becoming, &c. ; some- 
times with an implied notion of what is 
necessary to be done, and ought to be done. 
Constr. prop, with dat. of pers. and infin. 
as subject, Heb. ii. 10, £7rp£7r£ yap ai/Tw 
— TEXstwo-at. Matt. iii. 15, irpiTrov k.t.X. 
and Class. With simple dat. Eph. v. 3, 
/caGws TrpETTEL dyioi5. Foil, by acc. and 
infin. 1 Cor. xi. 13, and Class. Also in 
the personal construction with a nom. 
1 Tim. ii. 10, o irpiTTEL yvvai^Lv. Tit. ii. 
1. Heb. vii. 26. Sept. and Class. 

UpEcr^Eia, a^, rj, {irpEa^Evu),) prop. 
age, seniority, primogeniture ; in N. T. an 
embassy, (for concr. ambassadors,) e. gr. 
irpEcr^Eiav dirocrTEKXELV, Lu. xiv. 32, 
xix. 14. 2 Mace. iv. 11. Hdian. ii. 8, 12. 
Xen. Cyr. ii. 4, 1. 



TlpEd^Ev 03, f. Eucco, {tt plcffSv^ , au 
aged man, elder, also an ambassador,) prop. 
to be aged or elder, Hdot. vii. 2. In N. T. 
to be an ambassador, intrans. 2 Cor. v. 20, 

VTTEp XptCTToD OVU ITpsa^EVOfXEV. Eph. 

vi. 20. Jos. Ant. xii. 4, 2. Dem. 421, 16. 
Xen. Cyr. v. 1, 1. 

TipEG^VTEpLOV, LOV, TO, (irpEG-pv- 

Tfpos,) prop, an assembly of aged men, 
council of elders, senate ; in N. T. used 
1 ) of the JoAfvish senate, Sanhedrim, crvv- 
EopLov, (wh. see,) Lu. xxii. 66. Acts xxii. 
5. 2) of the presbyters of the Christian 
Church, 1 Tim. iv. 14. 

TLpEcr^vTEpo's, a, ov, adj. (prop, 
compar. fr. Trpto-jSws,) older, elder: I. 
prop, as compar. adj. Lu. xv. 25, 6 vi6^ 
avTov 6 TTpEo-jBiiTEpo's. Hcncc as subst. 
an elder person, senior, pi. old men, 
seniors, I Tim. v. I, TrpEo-fBvTEpcp fixrj 
£7ri7r\?7jr75. ver. 2. Acts ii. 17. 1 Pet. v. 
5 ; also oi irpEcr^vTEpoL, tJie ancients, tlie 
fathers, ancestors. Matt. xv. 2, -h irapd- 
So(TL9 Ttov 'wpEG^. Heb. xi. 2. — II. as 
SUBST. in the Jewish and Christian usage, 
as a title of dignity, an elder, pi. elders, 
i. e, persons of ripe age and experience, 
who were called to take part in the ma- 
nagement of public affairs ; in N. T. used 
1) of members of the Jewish sanhedrim 
at Jerusalem, gener. John -sdii. 9. Acts 
xxiv. 1 ; as one of the classes of members, 
o dpxLEpEv^, ol ypajuLfiaTEl^ Kai oi 
irpEG^. Matt. xxvi. 57; oftener ol apx*^" 
p£ts Kalol ypa/uLfx. Kalol Trpfo-jS. xxvi. 3. 
xxvii. 41 ; also ol apxt£p£ts /cat ol irpEcrfB, 
xxi. 23 ; ol irpEcr^. Kai ol ypafxfx. Acts 
vi. 12. iv. 8. 2) of the elders in other 
cities ; Capernaum, Lu. vii. 3. 3) of the 
elders of Christian churches, presbyters, to 
whom was committed the direction and 
government of individual churches. Acts 
xi. 30, oft., on whose office, &c, see my 
note on Acts xi. 30, and xx. 17 ; sing, o 
irpECT^vTEpo^, 1 Tim. v. 19. 2 John 1. 
3 John 1. 4) symbol, of the 24 elders 
around the throne of God in heaven, Rev. 
iv. 4, (where see my note,) et al. in Apoc. 

TLpE(T^vTr\'s, ov, 6, {'Trpiar^v?,) an 
old man, one aged, Lu. i. 18. Tit. ii, 2. 
Philem. 9, HaDXos irpEv^vTy]^, & Class. 

TipECr^VT i^, lSo9, t], (7rp£(Tj3uTtJS,) 

an aged woman. Tit. ii. 3, and Class. 

Hp ^00), see Tliixirpt]ixL. 

Ilpfjvi]?, fos 0V9, 6, 77, adj. Lat. pronus, 
i. e. bending fonvards, headlong. Acts i. 
18, TTprjvr]^ yEv6ixEvo<s, falling headlong, 
namely, from a certain height, as the ex- 
pression itself implies. 

Tip 1X^03, or Hp I w, fut. t<rw, to saw., 
saiv asunder, Heb. xi. 37, where see my 
note. Sept. and Class. 

Uplv, adv. of time (kindred with irpo,) 



n p I 



363 



npo 



prop, before^ formerly ; usually and in 
N. T. in a relative or conjunctive sense, 
connecting the clause before which it 
stands "svith a preceding one, and having 
the force of a comparative, before^ sooner 
them : I. simply, foil, by infin. aor. with 
ace, when something new is introduced, 
Matt. xxvi. 34, irplv okiKTopa (pcovrjcraL. 
John iv. 49. viii. 58. xiv. 29. — II. with 17, 
i. e. irplv 7], sooner than^ ■=. before : 1) 
foil, by inf. aor. with ace, where some- 
thing new is introduced, Matt. i. 18, irplv 
rj (TweXdiiv avTOv^ Evpedj] k.t.X. Mk. 
xiv. 30. Acts ii. 20. vii. 2. 2) foil, by 
subjunct. aor., where the reference is to 
something future, Lu. ii. 26, fxi) iSsTv ^d- 
vuTov^ irplv r} tdri tov Xp. xxii. 34. 3) 
foil, by optat., where the preceding clause 
contains a negat. Acts xxv. 16, 
XlpiO), see Xlpt^o). 

IIpo, prep, governing the genit. with 
the prim, signif. be/ore (Lat. joro, prcB^) 
both of place and time : I. of place, 
■before^ i. e. ' in front of, in presence of, or 
in advance of,' opp. to pl^.tcl with acc. 
beliind ; foil, by gen. of place. Acts v. 23, 
kaTcora? irpo tuov Qvpcoi/, xii. 6, 14. xiv. 
13; of person, from the Heb. irpd irpoa- 
oiirov Ttyos, prop, before the face of any 
one, but used pleonast. instead of 7rp6 
simply, before any one, Matt. xi. 10, oft. 
— ^11. of TIME, before, i. e. ' earlier than, 
prior to 1 ) foil, by gen. of a noun of 
time. Matt, viii. 29, Trpd Kaipov, before 
the time appointed, John xi. 55. Acts v. 
36. 1 Cor. ii. 7. 2 Cor. xii. 2. 2 Tim. i. 9; 
by inversion, John xii. 1, Trpo rj/jLEpcou 
TOV iracya^ for nix. irpo tov iradyct, 
' six days before the passover.' 2) foil, 
by gen. of a noun implying an event, as 
marking a point of time, Matt. xxiv. 38, 
irpd TOV KaTaKkvapLOv. Lu. xi. 38. xxi. 
12. John xvii. 24. Heb. xi. 5 ; by Hebr. 
Acts xiii. 24, irpo Trpoa-MTrov tT]<s eIgtoSov 
avTov, by Hebr. for irpo Eia-68ov auTou, 
see in no. I. 3) foil, by gen. of person or 
thing, before one in time, John v. 7, ^rpd 
EfjLov KaTa(3aLVEi, before me. x. 8. auTos 
eoTTL irpo TrdvTcou, Col. i. 17. oi irpo 
Tii/os, those before any one, who preceded 
him, Matt. v. 12. Rom. xvi. 7. Gal. i. 17. 
4) foil, by TOV with infin. expressing an 
event. Matt. vi. 8, 7rp6 tov J/xas alTycraL. 
Lu. ii. 21. xxii. 15, al. — II. fig. of pre- 
cedence, preference, dignity, before, above ; 
irpd Trcti/Twi/, before all things, Ja. v. 12. 
1 Pet. iv. 8. — Note. In composition Trpo 
implies, 1) place, /ore, before, forward, 
forth, as irpodyu}, irpo^aivoy, irpo^dWuy, 
&c. ; 2) time, /ore, before, beforehand, as 
TTpoElTTOir, irpoXiyui, irpopEpL/uLvda), &c. ; 
3) preference, as irpoaLpiopi.aL. 

Tlpodyu), f. fft), I. TRANS, to lead 
forth.^ bring forth ; of a prisoner, Acts xvi. 



30, "irpoayayuw avTov^ e^u) : so, in a judi- 
cial sense, xii. 6, ote ep.eWev uvtov Trpo- 
dyELv 6 *Hpto^tj9, (scil. f t§ ttjv EKK\r}crLav., 
or tis hiKTiv, which words are expressed in 
Jos. Ant. xvi. 11, 6.) Arr. Exp. Al. iv. 
14, 3. Acts xxv. 26, did irponyayov au- 
Tov E(p* vfioov, i. e. ' before you as judges. 
— II. INTRANS. to go before, referring 
either to place or time : 1) of place, 
to go before, i. e. in front, absol. Matt. xxi. 
9, OL irpodyovTE^ koX ol dKo\ovdovvTE<s 
EKpaX^ov, Lu. xviii. 39 ; with acc. of per- 
son, depending on the force of irpd in 
comp., although by itself it governs only 
the gen. Matt. ii. 9, 6 darTtjp 'irporjyEv 
avTovs, Mk. X. 32. Jos. Bell. vi. 1, 6, 
TrpoTjyE Sk TToXv irdvTU^. 2) of TIME, 
= to go first, precede, absol. Mk. vi. 45, 
TrpodyELv ets to Tripav : fig. 1 Tim. v. 24; 
with acc, of pers. depending on nrpo. Matt, 
xiv. 22, irpodyELV avTov £t§ to Tripav, 
xxi. 31. xxvi. 32. Part, irpodyiov, fore- 
going, former^ 1 Tim. i. 18, KaTa Tas 
irpoayovcra^ ettI (xe TrpocjyrjTEia^. Heb. 
vii. ] 8. Hdian. viii. 8, 8. 

ILpoaLpEUj, f. va-u), to taJce forth out of 
any place ; oftener mid. irpoaLpEOfxai, 
to take one thing before another, =1: to 
prefer, choose; in N. T. mid. prop, to 
take or have before one's self, — to propose 
to one''s self, to purpose, resolve, be disposed.^ 
absol. 2 Cor. ix. 7, /caOws TrpoaipetTat Ty 
Kapbla, and Class. 

UpoaiTLdopiaL, f. darofiai, depon. 
mid. to accuse beforehand, aor. 1. to have 
already accused, to have already brought a 
charge, with acc. and inf. Rom.'iii. 9, irpo- 
tjTLaardfjLEda 'lovd. not ' already proved,' 
for which sense there is no authority, but 
' made a [well-grounded] charge against 
see more in my note. 

TlpoaKov CO, aor. 1. irporiKovcra, to 
hear beforehand, aor. to have heard of be- 
fore, already, with acc. Col. i. 5, nv {eK- 
iriSa) irporiKovaraTE. Jos. and Class, 

Upoa/uLapTdvio, f. ncco, perf. Trpo- 
f]jULdpTf}Ka, to have sinned already, here- 
tofore, 2 Cor. xii, 21. xiii. 2, and Class. 

^poavXiov, ov, TO, {avXt}^) prop. 
' place before the avXrj or interior court,' 
i. e. the large gateway of an oriental house 
or palace, equiv, to gateway, vestibule, Mk. 
xiv. 68, comp. Matt. xxvi. 71, TrvXcov. 

TLpofSaLvo}, f. (BvcrojuLui, aor. 2. Trpo- 
£j8t]j/, to go forward, advance, intrans. 
Matt, iv, 21, 7r/oo|3as ekelBev. Jos. and 
Class. Fig. part. perf. irpo^E^Y\K<j)^, via, 
0?, advanced, i, e. in life ; foil, by ev, Lu. 
i. 7, 7rpo/3f/?t7/coT£S iv rats vfJiEpaL^, 
ver. 18. ii. 36, Sept. and Class. 

UpofidXXu), f. aXco, to cast or thrust 
forward, trans. 1) gener. Acts xix. 33, 
irpo(3aXX6uT(jDV avTov twv 'lovd. ' the 
R 2 



npo 



364 



n po 



Jews thrusting him (Alexander) forward,' 
or rather, to put foriuard as an advocate, 
to propose^ recommend^ and so in Class. 
' to propose or nominate any one for an 
office 2) of plants and trees, to put 
foyili^ e. gr. leaves, blossoms, fruit, Lu, 
xxi. 30, orav 7rpo(BaXu)(nu sc. to. <pv\\a^ 
comp. Matt. xxiv. 32. Jos. Ant. iv. 8, 19, 
Kapirov. Julian Or. p. 169. 

IIf)o/3aTi«:os, 7), oV, adj. {■wpo^aTov^) 
pei'taming to sheep, John v. 2, liri ry irpo- 
(3aTLKy sc. ttvXt]^ hy the sheep-gate^ and 
prob. so called as being the place where 
sheep were sold for the sacrifices. 

lIp6(3aTov, ou, TO, (Trpo/SaiVo),) ge- 
ner. to. irpo^aTa, beasts, cattle, espec. 
smaller cattle, sheep and goats ; in Attic 
usage and N. T. a sheep, pi. sheep, as dis- 
tinguished from goats, Matt, xxv. 32, Ihcr- 
Trs.p 6 TToi/uLriu d(popL'^EL TO, irpof^. airo 
Tcov spL<pu)v. ver. 33 ; so gener. vii. 15, 
ix. 36, saepe ; fig. of those under the care 
of any one, as sheep under a shepherd, 
Matt. X. 6. XV. 24, and oft. 

IlpojS L(3dX^co, f. £2(760, to cause to go 
forwards, or advance, trans. Acts xix. 33, 
kK Tov oyXov TrpoEfSLfSacrav 'A\. 'they 
caused Alexander to advance out of the 
crowd,' i. q. to stand forth, prob. to speak 
in behalf of the Jews. Fig. to urge on, 
instigate, Matt. xiv. 8, irpo^ip. viro t^5 
fXTr]'Tp6<s avTrj^ : a signif. found in the 
Sept. and also in Class, as Xen. Mem. 1. 2, 
17, TTpojS. Xoyo). Aristoph. Av. 1570. 

JJpo^Xi'Tra), f. xl/u), to foresee; in 
N. T. mid. irpo^XiTrofxaL, to provide, with 
acc. Heb. xi. 40. 

ITpoy tyo/xai, perf. 2. 'wpoyiyova, to 
he dom before, to have been before, Rom. 
iii. 25, Twv Trpoygy. d/xapTtj/xaTOJZ/, 'sins 
before done,' former sins, meaning ' the 
sins with which Jews and Gentiles had 
polluted themselves before coming to the 
Christian faith.' 

Tlpoy LVwcTKU}, f. yvwcro/uLaL, to Jcnow 
before, trans. 1 ) gener. =: to Itnorc already, 
to be before acquainted with, foil, by acc. 
Acts xxvi. 5, TTpoyLv. /u£ avuid&v. 2) rr 
to foreknow, foresee ; in N. T. by impl. to 
fore -determine, fore- ordain, pass. part. 
1 Pet. i. 20, Xp. TTposyv. Trpo KaTa(3o\7]9 
Koa-jULOv. In Rom. viii. 29, ov? irpoiyvw kul 
TrpooopLcr^, the sense is doubtful ; it may 
be either, 'whom he fore-approved and 
loved,' or ' who he foreknew would be 
lovers of God.' See more in my note, 
xi. '2,\adv avTov ou irpoiyvoi, i. e. 'whom 
he hath fore-approved, loved of old,' comp. 

yiVOOCTKOO II. 3. 

TLp6yV03<TL'3, €609, 7], {TpoyLVWO-KU),) 

foreknowledge of future things ; in N. T. 
by impl. fore-determination, i. q. eternal 
purpose, decree^ counsel, Acts ii. 23. 1 Pet. 



i. 2 : a signif. common to Hellenistic and 
Class. Greek. 

npoy 01/09, ov, 6, 77, adj, {irpoyLvo- 
/tiat,) prop, earlier born, older ; in N. T. 
OL irpoyovoL, progenitors, ancestors, and 
gener. forefathers, 2 Tim. i. 3, see diro 
III. 2 ; spec, parents, 1 Tim. v. 4. Xen. 
Mem. i. 3, and Class. 

Tlpoy pd(p<j), f. \lf(J0, to ivrite before : 
I. in reference to time past, in the preter 
tenses, to have written before, at a former 
time, Eph. iii. 3, Ka0cb9 Trpoiypaxj/a kv 
oA/yo). Rom. xv. 4. — II. in reference to 
time FUTURE, to announce beforehand in 
icriting, i. e. by posting up a ivritten tablet, 
as oft. in Class. : hence in N. T. gener. 
to announce, promulgate. Gal. iii. 1, ols 
KUT 6(pd. 'I. Xp. Trposypdcpr] kv vfxiv 
kcrTavpwfJiho^, ' before whose eyes Jesus 
Christ hath been announced, set forth, 
among you as crucified,' namely, partly 
by preaching, (see 1 Cor. i. 23. ii. 2,) and 
partly by the lively representation of Christ 
crucified in the Eucharist, Hence also 
to appoint, ordain, Jude 4, ot izakai irpo- 
ysyp, £t9 TouTo TO KpLfxa, meaning that 
stated ver. 5 — 7, 11, 15. The expression 
is a foreyisic one, denoting those cited to 
trial, by posting up their names, or those 
whose names were posted up, as required 
£19 Kpifxa, ' for condemnation and punish- 
ment.' 

npo^r]Xo9, ov, 6, rj-, adj. Tnanifest he- 
forehand ; in N. T. emphat. manifest be- 
fore all, well-known, prominently compi- 
emus, 1 Tim. v. 24, 25. Heb. vii. 14, 
where it is used as a stronger term for 
SrjXov, and is synon. with Kan-ddi^Xov, 
Heb. vii. 15. In this intensive sense both 
terms occur in Class. ; the former also in 
Apocr. as Judith viii. 29. 2 Mace. iii. 17. 

UpoSlSw/ull, f. duicru), to give before- 
hand, give first, with dat. Rom. xi. 35, Tt9 
TrpoidtoKEv avTto ; So Xen. oft. 

npoooTt]9, ov, 6, {irpo^iSciyiuiL,) a be- 
trayer, traitor, Lu. vi. 16, and Class. 

UpoopdiJLU}, see HpoTpfxw. 

Tl poS po fio?, ov, 6, 77, adj. {irpoTpi- 
Xw,) running before ; in N. T. a fore-run- 
ner, precursor, spoken of Jesus as entering 
before his followers into the celestial sanc- 
tuary, namely, ' to introduce thither all 
true believers into the presence of God,' 
to prepare a place for them, as he himself 
says, John xiv. 2. See more in my note. 
Heb. vi. 20. 

UpoEiBov, aor. 2. (see £t5a>,) to see 
before one'^s self far off ; in N. T. to fore- 
see, as things future, absol. Acts ii. 31, 
Trpot^wi; kXdXri<Ti.. Gal. iii. 8, with or*, 
and Class, oft. 

Tlpoti'Kov, aor. 2. perf. 'jrpoiipriKa^ 
(see eIttov,) to say before : I. in reference 



npo 



365 



npo 



to time PAST, to have said before^ aor. 
KaQui)^ Kat irpoelirov^ Gal. v. 21 ; with 
dat. ITh. iv. 6, TrpoeLiraiuLtv vfilu. Perf. 
Gal. i. 9. Heb. x. 15; with ort, 2 Cor. 
vii. 3, and Class. — II. in reference to time 
FUTURE, to sai/ beforehand^ foretell ; aor. 
with ace. Acts i. 16, Viv TrpottTTE to Uv. 
Perf. Rom. ix. 29; with v/jlli', Matt. xxiv. 
25. vfxiv nravTa^ Mk. xiii. 23. ort, 2 Cor. 
xiii. 2. TUiv TTpOEipnfxivuiV pr]fxuTU)v, 
2 Pet. iii. 2, and Class. 

npoEXTTiJo), f. t'cro), to Twpe heforej 
perf. to have hoped before^ Eph. i. 12, hf^a.<s 
Tov<5 TrpotiKirLKOTa^ kv toj Xpto-rw, 
meaning either the Jeivs, as having of old 
had the hope and promise of the Messiah, 
in opp. to the Gentiles, who have only 
now first heard of him, or the Jeivish 
Chj'istians, as having already and before 
the Gentiles hoped in Christ. Comp. Rom. 
iii. 1, sq. 

UpOEvdpxoiiiaL, f. £o/xai, to begin 
before ; aor. to have begun before^ already, 
2 Cor. viii. 6, 10. 

Upotirayy iWiii^ f. cXw, to promise 
before; aor. 1. mid. Rom. i. 2, o irpo- 
&Tn]yytL\aTo olol twv irpocp. i. e. of old ; 
a signification rare in Class. See my note 
there. 

YipoipXOfxai^ f. EXEva-o/jiaL^ aor. 2. 
'TTporjXQou^ depon. mid. I. to go forward 
ov further^ pass on^ intrans. Matt. xxvi. 
39, 'TTpoeXduiv fXLKpoi/ : with acc. of way, 
Acts xii. 10, 'TTpoTjkdov pvfjLY^v fxiav^ and 
Class. — II. to go before any one, as refer- 
ring either to place or time : 1) of place, 
to go before^ in advance of any one, as a 
fore-runner, messenger ; with eumttlov 
Tti;os, Lu. i. 17 ; or as a leader, guide, 
with acc. xxii. 47, 'lou^as nrporipxETo 
avTov^, 2) of TIME, to go firsts precede, 
set off before another. Acts xx, 5, ovtol 

'TrpOEXdSuTE^ E-IXEVOV VfJ-CC? EV T/0. XX. 13, 

kiri TO TrXolov. 2 Cor. ix. 5, el^ Vfxd^. 
In the sense of to outgo, arrive first, Mk. 
vi. 33. 

npoETotfia^o), f. aa-o), to prepare 
beforehand; in N. T. to appoint before, 
trans, with eU, Rom. ix. 23, a irporiT. Eh 
^o^au, where see my note ; with dat. Eph. 
ii. 10, oT? (scil. gpyoi? dyaOoIs) irpo- 
tlTOLfxacrEv (77/u.as) 6 Geos, 'to the perform- 
ance of which God hath fore-prepared us,' 
namely, by the motives to holiness pro- 
pounded in the Gospel, and the influences 
of the Holy Spirit. So Philo, p. 17, 6 

GeOS TCL EV TO) KOCF/UiU) 'TTCLVTa TTpOTlTOl- 

fidcruTO Eh Ep(joTa /cat ttoBov avTov. 

U p OE V ay yEX lX^o /JL a L, f. icrofxaL, to 

announce glad tidings beforehand, to fore- 
tell joyful neivs, Gal. iii. 8, irpoEvriyy. tm 

'A^padjUL, OTL. 

n p o i X w, f, £ Jw, prop, to have a thing 



before another ; hence to have the prefer- 
ence or pre-eminence, to excel,be superior; 
hence in N. T. mid. irpoixop-ai, to excels 
Rom. iii. 9, tl ovv, irpotx^l^^^^ '■> ^ have 
we any pre-eminence.^' See my note 
there. 

Uporiy EOfxai, f. -ncroiuLai, prop, and in 
Class, to go before, take the lead, as guide 
or leader ; in N. T. fig. to lead on by ex- 
ample, with acc. and dat. of that in or as 
to which, Rom. xii. 10, tj7 TLfxy aXXi?- 
Xov<s Trporjy. ' in mutual respect, or cour- 
tesy, taking the lead of each other,' and 
anticipating each other. 

TLpodEOTL'S, €0)9, 17, (7rpOTl0T7/Xt,) « 

setting before or forth, exposure to, as 
the laying out of a dead body, Demosth. 
1071 ; in N. T. used 1) prop, of food, said 
only of the shew-bread, as being set out' 
before Jehovah on a table in the sanc- 
tuary, and hence by the Hebrew name 
denominated WtevaWy presence-bread. See 
Lev. xxiv. 5 — 9. Used in an adjectival 
sense in the phrases ol aproL n-rj£ mpod. 
Matt. xii. 4. rj irpod. Ttov dpTcou, Heb. 
ix. 2, both equiv. to ol dpToi ol irpoTLdi" 
juLEvoL. Both expressions are of frequent 
occurrence in the Sept. From the direc- 
tions given in Exod. xxv. 30, and Lev, 
xxiv. 5 — 9, for the preparation and use 
of this shew-bread, it is plain that this 
was meant to typify Christ, first presented 
as a sacrifice to God, and thus becoming 
spiritual food to such as in and through 
him are made spiritual priests unto God, 
even the Father. See Rev. i. 6. v. 10. 
XX. 6, and compare 1 Pet. ii. 5. 2) fig. 
of what any one sets before his mind, pro- 
poses to himself, Lat. propositum, i. e. pur- 
pose, counsel, resolve. Acts xxvii. 13, 
^o^avTE^ T77S irpoQ. KEKpaTtjKEvaL. So 
of firm purpose, resolve, xi. 23, 'Trpod. 
T^s KapoLa<s. 2 Tim. iii. 10, Ty Trpod, 
There, however, it denotes not so much, 
as most Commentators suppose, ' firmness 
of purpose,' but rather purpose generally, 
i. e. such a course as one sets before one- 
self as one's great end and aim, or design, 
to which one's actions tend ; which was, 
in the present case, the approving himself 
in the sight of God. Elsewhere the term 
used of the eternal purpose and counsel 
of God, namely, of ' gathering together in 
one all things in Christ,' both Jews and 
Gentiles, or of choosing one nation rather 
than another to certain privileges and 
blessings. Rom. viii. 28, Tot§ /card irpoO, 
(scil. Qeov) /cXrjToTs, and ix. 11. Eph. i. 
11. iii. 11. 2 Tim. i. 9 ; on which passages 
see my notes. 

Upod Ecr fjLLo^, ia, oy, adj. (Trpd, Oeo-- 
/xds,) set beforehand, appointed, said of 
time; whence v irpodEa/iua, scil. iifxipa,'' a 
set day, appointed time,' Gal. iv.2. So Jos. 
R3 



11 PO 



366 



n p 0 



Ant. xii. 47, Trpodecrfxia^ kvicrrafxi- 
vt]9, and oft. in Lucian. 

U podv /uLLa^ a§, 77, (TrpoOu/zo?,) /or- 
tcardiiess of mind^ readiriess^ alacrity of 
mind, Acts xvii. 11. 2 Cor. viii. 11, al. 
and Class. 

Upodu^os, oi;, 6, adj. lit. 'forward 
in mind, ready,' ivillirig^ prompt^ to ttveu- 
ixa Trpodv/uLou^ Matt. xxvi. 41. Mk. xiv. 
38. Sept. and Class. Neut. to irpodvjULov^ 
readiness, cdacrity, Rom. i. 15, to KaT 
i/uLE TTpod. (tcTi), ' there is a readiness on 
my part,' I am ready. 3 Mace. v. 26. Jos. 
Ant. iv. 8, 13, to Trspi auTous irpodvfxov 
ToD 0£oD. Thuc. iv. 81. 

JIpody'iuLco^, adv. (Trpo'Ou/xos,) readily/, 
tvillingly, ivith alacrity, 1 Pet. v. 2. 

npoto-Ttj/xt, f. irpocjTricrui, aor. 2. 
7r/oo£<TT7]i/, perf. part, contr, Trpogo-Tcb?, 
trans, to cause to stand before, to set over ; 
in N. T. only in the intrans. tenses, e. gr. 
aor. 2. and perf. of the active, and pres. 
mid. or pass, to stand before: 1) to be 
over, preside, rule, absol. Rom. xii. 8, 6 
irpoLaTd/uLevo^. 1 Tim. v. 17, ol KaXu)<s 
nrpoEcrToore^ : foil, by gen. like other verbs 
of ruling, through the force of Trpd in 
comp. iii. 4, tou idiov o'lkov koKoo^ irpo- 
'icrn-dp.tvov, ver. 5. 1 Th. v. 12. Jos. and 
Class. 2) by impl. to care for any thing, 
to be diligent in it, to practise, with gen. 
KoKoiv 'ipycop irpotcrTaddaL, Tit. iii. 8, 
14. So Jos. Bell. i. 20, 2, irp. cpiXia^. 
Athen. p. 612, it p. rix^V^- Plut. Pericl. 
24, Trp. spyaaia^. 

UpoKaXeo), f. icru), to call forth, mid. 
to call forth before one^s self i. e. either to 
invite to come, to solicit, or to challenge, 
to defy, i. e. to combat ; hence in N. T. 
mid. TrpoKaXiofxaL, to provoke, irritate, 
or to call foHh by a vain-glorious rivalry ; 
■with acc. Gal. v. 26, dWrj^ou^ irpoKa- 
XovfXEi/oL, see my note. 

TlpoKaTayy iWoj, f. sXco, to an- 
nounce beforehand, foretell future events. 
Acts iii. 18. vii. 52 : pass. part. perf. irpo- 
KaTtjyysX/iJiivo^, announced beforehand, 
equiv. to promised, 2 Cor. ix. 5. Jos. Ant. 
ii. 9, 4, ToTs irpoKaTi]yyE\fxivoL'S vtto 
TOU Geou iricTTiv irapEl^E, 

Upo KaTapTi'^co, f. ttrw, to mahe 
recidy beforehand, trans. 2 Cor. ix. 5. 

YlpoKEiixai, part. Trpo/cgi/xEi'os, prop. 
to lie before, to be laid or set before any 
one, intrans. ; in N. T. only fig. \)to lie 
or be before the mind of any one, to be 
present to him, 2 Cor. viii. 12, f I 77 Trpo- 
Ovfxia irpoKELTau Philo and Class. 2) 
equiv. to perf. pass, of 7rpoTi'6>7/^t, to be 
laid or set before one's mind, as a duty, 
reward, example, Heb. vi. 18, KpaTtjcraL 
Trj's TrpoKELixivyi's k\'TrL^o<s. xii. 1, 2. Jude 
7. Jos. and Class, oft. 



TlpoKr\pv<T(Tuo, f . ^w, to proclaim, i. e, 
by a herald ; in N. T. gener. to announce 
or preach beforehand, and in the past tenses 
to have before announced, preached, trans. 
Acts iii. 20, text. rec. xiii. 24, irpoKtipu- 
^auT09 'Icodvvov (BdTrTLarfxa /x&Tavoia^, 
and Class. 

H poKOTri], f]9, 77, (-Trpo/coTTTco,) prop. 
cc going forward, and fig. progress, ad- 
vancement, fuHherance, Phil. i. 12, 25. 
1 Tim. iv. 15, and later Gr. wr. 

IXpo/coTTTco, f. i/r-ft), prim. ' to cut for- 
ward, cut one's way forward,' as through 
a wood or thicket ; hence ' to make one's 
way forward,' proceed, make progress, Jos. 
Ant. ii. 16, 13. Bell. iv. 2, 4 ; in N. T. 
only fig. 1) ^0 make progress in anything, 
to advance, increase ; with dat. of that in 
or as to which, Lu. ii. 52, 'Iricrov's irpo- 
(.KOTTTE cro<pLa. Plut. irp. Trj dpErrj, and 
similar expressions occ. in other Class. ; 
with iv, Gal. i. 14, eu tw 'lovda'icTjUiM. 
Comp. Lucian, Hermog. irp. kv toIs fxa- 
drtfxacTL, Diod.Sic. iv.50, Trp. kv iraiBELct : 
with kirl and acc. kirl to x^^P^^-> grow 
worse and worse.' 2 Tim, iii. 13 ; knrl 
TrXelov, further, ii. 16, and oft. in lat. 
Class. 2) spoken of time, aor. to be ad- 
va7iced, to be far spent, Rom. xiii. 12, 77 
vv^ irpoiKox^EV. So Jos. Bell. iv. 4, 6, 
T?7§ vvKTO's irpoKOTTTouanj^, Hdot. ix. 44, 
expresses it thus, irpoaru) Ttjs vvktos irpo- 
sX-nXaTo. 

Tl p oKp Lfxa, anro'S, to, {irpoKpLVOt},) 
prejudice, prepossession, lit. ' fore-judging,' 
1 Tim. V. 21. 

TipoKvpoio, f. tocro), to establish or 
confirm before, previously, pass. perf. Gal. 
iii. 17. 

TlpoXafji^dvu), aor. 2. 'wpoiXa^ov, io 
take before, trans. 1) take before an- 
other, to anticipate another in doing any 
thing, with acc. 1 Cor. xi. 21, k'/cao-Toy 
TO IdLov dElirvov irpoXafx^dvEL, ' ante- 
capit,' i.e.' the rich man eats the provi- 
sions he has brought, without waiting for 
the poorer members to come in ;' intrans. 
to take up beforehand, to anticipate the 
time of doing any thing, with inf. Mk. xiv. 
8, TrpoiXa^E /jLvplcraL fxov to ffw/xa k.t.X. 
' she hath anointed my body, by anticipa- 
tion, against my burial.' Comp. Eurip. 
Hel. 345, Mr/, TrpofxavTL? aXyiiov, Tlpo- 
Xd}x^av, CO cpiXa, yooi/s. 2) of persons, 
aor. 1. pass. 7rpo£\?70077z/. Gal. vi. 1, kdu 
Kal TrpoXr](})dy avdp. ev tlvl irapairTOi- 
fxaTL, ' if any one should be overtaken or 
surprised in a fault.' 

ILpoXiy (!),{, fo), io foretell, for eshoiv^ 
forewarn, 2 Cor. xiii. 2. Gal. v. 21. 1 Th. 
iii. 4. Sept. Jos. and Class. 

IIpo/uapTupo/xat, prop, to call to 



npo 



367 



npo 



witness heforeliand ; \n N. T. to testify or 
declare beforehand^ 1 Pet. i. 11. 

ITpojUEXfTaa), f. /jo-co, to premeditate^ 
with inf. Lu. xxi. 14, fxi] irpofxt\s.Tav 
aTro\oyi]dY\vaL^ and Class. 

Ylpofj.ipLfxvaii}^ f. tjco), to care or 
talce thoiigld beforehand^ Mk. xiii. 11. 

XIpoiyoEw, f. //(Tto, prop, to foresee^ per- 
ceive beforehand^ Horn. II. xviii. 526. Xen. 
Cyr. viii. 1, 13; to consider beforehand^ 
Horn. Od. V. 364. In N. T. fig. to see 
beforehand^ i. e. to care for^ provide for^ 
with gen. of person, 1 Tim. v. 8, & Class, 
espec. Xenoph. Mid. to provide for in 
one's own behalf, as to any thing, and by 
impl. to apply oneself to it, to practise it 
diligently: so irpov. koKo. kvuiiriov irdv- 
Twv dvdp. Rom. xii. 17. 2 Cor. viii. 21. 
Sept. Prov. iii. 4, Trpovoov KaXd ivoiTnov 
Kvptov. Sext. Emp. p. 104, irpovoilcrQai, 
Tcc KoXu. Jos. Ant. ix. 1, 1, Tov diKaiov 
irpovoovfXEVO'S. 

TLpovoLa^ a^^ri^ {irpovoio)^) foresight, 
providence, provision, Acts xxi v. 3. Rom. 
xiii. 14, irpovoiav fxtj 'TroLEladai. The 
phrase irpovoLav iroLEicrdai tlvo9, ' to 
make provision for any thing,' often occurs 
in Class. 

n poop a o), perf. irpoEojpaKa, to fore- 
see, Jos; C. Ap. i. 28. Xen. Conv. iv. 5 ; 
also to looh or see before oneself, Thuc. vii. 
44 ; in N. T. to see before : 1 ) mid. to see 
before oneself, have before one's eyes, to 
be so mindful of a thing or person as to 
have it or him constantly, as it were, be- 
fore us ; with acc. Acts ii. 25, irpouipdjfxnv 
Tov Kvpiov hwTTiov fiov, 2) perf. to have 
seen before, in time, Acts xxi. 29. 

Tlpoopi'^a), f. i<T(jo, to set bounds be- 
fore ; in N. T. fig. to pre-determine, fore- 
ordain, spoken of the eternal counsels and 
decrees of God, foil, by acc. with inf. expr. 
or impl. Acts iv. 28, oo-a v (3ov\ri <rov 
'7rpocopL<T£ yeviadaL. Rom. viii. 29, 30 ; 
with acc. and sh, 1 Cor. ii. 7. Eph. i. 5, 
pass.ver. 11. See my notes on the passages. 

npoTracxw, aor. 2. irpoiiradov, to be 
affected beforehand, to experience before, 
either good, as in Hdot. vii. 11, al. or 
evil, as in N. T. aor. to have suffered 
before, previously, 1 Th, ii. 2. Thuc. iii. 
67. 

TLpoirifXTTO), f. \//a), to send on before, 
Xen. Cyr. ii. 4, 18 ; to send forwards or 
foHh, Hdot. iv. 33 ; in N. T. to send for- 
ward on one's journey, to bring one on his 
way, espec. to accompany for some dis- 
tance in token of respect and honour, trans. 
7rpo£7r£/jt7roi/ avTov eIs to ttKoTov, Acts 
XX. 38. xxi. 5. Jos. and Class. ; hence 
gener. to help one forward on his journey, 
Acts XV. 3. Rom. xv. 24, al. 1 Esdr. iv. 
47. 1 Mace. xii. 4. 



II p OTT £ T 7; S, £0S OV'3, 6, tj-, adj. (TTpO- 

'TTtTTTO),) prop, hanging or falling forwards, 
and fig. prone, inclined, ready to do any 
thing, Xen. Hist. v. 5, 24 ; in N. T. in a 
bad sense, precipitate, headlong, rash. Acts 
xix. 36, fxridku irpoTr. irpaTTELV. 2 Tim. 
iii. 4. Jos. and Class. 

Ylpoiropzvofxai, f. (.vo-ofxai, depon. 
mid. to pass on before, go before any one ; 
as a leader, guide, with gen. Acts vii. 40, 
3'£oi's dt TTpoTT. fifxcou* 1 Macc. ix. 11. 
Pol. xviii. 2, 5 ; also as a forerunner, 
herald, Lu. i. 76. Sept. and Class. 

Hp 6 5, prep, governing the genit., dat., 
and accus., and corresponding, in its pri- 
mary signif., to the primary force of these 
cases themselves, viz. with the gen. im- 
plying motion, or direction, from, a place 
hither ; with the dat. rest or remaining by, 
at, near a place ; with the accus. motion or 
direction towards or to a place. I. with 
the GENITIVE, prop, from a place hither, 
Horn. Od. viii. 29, gftros — Ik&t kfxdv ow, 
■r]k Trpos ijoicov 7} icTTEptcov dvdpcoTrcov. 
Then, in the direction of a place, as Trpos 
^opedu), from the north, at north, Horn. 
Od. xiii. 110. Fig. of the source, agent, 
or cause from which any thing comes or 
proceeds, as XafSslv tl Trpos tlvo9, Hdot. 
ii. 139, and so after neut. and passive 
verbs, from, of, by : also expressing de- 
pendence or relation of any kind from or 
with any one, i.e. ' the pertaining or be- 
longing ' in any way to a person or thing, 
e. g. Trpos ^t/cijs, ' according to right,' 
Soph. (Ed. Col. 1014. Hence in N. T. 
once, fig. pertaining to, i. e. for, for the 
benefit of. Acts xxvii. 34, tovto Trpos t^s 
v/uL. (T(joT7]pLa's virdpx^t' So Thuc. iii. 38, 
and oft. in Class. — II. with the dative 
TTpos marks a place or object by the side of 
which a person or thing is, by, at, near^ 
Mk. V. 11, TTpos TM opEL. Lu. xix. 37, 
TTpos tt; KaTa(3darEL tou opovs. John 
xviii. 16, 6 n. ELCTTriKEi, irpo's Ty ^vpa. 

XX. 12. Rev. i. 13, and Class III. with 

the ACCUS. TTpos marks the object towards 
or to which any thing moves or is directed. 
— I. of PLACE, towards, to, unto, with acc, 
of place, thing, person: 1) prop, of mo- 
tion or direction; after verbs of going, 
coming, departing, returning, &c., and 
also after like nouns, Matt. ii. 12, fxr] 
dvaKdfxxj/ai. Trpos 'Hpwdrjv. iii. 5, e^- 

ETTOpEVETO TTpo^ aVTOV. VCr. 14. X. 13. xi. 

28. XXV. 9. Mk. i. 33, TTpos Tt/i/ ^vpav. 
vi. 25, 45, TrpodjELV Trpos Brjda-a'Lddv. 
X. 1. Lu. viii. 4, 19. xxiv. 12, dTrriXds 
Trpos kavT-ov, i. e. home. John iii. 20. vii. 
33. Acts iii. 11. xxviii. 30, al. saepiss. and 
Class. So after yivEcrdai, John x. 35. 
Acts xiii. 32. 2 Cor. i. 18. After verbs of 
sending, with acc. of pers. Matt. xxi. 34. 
Lu. xxiii. 7. John xvi. 7 : hence £Tri- 
R4 



npo 



368 



npo 



<TTo\r) TTpos Tii/a, Acts ix. 2, and Class, 
After verbs of leading, bringing, drawing, 
by force or otherwise. Matt. xxvi. 57, 
dir^yayov Trpos Ka'idcpav. Mk. ix. 17, 
19, (pip&TE avTov irpo^ fie. Lu. xii. 58. 
John xii. 32, irdvTa^ &Xkv(T(jo -Trpos sfxav- 
Tov. xiv. 3. Acts xxiii. 15. Rev. xii. 5. 
So after verbs implying motion to a place, 
and also a subsequent remaining there, 
"where in Engl, we mostly use at^ upon^ 
but also ^0, unto ; verbs of falling, ttitt- 

TtLV or -TT porTTTL'TrTELV TT/OOS TOUS TloSa^ 

Ttjyo9, ' to fall at one's feet,' Mk. v. 22. 
vii. 25 ; of laying, putting, casting, and 
the like, Matt. iii. 10, 17 d^ivr} 'Trpd? Trjv 
/o/^ai/ KELTai. Lu. xvi. 20, os k^i^\r\ro 
Trpos Toy irvXcova avTov. Acts iii. 2. 
So Matt. iv. 6. Mk. x. 7. Acts xiii. 36. 
Also after verbs and words implying mere 
direction, as a turning, reaching, looking, 
and the like, Lu. vii. 44, aTpa<p&h Trpos 
TTjv yvvaiKa, Acts ix. 40. Rom. x. 21, 
fi^ETTETaca Ta§ yEipd's fiov Trpos Xaoi/, 
Eph. iii. 14; fig. James iv. 5, see Ittl- 
TTodicD. So by Hebr. (SXiireLv irpoa-wirov 
Trpos Trpoacoiroif, face to face^ 1 Cor. 
xiii. 12. 2) with all verbs and words 
which include the idea of speaking to any 
one, mostly with accusative of pers. (1) 
gener. Lu. i. 13, 19. v. 36. xxii. 70. So 
with verbs of answering, Acts iii. 12 ; of 
accusing, John v. 45 ; of praying, entreat- 
ing, Lu. xviii. 7. Acts viii. 24. xii. 5. 
Rom. X. 1. 2 Cor. xiii. 7. With words of 
declaring, making known, Lu. i. 80. Acts 
xxiii. 22. Phil. iv. 6 ; of command and the 
like. Acts xvii. 15. xxii. 1, &c. Sept. and 
Class. (2) of mutual words and sayings, 
&c. Acts ii. 12, aWo^ Trpos aWov Xi- 
yovT&'s. So Trpos aXXriXovs^ to one an- 
otlier, one to another, Mk. viii. 16. Trpos 
iauTous, id. i. 27. (3) after verbs of swear- 
ing to any one, Lu. i. 73, opKou ou w/xocte 
TTpo^ 'A(3p. Horn. Od. xiv. 331. 3) fig. 
after verlDs and words implying direction 
of the mind or will, an affection or dispo- 
sition toivards any one, whether favourable^ 
2 Cor. iii. 4, Trs-iroiQiycnv e^. "Trpos tov 
Qeov. vii. 4, TrapprjcrLa tt/OOS vjULci^. ver. 
12. Gal. vi. 10, ipya'^ivjULEda to dyadou 
Trpos Trdi/ras. Epb. vi. 9. 1 Th. i. 8, 77 
'TTto'Tis 77 TTjOos Tov Qeov. V. 14. 2 Tim. 
ii. 24. Tit. iii. 2 : so Col. iv. 5, kv aocpLa 
'TTEpLTrarBLTe tt/jos tous £^00. 1 Th. iv. 
12 : also in Class, or imfavourable, equiv. 
to against^ Acts vi. 1, yoyyvcrpiO's irpo^ 
Tous 'Ej3p. xxiii. 30, XiyEiv irpo^ 
avTov. xxiv. 19. XXV. 19. 1 Cor. vi. 1. 
Eph. vi. 11. Col. iii. 13, 19. Heb. xii. 4. 
Rev. xiii. 6, and Class. — ii. of time : 
1) prop, of time ivhen any thing is, to- 
wards^ near^ Lu. xxiv. 29, ort Trpos sariri- 
pav io-Ti, and Class. 2) as forming with 
the accus. a periphr. for an adv. of time, 
equal to at^ for ; Trpos Kaipdv^ for a sea- 



son^ awhile, Luke viii. 13. Trpos Kaipov 
iopa^^ 1 Th. ii. 17. John v. 35 : so Heb. 
xii. 10, Trpos oXiya^ rjpL&pa^, ver. 11, 
TTpos TO TTOLpov^for the present. Jam. iv. 
14, 7rpo9 oXiyov^ sc. yjiovov^ and Class. 
— III. FIG. as denoting the direction, re- 
ference, relation^ which one object has 
towards or to another: 1) towards^ i. e, 
in reference to^ in respect to, as to, imply- 
ing the direction or remote object of an 
action. (1) with accus. of pers, Mk. xii. 
12, 'iyvodcrav otl Trpos avrov^ t^v irapa' 
(BoXi}v eIite. Acts xxiv. 16, d-Trp. arvvEL- 
StjCTLv &x^''^ Tppos TOf Qeov, Rom. iv. ^. 
Heb. i. 7, and Class. (2) with accus. of 
thing, Heb. ix. 13, dyid^Ei Trpos t^i/ ttJs 
cap/cos /ca0apoT7]Ta. Lu. xviii. 1. 2 Cor. 
iv. 2 : so after verbs of replying. Matt, 
xxvii. 14. Rom. viii. 31, and Class. Here 
belongs the construction tu Trpos tlvu or 
Ti, things relating or pertaining io any 
person or thing ; Td Trpos &iprivr]v, either 
prop. Lu. xiv. 32, ' conditions of peace,' 
or fig. xix. 42; Td Trpos Ttji; ■)(pELav^ 
' things necessary,' Acts xxviii. 10 ; Td 
TTpos ^w^i/, 2 Pet. i. 3 ; Td Trpos to** 
0£oi/, things pertaining to God, divine 
things, Ex. xviii. 19. Rom. xv. 17, and 
oft. in Class, as Td Trpos TroXspLov or 
s.iprivi]v, 2) spoken of a rule, standard, 
according to, in conformity with, &c. Lu. 

xii. 47, fxri^i Trot77<ras Trpos to ^iXripia 
avTov. 2 Cor. v. 10, Trpos a tirpa^sv. 
Gal. ii. 14. Eph. iii. 4. 3) of the motive, 
ground, or occasion of an action, equiv. to 
on account of, because of, for, Matt. xix. 
8, M. Trpos T77J/ (TKXt]poKapdLau vpLwu 
iTrtTp&xlfEu. Mk. X. 5, and Class. 4) as 
marking the end or result, the aim or pur- 
pose of an action ; Trpos TL,for whatl why^ 
i. e. to what end, for what purpose, John 

xiii. 28. (1) after verbs, as expressing the 
end, aim, tendency of an action or quality, 
Acts iii. 10, 6 Trpos ttjV iXEt}p.ocrvvr]u 
Ka6vp.Evo9. Rom. iii. 26. xv. 2. ] Cor. vi. 
5, Trpos EPTpcTrrju vpilv Xiyo). vii. 35. x. 
11. 1 Tim. iv. 7. 1 Pet. iv. 12; espec. 
foil, by inf. with to, to the end that. Matt. 
V. 28, Trds 6 fiXiirodv yvvaiKa Trpos to 
ETrLdvpLtjaaL auT^s. vi. 1, Trpos to Oeu- 
drivai avToU. xiii. 30. Mk. xiii. 22. Eph. 
vi. 11. Jam. iii. 3, & Class. (2) after nouns 
and adjectives, John xi. 4, dcrhivEia Trpos 
^dvarov. Eph. iv. 14. Col, ii. 23. John 

iv. 35, XeVKu'l eIcTL TTpOS dEpL(Tn6v. ActS 

xxvii. 12. 2 Cor. ii. 16. x. 4. Eph. iv. 29, 
oft. and Class. Also of a tendency or re- 
sult, 2 Pet. iii. 16, Trpos T7ji/ Idiav avTcou 
diruiXELav. 1 John v. 16, /ut] Trpos ddua- 
Tov : so dpLapTia Trpos ^du, ver. 16, 17. 
5) of the relation in which one pers. or thing 
stands towards another, towards, ivith, 
&c. Lu. xxiii. 12, iv Eydpa o^tes Trpos 
EttuTous. Rom. V. 1, Eip'^vr]v £X« Trpos 
TOi; 6£oV. Acts ii. 47. xxviii. 25, davp.- 



npo 



369 



npo 



iptouoL oi;t£s irpo^ aWriXovs. 2 Cor, vi. 
13 : so diaTLdea-daL SiadriKiiu tt/oos Tii/a, 
to make a covenant ivith any one, Acts iii. 
25. Heb. ix. 20. x. 16. So in a compari- 
son, Rom. viii. 18, Trpos nrr]V fxi\\ov(Tav 
do^av. — IV. sometimes tt/oos with acc. is 
used after verbs which express simply rest 
at^ by^ in a place, equiv. to irpos with dat. 
1) with acc. of place, Mk. xi. 4, dtdEfxE- 
vov TTpos Ti)v ^vpav. xiv. 54, ^spixaivS- 
fxEvo^ Trpos TO ^ws, at or toivards the 
fire. Lu. xxii. 56. John xx. 11. 2) with 
acc. of person, equiv. to with, by, among. 
Matt. xxvi. 18, Trpds ck iroiu) to Trdaxa. 
ver. 55, Mk. xiv. 49. Acts xii. 20. xiii. 
31. 1 Cor. ii. 3. xvi. 7. 2 Cor. i. 12, al. 
3) rarely, and only in later usage, the idea 
of previous motion or direction is wholly 
dropped, and 7rpo$ with acc. is then equiv. 
to irapa with dat. Mk. ii. 2, Ta Trpds Tr]v 
^vpav. iv. 1. Matt. xiii. 56. John i. 1. Phi- 
lem. 13. — Note. In comp. irpo's implies, 
,1. motion, direction, reference towards, to, 
ai, &c. as Trpocrdyoi, Trpocrgyyi^o), Trpoa-- 
ipXOfxai, irpocrBoKdu) : 2. accession, addi- 
tion, tliereto, over and above, more, fur- 
ther, as Trpoa-aLTta), irpocrairsLXiu), hence 
intens. as irp6(nr&Lvo^, irpocr^Lkri^ : 3. 
nearness, n^ar, at, by, as TTpocr&dpEvoa, 
TTpocfxivui, 

Jlpoardp(3aTOv, ov, to, (Trpo, cajS- 
^arov,) lit. fore-sabbath^ eve of the sabbath, 
equiv. to irapaa-KEvr}, Mk. xv. 42. Judith 
viii. 6. 

npoa-ayopEvu), fut. Evaro), gener. to 
speak to, accost, any one, to address, salute ; 
also to call by name, to name, Jos. Ant. 
XV. 8, 5. Xen. Mem. iii. 2, 1 ; hence in 
N. T. to name, declare, pass. Heb. v. iO, 
irpocray. viro tov Qeou ap^iEpEv^ : or 
rather, there is a blending of two senses, 
namely, named or declared, and consti- 
tuted. 

Yipoaray (ti, f. ^to, aor. 2. TrpocTTyya- 
yov, to lead or coruiu^t any one, to bring 
mar: 1) trans, with acc. Lu. ix. 41, 
irpoddyayE ia^E tov vlou (tov : with acc. 
and dat. Acts xvi, 20, Trpoa-ay. avTov^ 
Tots <TTpaTi]yoL9. Sept. and Class. Im- 
plying admission or access to any one, as, 
in Class., introduction to a king, Xen. 
Cyr. i. 3, 8. In N. T. used fig. of God, 
to bring near, py^esent before, with acc. and 
dat. 1 Pet. iii. 18, iVa rip.d's irpotraydyy 
TM Qeco, i. e. ' bring us into a state of 
reconciliation with God.' 2) intrans. to 
come or dra^v near, to approach, with dat. 
Acts xxvii. 27, vitevoovv oi vuvtul 
'jrpoadyELV Tivd auTots ^thpav, ' the 
Bailors deemed that some country drew 
near to them meaning, by a usual sea- 
phrase founded on a well-known optical 
illusion, (by which, on drawing near to a 
coast, the land seems to approach to the 



ship, not the ship to the land,) *that they 
were drawing near to some land.' So 
Achill. Tat. ii. 2, 32, t»;i/ yi]v etxipw/uLEU 
diro T^s i/Eos dvaxoiipovcrav, tos avTr]v 
TrXiova-av. 

npocraycoyrj, 77, ('Trpocrdyw,) a 
leading or bringing to, accession, Plut. vi. 
p. 201. Thuc. i. 82. In N. T. approach, 
access, admission. Eh tl, Rom. v. 2, Eh t^v 
X^P'-^ TavTYiv, Eph.ii. 18, dC avTov t'x^" 
fXEv Ti)V irp. Trpds tov TLaTEpa : absol. 
iii. 12, Ev (Z EXOfMEv irp. (Trpds toV' 0£df ), 
as said of the free access to God obtained 
for us by Christ, meaning both access in 
prayer, and access as to salvation, or intro- 
duction to a state of favour and accept- 
ance. In the Class, the term is only used 
of introdtwtion to some powerful person. 

TLpocraLT EO), f. tJcw, (-tt/oos, atTs'w,) 
to ask in addition, to demand besides, Xen. 
An. i. 3, 21. In N. T. to beg, absol. Mk. 
X. 46, al. Sept. and later Class. 

UpocaiTi]^, ov, 6, (TTpoa-aLTiw,) a 
beggar, John ix. 8, in later edit, for 
Tu<^Xds. 

JlpocravafiaLvu), aor. 2. Trpoa-ifSr^v, 
to go up further, higher, with dvvorspov 
pleon. Lu. xiv. 10, (p'lXe, Trpoc-avdjSridL 
dvwTEpov, ' take a higher seat,' Sept. and 
Class, but not in the same sense. 

lIpo(Tava\L(TKw, f. Xtocco, prop, to 

consume besides, or eocpend further, as De- 
mosth. 1025, 20. Plut. p. 3, 11. Such, 
however, cannot be the sense in Lu, viii, 
43, 77Ti5 laTpoh TrpocravaXuxraaa oXov 
TOV (3lov. Yet the preposition there is not, 
as Schleusner and others regard it, pleon- 
astic, but rather intensive, i. e. ' had gi^a- 
dually and entirely spent.' Perhaps, how- 
ever, the Trpds in this as well as many 
other instances, merely denotes movement 
or direction towards any thing. So at Dio 
Cass. 353, 62, we have irdvTa tu vTrdp- 
XovTa fxoL irpoaravaXixiKa vjuuv, and Diog. 
Laert. vi. 98, eI tov xpovov ov E/uiEXXov 
IcToTs irpocravaXcocTELv, tovtov &h ttul- 
Seiuv KaTEXpV(^cifxr}v, 

Tl pocravaTrXr} po (a, f. wau), to Jill 
up further, supply fully, Ta vcrTEpyijuaTa, 
2 Cor. ix. 12. xi. 9, and Class. 

TL poaavaTlQr] fii, f. O^a-co, prop, to 
lay up in addition, mid. to take upon one's 
self besides, as an additional burden, Xen. 
Mem. ii. 1,8; in N. T. only mid. aor. 2. 
Trpoa-avEdi/ji^v, fig. to lay before in addi- 
tion, to impart or communicate further, 
i.e. on one's own part: 1) gener. with 
acc. and dat. Gal. ii. 6, EjULol oi Sokovute's 
ovdkv TTpoaraviQEVTO. 2) by way of con- 
sultation, — to confer with, consult, with 
dat. Gal. i. 16, ou irpo<TavEQifxr]v aapKi 
Kai aLfiaTL. So Diod. Sic. xvii. 116, 



npo 



370 



npo 



T0t9 fiaVTEO-L TT. TTSpL TOV Cr] jULE LOV . 

Lucian Trag. 1, i/nol irpoa-avddov' Xd^s 
fxe arvfxftovXov •jtovodv. Here the Trpos 
merely denotes direction, as perhaps in the 
compound TrpoaavaXLaKU), lit. ' to commit 
or deposit any commmiication' to another, 
lay one's case open to him, refer it to him, 
and thus consult him in the matter. 

TLpoaaireLXiu), f. ricra), to threaten 
further, absol. Acts iv. 21, and Class. 

TLpocrbaTvavdco, f. ricrw, fo spend fur- 
ilier, with acc. Lu. x. 35, and Class. 

TLpocrBio fxai, f. vcrojULuL, depon. pass. 
to need besides, in addition, with gen. Acts 
xvii. 25. Sept. and Class. 

UpoarBixoixaL, f. ^o/nat, depon. mid. 
to receive to one's self, to admit, trans. 1 ) 
of THINGS, fig. to admit, allow, Trjv kXiTL- 
da, Acts xxiv. 15 ; negat. Heb. xi. 35, ov 
TrpoaroE]^. Tr]v aTroXuTpcocnv, not accept- 
ing, equiv. to rejecting. So Pol. i. 17, 1, 
& 63, 1, nrp. T-ds crvvd^Ka?. Of evils, to 
put up with, endure, Heb. x. 34, Tr/i/ 
dpirayrjv tiov virapyovTUiV. So Exod. 
X. 17, Trpocrdi^a^rdi fxov Tr]V dfiapTLav, 
i. e. put up with, overlook. 2) of per- 
sons, to receive, to admit, i. e. to one's 
presence and kindness, Lu. xv. 2, ovto^ 
afxapTcoXov^ irpocrdiyETai, Sept. and 
Class, as Thuc. ii. 12. So in hospitality, 
to receive kindly, to entertain, as a guest, 
Rom. xvi. 2. Phil. ii. 29. Sept. 1 Chron. 
xii. 18. 3) of things future, to wait for, 
expect, with acc. Lu. xii. 36, dyOpcoTrot? 
•7rpo(r^£X- TOV KvpLov eavTcov, htote kjt.X, 
Acts xxiii. 21 : so of a future good, with 
the idea of faith, confidence, Tr/i/ jSaor. tov 
0£ou, Lu. xxiii. 51. TrapdKXnaLv, ii. 25. 
XvTpwaiv, ver. 38. ttjv fxaKapiav iXir'i^a, 
Tit. ii. 13. TO £X.£os tov Kvpiov, Jude 
21, and Class. 

TlpoaSoKda), f. rjcrio, (7rpo5, Sokevoo,) 
prop, to watch toward or for any thing, ~ 
to looJc for, expect : 1) absol. or with inf. 
=: to think, suppose, Matt. xxiv. 50, h 
rj/jLEpa y ov 'jrpocrdoKa. Lu. iii. 15. Acts 
xxviii. 6 ; with inf. ib. ot irpocTEdoKtou 
avTov K.T.X. Jos. and Class. In the 
sense of to hope. Acts xxvii. 33, with inf. 
iii. 5, and Class. 2) with acc. to wait 
for, to await; of person, Matt. xi. 3, 77 
ETspov TrpocrhoKuifjiEV ; Lu. vii. 19. i. 21, 
TTpocrdoKwv TOV "Lay^. viii. 40. Acts x. 24; 
acc. of thing, 2 Pet. iii. 12, Tr]v irapov- 
ciav, and vero 13, 14. Sept. and Class. 

TLpocr^oKLa, a<s, tj, {'TrpoorSoKdio,) 
prop, a hokiiig for, Pol. i. 31, 3. Jos. Ant. 
XV. 3, 4 ; also expectation. In N. T. only 
of evil, Lu, xxi. 26, diro (^o^ov kuI 
irpoaSoKLa^ twv ETrEp^OfxivuiV, So Jos. 

Ant. XV. 3, 4, ETTL fXElX^OVO'S KUKOV TTpOCT- 

doKLa, and v. 104; also Thuc. vi. Trpos 
TOV irpwTov (popov Koi TTpoadoKLav. 



Most frequently, however, in Class, the 
word is used only of good. Meton. as 
Gen. xlix. 10, avTo^, i. e. the Messiah, 
irpocrdoKta kdvcbv. Acts xii. 11, t^s tt/o. 
TOV Xaov TUiv 'lovB., i. e. * the evils which 
the Jews expect to come upon me.' 
Jlpo(TB pdfx<jo, see TlpocTpix'^* 
YLpocTEdo), f. dcroD, (tt/oos and kdui,) 
to permit or suffer further, with dat. Acts 

xxvii. 7, 1X7] irpO(TE(i)VTO^ tipUV TOV dvE/ULOV, 

i. e. ' the wind not suffering us to proceed 
further' on that course, -Trpos for Trpoaco, 
as in several passages of the Class, adduced 
by me in Rec. Syn. 

Upoc-Eyyi'^^co, f. ia-co, (fyyigw,) to 
come n£ar unto any one, with dat. Mk. 

ii. 4, Sept. Pol. xxxix. 1, 4. 

TLpoGTESpEvu}, f. Eva-a>, {irpocrEhpo's, 
sitting by, from £<5pa,) to sit near hy, lit. 
adsideo, e. gr. by other persons, Dem. 313, 
11. Eurip. Or,' 397; also, 'to be in re- 
spectful attendance upon' any person, or Ho 
be assiduously occupied about' any thing. 
In N. T. to wait near, to attend, serve, 
with dat. 1 Cor, ix. 13, ol tm ^va-LacrTr}- 
pLo) TTpodE^pEvovTE's, wlicrc thc abovc two 
senses seem blended. So Jos. contra Ap. 

i. 7, Ty ^EpairEia tov Beov Trp. Diod. 
Sic. V. 46, irp. Tats toov ^eu)V ^spa- 

TTELai'S. 

Upoa-EpydX^ofiaL, f, dcrofxai, depon. 
mid. to work out in addition, to gain more 
hy Ictbour, Hdot. vi. 61. In N. T. gener. 
to gain besides, in addition, Lu. xix. 16, v 
fxvd orov irpooTELpy. Seku fxvd^. 

U poaripxopiaL, f, EXEvao/uLat, depon. 
mid. to come to or near to any place or 
person, to approach, intrans. I. prop, and 
foil, by dat. after Trpos in comp. ; e. gr. 
dat. of place, Heb. xii. 18, ov yap irpocr- 
EXr\XvdaTE xlfriXa<pa)iuiiv(v opEi. ver. 22, 
and Class. Foil, by dat. of pers. Matt. iv. 
3, /cat nrpocTEXddiV avTtZ — eIttev* viii. 5. 
Absol. or with dat. impl. Matt, iv. 11, 
ayyEXoL 'jrpoafjXdov Kai k.t.X. Mk. i. 
31. Lu. viii. 24. x. 34, al.^ Sept. and 
Class. In the sense of to visit, to have 
intercourse with. Acts x. 28. xxiv. 23. — 
IT. FIG, 1) of God or Christ, to come to 
God, to draw near unto, in prayer, wor- 
ship, implying the devotion of heart and life ; 
with dat. Heb. vii, 25, toi/s TrpocrEpx- ^t' 
avTov TOO 0, xi. 6, with Tto Oeco impl. 
Heb. X. 1, 22. So iv. 16, 'TrpoarEpxoip.Eda 
ovv — Tco 2rp6vw Ttj^ x^P'-'^^^' Sept, 
Lev. xxi. 21. Deut. xxi. 5, of approaching 
to the altar in sacrifice. Of Christ, I Pet. 

ii. 4, TTpoS ov TTpOCTEpXOpiEVOl, tO whoM 

coming, i. e. ' becoming his disciples, fol- 
lowers.' So of disciples, with dat. Xen. 
Mem. i. 2, 47. ib. i. 6, 1. 2) with dat. of 
thing, to assent to, embrace, 1 Tim. vi. 3, 
/mt] irpoaripx^'^c^i' vyiaivovcn XoyoL^, So 



npo 



371 



npo 



Philo, p. 289, iuLi]dtvL irpoaripx^^^^'- 
yvcofxt} TU)V sipiumiviou, and 401, irpoo"- 
S\0O1/T£S dpETrj. 

Ilpoa-Evxv^ I'h {irpoa-Evxo^aL^) 

prayer offered to God, whether by way of 
petition for good, Matt. xxi. 22, or depre- 
cation of evil, Matt. xvii. 21, al. I. prop. 

TT/O. TTpOS TOV 0. ActS xii. 5. f] "TTp. TOV 

9. prayer to God, Lu. vi. 12 : gener. and 
absol. 'Matt. xvii. 21, si jui) kv irp. kul 
vijarsia. xxi. 22. Lu. xxii. 45, dvaarTa's 
diro Ttj^ irp. So oIkos irp. Jiouse OF 
prayer, i. e. for prayer, Matt. xxi. 13, 
al. Acts i. 14, 7rpo(TKapT£povvTe9 Ty irp. 
vi. 4. 17 lopa T7]^ Trp. iii. 1. x. 31. Rom. 
xii. 12. plur. Acts ii. 42. x. 4, oft. — II, 
METON. proseucha, equiv. to oT/cos or 
To7ro9 Trp. house or place of prayer, an 
oratory. Acts xvi. 13, ou kvofx'C^&To 
irpovevxh el^at. ^er. 16, i. e. according to 
the interpretation of most recent com- 
mentators. But I have in my note in loc. 
given, I apprehend, good reasons why it 
cannot be admitted. 

npoo-euxo/xai, (f. Jo^aat, imperf. 
'TTpoa-i^uxoM^^ aor. 1. 7rpo<ji]v^dfxr]V, de- 
pon. mid.) to pray to God, to offer prayer, 
1 Cor. xi. 13, 0€w TTp. Matt.^vi. 6^ 
irp. Tw HaTpi : absol. or with tw Gew 
impl. ver. 5, oTav irpoaevxV' ^* 
23. Mk. i. 35, oft. The manner in which 
one prays is expressed by the dat. 1 Cor. 
xi. 5, yvuij TTpocTEvxofJ-kvr] a/cara/caXuTr- 
Tto Tr7 KE(pa\y. xiv. 14, yXwacrri. ver. 
15, TTVEOfxaTL, TO) VOL. Jamcs V. 17, 
irpoa-Evxv Trpo(7r]v^aTO, he prayed earn- 
estly ; Eph. vi. 18, kv TTVEiffxaTL. Jude 
20 ; the matter of one's prayer, the words 
uttered, &c. are put after ouVtos, Matt, 
vi. 9. Xiytov, xxvi. 39. eIttov, Acts i. 24; 
or in the acc. Rom. viii. 26 ; the object, or 
thing prayed for, is put after 'iva or 'iva fii], 
Matt. xxiv. 20. Mk. xiv. 35, 38. Eh o— 
'iva, 2 Th. i. 11 ; the subject, or person for 
whom one prays, is put with a preposition, 
TTEpi with gen. Acts viii. 15. Col. i. 3. iv. 
3 : vTrkp with gen. Matt. v. 44. Col. i. 9 : 
iirl with acc. James v. 14. 

iipoo-Ex^i 5"^? p^^p- ^^^^ 

thing towards any pers. Jer. vii. 24, Trp. 
TO ous avTvov. Hdot. iv. 200, -Trp. t^v da- 
TTt^a : or thing, as a ship towards a place, 
to sail towards, ix. 99, irp, -rds vtja^ : 
also intrans. to hold om's course towards 
a place, as oft. in Class. ; in N. T. only fig. 
I. TRANS, absol. with tov vovv impl. to 
apply one^s mind to any thing, to attend to, 
oft. in Class, and in N. T. 1 ) gener. and 
with dat. of thing spoken. Acts viii. 6, 
irpocrEXxov oi ox^ol toTs XEyofxivoL^. 
Heb. ii. 1. 2 Pet. i. 19. Sept. and Class. 
In the sense of to yield assent, to believe, 
embrace. Acts xvi. 14, Trpoakx^i-v to'^s 
XaXov/xivoL^. 1 Tim. 1. 4. Tit. i. 14. 



Apocr. Jos. and lat. Class. "With dat. of 
person, to care for, ivatch over. Acts xx. 
28, TTpocrix^'T^ kavToU : so Epict. Ench. 
51, 1, 7rpo(T£^£t5 aEavTM. 2) reflex. 
"TrpocEX^LV kavTcp or kavTol's, totaJceheed 
to one's self, beicare, mostly imperat. Lu. 
xvii. 3. Acts V. 35 : with aTro tivo^, Lu. 
xii. 1, Trpoarix^'J'E kavToT^ dizo t?;§ XJ)- 
fjLTi^: with fxvTToi-E, xxi. 34. So ellipt. 
with gauTots impl. foil, by /uri v*ith inf. 
Matt. vi. 1, irpocrEX^TE fxt] ttoleIv, and 
Class.. : by diro tlvo<s, vii. 15, Trpoa-ix^Te 
diro Tcov \lrEvdo'7rpo(pr]ru}V. X. 17. Lu. 
XX. 46. Sept. and lat. Class.— II. in- 
trans. or with kavTov impl. prop, to hold 
to any person or thing, = to apply one's 
self, give or devote one's self to any thing ; 
with dat. of thing, olvto ttoXXco, 1 Tim. 
iii. 8: so Polysen. viii. 56, Tpv(prj kul fikOi^. 
n-y dvayvoocTEL, 1 Tim. iv. 13 : so Hdot. 
ix. 33, Thuc. and others : tw ^va-Lacr- 
Trjptw, ii: to give attendance, to minister, 
Heb. vii. 13 ; of pers, — to adhere to, to 
follow. Acts viii. 10, 11. 1 Tim. iv. 1, 
'Trpo(TixovTE<2 irvEVfxaarL irXdvoL^. 

npo(Tt]/\.o 60, f. waui, to nail to any 
thing, to affix with nails, espec. to a cross ; 
foil, by acc. and dat. Col. ii. 14, Trpoo-- 
r^Xwcras avTo tuj CTaupa). Plut. t. ii. 
p. 206, A. cTvv'hp'KacrE toOs X-jyo-Tas Kai 
7rpoarriXu)(r£, Jos. Bell. ii. 14, 9. 

H po<T-n\vT09, ov, 6, 7?, {irpoaipxo- 
fxai,) prop. ' one who comes to another 
country or people,' a stranger, sojourner, 
Sept. Ex. xii. '48, sq. xx. 10; in N. T. 
only in the later Je-vvish sense, a proselyte, 
a convert from paganism to Judaism, Matt, 
xxiii. 15. Acts ii. 11. vi. 5; the same are 
called oi (po(Sovia.EvoL and (te^oixevol tov 
Oeov, Acts xiii. 16, 50 ; also 'lovhaltX^ov- 
TE's, Jos. Bell. ii. 1 8, 2. On the kinds of 
proselytes, &c. see Calmet. 

Hpoo-zcatpos, ov, 6, v, adj. instead of 
phrase irpd<s KULptp, for a season, i. e. 
transient, temporary, enduring only for a 
while. Matt. xiii. 21, Trpdcr/catpos kcTiv, 
' is but a temporary and unstable disciple.' 
In 2 Cor. iv. 18, opp. to ai(hvio<s. Jos. & 
Class. 

npoarKaXito, f. Eono, to call to, to 
summon, send for ; in N. T. only mid. 
IT pocrKaXiofxai, to call any one to one's 
self to call for, summon, with acc. of pers. 
Matt. X. 1, TTpoaKaX. tous du}§EKa /uLadi^- 
Td§ avTov. Mk. iii. 13. vi. 7, oft. Sept. & 
Class. Fig. of God, to call, invite men to 
embrace the gospel. Acts ii. 39 ; also to 
call one to any office or duty, — to ap- 
point, to choose, perf. pass. 7rpo(7/c£K:X.rj- 
fxai, as mid. Acts xvi. 10. xiii. 2, e'l^ to 
Epyov (cis) o TTpoa-KEKXrjjULaL auTous. 

npoo-/<:«pT£p£oo, f. 77crw, to be strong 
or firm towards any thing, to endure or 



npo 



372 



n p o 



persevere in or witTi^ = to he continually in^ 
with, or near any person or thing, intrans. ; 
e. gr. of a work, business, to continm in, 
persevere in, be constantly engaged or oc- 
cupied with, foil, by dat. -ry Trpocrivxih 
Acts i. 14. vi. 4 ; Ttj dLdaxy-, ii. 42 ; by 
£15 avTo TovTO, ' for this very purpose,' 
Rom. xiii. 6. Jos. and Class. ; of place, 
iv Tw Upco, Acts ii. 46 ; of person, to re- 
main near, to wait upon, so as to be in 
readiness, with dat. Mk. iii. 9, tVa irkoid- 
piov irpoo'KapT&py avTw : by impl. to 
attend upon, adhere to any one, with dat. 
Acts viii. 13, tw <I>iXi7r7rw, and oft. in 
Class. 

Tlpoa-KapTipya-L?, sco^, rj, (Trpoo"- 
KapTsplu),) perseverance, continuance in 
any thing, Eph. vi. 18, kv "Tracrri irpoarK. 
Kai ^€^<r€t, equiv. to irpocTKapTEpovvTi^ 

Jlpoo'KecpdXaLov, ov, to, (7rpo5, 
KECpaXi],) a pillow, or cushion for the 
head : in Mk. iv. 38, it is used of the 
cushion to sit upon, used by sailors, but 
occasionally used as a pillow. 

Tlpo(TK\r\p6w, f. COCO), to give or 
assign hy lot, to allot to any one, as for- 
tune, destiny, Diod. Sic. iii. 48. Lucian 
Amor, 3 ; in N. T. aor. 1. pass. Trpoo-g/cXtj- 
pwOtjM, as mid. to allot o/ze's self to any 
one, q. d. 'to join one's lot to his lot,' to 
contort with, adhere to, with dat. Acts xvii. 
4, ETreLffdricrav Kai irpocreKX. tco IlavXa). 
Philo, p. 741, 1001. 

UpoaKXl'vo), f. Lvu), prop, to incline or 
lean a thing toivards or upon another, in- 
trans. and fig. to incline towards, to favour; 
in N. T. aor. 1. pass. '7rpocr£/cXt0r]i;, as 
mid. to incline one's self towards, fig. to 
join on^s self to any one's party, to adhere 
to him, with dat. Acts v. 36, w Trpocr- 
EKXidr] dpLBfjLos dvSpwv, later edd. Trpoc- 
EKoXXtidt], text. rec. See my note. 

UpoarKXio-L?, £0)9, 77, (Trpoo-zcXti/oj,) 
prop, a leaning against, also inclination 
towards ; in N. T. fig. a leaning toivards, 
partiality, 1 Tim. v. 21. Polyb. v. 51, 8, 
al. Clem. 1 Cor. § 21. Jos. Ant. xix. 3, 3. 

Ylpocr KoXXdia, f. ri<T03, to glue one 
thing to another, pass, to become glued, to 
adhere to any thing, Jos. vii. 12, 4, to join 
to, unite with, Plut. J, Cses. 29, rr/y ^acri- 
XiKr]v Ty dyopa irpocrEKoXXriaEV : in 
N. T. aor. 1. pass. irpotrzKoXXridriv, as 
mid. to join on^s self to any one as a com- 
panion or follower, with dat. Acts v. 36, 
text. rec. : fut. pass. 'Kpo(rKoXX.r\Br]<yoixaL, 
to he joined with or to join one's self unto, 
i. q. to cleave unto, as a husband to his 
wife, with dat. TrpocrKoXX. Tt; yvuaLKc 
auTov, Matt. xix. 5 ; -rrpo? rr/i/ yvvalKa, 
Mk. x. 7. Eph. V. 31. 

IlpoarKOfifia, arcs, to, (xpocr/coTr- 



Tct),) a stumhling, scil. ^uXov irpoarKofi' 
fxaTo^, Ecclus. xxxiv. 7 ; in N. T, only 
fig. Xi0o5 irpocrKofXfxaTo^, ' a stone of 
stumbling,' spoken of Chiist as the occa- 
sion of fall and perdition to those who re- 
ject him, Rom. ix. 32, 33. Comp. Is. viii. 
14: meton. equiv. to a stumhling-hlock, 
i.e. fig. a cause of falling, a% occasion of sin- 
ning, Rom.xiv. 13, fxt) TiQivai TrpoaKOfxixa 
Tw d8£X(f)cp. 1 Cor. viii, 9. Rom. xiv. 
20, did TrpoaKOfjifxaTO's. Sept. &, Ecclus. 
xvii. 25. xxxix. 24. 

JlpocrKOirr], rj<s, rj, (irpoGrKOTrTU),) 
prop, a stumbling, fig. offence, 1. e. 'a being 
off"ended,' indignation ; in N. T. meton. 
offence, i. e. cause of offence, occasion of 
falling into sin, 2 Cor. vi. 3, /Lt^j Bl^ovts.^ 
Trpoa-KoirriV' 

Upoa-KOTTTOD, f. ^o), prop. to heed to- 
ivards, i. e. upon any thing, to strihe against : 
in N.T. 1 ) gener. & intrans. with dat. Matt, 
vii. 27, OL dvEfxoi 'Trpoa-iKoxlrav Ty oiKia. 
Theophr. Hist. PI. iv. 8, 8, fxtj 'Trpoa-Koxfry 
T(Z ocpdaX/uLio. 2) spec. & trans, to strike 
THE FOOT against any thing, = to stumble, 
absol. Johnxi. 9, 10 : foil, byacc. andTrpos 
with acc. Matt. iv. 6, /xt^ttote Trpoa-Koxj/ri^ 
Trpos Xidov Toy TroSa <rou. So Aristoph, 
Vesp. 275, TTpoariKoxl/' kv tw <tk6tm tov 
BdKTvXov TTov. Fig. to stumhlc at any 
thing, to take offence at, so as to fall into 
error and sin, absol. 1 Pet. ii. 8, ot wpo(T- 

KOTTTOVG-L, TW XoyO) dTTEldoVVTE^ I wlth 

dat. Rom. ix. 32 ; with h to, xiv. 21. 

Tlpoo'KvXLco, f. ia-u), to roll to or upon 
any thing, Xtdov ttj ^vpa. Matt, xxvii. 
60. kiri TT]v ^upav, Mk. xv. 46. 

UpocKwla), fut. Tjcto, prop, to kiss 
towards any one, i. e. to kiss one's own 
hand and extend it towards a person, in 
token of respect and homage : the ancient 
oriental mode of salutation, between per- 
sons of equal rank, was to kiss each other 
on the lips ; when the diflFerence of rank 
was slight, they kissed each other on the 
cheek; when one was much inferior, he 
fell on his knees and touched the ground 
with his forehead or prostrated himself, 
kissing at the same time his hand towards 
the superior. This latter action Greek 
writers express by irpoa-KvvitM. See Hdot. 
i. 134. Xen. Cyr. v. 3, 18 : hence in N. T. 
and gener. to do reverence or homage to 
any one, usually by kneeling or prostra- 
ting one's self before him. I. gener. 
towards a person as superior, to whom one 
owes reverence and homage, or from whom 
one implores aid; absol. with words ex- 
pressing prostration added. Acts x. 25, 6 

Kopi/. TTECOOl/ kirl TOUS TTO^aS 7rpO(T£KV- 

VTjcrev : simply. Matt. xx. '20,'7rpo(rKvuov(ra 
Kai airovaa. Sept. Foil, by dat. of per- 
son in later usage, with words expressing 
prostration, Matt. ii. 11, ireorovTe^ Trpoa- 



npo 



373 



npo 



EKvvtja'av avTto. iv, 9, eav 'weacbv irpocr- 
#cui/»7<rr;s /ulol. xxviii. 9, iKpdTi]<rav avrov 
T0U5 TToda? /cat irpo<ytKVVi]aav avn-w. 
Mk. XV. 19, TiOei/TES TO. yovaTa irpoar- 
EKvvovv avTco : simply. Matt. ii. 2, n\do- 
fxev irpoaKwijaaL avTw. ver. 8, oft. Foil, 
by acc. in the earlier Greek usage, Lu. 
xxiv. 52, 'irpo<rKvvri(TavTE^ avnrov. From 
the Hebr. construed with evoottiov Tti/o?, 

Lu. iv. 7. EVCOTTLOV TU)U TToBcOU T/l/OS, 

Rev. iii. 9, and Sept. oft. — II. spec, as 
said of those who pay reverence and 
homage to the Deity, render divine 
honours, &c. to ivorsliip^ adore: 1) of 
God, absol. John iv. 20, oi iraTepE^ 
Tifxcou kv Tw opsL TouTO) 'irpo<rEKvvr](Tav. 
ver. 24, 6ei irpoa-KvvELU. xii. 20. Acts 
viii. 27. xxiv. 11. Jos. Ant. viii. 4, 4: 
prsegn. Heb. xi. 21, 7rpo<rEKvvt}(TEv ettl 
TO oLKpov Trj? pd(3Sov auTOv, ' he wor- 
shipped (leaning) upon the top of his 
staff.' Foil, by dat. with words express- 
ing prostration, 1 Cor. xiv. 25, ttectudv ettI 
irpocTMirov 'jrpo(TKvvri(yEi nrtZ G. Rev. iv. 
10. vii. 11 : simply, John iv. 21, irpoaKv- 
vi^(TETE Tw HaTpL Rov. xiv. 7. xix, 10, 
TO) Qeco 'TrpoaKvvr](Tov, Followed by 
acc. Matt. iv. 10, t6v Qeov crov irpoarKv- 
VT)<TEL9. John iv. 22 — 24 ; by eviottlov 
crov^ Rev. xv. 4. 2) of Christ, with 
dat. Heb. i. 6. 3) of angels, with ettectov 
E/jLTrpocrdEu^ and dat. Rev. xix. 10, absol. 
xxii. 8. 4) of false gods, idols, with dat. 
Acts vii. 48, oDs liroLricraTE irpocrKvvELV 
auTots. Rev. xvi. 2 ; with acc. ix. 20, tW 
fxrj irpoorKvvncriocn to. ^aifxovia. xiii. 8. 
Xen. Au. iii. 2, 13, irp. tous ^£ous. 

YlpoiTKVvriTri's^ ou, 6, {irpouKwiio^) 
a worshipper of God, John iv. 23. 

IXpocXaXlw, f. Tjcro), to speak to or 
with any one, foil, by dat. Acts xiii. 43, 
absol. xxviii. 20, and lat. Class. 

JlpocrXafx^avto^ f. X-n^^o/uLaL^ to take 
thereto^ in addition, to receive besides^ to 
take to or with one's self, in one's com- 
pany, Xen. Cyr. i. 4, 16; in N. T. mid. 
TrpoGXafx^dvopiaL^ to take to one's self^ 
also semi-pass, to receive to one's self. 1 ) 
to take to one'^s self, food, with gen. Acts 
xxvii. 36, TrpooEXd^ovTo nrpo(pri^ : so 
Jos. B. V. 10, 3, 7rpo<T(pEp£(rdaL n-pocj)?]^: 
with acc. fXYi^kv^ Acts xxvii. 33: with acc. 
of pers. to take to one's self q. d. to take by 
the hand and draw aside. Matt. xvi. 22, 
an action naturally accompanying advice, 
remonstrance, or censure. So Aristoph. 
Lysist. 1128, X.a/5oucra ^' u/xas, XoLdoprjaraL 
(3ov\ofjLaL : so ' to take to one's company, 
intercourse, house,' &c. Acts xvii. 5^7rpoa-\. 
TLvo^ avdpa^ irovripov^. xviii. 26. xxviii. 
2. Jos. and Class, 2) to receive to one's 
self i. e. to admit to one's society and fel- 
lowship, to receive and treat with kind- 
ness, foil, by acc. of pers. Rom. xiv. 1, 



Tov dcrdEVovvTa TricrTEi TrporrKajx^. 
ver. 3. XV. 7. Philem. 12, 17. Sept. Ps. 
Lxv. 4. 2 Mace. x. 15. 

II/Ooo-Xi]!// IS, «a)S, 17, ('7r/oo(rXajLi/3ai/(o,) 
prop, a taking to 07ie''s self ; in N. T. a re- 
ceiving^ admission^ Rom. xi. 15. 

YlpocriiEvoy^ f. tyou, to remain at a 
place, or with a person ; of place, absol. 
Acts xviii. 18. kv 'E<^£o-w, 1 Tim. i. 3. 
Of persons, to continue ivith any one, foil, 
by dat. Matt. xv. 32. Fig. to remain 
faithfid to any one, to adhere to, Acts xi. 
23. Metaph. to continue in any thing, = 
to he constant in, to persevere, with dat. 
1 Tim. V. 5, Tats dE-narEcn. Acts xi. 23, 
later edd. 

UpoaropiuLL'^u), f. t CO), to bring a ship 
to anchor at or near a place, Plut. vii. 217, 
Trpoo'opiuiLa'dEl^ tco ^ ApTEfxiaita, q. d. to 
cast anchor, land at; in N. T. mid. to 
come to anchor, draw in to shore, absol. 
Mk. vi. 53. Arr. Exp. Al. vi. 4, 3. 20, 7. 
iElian V. H. viii. 5. 

YlpoGO(pEi\o}, f. 77<rw, (o^giXo),) to 
owe besides, in addition, Philem. 19, o-eau- 
Tov fxot -Trpoo-oc^ei'Xfits. The expressioi^ 
is not, as Commentators say, put for the 
simple 7rpo(ro(f)EL\a} : signifying lit. ' to 
owe money besides what one has paid,' to 
be in debt ; and, properly speaking, it has 
no regimen. So Xen. CEcon. xx. 1, ol 
ovdk dvayKala SvvavraL Trop/^gcGat, 
dXXd Kai TrpococpELXovaL. Thuc. vii. 48, 
where see my note ; and Arist. Eth. iv. 3, 
Trpo(ro(f)Xr]crEL 6 vTrdpi^a^. When it car- 
ries an accus. there is an ellipsis of some 
prep. q. d. 'in respect to,' or 'as regards.' 
There is great elegance in the expression 
IT p. cTEavTov, with which we may compare 
a similar one of Demosth. 650, 23, irp, 
Xtt/otv avTto, and 37, 7, twv vfXEripwv 

avn-ttiV X^P'-^ '7rpO(TO(pELXETE. 

U pocrox^ t^^^ to'w, he indignant, 
angry at any one, implying detestation, 
loathing, with dat. Heb. iii. 10, 17, hib 
irpocru^X^Laa tt; ytvEa ekeivt}, in allusion 
to Ps. xcv. 10. So also Ecclus. 1. 25, kv 
Svalv EduEOTL TTpocrajx^tCTEr/ rj ^i'X*7 fiov, 
XXV. 5. Lev. xxvi. 43, and so the simple 
verb in Horn. II. i. 570. 

Upoa-'TrELvo's, ov, 6, rj, adj. (Trpos, in- 
tens. irElva,) very hungry. Acts x. 10. 

TS-pocrTTTiyvxi fXL, f. ttjJ^o), to fioo ox 
fasten to any thing, to affix, trans. Acts ii. 
23, TOVTov — TTpocnrri^avTE^ (tw ctcu- 
poo) dvEiXETE, Dio Cass. 230, p. 431. 

71 p a ariri IT TO), f. irEc-ovfjiaL, prop, to 
fall towards or upon any thing, to strike 
against, impinge, Xen. Eq. vii. 6. In 
N. T. I) of things, to fall upon^ to dash 
against, as the wind, with dat. Matt. vii. 
25, ol avEfjLoi TrpocriiTEcrov n-fj oiKia, and 
Class. 2) of persons, to fall down to or 



np 0 



3 



74 



npo 



hefore any one, i. e. at his feet in re- 
verence, or as a suppliant ; foil, by dat. of 
pers. Mk. iii. 11, irpocri'Ki'wrzv avT<^. 
V. 33. Foil, by toT? yovacri tujo^, Lu. 
V. 8. Sept. and Class. : by Trpos tov^ 
TToda^ Tii/os, Mk. vii. 25. So Sept. Ex. 
iv. 25. 

npocTTTot £0), f. vara), to make to 
or for any one, i. e. to gam foi\ i. e. 
some person or thing for another, as often 
in Thucyd. and Xenoph. Usually depon. 
mid. TrpocnroLEOfxaL, to make pretension to 
he so and so, — to claim or arrogate to one- 
self, Aristoph. Eccl. Hence in N. T, 
depon. mid. to mahe as though, to make a 
shoiv of, with inf. Lu. xxiv. 28, irpoa-- 
ETroL&lTo TToppuiTipu) TTopEVEO'daL, mean- 
ing, as Euthym. well explains, ' made a 
motion as though,' e(T)(^t]iLiai-LX^eTO. 

TlpocrTropsvojuiaL, f. s-varofjiaL, depon. 
pass, to go or conie to any one, with dat. 
Mk. x. 35, Sept. and Class. 

TlpocT pnyvyj {XL, f. pv^oo, to breaJc or 
burst towards or upon any thing, to dash 
against, as waves, intrans. with dat. Lu. 
vi. 48, 49, irpoa-ippr^^EV 6 TroTajJi6<s 
OLKLa. So TrpocrpTj^ts vdaToou, Hab. iii. 9, 
Symm. 

TLpoa-T ccT L£, lSo<s, 77, fern, to Trpocr- 
'TdT7js, a patroness, protectress, adjutrioc, 
Rom. xn. 2. Utterly unfounded is the 
opinion of certain learned Commentators, 
who suppose an allusion to the TrpocTTaTai, 
or patrons of the /jletolkol at Athens. 
The term is there, as in Lucian Char. 10, 
bis acc. 29, simply put for adjutrix, an- 
swering to patrona in Latin, (which might 
be in the mind of the Apostle,) e. gr. 
Terent. Eun. v. 2, 48, ' Te Tii'Mi patronam 
cupio.' 

II p o (TT a cro" CO, f. ^w, to set any per- 
son over others ; also, ' to enjoin any thing 
to others.' Hence in N. T. to command, 
prescribe to ; with dat. of pers. Matt. i. 24, 
u)<s Trpoarira^EV avTtZ ^ dyy. xxi. 6. 
Foil, by acc. and dat. in pass, constr. Acts 
X, 33, TTui/ra TO. irpocrTETayfxiva (TOL 
vTTo Tou 0. Foil, by inf. with acc. Acts 
X. 48 ; all which constructions are found 
in Class. Spoken of times or seasons, to 
prescribe or app>oint to any one, with dat. 
impl. Acts xvii. 26, opicra'S irpodTEray- 
fJLivov<5 KULpov's, (tcxt. rcc. irpoTETay- 
fxivovs,) ' certain determinate periods,' 
i. e. determined or marked out in the 
eternal counsels of God, Jonah ii. 1. iv. 
7-9. 

HpocTTtOij/xi, f. dnaoj, imperf. irpoc- 
tTid^v, 3 pers. TTpoarETidEi, to set, put, 
lay unto or ivith any thing, trans. 1) prop, 
foil, by TToos with acc. Acts xiii. 36,7rpo(r- 
£T£0jj Trpos Toi/§ Trarspas avTov^ an 
expression derived from the 0. T. (Gen. 



xlix. 29. XXV. 8. Judg. ii. 10,) used with 
allusion to those vast subterranean vaults, 
in which the Hebrews, and other Oriental 
nations, used to deposit the dead of a 
whole family or race. The expression 
occurs also in 1 Mace. ii. 69. 2) gener. 
— to join unto, to add unto ; of persons^ 
with acc. and dat. Acts ii. 47, 6 ^e K. 
itpoctetlQel tous (TUiX^. Kad' r]fJi. tt? ekkK, 
V. 14. xi. 24, Tw Kuptfo. Sept. and Jos. 
Of things, with acc. and dat. Lu, xvii. 5, 
7rpocr0£§ vixiv iriarTLv, Pass, with dat. 
Matt. vi. 33, Kai tuvtu ivavTa 'TrpocrTE- 
dva-ETUL vfjuu. Heb. xii. 19. Foil, by 
acc. and ettI with dat. Lu. iii. 20 ; iiri 
vdih acc. xii. 25. Sept. and Class. Hence 
by Hebr. before an infin., or sometimes a 
finite verb, to go on to do, to do any thing 
further; mid. aor. 2. TrpocrEdEfxriv with 
inf. Lu. XX. 11, 12, Kal irpocridETO tte/ul- 
xj/ai ETEpov, i. e. agai?i he sent. Sec. Acts 
xii. 3, TrpooridETO avWa^Elu Kai HiTpov, 
' he went on to seize also Peter.' So part. 
7rpoo-0£t§ before a finite verb, Lu. xix. 11, 
7rpocr0£is eItte Trapa^oX-nv. Sept. oft. Jos. 
Ant. vi. 13, 4. Pol. xxxi. 7, 4, Trpoadi- 

fXEVO^ €j7}'y£tT0. 

Hpoo-TpEXw, aor. 2. irpocrE^pafXov^ 
to run to or toicards any one, = to run up, 
absol. Mk. ix. 15. x. 17, and Class. 

Tipocr (p ay Lov, ov, to, {irpocrcpayE'LV, ) 
prop. ' what is eaten thereto,' i. e. along 
with bread ; hence meat, flesh, equiv. to 
oxp-Qu, though, like 6\l/dpLov, generally 
used offish, as John xxi. 5. 

Tlp6(T(paTo^, ov, o, 77, adj. prop, sig- 
nifying recently slain ; hence also, both in 
Class, and Hellenistic writers, /res^, recent. 
In N. T. gener. recent, new, Heb. x. 20. 

Tlpo(y(paT(jd^, adv. recently, lately. 
Acts xviii. 2, and Class. 

n p o cr 0 £ p CO, f. TTpoaoLcru), aor. 1 irpocr- 
TivEyKa, aor, 2. imperat. Trpocriv&yKE, 
perf. '7rpo(7Evr]voxc-^ to bear or bring to any 
place or person : I. gener. e. gr. of things, 
with acc. and dat. of place, i. q. to bring 
near ov put to, John xix. 29, irpocrriVEyKav 

aVTOV TtO (JTOfXaTL, sc. TOV (jTToyyov^ 

and Class. Of persons, foil, by acc. and 
dat. Matt. iv. 35, TrpoanvEyKav avTto 
irdvra<s k.t.X. viii. 16. ix. 2, al. & Class., 
So to bri?ig or conduct to or before any one, 
with acc. and dat. Matt, xviii. 24. Lu. 
xxiii. 14. £7rt Tiva, xii. 11 ; pass. Matt, 
xviii. 24.— II. to offer, to present to any 
one, with acc. and dat. e. gr. ojo?, Lu. 
xxiii. 36 ; Acts viii. 18 ; ^copa, 

' gifts,' Matt. ii. 11, in a sacrificial sense, 
of oblations offered to God, foil, by acc. 
and dat. tw Gfw, &c. e. gr. ^vaia^, Acts 
vii. 42. Heb. xi. 4. XaTpEiav, John xvi. 
2, kavroi;, Heb. ix. 14. Elsewhere with 
Tw Qelo or 7rpo5 tov Qeov impl. foil, by 
acc. simpl. Matt. v. 23, 24. Heb. viii. 3, 



npo 



375 



n p 0 



bis, 4. ix. 25. The person or thingybr or 
071 account q/* which offering is made, is 
put with vTrkp or Trt pt, e. gr. virip tlvo9 
with acc, Heb. v. 1. — III. mid. with dat. 
fig. to bear oneself toicards any one, to deal 
'witk, treat any one so and so, Heb. xii. 7, 
60S uioTs vfxLV Trpoa-cpip&n'aL a 0£O9, and 
oft. in Class., espec. Xen. and Dio Cass. 

npocr0tA.j;s, £0S ous, 6, adj.(7rpos, 
(pLXiu)^) prop, dear to any one, beloved; 
in N. T. of dispositions and qualities, 
amiable, such as to conciliate love and 
esteem, Phil. iv. 8. So Ecclus. xx. 12, 6 
ao<pd<s iv Xoyio TrpocrcpLKi] TroLVcrsL, and 
oft. in Class. 

Tlpoa<popa, as, 77, {irpoa-cpipu),) an 
offering, oblation, i. e. 1) prop, tlie act of 
offering to God, Heb. x. 10, 610. t^s 
"TT peer (papa's tov acofxaTo^ 'I. Xp. ver. 14. 
Ecclus. xlvi. 16 ; fig. Rom. xv. 16. 2) 
meton. for the thing offered, ^vcria Trpoar- 
(pEpofxivi], an offenng, oblation, strictly 
without blood, opp. to ^vcria and oXoKav- 
TtjifxaTa, Eph. V. 2. Heb. x. 5, 8. Sept. 
Ps. xl. 6. Also a sacrifice, with blood, 
equiv. to ^vcria. Acts xxi. 26, k'cos ov 
irpocxrivix^r] — 17 Trpoarcpopd. xxiv. 17. 
So irpocr^opa irepl du.apTia'S, Heb. x. 
18. Ecclus. xxxi. 18, 19. 

Tlpoa-cp(jovew, f. tJcoj, {(poovEw,) prop. 
to utter sounds towards any one, i. e. to 
hail him ; hence, to speak to or accost any 
one: 1) gener. with dat. expr. or impl. 
Lu. xiii. 12, 'TrpoarscpcovrjarE Kai eItt^v 
avTr}. xxiii. 20. Acts xxi. 40. In the 
sense to call out to any one, to exclaim, 
with dat. Matt. xi. 16, al. 2) to ccdl any 
one to oneself, foil, by acc. Lu. vi. 13, 
TrpoarEcpwvrjcrE Toy's fxad. Jos. Ant. vii. 7, 
4, 'Trpo(y(p(x}vnaa^ Eva Ttou oIketcov. 

UpocrxvorL^, £609, 17, (Trpocrxlo),) a 
jpouring out upon, effusion, sprinMing, tt. 
TOV aifxaTo^, Heb. xi. 28. Comp. Ex. xii. 
7, 22. 

Tl pocr\l/au u), f. avcTco, prop. & lit. to 
'tou^h to, by putting one's fingers upon any 
thing, and by impl. handling it lightly, 
intrans. with dat. Lu. xi. 46, ov Trpocr- 

\lfaVETE T0X<S (p0pTL0L9. Soph. Philoct. 

1054. 

TLpoa-ooTroXriTrTEOt), f. ■ncrco,{7rpo(Tca- 
iroXi]'7rTt]<s,) to respect the person o/sluj 
one, to show partiality, Ja. ii. 9. 

npocrwTroXrjTTT-rjs, ov, 6, {irpocro}- 
TTov & Xafi(3dvoD,) a respecter of persons, 
i. e. ' one who shows his favours with pre- 
ference to rank, dignity, or other grounds 
of external superiority, to the neglect of 
such as are destitute of those advan- 
tages.' Acts X. 34. 

npocwTToXtjilAia, as, 77, (7rpo(ra)7ro- 
XijTTTEO),) respect of persons, paHiality^ 
Rom. ii. 11. Col. iii. 25. Ja. ii. 1. 



Yi p6<TU)'irov, ov, TO, (Trpos, wi//", the 
eye,) prop. ' the part of any object which 
is presented to the eye of the beholder,' 
hence gener. the face, visage, countenance : 

I. PROP. Matt. vi. 16, 17, to irp, <tov 
VLxj/ai. xvii. 2. xxvi. 67. Gal. i. 22, dyvo- 
ovfxEvo<s Tw irp. ' unknown by sight,' saepe 
al. Sept. and Class. In phrases, ttlttteiv 
k'WL'KpocTuj'Kov, Matt.xvii.6, al. nrpocwirov 
irp6<s 'Trp6(T(Xi'irov,faceto face, with nothing 
intervening, 1 Cor. xiii. 12. Sept. Gen. 
xxxii. 31. So KaTo. TrpScrcoTrov '^yj^tv^ 
' before the face,' face to face. Acts xxv. 16. 
2 Cor. X. 1, opp. to diruiv. ver. 7, to. kuto. 
Trpocruiirov, prop. ' things before the face,' 
i. e. external things. Sept. Jos. and Class. 
KaTct TrpoacoTTov avTtp dvTEaTriv, Gal. ii. 

II. Fig. and by Hebr. Lu. ix. 51, avTo^ 

TO Trp. aVTOV icTTljpi^g TOV TTOpEVECrdaL 

K.T.X. ' firmly resolved to go.' So Sept. 
oft. Ellipt. in the same sense, Lu. ix. 53, 

TO Trp. aVTOV 771/ iropEVOfXEVOV £ts 'Ifp. 

So 1 Pet. iii. 12, irp. Kup. kirl ttolovv- 
Tas KaKo.. Fig. in antith. with Kupoia, 
as 1 Th. ii. 17, TrpocwTrw, ov Kapoia, ' in 
body, not in spirit.' 2 Cor. v. 12, h ttooct- 
doTTO) KavX(^l^^^o?, Kal ov Kapoia, i. e, 
' in appearance, not in reality.' — II. me- 
ton. face, equiv. to presence, pey^son, 
chiefly in phrases borrowed from the Heb. 
1) with prepositio7is, and followed by a 
genit. of pers., it forms a periphr. for a 
simple preposition, e. gr. diro irpoaui'irov 
TLvo's, from the face, presence of Buy one, 
equiv. to from before, from. Acts iii. 19! 
V. 41. vii. 45, al. and Sept. sts TrpoVtoTroi/ 
TU)v EKKX-ncTLcou, cqulv. to ' before or to 
the churches,' 2 Cor. viii. 24. ev Trpocr- 
wTTw XpL(TTov, ' in the prcseucc of Christ,' 
i. e. before him, as a formula of assevera- 
tion, 2 Cor. ii. 10. KaTa TrpoacoTTov tlvo^, 
'in the presence of any one, equiv. to 
before, him, Lu. ii. 31. Acts iii. 13. fxETa 
TOV irp. (TOV, 'with or in thy presence,' 
equiv. to icith thee. Acts ii. 28. Trpo irpocr- 
coTTov TWO'S, ' before the face of any 
one, equiv. to simpl. itpo TLVo<s,before any 
one ; so of place. Matt. xi. 10 ; of time. 
Acts xiii. 24. 2) in construction ivitJi verbs, 
with or without an intervening prep., and 
with a genit. of pers. expr. or implied, 
forming a periphr. for the person designated 
by the genitive. So in the phrase bpav or 
loeTv to 7rp6(x(jo7r6u tlvo's, ' to see the 
face of any one, equiv. to ' see him face to 
face,' ' to see and converse with' any one, 
Acts XX. 25, 38. 1 Th. ii. 17. iii. 10, and 
Sept. Hence also ^XiirEiv or bpav to 
TTp. TOV 0. 'to behold the face of God,'=: 
to have access to God, to be admitted to 
his presence, Matt, xviii. 10. Rev. xxii. 4. 
In a like sense, Heb. ix. 24, EiJL(pavL(yQr)vaL 
TOO irp. TOV 0. vTrkp v/jl. q. d. before God. 
Elsewhere including the idea of external 
condition and circumstances ; so ^Xetteiv 



♦ npo 

si's IT p. T(i/os, ' to regard the person,' i. e. 
the external appearance of any one, Matt, 
xxii. 16. Jude 16. Xa/m^dveLv Trpoarcoiroy 
Tii/os, Lu. XX. 21. Gal, ii. 6. See Aa^- 
(3difuj. 3) once absol., as in later Greek, 
a person^ 2 Cor. i. 11, i/c 'ttoWwv irpoa-- 
(oircov TO eh vp-d^ x^P^^f^^i S^^^ us 
from many persons.' — III. of things, 
face^ surface^ Lu. xxi. 35, kiri irpoacoiroi/ 
nrdart}^ ttj^ yr}<s. Acts xvii. 26. So Sept. 
Gen. ii. 6. Hence the exterior^ external 
appearance^ Matt. xvi. 3, to fxkv nrp, tov 
ovpavov, Lu. xii. 56. Ja. i. 11. Sept. Ps. 
civ. 30. 

ITpoTaoro-fct), f. Jo), prop, of place, to 
arrange or set in order before^ in front, 
Xen. H. G. ii. 4, 15, In N. T. of time, 
to appoint before^ pass. perf. part. Kaipol 
rrrpoTETayfxivoL^ ' times before appointed,' 
Acts xvii. 26, text. rec. 

IIpoTcti/tt), f. £yw, to stretch forth or 
out ; in N. T. to stretch out or extend^ as a 
person bound with thongs in order to be 
scourged. Acts xxii. 25, ojs irpoiTEivav 
avTov Tol^ ifxdaiv^ ' as they were stretch- 
ing him forward to the block by thongs.' 
See my note there. 

IIpoTEpos, a, 01/, compar. formed 
from Trpo, before^ forward ; in N. T. 
and comm. of time, before^ former : I. 
prop. Eph. iv. 22, /cara Tr\v irp. dva- 
cTTpocpriu, Sept. and Class. — II. neut. 
TTpoTEpov^ as adv. before^ first : 1) gener. 
John vii. 51, kdv fxr\ aKovay irap* aiiTOV 
"JTpoTEpov. 2 Cor. i. 15. Heb. iv. 6, al. 
Sept. and Class. 2) with the art. irpS- 
TEpou, as adj. former^ Heb. x. 32, xds 
TrpoTtpov 77iU£pas. 1 Pet. i. 14, Tats irp. 
iirLQvp.LaL<s. Sept. and Class. Neut. to 
TTpoTepov, as adv. before^ formerly, John 
vi. 62, birov r\v to irpoTEpov ; ix. 8, al. 
Sept. and Class. 

JIpoTidri lULL, f. 6^0-0), to set or put 
before any one ; in N. T. only mid. Trpo- 
Tidsp.aL^ i. e. I. fig. to set before oneself 
to propose to oneself to propose^ with inf. 
Rom. i. 13, Trposdi/jii^v sXdeiv irpo^ vp.. 
with acc. Eph. i. 9. Jos.c. Ap. ii. 40. Pol. 

vi. 12, 8. — II. to set forth before the world, 
publicly, with acc. Rom. iii. 25, ov irpo- 
idsTO Oeov iXafrrtipLOv. ^l.V. H. xiv. 8. 
Diod. Sic. xvi. 27. 

UpoTpE'Trft), {. xj/w^ {tpIttu)^) to turn 
forward^ to propel, impels morally, as oft. 
in Class. In N. T. and comm. mid, 'Trpo- 
Tpiiropai^ to propel^ to impels and hence 
to exhort^ absol. Acts xviii. 27. Jos. Ant. 

vii. 11, 1. Pol. ii. 22, 2. Xen. Mem. i. 
2, 32. 

IIpoTp£)(a), aor. 2. irpoi^paiiov^ {"Tp^- 
X<M,) to run before^ in advance ; foil, by 
gen. with compar. John xx. 4, Trpoidpap.e 
-rdyjiov tov TLiTpov, Sept. and Class. 



npo 

Pleon. Lu.xix. 4, 7rpo<5pa/>iaji/ 'ipiirpoorQ&v, 
Tob. xi. 2. Xen. Cyr. iv. 2, 23. 

npouTrapxw, f. ^o), prop, to begin 
before^ to do first^ Thuc. iii. 40 ; also, to 
be or exist before^ to precede in time, Thuc. 
i. 1, 38. In N.T. only with a participle of 
another verb, thus forming a periphr. for 
a finite tense of that verb ; comp. 'Y-Trap- 
yjM. So Lu. xxiii. 12, irpov'jrrjpxov ku 
£X0p« ovTfs, prop. ' who before were 
being at enmity,' (as Jos. Ant. iv. 6, 5,) 
Acts viii. 9, irpov'Trrip^Ev fxay&vouv^ ' who 
before practised sorcery.' 

T[p6(pa(Ti^^ £ct)s, 77, {Trpotpaivo), to 
show before,) prop. ' what is shown before 
any one,' also, by impl. show, pretence^ 
pretext, put forth in order to cover one's 
real intent. Matt, xxiii. 14, Trpocpdast 
fxaKpd nrpoa-Evxofx&voL. Acts xxvii. 30, 
Trpocfydarst ws k.t.X. 1 Th. ii. 5, ovte ev 
Trpo(p. irXEovE^ia^, supply EyEvndrjpEu^ 
meaning, ' the carrying forward of any plan 
of avarice under a fair pretence,' as the 
false teachers did ; in which sense the 
term oft. occurs in the Class., espec. Thu- 
cyd. So 'TTpocf). exEif, 'to have a pretext,' 
John XV. 22, irpocfiaariv ovk iypvai irEpl 
T775 afxapTia^ avTwv. Xen. Cyr. iii. 1, 27. 

U po(p Ipco, f. irpooicrijD, (^rpo, (pipco,) 
to bear or bring forth out of any place or 
thing, foil, by acc. and ek with. gen. Lu. 
vi, 45, bis. Sept. and Class. 

T[po<pr]TEia, as, ri, {7rpo<pT]TEva},) a 
prophesying, prophecy, i. e. 1) prop, a 
foretelling of future events, prediction, but 
including also, from the Heb., the idea of 
prophetic revelations, declarations, exhor- 
tations, warnings, uttered by the prophets 
while acting under divine influence : said 
of the prophecies of the O. T. Matt. xiii. 
14, dva'Tr\t]povTai auTois 77 Trpo(p. 'H- 
aratov. 2 Pet. i. 20, 21 : so of the revela- 
tions and warnings of the Holy Spirit in 
the Apocalypse, Rev. i. 3, tous Xoyov^ 
T^s irpocf), xxii. 7, al. So Jos. Bell. iii. 
8, 3, Tas <7rpo(pr]TELa^ Ttov LEpwv ^l^Xmv. 
In 1 Tim. i. 18. iv. 14, 'Trpoxjir^TELa may 
refer to the prophetic revelations or direc- 
tions of the Holy Spirit, by which persons 
were designated as officers and teachers in 
the primitive Church ; comp. Acts xiii. 2. 
XX. 28. See my note. 2) prophecy, i. e. 
in its fullest extent, the prophetic gift, 
spoken in N. T. of the peculiar ^dpLcrfxa, 
or spiritual gift, imparted to the primitive 
teachers of the Church, Rom. xii. 6, 
EXovTE<3 ■yapiG-p.aTa — £tT£ Trpo(pr]TELav. 
1 Cor. xii. 10. xiii. 2. xiv. 22, where see my 
notes. 3) by meton. a prophesying, the 
exercise of the prophetic office, the acting 
as an ambassador of God and the interpre- 
ter of his mind and will. Rev. xi. 6. Spec, 
the exercise of the prophetic gift in the 



376 



npo 



377 



npo 



^imitive Church, 1 Cor. xiv. 6. 1 Th. v. 

nf)o0tjT£ua), f. Euo-o), (7rpo<^>jT?;s,) 
to act aw prophet, to propliesy, intrans. 1 ) 
prop, to foretell future events, to predict ; 
but often including also, from the Hebr., 
the idea of exhorting, reproving, threat- 
ening, in short, the lohole utterance of the 
prophets while acting under Divine influ- 
ence, as ambassadors of God and interpre- 
ters of his mind and will : of the prophets 
of the O. T. Matt. xi. 13, Trdi/Tss ol tt^jo- 
iPrjTaL £0)9 '\uidvvov 'irpoEipnTEvcrav. xv. 
' /, irpoECpnT&vcTE Trepl vjULCov, for tos irepi 
vfjLwv, meaning, ' spoke, under Divine in- 
spiration, of the Jews, as if he had heen 
speaking of you.' 1 Pet. i. 10. Jude 14. 
In a like sense, of persons acting by a 
Divine influence as prophets and ambas- 
sadors of God under the N. T. Rev. x. 1 1, 
^€t CE ttoXli/ Trpo(pr]TEV<TaL kiTL XaoT^, 
xi. 3; also Acts ii. 17, 18; as including 
the idea of praise to God, accompanied by 

Srediction, Lu. i. 67. Of the High-Priest, 
ohn xi. 51, TrpoEcp. i. e. unwittingly 'ut- 
tered a prediction' afterwards fulfilled ; of 
false prophets. Matt. vii. 22, where, be- 
sides the sense ' taught and preached the 
Gospel,' may be included the ordinary one, 
prophesied; for there is reason to think that 
miraculous powers were by God permitted 
to be exercised by men whose lives were 
at variance with the precepts of the Gos- 
\ pel. Spoken in mockery by the soldiers 
I to Jesus, and conveying a taunt, by a play 
I on the double sense of irpo(pr]TEVELv, which 
(as also [xavrEveadaL) is often used in the 
acceptation of our term to divine, or guess. 
Matt. xxvi. 68. 2) spec, of the yJtpiGixa, 
or prophetic gift, imparted by the Holy 
Spirit to the primitive Christians, Acts 
,xix. 6, ilXOe TO Hi/. TO ay. Itt' ah- 
Tous, KoX irpo&ipvT&vov. 1 Cor. xi. 4. xiii. 
9,al, 

npo^T7Trj9, ou, 6, (7rpo<^r]jUt,) a pro- 
phet, prop, a foreteller of future events ; 
in Sept. and N. T. ' one who speaks from a 
Divine influence,' acts under inspiration, 
whether as foretelling future events, or as 
exhorting, reproving, threatening indivi- 
1 duals or nations, i.e. as ' the ambassador 
of God and the interpreter of his will' to 
men : I. of the prophets of the O. T. 1) 
prop. Matt. i. 22. ii. 5, 17. xii. 39. xiii. 
35. xxi, 4. xxiv. 15. Acts ii. 16, 30. xiii. 
20. 2 Pet. ii. 16. PI. gener. Matt. ii. 23. 
oft. 2) meton. the prophetic books of the 
O. T. equiv. to at ypa<pal tcov Trpocp. 
Matt. xxvi. 56 ; so gener. v. 17, kutu- 
Xuo-at Toi» vofxov V Tous Trpocp. Mk. i. 2. 
Lu. xvi. 29. Acts viii. 28 ; by synecd. put 
for the doctrines, &c. contained in the pro- 
phetic books. Matt. vii. 12. Acts xxvi. 27. 
—II. GENER. oi persons acting by a Divine 



influence as prophets and ambassadors of 
God under the new dispensation, equiv. to 
' teachers of the Gospel,' Matt, xxiii. 34, 
TTpot^tjTas Kai crocpov^ kul ypafXfxaTii^, 
titles these given by the Jews to their pro- 
phets and teachers, which our Lord here 
applies to the Apostles and their successors, 
to intimate the authority with which they 
would preach, (an authority equal to that 
of the prophets of old,) and their qualifi- 
cations for this eff^ect, — qualifications such 
as would well entitle them to the appella- 
tions cro(poL and ypajULfxaTsl^. Matt. x. 
41. xiii. 57. John vii. 52. Hence the 
term is applied to Christ, the great Pro- 
phet, who, according to the prophecy of 
Moses, Deut. xviii. 18, should come into 
the w^orld, John i. 21, 25. vi. 14. vii. 40. 
(See Bp. Kidder's Messiah, c. iv.) Also 
used of John the Baptist, Lu. i. 76. xx. 6. 
— III. SPEC, of those who possessed the 
prophetic gift, or Charisma imparted by 
the Holy Spirit to the primitive Churches, 
a prophet, i. e. a class of instructors or 
preachers who were next in rank to the 
apostles, and before the teachers, didda-- 
KaXoi, (see 1 Cor. xii. 28, and compare 
Acts xiii. 1. 1 Cor. xiv. 32. Eph. ii. 20,) 
persons, we may suppose, who were not 
merely, as some have thought, inter- 
preters of Scripture, but who, by Divine 
inspiration, and therefore authoritatively, 
explained and set forth all the mysteries 
of the Gospel, and publicly preached and 
exhorted, for the purposes of Christian 
edification. — IV. spoken of the Greek poet 
Epimenides, Tit. i. 12, where, though it is 
by most Commentators explained poet or 
minstrel, yet the person in question was 
perhaps not a poet at all. At all events, 
he was chiefly known as a prophet and 
seer, and wrote a work irepi xP^crM^^jf* 
So Plut. Scfl. 12, says he was <TO<pd^ TTEpl 
Ta ^eJa, and consequently the general 
sense, ' one professing to interpret the will 
of the gods,' may be here the true mean- 
ing. The word denoted prop. ' interpretation 
of oracles or divinations,' i. e. of what the 
fxdvTL^ said. Then it came to signify the 
same as fxdvTL^. Thus the Hebr. ><^a3 
meant I) an interpreter of God's will; 
2) one familiar with God. So Gen. xx. 7. 

H p o t] T t /c 6 5, >7, oiy, adj. {irpocpvTr}^,) 
prophetic, uttered by prophets, Rom. xvi. 
26. 2Pet.i. 19. 

H/o /I Tts, i^os, 73, (fem. to irpocpn- 
Tr)5,) a prophetess : 1) prop, of one 
speaking and acting from a Divine influ- 
ence, an ambassadress from God, Rev, ii. 
20. 2) by impl. of 'one who lives in com- 
munion with God,' to whom God ' reveals 
himself by his Spirit,' Luke ii. 36. So 
Abraham is called 'jrpocprirr]^. Gen. xx. 7. 

Iipo(pd dvu), f. a(Tw, to come or get 



npo 



378 



npi2 



before any one, to anticipate one in doing 
any thing, Thuc. iii. 69; in N. T. said of 
speaking, "with acc. Matt. xvii. 25. So 
^schyl. Agam. 1028, irpocpddcraaa Kap- 
dia yXcoararav. 

Ilpoxet/o ijo/xat, f. iaroimaL^ depon. 
mid. prop. ' to reach any thing or person 
forth,' to cause to be at hand ; in N. T. fig. 
to appoint^ choose^ destine, with acc. and 
inf. Actsxxii, 14, 7rpo£X£tpt<raTO ere yvco- 
vai TO 6t\i]jULa avTov. xxvi. 16. Perf. 
pass, in pass, sense, with dat. Acts iii. 20, 
in later edit. ; in the sense, ' destined and 
appointed for you.' So 1 Pet. i. 20, we 
have TrpoEyvtxxTfxivov (XptcrTot;) irpo 
KaTajSoXrj^ KocrjULov. 

TLpo^B ipoTov iiio, f. rjcro), prop, to 
choose hefore any one ; in N. T. to choose 
heforehand, pass. Acts x. 41, ixap-rvcn 
Tots 'KpoK.i.yj.Lp, viro Tov 0£oD, i. e, /ore- 
chosen, 

rE/ou^i/a, 77, (prop. fern, of Trpu/x- 
1/09,) equiv. to rj TrpvjULvri yau9, tJie hind- 
most part of a ship, as distinguished from 
tlie foreship, or prow, the stern, Mk. iv. 38, 
and Class. 

npwt, adv. (TTpo,) early, in the morn- 
11. oCat. mane: 1) prop, and absol. Matt. 
Xt/cas Mk. i. 35. With prepositions : 
Tlvptot, airo Trpwt, kirl to Trpwt. 2) 
in Ck. for the morning-ivatch, which ushers 
irvy fj dawn, Mk. xiii. 35 ; see (pvXaKtj II. 
theyp 

CO ia, see Trpcotos. 
pco'Lfxo^, n, ov, adj. (TTpwt,) early, 
poken of the early rain, Ja. v. 7, where 
6ee my note. Sept. and Class. 

lip 60 0 9, f], ov adj. (-Trptoi,) early, 
nwrning. Rev. ii. 28. xxii. 16, later edd. 

TLpw'io^, a, ov, adj. (-Trpcol",) early, 
morning ; in N. T. only tj Trpcota, i. e. 
Isipa, ' the morning hour,' morning. Matt, 
xxi. 18, 7rptota9 iTrai/ayo)!/ £^9 Tr]V ttoXlv. 
xxvii. 1. Sept. and Class. 

n p 60 p a, a9, 77, {irpo,) the forward part 
of a ship, the prow. Acts xxvii. 30, & Class. 

UptOTEUU), f. £U<T60, (7rpC0T09.) tO be 

first, chief, ~ to hold the first rank, high- 
est dignity, iv irdcnv. Col. i. 18. 

IIp60To/ca6£5pta, a9, 77, ( '7rptoT09, /ca0- 
ibpa,) the first 01 chief seat. Matt, xxiii. 6. 

IIp60TOK:\to'ta, a9, 77, (7rpcoT09, kXl- 
aria,) the first place of reclining at table, 
th£, chief place at a feast. Matt, xxiii. 6. 

IT p 60 TO 9, 77, oi/, adj. (superl. from Trpo, 
Compar. '7rpoT£po9,) prop, foremost, hence 
first: I. gener. as adj. i. spoken place, 
order, time : 1 ) prop, without art. Mk. 
xvi. 9, TrpcDTf] ca^^aTov, sc. vpiipa, Lu. 
ii. 2. Phil. i. '5. Eph. vi. 2, kvToXr{ irpvu- 
TTj. 1 Cor. XV. 3, ev 7rp60Tot9, equiv. to 
'first of all foil. byo£UT£po9, Acts xii. 10. 
With art. Matt. xxvi. 17, Trpoorri tcov 



aX^vjULcov, scil. vfiipa. Mk. xiv. 12. Acts 
i. 1, TOV irpujTov Xoyov. 1 Cor. xv. 45. 
Heb. ix. 2. Rev. i. 17. iv. 1 ; 01 TrpwTot, 
tJie first, Matt. xx. 8. to. mrpuiTa, xii. 45. 
1 Tim. V. 12, 77 TTpcoTri iricrTL^, ' first or 
originally professed ;' Rev. ii. 4, t^v ayd- 
'TTrjv <Tov Tf]v irp. ver. 5 ; opp. to /cati/os, 

xxi. 1. Hel}. viii. 13. So in division or 
distribution, 6 7rp60TO9 — 6 5£UT€po9, Matt. 

xxii. 25. Lu. xiv. 18. 2) in an adverbial 
sense. Matt. x. 2. John i. 42. viii. 7. Acts 
xxvi. 23. 3) put adverb, for the compar. 
7rpdT€po9, vAth. gen. John i. 15, 30, oTt 
TrpuyTO^ fxov y\v. xv. 18, kfxk irptoTOv 
vfxcov. — II. fig. of rank, dignity, ^rs^, c^ee/"; 
without art. Matt. xx. 27, elvaL 7rpcoT09. 
xxii. 38. Acts xvi. 12, al. ; with gen. par- 
tit. Mk. x. 44. xii. 28, irpuiTT] irdvTtov 
kvToXy']. 1 Tim. i. 15. With art. Acts 
xvii. 4, yvvaLKcov twv irpiioTUiV ouk 6Xl- 
yuL. Lu. XV. 22 : so 6 7rp60T09, ot rrrpto- 
Toi, the first, the chief Acts xxviii. 7, tw 
7rp6o'T6o T^9 vrjarov. Mk. vi. 21. Lu. xix. 
47. — II. neuter, irpooTov, as adverb : 1. 
prop, of place, order, time, usually without 
article : 1) gener. Matt. xvii. 10, 27, tov 
avafSavTa TrpcoTov ix^uv. Mk. vii. 27. 
Lu. ix. 59, 61 : so Acts vii. 12. 2) em- 
phat. first of all, before all. Matt, xxiii. 
26, Kaddpiaov TrpCuTov to kvTO^ tov 
TroTtjpLou. Acts xiii. 46. Rom. i. 8. 1 Cor. 
xi. 18. 3) in division or distribution, foil, 
by dsvTspov, 1 Cor. xii. 28 ; ftTa, Mk, iv. 
28 ; ETTELTtt, Ja. iii. 17 ; /uletcc tuvtu, 
Mk. xvi. 9. — II. fig. of dignity, import- 
ance, first, equiv. to first of all, chiefly, 
especially. Matt. vi. 33, ^TjTstTs TrpwTov 
Ttjv ^a<T. TOV e. Rom. iii. 2. 2 Pet. i. 20. 
iii. 3, TrpcoTov iravTiav, 1 Tim. ii. I. 

np60TOO-TaT779, OV, 6, (TTptOTOS, 

'L(7Tr]fXL,) prop, one who stands first, on 
the right, in a line of troops, Thucyd. v. 
71 ; but in the later writers, a front-rank 
man, and sometimes a leader. So Xen. 
Laced, xi. 4. Job xv. 24, loa-Trsp aTpaTt]- 
709 TTp, TTLTTTUiv I m N. T. fig. « leader, 
lit. Hngleader, Acts xxiv. 5. 

ITp60T0T0K:ta, 6OI/, Ta, (7rp60TOTO- 

AC09,) the rights of the first-born, birth-right, 
Heb. xii. 16. 

IIp 60 TOTOKO^, ov, 6, 17, adj. (7rp60T09, 

Tt«:T6o,) first-born: 1) prop, the first- 
born of a father or mother. Matt. i. 25, 

TOV VLOV aVTtj^ TOV TTptOTOTOKOV, the 

first-born of animals, Heb. xi. 28. 2) fig. 
first-born, equiv. to the first, the chief, one 
highly distinguished and pre-eminent : so 
of Christ, as the Beloved Son of God 
before the creation. Col. i. 15, before any 
created being had existence, i. e. as Bp. 
Pearson says, ' before any thing proceeded 
from him, or was framed and created by 
him.' See more in my note. Compare 
verse 16. Heb. i. 6, compare verse 5; or 



nx A 



379 



in relation to his followers, Rom. viii. 29, : 

ti<2 TO Eii/ai avTov irpoDT. iu tto/V/VoIs : 

ddE\(f)oU : or as being the first who . 
rose from the dead, no more to die, the 

Leader and Prince of those who shall arise, t 

Col. i. 18. Rev. i. 5 ; also of the saints in ^ 

heaven, tlie just men made perfect, as the \ 

patriarchs, prophets, apostles, &c. Heb. j 

xii. 23, iKK\i]arLa irpooTOTOKcou kv ovpa- \ 

j/ots aTToytypafxfxivoov, including those , 

who, in every age, have lived in the faith 1 
and fear of Christ, and whose robes have 

been washed in the blood of the Lamb. ^ 

rEratto, f. aiVw, prop. act. to strike 1 
one's foot against an object, to stitmhle ; < 
in N. T. fig. to stumble, i.e. 1) to err or 
fail in duty, to offend., with ii/, Ja. ii. 10. 
iii. 2, il TL9 kv Xdyoj oh Trxaift; absol. ^ 
Rom. xi. 11, fxi) iTTTaLcrau 'iva TricruiaL; , 
with iroWa adv. Ja. iii. 2. Sept. Deut. vii. . 
25. Ecclus. xxxvii. 12. Marc. Anton, vii. 15, . 
L^LOV avdptoTTov (piXeTv tous TTTatoi/Tas. j 
2) to fail of success, 2 Pet. i. 10, ov fxii 
TTTaLo-r^Ti 7roT£, 'ye shall never fail of 
attaining salvation.' So in the Class, it is 
used of failing or miscarrying in one's 
attempts, e. gr. Thucyd. viii. 11, ETrrat- 
a-au. Hdot. ix. 101, appwdiy], fxr} irepi M. 
TTTaicry 7] 'H. 

Uripva, 77, (by ellips. from the old 
adject. 'irnripLvo^, per sync. TTTipvcs, an- 
other form of the yet older adj. tttepos, 
whence 'KTspov and irTipv^. Thus ttte- 
pv^ was so called from its angular form, 
(just as TTTspvyLov is used of the corner 
of a square robe,) with allusion to the 
angular form of the bones of the wing, 
similar to that of the foot with respect to 
the leg,) the heel, John xiii. 18, lirrjpEv 
£7r' ifxk Ti]v irTipuav avTov, a metaphor 
taken from kicking animals, which sud- 
denly and treacherously injure their feed- 
ers. See Jer. ix. 4. 

Hn-Epvy Lov, ov, to, (TTTtpu^,) a lit- 
tle wing, or any thing shaped like a wing, 
running out to a point, i. e. a fin, tlie cor- 
ner or skirt of a garment ; in N. T. a jom- 
nacle, the highest point of the Temple, the 
apex of Solomon's porch. Matt. iv. 5. 

n T £ p u ^, vyo^, 77, a pinion, wing. Matt. 1 
xxiii. 27, and oft. Sept. & Class. 

IlTrjyos, 77, 6v, adj. {ir It Ofxai,) flying, 
winged ; in N. T. neut. plur. to. irTi-iva, 
birds, folds, 1 Cor. xv. 39. Hdian. iii. 9, 
10. Xen. Hist. iv. 1, 16. The more usual 
form is irTrivaL, as Xen. Cyr. i. 4, 11, & 
so oft. in Hom. and the Dramatic writers. 

TLnroiot), f. 770-60, (fr. TriVTO), as de- 
noting, observes Wyttenb. on Plut. i. 597, 
prop, a sudden percussion of the mind, and 
the perturbcdion thence arising,) to ternfy, 
put in a fright ; pass, to be terrified, be in 
■ trepidation, Lu. xxi. 9, rxi] irToridrjre. 



xxiv. 37. Sept. and Class, as Hom. Od. 
xxii. 298. ^sch. Prom. 858. Eur. Iph. 
A. 1029. 

nT07)<ris, £609, 77, (tttoIo),) terTOT, 
trepidation, fear, 1 Pet. iii. 6, fxr] (pofiov- 
/xEvaL iJ.t]deiuLtav ttto^ctlv, ' not being de- 
terred from persevering in their Christian 
profession by any timidity' (so natural to 
their sex) ; see ver. 14. Comp. cpo^. 
(p6(3ov fxiyav in Mk. iv. 41. Sept. Died. 
Sic. XX. 66. 

TLtvov, ov, to, (tttuw, to toss away,) 
a ivinnoicing-shovel, with which grain is 
tossed away against the wind, in order to 
cleanse it. Matt. iii. 12. Lu. iii, 17. 
Artemid. ii. 24. Theocr. vii. 156. 

HtujOO), f. p6u, (kindr. with tttoeo),) 
to scare or terrify; pass. Phil. i. 28, /u7; 
TTTvpSiuLEvoL, a term prop, used of horses 
which take fright, and then of men who 
are frightened, as Plut. Fab. Max. 3. Diod. 
Sic. xvii. 34, 57, 58. 

TlTV(r fxa, aTo^, to, (tttuco,) spittle, 
' what is spit out,' John ix. 6. Pol. viii. 
14, 5. 

IlTV(7<ru), f. goj, to fold ov roll toge- 
ther, e. g. TO (Sl^Xlov, Lu. iv. 20. ^ 
Ant. X. 1, 4. Hdian. i. 17, 1. ^t^^^^P; 

TLtv'u), f. cru), to spit, to spit out,^-^^^ 
Mk. vii. 33. Xen. Cyr. viii. 1, 42. '^ij^re 
Jos, and Class, vauai, John ix. 6. e^ t^r 
Mk. viii. 23. 

HTco/ia, aTo?, TO, (ttitttco,) prop-y 
fall. Ml. V. H. ix. 31 ; and meton. an^ 
thing fallen, a ruin, e. g. of a wall, building, 
Pol. xvi. 31, 8. Diod. Sic. xviii. 70. In 
N. T. a BODY fallen, i. e. a dead body. 
Matt. xxiv. 28, oirov yap eulv y to tttco- 
jULa, £/c£t (TwaxdnGovTaL OL ctETOL. Rcv, 
xi. 8, 9. Sept. Joseph, and later Class. 

HTcutris, £0)?, 77, (TTiTTTw,) « fall, 
doicnfall, e. g. of a building, Matt. vii. 
27. Diod. Sic. iii. 57. Pol. ii. 16, 3; fig. 
doicnfall, ruin, Lu. ii. 34, £t§ tttcoctlv, 
i. e. 'a cause of fall and ruin,' Ecclus. i. 
21. V. 13, yXooacra dvOpcoTrov tttcoctis 
auTcp. 

TlTcox^^a, a<5, h, (tttoj^o?,) prop, the 
act of begging ; also its condition, beggary, 
Lys. 898, 9. In N. T. poverty, ivant, 
2 Cor. viii. 2, 77 Kara ^ddov^ irroiXEia, 
i. e. ' deep poverty,' Aristoph. Plut. 549. 
So of a state of poverty and humiliation, 
2 Cor. viii. 9. Rev. ii. 9. 

n T CtJ € U 6t>, f. EVdW, (tTTWXO?,) iu 

Class, to beg, be a beggar ; in N. T. to be- 
come poor, to be in a state of poverty and 
humiliation, intrans. 2 Cor. viii. 9 ; comp. 
Phil. ii. 7, said of the Redeemer, on 
which important passage see my note in 
loc. and Abp. Magee on the Atonement, 
vol. ii. 621. 



380 



HYP 



IItwxos, ^, o2/, adj. (TrTtoo-co), to 
crouch,) begging^ beggarly^ poor^ prop, 
crouching in the manner of beggars ; see 
1 Sam. ii. 36. I. prop, and oft. as subst. 
1)6 "TTTwxos, « beggar^ Lu. xiv. 13, 21. 
Xvi. 20, -TTTw^os Si Tis rfy dvojxaTL Aa- 
Japos. ver. 22, and Class. ; fig. Rev. iii. 

17. 2) ol TTTcoxot, the poor^ i. e. the 
needy, destitute. Matt. xix. 21, tttw- 

XOIS. XXvi. 9, dodtjvaL TOtS TTTfOXOlS. 

ver. 11. Mk. x. 21, al. Sept. 3) gener. as 
an adjective, poor^ needy ^ equiv. to Trivt]^^ 
spoken of honest poverty as opp. to riches, 
without the notion of mendicity; e. gr. 
fjLLa x^P^ 'TT'^wx^h Mk. xii. 42, 43. Lu. 
xxi. 3, and oft. Sept. and Apocr. — II. by 
impl. and from the Heb. jooor, i. e. lowly, 
humble, of low estate, including also the 
idea of being afflicted, distressed, Lu. iv. 

18, t'xfi'O's jixe EuayyEXtaaa-dai irruiyol^. 
So Matt. xi. 5, and Lu. vii. 22, ittvoxoI 
Evayy&XiX^ovraL, and Sept. ; fig. Matt. v. 
3, oi Trruixol tco TrysvuaTi, ' the poor in 
spirit,' equiv. to ' the lowly in mind and 
heart.' Lu. vi. 20. Sept. TairsLvo^, Isaiah 
Ixvi. 2. — III. fig. of things, beggarly, poor, 
imperfect. Gal. iv. 9, TTTcoxa o-rotx^ia, 

''^or the Class. irTioxiKo.. So Lucian, t. 
ii^oc' ^^^l^^"^^' I*l3,to, p. 554, tttoj- 

TT y/^^' K'^^ti) the fist^ as oft. 

in cft^'. In N. T. Mk. vii. 3, kav /xf/ 
It? vixlfODVTai T-a? ■)(.^ipa<3, lit. 'unless 
T-^T wash their hands (rubbing them) 

.«h the fist,' i. e. carefully, diligently ; 
^ae more in my note. 

TLvdu3v, (JDVO'5, 6, Python, in Greek 
mythology the name (derived from Heb. 
pD, ' the striker,'' and that from the old 

root, nnD, to beat, found in the Sanscrit 
pata, to kill,) of a huge serpent slain by 
Apollo, JEl. V. H. iii. 1, and then trans- 
ferred to Apollo himself ; in later writers 
spoken of diviners, soothsayers, who were 
held to be inspired of the Pythian Apollo. 
In N. T. Acts xvi. 16, 'iyovcrav irvivfxa 
JlvQuiVcs, having a spirit of Python,' i, e. 
of a diviner, equiv. to a soothsaying demon; 
see more in my note. 

TivKvo's, i], 6v, adj. (kindr. with ttuku, 
whence irvKLvo^ and ttu/ci^oq,) prop, thick, 
dense, close together, ' thickly crowded,' 
and by impl. numerous, as oft. in Homer. 
Hence in N. T. frequent, often occurring, 
1 Tim. V. 23, dia Ta? iruKvd^ arov aarde- 
VELa's. Thuc. i. 23. Xen. Eq. ix. 6, and 
the tragedians. Neut. plur. ttukucc, as adv. 
frequently, Lu. v. 33, vriarEuovaL irvKvd. 
M\, V, H. ii. 21. Xen. Conv. ii. 26. ttvk- 
vorepov. Acts xxiv. 26, and Class. 

TivKTEvui, f. E\)(T(o, (fr. TTu/cT?;?, aud 
that from ttuJ, the fist,) to bocc^ to fight 
as a boxer, intrans. applied spiritually by 



St. Paul to man's combat with his cor- 
poreal inclinations to evil, 1 Cor. ix. 26, 

OUTtO TTVKTEVUJ, Ct)§ OXJK CLE pa 6 E p (JO V, 

i.e. 'I strike no blow in vain;' see my 
note. 

Ilv\7],r]^,r],a door, gate, prop, the large 
door or portal of a public edifice, or of the 
fortified gateway leading into a city, in 
opp. to ^upa, a common door; e. g. of 
the Temple, (hpaia TrvXrj tov Upov, Acts 
iii. 10 ; of a prison, xii. 10 ; of a city, Lu. 
vii. 12. Acts ix. 24. Heb. xiii. 12, and 
Sept. ; symbol, or allegor. an entrance, 
Matt, vii' 13, bis, 14. Lu. xiii. 24. Comp. 
Cebet. Tab. xv. Also TruXat aoov, tlie 
gates of Hades, by meton. for Hades itself, 
(see in "AlSi]^,) i. e. either Hades with its 
powers, Satan and his hosts. Matt. xvi. 18, 
Ti]v ekkX. Kai TruXat adov ov KaTitrx^- 
crovcTLv avrf]^ : or rather simply death, the 
grave ; see my note. So Is. xxxviii. 10. 
The Hebrews, and Greeks and Romans, 
alike ascribed gates to Sheol or Hades. 

TLvXuiv, vovo^, 6, (ttuX??,) prop, a large 
gate at the entrance of an edifice or city ; 

1) gener. of a house. Acts x. 17, kiricTTr]- 
aav ETTL TOV irvX, xii. 13, and Sept. ; of 
a city, Acts xiv. 13. Rev. xxi. 12, al. and 
Sept. and Class. 2) by synecd. a gate- 
tvay, portal, the deep arch under which a 
gate opens. Matt. xxvi. 71. Lu. xvi. 20. 
Sept. Jos. and Class. 

TLvvd dvo fxai, f. irEvaofxaL, aor. 2. 
ETTvdoixriv, (fr. ttuw and irvdu), whence 
TrvdjULfju and irvvdo^, fundus,) depon. mid, 
to ash, inquire. The primary sense was 
to sound or fatTtom with a plummet, to 
ascertain the depth of any place ; and fig. to 
inquire, learn, &c. So Shakspeare says, 
' To sound the bottom of the after-times.' 
So also the Latin percontor, to inquire, 
came from per and contus, a pole, used by 
sailors to sound withal. 1) jorop. and foil, 
by Trapd tlvcs, from or of any one, e. g. 
w4th acc. John iv. 52, ettuOeto ovv Trap 
avTOiV t]]v (x)pav k.t.X. Acts x. 18. Sept. 
Gen. XXV. 22, and Class. Absol. with in- 
terrogat. dir. Acts iv. 7. x. 29, irvvQdvo- 
fxai ovv, TLVL Xoyw k.t.X. xxiii. 19. So 
before an indir. interrog. with the opt. 
after a preter. Lu. xv. 26, ETrvvOdvETo, tl 
ELt] TavTa ; xviii. 36. John xiii. 24. Acts 
xxi. 33. Xen. An. vii. 1, 14. In a judi- 
cial sense, to inquire, eocam.ine, foil, by acc. 
and TTEpL TLvo?, Acts xxiii. 20, and Class. 

2) hy implic. to find out by inquiry, to 
learn, hear, foil, hy otl. Acts xxiii. 34, as 
oft. in the best WTiters. 

Hup, TTupos, TO, fre, (from the Heb. 
or from some Sanscrit word common with 
the Heb. "ns hur, which, though it prop, 
means light, sometimes designates fre :) 
I. prop^ and gener. Matt. iii. 10, /cat ft? 



HYP 



381 



) (idWETUL. ver. 12. vii. 19. xiii. 40. 

i. 15, al. soepe. Sept. and Class. Rev. 
18. viii. 5, Ik tov irvpo'S rod ^variac- 
Hov^ i. e. upon the altar, et al. The 
it. TTi/pos often takes the place of an 
, So <p\6^ nrvpo^^ ' flame of fire,' i. q. 
y flame, Acts vii. 30. Heb. i. 7. Rev. i. 

ii. 18. Once vice versa^ iv irvpi cpXo- 
, id. 2 Th. i. 8. Sept. Is. xxix. 6. So 
paKa^ TTupo?, ' burning coals,' Rom. 
20. yXcoaaaL uxrtl Trupos, Acts ii. 3. 
LTraSs9 TTupo?, Rev. iv. 5. arvXoi 
)os, ' fiery pillars,' x. 1. Said of fire 
Q heaven, «7ro tov ovp. Lu. ix. 54, al. 
e. Eurip. Phoen. 1182, Trvp Atos, and 
5l. Soph. Antig. i. 35. — II. symbol. 1) 
Tod, as inflicting punishment, Heb. xii. 

b Gfo? rifxCov TTvp KaTav(tKi<TKOv. 
np. Deut. iv. 24. 2) of strife, disunion, 

xii, 49. So of the tongue, as kindling 
'e and discord, Ja. iii. 6. 3) of the fire 
)ersecution and adversity, namely, the 
mities, & trials, which purify the faith 

hearts of professed Christians, as the 
tries and purifies the precious metals ; 
ip. 1 Pet. i. 7. So Mk. ix. 49. 1 Cor. 
[3, kv TTvpi diroKaXuTrTETaL' Kal eko.- 
V TO spyov birolov tCTi, to rrrvp 
ip-dcrei, on the sense of which passage, 

ver. 15, awd^cTETai cos Sid Trupos, 
my notes. 4) of the fire of hell, repre- 
;ed under various images, e. g. 77 /ca/zt- 

Tov 7rupo9, ' a fiery furnace,' Matt. 

42, 50. V. 22. TO TTVp TO dar^SCTTOV^ 

. ix. 43. TO aiuiviov^ Matt, xviii. 8. 
ip-vti TOV Trupo?, Rev. xix. 20, al. — III. 
ardoui\ vehemence., Heb. x. 27, Trvpo's 
OS, denoting the fiery wrath of God, 
n so designated in the 0. T. as Mai. iv. 
md so aWujv and didirvpo^ in the 
3S. writers. See Blomf. on ^sch. Ag. 

[upd, as, 17, ('TTup,) a fire., i. e. as 
lied and Wrning, burning fml^ Acts 

iii. 2, 3. Apocr. and Class. 

lupyos, ou, 6, a tower: 1) prop, for 
!wce, as in the wall of a city, Lu. xiii. 

TTvpyo's iv TiZ 2iX. i. e. in the wall 
he city near Siloam. Sept. Joseph, and 
ss. Said of the watch-tower of a vine- 
1, Matt. xxi. 33. Mk. xii. 1. Sept. Is. 
L 2) meton. of any building with one 
Dore towers, a castle^ or turreted edi- 
, Lu. xiv. 28, where see my note. 
m. II. xxii. 447. Pol. xxvi. 4, 1. 
Iup£0"<ra>, f. Jo), (TTupsTos,) to he 
rish, be sicJc of fever, intrans. Matt. 

14. Mark i. 30. Eurip. Cyclop. 228. 
chin. p. 69. 

lupfTos, ou, 6, (TTi/p,) prop, fiery 
as of Sirius, Hom. 11. xxii. 31 ; or 
er. the heat of a fever. In N. T. a 
'■r. Matt. viii. 15. Mk. i. 31. Lu. iv. 
39. John iv. 52, al. Sept. and Class. 



Hupii/os, v^ ov, adj. (ttJ^p,) prop.^zery, 
burning. In N. T. by \m\y\.fiaming., glit- 
tering., Rev. ix. 17, ^wpuKu^ TTupi'i/ous. 
Comp. 3'(i»pa/c£s TTtTTupwyufci/oi, Hdian. 
viii. 4, 27. 

Hupoto, f. coo-o), {irvp,) to set on fire. 
In N. T. only pass. Trupoojuat, to be fired., 
set on fire., kindled., — to burn., to flame. 
1) prop, Eph. vi. 16, see ray note, and on 
BeXos. 2 Pet. iii. 12, ovpavoi irvpov/jLEvoL 
Xvdria-ovTaL. Rev. i. 15; fig. to burn, be 
infiximed with anger, be incensed, 2 Cor. 

xi. 29 ; with lust, 1 Cor. vii. 9, KpiicrtTov 
yafiTjaraL rj TrvpovGdai, So EKTrvpovaBai 
£is TO fxoLX^vELv, Sept. Hos. vii. 4, ed. Vat. 
(fXiyopLai, Dion. Hal. Ant. xi. 28. So 
Lat. uror, as Virg. Mr\. iv. 68, uritur 
infelix Dido,' and Hor. Od. i. 6, 19, ' sive 
quid urimur^ 2) by impl. to be tried 
with fire, purified, as metals, Rev. iii. 18. 
Sept. Prov. X. 20, al. 

Huppd^w, f. do-o), (TTvppos,) to he 
fire-coloured, fire-red, intrans. Matt. xvi. 
2, -TT. o ovpavoi. ver. 3. 

Hupp OS, d, dv, adj. (TrOp,) fiery- 
coloured, fi£ry'red, red. Rev. vi. 4, V'ttttos. 

xii. 3, SpuKoiv. Sept. and Class. 
Hupajflrts, £0)5, 77, {'TTvpou},) prop. 

burning, conflagration. Rev. x\dii. 9, 18; 
fig. fiery trial, calamity, suffering, 1 Pet. 
iv. 12, TTvptacri^ Trpos TTEipacrp.dv, where 
there is an allusion to the qucestio, or tor- 
ment by fire. 

n ft), enclit. partic. yet, even, used only 
in compos.; see Mv^ru), M.rjdtTru), Outto), 
OvSettco. 

HwXfft), f. rytro), (see on TTiTrpdc/cft),) 
prop, to trade away wares, to barter ; 
hence gener. to sell, with ace. Matt. xiii. 
44, ocra t'x^t? ttcoXeI. xix. 21. xxi. 12, al. 
Sept. and Class. Pass, with gen. of price, 
Matt. X. 29, oh^L dvo a-Tpovdia dcraa- 
pLov TTcoXfiirat ; Lu. xii. 6. Absol. Matt, 
xxi. 12, al. 

HwXos, ou, 6, r], a foal, Lat. pullus^ 
i. e. gener. a young animal, lit. youngling; 
spec, of the horse, a colt, and oft. in Class, 
In N. T. of an ass, a foal, a colt, joined with 
oyos, etc. Matt. xxi. 2, 5, 7. John xii. 15. 
absol. Mk. xi. 2, 4, 5, 7, and Sept. oft. 

nd)7roT£, adv. (ttw and ttote,) lit. yet 
ever, ever, at any time : in N. T» occ. only 
after a neg. not yet even, never, Lu. xix. 

30, £^' bv OvSeU TTWTTOTf EKaQlGE, Jollll 

i. 18, al. Sept. and Class. 

H cop 6 CO, f. (joarco, (Trtopos, a kind of 
stone, also Lat. callus,) prop, to make hard 
like a stone ; then gener. make callous, to 
indurate, e. g. do-T£a, Dioscor. i. 90, 6id 
T^s TTETTcopco/JLEvri^ crapKo^. In N. T. only 
fig. to harden, make dull, stupid, e. g. ti^v 
Kapdiav, John xii. 40. Pass, to be har- 
dened, dull, stupid, e. g. v Kapdia, Mk. vi» 



ni2P 



382 



PA A 



52. viii. 17. TO. voriixaTa^ 2 Cor. iii. 14. 
So of persons, Rom. xi. 7. 

IT a> |0 o) cr t s, £W9, (Trwpoo),) prop, a 
hardening^ induration : in N. T. only fig. 
hardness of heart or mind, dullness, stu- 
pidity/, Mk. iii. 5. Eph. iv. 18. Absol. id. 
Rom. xi. 25, 

n 60 5, enclitic particle indef. an^/ how, 
in any way, in some way or other ; in 
N. T. only in the compomids eLttoh^, 

IIws, interrog. adv. (correl. to ttco?, 
cos, OTTO)?,) ^oit;? in what way or manner.^ 
by what means ? I. prop, in a direct ques- 
tion. 1) with the indicative: gener. and 
simply, Lu. x. 26, ttojs ai/ayti/wcr/cgts ; 
John vii. 15. ix. 10, ttcos avEijl)-)(jdr]<rdv 
<roL oi d^QaXfxoL ; 1 Cor. xv. 35 : imply- 
ing wonder, Matt. xxii. 12, ttcos £tcr^\0£§ 
oo^£; John iii. 9. \d. 52 : so with the fut. 
expressing what may or can take place, 
Matt. vii. 4, -ttcos kpsX<i tio ddeXtpw (tou ; 
Lu, i. 34; with intensive particles, /cat 
■Trajs, John xii. 34. ttcos oui/, vi. 42. In 
the same expression of surprise, &c. '7r£09 
may often be rendered how is it that ? hoiv 
comes it? why? Mk. xii. 35, ttws Xtyovcnv 
oi ypa/uLjjL, otl 6 'Kp. /c.x.X. John iv. 9. 

1 Cor. XV. 12. Gal. ii. 14. iv. 9 : so ical 
TTws, Acts ii. 8. TToos ovu, Matt. xxii. 43. 
TTw? ou, xvi. 11. Also often in questions 
which serve to affirm the contrary ; e. g. a 
negative. Matt. xii. 29, 34, Trcas dvvaadE 
ctyadd XuXeIv ; i. e. 'ye cannot,' Mk. iii. 
23. John iii. 4. /cat ttcos intens. Lu. xx. 
44. John xiv. 5. Rom. iii. 6. 1 Cor. xiv. 
7, 9. Heb. ii. 3. Hence ttws oux^ ii^^- 
plying strong affirmation, Rom. viii. 32. 

2 Cor. iii. 8. 2) with the subjunctive, in a 
question expressing doubt. Matt, xxiii. 33, 

"TTCOS (pvyriTB CLTTO Ttj^ KpLCTECt)^ T7]9 ye&V- 

i/r/s; xxvi. 54. 3) with the optative and 
di/, expressing a negative subjectively, 
Acts viii. 31, ttcos yap dv BvvaLfxi]v ; ' for 
how can I — II. in an indirect question, 
with the indicative, expressing what is real 
and of actual occurrence, John ix. 15, 
rjpooTaju avTov ttws dui(3XE\j/Ev. Oftener 
in oblique discourse, after verbs of consi- 
dering, finding out, knowing, making 
known, and the like : here the interrog. 
force is dropped, and -rrws is equiv. to its 
correlative ottws, how, in ivhat way : 1) 
with the indie. Matt. vi. 28. xii. 4. Mk. 
V. 16. 2) with the subjunctc where any 
thing is expressed as objectively possible. 

Matt. X. 19, fXri UlEpi/ULV^CniTE TTCOS y TL 

Xa\»}(n]T£. Mk. xiv. 1, 11. Lu. xii. 11. 
xxii. 2, 4. Acts iv. 21. 3) with the fut. 
indie, instead of the subjunct. Mk. xi. 18, 
kXinTovv TTws avTov dTroXicrovaLV, 1 Cor. 
vii. 32. — III. as an intensive exclamation, 
how ? how very ! how greatly ! before an 
adj. or adv. Mk. x. 24, ttws bvuKoXov 



E(TTL, &c. Matt. xxi. 20 ; before a verb, 

Lu. xii. 50, TTtOS (TVVE^jXai EWS OV T£- 

\£ 0-017 ; John xi. 36. 

P. 

'Va(3(3l, Heb. a, master or teacher. 
Matt, xxiii. 7, and oft. 

'Fap^ovL, Heb. intens. great master, 
Mark x. 51, al. 

'PajS^iJco, f. i(T(jo, {pd(3do?,) to heat 
ivith rods, to scourge, absol. Acts xvi. 22. 
2 Cor. xi. 25, Tpis Eppa^bL<ydt]v, and lat. \ 
Class. 

'P a jS ^ o 9, OV, 71, a rod, wa,nd, staff, 1 ) 
gener. Heb. ix. 4, 77 pd^^o<s 'Aapwv. Rev. 
xi. 1. So Sept. Ex. iv. 2, 4. For chas- 
tising, scourging, 1 Cor. iv. 21. For lean- 
ing upon, walking. Matt. x. 10. Mk, vi. 8, 
al. 2) spec, a sceptre, i. e. staff or wand 
of office, Heb. i. 8. 

'Paj8^oOxo9, ov, 6, prop, a rod-holder, 
i. e. a lictor, an officer, or sort of sergeant, 
who attended on the magistrates of Roman 
cities and colonies, and executed their 
decrees ; so called as bearing the Roman 
fasces or bundle of rods, Acts xvi. 35, 38, 
and later Class. 

"^V ahiov pyr\p.a, aT09, to, {padiovp- 
y&ct), padLovpyo?, ' one who makes light 
of what he does,' whether good or evil ; 
ff. padL09, 'ipyov,) prop. ' what is done 
lightly,' i. e. with levity. Now this may, 
and often does, denote, by an Attic soften' 
ing, crime, wickedness ; but, according 
to its original force, it may denote that 
lighter sort of crime, called with us knavery 
or trickery. So Lucian, Calum. non tem. 
cred. 20, dirdTi] Kal xp-EvSo's, Kai j) etti- 
opKLa, Kal TrpocrXLTrdprjaL^, Kal dvai- 
(TyyvTia, Kal dXXa fivpLa paoLovpyn- 
fxan-a. Plut. ix. 415, 10, And such may 
be the sense intended at Acts xviii. 14, ii 
fXEV ovv t^v d^LKr]fxd tl 77 pa^iovpyrifia 
TTovt^pSv. But as there irov7]p6v is united 
with the term pa^. it may rather be un- 
derstood to denote, like our roguery, icag- 
gery, ' a wanton mischievous trick.' In- 
deed, there and elsewhere (as Theogn. 
274) TTomjpd^ certainly denotes no other 
than mischievous, causing trouble. In 
short, the expression may be supposed to 
have reference to those mischievous tricks 
played off by the heathens, in ridicule of 
the Mosaic rites and ceremonies, especially 
circumcision ; for which the Jews were by 
the heathens contemptuously styled verpi. 
See Juven. Sat. xiv. 96—106. Finally, m 
Plut. vii. 79, 1, pa^Lovpyiu) is used in this 
very sense for petulanter et lascive agere. 

'P adiov pyia, a?, 77, (comp. padiovp- 
yi^jULa,) levity of action, and hence knavery, 
roguery ; in which there is a conjoint idea . 



P AK 



383 



P HM 



of subtlety or roguery ^vith tlie crinii- 
nality, be it more or less. So in Acts xiii. 
10, 7rXtjpi]9 Traj/Tos doXov Kal paStovp- 
y'la^. And so occasionally in the Class., 
e. gi\ Pint. vi. 19, 12, ol avTocrxi^LOL twv 
\6yu3V Kal padiovpyia^ fieri 7rXrjp£t5. 
In short, the ^vord has all the senses of our 
word ropucn/, which, indeed, sprung from 
it, as 7'ogu.e from padiovpyo^. 

*Pa/ca, Heb. an appellation of strong 
contempt, icortliless^foolish^ Matt. v. 22. 

'Pa /cos, £os ous, TO, (/otJcto'w, to rend,) 
apiece torn off^ a rag^ Horn. Od. xxi. 221. 
In N. T. a shred, or a piece cut off from a 
web of new cloth. Matt. ix. 16. Mk. ii. 
21, £7ri/3X.i]jua parous dyvdcpov. So in 
the Anthol. Gr. the term is used of the 
remnaiit of a web of cloth. And in Ar- 
tem. i. 13, of the strips of cloth which 
were wound around tbe dead, paKsa-Lv 
kG\LcrfjLivoi'5 ivEiXovvTaiol aTrodavovTE^. 

'Pai/Tt^co, f. tcrto, {paivu),) prop, to 
sprinkle, hesprinUe, with acc. Heb. ix. 13, 
cTTTo^os oajudXgojs pavTiX^ovcra toi/s ke- 
KoLVMiiivov^. ver. 19, 21, Pass, in ix. 19, 
21. Sept. Lev. vi. 27. 2 K. ix. 33. And 
so in Class,, as Athen. xii. 3, fin. Metaph. 
or symbol, to purify, cleanse, in a moral 
sense, Heb. x. 22, kppavTLcrfxivoL ra? 
Kapdia^ aiTG avvELSncrsuj^ 7roy?7pas, ' pu- 
rified as to our hearts from whatever 
defiles the conscience,' from all sense of 
sin. So Sept. Ps. li. 9, payrtEts fj.E 
vaarcoTTco, Kal KadapLordrjao/xaL. 

avT LOT /JLo^, ov^ 6, (/oayTt^O),) prop. 
a sprinkling, and meton. purification, 
cleansing, Heb. xii. 24, aLfxari pavTia- 
fiou, ' blood of sprinkling,' i. e.for sprink- 
ling, cleansing. So Sept. vdwp pavTicr- 
fiov. Num. xix. 9, 13, 20, sq. 1 Pet. i. 2, 
ekXektol^ — €ts V7raKoi]v Kal pavTLcr/ixov 
alfxaTo^ 'Irja-ov Xp. 'to sprinkling with 
the blood of Jesus, to cleansing through 
his blood,' in which passage the apostle 
seems to have had in view a strikingly 
similar one of Zech. xiii. 1, where this 
very thing is prophesied of : 'In that day 
there shall be a fountain opened for sin 
and for uncleanness,' i. e. for its removal, 
«ts Tov xwpio-/xoV, or, as the Alexandrian 
and other MSS. with Symm. have, eU 
TOV p avTLcr/uLov, the very word, doubt- 
less, read by St. Peter. 

'PaTTiJw, f. to-w, {paTrh, Tod,=pd(3- 
^05,) prop, to heat ivith rods, scourge, Hdot. 
vii, 35. ib. viii. 59 : in lat. writers and 
N. T. to smite luith the open hand, in opp. 
to KoXa^'Ct^ui, to thump, to slap, espec. the 
face or ears, Tvith acc. Matt. v. 39, ocTis 
(TE pair. ETTL Ti]v ^E^Luv (TOV. absol. Matt, 
xxvi. 67. Sept. and Class. 

PaTTtc/Lta, aT09, to, {pairi^o),) a 
blow with the open hand, slap, espec. on 



I the cheeks or eai-s, Mk. xiv. 65, ol hin]- 
pETai pairiafxacnv avTov t(3aXXov. Jolm 
xviii. 22. xix. 3. Sept. Is. 1. 6. and lat. 
Class. 

'Paf/)i9, i'oo9, 17, (/OttTTTto, to sew,) a 
needle. Matt. xix. 24. Mk.x. 25. Lu. xviii. 
25. Hippocr. de Morb. lib. ii. c. 26. Nicet. 
Annal. viii. 4. 

'Fid a or "PiSt], tjs, 77, Lat. rheda, i. e. 
a carriage with four wheels for travelling, 
a chariot. Rev. xviii. 13. 

'Ptto, f. pEvcru) or pEvcrofiaL, to fiotv, 
intrans. John vii. 38, iroTajuioi — pEvcrovaiv 
u(5a7-o§ X^uiVTo<5. Sept. and Class. 

'Veu), obsol. to speak, see in EIttoj/. 

'Vriy fxa, a-ros, to, [priyvvfXL.) a rend- 
ing, breach, ruin, Lu. \A. 49. Sept. Amos 

vi. 11. Pol. xiii. 6,8. 

'VriyvvfXL & 'Pr7<Tcrw, f. ^o), gener. 
to rend, tear, break ; in N. T. 1. prop. 
and 1) of things, to rend, hurst, as leather 
bottles or skins, Mk. ii. 22. Lu. v. 37, 
pri^EL 6 vio^ olvo^ Toil's ddKov^. Pass. 
Matt. ix. 17. Sept. and Class., chiefly of 
rending garments. 2) of persons, to rend, 
to tear, to lacerate, e. gr. as dogs. Matt. 

vii. 6. Also to dash to or on the ground, as 
a demon, one possessed, Mk. ix. 18. Lu. 
ix. 42, Eppri^Eu avTov to SaLjULOVLov Kal 
avvEcrirapa^EV. So Sept. Is. xiii. 16. 
Wisd. iv. 19. Artemid. i. 60, prj^at tov 
avTLTTaXov, of a WTestler. — II. FIG. & ab- 
sol. to break forth, (by bursting all bonds,) 
i. e. into rejoicing and praise. Gal. iv. 27, 
prj^ov Kal (^orjcov, where at p. supply 
(p(jovr]v, lit. 'cause a sound to break forth:' 
so Is. xlix. 13. lii. 9, orj^ai Evcppocruvriv. 
The (pcovrjv is gener. eocpressed in the 
Class, as Hdot. i. 85. v. 93, & oft. Arist. 
Nub. 960. 

'Vrjfia, aTos, to, (psw, see in EIttoz/,) 
prop. ' that which is spoken, a ivord : I. 
prop, a word, as uttered by the living 
voice, Acts vi. 11, ptifxaTa (3Xdar(pri/uLa. 
ver. 13. X. 44, al. Sept. and Class. — II. 
collectively, ivord, also plur. words, equiv. 
to saying, speech, discourse : 1 ) gener. 
Matt. xii. 36, Trdv prifxa dpyov. Mk. ix. 
32. Lu. i. 38. ii. 17, 19, 50, 51, where 
TrdvTa TO. prifxaTa TovTa may have 
reference to both sayings and doings, 
namely, the words spoken, and all the cir- 
cumstances connected with the afi'air just 
before spoken of. So in Sept. & Class. 2) 
equiv. to charge, accusation, Matt. v. 11. 
xviii. 16. 2 Cor. xiii. 1. 3) equiv, \o pre- 
diction, prophecy, e. gr. priixaTa irpoeipr]' 
fxiva, 2 Pet. iii. 2. Jude 17. So Tct pri- 
fxuTa TOV Beov, Rev. xvii. 17 in text. rec. 
4) promise, e. gr. from God, Lu. ii. 29. 
Heb. vi. 5, koXov yEvad/uLEvoL Qeov prifia. 
So Sept. 1 Kings viii. 20. xii. 16. 5) 
command, Luke v. 5. So prjfxa Qeov, 



P H 2 



384 



POM 



word ofGod^ his omnipotent decree, Heb. 
xi. 3. impl. Heb. i. 3. Also Lu. iv. 4. 
Matt. iv. 4, kiri iravTL pvixarL sKTropsvo- 
fxivw dia a-TO/j.aTO's Oeov, i. e. meton. 
' upon whatever is ordained by God.' 
Sept. Josh. i. 13. 1 Sam. xvii. 29. In 
this sense, too, the word occurs in a mo- 
numental inscription in Hdot. vii. 228, 

KELjUL&da^ ToTs KiivUiV prifiaGL TTEidSfXEVOL. 

6) spoken of a teacher, icord^ i. e. teach- 
ing^ precept^ doctrine^ e. gr. to. prifxan-a 
TT]^ £w^9. Acts V. 20. X. 22, aKOvaraL 
prifJ-ara irapd crov. xi. 14. xiii. 42. So 
pfjfxa^ prifxa tt;? TrtcrTEOj?, prjixa Q^ov or 
Kupiou, tlie li'ord^ luord of faith ^ icord of 
God, i. e. ' the doctrines and promises 
revealed and taught from God,' the gos- 
pel as preached, Rom. x. 8, 17. Acts x. 
37. Eph. V. 26. vi. 17. 1 Pet. i. 25 ; of 
Jesus, John v.47, & oft. in St. John's Gos- 
pel. TO. pr]}xaTa. tov GsoO, ' words or 
doctrine received from God,' John iii. 34. 
viii. 47. xvii. 8. — III. metoii. from the 
Heb. "Til, things spol^en of i. e. gener. 
thi7ig^ matter^ affair^ like the Greek Clas- 
sical £7ro5 and Xoyos, Lu. ii. 15, tScofXEv 
TO p^ifxa TOVTO TO ysyovo^. i. 65. Matt, 
xviii. 16. Acts v. 32. So Sept. oft. So ov 
— irdv jOT/zwa, (the negat. ov being joined 
with the verb,) Jiothing at all^ Lu. i. 37, 
ovK OiCvvaTi\(TiL "TTaoa tw 0£a) Trav prjfxa. 

'Vi'](r(TU}^ see in 'VriyvvfXL, 

*P ?j't 60 /), o/)o§, 6, (obsol. /3£ct),) a speaker^ 
orator^ advocate, Acts xxiv. 1, and Class, 

'PtjTw?, adv. (p?]t69, said, expressed 
in words, obsol. pico^) in express icords, 
eccpressly^ 1 Tim. iv. 1. Sext. Empir. adv. 
Log, i. 8, 6 *Sivo<piov pijTtos cpricTLi;, 

'Ptja, a?, a root: 1) prop. Matt, 
iii. 10. Lu. iii. 9, h a^'cvii 7rpd<s Ti]u pV^av 
ToiV Bivopuiv keTtul. Mk. xi. 20, sk pi'^oov, 
'from the roots,' i. e. wholly. Sept. and 
Class. So out: &x^^^ jOiJcci^, ' to have no 
root,' q. d. ' not to take deep root,' Matt, 
xiii. 6. Mk. iv. 6 : fig. of those not rooted 
and established in faith & doctrine. Matt, 
xiii. 21. Mk. iv. 17. Sept. Ez. xvii. 6, 7, 9. 
2) fig. cause, source of any thing, 1 Tim. 
vi. 10, pi'^a 'TrdvTcov rwv KaKtov. Ecclus. 
1. 6, 20. Wisd. XV. 3. Also the root from 
which any thing springs, Rom. xi. 16 — 18. 
Heb. xii. 15, pi'^a TTLKpia^, i.e. 'a wicked 
person whose example is poisonous,' see 
my note. 3) meton. (from the Heb. a 
sprout, shoot,) fig, offspring, a descendant, 
Rom. XV. 12, 17 p'Ct^a. TOV 'Isa-aai, Rev. v. 
5. xxii. 16, and 1 Mace. i. 11. 

*PtJoa), f. too- a;, (ptja,) to let taJce root, 
and pass, or mid. to he or become rooted, 
to take root, Theophr. Hist. PI. ii. 5, 6. 
viii. 5, 4. In N. T. only pass. fig. to he 
rooted, = ' to be strengthened with roots,' 
to be firmly fijced., constant, Eph. iii. 18, kv 



dydirr) kppLX^wfjLtvoL, Col. ii. 7, and Class, 
as Plut. de Puer. educ. 9, aW brau xts 
piX^cocrri Tijv dvva/jLCV. 

'P Liri], T/s, 77, [pLTTTU),) « throw or cast, 
as of a stone or weapon, Hom. II. xii. 462, 
also the impetus with which a body, when 
propelled, moves; also the flapping of 
wing-s, Eur. Hel. 1122. JE&ch. Ag. 864. 
In N. T. a jerk of the eye, i. e. a wink, 
tivinUiiig, 1 Cor. xv. 52, kv pnry ocpdaX- 
juov, equiv. to a moment of time. The 
nearest to this phrase is the expression of 
Soph. Elect. 106, irafxcpeyyel^ acrTpwu 
pLird^, ' the twinkling of stars.' Comp. 
Lu. iv. 5. 

'Pi'TTt^O), f. tCO), (/OtTTtS, fr. pLTTTtO, a 

fan for blowing fire, Aristoph. Ach. 888,) 
to fan, to hloic, e. gr. fire, fuel, Aristot. de 
Admirand. Tii/as Xidovs, oi KaiovTai, — 
jOiTTi^o'/xsyot (r(iivvvvTaL Taxkno^. In 
N. T. gener. to move to and fro, to toss, 
agitate, as waves, Ja. i. 6, K\vdu)VL da\d<r- 
a?]? — pLTTi'^^ofxivto. So Philo, cited by 
Wets, ai /li] Trpos dvifxov plttlX^olto to 
vocop. So Dio Chrysost. p. 368, speaking 
of the vulgus, says, utt' dviixov piirL- 

'PtTTTs w, only in pres. and imperf. as 
a frequentative from pltttod,— to throiu or 
cast repeatedly, Hdot. iv. 188. Pol. i. 47,4. 
In N. T. Acts xxii. 23, pcirTovvTcov to. 
l/uLaria, i. e. probably throwing zip or toss- 
ing their older garments in the air, as also 
dust, in furtherance of the uproar. This 
was customary in theatres and other as- 
semblies. See my note. 

'PiTTTw, f. y\r(jD, to throiv or cast, with 
a sudden motion, to hurl, to jerk, with acc. 
1) prop, and foil, by tis, Lu. iv. 35, 
pLxbuv avTou TO SaipiOVLOv fxicrov. 
xvii, 2. Matt, xxvii. 5. Foil, by with 
gen, to cast out, Acts xxvii. 19, 29. Sept. 
In a milder sense, — to put or lay doim, 
as sick persons, with acc. Matt. xv. 30, 
eppLxlrav avToii? Trapd tous TTooas tou 
'I. Comp. Sept. 2 K. ii. 16. Wisd. xi. 
14. Dem, 413, 11, ovk ex^lv ottov to. 
iavTov pLTTTEL, 2) to cast foiih, throw 
apart, scatter, pass. part. perf. kppLfifxivo^, 
cast forth, scattered, Matt. ix. 36. Diod. 
Sic. xiii. 9, tuw ^vpaKovcrLwv — Kai-d tov^ 
OLcoy/udu kppifXfxivojv, Pol. v, 48, 2. 

'Poi^r](56i/, adv. {poiX^ku} & poTCp^, 
noise, rushing, as of winds and waves,) 
icith great noise, with a crash, 2 Pet. iii. 
10. So Hero ap. Musseum, 339, poiXp^Bov 
TrpoKaprivo^ aTr' rjXi^uTOv Tricri Trup- 
yov. 

'F oficpaia, a?, ^, cc sivord, prop, a 
long, broad, and straight sword, (like the 
old Highland claymore,) used espec. by 
the Thracians, Thuc. ii. 96. vii. 27. Plut. 
Paul, TEmil. 18. In N. T. gener. Rev. i. 
16, pofxcpaia dicrTOfio^ oJeTc. ii. 12, 16« 



P YM 



385 



2 AT 



vi. 8. xix. 15, 21. Fig. Lii. ii. 35, <rov Sk 

i. e. 'anguish of soul shall come upon 
thee.' Sept. Ex. xxxii. 26. Ez. v. 1. Jos. 
Ant. vi. 12, 4, h pofxcpaia tov ToXidQov, 

vii. 12, 1. 

'Pu'jU?;, 77, (obsol. /ouo), equiv. to 
kpvuj^) prop, impetus^ impidse, onset^equiv. 
to opjULij. In the later usage and N. T. 
a street, lane, alley of a city, in distinction 
from 77 TrXaTfta, (which see,) Matt. vi. 2. 
Lu. xiv. 21, Ttts 7r\aT£tas kol pvfxa^ 
T7]9 ttoXews. Acts ix. 11. xii. 10. Sept. 
Is. XV. 3. Tob. xiii. 18. Ecclus. ix. 7. 
Pol.vi. 29, 1. 

'Puowat, f. pva-oixai, depon. mid. (ob- 
sol. pvcoy equiv. to spvco,) prop, to draiv 
toivards oneself; hence by impl. to draw 
or snatch from danger, = to rescue, deliver; 
foil, by acc. simpl. Matt, xxvii. 43, pv- 
arda-du) vvv avTOv. 2 Pet. ii. 7. Absol. 
Rom. xi. 26, b pvofxEuo^, 'the deliverer,' 
as oft. in Sept. With an adjunct from 
tvhence, e. gr. foil, by dird with gen. Matt, 
vi. 13, pvaraL rifjid^ diro tov irovripod, al. 
S£epe, and Sept. Foil, by ek with gen. 
Rom. vii. 24, n's p.& puasTai ek tov gco- 
uanro^ — ; 2 Cor. i. 10. Col. i. 13, al. and 
Class. Pass. Lu. i. 74. 2 Tim. iv. 17, and 
Sept. 

'VvtrapEvojxai, depon. mid. (pvira- 
po9,) to he filthy, fig. Rev. xxii. 11, in 
lat. ed. 

'PuTTap/a, a?, 77, {pvirapo^,^ prop. 
filth, fiUhiness, fig. Ja. i, 21, dTrobifXEVOL 
Trdaau pvirapiav, meaning, 'fleshly sins,' 
such as gluttony, drunkenness, fornication, 
&c. ; spiritually with allusion to laying aside 
a filthy garment, pvirapdv kadrjTa. In 
the moral sense it occ. in Plut. Prec. 
Conjug. § 28, and so pvTraivEcrQai, 'to be 
polluted with vice,' in Dion. Hal. & Plut. 
and pviro^ for the defilement of the soul, 
in Lucian, t. i. 542. ii. 800. 

'PuTTapos, d, 01/, adj. (/outtos,) filthy, 
foul, Ja. ii. 2, tttw^os kv pvirapa kadTjTi. 
Sept. and Class. Fig. Rev. xxii. 11, in 
later edit. Sept. So Act. Thorn. § 13, pv- 
irapd kTndvfXLa, 

'Putt 0 9, ov, 6, filth, fiUhiness, 1 Pet. 
iii. 21, ov aapKo^ d7ro0£<rts pvirov. Sept. 
Job xiv. 4. Is. iv. 4. Luc. Anachar. v. 
Gymnas. 29. Pol. xxxii. 7, 8. 

*Pu7roa), f. (varco, (poet, for pvTrdco, fr. 
puTTos,) to be filthy, in text. rec. Rev. 
xxii. 11, 6 pvirwv, pvirwadTO) etl. Hom. 
Od. vi. 87. Aristoph. Av. 1271. 

*Pu(ris, €0)5, 77, (jOtw, which see,) a 
flowing, fiux, e. gr. aLfxaTo^, Mk. v. 25. 
Lu. viii. 43, 44. Sept. Lev. xv. 24, sq. 
JEi\. V. H. vi. 6, Tr\v p. TOV ai/xaros. 

'PuTts, t5os, 17, (obsol. /QUO), equiv. to 



kpvo),) a wrinkle, i. c. as drawn together, 
contracted, Aristoph. Plut. 1051. Diod. 
Sic. iv. 51 ; fig. Eph. v. 27. 
'P uo), see 'Puojuai. 

^Vojvvv fXL,i. pu)cru3,to strengthen, make 
firm ; more usually perf. pass, eppoofxai. as 
present, to be strong, well ; in N. T. only 
imperat. EppMo-o, as a formula at the end 
of epistles, like Lat. vale, Engl, farewell, 
Acts xxiii. 30, 'ippaxro. xv. 29, eppcoadE. 



^a^^aT L(T fxb^, ov, b, (cra^^aTi'^u),) 
prop, a keeping sabbath, i. e. rest, a ceasing 
from labour; in N. T. Heb. iv. 9, diro- 
XELTTETai <r. Tto Xutjo TOV OfioD, wherc is 
meant, not a mere resting, but such a rest 
as God entered into, when he had finished 
his work of creation ; namely, a complete, 
holy, and happy rest ; wherein it is further 
intimated, that the sabbath was instituted 
as a symbol of that eternal rest which 
' remaineth for the people of God.' See 
more in my note there. The word occurs 
also in Plut. de Superst, 3. 

^d^puTov, ov, TO, sabbath, Heb. 
prop, rest, a ceasing from labour ; pi. tu 
<Td^(3aTa, often for the sing., dat. pi. tol9 
ad(3(3aarL. I. PROP, the sabbath, i. e. the 
Jewish sabbath, the seventh day of the 
week : 1) sing. Mk. ii. 27, to ad(3. bid 
TOV dvd. kyivETo. Matt. xii. 5. Mk. ii, 
27. vi. 2. r] vp-Epa TOV (Ta(3. Lu. xiii. 14, 
16. vi. 1, and Sept. ssepe. 2) plur. in a 
plural signif. Acts xvii. 2, IttI <ra/3/3aTa 
Tpia. Col. ii. 16 : elsewh. only in gen. 
and dat., equiv. to sing. Matt, xxviii. 1, 
bxpE (ra^(3dTU}V. 77 ripikpa touv craQ^dTwv, 
Lu. iv. 16. Mk. ii. 23, 24. iii. 2, 4.— II. 
METON. a period of seven days, a week, 
sing. Mk, xvi. 9, irpooTri a-afS^aTov. Lu. 
xviii. 12, bU TOV a-afi. PI. Matt, xxviii. 1, 
£15 fiLav a-a^^dTwv. Mk. xvi. 2. Lu. xxiv. 
1. Acts XX. 7. 1 Cor. xvi. 2, and Sept. 

"Eayvvri, 779, tj, {a-ayt], fr. a-dTTti),) a 
net, used in fishing, and drawn to the 
shore, ' something like our draw-net, 
which, when sunk into the river and 
dragged to the shore, sweeps, as it were, 
the bottom, and was therefore called ver- 
rieulum. In this, however, it differed 
from an ordinary draw-net, that besides 
being far larger, and of stouter materials, — 
formed of wattled work, osier, or cane, — it 
was intended to take not part of the fish 
of a pool or stream, but the whole, of every 
kind, size, and quality : whence its name, 
lit. ' that into which all the fish of a pool 
or part of a river were inclosed and crammed 
togetlter.'' So Pol. xii. 2, 5, caTTOvcnv fis 



S AI 



386 



SAN 



ayysta, which seems alluded to in the words 
of St. Matt. xiii. 47, aayriuri (BXi^d&Lcrtj ak 
Ti]u ^d\. Kal EK TravTO^ yivovs orvv- 
ayayovcrri. Such is also alluded to in 
the figurative use of the verb crayrivavu) 
in Hdot. vi. 31. ^schyl. Ag. 1353. Plato, 
p. 698, and other writers, as said of cap- 
turing all the inhabitants of a country. 
Besides the N. T., the word occurs also in 
Sept. (as Ez. xxvi. 5, al.) & later writers, 
as Appian, ^Elian, and Artemid. prop. ; 
also fig. in Plut. vi. 647, 3, IfxaLvau cocnrEp 
kv aaynvrf fJLia^ Ty BiLcndaLixovLCt^ arvvdi- 

2 a 11/ ft), f. ai/w, (fr. treaLvco, kindred 
with erg i ft),) to move^ stir, or shake any 
thing, and by implication, out of its 
place. Hence fig. to move in mind, per- 
turb. So Eurip. Rhes. 55, (raivii ix 'iv- 
VVX09 ippvKTUipia, and pass, to he per- 
turbed, 1 Th. iii. 3, tw \x\]^iva (raLUEadaL 
kv Tats ^XixlrEG-L TauTccts, ' should be 
perturbed in mind, and moved from the 
faith.' Comp. Acts ii. 25, 'iva fxn aaXsvdco, 
where see my note. So Diog. Laert. viii. 
1, 21, 01 ds, aaLVO/uLEvoL rots XEyofiivoi^, 
kBdKpvov. 

^dKK0 9, ov, 6, Hebr. pil?, sacTc-ing, 
sack-cloth, i. e. coarse black cloth, com- 
monlv made of hair. Rev. vi. 12, and 
used for straining liquids ; also for sacks, 
and for mourning-garments, worn by pro- 
phets, and by ascetic persons gener.. Matt, 
iii. 4. Hence in N. T. gener. Rev.vi. 12, b 
vXlo^ fjikXa's kyivETO w5 (Tclkko^ TpL^LVO^, 
comp. Is, 1. 3. Ecclus. xxv. 17. Of 
mourning-garments, Matt. xi. 21, kv cclk- 
KM Kai crTTodM. Lu. X. 13. Of a pro- 
phet's garment, Rev. xi. 3. 

SaXfUft), f. Evcro), {crdXo£, the surge 
of the sea,) prop, to move to and fro, to 
shake, trans, i. e. to put into a state of 
waving, vibratory motion. I. prop, with 
acc. Lu. vi. 48. Heb. xii. 26, ou v cfywvi] 
Ti)V yrjv kcraXEvcrE. Pass. craXEVEaQaL, 
prop, used of the tossing to and fro of 
ships at anchor, see Thuc. i. 137 ; but 
also of any other tossing, as Matt. xi. 7. 
Lu. vii. 24, KoXajULOv vtto dvifxav caXEVo- 
fjLEvov. Matt. xxiv. 29, al dvvdfXEL^ tcov oup. 
(TaXEvQnaovTai, denoting the destruction 
of states and potentates. So Plut. Dion. 
8, T^v Tvpavvida aaXEvovcrav. Acts iv, 
31, al. of an earthquake, ka-aXEvdyj 6 to- 
•7ro5. So ^sch. Prom. 1117, y^oiv aEcrd- 
Xevtul, Luke vi. 38, fXETpov ttstt. /cat 
(TzcraXEvixivov, i. e. shaken down. Also 
Sept. Jos. and Class. Fig. of things ready 
to fall and perish, Heb. xii. 27, where Ta 
craXEvojULEva, things shaken and ready to 
fall, means the Mosaic dispensation ; while 
Ta fxi] araXEVOfxEva designates the Chris- 
tian dispensation. — II. metaph. to move 
in mind, to agitate, disturb, with acc. 



Acts X vii. 13, Tous oyXov^ ctoXevelv, to 
agitate the people, i. e. to cause a tumult. 
So in the Class, writers not unfrequently, 
(as Soph. (Ed. R. 25. El. 1074,) political 
turbulence is compared to the tossing of a 
tempestuous sea. Pass. Acts ii. 25, 'iva 
fxr] GoXEvdu), i. e. ' that I should not by 
calamity be shaken or troubled, namely, 
so as to have my firm faith and trust 
in God disturbed.' Comp. 1 Th. iii. 3. 
So also 2 Th. ii. 2, tts to fxrl o-aXEvdrjvaL 
vjuid's diro tov voo?, ' that ye should not 
[suffer yourselves to] be troubled;' i. e. 
that ye be not shaken from the hitherto 
settled persuasion of your minds ; where 
we have, I conceive, (as in a similar pas- 
sage of Arrian cited by Wets, /xtj diroaa- 
XEVEadaL ^id Tcov crocj^tcriJidTcov,) a meta- 
phor taken from a ship torn from its an- 
chorage, and carried out to sea. 1 Mace, 
vi. 8. Ecclus. xxix. 18. xlviii. 19. 

2 a A. OS, ov, 6, prop, ant/ vibrator^/ mo- 
tion, tossing to and fro, especially of a 
ship at sea, or rocking at anchor ; hence in 
N. T. put for the rolling sea, billows, Lu. 
xxi. 25, i]Xova"n^ ^aXda-<T7j^ Kal crdXov. 
Sept. Jonah i. 15. Ps. Ixxxix. 10. Plut. 
Thes. 20. Diod. Sic. xx. 74. Soph. Phil. 
271. Aristoph. Thesm. 872. 

'EdX'TTiy^, tyyos, ^, a trumpet, 1 Cor. 
xiv. 8. Rev. i. 10. iv. 1. viii. 2, 6, 13. ix. 
14. As announcing the approach or pre- 
sence of God, Heb. xii. 19; or also the 
final advent of the Messiah, Matt. xxiv. 
31, fXETa ardXTTiyyo^ cpcovrj^ jueyaXtjs, 
(for fxETa fJiEy. (piovrj^ caXTnyyo's, an 
allusion, we may suppose, to the method 
of convoking solemn assemblies among the 
Jews and Gentiles, namely, by sound of 
trumpet,) 1 Cor. xv. 52, kv io-xaTT/ 
(rdXTnyyi. 1 Th. iv. 16, cr. Qeov. Sept. 

Sa\7r/^ft), f. icro), (o-dXTrty^,) aor. 1. 
kcrdXTTLca, to sound a trumpet, in trans. 
Matt. vi. 2, fxi] araXTTLa-ri^ EfXTrpocrOtv 
(TOV. 1 Cor. XV. 52. Rev. viii. 6, sqq. ix. 
1, 13. X. 7. xi. 15. Sept. and Class. 

2aX7rKrTr]S, ov, 6, ((raXTrt^ft),) a 
trumpeter. Rev. xviii. 22. Dion. Hal. Ant. 
iv. 17, and lat. Class. 

'EavddXiov, ov, TO, (dim. of ardvda- 
Xov,) a sandal, i. e. a wooden or leathern 
sole, covering the bottom of the foot, and 
bound on with thongs, Mk. vi. 9. Acts 
xii. 8. Sept. and Class. 

Sai/is, t(5o9, 17, a board, plank, e. gr. 
of a ship, Acts xxvii. 44, ETri aravL<Tiv : 
meaning planks from a ship's deck. So the 
full phrase in Pol. i. 22, 9, Tats c-avia-L 
TCOV KaTaarTpcojULdTcou. The ellips. occurs 
also in Eiirip. Hel. 1572, ovk tjOeX' opdo^ 
aravida irpoa^rjvaL /cdra, ' to put his foot 
on the deck.' Anthol. i. 55, 15, KXaa- 



s A n 



387 



SAP 



idivro AiaraoL virkp /j.ovvi]<s fxapvaixtvoL 

SaTrpos, a, oi/, adj. (cuTro),) lad : the 
word signifies, I. prop. ' what is decayed 
and rotten^'' as said either of vegetable or 
animal substances; hence by raeton. what 
is refuse and icortldess, as old vessels, or 
small fishes. Matt. xiii. 48 ; also, when 
applied to trees or fruit, what is of a had 
quality. Matt. vii. 17, 18. xii. 33. Lu. vi. 
43. — II. fig. in a moral sense, corrupt^ 
foul, Eph. iv. 29, TTttS Xoyos orairpo^, 
namely, as opp. to Xoyo's ayaOos irpo's 
olKoSo/uLiju just after, 'any kind whatever, 
of bad and unprofitable discourse, as 
brawling, slandering, and the foolish talk- 
ing and jesting' just before mentioned. 
Thus it differs little from the prj/ixa upyou 
of Matt. xii. 36. Comp. Arrian Epict. iii. 
16, TO. a air pa XaXovcri, et al. 

^d'TTcf) sipo^, ou, 77, sapphire, a pre- 
cious stone, next in hardness and value to 
the diamond, mostly of a blue colour in 
various shades, Rev. xxi. 19. Sept. Jos. 
and Class. 

^apydvri, tjs, 77, (comp. Hehr. Jlb^ 
to interweave, to braid,) prop. ' any thing 
braided, twisted, interwoven,' e. gr. a cord, 
jEschyl. Suppl. 769. In N. T. a rope- 
hasket, 7ietivork of cords, 2 Cor. xi. 33; 
comp. Acts ix. 25, aTrupk : so Athen. 
p. 119, & 407. 

dpS Lvo^, ou, o, i. q. cap^tos, Rev. 
iv. 3, in text. rec. 

2a/)^t09, ov, 6, sardius, sardian, a 
precious stone of a blood-red, or some- 
times of a fiesh-colour, more commonly 
known by the name of carnelian, and 
called adphws, as brought from Sardinia. 
Rev. iv. 3, in later edit. xxi. 20. Sept. 
Ex. xxviii. 17. Ez. xxviii. 13. 

^(ipoovx)'^, vyo'5, t], sardonyx, a pre- 
cious stone exhibiting a milk-white variety 
of the onyx or chalcedony, intermingled 
Avith shades or stripes of sardian or carne- 
liau, Rev. xxi. 20. Jos. Ant. iii. 7, 5. 

2ap/ci/cos, dv, adj. {<rdp^,) fleshy, 
carnal, pertaining to the flesh or body, 
opp. to irvsv/jLaTLKo^. 1) generally of 
THINGS, TO, crapKLKa, equivalent to things 
corporeal, external, temporal, Rom. xv. 
27. 1 Cor. ix. 11. 2) as implying weak- 
ness, frailty, imperfection, e. gr. of per- 
sons, carnal, ivorldly, human, and so im- 
perfect, used of wisdom acquired by human 
means, or man's natural powers, and tend- 
ing only to carnal or worldly ends, 1 Cor. 
iii. 1, 609 GapKLK0L<5, 605 vrjTrLOL? iv Xp. 
ver. 3, 4. Of things, carnal, human, 
2 Cor. i. 12, ovK kv aotpia a-apKiK^. x. 4, 
birXa ou crapKLKa, dXXd duvard k.t.X. 



Heb. vii. 16, ov kutu vofxov tvToXf}^ 
a-apKLKT]^, i. e. ' frail, transient, tempo- 
rary,' opp. to Ku-rd dvvafXLV ^6o^s OKUTa- 
XuTou : also carjial, as opp. to the spi- 
ritual service of our High-Priest Christ. 
3) as implying sinful propensity, carnal, 
subject to carnal lusts or infirmities, e. gr. 
of persons, Rom. vii. 14, £y6b crapKLKo^ 
eifXL : of things, the lusts themselves, 
1 Pet. ii. 11, TU)u crapKLKUiV eirSufiLiiov, 
carnal desires, i. e. ' having their seat in 
the carnal nature of man.' 

2 dp /ct 1/09, 7j, ov, adj. (o-ap^,) prop. 
fleshy, corpide?it,Theocr. xxi. 66. Pol.xxxix. 
2, 7. In N. T. fleshy, of flesh, and there- 
fore soft, yielding to the touch, opp. to 
XlOlvo^, 2 Cor. iii. 3, iv TrXa^l Kapdia^ 
(xapKLvaL^. Comp. Sept. Kapdia aapKivrj, 
Ez. xi. 19. xxxvi. 26. Plut. adv. Colot. 
27, init. 

2dp^, aapKo?, v, flesh, i. e. of a liv- 
ing man, or animal, in distinction from 
that of a dead one, which is /cpta?. I. 
PROP, flesh, sing, as one of the constituent 
parts of the body, Lu. xxiv. 39, irvivfjia 
crdpKa Kai oaTsa ouk s-X^'-- ^ Cor. xv. 
39. Sept. and Class. More commonly 
plur. ai adpKs^, lit. fleshy paj^ts. Rev. xix. 
18, Lva (fydytjTs <TdpKa<s ^aaiXiwv. ver. 
21 : fig. and hyperbol. to consume, destroy, 
James v. 3; to maltreat. Rev. xvii. 16. 
Sept. and Class. — II. meto^s. flesh, equiv. 
to THE BODY, corpus, the animal or ex- 
ternal nature, as distinguished from the 
spiritual or inner man, to irvevfxa, freq. 
in N. T. but rare in Class, i. gener. and 
without any good or evil quality implied : 
1 ) opp. to TTVEUfxa expr. 1 Cor. v. 5, f is 
oXeBpov t^s capAcos, iva to Trv&ujULa 
aroiOy. 2 Cor. vii. 1. Col. ii. 5. 1 Pet. iv. 
6. Also o-dpj Kal aJfxa as a periphr. for 
humanity, Heb. ii. 14. Ecclus. xiv. 18. 
Simply, John vi. 52, comp. below ; 2 Cor. 
xii. 7, (TKoXoxl/ Trj aapKL, where see my 
note. Col. i. 24. ii. 1, to irpSarooTrov 
fj.ou iv aapKL. ver. 23. Heb. ix. 10. Acts 
ii. 26, 77 cdpg /uoi/, my body, i. e. /. 
metaph. John vi. 51, /cat 6 dpTO£ — 77 
(rdp^ /uLou icTTLv, meaning that ' Jesus 
himself is the principle of life and nutri- 
tion to the regenerated soul,' ver. 53 — 56, 
comp. Matt. xxvi. 26, o-co^a. Plut. adv. 
Col. 20, P-ixpi- Twv TTspi crdpKa t^s 
xj/uxv'^ ^vvd/uLscov. Spec, mortal body, in 
distinction from a future and spiritual ex- 
istence, 2 Cor. iv. 11, 77 ^607/ — iv Trj 
^vrjTtj (TapKL vfxuiv. Gal. ii. 20. Phil. i. 
22, 24. 1 Pet. iv. 2. 2) put for that 
which is merely external or only apparent, 
in opp. to what is internal and real, John 
vi. 63, TO irvzufxd ecttl to X^tooTroiouv, rj 
adp^ OUK axpeXil oudiv. viii. 15. 1 Cor. 
i. 26, <ro(poL KuTa crdpKa. 2 Cor. v. 16. 
Eph. vi. 5, KupioL's KaTd crdpKa. Philem. 



SAP 



388 



SEB 



16 : so of outward affliction, 1 Cor. vii. 
28, ^Xixj/LV dk TTj aapKL e^ovctlv. 2 Cor, 
vii. 5. Gal. iv. 13, 14. 1 Pet. iv. 1. Spec, 
of circumcision i?i the fleshy i. e. the exter- 
nal rite, Rom. ii. 28. iv. 1, f.vpi]KivaL 
KUTo. aapKa^ ' in respect to circumcision 
2 Cor. xi. 18. Eph. ii. 11. Gal. iii. 3. vi. 
12, 13. Phil. iii. 3, 4. Col. ii. 13. 3) as 
the medium of external or natural genera- 
tion and descent, and of consequent kin- 
dred, John i. 13, ovok ek ^eKiijua^O's 
crapKO's. Rom. ix. 8, to. TEKua tT]<s aap- 
Kos. Eph. V. 29, 30. Heb. xii. 9. Of 
one's countrymen, Rom. xi. 14. So Kara 
adpKa^ according to the flesh,' i. e. as to 
outward kindred, by natural descent, after 
the regular course of nature, or the man- 
ner of men, always however with an im- 
plied action of imjMvity^ Rom. ix. 3. 1 Cor. 
X. 18. Gal. iv. 23, 29. iv aapKi^ id. Eph. 
ii. 11, and Sept. — ii. as implying weakness 
and frailty^ both physical and moral; opp. 
to TTVEVfxa expr. Mk. xiv, 38, to irvEiifxa 
irpodvfxov^ ri 6e erdp^ aardEvn's : also opp. 
to TlvEVfxa ay LOU, John iii. 6. Simply, 
Rom. vi. 19, Slo. t^v aadivELav ttjs aap- 
K0§ vjjLivv. 2 Cor. i. 17. X. 2, to? /caxa 
adpKa TTEpLiraTovvTa?. ver. 3, ' as living 
and acting on merely human views,' the 
maxims of human policy. So adp^ kul 
alixa, 'flesh and blood,' 'frail feeble man,' 
1 Cor. XV. 50. Gal. i. 16, oh TrpocravEQi- 
fxi]v crapKL Kai aifiaTL, meaning, ' had not 
recourse to mere human counsel,' or the 
suggestions of my own or any human rea- 
son. Eph. vi. 12, OVK ECTTLV VfXLV T] 

7ra\t] Trpos al^a Kal adoKa, with which 
comp. Ecclus. xiv. 18, -yeyga cap/cos Kai 
aifxaTo?. And so occasionally the heathen 
Philosophers express themselves ; e. gi\ 
Plut. adv. Colot. 30, t?}? KaTo. aapKU 
7]6ov7j?, et al. — III. as implying sinfulness, 
proneness to sin, the carnal nature, the 
seat of carnal appetites and desires, of sin- 
ful passions and aff"ections, whether phy- 
sical or moral, (in which sense the Greek 
Philosophers speak of the crw/xa,) as opp. 
to Tlvsvfxa, i. e. the Holy Spirit or his in- 
fluences, Rom. viii. 4, fxi] KaTo. crdpKa 
TrspLTraTovcrLv, dWd kuto. UvEvima. ver, 
5, 6, 9^ 13. Gal. v. 16. Simply, Rom. vii. 5, 
ore -i^jULEv iv Ty capKL. ver. 18, oft. So 
Theon Alex, in Anthol. Gr, iii. p. 226, 
i>6ov irddEtov iv toXctl ttovol^ EKddrjpa^, 
E^co crapKO's e[3'i]<s. — III. METON. ^Jiesh, 
human nature, man, homo, Matt. xix. 5, 
EcrovTUL OL dvo eIs crdpKa fxiav, al. ; Jude 
7, crap J ETEpa, ' other flesh,' either by 
adultery, or perhaps by sodomy; see my 
note. Also irdcra adp^, ' all flesh, all 
men,' all mankind, Lu. iii. 6. John xvii. 
2. Acts ii. 17. 1 Pet. i. 24. ou — Trdaa 
(Tctp^, ' no flesh, no man,' Matt. xxiv. 22. 
Rom. iii. 20. /un) — irdcra crdp^, id. 1 Cor. 
1. 29. Spec, of the incarnation of Christ, 



by which he took the human nature upon 
him, and became subject to suff^ering and 
mortality, John i. 14, 6 Xoyos a-^p^ 
kyivETO. 1 John iv. 2, 'I. Xp. iv crapKL 
eX^XvOotu. Rom. i. 3, kutcc a-dpKa. ix. 
5. Eph. ii. 15, iv Ttj aaoKL avTov. Heb. 
V. 7, iv Tats ■hfXEpaL'5 t^? aapKo^ avrov, 
i. e. ' during the time when he lived as a 
man among men,' alluding to the period 
before he had put off his Divine nature. 
1 Tim. iii. 16. 1 Pet. iii. 18. iv. 1. Col. i. 
22, Ev T<Z (T(j)fxaTL Trj's aapKO^ avTov, 
q. d. ' in his body incarnate.' Comp. 
Ecclus. xxiii. 16, iv cw/maTL cap/cos 
avTOv. 

'Eapou), f. tocw, {cralpco, or rather 
adpo^, a broom,) to sweep, cleanse icith a 
broom, with acc. Lu. xv. 8, Kal crapoX tijv 
OLKiav. Pass. Matt. xii. 44, oIkov orEaa- 
pcofjiEvov. Lu. xi. 25. Artemid. ii. 33, 
p. 119. Pamphil. in Geopon. xiii. 15, 4. 
A later form instead of the earlier craipta, 
which occ. in Eur. Hec. 363, aaipEiv 
dcofia. Androm. 166. Cycl. 29. 

2aToi/, ov, TO, a measure, a Hebrew 
measure for things dry. Matt. xiii. 33. 
Lu. xiii. 21, equiv. to IJ peck English. 

^(3 Evvv jULL, f. <T (Sect CO, to quench, eaiin- 
guish, trans. 1 ) prop, of a light, fire,with acc. 
Matt. xii. 20, XLvov TvcpofxEvov ob g^ectel : 
see A'lvov. Eph. vi. 16. Heb. xi. 34. Pass. 
to be quenched, to go out, ISIatt. xxv. 8, 
al XafxirdSE?, Mk. ix. 44, 46, 48. Sept. 
and Class. 2) fig. to damp, hinder, re- 
press, to prevent any thing from exerting 
its full influence, with acc. 1 Th. v. 19, to 
TLvEVfia fx^i a^EvvvTE : meaning, that they 
should not quench the supernatural gifts 
of the Holy Spirit, either in others, or in 
themselves, namely, by neglect or abuse, 
or by evil living. Understanding the words 
also to have reference, as they certainly 
must, to the ordinary sanctifying influences 
and grace of the Holy Spirit, given to 
every man to profit withal, the admonition 
will correspond to another similar one, 

Eph. iv. 30, ^17 XvTTElTE TO Hv. TO 

dytov Tov Qeov. In this sense Sept. 
a-fSEcraL Tr]v dydTrrjv, Cant. viii. 7,~ Jos. 
B. J. vi. 1, 4, (T/3. Tiiv x«pai/. ^1. V. H. 
vi. I, Ovfjidv, and Plut. oft. 

'Eeuvtov, ov, eontr. a-avTov, ij^, 
ov, {(TV and auTos,) reflex, pers. pron. 2 
pers. sing, genit. of thyself, dat. o-tai'Ta), 
fj, w, to thyself, &c. gen. John i. 22. Acts 
xxxi. 1, al. dat. Acts ix. 34. xvi. 28, al. 
acc. Matt. iv. 6. viii. 4. Where a special 
emphasis is to be laid on auTOs, it is 
written separately, e. gr. Lu. ii. 35, Kal 
(TOV dk avTrj^. 

2£/3a5ojaat, f. d(T0fxai, depon. mid. 
((TE(3a^ and ce/So/xai,) prop, to be afraid 



i:eb 



389 



SEM 



of doing any tiling^ from apprehension of 
Divine wrath or human vengeance. So 
Horn. II. vi. 167, are^daaaTo yap Toyg 
^v/Jico. In N. T. to stand in awe of 
any person, — to reverence^ veiierate^ wor- 
sJiip^ Rom. i. 25, ia-efSda-Qiiaav Kai e\d- 
n-ptvaav Ty kt'lctel^ i. e. as Hesych. expl. 
<rt^d<Tfxa(TL 7rpocrEKvvi](Tav. 

^i(3a<T /uLa^ tos, to, ((r£/3aJoiuai,) 
whatever object is worshipped or regarded 
as God, Acts xvii. 23. 2 Thess. ii. 4. The 
term was, however, used not only of God^ 
but also of mew, viz. sovereigns ; they 
being considered God's vicegerents on 
earth, Dion. Hal. Ant. i. 30. iv. 1. 

Sg/Jao-Tos, t;, oi/, adj. (o-£/3a^o/xai,) 
prop, venerated^ august. In N. T. as an 
honorary title, and then as a proper name, 
6 2£/3a(rTos, Lat. Augustus. 

^ifSu)^ more usually depon. (ri^ofxai^ 
of which the primary and proper sense is 
generally supposed to be, to sJiame one- 
self, to be ashamed, as Horn. II. iv. 242, 
ov vv (Tt^tcrQE ; also, to fear to do any 
thing, from shame. Plato, p. 798, o-ijSeTaL 

TO TL KLVilv tG)V TTOTE Ka^ECTtxiTUiV. 

But this seems rather a derived sense, 
from that of to stand in awe of doing any 
thing. So Ps. iv. 4, ' stand in awe, and 
sin not.' xxxiii. 8. cxix. 161, where <ji- 
^Ecdai, though not used by the Sept. 
would have been the most correct Greek 
rendering. So in Plato, 254, cnipdiicra 
means awestruck. This may serve to 
show the near affinity of cfc/So) with ctevuj 
and fff ict) ; the prim, sense of crEjSgcrOai 
being doubtless (TtUaQaL, 'to be afraid,' to 
be terrified : whence it was applied to awe 
as regards the Deity, and then reverence 
as respects man. Thus ' to be afraid' and 
' to tremble at' are terms not unfrequently 
used of worshipping God. In N. T. the 
term is exclusively used, with accus. of 
pers., in the sense to reverence, venerate, 
worship God, Matt. xv. 9. Mk. vii. 7, 
fidTt]v ok ai^ovTai fXB. Acts xviii. 13. 
xix. 27. Sept. Josh. iv. 24. Job i. 9. Jos. 
Ant. ix. 10, 1. Diod. Sic. i. 35. Xen. Ag. 
iii. 2. Spec. part. <Te(36fxtvo^, either absol. 
or with Tov Oeou, i. e. worshipping the one 
true God, spoken of pioselytes to Judaism 
from the heathen, in distinction from the 
Jews, Acts xiii. 43, 50. xvi. 14. xvii. 4, 
17. xviii. 7, al. 

Ssipa, a?, 77, (€i(>w, necto,) prop, a 
cord, hand : in N. T. a chain, 2 Pet. ii. 4, 
G&Lpai^ X,6(pov, i.e. 'places where utter 
darkness holds them as it were enchained.' 
And so in Prov. v. 22. The word in this 
sense occurs in Jos. Ant. iii. 7,5. Luc. D. 
Deor. xxi. 1. Hermot. 3. 

Sftc/Aos, ov, 6, {aeico,) motion, a 
shaking, prop, of the earth, by an earth- 



quake, as Matt. xxiv. 7. xxvii. 54. xxviii. 
z. Mk. xiii. 8, al. Sept. and Class. Also 
of the sea, 'maris commotio,' Matt. viii. 
24. Sept. Jer. xxiii. 19. This is, in the 
parallel passages of Mark and Luke, ex- 
pressed by XaLkaxj/, {hurricane,) a term 
highly suitable ; the like being, as travel- 
lers testify, very subject to these sudden 
hurricanes. 

2«i6t), f. aELo-u), to move to and fro, to 
shake, with the idea of shock, concussion, 
trans. 1) prop. Rev. vi. 13, o-ukt] — viro 
duefxov fiEy. a-ELOfxivt] : of earthquakes, 
Matt, xxvii. 51, 17 yt] EorEiadr]. Act. with 
acc. Heb. xii. 26, and Class. 2) fig. to 
move in mind, to agitate, to put in commo- 
tion, Matt. xxi. 10, EaELadf} h ttoXl^, for 
EKLvndr], Acts xxi. 30; namely, as agitated 
with hope, fear, wonder, or disapprobation, 
according as each person stood affected, 
xxviii. 4. Sept. Is. xiv. 16. Ez. xxxi. 16. 
Pind. Pyth. iv. 484, ttoXiv. Heliodor. x. 
p. 484. Antiph. cxlvi. 22. 

^eXyivy], 7]^, rj, (cTfcXas, light,) the 
moon. Matt. xxiv. 29, al. and Class. 

'EEXrivid^oinaL, f. daojULai, {creXvi^V-, 
prop, to be moon-struck, in Greek usage 
— to be epileptic, to be afflicted with epi- 
lepsy, the symptoms of which were sup- 
posed to become more aggravated with the 
increasing moon, (Manetho, iv. 81, 216.) 
Matt. iv. 24. xvii. 15, otl cfX^jyta^frat 
Koi KaKU)9 Trao-x^^ comp. ver. 18, and 
Mk. ix. 17; and Lu. ix. 39, where it is 
ascribed to a dai/jLouLov TrvEUfia. Indeed, 
that these <TEXi]uia'^6fXEV0L were not, as 
certain recent Commentators contend, 
mere lunatics, I have shown at large in 
my note on Matt. iv. 24 ; also indicating 
what may be considered the only true 
view to be entertained of them. 

^E/nidaXis, «W9, 77, fne four, Rev. 
xviii. 13 ; occ. oft. in Sept. and Jos. and 
Athen. p. 172. 

"SiE/uLvo^, f}, OV, adj. (contr. fr. <te(36=- 
fjLEvo's, venerated, fr. aE^o/uLai,) prop, re- 
veiled, venerable, august ; a term originally 
applied to the Gods, as in Horn. Hym. 
xii. 1, and H. Cerer. i. 486, and various 
passages of Homer and Pindar. In N. T. 
only as applied to men, grave, dignified, 
1 Tim. iii. 8, 11. Tit. ii. 2, and oft. in 
Class. ; also of things, honourable, of 
good repute, as Phil. iv. 8, ocra orEjuLva, 
meant of habits of life. So Hdian. i. 2, 6, 
(TEfjLVw riOsL Kai jSiw (xdxppoifL. Plato, p. 

290, Ttt CrE/JLUOTUTa, 

^ E jULV 6ti]?, ijtos, 17, (cEyui/o?,) prop. 
augustness, sanctity, 2 Mace. iii. 12. Jos. 
B. J. vi. 5, 1. In N. T. respectability of 
character, and that decorous regularity of 
life and conversation required in awell- 
S3 



I 



^HM 

ordered society, and especially becoming 
persons ' professing godliness,' 1 Tim. ii. 2, 
sv irdarri EvcrE[3e'ia kcu o-e/jlvoti^tl, where 
the Vulg. well renders bv homstate, and 
iii. 4. Tit. ii. 7. So in ^lian, V. H. ii. 
13, and Jos. Contr. Ap. i. 31, we have 
(TE/uLvoTr]^ jStou, and in Hdian. ii. 1, 10, dta 
<TEfxv6Ti]Ta aidov/uLEvo?^ 'respected for his 
worth.' Simil. Jos. Vit. 49, fxErd 7rdcr?js 
<te/iv6ti]to9. 

2 rj /a at I/O), f. ai/to, (a^/xa,) prop, to 
give a sign or signal^ i. e. public, Sept. 
Num. X. 9. Jos. Ant. vii. 11, 6. Xen. 
An. V. 2, 12 ; also to make hioivn by a 
sign^ Horn. 11. xxiii. 358 : hence, as in 
N. T. to signify^ intimate^ John xii. 33, 
<TmxaLvu3V^ TTOLO) ^ai/UTtL^ i'I/heWev gltto- 
%vr]<JKEiv. xviii. 32. xxi. 19, where, as oft. 
the word is used of things future and ob- 
scurely made known, as in oracles, &c. 
So Plut. cited by Wets, has ovte Xtyst, 
ouT£ /cpuTTTft, aWot (j^^^xaiVEi. In Acts 
xi. 28, with accus. and inf to declare^ 
Tiiake knoivn^ as oft. in Class. ; the term 
being often, as there, applied to the utter- 
ing of predictions, &c. So Jos. Ant. vii. 
8, arr^jULaivcov T}]V ek tov Trai^os ECOfXEvrjv 
E'TTLdEcnv. In Acts XXV, 27, with simple 
acc. Tots /car' avTou airLa^ crr\ixdvai. 

"Eri jJiEiov^ ou, TO, (equiv. to a-TjiuLa^) a 
sign, signal, Hdian. iv. 11, 8; an ensign, 
standard, Sept. Is. xi. 12. Hdian viii. 5, 
22. Xen. Cyr, vii. 1, 4, a sign of something 
past, a memorial, monument. In N. T. 
\) a mark or token by which any thing 
may be known to be what it is, and dis- 
tinguished from something else; 2) a 
pledge or assurance taken in evidence ; 
3) a token of Divine interposition, a mira- 
cle. I. prop, a sign, by which any thing 
is designated, distinguished, known. Matt, 
xxvi. 48, 'ibooKEv auTOL^ crjj/x. Rom. iv. 
11, <ji]fXEiov 'iXa^E TrEpLT0ixri<5, i. e. cir- 
cumcision, as TO cn]jjiilov tt/s Siadi]Kri<i : 
comp. Gen. ix. 12, sq. Thuc. vi. 31 ; spec. 
a sign by which the character and truth of 
any person or thing is known, a token, 
proof, Lu. ii. 12, touto v/llTv to ctii/jl. 2 
Cor. xii. 12, to. <ttj/x. tov dTroaTokov. 
2 Thess. iii. 17. Sept. and Class. — II. a 
sign by which the Divine power and ma- 
jesty is made known, i. e. a supernatural 
event or act, a miracle, by which the 
power and presence of God is manifested, 
either directly, or through the agency of 
those whom he sends. 1) as wrought by 
God, 1 Cor. xiv. 22, al yXuxrcrai eU 
crri/j.E'iov eIctiv, ou tois ttictevovo'lv, dWd 
Tois aTTicTTot?, i. e. ' a token to the un- 
believing of God's presence and power,' 
comp. ver. 25. to amxElov '\oovd, 'the 
sign of Jonah,' i. e. ' which God wrought 
in the case of Jonah,' Matt, xii, 39, comp. 
ver. 40. Meton. of persons sent from God, 



SHM 

whose character and acts are a manifesta- 
tion of the Divine power, Lu. xi. 30, 
EyivETo 'luivd's crrifXElov toZs Nti/. ii. 34, 

oDtOS KELTai €19 (XrifXEXoV aVTLKEyOfXEVOV, 

meaning, that 'he should be a signal ex- 
ample of virtue calumniated ;' also of 
signs, wonders, miracles, which God is 
said to do through any one, ttolelv Sid 
TLvcs, joined with TEpaTa, Acts ii. 22, 43, 
al. and Class, as ^1, V. H. xii. 57. Pol. 
iii. 112, 8. Spec, as foreshowing future 
events, a sign of future things, a portent, 
presage. Matt. xxiv. 3, to arifXElov ttj^ 
(jrj^ irapovcTLa's. ver. 30, to ctijiuleIou tov 
Ylou T. dvd. meaning, ' the visible ap- 
pearance of the Son of man,' (agreeably to 
what the Jews understood from the pro- 
phecy in Dan. vii. 13 ;) namely, to take 
vengeance on the unbelieving Jews, Mk. 
xiii. 4. Lu. xxi. 11, a-rifxEla utt' ovp. 
fxEydXa. ver. 25. Acts ii. 19. 2) of 
signs, wonders, mii^acles, wrought by 
Christ and his apostles in proof of their 
Divine mission. Matt. xii. 38, ^iXofxEv 
diro aov crr^fXElov ISelu. ver. 39. Mk. viii. 
11, 12. John ii. 11, 18, 23, oft.; with 
TEpaTa, IV. 48 ; ^vvdfjiEi^, Acts viii. 13. 
3) spoken analogically of signs, wonders, 
wrought by false prophets claiming to act 
by Divine authority, Rev. xiii. 13, 14; 
with TEpaTa, Matt. xxiv. 24, al. 

"El] /uLELou), f. waru), [atjfxElov and 
(TTj/uLa,) signo, to mark, affix a mark or 
sign, note with marks, Pol. iii. 39, 8. In 
N. T. only mid. to mark for oneself, to 
note, by a metaphor taken from making 
private memoranda for use ; with acc. 2 
Th. iii. 14, tovtov arrjjULEiouarde, ' note 
that man down to yourself as one to be 
shunned.' So Polyb. i. 47, 1, d/cpi)3ws 
arrifxELoocTacrdaL tov ELairXovi/ : and xxii. 
11, 12, E(ri]fxEL(jt)aauTo tov tottov. Also 
in an expression adduced by Eustathius on 
Hom. p. 1535, to acTpots (T^fXELoxxjQai 
oddv, ' to note down and mark one's course 
by the stars.' Also Philo Jud. 560, A. 
Svcri fJiapTvpiaL<s ar]fXELU}(rdfJi(vo's to 

fX1]^EV E-X^O^ UTTOTlXpECrdaL. 

'Ev fXEpov, adv. Att. TrtfiEpov, (for 
Ti]iuLEpa, fr. TV] -i^fxipa,) this day, to-day, 
1. prop. Matt. vi. 11, 009 vfxiv aviuLEpov. ver, 
30. Lu. xiii. 32, 33, oft. Sept. and Class. 
With the art. as adj. 77 arjiuL. scil. vixipa, 
equiv. to this very day. Acts xix. 40. — II. 
equiv. to at this time, now, Lu. iv. 21, 
a-nix. TTETrXvpivTaL rj ypa<pv. Acts iv. 9. 
xiii. 33, oft. ; 2 Cor. iii. 15, 'iws arifx. 
where arrifXEpov is very emphatic, meaning, 
' at this very time,' namely, of the admo- 
nition ; and Sept. With the art. as adj. rj 
Grip., scil. rjpipa. Acts XX. 26, kv Trj crvim. 
n/jLEpa: so dxpt- 'rij^ arvp.. 2 Cor. iii. 14, 
piixpi Trj<5 crrtfx. Matt. xi. 23, and k'w? 
T/^s (Trifx. xxvii. 8, unto this day. 



390 



sun 



391 



SIT 



SijTTo), f. i|/^w, to cause to rot^ to cor- 
rupt^ destroy, Sept. Job xl. 12. Dion. 
Hal. xi. 37. ^sch. Choeplh 989. Usiially 
and in N. T. pass. (Tnirofxai^ 2 perf. o-t- 
o-tjTra, inti*ans. to rot^ be corrupted^ perish. 
Jam. V. 2, o ttXoGto? v^uiv your 
hoarded stores') ata-ij-rrE. So Horn. ii. 
135, Kai dii dovpa <r£(r>j7r£ vtcov. Eur. El. 
319, aT/ma iraTpo^ fj.iXav ai<yi]irt. M\. 
V. H. xii. 40, but the pass, is far more 
freq. in Class, and Sept. 

ST^pt/co?, >/, 01/, adj. (a>;p, silk-worm,) 
silken^ of silk, Jos. B. J. vii. 5, 4, kadri- 
aEo-L'avpiKaU. In N. T. neut. to <Ti]pL- 
Kov, scil. tvovixa, silk^ silken stuffs^ Rev. 
xviii. 12. 

St/s, <rt;To$, o, a moth, or clotlies-worm. 
Matt. vi. 19, 20. Lu. xii. 33. Sept. Is. 1. 
9. li. 8. Theophr. H. PI. i. 16. Menander, 
cited by Wets, to 6' ifidTiou ol (njTt's. 

2tjTo'/3pa)T09, ou, o, ?7, adj. (cTi/s, 
/Si/Spaxr/co),) moth-eaten, Ja.j^. 2, IfxaTia 
vfxwv <n]T6(3pa}ra. Sept. Job xiii. 28, 

t/UaTlOI/ ffTJT. 

SOfi/o'o), f. 0)0-0), ((r0£i/os, strength,) 
^0 strengthen, co?ifirm, ahsol. 1 Pet. v. 10, 
<r6evuj<TEi, or, as in text. rec. opt. crOei/to- 
o-ai. 

St ay toy, oj/09, ?7, prop, jaw-hone, 
jaw, Sept. and Class. In N. T. the cheek, 
Matt. V. 39. Lu. vi. 29. Sept. 

Styao), f. vaw, to he silent, keep si- 
lence. 1) gener. intrans. Lu. ix. 36, 
auTot ka-Lyna-av. XX. 26. Acts xii. 17, al. 
Sept. and Class, oft. 2) trans, like 
<riO)7rao), to keep in silence, keep secret, 
pass. Rom. xvi. 25, fivarT-npiov xpoVots 
aiaovLOL^ cTEcnyi'iixivov, The act. is not 
unfrequent in Class. ; as Eurip. Med. 80, 
criya \6yov, while the pass, form is rare, 
the only examples known to me being 
Eurip. Iph. T. kjjiovyE iravra (nyi)- 
B-ncTETuu Hierocl. ap. Steph. Thes. ov6i- 
TTOTE cLyu3fxEvo'5, and Iren. adv. Hser. i. 
], 3, of the seons, (doubtless, with the 
above passage of St. Paul in mind,) elctI 
Sk <TE<7Lyr]fxivoL Kai fit] yiVMCTKOfXEvoL* 

Sty?;, ^s, ri, (<rtyao>,) silence. Acts 
xxi. 40, iroWrj^ (TLyrj^. Rev. viii. 1. 
Wisd. xviii. 14. Xen. Cyr. vii. 1, 25, 
TToXXt; <riy?7. 

SiorJ^EO?, ia, eov, contr. (TLhipov^, a, 
ovv, adj. (o-i^jjpo?,) iron, of iron. Acts 
xii. 10, TTvX^u Ttju aLOr]pav. Rev. ii. 27. 
ix. 9. xii. 5. xix. 15. Sept. 

St6t]pos, ov, 6, iron. Rev. xviii. 12. 
Sept. and Class. The word is derived 
from o-ijo), to sound, crioaon and crtcroo), 
whence o-t^o), to make a ringing sound; 
and, indeed, (it being the most ringing 
metal known to the ancients,) <tl6. was 
originally an adjective, signif, ' the ringing 



[metal],' and is found as such in Hdot. vii. 
65. Aretseus ii. 13. Arrian, Eux. j). 120. 

^iKupio^, ov, 6, Lat. sicarius, (fr. 
sica, the short cuthiss which was carried 
under the arm, like the Italian stiletto,) 
cut-throat, robber. Acts ^xi. 38, with which 
comp. Jos. Ant. xx. 8, 6. B. J. ii. 13, 5. 
vii. 8—11. 

^ IKE pa, TO, Heb. nDtt?, indec. sikera, 
i. e. strong drink, any intoxicating liquor, 
whether wine properly so called, (Num. 
xxviii. 7,) or, according to the more freq. 
application of the word, what we should 
call made wine, prepared from grain, 
dates, figs, palms, &c. Lu. i. 15, oluou Kai 
aiKEpa ov fxh '^ty, a Nazaritic injunction. 
See Numb. vi. 3,' and comp. Sept. Lev. x. 
9. Deut. xxix. 6. Judg. xiii. 4, 7, 14. 

^L/jLLKivd Lov,ov, TO, Lat. scmicinctum, 
a half-girdle, or garment equiv. to our 
apron, probably of linen, worn by artisans, 
&c. Acts xix. 12. Comp. Wetst. N. T. 
ad loc. 

Sii/aTTt, £0J9, TO, mustard, sinapis 
orientalis, a plant often growing, in the 
fertile soil of Palestine, to a very consi- 
derable size. Matt. xiii. 31. Mk. iv. 31. 
Lu. xiii. 19. The expression kokkov at- 
vuTTEtjo^, ' a grain of mustard,' is, as appears 
from the Rabbinical citations in Wets., a 
proverbial phrase, for the least, the smallest 
particle. Matt. xvii. 20. Lu. xvii. 6. 

Sty^o)!/, oj/os, ri, fine linen, muslin, 
from Sind, or India, Hdot. i. 200. ii. 95 ; 
i. e. cotton, cnv^(hv ^vara-Lvt], Hdot. ii. 86. 
vii. 181 ; also gener. linen cloth, Pol. ii. 
66, 10. In N. T. linen cloth, a linen 
garmjent, prohably of a square or oblong 
form, worn hy the Orientals at night in- 
stead of the usual garments, Mk. xiv. 51, 
7r£/otj3£/5\?j/ji£i/os OTLvdova kiri yv/uLVov. 
ver. 52. Also a web or wrapper of fine 
linen, employed to roll around a corpse, 
previously to interment or embalming, 
being then secured by linen handages. 
Matt, xxvii. 59. Mk. xv. 46, his. Lu. xxiii. 
53. Galen, fxij yv/xvo^ Ko/jLLX^icrda), uWd 
nTEpL^E^Xriixivo^ crivcova, Hdot. ii. 95, 
r,v fxkv kv ijULaTLco kvEXi^cifXEi/o^ Evdy t] 
crivdouL. 

Sii/tct^o), f. aVo), {cTLviov, a sieve,) to 
sift or ivinnow. Fig. with acc. of pers. 
impl. Lu. xxii. 31, b SaT. k^yTvcaTo 
vfxd^, Tov aLVLaaai 6U5 toi/ cltov, i. e. 
*• sift you,' scrutinize you, or try your fide- 
lity and constancy. 

2(T£yT09, i], ov, adj. {(TLTEVUy & 

o-Tto9,) fed, i. e. with grain, fatted, Lu. 
XV. 23, TOV fxocrxov tov ctlt. ver. 27, 30. 
Sept. Pol. xxxix. 2, 7. Xen. An. v. 4, 32. 

StTtcTos, f], OV, adj. (o-tTi^o), <ri- 
TOi,)fed, sc. with grs-m, fatted ; subst. Ta 



SIT 



392 



SKA 



criTLcrra^ animals put up to fatten^ fatlings, 
Matt. xxii. 4, meaning, calves, lambs, 
sheep, &c. Jos. Ant. viii. 2, 4. Athen. 
xiv. p. 656. 

'E ITO /UlIt p LOV^ OV, TO, (cTtTO?, fl£- 

Totco,) grain measured out^ i. e. an allow- 
ance^ portion^ ration^ Lii. xii. 42, and lat. 
Gr. writers. "EiTOjuLETpia occ. in Diod. 
Sic. ii. 41. 

2 It OS, Of, o, plur. to: (riTa, ivTieat^ 
and gener. for grain^ corn^ Matt. iii. 12, 
avvd^Ei Tov gItov. xiii. 25, 29, 30. Mk. 
iv. 28. Lu. iii. 17. John xii. 24. 1 Cor. 
XV. 37. Rev. vi. 6. xviii. 13. In Acts vii. 

12, the plural crlTa is used to denote 
generality of kind, as we say corn or grain. 
So (TtTos, xxvii. 38, which may mean 
either, as some explain, the wheat^ or the 
provisions, Sept. and Class. 

2 160 Tract), f. rycro), (ciwTTjj, silence, 
stillness,) to he silent^ stilly intrans. 1) 
prop, of persons, to keep silence., he silent., 
Matt. XX. 31. xxvi. 63, 6 ^£ 'Irjcrous 
kcTLwira. Mk. iii. 4, and oft. Of one un- 
able to speak, dumb., Lu. i. 20, Sept. and 
Class. 2) fig. of a sea or lake, to he still., 
calm., hushed., Mk. iv. 39, o-toyVa, Trsfpi- 
fxaxTo. The Class, writers use in this case 
<riyaw, as Horn. Od. xix. 42, crlya. So 
Valer. Flacc. viii. 452, ' sileat mare.' 
Anth. Gr. i. p. 169, 1, (TEaiyriKEv 3'a- 
Xaa-ora. Theocr. Id. ii. 38, criya ttoz/tos. 

S/cay^aXi^o), f. torw, {crKcivdaXov.,) 
prop, to cause to stumble and fall., by laying 
a stumbling-block in his way : pass, to 
stumhle and fall: fig. to bring to ruin., 
Aquil. in Prov. iv. 12. Is. viii. 15. xl. 
30. Ecclus. ix. 5. xxiii. 8. xxxv. 15. 
In N. T. fig. in a moral sense, to be a 
stumbling-block to any one, to cause him to 
stumble at or in any thing : I. gener. to 
offend., vex., prop, to scandalize., with acc. 
of pers. Matt. xvii. 27, iVa dk fxr] crKavda- 
Xi(r<jo/uL£if avTov's. John vi. 61. 1 Cor. viii. 

13, bis. Pass. Matt. xv. 12. Rom. xiv. 21. 
2 Cor. xi. 29. So Pass. cr/cai/5aA.t^£ cr6at 
'iv Ttj/t, to be offended in or at any one, ' to 
take offence at' his character, words, or 
conduct, so as to desert and reject him, 
Matt. xi. 6, jULaKo.pLO'S eo-tii/, os laV fJLt} 
a-KavSaXLcrdfj kv kfxol., meaning, ' stumble 
in faith, fall off from his faith in me the 
term a-KavSaXov signif. in a spiritual sense, 
' what obstructs us in our Christian course,' 
and causes us to fall away from the faith, 
or scruple to receive it. Matt. xiii. 57. 
xxvi. 31, 33, al. — II. causat. to cause to 
offend^ lead astray or into sin^ ' be the occa- 
sion of any one's sinning with acc. of 
pers. Matt. v. 29, el hk o 6<pd. (TOv a-Kau- 
SaXiX^EL are. ver, 30. xviii. 6, os <5' du 
crKavBaXia-rj Eua twi/ ixLKpijov tovtuhv. 
ver. 8, 9. Psalt. Salora. xvi. 7, yvvaiKo^ 
TTovt^pd^ aKai/SaXiX^ovai]^ d(ppova. Hence 



pass, to be made to offend^ to he led astray 
or into sin., — to fall away from the truth, 
from the Gospel, &c. Matt. xiii. 21. xxiv. 
10. Mk. iv. 17. John xvi. 1. 

S/cai/^aXoy, ou, to, a later form for 
(TKavddXridpov, (cr/ca'^o),) prop, a trap- 
stick., a crooked stick on which the bait is 
fastened ; which the animal strikes against, 
and so springs the trap. Bysynecd. a trap, 
snare, Sept. fig. Josh, xxiii. 13. 1 Sam. 

xviii. 21. Hence gener. 'any thing which 
one strikes or stumbles against,' a stum- 
bling-block., impedimeiit., as Sept. Lev. xix. 
14, dirivavTL TV(pXov ov TrpoadrjorEL^ 
(TKavB. In N. T. only fig., in a spiritual 
sense, stumbling-block., cause of offence: 
1 ) gener. ' whatever occasions any one to 
stumble or fall spiritually of Christ, as 
17 TTETpa (TKavSdXou., rock of stumbling, 
Rom. ix. 33. 1 Pet. ii. 7. Also Rom. xi. 

9, yEvr]dr\T<jo r/ TpaTTt^a avTocv — Eh 
(TKaudaXov. Ecclus. vii. 6. xxvii. 23. 
1 Mace. V. 4. Judith v. 1. 2) ' a cause of 
offence and indignation,' i. q. an offence, a 
scandal.. Matt. xvi. 23, arKavdaXov fxov e1. 
1 Cor. i. 23. Gal. v. 11. Judith xii. 2, ha 
[xr] yEvrjTUL (jk. ver. 19. 3) 'what occa- 
sions any one to err' in his principles or 
practice, Matt, xviii. 7. Lu. xvii. 1, dviv- 
Sektou e(ttl tov fxrj eXOeiv TCt CTKavS. 
meaning the evils and persecutions which 
threatened the Christian Churcli. Rom. 
xiv. 13. xvi. 17. Rev. ii. 14. 1 John ii. 

10, Kui a-KavoaXov kv auTco ovk ecttlv, 
i. e. ' there is in him nothing to lead him 
into sin :' comp. ver. 11. So Ps. cxix. 165, 
Kal OVK EGTLV avToT's aKavdaXov. Meton. 
of persons., Matt. xiii. 41, Trai^Ta tu crKav- 
SaXa., said of false teachers, who, under 
the pretence of Christian liberty, incul- 
cated doctrines repugnant to moral virtue. 

S/cctTTTo), f. xj/co, to dig., intrans. espec. 
a trench. So in Thucyd. iv. 90, we have 
Ttt ka-KafjLfjiEva, trenches. Lu. vi. 48, os 
EaKaxj/E Kai k^ddvvE, and xiii. 8. xvi. 3, 
arKdiTTELV OVK i<TX^(J^-, whcrc we have a 
general term to denote ' working as an agri- 
cultural labourer,' ttju yrjv kpydX^EcrQau 
So Pausan. Arcad. 47, to TTEdiop 'I. 
EGKaiTTou, ' cultivated.' Xen. CEcon. xv. 
14, GKaiTTov TO yrjtdLov. Hom. Hym. in 
Merc. 90, (pvTa o-zcctTTTEts, and Xen. (Ec. 

xix. 4, Ta (TKaTTToiuLEva cf)VTd. The ex- 
pression was, we may suppose, almost 
proverbial for working as an agricultural 
labourer. 

'EKacfiTi, rjs, 77, {or KairT ay.,) prop, any 
thing either 'dugout,' as a channel, trench, 
or hollowed out, as a trough, Hdot. iv. 73. 
In N. T. a skiff, boat, (so called with allu- 
sion to the first boats constructed being 
mere trunks of trees hollowed out, like the 
Indian m?2oes,) Acts xxvii. 16,30,32. Dion. 
Hal. Ant. iii. 44. Pol. i. 23, 7. Hdot. iv. 73. 



393 



2KE 



2<C£\o9, £0S 0U9, TO, pllir. Tff (T/v'tX?;, 

fj^e /€,<7, from the hip to the foot, John xix. 
31 — 33, Td (TK-fcX?;. Sept. and Class, oft. 
However, I cannot but suspect that the 
term is here to be taken in a limited sense, 
for the Kvv/my] or shin-ho?ie ; a sense indeed 
rare, and which is unnoticed even by Steph. 
Thes. ; though examples of it do occur, es- 
pec. in the plural, as 1 Sam. xvii. 6, (of Go- 
iiah,) Kai Kuij/uLidE^ X"'^'^'"^ ^"^^ "^^^ ^f^^' 
Xcov avTov. Ezek. i. 7, to. aKt\i] avTvov 
opOd. Nor is the sense unexampled in 
Class. Thus Xen. An. iv. 2, 20, /cat kvd<5 
fjiiv Karia^av (the very temi, we may 
observe, used in the passage of St. John,) 
TO CFKiXo's. Pol. i. 80, 13, crvvn-pLxl/avTEs 
TO. aKtXi]. So also, but in a tig. sense, 
Ariian, Epict. ii. 12, irapd cr/cAos dirav- 
Ta TouTo, ' this rubs on the skin,' as we 
say. 'goes against the grain.' Indeed this 
use 's as early as the time of Homer, and 
probably was the primary one, being found 
in II. xvi. 314, 'i(pQi] 6pE^dfxEvo<i irpv/uvdu 
ctkeXos, where Damm explains it crurem^ 
sddenhein. And Heyne observes, ' o-keXo^ 
modo latius patet, ut inde a femore com- 
prehendat et fxtjpdv, et yovv^ et ki/v/jli]u^ 
et TToda^ modo (ut hie) angustius cms.'' 
Aristoph. Thesm. 24, x^X6§ tod aKiXr]. 
-c^lschyl. Prom. 74, crKiXt] Sk KipKuxrav 

2fC£'7ra(T/xa, aros, to, {aKETru^uy & 
o-KSTrdo), to cover,) covering^ i. e. clothing., 
raiment., 1 Tim. vi. 8, c^mTpo^ds kul 
o-KSTrdc/xaTa, as we say clothes. Jos. B. J. 
ii. 8, 5, 'i^coadfJLEVOL crKETrdafxaai Xlvol^. 
Philo, p. 159, Tcou TT&pi awfxa aKETra- 
orfxaTUJU d/uLEXcoi/. 

S/cEu^, T]§, 77, gener. any apparatus for 
any purpose whatever, whether of war or 
peace, espec. dress or equipage ; also ac- 
coutrement or equipment., including furni- 
ture for a house ; in N. T. all the arma- 
menta or furniture, equipment, tackle of a 
ship, (as Virg. ^n. v. 15,) otherwise called 
o7r\a, as cables, yards, sails, rigging. See. 
and denoted by the term Td <TKEvr\ in 
Jonas i. 5. Xen. (Econ. viii. 11, 12. Acts 
xxvii. 19, Tr)y <TK&vr]v tov ttXoiov Eppi- 

xj/afMEl/. 

2k:£ U09, £09 ou?, TO. Of thls term the 
etymology is too uncertain to be exactly 
determined. It answers to the Latin I'as, 
(which from Trduy.io possess., was primarily 
vasum^ fr. Trdcoi', of the same form as 
TTpdcroi/,) any utensil or aHicle of furni- 
ture, (espec. a vessel to contain any thing,) 
an implement., or tool., for any kind of 
work, also a weapon. The general sense, 
whatever be the derivation of the word, 
seems to be ' something wrought or made 
for use,' as ottXoi/, fr. £7ra), 'something 
wherewith one works,' instrumentum., op- 
yavov : in N. T. it is used, I. gener. of 



furniture, &c. 1) prop, of any utejisil 
capable of containing any thing,' a vessel., 
Lu. viii. 16, ou^£i9 di Xvyyov d\j/a^., ku- 

XuTTTEl aVTOV (TKEVEL. Jolui xix. 29. ActS 

X. 11, 16. xi. 5. So Sept. oft. and Class, 
e. g. i^:iian, V. H. xii. 8. Hdian. iv. 7, 8. 
Of a potter's vessel., or earthen dyyEioi/, 
Rom. ix. 21. Rev. ii. 27, Td aKEvri tu 
KEpapiLKd. Sept. Lev. vi. 28, al. Of any 
article whatever, considered as a burden 
to be carried, Mk. xi. 16, ou/c ijcpiEv 'iva 
Ti9 ^LiviyKri (TKEvo^ Sid TOV upou. So 
Jos. Bell. ii. 8, 9, ovdk <rKEv6<s tl fxETa- 
KLvrjauL. Of any articles in general, 2 Tim. 
ii. 20. Heb. ix. 21. Sept. and Class. Also 
in the plur. household goods., furniture., 
Matt. xii. 29. Mk. iii. 27. Lu. xvii. 31, 
Td cTKEvr] avTov Ev T?7 OLKia. Sept. oft. 
and Class, as Xen. (Econ. viii. 12, irdvTa 

CTKEVYl bcrOl^ TTEp EV OLKIO. XpUJVTaL dv- 

dpooTTOL. Eunuch, ap. J. Pollux, On. x. 
10, (TKEvrj Td KaT oLKiav. Athen. xiv. 17. 
2) f^. of the human body., as formed of 
clay, and accordingly frail and feeble. 
2 Cor. iv. 7, 'iyofxEv TOV ^rjcravpov tou- 

TOV EV OdTpaKlVOL^ (TKEVECTLV. AlsO of 

the body generally, considered as the dy- 
yElov Ti79 xl/vxn^i as Philo terms it, or, 
as Cicero styles it, ''vas aut receptaci|- 
lum animi^^ whence Barnabas, Epist. § 21, 
calls the human body to kuXov ctkevo^ : 
and Hermas applies to it the term vas^ 
1 Th. iv. 4, TO kavTov ctkevo^ KTaadai. 
So the Hebr. ">*^D, vas., in 1 Sam. xxi. 5, 
'and the vessels (meaning the bodies) of 
the young men are holy,' or pure. The allu- 
sion, however, may be to the human body 
as the workmanship of the Creator, and con- 
sequently to be used according to His will, 
not abused. Thus the term vas is employed 
for the body simply in Lucret. vi. 17, 
' vitium vas efficere ipsum (scil. intelligit) 
Omniaque illius vitio corrumpier intus.' 
Moreover to this head may best be referred 
the controverted expression in 1 Pet. iii. 

7, tL)9 dcrdEVE(TTEpu) CTKEVEL TM yVVaLKELU)., 

where o-k:£uo9, as it lit. signifies any thing 
made., so it ?7za?/ there have the sense crea- 
ture., lit. frame-ivorh., in reference to God 
the Creator. See my note. So of persons., in 
a moral respect, considered as the subjects 
whereon any thingis to be exercised,whether 
^ov good or for evil : for the former, Rom. 
ix. 23, cTKEvi] iXiov^. 2 Tim. ii. 21, EcrTac 
(TKEvo<3 £19 Ti/xrjf I for thc latter., Rom. ix. 
22, (TKEvri opyrj^ : in both which cases we 
have an allusion to the vessels of the pot- 
ter, as spoken of in ver. 21. — II. spec, an 
implement., instrument., lit. ' that by which 
any thing is effected or done,' synon. 
with opyavov : so ckevi] 6pyri<s., Jer. i. 
25, 1) prop, of a thing., and spec, tlie mast 
of a ship, as the chief instrument of sail- 
ing. Acts xxvii. 17, 'xaXdaavTE's to (tkevo^. 
' having lowered tiie mast.' Ancient ships 
S 5 



2KH 



394 



2KH 



had usually but one mast, which was raised 
or lowered at pleasure, being so formed 
as to go into a socket. Comp. Horn. II. 

i. 434, iarTou 5' laTodoKr] TreXacrav, 2) 
fig. of a person as the instrument of any 
one, Acts ix. 15, c/ceuos ifcX-oyrj?, i. e. ' a 
chosen vessel, instrument to work my pur- 
poses,' said of a person well adapted to the 
execution of any purpose. So Pol. xiii. 
5, 6, AafxoKKi)^ r\v viriiptTLKov <TKivo<s 
£vcf)vt9, Comp. Jer. 1. 25. Is. xiii. 5, in 
some MSS. arKEvrj opyrj^. 

^Kfjvi), ^s, (Hebr. p'©, to dwell,) 
gener. a booth, hut, tent : I. prop, a booth, 
composed of branches of trees, similar to 
those hastily raised for temporary purposes 
by travellers, and such as were reared at 
the feast of tabernacles. Matt. xvii. 4, 
TTOL-norw/uLEv c5^£ T/Ofiis (TKr]va^, al. So Sept. 
Gen. xxxiii. 17. Is. i. 8. Jon. iv. 5. Thuc. 

ii. 34. Theocr. xv. 16. Dem. 284, 24. 
Xen. Cyr. ii. 1, 25. Also of skins, &c. a 
tent, Heb. xi. 9, kv (TKtjvaT's KaToiKricra^. 
So Sept. oft. and Class. Sometimes also 
the word denoted a permanent house, and 
fig. a family ; and when applied to a royal 
family, its reign, or kingdom. Acts xv. 16, 
avoLKohofJir\(T(xy Trjv (TKrivi]V AavtS Triu 
TreTTT ODKulap, metaph. and mystically for 
the family or royal line of David, fallen 
into weakness and decay. Gener. for 
abode, dwelling, Lu. xvi. 9, £ts Tds alw- 
vLov^ (TKrjvd^. Rev. xiii. 6, Trjv a-Kviviiv 
auTov, scil. Tov Oeou, i. e. heaven. So 
Sept. Job xxxvi. 29. Ps. xviii. 12. — II. 
spec, the Mosaic tabernacle, the sacred 
tent of the Hebrews, (comp. the c/ct^W; 
Lspa of the Carthaginians, Diod. Sic. xx. 
65,) in which the ark was kept, the seat of 
the Jewish worship before the building of 
the Temple. 1) prop, and gener. Heb. 

viii. 5. ix. 21. xiii. 10. Acts vii. 44, 77 cr/c. 
Tou fxapTvpLov, so called either with re- 
ference to the tables of testimony con- 
tained therein, or from its being the place 
where God gave witness of his glorious 
presence. Sept. Ex. xxix. 4, 10. Num. 
i. 50, sq. By synecd. spoken of the 
outer sanctuary of the tabernacle, Heb. 

ix. 2, 6, 8 ; also of the inner sanctuary, the 
Holy of holies, Heb. ix. 3. In Hebr. ix. 
11, said of the heavenly sanctum, or visi- 
ble heavens, (comp. iv. 14,) through which 
Jesus passed to i\iehighest heaven, or abode 
of God himself. 2) symbol, of the spiri- 
tual, or celestial, tabernacle, of which the 
material one was a figure, whereas the 
other was pitched by the Lord, and not 
men, Heb. viii. 2. ix. 11. Comp. viii. 5. 
ix. 23, 24 ; also fig. for the Temple in the 
heavenly Jerusalem, Rev. xv. 5, 6 vao^ 
T^s <TK. TOV fxapTvpiov, xxi. 3, — III. 
Acts vii. 43, n ok. tov MoXo)(, 'the taber- 
nacle of Moloch,' which the idolatrous 



Israelites constructed in the desert in ho- 
nour of Moloch, like that in honour of 
Jehovah ; probably of a small size, so as 
to elude the notice of Moses ; a sort of 
case to inclose and carry about the idol in, 
and formed in imitation of a real taber- 
nacle, like those small models of the Tem- 
ple of Diana at Ephesus, mentioned at 
Acts xix. 24. Comp. Petron. 29, ' praeterea 
grande armarium in angulo vidi, in cujus 
(sdicula erant lares argentei positi.' 

S/c»]i/07r?77ia, as, 77, [crKtivr], Trtjyvv- 
jULi,) a feast, so called from the booths or 
tents which, on that occasion, were erected 
in and about Jerusalem, and which was 
designed to commemorate the Israelites' 
dwelling in tents in the wilderness. See 
more in Calmet, or Home's Introd. It was 
the third great annual festival of the Jews, 
in which all the males were required to ap- 
pear before God at the tabernacle or tem- 
ple, John vii. 2, 77 kopTi) Ttov 'lou^. 77 (T/cr;- 
voTT^yia. So 77 <r/c. 2 Mace. i. 9, 18. 
Sept. kopTJi Trj9 OTK. Deut. xvi. 16, and 
oft. as kopTfj Twv aKt}vu)v, Lev. xxiii. 24, 
al. and Jos. Ant. iv. 8, 12. 

2/C77 VOTTOtOS, OV, 6, ((T/CrjI/ry, TTOLiu),) 

a maker of tents, formed of leather or 
thick cloth, both for military and domestic 
purposes ; the latter sort being, from the 
scarcity of inns, much used throughout 
the East in travelling, and in that warm 
climate, during the summer season, used 
as houses. Acts xviii. 3. Comp. a-KrjvoTroL- 
ovfiai, Diod. Sic. iii. 27. Hdian. vii. 2, 8. 

S/CT/i/OS, £09 OVS, TO, Cquiv. to CTKtJvi], 

prop, a booth, tent, (Anthol. Gr. ii. p. 
162.) usually, and in N. T. fig. for the body, 
as the frail and temporary abode of the 
soul, 2 Cor. V. 1, 77 kiTLyEio^ rj/mwu oiKia 
Tov (TKtivovs, i. e. ' this our earthly tent or 
house ;' 2 Cor. v. 4, oi ovte^ kv tw <tk. 
Wisd. ix. 15, TO ytcoSs^ arKTjvo^. So 
Plato calls the body y^'ivov crKi]V09, and 
other Platonic and Pythagorean philoso- 
phers use similar expressions. Longin. de 
Subl. § 32, calls the body dvOpooiTLvov 
(TKrjvo^, in allusion to the term a-Ktjvos 
being also applied to the bodies of animals, 
JE\. H. A. V. 3. 

^Kr)v6(ji), f. (jocru), [crKrjvo^,) to pitch a 
tent, Sept. Gen. xiii. 12. Jos. Vit. § 47.- 
Hdian. vi. 8, 17 ; in N. T. in trans, to dwell 
as in tents, foil, by kv vfxlv, John i. 14, 
where the expression is used in preference 
to "^yv, with allusion to the life of man as 
a temporary sojourn, and thus it has oft. 
in Class, the sense ' to take up one's quar- 
ters,' as Thuc. i. 89. ii. 52. Xen. An. v. 
5, 11; also as better adapted to convey 
the idea, which seems there intended, of 
that familiar intercourse and that inter^ 
community of all the functions of human 
life which evidenced our Saviour to have 



SKH 



395 



SKA 



been really and substantially man as well 
as God. With kv and a dat. of place, Rev. 
xii. 12. xiii. 6 ; with (Xetcl and a gen. of 
person, Rev. xxi. 3; with kirl and accus. 
of person, Rev. vii. 15, crKi^vvoarsL ett' 
auTous, i. e. 'will ever cheer them with 
his presence, will defend and protect them 
by his power from all evil and mischief 

SKifi/to/ict, Tos, TO, (c/cTji/ow,) a hootJi 
or tent pitched^ prop. Xen. An. ii. 2, 17 ; 
in N. T. a tabernacle for God^ q. d. divell- 
ing temple^ Acts vii. 46. So Sept, Ps. 
cxxxii. 5. xlvi. 4. 1 K. ii. 28. viii. 4. Fig. 
of tlie body^ as the frail tenement of the 
soul, 2 Pet i. 13, 14. So also the term is 
used in Eurip. Heracl. 690, <TfXLKpdv to 
crov crKYiVMfxa. 

^KLu^ a?, 77, shadow, shade : 1 ) prop. 
Mk. iv. 32, vird ttji/ (tkiclv avrov. Acts 
V. 15. Sept. and Class. In the sense of 
darkness, gloom, as c/cta ^avaTov, death- 
shade, i. e. thickest darkness. Matt. iv. 16. 
Lu. i. 79, (with which comp. the similar 
expression in Hom. Od, iv. 180, ^avuTOLo 
fjL&Xav vi(po<5, similar to another in Job 
iii. 5, et al. in Sept. ^ the darkness of the 
grave') ; though in the former passage it is 
used in a fig. sense to denote extreme ig- 
norance and vice ; and in the latter, fig. 
and spiritually, of ignorance as to the 
means of salvation, the darkness of the 
natural man, alone to be enlightened by 
the Sun of Righteousness. 2) metaph. a 
shadow, i. e. a shadowing forth, adumbra- 
tion, in distinction from to acofxa, the 
body or reality, and v eIkujv, the full and 
perfect image ; so of the Jewish rites and 
dispensation as prefiguring things future 
and more perfect. Col. ii. 17, d kai-L (tklo, 

TU}U jULEWoi/TODV, TO Se CTUifXa XptCrTOU. 

Heb. viii. 5, ctklo. XaTpEvova-i twv ettov- 
pavLwv, where (tklu is said with allusion 
to the substantial reality of the other 
ministry, or temple, in which consists the 
superiority of its High Priest. Heb. x. 1, 
CTKiav yap EyjMV 6 vofxa — ovk a\)Ti]v tt^u 
ELKova Tcov irpayfiaTtDV. Philostr. Vit. 

Soph. i. 20, 1, OTL (TKLO. KaX OVELpaTU al 

^KLpTao), f. tjorttf, to leap, spring, in- 
trans. said espec. of animals, though some- 
times of men, as Hom. II. xx. 226. Plut. 
vi. 46. Hdian. iv. 11, 5 : in N. T. to leap 
for joy, eocult, Lu. vi. 23, xa.pr]TE kul 
cTKipTT^a-aTE, with which comp. Aristoph. 
Plut. 761, (TKLpTaTE Kai yppEVETE, Lu. 
i. 44, i<TKLpTY\<jEv Ev dyaXkLdcTEi TO ^pi- 
<po^, i. e. ' as it were leaped for joy.' So 
it is said. Gen. xxv. 22, karKipTujv to. Trat- 
hia kv auT77. 

^K\r\poKaphia, a?, 77, (o-zcXrjposr, 
KaphLa,\ hardness of heart, obstinacy, per- 
verseness, Matt. xix. 8. Mk. xvi. 14; in 
the former of which passages it is used 



with especial reference to the unyielding,* 
unforgiving spirit of the Jews. So Sept. 
Deut. X. 16. Jer. iv. 4, it is used to denote 
the uncircumcision of the heart, and o-kXt}- 
poKdpdLo^ stands for perverse in heart, 
Prov. xvii. 20. Comp. also Ecclus. xvi. 
10. 

2«:\t7/o6s, d,6v, adj. (or/cXtji/ai fr. o-keX- 
Xco,) prop, dried up, i. e. dry, hard, stij^, 
what we call firm, as not yielding to the 
touch, Aristoph. Ach. 1161, <tk. titOiu. 
Xen. Mem. iii. 10, 1, tA ctkX. kol to: 
fxaXaKa. Wisd. xi. 4, \t0os (TKXr\p6^. 
Hence in N. T. liard : I. prop, as said of 
THINGS, as of winds, harsh, violent : 
so we say, a hard gale. Ja. iii. 4, utto 
(TKX-nptov dvEfxuiV. So Sept. Prov. xxvii. 
16, Sepia's (TKXrjpd^ dvEfxo^. Ml. V. H. ix. 
14, (tkX, dvEfxoL. Arr. Alex. M. i. 26, 3. 
ii. 6, 3. Also used of thunder, Hdot. 
ii. 16, and whatever brings with it sounds 
that painfully joms upon the ear. Hence, 
by a use formed on the above literal one, 
applied to denote what shocks or is qfen- 
sive to the mind, John vi. 60, (r/cXr^pos 
koTTLv ouTos 6 X6yo£. So Sept. Gen. xlii. 
7, 30, XaXElv aKX-npd avTolg. Eurip. 
Frag. 75, TroTgpa ^eXel9 otol jULuXdaKa 
\I/Evdf] Xkyco, 77 oTKXrjp' dXrjOi} ; So also 
Stob. p. 97, dirrjvrj^ outos 6 Xoyos /cat 
c/cXtypos, aXX' 6 — jmaXaKo^. Jude 15, 
(TKXripcou &v kXdXria-av kut avTov, where 
the sense is harsh, petulant, rebellious. 
Similarly as it is said in Ps. xciv. 4, (a 
passage evidently in the mind of the sacred 
writer,) 'how long shall the wicked utter 
hard things ?'' or sayings. As said of things 
done, lit. ' what painfully affects the touch,' 
intractable, grievous. Acts ix. 5. xxvi. 14, 

(XKXripoi/ <T0l Trpo? KEVTpa XaKTiX^ELV, 

where we have a proverbial form of speak- 
ing, common alike to the Hebrew, Greek, 
and Latin, expressive of bootless resistance 
to superior strength. In this sense, too, 
the word occurs in Sept. Ex. i. 14. vi. 9. 
Deut. xxvi. 6. Pol. iv. 21, 1. Xen. Mem. 
ii. 1, 20. — II. of PERSONS, hard, Matt. xxv. 
24, oTi (XKXripo^ eI dvdpwTro?, i. e. hard- 
hearted, griping, one who exacts his due 
to the uttermost, dKpL(3o8iKaL09. And so 
the term is used in a passage of Arriau 
cited by Kypke, ol KaTOLKovuTE9 EfiTro- 
poL arKXripoTspoL, scil. eIotl. And Stob. 
Serm. p. 383, dvdpl cr/cX^jpto Kai aTro 
TravTO's iropi'^ovnrL. Thus in Sept. 1 Sam. 
xxv. 3, the term is used of Nabal. Many 
eminent Commentators and Lexicogra- 
phers, indeed, assign to the word in the 
above passage of Matt. xxv. 24, the sense 
harsh, stern, which is undoubtedly the 
more usual one in the best Classical 
writers, being derived from the phy- 
sical one, ' what resists the touch.' See 
Virg. Georg. iii. 502 ; and so Plato, p. 155, 



SKA. 



396 



SKO 



calls such persons aK\i]poL Kal avriTviroL, 

intractable^ inexorable, but that does not 
so well suit the context there ; though, as 
the notion of what is unyieldiiig is com- 
mon to both senses, it may be included. 
So in Cicero pro Pianco, 16, we have 'homo 
asper atque omnibus iniquus.'* 

^K\t]p6Tt] 9, TJTOS, 77, ( (TK:Xt]|00§,) prop. 

dryness, hardness, n-f]? 77;?, Jos. Ant. iii. 
1, 1. hardiness of the body, Plut. vi. p. 
497 : in N. T. fig. kcltcl Tr\v ah:\i]p6TrjTd 
<rov Kai aixtrav6i]Tov Kapoiav, hardness 
of heart, obstinacy, perverseness, Kom. ii. 
5. Sept. Deut. ix. 27. 

"^LKXt] p OT p dy^r\\o'5, 6, rj^ adj. (cr/cXt)- 
/oos, Tpdy(j]\o<5,) hard-necked, stijf-neched, 
i. e. obstinate, perverse. Acts vii. 51, where 
we have a metaphor taken from refractory 
oocen, which will not submit their necks to 
the yoke. So Philo de Educ. § 4, has 
<r/c\>;pau)(£i/£s, probably the more Classi- 
cal term. Sept. Ex. xxxiii. 3, 5. Deut. 
ix. 6, 13. Bar. ii. 22. Ecclus. xvi. 12. 

2/cA.?j p uVo), f. vvLo, ((7/c\rjp6§,) prop, 
of a thing, to make dry and hard, and fig. 
to make hard, heavy, grievous, Sept. 2 Chr. 
X. 4. Judg. iv. 24 ; of words, 2 Sam. xix. 
43 ; in N. T. fig. only of persons in a 
moral sense, to harden, i. e. to make obsti- 
nate^ perverse, with acc. Rom. ix. 18, dv 
dk ^iXsL, aKXrjpvvEL, comp. ver. 17, and 
Ex. vii. 3, and see my note. Pass. Acts 
xix. 9. Heb. iii. 13. Foil, by ras /cap- 
^i'as, Heb. iii. 8, 15. iv. 7. Ecclus. xxx. 
12, juyjiroTi (TKXiipvvd&L^ dTTELdy'jcrr} (tol. 

S/coXto?, a, oi/, adj. prop, crooked, 
hent, (fr. <tk6\o^, a hook or sickle, and also 
a hooked thorn, a word occurring several 
times in Hesych. and which may be com- 
pared with the Hebr. mn, whence our 
hook, which has both these senses. Now 
this, again, comes from 2 perf. 'ia-KoXa 
(as cttlXo? fr. gcmXa) of g-keXXco, 'to 
dry up, contract,' and also, like our word 
warp, ' to bend aside from the perp; ndicu- 
lar, to twist aside from straightness by con- 
traction,' and fig. ' to pervert from recti- 
tude and truth.' In its natural sense the 
word occurs, Wisd. xiii. 13, as an adj. 
to l^vXov, and in Hdot. ii. 86, to aLoi]po's.) 
In N. T. it is used 1) prop, of a road, or 
parts of it, Lu. iii. 5, Kal 'ia-Tai rd gko- 
Kid £19 si'dsTav. Sept. Isaiah xlii. 16. 
Heliodor. i. 6, a-KoXid^ ydp tlvu's aTpa- 
TTous. Pind. Pyth. ii. 157, cr/c. cooTs. 2) 
TIG. crooked, i. e. perverse, icicked, so 
ytved. cTKoXid, Acts ii. 40. Phil. ii. 15; 
-a phrase derived from Deut. xxxii. 5, 
ytvEa GKoXid kol CLEaTpajULimivi]. Of 
masters, equiv. to perverse, peevish, fro- 
tcard, opp. to i7ruLKy]<;, 1 Pet. ii. 18. So 
Sept. Prov. xvi. 28, duT\p (tkoXlo's Siairifx- 

ITETaL KUKa. 



"ZKoXoxf/, o7ro9, 6, (fr. o-koXo^, a hook 
or thorn; see on aKo\to5,) prop, 'any 
thing pointed and sharp ;' fig. a stake^ 
Xen. An. v. 2, 5 ; the point of a hook, 
Lucian, Merc. cond. 3 ; a thorn, or 
prickle, Sept. Hos. ii. 6. Diosc. ii. 29. 
Lucian, Ver. Hist. ii. 30, Sid tlvo^ aKav- 

du)0OV9 Kal (TKoXoTTCOV ILLECTrj^ dTpaTTOV. 

Ml H. An. X. 13. In N. T. 2 Cor. xii. 

7, (tk6Xo\1/ Trj arapKL, a thorn in the fleshy 
'something which inflicts either bodily 
pain or mental distress.' So Artemid. iii. 
33, OLKavQai Kai (T/coXo7r£s dovva^ .at]- 
fjiaLvov(TL, did TO 6^1). In what this afflic- 
tion consisted, has been not a little dis- 
puted. Doubtless it was occasioned by 
some bodily infirmity ; see my note there. 
By a similar mode of expression it is said, 
Sept. Ez. xxviii. 24, aKoXoxp^ iriKpia^, 
and Num. xxxiii. 55, arKoXoire^ iv Tots 
dcpdaXjuoT^ Vfxwv. 

"EKoirio), f. rjorco, (c/cottos,) prop, to 
look out at, survey, (as a c/cottos or watch- 
man from a tower ;) also, to look at, con- 
template, attentively, Pind. 01. i. 7 ; also 
fig. to consider carefully, Hdot. i. 32, <t/co- 
irilv iravTo^ \p-nijLaTo<s Ti]U teXevtvv. 
Hence, to regard, as Thuc. ii. 43, <tk. n-hv 
wcpsXiav, et q]. In N. T. to have respect 
to. with acc. 2 Cor. iv. 1 8, /ni} ctkottovv- 
Tcov iifjLiou Ta (3XE7r6/jieva. Phil. ii. 4, lur) 
Ta EavTwv EKaaTo^ crKoirovvTE'S. So Thuc. 
vi. 12, GK. TO kavTov fxovov, 'to consider 
oneself, one's own interest solely.' With 
acc. of pers. — to mark, note, Rom. xvi. 17. 
Phil. iii. 17. 2 Mace. iv. 5. Dem. 1488,2. 
Xen. C}T. ii. 2, 18; with a negat. (tkotte'lv 
fxi), prop, to look to it lest, to take Jieed lest^ 
Lu. xi. 35. Gal. vi. 1. Xen. Mag. Eq. vii. 15. 

2/co'7ro9, ov, 6, {(TKEiTTOfxai,) prop. ' a 
mark to shoot arrows at,' ' an object set 
up, at which one looks and aims ;' e. g. a 
mark, goal, Phil. iii. 14, KaTa gkoitov 
diajKU). Sept. and Class. 

S/copTTiJo), f. Lcru), to scatter, diverse, 
trans. 1) prop, with acc. John x. 12, 6 
XvKo^ (TKopiTLX^Ei Ta TTpo^aTa '. xvi. 32. 
Sept. and lat. Class. Yet it was used in 
the Ionic dialect, (being, for instance, 
found in Hecataeus,) and from thenx^e was 
introduced into the common dialect ; or 
rather, it had, probably, always been, and 
continued to be, used in the language of 
common life : so it occ. in Artem. In the 
proverbial expression, Matt. xii. 30, and 
Lu. xi. 23, 6 fxri crvvdyoov fXET kfiovy 
(TKopiriX^EL, we may suppose it, as avvdyta 
before, derived from agricultural occupa- 
tions ; the one signifying to scatter abroad 
grass to be made into hay, or corn to be 
dried by the sun ; the other, to collect the 
j hay or corn, after it has undergone the 
! above process, into hecps. 2) fig. to scatter 
1 one's gifts^ distribute largely^ to be liberal^ 



SKO 



397 



SKY 



bountiful, by a metaphor taken from sotv- 
ing^ absol. 2 Cor. ix. 9. 

SKopTTi'os, ou, 6, a scorpion^ (a sort of 
venemous insect, on which see Calmet,) 
Lu. xi. 12. Rev. ix. 3, 5, 10. Sept., Jos., 
& Class. luLu. x. 19, iraTslu iiravoi 6(f). 
Kai <rK0f>7rta)i/, we have a figurative form 
of expression used of surmounting great 
evils and difficulties, being preserved from 
men as venemous in their hostility as 
scorpions. Comp. JE\, H. An. x. 23, we 
have iraTovaraL tous (TKopirLOVs a7ra0£ts 
dianiivovai. 

SfcoTgiyos, rj, oi;, adj. ((t/cotos,) darJc^ 
Avithout light, Matt. vi. 23, oXov to o-co/xa 
<rou CTKOTtLVov ECTat. Lu. xi. 34, 36. 
Sept. and Class., espec. Plato, Xen. and 
iEschyl. 

^KOTia., as, T7, {(TKOTo^^) darkness^ ah- 
sence of light. 1) prop. John vi. 17, 
a-KOTLa riSt] syey ovel^ ' it was now dark.' 
xii. 35, 6 TTspLTraTcou kv nry cTKOTLa. xx. 
1. Sept. Job xxviii. 3. Mic. iii. 6. Eurip. 
Phoeniss. 346. So of a place of darkness, 
Iv Trj (TKOTia, in darkness, i. e. in a dark 
place, in private. Matt. x. 27. Lu. xii. 3. 
2) FIG. of a state of darkness, i. e. moral 
darkness., the absence of spiritual light and 
truth, ignorance and blindness., including 
the idea of sinfulness, and the misery con- 
sequent thereupon, (see Is. ix. 2. Matt, 
iv. 16. Acts xxvi. 18.) John viii. 12. xii. 
35, iW fXY] (TKOTia u/xa9 KaTaXajBrj. ver. 
46. 1 Johni. 5. ii. 8, 9, 11. Meton. of 
persons in such darkness, John i. 5, rj 
CTKOTLa, for ol k(TKOTi(TfxivoL Trj dLavoia, 
Eph. iv. 18. 

S/caTt^cr), f. tcrct), (c/coto?,) to darken., 
' deprive of light in N. T. only pass, to 
he darkened : 1) prop. Matt. xxiv. 29, b 
vXlo^ aKOTLcrSnaEn-aL. Mk. xiii. 24. Lu. 
xxiii. 45. Rev. viii. 12. ix. 2. Sept. Job 
iii. 9. Eccl. xii. 2. Plut. x. p. 608. Pol. 
xii. 15, 10. 2) fig. and spiritually, of the 
understanding, i. e. of moral darkness, 
ignorance, Eph. iv. 18, karKOTia-fxivoL Ty 
diavola., lit. befooled., with which comp. 
similar expressions in Dion. Hal. de Thuc. 
83, Yi (TKOTiXfivcra Trju didvoLau o)(\t]ori§. 
Jos. Ant. ix. 4, 3, TrjV ^lavoiav kirtcrKo- 
TLO-fxivoi., and Bell. v. 8, 2, km-saKOTSL 
avTcov rai<s yvu) fiat's Slo. to.^ 'irapavofxia^ 
6 Ofos. Rom. i. 21. xi. 10, crKOTKyQi'irco- 
aav ol 6<pd. axJTwv. 

S/coTos, £os ous, TO, (aud ou, 6, Heb. 

xii. 18,) darkness., the absence of light. 
I. PROP. 1) gener. Matt, xxvii. 45, uko- 
'To<s kykvETo kirl 7rd(rav Tit]v yrjv. Acts ii. 

20, £t§ <Jk6t0<5. 1 Cor. iv. 5, to. KpVTTTa 

TOO o-KOTous, ' the hidden things of dark- 
ness,' i, e. 'done in darkness,' secret 
things ; of the darkness of the blind. Acts 

xiii. 11. Sept. and Class, as ^1. V. H. iii. 
18. Xen. Cyr. iv. 2, 2. 2) a dark place ^ j 



' a place where darkness reigns,' Matt. viii. 
12, kK(3Xi]diia-ovTaL to gkoto^ to 
t^wTapof, into the uttemnost darkness., 'the 
fiirthest dark' prison, as an image of the 
place of punishment in Hades, or hell ; 
with an allusion, as Bp. Middleton observes, 
to the Jewish notion of the state of future 
punishment, Wisd. xvii. 21, corresponding 
to the Tartarus of the Greeks. So at 2 Pet. 
ii.4, we have crgipaTs X^ofpov Taprapcoaa^, 
exactly similar to to gkoto-s to k^coTe- 
pov here; also we have at 2 Pet. ii. 17, 
and Jude 13, 6 X,6(po^ tov ctkotovs £ts 
aiiZva., i. e. ' thick gloom of darkness for 
ever,' thickest and eternal darkness. — II. 
FIG. of moral darkness., the absence of spi- 
ritual light and truth, ignorance and blind- 
ness., including the idea of sinfulness and 
consequent misery ; see crKOTia 2. 1) 
GENER. Matt. iv. 16, 6 Xaos b KadrjfXEVo^ 
kv (TKOTEL s.l6t (pco? jjiiya. vi. 23. Lu. i. 
79; comp. Ps. cvii. 10, Sept. John iii. 19, 
Tiydirrjcrav /uLaXXou to ctkoto^ rj to (puj's. 
Acts Xixvi. 18. Rom. ii. 19. xiii. 12, to: 
Ipya TOV (TKOTovs., ' the works of dark- 
ness,' wicked deeds ; so in Dr. Duport's 
Greek version of our noble Collect for 
Advent Sunday, Scoprja-aL rjixiv xdpiv 'Lva 
a7ro0a);U£0a to. 'ipya tov ot/cotous, Kai 
kv^va-cofieda to. oirXa tov ^ojtos. 2 Cor. 

iv. 6, 6 0£O9 O SLTTCbV kK (Jk6tOV9 (^0)5 

Xd/mxp^at. vi. 14. 1 Pet. ii. 9 ; see Mic. vii. 
8. 2) abstr. for concr. of persons in a 
state of moral darkness, wicked men., under 
the influence of Satan, or the infernal 
spiiits., as opposed to Christ, the ' Sun of 
righteousness;' comp. 2 Cor. vi. 14, »j 
k^ova'ia tov <t/co'tou§, Lu. xxii. 53 ; per- 
haps for Satan himself. Col. i. 13 ; also 
Eph. V. 8, rjTE TTOTf cr/coVos. vi. 12. 

SfcoToo), f. wVo), (o-/co'to§,) to darken, 
cover with darkness., Soph. Aj. 85; pass. 
Rev. xvi. 10, kykuETO t) (Saa-iXELa avTov 
kcTKOTwixivr], i. e. emblematic of distress, 
calamity, destruction. So Joel ii. 6. Nah. 
ii. 10, ^ all faces shall gather blackness.' 

2/cu/3aXoi/, ou, TO. This is not de- 
rived, as the Lexicographers say, from 
Kvcrl and ^dXXuo, q. d. to kvotl ^aXXo- 
fXEt/ov, for that would only account, and 
lamely too, for one of its many uses. I 
have no doubt that the ctkv is corrupted 
from (TKo for e^co, q. d. to 'i^co (3aXX6- 
fXEvov, ' what is cast out as refuse.' Thus 
it is applied 1) to the ofal {off-fall), ot 
refuse of a table ; 2 ) to chaff tlie refuse of the 
grain, and cast out to the dunghill ; 3) to 
the icreck or sea-weed cast forth by the sea ; 
4) to excrement ejected from the bowels. 
Jos. Bell. V. 13, 7. Artem. i.69. Plut. de 
Is. and Os. xxvii. 4 ; and so perhaps in N. T. 
Phil. iii. 8, Ta -rrdvTa ■nyovfxai crKv^aka 
ElvaL. So Apuleius Flor. 2, says of Crates, 
' rem familiarem abjecisse, velut onus ster- 



SKY 



398 



com, magis labori quam usui.' And so 
Plaut. True. ir. 7, 5, ' amator, qui bona 
sua jo?'o stercore habet/ 

S/cuOptoTTos, ou, 6, ?7, adj. (o-/cu0po9, 
grim, stern, fr. €rKx)X,ofxaL^ prop. 
scolding^ as opp. to IXa^os ; also, gloomy^ 
as said of persons in sorrow, Lu. xxiv. 17 ; 
and grim-visaged^ as said of hj'pocrites, 
Matt. vi. 16. And so in certain passages, 
cited by Wets, and others, we have the 
terms viroKpLTal and <j/cu6pa)7rot con- 
joined. Sept. and Class. 

S/cuWw, f. uXto. The primary sense 
of this word is to tear^ rend^ and ivorry^ 
as dogs or other animals, with tooth and 
nail, Hesych. ctkvWelv' to toIs ovv^l 
airav. And as we use the verb to luorry, 
for to harass, trouble and weary any one 
out, so the Greeks used cr/cuXXaj, e. gr. 
Hdian. iv. 13, 8. vii. 3, 9. ^sch. Pers. 
569, (TKvWovTaL. Thus in N. T. Mk. v. 
35, and Lu. viii. 49, fn) aKvWs tov hioa- 
(TKaXov. Mid. Lu. vii. 6, /mi] aKvWov. 
Pass. part. Matt. ix. 36, otl riarav kcTKvX- 
fxivoL^ namely, with the burdensome rites 
and ceremonies of the Law, and especially 
the irksome traditions of the Pharisees. 

HfcuA.oi', ou, TO, ((T/cuWoj, to pluck 
off the hair, and also to tear off the skin,) 
prop, skin^ Jiide^ as stripped off ; but usually 
and in N. T. spoil, booty, i. e. stripped 
from a slain enemy, in opp. to Xdcpvpa, 
spoil taken from the living ; also spoil 
generally, Lu. xi. 22, to. aKvXa avTov 
SLaSiSwaiv, lit. ' he scatters his spoils,' the 
goods of which he has made a spoil. So 

ThuC. vi. 71, TO. TCOV 'jro\£fJLLU)V (TKvXa 

lxoyT£9. Sept. 

SKa)\T//co|8f)a)TOS, ou, 6, v, adj 
{(TKoo\i],(3L(3pco(TKu},)tvorm-eaten^ devoured 
of worms, spoken of cpdELpiaaL<s^ the dis- 
ease of Herod Agrippa, Acts xii. 23. 
Comp. Jos. Ant. xix. 8, 2. 2 Mace. ix. 9. 
Theophr. H. PI. iii. 12. Cans. PI. v. 9, I. 

S/ccoXtjJ, tj/cos, 6, a ivorm, i. e. as 
feeding on dead bodies, Mk. ix. 44, 46, 48, 
oTTov 6 CTK. av. oh teXevtu, Kai to Trvp 
ov (r^lvvvTUL, in allusion to Is. Ixvi. 24, 
used only fig. for a part of the torment of 
hell ; and generally supposed to denote an 
evil and accusing conscience constantly and 
eternally preying on the damned. See 
more in my' note. The same image is 
found in Judith xvi. 17. Ecclus. vii. 17. 
The word occurs in Sept. and Class. 

2^apayotyos, f/, ov, adj. (o-^apay- 
^09,) of smaragdus or emerald. Rev. iv. 3, 
ofxoLO's opdaEL a-fxapaydLvto sc. Xidco. 

2/xapay^05, ou, 6, smaragdus, a 
name under which the ancients appear to 
have comprehended all gems of a fine 
green colour, including the emerald, Rev. 
xxi. 19. Sept. and later Class. 



"S/uLvpva, ?]9, v, myrrh, Heb. ID, the 
juice of a certain small thorny tree grow- 
ing in Arabia and Abyssinia, distilling, 
either spontaneously or by incisions, a 
kind of liquid, soon hardening into a 
bitter aromatic gum, which was highly 
priced by the ancients, and was used for 
incense and perfumes, and also (as w^e 
learn from Hdot. ii. 82) employed in em- 
balming. Matt. ii. 11, Xi^avov kul ar/xvp- 
vav. John xix. 39. Sept. and Class. 

^ fxv pviX^u), f. Lcru), {crjULvpva,) to mingle 
zcith myrrh; pass. Mk. xv. 23, kSidovv 

aVTtO TTLELlf k(T fXV pVlCT fxivOV 0I.VOV, 1. C. 

wine mingled with myrrh and bitter herbs ; 
see "0^09. 

Sop 0 9, ov, 6, originally an urn for 
containing the bones of a dead person, 
(Horn. II. xxiii. 91,) but afterwards a 
coffer, coffin, Hdot. ii. 78 ; any receptacle 
for a dead body, Lucian D. Mort. vi. 4. 
^schin. XX. 34. Sept. for a mummy-chesty 
Gen. 1. 26. In N. T. a hier, or funeral- 
couch, on which, among the ancients, the 
dead of the higher classes were carried 
forth to burial, Lu. vii. 14. Comp. Sept. 
kXivy]^, 2 Sam. ii. 31. 

2 0 9, cri), (TOV, pron. poss. tliy, thine; 
said of what belongs to any one, or is in 
any way connected, with him ; e. gr. by 
possession, acquisition. Matt. vii. 3, kv Tip 
rrtp 6<pdaX/uLfJo, ver. 22. xiii. 27. Lu. xv. 
31. Acts V. 4. TO (TOV, TO. (TCL, tMnc, thine 
oivn, 'what is thine,' Matt. xx. 14. Lu. vi. 
30. So of society, companionship, Lu. v. 
33, ol Sk (TOL fxaQriTai. Mk. ii. 18. John 
xvii. 6, 9, 10. xviii. 35. ol (tol, thy kin- 
dred, thy friends, Mk. v. 19. Of origin, 
as proceeding from any one. Matt. xxiv. 3, 
T^9 0-779 irapovcria's, Lu. xxii. 42, to 
(TOV, sc. ^kXrifxa. John iv. 42. xvii. 17, o 
Xoyo9 6 0-09. Acts xxiv. 3, and Class. 

Sou^apioi/, ou, TO, Ti2it. sudanum, a 
piece of linen, such as was, among the an- 
cients, generally used as a handherchief 
but sometimes as a naphin, and occasionally 
also, as appears from the Rabbinical wri- 
ters, used to W7'ap money in, and lay it by, 
Lu. xix. 20. John xi. 44. xx. 7. Acts 
xix. 12. Pollux On. vii. 71. 

2o(^ta, a9, 77, (oro(^o9,) U'isdom^ prop. 
hwicledge, (so it is defined by Xen. Mem. 
iv. 6, 7, kTTLfTTVfxi],) skill, eocpertness in any 
art ; e. gr. rj (TO(pia tov tIktovo^, Horn. 
II. XV. 412 ; espec. in the fine arts, as 
music, poetry, painting, Pind. 01. ix. 16. 
Xen. Mem. i. 4, 2 & 3. An. i. 2, 8. Lys. 
198, 11. Sept. (T0(pLa, Ex. xxviii. 3. 
xxxvi. 1, 2, In N. T. icisdom, in various 
senses : 1. skill in the affairs of life, prac- 
tical icisdom, prudentia, sound judgment, 
ivise 7nanagem£nty as shown in forming 



so $ 



399 



the best plans, and selecting the best 
means for earning them into execution, 
including the idea of jiulgment and sozmd 
good sense^ Eur. Or. /09, ^£t /ule aw'^siu 
<Ts aro<pLq^ et al. In N. T. Acts vi. 3, au- 
ETTTo. TrXi'ipsL^ Tlv. ay, /cat <TO(pLu^^ 
where see my note ; vii. 10. Col. i. 28. 
^iii. 16. iv. 5, comp. 6. Lu. xxi. 15, c-TOfxa 
Kai <rocf)Lav^ q. d, ' wise utterance,' the 
faculty of speaking wisely and eloquently. 
Sept. '1 K. ii. 6. Hdian. i. 5, 23. Plut. 
Thes. 3. Xen. Mem. iii. 9, 4, 5.— II. 
wisdom in a higher sense, i. e. deep know- 
ledge^ natural and moral, leammg, science ; 
implying high cultivation of mind and en- 
lightened understanding. Jos. de Mace. 2, 
cro<pLadi) tolvvv ecttlv yvcocn? ^e'iodu kul 
avQpuyTTLVuiv irpayfJidTtjuv kol tuw tou- 
Tujv alTLcoi/. Cic. deOff. i.43, ' sapientia, 
qua:m arocpLau Grseci vocant, rerum est 
divinarum et humanarum scientia.' Hdot. 
iv. 77. ^1. V. H. ii. 31, and oft. in Plato 
and Xen. In N. T. 1) gene?'. Matt. xii. 
42, and Lu. xi. 31, Ttju arocpLav 2oXo- 
fxuivo^. Acts vii. 22, irdfrri arocpLa Ai- 
yuTTTtcoi/, where see my note. Implying 
learned research, \6yov jxev EX^vra (to- 
0i'as, Col. ii. 23; also a knowledge of 
hidden things, of enigmatic and symbolic 
language, Rev. xiii. 18, xvii. 9. Sept. Job 
xi. 6. Prov. i. 2. Dan. i. 17. 2) spec, of 
the learning and philosophy current among 
the Greeks and Romans in the Apostolic 
age, which stood in contrast with the sim- 
plicity and purity of the Gospel, and 
tended to draw away the minds of men 
from divine truth ; hence called by Paul, 
arapKiKt]^ 2 Cor. i. 12. ri (Tocpia tov k6<t- 
fiou, 1 Cor. i. 19, 20, (where see my note,) 
iii. 19. Twu ayOpwTTwi/, ii. 5, 4, l3. So 
i. 17, ou/c Eu (Tocpia Xoyou, ' not in wis- 
dom of words,' ' not with mere philosophy 
and rhetoric,' et al. Hdot. i. 60. ^1. V. H. 
xiv. 23. Xen. Conv. iii. 4. 3) in respect 
to divine things, spiritual wisdom and 
Jenowledge, ' the knowledge of divine and 
human affairs,' including one's duty both 
to God and man, represented every where 
in Scripture as a divine gift, Matt.'xiii. 54, 
irodEV TOVTw 77 <T0<pLa avTri ; Mk. vi. 2. 
Acts vi. 10. Eph. i. 8, iv irdarrf (ro<pLq. 
Kai (ppovricTEL. ver. 17. Col. i. 9. 2 Pet. 
iii. 15. 1 Cor. xii. 8, to ^xev diBoTai Xoyos 
<ro(pLa^^ dWia Se Xoyos yvMorEco^. Spec, 
of insight imparted from God in respect 
to the divine counsels, 1 Cor. ii. 6, (ro(pLav 

XaXoVjULEV <TO(pLaV OV TOV ailOVO'S tovtov. 

ver. 7. Meton. of the author and source of 
this wisdom, 1 Cor. i. 30. As conjoined 
with purity of heart and life, Ja. i. 5. iii. 
13, 15, 17, fi ok aucodiv arocpia TrpcoTov 
fiEU dyvri e<ttiv. Lu. ii. 40, 52. — III. 17 
aro<pia tov 9. the Divine wisdom^ Rom. 
xi. 33, ai /3«6o9 ttXoutou /cat (T0(P'ia^ Kai 
yvoxrtws 9. 1 Cor. i. 21, 24, comp. 22. 



Eph. iii. 10. Col. ii. 3. Rev. v. 12. vii. 
12. Of the Divine wisdom as revealed 
and manifested in Christ and his Gospel, 
the wise counsel of God for bringing men 
to the Gospel, Matt. xi. 19, and Lu. vii. 
35, Kai £^t/catw0)] rj crotpia a.7rd tvovtek- 
vcDV auT?}?, see more in my note. So Lu. 
xi. 49, 77 co<pia tov 9, tlTrti/, i. e. ' the 
Divine wisdom as manifested in me,' 
Christ ; comp. Matt, xxiii. 34, where it is 
tyco : or h crocpia tov 9. is abstr. for con- 
crete, put for 6 O. 6 (T0(p6^ : see my note. 

So(/)t^w, f. icroo, (coc^os,) to make 
ivise, i. e. skilful^ eocpert^ to instruct in 
any art or science ;' pass, to be skilled^ ex- 
pert, e. gr. TT/s vavTi\Lr}<s, (' navigation,') 
Hes. Op. & D. 647. In N. T. 1) act. to 
make ivise, to enlighten, i. e. in respect to 
divine things, with acc. of pers. 2 Tim. iii. 
15, TO. lEpa ypdfXfxaTa to. ^vvdjXEvd as 
crocpiaaL €t§ (rcoTrjpLav. So Sept. Ps. 
xix. 7, f] fxapTvpia ^vpiov iriaTr], crocpi- 
X^ovaa vrnria. cv. 22. Theoph. ad Au- 
tol. ii. p. 82, ot irpocpT^Tai vtto tov 
Oeov <To(pL(TdEVTE9. Bamab. Epist. ix. 
in a had sense, ayyeXos irovripo^ icro- 
(pLCTEv avTov?, i. e. the Jews. 2) mid. 
aro(pLX,ofxaL as depon. with acc. of thing, 
prop, to make wisely, to devise skilfully, 
and also artfully, (with allusion to 
that sense of arocpia by which it means 
cunning, whether as employed gener. to 
over-reach, deceive, and injure others, 
Hdot. i. 68. ii. 172. iii. 4, & 85, 127. v. 
21. ix. 62,) so Hdot. ii. 66, croKpiXpvTaL 
TOL^E, In N. T. only part. perf. as pass. 
(rE(T0(pi<rfXEV0L fjLvdoL, cunyiingly devised 
fables, 2 Pet. i. 16. The pass, form occ. 
also in Ps. Iviii. 5, Aq. and Symm., but in 
an active sense. 

2o^6s, 6v, adj. wise, in a gener. 
sense, skilful in any art, or well ac- 
quainted with any science ; in N. T. I. 
skilful, ejcpert in any art, 1 Cor. iii. 10, 
orocpo^ dp\LTEKT<jt3v. Scpt. Isa. iii. 3. 
2 Chr. ii. 7. So the Class, oft. apply the 
epithet to workmen or artizans, espec. 
builders; so .^sch. Socr. i. 1. Ml. V. H. 
xiv. 39. See Aristot. Eth. vi. 7.— II. 
skilled in the affairs of life, discreet, judi- 
cious, practically wise; comp. in ^ocpial. 
1 Cor. vi. 5, arocpd?, os dvvnarETai 6ia- 
Kplvai K.T.X. So Sept. Deut. i. 13. 2 Sam. 
xiii. 3. Is. xix. 11. Hdot. vii. 130. Xen. 
Cyr. i. 1, 1. An. i. 10, 2.— III. skilled in 
learning and science, i. e. learned, intelli- 
gent, enlightened, and gener. in respect to 
things human and divine ; comp. in 2o- 
(pia II. 1) gener. as to human things, 
Matt. xi. 25, Lu. x. 21, aTro crocpwv Kai 
(TvvETwv, 'the learned and clever.' See my 
note. Matt, xxiii. 34. Rom. i. 14, arocpol^ 
TE Kai dvoriTOL'5. xvi. 19. 1 Cor.i. 25. Sept. 
Prov. i. 6. Eccl. ii. 14, 16. Palseph. liii. 6. 



sn A 



400 



SHE 



Hdian. i. 2, 7. Xen. Mem. i. 6, 11. 2) 

spec, as to the philosophy current among 
the Greeks and Romans ; see in "^ocpia 
II, 2. Rom. i. 22, (pdaKOVTE^ elvai cro- 
<^ot, sfxcopdvdrjarav. 1 Cor. i. 19, 20, 26, 
27. iii; , 18, bis, 19, 20. Xen. Mem. i. 

6, 14. iii. 9, 5, 3) in respect to divine 
things, things spiritual and heavenly, wise, 
enlightened, as conjoined with purity of 
heart and life ; comp. in 'Eocpia II. 3. 
Eph. V. 15. Ja, iii. 13, comp. ver. 17, and 
see my note. — IV. spoken of God, the 
Wise, as being infinite in wisdom and 
knowledge, Rom. xvi. 27, jULOi/w cro(pco 
Sew. 1 Tim. i. 17. Jude 25, where see 
my notes. 

S'TTa/oaco'cu or tto), {(Tirdo),) f. ^w, 
prop, to tear, rend, or lacerate, as dogs or 
other animals their prey; so oft. in Class. 
In N, T. to convulse, throw into spasms, 
like epilepsy, spoken of the effects of 
demoniacal possession, with acc. Mk. i. 26. 
ix. 20, 26. Lu. ix. 39. Plut. de Gen. Socr. 
22. Max. Tyr. Diss. 23. Galen ad Glauc. i. 

^Trapyavoo}, f. ttxrw, {a-nrdpyavov, 
swathing-band, fr. cTrapyw,) to swathe, 
wrap in swaddling-clothes, trans. Lu. ii. 

7, 12. Sept. Aristot. H. An. vii. 4. Plut. 
Qusest. Rom. 5. 

27raTa\a6t), f. tfo-o), ((rTraraXtj, lux- 
ury in eating and drinking, fr. o-iraddo), 
to live luxuriously, fr. (nrddt], a curry- 
comb ; so Herat. Epist. i. 4, 15, ' Me pin- 
guem et nitidum, bene curata cute, vises,' ) 
to live in luxury, voluptuously, intrans. 
I Tim. V. 6. Ja. v. 5. Ecclus. xxi. 15. 
So KaTua-iraTaXdu), Sept. Pro v. xxix. 21. 
Anthol. Gr. ii. p. 22. 

S Tract), f. aVo), to draw, i. e. to pull in 
any way whatever, gener. with an implied 
notion of from one place to another ; thus 
it signif. ' to draw from or among, or up, 
out,'' &c. In N. T. ^0 draw out, as a 
sword ; mid. airaarafxEvo^ Tr}V ixd')(aLpav, 
'drawing his sword,' Mk. xiv. 47. Acts 
xvi. 27. Sept. and Class, oft. 

STTftpa, a9, also Ion. gen. ?j9, rj, 
((Tirduy, to draw, to twist,) prop, 'any 
thing wound or wreathed,' as a coil or hand, 
a cord, rope. In N. T. a hand, or troop, 
company: 1) said of Roman foot-soldiers, 
probably a cohoi^t, on which see the writers 
on Roman Antiquities. Matt, xxvii. 27. 
Acts X. 1, al. Jos. B. J. iii. 2, 1, & 4, 2. 
Ant. xix. 2, 3. Plut. Marcell. c. 25, 26. 
B. J. ii. 11, 1. 2) spoken of a hand or 
corps, from the guards of the temple, 
John xviii. 3, 12, where see my note. 
These were Levites, who performed the 
menial offices of the temple, and kept 
watch by night, Ps. cxxxiv. 1. 2 K. xii. 9. 
XXV. 18; espec. 1 Chr. ix. 17, 27, sq. 
They were under the command of officers 
called cTTparnyoL, 



^TTELpu), f. gpto, to sow, scatter seed : 
1) prop, absol. Matt. vi. 26, tA ireTELvd 
ov (T'm.ipov(XLV. xiii. 3, 4. Part. 6 crirsL- 
pcoL', the sower, Mk. iv. 3, 14; with acc. 
of the seed sown. Matt. xiii. 24, cttei- 
povTL KaXov cnripfxa. 1 Cor. xv. 36, 37. 
Pass. fig. of a single seed or grain, Mk. iv. 
31, 32, KOKKOV a-LvaTTEU)^ — oTav (Tirapri '• 
so, by analogy, of the body as committed** 
to the earth,*^ 1 Cor. xv. 42—44. With 
prepositions of place, cis. Matt. xiii. 22 ; 
kv, ver. 31 ; sTrt with gen. Mk. iv. 31, 
with acc. Matt. xiii. 20 ; irapd with acc. 
ver. 19. Hence in proverbial expressions, 
by a metaphorical use of (Tireipio in the 
sense to hestow, founded on the language 
of the O. T. See Is. xxxii. 20. Hos. 
X. 12. Prov. xi. 24. Matt. xxv. 24, 
^'spi'^cju oTTov ovK sa'TTBLpa^, John iv. 
37, aWos ea-TLV 6 (XTTEipuiv. 2 Cor. ix. 

6, O (TTTELpUiiV (pELBo/llivWS, K.T.X. MorC- 

over, as sowing is done with a view to a 
future crop, the term imports labour or 
paim bestowed upon any thing, from 
whence may result j^m^s or effects, whether 
good or bad, Gal. vi. 7, o yap kdv ariTEiprj 
dvdpoiiro'5, TovTO Koi ^EpiKTEL, Comp. 
Matt. xxv. 24, 26. John iii. 18. The 
metaphor, an agricultural one, is frequent 
in the Class. ; also fig. 1 Cor. ix. 11, 
TTVEVfxaTLKd (TTTELpELV, ~ to disscminatc, 
impart. Gal. vi. 8, 6 crirEipwv £t5 xfji/ 
adpKa — 6 CTT. eU to TlvEvixa, ' whoever 
lives to the flesh, or to the Spirit.' So, by 
a similar mode of expression, Aristot. 
Rhet. iii. 3, 18, cu TavTa aiarxpfjo? 
fXEV EoriTELpa^, KUKu)^ dk kdipLa-as. 2) 
fig. of a teacher, to sow the word of life, 
to disseminate instruction, John iv. 36. 
Mk. iv. 14, Toi/ Xoyov (tttelpel : pass, 
ver. 15, OTTOV aTrsLOETaL 6 Xoyo^. ver. 
16, 20. Matt. xiii. 19, to kcrirapfjiivov kv 
Ty Kapdiq. 

'SiTTEKovXaTcop, 0/oos, 6, Lat. specu- 
lator, a kind of soldiers forming the body- 
guard of kings and princes, so called from 
their principal duty, that of sentinels ; for 
to this, it may be supposed, the name 
alludes, being derived from the Latin 
speculator, and not, according to some, 
from spiculator, from spiculum. Besides 
the above, however, they had other confi- 
dential duties, and among these, that of 
acting, like the Turkish soldiers of the 
present day, as executioners. See Seneca 
de Benef. iii. 25 ; de Ira, i. 16. 

Sttei/^co, f. cnraia-u), to pour out, to 
make a liboMon, Sept. Gen. xxxv. 14. 
Hdian. iv. 8, 12. Xen. Cyr. vii. 1, 1. In 
N. T. fig. mid. crTrivbofxaL, to pour out 
oneself, i. e. one's blood, to offer up one's 
strength and life, 2 Tim. iv. 6, kycn yap vdrj 
(TTravSo/iiaL, or rather, ' to be ready to be 
poured upon in sacrifice,' as the victim 



401 



2ni 



had the libation poured upon its head. 
(\>mp. Phil. ii. 17, and see my note. Simi- 
larly in Liv. xxi. 29, we have 'libave vires.' 

STTtpMa, aTos, to, {airtLpuu^) secd^ as 
sown or scattered, of grain, plants, or trees : 
1) prop. Matt. xiii. 24, aTrtipnv kuXov 
cnrip/xa. ver. 32. Mk. iv. 31. 1 Cor. xv. 
38. Sept. and Class. ; metaph. 1 John iii. 
9, airipfxa auTOu, i. e. Qeuv, a seed from 
God, a germ of the Divine life, ' the inner 
man as renewed by the Spirit of God.' 2) 
fig. of the se7)ie7i vinle, Heb, xi. 11. Sept. 
and Class. Hence meton. seed, equiv. to 
ckUdren, ojfspring, prop. Matt. xxii. 24, 
25, fj.ri £x^^ criripfia. In this sense the 
term has in Scriptural writers almost 
always a plural acceptation ; while in 
Class, as uniformly a singidar one. So 
in Soph. El. 1510, *& (Ed. Tyr. 1087, and 
a Delphic oracle in Thuc. v. 16, Aio§ 
VLOv vfXLQiov TO airipfxa. The plural 
sense, however, is found in Soph. Trach. 
304. Eurip. Med. 798 : gener. equiy. to 
posterity, Lu. i. 55, tw 'A^pad/j. kul t(Z 
CTT. avTov. John vii. 42. Acts iii. 25, 
oft. : also gentile Christians are fig. called 
the seed of Abraham, as having the same 
faith, Rom. iv. 16. ix. 8. Gal. iii. 29, 
where see my note. 3) by impl. a rem- 
nant, a few survivors, like seed kept over 
fjom a former year, Rom. ix. 29, zl fxri 
Kvpio<i ^a^atod kyKaTiXiiTEv riiuui> cnrtp- 
fxa. So Plato Tim. p. 1044, &^ wu irdcra h 
7ro\is karri Tavvv v/ixcou, TrtpiKzLCpdivro'S 
iroTE (TiripfxaTo^ ^payio^. 

"Ett t.p jnoXSyo?, ov, 6, hi adj. {cwip- 
fxa, Xiyui,) seed-gathering, seed-picking, a 
term used properly of those small birds, 
sparrows, &c. which live by picking up 
scattered seeds. So we have in Plut. 
Demetr. 28, opvidwu crTrepixoXSyuiv, and 
in Aristoph. Av. 233, 579. Artem. ii. 20. 
Hence in metaph. sense, it denoted those 
paupers who frequen ted the market-places, 
and lived by picking up any scattered or 
refuse produce, and generally persons of 
a}>ject condition, who were without any 
certain means of support. Hence also, it 
was applied to denote, according to its ac- 
ceptation in N. T., ' one who picks up, 
and retails, trifling stories,' a chatterer, 
tattler. Acts xvii. 18. 

27r£U(5a), f. Evaw, (fr. crTTtw, and 
(TTrdu) : the prim, idea being, as Hem- 
sterhus. shows, intendere, scil. nervos, 
espec. in drawing up a fishing-net. So 
Theocr. i. 40, kcp' a, scil. Xzirpdoi, (tttcu- 
^UDV fxiya c'lktvov £9 (36\ou HXkel — /ca/x- 
vovTL dvopL koLK<xi<i,) prop. trans, to pro- 
pel, put in motion, urqe on, hasten, Horn. 
II. xiii. 236. Hdot. i. 38, 206. More fre- 
quently, however, and in N. T. intrans. 
to urge oneself on, hasten, make haste, as 
Hom. II. xxiv. 253. Thuc. i. 84. So 



Acts xxii. 18, with inf. Acts xx. 16, 
ECTTTHU^e ydp — yivicQuL tL's'lepoaoXv/Jia. 
By Hebr. the part. cTrt uo-as is put with a 
verb of motion adverbially, in the sense 
liastily, quickly, e. gr. Lu. ii. 16, riX^ov 
(jiTivaavirE'i. xix. 5, 6. So Sept. Gen. 
xlv. 9. Ex. xxxiv. 8. Josh. viii. 19. With 
an accus. lit. to hasten on, or rather men- 
tally hasten after, to a^iticipate, 2 Pet. iii. 
12, TrpoaSoKujVTa^ kul (T7revduvTa9 Tt]u 
irapovaLuv k.t.X. i. e. ' earnestly expect- 
ing, and ardently wishing and anticipating.' 
Sept. with acc. Is. xvi. 5. Pind. Isth. iv. 
22, cTTTivBtLv dpeTuv. Thuc. vi. 39, kuku 
air. and 79. 

EirvXaiov, ov,t6, (cttteos,) a cavern^ 
den. Matt. xxi. 13, <nrriXaLOv Xtjo-tcov, m 
allusion to the fact, attested by Joseph., 
that the robbers with which Judaea then 
swarmed, had their habitations in the 
caverns so numerous in that region. See 
also John xi. 38. Heb. xi. 38. These 
caverns were, it appears, not only used for 
sleeping in at night, but sometimes for 
abode by day, affording an habitation, 
however dreary, to numerous persons re- 
tiring thither in times of public danger 
and distress. See Jos. Ant. xii. 8. 

27rt\as, a^os, r?, a rock under, or 
scarcely rising above, the surface of the 
sea, on which vessels are shipwrecked, 
Jos. Bell. Jud. iii. 9, 3. Pol. i. 37, 2, and 
such is now generally supposed the sense 
of the word in N. T. Jude 12, and not 
that assigned to it in E. V. stain ; but 
that is more than doubtful ; such, besides 
involving an incongruity of figure, being 
little agreeable to the context, and for- 
bidden by the parallel passage in 2 Pet. 
ii. 13, from which the above was evidently 
formed. It is true that airiXd^ almost 
always has the sense a 7'ock. But that it 
sometimes meant also a stain, is certain 
from Theophr. C. PI. ii. 9, where we have 
yf] (TTTLXds, said of a loamy, greasy soil. 
And Hesych. explains (nrLXdSe^ by />i£- 
fxtacrfxivoL. And though the two signifi- 
cations in question may seem too unlike 
to belong to the same word, yet the truth 
is, the words are, strictly speaking, not the 
same ; one being formed from (tttIXo's, a 
stain ;' the other from g-ttlXo^, ' a rock,' 
meaning, however, such a sort of rock as 
the low coral reefs of the Polynesian 
archipelago ; which seem, when viewed 
from an eminence, spots on the surface of 
the ocean (ii/ t?7 daXdcrar]); as the persons 
in question might be said to be kv Tais 
dydiraL^, 'in the love-feasts,' staining and 
deforming the fair face of Christian society. 

SttIXos, ou, 6, prop, a spot, stain, ex- 
tending over the surface of any thing, fr. 
o-TTtw and o-Tr/^o), extendo ; a word oc- 
curring only in the later writers, for which 



sni 



402 



sn o 



the earlier and Attic ones use Kr]\U. In 
N. T. it is found only fy. in a moral 
sense, a stain^ Eph. v. 27. 2 Pet. ii. 13. 
On the metaphor see Rev. iii. 4. Zach. iii. 
3. Eccl. ix. 8. 

S-TrtXoo), f. axro), (cttIXo?,) prop, to 
spot^ to stain ; fig. to defile^ Ja. iii. 6, 
77 y\w<T(Ta n a-TTLXovaa oXov to auifxa^ 
namely, by inflaming the passions, and 
thereby making the members of the body 
instruments to sin, to its defilement. Pass. 
Jude 23, k(nrL\(jofxivov y^LTijova. Wisd. 
XV. 4. Dion. Hal. ix. 6. LucianAmor. 15. 

27rX.ay xi^t^o/uat, f icrdncrofxaL^ (fr. 
cTrXay^i/a, the bowels, considered as the 
seat of sympathy,) depon. pass, to have 
compassion, to pity^ absol. Matt. xx. 34, 
<nr\.ay\vL<TQ&L<s 6 'Iijcrous. Foil, by 
ETTi with dat. Matt. xiv. 14. Lu. vii. 13; 
with acc. Matt. xiv. 14. xv. 32. Mk. viii. 
2. ix. 22; TTspi with gen. Matt. ix. 36. 
With gen. simpl. like Lat. miseret, Matt, 
xviii. 27, (TTrXayxvLordEL^ — tov 8ou\ov 
iKtivov. The word is one confined to the 
N. T., being found neither in tlie Sept. 
nor the Class, writers. It occurs, how- 
ever, in Symm. Deut. xiii. 8. Gr. Anon. 
1 Sam. xiii. 21, and often in the Apocry- 
phal writings, as the Test. xii. Patr. and 
the Act. Thomae. 

SirXayxi^oi', ou, to, an intestine^ 
howel. Usually and in N. T. only plur. 
xa ffTrXay^z/a, the entrails^ bowels : I. 
prop. Acts i. 18, k^i^vdr] iravTa to. 
(TTrXdy^va avTov. 2 Mace. ix. 5, and 
Class. — II. fig. the inivard paHs^ what we 
call the heaH^ as the seat of the emotions 
and passions ; and that by a use not merely 
Hebr. but also frequent in the Gr. trage- 
dians, especially Euripides and iEschyl. 
Hence in N. T. the term is used, like the 
Hebr. D^Qm, to denote both tlie heart 
itself^ and the affections of the heart ; 
namely, the gentler emotions, as compas- 
sion, tender affection ; the former in 2 Cor. 
vi. 12, a-Tfi/ox^pHtcrOe iv toTs o-TrXayX" 
voi^ vfiwv, answering to Kapota, ver. 11. 
Philem. 7, to. (nrX. tmv ayivov avairi- 
TravTUL Slcl (7ou, i. e. ' are appeased or 
quieted by the comfort of thy tender affec- 
tion,' 1 John iii. 17, KXeiari to. aTrXay^va 
avTov^ with which comp. Act. Thom. xa 
t^ia (nr. tTTLarx^^v, also Pro v. xii. 10 ; 
the latter in 2 Cor. vii. 15, /cat Tot o-tt. 
avTov ir&pLcra^OTipws tts u/xas ecttlv. 
Phil. i. 8, (h<5 kiTLiroQui iravra^ u/xas su 
cTTrXdyxvoL^ 'I. Xp. i. e. in my ardent 
love to Christ, ii. 1 : intens. Lu. i. 78, did 
airX. eXeov^ Q&ov. Col. iii. 12, (tttX. 
oiKTipfiov. Also put for the object of 
affection, Philem. 12, Tot kfxd cnrXdyxvct, 
' my bowels,' meaning 'whom I love as 
myself or my own son.' Simil. Philostr. 
Vit. Soph. ii. 3, ovk kirairo^vcroixaL rots 



kpiov (TTrXdyxvoi's. Artemid. i. 46, ol 
Trat^ES (jTrXdyxvcL XiyovTai, and v. 
37. Philo of Joseph, t. ii. p. 15, 2^r}p<riv 
IcrTLadaTaL tu)V k/ncoi/ cTTrXayxf wv. And 
so the Latin ' -sascera mea,' as often in 
Ovid. From all which examples it is 
evident that the idiom in question is not 
merely Hebraic. 

STToyyos, ou, 6, a sponge. Matt, 
xxvii. 48. Mk. xv. 36. John xix. 29, and 
Class. 

Utto^os, oG, o, (for a-ftoSo^ fr. arfSiv- 
vvjULL, lit. the remains of the fuel, after the 
fire has been extinguished, ) as?ies, Heb. ix. 
13, cTTTO^os dafxaXEco^y Matt. xi. 21, and 
Lu. X. 13, kv ardKKM Kai a-irodcp — plete- 
u6i](Tav. To lie down in ashes, or to cast 
ashes or dust on the head, was a rite of 
oriental mourning, as appears from many 
passages of the O. T. It was not, how- 
ever, confined to the Hebrews, but ex- 
tended to the Greeks ; see Horn. Od. ix. 
375. Lucian. D. Mort. xx. 4. 

^TTopd, as, 77, (cTreipo),) prop, a sow- 
ing, or seed sown ; also seed-time, Sept. 
2 K. xix. 29. In N. T. fig. for genera- 
tion, birth : 1 Pet. i. 23, dvayEyEvv^fxivoL 
ovK EK crTTopd's (pdapTt]^. Act. Thorn. 
§ 31, TToia^ (TTTopd's Kai iroLov yivov9 
virdpXEL^* 

'SiTTopifxa^, ou, 6, 77, adj. (cttcZ/ow,) 
sown, sativus, for sowing, e. gr. aiTEpfxa, 
Gen. i. 29. Lev. xi. 37. h yv, i. e. ' land 
fit for sowing,' Diod. Sic. i. 36. Xen. 
H. G. iii. 2, 10. In N. T. neut. plur. 
aTTopi/uLa, sown fields, fields of grain, 
Matt. xii. 1, al. 

27ro|0os, ov, 6, {(TTTEipco,) a sowing, 
seed-time, Sept. and Class. In N. T. 
equiv. to a-iripfxa, seed, Mk. iv. 26, ^dXy 

TOV GTTOpOV ETTL Tfj^ yr}9. VCr. 27. Lu. 

viii. 5, 11; fig. 2 Cor. ix. 10. Sept. Deut. 
xi. 10. 

STToi/^a^o), f. dcrcD, {cr'TTOvdr],) prop. 
to speed, mahe haste, intrans. : so Aristoph. 
Thesm. 572, kcrTrovoaKvla TrpocrTpEX^i- 
Also by impl. ' to strive, use all activity 
and diligence, strain every nerve,' about 
a thing : 1 ) gener. with infin. 2 Tim. iv. 
9, cnrovd. kXdETv Trpos fis Tax^ws. ver. 
21. Tit. iii. 12. Sept. Job xxxi. 5. Judith 
xiii. 12. Eur. Iph. A. 337, et al. 2) to 
give diligence, ' to be in earnest to do some- 
thing,' with infin. Gal. ii. 10, o /cat kaTrov- 
Saaa avTo tovto TroiijcraL. Eph.iv.3. ITh. 
ii. 17. 2 Tim. ii. 15. Said of diligence in 
working out our salvation, Heb. iv. 11. 
2 Pet. i. 10, 15. iii. 14. Sept. and oft. in 
Class. 

STTov^aTos, a, ov, adj. {ar'Trovdri,) 
prop, speedy, earnest, diligent; also, by 
impl., 'forward to do any thing,' 2 Cor. 
viii. 17, 22, aTTOvdalov oVra, vvvi dk 



sno 



403 



ST A 



nroX^ (TirovBaLorspov. Neut. comparat. 
a-irovSaLOTEpov^ as adv. earnestly^ dili- 
qently^ 2 Tim. i. 17, orx. tpirTjo-E ^ut. 
Diod. Sic. i. 51. Xen. Mem. iv. 2, 2. 

STTou^ai'ojs, adv. (crTrou^aros,) m;7i- 
es//^, diligently^ eagerly, Lii. vii. 4, Trao- 
tKoKovv avTov (TTTOvS. Tit. iii. 13. Com- 
parat. a-TTOvdaioTipco^' the more zealously^ 
Phil. ii. 28. JE\. V. H. ii. 2. Xen. Cyr. i. 
3, 9. 

Sttou^tj, 7/5, speed, haste, Hdot.ix. 1, 
as manifested in earnestness, or diligence. 
In N. T. 1) gener. e, gr. jutra cnrovBrj^, 
' with haste,' i. e. hastily, eagerlv, Mk. vi. 
25. Lu. i. 39. So Sept. and Class.^ 2) 
diligence, earnest effort, zeal: Rom. xii. 8, 
•7rf>o't<rTct^£z/os kv cnroudrj. So eu crTrou^j; 
is of freq. occurrence in Sept. and Apocr. 
and Thucyd. iii. 49, also Rom. xii. 11, 
(TTTovdri /ixt] 6Kvi]pol, meaning, with a 
particular reference to the duties of Chris- 
tian benevolence above inculcated, that 
promptitude and zealous alacrity, for which 
the Apostle, at 2 Cor. viii. 16, and elsewh., 
praises Titus ; who, without needing to be 
solicited, was not only ivilling, but forward 
and prompt to do the act of kindness re- 
quired of him, as having Tiji/ ahrr\v mrov- 
Bi]v (TTrovSaLOTEpo^ virdp-yuiv. 2 Cor. vii. 
11, 7r6(TT]V KaTiLpyd(raTO vfilu a-7rovdr]u, 
I meaning ' the ana:-iety and earnestness' 
with which they strove to clear themselves 
of the charges made, and remove the 
abuses censured by the Apostle, viii. 7, 8. 
2 Pet. i. 5. Jude 3, irda-av crTrovdr^u 
TTOLovixEvo^, 'making it my earnest care 
to write,' &c. So in Hdot. i. 4, we have 
o-7rou<5rji/ iroL-ncracrQaL TLjULCopisLi/, as we 
say, ' to make a thin^ one's business,' and 
Pol. i. 46, 2, cnrovdr}u Trou'LcrdaL Trspi tl. 
So in behalf any one, e. gr. virip Ttvos, 
2 Cor. vii. 12. viii. 16 ; with Trpos final, 
Heb. vi. 11. Jos. Ant. xx. 9, 2. Xen. 
Conv. i. 6. 

STTupts, i^os, 17, (arTTETpa,) a wicJcer- 
hasket for storing grain, or holding provi- 
sions, &c. Matt. XV. 37. xvi. 10. Mk. viii. 
8, 20. Acts ix. 25. Arrian Epict. iv. 10, 
21, (nrvpi<TL BsLirvicraL. 

Sra^tos, ov, 6, ((rraw and VtrTtj/ui,) 
also TO (TTa^LOv in profane writers ; a 
stadium, prop, 'the standard,' i. e. mea- 
sure. 1 ) prop, as a measure of distance, 
containing 600 Greek feet, or 625 Roman 
feet, equiv. to about 604| feet, or 201J 
yards English. The Roman mile con- 
tained 8 stadia ; and 10 stadia are equiv. 
to the modern geographical mile of 60 to 
the degree, Lu. xxiv. 13. John vi. 19. xi. 
18. Rev. xiv. 20. xxi. 16, and Class. 2) 
TO (TTOL^Lov, a stadiuM, circus, in which 
public games were exhibited ; so called 
because the Olympic course was a stadium 
in length, 1 Cor. ix. 24, cl kv (XTaoLio 
nrpixovTt^, and oft. in Class. 



STa/Lii/0 9, ov, 6 or rj, (VcTt^jut,) a jar^ 
a large vessel, whether of earth or wood, 
in which any liquid is set aside for use; and 
thus corresponding to our cask, q. d. a 
standing jar: it may well have this sense, 
since it is derived, like all Avords in 
fxva, jULVov, from a partic. passive, viz. 
i(TTd/jLevo9. These participles were some- 
times left unchanged, as in the case of 
dt'^afxivt] and dp^Evo^ ; sometimes were 
used slightly curtailed and contracted^ as 
in that of aTdfxvo^ ; sometimes more so, 
as in TEpirvo^ from teptto/ulevo^, arEfxvd^ 
fr. (TE^o^Evo^, and fxipiixva fr. fiE/ixEpi- 
lxivo<s. It was chiefly used for keeping ivine^ 
so (TTdfjivoL o'Lvov, Dem. 933, 25. Aristoph. 
Plut. 545. In N. T. a pot, vase, in which 
the manna was laid up in the ark, Heb. 
ix. 4, aTdfxvo^ yjivcTrj. See Ex. xvi. 33. 

STd<Tt5, «6t)§, 17, (iCTTacrat, perf. pass, 
of i(TT))|Ut,) prop, a standing, i. e. position^ 
in various acceptations of the word, as 
status, stahilitas, (such as are of frequent 
occurrence in Plato,) the following alone 
found in N. T. I. the act of standi?ig, as 
(TTdcrLv E-X^'-^i have a standing,' i.e. 
' to subsist, exist,' Heb. ix. 8, etl rfj's 
7rp6t)T?js <T/c?]i/^5 Exovar^i's o-Tacnv, i. e. 
' yet subsisting,' as Dion. Hal. Ant. vi. 95. 
Nearly approaching to this is the sense 
which the word bears in Hdot. ix. 31. 
Pol. ii. 68, 7, al., namely station, lit. t?ie 
place where one stands. — II. gener. faction, 
sedition. How the word comes to have 
that sense, Commentators and Lexico- 
graphers of the N. T. have not shown. 
To me the thing appears to have arisen as 
follows : from the sense standing or station 
proceeded that of paiiy or faction, inas- 
much as, in a faction, either party has its 
station apart from the other. Again, from 
the sense faction of personal rivalry sprung 
that of faction generally, i. e. sedition, poli- 
tical commotion ; whence arose, in a private 
sense, that of dissension, contention, &c. as 
said oUndividuals. While then the primary 
sense of the word is party, (a sense found 
in Thucyd. ii. 22, wtto t^s aTaa-Ew^ eku- 
T£|0o§, and iv. 71, al.) yet its far more 
usual sense is sedition, for a-vcrTua-L^. So 
Pind. 01. xii. 23, o-Tctcrts dvTLavETpa, and 
Nem. ix. 31. Hdot. i. 173, & vi. 109, 
and oft. in the Tragedians and Plato. In 
N. T. the word has, besides that of starid- 
ing, the two senses above laid do\\Ti, 1) 
sedition, insurrection, Mk. xv. 7, o'ltlve^ 
kv (TTucTEL (povov TrETroLtjKsicrav. Lu. 
xxiii'. 19 & 25. Acts xix. 40. xxiv. 5, 
KLvovvTa (TTdcTLv, (witli which comp. Jos. 
Bell. ii. 9, 4, Tapax^v ETtpav eklvei.) 
2) dissention, contejition. Acts xv. 2, yc- 

VOIxivT]^ OVV (TTd(rEU)9 Kul avX^r]Tl']<TEU)9. 

xxiii. 7, 10. So Sept. Prov. xvii. 14. 
^sch. Pers. 744. Xen. Mem. iv. 4, 11. 

^TaTtjp, 7]po9, 6, {^i<XTr]lxi-i to weigh,) 



2T A 



404 



2TE 



prop, a certain weight ; also stater^ an 
Attic silver coin, Matt. xvii. 27. It was 
equal to 4 Attic silver drachmae, or about 
2s. 7c?., but was probably current among 
the Jews as equiv. to the shekel, or about 
2s. 4d, 

STaupos, ou, o, (fr. cTTauw, cognate 
with o-Tao), to fix, namely, in the ground, 
as our staJce from the past participle of to 
stick,) a pointed stake or pale, Hom. II, 
xxiv. 453. Thuc. vii. 25. Xen. An. vii. 
4, l4. In later writers and in N. T. a 
cross, sc. a stake with a cross-piece, on 
which malefactors were nailed for execu- 
tion, i. e. were crucified ; on the nature of 
which punishment see my notes on Matt, 
xxvii. 32. 1) prop. Matt, xxvii. 32, tov- 
Tov TjyydpEva-av, 'Lva apy tov crTavpov 
avTov, i. e. ' to aid him in bearing it ver. 
40, 42. Fig. in the phrases, aLps.Lv, ^aa- 
TciX^ELv, Xafx^dvEiv TQV cTTaupou, to take 
up or bear one's cross, i. e. ^ to undergo 
suffering, trial, punishment,* to expose 
one's self to contumely and death, denoting 
that portion of affliction which is endured 
by the faithful disciples of Christ, as a 
trial of their faith, and which is intended 
to conform them to the example of their 
crucified Master ; alpsLi/, Lu. ix. 23 ; 
(SaarTaX^eiu, xiv. 27 ; XajufSdveiv, Matt. x. 
38. 2)' meton. the cross for its punish- 
ment, crucifixion, spoken only of the death 
of Christ upon the cross, and denoting the 
whole passion of Christ, and the merit of 
his sufferings and death on the cross, Eph. 

11. 16. Heb. xii. 2, inrifXELVE cTTavpov : so 
o (TTavp6<s TOV Xp. 1 Cor. i. 17. Gal. vi. 

12, 14, and 6 a-Tuvpo?, absol. Gal. v. 11, 
answering to 6 Xoyos rod arravpov^ 1 Cor. 
i. 18. Phil. iii. 18. 

Sraiz/ooco, f. oxro), {arTuvpo^,) prop. 
to drive stakes, pales, palisades, Thuc. vii. 
25 ; but in later writers and N. T. to cru- 
cify/, 7iail to the cross, with acc. expr. or 
impl. Matt. xx. 19, fiacmyuixraL Kai 
cTTavpLodaL. xxiii. 34. xxvi. 2. xxvii. 22, 
sq. Mk. XV. 13, sq. Acts ii. 36, al. Sept. 
and Class. Fig. — ^avuTou), Gal. v. 24, 
aravpovv r^v adpKa,'' to crucify the fiesh,' 
i. e. to vanquish, mortify, destroy the 
power of the carnal nature, to mortify its 
lusts through the faith and love of Christ 
crucified; vi. 14, e/ulol Kocrfio^ kaTav- 
poDTUL, Kayu) Tw KOGfiw, ' the world is 
dead to me, and I to the world,' q. d. I 
have utterly renounced the world, and the 
world me. 

^Ta(pv\r], 17, (fr. arracph, a dried 
grape,) prop, a grape, also a cluster of 
grapes, Matt. vii. 16, jJi^ri crvWiyovcnv 
diro aKavdwv (TTUCpvA.'nv ; Lu. vi. 44. 
Rev. xiv. 18, riK/uiaaav ai arTafpvXal av- 
TTj^. And so in Class, the word is almost 
always used in the plural ; though the si?i- [ 



gular, as in the preceding passages, put 
generically for the plural, is sometimes 
found, as Hom. Od. vii. avTap ettl o-ra- 
(pvXy GTa(pv\ii, ctvkov o ettl (Tukco. 
Athen. p. 33, crTa<pv\}) — EvarTOfio^, and 
p. 653, and occasionally in Plato. In the 
Sept. it occurs 18 times, and 5 in the Apo- 
crypha ; but always in the sing, (which 
seems therefore to have been Hellenistic, 
derived from the Hebr. i:!?) ; e. gr. Jer. 
viii. 13, ovK EOTTL (TTacpvXi) kv Tats a/x- 
TTtXofs. Neh. xiii. 15, olvov kul crTacpv- 
Xrju. Gen. xl. 11, kul EXa(3ov tj/z/ o-ra- 
cj)vXi]v (the grapes), kul k^tdXixl/a avWju. 
Num. vi. 3, (TTacpvXrjv 7rp6(T(paTov Kai 
(TTacpLoa ou (pdyETaL, i. e. neither fresh 
grapes nor raisins. So Theocr. Id. xxvii. 
9, d (TTacpvXh oTTacpL? ecttl, where the 
sense is, ' the grape when ripe is (at least) 
a raisin,' i. e. is of some use. 

^Tdxv^, uos, 6, (fr. cTTao),) an ear of 
corn in its green state, (so called from the 
peculiarly erect form it then has.) Matt, 
xii. 1, tlXXelv (TTa'xi;a9. Mk. ii. 23. iv. 
28. Lu. vi. 1. Sept. and Class. 

^TEyt], 77, (fr. cTTEyw, cogn. with 
TEyw, to keep off or out, as rain, winds, 
or other injuries of the weather,) a cover- 
ing, roof. Matt. ^nii. 8. Lu. vii. 6, Mk. ii. 

4, dTTEtjTEyacfav tijv (TTiy7]v. Sept. and 
Class. 

Srsyo), f. ^o), in Class., asLucian, Tim. 
18. Thuc. iv. 34, trans, to cover ; also fiq-. 
to conceal, not to make known, as Pol. iv.82, 
Thuc. vi. 72. Plato, 621, A, & Ecclus. viii. 
17, Xoyov (Ti-i^aL. In N. T. to hold out 
as to any thing, to forbear, to bear ivith, to 
endure, (a signification arising out of the 
proper sense of the word, which, as cogn. 
vdth. riyu), tego, signifies prim, to keep out 
or of, as a ship, when it is not leaky, keeps 
out the water; or to keep in, as a vessel 
to hold liquid, (Plato, 45, C. Ill, D) ; and 
hence, continere and sustinere,) with acc. 
1 Cor. ix. 12. xiii. 7 ; absol. 1 Th. iii. 1, 

5. Diod. Sic. xi. 32, Ti]v (Siau. Pol. iii. 
53, 2. 

eT po9, a, ou, adj. [a-TEppo?, cte- 
pEo?, finn, solid, fr. 'iaTi]/uLi,) sterile, bar- 
ren, used only of females, Lu. i. 7, 36. 
xxiii. 29. Gal. iv. 27. Sept. and Class. 

SrtWo), f. (jteXu), prop, to set,~place, 
make stand, in order, as soldiers in battle- 
array, Hom. 11. iv. 294; fig. to put in 
order, prepare, fit oid, as tlvo. h fxdxn^-, 
Hom. II. xii. 325. vrja, Od. ii. 287. <jTpa- 
Tidv, Hdot. iii. 141. Hence, from the 
idea of motion to a place, implied in pre- 
pariiig or fitting out an armament for any 
purpose, comes the usual Greek signif. to 
send, to despatch, implying a previous fit- 
ting out. and thus differing from Trifx'KUj. 
Pass, or mid. to be sent, go, take a journey, 
Jos. Ant. i. 19, 1. Hdot. iii. 53. Xen. An. 



2TE 



405 



2TE 



V. I, 5. Further, as the idea of motion 
to a place may sometimes imply motion 
hack to a former place ; so hence arises, 
by a further remove of sense, that of to 
draiv in persons sent out, or things that 
lie extended about : whence the term 
came to be applied, as a nautical term, to 
the drawing i?i or furling sails. See Horn. 
Od. iii. 11. iEschyl. Suppl. 704, and Eu- 
rip. Bacch. 668, (where it occurs in a 
figurative sense,) Xoyov (TTEiXuifXEda. 
Comp. also Hor. Od. ii. 10, 23. Also fig. 
to repress^ diminish^ assuage^ as said of 
things^ as Jos, Ant. v. 8, 3, Xvir^v cr-ra- 
Xtjuai. Philo de Vit. Mos. iii. p. 668, n-rfu 
cfyvacocrav oh]<TLV — crTiWiLV kol Kadai- 
pEiv ; as said of persons^ to repress^ restrain 
from any thing, Philo de Spec. Legg, p. 

772, CLTTO TCOV V\ln]\coV KUL VlTSpoy KUJV 

dvTKTTruiaa Kai aTiWovara. Mid. absol. 
Pint. vii. p. 953, 6, oi kuto. xirv^nv X^^' 
/utoz/€S, aTiikaadai t6u avOpcoirov ovk 
iwuTE^. Hence in N. T. mid. or pass. fig. 
of persons contracting or drawing them- 
selves in from fear, surprise, &c. — to 
shrink from, to keep from, to avoid, 
leioare of with acc. 2 Cor. viii. 20, g-teX- 
XofxEvoi TovTO, ' we guarding against,' &c. 
i. e. in order to guard against, &c. With 
aird, 2 Th. iii. 6, orTiXXEadai Vila's diro 
TravTo^ d^EXtpov k.t.X. 'that ye with- 
draw yourselves from every brother who,' 
&c., equiv. to dipia^aa-daL, x^P'-^^^^'^'' 
diro : so Mai. ii. 5, Sept. dird irpoarcoTrov 
ovofxaTo^ fjLov (TTiXXEtrdaL avTOV. Pol. 
viii. 22, 4, Trju ek <rui/T]0£tas kut- 
a^LcocTLV aTEXXea-daL. 

^^Efifia, aros, to, (cTt^o),) a fillet, 
garland, wreath. Acts xiv. 13, nravpov? 
Hai (TTEfXfxaTa, i. e. ' victims adorned with 
fillets and garlands,' as was customary in 
heathen sacrifices ; Hom. II. i. 28. Thuc. 
iv. 133. 

STgyayjitos, ov, 6, {crTEvd'^oo,) a 
groaning, moaning, either from bodily pain, 
(as often in Sept. and in Jos. B. J. vi. 5, 
1,) or from mental grief, as Acts vii. 34. 
Also used of prayers to God not expressed 
in articulate words, Rom. viii. 26, <tte~ 
vayfxo'i's dXaXi]Toi^, ' by aspirations nn- 
utterable,' i. e. by means of, by exciting 
these aspirations. Sept. and Class. 

STEl/aJco, f. feu, (CTEI/O), (TTEVO^,) 

1) to groan, moan, in trans, as of persons 
in distress or affliction, Rom. viii. 23, 
VixeZ's avTol Ev EavTol<s (TtevoX^oixev aV- 
ZK^ExofJLEvoL. 2 Cor. V. 2, 4. Heb. xiii. 17. 
Also, as said of those who offer silent 

Srayer, not expressed in articulate words, 
Ik. vii. 34, dva^Xixl/a^ — EcrTEva^E. 2) 
to murmur, be impatient, Ja. v. 9, /xrj ctte- 
vd'^ETE KUT dXXrjXoDi/. So Plut. ix. 97, 
8, ov (TTEvd^avTcs, Kai Auk. d/ods Trot- 
ovfiEvov, et al. Wisd. v. 3, did ottivo- 



")(U)piaV TTVEVfXaTO^ (XTEvdX^OVTE^, kpOVCTLV 

EuvroT9 K.T.X. , which last passage, we 
may observe, throws no little light on the 
primary sense and ratio significationis of 
the word gtevu), q. d. angere, angustum 
facere vel esse ; the effect of groaning 
seeming to be to nar^^ow the guttur. See 
more in Scheid on Lennep Etymol., who 
well remarks that the term ctevelv ' ad 
internum 2imm\do\ovQxn,?,G\\. angorem, per- 
tinet ; proprie enim convenit ei qui ex 
angusto pectore inspiria ducit, olixu>%elv ad 
externa signa lugentis pertinet.' 

St£i/os, ^, ov, adj. a word of which 
the derivation is doubtful, and of which 
the Etymologists give any thing but a 
satisfactory account. I suspect that it is 
corrupted from the past part, of some ob- 
solete verb, and that the primary sense 
was hemmed in, straitened, contracted, as 
our adj. ^zarrott? derives its origin from the 
past part, of the A.-S. verb nyrwian, co- 
arctari, comprimere, (so our adj. straigld 
comes from the Lat. strictus, past part, of 
stringers,) whence it came to mean, strait, 
narrow, Matt. vii. 13, 14. Lu. xiii. 24. 
Sept. and Class, 

2t£ i;ox w jO £0), f. jjact), [aTEvo'x^wpo^, 
from (TTEvd?, yjMpa,) to crowd into a nar- 
row space, to sh^aiten for room, Sept. and 
Class. ; in N. T. pass, to be straitened, 
2 Cor. vi. 12, ov aTEVox^p^tcrdE kv rifxiv, 
(TTEvoxojp^ZaQE dk EV ToT? (TnrXdyxyoL^ 
v/jiwv, q. d. ' Our affection for you is not 
straitened, but yours for us is straitened.' 
Also to be distressed, not able to turn oneself ; 
2 Cor. iv. 8, ^Xl(S6/ulevol, dXX' ov (ttevo- 
X(ijpovp.EvoL, where we have a military 
allusion, on which see my note there. So 
Arr. Epict. i. 25, 28, kavTov? ^Xi^ofiEv 

Kai (TTEVOXfJ^pOVfXEV, K.T.X, 

1,T£vox(Jop ia, as, ij, (<TTEvoX(J^pka),) 
prop, straitness of place, want of room, 
Thuc. iv. 26, and oft. ; in N. T. fig. anguish, 
as ^Xixj/L^ Kai gtevox- Rom. ii. 9. viii. 
35. So Is. viii. 22, /cat idov ^Xl\1/l^ Kai 
crTfj/oxa'pta. xxx. 6, kv t^ ^XLif/EL Kai Ty 

(TTEVOX^P^CC- Wisd. V, 3, (TTEVOX- TTVEV- 

fxaTo^ : also distress from poverty, &c. 
2 Cor. vi. 4, kv dvdyKai's — kv <ttevox(^- 
pLaL<s. xii. 10. So in Artemid. iii. 14. 
Pol. i. 67, 1. 

2t£P£09, d, ov, adj. (iCTTty^i,) prim, 
and lit. standing firm, also firm, stiff, 
Hom. II. xvii, 493 ; likewise, stiff oy solid, 
as opposed to liquid, Heb. v. 12, 14, <tte- 
pEd Tpocpt], meaning solid food, as op- 
posed to 7nilk, ver. 13 ; such as is called 
by Galen iax^pov (BpcbjULa, and by Arrian, 
Epict. ii. 16, and also Diod. Sic. Theophr. 
and Lucian, Tpocpt] cTEpEd, namely, such 
as that of flesh, and grain in its most con- 
densed state, as opposed to milk, porridge, 
and similar aliments, elegantly termed by 



2TE 



406 



STl 



Sophocles via Tpocpr]. Fig. firm^ stable^ 
immoveable^ 2 Tim. ii. 19, 6 3'£/u£\io§ tov 
0£oi5. 1 Pet. V. 9, (rT£f>£Oi tj7 ttlcttel. 
Sept. and Class. 

Srspcoco, f. coo-w, (crT£jO£05,) prop, 
stable^ firm^ or strong^ to strengthen^ 
trans. Acts iii. 7, 16, tovtov — ka-TEptwae 
TO ovofxa avTou, i. e. ' He proved his 
power and majesty.' Sept. and Class. Fig. 
to confirm, establish, Acts x\i. 5. And so 
in Prov. xx. 18. 

2T£pfc6t)/ia, aT09, TO, ((TTfpEOW,) 

prop. ' what is fixed & made firm or solid,' 
as the firmament of heaven, Sept. Gen. i. 
6, sq. Ez. i. 22, sq. ; in N. T. fig. sta- 
hility, firmness, stedfastness, Col. ii. 5. 
and so in 1 Mace. ix. 14. 

'Et i(p avo^, ou, 6, (crT£0a),) prop, a 
circle, Horn. II. xiii. 736 ; also a chaplet 
or croicn about the head ; in N. T. 1) as 
the emblem of royal dignity. Rev. vi. 2. 
xii. 1, crricp, ctaTipojv dwdsKa. xiv. 14, 
<rTi(p. xpv<Tovv: ascribed to saints in hea- 
ven, elsewhere called ki?igs, iv. 4, 10. ix. 7 ; 
of the crown of thorns set upon Christ in 
derision as king of the Jews, Matt, xxvii. 
29, where see my note. Sept. and Class. 

2) as the prize conferred on victors in the 
public games, a chaplet, ivreath, 1 Cor. ix. 
25, 'iva (pdapTov arTicp. Xa/Stocii/ : hence 
fig. as an emblem of the rewards of a 
future life, equiv. to pi^ize, reward^ 2 Tim. 
iv. 8, o T^§ diKaLoaruvr^^ (TTi(p. Ja. i. 12, 
TTjs X,wf]^. 1 Pet. V. 4. Diod. Sic. xiii. 15. 

3) fig. ornament, honour, glory, ' that in 
which one may glory,' Phil.iv.l, ud^Xcpoi 
fjLov, X^P^ (TTi(pav6^ jULOv. 1 Th. ii. 
19. Sept. and lat. Class. 

'ETE(pav6u),f. (joco), {(TTttpavo^,) prop. 
to croivn, as a victor in the public games, 
&c. 2 Tim. ii. 5. Sept. and Class. ; fig. 
to adorn, decorate, Heb. ii. 7, 9, oo^y kul 
TijuLy icrr£(pdu(joa-a<5 avTov, On the na- 
ture and origin of the metaphor, see my 
note on Thuc. iv. 121. It occ. also in Diod. 
Sic. XX. 84, and oft. in that waiter. 

2 T 776 OS, £0S OUS, TO, {'LfTT'lJfXL, CTT]- 

i^ut,) the 6reas/, plur. to. arriOr^. Lu. xviii. 
13, £TU7rT£i/ £ts TO (TTtj^os ttu. xxiii. 48, 
TU7rToi'T£s iavTcov TO. CTTridi]. John xiii. 
25. xxi. 20. Rev. xv. 6. Trsp. irspi to. 
(TTTiOi]. The plur. form is freq. in Homer. 
Sept. and Class. 

Sttjk-o), a late form, found only in the 
present, from EcrTi]Ka, ' I stand,' perf. of 
icrTi-iiuLL,to stand, mtYiLTis. Mk. xi. 25, oTav 
CTTYiKETS. Trpoo-EvySikEvoL, Elscwh. Only 
fig. to stand firm in faith and duty, to be 
constant, persevere ; ^vith dat. commodi, 
Rom. xiv. 4, tw l^iio Kvpio) (tt^ikel v 
TTiTTTfi, ' to his own master he standeth 
or falleth,' forensic terms signifying to 
stand or fall in judgment, to be acquitted, 



or to be condemned. Foil, by dat. of thing, 
Gal. V. 1, T^ iXsvdepLa : by Iv with dat. 

1 Cor. Xvi. 13, 0-T7J/C£T£ EV T{7 TTtCTfit. 

Phil. i. 27. iv. 1, iv Kvpiu), i. e. in the 
faith and profession of Christ. 1 Th. iii. 8. 
absol. 2 Th. ii. 15. 

Sti7/) ty/x6s, ou, 6, (o-Ttjpt^o),) prop. 
fidcedness, as of the stars, Diod. Sic. i. 81. 
or gener. Plut. vi. p. 284, 11 ; in N. T. 
fig. fixedness, i. e. stedfastness in mind and 
faith, 2 Pet. iii. 17. 

STrjpi^oj, f. t^w, (t(rT?]/Ai,) statuo fir- 
miter, tofi^ so as not to move, Hes. Theog. 
498, of a lock fixed by Jupiter ; also, I. 
PROP. pass. perf. Lu.xvi.26, yaa^a fxiya 
EcrTnpiKTaL, 'is fixedly placed,' stands 
fixed, constitutum. Gen. xxviii. 12, idov 
KXifxa^ EcrTTipLyfXEvri (al. icrTrjpiX^^) 
TTj yy. Horn. II. xi. 28, ipLcrcrLv ioLKonrE^, 
a<? T£ KpovLcov 'Ef vicpEL arripL^E, T£/)as 
(a sign) fxEpoTTiMv dvdpcoTrcov, with which 
comp. Gen. ix. 13, to to^ov fxov TiOrj^i 
kv TT7 VECpfXr}, Kal EffTai £iS crriiJiElov dia- 
dvd fxicrov ifxav Kal Tr]S yPj^. By 
Hebr. Lu. ix. 51, to TrpdcrwTroi/ avTov 
EarripL^E tov iropEVEcrdaL, /c.t.X. : a 
phrase occurring not unfreq. in Ezekiel. 
— II. METAPH. to make stedfast in mind, 
confirm, strengthen spiritually, Lu. xxii. 32, 
(TTripL^ov Tov<3 d6EK<pov9 GOV. Rom. i. 
11. xvi. 25. 2 Thess. iii. 3. James v. 8, 
CT. Ta§ Kaphia's v/ulujv. So 1 Thess. iii. 
13, o-T. vjULoov Tds Kapdia^, with which 
comp. Ps. cxii, 8, EcrTripLKTai v Kapdia 
aurou, ou (po^iidrj. Ecclus. vi. 40 : a 
form of expression this perhaps founded 
on the phrase g-ttipl'^elv Trju Kapolav tl- 
v6<s (as said of the sustenance of food) 
found in Judg. xix. 5, 8. Ps. ciii. 17. In 

2 Pet. i. 12, EcrTr]pLyfXEV0V's kv Ty Trap- 
ovcrrj aXr}0£i'a, there seems to be a meta- 
phor taken from ' a nail fastened in a sure 
place,' kcTTi'ipLyfiivo's kv tottw itlcttw, as 
said Is. xxii. 25, (and so Ecclus. y. 10, 
we have 'LgQl kcTTiipLy/nEvo^ kv crvvicrEt, 
(TOV,) or from a person fixing his foot 
firmly, in order to maintain his ground ; 
and so in Horn. xii. 434, we have ov^i tttj 

eIxoV OuT£ (TT1]pi^ai, TTOCTLV EfXTrE^OV^ 

OUT kTTL^rivai, and II. xxi. 241, ou^£ tto- 
0E(T(7LV EI)(£ arTi]pL^acr6aL. In I Pet. v. 
10-, crT?jpt^at, adEVcoaaL, ^EjUEXicoaaL, 
there is an architectural metaphor, derived 
from those (rTr]pLyfiaTa, or props, &c. by 
which the walls of massy edifices were 
kept up. And so in Exod. xvii. 12, it is 
said, Kal 'A. Kal 'Q. kcrTripLX^ov Tds x^t- 
pa<5 avTOu' Kal kyivovTo al X^^P^^ 
kcTTiipLyfJLEvaL. 

'Eriyfxa, aTOS, to, {(ttlX^co, to stick, 
make a puncture, to prick ; also to brand 
with hot iron, Hdot. vii. 35,) a mark, 
brand, as pricked or burnt in upon the 
body. Often used of the marks with which 



STI 



407 



STO 



runaway slaves, and sometimes prisoners, 
(see ^1. V. H. ii. 9. Pint. Per. 26,) were 
branded, by way of denoting a proi)crty in 
them, Hdot. vii. 23, 3, and alluded to at 
Rev. xiv. 9. The word is used fig. Gal. 
vi. 17, Tot crTLyfxaTa tov Kupi'ou '1i]ctov 
kv T<Z (TMfxaTL fxov jSacTa^oj, where the 
Apostle so calls tlie scars or weals which 
he bore in his body from stripes. 

XTLyjiij, t7s, 7/, (o-Ti'^a),)prop. a punc- 
ture^ poitit, Diog. Laert. vii. 135. Fig. for 
the minutest particle, Dem. 552, 7; in 
N. T. fig. point of tijne^ equiv. to a mo- 
ment^ instant^ Lu. iv. 5, kv GTLyfxy X9^~ 
vov. Sept. Is. xxix. 5. 2 Mace. ix. 11. 
Plut. de Puer. educ. 17, aTiyfirj xpofou 
Tra? 6 (3 109 eari. Anth. Gr. i. p. 172. 

StiX/So), f. to sliine^ to he bright^ 
shi?ie^ glitter^ intrans. Mk. ix. 3, IfidTia 
(ttlX^oi'tu. Sept. 

2 T o a, a9, 77, ( iO'T7?jut, ) a portico^ porch^ 
piazza^ roofed, but open at the sides, (the 
original sense of the word being a pillar or 
column. Its derivation seems to be from 
an old pret. middle of trTaoj, and its 
original meaning ' something fixed^' or that 
stands erect ; whence it came to signify, 
not a column only, but a row of columns,) 
surrounded and supported by columns, 
John V. 2. X. 23. Acts iii. 11. v. 12: thus 
the aToa in question is called by Jos. to 
epyov 2o\o/xwr/o§, probably in reference 
only to its foundations : it was repaired by 
Agrippa the younger, to whom the em- 
peror Claudius committed the charge of 
the Temple ; Jos. Ant. xx. 9, 7. Comp. 
B. J. V. 5, 1. vi. 5, 1. 

2Tot/3as,aoos,7i, (fr.pret. mid.of cttsl- 
fiu)^ 'i<TTOL^a^ as iriTroLda iv. ir^iQu}^) prop. 
' any thing trodden upon,' and hence ' any 
thing strewed" on the ground., whether 
straw, hay, stubble, rushes, reeds, leaves, 
or the twigs of trees, of all which ex- 
amples maybe seen in Wetstein. In N. T. 
Mk. xi. 8, it seems to denote frondes., the 
leafy twigs of trees, such as were used for 
forming low couches. I would comp. a 
similar use of ^aWiav for ^aXkov, in 
Athenaeus xi. KaraKXiva? {avTov) iv Trj 
TToa., ^aWiav te KUTaKXacra^ clvtl Tpa- 

TTt^JJS, /C.T.A.. 

"Etc LX^ '-ov-, ov, to, ((ttoIxos, a row, 
series, fr. <TTdx(jo^ to go in a line,) prop, 
and prim. ' something on which one goes,' 
to attain any purpose ; e. g. the gnomon of 
a sun-dial, that on which the shadow, as it 
were, goes in its way round the dial ; thus 
it is said ' to go down ;' see Isaiah xxxviii. 
8. Also a letter of the alphabet, that on 
which one goes in forming words ; hence, 
fig. elements., those of which any thing is 
composed. In N. T. plur. to. (XTOLX^la, 
elements : I ) gener. tJie elements of nature, 



the component parts of the physical world, 
on which the Creator (as it were) went in 
the work of creation, 2 Pet. iii. 10, 12, 
crTOi)(t'« Kava-ovfJLEva. Wisd. xix. 17. 
Jos. Ant. iii. 7, 7. Luc. Parasit. 11. 
Hdian. iii. 1, 12. 2) as said of elementary 
instruction, the elements^ rudiments., first 
principles of any branch of knowledge, 
Heb. V. 12, TO. a-TOLXf^^cc t^s apxv^-) for 
Td irpwTa (TTOLX^la., the first rudiments 
or principles,' namely, of Christian instruc- 
tion ; consisting in faith, repentance, and 
such like. So called, as being those which 
the learner goes upon (o-T£i'x£t) in seeking 
to attain further knowledge. Similarly 
Plutarch de Educ. 16, has (TTOLX^Ia t^s 
d/0£T^9. The term is also used of that 
state of religious knowledge which sub- 
sisted among both Jews and heathens 
before Christ, and which was, from its 
external and ceremonial character, while 
suited to the capacities of the recipients, 
only calculated to last for a time. Gal. iv. 

3, 9. Col. ii. 8, 20, to. ctt. tov Koar/nov. 

^TOLX^tti-, f. rjco), (cToIxo?, a row,) 
prop, to stand or go in order., to advance in 
rows, ranks, Xen. Cyr. vi. 3, 34. In N. T. 
fig. to walk orderly/., zz to live according to 
any rule or duty, to folloiv it. Gal. vi. 16, 

O(T0L TM KaVOVL TOVTM CTOLX- V. 25. 

Phil. iii. 16. Rom. iv. 12 ; absol. Acts xxi. 
24, (TTOLX^^^ TOV vofiov (fyvXdaawv., 
' livest in the habitual observance of the 
law;' (TTOLX^Tv., like TTEpiTraTtti/, being 
used of habitual action. So Sext. Empir. i. 

10, 233, oTTOLX^^v T77 avvrjdELCt. Pol. 
xxviii. 5, 6, o-tolx^^v tj; t^s (TvyKXvTou 
TrpodiaEL. 

2 TO \ 77, 77, ((tteXXw, which see,) 
prop, ' a fitting out,' or equipment ; also, 
apparatus., as arms., harness ; but gener. 
apparel., attire., dress. In N. T. and occa- 
sionally in the Class., espec. the later ones, 
it is equiv. to Lat. stola, a vestment, i. e. 
a long flowing robe reaching to the feet, 
worn by kings, priests, and persons of rank 
and distinction, (see 1 Chron. xv. 27. 
3 Esdr. i. 1. v. 81. Xen. Cyr. i. 4, 26. ii. 

4, 1. Lu. XV. 22.) and therefore much 
affected by the Pharisees, especially the 
Jurists, Mk. xii. 38. Lu. xv. 22. Rev. vi. 

11. vii. 9, 13, 14. 

2To/ia, aT09, to, the motdh., of men 
and animals : I. PROP, of animals. Matt, 
xvii. 27. Heb. xi. 33. Jam. iii. 3; of per- 
sons, as the organ of breathing, blowing, 
&c. 2 Th. ii. 8, tw TrvEVfxa.Ti tov crTOjUL. 
auToD, scil. Tou Qeov. Rev. i. 16. xi. 5 ; 
as receiving food and drink, Matt. xv. 11. 
Acts xi. 8 ; chiefly as the instrument of 
speech, Matt. xii. 34, to o-t. XuXel. Acts 
xxiii. 2. Rom. iii. 14, 19. So the mouth 
as speaking, or perhaps meton. for words, 
savings, discourse, Matt, xviii, 16, t-Tri 



2T0 



408 



STP 



(TTOfxaro^ ^vo imapTvpwv. Lu. xi. 54. 
xix. 22. xxi, 15, dooarco viuTv (rrofxa Koi 
<TO<ptaif^ q. d. ' wise utterance.' 1 Pet. ii. 
22. Sept. 1 Sam. xv. 24. Soph. (Ed. T. 427. 
699. So also in the subsequent phrases, bor- 
rowed mostly from the Heb. 1) dvoiyeiv 
TO (TT. ' to open one's mouth, to speak,' 
Matt. xiii. 35 ; fig. of the earth as rent in 
chasms. Rev. xii. 16, and Sept. 2) to 
EKTropEvofXEvov EK Tov (TT. i. e. ' words 
uttered,' sayings^ discourse.^ Matt, x v. 11, 
18, and Sept. So to EKirop. dia crTOfxa- 
To^ 0£ou, i. e. word., precept., iv. 4, and 
Sept. 3) XaXaTv or eItteXu oid arTOfxa- 
Tos Ttfo?, ' to speak through the mouth 
of any one, to speak by his intervention, 
as God by a prophet, messenger, Lu. i. 70, 
/caOojs E\.dXrj(TE did CTOjULaTo^ tcov dyicov 
Trpocp. Acts iv. 25. XV. 7. 4) arTOfia 
Trpos a-TOjULa XuXeTu., ' to speak mouth to 
mouth,' orally, without the need of writing, 
2 John 12. So Jos. Ant. x. 8, 2, XuXeTv 
KaTu (TTOfia. — II. FIG. in the sense of 
edge^ point, as of a weapon ; the figure 
being taken from the mouth as armed 
with teeth and biting, or as being in 
beasts the front or foremost part ; also of 
the front of an army : in N. T. of a sword, 
(TTOfxa fxaya.Lpa<s., Lu. xxi. 24. crTofxaTa 
fj.ax- Heb. xi. 34. Sept. Philostr. Heroic, 
xix. 9, (TTOfxa T^9 aixiuif]^- Soph. Aj. 
651. Theophr. 1 Tim. p. 129. Lucian 
Tragodop. diro crTo/j.aTO's cnd^pov. See 
Porson on Eur. Or. 1279. 

2To/ua)(^o§, ou, o, (o-To/xa,) prop, 'a 
mouth, opening,' hence the throat ; also the 
oesophagus or gidlet., Hom. II. iii. 292. 
xix. 266, but more freq. and in N. T. the 
stomach (see Foes. (Econ. Hippocr. 354, 
sq.) 1 Tim. V. 23, Std tov (TTOfxaxov (tou., 
where, from the next words, /cat dud xas 
TTVKvd^ (TOV dadEVELa'5., which are in some 
degree explanatory of these, it is plain that 
by (TT. is meant the lower ventricle of the 
stomach, in which the food, after it has 
passed through the other, is digested ; and 
thus, as we say, ' a weak or qualmish sto- 
mach.' So the Greeks said, o"ro/xa)(os 
ao-OgfTj?, e. gr. Athen. 1. iii. p. 79, toIs 
d(TdEVY\ TOV (TTo/maxov E^ovcn, and 1. ii. 
ovK oIkelo)^ diaTLdEcrdaL tov (TTOjjiaxov., 
'to be indisposed in the stomach.' And 
in like maimer ' stomachus' in Latin is 
put for ' debilitas stomachi.' 

2TpaT£ia, as, ?7, ((rrpaTEuto,) prop. 
military service., ii^arfare ; also a military 
erpeditio?i, campaign : in N. T. metaph. 
of the apostolic office, as connected with 
hardships, dangers, and trials, like those of 
military service, a ivarfare, 2 Cor. x. 4, 
Ta ydp ottXo. Trjs (TTpaTEta^ jj/jlcov ov 
(TapKLKa. 1 Tim. i. 18, 'iva cTTpaTEvrj — 
Ti]v KaXr}V (TTpaTEiav. So the phrase 
aTpaTEUEcrdai aTpaT&iav freq. occurs in 



the Class, writers in the sense ' to perform 
military service.' But though tliese pas- 
sages are supposed by the most learned 
Expositors to have reference solely to the 
apostolic charge ; yet they must, espec. 
the latter, be meant to allude to the perils 
and trials of the Christian Warfare., on 
which St. Paul so frequently treats. 

ST/oaTsu/xa, axos, to, (crT/)aT£ua),) 
prop, a military expedition or campaign., 
equiv. to cxyoaTEia, Hdot. iii. 49 ; but 
more freq. an armament., as Thuc. v. 57. 
vii. 5 ; and sometimes, as in N. T., meton. 
an army., forces., troops., liost : either 1 ) 
gener. Matt. xxii. 7. Rev. ix. 16. xix. 14, 19, 
and so oft. in Xenoph. ; or, 2) by synecd. 
a hand or detachmnt of troops, e. g. the 
gamson in the fortress Antonia, Acts xxiii. 
10, and also ver. 27, (tvv tw (TTp. where the 
sense is not, ' with an army,' but ' with the 
force [under my command].' Also of 
Herod's body-guards, Lu. xxiii. 11. So 
Hdian. iv. 6, 11, spoken of a part of the 
praetorian cohort. 

5TpaT€U6o, f. Eucro), (cTTpaTos, an 
army, ) to serve in the army., to he a soldier, 
Xen. Cyr. iv. 4, 11 : in N. T. only mid. 
depon. oTTjOaTsuo/uai, to serve in war, to 
war, to he a soldier, intrans. I. prop, to 
serve in war, 1 Cor. ix. 7, t/s (TTpaTsu- 

ETUL iSLOL<S OxlriOVLOL^ TTOTE ', 2 Tim. il. 4. 

Part. aTpaTEu6p.Evo<3, a soldier, Lu. iii. 
14. Arr. Epict. ii. 14, 17. Hdian. viii. 7, 
20. Xen. Mem. i. 6, 9. — II. fig. to ivar, 
ivage war, spoken 1) of the apostolic 
office as connected with hardships, trials, 
dangers, 2 Cor. x. 3, ob kutu crdpKa (TTp. 
1 Tim. i. 18, 'Lva (TTpaTEvy ttjv KaXfjv 
(TTpaTEiav. So at least the most learned 
Commentators explain ; but the expres- 
sion certainly relates also to the Christian 
warfare, as at 2 : see more in crTpaTsia. 
Jos. de Mace. § 9, hpdv /cat ivyEvrj 
(TTpaTEiav (TTpaTEvcracrQai VTrkp tt}^ 
E\j(TE^ELa<s. 2) spoken of the evil desires 
and lusts and carnal passions of man, 
which militate against the salvation of the 
soul, opposing the believer's growth in 
grace, and keeping up the conflict between 
the animal appetites and the rational 
powers of the soul, the flesh and the spirit, 
the old and the new nature of man^ Jam. 
iv. 1. 1 Pet. ii. 11. 

^T paTY\y6<3, ov, 6, (<TTpaT05, ayoti,) 
prop, leader of an army, general. So of 
the ten Athenian archons chosen annually, 
one acted as war-minister, and was called 
(TTpaTr]yo<s, Hdot. vi. 109. ^El. V. H. 
iii. 17. In other Greek cities the term de- 
noted chief -magistrate. Spoken of Roman 
officers, it denoted sometimes consul, but 
oftener prcetor. In Roman colonies and 
municipal towns, the chief magistrates 
were usually two in number (though 



2TP 



409 



ST P 



sometimes four or six) called Duumviri^ 
and sometimes styled prcetois, Gr. aTpa- 
Tijyoi. Hence in N. T. the word is used 
1) of the duumviri^ prcetors^ magistrates of 
Philippi, where was a Roman colonv, Acts 
xvi. -20, 22, 35, 36, 38. Sept. 2) a-rpa- 
T7jyo9 Tov t£pou, a captuifi, governor^ pre- 
fect of the temple^ spoken gener. of the 
commanders over those bodies of Levites 
who kept guard in and around the Temple, 
of whom one, the chief, is mentioned at 
Acts iv. 1, & sometimes in Josephus (e. g. 
Bell. Jud. vi. 5, 3), as 6 an-paT^yd^ tov 
lipov. These crTpaTijyoi, however, were, 
properly speaking, not military but civil 
officers, who, besides the above duty, acted 
as prcBfecti and curatores Templi generally. 
The expression occurs in full, Lu. xxii. 
52: Acts iv. 1, and v. 24; in Lu. xxii. 4. 
Acts V. 26, ivifhout tov Upov. Answering 
to this is the term used by Jos. B. J. vi. 
5, 3, oi TOV Lspov (pvXaKE^ nyysiXav tm 
o-T/oaTtjyw, and Ant. xx. 6, 2. B. J. ii. 
17, 2, 6 cTTpaTTjytoi/. Elsewhere, 1 Chron. 
ix. 11. 2 Chron. xxxi. 13. Jer. xx. 1. 
Esdr. i. 8. vii. 2, and i. 9, we have the 
same persons designated by other names, 
e. gr. 6 vyovfjiEvo^ o'lkov Oeou, kiricrTa- 
Tat tov upov^ lepoo-TaTat, y^iXiap^oL. 

2TpaTta, as, 77, (cTjOaTos,) an army^ 
or host^ Sept. and Class. In N. T. only, 
by Hebr., aTpaTid ovpavio^ or tov ov- 
pavov^ ' host of heaven,' said, 1) of PER- 
SONS, as angels^ the angelic host^ Lu. ii. 13. 
Sept. 1 K. xxii. 19. 2) of things, as the 
sun^ moon, and stars, the whole host of the 
firmament. Acts vii. 42. So Sept. 2 Chron. 
xxxiii. 3, 5. Jer. xix. 13. Zech. i. 5. 

^ToaTLwTf]^, ov, 6, (cTpaTta,) a 
soldier, used only of common soldiers, Matt, 
viii. 9. Lu. vii. 8, al. and oft. in Class. : 
in N. T. only fig. of a Christian teacher, 
1 Tim. ii. 3, /caXos o-T-p. 'I. Xp., yet 
with allusion, I apprehend, to the Christian 
warfare generally. 

STpaToXoy £0), f, 770-0), {oTTpaToXo- 
yos, fr.o-TpaTos, Xtyco,) to collect an army, 
to levy, enlist ; part. 6 <rTpaToXoynoa^, 
one who ?iolds a levy, — commander, 
general, 2 Tim. ii. 4. Plut. C. Mar. 9. 
Diod. Sic. xviii. 12. 

'Et paTOTT&ddpxv^-, ov, 6, {orTpaTO- 
TTiCov and apx^O prefect of the camp, an 
ofificer to whose charge Paul was com- 
mitted at Rome, Acts xxviii. 16.' Many 
understand here the prcefectus prcetorio 
(comp. Phil. i. 13), or commander of the 
emperor's body-guards, as having the 
general charge of all prisoners sent to 
Rome ; but this is perhaps too broad an 
inference from the single known instance, 
where the younger Agrippa was once im- 
prisoned by this oflflcer at the express com- 



mand of the emperor Tiberius; see Jos, 
Ant. xviii. 6, 6, compared with 10. 

Srp aroTTfi^ 01/, ou, to, (o-Tparos, 
iridov,) prop. * encamping-ground of an 
army,' but gener. a camp, encampment, 
and sometimes by meton. an army so en- 
camped, as in Thucvd. iv. 94. Hdot. i. 76; 
and so in N. T. Lu! xxi. 20. 

^T pi^Xoio, f. (jDcroi, {aTpt^Xt], a 
windlass, fr. pr, aTpefSXo^, <rTpi<pio,) to 
roll or ivind on a windlass, Hdot. vii. 36 ; 
to ivrench, to turn awry, Hdot. iii. 129, 

(TTpE^XoVVTE^ TOV TToSu, lu N. T. fig. 

to widest, twist, pervert, as said of the sense 
of a writing, trans. 2 Pet. iii. 16, a arTpe- 
(SXovartv. So we say, to wrest words against 
their natural meaning ; also to torture 
them, to extort from them a sense not 
intended ; which exactly answers to what 
the Apostle meant; for crTps^Xoco almost 
always signifies to put to the torture, in 
order to extort confession. Comp. Plut, x. 

414, <TTpi.^X(X)<TL9 (ppovLfxr], 

"ETpicpco, f. li/o), (TptTTw,) to turn, turn 
about, trans, mid. <TTpi<po/ixaL, and aor. 2 
pass, £(TTpd(pr}v as mid. to turn oneself, to 
turnabout, intrans. 1) prop. Act. withacc. 
and dat. of pers. toivards whom. Matt. v. 
39, a-Tplxj/ov avTco Kai Ttju dXXtjif : mid. 
part, absol. a-TpacpEh, a-TpacpevTe^, Matt, 
vii. 6. xvi. 23, 6 6i a-Tpacpeh eItte, al. 
saepe. Also mid. with eh TLva, Acts xiii. 
46, aTpE(p6jULE^a Eh TO. &dv}]. Foil, by 
£i§ with acc. of place, Acts vii. 39, ctt. Eh 
Aty. And so John xx. 14, Eo-Tpdcpr] Eh 
TO. oTTLcru). Sept. Ps. cxiv. 3, 5. Eh to. 
Se^lu, Xen. Eq, vii. 12. 2) FIG. trans, to 
turn into any thing, i. e. to conveH, change, 
e. g. act. with Eh, Rev. xi. 6, to. vSutu 
eh alfxa. Sept. Ps. cxiv. 8. Jer. xxxi. 13. 
Ex. vii. 15. Xen. Hist. iv. 3, 5 ; mid. of 
persons, to turn in mind, to be converted, to 
become as it were another man, Matt, 
xviii. 3, kdv fxri aTpaipfjTS kol yiviqadE 
<j3<i TO. iraLBia, Comp. Sept. <jTpa(^ri(rri 
Eh dvhpa dXXov, 1 Sam. x. 6. Once act. 
a-Tp£<p(jo, intrans. or with lavTov impl. to 
turn oneself, to turn, change one's mind 
and conduct, Acts vii. 42, 'icrTpExpev b 
Ofo's. 

^T py]v idu), f. 6.(7(1), (fr. aTprjvi]^, 
which significB prop, stif, fig. stif-necJced, 
arrogant, insolent,) to revel, to riot, live 
luxuriously, (equiv. to Tpv(p(xco and u/Spt- 
^00, as implying both luxury and inso' 
lence ; prop, said of a pampered steed, 
who, stiff-necked and unruly, ruTis riot, 
uncontrolled ; see Hom. II. vi. 506,) 
intrans. Rev. xviii. 7, 9. The word is 
not, as Commentators and Lexicographers 
represent it, confined to the later writers ; 
being found in Stiphilus ap. Athen. p. 
100. Diphilus ap. Bekker Anecd. p. 113. 
Antiphanes (b. c. 408) ap. Athen. p. 127, 



2TP 



410 



s Yr 



D. ccTriXavcra TroXXtoi/ /cat KaXwv sdEor- 
fidrcou. 'JSto-TprivLcoi/ ttous, &c. Lycoph. 
Chalc. ap. Atheri. p. 420, B. ufxlv crprj- 
i/tw, ' I run riot upon you.' 

Srp^l^OS, £09 OU5, TO, (oTTptji/r/s, 

vehement, rude, Apoll. Rli. ii. 323,) prop. 
tudemss^ insolence^ pride, Sept. 2 Kings 
xix. 28; and hence revel, riot, luxury. 
Rev. xviii. 3, i/c -rris ^ui/a/xews tov a-Tp^- 
i/ous auTTjs ETrXovTTjcrav, i. e. ' from the 
abundance of her luxury and proud volup- 
tuousness.' Anthol. Gr. iii. p. 128. No. 
64. 

^Tpovd Lov, ou, TO, (dimin. fr. crTpov- 
6os,) any small bird, espec. a sparrow. 
Matt. X.29, 31. Lu. xii. 6, 7. Sept. and 
sometimes in Class. 

"ETpiovvvcD or uiVvvfXL, f, crTptacro), 
(metath. for crropivvvfjiL,) to strew, to 
spread, trans. Matt. xxi. 8, ecrTpcoarav 
kavTvov TO. IfxanrLa kv Ty odco k.t.X. : on 
which custom see my note. Sept. and 
Class. Spec, of a bed or couch, Acts ix. 34, 
(TTpaxTou creavTM, i. e. Kpct(3^aTov, kXl- 
vrjv, comp. ver, 33. Comp. Sept. Job xvii. 
13. Ez. xxviii. 7. (Theocr. Id. xxi. 7, 
Artemid. ii. 57 or 62, aTpayvvOovara kXi- 
vas.) Pass, of a supper-chauiber spread, 
i. e. furnished, with couches, triclinia, 
around the table, comp. in ' AvaKELfxai 3. 
Mk. xiv. 15, & Lu. xxii. 12, avdyaLov 
fiiya kcrrpoifxivov. Sept. Ez. xxiii. 41. 
Athen. p. 138. Xen. Cyr. viii. 2, 6, 6 
auTos KXivr]v orTpcovvvGrL, TpdiraZav Koa- 

STuyr^Tos, t;, 6v, adj. (crTvyio), to 
hate,) hateful, ' deserving of hatred,' e. g. 
to God and to good men, Tit. iii. 3. So 
Philo (cited by Wetstein) has (TTvynrov 
Kal ^eo/uLKTriTdv Trpdy/j-a, And corre- 
sponding to this is the term at Rom. i. 30, 
^EoarTvysi^. 

^Tvyvd'^oo, f. daru), {crTvyvo^, for 
(TTvyLvo^, thick, as said of a cloudy sky. 
So Wisd. xvii. 5, i/uj orTvyvij. The word 
being derived from arTvyo9, originally = 
cTTu^os, thick ; whence crnrucfjo}, to stuff 
up, fr. crnrvu), to stuff,) 1 ) prop, to be thick, 
and, as applied to the sky when thick with 
clouds, tc lower, or be lowering, intrans. 
Matt. xvi. 3, 'TTuppd'^EL yap GTvyvdX^Mv 
6 ovpav6<5. 2) in a fig. sense, as applied 
to the mind (with reference to the effect 
of sorrow on the countenance), 'to be of 
lowering or sorrowful countenance,' Mk. 
X. 22, 6 ^£ GTvyvdcra's kirl tw Xoyio (lit. 
'lowering at what was said') a7r?]X0£ 
XvTTovfXEuo^. So Eustath. de Ismena iv. 

p. 98, (TVVE\EL Tr]V 6(ppVV, (TTVyvd'^El TO 

irpoawTToi/, *■ his countenance lowers.' 
And so Addison, as cited in Johnson's 
Diet, has the expression ' a lowering coun- 
tenance,' for a gloomy and sometimes for 



a discontented one, which would well 
apply here. 

2tuA.o9, ov, 6, (kindr. with ar^Xt},) 
prop, a column, pillar. Rev. x. 1, 
(TTvXoL TTvpo?. Sept. and Class. Fig. of 
any firm support ; e. g. persons of autho- 
rity and influence in the Church, Gal. ii. 
9, OL SoKovvTE^ CTTvXoL elvai, SC. kv Ty 
kKKXr](yia, ' who were justly reputed to 
be,' & Rev. iii. 12. Also said of the Church 
Universal, 1 Tim. iii. 15, crrvXo^ Kal 
k^paiuofxa Trj^ dXrjdEias, 'the pillar and 
ground of the truth,' namely, as sustaining 
and bearing up, by a faithful profession 
and maintenance thereof, the true religion 
of God. Ecclus. XXX vi. 24. Eurip. Iph. 
Aul. 57, (TTuXoL yap olkvov eIctI 7raT^£9 
dparEV££. 

2 T to t /CO 5, f}, 6v, adj. Stoic, and ot 
STojt/coi, the Stoics, a sect of philosophers 
founded by Zeno, and so called from the 
cToa, portico, where he taught. Acts xvii, 
18, where see my note. 

2u, gen. a-ov, thou, pers. pron. of the 
second pers. plur. u/ifts, ye. I. nom. <rv, 
pi. vfXEL^, usually omitted, except where a 
certain emphasis is required. In N. T. 
inserted, 1 ) with emphasis ; before a voc. 
Matt. ii. 6. 2 Tim. ii. 1 ; or in distribu- 
tion. Jam. ii. 3; with an adjunct between 
it and the verb, John iv. 9 ; also in inter- 
rogations. Matt, xxvii. 11. Lu. xxiv. 18; 
and so at the end of a clause, John i. 21 . 
viii. 48 ; in answers. Matt. xxvi. 25. Mk. 
XV. 2 ; in antitheses. Matt. iii. 14. Lu. ix. 
60 : so Kal (TV, Kal u/x£t§, x. 37. Matt, 
vii. 12. 2) without special emphasis, crv, 
John xxi. 15 — 17. u/xeIs, Matt, xxviii. 5. 
— II. gen. (TOV, vfxwv, are often used in- 
stead of the corresponding possessive <ros, 
vixiTEpo<s : e. g. (tov. Matt. i. 22. iv. 6. 
vfxwv, V. 10. Mk. ii. 8 : gener. (tov. Matt, 
ii. 6. iii. 14; vfxCov, v. 12. Lu. xi. 5; for 
ii. 35, /cat (TOV dk avTr}?, see (TEavTov.-^ 
III. dat. (TOL, vfjiiv, gener. Matt. iv. 9. vii. 
7 ; dat. commodi, xxi. 5. 2 Cor. v. 13 ; 
incomm. xii. 20 ; for the phrase tl kfxoi 
Kal (TOL ; see kyw. 

"^vyy EVEia, a5, tj, (cri/yysi/Tjs,) prop. 
Icindred, relationship : in N. T. meton. 
kindred, i. e. kinsmen, relatives, Lu. i. 61, 
ovSel? k(TTLV kv Ty (Tvyy. crov. A^'ts vii. 
3, 14. Sept., Jos', and occasionally in 
Class., as Thuc. iii. 65. 

^vyyEvy^, £09 ous, 6, 17, adj. {(tvv & 
yivos, yivofxaL,) akin, related; sthst. a 
kinsman, relative, Mk. vi. 4. Lu. i. 36, 58. 
ii. 44, al. Sept. Lev. xviii. 14. xxv. 45. 
Hdian. iv. 14, 14. Xen. H. G. i, 7, 8. In 
a wider sense, one of the sam£ nation, a 
fellow-countryman; said of the Jews as 
being all descended from a common ances- 
tor, Rom. ix. 3, Tcov crvyyEVMV jnov Kara 
(rdpKa. xvi. 7, 11, 21. 



S YF 



411 



know and think with, to accord, concede,) 
permission^ 1 Cor. vii. 6, tovto di Xtyw 
KUTa (Tvyyvuifx^Vn, ou kuto. eiriTayiji/^ 
' this I say by way of permission," i. e. as 
speaking of what is allowable or expedi- 
ent, not what is enjoined to be done ; of 
"what ma?/ be done, not what imtst be done. 
Thnc. V. 88. Xen. Ath. ii. 20. 

SuyKrat^tjftai, (<rui/, KuQ^fiai^) to sit 
doum with., to sit icitli., foil, by /xtxa with 
gen. Mk. xiv. 54 ; by dat. Acts xxvi. 30. 
Sept. and Class. 

Si/yAcaGt^w, f. to-w, (<rui/, K:a0/g<«,) 
trans, to cause to sit down icith^ to seat 
with ; intrans. to sit down with., to sit ivith. 
1 ) trans, with kv and dat. of place, Eph. 
ii. 6, KoX c>vvr\yf.ipz Koi o-vvEKadLorEV 
kv n-ol's kirovpavLOL^. 2) intrans. of seve- 
ral, to sit down together.^ Lu. xxii. 55. Sept. 
and Class. 

Suy/caKTOTraOtaj, f. r7<rw, ((ri»i/, Ka- 
Koiradio),) to suffer evil tvith any one, to 
endure affliction with ; with dat. of thing 
in respect to which or for which, 2 Tim. i. 
8, (TvyKaKOTrddricrov [iinol] tw suayye- 

^vyKaKovxiw^ f. tjo-oj, (o-uv, kukov- 
X£w,) only in pass, to be maltreated or 
afflicted icith any one, to suffer affliction 
with ; foil, by dat. of pers. Heh. xi. 25, 
cruy/caKoi/XEtaOat tw \aw tov 0£Ou. 

2uyK:aX£a), f. forw, (cui/, /caXta),) 
call together.^ convoke., trans. Mk. xv. 16, 
crvyKoXovcnv bXrjv T7}V Girzlpav. Acts v. 
21 ; mid. prop, to call together to oneself., 
Lu. ix. 1, <rvyKaXE(Ta.ixEVO^ toi/s SwdsKa. 
xxiii. 13. Acts x. 24, al. and later Class, 
e. gr. Aristaen. i. 5, arvvEKaXelTO to us 
<Pl\ou9. Sept. 

2 uyKraA-UTTTO), f. ^ft), (crui/, koXvtt- 
Tw,) prop, to cover together or up., cover 
wholly, trans. Sept. oft. Jos. Ant. ix. 10, 
2. Xen. Cyr. viii. 7, 28. In N. T. fig. to 
hide ivholly^ to entirely conceal., Lu. xii. 2, 
ovokv crvyKeKCLK-Vfifxivov karTLv. Ecclus. 
xx\T.. 8. Plut. Alex. M. 31. Eurip. Phcen. 
886. 

Suy/Ca^TTTW, f. l|Att>, (CUI/, /CajUTTTO),) 

prop, to bend together., e. g. tou vvotov 
Ttz/os, Ho bow dovi'n wholly,' Rom. xi. 10, 
i. e. fig. to oppress., afflict. Sept. 2 Kings 
iv. 35. Xen. Eq. xii. 5. 

2uy/caTa/5aii/a), f. (iricrojULaL., (crui/, 
KaTa^aivu),) to go down with any one, sc. 
from a higher to a lower place, as from 
Jerusalem to Csesarea, intrans. Acts xxv. 
5, crvyKaTa(3dvTE9 SC. k/uiOL. Sept. Ps. 
xlix. 18. Wisd. X. 14. Pol. i. 39, 12. 
Diod. Sic. xi. 18. 

2vy/<:aTa0£(rt9, £ws, 17, {orvyKaTa- 
Tt0>]jui,) fompositio, agreement 2 Cor. vi. 



16, Tts crvyKaTo.dEcn's vaui Qeou fiETu 
eISmXwv ; meaning, ' what has a temple of 
God to do with idols .5^' Pol. iv. 17, 8. 
Dion. Hal. Ant. viii. 79. Plut. M. Anto- 
nin. 51, but only in the sense assent. 

^vy KaTai-id e/iiai, as mid. with a 
depon. sense, 1) to lay down any thing 
with another; 2) with \l/Ti<pov express- 
ed, to give one's vote with another ; 3) 
with xlfijcpov implied^ (as it is in N. T. 
and most freq. elsewh.) fig. to agree tvith 
any person, (as Plato, Gorg. p. 501. 
Hist. Sus. 20.) and, when foil, by a dat. of 
thing (as yvcoixy or jSouXjy), to assent to any 
measure, Lu. xxiii. 51, 7]v o-vyKaTaTEdst- 
jULti/o^ ^ovXrj /cat Ttj Trpd^EL avTwv. 
In this last sense the word is used also in 
Class, as Pol. iii. 98, 11, et ssepiss. Jos. 
Ant. XX. 1, 2, <rvyKaTEdtfx'i]v Ty yvoofxri 

^vy KaTa\lfr](}) I'^o)., f. tea), prop, 'to 
choose by common suff'rages,"' and hence, 
' to number with or unto,' equiv. to a-uy- 
KaTapLdpLEXv, Acts i. 26, <rvyKaTE\p^r}(pL- 
a-dtf fxETO. Twv EvSeKa d'Tro(TT6Xu)v. As 
illustrative of this custom of deciding 
doubtful matters by casting lots, see the 
Classical citations adduced in my Recens. 
Synop. and compare Levit. xvi. 8. Num. 
xxvi. 55. 

^vy KEpdvvv fXL., f. pdcrui., prop, to 
mix together., make intermingle., as liquids, 
(2 Mace. XV. 39, oli/os vdaTi crvyKEpacr- 
0£i§,) or compound., as drugs are com-^ 
pounded by the chemist : also, to make 
solid substances coalesce. Similarly Plut. 
viii. 634, ofxav lULETaXXiKct kol {3oTavLKd 
Koi ^r)pLa £ts to auTO crvyKEpavvvvra^. 
Compare Dan. ii. 43. Also, by implica- 
tion, so to conjoin various substances, 
that they may all perfectly coalesce; in 
which we have an implied notion of at- 
tempering by the commixture, so that the 
various parts of the compound, being mix- 
ed in just proportion, may qualify each 
other. So 1 Corinthians xii. 24, 6 Geos 
avvEKEpaoTE TO acofia., &c. i. e. ' hath 
attempered,' meaning, 'so adjusted the re- 
spective offices and benefits of the several 
members which form the body, as to form 
one harmonious w^hole.' Similarly in 
Thuc. vi. 18, /cat vopLicraTE — ojULou to t£ 
(pavXov /cat to fxicrov /cat to Trai/u uKpi- 
^E's., av ^uy /C/t>a0£f, ^aXtcT' dv icryjuEiv. 
At Heb. iv. 2, fxt] (rvyKEKpafxivo^ (sc. o 
Xoyos) T77 TTLorn-EL TOts aKovcracnv., we 
have simply the notion of blemding to- 
gether. Finally, so Menand. ap. Stob. Serm. 
p. 302, T>7f Tou Xoyou fXEv SuvajULLV vOel 
)(f>t](7Ta) crvyKEKpafxtvYiv e^^^elu., ' blended 
with.' 

Suy /cii'£ct), f. riorcD., {a-vv, klveod^) prop, 
and prim, to move with others., trans, but 
more freq. like Latin ' concio,' to cause 
T2 



2Yr 



412 



2 yr 



others to come together^ by, as it \^ere, 
moving their minds; and that both in a 
good sense, Pol. ii. 59, 8, and a bad, (as 
used to denote what we call ' setting people 
together by the ears,') as Acts vi. 12, avv- 
EKLurjcrdv te tov Xadu /cat toi'S Trp. k.t.\. 

'Evy kXelu)^ f. £ tor CO, prop, to shut up^ 
or inclose together^ trans. Often used in 
Sept., Apocr., and Class, of persons shut 
up in prison, or otherwise. In N. T. occ. 
spec, as a piscatory term, Lu. v. 6, gvv- 
iKXsLcrav 7rXrjdo9 ixQ^(J^i^ ttoXu, a use 
this of which no example has yet been 
adduced, not even of the corresponding 
term in Lat. concludo. A Class, writer 
would probably have employed TTEpii^a- 
Xov^ (as Hdot. i. 141, XafSslv d/jL(pL(3Kt^G- 
Tpoy, Kai TTEpL^aXilv TrXrjdo'S 'WoXXdv 
Toju iy^ducov^) or arvviXa(3ou. See cru\- 
Xa/mfSdvu). Also fig. to include together, 
i. e. to make subject, deliver over alike, with 
£t§, Rom. xi. 32, crvviKXELorE yap 6 Geo? 
Tous Trayras €t§ diTELdELav, i. e. 'hath 
permitted them to be subject thereto.' So 
Diod. Sic. xix. 19, we have fig TOLavTr]v 
dfxrix^vLav (TvyKXeLcrd&h 'A. With 
VTrd, Gal. iii. 22, 23, k<ppovpovfxEQa crvy- 
KEKXEL<rfxivoi EL<5 K.T.X. ' lege obstricti 
custodiebamur, asservabamur in by a 
comparison to persons shut up under lock 
and key, in a place from which they can- 
not get out. Comp. Sept. Ps. xxxi. 9, 
& Ixxviii. 50. So Lucian, Tim, 13, kutu- 
KXsLsadaL viro p.o'xXoL? Kai 'Trapdevsv- 
ta-duL utt' aKpi^icri TratSayoDyol?. 

"Sivy kXi] povo fjLO?, ov, 6, {kXtipovo- 
yLt09,) prop, a co-heir, joint-heir, also a 
joint-possessor, co-partner, Rom. viii. 17, 
cruyKX. XpLorrov. Eph. iii. 6. Heb. xi. 9. 

1 Pet. iii. 7. 

"Evy Ko LV oov ito, f. rja-co, [avi/, kolvch- 
vio),) to be partaker with others, to share 
iL'ith others in any thing ; foil, by dat. 
Rev. xviii. 4, p^ (yvyK0Lva)vn(rr]T£ Tals 
ap.apTiaL's avrrj^. Eph. v. 11, p.r} avy- 
kolvcoveTte TOtS tpyoL's TOt? aKapTTOL^ 
Tou (jKOTov. A mode of expression signif. 
(like KOLi>. Tot? tpyots toIs irovrjooL's at 

2 John 11, and kolv. dpapTLai's dXXo- 
^p'laL's at 1 Tim. y. 22,) to partake in evil 
deeds, either by practising or by approving 
and countenancing them. The Class, con- 
struction is a dat. of pers. and gen. of 
thing. At Phil. iv. 14, we have crvyKOL- 
vujurjcravTE£ pov ^XIxI/el, for cruy/c. 
fjLOL rrj^ ^Xiyp^Eix)^, ' communicating [aid] 
to him in his distress.' 

^uyKOLvcovo?, ov, 6, ^, {koivwvo^,) 
a joint-pa7i;aker, co-partner, with gen. 
Rom. xi. 17, crvyK. t^s Pi'J^/s, k.t.X. 
1 Cor. ix. 23. Phil. i. 7 ; eu'. Rev. i. 9. 

2 Ko/x z ^60, f. Lo-co, [a-vv, /co/x/^w,) 
prop, to bring together, to collect, e. gr. 
fruits, Sept. Job v. 26, but spec- used as a 



funereal term, like the Lat. cornponere ; de- 
noting not only the laying out of the body, 
but other preparations for its interment ; 
nay also the funeral rites themselves, as 
Acts viii, 2, avvEKopiKTav tov 2t€- 
<pavov dvdpE£ EvXa(3EL's : a sense rare in 
the Class, writers, but occurring in Soph. 
Aj. 1068, tovSe tov vEKpov ^EpoXv p.rj 

OrvyKOp-iX^ELV. 

'Evy Kpl'vu), f. ivw, (/c/jifo),) prop, 'to 

separate distinct things, and then bring 
them together into one ;' hence, to join 
together, to combine, to compose ; opp. to 
StaKpLVELv, ' to separate between, to de- 
compose.' In later winters and N. T. to 
place together and judge of, i. e. to compare, 
to estimate by comparison, constr. with 
acc. and dat. ; but GVfx^dXXco is the purer 
Greek term. 1) gener. 2 Cor. x. 12, 
orvyKplvaL iavTov? tlctl — (TvyKpivovTE^ 
aavTov<s EavToi^. Pol. vi. 47, 9, avyKpi- 
vELv TLvd TTpos Ttva, aud xii. 10, 1. Mid. 
1 Mace. X. 71, G-vyKOLdcopiEu iauTots, 
' one with another.' 2) 6y iinpl. (since 
comparison and scrutiny are essential to 
explanation, so Pol. vi. 47, 1, (tvvekplvb 
Kai SirjpEifva Ta XEyopEva,) to eaplain, 
interpret, i. e. by comparison of one thing 
with another, 1 Cor. ii. 13, TrvEvpiaTiKni^ 

TTVEVpLUTLKd (TVy Kp'lVOVTE^ . So Sept. 

Gen. xl. 8, 16, 22. xli. 12, 15. Dan. v. 12. 

2uy/cu7rT6t), f. i//^<«, \<t\jv, kuttto),) 
prop, to stoop or how together, as persons 
putting their heads together, Hdot. iii. 82; 
or things inclining towards each other, 
Xen. An. iii. 4, 19. In N. T. to be bowed, 
or to bow oneself, together, as we say, to be 
bent double, intrans. Lu. xiii. 11, riv <ruy- 
KVTTTOVcra Kai p-ij duvapiivr} duaKV\l/ai, 
where we have not simply an act. in a 
pass, sense ; for the word may be taken 
in a neuter sense for <ruyKv<po£ tli/at, 
from which the transition to a pass, one is 
easy. Comp. Sept. Job ix. 27. Ecclus. xii. 
1 1. Themist. Orat. 7 ad Valent. p. 90, ccel 
<jvyKEKV(p(h<s, aEL avvvE(pr]^, icpEXKOpLEVOS 
Tas 6(ppv^. 

^uy Kv p La, as, rj, {avyKvpEO}, to hap- 
pen together, as events, Hdot. viii. 87. 
Pol. v. 18, 6.) lit. 'a happening together,' 

i. e. coincidence, accident, chance, Lu, x. 31, 
KaTa avyKvpiau. This is a very rare 
word, yet it occ. in Hippocr. and Eusta- 
tliius. The Class, gener. use o-vyKvpriaL^ 
or (TvyKvp7]p,a. 

Suyxatp^^, aor. 2. avvexaprju, {avv, 
Xaipco,) to rejoice with any one, to sym- 
pathize in his joy, with dat. depending on 
crvv in compos. Prop, of persons, Phil. 

ii. 17, <Tuyx«i'pw irdarLu vplv. ver. 18. 
Lu. i. 58. XV. 6, 9. Sept. Gen. xxi. 6, & 
Class. Fig. of THINGS, 1 Cor. xii. 26, Ta 
P-eXti, espec. in personifications, as 1 Cor. 
xiii. 6, ov X"^V^^ W dydirrj) iiri Ty 



2 Yr 



413 



SYK 



iSiKla^ (TvyyaipiL dk tj; a\7;6eta, ' re- 
joices not over any [reported] iniquity, but 
in true virtue.' 

'Evyx^<^', ix^^-)) ^ SuyxJ^J^w, impf. 
cvvExeov and avvtxvvov^ pass. perf. avy- 
Kexv/uLai^ aor. 1. pass, a-vutx^'^^l^-t prop, to 
pourtupeihcr, and fig. to coifound confuse ; 
in N. T. 1) of an assembly or multitude, 
to throiv into confusion^ excite^ put in up- 
7'oar, ^vith ace. Acts xxi. 27, avvixeou 

TTUl'Ta TOU OX^OU^ foV (XVVtKLVOVV. So 

in Demosth.,^ cited in Sclileus. Lex., we 
have crvyx^^ o\i]v ti]v TroXiTtLau^ and 
in Hdot. vii. 136, rj dyytXia cxwix^^ 
avrov^. Pass. Acts xix. 32, i) kuKkridia 
<rvyKsx^l^^'^V- xxi. 31. Luc. Bis accus. 
17, Kai ^vyx^ii^ Vfxcou iTrEipaTo Ti/f 
^vvovcriav (couventum), EirLTapd^u^ Trj 
^oy^ et al. 2) of the mind, to confound^ 
to perplex^ e. gr. a person in disputation, 
with acc. Acts ix. 22. Of persons in 
amazement or consternation. Acts ii. 6, 
crvvriXQe to ttX^J^o?, Kal a-vv^X'^^V- 
1 Mace. iv. 27. Arr. Epict. iii. 22, 25. 
Jos. Ant. xii. 7, 5, etal. Diod. Sic. iv. 62, 
avvEXfJ^V T^v xj/vxvU' So Hom. II. ix. 
608. xiii. 808, arvyx^'ii^ ^V[i6v. 

^vyxpo-ofxai^ fut. riorofxai^ depon. 
mid. properly 'to use any thing in com- 
mon with another,'' (implying more or less 
of society^) in N. T. to have familiar inter- 
course and society icith any one, John iv. 9, 
Qv yap (TvyxpfJ^vrai 'lovbaloL 'Eafxa- 
pELTUL's^ for that such intercourse, and not 
the mere intercourse of commerce^ is meant, 
appears from the fact, that the intercourse 
of buying and selling was still maintained. 
Arr. Peiipl. mar. Eryth. p. 159, avv&xp^- 
cravTo 6s. avTy (t?} vncrvo) Kal diro Mou- 

^a5 Tti/fcS. 

^vyX^^^-> ^uyx^<*>' 

^uyxvoTL^^ €605, 1?, ((Tuyx^^J prop, a 
mingling together^ as of liquids, and me- 
taph. confusion^ tumult^ disturbance^ Acts 
xix. 29, and Class. 

Sv^ao), f. ^cra), {^avv^\d(jd^to live ivitli 
any one, foil, by dat. expr. or impl. (see 
in 2vyxat/o^i) 1) naturally, 2 Cor. vii. 3, 
kv Tais Kapdiai^ -nfJLoou eaTE f t§ to crvv- 
airodaviiv Kal (Tv'^yv^ i. e. vpuv^ and oft. 
in Class. 2) fig. and spiritualJv, of eternal 
life with Christ, Rom. vi. 8. 2 Tim. ii. 11. 

^vX^ivyvv fXL^ f. Eu^o), aor. 1. <jvv- 
t^EuJa, {X,Evyvvfxi^) to yolie together^ prop, 
animals, Sept. Ez. i. 11. Xen. Cyr. ii. 2, 
26. In N. T. fig. of the marriage union, 
to join together^ unite^ husband and wife. 
Matt. xix. 6. Mk. x. 9. Jos. and Class. 

2i»^tjT£w, f. ^co), (<ruy, ^tjTEw,) prop. 
to use mutvxil inquiry and discussion ; in 
N. T. fig. to inquire of one another^ to 
question with^ or one with another, e. gr. 
1) as said of several, absol. Mk. ix. 10, 



0'l'^tJT0UI/T£9, Tl £<TTt TO Ik VEKpUiU dva- 

(TTTjvat : foil, by Trpos eauTous, Mk. i.27. 
Lu. xxii. 23. 2) gener. to question^ reason, 
dispute with any one, absol. Mk. xii. 28, 
ciKovaa^ avTMV (yvX^r]TOvvTUiv : with dat. 
Acts vi. 9 : with irpd's. Acts ix. 29, aw 
f^rjTEi Trpo? Tous 'EAX?ji'to-T«§ : with the 
idea of cavil, foil, by dat. Mk. viii. 11, 
"ip^auro or. aurco^ ' to enter into argu- 
ment with him.' ix. 14 : by tt/oos, ver. 16. 

S u^77T77(rt5, £60 9 , 77, (o-u^rjTfcO),) 'mu- 
tual discussion, or controversy,' on any 
question, Acts xv. 2, 7. xxviii. 29. Philo, 

p-ii. 

2u57JT7]T^S, OU, O, (0'ut7jT£C0,) CC 

questioner^ reasoner^ disputant^ a sophist, 
1 Cor. i. 20, tn;^7jT7jT77S tou aicovo^ tou- 
Tou, ' the subtile disputer of this world,' 
i. e. the sophist, who rests on mere human 
wisdom only, and what concerns this 
world only, without any serious thought 
of another. 

SuJ^yos, OU, o, 77, adj. {(rv'^svyvvjuLi^) 
yoked together^ and subst. a yoke-fellow ; 
in N. T. fig. a fellow-labourer^ colleague^ 
Phil. iv. 3, CTu^uyE yy77<Tt€, meaning, the 
bishop, or principal presbyter, of Philippi, 
who was, in some sense, Paul's colleague ; 
and that such is the sense tlicre, appears 
from the term yi;77<rt609, Phil. ii. 20. So 
Aristoph. Plut. 945, we have idv dk avX^v- 
yov Xd(3u} TLvd. See also Eurip. Iph. T. 
251, w^here Orestes is styled by Pylades, 
o-u^uyos. It was often used to denote 
comrade. 

2i;^a)07rot£co, f. rfo-o), (cui/, ^wottoi- 
€60,) lit. and prop, to make alive with any 
one; in N. T. to quicken icith., fig. into 
spiritual life ivith Christ, as risen from the 
dead ; foil, by dat. tw Xp. Eph. ii. 5 ; by 
Gvv repeated. Col. ii. 13. 

^vKafXLvo?, OU, ?7, a sycamine-tree, 
called also the sycomore, auK6iuiopo9, (being 
the ficzis sycomorus of Linnaeus ; a tree 
found in Egypt and Palestine, and so 
called as resembling the fig-tree^ avKy, in 
its fruit, and the mulberry, fiopia^ in its 
leaf,) Lu. xvii. 6. Sept. and Class. 

Su/CEtt, contr. 'EvKrj, gen. ta^ 77s, 77, 
{avKov,) a fig-tree, Matt. xxi. 19, Mk. xi. 
13, & oft. Sept. and Class. 

HvKO/jLopia, as, 77, {(tvkov, fxopia,) 
equiv. to 77 avKOfxopo^, a sycomo re-tree, 
prop. ' the fig-mulberry,' Lu. xix. 4, a tree 
frequent in Egypt and Palestine, resem- 
bling the mulberry-tree in its leaves, with 
fruit similar in appearance to the fig, but 
indigestible. 

2u/coi/, OU, TO, a fig, Matt. vii. 16, et 
al. Sept. and Class. 

"Ev KG (p avT t. (j}^ f. ?7C7ft), {crvK0<pdyTri9, 
fr. auKov^ (paivui,) prop, to be a crvKocpdv- 
T7J9, 'a fig- informer,' one who informed 
T 3 



S Y A 



414 



2YM 



against persons who exported figs from 
Athens contrary to law. But the law had 
become obsolete, and a mere dead-letter, 
though used by malicious or base persons 
for interested purposes, hence the term 
came to mean geuer. to inform against^ 
accuse falsely^ calumniate^ with acc. Jos. 
Ant. X. 7, 3. ^1. V. H. ii. 13. Hdian. ii. 

14, 7. Xen. Mem. ii. 9, 5. Aristoph. Ach. 
518. Av. 1431. In N. T. by impl. to 
ejctort money by false accusations, espec. 
under pretence of law, Lu. iii. 14. tlvos 
Ti, xix. 8. So Sept. Job xxxv. 9. Ps. 
cxix. 122. Prov. xxii. 16. 

SuXaytoytco, f. ^crw, (cuXoy, prey, 
ay 60,) to lead off as jprey^ carry off as 
booty ^ e. gr. captives, Heliodor. x. p. 512. 
Arist^n. ii. Ep. 22. In N. T. fig. of false 
teachers. Col. ii. 8, 6 avXaywycov, i. e. 
* one who leads off captive, makes spoil of 
your Christian liberty.' 

SuXao), f. 770-0), prop, to spoil, plunder, 
both as said of things, to carry off as prey, 
ajid of persons, as Xen. Hier. iv. 11. 
Hdian. vii. 7, 7, and so in N. T. by 
hyperb. 2 Cor. xi. 8, aWa^ i/c/cXtjo-i'as 
k(Tv\r](Ta, \a(3(j)i/ o\|ra)yioi/, meaning, 'that 
by taking nothing of the}n, he, as it were, 
spoiled other churches, by being compelled 
to receive money from them.' 

"EvWaXico, f. v<T(jo, (cuy, \a\ia),) to 
speak or talk ivith, confer ivith, foil, by 
dat. Mk. ix. 4. Lu. ix. 30 : by fiETo. 
Tti/o9, Matt. xvii. 3. Acts xxv. 12 : by 
■TT^o? dXX.7jX.ous, Lu. iv. 36. Sept. and 
Class. 

'^vWa/UL^dvo), f. X-nxp-QjUiaL, {(xvi/, 
Xafx^avo),) to take together, prop, to in- 
close in the hands ; fig. of things, to com- 
prehend, comprise ; also of persons, to take 
or bri?ig together, collect, as scattered 
troops. In N. T. I.=Lat. comprehendere, 
as spoken of persons, to take or seize by 
clasping or grasping, and holding fast with 
the hands clenched together; 1) prop, of 
persons seized as criminals, to apprehend, 
arrest, with acc. Matt. xxvi. 55. Mk. xiv. 
48. Lu. xxii. 54, and oft. Sept. and Class. 
So, in hunting or fishing, to take, catch, 
aypav, Lu. v. 9 ; comp. ver. 5, where it 
is Xafx^avui. Eurip. Orest. 1339, Pors. 
ov-xj- cTvXXri'^&ad' aypav ; 2) fig. of 
females, to conceive, absol. Lu. i. 24, with 
acc. VLOv, ver. 36. kv yacrrpl, ver. 31. iv 
KOLXia, ii. 21. Sept. Gen. iv. 1, oft. 
Hippocr. Aphor.v.46, ku yaa-Tpi. Metaph. 
of irregular desire as exciting to sin, Ja. i. 

15. Comp. Ps. vii. 15. — II. to take hold 
of with another, — to help, usually and in 
N. T. mid. with dat. Lu. v. 7, tXGoyras 
crvXXa^ElardaL avToU, a term appropriate 
to hunting and fishing, Phil. iv. 3. Sept. 
Gen. XXX. 7. and oft. in Class. 



SuXXsyo), f. fto, {arvv, Xiytv,) prop. 

to lay together, i. e. to gather-, collect, trans, 
as fruits and grain. Matt. vii. 16, aTro 
aKavQcov (TTa(pvXi]v, ri airo Tpi^oXtov 
crvKa. Lu. vi. 44, et saepe al, Sept. and 
Class. Hdot. i. 68. 

SuXXoyigto, f. icro), to bring mat&< 
rials together for any purpose, to collect, 
Dio Chrys. Or. 75, but gener. in mid. 
cruXXoyi'^o/uat, to reckon for and reason 
with oneself, by bringing together all the 
materials for judgment, to reason, convince, 
deliberate, and sometimes by impl. to con- 
clude by ratiocination. In N. T. Lu. xx. 
5, cvviXoyicravTO irpo's iavTov^. So 
Pint. Pomp. TTpos kavTou cuXXoyi^o/xc- 
vos, et al. and oft. in Polyb. 

"^vXXvTT i(o, f, vau), {arvVjXvjriu},) io 
grieve or afflict with another, pass, to be 
grieved or afflicted with a person. In N. T. 
pass, to be grieved withal, Mk. iii. 5, crvX- 
XvirovjULeuo^ Ittl ircopcocrEL t^s Kup- 

(x^aivui, f. ^ri<yofxaL, aor. 2. crvv" 
i^r]v, (crvv, ^ahco,) prop, to go with the 
feet close together, opp. to SLa^aLvoo, Xen. 
Eq. i. 14, but gener. to go with another, in 
a variety of senses, mostly figurative. In 
N. T. only of things, e.g. events, to come 
together in time, to happen together, to fall 
out, to come to pass ; with dat, of pers, io 
whom, Mk. x. 32, n-a fxiXXovTa avTtp 
a-vfjifiaLvELv. Acts iii. 10. xx. 19, al. 
Part, absol. to. crvfx^i^t]K6ra, events, Lu. 
xxiv. 14. Sept. and Class. Impers. with 
infin. of the principal verb, the infin. 
clause being strictly the subject, Acts 
xxi. 35, (Tvvi^i] ^aaTCL^EcrOat avTOi/, = 
' he was borne,' and so oft. in Class. 

Su/xjSdXXu), f. ^aXu>, {orvv, /SdXXto,) 
prop, of things, to throw, cast, put together; 
espec. words or thoughts, Eur. Iph. A. 
831. Xen. Mem. ii. 2, 21 ; of persons, io 
send or bri7ig together, e. gr. in strife, Lat. 
committere, to set them together, as oft. in 
Class. In N. T. it is used, I. of things, 
to throiv or put together, prop, with acc. 
X6yov9 impl. like Lat. conferre, i. e. * ser- 
mones,' intrans. 1 ) gener. to discourse 
with, dispute ivith, with dat. Acts xvii. 18, 
TLVE's dk TU)V (pLXoa6(p(jt)V crvvE^aXXou 
avTco. Jos. Ant. i. 12, 3, cvufiaXovaa 
TTOLixicn, & oft. in lat. Class. 2j to consult 
together. Acts iv. 15, avvi^aXov irpo^ 
aXXr}Xov<s, scil. ^ovXEVfxaTa. Fully Eu- 
rip. Phoen. 700, crvix^. ^ouXEV/uLaTa. 3) 
Lu. ii. 19, oru/ui^dXXELV iv nry Kapdia, 
scil. pnfxaTa, to resolve, ponder in mind, 
namely, in order to conjecture what is 
meant by anything. So in Hom. we have 
av 6' EVL (ppEori (SoXXeo arrjcn. Others, not 
ill, explain ' to conjecture,' ' endeavour to 
understand by conjecture ;' namely, as we 
say, ' by putting together' various things : in 



SYM 



415 



SYM 



which sense the term is used particularly 
of oracles, dreams, or any such things ; of 
which the meaning is not obvious, but is 
attained by reflection and a comparison of 
circumstances ; as Philostr. Yit. Apoll. iv. 
43, ^v/uLfSaXeTu to tipi]fxtvov. Arr. Exp. 
Alex. ii. 3, 9, to fxavTElov. 4) mid. prop. 
' to cast, throw of one's own with otliers,' 
= to confer benefit., to contribute^ to help^ 
"With dat. Acts xviii. 27, a-vve(Su\£To ttoXv 
Toi^ TTETTicTTEVKocrL^ i. 6. 'contHbuted to 
the spiritual good of;' and so in Sept. and 
oft. in Class, e. gr. Arr. Epict. iii. 22, 
TrXeiova Ty KOLvwvia (xvvs(3aXETo. — II. 
of PERSONS, intrans. or with eavTou impl. 
to encounter, to meet tvith, with dat. 1) 
in a hostile sense, ets ttoXsiulov, Lu. xiv. 
31, and oft. in Class. 2) gener. to meet 
zciih, Acts XX. 14, a-vvi^aXev Vfxiv 
Tvv "Aacrov, and Class. 

Su/u/SaciXeuo), f. euaru), (o-i/i;, ^acri- 
Xevo),) to reign with any one, prop. Lucian 
D. Deor. xvi. 2. Pol. xxx. 2, 4. In N. T. 
fig. comp. 1 Cor. iv. 8. 2 Tim. ii. 12, 
where the term denotes height of felicity, 
with an adjunct notion of exalted honour. 
So Epict., Enchir. c. xxi. thus addresses 
the patiently suffering virtuous man : Ou 
fioifoi/ o-u/x7roTt;9 twv ^ewv £0'i7, aXXd 
Kai avvdpyoDv, 

2ujuj8i/3a^a), f. acrw, (o-ui;, /3i|3d^ct),) 
to make corne togetJier, to bring together, 
e. gr. 1) to Join together, unite, fig. said of 
Christians as parts of Christ's mystical 
body, the Church, pass. Eph. iv. 16, ou 
irdv TO arw/iia — crvfxfiL^aX^ofiEvov. Col. ii. 
19, in which passages we have a metaphor 
taken from joiners' work, in which the 
pieces of wood are so fitted and joined 
together by straight lines, squares, mitres, 
&c. that they all seem one entire piece. 
So Gregor. contr. Julian, i. dXXd aXXoL^ 
crvfx^L^uX,<i}v Kai crvvapfxoX^Mv, Kai £ts eu 
ayoov TO. tou avTov 7ri/£UjuaT05. In Col. 
ii. 2, a-vfx(3. kv dyuTrri, the term has refer- 
ence to the closing up of schism by bring- 
ing together the discordant parties who 
make the schism ; another example of 
which sense occ. in Damasc. ap. Steph. 
Thes. <ruvE(3L(3a(re rravra. 2) to mentally 
put together, and hence prsegn. to gather, 
infer, conclude, with ort, Acts xvi. 10 : also, 
to prove, demonstrate, namely, by showing 
the connexion and tracing the chain of 
facts or reasoning, with oTt, Acts ix. 22, 

C-VfX^L^aX^WV OTt OUTOS ECTTLV 6 XpitTTOS. 

Again, from the sense to prove or show 
what a thing is, arises that, also found 
in N. T. to teach or instruct others therein ; 
a use of the word derived from the Sept. 
which thus expresses the Hebrew S^^TH^ 
to make to know, I Cor. ii. 16. Sept. Ps. 
xxxii. 8. 

fxfBovXEva), f. £U(rft>, (ctum, ^ov- 



Xevu),) to counsel ivith any one, in the 
sense to give him counsel, to advise him, 
with dat. John xviii. 14, Katd(/)as 6 crvfx- 
(SooXEvaa^ tois 'iovd. Rev. iii. 18. Sept. 
and Class. Mid. spoken of several, to 
counsel or consult together, e. gr. for evil, 
=: to plot, foil, by 'iva, Matt. xxvi. 4, <rui/- 
E(3ovXEV(TavTO, 'Lva tov *\i]crovv KpaTt}- 
<Tw<yL 66X(jd. John xi. 53. with inf. Acts 
ix. 23. So Sept. and Class. 

'Ev fX^OvXlOV, OV, TO, {(TVjUL^OvXo^,) 

1) counsel, consultation, e. gr. Xafx^dvEiv 
or nroiElv arv/ixfSovXiov, to take counsel, to 
hold a considtation ; with Xafx^dvELv, Matt, 
xii. 14. xxii. 15. xxvii. 1, 7. xxviii. 12; 
with itoleIv, Mk. iii. 6. xv. 1. 2) a 
council, meton. counsellors. Acts xxv. 12, 
said of persons who sat in public trials 
with the governor of a province ; called 
consiliarii or assessores, TrdpEdpoL. 

fjLfSovXo^, ov, 6, {avu, (3ov\i],) a 
counsellor, prop. ' one joined in counsel,' 
Rom. xi. 34. Sept. and Class. 

Si;jUfia6t]Ti75, ov, 6, {(tvu, ^a0t]Tf/9,) 
a fellow-disciple, John xi. 16. Poll. On. 
vi. 159, XIXaTcoj; ^£ (ru^/Aa6r]Td§ £l7r£. 

^vfJifxapTvpEO), f. ?;ora), (cui/, fiap- 

TV p ECO,) to witness with, to bear witness 
with another, to testify with, i. e. at the 
same time and to the same effect, with 
dat. Rom. viii. 16, to HvEVfia crvfxfxap' 

TVpEL TCO TTVEVjULaTL VfXUJV, OTL K.T.X» 

ix. 1 ; absol. ii. 15. Rev. xxii. 18, in text, 
rec. and Class. 

Suju/xspt^w, f. i<TU), {(Tvv, /x£/)tja),) to 
divide zvith another ; in N. T. mid. to 
divide ivith so as to receive part to one- 
self, to share with, to partake ivith, with 
dat. 1 Cor. ix. 13, and Class. 

2 ufijU£Toxo5, ov, 6, v-> B,dj, partaking 
ivith, subst. a joint-paiiaker, Eph. iii. 6, 
(ruju/U£TOxa £7rayyfXias avTov iv 
Tw X. 'joint-partakers of his promise (of 
salvation) by Christ;' and ver. 7, (tv/ul- 
IJ.ET0X0L avToov, fov crvjUL. auTois, 'par- 
takers with them (in the punishment 
which must fall upon them).' Justin 
Mart. Apol. i. p. 51, cu/ijUETOxos twj; 
Tradiov. So a-v/uLfiETEX^i 2 Mace. v. 20. 
Xen. An. vii. 8, 17. 

Su/>i^t/x?jT^5, ov, o, (orhi/, fXL^rjTr]^,) 
a co-imitator, joint-follower, Phil. iii. 17. 

^v ^liiop(po^, ov, 6, V, adj. (/xop0r/,) 
having like form with, conformed, like unto, 
with dat. Phil. iii. 21, a-v/njULopcpov tvS 
aoiixaTL Trj's ^d^r]§ auTou, i. e. ' of the 
same form and nature (see Rom. viii. 29) 
with Christ's,' namely, the glorified nature 
of Christ. With gen. Rom. viii. 29, 
irpouipLCTE arv/Ji/xSpcpov^ ttj^ eIkovo^ tov 
Tlov avTov» 

^vfMfjiopcpoa), f. wo-o), to make of like 
T 4 



S Y M 



416 



S YM 



form with another, to conform^ pass, with 
dat. fig. Phil. iii. 10. 

2u^7ra0£w, f. rjcct), (cru/xTraO?;?,) to 
sympathize with another in what he feels 
or suffers. The term has prop, a dat. of 
pers. as Job ii. 11, Symm. a-u/uLTradrjcraL 
avTto. Aristot. Physiogn. cr. d\Xv\oL9. 
Sometimes, however, it occurs with acc. of 
thing for the person, Heb. iv. 15, a-ujuTra- 
drjcaL n-al^ dcrdsu&LaL'i v/iMcov. Hence also 
to have compassion on any one, to afford 
sympathizing aid, Heb. x. 34, toTs d&afxol^ 
(fiov) (TuuEirad-na-aTe^ an ellipt. mode of 
expression, like that of the preceding pas- 
sage, for crvvfTT. fxoL kv roZ% dEor/uLoT^ /ulov^ 
where also, from the ellipsis, we have a 
kind of hypallage^ as in a similar case else- 
where, Phil. iv. 14, arvyKOLva)vi'iaravTt£ 
fjLov Ty for orvyK. fxcL kv ttj 

xj/EL fxov. As sufficiently vindicating the 
propriety of the expression, which was by 
Valckenaer thought not good Greek, it may 
suffice to adduce a passage of Isocrates, 

tOCrTE Kui Ttti? jULlKpOL'S aTu)(tats EKa- 

(TTO§ vfjLoovTroXXov^ eI^^ (TviUL7radi']<7avTa^. 
So in Plut. de Invidia, we have tuvtu 
6e (Tu/xTTaG^r Tat? dW^Xoov (pXEyjULovaL^. 
Polyb. iv. 7, 3, or. Tai<5 tlvo<s drvylaL's. 
Theophr. ap. Steph. Thes. in v. cr. -rats 
fXETa^oXaL<s. 

2u/u7ra6))9, £os ous, 6, ?/, adj. sympa- 
thizing., feeling with another, like- affected ; 
1 Pet. iii. 8, (ru/UTraGer?, i. e. the same in 
feeling, mutually compassionate. Jos. and 
Class. 

fxnrapay Luo fxai.^ to come with any 
one, to he ipresent with., Engl, to stand by 
any one, as a friend and advocate, with 
dat. 2 Tim. iv. 16, kv TrpojT?; fxov diro- 
Xoyia ouoEL^ /ulol av/JLTrapEyivETo. Sept. 
Ps. Ixxxiii. 9. Of a multitude, to come 
together, to convene^ Lu. xxiii. 48. Thuc, 
ii. 82. 

2u/x7rapaK:aX£ct), f. tcrco, to call for 
or invite laith, at the same time, Xen. Cyr. 
viii. 1, 38 ; to invoke ivith others, ib. iii. 3. 
21 ; to exhoH with another, e. gr. an army, 
Pol. V. 83, 3 ; in N. T. pass. Rom. i. 12, 
av/JL7rapaKXi]drjvaL kv vixiv^ k.t.X.\ mean- 
ing, that ' while he is communicating, and 
they receiving, the spiritual blessings above 
spoken of, mutual edification and confirma- 
tion will thus be attained.' 

^vfxnTapaXajx^dvuD., {crvv., irapor 
Xa/jL^dvco.,) to take along with oneself, as a 
companion on a journev, with acc. Acts 
xii. 25. XV. 37, 38. Gal. ii. 1. Sept. and 
Class. 

2u/x7rapa/U£i/w, f. /uleuco^ (crui/, irapa- 
fxivtjo,) prop, to remain near with any one, 
to continue icith, i.e. in life, with dat. Phil, 
i. 25. Comp. Ps. Ixxii. 5. 

2v/x7rap£i/xi, (o-uy, Trap.) to he pre- 



sent with any one, foil, by dat. Acts xxv. 
24. Jos. and Class. 

2u/>c7rdcrxct), f. irELaojULaL, {crvv, ird- 
<TX^->) lo be affected with or as another, to 
sympathize with., to siffer with., absol. 1 Cor. 
xii. 26, e'Lte TrdaXEL 'iv /u£/\.09, (rvfXTTdcxyEL 
Trdvra Ta /ixiXr]. So Plato, p. 605, & lo9, 
OL opojyTf §, rauToy toDto ^u/xTTacrxoi'O'i. 
So Rom. viii, 17, elttep crvfxTvdcryofXEV^ 
scil. auToj, ' endure sufferings.' Pol. xv. 
19, 4. Diod. Sic. iv. 11. 

/lLTT E fXTT CO., f. Xj/OD., (cTUi/, IT i JULIT lO 

to send with any one, foil, by dat. 2 Cor. 
viii. 22, and Class. ; by fXETo. and gen. 
viii. 18, and Class. 

^vfxirEpLXafJipdvw., prop, and lit. to 
take around ivith something else, i. e. em- 
brace at the same time ; in N. T. kol (tv/jl- 
TTEpiXa^uiv (scil. avTov) fl7r£. Acts xx, 
10. 

"Ev fj.irl'vd), aor. 2. cvvettlov, (crui/, 
TTLvo),) to drink with any one, foil, by dat. 

fig. Acts X. 41, OLTLVE^ CrVVECpdyOfJLEV Kai 

avvEiTLOfXEv avTco, see 'EcrO/co. Sept. and 
Class. 

2 i//x7r\i7p o o), f. cocrw, (<rt'y, ttX.) 
prop, to fill up ivith., as of ships filled by 
a crew ; in N. T. to entirely fill : 1) prop, 
of a vessel filled by the waves, so as to 
drench the persons in it, pass. Lu. viii. 23. 
2) fig. of time, pass, to be fulfilled., com- 
pleted., to have fully come., denoting such 
a completion of a period between two given 
times as that the latter is fully come.. 
Acts ii. 1, kv Tw a-vfj.7rXr]povardaL Trjv 
Vfxipav Tt^s n. Lu. ix. 51, kv rto crvjUL- 
TrXtjpovadaL Ta§ r]/j.kpa^ t?7? dvaXriilfEco^ 
avTov, in which passage the word is, as 
often, used populariter ; an event being 
thus spoken of as come., when it is very 
near at hand. So Hdian. vii. 4, 2, orvfx- 
7rXr]poviuLEvr]9 TpLETov^ (3a(TLXE'ia^. So 
in Plato the term often occurs in the sense 
cojnpleo, expleo., also in Diod. Sic. i. 2, (rvfx- 
7rX?)poi»/x£i/?j§ EudaLixovia^. Jos. Ant. i. 3, 
2. iv. 7, 5. 

2 U|Li7ryI'y 60, f. ^o), {(Tvv, TTv.) to eJwke., 
by compressing the wind-pipe, and so to 
suffocate; in N. T. 1) hyperb. to as it 
were suffocate by crowding, to exceedingly 
crowd., to press upon., Lu. viii. 42, ol oyXoL 
avvEirvLyov avTov. Comp. Mk. v. 24, 
(tweOXl^ov avTov. 2) fig. by an agricul- 
tural metaphor, Matt. xiii. 22, r] dird^ti 
Tov irXovTov (Tv/uLTTviyEL Tov Xoyov. Mk. 
iv. 7, 19. Lu. viii. 14. 

Su^ttoXI'tt]?, ou, 6, prop, a felloiv^ 
citizen., Jos. Ant. xix. 2, 2. ^1. V. H. iii. 
44 ; in N. T. fig. of Gentile Christians as 
admitted to the privileges of the Gospel 
along the Jews, Eph. ii. 19. 

'S,vfJL7ropEvo/jLaL, f. Evo-o/uLUL, depoD, 



S YM 



417 



2 Y N 



pass, to go witJi^ accompany any one, foil, 
by dat. Lu. vii. 11, al. Sept. and Apocr. 
Xen. An. i. 3, 5. Eur. Iph. T. 1489. Of 
a multitude, to come together, assemble, 
foil, by Trpo? avTou, Mk. x. 1. Sept. Job 
i. 4. Pol. V. 75, 1. XV. 6, I. 

'Ev /uLTroaiov, ou, to, prop, a drinking 
together, (Lat. compotatio,) also a banquet 
or e7itertainment, as Xen. Conv. ix. 7 ; also 
by meton. a ba?iqueti?ig-haU, as, Luc. D. 
Deor. xxiv. 1 ; in N. T. meton. the party 
assembled at an entertainment, a table- 
pariy, Mk. vi. 39, dvaKklvai irdvra^ csrvfx- 
TToaLU av/uLTToaria, i. e. by table-parties, for 
KUTO. crv/uLTToaia. 

'SiviuL7rps(r(3vT£po9, ov, 6, a fellow- 
presbyter, elder, 1 Pet. v. 1. See my note. 

JlvfKpay ELU, see in 'Evvecrdiu). 

Ev /ui(p i p 0), aor. 1. crvvriviyKa, (o-i/i/, 
(f>Epu),) to bear or bring together. 1) prop, 
and trans, to collect, with ace. Acts xix. 
19, (TvviviyKavTE<s Tas jSi^Xovs. Jos. 
Ant. iii. 8, 3. Xen. An. vi. 5, 6. 2) in- 
trans. to bring together for any one, to con- 
tribute (good to), to conduce ; hence to be 
well, profitable, eocpedient, with dat. expr. 
or impl. 2 Cor. viii. 10, tovto yap vfxZv 
crv/i0£p£t, meaning, ' it is suitable to your 
profession' or character. Foil, by dat. with 
inf. as subj. 2 Cor. xii. 1 ; with simple 
infin. Matt. xix. 10; by dat. with 'iva, 
Matt. V. 29, al. Sept. & Class. Absol. 
1 Cor. vi. 12, ov irdvTa crvfX(pipEL. x. 23. 
Hence part. neut. to a-vfKpipov, profit, 
advantage, 1 Cor. vii. 35. x. 33. xii. 7. 
Heb. xii. 10. Plur. to: Gv/xcpepoura, 
things profitable. Acts xx. 20. Apocr. and 
Class. 

V /JL (f) f] fjL L, {aritv, (fyfjiuLL,) prop, as used 
of pers. 'to say what another says,' to as- 
sent to his opinion ; of thing, ' to bear tes- 
timony in its favour,' so Rom. vii. 16, 
avfKprjfxi TO) vofxui, Dem. 668, 14. Xen. 
An. V. 8, 9. * 

2i>/Li^u\£Tr]9, ov, 6, (</)i;X£T?JS, ^u- 
Xrj,) prop, and in Class. ' one of the same 
tribe or fraternity ;' in N. T. gener. a fel- 
low-citizen, fellow-countryman, 1 Th. ii. 
14. Disapproved of by the grammarians, 
though used by Isocrat. and Aristoph. 

EvficpvTo^, ov, 6, 77, adj. {arviuLcpvu),) 
prop, brought forth, or grown up together, 
Sept. Zech. xi. 2; fig. hindred, Eurip. Andr. 
956 ; in N. T. grown together into one, fig. 
conjoined, Rom. vi. 5, avfxcpvTOL yayova/uLEi/ 

TCO O/ULOLOOjULaTL TOV ^UVUTOV aVTOV, \. 6. 

one with Christ, ' closely united with, or 
assimilated to him,' in the likeness of his 
death, by a metaphor taken from the graft- 
ing of trees ; the literal sense of the ex- 
pression being ' grown together into one,' 
as man and horse in the Centaurs, Luc. 
D. Mort. xvi. 4. Xen. Cyr. iv. 3, 18. 



2uft^u6(), f. vau), {crvu, (jyvu),) to bring 
forth together, to let grow together, in 
N. T. only pass. aor. 2, (TvvEcpvriv, to spring 
up or gi'otv together, Lu. viii. 7, <Tv/jLcf)VEL- 
(xai al aKuvdai. This is a later form in- 
stead of act. aor. 2, crvvicpvu : yet it is 
found in Philo de Vit. Mos. ii. p. 174, 12. 

'Ev fx(p wv Euy, f. r7<r(jt), {aru/ixcpcouos.) 
prop, to sound together, and by impl. to be 
in unison, as said prop, of musical instru- 
ments ; in N. T. fig. to accord with, agree 
ivith, intrans. foil, by dat. expr. or impl. 
1) gener. of what is suitable, Lu. v. 36, 
TO) TraXaito ov arvfXipuiVEl e7rij3Xr}fxa. 
Aristot. Polit. vii. 15, tuvtu Sel Trpos 
d\\r}\a av^ipojvElv. Arr. Epict. iii. 12, 

\VTpd KUL TTETpa OV (TVfKpWVEL. 2) of 

coincidence, concurrence. Acts xv. 15, 
TouTO) (TVfKpuiivovcrLV OL \6yoL TUiv irpo- 
(py]Tu)V. Jos. Ant. x. 7, 2, to. fxEV a\Xa 
irdvTa crvfX(puyvovvTa tous nrpocpriTa^ 
aWrfKov^ elttelv crvvi^t]. 3) of a com- 
pact, to agree together, to make an agree- 
ment, foil, by iTEpl with gen. Matt, xviii. 
19. Pass, with dat. Acts v. 9, tl otl crvv- 
E(f)(ji}VTidri vfxiv ; ' how is it that it has been 
agreed upon by you .^' Sept. 2 K. xii. 8, 
<TvvE<p<jyvn<yav ol UpsTs tou fxr] Ka^Eiv, and 
Class, espec. Diod. Sic. and Polyb. ; folL 
by dat. of pers. and genit. of price. Matt. 
XX. 13, ou^t ^tivapiov a-vvE<p(jour}(rd^ fxoi ; 
by [XETa TLvo'3 and Ik with gen. of price, 
Matt. XX. 2. Act. Thom. § 2, avvE(pu}vr}(TE 
jULEn-' avTOv Tpiooif XiTpCov dpyvpiov. 

"E V /JL Cp U) V T] (T L ^, EC09, Vi {cTV IUL(f)COVECO,) 

unison, accord, 2 Cor. vi. 15, tU Sk arvp.- 
cjxouriCTL^ Xpio-Tw -Trpos BeX/aX ; So 
(TVfxdxjovia, Jos. c. Ap. ii. 16. Hdian. iii. 
13, 8. 

Ev/uLcpcovia, as, v, {crvfKpcovia),) sym,- 
phony, i. e. concert of vocal and instru- 
mental music. Lu. XV. 25. Se])t. Dan. iii. 
5, 10. Pol. xxvi. 10, 5. Aristot. Pol. vii. 
15. 

Ev fULcf) ajvo£, ov, 6, 77, adj. (cui/, (jjcovi],) 
symphonious, in unison, prop, of sounds, as 
said of musical instruments ; in N. T. fig. 
consonant, accordant, and neut. to cu/x- 
(f)U)vov, subst. accord, agreement, 1 Cor. 
vii. 5, EK (TviuLcpMvov, ' by agreement,' and 
so in Polyb. Diod. and Epict. 

2u/xi/Atj<|)i^a), f. Laro>, {avi/, \|/t?0/^a),) 
to reckon together, compute, e. gr. Tds ti- 
fxa.<5, Acts XIX. 19. Aristopb. Lysist. 142. 

Ev fixlrvxo^i ov, 6, 77, adj. of one mind 
with others, like-minded, equiv. to o/xo'- 
xj/vxoi. Phil. ii. 2. 

Evu, prep, governing only the dat. tvith, 
implying a nearer and closer connexion 
and conjunction than /x£Ta : I. prop, of 
society or companionship, where one is 
said to be, do, suffer with any one, in con- 
nexion and company with him. So after 
T 5 



2 YN 



418 



2 YN 



verbs of sitting, standing, being, remain- 
ing ivith any one, as avaKiLfxai^ John xii. 
2; yivofxai^ Lu. ii. 13; dLarpLf^w, Acts 
xiv. 28 ; 'LaTiqixL^ Acts ii. 14. iv. 14 ; k(p- 
icTT-nfXL^ La. XX. 1. Acts xxiii. 27; /caOiJco, 
Acts viii. 31 ; fxivw^ Lu. i. 56. xxiv. 29. 
Acts xxviii. 16. Spec. &lvaL crvv tlvl^ to 
he with any one, i. e. ' present with, in 
company with,' Lu. xxiv. 44. Phil. i. 23. 
1 Th. iv. 17; with ^ivaL impl. Lu. viii. 1. 
Phil. iv. 21 : or as accompanying^ follow- 
ing^ Lu. vii. 12. Acts xiii. 7. xxvii. 2; as 
a follower, disciple, Lu. viii. 38. Acts iv. 
13 ; as a partisan, ' to be on one's side,' 
Acts xiv. 4, bis, and Class. So oi avv 
TLVL ovTE^^ ' those with any one,' his com- 
panions, attendants, followers ; fully, Mk. 
ii. 26. Acts xxii. 9. Oftener with part, 
wi/, oi^Tfis impl. Lu. V. 9. ix. 32. Gal. i. 
2, et al. ; spoken of colleagues. Acts v. 
17, 21, and Class. After verbs of going 
with any one ; e. gr. 'ipxcfJ-aL and its com= 
pounds ; airipxcfxai^ Acts v. 26 ; eiaip- 
XO/uat, Acts iii. 8 ; k^ipxcfxai^ x. 23, al. 
cruvipxofiaL^ xxi. 16. Also TropEvo/uLai, 
Lu. vii. 6. Acts x. 20, al. danii/aL^ Acts 
xxi. 18; I/cttXeco, xviii. 8; TrapayLvojxaL^ 
xxiv. 24 ; (jvvdyofxaL^ iv. 27, and Class. 
Gener. with neuter and pass, verbs, like 
Engl, ivith^ Matt. xxvi. 35, kcLv Sir] /ule 
(Tvv aoL a-KodavELV. xxvii. 38. Mk. ix. 4. 
Lu. ii. 5. xxii. 14. Acts i. 14. iii. 4. iv. 
27. viii. 20. xiv. 5. 1 Cor. i. 2, al. Phil, 
i. 1, 1 Th. iv. 17, a'/Utt ai/rols apira- 
yncoiuEda. v. 10. Xen. Cyr. v. 4, 30. An. 

i. 9, 2 ; also with tjxms. verbs, like Engl. 
witii^ where the verb refers either to its 
subject or object as in company tuith 
others ; e. gr. to the subject, Mk. iv. 10, 
i]p(joTi]<jav avTOv ol 'iTEpl avTov, (tvv toZs 
ooi^EKa. Lu. V. 19. xix. 23. xxiii. 11, 35, 
al. ; to the object^ Matt. xxv. 27, eko/ull- 
crafiriv av to I/xoi/ (tvv tokw. Mk. viii. 
34. XV. 27. Acts XV. 22, iriiLLvl/aL. ver, 
25. xxiii. 15. oft. — II. fig. of connexion 
or consort, as arising from likeness of doing 
or suffering, from a common lot or event, 
with, equiv. to in like manner with^ like., 

Rom. Vi. 8, EL CLTTEddvOfXEV (TVV X/OiO-TOJ. 

viii. 32. 2 Cor. xiii. 4. Gal. iii. 9. ev\o- 
yovvTai crvv nrcv TTicrTw 'AfSpad/uL. Col. 

ii. 13, 20. — III. of connexion arising from 
possession, the being furnished or entrusted 
with any thing. 1 Cor. xv. 10, v x^P'-^ 
Tov 0£ou 77 crvv EfxoL, cqulv. to 77 Bo^EXcrd 
fxoL in Rom. xii. 3, 6. 2 Cor. viii. 19. Ja. 
i. II, and Class. — IV. implying a joint- 
working, or co-operation, and thus spoken 
of means, instrument, &c. icith, through, by 
virtue of, 1 Cor. v. 4, a-vv Ttj ovvdjULEL tov 
Kvpiov 1. Xf). Xen. Cyr. viii. 7, 13. Conv. 
V. 13. — V. implying addition, accession,\ike 
Engl, luith, = besides, over and above, Lu. 
xxiv, 21, dWd yE crvv irdcn tovtol^ Tpi- 
TYiv TavTr]v rjjjLEpav dyEL cr^pLspov, ivith. 



Sept. (TVV rovTOL's, Neh. v. 18. 3 Mace. i. 
22. — Note. In comp. crvv implies : 1. so- 
ciety, companionship, ivitli, together^ Lat. 
con- ; also therewith, withal ; e. gr, crvV" 
dy(j}.^ crvvE(TQLco, (TvyKadrifxaL : 2. com- 
pleteness of an action, altogether, round 
about, on every side, wholly ; e. gr. cu/x- 
7rA.7]poa), arvyKoXviTTco, 

'2vvdy(jo, f. Jw, (dyco,) to lead or 
bring together, to gather together, collect, 
trans. I. gener. of persons or things, 
with acc. Matt. xxii. 10, (rvvvyayov itdv 
Tas o(Toi;s evoov. Lu. xv. 13. John vi. 
12. Rev. xiii. 10, aixfJiCtKcocrLav crvvdyei, 
— '' to bring together captives,' ' to lead 
captive;' with acc. impl. Matt. xiii. 47, 
craynvr) — ek iravTo^ yivovs cvvayayov- 
(TTJ. xxv. 24, 26. John vi. 13, comp. ver. 12, 
Sept. and Class. Elsewhere with adjuncts, 
e. g. €ts with acc. of place. Matt. iii. 12. 
vi. 26. Lu. iii. 17. to. tekvu f is tv, i. e. 
'into one family, church,' John xi. 52. 
(Heraclit. c. 19, tous crTropddrjv oiKovv- 
Ta§ sis Ev crvvayELV.) With sh final, 
John iv. 36, ekeI, ttov, Lu. xii. 17, 18. 
/x£Ta nrLvo^, Matt. xii. 30, o pLt] (xvvdycov 
pet' kpLov, an agricultural metaphor, allu- 
ding to the process of collecting hay or 
corn into heaps. — II. spec, of persons only, 
as an assembly, multitude, to assemble, 
convene, convoke, as oft. in Class. I) act. 
with acc. Matt. ii. 4, crvvayayiiiv iravTa^ 
Tov£ dpxt^p^'i^^') K.T.X. John xi. 47. Acts 
xiv. 27. XV. 30 ; with ettl tivu, against 
any one, Matt, xxvii. 27 ; foil, by tis tov 
TOTTov, Rev. xvi. 16. el^ ttoXeplov, Rev. 
xvi. 14. XX. 8. 2) pass, or mid. to be 
gathered together, be assembled, come to- 
gether. Matt. xxii. 41, arvvrjypLEvcov 
Twv ^apL(TaL(jov, and oft. Sept. and Class. 
With various adjuncts of place, Ep.7rpoor- 
Oev tlvo's, ettl to avTo, ettl TLva, &c. 
3) from the Heb., prop, to lead or take 
ivith oneself, into one's house, to receive to 
one's hospitality and protection, Matt. xxv. 
35, Jf'z/os nfJ-VV, Kai (rvvnydysTi pis, 
where see my note. ver. 38, 43, and Sept. 

'Sivvayooyr], ^s, ((Twdyco,) a col- 
lecting or gathering, whether of things or 
of persons military or civil ; also the as- 
sembly of persons so collected. In Sept. 
used of the congregation of Israel, Ex. xii. 
3, 19. Lev. iv. 13. Ecclus. xxiv. 25. 
1 Mace. xiv. 28; in N. T. an assembly, 
congregation, spoken, 1) of a Christian 
assembly, jo/ace of ivorship. Jam. ii. 2, t?;i/ 
crvvayuiyi]v vpLvov, where the term may 
denote a place of assembly not only for 
Divine worship, but also for judicial pur- 
poses. Moreover, the sing, is here used 
geiiencally for the plur. Also of Jewish 
persecutors, who are called avvayuiyi] 
'EuTavd, ' Satan's synagogue,' or people, 
, [avvayvoyr] being for Xaos, as the cor- 



SYN 



419 



SYN 



responding Heb. term in Lev. xvi. 17. 
And so Sept. away wy ii TToviiptuo/uLti/cov^ 
Ps. xxii. 7, compared Avith Eccliis. xvi. 7. 
xxi. 10.) Rev. ii. 9. iii. 9. 2) of a Jeivish 
assembly held in the synagogues, for 
prayer and reading the Scriptures, having 
also certain judicial powers, Lu. viii. 41, 
xii. 11, xxi. 12, 'irapadLdovTE's [o/ixu^] 
(Tvuaycoya.^ Kal (pvXaKo.^. Acts ix. 2, 
£7rt(TTo\as TT^oo? Ttts (TvvayoDyd^. xiii. 
43. xxii. 19. XX vi. 11. 3) meton. of a 
Jewish place of worship, a synagogue^ on 
■which see Calmet. 

^vvay uiviX^o fjiai^ f. icrofxai^ depon. 
mid. (dytoi/t^ojuat,) prop, to combat with, 
i. e. in company with, prop, of gymnastic 
contests, but sometimes those of public 
speakers ; or enter into a contest in con- 
junction with, as oft. in Thucyd. In N. T. 
ZG eocert oneself ivith another, to strive ear- 
nestly along with, =z to help, aid, with dat. 
of pers. Rom. xv. 30, arvvayoovia-aadai 
jjiOL kv TOL^ 7rpoo-£ux«ts, and Class. 

^vvaQXlco, f. va-u), (arvv, aQXlo),) 
prop, to contend, carry on a contest along 
with any one, i. e. on his side : in N. T. 
only fig. to exert oneself with, strive with or 
together, i. e. ' co-operate with with dat. 
Phil. iv. 3, kv TO) i.vayyzKiw avvn^Xy)- 
uav fJLOi : also along with one, Trj 'TTLcrT&L, 
' for the faith,' Phil. i. 27. 

Sui/ctOpot^o), f. oLcra), (a-vu, adpoi'^o), 
ddpoo^,) gener. to gatlier together, whether 
things or persons : in N. T. of persons, to 
maM throng together, to gather together, to 
assemble, with acc. Acts xix. 25, t^xvl- 
Tats— oOs crvvaQpoLcra^. Pass. Lu. xxiv. 
33. Acts xii. 12. Sept. and Class. 

^vvaipu), f. apu), {avv, aipco,) prop. 
io tahe up or lift together; also to help, 
aid : in N. T. acc. only in the phrase a-vu- 
aipzLv \6yov fxETo. Tii/09, Matt, xviii. 23, 
24. XXV. 19, which is usually explained, 
'to take up an account with any one,' 
namely, for adjustment, i. e. to reckon 
together. But what the idea of lifting can 
here have to do, I see not. It seems best 
to consider the phrase (which is no where 
else found) as one of the several Latinisms 
occurring in the N. T., formed on the Lat. 
phrase 'conferre rationem,' or 'rationes,' 
which Cicero uses in the sense to settle 
amounts with any one, lit. ' to bring or draw 
together the reckonings, or accounts, of 
the two parties,' that they may be mutually 
adjusted, balanced, and settled. So in Cic. 
Epist. Fam. v. 20, we have ' rationes con- 
fertse et consolidatse.' And so Plant. Aul. 
iii. 5, 53, 'putatur ratio cum argumen- 
tario.' In the same light, too, St. Jerome 
probably viewed the expression, who ren- 
ders by rationem ponere ; a phrase also 
used of drawing up an account, as appears 
from a passage of Ulpian Dig. i. 47, 5, 



* ponere rationem actus, quam servus 
administravit,' And so Plautus has ' ratio 
acccpti atque expensi.' 

2ui'rttXM<^^^'^0 9, ov, 6, {crvu, aix' 
/xaXcoTos,) a fellow-prisoner, Rom. xvi. 
7. Col, iv. 10. Philem. 23. 

^vvaKoXovQ iw, f. 77cra), (trui/, a/<o- 
Xovdtu),) to go together with any one, fol- 
low, accompany, Mk. v. 37. Lu. xxiii. 49, 
and Class. 

Sui/aXi^w, f. icru), [avv, aX'i'^u), from 
a\r/s =: ddpoo's,) to gather together in a 
heap, whether things, Jos. Ant. viii. 4, 1, 
Ttt cTKEVf] TrduTa avvaXiaa?, or persons, 
as oft. in Class. In N. T. of persons, to 
assemble, pass. Acts i. 4, avvaXiX^ofXEvo^ 
iraptiyyEiXEv avToT?, constr. dXiX^ofxEvo^ 
<Tvv ai/Tois irapriyyELXEV auTois. Jos. & 
Class. 

^vvava^aivto, aor. 2. arvvi^w, {avi/, 
dva(3.) to go upward with any one, i. e. 
from a lower to a higher part of a country, 
foil, by dat. Mk. xv. 41. Acts xiii. 31. 
Sept. and Class. 

"EvvavaKtLiiiaL, f. £i(ro/x.ai, {crvv, 
dvoLKEiiiiaL,) to recline with any one, i. e. 
at table, := to eat with, dine or sup ivith. 
Matt. ix. 10, arvvavEKELVTO tw 'Irjaov, 
Mk. ii. 15, al. Part, absol. ol auvavaKEi- 
fjLEvoL, 'guests,' Matt. xiv. 9, al. 

^vvavafJLLyvv jULi, f. /Uifw, {<tvv, /uLiy- 
vvjXL,) prop, to mix up together ; pass, or 
mid. arvvavafxiyvv/jLaL, to mingle together 
with, have intercourse or keep company 
with ; foil, by dat. 1 Cor. v. 9, /nr] avvava- 
fxiyvvfrbai TTopi/ots. ver. 11. 2 Th. iii. 14. 
Comp. Xen. Mem. i. 2, 20, crv^ixi^ai 
irovnpol^ dvdpcoTTOL^, the expression being 
equiv. to avyxpdcrdaL at John iv, 9. 
Sept. Hos. vii. 8. 

^vvavairavoi, f. aucco, {(tvv, dvam-.) 
occ. only in mid. to refresh oneself or be 
refresJied with any one, in his company, 
with dat. Rom. xv. 32. 

^vvavTact), f. vGrtx), {crvu, dvTduj, fV' 
dvTL,) to meet with any one, to come to- 
gether with, to encounter : 1) prop, of 
persons, with dat. Lu. ix. 37, crvvriVTr](TEv 
avTta oxXo? TToXvs. xxii. 10. Acts x. 25. 
Heb. vii. 1, 10. Sept. and Class. 2) fig. 
of things, as events, to happen to any one, 
to befall, with dat. Acts xx. 22, Ta arvuav- 
TYivovrd juLOL. Sept. Job xxx. 26. Prov. 
xvii. 20. Eccl. ii. 14. ix. 11. 

^vvdvTr}<Ti^, £ct)9, 77, {avvavTao),) a 
meeting with, encounter: in N. T. only in 
the phrase eU (Tvvdvr^cnv, used for the 
infin. (TvvavTav, to meet ivith; foil, by 
dat. Matt. viii. 34. Sept. Gen. xiv. 17. 
Ex. xviii. 7. 

'2vvavTL\aiuL(3dvao, fut. X-nxj/ojULaL, 
((Tvi/, avTiX.) only mid. (rvvavriXaixBd- 
*T6 



2 YN 



420 



2YN 



vofxai^ prop. ' to lay hold of any weight to 
be carried, on the opposite side,' to lend a 
hand with any one, to heljj him in any 
work, foil, by dat. Lu. x. 40. Rom. viii. 
26. Sept. and Class. 

Sui/aTrayo), f. ^O), (cui/, aTT.) prop. 

to lead off or away ivith any one, foil, by 
dat. of pers. Sept. and Class. In N. T. 
only pass. fig. to he led or carried away 
with any thing, mostly in a bad sense, z=. 
to be led astray^ foil, by dat. Gal. ii. 13, 
wcTTs Kai Bapudfia^ <Tvua7rrix^V aurcou 
uTTOKpicraL. 2 Pet. iii. 17, where (as in 
the similar expression airayofxivoL^ 1 Cor. 
xii. 2. ) the metaphor is one taken from a 
crowd by which any one is home alo7ig. 
Also in a good sense, Rom. xii. 16, /urj to. 
v\\fr]\a (ppvuovuTE^^ dXXd toIs TaTr&i- 
i/ots a-vvaTrayofJLsvoL^ ' not minding high 
things, but condescending to lowly matters,' 
(so denoting humility in all its various 
offices, i. e. humhle-mindedness^) what is 
elsewh. expressed by crv/jLTrepL^ip&adat. 
So Diog. Laert. Zenone, av/m. ^i'\oi9, 
' morigerari, non morosum sese exhibere.' 
2 Mace. ix. 27, TriTrELO-fxai yap ahrov 

ETTLELKCO^ KUL (plXavQ pUiTTlO^ aV/JLTTepL- 

'Evva7roduri<TK(jt}^ aor. 2. crvvairiQa- 
i/oi/, (o-i/f, aTToO.)"' prop, to die luith any 
one. Class. In N. T. Mk. xiv. 31, kdv jus 
6iy (jwaTrodavELv <roL. 2 Cor. vii. 3 ; fig. 
of dying with Christ, i. e. spiritually, 'in 
the likeness of his death,' 2 Tim. ii. 11. 

Sui/a7roA.X.u/>it, f. oXlaru), (cui/, 
diroX.) to destroy with or togetlier^ foil, by 
acc. and dat. Sept. and Class. In N. T. 
mid. or pass, to be destroyed with any one, 
to perish idth ; foil, by dat. Heb. xi. 31, 
'PaajS — ov arvvaTTtJoXsTO TOis CLTreidi^- 
aacn. Sept. and Class. 

^ uv aTT OCT TeXXwy f. eXw, (o-uy, diro- 
a-i-iXXco,) to send off or atvay ivith any 
one, foil, bv acc. and dat. impl. 2 Cor. xii. 
18. Sept. ' 

^vvapjULoXoyico^ f. tjcrw, (cri/i/, dp- 
fjLoXoyicD^ fr. dp/ii6<s^ joint^ and Xoyos,) to 
joint together^ Jit or frame togetlier^ join 
together parts fitted to each other, pass. 
Eph. ii. 21, TTacra h oiKooo/uir] avvapfxaXo- 
yovfxivi]. iv. 16. See on the word o-u/x- 
^ijSaJo). For this the Class, term is avv- 
ap/uLoX^oD^ as Thuc. iv. 100. Xen. Mem. i. 
4, 8. ' ApfxoXoyid), however, is used of 
building. So in Anthol. Gr. 204, we have 
dpfxoXoyovjJiivr] oLKooofxri, 

Sui/apTra^o), f. atro), ((ruf, intens. 
aoTra^o),) Lat. eorripere^ to grasp all 
around^ i. e. to seize with violence ; prop, 
of persons^ as a multitude, seizing indi- 
viduals, with accus. Acts vi. 12. xix. 29, 
and so in Class, but more freq. duapir. 



of an evil spirit seizing violently one pos- 
sessed, Lu. viii. 29. To this we have some 
approodmation in those passages of the 
Class, where persons are said to be seized 
hold of and drawn away by strong appeals 
to the mind. So Eurip. Iph. A. 532, 
^vvapirdaa'S (XTpaTov. Philo, p. 621, 
viro Tov TraOous (rvvripirarrfxtvoL. Of 
things^ as a ship caught by a tempest, pass. 
Acts xxvii. 15. So dvap'KdX,t(jdaL vir 
dvi/uLov^ Thuc. vi. 104, where I have given 
several examples. 

'Evuav^dvo)^ f. 770-60, (<tuj/, au^.) to 
augment^ cause to grow\ 2 Mace. iii. 4. 
Pol. X. 35, 5. In N. T. mid. aruvav^dvo" 
fxai^ intrans. to groiv together^ Matt. xiii. 
30. Dem. cvii. 27. Hdian. i. 12, 8. Xen. 
Mem. iv. 3, 6. Eur. El. 544. 

Sui/^Eo-^xo?, ou, 6, (<rui/0£ft),) prop, 
' what binds together,' a band, bond : 1 ) 
prop. Col. ii. 19, Sid twv dcpcou Kai avv- 
6i<Tjui(x)v : fig. Eph. iv. 3, t^i/ h6rr}Ta 

TOV TTVEVfXaTO^ kv TW <TVvdi(Tp.O> TT]^ 

sipvvr}^, i. e. ' by the cultivation of that 
peaceable spirit which binds all together.' 
(So Simplicius, in Epict. Ench. c. 37, 
calls friendship the <tvv8e(tpo^ TraortZu 
T(Zv dpEToov: and in Plut.Vit. Num. 6, we 
have (Tvvd. ivvoia^ Kai (piXia^.) Col. ill. 

14, ECTtI (rVvdE<TIULO<S T^S TfiX-flOTIJ- 

T09, namely, as uniting Christians toge- 
ther, and making them perfect, being the 
fulfilment and consummation of the com- 
mandments. Also said of one immersed in 
wickedness. Acts viii. 23, ah — (TvvBEO-fxov 
ddiKia^ opu) ere ovra, i. e. ' fast bound in 
the chains of sin and Satan.' Comp. 
Is. Iviii. 6, XvE irdvTa arvvdEorfxov aot- 

Sui/^go), f. Sn<yoi-, {arvu, Seco,) to hind 
together. In Class, and Sept. said both of 
things and persons. In N. T. of pers. only, 
to hind together with, pass, to be hound or 
in bonds ivith any one, Heb. xiii. 3, ws 
crvvoEOEpiivoL, i, e. as if fellow-prisoners. 
Jos. Ant. ii. 5, 3, and Class. 

Suiy^o^a^o), f. a<ruj, {avi/, <5o^.) to 
glorify ivith any one, i. e. to exalt in dig- 
nity and glory with or as another, Rom. 
viii. 17. 

2uj/oovXo9, ov, 6, {(Txju, ^ouXos,) a 
fellow-slave, fellow-servant: 1) prop, of 
involuntary service. Matt. xxiv. 49, tutt- 
TELV Toi/9 rrvvSouXovs avTov, and Class. 
2) of voluntary service, used of the fol- 
lowers and ministers of Christ, as fellow^ 
servants too^ether of Christ, Rev. vi. 11. 
xix. 10. xxii.9: espec. of teachers, a coU 
league. Col. i. 7. iv. 7, and so Sept. in 
Ezra iv. 7, 9. v. 3, 6. Also of the atten- 
dants and ministers of a king, Matt, xviii. 
28, 29, 31, 33 ; comp. ver. 23. 



2YN 



421 



2YN 



2 ui/^po/xt], V, (<T vu 16 p a jULOv, from 
avuTpixo)^) a ranniny togetlier^ concourse^ 
Acts xxi. 30, <Tvv6poixr\ tov Xaou, a term 
often used of riotous assemblage. So 
Athen. v. p. 212, auroAcXtjTos tts rtji/ 
EKK\i](Tiuv crvv6pOfxri. 

^uif&y Eipu)., f. fpcw, (auj/, Ey.) prop. 
to raise 2tp what has fallen, whether 
things or pe}'S07is. In N, T. fig. to raise 
up from the death of sin to the life of 
righteousness, as Christians raised spi- 
ritually in the likeness of Christ's resur- 
rection, with dat. Eph. ii. 6, /cat avu- 
Tjy^ipEt i. e. 17/xas avi/ too X.p. Col. ii, 12. 
iii. 1. 

"Evvldp Lov^ ou, TO, (cui/e^po?,) prop. 
' a sitting together,' i. e. an assembly : in 
N. T. spoken only of Jewish councils, viz. 

1. the SANHEDRIM, the supreme council of 
the Jewish nation, composed of 70 mem- 
bers, besides the High Priest, in imitation 
of the 70 elders appointed by Moses. See 
Calmet. 1) gener. Matt. v. 22, 'ii/oxo^ 
'iarai Ttp avv&opLvo. xxvi. 59. Acts v. 

21, oft. 2) melon, as including the place 
of meeting, the sanhedrim as sitting in its 
hall, Lu. xxii, 66, avriyayov avTov £ts 
TO crvvidpLOv, al. — II. to: avvidpia., coun- 
cils, tribunals., spoken of the smaller tri- 
bunals in the cities of Palestine, subordi- 
nate to the sanhedrim, equiv. to /cptcrt?, 
Matt. X. 17. Mk. xiii. 9. 

2ui/£t 5??(r4s, £609, 77, (<rvi/ot5a, from 
tiuvELdivdL.,) prop, 'a knowing with one- 
self,' i. e. consciousness of 'what one has 
thought or done,' the knowledge a man has 
of his own thoughts and actions : hence, 
conscience., that faculty of the soul, some- 
times called the Moral Sense, which dis- 
tinguishes between right and wrong in 
ourselves and others (see 2 Cor. iv. 2. v. 
11), acting thus both as witness, accuser, 
and Jvxige, To this last-mentioned power 
of conscience there is reference, John viii. 
9, viro Trj'i avv£Ldri(TS(jo^ eXEyxofXEvoL. 
(Comp. Wisd. xvii. 11.) Rom. ii. 15, 
avpLixaonrvpovat]^ avTiZv t^s gvvel^yi- 
crtui^, and ix. 1. 2 Cor. i. 12. 1 Tim. iv. 

2. Tit. i. 15. In Heb. ix. 14, and x. 2, 

22, the term signif. not simply the con- 
science as a faculty of the soul, but rather 
the mind, meaning the conscious power of 

■ man, the knowledge of one's own thoughts 
and actions. Hence it may often be best 
rendered by consciousness, (e. gr. in Philo, 
frag. 77 ToD cpavXou avvELdr]o-L?, 6l Diod. 
Sic. t. iii. 189, ota Trji/ crvuELdriaiv tov 
fxvdovs Ei<s fxavtuv TrspLECTTr},) there being 
here a mixed idea of conscience and con- 
sciousness, the latter, as the result of the 
former, or the one mutually acting and 
re-acting on the other. The expression 
<TvuEidr](yi9 irovripa, ' consciousness of 
wrong,' at x. 22, is the opposite to avvEt- 



^7jo'is ctyaGrj, 'consciousness of right,' 
Acts xxiii. 1. 1 Tim. i. 5, 19, al. Hdian. 
vi. 9. KuXti <Tvv. Heb. xiii. 18. KaOapa 
aw. 1 Tim. iii. 9. aTrpoaKOTro^ arvv. Acta 
xxiv. 16. Compare a similar one in Jos. 
Ant. xvi. 4, 2, (rvuELdiicnv aTonroTEpav. 
i. 1, 4 ETTL <Tvv. irovqpto. 1x1 thc expres- 
sions elsewh. avuEi6r]aL^ dadEvr)^ or acr- 
dEvouara (i. e. weak and hesitating in judg- 
ing and deciding), 1 Cor. viii. 7, 10, 12, 
avvELdi^cTL^ Tou tidwXov, 'a conscience 
towards the idol,' (i. e. a conscience over 
which the idol has sway as if something 
real,) the term has reference solely and 
simply to the /acuity of conscience, mis- 
directed by proceeding on a mistaken 
notion. In Rom. xiii. 5. 1 Cor. x. 25,27, 
Slu ti]v <TuvsLSi]crLv, 'for conscience-sake,' 
conscience is considered, not as a faculty., 
but (with reference to its aivard as impel- 
ling man to action, dictating to him what 
to do, and warning him what not to do : 
see Pope's Universal Prayer,) as a prin- 
ciple of action ; an idea which may be 
recognised in various phrases of our own 
language. And under this head I would 
place the expression at 1 Pet. ii. 19, (5ta 
Ti]v (TvvEiSi}(TLu 0£ou, i. e. ' through a 
principle of conscience as regards God,' 
and our duty to Him. Finally, the term 
is also used, by metonymy, for the esti- 
mate OT judgment of the conscience, 2 Cor. 
iv. 2, crvvLCTTUiVTE^ EUVTOV's TTpos TTacrau 
crvv. dvdpMTTwv, ' to the judgment of 
every man's conscience,' & v. 11. 

Suvft^w, obsol. in the pres., see in 
Ei^o). I. aor. 2. arvuEtSov, part. avvL^obv, 
only fig. to see or perceive ivith oneself, i. e. 
by the senses, to be aware, absol. Acts xii. 
12. xiv. 6, (TvvidovTE^ KaTE(pvyou, mean- 
ing, ' have taken consideration [respecting 
the matter, and what was best to be done.'] 
2 Mace. iv. 41. Jos. B. J. iv. 5, 4. Pol. i. 
23, 3. Dem. 1351, 6. Plut. Solon, 25. 
crvvEldov, Pyrrh. 2. — II. perf. 2, arvvoida., 
part. avvEiS(h9, to know ivith any one, to be 
conscious of ox privy to any thing, absol. 
Acts V. 2, ci/ygt^uias /cat t^? yvvaiKo's 
avTov. Foil, by dat. EjuiavTto, to knoio 
ivith oneself, to be conscious of 1 Cor. iv. 4, 
ovdkv yap EfxavTui crvvoi^a, ' I am not 
conscious to myself of any [evil].' So 
Libanius has, EfxavTiZ arvvotSa ovdkv, scil. 
KaKov. With EavTw, Sept. Job xxvii. 6. 
Jos. Ant. iii. 9, 3. Hdian. vii. 1, 3. Xeu. 
Mem. ii. 9, 6. Herat. ' nil conscire tibi.' 

'EuvELfjLi, f. iaofxai, to be with, to be 
present with, foil, by dat. Lu. ix. 18. Acts 
xxii. 11, and Class, oft. 

^VVEL/JLL, part. (TVVLCbV, {(TVV, ElfXL,) 

to go or come together, absol. Lu. viii. 4, 
and Class, oft. 

^vvELoripxofiaL, aor. 2. tjXOou, (avv, 
EiaipX') logo or come in with any one. 



2 YN 



422 



2YN 



io enter ivith^ foil, by dat. John xviii. 15, 
o-ufEto-tjXOg TO) 'li](Tov : of a vessel, to 
embark with others on hoard of, John vi. 
22. Sept. and Class. 

^vvekBti juLO's^ 01/, 6, 77, prop. adj. (o-uz/, 
£Kor]/xo§,) abse?it together from oiie' s peojole 
or home; hut gener. as subst. a fellow- 
traveller^ Acts xix. 29, (though others 
there explain townsmen^ those ^vho had 
left their country together with Paul,) 
2 Cor. viii. 19. Jos. and lat. Class. 

Suye/cA-E/cTos, 7j, oy, adj. (s/cXe/cto?,) 
chosen icith others, namely, to the exalted 
privileges of the Gospel ; said of the 
church of Babylon in respect of other 
churches, like-heloved^ 1 Pet. v. 13. 

2 u I'gXa uj/co, f. aco), (eXaui/o),) prop. 
to drive together^ or ' to compel any one to 
go any where,' by hedging him in, and 
leaving him no other course. So Jos. 
Bell. iv. 9, 11, crvve\avuov(TL tous Xol- 
TTous gis Tr]i/ auXj/j/, and xi. 19, 3. In 
the later writers the term is used of co7n- 
pulsion geiierally^ (as Pint. Caes. cvv- 
eXavvofJLEvo's aKoov ti)v fxa.yj]v^^ and 
sometimes of the moral compulsion of 
earnest 'persuasion^ as Acts vii. 26, cruy- 
ri\a<nv avTov<s £t§ Blpvvijv. JEil. V. H. 
iv. 15. 

'StWEiTLfiapTvpioo, f. riaru}^ (o-ui/, 
ETTL/uL.) to bear further witness icith any 
one, to attest wiih^ foil, by dat. of manner, 
Heb. ii. 4, crvvEirLfiapTvpovvTO's tov 
Geou : comp. v. 3, and so Clemens Rom. 
1 Cor. § 23, & 43. Sext. Empir. adv. Log. 
ii. 324, avvETTL/JLaprvpova-av tlL Xoyw. 

2ui/£7rtTt6t/^t, f. Oijcroj, ( (Tui;, Ittlt. ) 
to pict or lay upon together^ ^vitli another, 
Sept. Num. xii. 11. Plut. Sympos. viii. 7, 
fin. In N. T. mid. to set upon or assail 
with any one, at the same time, absol. 
Acts xxiv. 9, crvvz'rriQs.vTO in later edit, 
comp. ver. 2 for text. rec. crvvi^EVTo. 
Sept. Deut. xxxii. 27. PoL i. 31, 2. Xen. 
.Cyr. iv. 2, 3. Thuc. vi. 10, 56. iii. 54, 
where see my notes. 

2uy£7ro/xai, depon. mid. (k'Trw, etto- 
/i-at,) to follow with or accompany^ with 
dat. Acts XX. 4, and oft. in Class. 

Su2/£py£aj, f. -jjo-co, (cruL'£|0'yo§,) 1) 
of persons, to work together with any one, 
to co-operate^ absol. be a fellow-lahourer^ 
1 Cor. xvi. 16. 2 Cor. vi. 1. Hence 
gener. to help^ aid^ with dat. expr. or impl. 
Mk. xvi. 20. Ja. ii. 22, ii ttlcttl^ crvv- 
VpyEL xots EpyoL<s auTOu, ' wrought '^ith,' 
i. e. was subservient to the production of 
them : a rare use of the term, but of which 
examples have been adduced from Philo, 
and sometimes in Class., but almost always 
with dat. of pers., and of thing only when 
it implies action, as Diod. Sic. t. ii. 262, rj \ 



Tu^Tj (rvvEpyrja-aara Tats EirivoiaL^ av- 
TUiv, Test. XII. Patr. p. 679, to /uto-os 
crvvEpyEX tw (pdovw. 2) of things, to 
W'ork together for any thing, to co-operate^ 
contribute^ to any result, foil, by dat. com- 
modi, and eU with acc. Rom. viii. 28, Tots 
LtyaTrwGL tov Qeov irdvTa avvspyEt eI^ 
dyadou. Pol. xi. 9, 1. Diod. Sic. iv. 76 ; 
with 7r/)os, Plut. Theophr. and others. 

"Evv E py 6^^ ou, o, 77, prop. adj. (<rui/, 
Epyov,) prop, working ivith, co-operating^ 
aiding ; but gener. subst. a co-worker^ fel- 
loic -labourer^ helper. In N. T. spoken 
only of a co-worker^ helper in the work of 
preaching the Gospel ; with gen. of pers. 
Rom. x^^. 3, 9, 21. 1 Cor. iii. 9. Phil. ii. 25. 
iv. 3 ; of object, 2 Cor. i, 24, (rvvEpyoLTrj^ 
X«pas u/xcoy, ' co-workers of your joy,' 
' labouring together for your spiritual joy.' 
With dat. commodi, 3 John 8, avvEpyol 
Ty d\i]dELa : with £ts and acc. for or in 
behalf of 2 Cor. viii. 23, £ls u/xas arw 
spy 09. Col. iv. 11. 

^vvipxofxai,^ aor. 2. cri;yr)X0o2/, (trui/, 
^PX ) 9^ come icith any one, to come 
together: 1) with dat. of pers. to go or 
come icith^ — to accompany^ Lu. xxiii. 55. 
John xi. 33, et al. Also to company^ or 
be conversant icith^ Acts i. 21. Once with 
avv Ttz/t, Acts xxi. 16. Sept. Job xxii. 4. 
Wisd. vii. 2. 2) gener. and usually, to 
come together^ to convene^ assemble^ absol. 
Mk. iii. 20, a-vvipx^TaL irdXiv oy(Xo^, 
Lu. V. 15. Acts i. 6. ii. 6, al. ; with dat. 
of pers. with or to whom, Mk. xiv. 53 ; 
with adv. of place, John xviii, 20, ottou : 
£i5, v,ith acc. of place. Acts v. 16 ; as 
marking result, 1 Cor. xi. 17, 34. Sept. 
and Class. ; final, ver. 33 ; with ettl to 
avTo, 1 Cor. xi. 20. xiv. 23. (Lucian 
Alex. 8, £9 TO auTo.) 7rpo5 Tiva^ Mk. vi. 
33, and Class. 3) used of conjugal inter- 
course, Matt. i. 18. 1 Cor. vii. 5. 

'EvvEaQico^ aor. 2. a-uvicpayoi/^ prop. 

to eat with any one, ' take one's meals with 
any one,' Gen. xliii. 32. Lucian Paras. 22. 
Also, by impl. to have intercourse wiih^ 
associate icith ; foil, by dat. Lu. xv. 2, 
(TvuEadtEL avTOL's^ denoting admission to 
his intimacy ; 1 Cor. v. 11, tolovtlo /uLtjdk 
avvEadiELv^ 'hold no familiar intercourse.' 
So Ps. ci. 5, Sept. \)TrEp-i](pdvw 6<pdaXfx<jo 
KOL dirX-qGTU) Kapcia^TOVTco ov (TwncrdLOV. 
So also in Acts x. 41. xi. 3, and ^ith fxETa 
TLVcs^ Gal. ii. 12, (with which comp. Ex. 
xviii. 12.) The same idiom, too, is found 
in the Class., as Lucian Paras. 59, arv/i- 

TTLVOVTa KOL GWEddioVTa. 

2ui'£crts, £605, 77, {avvLv/jLL^) prop. a 
going or sending together^ (said of the con- 
junction of two streams, Hom. Od. x. 515,) 
but gener. and in X. T. a putting togetlier 
in mind^ by the application of the intellect 



2 YN 



423 



SYN 



to some object ; equiv. to discernment^ 
understanding^ intelliyence^ Lu. ii. 47, k^- 
i<TTavTO dk Trai/Tfs — ettI tj7 avvtatL av- 
Tou. 1 Cor. i. 19. Eph. iii/4. Col. i. 9. 
ii. 2, al. et Class. s»pe, where the term 
sometimes means ^ natural sagacity or 
shrewdness, cleverness,' (what we call 
mother-wit,) as opposed to acquired mental 
power. So Tluicyd. i. 84. iii. 37, and 
espec. ii. 97, Ev(3ov\Lav Kal <tvv&(tiv Trcpi 
Tcou irapovTiov is nrov (3lov. And so in 
1 Cor. i. 19, by oi aocpoi, are denoted tJie 
learned ; and by ol arvusToly the shrewd, 
or sagacious, clever. Sept. Meton. as a 
faculty of the mind, understanding, intel- 
lect, put for the mijid itself, Mk. xii. 33, 
TO ayairav avTov {Qeov) oXtjs t^s 
KapCLa<5 Kal 0X7/5 tt/s crvuicTEU}^. iEl. 
V. H. xii. 1. Plut. Vit. Thes. 6. 

2uj/£T0s, T], 6v, adj. {arvvirifXL, wh. 
see,) prop. ' putting together in mind,' i, e. 
discerning, intelligent, sagacious ; in N. T. 
occ. Lu. X. 21. Matt. xi. 25, ccTr&Kpv^a^ 
TauTtt diro crocptov Kal crvv&Tcov, where 
the two terms, aro(pol and <rvv&TOL, seem 
meant to be thus far distinguished, tbat 
the former has reference to acquired know- 
ledge; the latter, to natural talents; what 
we should express by wise, or learned, and 
talented. The same distinction is to be 
made at 1 Cor. i. 19. At Acts xiii. 7, 
dvdpi arvvETcp, the sense is what the Vul- 
gate well represents by ' viro prudenti,' a 
man of discretion and wisdom, meaning 
that practical wisdom necessary to him 
who governs others. Thus in Thuc. i. 79, 
it is said of king Archidamus, dvrjp crvv- 
fiTos /cat aruxppojv. And so Gen. xii. 33, 
we have a-Kixj/ai to look out for') av- 
dpcoTTov (ppoi/i/nov Kal crvvETov, and else- 
where in Sept. and occasionally in Class. ; 
though generally in the sense clever, 
talented. Sept. 

^vvEvhoKita, f. tjctw, {<rhv, EvdoKeoo,) 
prop, to approve of any thing with another; 
hence, to approve of, and he pleased with ; 
gener. used vrith dat. of pers. as Rom. i. 
32, <rvv£v6oKov(TL Tols TrpdaarovcTL : also, 
with dat. of thing, Lu. xi. 48, avv£v6o- 
keIte toIs EpyoL9 tu)v iraTipuiV v/ul. Acts 
viii. 1, & xxii. 20. So 2 Mace. xi. 24, fxt] 
arvusvdoKovuTa^ Ty lULE-radtarEL, & 1 Mace, 
i. 57, <T. T(Z vofxw. Foil, by infin. to he 
willing, (lit. consentio,) to he disposed to do 
any thing, 1 Cor. vii. 12, 13, /cat ai/Tos 

<TVVEV60KEL oiKElV fJLET aVTrj^, whcrO CTVV 

does not (as the Lexicographers say) mean 
like, but is rather merged in the verb, to 
produce the sense agree, as in the case of 
the Lat. consentio, which is sometimes 
followed by an infin. In Diod. Sic. t. iii. 
74, and Demad. 180, 32, the infin. is im- 
plied. 

Sui/Euco^^ECt), f. ricu), (cuf, evcDX' 'to 



cause to be well fed, to feast,' fr. ev, £X^» 
oxv-,) lo feast several together; mid. or 
pass, to feast ivith any one, to revel icith^ 
2 Pet. ii. 13, (rvvEvuiXov fxEvoi vpuv : impl. 
Jude 12. Jos. Ant. iv. 8, 7. Luc. Philo- 
pat. 4. 

2ui/£</)i<rTr]jUt, {arvv, icpio'T'nfJLi,) in 
N. T. only aor. 2. a-vuETTEa-Tr^v, intrans. 

to set togetJier, to assail together ; with 
/caTtt, Acts xvi. 22, avvETTEcrTy) 6 o'xXos 
kut' avrcov, 'made an assault together 
against them.' 

Sui/tX"*^ (^'X^O hold together, 

to press together, (as Aristoph. Nub. 953,) 
— to hold fast, shut up, trans. 1 ) prop. 
as Td toT-a, 'to stop one's ears,' (namely, 
by drawing them together,) for which the 
Class, writers use kTrCKa^Elv, KaraXa- 
jSetf, or ETriyEcrdaL -rd coxa,) Acts vii. 
57. an action expressive of detestation 
and abhorrence. So Plut. t. ii. p. 1095, 
-rd tora KaTaXvyf/ri Tats x^parl, dvcrx^- 
paivoDV Kal (3Se\vtt6iulevo's. Sept. to 
(TTOfxa, Is. Iii. 15. Of a city besieged, Lu. 
xix. 43, (Tvvi^ovarL ote TrdvToQEv. So 
Sept. 1 Sam. xxiii. 8. 2 Mace. ix. 2. Of 
a crowd, to press upon any one, Lu, viii. 
45 ; of persons having a prisoner in cus- 
tody, to hold fast, confine, Lu. xxii. 63. 
Hdian. ii. 13, 8. Luc. Tox. 39. Pind. 
Pyth. i. 37. 2) fig. to constrain, strongly 
urge; with acc. 2 Cor. v. 14, v yap 
dydin] tov Xp. arvuEX^'- vp-d^, i. e. ' so to 
act,' where CEcumen. well explains by <tvv- 
coQel. Pass. Acts xviii. 5, ctuvelx^to tw 
TTVEvp-aTL 6 IlaCXos, in text. rec. Pass. 
<jvv£\oixaL, prop, to he hemmed in or 
straitened for room, as used either in a 
natural, or, what is more usual, 2i figurative 
sense, either with a prep, or a dat. of 
instrument, or ahsolutely, Phil. i. 23, 
<7vvEXop.aL EK Tu)v dvo, I.e. 'I am held 
in suspense between these two (conflicting 
motives ;)' ek for otto, Lu. xii. 50, Trais 
arvvExofxaL k'ws ov TgXgo-Gf? ; ' how anxious 
am I till it be accomplished !' how am I 
distressed till, &c. tw ttoXepuj, Palaepb. 
xxxix. 5. Also == to he seized, affected, 
afflicted, i. e. with fear, disease, (especially 
attacks of fever,) &c. with dat. Lu. viii. 
37, (po^u) pLEydXo) crvvELXovTo. So Plut. 
X. 788, <r.* cpofico. Job iii. 24. Matt. iv. 24, 
foo-ois — crvviXPI^kvov^. Lu. iv. 38. Acts 
xxviii. 8. Sept. Job xxxi. 34. So Diod. 
Sic. iii. 33, i/oVots. Ammian. Marc. i. 26, 
' constricti rapidis (read, 12^016.1%) fehrihus.'* 

'2vvri^ofj.aL, depon. pass. (<ruf, ri^.) 
in Class, to joy or rejoice icith any pers. 
In N. T. only with dat. of tiling, to delight 
in any thing, lit. ' to be delighted with.' 
Rom. vii. 22, avvh^opaiydp tco yo'^uu), i.e. 
' I delight in the law.' An expression similar 
to, but much stronger than that at ver, 16, 

I (TVJJL<p1]/ULL TW PO/JitO OTt /CttXoS SC. tCTt, 



2 Y N 



424 



the one ha^nng respect to the office of tlie 
understanding^ to approve ; the other, 
to that of tlie lieaH, to delight in. Eur. 
Med. 126. ^1. Y. H. ix.;21. 

^vvrids.La^ (cruf>}0T/9. dvrelliDg 

or accustoming together, fr. ahv. r\do^^ 
custom,) an accustoming together^ iEL H. 
An. xvi. 36. In N. T. a usage^ custom, 
John xviii. 39, kaTL crvv v/iTu. 1 Cor. xi. 
16, (Tvu. s-X^'-^- -^iit. X. 4. 5, 77 7ra- 

TOio? crvvvdcLu. Demosth. 342, and oft. 
in Class. 

ISuyriXi/cttoTfj?, ou, 6, {crvu, JiX.fr. 
riXiKLa^) one of tlie same age^ an equal in 
age. Gal. i. 14. ^1. Y. H. ii. 34. Diod. 
Sic. i. 53. Hdian, i. 5, 11, and other lat. 
Tvriters : the purer Greek term is aw- 

2uy0a7rT6o, f. \//a), (crui/, d'aTTTW,) 
prop, to bury icith any one, as Hdot. v, 5, ?; 
yui/j] cruyOaTTTETat avopl^ and oft. in 
Class. : in X. T. fig. ^vith Christ, in the 
likeness of his burial, with dat. as in 
2uy/<:dO>//^at. Pass. Rom. \i. 4. Col. ii. 
12, (rvVTa<pivT8<s aurto kv tco (SaTTTicr- 
fiaTL, ' buried with him,' namely, in the 
■waters of baptism ; alluding to baptism by 
immersion. See my note. 

SuivOXdw, f. dcroj, (fruzy, OXdo), to 
crush,) prop, to crush together^ also to 
hreaJc by crusldng together ; and then 
gener. to breaJc, dash in pieces, pass. Matt, 
xxi. 44; and Lu. xx. 18, 7rd§ 6 Trgcrcoy 
£7r' IkzIvov tov Xidov (TwdXacrdy'icTiTaL, 
Sept. and later Class. ; the earher ones 
having avvOpauw. 

'EvvdWf^u)^ f. li/co, (crui/, 6Xt/3to,) to 
press together, to press closely, on all sides, 
as a crowd upon a person, with acc. Mark 
V. 24, 31. Jos. Bell. iii. 8, 8, (Tvvd\L(3o- 

fxivOV TOV TtXjjOoUS TTf.pl TOV (TTQaTt]yOV. 

Pint. Syrapos. vi. 6, fin. 

^vvQ piiTTT uy, f. \i/(xj, (cruy, Ooutttw, 
to break,) prop, to break by crushing toge- 
ther, to crush to pieces i in N. T. fig. t^v 
Kapc'tav Tiyos, lit. to crush the head, to 
dishearten or quite subdue one's courage, 
Acts xxi. 13. So ol diroTEdovfifxivoL tcl^ 
iiAux«^? Pla^- Rep. vi. p. 495, E. 

"Evvikcjo, see in ^vvl->]ixl, 

"Evv It] fxL, f. (Tvvriau), aor. 1. <rvvT]Ka, 
aor. 2. crvvrjv, (3 plur. pres. o-vvlovctl, and 
part. crvvLcou fr. arvvLtw,) prop, to send, or 
bring together, as foes in battle, Hom. II. 
i. 8. vii. 210 ; fig. to bring or put things 
together in mind ; hence to discern, per- 
ceive, he aware of ; in X. T. gener. to un- 
derstand, comprehend, i. e. by attentively 
considering and laying any thing to heart, 
absol. Matt, xiii., 13, liKovovTi.^ ovk clkov- 
ovcTLu, ouok (TVULOvcn, i. e. by metonymy 
of cause for effect, " do not lay it to heart',' 
so as to understand it ; do not so compre- 



hend it as to enter into its spirit and obey 
its requisitions ; a figurative use of the 
term similar to that of aKovu) in the sense 
to obey, ver. 14. Mk. iv. 12. vi. 52, al. 
ssepe. Acts vii. 25, oi ck ov crvvrjKav. 
Rom. XV. 21. 2 Cor. x. 12, ov avuLOva-L, 
' are not wise.' Foil, by acc. Matt. xiii. 
51, avv7]KaT£ TavTa irdvTa; Lu. ii. 50, 
TO prjfxa : by o-rt, Matt. xvi. 12, al. Sept. 
and Class. From the Hebr. to under- 
stand, be icise, viz. in respect of duty 
towards God, i. e. to be ' so wise as to fear 
God,' Rom. iii. 11, ovk egttlv 6 cvvlcou. 

"Zw LCTTri fJ.L,^VULCrTd(JO & ^VVLCTTCtVU)^ 

f. crvcrTi](T(jo, {'L(TTr\fjiL,) occ. in both the 
trans, and intrans. signif. to make stand 
idth, and to stand icith ; see"l(TTr]ui. I. 
TRANS, in the pres. imperf. and aor. 1. 
Act. to make stand with, together, to place 
together, as oft. in Class. In X. T. to 
place icith or before any one : 1) prop, of 
persons, to introduce, to present to one's 
acquaintance ; and hence =: to commend^ 
to represent as worthy, to recommend, with 
acc. and dat. Rom. xvi. 1, (TvvL<TTt]ixL ok 
vjuTv ^oi(3riv. 2 Cor. v. 12. with acc. and 
TTpds TLva, 2 Cor. iv. 2, and Class, as 
Longin. c. 34. Xen. Jos. and Class, with 
simpl. acc. 2 Cor. iii. 1, kavTov^ auvLcrTd- 
v£b¥. X. 12. Pass. 2 Cor. xii. 11. 2) fig. 
to set foiih, shoiv, display, evince, estcJjlishi, 
with simpl. acc. Rom. iii. 5, £i G£ h dciKLa 
ilfxuov Qsov OLKaLoavviiu <TVVL<JTri<TL, i. e. 
prove or establish ; a sense arising natu- 
rally out of the proper one o^plcLcing toge- 
ther ; there being implied the juxta-posi- 
tion of two things for the purpose of show- 
ing their comparative size or value, v. 8. 
2 Cor. vi. 4, crvvLcrT(x>vTE<5 kavTov^ 
Qeov CLaKovoL : with doub. acc. Gal. ii. 
18, TrapalSaTiiv kixavTov (TVVL(TT7]fiL : so 
Philo. 517, <r. avTov TrpocpvTtjv. Diod. 
Sic. xiii. 91 : with acc. and infin. 2 Cor. 
vii. 11. Diod. Sic. xiv. 45. Jos. Ant. vii, 
2, 1, <rvvL(TTuov kavTov^ cos evuov^. — II. 
intrans. in the perf. and aor. 2. act. to 
stand icith, together, &c. 1) prop, of pers. 
with dat. Lu. ix. 32, ^vo avopa's tous 
(TWiCTTOiTa's avTw. Sept. and Class. 2) 
fg. from the transitive signif. to place 
together, as parts to form a whole, i. e. to 
co7istitide, create, bring into e-xistence, Diog. 
Laert. Carnead. iv. 64, 77 crvcrTria-aa-a 
(pv(TL^ Kai OLoXvcrsL, Plato Timseus, p. 
30, E. TivL ru)v X,wo)V avTov [tou k6<t- 
fxov) £15 OfiOLOTi^Ta 6 ^vvLorTa^ ^vvi(T- 
TYjCTE ; p. 41, D. (o Geo?) ^varT-ncra^ ok to 
Trdv. Hence in X. T. intrans. to be con- 
stituted, created, consist, subsist, Col. i. 17, 
TrdvTa kv auTw (TvviaTt]KE, where, how- 
ever, consei^ation and preservation seem 
likewise implied. So Aristot. de Mundo^ 
c. 6, SK Qeov Ta irdvTa, Kal cid Q&ov 
crvvk(TTy]Ks. 2 Pet. iii. 5, yrj licaTos — 
(7vvEaTU}(ra tco tov Qeov Xoyco, where 



S YN 



425 



2 YN 



see my note. Philo de Plant. Noe, p. 215, 
£AC yTj'S aTraajjs, kul Trai/ros vdaro^ Kai 
aipo^ Kal TTvpo^^ — crvvtcrTi] uSe 6 Kocrixo^. 
Max. Tyr. Diss. xxv. p. 253, t(Z Atos 
ifSVfxaTL yrj <Tvvi<JTt] k.t.X. 

^vvobtvu)^ f. £ucraj, (crui/, o^fuw,) 
5^ on tJie tcai/ icith any one, to travel or 
journey ivith^ foil, by dat. Acts ix. 7, and 
Class. 

2i;t/o5ta, a9, ^, (cruj/, 6^09,) prop, a 
travelling together^ Pint. vi. 175. ix. 131 ; 
also the companions of a journey, Arr. 
D. E. iii. 2t) ; in N. T. meton. a company 
of travellers^ a caravan, Lu. ii. 44. Jos. 
Ant. vi. 12, 1. Arr. Epict. iv. 1, 91. 
Strabo, iv. p. 314. 

2 ui/ot/C£a), f, 77(70), ((Tuy, oi/CEO),) to 
divell in the same liouse ivith any one, to 
live icitk^ espec. as husbands with wives, to 
cohabit, absol. 1 Pet. iii. 7, and oft. in Class. 

^vvo LKoBo fxiijo, f. 770-0), (crui/, olko- 
Sofxiu),) prop, to build in company with 
any one, 1 Esdr. v. 68 ; in N.T. pass. fig. to 
he built together ivith other Christians, into 
a spiritual temple, the Church of God, 
Eph. ii. 22 ; see fully in OiKooofxito, III. 

Sui/o/itXgo), f. 770-0), (o-u//, OfxiXeco,) 
prop, to be in company ivith : in N. T. to 
converse luiih, to talk with, with dat. Acts 
X. 27. 

Yivvo fxopiw, f. 77cro), (o-i/i/, ojULopiu), 
o/uLopo^, from o/xos, opo§,) to border to- 
gether^ to be contiguous with, foil, by dat. 
Acts xviii. 7, oi) n oiKia r\v a-uvofiopovcra 
Trj (Tvvayuiyi), i. e. amterminous, con- 
iiguo2is ; for which the Classical term is 
orvuopiu), used by Polyb. 

^vuoxhi V^i h, {(Tvuix^i) "pYop. ahold- 
ing in, a shutting up, as of a city besieged ; 
also of a narrow place, as Horn, II. xxiii. 
830, kv ^uvoxv^-tv ooov, implying the being 
hemmed in or straitened for room. In N. T. 
used fig. to signify distress, anariety ; the 
term thus denoting, like angustia in Latin, 
such anxiety as holds the mind as it were 
enchained, Lu. xxi. 25, arvvoxh kdvujv. 
2 Cor. ii. 4, o-. Kapoia^, i. e. heart-felt dis- 
tress. Sept. Job XXX. 3, and Class. 

^vvTacrrro} or tto), f. ^o), (ci/i/, 
TctcTo-o),) prop, to arrange or set in order 
together ; in N. T. to arrange or set in 
order ivith any one, i. e. to order, appoint, 
direct, with dat. Matt. xxvi. 19, kTroir^aav 
ol fxadriTai o»§ (TwiTa^ev avTol^ 6 
'Ir](rov<s : impl. xxvii. 10. Sept. Gen. 
xviii. 19. xxvi. 11. Pol. iii. 50, 9. ^lian 
V. H, ix. 13. Xen. Cyr. v. 3, 46. 

Sui/TtXeia, a9, 77, [crvvTEXia),) prop. 
a bringing togetJier, and fig. a consumma- 
tion, or completion, as oft. in Class. Sept. 
In N. T. used only in the phrase arvv- 
TtXtm ToD ui(DVo^, which means 'the 
end of the world,' or present state of 



things; Matt. xiii. 39, 40, 49. xxiv. 3. 
xxviii. 20. comp. 4 Esdr. vii. 43 ; tlie term 
aiuyy denoting ' the duration appointed by 
Divine Providence to the present state of 
probation, and of the visible Church.' 
By crvvTiK. twu aiajvcou, Heb. ix. 26, is 
meant ' the cl ose of the Mosaic dispensation.' 

Sui/TgXfco), f. fcVo), prop, to end or 
terminate together ; in N. T. to finish 
wholly, complete: 1) prop, and gener. 
with acc. Matt. vii. 28, avvtriXEQEi/ 6 

*It]<TOV? TOUS \07OU9 TOUTOUS. Lu. iv. 13: 

of time, ver. 2. Acts xxi. 27. Sept. and 
Class. In the sense of to fulfil, accom- 
plish, as a promise, prophecy, &c. with 
acc. Rom. ix. 28, Xoyov crvvT&XHyv. Sept. 
2) by Hebr. to finish, complete, — to make^ 
with acc. Heb. viii. 8, avvTEXicrui kirl 
Tov oIkov 'laparjX — diad-nKiiu KaivriV. 

2uyTi/xi/o), f,£/uLU), perf. <TvvTiTfxr]Ka, 
prop, to contract or shorten the length of 
any thing, by cutting it shorter, as Thuc. 
vii. 36, Ta§ TTptopas ^wv veoov avvTEjUL- 
vovTE^. And so cr. eis oKiyov, Schol. on 
Thucyd. viii. 45 : more freq. however, to 
cut short, to curtail; also fig. to abridge^ 
sum up what one has to say in a summary 
way ; likewise, to pronounce summarily, as 
a judge delivers his sentence. Hence in 
N. T. to decide, determine, decree, Rom. 
ix. 28, bis, Xoyov yap crvvTEXcov kul 
crvvTEfxi/tJou Ev OLKaLoauvT]' oTL Xoyov 

(TVVTETfXrifJiivoV TTOLVa-EL KvpL09 ETTL 

y^s, ' for his word he doth fulfil, and he 
decreeth in righteousness ; because his word 
decreed will the Lord execute upon the 
land.' 

Sdi^tt^p £0),f. 77cro), 1) prop, like Latin 
conservo, to keep with one, or to keep to- 
gether, preserve trom destruction, &c. Matt, 
ix. 17 ; said of wine, Lu. v. 38. And so 
in Lib. Enoch, p. 191, we have cr. Trjv 
xf/vxvt^ 5o)77i;. 2) to keep near oneself 
for safety or protection, Mk. vi. 20, cxvv- 
£T77p€i ahTov. Also fig. to kccp in one's 
mind, as p-nfxaTa, Lu. ii. 19. So Sept, 
Dan. vii. 28, a. ev tt? Kapdia. Pol. xxxi. 
6, 5, or. yvwfx^v 'Trap' kavnrtZ, 

'2vVTLdt]/J.L, f. 770-0), [crVV, Tl6.) tO SCt 

or put things together, also by impl. to 
arrange and settle things, or any business^ 
as Demosth. p. 275, 26 ; also in mid. crvv- 
TidEcrdai Tivi, or Trpos Tiva, to arrange 
or settle for oneself v^ilh. any one, as to the 
doing of any thing, or to make a covenant 
or agreement with him, to agree or promise 
to do so or so, Hom. II. i. 76. Hdot. iii. 
157, et al. and oft. in Class, foil, by infin. 
and so in N. T. Lu. xxii. 5, kol (tvveQevto 
avTiZ apyvpiov Sovuui. Foil, by inf, 
with Tov, Acts xxiii. 20. Test. xii. Patr, 
707; by Lva, John ix. 22, <tvveteQelvto 
'iva. See. ' de communi consilio decre- 
verant.' Once in text. rec. (but see my 



2 YN 



426 



2Y2 



note,) to asse?it, absol. Acts xxiv. 9. So 
Philostr. Heroic, c. 5, fin. oXiyoi^ toov 
^ovkev/maTcou ^uurLdeadaL. 

^vvTo fiu)^, adv. (crui/To/xo?, fr. cvv- 
Ttjuvw,) concisely^ hriejiy^ in few words, 
Acts xxiv. 4, aKouarai as rj/moov cr. scil. 
Xe^ovtcou. So Jos. c. Ap. i. 1, ypctxpuL 
iTvvTOfXM^. Xen. (Ec. xii. 19, cos dk <jvv- 

TO/ULU)^ eiTTElv. 

^vvTpEXtJ^t aor. 2. crvvi^pafxov^ (cruu^ 
Tpfc'xw,) prop, to run tvith others, intrans. 
prop, in N. T. only fig. eU Ti, 1 Pet. iv. 4, 

flf] (TVUTpE^OVTOOU VjUCOV £19 T7]V a\)Tl]V 

ao-WTi'as dvdxv(TLv. Dem. 214, 7. 
Of a multitude, to run together^ flock to- 
getlier.Wk. vi. 33. Acts iii. 11. Judith vi. 
18. Jos. B. J. vi. 2, 8. Xen. An. v. 7, 4. 

Sui/Tf)I'/3 w, f. v/ao), (cru:/, Tp.) prop, to 
ruh together^ e. gr. sticks for kindling fire, 
Ta TTupEta, Luc. Yer. Hist. i. 32 ; usu- 
ally, and in N. T., to break or crush to- 
getJier^ by concussion, to break in pieces^ 
trans. 1) prop. Mk. v. 4. xiv. 3, aw- 
TpLxl/acra to dXd^. i. e. diffracto orificio^ 
alabastrum aperuit; see my note there; John 
xix. 36. Of breaking a vessel^ Rev. ii. 27. 
Sept. & Class, as ^1. V. H. xii. 46. Xen. 
Cyr. vi. 1, 29. Also of a ship^ Thuc. 
iv. 12. Eurip. Cycl. 700. Of a reed 
bruised, but not broken, Matt. xii. 20, 
KaXafxav (tuvtetoliul/ulevou ov /caTect^ei, 
where see my note. 2) fig. like Lat. 
co?itero and confringo^ to break or crush 
the strength or power of any one, to crush^ 
' utterly destroy,' as an earthen vessel is 
by being broken ; a metaphor of frequent 
occ. in 0. T. with acc. Lu. ix. 39, irvEVjuia — 
crvvT pi^ov avTov^ ' the spirit breaking him 
down,' ' crushing his strength ;' comp. Mk. 
ix. 18, ^iipaiuETnL. Thus of Satan, ' to 
break or crush his power,' Rom. xvi. 20. 
Sept. Josh. X. 10. And so in Demosth. 
142, and often elsewhere, the term is 
used of crusliing, i. e. entirely subduing, 
an enemy. Also in Pol. xxvi. 3, 6, 
Toi/s 'A)^aiou5. Pass. Luke iv. 18, 
<TVVTETpiiJifXEVov<s T)]v KupSiav^ ' brokcu 
or contrite in heart,' i. e. dispirited, 
afflicted. In this metaphorical sense, as 
used of mental sorrow, the term also 
occurs in Sept. Ps. xxxiv. 19, and Class, 
as Plut. vi. 171, 8, fxi] awTpifBEo-OaL ^)/, 
fiijdk ddviLLETi> Tov EXEyxojULEVov. Pol. 
xxi. 10, 2, crvvTp, Ttj dLavoia. Diod. Sic. 

xvi. 81, (TVUTp. Tttls \//U)(«rS. 

^uvn-p L/uLina, aro9, to, {awTpi^u)^) 
prop, a breaking together^ a crushing^ Sept. 
Lev. xxi. 18. Is. xxx. 14. In N. T. fig. 
destruction, Rom. iii. 16, Ecclus. xl. 11. 
I Mace. ii. 7. 

^vvn-po(po£, ou, o, 17, adj. {avv- 
TpE(pu),) prop, nourished or nursed to- 
gether, Xen. ii. 3. In N. T. subst. and 
fig, one brought up or educated with an- 



other, as a foster-brother or school-fellow^ 
Acts xiii. I. Jos. and Class. 

Sui/Tuyxai/w, aor. 2. cvvETvypv^ 
{a-uif, Tvyxcti'co,) to fall in with, meetivith^ 
to come to or at any one, with dat. Lu. viii. 
19. Jos. Ant. i. 12, 3, cvvtvX'j^v axtr^ 
^ELO^ ayyEXos, and Class. 

^vvvTTOKp Lvo/ma L, {arvv, vtt.) depon. 
mid. aor. 1. pass. avvvirEKpidjjv in mid. 
sense, to dissemble with, ' practise dissimu- 
lation,' foil, by dat. as in Suyx^^-o^? Cral. 
ii. 13. Pol. iii. 92, 5. iii. 52, 6. Plut, C. 
Mar. L4. 

^vvvirov py Ett), f, ijcro), (cui/, virovp- 
yico, fr, vTTovpyd^, helper,) to serve, help, 
aid ivith any one, foil, by dat. of manner, 
2 Cor. i. 11, GvyvirovpyovvTUiv vfxu)V 
T?7 ^ETiazi. Luc, Bis accus. 17, crvvayuy- 

VlX^0fJLEU1}£ T^S riSoV?]?, TlTTEp UVTy TCL 

TToXXd ^vuvTrovpyEl. 

^vv (joSl'vcu, f. Luu), {arvu, wSivo),) prop. 
to be in travail together, to bring forth 
together, said of animals, Porphyr. de Abs- 
tin. iii. 10. In N. T. fig. to be in pain 
together, absol. spoken of 77 kt'lo-l^ collect, 
Rom. viii. 22. So Eur. Helen, 733, Juv- 

itiblVEL KaKOL^. 

^vviofjiocrLa, as, 77, (crui/o/xi/u/xi,) prop. 
a swearing together, fig. conspiracy. Acts 
xxiii. 13, arvvcofJioa'Lav TTEiroLrjKOTE^. Jos. 
and Class, 

2u/0Ti5, £tt)s, 77, {arvpco,) a sand-bank, 
or quicksand, in the sea, and so called be- 
cause when ships run upon it, it as it were 
draws them in and swallows them up. 
Acts xxvii. 17, fJiV £ts Tiju S. EKirio'ctia-L. 

2 vp 60, f. vpu), to draiv, or di^ag, imply- 
ing force, trans. John xxi. 8, a-vpovTE^ to 
Slktvov. Acts xvii. 6. Rev. xii. 4. Sept. 
and Class. Also a frequent term to de- 
note the apprehending of any one and car- 
rying him before a magistrate, or to prison, 
Acts viii. 3. xiv. 19. Arr. Epict. i. 24, c 
fcis TO dEcr/uLcoTripLou. It does not appear, 
from the examples adduced, that the term 
in this use conveys any idea of personal 
violence ; it seems merely to denote com- 
pidsion. See more in my notes. 

^vcnrapdcrcTUi or ttw, f. tz^o), (cuz/, 
o-TT.) prop, to tear up or lacerate togetlier ; 
in N. T. intens. to quite coiivulse,^ throw 
into strong spasms, spoken of the effects of 
demoniacal possession, with acc. Lu. ix, 42. 

'Euacni/jLov, ov, to, (neut. of adj. 
(TV(T(TJi/tjL09, ' signed or marked together,' 
or alike, from avu, crtj/xa,) a concerted 
sign, token, signal, agreed upon with 
others, Mk. xiv. 44, avaa^ixov, comp. 
Matt. xxvi. 48, orij/uftof. Sept. Judg.xx.40. 
Diod. Sic. xiii. 45, 46. Strabo, vi. p. 428, C. 

Sucrcoj/ios, ov, b, 17, adj. of the same 
body ivith another, Lat. concorpor ; fig. 
spoken in respect of the Christian Church. 



SYS 



427 



S(I>P 



as TO (rCofxa tov Xpia-Tov^ and of the 
Gentiles CiS partakers in it, Eph. iii. 6. 

SutTTao-iafTTJ/s, ou, 6, (o-uorTacm- 
^o),) a partner in sedition or msurrection^ 
a fellow-insurjjent, ]\Ik. xv. 7. Jos. Ant. 
xiv. 2, 1, Kaxd ' ApL(TToPov\ou /cat twi; 
a-vo-TaaiaarTcuu avrou. 

SucTaT iK'o?, t;, oi/, adj. (o-uyicTT^j/ix/.,) 
prop. ' capable of bringing together, or in- 
troducing;' so iiriCTToXi] (Tva-rarLKi)^ 'a 
letter of introduction,"' 2 Cor. iii. 1. These 
letters, similarly called by Arrian Epict. 
iii. 2, 1, ypa.fX}JiaTa cruarTariKci. Diog. 
Laert. v. 18, tTTicrToXioi/ cr., and pro- 
bably deriving their origin from the ' tes- 
eei'ae hospitalitatis' of the earlier Greeks, 
were much employed among the Greeks 
and Romans, and also the Jews and early 
Christians. 

^voTTavpou), f. axrw, (cui/, err.) to 
crucify with any one, with dat. Matt, 
xxvii. 44, al. Fig. Rom. vi. 6, 6 iraXaLo^ 
Vfxcou aifdpcoiro^ a-vvEcrravpoodT], scil. 
Xpio-TO), ' our old (former) man was cru- 
cified with Christ,' where see my note ; 
Gal. ii. 20. 

SutTTtWw, f. XtO, (ctUI/, (TT.) 1) 

prop, to draiv together^ or around, as a 
vest, Aristoph. Eccl. 99 ; hence to fold 
up or envelope^ as said of clothes ; also, to 
draw in or contract. In N. T. used of a 
dead body rolled up and swathed for 
burial. Acts v. 6, by a use of the word 
answering to that of irspia-TiWu) in 
Ezek. xxix. 5. Jos. Ant. xvii. 3, 5. Hdot. 
ii. 90, and of which only two examples 
have been adduced, Eurip. Troad. 376, 
oD? EV TriirXoL's crvvzcrToXtjcrav, and V. 
108, w TToXus oy/co§ (rv(TTEK\ofxiv(jov 
irpoyovu)v. Also, by a use found in Sept. 
Apocr. and Class., as applied to things^ de- 
noting what is distressful^ 1 Cor. vii. 29, 
oTt 6 Kaipo^ (rui/£crTa\/A£yos, answering 
to 77 kvEcrrcoaa a.vdyKr\ at ver. 26, and so 
corresponding to what is said at 2 Tim. iii. 
1, with allusion to the persecution shortly 
to come on, kvcrrri^yovTaL Kaipol x^Xettoi. 
Others, however, explain, ' the time is 
short an interpretation supported, in- 
deed, by the usus loquendi^ but not so 
agreeable to the context. 

Suo'T£i»a^6o, f. ^cy, (<Tuy, CTEya^o),) 
io groan or sigh together, spoken of t] ktl- 
(£715, collect. Rom. viii. 22. 

SucToix^^? f- ri(^o^t {(Tvv, (TT.) prop. 
to stand in the same roiv, or advance 
in order togetlier, as soldiers, Pol. x. 21, 7; 
in N. T. fig. to go together with, = to cor- 
respond to, with dat. Gal. iv. 25. So 
G\)<TTOLyo<s, 'corresponding,' Pol. xiii. 8, 1. 
Theophr. Cans. PI. vi. 4. 

S UCTpaTtWTTJS, ou, 6, (<TUI/, CT. ) 

prop, a fellow-soldier; fig. of Christian 



teachers, Paul's companions in the labours 
and dangers of the Christian warfare, Phil, 
ii. 25. Philem. 2. 

prop, of things, to turn, tivist, wind to- 
gether, espec. into one bundle, band, mass, 
and hence gener. — to gather together, col- 
lect, with acc. Acts xxviii. 3, <TV(rTpi\lfav- 
T09 TOV Tlavkov (ppvyavwv ttXtjOo's : a 
graphic expression, with which compare 
Hesych. oi yvatpET's aKuvdwu au)p6v av- 
crrpi\l/avTE<s. So Prov. xxx. 4, t/s (tvv- 
icrTpEy\rE vowp kv ifxaTLU) ; The usual 
term is a-vWtyco, as Xen. An. iv. 3, 11, 
(ppvyava avWiyovTE^ cov ettl Trvp. The 
word is of frequent occ. in Class, of col- 
lecting persons into masses. 

^v(TTpo(pr}, 779, rj, {(yv(TTpE<pa),) prop. 
a turning or icinding together ; also a 
gathering together of people, a concourse, 
multitude, meaning in Acts xix. 40, ' a 
tumultuous assemblage,' as oft. in Sept. 
and Class. ; in the sense (found also in 
Sept. Jos. and Class.) of combination, con- 
spiraxiy, xxiii. 12, iroiricxavrE's a-vcrTpo(pi]v^ 
comp. ver. 13. 

S uo-x^iwaTt , f. t-cu), {a-vv, cx-) 
prop, to give the same form with, to con- 
form to any thing ; in N. T. only mid. or 
pass, to conform oneself, be conformed to 
any thing, with dat. Rom. xii. 2, /mt] crv- 
o-X^/uaTi^£<76£ T£o aiwvL T. 1 Pet. i. 14. 

^(payi], ^5, 77, {^(pdX^oo,) slaughter^ 
prop, of animals for food or in sacrifice, 
Acts viii. 32, to? irpo^aTov ettl cr<payriv. 
Rom. viii. 36, ws 7rp6(3aTa a-cpayrj^, i. e. 
for slaughter; Ja. v. 5, kdpixl/aTE Tas 
Kapdia^ vfxcov cos kv I'lfxtpa a(payr}^, i. e. 
' like beasts in the day of slaughter,' with- 
out care or forethought. So Jer. xii. 3, 
dyvLcov auTov^ fits h^ipav c^ay^s au- 

TWV. 

^<p dy Lov, ov, TO, {(7<pdX^(jo,) a victim^ 
an animal slaughtered in sacrifice, Acts 
vii. 42, fxr] (r(pdyia — Trpocs-i]viyKaTE fxoi^ 
and so oft. in Class. 

S 0 a ^ o), Att. (TcpaTTO), f. ^w, to slaugh- 
ter, kill, slay, trans, prop, animals for food 
or sacrifice. Rev. v. 6, apviov eo-ti^ko^ cos 
k(T(payfXEVov. ver. 9, 12. xiii. 8. Sept. and 
Class, oft. ; also of persons, to kill, slay^ 
with acc. 1 John iii. 12 bis, ILaiv lacpa^z 
TOV d^EXtpov avTov. Rev. vi. 4, 9. xviii, 
24. Once hyperbol. of a deadly wound. 
Rev. xiii. 3, {KECpaXrj) k(j<paypLEvii] sis 
^dvaTov. Sept. and Class. 

'2(p6^pa, adv. (prop. neut. pi. of adj. 
a<poSp6^, eager, vehement,) vehemently^ 
very much, Matt. ii. 10, and oft. Sept. and 
Class. 

^(poSpco?, adv. (a(f>odp6^,) vehemently, 
very much. Acts xxvii. 18, and Class. 
I ^(p pay iX^oo, f. iVw, (o-^payis,) to 



P 



428 



SXO 



seal^ trans. 1) prop, to seal up^ to close 
and make fast with a seal or signet, e. gr. 
letters or writings, so that they may not 
be read ; hence in N. T. fig. of words, to 
keep in silence^ not to muke knoivn^ with 
acc. Rev. x. 4, ccppdyLcrov a. eXaXriarav 
ai Ittto. fSpovTai. xxii. 10 : of which sense 
an example occurs in Stob. Serm. p. 215, 
^(ppdyiaov tou§ fikv Xoyous (riyrj ; also 
gener. to seal^ set a seal^ e. gr. for the sake of 
security upon a sepulchre, prison, &c. with 
Toi/ Xi'Oof, Matt, xxvii. 66 ; with kirdvo) 
Tiyo5, Rev. XX. 3 : a mode of promoting 
security, in use from the earliest ages, 
when it supplied the place of locks. See 
Dan. vi. 17, and the passages of ancient 
writers adduced by Wetstein. Hence the 
term came to have the figurative sense to 
secure to any one, to make sure.^ n to de- 
liver over safely, mid. with acc. and dat. 
Rom. XV. 28, acppayLo-d/uLevo^ avrol^ tou 
KapTTou TovTov. 2) gcuer. r= to set a seal 
or mark upon any thing, in token of its 
being genuine and approved, e.gr. persons, 
with acc. Rev. vii. 3; pass. ver. 4 — 8. 
Oftener of decrees, documents, to attest hy 
a seal ; hence in N. T. by a metaphor 
taken from privileges and orders confirmed, 
as it were, with the witness of a seal, to 
attest^ confir?}!, authorize, commission., with 
acc. John vi. 27, tovtov 6 XlaT^p k(r<ppd- 
yt(T€i/, i. e. as the Messiah, comp. v. 36 ; 
foil, by oTi, iii. 33, 6 XafSojv avTou tjjv 
fxapTvpiav k(T<ppdyicr(.v on 6 0£os aXrj- 
idm ka-Tiv^ for £(5£t^£i/, ' attests., confirms,' 
professes his belief. And as testimonies 
of contracts were confirmed by the impo- 
sition of a seal, and thus rendered unsus- 
pected of fraud, so any confirmation of 
truth was denoted by the expressive idea 
of a seal. So also of Christians, whom 
God attests and confirms by the gift of the 
Holy Spirit as the earnest, pledge, seal of 
their election to salvation, mid. with acc. 
2 Cor. i. 22, 6 crcppayLO-d/uL^vo^ r]/uLd<5, i. e. 
' who hath given us a pledge of his future 
acceptance ;' pass. Eph. i. 13. iv. 30. 

20pa7 19, T^os, 17, {(ppda-au),) a seal, 
i. e. 1) prop, an instrument for sealing, a 
signet, signet-ring. Rev. vii. 2, & Class. 2) a 
seal, as impressed upon letters, books, &c. 
for the sake of privacy and security. Rev. 
V. 1, <T<ppayl(TLv ETTTd. ver. 2, al. ; also a 
seal, impressed as a mark or token of genu- 
ineness, ix. 4 ; and so of a motto, inscrip- 
tion, 2 Tim. ii. 19. Fig. equiv. to a token, 
pledge, proof, 1 Cor. ix. 2, 77 crcppayU ttj^ 
ifXTj's diro<TTo\ri<s v/jlel^ eo-ts, meaning, 
that ' their being in the Lord is a decided 
proof of his Apostleship ; as much so as a 
seal is of the authenticity of a writing.' 
The metaphor is derived from the seals of 
sovereigns being affixed to the letters cre- 
dential of ambassadors, to attest their au- 



thenticity. So Jos. de Mace. 7, /3to9, ov 

TTLCTTr] ^avdTOV (Tippayl^ lT£\lLU)Cr£, 

Hence it came to mean, in a general way, 
a demonstration of the truth of any thing, 
Rom. iv. 11, <rr]jU6Toi/ 7r£piTo/At}s, acfypa- 
ylSa Tr]S SLKaL0crvvrj<3 k.t.X. 

^<pvp6v, ov, TO, (kindr. with G(pvpa,) 
the ankle-bo7ie. Acts iii. 7. 

Sx£<56i/, adv. (o-x£ii^,) prop, of place, 
near, comp. t'xw VII. ; in N. T. nearly., 
almost. Acts xiii. 44, <t\e^6v rnrdaa h tto' 
\l<5 (Tvvrix'^V' -xix. 26. Heb. ix. 22, and 
Class. 

2x^/Aa, aros, to, (o-x^ti', 2 aor. inf. 
of e'x^O L^t- habitus, equiv. to fashion, 
figure, mien, deportment, i. e. of body, per- 
son ; in N. T. of external circumstances, 
fashion, state, condition, 1 Cor. vii. 31, 
TrapdyEL to ayfiixa tov Koapov t. mean- 
ing, that 'the world, and all its fairest 
forms, is passing away.' Phil. ii. 8, crx^" 
pLUTL EvpEdsL? (x)9 dvOpaiTro^. 

2xi'Sw, f. Lcro), to split, rend, divide, 
gener. with violence; in N. T. gener. e.gr. 
rocks. Matt, xxvii. 51 ; the veil of the 
Temple, with sts dvo, xxvii. 51 ; the hea- 
vens, Mk. i. 10 ; a garment, John xix. 24; 
a net, xxi. 11. Fig. to split into parties, 
factions, to he divided in opinion, pass. Acts 
xiv. 4, E(TX^(^^V irXrjdo's. xxiii. 7. 
When the word is used in this metaph. 
sense, yv6}p.aL<5 is usually added, by way of 
explanation, as in Hdot. iv. 119, though 
sometimes left to be supplied, as in the pas- 
sage of Acts, and Xen. Conv.iv. 59, EvravQa. 
kcrx'-^^'^WOLV' Kal ol p-kv eIttov — oi dk, &c. 

Sxto'M^i a^os, TO, (ctx^^^O ^ Tent, 
Matt. ix. 16, x^^po^ o-X^^i"" y'lv&Tat, 
Fig. a division, dissension, dissent in opi- 
nion, John vii. 43, crxicr/>ia kv tw oxXco 
EykvETo. ix. 16. 1 Cor. i. 10 : in which 
metaph, sense scindere is used in Latin. 
See Virg. ^n. ii. 39. 

'Exo Lv Lov, ov, TO, (o-xoii'o?, bulrush,) 
prop, a cord made of bulrushes ; hence 
gener. a cord, rope, John ii. 15. Acts 
xxvii. 32, Ta <TXoi-t^i{Ji' Ttjs aKuepri^. Sept. 
and Class. 

2xoA.a^a), f. acrtt), (cxoXtj,) prop, to 
be U7iemployed, and by impl. to have leisure 
for any employment that may offer, itself ; 
in N. T. 1) with dat. commodi, to have 
leisure for any thing, to bestow one''s lei- 
sure, give oneself to any pursuit, free from 
other cares and hindrances. 1 Cor. vii. 5, 
'Lva o'xoXdX.V'^s tt} vt](TTELa. 2) said fig. 
of place. Matt. xii. 44, tov oIkov — tvpi- 
(7KEL (TxoXdX^ovTa, \. c. unoccupicd, unin- 
habited, as many explain, adducing Plut. 
C. Gracch. 12, kui tw S^poy arxoXd'^ovTa 
pLEd' rjpLEpau aTrkSEL^E tov tottov' but 
rather, as others interpret, 'ready for his 
reception.' So in the Test. xii. Patr. cited 



2X0 



429 



bvBretsch. we read, Svo TrvEVfxan-a cyo- 

^X^^h-^ V'^-iV-, prop, rest^ freedom from 
labour^ Lucian, D. Deor. xviii. 1. Xen. 
Mem. iii. 9, 9. Hence by iiieton. leisure^ 
as applied to any object or pursuit, Xen. 
Mem. ii. 6, 4. In later usage and N. T. 
meton. a place of learned leisure, a school, 
where a teacher and his disciples came 
together. Acts xix. 9, SLuXsyoiuepo^ kv Ty 
cxoXt; Tvpdifvov Tti/os, and lat. Class. 

Sco^o), f. ceo, (crai9,) perf. pass, cricru)- 
afxai^ aor. 1. pass. eo-coOt/i/, to save^ deliver, 
preserve safe from danger, loss, destruc- 
tion, trans. 1) prop, of persons. Matt. 

viii. 25, arcoffov 77ua§, aTroXkv/uLida. xxiv. 
22. xxvii.42. Mk. iii. 4. Acts xxvii.20; so 
TT/i/ xlfvxv^ avTOv cruxraL, Matt. xvi. 25. 
Sept. and Class. Foil, bv sk of thing, to 
save /ram, deliver out of any peril, &c. 
John xii. 27. Heb. v. 7, erw^sti' avTov ek 
^rai/cLTou : once by sk of place, praegn. 
Jude 5, kaou Ik yrj^ AiyvTrnrov awo-as, 
i. e. 'having brought out safely.' 2) spec, 
of sick persons, to save from death, and 
by impl. to heal, to restore to health, pass. 
to be Jiealed, to be restored to health, (the 
word being not unfrequently used of re- 
covery from a dangerous disorder,) Matt. 

ix. 21, 22, 77 TTtaTts aov (rlarcoKs. as' Kai 
i<xa}dn h yvvri. Lu. viii. 36. John xi. 12. 
Acts iv. 9. Ja. v. 15, and Class. 3) spec, 
and fig. of salvation from eternal death, 
from the punishment and misery conse- 
quent upon sin, to save, and by impl. to 
give eternal life ; so espec. of Christ, as 
the Saviour, foil, by aTro, Matt. i. 21, 
cwtTft Tov \a6v avTov airo tcov dfxap- 
Tttof avTwv. Acts ii. 40. Rom. v. 9, diro 
TT/sopytj?: opp. to /cpii/fiii/, John iii. 17. xii. 
47. Of God, arooX^ELV Tivd sh t7]u (3aGi- 
Xeiav avTov, 2 Tim. iv. 18. Gener. Matt, 
xviii. 11. Rom. xi. 14. 1 Cor. i. 21, o-w- 
crai T0U9 'JTLo'TEvovTa^. Heb. vii. 25 : 
once with Ik ^avaTou, Ja. v. 20. Pass. 
Matt. x. 22. xix. 25. Mk. xvi. 16. Lu. 
viii. 12. xiii. 23. Rom. v. 10: hence part. 
oi arco^o/mevoL, the saved, ' those who have 
obtained salvation' through Christ, Acts 
ii. 47. 1 Cor. i. 18. comp. with xv. 2. Rev. 
xxi. 24, In 1 Cor. vii. 16, el ttji/ yvualKa 
trw^His, and Ja. v. 20, (tuxtel xlrux^lV ^k 
^avaTov, the word signifies ' to be the 
means of saving,' to be instrumental to the 
salvation of another, answering to Kspoai- 
VELv, with which it is interchanged at 
1 Cor. ix. 22. iVa Toi/s acrOti/tts KEpdvaui 

LUa Tivd9 CTto^CO. 

^utfxa, aros, to, a hody, as an organized 
whole, made up of parts and members. 
I. GENER. of anv material body: of plants, 
1 Cor. XV. 37, ov nro (rwfxa to yEvritro- 
UEvov o-TTHi'pEis, ver. 38 : also of bodies 
celestial and terrestrial, the sun, moon, 



stars, &c. ver. 40, (rujuiwra ItrovpavLa Koi 
(jwfxaTa EiriyEia, and Class. — II. SPEC. 
an animal body, living or dead, i, of the 
human body, and differing from (rdp^, 
which expresses rather the material of the 
hody: 1) as living. Matt. v. 29, 'Lva /irj 
o\ov TO <T(x)fxd (TOV (3\i]dy ft§ yitvvau, 

vi. 25. xxvi. 12. Mk. v. 29. John ii. 21. 
Rom. i. 24. 1 Cor. xv. 44. 2 Cor. iv. 10. 
oft. ; in antith. with xj/vx*}-, Matt. x. 28. 
Lu. xii. 4 ; or TrvEVjuLa, Rom. viii. 10. 
1 Cor. V. 3 ; or where irvEVfxa, xj/uxV') 
awjuLa make a periphrasis for the whole 
ma7i, 1 Th. V. 23 ; as the seat of sinful affec- 
tions and appetites, (comp. adp^ II. III.) ; 
TO awfjLa T77s d/xapTLa<s, Rom. vi. 6, cor- 
responding to TO crco/ixa tov BavaTOv tov- 
Tov, vii. 24, namely, sin, considered as a 
body, possessing power within the man, a 
body consisting of many members, in par- 
ticular vices ; the same, in short, with 
what is called elsewhere 6 TraXaio? dv- 
OpojTTos. Rom. vii. 24, comp. ver. 23. viii. 
13. Col. ii. 11. 2) of a dead body, gener. 
Matt. xiv. 12, rjpav to crtofxa, Kai Edaxj/av 
avTo. xxvii. 52, 58. John xix. 31. Spec, 
of the body of Christ, as crucified for the 
salvation of man. Matt. xxvi. 26. Rom. 

vii. 4, Old TOV (j(x)fx. tov Xp, ] Cor, x. 
16. II. spoken of beasts, living, Ja. iii. 3; 
dead, Lu. xvii. 37; of victims slain, Heb. 
xiii. 11. — III. METON. to the body, as the 
external man, is ascribed that which 
strictly belongs to the •person or man ; so 
with a gen. of pers. forming a periphr. for 
the person himself. Matt. vi. 22, bXov to . 
arcoind crov (pooTEivov EaTUL. ver. 23. Lu. 
xi. 34, 36. Eph. V. 28. Phil. i. 20. tt. Td 
acofxaTa vfxwv, Rom. xii. 1, (comp. vi. 13,) 
a stronger expression than vfxd<s avTov^, 
as denoting the corporeal and external 
actions, with all the powers of the mind, 
which have their seat in the organs of the 
body. Gener. and absol. 1 Cor. vi. 16, 6 

KoWoO/ilEVO^ T-y TTOpVT] EV GO) fid EUTl. 

Xen. An. i. 9, 12, /cat ^(pry/xaTa Kai ttS- 
A.£is Kai Ta kavTwv C(j6p.aTa, With an 
adj. ^schin. c. Ctes. p. 470. Dem. 910, 
13, kXEv^Epa (TwuaTa. Xen. Mem. iii. 5, 
2, cruifxaTa dya'dd, i. e. good soldiers, 
espec. said of slaves, with adj. as a-w/naTa 
covXa. Hence in later usage and N. T. 
absol. for a slave, Ta aruMmaTa, slaves, once 
Rev. xviii. 13, {y6p.ov) 'iinruw Kai pEdwv 
Kai croDixaTijov. Tob. X. 11, croofxaTa Kai 
KTTiut] Kai dpyvpLov. — IV. FIG. a body, 
i. q. a ivhole, aggregate, collective mass, 
spoken of the Christian Church, the whole 
body of the Christians collectively, of 
which Christ is the head. Col. i. 18, /cat 

aUTo's EGTiV V KECpaX-t] TOV OrUi/JL. T^S 

tKKXr]crLa'3. ver. 24. Rom. xii. 5, et al. 
saepe. — V. fig. body, substance, reality, opp. 
to h (TKid the shadow, type. Col. ii. 17, a 
ECTTL CTKid TiiiV /uleXXoutoov, TO dk arw/na 



430 



'KpKTTOV. So Jos. B. J. ii. 2, 5, (TKLCLV 

aiTrjcrS/jLEVo^ (SacnXELa'S^rj's ypiraa-Ev eav- 
Tco TO arcofxa. 

"Eo) /JLUT lk6<3^ Of, adj. {aayfxa^) 

hodihj^ pertaining to the body, Lu. iii. 22, 
<r(t)/uiaTLK(jo ELOEL. 1 Tim. iv. 8, <T. yv/jL- 
paa-ta^ and lat. Class. 

"Eu) jULUT LKu)<i, adv. ( (Toofxa^) bodily^ i. e. 
substantially^ really^ truly ^ Col. ii. 9. 

26t)/0£uco, f. Evcrui^ {arwpd?^ a heap,) to 
Tieap^ heap up^ trans. Rom. xii. 20, av- 
6paKa9 TTupos arcopEvaEL^ ettl tj/i/ KE<p. 
avTOv^ where see my note, and so in Class. 
Also to heap up with any thing, with 
dat. fig. 2 Tim. iii. 6, crEcruopEvixEva dfxap- 
Ttat9, ' heaped up, burdened with sins 
prop, with dat. Hdian. iv. 8, 20, Xi/Sai/w 
Toy's (Scomoif^ EO-wpEvarEv. 

ScoT^p, ^po§, 6, (o-oojo),) a saviour^ 
deliverer, preserver, who saves men from 
danger or destruction, and brings them 
into a state of prosperity and happiness ; 
so in Greek writers of the deliverer and 
benefactor of a state, Sept. Judg. iii. 9, 15, 
and Class, oft. both of men and gods. In 
N. T. used 1) of God the Father, Lu. i. 
47, €7rt T(j) Qem TO) awTrjpL fxov. 1 Tim. 
i. 1. ii. 3.' iv. 10. Tit. i. 3. ii. 10. iii. 4. 
Jude 25. Sept. oft. 2) of God the Son, 
the '^ie%^\2i\\,tJie Saviour of men, vfho saves 
his people from eternal death, from punish- 
ment and misery as the consequence of 
sin, and gives them eternal life and happi- 
ness in his kingdom. Lu. ii. 11, etex^^V 
vjULLV <Tnp.Epov crojTrip. John iv. 42. Acts 
V. 31. xiii. 23. Eph. v. 23. Phil. iii. 20. 
2 Tim. i. 10. Tit. i. 4. ii. 13. iii. 6. 1 John 
iv. 14. 2 Pet. i. 1, 11. ii. 20. iii. 2, 18. 

SwTtjpia, as, 77, {(TODTijp,) prop, and 
in Class, safety, deliverance, preservation 
from danger or destruction; in N. T. 1) 
prop, and gener. Acts xxvii. 34, touto 
Trpo? T7J9 vfiETEpa^ <T(jaTripLa<s xjirdpyEi, 
vii. 25. Heb. xi. 7 ; with s/c, Lu. i. 71, 
(TCDTijptav E^ Ey(6pu)u t)jui(jov, i. e. a means 
of salvation, for crcDTTjpa, as oft. answer- 
ing to KEpa's <T(ji)Tr\pLa<5, strong deliverer, 
ver. 69 ; hence gener. icelfare, benefit, Phil. 

i. 19, TOUTO p.01 CLTTO^riarETaL £19 acoTT]- 

piav, namely, benefit both temporal and 
spiritual ; the former as adverted to in 
the words immediately following, ^id Trjs 
i}p.(jiv OETjcgo)?: the latter, in the c further 
on, KoX ETTixopriyLa^ tov TLvevl .to<3 'Irj- 
(Tov Xp. 2 Cor. vi. 2. 2 Pet. iii. 2 3. From 
the Heb. by impl. victory, Rev. vii. 10. xii. 
10. xix. 1. 2) spec, in the evangelical sense, 
salvation, deliverance from eternal death 
and misery as the consequence of sin, and 
admission to eternal life and happiness in 
the kingdom of Christ the Saviour. Lu. i. 
11 ,6ovvaL yvuicriv (T(joTr]pia<s. xix. 9. John 
iv. 22, 77 crujTiipia, i. e. salvation by the 
Messiah. Acts iv. 12, and oft. Meton. a 



bringer of salvation, Saviour, Acts xiii. 47, 

Tf^dsiKa (TE TOU eIvUL OTE £tS (TWTtjpiai/ 

E(jo9 Ecr^dTov Trj9 yij^. 

2a)Ti7pio9, ov, 6, 77, adj. (ctoT^p,) 
prop, saving, bringing deliverance and wel- 
fare ; in ]S^. T. only in the evangelical 
sense, saving, bringing salvation. Tit. ii. 

11, ETTECpduy] 77 X'^P'-^ '^^^ QeOV 77 (TWT?}- 

ptos irda-Lv dvOpooiroL^, meaning that the 
grace of God, namely, ' the gracious dis- 
pensation of God' revealed in the Gospel, 
Gal. V. 4, which brings with it an offer of 
salvation to all men, hath appeared, &c. 
Hence neut. to arcoTiipLou, subst. salva- 
tion, Eph. vi. 17 ; also the doctrine of saL 
vation by Christ, Acts xxviii. 28. Sept. 
Is. xii. 3. li. 6. Meton. for the Saviour^ 
Lu. ii. 30. iii. 6. 

E U) (p pOV EU), f. 77(760, {(T(ti(pp(Ji)V,) tO he 

of soujid mind, intrans. 1) prop, to be 
sane, of sound mind, as opposed to pLai- 
VEcrdai, Mk. v. 15, ^Eivpovai tov caipLO- 
vlX^o/ulevov — <T(jo(ppovovvTa. Lu. viii. 35. 
2 Cor. V. 13, £iT£ aoxppovovjuLEv, where 
the term must, from the context, mean 
speaking modestly of oneself, as opp. to 
dcbpoov eIvul, xi. 16, which signifies, to 
be a fool, namely, in boasting. See also 
xi. 1. Plato, Alcib. ii. 2, to fxaivEcrdat 
dpd yE viTEvavTLOv crol ^okeX tco (TUicppo- 
VELv, and oft. in Class. 2) by impl. to he 
sober-m/inded, to think and act soberly. 
Rom. xii. 3, cppovElv £ts to cruxppovElv. 
Tit. ii. 6. 1 Pet. iv. 7, croup povricraTE : in 
the first of which passages the term has 
reference to thinking only, namely, sober- 
mindedness, as opp. to pride ; in the two 
latter, to both thinking and acting; and in 
the one last mentioned, to the government 
of the appetites, passions, and affections, in 
obedience to reason, &c. as in Xen. Mem. 
i. 2, 17. Cyr. viii. 1, 30. In Class, it gener. 
signif. ' to use sound judgment and dis- 
cretion.' 

1^ uxppovi'^o), f. tcro), [acocppcov,) prop. 
to make of sound mind ; hence by impl. 
to make sober-minded, to make think and 
act soberly, to teach moderation, Hdian. 
iii. 10, 3, Tous vleX'S iraLOEvoDU Kal cruxppo- 
vl'^cov. Hence in N. T. to moderate, to 
correct, to teach, with acc. and inf. Tit. ii. 
4, Iva crcocppouLX^ioarL Tas via?, (piXdvSpovs 
eIuul k.t.X. 

'Eotxppov Lcnio?, ov, 6, {o'MCppovlX.o}^) 
prop. act. a making of sound mind; in 
N. T. the word has a passive sense, to de- 
note sober-mindedness, what is elsewhere 
expressed by cruacppocrvvr], 1 Tim. ii. 15, 
and kyKpdTEia, 2 Pet. i. 6. 2 Tim. i. 7, 
TTVEV/uLa crudcppovLCTfxov. So Plut. de Puer. 
educ. 20, TTELpaT&ov ovv el<3 tov tujv 
TEKvcov aiocppovLcr/ULOV 'Trdvd' baa k.t.X. 

u) (p p ov (JO'S, adv. ( or 00 (^pwi/,) prop. 
with sound mind, rationally, Plato de Rep. 



431 



T A ^ 



i. 6. In N. T. with sober mind^ soherlt/^ 
with moderation, Tit. ii. 12, 'iua crcofppo- 
I'to? Krai Slkuloo's kul £u<rf/3aj§ X^uacofxev. 
Jos. and Ciass. 

^cocf) pocrvvi]^ i]^^V^{<r(jocppu)i/^) S02i}id- 
Tiess of mind^ as opp. to fatuity, Horn. Od. 
xxiii. 18, Kai te ')(a\Lcp poviovTa craofppo- 
avvi]'5 EiriiSiiarav^ or to inaduess^ denoting 
the full and undisturbed possession of the 
mental faculties; in N. T. 1) PROP. 
sanity^ the being compos mentis ; Acts 
xxvi. 25, ov ixaivajxaL^ — au)(f)po(Tvvj]'S pn- 
fxaTa aTTocpdiyyojjLaL. So Xen. Mem. i. 
1, 16, Tt crcoippocTvvt] ; Tt fxavia ; 2) BY 
IMPL. soher-mindedness^ sobriety of mind^ 
moderation of the desires, passions, conduct, 
vioderatio^ a sense oft. occ. in Xen. & Plato. 
In 1 Tim. ii. 9, /lera aldov^ Kal (Tcocppo- 
crvvi]^ KOcriXELV kavTa<s^ the term, thus 
conjoined with ai^ous, denotes that mo- 
desty which is in Thucyd. ii. 45, termed 
^the virtue of the female sex,' i. e. its greatest 
glory. In 1 Tim. ii. 15, kav ^elvvoctlv — 
iv dyiaa-fiM /ulsto. cruicppocrvvr]^^ there is 
intimated the close connection of tempe- 
rance and sober-mindedness gener. with 
holiness, (corresponding indeed to the cw- 
<ppovL<riuid^ at 2 Tim. i. 7, and syKpaTsia^ 
2 Pet. i. 6,) in which view I would compare 
the words of a writer cited in Athen. p. 
433, A, rjpjjiOGTaL (multum confert) IXpos 
'T^]v sv<T&(3Lri9 ysLTOva (TO)<ppo(rvvt]v. 

2c«<^pajy, oyos, o, t}^ adj. (cruis, fr. 
obsol. <rdo§, ^pr/v,) prop, of sound mind^ 
saTie^ compos mentis^ in the full possession 
of one's mental faculties, as opp. to fatuity 
or madness, Horn. II. xxi. 462 ; hence of 
one who follows sound reason and restrains 
his passions, Xen. Mem. iii. 9, 4 ; comp. 
Cvr. iii. 1, 15, 16, sq. In N. T. soher- 
minded^ temperate^ i. e. 'having the mind, 
desires, passions, duly moderated and regu- 
lated,' 1 Tim. iii. 2, ^tl ovv tov kiricTKOiTov 
Eivai — (Tfjo<ppova. Tit. i. 8. ii, 2, 5. And 
so occasionally in Class, as Theogn. 752, 
<ro)(ppova ^ujULov &x^^ I/ctos dTaada- 

T. 

Tdyfia, a'T09, to, (Tao-co),) prop. 

' any thing set in order,' as a body of 
troops ; in N. T. order^ series^ of time, or 
place and dignity, 1 Cor. xv. 23, ekugto^ 
ck kv Tw ioLo) n-dyfxaTL^ see my note. 

Ta/CT09, 77, ov, adj. (Tao-crco,) prop. 
set in order^ arranged ; hence fig. set, 
Jioced, appointed, e. gr. TaKTrj oe -nfikpa, 
*iipon a set day,' Acts xii. 21. Sept. Job 
xii. 5, £t? xpovov TUKTov. Dion. Hal, ii. 
74. Pol. xxix. 11, 8, nraKTrt rifMipa. 

TaXaLTrajpku), f. rjcru), {TaXaLirco- 
pos,) to suffer toil and hardship, as arising 
from severe bodily effort, in trans. Xen. 



Mem. ii. 1, 25. Thuc. vii. 27, 28; also by 
impl. to be sorely distressed or harassed 
with toil, Thuc. iii. 3. Xen. Mem. ii. 1, 
18 ; hence in N. T. fig. to endure affliction 
or distress ; to be afflicted, distressed, mi- 
serable ; James iv. 9, TaXanruipnaraTE^ 
' afflict yourselves.' Sept. and Class, espec. 
Thucyd. 

T a\anru)pia, as, 77, (TaXaiTrajpaoj,) 
prop, toil, hardship, severe bodily labour, 
Hdot. iv. 184. Pol. iii. 17, 8. In N. T. 
affliction, distress, misery, Ja. v, 1. Rom. 
iii. 16, ixvvrpLfxfxa Kal TaXaiTrcopia kv 
Tats o^oTs avTODV. Sept. and Class. 

T aA. aiTTtopos, ov, 6, 77, adj. (a poetic 
form for prose i-aXaTrsLpLo^, fr. obsol. 
TXdu), ireTpa,) prop, enduring toil and. 
hardship, as from severe bodily effort ; in 
N. T, fig. afflicted, ivretched, miserable^ 
Rom. vii. 24, TaXaLTrcvpcs kyoo dvQpuiTTo^, 
Rev. iii. 17. Sept. and Class. 

T aXavT laXo's, aia, ov, adj. (raXai/- 
Tov,) iceighing a tcdent, a talent i7i weighty 
Rev. xvi. 21, ■)(dXaX^a fxEydX^ uj's TaXav- 
TLaia, see my note. Jos. B. J. v. 6, 3, 
TaXavTiaXoi ricrav ol (SoXXo/ulevol TTETpoi. 
Pol. ix. 41, 8. Pint. Demetr. 21. Comp. 
Diod. Sic. xix. 45, of hail-stones, fxvaalat 
tTTLTrroi/. 

T dXav^ov, ov, to, {TXdio, obs.) prop. 
the scale of a balance, pi. nrd n-dXavra, 
scales; then ''someihmgtveighed,'' a iveight; 
hence a tcdent, as a certain fixed weight 
for gold and silver, though varying in dif- 
ferent states and countries, and conse- 
quently varying in value. See Calmet, 
and Home's Introd. In N. T. gener. put 
for a large sum of money, Matt, xviii. 24, 
fxvpLoyv ToXdvTtav, namely, of silver ; for 
in all numbers occurring in ancient authors, 
gold is never to be supposed, unless men- 
tioned. 

TaXt0a, Syr. — Kopaaiov^ a damsel^ 
maiden, Mk. v. 41. 

Tafxiiov, ov, TO, {TapLLEvu),) by sync, 
for Ta/LLLELOv,'* prop. ' the store-room of the 
Tafxia^, or dispensator ;' also a stoi^e-roorh, 
generally, especially for grain, like our 
barn, Lu. xii. 24, oI§ ovk ecttl TafxElov* 
Hence, gener. any place of privacy, a 
chamber, closet. Matt. vi. 6, oTai^ irpocr- 
£vXV-> f ^o'^XOs £ls TO TafXElov orov. xxiv. 
26, kv ToTs TajUELOL^, where the plural 
serves to denote a genus ; the meaning 
being, ' He is in the kind of places called 
TafxLELa^ (i. e. secret apartments,) namely, 
in one or other of them. Lu. xii. 3. 

Tavvv, see Nui/, I. 1. 

Ta^ts, £W9, 7], (Taarcro),) prop. ' a set- 
ting in order,' whether of things or persons, 
hence, order, arrangement, disposition ; 
also, an order, rank, in a state or in 
society; in N. T. order ^ gener. 1) arrange- 



T An 



432 



TAP 



ment^ disposition^ series^ Lu. i. 8, iv 
Ta^EL T7/5 k(pi]fXi.pLa'£ auTou, with which 
I would compare Pint, de Educ. § 15, 
Tov ap)(^Lfjia.ys.Lpov 'E. yEyEvi]iJitvov kv 
Tci^Bi. 1 Cor. xiv. 40, kutcc tu^lv^ i. e. 
in proper order, orderly. Fig. good order^ 
well-regulated life, Col. ii. 5, ^Xiiriov 
VfjiCov Tiiv xa^ty, for evTa^iau^ denoting 
(by a military metaphor) 'subordination 
to their spiritual pastors and masters 
the opp, phrase isTrapa tol^lv. 2) rank, 
quality, character; in the phrase hpev^ 
KaTo. T)]v TCL^Lv 1sHK\lg i-d^K, ' a priest 
of the same order^ rarik, quality, as Mel- 
chisedek,' Heb. v. 6, al. also vii. 11, ov 
Kara ri]v -rd^iv 'Aapcov. So 2 Mace. ix. 
18, iirL<TTo\y]V iKETripia^ tcl^lv 'ix^vaav, 
and sometimes in Class. 

Ta7r£ii/o§, ?j, du, adj. prop, of things 
or place, low, not high, Ezek. xvii. 24, 
^v\ov Tair. Strabo vi. p. 426, TairELvdi^ 
ik Kal TO Ttj^ ttoXeo)^ z8a(po<s. Pind. 
Nem. iii. 144. In N. T. fig. 1) of con- 
dition or lot, lowly, of low degree, Lu. i. 

52, vdfUXTE TUTTE LVOV'S, Opp. tO ^Vvd(TTa^. 

Sept. and Class. James i. 9, Tair. opp. to 
TrXoucrto?. 2) of the mind, lowly, liumhle, 
modest, including the idea of affliction, 
depression of mind, 2 Cor. x. 1, tutt. kv 
vjULlv, i. e. modest, lowly, opp. to ^appCov. 
Schleusn. cites Xen. Hist. iii. 5, 11, and 
he might have added Diod. Sic. t. vii. 171, 

^LOi TaTTELVOTI^Ta T^S \1/VXV'^-, '^'^ botll 

passages the sense is only ' timidity, mean- 
spiritedness.' Neut. Rom. xii. 16, see in 
'Evvairdyu), Xen. Ag. xi. 11. Elsewhere 
with the accessory idea of humble piety to- 
wards God, (as oft. in Sept.) Ja. iv. 6. ] Pet. 

V. 5, TUTTELVOL^ dk (o GfiOs) oLoCOCrL ^dpLV, 

opp. to u'7rEpii(pdvoL's. 2 Cor. vii. 6. Fully 
expr. in Matt. xi. 29, TwirELVO^ tt} Kapdia. 

T aTT E LVO (p p OCVVr], 775, 77, {TaiTEL- 

v6(pp(x}v,) lowliness of mind, humility. Acts 
XX. 19, SovXevcov too Ki/pi'o) fxETa Trdari^ 
'TairELvo(ppo(Tvv^]<s. Eph. iv. 2. Phil. ii. 3. 
Col. iii. 12. 1 Pet. v. 5. Of an affected 
lowliness, that spurious humility under 
which lurks spiritual pride. Col. ii. 18, 23. 

T a'WE Lv6 (p p lov, 0V09, 6, 77, adj. (n-a- 
iTELvd^, 0p77y,)prop. loiv-minded, ov pusil- 
lanimous ; in N. T. ofloidymind, hwrn^ Re- 
minded, modest, 1 Pet. iii. 8, TaiTEivo- 
(ppovE?, in later edit, for c})iX6(ppovE<i in 
text, rec, but see my note. Comp. Prov. 
xxix. 23, Tous TttTT. kpEL^EL (read tyti- 
pgi) 66^jj KvpL09. 

T aTT £ Lv 6 (jj, f. wau), (raTTEiyos,) to 
make low, to depress, trans. I. prop. Lu. 
iii. 5, irdv opo's kol ^ovvo^ TaiTELvwOii- 
(TETaL. So Strabo v. p. 347, TarrELVouTaL 
Ta opt]. — II. FIG. 1) as to condition or 
circumstances, to bring low, to humble, 
abase ; with acc. kavTov, to humble one- 
self^ i. e. ' to make oneself of low con- 



dition,' 2 Cor. xi. 7, opp. to ui/^ow. Phil, 
ii. 8. Mid. or pass. Phil. iv. 12, ' to be in 
lowly & necessitous circumstances.' Sept. 
and Class. 2) in mind, to make lowly., to 
humble, i. e. one's lofty thoughts, by dis- 
appointment, 2 Cor. xii. 21, fxi) irdXiv 
kXdovTa fJLE TaTTELVuya-T] 6 Oeo? fxov tt/oos 
u/xas. Pass. Matt, xxiii. 12 ; with the idea 
of contrition and penitence towards God, 
Ja. iv. 10, TaiTEivooi^riTe evcoitlov tov 
Kvpiov. 1 Pet. V. 6. 

T WTT ELVCOG 19, f<t)9, 77, {tU'TTS LVOU) ,) 

prop, a making low, humiliation, depression ; 
in N. T. 'the being brought low,' alow 
estate, lowly condition, (as Sept. Gen. xxix. 
32, and Diod. Sic. ii. 45, Tots ^£ dvSpda-t 

TaTTElVCOaLV Kal dovXEiaV TTEpid'TrTELV,) 

Lu. i. 48, EirifSXExlrEv ettl Ttjv Tair. t^s 
SovXi]9 avTov. Acts viii, 33. Ja. i. 10. 
Phil. iii. 21, to au>/ua t^s Tair. r]/jLU)v~ 

TO (TWfXa TO TaiTELVOV. 

T apd<r(T(jo, fut. Jo), to stir tip, trouble., 
agitate, trans. 1) prop, as water in a 
pool, John V. 4, 7. Sept. and Class. 2) 
Jig. of the mind, to stir up, trouble, disturb., 
with various passions ; with fear, — to be 
put in trepidation, pass, to be in trepidation., 
Matt. ii. 3, o (SacrcXEV^ kTapdx^V- xiv. 

26. Lu. xxiv. 38. 1 Pet. iii. 14; with 
grief, or anxiety, to disquiet, pass. John xii. 

27, 77 xj/vxv 1^0^ TETapaKTUL. xiii. 21. 
xiv. 1 ; so xi. 33, kTapa^Ev kavTou rr 
kTupax^V TO) irvEVfxaTL, xiii. 21 ; with 
doubt, perplexity, foil, by acc- Acts xv. 
24, kTapa^av v/md^ XoyoL^, an expression 
signifying ' to perturb and unsettle the 
mind, and pervert the understanding,' by 
throwing in perplexing doubts, (put for the 
plainer expression in Lucian, Scyth. § 3, 
TapdcrcTELv ti^v yvco/uLt^v.) Gal. i. 7. v. 10, 
6 Tapdcrarcov u/xas, ' he that perplexes and 
unsettles you,' meaning to say, that that 
was all he could do, not teaAo them. So 
in a passage of Galen, cited by Wets., we 
have TapdTTovTE<5 fxovov tov? fxavda- 
vovTa<3, diodcrKOVTE's 6k ovStv. 

Tapaxv-t V^i ^1 (Tapdar<ru),) a stirring 
up, troubling, agitation : 1 ) prop, of water 
in a pool, &c. John v. 4. So Lucian, Hal. 
4, XaiXaxp- Kai t, i. e. of the elements. 
2) Jig. of popular excitement, a stir, com- 
motion, tumult, Mk. xiii. 8, EaovTai Xl/jloI 
Kai Tapaxal, and so in Jos. and Class. 

Tap«X^^i ^^-i ^1 {'rapdara-o),) prop. 
stir, commotion, confusion, Xen. OEc. viii. 
9 ; in N. T. fig. from fear, equiv. to con- 
sternation. trepidation. Acts xii. 18. Sept. 
1 Sam. V. 9, Xen. An. i. 8, 2; also of ex- 
citement, iamult, contention. Acts xix. 23. 

T apTapod), f. wtrco, (fr, TdpTapo9^ 
which in Greek mythology was the lower 
part, or abyss of Hades, where the shades 
of the wicked were imprisoned and tor- 
mented; in Jewish usage equivalent to 



TAS 



433 



TE 



Ffei/i/a,) to thrust doivn to Tartarus^ = to 
thrust into Gehenna^ with acc. implied, 
2 Pet. ii. 4, (TtLpai's X^ocpov TapTupuyaa^. 
Conip. £i§ 'TdpTapoi/ piirTSLV^ Horn. 11. 
viii. 13. kv TupTupiv diSa/iitvoLj Jos. c. 
Ap. ii. 33. See more in uiy note. 

Tec a or CO or ttw, f. ^w, to order ^ to set 
in order ^ arrange^ esi)ec. to draw up sol- 
diers in ranks, array ; in N. T. fig. to set 
ill a certain order, to constitute^ appoint^ 
trans, 1) gener. with tts and dat. com- 
raodi, 1 Cor. xvi. 15, diaKovLav toIs 
ay/ois ETa^av eavrov'?^ have set or 
devoted themselves to,' &c, so Xen. Mem. 
ii. 1, 11, ovdk £19 T^iu dovXeiau av kfiav- 
Tov TctTTO). Pass, with £t9, Actsxiii. 48, 
ocToi rjarav TSTay/uLevoL ei<i X,oo{}V aiwuLOV^ 
where see my note. Foil, by vtto with 
acc. Lu. vii. 8, ayu) avdp(jo7r6<s eI/ull vtto s^- 
ovaiai/ Taacro/xEfos, see my note. Absol. 
Rom. xiii. 1. Sept. Jos. and lat. Class. 
2) to arrange^ appohit^ with acc. and dat. 
Acts xxviii, 23, Ta^dfXEvoL dk uvtco vjui- 
pai/, ' having appointed to him,' or ' agreed 
with him for foil, by dat. with inf. Acts 
xxii. 10, TETUKTaL croL TTOLrjcraL : by 
inf. with acc. Acts xv. 2, E-ra^av ava- 
^aivELv YlavXov. Sept. and Class. 

Tavpo<s^ ou, 6, a hull^ bullock^ Matt, 
xxii. 4, et al. Sept. and Class. 

TauT-a, by crasis for n-a aui-a, the 
same things^ KaTo. TauTa, after the same 
manner^ thus^ Lu. vi. 23, 26. xvii. 30. 
1 Thess. ii. 14. 

TauT«, see in Outo?. 

Ta^t;, ^s, 77, (^-aTTTto,) burial; with 
dat. commodi. Matt, xxvii. 7, eU Tacpiju 
Tot§ ^£i/ot5, 'for burying strangers.' Sept. 
and Class. 

Ta<^09, ou, 6, (3'a'7rTw,) prop, burial; 
in N. T. and gener. a burial-place^ sepul- 
chre, Matt, xxiii. 27, 29. xxvii. 61, 64, 
66, al. Sept. and Class. Fig. Rom. iii. 13, 
Ta(po<s dvEioyjuLEvo^ 6 Xdpvy^ avToov. 

Tax«5 adv. (t-c£)(u§,) prop, quickly, 
speedily, — soon, shortly, Pol. xviii. 20, 9. 
Xen. H. G. vii. 4, 34. * In N. T. readily, 
lightly, and hence per adventure, perhaps, 
Rom. V. 7. Philem. 15. Xen. An. v. 2, 17, 
and elsewhere in Class. 

Tax£w§, adv. (Tali's,) quickly, speed- 
ily, prop. Xen. Cyr. i. 4, 20; in N. T. 
soon, shortly, 1 Cor. iv. 19, EXEvaofxai Sk 
TaxEws Trpos vjixu?. Gal. i, 6, al. Sept. & 
lat. Class. In the sense of hastily, Lu. 
xiv. 21, e^eXOe TaXEO)?. xvi. 6. John xi. 
31. _ In 2 Thess. ii. 2. Gal. i. 6, and 
1 Tim. V. 22. with the idea of haste it in- 
volves the adjunct notion of precipitajicy 
and rashness ; as Wisd. iv. 28, and Prov. 
XXV. 8. 

Taxivo?, 7], 6v, adj. (Ta^i'?,) quich, 
m-ift, e. g. -TToafs, Sept. Is. lix. 7. Wisd. 



xiii. 2 ; in N. T. fig. sivift, speedy, equiv. 
to 'near at hand, impending,' 2 Pet. i. 14. 
ii, 1, iTTuyouTE^ euvtoT^ Taxi-vi]v aTrto- 
XELav. Ecclus. xviii. 26, Trdvra ecttl 
Ta^Lvd. EvavTL }^vpiou. Anth. Gr, ii, p. 
91, fis Tax^i^V^ Xr)dES6ija. 

T a^toi/, adv. prop. neut. of Tax^wi/, 
later compar. to 'ra)(us, for the earlier 
^dacrwi/, more quickly, swiftly, or speedily, 
foil, by gen. John xx. 4, irpoidpaixE 
^d^Lov Tov TlEi-pov. Diod. Sic. xx. 92. 
Elsewh. sooner, the object of comparison 
being every where implied, e.g. ''sooner 
than one expected or intended ;' or the 
more speedily, the sooner^ 1 Tim. iii. 14, 
eXQeZv 7rp6<s (TE Ta^Lov. Heb. xiii. 19, 23. 
In John xiii. 27, o ttoleTs, iroLricrov tuxi-ov, 
the sense is, very quickly. Wisd. xiii. 9. 
1 Mace. ii. 40. Diod. Sic. ii. 5. 

T dxicTTa, adv. (prop. neut. pi, of 
Taxt-cTTo^, superl, to Tali's,) most quickly, 
most speedily ; e, g, 605 Tccxtcn-a, ' the 
soonest possible,' Acts xvii. 15, and Class. 

Taxos, £09 ous, to, (raxv?*) prop. 
swiftness or speed in motion, also quickness 
in action ; in N. T. only in the phrase Iv 
Tax^h adv. speedily, i. e. soon, shortly, 
Tax^Oi)£, Lu. xviii. 8, TroLvarEL nrr]v ekol- 
Kif](TLV axjTOiv Ev TttX^t, ©t al. Also with 
the idea of haste. Acts xii. 7. xxii. 18. 
Sept. and Class. 

Tax^^-, £ta, I', adj, (fr. ^du3, cogn. 
with ^i(jD, to run,) prop, swift of foot. So 
Taxv9 7rooa9, Horn. II. xiii. 249 ; also 
qtiick, i. e. prompt, in action ; in N. T. 
1) masc. Tax'^^i ^E- <iuick, equivalent to 
'ready, prompt,' James i. 19, tuxv's eU 
TO uKova-aL. So Sept. Prov. xxix. 20, 
dvSpa Tax'^v Xoyot9. Ecclus. v. 11, 
y'lvov Tax^^ aKpodaEL arov, and so in 
Class. 2) neut. tuxv as adv. equiv. to 
TaxEOi^, quickly, speedily. Matt, xxviii. 7, 
Taxv TTopEvdELoraL. ver. 8. Mk. xvi. 8. 
Sept. and Class. Also quickly, equiv. to 
soon, shortly. Matt. v. 25 ; and w-ith the 
idea of suddenness, Rev. ii. 5, in later 
edd. ver. 16. iii. 11, al. Sept. and Class. 
By impl. readily, lightly, Mk. ix. 39, 
Taxy KaKoXoyrjcai /ule. Ecclus. xix. 4, 6 
Taxv EfxTTLo-TEvtJou. Xcu. Cyr. V. 1, 4. 

Tk, an enclitic copulative particle, and, 
corresponding to Kal, as Lat. -qzie to et, 
Kai is used to couple ideas which follow 
directly and necessarily from what pre- 
cedes ; while Tk is employed when some- 
thing is subjoined which does not thus 
directly and necessr.rily follow ; so that, 
strictly speaking, Kai connects and Tk an- 
nexes. It is used, 1) simply, i. e. with- 
out other particles, wheie it serves to 
annex. Matt, xxviii. 12. John iv. 42. vi, 
18. Acts ii. 3, 33, 37. iii. 10. iv. 33. xii. 
12: so in a parenth. i. 15, r\v te oxXo^ 



TEI 



434 



TEK 



ovojULaTwv. Also repeated as annexing 
several particulars, te — t£, a7id — and^ 

Lat. -que que^ Acts ii. 46. xvi. 11. 

Heb. vi. 2, eTriOso-Etos ^Eipajv^ ava~ 
crTaa-EU)? ts veKptvv^ Kai KpLfxaro^ aico- 
vLou : once equivalent to both — and^ Acts 
xxvi. 16. 2) more freq. as strengthening 
/cat, either directly before it, or with one 
or more words intervening, implying close 
connexion, not only — hut also^ both— and ; 
so, as connecting clauses^ Matt, xxvii, 48, 
irXricra's ts. o^ous kul TrtptOtls KoXdfXijo. 
Lu. xxiv. 20. Acts ix. 18. x. 2 ; as 
coupling together infinitives depending on 
the same verb, Lu. xii. 45, kav ap^rjTaL 
— eadLELV T£ Kal ttlvelv Kai jULEQvcrKEadaL, 
Acts i. 1. As connecting nouns^ &c. Lu. 
xxi. 11, cp6(3riTpd te Kai (yr]fXEla. Acts 
ii. 9, 10. xxvi. 3 ; adverbs^ xxiv. 3, ttolvti] 
TE Kai TravTaxov : so where one or more 
words come between te and /cat, Lu. ii. 
16, Tvv TE M-apia/UL Kai tov 'lco(Tr](p. 
John ii. 15. Acts i. 8. xxvi, 30. Phil. i. 
7. Lu. xxi. 11, crELcrp.0L te fxEydXoi — /cat 
Xip-OL. Rom. i. 16, 'lovhaiia te irpooTou 
KaV'^Wi]VL. 3) sometimes te corresponds 
to dk in a following clause, where the con- 
nexion is then adversative or antithetic, 
and thus emphatic. Acts xix. 3, eTtte te 
'Trpo's avTOv^ — ot ^£ eIttov, xxii. 8 ; comp. 
ver. 10. xxii. 28. 4) ivith other parti- 
cles: e. g. T£ yap, where te simply an- 
nexes, and yap assigns a reason ; comp. 
above in 1). Rom. i. 26. vii. 7. Heb. ii. 11. 
also Eau TS, prop, and if; repeated, idu te 
— Eau TE, equiv. to tvhether — or, Rom. 
xiv. 8 ; kdu te yap Kai, prop, for though 
also, 2 Cor. x. 8. 

T EXPO'S, Eo<s oi;§, TO, a tvall, espec. of 
a city. Acts ix. 25. Heb. xi. 30, & Class. 

T EKniijp Lov, ou, TO, {TEK/iiap,) a fi^cd 
sign, certain token, clear and evident proof. 
Acts i. 3. 

Tekvlov, ov, to, {tekvov,) a little 
child ; also used as an appellation, by 
which, in ancient times, masters were ac- 
customed to address their servants, and, in 
general, superiors their inferiors ; and espe- 
cially teachers their pupils ; — the diminu- 
tive form being expressive of affection, as in 
the lLt2ii\n filiole, John xiii. 33. Gal. iv. 19. 
1 John ii. 1. 

1l EKVOy OVEUi, f. l']<J(Ji3, {TEKVOy6v09, 

fr. TEKVOV, yivofxaL,) to bear children, to 
be the mother of a family, including all the 
duties of the maternal relation, 1 Tim. v. 
14. 

T EKvoy ovia, a9, v, {TEKVoyovEU),) 
the bearing of children, and so by impl. 
including all the duties of the maternal 
relation, 1 Tim. ii. 15, aa)0T]'ar£Tat ^la 
TTj's TEK. i. e. ' through the faithful per- 
formance of her duties as a mother,' in 



bringing up her household to the service of 
God ; comp. v. 10. See my note. 

liEKvov, ov, TO, (Tt/CTO),) a cMld : 
I. prop, and gener. 1) sing, a child, 
Luke i. 7, /cat ouk rjv auTots tekvov. 
Acts vii. 5. Rev. xii, 4. Plur. children. 
Matt. X. 21, al. 2) spec, of a son, sing. 
Matt. X. 21. xxi. 28. Rev. xii. 5. Plur. 
for sons. Matt. xxi. 28, al. — II. plur. 
TEKva, children, in a wider sense, by Hebr. 
equiv. to descendants, posterity. Matt. iii. 
9, kyElpai TEKva tw 'A^pad/j,. Lu. i. 17. 
Acts ii. 39. Gal. iv.'28. Emphat. mean- 
ing TRUE children, genuine descendants, 
John viii. 39. 1 Pet. iii. 6.— IIL fig. of 
one who is the object of parental love 
and care, or who yields filial love and 
reverence to another : 1) as a term of 
endearing address in the vocat. ; from a 
friend or teacher, Matt. ix. 2, ^dpcrEi, 
TEKVOV. Mk. ii. 5. 1 Tim. i. 18. Plur. 
Mk. X. 24. 2) from the Hebr. gener. for 
a pupil or disciple, the spiritual child ot 
any one, 2 Tim. i. 2, Tifxodiip dyaTry]T(Z 
tIkvu). Philem. 10. 3 John 4 ; with kv 
Kvpicp, 1 Cor. iv. 17. kv iriaTEL, 1 Tim. 

i, 2. KaTCL TTiaTLV, Tit. i. 4. 3) to. TEKVa 

TOV Qsov, the children of God, so called as 
being regenerated by his word and Spirit, 
and resembling their heavenly Father in 
their dispositions and actions, John i. 12. 
xi. 52, et al. ; of the Jews, John xi. 52 ; 
gener. of the pious worshippers of God, the 
righteous, saints. Christians, i. 12, eSiokev 
auTots k^ovariav TEKva Oeov yEviordai., 
meaning ^obedient and true worshippers 
of God,' and, from the adjunct, 'those 
who are acknowledged by God as such,' 
Rom. viii. 16, 17, 21, al. 4) Ta TEKva 
TOV SiafioXov, the children of the devil, as 
acting under his influence, and resembling 
him in spirit, opp. to Ta t. tou Oeou, 
once I John iii. 10. — IV. in a fig. sense, of 
the ' inhabitants of a city,' by a use found 
both in the Script, and the Class, writers, 
Matt, xxiii. 37. Lu. xix. 44. Gal. iv. 25. 5) 
by Hebr. with gen. the child of any thing 
means one connected with, partaking of, or 
exposed to that thing, and is often put in- 
stead of an adj. Lu. vii. 35, kdiKatcoQr} v 
cro(pLa ttTTo Tu)V TEKVtav avTTj£. Eph. v. 8. 

1 Pet. i. 14. Eph. ii. 3, TEKva opyrj^, i.e. 
' persons worthy of wrath and punishment,' 

2 Pet. ii. 14, KaTupa^ TEKva. So for the 
corresponding expression in Heb. Deut. 
XXV. 2, the Sept. has a£ios TrX^ywv, The 
same idiom has place in the term vl6<s ; 
though sometimes the subst. foil, is found 
not in 2ipass, but in an act. sense, as Eph. 

ii. 2, ot vloi dlTELQELa'S. 

T EKV0Tp0<})E(t), f. rjo-O), {TEKVOTpO- 

<^o§, fr. TEKVOV, Tpicfyo),) to bring up 
children, to fulfil the duties of a mother, . 
comp. TEKvoyovia, 1 Tim, v. 10, st ' 



TEK 



435 



TEA 



iT(.KvoTp6(pi](XE^ ' hath educated children,' 
i. e. if she has had any. Aloreover, in the 
idea of educating \s, here, from the context, 
implied the ' bringing them up in the nur- 
ture and admonition of the Lord." 

TtK-xcoi/, OI/09, o, (kindred with T£)^i;)j,) 
prop, aji artisan^ as opp. to a labourer ; 
and, according to the term accompanying 
it, employed to denote any artificer., whe- 
ther in wood, stone, or metal. When, 
however, it stands alone, it uniformly, in 
the Scriptural, and almost always in Class, 
writers, denotes, like our word wji^ht, and 
Lat./a/>e?*, a carpenter. 

TtA-f tos, a, 01/, adj. (teXos,) prop. 
' what has reached its end, term, limit,' 
hence complete., perfect., full., wanting in 
nothing : I. gener. Ja. i. 4, 'ipyov te- 
Xblov. ver. 17, 25. 1 John iv. 18, t] 
TsXEia ayocTTT) : comparat. Heb. ix. 11, 
TfX.£iOT£pa? c/ctji/^s. In a moral sense, 
of pereons, Matt. v. 48, TtXetot, wcnrEp 6 

UuTijp V/ULCOV TE/VsiOS £(TTt, i. C. fully 

and completely., not partially, righteous ; 
comp. Wisd. xliv. 17. Isocr. p. 239, 
TgA.stoi'S avdpa^ sti/at, Kal Tratras 'i^&Lv 
Ta<3 dpen-a^., of course understanding this, 
as the similar expression. Job i. 1, with a 
certain limitation, suggested by the very 
word wo-TTFp, which, like some other ad- 
verbs of comparison, does not denote 
equality, in the things compared, (see 
Matt. xix. 19,) hut consimilarity and con- 
ybr?rt2Y2/,— namely , in that comparative sense 
by which a thing is perfect so far as the 
constitution of its nature permits, xix. 21. 
Col. i. 28, tsXelov kv Xf). & iv, 12, 
T£\€iot Kal TTETrXripioiuLivoL kv 'TravTL 
^eXv/uiaTL Tov Oeov. Ja. i. 4, iva rjrg 
tIXelol., meaning, ' complete both in prin- 
ciple and practice ;' and iii. 2, d tl^ kv 

XoyU} OV TTTG-LEL., OVTO? TeXeLO^ O-VVp. 

Phil. iii. 15, ocot ovv teXelol., in Vv'hich 
last passage, though the term is by many 
explained of full growth in Divine know- 
ledge, it is better to understand it of those 
who have attained to the comparative per- 
fection above mentioned. So in a similar 
passage of Simplicius on Epict. ep. 289, it 
is said, ' Make it your study to live ws 
teXeios, ov\ o)? teXos d7r£tX77<^a)§,' &c. 
i. e. ' not as though you had already at- 
tained perfection, hut as always advancing 
towards it.' Also an epithet applied to 
the will of God, Rom. xii. 2, to ^kXr^pa 
TOV Oeov — to teXelov. — II. SPEC, of full 
age., adult., full-groicn ; in N. T. said in a 
figur. sense of persons full-grown in mind 
and understanding, Tat? ^pEcrl, 1 Cor. 
xiv. 20 ; of full growth in Divine know- 
ledge, as opposed to oi fjLavddvovTEs or 
the vnTTLoi. kv XpiCTtt), 1 Cor. iii. 1. 
And so in Hierocles we have ol teXelol 
opp. to OL ctpxopiEvoL., ' beginners,' 1 Cor. 



ii. 6. Heb. v. 14; also 'full-grown in 
Christian faith and virtue,' Eph. iv. 13, 
£ts dvSpa teXelov., 'unto a complete man,' 
i. e. unto complete spiritual manhood. 
Neut. TO teXelov., fidl age., viz. in know- 
ledge, &c. 1 Cor. xiii. 10; comp. ver. 11. 

T£\flOTr]9, t^TOS, 77, (T£\£t05,) COIU- 

pleteness., perfectness., Col. iii. 14, ecttI 
crvvdEorjULO'S ttj^ teX. equiv. to tyvvoEcrixo^ 
teXelotyito^. Of the recondite doctrines 
of the Gospel, as opp. to the more simple 
and elementary ones, Heb. vi. 1, ettI tiiv 
teX. 0£p6o/x£6a, meaning what was, at v. 14, 
called solid food., that of Christian know- 
ledge, such as was fitted for the teXelol., or 
well instructed, as opp. to that suited to the 
vniTLOL^ or less instructed, termed milk. 

T eXeloco., f. COCO), (T£\£i05,) to com- 
plete, make perfect., so as to be wanting in 
nothing, trans. : so Sept. I. prop, to 
bring to an end., finish., a work, duty, &c. 
TO 'ipyov., John iv. 34, xvii. 4. to. Epya., 
V. 36. Lu. xiii. 32, Trj tpLttj teXelov- 
fxai, i.e. 'I shall he brought to the end of 
my course,' namely, hy death. Of a race, 
dpofjLov, Acts XX. 24 ; perf. pass, as mid. 
with dpofJLOV impl. Phil. iii. 12, ov^ otl 
nor] TETEXELWfxaL, scil. Toi; dpojuov, i. e, 
' not that I have already completed my 
course and arrived at the goal,' so as to re- 
ceive the prize, comp, ver, 14, So Philo 
Alleg. ii. p. 74, C, otuv (w \j/vxv) te- 

XELUid^'S Kal (Spa^ELcov Kal (TTECpdvOOV 

d^Lcodrj^. Of time, Lu. ii. 43, teXelco- 
(rdvTcov TU's rifJ.kpa's. Of declarations or 
prophecy, to fidfil., John xix. 28, 'Lva te- 
XelooOjj 7] ypacpn- — H. YiG. to make per- 
fect, i. e, to hring to a state of perfectness 
or completeness : 1) gener. John xvii. 23, 

Lva UJCTL TETEXELUifXEVOL £t§ £1/, ' that thoV 

may be perfectly united in one.' 2 Cor. 
xii. 9, 77 ydp ovvajULL's fiov [rov 0£ot}) kv 
dardEVELa teXelovtul^ 'shows itself per- 
fect.' Ja'. ii. 22. 1 John ii. 5. iv. 12, 17. 
Ecclus. vii. 32. 2) spec, and in a moral 
sense, to make perfect in respect to sin, ' to 
fully cleanse from sin,' to make full ex- 
piation for it. So often in the Ep. to the 
Hebrews, e. g. vii. 19, ohhkv ydp £T£- 
Xelooctev 6 vofxo^., ' the Mosaic law made 
no perfect expiation, provided no real ex- 
piation and atonement;' comp. vii. 11. x. 
4, where see my note. Of persons, Heb. 
ix. 9, ^wpd TE Kal ^vaiuL — p.i] SwdpLEvaL 

KaTd CrVVELSl]<TLV TEXELUXraL TOV XaTpEV- 

ovTa. X. 1, 14, teteXelcokev eU to cltjve- 
KE9 TOV? dyiaX^ojUiEvov^., 'hath perfectly 
expiated those that are sanctified.' Also, 
to make perfect., in respect to condition, 
happiness, glory ; to bring to a perfect 
state of happiness and glory; prop, 'to 
bring any one through to the goal,' so as 
to win and receive the prize. So of Christ 
as exalted to he head over all things, Heb. 
U 2 



TEA 



436 



TEA 



ii. 10, Tov apxvyov T77§ orcoTy]pLa^ avTcov 
Sid Trad^fxcLTwi; teXeluxtul^ an agonistical 
metaphor ; the person who proclaims the 
victor and bestows the prize being said 
TsXswvv TLvd^ and those who receive it 
TzkeiovaQaL. And so of Christ it is said, 
ver. 9, by the same metaphor, ^Xeito/uleu 
'Iijcoui/, Slcc to Trddi^/uLa tov ^avuTov 
oo^T] Kal TLjuy k(yT&(pavu)fxivov. v. 9. vii. 
28. Also of saints advanced to glory, xi. 
40. xii. 23. Comp. Philo above in I. 

TsXgi'a)?, adv. (TEXsio?,) completely^ 
perfectly^ 1 Pet. i. 13, tsXsloo^ sXTTLcraTe^ 
i. e. ' cherish a perfect hope, unwavering 
confidence.' So in 2 Mace. xii. 42. 3 Mace. 

iii. 26. Pol. vi. 37, 4. 

T£\£i6o(r£§, £ct)?, 77, (TfiXstow,) prop. 
the completion o f any commenced action^ or 
the accomplishment of any meditated pur- 
pose. In N. T. fig. as said of a prediction, 
fulfilment^ Lu. i. 45. Also completeness or 
perfection^ as said of Christ's priesthood, 
both as to expiation and intercession. Heb. 

vii. 11. 

TsXfttoT?;?, ou, o, {teXelou)^) a com- 
pleter^ perfecter^ prop. ' who brings one 
through to the goal so as to win and re- 
ceive the prize,' Heb. xii. 2, £ts tov t7]<s 

TTLCTTEWS ap^1]y6v KOL TiX. 'l7JCrOUi/, 

comp. ii. 10. 

T£X£cr^opEa), f. ijo-co, (T£X£(r0opo§, 
' bringing to an end,' perfecting, ripening, 
fr. TfXos, cpipay^) prop, to bring to p)erfec- 
iion or maturity^ as fruit, grain, &c. to 
ripen^ as oft. in Class. ; absol. and fig. Lu. 

viii. 14, oi) TsX&crcpopodaL^ where see my 
note, and comp. Matt. xiii. 22. 

T eXevtclco^ f. ijcoj, (t£\£ut7/,) prop. 
to bring to an end^ finish any commenced 
action, Eurip. Phoen. 1597, to Traxsp, o5 
TavTa TsXfiUTa, or complete any com- 
menced period of time, espec. that of life ; 
so Dem. xiii. 15, tov ^iov tsXevtuv^ 'to 
end one's life, to die ;' in N. T. intrans. or 
Avith TOV (Slov underst, to die^ Matt. ii. 19, 
TfiXsuTrjcrai/TOs ^£ tov 'H.pwdov. ix. 18, 
et al. saepe in Sept. & Class. Of a violent 
death. Matt. xv. 4. Mk. vii. 10, SravaTco 
TeXEVTaTU}, 'let him die the death,' em- 
phat. ' be put to death without mercy.' 

TeXevti), 77s, 77, {teXeoo^ t£/\.os,) an 
end, limit, espec. of life : so t£\. tov 
(3iov, Dem. 481, J4; in N. T. absol. end 
of life, death, Matt. ii. 15, £cos t^s teX. 
'Rpcodov. Sept. Gen. xxvii. 2, al. Apocr. 
and Class. 

TeX ECO, f. Ecro), {teXo^,) to terminate, 
'Complete, fully accomplish, Hom. Od. iv. 
776 ; trans. I. PROP, and gener. with acc. 
Matt. xiii. 53, ote eteXectev 6 T. Td<s 
rrrapafSoXdg. xix. 1. xxvi. 1. Lu. ii. 39. 
2 Tim. iv. 7, tov Spojuov, (a metaphor de- 
rived from the agonistic phrase teXeIv 8p6- 



fjLov, occ, in Hom. xxiii. 373. ) Rev. xi. 7. 
Pass. Lu. xii. 50, k'ws ov teXeo-O^, i. e. 
(SdiTTLcr/JLa. John xix. 28, 30, ' tete- 
XEOTTai, it is finished ! i. e. 'the whole 
work.' Rev. x. 7, ETEXin-dt] to iulvctti]- 
piov. XV. 1, 8. Sept. and Class. Foil, by 
partic. in the participial construction. Matt, 
xi. 1, ote eteXectev 6 'I. dLaTaarcrcov, 
'when Jesus had finished commanding,' 
&c. So prsegn. with the partic. under- 
stood, Matt. X. 23, ov fxj] teXe(T7]te tus 
itoXel^ tov 'I. 'ye shall not have finished 
the cities of Israel,' i.e. 'ye shall not 
have finished passing through them.' The 
partic. is supplied in Sept. (ruy£T£X£(r£ 
SiafSaLvwv, Josh. iii. 17. iv. 1. Of time, 
pass, to be emded, fulfilled, Rev. xx. ^,d\pL 
TEXeadrj to. X'-^'-^ etii. ver. 5, 7. — II. 
METAPH. to fully accomplish, fulfil, exe- 
cute completely, as a rule or law, with acc. 
TOV vGjuLov, Rom. ii. 27. James ii. 8. 
EiriOvjuLLav (rapKo^, Galat. v. 16; in 
Class, only of orders, or directions, sc. 
Luc. Piscat. 52, teXw/ulev to. irapi]y- 
jEXixiva. Of declarations, prophecy, &c. 
Lu. xviii. 31, TEXE(rdi'](yETaL iravTa tcl 
y Ey p a fxfXEV a. Luke xxii. 37, al. Sept. 
Ezra i. 1, and Class, as Diod. Sic. ii. 27, 
vofxLcra^ TETEXiadaL tov XP^l^f^ov. — III. 
by impl. to discharge fully, pay off, as 
taxes, TO. didpax/uLa, Matt. xvii. 24. 
(p6pov9, Rom. xiii. 6. Jos. and Class. 

TfiXos, £09 ous, TO, a7i end or term, as 
said of time, also termination or completion 
of action; in N. T. 1) gener. and with 
gen. Lu. i. 33, Tri<3 (SaarLXELa^ avTov ovk 
ECTTai TfXos. 2 Cor. iii. 13, eU to teXo9 
TOV KaTapyovjULEVOv. See my note. Heb. 
vii. 3, /uLi^TE X^(jot}9 teXo9. 1 Cor. X. 11, to. 
TiXt] Tuw aiuyvutv. 1 Pet. iv. 7, iravTiov 
TO teXo9 : with gen. impl. John xiii. 1, 
£15 TfXos (JwT??) 7]yd7n](TEv. Matt. xxiv. 
6. x. 22, vTrojULELva? £t5 TfiXos, scll. ^wrj? 
or TradviuLaTcov. Mk. xiii. 7. Ln. xxi. 9. 

1 Cor. i. 8, k'cos teXov9, scil. ^wtjs. 1 Cor. 
XV. 24, eItu to teXo9, i. e. ' the end of the 
work of redemption.' Absol. teXos fX^^f? 
to have an end, be ended ; fig. to be de- 
stroyed, Mk. iii. 26, oh SvvaTai a-Tadrjvai, 
dXXd teXos e-x^l. Adverb, acc. to teXo9, 
finally, at last, 1 Pet. iii. 8 ; £is teXo^, 
prop. ' to the end,' perpetually, for ever, 
Lu. xviii. 5. 1 Th. ii. 16. Meton. 77 dpxh 
KaX TO TfXos, equiv. to TrpwTO's Kal 
Eo-xaTo^, Rev. xxii. 13. 2) fig. end, i. e. 
event, issue, result. Matt. xxvi. 58, eku- 
d7]To ISeTv to teXo9. Ja. V. 11, TO teXo£ 
'K.vpLov,!. e. 'which the Lord gave.' With 
gen. of person or th'm^, final lot, Rom. vi. 
21, TO TfiXos EKELvoov ^dvuTos. ver. 22. 

2 Cor. xi. 15. Heb. vi. 8. 1 Pet. i. 9. Of 
a declaration or prophecy, accomplishment, 
fulfilment, Lu. xxii. 37, ra irEpl kfxov 
TtXos e'xfit, 'have fulfilment,' are fulfilled. 



TEA 



437 



TEX 



3) fig. end^ i. q. ' final purpose," that to 
\vhich all the parts of a whole tend, and all 
terminate, the chief point, sum^ 1 Tim. i. 
5, TO TtXos Ti\<s irapayyt\'ia<3 kaTiv 
dyaTT}) : in Rom. x. 4, TtXo's vofiov Xpt- 
crroj £i§ dLKaLuavvi]u Travrl tio TTiCTtu- 
ovTi^ the sense is, ' the scope, end, and 
final ohject of the Law for justification/ 
See Acts xiii. 38. Similarly as says Pliilo, 
p. 626, irpovKtLTO iv uvTto -rfc/Vo? u)vfi<TaL 
Tous ctp^oixivuv^. 4) meton. and by a use 
formed on that sense of TgAelv, by whicli 
it means to pai/ tcuv or tribute, a taoo^ tri- 
bute^ Matt. xvii. 25, Ti\i] fi Kijvaou. Rom. 
xiii. 7, and Class. 

TfXwi/rjs, oif, o, (t£/\o9, covtojULai,) 
prop, a fanner of the taxes or customs ; for 
the public, revenues of the ancients were 
usually farmed out, and among the Romans 
the farmers were chiefly of the equestrian 
order, or at least persons of Avealth and 
ranV-, like Zacchseus, a/jxtTeXwi/t^s, Lu. 
xix. 2. The farmers-general had also sub- 
contractors, and they employed agents, 
who collected the taxes and customs ; 
these were called TEkowai : in N. T. in 
this latter sense, a toll-gatherer, collector 
of customs^ usually persons of the lowest 
grade, (as alone likely to fill so odious an 
office,) and by the Jews always coupled 
with the most depraved classes of society. 
Matt. V. 46, ov^L Kol ol -r^X. to auTO 

TTOLOViTV', X. 3. TsX. KUL djUapTCoXol, \x, 

10. xviii. 17. xxi. 31, al. 

T eXcov Lov, ou, TO, (T£\co'i/r)?,) a toll- 
house, custom-house, collector's office, Matt, 
ix. 9. Mk. ii. 14, and Class. 

T£(Oas, aT05, to, a ivonder, 'poii.ent, 
prodigy, strictly as foreboding something 
future; in N. T. only pi. and ahvays joined 
with crrjiiieLa. Jos. Ant. ii. 12, 1. Xen. 
Mem. i. 4, 15. 1) prop. Acts ii. 19, Scocro) 
Ttpai-a iv TO) ovp. di/co, Kai (n]iULETa kiri 
T7j<s yfj^ KUTUi. 2) gener. crr\p.&ia Kai 
TspaTa, signs and wonders, spoken of 
' mighty w-orks,' miracles of various kinds, 
(so Jer. xxxii. 20 ;) so of the miracles of 
Moses, Acts vii. 36 ; of Christ, John iv. 
48. Acts ii. 22 ; of the apostles and teach- 
ers, ver. 43. iv. 30, al. ; also the pretended 
miracles of false pro))hets or teachers. Matt, 
xxiv. 24. 2 Th. ii. 9. Sept. and Class. 

T EO-GrapcLKOv^a, ol, al, to., indec. 
forty. Matt. iv. 2. Mk. i. 13. Acts i. 3, al. 
Sept. and Class. 

T irrcrap aKovn-aET^]'S, io<s ov^, 6, rj-, 
adj. (Tfo-cr. £to9,) of forty years, e. gr. 
TE<TarapaKovTa£n-ri<s xpouos, the time of 
forty vears,' forty years' time, Acts vii. 23. 
xiii. 18. 

Tfo-orapg?, 01, ai, neut. pa, gen. wv, 
Attic TtTn-apa^, neut. pa, card. adj. four, 
Matt. xxiv. 31. Mk. ii. 3. al. Sept. & Class. 



T £ c a p £ (T K a I ^ £ K- a T o ?, i],ov, ordin . 
adj. fourteenth. Acts xxvii. 27, 33. Sept. 
and Class. 

T£Ta|OTaros, la, ov, (T£Taf)To§,) an 
adj. marking succession of days, used only 
adverb, on the fourth day. John xi. 39, 
T£TapTaros yap eottl, i. e. ' he is now the 
fourth day dead,' has been four days dead. 
Pol. iii. 52, 2, TeTapTalcs cov. 

T£TapTO§, ov, ordin. adj. (T£cr<Ta- 
p£§,) the fourth, Matt. xiv. 25, al. Sept. 
and Class. 

T£Tpa-, contr. for TtTTapa or T£cr- 
(japa, 

T &T p ay (jovo'3, ov, 6, 77, adj. (T£Tpa, 
ycovia,) four-cor?iered, four-square, Rev, 
xxi. 16. Sept. and Class. 

T ET p d d Lov, ov, TO, (dim. of T£Tpas, 
a tetrad, the number four,) a quaternion 
of soldiers, the usual number of a Roman 
night- watcli, relieved every three hours. 
Acts xii. 4. Philo in Flacc. p. 981. Pol. 
vi. 33, 7. 

T ET paKL(Ty^L\Loi,aL, a, adj. {tetpu- 
/ci§, adv. ^iXiOi,) prop, ^four times one 
thousand,' i. e. foitr thousand. Matt. xv. 
38. Sept. and Class. 

T ETpaKocTLOL, ui, a, adj./b?^r hun- 
dred. Acts V. 36, al. Sept. and Class, 

T£Tpa'/i?ji;os, ov, 6, 77, adj. (T£Tpa, 
which see, iuii;v,) of four months, John iv. 

35, £Tt TETpdjULTIVO'S ECTTL ()(poVo?) Kai 6 

^epLC-fjLo^ Epx^Tai,!. e. four months' time. 
Text. rec. neut. TETpap-^vov, a form found 
in Sept. ; the masculine occurs in the 
Class. 

T£Tpa'7rXoos oC§, 6y] rj, oov ovv, adj. 
{TETpa, dirXoo^,) fourfold, Lu. xix. 8, and 
Class. 

TfiT/oaTTOus, O009, 6, ?7, adj. [riTpa, 
7rov<s,) four-footed, quachuped, plur. ab- 
sol. Ta TETpaTToSa, quadrupeds, Acts x. 
12. xi. 6. Rom. i. 23. Sept. and Class, 

T ETp apx^fj^-,^- »5o"w, {TEH-pdpxv^^) to 
be tetrarch, to rule as tetrarch, with gen. 
Lu. iii. 1. Jos. Vit. § 11. 

T£Tpap)(t]?, ov, 6, (T£Tpa, ap)(to,) a 
tetrarch, prop. ' the ruler of the fourth part 
of a district or province ;' Strabo, p. 567, 
Casaub. In later usage it became among 
the Romans a common title for those who 
governed any part of a province or king- 
dom, subject only to the Roman emperor. 
In N. T. of Herod Antipas, Matt. xiv. 1, 
Lu. iii. 19. ix. 7. Acts xiii. 1. 

T£ux<*^, see Tvyxavu). 

T ECppoco, f. coau), {TEtppa, ashes,) to 
reduce to ashes, idterly consume, destroy, 
e. gr. cities, with acc. 2 Pet. ii. 6. 

T£Xi^>7i hi (TiKTtt), tekeIv^ art in 
general : 1 ) prop, art or skill in any science. 



TEX 



438 



Tie 



&c. Acts xvii. 29, ■yapdyf.LaTL nri^vt]^. 
Sept. Apocr. and Class. 2) metori. an 
art^ trade^ Rev. xviii.22, tex^'i-'t-ii^ Trdcr^s 
TSX^^]^- ^cts xviii. 3, (TK^voiroLol t^v 
■Tixvt]v. Sept. and Class. 

T£)(i/ZV?j9, ou, 6, (TfXt^^]^) prop, an 
artisan^ artificer; Acts xix. 24, TrapsL- 
yj-TO ToTs TExyLTUL? kpyciCTLav. ver. 38. 
Rev. xviii. 22. Sept. and Class. Fig. of 
God, as the builder and founder of the 
heavenly Jerusalem, Heb. xi. 10. Wisd. 
xiii. 1. 

T 77 /c 60 , f, Jo), to melt or liquefy^ %Yhether 
by heat or by moisture ; in N, T. pass. 
^riKOfxai^ to he melted^ to melt, 2 Pet. iii. 
12. Sept. and Class. 

T i-jXavy u)<s^ adv. (TijXauyr;?, far- 
shining, radiant, fr. tt^Xe, auyrj,) radi- 
ardly^ briglitly, i. e. clearly^ distinctly, Mk. 

viii. 25, Ev&l3\&-»p'E nrr]X. aTravra^. Diod. 
Sic. i. 50, Trpos TO Tr]Xavyi(rTEpov bpav. 

T?j\t/couTo§, avT)]y ouTo, demonstr. 
correl. pron. prop, a strengthened form of 
TijXi/cos, 7], 02/, so great^ tantus^ 2 Cor. i. 
10, EK TrjXLKovTov ^avtcTov. Hcb. ii. 3. 
Ja. iii. 4, al. and Class. 

T p £ 60, f. ?5o'6o, (supposed to come from 
Tjjpos, ' watching,' jiEsch. Suppl. 245 ; 
yet it would rather seem that T?7p6s is de- 
rived from T?7p£co. Indeed Tjjpos is one of 
those verbals formed from a pres. indie, 
and equiv. in sense to the partic. pres. So 
'TTOio's from ttoleco, and (Soctko? from /3o- 
crAC£6o. Thus T>7f)6s is equiv. to t^owv, as 
(pLXo<s for (piXCov. TrjpEU) itself would 
seem to be a vox peregidna, probably cogn. 
with some one in the Sanscrit. Its prim, 
sense seems to be to hold or grasp^ and 
thence to keep, to keep hold of, and fig. 
to keep GUARD over, to ivatch,) to keep an 
eye upon, to icatch, and hence to keep, to 
guard, trans. I. prop, to icatch, to observe 
attentively, to keep the eyes fixed upon (of 
things), with acc. Rev. i. 3, /cat Trjpouy- 
TE? Tct Elf avTri {7rpo(pr}'TELa) jEypap.- 
jULEua, ' watching the fulfilment of the 
prophecy.' xxii. 7, 9. Sept. Tr]pu)V auEfxau, 
Eccl. xi.4, & Class. Hence fig. to obsei^ve, 
keep,fidfil, as a duty, precept, law, custom, 
&c. — ' to perform watchfully, vigilantly,' 
vvith acc. Ttts EVToXa^, Matt. xix. 17, oft. ; 
EVToXt]u Ttjv acnrCXov, ] Tim. vi. 14 ; 
Xoyov, John viii. 51. Rev. iii. 10 ; Xoyous, 
John xiv. 24; toi/ vofxov, Acts xv. 5; ira- 
pddocnv, Mk. vii. 9 ; to ord^fSaTov, John 

ix. 16; gener. with acc. expr. or impl. 
Rev. ii. 26, 6 Tiipivv to. 'ipya fxov, i. e. 
' the works which I require,' Matt, xxiii. 
3, Rev. iii. 3. — II. by impl. to keep, guard, 
e. gr. a prisoner, with acc. Matt, xxvii. 36, 

54, TTJf)0Ul/T£9 TOV 'I^JCTOUZ/. ActS xll. 5, 6. 

xvi. 23. xxiv. 23. 1 John v. 18, Tr]pEL 
kavTov, i. e. 'is on his guard;' partic. 
Matt. XX viii. 4, ol Trj/)oui/T£§, tlie keepers^ 



guards. Of things, to. IjULaTia, Rev. xvi. 
15 ; fig. to keep in safety, to preserve, main- 
tain, with acc us. of thing simply, Eph. iv. 

3, Tt^pElu TrjV Zv6'TY]Ta TOV TTVEV fXaTO^. 

2 Tim. iv. 7, ti]v TrLcrTLv TETripiiKa. Jude 
6. So fig. acc. with adjuncts ; with double 
acc. of pers. and predic. 2 Cor. xi. 9, 
d(3aprj VfJilv E/mavTou ETiTpijaa Kai Tf/pr?- 
0-60. 1 Tim. V. 22. Ja. i. 27 ; with dat. of 
pers. Jude 1 ; foil, by eu of state, John 
xvii. 1 1, 12. Jude 21 ; ek tlvo£, John 
xvii. 15 ; ttTTo' Tii/os, Ja. i. 27. — III. to 
keep back, reserve, with acc. of thing, John 

ii. 10, CrU TETr}pi]Ka^ TOV KoXoV olvOV £609 

apTi. xii. 7 ; Ti' TLVL, 2 Pet. ii. 17; tI eL^ 
TLva, 1 Pet. i. 4. Of person, 1 Cor, vii. 
37, TripElv TY\v kauTov irapdEvov, i. e. 
' to keep her at home, unmarried,' opp. to 
EKyafxii^iMiv, ver. 38. 2 Pet. ii. 4, £t§ KpicrLu. 

T 11 pr](T L^, £6os, 77, {ttipeco,) prop. a 
ivatching, keeping, and hence in N. T. 1) 
fig. observance, performance, i. e. of pre- 
cepts, kvn-oXuw, 1 Cor. Yii. 19. 2) guard., 
ward ; in N. T. meton. place of ward, a 
vrison. Acts iv. 3. v. 18, 'idEvro avnrov^ 
kv T^pria-EL di]piO(Tia. 

TLdiipLL, f. 6/7crco, aor. 1. £0>j/c«, perf. 
T£0£t/ca, to set, put, place, lay, trans. I. 
prop, to set, put, where a person or thing 
is set erect, rather than as lying down ; 
act. ct light. ovSk TLdiacrL Xv\vov utto tou 
/uLooLov., Matt. V. 15 ; viroKaTco KXivfj^, 
Lu. viii. 16; fis /cpu7rT7jf, xi. 33 : so a 
title, £7rt TOU crTavpov, John xix. 9 ; one's 
foot, ETTL T^s 3'a\dc7cr?j§, Rev. x. 2. Mid. 
to set or put for one''s self i. e. on one's 
own part or behalf, by one's own order, 
&c. ; e. gr. persons in prison, cjyuXa- 
Ktjv, Acts xii. 4 ; €is T^prjarLV, iv. 3 ; also ku 
(pvXaK^, Matt. xiv. 3 ; ku Ti^pijaEi, Acts 
v. 18 : of things, to set in the proper place, 
1 Cor. xii. 18, 6 0£O§ £0£To to. jmiXri — kv 
Tto cruiixaTL. Spoken of food or drink, to 
set on or out, with acc. John ii. 10, toi/ 
KaXou olvov TtdrjcrL. — II. oftener of 
things, to put, lay, lay doum, where the 
thing is conceived of as laid or lying down 
rather than as erect : 1) prop. ^eiuleXiov, 
Lu. vi. 48. 1 Cor, iii. 10; Xidov irpocr- 
KOfxpLaTcs, Rom, ix. 33 ; Trpoa-KOjULpLa, 
xiv. 13 : gener. in the adage, Lu. xix. 21, 
a'Lpoiv d ovK £0>}/cas, ' taking up what thou 
hast not laid down,' ' taking what is not 
thine own.' Of dead bodies, to lay in a 
tomb or sepulchre, with acc. Mk. xv. 47. 
xvi. 6, oTTou EdriKav avTov, & oft. Foil, 
by kirl with gen. tou9 daQEVEl^ kiri k\l- 
vtov. Acts V. 15 ; with acc. KdXvfXfxa e'kI 
TO TTpoa-coTTOv, 2 Cor. iii. 13; Tas )(€?pas 
£7r' avTd, Mk. x. 16 : so with ettl and 
acc. impl. Ta yovuTa TidkvaL sc. ettl ti)v 
yriv, lit. 'to place the knees,' — to kneel, 
Mk. XV. 19, oft. ; VTTo tous Trdoas tlvo^, 
1 Cor. XV. 25. In the sense of to lay off 



TI K 



439 



T I M 



or aside, IfxaTia, John xiii. 4. 2) fig-. 
Tidtuai Ti]v xl/vxh^-, ' to lay down one's 
life,' John x. 11, oft. Foil, bv kirl witli 
acc. Matt. xii. 18, ^ncriti to VLviVfxd fxov 
€7r' avTOv, i. c. '"will give or iiii])art to 
liim mid. with tV, 2 Cor. v. 19, ^tfxsvo^ 
kv vixLv TOP \6you T/ys Ka-TaWayT/s, i. e. 
*■ placing in ns, laying upon us, commit- 
ting unto us.' jVIid. foil, by £ts to. tZra 
Vfxwv, ' to lay up in your ears,' to let 
sink into your ears, minds, Lu. ix. 44 ; by 
£is rds Kapdia^, ' to lay to heart,' = to 
resolve, xxi. 14; by Iv tt} /cap^/a, ' to lay 
up in heart, lay to heart,' = to revolve in 
mind, ponder, i. 66, also = to resolve, 
purpose, Acts v. 4 ; ev tw Tri/eUjuaTi, xix. 
21. — III. fig. to set, appoint, constitute, 
often equiv. to Engl, to make ; of time, 
mid. Acts i. 7, xpovovs t) Kaipov's, oD§ 6 
UaTijp ed&To kv Trj id'ia k^ovcTLCt, i. e. 
' which the Father hath set by virtue of 
his own authority,' comp. kv, III. 5 : 
so the lot of any one, to fxipo^, foil, by 
IXBTO. TLvo<5, Matt. xxiv. 51 ; of a decision, 
decree, law, Acts xxvii. 12, ol 'ttXelov? 
edevTo (3ov\i]u, i. e. 'made a decision, 
decided, determined;' Gal. iii. 19, 6 vofxo^ 
s.Tidi], ^ the law was set, made,' in text, 
rec. irpoarETidit. Foil, by double acc, of 
pers. or thing, and predicate, 1 Cor. ix. 18, 
iva douTravou ^vcrot} to &vayyi\Lov, 
*■ that I may make the gospel without 
charge,' free of expense, comp. for the 
sense, 2 Cor. xi. 7, 8 ; of persons, in the 
formula k'cos di/ ^to tou? EX^pous crou 
vTroTTodiov Tcou TToowv <Tov, Matt. xxii. 
44, al. ; Acts xx. 28, v/jlu? eQeto kirLCTKo- 
TTov^, Rom. iv. 17, iraTepa iroXXwv 
kQvwv TsdELKd (TE. 1 Cor. xii. 28. Heb. i. 
2. 2 Pet. ii. 6 ; in a pass, construction, 
with eU o final, 1 Tim. ii. 7 ; foil, by acc. 
and €i§ final, mid. 1 Th. v. 9, ovk IOeto 
lipids 6 0£o§ £t§ 6pyi]v, ' hath not ap- 
pointed us to wrath ;' pass. 1 Pet. ii. 8 : 
with acc. and Iva, John xv. 16. 

Tt/CTw, f. TE^ofxai, aor. 2. etekov, 
to bring forth, hear, as off'spring, trans. 
1) prop. Matt. i. 21, 23, TtJgTat ^£ mbv, 
and ver. 25. ii. 2, 6 TEy^Ei^ (SaaiXsv^. 
Lu. i. 31. Sept. and Class. Metaph. of 
irregular desire as producing sin, Ja. i. 15, 
ETTLdu/jLLa avWa^ovcra tIktel dp.apTLav, 
and Class. 2) of the earth, Heb. vi. 7, 
yij 77 TiKTOvara (SoTuvriv. Eurip. Cyclop. 
332, TI yrj — TLKTOvcra iroiav. 

TiXXct), f. lXu), to pull or pluck, to pull 
out or off, as ears of grain, with acc. Matt, 
xii. I. Mk. ii. 23. Lu. vi. 1. Sept. t'CX. 
Tpi^a^, Ezra ix. 3. Arr. Epict. iii. 1, 29. 
Diod. Sic. V. 21, crrdxv^. 

Ttjuaw, f. ria-u), {Ttimi],) prop, to rate, 
price^ or estimate any thing, to account it 
worth so and so ; & by impl. ivorthy ; hence 
in N.T. I. toesteem,honour,reverence,vi\i\i 



acc. 1) gener. 1 Tim. v. 3. 1 Pet. ii. 17. 
Spec, parents. Matt. xv. 4, 5. Mk. vii. 10. x. 
19. Eph. vi. 2, al. and Sept. ; kings, I Pet. 
ii. 17 ; God and Christ, John v. 23. viii. 
49, al. Sept. and Class. 2) to treat with 
honour, to bestow special marks of honour 
and favour upon any one, with acc. John 
xii. 2(). Acts xxviii. 10, TroXXals Tifxal^ 
ETifxi](Tav r;^as. Jos. Ant. iv. 6, 8, u/urlv 
Tifxdv ^EVLOL's. Xen. An. i. 9, 14, owpoi? 
ETL/uLu. — II. to price, i. e. to fix a value 
or price upon any thing ; pass, and mid. 
with acc. Matt, xxvii. 9, ttjV Ti/irjV tov 
TE^ifxilfxivov, ov ETLfxiicravTO aTTO viwv 
'la-paijX. Sept. Jos. and Class. 

Tt/xt], ?]<3, 77, (Tiw,) gener. ivotih, esti- 
mation ; in N. T. I. esteem, honour, resjject, 
reverence : 1 ) gener. e. gr. as rendered or 
exhibited towards any person or thing. 
John iv. 44, irpocpriTi]^ — TLfxr\v ovk e^el. 
Rom. xii. 10. 1 Cor. xii. 23, sq. Col. ii. 
23, OVK kv TLp-rj Tivi, i. e. TOV aru}/JLaT0<3. 
1 Th. iv. 4. Heb. iii. 3. 1 Pet. iii. 7. 
aKEvo? £t5 TLp.7]v, Rom. Ix. 21. So as 
rendered to masters, 1 Tim. vi. 1 ; to ma- 
gistrates, Rom. xiii. 7 ; elders, 1 Tim. v. 
17 ; to Christ, with oo^a, 2 Pet. i. 17. Rev. 
V. 12, 13; to God, with oo^a, ITim.i. 17. 
vi. 16, al. Sept. & Class. 2) s^ec, ofa state 
or condition of honour, rank, or dignity, 
joined with do^a, Heb. ii. 7, ^0^7; kul 
TLfxfj kcTTEcpdvcoara^ avTov. ver. 9. Rom. 
ii. 1, 10. 1 Pet. i. 7. ii. 7. Sept. & Class. 
Once of an oflSce of honour, Heb. v. 4. 
Jos. Ant. X. 8, 6. 3) meton. honour, 
equiv. to mark or token of honour, reward, 
&c. Acts xxviii. 10, TroXXal^ TipLal^ 
ETLpLi](Tav Tifxa^. Sept. and Class. — II. 
value, price. Matt, xxvii. 6, Ti/xi] aLpLaTcs, 
' price of blood.' ver. 9. Acts iv. 34. vii. 
16, TLfxri dpyvpLov. xix. 19. Meton. a 
thing of price, and hence collect, preciozis 
things. Rev. xxi. 24, 26, & Sept. Ez.ii.2,25. 

Ti/xto§, a, ov, adj. (Ttjur],) gener. esti- 
mated, thought icorth ; in N.T. I. esteemed, 
honourahle. Acts v. 34, Fa/x. Tt/x.tos TravTL 
Tw Xacp. Heb. xiii. 4. Sept. and Class. — 
II. valued, prized, precious : 1) prop, 'of 
high price,' costli/ ; XlQo<s TLfiLo^^ a pre- 
cious stone. Sept. and Class. : gener. Rev. 
xvii.4; pi. 1 Cor. iii. 12; ^vXov Tip^Lov, 
costly ivood. Rev. xviii. 12. 2) fig. ^jre- 
cious, dear. Acts xx. 24. Ja. v. 7. 1 Pet. 
i. 7, 19. Sept. and Class. 

Tl/XtOT7)S, 7]T05, 77, (Ti/itO§,) prBClOUS- 

ness, costliness ; meton. precious things, 
magnificence, probably costly merchandise, 
Rev, xviii. 19. 

T L juiu) p Eoo, f. vau), {n-LjULwpd?, fr. Ti^77, 
opdco,) prop, to u-atch ov protect the honour 
of any one, to help, succozir, vindicate, also 
to avenge, punish in behalf of any one ; in 
N. T. gener. to punish^ with acc. Acts 
U 4 



TIM 



440 



TI S 



XX vi. 11, TLjuaypvop auTov£ : pass. xxii. 5, 
and Class. 

Tt,ua)pta, as, 17, (TLjULwpio)^) prop. 
vindication, avengenient ; in N. T. punish- 
ment^ Heb. X. 29, and Class. 

Tis, neut. t/, gen. Ttyos, indef. pron. 
enclitic, owe, soTTze o?ze, a certain one ; dis- 
tinguished by its accent from tl<5 interrog. 

1. prop, and gener. of some person or 
thing whom one cannot or does not wish 
to name or specify more plainly ; in various 
constructions : 1 ) simply, Matt. xii. 47, 
etTTE Tis avTio. XX. 20, al. ; pi. Tii/£?, 
Mk. xiv. 4. Lu. xiii. 1. xxiv. 1, al. 2) 
joined with a subst., or adj. taken sub- 
stantively, it denotes a certain person or 
thing, some ; so after a subst. Mk. v. 25, 
yvvri Tis. Lu. viii. 27, et al. ; pi. Lu. viii. 

2, yvvouKh TLvs'S. Acts ix. 19, rjfiipa^ 
Tti/cts. X:vii. 20. 2 Pet. iii. 16, Svo-uoiito. 
Tiva. Also before the subst. or adj. Matt, 
xviii. 12, kav yturjTai tlvl avOpcoirco, et 
al. Joined with names^ either proper or 
gentile ; before^ Mk. xiv. 21, TrapdyovTo. 
TLva 'EijULcova, Acts ix. 43 ; after^ Lu. x. 
33, '2afxapeLTr)<5 Tts. 3) with gen. of 
class or of partition, i. e. of which rts 
expresses a part, Lu. xiv. 15, aKovaa^ rts 
Twv crvvavaKELfxiviMV. 2 Cor. xii. 17. fls 
Tt5, Mk. xiv. 47, et al. 4) with numerals, 
where it renders the number indefinite, 
ahout^ some^ Lu. vii. 19, Trpocr/ca/Vecra/xgi/os 
duo TLvccs Toou p.adr\TOi)V auTou, some 
two,' i. e. two or three. Acts xxiii. 23. 
5) distributively, tU — erspo?, one — an- 
other^ 1 Cor. iii. 4 ; pi. tiz/es — Tivk^^ Lu. 
ix. 7, 8. 6) sometimes tIs or tlv&<s is 
omitted where the sense requires it to be 
supplied, Lu. viii. 20, d7n]yyiXr] avTio 
XtyouTcav sc. tlvwu. Mk.ii. 1. — II. gener. 
an?/ one^ any body, some one or other ^ in 
various constructions and uses: 1) simply. 
Matt. viii. 28, Mk.xii. 19, kdv tlvo^ dobk- 
<^o§ dirodavri. Lu. xiv. 8. Rom. v. 7, al. 
Neut. Tt, Matt. v. 23, ix^'- '^^ Kanrd <tou. 
Mk. xi. 13. Acts iii. 5. 2) joined with a 
subst. or adject. Rom. viii. 39, ovte tl^ 

KTLCTL^ STEpa. NcUt. Ti, Lu. xi. 36, /J.i] 

'^Xpv TL pkocs (jKOTtLuov. Acts viii. 34 : 
so before adjectives of quality, character, 
&c. Lu. xxiv. 41, i-X^-Ti ti ^puxripLov ; 
John i. 47. Acts xvii. 21 ; after, Mk. xvi. 
18. 3) with gen. of class or of partition, 

1 Cor. vi. 1, ToXfjid Tt5 vfxu)v\ Acts v. 15. 

2 Th. iii. 8.' Neut^ Ti, Acts iv. 32. Rom. 
XV. 18, al. Also with diro, Lu. xvi. 30; 
€/c, Heb. iii. 13, tl<3 vpoov. 4) Ti§ 
stands for Engl, indef. ONE, some one. 
Matt. xii. 29, ttws dvvaTaL tl's Eia-EXdeTif ; 
Mk. viii. 4. John ii. 25. 1 Tim. i. 8. 5) 
in a similar sense, like Engl, one, any one, 
for every one, k'/cacrTo§, John vi. 50, outos 
kcTLV 6 apTos, tVa Ti§ k^ avTOv (pdyrj. 
Acts ii. 45. xi. 29, al. 6) kdv tis, if any 



one. Matt. xxi. 3. Col. iii. 13. kdv fxri Tis, 
unless one, John iii. 3, 5 : pi. dv tlve^, if 
any, i. q. whosoever, John xx, 23. — III. 
emphat. somebody, something, i. e. some 
person or thing of importance : 1) simply, 
Acts V. 36, X&ytov ELvai tlvu kavTOv. 
Neut. 1 Cor. iii. 7, ovte 6 (pvTEvwv kcrTi 
TL. viii. 2. X. 19. Gal. ii. 6. vi. 3. 2) 
with an adj. Acts viii. 9, 'Sljulcov Xiywv 
Elvat TLva kavTOV p.iyav. Heb. x. 27, 
<po(3£pd Tts kKdoxh KpLorscio^.-^lY. TtS 
with a subst. or adj. sometimes serves to 
limit or modify the full signification, like 
Engl, someivhat, equiv. to in some measure^ 
a kind of &c. Rom. i. 11, Ti fxsTadu) ^a- 
pLcrpLa vptlv. ver. 13. 1 Cor. vi. 11, Ja. i. 

18. — V. neut. Tt adverbially or as acc. of 
manner : 1 ) simply, in or as to something, 
in any way, Phil. iii. 15,. £t ti kTkpco^ 
(ppovElrs. Philem. 18 : hence it is equiv. 
to perhaps in the formula eI jixn tl, unless 
perhaps, Lu. ix. 13. John v. 19. 2) with 
another acc. neut. as adv., thus serving to 
modify it, so77ie, sometchat, a little ; (Spaxv 
TL, some little, a little, spoken of time, 
Acts V. 34 ; of place or rank, Heb. ii. 7 ; 
Acts xxiii. 20, tl dKpL^ia-TEpov. 2 Cor. 
X. 8. xi. 16 : so pkpo^ tl, in some part, 
partly, 1 Cor. xi. 18. 

Ti5, neut. Ti, gen. tlvo<s, interrog. pron. 
icho ? which ? luhat ? A) direct, usually 
with the indie, sometimes with the subj. 
and opt., which then serve to modify its 
power. I. with indic, gener. and in 
various constructions: 1) simply. Matt, 
iii. 7, Tts virioiL^Ev vpTv (puyElu; xxi. 
23. Lu. X. 29. John i. 22, 39. Acts vii. 
27. xix. 3, Eh TL GUV £/3a7rTto-0ijT€ ; Heb. 
iii. 17. Ti £o-Ti TouTo; ivhat is this? Mk. 
i. 27. 2) with a subst., or adj. taken sub- 
stantively. Matt. V. 46, TLva /uLLarddv ex^'T^ 5 
Mk. V. 9. John ii. 18. Rom. vi. 21. Heb. 
vii. 11, al. 3) foil, by gen. of class or of 
partition, i. e. of which tis expresses a 
part. Matt. xxii. 28, tlvo^ toov kiTTd 
ECTTaL ; Lu. X. 36. Acts vii. 52. Heb. i. 5 : 
also with £/c. Matt. vi. 27, Ti9 k^ v/ulwv ; 
al. ; with subst. Matt. vii. 9, v t/s kaTLV 
k^ vjuicov dvdp(x)7ro£ ; Lu. xi. 11. 4) after 
Ti'§ the verb €ifat is often omitted; Ti 
7rp6<5 rip-d^ ; Matt, xxvii. 4. ti kpol Kai 
aoL ; John ii. 4. Lu. iv. 36. Acts vii^ 49. 
Rom. viii. 31. 4) sing, tl as predicate 
sometimes refers to a plural neut. as sub- 
ject, John vi. 9, TauTu tl karTLV Eh 
TocrovTOV9 ; Acts xvii. 20. — II. neut. tl 
as adv. of interrogation, or as acc. of man- 
ner interrog. 1) wherefore? why? for 
what cause ? equiv. to oia Ti, Matt. viii. 
26, Ti oelXol k<TTE ; Mk. xi. 3. John vii. 

19. So Ti Kal, ivhy then? 1 Cor. xv. 29, 
30 : Ti o£, bid why ? expressing surprise, 
Matt. vii. 3 ; also and why ? also to what 
end? for what purpose.^ for th Ti, Matt. 



T I T 



441 



TO A 



xxvi. 65. Gal. iii, 19, tl ouu o vo/mo^ ; 
2) as to tvhat ? hozc ? in Avhat respect ? for 
KaTa Tl, Matt. xix. 20, t'i 'inri va-Tspco ; 

xvi. 26; also in xchat wa?/? how? Rom. 
viii. 24, Ti Kal eXttl'^sl ; 1 Cor. vii. 16, tl 
olda's: Acts xxvi. 8 : hence intensive, 
how! lioiv fireatly ! Lii. xii. 49, tL ^iXw 
ei vdii dv/jcfyd}] ; — III. eqiiiv. to iroTspo^, 
where two are spoken of, irho or which of 
the tv!o? Matt. xxi. 31, Tt? sk tCou ^vo. 

xxvii. 21. 1 Cor. iv. 21, al.— lY. t/s 
vn\\\ iudic, through the force of the con- 
text, sometimes approaches to the sense of 
TToIos, Lat. qualis^ i. e. of ichat hind or 
sort l so of persons. Matt. xvi. 13, TLva 
jUE \iyov(TLV oi avOpooTTOL elvai ; ver. 15. 
1 Cor. iii. 5 ; of things, Lu. iv. 36, Tts 6 
Xoyos ouTO?; xxi v. 17. John vii. 36. — 
V. SPEC, with ind\c. fut2i7'e, t/s expresses : 
] ) deliberation, Matt. xi. 16, tlvl bfioi- 
wcTio Ti]V yEvsavT.', Mk.vi.24. Lu.iii. 10. 
Acts iv. 16. 2) hence implying the idea, 
shall, may, can. Matt. v. 13, iv t'lvi oKi- 
cOtJo-grat ; Lu. i. 18. Acts viii. 33. Rom. 
viii. 33, 35. — VI. with suhjunct. implying 
deliberation with the idea of possibility, 
Matt. vi. 31, XiyovTE^, tl cpaywiXEv ; 
Lu. xii. 17, TL iroLnarco ; al. — VII. with 
optat. and av, implying doubt, uncertainty, 
Acts ii. 12, TL av ^iXoL tovto eIvul ; 

xvii. 18. — B) INDIRECT, where it is often 
equiv. to octtl^. I. with indie, after 
verbs of hearing, inquiring, showing, know- 
ing, &c; &c. ; in various constructions and 
uses : 1) gener. Matt. vi. 3. ix. 13, fxa- 
Qete tl ecttlv. X. 11. xii. 3, 7, al. : so 
with suhst. 1 Cor. xv. 2, tlvl Xoyw. I 
Pet. i. 11 : with Elvai implied, Rom. viii. 
27, oloE TL TO (ppovinma. Eph. iii. 18. 
Heb. V. 12. — II. with implying w^hat 
may or can be done. Matt. vi. 25, jui) 

fXEpipVUTE TL <paynTE. X. 19. XV. 32. 

Ln. xii. 5, 11, al. — III. with optat. after 
a preceding pret., and implying doubt : 1) 
gener. Lu. viii. 9. xv. 26, ETrwddvETo, tl 
EL)) TavTa; al. 2) with dv, as strength- 
ening the idea of uncertainty, Lu. i. 62, to, 
TL dv ^eXol KaXtLadaL avTov. vi. 11, al. 

Tlt\o9, ov, 6, Lat. titulus, a title, 
superscription, John xix. 19, 20. 

T L o), f. Lorto, to respect, honour, reverence, 
also to estimate ; hence in fut. and aor. 1. 
act. and mid. to honour, i. e. by making 
compensation, or atonement,=to ato?ie for, 
pay for, with acc. of wrong done, &c. ; in 
N. T, to atone icith, to pay, with acc. of 
thing offered or suffered in atonement, as 
d'LKY\v TLELv, ' to pay or suffer punishment, 
to be punished,' Lat. ' solvere pcenas,' 2 Th. 
i. 9, 6l diKi^v TiaovcrLv, oXEdpov ai(x)V. 
and so Plut. de Sera Num. 8, etlve B. 

OLKYIV. JE\. V. H. i. 24, ETL(TE ^LKtJV. 

T 0 L, enclitic particle, consequently, there- 
fore ; a signif. however found only in the 



strengthened forms Toiydp, TOLyapovv, 
&c. while TOL itself has merely the con- 
firmatory sense, indeed, forsooth, yet, &c. 
In N. T. only in compounds, /caiToty?, &c. 

ToLyapovv, i. e. tol strengthened by 
the particles yap and ovv, equiv. to hy 
cejiain consequence, consequently, therefore ; 
1 Th. iv. 8, TOLyapovv 6 dOETcov. Heb. 
xii. 1. 

Toi'yg, see Tot and VL 

ToLvvv, i. e. TOL strengthened by vvv, 
equiv. to indeed now, yet noiu, therefore : 
used where one proceeds with an inference, 
and usually put after one or more words 
in a clause, Lu. xx. 25, a7ro'<5oT£ tolvvv 
Ta Kaiaapo^ JLaiaapL. 1 Cor. ix. 26 : 
more rarely at the hesfinning of a clause, 
Heb. xiii. 13, tolvvv E^EpxijojXEQa. 

To.tocr^g, d^E, ov^E, (a strengthened 
form of Totos, demonstr. correlative to 
TToIos, olos,) of this hind or sort, such, 
Lat. talis, 2 Pet. i. 17, (poivT^^ ToidaSE. 

TotouTos, avTr], ovto & ovtov, (a 
strengthened form of toIo?, demonstr. cor- 
rel. to TToTos, oTo§,) of this kind or sort, 
such, Lat. talis, more frequent in Attic 
usage than toIo<s or Toto'cr^s. I. gener. 
1) without art. or corresponding relative, 
Matt, xviii. 5, kdv ci^riTaL TraLOLov tol- 
ovTov Ev. Mk. iv. 33. John iv. 23. Acts 
xvi, 24 : with a corresponding relative, 
oTo?, 1 Cor. XV. 48. ottoTos, Acts xxvi. 29. 
o)?, Philem. 9. 2) with the art. as mark- 
ing something definite or already men- 
tioned, Matt. xix. 14, Twv tolovtcou e<jtlv 
v (SacTLXEta Tcov ovp. Mk. ix. 37. Acts 
xix. 25. Rom. i. 32. 1 Cor. v. 11, and 
oft. in Class. — 11. by impl. such, equiv. to 
so great: 1) without art. or relative. 
Matt. ix. 8, Tov oovTa k^ovcriav TOiav- 
Tr]v Tols dvdp. Mk. vi. 2. John ix. 16; 
neut. pi. TotauTa, such things, so great 
things, good, Lu. ix. 9 ; evil, xiii. 2 : with 
1 a relat. corresponding, ocrTts, 1 Cor. v, 1. 
OS, Heb. viii. 1, 2) with the art. 6 toi- 
0UT05, such an one, such a person, imply- 
ing notoriety ; in a good sense, 2 Cor. xii. 
2, 3, 5 ; in a bad, equiv. to such a fellow. 
Acts xxii. 22. 1 Cor. v. 5. 2 Cor. ii. 6, 7. 

Tolx^^: (kindr. with t^T^os,) a 

ivall, i. e. of a house, paries. Acts xxiii. 3. 

To /CO 5, ov, 6, {tlktco., VfcTo/ca,) a 
bringing forth, hirth, thing horn, offspring, 
child ; in N. T. fig. gain from money put 
out, interest, usury. Matt. xxv. 27. 

T o\fxd(D, f. 77cra), {ToXfxa, fr, tXcloo, 
obsol.) to have courage, boldness, confdeiice 
to do any thing, to venture, dare, intrans. 
with infin. Matt. xxii. 46, ovoe EToXfxrio-i 
Ti? ETTEpcoTrjoraL uuTov. Mk. XV. 43. Acts 
V. 13. Rom. V. 7. Also to show- one''s self 
hold, to act with boldness, confidence, foil. 



TO A 



442 



TP A 



by sTTL TLva^ agamst any one, 2 Cor. x. 2 ; 
with Eu ^LVL^ in any thing, xi. 21. 

T oXjuL-q poT £ pov^ adv. (compar. of 
ToX/x?jf)a)§,) the more hoLdly. with greater 
confidence and freedom, Rom. xv. 15. 

ToXiajjTT;?, ou, 6, (ToX/xaco,) prop, a 
darer^ enterpriser, Thuc. i, 70. In N. T. 
in a bad sense, one too hold, audcicious. pre- 
sumptuous, 2 Pet. ii. 10. 

Toyuos, t/, 6v, adj. [te/xvu),) cutting, 
sharp, keen; in N. T. only compar. to/ulo)- 
T£po§, sharper, heerier, fig. Heb. iv. 12, 
and Class. 

To Jo I/, ov, TO, a hoiu for shooting 
arrows, Rev. vi, 2, and oft. in Class. 

To'iraX^LOv, ov, to, tJie topaz, Rev. xxi. 
20 ; a transparent gem of gold colour. 

To'ttos, ov, 6, place: I. as occupied by 
any person or thing, space, room : 1) prop. 
Matt, xxviii. 6, tou tottov birov iKELTo 6 
Kv OLD'S. Mark xvi. 6, al. Sept. and Class. 
So oioouaL TOTTou TLvl, to ffivc place to 
any one, to make room, Lu. xiv. 9. Eph. 
iv. 27. 2) fig. eqniv. to condition, part, 
character, 1 Cor. xiv. 16, o dva7rXt]pu)v 

TOV TOTTOV TOV ioLCOTOV. Philo, p. 600. 

Jos. Ant. xvi. 7, 2, 3) fig. place, equiv. 
to opportunitij, occasion. Acts xxv. 16, 
Tvplu ri TOTTOV aTTo\oyla<s XdfSoL. Rom. 
XV. 23. Heb. xii. 17. — II. of a particular 
jjlace or spot where any thing is done or 
occurs, Lu. X. 32, Aeuitjjs yEv6fXEvo<s 
KaTcc TOV TOTTOV. xi. 1. xix. 5. Johu iv. 
20. v, 13, al. Sept. and Class. Pleonast. 
Rom. ix. 26, Iv too tottco ov. — III. of a 
place iL'here one dwells or sojourns, &c. 
equiv. to dwelling-place, ahode, home, Lu. 
xvi. 28, £i5 TOV TOTTOV TovTov Ttj^ ^acrd- 
vov. John xi. 6. xiv. 2, ttopevo/jlul etol- 
fidcraL TOTTOV vfiiv. Acts i. 25. xii. 17. 
Rev. xii. 6 : so of a house or dwelling. Acts 
iv. 31 ; a temple, vii. 49 ; hence the Tem- 
ple, as the abode of God, is called 6 tottov 
dyio^. Matt. xxiv. 15. Acts vi, 13. Sept. 
oft. Of things, a place where any thing 
is kept ; sheath, scabbard of a sword, Matt, 
xxvi. 52. — IV. in a geographical sense, ct 
place or part of a country, of the earth, 
&c. 1) of a definite place in a city, dis- 
trict or country, Matt.xx\"ii. 33, £ts tottov 
\Ey6fxEvov To\yodd,{o k(yTi,\Ey6fJLEV0's, 
KpavLov ToVos.) Lu. xxiii. 33, al. Sept. & 
Class. 2) of a place as inhabited, a city, 
village, &c. Lu. iv. 37, eU TrdvTa tottov 
T?}? TTEpLX(Jopov. X. 1, al. : so iv ttuvtI 
TOTTCO, in every place every where among 
nien,"l Cor. i. 2, al. Sept. and Class. 3) 
of a ti'act of country, district, region ; eh 

EpViflOV TOTTOV, Mk. 1. 35. EV EprifJiOL? 

TOTTOL^, ver. 45, al. ; di dvvdpcov tottcov, 
Matt. xii. 43. kutu tottov^, in divers 
places, quarters, countries, xxiv, 7 : so in 
the sense of a land, country, John xi. 48, 



dpovcTLV rip.LV Kal tov tottov kul to 
Ebvo9. Heb. xi. 8, Acts vii. 7, XuTpEv- 
crovai fXE kv t<x> tottw t. ' in this land 
and so occasionally in Class. 4) fig. of a 
place or passage in a book, Lu. iv. 17, 

EVpE TOV TOTTOV OV r\V y&ypa/JLjUEVOV. 

Xen, Mem. ii. 1, 20. 

T o(TovTo<3, avTt], ovTO & ovTov (a 
strengthened form of toVo?, correl. to 
o(To§, TToo-os), so grcat, so much, &c. 1) 
prop, of magnitude, intens. so great. Matt, 
viii. 10, ov^E TocravTYjv ttlcttiv Evpov, 
John xii. 37. Rev. xviii. 17 ; plur. neut. 
ToaavTa, so great things, benefits, Gal. iii. 
4 : with 0(709 corresponding, Heb. i. 4. 
vii. 22. X. 25. Sept. and Class. So of a 
specific amount, so mv^h and. no more. 

Acts V. 8, EL TOCOVTOV TO XOOpLOV dlT- 

eoo(t6e : so in Xen. Mem. i. 3, 5. ii. 4, 4. 2) 
of time, so long, John xiv. 9, toctovtov 
Xpovov. Heb. iv. 7, and Class, 3) of 
7iumber, multitude, collect, or in pi. so 
many, so numerous, Matt. xv. 33, dpToi 
ToaovTOL laoTTE yppTacraL oyXov Toarov- 
Tov. Lu. XV. 29. John vi, 9, al. & Class. 

ToT£, demonstr. adv. of time, the?i, at 
that time, correl. to ot£, ttote. 1) of time 
PRESENT, in general propositions, marking 
succession ; after TTpwTov, Matt, v, 24, 
TTpijoTov dLaXXdyi}dL, Kai tote eXOwv^ 
xii. 29 ; with oTav, John ii. 10. 2 Cor. 
xii. 10 ; simply, Lu. xi.26, and Class. 2) 
o/ time PAST ; with a notation of time 
preceding. Matt. xiii. 26, oTf E3Xd(rTr]<TEv 
6 yopTO^, TOTE E(pdvf] Kal Ta '^I'^dvLa. 
xxi. 1 ; with cos, John vii. 10; /jLETa, with 
accus. xiii. 27 : also as opp. to vvv, Rom. 
vi. 21. Heb. xii. 26. Simply, where the 
notation of time lies in the context, when 
TOTE, then, at that time, is often equiv. to 
thereupon, after that. Matt. ii. 17. iii. 13, 
ToV£ TTapayLVETUL, ' after this,' al. Also 
in later usage utto tote, from then, from 
that time. Matt. iv. 17. xvi. 21. With 
the art. as adj. o tote koV^os, the then 
world,' 2 Pet. iii. 6, and Class. 3) of time 
FUTURE, e. gr. with oTav, preced. Matt, 
xxv. 31. Mk. xiii. 14, al. and Class. 

TovvavTLOv, crasis for to evuvtlov^ 
prop, the opposite, as Xen. Hist. vii. 5, 26, 
but sometimes in Class, and also in N. T. 
as adv. o?i the contrary, 2 Cor. ii. 7. Gal. 
ii, 7. 1 Pet. iii. 9. 

Tovvop.a, crasis for to ovofxa, kutol 
understood, by name. Matt, xxvii. 57, and 
Class. 

ToUTECTTi, for TOVT ECTL, tJuxt is, id 

est, equiv. to ' which signifies,' used in 
explanations ; Acts i, 19, al. 

Tpayos, ov, 6, a he-goat, Heb. ix. 12, 
sqq. X. 4. Sept. and Class. 

TpaTTEZ^a, i]§, 17, (prop. T£Tpa7r£^a, 
from TtTpa, and tteX^u, foot,) a table, e. gr. 



TP A 



443 



TPE 



I. GENER. for setting on food, taking 
meals. 1) prop. Matt. xv. 27. Mk. vii. 
28, al. Sept. and Class. So of the table 
for the shew-bread, Heb. ix. 2. Sept. 2) 
meton. for ' that which is set on/ food^ a 
meal^ Acts xvi. 34, iruptdiiKe TpctTreX^av. 
(So Hdot. vii. 139, TpdireX^uv kiriirXi^v 
dyadvou TrapadtuTe'i^ and elsewh. in 
Class.) Rom. xi. 9, yEV)jdti'r(o v Tp. 
avTcov £i§ Tray iSa. 1 Cor. X. 21, and 
Class. — II. SPEC, the table or countei- of a 
money-changer, at Avhich he sat in the 
market or other public place, e. gr. in the 
outer court of the temple, Matt. xxi. 12. 
Mk. xi. 15. John ii. 15. Lys. 114,37. 
Isa?us 105, 119. But as those counters 
were, no doubt, provided with tills^ for the 
deposit of money, so Tp. came to mean 
gener. a place where money is deposited 
and invested, like our bank^ which, derived 
from a/3a^, originally denoted only a 
counter. Lu. xix. 23, dLdSvuL to dpyv- 
fiwv kiTL Ti]v TO. Dem. 895, 5, 15. 1356, 
10. Meton. Acts vi. 2, Tpaire^aL^ oluko- 
Viiv^ i. e. ' to manage the collection and 
distribution of money collected for the 
poor.' Jos* Ant. xii. 2, 3, ^acnXiKr] Tpd- 
•TTfi^a, ' the royal treasure.' 

TjOaTTE^tTijs, ou, 6, (TpaTTE^a,) a 
money-changer^ broker., banker., one who 
exchanged money, and v^ho also received 
money on deposit at interest, in order to 
lend it. out to others at a higher rate. 
Matt. XXV. 27. Jos. and Class. 

T p a i} ju a, aros, to, (TtTpoxr/cw, kindr. 
"with TtTpao), obsol. Tpao),) a wound., Lu. 
X. 34. Sept. and Class. 

Tpau,uaTt^a), f. iVto, (Tpaujua,) to 
ivound., trans. Lu. xx. 12. Acts xix. 16. 

TpaxijXiJo), f. t(rw, (Tpax^Xos,) a 
word formed on the same model as paxt- 
^o), avy^vLt^ui^ yacTTp/^w, & KeipakiX^u) ; 
and meaning gener. to affect the neck in 
some way or other, such as the context 
must determine. Hence it signifies, 1) 
to strain at the neck., as wrestlers do one to 
another. 2) to throw back head fore- 
most, so that the neck is exposed^ as when 
a wrestler is thrown on his back by his 
antagonist, and his neck subjected to his 
view and grasp. 3) to lay bare the neck by 
bending back the head, as in the case of 
an animal about to be butchered. So Diog. 
Laert. vi. 61, "loe t6v Kpiov dpEifxdvLOv., 
ojs viro Tou TvyovTo^ Kopacriov Tpayr\- 
Xl^stul. This last sense alone suits the 
single passage of N.T. where the word occ. 
Heb. iv. 13, TrdvTU oe yvjxvd Kal TSTpa- 
"X^XLorjULtva Tols 6 cpd a\jxo'i<s auToD, sc. 
Tov Biov. Thus it may be rendered laid 
hare., i. e. open to the vieAv. Or we may, 
with Ga taker, Eisner, Wolf, and Periz., 
suppose an allusion to the case of a male- 
factor about to be executed, whose face 



was sometimes previously exposed., by his 
neck and head being forcibly bent back, 
as he was thrown backwards ; of whom it 
might be said, in the words of Pliny, 
Paneg. 34, 'desuper intueri supiiia ora, 
retortasque cervices.'' 

T pdxv^09, ou, 6, the neck. Matt, 
xviii. 6. Mk. ix. 42. Lu. xvii. 2. Rom. 
xvi. 4, Tov kavTUiv Tpd)(y]Kov v-rridt^Kav., 
i. e. under the axe, i. e. *■ have exposed 
their lives to peril for my safety.' Lu. xv. 
20, and Acts xx. 37, tTrtTrto-oi'Tfs kiri 
TOU Tp. avTov., 'embraced him.' 

Tpaxi's, v-, adj. (kindr. with 

pao-crw, pvarcru)^) rough, uneven, e. gr. 
odol, Lu. iii. 5. Acts xxvii. 29, Tpax£t«t 
ToVoi, ' rocky places,' where breakers are 
found. Sept. Jer. ii. 25, o^os Tp. Ceb. 
Tab. 15. Xen. An. iv. 6, 12. 

Tp£t§,*'oI, al, neut. Tpi'a, tcc, card, 
num. three. Matt. xii. 40, et al. 

TpkjULU), {Tpkiv,) occ. only in pres. and 
imperf. to tremble, e. gr. from fear, intrans. 
Matt. V. 33, (po^rid&laa Kal TpijULOvaa. 
Lu. viii. 47. Acts ix. 6. Sept. and Class. 
Hence, to tremble at any thing, =z to fear, 
to be afraid, with part. 2 Pet. ii. 10, ou 
TpkfjLova-L ^\acr<pr]fxovvTs.^, ' they do not 
fear speaking evil,' 1. e. ' to speak evil of.' 
So with inf. Soph. CEd. Col. 128, as 
Tpifxa/JLtv Xkysiv. Sept. Is. Ixvi. 2, 5. 

Tpk<pa), f. dpe\^co, prop, to make thick, 
firm or fast, as a fluid, ydXa Opixj/aL, ''to 
curdle milk,' Hom. Od. ix. 246. Gener. 
and in N. T., to make thick or fat, sc. by 
feeding, Hom. Od. xiii. 410; and — to 
feed or nourish, nurture, trans. 1) prop, 
and gener. with acc. Matt. vi. 26, 6 tlaTrip 
viuiwv 6 ovp. Tpk(p£L avTd. XXV. 37, al. 
Also from the prim, notion of fattening, 
to pamper, tccs Kapdia^, Ja. v. 5. See my 
note. Sept. and Class. 2) to nurture, 
educate, bring up, Lu. iv. 16, NaJapET, 
ou r]v Ttdpafximivo^, a signif. occ. also in 
Jos. and Class., from the primary notion 
of nursing, rearing, and bringing up. 

Tp£X^5 ^pk^ofxai, aor. 2. 'i^pafxov, 
to run, intrans. \) prop, and gener. absol. 
Matt, xxvii. 48, tuOfcoos Spafxcou tT's k^ 
avTu)V. Mk. V. 6. Lu. XV. 20. John xx. 
2 : foil, by tTrl with acc. of place, Lu. 
xxiv. 12; £49 final. Rev. ix. 9. Sept. and 
Class. So of those who run in a stadium 
or public race, 1 Cor. ix. 24, ol kv aTadiu) 
Tot^oi/Tss irdvTE? Tpi\ov<TLv, and oft. in 
Class. Fig. in comparisons drawn from the 
public races, and applied to Christians, as 
expressing strenuous effort in the Christian 
life, ouTto Tpiy^iTE, 'Lva KaTaXd(3i]T£, sc. 
TO ^pa(3sLOV, ix. 24, 26 ; sis kevov, ' in 
vain,' Gal. ii. 2. KaXui<5, v. 7 ; with acc. 
of kindred subst. Heb. xii. 1, TpixoopLtv 
Tov irpoKEifXivov nfxiv dyu)i/a, 'let us run 



TP T 



444 



TPO 



the race set before us,' and Class. Also 
of strenuous effort in general, Rom. ix. 16, 
ou Tov ^eXovTo^ ovBk tou Tpi-XovTO? : so 
Anthol. Gr. iv. p. 134, /xj/ Tpix^-, M 
Koiria. 2) metaph. of rumour, word, or 
doctrine, to run^ spread quickly^ 2 Thess. 
iii. 1, 'iva 6 X6yo<s tov KupLou Tpiyri • so 
Ps. cxlvii. 15, £605 Tayov^ dpafxiiTai 6 
Xoyos auTOv. 

T p I uKOVTa^ ol, at, Ta, (TptTs, Tpia,) 
thirty^ Matt. xiii. 8. Mk. iv. 8, et al. seep. 

Tpta/cocto t, at, a, (t^e??, Tpia^) 
three hundred^ Mk. xiv. 5. John xii. 5. 

T p L^o\o<s, 6, ??, adj. (rpts, ^tXos,) 
three-pointed^ three-pronged ; subst. o Tpt- 
f3oXo^^ a caltrop or croiv-foot, composed of 
three or more radiating spikes or prongs, 
and thrown upon the ground to annoy 
cavalry ; see Polyb. and Yeget. : in N. T. 
tribulus^ land-caltrop^ a low thorny shrub, 
so called from the resemblance of its 
thorns and fruit to the military caltrop. 
Matt. vii. 16. Heb. vi. 8. Sept. and Dios- 
cor. iv. 15. 

Tptj3o9, ou, 77, (T-pt/3ft), to rub,) a 
heaten path-way^ high-way^ e. g. £u6£tas 
TTOtstTfi Tas TpL(3ov^ auTou, Matt. iii. 3, 
al. Sept. and Class. 

TptfTta, a?, 77, (Tpi£Tr7S, fr. TpEis, 
T/ota, and eVos,) the space of three years^ 
Acts XX. 31. Artemid. iv. 2. 

Tpt Jo), f. icr uy^ to give out a stridulous, 
creaking sound ^ Lat. stridere, intrans. spoken 
chiefly of living creatures, especially of the 
shrieking of women. Also of inanimate 
things, as the chord of a lyre, when the 
stiing, as we say, is false ; also of iron when 
filed or sawed. In N. T. of the teeth, to 
grate^ grinds g?iash^ with acc. Mk. ix. 18, 
Tpt^et TOU? oSovTu's avTOu. So Theophyl. 
Sim. p. 91, ^a\£7ratV6tJi/ /cat TfTptyto? 
tol;9 oSovra^. Aristoph. Ran. 926, jut-i] 

TTptE TOUS O^OfTaS. 

T p ifi-nvo^, ou, 6, 77, adj. (rpts, lariv,) 
of three months^ ^schin. 63, 14. Soph. 
Trach. 164, for the more usual Tpi/xt]- 
viaLO<s. In N. T. only neut. Tpt/xj^yoi/, a 
three months' space ^ trimestre^ Heb. xi. 23. 
Sept. and lat. Gr. espec. Polyb. 

Tpt9, adv. (Tpfit?,) three kernes. Matt, 
xxvi. 34, 75, and oft. So £7rt Tok, up to 
thrice^ equiv. to thrice^ Acts x. 16. xi. 10. 
Sept. and Class. 

Tpio"7-£yo?, ou, o, ?7, adj. ("Tpt?, cr^i- 
777,) prop, three-roofed ; gener. three-sto- 
ried^ having three floors or stories, oIkol 
Tpic-T&yoL^ Jos. B. J. V. 5, 5. o"7-oat, 
Dion. Hal. Ant. iii. 68. In N. T. neut. 
TO TpLCTTEyou, the third floor^ third stori/^ 
Acts XX. 9. Comp. in 'YirEpwov. Ez, 42, 
6. Gen. vi. 16, Symm. So 77 n-picrTiyii 
Artemid. iv. 46. 



TptcxtXtot, at, a, adj. (rpt?, 

Xi'/V-tot,) three thousand^ Acts ii. 41. Sept. 
and Class. 

TptTos, 77, ai/, ordin. adj. (Tpfit?,) the 
thirds e. g. I. gener. Matt. xx. 3, -Trfpt 
Tj)f 'TpLT)]v copav. xxii. 26, 6 TptToy. 
xxvii. 64, al. Sept. and Class. So tt; 
TpL-ry rjjuiipa^ 'on the third day,' Matt, 
xvi. 21. Mk. IX. 31, al. tt? tjiul. tij TpLTr,^ 
John ii. 1. T77 Tpirrj^ sc. rifx. Lu. xiii. 32, 
and Class. — II. neut. to TptTOi/, 1) as 
subst. with /uLipo9 impl. the tldrd part^ folL 
by gen. of a whole, Rev. viii. 7, to n-piTov 
Tuov diuSpoov. ver. 8, sqq. ix. 15, 18. xii. 
4, non al. Sept. 2) as adv. the third time^ 
e. g. TO TptToi/, Mk. xiv. 41. John xxi. 
17, bis. Simpl. TptVoi/, Lu. xx. 12, al. 
TpiTov TouTo, ' this third time,' 2 Coi'. 
xii. 14. xiii. 1. ek TptTou, adv. the third 
time^ Matt. xxvi. 44. 

Tptx^s, see 0pi'^. 

Tptx'i'o?, ov^ adj. (3'ptJ,) made of 
hah\ <rdKKO^ Tptxti^os, Rev. vi. 12. Sept, 
Xen. An. iv. 8, 3, TpL^Lvov^ x^t*^^"?* 

Tpo'/xo?, ou, 6, {TpiixuD^) a trembling^ 
e. g. from fear, terror^ M]^. xvi. 8, £tx€ oi 
avTccs Tpop.o's /cat eKo-Tacn^. Sept. and 
Class. Coupled with (p6(3os^ e. g. <p. nai 
Tp6po<5^ fear and trembling^ intensively 
expressing either ' great timidity,' diffi- 
dence^ 1 Cor. ii. 3 ; or profound reverence, 
aive^ 2 Cor. vii. 15. Eph. vi. 5, al. 

Tpo7r7/, 7/9, 77, (TptTTO), to tum,) a turn- 
ing^ i. e. turning back^ the act of turning. 
In Class, chiefly applied to the flight of an 
enemy. In N. T. to the turning of the 
heavenly bodies in their courses, at the 
solstices or tropical points, when the sun 
alters his course, James i. 17, ou/c 'ivi 
TrapaWayi]^ 77 TpoTr^s ctTrocrKLacrixa. So 
Sept. Job xxxviii. 33, Tpoird's ovpavov. 
Deut. xxxiii. 14, vXlov Tpoiroou. Pol. 
ix. 15, 2. iv. 72, 3, of the summer and 
winter solstices, and oft. in Class. This 
astronomical sense, however, is only to be 
considered subordinate and suited to the 
purpose of allusion ; the leading one being 
the fig. sense of mutation^ cJiange^ muta- 
bility^ as in Plut. Alcib. 23, oJuTtp"? 
TptTrojULEVco TpoTras TOU x^M-^'-^^^^'^^^i 
and GaJb. TpoTrd? TocauTas TpaTro/xs- 
i/os. So Caesar, p. 723, E. TpoTra? &(TX^if 
auTto TO (3ou\Ev/uLa TrXftcrTa?. ^schin. 

p. 66, TtX&LOV^ TpETTOjUiSVO'S TpOTTCl^ TOV 

EvpLTTov. Plato Lorr. p. 102, C. Tpoiral 
Kfxl dWoLMcriL's. So Hesych. well ex- 
plains dWoLwcT&io's Kai (pavTacria^ dfxoLU}- 
/ua, the Etym. Mag. by /uL&TaPoXi]<s lxfo<s. 

Tpo'7ro5, ou, o, (TptTTw,) prop. a turn- 
ing ovtiLvn^ the direction given to any thing 
set in motion ; & by impl. the positio?i which 
it then occupies. Hence it denotes prop. 
situation person or thing; & then, situa- 



TP O 



445 



TYr 



tion of action. Hence gener. manner^ mode ; 
in N. T. I. GENER. and prop, in adverbial 
constructions : 1 ) acc. with /cara, e. g. /ca6' 
ov TpoVoy, ' in Avhat manner,' eqniv. to 
as, even as, Actsxv. 11. Kara irduTa Tpo- 
TTov, ' in every way,' Rom. iii. 2. kutcl 
u^diva TpoTTou, ' in no way,' 2 Th, ii. 3. 
Sept. and Class. 2) acc. as adv. ou n-p6- 
TTOi/, 'in what manner,' =r«i.", eve?i as, Matt. 
xxiii.37, ov Tpoirov iirLcrvvdyEL opuL^ to. 
voaaLa saurri^. Acts i. 11. So Jude 7, 
Tou o/uLOiov TovroL^ TpoTTov. Sept. 3) 
dat. iravTL Tpoiru), ' in every way,' Phil, 
i. 18. El/ TravTL T-poTTw, 2Th. iii. 16. — II. 
FIG. tu7m of mind & habits, life, disposition, 
manner s,mo^e oi thinking, feeling, acting, 
Heb. xiii. 5, dcpCKapyvpo^ 6 n-poTro?, and 
Class, as Demosth. p. 1204, 4, outws 
a-TrXtjo-TOs Kal aiarxpoKspSii<s 6 TpoTro^ 
avTov kc-Tiv. So Swift says, ' the turn 
iiud fashion of the age.' 

T po7ro(po piu), f. iicrco, {TpoTro^ 2, & 
(popeo),) to bear tvith the turn, i. e. dis- 
position or manner, of any one, with acc. 
Acts xiii. 18, text. rec. &Tpo7ro(p6priG-ev 
avTov'5, where see my note. Later edit. 
aTpo(po(l)6pr}(rev. 

Tpocpi], rj<3, 77, {Tptcf)a),) prop. nourisJi- 
ment,food. Matt. iii. 4, r\ Sk Tpo<pi] avTov 
7\v aKplSs^ K.T.X. vi. 25, & oft. Sept. and 
Class. In the sense of stipend, lit. ' sup- 
port or maintenance,' Matt. x. 10, d^io^ 
yap 6 kpyd'TY]'; ttj^ Tpocptj^ avToif ecttlv. 
Xen. (Ec. V. 13. Fig. nutriment for the 
mind, instruction, Heb. v. 12, 14, where 
see my note. 

Tpo<p6's, ov, 6, 77, {-rpecpa},) a nurse, 
1 Th. ii. 7. Sept. and Class. 

Tpo(j)0(f}opeu}, f. 770-0), (t^o^o?, <po- 
pi<jsi,) prop, to bear about as a nurse, to 
carry in the arms ; fig. to cherish, care for, 
trans. Acts xiii. 18, in later edit, see my 
note. 

Tpoxi-a, a?, 77, (t|0oxos,) prop, a 
tvlieel-track, rut; in N. T. fig. a way, 
path, Heb. xii. 13, n-poxLd<s opdd? ttolv- 
a-uTa Tots TToalv v/jlcou, ' ways of life and 
conduct.' 

TpoXo^, ov, 6, (Tptxw,) prop, and lit. 
a runner, i, e. 'any thing made round for 
rolling or running hence gener. a wheel 
of any kind, espec. a c/ia7'2o^ wh eel ; in 
N. T. fig. a course, as run by a wheel, Ja. 
iii. 6, Tov Tpoyov tTj's ytveaeco^, ' course 
of life,' see my note. Comp. Anacr. iv. 7, 
'^po)(o9 dpixuTo^ yap ola, /Sioros Tpixsi 
KvXLcrdei'S. 

T Pv(3Xlou, ov, to, a dish for eating, or 
a bold for drinking; the former in Matt, 
xxvi. 23, 6 kix(3d\lra^ fxiT e/ULOV kv too Tp. 
Mk. xiv. 20. Sept. and Class. 

Tpifyaco, f. 77 0-w, [Tpvyi], fruitage,vint- 
age, harvest,) prop, to gather in ripe fruits 



or grain, Sept. Hos. x. 12, 14. Oftener, 
and in N. T., of vintagers, to gather 
grapes, with acc. Lu. vi.44, ovdi i/c (iaTou 
TpvyaxTL (TTa<pv\iiu. Rev. xiv. 18, 19. 
Sept. Jos. and Class, as Dioscor. v. 29, 
Ti)u crTa<pv\i\v. Xen. Q5c. xix. 19. 

'T pvy <hv, ovo^, 77, (Tpu^o), to coo,) a 
turtle-dove, Lu. ii. 24. Sept. and Class. 

T pv fxaXLo., as, 77, {TpvjULrj, TpvM, to 
rub through,) a hole, as in Sept. and 
Class. ; in N. T. the eye of a needle, equiv, 
to TpvTrrijxa, Mk. x. 25. Lu. xviii. 25. 
Of the same form as dpfxaXid. 

T p vTrri jua, aTO<s, to, {TpvTrdw, to 
bore, Tpvira, Tpvco,) a hole, Aristoph... 
Eccl. 620 ; in N. T. the eye of a needle. 
Matt. xix. 24. 

Tpv(pd(xi, f. Tjcrco, [Tpvcpi],) to live in 
liLvury or pleasure, intrans. Ja. v. 5. Sept. 
and Class. 

Tpvcpf], ?7S, 77, {^pviTTOi, to break,) 
delicate living, luxury, i. e. as breaking^ 
down the body, and enfeebling both body 
and mind, Lu. vii. 25, 01 kv — Tpvcpy- 
virdpypvTE^. 2 Pet. ii. 13. Sept. & Class. 

T p to y ft), f. ^ofxai, aor. ETpayov, {Tpcou) 
& Tpvco,) to eat, prop, to craunch, as 
fruits, nuts, raw beans, &c. Hdot. ii. 37, & 
92; hence TpcoydXta and TpuoKTa, — 
fruits, such as nuts, almonds, and the like, 
set on as a dessert. In N. T, gener. equiv. 
to kadi CO, absol. Matt. xxiv. 38, Tpuoyov- 
TE<5 Kal TTLvovTE's, ' catiug and drinking,' 
i. e. feasting, revelling. Dem. 402, 21, 
TpwysLV Kal iriviLv vcrvxv- Foil, by acc. 
dpTov, John xiii. 18, b Tpwyoov, designa- 
ting ' a familiar friend,' the communion of 
domestic hospitality being always account- 
ed a pledge of friendship. See Eur. Hec, 
793. Fig. John vi. 58 ; with crdpKa, ver. 
54, 56, 57. 

Tuy^^ai/ft), (f. Tsv^ojULUL, aor. 2. etv- 
Xov, perf. TETvyi]Ka as well as TETEvya & 
TETvxct')) prop, to hit, strike, reach a mark 
or object, said espec. of a weapon ; fig. to fall 
in with, meet casually, of pers. : hence in 
N. T. I. TRANS, to attain unto, — to obtahi, 
gain, receive, foil, by gen. Lu. xx. 35, tov 
aiu)Vo? kKELvov tvx^^v. Acts xxiv. 3, 
iroXXrj's Eiprivri^ '^^JX- xxvi. 22. xxvii. 3. 
2 Tim. ii. 10, 'Lva crcoTt^oLa^ '^^X' Heb. 
xi, 35. viii. 6, t. XsLTovpyia^, and oft. 
in Class.. — II. intrans. to fcdl out, to 
happen, chance: \) el tvxol, impers. if it 
so happen, or it may be, equiv. to perchance, 
perhaps, 1 Cor. xiv. 10. xv. 37, here =: for 
example, and sometimes in Class. 2) part. 
Tu)/w2/, ovaa, ov : as adj. happe7iing, i. e. 
any where and at all times, equiv. to ordi- 
nary, casual, common, hence ov Tvx^iv, 
extraordinary, uncommon. Acts xix. 11, 
ovvduei9 ov -ras Tvxovo-a^ kirolELo 08O9. 
xxviii. 2, and Class. ; neut. tvxov, adv. it 



TYM 



446 



may equiv. to perchance^ perhaps:, 1 Cor. 
xvi. 6, Trpd^ ujULci^ tv^ov Trapa/jLEvu)^ also 
in Class. 3) before the partic. of another 
verb, 'TU7x«i^"> is used adverbially ; as in 
Engl. ' to happen to be, to cliance to be,' 
before a partic. , espec. \Yith iiov\ \vhicli in 
later writers, however, is not unfrequently 
omitted, particularly before a predicate, 
Lu. X. 30, d0£i/T£S {avTov) rjjULLdau?] 
Tvyxcit^ovTa^ ' leaving him as it were half- 
dead,' and so oft. in Class. 

Tu jULTraviX^u)^ f. iVw, from TvfXTravov^ 
a dram, tabret, timbrel, [jvTravov^ tvtt- 
Tw,) & also a drumming^ i. e. a beating-post^ 
(as we say, c/^/»jr)Z72^-post, ) on which, crimi- 
nals were bound to be beaten to death, 
2 Mace. vi. 19, 28, comp. ver. 30. Hence 
Tif/xTrayi'^o), to beat the drum ; in N. T. to 
heat or drum to death. Pass. Heb. xi. 35, 
uXXoL ok ErviJL'7ravLardi)a-av. Luc. Jup. 
Trag, 19, dvacrKoXoTTLX^Ofxivov^ 0£, /cat 
TvixTravLX^ofxivovs., and elsewhere in Class. 
See more in my note in loc. 

TuTTos, ou, o, (tuttto),) a tijpe^ lit. 
' any thing produced through the agency 
of strokes :' hence it denotes I. prop. 
* any thing struck off,' by a stamp, and ge- 
ner. a marh^ p7'intJmpj'ession, John xx. 25, 
bis, Tou TVTTov Tu)u ijXcol/, Atheu, xiii. p. 
585, C, Tovs TUTTOus Tcov irXtiycjov idou(Ta. 
• — II. from the adjunct., the delineation of 
any thing by stamp, i. ^. figure., form., e. g. 
1) prop, of an image, statue, Acts vii. 43, 

TUTTOUS OUS £7rOt77(TaT£ TTpOarKWELU 

aurov^. Hdian. v. 5, 11, tov tuttov tou 
9£ou. 2) fig. form., manner., e. g. of the 
contents of a letter. Acts xxiii. 25. 3 Mace, 
iii. 30, 6 T7/S £7rto"ToA.^s TUTTos : and so 
Artemid. ii. 45, 70. iii. 34, tutto? ypa/x- 
ixdroov : of a doctrine, Rom. vi. 17. Jambl. 
Vit. Pythag. chap. xvi. p. 58. chap, xxiii. 

p. 89, TOU TVTTOV T7J<S OLoacKaXLa^. 3) 

fig. of a person, a type., as bearing the 
form and figure of another, Rom. v. 14, 

OS fiCTTt TUTTOS TOU uiWoVTO'S. III. 

gener. prototype., pattern: 1) prop, of a 
pattern or model after which any thing is 
to be made. Acts vii. 44, TroLrjcraL avTijV 
Kara tov tuttov k.t.X. Heb. viii. 5. 2) 
fig. an exemplar., example., p>attern., to be 
imitated, followed, Phil. iii. 17, crv/JLULfxi]- 
Tat fxou yLUEords — kuOoo? e\ete tvitov 
rj/jid^. 1 Th. i. 7, al. Hence an example, 
for admAjnitio7i., warning., 1 Cor. x. 6, 11. 

TuTTTto, f. to beat., to strike., smite., 
prop, with repeated strokes, trans. I. 
PROP, and gener. 1) in enmity., with, a 
staff, club, the fist, &c. with acc. of pers. 
Matt. xxiv. 49, tvittelv tous cruz^oouA.ou5. 
Lu. vi. 29, xii. 45, et al. ssspe. Sept. and 
Class. 2) in grkf Lu. xxiii. 48, tutt- 
TOfT£s kavTuyu to. ctti/O??. xviii. 13, 

ETUTTTfiZ/ i^kaVTOv) EL'S TO (TTydo9. JoS. 

Ant. vii. 10, 5, TUTrrofXEvo^ to. cTipua. 



3) fig. from the Hebr. to smite, =: to 
punish., to inflict evil, to afflict with dis- 
ease or calamity, said only of God, Acts 

xxiii. 3, TVTTTEIV CTE /JLeXXeL 6 GfOS. 

Sept. 2 Sam. xxiv. 17. Ez. vii. 9. 2 Mace, 
iii. 39. — II. FIG. to strike against., = to 
offend., wound., e. g. the conscience of any 
one, T^v crvvELot^aLV., I Cor. viii. 12. Sept. 
1 Sam. i. 8. Pro v. xxvi. 22 ; but there 
rather of the mind., by perturbation, as 
also in Hdot. iii. 64, init. : in Horn. II. 
xix. 125, of grief. 

Tup/3a^ct), f. ctcco, (Tup/Srj, Latin 
turba.,) to make turbid., stir up., tou 
TTtiXdu., Aristoph. Vesp. 257. In N. T. 
fig. to disturb in mind, trouble, make 
anocious, pass, or mid. Lu. x. 41, /nepL/uL- 
i/as Kai Tup(3aX,r] TTEpi TroXXd. Ai'istoph. 
Pax 1006, sq. Athen. p. 336. 

Tu0X.o9, ij, 6u, adj. supposed to be de- 
rived from TV (pit), to smoke, q.d. ' cui oculi 
sunt suffitsi:'' anidea,however, rather suited 
to denote that dimness of sight, called 
gutta Serena, or suffusio, which is the fore- 
runner of a cataract, than blindiiess itself, 
or the state of one to whom ' the sun is 
dark.' The word is rather, I apprehend, 
for oTTvcpeXo^, from <TTV(pu), to stuff and 
stop up, or close (as our blind from the A.- 
S. Blinnan, to stop up). So Strabo speaks 
of a TvcpXd's TTOTa/uos, a river stopped up 
at its mouth by bogs, &c. And the Greeks 
said Tv(pXd9 toI^os, as we do ' a blind 
wall;' in N. T. 1) prop. bli?id. Matt. ix. 
27, 28. xi. 5. Sept. and Class. 2) in fig. 
sense, ignorant, stupid, dull of apprehen- 
sion. Matt. XV. 14, ooriyoi elotl Tut^Xoi 
TvcpXwu. xxiii. 16, 17, 19, 24, 26. Lu. iv. 
18, al. Sept. and Class, as Lucian Vitar. 
Auct. TvcpXd's yap &l t^s xj/vx^^ ^ou 
ocpdaXfxSu. 

TvcpXou), f. (jocru), (TvcpXd?,) to blind, 
make bliiid, trans. In N. T. only fig. \sith 
acc. John xii. 40, tous ocpQaXfxov^, 1 
John ii. 11. 2 Cor. iv. 4, to. vovfiaTa. 
So Sept. Is. xlii. 19. Plato Phaedo 48, 

T7]U Xp^Vxhi^ TV(pXu)6ELt]V. 

Tv<p6a},f. ooa-o), (tu^os, prop, smoke, 
vapour, & fig. conceit, pride, fr. Tvcpco,) to 
smoke, surround with smoke, Julian, Cae- 
sares, TvcpovfxsQa viro tov Kairuov. Fig. 
to make conceited or proud, to i7ifkite,~VhS\.o 
Leg. ad Cai. p. 1015, 6 ok Fa'tos kavTou 
i^ETvcpcocEu. In N. T. only pass, to be 
co7iceited, proud, arrogant, 1 Tim. iii. 6, 
'Lua fj-rf TV<pio6Eh sh Knifxa ifxiricrr]. vi. 
4. 2 Tim. iii. 4. Jos. and Class. 

Tu 0 o), f. ^v\l/(j}, lit. to make a smoke or 
fume, {KaTTuou TvcpELv, Hdot. iv. 196,) also 
to smoke, to siwroimd or fill idth S7noke, as 
Kairvto TV(pEiv t^uttoXlv, Aristoph. Yesp. 
457; sometimes to set on fire, so as to huim 
with a S7noiddering fla7iie, as if ready to go 
out* In this sense, however, the teim 



447 



Y A^2 



rarely occurs except in tlie pass, to he set 
on Jire^ so as to burn witli a smouldering 
flame. Aristot. Met. ii. IvaTa Tfj^s ytj^ — 
oTou TvcpsarditL Kai ^vjutaadat. tig. Charit. 
vi. 3, ijcrddi^aTO Tvcpofxtvou tov Trupo's £Ti. 
Pint. Syll. b', 6 (Tv/uL/uLax'^Ko^ ttoXe/xos, 
irdXai -ru<^d/U€i/09, airi n-ijv ttoXlv dva- 
\diu\!/a<i. Hence we may perceive the force 
of the word in Matt. xii. '20, Xli/ou Tvcjyo - 
fxtvov ov afSicTEL, lit. 'he will not quench 
a smouldering wick, or taper in which 
we have implied an affirmative of the con- 
trary assertion, q. d. ' He will strengthen 
wavering faith, and rekindle nearly extinct 
piety/ 

TvcpcovLKO^^ 77, 01/, adj. (ti/^wj/, 
typhon, whirlwind,) typhonic^ i. e. like a 
typhon or whirlwind, violent^ tempestuous^ 
e. gr. dvEfxcs^ Acts xxvii. 14. 

T i» X w I/, see Tuyx"'^^' I^- 



''Y a k:/ 1/0 1 I/O 9, 17, 01/, adj. (ua/ctj/0os,) 
hyacintliine^ having the colour of the hya- 
cinth. Rev. ix. 17. Sept. and Class. 

^YaKivdo?^ ov^b^ii^ a hyacinth^ prop, 
a flower of a deep purple or a reddish blue, 
but in N. T. a gem of like colour, Rev. 
xxi. 20. 

"^Y dXivo's^ r?, oVy adj. (O'aXos,) of glass ^ 
glassy^ transparent, Rev. iv. 6, hakaacra 
uaXiuri. xv. 2. 

"TaXos, o», 17, (O'w,) prop, 'anything 
transparent like water,' e. gr. any trans- 
parent stone or gem, as rock-salt^ Hdot. 
iii. 24 ; or crystal^ Sept. and Class. In 
N. T. glass. Rev. xxi. 18, 21, and Class. 

'Y^pigo), f. tVo), (ujSpis,) prop, and 
gener. to act with insolence, ivantonness or 
violence, intrans. or foil, by acc. with 
TLva : in N. T. with acc. expr. or impl. 
to act insolently to or towards any one, 
i. e. to treat with insolence or injustice, — 
to injure, abuse. Matt. xxii. 6, v(3pLa-av 
Kal diriKTeivav sc. auTous. Lu. xi. 45. 
xviii. 32. Acts xiv. 5. 1 Th. ii. 2. Sept. 
and Class. 

'^Y/3pi9, £609, rj, pride, arrogance, in 
Class, gener. (e. gr. Thuc. i. 38) considered 
as an affection or disposition of mind ; and 
so Sept. Is. ix. 9, £<^' u/3p£i /cat v\i/r]Xrj 
KapoLa XiyovTE^. Prov. xvi. 19. xxix. 23. 
Jos. Ant. vi. 4, 4. In N. T. as drawn forth 
in external acts, insolence, contumely, in- 
jurious treatment: 1) 2 Cor. xii. 10, kv 
v^pea-Lu, in contumelies. Sept. & Class. 2) 
meton. injury, damage, in person or pro- 
perty, i. e. as arising fr. the insolence or vio- 
lence of any one, and fig. from the violence 
of the sea, tempests, &c. Acts xxvii. 10, 
81. Pind. Pyth. i. 140, vavaifSTOvov v(3pLv 



locov. Jos. Ant. iii. 6, 4, t?/i/ aTro tcou 
6p.(3pu)u v(3piv, ' injury from ruin.' 

'T/3/0 1 cTT ?j 9, ov, 6, (ujSpi^co,) one inso- 
lent, contmnclious or injurious, Rom. i. 30^ 
v^pLarrd^, virtp^cpdvovi. 1 Tim. i. 13. 
Sept. Is. xvi. 6, and Class, e. gr. Palaeph. 

i. 8, V^piCTTal Kol UTTEpriCpafOL. 

'Yy tai'j/w, f. avu), (uytry?,) to he sound, 
healthy, icell, intrans. 1) prop. Lu. v. 31, 
ol uyia/i/oi/Tfis, those who are well.' vii. 
10. 3 John 2. Also to be safe and sound, 
Lu. XV, 27. Sept. Gen. xxix. 6. xliii. 27, 
28, and Class. 2) Jig. e. gr. of persons, 
vyLaiv&LV Ty ttlcttel or kv tt} 'klcttei, 
' to be sound in the faith,' i. e. ' pure in 
respect to Christian doctrine,' and dispo- 
sitions suitable thereto, as love, patience^ 
&c. Tit. i. 13. ii. 2. Pol. xxviii. 15, 12.^ Of 
doctrine, diSaa-KaXia vyiaLvovara, Xoycs 
vyiahuw, sound teaching, sound doctrine, 
i. e. ' pure, uncorrupted,' 1 Tim. i. 10. vi. 
3. 2 Tim. i. 13. iv.3. Tit. i. 9. ii. 1. So 
Philo de Abr. p. 32, 29, tou9 vyiaivovn-a^ 
Xoyov^. Plut. de And. Poet. 4, vyiai- 
vovaraL TTEpl ^evov do^ai /cat dX?j0£t9. 

'Yy tT^s, £09 0U9, 6, 77, adj. (acc. uyt^ 
for vyid,) sound, healthy, well, in good 
health : 1) prop, of the body or its parts, 
Matt. xii. 13. xv. 31, ^XiirovTa's kvXXov^ 
uyt£t9. John v. 6. Acts iv. 10 : so ttoleIv 
TLvd vyLT}, to make sound, to heal, equiv. 
to vyidX^ELu, John v. 11. vyiij, ver. 15. 
Apocr. Jos. and Class. 2) fig. Xoyov 
vyirj, sound doctrine, pure, uncorrupted, 
Tit. ii. 8 ; so Artem. uyta tov Xoyov. 
Anthol. Gr. iv. 85, \o'yo9 ovx vyL^- See 
more in my note. 

'Yy/oos, d, ov, adj. (uw, vSuyp,) prop, 
ivatery, wet, moist ; in N. T. said of a tree 
or plant, sappy, i. e. fresh, green, opp. to 
^t/pd9, Lu. xxiii. 31. Sept. and Class. 

'Y^pia, a9, 77, {v^oop,) a ivcder-pot, 
large vessel of stone in which water was 
kept standing, John ii. 6, 7 ; also a vessel 
for drawing and carrying water, a bucket, 
pail, in the East often of stone or earthen- 
ware, John iv. 28. Sept. and Class. 

'Y^poTTOT £«), f. ri(T(x}, (uopo7roTT]9, fr. 
v^uip, TTLva),) prop, to drink wcder, also, 
as we say, ' to be a water-drinker,' intrans. 
1 Tim. V. 23, and Class. 

'Y^/O £o7rt/cd9, r/, ov, adj. (u5pw\|^, 
dropsy, fr. u^oop,) dropsical, Lu. xiv. 2, 
and Class. 

"T^wp, vSaTo^, TO, (uo),) water, plur. 
Ttt vduTu, the wcders : I. prop. Matt, 
xxvii. 44, Xa(3(ov udwp dTTEvidraTO k.t.X. 
Mk. ix. 41. Lu. vii. 44. John ii. 7. As 
the instrument of baptism. Matt. iii. 11. 
Mk. i. 8. Lu. iii. 16. John i. 26. Acts i. 
5, al. Sept. and Class. In various con- 
nexions, e. gr. vdcop ^wi/, living, i. e. run- 
ning, water ; Trriyal vdaTcov, see in n7/y>/ 



YET 



448 



YME 



1. Of medicinal waters, John v. 3, sq. 
Of fioiving waters, as a river, Matt. iii. 16. 
Mk. i. 10. Sept. and Class. ; or a lake, 
e. gr. of Tiberias, Matt. viii. 32. xiv. 28, 
29. Lu. viii. 24, 25, al. Sept. and Class. 
Of a ivatery fluid found in the pericardium, 
John xix. 34. — II. fig. as an emblem of 
spiritual refreshment, denoting the enliven- 
ing^ refreshing, & comforting influences of 
the Holy Spirit, whether in His ordinary 
operations on the hearts of believers, John 
iv. 10, 14, (comp. yi. 35,) vdoiyp ^wi/, or 
including His miraculous gifts, John vii. 
38. Rev. xxi. 6. xxii. 17, also vii. 17. 

'T£t6§, ou, 6, (i^co,) rain^ Acts xiv. 17, 
rjfjilv u£Tou§ di^ov^^ rains^ i. e. seasons of 
rain, Heb. vi. 7. Ja. v. 18. Rev. xi. 6, 
and Class. Ja. v. 7, vetov Trpmifxov Kai 
oxl/iluLOV. Sept. 

Tto0£crta, a?, 77, (ulo?, & 6£t6s, tl- 
0r]/xi,) prop, and lit. ' the placing with one, 
i.e. taking, as a son,' adoption ; in N.T.fig. 
of adoption, used of the state of those 
whom God, through Christ, adopts as his 
sons, and thus makes heirs of the promised 
salvation ; e. gr. of the true Israel, the 
spiritual descendants of Abraham, Rom. 
ix. 4, comp. ver. 6, 7. Espec. of Chris- 
tians, elsewhere called viol tou Oeou, as 
Rom. viii. 14. Gal. iii. 26. Rom. viii. 15, 
TTUEvima VLodiO'La^. ver. 23. GaL iv. 5, al. 

YI09, ou, 6, a son: A) gener. I. 
prop, a son, 1) strictly spoken only of 
man, Matt. i. 21, Ti^sraL vlou. ver. 25. 
vii. 9. Mk. vi. 3. ix. 17, oft. ; of an adopt- 
ed son. Acts vii. 21. Heb. xi. 24. 2) by 
Heb. of the young of animals. Matt. xxi. 5. 
■ — II. by Heb. in a wider sense, so7i,— a de- 
scendarit: 1) sing. Matt. i. 1, 'I?icrou Xpio-- 
Toti, vLov Aauto, viov 'AjSpadiuL. ver. 20. 
ix. 27. xii. 23. xv. 22. Lu. xix. 9, oft. 
2) plur. Matt, xxvii. 9. Lu. i. 16, oi vioi 
'lcrpai']\. Acts vii. 16. Heb. vii. 5. Gal. 
iii. 7, uioi 'A/Spad/x, ' posterity.' 3) ulos 
uvOpcoTTOv, ~ man. See avdpa)7ro9 lY. 
— III. fig. and from the Heb. of ' one who 
is the object of parental love and care,' or 
who renders filial love and reverence to 
another, e. gr. a disciple, Heb. ii. 10. xii. 
5. 1 Pet. V. 13. So of the followers of the 
Pharisees, &c. Matt. xii. 27.— IV. by Heb. 
with gen. the son of any thing means one 
connected icith, piartahing of, or exposed to 
that thing, and is often put for an adj. ; 
e.g. foil, by gen. of place, condition, or con- 
nexion, as oi VIOL Tov vv/uLCpcovu^, *■ the 
hridemen,' Matt. ix. 15. viii. 12, ol viol 
TT]<s ^aaiXELa?, 'the subjects to whom its 
privileges belong, true citizens:' in xiii. 38, 
opp. to oi viol TOV Trovi]pov, 'the subjects, 
or followers of Satan,' &c. xiii. 38; and 
so VLE dia(36\ov, Acts xiii. 10. Foil, by 
genit. of quality, e. gr. viol ^povTr}<5, Mk. 
iii. 17. Lu. X. 6, u/os Eipr}v^<5, ' friendly.' 



1 Th. V. 5, viol v/nlpa^, i. e. endued with 
true knowledge. Acts iv. 36, vld<s irapa- 
KXrjcrEoo^, see in Hapa/cX^jo-t? 3. John 
xii. 36, OL viol TOV ^(jDTo^, Lu. xvi. 8. 1 
Th. v. 5, opp. to OL viol TOV ai(jovo9 tovtov, 
the sons of this world,' *• devoted to this 
world,' Lu. xvi. 8. xx. 34. oi viol t^s 
aTTgiGs/as, = oi aTreiQEL'S, Eph. ii. 2. v. 6. 
Col. iii. 6. Comp. Sept. vld^ avofxia^., 
Ps. Ixxxix. 22. Foil, by genit. of that in 
which one partakes, &;c. Lu. xx. 36, viol 
tT]9 ava(jTdcrEco9. Acts iii. 25, viol toou 

7rpO<p1]TWV Kal T77§ SiaduKTI?. 6 ulos TTJ9 

aTTwAgias, ' devoted to destruction,' John 
xvii. 12. 2 Thess. ii. 3. i;I6§ jEivur]^, ' de- 
serving of everlasting punishment,' Matt, 
xxiii. 15. Comp. Sept. ulos ^avciTov, 
1 Sam. XX. 31. B) spec, vld's tov Oeov, 
viol TOV Qeov, ' son of God,' 'sons of God.' 
Spoken I. of one who derives his human 
nature directly from God, and not by ordi- 
nary generation : e. gr. of Adam, impl. 
Lu. iii. 38. — II. of those whom God loves 
as a father. So gener. of the pious worship- 
pers of God, tlie righteous. I) gener. Mk. 
XV. 39, d\t]du)^ 6 audp. ovTO^ ulos t/f 
Qeov. Matt. V. 9. So of one who is like 
God, Matt. V. 45. Lu. xx. 36. vi. 35, viol 
tov 'Yxj/iaTov. Sept. & Apocr. 2) spec, 
of the Israelites, Rom. ix. 26. 2 Cor. vi. 18, 
and Sept. 3) of Christians, Rom. viii. 14, 
19. Gal. iii. 26. Heb. xii. 6, sq. Rev. xxi. 7. 
— III. of Jesus Christ, as 6 Yios tov G., 
' the Son of God,' so styled in respect to 
his miraculous conception ; also TIo? tov 
'Yxj/iaTov, ' Son of the Most High,' Lu. i. 

32, 35, comp. Mk. v. 7. Lu. viii. 28; and 
simply 6 TIos, ' the Son,' kut e^oxvv. 1 ) 
in the Jewish sense, as ' the Messiah, the 
Anointed,' 6 Xpio-Tos, the expected king 
of the Jewish nation, constituted of God, 
and his vicegerent in the world ; joined 
with 6 'KpLOTTO's in explanation. Matt. xvi. 
16.xxvi.63.Mk.xiv.61. Johni. 50. vi.69; 
so too Matt. ii. 15. iv. 3. viii. 29. xiv. 

33. xxvii. 40, 43, al. 2) in the Gospel 
sense, said of '■ the jMessiah, the Saviour,' 
so called as proceeding forth from God, and 
one icith God, God-man. See John x. 
33—36. Matt, xi.27. John i. 14, 18. Heb. 
i. 5, sq. iii. 6, and the various passages of 
my Greek Test., where a full explanation 
is given of the phrase TI69 tov Qeov, Tios 
dv^pcoTTov, and the other phrases formed 
by ulos with a genit. in the N. T. 

"TX)?, rj^, V, (from the Celtic id, a 
wood, which probably came from the San- 
scrit,) a icood, forest ; in N. T. ivood, i. e. 
fire-wood, fuel, Ja. iii. 5. Ecclus. xxviii. 
10. Jos. Ant. vi. 3, 1. Xen. H. i. 1, 25. 

'Y^eT?, pi. see in 2u. 

/jLETEpos, a. Of, poss. pron. {u^eIs,) 
your. 1) prop, 'that which belongs or 
pertains to you^ John vii. 6, o Kaipd^ 6 



YM N 



449 



Yn A 



vjUL. viii. 17. Lu. vi. 20. xvi. 12. Acts 
xxvii. 34. Rom. xi. 31. 2) 'that which 
proceeds from i/ou,'' of whirli ye .ire tlie 
source^ caiise^ occasion ; Jolin xv. 20, Kai 
Tov vai-repou {\6you) Ti]p}]crovaL. 1 Cor. 
XV, 31. 2 Cor. viii. 8, and Chiss. 

'Yfxvtu), f. Tjcro), (u'lUi/os,) to hi/mn^ i. e. 
1) prop, with acc. to sing hi/mns to any 
one, to praise him in song, e. gr. tol/ O&oi/, 
Acts xvi. 25. Heb. ii. 12 ; and so Sept. 
Jos. and Class. 2) intrans. to sing a hymn 
or hymns, to sing praise, absol. Matt. xxvi. 
30, Kai v{xvi'](TavT(.<s k^riXdov. Mk. xiv. 
26. Sept. oft., not Chiss. 

"Tyui^os, ou, o, (uo), u^w, to sing,) prop. 
a hymn, song of praise ; in Chiss. some- 
times of men, but usually of the gods or 
demigods. Its primary sense was ' some- 
tliing sung,' cl song or poem, as Hes. Op. 
i& D. 659. Hom. Od. viii. 429; in N. T. 
a song of praise to God, Eph. v. 19, 
\l/a\ixoT<s Kai vjuvoi^ Kai corals iruEVjUL. 
Col. iii. 16. Sept. Is. xlii. 10." 2 Chr. vii. 6. 

'Yirdyu), f. a^co, (utto, ayvo,) TRANS, 
prop, to lead or biing under, as horses un- 
der the yoke, or men under subjection ; 
also to lead or bring aicay any one under, 
\. from under anything, Horn. II. xi. 
163, "E/CTopa ^' €/c jSeXewu vTraye Zeus. 
In N. T. and later usage, intrans. or 
^\'ith EavTov impl. to go away, prop, under 
cover. 1) prop, to go aivay or depaH, 
idtlulraiv oneself Absol. of persons, Mk. 
xi. 31, oi kpyofXEvoi Kai ol virdyoUTs^. 
ver. 33. John xviii. 8. Fig. of persons 
withdraicing themselves from a teacher 
or party, John vi. 67. xii. 11. Imperat. 
virays^ go thy M'ay, depart,' as a form of 
dismissal ; q. d. ' Go thy w-av,' Matt. viii. 
13, 32. XX. 14. Mk. vii. 29. x. 52. Lu. x. 
3. So vTvayE siptjuiiv, Mk. v. 34; av 
Eipy'ivri, Ja. ii. 16. As expressing aversion, 
' Get thee hence, begone,' uTrayg, 2aTa- 
va, Matt. iv. 10 ; elsewh. viray?. OTTLarco 
IJiov.^ Matt. xvi. 23, et al. Fig. Rev. xiii. 
10, £t§ aixM-oXtocTLau. xvii. 8, 11, 
dTrioXsLav. Foil, by Trpo?, with acc. John 
vii. 33. xiii, 3, et al. ; with 7rpd<s tov Ha- 
Tipa, xiv. 28, In a like sense with ttou, 
tvhither^ John viii. 14, al, ; ottov, viii. 21, 
al. Fig. to depjart this life, to die. Matt, 
xxvi. 24. Mk. xiv, 21, b TIos toD dvQp. 
vTrdysL, and Class, Arr. Epict. iii, 16, 10, 
jxaKpdv aTTo tov rtXiov VTrdysTS. 2) 
gener. to go, go aivay to a place, &c, £i§ 
Tr/y ttoXlv or K(jofx.t]v, Matt, xxvi, 18. Mk, 
xi. 2, al. Foil, by /x£Td tlvo's. Matt, v, 
41, al, ; with ttolJ, 1 John ii. 11. o'ttov, 
Rev. xiv. 4 ; with inf. final, John xxi. 3, 
■^virdyu} dXievsLv. Absol. John iv.l6. ix. 7. 

YiraKOT}, ^s, 77, {viraKouu),) prop, a 
Tiearing attentively, a listening.^ Sept. 2 Sam. 
xxii. 36 ; in N. T. obedience, Rom. i. 5, 
£<s uiraKorjv irLcrTEOD^^ ' obedience which 



springs from faith.' v. 19, et al. oft. Foil, 
by gen. of object, 2 Cor. x. 5, Ttiu utt- 
aKoiju TOV Is^pLCTTov., i. e. to or toivards 
Christ. 1 Pet. i. 22, tT) vtt. ttj9 dX?/0£ia9. 

'TTra/couto, f. ovatjo^ {viro, aKovw,) 
to hear, prop, with the idea of ' turning 
under,' or down, the ear, in the position of 
listening, or attending to any thing said, 
in order to answer, — to listen ; in N. T. 
1) prop, of a door-keeper, who listens, in 
order to reply to the knock or call of 
any one from without, absol. Acts xii. 13, 
Kpov(TavTO<s avTov — irpoarrjXde Trai- 
S'laKr] vTraKovcraL. Xen. Con v. i. 11, and 
elsewh. in Class. 2) fig. to listen to any 
one, to obey, with dat. expr. or impl. ; with 
dat. of pers. Matt. viii. 27. Mk. iv. 41, 6 
duE/uLO^ Kai 77 ^d\. vTraKouovarLV avTco. 

1. 27, al. ; dat. impl, Heb, xi. 8. With 
dat, of thing, Acts vi. 7, v7n']Kovov Ty 
TTLaTEi, denoting the complete subjection 
of the mind and understanding, as to the 
credenda of religion, Rom. vi. 12, 16. x. 
16, 2 Th. i. 8, iii. 14. Sept, and Class. 

"Yirav^po^, ov, 6, adj. (uVo, dvr\p,) 
lit. ' one who is engaged to obedience and 
fidelitv to a husband,' married, Rom. vii. 

2. Sept. Ecclus, ix, 9. Plut. Pelopid. 9. 
Pol. x. 26, 3. Artem. i. 78. 

"^X IT avT du3, f. rjfro), (utto, dvTdto^ fr. 
a'fTi,) to come opposite to any one, 672- 
counter, meet^ with dat. of pers. Matt. viii. 
28, v7rt']VTr)(rav avTco 8vo daifiouiX^ojULEVOi, 
Lu. viii. 27. Jos. and Class. 

TT dvTri <T £609, 77, [vTTaVTdcO,) CL 

meeting or encounter^ Sept. and Jos, ; in 
N. T. only in the phrase £t9 virdvTi^arLv, 
for inf, viravTav, to meet; .lohn xii, 13, 
s^rjXdov £19 virdvT. avTto. Sept. & Jos. 

"Yirap^L?, £609, 77, (uTrapx^O prop. 
tJie being, existence of any thing or person ; 
in N. T. the being or belonging to any one^ 
possession, and meton. a possession, or pro- 
perty. Acts ii. 45, T-a9 virdp^EL^ kirLirpa- 
(TKov. Heb. X. 34, Sept, and lat. Class, as 
Dion. Hal, and Polyb. for to: virdpxovTa, 

'Y7rapx"^i ^- £"^1 {vTvo, dpxo),) to be- 
gin, pro}), gradually or imperceptibly, to 
begin doing or being, to begitz to be, to come 
into eocistence, arise ; hence gener. and in 
N. T. to EXIST, BE EXTANT, present, at 
hand. I. gener, & absol. Acts xix. 40, fxr]^- 

Eud? atTLOV VTrdp^OVTO^ ItEpi ov K.T.X. 

xxvii. 21. xxviii. 18. 1 Cor. xi. 18, With dat. 
of pers, to be present to any one, implying 
possession, property. Acts iii, 6, dpyvpiou 
Kai \pvcrLov oby^ vtt. fxoL. iv, 37, virdp- 
XovTo^ avToo dypov. 2Pet, i.8: hence 
partic. TO! virdp^ovTa, subst. things pre- 
sent, at hand to any one, equiv, to posses- 
sions, property, goods, substance, with dat. 
of pers. Lu. viii. 3. Acts iv. 32 ; with gen. of 
pers. Matt.xix.21,7rw'A.t)<roi/ <rovTd virdp- 



YEE 



450 



Y HE 



Xovra. xxiv. 47, al. — II. simply TO be,=i: 
as logical copula connecting the sub- 
ject and predicate, comp. eI/xl II. 1) with 
a szibst. as predicate, Lu. viii. 41, avT6<s 
dpxcov T77S cruvay(joyri<3 vTrrjpx^- xxiii. 
50. Acts ii. 30. iv. 34, al. 2) with an adj. 
as predic. Lu. ix. 48. xi. 13, si ovv v/ulsT<s 
'7rovi]coi vTrdpxovTE^. xvi. 14. Acts iii. 
2. iv. 34, al. 3) with a paHic. of another 
verb as predic. ; so with part. perf. pass, as 
adj. Acts xix. 36; as forming a periphr. 
for a finite tense of the same verb, ™. 
16, fxovov (SsfSaTrTLcr/iiEvoL v'wy]pypv. 4) 
with an adv. as predic. Acts xvii. 27, tov 
Qeov — ov fxaKpav — iiirdpxpvra. 5) with 
a prep, and its case as predicate; £i/, where 
virccpx^L implies a being, remaining., living 
in any state or place, Lu. vii. 25, oi kv 
Tpv(prj VTrdpxovTE^. xvi. 23. Acts v. 4. 
Phil.ii. 6,al.; Trposwith gen. Actsxxvii.34. 

'YTTEt/CW, f. ^OJ, (UTTO, Ei/CO),) lit. to 

shnnh under superior force, give icay., yield 
to any person ; in N. T. to submit to any 
one in authority, obey ; Heb. xiii. 17, 
L'TT. ToTs vyovaiuoL's., and so oft, in Class, 
as Xen. Cyr. viii. i. 33, u. toTs afXELvocn. 

TT Ev avT LO<s., a, 02/, adj. (utto, hau- 
Tto§,) ojiposed, contrary, adverse.^ prop, 
with the idea of craft and guile. Comp. 
Yirg. JEn. ii. 390, ' dolus., an virtus, quis 
in haste requirat.^' ^Vith dat. Col. ii. 14, 
o -iiv V7T EvavTLOv v/jlTu^ aud so in Class. 
Subst. ol v-TTEvauTLOL., ojjposers^ adver- 
saries, Heb. X. 27. Sept. and Class. 

'Ytteo, prep. gov. the gen. and acc. 
with the prim, signif. over, Lat. super., 
Germ. uber. A) with the gexit. prop, 
of place icliere ; in N. T. only fig. I. 
over, equiv. to for, i7i behalf of, for the 
sake of in the sense of protection, care. 
1) gener. John xvii. 19, virkp avTwv iyw 
dym^w EfxavTov. Acts xxi. 26. 2 Cor. xiii. 
8, al. Espec. after verbs, or other words, 
implying prayer for any one, with gen, of 
pers., OElcdaL vTrip nrLvo<s, Acts viii. 24 ; 
Evx^crdat, James v. 16 ; irpoG-Evx^crdaL, 
Matt. V. 44 : so OEt]cn<s virip tlvcs. Rom. 
x. 1. Eph. vi. 19 ; TrpoaEvxv^ Acts xii. 
5; gener. 1 Tim. ii. 1, 2; after verbs im- 
plying speaking, pleading, intercession for 
any one, Acts xxvi. 1, vTrkp crEavTou 
XiyELV. Rom. viii. 26, 27. Heb. ix, 24; 
after verbs and nouns implying zeal, care, 
effort for any pers. or thing, 1 Cor. xii, 
25. 2 Cor. vii. 7. Phil. iv. 10 : also elz/at 
virip TLvo<5, prop, to be over any one, i. e. 
for protection, to take his part, Mk, ix, 40. 
Rom. viii. 31. Often after verbs or other 
words which imply the suffering of evil 
or death for, in behalf of any one, with 
gen, of pers., dvdQEfxa Elvai virip tlvo<s, 
Rom. ix. 3 ; ciTroXicrdaL, John xviii. 14, al. 
— II. equiv. to for causal, in the sense be- 
cause of, on account of implying the ground, 



motive, or occasion of an action, John xi. 

4, VTTEp TT)9 00^7]? TOV B., ^foT the gloiy 

of God.' Actsv. 41. ix. 16. Rom. xv. 8. 

1 Cor. XV. 3, 29. 2 Cor. i. 6. xii. 10, 
19. Heb. V, 1 : so after oo^uX^elv, Rom. 
XV. 9; EvxapLcrTs'Cu, i. 8. 1 Cor. x. 30. 

Once, by virtue of Phil, ii, 13, 6 kvEpyiav 
Ev vfxTv — VTrkp Trj9 EhooKLa<s. — III. over., 
after verbs of speaking, &c,, equiv, to upon, 
about, concerning, Rom. ix, 27, 'Hcratas 
KpaX^Ei VTTEp TOV 'IcpaTjA-. 1 Cor. iv. 6. 

2 Cor. V. 12. vii. 4. viii. 23. xii. 8. Hence 
it comes to m.ean as to, in respect to, 2 
Cor. i. 7, V eXttl^ rjuaiv (Bs^aia vTvlp 
vfXMv. ] Cor. xii. 1, Phil. i. 7. 2 Th. ii. 
1. B) ^vith the accus., prop, of place 
whither, implying motion or direction over 
or above a place ; in N. T. only fig. over, 
cdjove. I. implying superioi^ity in rank or 
worth, Matt. x. 24, ovk e.<ttl fxadriTtj^} 
VTTEp TOV OLodcTKaXou. Eph. 1. 22. Phil, 
ii. 9. Philem. 16, — II. implying excess 
beyond a certain measure, and spoken com- 
paratively, equiv. to beyond, more than. 
1) gener. and simply. Matt. x. 37, 6 

(plXwV TTaTEpa 1) fXTjTEpa VTTEp EjULE. 

Acts xxvi. 13. 2 Cor, i. 8, vttep ovvafxiv. 

1 Cor. iv. 6, al. 2) after comparatives: e.gr. 
after an adj. in the compar. degree, Lu, xvi. 
8. Heb. iv. 12 ; with a verb, 2 Cor. xii. 13 ; 
without case, and standing as an adv., = 
iiwre, much, xi. 23, vTrkp kyw. Note. 
In Comp. VTrkp implies, 1. motion or rest 
over, above, beyond a place, as vTTEpaipuo, 
vTTEpfSaLvu), vTTEpix^ \ 2. protcction, aid, 
for, i?i behalf of as vTrspEVTvyxdvco ; 3. 
excess, or surpassing, over, above, more 
than, as Jtts p/SdWco, vttep ektelvco. 

'YTTEoaipw, fut. apu), prop, to lift lip 
over or above any thing; in X. T. only 
mid. vTrEpaLpofxaL, fig. to lift up one's self 
over or above any person, become arro- 
gant, insolent, absol. 2 Cor. xii. 7, 'iva fxr) 
vTTEpaLpw/uLaL, EGodrj K.T.X. So Lucian. 
Amor. 54, bcroL ti]v (pLXo(TO(pia<3 ocppvv 

VTTEp aVTOV'S T0V9 KpOTdcpOV^ VTTEpvp- 

KacTL. 2 Mace. V. 23 : foil, by ettl tlvu, 

2 Th. ii. 4, ' exalting himself over,' and 
' opposing himself to or against.' 

'YTTEpaKfXO?, ov, 6, 77, adj. [vTrkp, CLK- 

fx}),) beyondtJie foicer of life, 1 Cor. vii. 36. 

'Y TT Ep dvoi, adv. intens. over above, 
high above ; of place, with gen. Eph-. iv. 10, 
vTTEodvco TrdvTwv Tcov ovpavwv : absol. 
Heb. ix. 5. Sept. Fig. of rank, dignity, 
with gen. Eph. i. 21, vTTEpdvu) Trctcrijs 
dpxv^' Sept. Deut. xxvi. 19, xxviii. 1. 

'Ytt Eoav^dvco, f. ^vcruj, intens. prop. 
to overgroiv, increase immoderately ; in 
X. T. to increase eaceedingly, in a good 
sense, fi-g. and intrans, 2 Th. i. 3, vtteo- 

aV^dvEl 7? Tr'lOTL9 vixuov. 

'Y TT E p (Ba'ivw, f. (3v(TouaL, intrans. to 
\ go or ?x<ss over; fig. to overgo, overpass 



YHE 



451 



certain limits, as of law, justice, good 
faith, &c. transgress ; in N. T. fig. and 
absol. to CIO too far, i. e. beyond right, 
1 Th. iv. 6, TO fxi] virsp^aLutLu, sc. to 
SLKaLov, snpplied in Diog. Laert. viii. 18, 

UTT. TO iVoi/ Kai TO ^LKaiOV. 

'YTTEojSaWo'yTws, adv. (virEpfSaX- 
\(x)V,) ecvceedingly, above measure, 2 Cor, 
xi. 23. Sept. and Class. 

'Y TT € p ^ a X X o), f. )3aXw, prop, to throiv 
or cast over beyond a certain limit, = to 
pass over ; also to tJiroic any thing beyond 
or farther than another, 'to surpass in 
throwing a weapon, hence gener. to sur- 
pass, ecccel any one in any thing, Jos. Ant. 

ii. 2, 1, ttXouto) t£ yap virspifSaWe 
Tous k'TTLycopiov^s. Xen. H. G. vli. 3, 6. 
In N. T. only partic. pres. vTrsp^dWuiv, 
surpassing, eoxceeding, super-eminent, 2^Cor. 

iii. 10, 'ivzKzv T7}s u7r£p/3aXXou(rrjs^^o'^7]5. 
ix. 14, oia. Tr/i/ vir. xapiv tou Qeov, al. 

'Y7r£p(3o\i], 779, 77, {vTrep^aXXw,) 
prop, a tJiroicinq, casting, or shooting be- 
yond. Soph. (Ed. T. 1196, KaQ' virep^o- 
In N. T. fig. (from that 
sense of vTrsp^dWai by which it means 
to excel,) S2iper-eminence, excellence, 2 Cor. 

iv. 7, 77 vir. n-ri<5 dwdfiEto^, ' the exceeding 
great power committed to me.' xii. 7, v vtt. 
TU)V ctTroKaXvxIrEiiov. Pol. iii. 99, 4, vtt. 
7rpodv/iXLa<3. With a prep, in an adverbial 
sense : /caO' vTrepjSoXiiv, equiv. to exceed- 
ingly, super- eminently, Rom. vii. 13. 2 Cor. 
i. 8. iv. 17. Gal. i. 13. Also, par excel- 
lence, 1 Cor. xii. 31, Kal 'in Kad' virsp- 
(SoXriv 6^01/, 'afar better way.' (Lucian 
Luct. 12. Pol. iii. 92, 10. Diod. Sic. xvii. 
47.) £t§ vTTsp^oXi^v, exceedingly: so 
^lian V. H. iv. 20. xii. 1, vTrspfSo- 
Xi)v TLUiav : hence intens. by Hebr. /ca6' 
vTrip^oXriv sk vnfrsp^oX^v, lit. exceeding 
exceedingly, ' in the highest possible de- 
gree,' 2 Cor. iv. 17. 

'Y7r£p£ tool/, (£i5w,) aor. 2. to uVsp- 
opdo), to see or look out over any thing, as 
Tr}v ^dXacrcrav, Hdot. vii. 36. In N. T. 
fig. to overlook, disregai^d, = 'to bear 
with, not to punish,' with acc. Acts xvii. 
30, xpovovs 'Tr}<5 dyvoia^ vTrspLSthv 6 
0£os. Sept. Lev. xx. 4, iau vTrspiSoja-Lv 
oi avT, Tols ocpd. lit. overlook, fail to 
punish, Jos. Ant. ii. 6, 8, and ix, 9, 2. 

'Y7r£p£/C£iya, adv. (u7r£p, eKeTvo^,) 
prop. ' beyond those ;' hence beyond, over 
beyond, with art. to. virepiKELva vfxuyv, 
' the parts beyond you,' 2 Cor. x, 16. 

'Y'7r£p£/C7r£pto-o-OL;, adv. (u7r£p ek 
TTEpLoraov,) lit. over-superabundantly, 
above all measure, Eph. iii. 20, uVip tt. 
'TTOLrjaai vTrepEKTrEptcrcrou ojv uiTovixida. 
1 Th. iii. 10. V. 13. Sept. Dan. iii. 23. 

'YTTEpEKTELVO), f. EVU), tO Strctch OUt 

overmuch^ beyond measure, fig. with acc. 



of pers. 2 Cor, x. 14, ovx vTrEpEKTEivO' 
fjiEv kavi-ov^\ ' we strctch not ourselves 
out too far,' i. e. do not go beyond our 
measure, ver. 13. So Luc. Eunuch. 2, 
KEKpayoTE^ Kal virEpEKTELVofXEvoi, Schol. 

U7r£p(/)lXoi/£iK:oCj/T£9. 

Y7r£p£/c)(ui/o/ua/, pass. (£K:)(£a), ek- 
yyvuj,) to be poured out over the brim, as 
of a vessel, to run over, overfloiv, absol. 

Lu, Vi. 38, fXETpOV VITEpEK^VVOfXiVOV, ScC 

my note. Sept. Joel ii. 24. Artem. ii. 27. 

^"Y'TTEpEVTvyy^dvoi}, f. TEv^ofxai, to 
intercede for any one, in his behalf; foil, 
by vTTEp Tivo^, Rom. viii. 26. 

'YTr£p£Xw, f. ^co, trans, to hold any 
thing over, e. g. the fire, Hom. II. ii. 246 ; 
also over any person, for protection to 
him, T^v XElpd tlvi or th/os, Hom. II. 
iv. 249. Jos. Ant. vi. 2, 2. Pol. xv. 31, 11. 
Intrans. prop, to hold oneself over, = to be 
over, be prominent, jut out over or beyond. 
Sept, and Class. In N. T. fig. to hold one- 
self above, = to be superior, to surpass, 
excel, intrans. 1) gener. prop, with gen. 
of pers. also with dat. of manner, Phil. ii. 
3, aXXtjXous riyovfxEVOL v'TTEpixouTa? 
EavTu)]j,Sc Class. : foil, by acc. Phil. iv. 7, 
77 £tp7i'y7] TOu B. 77 viTEpEXovara TrdvTa 
vovv, ' surpasses all comprehension,' and 
so in Class. Part, to vitEpiypv, as subst. 
excellence, super-eminence, equiv, to u7r£p- 
0^7?, Phil. iii. 8, ^id to utt. tt;? yvm- 
cEcos Xp.'I. 2) in rank, part. viTEpiyuov, 
superior, higher, Rom. xiii. 1, E^ova-Lai^ 
vrfTEpEXovoraL^. 1 Pet. ii. 13, and Class. 

'YiTEpi^ipavLa, a<s, 77, {vir Epri (pave?,) 
in Class, arrogance, pride, ' a contempt of 
all others but oneself,' as Theophr. defines 
it, Eth. Ch. 24; in N. T., from the Heb., 
arrogance, ' contempt of God,' with the 
accessory idea of impiety, Mk. vii. 22, and 
Sept. 

'YTTEptf ^ayo9, ou, 6, 77, adj. {virkp, 
(paivco,) prop, appearing over, conspicuous 
above other persons or things, and fig. con- 
spicuous, distinguished, as oIklu^ tcov ttoX- 
Xvov v'TrEpi](pavu}TEpa<2, Dem. 175, 10 ; 
usually of persons, implying censure, arro- 
gant, haughty, proud. Mi. V. H. xii. 63. 
Diod. Sic. iv. 13. Xen. Mem. i. 2, 25. 
In N. T. from the Heb. arrogant, proud, 
with the accessory idea of contemning 
God, impiety, wickedness, Luke i. 51, 
dLEGKOpTTLCTEV v7rEpr](pdvov<5 ^LavoLa Kap- 
oia^ avTcov. Rom. i. 30. Ja. iv. 6. 

'Y TT EpXiav, adv. prop, over-much, also 
very exceedingly, super-eminently ; with 
art. 6 v-TTEpXlav, adj. the most eminent.^ 
chief est, tcjv viTEpXiau dirocrToXwv, 2 Cor. 
XI. 5. xii. 11. 

'Y TTEpv LKaw, f. r\(T(x}, lit. to more than 
conquer, absol. Rom, viii, 37, virEpvLKvo- 
fXEv. Leo Tact, xiv, 25, vlko. Kai fxi] 



Y HE 



452 



Y no 



vTTEpvLKd. Socr. Hist. Eccl. iii. 21, vlkui/ 
KaXoj/, vTTtpVLKav ok iTricpdovou. 

'YTTg'poy/cos, ou, 6, //, adj. prop. & lit. 
over-sivollen^ much sivolle?i ; in N. T. fig. 
over-swelling^ boastful^ with the idea of in- 
solent pride, impiety ; of words, 2 Pet. ii, 
18, viripoyKa yap /xaratoTjjTO? (pdty- 
yofJLEvoL. Jude 16, to a-ro/xa avrcov 
\a\il ViripoyKa. Sept. Ex. xviii. 22, 26. 
Dan. xi. 36. Comp. viripoyKOV (ppovjj- 
fxa, Plut. Lucull. 21. UTT. Xtgis, vi. 21. 

'YTTepoxv-, V's-, {v'TTipix^,) prop, a 
prominence^ eminence^ as the summit of a 
liill, or a mountain ; in N. T. fig. promi- 
nence., eminence : 1) of station, authority, 
power, 1 Tim. ii. 2, (SacnXiwv kul irdv- 
Tcou Twv kv v7repoy(ri outoou^ and Class. 
2) gener. of things, equiv. to sziperioriti/^ 
ejccellence, 1 Cor. ii. 1, Kad' vTrtpo^hv 
A.070U, and Class. 

'YTTEpTrgpio-crEu CO, f. Eucro), to super- 
abound over., he much more., in a com par. 
sense, absol. Rom. v. 20, ov 6k ETrXsoua- 
(TEv 77 d/nap'TLa., vTTEptirep'KTcrEvcrev v 
)(api§, comp. ver. 15. Without compar, 
pass, to be made to superabound over-much., 

I. e. to supercdiound greatly, in any thing, 
2 Cor. vii. 4, vtteptt. ry X"P?- 

'T7rf^)7r£pio-<Taj9, adv. over-super- 
ahundantly, very exceedingly., Mk. vii. 37, 
VTrspir. E^E7r\v(TcrovTo. 

'Ttte pitXeov d'^w., f. dcru), to super- 
abound, ' be exceedingly abundant,' in- 
trans. 1 Tim. i. 14. 

*Y TT E pv\l/ 6 CO, f. (x)<T(jo, intens. prop, to 
make high above, raise high aloft ; in N. T. 
only fig. to highly exalt, sc. over all, with 
acc. Phil. ii. 9, 6 Osos avTov virEpuxl/wa-E. 
Sept. pass. Ps. xcvii. 9. 

IT Ep pOV EW, f. {v'TTEpCppCOV, 

over-thinking, high-thinking, fr. cppt]v,) 
to think overmuch of oneself, be high-minded, 
proud, arrogant, intrans. Rom. xii. 3, fxh 
vTTEpcp. Trap' o CEL (ppovElv. Jos. Ant. i. 

II, 1, ol ^ocopjTai ttXovtco — vTTEpcfypo- 
vovvTE^. Pol. vi. 18, 7. 

'YTTEpojos, a, ov, adj. [virkp & wo9, 
as Trarpojos from 7raTi)p,) prop, over, 
upper, e. g. of a chamber, Plut. Pelop. 
35, ^dXapio? UTT. Philo de Vit. Mos. ii. 
OLKYifxaTa ETTiTTEoa KUL viTEpi^a, 1. c. in 
the ark. Oftener and in N. T. neut. to 
viTEpcoov, an upper chamber^ usually at 
the top of a house, i. e. a sort of guest- 
chamber not in common use, where the 
Hebrews sometimes received company and 
held feasts, and at others retired for prayer 
and meditation; in N. T. Acts i. 13, £ts 
TO UTT. ov i]<rav KaTa/jLEvovTE^. ix. 37, 39. 

XX. 8. Jos. Vit. § 30, ETTL TO VTTEpwOU 

dvafid^ : so Hom. 11. ii. 514, vTrEpoo'iov 
eicrava(3d(Ta, and oft. in Odyss. 

'Ytte'xw, f. v(pE^u), (^X^?) pi"op. to 



hold under any thing, as the hand, Hom. 
II. vii. 188 ; fig. to hold out under, i, e. 
tozvards or before any one, as Xoyoi;, 
Evdvva's, ' to render account,' Pol. xviii. 
35, 3. Plut. J. Caes. 33, olkiju tlvI^ ' to 
render satisfaction, to make atonement.' 
Soph. (Ed. T. 552. Hence in N. T. 
gener. clkyiv v7rE-)(^iLv, ' to pay or suflPer 
punishment ;' Jude 7, TroXsL^ — Tri/pos 
(duiVLov OLK^v viriypvcraL, Xen. Mem. 

ii. 1, 8, TOVTOV OLKf]!/ VTTEyELV. 

*Y TT f} Kocs, OV. o, 77, adj. (uTra/couoo,) 
prop, listeniiig, or hearkening, and fig. 
obedient, with dat. Acts vii. 39, <Z ovk 
rjdi\y]crav vttyikool yEVEaOai. 2 Cor. ii. 
9, irdvTa : absol. Phil. ii. 8. oft. occ. 
in Class. 

'Yttiip ET E(x),f. rjcrco, {vTrripET}]^,) prop. 
' to do the service of an yVrjpfcTTjs.' 
Hence gener. to act for any one, to ininis^ 
ter, serve, to subserve, be subservient, with 
dat. Acts xiii. 36, Aav'l6 /jlev yap idla 
yEVEu vTrripETi'iara^, where see mv note : 
XX. 34, Tats xpELai^ fxov — v7rr]ptTr}aau 
al x^'^pgs avTai. xxiv. 23. Jos. & Class. 

'YtTT^P £T?]S, ov, 6, {vTTO, EptTTJ^, fv. 

ipEcraot),) prop. a7i under-roicer, gener. a 
common sailor, as distinguished from ol 
vavTai, seamen, and ol Eiri^dTai, mari- 
ners : also a minister, attendant, who ' does 
service under the direction of any one ;' 
in N. T. said 1) of those who wait on 
magistrates, and execute their decrees, a 
lictor., an officer, like the modern constable.^ 
beadle, who carried into execution the 
sentence of the judge. Matt. v. 25, equiv. to 
TTpaKTUip in Lu. xii. 58. So of the atten- 
dants or beadles of the Sanhedrim, Matt, 
xxvi. 58. John vii. 32, et al. and Class. 
2) of the attendant in a synagogue, who 
had charge of the sacred books, handed 
the volume to the reader, and returned 
it to its place, Lu. iv. 20. 3) gener. a 
minister, attendant, associate in any work, 
John xviii. 36. Acts xiii. 5, Eiyov hk Kal 
'l(i}dvvi]v v'TnipETi]v. So of a mviister of 
the word of God or of Christ, Lu. i. 2. 
Acts xxvi. 16, where see my note : 1 Cor. 
iv. 1. Wisd. vi. 4. Jos. Ant. iii. 1, 4, t6u 
v-TnipETiiv Oeov, 

'Y Try OS, ov, 6, prop, sleep, Matt. i. 24, 
& oft. Sept. and Class. Fig. of spiritual 
sleep, torpor, sloth, Rom. xiii. 11. 

'Ytto, prep, governing the genit. and 
accus. ; in the Gr. Class, also the dat. ; 
with the prim, signif. under. I. with the 
GENIT., prop, of place whence, i. e. from 
under which any thing comes forth, Horn. 
Od. ix. 141, ptEi Kpy]vr\ virb crTTSLOv^. 
Also of loosing or freeing from under any 
thing, II. viii. 543, 'Linrov^ fxku Xvcrav v'tto 
X^vyov. Also of place where, under which, 
like vTFo with dat. Plato, Leg. v. p. 728, 
A, o t' ETTL yij<s Kal viro yrj<5 xpvao'i. 



Yno 



453 



Yno 



Fig. after pass, and neut. verbs, to mark 
the subject or agent from under whose 
hand, power, agency, tlie action of tlie 
verb proceeds, in Engl, /row, hy^ throuf/h : 
in this sense only is utto with gen. found 
in N. T. 1) with pass, verbs, foil, by gen. 
of pers. Matt. i. '2'2^ to p)}dku viro tou 
Kvp. ii. lb\ iii. 6. iv. 1. v. 13. Mk. ii. 3. 
Lu. V. 15. viii. 14, utto fxtpiixviJov (TofxirvL- 
yovrai. xiv. 8. John x. 14. Acts iv. 36. 
xxiii.*27, sa?piss.; with gen. collect. Lu.xxi. 
20. Acts XV. 3. *2 Cor. viii. 19; with gen. 
of thing, jNIatt. viii. 24, Iootte to TrXoioi/ 
KaXvTTTsordaL v-TTO T(x'<u KVfxaTitJv. xiv.24. 
Lu. vii. 24. Acts ii. 24. xxvii. 41. Rom. 
xii. 21. 2 Pet. i. 17. 2) with neuter verbs 
having a passive force, e. gr. after yivofxaL 
and eli/ai, signifying to be made or done; 
yivofxai^ Lu. ix, 7, to. yLVo/ueva utt' au- 
Tou. xiii. 17. xxiii. 8. Acts xii. 5; eluat, 
xxiii. 30 ; impl. 2 Cor. ii. 6. In like man- 
ner after some tra?is. verbs, where a pass, 
sense is implied, e. gr. XajufSdueLV tl vtto 
Tfi/os, to receive^ i. e. to have given of or 
from any one, = to suffer, 2 Cor. xi. 24. 
viro/uLivELV TL VTTO TLvo^, Hob. xii. 3. 
aTTOKTsTvai vtto twv ^}-ipL(jov, ~ ' to cause 
to be killed by beasts,' Rev. vi. 8. — II. with 
the ACCUSATIVE, prop, place whither, 
i. e. of motion or direction under a place ; 
but also place where, i. e. of rest under 
a place : 1) prop, of place whither, 
after verbs of motion or direction, under 
beneath'; TiQivai \v\vov utto tou fiodiov., 
Matt. V. 15. viii. 8. xxiii. 37, al. Fig. of 
"what is brought under the power of any 
one ; utto tous Tro'^as Tii/os, Rom. xvi. 
20. vii. 14. Gal. iii. 22, 23. Ja. v. 12. 
1 Pet. V. 6. 2) of place where, after 
verbs implying a being or remaining under 
a place ; with tlyai, John i. 49, ovTa viro 
T^v (TvK'rju. 1 Cor. x. 1. Fig. of what is 
under the power of any person or thing, 
gener. Matt. viii. 9. Gal. iii. 25. iv. 2; 
foil, by acc. of thing, implying state or 
condition under any thing, 1 Tim. vi. 1, 
UTTO ^\}ybv dovXoL : so uVo vofxoi/, Rom. 
vi. 14, 15. iii. 9. Gal. iii. 10. iv. 3. 3) of 
time WHEN, under., i. e. a^, during., Lat. 
sub., once, Acts v. 21, yVd t6v opQpov. — 
Note. In composition utto implies 1) 
place., either motion or rest under., beneath., 
as uTTo/SdA.A.w, oTTo^EO), vTroTro^Lov ; 2) 
swSjection, dependence, as virauSpo^., vtto- 
TOLdcrw ; 3) sz^cession, the being behind., 
ofter., as vrrroX&LTra}., virofxivui ; 4) some- 
thing done or happening w?2(^e7'-hand, by 
stealth, or unperceived, without noise or 
notice, also a little., by degrees, as virovoiio^ 

VTrOTTTiu). 

^Ytto^clXXu)., f. jSaXw, to castor throw 
under., e. gr. under foot, under a person ; 
to put under., as a child to another mother, 
to substitute ; in N. T. used of persons, to 



thrust under., to sidmm., put forward by 
collusion, trans. Acts vi. 11, see my note. 

'Yiroy papLpLo^., ou, 6, {v'7roypd<pco,) 
prop, a ivritijig-copy ; in N. T. fig. a copy., 
pattern., example., for imitation, 1 Pet. ii. 
21, where see my note. 

'T TT o ^ £ i y /X a , aros, to, ( virobi iKvvjULi.,) 
prop. ' what is placed under any one's eyes, 
to be shown to him,' equiv. to a pattern, 
example: 1) gener. either for imitation, 
John xiii. 15, viroSELy/jLa sdooKa vp.iv., 'ha 
K.T.X. Ja. V. 10 ; or for warning, Heb. iv, 
11, ku Tco avTco uirod. tt/s a7r£t0£tas. 
2 Pet. ii. 6. 2) meton, a copy., likeness., 
taken from an original, Heb. viii. 5. ix. 

23, TO. VTToS. TCOV kv TOIS 0\Jp. 

'Y TTOOEIKVXI piL., f. ^£i'gct), ^rO^.tO skoiO 

or point out any thing, by placing it under 
one's view, and fig. to give to understand., 
to signify, let be hiown ; gener. to show, 
let see ; in N. T. fig. to shoiv by words or 
example, to teach, signify, foil, by acc. and 
dat. with oTL, Acts xx. 35, nrdvTa vir- 
tdei^a vpuv, otl k.t.X. ; by dat. of person 
with infin. Matt. iii. 7, al. Sept. & Class. 

*Y7rodexop.aL, f. ^op.aL, depon. mid. 
[dlx^M-^h) lo take wider, i. e. oneself; 
hence gener. to take or receive to oneself, 
favourably, as Evict's, Hes. Theog. 419. 
Usually, and in N. T. of guests, to receive 
hospitably, to ivelcome, entertain, with acc. 
Lu. X. 38, uVf ^fe^ara avTov el's t6v oIkov. 
xix. 6, vTTE^E^aTO avTOV ^aipiav. Acts 
xvii, 7. Ja. ii. 25. Jos. and Class. 

'Ytto^eu), f. 770-0), {^EU),) to bind under., 
as sandals under the feet, to put on san- 
dals, slippers, &c. to shoe ; in N. T. only 
mid. vTrodiopiaL, to bind under or put on 
one's oivn sandals ; perf. to have bound on 
one's sandals, &c. — to be shod; so foil, 
by acc. caudaXLa Mk. vi. 9. Acts xii. 8, 
Foil, by acc. of part. Eph. vi. 15, utto^. 
T0V9 TToda^, and Class. 

'Y'TTodri p.a, aTO<s, to, (uVo^ew,) prop. 
' what is l3ound under,' i. e. the foot, a 
sandal, a sole of wood or leather, bound 
on with thongs, equiv. to (yav^dXiov, wh. 
see. Matt. x. 10. Lu. x. 4. xv. 22, utto^. 
£t9 xous TTo^as. xxii. 35. Acts vii. 33, 
Xvarov TO vTTod. twv ttoScou aov, and so 
in Class. Hence to. virod. tlvo^ (Baa-To.- 
arai, ' to bear the sandals of any one,' Matt, 
iii. 11 ; also XucruL tov ipdvTa tcov vtto- 
SiTpidTcov Til/OS, ' to unbind one's sandals,' 
Mk. i. 7. Lu. iii. 16. John i. 27. Acts 
xiii. 25, expressions implying inferiority, 
since this was usually done only by menials. 

'YttoSiko^, ov, 6, 77, adj. (utto, diKi],) 
prop. ' under process,' and sometimes by 
impl. ' under sentence,' equiv. to con- 
demned, also guilty, Rom. iii. 19, lua vtto- 
oi/cos yEuriTUL Tras 6 KoapLo? tiZ Qelo, 
' guilty before, and consequently liable to 



454 



Yno 



piiiiishment from God.' So Dem. 518, 3, I 
viroOLicos £crT6o iradouTL. 

'Ytto^ u y tof, ou, TO, (neut. of adj. 
uTTo^uytos, ' under a yoke, yoked,' from 
^uyos,) prop, a draugJit animal^ beast of 
burden^ gener. in N. T. spec, an ass^ Matt, 
xxi. 5. 2 Pet. ii. 16. Sept. Ex. xxiii. 4, 5. 
Josh. vi. 21. Diod. Sic. xix. 20. 

'YTTO^WfyU jUl, f. ^OJaO), (yTTO, ^O)!/- 

vvjuLL^) to undergird^ i. e. of persons, 
mVc? under the breast, i/tto tous jULaaTov?^ 
2 Mace. ili. 19. ^1. V. H. x. 22. In N.T. 
of a ship, to under gird^ i. e. to gird around 
the bottom and whole body of the ship 
with chains or cables, in order to strengthen 
it against the waves, Acts xxvii. 17. 

'YTTO/caTw, adv. (/carco,) prop, under- 
neath^ said of place, with gen. Mk. vi. 11. 
vii. 28, viroKCiTUi t^s TpaTrt^i]?. John i. 

51, VTrOKCLTOi T^S CrVKT}^^ sl. Fig. VTTO- 

TaacTELv vTroK. Tcov irooMV riz/os, Heb. ii.8. 

"^YiroKfjivofxai^ depon. mid. (utto, 
Kpivtti^) prop, to give judgment under a 
cause or matter, to give a judicial answer ; 
hence gener. to give ansiver^ to answer^ 
reply, gener. used by the earlier writers 
instead of the later and more usual aTro- 
KpivofxczL. Hence, in Attic usage, to an- 
swer upon the stage, to play a part, to act. 
Hence gener. and in N. T. to play the 
hypocrite, to dissemble, feign, with acc. and 
inf. Lu. XX. 20, viroKp. kavTov^s SiKaiov^ 
eluai. 2 Mace. vi. 21, 24. Jos. Vit. § 9. 

'YiroKpLarL^, ^, {viroKpivofxaL^) 

prop, an ansiver or response, e. gr. of an 
oracle, Hdot. i. 90, 116; but gener. stage- 
playing, acting ; in N. T. fig. hypocrisy, 
dissimulation. Matt, xxiii. 28. Mk. xii. 15, 
6 dk Ecdu)^ aWuiv rrjy vttok. Lu. xii. 1, al. 
2 Mace. vi. 25. Jos. Ant. ii. 6, 10, & Class. 

'YtTO/C/O iT7;§, ou, 6, {vTrOKpLVOfiaL,) 

prop, a stage-player, actor ; in N. T. a 
hypocrite, dissembler, in respect to religion 
or piety. Matt. vi. 2, 5, 16, al. ssepe. Sept. 
but not in Class. 

TToXa fJL(3 dv (A), f. Xvxl/o/iaL, to taJce 
under any person or thing, i. e. to tahe up 
by placing oneself underneath, trans. ; in 
N. T. 1) PROP, to take or receive up, with 
acc. Acts i. 9, vE(pi\i] viri\a^&u av. diro 
Tcov 6(pdaX/iXU}u av. Hdot. i. 24, tov 6e 
{* Apiova) OE\<pTva XEyovaLVviroXajSovTa 
E^EVElKaL ETTL Ta'ivapov. 2) FIG. to take 
up the discourse, to continue it ; hence to 
ansiver, reply ; absol. Lu. x. 30, vTroXa- 
f3(j>if dk 6 'Irjcrous eTtte. Sept. and Class. 
3) fig. to take up in thought, to suppose, 
thrnk; absol. Acts ii. 15, ou ydp, cos Uyutis 
vTToX. Lu. vii. 43. Sept. and Class. 

'YTToXELTr o), f. i|/a), (XstTTO),) to Uave 
behind, pass, to be left behind, to remain ; 
Rom. xi. 3, Kayct) v'7rEXEL(pdr)v txovo^, 
Sept. and Class. 



'Y TT oXriv Lov, ou, TO, {Xt]v6<s,^ thc un- 
der-vat of a wine-press, into which the 
juice of the grapes flowed. Mk. xii. 1, and 
Sept. Is. xvi. 10. 

^Y TToXiikiT dv oi,2i lengthened form for 
uTToXEtTro), found only in the pres. and 
imperf. to leave behind, trans. 1 Pet. ii. 21. 
uVoA.. vTroypafx/uLOu. 

^Y iro fxEv CO, f. Evo), {/uLEvo),) I. intrans. 
to remain behind after others are gone, Lu. 

11. 43, vTcifXELVEV 'I?]crou§ o Trais tv 'lep. 
Acts xvii. 14, EKEL. Jos. and Class. — II. 
trans, to remain under the approach of 
any person or thing, espec. a hostile attack, 
to aivait, sustain ; hence in N. T. fig. to 
bear up under, be patient under, endure, 
with acc. 1 Cor. xiii. 7, irduTa virofXEVEL. 
2 Tim. ii. 10. Heb. x. 32. xii. 2, 7. Ja, i. 

12. Absol. or neut. to endMre, hold out, 
persevere, 6 v7ro/uLELua<s sis te\o^, Matt. 
X. 22. xxiv. 13, & oft. in Class. : so with 
dat. Rom. xii. 12, tt; ^Xixj/EL vTrofxivovTE^, 
2 Tim. ii. 12. Ja. V. 11. 1 Pet. ii.20. 

^Y TTO fJLL fJLVV (TKM, f. UTTO/UI/r/CTW, (/XI- 

/uLvncTKco,) to recall to one''s mind, prop, pri- 
vately, silently ; also to suggest to any one''s 
mind, i. q. gener. to put in riiind of, to re- 
mind, bring to remembrance, 1) act. in 
various constructions ; foil, by double acc>, 
of pers. and thing, vTTOfxvrKTEL vjxd's irdu- 
Ta, John xiv. 26. Thuc. vii. 64; by acc. 
of pers. with irspl n-ovroov, 2 Pet. i. 12 ; 
by acc. of person with inf. Tit. iii. 1 ; with 
OTL, Jude 5, and Class. ; by acc. of thing, 
e. gr. precepts, duties, TauTa virojULipLVi}- 
(TKE, 2 Tim. ii. 14; also evil deeds, 3 John 
10, vTTOfJLvncru} avTov Ta 'ipya, and Class. 
2) MID. — to call to mind, recollect, re- 
member, with gen. Lu. xxii. 61, virEfjivri- 
crdr) 6 n. Tou Xoyov tou Kvpiov, & Class. 

'YTTO/JLVrjCr 19, EM'S, 7], {vTrO/ULLjUiVriCrKCt),) 

a putting in mind, reminding, also remem- 
brance. 1) trans, kv viT0fxvr\(TEL, ' by put- 
ting in mind,' by way of remembrance, 
2 Pet. i. 13. 2 Mace. vi. 16. Thuc. iv. 95. 
2) intrans. recollection, remembrance, as in 
Jos. and Class, oft. : so virofxv^aLV Xafx- 
(SdvELv, ' to take remembrance of,' — to 
remember, 2 Tim. i. 5. 

'Y'TTo jULOvT], ij's, h, { VIT ofxiv (13,) a remain- 
ing behind, an aivaiting ; in N.T. fig. a 
bearing up under, patient endurance, comp. 
virofxivu) II. 1) prop, with gen. of thing 
borne, as evils, &c. 2 Cor. i. 6, kv viro- 
fjiovri Tu)v avT(x)v iradrifjid'Tttiv. Jos. and 
Class. 2) gener. patience, perseverance, 
constanxiy under suffering, in faith and 
duty, absol. Lu. viii. 15, KapTrocpopovaLv 
kv vTro/jLovrj. Rom. viii. 25, al. Diod. 
Sic. xi. 9, n-Tjv kv toIs klvSvvol^ v'Trofxa- 
vi]v : foil, by gen. of that in or as to which 
one perseveres, Rom. ii. 7, /ca0' vTrofxovijv 
Epyou dyadov. 1 Th. i. 3 ; by gen. of pers, 
Lu. xxi. 19, kv T|7 VTT. vfxwv KTna-aadE 



Y n o 



455 



YHO 



ras li/uYas vfxuiv. 2 Tb. i. 4. iii, 5. Rev. 
i. 9, iii. 10, Tou \6yov ttjs uTro/xoyilv /uou. 
Spec, patience as a quality of niiiul, the 
bearing of evils and suiferings Avitli tran- 
quil mind, Rom. v. 3, ?/ utto^oi/j/V 
\-aT€p7a^£Tat. ver. 4. xv. 4, 5, 6 Ofos 
Tjj? uV. i. e. ' who besto\vs patience,' 
1 Tim. vi. 11. Tit. ii. 2. Sept. Ezra x. 2. 

'Vttoz/oecd, f. tjoro), (fofcco,) in Class. 
to msimi^ surmise ; in N. T, to sitppose^ 
deem, with acc. impl. Acts xxv. 18, <Zv 
(i. e. TovTtxiV a) uttei^ooui/ iyto : with acc. 
and inf. xiii. 25. xxvii. 27. Judith xiv. 14. 
Plut.de Garrul. 14,ou/c virovoovvTo^^ dW 
slSoTo^ scpaiveTo. Xen. Cyr. iii. 3, 20. 

^XTTouoLa^ as, ?/, (uVoi/ot'w,) suspicion, 
surmise, 1 Tim. vi. 4, utt. Trovripai. 

*Y7ro7rX£co, f. tvcrofxai, (ttXeo),) 
saiZ under the lee or shelter of an island or 
shore, with acc. depending on uttS in comp. 
Acts xxvii, 4, 7, v7re7r\Eva-dui]u t. Kjs. 

'YTTO'TTfE O), f. £UCra>, (TTI/tCO,) ifO 6ZoZiJ 

gently, softly, of the wind, Acts xxvii. 13. 

TroTT oBlov, ov, to, {vTroTTodLO^, fr. 
Jtto, ttous,) « footstool, Ja. ii. 3, Kadov 
(2d£ vTro TO UTT. ^ou : anthropopath. of 
God, whose footstool is the earth, to vtt. 
i'jTL T(Zv iroocou avTov, Matt. v. 35 ; for the 
phrase TiQivai tov^ k^dpov<s hiroTroOLOv 
TiZu TToocou TLvo^, Matt. xxii. 44, al. 

'Y7ro<rTao"is, fw?, ?7, {v<pLa-Ti]fjLL,) 
prop, 'what is set or placed under' any 
thing, a foundation, suhstructure ; then of 
any thing which subsides, sediment; fig. 

foundation, hegimiing, purpose begun, un- 
dertaking; in N. T. 1) meton. ivellfounded 
trust, firm expectation, confidence ; prop. 
' foundation or ground of trust and confi- 
dence,' Heb. iii. 14, Tr\v dpxr\v Trj'S vtt. 
i. e. 'our first hope or confidence' in Christ, 
equiv. to TtjV TrpwVrjf ttlcttiv, 1 Tim. v. 
12 : so Heb. xi. 1, ecttl ttLgtl^ eK-ttlX^O' 
fxivcov vTTOGTaaL^. 2 Cor. ix. 4, kut- 
aL(TX'^vd(ZfXEv 77/i£ts kv Trj VTT. TavTrj : 
and so in Sept. 2) meton. of that quality 
which leads one to ' stand under,' endure, 
or undertake any thing, firmness, boldness, 
confidence, 2 Cor. xi. 17, kv TavTy t^ 
VTT. T^s Kaux^cTEcos I and so Jos. Ant. 
xviii. 1, 6'.^ Pol. iv. 50, 10. vi. 55, 2, 
uV. Kai ToXfxa. Diod. Sic. iv. 62, r] 
iv (3aardvoL9 vtt. t^s xp^vxv^- 3) fig. Jiypo- 

^ stasis, Lat. substantia, i. e. ' what really 
exists under any appearance,' substance, 
reality, essential nature, Heb. i. 3., x^P"'^" 
Trjp Tr?s VTT. avTov, scil. Qsov, 'the express 
image or counterpart of God's essence or 
being,' i. q. of God himself ; so xi. 1 ; and 
so Artem. iii. 14, (pavTacriav fxkv 'i\tLV 
'TrXovTov, vTToaTaa-iv dk fxi], and elsewh. 
in later Class. Hence in 2 Cor. ix. 4, 
and xi. 17, some take it in the sense of 
subject^ matter, thing, kv Trj vTroa-Tda-Et 



TavTi], ' in this matter,' cquiv. to iv tw 
fxiptL TOVTw, ix. 3. 

'YTTOCTt \X.a), f. t\u), ((TTfcXXo),) pFOp. 

to send or draw under or dozen, e. gr. a 
sail, to contract, furl ; in N. T. with kav 
Tov or mid. to dratv one's self back, draw 
in, as wc say ; hence gener. to shrink or 
dratv back, tcithdraiv one's self, through 
fear, Gal. ii. 12, vTrkarTEWsv kavTov : so 
Pol. i. 16, 10, v7roarTEL\a9 kavTov vtto, 
k.tX. Heb. X. 38, kdv vTroarTsiXriTai, 
where the sense is somew'hat different. 
See my note. With acc. of thing, prop. 
to draiv back as to any thing, = to keep 
back, suppress any thing from timidity, 

Acts XX. 20, OVOkv V'TrE(JTEl\dfX1]V TCOV 
GVfX<pEp6vT(x3V. 

TTOCrToXil, fl'S, 77, (uVoCTTtXXtO,) Ci 

shrinking or draivi?ig back, from timidity, 
Heb. X. 39. Jos. Ant. ii. 14, 12. 

'Yttoo-t/o fc 0 o), f. \lru), to tzirn behind, 
or back, trans.; in N. T. intrans. or with 
kavTov impl. to turn back, return ; absol. 
Mk. xiv. 40, v7rocrTpk\l/a9 svpev avT0V9. 
Lu. ii. 43. xvii. 18. Acts viii. 28, riv viro- 

<TTpi<pUiV. 

'YTToarT p wvvv O), f. arTpcoa-co, to streiv 
undeimeath, trans. Lu. xix. 36. 

^Y iroTayri, rj?, rj, {vTroTacra-a),) prop. 
subordi?iation, hence subjection, submission, 
2 Cor. ix. 13. Gal. ii. 5, ovok irpo's lopav 
EL^afXEv Ty UTT. 1 Tim. ii. 11. iii. 4. 

^YTTOTdarcru), f. ^o), (Tao-cro),) prop. 

to range or put under, make subject, trans. 

1) act. to subject, and pass, to be sub- 
jected, to be subject, constr. with acc. 
and dat. expr. or impl. Rom. viii. 20, 

Tfj fXaTaLOTTITL 7? KTLCTL^ VTrETdyrj. 1 

Cor. xiv. 32. Eph. i. 22. v. 24. 1 Pet. 
iii. 22, and oft. in Class. 2) mid. to sub- 
mit one's self, to be subject, obedient, as used 
not of compulsory subjection, but of volun- 
tary and dutiful obedience, as of children 
to parents, wives to husbands; also of sub- 
ordination both military and civil. In 
N. T, wdth dat. Lu. ii. 51, rjv viroTaccro- 
fXEVo<s avTot's. x. 17. Rom. viii. 7. x. 3. 
xiii. 1, 5. 1 Cor. xvi. 16. Eph. v. 21, 22. 
Col. iii. 18. James iv. 7. 1 Pet. ii. 13, 18, 
al. Sept. and lat. Class. 

'Yttot/ 0?7^i, f. Qriauy, prop, to set or 
put under, to lay under, as a prop, or 
support ; in N. T. 1 ) with acc. viro- 
tlQevul tov Tpdxt)\ov, ' to lay down 
one's neck,' i. e. under the axe of the exe- 
cutioner, = to hazard one's life, Rom. xvi, 
4. -^l.y. H. X. ] 6, VTTodvaoj Trjv KECpaXvu. 

2) mid. & fig. vTroTtdEiuLaL, to bring under 
the mind of any one, to suggest for con- 
sideration, as a teacher, with acc. and dat. 
1 Tim. IV. 6, TavTo. vTcoTLQifXEVcs : so 
Plato, p. 9, TovTo VTroQifxEvo^. 

'Y7j-oTf>£'x^, aor. 2. virkcpafxov, prop. 



456 



I 



to run under ^ as a tree for shelter ; in N.T. 
of a ship, to run under the shelter of an 
island or coast, Avith acc. Acts xxvii. 16, 
vy](jiov TL viroopajULOVTS^ : Themist. p. 
152, Ttt fxkv VTrodpafxovcraL^ to. Sk TTEpidp. 

'TTTOTUTTCDCrtS, £0)9, 77, ( UTTOTUTrdo), 

' to sketch out the form of any thing in 
outline,') a form^ sketchy prop, such as is 
obtained by a stamp or impression in wax, 
and hence an eocemplar^ both prop, and 
fig. 2 Tim. i. 13, utt. vyiaLvovriov Xoyvov: 
meton. a pattern^ for imitation, 1 Tim. i. 

16, TT^ds VirOTUTTCOaLV. 

'TTTo^spo), aor. 1. virvvsy Ka, prop. 
to bear up under a thing or person, 
to support^ sustain ; in N. T. fig. to hear 
up under^ endure^ with acc. Trgipac/xdi/, 
1 Cor. X. 13; SLcoyfxoixs, 2 Tim. iii. 11; 
AuTras, 1 Pet. ii. 19. Sept. and Class. 

draiv one's self under cover, give place to 
an^ one, Lu. ix. 10, v7r8^(^oopi]a& kut ioiav 
£15 TOTTov £|0?j/xoy; with ii/, Lu. V. 16. 

'T7ra)7ri«^a), f. acrw, (uttcottioi/, "the 
part under the eyes, the face, fr. i/tto, wi//-,) 
prop, to strike any one under the eyes^ to 
heat the face hlach and blue; or fig. to 
bruise any one; gener. in N.T. to maltreat, 
said of the body, to subject to hardship, 
mortify, to (TU)ixa. jULOv, 1 Cor. ix. 27 : also 
to stun any one with prayers, to weary with 
entreaties, Lu.xviii.5. Comp. Liat.obtundo. 

"^Ts, ud5, d, 7?, a swine, 2 Pet. ii. 22. 

"YcrcrajTros, ou, v, hyssop, a low plant 
or shrub, much used in the ritual purifi- 
cations and sprinklings of the Hebrews ; 
in N. T. of a stalk or stem of hyssop, John 
xix. 29. Also of a bunch of hyssop for 
sprinkling, Heb. ix. 19, kpiov kokklvov kul 
vara-ooTTov, in allusion to Lev. xiv. 4, al. 
Jos. Ant. ii. 14,6, vcra-wTrov KOfxa^ ava- 

CTTe p E(o, f. tJo-o), {vaT£p09,) to be 
last, or after, behi?id, prop, in place, also 
in time; in N.T. fig. of dignity, condition, 
to be behind or inferior, to lack ; in later 
usage also depon. pass. xjGTipovfxaL. I. of 
dignity, &c. absol. to be the ivorse, 1 Cor. 
viii. 8, ovTE kav imi] qyayuifXEV v<JT£pov- 
lULsda. 2 Cor. xi. 5. xii. 11.— IL gener. to 
lack, fail, e. gr. 1) to fail of any thing, 
miss, with gen. expr. or impl. Rom. iii^ 

23, m-dvTE^ VdTEpOVVTaL tT]<s ^d^l]§ TOU 

e. Heb. iv. 1, and Class. 2) to be in luant 
of, lack. Lu. xxii. 35, /xr? Tti/os vaTspij- 
(TttTf ; Jos. Ant. XV. 6, 7. imv^k o'Lvov ^i)Sk 
vouTO^ vcTTEpjidrjuai : with kv and dat. of 
that in which one is wanthig, 1 Cor. i. 7. 
Ecclus. xi. 12 ; with acc. of thing as to 
which, Matt, xix, 20, tl etl vaTEpiv ; 
'what lack I jet?' Sept. tl vaTspco kyai ; 
Ps. xxxix. 5 ; absol. to be in ivant, suffer 
need^ Lu. xv. 14. 2 Cor. xi. 8. Phil. iv. 



12. Heb. xi. 37. Ecclus. xiii. 4. 3) in- 

trans. of things, to fail, be wanting, absol. 
Jolui ii. 3, voTTEpija'avTo? o'Lvov. So Diosc. 
V. 87, vaTEpovcri]<i crTrodou : with dat. Mk. 
X. 21, Ev csroL vdTtpEL. Sept. Neh. ix. 21. 

(XT E pi] fx a, aTOS, to, [va-TEpiu),) 
prim, 'that which is wanting,' and then by 
meton. ivant. 1 ) gener. with gen. of thing, 
Phil. ii. 30, TO ujULcov varTEpi^fxa t^s Trpds 
juE XELT0vpyLa<5, and so impl. 1 Cor. xvi. 

17. Col. i. 24, TO. V(JT. TU)V ^XtXp^ECOU 

Tod Xp. 1 Th. iii. 10, and Sept. 2) absoL 
or with gen. of pers. want, need, poverty, 
Lu. xxi. 4. 2 Cor. viii. 13, 14. ix. 12. 

cr T api^ar L9, fcos, 77, {vcTTEpECo,) the 
being in ivant, want, need, Mk. xii. 44. 
Phil.iv. 11, oi'X OTi Kad' vaTEpi]aLV Xkyw. 

"Yo-Tspos, a, ou, a defective compara- 
tive, latter, last, hindmost, e. gr. in place, 
Horn. II. v. 17; in N. T. only of time: 

I. gener. 1 Tim. iv. 1, ku uaTEpot^ kul- 
pot9. Sept. and Class. — II. neut. varTEoou 
as adv. 1) with gen. last, after. Matt, 
xxii. 27, & Lu. XX. 32, va-TEpoi/ ok irdv- 
Tcov airkdauE kul h yvvr\. Sept. & Class. 
2) absol. at last, afterwards. Matt. iv. 2, 
vaTEpov kiTELvacTE. xxi. 29, 32, 37. XXV. 

II, al. Sept. and Class. 

'^Y (pavT 6<s, i], 6v, adj. {v(f)a'iva),) woven, 
John xix. 23, xltoov v<pavT6<s di oXou. 
Sept. Jos, and Class. 

'Y\lfi]X69, i], dv, adj. ui|aos,) 
high, elevated, lofty : 1 ) prop, as d'pos 
v\j/i]X6u, Matt. iv. 8. Mk. ix. 2, al. From 
the Heb. to. v\^i]Xa, high places, the 
heights, put for ' the highest heavens,' Heb, 
i. 3. Sept. In a like sense, of Christ, 
comparat. v\ln]X6Tfpo£ tcov oup. yEvofXE- 
vcs, Heb. vii. 26, equiv. to SiEXiiXudoo^ 
Tov<s ovpavov<s, iv. 14. Symbol, by Hebr. 
Acts xiii. 17, fXETo. ^pax'^ovo's v^nXov, 
'with a high (i.e. uplifted) arm,' as if to 
destroy the enemy. Comp. Sept. X^'-P 
vxj/ijXi], Ex. xiv. 8. 2) FIG. high, i. e. 
highly esteemed, Lu. xvi. 15, to kv av- 
dpcoTTOL'S uif/nXdu, jSSkXvyjULa kvt^Triov 
Toxj Qeov. Rom. xii. 16, to. vxp^rjXd 
(ppovovvTE's, high things, pride, opp. to 
TO. TaiTELvd, humility. Comp. Lucian, 
Herm. 5, vij/nXd (ppovElv, So Sept. A.a- 
XeIv vxlrriXd, 1 Sam. ii. 3. 

'Y\l/7]Xocp povECo, f. vara), {v\^i]X6?, 
(ppovico,) to be high-minded, carry oneself ^ 
haughtily, Rom. xi. 20. 1 Tim.vi. 17. 

"T\|/to-Toc, 7j, ov, adj. {vxl/i, ui|/-os,) 
highest, most elevated, loftiest: 1) prop, as 
vxi/LOTTou 6po<s, Hdian. iii. 3, 2; in N. T. 
oiilv from the Heb. to. v{j/L(rTa, ' tJie 
highest heavens;' for there were supposed] 
to*^ be three ; the atrial, the starry, and 
the highest, the abode of God and the 
angels. Matt. xxi. 9, 'Qaraui/d kv tol<s 
v\}/i<7T0L<i. Mk. xi. 10, al. So Sept. Job 



457 



^> AN 



xvi. 19. 2) fig. o "Ti//i(TTos, the Most 
High^ said ^vith reference both to His 
eardted abode and supreme majesti/, Mk. v. 
7. Lu. i, 3*2, al. sa>pe. Sept. and Class. 

"r v|/OS, £0S OUS, TO, (uvl^i,) kcU/J/f^ clc- 

vation : 1) prop. Eph. iii. 18, jiudos kul 
ui|/os. Rev. xxi. 16. From the Heb. the 
height., put for Heaven., the highest heaven., 
the abode of God ; so ui|/ou9, from 
on high., from God, Lu. i. 78; tis u\//os, 
to the place on high., to God, Eph. iv. 8. 
Sept. 2) fig. elevation., dignity., Ja. i. 9. 
Sept. and Class. 

'Ti|Adco, f. cocrctj, (u\/ao§,) heighten., 
i. e. elevate., lift up., trans. I. prop, of 
the brazen serpent, and of Jesus on the 
cross, John iii. 14. viii. 28 : hence Christ 
is further said vxlrcodPjvai Ik tt}^ in 
allusion to tlie death of the cross, xii. 32, 
34; also t?; de^LU tou Qeov vyj/cjodaU, 
Acts ii. 33. 'v. 31. 'l Pet. iii. 22. Comp. 
Heb. i. 3. viii. 1. xii. 2. — II. fig. to ele- 
vate., ejcalt., i. e. I) gener. ' to raise to a 
condition of prosperity, dignity, honour,' 
gener. out of a lowly state, Lu. i. 52, 
KaQEiXs Svvda-Ta^ diro ^povwv., Kai 
vxj/coaE TaiTELvov^. Acts xiii. 17. Ja. iv. 
10. 1 Pet. V. 6. Pass. u>co0^](T£Tat, Matt, 
xxiii. 12. xi. 23. Sept. and Class. 2) re- 
flex, v^ovv kavTov., to exalt oneself he 
proud., Matt, xxiii. 12. Lu. xiv. 11. Sept. 

"Yi//-a)/aa, a-ro?, to, (u\//o'do,) prop, 
'something elevated,' 1. e. a high place., 
height., elevation., Rom. viii. 39, ovrg vxl/co- 
juLu OVT& /3a0os, prob. put for te-ye/^, comp. 
vxj/o^. Fig. of a proud adversary., under 
the figure of a lofty tower or fortress built 
up by an enemy, 2 Cor. x. 5, irdv v\l/. 

ETraLpO/JLtl/Ol/ KUTO. T^S yV(JD(T£(JO^ TOU 8. 

^ttyojitai, Ifpayov., see in 'EaOico. 

^dyos, ou, 6, (^ayEti',) a glutton., 
Matt. xi. 19, a.v^pifi'Ko'i (pdyo^. Lu. vii. 34. 

<^aiXoi/ij§, ou, 6, by metath. for cpui- 
i/dXt/9, Lat. pcenula., a cloak or great-coat 
with a hood, used chiefly in travelling, 
2 Tim. iv. 13. 

^alvw., f. ai/w, aor. 2. pass. k<pd.vr\v., 
(0aya), (paEii/o).,) prop, to lighten^ give 
light., illuminate : I. intrans. to give 
light., shine foHh., as a luminary, absol. Rev. 
i. 16, cos 6 nKio^ (paivsL. viii. 12. xxi. 23. 
2 Pet. i. 19. Fig. of spiritual light and 
truth, John i. 5, to (pto^ iv Ty aKOTLo. 
cpaivEL. V. 35. 1 John ii. 8.— II. trans. 
prop, to bring to light., to let appear., to 
show., in Class. ; in N. T. only, pass, or 
mid. (paLVOfxaL., aor. 2. kcpdviiv-, lo come to 
light., appear., be or become visible ; i. 
strictly, to shine forth., to shine., Rev. xviii. 
23, <^a)S \vyvov ou fxi] (pavy iv aol etl : 



fig. Pliil. ii. 15, Ev oT? (pa'ivEo-QE cos 0aj- 
(XTypts EV Koar/uLto. — II. gener. to appear., 
he seen., foil, by dat. of pers. expr. or 
impl. 1) o{ persons., Matt. i. 20, ayyg- 
\o5 Ki'pi'ou kut' ovap Ecpuuy avTco. ii. 
13. Mk. xvi. 9. Sept. & Class. ; wi'th a 
particip. or adj. as predicate in nom. Matt. 

Vi. 16, OTTCOS CpaVWCTL TOI? dvdp. VIIOTTEV- 

ovTE's. ver, 18. xxiii. 28. Absol. Lu. ix. 8. 
1 Pet. iv. 18. 2) of thiiigs., to. X^iX^dvia., 
JNlatt. xiii. 26 ; of an event, ix. 33 ; so 
cpaLvo/uLEva., ' things visible,' apparent to 
the senses, Heb. xi. 3 ; with a predicate. 
Matt, xxiii. 27. Rom. vii. 13, 'iva cpavtj 
d/uLapTLu — KaTEpyaX^optvy ^dvaTOV. Es- 
pec. of things appearing in the sky, air, 
&c. phenomena., Matt. ii. 7, tov y^povov 
TOU (paLvopEvou dcTTEpo?. xxiv. 27, 30. 
Ja. iv. 14, & Class. — iii. fig. as referred to 
the mental eye, to appear., seem, foil, by 
dat. of pers. with predic. Mk. xiv. 64, tl 
vjULv cpaivETUL ; and Class. ; foil, by ivco- 

TTLOV Til/OS, Lu. xxiv. 11. 

^ av E po^., a, dv, adj. (0ai/os, fr. (pai- 
i/co,) prop, apparent, visible, conspicuous. 
but usually and in N. T. apparent, mani- 
fest, hioif7i ; e. gr. cpavEpov eIvul, 'to be 
manifest, known,' Acts iv. 16. Rom. i. 19. 
Gal. V. 19. 1 Tim. iv. 15. 1 John iii. 10. 
Apocr. cpavEpov yii/ea^at, ' to be or be- 
come apparent, manifest, well known,' 
Mk. vi. 14. Lu. viii. 17, al. and Class. 
cpavEpov ttoleTv Tiva, ' to make one mani- 
fest, known,' to disclose. Matt. xii. 16. 
Mk. iii. 12. 2 Mace. xii. 41. Jos. Ant. iii. 
4, 2. Neut. with prep, cpavEpov e\- 
OeTv, ' to become manifest, known,' to be 
brought to light, Mk. iv. 22. Lu, viii. 17. 
EV TOO (pavEpco, manifestly, openly. Matt, 
vi. 4, 6, 18; also equiv. to externally, out- 
ivardly, Rom. ii. 28, and Class. 

^avEpoio, f. wVo), {(pavEp6<5,) to make 
apparent, manifest, or known ; to manifest, 
shoiv openly, trans. I. of things, act. John 
n.ll, ECpavEpcoas Tyv do^av avTOv. John 
xvii. 6. Rom. i. 19. I Cor. iv. 5. 2 Cor. 
ii. 14. Col. iv. 4. Tit. i. 3. Pass. Mk. iv. 
22. John iii. 21. Rom. iii. 21, al. ssepe. — II. 
of PERSONS, 1) reflex, with kauTov, or 
mid. (pavEpoufJiai, aor. I. pass. E(pavEpm- 
di]v, as mid. to manifest oneself, to show 
oneself openly, appear. Reflex, with dat. 
John vii. 4, (pavipooaov ceuvtov tw 
Koa-fXio, ' appear publicly ;' mid. with Ep.- 
Trpocrbiv tlvo^, 2 Cor. v. 10, tous Trai/Ta? 
77/xas cpavEpcodyvai. Sel EfxirpoG^Ev 
TOU (3}'i/j.aTo^ TOU Xp. where (pav. is a 
forensic term signif. like Lat. comparere, 
' to present oneself, appear at the bar for 
trial.' The term is also used espec. of 
those appearing from heaven or from the 
dead ; reflex, with dat. John xxi. 1, k(pa- 
vkpuxTEV kauTov irdXiv 6 'I. toIs ^a6?j- 
Tals, K.T.X. Mid. with dat. John xxi. 14. 

X 



<&AN 458 ^EP 



1 John i. 2, al. saep. 1 John i. 2, kuI h 
XyODT) k(pavEpu)dii. ii. 28. iii. 2, 5, 8. 2) pass. 
to he manifested^ become or he made mani- 
fest^knoivn^ with dat. John i. 31, iVa (pavs- 
pwd^ Tto 'lap. 2 Cor. V. 11. vjud^, xi. 
6. Foli by oTi, 2 Cor. iii. 3, al. 

^avEpa)9^ adv. {<pau&p6^^) mardfestly^ 
openly^ i. e. ' clearly, evidently,' Acts x. 
3, ku opdfxaTL (pavspu)^ : ' publicly,' Mk. 
i. 45, (pavipuo^ £ts ttoXlu eiaeXdetif : 
' openly,' John vii. 10, ou cpavEpto^, dW 

tOS eu KpVTTTVO. 

^avip(jocrL<s^ fws, 17, (0ai/£poa),) mani- 
festation^ a making knoivn^ 77 0. Trjs clA.?]- 
Oetas, 2 Cor. iv. 2. 77 ^. toD Ili/g u/xaros, 
equiv. to ' revelation,' 1 Cor. xii. 7. 

<E»ai/os, ou, 6, {(paiuo)^) a light, e. gr. 
a torch, lantern, John xviii. 3, 'ipxETai 
fjLETd (pavctiv Kai Xafxirdduiv. So Dion. 
Hal. xi. 40, k^tTpEyov — (pavou<3 e^ovte9 
KOI Xa/jLirdda^. See more in my note. 

^avrdX^co, f. croj, (cpaivu),) to make 
appear or visible, to shoiv, Callistr. Stat. 14, 
(pavTa'^iov Tr]v atcrdriaLV. Pass. (pavTa- 
Xfifiai, to appear, he visible, espec. of the 
appearances of the gods to men ; so Diod. 
Sic. i. 12, Toi>5 ^EOV's cpavraXfifxivov^ 
T0Z9 dvQp(aTroi^ kv hpiov ^wwi/ fxopcpdi^ : 
fig. Wisd. vi. 16 ; hence neut. part, to 
(pavTaX^o/jLEvou, equiv. to to (paivofXEvov, 
prop, the phenomenon, also the sight or 
■spectacle, Heb. xii. 21, cpo^Epov to 
ipaLvofXEvov. Comp. Ex. xix. 16. 

^avTacrla, as, r], (<^ai;Ta^o/xai,) prop. 
an appearing, appearance, but more freq. 
and in N. T. that kind of appearance which 
consists in parade, shoiv, or pomp. Acts 
XXV. 23, /x£Ta wo\X{]£ (pavTaarLa? : so 
(pavTuaia^ eveku, Diod. Sic. xii. 33. 

^ayTacjua, ttTos, to, {^(pavrdXfijjLaL,^ 
prop, a phantasm, ' an object presented to 
the sight,' or an image presented to the 
mind,' either awake or asleep, Wisd. xvii. 
15. Jos. Bell. Jud. iii. 8, 3. In the 
former case there is generally an implied 
notion of something illusive or unreal ; 
and hence the term came to be applied to 
denote an apparition, spectre, ghost, as 
Matt. xiv. 26. JMk. vi. 49; and so Jos. 
Ant. i. 20, 2, al. Artem. i. 2. For this 
the Class, writers use (pdarfxa, 

^dpay^, ayyos, 77, (kindr. with (pd- 
pvy^,) a ravine, a narrow and deep pass, 
or valley, between high rocks ; Lu. iii. 5, 
irdcra (pdp.TrXrjpajdrjdETaL. Sept. & Class. 

^apfxaKEia, as, 77, (cpapfxaKEva}, fr. 
(pdpjjLaKov, a medicine, also a magic 
potion,) prop, the preparing and giving of 
medicine, also the preparation of magical 
potions, philtres or charms, and hence oft., 
as in N. T., gener. magic art, sorcery, en- 
chantment. Gal. V. 20. Rev. ix. 21. xviii. 
23. Sept. and lat. Class. 



^apfxaKEv^, tu}<s, 6, {(papaaKevia,) 
prop, a preparer of drugs, an apothecary, 
but gener. a preparer of drugs which ope- 
rate by the force of charms, or incantation. 
So in N.T. a magician^ sorcerer, enchanter. 
iropi/OLS Kai (papfxaKEvcTi, Rev. xxi. 8, in 
text. rec. Comp. Luc. Merc. cond. 40. 
fxoLXov ri cpapjULaKEu ars, Jos. Ant. ix. 6, 
3, Tr/f ixr]Tipa avTov cpapfxaKov Kai irop- 
vr\v diroKaXiaaL. 

^ ap fxaKO^, ov, 6, rj, {(pdpfiaKov,) 
equiv. to (pap/maKEv^, wh. see. In N. T. 
a magician, sorcerer, enchanter, Rev. xxi. 
8, in later edd. xxii. 15. Sept. and Class. 

^acis, £0)9, 77, {(prjjuLL,) a speech,word, 
report. Acts xxi. 31, & Demosth. 793, 16. 

^d<TK(jD, imperf. 'icpaarKov, defect, tc 
say, to affirm, equiv. to (prifxi, foil, by inf. 
with acc. Acts xxiv. 9. xxv. 19. Rev. ii. 
2 ; with nom. Rom. i. 22. Sept. and Class. 

^aTVf}, tjs, 77, (corrupted fr. (pdyvrj, 
fr. (pdyu), to eat ; lit. an eating-place, as 
our manger ; a crib, manger, Lu. ii. 7, 12, 
16. xiii. 15, ov XvEL — t6v ovov dird t^s 
<p, Sept. Jos. and Class. 

^ avXos, r], ov, adj. had, ill, worthless, 
physically, as food or garments, but gener. 
as in N. T. morally bad, evil, wicked ; irdv 
(p. TTpdyfxa, Ja. iii. 16. cpavXa, 'evil 
deeds,' John iii. 20. v. 29, Ta cp. Trpdcr- 
cTELv, (so Lucian Herm. 82, (pavXov ovSki 
iroL-naovariv,) Tit. ii. 8, cp. XiyELv, evil. 

^iyyo^, Eo^s ous, to, (kindr. with 
(pdo^,) light, brightness, shinhig. Matt, 
xxiv. 29. Mk. xiii. 24, h ceXtivyi ov Buxtel 
TO (p. avTt}^. Xen. Venat. v. 4. Conv. 
i. 9. 

^ E'lSoimaL, f. Eicrofxai, depon. mid. to 
he sparing of, foil, by gen., also to spare, 
e. gr. to abstain from using, to use spa- 
ringly ; in N. T. 1 ) to spare, to abstain 
from doing any thing, to forbear, absol. 
2 Cor. xii. 6, ^Eidofxat Be, sc. tou kuv- 
Xdadai. Hdian. vii. 9, 22. Xen. H. G. 
vii. 1, 24. 2) to spare, to abstain from 
treating with severity, foil, by gen. Acts 

XX. 29, /ULIJ (pEiBofXEVOL TOV irOLfXvioV. 

Rom. viii. 32, iBiov vlov ovk k(pEicraTO. 
xi. 21. Dion. Hal. Ant. v. 10, tiov kpiuiv 

ov (pEiadfXEVO^ TEKVtOV. 

^ elSo fXEvoo^, adv. (from (pEidojuLai,) 
sparingly, frugally, 2 Cor. ix. 6.~ Plut. 
Alex. M. 25, (pEid. xp^^^^^t toTs 'jrap- 

OVOTL. 

^Epuj, (f. o'iaru), aor. 1. vvEyKa, aor. 1. 
pass. rjvEX^r}'^^) to hear, trans. I. prop. 
to bear, as a burden or the like, also to 
hear up ; in N. T. only fig. 1 ) #o hear up 
under, to hear with, endure, e. gr. evils, 
with acc. Rom. ix. 22, 0£O5 nvEyKEv 
a-KEvrj opy^s. Heb. xii. 20. xiii. 13, tov 
ovEL^Lapiov avTov cpEpovTE^, So Sept. 
dv&LdiafjLou (p. Ez. xxxiv. 29, and elsewh. 



459 



<^ 0 A 



in Sept. and Class. 2) to hear up any 
thing, to yphold, — have in charge^ direct^ 
govern^ ^vitll acc. Heb. i. 3, <pipu)V te to. 
TrdvTa TiZ p^fxaTL^ k.t.\. So Sept. Num. 
xi. 14. Dcut. i. 9. Pint. LiicuU. G, Kt^t/- 
yov avQovvra Ttj do^y tote kul (pipovTa 
Tf/f ttoXlv. — II. to bear^ with the idea of 
motion, to (war ALONG or ABOUT, to 
carri/^ Lu. xxiii, 2(5, tov cTavpov (piptLv 
oTTKx^EV TOV ^\i](Tov. Sept. and Class. 
Pass, (pipoiuai, to be borne along^ e. gr. as 
in a ship before the wind, to be driven or 
drifted^ hurried along at the mercy of the 
waves : what is here said of the ship only, 
being, as often, applied fig. to the crew ; 
Acts xxvii. 15, 17, E(pEp6ixEQa, So Test. 
XII. Patr. p. 670, xelixoX^oixevol kirl to 
iriXayo's k(pEp6ixEda. Hdot. iii. 10, k<pi- 
povTO Kara KVfxa kul avEfxov. Alcaeus 
in Mas. Crit. i. 423, apifxE 6' — vaC cfiopv- 
fiieQa (Tvv fxeXaiva. Fig. to be moved^ 
incited^'2 Pet. i. 21, uVo livEVfiaTo^ dyiov 
(f)Ep6iuEi/0L. Sept. Job xvii. 1, TrvEVfxaTL 
<pEp6/uLEvo£. The term is one often used 
of divine inspiration ; hence prophets were 
called ^E0(f)6priT0L. Mid. (pipofxai^ to 
hear oneself along^ — to move along^ rush, 
as a wind, Acts ii. 2, warirEp (fyEpojuLEvrj^ 
TTi/OTj^, The term in this use, and 
associated with ^lulo^, &c. is frequent in 
Class. So in ^lian H. An. vii. 24, we 
have, ETTELddv to irvEvpia ^iaLOV EK(pi- 
pi]Tai. Fig. to go ON, to advance, in learn- 
ing, ETTL Ti]V TEXElOTriTCt (pSpw/ULEQa, Hcb. 

vi. 1. — ^III. to hear, with the idea of motion 
to a place, to hear hither or thither, 
to bring : 1) of things, foil, by acc. expr. 
or impl. ; gener. Mk. vi, 28. Lu. xxiv. 1, 
<pEpova-aL a. rjTOLfxaaav dpw/uLaTa. John 
xix. 39. Acts iv. 34, al. Pass. Matt. xiv. 11, 
al. ; also with dat. of pers. t£ tivl, xiv. 11. 
Mk. xii. 15, (pipETE jULOL SrjvdpLov, Johnii. 
8, iv. 33 : spoken of the finger or hand, to 
reach hither, John xx. 27, and Class. Fig. 
of a voice or declaration, pass, to be borne, 
brought, to come, (poDV?}^ gygX^eic^?? avT<Z 
— £^ ovpavov, 2 Pet. i. 17, 18 : of good 
brought to any one, bestowed on him, pass, 
with dat. 1 Pet. i. 13, ettI ttjv (jispofXEvnu 
vfitu yap'-^i Class. ; of accusations, 
charges, &c. to bring forward, present, 
with KaTo. Tivo^, John xviii. 29. Acts 
XXV. 7. 2 Pet. ii. 11, comp. Jude 9 : of a 
doctrine, prophecy, to announce, make 
knotvn, ttjv SLSaxh^^t 2 John 10 ; rrrpo- 
(prjTELav, 2 Pet. i. 21 : of a fact or event, 
as reported or testified, in the sense of to 
adduce, to show, prove, pass. Heb. ix. 16, 
and Class, 2) of persons, with acc. to bear, 
to bring, e. gr, the sick, Mk. ii. 3, al. : foil, 
by dat. Matt. xvii. 17. Mk. vii. 32 : spoken 
also of any motion to a place, not proceed- 
iiig from the person himself, in the sense of 
to btnng,to lead,with. acc. and ettl, Mk. xv. 
22, (pipovoTLu avTov erri VoXyoQd tottou. 



John xxi. 18, ottov : so of beasts, Lu. xv. 
23. Acts xiv. 13, and Sept. Fig. and 
absol. a way or gate is said to lead any 
whither, tiju ttuXi^u ti)p (ptpov(rav Eh 
Tiiv TToXiu, Acts xii. 10, and oft. in Class. 
— IV. to bear, as trees or fields their fruits, 
to yield, KapTtov, Mk. iv. 8. John xii. 24. 
XV. 2, al. Jos. and Class. 

^Evyu), f. ^op.ai, aor. 2. E<pvyov, to 
flee, to betake oneself to flight, intrans. 
1) PROP, and gener. Matt. viii. 33, oi 
6k ^6<7KovTE<s 'icpvyoi/. xxvi. 56, al. 
Sept. and Class. Of death, with dTro, 
Rev. ix. 6. Also of heaven and earth, 
&c. to flee away, vanish suddenly, with 
dirb. Rev. xvi. 20. xx. 11. 2) to flM, 
from, escape, foil, by diro. Matt, iii. 7, 
cpvyELV aTTo Ttj's pLEXXovcrri^ opyrj^. xxiii. 
33 ; trans, with acc. Heb. xi. 34, scfyvyov 
cTTOfxaTa fxa^aLpa?, and Class. 3) fig. 
to flee, ~ to avoid, shun, foil, by diro, 
1 Cor. X. 14, (p. d'TTOTrj^ sidcoXoXaTpEias : 
so Ecclus. xxi. 2, cf). aTTo afxapTia^ : 
trans, with acc. 1 Cor. vi. 17, <p. ti]v irop- 
VEiav. 1 Tim. vi. 11. 2 Tim. ii. 22 ; so 
Xen. Cyr. viii. 1, 31, Ta aiarxpd (pvyEtv. 

^VfJ-Vi 77, Dor. (f)dfia, (^ij/xt,) 
Lat./ama, repoH, rumour, common fame. 
Matt. ix. 26. Lu. iv. 14. Sept. and Class. 

^'np.i, enclitic and defective, imperf. 
Efp)]v, {(pdui obsol.) prop. ' to bring to 
light by speech,' gener. to say, speak, utter ; 
the other tenses are supplied from eIttov. 
I. gener. and usually followed by the 
express words. Matt. xxvi. 34, £^17 aurw 
o 'Ir]o-oDs, et al. : with acc. 1 Cor. x. 15, Kpi- 
vaTE u/xels o ^r\p.i. Hence as interposed 
in the middle of a clause quoted, like 
Engl. ' said I,' ' said he,' and Lat. hiquam. 
Matt. xiv. 8, fxoL, (prjcrlv, woe ettl 

TTLvaKL K.T.X. Acts xxiii. 35. XXV. 5, 22, 
and Class. — XL as modified by the context. 

1) before interrogations, to ask, inquire. 
Matt, xxvii. 23. Acts xvi. 30. xxi. 37. 

2) before replies, to answer, reply. Matt, 
iv. 7. xiii. 29. John i. 23, & Class. 3) 
emphat. in the sense of to affirm, assert, 
Rom. iii. 8. 1 Cor. vii. 29, and Class. 

^> 0a I/O), f. dau), aor. 1. E<pdaara, to go 
or come before, be first, in being or doing 
any thing : 1 ) prop, with acc. to precede, 
anticipate, 1 Th. iv. 15, ou fir] (pQdcrwfjLEV 
T0v<$ K0LfxnQivTa<s; and so in Class. 2) 
gener. aor. 1. Ecpdacra, to have come first, 
or already, foil, by dxpi- ^vith gen. 2 Cor. x. 
14, axpt y«p Kal vpcov kcpddaaniEV kv Tta 
Evay. : foil, by Eh Ti,fig. to have already 
attained unto, Rom. ix. 31. Phil. iii. 16 ; 
by kiri Tiva, to have already come to or 
upon any one. Matt. xii. 28. 1 Th. ii. 16. 

^dapTO's, r], 6v, adj. {(jidEipco,) cor- 
ruptible, perishable, mortal, Rom. i. 23, (f*. 
dvOpoDTTo^ : 1 Cor. ix. 25, (h. cTicbavo's v 
X 2 . 



00 E 



460 



01 A 



XV. 53, where see my note. 1 Pet. i. 18, 
23, and Class. 

eyyo/uLUL^ f. y^o/uai, depon. mid. 
prop, to emit a sound^ and usually a shrill 
sound ; also to sound ^ as a trumpet, thun- 
der, or the human voice; in N. T. to 
speak^ absol. Acts iv. 18. uVoJuyioi/ a<pity- 
vov ku dudpcoTTou (pcov^ (pd&y^diJLevov^ 2 
Pet. ii. 16 ; with acc. viripoyKa^ ver. 18. 

<l>0fi'p6t), f. £|0a;, aor. 1. pass. £^6apt7f, 
to spoils corrupt^ destroy^ with acc. 1 Cor. 

iii. 17, i-'L TtS TOV vaov tov Q&ov (pdsipEL^ 

cf)dEpBL TovTov 6 0£os. 2 Cor. vii. 2 ; 
mid. Jude 10. Sept. and Class. Fig., in a 
moral sense, to corrupt^ deprave^ with acc. 
1 Cor. XV. 33, (pdELpovoTLV vQri XP^l^'^"- 
6jULL\LLtL KaKuL. 2 Cor. xi. 3. Eph. iv. 22. 
Rev. xix. 2, and Class. 

4>0tj/o7r6op tz/os, ^, 01/, adj. (<^0ii/a), 
oTTcopa,) autumnal^ Jude 12, StvSpa cpdii/. 
trees, as in autumn, stripped of their leaves. 

<J>0oy'yo§, cu, 6, ((pd iyy ofxaL,) a 
sounds espec. of a musical instrument, 1 
Cor. xiv. 7 : poet, for the voice, Rom. x. 
18. Sept. and Class. 

^dovEco, f. >jcr6o, (<^0ofos,) to envy, 
with dat. Gal. v. 26, and Class. 

^001/ OS, ou, o, envy, (fr. pret. mid. 
zcpdova, of the obsol. (pdivio, kindred 
with cpdio), Ho waste, or pine.' Thus 
(pdovo^ denotes that passion which inly 
pi7ies at the sight of excellence or happi- 
ness.') Matt, xxvii. 18. Rom. i. 29, al. ; 
cpdouoL, envyings, ebullitions of envy. 
Gal. V. 21. 1 Pet. ii. 1, and Plato oft. ; 
elsewhere scarcely found in Class. 

^Qopa, as, 77, ((^0£i'pa),) a spoiling, 
corruption, destruction : 1 ) prop, by death, 
slaughter, 2 Pet. ii. 12, ^wa yEyEwnfiiva 
£is d\(jo(TLv Kal cpdopdu : also of mortality, 
mortal nature, Rom. viii. 21, dwo t^s 
SovXelu^ t^s (pdopd^. 1 Cor. xv. 42, 50. 
Sept. and Class. Fig. of spiritual death, 
the ruin consequent on sin, everlasting 
destruction, Gal. vi. 8. Col. ii. 22. 2) Jig. 
in a moral sense, corruptness, depravity, 
ivickedness, 2 Pet. i. 4, ev ETTLQvfxia <pdo- 
pas. ii. 12, Eu Trj (pd. avTcov. Wisd. xiv. 25. 

$id\?/, r]9, 77, a boivl, or deep dish. 
Rev. V. 8. XV. 7. xvi. 1. Sept. & Class. 

<[>t\ay a0os, ov, 6, 77, adj. (0tXos, 
dyadd^,) lit. ' loving good,' a lover of good- 
ness, upright. Tit. i. 8, and Class. 

^ iXadE\<pLa, as, 77, ((^tXd^fiX^os,) 
prop, brotherly love, as in Class. ; in N. T. 
only in the Christian sense, the mutual 
love of Christian brethren, Rom. xii. 10. 
1 Th. iv. 9, where see my notes. 

4> i\d^£A.0os, ov, o, J7, adj. ((^t\os, 
d^fX^os,) loving Okie's brethren ; in N. T. 
only in the Christian sense, ' loving each 
other as Christian brethren,' 1 Pet. iii. 8. 



^ L\avB po^, ov, 77, adj. {(piXo^, dmip,) 
loving one's husband. Tit. ii. 4, and Class. 

^ iXavd pwiria, a<3, tj, {(pLXdvOpoD- 
TTos,) philanthropy, love of man, equiv. to 
' benevolence, humanity,' Acts xxviii. 2. 
Tit. iii. 4, <p,Tov ^coT^pos 77/u. and Class. 

^ iXavd p to TT cos, adv. (^iXdy0p6o7ros,) 
humanely, kindly. Acts xxvii. 3, and Class. 

^iXapyvpia, as, 77, (^/Xdpyupos,) 
covetousness, 1 Tim. vi. 10, and Class. 

^iXapyvpo?, ou, o, 77, adj. (0i\os, 
dpyupos,) covetous, Lu. xvi. 14. 2 Tim. 
iii. 2, and Class. 

<I>i\au'Tos, ov, 6, 77, adj. (^tXos au- 
Tov,) self loving, selfish, 2 Tim. iii. 2, and 
Class. 

^>t\5to, f. 770-60, {(piXo^,) to love, trans. 
I. GENER. with acc. of pers. — to have 
affection for. Matt. x. 37, o (piXun/ iraTEpa 
v fxrjTEpa. John v. 20. xi. 3, 36. xv. 19. 
Tit. iii. 15. Of thing, to be fond of, to 
like, with acc. Matt, xxiii. 6, ^iXovaL 
Ti]v irpwTOKXLcriav. Lu. xx. 46. Rev. 
xxii. 15. With the idea of overweening 
fondness, 6 cpiXcov Tr]v y^v^riu avnrov, 
John xii. 25. Sept. and Class. — II. spec. 
to show one's love by a kiss ; hence, to kiss, 
with acc. Matt. xxvi. 48, dv av (piX^cra), 
auTos fcCTTt. Mk. xiv. 44. Lu. xxii. 47. 
Sept. and Class. — III. foil, by infin. to 
love to do any thing, to do it willingly, 
gladly, and by impl. to be ivont to do. Matt, 
vi. 5, (piXovcTLv Ev Tats cui/aycoyats 
7rpo(r£ux€<r0ai. Sept. and Class. 

^iXt], ri<3, 77, (prop. fem. of cpiXo^,) a 
female friend, Lu. xv. 9. Sept. and Class. 

^ lXyi^ovcs, ov, 6, 77, adj. {(ptXo?, 
fiSovf},) \it. pleasure-loving, subst. a lover 
of pleasure, 2 Tim. iii. 4, (piX^Sovoi /udX- 
Xov 7/ (piXodEOL. So Demophilus, <piXri- 
dovov Kal <PlX66eou tov avTov dSvvaTOV 
icTTL, and Philo, p. 333, 49, <pLXi]Souoi/ 
/uLaXXov rj (pLXoOiou. 

^ LXrinia, aTos, to, {(piXEU) II.) a kiss, 
as given in salutation, Lu. vii. 45, ^iXr]fxd 
fMOL ovK £^oo/cas. xxh. 48. Sept. Prov. 
xxvii. 6. Cant. i. 2, and Class, e. gr. Luc. 
Asin. 17, (piXvimacrLV ^cnrd^oi/To dA.X77- 
Xous, used of the sacred kiss given by 
Christians to each other as the token of 
mutual love, (piXyjiua ayuov, Rom. xvi. 
16. 1 Cor. xvi. 20. ^ 2 Cor. xiii. 12."^ 1 Th. 
V. 26. cpiX-njULa dydirr]^, 1 Pet. v. 14. 

^>tXta, as, 77, {(piXo^,) love, friendship, 
affection for, with gen. of object, Ja. iv. 
4, 77 (p. TOV KOG-fxov, Sept. and Class. 

$l\d0£OS, ov, 6, 77, {(piXo^, 0€OS,) 

prop. adj. loving God, pious ; subst. a lover 
of God, 2 Tim. iii. 4, (piX-ndovoL ludXXov 
77 (piXodEOL. Luc. Calumn. 14, Trpos toi; 

EVCTE^Tj Kal (plXodEOI/. 

^ iXoVELKLa, as, 77, {^(plXoVELKO^,)^ 



$ I A 



461 



^ O B 



prop, love of disputi/i(/, eager contention^ 
Thuc. i. 41 ; in N. T. gencr. quarrel, co?i- 
t€?itioii, strife^ Lu. xxii. 24, and Class. 

^ l\6v£iko9, ou, 6, 1?, adj. (<^i'/V.os, vel- 
Ko^,)/ond of strife, 1 Cor. xi. IG, & Class. 

^iXo^tvia, a<i, ((^iXo'^ti/o?,) love 
to strangers, hospitality, Rom. xii. 13. 
Heb. xiii. 2, and Class. 

^ i\6^zvo^, ou, 6, V, adj. {cpi\o<s, 
^£1/09,) lovi/ig strangers, hospitable, 1 Tim. 
iii. 2. Tit. i.'S. 1 Pet. iv. 9, and Class. 

<l> i X-OTTp 60T£ O 60, f. iVaUJ, {^(plXoTrpiJD- 

Tos, occ. in Artem. and Pint.) to love to 
he first, to affect pre-eminence, 3 John 9. 

<^t/\os, T], ov, adj. prop. pass. (i. e. for 
cpiXouiuLevu^,) loved, dear; also act. (for 
(piXcou) loving, friendly, kind; in N. T. 
siibst. 6 cpiXo^, a friend. Lit. vii. 6, 
£7rE/zi/A£ TTpos avTov — (piXovs. xi. 5, et 
al. saepiss. and Sept. and Class. In the 
sense of companion, associate. Matt. xi. 19, 
0. T&Xcovcou. Lu. vii. 34. John iii. 29, 6 (p. 
TOU vvfX(pLov^2i brideman, see in '!Svfx<pu)V. 
As a ^Yord of courteous address, Lu. xiv. 
10. Sept. Esth. V. 10. 

^LXoa'o<pLa, a?, J7, {(pLXoaocpia},) 
prop, love of tvisdom, then philosophy, ' a 
knowledge of things human and divine,' 
comp. ao<pLa IL ; in N. T. philosophy, i. e. 
the Jewish theolog}'- or theological learn- 
ing, pertaining to the interpretation of the 
Scriptures, and to the traditional law of 
ceremonial observances, Col. ii. 8. 

^ lX6<to<Po^, ou, 6, 37, adj. {(piXo^, 
<ro(pia,) prop, loving wisdom, then as 
subst. a philosopher, an inquirer after 
knowledge natural and moral, in things 
human and divine ; spoken in N. T. of 
the Epicurean and Stoic philosophers, who 
spent their time in inquiries and discussions 
respecting moral science. Acts xvii. 18. 

^ lX6<tto pyo^, ov, 6, V, adj.. (0i'Xo5, 
CTTopy^],) tenderly loving, kindly affection- 
ed, prop, towards one's kindred ; in N. T. 
towards Christian brethren, Rom. xii. 10. 

<^ lXot & KV09, ov, 6, v, adj. {(p'iXo9, 
tLkvov,) loving one's children. Tit. ii. 4. 

^ lXot L fxio fxai, f. -ncrofiaL, {(ptXo- 
Ti/xos, fr. (plXo^, Ttjurj,) depon. mid. or 
pass, to love honour, to be ambitious, and 
by impl. 'to exert oneself from motives of 
ambition since the combatants in the 
pursuits of human glory must be prepared 
to use tlie most strenuous exertions ; 
making it their maxim, in the words of 
Thuc, /LLi] (ptvynv TOV£ 7r6uov<s, ?} fxi-iok 
'ra§ Tt/xds oiuiKELu : to be ambitious of 
doing any thing, to exert oneself, to earn- 
estly strive, i. e. from a lore and sense of 
honour : so Jos. Ant. procem. § 3. xv. 9, 
5. ^1. Y. H. ix. 29. Xen. Mem. ii. 9, 5. 

In N. T. Rom. xv. 20, (pLXoTLfXOVfXEVOU 

£uayyiXLlE(rdaL. 2 Cor. v. 9. 1 Th. iv. 11, 



irapaKaXovuxsv vfxd'S (pLXoTLfxiiarQaL ('to 
earnestly strive') i^<xvxa'(>^'-v. 

^ lXo(P p ovu)^, adv. {cf)LX6(j)pu)v,) 
kindly, courteously, Actsxxviii. 7, Class. 

^ LX6d)p<jov, ovo^, b, 11, adj. (f/>i/\o9,) 
(ppi)v,) friendly-minded, kindly disposed, 
coiu'teous, 1 Pet. iii. 8, and Class. 

^Lfxouy, f. tocrw, {(pL/jid^,) to muzzle, 
trans. I. prop, of oxen muzzled while 
treading out grain, 1 Cor. ix. 9. 1 Tim. 
V. 18, ou (pLfxwaEL^ ^ovv aXovovra. — II. 
fig, to stop the mouth, put to silence, and 
pass, to be silenced, be silent, hold one''s 
peace. 1) said of persons, Matt. xxii. 34, 
IcpifxcocTE Toi/§ "EacS. 1 Pet. ii. 15. Jos. 
and lat. Class. Pass. Matt. xxii. 12. Hence 
it is applied to Christ's commanding an 
evil spirit 7iot to speak through the organs 
of a demoniac, Mk. i. 25, (pL/uLwdrirL. 2) 
of things, as winds and waves, pass, to be 
still, hushed, Mk. iv. 39, Tracplfxcocro. Jos. 
de Mace. § 2. 

^Xoy iXco, f. ta-u), (0\o^,) prop, and 
almost always in Class. & oft. in Sept. to 
inflame, set on fire ; in N. T. fig. to in- 
flame with passion, discord, or hatred ; said 
of the tongue, Ja. iii. 6, <pXoy. t6v rrpoxov. 

€>Xo^, yos, 77, ((pXiyw,) flame, Lu. 
xvi. 24, kv Ttj (pXoyi Tavrrj. So (pXd^ 
TTvpo?, a flame of fire, 'fiery flame,' Acts 
vii. 30. Rev. i. 14, al. kv irvpi cpXoyd?, 
2 Th. i. 8. Sept. and Class. Of lightning, 
Heb. i. 7, TTvpo^ (pXoya. Sept. & Class. 

^Xvaptu), f. 77(TCf), ((/)/Vuapos,) prop, as 
oft. in Class. ' to as it were overflow with 
talk,' =: to prate, to trifle, intrans. ; in N. T. 
trans, to prate about any one, 3 John 10, 
XoyoL^ Trouyjpol^ (pXvapCov f]pd^. 

^Xv apo£, ov, 6, V, adj. {cpXvu), Lat. 
fluo,) prop. overflx)icing, i. e. with talk ; 
hence subst. a prater, tattler, trifler, 
1 Tim. V. 13, and oft. in later Class. 

^ o^ B p o's, a, 6v, adj. {(pol^iio,) fear- 
ful, terrible, frightful, Heb. x. 27, (pofSspa 

Si TiS EKGOXV KOLCr&CO^. XQT. 31. Xli. 21. 

Sept. and Class. 

^o(3i(i3,t tjo-w, {<p6(3o<s,) prop, to put 
in fear, terrify, frighten ; but oftener, and 
in N. T., only mid. or pass. (po^iofxaL, 
aor. 1. pass. i(p0{3i}di]v, and fut. i. pass. 
<po(3i]dj]cro/j.aL often in mid. sense, prop. 
' to put one's self in fear,' = to fear, be 
afraid, terrified, either from fear simply, 
or from astonishment. I. prop, and 
GENER. in various constructions : 1 ) in- 
trans, and absol. Rom. xiii. 4, iav to 
KUKOv TToiri's, (pojSov I SO pi) <po(3ov, fear 
not, i\Ik. V. 36. /u?j (pof^E'Cade, vi. 50. 
i(po^ouvTO, X. 32. ^latt. xiv. 30. xvii. 6. 
Heb. xiii. 6. Foil, by acc. of a cogn. noun, 
1 Pet. iii. 14, tou cp6(iov avTwv /xij 
(po(3i]diiT£. ver. 6, fxt] (po(3. jxtidEfxiav 
'jrT6i](TLv : emphat. Mk. iv. 41, ecpo(37]6r]- 
X 3 



$ O B 



462 



OPE 



uav (po^ov fxtyav. 2) trans, with acc. : 
of pers. Matt. x. 26, /xr) (pofSyidtjTE av- 
T0U9. xiv. 5. John ix. 22. Rom. xiii. 3. 
Gal. ii. 12 : of thing, ^tarayjua, Heh. 
xi. 23, 27. Rev. ii. 10. 3) foil, by (xtto, 
lit. ' to fear from,' be afraid of any one, 
Matt. X. 28. Lu. xii. 4. 4) foil, by fij, 
lest. Acts xxvii. 17, <po(3. firj sh Trju 
^vpTLV EKiriarojarL : by /xrjTrws, ver. 29. 
2 Cor. xi. 3. Gal. iv. 11. 5) with inf. to 
fear to do any thing, ' to scruple, hesitate,' 
Matt. i. 20, /urj ^Oj8>j077s TrapaXaf^aTv 
MapidiuL, ii. 22. Mk. ix. 32.— II. mo- 
rally, to fear, =: to reverence, honour, 
with acc. 1) gener. Mk. vi. 20, kcpo^iiTo 
Tov '\wa.vvr]v, Eph. v. 33. 2) spec, toi/ 
0801/ or TOV K-vpLov cpo^s'iardaL, to fear 
God, to reverence, e. g. ' to stand in awe 
of God,' the punisher of wrong, so as not 
to do evil, Lu. xviii. 2, tov 0. ^rj (po(3ov- 
IULEV09. xxiii. 40. 1 Pet. ii. 17. Col. iii. 22: 
also, by Hebr., in the sense of religion, 
piety, — to worship God, Lu. i. 50, to 
eXscs avTov — T0I9 <po(3, avTov. Acts 
X. 2, 35. Rev. xi. 18 ; so ol (po^. tov 0. 
'proselytes,' Acts xiii. 16, 26, 

^ 6 (37]Tpov, ov, TO, {(pofSlu),) 'some- 
thing fearful,' a fearful sight, portent, Lu. 
xxi. 11, <p6lBr}Tpd T£ Kai a-rjuxs'La air 
ovp. Sept. 

^0/3 OS, ov, 6, ((pe(3ojULaL,) fear, terror, 
I. PROP, and GENER. Matt. xiv. 26, cl'tto 
TOV (p. EKpa^av. Lu. i. 12. ii. 9, al. 
cpofSoL, fears, 2 Cor. v. 11. 1 Tim. v. 

20, al. Foil, by gen. of the pers. or thing 
feared. Matt, xxviii. 4. John vii. 13, al. 
Meton. ' object of fear,' Rom. xiii. 3. 
Sept. and Class. ; with the idea of astonish- 
ment, Matt, xxviii. 8, julstcl (p6(3ov Kai 
yapa^ ^gyaXrjs. Mk. iv, 41. Lu. i. 65. 
V. 26, al. — II. IN A MORAL SENSE, reve- 
rence, honour, of persons, Rom. xiii. 7, too 
TOV <p6l3ov, TOV (p. Elsewh. of God or 
Christ, o (p. TOV 0£ou or Kvpiov, 2 Cor. 
V. 11, and sometimes impl. Jude 23. 
Intens. ev <p6(3(jp Kai iv Tpofxto, 1 Cor. 
ii. 3, al. and Sept. By Hebr. = religion, 
piety, 6 <p. tov Yivpiov, Acts ix. 31. 0£ou, 
Rom. iii. 18, and Class. 

^oLvif, LKo<s, 6, a palm-tree, John xii. 
13. Rev. vii. 9. Sept. 

^ovEv^, £C5)5, 6, {(povEvia,) a Murdcrcr, 
Matt. xxii. 7. Acts iii. 14, al. and Class. 

^ovEViti, Evcru), {(povo^,) to slay, to 
murder; absol. ov <Povev<tel^, Matt. v. 

21. Mk. X. 19, al. and Sept. Gener. 
Matt. V. 21. Ja. ii. 11. iv. 2. Foil, by 
acc. Matt. v. 6. Sept. and Class. 

$oyo9, ov, 6, (obsol, cpivu),) murder, 
Mk. XV. 7. Lu. xxiii. 19, al. Heb. xi. 37, 
£v (povw juaX'^t/oas. Plur. (povoi. Matt. 
XV. 19, al. Sept. and Class. 

^»op£a>, f. 770-0), (fr. iri(popa, old pret. 



mid. of (pip (JO,) to hear about, to wear, as 
dress or arms, trans. Matt. xi. 8, to. jma- 
XaKCL. John xix. 5. Rom. xiii. 4. James 
ii. 3, al. and Class. 

^opov, ov, TO, only in prop, name, 
'ATTTriov (popov, Appii Forum, Acts 
xxviii. 15. 

po^, ov, b, (cpEpco,) prop, 'what is 
brought or paid into the treasury of the 
state,' a taoe laid upon persons and their 
property annually, in distinction from te- 
Xo's, toll, levied on merchandise and tra- 
vellers, Lu. XX. 22. xxiii. 2. Rom. xiii. 6, 
cpopov^ teXelte. ver. 7, and so in Class. 

fS^opTiX^o), f. iVo), {cpopTo^,) prop, to 
burden, lay a burden upon any one ; in 
N. T. fig. of the burden of the Jewish 
law, Lu. xi. 46. Pass. part. Matt. xi. 28, 
TTECpopTLo-fxEvoL, ' yc who are oppressed 
by a sense of sin, and the burden of the 
law.' 

^opTLOv, ov, TO, ((p6pT09,) a burdcu: 
I. prop, of a ship's freight or cargo, Acts 
xxvii. 10, in lat. Edd.— II. fg. 1) of the 
burden of the law, Matt, xxiii. 4. Lu. xi. 
46 ; of the injunctions of Christ, Matt, 
xi. 30. 2) of the burden of one's sins, 
Gal. vi. 5. 

^>o/OTos, ov, 6, {cpipot},) a ship's freight 
or cargo, a burden. Acts xxvii, 10, text. rec. 

^payiXXiov, ov, to, a whip, John 
ii. 15. 

^pajEXXota, f. uiCTU}, {(ppaysXXLov,) 
to scourge, with acc. Matt, xxvii. 26, al. 

^ pay /mo?, ov, 6, {cppd(r<r(x),) a fence 
or hedge. Matt. xxi. 33. Mk. xii. 1. Luke 
xiv. 23, £ts Ta? 6doif9 Kai (ppayp.ov?, ' the 
narrow ways among the vineyards.' Plut. 
Cimon. 10, tmv dyp&v tovs <ppayixov's 
d(pElXEv. Xen. Venat. xi. 4, and Sept. 
Fig. Eph. ii. 14, see in Mectotolxov. 

^pdX^ui, f. do- CO, prop, to say, speak, 
tell ; in N. T. to explain, Ti]v TrapajSoXrjv, 
Matt. xiii. 36. xv. 15. Sept. and Class. 

^pd(r<TOD, f. fo), prop, to enclose with a 
fence, also 'close up,' as a defile, with 
troops. Hence said of the ears, to stop. In 
N. T. only of the mouth, (ppdcra-ELV to 
cTTonia : 1) PROP, of wild beasts, Heb. 

xi. 33, E(ppa^av CTO/uara A.gofTwz/, ' ren- 
dered them harmless ;'' so M. Antonin. 

xii. 1, E<ppa^E TO aToixa tov Xeovto?. 
2) FIG. to silence, Rom. iii. 19, 'Iva ttuv 
arTOfxa cppay^. 2 Cor. xi. 10, and Class. 

(ppEap, aT09, TO, prop, a well or pit, 
for water, and thus prop, distinguished 
from Trjjyt;, Lu. xiv. 5. John iv. 11, to 
(jyp. ECTTL i^adv. ver. 12. Sept. Jos. and 
Class. Fig. of the pit in Hades, ' the bot- 
tomless pit,' Rev. ix. 1, 2. 

^ pEV aTT aT dw, f. tjcc*), [cppi^v, dira- 
Tao),) to deceive, Gal. vi. 3, kavTov cp. 



$ PE 



463 



4> Y A 



4> p £ 1/ a -TT a T ?j s, ou, o, a deceiver^ Tit. 
i. 10. 

<I>p);z/, £1/0 s, prop, ^//e diaphragm, 
midriff'. Hence, as the supposed seat of 
mental emotions, usually and in N. T. 
metoa. the viind., the soul., including the 
intellect, disposition, feelings, &c. 1 Cor. 
xiv. 20. Sept. and Class. 

^pio-co), f. Jo), (c/)p£f,) to he roughs 
rising up in bristling points, to bristle., as a 
field with ears of grain. Spec, of hair, &c. 
to bristle ; in N. T. of persons, to shudder^ 
to quake., from terror, when the ' hair 
stands on end,' intrans. Ja. ii. 19, to. 6ai- 
fxovia — (fypLa-croucn. Sept. and Class. 

^poytw, f. vaio., (</)pT/V,) prop, to 
think., i. e. to ' have the use of, and to exer- 
cise the mind,' hut usually TO mind, or to 
BE MINDED, hcive in mind., said generally 
of any emotion of the mind ; in N. T. I. 
gener. to think., to mean., be of opinion, foil, 
by acc. of thing implying manner of think- 
ing. Acts xxviii. 22, a/coDcrat a cppov&l's. 
Rom. xii. 3, Trap' d del (ppovEiv. 1 Cor. 
iv. 6. Gal. V. 10. Phil. i. 7 : with adv. 
1 Cor. xiii. 11. Rom. xii. 3, (ppovETv sh 
TO (ra)(ppovE'£i>. — II. With especial refer- 
ence to the mind as acted on by the affec- 
tions, to be minded, to think., with acc. 1) 
2fener. Phil. ii. 5, tovto cfjpovELadto iv 
v/uLLV, b Kal kv Xp. 'I. iii. 15. Rom. xii. 
16, TO. vxl/tiXa (ppouilv., and to avTo or 
TO ev (ppovi.LV., ' to be of one mind,' ' to 
cultivate unanimity and concord.' 2) also 
in the phrase (ppovsTv to. Tiyos, (scil. 
TTpay/xctTa,) which, while in Class, it sig- 
nif. ' to take part with any one,' in N. T. 
means to care for., be devoted to, &c. 
Matt. xvi. 23, ou cppovsT^ to. tov G. 
Rom. viii. 5. Phil. iii. 19. Col. iii. 2, Ta 
avu). — III. to mind., care for., with virip 
Tti/os, Phil. iv. 10 : of time, to regard., 
keep^ Tr\v vfxipav., Rom. xiv. 6. 

^ povrifxa^ arcs., to, {(ppovio).,) prop, 
'what one has in mind,' thought., feeling., 
2vill, Rom. viii. 27, oT<5£ tl to (pp. tov 
UvevfxaTo?. ver. 6, 7, to (ppovriitxa tt}^ 

(rapKOI., = TO (ppOVBLV TO. Trj<5 (TapKO'S. 

^poi/rjcris, £60?, {(ppovico.,) mind., 
thouglit: 1) mode of thinking and feeling, 
Lu. i. 17, kv (ppovncrsL diKaicov. 2) un- 
derstanding, prudence, Eph. i. 8, (ro(pLa 
Kal (ppovvcTEL. Sept. and Class. 

^povL iuLO£, ov, adj. {(ppovico,) prop. 
' being in the possession of one's senses,' 
also ' having a sound understanding,' pru- 
dent, wise, Matt. vii. 24, uvopl (pp. x. 16. 
xxiv. 45. xxv. 2. Rom. xii. 16. 1 Cor. iv. 
10. Sept. and Class. 

^ pov L fjLco^, adv. {(pp6vLjUi09,) pru- 
dently, wisely, Lu. xvi. 8, and Class. 

<J>po2/Tt^a), f. iVco, (^poi/Tis,) to he 
thoughtful for^ take care to do any thing, 



Tit. iii. 8, h>a (ppovTiX^cocrL kuXcov 'ipywv 
irpotarTaadaL. Sept. and Class. 

^ pov p tco, f. tjaa), {(ppovpo?,) prop, to 
watch, be on guard ; in N. T. and gener. 
foil, by acc. to watch, guard, keep any per- 
son or thing : I. prop, said of a military 
watch over a place, 2 Cor. xi, 32, o 
kQvapx*]^ — k(ppoupEL tyiv ttoXlv ; also of 
a civil watch over a prisoner. Gal. iii. 23, 
and Class. — II. fig. to keep, preserve in 
any state, Phil. iv. 7, Tcts KapSia^ vfxCov 
kv Xp. 'I. Pass. 1 Pet. i. 5, iv dwdfist 
Ssou. 

(ppva<T(7a), f. fo), in Class, only de- 
pon. mid. (ppva(xcrofxaL, to rage., prop, of 
animals ; also of persons acting with fury 
and insolence. In N. T. by a metaphor 
taken from the snorting and other sounds 
of impatience and rage, emitted by high- 
mettled steeds, and therefore applicable 
to violent and headstrong men, to rage, 
' tumultuate,' intrans. Acts iv. 25, iva.Ti 
k(ppva^av 'idvY\ ; 

^ pv y avov, ov, to, {(ppvyoi,) a dry 
stick or dry brushwood, Acts xxviii. 3, 
(ppvydvcov TrXrjdo?. Sept. and Class, as 
Xen. An. iv. 3, 11, (ppvyava cvWiyov- 

T£S 605 ETTt 'TTVp. 

^vyt], 7J9, 77, {(ptvyct),) fight. Matt, 
xxiv. 20. Mk. xiii. 18. Sept. and Class. 

^vXaKf], ^s, 77, (^uXao-troo,) gener. a 
ivatch, guard : I. prop. ' the act of keeping 
watch,' or guarding, Lu. ii. 8, (pvXdcr- 
aovTE^ (pvXaKa^, and Class.- — II. meton. 
of persons set to watch, a luatch^ gua7^ds. 
Acts xii. 10, SleXOovte's TrpwTiiv (pvX. — 
III. meton. the place where watch is kept : 
1) tvatch-post, station; fig. statio7i or haunt. 
Rev. xviii. 2. 2) of the place where any 
one is watched or guarded, ward, custody, 
a prison, gener. Matt. v. 25, eU (pvXaKtjv 
(^Xi^dnary. xiv. 3. Lu. xxi. 12. xxii. 33. 
John iii'. 24. Acts v. 19, oft. In the 
sense of imprisonment, 2 Cor. vi. 5. xi. 
23. Heb. xi. 36. Sept. and Class. Fig. of 
the bottomless pit, as the prison of demons 
and the souls of wicked men, 1 Pet. iii. 
19. Rev. XX. 7. 3) meton. of time, a 
luatch or division of the night, during 
which one watch of soldiers kept guard, 
Lu. xii. 38, kv T77 Sevt&pcc (p. Kai kv tt? 
TpLTTj (p. Matt. xiv. 25. xxiv. 43. 

^vXaKiX^u), f. tea), {(pvXaKrj,) to put 
in ward, imprison. Acts xxii. 19, (pvXaKi- 
Jwi/. Wisd. xviii. 4. Act. Thom. § 45. 

^>U/\.a/CT77ptOI/, ou, TO, {(pvXaKTtjp,) 

prop, a ivatch-post, guard-house or fort, fig. 
protection, safe-guard ; hence, meton. an 
amulet, any thing worn about the neck, (&c. 
as a protection against any harm, corporeal 
or mental. Hence in N. T. plur. tce 
: (pvXaKTi']pLa, lit. 'prayer-fillets,' strips of 
, parchfcent, inscribed with various sen- 
^ X 4 



<|) Y A 



464 



fences of the Mosaic law, which the Jews 
bind around the forehead and left wrist 
while at prayer, Matt, xxiii. 5, TrXaTv- 
vovcTL dk TO. (puXaKTy^pia. 

4> u\a^, a/co9, 6, {(pvXacrcru},) a keeper, 
guardian. Acts v. 23. xii. 6, 19. Sept. 
and Class. 

^uXaorcrco, f. Jco, prop, to icatch, i. e. 
' to wake,' ' to keep awake also, to keep 
watch by night. In N. T. I. prop, and 
INTRANS. to icatch, keep icatch, with acc. 
of the cogn. noun, Lu. ii. 8, (pvXdcrcrov- 
T£9 (pvXaKd-s. — 11. PROP, and trans. 
with acc. to zcatch, guard, keep, 1) per- 
sons or things from escape or violence, 
Lu. viii. 29, k^EcrfxiiTo — cpvXaa-a-o/uLEvo^. 
Acts xii. 4, (p. avrov. Sept. and Class. 
Lu. xi. 21, acc. tl. Acts xxii. 20, to. 
LfxaTLa. Sept. and Class. 2) of persons 
or things kept in safety, to keep, preserve, 
e. g. persons, John xvii. 12, oi}§ oa'oto/ca? 
fxoL k(pvXa^a. 2 Pet. ii. 5. Jude 24. 
2 Th. iii. 3, and Sept. ; things, John 
xii. 25. 1 Tim. vi. 20. 2 Tim. i. 12, 14. 
Sept. 3) mid. to keep oneself from, or as 
to any thing, he on one's guard, rz to be- 
icare of, avoid ; e. g. with diro tivo's, 
Xen. Cyr. ii. 3, 9. once reflex. 1 John v. 
21, (pvXd^aTE kavTov's uTrd twu s'lom- 
Xcou. mid. Lu, xii. 15, cpdre kul (pvXda- 
crscds OTTO T779 TrXsovE^La^, Mid. with 
acc. to guard against, beware of, Acts xxi. 
25. 2 Tim. iv. 15, bu kul crv cpuXdcrcTov. 
Jos. and Class. ; ifoll. by 'iua jxr], 2 Pet. 
iii. 17. — III. FIG. to keep or observe pre- 
cepts, laws, &c. with acc. Lu. xi. 28, al. ; 
mid. TrdvTa TavTct kcp. Matt. xix. 20. 
Sept. and Class. 

^vXt], 77§, 77, {(pvXov,) a tribe, prim, a 
race, kindred: in N. T. I. prop. (pvXov,a 
nation or people, as descended from a com- 
mon ancestor. Matt. xxiv. 30, irda-aL al 
(p. T?79 777?. Rev. i. 7. V. 9. vii. 9. xi. 9, 
al. and Sept. — II. spec, a tribe, said of the 
tribes of Israel, Matt. xix. 28 ; and Lu. 
xxii. 30, KpLvovTs^ Ta9 owdsKa (pvXd^ 
Tou 'larp. ii. 36, al. and Sept. oft. 

^vXXov, ov, TO, {fpvco,) a leaf; in 
N. T. only plur. cpvXXu, leaves, foliage, 
Matt. xxi. 19, al. Sept. & Class. 

pdfJLa, aTo<s, to, {(pvpdco, to mix 
by stirring or kneading,) lit. a kneaded 
mass, and gener. a mass, lump ; e. gr. of 
potter s clay prepared for moulding, Rom. 
ix. 21. So' a mass of dough, 1 Cor. v. 6. 
Gal. V. 9, oXov TO (p. \vfxol, proverb., see 
in Zvfiri : fig. Rom. xi. 16, si ok dirap- 
yj] dyia, Kal to cpvpa/xa. 1 Cor. v. 7, 
viov 0. 'a Tieic-mRde mass of dough, be- 
fore the leaven is put in.' Sept. & Class. 

^v(TLKd<3, 71, 6v, adj. {(pu<TL9,) prop. 
physical, natural, produced by nature. In 
N. T, natural, according to natur^ n <p- 



Xyo^<Tts, Rom. i. 26, 27. So Arr. Epict. 
ii. 20, 6, (pvaLKT] KOLUcovia dudpoDirtav 
Trpd^ aA.XrjX.ous : of beasts, aXoya ^wa, 
(pvcriKa, 'following their natural bent/ 
sensual, 2 Pet. ii. 12. 

<r LKco's, adv. ((pua-LKos,) physically^ 
naturally, from or by nature, Jude 10, ocra 
ok (puaLKco^, cos Toc dXoya X^doa, kiri- 
cTTavTai, ' by the natural senses.' Diog. 
Laert. x. 137, (pu(TLK(jo<s /cat X'^P'-^ Xoyov. 

^v(tl6(x), f. cJcro), in N. T. equiv. to 
(pvado), {(pvcra,) which means prop, to 
bloiv, puff, or pant ; and also to blow up, 
inflate, both prop, and fig. In V,. T. 
(pvo-Lou), fig. to puff up, inflate with pride 
and vanity, absol. 1 Cor. viii. 1, 77 yvuxri? 
(pvo-Lo'i. So Plut. de Educ. ost ck ab- 
Tous fxy]ok ToTs kyKwiuioL^ (pvcnovv, and 
Philo, (pva-}i(Tct£ T<Z Xoyu). Pass, or mid. 
1 Cor, iv.^18, 19.^ V. 2. xiii. 4. So^Plut. 
vi. 253, vTTQ T^s Tu)(7js (pvaw/xivovs : 
and so in Lat. 'inflare aliquem.' virip 
TLvo<s, 1 Cor. iv. 6. utto' tlvo<5. Col. ii. 18. 

^>ucris, f6os, 17, [(pvo),) nature: I. 'na- 
tural source or origin,' generation, birth, 
descent. Gal. ii. 15, -jj/xgis (puasL 'louoatoi. 
Rom. ii. 27, 77 EK (pva-Eco^, and so oft. in 
Class. (pvaEL and KUTa (pixTLv. — II. a na- 
ture, as generated or produced, a genus^ 
kind, Ja. iii. 7, 7rao-a <p. ^tipitjov — csod- 
fxacTTaL Trj (p. Trj dvOpcoTrivrj. Gal. iv. 8, 
Tots fxri (pvcTEL ovcTL ^'soTs. Comp. 1 Cor. 
viii. 5. — III. the nature of any person or 
thing, the natural constitution, the innate 
disposition, qualities, &c. 1) of persons, in 
a moral sense, denoting the native mode of 
thinking, unenlightened by the influence 
of Divine truth, Eph. ii. 3, TEKva cpvcr&t 
6pyri<5. Rom, ii. 14; by analogy, of the 
Divine nature, 2 Pet, i. 4, ^elu^ kolvcovoI 
(pu(TEUi<s, see my note. Spec, a native 
seiise of propriety, 1 Cor. xi. 14, 77 ohok 
auTi) 77 <p. OLoda-KEL vfxd's — ; 2) gener. 
equiv. to the nature of things, the order 
and constitution of nature, Acara (pvaiv^ 
'natural,' Rom. xi. 21, 24. irapd (pvcriv^ 
' unnatural,' i. 26. xi. 24, and Class. 

^V(TLU><TL^, £609, 77, {<pV(rL6(xy,) « puff- 

ing up, fig. with pride, 2 Cor. xii. 20. 

$uT£i'a, as, 77, (</)ifT£uoo,) in Sept. 
and Class, a planting. In N. T. a plants 
fig. Matt. XV. 13 ; and so Psalt. Sal. xiv. 3. 

$UT£UdO, f. E\)<JU3, {(pVTOV, (pVCO,) tO 

plant, trans. Matt. xxi. 33, icpvTEVcrEV 
dfxiTEXoova. 1 Cor. ix. 7. (tvktjv, Lu. xiii. 
6 ; absol. xvii. 28. pass. ver. 6. Sept. and 
Class. Fig. Matt. xv. 13. 1 Cor. iii. 6, sqq. 

<J>u6o, f. (pva-o), to generate, produce, as 
plants, &c. ; also of persons, to beget, bear. 
Pass, (pvofiai, also act. aor. 2. 'icpvv, and 
perf. -rricpvKa. as intrans. to be generated, 
produced, to spring up, groiu, as plants, 
, &c. ; also of persons, to he horn^ to grow 



465 



0 122 



MjD, to he hy ?iature : in N. T. 1 ) pass. aor. 

2. E<pvr]if, part. cpvtU, to spring up or /yro?r, 
as a plant, Lu. viii. b\ /cat ^utf i^j/paV^?;. 
ver. 8. 2) act. intrans. io spring or 
(/ro?t> up^ Heb. xii. 15, jOi^a TriKpia^ avou 
cpvovaa. 

$co\£o9, ou, o, a 7io/e, burrow^ of ani- 
mals, Matt. viii. 20. Lu. ix. 58, and Class. 

^covico^ f. ^(Tw, ((^o)!/?;,) sound^ to 
utter a soimd^ voice^ or c;*^. I. prop, and 
absol. 1 ) of animals, e. gr. a cock, to 
croiv^ Matt. xxvi. 34, 74, 75. Sept. and 
Class. 2) of persons, to cry out^ cvclaim^ 
Lu. viii. 8. Acts x. 18, al. ; so with dat. 
of cogn. noun, (pcoi/y'iora? cpwi/rj fxtyaXr}^ 
Lu. xxiii. 46. Rev. xiv. 18. — II. trans, to 
cry or call to any one, — to speak to^ ad- 
dress^ call, with acc. 1) gener. with the 
words spoken, as a title, &c. — to call^ 
name, John xiii. 13, u/^sts cpcovElTe juLE, 'O 
OLodcTKaXo^, K.T.X. 2) spec, implying in- 
vitation to approach, to call for. Matt. xx. 
32, k<pu)vi]<r(.v avTov9. Mk. iii. 31. John i. 
49, al. ; with dat. auTO), Lu. xix. 15 ; foil, 
by £/c, to call one out of any place, John 
xii. 17; also to invite to a feast, Lu. xiv. 
12 ; to call out to any one for help, Matt, 
xxvii. 47. 

^(livh-) ri<s, 77, a sound^ as uttered, I. 
GENER. as used of things ; e. gr. a trum- 
pet, or other instrument, Matt. xxiv. 31. 

1 Cor. xiv. 7, 8; of the wind, John iii. 8. 
Acts ii.' 6; of rustling wings, chariots, 
waters, &c. Rev. ix. 9. xiv. 2. xviii. 22. 
xix. 6 ; of thunder, iv. 5. vi. 1. viii. 5. 
xix. 6. cpoDvr) piifxaTuw^ Heb. xii. 19. — 
II. SPEC, a voice, cry, said of persons : 
1) prop, and gener. as in phrases, with 
verbs of speaking, &c. (pcovy fXEydXri^ 
Mk. v,7. XV. 34, oft. Lu. xvii. 15. Rev. 
xiv. 15. So CKpLEvaL (pcovi^v fxeydXt]!/^ 
Mk. XV. 37; atpEiv or iTralpsLU 0a)2/r/i/, 
'to cry aloud,' Acts iv. 24. xiv. 11. Lu. 
xxiii. 23, ettIkelvto cjyoouaL^ fxsydXaL^. 
Also uKovELv (f}(jovT^v OT (pcovY}^^ ' to hear 
a voice.' Acts ix. 4, 7. xxii. 14 ; with £«:, 

2 Pet. i. 18. Rev. i. 10. ix. 13. Sept. 
and Class. With gen. of pers. Matt. iii. 

3, (p. jSoCovTO's Ev Tfj kprifxio. John v. 25. 
Acts xii. 14. Rev. xix. 1, (p\ oxXov. Sept. 
and Class. ; so of song, with gen. cp. Kida- 
ptoduiv, xviii, 22. <p. vv/uL(pLov Kal vvfxcpr]<i, 
ver. 23 ; of salutation, Lu. i. 44. To the 
voice, as the instrument of speech, is some- 
times ascribed that which strictly applies 
only to the person; thus ukovelv nrt]^ 0. 
TLvo^, ' to hear (and obey) one's voice,' 
i. e. to obey the person himself, John x. 

16, 27. Heb. iii. 7, and Sept, in Gen. iii. 

17, al. Fig, Gal. iv. 20, aXXd^ai n-qv <p. 
fxovy ' to change my tone,' to speak in a 
different manner. 2) meton. ' what is ut- 
tered by the voice,' a word, or saying^ 
Acts xiii. 27, ras (p. toou Trpocprjruif;. xxiv. 



21, and Class. 3) meton. 'manner of 
speaking,' speech, language, dialect, 1 Cor, 
xiv. 10, Tocruvnra yivt] (pcovuiu iv icoafxijo, 
ver. 11, and Class, as ipcovi] 'E\Xrjyt/07. 

^60 9, (1)(jot6<s, to, (contr. for cpdo^, fr. 
cpdu),) light, prop, with the idea of shining. 
1. PROP, and GENER. 1) of light in itself, 
2 Cor. iv, 6, 6 eittwi/ ek c-k6tov<s </)ws 
XdiuL\lraL. Matt.xvii.2, Xf f/caa)?To</>. Sept. 
and Class. 2) as emitted from a luminous 
body ; e. g. a lamp, (pea's Xvxvov, Lu. viii. 
16. Rev. xviii. 23; the sun, cpco^ r]XLov,xx\\. 
5. Sept. & Class. 3) of daylight, day, John 
xi. 9, 10, iii, 20, 6 (pavXa irpdora-cov plcteT 
TO cp. ver. 21; ev tw (p. Mn the light,' 
openly, opp. to ev tFi a-KOTia, Matt. x. 
27. Lu. xii. 3. Eph.' V. 13. ' 4) of the 
dazzling light which surrounds the throne 
of God, 1 Tim. vi. 16. Rev, xxi. 24 ; also 
as encircling those who dwell with or come 
from God, Acts ix. 3, ^cos a-Tro tou ovp, 
Comp. ver 5. xii. 7. xxii. 6, 9, 11. 2 Cor. 
xi. 14. Col, i, 12, 6 KXfjpo<s tcou dyicov 
EV Tw (p, — II, METON. a light, a luminous 
body, 1 ) a lamp or torch, Acts xvi. 29, 
air^aa^ (pdoTa. Sept. and Class. 2) a 
fire^ (for irvp, by a Hebr. idiom oft. found 
in Sept.) Mk. xiv. 54, ^EpfxaivofxEvo^ 
'Trp6<s TO cp. Lu. xxii. 56. Sept. and Class. 
3) of the heavenly luminaries, the sun, 
moon, and stars, Ja. i, 17, diro tov Tia- 
Tpos T(Zv cp. Sept, and Class, 4) fig. to 
cp. To EV cot, 1. e. tlie mind or conscience.^ 
corresp. to 6 Xv^vo^ and 6 ocpQaXfxd^., 
Matt. vi. 23. Lu. xi. 35,— III. fig. light, 
that moral and spiritual light of know- 
ledge, which enlightens the mind and soul ; 
including also the idea of moral goodness, 
purity, and holiness, opp. to aKOTia or 
c/coTos. 1) gener. as said of that clear 
knowledge of God and spiritual things 
which is by St. John ( 1 Epist. ) expressively 
termed 'the true light,'' John iii. 19. viii. 
12, TO cp. T?7s ^corjs. Rom. xiii. 12. 2 Cor. 
vi. 14, Eph. V. 9. 1 John ii. 8; ol viol 
TOV cp. i. e. ' those who walk in this light,' 
Lu, xvi. 8. John xii. 36. So ev tco cp. 
eIvul, pLEVELv., 1 Johu ii. 9, 10. As ex- 
hibited in the life and teaching of any one; 
Matt. V. 16. John V. 35. So where the idea of 
holiness predominates; as of God and those 
conformed to him, 1 John i. 5, 6 0£os 
£o-Tt. ver. 7. 1 Pet. ii, 9, where see 
my note. Matt. iv. 16. Acts xxvi. 23. 
2) meton. a light, equiv. to 'the author or 
dispenser of moral and spiritual light,' 
gener. Rom. ii. 19, cpu)9 twv ev ctkotel. 
Of apostles. Matt. v. 14. Acts xiii. 47. 
Espec. of the Messiah, ' who brought life 
and immortality to light in his Gospel,' 
Lu, ii. 32, cpui^ £i9 cnroKuXv^lnv iOvoov. 
John i. 4, 5, 7, 8, 9. iii. 19. viii. 12. ix. 5. 

^ (JO cTTTi p, 77po9, o, {cpu)^,) lit. ' a light- 
giver,' in Class, a ivindoiv ; in N. T. a 
X 5 



466 



X A A 



lights luminary, Phil. ii. 15, (palvEdds tos 
(p. iu Kocr/jLui, with allusion to the sun, 
moon, and stars. So in Sept. of the hea- 
venly luminaries. Gen. i. 14, 16. Meton. 
brightness^ shining, spoken of the Divine 
glory, Rev. xxi. 1 1. 

^ (aa (p 6 po^^ oi>, 6, 77, adj. (<^a>s, 
(pipo)^) lit. light-bringing, shining, radiant, 
as said of the heavenly luminaries. In 
N. T. suhst. 6 (pu)ar(p6po9, Lucifer, which 
prop, is the name of the morning star ; so 
Pint, de Plac. Phil. ii. 15 ; emblematic of the 
dawn of spiritual light and happiness upon 
the benighted soul of corrupt man, 2 Pet. 
i. 19, k'ojs (l)(x)a<p6po<s di/aTeiXy kv fC.T.A.. 

^(jDTBLvo^, 6v, adj. (<|)ais,) prop. 
light-giving, shining, bright. Matt. xvii. 5, 
vEcfyiXf} <pcorEivih Fig. of the body, full 
of light. Matt. vi. 22. Lu. xi. 34, 36. 

^(jo tlX^o), f. iCTO), ((po)^,) to lighten, I. 
INTRANS. to give light, to shine. Rev. xxii. 

5, KupiOS 6 0£OS (pCOTLEl ETt' aVT0V9. 

Sept. and Apocr. — II. trans, to give light 
to, shine upon, enlighte?i : 1) prop. Lu. 
xi. 36, cos oTav 6 Xv^vo^ Trj daTpair^ 
(ptoTi'^EL (TE. Rev. xxi. 23. Pass. Rev. 
xviiio 1. Sept. and Class. 2) fg. with acc. 
of pers. to enlighten, ' impart spiritual light 
to any one,' John i. 9, S {(pu)^) cPmtlX^el 
iravTa avOp. Pass. Eph. i. 18. Heb. vi. 4. 
X. 32, and Sept. Hence used in the sense 
of, though more significant than, didd- 
ciK£/.i/, Eph. iii. 9, (pcoTLcraLTrdvTa?, tU rj 
oiKouojULLa, K.T.X. Sept. & Class. 3) with 
acc. of thing, to bring to light, make known, 
1 Cor. iv. 5, 09 Kal (pwriaEi Ta KpuivTa 
Tov cTKOTOvs. 2 Tim. i. 10, cpcoTLoravTO^ 
^E Ja)7>, /c.T.X. So Arr. Epict. i. 4, 31, 
Ti]u dXriQELav. 

^ WT Lcr jULo^, ov, 6, {(poDTL^o),) prop. a 
giving light, shining ; in N. T. fig. of 
spiritual illumination, 2 Cor. iv. 4, €ts to 
fxi] avydoraL tov (p. tov EvayyEXiov. 



X. 

Xaipu},{. xctpJ^o-o), to rejoice, be glad, 
intrans. 1. prop, in various constructions: 
1) absol. Matt. v. 12, x«^/0€T£ /cat dyaX- 
Xida-ds. Lu. vi. 23, al. ssepiss. Part. 
ptov, 2 Cor. vi. 10, uel dk ^aipovTE's. 
Joined with another verb or partic, part. 
Xaipwv, = joyfidly, gladly ; as Col. ii. 5, 
Xaiptou Kal pXiircov, 'joyfully behold- 
ing.' LUo XV. 5. xix. 6, vTTEbi^aTO avTov 
Xalpcov. ver. 37, al. Sept. and Class. 2) 
zvith the cogn. noun x«P"? ®- S^- 
intens. Matt. ii. 10, E)(dp'*](Tav ^J^pdv fXE- 
ydX7]v. So Sept. Jon. iv. 6. In the dat. 
John iii. 29, xapa )(aif)€t. intens. 1 Th. 
iii. 9. 3) with dat. of cause, i. e. of that 
in or over which one rejoices, (an usual 
Or. construction,) Rom. xii. 12, Ty kXTridt 



XaipovTE^. 4) with acc. of cause, Phil, 
ii. 18, TO S' avTo Kal vp.EL<s xaipETE. 
Rom. xvi. 19, and so in Class. 5) with a 
particip. in nom. expressing the occasion 
of joy, (a freq. construction in Class.) Mk. 
xiv. 11, aKovcravTE^ kxap'ii(Tav. John xx. 
20. Phil. ii. 28. 6) with otl, marking 
cause or occasion, that, because, Lu. x. 20, 

)^«tp£T£ ^£, OTL Ta OVO/ULaTU K,T.X. Johu 

xiv. 28. Acts V. 41, al. saepe. 7) with 
prepositions expressing the cause of joy; 
e. gr. Matt, xviii. 13. Lu. i. 14, al. Sept. 
and Class. Phil. i. 18, bis, kv tovtw 
Xaipu) Kol xapvo-ofxai. Col. i. 24. Also, 
kv jLvpiw xaipELv, to rejoice in the Lord,' 
i. e. in communion with him, Phil. iii. 1. 
iv. 4. 1 Th. iii. 9. Sl^ vfxd^ otl, John xi. 
15. Foil, by drro with gen. 2 Cor. ii. 3. 
— II. in imperat. and infin. as a form of 
salutation or greeting. 1) imperat. 
XaipETE, prop, joy to thee I hail ! Matt, 
xxvi. 49, x«tp£,'P«/3i3t. xxvii. 29, x^^P^^ 
6 ^uo-lXev^. xxviii. 9, x^^P^^^-> ^i^^® ^at. 
' Caesar, ave.' Mk. xv. 18. Ln. i. 28, al. 2) 
i?ijin. )(«i/0£i2/, prop, fully Xiyuy )(at^€ii', 
'to wish joy,' to salute, 2 John 10, 11. 
Absol. X'^'-P^^^-) l^ ^^^-^ greeting, at the 
beginning of an epistle. Acts xv. 23. xxiii. 
26. Ja. i. 1. Sept. and Class. 

XdXaJa, as, 77, hail. Rev. viii, 7. xi. 
19. xvi. 21. Sept. and Class. 

XaXao), f. acro), aor. 1. pass, kx^^^' 
Qr]v, to let go, relax, also to loosen, Ta 
L<TTLa, Sept. Is. xxxiii. 23. In N. T. 
let down, lower, trans. Matt. ii. 4, x^^^^^ 
TOV Kpd^(3aTOv. Lu. V. 4, Ta diKTva. 
ver. 5. Acts ix. 25, al. Pass. 2 Cor. xi. 33. 
Sept. and Class. 

XaXfTTos, 77, oz/, adj. The etymol. of 
this word is very uncertain, and it is pro- 
bably of northern or Sanscrit origin ; but, 
judging from its various uses, its prim, 
signif. seems to have been hard to the 
touch, as opposed to fxaXaKo? ; whence 
fig. hard or difficult, as said both of 
things, ' hard to bear,' whence noxious, 
'prejudicial,' and of persons, harsh, {diffii- 
cilis,) ' hard to be borne with,' morose, 
&c. In N. T. it is used 1) of things, 
hard to be borne, burdensome, perilous, 
connected with toil, suflPering, peril, 2 Tim. 
iii. 1, KaLpol x«X£'^oi' '2 Mace. iv. 16, 
XaXETTt] TrspiorTacri^. Xen. An. iii. 2, 2, 
XaXETrd fXEV Ta irapovTa, and elsewhei*e, 
Ta x^tXE'Trd. 2) of persons, as demoniacs, 
fierce, furious. Matt. viii. 28, x^Xettol, 
the nearest approach to which in Class, 
usage is the signif. hard, ste?'n, scevus, cru- 
delis; also furious, as said of a person who, 
in a paroxysm of anger, acts like a wild 
beast just broke loose from his chains. 

HaXLvaywykw, f. ricroj, {x^Xivo^, 
ayo),) prop, 'to lead, guide, or govern, 
with a bit lience to rein in, to bridle, i. e. 



X A A 



467 



X AP 



check, and fig. moderate, restrain, with acc. 
Ja. i, 2G, jU?/ X"'^- yA'^'fo'"'^ auTov. in. 2, 
oXof TO crcofxa. Liu'. T> rami. 4, -ras t/^o- 
i;toi' o/0£^£is X^/Xii/aycoyf ii'. lie Saltat. 70. 

Ja. iii. 3, tCou 'L-mriov tov<s X^^- 
<TTo/iaTa /3a/\\ou£v. So Sept. Philo do 
Agric. p. 201, yaXLvov's kfx^uXouTt'i, and 
elsewhere in Class. Rev. xiv. 20, axP^ 
Tu)V yoX* 

Xd\K£09, t'a, £01/, contr, x^^'^o^^i ^i 
oi5z/, adj. {xaXKo?,) of copper or 6ms5, 
brazen^ Rev. ix. 20. Sept. and Class. 

Xa\K:£U5, teas, o, (xaX'v'o?,) piop. a 
brazier, copper-smith ; and gener. a walker 
in metals, a smith, 2 Tim. iv. 14, 6 X"^~ 
K£us. Sept. and Class. 

Xa\Kr\6 Mv, oyos. 6, chalcedony, a gem 
inchiding several varieties, one of w'hich 
is the modern carnelian. Rev. xxi. 19 ; 
later edit. Kapx^l^(^i^-> carbuncle. 

'KaXKLov, ov, TO, (x«X^os,) same as 
XaXKEXoi/, a brazen vessel, Mk. vii. 4. 

'KaXKoXi^avov, ov, to. Rev. i. 15. 
' ii. 18. Vulg. aurichalcum, i. e. ivhite brass, 
fine bi'ctss, a factitious metal among the 
ancients, formed of the same ingredients 
as brass, but in other proportions. 

XaX/cos, ou, 6, prop. ore,metal, of any 
kind ; but in N. T. copper, brass, espec. 
as wrought and tempered for arms, uten- 
sils, &G. 1) prop. Rev. xviii. 12, Tray 
(TKEuos £/c — x"^'^^^ '^^^ (TLS^nov. Sept. & 
Class. 2) melon, any article made of cop- 
per or brass ; e. gr. 1 Cor. xiii. 1, x"'^'^'^^ 
VXoDV, sounding brass, meaning, ' some 
brazen wind instrument.' Also brass or 
copper COIN, money. Matt. x. 9. Mk. vi. 8. 
xii. 41, and later Class. 

'KaXKov^, see XaX/c€0§. 

Xa/aai, adv. Lat. humi, to or on the 
ground, John ix. 6, tTTTUo-g )(«yuai. xviii. 
6, tTTEcroi/ xa/tiat. Sept. and Class. 

Xtt/oa, a?, 77, {x<^'^p(J^-,) joy., gladness: 
I. GENER. Matt. ii. 10, £X«p7/(ray X"P^^ 
fx&ydXi]v. Lu, i. 14. xv. 7, 10. John iii. 
29, x^P^ X^'^P^'" Rom. xiv. 17, X^P^ 
Jlveif/JLaTL ay. xv. 13. 2 Cor. i. 24. ii. 3. 
Gal. V. 22. Phil. i. 25, 77 X^P<^ '^^^ 
o-TEws, ' joy arising from the faith of the 
Gospel 1 Th. i. 6, /xeto: X"P^^ ITyEu- 
/ttaTos cty. ttTTo t^5 X"P"^i from or /or 
joy. Matt. xiii. 44, al. and so fx^ta. x«f)a?, 
Lu. xxiv. 41, and kv X"P«i Rom. xv. 32. 
Sept. and Class. — II. meton. equiv. to 
cause, occasion of joy, Lu. ii. 10. Phil. iv. 
1, X"P" cr'Ti(pav6<3 fj-ov. 1 Th. ii. 19, 
20. — III. meton. enjoyment, bliss. Matt. 
XXV, 21, sto-eAOt £is T7/y X- '^^^ Kvpiou 
crov. Heb. xii. 2. 

'K.dpay ^a, aro^.^ to, (xapafcto,) 
prop. * something graven or sculptured.' 



1) equiv. to a graving, sculpture, e. gr. 
images, idols, Acts xvii. 29. Anthol. Gr. 
iv. p. 33. 2) a mark cut in or stamped, 
a stamp, sigii. Rev. xiii. 16, and Class. 

'KapaKTiip, 7}po?, 6, (x«p«o'<y<^5)P^®P- 
a graver, ' a graving tool,' but usually 
' something graven, cut m, stamped,' &c. 
a character, as a letter, mark, sign, stamp 
on coin ; in N. T. iinpress, image, form, 
Heb. i. 3, &v X"P* '^V'^ uVoo-Tacrfiajs ah- 
Tov, SC. Tof' Beou, ' the express image or 
counterpart of God's essence or being,' in 
which sense the word occurs in Class, 
writers. 

Xapa^, aKOS, 6, {xapdccrw,) a point- 
ed stake, pale, Lat. vallus, in fortification : 
in N. T. a mound, Lat. vallum, i. e. a 
military rampart round a camp or besieged 
city, formed of the earth thrown out of a 
trench and stuck with sharp stakes or 
palisades to preserve the agger, or mound 
of earth, in due form, Lu. xix. 43. 

ILapiX^ofxaL, f. icrofxai, depon. mid. 
(x«pis,) prop, to gratify, ' do what is 
grateful and pleasing' to any one ; in 
N. T. with acc. of thing, and dat. of pers., 
to gratify one ivith any thing, i. e. to give, 
grant, as a matter of favour ; aor. 1. pass. 
£X«pio-67]i/ and f. 1. pass. x^P^^^^^^f^^'- 
in pass, sense. I. gener. Lu. vii. 21, 
Tv^Xol's iroXXoL^ EXapicyaTo to (SXt- 
TT&Lv, meaning, as the article is intended to 
denote, ' the f acidly of sight,' Rom. viii. 32. 
1 Cor. ii. 12. Gal. iii. 18. Phil. i. 29. ii. 
9, & Class. — II. SPEC, to give up any thing 
to any one. 1) of persons, in the sense of 
to deliver up or over, in answer to the de- 
mand or prayer of any one. Acts iii. 14, 
77T770-acr6€ avhpa <povia X'^P'-^^V^ai vfxlv, 
i. e. ' to be given up for pardon ;' xxvii. 
24, KEXapLOTTaL aoL, where it signifies 'to 
spare any one's life for the sake of or on 
account of another,' Philem. 22; also to 
the power of any one for harm or destruc- 
tion, Acts XXV. 11, ovdeU fXE dvuaTai 
auToIs x^P'-^^^^^'-') 'give me up for 
trial.' 2) of things, e. gr. a debt, to ?'emit, 
Lu. vii. 42, 43, w to ttXeIov exapicaTo : 
gener. of wrong or sin, to forgive, not to 
punish, 2 Cor. ii. 7, 10. xii. 13, x^p'^~ 
craadi fxoi tjjj/ ddiKLau TavTrjv. Eph. iv. 
32. Col. ii. 13. iii. 13. Dion. Hal. Ant. 
V. 4, (ppovLfxoov fXEV dvOpooiroov 'ipyov tcTt 
Tal§ (piXLuL^ x"P^^^^^"^ 'T^^ E-x^pa^. 

Xapii/, see Xdpis V. 

Xdpts, tTos, J?, acc. x^P^^Ax^'^P^i) 
gratia, prop, 'what causes joy,' pleasure, 
gratification: I. grace, of external form 
or manner, prop, of person, gracefulness. 
In N.T. only of words or discourse, equiv. 
to agreeahleness, acceptahleness, Lu. iv. 22, 
kiri Tols X6yoL<s T779 X- Eph, iv. 29, tVa 
^tt) x^P^^ '^^^'^ dKovovcn, 'that it may 
minister what is acceptable unto tht? 
X 6 



X AP 



468 



X AP 



hearers.' Col iv. 6, 6 Xoyos ev x«piTi ~ 
Xoyos — II. grdce^ in disposition 

or feeling towards any one, favour, 
Jdndness, good-will, benevolence. 1 ) gener. 
Lu. ii. 40, 52, TrpoiKOTTTE xapiTi irapa 
Gsw /ccei dy0pa)7ro/9 (Ex. xxxiii. 12), Acts 
ii. 47. iv. 33. vii. 10. So evp'ktkelv 
X^piv, ' to find grace or favour,' Trapa tw 
Gew, Lu. i. 30. kvuoTTLov tou Gfov, Acts 

vii. 46. Sept. Gen. vi. 18, al. Also kutu- 
diaQai x^pti/ TLvi, 'to lay down (we say 
up) favour with' any one, i. e. to gain fa- 
vour. Acts XXV. 9. xxiv. 27, ^aptras 
KUTadicrQaL nro'i<5 'lou^. Meton. ' object 
of favour,' something well-pleasing, ac- 
ceptable, 1 Pet. ii. 19, 20, tovto X'^P'-^ 
TTapd Qeto : comp. 1 Tim. ii. 3. Col. iii. 
20. 2) of the grace or favour of God and 
Christ as exercised toward men, e. gr. 
where x^P'-^ joined with eip^vrj, £/\£09, 
&c. in salutations, including the idea of 
every kind of favour, blessing, or benefit 
proceeding from God and Christ, Rom. i. 
7. 1 Tim. i. 2; also 17 X' "^ov J^vpiov rj/uLwu 
'I. X. in the benedictions at the close of 
most of the Epistles, Rom. xvi. 20, 24; 
simply ri x^P'-^i Eph. vi. 24. Col. iv. 18, 
al. Of God, it denotes gener. ' the gracious 
feeling of approbation, benignity, love, 
which God exercises toward any of the 
human race :' so with tou Oeou or the 
like. Acts xiv. 3, tm Xoyco t^9 x- cl^'tov 
— TO EvayyiXiov Trj^ x- Gtou. xv. 
40. XX. 24. Rom. iii. 24. 1 Cor. xv. 10. 
2 Cor. xii. 9, dpKEi croi 77 X- 1^^^- ^ P^^* 
iv. 10, al. ; with tou Qeov, or the like im- 
plied, Acts xviii. 27. Rom. iv. 16. xi. 5. 
Heb. ii. 9, x«P'Tt Oeov. iv. 16. Here, 
too, belong the phrases lu x^P^t^ '^^^ 
'I. Xp. Rom. V. 15, and eu x^pt'Tt Xp. 
Gal. i. 6, i. e. ' the grace of God through 
Christ ;' also Heh. x. 29, to Ili/f u/ua t^s 
XaptTas. 3) spec, of the Divine grace 
and favour as exercised in conferring gifts, 
graces, or benefits on man, 2 Cor. iv. 15. 

viii. 1, T-jji; X- "^^^ Oeov Tr,v ^EBofxivnv 
EV Toi^ EKK\.f}(rtaL^ Trj^ Ma/c. Jam. iv. 6. 
i Pet. v. 5 ; espec. in the benefits bestowed 
through Christ and his gospel, &c. Eph. 

iv. 7. 1 Pet. i. 10, OL TTEpl T^S €19 V fxd^ 

X«ptTos TrpoipTiTEvcravTE^. ver. 13 ; or as 
exhibited in the pardon of sins and admis- 
sion to the kingdom of heaven, i. e. 'saving 
grace,' with tov GeoD, Rom. v. 15, 77 X* 
Tou Oeov Kal h dwpEa. Gal. ii. 21. 1 Pet. 

v. 12. x^P*^ S^^^? iii' 7, meaning ' the 
free gift bestowed by grace' solelv; sim- 
ply, Rom. i. 5. V. 2, 17. vi. 15. Eph. ii. 
5. 1 Pet, i. 13, al. — HI. grace in act and 
deed, act of grace, equiv. to famur con- 
ferred, a kindness, benefit : 1) gener. Rom. 
V. 4, ob Xoy/^gTai KaTo. x«P*i'« Acts 
XXV. 3, aiTOVfXEVOi X'^P^^ kut avTov, see 
my note. So of a gift, alms, 1 Cor. xvi. 
*3, dirEVEyKElv Ttjv X' ^fxcov £ts 'lep. 



2 Cor. viii. 4, 6, 7, 19. 2) of the Divine 
benefits, blessings, &c. conferred on man 
through Christ and his gospel, gener. John 
i. 14, irX'nprj's x«piTos kul dXijOsms. ver. 
16, /cat X^P'-^ dvTL x«ptTOS, 'grace upon 
grace,' i. e. ' blessings superlatively great.' 
(So in Plut. i. 334, it is said of the Deity, 
that after giving Td<s TrptoTu^ x^P^'^"^? 
£i(raD0t§ ETEpa<5 dvTL ekelvcov, Kai Tpt- 

TaS dVTL TtVV dEUTEpVDV, KUL UeI VEU^ 

dvTL iraXaLOTEpcov E'TTLdidcoo'i.) ver. 17. 
Acts xi. 23, idcov tiiv x- '^^^ Qeov. 1 Cor. 
i. 4. Col. i. 6. 1 Pet. iv. 10. Jude 4 : so 
espec. the gift of the gospel, salvation by 
grace in Christ, Acts xiii. 43, EirifXEVELv 
Ty X- "^ov Qeov, 2 Cor. vi. 1., Phil. i. 7« 
Heb. xii. 15. xiii. 9. Spec, of the grace, 
or gift, of apostleship, Rom. xii. 3. xv. 15. 

1 Cor. iii. 10. Gal. ii. 9. Eph. iii. 2, 8. 

2 Tim. ii. 1. 3) meton. in the sense gra- 
tification or pleasure, arising from a favour 
or benefit received, 2 Cor. i. 15, 'iva dtv- 
TEpav x^P'-^ ExnTE. Philem. 7. — IV. 
grace, in return for favours or benefits, 
equiv. to gratitude, thanks : so Luke vi. 
32, 33, 34, iro'ia. vfjLLv X^P'-^ e<jtl; for 
EVEpyEoria and its consequent /xiaOo's. So 
Dionys. Hal. vi. 86, Tts e<ttli/ v ci] 
X«pt5 vpuv Kai wcpEXELa ; X^P'-^ e-x^i-V 
TLvl, Lat. gratias habere, also to give 
thanks, Lu. xvii. 9. 1 Tim. i. 12. 2 Tim. 
i. 3, al. Apocr., Jos., and Class. So x«P^^ 
Tw Gfiw, Rom. vi. 17, al. ; with thanks, 

1 Cor. x. 30. EV x^'P^'^'h iii' 1^- — ' 
V. accus. x^P^^ adv. or prep, with gen. 
Lat. gratia, prop, in favour of in behalf 
of hence on account of, because of, Lu. vii. 
47, ou X'^P^^i ' which account,' Eph. 
iii. 1 and 14, tovtov x«P^^' ^^1* iii* ^^•> 
TUiV TT a pander Eiov X'^P^^' 1 Tim. v. 14, 
al. Once before its case in an inter- 
rogation, 1 John iii. 12, /cat x^P'-^ tlvo's 
e<r(pa^EV aunrou ; 

'Kdp LOT jjia, aTos, to, (x«pi^o/>iat,) 
prop. ' benefit conferred :' in N. T. only 
of gifts and graces imparted from God, 
e. gr. deliverance from peril, 2 Cor. i. 11 ; 
a gift or quality of the mind, 1 Cor. vii. 7 ; 
gifts of Christian knowledge, including the 
gift of the prophetia, or the spiritual gift 
so called, Rom. i. 11. 1 Cor. i. 7 ; also of 
redemption (or that gift of salvation 
through Christ, called 'the unspeakable gift 
of God,' 2 Cor. ix. 15), Rom. v. 15, 16, 
and vi. 23, Td yap oxj/wuia — to ^£ x^~ 
picrfxa TOV Qeov, X^oori. xi. 29. Spec, of 
the Charismata, or miraculous gifts im- 
parted to the early Christians, and espec. 
to Christian teachers, by the Holy Spirit, 
Rom, xii. 6. 1 Cor. xii. 4, 9, x^p '^^t^^^^ 
laixaTwv. ver. 28, 30, 31. 1 Tim. iv. 14. 

2 Tim. i. 6. 1 Pet. iv. 10. 

XapiTOfo, f. (jd(TU3, (xa'pt?,) to endue 
with grace, i, e. to make gracious or oc- 



X AP 



469 



XEI 



ceptaUe: pass, to he pracious^ grateful^ 
acceptable : in N. T. used only of the 
Divine favour, Lu. i. 28, xaTpe^ KE\ap'-- 
Tco/utvi]. Also of spiritual graces, Eph. 
i. 6, r; (xct/Ofrt) £ )(a{)/Tajo-£Z/ T/^ta?, 
* wherein he hath richly imparted grace 
unto us." 

XapT>}9, ou, 6, (x«jOa(T(T6o,) papet\ 
Lat. charta, a leaf of paper, made of the 
papyrus, 2 John 12. Dioscorid. i. 11(5. 

^da-juia^ aro<s^ to, (x«iVa) or ■)(a(TKU}^ 
to yawn,) a chasjn, gui/^ Lu. xvi. 26. 
Sept. 2 Sam. xviii. 17. 

XtiXo?, €os ous, TO, a ^zp ; plur. Ta 
X£i'A.»;, /zjiw. I, PROP. Rom. iii. 13, 
ios acTTic^coi/ uVo Td X- n^'^^v. Heb. 
xiii. 15, Kapirov XELkiiov. 1 Pet. iii, 10. 
So, as the instrument of speech, the lips^' 
in speaking. Matt. xv. 8, & Mark vii. 6, 

OVTO^ 6 XaOS TOt? ■)(^tL\e(TL fJLE Ti/Xtt, ' In 

words only.' Meton. from the Heb., lan- 
guage^ tojigue^ 1 Cor. xiv. 21, kv x^i'Xso't^' 
kripoL^, Sept. Gen. xi. 1, 6, 9. — II. fig. 
TO x^^Xo? T^§ ^a\d<r(Tri<s^ lip^ i. e. shore^ 
of the sea, Heb. xi. 12 ; an idiom found in 
Sept. and Class., like the Lat. lahrum, 

Xft/xa^o), f. ao-oj, (x£t/xa,) prop, to 
raise a storm^ espec. at sea, Xen. OEc. 
viii. 16, orav x^'-l^f^'Cv o ^e.6<s (Neptune) 
kv TT? ^aXdcrcrr}^ and impers. Hdot. vii. 
191, rifJLf-pa.^ kx^ifxaX,^ Tpets : also veocari 
tempestate, as Diod. Sic. vol. i. p. 128, 
del Tous TOTTous x^'M"^^^^i but far more 
freq., and in N. T. only, in pass, ys-iixd- 
X^ofJLaL^ to be tempest-tossed at sea, Acts 
xxvii. 18, arcpodpu)^ dk x^^M«^o/u,£i;wi/ 
Vfxuyv. Jos. Ant. xii. 3, 3, Xf^/^"^- vkoi<s. 

X£Lfj.appo9^ ou, 6, 77, adj. (x£t/ua, see 
Xft/uoji/, and pt'o),) a poetic expression, 
prop, applied as an epithet to TroTa/xos, 
but also in N. T. used as a subst. to de- 
note a icinter-torrent^ which flows only in 
the rainy season, and is dry in summer, 
John xviii. 1, of the brook Cedron. So 
in Sept. 2 Sam. xv. 23, al. et Class. 

Xet/xcbi/, ajyos, 6, (x^t/xa, rain, from 
X£w, to pour,) prop, ram, storm^ tempest^ 
bad weather, as Lat. Tiyems : 1) gener. 
Matt. xvi. 3, Koi 7rpu)t' ^rip.Epov XELfxujv. 
Acts xxvii. 20, yEifxijovo^ te ovk oX'iyov 

klTLKELIxivOV. So Plut. Timol. 19, TOV 

X^tp-oivo^ kiTLKELfxivov. John X. 22, /cat 
X^ip-<j^v r\v^ i. e. ' stormy wintry weather.' 
Sept. and Class. 2) meton. the season of 
rains and storms, the rainy season.^ wintei\ 
2 Tim. iv. 21 : with genit. of time when, 
X^i-I^ifii^o^-, ' in winter,' Matt. xxiv. 20, al. 
and Xen. Conv. ii. 18. Sept. and Class. 

Xtip, /oos, 77, the hand : I. prop, and 
gener. of men. Matt. iii. 12, ov to ittvov 
kv Tf; X- avTov. v. 30. viii. 15. xii. 10. 
XV. 20, al. saepe : so of angels, &c. Matt, 
iv. 6, fcTTi x^tpwy dpoddL ere. Rev. i. 16, 



17, al. In phrases, e. g. Td ipya rujv x« 
Tti/o?, of an idol. Acts vii. 41 ; evil deeds 
or conduct. Rev. ix. 20 ; of God, the 
works of creation, Heb. i. 10, ii. 7. — IT. 
anthropopath. of God, =: the powerful 
ha?id of God, Acts iv. 30, tv tio Ti)v x» 

(TOV EKTELVELV (TE £19 "La(TLV. ElsewheFC 

to the hand of God, as the instrument of 
action and of power, is ascribed that which 
strictly belongs to God himself, Lu, i. 66. 
Acts xi. 21, x^^P ^vpLov i]v pitT auTou, 
' with him for aid.'' On the contrary, Acts 

xiii. 11, x«ip KvpLov ETTL (Tf, ' for punish- 
ment.' See Ex. ix. 3. Job xix. 21. — III. 
with prepositions, where to x^'-P-' 
instrument of action and power, is ascribed 
what strictly belongs to the person him- 
self or to his power: 1) ^id x^^P^^ 
X^ip<^v Tiy6§, by the hand or hands of 
anyone, by his intervention, — Slu tii/o?, 
Mk. vi. 2. Acts ii. 23. v. 12. vii. 25. xi. 
30, al. 2) £t§ x^^P^^ Tti/09, 'into the 
hands of any one, i. e. into his power : so 
TrapadiSocrdaL £t§ x^^P^^-t Matt. xvii. 22. 
xxvi. 45. Acts xxi. 11. xxviii. 17: also 
with verbs of committing, Lu. xxiii. 46. 
John xiii. 3. Once epttecteIv eU x^tpa^ 
0£oD, i. e. into his power for punishment, 
Heb. X. 31. 3) kv x^^-p'^ t(i/os, once — 
Eh x^t^/od? Tti/09, comp. kv III. 5. John 
iii. 35, iravra ceocokev kv Trj X- ot'TOU. 
Elsewh. ~ Slo. x^^pos Tti/os, i. e. by or 
through the intervention of any one, Acts 
vii. 35, kv X- dyykXov. Gal. iii. 19, 4) 
£/c x^^joo's Tii^os, 'out of his power,' after 
verbs of freeing, delivering, &c. Lu. i. 71, 
74. John X. 28, 39, al. 

XgipaycoyfiO), f. 770'tt>, (x^^payw- 
yos,) to lead by the hand., trans. Acts ix. 
8. xxii. 11, and lat. Class. 

Xftpay wyo?, ou, 6, 77, {x^'-Pi dyta^ 
dya)y7;,) lit, a hand-leader., ' one who leads 
by the hand,' Acts xiii. 11, of a blind per- 
son, £^77T£i x^^P^y^yo'^^: ^ graphic de- 
scription of blindness; the expression, 
however, was probably one freq. in com- 
mon life : so Artem. i. 50, n-v<p\ov^ 

£7ro/770r£y, 'Ivu XStp^ywyOtS XP'^^^^^^'" 

^Eipoy pacpov., ou, to, (x^'P? ypa- 
0CO,) prop, hand-writing ; in N. T. meton. 
a hand-writing., ' something written by the 
hand,' e. g, the Mosaic law, the letter in 
antith. to the spirit., Col. ii. 14. 

X £ ip o7rot7]To§, ou, 6, 77, adj. (x^tp? 
TTOLEU),) made ivith hands., the work of 
men's hands ; hence artificial, external : 
so j/ao5 x^^P^^^^'^'^<^s, Mk. xiv. 58. Acts 
vii, 48. Heb. ix. 1 1. 

X£tpOTOy£a), f. 77O'0O, (x^tpOTOt/OS, 

from x^^P5 TEivit),) to stretch out the hand., 
to hold up the hand., as in voting, hence to 
vote., give one''s vote., intrans. ; in N. T. 
trans, to choose by vote., to appoint.. Acts 

xiv. 23, x^'-P^'^o^^^^^'^^'^ auToTs Trpitj- 



X E I 



470 



XOP 



(iuTioov^^ ' having selected, constituted,' 
see my note : pass. 2 Cor. viii. 19. 

Xstpwi/, 01/05, o, J7, (iireg. comparat. 
to /ca/cos, from x^'p^/^i ' ^^^Z obsol. ) ivorse, 
said of state, condition, or quality, &c. 
Matt. ix. 16, ^BLpou <r)(^i(Tiia yiueTaL. xii. 
45, al, : so of punishment, ivorse^ more 
severe, Heb. x. 29, and Class. Fig. of 
persons, in a moral sense, 1 Tim. v. 8, 
aTTLorTov -^ELpoiv. 2 Tim. iii. 13, and 
Class, as Xen. Mem. i, 2, 32. 

XepovfSifx^ Heb. cherubim, symbolic 
representations of the Divine attributes; 
in N. T. spoken of the golden figures 
representing the cherubim, and placed on 
or over the ark, Heb. ix. 5, Xap. ^o'f 7j§. 

Xr;pa, a?, /?, (fem. of adj. XVpos, be- 
reaved,) prop. adj. bereaved of one's hus- 
band, ividowed^ Lu. iv. 26, tt^os yvvalKa 
Xnpcci^- So Sept. yui^i) x- Sam. xiv. 5. 

1 K. vii. 14. Jos. Ant. viii. 13, 2, and 
sometimes in Class. Subst. rj x^W^-> ^ 
ividoui. Matt, xxiii. 14, oiKia^ tudv x^W^'^i 
al. ssepe, Sept. & Class. Fig. of a city left 
desolate. Rev. xviii. 7 : comp. Lam. i. 1. 

X0£9, adv. yesterday, John iv. 52. 
Acts vii. 28. Heb. xiii. 8. Sept. and later 
Class. ; the earlier and purer used tx^^^' 

X-LXiapxo's, ov, o, {x'l^iol, apX(JO,) 
prop, a captain of a thousand, Sept. and 
Class. In N. T. gener. a coniiiiander, 
cajptain: 1) gener. Mk. vi. 21. Acts xxv. 
23. Rev. vi. 15. xix. 18. 2) spec, a tri- 
bune, an officer of the Roman armies, six 
of whom were attached to each legion and 
were its chief officers, Acts xxi. 31, sqq. & 
al. and so oft. in lat. Class. 3) said of ^Ae 
prefect of the Temple, John xviii. 12. 

XtXtas, a^os, ii, [xi-Xf-OL,) a thousand 
in number, Lu. xiv. 31. Acts iv. 4, et al. 

XtXtot, ai, a, num. adj. a thousa7id, 

2 Pet. iii. 8, et al. Sept. and Class. 
XtTwi/, wi/05, 6 : 1) prop, in sing. (2 

tunic, i. e. the inner garment, (as distin- 
guished from IfxaTLov, the outer one, which 
was usually of greater value,) mostly with 
sleeves, and reaching usually to the knees, 
Matt. V. 40, Kai ToV X'-'^'^^^ XajBslu. 
Lu. vi. 29. John xix. 23. Acts ix. 39, 
and Class. 2) in plur. x'-'^^^^'^i ^^^^^ as 
our word clothes for ' clothing,' Matt. x. 
10. Mk. vi. 9. Lu. iii. 11. ix. 3, 6i Class. 

X.LUJV, ovo^, V, snoiv. Matt, xxviii. 3, al. 

X\a/xi;s, vBo-s, v, chlamys, a wide and 
coarse cloak, confined on the right shoul- 
der by a clasp, so as to cover the left side 
of the body, and v>orn over the other gar- 
ments. In N. T. spoken of the Roman 
paludamentum, or ojfcers cloak. Matt, 
xxvii. 28, 31, and oft. in lat. Class. 

XXcutzg^*', f- acrw, (x^furj, jest, de- 
rision, fr. x^'^*^^^ X^'^^^^^t ' ^^^^ ^^P'' ^^^^ 



prop, signifying ' to thrust out the lip.' 
See Ps. xxii. 7.) to jest, deride, sco^\ 
absol. Acts ii. 13. xvii. 32, & Class. 

XA.tapo9, a, 6v, adj. (xA-iataw, xk'nn,) 
prop, tepid, chiefly of water: so Athen. 
p. 123, xjowp x^. : in N. T. fig. lukewarm. 
Rev. iii. 16. 

XXojpds, a, 6v, adj. {x}^6ri, y\6o^,^ 
prop, pale-green, yelloivish-green, as the 
first shoots of grass. In N. T. 1) gener. 
green, Mk. vi. 39, kirl too x- X^P^V- I^^v. 
viii. 7. ix. 4. Sept. and Class. 2) spec. 
pale, yelloivish. Rev. vi. 8, tTTTros x^wpos, 
an emblem of mortality, from pestilence 
and death, ('pallida mors,' ) as it were stalk- 
ing about; or that sallow hue incident to 
fear. Anthol. Gr. iii. p. 11, xXt*>pi]V aapKa. 

XJ*^', six hu7idred and sixty-six, the 
number for which these letters stand, viz. 
X' 600, £' 60, 6, Rev. xiii. 18. 

XotKos, ?}, 6v, adj. (xoos & X'^^^O 
earth, earthy, terrene, 1 Cor. xv. 47, 48. 

Xoti/tf, t/co§, 77, an Attic measure for 
grain and things dry, the Attic medim- 
nus, or \ a Roman modius, nearly a quart 
English, Rev. vi. 6. 

Xotpos, ou, 6, 77, a swine I Matt. vii. 
6, et al. and Class. 

XoXaw, f. narijo, (xoXt], gall,) prop, 
and in earlier authors, to be full of bile, 
melancholy, mad, equiv. to fXEXayxoXdcD, 
Aristoph. Nub. 833 ; in later writers and 
in N. T. x^Xou/xat, to he full of gall, to 
be enraged, intrans. ; in later writers, used 
either with a dat. or an acc. with Trpos, at, 
denoting the object, John vii. 23, kp.oL x- 

Xo\i], T}?, 77, {x^(^^ to pour out,) prop. 
tJie gall ; in N. T. fig. gall, bitterness : 1) 
that of poison, venom, fig. Acts viii. 23, 
&h yap x°^h^ iTLKpta^ — Ojoco erg outu. 
So Plut. Romul. 17, coaTTsp iov kul x^~ 
X?j^ kv'ioov ^i]pL(iiV. 2) from the Heb. 'an 
infusion of bitter herbs,' e. gr. wormwood, 
poppy, &c. Matt, xxvii. 34, 'iocoKav avTuy 
'TTLi.lv fji&Ta X^^V^ jULefiLyjULivou. 

dat. x^h X^^^i ill Class, earth, as dug 
out and thrown up, a moimd, Hdot. i. 
150. Thuc. ii. 76; in N. T. gener. loose 
eaiih, dust, Mk. vi. 11, eKTLva^ciT.^ nrov 
XoOy, and so in Sept. and Class. Rev. 
xviii. 19, 'i^aXov X^^^ '^^'^ K£(paXa^ 
avTiov, i. e. in token of grief. 

Xo priy iio, f. 7?a-to, {x^P'^Jo^i X^~ 
p6<s, ayu},) prop, and prim, to lead a clio- 
rus of singers and dancers, Anthol. Gr. i. 
73, but often figur. ; then to lead out or 
furnish a chorus on public occasions at 
one's own expense ; hence gener. and in 
N. T. to famish, supply, \vith acc. 1 Pet. 
iv, 11, £^ tcTX^o^ r]s x^PVy^^ O 9£OS, 
2 Cor. ix. 10, and Class. 



XO P 



471 



XPH 



Xopos, oD, o, dancinp^ as connected 
with music and song, on festive occasions, 
Lu. XV. 25, ijKovas cvjULiliuwia^ Kai \o- 
puiv. Sept. and Class. 

Xo/OTa^tt), f. ao-to, (xop'^'^^i) pi op. and 
in earlier writers used of animals, 'to feed 
with gi-ass or hay and so in N. T. Rev. 
xix. *2I, of fowls, TO. opvaa sy^ooTaarQyjaau 
f fc T. (xapKcou au. : but in later writers gener. 
and in N. T. of persons, to satiate witli 
food, e. gr. Matt. xv. 33, Ioc-ts x^P^"-*^^!- 
oxXou TOcrovTov : pass. xiv. 20. John vi. 
26. Phil. iv. 12. Ja. ii. 10' : with «7r6, 
Lu. xvi. 21. Fig. to fill the desire of any 
one, to satisfy, pass. IVIatt. v. 6. Lu. vi. 21. 

XopTao-^a, ttTos, to, (x^P'^"^"'J 
prop, used of food for cattle, /odder ; 
sometimes, though rarely, applied to food 
for men, Acts vii. 11. 

^6pT09, ov, 6, in Class, usually /od- 
der for animals, gi'een or dry, grass, liay ; 
in N. T. grass, herbage, being a general 
term among the Hebrews, (who divided all 
vegetables into two sorts, trees, by the 
Hellenists called ^vXa, and plaiits or 
herbs, also called -j^opTos,) comprehending 
both grass and corn, and likewise flowers. 
Matt. vi. 30, Tov yopTov tou dypou. Mk. 
vi. 39, al. Sept. and Class. 

X.pdu}, f. 770C0, has in prose four dif- 
ferent significations, viz. XP^'^^i utter an 
oracle, not found in N. T. ; KLXpVfJ-i-, 
lend ; xP^opai, to use; XP^U inipers. it 
needs, it behoves: I. KLXpvp-h lo lend, see 
in its order. — II. xP^opai, f. vcro/nai, de- 
pon. mid. to use, make use 0/ foil, by dat. 
of things, Acts xxvii. 17, (3oi]d&LaL^ kxpoi)V- 
To. 1 Cor. vii. 21, 31. ix. 12, 15, al. and 
Class. Of persons, to use well or ill, to 
treat, with dat. Acts xxvii, 3, (piXavOpu)- 
Ti a's TOO HavXco xPV<^ocfjLzvo£. Sept. and 
Class. — III. impers. XP^)i imperf. ^XP^T^^ 
inf. x.pi]vai, prop. there is use for,' it 
needs, it behoves, it ought; with inf. Ja. iii. 
10, ou xph TavTa ovTiM yLv&a-6aL, & Class. 

Xp&ia, as, 77, (xp£09,) I. use, usage, 
the act of using, or employing any thing ; 
in N. T. meton. ' that in which one is em- 
loyed,' an employment, business. Acts vi. 
, oDs KaTaaTvao/uiev £7rt Trj9 XP^'^^^ 
TavTYi's. So Jos. Bell. ii. 20, 3, ovk ett- 
i(TTr\cFav avTov Tats XP^^'"'^- 2 Mace. vii. 
24, and sometimes in lat. Class. — II. need, 
necessity, want: 1) gener. Eph. iv. 29, 
irpo^ oiKoSopi]U Ttjs XP^'-^^' XP^^" 
ic-Tt, 'there is need,' opus est, with gen. 
Lu. X. 42, £i/os £<TTL xp^ 'i-(^i ' one thing is 
needful ;' also with infin. Heb. vii. 1 1, and 
60 oft. in Class. 2) of personal need, ne- 
cessity, want. Acts xx. 34, Tals XP^^'"^^ 
li.ov v7rr\piT-](Tav ai X€if>f ? auTai. xxviii. 

10. TO. 'Trp6<5 Tiju xp. Rom. xii, 13. Phil. 

11. 25. iv. 19, al. and Class. 3) in the 
phrase XP^^^'*^ ^X^'^i ' to have need,' 



to need, to want. So gener. and with gen. 
to have need 0/ Matt. ix. 12, ov XP^'-O-^ 
EXOi^cti/ 01 iarx^ovTS<5 laTpov. xxi. 3. 
xxvi. 65. Lu. ix. 11, al. Foil, by infiii. 
act. Matt. xiv. 16, ov xpfi'at/ ixovaiv 
dirtX^tTv. John xiii. 10, al. ; by inf. pass. 
Matt. iii. 14; by 'lua, John ii. 25. xvi. 30. 
also in Class. Also of personal need, want, 
with gen. Matt. vi. 8, olStv 6 HaTj/p v/ulcov 
coL> xP^'^^v t'xfi'Te- 1 Th. iv. 12. Rev. iii. 
17. Absol. to have need, — to be in jieed 
or leant, Mk. ii. 25, al. 

Xp£a)(/)£iX6T?js, ov, 6, (xptos, 6(ps.i- 
Xu),) a debtor, Lu. vii. 41. xvi. 5. Sept. 
and later Class. 

Xp7/, impers. verb, see in Xpaw III. 

Xp7/^6o, f. ycrco, {xPV-, XP^^"?) wee<i, 
have need 0/ desire ; with gen. Matt. vi. 
32, olds yap 6 HaTtip v/uloou — OTt XPV~ 
X^sTE TovToou diravToov. La. xi. 8. Rom. 
xvi. 2. 2 Cor. iii. 1, and oft. in Class. 

^pr\fxa, aTo<s, to, (XiOt^o/xat,) prop. 
something use/ul, 'what one needs.' Hence 
gener. and in N. T. icealth, usually plur. 
TO. xP'^Tf^^'^^i ^Ik. x. 23, oi Ttt XP* 
'iypvTi^, i. e. the rich ; ver. 24, TTEiroL- 
doTa? ETTL Tots XP- xviii. 24. Sept. 
and Class, oft. Spec, money ; once sing. 
Acts iv. 37, nvEyKE to xp- i- ^* the price; 
plur. Acts viii. 18, 20. xxiv, 26, and Class. 

Xpr;^aTi'^a), f. icro), (xP^JM",) prop, 
and gener. to do business, whether private or 
public, (Sept. and Class.) espec. in trade; 
mid. to do business, and by impl. to make 
profit, to gain, as oft. in Class, but more 
freq. of kings and magistrates, to dispatch 
business, i. e. to give audience and answer, 
e.gr. to ambassadors, petitioners, &c. to give 
response or decision. Hence in N. T. Sept. 
and Jos. Ant. iii. 8, 8, and xi. 8, 4, ' to 
impart Divine warnings or revelations,' 
and in the pass, to receive them ; the term 
being used either absol. as Heb. viii. 5. 
xi. 7. xii. 25, or foil, by v-rro tov JIvev- 
(xaTcs TOV dy'iov, as Lu. ii. 26, or viro 
dyyiXov dy'iov, as Acts x. 22. Elsewh. 
in N. T. according to later Greek usage, it 
signifies to take or bear a name, to be named. 
or called, constr. with the name in appos. 
as Acts xi. 26. Rom. vii. 3, poLxaXi's XP^' 
paT'icxEL. Jos. Philo, Polyb. & Diod. Sic. 

'Kp-iipiaTLcrp6<5, ov, 6, {ypripaTi'^co,) 
prop, and in Class. ' the transaction of 
public business,' and hence lmsi?iess gener. 
espec. the giving audience, making a response 
or decisio7i ; in N. T. a response /rom God, 
or oracle, Rom. xi. 4. 2 Mace. ii. 4. 

'Kp})<r I pa's, 7), ov, adj. [xP^^l^'^'-i) lit. 
usable, and gener. 2iscful for any purpose, 
profitable, 2 Tim. ii. 14, a Is ov6kv XP'J" 
aijuou. Pint, de Ira Cohib. 6, Itt' ovdsvi 
Xpj/o-iV^: ^i3d so elsewh. in Class. & Sept. 

X p .7 o- 1 s, £609, V, { xpdo/j.ai,) lit. a u^ing 



X P H 



472 



XPO 



any thing, also the use so made ; in N. T. 
spec, of the use of the body in sexual 
intercourse, Rom. i. 26, 27. O'cell. Lucan. 

4, TrpO? T^V TCOV a<ppO0L(TLWV XpfjCTLU. 

X.pri<Tn-£vofxaL^ depon. mid. (XP^I' 
CTo?,) to sJioiv 07ieself xpricrTO's^ i. e. to he 
good-humoured^ gentle^ kind^ 1 Cor. xiii. 4, 
7} ayd'TTi] jULaKpodvfx&L, y^pt](TTt{je.TaL. 

XpijcToXoyia, a?, 77, (;!^/ot/(rTos, 
Xoyo9, ) fair icords^ insiriuating discourse^ 
. consisting of mere professions without 
reality, (the Class, do not use the word, 
but -y^piia-Tol \6yoL and y^p^aTo^Xoyoi^^) 
Rom, xvi. 18, did Trj's \p. Kai tuXoytas. 

Xp7}0"To§,y;,oi/, adj. {xpaoiu(.aL,)2Cse/id, 
profitable, fit, good for any use, oft. in 
Class, ; in N. T. I. of things ; and 1) 
Lu. V. 39, 6 TraXaid'S (oTi/09) ■)(^pi](tt6te- 
p6^ koTTLU, ' is better for use f and so not 
unfreq. in Class, e. gr. Athen. 585, olvov 
Xp. 2) fig. good for use, easy to bear or 
wear. Matt, xi. 30, 6 ydp ^uyos fxav XP'H- 
CTo?. So, in a moral sense, useful to 
society, good, virtuous, 1 Cor. xv. 33, 
(pdELpoucrw XPV^^'^'^ ofxiXiai KaKai. 
So i'ld}] XP' Aristoph. Nub. 956. — 11. of 
PERSONS, useful towards others, as oft. in 
Sept. and Class. ; hence benignant, gentle. 
Mild, Lu. vi. 35, auTO? (o Geo?) xp^<'"'"os 

E(TTLV k'TTL TOUS d.XCl-Pi(TrOV^ Kul TTOVl)pOV<i. 

Eph. iv. 32. 1 Pet. ii. 3, and Class. Neut. 
TO XjOTjarot^, goodness, kindness, Rom. ii. 4. 

Xp^JCTOTlJS, 7JT09, n, (XP^?0"T"6S,) 

prop, goodness, gentleness, kindness : 1 ) 
gener. Rom. ii. 4, tov ttXoutou tt/s xP- 
aiiTov KaTacppousL's ; xi. 22. 2 Cor. vi. 6. 
Gal. V. 22. Eph. ii. 7. Sept. and Class. 
2) fig. in a moral sense, goodness, equiv, 
to righteousness, uprightness, Rom. iii. 12, 
ovK EGTi iTOLuov X/O^JfToVrjTa. Hdiau. x. 7. 

Xoic/xa, aros, to, (xpi'w,) prop. 
' something rubbed in,' as oil in anointing, 
ointment, unguent; meton. chrism, an 
anointing, unction; in N. T. fig. of Chris- 
tians, (by that metaphorical sense whereby 
the verb XP'-^ Vi?>Q^ of communicating 
the gifts and graces of the Spirit,) an 
anointing^ spiritual unction from God, 1 
John ii. 20, vfxil^ XP'-^I^^ ^X^'^^ ^'^^ '^^^ 
'Ay LOU, Kal OLoaTE rrrduTa. ver. 27. 

XptoTTtayos, ou, 6, (XpicrTos,) a 
Christian. Acts xi. 26, see mv note ; xxvi. 
28. 1 Pet.iv. 16. 

Xpto-Tos, ?j, dv, adj. [xploj-) cmohited ; 
in N. T. properly an appellative (derived 
from the Heb.) meaning, 'the Anointed 
of God,' the King constituted of God ; but 
often passing over into a proper name. 
1. prop, as an appellative : 1) absol. 6 
XpicTTO?, the Christ, the Messiah, Mk. xv. 
32, 6 Xp. 6 (Sa(n\iv? TOV 'larpat'iX. John 
i. 42. iv. 42. Acts ii. 36. ix. 22 : so Matt, 
i. 17. Lu. ii. 26, Toy XpLc-Tov Kvpiov. 



iv. 41, saepiss. 2) joined with 'It]<roJ/9, 
e. gr. 'Ir/o-ous 6 XptcTos, Acts v. 42, al. 
— II. as a proper name, Christ : 1) ab- 
sol. XptcTTos, or 6 Xpto-Tos, Rom. v. 6,8. 
viii. 11, 6 ky£Lpa<5 tov Xp. ek vEKpwv, 
Gal. i. 6, 7. ii. 20. 1 Pet. i. 11. iv. 14. 

2) oftener joined with 'Itjo-ou?, as Matt. i. 
16. Mk. i. 1. Johni. 17, ah Xp. 'Ijjo-ovs 
only in St. Paul's Epistles, 1 Cor. i. 30, 
& oft. — III. meton. 1 ) equiv. to o Xo'yos 
TOV Xp. the Gospel, 2 Cor.i. 19, 21. Eph. 
iv. 20. 2) equiv. to to crcojuia tov Xp. 
Chrisfs body, the Church, 1 Cor. xii. 12. 

3) equiv. to the salvation of Christ, i. e. 
obtained through him, Gal. iii. 27, Xp. 
EVEdvcraadE, Phil. iii. 8, Iva Xp. /c€p- 

Xpiu), f. icroj, prop, to rub over the 
surface of a body ; hence gener. to anoint 
any thing or person, for any purpose what- 
ever, with oil or ointment.* Sept. oft. and 
Class. In Sept. also to anoint, as a sacred 
rite, to consecrate by unction to any office, 
as that of a prophet, Is. Ixi. 1 ; or king, 
1 Sam. X. 1, al. Hence in N. T. to anoint, 
consecrate as by unction, to set apart for a 
sacred work, trans. 1) of Jesus, as the 
Messiah, the anointed King, comp. in Xpi- 
gt6<3. Acts iv. 27, oV Expio'a?. As a pro- 
phet, with infin. Lu. iv. 18, £Xpio"£ fxs 
EvayyEXiaaadaL tttcoxoi?. So gener. 
with dat. EXpLfy^ TluEu/uLaTL dyico. Acts 
X. 38, meaning, by a metaphor taken from 
the form and mode of inaugurating kings, 
' invested and endued,^ namely, at his bap- 
tism ; with double acc. Heb. i. 9, Expi-cri 
(TE 6 Of05 — EXaLov dyaXXida-EO)^. 2) of 
Christians, as anointed, consecrated, set 
apart to the service of Christ and his Gos- 
pel by the gift of the Holy Spirit, 2 Cor. 
i. 21, 6 0£ Xf tor«5 vpid^, Oeos. 

Xpovi'^^M, f. Lcru), ixP'^^o^^) i^ass 
aivay time, to delay, he long in coming, or 
in doing any thing, in trans, and absol. 

Matt. XXV. 5, XPOI/i^Ol/TO? TOU WULCpLOV. 

Lu. i. 21. Heb. X. 37. Foil, by inf. 'ip- 
X^f^^ctL, Matt. xxiv. 48. Lu. xii. 45. 

Xpovo^, ov, 6, time: I. prop, and 

GENER. 1) Mk. ix. 21, TToVos XP^^^O? 

E(TTLv ; Lu. iv. 5. Acts vii. 23. Gal. iv. 4, 
Rev. ii. 21 : so diaTpi^Eiv xpoi^ov. Acts 
xiv. 3, 28 ; 7roLr](TaL xP^^i/<^i/, xv. 33. 
With prepositions : did tov xP- Heb. v. 
12 ; fe/c XP<^^^^ LKavcov, Lu. viii. 27 ; eu 
iravTL XP' ^cts i. 21; kirl xpovov, Lu. 
xviii. 4 ; kcp' ocrov xp- Rom. vii. 1 ; jmETa 
Xpoi^ov TroXvv, Matt. xxv. 19. 2) accus. 
Xpovov or Xi^oVous, marking duration, 
' time how long,' Mk. ii. 19, ocrov xP^Voi/ 

E-XOVCTL TOV VVlX(pLOV, Lu. XX. 9. Johu V. 

6. vii. 33. Acts xiii. 18, al. 3) dat. xpo- 
vio, xpovoL's, marking time when, in or 
during which, &c. Lu. viii. 29, ttoXXoIs 
XPOvoL's avvrjpirdKEL avTov. Acts viii. 11. 



XPO 



473 



Rom. xvi. 25.— II. spec, by tlic force of 
adjuncts, where XP^^^*^ sonietiiiies stands 
for a time or seaso?i, like Katpos ; e, gr. 
joined with Kaiool, Acts i. 7, yvtovai xpo- 
i'ov<s t; Kaipov<i. 1 Th. v. 1 ; witli gen. of 
event, Matt, ii.7, toV xp- '^^^ cl^aivoixivov 

doTipO^. Lll. i. 57, O XP- "^^^ TiKELV. 

Acts iii. 21. 1 Pet. i. 17. iv. 3, 6 irap- 
£\T/\i/Oa>s XP* (^en. Mem. ii. 1, 34, toi/ 
fxtXKoi'Ta XP' '^ov /3iou); with an adj. 
or pron. Matt. ii. IG, kuto. tov xP- 
TiKpifScoae. Acts i. 6. 1 Pet. i. 20. Jude 
18. 2 Tim. i. 9, irpo xpoVwi/ aiuyviwu. 
1 Pet. iv. 2, Tou iv aapKL XP- 

XpOl-OTpifiicO, f. V<TU), {Xp6u09, Tpi- 

/3a),) to wear aivai/ or ^pendtime, to delay ^ 
iutrans. Acts xx. 16. Aristot. Rhet. iii. 3. 

Xpucrsos, e'??, €0i/, contr. xpt^croi^?- ^, 
ouz/, adj. (x/ouo-os,) golden^ of gold ^ 2 Tim. 
ii. 20, o-K'f ui/ xpyo""' Heb. ix. 4, <nra/xyo§ 
Xpvcri). Rev. i. 12, sq. al. Sept. & Class. 

'Kpv cr Lov^ ou, TO, (dim. of XP^^^os,) 
gold in pieces, especially as ^vl'Ollgllt up. I. 
gener. Heb. ix. 4, t^u kl^o^tov — Tr&piKe- 
KaXvjUL/uLivi]U TTctu^odsv XP^^'^V' 1 i. 
7. Rev. iii. 18, al. Sept. and Class. — II. 
ii^^ton. 1) a golden ornamerd^ 1 Pet. iii. 
3, Trfpi'OgfTt? XP^'^'^^^- Rev. xvii. 4. Sept. 
Job xxvii. 16, and Class, as Thuc. ii. 13, 

TOtS TTSpLKSLjULEVOL'S XP^^^^L^. 2) gold 

COIN, Dioney^ Acts iii. 6. xx. 33. 1 Pet. i. 
18, and Class. 

XpucoSaKTuXto?, oi>, o, 77, adj. 
(X/0u<r6s, baKT()\Lo^^)ivith gold rings yx^on 
the fingers, Ja. ii. 2, and Class. 

X|Oi/(roX.t0os, ou, 6, (xpi^cos, XtOo9,) 
chrysolite^ prop, golden stone^ a name ap- 
plied by the ancients to all gems of a golden 
oi* yellow colour ; but espec. the topaz, 
Rev. xxi. .20. Sept. and Class. 

X-pvaoTT paaros^ ou, 6, (xpi^cos, Trpa- 
erof, a leek,) a precious stone (see Pliny) 
of a greenish colour. Rev. xxi. 20. 

Xpucos, ou, 6, gold : I. gener. Matt, 
ii. 11, xP'^^of, /cat Xi^avov^ et saspe al. 
Sept. and Class. — II. meton. 1) golden 
ornaments, 1 Tim. ii. 9, ^ xP^<^^-> V /W«p- 
yapLTUL's. Rev. xvii. 4. xviii. 16. Luc. 
de Dom. 8, tiZ XP^^^'P ToaovTov ke- 
K6(Tfxr]TaL. 2) in plur. gold coin, money, 
Matt. x. 9. Ja. v. 3, and Class. 

Xpucroo), f. wcrw, (XjOucros,) to gild, 
deck with gold, trans, as oft. in Sept. and 
Class. In N. T. Rev. xvii. 4, /c£Xpi/o-to- 
•fjiivi} xP^^^i XP^^'^^' xviii. l6. So 
Sept. and later Class. 

X/oa»9, XP"*Tos, o, prop, the surface of 
the body, the skin, Sept. and Class. ; but 
gener. and in N. T. the body. Acts xix. 12, 
diro TOV XP' avTov (TovddpLa. 

Xco\6s, t], oi/, adj. prop, crippled in the 
feet, limping^ Matt. xi. 5, x^^^'^ot TreptTra- 
ToucTi. XV. 30, 31. Lu. vii. 22. John v. 3. 



Acts iii. 2. viii. 7. xiv. 8. Fig. Heb. xii. 
13. Once, lame from the loss of a foot, for 
ai/aTT^pos, maimed^ Mk. ix. 45. So J¥A. 
V. H. xi. 9, ^€t^as x^^^^t* Ttt'tt '<^«t ai/ttTTij- 
pov. Xen. Cyr. i. 4, 11, x^XoV — ko\o(36u. 

Xtopa, a?, 7/, prop. space which con- 
tains any thing, the place in which any 
person is, or where any thing is; hence 
gener. and in N. T. a country or region : 

I. GENER. 1) prop. Lu. iii. 1, t^s 'It. 
Koi Tp. xf*'P«5. XV. 13, sqq. John xi. 54, 
55. Acts viii. 1 ; with gen. avrtov. Matt, 
ii. 12; so gener. iv. 16, kv X^P? ctkio. 
dav. by an Hellenistic idiom, for ev X'^P^ 
(TKOTEivrj ; thus answering to the 'mortis 
umbra' of Ovid and Virgil : opp. to the 
sea. Acts xxvii. 27. 2) meton. for ' the 
inhabitants of a country,' Mk. i. 5. Acts 
xii. 20. 3) put with the name of a city, 
&c. a disti'ict, territory, around it. Matt, 
viii. 28, eU Tr]v x- '^^^ Tspy. Mk. v. 1. — 

II. SPEC, the cozmtry or fields, opp. to the 
city, Lu, xxi. 21 ; as cidtivated, (for tiypos, 
by an Hellenistic idiom,) xii. 16. John iv. 
35. Ja. V. 4, and Class. 

X to p £ o), f. I'lcrio, ( x^pa,) to give place 
or room, to give tvay, yield ; hence in N.T. 

I. to go away from a place : 1 ) gener. to 
go, pass, in trans, with ah. Matt. xv. 17, 
Eh T^v KOLkiav x^P^^ '• 2 Pet. iii. 9, 
TTOLVTa? Eh fXETavoLav X(^PVf^(^i-' 2) spec. 
to go forivard, and fig. to go well, succeed, 
John viii. 37, 6 Aoyos 6 l^os ob x^P^^ 
vfxiv. — II. spoken of capacity, to have 
room for, take, hold, contain : 1 ) prop, as 
a vessel, with acc. of measure, John ii. 6, 
vSpiai x^P^^^<^^ iXETpr}Td<s dvo rj 
Tpsls : gener. of a place, with acc. of 
thing, Mk. ii. 2, wctte ix)]ketl xwpEti' sc. 
avTov<3. John xxi. 25. 2) fig. to receive, 
e. gr. a doctrine, &c. to admit, assent to, 
with acc. Matt. xix. 11, ov ttuvte^ x^~ 
povaL TOU \6yov : also of persons, to receive 
to one's heart, ' give a place in one's affec- 
tions,' 2 Cor. vii. 2, x^^p^cr^Tfi v/md^, 

Xojpi^o), f. L(Tw, \x"^p'i-^^)topid apaii, 
separate, trans. 1) act. Matt. xix. 6, o 
GUV 6 GfOS (TvveX^ev^ev, dvOpcoTTO's /ixi] 
X^pt^fcTO) : foil, by diro, Rom. viii. 35. 
Pass. Heb. vii. 26. 2) mid. x^P^'^o/xat, 
and aor. 1. pass. ixt^pi-o-Oiju as mid. to 
separate one's self to depart ; from a per- 
son, \vith d-TTO, 1 Cor. vii. 10, yvvalKa 
diro dvopo^ fxi] x^P'-^^V^^i'- '■ absol. ver. 

II, 15. Philem. 15 : from a place, = to go 
away, depart, with diro. Acts i. 4, dito 
'lEpucroXuiixoou /mil x^P^^^^^^*- • with ek, 
xviii. 1. 

Xcopiov, ov, TO, (x"^pc?,) prop, a 
spot or place, also a country, region ; in 
N. T. a field, farm. Matt. xxvi'. 36, sh 
X(jopioi> XEyofxEvov T. John iv. 5. Acts i. 
18, £KT>7o-aTo x^P^o^ • pl« ''"a X^P'^^i 
estates, iv. 34. 



474 



Y 



Xcopts, adv. and prep, apart ^ sepa- 
rately : I. as adv. John xx. 7, x- ^yrgTu- 
Tiiyiitvov. and Class. — II. as prep, with 
gen. apart from, ivithout: 1) gener. Matt, 
xiii. 34, X- irapa^oXij^. Lu. vi. 49. John 
i. 3. Rom. iii. 21. Heb. iv. 15, x- afxap- 
Tta?. vii. 7, al. 2) equiv. to besides^ ex- 
clusive of, Matt. xiv. 21, x- yvvaiKoov /cat 
iraLOLiav. 2 Cor. xi. 28. Sept. & Class, oft. 

X cop OS, oi;, o, the Latin name of the 
N.W. wind ; in N. T. meton. the north- 
west^ the quarter whence corns blows, Acts 
xxvii. 12, pkiirouTa — kuto. x^poi/. 



■^aXXw, f. a\u), (i//-act),) to touch 
sharply^ so as to cause vibration, to tivitch 
any thing; so of strings, to twang^ said 
espec. of a bow-string : also of a stringed 
instrument of music, to thrum the strings, 
strike the chords ; hence absol. xItoXXelv^ 
to play on any stringed instrument : in 
Sept. and N. T. to sing or chanty prop, as 
accompanying stringed instruments, absol. 
Jam. V. 13 ; with dat. of pers. to or in 
honour ©/"whora, Rom. xv. 9, tw ouoixaTi 
creu xj/aXu), Eph. v. 19 ; with dat. of man- 
ner, 1 Cor. xiv. 15, xj/aXu) tm TTi/EU/xart 
— Tto wl", where see my note. 

"^aXfxo^^ oO, 6, (xj/dXXco^) prop, the 
tivang of a bowstring, or the thrumming^ i. e. 
playing on stringed instruments ; in later 
usage, song^ prop, as accompanying stringed 
instruments, Jos. Ant, vi. ll, 3, tw \//^. 
Kai Tols vixvoL^ i^aoELV avTOv. Pint. 
Alex. M. 67, /uLovaa avpiyycov Kal 
avXwu, (jpdrj^ te kul ^aXfiov. In N. T. 
simply a song in praise of God : 1 ) gener. 
1 Cor. xiv. 26, EKaaTcs v/ulcou xp^uXiixdv 
£X€t, where see my note. Eph. v. 19, 
xf/aX/ULOi^ Kal v/ulvol^ Kal w^ats ttvev- 
imaTLKaU. Col. iii. 1 6. Sept. Ps. xcv. 2. 
2) spec, of the Psalms^ as a book of the 
O. T. Lu. XX. 42. Acts i. 20. xiii. 33. 

ao£\0o§,) a false brother^ said of pre- 
tended Christians, whether Jews or Gen- 
tiles, 2 Cor. xi. 26. Gal. ii. 4. 

Evdair 6(TToXo9^ ou, 6, {xj/Evdij^^ 
aTTocTToXo^^) a false apostle, a pretended 
minister of Christ, 2 Cor. xi. 13. 

"^EvSy^, E09 ous, 6, J7, adj. {\1/evoo- 
juLaL,) prop, false, lying. Acts vi. 13, pap- 
n-vpa^ xI/evSeT^. Rev. ii. 2. Sept. & Class. 
By impl. false towards God, icicked, un- 
godly. Rev. xxi. 8, £(oa>X.o\aTpat§ Kal 
Tract Tots i//. Sept. Prov. viii. 7, al. 

EvhohihacfKaXo'i, ov, 6, {xl/Evdri?, 
^itda-KaXo^,) a false teacJier, 2 Pet. ii. 1. 

'^EVOoXoyo^, ov, 6, hi adj. {\J/EvSi]?, 
Xlyct',) speaking falsely^ lyi^^y-) as oft. in 



later Class. ; in N. T. spoken of false 
teachers^ 1 Tim. iv. 2, kv vnroKpicTEi \I/ev- 
doXoyujv, of which expressions the former 
denotes a pretended show of extraordinary 
sanctity, and the latter adverts to the 
falsehood by which the claims in question 
were supported. 

^EvdojUidpTVp, UpOS, 6, 77, (i|a£U^^9, 

fxdpTvp,) a false witness, Matt. xxvi. 60. 
1 Cor. XV. 15. Plut. Rep. gerend. Prsec. 29. 

^EvdoimapTvpEOt}, f. i^crw, {xJ/evBo- 
fxdpTvp,) to bear false witness, intrans. 
with /car' avTou, Mk. xiv. 56, 57 : absol. 
fxn xp Evdofxap^vpncrri^, x. 19 ; also ov 
xl/EvdofxapTvp-no'EL^, Rom. xiii. 9. Jos. & 
Class. 

"^EvdofxaprvpLa, as, 77, (xj/Evdo- 
fxapTvpEuo,) false witness^ Matt. xv. 19. 
xxvi. 59, and Class. 

^£U^07rp0^77Tt75, ov, 6, {xJ/EvSl]^, 

7rpo<p7jTr]<s, ) a false prophet, i. e. ' one who 
falsely claims to speak under Divine in- 
spiration,' whether in foretelling future 
events, or in making known the will of 
God, Matt. vii. 15. Lu. vi. 26, et al. Sept, 

■^£u5o§, £os ous, TO, folsehood, either 
as said of speaking what is false, John viii, 
44, oTav XaXy to xI/ev6o^, or as applied 
to falsehood in word or deed, deceit and 
fraud of every kind, Eph. iv. 25, diroQipE- 
voL TO xl/Evdo?. Col. iii. 9. 2 Thess. ii, 9, 
GrifjLELOL's Kal TEpacri \p^EvSov^^ equiv. to 
\!/EvdE(Ti, 'false, deceiving;' ver. 11. 1 
John ii. 21, 27. So Sept. Ps. v. 7. Jer. 
V. 2, and Class. Also applied to denote 
wickedness, ungodliness, so ttolblv xJ/ev- 
COS, ' to practise wickedness,' Rev. xxi. 
27, TToiELV ^diXvyfxa Kal xJ/ev6o^. In 
Rom. i. 25, /uLET^XXaj^av TtjV aXvOEiav 
Tov 0. Ev Tco xl/. it signifies a pretended 
God, an idol. So Sept. of false gods, Jei 
iii. 10, al. 

■4^£u5oXptO'T09, ov, 6, {xj/BvS'n^ 

XptcTos,) a false Christ, a pretended Mes= 
siah. Matt. xxiv. 24, al. 

"^Evdio, f. a-u), {xl/Evoo9,) in Class, to 
speak falsely, intrans. to lie to any one. 
trans, to deceive, Tivd ; pass, to be de- 
ceived. Usually, and in N. T. only, depon. 
mid. xl/Ev6ojxaL, f. Exxropai, ta speak 
falsely,' to lie, deceive; absol. Matt. v. 11. 
Rom. ix. 1, uXvOeluv Xiyo), ev XpicTTw' 
ou xl/EvdopaL. 2 Cor. xi. 31. Gal. i. 20. 
1 Tim. ii. 7. Heb. vi. 18. Jam. iii. 14, 
KUTa Ttj^ d\7j6£tas, where see my note. 
1 John i. 6. Rev. iii. 9 ; with acc. of pers. 
Acts V. 3, v|/£uo-a(r6at cte to HuEV/iia to 
ayiov, ' that thou shouldst attempt to de- 
ceive the Holy Spirit, by a lie ;' the attempt ] 
liere, as often, standing for performance. ; 
Foil, by £t5 TLva, Col. iii. 9. Sept. Also;; 
with dat. of pers. to lie to any one, Acts 



475 



^ Y X 



V. 4» ovK ixlreva-u) dvdpwiroL'S, dWa tio 
e. So Sept. Ps. xviii. 45. 

svdtovv iJio^, ou, t>, r/, adj. (\|/£u^>/s, 
ovoua,) falsehj named or called, 1 Tim. 
vi. 20. So PlnJo do Vit. Mos. ii. p. 161,6, 
Tous \|A£i'6ft)i/ufxous, SC. 3'fous, and Class. 

"^^Eutr/ua, arcs, to, {xl/iv^ojjiaL,) false- 
hood : in N. T. by impl. falsehood to\vaid 
God, vnckedness^ ungodliness, Rom. iii. 7. 

^£y<rT7js, ou, o, (i/zeu^oj,) lit. 'one 
false,' a liar^ deceiver, John viii. 44, 45. 
1 Tim. i. 10. Tit. i. 12. 1 John i. 10. ii. 
4. iv. 20. V. 10, and Class. So of a false 
teacher, 1 John ii. 22 : also by impl. one 
false toward God, aii apostate, icicked per- 
\<on, Rom. iii. 4. So Sept. Prov. xix. 22. 
Ecclus. XV. 8. 

"^t]\a(pdu}, f. 770-60, {\l/d(jD, xj/dWco, 
xj/aXdacrw,) 1) prop, to touch, to feel, to 
handle ; trans. Lu. xxiv. 39, i^7j\a<pf?a-aT£ 
fie, and so oft. in Sept. & Class. Heb. xii. 
18, xp^7]Xa<p(x)iuiivcp opsL, for \l/t]\acpi]Tto, 
' the material and corporeal, or palpable 
and tangible mount.' 1 John i. 1. 2) fig. to 
feel after. Acts xvii. 27, ft apayg \l/i]Xa- 
(pVcreLav avTov /cat EvpoLtv. 

'^ri(pi'^co, f. L(T<x), (\l/Ti(po^,) 1) prop. 
to cou7it or reckon ivith pebbles, by drop- 
ping one for each object presenting itself, 
a primitive mode of calculation still pre- 
served among barbarous nations, 2) fig. 
in N. T. and Class, to calculate, and gener. 
to reckon, Anth acc. Lu. xiv. 28, i/r. t?;V 
oairdvYiv. Rev. xiii. 18. Ps. xlviii. 14, 
Aquil. and Class. 

S^rjcpo^, ov, 17, {xj/dco,) prop, a small 
stone, pebble ; also fig. in various senses, ac- 
cording to the uses to which the ancients 
applied pebbles, whether as counters for 
reckoning, or as dice or lots ; or, as most 
freq., the black and white pebbles used 
in voting : hence in N. T. 1) meton. a 
vote, suffrage. Acts xxvi. 10, dvaLpovfxi- 
vtov avTwv KUTriveyKa \l/i](pov. 2) a 
token, Rev. ii. 17, tm vlkwvtl daxrco uvtlo 
\]/r]<pov \tvKi]v, Kal kirl Trji/ xl/Tjcpou 
ovofxa Kaivov ysy paixfxhov, where see 
my note. 

'^idupLo-jULo^, ov, 6, (xf/LdvpiX^o),) a 
li'hispering ; in N. T. — secret slander, 
detraction, 2 Cor. xii. 20, as also in Plut. 
Conj. Praec. 40. 

^iOupto-Ttjs, ov, 6, {xl/idvpi'^w,) a 
ivhisperer, and by impl. a secret slanderer, 
detractor, Rom. i. 30, i/AtOu^io-Tas, Kanra- 
XdKov^. 

"^LXiov, ov, TO, (dim. of from 
\!/"ta),) a little hit or scrap of bread, meat, 
&c., found only in N. T. Matt. xv. 27. 

Lu. Xvi. 21, TtOl/ \pLyj.tt3V TUiV 'KLTTTOV- 

Twv diro T^5 Tf>a7r£^tjs tou irXovorLOV, 
' which were se7it from the rich man's table.' 



■^wX'/i V's, [xf/vxo)-,) prop, the breath, 
but usually, (so Eur. Or. 1163, kfxTcviiJDV 
T//I/ li/ux'/t',) and in N. T., the vital breath, 
through wliich the body lives, (so Aristot. de 
Mundo, kfxirvELTs. Kal xp^v^Vi^ '■^X'^'- 
^oia,) the principle of life manifested in the 
breath, the soul : 1. prop, the soul as the 
vital principle, the vital spirit. 1) gener. 
Lu. xii. 20, T7/I/ il/. (TOU diraLTovarLv diro 
aov. Acts XX. 10, ij xp^. avrov kv avTto 
kcTTLV : of beasts, &c. Rev. viii. 9, Td 
{KTLCTfxaTa) EXovTu xf/v^d^. 2) meton. 
life itself. Matt. vi. 25, fxr] /nspijuLvaTs ttj 
xl/vxV' ^ovvai Tt]u xjf. avTov 

XvTpov. Lu. vi. 9, al. ssepe : so TiQkvai 
tt/i/ ' to lay down one's life,'. John x. 
11, al. ; XriTiiv ty\v xj/, tlvo^, Matt. ii. 20. 
Rom. xi. 3. Comp. Sept. 1 Sam. xx. 
1. This use of xj/vxri for 5^rj, though 
doubtless derived from, is not peculiar to, 
the Hebr., being likewise found in Herod, 
and the other early Greek writers. Some- 
times \//-ux») refers not only to natural life, 
but also to life gener. as continued beyond 
the grave. Matt. x. 39. xvi. 25. John xii. 25, 

0 (piXCou Tr\v xj/, avTov diroXicrei avTt]i/, 
al. : so, as including the idea of life, or the 
spirit, both natural and eternal. Matt. xvi. 
26. 3) of a departed soid or ghost, separate 
from the body. Rev. vi. 9, Tas y^r. tCov 
kcrcpay/jLEvwv. xx. 4. Acts ii. 27. — II. 
SPEC, the soul, as the sentient principle, 
Lat. animus: 1) as the seat of the senses, 
desires, affections, appetites, and passions, 
i.e. the lower and animal nature common to 
man with the beasts ; distinguished, in the 
Pythagorean and Platonic philosophy, from 
the higher or rational nature, 6 vov^ or to 
TTVivfxa, belonging to man alone, — a 
distinction found in the Sept. and some- 
times in N. T. comp. irvEVfia II. II. ; so 

1 Th. v. 23, TO irvEVjULa Kal rj i/a. /cat to 
arCofia. Heb. iv. 12, aXP^ fiEpLcr/JLov 
xj/vxv^ 'TE KOL 'KVEVfxaTo^. Lu. i. 46 : as 
distinguished from hidvoia. Matt. xxii. 
37, al. ; from a-vvEcri<s, Mk. xii. 33. Sim- 
ply the sold, denoting the mind or feelings. 
Matt. xi. 29, Evpy\(rE<TE avditavaiv Ta7s 
xjf.v/uLwv. Lu. ii. 35. John X. 24. Acts xiv. 
2, 22. Heb. xii. 3. 1 Pet. i. 22 : so kv bXti n-y 
i//-. (Tov, ''with all one's soul,' Matt. xxii. 
37, and k^ oA.t]s t^§ xj/. aov, Mk. xii. 30. «/c 
xj/vxv^, 'from the soul,' heartily, Eph. vi. 
6. /xta x^/vxv ^Ti^cti, ' to be of one soul,' 
unanimous, Acts iv. 32. Phil. i. 27. Also 
to the soul, as the seat of the desires, affec- 
tions, appetites, &c. is often ascribed that 
which strictly belongs to the person him- 
self. Matt. xii. 18, ov Evd6Kr]<T£V rj xf/. 
fjLov, and Mk. xiv. 34, irEpiXvizo^ ka-Tiv 
v xj/. fxav. Lu. i. 46, al. Sept. and Class. 
2) gener. the soul, as distinguished from 
the body, ' the spiritual and immortal nature 
of man,' with all its higher and lower 
powers, its rational and animal faculties, 



476 



A I 



Matt. X. 28, fxrj (pofSEladE airo tuov — T?ji/ 
0£ ui] Bwafxtvuiv diroKTEluaL, 2 Cor. i. 
23/Heb. vi. 19. x. 39. James i. 21. v. 20. 
X Pet. i. 9, au)Ti]pLau xl/vxCov. ii. 11, 25. 
Wisd. i. 4, ]1. Jos. and Class. — III. me- 
lon, a sold, i. e. a liviiig thing, animal, in 
which there is ii (l/uxv-, ' life:' 1) gener. 
and from the Hebr. 1 Cor. xv. 45, tyi- 
VETO 6 7rfiu)T0<3 duOp. eh xj/vx^u ^wcrai/, 

1. e. 'a living sentient creature,' Rev. xvi. 
3. So Sept. Gen. i. 24. ii. 19, al. 2) 
oftener of man, a soul, = a living person, 
Trdcra xl/vxn^ ' every soul,' or person, Acts 
ii. 43. iii. 23. Rom. xiii. 1. So, in a peri- 
phrasis, TTaara dvdpthTTov, = ''every 
man,' Rom. ii. 9, & Sept. xl/vxd^ dvOpw- 
7r(x)u, 'men,' Lu. ix. 56. Sept. Lev. v. 1, 

2. \lrvxv dudnoj'Trov, Num. xix. 11, 13. 
Eurip. Phoen. 1315, (poviai \irux«t. So in 
enumerations, (by a use of xlrvx^'i- for per- 
sons, common to the Class, as well as 
Script, writers,) Acts ii. 41, li/uxat w<T£i 
TpLcrxiXiuL. vii. 14, al. Sept. oft. Eurip. 
Hel. 52, ^ux«i <5£ iroWaL. 3) spec, for 
a servant or slave, Rev. xviii. J 3, \!/vxd^ 
dvdpwTTcou, supposed by many learned ex- 
positors to denote ' female slaves,' in dis- 
tinction from the preced. crcofxaTa, or 'male 
slaves.' But the expression seems rather 
intended to intimate the iniquitous nature 
of this traffic, by the consideration that it 
is exercised on their fellow-men, beings 
endued, like themselves, with a rational 
soul. Comp. Ezek. xxvii. 13, evettopev- 
ovTO croL kv \lrvxaL<s dvdpcoTrcov : and 
Test. XII. Patr. p. 715, kXetttel^ xlrvx^^ 
EK y7]<5 '^^paioov. 

^ vxi-KO'i, T| , dv, adj . ( xj/vxri-, ) l^yeatJiing, 
animal, possessing animal life : 1) prop, 
of the BODY, orto/xa \lfvxi-Kov, an animal 
hody, having breath and animal life, ' that 
which is endued with faculties of sense, 
and has need of food, drink, and sleep for 
its support,' 1 Cor. xv. 44 bis, 46 ; opp. to 
cru)/xa TTvEvfxaTiKov. (see in YivEVfxaTi- 
K'os I.) Diod. Sic. i. 12, dLTLCs tov vi/u)(i- 
Kov to'l's Ja)0i9. 2) of the SOUL or mind, 
animal, natural, i. e. pertaining to the 
animal or natural mind and affections, 
swayed by the affections and passions of 
human nature, not under the influences of 
the Holy Spirit, opp. to TrvEvp.aTLKo's, see 
in \!/vxv II- I Cor. ii. 14, xl/vxi-f^o^ dvdp. 
ov CEXETai Ta Tou YlvEv/jL. TOV 9. Judc 
19, ylrvx^-f^oi. James iii. 15, 77 aocpia 
xiAuXi/c?;, i. e. animal or natural. Comp. 
xj/vxv ^nd so in the heathen Philosophers, 
e. g. Arr. Epict. iii. 7, 5, r? i)oovv v \l/vx'-f^'''h 

■^UXO^i £0? 0U5, TO, (iVuX^O 

John xviii. 18, otl \1/vxo^ r}i^- Acts xxviii. 
2. 2 Cor. xi. 27. Sept. and Class. 

"^vxpo^i «i ov. adj. {\l/vx<J^,) cold, 
cool, fresh, refreshing, e. gr. TroTtipLov 
xi/^i/Xpoy, i. e. vdaTcs, Matt. x. 42; an 



ellips. also found in the case of ^zp^Su 
and not unfreq. in the Class, wiiters. So 
Plut. de Garrul. 17, \a(3u)v \l/vxpou 
kvXlku. Fig. of one 'lukewarm and in- 
different' as to religion, neither wholly 
abandoning, nor fully observing it,' ovte 
xj/vxpo^ OVTE JfiCTos, Rcv. iii. 15, sq. 

^v'xu}, f. ugo), aor. 2, pass. eiZ/uyiji/, 
prop, to breathe, hloiv ; hence by impL 
with acc. ' to blow upon,' to cool, Sept. & 
Class. In N. T. pass, xl/vxofxai, f. 2. 
xj/vyva-ojULaL, to he cooled, to grow cold, fig. 
of affection, Matt. xxiv. 12, xlfvy^a-ETuL 

77 dyd'TTf} TOOV TToXXtOV. 

^(jofxi'^u), f. iVo), (xlrui/uLo^, a bit, mor- 
sel, from \l/a)U), cogn. with li/aco,) prop. 
' to break up any food into bits,' and from 
the adjunct, to distribute them, in order 
to feed any one therewith : so Sept. Tk 
rifxd's xI/co/jlleI Koia; Num. xi. 4. In N.T= 
Rom. xii. 20, xI/w/ilX^e uvtov : so Porphyr. 
de Abst. iii. 23, xl/ivfXLX^ova-L tu veottiu. 
Plut. Symp. V. prooem. at tu (3pi(pi] 
xlrcojULLX^ovcraL Tpocbot', with acc. of thing, 
1 Cor. xiii. 3, kdu xj/co/uLLoru) ttuutu tu 
virdpxovTa julov, 

00 fXLOv, ov, TO, (dimin. of \/AWyUo?, 
fr. xlfdio,) a bit, morsel, John xiii. 26, al. 
and Class. 

^oix^^-, f- (xIacoo), cogn. with xl/du),) 
to rub any thing in pieces with the hand, 
as ears of grain, Lu. vi. 1. 



"^Q, interject. 0! before the voc. in a 
direct address, i\Iatt. xv. 28, co yvvai. 
Mk. ix. 19. Lu. ix. 41, al. ssep. Sept. and 
Class. Once in admiration, Rom. xi. 33, 
cJ (3ddo^ K.T.X. Sept. and Class. 

'^QoE, prop, a demonstr. adv. {oSs,) 
prop, in Class, thus, so, but in poetic and 
later usage, and in N. T. also, an adv. of 
place, HITHER, or here, i. e to or in this 
place, viz. I. hither, to this place, after 
verbs of motion. Matt. viii. 29, tJ/YOes 
oocE. xiv. 18, et al. k'cos wSe, Lu. xxiii. 5. 
So Sept. & Class. — II. here, in this place, 
after verbs implying rest and the like : 1) 
prop. Matt. xii. 6, otl tov upou /jlel^cdv 
ECTTLv wcE, vcr. 41, 42, al. saepe. Sept. & 
Class. Ta (joOE, the things done hei^e, mean- 
ing ' the present state of his affairs,' Col. 
iv. 9. 2) fig. herein, in this thing. Rev. 
xiii. 10, 18. xiv. 12, al. 

'Qloj), i.e. (jpoj), 779, 77, (contr. for aot- 
dh, fr. asioo),) an ode, song, e. gr. in praise 
of God, Eph. V. 19. Col. iii. 16. Rev. v. 
9, al. Sept. Jos. and Class. 

'Qolu, Ivo^, 77, (kindr. with 6ovvr\,) a 
late form of the nom., instead of the usual 



a A I 

>i w«5i9, Ti;o9, a paiu^ p((fi(J, f^s of a woman 
in travail : 1) pkop. 1 Th. v. 3, o\fO<)o9, 
■oa-TTip h ijd^LV T?7 kvyacTTpL ixooary. Sept. 
md Class. 2) fig. severe -pain or sorro2i\ 
Matt. xxiv. 8. Mk. xiii. 9, TuvTa apx'/ 
iSiVwi/, and Sept. So Acts ii. 24, Xucras 
ras woii/a? tov ^uvctTov^ in allusion to 
Ps. xviii. 5, Nvherc Sept. Molvf.^ ^avdrov. 
So also Job xxxix. 2, Sept. dodlva^ avTu)v 
E/\u(ras. The phrase \vtLv uy^lva's occurs 
also in Class, e. gr. Lycophr. Cass. 1198, 
cr(pk oj^Xvas k^iXvorz XaOpaia^ yovrj^^ in 
which passages there is allusion to such 
pains, as Jioldimi the person tight around. 
'JEA. H. An. xii. 5, tous Tcoy cod'ii/vov \v- 

'Qdl'vco^ f. ii'oj, (to^t?,) prop, to be in 
throes., to travail in childbirth, absol. Rev. 
xii. 2, Eu yacTTot 'iyovixa /cpa^at, co^t- 
voucra. Gal.iv. 27, rj ouk oo^ivovfra^ 'thou 
that travailedst not,' art barren. Sept. and 
Class. Fig. of a Christian teacher, with 
ace. to travail with any one, i. e. to be in 
spiritual birth, Gal, iv. 19, where see my 
note, and comp. Tswdu) I. 1. 

''Q/zo?, ou, 6, (prob. fr. obsol. otto, for 
^fc'p^i) ^ shoidder., Matt, xxiii. 4. Lu. xv. 
.5. Sept. and Class. 

'QuiofiaL, f. ncroixaL., depon. mid. aor. 
1. (tivi](rdfxi]v^ to buy purchase., with ace. 
of thing, and gen. of price, Acts vii. 16, w 
uovYiaaTo 'A(3pad/ix Tifxtj? dpyvpiou^ and 
oft. in Class. Luc. D. Mort. iv. 1, rcov 
'iriuTE {opaxpLcov) (tivrjcrdfxrjv, Kal Tpoirui- 
Ttjoa 6vo d(3o\(joi/. 

'Qoz/, ou, TO, ovum, an egg., Lu. xi. 12. 
Sept. and Class. 

"Qpa, as, 17, ^om, a time., or season., *a 
definite space or division of time,' as 
marked by natural or conventional limits ; 
e. gr. a season of the year., dipa tov ^l- 
pous or )(£i/xa)fo§, or tov eVous. In N. T. 
used of shorter intervals, a time., (and 
sometimes, like /cccipos, a point of time,) 
season, hour., viz. I. of the day generally, 
day-time, day ; Matt. xiv. 15, ?? uipa ridt] 
'iraptjXde. Mk. vi. 35, rjdr] dipa'S TroXXrj^ 
yeuofxivn^, (so oft. in Class, as Pol. v. 8, 
3, 7ro\Xfj9 wpa?,) Mk. xi. 11, 6x1/ ia^ vSt] 
ovarr]^ T-Tf^ wpas. — II. of a definite jt9ar^ or 
division of the day ; in earlier writers used 
only of the greater divisions, as morning, 
noon, evening, night, tco?, pLEo-rnx^pLa, 
kcnripa, uv^ : or also morning, noon, and 
evening, opOpo?, KULpd's p.&crtjiuifSpLi/d's, k. 
SeiXn/d^ or 'icrirepo's : in N. T. an hour, 
one of the 12 equal parts into which the 
natural day, and also the night, were 
divided : 1) prop, and gener. John xi. 9, 
ov\L dcoSEKO. siaiu wpai ttj^ vfxipa^ ; al. 
saep. Acts x. 30, fxixpt- raurr]? Tij^ copas. 
Rev. ix. 15. Dat. with h of time i.vhen. 
Matt. viii. 13, ii' Ty dina sKEivr], ' at that 
very instant.' xxiv. 50, iu uipa (j ob yivw- 



a-KEi. John iv. 53 ; acc. of time hoiv long. 
Matt. XX. 12, fi'iau wpav iiroi^ffuv. Acts 
xix. 34. 2) fig. for a short time ; acc. 
fxiav (opav. Rev. xvii. 12; dat. pllo. uipa, 
xviii. 10, 1(), 19; Trpos aipav, John v. 35, 
al. — III. meton. and gener. .hour, time, 
period, as said of any definite point or 
space of time: 1) with adjuncts, e. gr. 
an adj. or pron. aTro t^9 copas Iks'ivti^, 
Matt. ix. 22 ; dat. of time ivhen, avTy t?; 
wpa, Lu. ii. 38. 'TTo'ia uipa. Matt. xxiv. 
42, fi wpa, ver. 44. So also Lu. vii. 21, & 
x. 2l, Ev avTy Tij wpa. Matt. x. 19, and 
xxiv. 36, TTEpL dk Tr}<5 vjuLapa^ EKELvrj^ Kai 
Tr]§ copas : so Rev. iii. 3. 1 Cor. iv. 11, 
axP'- '^V^ apTi ujpa's. With an adv. or 
relat. John iv. 21. So with 'iva, xii. 23. 
xiii, 1. Foil, by gen. of thing to be done 
or to happen, Lu. i. 10. xiv. 17, tt? copa 
TOV dELirvov, al. Foil, by gen. of pers, 
one''s time, ' that appointed to him,' in 
which he is to do or sufter, Lu. xxii. 53. 
John xvi. 21 ; elsewh. of Christ, John ii. 
4, al. 2) simply the time, i. e. spoken of, 
or otherwise understood, Matt. xxvi. 45, 
vyy LKEv v dipa. Mk. xiv. 41. John xvi. 
4. 1 John ii. 18. Xen. Mem. ii. 1, 2. 
Emphat. John xvii. 1, 

'Qpalos, aia, alov, adj. (copa,) prop. 
timely, seasonable, 2i% said of fruits in season ; 
also fig. of that period of life, when the body 
is at its cLKfjir], in the full bloom, and con- 
sequently beauty, of manhood. So tjopa. 
vXiKLa^, Thuc. vi. 34. jEschin. p. 19, 4, 
kuXXel Kai wpor. Hence said of persons, 
comely, beautifid, Sept. Gen. ii. 9. iii. 6, 
and Class, e. gr. Lucian, D. Deor. v. 5. 
Plut. Cat.^ Maj. 4. Theocr. Id. i. 109, 
oipaZo? x^'Q^Mvi's. Xen. Mem. i. 3, 10. 
In N. T. only of things. Matt, xxiii. 27, 
TafpoL^—oLTLVE^ e^ooOev fXEv (paivovTai 
(hpaloL. Rom. x. 15. Said of a gate of 
the Temple, Acts iii. 2, Ti)v ^vpav tov 
LEpov Ti]u XEyofxEv\]v 'Qpaiav. ver. 10, 
ETTL Ty lapaia irvXy. See my note. 

'Q pv 0 fxaL, f, vcrojxaL, depon. mid, to 
roar, hold, as beasts, from rage or hunger ; 
e. gr. a lion, 1 Pet. v. 8, cJs Ximv copvo- 
lxEvo<3, Sept. and Class. 

'Q?, relat. adv. (o§,) correl. to ttcos, 
TW9, prop, in which way, in what way, 
and hence gener. as, so as, how : A) in 
COMPARISONS. \) prop. & fully, with a 
corresponding demonstr. adv. as outo)?, or 
the like, either preceding or following, e. g. 
ovT(x3<s — a;?, so — as, Mk. iv. 26, John vii. 
46. 0)9 — ovTio<5, as — so. Acts viii. 32. 
Rom. V. 15, 18 : so Io-o9 — 609, Acts xi. 17. 
6/uLOLU)<s Kui w9, Lu. xvii, 28 ; also 0)9 — 
Kal, Matt. vi. 10, 609 iu oupaif(Z Kai kirl 
Trj9 yri<5. Acts vii. 51. Gal. i. 9. More 
freq. outw9 is oi^iitted, and then ws may 
often be rendered so as, or simply as. Matt, 
vi. 29. X. 25. Mk. i. 22. Lu. vi. 40. xxi. 



477 



478 



■02 E 



35. Rom, iv. 17. v. 16. 2) ge?ier. before 
a noun or adj. in the nomin. or acc. «5, 
like as, like, Matt. x. ] 6, (ppovi/jLOL ol 
6(l)Ei9, Kai cLKipaioL (JO'S al irepLarTspaL^ 
xiii. 43, al. Acts xi. 5. Ja, i. 10. Rev. i. 14, 
oft. By Heb. a noun preceded by cos often 
denotes something like itself, Engl, as it ivere. 
Rev. iv. 6, in lat. edd. kvcSiTLov tov dpoi/ov 
COS ddXaarcra vaXivn. viii. 8. ix. 7. xv. 2. 
acc. xix. 1. B) implying quality or cha- 
racter : I. before participles referring to a 
preceding noun, and expressing a quality 
or circumstance belonging to that noun, 
either real or supposed, as, as if, as 
though: 1) before a nom. as referring to 
a preceding subject, Lu. xvi. 1, ovto^ 
^lEfBXvdri avTw cos dLaarKopTTL^oDV k,t.\. 
Acts xxiii. 20, al. ssepe. 2) before gen. re- 
ferring to a preceding noun, Heb. xii. 27, 
8ri\oi TU)V (Ta\f.vofxivii3V Ty]v jULETddEoriu, 
cos TTETroLrjjuLivcou : with a gen. absol. 1 
Cor. iv. 18. 2 Cor. v. 20, al. 3) before dat. 
referring to a preceding noun, Acts iii. 12, 

rJIHLV TL drEVlX^STE cos TTETTOL-qKOCn TOV 

TTEpLTraTEiv avTov ; 1 Pet. ii. 14. 4) 
before acc. referring to a preceding object, 
Acts xxiii. 15, Trpds vixd<5 cos fXEWovTa<s 
^LajLvmcTKEiv. Rom. vi. 13. Rev. v. 6. — 
II. before a suhst. or adj. either as predi- 
cate or object, expressing a quality or cir- 
cumstance known, or supposed to belong 
to a preceding noun, as, as if, as though, 
where the partic. coi/, ovara, ov, may always 
be supplied : 1) nom. as referring to a pre- 
ceding subject, 2 Cor. vi. 4, (tvvl(ttu)vte^ 
£avTov£ cos Qeou ^lolkovol. xi. 15. Eph. v. 
1, 8, al. 2) gen, as referring to a preceding 
noun, 1 Pet. ii. 12, u/xcoy cos KaKoiroLcou. 
iii. 16. 3) dat. as referring to a preceding 
nouu, 1 Cor. iii. 1, vfxiu cos irvEVfxaTiKo'i'i, 
al. 4) acGus. as referring to another object. 
Matt. xiv. 5, cos irpo^riT^v avrov eIxov. 
Lu. vi. 22. Rom. i. 21, al.— III. before 
prepositions with their cases, in the same 
manner as before participles, see above in 
I. 1) with did, 2 Th. ii. 2, fxriTE 8l ettl- 
crTo\ri<s cos hfJiuiV, sc. ygypa/u^iyr^s : 
with iv, John vii. 10 ; with ek, Rom. ix. 

32, al. ; with kitl. Gal, iii. 16. — IV. before 
numerals, — as it ivere, about, marking a 
supposed or conjectural number, Mk. v. 
13, tjo-ai/ ft)S ^LCfxiXioL. viii. 9. Lu. ii. 37. 
Jolm i. 40, al. — V. intens. how! how 
very ! how much ! Lat. quam ! expressing 
admiration ; in N. T.^ only before adjec- 
tives, Rom. X. 15, cos (jopaXoi ol ttSSe^ 
K.T.X. ' how beautiful the feet,' &c. xi. 

33. C) implying manner, before a de- 
pendent clause qualifying or defining the 
action of a preceding verb. 1) gener. as, 
according as, Matt. i. 24, ETroinarEv cos 
^pocTETa^EV avT(a 6 ayytXos. viii. 13. 
Rom. xii. 3, al. ' 2) before a minor or 
parenthetic clause, which then serves to 
modify or restrict the general proposition, 



Matt, xxvii. 65, vTrdyETE, dtrcpaXicTaaQs. 
60S oioaTE. Mk. iv. 27. x. 1. Lu. iii. 23, 
et al. 3) before a superlative, intens., 
like Latin quam: so cos Tccxio'Tra, 'as 
speedily as possible,' Acts xvii. 15. — 
D) before dependent clauses, expressing 
the object or reference of a preceding verb 
or word, the nature of the action, the cir- 
cumstances under which it takes place, 
and the like, in what way, how, as^ &c. 
often equiv. to a conjunction. I. gener. 
how, equiv. to ottcos I. ; with the indie, 
aor. Mk. xii. 26, ovk dviyvoiTE — cos 
eIttev avTM 6 Geos. Lu. viii. 47, al. — 
II. before an objective clause in a stricter 
sense, hoiv, how that, that, with the indie, 
equiv. to ort. Acts x. 28, u/xsts ETrlaTa- 
(tOe cos ddiixLTov ECTTLV, vcr. 38. Rom. 
i. 9, al. — III. before a clause expressing 
end or purpose, as that, so that, like iVa, 
OTTCOS ; foil, by infin. expressing the pur- 
pose of a preceding verb, so as to, in order 
to. Acts XX. 24, cos TgA-gtcotrat tov SpojULOv 
jULOV fXETCL papa's : also cos tVos EiTrElv, 
' so to speak,' Heb. vii. 9. — IV. before a 
clause expressing result or consequence, 
so as that, so thai, like wctte ; with indie. 
Heb. iii. Il,c6s M^iocra iv Ttj opyT] fxov.— 
V. before a clause expressing a cause or 
reason, cits, that, equiv. to since, because, 
like f TTEt, oTL ; 2 Tim. i. 3, cos d^idXsiTr- 
Tov e'x^ UTEpL arov fxvEiav. — VI. be- 
fore a clause implying time, as, when, 
like iiTEL : 1) gener. wlien, equiv. to in 
that, ivhile, with indie. Matt, xxviii. 9, cos 
iiropEVOVTO dirayjEXXai. Lu. i. 41, al. 
ssepe. 2) also when, equiv. to after that, 
postquam, with indie. Lu. i. 23, iyivETo 
cos iTTXr}(TQr](rav al -n/mEpai — dirrjXdEV, ii. 
15, al. ssepe : with tote, John vii. 10. 
3) cos dv, whensoever, as soon as, with 
subj. aor. 1 Cor. xi. 34. Phil. ii. 23; cos 
idv, Rom. xv. 24. 

^Qcravvd, interj. hosanna ! Heb. prop. 
' save now, l3e now propitious !' a word of 
joyful acclamation, absol. Matt. xxi. 9, 
Mk. xi. 9. 

'QcrauTws, adv. (cos,auTa)S,fr. auTos,) 
in the same way, likewise. Matt. xx. 5, 
iiroU](TEv co(rauTcos. xxi. 30, 36. Mk. xii. 
21, al. and Class. 

'Qo-€t, = cos EL, as if, as though; in 
N. T. only before a noun or adject. 1) in 
comparisons, as if as it were, equiv. to as, 
like as. Matt. ix. 36, ippifxnivoL wcteI irpo- 
jSaTa fjitj 'iypvTa Troifxiva. Mk. ix. 26. 
Heb. i. 12 : ellipt. Matt. iii. 16, eI^e to 
TLvEVfia TOV 0£ou KaTa^aXvov axrsl TTspi- 
OTTEpdv, sc. KaTafBaivouarav. Mk. i. 10. 
John i. 32. Sept. and Class. 2) before 
words of number and measure, as if, as it 
were, about ; before numerals. Matt. xiv. 
21, avdpE9 wcTEL irivTaKLiTxiXioL, Lu. i. 



4 



79 



E 



56. iii. 23. John iv. G. Acts iv. 4; of 
measure, Lu. xxii. 41. 

"Qo-TTEf), adv. i. c. strengthened by 
enclit. TTE/o, prop, wliolli/ as, just as^ gcncr. 
as^ like as, <Slc. : 1 ) prop, as introducing 
a comparison, follo^vcd by a corresponding 
clause ^vith outcos or the like, Matt. xii. 
40. Rom. V. 19, 21. Ja. ii. 26, al. and 
Class. 2) gener. and without outcos cor- 
responding. Matt. V. 48. XX. 28. xxv. 32. 
Acts ii. 2. iii. 17, al. and Class. 

'Q(r7r£/)€t, adv. (uxyrrsp. si,) just as 
if, as it ivere^ 1 Cor. xv. 8, and Class. 

"Qo"r €, i. e. a>9, strengthened by enclit. 
T£, serving to connect more closely a fol- 
lowing clause with the preceding; prop, 
im adv. like w?, wo-Trfp, used in com- 
pai'isons, as, like as, but gener. and in 
N. T. a conj. so as that, so that, before a 
clause expressing an event, result, conse- 
quence, whether real or supposed, and fol- 
lowed usually by an infin. but also by the 
indie. I. foil, by infin. with acc. expr. or 
impl. 1) fully, preceded by a demonstr. 
as ouTws, TOZOUT09, &c. Acts xiv. 1, 
XaXtjarai oOtcos wcttz iriorTzvcraL—'TroX.v 
irXijdo^. Matt. XV. 33, and Class. 2) 
simply, without a preceding demonstr. 
Matt. viii. 24, wctte to irXoTov KaXvir- 
TEffdat vird Tu)v Kv/jLariav. Mk. i. 27, 45. 
Rom. vii. 6, oft. and Class. — II. foil, by 
indicat., with outojs preceding, John iii. 
16, oy'ttos Tjyd'TrrjarEv 6 9fos tov «:o(r/uoi/, 



uicTTE Tov Tlov avTov eSu)Keu, K.nr.X. and 
Chiss. — III. often at the beginning of a 
sentence, with the indie, or imperat., as 
an emphatic illative particle, so that, cquW. 
to consequently, therc/'ure, n-livrcfore ; with 
indie. Matt. xii. 12, cocrTe 'i^tcrTL toI^.' 
(rd(3(iaaL kuXu)^ itoleIv. Mk. ii. 28. x. 8. 
Rom. vii. 12, al. ; with imperat. 1 Cor. iii. 
21. Phil. ii. 12, al. and Class. 

Qtlov, ov,t6, (dimin. of ous,) an ear. 
Matt. xxvi. 51. Lu. xxii. 51, al. and later 
Class. 

'QcpiXEia, a's, v, {uxpEXia),) prop, a 
furthering, help ; in N. T. use, profit, ad- 
vantage, Rom. iii. 1, Tts h wcpiXELa tt/s 
TTEpLTOfxi]^', Jude 16, and Class. 

'QcpEXico, f. va-ct), {o<PeXo9,) to fur- 
ther, help, profit, be of use : 1 ) act. absol. 
Rom. ii. 25, TrEpLroiuii vocPeXel : with 
double acc. of person and neut. t'i, ovtiv. 
Mk. viii. 36, tI wcPeXvcel avdpcoTrov ; 
I Cor. xiv. 6. Gal. v. 2 : acc. ovdkv sim- 
ply. Matt, xxvii. 24. John vi. 63. xii. 19 ; 
most of these constructions occ. in Sept. & 
Class. 2) mid. or pass, to be profited, to 
have advantage, with acc. neut. tl, ovSev, 
Hi-ndiv, Matt. xvi. 26, tl odcPeXeltul dv- 
dpcoTTo^ ; Mk. v. 26 : foil, by ek, with neut. 
o, Matt. XV. 5 ; by h, Heb. xiii. 9. 

'Q^£\i/uo§, ov, 6, rj, adj. (wc^gXtto,) 
profitable, useful ; with tt/oo's tl, 1 Tim. 
iv. 8. 2 Tim. iii. 16; with dat. Tit. iii. 8. 



THE END. 



London: 

GILBERT & RIVINGTON, PRINTERS, 

ST. John's square. 




